PTS Pali to English Dictionary

This version of the PTS Dictionary is (ultimately) derived from the digitized on-line version which is based on the 1921 Rhys Davids and Stede edition.

It was extracted from Digital Pali Reader by Ven. Nandiya, and some additional corrections and improvements have been made. Even a cursory glance will reveal that many errors remain. The Greek roots, almost unreadable even in the paper edition, are ascii-garbage, and have been removed. Some characters have been incorrectly digitized, but this is not common. If in doubt, check the paper edition.

We have spelled in full most of the abbreviated grammatical terms as found in the original text on pages xiii–xiv. These are space-saving shortcuts that serve no purpose in a digital edition other than to obscure the meaning. Given the vast number of such abbreviations, there will no doubt be errors remaining, and if you find any we would appreciate it if you would let us know.

In almost all cases we have simply expanded the terms as given, but note the following.

As for the text abbreviations, these have been converted to the system as used on SuttaCentral.

This dictionary has been released by the Pali Text Society under Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial 3.0 licence (CC BY-NC 3.0). (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/3.0/)

A

A-1
  1. The preposition ā shortened before double consonants, as akkosati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). Best to be classed here is the a- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus
    • anantaka (for ā-nantaka = nantaka Vv 807
    • amajjapa (for ā-majjapa = majjapa Ja vi.328
    • amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya Ja vi.518
    • apassato (= passantassa) Ja vi.552
A-2
an- before vowels
  1. negative participle prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1) whether participle, absolutive, gerundive or infinitive; (3) finite verbal forms. In compound with words having originally two initial consonants the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e.g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na-, nir- and vi-. Often we find it opposed to sa-. Verbal negatives which occur in specific verbal function will be enumerated separately, while examples of negative formation of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the negative involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding ‣Concerning the combining & contrasting (originally negative) -a-(ā) in reduplicated formations like bhavā-bhava see ā4
Vedic a-, an, Indogermanic *n gradation form to *ne ‣See na2. Latin *en-, in-, Gothic, Old High German & Anglo-Saxon un-, Old Irish an-, in-
A-3
  1. the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in preterite, aorist & conditional tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose ‣See forms under each verb. ‣Cp. also ajja. Identical with this a- is the a- which functions as base of some pronomial forms like ato, attha, asu etc.‣
Vedic a-; Indogermanic *e locative of pronoun stem ‣Cp. ayaṁ, originally a deictic adverb with specific reference to the past, cp. Sanskrit sma. Also in Latin equidem, enim
A-4
  1. the sound a a-kāra Ja vi.328 Ja vi.552 Vv-a 279 Vv-a 307 Vv-a 311
Aṁsa1
  1. the shoulder AN v.110 Snp 609
    • aṁse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder Ja i.9
  2. a part (literally side) ‣Cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and explanation of aṁsa as koṭṭhāsa at DN-a i.312
    • atīt’aṁse in former times, formerly DN ii.224 Thag 2, 314
    • mettaṁsa sharing friendship (with) AN iv.151 = Iti 22 = Ja iv.71 In which connection Mil 402 reads ahiṁsā. Note variant reading mettāsa for mettaṁsa at Iti 22
    • disjunctive ekena aṁsena … ekena aṁsena on the one hand (side) … on the other, partly … partly AN i.61 From this:
      • ekaṁsa adjective on the one hand (only) i.e. incomplete. Opposite ubhayaṁsa or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt. Opposite dvidhā ‣See ekaṁsa
    • paccaṁsena according to each one’s share AN iii.38
    • puṭaṁsena with a knapsack for provisions DN i.117 AN ii.183 ‣Cp. DN-a i.288 with variant reading puṭosena at both passages
  • ˚kūṭa “shoulder prominence”, the shoulder Vin iii.127 Dhp-a iii.214 Dhp-a iv.136 Vv-a 121
  • ˚vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap. Mostly combined with kāyabandhana. variant readings ˚vaddhaka, ˚bandhaka Vin i.204 Text ˚bandhaka Vin ii.114 -ddh- Vin iv.170 -ddh- Vv 3340 Text ˚bandhana Commentary variant reading ˚vaṭṭaka Dhp-a iii.452
Vedic aṁsa; cp. Latin umerus, Goth ams, Armenian us
Aṁsa2
  1. point, corner, edge. Frequently in combination with numerals ‣ e.g. catur˚ “four-cornered”, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚, soḷas˚ etc. All at Dhs 617 ‣Cp. Dhs-a 317
    • In connection with a Vimāna, āyat˚ with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415
    • As part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 = kubbara-phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima-aṁsā Vv-a 265
‣See next
Aṁsi
feminine
  1. a corner, edge = aṁsa2 Vv 782 = aṁsa-bhāga Vv-a 303
cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Latin ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under ācer
Aṁsu
  1. a thread Vin iii.224
    • ˚mālin, sun Sāsv 1
cp. Sanskrit aṁśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light
Akaṭa
adjective
  1. not made, not artificial, natural
    • ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206
a + kaṭa
Akampiyatta
neuter
  1. the condition of not being shaken, stableness Mil 354
abstract from akampiya, gerundive of a + kampati
Akalu
  1. cp. agalu an ointment
    • Ja iv.440 akaluñ candanañca (Burmese variant aggaluṁ)
    • Commentary explains as kālākaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment
    • Ja vi.144 ˚candana-vilitta (Burmese variant aggalu˚)
    • Mil 338 ˚tagara-tālīsaka-lohita-candana
Akāca
adjective
  1. pure, flawless, clear DN ii.244 Snp 476 Ja v.203
a + kāca
Akācin
adjective
  1. = akāca Vv 601
Akāsiya
adjective-noun
  1. “not from the Kāsī-country” (?) Official name of certain tax-gatherers in the king’s service Ja vi.212 Commentary akāsiya-saṅkhātā rāja-purisā
a + kāsika?
Akiccakāra
adjective
  1. not doing one’s duty, doing what ought not to be done AN ii.67 Dhp 292 Mil 66 DN-a i.296
  2. ineffective (of medicine) Mil 151
a + kicca + kāra
Akiriya
adjective
  1. not practical, unwise, foolish Ja iii.530 Commentary ˚rūpa = akattabba-rūpa Mil 250
a + kiriya
Akilāsu
adjective
  1. not lazy; diligent, active, untiring SN i.47 SN v.162 Ja i.109 Mil 382
a + kilāsu
Akissava
  1. at SN i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana
Akutobhaya
adjective
  1. ‣See ku˚
Akuppa
adjective
  1. not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast safe Vin i.11
    • akuppā me ceto-vimutti = SN ii.239 Vin ii.69 Vin iv.214 DN iii.273 MN i.205 MN i.298 SN ii.171 AN iii.119 AN iii.198 Mil 361
a + kuppa, gerundive of kup, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit akopya Mvu iii.200
Akuppatā
feminine
  1. “state of not being shaken”, surety, safety. Epithet of Nibbāna Thag 1, 364
abstract from last
Akka
  1. name of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow-wort MN i.429
  • ˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant
  • ˚nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 variant readings agga & akkha˚
  • ˚vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 ‣Cp. akkha-vāṭa
cp. Sanskrit arka
Akkanta
  1. stepped upon, mounted on AN i.8 Ja i.71 Mil 152 Dhp-a i.200
past participle of akkamati
Akkandati
  1. to lament, wail, cry SN iv.206
ā + kandati, krand
Akkamana
neuter
  1. going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to Ja i.62
cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ākramaṇa Jtm 3158
Akkamati
  1. to tread upon, to approach, attack Ja i.7 Ja i.279 Thag-a 9
    • to rise Vin iii.38
    • absolutive akkamma ‣Cp. Vin iii.72
    • past participle akkanta
ā + kamati, kram
Akkuṭṭha
adjective noun
  1. adjective being reviled, scolded, railed at Snp 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto Snp-a 364) Ja vi.187
  2. neuter reviling, scolding, swearing at.
    • In combination akkuṭṭha-vandita Snp 702 (= akkosa-vandana Snp-a 492) Thag 2, 388 Explanation at Thag-a 256 as above
past participle of akkosati
Akkula
adjective
  1. confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened
    • Ud 5 akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika
    • ‣See ākula
= ākula
Akkosa
  1. shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Snp 623 Mil 8 + paribhāsa Snp-a 492 Thag-a 256 Pv-a 243 Dhp-a ii.61
  • ˚vatthu always as dasa a˚-vatthūni, 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing Ja i.191 Snp-a 364 Snp-a 467 Dhp-a i.212 Dhp-a iv.2
ā + kruś = kruñc ‣See kuñca & koñca2 to sound, root kṛ ‣See note on gala
Akkosaka
adjective
  1. one who abuses, scolds or reviles + paribhāsaka AN ii.58 AN iii.252 AN iv.156 AN v.317 Pv-a 251
from previous
Akkosati
  1. to scold, swear at, abuse, revile Ja i.191 Ja ii.416 Ja iii.27 Dhp-a i.211 Dhp-a ii.44
    • Often combined with paribhāsati, e.g. Vin ii.296 Dhp-a iv.2 Pv-a 10
    • aorist akkocchi Dhp 3 Ja iii.212 = akkosi Dhp-a i.43
    • past participle akkuṭṭha
to krus ‣See akkosa
Akkha1
  1. the axle of a wheel DN ii.96 SN v.6 AN i.112 Ja i.109 Ja i.192
    • Ja v.155 akkhassa phalakaṁ yathā Commentary suvaṇṇaphalakaṁ viya i.e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle
    • Mil 27 + īsā + cakka
    • Mil 277 atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy Pv-a 277
    • akkhaṁ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle SN iv.177 Mil 367
  • ˚chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle SN i.57 Mil 67
  • ˚bhagga with a broken axle Ja v.433
  • ˚bhañjana the breaking of the axle Dhp-a i.375 Pv-a 277
Vedic akṣa, Avestan aša, Latin axis, Old High German etc. ahsa, English axle, to root of Latin ago, Sanskrit aj
Akkha2
  1. a die DN i.6 but explained at DN-a i.86 as ball-game, guḷakīḷa
    • SN i.149 = AN v.171 = Snp 659 appamatto ayaṁ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo
    • Ja i.379 kūṭ˚ a false player, sharper, cheat
    • anakkha one who is not a gambler Ja v.116 Commentary ajūtakara
    • ‣Cp. also accha3
  • ˚dassa (cp. Sanskrit akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i.e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47 Mil 114 Mil 327 Mil 343 dhamma-nagare
  • ˚dhutta one who has the vice of gambling DN ii.348 DN iii.183 MN iii.170 Snp 106 + itthidhutta & surādhutta
  • ˚vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling Ja iv.81 ? read akka-
Vedic akṣa, probably to akṣi & Latin oculus, “that which has eyes” i.e. a die. Cp. also Latin ālea game at dice (from* asclea?)
Akkha3
adjective (—˚)
  1. having eyes, with eyes Pv-a 39 Burmese manuscripts rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha. Probably akkhaṇa is connected with akkha
to akkhi
Akkhaka
  1. the collar-bone
    • adhakkhakaṁ Vin v.216 Vin iv.213
akkha1 + ka
Akkhaṇa
  1. wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune
    • There are 9 enumerated at DN iii.263
    • The usual set consists of 8 DN iii.287 Vv-a 193 Sdhp 4f.
    • ‣See also khaṇa
  • ˚vedhin adjective-noun a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i.e. without losing time, explained as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju) In various combinations
    • mostly as durepātin a˚ AN i.284 + mahato kāyassa padāletā
    • AN ii.170f. identical AN ii.202
    • AN iv.423 AN iv.425
    • Ja ii.91 Explained as either avirādhita-vedhī or akkhaṇaṁ vuccati vijju, one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning Ja iii.322
    • Ja iv.494 Commentary p. 497 explains aviraddha-vedhin vijju-ālokena vijjhana-samattha
    • In other combinations at Ja i.58 akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin
    • Ja v.129 the 4 kinds of archers: , vālavedhin, saddavedhin, saravedhin
  • In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find akṣuṇṇavedha at Divy 58 Divy 100 Divy 442 always with dūrevedha, where manuscripts however read akṣuṇa˚. Also at Lal 178 It is a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sanskrit kṣaṇa. See Divy Index, where translation is given as “an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark”. Schiefner gives “Streifschuss”.
a + khaṇa, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit akṣaṇa Avs i.291 = Avs i.332
Akkhata
adjective
  1. unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 Commentary niddosa
    • accusative akkhataṁ
    • adverb in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 paccāgamuṁ Pāṭaliputtaṁ akkhataṁ & Pv iv.111 nessāmi taṁ Pāṭaliputtaṁ akkhataṁ ‣See Vv-a 351 Pv-a 272
past participle of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1
Akkhaya
adjective
  1. not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Mil 3 Mil 21
a + khaya, kṣi
Akkhara
adjective
  1. constant, durable, lasting DN iii.86 As technical term for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning DN i.88 it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is explained by sikkhā DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 477
    • plural neuter akkharāni sounds, tones, words
    • citt’akkhara of a discourse suttanta having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) AN i.72 = AN iii.107 = SN ii.267
    • Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour vyañjana of poetry SN i.38
    • To know the context of the a˚ (the words of the texts) is characteristic of an Arahant Dhp 352 Commentary is ambiguous Dhp-a iv.70
    • Later: akkharaṁ a syllable or sound Pv-a 280 called sadda in next line
    • akkharāni an inscription Ja ii.90 Ja iv.7 = likhitāni written Ja iv.489 Ja vi.390 Ja vi.407
    • In Grammar: a letter Kaccāyana 1
  • ˚cintaka a grammarian or versifier Kp-a 17 Snp-a 16 Snp-a 23 Snp-a 321 cp. Snp-a 466 Pv-a 120
  • ˚pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology DN i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca Snp-a 447 = DN-a i.247) = AN iii.223 = Snp p. 105
  • ˚piṇḍa “word-ball”, i.e. sequence of words or sounds Dhp-a iv.70 = akkharānaṁ sannipāto Dhp 352
Vedic akṣara
Akkharikā
feminine
  1. a game. Recognising syllables written in the air or on one’s back DN i.7 Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 So explained at DN-a i.86 It may be translated “letter game”, but all Indian letters of that date were syllables
Akkhāta
adjective
  1. announced, proclaimed, told, shown AN i.34
    • dur˚ AN ii.195 AN iv.285 AN iv.322 AN v.265 AN v.283 Snp 172 Snp 276 Snp 595 Snp 718
past participle of akkhāti
Akkhātar
  1. one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller SN i.11 SN i.191 SN iii.66 Snp 167
Akkhāti
  1. to declare, announce, tell Snp 87 Snp 172
    • imperative akkhāhi Snp 988 Snp 1085
    • aorist akkhāsi Snp 251 Snp 504 Snp 1131 = ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465
    • future akkhissati Pv iv.163
    • conditional akkhissaṁ Snp 997 Ja vi.523
    • passive akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaṁ a˚ to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Mil 118 Mil 182 Also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit agram ākhyāyate Mvu iii.390
    • absolutive akkheyya to be pronounced SN i.11 Iti 53
    • past participle akkhāta
    • intensive or frequentative is ācikkhati
ā + khyā, hypothesized Indogermanic *seq; cp. Sanskrit ākhyāti, Latin inquam, Gothic saihvan, German sehen etc ‣See also akkhi & cakkhu
Akkhāna
neuter
  1. telling stories, recitation; tale, legend DN i.6 (= DN-a i.84 Bhārata-Rāmāyanādi) DN iii.183 MN i.503 MN iii.167 Sdhp 237
    • preaching, teaching Nd1 91
    • dhamm˚ the 5th Veda Ja v.450 vedam akkhānapañcamaṁ Commentary itihāsapañcamaṁ vedacatukkaṁ
Sanskrit ākhyāna. This spelling also occurs in Pali ‣
Akkhāyika
adjective
  1. relating, narrating Ja iii.535
    • lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature-lore DN i.8 Mil 316
Akkhāyin
adjective
  1. telling, relating, announcing SN ii.35 SN iii.7 Ja iii.105
Akkhi
neuter
  1. the eye
    • MN i.383 ubbhatehi akkhīhi
    • Snp 197 Snp 608 Ja i.223 Ja i.279 Ja v.77 Ja vi.336
    • Pv ii.926 akkhīni paggharanti, shed tears, cp. Pv-a 123
    • Vv-a 65 ˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim, cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti Dhp-a i.475 Dhp-a ii.26
    • Dhp-a iii.196 ˚īni ummīletvā, opening the eyes
    • Sdhp 103 Sdhp 380
    • In combination with sa- as sacchi & sakkhi
    • As adjective (—˚) = akkha3 (q.v.)
  • ˚añjana eye ointment, collyrium Dhp-a iii.354
  • ˚kūpa the socket of the eye Ja iv.407
  • ˚gaṇḍa eye-protuberance, i.e. eye-brow (?) Ja vi.504 for Text pamukha
  • ˚gūtha secretion from the eye Pv-a 198
  • ˚gūthaka identical Snp 197 dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta-ttaca-maṁsasadiso a˚-gūthako Snp-a 248
  • ˚chidda the eye-hole Snp-a 248
  • ˚dala the eye-lid DN-a i.194 Thag-a 259 Dhs-a 378
  • ˚pāta “fall of the eye” i.e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks adjective Pv-a 57
  • ˚pūra an eye-full, in akkhipūraṁ assuṁ (assu?) an eye full of tears Ja vi.191
  • ˚mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 Commentary ˚gūtha
  • ˚roga eye disease Dhp-a i.9
to *oks, an enlarged form of hypothesized Indogermanic *oq, cp. Sanskrit īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka, Latin oculus, Anglo-Saxon ēowan = English eye & wind-ow, Gothic augō ‣See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2, ikkhaṇika
Akkhika1
adjective
  1. having eyes, with eyes Thag 1, 960
    • añjan˚ with eyes anointed Dhp-a iv.98
    • aḍḍh˚ with half an eye, i.e. stealthily Sdhp 286
    • tamb˚ red-eyed
    • an˚ having no eyes Dhp-a i.11
Akkhika2
neuter
  1. the mesh of a net Ja i.208
    • ˚hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) MN i.383 Corresponding with aṇḍahāraka
cp. Sanskrit akṣa
Akkhitta1
  1. ‣See khitta
Akkhitta2
adjective
  1. hit, struck, thrown Ja iii.255 = ākaḍḍhita Commentary
Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ākṣipta Divy 363 past participle of ā + kṣip
Akkhin
adjective
  1. = akkhika Ja iii.190
    • mand˚ soft-eyed Vv 323
    • tamb˚ red-eyed Dhp-a i.11
Akkhobbha
adjective
  1. not to be shaken, imperturbable Mil 21
a + kṣubh ‣See khobha
Akkhobhana
adjective
  1. = akkhobbha Ja v.322 = khobhetun na sakkhā Commentary
Akkhohiṇī
feminine
  1. one of the highest numerals. 1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers Ja v.319 Ja vi.395
= akkhobhiṇī
Akhaṇḍaphulla
  1. ‣See khaṇḍa
Akhāta
adjective
  1. not dug ‣See khāta
Akhetta
  1. barren-soil ‣See khetta
    • In compound ˚ññu the negative belongs to the whole: “not knowing a good field (for alms)” Ja iv.371
Agati
  1. ‣See gati
    • ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing
    • DN iii.228 4: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚
    • AN ii.18f. Ja iv.402 Ja v.98 Ja v.510 Pv-a 161
Agada
  1. medicine, drug, counterpoison
    • Ja i.80 ˚harīṭaka
    • Mil 121 Mil 302 Mil 319 Mil 334 DN-a i.67 Dhp-a i.215
    • Pv-a 198 = osadhaṁ
Vedic agada, a + gada
Agaru
adjective
  1. not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru “if it does not inconvenience you, if you don’t mind” Vin i.25 Vin iv.17 DN i.51 Dhp-a i.39
    • Cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yadi te aguru Avs i.94 Avs i.229 Avs ii.90
  2. disrespectful, irreverent against genitive DN i.89 Snp p. 51
cp. Sanskrit aguru, a + garu
Agalu
  1. fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum
  • Vv 537 aggalu = Vv-a 237 agalugandha
  • Vv-a 158 + candana
  • cp. also Avs i.24 and ‣akalu
cp. Sanskrit aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebrew ahālīm (aloe)
Agāra
neuter
  1. House or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opposed to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant) ‣See anagāriyā

    Thus frequently in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder or layman (‣cp. gihin) with that of a religious wanderer pabbajita viz

    1. kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state” DN i.60 etc. ‣Cp. Nd2 172 ‣See also
      • SN i.185 agārasmā anagāriyaṁ nikkhanta
      • MN ii.55 agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā
      • Snp 274 Snp 805 ˚ṁ āvasati
      • and with pabbajita DN i.89 DN i.115 DN i.202 DN i.230 Pv ii.1317
    2. of a rājā cakkavattin compared with a sambuddha: sace agāraṁ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviṁ imaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena … sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaṁ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati “he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life”, the prophesy made for the infant Gotama DN ii.16 Snp 1002 Snp 1003
    • Further passages for agāra e.g. Vin i.15
    • DN i.102 Burmese variant agyāgāra, but DN-a i.270 explained as dānāgāra
    • AN i.156 AN i.281 AN ii.52f. Dhp 14 Dhp 140 Ja i.51 Ja i.56 Ja iii.392 Dīpavaṁsa i.36
  2. anagāra
    • adjective houseless, homeless; a mendicant. Opposite gahaṭṭha Snp 628 = Dhp 404 Snp 639 Snp 640 + paribbaje Pv ii.25 = anāvāsa Pv-a 80
    • neuter the homeless state = anagāriyā Snp 376 ‣See also agga2
  3. ˚āgāra. Owing to frequent occurrence of agāra at the end of compounds, of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. Of the compounds, the most common are
    • āgantuk˚ reception hall for strangers or guests SN iv.219 SN v.21
    • itth˚ lady’s bower SN i.58 SN i.89
    • kūṭ˚ a house with a peaked roof, or with gables SN ii.103 SN ii.263 SN iii.156 SN iv.186 SN v.43 AN i.230 AN iii.10 AN iii.364 AN iv.231 AN v.21
    • koṭṭh˚ storehouse granary DN i.134 cp. DN-a i.295 SN i.89
    • tiṇ˚ a house covered with grass SN iv.185 AN i.101
    • bhus˚ threshing shed, barn AN i.241
    • santh˚ a council hall DN i.91 DN ii.147 SN iv.182 SN v.453 AN ii.207 AN iv.179f.
    • suññ˚ an uninhabited shed; solitude SN v.89 SN v.157 SN v.310f. SN v.329f. AN i.241 variant reading for bhusâgāra AN iii.353 AN iv.139 AN iv.392 AN iv.437 AN v.88 AN v.109 AN v.323f.
Cp. Sanskrit agāra, probably with the a- of communion. ‣Cp. in meaning & etymology gaha1
Agāraka
neuter
  1. a small house, a cottage MN i.450 Ja vi.81
from agāra
Agārika
adjective
  1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚, etc. DN i.166 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206
  2. a householder, layman Vin i.17
    • feminine agārikā a housewife Vin i.272
    • ‣See also āgārika
Agārin
adjective
  1. one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Snp 376 Thag 1, 1009 Ja iii.234
    • feminine agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmimī Vv-a 225) Pv iii.43 identical Pv-a 194
from agāra
Agāriya
Agārika
  1. a layman MN i.504 ˚bhūta
    • Usually in negative anagāriyā feminine the homeless state = anagāraṁ as opposed to agāra (q.v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajita “gone out from the house into the homeless state” Vin i.15 MN i.16 MN ii.55 MN ii.75 AN i.49 DN iii.30f. DN iii.145f. Snp 274 Snp 1003 Pv ii.1316 DN-a i.112
Agga1
adjective noun
  1. adjective
    1. of time: the first, foremost Dīpavaṁsa iv.13 saṅgahaṁ first collection ‣See compounds
    2. of space: the highest, topmost Ja i.52 ˚sākhā
    3. of quality: illustrious, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232
      • agga-m-agga most excellent DN ii.4
      • a˚ sattassa Sambuddha the Buddha is the highest of all sentient beings SN i.29
      • lokassa Buddho aggo pavuccati “it is said that the Buddha is the best in the world” AN ii.17 = Pv iv.347
      • ˚pasāda highest confidence Iti 88 Iti 89
      • suddhi highest purity Snp 875
      • Often combined with seṭṭha, best e.g. DN ii.15 SN iii.83 SN iii.264
  2. neuter top, point
    1. literally: the top or tip. Nearly always —˚
      • ār˚ point of an awl Snp 625 Snp 631 Dhp 401
      • kus˚ tip of a blade of grass Dhp 70 Sdhp 349
      • tiṇ˚ identical Pv-a 241
      • dum˚ top of a tree Ja ii.155
      • dhaj˚ of a banner SN i.219
      • pabbat˚ of a mountain Sdhp 352
      • sākh˚ of a branch Pv-a 157 etc
    2. figuratively: the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place. Often to be translated as adjective the highest, best of all etc. SN ii.29 aggena aggassa patti hoti “only the best attain to the highest” Mhvs 7, 26 Usually as —˚
      • dum˚ the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 Cp. Vv-a 161
      • dhan˚ plenty DN iii.164
      • madhur˚ SN i.41 SN i.161 SN i.237
      • bhav˚ the best existence SN iii.83
      • rūp˚ extraordinary beauty Ja i.291
      • lābh˚ highest gain Ja iii.127
      • sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Snp 693 = sabbaññuta-ñāṇan Snp-a 489 the best part or quality of anything, in enumeration of the five “excellencies” of first-fruits panca aggāni viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi bhojan˚ Snp-a 270 (after which the name Pañcaggadāyaka)
      • sukh˚ perfect bliss Sdhp 243
      • Thus frequently in phrase aggaṁ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent DN i.124 SN iii.156 SN iii.264 AN ii.17 Tathāgato Iti 87 identical Nd2 517 appamādo Mil 183
  3. Cases as adverb
    • aggena instrumental in the beginning, beginning from, from (as preposition) by (identical)
      • aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference Vin ii.167
      • yadaggena at the moment when or from, following by tad eva “then” Vin ii.257 Cp. agge
      • bhikkh˚ from alms Vin ii.294
      • vass˚ by the number of years Vb 423
    • aggato ablative in the beginning
    • Snp 217 + majjhato, sesato
      • aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Thag 2, 386 Thag 2, 394
    • agge locative
      1. at the top AN ii.201 Opposite mūle, at the root Ja iv.156 identical
        • phusit˚ with flowers at the top Snp 233 supupphitaggasākhā Kp-a 192
        • ukkh˚ Ja ii.153
        • kūp˚Ja iii.126
      2. preposition from, after, since, usually in phrases.
        • yad˚ (following by tad˚) from what time, since what date DN i.152 DN ii.206
        • ajja-t-agge from this day, after today DN i.85 MN i.528 AN v.300 Snp p. 25 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adyāgrena Avs ii.13
        • at the end: bhattagge, after a meal Vin ii.212
  • ˚aṅgulī the main finger, i.e. index finger Ja vi.404
  • ˚āsana main seat DN-a i.267
  • ˚upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant DN ii.6
  • ˚kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80
  • ˚kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 = seṭṭh˚ Pv-a 199
  • ˚ñña recognized as primitive primeval DN iii.225 porāṇa + AN ii.27f. AN iv.246 Kvu 341
  • ˚danta one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha) Thag i.354
  • ˚dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39
  • ˚dvāra main door Ja i.114
  • ˚nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221
  • ˚nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229
  • ˚nikkhitta highly praised or famed Mil 343
  • ˚ nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dīpavaṁsa iv.5
  • ˚pakatimant of the highest character Ja v.351 = aggasabhāva
  • ˚patta having attained perfection DN iii.48f.
  • ˚pasāda the highest grace AN ii.34 Iti 87
  • ˚piṇḍa the best oblation or alms MN i.28 MN ii.204
  • ˚piṇḍika receiving the best oblations Ja vi.140
  • ˚puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Snp 684 Dhp-a ii.39 Sdhp 92 Sdhp 558
  • ˚purohita chief or prime minister Ja vi.391
  • ˚phala the highest or supreme fruit, i.e. Arahantship Ja i.148 Pv iv.188 Pv-a 230
  • ˚bīja having eggs from above. Opposite mūla˚, i.e. propagated by slips or cuttings DN i.5 DN-a i.81
  • ˚magga adjective having reached the top of the path, i.e. Arahantship Thag-a 20
  • ˚mahesi the king’s chief wife, queen-consort Ja i.262 Ja iii.187 Ja iii.393 Ja v.88 Dhp-a i.199 Pv-a 76
  • ˚rājā the chief king Ja vi.391 Mil 27
  • ˚vara most meritorious, best Dīpavaṁsa vi.68
  • ˚vāda the original doctrine = theravāda Dīpavaṁsa iv.13
  • ˚vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Thag 1, 1142
Vedic agra; cp. Avestan agrō first, Lithuanian agrs early
Agga2
neuter (only—˚)
  1. a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall
    • dān˚ a house of donation, i.e. a public or private house where alms are given Ja iii.470 Ja iv.379 Ja iv.403 Ja vi.487 Pv-a 121 Mil 2
    • salāk˚ a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office Ja i.123 Vv-a 75
a contracted form of agāra
Aggatā
feminine
  1. pre-eminence, prominence, superiority
    • Kvu 556 ˚ṁ gata
    • Dīpavaṁsa iv.1 guṇaggataṁ gatā
    • adjective mahaggata of great value or superiority DN i.80 DN iii.224
abstract of agga
Aggatta
neuter
  1. the state or condition of being the first, pre-eminence Pv-a 9 Pv-a 89
abstract of agga = Sanskrit agratvan
Aggavant
adjective
  1. occupying the first place, of great eminence AN i.70 AN i.243
Aggalu
  1. ‣See agalu
Aggaḷa
Aggaḷā
feminine also occasionally with l
  1. a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction
  2. a bolt or cross-bar Vin i.290

    • DN i.89 ˚ṁ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross-bar; a. = kavāṭa DN-a i.252
    • AN iv.359 identical
    • SN iv.290
    • AN i.101 = AN i.137 = AN iv.231 phusit˚ with fastened bolts, securely shut
    • Thag 1, 385 identical
    • Vin iv.47
    • Ja v.293 ˚ṁ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross-bar
  3. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset
    • Vin i.290 + tunna
    • Vin i.392 Buddhaghosa on MV viii.21, 1
    • Ja i.8 + tunna
    • Ja vi.71 ˚ṁ datvā
    • Vin iv.121
    • ˚dāna putting in a gusset Ja i.8
    • ˚phalaka the post or board, in which the cross-bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) MN iii.95
    • ˚vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120 Vin ii.148
    • ˚sūci bolting pin MN i.126
cp. Sanskrit argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc. as in Anglo-Saxon reced house, *aleg in Sanskrit rakṣati to protect, Anglo-Saxon ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Latin arceo, Orcus, Old High German rigil bolt
Aggi
  1. fire
  2. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration
    • Vin ii.120 fire in bathroom
    • MN i.487 anāhāro nibbuto fire gone out for lack of fuel SN iv.185
    • SN iv.399 sa-upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes
    • Snp 62
    • Dhp 70 = asaniaggi Dhp-a iii.71
    • Ja i.216 sparks
    • Ja i.294 pyre
    • Ja ii.102 Ja iii.55; Ja iv.139
    • Vv-a 20 aggimhi tāpanaṁ + udake temanaṁ
    • The various phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at AN iv.45
      • aggiṁ ujjāleti kindle, make burn
      • ajjhupekkhati look after, keep up
      • nibbāpeti extinguish, put out
      • nikkhipati put down, lay
    • Other phrases are e.g.
      • aggiṁ jāleti (kindle) Ja ii.44
      • gaṇhāti (make or take)
      • Ja i.494 ‣Cp. below 2
      • deti (set light to Ja i.294
      • nibbāpeti (put out) Iti 93 Sdhp 552.
      • aggi nibbāyati the fire goes out SN ii.85 MN i.487 Ja i.212 (udake through water) Mil 304
      • aggi nibbuto the fire is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) Ja i.61 Mil 304
      • agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to AN i.136 AN i.199 Pv-a 20
      • udar˚ the fire supposed to regulate digestion Pv-a 33 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.208, note 2
      • kapp˚uṭṭhān˚ the universal conflagration Ja iii.185
      • dāv˚ a wood or jungle fire Ja i.212
      • naḷ˚ the burning of a reed Ja vi.100
      • padīp˚ fire of a lamp Mil 47
  3. the sacrificial fire. In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire-god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka Commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni e.g. at Ja i.285 Ja i.494 Ja ii.44 The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that Commentary e.g. Ja i.285 Ja ii.43
    • Aggiṁ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā AN v.263 AN v.266 Thag 2, 143 (= aggihuttaṁ paric˚ Thag-a 136) Dhp 107 Ja i.494 Dhp-a ii.232
    • aggiṁ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire AN ii.207
    • often combined with aggihuttaṁ paricarati e.g. SN i.166 Snp p. 79
    • aggiṁ namati & santappeti to worship the fire. AN v.235
    • aggissa genitive paricāriko Ja vi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika);
    • aggissa ādhānaṁ AN iv.41
  4. (ethical, always—˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Frequently in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚ moh˚, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At SN iv.19 AN iv.41f. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. DN iii.217 Iti 92 Vb 368 In late books are found others:
    • ind˚ the fire of the senses Pv-a 56
    • dukkh˚ the glow of suffering Pv-a 60
    • bhavadukkh˚ of the misery of becomings Sdhp 552
    • vippaṭisār˚ burning remorse Pv-a 60
    • sok˚ burning grief Pv-a 41
  • ˚agāra agyâgāra a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24 Vin iv.109 DN i.101 DN i.102 (as Burmese variant for agāra) MN i.501 AN v.234 AN v.250
  • ˚khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire-brand SN ii.85 AN iv.128 Thag 2, 351 ˚samākāmā Ja iv.139 Ja vi.330 Ps i.125; Dīpavaṁsa vi.37, Mil 304
  • ˚gata having become (like) fire Mil 302
  • ˚ja fire-born Ja v.404 Commentary (text aggijāta)
  • ˚ṭṭha fire-place Ja v.155
  • ˚ṭṭhāna fire-place Vin ii.120 jantāghare, in bathroom
  • ˚daḍḍha consumed by fire Dhp 136 Pv i.74
  • ˚dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust AN i.178
  • ˚nikāsin like fire Ja iii.320 suriya
  • ˚nibbāna the extinction of fire Ja i.212
  • ˚pajjota fire-light AN ii.140 one of the 4 lights, viz canda˚, suriya˚, , paññā˚
  • ˚paricaraṇa (-ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to Dhp-a i.199
  • ˚paricariyā fire-worship Dhp-a ii.232 Snp-a 291 (pāri˚) Snp-a 456
  • ˚paricārika one who worship the fire AN v.263 brāhmaṇa
  • ˚sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25 Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 Vin i.139 Vin ii.154
  • ˚sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Snp 703 Dhp 308 = Iti 43 Iti 90 ayoguḷa
  • ˚hutta neuter the sacrificial fire ‣See above 2, Vin i.33 Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 Vin i.246 = Snp 568 ˚mukha-yañña SN i.166 Dhp 392 Snp 249 Snp p. 79 Ja iv.211 Ja vi.525 Thag-a 136 (= aggi) Dhp-a iv.151 ˚ṁ brāhmaṇo namati.
  • ˚huttaka neuter fire-offering Ja vi.522 = aggi-jūhana Commentary
  • ˚hotta = ˚hutta Snp-a 456 (Burmese variant ˚hutta).
  • ˚homa fire-oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni DN i.9 = aggi-jūhana DN-a i.93
Vedic agni = Latin ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini ‣ and aggini ‣See below
Aggika
adjective
  1. one who worships the fire
    • Vin i.71 jaṭilaka
    • DN ii.339f. jaṭila
    • SN i.166 brāhmaṇa
aggi + ka
Aggha
  1. price, value, worth Mil 244 Mhvs 26, 22; Mhvs 30, 76 Vv-a 77
    • mahaggha adjective of great value Ja iv.138 Ja v.414 Ja vi.209 Pv ii.118 ‣See also mahāraha.
    • appaggha adjective of little value Ja iv.139; Ja v.414
    • -anaggha neuter pricelessness, Ja v.484 cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā Dhp-a iii.120 Dhp-a ii.186.
    • adjective priceless, invaluable Ja v.414 Mhvs 26, 25 Dhp-a iv.216
    • agghena instrumental for the price of Vin ii.52 cp. Buddhaghosa on p. 311, 312
  2. an oblation made to a guest DN ii.240 Ja iv.396 = Ja iv.476
  • ˚kāraka a valuator Ja i.124
  • ˚pada valuableness Ja v.473 ˚lakkhaṇaṁ nāma mantaṁ
‣See agghati
Agghaka
adjective = aggha
  1. worth, having the value of (—˚) Mhvs 30, 77
  • an˚ priceless Mhvs 30, 72
Agghati
intransitive
  1. to be worth, to have the value of accusative to deserve
    • Ja i.112 satasahassaṁ, aḍḍhamāsakaṁ
    • Ja vi.174 Ja vi.367 padarajaṁ
    • Dhp-a iii.35 maṇin nâgghāma
    • Mhvs 32, 28
    • Frequently in stock phrase kalaṁ nāgghati (nāgghanti) soḷasiṁ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156 SN i.233 Dhp 70 Vv 207 (nânubhoti Vv-a 104) Vv 437 Ja v.284
    • causative agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on accusative Ja i.124 Ja iv.137 Ja iv.278 Mil 192 Mhvs 27, 23
    • Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya
Sanskrit arghati, argh = arh ‣See arhati
Agghanaka
adjective (—˚)
  1. having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226
    • Ja i.61 satasahass˚
    • DN-a i.80 kahāpaṇ˚
    • Dhp-a iii.120 cuddasakoṭi˚
    • Mhvs 26, 22; Mhvs 34, 87
    • feminine ˚ikā Ja i.178 satasahass˚
from *agghana, abstract to agghati
Agghaniya
adjective
  1. priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Mil 192
in function & form gerundive of agghati
Agghāpanaka
  1. a valuator, appraiser Ja i.124 Ja i.125 Ja v.276 ˚ika
from agghāpana to agghāpeti, causative of agghati
Agghāpaniya
adjective
  1. that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator Ja iv.137
gerundive of agghāpeti ‣See agghati
Agghika
neuter (—˚)
  1. an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning “string, garland”. Cp. Sinhalese ägä “festoon work”
  • Mhvs 19, 38 pupph˚
  • Mhvs 34, 73 ratan˚
  • Mhvs 34, 76 dhaj˚
  • Dāvs i.39 pupphamay˚
  • Dāvs v.51 kusum˚
= agghiya
Agghiya
adjective-noun
  1. adjective valuable, precious, worth
    • Ja vi.265 maṇi
    • Dhp-a ii.41 ratan of jewel’s worth
    • Mhvs 30, 92
  2. neuter a respectful oblation Ja v.324 = Ja vi.516; Dīpavaṁsa vi.65 Dīpavaṁsa vii.4
gerundive form from agghati
Agha1
neuter
  1. evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune SN i.22 MN i.500
  • roga gaṇḍa salla agha AN ii.128 (identical) Ja v.100 Thag 2, 491 Sdhp 51
  • adjective painful, bringing pain Ja vi.507 agha-m-miga = aghakara miga Commentary
  • ˚bhūta a source of pain SN iii.189 + agha & salla
cp. Sanskrit agha, of uncertain etymology
Agha2
masculine neuter
  1. the sky, originally the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space
    • DN ii.12 SN v.45
    • Vv 161 aghasi gama locative vehāsaṁ gama Vv-a 78
    • Ja iv.154
    • Dhs 638 + aghagata
    • Vb 84 identical
  • ˚gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638 Dhs 722 Vb 84
  • ˚gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i.e. a planet SN i.67 = Mil 242 ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaṁ
The etymology suggested by Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 200 (with reference to MN i.500 which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sanskrit kha, as a-kha = agha, cp. Jain Prakrit khaha). Neither does the popular etymology of Buddhaghosa offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable Dhs-a 326 cp. Dhs. translation 194 & Ja iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance) On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā DN ii.12 SN v.454 and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aghasaṁvṛta Mvu i.240 adjective dark Mvu i.41 Mvu ii.162 Lal 552
Aghata
  1. at Thag 1, 321 may be read as agha-gata or (preferably) with variant reading as aggha-gataṁ, or (with Neumann) as agghaṁ agghatānaṁ ‣See also Mrs. Rhys Davids, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191
Aghammiga
  1. a sort of wild animal
    • Ja vi.247 = aghāvaha miga
    • Ja vi.507 = aghakara
    • Cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit agharika Divy 475
to agha1?
Aghavin
adjective
  1. suffering pain, being in misery Snp 694 (= dukkhita Snp-a 489)
to agha1
Aṅka1
  1. = anga sign, mark, brand Mil 79
    • ˚karana branding Ja iv.366 Ja iv.375
    • ‣See also anketi
Aṅka2
  1. a hook Ja v.322 Ja vi.218 Burmese variant anga
  2. the lap (i.e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindu mothers or nurses
    • aṅkena vahati Vin ii.114
    • aṅke pariharati to hold on one’s lap or carry on one’s hips DN ii.19
    • DN ii.20 nisīdāpeti seat on one’s lap
    • MN ii.97 aṅkena vahitvā
    • Thag 1, 299 Ja i.262 aṅke nisinna
    • Ja ii.127 Ja ii.236 Ja vi.513 Dhp-a i.170 aṅkena vahitvā
    • Pv-a 17 nisīdāpeti
Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Latin uncus nail, Old High German angul = English angle
Aṅkita
  1. marked, branded
    • Ja i.231 cakkankitā Satthu padā
    • Ja ii.185 ˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears
past participle of anketi
Aṅkura
  1. a shoot, a sprout (literally or figuratively) Ja ii.105 Ja vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), Ja vi.486 Dhs 617 ˚vaṇṇa Mil 50 Mil 251 Mil 269 Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43
cp. Sanskrit ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.
Aṅkusa
  1. a hook, a pole with a hook, used
  1. for plucking fruit off trees, a crook Ja i.9 ˚pacchi hook & basket); Ja v.89 = Ja vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚, Ja vi.529 (= phalānaṁ gaṇhanatthaṁ ankusaṁ).
  2. to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta Vin ii.196 (+ kasā) Ja vi.489 Thag-a 173 ovādaṁ ankusaṁ katvā, figuratively guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚.
  3. name of a certain method of inference in Logic naya, consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett-a 208
  • acc˚; beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 nāga ‣See also ankusaka
  • ˚gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an elephant driver’s hook MN ii.94 sippa.
  • ˚gaha an elephant-driver Dhp 326
Vedic ankuśa; to anc ‣See anka2
Aṅkusaka
  1. a crook for plucking fruit Ja iii.22
  2. an elephant-driver’s hook Ja iii.431
  • ˚yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic Ja ii.68 + pacchi)
‣See anka2, cp. ankusa
Aṅketi
  1. to mark out, brand Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena Ja ii.399. past participle aṅkita q.v
  2. denominative from anka1
Aṅkola
  1. a species of tree Alaṅgium Hexapetalum Ja vi.535 cp. next
Dialectical for ankura
Aṅkolaka
  1. = ankola Ja iv.440 Ja v.420
Aṅga
neuter
  1. (literally) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member ‣See compound ˚sambhāra
    • uttam˚aṅga the reproductive organ Ja v.197 also as “head” at Thag-a 209
    • Usually in compounds as sabbaṅga-kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa-sabbanga-paccangī Pv-a 189) ‣See below, especially ˚paccanga
    • and in reduplication aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb, with all limbs (‣ See also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119 Vv 382 ˚ehi naccamāna; Pv ii.1210, Pv ii.1213, Pv ii.1218 sunakho te khādati.
  2. (figuratively) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e.g.
    • uposath˚; the vows of the fast Ja i.50
    • bhavaṅga the constituents or the condition of becoming ‣See bhava & cp. Compendium 265f.
    • bojjhaṅga (q.v.)
    • especially with numerals:
      • cattāri angāni, 4 constituents AN ii.79 viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā saññā, bhava
      • aṭṭhangika (q.v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (Kh-a 85 aṭṭh’angāni assā ti)
      • navanga Buddha-sāsana ‣See nava.
  3. a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality DN i.113f. DN i.117 iminā p˚ aṅgena by this quality, or in this respect, cp. below 4. DN-a i.281 explains tena kāraṇena.
    • In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body DN i.9 from which a prophesy is made (hattha-pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu yasavā hotī ti … angasatthan = chiromantics DN-a i.92).
    • Thus in combination with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with “good”, superior remarkable “qualities”, e.g. Ja i.3 (sabbanga-sampanna nagaraṁ a city possessing all marks of perfection); Ja ii.207.
    • In enumeration with various numerals:
      • tīhi angehi s. AN i.115
      • cattāri sotapannassa a- DN iii.227 = AN iv.405f.;
      • pañcanga-vippahīno i.e. giving up the 5 hindrances ‣See nīvaraṇa and
      • pañcanga-samannāgato i.e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla-kkhandha ‣See kkhandha SN i.99 = AN i.161 AN v.15 AN v.29
      • Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin, viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever DN i.119 DN i.120
      • Eight qualities of a king DN i.137
      • Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) SN iii.83 Kh iv.10 = Kp-a 88; cp. MN i.446 dasah’angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo
  4. (modally) part, share, interest, concern
    • ajjhattikaṁ angaṁ my own part or interest (opposite bāhiraṁ the interest in the outside world). AN i.16f. = SN v.101f. Iti 9
    • rañño angaṁ an asset or profit for the king MN i.446
    • Thus adverb tadaṅga (‣ See also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and
    • tadaṅgena by these means, through this, therefore MN i.492 AN iv.411 Sdhp 455 Sdhp 456;
    • iminā p˚ angena for that reason MN ii.168
    • In compound with verbs aṅgi˚; (angī˚) angigata having limbs or ports, divided DN-a i.313 cp. samangi (-bhūta)
  • ˚jāta “the distinguishing member”, i.e. sign of male or female ‣See above 3. Male and female genitals Vin i.191 (of cows); Vin iii.20, Vin iii.37, Vin iii.205 Ja ii.359 Mil 124
  • ˚paccaṅga one limb or the other, limbs great and small MN i.81 Ja vi.20, used
    1. collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adjective with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripuṇṇa-sabbanga-paccangavatī Pv-a 158) Snp-a 383 Dhp-a i.390 Thag-a 288 Sdhp 83 figuratively rathassa angapaccangan MN i.395 sabbanga-paccangāni all limbs Mil 148
    2. distributively (cp. similar reduplicated formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu-seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal MN i.133 ˚e daseyya, MN i.366 Ja i.20 Ja iv.324 chinditvā.
      • ˚paccaṅgatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i.e. a perfect body Vv-a 134 suvisuddh˚.
      • ˚paccaṅgin having all limbs (perfect) DN i.34 sabbanga-paccangī Pv-a 189
  • ˚rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚)
  • ˚laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot Thag-a 226
  • ˚vāta gout Vin i.205
  • ˚vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) DN i.9 ‣See explanation at DN-a i.93 Ja i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune-telling);
  • ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body Ja ii.200 Ja v.284
  • ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. Ja ii.21 Ja ii.250 Ja v.458
  • ˚vekalla bodily deformity Dhp-a ii.26
  • ˚sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DN-a i.92
  • ˚sambhāra the combination of parts Mil 28 = SN i.135 Mil 41
  • ˚hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests Ja vi.538
Vedic anga, anc cp. Latin angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger-ring = Sanskrit angulīya ‣See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula
Aṅgaṇa1
neuter
  1. an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218 Ja i.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa-ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge Commentary ); Ja ii.243, Ja ii.290 Ja ii.357; Dāvs i.27
  • cetiy˚ an open space before a Chaitya Mil 366 DN-a i.191 DN-a i.197 Vv-a 254
  • rāj˚ the empty space before the king’s palace, the royal square Ja i.124 Ja i.152; Ja ii.2 Dhp-a ii.45
  1. ˚ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) Ja i.249 Ja i.421
  • ˚pariyanta the end or border of a clearing Ja ii.200
cp. Sanskrit angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?
Aṅgaṇa2
  1. a speck or freckle (on the face). AN v.92 AN v.94f. (+ raja)
  • Usually in negative anaṅgana adjective free from fleck or blemish clear, (of the mind) (opposite sângana Snp 279) DN i.76 MN i.24f.; MN i.100 (+ raja) AN ii.211 Snp 517 (+ vigata raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamāSnp-a 427), Snp 622 = Dhp 125 (= nikkilesa Dhp-a iii.34) Dhp 236 Dhp 351 Pug 60 Nett 87
probably to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q.v.
Aṅgada
  1. a bracelet Ja v.9 Ja v.410
  • citt˚ adjective with manifold bracelets
cp. Sanskrit angada; probably anga + da that which is given to the limbs
Aṅgadin
adjective
  1. wearing a bracelet Ja v.9
to angada
Aṅgāra
masculine neuter
  1. charcoal, burning coal, embers AN iii.97 AN iii.380 AN iii.407 Ja i.73 Ja iii.54 Ja iii.55 Ja v.488 Snp 668 Sdhp 32
  • kul˚; the charcoal of the family, a squanderer SN iv.324 ‣See under kula
  • ˚kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DN-a i.261
  • ˚kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes Dhp-a i.260 Dhs-a 333 Vv-a 142
  • ˚kammakara a charcoal burner Ja vi.209
  • ˚kāsu a charcoal pit MN i.74 MN i.365 Thag 2 491 Ja i.233 Snp 396 Thag-a 288 Dhp-a i.442 Sdhp 208
  • ˚pacchi a basket for ashes Dhp-a iv.191
  • ˚pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya AN i.141 Mil 303 Pv-a 221 ˚āropaṇa Sdhp 208
  • ˚maṁsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16.
  • ˚masi ashes Dhp-a iii.309
  • ˚rāsi a heap of burning coal Ja iii.55
Vedic angāra
Aṅgāraka
adjective
  1. like charcoal, of red colour, name of the planet Mars DN-a i.95 cp. Ja i.73
cp. Sanskrit angāraka
Aṅgārika
  1. a charcoal-burner Ja vi.206 = angāra-kammakara p. 209
Aṅgārin
adjective
  1. (burning) like coal, of bright red colour, crimson Thag 1, 527 = Ja i.87 dumā trees in full bloom
to angāra
Aṅgika
adjective (—˚)
  1. consisting of parts, -fold. Only in compound with numbers like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ ‣See dve˚, catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q.v
from anga
Aṅgin
adjective
  1. limbed, having limbs or parts, -fold ‣See catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga-paccangin). feminine aṅginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Thag 2, 297 = Thag-a 226
Aṅguṭṭha
  1. the thumb Vin iii.34 Mil 123 Pv-a 198
  2. the great toe Ja ii.92 Mhvs 35, 43
  • ˚pada thumb-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154
  • ˚sineha love drawn from the thumb, i.e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52 cp. Pv-a 198
cp. Sanskrit anguṣṭha ‣See etymology under anga
Aṅguṭṭhaka
  1. = anguṭṭha Ja iv.378 Ja v.281
  • pād˚ the great toe SN v.270
Aṅgula
  1. a finger or toe MN i.395
    • vank’angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers variant reading anguliṇ
    • AN iii.6 (identical)
    • goṇ˚ adjective with ox toes Ja v.70 explained by Commentary as with toes like an ox’s tail variant readings ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī
  2. a finger as measure, i.e. a finger-breadth, an inch
    • Vin ii.294 Vin ii.306 dvaṅgula 2 inches wide
    • Mhvs 19, 11 aṭṭh˚
    • Dhp-a iii.127 ek˚
  • ˚aṭṭhi (? cp. anga-laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DN-a i.93
  • ˚aṅguli fingers and toes Dhp-a iii.214
  • ˚antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39 Mil 180 Dhp-a iii.214
Vedic angula, literally “limblet” ‣See anga for etymology
Aṅgulika
neuter
  1. a finger Ja iii.13 pañc˚ Ja v.204 vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207 ‣See also pañcangulika.
= angulī
Aṅgulī
Aṅgulī
(thus always in compounds) feminine
  1. a finger AN iv.127 Snp 610 Ja iii.416 Ja iv.474; Ja v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers) Mil 395 Dhp-a ii.59 Dhp-a iv.210 Snp-a 229
  • ˚patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = Vin iv.110 DN i.91 = AN iv.343
  • ˚pada finger-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154
  • ˚poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers Ja v.67
  • ˚muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106 Ja iv.498 Ja v.439 Ja v.467
  • ˚saṅghaṭṭana˚ = poṭha DN-a i.256
Vedic angulī & ˚i ‣See anga
Aṅguleyyaka
neuter
  1. an ornament for the finger, a finger-ring Ja ii.444 = nikkha
cp. Sanskrit angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Middle High German vingerlîn = ring; English bracelet, French bras; thimble thumb etc.
Acaṅkama
adjective
  1. not fit for walking, not level or even Thag 1, 1174 ˚magga
a + cankama
Acittaka
adjective
  1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional Dhp-a ii.42
  2. without heart or feeling instrumental acittakena adverb heartlessly Ja iv.58 (Commentary for acetasā)
a + citta2 + ka
Acittikata
adjective
  1. not well thought of Mil 229
a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra
Acira
  1. ‣See cira & cp. nacira
Acela
adjective-noun
  1. one who is not clothed, especially technical term for an anti-Buddhist naked ascetic DN i.161 DN i.165 DN iii.6 DN iii.12 DN iii.17f. SN i.78 Ja v.75
a + cela
Acelaka
  1. = acela DN i.166 DN iii.40 AN i.295 AN ii.206 AN iii.384
  • ˚sāvaka Ja iii.246 Ja vi.229 Pug 55 Dhp-a iii.489
Acc-
  1. a + , e.g. accuta = a + cuta
  2. Assimilation group of
    • ati + vowel
    • c + consonant, e.g. acci = arci
Accagā
3rd singular preterite of ati-gacchati (q.v. for similar forms)
  1. he overcame, should or could overcome Dhp 414 Snp 1040 (explained wrongly as past participle = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at Dhp-a iv.494)
ati + agā
Accaṅkusa
adjective
  1. beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 nāga
ati + ankusa
Accatari
  1. ‣See atitarati
Accati
  1. to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 accayittha, preteritepast participle accita, q.v
  2. Vedic arcati, ṛc, originally meaning to be clear & to sing i.e. to sound clear, cp. arci
Accanta
adjective & adverb
  1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual Ja i.223 Mil 413 Vv-a 71 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 125 Pv-a 266 Sdhp 288
  2. final, absolute, complete adverb thoroughly
    • SN i.130 ˚ṁ hataputtā’mhi
    • SN iii.13 = AN i.291f.
    • AN v.326f. ˚niṭṭha ˚yogakkhemin
    • Kvu 586 ˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu translation 340
  3. (˚-) exceedingly, extremely, very much
    • AN i.145 ˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate
    • Mil 26 identical
    • Snp 794 ˚suddhi = paramattha-accantasuddhi Snp-a 528
    • Thag 1, 692 ˚ruci
    • Dhp 162 ˚dussīlya = ekanta Dhp-a iii.153
ati + anta, literally “up to the end”
Accaya
  1. (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away end, death.
    • Usually as instrumental accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after
      • Vin i.25 DN ii.127 rattiyā a.
      • DN ii.154 mam˚ when I shall be dead
      • MN i.438 temās˚ after 3 months
      • SN i.69 Snp 102 catunnaṁ māsānaṁ
      • Snp p. 110 rattiyā
      • Ja i.253 ekāha-dvīh˚
      • Ja i.291 katipāh˚ after a few days
      • Pv-a 47 katipāh˚
      • Pv-a 82 dasamās˚
      • Pv-a 145 vassasatānaṁ
  2. (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur-accaya difficult to overcome, of
    • kāmapanka Snp 945 = dur-atikkamanīya Snp-a 568
    • sanga Snp 948
    • taṇhā Dhp 336
    • sota Iti 95
  3. (figuratively) going beyond (the norm) transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence) Vin i.167 (identical) Vin ii.110, Vin ii.170 Especially in following phrases:
    • accayo maṁ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i.e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) DN i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DN-a i.236) AN i.54 MN i.438 (identical);
    • accayaṁ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315 AN i.103 AN ii.146f.
    • ˚ṁ deseti to confess the transgression SN i.239
    • ˚ṁ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i.e. to pardon the transgression, in confession formula at DN i.85 = (Vin ii.192 MN i.438 etc.). In the same sense:
    • accaya-paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution Ja v.380
    • accayena desanaṁ paṭigaṇhāti Ja i.379
    • accayaṁ khamati to forgive Mil 420
from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sanskrit atyaya
Accasara
adjective
  1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self-sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud SN i.239 variant reading accayasara caused by prolepsis of following accaya Ja iv.6 atisara Dhp-a iv.230 = expecting too much
  2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) MN i.304 SN v.218 (Sinhalese reading for Burmese reading ajjhapara) Cp. accasārin
A formation from aorist accasari (ati + sṛ), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with Morris (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning “mindful of a fault”.
Accasarā
feminine
  1. overbearing, pride, self-surety Vb 358 + māyā
abstract to accasara
Accasari
aorist 3rd singular of atisarati
  1. to go beyond the limit, to go astray Ja v.70
from ati + sṛ
Accasārin
adjective = accasara1
  1. aspiring too high Snp 8f. yo nâccasārī, opposite to na paccasārī. Explained at Snp-a 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opposite na ohiyyi
Accahasi
aorist 3rd singular of atiharati
  1. to bring over, to bring, to take Ja iii.484 (= ativiya āhari Commentary )
from ati + hṛ
Accābhikkhaṇa
(˚-)
  1. too often Ja v.233 ˚saṁsagga. Commentary explains ativiya abhiṇha
ati + abhikkhaṇa
Accāraddha
(adjective adverb )
  1. exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182 Thag 1 638 Snp-a 21
ati + āraddha
Accāyata
adjective
  1. too long AN iii.375
ati + āyata
Accāyika
adjective
  1. out of time, viz.
  1. irregular, extraordinary Ja vi.549 Ja vi.553
  2. urgent, pressing MN i.149 (karaṇiyan business) MN ii.112 Ja i.338 Ja v.17 ˚ṁ neuter hurry Dhp-a i.18 ‣See also acceka
from accaya
Accāvadati
  1. to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224 Vin iv.263 SN ii.204f. Ja v.433 (Burmese variant ajjhārati), Ja v.434 (Burmese variant aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?)
ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?
Accāsanna
adjective
  1. very near, too near Pv-a 42 (na a. n'âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance)
ati + asanna
Accāhita
adjective
  1. very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible Ja iv.46 = Ja v.146 (= ati ahita Commentary ) = Ja vi.306 (identical)
ati + ahita
Acci
Accī (in verse)
feminine
  1. a ray of light, a beam, flame SN iv.290 spelt acchi SN iv.399 AN iv.103 AN v.9 Snp 1074 vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11 Ja v.213 Mil 40 Thag-a 154 dīp’ Sdhp 250
Vedic arci masculine & arcis neuter & feminine to ṛc, cp. accati
Accikā
feminine
  1. a flame MN i.74 SN ii.99
from acci
Accita
  1. honoured, praised, esteemed Ja vi.180
past participle of accati
Accimant
adjective
  1. flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Thag 1, 527 Ja v.266 Ja vi.248 Vv 388
from acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant
Acci-bandha
adjective
  1. at Vin i.287 is explained by Buddhaghosa as caturassa-kedāra-baddha (“divided into short pieces” Vinaya Texts ii.207), i.e. with squares of irrigated fields. The variant readings are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi-baddha “in the shape of cubes or dice”, i.e. with square fields
= accibaddha?
Accuggacchati
  1. to rise out (of), absolutive accuggamma DN ii.38 AN v.152 in simile of lotus
ati + uggacchati
Accuggata
adjective
  1. very high or lofty Mil 346 giri Vv-a 197 Dhp-a ii.65
  2. too high, i.e. too shrill or loud Ja vi.133 sadda Ja vi.516 figuratively = atikuddha very angry Commentary
ati + uggata
Accuṇha
adjective
  1. very hot, too hot Snp 966 Nd1 487 Dhp-a ii.85 Dhp-a ii.87 (variant reading for abbhuṇha) ‣See also ati-uṇha
ati + uṇha
Accuta
adjective
  1. immoveable; everlasting, eternalneuter ˚ṁ epithet of Nibbāna ‣ See also cuta AN iv.295 AN iv.327 Snp 204 Snp 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12) Dhp 225 (= sassata Dhp-a iii.321); Sdhp 47
  2. a + cuta
Accupaṭṭhapeti
  1. at Ja v.124 is to be read with variant reading as apaccupaṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for)
Accupati
at Ja iv.250 read accuppati, aorist 3rd singular of accuppatati
  1. to fall in between (literally on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). Commentary explains atigantvā uppati.
Accussanna
adjective
  1. too full, too thick Vin ii.151
ati + ussanna
Acceka
  1. = accāyika, special
  • ˚cīvara a special robe Vin iii.261 cp. Vinaya Texts i.293
Acceti
  1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Thag 1, 145 accayanti ahorattā
  2. to overcome, to get over Mil 36 dukkhaṁ
  • causative acceti to make go on locative to put on Ja vi.17 sūlasmiṁ (Commentary āvuṇeti). But at this passage probably to be read appeti (q.v.)
ati + eti from i
Accogāḷha
adjective
  1. too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), literally plunged into AN iv.282 AN iv.287 AN iv.323f.
ati + ogāḷha
Accodaka
neuter
  1. too much water . Opposite anodaka no water Dhp-a i.52
ati + udaka
Accodara
neuter
  1. too much eating, greediness, literally “too much of a belly” Ja iv.279 Commentary ati-udara
ati + udara
Accha1
adjective
  1. clear, transparent
  • Vin i.206 ˚kañjika
  • DN i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DN-a i.221)
  • DN i.80 udakapatta
  • DN i.84 udaka-rahada
  • MN i.100
  • SN ii.281 SN iii.105 ˚patta
  • AN i.9
  • Ja ii.100 udaka
  • Vv 7910 vāri
  • DN-a i.113 yāgu
  • ˚odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411 Vv 815
  • feminine ˚odikā Vv 412 = Vv 602
cp. Sanskrit accha, dialectical, to ṛc ‣See accati, thus “shining”; cp. Sanskrit ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier-Williams however takes it as a + cha from chad thus “not covered, not shaded”
Accha2
  1. a bear Vin i.200 AN iii.101 Ja v.197 Ja v.406 Ja v.416 Mil 23 Mil 149.
  • At Ja vi.507 accha figures as name of an animal, but is in explanation taken in the sense of accha4: acchā nāma aghammigā Commentary
Vedic ṛkṣa = Latin ursus, Welsh arth
Accha3
  1. = akkha2 a die ‣See acci-bandha
Accha4
adjective
  1. hurtful, painful, bad
  • Dhp-a iv.163 ˚ruja
Vedic ṛkṣa
Acchaka
  1. = accha2 a bear Ja v.71
Acchati
  1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289 AN ii.15 Iti 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati) Vv 741 (= nisīdati Vv-a 298) Pv-a 4
  2. to stay remain, to leave alone Thag 1, 936 Ja iv.306
  3. to be behave, live Vin ii.195 DN i.102 SN i.212 Vv 112 Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati Pv-a 188) Mil 88 Dhp-a i.424
    • In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus
      • aggiṁ karitvā a. (= aggiṁ karoti) DN i.102
      • aggiṁ paricaranto a (= aggiṁ paricarati) DN-a i.270
      • tantaṁ pasārento a. (=tantaṁ pasāreti) Dhp-a i.424
    potential acche Iti 110
  4. aorist acchi Vin iv.308 Dhp-a i.424
  5. Vedic āsyati & āste ās
Acchanna
adjective
  1. covered with, clothed in, figuratively steeped in (c. loe.) Ja jii.323 lohite a. = nimugga Commentary
  • At DN i.91 nacchanna is for na channa not fair, not suitable or proper paṭirūpa ‣See channa2
past participle of acchādeti
Acchambhin
adjective
  1. not frightened, undismayed, fearless Snp 42 (reading achambhin Nd2 13 explains abhīru anutrāsi etc.) Ja vi.322 (= nikkampa Commentary ) ‣See chambhin
a + chambhin
Accharā1
feminine
  1. the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger-tips
  1. (literally) to snap the fingers accharaṁ paharati Ja ii.447 Ja iii.191 Ja iv.124 Ja iv.126 Ja v.314; Ja vi.366 Dhp-a i.38 Dhp-a 424
    • As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger-tips, a pinch Ja v.385 Dhp-a ii.273 ˚gahaṇamattaṁ; cp. ekacchara-matta Dhp-a ii.274
  2. (figuratively) a finger’s snap, i.e. a short moment in ek˚acchara-kkhaṇe in one moment Mil 102 and in definition of acchariya (q.v.) at DN-a i.43 Vv-a 329
  • ˚saṅghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment
  • ˚matta momentary only for one moment (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) AN i.10 AN i.34 AN i.38 AN iv.396 Thag 1, 405 Thag 2, 67 Explained at Thag-a 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaṁ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaṁ
  • ˚sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger Ja iii.127
Etymology uncertain, but certainly dialectical. Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sanskrit akṣara ‣See akkhara. There may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa-vedhin (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning “stealthily”, although the primary meaning is “snapping, a quick sound”.
Accharā2
feminine
  1. a celestial nymph
  • MN i.253 plural accharāyo MN ii.64
  • Thag 2, 374 = devaccharā Thag-a 252
  • Ja v.152f. Alambusā a.
  • Vv 55 = devakaññā Vv-a 37
  • Vv 172 Vv 1811 etc.
  • Dhp-a iii.8 Dhp-a ii.19
  • Pv-a 46 dev˚
  • Mil 169
  • Sdhp 298
Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, originally “water nymph”
Accharika
neuter or feminine ?
  1. in ˚ṁ vādeti to make heavenly music (literally the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) AN iv.265
from accharā2
Acchariya
adjective neuter
  1. wonderful, surprising strange, marvellous DN ii.155 MN i.79 MN iii.118 MN iii.125 MN iii.144 an˚ SN iv.371 AN i.181 Mil 28 Mil 253 Dhp-a iii.171 Pv-a 121 Vv-a 71 an˚
  • As neuter often in exclamations “how wonderful! what a marvel!” Ja i.223 Ja i.279 Ja iv.138 Ja vi.94 a. vata bho Dhp-a iv.51 aho a. Vv-a 103 aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto
  • Thus frequently combined with abbhutaṁ = “how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension”, e.g. DN i.2, DN i.60, DN i.206, DN i.210; DN ii.8;
  • and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i.e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, MN iii.118 MN iii.125 AN iv.198 Mil 8
  • also as adjective in phrase acchariyaabbhuta-(citta-)jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise Dhp-a iv.52 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 50
  • ‣ See also acchera accheraka
cp. Sanskrit āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etymology. The conventional etymology of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is probably correct & thus reduces Sanskrit āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha-ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa-yoggaṁ that which happens without a moment’s notice, at the snap of a finger; i.e. causally unconnected (cp. Gothic silda-leiks in similar meaning) Vv-a 329 and Buddhaghosa: accharā-yoggan ti acchariyaṁ accharaṁ paharituṁ yuttan ti attho DN-a i.43
Acchādana
neuter
  1. covering, clothing Thag 1, 698 Mil 279
  • (figuratively) protection, sheltering Ja i.307
from acchādeti
Acchādanā
feminine
  1. covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19 Pug 23
= preceding
Acchādeti
  1. to cover, to clothe, to put on DN i.63 = Iti 75 Ja i.254 Ja iii.189 Ja iv.318 Pug 57 Pv i.105 absolutive acchādayitvāna DN-a i.181 = paridahitvā Pv-a 49 Pv-a 50
  • (figuratively) to envelop, to fill Ja vi.581 abbhaṁ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air
  • past participle acchanna (q.v.)
ā + chādeti1, causative of chad, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ācchādayati jīvitena to keep alive Avs i.300; Divy 136 Divy 137
Acchi
  1. at SN iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q.v.)
Acchijja
variant reading accheja destroying (?) SN i.127 Is the reading warranted? cp. acchecchi.
Acchidda
  1. ‣See chidda
Acchindati
  1. to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 sayaṁ a. to appropriate Ja ii.422 Ja iii.179 Ja iv.343 Mil 20 Sdhp 122absolutive acchinditvā Ja ii.422 Dhp-a i.349 Pv-a 241 sayaṁ & acchetvā MN i.434
  2. causative acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224 Vin iv.247
  3. ā + chindati, literally to break for oneself
Acchinna
adjective
  1. removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278 Vin iv.303 Ja ii.78 Ja iv.45; Ja v.212
ā + chinna, past participle of acchindati
Acchiva
  1. a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) Ja vi.535
*Sanskrit akṣiba and akṣība
Acchupeti
  1. to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 aggaḷaṁ Vin ii.112
ā + chupeti, causative of chupati
Acchecchi
3rd singular aorist of chindati
  1. he has cut out or broken, has destroyed” ‣ See also chindati3
  • in combination with taṇhaṁ MN i.122 SN i.12 SN i.23 SN i.127 (so read for acchejja) SN iv.105, SN iv.207. Iti 47 AN iii.246 AN iii.445 Dhp-a iv.70 commentary acchindi, for acchidda preterite of Dhp 351
Sanskrit acchaitsīt
Acchejja
= a + chejja
  1. not to be destroyed, indestructible ‣See chindati
Acchedana
neuter
  1. robbing, plundering Ja vi.544
abstract to acchindati
Acchera
adjective = acchariya wonderful, marvellous SN i.181 Vv 8413 comparative accheratara Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva Pv-a 197) Sdhp 244 Sdhp 398.
Accheraka
adjective
  1. = acchera acchariya Ja i.279 Bu i.9 pāṭihīraṁ
Aja
  1. a he-goat, a ram DN i.6 DN i.127 AN ii.207 Ja i.241 Ja iii.278f. Ja v.241 Pug 56 Pv-a 80
  • ˚eḷaka (Sanskrit ajaiḍaka) goats & sheep DN i.5, DN i.141 AN ii.42f. AN ii.209 Ja i.166 Ja vi.110 Pug 58 As plural ˚ā SN i.76 Iti 36 Ja iv.363
  • ˚pada goat-footed MN i.134
  • ˚pāla goatherd in ˚nigrodharukkha place name “goatherds’ Nigrodha-tree” Vin i.2f. Dīpavaṁsa i.29 (cp. Mvu iii.302).
  • ˚pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38
  • ˚lakkhaṇa “goat-sign”, i.e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. DN i.9 Explained DN-a i.94 as evarūpānaṁ ajānaṁ mansaṁ khāditabbaṁ evarūpānaṁ na khāditabban ti
  • ˚laṇḍikā plural goats’ dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats’ dung, which is put down a bad minister’s throat as punishment Ja i.419 Dhp-a ii.70 Pv-a 282
  • ˚vata “goats’ habit”, a practice of certain ascetics to live after the fashion of goats Ja iv.318
  • aja-pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat’s hoof. So also at Vism 161
Vedic aja from aj, Latin ago to drive, cp. ajina
Ajaka
  1. a goat, plural goats Vin ii.154 feminine ajikā Ja iii.278 & ajiyā Ja v.241
Ajagara
  1. a large snake (rock-snake?), Boa Constrictor Ja vi.507 Mil 23 Mil 303 Mil 364 Mil 406 Dhp-a iii.60 Also as ajakara at Ja iii.484 Cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64
aja + gara = gala from *gel to devour, thus “goat-eater”
Ajacca
adjective
  1. of low birth Ja iii.19 Ja vi.100
a + jacca
Ajajjara
  1. ‣See jajjara
Ajaddhuka
Ajaddhumāra
  1. ‣See jaddhu
Ajamoja
  1. cummin-seed Vv-a 186
Sanskrit ajamoda, cp. Sanskrit ajājī
Ajā
feminine
  1. a she-goat Ja iii.125 Ja iv.251
Ajānana
(˚-) neuter
  1. not knowing, ignorance (of)
  • Ja v.199 ˚bhāva
  • Ja vi.177 ˚kāla
a + jānana
Ajina
neuter
  1. the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics DN i.167 Snp 1027 Ja i.12 Ja i.53 Ja iv.387 Ja v.407
  • kharājina a rough skin as garment MN i.343 SN iv.118 AN ii.207 Snp 249 = kharāni a˚-cammāni Snp-a 291
  • dantājina ? ivory (q.v.)
  • ˚khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope’s hide. DN i.167 SN i.117 AN i.240 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Vin i.306 Vin iii.34 Ja vi.569
  • ˚paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of antelope skin sewn together Vin i.192 DN i.7 (= ajina-cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DN-a i.87) AN i.181
  • ˚sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina-camma-sāṭī Dhp-a iv.156) Dhp 394 = Ja i.481 = Ja iii.85
Vedic ajina, to aja, originally goats’ skin
Ajini
aorist 3rd singular jayati (q.v.)
Ajiya
Ajikā
  1. ‣ See ajaka

Ajira
neuter.
  1. a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3
Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Latin ager, Gothic akrs = German Acker = English acre
Ajīraka
neuter
  1. indigestion Ja i.404 Ja ii.181 Ja ii.291 Ja iii.213 Ja iii.225
a + jīraka
Ajeyya1
Ajjeyya
adjective
  1. not to be taken by force Kh viii.8 cp. Kp-a 223
  2. not to be overpowered, invincible Snp 288 Ja v.509
a + jeyya, gerundive of jayati, q.v.
Ajeyya2
adjective
  1. not decaying, not growing old, permanent Ja vi.323
a + jeyya, gerundive of jīyati, q.v.
Ajja
Ajjā
adverb
  1. to-day, now Snp 75 Snp 153 Snp 158 Snp 970 Snp 998 Dhp 326 Ja i.279 Ja iii.425 Pv i.117 (= idāni Pv-a 59) Pv-a 6 Pv-a 23; Mhvs 15, 64. Frequently in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja-tagge ‣See agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18 DN i.85 DN-a i.235
  • ˚kālaṁ adverb this morning Ja vi.180
  • ˚divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23
Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, being base of demonstrative pronoun ‣See a; 3 and dyā an old locative of dyaus ‣See diva, thus “on this day”
Ajjatana
adjective
  1. referring to the day, today’s, present, modern. Opposite porāṇa Thag 1, 552 Dhp 227 Ja ii.409 dative ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17 Pv-a 171 & passim
  2. cp. Sanskrit adyatana
Ajjatā
feminine
  1. the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day SN i.83 (variant reading ajjeva)
abstract from ajja
Ajjati
  1. to get, procure, obtain Ja iii.263 (?). past participle ajjita (q.v.)
  2. Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh ‣See arahati
Ajjava
adjective-noun
  1. straight, upright (usually combined with maddava gentle, soft) DN iii.213 AN i.94 AN ii.113 AN iii.248 Snp 250 (+ maddava) 292 (identical) Ja iii.274 Dhs 1339 Vb 359 (an˚) Snp-a 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (identical)
cp. Sanskrit ārjava, to ṛju ‣See uju
Ajjavatā
feminine
  1. straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339 (+ ajimhatā & avankatā)
from preceding
Ajjita
  1. obtained Sdhp 98
past participle of ajjati
Ajjuka
  1. name of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35 DN-a i.81 (all manuscripts have ajjaka)
* Sanskrit arjaka
Ajjukaṇṇa
  1. name of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja vi.535 (nn)
* Sanskrit arjakarṇa
Ajjuṇho
adverb
  1. this moonlit night Vin i.25 Vin iv.80
haplology from ajja-juṇho ‣See juṇhā
Ajjuna
  1. the tree Pentaptera Arjuna Ja vi.535 Dhp-a i.105 (˚rukkha)
Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Latin argentum
Ajjh-
  1. Assimilation group of adhi + vowel
Ajjhagā
  1. he came to, got to, found, obtained experienced
    • SN i.12 (vimānaṁ)
    • Snp 225 (explained at Kp-a 180 by vindi paṭilabhi),
    • Snp 956 (ratiṁ; explained at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi)
    • Iti 69 (jātimaraṇaṁ)
    • Dhp 154 (taṇhānaṁ khayaṁ)
    • Vv 327 (visesaṁ attained distinction; explained at Vv-a 135 by adhigata);
    • Vv-a 5021 (amataṁ santiṁ; explained Vv-a 215 by Sinhalese reading adhigañchi, Text adhigacchati)
adhi + agā 3rd singular preterite of adhigacchati (q.v. for similar forms)
Ajjhatta
adjective-noun
  1. that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as
    • adverb & ˚– interior, personal, inwardly (opposite bahiddhā, bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); cp. ajjhattika & ‣See Dhs. translation p. 272.
      • DN i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna) Dn i.70 = AN ii.210
      • AN v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaṁ niyakajjhattaṁ attano santāne ti attho DN-a i.183 cp. Dhs-a 169 338, 361)
      • SN i.70 SN i.169 SN ii.27 (kathaṁ kathī hoti is in inward doubt),
      • SN ii.40 (sukhaṁ dukkhaṁ);
      • SN iii.180 (identical)
      • SN iv.1 singular (āyatanāni), SN iv.139, SN iv.196;
      • SN v.74 ṭhitaṁ cittaṁ ajjhattaṁ susaṇṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), SN v.110, SN v.143, SN v.263, SN v.297, SN v.390
      • AN i.40 (rūpasaññī),
      • AN i.272 (kāmacchanda etc.);
      • AN ii.158. (sukhadukkhaṁ),
      • AN ii.211;
      • AN iii.86 (cetosamatha),
      • AN ii.92 (vūpasantacitta);
      • AN iv.32 (sankhittaṁ),
      • AN iv.57 (itthindriyaṁ),
      • AN iv.299 (cittaṁ),
      • AN iv.305 (rūpasaññī),
      • AN iv.360 (cetosamatha),
      • AN iv.437 (vūpasantacitta);
      • AN v.79 sq. AN v.335 sq. (sati)
      • Iti 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), Iti 80, Iti 82 Iti 94
      • Ja i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides);
      • Ja v.338 (identical)
      • Ps i.76 (cakkhu etc.)
      • Dhs 161 (= attano jātaṁ Dhs-a 169), Dhs 204, Dhs 1044
      • Pug 59
      • Vb 1f. (khandhā),
      • Vb 228 (sati),
      • Vb 327 (paññā),
      • Vb 342 (arūpasaññī)
    • adverb ˚ṁ inwardly personally (in contrast-pair ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā ‣See also compound ˚bahiddhā) AN i.284 AN ii.171 AN iv.305 AN v.61 Snp 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350)
  • ˚ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047
  • ˚cintin thought occupied with internal things Snp 174 Snp 388
  • ˚bahiddhā inside & outside, personal-external, mutual interacting SN ii.252f.; SN iii.47; SN iv.382 Nd2 15 Dhs 1049 etc. (‣ See also bahiddhā).
  • ˚rata with inward joy DN ii.107 SN v.263 = Dhp 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita) Thag 1, 981 AN iv.312 Dhp-a iv.90 (= gocar’ajjhatta-sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna-bhāvanāya rata)
  • ˚rūpa one’s own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opposite bahiddhā-rūpa & ajjh˚-bah˚ r.)
  • ˚saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond AN i.63f. Pug 22 Vb 361
  • ˚santi inner peace Snp 837 (= ajjhattānaṁ rāgādīnaṁ santibhāva Snp-a 545 cp. Nd1 185)
  • ˚samuṭṭhāna originating from within Ja i.207 (of hiri; opposite bahiddhā˚)
cp. Sanskrit adhyātma, cp. attā
Ajjhattika
adjective
  1. personal, inward (cp. Dhs translation 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaṁ vuccati cittaṁ) opposite bāhira outward (q.v.) ‣See also āyatana.
    • MN i.62
    • SN i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā);
    • SN iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni);
    • SN v.101 (anga)
    • AN i.16 (anga)
    • AN ii.164 dhātuyo
    • AN iii.400 āyatanāni
    • AN v.52 identical
    • Iti 114 (identical)
    • Iti 9 (anga)
    • Kh iv. = Kp-a 82
    • Ja iv.402 (bāhira-vatthuṁ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṁ gaṇhati)
    • Dhs 673 Dhs 751
    • Vb 13 Vb 67, Vb 82 sq. Vb 119, Vb 131 Vb 392 sq.
ajjhatta + ika
Ajjhapara
  1. At SN v.218 substitute variant reading accasara (q.v.)
Ajjhappatta
Ajjhapatta
  1. having reached, approached, coming near to Ja ii.450 Ja vi.566 (Commentary attano santikaṁ patta)
  2. having fallen upon, attacked Ja ii.59 Ja v.198 (p; Commentary sampatta
  3. attained, found, got Snp 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2) Ja iii.296 (p. Commentary sampatta; v.158 (ajjhāpatta; Commentary sampatta
adhi + ā + *prāpta
Ajjhabhavi
3rd singular aorist of adhibhavati (q.v.)
  1. to conquer, overpower, overcome
    • SN i.240 (prohibitive mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi)
    • Ja ii.336
    • cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati
Ajjhabhāsi
3rd singular aorist of adhibhāseti
  1. to address
    • SN iv.117 (gāthāhi);
    • Kh v. = Snp p. 46 (gāthāya)
    • Pv-a 56 Pv-a 90
Ajjhabhu
3rd singular aorist of adhibhavati (q.v.)
  1. to overcome, conquer
    • Iti 76 (dujjayaṁ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; variant reading ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi).
    • cp. ajjhabhavi
Ajjhayana
neuter
  1. study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Mil 225 ‣See also ajjhena
adhi + i
Ajjhavodahi
3rd singular aorist of ajjhodahati
  1. to put down Ja v.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi Commentary ).
Sanskrit adhyavadhāti
Ajjhāgāre
adverb
  1. at home, in one’s own house AN i.132 = Iti 109 AN ii.70
adhi + agāre, locative of agāra
Ajjhācarati
  1. to conduct oneself according to Vin ii.301 MN i.523 Mil 266
  2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) Ja iv.231 (aññam-aññaṁ)
  • past participle ajjhāciṇṇa
  • ‣See also accāvadati & aticarati
adhi (or ati?) + ā + car
Ajjhācāra
  1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājikas or Saṁghādisesas) Vin i.63 ‣See note in Vinaya Texts i.184
  2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Commentary as explanation of avabhāsati)
  3. sexual intercourse Ja i.396
    • Ja v.327 (˚cara variant reading for ajjhāvara)
    • Mil 127 (an˚)
to adhi (ati?) + ā + car
Ajjhāciṇṇa
  1. habitually done Vin ii.80f. Vin ii.301
past participle of ajjhācarati
Ajjhājīva
  1. too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood MN ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha)
adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv
Ajjhāpajjati
  1. to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (accusative) Vin iv.237
    • past participle ajjhāpanna (q.v.)
adhi + ā + pad
Ajjhāpatti
feminine
  1. incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚)
abstract to ajjhāpajjati
Ajjhāpana1
neuter
  1. teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Mil 225
from causative ii. of ajjheti
Ajjhāpana2
neuter
  1. burning, conflagration Ja vi.311
ā + jhāpana from kṣā
Ajjhāpanna
  1. become guilty of offence DN i.245 DN iii.43 SN ii.270 AN iv.277 AN iv.280 AN v.178 AN v.181
  • an˚ guiltless, innocent Vin i.103 DN iii.46 SN ii.194 SN ii.269 AN v.181 Mil 401 For all passages except AN iv.277 AN iv.280, cp. ajjhopanna
past participle of adhi + āpajjati
Ajjhāpīḷita
  1. harassed, overpowered, tormented Pv-a 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst)
adhi + ā + pīḷita
Ajjhābhava
  1. excessive power, predominance Ja ii.357
cp. Sanskrit adhyābhava
Ajjhābhavati
  1. to predominate Ja ii.357
adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu
Ajjhāyaka
  1. (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda
    • mantajjhāyaka Ja vi.209 Snp-a 192
    • a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious learned person DN i.88 DN i.120 DN iii.94 AN i.163 AN iii.223 Snp 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.) Thag 1, 1171 Ja i.3 Ja vi.201, Ja vi.498 DN-a i.247
cp. Sanskrit adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana
Ajjhāruha
Ajjhārūha
adjective
  1. growing up over, overwhelming AN iii.63f. = SN v.96 Ja iii.399
to adhi + ā + ruh
Ajjhārūḷha
adjective
  1. grown up or high over Ja iii.399
past participle of adhi + ā + ruh
Ajjhārūhati
  1. to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over SN i.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SN-a; cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids Kindred Sayings i.285)
adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati
Ajjhāvadati
  1. ‣See accāvadati
Ajjhāvara
  1. surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue Ja v.322 Ja v.324 Ja v.326 Ja v.327 (explained at all passages by parisā.) Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra
from adhi + ā + var
Ajjhāvasatar
  1. one who inhabits DN i.63 (agāraṁ)
agent noun to ajjhāvasati
Ajjhāvasati
  1. to inhabit (agāraṁ a house) i.e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder DN ii.16 MN i.353 Vin iv.224 Ja i.50 Pug 57 Mil 348 past participle ajjhāvuttha (q.v.)
  2. adhi + ā + vas
Ajjhāvuttha
  1. inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210 Ja i.145 Ja ii.333 Pv-a 24 (˚ghara)
    • (figuratively) occupied by Snp-a 566 (= anosita)
cp. Sanskrit adhyuṣita; past participle of ajjhāvasati
Ajjhāsaya
  1. intention, desire wish, disposition, bent DN ii.224 (adjective: intent on, practising) Ja i.88 Ja i.90 Ja ii.352 Ja v.382 Dhs-a 314 Dhs-a 334 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 116 Pv-a 133 (adjective dān˚ intent on giving alms), Pv-a 168 Sdhp 219 Sdhp 518.
    • Frequently in phrase ajjhāsayānurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted Pv-a 61 Pv-a 106 Pv-a 128
from adhi + ā + śri, originally hanging on, leaning on, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit however adhyāśaya Divy 586
Ajjhāsayatā
feminine
  1. desire, longing Pv-a 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. locative)
abstract to ajjhāsaya
Ajjhāsita
  1. intent on, bent on Mil 361 (jhān˚). cp. ajjhosita & nissita
past participle of adhi + ā + śri
Ajjhiṭṭha
  1. requested, asked, invited
    • Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden)
    • DN ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and Text read ajjhitta)
    • Snp p. 218 = ajjhesita Nd2 16
    • Ja vi.292 (= āṇatta Commentary )
    • Dhp-a iv.100 (variant reading abhijjhiṭṭha)
    • ‣See also an˚
past participle of ajjhesati
Ajjhupagacchati
  1. to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Thag 2, 474 (= sampaṭicchati Thag-a 285) Ja ii.403 Mil 300 past participle ajjhupagata (q.v.)
  2. adhi + upa + gam
Ajjhupagata
  1. come to, obtained, reached. AN v.87 cp. AN v.210; AN v.v.187 sq.
past participle of ajjhupagacchati
Ajjhupagamana
neuter
  1. consent, agreement, justification Vin ii.97 Vin ii.104
adhi + upa + gam
Ajjhupaharati
  1. to take (food) to oneself Ja ii.293 (aorist ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari Commentary )
adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati
Ajjhupekkhati
  1. to look on AN i.257 Mil 275
  2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of
    • AN iv.45 (kaṭṭh’aggi, has to be looked after)
    • Pv-a 149 (sisaṁ colaṁ vā)
  3. to look on indifferently, to be indifferent, to neglect Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.162, cp. Ja i.147 MN i.155 MN ii.223 AN iii.194 AN iii.435 Ja v.229 Dhp-a iv.125
adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhyupekṣati
Ajjhupekkhana
neuter & ˚ā feminine
  1. care, diligence, attention Ps i.16; Ps ii.119 Vb 230f. Dhp-a iv.3
abstract from ajjhupekkhati
Ajjhupekkhitar
  1. one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer caretaker SN v.69 (sādhukaṁ), SN v.324 (identical), SN v.331 sq. Vb 227
agent noun to ajjhupekkhati
Ajjhupeti
  1. to go to meet, to receive Ja iv.440
cp. Sanskrit abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i
Ajjheti
  1. to be anxious about, to fret, worry Snp 948 (socati +)
    • explained at Nd1 433 by nijjhāyati, at Snp-a 568 by abhijjhati (gloss Burmese manuscripts gijjhati)
Sanskrit ādhyāyati, denominative from adhyāya
Ajjhena
neuter
  1. study (especially of the Vedas) MN iii.1 Ja ii.327 (as variant reading to be preferred to ajjhesanā) Ja iii.114 = japa; Ja v.10 (plural = vede) Ja vi.201 = Ja vi.207 Vb 353 Snp-a 314 (mant’)
  • ˚kujja (˚kūta variant reading ?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Snp 242 cp. Snp-a 286
Sanskrit adhyayana ‣See also ajjhayana
Ajjhesati
  1. to request, ask, bid Dhp-a iv.18
    • aorist ajjhesi Vin ii.200
    • past participle ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q.v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita
adhi + iṣ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhyeṣate Divy 160
Ajjhesanā
feminine
  1. request, entreaty Vin i.6 = DN ii.38 = SN i.138 Ja ii.327
    • better variant reading ajjhena
‣See ajjhesati
Ajjhesita
  1. requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha)
past participle of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha
Ajjhokāsa
  1. the open air, only in locative ajjhokāse in the open Vin i.15 SN i.212 Dhp-a iv.100
adhi + okāsa
Ajjhogāḷha
  1. plunged into, immersed; having entered MN i.457 SN i.201 Mil 348
past participle of ajjhogāhati
Ajjhogāhati
Ajjhogāheti
  1. to plunge into, to enter, to go into DN i.101 (vanaṁ), DN i.222 (samuddaṁ) MN i.359 MN i.536 AN iii.75 AN iii.368; AN iv.356; AN v.133 Vin iii.18 Ja i.7 Nd1 152 (ogāhati +) Mil 87 (samuddaṁ) Mil 300 vanaṁ
    • past participle ajjhogāḷha (q.v.) cp. pariyogāhati
Sanskrit *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh
Ajjhoṭhapeti
  1. to bring to Pv-a 148 (gāmaṁ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti
adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, causative of sthā
Ajjhotthata
  1. spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered Ja i.363 (ajjhottaṭa) 410
  2. v.91 = adhipanna
  3. Dhp-a i.278 Pv-a 55 Dāvs v.5
past participle of ajjhottharati
Ajjhottharati
  1. to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111 Ja i.61 Ja i.72 Ja i.73 Mil 296 Mil 336 Dhp i.264; passive ˚tthariyati to be overrun with instrumental, to be smothered, to be flooded AN iii.92 = Pug 67
  2. aorist ajjhotthari Vv-a 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded).
  3. past participle ajjhotthata (q.v.)
  4. adhi + ava + stṛ
Ajjhopanna
  1. (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q.v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with reference to selfishness, greed bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old-standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under variant reading to MN i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as Burmese manuscripts (= adhi-opanna). The manuscripts of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for SN ‣See Nd2 introduction xix.. Besides this mixture of variant readings with SN and p there is another confusion between the variant readings ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q.v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. cp. also ajjhosita. The following is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the various texts.

    1. -1. ajjhopanna as Text reading: MN i.162 MN i.173 MN i.369 AN i.74 AN ii.28 iii.68, 242; Md 75, 76 DN-a i.59
    • as variant reading : DN i.245 2. ajjhosāna as variant reading : AN i.74 (Commentary explains ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim Ud 75 76 (ajjhosanna) DN-a i.59 (identical)
    • ajjhāpanna as Text reading DN i.245 DN iii.43 DN iii.46 SN ii.194 SN ii.270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa). AN v.178 AN v.181 Nd2 under nissita Mil 401
    • as variant reading MN i.162 AN iii.242 Ud 75 76
Ajjhobhavati
  1. to overcome, overpower, destroy Ja ii.80 (aorist ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi Commentary )
  2. adhi + ava + bhu, Sanskrit abhi˚
Ajjhomaddati
  1. to crush down AN iv.191 AN iv.193
adhi + ava + mṛd
Ajjhomucchita
  1. stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) AN iii.57 sq (variant reading ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.)
past participle adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita
Ajjholambati
  1. to hang or hold on to (accusative ), to cling to SN iii.137 MN iii.164 = Nett 179 cp. Sdhp 284 & 296
  2. adhi + ava + lamb
Ajjhosa
  1. = ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to SN iv.73 Thag 1, 98 794
Ajjhosati
  1. to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. future ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) MN i.328 (c.
  2. accusative paṭhaviṁ, better as ajjhesati).
  3. gerundive ajjhositabha MN i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, variant reading ˚etabba) Dhs-a 5 (identical);
  4. absolutive ajjhosāya (q.v.)
  5. past participle ajjhosita (q.v.)
  6. adhi + ava + sayati, , to bind, past participle sita ‣See ajjhosita
Ajjhosāna
neuter cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, DN ii.58f.; iii.289 MN i.498 (+ abhinandana) SN iii.187 AN i.66 AN ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combination with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (‣ See also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha (the explanation at Dhs-a 363 370, from as to eat, is popular etymology) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā).
Ajjhosāya
  1. being tied to, hanging on, attached to only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy MN i.266 SN iv.36f.; 60, 71 sq. Mil 69 ‣See also ajjhosa
absolutive of ajjhosati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37 Divy 534
Ajjhosita
  1. [cp. Sanskrit adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + ; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sanskrit śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita ‣See ajjhāsita & ajjhesita hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. locative ) SN ii.94 (+ mamāyita) AN ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +) Nd1 75 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita Thag 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha Thag-a 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaṁ ghare taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha Pv-a 267 Burmese variant ajjhesita SS ajjhāsita)
  2. ˚an˚ SN iv.213 SN v.319 Nd1 411 Mil 74 (pabbajita).

Ajjhohata
  1. having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaṁ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook)
past participle of ajjhoharati
Ajjhoharaṇa
neuter = ajjhohāra 1. AN v.324 Ja vi.213
Ajjhoharaṇiya
adjective
  1. something fit to eat, eatable, for eating Ja vi.258 Dhp-a i.284
gerundive of ajjhoharati
Ajjhoharati
  1. to swallow, eat, take as food MN i.245 Ja i.460 Ja ii.293 vi.205, 213 Mil 366 Pv-a 283 (aorist )-
  2. past participle ajjhohaṭa (q.v.)
  3. Sanskrit abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ
Ajjhohāra
  1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233 Mil 176 Mil 366
  2. N of a fabulous fish (swallower”; cp. timingala) Ja v.462
Sanskrit abhyavahāra
Añcati
  1. J i.417, read añchati ‣See next
Añchati
  1. to pull, drag, pull along to turn on a lathe DN ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaṁ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = MN i.56 (variant readings p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚) Thag 1, 750 (añcāmi Text, v.l aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at Ja i.417 for udakaṁ añcanti (in explanation of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q.v.), where it corresponds to udakaṁ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence
in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sanskrit gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prakrit aṁchāvei = añchati ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 60
Añja
  • adverb [originally
  • imperative of añjati1; cp. Sanskrit anjasā instrumental quickly, Gothic anaks suddenly, literally with a pull or jerk pull on! go on! gee up! Ja i.192

Añjati1
  1. ‣See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa
= Sanskrit ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sanskrit ṛju straight, causative irajyati; Latin rego, rectus = erect ‣See also Pali uju, añchati, ajjita ānañja-ānejja
Añjati2 & Añjeti;
  1. to smear, anoint, paint SN ii.281 Ja iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, Burmese variant añcitvā). causative ii.añjāpeti Dhp-a i.21
  2. past participle añjita (q.v.)
  3. = Sanskrit añjayati, causative of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sanskrit añji ointment, ājya butter; Latin unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Old High German ancho = German Anke butter
Añjana
neuter
  1. ointment, especially a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adjective anointed, smeary glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note)
  1. -1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla) DN i.7 DN i.12 DN-a i.98 (khār˚); 284 Dhp-a iii.354 (akkhi eye-salve)
  • glossy, jet-black Ja i.194 Ja ii.369 Ja v.416 The reading añjana at AN iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaṁ ‣See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Thag 2, 413 (= añjana-nāḷi Thag-a 267) Dhp-a ii.25
  1. ˚akkhiha with anointed eyes Thag 1, 960
  • ˚upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203 Vin ii.112
  • ˚cuṇṇa aromatic powder Dhs-a 13
  • ˚nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box Thag-a 267
  • ˚rukkha name of a tree (“black tree) Ja i.331
  • ˚vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i.e. shiny, glossy, dark, black DN ii.18 (lomāni) Ja i.138 (kesā) 194; ii.369 Pv-a 258 (vana)
from añjati2
Añjanī
feminine
  1. a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203 204; ii.135; iv.168 MN ii.65 = Thag 1, 773
from añjana
Añjanisalākā
feminine a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203 Vin ii.135 Ja iii.419
Añjaya
adjective
  1. straight Ja iii.12 (variant readings ajjava & and ājjava better?) explained by Commentary as ujuka, akuṭila ‣See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?
from añjati1
Añjali
extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. English to “tender” one’s respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (Vv-a 7: dasanakha-samodhāna-samujjalaṁ añjaliṁ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliṁ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188 DN i.118 Snp 352 Snp p. 79 (b.) ˚ṁ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation Ja i.54 Dhp-a iv.212 Vv-a 7 312 sirasmiṁ on one’s head) Pv-a 93 (c.) ˚ṁ karoti identical Pv-a 178 cp. katañjali (adjective with raised hands Snp 1023 Ja i.17 Pv-a 50 and añjalikata identical Pv ii.1220. cp. pañjali
  1. ˚kamma respectful salutation, as above AN i.123 AN ii.180 iv.130 Vv 788 8316 Dhp-a i.32
  • ˚karaṇīya
  • adjective that is worthy of being thus honoured DN iii.5 AN ii.34 AN iii.36 iv.13 sq. Iti 88
cp. Sanskrit añjali, from añjati1
Añjalikā
feminine
  1. the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (explained at Vv-a 24 as dasanakha-samodhāna samujjalaṁ añjaliṁ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa-visiṭṭhānaṁ apacayānaṁ akāsiṁ)
= añjali
Añjasa
  1. straight, straightforward (of a road) DN i.235 Ja i.5 Thag 2, 99 Vv 5020 (cp. Vv-a 215) Vv-a 84 (akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5 Mil 217 Sdhp 328 Sdhp 595. cp. pañjasa
Sanskrit āñjasa (?). cp. ārjava = Pali ajjava ‣See añjati1 & añjaya
Añjita
  1. smeared, anointed Ja i.77 (su-añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjit’akkha)
Sanskrit ankta & añjayita, past participle of añjeti
Añña
  1. (pronoun )

    1. another etc
    • A. By itself: 1. other not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route) Snp 459 Snp 789 Snp 904 Dhp 158 (opp attānaṁ), 165 Ja i.151 (opposite attano); ii.333 (aññaṁ vyākaroti give a different answer)
    • another one, a second
    • neuter else, further Snp 1052 (= uttariṁ
    • neuter Nd2 17); else Ja i.294 aññaṁ kiñci (in def) anything else Ja i.151 yo añño every other, whoever else Ja i.256

  2. aññe (

    • plural (the) others, the rest Snp 189 Snp 663 Snp 911 Dhp 43 Dhp 252 Dhp 355 Ja i.254
    • B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña. añña the one.. the other (.. the third etc.); this, that & the other; some.. some Vin i.15 Mil 40 etc. 2. reciprocative añño aññaṁ, aññamaññaṁ, aññoññaṁ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adjective in singular). (a.) añño aññaṁ Dhp 165 (b.) aññamañña (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit añyamañya Mvu ii.436) as
    • pronoun : n'ālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211 n'aññamaññassa dukkhaṁ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Snp 148 daṇḍehi aññamaññaṁ upakkamanti (approach each other) MN i.86 = Nd2 199 ˚ṁ agāravo viharati AN iii.247 dve janā ˚ṁ ghātayiṁsu (slew each other) Ja i.254 aññamaññaṁ hasanti Ja v.111 ˚ṁ musale hantvā Ja v.267 ˚ṁ daṇḍâbhigāṭena Pv-a 58 or adjective: aññamaññaṁ veraṁ bandhiṁsu (established mutual enmity) Ja ii.353 ˚ṁ piyasaṁvāsaṁ vasiṁsu Ja ii.153 aññamaññaṁ accayaṁ desetvā (their mutual mistake) Dhp-a i.57 or
    • adverb dve pi aññamaññaṁ paṭibaddha citta ahesuṁ (in love with each other) Ja iii.188 or ˚-: aññamañña-paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps ii.49, 58. (c.) aññoñña (˚-) Ja v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna)
    • disjunctive añña.. añña one.. the other, this one … that one, different, different from aññaṁ jīvaṁ. aññaṁ sarīraṁ one is the soul.. the other is the body i.e. the soul is different from the body DN i.157 MN i.430 AN v.193 aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā DN i.187 Thus also in phrase aññena aññaṁ opposite, the contrary differently, contradictory (literally other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter-charges) DN i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply) Mil 171 (aññaṁ kayiramānaṁ aññena sambharati). anañña (1) not another, i.e. the same, self-same, identical MN i.256 (= ayaṁ).
    • not anotber, i.e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Snp 65 (˚posin; opposite paraṁ) = Nd 4 cp. Nd2 36.
    • not another, i.e. no more, only, alone Snp p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two) ‣See also under compounds
    1. ˚ādisa different Ja vi.212 ˚tā difference Pv-a 243
    • ˚khantika acquiescing in different views, following another faith ‣See khantika DN i.187 MN i.487
    • ˚titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non-Buddhist. DN iii.115 MN i.494 MN i.512 Pali ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228 v.6, 27 sq. AN i.65 AN i.240 AN ii.176 AN iv.35f. Vin i.60 Ja i.93 Ja ii.415
    • ˚diṭṭhika having different views (combined with añña-khantika) DN i.187 MN i.487
    • ˚neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i.e. independent in one’s views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opposite para˚) Snp 55 Snp 213 Snp 364
    • ˚mano (an˚)
    • adjective not setting one’s heart upon others Vv 115 ‣See Vv-a 58
    • ˚vāda holding other views, an˚
    • adjective Dīpavaṁsa iv.24
    • ˚vādaka one who gives a different account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36
    • ˚vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent-minded Vin iv.269 Dhp-a iii.352 381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness Dhp-a i.181
    • ˚saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i.e. of independent, sure knowledge SN iii.42 = v.154
    • ˚sita dependent or relying on others Snp 825
    Vedic anya, with compar. suffix ya; Gothic anpar; Old High German andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Latin alius (cp. alter) Gothic aljis Anglo-Saxon elles = English else. From demonstrative base *eno ‣See na1 and cp. a3
Aññatama
  1. (pronoun adjective)

    1. one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14
    añña + superl. suffix tama ‣See also aññatara
Aññatara
  1. (pronoun adjective)

    1. one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka as indefinite article “a". Very frequent, e.g. Snp 35 Snp 210 Iti 103 Dhp 137 Dhp 157 Ja i.221 Ja i.253 Ja ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i.e. any kind of god SN iv.180 = AN iv.461
    Sanskrit anyatara, añña + compar. suffix tara, cp. Latin alter, Gothic anpar etc.
Aññattha
adverb
  1. somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) Ja i.291 Ja ii.154 Dhs-a 163 Dhp-a i.212 Dhp-a iii.351 Pv-a 45 Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14
from añña = aññatra, adverb of place, cp. kattha, ettha
Aññatra
adverb
  1. elsewhere, somewhere else Ja v.252 Pv iv.162. In compound also añña˚, e.g. aññatra-yoga adjective following another discipline DN i.187 MN i.487

    • As preposition c. ablative (and instrumental) but besides, except, e.g. a. iminā tapo-pakkamena DN i.168 kiṁ karaṇīyaṁ a. dhammacariyāya SN i.101 ko nu aññatram-ariyehi who else but the Nobles Snp 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā-mattena Snp-a 555)
    • ˚kiṁ aññatra what but, i.e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānī k. a. avusitattā) SN i.29 (k. k. a adassanā except from blindness) Snp 206 (identical)
    anya + tra ‣See also aññattha
Aññathatta
neuter
  1. change, alteration SN iii.37 SN iv.40 AN i.153 AN iii.66 Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu translation 55 note 2) Mil 209
  2. difference Ja i.147 Iti 11
  3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2 SN iii.91 SN iv.329

    • fickleness, change of mind, doubt wavering, MN i.448 MN i.457 (+ domanassa) Ja i.33 (cittaṁ) Pv-a 195 (cittassa)
aññathā + tta
Aññathā
adverb
  1. in a different manner, otherwise, differently SN i.24 Snp 588 Snp 757 Dhs-a 163 Pv-a 125 Pv-a 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418
  • anaññatha
  • neuter certainty, truth Ps ii.104 (= tatha).

    1. ˚bhāva (1) a different existence AN ii.10 Iti 9 = 94 Snp 729 Snp 740 Snp 752 (2) a state of difference; i.e. change alteration, unstableness DN i.36 SN ii.274 SN iii.8 SN iii.16 SN iii.42 Vb 379
    • ˚bhāvin based on difference SN iii.225f. iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36
    añña + thā
Aññadatthu
adverb
  1. participle of affirmation = surely, all-round absolutely (ekaṁsa-vacane nipāto DN-a i.111) only, at any rate DN i.91 DN ii.284 Snp 828 (na h’aññadatth’atthi pasaṁsa-lābhā, explained Snp-a 541 as na hi ettha pasaṁsa-lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd1 168) Mil 133 Vv-a 58 Pv-a 97 Pv-a 114
  1. ˚dasa sure-seeing ‣Seeing everything, all pervading DN i.18 DN iii.135 DN iii.185 AN ii.24 AN iii.202 AN iv.89 AN iv.105 Iti 15
literally aññad atthu let there be anything else, i.e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all everything, surely
Aññadā
adverb
  1. at another time, else, once SN iv.285 Ja v.12 Dhp-a iv.125
añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā
Aññā
feminine
  1. knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 note 3 and Psalms of the Brethren introduction xxxiii.) MN i.445 SN i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭh’eva dhamme) 133, 237 AN iii.82 AN iii.143 AN iii.192 AN v.108 Iti 39f. 53, 104 Dhp 75 Dhp 96; Kh vii.11 Mil 334
  • aññaṁ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183 SN ii.51f. 120; iv.139; v.222 Ja i.140 Ja ii.333 ‣See also arahatta
  1. ˚atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114
  2. ˚ārādhana the attainment of full insight MN i.479
  • ˚indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect DN iii.219 SN v.204 Iti 53 Pug 2 Dhs 362 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60
  • ˚citta the thought of gnosis the intention of gaining Arahantship SN ii.267 AN iii.437
  • ˚paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238
  • ˚vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Snp 1105 Snp 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta-vimokkho)
Sanskrit ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti
Aññāṇa
neuter
  1. ignorance ‣See ñāṇa 3 e
a + ñāṇa
Aññāṇaka
neuter
  1. ignorance Vin iv.144
Demin. of aññāṇa
Aññāṇin
adjective
  1. ignorant, not knowing Dhp-a iii.106
a + ñāṇin
Aññāta1
  1. known, recognised Snp 699
  • an˚ what is not known, in phrase anaññāta-ññassāmī’t’indriya the faculty of him (who believes): “I shall know what is not known (yet)” DN iii.219 SN v.204 Iti 53 Pug 2 Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs translation 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.

    1. ˚mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge one who imagines to be in possession of right insight AN iii.175f. Thag 1, 953
    past participle of ājānāti, q.v.
Aññāta2
  1. unknown ‣See ñāta
a + ñāta
Aññātaka1
  1. he who is not a kinsman Dhp-a i.222
a + ñātaka, cp. Sanskrit ajñāti
Aññātaka2
adjective
  1. unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise Ja i.14 Ja iii.116 Ja v.102
Demin. of aññāta2
Aññātar
  1. one who knows, a knower of DN ii.286 MN i.169 SN i.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561
agent noun to ājānāti
Aññātāvin
adjective-noun
  1. one who has complete insight Dhs-a 291
  1. ˚indriya (˚tāv’indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs translation 150) and same loci as under aññindriya ‣See aññā
from ājānāti
Aññātukāma
adjective
  1. desirous of gaining right knowledge AN iii.192 ‣See ājānāti
ā + jñātuṁ + kāma
Aññāya
  1. reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of SN i.24 AN iii.41 Dhp 275 Dhp 411
absolutive of ājānāti, q.v. for detail
Aññoñña
  1. ‣See añña B 2 c
Añhamāna
  1. eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Snp 240 all MSS at 239 have asamāna. Snp-a 284 explains by āhārayamāna
Sanskrit aśnāna, ppr. medium of aśnāti, to eat
Aṭaṭa
  1. name of a certain purgatory or Niraya. AN v.173 = Snp p. 126
Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aṭaṭa (e.g. Divy 67), probably to aṭ; roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom
Aṭaṇaka
adjective
  1. roaming about, wild Ja v.105 (˚gāvī)
cp. Sanskrit aṭana, to aṭ
Aṭanī
feminine a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168 Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357) Dhp-a i.234 Ja ii.387 Ja ii.425 Ja ii.484 supports of a seat. Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three-legged stand ‣See also Vin Texts ii.53.
Aṭala
adjective
  1. solid, firm, strong, only in phrase; aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals MN ii.155 (variant readings paṭaliye & agaliyo) = SN i.226 (variant readings āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Buddhaghosa explains gaṇangaṇ-ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rhys Davids (Kindred Sayings i.291) translates “buskined shoes"
cp. Sanskrit aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold
Aṭavī
feminine
  1. forest, woods Ja i.306 Ja ii.117 Ja iii.220 Dhp-a i.13 Pv-a 277 Pv-a 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe Ja vi.55 (= aṭavicorā Commentary ).

    1. ˚rakkhika guardian of the forest Ja ii.335
    • ˚saṅkhepa at AN i.178 = iii.66 is probably faulty reading for variant reading ˚sankopa “inroad of savage tribes"
    Sanskrit aṭavī: Non-Aryan, probably Dravidian
Aṭṭa1
  1. a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin i.140 DN-a i.209
cp ‣See aṭṭaka
Aṭṭa2
  1. lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224 Ja ii.2 Ja ii.75 Ja iv.129 (˚ṁ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ṁ tīreti to ‣See a suit through); vi.336
cp. Sanskrit artha ‣See also attha 5 b
Aṭṭa3
distressed, tormented afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Snp 694 (+ vyasanagata Snp-a 489 ātura) Thag 2, 439 (= aṭṭita Thag-a 270), 441 (= pīḷita Thag-a 271) Ja iv.293 (= ātura Commentary ) Vv 809 (attita upadduta Vv-a 311). Often—˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt MN i.463 Mil 32 chāt˚ tormented by hunger Vv-a 76 vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61 Vin iii.100 Ja i.293 sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23.
  1. ˚ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105 SN ii.255 Ja i.265 ii.117 Mil 357 Pv-a 285
Sanskrit ārta, past participle of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sanskrit ārdra (= Pali adda and alla) ‣See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita
Aṭṭaka
  1. a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173 Vin ii.416 Vin iii.322 372 DN-a i.209
Demin. of aṭṭa1
Aṭṭāna
  1. at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Buddhaghosa as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Buddhaghosa on p. 315)
Aṭṭāla
  1. a watch-tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Thag 1, 863 Ja iii.160 v.373 Mil 1 Mil 330 Dhp-a iii.488
from aṭṭa
Aṭṭālaka
  1. = aṭṭāla Ja ii.94 Ja ii.220 Ja ii.224 Ja vi.390 Ja vi.433 Mil 66 Mil 81
Sanskrit aṭṭālaka
Aṭṭita
(& occasionally; addita, e.g. Pv ii.62 Thag 2, 77 89 Thag 1, 406)
  1. pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Thag 1, 157 Ja ii.436 Ja iv.85 (variant reading addhita); v.84 Vv-a 311 Thag-a 270 Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dīpavaṁsa i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205 ‣See remarks of Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.; Attiyati & Attiyati;
Sanskrit ardita, past participle of ardayati, causative of ardati ‣See aṭṭa3
Aṭṭiyati
Aṭṭiyati;
  1. to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combined with harāyati, e.g. DN i.213 (+ jigucchati) SN i.131 MN i.423 Pv i.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā Pv-a 48) frequently in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna Vin ii.292 Ja i.66 Ja i.292 Iti 43 Nd2 566; Ps i.159. Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e.g. Thag 2, 140 past participle aṭṭita & addita
  2. denominative from aṭṭa3, q.v.
Aṭṭiyana
neuter
  1. fright, terror, amazement Dhp-a ii.179
cp. Sanskrit ardana, to aṭṭiyati
Aṭṭha1
  1. numerical cardinal eight, declension like plural of adjective in-a A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena ‣See compounds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda B. The number in subjective significance.
  2. As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning “a couple” aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva-k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) Dhp-a i.213 sanghassa a salākabhattaṁ dāpesi Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104 a. piṇḍapātāni adadaṁ Vv 348 a. vattha-yugāni (a double pair as offering) Pv-a 232 a therā Pv-a 32

    • The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is frequently applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a “royal” gift goes under the name of sabb-aṭṭhakaṁ dānaṁ (8 elephants, 8 horses 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars Dhp-a ii.45 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭh’aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) Dhp-a ii.41 aṭṭh-aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi Vv-a 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dīpavaṁsa vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a “couple” in the phrase satt-aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple e.g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so Ja i.86 Ja ii.101 Vv-a 264 (saṁvaccharā years)
    • (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus frequently as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā Ja i.483 Ja iv.138 Vv-a 76 Mil 291
    • In distances: a karīsā Dhp-a ii.80 Dhp-a iv.217 Pv-a 258 a. usabhā Ja iv.142 (c.) in combination with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of “a great many”, hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataṁ 800, Snp 227 As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a—˚sata-sahassa-vibhava Dhp-a iv.7 But aṭṭhasata at SN iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at Ja v.377
    • aṭṭha sahassaṁ 8000 Ja v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combination with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): () 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa ‣See anuvyañjana, besides the 32 main signs ‣See dvattiṁsa Vv-a 213 etc. Frequently as measure of riches, e.g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti-koṭivibhava Dhp-a iii.129 Pv-a 196 asīti hatth’ubbedho rāsi (of gold Vv-a 66 etc ‣See further references under asīti
    • () The following are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only MN iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) Vv-a 213 (avenika-buddhadhammā: Bhagavant’s qualities); as measure Ja vi.432 (18 hands high of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis Ja i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana riches) Dhp-a ii.43 (of people) Mil 20 (identical); a. akkhohini-sankhāsenā Ja vi.395 a. vatthū Vin ii.204
    • 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Mil 140
    • 38 aṭṭhatiṁsā Mil 359 (rājaparisā)
    • 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaṁ vassāni Snp 289
    • 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Thag 1, 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where identical passage at SN i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi-tasitā vitakkā) Ja i.64 (turiya-satasahassāni) 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15 Snp 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases cp. navuti).
    • As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q.v.) a comprehensive unity ‣See especially the compounds for this application. ˚aṁsa and ˚aṅgika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp 8 X 8 under 1 a)-J v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata of Indra’s chariot: with the 8 lucky signs) Vv-a 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṁ manussabhāvaṁ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: Ja iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then following by 8, 16, 32) Pv-a 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the com
    • passive 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language Dhp-a iv.3
    1. ˚aṁsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry ‣See above B. 2, of a diamond DN i.76 = MN iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.) Mil 282 (maṇiratanaṁ subhaṁ jātimantaṁ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) Ja vi.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā) Vv 8415 (āyataṁsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha-soḷasadvattiṁsādi-aṁsavanto Vv-a 339). Of a ball of string Pv iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. Pv-a 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617
    • ˚aṅga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (‣ See also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compound with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i.e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows ‣See sīla & cp. anga 2), of; uposatha the fast-day AN i.215 Snp 402 (Sn AN 378 explains ekam pi divasaṁ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaṁ uposathaṁ upavassa) cp. aṭṭhanguposathin
    • adjective Mhvs 36, 84. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit always in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgata upavāsa, e.g. Divy 398 Sp. Avs i.338, 399; also vrata Avs i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q.v.) Snp 402 where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (explained at Vv-a 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī-ādīhi aṭṭhah’angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities ‣See anga 3, of rājā, a king DN i.137f. of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) DN ii.211 Ja i.95 Vv-a 217 Also in Buddh. Sanskrit aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e.g. Sp. Avs i.149
    • ˚aṅgika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts embracing eight items ‣See above B 2; of the uposatha (as in preceding aṭṭhang’uposatha) Snp 401 of the “Eightfold Noble Path” (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as aṣṭāngika mārga, e.g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124 Divy 265) DN i.156 DN i.157 165 MN i.118 Iti 18 Snp 1130 (magga uttama) Dhp 191 Dhp 273 Thag 2, 158 171; Kh iv. Vin i.10 Nd2 485 DN-a i.313 Dhp-a iii.402
    • ˚aṅgula eight finger-breadths thick eight inches thick, i.e. very thick, of double thickness Ja ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula)
    • ˚aḍḍha (variant reading aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i.e. four (˚pāda) Ja vi.354 ‣See also aḍḍha1
    • ˚nakha having eight nails or claws Ja vi.354 (: ekekasmiṁ pāde dvinnaṁ dvinnaṁ khurānaṁ vasena Commentary )
    • ˚nava eight or nine Dhp-a iii.179
    • ˚pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., literally having eight squares, i.e. on each side (DN-a i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada DN i.6
    • eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross-plaited (of hair) Thag 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada-katā kesā) Ja ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross-plaiting)
    • ˚padaka a small square (1/8), i.e. a patch Vin i.297 Vin ii.150
    • ˚pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) Ja v.377 vi.538; cp. Sanskrit aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight-legged animal
    • ˚maṅgala having eight anspicious signs Ja v.409 (explained here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs)
    • ˚vaṅka with eight facets, literally eight-crooked i.e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel Ja vi.388
    • ˚vidha eightfold Dhs 219
Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Indogermanic *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (‣ See also nava); Avestan ašta Latin octo, Gothic ahtau = Old High German ahto, German acht English eight
Aṭṭha2
  1. ‣See attha
Aṭṭhaka
adjective
  1. -1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni) Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104 (˚bhatta)
  • ˚ā
  • feminine the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antar’aṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i.e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31 288 ‣See Vin Texst i.130n MN i.79 AN i.136 Mil 396 Ja i.390

  • ˚ṁ

    • neuter an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh eight octads = 64) Vv-a 289 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka ‣See aṭṭha B 1 a ‣See also antara
    Sanskrit aṣṭaka
  • Aṭṭhama
    (numeral ordinal)
    1. the eighth Snp 107 Snp 230 (cp. Kp-a 187), 437. feminine ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) AN i.144 Snp 402 Vv 166 (in all three
    2. passive as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī) AN i.142 Snp 570 (ito atthami scil. divase, locative )
    3. Sanskrit aṣṭama ‣See aṭṭha1
    Aṭṭhamaka
    = aṭṭhama the eighth.
    1. -1. literally Mil 291 (att˚ self-eighth)
    • as technical term the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q.v. Kvu 243
    1. -251 (cp. Kvu translation 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50 Ps ii.193 (+ sotāpanna)
    Aṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. stand, post; name of the rubbing-post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares was let into the ground of a bathing-place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105 106 (read aṭṭhāne with Burmese manuscripts ; cp. Vin ii.315)
    2. ā + ṭṭhāna
    Aṭṭhi˚1
    1. in combination with katvā : to make something one’s attha, i.e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā DN ii.204 MN i.325 MN i.445 SN i.112f. = 189, 220; v.76 AN ii.116 AN iii.163 Ja i.189 Ja v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaṁ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaṁ suṇeyya Commentary ) Ud 80 (: adhikicca ayaṁ no attho adhigantabbo evaṁ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā Commentary ); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna)
    = attha (aṭṭha) in compound with kar & bhū, as frequently in Sanskrit and Pali with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta˚) angi-bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the frequently combination (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combination is restricted to the past participle and
  • absolutive (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other explanations by Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 107; Windisch, Māra & Buddha 100
  • Aṭṭhi2
    neuter
    1. a bone AN i.50 AN iv.129 Snp 194 (˚nahāru bones tendons) Dhp 149 Dhp 150 Ja i.70 Ja iii.26 Ja iii.184 Ja vi.448 (˚vedhin) Dhp-a iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); Kp-a 49 Pv-a 68 (˚camma-nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46 Sdhp 103
    2. the stone of a fruit Ja ii.104
    3. -kaṅkala Sanskrit ˚kankāla

      1. a skeleton MN i.364 cp. ˚sankhalika
      2. ˚kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) Ja v.406
      • ˚kalyāṇa beauty of bones Dhp-a i.387
      • ˚camma bones and skin Ja ii.339 Dhp-a iii.43 Pv-a 68
      • ˚taca identical Ja ii.295
      • ˚maya made of bone Vin ii.115
      • ˚miñjā marrow AN iv.129 Dhp-a i.181 Dhp-a iii.361 Kp-a 52 -yaka (Text aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver SN i.206
      • ˚saṅkhalikā B. Sanskrit ˚śakalā Sp. Avs i.274 sq ‣See also aṭṭhika˚
        1. a chain of bones, i.e. a skeleton Dhp-a iii.479 Pv-a 152
        • ˚saṅghāṭa conjunction of bones, i.e. skeleton Vism 21 Dhp-a ii.28 Pv-a 206
        • ˚sañcaya a heap of bones Iti 17 Bdhd 87
        • ˚saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Thag 1 18
        • ˚saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101
        Sanskrit asthi = Avestan asti, Latin os (*oss); also Gothic asts
    Aṭṭhika1
    neuter
    1. = aṭṭhi.1 a bone MN iii.92 Ja i.265 Ja i.428 Ja vi.404 Pv-a 41
    2. = aṭṭhi.2 kernel, stone Dhp-a ii.53 (tāl˚); Mhvs 15, 42
      1. ˚saṅkhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton AN iii.324 ‣See also under kaṭaṭṭhika
      2. ˚saññā the idea of a skeleton SN v.129f. AN ii.17 Dhs 264
      from aṭṭhi
    Aṭṭhika2
    1. at Pv-a 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q.v.) for aṭṭika
    Aṭṭhita1
    1. ‣See ṭhita
    Aṭṭhita2
    1. undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered Ja ii.247 (= adhiṭṭhita Commentary )
    ā + ṭhita
    Aṭṭhita3
    1. ‣See atthika
    Aṭṭhilla
    1. at Vin ii.266 is explained by Buddhaghosa on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sanskrit aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone
    Aḍḍha1
    (& addha)
    1. one half, half; usually in compound ‣See below, like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) Pv-a 155 ‣See as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107. Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for “half in absolute position upaḍḍha (q.v.) is always used
    1. ˚akkhika with furtive glance (“half an eye”) Dhp-a iv.98
    • ˚aṭṭha half of eight, i.e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) SN ii.222 (˚ratana) Ja vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; variant reading for aṭṭhaḍḍha) -aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) Dhp-a iii.367
    • ˚uḍḍha cp Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sanskrit caturtha
      1. three and a half Ja i.82 Ja iv.180 Ja v.417 Ja v.420 Dhp-a i.87 Mhvs 12, 53 -ocitaka half plucked off Ja i.120
      • ˚karīsa (-matta) half a k. in extent Vv-a 64 (cp. aṭṭha-karīsa)
      • ˚kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa. AN v.83
      • ˚kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i.e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in Text) Ja v.447 (a˚- kāsigaṇikā for a—˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚-k˚-gaṇikā viya na bahunnaṁ piyā manāpā)
      • ˚kumbha a half (-filled pitcher Snp 721
      • ˚kusi (technical term of tailoring) a short intermediate cross-seam Vin i.287
      • ˚kosa half a room, a small room Ja vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara Commentary )
      • ˚gāvuta half a league Ja vi.55
      • ˚cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Mil 102 perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. AN iii.52) a half āḷha of rice
      • ˚tiya the third (unit) less half, i.e. two and a half Vv-a 66 (māsā) Ja i.49 Ja i.206 Ja i.255 (˚sata 250). cp. next
      • ˚teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2 Vin iv.117 Ja ii.129 (˚sata) DN-a i.173 (Burmese variant for ˚tiya) Dhp-a i.95 (˚sata) 279 Pv-a 20 (˚sahassa)
      • ˚telasa [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ardhatrayodaśa twelve and a half Vin i.243 247 DN ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b) Dhp-a iii.369
      • ˚daṇḍaka a short stick MN i.87 = AN i.47 AN ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Mil 197
      • ˚duka ‣See ˚ruka
      • ˚nāḷika (-matta) half a nāḷi-measure full Ja vi.366
      • ˚pallaṅka half a divan Vin ii.280
      • ˚bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga Vv-a 61) Pv i.115
      • ˚maṇḍala semi-circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287
      • ˚māna half a māna measure Ja i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaṁ nāḷinaṁ nāmaṁ Commentary )
      • ˚māsa half a month, a half month a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚) AN v.85 Ja iii.218 Vv-a 66 frequently in
      • accusative as
      • adverb for a fortnight, e.g. Vin iv.117 Vv-a 67 Pv-a 55
      • ˚māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value ‣See māsaka) Ja i.111
      • ˚māsika halfmonthly Pug 55
      • ˚muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42
      • ˚yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = 96, 107 139, 239, 284; ii.146.
      • accusative to Vin Text i.174 “a gold coloured Bengal house” (Buddhaghosa), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha “like a Garuḷa bird’s crooked wing”, i.e. where the roof is bent on one side
      • ˚yojana half a yojana (in distance) Ja v.410 DN-a i.35 (in explanation of addhāna-magga) Dhp-a i.147 ii.74
      • ˚rattā midnight AN iii.407 (˚aṁ
      • adverb at
      • masculine ) Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaṁ
      • adverb = aḍḍharattiyaṁ Vv-a 315) Ja i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (identical)
      • ˚ratti = ˚rattā Vv-a 255 315 (majjhimayāma-samaya) Pv-a 155
      • ˚ruka (variant reading ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134 Buddhaghosa explanation on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji-ṭhapanaṁ “leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach"
      • ˚vivata (dvāra half open Ja v.293
      etymology uncertain, Sanskrit ardha
    Aḍḍha2
    adjective
    1. rich, opulent, wealthy, well-to-do usually in combination with mahaddhana & mahābhoga; of great wealth & resources (following by pahūta-jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at DN i.115, 134, 137; iii.163 Pug 52 Dhp-a i.3 Vv-a 322 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 78 etc. In other combination Vv 314 (˚kula) Nd2 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā) DN-a i.281 (= issara) Dhp-a ii.37 (˚kula) Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (identical), 561
    Sanskrit āḍhya from ṛddha
  • past participle of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate ‣See ijjhati to thrive cp. Latin alo to nourish. cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & Pali iddhi power ‣See also āḷhiya
  • Aḍḍhaka
    adjective wealthy, rich, influential Ja iv.495 Pv ii.82 (= mahāvibhava Pv-a 107).
    Aḍḍhatā
    feminine
    1. riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316
    abstract to aḍḍha
    Aṇa
    1. debt, only in negative anaṇa (adjective free from debt Vin i.6 = SN i.137 SN i.234 = DN ii.39 Thag 2 364 (i.e. without a new birth) AN ii.69 Ja v.481 Thag-a 245
    Sanskrit ṛṇa ‣See etymology under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet ‣See also āṇaṇya
    Aṇu
    adjective
    1. small, minute, atomic, subtle (opposite thūla, q.v.) DN i.223 SN i.136 SN v.96 (˚bīja) Snp 299 (anuto aṇuṁ gradually) Ja iii.12 (= appamattaka); iv.203 Dhs 230 617 (= kisa) Thag-a 173 Mil 361 Note aṇu is frequently spelt anu, thus usually in compound ˚matta
    1. ˚thūla (aṇuṁthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dhp 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca Dhp-a; i.282), 409 = Snp 633 Ja iv.192 Dhp-a iv.184
    • ˚matta of small size, atomic least Snp 431 Vb 244 247 (cp. MN iii.134 AN ii.22) Dīpavaṁsa iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at DN i.63 = Iti 118 Dhp 284 DN-a i.181 Sdhp 347
    • ˚sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i.e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu translation 66 note 3
    Sanskrit aṇu; as to etymology ‣See Walde Latin Wtb. under ulna ‣See also āṇi
    Aṇuka
    adjective = aṇu Snp 146 Kp-a 246.
    Aṇḍa
    neuter
    1. an egg Vin iii.3 SN ii.258 MN i.104 AN iv.125f.
    2. (
    3. plural ) the testicles Vin iii.106
    4. (in camm˚) a water-bag Ja i.249 ‣See Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 69.

      1. ˚kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = MN i.104 AN iv.126 176
      2. ˚cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder Ja iv.364 366
      3. ˚ja 1. born from eggs SN iii.241 (of snakes) MN i.73 Ja ii.53 = v.85 Mil 267
      • a bird J. v.189
      • ˚bhārin bearing his testicles SN ii.258 = Vin iii.100
      • ˚sambhava the product of an egg, i.e. a bird Thag 1, 599
      • ˚hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles MN i.383
    Etymology unknown. cp. Sanskrit aṇḍa
    Aṇḍaka1
    1. neuter = aṇḍa, egg Dhp-a i.60 Dhp-a iii.137 (sakuṇ˚)
    Aṇḍaka2
    adjective
    1. only used of vācā speech: harsh, rough, insolent MN i.286 AN v.265 AN v.283 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā) Ja iii.260 Dhs 1343 cp. Dhs-a 396
    Sanskrit ? probably an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. Dhs-a 396 and ‣See Dhs translation 349, also Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3
    Aṇṇa
    1. (food, cereal) ‣See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa
    Aṇṇava
    neuter
    1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚ cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mahārṇava, e.g. Jtm 3175) MN i.134 SN i.214 SN iv.157 (mahā udak˚) Snp 173 (figuratively for saṁsāra ‣See Snp-a 214), 183, 184 Ja i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (identical); v.159 (mah˚) Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah˚)
    2. a stream, river Ja iii.521 Ja v.255
    Sanskrit arṇa & arṇava to; ; , ṛṇoti to move, Indogermanic *er to be in quick motion, cp. Latin orior Gothic rinnan = English run; Old High German runs, river, flow.
    Aṇha
    1. day, only as—˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q.v
    Sanskrit ahna, day ‣See ahan
    Atakkaka
    adjective
    1. not mixed with buttermilk Ja i.21
    a + takka2
    Ataccha
    neuter
    1. falsehood, untruth DN i.3 Ja vi.207
    a + taccha2
    Ati
    indeclinable
    1. adverb and prep of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning “on and further”, then “up to and beyond". I. in abstr position adverb ially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely very (cp. ii.3) Ja vi.133 (ati uggata Commentary = accuggata Text) 307 (ati ahitaṁ Commentary = accāhitaṁ Text).

      1. II. as prefix, meaning
      1. -1. on to, up to, towards until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, passive on; atipāta “falling on to”; attack slaying atimāpeti to put damage on to, i.e. to destroy
      • over beyond, past, by, trans-; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to
      • passive beyond, sur
      • passive atimaññati to put one’s “manas over, to despise; atirocati to sur
      • passive in splendour. (b. intransitive atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond
      • Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression (“going over”); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin

    2. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much or too (much); in nominativenal compound (a), rarely also in verbal compound ‣See (b)

      • (a) with nouns & adjective: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near deva a super-god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively
      1. III. A peculiar use of ati is its’ function in reduplication-compounds, expressing “and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc.” like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e.g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q.v.), the only phrases being the following viz cakkāticakkaṁ mañcātimañcaṁ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to ‣See a procession) Vin iv.360 (Buddhaghosa) Ja ii.331 Ja iv.81 Dhp-a iv.61
      • ˚devātideva god upon god, god and more than a god ‣See atideva; mānātimāna all kinds of conceit; vaṅkātivaṅka crooked all over Ja i.160

        • IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresponding expression in later Sanskrit shows abhi ‣See e. g the following cases for comparison: accuṇha ati-jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti
        1. Note The contracted (assimilation-) form of ati before vowels is acc- (q.v.) ‣See also for adverb use atiriva, ativiya atīva
      sk. ati = Latin et and Gothic ip.
    Ati-ambila
    adjective
    1. too sour Dhp-a ii.85
    ati + ambila
    Ati-arahant
    1. a super-Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Mil 277
    ati + arahant
    Ati-issara
    adjective very powerful(?) Ja v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin). Ati-unha
    Ati-uṇha
    adjective too hot Pv-a 37 (˚ātapa glow) ‣See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).
    Ati-uttama
    adjective by far the best or highest Vv-a 80
    Ati-udaka
    1. too much water, excess of water Dhp-a i.52
    Ati-ussura
    adjective only in
    • locative ˚e (
    • adverb ) too soon after sunrise, too early Vv-a 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early).

    Ati-eti
    1. to go past or beyond ‣See absolutive aticca and
    2. past participle atīta
    3. ati + i
    Atikata
    1. (past participle ) more than done to, i.e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree AN i.62

    Atikaddhati
    1. to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17
    ati + kaḍḍhati
    Atikaṇha
    adjective
    1. too black Vin iv.7
    ati + kaṇha
    Atikaruṇa
    adjective
    1. very pitiful, extremely miserable Ja i.202 Ja iv.142 Ja vi.53
    ati + karuṇa
    Atikassa
    1. (absolutive )

      1. pulling (right) through Ja v.173 (rajjuṁ, a rope, through the nostrils; Burmese variant anti˚)
      from atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sanskrit atikṛṣya
    Atikāla
    1. in instrumental atikālena adverb in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā)
    2. ati + kāla
    Atikkanta
    passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing Ja ii.128 (tīṇi saṁvaccharāni) Dhp-a iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life) Pv-a 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed).
    1. ˚mānusaka superhuman Iti 100 Pug 60 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit atikrānta-mānuṣyaka Mvu iii.321
    past participle of atikamati
    Atikkantikā
    feminine
    1. transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Mil 122
    Derived abstract from preceding
    Atikkama
    1. going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; figuratively overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dhp 191 Dhs 299 Pv-a 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life) Mil 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64
    Sanskrit atikrama
    Atikkamaṇaka
    adjective
    1. exceeding Ja i.153
    atikkamaṇa + ka
    Atikkamati
    1. to go beyond, to
    2. passive over, to cross, to
    3. passive by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to sur
    4. passive to be superior to
    5. J iv.141 Dhp 221 (Pot. ˚eyya overcome) Pv-a 67 (maggena: passes by).
    6. gerundive atikkamanīya to be overcome DN ii.13 (an˚) Snp-a 568 (dur˚)
    7. absolutive atikkamma DN ii.12 (surpassing) Iti 51 (māradheyyaṁ passing over), cp. variant readings under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaṁ) Pug 17 Ja i.162 (raṭṭhaṁ having left). Often to be translation as
    8. adverb “beyond”, e.g. pare beyond others Pv-a 15 Vasabhagāmaṁ beyond the village of V. Pv-a 168
    9. past participle atikkanta (q.v.)
    10. ati + kamati
    Atikkameti
    1. to make passive to cause to
    2. passive over Ja i.151
    3. causative of atikkamati
    Atikkhippaṁ
    adverb
    1. too soon Vin ii.284
    ati + khippa
    Atikhaṇa
    neuter
    1. too much digging Ja ii.296
    ati + khaṇa(na)
    Atikhāta
    neuter = preceding Ja ii.296
    Atikhiṇa
    adjective
    1. in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dhp 156 (explained at Dhp-a iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā)
    ati + khīṇa
    Atiga
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Snp 250 (sanga˚) Dhp 370 (identical) Snp 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha˚) Nd1 100 (atikkanta) Nd2 180 (identical)
      ati + ga
    Atigacchati
    1. to go over, i.e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in preterite (aorist 3rd singular accagā (q.v. and ‣See gacchati 3) Snp 1040 Dhp 414 and accagamā ‣See gacchati 2 Vin ii.192 DN i.85 SN ii.205 DN-a i.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl accaguṁ Iti 93 95
    2. ati + gacchati
    Atigāḷeti
    1. to destroy, make perish, waste away Ja vi.211 (= atigālayati vināseti Commentary p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita
    ati + gāḷeti, causative of galati, cp. Sanskrit vi-gālayati
    Atigāḷha
    adjective
    1. very tight or close, intensive Ja i.62 cp. atigāḷhita
    ati + gāḷha 1
    Atigāḷhita
    1. oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated destroyed Ja v.401 (= atipīḷita Commentary )
    past participle of atigāḷheti, denominative from atigāḷha; cp. Sanskrit atigāhate to overcome
    Atighora
    adjective
    1. very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285
    ati + ghora
    Aticaraṇa
    neuter
    1. transgression Pv-a 159
    from aticarati
    Aticarati
    1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215 Pv-a 57
    2. to transgress, to commit adultery Ja i.496 cp. next
    ati + carati
    Aticaritar
    1. one who transgresses, especially a woman who commits adultery AN ii.61 (all manuscripts read aticaritvā); iv.66 (Text aticarittā)
    agent noun of aticarati
    Aticariyā
    feminine
    1. transgression, sin, adultery DN iii.190
    ati + cariyā
    Aticāra
    1. transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra Vv-a 72)
    from aticarati
    Aticārin
    adjective noun
    1. transgressing, sinning, especially as feminine aticārinī an adulteress SN ii.259 SN iv.242 DN iii.190 AN iii.261 Pv ii.1214 Pv-a 151 (Burmese variant ), 152 Vv-a 110
    2. from aticarati
    Aticitra
    adjective
    1. very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Mil 28
    ati + citra
    Aticca
    1. (gerundive )

      1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Snp 519 Snp 529 Snp 531 Used
      2. adverb ially = beyond, in access, more than usual exceedingly Snp 373 Snp 804 (= vassasataṁ atikkamitvā Nd1 120)
      3. failing, transgressing, sinning, especially committing adultery Ja v,424 Vv-a 72
      absolutive of ati + eti, ati + i
    Aticchati
    1. to go on, only occurring in imperative aticchatha (bhante) “please go on, Sir”, asking a bhikkhu to ‣Seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ “go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like “desire in excess”, since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement
      1. Ja iii.462 Dhp-a iv.98 (Text aticcha, variant readings ˚atha) Vv-a 101 Mil 8
      • Caus aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further Ja iii.462 cp. icchatā
      * Sanskrit ati-ṛcchati, ati + ; , cp. aṇṇava
    Aticchatta
    1. a “super"-sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours Dhs-a 2
    ati + chatta
    Atitāta
    adjective
    1. well-born, well behaved, gentlemanly Iti 14 (opp avajāta
    ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta
    Atitarati
    1. to passive over, cross, go beyond
    2. aorist accatari SN iv.157 = Iti 57 (˚āri)
    3. ati + tarati
    Atituccha
    adjective
    1. very, or quite empty Sdhp 430
    ati + tuccha
    Atituṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. extreme joy Ja i.207
    ati + tuṭṭhi
    Atitula
    adjective
    1. beyond compare, incomparable Thag 1, 831 = Snp 561 (= tulaṁ atīto nirupamo ti attho Snp-a 455)
    ati + tula
    Atitta
    adjective
    1. dissatisfied, unsatisfied Ja i.440 Dhp 48
    a + titta
    Atittha
    neuter
    1. “that which is not a fordingplace". i.e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way Ja i.343 Ja iv.379 Ja vi.241 Dhp-a iii.347 DN-a i.38
    a + tittha
    Atithi
    1. a guest, stranger, newcomer DN i.117 (= āgantuka-navaka pāhuṇaka DN-a i.288) AN ii.68 AN iii.45 AN iii.260 Ja iv.31 Ja iv.274 Ja v.388 Kh viii.7 (n’atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi Kp-a 222) Vv-a 24 (= āgantuka)
    Sanskrit atithi of at = at ‣See aṭati; originally the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering
    Atidāna
    neuter
    1. too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Mil 277 Pv-a 129 Pv-a 130
    ati + dāna
    Atidāruṇa
    adjective
    1. very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73
    Sanskrit atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa
    Atiditthi
    feminine
    1. higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin i.63 = ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi-diṭṭhi?)
    ati + diṭṭhi
    Atidivā
    adverb
    1. late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena SN i.200 AN iii.117
    ati + divā
    Atidisati
    1. to give further explanation, to explain in detail Mil 304
    ati + disati
    Atidīgha
    adjective
    1. too long, extremely long Ja iv.165 Pv ii.102 Vv-a 103 (opposite atirassa
    ati + dīgha
    Atidukkha
    1. great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering Pv-a 65 Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca Pv-a 15 ati belongs to the whole compound, i.e. of very hurtful speech
    ati + dukkha
    Atidūra
    adjective
    1. very or too far Vin i.46 Ja ii.154 Pv ii.965 = Dhp-a iii.220 (variant readings suvidūre) Pv-a 42 (opposite accāsanna
    ati + dūra
    Atideva
    1. a super god, god above gods, usually epithet of the Buddha SN i.141 Thag 1, 489 Nd2 307 (cp adhi˚) Mil 277
    • atidevadeva identical Mil 203 Mil 209
    • devātideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a
    ati + deva
    Atidhamati
    1. to beat a drum too hard Ja i.283 past participle atidhanta ibid
    2. ati + dhamati
    Atidhātatā
    1. oversatiation Ja ii.193
    ati + dhāta + ta
    Atidhāvati
    1. to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of SN iii.103 SN iv.230 MN iii.19 Iti 43 Mil 136 Snp-a 21
    ati + dhāvati.1
    Atidhonacārin
    1. indulging too much in the use of the “dhonas”, i.e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (explanation at Dhp-a iii.344 cp. dhona) Dhp 240 = Nett 129
    ati + dhonacārin
    Atināmeti
    1. to passive time AN i.206 Mil 345
    2. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit atināmayati, e.g. Divy 82 Divy 443; ati + nāmeti
    Atiniggaṇhāti
    1. to rebuke too much Ja vi.417
    ati + niggaṇhāti
    Atinicaka
    adjective
    1. too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaṁ atisambādhaṁ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) Dhp-a i.310 Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68
    ati + nīcaka
    Atineti
    1. to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaṁ)
    ati + neti
    Atipaṇḍita
    (adjective
    1. too clever Dhp-a iv.38
    ati + paṇḍita
    Atipaṇḍitatā
    feminine
    1. too much cleverness Dhp-a ii.29
    abstract of atipaṇḍita
    Atipadāna
    neuter
    1. too much alms-giving Pv ii.943 (= atidāna Pv-a 130)
    ati + pa + dāna
    Atipapañca
    1. too great a delay, excessive tarrying Ja i.64 Ja ii.93
    ati + p.
    Atipariccāga
    1. excess in liberality Dhp-a iii.11
    ati + pariccāga
    Atipassati
    1. to look for, catch sight of, discover MN iii.132 (nāgaṁ)
    ati + passati; cp. Sanskrit anupaśyati
    Atipāta
    1. attack, only in phrase pāṇātipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder DN i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue) DN-a i.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta) Snp 242 Kh ii. cp. Kp-a 26 Pv-a 28 Pv-a 33 etc
    ati + pat
    Atipātin
    adjective-noun one who attacks or destroys Snp 248 Ja vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā Commentary ) Pv-a 27 (pāṇ˚).
    Atipāteti
    1. to destroy SN v.453 Dhp 246 (variant reading for atimāpeti, q.v.). cp. paripāteti
    denominative from atipāta
    Atipīṇita
    adjective
    1. too much beloved, too dear, too lovely Dhp-a v.70
    ati + pīṇita
    Atipīḷita
    1. pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed Ja v.401 (= atigāḷhita)
    ati + pīḷita, cp. Sanskrit abhipīḍita
    Atippago
    adverb
    1. too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with infinitive carituṁ etc.) DN i.178 MN i.84 AN iv.35
    cp. Sanskrit atiprage
    Atibaddha
    1. tied to, coupled Ja i.192 = Vin iv.5
    past participle of atibandhati; cp. Sanskrit anubaddha
    Atibandhati
    1. to tie close to, to harness on, to couple Ja i.191 sq
    • pp atibaddha q.v
    ati + bandhati; cp. Sanskrit anubandhati
    Atibahala
    adjective
    1. very thick Ja vi.365
    ati + bahala
    Atibāḷha
    adjective
    1. very great or strong Pv-a 178 neuter adverb ˚ṁ too much DN i.93 DN i.95 MN i.253
    2. ati + bāḷha
    Atibāheti
    1. to drive away, to pull out Ja iv.366 (= abbāheti)
    ati + bāheti, causative to bṛh1; cp. Sanskrit ābṛhati
    Atibrahmā
    1. a greater Brahma, a super-god Mil 277 Dhp-a ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.)
    ati + brahmā
    Atibrūheti
    1. to shout out, roar, cry Ja v.361 (= mahāsaddaṁ nicchāreti)
    ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by Commentary taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sanskrit abhi-bṛṇhayati
    Atibhagini-putta

    1. a very dear nephew Ja i.223
    ati + bh p.
    Atibhāra
    1. too heavy a load Mil 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati)
    ati + bhāra
    Atibhārita
    adjective
    1. too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn iv.47
    ati + bhārita
    Atibhāriya
    adjective too serious Dhp-a i.70
    Atibhuñjati
    1. to eat too much, to overeat Mil 153
    ati + bhuñjati
    Atibhutta
    neuter
    1. overeating Mil 135
    ati + bhutta
    Atibhoti
    1. to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive Ja i.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti Commentary )
    ati + bhavati, cp. Sanskrit atibhavati & abhibhavati
    Atimaññati
    1. to despise, slighten, neglect Snp 148 (= Kp-a 247 atikkamitvā maññati) Dhp 365 Dhp 366 Ja ii.347 Pv i.76 (˚issaṁ, variant reading ˚asiṁ = atikkamitvā avamaññiṁ Pv-a 37) Pv-a 36 Sdhp 609
    Sanskrit atimanyate; ati + man
    Atimaññanā
    feminine
    1. arrogance, contempt, neglect Mil 122
    abstract to preceding, cp. atimāna
    Atimanāpa
    adjective
    1. very lovely Pv-a 77 (+ abhirūpa)
    ati + manāpa
    Atimanorama
    adjective
    1. very charming Ja i.60
    ati + manorama
    Atimanohara
    adjective
    1. very charming Pv-a 46
    ati + manohara
    Atimanda(ka)
    adjective
    1. too slow, too weak Sdhp 204 Sdhp 273 Sdhp 488
    ati + manda
    Atimamāyati
    1. to favour too much, to spoil or fondle Ja ii.316
    ati + mamāyati, cp. Sanskrit atīmamāyate in different meaning = envy
    Atimahant
    adjective
    1. very or too great Ja i.221 Pv-a 75
    ati + mahant
    Atimāna
    1. high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, MN i.363 Snp 853 ‣See explanation at Nd1 233 942, 968 Ja vi.235 Nd1 490 Mil 289 cp. atimaññanā
    Sanskrit atimāna, ati + māna
    Atimānin
    adjective
    1. DN ii.45 (thaddha +) Snp 143 (an˚) 244; Kp-a 236
    from atimāna
    Atimāpeti
    1. to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaṁ atimāpeti (with variant reading atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill DN i.52 (variant reading ˚pāteti) = DN-a i.159 (: pāṇaṁ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder) MN i.404 MN i.516 SN iv.343 AN iii.205 (correct Text reading atimāteti; variant reading pāteti) Dhp 246 (variant reading ˚pāteti) = Dhp-a iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaṁ upacchindati)
    ati + māpeti, causative of , mināte, originally meaning “to do damage to”
    Atimukhara
    adjective
    1. very talkative, a chatterbox Ja i.418 Dhp-a ii.70
    • atimukharatā
    • feminine abstract ibid
    ati + mukhara
    Atimuttaka
    1. name of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = MN i.32 Mil 338
    Sanskrit atimuktaka
    Atimuduka
    adjective
    1. very soft, mild or feeble Ja i.262
    ati + muduka
    Atiyakkha
    1. (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller Ja vi.502 (Commentary bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka)
    Atiyācaka
    adjective
    1. one who asks too much Vin iii.147
    ati + yācaka
    Atiyācanā
    feminine
    1. asking or begging too much Vin iii.147
    ati + yācanā
    Atirattiṁ
    adverb
    1. late in the night, at midnight Ja i.436 (opposite atipabhāte)
    ati + ratti; cp. atidivā
    Atirassa
    adjective
    1. too short (opposite atidīgha Vin iv.7 Ja vi.457 Vv-a 103
    ati + rassa
    Atirājā
    1. a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king Dhp-a ii.60 Mil 277
    ati + rājā
    Atiriccati
    1. to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23 Sdhp 126
    ati + riccati ‣See ritta
    Atiritta
    adjective
    1. left over, only as negative an˚; applied to food, i.e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301 iv.82 sq., 85
    past participle of ati + rlc ‣See ritta
    Atiriva
    1. (ati-r-iva) ‣See ativiya
    Atireka
    adjective
    1. surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree extra Vin i.255 Ja i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions) Mil 216 Dhs-a 2 Dhp-a ii.98
    1. ˚cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289
    • ˚pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47
    Sanskrit atireka, ati + ric, rinakti ‣See ritta
    Atirekatā
    feminine
    1. excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607
    abstract to preceding
    Atirocati
    1. to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to sur passive in splendour DN ii.208 Dhp 59 Pv ii.958 Mil 336 (+ virocati Dhp-a i.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati; iii.219 Pv-a 139 (= ativiya virocati
    2. ati + ruc
    Ativaṅkin
    adjective
    1. very crooked Ja i.160 (vankâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.)
    ati + vankin
    Ativaṇṇati
    1. to sur passive excel DN ii.267
    2. ati + vaṇṇati
    Ativatta
    1. passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (active & pass.), conquered Snp 1133 (bhava˚) Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta) Ja v.84 (bhaya˚) Mil 146 Mil 154
    past participle of ativattati: Sanskrit ativṛtta
    Ativattati
    1. to passive passive over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaṁ n’) SN ii.92 (saṁsāraṁ); iv.158 (identical) Iti 9 (saṁsāraṁ) = AN ii.10 = Nd2 172a Thag 1, 412 Ja i.58 Ja i.280 iv.134; vi.113, 114 Pv-a 276
    2. past participle ativatta (q.v.)
    3. ati + vṛt, Sanskrit ativartate
    Ativattar1
    1. one who insults or offends Ja v.266 (isīnaṁ ativattāro dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro Commentary )
    Sanskrit *ativaktṛ, agent noun to ati-vacati; cp. ativākya
    Ativattar2
    1. one who overcomes or is to be overcome Snp 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76)
    Sanskrit *ativartṛ, agent noun to ati-vattati
    Ativasa
    adjective
    1. being under somebody’s rule, dependent upon (c. genitive) Dhp 74 (= vase vattati Dhp-a ii.79)
    ati + vasa from vas
    Ativassati
    1. to rain down on, upon or into Thag 1, 447 = Vin ii.240
    ati + vassati, cp. Sanskrit abhivarṣati
    Ativākya
    neuter
    1. abuse, blame, reproach Dhp 320 Dhp 321 (= aṭṭha-anariyavohāra-vasena pavattaṁ vītikkama-vacanaṁ Dhp-a iv.3) Ja vi.508
    ati + vac, cp. Sanskrit ativāda, from ati + vad
    Ativāta
    1. too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Mil 277
    ati + vāta
    Ativāyati
    1. to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Mil 333 (vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385)
    ati + vāyati
    Ativāha
    1. carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys i.e. a conductor, guide Thag 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character) Ja v.433
    • cp. ativāhika
    from ati + vah, cp. Sanskrit ativahati & abhivāha
    Ativāhika
    1. one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan Ja v.471 Ja v.472 (˚purisa)
    from ativāha
    Ativikāla
    adjective
    1. at a very inconvenient time, much too late DN i.108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DN-a i.277)
    ati + vikāla
    Ativijjhati
    1. to pierce, to enter into (figuratively), to ‣See through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (absolutive ) passati to recognise in all details MN i.480 SN v.226 AN ii.178
    2. Sanskrit atividhyati, ati + vyadh
    Ativiya
    adverb
    1. = ati + iva, originally “much-like” like an excess = excessive-ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q.v.); -(2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva DN ii.264 (variant reading SS. atīva) Snp 679 Snp 680 Snp 683 Snp-a 486 (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya Ja i.61 Ja i.263 Dhp-a ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service) Pv-a 22 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 139
    Sanskrit atīva
    Ativisā
    feminine
    1. name of a plant Vin i.201 Vin iv.35
    Sanskrit ativiṣā
    Ativissaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox Ja v.204
    ati + vissaṭṭha
    Ativissāsika
    adjective
    1. very, or too confidential Ja i.86
    ati + vissāsika
    Ativissuta
    adjective
    1. very famous, renowned Sdhp 473
    ati + vissuta
    Ativeṭheti
    1. to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101 Ja v.452 (-ativiya veṭheti piḷeti Commentary )
    ati + veṣṭ; , cp. Sanskrit abhiveṣṭate
    Ativela
    adjective
    1. excessive (of time); neuter adverb ˚ṁ a very long time; excessively DN i.19 (= atikālaṁ aticiran ti attho DN-a i.113) MN i.122 Snp 973 ‣See explanation at Nd1 504 Ja iii.103 = Nd1 504
    2. ati + vela
    Atilīna
    adjective
    1. too much attached to worldly matters SN v.263
    ati + līna
    Atilūkha
    adjective
    1. too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409
    ati + lūkha
    Atiloma
    adjective
    1. too hairy, having too much hair Ja vi.457 (opposite aloma)
    ati + loma
    Atisañcara
    (˚cāra?)
    1. wandering about too much Mil 277
    ati + sañcāra
    Atisaṇha
    adjective
    1. too subtle Dhp-a iii.326
    ati + saṇha
    Atisanta
    adjective
    1. extremely peaceful Sdhp 496
    ati + santa1
    Atisambādha
    adjective
    1. too tight, crowded or narrow Dhp-a i.310 Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68 cp. atinīcaka. feminine abstract atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow Ja i.7
    2. ati + sambādha
    Atisaya
    1. superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance Vv-a 135 (= visesa) Pv-a 86 Dāvs ii.62
    cp. Sanskrit atiśaya, from ati + śī
    Atisayati
    1. to sur passive excel;
    2. absolutive atisayitvā Mil 336 (+ atikkamitvā)
    3. ati + śī
    Atisara
    adjective
    1. transgressing, sinning Ja iv.6 cp. atisāra
    from atisarati; cp. accasara
    Atisarati
    1. to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aorist accasari (q.v.) Snp 8 sq (opposite paccasari; Commentary atidhāvi) Ja v.70 and atisari Ja iv.6 absolutive atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) DN i.222 SN iv.94 AN i.145 v.226, 256 Snp 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.)
    2. ati + sṛ
    Atisāyaṁ
    adverb
    1. very late, late in the evening Ja v.94
    ati + sāyaṁ
    Atisāra
    1. [from ati + sṛ; ‣See atisarati. cp. Sanskrit atisāra in different meaning but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55
    • (sātisāra), 326 (identical) SN i.74 MN iii.237 Snp 889 (atisāraṁ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith) Ja v.221 (dhamm˚), 379 Dhp-a i.182 Dhs-a 28 ‣See also atisara.

    Atisithila
    adjective
    1. very loose, shaky or weak AN iii.375
    ati + sithila
    Atisīta
    adjective
    1. too cold Dhp-a ii.85
    ati + sīta
    Atisītala
    adjective
    1. very cold Ja iii.55
    ati + sītala
    Atihaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. very pleased Sdhp 323
    ati + haṭṭha
    Atiharati
    1. to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209 Vin iv.264 SN i.89 Ja i.292 Ja v.347 causative atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap collect, harvest Vin ii.181 Vin iii.18 Mil 66 Dhp-a iv.77 ‣See also atihita
    2. ati + hṛ
    Atihita
    1. brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Thag 1, 381 (vīhi)
    ati + hṛ; , past participle of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sanskrit abhi + dhā
    Atihīna
    adjective
    1. very poor or destitute AN iv.282 AN iv.287 323 (opposite accogāḷha
    ati + hīna
    Atihīḷeti
    1. to despise Ja iv.331 (= atimaññati Commentary )
    ati + hīḍ
    Atīta
    adjective-noun
    1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a adjective; atītaṁ addhānaṁ in the time which is past SN iii.86 AN iv.219 AN v.32
    2. Pv ii.1212 (atītānaṁ, scil. attabhāvāuaṁ pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dhp 315 = Snp 333 atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Snp 110
    3. (b) nt the past: atīte (
    4. locative ) once upon a time Ja i.98 etc. atītaṁ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i.e. a Jātaka Ja i.213 218, 221 etc
    5. SN i.5 (atītaṁ nânusocati) AN iii.400 (a eko anto) Snp 851 Snp 1112 In this sense very frequently combined with or opposed to anāgata the
    6. future & paccuppanna the present, e.g. atītânāgate in past &
    7. future SN ii.58 Snp 373 Ja vi.364 Or all three in ster. combination atīt’-anāgata-paccuppanna (this the usual order) DN iii.100 135 SN ii.26 SN ii.110 SN ii.252 SN iii.19 SN iii.47 SN iii.187 SN iv.4f.; 151 sq. AN i.264f. 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33 Iti 53 Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata e.g. Pv-a 100
    8. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2 SN i.97 (maraṇaṁ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera-bhaya˚) AN ii.21 AN iii.346 (sabbasaṁyojana˚) Snp 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaṁ atīta Snp-a 463) Thag 1, 413 (c. ablative)
    9. (identical) overstepping having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dhp 176 (dhammaṁ).

      1. ˚aṁsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho Thag-a 233) DN ii.222 DN iii.275 Thag 2, 314
      • ˚ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041
      Sanskrit atīta, ati + ita, past participle of i. cp. accaya & ati eti
    Atīradassin
    adjective-noun
    1. not ‣Seeing the shore Ja i.46 Ja vi.440 also as atīradassanī feminine Ja v.75
    2. (nāvā). cp. DN i.222
    3. a + tīra + dassin
    Atīva
    indeclinable
    1. very much, exceedingly Ja ii.413 Mhvs 33, 2 etc
    ati + iva ‣See also ativiya
    Ato
    adverb
    1. hence, now, therefore SN i.15 MN i.498 Mil 87 Ja v.398 (= tato Commentary )
    Sanskrit ataḥ
    Atoṇa
    1. [etymology?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Mil 191
    Atta1
    1. that which has been taken up, assumed. atta-daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, SN i.236 SN iv.117 Snp 630 Snp 935 Dhp 406
    • Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Snp 790 Attaṁ pahāya Snp 800 The opp is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories ‣See Nd i.82, 90, 107, 352; ii.271 Snp-a 523 Dhp-a iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal technical term attādānaṁ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91)
    ā + d + ta; that is, past participle of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d-to; cp. Sanskrit ātta
    Atta2
    1. ‣See attan
    Atta3
    1. ‣See upatta
    Sanskrit akta, past participle of añjati
    Attan
    masculine & atta (the latter is the form used in compound)
    • I Inflection. (1) of attan- (n. stem); the following cases are the most frequently:
    • accusative attānaṁ DN i.13 DN i.185 SN i.24 Snp 132 Snp 451
    • genitive dative attano Snp 334 Snp 592 etc., also as abl AN iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others)
    • instrumental ablative attanā SN i.24 Snp 132 Snp 451 Dhp-a ii.75 Pv-a 15 Pv-a 214 etc. On use of attanā ‣See below iii.1 Commentary
    • locative attani SN v.177 AN i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181 MN i.138 Snp 666 Snp 756 Snp 784 Vb 376 (an˚).
    • of atta- (a-stem) we find the following cases:
    • accusative attaṁ Dhp 379
    • instrumental attena SN iv.54
    • ablative attato SN i.188 Ps i.143; ii.48 Vb 336
    1. Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. Commentary It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart, it escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details ‣See Rhys Davids Theory of Soul in the Upanishads JR AN S 1899. Bt. India 251–⁠255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul DN i.31 Seven other theories DN i.34 Three others DN i.186/7. A ʻ soul ʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow SN iv.54 = Kvu 67 Vin i.14 MN i.138 ‣See also MN i.233 MN iii.265 MN iii.271 SN ii.17 SN ii.109 SN iii.135 AN i.284 AN ii.164 AN ii.171 AN v.188 SN iv.400 cp. ātuman, tuma puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma-rūpa
    1. 2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. SN i.71 SN i.169 SN iii.120 AN i.57 AN i.149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism Snp 284 Dhp 166 Dhp 380 Mil 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). accusative attānaṁ SN i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) AN i.89 Snp 709
    2. accusative attaṁ Dhp 379 ablative attato as oneself SN i.188 Ps i.143; ii.48 Vb 336
    3. locative attani AN i.149 AN iii.181 Snp 666 Snp 784 instrumental attanā SN i.57 = Dhp 66 SN i.75 SN ii.68 AN i.53 iii.211; iv.405 Dhp 165 On one’s own account, spontaneously SN iv.307 SN v.354 AN i.297 AN ii.99 AN ii.218 AN iii.81 Ja i.156 Pv-a 15 Pv-a 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other DN ii.147 ˚catuttha with himself as fourth MN i.393 AN iii.36 ˚pañcama Dīpavaṁsa viii.2; ˚sattama Ja i.233 ˚aṭṭhama Vv-a 149 (as atta-naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Mil 291

      anattā (n. and predicative adjective) not a soul, without a soul. Most frequently in combination with dukkha & anicca-(1) as noun: SN iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin) AN ii.52 = Ps ii.80 (anattani anattā; opposite to anattani attā the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā) Dhp 279 Ps ii.37, 45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaṁ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taṁ anattā) Dhp-a iii.406 (˚lakkhaṇa).

    4. as adj (pred.): SN iv.152f. SN iv.166 SN iv.130f. 148 sq. Vin i.13 = SN iii.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1 SN iii.20f.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86 SN iii.133 SN iv.28, 401.

      1. ˚attha one’s own profit or interest Snp 75 Nd2 23 Ja iv.56 Ja iv.96 otherwise as atta-d-attha, e.g. Snp 284
      • ˚atthiya looking after one’s own needs Thag 1, 1097
      • ˚ādhipaka master of oneself, self-mastered AN i.150
      • ˚adhipateyya selfdependence self-reliance, independence AN i.147
      • ˚ādhīna independent DN i.72
      • ˚ānudiṭṭhi speculation about souls SN iii.185 SN iv.148 AN iii.447 Snp 1119 Ps i.143 Vb 368 Mil 146
      • ˚ānuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dhp 209 Dhp-a iii.275
      • ˚ānuvāda blaming oneself AN ii.121 Vb 376
      • ˚uññā self-humiliation Vb 353 (+ att-avaññā)
      • ˚uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 (= attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144
      • ˚kata self-made SN i.134 (opposite para˚)
      • ˚ kāma love of self AN ii.21 adjective a lover of “soul”, one who cares for his own soul SN i.75
      • ˚kāra individual self, fixed individuality oneself (cp. ahaṁkāra) DN i.53 (opposite para˚) AN iii.337 (identical) DN-a i.160 as
      • neuter at Ja v.401 in the sense of service (self-doing”, slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu)
      • ˚kilamatha self-mortification DN iii.113 SN iv.330 SN v.421 MN iii.230
      • ˚garahin self-censuring Snp 778
      • ˚gutta selfguarded Dhp 379
      • ˚gutti watchfulness as regards one’s self, self-care AN ii.72
      • ˚ghañña self-destruction Dhp 164
      • ˚ja proceeding from oneself Dhp 161 (pāpa)
      • ˚ñū knowing oneself AN iv.113 cp. DN iii.252
      • ˚(n)tapa self-mortifying, self-vexing DN iii.232 = AN ii.205 (opposite paran˚) MN i.341 411; ii.159 Pug 55 56
      • ˚daṇḍa ‣See atta1
      • ˚danta self-restrained self-controlled Dhp 104 Dhp 322
      • ˚diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107 Snp-a 523 527
      • ˚dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opposite añña˚) DN ii.100 = iii.42 SN v.154 Snp 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaṁ katvā Snp-a 416)
      • ˚paccakkha only in instrumental ˚ena by or with his own presence, i.e. himself Ja v.119
      • ˚paccakkhika eye-witness Ja v.119
      • ˚paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94 96
      • ˚paṭilābha acquisition of a personality DN i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa)
      • ˚paritāpana self-chastisement, mortification DN iii.232 = AN ii.205 MN i.341 Pv-a 18 Pv-a 30
      • ˚parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110
      • ˚paribhava disrespect for one’s own person Vb 353
      • ˚bhāva one’s own nature (1) person, personality individuality, living creature; form, appearance cp. Dhs translation LXXI and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ātmabhāva body Divy 70 Divy 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Avs i.162 (pratilambha), 167 171

        Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms) SN v.442 (bodily appearance) AN i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature) ii.17 (creature) Dhp-a ii.64 69 (appearance) Snp-a 132 (personality).

      • life, rebirth AN i.134f.; iii.412 Dhp-a ii.68 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 15 Pv-a 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ṁ pavatteti to lead a life, to live Pv-a 29 Pv-a 181. Thus in compound paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185 Vin iii.105 DN iii.231 MN iii.46 SN ii.255 SN ii.272 SN ii.283 SN iii.144 AN ii.159 AN ii.188 iii.122 sq.
      • character, quality of heart Snp 388 (citta Snp-a 374) Ja i.61

        • ˚rūpa “of the form of self” self-like only in instrumental ˚ena as
        • adverb by oneself, on one’s own account, for the sake of oneself SN iv.97 AN ii.120
        • ˚vadha self-destruction SN ii.241 AN ii.73
        • ˚vāda theory of (a persistent) soul DN iii.230 MN i.66 DN ii.58 SN ii.3 SN ii.245 sq.; iii.103, 165, 203; iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq. Ps i.156 sq. Vb 136 375. For various points of an “attavādic” doctrine ‣See Index to Saṁyutta Nikāya
        • ˚vyābādha personal harm or distress self-suffering, one’s own disaster (opposite para˚) MN i.369 SN iv.339 = AN i.157 AN ii.179
        • ˚vetana supporting oneself, earning one’s own living Snp 24
        • ˚sañcetanā self-perception, self-consciousness (opposite para˚) DN iii.231 AN ii.159
        • ˚sambhava originating from one’s self SN i.70 AN iv.312 Dhp 161 (pāpa) Thag 1, 260
        • ˚sambhūta arisen from oneself Snp 272
        • ˚sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one’s personality AN ii.32 Snp 260 cp. Kp-a 132
        • ˚saraṇa ‣See ˚dipa
        • ˚sukha happiness of oneself, self-success Dīpavaṁsa i.66, cp. ii.11
        • ˚hita personal welfare one’s own good (opposite para˚) DN iii.233 AN ii.95f. -hetu for one’s own sake, out of self-consideration Snp 122 Dhp 328
        Vedic ātman, not to Latin animus, but to Old High German ātum breath, Anglo-Saxon aepm
    Attaniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul-like; usually neuter anything of the nature of soul MN i.138 = Kvu 67 MN i.297 ii.263 SN iii.78 (yaṁ kho anattaniyaṁ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd2 680 F SN iv.82 = iii.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3 SN iv.168 SN v.6 Nd2 680 D. cp. Dhs translation XXXV ff
    2. from attā
    Attamana
    1. delighted pleased, enraptured DN i.3 DN i.90 (an˚); ii.14 AN iii.337 343; iv.344 Snp 45 = Dhp 328 (= upaṭṭhita-satt Dhp-a iv.29) Snp 995 Nd2 24 (= tuṭṭha-mano haṭṭha-mano etc.) Vv 14 Pug 33 (an˚) Mil 18 DN-a i.52 Dhp-a i.89 (an˚-dhātuka displeased) Pv-a 23 Pv-a 132 Vv-a 21 (where Dhammapāla gives two explanations, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano)
    atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Buddhaghosa’s explanation is saka-mano DN-a i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same explanation to attamanatā (at Dhs 9 ‣See Dhs trsl 12) = attano manatā mentality of one’s self
    Attamanatā
  • feminine

    1. satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind MN i.114 AN i.276 AN iv.62 Pug 18 (an˚) Dhs 9 86, 418 (an˚) Pv-a 132 Vv-a 67 (an˚)
    abstract to preceding
  • Attāṇa
    adjective
    1. without shelter or protection Ja i.229 Mil 148 Mil 325 Thag-a 285
    a + tāṇa
    Attha1
    1. (also aṭṭha, especially in combinations mentioned under 3) masculine> &
    2. neuter

      1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well-being MN i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good) SN iv.94 (identical) SN i.34 (attano a. one’s own welfare), 55 (identical 86, 102, 126 = AN ii.46 (atthassa patti) SN i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (identical); iv.347 (˚ṁ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying cp. attha-bhañjanaka) AN i.61 (˚ṁ anubhoti to fare well to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the
      2. future life) AN v.223f. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit) Iti 44 (variant reading attā better) Snp 37 Snp 58 (= Nd2 26 where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i.e. advantage, resulting for oneself for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param gain for this life, for a
      3. future life, and highest gain of all, i.e. Arahantship) Snp 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituṁ Snp-a 338 cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61) Pv-a 30 (atthaṁ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena)
      4. dative atthāya for the good for the benefit of genitive; to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e.g. DN iii.211f. Iti 79
      5. Kh viii.1 (to my benefit) Pv i.43 (= upakārāya Pv-a 18), ii.129 (to great advantage) ‣See also below 6.

        1. Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth e.g. Ja i.256 (= vaḍḍhiṁ Commentary ); iii.394 (identical); Pv iv.14 (dhanaṁ Pv-a 219)
        • Often as—˚: att˚; , one’s own wellfare, usually combined with par˚; and ubhay˚ ‣See above SN ii.29 SN v.121 AN i.158 AN i.216 AN iii.63f.; iv.134 Snp 75 (att-aṭṭha, variant reading attha Nd2, 284 (atta-d-attha); uttam˚; the highest gain, the very best thing Dhp 386 (= arahatta Dhp-a iv.142) Snp 324 (= arahatta Snp-a 332); param˚ identical Nd2 26; sad˚; one’s own weal DN ii.141 MN i.4 SN ii.29 SN v.145 AN i.144
        • sāttha
        • adjective connected with advantage beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as “with the meaning, in spirit"? ‣See sāttha DN i.62 SN v.352 AN ii.147 AN iii.152 Nd2 316
        • need want (c. instrumental), use (for = instrumental) SN i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need) Ja i.254 Ja iii.126 Ja iii.281 Ja iv.1 Dhp-a i.398 (n’atthi eteh’attho I have no use for them) Vv-a 250 Pv-a 24 (yāvadattha, adjective as much as is needed sufficient = anappaka)

      6. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in compounds. aṭṭh-uppatti and aṭṭha-kathā ‣See below. On term ‣See also Compendium 4

        • SN iii.93 (atthaṁ vibhajati explain the sense) AN i.23 (identical), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ṁ ācikkhati to interpret) Snp 126 (˚ṁ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the literally meaning), 251 (˚ṁ akkhāti) Thag 1, 374 attho paramo the highest sense the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning Iti 98 cp. Compendium 6, 81, 223 Mil 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense) Mil 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opposite vyañjanato by letter, orthographically) Dhp-a ii.82 Dhp-a iii.175 Kp-a 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word) Snp-a 91 (identical) Pv-a 15 (˚ṁ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā “fitness of the best sense”, i.e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho “this is the meaning”, thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g DN-a i.65 Dhp-a iv.140 141 Pv-a 33 etc
        • 4. Contrasted with dhamma in the combination attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the “letter” and the “spirit". Thus at AN i.69 AN v.222 AN v.254 Snp 326 (bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca Snp-a 333) Iti 84 (duṭṭho atthaṁ na jānāti dhammaṁ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance) Dhp 363 (= bhāsitatthañ c’eva desanādhammañ ca) Ja ii.353 Ja vi.368 Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but explained by Pv-a 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1) For the same use ‣See compounds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp in
        • adverb use ‣See under 6 Snp 430 (yen’atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena Burmese variant for T attanā), Ja i.411 (atthaṁ vā kāraṇaṁ vā reason and cause) Dhp-a ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(Pv-a 11 (ayaṁ h’ettha attho this is the reason why)
        • (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Latin res & From chose): (a) matter affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as “this” or “that” SN ii.36 (ekena-padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word) Ja i.151 (taṁ atthaṁ the matter); ii.160 (imaṁ a. this); vi.289 (taṁ atthaṁ pakāsento) Pv-a 6 (taṁ atthaṁ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaṁ atthaṁ what had been said), 82 (identical)
        • (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Latin causa) Dhp 256 Dhp 331 Mil 47 (kassa atthaṁ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?) ‣See also alamattha

        • adverb use of oblique cases in the sense of a preposition: (a) dative atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for Ja i.254 dhan’atthāya for wealth kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54 Dhp-a ii.82 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 78

          • (b)
          • accusative atthaṁ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another infinitive substitute Ja i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (identical); i.253; ii.128 Dīpavaṁsa vi.79 Dhp-a i.397 Pv-a 32 (dassan˚ in order to ‣See), 78, 167, etc
          • (c) ablative atthā Ja iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya Commentary )
          • (d)
          • locative atthe instead of, for Vv-a 10 Pv-a 33 etc
          1. anattha masculine> &
          2. neuter
          3. unprofitable situation or condition mischief, harm, misery, misfortune SN i.103 SN ii.196 (anatthāya saṁvattati) AN iv.96 (˚ṁ adhipajjati) Iti 84 (˚janano doso ill-will brings discomfort) Ja i.63 Ja i.196 Pug 37 Dhs 1060 1231; Sdhp 87 DN-a i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. Iti 83 and Nd2 420 Q2) Dhp-a ii.73 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 114 Pv-a 199
          4. (= attha 3) incorrect sense false meaning, as adjective senseless (and therefore unprofitable no good, irrelevant). AN v.222 AN v.254 (adhammo ca) Dhp 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka Dhp-a ii.208) Snp 126 (explained at Snp-a 180 as ahitaṁ)
        1. ˚akkhāyin showing what is profitable DN iii.187
        • ˚attha riches Ja vi.290 (= atthabhūtaṁ atthaṁ Commentary )
        • ˚antara difference between the (two) meanings Mil 158 At Thag 1 374, Oldenberg’s reading, but the variant reading (also Commentary reading atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, especially as it corresponds with dhamma-dhara (q.v.) -abhisamaya grasp of the proficient SN i.87 ‣See abhisamaya
        • ˚uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents (“matter”) of the Vinaya Dīpavaṁsa v.37
        • ˚upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma-savanna) MN iii.175 AN iii.381f.; iv.221; v.126
        • ˚uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense meaning, explanation, interpretation Ja i.89 DN-a i.242 Kp-a 216 Vv-a 197 203 (cp. pāḷito) Pv-a 2 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 78; etc -kāma
        • adjective (a) well-wishing, a well-wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sanskrit arthakāma e.g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) SN i.140 SN i.197 SN i.201 sq. AN iii.143 DN iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., hitakāmo) Ja i.241 Pv iv.351; Pv AN 25 Snp-a 287 (an˚). (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) SN i.44 Pv-a 112
        • ˚kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, Commentary Ja v.38 Ja v.170 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 71, etc. Frequently in name of Commentary -kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149 Mil 321
        • ˚karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court giving judgment (variant reading aṭṭa˚) DN ii.20 SN i.74 (judgment hall?)
        • ˚kavi a didactic poet ‣See kavi AN ii.230
        • ˚kāmin = ˚kāma, well-wishing Snp 986 (devatā atthakāminī) -kāraṇā ablative for the sake of gain DN iii.186
        • ˚kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Snp 143 (= atthacheka Kp-a 236)
        • ˚cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging SN i.23 (narānaṁ = “working out man’s salvation”)
        • ˚caraka
        • adjective one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e.g. an attendant, messenger agent etc. DN i.107 (= hitakāraka DN-a i.276) Ja ii.87 iii.326; iv.230; vi.369
        • ˚cariyā useful conduct or behaviour DN iii.152 DN iii.190 DN iii.232 AN ii.32 AN ii.248 AN iv.219 AN iv.364
        • ˚ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) DN iii.252 AN iii.148 AN iv.113f. -dassin intent upon the (moral good Snp 385 (= hitânupassin Snp-a 373)
        • ˚dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sanskrit arthadarśika) Ja vi.286 (but explained by Commentary as “saṇha-sukhuma-pañña” of deep insight one who has a fine and minute knowledge)
        • ˚desanā interpretation, exegesis Mil 21 (dhamm˚)
        • ˚dhamma “reason and morality” ‣See above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy Ja ii.105 Dhp-a ii.71
        • ˚pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text motto AN ii.189 AN iii.356 Dhp 100
        • ˚paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combined with dhamma of the text or spirit ‣See above n0. 3 Ps i.132; ii.150 Vb 293f. -paṭisaṁvedin experiencing good DN iii.241 (+ dhamma˚) AN i.151 AN iii.21
        • ˚baddha expecting some good from (c.
        • locative ) Snp 382
        • ˚bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting Dhp-a iii.356 (paresaṁ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena)
        • ˚majjha of beautiful waist Ja v.170 (= sumajjhā Commentary ; reading must be faulty there is hardly any connection with attha; variant reading atta) -rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd2 466; Ps ii.88, 89
        • ˚vasa “dependence on the sense”, reasonableness, reason, consequence cause DN ii.285 MN i.464 MN ii.120 MN iii.150 SN ii.202 SN iii.93; iv.303; v.224 AN i.61 AN i.77 AN i.98 AN ii.240 AN iii.72 AN iii.169 237 Dhp 289 (= kāraṇa Dhp-a iii.435) Iti 89 Snp 297 Ud 14
        • ˚vasika sensible Iti 89 Mil 406
        • ˚vasin bent on (one’s) aim or purpose Thag 1, 539
        • ˚vādin one who speaks good, i.e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combination with kāla bhūta˚ dhamma˚ DN i.4 DN iii.175 AN i.204 AN ii.22 AN ii.209 Pug 58 DN-a i.76 (explained as “one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter”)
        • ˚saṁvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis Pv-a 1
        • ˚saṁhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary DN i.189 SN ii.223 SN iv.330 SN v.417 AN iii.196f. 244 Snp 722 (= hitena saṁhitaṁ Snp-a 500) Pug 58
        • ˚sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps i.105
        • ˚ siddhi profit, advantage, benefit Ja i.402 Pv-a 63
        Vedic artha from; ; , arti & ṛṇoti to reach attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. cp. semantically From chose Latin causa
    Attha2
    neuter
    1. home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in Pali phraseology abstracted from the “going home”, i.e. setting of the sun, as disappearance going out of existence, annihilation, extinction Only in accusative and as ˚-in following phrases: atthaṅgacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dhp 226 (= vināsaṁ natthibhāvaṁ gacchati Dhp-a iii.324), 384 (parikkhayaṁ gacchati);
    2. past participle atthaṅgata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): Ja i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset) Pv-a 55 (identical) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) figuratively Snp 472 (atthagata). 475 (identical) 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi-sesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā nibbuta) Iti 58 Dhs 1038 Vb 195
    3. ˚atthagatatta
    4. neuter abstract disappearance Snp-a 409
    5. ˚atthaṅgama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) DN i.34 DN i.37 DN i.183 SN iv.327 AN iii.326 Ps ii.4, 6, 39 Pug 52 Dhs 165 265, 501, 579 Vb 105
    6. ˚atthagamana
    7. neuter setting (of the sun) Ja i.101 (suriyass’ atthagamanā at sunset DN-a i.95 (= ogamana)

      • attha-gāmin, in phrase uday’atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā) ‣See udaya
      • ˚atthaṁ paleti = atthangacchati (figuratively) Snp 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28)
      • Also atthamita (
      • past participle of i set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as variant reading at both
      • passive Dhp-a i.86 Dhp-a iii.127
      • cp. also abbhattha
      Vedic asta, of uncertain etymology
    Attha3
    1. pres. 2nd plural of atthi (q.v.)

    Atthata
    1. spread, covered, spread over with (—˚) Vin i.265 Vin iv.287 Vin v.172 (also ˚an) AN iii.50 Pv-a 141
    past participle of attharati
    Atthatta
    neuter
    1. reason, cause; only in ablative atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of Pv-a 189 (—˚)
    abstract from attha1
    Atthara
    1. a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) DN i.7
    from attharati
    Attharaka
    1. a covering Ja i.9 DN-a i.87 feminine ˚ikā a layer Ja i.9 Ja v.280
    2. = atthara
    Attharaṇa
    neuter
    1. a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291 AN ii.56 AN iii.53 Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40 25, 102 Thag-a 22
    from attharati
    Attharati
    1. to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254 Vin v.172 Ja i.199 Ja v.113 Ja vi.428 Dhp i.272. past participle atthata (q.v.)
    2. causative attharāpeti to caused to be spread Ja v.110 Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69
    3. ā + stṛ
    Atthavant
    adjective
    1. full of benefit SN i.30 Thag 1, 740 Mil 172
    cp. Sanskrit arthavant
    Atthāra
    1. spreading out Vin v.172 ‣See kaṭhina. atthāraka same ibid. Vin ii.87 (covering)
    cp. Sanskrit āstāra, from attharati
    Atthi
    to be, to exist. PresenT indicative 1st singular asmi Snp 1120 Snp 1143 Ja i.151 Ja iii.55 and amhi MN i.429 Snp 694 Ja ii.153 Pv i.102 ii.82. 2nd singular asi Snp 420 Ja ii.160 (’si); iii.278 Vv 324 Pv-a 4
    1. -3rd singular atthi Snp 377 Snp 672 Snp 884 Ja i.278 Often used for 3rd plural (= santi), e.g. Ja i.280 Ja ii.2 iii.55.

      1. -1st plural asma Sanskrit smaḥ
        1. Snp 594 Snp 595 asmase Snp 595 and amha Snp 570 Ja ii.128 2nd plural attha Ja ii.128 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 74 (āgat’attha you have come). 3rd
        2. plural santi Snp 1077 Nd2 637 (= saṁvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti) Ja ii.353 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 22-
        3. imperative atthu Snp 340 Ja i.59 Ja iii.26

          • Pot. 1st singular siyā Sanskrit syām

          Pv ii.88, and assaṁ conditional used as Pot.

          1. Snp 1120 Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaṁ Pv-a 64)

          -2nd singular siyā Sanskrit syāḥ

          1. Pv ii.87

          -3rd singular siyā Sanskrit syāt

          1. DN ii.154 Snp 325 Snp 1092 Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya) Ja i.262 Pv-a 13 and assa DN i.135 DN i.196 DN ii.154 AN v.194 Snp 49 Snp 143 Dhp 124 Dhp 260; Pv ii.324; 924
          1. -1st plural assu Pv-a 27 Pv-a 3rd
          2. plural assu cp. Sanskrit syuḥ
            1. Snp 532 Dhp 74 Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuṁ Pv-a 231). aorist 1st singular āsiṁ Sanskrit āsaṁ Snp 284 Pv i.21 (= ahosiṁ Pv-a 10); ii.34 (= ahosiṁ Pv-a 83).
              1. -3rd singular āsi [ Sanskrit āsīt] Snp 994

              -3rdāsuṁ [cp. Sanskrit perfect āsuḥ

              1. Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). Ppr. *sat only in locative sati (as
              2. locative absolute) Dhp 146 Ja i.150 263, santa Snp 105 Nd2 635 Ja i.150 (
              3. locative evaṁ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q.v.) Ja i.266 Ja iv.138

                1. ˚bhāva state of being, existence, being Ja i.222 Ja i.290 ii.415 Dhp-a ii.5 Dhp-a iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not)
                Sanskrit asti, 1st singular asmi; Latin sum-est; Gothic im-ist; Anglo-Saxon eom-is English am-is
    Atthika
    adjective
    1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred DN i.55 (˚vāda) MN ii.212 (aṭṭhita) AN iii.219f. (idaṁ atthikaṁ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaṁ, variant readings as above) Snp 1058 (aṭṭhita Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this
    2. passive shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a-ṭhita) Ja v.151 (in definition of aṭṭhikatvā q.v.) Pug 69 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; explained by Pug. AN v.4 by kalyāṇāya)
    3. (to attha1 2) desirous of (—˚) wanting ‣Seeking for, in need of (c. instrumental) AN ii.199 (uday desirous of increase) Snp 333 Snp 460 Snp 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth) Ja i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚) Pv-a 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120 DN-a i.70 (atthikā those who like to)
    4. ˚anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instrumental) Ja v.460 Pv-a 20 of no good Thag 1, 956 (“of little zeal” Mrs. Rhys Davids)
      1. ˚bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug. AN v.4 (b state of need, distress Pv-a 120
      cp. Sanskrit arthika
    Atthikavant
    adjective
    1. one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand DN i.90 (atthikaṁ assa atthī ti DN-a i.255)
    atthika + vant
    Atthitā
    feminine
    1. state of being, existence, being, reality MN i.486 SN ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135 Ja v.110 (kassaci atthitaṁ vā natthitaṁ vā jānāhi ‣See if there is anybody or not) Dhs-a 394
    • Often in ablative atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so Dhp-a iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) Pv-a 94 Pv-a 97 Pv-a 143
    feminine abstract from atthi cp. atthibhāva
    Atthin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. desirous, wanting anything ‣See mant˚, vād˚
    Vedic arthin
    Atthiya
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a purpose or end SN iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?) AN v.1f. (identical), 311 sq. Thag 1, 1097 (att˚ having one’s purpose in oneself) 1274 Snp 354 (yad atthiyaṁ on account of what)
    = atthika
    Atra
    adverb
    1. here; atra atra here & there Ja i.414 = iv.5 (in explanation of atriccha)
    Sanskrit atra
    Atraja
    adjective [ Sanskrit *ātma-ja, corrupted form for attaja ‣See attā through analogy with Sanskrit atra “here". This form occurs only in Ja and similar sources, i.e. popular lore born from oneself, one’s own, ap
    • plural to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka antevāsika p. Nd2 448

      • J i.135; iii.103 = Nd1 504 Ja iii.181 Ja v.465 Ja vi.20 Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57
    Atriccha
    adjective [the popular etymology suggested at J AN iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but ‣See atricchā very covetous, greedy, wanting too much Ja i.414 = iv.4 iii.206.
    Atricchā

    feminine

    1. great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability Ja iv.5 Ja iv.327
    Sanskrit *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desidentical titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. Pali chāta Sanskrit psāta). For the simple Sanskrit tṛpti ‣See titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sanskrit atīccha = ati + icchā “too much desire” with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja ‣See also atriccha adjective and cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 69
    Atricchatā
    feminine
    1. excessive lust J. iii.222
    ‣See atricchā
    Atha
    indeclinable
    1. copulative & adversative participle 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or and then, now DN ii.2 DN iii.152 DN iii.199
    • athāparaṁ etad avoca) MN i.435 Snp 1006 Snp 1007 Snp 1017 Snp p. 126 (athâparaṁ etad avoca: and further, something else) Dhp 69 Dhp 119 Dhp 377 Ja ii.158 Pv ii.64 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 8 (atha na and not) 70
    • after negative clauses: but MN i.430 Snp 990 Snp 1047 Dhp 85 Dhp 136 Dhp 387 Pv-a 68 Often combined with other participle, e.g. atha kho (pos. & negative) now, and then but, rather, moreover Vin i.1 DN i.141 DN i.167 DN i.174 AN v.195 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 221 Pv-a 251. na-atha kho na neither-nor Pv-a 28
    • atha kho pana and yet DN i.139
    • atha ca pana on the other hand Ja i.279
    • atha vā or (after preceding ca) nor (after preceding na) Snp 134 Dhp 140 Dhp 271 Pv i.41 ii.14athā vā pi Snp 917 Snp 921
    • Sanskrit atha, cp. atho
    Athabbaṇa
    1. the Atharva Veda DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447 (˚veda).
    2. one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda Ja vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa = sahatthivejja, with the elephant-healer or doctor) ‣See also āthabbaṇa
    3. Vedic atharvan; as regards etymology ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. under ater
    Atho
    indeclinable
    1. copulative and adversative participle: and, also, and further, likewise, nay SN i.106 Snp 43 Snp 155 Snp 647 Dhp 151 Dhp 234 Dhp 423 Ja i.83 Ja ii.185 iv.495 Iti 106 Kh viii.7; Pv iv.315 Pv-a 251 (atho ti nipātamattaṁ avadhāraṇ-atthe vā). Also combined with other participle, like atho pi Snp 222 Snp 537 Snp 985 Pv ii.320; Kp-a 166
    Sanskrit atho, atha + u
    Ada
    adjective (—˚)
    1. eating SN iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn) Ja ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka Commentary )
    to ad ‣See adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.
    Adaka
    adjective = ada Ja v.91 (purisâdaka man-eater).
    Adana
    neuter
    1. eating, food Ja v.374 (variant reading modana)
    from adeti
    Adasaka
    adjective ‣See dasā;.
    Adāsa
    1. a kind of bird Ja iv.466
    probably = adaṁsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning “toothless” or “not biting”
    Adiṭṭhā
    1. not ‣Seeing, without ‣Seeing Ja iv.192 (Text adaṭṭhā, Burmese variant na diṭṭhā, Commentary adisvā) v.219
    a + diṭṭhā, absolutive of *dassati
    Adinna
    1. (past participle )

      1. that which is not given, frequently in phrase adinn’ ādāna (Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adattādāna Divy 302 seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one i.e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa-sīla ‣See sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī) DN i.4 (= parassa haraṇaṁ theyyaṁ corikā ti vuttaṁ hoti DN-a i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq. MN i.361 Iti 63 Kh ii., cp. Kp-a 26
      • adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301 Divy 418) Vin i.85 DN i.138 Sdhp 78
      a + dinna
    Adu
    1. (or ādu indeclinable

      1. participle of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu Vv-a 258 variant reading SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = Dhp-a i.31 (Text ādu variant reading adu) Vv 631 (variant reading ādu) Ja v.330 (Text ādu, Commentary adu explained on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaṁ karohī ti) ‣See also ādu
      perhaps identical with aduṁ, neuter of
    2. pronoun asu
    Aduṁ
    1. nt. of pronoun asu.

    Adūsaka
    adjective
    1. innocent Ja v.143 (= niraparādha Commentary ); vi.84, 552. feminine adūsikā Snp 312
    2. a + dūsaka
    Adūsiya
    1. = adūsaka Ja v.220 (= anaparādha Commentary )
    Adeti
    1. to eat. Present indicative ademi etc. Ja v.31 Ja v.92 Ja v.197 Ja v.496 Ja vi.106 pot. adeyya Ja v.107 Ja v.392 Ja v.493
    Sanskrit ādayati, causative of atti, ad to eat, 1st singular admi = Latin edo; Gothic itan = Old High German ezzan = English eat
    Adda1
    1. ginger Ja i.244 (˚singivera)
    cp. Sanskrit ārdraka
    Adda3
    adjective
    1. wet, moist slippery Ja iv.353 Ja vi.309 Mil 346
    1. ˚āvalepana “smeared with moisture”, i.e. shiny, glittering SN iv.187 (kūṭāgāra) MN i.86 = Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo) ‣See also addha2
    1. The reading allāvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (= SN iv.187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as “newly plastered.”
    Sanskrit ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt ‣See also alla
    Adda2 & Addā
    3rd singular aorist of *dassati ‣See *dassati 2. a.
    Addakkhi
    3rd singular aorist of *dassati ‣See *dassati 1 b.
    Addasā
    3rd singular aorist of *dassati ‣See *dassati 2 a. Adda & Addayana
    Addā
    Addāyanā
    1. at Vb 371 in definition of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dialectical form or popular etymology for ādā and ādāyana ‣See ādariya
    Addāyate
    1. to be or get wet, figuratively to be attached to Ja iv.351 ‣See also allīyati
    v. denominative from adda
    Addi
    1. a mountain Dāvs ii.13
    Sanskrit ardri
    Addita
    1. (past participle )

      1. afflicted, smarted, oppressed Ja i.21 Ja ii.407 Ja iii.261 Ja iv.295 v.53, 268 Thag 1, 406 Mhvs 1, 25 Pv-a 260 Sdhp 37 Sdhp 281
      ‣See aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling
    Addha1
    numeral
    1. one half, half (˚-) DN i.166 (˚māsika) AN ii.160
    • ˚māsa Ja i.59
    • ˚yojana iii.189 (˚māsa)
    = aḍḍha, q.v.
    Addha2
    adjective
    1. soiled, wet; figuratively attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) MN ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaṁ attānaṁ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill) SN iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body) Ja vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, Commentary pūtinakha)
    = adda3, Sanskrit ārdra
    Addhan

    (in compounds. addha˚;)

    1. (of space a path, road, also journey ‣See compounds. & derivations; only in one ster. phrase Ja iv.384 = v.137 pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, genitive for
    2. locative ˚addhani, on his course in his orbit; explained at iv.384 by ākāsa-patha-sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha-pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando;
    3. locative same meaning as preceding, explained at Pv-a 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala-magge) This phrase (pathaddhan) however is explained by Kern (Toev s.v. pathaddu) as “gone half-way”, i.e. on full-moon-day He rejects the explanation of Commentary
    4. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime ‣See compounds.; only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present &
    5. future ) in; tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) DN iii.216 Iti 53 70. (b) in phrase dīghaṁ addhānaṁ (
    6. accusative ) a very long time AN ii.1 AN ii.10 (dighaṁ addh ānaṁ saṁsāraṁ) Snp 740 (dīghaṁ addhāna saṁsāra) Dhp 207 (dīghaṁ addhāna socati) Ja i.137 genitive dīghassa addhuno Pv-a 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instrumental dīghena addhunā SN i.78 AN ii.118 Pv-a 28
    7. -āyu duration of life AN ii.66 (dīghaṁ ˚ṁ a long lifetime -gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhvagata Mvu ii.150

      1. always combined with vayo anuppatto sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka; Vin ii.188 DN i.48 (cp. DN-a i.143) MN i.82 Snp past participle 50, 92 Pv-a 149
      2. ˚gū Vedic adhvaga
        1. a wayfarer, traveller journeyman Thag 255 = SN i.212 (but the latter has panthagu variant reading addhagū) Ja iii.95 (variant reading patthagu = panthagu) Dhp 302
        Vedic adhvan, originally meaning “stretch, length”, both of space & time Cases:
      3. nominative addhā, genitive dative addhuno, instrumental addhunā,
      4. accusative addhānaṁ
      5. locative addhani;
      6. plural addhā ‣See also addhāna
    Addhā
    adverb
    1. participle of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really truly DN i.143 Ja i.19 (a. ahaṁ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaṁ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; iii.340; v.307 410 (Commentary explanation differs) Snp 47 Snp 1057 Nd2 30 = Ps ii.21 (ekaṁsa-vacanaṁ nissaṁsaya-vacanaṁ etc.) addhā hi Ja iv.399 Pv iv.15 2
    Vedic addhā, cp. Avestan azdā certainty
    Addhaneyya
    adjective = adhaniya 2, lasting Ja v.507 (an˚).
    Addhaniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Thag 1, 529 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period lasting, enduring DN iii.211 Ja i.393 (an˚) vi.71 ‣See also addhaneyya
    2. from addhan
    Addhariya
    1. a sacrificing priest, name of a class of Brahmins DN i.237 (brāhmaṇa)
    Vedic adhvaryu from adhvara sacrifice
    Addhāna
    neuter
    1. same meaning as addhan but as simplex only used with reference to time (i.e. a long time, cp. Vv-a 117 addhānaṁ = ciraṁ). Usually in phrase atītaṁ (anāgataṁ etc.) addhānaṁ in the past (future etc.), e.g. DN i.200 SN i.140 AN v.32 Mil 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aṁ) Pv-a 75 (variant reading addhāne). dīghaṁ addhānaṁ Pv i.105 Also in phrase addhānaṁ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i.e. to live out one’s lifetime SN iv.110 Ja ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaṁ āpādi āyuṁ vindi C).

      1. ˚daratha exhaustion from travelling DN-a i.287
      • ˚magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road DN i.1 DN i.73 DN i.79 MN i.276 (kantār˚) DN-a i.35 (interpreted as “addhayojanaṁ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha-yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti”, thus taken to addha “half”, from counting by 1/2 miles) Vv-a 40 292. cp. also antarāmagga
      • ˚parissama “fatigue of the road”, i.e. fatigue from travelling Vv-a 305
      • ˚vemattatā difference of time or period Mil 285 (+ āyuvemattatā)
      originally the accusative of addhan, taken as
    2. neuter from phrase dīghaṁ addhānaṁ. It occurs only in
    3. accusative which may always be taken as
    4. accusative of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous were it not for later forms like addhāne (
    5. locative ) Mil 126 Pv-a 75 Burmese variant, and for compounds.
    Addhika
    1. a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DN-a i.298 (= pathāvin), 270 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combined with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (plural ) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q.v.), e.g. Ja i.6 (variant reading ˚iddhika 262 Dhp-a ii.26
    2. from addhan
    Addhita
    1. at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic Burmese variant )
    Addhin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dhp 90
    from addhan
    Addhuva
    1. ‣See dhuva
    Adrūbhaka
    1. ‣See dubbha
    Advejjhatā
    1. ‣See dvejjhatā;
    Adha˚
    1. ; in compounds. like adhagga ‣See under adho
    Adhamma
    1. ‣See dhamma
    Adhama
    adjective
    1. the lowest (literally & figuratively), the vilest, worst Snp 246
    • (narādhama), 135 (vasalâdhama) Dhp 78 (purisa˚) Ja iii.151 (miga˚); v.394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (identical), 397 Sdhp 387
    Vedic adhama = Latin infimus, superl. of adho, q.v.
    Adhara
    adjective
    1. the lower Ja iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip)
    Vedic adhara, compar. of adho
    Adhi
    1. A. Preposition and prefix of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal up to, over, toward, to, on ‣See C 1 a
    • (b) as place where (preposition c.
    • locative or absolute) = on top of, above, over in; in addition to. Often simply deictic “here” (e.g. ajjhatta = adhi + ātman “this self here” ‣See C 1 b
    1. B. adhi is frequently as modification prefix, i.e. in loose compound with noun or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd, like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i.e. as 2nd part of a prefix compound, like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i.e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning “over above, in addition quite, par excellence, super"-(adhideva a super-god, cp. ati-deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like English up in “shut up, fill up, join up etc) especially in double prefix

      • compounds. (ajjhāvasati “to dwell here-in = āvasati “to dwell in, to inhabit”) ‣See C 2
      • In the explains of Pali Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far-fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū “overpowering” ‣See e.g. Commentary on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that Pali adhi often represents Sanskrit ati or abhi; thus adhi → ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā adhi → abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. cp. also ati iv
      1. Commentary The main applications of adhi are the following: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either literally or figuratively
      • (a); where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) “gone on to or into” = studied ajjhesita (adhi + esita) “wished for”; ˚kata “put to” i.e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati “to go on to & reach it” = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = sur
      • passive ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) “gone in to” = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon ˚vacana “saying in addition” = attribute, metaphor, cp. From sur-nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent
      • (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana “lying in”, inhabiting
      • secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi-jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta “in an extreme measure”, ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best ˚sīla thorough character or morality
      • (b) with verbs (in double prefix
      • compounds.); adhi + ava : ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination) ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā : ajjhappatta having reached (the end) ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. German
      • noun Anliegen & v. daranliegen).; adhi + upa : ajjhupagacchati to reach obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati “to look all along over” = to superintend adhi + pra : adhippattheti to long for, to desire
      1. Note. The contracted (assimilation-)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh- (q.v.)
      Vedic adhi; base of demonstrative pronoun a˚ + suffix -dhi
    Adhika
    adjective
    1. exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pug 35 Vv-a 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha) DN-a i.141 222; Dīpavaṁsa v.32 (an˚) Dhp-a iii.238 Kp-a 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337 Sdhp 447
    • compar adhikatara Dhp-a ii.7 Dhp-a iii.176
    • neuter ˚ṁ as
    • adverb extraordinarily Pv-a 86 (= adhimattaṁ). In combination with numerals adhika has the meaning of “in addition, with an additional, plus” (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i.e. preceding the noun-determination), e.g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana-sahassāni.2000 + 94 (= 294 000 Ja i.25 sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni.7 years and 7 months Ja v.319 paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa-satani.500 + 50 (550) Pv-a 152 ‣See also sâdhika
    from adhi; cp. Sanskrit adhika
    Adhikata
    adjective
    1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata ṭhapita Pv-a 124)
    2. caused by Mil 67 (kamma˚). 3. affected by something, i.e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Mil 144 (+ vimātijāta)
    adhi + kata; cp. Sanskrit adhikṛta
    Adhikaraṇa
    neuter
    1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration Pv-a 209 Pv-a 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence DN ii.59 (—˚: in consequence of) SN ii.41 SN v.19 especially
    2. accusative ˚ṁ as
    3. adverb (—˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of from MN i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaṁ) SN iv.339 (rāga˚) Mil 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, originally in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaṁ why, on account of what Ja iv.4 (= kiṁkāraṇaṁ) yatvâdhikaraṇaṁ (yato adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj. DN i.70 = AN i.113 = ii.16 = DN iii.225
    4. case, question cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at various passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta kicca˚; “questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct of duties” Vin ii.88 Vin iii.164 Vin iv.126 238 MN ii.247 Often referred: Vin ii.74 SN iv.63 = v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.) AN i.53 (case), 79; ii.239 (vūpasanta) v.71, 72 Pug 20 55 Dhp-a iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaṁ karoti to raise a dispute MN i.122 ˚ṁ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261
      1. ˚kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (feminine ˚ikā) AN iii.252
      2. ˚samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at DN iii.254 MN ii.247 AN i.99 AN iv.144
      3. adhi + karaṇa
    Adhikaraṇika
    1. one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge. AN v.164 AN v.167
    from adhikaraṇa
    Adhikaraṇī
    feminine
    1. a smith’s anvil Ja iii.285 Dāvs iii.16 sq. Dhs-a 263
    to adhikaraṇa 1, originally meaning “serving, that which serves, i.e. instrument”
    Adhikāra
    1. attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55 Ja i.56 vi.251 Mil 60 Mil 115 Mil 165 Pv-a 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927) Dhp-a ii.41
    cp. Sanskrit adhikāra
    Adhikārika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Buddhaghosa)
    to adhikāra
    Adhikuṭṭanā
    feminine
    1. an executioner’s block Thag 2, 58 cp. Thag-a 65 (variant reading kuḍḍanā, should probably be read koṭṭana) Thag-a 287
    adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana
    Adhikusala
    adjective
    1. in ˚ā dhammā “items of higher righteousness” DN iii.145
    adhi + kusala
    Adhikodhita
    adjective
    1. very angry Ja v.117
    adhi + kodhita
    Adhigacchati
    1. to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; figuratively to understand DN i.229 (vivesaṁ) MN i.140 (anvesaṁ n’âdhigacchanti do not find) SN i.22 (Nibbānaṁ); ii.278 (identical) AN i.162 (identical) Dhp 187 Dhp 365 Iti 82 (santiṁ) Thag 2, 51 Pug 30 31 Pv i.74 (nibbutiṁ = labhati Pv-a 37); iii.710 (amataṁ padaṁ). opt. adhigaccheyya DN i.224 (kusalaṁ dhammaṁ) MN i.114 (madhu-piṇḍikaṁ) Dhp 61 and adhigacche Dhp 368 absolutive ˚gantvā DN i.224 Ja i.45 (ānisaṁse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā Pv-a 60).
    2. gerundive ˚gantabba Iti 104 (nibbāna).
    3. conditional ˚gacchissaṁ Snp 446 Snp 1st
    4. aorist 3 singular ajjhagā Snp 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi Kp-a 180) Dhp 154 Vv 327 3
    5. plural ajjhagū Ja i.256 (vyasanaṁ); ajjhāgamuṁ SN i.12 SN i.2nd
    6. aorist 3 singular adhigacchi Nd1 457
    7. past participle adhigata (q.v.)
    8. adhi + gacchati
    Adhigaṇhāti
    1. to sur passive excel SN i.87 = DN-a i.32 DN iii.146 SN iv.275 AN iii.33 Iti 19
    2. absolutive adhigayha Pv ii.962 = Dhp-a iii.219 (Burmese variant at both
    3. passive atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā Iti 20
    4. past participle adhiggahīta (q.v.)
    5. adhi + gaṇhāti
    Adhigata
    1. got into possession of, conquered, attained, found Ja i.374 Vv-a 135
    past participle of adhigacchati
    Adhigatavant
    adjective-noun
    1. one who has found or obtained Vv-a 296 (Nibbānaṁ)
    from adhigata
    Adhigama
    1. attainment, acquisition; also figuratively knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) DN iii.255 SN ii.139 AN ii.148 AN iv.22 AN iv.332 AN v.194 Ja i.406 Nett 91 Mil 133 Mil 215 Mil 358 Mil 362 Mil 388 Pv-a 207
    from adhigacchati
    Adhigameti
    1. to make obtain, to procure Pv-a 30
    adhi + gameti, causative of gacchati
    Adhiggahīta
    1. excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by instrumental, possessed Ja iii.427 (= anuggahīta Commentary ); v.102; vi.525 = 574 Iti 103 Mil 188 Mil 189 Sdhp 98
    past participle of adhigaṇhāti
    Adhiciṇṇa
    1. only at SN iii.12 where variant reading is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred ‣See viciṇṇa
    Adhicitta
    neuter
    1. “higher thought”, meditation, contemplation, nsually in combination with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70 DN iii.219 MN i.451 AN i.254 AN i.256 Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (˚sikkhā) Dhp 185 (= aṭṭha-samāpattisankhāta adhika-citta Dhp-a iii.238)
    adhi + citta
    Adhiceto
    adjective
    1. lofty-minded, entranced Thag 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = Dhp-a iii.384
    adhi + ceto
    Adhicca1
    1. learning, studying, learning by heart Ja iii.218 Ja iii.327 = iv.301; iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā Commentary ), 477 (sajjhāyitvā Commentary ); vi.213 Mil 164
    absolutive of adhi + eti ‣See adhīyati
    Adhicca2
    (˚-)
    1. unsupported, uncaused fortuitous, without cause or reason; in following phrases ˚āpattika guilty without intention MN i.443
    • ˚uppatti spontaneous origin Dhs-a 238
    • ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = Ja v.171 vi.315 (explained at Ja v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous unconditioned DN i.28 = Ud 69 DN iii.33 DN iii.138 SN ii.22–⁠23 (sukhadukkhaṁ) AN iii.440 (identical); Ps i.155 DN-a i.118 (= akāraṇa˚)
    Sanskrit *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, absolutive of dhṛ; , cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti.4
    Adhicca3
    adjective
    1. without a cause (for assumption) unreasonable, unlikely SN v.457
    = adhicca 2 in adjective function, influenced by, homonym abhabba
    Adhijeguccha
    neuter
    1. intense scrupulous regard (for others) DN i.174 DN i.176
    adhi + jeguccha
    Adhiṭṭhaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. bent on, given to, addicted to Ja v.427 (surā˚)
    from adhiṭṭhāti
    Adhiṭṭhāti
    (adhiṭṭhahati)
    1. to stand on Ja iii.278 (
    2. absolutive ˚āya) Dhp-a iv.183 (ger ˚hitvā); figuratively to insist on Thag 1, 1131 (
    3. aorist ˚āhi)
    4. to concentrate or fix one’s attention on (c.
    5. accusative ), to direct one’s thoughts to, to make up one’s mind, to wish Vin i.115 (infinitive ˚ṭhātuṁ), 297 (identical), 125 (
    6. gerundive ˚ṭhātabba Ja i.80 (
    7. aorist ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (variant reading ati˚ Commentary explains abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati) Dhp-a i.34 Dhp-a iv.201 (
    8. absolutive ˚hitvā) Pv-a 23 (
    9. aorist ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (identical), 75 (
    10. absolutive ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya ‣See Compendium 209, note 2; 219, note 1
    11. to undertake practice, perform, look after, to celebrate SN ii.17 AN i.115f. Ja i.50 Pv-a 209 (

      • absolutive ˚ṭhāya).
      • past participle adhiṭṭhita (q.v.)
      Sanskrit adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā
    Adhiṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. decision, resolution, self-determination, will (cp. on this meaning Compendium 62 DN iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga upasama˚) Ja i.23 Ja v.174 Ps i.108; ii.171 sq., 207 Dhs-a 166 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 44)
    2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias MN i.136 MN iii.31 MN iii.240 SN ii.17 SN iii.10 SN iii.135 SN iii.194
    3. As adjective (—˚) applying oneself to, bent on AN iii.363
    4. looking after, management, direction, power Mil 309 (devānaṁ) Pv-a 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna) adiṭṭhāna as Pv-a 89 used as explanatory for āvāsa should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed permanent, abode from adhi + sthā
    Adhiṭṭhāyaka
    adjective (—˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚; Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta˚ Dhp-a i.393
    Adhiṭṭhita
    adjective
    1. standing on (c.
    2. locative ), especially with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaṁ ṭhānaṁ abhibhavitvā ṭhita Vv-a 269)
    3. (a) looked after, managed, undertaken governed Vin i.57 SN v.278 (sv’âdhiṭṭhita) Pv-a 141 (kammanta)
    4. (b) undertaking, bent on (c.
    5. accusative ) Snp 820 (ekacariyaṁ)
    6. past participle of adhiṭṭhāti
    Adhideva
    1. a superior or supreme god, above the gods MN ii.132 AN iv.304 Snp 1148 Nd2 307b, 422 a cp. atideva
    adhi + deva
    Adhipa
    1. ruler, lord, master Ja ii.369 Ja iii.324 Ja v.393 Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52 Vv-a 314
    Sanskrit adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati
    Adhipaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) AN i.150 (atta loka˚ dhamma˚)
    from preceding
    Adhipajjati
    1. to come to, reach, attain AN iv.96 (anatthaṁ); past participle adhipanna
    2. adhi + pajjati
    Adhipaññā
    feminine
    1. higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combination with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70 DN i.174 DN iii.219 (˚sikkhā) AN i.240 AN ii.92f. 239; iii.106 sq., 327 iv.360 Nd1 39 (identical); Ps i.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11 244 Pug 61
    adhi + paññā
    Adhipatati
    1. to fly past, vanish Ja iv.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaṁ atikkamati Commentary ). causative adhipāteti (q.v.) in different meaning. cp. also adhipāta
    2. adhi + patati
    Adhipatana
    neuter
    1. attack, pressing Thag-a 271
    from adhipatati
    Adhipati
    1. (n adjective)
      1. ruler, master Ja iv.223 Vv 811 Mil 388 Dhp-a i.36 (= seṭṭha). 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vb 216f. (chandaṁ adhipatiṁ katvā making energy predominant) Dhs-a 125 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka heteronomous, influenced by society) ‣See alṣo Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 20 & Compendium 60
      2. adhi + pati, cp. adhipa
    Adhipateyya
    neuter AN i.147 AN iii.33 = SN iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.
    Adhipatthita
    1. desired, wished, begged for DN i.120
    past participle adhi + pattheti, cp. Sanskrit abhi + arthayati
    Adhipanna
    1. gone into, affected with, seized by (—˚), a victim of (c. locative ) SN i.72 Thag 2, 345 (kāmesu) Snp 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd2 32) Dhp 288 Ja iii.38 Ja iii.369 Ja iv.396 v.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27
    2. cp. Sanskrit abhipanna, adhi + pad
    Adhipāṭimokkha
    neuter
    1. the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ +) MN ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva)
    adhi + pāṭimokkha
    Adhipāta1
    1. splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚; head-splitting Snp 988f. 1004, 1025 (variant reading Nd2 ˚vipāta)
    adhipāteti
    Adhipāta2
    1. a moth Snp 964 explained at Nd1 484 as “adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taṁkāraṇā a. vuccanti” Ud 72 (explained by Commentary as salabhā)
    from adhipatati = Sanskrit atipatati, to fly past, flit
    Adhipatikā
    feminine
    1. a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 ‣See adhipāta2
    from adhipāta2
    Adhipāteti
    1. to break, split Ja iv.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 probably to be read adhibādheti (variant reading avibādeti. Text adhipāteti)
    causative from adhipatati, cp. Sanskrit abhipātayati & Pali atipāteti
    Adhippagharati
    1. to flow, to trickle Thag-a 284
    adhi + ppa + gharati
    Adhippāgā
    1. 3 singular aorist of adhippagacchati to go to Ja v.59
    Adhippāya
    1. intention, wish desire SN i.124 SN v.108 AN ii.81 AN iii.363 (bhoga˚) v.65 Ja i.79 Ja i.83 Sdhp 62. As adjective (—˚) desiring Pv-a 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika)
    2. sense, meaning conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Mil 148 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 48 Pv-a 131 (the moral of a story)
    3. ˚adhippāyena (instrumental in the way of, like Pv-a 215 (kīḷ for fun)
    adhi + ppa + i; Sanskrit abhiprāya
    Adhippāyosa
    1. distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning MN i.46 SN iii.66 SN iv.208 AN i.267 AN iv.158 AN v.48f.
    adhi + pāyosa
    Adhippeta
    1. desired, approved of, agreeable DN i.120 DN ii.236 Vv-a 312 315
    2. meant, understood intended as Ja iii.263 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 80 Pv-a 120 Pv-a 164
    Sanskrit abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, literally gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya
    Adhippetatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being meant or understood as, in ablative ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of Vv-a 13 Pv-a 52
    abstract from adhippeta
    Adhibādheti
    1. to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (Text adhipāteti, variant reading avibādeti)
    adhi + bādheti, cp. Sanskrit abhibādhayati
    Adhibrahmā
    1. a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā MN ii.132
    adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā
    Adhibhavati
    1. to overcome, overpower, sur passive SN iv.185f. (cp. adhibhū). AN v.248 AN v.282 (˚bhoti) Ja ii.336 V.30.
    2. aorist adhibhavi Ja ii.80 3.
    3. plural adhibhaṁsu SN iv.185 ‣See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū
    4. past participle ; adhibhūta (q.v.)
    5. adhi + bhavati, cp. Sanskrit & Pali abhibhavati
    Adhibhāsati
    1. to address, to speak to; aorist ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195 SN i.103 SN iv.117 Snp p. 87 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 90
    2. adhi + bhāsati
    Adhibhū
    adjective (—˚)
    1. overpowering, having power over; master conqueror, lord SN iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the variant reading abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection ‣See abhibhū) Snp 684 (miga˚ variant reading abhi˚)
    from adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sanskrit adhibhū
    Adhibhūta
    1. overpowered SN iv.186
    cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta
    Adhimatta
    adjective
    1. extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; neuter adverb ˚ṁ extremely MN i.152 MN i.243 SN iv.160 AN ii.150 AN iv.241 Ja i.92 Pug 15 Mil 146 Mil 189 274, 290; Pv ii.36 (= adhikataraṁ Pv-a 86) Dhp-a ii.85 cp. Pv-a 281
    2. adhi + matta of
    Adhimattata
    neuter
    1. preponderance AN ii.150 Dhs-a 334 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 200)
    abstract from preceding
    Adhimana
    1. (n adjective)
      1. (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Snp 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). adjective directing one’s mind upon, intent (on) Ja iv.433 (= pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; variant reading ˚māna)
      2. adhi + mano
    Adhimāna
    1. undue estimate of oneself MN ii.252 AN v.162f.
    adhi + māna
    Adhimānika
    adjective
    1. having undue confidence in oneself, conceited. AN v.162 AN v.169 AN v.317 Dhp-a iii.111
    from adhimāna
    Adhimuccati
    1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c.
    2. locative SN iii.225 SN iv.185 AN iv.24 AN iv.145f. 460; v.17 Pug 63 2. to become settled, to make up one’s mind as to (with
    3. locative ), to become clear about Vin i.209 (
    4. aorist ˚mucci) DN i.106 SN i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya) Iti 43 DN-a i.275 3. to take courage, to have faith Snp 559 Mil 234 DN-a i.214 316 Ja iv.272 Ja v.103 Dhp-a i.196 Dhp-a iii.258 iv.170. 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. Ja iv.172 Ja v.103 Ja v.429 Dhp-a i.196 Dhp-a iii.258 iv.170.
    5. past participle adhimuccita and adhimutta.
    6. causative adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with
    7. locative ) SN v.409 (cittaṁ devesu a.)
    8. passive of adhi + muc
    Adhimuccana
    neuter
    1. making up one’s mind, confidence Dhs-a 133 190
    from adhi + muc
    Adhimuccita
    Adhimucchita;
    1. (past participle ) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all variant readings ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy-form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 109 drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with
    2. locative ) MN ii.223 (an˚) SN i.113 Thag 1, 732 (variant reading ˚muccita) 923 (cch), 1175 Ja ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, variant reading ˚muccita). cp. ajjhomucchita.

    Adhimuccitar
    1. one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence AN iii.165 (variant reading ˚mucchitā)
    agent noun of adhimuccati
    Adhimutta
    adjective
    1. intent upon (—˚ or with locative or
    2. accusative ), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183 AN v.34 AN v.38 Dhp 226 Snp 1071 Snp 1149 (˚citta) Nd2 33 Ja i.370 (dān˚) Pug 26 Pv-a 134 (dān˚)
    3. past participle of adhimuccati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhimukta. Avs i.8, 112; Divy 49 Divy 302 etc.
    Adhimutti
    feminine
    1. resolve, intention, disposition DN i.174 AN v.36 Ps i.124 Mil 161 Mil 169 Vb 340 341 DN-a i.44 103; Sdhp 378
    adhi + mutti
    Adhimuttika
    adjective
    1. inclined to, attached to, bent on SN ii.154 SN ii.158 Iti 70 Vb 339f. + (feminine inclination) DN i.2
    = adhimutta
    Adhimokkha
    1. firm resolve, determination, decision MN iii.25f. Vb 165f. 425 Dhs-a 145 264 ‣See Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 5; Compendium 17, 40, 95
    from adhi + muc
    Adhiyita
    1. ‣See adhīyati
    Adhiroha
    1. ascent, ascending; in dur˚; hard to ascend Mil 322
    from adhi + ruh
    Adhivacana
    neuter
    1. designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression DN ii.62 MN i.113 MN i.144 MN i.460 AN ii.70 AN ii.124 AN iii.310 AN iv.89 AN iv.285 AN iv.340 Iti 15 114; Snp p. 218 Ja i.117 Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.) Vb 6 Pv-a 63 ‣See on term Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 340
    1. ˚patha “process of synonymous nominativenclature” (Mrs Rhys Davids) DN ii.68 SN iii.71 Dhs 1306 Dhs-a 51
    adhi + vacana
    Adhivattati
    1. to come on, proceed, issue, result SN i.101 AN ii.32
    adhi + vattati
    Adhivattha
    adjective
    1. inhabiting, living in (c. locative ) Vin i.28 SN i.197 Ja i.223 Ja ii.385 Ja iii.327 Pv-a 17 The form adhivuttha occurs at Ja vi.370
    2. past participle of adhivasati
    Adhivara
    adjective
    1. superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163
    • an˚ unsurpassed, unrivalled Vv-a 80 = adhika visiṭṭha)
    adhi + vara
    Adhivāsa
    1. endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adjective in dur˚; difficult to hold out Thag 1, 111
    from adhi + vas
    Adhivāsaka
    1. (& ˚ika) adjective

      1. willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin iv.130 MN i.10 MN i.526 AN ii.118 iii.163; v.132 Ja iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77
      from adhivāsa
    Adhivāsana
    (nṭ.)
    1. 1 assent AN iii.31 Dhp-a i.33
    • forbearance, endurance MN i.10 Ja ii.237 iii.263; iv.307; v.174
    • from adhi + vas
    Adhivāsanatā
    feminine
    1. patience, endurance, Dhs 1342 Vb 360 (an˚)
    abstract from adhivāsana
    Adhivāseti
    1. to wait for (c.
    2. accusative ) Ja i.254 Ja ii.352 iii.277
    3. to have patience, bear, endure (c.
    4. accusative ) DN ii.128 DN ii.157 Ja i.46 Ja iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51 200 Vv-a 336 337
    5. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17 DN i.109 (cp. DN-a i.277) SN iv.76 Dhp-a i.33 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 75 and frequently passim causative adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait Ja i.254
    6. causative of adhivasati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit adhivāsayati in meaning of 3
    Adhivāha
    1. a carrier, bearer, adjective bringing SN iv.70 (dukkha˚) AN i.6 Thag 1, 494
    from adhi + vah; cp. Sanskrit abhivahati
    Adhivāhana
    neuter-adjective
    1. carrying, bringing, bearing Snp 79 feminine ˚ī Thag 1, 519
    2. from adhi + vah
    Adhivimuttatta
    neuter = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i.e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to Ja v.254 (Text kāmādhivimuttitā, variant reading ˚muttata).
    Adhivimokkhatta
    neuter = adhimokkha; being inclined to Dhs-a 261
    Adhivutti
    feminine
    1. expression, saying, opinion; only in technical term adhivuttipada (variant reading adhimutti-p. at all passages) DN i.13 (explained by adhivacana-pada DN-a i.103) MN ii.228 AN v.36
    adhi + vutti, from adhi + vac, cp. Sanskrit abhivadati
    Adhivuttha
    1. ‣See adhivattha
    Adhisayana
    neuter-adjective
    1. lying on or in, inhabiting Pv-a 80 (mañcaṁ)
    from adhiseti
    Adhisayita
    1. sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3 SN iii.153
    past participle of adhiseti
    Adhisīla
    neuter
    1. higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisīla˚ Vin i.70 DN i.174 DN iii.219 AN iii.133 AN iv.25 Dhp-a i.334 Pv-a 207 ‣See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla
    adhi + sīla
    Adhiseti
    1. to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dhp 41 Snp 671 (= gacchati Commentary )- past participle adhisayita
    2. adhi + seti
    Adhīna
    adjective (—˚)
    1. subject, dependent DN i.72
    • atta˚ & para˚; Ja iv.112 DN-a i.217 also written ādhīna Ja v.350 ‣See also under para
    cp. Sanskrit adhīna
    Adhīyati
    & adhiyati
    1. to study, literally to approach (cp adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270 SN i.202 (dhammapadāni) Ja iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458 Dhp-a iii.446 (adhīyassu). absolutive adhīyitvā Ja iv.75
    2. adhiyānaṁ Ja v.450 (= sajjhāyitvā Commentary ) & adhicca ‣See adhicca 2;
    3. past participle adhiyita DN i.96
    4. Med. of adhi + ; i, 1st singular adhīye taken as base in Pāli
    Adhunā
    adverb
    1. just now, quite recently DN ii.208 Vin ii.185 (kālakata) Mil 155 Dāvs ii.94
    1. ˚āgata a new comer MN i.457 Ja ii.105
    • ˚ābhisitta newly or just anointed DN ii.227
    • ˚uppanna just arisen DN ii.208 DN ii.221
    Vedic adhunā
    Adhura
    neuter
    1. irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations Ja iv.241
    a + dhura ‣See dhura 2
    Adho
    adverb
    1. below, usually combined or contrasted with uddhaṁ “above” and tiriyaṁ “across”, describing the 3 dimensions
    • uddhaṁ and adho above and below marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaṁ and the 4 bearings; (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at SN i.122 SN iii.124 AN iv.167 with uddhaṁ & tiriyaṁ at Snp 150 Snp 537 Snp 1055 Snp 1068 Explained at Kp-a 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd; 2 155. For further reference ‣See uddhaṁ. The compound form of adho before vowels is adh˚
    1. ˚akkhaka beneath the collar-bone Vin iv.213
    • ˚agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth Ja v.156 (+ uddh˚ explained by uparima-danta Commentary )
    • ˚kata turned down, or upside down Ja i.20 Ja vi.298
    • ˚gata gone by, past.
    • adverb ˚ṁ since (cp. uddhaṁ
    • adverb later or after Ja vi.187 (ito māsaṁ adhogataṁ since one month ago) -gala (so read for Text udho˚) down the throat Pv-a 104
    • ˚mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78 MN i.132 MN i.234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha Vv-a 78)
    • ˚bhāga the lower part (of the body) MN i.473 Dhp-a i.148
    • ˚virecana action of a purgative (opposite uddha˚ of an emetic) DN i.12 DN-a i.98 (= adho dosānaṁ nīharaṇaṁ) Dhs-a 404
    • ˚sākhaṁ (+ uddhamūlaṁ) branches down (roots up, i.e. uprooted) Dhp-a; i.75
    • ˚sira
    • adjective head downward Ja iv.194
    • ˚siraṁ (
    • adverb ) with bowed head (cp. avaṁsiraṁ) Ja vi.298 (= siraṁ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho Commentary )
    • ˚sīsa
    • adjective head first, headlong Ja i.233 Ja v.472 (˚ka)
    Vedic adhaḥ; comparative adharaḥ = Latin inferus, Gothic undar, English under, Indian *n̊dher-; superlative adhamaḥ, Latin infimus
    An-
    1. form of the negative prefix a-before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ ‣See the positive
    Ana-
    1. negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava; ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.113
    Anajjhiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin i.113 Pv i.123 (Text anabbhita, variant reading anijjhiṭṭha Ja iii.165 has anavhāta Thag 2, 129
    • ayācita Pv-a 64 explains by anavhāta)
    an + ajjhiṭṭha
    Anaṭi
    1. to breathe Kp-a; i.124 (in definition of bāla) DN-a i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). cp. pāṇa
    An, Vedic aniti & anati
    Anabhāva
    1. the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adjective form anabhāvaṁ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at SN ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at MN i.487 SN iv.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at MN i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas) at AN iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma AN i.135 of evil passions AN i.137 AN i.184 AN i.218 AN ii.214 of pride AN ii.41 of craving AN ii.249 of the bonds AN iv.8 In the supplement to the Dīgha (DN iii.326) and in the Itivuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaṁ gameti, cause to perish is used of evil thoughts. Buddhaghosa (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as variant reading anubhāva. cp. Nd i.90; and Nd2 under pahīna
    ana + bhāva
    Anabbhita
    adjective
    1. not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242 Pv i.123 (where reading probably faulty & due to a gloss; the identical passage at Thag 2, 129 has ayācita & at Ja iii.165
    • anavhāta Pv-a 64 explains by anavhāta variant reading anabbhita)
    an + abbhita
    Anabhuṇṇatatā
    feminine
    1. the state of not being erect, i.e. hanging down Ja v.156
    an + abbhuṇṇata + tā
    Anabhijjhā
    feminine
    1. absence of covetousness or desire DN iii.229 DN iii.269 Dhs 32 35, 277
    an + abhijjhā
    Anabhijjhālū
    adjective
    1. not greedy or covetous DN iii.82 Pug 40
    an + abhijjhālū
    Anabhijjhita
    adjective
    1. not desired Snp 40 (cp. Nd2 38) Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201)
    an + abhijjhita
    Anabhinandati
    1. etc ‣See abhi˚ etc
    Anabhirata
    adjective
    1. not taking delight in Ja i.61 (naccâdisu)
    an + abhirata
    Anabhirati
    feminine
    1. not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent DN i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289 Ja iii.395 DN-a i.111
    an + abhirati
    Anabhiraddha
    adjective
    1. in anger Vin iv.236
    an + abhiraddha
    Anabhiraddhi
    feminine
    1. anger, wrath DN i.3 (= kopass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ DN-a i.52)
    an + abhiraddhi
    Anabhisambhuṇamāna
    adjective
    1. not obtaining, unable to get or keep up DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268)
    ppr. medium of an + abhisambhuṇāti
    Anamatagga
    adjective

    . epithet of Saṃsāra “whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable”, i.e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon SN ii.178 SN ii.187f. = iii.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga-pariyāya at Dhp-a ii.268) and Thag 2, 495 6. Later references are Nd2 664 Pv-a 166 Dhp-a i.11 Dhp-a ii.13 32; Sdhp 505. cp. anāmata and amatagga and cp. the English idiom “world without end” The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary ‣See e.g., Woods, Yoga-system of Patañjali, 119 it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra ana (= a negative) + mata (from man + aggā ( plural ). So Dhammapāla (avidit-agga Thag-a 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 11 Trenckner, Note. 64; Oldenberg Vinaya Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (from nam + agga. It is Sanskrit ized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake Weber, Indische Streifen iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all

    Anamha
    adjective
    1. being in consternation or distress, crying Ja iii.223 (˚kāle = ārodana-kāle Commentary )
    according to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 70 = ana-mha “unlaughing” with ana = an (cp. anabhāva anamatagga) and mha from; smi, cp. vimhayati = Sanskrit vismayati
    Anaya
    1. misfortune, distress Mil 277 usually combined with vyasana (as also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Jtm 215 Vin ii.199 SN iv.159 AN v.156 Mil 292 Vv-a 327 Sdhp 362
    a + naya
    Anariya
    adjective
    1. not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10 DN iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4 the same at Vin v.125) Snp 664 Snp 782 (˚dhamma) Pug 13
    • See ariya
    an + ariya ‣See also anāriya
    Anala
    adjective
    1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable MN i.455 Ja ii.326 = iv.471
    2. dissatisfied, insatiate Ja v.63 (= atitta Commentary ). 3. ˚ṁ kata dissatisfied, satiated, SN i.15 (kāmesu)
    an + ala
    Anavaya
    adjective
    1. not lacking, complete in (locative ), fulfilling DN i.88 (= anūna paripūra-kārin DN-a i.248) AN iii.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Mil 10)
    2. derivation doubtful ‣See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65
    Anavosita
    adjective
    1. unfulfilled, undone Thag 1, 101
    an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?
    Anasana
    neuter
    1. not eating, fasting, hunger DN iii.75 & in same context at Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324)
    an + asana, cp. Sanskrit an-aśana
    Anasitvāna
    1. without eating, fasting Ja iv.371
    absolutive of an + aśati
    Anasuyyaṁ
    1. not grumbling Ja iii.27 variant reading for anusuyyaṁ Text
    Sanskrit anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati
    Anasuropa
    1. absence of abruptness Dhs 1341
    an + asuropa
    Anasūyaka
    adjective
    1. not grumbling, not envious Ja ii.192
    Sanskrit anasūyaka, cp. usūya
    Anassaka
    adjective either an-assaka or a-nassaka (q.v.)
    Anassana
    neuter
    1. imperishableness, freedom from waste Ja iv.168
    a + nassana, naś; cp. Sanskrit naśana
    Anassāvin
    adjective
    1. not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita Snp-a 549)
    an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava
    Anassāsika
    adjective
    1. not consoling, discouraging not comforting MN i.514 SN ii.191
    an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sanskrit āśvāsana & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit anāśvāsika Divy 207
    Anassuṁ
    1. 1st sq, preterite of anusūyati (= Sanskrit anvaśruvaṁ) I have heard MN i.393
    Anāgata
    adjective
    1. not come yet, i.e. future. On usual combination with atīta ‣See this. DN iii.100f. 134 sq. 220, 275 MN iii.188f. SN i.5 SN ii.283 AN iii.100f. 400 Snp 318 Snp 373 Snp 851 Iti 53 Ja iv.159 Ja vi.364 Dhs 1039 1416
    2. an + āgata
    Anāgamana
    neuter
    1. not coming, not returning Ja i.203 Ja i.264
    an + āgamana
    Anāgāmitā
    feminine
    1. the state or condition of an Anāgāmin SN v.129 SN v.181 SN v.285 AN iii.82 AN v.108 AN v.300f. Snp p. 140 = AN iii.143 Iti 1f. 39, 40
    anāgāmin + tā
    Anāgāmin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who does not return, a Never-Returner, as technical term designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saṁyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (DN i.156 DN ii.92 DN iii.107 MN ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (SN iii.168 the anatta doctrine SN v.200–⁠2, the five Indriyas AN i.64 120, cultivation of good qualities, ii.160; v.86, 171 SN 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at SN v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At DN ii.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life but they are not called anāgāmins. At Iti 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saṁyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saṁyojana explanation the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other ‣See Ps ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; cp. 69
    1. ˚phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combination sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293 Vin ii.240 Vin iv.29 DN i.229 DN ii.227 DN ii.255 SN iii.168 SN v.411 AN i.23 AN i.44 AN iii.272f.; iv.204, 276, 372 sq -magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths Nd2 569b.Anagara & Anagariya
    an + āgāmin
    Anāgāra
    Anāgāriyā
    1. ‣See agāra & agāriyā;
    Anāghāta
    1. freedom from anger or ill-will Vin ii.249
    an + āghāta
    Anācāra
    1. misconduct, immorality Ja ii.133 Ja iii.276 adjective anācārin Pug 57
    an + ācāra
    Anājāniya
    adjective
    1. of inferior race, not of good blood MN i.367
    an + ājāniya
    Anādara
    1. (a) (m) disrespect Pv-a 257
    • (b.)
    • adjective disrespectful Snp 247 (= ādaravirahita Snp-a 290)
    an + ādara
    Anādaratā
    feminine
    1. want of consideration, in explanation of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā
    abstract from anādara
    Anādariya
    neuter
    1. disregard, disrespect Vin i.176 Vin iv.113 (where explained in extenso) Dhs 1325 dug 20 = Vb 359
    from anādara
    Anādā
    1. without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā Commentary )
    absolutive of an + ādiyati
    Anādāna
    adjective
    1. free from attachment (opposite sādāna) AN ii.10 = Iti 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a Snp 620 Snp 741 Snp 1094 Nd2 41 (where as neuter = taṇha) Dhp 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa Dhp-a iv.70), 396, 406, 421
    2. an + ādāna
    Anāditvā
    1. not taking up, not heeding Ja iv.352 (variant reading for Text anādiyitvā)
    absolutive of an + ādiyati
    Anādiyitvā
    1. without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120 Ja iv.352 Dhp-a i.41 ‣See also ādiyati. Ananu-
    absolutive of an + ādiyati, Sanskrit anādāya
    Anānu-
    1. represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu(an + anu), as found e.g. in the following compounds.: ˚tappaṁ (ppr.) not regretting Ja v.492
    • ˚puṭṭha questioned Snp 782 (= apucchita Snp-a 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Snp 1071 (explained at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable DN ii.273 (variant reading anu˚).

    Anāpāthagata
    adjective
    1. not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him MN i.174
    an + āpātha + gata
    Anāpāda
    adjective
    1. unmarried (of a woman) Ja iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna Commentary ; aññehi akata-pariggahā)
    an + āpāda
    Anāpucchā
    1. ‣See āpucchati
    Anābādha
    adjective
    1. safe and sound Vv-a 351
    an + ābādha
    Anāmata
    adjective
    1. not affected by death, immortal Ja ii.56 (asusāna-ṭṭhāna Commentary ) Dhp-a ii.99
    an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening
    Anāmanta
    (˚-)
    1. without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited Ja vi.226
    • ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132 AN iii.259
    an + āmanta
    Anāmaya
    adjective
    1. free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74), 177
    an + āmaya
    Anāmasita
    adjective
    1. not touched, virgin- Vv-a 113 (˚khetta)
    an + āmasita, past participle of āmassati
    Anāmassa
    adjective
    1. not to be touched Ja ii.360 (Commentary anāmāsitabba)
    gerundive of an + āmassati, Sanskrit āmaśya
    Anāyatana
    neuter
    1. nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence Ja v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla Commentary )
    an + āyatana
    Anāyasa
    adjective
    1. void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaṁ Vv-a 335)
    an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?
    Anāyāsa
    adjective
    1. free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Thag 1, 1008
    an + āyāsa
    Anārambha
    1. that which is without moil and toil Snp 745 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507)
    an + ārambha
    Anārādhaka
    adjective
    1. one who fails, unsuccessful Vin i.70
    an + ārādhaka
    Anāriya
    adjective
    1. not Aryan, ignoble, Snp 815 (variant reading SS. anariya)
    doublet of anariya
    Anālamba
    adjective
    1. without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Snp 173 (+ appatiṭṭha explained at Snp-a 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra)
    an + ālamba
    Anālaya
    1. aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya). Analhiya & Analhika;
    an + ālaya
    Anāḷhiya
    Anāḷhika;
    adjective
    1. not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combined with daḷidda MN i.450 MN ii.178 (Burmese variant anāḷiya) AN iii.352f. (variant readings Burmese manuscripts anāḷhika), 384 Ja v.96
    an + ālhiya, Sanskrit āḍhya ‣See also addha2
    Anāvaṭa
    (˚-)
    1. not shut; in ˚dvāratā feminine not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness DN iii.191
    2. an + āvaṭa
    Anāvattin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who does not return, almost synonym with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti-dhamma one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, DN i.156 (cp. DN-a i.313); iii.132 Pug 16f. 62
    an + āvattin
    Anāvasūraṁ
    adverb
    1. as long as the sun does not set, before sun-down Ja v.56 (= anatthangata-suriyaṁ Commentary cp. Sanskrit utsūra
    an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse
    Anāvāsa
    adjective-noun
    1. uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22 33 Ja ii.77
    an + āvāsa
    Anāvikata
    1. etc ‣See āvikata
    Anāvila
    adjective
    1. undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure DN i.84 (= nikkaddama DN-a i.226); iii.269, 270 Snp 637 (= nikkilesa Snp-a 469 = Dhp-a iv.192) Thag 2, 369 (āvilacitta +) Dhp 82 Dhp 413 Thag-a 251 Sdhp 479
    an + āvila
    Anāvuttha
    adjective
    1. not dwelt in DN.ii50
    an + āvuttha, past participle of āvasati
    Anāsaka
    adjective
    1. fasting, not taking food SN iv.118 feminine ˚ā cp. Sanskrit anāśaka nt.
      1. fasting, abstaining from food Dhp 141 (= bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77)
      an + āsaka
    Anāsakatta
    neuter
    1. fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292)
    abstract of anāsaka
    Anāsava
    adjective
    1. free from the 4 intoxications ‣See āsava Vin ii.148 = 164 DN iii.112 Snp 1105 Snp 1133 Dhp 94 Dhp 126 Dhp 386 Nd2 44 Iti 75 Pug 27 Dhs 1101 1451 Vb 426 Thag 1, 100 Pv ii.615 Vv-a 9 ‣See āsava and cp. nirāsava
    an + āsava
    Anāsasāna
    adjective
    1. not longing after anything Snp 369 (Snp-a 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as variant reading cp. also variant readings to āsasāna. explained by kañci rūpâdi-dhammaṁ nâsiṁsati Snp-a 365
    an + āsasāna
    Anāhāra
    adjective
    1. being without food MN i.487 Snp 985
    an + āhāra
    Anikkaḍḍhanā
    feminine
    1. not throwing out or expelling Ja iii.22
    a + nikkaḍḍhanā
    Anikkasāva
    adjective
    1. not free from impurity, impure, stained Dhp 9 = Thag 1, 969 = Ja ii.198 = v.50 Dhp-a i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva)
    a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva
    Anikhāta
    adjective
    1. not dug into, not dug down, not deep Ja vi.109 (˚kūla; Commentary agambhīrā)
    a + nikhāta, past participle of nikhanati
    Anigha
    1. ‣See nigha1 and īgha
    Anicchā
    feminine
    1. dispassion SN v.6 adjective ˚a without desires, not desiring Snp 707
    an + icchā
    Aniñjana
    neuter
    1. immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15
    an + iñjana
    Aniñjita
    adjective
    1. immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Thag 1, 386
    an + iñjita
    Aniṭṭhaṅgata
    1. ‣See niṭṭhā2
    Aniṭṭhita
    1. ‣See niṭṭhita
    Anitthi
    feminine
    1. a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, “nonwoman” Ja ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water interpreted by ucchiṭṭh-itthi)
    an + itthi
    Anindi-
    1. in ˚ḷocana (with) faultless eyes Ja vi.265
    the compound form of nindā
    Anindita
    adjective
    1. blameless, faultless Ja iv.106
    • ˚aṅgin of blameless body or limbs)
    a + nindita
    Anibbisaṁ
    1. not finding Thag 1, 78 = Dhp 153 (= taṁ ñāṇaṁ avindanto Dhp-a iii.128)
    ppr. of nibbisati, q.v.
    Animisa
    adjective
    1. not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana)
    Vedic animeṣa, cp. nimisati
    Aniyata
    adjective
    1. not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112 Vin ii.287 DN iii.217
    a + niyata
    Aniyamita
    adjective
    1. indefinite (as technical term g.) Vv-a 231
    past participle of a + niyameti
    Anila
    1. wind Ja iv.119 (˚patha air, sky) Mil 181 Vv-a 237 Sdhp 594
    from an, cp. Sanskrit aniti to breathe, cp. Latin animus breath, soul, mind
    Anirākata
    adjective
    1. ‣See nirankaroti
    a + nirākata
    Anissara
    adjective
    1. without a personal ereator Thag 1, 713
    an + issara
    Anissukin
    adjective
    1. not hard, not greedy, generous DN iii.47 (+ amaccharin; variant reading anussukin) Snp-a 569 ‣See under niṭṭhurin
    an + issukin ‣See also an-ussukin
    Anīka
    neuter
    1. army, array, troops (originally “front”, i.e. of the battle-array) Vin iv.107 (where explained in detail) Snp 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i.e. of khanti which precedes; cp. Snp-a 467)
    1. ˚agga a splendid army Snp 421 (= balakāya senāmukha Snp-a 384)
    2. ˚ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard DN iii.64 DN iii.148 Ja v.100 Ja vi.15 (“men on horseback”, horseguard) Mil 234 Mil 264
    • ˚dassana troop-inspection DN i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DN-a i.85 q.v. interpretation) Vin iv.107 (senābyūha +)
    Vedic anīka face, front, army to Indogermanic *ogu̯ ‣See, cp. Latin oculus ‣See also Sanskrit pratīka and Pali akkhi
    Anīgha
    1. ‣See nigha1 and cp. īgha
    Anīti
    feminine
    1. safety, soundness, sound condition, health AN iv.238 Mil 323 (ablative ˚ito)
    an + īti
    Anītika
    adjective
    1. free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162 SN iv.371 Snp 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48) Mil 304
    from anīti
    Anītiha
    adjective
    1. not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk AN ii.26 Thag 1, 331 (cp. MN i.520) Snp 1053 (= Nd2 49 151) Ja i.456 Nett 166 (cp. Iti 28)
    an + ītīha, the latter a compound derived from iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaṁ
    Anu1
    indeclinable
    1. preposition & prefix
    • A. As; preposition anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with
    • accusative is superseded by the
    • locative Traces of use with
    • accusative may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaṁ by 5 days, i.e. after (every) 5 days (cp. vedic anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaṁ for one year or yearly; a. saṁvaccharaṁ identical
    • (b) More frequently w
    • locative (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank SN iv.177 pathe by the way Ja v.302
    • pariveṇiyaṁ in every cell Vin i.80
    • magge along the road Ja v.201
    • vāte with the wind Ja ii.382
    1. B. As prefix: (a) General character. anu is frequently as modifying (directional) element with well-defined meaning (“along”), as such also as 1st component of prefix
    • compounds. e.g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, vi, + saṁ
    • As base, i.e. 2nd part of a prefix
    • compound it is rare and only found in combination sam-anu˚. The prefix saṁ is its nearest relation as modifying prefix The opposite of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one compound (cp. ˚loma ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: “along towards"
    • (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; especially with verbs denoting to go follow etc. English g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear-guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saṁcarati proceed around etc
    • (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. especially in double prefix
    • compounds (especially with ˚ppa˚), e.g. anu-ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaṁkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for
    • II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling English be-or German be-, also Latin ad-and con-Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. English g. ˚kampā com-passion, ˚kiṇṇa be-set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be-singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be-guard, ˚litta be-smeared or an-ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con-sequential; etc
    • (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. English g. ˚kūla being to will ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al-lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a-greement, ˚madati ap-preciate, ˚rūpa = con-form ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad-vise, com-mand etc
    • III. (a) (figuratively) following after second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after smaller; e.g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense
    • (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaṁ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other
    • IV. As one of the contrasting (-comparative) prefixes ‣See remarks on ati & cp. ā; 3 anu often occurs in reduplicative compounds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka “small and still smaller”, i.e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More frequently combns. are the following: (q.v. under each heading padânupadaṁ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaṁ, buddhânubuddha vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi
    • V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq found in Pāli where the Sanskrit variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For Pali anu = Sanskrit (Vedic) apa ‣See anuddhasta; = Sanskrit abhi ‣See anu-gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sanskrit ava ‣See anu-kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja
    1. Note (a) anu in compound is always contracted to ˚ānu˚; never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahānubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (from *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combination with an-under the influence of metre
    • (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚;
    Vedic anu, Avestan anu; Avestan ana, Gothic ana, Old High German ana, Anglo-Saxon on, German an, Latin an (in anhelare etc.)
    Anu2
    1. adjective subtile; frequently spelling for aṇu, e.g. DN i.223 Sdhp 271 Sdhp 346 (anuṁ thūlaṁ) ‣See aṇu
    Anukaṅkhin
    adjective
    1. striving after, longing for Ja v.499 (piya˚)
    from anu + kāṅkṣ
    Anukantati
    1. to cut Dhp 311 (hatthaṁ = phāleti Dhp-a iii.484)
    anu + kantati2
    Anukampaka
    1. & ˚ika adjective

      1. kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (—˚ or c. locative ) DN iii.187 SN i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157 AN iv.265f. Iti 66 (sabba-bhūta˚) Pv i.33 (= kārunika Pv-a 16), 53 (atthakāma, hitesin Pv-a 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka Pv-a 69), 27 Thag-a 174 Pv-a 196 (satthā sattesu a.)
      2. from anukampati
    Anukampati
    1. to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. accusative ) SN i.82 SN i.206 SN v.189
    2. imperative anukampa Pv ii.16 (= anuddayaṁ karohi Pv-a 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha Pv-a 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Snp 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50) Pv-a 35 (taṁ), 62 (pitaraṁ) 104.
    3. past participle anukampita (q.v.)
    4. anu + kampati
    Anukampana
    neuter
    1. compassion, pity Pv-a 16 Pv-a 88
    from last
    Anukampā
    feminine
    1. compassion, pity, mercy DN i.204 MN i.161 MN ii.113 SN i.206 SN ii.274 (loka˚) iv.323; v.259 sq. AN i.64 AN i.92 AN ii.159 AN iii.49 AN iv.139 Pug 35
    • Often in ablative anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of DN iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya) Ja iii.280 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 147
    abstract from anukampati
    Anukampita
    adjective
    1. compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy Pv iii.230
    past participle of anukampati
    Anukampin
    adjective
    1. compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in following phrases: hita˚; full of solicitude for the welfare of SN v.86 Snp 693 Pv iii.76sabbapāṇa-bhūta-hita˚; identical SN iv.314 AN ii.210 AN iii.92 iv.249 Pug 57 68. sabba-bhūta˚ SN i.25 SN i.110 AN ii.9 Iti 102
    cp. anukampaka
    Anukaroti
    1. to imitate, “to do after” AN i.212 Ja i.491 Ja ii.162 Dhp-a iv.197
    • ppr. anukabbaṁ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚)
    • Med. anukubbati SN i.19 = Ja iv.65 ‣See also anukubba. On anvakāsi ‣See anukassati 2
    anu + kṛ
    Anukassati
    1. Sanskrit anukaṛṣati
      1. to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote DN ii.255 (silokaṁ)
      • Sanskrit ava- kaṛṣati
      1. to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Thag 1, 869 (aorist anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi Commentary )
      2. anu + kassati, kṛṣ
    Anukāma
    adjective
    1. responding to love, loving in return Ja ii.157
    anu + kāma
    Anukāra
    1. imitation Dīpavaṁsa v.39
    cp. anukaroti
    Anukārin
    adjective imitating Dāvs v.32.
    Anukiṇṇa
    1. strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara-gaṇa˚)
    past participle of anu + kirati
    Anukubba
    adjective (—˚)
    1. “doing correspondingly” giving back, retaliating Ja ii.205 (kicca˚)
    = Sanskrit anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti
    Anukubbati
    1. ‣See anukaroti
    Anukula
    1. frequently spelling for anukūla
    Anukulaka
    adjective = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish).
    Anukūla
    adjective
    1. favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant Vv-a 280 spelt anukula at Sdhp 297 Sdhp 312
    1. ˚bhava complaisance, willingness Vva 71
    2. ˚yañña a propitiative sacrifice DN i.144 (explained at DN-a i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan)
    anu + kūla, opposite paṭikūla
    Anukkaṇṭhati
    1. not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto Ja v.10 and past participle ˚ita without regret or in plenty Pv-a 13
    2. an + ukkaṇṭhati
    Anukkaṇṭhana
    neuter
    1. having no lack anything, being contented or happy Ja vi.4
    an + ukkaṇṭhana
    Anukkama
    1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instrumental anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession Ja i.157 Ja i.262 Ja i.290 Vv-a 157 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 35 etc
    2. that which keeps an animal in (regular step, i.e. a bridle MN i.446 Snp 622 (sandānaṁ saha˚)
    to anukkamati
    Anukkamati
    1. to follow, go along (a path =
    2. accusative ). AN v.195 Iti 80 (maggaṁ)
    3. to advance (not with Morris JP T S. 1886, 111 as “abandon”) SN i.24 Thag 1, 194
    anu + kram
    Anukkhipati
    1. to throw out cp. xi.6 (vaṭṭaṁ)
    anu + khipati
    Anukkhepa
    1. compensation Vin i.285
    anu + khepa ‣See anukkhipati
    Anukhaṇati
    1. to dig after or further Ja v.233
    anu + khaṇati
    Anukhuddaka
    adjective
    1. in compound khudda˚; whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154 = Mil 142 Mil 144
    anu + khuddaka
    Anuga
    1. (—˚) (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under standing under the influence of Snp 332
    • vasa˚ in the power of), 791 ejā˚; = abhibhūta Snp 527), 1095 (Māra vasa˚; = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507) Iti 91
    • ejā˚) Ja iii.224
    • vasa˚ = vasavattin Commentary ); Mhvs 7, 3
    from anu + gam
    Anugacchati
    1. to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. accusative ) Kp-a 223 Pv-a 141 (˚gacchanto)
    2. aorist ˚gamāsi Vin i.16 & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl anvagū Snp 586 (vasaṁ = vasaṁ gata Snp-a 461).
    3. passive anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with Ja i.53 Ja v.370
    4. past participle anugata (q.v.)
    5. anu + gacchati
    Anugata
    adjective
    1. gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; figuratively fallen or gone into, affected with (—˚), being a victim of, suffering MN i.16 DN iii.85 173 (parisā) AN ii.185 (sota˚, variant reading anudhata) Ja ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369 Nd2 32 (taṇhā˚) Pv-a 102 (nāmaṁ mayhaṁ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚)
    past participle of anugacchati
    Anugati
    feminine (—˚)
    1. following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on SN i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in compound diṭṭhānugati a sign (literally belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108 SN ii.203 Pug 33 Dhp-a iv.39
    from anu + gam
    Anugama
    1. following after, only as adjective in dur˚ difficult to be followed Ja iv.65
    from anu + gam
    Anugāmika
    adjective going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kh viii.8 nidhi a treasure
    • accusative a man to the next world) Ja iv.280
    • ˚nidhi Mil 159 (parisā) Pv-a 132 Pv-a 253 (dānaṁ nāma ˚aṁ nidānan ti).

    Anugāmin
    adjective
    1. following, attending on; an attendant, follower Snp-a 453 (= anuyutta)
    from anugacchati
    Anugāyati
    1. to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate DN i.104 DN i.238 Snp 1131 (anugāyissaṁ) Mil 120
    anu + gāyati
    Anugāhati
    1. to plunge into, to enter (accusative ) Sdhp 611
    2. anu + gāhati
    Anugijjhati
    1. to be greedy after, to covet Snp 769 (cp. Nd1 12) Ja iii.207 Ja iv.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti Commentary ). past participle ˚giddhā (q.v.) cp. abhigijjhati
    2. anu + gijjhati
    Anugiddha
    1. greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Snp 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952 Thag 1, 580
    past participle of anugijjhati
    Anuggaṇha
    adjective
    1. compassionate, ready to help Pv-a 42 ˚sīla
    cp. anuggaha
    Anuggaṇhataka
    adjective
    1. compassionate, commiserating, helping Pv-a 69 (= anukampaka)
    = anugganha
    Anuggaṇhana
    neuter anuggaha1 Dhs-a 403 Anu(g)ganhati
    Anu(g)gaṇhāti
    1. to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection DN i.53 (vācaṁ; cp. DN-a i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto) Ja ii.74 Nd2 50 (ppr. med ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna) Pug 36 Pv-a 181 (imperative anuggaṇha = anukampassu).
    2. past participle anuggahīta (q.v.)
    3. anu + gaṇhāti
    Anuggaha1
    1. “taking up”, compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit SN ii.11 SN iii.109; iv.104; v.162 AN i.92 AN i.114 AN ii.145 AN iv.167 AN v.70 Iti 12 98 Ja i.151 Ja v.150 Pug 25 Pv-a 145 Thag-a 104
    anu + grah
    Anuggaha2
    adjective
    1. not taking up Snp 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd1 330)
    an + uggaha
    Anuggahīta
    (& ˚ita)
    1. commiserated, made happy, satisfied MN i.457 SN ii.274 SN iii.91 SN iv.263 AN iii.172 Ja iii.428
    past participle of anuggaṇhāti
    Anuggāhaka
    adjective
    1. helping, assisting SN iii.5 SN v.162 Mil 354 (neuter = help)
    2. from anuggaha
    Anugghāṭeti
    1. not to unfasten or open (a door) Mil 371 (kavāṭaṁ)
    an + ugghāṭeti
    Anugghāta
    1. not shaking, a steady walk Ja vi.253
    an + ugghāta
    Anugghātin
    adjective
    1. not shaking, not jerking, Ja vi.252 Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i) Vv-a 36
    from last
    Anughāyati
    1. to smell, snuff, sniff up Mil 343 (gandhaṁ)
    anu + ghāyati1
    Anucaṅkamati
    1. to follow (along) after, to go after DN i.235 MN i.227 Thag 1, 481 1044; Caus ˚āpeti MN i.253 cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; MN Vastu i.350
    anu + cankamati
    Anucaṅkamana
    neuter
    1. sidewalk Ja i.7
    from anucankamati
    Anucarati
    1. to move along, to follow; to practice; past participle anuciṇṇa & anucarita; (q.v.)
    2. anu + cariti
    Anucarita
    (—˚)
    1. connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with DN i.16 DN i.21 (vīmaṁsa˚ anuvicarita DN-a i.106) MN i.68 (identical) Mil 226
    past participle of anucarati
    Anuciṇṇa
    1. (past participle )

      1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 (pamādaṁ) Ja i.20 (v.126) Thag 1, 236 2, 206; Dīpavaṁsa iv.9
      2. adorned with, accompanied by connected with Ja iv.286
      past participle of anucarati
    Anucintana
    neuter
    1. thinking, upon, intention, care for Pv-a 164
    from anucinteti
    Anucinteti
    1. to think upon, to meditate, consider SN i.203 (variant reading for anuvicinteti)
    anu + cinteti
    Anuccaṅgin
    1. ‣See anujjangin
    Anucchavika
    1. (& ˚ya) adjective

      1. “according to one’s skin”, befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, Ja i.58 Ja i.62 Ja i.126 Ja i.218 Ja ii.5 iv.137, 138 Mil 358 Dhp-a i.203 390; ii.55, 56 Vv-a 68 78 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (identical + ananulomika) Mil 13
      anu + chavi + ka
    Anucchiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) Ja iii.257 Dhp-a ii.3 (variant readings anucciṭṭha)
    ‣See ucchiṭṭha
    Anujagghati
    1. to laugh at, deride, mock DN i.91 DN-a i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256)
    anu + jagghati
    Anujavati
    1. to run after, to hasten after, to follow Ja vi.452 (= anubandhati)
    anu + javati
    Anujāta
    adjective
    1. “born after” i.e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; especially said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son Iti 64 (atijāta + opposite avajāta) Thag 1, 827 (figuratively following the example of) 1279 Ja vi.380 Dhp-a i.129 Dāvs ii.66
    anu + jāta
    Anujānāti
    1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225 AN ii.197 Pv iv.167 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 142
    2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83 Vin ii.301: Snp 982
    3. gerundive anuññeyya that which is allowed AN ii.197 pp anuññāta (q.v.)
    4. causative anujānāpeti Ja i.156
    anu + jānāti
    Anujīvati
    1. to live after, i.e. like (accusative ), to live for or on, subsist by Ja iv.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaṁ laddhaṁ (Commentary ).
    2. past participle anujīvata (q.v.)
    3. anu + jīvati
    Anujīvita
    neuter
    1. living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Snp 836 (= jīvitaṁ Snp-a 545)
    past participle of anujīvati
    Anujīvin
    adjective-noun
    1. living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant AN i.152 AN iii.44 Ja iii.485 Dāvs v.43
    from anujīvati
    Anujju
    adjective
    1. not straight, crooked, bent, in compounds. ˚aṅgin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i.e. with perfect limbs, graceful feminine ˚ī epithet of a beautiful woman Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīrā Commentary ); vi.500 (Text anuccangī Commentary aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i.e. snake Ja iv.330
    2. ˚bhūta not upright (figuratively of citta Ja v.293
    3. an + ujju
    Anujjuka
    1. = anujju Ja iii.318
    Anujjhāna
    neuter
    1. meditation, reflection, introspection Mil 352 (˚bahula)
    anu + jhāna
    Anuññāta
    adjective
    1. permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained DN i.88 Ja i.92 Ja ii.353 416 Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at identical passage Thag 2, 129 explained at Pv-a 64 by ananumata) Pug 28 DN-a i.247 248, 267 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 81
    past participle of anujānāti
    Anuññātatta
    neuter
    1. being permitted, permission Ja ii.353
    abstract to anuññāta
    Anuṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Thag 1, 1033
    from an + uṭṭhahati
    Anuṭṭhahati
    1. to carry out, look after, practise do Ja v.121 past participle anuṭṭhita (q.v.)
    2. anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti ‣See ˚tiṭṭhati
    Anuṭṭhahāna
    adjective
    1. one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dhp 280 (anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409)
    ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati
    Anuṭṭhātar
    1. one without energy or zeal Snp 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) Snp-a 169 (viriya-tejavirahita)
    agent noun to an + uṭṭhahati
    Anuṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. “the not getting up”, inactivity, want of energy Dhp 241 (sarīra-paṭijagganaṁ akaronto Dhp-a iii.347)
    an + uṭṭhāna
    Anuṭṭhita
    1. practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done DN ii.103 SN iv.200 AN iii.290f.; iv.300 Ja ii.61 Mil 198 Pv-a 132 (cp. anugata)
    past participle of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati
    Anuṭṭhubhati
    1. to lick up with one’s saliva DN-a i.138
    formally Sanskrit anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etymology of which ‣See under niṭṭhubhati
    Anuṭṭhurin
    variant reading at Snp-a 569 ‣See niṭṭhurin.
    Anuḍasati
    1. to bite Ja vi.192
    anu + ḍasati
    Anuḍahati
    1. to burn over again, burn thoroughly, figuratively to destroy, consume Ja ii.330 Ja vi.423 passive ˚ḍayhati Ja v.426

      • Also spelt ˚dahati, e.g. at SN iv.190 = v.53 Thag 2, 488
      anu + ḍahati
    Anuḍahana
    neuter
    1. conflagration, burning up, consumption Ja v.271 Thag-a 287 (d)
    from anuḍahati
    Anuṇṇata
    adjective
    1. not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Snp 702 (care = uddhaccaṁ nâpajjeyya Snp-a 492)
    uṇṇata
    Anutappati
    1. to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse Ja i.113 Ja iv.358 Ja v.492 (ppr. an-anutappaṁ) Dhp 67 Dhp 314 Pv ii.942 Dhp-a ii.40 gerundive anutappa to be regretted AN i.22 AN i.77 AN iii.294 and anutāpiya AN iii.46 (an˚)
    2. anu + tappati1; Sanskrit anutapyate, passive of anutapati
    Anutāpa
    1. anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra Vv-a 180) Dhs-a 384
    from anu + tāpa
    Anutāpin
    adjective
    1. repenting, regretting Thag 2, 57 190; Vv.21 Vv-a 115
    from anutāpa
    Anutāpiya
    gerundive of anutappati, q.v.
    Anutāḷeti
    1. to beat Ja ii.280
    anu + taḷeti
    Anutiṭṭhati
    1. to look after, to manage, carry on Ja v.113 (= anugacchati) Pv-a 78
    anu + tiṭṭhati ‣See also anuṭṭhahati
    Anutīre
    adverb
    1. along side or near the bank (of a river) Snp 18 (= tīra-samīpe Snp-a 28) cp. anu AN b
    anu + tīre, locative of tīra
    Anuttara
    adjective
    1. “nothing higher”, without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed excellent, preeminent Snp 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato Kp-a 193), 1003 Dhp 23 Dhp 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga Dhp-a i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma) Dhs 1294 DN-a i.129 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 18, etc
    an + uttara
    Anuttariya
    neuter
    1. preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚;) at DN iii.219 or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚ lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚;) at DN iii.250 281 AN i.22 AN iii.284 AN iii.325f. 452; Ps i.5. cp. MN i.235 AN v.37 ‣See also ānuttariya
    abstract from anuttara
    Anuttāna
    adjective
    1. not (lying) open, not exposed; figuratively unexplained, unclear Ja vi.247
    an + uttāna
    Anutthunā
    feminine
    1. wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.)
    from anutthunāti
    Anutthunāti
    1. to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail DN iii.86 Snp 827 (cp. Nd1 167) Dhp 156 Ja iii.115 Ja v.346 Ja v.479 Dhp-a iii.133 Pv-a 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience)
    anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan
    Anutrāsin
    adjective
    1. not terrified, at ease Thag 1, 864
    an + utrāsin
    Anuthera
    1. an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212
    • therānutherā Th. & next in age)
    anu + thera
    Anudadāti
    1. to concede, grant, admit, future anudassati Mil 276 Mil 375
    anu + dadāti
    Anudayati
    1. (to sympathise with) ‣See under anuddā
    Anudassita
    1. manifested Mil 119
    past participle of anudasseti
    Anudahati
    1. ‣See anuḍahati
    Anudiṭṭha
    1. pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication Ja v.393 (anudiṭṭha asukassa nāma dassatī ti Commentary ) Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha Pv-a 50)
    past participle of anudisati
    Anudiṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. an “after-view”, sceptical view, speculation, heresy DN i.12 MN ii.228 SN iii.45f. Thag 1, 754 Mil 325 DN-a i.103
    • attānudiṭṭhi (q.v.) a soul-speculation
    anu + diṭṭhi
    Anudisati
    1. to point out, direct, bid, address Pv-a 99 (aorist anudesi + anvesi).
    2. past participle anudiṭṭha (q.v.)
    3. anu + disati
    Anudisā
    feminine
    1. an intermediate point of ihe com passive often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points DN i.222 SN i.122 SN iii.124
    2. anu + disā
    Anudīpeti
    1. to explain Mil 227 (dhammâdhammaṁ)
    anu + dīpeti
    Anudūta
    1. a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19 295 Dhp-a ii.76 78
    anu + dūta
    Anudeva
    1. ‣See anvadeva
    Anuddayatā
    feminine
    1. sympathy with (—˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚; kindness to or sympathy with other people SN ii.218 SN v.169 (Text anudayatā) AN iii.184 Iti 72 Vb 356
    abstract to anuddayā
    Anuddayā
    1. (& anudayā) feminine

      1. compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196 SN i.204 SN ii.199 SN iv.323 AN ii.176 iii.189 Pug 35 (anukampā) Ja i.147 Ja i.186 Ja i.214 Pv-a 70 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 181 (= anukampā). In compoundanudaya˚; e.g. ˚sampanna full of mercy Ja i.151 Ja i.262 Pv-a 66
      anu + dayā
    Anuddā
    feminine
    1. = anuddayā Dhs 1056 where also the other abstract formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaṁ “care, forbearance & consideration” Dhs-a 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā)
    contracted form of anuddayā
    Anuddhaṁseti
    1. to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (explanation here in slightly different meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down) Iti 42 Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaṁ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111 MN i.26 SN i.186 AN i.266 AN ii.126 AN iii.393f. past participle anuddhasta (q.v.)
    2. anu + dhaṁseti
    Anuddhata
    adjective
    1. not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Snp 850 (= uddhacca-virahita Snp-a 549 cp. anuṇṇata) Iti 30 Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitta Dhp-a iv.93) Vv 648 Pug 59
    an + uddhata
    Anuddharin
    adjective
    1. not proud Snp 952 (= anussukin Snp-a 569) ‣See niṭṭhurin
    an + uddharin
    Anuddhasta
    adjective
    1. spoilt, corrupt, degraded MN i.462 (citta) AN ii.126 (identical)
    anu + dhasta, past participle of anuddhaṁseti, cp. Sanskrit apadhvasta
    Anudhamma
    1. in compound with dhamma as dhammānudhamma to be judged as a reduplicated cpd after the manner of compounds. mentioned under anu iv. meaning “the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances ‣See dhamma Commentary iv. Frequently in phrase dh˚-ânudh˚-paṭipanna “one who masters the completeness of the Dh.”, e.g. SN ii.18 SN iii.163 Iti 81 Ps ii.189
    2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaṁ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234 DN i.161 MN i.368 MN i.482 SN ii.33 SN iii.6 SN iv.51 SN v.7 ‣See further MN iii.30 Snp 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis) Also in compound ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma living in truth SN ii.81 SN ii.108 AN ii.8 Dhp 20 (cp. Dhp-a i.158) Vv 317 Snp 69 ‣See Nd2 51
    anu + dhamma
    Anudhammatā
    feminine [abstract to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma AN ii.46 Ps i.35, 36.
    Anudhāreti
    1. to hold up DN-a i.61 (chattaṁ), cp. Ja 1.53, dhariyamāna
    anu + dhāreti
    Anudhāvati
    1. to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue MN i.474 SN i.9 Dhp 85 Thag 1, 1174 Mil 253 Mil 372
    anu + dhāvati
    Anudhāvin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who runs after SN i.9 SN i.117
    from anudhāvati
    Anunadī
    1. (-tire) along the bank of the river SN iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu preposition c. locative ‣See under anu A).

    Anunamati
    1. to incline, bend intranstitive, give way Mil 372 (of a bow)
    2. anu + namati
    Anunaya
    1. “leading along”, friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning DN iii.254 (˚saṁyojana) AN iv.7 sq (identical) MN i.191 Dhs 1059 Vb 145 Nett 79; combined with opposite paṭigha (repugnance) at Mil 44 Mil 122 Mil 322
    from anuneti
    Anunayana
    neuter
    1. fawning Dhs-a 362
    from anuneti
    Anunāsika
    adjective
    1. nasal; as technical term g. the sound ṁ; in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ṁ Vv-a 114 253, 275, 333
    anu + nāsā + ika
    Anunīta
    adjective
    1. led, induced SN iv.71 Snp 781
    past participle of anuneti
    Anunetar
    1. one who reconciles or conciliates Ps ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā)
    agent noun from anuneti
    Anuneti
    1. to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter SN i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); past participle anunīta (q.v.)
    2. anu + neti
    Anupa
    1. ‣See anūpa
    Anupakampati
    1. to shake, move, to be unsteady Thag 1, 191 = Ud 41
    anu + pakampati
    Anupakkama
    1. not attacking, instrumental ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195
    an + upakkama
    Anupakkuṭṭha
    adjective
    1. blameless, irreproachahle DN i.113 Vin iv.160 Snp p. 115 DN-a i.281
    an + upak˚
    Anupakkhandati
    1. to push oneself forward, to encroach on DN i.122 (= anupavisati DN-a i.290) absolutive anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati) MN i.151 MN i.469 SN iii.113 Vism 18
    2. anu + pa + khandati
    Anupakhajjati
    1. to encroach, intrude Vin v.163
    denominative native from anupakhajja, absolutive of anupakkhandati
    Anupagacchati
    1. to go or return into (c. accusative ) DN i.55 (anupeti +)
    2. anu + pa + gacchati
    Anupaghāta
    1. not hurting Dhp 185
    • anūpa˚ metri causa; explained by anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238)
    an + upaghāta
    Anupacita
    adjective
    1. heaped up, accumulated Thag-a 56
    anu + pa + cita, past participle of anupacināti
    Anupacināti
    1. not to observe or notice Ja v.339 (= anoloketi Commentary ; variant reading anapaviṇāti)
    an + upacināti
    Anupajagghati
    1. to laugh at, to deride, mock over AN i.198 (variant reading anusaṁ˚)
    anu + pa + jagghati
    Anupajjati
    1. to follow, accompany Ja iv.304 - past participle anupanna (q.v.)
    2. anu + pad
    Anupañcāhaṁ
    adverb
    1. every five days Pv-a 139 (+ anudasāhaṁ)
    anu + pañcā + ahaṁ
    Anupaññatti
    feminine
    1. a supplementary regulation or order Vin ii.286 Vin v.2f.
    anu + paññatti
    Anupaṭipāti
    feminine
    1. succession; as adverb in order, successively DN-a i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā) Dhp-a iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244
    2. anu + paṭipāti
    Anupaṭṭhita
    adjective
    1. setting out after, following, attacking Ja v.452
    anu + pa + ṭhita
    Anupatati
    1. to follow, go after, Ja vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.)
    2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = MN i.364 SN i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti = Dhp 221 (dukkhā) Thag 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning).
    3. past participle anupatita (q.v.) cp. also anupāta & anupātin;
    anu + patati
    Anupatita
    1. “befallen”, affected with, oppressed by (—˚) SN ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (identical) Snp 334 (pamāda˚)
    past participle of anupatati
    Anupatitatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (—˚) Snp-a 339
    abstract of anupatita
    Anupatta
    (anuppatta)
    1. (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached DN i.87–⁠111; ii.2 Iti 38 Snp 027 Snp 635 Dhp 386 Dhp 403 Pv iv.166 Pv-a 59 (dukkhaṁ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo-anuppatta having reached old age, e.g. Vin ii.188 DN i.48 Snp past participle 50, 92 Pv-a 149
    2. past participle of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sanskrit anuprāpta
    Anupatti
    1. (anuppatti) feminine

      1. attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal SN i.46 SN i.52
      anu + patti
    Anupathe
    1. at Ja v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as preposition c. locative ‣See anu A. Commentary explns. as janghamagga-mahāmaggānaṁ antare.

    Anupada
    1. the “afterfoot”, i.e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355) Mil 340 (anupadena anupadaṁ katheti)
    2. adjective (following) on foot, at every, step continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma-vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation MN iii.25 ˚vaṇṇanā word-by-word explanation Dhs-a 168 As
    3. neuter adverb ˚ṁ close behind, immediately after (c. genitive) Ja ii.230 (tassânupadaṁ agamāsi) vi.422. especially frequently in combinationpadānupadaṁ (
    4. adverb ) foot after foot, i.e. in the footsteps, immediately behind Ja iii.504 Ja vi.555 Dhp-a i.69 Dhp-a ii.38
    cp. Sanskrit anupadaṁ adverb, anu + pada
    Anupadātar
    (anuppadātar)
    1. one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs DN i.4 (cp DN-a i.74) AN ii.209
    agent noun of anupadeti
    Anupadāna
    1. (anuppadāna) neuter

      1. giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (—˚) DN i.12 (cp. DN-a i.98 both read anuppādāna) Ja iii.205 Mil 315
      anu + pa + dāna, cp. anupadeti
    Anupadinna
    (anuppadinna)
    1. given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512
    past participle of anupadeti
    Anupadeti
    (anuppadeti)
    1. to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake SN iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuṁ) MN i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya ‣See dadāti i.3) Mil 210 (˚deti). future ˚dassati ‣See dadāti i.1 DN iii.92 SN iv.303 (variant reading SS for Text anusarissati) AN iii.43 Snp 983
    2. absolutive ˚datvā Snp-a 35 inf ˚dātuṁ AN i.117
    3. past participle ˚dinna (q.v.)
    4. anu + pa + dadāti
    Anupaddava
    adjective
    1. free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anītika); iii.162 Dhp 338 Dhp-a iv.48 Pv-a 250 (explanation for siva)
    an + upaddava
    Anupadhāreti
    1. to disregard, to heed not, to neglect Dhp-a iv.197 Vv-a 260
    an + upadhār˚
    Anupadhika
    adjective
    1. free from attachment ‣See upadhi Vin i.36 (anupadhīka); D. iii.112 (anupadhika opposite to sa-upadhika) Snp 1057 (anūpadhīka Text but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa)
    an + upadhi + ka
    Anupanna
    ,
    1. gone into, reached, attained Snp 764 (māradheyya˚)
    past participle of anupajjati
    Anupabandhati
    (anuppa˚)
    1. to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Mil 132 causative ˚āpeti ibid
    2. anu + pa + bandhati
    Anupabandhanatā
    1. (anuppa˚) feminine

      1. nonstopping, not ceasing Mil 132
      abstract to preceding
    Anupabandhanā
    1. (anuppa˚) feminine

      1. continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vb 357 (in exegesis of upanāha)
      abstract from anupabandhati
    Anupabbajjā
    feminine
    1. giving up worldly life in imitation of another SN v.67 = Iti 107
    anu + pabbajjā, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit anupravrajati Divy 61
    Anupaya
    adjective
    1. unattached, “aloof” SN i.181 (akankha apiha +)
    an + upaya
    Anuparigacchati
    1. to walk round and round, to go round about (c. accusative ) Vin iii.119 SN i.75 (
    2. absolutive ˚gamma Snp 447 (
    3. aorist ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Snp-a 393) Ja iv.267
    4. anu + pari + gacchati
    Anuparidhāvati
    1. to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S.; iii.150 (khīlan)
    anu + pari + dhāvati
    Anupariyāti
    1. to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. accusative ) Vin ii.111 SN i.102 SN i.124 Thag 1, 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (identical to search) Pv iii.34 (= anuvicarati) Mil 38 Pv-a 92
    2. ˚yāyitvā
    3. absolutive ) 217
    4. auu + pari + yāti
    Anupariyāya
    adjective
    1. going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city DN ii.83 = SN iv.194 =. AN v.195 AN iv.107
    adjectivised absolutive of anupariyāti
    Anuparivattati
    1. to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaṁ) DN i.240 Pv-a 97
    • to meet Mil 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti)

  • to move round & round, move on and on keep on rolling (c.

    • accusative ), evolve S.; iii.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Mil 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan)
    anu + pari + vṛt
  • Anuparivatti
    feminine (—˚)
    1. dealing with, occupation, connection with SN iii.16
    anu + parivatti
    Anuparivāreti
    1. to surround, stand by, attend on (c. accusative ) Vin i.338 MN i.153 Dhp-a 1.55
    2. anu + pari + vāreti
    Anupariveṇiyaṁ
    1. should be written anu pariveṇiyaṁ (“in every cell, cell by cell”), anu here functioning as preposition c. locative (see anu AN Vin i.80 106
    2. anu + pariveṇiyaṁ = locative of pariveṇi
    Anuparisakkati
    1. to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. accusative ) SN iv.312 (variant reading ˚vattati)
    2. anu + pari + sakkati
    Anuparisakkana
    neuter
    1. dealing with, interest in SN iv.312 (variant reading ˚vattana)
    from anuparisakkati
    Anupariharati
    1. to surround, enfold, embrace MN i.306
    anu + pari + harati
    Anupalitta
    adjective
    1. unsmeared, unstained, free from taint MN i.319 MN i.386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Snp & Dh: Snp 211 (= lepānaṁ abhāvā Snp-a 261), 392 468, 790, 845 Dhp 353
    an + upalitta
    Anupavajja
    adjective
    1. blameless, without fault, Mil 391
    gerundive of an + upavadati
    Anupavattaka
    1. (anuppa˚) adjective to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaṁ) Mil 342 Mil 362 Snp-a 454 ‣See also anuvattaka.

    Anupavatteti
    (anuppa˚)
    1. to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaṁ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor SN i.191 Mil 362 ‣See also anuvatteti
    anu + pa + vatteti, from vṛt
    Anupavāda
    1. not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dhp 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; explained at Dhp-a iii.238 as anupavādanañ c'eva anupavādāpanañ ca “not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling”); adjective ˚vādaka Pug 60 & ˚vādin MN i.360
    an + upavāda
    Anupaviṭṭha
    (anuppa˚)
    1. entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. accusative ) Mil 270 Mil 318f. 409 (coming for shelter) Pv-a 97 Pv-a 152 (Gangānadiṁ a. nadī flowing into the G.)
    2. past participle of anupavisati
    Anupaviṭṭhatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of having entered Mil 257
    abstract to anupaviṭṭha
    Anupavisati
    1. to go into, to enter Dhp i.290 Vv-a 42 (= ogāhati). past participle ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.)
    2. causative ˚paveseti (q.v.)
    3. anu + pa + visati
    Anupavecchati
    (anuppa˚)
    1. to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati) DN i.74 (= pavesati DN-a i.218); ii.78 MN i.446 iii.133 AN ii.64 AN iii.26 (variant reading ˚vacch˚) Ja v.394 Snp 208 (variant reading ˚vacch˚) Snp-a 256 (= anupavesati) Pv-a 28
    ‣See under pavecchati
    Anupaveseti
    1. to make enter, to give over, to supply Snp-a 256 (= ˚pavecchati)
    anu + pa + vis, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit anupraveśayati Divy 238
    Anupasaṅkamati1
    1. to go along up to (c. accusative ) Pv-a 179
    2. anu + pa + saṁkamati
    Anupasaṅkamati2
    1. not to go to. not to approach Dhp-a ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati)
    an + upasank˚
    Anupasaṇṭhapanā
    feminine
    1. not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but identical passage at Vb 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā
    an + upasaṇṭhapanā
    Anupassaka
    adjective
    1. observing, viewing, contemplating Thag 1, 420
    from anupassati
    Anupassati
    1. to look at, contemplate, observe Snp 477 Ps i.57, 187; Snp-a 505
    anu + passati
    Anupassanā
    feminine
    1. looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation SN v.178f. Snp p. 140; Ps i.10, 20, 96; ii.37, 41 sq. 67 sq. Vb 194 ‣See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚;
    abstract of anupassati, cp. Sanskrit anudarśana
    Anupassin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. viewing, observing, realising SN ii.84f. v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dhp 7 Dhp 253 Snp 255 Snp 728 Ps i.191 sq. Vb 193f. 236; Sdhp 411
      from anupassati
    Anupahata1
    1. thrown up, blown up Mil 274
    anu + pa + hata, past participle of anu + pa + han
    Anupahata2
    adjective
    1. not destroyed, not spoilt Dhp-a ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda)
    an + upahata
    Anupāta
    1. attack in speech, contest, reproach AN i.161 (vāda˚)
    of anupatati
    Anupātin
    adjective
    1. following, indulging in Ja iii.523 (khaṇa˚)
    2. attacking, hurting Ja v.399
    from anupāta
    Anupādaṁ
    adverb
    1. at the foot Vism 182 (opposite anusīsaṁ at the head)
    anu + pāda
    Anupādā
    1. anupādāniya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā ‣See upādiyati. Anupadana & Anupadi;
    absolutive of an + upādiyati = anupādāya
    Anupādāna
    Anupādi;
    1. ‣See upādāna & upādi;
    Anupāpita
    1. having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Mil 252
    past participle of anupāpeti
    Anupāpuṇāti
    (anuppā˚)
    1. to reach, attain, get to, find SN i.105 absolutive anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 (˚pāpuṇitvā Pv-a 123).
    2. past participle anupatta (q.v.)

      • Caus anupāpeti (q.v.)
      anu + pāpuṇāti
    Anupāpeti
    1. to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find Ja vi.88 cp. xi.4 (aorist anupāpayi Mil 276
    2. past participle anupāpita (q.v.)
    3. causative of anupāpuṇāti
    Anupāya
    1. wrong means Ja i.256 Sdhp 405
    an + upāya
    Anupāyāsa
    1. ‣See upāyāsa
    Anupālaka
    adjective
    1. guarding, preserving Sdhp 474
    anu + pālaka
    Anupālana
    neuter
    1. maintenance, guarding, keeping Dīpavaṁsa iii.2
    from anupāleti
    Anupāleti
    1. to safeguard, warrant, maintain Mil 160 (santatiṁ)
    anu + pāleti
    Anupāhana
    adjective
    1. without shoes Ja vi.552
    an + upāhana
    Anupiya
    (anuppiya) adjective
    1. flattering, plessant, neuter pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I iii.185 Ja ii.390 Ja v.360 and ˚bhāṇitar identical Vb 352
    anu + piya
    Anupīḷaṁ
    1. at Pv-a 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q.v.)
    Anupucchati
    1. to ask or inquire after (c. accusative ) Snp 432 Snp 1113
    2. past participle anupuṭṭha (q.v.)
    3. anu + pucchati
    Anupuṭṭha
    1. asked Snp 782 (= pucchita Snp-a 521)
    past participle of anupucchati
    Anupubba
    adjective
    1. following in one’s turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚-ninno etc.) DN i.184 Snp 511 Ja v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverb ially: anupubbena instrumental by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83 Dhp 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā Dhp-a iii.340) Pug 41 64 Ja ii.2 Ja ii.105 Ja iii.127 Mil 22 Pv-a 19
    2. anupubbaso (ablative cp. Sanskrit anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Snp 1000 In compound both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q.v.)

      1. ˚kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice MN i.446
      • ˚nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i.e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra & are enum; d. as such at DN iii.266 DN iii.290 AN iv.409 AN iv.456 Ps i.35
      • ˚vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase “saññā-vedayitanirodha” ‣See jhāna1. Enumd. as such in various places, esp at the following: DN ii.156 DN iii.265 DN iii.290 AN iv.410 Nd2 under jhāna; Ps i.5 Mil 176
      • ˚sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) MN i.479 MN iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā)
      anu + pubba
    Anupubbaka
    adjective = anupubba, in compound pubbānupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of compound ‣See anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaṁ kulānaṁ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).
    Anupubbata
    neuter
    1. acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i.e. as it pleases Vv-a 280) cp. ānupubbatā. Anupubbi-katha
    from anupubba
    Anupubbi-kathā
    feminine
    1. a gradual instruction, graduated sermon regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna-kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i.e. charity righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Buddhaghosa explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraṁ sīlaṁ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaṁ dīpana-kathā (DN-a i.277). Vin i.15 18; ii.156, 192 DN i.110 DN ii.41 MN i.379 Ja i.8 Vv-a 66 197, 208 DN-a i.308 Dhp-a i.6 Mil 228
    • The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu ‣See anu Note (a)), e.g. at DN i.110 DN ii.41 MN i.379 Ja i.8 Mil 228
    anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi-kathā
    Anupekkhati
    1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully AN iii.23
    2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna).
    3. causative anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73
    anu + pekkhati
    Anupekkhanatā
    feminine
    1. concentration (of thought) Dhs 8 85, 284, 372
    abstract from anupekkhana ‣See anupekkhatī
    Anupeti
    1. to go into DN i.55 (+ anupagacchati) SN iii.207 DN-a i.165
    anu + pa + i
    Anupeseti
    1. to send forth after Mil 36
    anu + pa + iṣ
    Anuposathikaṁ
    1. ‣See anvaḍḍhamāsaṁ
    Anuposiya
    adjective
    1. to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318
    gerundive of anu + puṣ
    Anuppa˚
    1. ; in all combns. of anu + ppa ‣See under headings anupa˚;
    Anuppadajjuṁ
    1. (SN iii.131) ‣See anupadeti
    Anuppanna
    1. (˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) ‣See uppanna etc
    Anuppīḷa
    adjective
    1. not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm Ja iii.443 v.378 Vv-a 351 Pv-a 161
    an + uppīḷa
    Anupharaṇa
    neuter
    1. flashing through, pervading Mil 148
    anu + pharaṇa
    Anuphusīyati
    1. to sprinkle, moisten, make wet Ja v.242 (himaṁ Commentary pateyya)
    anu + phusīyati, cp. Sanskrit pruṣāyati, causative of pruṣ
    Anubajjhati
    1. at Pv-a 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q.v.)
    Anubaddha
    1. following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) DN i.1 DN i.226
    past participle of anubandhati
    Anubandha
    1. bondage MN iii.170 Iti 91
    anu + bandh
    Anubandhati
    1. to follow, run after, pursue Ja i.195 Ja ii.230 Ja vi.452 (= anujavati) Pv-a 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aorist ˚bandhi Ja ii.154 Ja ii.353 iii.504 Pv-a 260 (= anvāgacchi).
    2. absolutive ˚bandhitvā Ja i.254
    3. gerundive ˚bandhitabba MN i.106
    4. past participle anubaddha (q.v.)
    5. anu + bandhati
    Anubandhana
    neuter
    1. that which connects or follows, connection, consequence Ja vi.526 (˚dukkha)
    from anubandhati
    Anubala
    neuter
    1. rear-guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ṁ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Mil 125
    anu + bala
    Anubujjhati
    1. to remember, recollect Ja iii.387 (with avabujjhati in preceding verse)
    anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sanskrit avabudhyate
    Anubujjhana
    neuter
    1. awakening, recognition Ps i.18 (bujjhana +)
    from anubujjhati
    Anubuddha
    1. awakened (active & pass.), recognised, conceived seen, known DN ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā) SN i.137 (dhammo vimalen’ânubuddho ii.203; iv.188 AN ii.1 AN iii.14 AN iv.105 Snp-a 431 In phrase buddhānubuddha (as to nature of compound ‣See anu B iv. either “fully awakened (enlightened)” or “wakened by the wake” (Mrs. Rhys Davids) Thag 1, 679 = 1246
    2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DN-a i.40 cp. buddhānubuddha
    past participle of anu + bodhati
    Anubodha
    1. awakening; perception, recognition, understanding SN i.126 (?) =. AN v.46 (anubodhiṁ as aorist of anubodhati?) Pug 21 Mil 233 frequently in compoundananubodha
    2. adjective not understanding, not knowing the truth SN ii.92 SN iii.261 SN v.431 AN ii.1 AN iv.105 Dhs 390 1061 Vv-a 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adjective hard to understand, difficult to know DN i.12 DN i.22 SN i.136
    3. anu + budh
    Anubodhati
    1. to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aorist anubodhiṁ. AN v.46 (?) = SN i.126 (anubodhaṁ).
    2. causative ˚bodheti to awaken, figuratively to make ‣See to instruct Ja vi.139 (˚ayamāna)-
    3. past participle anubuddha (q.v.)
    4. anu + budh
    Anubodhana
    neuter
    1. awakening, understanding, recognition Ps i.18 (bodhana +)
    from anubodhati
    Anubbajati
    1. to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) Ja iv.399 (maggaṁ = pabbajati Commentary )
    anu + vraj
    Anubbata
    adjective
    1. subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted Ja iii.521 vi.557
    Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata
    Anubbillāvitatta
    1. ‣See ubbill˚;
    Anubyañjana
    1. ‣See anuvyañjana
    Anubrūhita
    1. strengthened with (—˚), full of Ps i.167
    pp. of anubrūheti
    Anubrūheti
    1. to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. accusative ), foster SN i.178 (anubrūhaye) MN iii.187 (identical, so read for manu˚), Thag 2, 163 (˚ehi); cp. iii.12 (saṁvegaṁ anubrūhayiṁ
    2. aorist ) Ja iii.191 (suññāgāraṁ). Often in phrase vivekaṁ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. Ja i.9 (inf ˚brūhetuṁ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dhp 75 (˚brūhaye ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya Dhp-a ii.103).
    3. past participle anubrūhita (q.v.) cp. also brūhana
    4. brūheti
    Anubhaṇanā
    feminine
    1. talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā +)
    anu + bhaṇana
    Anubhavati
    Anubhoti;
    1. to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in experience DN i.129 DN ii.12 (˚bhonti) MN ii.204 AN i.61 (atthaṁ ˚bhoti to have a good result) Ja vi.97 (˚bhoma) Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaṁ) Pv-a 52 (˚issati = vedissati) Sdhf 290. especially frequently with dukkhaṁ to suffer pain, e.g Pv-a i.1110 (˚bhonti) Pv-a 43 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana)
    • ppr.
    • medium ˚bhavamāna Ja i.50
    • aorist ˚bhavi Pv-a 75 (sampattiṁ);
    • absolutive ˚bhavitvā Ja iv.1 Pv-a 4 (sampattiṁ), 67 (dukkhaṁ), 73 (sampattiṁ);
    • gerundive ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā Pv-a 109).
    • passive anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati; to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna Pv-a 8 Pv-a 159 (mayā a. anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna Pv-a 33 (dukkhaṁ).
    • past participle anubhūta (q.v.)
    anu + bhavati
    Anubhavana
    neuter
    1. experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cp. Compendium 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh-ânubhavana-lakkhanā vedanā “feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant”) Mil 60 (vedayita-lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana-lakkhaṇā ca) Pv-a 152 (kamma-vipāka˚). especially in combination with dukkha˚; suffering painful sensations, e.g. at Ja iv.3 Mil 181 Dhp-a iv.75 Pv-a 52
    from anubhavati
    Anubhāga
    1. a secondary or inferior part, (after-)share, what is left over Vin ii.167
    anu + bhāga
    Anubhāyati
    1. to be afraid of Ja vi.302 (kissa nv’ânubhāyissaṁ, so read for kissânu˚)
    anu + bhāyati
    Anubhāva

    originally meaning “experience, concomitance” and found only in compounds. as—˚, in meaning “experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with”, e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i.e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as “power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc.” & as such it was separated from the 1; st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva absolute) found only in later language.

  • anubhāva (—˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence power SN i.146f.; ii.274; iv.323; Snp p. 93; Pv ii.112 Pv-a 76

    • deva˚ of divine power or majesty DN ii.12
    • devatā˚ identical Ja i.168
    • dibba˚ identical Pv-a 71 Pv-a 110. rājā˚; kingly splendour, pomp DN i.49 Ja iv.247 Pv-a 279 etc
    • ˚anubhāvena (instrumental

      • ˚) in accordance with, by means of Ja ii.200 (angavijjā˚) Pv-a 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (identical), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathānubhāvaṁ (
      • adverb ) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power SN i.31 Vv 15 (yathābalaṁ Vv-a 25).
      • ānubhāva majesty power magnificence, glory, splendour Ja v.10 Ja v.456 Pv ii.811 Vv-a 14 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 122 Pv-a 272 ‣See also ānu˚
      from anubhavati
  • Anubhāvatā
    feminine
    1. majesty, power SN i.156 (mahā˚)
    = anubhāva + tā
    Anubhāsati
    1. to speak after, to repeat DN i.104 Mil 345 DN-a i.273
    anu + bhāsati
    Anubhūta
    1. (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed Pv-a ii.1218. neuter suffering, experience Ja i.254 Mil 78 Mil 80
    2. past participle of anubhavati
    Anubhūyamānatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having to undergo, experiencing Pv-a 103
    abstract from ppr. passive of anubhavati
    Anuma
    1. (-dassika) ‣See anoma˚;
    Anumagge
    1. at Ja v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as preposition c. loc ‣See anu AN b
    Anumajjati
    1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DN-a i.276 (= anumasati)
    2. to beat, thresh figuratively to thresh ont Ja vi.548 Mil 90
    3. passive anumajjīyati Mil 275 (cp. p. 428)
    anu + majjati
    Anumajjana
    neuter
    1. threshing out, pounding up (Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 11), always used with reference to the term vicāra (q.v.) Mil 62 Dhs-a 114 DN-a i.63 122
    abstract from anumajjati
    Anumajjha
    adjective
    1. mediocre, without going to extremes Ja iv.192 Ja v.387
    anu + majjha
    Anumaññati
    1. to assent, approve, give leave Thag 1, 72 past participle anumata (q.v.)
    2. anu + maññati
    Anumata
    1. approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave DN i.99 (= anuññāta DN-a i.267) Ja v.399 (= muta) Mil 185 Mil 212 Mil 231 Mil 275 Pv-a 64 (= annuññāta)
    past participle of anumaññati
    Anumati
    feminine
    1. consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin ii.294 301, 306; D. i.137 143; Dīpavaṁsa iv.47, Cp. v.18 DN-a i.297 Vv-a 17 Pv-a 114
    from anumaññati
    Anumatta
    1. ‣See aṇu˚;
    Anumasati
    1. to touch DN i.106 (= anumajjati DN-a i.276)
    anu + masati
    Anumāna
    1. inference Mil 330
    • naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74
    from anu + man
    Anumitta
    1. a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance Ja v.77
    anu + mitta
    Anumināti
    1. to observe draw an inference MN i.97 Pv-a 227 (˚anto + nayaṁ nento ‣See also anumīyati
    cp. Sanskrit anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sanskrit minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi;
    Anumīyati
    1. to observe, conclude or infer from SN iii.36 cp. anumināti
    Sanskrit anumīyate, passive of anu + , measure, in sense of Med.
    Anumodaka
    adjective
    1. one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. accusative ) Vin v.172 Pv-a 122 Sdhf 512
    2. from anumodati
    Anumodati
    1. to find satisfaction in (accusative ), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c.
    2. accusative ), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal) SN ii.54 AN iii.50
    3. ˚modanīya iv.411 Dhp 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna Iti 78 Pv ii.919 (dānaṁ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti Pv-a 27) Ja ii.112 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 201)
    4. imperative modāhi Sdhp 501f.
    5. past participle anumodita (q.v.)
    6. anu + modati
    Anumodana
    neuter
    1. “according to taste”, i.e. satisfaction, thanks, especially after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = locative ) karoti (= Latin gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks) ˚ṁ datvā Pv-a 89 ˚ṁ katvā Ja i.91 Dhp-a iii.170 172 Vv-a 118 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 47; ˚ṁ vatvā Vv-a 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ṁ karoti also “to do a favour” Pv-a 275 cp. further Dhp-a i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraṁ ˚ṁ yāciṁsu asked his blessing) Pv-a 23 (˚atthaṁ in order to thank), 26 (identical), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213 Sdhp 218 Sdhp 516
    2. from anumodati
    Anumodita
    1. enjoyed, rejoiced in Pv-a 77
    past participle of anumodati
    Anummatta
    adjective
    1. not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Mil 122 Sdhp 205
    an + ummatta
    Anuyanta
    at. AN v.22 is doubtful reading (variant reading anuyutta. The meaning is either “inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal” or “attending on". The explanation may compare Sanskrit anuyātaṁ attendance
    1. in which latter case anu-yantṛ would be “an inferior ruler” and Pali yanta would represent the agent noun yantā as a-stem. The variant reading is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found ‣See anuyutta 2
    anu + , cp. anuyāyin or Sanskrit yantṛ ruler [yam
    Anuyāgin
    adjective
    1. offering after the example of another DN i.142
    from anu + yaj
    Anuyāta
    1. gone through or after, followed, pursued SN ii.105 (magga) AN v.236 Iti 29 Mil 217
    past participle of anuyāti
    Anuyāti
    (& anuyāyati)
    1. to go after, to follow Ja vi.49 (
    2. future ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaṁ anuyāyati = anugacchati C)
    3. to go along by, to go over, to visit Mil 391 (˚yāyati).
    4. past participle anuyāta (q.v.) ‣See also anusaṁyāyati
    anu +
    Anuyāyin
    adjective
    1. going after, following, subject to genitive Snp 1017 (anânuyāyin) Ja vi.309 Mil 284
    cp. Sanskrit anuyāyin, anu +
    Anuyuñjanā
    feminine (& ˚yuñjana
    • neuter

      1. application or devotion to (—˚) Mil 178 Vv-a 346 (anuyujjanaṁ wrong spelling?)
      abstract from anuyuñjati
    Anuyuñjati
    1. to practice, give oneself up to (
    2. accusative ), attend, pursue SN i.25 SN i.122 (˚yuñjan “in loving self-devotion” Mrs. Rhys Davids); iii.154; iv.104, 175 Dhp 26 (pamādaṁ = pavatteti Dhp-a i.257), 247 (surāmeraya-pānaṁ = sevati bahulīkaroti Dhp-a iii.356) Pv-a 61 (kammaṭṭhānaṁ)
    3. to ask a question, to call to account take to task Vin ii.79 Vv 335 ppr.
    4. passive ˚yuñjiyamāna Pv-a 192
    5. past participle anuyutta (q.v.)
    6. causative anuyojeti “to put to”, to address, admonish, exhort Dhp-a iv.20
    anu + yuñjati
    Anuyutta
    1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon DN i.166 DN i.167 DN iii.232 = AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ânuyogaṁ a.) SN iii.153 SN iv.104 Snp 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaṁ = samāyutta Snp-a 536), 972 (jhān˚) Pug 55 Pv-a 163 (jāgariya˚) 206
    2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king ‣See khattiya 3 b. AN v.22 (v l for Text anuyanta, q.v.) Snp 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka Snp-a 453)
    past participle of anuyuñjati
    Anuyoga
    1. application, devotion to (—˚), execution, practice of (—˚); often combined with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaṁ anuyutta = practisiṅg e.g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍan’ânuyogaṁ anuyutta) DN iii.113 (attakilamath’ânuyogaṁ a.) AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ânuyogaṁ a.)
    2. As adjective (—˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). DN i.5 DN iii.107 MN i.385 SN i.182 SN iii.239 SN iv.330; v.320 AN i.14 AN iii.249 AN iv.460f.; v.17 sq. 205 Ja i.90 (padhān’ânuyogakiccaṁ) Vv 8438 (dhamma˚) Mil 348 DN-a i.78 104
    3. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati.2) Mil 10 (ācariyassa ˚ṁ datvā)
    Sanskrit anuyoga, from anu + yuj
    Anuyogavant
    adjective
    1. applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted Pv-a 207
    anuyoga + vant
    Anuyogin
    adjective
    1. applying oneself to, devoted to (—˚) Dhp 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self-concentrated)
    from anuyoga
    Anurakkhaka
    adjective
    1. preserving, keeping up Ja iv.192
    • vaṁsa˚); vi.1 (identical)
    from anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin
    Anurakkhaṇa
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. guarding, protection, preservation DN iii.225f. AN ii.16f. Ja i.133 Pug 12 Dīpavaṁsa iv.24 adjective Vv-a 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449
    abstract from anurakkhati
    Anurakkhati
    1. to guard, watch over (accusative ), preserve, protect, shield Snp 149 Dhp 327 Ja i.46 Pug 12-ppr.
    2. medium˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adjective Sdhp 621
    3. anu + rakkhati
    Anurakkhā
    feminine
    1. guarding, protection, preservation SN iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā)
    = anurakkhaṇā
    Anurakkhin
    adjective
    1. guarding, preserving, keeping Ja v.24
    from anurakkhati
    Anurakkhiya
    adjective
    1. in dur˚; difficult to guard Vin iii.149
    feminine anurakkhati
    Anurañjita
    1. illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo) Vv-a 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚)
    past participle of anu + rañjeti, causative of rañj
    Anuratta
    adjective past participle of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Thag 2, 446 (bhattāraṁ) Ja i.297 Mil 146
    Anuravati
    1. to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Mil 63
    anu + ravati
    Anuravanā
    feminine
    1. lingering of the sound, resounding Mil 63
    abstract from anuravati
    Anuraho
    adverb
    1. in secret, face to face, private MN i.27
    anu + raho
    Anurujjhati
    1. to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased AN iv.158 Dhs-a 362. past participle anuruddha (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit anurudhyate, passive of anu + rudh
    Anuruddha
    1. enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased SN iv.71 (anānuruddha)
    past participle of anurujjhati
    Anurūpa
    adjective
    1. suitable, adequate seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (—˚ Ja i.91 Ja vi.366 (tad˚) Pv-a 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (identical) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning
    anu + rūpa
    Anurodati
    1. to cry after, cry for Ja iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaṁ a.)
    anu + rodati
    Anurodha
    1. compliance, consideration satisfaction (opposite virodha SN i.111 SN iv.210 Snp 362 Dhs 1059 Vb 145 Dhs-a 362
    from anu + rudh
    Anulapanā
    feminine
    1. scolding, blame, accusation Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combined with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā)
    anu + lapanā, lap
    Anulitta
    adjective
    1. anointed, besmeared Ja i.266 Pv-a 211
    cp. Sanskrit anulipta, past participle of anulimpati
    Anulimpati
    1. to anoint, besmear, Mil 394 (˚limpitabba). causative ˚limpeti in same meaning Mil 169 and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (
    2. gerundive ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment).
    3. past participle anulitta (q.v.)
    4. anu + limpati
    Anulimpana
    neuter
    1. anointing Mil 353 Mil 394
    from anulimpati
    Anulepa
    1. anointing Mil 152
    from anu + lip
    Anulokin
    adjective
    1. looking (up) at ‣Seeing (—˚) MN i.147 (sīsa˚)
    from anu + loketi, cp. Sanskrit & Pali avalokin & anuviloketi
    Anuloma
    adjective
    1. “with the hair or grain”, i.e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable straight forward DN ii.273 (anānuloma, q.v.) SN iv.401 Ps ii.67, 70 Dhp-a ii.208
    • nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Mil 148
    1. ˚ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Compendium 66, 68) Dhp-a ii.208
    • ˚paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward backward (epithet of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit) Vin i.1 AN iv.448
    Sanskrit anu + loma
    Anulomika
    1. (& ˚ya adjective

      1. suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (—˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239 AN i.106 AN iii.116f. Iti 103 (sāmaññassa˚) Snp 385 (pabbajita˚); Kp-a 243 (ananulomiya) Dhs-a 25 Sdhp 65
      from anuloma
    Anulometi
    1. to conform to, to be in accordance with Mil 372
    v. denominative from anuloma
    Anuḷāratta
    neuter
    1. smallness, littleness, insignificance Vv-a 24
    abstract from an + uḷāra
    Anuvajja
    adjective
    1. to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Snp p. 78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta Snp-a 396)
    gerundive of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sanskrit avavadya
    Anuvattaka
    adjective
    1. = anupavattaka (q.v.) Thag 1, 1014 (cakka˚)
    2. following, siding with (—˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā
    3. feminine )
    from anuvatteti
    Anuvattati
    1. to follow, imitate, follow one’s example (c.
    2. accusative ), to be obedient DN ii.244 Vin ii.309 (Buddhaghosa); iv.218 Ja i.125 Ja i.300 DN-a i.288 Pv-a 19
    3. to practice, execute Pv iv.712
    4. causative ˚vatteti (q.v.)
    Sanskrit anuvartati, anu + vattati
    Anuvattana
    neuter
    1. complying with, conformity with (—˚), compliance, observance, obedience Ja i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78
    abstract from anuvattati
    Anuvattin
    adjective
    1. following, acting according to or in conformity with (—˚), obedient Ja ii.348 (feminine ˚inī) iii.319 (identical) Dhp 86 (dhamma˚) Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla Vv-a 71) Dhp-a ii.161
    2. from anuvattati
    Anuvatteti
    1. = anupavatteti (q.v.) Thag 1, 826 (dhammacakkaṁ: “after his example turn the wheel Mrs. Rhys Davids)
    anu + vatteti
    Anuvadati
    1. to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80 88. gerundive anuvajja (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit ava˚; anu + vadati
    Anuvadanā
    feminine
    1. blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda +)
    from anuvadati
    Anuvasati
    1. to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit Ja ii.421 causative ˚vāseti to
    2. passive spend (time) Ja vi.296
    3. past participle ˚vuttha (q.v.)
    4. anu + vasati
    Anuvassaṁ
    adverb
    1. for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i.e. annually Commentary on Thag 1, 24
    anu + vassa
    Anuvassika
    adjective
    1. one who has (just) passed one rainy season Thag 1, 24 (“scarce have the rains gone by” Mrs. Rhys Davids ‣See translation p. 29 note 2)
    from anuvassaṁ
    Anuvāceti
    1. to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again DN i.104 (= tehi aññesaṁ vācitaṁ anuvācenti DN-a i.273) Mil 345 cp. anubhāseti
    anu + causative of vac
    Anuvāta1
    1. a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ṁ adverb with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opposite paṭivātaṁ AN i.226 (˚paṭivātaṁ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at Ja ii.382 “with the wind, facing the with in front of the wind” anu is to be taken as preposition c. loc & to be separated from vāte ‣See anu AN b
    2. anu + to blow
    Anuvāta2
    1. only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus’ garments (cīvara) “weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam”, i.e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254 297; ii.177; iv.121 (aggala +) Pv-a 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient)
    anu + to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from to blow
    Anuvāda
    1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5 32 AN ii.121 (atta˚, para˚) Vb 376
    2. in combinationvādānuvāda : talk and lesser or additional talk, i.e. “small talk” ‣See anu B iv. DN i.161 MN i.368
      1. ˚adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88f.; iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q.v.)
      from anuvadatī, cp. Sanskrit anuvāda in meaning of “repetition”
    Anuvāsana
    neuter
    1. an oily enema, an injection Mil 353
    from anuvāseti
    Anuvāseti
    1. to treat with fragrant oil, i.e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Mil 169 gerundive ˚vāsanīya ibid.;
    2. past participle ˚vāsita Mil 214
    3. anu + vāseti, causative of vāsa3 odour, perfume
    Anuvikkhitta
    adjective
    1. dispersed over SN v.277f. (+ anuvisaṭa)
    anu + vi + khitta, past participle of anu + vikkhipati
    Anuvigaṇeti
    1. to take care of, regard, heed, consider Thag 1, 109
    anu + vi + gaṇeti
    Anuvicarati
    1. to wander about, stroll roam through, explore DN i.235 Ja ii.128 Ja iii.188 Pv-a 189 (= anupariyāti). causative ˚vicāreti to think over (literally to make one’s mind wander over), to meditate ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combined with anuvitakketi (q.v.) AN i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaṁ cetasā a.).
    2. past participle anuvicarita (q.v.)
    3. anu + vi + carati
    Anuvicarita
    1. reflected, pondered over, thought out SN iii.203 (manasā) DN-a i.106 (= anucarita
    past participle of anuvicāreti
    Anuvicāra
    1. meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra
    anu + vicāra, cp. anuvicāreti
    Anuvicinaka
    1. one who examines, an examiner Mil 365
    from anu + vicināti
    Anuvicinteti
    1. to think or ponder over, to meditate DN ii.203 SN i.203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper “marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance” Mrs. Rhys Davids variant reading anucintaya) Thag 1, 747 Dhp 364 Iti 82 (dhammaṁ ˚ayaṁ) Ja iii.396 Ja iv.227 Ja v.223 (dhammaṁ ˚cintayanto)
    anu + vi + cinteti
    Anuvicca
    having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out MN i.301 MN i.361 (variant reading ˚vijja AN ii.3 AN ii.84 AN v.88 Dhp 229 (= jānitvā Dhp-a iii.329) Snp 530 (= anuviditvā Snp-a 431) Ja i.459 (= jānitvā Commentary ); iii.426; Pug. 49.
    1. ˚kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja = MN i.379 (= ˚viditvā Commentary ) AN iv.185
    absolutive of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja probably through influence of anu + i (anu-v-icca for anvicca) cp. anveti & adhicca; & ‣See anuvijjati
    Anuvijjaka
    1. one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161
    from anuvijja, absolutive of anuvijjati
    Anuvijjati
    1. to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf ˚vijjitiṁ Ja iii.506 absolutive ˚viditvā Snp-a 431, also ˚vijja vicca; ‣See both under anuvicca;
    2. gerundive ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable MN i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo).
    3. causative anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out Ja v.162
    4. past participle anuvidita (q.v.)
    5. anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and passive of vindati to find (= vidyate)
    Anuvijjhati
    1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with instrumental Ja vi.439–⁠2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur Dhp-a iii.380 (aparādhaṁ).
    2. past participle anuviddha (q.v.)
    3. anu + vyadh
    Anuvitakketi
    1. to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combined with anuvicāreti DN i.119 DN iii.242 SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussarati +) AN iii.383
    anu + vi + takketi
    Anuvidita
    1. found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Snp 528 Snp 530 (= anubuddha Snp-a 431). Same in B. Sanskrit , e.g. Mvu iii.398
    past participle of anuvijjati
    Anuviddha
    adjective
    1. pierced, intertwined or set with (—˚) Vv-a 278
    past participle of anuvijjhati
    Anuvidhīyati
    1. to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) MN ii.105 = Thag 1, 875 SN iv.199 Ja ii.98 Ja iii.357
    cp. Sanskrit anuvidhīyate & adjective anuvidhāyin; passive of anu + vi + dhā, cp. vidahati
    Anuvidhīyanā
    feminine
    1. acting according to, conformity with MN i.43
    abstract from anuvidhīyati
    Anuviloketi
    1. to look round at, look over, survey, muster MN i.339 Snp p. 140 Ja i.53 Mil 7 (lakaṁ), 21 (parisaṁ), 230
    anu + vi + loketi; B. Sanskrit anuvilokayati
    Anuvivaṭṭa
    1. an “after-evolution”, devolution; as part of a bhikkhu’s dress: a sub-vivaṭṭa (q.v.) Vin i.287
    • vivaṭṭa +)
    anu + vivaṭṭa
    Anuvisaṭa
    1. (anu + visaṭa, past participle of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over SN v.277f. Ja iv.102
    Anuvuttha
    1. living with, staying, dwelling Ja ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (identical)
    past participle of anuvasati, cp. Sanskrit anūṣita
    Anuvejja
    adjective in an˚ ‣See anuvijjati. Anuvyanjana & anubyanjana;
    Anuvyañjana
    anubyañjana;
    1. (e.g. Vin iv.15 Ja i.12) neuter

      1. accompanying (i.e. secondary attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cp. mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (ablative anuvyañjanaso “in detail”) MN iii.126 SN iv.168 AN iv.279 ablative; v.73 sq. Pug 24 58 Mil 339 Vv-a 315 Dhs-a 400
      1. ˚gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details taken up with lesser or inferior marks DN i.70 (cp. MVastu iii.52); iii.225 SN iv.104 AN i.113 AN ii.16 AN ii.152f. Dhs 1345 (cp. Dhs translation 351)
      anu + vyañjana
    Anusaṁyāyati
    1. to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (accusative ) MN i.209 (Bhagavantaṁ ˚itvā) Ja iv.214 (variant reading anuyāyitvā) ‣See also anuyāti and anusaññāti
    2. anu + saṁ + yāyati
    Anusaṁvacchara
    adjective
    1. yearly Dhp-a i.388 (nakkhattaṁ). Usually neuter ˚ṁ as
    2. adverb yearly, every year Ja i.68 Ja v.99 On use of anu in this combination ‣See anu AN a
    3. anu + saṁv˚
    Anusañcarati
    1. to walk along, to go round about, to visit MN i.279 SN v.53 SN v.301 Ja i.202 iii.502 Pv-a 279 (nagaraṁ). past participle anusañcarita (q.v.)
    2. anu + saṁ + carati
    Anusañcarita
    1. frequented, visited, resorted to Mil 387
    past participle of anusañcarati
    Anusañceteti
    1. to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12
    anu + saṁ + ceteti
    Anusaññāti
    1. to go to, to visit, inspect, control ppr. medium ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf ˚saññātuṁ AN i.68 (janapade)
    2. either anu + saṁ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaṁyāti as short form of anusaṁyāyati, like anuyāti → anuyāyati of anu + saṁ + , cp. Sanskrit anusaṁyāti in same meaning
    Anusaṭa
    1. sprinkled with (—˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa Vv-a 36)
    Sanskrit anusṛta, past participle of anu + sṛ
    Anusatthar
    1. instructor, adviser Ja iv.178 (ācariya +). cp. anusāsaka
    agent noun to anu + sās, cp. Sanskrit anuśāsitṛ & Pali satthar
    Anusatthi
    feminine
    1. admonition, rule, instruction Ja i.241 Mil 98 Mil 172 Mil 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347
    Sanskrit anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana
    Anusandati
    1. to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Mil 63 for anusandahati (anuravati + ; of sound) while at AN iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati
    Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad
    Anusandahati
    1. to direct upon, to apply to AN iv.47f. (cittaṁ samāpattiyā; so to be read with variant reading for anusandati) Mil 63 (but here probably to be read as anusandati, q.v.)
    anu + saṁ + dhā, cp. Vedic abhi + saṁ + dhā
    Anusandhanatā
    feminine
    1. application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa)
    = anusandhi
    Anusandhi
    feminine
    1. connection, (logical) conclusion, application DN-a i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚;); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index “complete cessation"?!). especially freq in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiṁ ghaṭeti “to form the connection”, to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim Ja i.106 308 Dhp-a ii.40 47; etc
    from anu + saṁ + dhā
    Anusampavaṅkatā
    feminine
    1. disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa)
    anu + saṁ + pavankatā; is reading correct?
    Anusaya
    1. ‣See Kvu translation 234 note 2 and Cpd. 172 note 2. Bent, bias proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Snp 14 = 369, 545; M. iii.31 SN iii.130 SN iv.33, v.28 236; A. i.44; ii.157; iii.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā SN ii.17 SN iii.10 SN iii.135 SN iii.161 A. v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at SN i.188 SN ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197 AN i.132 iv.70 doubt at M. i.486-ignorance lust and hatred at SN iv.205 MN iii.285 At DN iii.254 DN iii.282 SN v.60 and AN iv.9 we have a list of seven anusaya’s, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence-forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps i.26, 70 ff., 123 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158 Pug 21 Vb 340 383 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dīpavaṁsa i.42
    anu + śī, seti Sanskrit anuśaya has a different meaning
    Anusayita
    1. dormant, only in combinationdīgharatta˚; latent so long Thag 1, 768 Snp 355 Snp 649 cp. anusaya & anusayin
    past participle of anuseti, anu + śī
    Anusayin
    adjective
    1. DN ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), “for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain
    from anusaya
    Anusarati
    1. to follow, conform oneself to SN iv.303 (phalaṁ anusarissati Burmese manuscripts, but balaṁ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred).
    2. causative anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Mil 36 (aññamaññaṁ a. anupeseti)
    3. anu + sṛ
    Anusavati
    1. at SN ii.54 (āsavā na a.; variant reading anusayanti) & iv.188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; variant reading anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati ‣See anuseti 2
    Anusahagata
    adjective having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of.. SN iii.130 Kvu 81 ‣See aṇu˚;.
    Anusāyika
    adjective
    1. attached to one, i.e. inherent, chronic (of disease) MN ii.70 (ābādha, Burmese variant anussāyika) Dhp-a i.431 (roga)
    from anusaya
    Anusāra
    1. “going along with”, following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (—˚) anusārena (instrumental in consequence of, in accordance with, according to Ja i.8 Pv-a 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato ablative identical Sdhp 91
    from anu + sṛ
    Anusārin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after frequently in formula dhammānusārin saddhānusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith DN iii.254 MN i.142 MN i.479 SN iii.225 SN v.200f. AN i.74 AN iv.10 Pug 15
      • cp. also SN i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (identical) Ja vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara Commentary ); Sdhp 528 (attha˚)
      from anu + sarati
    Anusāreti
    1. ‣See anusarati
    Anusāsaka
    1. adviser, instructor, counsellor Ja ii.105 Mil 186 Mil 217 Mil 264 cp. anusatthar
    from anusāsati
    Anusāsati
    1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c.
    2. accusative ) to exhort to Vin i.83 DN i.135 DN ii.154 Dhp 77 Dhp 159 (aññaṁ) Ja vi.368 cp. i.103; Pv ii.68 Pv-a 148
    3. gerundive anusāsiya Vin i.59 and ˚sāsitabba Dhp-a iii.99
    4. passive ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200 Mil 186
    5. to rule, govern (
    6. accusative ) ādminister to dative SN i.236 = Snp 1002 (paṭhaviṁ dhammenam-anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin) Ja ii.2 Ja vi.517 (rajjassa rajjaṁ Commentary, i.e. take care of) DN-a i.246 (read ˚sāsantena) Pv-a 161 (rajjaṁ).
    7. past participle anusiṭṭha (q.v.); cp. anusatthar anusatthi & ovadati
    Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās
    Anusāsana
    neuter
    1. advice, instruction, admonition DN iii.107 AN i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya cp. anusāsanī) Mil 359
    Vedic anuśāsana, from anu + śās
    Anusāsanī
    feminine
    1. instruction, teaching, commandment, order SN v.108 AN ii.147 AN iii.87 v.24 sq., 49, 338 Ja v.113 Thag 2, 172 180; Pv iii.76 Thag-a 162 Vv-a 19 80, 81
    1. ˚pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha Vin ii.200 DN i.212 DN i.214 DN iii.220 AN i.170 AN v.327 Ja iii.323 Ps ii.227 sq
    from anusāsati, cp. anusāsana
    Anusikkhati
    1. to learn of somebody genitive; to follow one’s example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. medium ˚amāna) SN i.235 AN iv.282 AN iv.286 AN iv.323 Snp 294 (vattaṁ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934 Ja i.89 Ja ii.98 Ja iii.315 Ja v.334 Ja vi.62 Thag 1 963 Mil 61

      • Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach = Sanskrit anuśikṣayati
      1. Mil 352
      Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desidentical of śak
    Anusikkhin
    adjective
    1. studying, learning MN i.100 Dhp 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324)
    from anusikhati
    Anusiṭṭha
    1. (Vedic anuśiṣṭa, past participle of anusāsati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded MN ii.96 Ja i.226 Pv ii.811 Mil 284 Mil 349
    Anusibbati
    1. to interweave Vin iii.336 (introduction to Sam. Pās.)
    anu + sibbati, siv to sew
    Anusuṇāti

    to hear; preterite anassuṁ Sanskrit anvaśruvaṁ

    1. I heard MN i.333
    anu + śru
    Anusumbhati
    1. to adorn, embellish, prepare Ja vi.76
    anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh
    Anusuyyaṁ
    1. reading at Ja iii.27 ‣See anasuyyaṁ
    cp. Sanskrit anasūyaṁ
    Anusuyyaka
    adjective
    1. not envious, not jealous Snp 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. Snp-a 332) Ja ii.192 (variant reading anussuyyaka); v.112
    an + usuyyaka
    Anuseṭṭhi
    1. an under-seṭṭhi (banker, merchant) Ja v.384 ‣See anu B iii. a.
    2. in reduplicated cpd seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi ‣See anu B iv “bankers & lesser bankers” i.e. all kinds of well-to-do families Ja vi.331
    anu + seṭṭhi
    Anuseti
    1. to “lie down with”, i.e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) SN ii.65 SN iii.36 SN iv.208
    • (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. MN i.40 MN i.108 MN i.433 SN ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti iv.188 AN i.283 AN iii.246 Pug 32 48.
    • past participle anusayita (q.v.)
    • anu + seti. cp. Sanskrit anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī
    Anusocati
    1. to mourn for, to bewail Snp 851 (atītaṁ na a.; cp. Nd1 222) Pv i.127 ii.68 Pv-a 95
    anu + socati
    Anusocana
    neuter
    1. bewailing, mourning Pv-a 65
    abstract from anusocati
    Anusota˚
    ;
    1. in anusotaṁ (adverb ) along the stream or current down-stream AN ii.12 Ja i.70 (opposite paṭisotaṁ against the stream) Pv-a 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).

      1. ˚gāmin “one who follows the stream”, i.e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will AN ii.5 AN ii.6 (opp paṭi˚) Snp 319 (= sotaṁ anugacchanto Snp-a 330) Pug 62
      anu + sota, in ˚ṁ as adverb or
    2. accusative to explanation under anu AN a.
    Anussati
    feminine
    1. remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati-ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Saṅgha˚ sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚; , i.e. proper attention to the Buddha the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods Thus at DN iii.250 DN iii.280 (cp. AN i.211) AN iii.284 AN iii.312f. 452; v.329 sq.; Ps i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna-sati, maraṇa-sati, kāyagatā-sati upasamānussati at AN i.30 AN i.42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references ‣See D i.81 SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.) AN iii.284 AN iii.325 AN iii.452 Ps i.48, 95, 186 Pug 25 60 Dhs 14 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr to asati ‣See Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 351) Sdhp 225 Sdhp 231 Sdhp 482 ‣See also anuttariya (anussat-ânuttariya)
    Sanskrit anusmṛti, from anu + smṛ; , cp. sati
    Anussada
    adjective [an + ussada without haughtiness Snp 624 (variant readings anusaddha & anussuda; Snp-a 467 explanation by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dhp 400 (which
    • passive has anussuta; v.l K.B. anussada Dhp-a iv.165 explains with taṇhā-ussāvâbhāva variant readings ˚ussada˚) Iti 97 (variant readings anussata & anussara).

    Anussaraṇa
    neuter
    1. remembrance, memory, recollection Iti 107 (= anussati at identical passage SN v.67) Pv-a 25 Pv-a 29
    abstract to anussarati
    Anussarati
    1. to remember, recollect, have memory of (accusative ), bear in mind; be aware of DN ii.8 DN ii.53 DN ii.54 (jātito etc.) SN iii.86f. (pubbenivāsaṁ) v.67 (dhammaṁ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaṁ) AN i.25 AN i.164 (pubbenivāsaṁ), 207 (Tathāgataṁ, Dhammaṁ etc.); iii.285 (identical), 323 (nivāsaṁ), 418; v.34, 38, 132 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte) Iti 82 (dhammaṁ), 98 (pubbenivāsaṁ) Ja i.167 Ja ii.111 Dhp 364 Pv i.59 Pug 60 Sdhp 580 Sdhp 587 DN-a i.257 Kp-a 213 Dhp-a ii.84 Dhp-a iv.95 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 107.
    2. past participle anussarita ‣See anussaritar-Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind Ja ii.147
    3. Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ
    Anussaritar
    1. one who recollects or remembers SN v.197 SN v.225 (saritar +). AN v.25 AN v.28
    agent noun to anussarita, past participle of anussarati
    Anussava
    1. hearsay, report, tradition MN i.520 MN ii.211 SN ii.115 SN iv.138 AN i.26 Ja i.158 (with reference to participle kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at Vv-a 322 cp. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (identical); iv.441; instrumental ˚ena from hearsay, by report AN ii.191 (cp. itihītihaṁ)
    anu + sava from śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.
    Anussavana
    neuter
    1. = anussava Pv-a 103
    • kira -saddo anussavane, from hearsay)
    anu + savana from śru
    Anussavika
    adjective
    1. “belonging to hearsay”, traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay MN i.520 MN ii.211 cp. anussutika
    from anussava
    Anussāvaka
    1. one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74
    from anussāveti
    Anussāvana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. a proclamation Vin i.317 340; v.170, 186, 202 sq
      from anussāveti
    Anussāvita
    1. proclaimed, announced Vin i.103
    past participle of anussāveti
    Anussāveti
    1. to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.) ii.48 (saddaṁ a.). past participle anussāvita
    2. anu + sāveti, causative of śru, cp. B. Sanskrit anuśrāvayati “to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal” Avs i.102; ii.182
    Anussuka
    adjective
    1. free from greed Dhp 199 cp. anussukin variant reading DN iii.47 also anissukin and apalāsin
    an + ussuka
    Anussukita
    1. Vv-a 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka
    an + ussuk˚
    Anussuta1
    adjective
    1. free from lust Dhp 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta Commentary ) ‣See also anussada
    an + ussuta, ud + sṛ
    Anussuta2
    1. heard of; only in compound ananussuta unheard of SN ii.9 Pug 14
    anu + suta, past participle of śru
    Anussutika
    adjective
    1. according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DN-a i.106 107
    from anu + śru, cp. anussavika
    Anussuyyaka
    1. ‣See anusuyyaka
    Anuhasati
    1. to laugh at, to ridicule DN-a i.256
    anu + hasati
    Anuhīrati
    1. to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna DN ii.15 (variant readings variant reading anubhiram˚ glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Note. 79)
    for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ
    Anūna
    adjective
    1. not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency Ja vi.273 Dīpavaṁsa v.52 Mil 226 DN-a i.248 (+ paripūra, explained by anavaya). Anunaka = anuna
    Vedic anūna, an + ūna
    Anūnaka = anūna
    1. Dīpavaṁsa iv.34
    Anūnatā
    feminine
    1. completeness cp. iii.611
    abstract from anūna
    Anūpa
    adjective
    1. watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa Commentary p. 359), 381 (˚khetta) Mil 129 (˚khetta)
    Vedic anūpa, anu + ap ‣See āpa, originally alongside of water
    Anūpaghāta
    1. not killing, not murdering. Dhp 185 (= anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238)
    metrically for anupa˚
    Anūpadhika
    1. for anu˚ in metre Snp 1057 ‣See upadhi
    Anūpanāhin
    adjective
    1. not bearing ill-will, not angry with Ja iv.463
    an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa
    Anūpama
    1. at Iti 122 is metric reading for anupama ‣See upama
    Anūpalitta
    adjective
    1. free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Snp 211 Snp 392 Snp 468 Snp 790 Snp 845 Dhp 353 cp. Nd1 90 and Dhp-a iv.72
    an + upalitta, with ū in metre
    Anūpavāda
    1. not grumbling, not finding fault Dhp 185 (= anupavādanañ c’eva anupavadāpanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238)
    an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u
    Anūhata
    adjective
    1. not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Thag 1, 223 = Nd2 974 Dhp 338 (= asamucchinna Dhp-a iv.48)
    past participle of an + ūhaññati, ud + han
    Aneka
    adjective (usually ˚-)
    1. not one, i.e. many, various; countlcss, numberless Iti 99 (saṁvaṭṭakappā countless aeons) Snp 688 (˚sākhā) Dhp 153 (˚jātisāra) Ja iv.2 vi.366
    1. ˚pariyāyena instrumental in many ways Vin i.16 Snp p. 15 -rūpa various, manifold Snp 1049 Snp 1079 Snp 1082 Nd2 54 (= anekavidha)
    2. ˚vidha manifold Nd2 54 DN-a i.103
    • ˚vihita various, manifold DN i.12 DN i.13 DN i.178 Iti 98 Pug 55 DN-a i.103 (= anekavidha)
    an + eka
    Anekaṁsā
    feminine
    1. doubt Nd2 1
    an + ekaṁsā
    Anekaṁsikatā
    feminine
    1. uncertainty, doubtfulness Mil 93
    abstract from anekaṁsa + kata
    Aneja
    adjective
    1. free from desires or lust DN ii.157 Snp 920 Snp 1043 Snp 1101 Snp 1112 Iti 91 (opposite ejânuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55 Dhp 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena Dhp-a iv.194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha Pv-a 230)
    an + ejā
    Anedha
    adjective
    1. without fuel Ja iv.26 (= anindhana)
    an + edha
    Aneḷa
    adjective
    1. faultless, pure; only in following compounds. ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus explained at DN-a i.282 viz. elagalana-virahita), but more likely in literally meaning “having a pure or clear throat or, of vācā speech: “clearly enunciated” (thus Mrs. Rhys Davids at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = DN i.114 = SN i.189 AN ii.51 AN ii.97 AN iii.114 AN iii.195 cp. also Mvu iii.322
    • ˚mūga same as preceding “having a clear throat” i.e. not dumb, figuratively clever, skilled DN iii.265 Snp 70 (alālāmukha Snp-a 124), cp. Nd2 259
    an + eḷa = ena ‣See neḷa & cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena
    Aneḷaka
    adjective
    1. = aneḷa, pure, clear MN ii.5 Ja vi.529
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aneḍaka, e.g. Avs i.187, 243; MN Vastu i.339; iii.322
    Anesanā
    feminine
    1. impropriety SN ii.194 Ja ii.86 Ja iv.381 Mil 343 Mil 401 DN-a i.169 Dhp-a iv.34 Sdhp 392 Sdhp 427
    an + esanā
    Ano-
    1. is a frequent form of compoundan-ava ‣See ava
    Anoka
    neuter
    1. houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness SN v.24 =. AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokaṁ āgamma). adjective homeless, free from attachment SN i.176 Dhp 87
    • anālaya Dhp-a ii.162) Snp 966 (adjective; explained at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra-sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaṁ na karoti & at Snp-a 573 by abhisankhāra-viññān; ’ādīnaṁ anokāsabhūta).

      1. sārin living in a houseless state, figuratively being free from worldly attachment SN iii.10 = Nd1 197 Snp 628 (= anālaya-cārin Snp-a 468) Ud 32 Dhp 404 (variant reading anokka˚) Dhp-a iv.174 (= anālaya -cārin) Mil 386
      an + oka
    Anogha
    1. in anogha-tiṇṇa ‣See ogha. Anojaka = anoja
    Anojaka = anojā
    1. Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161 where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā)
    Anojagghati
    1. at DN i.91 is variant reading for anujagghati
    Anojā
    feminine
    1. a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers Ja vi.536 (korandaka +); usually in compound anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. Ja i.9 (˚dāma a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (identical) Dhp-a ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka)
    * Sanskrit anujā
    Anottappa
    neuter
    1. recklessness, hardness DN iii.212 Iti 34 (ahirika +) Pug 20 Dhs 365 cp. anottāpin. Anottapin & Anottappin;
    an + ottappa
    Anottāpin
    Anottappin;
    adjective
    1. not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless DN iii.252 DN iii.282 (pp; ahirika) Snp 133 (p; ahirika +) Iti 27 115 (anatāpin anottappin variant readings anottāpin) Pug 20 24
    from anottappa
    Anodaka
    adjective
    1. without water, dry Ja i.307 Dhp-a i.52 Sdhp 443
    an + udaka
    Anodissaka
    adjective
    1. unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in compound ˚vasena universally thoroughly (with reference to mettā) Ja i.81 Ja ii.146 Vv-a 97 (in general; opposite odissaka-vasena ‣See also Mrs. Rhys Davids Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 note 1
    an + odissa + ka
    Anonamati
    1. not to bend, to be inflexible, in following expressions: anonamaka neuter not stooping Dhp-a ii.136
    2. auonamanto (ppr.) not bending DN ii.17 = iii.143; anonami-daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Mil 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ variant readings ‣See Mil 427)
    3. an + onamati
    Anopa
    1. ‣See anūpa
    Anoma
    adjective (only ˚-)
    1. not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in following compounds
    1. ˚guṇa supreme virtue DN-a i.288
    • ˚dassika of superior beauty Vv 207 Vv-a 103 (both as variant reading ; Text anuma˚) Vv 437
    • ˚dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) Ja i.228
    • ˚nāma of perfect name SN i.33 (“by name the Peerless” Mrs. Rhys Davids) 235 Snp 153 Snp 177 (cp. Snp-a 200)
    • ˚nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa-viriyatāya a. Vv-a 284) -pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (epithet of the Buddha Snp 343 Snp 352 (= mahāpañña Snp-a 347) Thag 2, 522 (paripuṇṇa-pañña Thag-a 296), Dhp-a i.31
    • ˚vaṇṇa of excellent colour Snp 686 Ja vi.202
    • ˚viriya of supreme exertion or energy Snp 353
    an + oma
    Anomajjati
    1. to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one’s limbs with the hand MN i.80 MN i.509 SN v.216
    anu + ava + majjati, mṛj
    Anorapāra
    adjective
    1. having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Mil 319
    an + ora + pāra
    Anoramati
    1. not to stop, to continue Ja iii.487 Dhp-a iii.9 (absolutive ˚itvā continually)
    2. an + ava + ram
    Anovassa
    neuter
    1. absence of rain, drought Ja v.317 (Burmese variant for anvāvassa Text; q.v.)
    an + ovassa; cp. Sanskrit anavavarṣana
    Anovassaka
    adjective
    1. sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211 Vin iv.272 Ja i.172 Ja ii.50 Ja iii.73 Dhp-a ii.263 Thag-a 188
    an + ovassaka
    Anosita
    adjective
    1. not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Snp 937 (= anajjhositaṁ Nd1 441 jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ Snp-a 566)
    an + ava + sita, past participle of
    Anta1
    1. end, finish, goal SN iv.368 (of Nibbāna) Snp 467 Ja ii.159
    2. antaṁ karoti to make an end (of) Snp 283 Snp 512 Dhp 275 cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā
    3. locative ante at the end of, immediately after Ja i.203 (vijay˚)
    4. limit, border edge Vin i.47 Dhp 305 (van˚) Ja iii.188
    5. side ‣See ekamantaṁ (on one side, aside).

      • opposite side opposite, counterpart;
      • plural parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as “constituent, principle” (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning cp. ekantaṁ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10 SN ii.17 SN iii.135
      • ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10 SN ii.17 Ja i.8 Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles(?) viz. sakkāya, s
      • samudaya, s
      • nirodha DN iii.216 cp. AN iii.401 as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s
      • nirodhagāmini-paṭipadā at SN iii.157 Interpreted by Morris as “goal” (JP T S. 1894, 70)
      • Often pleonastically, to be explained as a “pars pro toto” figure, like kammanta (q.v.) the end of the work, i.e. the whole work (cp. English sea-side, country-side); vananta the border of the wood the woods Dhp 305 Pv ii.310 (explained by vana Pv-a 86 same use in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , vanânta e.g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Avs i.210); suttanta (q.v.), etc. cp. ākāsanta Ja vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha
      • ˚ananta (n.) no end, infinitude;
      • adjective endless, corresponds either to Sanskrit anta or antya ‣See anta2
      1. ˚ānanta end & no end, or finite and endless, DN i.22 DN-a i.115
      • ˚ānantika (holding views of, or talking about finiteness and infinitude DN i.22 ‣See explanation at DN-a i.115 SN iii.214 SN iii.258f.; Ps i.155
      • ˚kara putting an end to (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhass’a (of the Buddha) MN i.48 MN i.531 AN ii.2 AN iii.400f.; Thag 1 195 Iti 18 Snp 32 Snp 337 Snp 539 Pug 71 In other combination AN ii.163 (vijjāy’) Snp 1148 (pañhān’)

        • ˚kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with reference to dukkha SN iv.93 lt 89 Snp 454 Snp 725 Dhp-a iv.45
        • ˚gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata)
        • ˚gāhikā
        • feminine, viz diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i.e. heretical doctrine The meaning of anta in this combination is not quite clear: either “holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)” viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris JP T S. 1884, 70), or “taking extreme sides, i.e. extremist”, or “wrong, opposite (= antya ‣See anta2) (thus Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.) Vin i.172 DN iii.45 DN iii.48 (an˚) SN i.154 AN i.154 AN ii.240 AN iii.130 Ps i.151 sq
        • ˚gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) AN iv.254 AN iv.258 AN iv.262 Snp 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539
        • ˚ruddhi at Ja vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?)
        • ˚vaṭṭi rimmed circumference Ja iii.159
        • ˚saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) DN i.22 cp. DN-a i.115
        Vedic anta; Gothic andeis = Old High German anti = English end; cp. also Latin antiae forehead (: English antler), and the prep anti opposite, antika near = Latin ante; Gothic, Anglo-Saxon and German ant-; originally the opposite (i.e. what stands against or faces the starting-point)
    Anta2
    adjective
    1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in negative ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opposite antavant; which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresponding with Sanskrit anta
    2. adjective or antya; also in doublet anañca ‣See ākās’ânañca and viññāṇ’ânañca) DN i.23 DN i.34 = DN iii.224 DN iii.262f. Snp 468 (˚pañña) Dhp 179 Dhp 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. Dhp-a iii.197) Ja i.178
    3. extreme, last, worst Ja ii.440 (Commentary hīna, lāmaka) ‣See also anta1 4
    4. accusative as
    5. adverb in ekantaṁ extremely, very much, “utterly” Dhp 228 etc ‣See eka
    Vedic antya
    Anta3
    neuter
    1. the lower intestine, bowels mesentery Iti 89 Ja i.66 Ja i.260 (˚vaddhi-maṁsa etc.); Vism 258 Dhp-a i.80
    1. ˚gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, literally “a knot in the intestines” Vin i.275 (˚ābādha)
    2. ˚guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1 the intestinal tract, the bowels SN ii.270 AN iv.132 Kh iii. = Mil 26 Vism 42; Kp-a 57
    3. ˚mukha the anus Ja iv.402
    • ˚vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258
    Vedic āntra, contracted from antara inner = Latin interus
    Antaka
    1. being at the end, or making an end, epithet of Death or Māra Vin i.21 SN i.72 Thag 2, 59 (explained by Thag-a 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken anta2) Dhp 48 (= maraṇa-sankhāto antako Dhp-a ii.366) 288 (= maraṇa Dhp-a iii.434)
    Vedic antaka
    Antamaso
    adverb
    1. even Vin iii.260 Vin iv.123 DN i.168 MN iii.127 AN v.195 Ja ii.129 DN-a i.170 Snp-a 35 Vv-a 155
    originally ablative of antama, * Sanskrit antamaśah; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit antaśah as same formation from anta, in same meaning (“even”) Avs i.314; Divy 161
    Antara
    adjective
    1. . Primary meanings are “inside” and “in between” as adjective “inner”; in preposition use & in compounds. “inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i.e. having a space between, different from; thus neuter antaraṁ difference.

      1. I. (adjective
      • n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside Iti 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); especially as—˚ in compounds. āmis˚; with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303
      • dos˚ with anger inside, i.e. angry Vin ii.249 DN iii.237 MN i.123 Pv-a 78 (so read for des˚). ablative antarato from within Iti 83 (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan antaraṁ ṭhānaṁ Pv-a 139 Pv-a 139
      • In noun-function
      • neuter : (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya Vv-a 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīp’antara-vāsin living on the island) Dhp-a i.358 (kaṇṇa-chidd˚ the inside of the ear Vv-a 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also “space in between”, break Ja v.352 (= chidda Commentary ), & obstacle, hindrance, in general what stands in between ‣See compounds, and antara-dhāyati (for antaraṁ dhāyati)
      • (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i.e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraṁ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, Pv-a 10 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 191 etc. As time: Iti 121 (etasmiṁ antare in that time or at this occasion) Pv i.1011 (dīghaṁ antaraṁ = dīghaṁ kālaṁ Pv-a 52) Pv-a 5 (etasmiṁ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: Ja v.287 Pug 55 (eḷaka-m-antaraṁ occasion of getting rain). SN i.20 quoted DN-a i.34 (mañ ca tañ ca kiṁ antaraṁ what is there between me and you?) Commentary explains kiṁ kāraṇā Mrs. Rhys Davids in translation p. 256 “of me it is and thee (this talk)
      • now why is this” Ja vi.8 (assa antaraṁ na passiṁsu they did not ‣See a different in him)

    2. Phrases antaraṁ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intransitive), to hold aloof, literally “to make a space in between” MN iii.14 J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pug AN 231 (ummāraṁ a. katvā staying away from a threshold) also

      • adverb ially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. Pv-a 139

        • (b.) to remove, destroy Ja vi.56 (Burmese variant antarāyaṁ karoti)
        1. II. In preposition use (˚-) with accusative (direction) or loc (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp III. use of cases). (a.) with
        2. accusative : antaragharaṁ paviṭṭha gone into the house Mil 11

          • (b.) with
          • locative : antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213 ˚dīpake in the centre of the island Ja i.240 ˚dvāre in the door Ja v.231 ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) Pv-a 109 ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiṁ yeva a. during one meal Ja i.19 Dhp-a i.249 ˚bhattasmiṁ identical Dhp-a iv.12 ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road Pv-a 96 ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaṁ) = Ja i.218
          1. III. adverb ial use of cases, instrumental antarena in between DN i.56 SN iv.59 SN iv.73 Ja i.393 Pv-a 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combinationantarantarena (c. genitive) right in between (literally in between the space of) Dhp-a i.63 358

            • locative antare in, inside of, in between (—˚ or c. genitive Kp-a 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta) Dhp-a iii.416 (mama a.) Pv-a 56 Pv-a 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. genitive Kp-a 57 Dhp-a i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.)
            • ablative antarā (‣ See also sep. article of antarā) in combinationantarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Snp p. 107 Dhp-a ii.86 Dhp-a iv.191 Pv-a 272
            1. IV. anantara adjective having or leaving nothing in between i.e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining Ja iv.139 Mil 382 (solid Dhp-a i.397 Pv-a 63 (tadantaraṁ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste) ‣See also abbhantara.

              1. ˚atīta gone past in the meantime Ja ii.243
              • ˚kappa an intermediary kappa (q.v.) DN i.54
              • ˚kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug AN 231 -cakka “the intermediate round”, i.e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the com
              • passive Mil 178
              • ˚cara one who goes in between or inside, i.e. a robber SN iv.173
              • ˚bāhira
              • adjective inside & outside Ja i.125
              • ˚bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara-raṭṭha) Vin iii.47
              • ˚raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince Ja v.135
              • ˚vāsa an interregnum Dīpavaṁsa v.80
              • ˚vāsaka “inner or intermediate garment”, one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94 289; ii.272. Cp. next
              • ˚sāṭaka an inner or lower garment cp. Sanskrit antarīya identical
                1. under garment, i.e. the one between the outer one & the body Vv-a 166 (q.v.)
                Vedic antara, cp. Latin interus from preposition inter ‣See also ante anto
    Antaraṁsa
    1. “in between the shoulders”, i.e. the chest Ja v.173 = vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihat’antaraṁso
    B. Sanskrit antarâṁsa; antara + aṁsa
    Antaraṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima-pātasamaye (in which antara functions as preposition c. locative, according to antara II. b.) i.e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i.e. the eighth day before & after the full moon ‣See aṭṭhaka; 2) First phrase at Vin i.31 288; iii.31; second at MN i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta-raṭṭhaka) AN i.136 (in nominative) Ja i.390 Mil 396
    2. antara + aṭṭhaka
    Antaradhāna
    neuter
    1. disappearance AN i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq. Mil 133 Dhs 645 738, 871. cp. ˚dhāyana
    from antaradhāyati
    Antaradhāyati

    to disappear Snp 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd singular medium) Vv 8128 (identical) Ja i.119 = Dhp-a i.248 Dhp-a iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna &

  • aorist dhāyi) Pv-a 152 Pv-a 217, (˚dhāyi), 245 Vv-a 48

    • ppr. antarahita (q.v.)
    • causative antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy Ja i.147 Ja ii.415 Pv-a 123
    antara + dhāyati
  • Antaradhāyana
    neuter
    1. disappearance Dhp-a iv.191 (variant reading ˚adhāna)
    from antaradhāyati
    Antarayati
    1. to go or step in between, absolutive antaritvā (= antarayitvā) Ja i.218
    cp. denominative from antara
    Antarahita
    adjective
    1. disappeared, gone, left DN i.222 MN i.487 Mil 18 Pv-a 245
    2. in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā locative on the bare soil (literally on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i.e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47 Vin ii.209 MN ii.57
    past participle of antaradhāyati
    Antarā
    adverb

    preposition (c. genitive accusative or

  • locative ), prefix (˚-) and
  • adverb “in between” (of space & time), midway, inside; during meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term ‣See DN-a i.34 sq.
  • . (preposition) c.
  • accusative (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B. Sanskrit antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) DN i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaṁ antarā ca Nāḷandaṁ between R. and name)

    • c. genitive &
    • locative Vin ii.161 (satthīnaṁ between the thighs, where identical passage at Ja i.218 has antara-satthīsu) AN ii.245 (satthīnaṁ. but variant reading satthimhi).
    • (
    • adverb ) meanwhile Snp 291 Snp 694 Iti 85 Dhp 237
    • occasionally Mil 251
    • . (prefix) ‣See compounds
    1. ˚kathā “in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation DN ii.1 DN ii.8 DN ii.9 SN i.79 SN iv.281 AN iii.167 Snp p. 115 DN-a i.49 and frequently passim -gacchati to come in between, to prevent Ja vi.295
    • ˚parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven DN iii.237 AN i.233 Pug 16
    • ˚magge (
    • locative ) on the road, on the way Ja i.253 Mil 16 Dhp-a ii.21 Dhp-a iii.337 Pv-a 151 Pv-a 258 Pv-a 269 Pv-a 273 (cp. antara˚) -maraṇa premature death Dhp-a i.409 Pv-a 136
    • ˚ muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167
    ablative or
  • adverb formation from antara; Vedic antarā.
  • Antarāpaṇa
    neuter
    1. place where the trading goes on, bazaar Ja i.55 Ja vi.52 Mil 1 Mil 330 Dhp-a i.181
    antarā + paṇa “in between the shopping or trading”
    Antarāya1
    1. obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (—˚); prevention, bar danger, accident to (-). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112 169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚ aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriṁsapa˚ jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚;. In B. Sanskrit 7 at Divy 544 viz rājā-caura-manuṣy-amanuṣya-vyāḍ-agny-udakaṁ
    • DN i.3 25, 26 AN iii.243 AN iii.306 AN iv.320 Snp 691 Snp 692 Dhp 286 (= jīvit˚ Dhp-a iii.431) Ja i.62 Ja i.128 Kp-a 181 Dhp-a ii.52 Vv-a 1 = Pv-a 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles -antarāyaṁ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back prevent, destroy Vin i.15 Ja vi.171 Vism 120 Pv-a 20
    1. ˚kara one who causes impediments or bars the way an obstructor DN i.227 SN i.34 AN i.161 Pv iv.322
    antara + aya from i, literally “coming in between”
    Antarāya2
    1. adverb [dative of antara or formation from antara +
    2. absolutive of i ?) in the meantime Snp 1120 (cp Nd2 58) antarā Snp-a 603.

    Antarāyika
    adjective
    1. causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = ii.272 MN i.130 SN ii.226 Thag-a 288
    from antarāya
    Antarāyikin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye)
    cp. antarāyika
    Antarāḷa
    neuter
    1. interior, interval Dāvs i.52; iii.53 (nabh˚)
    Sanskrit antarāla
    Antarika
    adjective
    1. “being in between”, i.e. - 1. intermediate, next, following ‣See an˚
    • distant lying in between Pv-a 173 (aneka-yojan˚ ṭhāna) ‣See also
    • feminine antarikā

  • inside ‣See antarikā
  • ˚anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165 212 (ān˚); iv.234.

    from antara
  • Antarikā
    feminine
    1. “what lies in between or near”, i.e
    1. -1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). 2. the neighbourhood, region of (—˚), sphere, com passive Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚) Ja i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence)
    2. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace) AN i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning)
    abstract from antarika
    Antalikkha
    neuter
    1. the atmosphere or air DN ii.15 AN iii.239 AN iv.199 Snp 222 Snp 688 Dhp 127 Mil 150 = Pv-a 104 Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa-saññita a Pv-a 14); Kp-a 166
    1. ˚ga going through the air AN i.215
    • ˚cara walking through the air Vin i.21 DN i.17 SN i.111 Ja v.267 DN-a i.110
    Vedic antarikṣa = antari-kṣa kṣi, literally situated in between sky and earth
    Antavant
    (ādj.)
    1. having an end, finite DN i.22 DN i.31 DN i.187 Ps i.151 sq.; 157 Dhs 1099 1117, 1175 Mil 145
    • ˚anantavant endless, infinite. AN v.193 (loka) ‣See also loka
    anta1 + ˚vant
    Anti
    indeclinable
    1. adverb & preposition c. genitive: opposite near Ja v.399 (tav’antiṁ āgatā, read as tav’anti-m-āgatā Commentary santikaṁ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikass’anti = antike Commentary )-cp. antika
    Vedic anti = Latin ante, Gothic and; Anglo-Saxon and-, German ant-, ent-
    Antika
    adjective-noun
    1. -1.
    1. near Kp-a 217; neuter neighbourhood Kh viii.1. (odak˚) Ja vi.565 (antike
    2. locative anti near)
    3. der from anta = Sanskrit antya
      1. being at the end, final, finished, over SN i.130 (purisā etad-antikā, variant reading SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i.e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons
      der from anti
    Antima
    adjective
    1. last, final (used almost exclusively with reference to the last & final reincarnation thus in combination with deha & sarīra; , the last body) DN ii.15 Dhp 351 Iti 50 (antimaṁ dehaṁ dhāreti), 53 (identical) Vv 512 Snp 478 (sarīraṁ antimaṁ dhāreti) 502 Mil 122 Mil 148 Vv-a 106 (sarīr’antima-dhārin); Sdhp 278
    1. ˚dehadhara one who wears his last body Iti 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara variant reading ) Vv-a 163
    • ˚dhārin = preceding SN i.14 SN i.53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278 Iti 32 40 Snp 471
    • ˚vatthu “the last thing”, i.e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i.121 135, 167, 320
    • ˚sarīra the last body;
    • adjective having ones last rebirth SN i.210 (Buddho a˚-sarīro) AN ii.37 Snp 624 Dhp 352 Dhp 400 Dhp-a iv.166 (= koṭiyaṁ ṭhito attabhāvo)
    cp. superl. of anta
    Ante˚
    ; (prefix)
    1. near, inside, within; only in following compounds.: ˚pura (neuter “inner town”, the king’s palace, especially its inner apartments i.e. harem Sanskrit antaḥpura, cp. also Pali antopura
      1. Vin i.75 269 AN v.81 Ja ii.125 Ja iv.472 Mil 1 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 280; ˚purikā harem woman Dhs-a 403
      • ˚vāsika one who lives in, i.e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60 Vin iii.25 SN i.180 SN iv.136 Ja i.166 Ja ii.278 Ja iii.83 Ja iii.463 Pv-a 12 Vv-a 138
      • ˚vāsin ˚vāsika Vin iii.66 DN i.1 DN i.45 DN i.74 DN i.78 DN i.88 DN i.108 DN i.157 MN iii.116 DN-a i.36
      Sanskrit antaḥ, with change of-aḥ to-e, instead of the usual-o, probably through interpreting it as locative of anta
    Anto
    indeclinable
    1. preposition inside, either c. accusative denoting direction = into, or c.
    2. locative denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚-) in, within, inside, inner ‣See compounds. (1.) prep c.
    3. accusative anto nivesanaṁ gata gone into the house Ja i.158 anto jālaṁ pavisati go into the net Dhp-a iii.175 anto gāmaṁ pavisati to go into the village Dhp-a ii.273 anto nagaraṁ pavisati Dhp-a ii.89 Pv-a 47
    4. c.
    5. locative anto gabbhe Ja ii.182 gāme Dhp-a ii.52 gehe Dhp-a ii.84 nadiyaṁ Ja vi.278 nivesane Ja ii.323 vasse in the rainy season Ja iv.242 vimānasmiṁ Pv i.101 sattāhe inside of a week Pv-a 55

      1. ˚koṭisanthāra “house of the Golden Pavement” Ja iv.113
      • ˚gadha (˚gata? Kern Toevoegselen) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity Pv-a 10 Vv-a 12
      • ˚jana “the inside people”, i.e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Latin familia) DN iii.61 (opposite to servants) AN i.152 Ja vi.301 DN-a i.300
      • ˚jāla the inside of the net, the net Dhp-a iv.41
      • ˚jālikata “in-netted”, gone into the net DN i.45 DN-a i.127
      • ˚nijjhāna inner conflagration Pv-a 18
      • ˚nimugga altogether immersed DN i.75 AN iii.26
      • ˚parisoka inner grief Ps i.38
      • ˚pura = antepura Ja i.262
      • ˚mano “turning ones mind inside”, thoughtful melancholy Vin iii.19
      • ˚bhavika being inside Mil 95
      • ˚rukkhatā being among trees Ja i.7
      • ˚vasati to inhabit live within SN iv.136
      • ˚vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoor people Ja v.118
      • ˚vassa the rainy season (literally the interval of the rainy season) Vv-a 66
      • ˚vihāra the inside of the V. Dhp-a i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs translation 311)
      • ˚soka inner grief Ps i.38
      Sanskrit antaḥ; Av antarə Latin inter, Old Irish etar between, Old High German untar; Indogermanic *entar, compar. of *en (in) inner, inside
    Andu
    1. a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = iii.249 (tiṇ˚) DN i.245 Ja i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse) Dhp-a iv.54 (˚bandhana)
    cp. Sanskrit andu, andū & anduka
    Andha
    adjective
    1. (literally) blind, blinded blindfolded Ja i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148 Pv-a 3
    2. dark dull, blinding MN iii.151 (˚andhaṁ
    3. adverb dulled) Snp 669 (epithet of timisa, like Vedic andhaṁ tamaḥ) Dhp-a ii.49 (˚vana dark forest)
    4. (figuratively) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not ‣Seeing DN i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain) AN i.128 Thag 2 394 (= bāla Thag-a 258) ‣See compounds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla ˚bhūta
      1. ˚ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena Vv-a 337)
      2. ˚karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (figuratively), confusing Iti 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa) Mil 113 (pañha, + gambhīra)
      3. ˚kāra blindness (literally fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16 DN ii.12 AN i.56 AN ii.54 AN iii.233 Ja iii.188 Thag 1, 1034 Dhp 146 Snp 763 Vv 214 (= avijj˚ Vv-a 106) Pug 30 Dhs 617 DN-a i.228 Vv-a 51 53, 116, 161 Pv-a 6 Sdhp 14 Sdhp 280
      • ˚tamo deep darkness (literally & figuratively) SN v.443 Iti 84 (variant reading Text andhaṁ tamaṁ) Ja vi.247
      • ˚bāla blinded by folly, foolish dull of mind, silly Ja i.246 Ja i.262 Ja vi.337 Dhp-a ii.43 89 iii.179 Vv-a 67 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 264
      • ˚bhūta blinded (figuratively) mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant SN iv.21 AN ii.72 Ja vi.139 (spelled ˚būta) Dhp 59 Dhp 174 (= paññā-cakkhuno abhāvena Dhp-a iii.175)
      • ˚vesa “blind form”, disguise Ja iii.418
      Vedic andha, Latin andabata ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. s.v., other etymology doubtful
    Andhaka
    1. “blind fly”, i.e. dark or yellow fly or gad-fly Snp 20 (= kāṇa-makkhikānaṁ adhivacanaṁ Snp-a 33)
    from andha
    Anna
    neuter
    1. “eating”, food, especially boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṁsa (rice gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combinationsapar’aṇṇa and pubb’aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb’aṇṇaṁ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (apar’aṇṇaṁ sūpeyya curry). Snp-a 378 (on Snp 403) explains anna by yāgubhattâdi
    • DN i.7 AN i.107 AN i.132 AN ii.70 AN ii.85 AN ii.203 Snp 82 Snp 240 Snp 403 Snp 924 Ja iii.190 Pug 51 Sdhp 106 Sdhp 214
    1. ˚āpa food & water Sdhp 100
    2. ˚da giving food Snp 297
    • ˚pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Snp 485 Snp 487 Pv i.52 82; Kp-a 207, 209 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 43
    Vedic anna, originally past participle of adati to eat
    Annaya
    1. in dur˚ ‣See anvaya
    Anvakāsi
    3rd singular aorist of anukassati.2: drew out, removed, threw down Thag 1, 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi Commentary ).
    Anvakkhara
    adjective
    1. “according to the syltable”, syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15 cp. 355. cp. anupadaṁ
    anu + akkhara
    Anvagā
    3rd singular aorist of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā Ja v.258
    Anvagū
    1. 3rd plural aorist of anugacchati SN i.39 Snp 586

    Anvaḍḍhamāsaṁ
    adverb
    1. every fortnight, twice a month MN ii.8 Vin iv.315 (= anuposathikaṁ) Dhp-a i.162 Dhp-a ii.25
    anu + aḍḍha + māsa
    Anvattha
    adjective
    1. according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse Thag-a 6 (˚saññābhāva)
    anu + attha
    Anvadeva
    adverb
    1. behind, after, later DN i.172 MN iii.172 SN v.1 (spelt anudeva) AN i.11 AN v.214 Iti 34
    anva-d-eva with euphonic d.; like sammad-eva corresponding to Sanskrit anvag-eva
    Anvaya
    1. (n adjective)
      1. (n.) conformity, accordance DN ii.83 = iii.100 MN i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of) SN ii.58 DN iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaṁ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, Burmese variant anvaya & anvāya; accordingly according to = paccayā Pv-a 147) Pv-a 228 (anvayato
      2. adverb in accordance)
      3. adjective following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (—˚) DN i.46 (tad˚) MN i.238 (kāyo citt acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind) Snp 254 (an˚ inconsistent) Iti 79 (tass˚)
      4. dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dhp 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuṁ Dhp-a ii.173) Snp 243 Snp 251 (= duviññāpaya Snp-a 287 dunneyya ibid. 293)
      Vedic anvaya in different meaning; from anu + i ‣See anveti & anvāya
    Anvayatā
    feminine
    1. conformity, accordance MN i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body)
    abstract to anvaya
    Anvahaṁ
    adverb
    1. every day, daily Dāvs iv.8
    anu + aha
    Anvāgacchati
    1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue;
    2. aorist anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 (= anubandhi Pv-a 260)
    3. to come back again Ja i.454 (
    4. absolutive ˚gantvāna).
    5. past participle anvāgata (q.v.)
    anu + ā + gacchati
    Anvāgata
    1. having pursued, attained; endowed with Thag 1, 63 Ja iv.385 Ja v.4
    past participle of anvāgacchati
    Anvādisati
    1. to advise, dedicate, assign; imperative ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 (= uddissa dehi Pv-a 80); iii.28 (= ādisa Pv-a 181)
    2. anu + ā + disati
    Anvādhika
    adjective
    1. a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297 Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻ half and half ʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material half of old. Buddhaghosa’s note ‣See the text, p. 392 adds that the new material must be cut up
    derivation uncertain
    Anvāmaddati
    1. to squeeze, wring Ja iii.481 (galakaṁ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; variant readings anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; Commentary gīvaṁ maddi)
    anu + ā + maddati
    Anvāya
    1. undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as preposition (c. accusative ) in consequence of, through after DN i.13 (ātappaṁ by means of self-sacrifice), 97 (saṁvāsaṁ as a result of their cohabitation) Ja i.56 (buddhiṁ) 127 (piyasaṁvāsaṁ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaṁ). Often in phrase vuddhiṁ anvāya growing up, e.g. Ja i.278 Ja iii.126 Dhp-a ii.87
    2. absolutive of anveti; cp. anvaya
    Anvāyika
    adjective-noun
    1. following; one who follows, a companion DN iii.169 Nd2 59 Ja iii.348
    from anvāya
    Anvārohati
    1. to go up to, visit, ascend Ja iv.465 (aorist anvāruhi)
    2. anu + ā + rohati
    Anvāvassa
    1. at Ja v.317 should be read with Burmese variant as anovassa absence of rain
    Anvāviṭṭha
    1. possessed (by evil spirits) SN i.114
    past participle of anvāvisati
    Anvāvisati
    1. to go into, to take possession of, to visit MN i.326 SN i.67 Mil 156 past participle anvāviṭṭha (q.v.) cp. adhimuccati
    2. anu + ā + visati
    Anvāsatta
    1. clung on to, befallen by instrumental, attached to AN iv.356 (variant reading anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q.v.) ‣See also following
    past participle of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sanskrit anusakta
    Anvāsattatā
    feminine
    1. being attacked by, falling a prey to instrumental, attachment to Dhp-a i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta AN iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35)
    abstract from anvāsatta
    Anvāsanna
    1. endowed with, possessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; variant reading ajjhāpanna) = AN iv.356 which has anvāsatta
    past participle of anu + ā + sad
    Anvāssavati
    1. to stream into, to attack, befall DN i.70 AN iii.99 Pug 20 58
    anu + ā + savati, sru
    Anvāhata
    1. struck, beaten; perplexed Dhp 39 (˚cetasa)
    past participle of anu + ā + han
    Anvāhiṇḍati
    1. to wander to (accusative ) AN iv.374 AN iv.376 Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit same, e.g. Divy 68 etc. anu + ā + hiṇḍati
    Anveti
    1. to follow, approach, go with Snp 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59) Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṁ … dukkhaṁ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), 2, 71 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with Burmese variant at Pv-a 99) for anvesi ‣See anvesati; explained by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed
    cp. anu + eti, from i
    Anvesa
    1. ‣Seeking, searching, investigation, MN i.140 (˚ṁ n’âdhigacchanti do not find)
    from next
    Anvesati
    1. to look, for search ‣Seek SN i.112 (ppr. anvesaṁ = pariyesamāna Commentary ); cp. iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto). aorist anvesi Sanskrit anveṣi from icchati
      1. Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with variant reading Pv-a 99 as anventi of anveti)
      anu + esati
    Anvesin
    adjective striving after ‣Seeking, wishing for Snp 965 (kusala˚). anu-esin
    Anha
    1. ‣See pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. cp. aha
    Vedic ahan
    Apa˚
    ;
    1. Well-defined directional prefix, meaning “away from, off” Usually as base-prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in comp; n. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). 1. apa = Vedic apa (Indogermanic *apo): apeti to go away = Latin abeo, Gothic afiddja; apeta gone away rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. 2. apa = Vedic ava (Indogermanic *aue ‣See ava for details) There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. English off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, especially in Burmese manuscripts manuscripts, & then to v, as b → v is frequent, e.g. bya˚ → vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sanskrit have ava in the following instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati
    2. Vedic apa; Indogermanic *apo = Avestan apa, Latin ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Gothic af, German ab, Anglo-Saxon English of. A comparative form from apa is apara “further away”
    Apakaḍḍhati
    1. to draw away, take off, remove DN i.180 DN iii.127 Dhp-a ii.86 causative apakaḍḍhāpeti Ja i.342 Ja iv.415 Mil 34

      apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sanskrit apa-karṣati
    Apakata
    1. put off, done away, in ājīvik āpakata being without a living MN i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata) Mil 279 (identical). At Iti 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (variant reading ā˚ vakatā)
    past participle of apakaroti
    Apakataññu
    adjective
    1. ungrateful Vin ii.199
    a + pa + kataññu
    Apakantati
    1. to cut off Thag 2, 217 (gale = gīvaṁ chindati Thag-a 178 Kern, Toevoegselen corrects to kabale a.)
    apa + kantati, Sanskrit ava + kṛntati
    Apakaroti
    1. to throw away, put off; hurt, offend slight; possibly in reading Text apakiritūna at Thag 2, 447 (q.v.) past participle apakata (q.v.) cp. apakāra
    2. apa + karoti, cp. Sanskrit apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning
    Apakassati
    1. to throw away, remove Snp 281 (Burmese variant & Snp-a ava˚; explained by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati Snp-a 311). absolutive ; apakassa Snp ii.198 = Mil 389 ‣See also apakāsati. Apakara & ka; Sanskrit apa-& ava-kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati
    Apakāra
    ˚ka;
    1. injury, mischief; one who injures or offends Dhp-a iii.63 Sdhp 283
    cp. Sanskrit apakāra & apakaroti
    Apakāsati
    1. at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as “draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)". The variant reading on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Buddhaghosa’s explanation “parisaṁ ākaḍḍhanti"
    • cp. AN iii.145 & ‣See; avapakāsati The reading at the identical passage at. AN v.74 is avakassati (combined with vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati) which is much to be preferred ‣See vavakassati
    Apakiritūna
    1. at Thag 2, 447 T (reading of Commentary is abhi˚) is explained Thag-a 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etymology = Sanskrit avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense “to cast off, reject”, to which also belongs kirāta in meaning “cast off” i.e. man of a so-called low tribe ‣See also avakirati.2
    Apakkamati
    1. to go away, depart, go to one side Ja iii.27 Sdhp 294. aorist apakkami Pv iv.75;
    2. absolutive apakkamitvā Pv-a 43 Pv-a 124 & apakkamma Pv ii.928
    3. cp. Sanskrit apakramati, apa + kram
    Apagacchati
    1. to go away, turn aside Dhp-a i.401 (˚gantvā). past participle apagata (q.v.)
    2. apa + gam
    Apagata
    1. gone, gone away from (c. ablative), removed; deceased, departed Iti 112 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata)
    2. (˚-) frequently as prefix meaning without, literally having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage) Ja i.61 (˚vattha without clothes) Pv-a 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling)
    3. cp. apakata
    past participle of apagacchati
    Apagabbha
    adjective
    1. not entering another womb, i.e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3
    a + pa + gabbha
    Apagama
    1. going away, disappearance Sdhp 508
    Sanskrit apagama
    Apaṅga
    (apānga)
    1. the outer corner of the eye Ja iii.419 (asitâpangin black-eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avaṅga at Vin ii.267 where the phrase avangaṁ karoti i.e. explained by Buddhaghosa ibid p. 327 as “avangadese adhomukhaṁ lekhaṁ karonti". According to Kern, Toevoegselen 20 Buddhaghosa’s explanation is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of “a coloured mark upon the body (cp. PW. apānga)
    Sanskrit apānga
    Apacaya
    falling off, diminution (opposite ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, especially loss (of wordliness) decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213 cp. Ja iii.342 SN ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi) AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opposite ācaya) Ja iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati) Vb 106 319, 326, 330.
    1. ˚gāmin going towards decrease, “making for the undoing of rebirth” (Dhs translation 82). AN v.243 AN v.277 Dhs 277 339, 505, 1014 Vb 12 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156)
    from apa + ci
    Apacāyati
    1. to honour respect, pay reverence DN i.91 (pūjeti +) Ja iii.82 Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti.2 AN iv.245 Thag-a 72 (here to apacināti.1). past participle apacita (q.v.)
    2. from apa-ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with different meaning in Sanskrit ; better explained perhaps as denominative from *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita
    Apacāyana
    neuter
    1. honouring, honour, worship, reverence Ja i.220 Ja v.326 DN-a i.256 (˚kamma) Vv-a 24 (˚ṁ karoti = añjalikaṁ karoti) Pv-a 104 (˚kara, adjective), 128 (+ paricariya)
    abstract from apa + cāy, which is itself a derived from ci, cināti
    Apacāyika
    adjective
    1. honouring, respecting Ja iv.94 (vaddha˚ cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (identical). In B. Sanskrit the corresponding phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka
    from *apacāya, cp. B. Sanskrit apacāyaka MVastu i.198; Divy 293
    Apacāyin
    adjective
    1. honouring, paying homage, revering Snp 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaṁ apaciti karaṇena Snp-a 332) = Dhp 109 Ja i.47 Ja i.132 Ja i.201 ii.299; v.325 Mil 206 Sdhp 549
    from *apacāya; cp. apacāyika
    Apacāra
    1. falling off, fault, wrong doing Ja vi.375
    from apa + car, cp. Sanskrit apa & abhi-carati
    Apacita
    1. honoured, worshipped, esteemed Thag 1, 186 Ja ii.169 Ja iv.75 Vv 510 (= pūjita Vv-a 39); 3511 (cp. Vv-a 164) Mil 21
    past participle of apacayati or apacināti
    Apaciti
    feminine
    1. honour, respect, esteem, reverence Thag 1, 589 Ja i.220 ii.435; iii.82; iv.308; vi.88 Mil 180 Mil 234 (˚ṁ karoti) 377 (pūjana +) Snp-a 332 (˚karaṇa). cp. apacāyana
    Vedic apaciti in different meaning, viz. expiation
    Apacināti
    1. in meaning of Sanskrit apacīyate cp. Pali upaciyyati
    2. passive of upacināti
      1. to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less SN iii.89 (opposite ācināti) Thag 1, 807 Ja iv.172 (apacineth’eva kāmāni = viddhaṁseyyatha Commentary ). Here belong probably aorist 3rd
      2. plural apaciyiṁsu (to be read for upacciṁsu) at Ja vi.187 (akkhīni a. “the eyes gave out”) and Pot. pres. apace Thag-a 72 (on v.40)
      3. = apacayati
        1. to honour esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraṁ (?) variant reading apacitiyamāna; translation guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); MN i.324 ‣See detail under apaviṇāti Thag 1, 186 (gerundive apacineyya to be honoured) Ja v.339 (anapacinanto for Text anupacinanto, variant reading anapavinati).
        2. past participle apacita (q.v.)
        3. apa + cināti
    Apacca
    1. offspring, child DN i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (identical) SN i.69 (an˚) Snp 991 DN-a i.254
    Vedic apatya nt.; derived from apa
    Apaccakkha
    adjective

    unseen; in instrumental feminine apaccakkhāya as

  • adverb without being seen, not by direct evidence Mil 46f.
  • a + paṭi + akkha
    Apacchapurima
    adjective
    1. “neither after nor before”, i.e. at the same time, simultaneous Ja iii.295
    a + paccha + purima
    Apajaha
    adjective
    1. not giving up, greedy, miserly AN iii.76 (variant reading apānuta; Commentary explains (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha)
    a + pajaha
    Apajita
    neuter
    1. defeat Dh. 105
    past participle of apa + ji
    Apajjhāyati
    1. to muse, meditate, ponder, consider MN i.334 (nijjhāyati +); iii.14 (identical)
    apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sanskrit abhi-dhyāyati
    Apaññaka
    adjective = apañña, ignorant Dīpavaṁsa vi.29.
    Apaṭṭhapeti
    1. to put aside, leave out, neglect Ja iv.308 Ja v.236
    causative from apa-tiṭṭhati, cp. Sanskrit apa + sthā to stand aloof
    Apaṇṇaka
    adjective [a + paṇṇaka ‣See paṇṇaka; Weber Indische Streifen iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a-praśna-ka certain, true, absolute MN i.401 MN i.411 AN v.85 AN v.294 AN v.296 Ja i.104 (where explained as ekaṁsika aviruddha niyyānika.
    Apanṇṇakatā
    feminine
    1. certainty, absoluteness SN iv.351f.
    abstract of apaṇṇaka
    Apatacchika
    1. only in khārāpatācch˚; (q.v.) a kind of torture
    Apattha1
    adjective
    1. thrown away Dhp 149 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.112)
    Sanskrit apāsta, past participle of apa + as2
    Apattha2
    1. 2nd plural preterite of pāpunāti (q.v.)

    Apatthaṭa
    1. = avatthaṭa covered Thag 1, 759
    Apatthita
    Apatthiya;
    1. ‣See pattheti
    Apadāna

    neuter

    1. removing, breaking off, DN iii.88
    • = Sanskrit avadāna cp. ovāda
    1. advice, admonition instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice) 7 (identical) MN i.96 AN v.337f. (saddhā˚) Thag 1, 47
    • legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaṁ, that is ʻ the stories ʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.3
    • cp. also pariyāpadāna
    • = Sanskrit apadāna
  • Apadisa
    1. reference, testimony, witness Dhp-a ii.39
    fr apa + diś
    Apadisati
    1. to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159 Ja i.215 Ja iii.234 Ja iv.203 Mil 270 Dhp-a ii.39 Nett 93
    apa + disati
    Apadesa
    1. reason, cause, argument MN i.287 (an˚)
    2. statement, designation Pv-a 8
    3. pretext Ja iii.60 Ja iv.13 Pv-a 154 Thus also apadesaka Ja vi.179

      cp. Sanskrit apadeśa
    Apadhāreti
    1. to observe, request ask Thag-a 16
    causative of apa + dhṛ; , cp. Sanskrit ava-dhārayati, but also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit apadhārayati Divy 231
    Apanata
    1. “bent away”, drawn aside, in ster. combinationabhinata + apanata (“strained forth & strained aside” Mrs Rhys Davids Kindred S. p. 39) MN i.386 SN i.28
    past participle of apanamati
    Apanamati
    1. to go away Snp 1102 (apanamissati, variant reading apalām˚ & apagam˚; explained at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. past participle apanata (q.v.)
    2. causative apanāmeti
    3. semantically doubtful
    Apanāmeti
    1. to take away, remove MN i.96 = AN i.198 (kathaṁ bahiddhā a. carry outside) Kh viii.4 (= aññaṁ ṭhānaṁ gameti Kp-a 220)
    2. = Sanskrit ava-namati
      1. to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaṁ) SN i.226 (identical) Ja ii.287 (identical, variant reading apanetvā) DN i.126 (hatthaṁ, for salute)
      causative from apanamati
    Apanidahati
    (& apanidheti)
    1. to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati) Pv-a 215 (˚dhāya absolutive ).
    2. past participle apanihita.
    3. causative apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123
    4. apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding-place; Sanskrit apadadhāti = Latin abdo “do away”
    Apanihita
    1. concealed, in abstract ˚ttaṁ neuter hiding, concealing, theft Pv-a 216
    2. past participle of apanidahati
    Apanīta
    1. taken away or off. removed, dispelled Pv-a 39
    Sanskrit apanīta, past participle of apa + nī ‣See apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta
    Apanudati
    Apanudeti;
    1. to push or drive away, remove dispel; pres. apanudeti Mil 38 aorist apānudi Pv i.86 (= apanesi Pv-a 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi Pv-a 86) Dāvs i.8.
    2. absolutive apanujja DN ii.223 ‣See also derivation apanudana. Apanudana & Apanudana; apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & causative Sanskrit apanodayati
    Apanudana
    Apanūdana;
    neuter
    1. taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148 Ja i.94
    • dukkha˚) Snp 252 (identical) Pv-a 114 (identical)
    Sanskrit apanodana, from apanudati
    Apanuditar
    1. remover, dispeller DN iii.148
    agent noun from apanudati, Sanskrit apanoditṛ
    Apaneti
    1. to lead away, take or put away, remove Ja i.62 Ja i.138 Ja ii.4 Ja ii.155 (aorist apānayi) iii.26 Mil 188 Mil 259 Mil 413 Pv-a 41 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63
    2. passive apanīyati SN i.176
    3. past participle apanīta (q.v.)
    4. apa +
    Apapibati
    1. to drink from something Ja ii.126 (aorist apāpāsi). Apabbuhati & Apabyuhati; apa + pibati
    Apabbūhati
    Apabyūhati;
    1. to push off, remove, scrape away AN iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, variant readings ˚bbūhitvā) Ja i.265
    • paṁsuṁ.
    • causative ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush Ja iv.349
    • paṁsuṁ
    apa + vi + ūh
    Apabyāma
    1. ‣See apavyāma
    Apamāra
    1. epilepsy Vin i.93 cp. apasmāra
    Sanskrit apasmāra
    Apamārika
    adjective
    1. epileptic Vin iv.8 10, 11
    cp. Sanskrit apasmārin
    Apayāti
    1. to go away Ja vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; explained by Commentary as apagacchati palāyati). causative apayāpeti Sanskrit apayāpayati
      1. to make go drive away, dismiss MN iii.176 SN ii.119
      Sanskrit apayāti, apa +
    Apayāna
    neuter
    1. going away, retreat DN i.9 (opposite upa˚) DN-a i.95
    Sanskrit apayāna, from apayāti
    Apara
    adjective
    1. another, i.e. additional, following next, second (with pronoun inflexion, i.e. nominative pl apare) DN iii.190 (˚pajā another, i.e.
    2. future generation) Snp 791 Snp 1089 (n’) Ja i.59 (aparaṁ divasaṁ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā “other friends three” i.e. three friends, cp. similarly From nous autres Franc˚ais) iv.3 (dīpa) Pv-a 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other participle like aparo pi DN iii.128

      • nt. aparaṁ what follows i.e.
      • future state, consequence;
      • future Vin i.35 (nâparaṁ nothing more) Snp 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases
      • adverb ially; aparaṁ (
      • accusative further, besides, also Ja i.256 Ja iii.278 often with other part like athāparaṁ & further, moreover Snp 974 and puna c’aparaṁ Iti 100 Mil 418 (so read for puna ca paraṁ and passim; aparam pi Vism 9
      • aparena in
      • future DN iii.201
      • Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparāparaṁ (local) to & fro Ja i.265 Ja i.278 Pv-a 198 (temporal) again and again, off & on Ja ii.377 Mil 132 Vv-a 271 Pv-a 176 (= punappunaṁ)
      1. ˚anta (aparanta) = aparaṁ, with anta in same function as in compounds. vananta ‣See anta1 5: (a.) further away, westward Ja v.471 Mil 292 (janapada). (b.) future DN i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DN-a i.118) MN ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi-thought of the
      2. future ) SN iii.46 (identical)
      3. ˚āpariya (from aparâpara ever-following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with reference to kamma Ja v.106 Mil 108
      4. ˚bhāga the
      5. future literally a later part of time, only in
      6. locative aparabhāge at a
      7. future date, later on Ja i.34 Ja i.262 Ja iv.1 Vv-a 66
      8. Vedic apara, derived from apa with compar. suffix-ra = Indogermanic *aporos “further away, second”; cp. Latin aprilis the second month (after March, i.e. April). Gothic afar = after
    Aparajju
    adverb
    1. on the following day Vin ii.167 SN i.186 Mil 48
    Sanskrit apare-dyus
    Aparajjhati
    1. to sin or offend against (c. locative ) Vin ii.78 = iii.161 Ja v.68 Ja vi.367 Mil 189 Pv-a 263
    2. past participle aparaddha & aparādhita; (q.v.)
    3. Sanskrit aparādhyate, apa + rādh
    Aparaṇṇa
    neuter
    1. “the other kind of cereal”, prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. O past participle to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265 Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ +); iv.265, 267 AN iv.108 AN iv.112 (tila-mugga-māsā˚; opposite sāli-yavaka etc.) Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaṁ nāma sūpeyyaṁ) Ja v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā pea) Mil 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚) ‣See also dhañña & harita
    2. apara + aṇṇa = anna
    Aparaddha
    1. missed (c. accusative ), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against =
    2. locative ) DN i.91 DN i.103 DN i.180 SN i.103 (suddhimaggaṁ) Thag 1, 78 Snp 891 (suddhiṁ viraddha khalita Nd1 300) Pv-a 195
    3. past participle of aparajjhati
    Aparapaccaya
    adjective
    1. not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja-ppatta +) DN i.110 (identical) MN ii.41 MN i.491 SN iii.83 DN-a i.278 (nâssa paro paccayo)
    a + para + paccaya
    Aparājita
    adjective
    1. unconquered Snp 269 Ja i.71 Ja i.165
    Vedic aparājita; a + parājita
    Aparādha
    1. sin, fault, offence, guilt Ja i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495 Vv-a 69 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 116
    from apa + rādh
    Aparādhika
    adjective
    1. guilty, offending, criminal Ja ii.117 (vāja˚) Mil 149 (issara˚) 189 (aparādhikatā)
    from aparādha, cp. Sanskrit aparādhin
    Aparādhita
    1. transgressed, sinned, failing Ja v.26 (so read for aparadh’ito)
    past participle of aparādheti, causative of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha
    Aparāyin
    adjective
    1. having no support Ja iii.386 (feminine ˚ī; Commentary appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā)
    2. a + parāyin, cp. parāyana
    Apalāpin
    1. ‣See apalāsin
    Sanskrit apalāpin “denying, concealing” different
    Apalāḷeti
    1. to draw over to Vin i.85
    apa + lāḷeti
    Apalāyin
    adjective
    1. not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as explanation of acchambhin and vīra) Ja iv.296 Ja v.4 (where C gives variant “apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho”, which latter has variant reading apalāsinī & is explained by Commentary as palāpa-rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5) ‣See also apalāsin
    a + palāyin
    Apalāsin
    adjective
    1. either “not neglectful, pure, clean” (= apalāpin from palāsa chaff cp. apalāyin at Ja v.4), or “not selfish, not hard, generous (as inferred from combination with amakkhin & amaccharin) or “brave, fearless, energetic” (= apalāyin) DN iii.47 cp. Pug 22 ‣See palāsin
    apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to frequently miswriting of s, y, p in manuscripts (cp. Nd; 2 introduction p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The explanation at Pug 22 as “yassa puggalassa ayaṁ paḷāso pahīno ayaṁ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī” does not help us to clear up the etymology nor the variant readings
    Apalibuddha
    Apalibodha;
    1. unobstructed, unhindered, free Ja iii.381 (˚bodha) Mil 388 Dhp-a iii.198
    a + palibuddha, past participle of pari + bṛh ‣See palibujjhati
    Apalekhana
    neuter
    1. licking off, in compound hatthāpalekhana “hand-licking” (i.e. licking one’s hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) MN 177 (with variant reading hatthâvalekhana MN i.535 Trenckner compares Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412 Pug 55 (explained at Pug AN 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṁ apalekhati)
    apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sanskrit ava-lehana
    Apalekhati
    1. to lick off Pug AN 231 (hatthaṁ)
    apa + lekhati in meaning of Sanskrit avalihati
    Apalepa
    1. in “so ’palepa patito jarāgharo” at Thag 2, 270 is to be read as “so palepa˚". Morris’s interpreterite Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 126 therefore superfluous
    Apalokana
    neuter
    1. permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3 Vin ii.89 Vin iv.152
    from apaloketi
    Apalokita
    1. asked permission, consulted SN iii.5
    2. neuter permission, consent MN i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaṁ apalokesi)
      • neuter an epithet of Nibbāna SN iv.370
      past participle of apaloketi; Sanskrit avalokita
    Apalokin
    adjective
    1. “looking before oneself”, looking at, cautious Mil 398
    Sanskrit avalokin
    Apaloketi
    1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after MN i.557 (variant reading for apaciṇāti, where Ja v.339 Commentary has avaloketi) Mil 398 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (
    2. accusative ), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10 11; iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā) MN i.337 SN iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaṁ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha) Ja vi.298 (vājānaṁ) Dhp-a i.67
    3. past participle apalokita (q.v.) ‣See also apalokana & ˚lokin
    4. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ava-lokayati
    Apavagga
    1. completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggāpavagga Dāvs ii.62; iii.75
    Sanskrit apavarga
    Apavattati
    1. to turn away or aside, to go away Ja iv.347 (variant reading apasakkati)
    apa + vṛt, cp. Latin āverto
    Apavadati
    1. to reproach, reprove, reject, despise DN i.122 (= paṭikkhipati DN-a i.290) SN v.118 (+ paṭikkosati)
    apa + vadati
    Apavahati
    1. to carry or drive away; causative apavāheti to remove, give up Mil 324 (kaddamaṁ)
    2. apa + vahati
    Apaviṭṭha
    1. at Pv iii.82 is to be read apaviddha (q.v.)
    Apaviṇāti
    1. is probably misreading for apaciṇāti ‣See apac˚ 2. As variant reading at Ja v.339 (anapavinanto) for Text anupacinanto (explained by avaloketi Commentary ). Other variant readings are anuvi˚ & apavī˚ meaning “not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati “to take care of, to pay attention to (c. accusative ) at MN i.324 where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ ‣See Notes p. 781, but the variant readings to this passage ‣See M. i.557 with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.

    Apaviddha
    1. thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed SN i.202 SN iii.143 Snp 200 (susānasmiṁ = chaḍḍita Snp-a 250) Thag 1, 635 Dhp 292 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiṁ; so read for Text apaviṭṭha) Ja i.255 Ja iii.426 Ja yi.90 (= chaḍḍita Commentary ). Sdhp 366
    past participle of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh
    Apaviyūhati
    1. ‣See appabbūhati
    Apavīṇati
    1. ‣See apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti)
    Apavyāma
    1. disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile SN i.226 (variant reading abyāmato; Commentary explains apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (variant readings asabyākato abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu translation 270 note 1 remarks: “B translation: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously”; it is here combined with niṭṭhubhati, as at Dhp-a ii.36) Dhp-a ii.36 (“want of forbearance” Ed. doubtful reading; variant readings appabyāyakamma & apasāma) For further detail ‣See; apasavya
    apa + vyāma
    Apasakkati
    1. to go away, to go aside Ja iv.347 (variant reading for apavattati) Vv-a 101 Pv-a 265 (aorist ˚sakki = apakkami)
    2. apa + sakkati
    Apasavya
    adjective
    1. right (i.e. not left), contrary Ud 50 (Text has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & Commentary apasabyāmato) where Commentary explains apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaṁ katvā “which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sanskrit apasavyaṁ karoti to go on the right side” (Morris JP T S. 1886, 127)
    • See apavyāma
    apa + savya
    Apasāda
    1. putting down, blame, disparagement MN iii.230
    from apa + sad
    Apasādita
    1. blamed, reproached, disparaged SN ii.219 Snp-a 541
    past participle of apasādeti
    Apasādeti
    1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213 263 Ja v.417 (= uyyojeti)
    2. to depreciate blame, disparage Vin iii.101 MN iii.230 (opposite ussādeti DN-a i.160
    3. past participle apasādita (q.v.)
    causative of apa + sad
    Apasmāra
    1. epilepsy, convulsion, fit Ja iv.84 cp. apamāra
    Sanskrit apasmāra, literally want of memory, apa + smṛ
    Apassanto
    1. etc ‣See passati
    Apassaya
    1. support, rest Thag-a 258
    2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚; a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) MN i.78 Ja i.493 Ja iii.235
    3. ˚sāppassaya with a head rest Ja iv.299
      1. ˚pīṭhaka a chair with a head-rest Ja iii.235
      cp. Sanskrit apāśraya, from apasseti
    Apassayika
    adjective
    1. reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚; one who lies on a bed of thorns ‣See kaṇṭaka MN i.78 Ja iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika) Pug 55
    from apassaya; cp. Sanskrit apāśrayin—˚
    Apassita
    1. leaning against Ja ii.69 (tālamūlaṁ = nissāya ṭhita Commentary )
    2. depending on, trusting in (c.
    3. accusative or
    4. locative ) Vv 101 (parâgāraṁ = nissita Vv-a 101) Ja iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita) ‣See also avassita
    past participle of apasseti
    Apasseti
    1. to lean against, have a support in (accusative ), to depend on.

      1. -1. (literally) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head-rest)
      • (figuratively) mostly in
      • absolutive apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (
      • locative or acc or—˚) Vin iii.38 Ja i.214 Pv-a 189
      • past participle apassita (q.v.)
      • ‣ See also avasseti
    Sanskrit apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri
    Apassena
    neuter
    1. a rest, support, dependence MN iii.127 (˚ka) DN iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj caturāpassena one who has the fourfold support viz sankhāy’ekaṁ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti. AN v.30
    1. ˚phalaka (cp. Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 71) a bolsterslab head-rest Vin i.48 Vin ii.175 209
    from apasseti
    Apahattar
    1. one who takes away or removes, destroyer MN i.447 = Kvu 528
    agent noun to apaharati
    Apahara
    1. taking away, stealing, robbing Ja ii.34
    Sanskrit apahāra, from apaharati
    Apaharaṇa
    neuter = apahara Mil 195
    Apaharati
    1. to take away, remove, captivate, rob Ja iii.315 (aorist apahārayiṁ) Mil 413 DN-a i.38
    2. apa + hṛ
    Apākaṭatā
    feminine
    1. unfitness Mil 232 (variant reading apākatatta perhaps better)
    a + pākaṭa + tā
    Apākatika
    adjective
    1. not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed Dhp-a ii.7 cp. appakāra
    a + pākata + ika
    Apācīna
    adjective
    1. westerly, backward, below SN iii.84 Iti 120 (apācīnaṁ used as adverb and taking here the place of adho in combination with uddhaṁ tiriyaṁ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch’s, the variant readings are apācinaṁ; apācini apāci & apāminaṁ, Commentary explains by heṭṭhā)
    2. Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Latin opācus, originally turned away (from the east or the sun) i.e. opposite, dark
    Apāṭuka
    adjective
    1. not open, sly, insidious Thag 1 940 (as variant reading for Text avāṭuka, translation by Mrs. Rhys Davids as “unscrupulous”, by Neumann as “ohne Redlichkeit”) Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i.e. fraudulent ‣See also next
    a + pātu + ka (?), accusative to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 7 derived from apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct ‣See pātur
    Apāṭubha
    adjective
    1. P. Text S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason = apāṭuka, i.e. sly, fraudulent Ja iv.184 (in context with nekatika; Commentary explains apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda-virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the passive seems corrupt)
    2. a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J.
    Apāda
    (?)
    1. giving away in marriage Ja iv.179 (in explanation of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob be āpāda = pariggaha)
    apa + ā +
    Apādaka
    adjective
    1. not having feet, footless, creeping, epithet of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = Ja ii.146 (where ‣See explanation). Spelt apada(ka) at Iti 87 (variant reading apāda)
    a + pāda + ka
    Apāna
    neuter breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no reference in Pali Canon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna ‣See G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919
    • past participle 104–⁠112 ‣See ānāpāna.

    Apānakatta
    neuter
    1. “waterless state”, living without drinking water Ja v.243
    a + pānaka + ttaṁ
    Apāpaka
    adjective
    1. guiltless, innocent feminine ˚ikā Vv 314 326
    2. a + pāpaka
    Apāpata
    adjective
    1. falling down into (c. accusative ) Ja iv.234 (aggiṁ)
    2. apa + ā + pata
    Apāpurana
    neuter
    1. a key (to a door) Vin i.80 Vin iii.119 MN iii.127 ‣See also avāpuraṇa. Apapurati & Apapunati;
    from apāpurati
    Apāpurati
    Apāpuṇati;
    1. to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpur’etaṁ Amatassa dvāraṁ: imperative where identical passage SN i.137 has avāpur˚, Text, but variant reading apāpur˚) Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraṁ, explained at Vv-a 284 by vivaranto) Iti 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as Text conj. with variant reading apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti)

      • pp; apāruta (q.v.)
      • passive apāpurīyati cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit apāvurīyati Mvu ii.158
      1. to be opened MN iii.184 (variant reading avā˚) Ja i.63 (avā˚) Thag 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā) ‣See also avāpurati
      Sanskrit apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ; , but Vedic only apa-vṛṇoti corresponding to Latin aperio *apa-ṷerio. On form ‣See Trenckner, Note. 63
    Apābhata
    1. taken away, stolen Ja iii.54
    past participle of apa + ā + bhṛ; cp. Vedic apa-bharati, but Latin aufero to ava˚
    Apāya
    “going away” viz.
    1. -1. separation, loss Dhp 211 (piya˚ = viyoga Dhp-a iii.276)
    • loss (of property) DN iii.181 DN iii.182 AN ii.166 AN iv.283 Ja iii.387 (atth˚)

  • leakage, out flow (of water) DN i.74 AN ii.166 AN iv.287

    • lapse, falling away (in conduct) DN i.100

  • a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati; . All combined at DN i.82 DN iii.111 AN i.55 Iti 12 73; Nd2 under kāya; & frequently elsewhere

    • apāyaduggativinipāta as attribute of saṁsāra SN ii.92 SN ii.232 SN iv.158 SN iv.313 SN v.342; opposite to khīṇâpāya-duggati-vinipāta of an Arahant AN iv.405 AN v.182 sq
    • ‣ See also following pass.: MN iii.25 (anapāya) Snp 231 Thag 2, 63 Ja iv.299 Pug 51 Vv-a 118 (opposite sugati) Pv-a 103 Sdhp 43 Sdhp 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta
    1. ˚gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering Dhp-a iii.175 cp. ˚gamanīya identical Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā Ja iv.499
    • ˚mukha “facing ruin”, leading to destruction (= vināsa-mukha DN-a i.268), usually as
    • neuter “cause of ruin” DN i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaṁ a˚-mukhāni, i.e. causes of the loss of one’s possessions) AN ii.166 AN iv.283 AN iv.287
    • ˚samudda the ocean of distress Dhp-a iii.432
    • ˚sahāya a spendthrift companion DN iii.185
    Sanskrit apāya, from apa + i, cp. apeti
  • Apāyika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the apāyas or states of misery DN i.103 DN iii.6 DN iii.9 DN iii.12 Iti 42 Pv-a 60 (dukkha)
    also as āpāyika (q.v.); from apāya
    Apāyin
    adjective
    1. going away Ja i.163 (aḍḍharattāv’apāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin Commentary )
    2. ˚an˚; not going away, i.e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dhp 2 Thag 1, 1041 Mil 72
    from apāya
    Apāra
    neuter
    1. the near bank of a river Ja iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaṁ, Commentary paratīraṁ atiṇṇaṁ)
    2. (figuratively) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opposite pāraṁ Nibbāna) Snp 1129 Snp 1130 Nd2 62 Dhp 385 (explained as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni Dhp-a iv.141) ‣See pāra & cp. avara
    a + pāra
    Apāraṇeyya
    adjective
    1. that which cannot be achieved, unattainable Ja vi.36 (= apāpetabba)
    gerundive of paraneti + a˚
    Apāruta
    1. open (of a door) Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṁ Amatassa dvārā) DN i.136 (= vivaṭa-dvāra DN-a i.297) Ja i.264 (˚dvāra)
    Sanskrit apāvṛta, past participle of apāpurati
    Apālamba
    1. P T S. 1886, 128; the “Vedic” unidentified a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard “to prevent warriors from falling out” (Commentary ) SN i.33 (Mrs Rhys Davids trsl “leaning board”) Ja vi.252 (variant reading upā˚; Kern translation “remhout”, i.e. brake)
    "a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage” Morris J
    Apāhata
    1. driven off or back, refuted, refused Snp 826 (˚smiṁ = apasādite vade Snp-a 541)
    past participle of apa + hṛ
    Api
    indeclinable
    1. both preposition & conj., orig meaning “close by”, then as preposition “towards, to, on to on” and as adverb “later, and, moreover".

      1. (preposition prefix) (a) preposition c.
      2. locative :; api ratte later on in the night (q.v.)-(b) prefix: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita, put on to (q.v.)
      3. (conj. & participle). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily “moreover, further, and then, even"-() (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dhp 187 ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate-born Snp 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. Pv-a 270 Epithetic (more frequently in the form pi: muhuttam api even a little while Dhp 106 Dhp 107 aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to ‣See Snp 685 Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the
      4. conditional meaning of “if”, as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) Ja v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma ‣See further under app’eva nāma)
      5. api-api in correlation corresponds to Latin et-et Sanskrit ca-ca, meaning both … and, and … as well as, & is especially frequently in combinationapp’ ekacce … app’ ekacce (and) some … and others i.e. some … others not with Kern Toevoegselen s.v. to appa
        1. ! e.g. at DN i.118 Thag 2, 216 Vv-a 208 etc
        2. ˚app’ ekadā “morever once” = sometimes Vin iv.178 SN i.162 SN iv.111 Ja i.67 Dhp-a iii.303 etc
        • () (in combination with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also moreover DN i.96 Mil 25 Mil 47
        • ˚api ca kho moreover and yet, still, all the same Iti 89 (+ pana variant reading ) Mil 20 Mil 239
        • ˚api ca kho pana all the same, never mind nevertheless Ja i.253
        • ˚api ssu so much so Vin ii.76
        • ˚app’ eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (identical); cp. pi DN i.205 (sve pi upasaṁkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be) MN i.460 = Iti 89 (moreover, indeed) Ja i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) Ja v.421 (identical, piyavācaṁ labheyyāma)
        • (b) in interrog
        • dubit. sentences as participle of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Latin nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer (“not, not then”): api Yasaṁ kulaputtaṁ passeyya do you not ‣See.. Vin i.16 api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen … SN i.115 api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? Ja iii.26 api me pitaraṁ passatha do you then not ‣See my father? Pv-a 38
        • Also combined with other interrogative participle e.g. api nu J. ii.415
        Sanskrit api & pi; Indogermanic *epi *pi *opi; cp. Latin ob. in certain functions; Gothic iftuma. The assimil. form before vowels is app˚; (= Sanskrit apy˚) ‣See further details under pi.
    Apitika
    adjective
    1. fatherless Ja v.251
    a + pitika
    Apithīyati
    passive of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured Ja ii.158 ‣See also pithīyati. for apidhīyati; api + dhā
    Apidahati
    1. to put on ‣See api 1 b, to cover up, obstruct, Ja v.60 (infinitive apidhetuṁ) past participle apihita, passive apithīyati, Derived apidhāna (q.v.)
    2. api + dhā
    Apidhāna
    neuter
    1. cover, lid Vin i.203 204; ii.122 ‣See apidahati
    Vedic apidhāna in same meaning
    Apiratte
    1. later in the night Ja vi.560
    read api ratte ‣See api 1 a
    Apilāpana
    neuter

    counting up, repetition Kern, Toev, s.v. gives derived from a + plāvana

    1. Nett 15, 28 54 Mil 37
    from api + lap
    Apilāpanatā
    feminine in the
    • passive at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr pilavati, plu, but whether the derivation & interpretation of Dhs AN is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etymology Mrs. Rhys Davids translates (p. 16 “opposite of superficiality” (lit “not floating”) ‣See her detailed note Dhs translation 16.

    Apilāpeti
    1. “to talk close by”, i.e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Mil 37 (sāpatheyyaṁ)
    api + lap
    Apiḷandha
    adjective at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sanskrit apinaddha)
    • past participle of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) “adorned with”, or (with variant reading SS) as apiḷandhana Vv-a 167 explains by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.

    Apiḷandhana
    neuter
    1. that which is tied on, i.e band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410 6418 (explained inacurately at Vv-a 279 by; a-kāro nipātamattaṁ, pilandhanaṁ = ābhāraṇaṁ) Ja vi.472 (c. pilandhituṁ pi ayuttaṁ?). Apilahati & Apilandhati;
    from apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form; piḷandhana, q.v.
    Apiḷahati
    Apiḷandhati;
    1. to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (accusative ) Ja v.400 (
    2. absolutive apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā Commentary )-cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha
    3. Sanskrit apinahyati, on n: ḷ ‣See note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh ‣See avanandhati
    Apiha
    adjective
    1. P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha “unhankering (Mrs Rhys Davids) SN i.181 (+ akankha; Burmese variant asita)
    apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin ‣See next. Morris J.
    Apihālu
    adjective
    1. not hankering, free from craving, not greedy SN i.187 = Thag 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu) Snp 852 (+ amaccharin, explained at Snp-a 549 as apihana-sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaṁ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (from dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita) cp. also Nd2 227)
    a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a-spṛhayālu, but Buddhaghosa evidently different ‣See below
    Apihita
    1. covered Ja iv.4
    past participle of apidahati
    Apuccaṇḍatā
    feminine
    1. “not being a rotten egg,” i.e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness MN i.357
    a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā
    Apuccha
    adjective
    1. “not a question”, i.e. not to be asked Mil 316
    a + pucchā
    Apekkha
    adjective
    1. waiting for, looking for SN i.122 (otāra˚)
    = apekkhā
    Apekkhati
    1.
    1. to desire, long for, look for, expect Snp 435 (kāme n’âpekkhate cittaṁ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna) Ja iv.226 (identical); Dhs-a 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (accusative ) Snp 59 Ja v.359 2. Sanskrit avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ ‣See avekkḥati
      1. to consider refer to, look at, absolutive apekkhitvā (cp. Sanskrit avīkṣya) with reference to Vv-a 13 past participle apekkhita (q.v.)
      2. Sanskrit apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ
    Apekkhavant
    adjective
    1. full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214 SN iii.16 Thag 1, 558 Ja v.453 (= sataṇha); Snp-a 76. Apekkha & Apekha
    from apekkhā
    Apekkhā
    Apekhā
    feminine
    1. attention, regard, affection for (locative ); desire longing for (c.
    2. locative ) SN i.77 SN iii.132 SN v.409 (mātā-pitusu) Vin iv.214 Snp 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha Snp-a 76) Ja i.9 Ja i.141 Thag 1, 558 Dhp 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā Dhp-a iv.56) Dhs 1059 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa-vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs-a 365, cp. Dhs translation 279). Frequently as adjective (—˚or in combination with sa˚; and an˚;), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚) SN i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ AN iii.258 AN iii.433 AN iv.60f.; an˚; without consideration regardless, indifferent SN v.164 AN iii.252 AN iii.347 AN iii.434 Snp 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo) Ja i.9 cp. anapekkhin apekkhavant; also B. Sanskrit avekṣatā
    3. Sanskrit apekṣā, from apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha
    Apekkhita
    1. taken care of, looked after, considered Ja vi.142 Ja vi.149 (= olokita Commentary )
    past participle of apekkhati
    Apekkhin
    adjective
    1. considering, regarding, expecting looking for; usually negative an˚; indifferent (against) = locative SN i.16 SN i.77 SN ii.281 SN iii.19 SN iii.87 Snp 166 (kāmesu), 823 (identical), 857 Dhp 346 cp. apekkhavant
    2. Sanskrit apekṣin, but B. Sanskrit avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; from apa + īkṣ
    Apeta
    adjective
    1. gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instrumental, ablative or ˚-) Dhp 9 (damasaccena) Pv-a 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚-in sense of “without,-less”, e.g. apeta-kaddama free from mud stainless Dhp 95 ˚vattha without dress Ja v.16 ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dhp 41 Thag 2, 468 ˚viññāṇattaṁ senselessness, lack of feeling Pv-a 63
    past participle of apeti
    Apetatta
    neuter
    1. absence (of) Pv-a 92
    abstract to apeta
    Apeti
    1. to go away, to disappear DN i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi) Ja i.292 Snp 1143 (= n’apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). past participle apeta (q.v.)
    2. apa + i, cp. Latin abeo, Gothic af-iddja
    Apetteyyatā
    feminine
    1. in combination with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother DN iii.70 (cp. Dhp 332 & Dhp-a; iv.34)
    a + petteyyatā, abstract from *paitṛya fatherly
    Apeyya
    adjective
    1. not to be drunk, not drinkable Ja vi.205 (sāgara)
    a + peyya, gerundive of
    Apesiya
    neuter
    1. a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Buddhaghosa explains on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka-sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataṁ dvāra-tthakanakaṁ)
    ? of uncertain origin
    Apesiyamāna
    adjective
    1. not being in service Vin ii.177
    ppr. from a + peseti (q.v.)
    App'
    1. in app’ekacce etc ‣See api
    Appa
    adjective
    1. small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of “very little = (next to) nothing” (so in most compounds.); thus explained at Vv-a 334 as equivalent to a negative participle ‣See appodaka DN i.61 (opposite mahant, DN-a i.170 parittaka) Snp 713 Snp 775 Snp 805 Snp 896 (= appaka, omaka thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306) Dhp 174 Ja i.262 Pug 39
    • nt. appaṁ a little, a small portion, a trifle;
    • plural appāni small things, trifles AN ii.26 = Iti 102 AN ii.138 Dhp 20 (= thokaṁ eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi Dhp-a i.158), 224 (˚smiṁ yācito asked for little), 259
    1. ˚aggha of little value (opposite mahaggha priceless) Ja i.9 Pug 33 Dhp-a iv.184
    • ˚assāda Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dhp 186 alpa + ā + svād
      1. of little taste or enjoyment affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā Vin ii.25 = MN i.130 = AN iii.97 = Nd2 71 Snp 61 Dhp 186 (= supina-sadisatāya paritta-sukha Dhp-a iii.240); Thag 2 358 (= Thag-a 244) Ja ii.313 Vism 124
      2. ˚ātaṅka little (or no illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combined) [Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit alpātanka & alpātankatā DN i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166 AN iii.65 AN iii.103 Mil 14
      • ˚ābādha same as appātanka (q.v.) DN i.204 DN iii.166 DN iii.237 MN ii.125 AN i.25 AN ii.88 AN iii.30 AN iii.65f. 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā identical [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit alpābādhatā good health AN i.38
      • ˚āyuka short lived DN i.18 Pv-a 103 also as ˚āyukin Vv 416
      • ˚āhāra taking little or no food, fasting MN ii.5 Snp 165 (= ekāsana-bhojitāya ca parimita-bhojitāya ca Snp-a 207), also as ˚āhāratā MN i.245 MN ii.5
      • ˚odaka having little or no water, dry Snp 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50) Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha explained at Vv-a 334 as “appa-saddo h’ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya”) Ja i.70 Dhp-a iv.12
      • ˚kasira in instrumental ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty DN i.251 SN v.51 Thag 1, 16
      • ˚kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Snp 144 (= appaṁ kiccaṁ assā ti Kp-a 241)
      • ˚gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Mil 252 (opposite sugandha)
      • ˚ṭṭha “standing in little” i.e. connected with little trouble DN i.143 AN i.169
      • ˚thāmaka having little or no strength, weak SN iv.206
      • ˚dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Snp 1134 ‣See Nd2 69 explained by paritta-pañña Snp-a 605
      • ˚nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. Vv-a 334 as quoted above under ˚odaka). AN v.15 (+ appasadda) Snp 338 Nd1 377 Mil 371
      • ˚pañña, of little wisdom Ja ii.166 Ja iii.223 263
      • ˚puñña of little merit MN ii.5
      • ˚puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107
      • ˚phalatā bringing little fruit Pv-a 139
      • ˚bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843
      • ˚bhoga having little wealth, i.e. poor, indigent Snp 114 (= sannicitānaṁ ca bhogānaṁ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato Snp-a 173)
      • ˚maññati to consider as small, to underrate ‣See separately
      • ˚matta little, slight, mean (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2 AN iii.275 Ja i.242 also meaning “contented with little (of the bhikkhu) Iti 103 = AN ii.27
      • feminine ˚ā trifle, smallness însignificance DN i.91 DN-a i.55
      • ˚mattaka small, insignificant trifling, neuter a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. AN iii.275 & Vin iv.38 155) DN i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaṁ DN-a i.55) Ja i.167 Ja iii.12 (= aṇu) Pv-a 262
      • ˚middha “little slothful”, i.e. diligent, alert Mil 412
      • ˚rajakkha having little or no obtuseness DN ii.37 MN i.169 Sdhp 519
      • ˚ssaka having little of one’s own, possessing little AN i.261 AN ii.203
      • ˚sattha having few or no companious lonely, alone Dhp 123
      • ˚sadda free from noise quiet MN ii.2 MN ii.23 MN ii.30 AN v.15 Snp 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377) Pug 35 Mil 371
      • ˚siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous Ja iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula Commentary ); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu-antarāyiko) -ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated DN i.93 (opposite bahussuta); iii.252, 282 SN iv.242 Iti 59 Dhp 152 Pug 20 62 Dhs 1327
      • ˚harita having little or no grass SN i.169 Snp p. 15 (= paritta-harita-tiṇa Snp-a 154)
      Vedic alpa, cp. Lithuanian alpnas weak alpstù to faint
    Appaka
    adjective
    1. little, small, trifling; plural few.
    2. neuter ˚ṁ
    3. adverb a little DN ii.4 AN v.232f. 253 sq. Snp 909 (opposite bahu) Dhp 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū Dhp-a ii.160) Pv i.102 (= paritta Pv-a 48); ii.939 Pug 62 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 60 (= paritta).
    4. feminine appikā Ja i.228

      • instrumental appakena by little, i.e. easily DN-a i.256
      • ˚anappaka not little, i.e. much, considerable, great;
      • plural many SN iv.46 Dhp 144 Pv i.117 (= bahū Pv-a 58) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 25 (read anappake pi for Text ˚appakeci; so also Kp-a 208)
      appa + ka
    Appakāra
    adjective
    1. not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed Ja v.69 (= sarīrappakāra-rahita dussaṇṭhāna Commentary ). cp. apākatika
    a + pakāra
    Appakiṇṇa
    1. little or not crowded, not overheaped. AN v.15 (Commentary anākiṇṇa)
    appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa
    Appagabbha
    adjective
    1. unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest SN ii.198 = Mil 389 Snp 144 Snp 852 (cp Nd1 228 & Kp-a 232) Dhp 245
    a + pagabbha
    Appaccaya
    1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness DN i.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ DN-a i.52); iii.159 MN i.442 AN i.79 AN i.124 AN i.187 AN ii.203 iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193 Ja ii.277 Snp p. 92 (kapa dosa + appacaya) Vv 8331 (= domanassaṁ Vv-a 343) Snp-a 423 (= appatītaṁ domanassaṁ)
    2. adjective unconditioned Dhs 1084 1437
    a + paccaya
    Appaṭi˚
    ;
    1. ‣See in general under paṭi˚;
    a + paṭi˚
    Appaṭikārika
    adjective
    1. “not providing against”, i.e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive Ja v.418 (spelling here & in Commentary appati˚)
    a + paṭikārika
    Appaṭikopeti
    1. not to disturb, shake or break (figuratively) Ja v.173 (uposathaṁ)
    a + paṭikopeti
    Appaṭikkhippa
    adjective
    1. not to be refused Ja ii.370 Appatigandhika & iya;
    a + paṭikkhippa, gerundive of paṭikkhipati
    Appaṭigandhika
    ˚iya;
    adjective
    1. not smelling disagreeable, i.e. with beautiful smell, scented odorous Ja v.405 (˚ika, but Commentary ˚iya; explained by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226
    a + paṭi + gandha + ika
    Appaṭigha
    adjective
    1. (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Snp 42 ‣See explained at Nd2 239 Snp-a 88 explains “katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a.”
    • (b) psychol. technical term applied to rūpa not reacting or impinging (opposite sappaṭigha) DN iii.217 Dhs 660 756, 1090, 1443
    a + paṭigha
    Appaṭicchavi
    adjective at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sampatitacchavi (variant reading ).
    Appaṭibhāga
    adjective
    1. not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara)
    a + paṭibhāga
    Appaṭibhāṇa
    adjective
    1. not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162 AN iii.57
    • ˚ṁ karoti to intimidate, bewilder Ja v.238 Ja v.369
    a + paṭibhāṇa
    Appaṭima
    adjective
    1. matchless, incomparable, invaluable Thag 1, 614 Mil 239
    a + paṭima from preposition paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna from prati +
    Appaṭivattiya
    adjective
    1. (a) not to be rolled back Snp 554 (of dhammacakka may however be taken in meaning of b.)
    • (b) irresistable Ja ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as variant reading at Ja ii.245 otherwise as t
    a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, gerundive or vṛt
    Appaṭivāṇa
    neuter
    1. non-obstruction, not hindering not opposing or contradicting AN i.50 AN iii.41 AN v.93f. adjective Ja i.326
    a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa-form of vṛ; , cp. Sanskrit prativāraṇa
    Appaṭivāṇitā
    feminine
    1. not being hindered, non-obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiṁ” (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs translation 358) AN i.50 95 = DN iii.214 = Dhs 1367
    abstract from (ap)paṭivāṇa
    Appaṭivāṇī
    feminine

    non-hindrance, non-restriction, free action impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī SN ii.132 SN v.440 AN ii.93 195; iii.307 sq.; iv.320; Nd2 under chanda Commentary cp. similarly Divy 654 almost identical with appaṭivāṇitā, only used in different phrase

    Appaṭivāṇīya
    adjective
    1. not to be obstructed irresistible SN i.212 (applied to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rhys Davids Kindred S. p. 274 translates. “that source from whence there is no turning back”), Thag 2, 55
    gerundive of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; MN Vastu iii.343
    Appaṭividdha
    adjective
    1. “not shot through” i.e. unhurt Ja vi.446
    a + paṭi + viddha
    Appaṭivibhatta
    1. (˚bhogin) adjective

      1. (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative ‣See Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Buddhaghosa’s explanation) AN iii289 Mil 373 cp. Miln translation ii.292
      a + paṭi + vibhatta
    Appaṭivekkhiya
    1. not observing or noticing Ja iv.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā Commentary )
    absolutive of a + paṭi + avekkhati
    Appaṭisaṅkhā
    feminine
    1. want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346
    a + paṭisankhā
    Appaṭisandhika
    1. (and ˚iya adjective

      1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti Pv-a 66) = Ja iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuṁ na sakkā Commentary ). 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i.e. to rebirth Ja v.100 (˚bhāva)
      2. a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)
    Appaṭisama
    adjective
    1. not having it’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94 (Baddha-sirī)
    a + paṭi = sama; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit apratisama Mvu i.104
    Appaṭissavatā
    feminine
    1. want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325
    a + paṭissavatā
    Appaṇihita
    adjective
    1. aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as neuter aimlessness combined with animittaṁ Vin iii.92 93 = iv.25 Dhs 351 508, 556 ‣See on term Compendium 67; Dhs translation 93, 143 cp. paṇihita
    2. a + paṇihita
    Appatiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. not standing still SN i.1
    2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Snp 173
    a + patiṭṭha
    Appatissa
    1. (& appaṭissa) adjective

      1. not docile, rebellious, always in combination with agārava AN ii.20 AN iii.7f. 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa-vāsa an unruly state anarchy Ja ii.352 ‣See also paṭissā
      a + paṭi + ; śru
    Appatīta
    adjective
    1. dissatisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) Ja v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with variant reading as appatika = without husband, Commentary explains assāmika), 155 (cp Commentary on p. 156) DN-a i.52 Snp-a 423
    a + patīta, of prati + i, Sanskrit pratīta
    Appaduṭṭha
    adjective
    1. not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Snp 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. Snp-a 478) Dhp 137 (= niraparādha Dhp-a iii.70)
    a + paduṭṭha
    Appadhaṁsa
    adjective
    1. not to be destroyed Ja iv.344 (variant reading duppadhaṁsa)
    = appadhaṁsiya, Sanskrit apradhvaṁsya
    Appadhaṁsika
    1. (& ˚iya) adjective

      1. not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible DN iii.175 (˚ika, variant reading ˚iya) Ja iii.159 (˚iya) Vv-a 208 (˚iya) Pv-a 117 (˚iya). cp. appadhaṁsa
      gerundive of a + padhaṁseti
    Appadhaṁsita
    adjective
    1. not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229
    past participle of a + padhaṁseti
    Appanā
    feminine [cp. Sanskrit arpaṇa, abstract from appeti = arpayati from of ; , to fix, turn, direct one’s mind ‣See appeti application (of mind), ecstasy, fixing of thought on an object conception (as psychol. technical term) Ja ii.61 (˚patta) Mil 62 (of vitakka) Dhs 7 21, 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi) Dhs-a 55 142 (defined by Buddhaghosa as “ekaggaṁ cittaṁ ārammaṇe appeti”), 214 (˚jhāna) ‣See on term Compendium
    • past participle 56 sq., 68 129, 215; Dhs translation xxviii, 10, 53, 82, 347.

    Appabhoti
    1. (Appahoti) ‣See pahoti
    Appamaññati
    1. to think little of, to underrate, despise Dhp 121 (= avajānāti Dhp-a iii.16 variant reading avapamaññati)
    appa + maññati
    Appamaññā
    feminine
    1. boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. technical term applied in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz mettā karuṁā muditā upekkhā i.e. love, pity, sympathy desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at DN iii.223 (q. v for detailed reference as to various passages); Ps i.84 Vb 272f. Dhs-a 195 By itself at Snp 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. Snp-a 417) ‣See for further explanationDhs translation p. 66 and mettā
    a + pamaññā, abstract from pamāṇa = Sanskrit *pramānya
    Appamatta1
    adjective
    1. ‣See appa
    appa + matta
    Appamatta2
    adjective
    1. not negligent, i.e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert zealous MN i.391–⁠92 SN i.4 Snp 223 (cp. Kp-a 169), 507 779 (cp. Nd1 59) Dhp 22 (cp. Dhp-a i.229) Thag 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Thag AN 239)
    a + pamatta, past participle of pamadati
    Appamāda
    1. thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal DN i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DN-a i.104); iii.30 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272 MN i.477 (˚phala) SN i.25 SN i.86 SN i.158 SN i.214 SN ii.29, 132; iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308 350 AN i.16 AN i.50 (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ṁ garu-karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu) Snp 184 Snp 264 Snp 334 (= sati-avippavāsa-sankhāta a. Snp-a 339) Iti 16 (˚ṁ pasaṁsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā) 74 (˚vihārin) Dhp 57 (˚vihārin, cp. Dhp-a i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata Dhp-a iv.26); Dāvs ii.35; Kp-a 142
    a + pamāda
    Appamāṇa
    1. (frequently spelled appamāna adjective

      1. “without measure”, immeasurable, endless, boundless unlimited, unrestricted all-permeating SN iv.186 (˚cetaso) AN ii.73 AN v.63 Snp 507 (mettaṁ cittaṁ bhāvayaṁ appāmāṇaṁ = anavasesa-pharaṇena Snp-a 417 cp. appamaññā) Iti 21 (mettā), 78 Ja ii.61 Ps ii.126 sq. Vb 16 24 49, 62, 326 sq. Dhs 182 1021, 1024, 1405 Dhs-a 45 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara) ‣See also on term Dhs translation 60
      2. “without difference”, irrelevant, in general (in Commentary style) Ja i.165 Ja ii.323
      a + pamāṇa
    Appameyya
    adjective
    1. immeasurable, infinite, boundless MN i.386 SN v.400 AN i.266 Thag 1, 1089 (an˚) Pug 35 Mil 331 Sdhp 338
    a + pameyya = Sanskrit aprameya, gerundive of a + pra +
    Appavattā
    feminine
    1. the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non-continuance (of all that Thag 1, 767 Mil 326
    a + pavattā
    Appasāda
    1. ‣See pasāda
    Appassāda
    1. ‣See appa
    Appahīna
    adjective
    1. not given up, not renounced MN i.386 Iti 56 57 Nd2 70 D1 Pug 12 18
    a + pahīna, past participle of pahāyati
    Appāṇaka
    adjective

    breathless, i.e. (1) holding one’s breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) MN i.243 Ja i.67 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; MN Vastu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?

    • not holding anything breathing, i.e. inanimate, lifeless not containing life Snp p. 15 (of water)
    • a + pāṇa + ka
    Appikā
    feminine of appaka.
    Appiccha
    adjective
    1. desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented unpretentious SN i.63 SN i.65 AN iii.432 AN iv.2 AN iv.218f. 229 v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167 Snp 628 Snp 707 Dhp 404 Pv iv.73 Pug 70
    appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā
    Appicchatā
    feminine
    1. contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21 DN iii.115 MN i.13 SN ii.202 SN ii.208f. AN i.12 AN i.16f.; iii.219 sq., 448 iv.218, 280 (opposite mahicchatā) Mil 242 Snp-a 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya-dhutanga-pariyatti-adhigama-vasena) Pv-a 73 As one of the 5 dhutanga-dhammā at Vism 81
    abstract from preceding
    Appita
    adjective
    1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Mil 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta)
    2. brought to, put to, fixed on Ja vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at Ja v.36 & Vism 303.; Appiya & Appiyata
    past participle of appeti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit arpita, e.g. prītyarpitaṁ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169
    Appiya
    Appiyatā
    1. ‣See piya etc
    Appekadā
    • adverb ‣See api 2 ax.

    Appeti
    1. (*er) to move forward, rush on run into (of river) Vin ii.238 Mil 70
    2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (literally & figuratively) Vin ii.136 137 Ja iii.34 (nimba-sūlasmiṁ to impale, Commentary āvuṇāti) vi.17 (Text sūlasmiṁ acceti, variant readings abbeti = appeti & upeti Commentary āvuṇati) Mil 62 (dāruṁ sandhismiṁ) Vv-a 110 (saññāṇaṁ). cp. Trenckner, Note. 64 note 19, who defends reading abbeti at Text passages
    Vedic arpayati, causative of ; , ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati; 2), Indogermanic *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sanskrit ara spoke of a wheel; Latin arma = English arms (i.e. weapon) artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections ‣See aṇṇava
    Appesakkha
    adjective
    1. of little power, weak, impotent SN ii.229 Mil 65 Sdhp 89
    accusative to Childers = Sanskrit *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter from ā + khyā “being called lord of little”; Trenckner on Mil 65 ‣See p. 422 says: “appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally explained appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sanskrit sākhya), the latter an imitation of it” Thus the etymology would be “having little association or friendship” and resemble the term appasattha. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e.g. at Avs; ii.153; Divy 243
    Appoti
    1. to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etymology of āpo)
    the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, from āp
    Appodaka
    1. ‣See appa
    Appossukka
    adjective
    1. unconcerned, living at ease, careless, “not bothering”, keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188 MN iii.175 MN iii.176 SN i.202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta saṅkasāya “living at ease, given to silence, resigned” Mrs Rhys Davids Dhs translation 258 ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909, 22); ii.177 (identical); iv.178 (identical) Thag 2, 457 (= nirussukka Thag-a 282) Snp 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72) Dhp 330 (= nirālaya Dhp-a iv.31) Ja i.197 Ja iv.71 Mil 371 (a tiṭṭhati to keep still) DN-a i.264
    appa + ussuka, Sanskrit alpotsuka, e.g. Lal. v.509; Divy 41 Divy 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as derived from ussuka
    Appossukkatā
    feminine
    1. inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5 DN ii.36 Mil 232 Dhp-a ii.15
    abstract from preceding
    Apphuta
    (& apphuṭa)
    1. untouched, unpervaded not penetrated. DN i.74 = MN i.276 (pītisukhena)
    Sanskrit *ā-sphṛta for a-sphārita past participle of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati
    Apphoṭā
    feminine
    1. name of a kind of Jasmine Ja vi.336
    from appoṭeti to blossom
    Apphoṭita
    1. having snapped one’s fingers or clapped one’s hands Ja ii.311 (˚kāle)
    past participle of apphoṭeti
    Apphoṭeti
    1. to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Mil 13 Mil 20 past participle apphoṭita
    2. ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ
    Aphusa
    1. not to be touched Mil 157 (translation unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks “aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me”)
    Sanskrit *aspṛśya, a + gerundive of phusati to touch
    Aphegguka
    adjective
    1. not weak, i.e. strong Ja iii.318
    a + pheggu + ka
    Abaddha
    1. not tied, unbound, unfettered Snp 39 (variant reading and Nd2 abandha; expld- by rajju-bandhan’ādisu yena kenaci abaddha Snp-a 83)
    a + baddha
    Abandha
    1. (n adjective)
      1. not tied to, not a follower or victim of Iti 56 (mārassa; variant reading abaddha)
      a + bandha
    Abandhana
    adjective
    1. without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Snp 948 cp. Nd1 433
    a + bandhana
    Ababa
    1. . Name of a certain Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at. AN v.173 = Snp p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Avs i.4, 10 & ‣See for further explanation of term Snp-a 476f.
    of uncertain origin, probably onomatopoetic
    Abala
    adjective
    1. not strong, weak, feeble Snp 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73) Dhp 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa Dhp-a i.262 opposite sīghassa a quick horse)
    a + bala
    Abbaje
    1. T. reading at AN ii.39 evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp pabbajati), but is preferably with variant reading SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in preceding line)
    Abbaṇa
    adjective
    1. without wounds Dhp 124
    a + vaṇa, Sanskrit avraṇa
    Abbata
    1. (n adjective)
      1. (a) neuter that which is not “vata” i.e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Snp 839 (asīlata +) Nd1 188 (variant reading SS abhabbata; explained again as a-vatta). Snp-a 545 (= dhutangavataṁ vinā

        • (b)
        • adjective one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dhp 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita Dhp-a iii.391 variant readings k. adhūta & abhūta; B abbhuta, Commentary abbuta)
        a + vata, Sanskrit avrata
    Abbaya
    1. in uday˚ at Mil 393 stands for avyaya
    Abbahati
    (& abbuhati)
    1. to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imperative pres. abbaha Thag 1, 404 Ja ii.95 (Burmese variant appuha = abbuha; Commentary explains by uddharatha).
    2. aorist abbahi Ja v.198 (Burmese variant abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) Ja iii.390 (Burmese variant dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads Text abbūḷha, but Pv-a 41 explains nīhari) = Dhp-a i.30 (variant readings sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaṁ) = Vv 839 (Text abbuḷhi; Burmese variant abbuḷhaṁ, SS avyahi Vv-a 327 explains as uddhari), & abbuhi AN iii.55 (variant reading abbahi, C abbahī ti nīhari) ‣See also variant readings under abbahi

      • ger abbuyha Snp 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l SS abbuyhitvā Snp-a 567 reads avyuyha & explains by uddharitvā) SN i.121 (taṇhaṁ); iii.26 (identical; but spelt abbhuyha).
      • past participle abbuḷha (q.v.)
      • causative abbāheti Sanskrit ābarhayati
      1. to pull out, drag out Ja iv.364 (satthaṁ abbāhayanti; variant reading abbhā˚) Dhp-a ii.249 (asiṁ). absolutive abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii.201 (bhisa-muḷālaṁ) with Burmese variant aggahetvā SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (variant readings aggahitvā abbāhitvā).
      2. past participle ; abbūḷhita (q.v.)
      3. the first more frequently for pres., the second often in aorist forms; Sanskrit ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp bṛḍha ‣See abbūḷha
    Abbāhana
    neuter
    1. pulling out (of a sting) Dhp-a iii.404 (sic. Text; variant reading abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana glosses Commentary aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana) ‣See also; abbuḷhana and abbhāhana
    abstract from abbahati
    Abbuda
    neuter [etymology unknown, originally meaning “swelling”, the Sanskrit form arbuda seems to be a translation of Pali abbuda 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2; nd months after conception the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd1 120 Mil 40 Vism 236.
    • a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a)

  • a very high numeral, applied exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adjective of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the “vast-period hell, cp. nirabbuda). SN i.149 = AN ii.3 (chattiṁsati pañca ca abbudāni) SN i.152 =. AN v.173 = Snp p. 126 (cp. Snp-a 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka-nirayo n’atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda-gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto ‣See also Kindred Sayings p. 190) Ja iii.360 (sataṁ ninnahuta-sahassānaṁ ekaṁ abbudaṁ).

    • a term used for “hell” in the riddle SN i.43 (kiṁsu lokasmiṁ abhudaṁ “who are they who make a hell on earth” Mrs Rhys Davids The answer is “thieves”; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The Commentary has vināsa-karaṇaṁ
  • Abbuḷhati
    1. (?) & Abbuhati ‣See abbahati
    Abbuḷhana
    neuter
    1. the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā-sallassa abbuḷhanaṁ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, variant reading SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, variant reading SS abbahana, Burmese manuscripts abbuhana). cp. abbāhana
    from abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)
    Abbūḷha
    adjective
    1. drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), figuratively removed destroyed. Most frequently in combination˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out DN ii.283 (variant reading SS asammūḷha) Snp 593 Snp 779 (= abbūḷhita-salla Nd1 59; rāgâdi-sallānaṁ abbūḷhattā a. Snp-a 518) Ja iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = Dhp-a i.30
    • In other connection: MN i.139 = AN iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā ‣See esikā) Thag 1, 321 Kp-a 153 (˚soka)
    Sanskrit ābṛḍha, past participle of a + bṛh1 ‣See abbahati
    Abbūḷhatta
    neuter
    1. pulling out, removal, destroying Snp-a 518
    abstract of abbūḷha
    Abbūḷhita
    (& abbūhitta at Ja iii.541)
    1. pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbūḷhita-sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha) Ja iii.541 (uncertain reading; Burmese variant appahita, SS abyūhita; Commentary explains pupphakaṁ ṭhapitaṁ appaggharakaṁ kataṁ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?)
    past participle of abbāheti causative of abbāhati
    Abbeti
    1. at Ja iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti
    Trenckner, Notes 64 note 19
    Abbokiṇṇa
    1. filled MN i.387 (paripuṇṇa +) Dhp-a iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.)
    2. seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna
      1. uninterrupted constant, as ˚ṁ adverb in combination with satataṁ samitaṁ AN iv.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (variant reading abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu translation 231 note 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?) Vb 320
      2. doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Buddhaghosa on Pārāj. iii.1, 3)
      = abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa
    Abbocchinna
    1. ‣See abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna
    Abbohārika
    adjective
    1. not of legal or conventional status, i.e
    • (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91 112 (‣ See also Kvu translation 361 note 4)
    • (b) uncommon, extraordinary Ja iii.309 (Burmese variant abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective)
    a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati
    Abbha
    neuter
    1. . A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass AN ii.53 Vin ii.295 = Mil 273 in list of to things that obscure moon-& sunshine, viz.; abbhaṁ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134 SN i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder-cloud) Ja vi.581 (abbhaṁ rajo acchādesi) Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla-megha Pv-a 251). As feminine abbhā at Dhs 617 & Dhs-a 317 (used in sense of adjective “dull” Dhs-a explains by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.

      1. ˚kūṭa the point or summit of a storm-cloud Thag 1 1064 Ja vi.249 Ja vi.250 Vv 11 (= valāhaka-sikhara Vv-a 12) -ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud Iti 64 Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348)
      2. ˚paṭala a mass of clouds Dhs-a 239
      • ˚mutta free from clouds Snp 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dhp 382)
      • ˚saṁvilāpa thundering SN iv.289
      Vedic abhra neuter & later Sanskrit abhra
    2. masculine “dark cloud”; Indogermanic *m̊bhro, cp. Latin imber rain; also Sanskrit ambha water, Old Irish ambu water
    Abbhakkhāti
    1. to speak against to accuse, slander DN i.161 = AN i.161 (an-abbhakkhātu-kāma); iv.182 (identical) Ja iv.377 cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati
    abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sanskrit ākhyāti
    Abbhakkhāna
    neuter
    1. accusation, slander, calumny DN iii.248 DN iii.250 MN i.130 MN iii.207 AN iii.290f. Dhp 139 (cp. Dhp-a iii.70)
    from abbhakkhāti
    Abbhacchādita
    1. covered (with) Thag 1, 1068
    past participle of abhi + ā + chādeti
    Abbhañjati
    1. to anoint; to oil, to lubricate MN i.343 (sappi-telena) SN iv.177 Pug 56 Dhp-a iii.311 Vv-a 68 (sata-pāka-telena). causative abbhañjeti same Ja i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata-pāka-telena ˚ayiṁsu);
    2. causative ii.abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint Ja iii.372
    3. abhi + añj
    Abbhañjana
    neuter
    1. anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205 Vin iii.79 Mil 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264 Vv-a 295
    from abbhañjati
    Abbhatika
    adjective
    1. brought (to), procured, got, Ja vi.291
    ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ
    Abbhatikkanta
    1. one who has thoroughly, left behind Ja v.376
    past participle of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta
    Abbhatīta
    1. emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by SN ii.183 (+ atikkanta); neuter ˚ṁ what is gone or over the past Ja iii.169
    2. passed away, dead MN i.465 SN iv.398 Thag 1, 242 1035
    3. transgressed, overstepped neglected Ja iii.541 (saṁyama).

      past participle of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta
    Abbhattha
    neuter
    1. = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaṁ gacchati “to go towards home”, i.e. setting; figuratively to disappear, vanish MN i.115 MN i.119 MN iii.25 AN iv.32 Mil 305 past participle abhhattaṅgata “set”, gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata +) Kvu 576
    2. abhi + attha2 in accusative abhi + atthaṁ, abhi in function of “towards” = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaṁ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3
    Abbhatthatā
    feminine
    1. “going towards setting”, disappearance, death Ja v.469
    abstract from abbhatta
    Abbhanumodati
    1. to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196 DN i.143 DN i.190 SN iv.224 Mil 29 Mil 210 Dhp-a iv.102 (variant reading ˚ānu˚)
    abhi + anu + modati
    Abbhanumodana
    neuter (& ˚ā
    • feminine )

      1. being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DN-a; i.227 Vv-a 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218
      from abbhanumodati
    Abbhantara
    adjective
    1. = antara, i.e. internal, inner, being within or between; neuter ˚ṁ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚-) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven) AN iv.16 (opposite bāhira) Dhp 394 (identical) Thag 1, 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside) Ja iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango) Mil 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir-abbhantara dhana) Dhp-a ii.74 (adjective c. genitive being among; variant reading abbhantare). Cases used
    2. adverb ially: instrumental abbhantarena in the meantime in between Dhp-a ii.59
    3. locative abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. genitive or—˚) Ja i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaṁ) Dhp-a ii.64 (variant reading antare), 92 (sattavass˚) Pv-a 48 (= anto)
    4. abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with-in, cp. abhi i.1 a
    Abbhantarika
    adjective-noun
    1. intimate friend, confidant, “chum” Ja i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 (“insider”, opposite bāhiraka)
    from abbhantara, cp. Sanskrit abhyantara in same meaning
    Abbhantarima
    adjective
    1. internal, inner (opposite bāhirima Vin iii.149 Ja v.38
    superl. formation from abbhantara in contrasting function
    Abbhākuṭika
    adjective
    1. not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika) DN i.116 cp. DN-a i.287 Dhp-a iv.8 (as variant reading Text has abbhokuṭika)
    a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sanskrit bhrakuṭi frown
    Abbhāgata
    1. having arrived or come; masculine a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi-āgata, āgantuka Vv-a 24)
    2. abhi + ā + gata
    Abbhāgamana
    neuter
    1. coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221
    abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sanskrit abhyāgama
    Abbhāghāta
    1. slaughtering-place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta)
    abhi + āghāta
    Abbhācikkhati
    1. to accuse, slander, calumniate DN i.161 DN iii.248 DN iii.250 MN i.130 MN i.368 MN i.482 iii.207 AN i.161
    Intens. of abbhākkhāti
    Abbhāna
    neuter
    1. coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (identical), 143 327; ii.33, 40, 162 AN i.99
    • cp. abbheti
    abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)
    Abbhāmatta
    adjective
    1. monstrous dreadful, enormous, “of the size of a large cloud (thus Commentary on SN i.205 & Ja iii.309) SN i.205 = Thag 1, 652 (variant reading abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = Ja iii.309 (variant reading ˚mutta)
    abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Commentary ; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta abbhuṁ, and ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. under dubius
    Abbhāhata
    1. struck, attacked, afflicted SN i.40 (maccunā) Thag 1, 448 Snp 581 Ja vi.26 440; Vism 31, 232 DN-a i.140 147 Dhp-a iv.25
    abhi + ā + hata, past participle of han
    Abbhāhana
    neuter
    1. in udaka˚; the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Buddhaghosa on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka-vāhana on p. 122)
    either = abbāhana or āvāhana
    Abbhita
    1. come back, rehabilitated, reinstated Vin iii.186 = iv.242 (an˚)
    2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of “called” (an˚ uncalled), where id p. at Ja iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Thag 2, 129 ayācita
    past participle of abbheti
    Abbhu
    1. unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense Ja v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi Commentary )
    a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and Pali abbhuṁ ‣See also abbhāmatta
    Abbhuṁ
    (interj.)
    1. alas terrible, dreadful, awful (exclamation of fright & shock) Vin ii.115 (Buddhaghosa explains as “utrāsa-vacanam-etaṁ”) MN i.448 ‣See also abbhu & abbhuta;
    Vedic abhvaṁ, neuter of abhva ‣See explained under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 201: abbhuṁ = ā + bhuk; cp. also abbhuta
    Abbhukkiraṇa
    neuter
    1. drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa-sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet)
    abhi + ud + kṛ
    Abbhukkirati
    1. to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) DN ii.172 (cakkaratanaṁ; neither with Morris JP T S. 1886, 131 “give up”, nor with translation of Ja ii.311 “roll along”) Ja v.390 Pv-a 75 cp. abbhokkirati
    abhi + ud + kirati
    Abbhuggacchati
    1. to go forth, go out, rise into DN i.112 DN i.127 AN iii.252 (kitti-saddo a.) Pug 36 absolutive ˚gantvā Ja i.88 (ākāsaṁ), 202 Dhp-a iv.198
    2. aorist ˚gañchi MN i.126 (kittisaddo) Ja i.93
    3. past participle abbhuggata
    4. abhi + ud + gacchati
    Abbhuggata
    1. gone forth, gone out, risen DN i.88 (kitti-saddo a., cp. Dhp-a i.146: sadevakaṁ lokaṁ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Snp p. 103 (kittisaddo)
    past participle of abbhuggacchati
    Abbhuggamana
    neuter-adjective
    1. going out over, rising over (c. accusative ) Pv-a 65 (candaṁ nabhaṁ abbhuggamanaṁ; so read for Text abbhuggamānaṁ)
    2. from abbhuggacchati
    Abbhujjalana
    neuter
    1. breathing out fire, i.e. carrying fire in one’s month (by means of a charm) DN i.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi-jala-nīharaṇaṁ DN-a i.97)
    abhi + ud + jalana, from jval
    Abbhuṭṭhāti
    (˚ṭṭhahati)
    1. to get up to, proceed to, DN i.105 (cankamaṁ)
    abhi + ud + sthā
    Abbhuṇṇata
    1. standing up, held up, erect Ja v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; variant reading abbhantara, is reading correct?)
    past participle of abbhunnamati
    Abbhuṇha
    adjective
    1. (a) very hot Dhp-a ii.87 (variant reading accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) Dhp-a ii.67
    ahhi + uṇha
    Abbhuta1

    adjective neuter

    1. terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhay; ’āvahass’adhivacanaṁ DN-a i.43 & Vv-a 329) & explained as “something that is not” or “has not been before”, viz abhūtaṁ Thag-a 233 abhūta-pubbatāya abbhutaṁ Vv-a 191 329; abhūta-pubbaṁ DN-a i.43
    1. -1. adjective wonderful marvellous etc. Snp 681 (kiṁ ˚ṁ, combined with lomahaṁsana) Ja iv.355 (identical) Thag 2, 316 (abbhutaṁ vata vācaṁ bhāsasi = acchariyaṁ Thag-a 233) Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345 Sdhp 496
    2. neuter the wonderful, a wonder, marvel SN iv.371 also in ˚dhamma ‣See Cpd.. Very frequently in combination with acchariyaṁ and a participle of exclamation, viz acchariyaṁ bho abbhutaṁ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying DN i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho DN i.60 acch. bhante abbh. AN ii.50 aho acch. aho abbh. Ja i.88 acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316
    3. Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things MN iii.118 MN iii.125 AN ii.130 AN iv.198 Mil 8 and in acchariya-abbhutacitta-jāta dumbfounded & surprised Ja i.88 Dhp-a iv.52 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 50
      1. ˚dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2 Vin iii.8 MN i.133 AN ii.103 AN iii.86 AN iii.177 Pug 43 Mil 344 Pv-a 2 etc
      * Sanskrit adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta ‣See below) serious difficulties as to etymology The most probable solution is that Pali abbhuta is a secondary adjective formation from abbhuṁ which in itself is
    4. neuter of abbha = Vedic abhva ‣See etymology under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuṁ & Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 201. In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i.e. striking, abnormal, gruesome horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + ; bhū (“unreal?”) is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etymology of the Pāli Commentators ‣See below ‣See also acchariya
    Abbhuta2
    neuter
    1. a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaṁ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand i.e. kahāpaṇa’s or pieces of money) Vin iii.138 Vin iv.5 Ja i.191 Ja v.427 Ja vi.192 Pv-a 151 & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaṁ hotu Ja vi.193
    = abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the “unknown”
    Abbhudāharati
    1. to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) MN ii.132
    abhi + ud + ā + harati
    Abbhudīreti
    1. to raise the voice, to utter Thag 2, 402 DN-a i.61 Sdhp 514
    abhi + ud + īreti
    Abbhudeti
    1. to go out over, to rise AN ii.50 AN ii.51 (opposite atthaṁ eti, of the sun)
    • ppr. abbhuddayaṁ Vv 6417 (= abhi-uggacchanto Vv-a 280 abbhusayaṁ ti pi pāṭho)
    abhi + ud + eti
    Abbhuddhunāti
    1. to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaṁ uddhunāti Vv-a 278)
    abhi + ud + dhunāti
    Abbhunnadita
    1. resounding, resonant Thag 1, 1065)
    past participle of abhi + ud + nadati
    Abbhunnamati
    1. to, spring up, burst forth DN ii.164 past participle abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q.v.;
    2. causative abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up erect DN i.120 (kāyaṁ one’s body) AN ii.245 (identical) DN i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiṁ; opposite apanāmeti to bend down)
    3. abhi, + ud + namati
    Abbhuyyāta
    1. marched against, attacked Vin i.342 MN ii.124
    past participle of abbhuyyāti
    Abbhuyyāti
    1. to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack SN i.82 (aorist ˚uyyāsi).
    2. past participle abbhuy yāta (q.v.)
    3. abhi + up + yāti of
    Abbhusūyaka
    adjective
    1. zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in (—˚) Pgdp 101. Abbhussakati & usukkati;
    abhi + usūyā + ka
    Abbhussakati
    ˚usukkati;
    1. to go out over, rise above (accusative ), ascend, frequently in phrase ādicco nabhaṁ abbhussakkamāno MN i.317 SN iii.156 = Iti 20

      • ‣ See also SN i.65 SN v.44 AN i.242 (same simile); v.22 (identical)
      abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk ‣See sakkati
    Abbhussahanatā
    feminine
    1. instigation, incitement Vin ii.88
    abstract from abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha
    Abbhusseti
    1. to rise; variant reading at Vv 6417 according to Vv-a 280: abbhuddayaṁ (see abbhudeti abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho
    abhi + ud + seti of śī
    Abbheti
    1. to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento) 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba)- past participle abbhita (q.v.) ‣See also abbhāna
    2. abhi + ā + i
    Abbhokāsa
    1. the open air, an open & unsheltered space DN i.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DN-a i.180), 71 (= acchanna DN-a i.210), 89 MN iii.132 AN ii.210 AN iii.92 AN iv.437 AN v.65 Snp p. 139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) Ja i.29 Ja i.215 Pug 57
    abhi + avakāsa
    Abbhokāsika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. DN i.167 MN i.282 AN iii.220 Vin v.131 193 Ja iv.8 (+ nesajjika) Pug 69 Mil 20 Mil 342 (One of the 13 Dhutaṁgas) ‣See also Nd1 188 Nd2 587
    1. ˚aṅga the practice or system of the “campers-out” Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi-kankhā, cp. Nd1 188)
    from abbhokāsa
    Abbhokiṇṇa
    1. ‣See abbokiṇṇa
    past participle of abbhokirati
    Abbhokirati
    1. to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi-okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (variant reading abbhuk˚). cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa; past participle abbhokiṇṇa ‣See under abbokiṇṇa
    2. abhi + ava + kirati
    Abbhokuṭika
    1. spelling at Dhp-a iv.8 for abbhākuṭika
    Abbhokkiraṇa
    neuter
    1. in naṭānaṁ a. “turnings of dancers” DN-a i.84 in explanation of sobha-nagarakaṁ of DN i.6
    from abbhokirati
    Abbhocchinna
    (besides abbocch˚; , q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2
    1. not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous Ja i.470 (variant reading abbo˚); vi.254, 373; cp. i.63 Mil 72 Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb)
    a + vi + ava + chinna
    Abbhohārika
    1. ‣See abbo˚;
    Aby˚
    1. ‣See avy˚;
    Abhabba
    adjective
    1. impossible, not likely, unable DN iii.13f. 19 26 sq., 133 Iti 106 117 Snp 231 ‣See KhA 189 Dhp 32 Ja i.116 Pug 13
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant’s character ‣See D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set)
    a + bhavya. The Sanskrit abhavya has a different meaning
    Abhabbatā
    feminine
    1. an impossibility, unlikelihood Snp 232 cp. Kp-a 191
    abstract from abhabba
    Abhaya
    adjective
    1. free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dhp 258
    • nt. abhayaṁ confidence, safety Dhp 317 cp. Dhp-a iii.491 For further refs. ‣See bhaya
    a + bhaya
    Abhi-
    I. Meaning
    1. -1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in English coming by and over-coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against on to, at ‣See Ii.1, a; and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of ‣See Ii.1, b. 2. Out of this is developed the figuratively meaning of increasing, i.e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb ‣See IIi.1 Next to saṁ-it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of “very much, greatly” as the first part of a double-prefix compound ‣See IIi.2, and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i.e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi-vi-ji (side by side with vi-ji), abhi-ā-kkhā (side by side with ā-kkhā), abhi-anu-mud (side by side with anu-mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to German her-bei-kommen (for bei-kommen) English fill up (for fill); e.g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ Commentary ) abbhatīta (“vorbei gegangen”), abbhantara (“with-in” b-innen or “in here”), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti (“fill up”) etc. (‣ See also Ii.1, c).
    1. II. Literal Meaning
    1. -1. As single prefix: (a) against to, on to, at-, viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at-tack, ˚rūhati ascend ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad-dress, ˚sapati ac-curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off-spring, ˚jānāti know all over ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over-flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intransitive verbs after the manner of English be-(con-) and German er-, thus resembling in meaning a simple causative formation, like the following: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti “er-kennen” ˚jāyati be-get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati “er tönen”, ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con-template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in
    2. As base in compound (2nd part of compound) abhi occurs only in combinationsam-abhi (which is however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more frequently in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ‣See under sam-)
      1. III. Figurative Meaning (intensifying)
      1. -1. A single prefix abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome (= adhika-rūpa Commentary ), ˚sambuddha wide and fully-awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (adhikaṁuddh˚ Commentary )
      • As 1st part of a preposition
      • compound (as modification-prefix) in following combinations: abhi-ud (abbhud—˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saṁ ‣See all these s.v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚;
      • On its relation to pari ‣See pari˚, to ava ‣See ava˚
      1. IV. Dialectical Variation.-There are dialectical variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in Pali is represented also by ati˚; adhi˚; and anu˚; , since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the following verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati ˚veṭheti; also as variant readings with abhi-kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti cp. atikkanta-abhi˚ (Sanskrit abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa Pali abhi-ropeti compared with Sanskrit adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati
      prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Latin ambi, amb round about, Old Irish imb, Gallic ambi, Old High German umbi, Anglo-Saxon ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Indogermanic *obhi, as in Latin ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Gothic bi, Old High German Anglo-Saxon bī = English be-.
    Abhikaṅkhati
    1. to desire after, long for, wish for SN i.140 SN i.198 (Nibbānaṁ) Ja ii.428 Ja iv.10 Ja iv.241 Vv-a 38 283 Thag-a 244 past participle abhikaṅkhita. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhikānkṣati, e.g. Jtm. p. 221
    2. abhi + kankhati
    Abhikaṅkhanatā
    feminine
    1. wishing, longing, desire DN-a i.242
    abhi + kankhana + tā
    Abhikaṅkhita
    1. desired, wished, longed for Vv-a 201 (= abhijjhita)
    past participle of abhikankhati
    Abhikaṅkhin
    adjective cp. wishing for, desirous (of—˚) Thag 2, 360 (sītibhāva˚).
    Abhikiṇṇa
    1. strewn over with (—˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚)
    2. overwhelmed overcome, crushed by (—˚) Iti 89 (dukkh˚ variant readings dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = AN i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa) ‣See also avatiṇṇa
    past participle of abhikirati
    Abhikirati
    -1.
    1. to sprinkle or cover over ‣See abhikiṇṇa 1
    • [ Sanskrit avakirati, cp. apakiritūna to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush SN i.54 Thag 1, 598 2, 447 (
    • absolutive ˚kiritūna, reading of C for Text apa˚, explained by chaḍḍetvā) Dhp 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaṁ abhikīrati = viddhaṁseti vikirati Dhp-a i.255 variant reading atikirati) Ja iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaṁ = viddhaṁseti Commentary ) vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti Commentary ) Dhp-a i.255 (infinitive ˚kirituṁ).
    • past participle abhikiṇṇa ‣See abhikiṇṇa 2
    • Sanskrit abhikirati
    Abhikīḷati
    1. to play (a game), to sport Mil 359 (kīḷaṁ)
    abhi + kìḷati
    Abhikūjita
    1. resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). cp. abhinikūjita
    abhi + kūjita, past participle of kūj
    Abhikkanta
    adjective-noun
    1. (a) adjective literally gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional explanation preserved by Buddhaghosa & Dhp ‣See e.g. DN-a; i.227 = Kp-a 114 = Vv-a 52 it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya Kp-a) sundar’-âbhirūpa-abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (literally) gone away, passed gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya “wane”) in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26 DN ii.220 MN i.142 2. excellent, supreme (sundara) Snp 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) DN i.62 DN i.74 DN i.216 AN ii.101 AN iii.350f.; v.140, 207 sq. DN-a i.171 (= atimanāpatara) 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ṁ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (abbhânumodana) DN i.85 DN i.110 DN i.234 Snp p. 15, 24, etc. Freq 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa Vin i.26 DN ii.220 MN i.142 Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (atimanāpa abhirūpa Pv-a 71); Kp-a 115 (= abhirūpachavin)

      • (b)
      • neuter abhikkantaṁ (combined with and opp to paṭikkantaṁ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) DN i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DN-a i.183) Vin iii.181 AN ii.104 AN ii.106f. Vv-a 6
      past participle of abhikkamati, in sense of Sanskrit and also Pali atikkanta
    Abhikkama
    1. going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opposite paṭikkama going back) Dhp-a iii.124 (˚paṭikkama)
    Abhikkamati
    1. to go forward, to proceed, approach DN i.50 (= abhimukho kamati gacchati, pavisati DN-a i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā muṁ aorist ) Dhp-a iii.124 (evaṁ ˚itabbaṁ evaṁ paṭikkamitabbaṁ thus to approach & thus to withdraw)

      • pp; abhikkanta (q.v.)
      Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati
    Abhikkhaṇa1
    neuter
    1. digging up of the ground MN i.143
    from abhikkhanati
    Abhikkhaṇa2
    1. neuter [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sanskrit abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is Pali abhiṇha only as accusative adverb ˚ṁ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaṁ Vv-a 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaṁ bahuso Pv-a 107) Pug 31 Dhp-a ii.91

    Abhikkhaṇati
    1. to dig up MN i.142
    abhi + khaṇati
    Abhikkhipati
    1. to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12
    abhi + khipati
    Abhigajjati
    1. (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. accusative ) Snp 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172);
    2. absolutive abhigajjiya thundering cp. iii.108. (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds) ‣See abhigajjin
    3. abhi + gajjati from garj, sound-root, cp. Pali gaggara
    Abhigajjin
    adjective
    1. warbling, singing, chattering Thag 1, 1108 1136
    from abhigajjati
    Abhigamanīya
    adjective
    1. to be approached, accessible Pv-a 9
    gerundive of abhigacchati
    Abhigijjhati
    1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c.
    2. locative ) Snp 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77)
    3. to envy (
    4. accusative ) SN i.15 (aññam-aññaṁ)
    abhi + gijjhati
    Abhigīta
    1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaṁ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (German “ersungen”) SN i.173 Snp 81 = Mil 228 ‣See Snp-a 151
    2. resounding with filled with song (of birds) Ja vi.272 (= abhiruda)
    past participle of abhigāyati, cp. gīta
    Abhighāta
    1. (a) striking, slaying, killing Pv-a 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). (b) impact, contact Dhs-a 312 (rūpa˚ etc.)
    Sanskrit abhighāta, abhi + ghāta
    Abhicetasika
    adjective
    1. dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling ‣See ābhic˚ (of jhāna) MN i.33 MN i.356 MN iii.11 SN ii.278 AN ii.23 AN v.132 (Spelt. ābhi˚ at MN i.33 AN iii.114 Vin v.136) ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha iii.108
    abhi + ceto + ika
    Abhiceteti
    1. to intend, devise, have in mind Ja iv.310 (manasā pāpaṁ)
    abhi + ceteti
    Abhicchanna
    adjective
    1. covered with, bedecked or adorned with (—˚) Ja ii.48 (hema-jāla˚, variant reading abhisañchanna), 370 (identical) Snp 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24 cp. Nd2 365)
    abhi + channa
    Abhicchita
    adjective
    1. desired Ja vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita
    abhi + icchita, cp. Sanskrit abhīpsita
    Abhijacca
    adjective
    1. of noble birth Ja v.120
    Sanskrit ābhijātya; abhi + jacca
    Abhijaneti
    1. occasional spelling for abhijāneti
    Abhijappati
    1. to wish for, strive after, pray for SN i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp. ; Kindred Sayings p. 180) = Ja iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti Commentary ); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiṁsati thometi Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). cp. in meaning; abhigijjhati
    abhi + jappati
    Abhijappana
    neuter [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇṁa˚ DN-a i.97 in hattha˚; casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands DN i.11 DN-a i.97
    Abhijappā
    feminine
    1. praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā ii. Dhs 1136
    abstract from abhijappati, cp. jappā
    Abhijappin
    adjective
    1. praying for, desiring AN III.353 (kāma-lābha˚)
    from abhijappati
    Abhijalati
    1. to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto resplendent Pv-a 189
    abhi + jalati
    Abhijavati
    1. to be eager, active Snp 668
    abhi + javati
    Abhijāta
    adjective
    1. of noble birth, well-born, SN i.69 Vv 293 Mil 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth)
    abi + jāta
    Abhijāti
    feminine
    1. Species. Only as technical term in use by certain non-Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour DN i.53 DN i.54 AN iii.383 ff. (quoted DN-a i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at DN iii.250 MN ii.222 and Netti.158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers
    2. Rebirth, descent, Mil 226
    abhi + jāti
    Abhijātika
    adjective
    1. belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in compound kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale DN iii.251 AN iii.348 Snp 563 = Thag 1, 833 cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 11 in sense of “evil disposed or of bad character” at Ja v.87 (= kāḷaka-sabhāva Commentary )
    from abhijāti
    Abhijātitā
    feminine
    1. the fact of being born, descendency Vv-a 216
    abstract from abhijāti
    Abhijāna
    neuter or masculine?
    1. recognition, remembrance, recollection Mil 78 ‣See also abhiññā
    Sanskrit abhijñāna
    Abhijānāti
    1. to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise know of (c. accusative ), to be conscious or aware of DN i.143 SN ii.58 SN ii.105 SN ii.219 SN ii.278 SN iii.59 SN iii.91 SN iv.50 SN iv.324 SN iv.399 SN v.52 SN v.176 SN v.282 SN v.299 Snp 1117 (diṭṭhiṁ Gotamassa na a.) Ja iv.142 Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (n’ābhijānāmi bhuttaṁ vā pītaṁ) Sdhp 550; etc

      • Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaññā Snp 917 Snp 1059 (= jāneyyāsi Snp-a 592);
      • aorist abhaññāsi Snp p. 16
      • ppr. abhijānaṁ SN iv.19 SN iv.89 Snp 788 (= ˚jānanto Commentary ), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva Dhp-a iv.233
      • abhiññāya SN iv.16 SN v.392 Snp 534 (sabbadhammaṁ), 743 (jātikkhayaṁ), 1115, 1148 Iti 91 (dhammaṁ) Dhp 166 (atta-d-atthaṁ); frequently in phrase sayaṁ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self-experience Iti 97 (v.l abhiññā) Dhp 353 and abhiññā short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā
      1. in phrase sayaṁ abhiññā DN i.31 (+ sacchikatvā) SN ii.217 Iti 97 (variant reading for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā-vosita perfected by highest knowledge SN i.167 SN i.175 = Dhp 423 (“master of supernormal lore” Mrs Rhys Davids in Kindred Sayings p. 208; cp. also Dhp-a iv.233) Iti 47 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaṁ abhiññapariññeyya SN iv.29 gerundive abhiññe yya SN iv.29 Snp 558 (˚ṁ abhiññātaṁ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v. Dhp-a iv.233
      2. past participle abhiññāta (q.v.)
      3. abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā
    Abhijāyati
    1. to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ Nibbānaṁ a. DN iii.251 AN iii.384 sq At Snp 214 abhijāyati means “to behave, to be”, cp. Snp-a 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati)
    abhi + jāyati, passive of jan, but in sense of a causative = janeti
    Abhijigiṁsati
    1. to wish to overcome, to covet Ja vi.193 (= jinituṁ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati Thag 1, 743 (“cheat"? Mrs Rhys Davids; “vernichten” Neumann) ‣See also abhijeti, and nijigiṁsanatā
    abhi + jigiṁsati
    Abhijighacchati
    1. to be very hungry Pv-a 271
    abhi + jighacchati
    Abhijīvanika
    adjective
    1. belonging to one’s livehood, forming one’s living Vin i.187 (sippa)
    abhi + jīvana + ika
    Abhijīhanā
    feminine
    1. strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour Ja vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa Commentary )
    abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth
    Abhijeti
    1. to win, acquire, conquer Ja vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā)
    abhi + jayati
    Abhijoteti
    1. to make clear, explain, illuminate Ja v.339
    abhi + joteti
    Abhijjanaka
    adjective
    1. not to be broken, not to be moved or changed uninfluenced Ja ii.170 Dhp-a iii.189
    a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, gerundive of bhid
    Abhijjamāna
    adjective
    1. that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are DN i.78 DN i.212 DN iii.112 DN iii.281 MN i.34 494; ii.18 AN i.170 AN i.255 AN iii.17 AN v.199 SN ii.121 SN v.264 In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Ps ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla’s note on that (Pv-a 169) is corrupt. At DN i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻ not dividing (the water) ʼ; at DN i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻ not sinking (in the water) ʼ
    ppr. passive of a + bhid ‣See bhindati
    Abhijjhā
    feminine
    1. covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 22) DN i.70 DN i.71 (˚āya cittaṁ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = ablative; cp. DN-a i.211 = abhijjhāto) MN i.347 (identical) DN iii.49 DN iii.71f. 172, 230, 269 SN iv.73 SN iv.104 SN iv.188 SN iv.322 (adjective vigat’âbhijjha) 343 (˚āyavipāka) AN i.280 AN iii.92 AN v.251f. Iti 118 Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya-ganthā, q.v.); Nd2 taṇhā ii.1 Pug 20 59 Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha) Vb 195 244 (vigat’âbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13 Dhp-a i.23 Pv-a 103 Pv-a 282; Sdhp 56 Sdhp 69
    • Often combined with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e.g. at DN iii.58, 77 141, 221, 276 MN i.340 MN iii.2 AN i.39 AN i.296 AN ii.16 AN ii.152 iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351 Vb 105 193 sq -anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35 62
    • ‣ See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla
    from abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sanskrit abhidhyāna
    Abhijjhātar
    1. ‣See abhijjhitar
    Abhijjhāti
    1. to wish for (accusative ), long for, covet SN v.74 (so read for abhijjhati);
    2. absolutive abhijjhāya Ja vi.174 (= patthetvā Commentary ).
    3. past participle abhijjhita
    4. cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1 ‣See also abhijjhāyati
    Abhijjhāyati
    1. to wish for, covet (c. accusative ). Snp 301 (
    2. aorist abhijjhāyiṁsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiṁsu Snp-a 320)
    3. Sanskrit abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1 ‣See also abhijjhāti
    Abhijjhālū
    1. (& ˚u) adjective

      1. covetous DN i.139 DN iii.82 Ṣ ii.168; iii.93 AN i.298 AN ii.30 AN ii.59 AN ii.220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq. Iti 90 91 Pug 39 40
      cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijjhālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin The B. Sanskrit form is abhidyālu, e.g. Divy 301 a curious reconstruction
    Abhijjhiṭṭa
    variant reading at Dhp-a iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.
    Abhijjhita
    1. coveted, J. vi.445; usually negative an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287 Snp 40 (= anabhipatthita Snp-a 85; cp. Nd2 38) Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201)
    past participle of abhijjhāti
    Abhijjhitar
    1. one who covets MN i.287 (Text abhijjhātar, variant reading ˚itar) =. AN v.265 (Text ˚itar, variant reading ˚ātar)
    agent noun from abhijjhita in medium function
    Abhiñña
    adjective (usually—˚)
    1. knowing, possessed of knowledge, especially higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88
    • dandh˚ of sluggish intellect DN iii.106 AN ii.149 AN v.63 (opposite khipp˚) mah˚; of great insight SN ii.139

      • Compar. abhiññatara SN v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro)
      Sanskrit abhijña
    Abhiññatā
    feminine
    1. in compound mahā˚; state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge SN iv.263 V.175, 298 sq
    from abhiññā
    Abhiññā1
    feminine
    1. . Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna These conditions precedent are the Path (SN v.421 = Vin i.10 = SN iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (AN v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (SN v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (s.v.255) The contrary is three times stated; wrong-doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (DN iii.131 AN iii.325f. and v.216) Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2 the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others thoughts (cp. thought-reading); 4, recollecting one’s previous births; 5, knowing other people’s rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance) This list occurs only at DN iii.281 as a list of abhiññās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññās, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at DN i.89f. (translation Dial. i.89 sq.) MN i.34 ‣See Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq. AN i.255 AN i.258 iii.17, 280 = iv.421. At SN i.191 Vin ii.16 Pug 14 we have the adjective chaḷabhiññā (“endowed with the 6 Apperceptions”). At SN ii.216 we have five, and at SN v.282 SN v.290 six abhiññās mentioned in glosses to the text. And at SN ii.217 SN ii.222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers ‣See also MN ii.11 MN iii.96 It is from these passages that the list at DN iii. has been made up, and called abhiññās
    1. Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life and thought ‣See Nd1 108 328 (explanation of ñāṇa); Nd2 s.v. and N0. 466; Ps i.35; ii.156, 189 Vb 228 334 Pug 14 Nett 19, 20 Mil 342 Vism 373 Mhvs xix.20 DN-a i.175 Dhp-a ii.49 Dhp-a iv.30 Sdhp 228 470, 482 ‣See also the discussion in the Compendium 60 sp. 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā-vosita ‣See abhijānāti. The late phrase yath’abhiññaṃ means ʻas you please, according to liking, as you likeʼ, Ja v.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ Commentary ). For abhiññā in the use of an adjective (˚abhiñña) ‣See abhiñña
    from abhi + jñā ‣See jānāti
    Abhiññā2
    1. absolutive of abhijānāti
    Abhiññāta
    1. known, recognised Snp 588 (abhiññeyyaṁ ˚ṁ)
    2. (well)-known, distinguished DN i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa-kulaja DN-a i.252), 235; Snp p. 115
    past participle of abhijānāti
    Abhiññeyya
    gerundive of abhijānāti.
    Abhiṭhāna
    neuter
    1. a great or deadly crime Only at Snp 231 = Kh vi.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as “matricide parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions ‣See; i → Dhs translation 267
    • ‣ See also ānantarika
    abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; literally that which stands out above others
    Abhiṇhaṁ
    adverb
    1. repeatedly, continuous, often MN i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice) Snp 335 (˚saṁvāsa continuous living together) Ja i.190 Pug 32 Dhp-a ii.239 Vv-a 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332 Pv-a 107 (= abhikkhaṇaṁ). cp. abhiṇhaso
    contracted form of abhikkhaṇaṁ
    Abhiṇhaso
    adverb
    1. always, ever SN i.194 Thag 1, 25 Snp 559 Snp 560 Snp 998
    adverb case from abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sanskrit bahuśaḥ
    Abhitakketi
    1. to search for Dāvs v.4
    abhi + takketi
    Abhitatta
    1. scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220 Mil 97 and ghamma˚ SN ii.110 SN ii.118 Snp 1014 Ja ii.223 Vv-a 40 Pv-a 114
    past participle of abhi + tapati
    Abhitāpa
    1. extreme heat, glow; adjective very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke) MN i.507 (mahā˚ very hot) Mil 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚ of niraya)
    abhi + tāpa
    Abhitāḷita
    1. hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚)
    abhi + tāḷita from tāḷeti
    Abhitiṭṭhati
    1. to stand out supreme, to excel, sur passive DN ii.261 Ja vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā Commentary )
    2. abhi + tiṭṭhati
    Abhitunna
    (tuṇṇa)
    1. . Overwhelmed, overcome overpowered SN ii.20 Ps i.129 (dukkha˚), 164 Ja i.407 509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268 Sdhp 281
    not as Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 135, suggested from abhi + tud, but accusative to Kern, Toevoegselen p. 4 from abhi + tūrv. (cp. turati & tarati; 2 and Vedic turvati) Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sanskrit abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as variant reading under the disguise of (sok-)âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2
    Abhito
    indeclinable adverb case from preposition abhi etymology].
    1. -1. round about, on both sides Ja vi.535 (= ubhayapassesu Commentary ) 539
    • near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe Vv-a 275)
    Abhitoseti
    1. to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Snp 709 (= atīva toseti Snp-a 496)
    abhi + toseti
    Abhitthaneti
    1. to roar, to thunder Ja i.330 Ja i.332 = cp. iii.107
    abhi + thaneti
    Abhittharati
    1. to make haste Dhp 116 (= turitaturitaṁ sīghasīghaṁ karoti Dhp-a iii.4)
    abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati
    Abhitthavati
    1. to praise Ja i.89 Ja iii.531 Dāvs iii.23 Dhp-a i.77 Pv-a 22 cp. abhitthunati
    abhi + thavati
    Abhitthavana
    neuter
    1. praise Thag AN 74
    from preceding
    Abhitthunati
    1. to praise Ja i.17 (aorist abhitthuniṁsu); cp. thunati.2.
    2. past participle ˚tthuta Dhp-a i.88
    3. abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati
    Abhida1
    1. adjective as attribute of sun & moon at MN ii.34 MN ii.35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; variant readings abhidosa & abhidesa Neumann; translation “unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like “full, powerful” or unbroken unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta “fearless"?”) or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly?
    Abhida2
    1. Only in the difficult old verse DN ii.107 (= SN v.263 = AN iv.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203) Aorist 3rd singular from bhindati he broke
    Abhidassana
    neuter
    1. sight, appearance, show Ja vi.193
    abhi + dassana
    Abhideyya
    1. in sabba˚ at Pv-a 78 is with Burmese variant to be read sabbapātheyyaṁ
    Abhidosa
    1. (˚-) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata MN i.170 = Ja i.81 ˚gata gone last night Ja vi.386 (hiyyo paṭhama-yāme Commentary )
    Abhidosika
    1. belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15 Mil 291 ‣See ābhi˚
    Abhiddavati
    1. to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs iii.47
    abhi + dru, cp. dava2
    Abhidhamati
    1. blow on or at AN i.257
    abhi + dhamati, cp. Sanskrit abhi˚ & api-dhamati
    Abhidhamma
    1. the “special Dhamma,” i.e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64 68; iv.144; iv.344 Coupled with abhivinaya, DN iii.267 MN i.272
    • (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dīpavaṁsa v.37 Pv-a 140 ‣See the detailed discussion at DN-a i.15 18 sq. As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Snp or SN or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.
    1. ˚kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, MN i.214 MN i.218 AN iii.106 AN iii.392 ‣See dhammakathā;
    abhi + dhamma
    Abhidhammika
    1. ‣See ābhidhammika
    Abhidhara
    adjective
    1. firm, bold, in ˚māna firmminded Dhp p. 81 (accusative to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 135 not verified)
    2. abhi + dhara
    Abhidhāyin
    adjective
    1. ” putting on”, designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98
    abhi + dhāyin from dhā
    Abhidhāreti
    1. to hold aloft Ja i.34 = Bu iv.1
    abhi + dhāreti
    Abhidhāvati
    1. to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195 SN i.209 Ja ii.217 iii.83 Dhp-a iv.23
    abhi + dhāvati
    Abhidhāvin
    adjective from abhidhāvati] “pouring in”, rushing on, running Ja vi.559
    Abhinata
    1. bent, (strained, figuratively bent on pleasure MN i.386 (+ apanata) SN i.28 (identical; Mrs. Rhys Davids “strained forth”, cp. Kindred S i.39) ‣See also apanata
    past participle of abhi + namati
    Abhinadati
    1. to resound, to be full of noise Ja vi.531 cp. abhinādita
    abhi + nadati
    Abhinandati
    1. to rejoice at, find pleasure in (accusative ), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (
    2. accusative DN i.46 (bhāsitaṁ), 55 (identical), 158, 223 MN i.109 MN i.458 SN i.32 (annaṁ), 57, 14, (cakkhuṁ, rūpe etc.) AN iv.411 Thag 1, 606 Dhp 75 Dhp 219 Snp 1054 Snp 1057 Snp 1111 Nd2 82 Mil 25 DN-a i.160 Dhp-a iii.194 (
    3. aorist abhinandi, opp paṭikkosi) Vv-a 65 (vacanaṁ).
    4. past participle abhinandita (q.v.) Often in combination with abhivadati (q.v.)
    5. abhi + nandati
    Abhinandana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. pleasure, delight, enjoyment DN i.244 MN i.498 Ja iv.397
      from abhinandati, cp. nandanā
    Abhinandita
    1. only in an˚; not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure SN iv.213 = Iti 38 SN v.319
    past participle of abhinandati
    Abhinandin
    adjective
    1. rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (locative or—˚), enjoying AN ii.54 (piyarūpa); especially frequently in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatr’âbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that cp. B. Sanskrit tṛṣṇā tatra-tatr’âbhinandinī Mvu iii.332
      1. Vin i.10 SN v.421 Ps ii.147; Nett 72, etc
      from abhinandati, cp. nandin
    Abhinamati
    1. to bend. past participle abhinata (q.v.)
    2. abhi + namati
    Abhinaya
    1. a dramatic representation Vv-a 209 (sākhā˚)
    abhi + naya
    Abhinava
    adjective
    1. quite young, new or fresh Vin iii.337 Ja ii.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in explanation of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha) Thag-a 201 (˚yobbana = abhiyobbana) Pv-a 40 (˚saṇṭhāna) 87 (= paccaggha) 155
    abhi + nava
    Abhinādita
    1. resounding with (—˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) Ja vi.530 (= abhinadanto Commentary ) Pv-a 157 (= abhiruda)
    past participle of abhinādeti, causative of abhi + nad ‣See nadati
    Abhinikūjita
    adjective
    1. resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) Ja v.232 (of the barking of a dog) 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita Text). cp. abhikūjita
    abhi + nikūjita
    Abhinikkhamati
    1. to go forth from ablative, go out, issue Dhs-a 91; especially figuratively to leave the household life, to retire from the world Snp 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya-vattho hutvā Snp-a 117)
    abhi + nikkhamati
    Abhinikkhamana
    neuter
    1. departure, going away, especially the going out into monastic life, retirement renunciation. Usually as mahā˚; the great renunciation Ja i.61 Pv-a 19
    abhi + nikkhamana
    Abhinikkhipati
    1. to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60
    abhi + nikkhipati
    Abhiniggaṇhanā
    feminine
    1. holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā)
    abstract from abhiniggaṇhāti
    Abhiniggaṇhāti
    1. to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combination with abhinippīḷeti MN i.120 AN v.230
    • cp. abhiniggaṇhanā
    abhi + niggaṇhāti
    Abhinindriya
    1. doubtful meaning. The other is explained by Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal-indriya not defective, perfect sense-organ. He must have read ahīn˚ Abhi-n-indriya could only be explained as “with supersenseorgans”, i.e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya We should read ahīn˚ throughout DN i.34 DN i.77 DN i.186 DN i.195 ii.13 MN ii.18 MN iii.121 Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚)
    variant readings at all passages for ahīnindriya
    Abhininnāmeti
    1. to bend towards, to turn or direct to DN i.76 (cittaṁ ñāṇa-dassanāya) MN i.234 SN i.123 SN iv.178 Pug 60
    abhi + ninnāmeti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhinirṇāmayati Lal. v.439
    Abhinipajjati
    1. to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati) AN iv.188 (in = accusative + abhinisīdati) Pug 67 (identical)
    2. abhi + nipajjati
    Abhinipatati
    1. to rush on (to) Ja ii.8
    abhi + nipatati
    Abhinipāta
    1. (-matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vb 321 is explained by āpātha-matta
    cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife
    Abhinipātana
    neuter [from abhi-ni-pāteti in daṇḍa-sattha˚; attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5764.
    Abhinipātin
    adjective
    1. falling on io (—˚) Ja ii.7
    abhi + nipātin
    Abhinipuṇa
    adjective
    1. very thorough, very clever DN iii.167
    abhi + nipuṇa
    Abhinippajjati
    1. to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) MN i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) Nd2 99 (has n'âbhinippajjanti)
    • cp. abhinipphādeti
    abhi + nippajjati
    Abhinippata
    1. at Ja vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so Burmese variant )
    Abhinippatta
    1. at Dhs 1035 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta
    Abhinippanna
    (& ˚nipphanna
    1. produced, effected, accomplished DN ii.223 (siloka) Ja vi.36 (so read for abhinippata) Mil 8 (pph.)
    abhi + nippanna, past participle of ˚nippajjati
    Abhinippīḷanā
    feminine
    1. pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā)
    abstract to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana
    Abhinippīḷeti
    1. to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combination with abhiniggaṇhāti MN i.120 AN v.230
    abhi + nippīḷeti
    Abhinipphatti
    feminine
    1. production, effecting DN ii.283 (variant reading ˚nibbatti)
    abhi + nipphatti
    Abhinipphādeti
    1. to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform DN i.78 (bhājana-vikatiṁ) Vin ii.183 (iddhiṁ) SN v.156 SN v.255 Mil 39
    abhi + nipphādeti
    Abhinibbatta
    1. reproduced, reborn AN iv.40 AN iv.401 Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi pātubhūta) Dhs 1035 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta) Vv-a 9 (puññ’ânubhāva˚ by the power of merit)
    abhi + nibbatta, past participle of abhinibbattati
    Abhinibbattati
    1. to become, to be reproduced, to result Pug 51 past participle abhinibbatta

      • Cp B. Sanskrit wrongly abhinivartate]
      abhi + nibbattati
    Abhinibbatti
    feminine
    1. becoming, birth, rebirth, DN i.229 DN ii.283 (variant reading for abhinipphatti) SN ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (identical); iv.14, 215 AN v.121 Pv-a 35
    abhi + nibbatti
    Abhinibbatteti
    1. to produce, cause, cause to become SN iii.152 AN v.47 Nd2 under jāneti
    abhi + nibbatteti, causative of ˚nibbattati
    Abhinibbijjati
    1. to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Snp 281 (Text abhinibbijjayātha, Burmese variant ˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, Snp-a explains by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; Burmese variant abhinippajjiyā) = AN iv.172 (Text abhinibbajjayātha variant readings ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); absolutive abhinibbijja Thag 2, 84
    2. either Med. from nibbindati of vid for *nirvidyate ‣See nibbindati B, or secondary formation from absolutive nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt
    Abhinibbijjhati
    1. to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3 MN i.104 = SN iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun-cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234
    abhi + nibbijjhati
    Abhinibbidā
    feminine
    1. disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to explanation as “padālanā-paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa-kosānaṁ”), 98 (so MSS, but Commentary abhinibbidhā)
    abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibbhidā
    Abhinibbuta
    adjective
    1. perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, especially in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm’ ābhinibbuta AN i.142 = MN iii.187 Snp 1087 Nd2 83 and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Snp 343 (= apariḍayhamāna-citta Snp-a 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp 35
    abhi + nibbuta
    Abhinibbhidā
    feminine [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4 Commentary on Nett 98) To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B. Sanskrit abhinirbheda Mvu i.272 which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh. the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4 MN i.104 357; Nett 98 (Commentary reading) ‣See also abhinibbidā.
    Abhinimantanatā
    feminine
    1. speaking to, adressing, invitation MN i.331
    abstract to abhinimanteti
    Abhinimanteti
    1. to invite to (c. instrumental), to offer to DN i.61 (āsanena)
    abhi + nimanteti
    Abhinimmadana
    neuter
    1. crushing, subduing, levelling out MN iii.132 AN iv.189f.
    abhi + nimmadana
    Abhinimmita
    1. created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. Vv-a 79)
    abhi + nimmita, past participle of abhinimmināti
    Abhinimmināti
    1. [abhi + nimmināti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166 to create (by magic), produce, shape, make SN iii.152 (rūpaṁ) AN i.279 (oḷārikaṁ attabhāvaṁ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaṁ manomayaṁ) Vv-a 16 (mahantaṁ hatthi-rāja-vaṇṇaṁ). past participle abhinimmita (q.v.)

    Abhiniropana
    neuter & ā
    • feminine

      1. fixing one’s mind upon, application of the mind Ps i.16, 21, 30, 69 75, 90 Vb 87 Dhs 7 21, 298 (cp. Dhs translation ii.19) ‣See also abhiropana
      from abhiniropeti
    Abhiniropeti
    1. to implant, fix into (one’s mind), inculcate Nett 33
    abhi + niropeti
    Abhinivajjeti
    1. to avoid, get rid of DN iii.113 MN i.119 MN i.364 MN i.402 SN v.119 SN v.295 SN v.318 AN iii.169f. Iti 81
    abhi + nivajjeti
    Abhinivassati
    1. literally to pour out in abundance, figuratively to produce in plenty. cp. i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds)
    abhi + ni + vassati from vṛṣ
    Abhiniviṭṭha
    adjective
    1. “settled in”, attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.) Pv-a 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv iv.84)
    abhi + niviṭṭha, past participle of abhi-nivisati
    Abhinivisati
    1. to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308 309 (parāmasati +). past participle abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa
    2. abhi + nivisati
    Abhinivesa
    1. “settling in”, i.e. wishing for, tendency towards (—˚) inclination, adherence; as adjective liking, loving, being given or inclined to DN iii.230 MN i.136 MN i.251 SN ii.17 SN iii.10 SN iii.13 SN iii.135 SN iii.161 SN iii.186 (saṁyojana˚ iv.50 AN iii.363 (paṭhavī˚ adjective) Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +) Pug 22 Vb 145 Dhs 381 1003, 1099; Nett 28 Pv-a 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71
    • Often combined with adhiṭṭhāna e.g. SN ii.17 Nd2 176 and in phrase idaṁ-sacc’âbhinivesa adherence to one’s dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties ‣See kāyagantha and cp. Compendium 171 note 5
    abhi + nivesa ‣See nivesa2 & cp. nivesana
    Abhinisīdati
    1. to sit down by or on (accusative ), always combined with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29 Vin iv.273 AN v.188 Pug 67
    2. abhi + nisīdati
    Abhinissaṭa
    1. (past participle )

      1. escaped Thag 1, 1089
      abhi + nissaṭa
    Abhinihata
    1. (past participle )

      1. oppressed. crushed, slain Ja iv.4
      abhi + nihata
    Abhinīta
    1. (past participle )

      1. led to, brought to, obliged by (—˚) MN i.463 = Mil 32 (rājā & cora˚) MN i.282 SN iii.93 Thag 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga˚ “foredone with cramping pains” Mrs. Rk. D.) Pug 29 Mil 362
      past participle of abhi-neti
    Abhinīla
    adjective

    very black, deep black, only with reference to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep-black eyes DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.167f. cp. Sp. Avs i.367 370 abhinīla-padma-netra

    1. Thag 2, 257 (nettā ahesuṁ abbinīla-m-āyatā)
    abhi + nīla
    Abhinīhanati
    1. to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid MN i.119 (in phrase āṇiṁ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti)
    abhi + nis + han, cp. Sanskrit nirhanti
    Abhinīharati
    1. to take out, throw out MN i.119 ‣See abhinīhanati
    2. to direct to, to apply to (originally to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti DN i.76 (= tanninnaṁ tappoṇaṁ karoti DN-a i.220 224; variant reading abhini˚) cp. the latter phrase also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as abhijñâbhinirhāra Avs ii.3 ‣See reference & note Index p. 221; and the
    3. past participle abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48 Divy 49 to obtain? Ind.) 264 (take to burial), 542
    abhi + nīharati
    Abhinīhāra
    1. being bent on (“downward force” Dhs translation 242), i.e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration SN iii.267f. (˚kusala) AN ii.189 AN iii.311 AN iv.34 (˚kusala) Ja i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha) 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps i.61 sq.; ii.121; Nett 26 Mil 216 Dhp-a i.392 Dhp-a ii.82 (kata˚)
    abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sarīr’âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, literally meaning ‣See note on abhinīharati
    Abhipattika
    adjective
    1. one who has attained, attaining (—˚), getting possession of SN i.200 (devakañña˚)
    from abhipatti
    Abhipatthita
    1. (past participle )

      1. hoped, wished, longed for Mil 383 Snp-a 85
      from abhipattheti
    Abhipattheti
    1. to hope for, long for, wish for Kh viii.10 Snp-a 320 Dhp-a i.30 past participle abhipatthita (q.v.)
    2. abhi + pattheti
    Abhipassati
    1. to have regard for, look for, strive after AN i.147 (Nibbānaṁ); iii.75 Snp 896 (khema˚) 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd1 308 Nd2 428 Ja vi.370
    abhi + passati
    Abhipāteti
    1. to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw Ja ii.91 (kaṇḍaṁ)
    abhi + pāteti
    Abhipāruta
    adjective
    1. dressed Mil 222
    abhi + pāruta, past participle of abhipārupati
    Abhipāleti
    1. to protect Vv 8421 cp. Vv-a 341
    abhi + pāleti
    Abhipīḷita
    1. (past participle )

      1. crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278 Sdhp 279
      from abhipiḷeti
    Abhipīḷeti
    1. to crush, squeeze Mil 166 - past participle abhipīḷita (q.v.)
    2. abhi + pīḷeti
    Abhipucchati
    1. Sanskrit abhipṛcchati] to ask Ja iv.18
    abhi + pucchati
    Abhipūreti
    1. to fill (up) Mil 238 Dāvs iii.60 (paṁsūhi)
    abhi + pūreti
    Abhippakiṇṇa
    1. completely strewn (with) Ja i.62
    past participle of abhippakirati
    Abhippakirati
    1. to strew over, to cover (completely) DN ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.) Vv-a 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). past participle abhippakiṇṇa (q.v.)
    2. abhi + pakirati
    Abhippamodati
    1. to rejoice intranstitive ; to please, satisfy (trs, c.
    2. accusative ) MN i.425 SN v.312 SN v.330 AN v.112 Ja iii.530 Ps i.95, 176, 190
    3. abhi + pamodati
    Abhippalambati
    1. to hang down MN iii.164 (olambati ajjholambati a.)
    abhi + palambati
    Abhippavassati
    1. to shed rain upon, to pour down; intransitive to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Mil 8 13, 36, 304 Pv-a 132 (variant reading ati˚); intransitive Mil 18 (pupphāni ˚iṁsu poured down). past participle abhippavuṭṭha
    2. abhi + pavassati
    Abhippavuṭṭha
    1. (past participle )

      1. having rained, poured, fallen; trs. SN v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni). AN v.127 intransitive MN ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst)
      from abhippavassati
    Abhippasanna
    adjective
    1. finding one’s peace in (c. locative ), trusting in having faith in, believing in, devoted to (
    2. locative ) Vin iii.43 DN i.211 (Bhagavati) SN i.134 SN iv.319 SN v.225 SN v.378 AN iii.237 AN iii.270 AN iii.326f.; Snp p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu) Pv-a 54 (sāsand), 142 (identical). cp. vippasanna in same meaning
    3. past participle of abhippasīdati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhiprasanna
    Abhippasāda
    1. faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 (“sense of assurance” translation, + saddhā), 25, 96 288 Pv-a 223
    abhi + pasāda, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhiprasāda Avs 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda
    Abhippasādeti
    1. to establish one’s faith in (locative ), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Thag 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaṁ arahantamhi = cittaṁ pasādeti Vv-a 105)
    2. causative of abhippasīdati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhiprasādayati Divy 68 Divy 85, past participle abhiprasādita-manāḥ Jtm 213 220
    Abhippāsāreti
    1. to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde)
    abhi + pasāreti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhiprasārayati Divy 389
    Abhippasīdati
    1. to have faith in DN i.211 (future ˚issati).
    2. past participle abhippasanna;
    3. causative abhippasādeti
    4. abhi + pasīdati
    Abhippaharaṇa
    neuter

    attacking, fighting, as adjective feminine ˚aṇī fighting, epithet of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Snp 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ nippothanī antarāyakārī Snp-a 390) abhi + paharaṇa

    Abhibyāpeti
    1. to pervade Mil 251
    abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sanskrit vyāpnoti, vi + āp
    Abhibhakkhayati
    1. to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaṁ a.)
    abhi + bhakkhayati
    Abhibhava
    1. defeat, humiliation Snp-a 436
    from abhibhavati
    Abhibhavati
    1. to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer SN i.18 SN i.32 SN i.121 (maraṇaṁ); iv.71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaṁ), 246, 249 (sāmikaṁ) Ja i.56 280 Pv-a 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati) future abhihessati ‣See abhihāreti.4.
    2. absolutive abhibhuyya Vin i.294 Dhp 328 Iti 41 (māraṁ sasenaṁ) Snp 45 Snp 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā Pv-a 113 (= pasayha), 136.
    3. gerundive abhibhavanīya to be overcome Pv-a 57
    4. passive ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) Pv-a 80 Pv-a 103.
    5. past participle abhibhūta (q.v.)
    6. abhi + bhavati
    Abhibhavana
    neuter
    1. overcoming, vanquishing, mastering SN ii.210 (Burmese variant abhipatthana)
    from abhibhavati
    Abhibhavanīyatā
    feminine
    1. as an˚; invincibility Pv-a 117
    abstract from abhibhavanīya, gerundive of abhibhavati
    Abhibhāyatana
    neuter
    1. position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.118; Exp. i.252, detailed identically at all the following passages, viz. DN ii.110 DN iii.260 (& 287) MN ii.13 AN i.40 AN iv.305 AN iv.348 AN v.61 Mentioned only at SN iv.77 (6 stations); Ps i.5 Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant) Dhs 247
    abhibhū + āyatana
    Abhibhāsana
    neuter
    1. enlightenment or delight (“light & delight” translation) Thag 1, 613 (= tosana Commentary )
    abhi + bhāsana from bhās
    Abhibhū
    1. (n adjective)
      1. overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of (—˚) DN iii.29 SN ii.284 Snp 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena-pamaddana 561), 642
      • Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i.e. unvanquished Lord of all DN i.18 DN iii.135 = Nd2 276 AN ii.24 AN iv.94 Iti 122 cp. DN-a i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako’ham asmīti)
      Vedic abhibhū, from abhi + bhū, cp. abhibhavati
    Abhibhūta
    1. overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished DN i.121 SN i.137 (jāti-jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra-silokena) AN i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi) Ja i.189 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (pareta). Often negative an˚; unconquered, e.g. Snp 934 Nd1 400; & ‣See phrase under abhibhū
    past participle of abhibhavati
    Abhimaṅgala
    adjective
    1. (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) “benedicted” blessed Vin iii.187 = Dhp-a i.409 O past participle avamangala
    2. abhi + mangala
    Abhimaṇḍita
    1. (past participle

      • ˚)
      1. adorned, embellished, beautified Mil 361 Sdhp 17
      abhi + maṇḍita
    Abhimata
    adjective
    1. desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C on Thag 1, 91
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhimata, e.g. Jtm 211; past participle of abhimanyate
    Abhimatthati
    (˚eti) & ˚mantheti
    1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy MN i.243 (sikharena muddhānaṁ ˚mantheti) SN i.127 Dhp 161 (variant reading ˚nth˚) Ja iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno) Dhp-a iii.152 (= kantati viddhaṁseti)
    2. to rub, to produce by friction (especially fire, aggiṁ; cp. Vedic agniṁ nirmanthati) MN i.240
    abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti
    Abhimaddati
    1. to crush SN i.102 AN i.198 Sdhp 288
    Sanskrit abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd
    Abhimana
    adjective
    1. having one’s mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. accusative ) Thag 1, 1122 Ja vi.451
    2. abhi + mano, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhimana, e.g. Mvu iii.259
    Abhimanāpa
    adjective
    1. very pleasing Vv-a 53 (where identical passage at Pv-a 71 has atimanāpa
    abhi + manāpa
    Abhimantheti
    1. ‣See abhimatthati
    Abhimāra
    1. a bandit, bravo, robber Ja ii.199 DN-a i.152
    cp. Sanskrit abhimara slaughter
    Abhimukha
    adjective
    1. facing, turned towards, approaching Ja ii.3 (˚ā ahesuṁ met each other). Usually—˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards DN i.50 (purattha˚) Ja i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa-rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚) 416 (Jetavana˚) Dhp-a i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚) Pv-a 3 (kāma˚, opposite vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚)
    • nt. ˚ṁ
    • adverb to towards Ja i.263 (matta-vāraṇe) Pv-a 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adjective) Dhp-a iii.310 (uttara˚)
    abhi + mukha
    Abhiyācati
    1. to ask, beg, entreat Snp 1101 cp. Nd2 86
    abhi + yācati
    Abhiyāti
    1. to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. accusative ) SN i.216 (
    2. aorist abhiyaṁsu, variant reading SS abhijiyiṁsu) Dhp-a iii.310 (
    3. aorist abhiyāsi as variant reading for Text reading pāyāsi; the identical p Vv-a 68 reads pāyāsi with variant reading upāyāsi)
    4. Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _
    Abhiyujjhati
    1. to contend, quarrel with Ja i.342
    abhi + yujjhati from yudh
    Abhiyuñjati
    1. to accuse, charge; intransitive fall to one’s share Vin iii.50 Vin iv.304
    abhi + yuj
    Abhiyoga
    1. practice, observance Dāvs iv.7
    cp. abhiyuñjati
    Abhiyogin
    adjective
    1. applying oneself to, practised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) DN iii.168
    from abhiyoga
    Abhiyobbana
    neuter
    1. much youthfulness, early or tender youth Thag 2, 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla Thag-a 211)
    abhi + yobbana
    Abhirakkhati
    1. to guard, protect Ja vi.589 (= pāleti Commentary ). cp. parirakkhati
    abhi + rakkhati
    Abhirakkhā
    feminine
    1. protection, guard Ja i.204 (= ārakkhā 203)
    from abhirakkhati
    Abhirata
    adjective (—˚)
    1. found of, indulging in, finding delight in AN iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (identical) Snp 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚) Ja v.382 (dāna˚) Pv-a 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚)
    past participle of abhiramati
    Abhiratatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being fond of, delighting in (—˚) Ja v.254 (kāma˚)
    abstract from abhirata
    Abhirati
    feminine
    1. delight or pleasure in (locative or—˚) SN i.185 SN iv.260 AN v.122 Dhp 88
    2. ˚an˚ displeasure discontent, distaste Vin ii.110 DN i.17 (+ paritassanā) SN i.185 SN v.132 AN iii.259 AN iv.50 AN v.72f. 122 Ja iii.395 DN-a i.111 Pv-a 187
    3. from abhi + ram
    Abhiratta
    adjective
    1. very red Ja v.156 figuratively very much excited or affected with (—˚) Snp 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.)
    abhi + ratta
    Abhiraddha
    adjective
    1. propitiated, satisfied AN iv.185 (+ attamana)
    past participle of abhi + rādh
    Abhiraddhi
    feminine
    1. only in negative an˚; displeasure, dislike, discontent AN i.79 DN-a i.52 (= kopass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ)
    from abhiraddha
    Abhiramati
    1. to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. locative ), to indulge in love Snp 718 Snp 1085 Ja i.192 Ja iii.189 Ja iii.393 Dhp-a i.119 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 145

      • ppr. active abhiranto only as
      • neuter ˚ṁ in
      • adverb phrase yathâbhirantaṁ after one’s liking, as much as he pleases after one’s heart’s content Vin i.34 MN i.170 Snp 53 ppr.
      • medium abhiramamāna Ja iii.188 Pv-a 162
      • pp abhirata (q.v.)
      1. -2nd causative abhiramāpeti (q.v.)
      2. abhi + ram
    Abhiramana
    neuter
    1. sporting, dallying, amusing oneself Pv-a 16
    from abhiramati
    Abhiramāpana
    neuter
    1. causing pleasure to (accusative ), being a source of pleasure making happy MN iii.132 (gāmante)
    2. from abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati
    Abhiramāpeti
    1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure Ja iii.393
    2. to delight, amuse, divert Ja i.61
    3. cp. abhiramāpana
    causative II. from abhiramati
    Abhiravati
    1. to shout ont Bu ii.90 = Ja i.18 (v.99)
    abhi + ravati
    Abhirādhita
    1. having succeeded in, fallen to one’s share, attained Thag 1, 259
    past participle of abhirādheti
    Abhirādhin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. pleasing, giving pleasure, satisfaction Ja iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento Commentary )
    from abhirādheti
    Abhirādheti
    1. to please, satisfy, make happy Ja i.421 DN-a i.52 aorist (preterite) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi Vv-a 130) Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi Vv-a 282) Ja i.421 Ja iii.386 (= paritosesi Commentary )

      • pp abhirādhita
      abhi + rādheti
    Abhiruci
    feminine
    1. delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction Pv-a 168 (= ajjhāsaya)
    Sanskrit abhiruci, from abhi + ruc
    Abhirucita
    adjective
    1. pleasing, agreeable, liked Ja i.402 Dhp-a i.45
    past participle from abhi + ruc
    Abhiruda
    1. (adjective
    • ˚)
    1. resounding with (the cries of animals, especially the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Thag 1, 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra-koñca˚) Ja iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra-koñca˚); vi.172 (identical = upagīta Commentary ), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta Commentary ), 483 (mayūra-koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haṁsa-koñca˚; = abhinādita Pv-a 157)
    • The form abhiruta occurs at Thag 1, 49
    Sanskrit abhiruta
    Abhirūpa
    adjective
    1. of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Snp 410 (= dassaniya’angapaccanga Snp-a 383) Ja i.207 Pug 52 DN-a i.281 (aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa) Vv-a 53 Pv-a 61 (abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa-pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g Vin i.268 DN i.47 DN i.114 DN i.120 SN ii.279 AN ii.86 AN ii.203 Nd2 659 Pug 66 Dhp-a i.281 (compar.) Pv-a 46
    abhi + rūpa
    Abhirūḷha
    1. mounted, gone up to, ascended Ja v.217 Dhp-a i.103
    past participle of abhirūhati
    Abhirūhati
    (abhiruhati)
    1. to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. accusative ) Dhp 321 Thag 1, 271 Ja i.259 Ja ii.388 Ja iii.220 Ja iv.138 (navaṁ); vi.272 (peculiar
    2. aorist ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi Commentary ) DN-a i.253
    3. absolutive abhiruyha Ja iii.189 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 152 (as variant reading Text has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaṁ), & abhirūhitvā Ja i.50 (pabbataṁ) ii.128
    4. abhi + ruh
    Abhirūhana
    neuter
    1. climbing, ascending, climb Mil 356
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ˚rūhana, e.g. Mvu ii.289
    Abhiroceti
    1. to like, to find delight in (
    2. accusative ), to desire, long for Ja iii.192 Ja v.222 (roceti) Vv 6423 (vataṁ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho Vv-a 282)
    3. to please, satisfy, entertain gladden Vv 6424 (but Vv-a 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati thus to no. 3)
    4. variant reading for atiroceti (to sur

      • passive in splendour) at Vv 8112 cp. also no. 2
      abhi + roceti, causative of ruc
    Abhiropana
    neuter
    1. concentration of mind, attention seems restricted to Ps ii. only Ps ii.82 (variant reading abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya) ‣See also abhiniropana
    from abhiropeti
    Abhiropeti
    1. to fix one’s mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aorist ˚ropayi = ropesi Vv-a 169), 3710 (identical; = pūjaṁ kāresi Vv-a 172), 604 (= pūjesi Vv-a 253); Dāvs v.19
    2. abhi + ropeti, cp. Sanskrit adhiropayati, causative of ruh
    Abhilakkhita
    adjective
    1. fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices Ja iv.1 DN-a i.18
    Sanskrit abhilakṣita in different meaning; past participle of abhi + lakṣ
    Abhilakkhitatta
    neuter
    1. having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics Dhs-a 62
    abstract from abhilakkhita
    Abhilaṅghati
    1. to ascend, rise, travel or passive over (of the moon traversing the sky) Ja iii.364 Ja vi.221
    2. abhi + langhati
    Abhilambati
    1. to hang down over (c. accusative ) MN iii.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati) Ja v.70 (papātaṁ) 269 (Vetaraṇiṁ).
    2. past participle abhilambita (q.v.)
    3. abhi + lambati
    Abhilambita
    adjective
    1. hanging down Ja v.407 (nīladuma˚)
    past participle of abhilambati
    Abhilāpa
    1. talk, phrasing, expression Snp 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561) Iti 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaṁ uncertain, variant readings abhipāyaṁ abhipāpāyaṁ abhisāpāyaṁ, abhisapāyaṁ, atisappāyaṁ. The corresponding passage SN iii.93 reads abhisapayaṁ: curse, and Commentary on Iti 89 explains abhilāpo ti akkoso ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 376 note 1) Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana combined with vyañjana & translation by Mrs. Rhys Davids as “a distinctive mark of discourse”) DN-a i.20 23, 281 Dhs-a 51
    from abhi + lap
    Abhilāsa
    1. desire, wish, longing Pv-a 154
    Sanskrit abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ
    Abhilekheti
    1. to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta-lekhaṁ ˚lekhayi)
    causative of abhi + likh
    Abhilepana
    neuter
    1. “smearing over”, stain, pollution Snp 1032 Snp 1033 = Nett 10, 11 ‣See Nd2 88 laggana “sticking to”, bandhana, upakkilesa
    abhi + lepana
    Abhivagga
    1. great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower MN i.87 = Nd2 1996
    abhi + vagga
    Abhivañcana
    neuter
    1. deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64
    abhi + vañc
    Abhivaṭṭa
    1. rained upon Dhp 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. Dhp-a iv.45) Mil 176 197, 286
    • Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dhp 335 “the abounding Bīraṇa grass”)
    past participle of abhivassati ‣See also abhivuṭṭha
    Abhivaḍḍhati
    1. to increase
    2. intranstitive DN i.113 DN i.195 (opposite hāyati) MN ii.225 AN iii.46 (bhogā a.) Dhp 24 Mil 374 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 133; Sdhp 288 Sdhp 523
    3. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow Ja iii.399 (vanaspatiṁ).
    4. past participle abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha; (q.v.)
    Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh
    Abhivaḍḍhana
    adjective neuter
    1. increasing (trs.), augmenting; feminine ˚ī Sdhp 68
    2. from abhivaḍḍhati
    Abhivaḍḍhi
    feminine
    1. increase, growth Mil 94
    • ‣ See also abhivuddhi
    cp. Sanskrit abhivṛddhi, from abhi + vṛdh
    Abhivaṇṇita
    1. praised Dīpavaṁsa i.4
    past participle of abhivanneti
    Abhivaṇṇeti
    1. to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - past participle abhivaṇṇita
    2. abhi + vanneti
    Abhivadati
    1. to speak out, declare, promise Ja i.83 = Vin i.36 Ja vi.220
    2. to speak (kindly to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combined with abhinandati, e.g. at MN i.109 MN i.266 MN i.458 SN iii.14 SN iv.36 sq. Mil 69
    3. causative abhivādeti
    abhi + vadati
    Abhivandati
    1. to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; gerundive ˚vandanīya Mil 227
    2. abhi + vandati
    Abhivassaka
    adjective
    1. raining, figuratively shedding, pouring ont, yielding Vv-a 38 (puppha˚)
    from abhivassati
    Abhivassati
    1. to rain, shed rain, pour; figuratively rain down, pour out, shed DN iii.160 (ābhivassaṁ metri causa) AN iii.34 Thag 1, 985 Ja i.18 (v.100 pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106 Mil 132 Mil 411 past participle abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha; (q.v.)
    2. causative II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Mil 132
    3. abhi + vassati from vṛṣ
    Abhivassin
    adjective = abhivassaka Iti 64 65 (sabbattha˚).
    Abhivādana
    neuter
    1. respectful greeting, salutation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion AN ii.180 AN iv.130 AN iv.276 Ja i.81 Ja i.82 Ja i.218 Dhp 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. Dhp-a ii.239) Vv-a 24 Sdhp 549 (˚sīla)
    from abhivādeti
    Abhivādeti
    1. to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208f. DN i.61 AN iii.223 AN iv.173 Vv 15 (abhivādayiṁ aorist = abhivādanaṁ kāresiṁ vandiṁ Vv-a 24) Mil 162 Often in combination with padakkhiṇaṁ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e.g. DN i.89 DN i.125 DN i.225 Snp 1010
    2. causative II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba)
    3. causative of abhivadati
    Abhivāyati
    1. to blow through, to pervade Mil 385
    abhi + vāyati; cp. Sanskrit abhivāti
    Abhivāreti
    1. to hold back, refuse, deny Ja v.325 (= nivāreti Commentary )
    abhi + vāreti, causative of vṛ
    Abhivāheti
    1. to remove, to put away Bu x.5
    abhi + vāheti, causative of vah
    Abhivijayati
    (& vijināti
    1. to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the absolutive ˚jiya at DN i.89 DN i.134 ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd
    2. plural ˚jinanti at Mil 39 the
    3. absolutive ˚jinitvā at MN i.253 Pug 66
    4. abhi + vijayati
    Abhiviññāpeti
    1. to turn somebody’s mind on (c. accusative ), to induce somebody dative to (
    2. accusative ) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṁ dhammaṁ abhiviññāpesi)
    3. abhi + viññāpeti
    Abhivitarati
    1. “to go down to”, i.e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. explanation of sañcicca at Vin ii.91 Vin iii.73 112; iv.290
    abhi + vitarati
    Abhivinaya
    1. higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combined with abhidhamma, e.g. DN iii.267 MN i.472 also with vinaya Vin v.1 singular
    abhi + vinaya
    Abhivindati
    1. to find, get, obtain Snp 460 (= labhati adhigacchati Snp-a 405)
    abhi + vindati
    Abhivisiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. most excellent, very distinguished DN-a i.99 313
    abhi + visiṭṭha
    Abhivissajjati
    1. to send out, send forth, deal out, give DN iii.160
    abhi + vissajjati
    Abhivissattha
    1. confided in, taken into confidence MN ii.52 (variant reading ˚visaṭṭha)
    abhi + vissattha, past participle of abhivissasati, Sanskrit abhiviśvasta
    Abhivuṭṭha
    1. poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Thag 1, 1065 Dhp 335 (gloss) Pv-a 29
    past participle of abhivassati ‣See also abhivaṭṭa
    Abhivuḍḍha
    1. increased, enriched Pv-a 150
    past participle of abhivaḍḍhati ‣See also ˚vuddha
    Abhivuddha
    1. grown up Mil 361
    past participle of abhivaḍḍhati ‣See also ˚vuḍḍha
    Abhivuddhi
    feminine
    1. increase, growth, prosperity Mil 34
    Sanskrit abhivṛddhi ‣See also abhivaḍḍhi
    Abhiveṭheti
    1. : Kern’s (Toevoegselen s.v.) proposed reading at Ja v.452 for ati˚; , which however does not agree with C explanation on p. 454
    Abhivedeti
    1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, 11
    2. to know Ja vi.175 (jānāti Commentary )
    abhi + causative of vid
    Abhivihacca
    1. having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at MN i.317 = SN iii.156 SN v.44 = Iti 20
    absolutive of abhi + vihanati
    Abhivyāpeti
    1. ‣See abhibyāpeti
    Abhisaṁvisati
    1. . Only in abhisaṁvisseyyagattaṁ (or-bhastaṁ or-santuṁ) Thag 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rhys Davids, following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻ a bag of skin with carrion filled ʼ
    abhi + saṁvisati
    Abhisaṁsati
    1. to execrate, revile, lay a curse on Ja v.174 (˚saṁsittha 3rd singular pret medium = paribhāsi Commentary )-
    2. aorist abhisasi Ja vi.187 Ja vi.505 Ja vi.522 (= akkosi Commentary ), 563 (identical).
    3. past participle abhisattha. cp. also abhisiṁsati
    4. Vedic abhiśaṁsati, abhi + śaṁs
    Abhisaṁsanā
    feminine
    1. is doubtful reading at Vv 6410 meaning “neighing” (of horses) Vv-a 272 279
    ? abhisaṁsati
    Abhisaṅkhata
    adjective
    1. prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done MN i.350 AN ii.43 AN v.343 Ja i.50 Nd1 186 (kappita +) Pv-a 7 Pv-a 8
    abhi + sankhata, past participle of abhisankharoti
    Abhisaṅkharoti
    (& ˚khāreti in Pot.)
    1. to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddh’âbhisankhāraṁ ˚khāreyya) DN i.184 (identical) SN ii.40 SN iii.87 SN iii.92 SN iv.132, 290; v.449 AN i.201 Snp 984 (absolutive ˚itvā having got up this curse, cp. Snp-a 582) Pv-a 56 (iddh’âbhisaṁkhāraṁ), 172 (identical), 212 (identical).
    2. past participle abhisaṅkhata (q.v.)
    3. abhi + sankharoti
    Abhisaṅkhāra
    1. putting forth, performance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz (a) gamiya˚; (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233 AN iv.180 & (b); iddha˚; (= iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16 DN i.106 SN iii.92 SN iv.289 SN v.270 Snp p. 107 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 172 Pv-a 212
    2. preparation, store accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum state ‣See for detail sankhāra SN iii.58 (an˚) Nd1 334 442; Nd2 s.v. Vb 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340 Dhs-a 357 (˚viññāna “storing intellect” Dhs translation 262)
    abhi + sankhāra
    Abhisaṅkhārika
    adjective
    1. what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya)
    from abhisankhāra
    Abhisaṅkhipati
    1. to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vb 1f. 82 sq., 216 sq. 400 Mil 46
    abhi + sankhipati
    Abhisaṅga
    1. I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to Ja v.6 Nett 110 112 Dhs-a 129 (˚hetukaṁ dukkhaṁ) 249 (˚rasa)
    from abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sanskrit abhisanga
    Abhisaṅgin
    adjective
    1. cleaving to (—˚) Sdhp 566
    from abhisanga
    Abhisajjati
    1. to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) DN i.91 (= kodha-vasena laggati DN-a i.257) iii.159 Ja iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Avs i.286); v.175 (= kopeti Commentary ) Dhp 408 (abhisaje Pot. kujjhāpana-vasena laggapeyya Dhp-a iv.182) Pug 30 36 ‣See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā
    abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga
    Abhisajjana
    neuter-adjective
    1. only as adverb feminine ˚nī epithet of vācā scolding abusing, cursing. AN v.265 (para˚). cp. next
    2. abstract from abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2
    Abhisajjanā
    feminine
    1. at Snp 49 evidently means “scolding, cursing, being in bad temper” (cp. abhisajjati), as its combination with vāc’âbhilāpa indicates, but is explained both by Nd2 & Buddhaghosa as “sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire” (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga ‣See Nd2 89 & 107 Snp-a 98 (sineha-vasena) cp. also the compromise-explanation by Buddhaghosa of abhisajjati as kodha-vasena laggati (DN-a i.257)
    abstract from abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana
    Abhisañcināti
    (& ˚cayati)
    1. to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaṁ = ˚sañcineyyaṁ Vv-a 202)
    abhi + sañcināti
    Abhisañcetayita
    1. raised into consciousness, thought out, intended, planned MN i.350 SN ii.65 SN iv.132 AN v.343
    past participle of abhisañceteti
    Abhisañceteti
    1. to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan SN ii.82 past participle abhisañcetayita (q.v.)
    2. abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti
    Abhisaññā
    feminine. Only in the compound abhi-saññā-nirodha DN i.179 DN i.184 The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻ trance ʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers ‣See saññā-vedayita-nirodha.
    Abhisaññūhati
    1. to heap up, concentrate Vb 1 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400 Mil 46 cp. abhisaṅkhipati
    abhi + saññūhati, i.e. saṁ-ni-ūhati
    Abhisaṭa
    1. (med.) streamed forth, come together Ja vi.56 (= sannipatita Commentary ). 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268
    2. past participle of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ; to flow
    Abhisatta
    1. cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled Ja iii.460 Ja v.71 Snp-a 364 (= akkuṭṭha) Vv-a 335
    past participle of abhisapati, cp. Sanskrit abhiśapta, from abhi + śap
    Abhisattha
    1. cursed, accursed Thag 1, 118 “old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris JP T S. 1886 145 gives the commentator’s equivalents, “commanded worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern’s translation (Toevoegselen s.v.) ʻ hurried up ʼ seems to us impossible
    past participle of abhisaṁsati
    Abhisaddahati
    1. to have faith in, believe in (c. accusative ) believe SN v.226 Thag 1, 785 Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya paṭiñeyya Pv-a 226); Nett 11 Mil 258 Pv-a 26 Dāvs iii.58
    2. abhi + saddahati, cp. Sanskrit abhiśraddadhāti, e.g. Divy 17 Divy 337
    Abhisantāpeti
    1. to burn out, scorch, destroy MN i.121
    ahhi + santāpeti, causative of santapati
    Abhisanda
    1. outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result only in following phrases: cattāro puññ’âbhisandā kusal’âbhisandā (yields in merit) SN v.391f. AN ii.54f. iii.51, 337; vi.245, & kamm’âbhisanda result of kamma Mil 276
    • cp. abhisandana
    abhi + sanda of syad, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhisyanda, e.g. Mvu ii.276
    Abhisandana
    neuter
    1. result, outcome, consequence Ps i.17 (sukhassa)
    = abhisanda
    Abhisandahati
    1. to put together, to make ready Thag 1, 151 absolutive abhisandhāya in sense of a preposition = on account of, because of Ja ii.386 (= paṭicca Commentary )
    2. abhi + sandahati of saṁ + dhā
    Abhisandeti
    1. to make overflow, to make full, fill, pervade DN i.73 DN i.74
    abhi + sandeti, causative of syad
    Abhisanna
    adjective
    1. overflowing, filled with (—˚), full Vin i.279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Mil 134) Ja i.17 (v.88; pītiyā) Mil 112 (duggandha˚)
    past participle of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sanskrit abhisanna
    Abhisapati
    1. to execrate, curse, accurse Vin iv.276 Ja iv.389 Ja v.87 Dhp-a i.42
    • pp abhisatta
    abhi + sapati, of śap
    Abhisapana
    neuter
    1. cursing, curse Pv-a 144 (so read for abhisampanna)
    from abhisapati
    Abhisamaya
    1. “coming by completely”, insight into, comprehension, realization clear understanding, grasp, penetration ‣See on term Kvu translation 381 sq
    • Especially in full phrases: attha˚; grasp of what is proficient SN i.87 = AN iii.49 = Iti 17 cp. AN ii.46
    • ariyasaccānaṁ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths SN v.415 SN v.440 SN v.441 cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāṁ caturnāṁ āryasatyānāṁ a.

    Snp 758 (sacca˚ = sacc’âvabodha Snp-a 509) Mil 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚) 525 (saccānaṁ); dhamm’âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion cp. dharm’âbhisamaya Divy 200

    1. SN ii.134 Mil 20 Mil 350 Vv-a 219 Pv-a 9 etc frequent; sammā- mān’âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase” acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaṁ vivattayi saññojanaṁ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa” at SN iv.205 SN iv.207 SN iv.399 AN iii.246 AN iii.444 Iti 47 cp. māna˚ SN i.188 = Thag 2, 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, translation by Mrs. Rhys Davids in Kindred Sayings 239 “hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene”) Snp 342 (explained by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṁ Snp-a 344). Also in following passages: SN ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (identical), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saṁyutta) Snp 737 (phassa˚, explained ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa-nirodha Snp-a 509); Ps ii.215 Pug 41 Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha Vv-a 85) DN-a i.32 Dhp-a i.109 Vv-a 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dīpavaṁsa i.31
    2. ˚anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly SN iii.260 Pug 21 Dhs 390 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rhys Davids trsls. “lack of coordination”)
    abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit abhisamaya, e.g. Divy 200 Divy 654
    Abhisamāgacchati
    1. to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master Kp-a 236 (for abhisamecca Snp 143)
    abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati
    Abhisamācārika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181 AN ii.243f.; of dhamma MN i.469 AN iii.14f.; 422
    abhi + samācārika, to samācāra
    Abhisamikkhati
    (& ˚ekkhati),
    1. to behold ‣See, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg medium ˚samekkhase = olokesi Commentary ).
    2. absolutive ˚samikkha ˚samekkha; [B. Sanskrit ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc. Ja v.340 (˚samikkha, variant reading sañcikkha = passitvā Commentary ); 393 394 (= disvā Commentary )
    3. abhi + sam + ; īks, cp. samikkhati
    Abhisameta
    1. completely grasped or realised, understood mastered SN v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.) AN iv.384 (appattaṁ asacchikataṁ +)
    past participle of abhisameti, from abhi + sam + i, taken as causative formation, against the regular form Sanskrit P. samita & B. Sanskrit abhisamita
    Abhisametāvin
    adjective
    1. commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189 SN ii.133 SN v.458f.
    possessive adjective formation, equalling an agent noun formation, past participle abhisameta
    Abhisameti
    1. to come by, to attain, to realise grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Mil 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaṁ abhisameti). Freg. in combinationabhisambujjhati abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e.g. SN ii.25 SN iii.139; Kvu 321 future ˚samessati SN v.441
    2. aorist ˚samiṁsu Mil 350
    3. ˚samesuṁ SN v.415
    4. absolutive ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as
    5. causative form. Trenckner’s explanationNote. 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) SN v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding). AN v.50 (samm’attha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient) Snp 143 (= abhisamāgantvā Kp-a 236) and ˚sametvā SN ii.25 SN iii.139
    6. past participle abhisameta (q.v.)
    7. abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e.g.
    8. aorist ˚samiṁsu & ˚samesuṁ, past participle sameta: Sanskrit samita. cp. B. Sanskrit abhisamayati, either
    9. causative or
    10. denominative formation, Divy 617 caturāryasatyāni a.
    Abhisampanna
    1. at Pv-a 144 is wrong reading for variant reading abhisapana (curse)
    Abhisamparāya
    future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in following phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻ what fate in the world-to-come ʼ, DN ii.91 Vin i.293 SN iv.59 SN iv.63 SN v.346, 356, 369 Dhp-a i.221
    • evaṁ-gatika evanabhisamparāya
    • adjective “leading to such & such a rebirth such & such a
    • future state” DN i.16 DN i.24 DN i.32 DN i.33 etc (= evaṁ-vidhā paralokā ti DN-a i.108)
    • abhisamparāyaṁ (
    • accusative as
    • adverb ) in
    • future, after death AN i.48 AN ii.197 AN iii.347 iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave Pv-a 200)
    • diṭṭhe c’eva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca “in this world and in the world to come” AN ii.61 Pug 38 Mil 162 Pv-a 195 etc. (‣ See also diṭṭha)
    • Used absolutely at Pv-a 122 (= fate)
    abhi + samparāya
    Abhisambujjhati
    1. to become wideawake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiṁ) DN iii.135 Iti 121 aorist ˚sambujjhi SN v.433 Pv-a 19 In combinationabhisambujjhati abhisameti, e.g. SN ii.25 SN iii.139

      • ppr. med ˚sambudhāna;
      • past participle ˚sambuddha -
      • causative ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten;
      • past participle ˚bodhita
      abhi + sambujjhati
    Abhisambujjhana
    neuter = abhisambodhi Ja i.59
    Abhisambuddha
    1. (a) (pass.) realised, perfectly understood DN iii.273 SN iv.331 Iti 121
    • an˚ not understood MN i.71 MN i.92 MN i.114 MN i.163 MN i.240

      • (b (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully-awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising enlightened (in or as to =
      • accusative ) Vin i.1 DN ii.4 MN i.6 (sammāsambodhiṁ) SN i.68 SN i.138 SN i.139 & passim Pv-a 94 Pv-a 99
      past participle of abhisambujjhati
    Abhisambuddhatta
    neuter
    1. thorough realisation, perfect understanding SN v.433
    abstract from abhisambuddha
    Abhisambudhāna
    adjective
    1. awaking realising, knowing, understanding Dhp 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho Dhp-a i.337)
    formation of a ppr. medium from
  • past participle abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚
  • Abhisambodhi
    feminine
    1. the highest enlightenment Ja i.14 (parama˚). cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā-) sambodhi
    abhi + sambodhi
    Abhisambodhita
    adjective
    1. awakened to the highest wisdom Pv-a 137 (Bhagavā)
    past participle of abhisambodheti, causative of abhi + sambujjhati
    Abhisambhava
    1. only in dur˚; hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome SN v.454 AN v.202 Snp 429 Snp 701 Ja v.269 Ja vi.139 Ja vi.439 Abhisambhavati (bhoti)
    from abhisambhavati
    Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti)
    1. “to come up to”, i.e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome) to attain, reach, to bear AN iv.241 Thag 1, 436 Nd1 471 485 Ja iii.140 Ja v.150 Ja v.417 Ja vi.292 Ja vi.293 Ja vi.507 (future med ˚sambhossaṁ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi Commentary ); Ps ii.193.
    2. absolutive ˚bhutvā Thag 1, 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Snp 52 (cp. Nd2 85).
    3. aorist ˚bhosi DN ii.232
    4. gerundive ˚bhavanīya DN ii.210 Ps ii.193

      • ‣ See also abhisambhuṇāti
      abhi + sambhavati
    Abhisambhuṇāti
    1. to be able (to get or reach); only in neg ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268) Nd1 77 312
    considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of different origin & etymology; also in Bh. Sanskrit frequently
    Abhisambhū
    adjective
    1. getting, attaining (?) DN ii.255 (lomahaṁsa˚)
    from abhi + sam + bhū
    Abhisambhūta
    1. attained, got Sdhp 556
    past participle of abhisambhavati
    Abhisammati
    1. to cease, stop; trs. (causative ) to allay, pacify, still Ja vi.420 (
    2. past participle abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain)
    3. abhi + śam, Sanskrit abhiśamyati
    Abhisara
    1. retinue Ja v.373
    from abhi + sarati, of sṛ; to go
    Abhisallekhika
    adjective
    1. austere, stern, only in feminine ˚ā (scil. kathā) AN iii.117f.; iv.352, 357; v.67
    2. abhi + sallekha + ika
    Abhisavati
    (better ˚ssavati ?)
    1. to flow towards or into Ja vi.359 (najjo Gangaṁ a.)
    abhi + savati, of sru
    Abhisasi
    aorist of abhisaṁsati (q.v.)
    Abhisādheti
    1. to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain Ja vi.180 Mil 264
    abhi + sādheti
    Abhisāpa
    1. a curse, anathema SN iii.93 = Iti 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and Iti-a explains by akkosa ‣See variant readings under abhilāpa & cp. ; Psalms of the Brethren 376 note 1.) Thag 1, 1118
    abhisapati
    Abhisāriyā
    feminine
    1. a woman who goes to meet her lover Ja iii.139
    Sanskrit abhisārikā, from abhi + sṛ
    Abhisāreti
    1. to approach, to persecute Ja vi.377
    abhi + sāreti, causative of abhisarati
    Abhisiṁsati
    1. to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aorist ˚sīsi. variant reading ˚sisi. Vv-a 316 explains by icchi sampaṭicchi)
    2. = abhisaṁsati, abhi + śaṁs. As to Sanskrit śaṁs → Pali siṁs cp. āsiṁsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the “infernals”, cp. im-precare
    Abhisiñcati
    1. to sprinkle over, figuratively to anoint (King), to consecrate AN i.107 (Khattiy’âbhisekena Ja i.399 (figuratively ˚itvā absolutive ii.409 (identical); vi.161 (identical) Nd1 298 Mil 336 (amatena lokaṁ abhisiñci Bhagavā) Pv-a 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca …)-
    2. passive abhisiñcati Mil 359
    3. past participle abhisitta.
    4. causative abhiseceti
    5. abhi + siñncati from sic to sprinkle ‣See also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚
    Abhisitta
    1. sprinkled over, anointed Snp 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298) Mil 336 (amatena loka a.)
    2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more frequently in this connection is avasitta), Vin iii.44 AN i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiy’âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (variant reading for avasitta also an˚)
    past participle of abhisiñcati, Sanskrit ˚sikta
    Abhiseka
    1. anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) AN i.107 (cp. abhisitta) ii.87 read abhisek’-anabhisitto Ja ii.104 Ja ii.352 Dhp-a i.350 Pv-a 74 cp. ābhisekika
    from abhi + sic, cp. Sanskrit abhiṣeka
    Abhisecana
    neuter = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Thag 2, 239 & 245 (udaka˚)
    • (b) consecration Ja ii.353
    Abhiseceti
    1. to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated Ja v.26 (imperative abhisecayassu)
    2. causative of abhisiñcati
    Abhisevanā
    feminine
    1. pursuit, indulgence in (—˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚)
    abhi + sevana from sev
    Abhissara
    adjective
    1. only negative an˚; in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro “without a Lord or protector MN ii.68 (variant reading ˚abhisaro); Ps i.126 (variant reading identical)
    abhi + issara
    Abhihaṁsati
    1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy SN iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuṁ) AN v.350 (identical). 2. (intransitive) to find delight in (c.
    2. accusative ), to enjoy SN v.74 (rūpaṁ manāpaṁ) AN iv.419f. (Text reads ˚hiṁsamāna jhānaṁ variant reading ˚hisamāna)
    3. abhi + haṁsati from hṛṣ
    Abhihaṭa
    1. brought, offered, presented, fetched DN i.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraṁ gahetvā āhaṭaṁ bhikkhaṁ Pug AN 231) Dhp-a ii.79
    past participle of abhiharati
    Abhihaṭṭhuṁ
    1. . Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuṁ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. i.224 AN v.350 352 SN iv.190 SN v.53, 300 ‣See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440
    absolutive of abhiharati
    Abhihata
    1. hit, struck Pv-a 55
    past participle of abhihanati
    Abhihanati
    (& ˚hanti)
    1. to strike, hit Pv-a 258
    2. to overpower, kill, destroy Ja v.174 (infinitive ˚hantu for Text hantuṁ).
    3. past participle abhihata (q.v.)
    abhi + ; han
    Abhiharati
    1. -1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch DN iii.170 Ja i.54 Ja i.157 Ja iii.537 iv.421 DN-a i.272
    • to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sanskrit anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚ AN i.198
    • passive abhihariyati Vv-a 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710 corresponding with ābhata Vv-a 172).
    • past participle abhihaṭa (q.v.)
    • causative abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought to gain, to acquire DN ii.188 = 192 = 195 Thag 1, 637 Ja iv.421 (abhihārayaṁ with gloss abhibhārayiṁ)

  • to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Snp 414 (Paṇḍavaṁ ˚hāresi = āruhi Snp-a 383), 708 (vanantaṁ abhihāraye vanaṁ gaccheyya Snp-a 495) Thag 2, 146 (

    • aorist ˚hārayiṁ uyyānaṁ = upanesi Thag-a 138)
    • to put on (mail) only in
    • future abhihessati Ja iv.92 (kavacaṁ; Commentary explains wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati)

  • At Ja vi.27 kiṁ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaṁ jarā abhihessati the latter is

    • future of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati
    abhi + harati, cp. Sanskrit abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati
  • Abhihāra
    1. bringing, offering, gift SN i.82 Snp 710 Ja i.81 (āsanâ)
    from abhiharati
    Abhihiṁsati
    1. spurious reading at AN iv.419 for ˚haṁsati (q.v.)
    Abhihiṁsanā
    (& ˚ṁ)
    1. neighing Vv.64; 10 = Vv-a 279 (gloss abhihesana) ‣See in detail under abhisaṁsanā
    for abhihesanā cp. Pali hesā = Sanskrit hreṣā, & hesitaṁ
    Abhihīta
    1. SN i.50 Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻ So enchanted was I by the Buddha’s rune ʼ The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet
    Abhihesana
    1. ‣See abhihiṁsanā;
    Abhihessati
    1. ‣See abhihāreti 3 & 4
    Abhīta
    adjective
    1. fearless Ja vi.193 ‣See also abhida 1
    a + bhīta
    Abhīruka
    adjective
    1. fearless DN-a i.250
    a + bhīru + ka
    Abhumma
    adjective
    1. groundless, unfounded, unsubstantial, Ja v.178 Ja vi.495
    a + bhumma
    Abhūta
    adjective
    1. not real, false, not true, usually as neuter ˚ṁ falsehood, lie, deceit Snp 387 Iti 37 instr abhūtena falsely DN i.161

      1. ˚vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Snp 661 Dhp 306 = Iti 42 explained as “ariy’ûpavāda-vasena alika-vādin” Snp-a 478 as “tucchena paraṁ abhācikkhanto Dhp-a iii.477
      a + bhūta
    Abhejja
    adjective
    1. not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Snp 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi) Ja i.263 (varasūra …) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character abhijja-hadaya) Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug AN 212) Mil 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra)
    gerundive of a + bhid, cp. Sanskrit abhedya
    Amacca
    1. friend, companion, fellow-worker, helper, esp one who gives his advice, a bosom-friend Iti 73 Ja vi.512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚-paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Frequently in combination with mitta as mitt’âmaccā, friends & colleagues DN iii.189–⁠90; SN 190 = AN ii.67 Pv-a 29 or with ñātī (ñāti-sālohitā intimate friends & near-relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126 Snp p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca Snp-a 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā AN i.222 Pv-a 28 amaccā ñāti-sanghā ca AN i.152 2. Especially a king’s intimate friend, king’s favourite confidant Ja i.262 Pv-a 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba-kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combined with pārisajjā (
    2. plural ) viz. DN i.136 (= piya-sahāyaka DN-a i.297 but cp. the following explanation of pārisajjā as “sesā āṇatti-karā”) Vin i.348 DN iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā) AN i.142 (catunnaṁ mahārājānaṁ a. pārisajjā) ‣See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjee; Public Administration in Ancient India
    3. past participle 106

      1. -120
      Vedic amātya (only in meaning “companion”), adjective formation from amā an adverb ial
    4. locative -genitive of pronote 1st person, Sanskrit ahaṁ = Indogermanic *emo (cp. Sanskrit m-ama), meaning “(those) of me or with me”, i.e. those who are in my house
    Amajja
    1. a bud Ja v.416 (= makula Commentary )
    etymology?
    Amajjapāyaka
    1. one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler Ja ii.192
    a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sanskrit amadyapa
    Amata1
    neuter
    1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit amṛta-varṣa “rain of Ambrosia” Jtm 221)
    2. A general conception of a state of durability & non-change a state of security i.e. where there is not any more rebirth or re-death. So Buddhaghosa at Kp-a 180 (on Snp 225) “na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati”, or at Dhp-a i.228 “ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati"
    3. Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṁ amatassa dvārā) Vin i.39 DN ii.39 DN ii.217 DN ii.241 SN i.32 (= rāgadosamoha-khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta “sprinkled with A.”); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti) AN i.45f.; iii.451; iv.455; v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā) Ja i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā-nibbāna) Snp 204 Snp 225 Snp 228(= nibbāna Kp-a 185) Thag 1, 310 (= agada antidote) Iti 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra) Dhp 114 Dhp 374 (= amata-mahā-nibbāna Dhp-a iv.110) Mil 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataṁ & nibbānaṁ amataṁ), 336 (amatena lokaṁ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhamm; ’âmataṁ) DN-a i.217 (˚nibbāna) Dhp-a i.87 (˚ṁ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; v.31; Sdhp 1 Sdhp 209 Sdhp 530 Sdhp 571
      1. ˚ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) SN v.41 SN v.54 SN v.181 SN v.220 SN v.232 AN iii.79 AN iii.304 AN iv.46f. 317 387; v.105 sq. Snp 635 Thag 1, 179 748 Dhp 411 (amataṁ nibbānaṁ ogahetvā Dhp-a iv.186) Vv 5020
      • ˚osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Mil 247
      • ˚gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna SN i.123 SN iv.370 SN v.8 AN iii.329 Thag 2, 222
      • ˚dasa one who ‣Sees Amata or Nibbāna Thag 1, 336
      • ˚dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi)
      • ˚dvāra the door to Nibbāna MN i.353 SN i.137 = Vin i.5 SN ii.43 SN ii.45 SN ii.58 SN ii.80 AN v.346
      • ˚dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna AN iii.356
      • ˚patta having attained to Ambrosia AN iv.455
      • ˚pada the region or place of Ambrosia SN i.212 (“Bourne Ambrosial” trsln. p. 274); ii.280 Dhp 21 (= amatassa adhigama -vupāyo vuttaṁ hoti Dhp-a i.228)
      • ˚phala ambrosial fruit SN i.173 = Snp 80
      • ˚magga the path to Ambrosia Dhp-a i.94
      a + mata = mṛta past participle of mṛ; , Vedic amṛta = Latin im-mort-a(lis
    Amata2
    adjective
    1. belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Snp 452 = SN i.189 (amatā vācā = amata-sadisā sādubhāvena Snp-a 399: “ambrosial”), 960 (gacchato amataṁ disaṁ nibbānaṁ, taṁ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti Snp-a 572). Perhaps also at Iti 46 = 62 (amataṁ dhātuṁ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu)
    ‣See amata1
    Amatabbāka
    1. (?) at Vv-a 111 accusative to Hardy (Index) “a precious stone of dark blue colour"
    Amattaññu
    adjective
    1. not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate immoderate Iti 23 (bhojanamhi) Dhp 7 (identical) Pug 21
    a + matta + ˚ñu = Sanskrit amātrajña
    Amattaññutā
    feminine
    1. immoderation (in food) DN iii.213 Iti 23 (bhojane) Pug 21 Dhs 1346 (bhojane) Dhs-a 402
    abstract to preceding
    Amatteyyatā
    feminine
    1. irreverence towards one’s mother DN iii.70 DN iii.71
    from matteyyatā
    Amanussa
    1. a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277 DN i.116 SN i.91 Ja i.99 Dhs 617 Mil 207 Dhs-a 319 Dhp-a i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted) Pv-a 216
    • cp. amānusa
    a + manussa
    Amanussika
    adjective
    1. belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202 203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon)
    from amanussa
    Amama
    adjective
    1. not egotistical, unselfish Snp 220 (+ subbata), 777 Ja iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 (= mamāyana-taṇhā-rahita Commentary ); Pv iv.134 (= mamaṁkāravirahita Pv-a 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combined with nirāsa (free from longing), at Snp 469 = 494 Ud 32 Ja iv.303 Ja vi.259
    a + mama, genitive of ahaṁ, pronote 1st person, literally “not (saying: this is) of me”
    Amara
    adjective
    1. not mortal, not subject to death Thag 1, 276 Snp 249 (= amara-bhāva-patthanatāya pavatta-kāya-kilesa Snp-a 291) Ja v.80 (= amaraṇa-sabhāva) 218; Dāvs v.62
    a + mara from mṛ
    Amaratta
    neuter
    1. immortality Ja v.223 (= devatta Commentary )
    abstract from amara
    Amarā
    1. (?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā-vikkhepika eel-wobbler, one who practices eel-wriggling, from ˚vikkhepa “oscillation like the a. fish” In English idiom “a man who sits on the fence” DN i.24 MN i.521 Ps i.155. The explanation given by Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.115 is “amarā nāma maccha-jāti, sā ummujjana-nimmujjan-ādi vasena.. gahetuṁ na sakkoti” etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern’s explanationToevoegselen 71 does not help to clear it up
    Amala
    adjective
    1. without stain or fault Ja v.4 Sdhp 246 Sdhp 591 Sdhp 596
    a + mala
    Amassuka
    adjective
    1. beardless Ja ii.185
    a + massu + ka
    Amājāta
    adjective
    1. born in the house, of a slave Ja i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, explained by Commentary forcibly as “āma ahaṁ vo dāsī ti"!) ‣See also āmāya
    amā + jāta; amā adverb “at home”, Vedic amā ‣See under amacca
    Amātika
    adjective
    1. without a mother, motherless Ja v.251
    a + mātika from mātā
    Amānusa
    adjective
    1. non-or superhuman unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non-human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as noun ); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas).
    2. feminine ˚ī Dhp 373 (rati = dibbā rati Dhp-a iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love)
    3. Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa
    Amāmaka
    adjective
    1. “not of me” i.e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me Dhp-a i.66
    a + mama + ka, cp. amama
    Amāya
    adjective
    1. not deceiving, open, honest Snp 941 ‣See Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā. cp. next
    a + māyā
    Amāyāvin
    adjective
    1. without guile, not deceiving, honest DN iii.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (identical), 237 Dhp-a i.69 (asaṭhena a.)
    a + māyāvin, cp. amāya
    Amitābha
    adjective
    1. of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255
    a + mita ( past participle of + ā + bhā
    Amitta
    1. one who is not friend, an enemy DN iii.185 Iti 83 Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455) Dhp 66 Dhp 207 Ja vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies)
    Vedic amitra; a + mitta
    Amilātatā
    feminine
    1. the condition of not being withered Ja v.156
    a + milāta +
    Amu˚
    1. ; base of demonstrative pronoun “that” ‣See asu.

    Amucchita
    adjective
    1. not infatuated (literally not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) DN iii.46 MN i.369 SN ii.194 ‣See ajjhopanna
    a + mucchita
    Amutta
    adjective
    1. not released, not free from (c. ablative) Iti 93 (mārabandhanā)
    a + mutta
    Amutra
    adverb
    1. in that place, there; in another state of existence DN i.4 DN i.14 DN i.184 Iti 99 Amulha-vinaya
    pronoun base amu + tra
    Amūḷha-vinaya
    1. "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity” (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27) iv.207, 351 MN ii.248
    Amoha
    adjective
    1. not dull. As noun absence of stupidity or delusion DN iii.214 Pug 25 The form amogha occurs at Ja vi.26 in the meaning of “efficacious, auspicious” (said of ratyā nights)
    2. a + moha, cp. Sanskrit amogha
    Amba
    the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica DN i.46 DN i.53 DN i.235 Ja ii.105 160 Vv 7910 Pug 45 Mil 46 Pv-a 153 Pv-a 187.
    1. ˚aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the mango fruit Dhp-a iii.207 208
    2. ˚ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795 Vv-a 305
    • ˚kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika Vv-a 147)
    • ˚pakka a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 394 Dhp-a iii.207
    • ˚panta a border of mango trees Vv-a 198
    • ˚pānaka a drink made from mangoes Dhp-a iii.207
    • ˚piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes Ja iii.53 Dhp-a iii.207
    • ˚pesikā the peel, rind, of the mango fruit Vin ii.109
    • ˚potaka a mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206f. -phala a mango fruit Pv-a 273 Pv-a 274
    • ˚rukkha a mango tree Dhp-a iii.207 Vv-a 198
    • ˚vana a mango grove or wood DN ii.126 Ja i.139 Vv-a 305
    • ˚siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797
    Derivation unknown. Not found in pre-Buddhist literature. The Sanskrit is āmra. Probably non-Aryan
    Ambaka1
    adjective
    1. “womanish” (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combination with bālā AN iii.349 (variant reading amma˚) v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with variant reading appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in different meaning)
    1. ˚maddarī ‣See next
    = ambakā?
    Ambaka2

    a little mango, only in ˚maddarī a kiṇd of bird etymology uncertain

    1. AN i.188
    demin. of amba
    Ambakā
    feminine
    1. mother, good wife used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232 DN ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī explained by Buddhaghosa at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā)
    Sanskrit ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife ‣See Pali amma & cp. also Sanskrit ambālikā feminine
    Ambara1
    neuter
    1. the sky, Dāvs i.38; iv.51; v.32
    • Note. At Ja v.390 we have to read muraja-ālambara, and not mura-jāla-ambara
    Vedic ambara circumference, horizon
    Ambara2
    1. masculine
    • nt.)
    1. some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya Vv-a 236)
    etymology = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combination rattambara = ratta-kambala
  • The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak-ambala (ambara) instead of ratta-kambala
  • Ambala
    1. at Ja ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka-āsana-sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?
    Ambāṭaka
    1. the hog-plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana) DN-a i.271 (˚rukkha)
    Ambila
    adjective
    1. sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka kasāya, madhura ‣See under rasa: thus at Mil 56 Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629
    • J; i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚) DN-a i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel) Dhp-a ii.85 (ati-ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta)
    Sanskrit amla = Latin amarus
    Ambu
    neuter
    1. water Ja v.6 Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaṁ); Dāvs ii.16
    • cp. ambha
    1. ˚cārin “living in the water”, a fish Snp 62 (= maccha Nd2 91)
    2. ˚sevāla a water-plant Thag 1, 113
    Vedic ambu & ambhas = Latin imber rain; cp. also Sanskrit abhra rain-cloud ‣See Pali abbha
    Ambuja
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. “water-born”, i.e. 1. masculine a fish SN i.52
      2. neuter a lotus Snp 845 (paduma Nd1 202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360
      ambu + ja of; jan
    Ambuda
    1. “water-giver”, a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270 Sdhp 275
    ambu + da from
    Ambha
    Ambho;
    neuter
    1. water, sea Dāvs iv.54
    ‣See ambu
    Ambhaka
    1. ‣See ambaka
    Ambho
    indeclinable
    1. participle of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapan’âdhivacana) Ja ii.3 Pv-a 62
    • to mark reproach anger = you silly, you rascal DN i.194 Iti 114 Ja i.174 (variant reading amho), 254 Mil 48
    • from haṁ + bho ‣See bho, originally “hallo you there”
    Amma
    indeclinable
    1. endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear DN i.93 Ja ii.133 Ja iv.1 Ja iv.281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!) Dhp-a ii.87 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 74. (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman Ja i.292 Pv-a 63 Dhp-a ii.44 to a girl Pv-a 6 to a daughter Dhp-a ii.48 Dhp-a iii.172
    • cp. ambakā
    voc. of ammā
    Ammaṇa
    neuter
    1. a trough Ja v.297 Ja vi.381 (bhatt˚). 2. a certain measure of capacity Ja i.62 Ja ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). As ˚ka at Ja ii.117 (variant reading ampaṇaka) DN-a i.84
    2. of uncertain etymology; Sanskrit armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli ‣See on form & meaning Childers s.v. and Kern,; Toevoegselen p. 72
    Ammā
    feminine
    1. mother Ja iii.392 (genitive ammāya)
    • Voc. amma ‣See sep.
    onomat. from child language; Sanskrit ambā, cp. Latin amita father’s sister & amāre to love
    Amha
    Amhan;
    neuter
    1. a stone Snp 443 (instrumental amhanā, but Snp-a 392 reads asmanā pāsāṇena)
    1. ˚maya made of stone, hard Dhp 161 (= pāsāṇa˚ Dhp-a iii.151)
    Sanskrit aśman ‣See also asama2
    Amha, Amhi
    1. ‣See atthi
    Amhā
    feminine
    1. a cow (?) AN i.229 The Commentary says nothing. Amhakam, Amhe
    etymology uncertain; Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 201 too vague
    Amhākaṁ, Amhe
    1. ‣See ahaṁ;
    Amho = ambho
    1. J i.174 (variant reading )
    Aya1
    1. ‣See ayo
    Aya2
    1. (from i, go) 1. income, in aya-potthaka receipt book Ja i.2
    • inlet (for water, aya-mukha DN i.74 AN ii.166 AN iv.287
    Ayaṁ
    1. (pronoun )

      1. demonstrative pronoun “this, he”;
      2. feminine ayaṁ;
      3. neuter idaṁ & imaṁ “this, it” etc. This pronoun combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚; (ayaṁ in nominative
      4. masculine &
      5. feminine ) & im˚; (identical in nominative
      6. neuter ).

        1. I. Forms. A. (singular) nominative masculine ayaṁ Snp 235 Ja i.168 Ja i.279
        2. feminine ayaṁ Sanskrit iyaṁ
          1. Kh vii.12 Ja ii.128 Ja ii.133 neuter idaṁ Snp 224 Ja iii.53 & imaṁ Mil 46
          2. accusative
          3. masculine imaṁ Ja ii.160
          4. feminine imaṁ Sanskrit īmāṁ
            1. Snp 545 Snp 1002 Ja i.280 genitive dative m imassa Ja i.222 Ja i.279 & assa Snp 234 Snp 1100 Kh vii.12 dative Ja ii.158 feminine imissā Ja i.179 & assā Sanskrit asyāḥ
              1. Ja i.290 Dhp-a iii.172 instrumental masculine neuter iminā Ja i.279 Pv-a 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Snp 137 f imāya Sanskrit anayā
                1. Ja i.267 The instrumental anena Sanskrit anena is not proved in Pāli. ablative asmā Snp 185 Dhp 220 imasmā (not proved).; locative
                2. masculine neuter imasmiṁ Kh iii. Ja ii.159 & asmiṁ Snp 634 Dhp 242
                3. feminine imissā Pv-a 79 (or imissaṁ?) & imāyaṁ (no reference)

                  • B.; (
                  • plural ) nominative
                  • masculine ime Ja i.221 Pv i.83
                  • feminine imā [ Sanskrit imāḥ
                  1. Snp 897 & imāyo Snp 1122 neuter imāni = Sanskrit
                    1. Vin i.84 accusative
                    2. masculine ime Sanskrit imān Ja i.266 Ja ii.416
                    3. feminine imā [ Sanskrit imāḥ

                      Snp 429 Ja ii.160 genitive imesaṁ Ja ii.160 & esaṁ Sanskrit eṣāṁ

                      1. MN ii.86 & esānaṁ MN ii.154 MN iii.259 feminine also āsaṁ Ja i.302 (= etāsaṁ Commentary ) & imāsaṁ; instrumental
                      2. masculine nt imehi Ja vi.364
                      3. feminine imāhi.
                      4. locative
                      5. masculine nt imesu Sanskrit eṣu
                        1. Ja i.307

                        II. Meanings (1) ayaṁ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsl; d. by “before our eyes”, “the present” “this here”, “just this” (& not the other) (opposite para) viz. atthi imasmiṁ kāye “in this our visible body” Kh iii. yath’âyaṁ padīpo “like this lamp here” Snp 235 ayaṁ dakkhiṇā dinnā “the gift which is just given before our eyes” Kh vii.12; ime pādā imaṁ sīsaṁ ayaṁ kāyo Pv i.83 asmiṁ loke paramhi ca “in this world & the other” Snp 634 asmā lokā paraṁ lokaṁ kathaṁ pecca na socati Snp 185 cp. also Dhp 220 Dhp 410 Ja i.168 Ja iii.53

                      6. It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaṁ kiñci vittaṁ … idam pi Buddhe ratanaṁ “whatever … that” Snp 224 ime divase these days (just gone) Ja ii.416 cp. also Vin i.84 Snp 429 Ja ii.128 160.
                      7. It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā “these are the two extremes, viz.” Vin i.10 ayaṁ eva ariyo maggo “this then is the way” ibid.; cp. Ja i.280 (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsl; d. by “like that such (like), that there, yonder, yon”, e.g. imassa vānarindassa “of that fellow, the monkey” Ja i.279 cp. Ja i.222 Ja i.307 Ja ii.160 (imesaṁ sattānaṁ “creatures like us”) So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca “this and this”, “so and so” Ja ii.3 idañ c’idañ ca “such & such a thing Ja ii.5
                      8. In combination with a

                        • pronoun rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i.e. German und zwar), e.g. yâyaṁ taṇhā Vin i.10 yo ca ayaṁ … yo ca ayaṁ “I mean this … and I mean” ibid.; ye kec’ime Snp 381 yadidaṁ “i.e.” Mil 25 yatha-y-idaṁ “in order that” (w. pot.) Snp 1092 ‣See also seyyathīdaṁ.
                        • The genitive of all genders functions in general as a possessive
                        • pronoun of the 3rd = his, her, its (literally of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e.g. āsava’ssa na vijjanti “his are no intoxications” Snp 1100 sīlaṁ assā bhindāpessāmi “I shall cause her character to be defamed” Ja i.290 assa bhariyā “his wife” Ja ii.158 etc. Frequently
                        Sanskrit ayaṁ etc., pronoun base Indogermanic *i (cp. Sanskrit iha), feminine *ī. cp. Latin is (
                      9. feminine ea, neuter id); Goth is, neuter ita; Old High German er (= he), neuter ez (= it); Lithuanian jìs (he)
                      10. feminine jì (she).
    Ayana
    neuter
    1. (a) “going”, road
    • (b) going to, goal SN v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (identical) DN-a i.313 Dāvs iv.40 ‣See also eka˚
    Vedic ayana, from i
    Ayasa
    neuter
    1. ill repute, disgrace Mil 139 Mil 272 Dāvs i.8
    a + yasa, cp. Sanskrit ayaśaḥ
    Ayira
    1. (& Ayyira) (n adjective)
      1. (n.) ariyan nobleman, gentleman (opposite servant); adjective arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic gentlemanly Ja v.257 Vv 396
      2. feminine ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) Ja ii.349 (variant reading oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady Ja v.138 (= ayye Commentary )
      3. Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya ‣See also ariya
    Ayiraka
    1. = ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka DN iii.190 (Burmese variant yy) Ja ii.313
    Ayo
    Aya;
    neuter
    1. iron. The nominative ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver AN iii.16 = SN v.92 of obl. cases only the instrumental ayasā occurs Dhp 240 (= ayato Dhp-a iii.344) Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya)

      • Iron is the material used in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya ‣See niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.
      • In comp; n. both ayo˚ & aya˚; occur as bases
      1. I. ayo˚:-kapāla an iron pot AN iv.70 (variant reading ˚guhala) Nd2 304 iii. d 2 (of Niraya)
      2. ˚kūṭa an iron hammer Pv-a 284
      • ˚khīla an iron stake SN v.444 MN iii.183 = Nd2 304 iii. c Snp-a 479
      • ˚guḷa an iron ball SN v.283 Dhp 308 Iti 43 = 90 Thag 2, 489 DN-a i.84
      • ˚ghana an iron club Ud 93 Vv-a 20
      • ˚ghara an iron house Ja iv.492
      • ˚paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) Pv-a 52
      • ˚ pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd2 304 iii. d 1
      • ˚maya made of iron Snp 669 (kūṭa) Ja iv.492 (nāvā) Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of name) Pv-a 43 Pv-a 52
      • ˚muggara an iron club Pv-a 55
      • ˚saṅku an iron spike SN iv.168 Snp 667

        1. II. aya˚:-kapāla = ayo˚ Dhp-a i.148 (variant reading ayo˚)
        2. ˚kāra a worker in iron Mil 331
        • ˚kūṭa = ayo˚ Ja i.108 Dhp-a ii.69 (variant reading )
        • ˚naṅgala an iron plough Dhp-a i.223 Dhp-a iii.67
        • ˚paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) Ja v.359
        • ˚paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) Dhp-a i.148
        • ˚saṅghāṭaka an iron (door) post Dhp-a iv.104
        • ˚sūla an iron stake Snp 667 Dhp-a i.148
        Sanskrit ayaḥ neuter iron & ore, Indogermanic *ajes-, cp. Avestan ayah, Latin aes, Gothic aiz, Old High German ēr (= German Erz.) Anglo-Saxon ār (= English ore).
    Ayojjha
    adjective
    1. not to be conquered or subdued MN ii.24
    Sanskrit ayodhya
    Ayya
    1. (n adjective)
      1. (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord master Ja iii.167 = Pv-a 65 Dhp-a i.8 (ayyā plural the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaṁ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95

        • (b)
        • adjective worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191 Dhp-a ii.94 sq
        • The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. German “Sie” and English address “Esq.” like English Sir, milord or simply “you” with the implication of a
        • plural is majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya Ja i.221 279, 308;
        • plural nominative as voc. ayyā in addressing several Ja ii.128 Ja ii.415 nominative singular as voc. (for all genders & numbers); ayyo Vin ii.215 Ja iii.126 Ja iii.127
        • feminine ayyā lady mistress MN ii.96 (= mother of a prince) Dhp-a i.398 voc. ayye my lady Ja v.138
        1. ˚putta literally son of an Ariyan, i.e. an aristocratic (young man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (literally) said by a servant Ja iii.167 (b) lord master, “governor” Ja i.62 (by a servant) DN-a i.257 (sāmi, opposite dāsi-putta) Pv-a 145 (by a wife to her husband) Dhp-a ii.110 (c) prince ‣See W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq. Ja vi.146
        contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q.v. for etymology) ‣See also ayira
    Ayyaka
    1. grandfather, (so also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e.g. Mvu ii.426 iii.264) Ja iii.155 Ja iv.146 Ja vi.196 Pv i.84 Mil 284 ayyaka-payyakā grandfather & great grandfather; forefathers, ancestors Ja i.2 Pv-a 107 (= pitāmahā)
    • f ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169 SN i.97 Ja ii.349 (here used for “lady”, as Burmese variant ); & ayyikā Thag 2, 159 Vism 379
    demin. of ayya
    Ara
    1. the spoke of a wheel DN ii.17 (sahass’âra adj with thousand spokes), cp. Mil 285 Ja iv.209 Ja vi.261 Mil 238 Dhp-a ii.142 Vv-a 106 (in allegorical etymology of arahant = saṁsāra-cakkassa arānaṁ hatattā “breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration”) = Pv-a 7 (has saṁsāra-vaṭṭassa) Vv-a 277
    Vedic ara from ; ṛṇoti ‣See etymology under appeti & cp. more especially Latin artus limb, also Pali aṇṇava
    Arakkhiya
    adjective

    not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) Ja ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.).

  • unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā).

    a + rakkhiya, gerundive of rakkhati
  • Arakkheyya
    adjective
    1. only in neuter “that which does not need to be guarded against”, what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of AN iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni)
    2. arakkheyyāni are enumd. at DN iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers)
    in form = arakkhiya
    Araghaṭṭa
    1. a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for Text arahatta-ghaṭi-yanta acc to Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 30; cp. also Vinaya Texts iii.112
    • The 2rd part of the compound is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ “a well-wheel"
    Sanskrit araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha ‣See Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.
    Araja
    adjective
    1. free from dust or impurity SN iv.218 (of the wind) Vv 536 (= apagata-raja Vv-a 236)
    a + raja
    Arañña
    neuter

    forest DN i.71 MN i.16 MN iii.104 SN i.4 SN i.7 SN i.29 SN i.181 SN i.203 (mahā) AN i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138 Snp 39 Snp 53 Snp 119 Dhp 99 Dhp 329 Dhp 330 Iti 90 Vv 567 Ps i.176 The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word Thus the O. Commentary (Vin iii.46 quoted Vism 72 & Snp-a 83 says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña ‣See also Vin iii.51 DN-a i.209 Pv-a 73 Vv-a 249 Ja i.149 Ja i.215 Ja ii.138 v.70

    1. ˚āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201 SN ii.269 Ja i.173 Vv-a 301 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 141
    2. ˚kuṭikā a hut in the forest a forest lodge SN i.61 SN iii.116 SN iv.116 SN iv.380 Dhp-a iv.31 (as variant reading ; Text has ˚kuṭi)
    3. ˚gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) MN i.323 AN iii.353 AN v.109f. 207, 323 sq -ṭhāna a place in the forest Ja i.253
    • ˚vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage Ja i.90
    • ˚vihāra living in (the loneliness (of the forest) AN iii.343f.
    Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opposite to amā at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from
    Araññaka
    1. (& Āraññāka) adjective

      1. belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) MN i.214 (ā˚), 469 iii.89 SN ii.187 SN ii.202 (variant reading ā˚), 208 sq.; 281 AN iii.343 391; iv.291, 344, 435; v.10 ‣See also āraññaka
      arañña + ka
    Araññakatta
    neuter
    1. the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration a hermit’s practice, seclusion SN ii.202 SN ii.208 sq ‣See also āraññakatta
    abstract from araññaka
    Araṇa1
    adjective-noun
    1. . (adjective living in solitude, far from the madding crowd MN iii.237 (˚vibhanga-sutta) SN i.44 SN i.45 Ja i.340 (tittha˚?)
    Vedic araṇa from *ara √; , which as ablative ārā is used as adverb far from, cp. Pali ārakā. originally meaning “removed from, remote, far" ‣See also arañña
    Araṇa2
    neuter
    1. quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adjective = peaceful) Thag-a 134 (+ saraṇa) Vb 19f. (opposite saraṇa ‣See saraṇa2.

    -vihārin (or araṇā-vihārin) to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, ablative of araṇa in function of ārakā, i.e. adv far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2 As regards meaning the Pali Commentators explanation it as opposite of raṇa fight, battle, i.e. peacefullness, friendliness & ‣See in it a synonym of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at Pv-a 230 explains it as “mettā-vihārin”, & in this meaning it is found frequently in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Divy 401; Avs ii.131 (q. v for further reference under note 3); MN Vastu i.165; ii.292. cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha

    1. one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person AN i.24 Thag 2, 358 360; Pv iv.133 (= Pv-a 230) Thag-a 244 cp. Dhs translation 336. Arani & i
    a + raṇa
    Araṇi
    ˚ī
    feminine
    1. wood for kindling fire by attrition, only in following compounds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Mil 53
    • ˚sahita
    • neuter same Vin ii.217 Ja i.212 (ī); v.46 (ī) Dhp-a ii.246
    • ˚mathana rubbing of firewood Ja vi.209

      • Note. The reading at Pv-a 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa-vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (Burmese variant ariyehi)
      Vedic araṇī & araṇi from;
    Arati
    feminine
    1. dislike, discontent, aversion Snp 270 Snp 436 Snp 642 Snp 938 Dhp 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaṁ Dhp-a iv.225) Thag 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi Thag-a 239); Sdhp 476
    a + rati
    Aravinda
    1. a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62
    ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sanskrit aravinda nt.
    Araha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. worthy of, deserving, entitled to, worth Dhp 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚) Vv-a 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment) frequently in compound mahāraha Sanskrit mahārgha
      1. worth much, of great value, costly, dear Ja i.50 Ja i.58 Ja iii.83 etc ‣See mahant
      • fit for, apt for, suitable Pv-a 26 (paribhoga fit for eating)
    Vedic arha of arh
    Arahati
    1. to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Latin debeo) Snp 431 Snp 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituṁ) Ja i.262 Dhp 9 Dhp 10 Dhp 230 Pv iii.66
    • ppr. arahant (q.v.) cp. also adjective araha
    Vedic arhati, etymology uncertain but cp. agghati
    Arahatta1
    neuter
    1. the state or condition of an Arahant, i.e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (SN iv.151) final & absolute emancipation Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path ‣See magga & anāgāmin. This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy Thag-a 64 (Selā) Pv-a 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but AN iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp DN ii.93 = SN v.360 and the references in Dialogues of the Buddha iii.5 n4). Arahattaṁ is defined at SN iv.252 as rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚ moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant ‣See arahant ii.. Vin ii.254 DN iii.10 DN iii.11 DN iii.255 AN iii.34 AN iii.421 430; v.209 Pug 73 Nett 15, 82 DN-a i.180 188, 191 Dhp-a ii.95 Dhp-a iv.193 Pv-a 14
    • Phrases: arahattaṁ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74 DN i.229
    • arahattaṁ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in
    • aorist pāpuṇi) Ja ii.229 Thag-a 64 Dhp-a ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (identical) Pv-a 53 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 233 & freq elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna DN iii.255 AN i.120 iv.292 sq., 372 sq
    1. ˚gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship Dhp-a i.8
    • ˚patta (& patti); one who has attained Ar. SN i.196 SN v.273 AN ii.157 AN iii.376 AN iv.235
    • ˚phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39 41, 293; iii.93 DN iii.227 DN iii.277 SN iii.168 SN v.44 AN i.23 45; iii.272; iv.276 Dhs 1017 Vb 326
    • ˚magga the Path of Ar. SN i.78 AN iii.391 DN-a i.224
    • ˚vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19
    abstract formation from arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compound ‣See arahant iv.2
    Arahatta2
    1. in ˚ghaṭi ‣See araghaṭṭa
    Arahant
    adjective-noun
    1. . Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻ His Worship ʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.3–⁠6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna)
    1. I. Cases nominative singular arahaṁ Vin i.9 DN i.49 MN i.245 280 SN i.169 ‣See also formula Commentary under ii., & arahā Vin i.8 25, 26; ii.110, 161 DN iii.255 Iti 95 Kh iv. genitive arahato SN iv.175 Snp 590 instrumental arahatā SN iii.168 DN-a i.43 accusative arahantaṁ DN iii.10 Dhp 420 Snp 644
    2. locative arahantamhi Vv 212
    3. nominative
    4. plural arahanto Vin i.19 Vin iv.112 SN i.78 SN i.235 SN ii.220 SN iv.123 genitive arahataṁ Vin iii.1 SN i.214 Snp 186 Iti 112 Pv i.1112 Other cases are of rare occurrence.

      1. II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the following: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ nāparaṁ itthattāya “destroyed is (re-) birth lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin i.14 35, 183 DN i.84 DN i.177 DN i.203 MN i.139 MN ii.39 SN i.140 SN ii.51 SN ii.82 SN ii.95 SN ii.120 SN ii.245 SN iii.21 SN iii.45 SN iii.55 SN iii.68 SN iii.71 SN iii.90 SN iii.94 SN iii.195 SN iii.223 SN iv.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; v.72 90, 144, 222 AN i.165 AN ii.211 AN iii.93 AN iv.88 AN iv.179 AN iv.302 v.155, 162; Snp p. 16 Pug 61 etc
      • B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻ alone, secluded, earnest zealous, master of himself ʼ DN i.177 DN ii.153 & continued with A: SN i.140 SN i.161 SN ii.21 SN iii.36 SN iii.74 SN iv.64 SN v.144, 166 AN i.282 AN ii.249 AN iii.70 AN iii.217 AN iii.301 AN iii.376 AN iv.235
      • Commentary arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta-sadattho parikkhīṇa-bhava-saññojano sammad-aññā vimutto : DN iii.83 DN iii.97 MN i.4 235 SN i.71 SN iii.161 SN iii.193 SN iv.125 SN v.145 SN v.205 SN v.273 SN v.302 AN i.144 AN iii.359 AN iii.376 AN iv.362 AN iv.369 AN iv.371f. Iti 38
      • D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi akuppā me ceto-vimutti ayaṁ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo “there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: SN ii.171 SN iii.28 SN iv.8 SN v.204 AN i.259 iv.56, 305, 448
      1. III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaṁ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi identical). 25 sq.; ii.110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti) DN i.49 (Bhagavā arahaṁ), 144; iii.10, 255: MN i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaṁ karoti: arahaṁ samaṇo Gotamo), 280 SN i.9 SN i.26 SN i.50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii.160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq. AN i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109 266; iī.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120 Snp 186 Snp 590 Snp 644 Snp 1003 Iti 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati ‣See KhA 88) Vv 212 i.217 Dhp 164 Dhp 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps ii.3 19, 194, 203 sq. Pug 37 73 Vb 324 336, 422 Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132

      IV. In compounds & derivation we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in; ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes) ‣See abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89 136 168, 320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: DN ii.144

    5. arahat˚; in (arahad-)dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: Ja i.65

      1. V ‣See further details & passages under anāgāmin khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant ‣See; i → Dial. ii.1
      1. -3; iii.6. For riddles or word-play on the form arahant ‣See M i.280 AN iv.145 DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105 6 = Pv-a 7 Dhp-a iv.228 Dhs-a 349
      Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati ‣See arahati, meaning deserving, worthy
    Arāti
    1. an enemy Dāvs iv.1
    a + rāti, cp. Sanskrit arāti
    Ari
    1. an enemy
    • The word is used in exegesis & word explanation, thus in etymology of arahant ‣See reference under arahant v.; of bhūri Ps ii.197
    • Otherwise in late language only, e.g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta) ‣See also arindama & aribhāseti
    Vedic ari; from
    Ariñcamāna
    1. not leaving behind, not giving up, i.e. pursuing earnestly Snp 69 (jhānaṁ = ajȧhamana Snp-a 123 cp. Nd2 94)
    ppr. medium of Pali riñcati for ricyati
    Ariṭṭha1
    adjective
    1. unhurt Sdhp 279
    a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt
    Ariṭṭha2
    1. a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110
    Sanskrit ariṣṭa, name of a tree
    Ariṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. (a) unhurt; perfect DN-a 1,94 (˚ṁ ñāṇaṁ)
    • (b) from ariṭṭha in meaning of “soap-berry plant"?
    1. in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi SN i.104 “a great mass of soap stone” (cp. Rhys Davids in J.R. A. S. 1895 893 sq.), “a shaped block of steatite” (Mrs. Rhys Davids in K. S 130)
    from ariṭṭha
    Aritta
    neuter
    1. a rudder. Usually in combination with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaṁ (phiy˚ oar & rudder, thus at SN i.103 (Text piya˚, variant reading phiya˚) AN ii.201 (piya˚) Ja iv.164 (Text piya˚, variant reading phiya˚) Snp 321 (piya + Snp-a 330 phiya = dabbi-padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). Dhs-a 149
    Vedic aritra, Indogermanic *ere to row (Sanskrit ; to move); cp. Latin remus, Old High German ruodar = rudder; Anglo-Saxon rōwan = English row
    Arindama
    1. a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 (= arīnaṁ damanasīla Pv-a 251); Sdhp 276
    Sanskrit arindama, ariṁ + dama of dam
    Aribhāseti
    1. to denounce, literally to call an enemy Ja iv.285 Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corrections)
    = ariṁ bhāseti
    Ariya
    adjective-noun
    1. ; (racial) Aryan DN ii.87 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth
    2. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved Hence: right, good, ideal. The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each
      • adjective : DN i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti-vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi) MN i.139 (pannaddhaja) ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage) SN ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma) v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā-cakkhu) AN i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa) iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha) Iti 35 (paññā) 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso) Snp 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo Snp-a 216) Dhp 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps ii.212 (iddhi) -alamariya fully or thoroughly good DN i.163 = iii.82 AN iv.363 nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid
      • masculine Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe) DN i.37 = (yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc. ‣See 3rd. jhāna) 245; iii.111 (˚ānaṁ anupavādaka one who defames the noble) MN i.17 MN i.280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaṁ) SN i.225 (˚ānaṁ upavādaka); ii.123 (identical); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (identical) AN i.256 (˚ānaṁ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (identical); iv.145 (dele ‣See arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317 Iti 21 108 Dhp 22 Dhp 164 Dhp 207 Ja iii.354 = Mil 230 MN i.7 i35 (ariyānaṁ adassāvin: “not recognising the Noble Ones” Pv-a 26 Pv-a 146 Dhp-a ii.99 Sdhp 444 (˚ānaṁ vaṁsa). anariya (adjective &
      • noun ); not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low common, uncultured AN i.81 Snp 664 (= asappurisa Snp-a 479 Dhs-a 353) Ja ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma Commentary ) v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87 Dhp-a iv.3
      • ‣ See also ñāṇa magga, sacca, sāvaka
      1. ˚āvakāsa appearing noble Ja v.87
      • uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) AN i.205f. 212
      • kanta loved by the Best DN iii.227
      • gaṇā (
      • plural ) troops of worthies Ja vi.50 (= brāhmaṇa-gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuṁ tena te evam āha Commentary )
      • garahin casting blame on the righteous Snp 660
      • citta a noble heart
      • traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dīpavaṁsa v.92
      • dasa having the ideal (or best) belief Iti 93 = 94
      • dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚ sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ “faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self-denial, wisdom Thag-a 240 Vv-a 113 DN-a ii.34
      • dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaṁ eso dhammo Nd1 71 72) MN i.1 MN i.7 MN i.135 AN ii.69 AN v.145f. 241, 274 Snp 783 Dhs 1003
      • puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps i.167 Vin v.117 Thag-a 206
      • magga the Aryan Path-vaṁsa the (fourfold) noble family, i.e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites DN iii.224 = AN ii.27 = Ps i.84 = Nd2 141; cp. AN iii.146
      • vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct Ja iii.443
      • vatā at Thag 1, 334 should be read ˚vattā (
      • nominative singular of vattar, vac “speaking noble words”:-vāsa the most excellent state of mind habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at DN iii.269 291 =. AN v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict)
      • vihāra the best practice SN v.326
      • vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī-kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4
      • See DN iii.232 AN ii.246 Vin v.125
      • saṅgha the communion of the Nobles ones Pv-a 1
      • sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, DN i.189 DN ii.90 DN ii.304f.; iii277 MN i.62 MN i.184 MN iii.248 SN v.415f. = Vin i.10 230. Iti 17 Snp 229 Snp 230 Snp 267 Dhp 190 Dhp-a iii.246 Kp-a 81, 151 185, 187 Thag-a 178 282, 291 Vv-a 73
      • sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaṁ santike sutattā a Snp-a 166). MN i.8 MN i.46 MN i.91 MN i.181 MN i.323 MN ii.262 MN iii.134 MN iii.228 272 Iti 75 Snp 90 Mil 339 Dhp-a i.5 (opposite putthujjana)
      • sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue DN i.115 (= sīlaṁ ariyaṁ uttamaṁ parisuddhaṁ DN-a i.286) MN ii.167
      1. When the commentators, many centuries afterwards began to write Pali in South India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word; ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (Dhp-a i.230 Snp-a 537 Pv-a 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at Ja v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya-rūpa. The Commentary explains this as “shameless” but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non-Aryan. (cp ʻ frank ʼ in English)
      Vedic ārya, of uncertain etymology The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya
    Arīhatatta
    1. in phrase “arīhatta ariyo hoti” at AN iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaṁ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the following sentence “ārakattā kilesānaṁ arīnaṁ hatattā … arahā hoti”, and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS)
    Aru
    neuter
    1. a wound, a sore, only in compounds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores MN ii.64 = Dhp 147 = Thag 1, 769 (= navannaṁ vaṇamukhānaṁ vasena arubhūta kāya Dhp-a iii.109 = Vv-a 77); ˚gatta adjective with wounds in the body MN i.506 (+ pakka-gatta) Mil 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores SN iv.198 (˚āni gattāni) ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds Vv-a 77 Dhp-a iii.109
    2. Vedic aruḥ, unknown etymology
    Aruka
    1. = aru; only in compound ˚ūpamacitto adjective having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) AN i.124 = Pug 30 (explained at Pug AN 212 as purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto “an old wound” i.e. continually breaking open).

    Aruṇa
    the sun Vin ii.68 iv.245 Ja ii.154 Ja v.403 Ja vi.330 Dīpavaṁsa i.56 DN-a i.30 a. uggacchati the sun rises Ja i.108 Vv-a 75 & ‣See compounds.
    1. ˚ugga sunrise Vin iv.272 SN v.29 SN v.78 SN v.101 SN v.442 (at all Saṁyutta passive the variant reading SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49 -uggamana sunrise (opposite oggamanna). Vin iii.196 204 264; iv.86, 166, 230, 244 Dhp-a i.165 Dhp-a ii.6 Pv-a 109
    2. ˚utu the occasion of the sun (-rise) Dhp-a i.165
    3. ˚vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123 Dhp-a i.13 = Pv-a 216
    4. ˚sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) Pv-a 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa)
    5. Vedic aruṇa adjective of the colour of fire, i.e. ruddy, neuter the dawn; of Indogermanic *ereu as in Sanskrit aruṣa reddish, Av auruša white, also Sanskrit ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg *reu as in Sanskrit rudhira, rohita red (bloody ‣See etymology under rohita), Latin ruber.
    Arubheda
    1. the Rigveda Thag-a 206
    Arūpa
    adjective
    1. without form or body, incorporeal, DN i.195f.; iii.240 Snp 755 Iti 62 Sdhp 228 Sdhp 463 480 ‣See details under rūpa
    1. ˚āvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281–⁠1285 Ps i.83 sq., 101
    2. ˚kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Mil 317 (devā)
    3. ˚ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless Iti 62
    • ˚taṇhā “thirst for the Formless DN iii.216
    • ˚dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚ nirodha˚ ‣See dhātu DN iii.215 DN iii.275 Iti 45
    • ˚bhava formless existence DN iii.216
    • ˚loka the world of the Formless Sdhp 494
    • ˚saññin not having the idea of form DN ii.110 DN iii.260 Exp. i.252
    a + rūpa
    Arūpin
    adjective
    1. = arūpa DN i.31 (arūpī attā hoti ‣See DN-a i.119), 195; iii.111, 139 Iti 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā)
    a + rūpin
    Are
    indeclinable
    1. exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) Ja i.225 (dāsiputta-ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha-caṇḍāla) DN-a i.265 (= re) Vv-a 68 (dubbinī), 217 (“how in the world”)
    onomat. cp. Sanskrit lalallā, Latin lallo = English lull, German lallen & without reduplicated Anglo-Saxon holā German halloh, English lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cp. also alālā
    Ala1
    1. frequently spelling for aḷa
    Ala2
    adjective
    1. enough, only in negative anala insufficient, impossible MN i.455 Ja ii.326 = iv.471
    alaṁ
  • adverb as adjective
  • Alaṁ
    indeclinable
    1. emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: participle of assurance emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly.; Note. In connection with a dative or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaṁ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dative or infinitive absolute) It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as “fit for, proper” (= yuttaṁ Pāli Commentary ), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaṁ, e.g. alam eva kātuṁ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dative it may also be compd. with Vedic araṁ c. dative
    • (a (absolute) only in combination with dative or infinitive ‣See c. & Note above
    • (b.) (˚-) ‣See compounds
    • (c.) with; dative or infin.: alaṁ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle MN i.130 (opp nâlaṁ not at all); alaṁ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250 alaṁ vacanāya one says rightly SN ii.18 alaṁ hitāya untold happiness Dhp-a ii.41
    • ito ce pi so bhavaṁ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva …. upasankamituṁ even if he were 100 miles from here (surely) even so (i.e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him DN i.117 (explained at DN-a i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuṁ kalyāṇaṁ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaṁ Pv-a 122); alaṁ puññāni kātave “come, let us do meritorious works” Vv 4415 (= yuttaṁ Vv-a 191). 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: participle of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with fie! stop! alas! (etc ‣See are)
    • (a) (absolute) enough: nâlaṁ thutuṁ it is not enough to praise Snp 217 te pi na honti me alaṁ they are not enough for me Pv i.63
    • (b) with voc.: alaṁ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo “look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community Vin ii.198 alaṁ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena.. SN iii.120
    • (c) enough of (with instrumental): alaṁ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Mil 18 alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. Dhp-a ii.34
    1. ˚attha adjective “quite the thing”, truly good, very profitable useful DN ii.231 MN ii.69 (so read for alamatta) AN ii.180 Thag 1, 252 Ja i.401 (so read for ˚atta)
    2. ˚ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa-dassana cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit alamārya-jñāna-darśana Lal v.309 509
      1. Vin i.9 AN iii.64 AN iii.430 AN v.88 Ja i.389 (cp. ariya) -kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187
      • ˚pateyya ‣See the latter
      • ˚vacanīyā
      • feminine a woman who has to be addressed with “alaṁ” (i.e. “fie”), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144 cp. 274 (Buddhaghosa’s explanation)
      • ˚samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear Iti 107
      • ˚sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow AN iii.81
      • ˚sāṭaka “curse-coat”, one who curses his waist-coat (alaṁ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over-eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at Dhp-a iv.16 = Dhs-a 404
      Vedic araṁ. In meaning 1. alaṁ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araṁ, an adverb accusative of ara
    3. adjective suitable; fitly, aptly rightly from ; cp. aṇṇava, appeti ara. In meaning 2. alaṁ is the same as are
    Alakkhika
    1. (& īka adjective

      1. unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin iii.23 Ja iii.259
      a + lakkhika
    Alakkhī
    feminine
    1. bad luck, misfortune Thag 1, 1123
    a + lakkhi
    Alagadda
    1. a kind of snake MN i.133 = DN-a i.21 Dhp-a iv.132 (˚camma, so read for Text alla-camma, variant readings alanda & alandu˚)
    Derived unknown. In late Sanskrit alagarda is a watersnake
    Alagga
    adjective
    1. not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) identical Dhp-a iii.298
    past participle of laggati
    Alaggana
    neuter
    1. not hanging on anything, not being suspended DN-a i.180
    a + laggana
    Alaṅkata
    1. “made too much”, made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dhp 142 (= vatthâbharaṇa-paṭimaṇḍita Dhp-a iii.83); Pv ii.36 Vv 11 Ja iii.392 Ja iv.60
    2. “done enough” ‣See alaṁ, use with instrumental, only negative analaṅkata in meaning “insatiate” SN i.15 (kāmesu)
    past participle of alankaroti
    Alaṅkaraṇa
    neuter
    1. doing up, fitting out, ornamentation Ja i.60
    alaṁ + karaṇa, from alankaroti
    Alaṅkaraṇaka
    adjective
    1. adorning, embellishing, decorating Dhp-a i.410
    from alankaraṇa
    Alaṅkaroti
    1. to make much of i.e. to adorn, embellish, decorate Ja i.60 Ja iii.189 Ja vi.368 absolutive ˚karitvā Dhp-a i.410 Pv-a 74
    2. past participle alaṅkata.
    3. causative alaṅkārāpeti to cause to be adorned Ja i.52
    4. alaṁ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti
    Alaṅkāra
    1. “getting up” i.e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; especially trinkets, ornaments DN iii.190 AN iii.239 263 sq. Ja vi.368 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 70 (—˚ adjective adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249
    from alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti
    Alattaka
    1. lac, a red animal dye Ja iv.114 (˚pāṭala) Dhp-a ii.174 Dhp-a iv.197
    Sanskrit alaktaka
    Alanda
    Alandu;
    1. ‣See alagadda
    Alamba
    adjective
    1. not hanging down, not drooping, short Ja v.302 Ja vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman’s breasts cp. alamb’ordhva-stanī Suśruta i.371)
    a + lamba
    Alasa
    adjective
    1. idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid SN i.44 SN i.217 Snp 96 (= jāti-alaso Snp-a 170) Ja iv.30 Dhp 280 (= mahā-alaso Dhp-a iii.410). O past participle analasa vigorous energetic SN i.44 DN iii.190 (dakkha +) Vin iv.211 Nd2 141 (identical)
    2. a + lasa
    Alasatā
    feminine
    1. sloth, laziness; only in negative analasatā zeal, industry Vv-a 229
    abstract from alasa
    Alassa
    neuter at SN i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; Burmese variant ālasya.
    Alāta
    neuter
    1. a firebrand AN ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse ‣See chava) Ja i.68 Pug 36 Dhp-a iii.442
    Sanskrit alāta, related to Latin altāre altar, adoleo to burn
    Alāpu
    neuter
    1. a gourd, pumpkin Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112 variant readings alābu & alābbu)
    = alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Note. 6216
    Alābu
    1. a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris MN i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (identical) Pv-a 47 (identical) Dhs-a 405
    • ‣ See also alāpu
    Sanskrit alābū feminine
    Alābhaka
    1. not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77
    a + labhaka
    Alālā
    indeclinable
    1. “not saying lā lā” i.e. not babbling not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf &) dumb Snp-a 124 (aneḷamūga of Snp 70)
    a + lālā interjection from sound root *lal ‣See etymology under are
    Alika
    adjective
    1. contrary, false, untrue SN i.189 Ja iii.198 Ja vi.361 Mil 26 Mil 99
    • nt. ˚ṁ a lie, falsehood Dhp 264
    1. ˚vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dhp 223 = Vv-a 69 (has alīka˚) Ja ii.4 Snp-a 478 (for abhūta-vādin Snp 661)
    Sanskrit alīka
    Alīnatā
    feminine
    1. open mindedness, prudence, sincerity Ja i.366
    abstract of alīna
    Aluḷita
    adjective
    1. umoved, undisturbed Mil 383
    a + luḷita, past participle of lul
    Aloṇika
    adjective
    1. not salted Ja iii.409 Vv-a 184
    a + loṇika
    Aloma
    adjective
    1. not hairy (upon the body) Ja vi.457
    a + loma
    Alola
    adjective
    1. undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Snp 65 (= nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula Snp-a 118)
    a + lola
    Alla
    adjective (only ˚-)
    1. -1. moist, wet MN iii.94
    • ˚mattikā -puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2)
    • fresh (opposite stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.˚āvalepana seei → adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass. AN v.234 = 249; ˚gomaya fresh dung. AN v.234 Dhp-a i.377
    • ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DN-a i.77 Pv-a 40
    • ˚dārūni green sticks Ja i.318
    • ˚madhu fresh honey Dhp-a ii.197
    • ˚maṁsa-sarīra a body of living flesh Dhp-a ii.51 = iv.166; ˚rasa fresh-tasting Dhp-a ii.155
    • ˚rohita-maccha fresh fish Ja iii.333 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair Pv-a 82 (sīsaṁ nahātvā allakesa); usually combined with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14 91 Dhp-a iv.220 or with odāta vattha (identical) Ja iii.425
    • ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi Pv-a 116). For analla-gatta at SN i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an-allīna -gatta. For allacamma at Dhp-a iv.132
    • alagadda-camma, with the variant reading, is preferable
    1. .
    Vedic ārdra
    Allāpa
    1. conversation, talk; only in compound ˚sallāpa conversation (literally talking to & fro or together Ja i.189 Mil 15 Vv-a 96 Pv-a 86
    Sanskrit ālāpa; ā + lāpa
    Allika
    (?)
    1. only in compound (kāma-) sukh’allik’ânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10 DN iii.113 130 SN iv.330 SN v.421 Nett 110
    either from alla = allikaṁ neuter in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (—˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaṁ a derived from
  • absolutive alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.
  • Allīna
    1. (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging MN i.80 AN v.187 Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata)
    • (b.) soiled by (—˚), dirtied AN ii.201
    • ˚anallīna “to which nothing sticks” i.e. pure, undefiled, clean SN i.169 (identical passage on p. 183 reads analla ‣See alla. cp. ālaya
    past participle of allīyati; Sanskrit ālīna
    Allīyati
    1. to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet
    • (a literally kesā sīsaṁ allīyiṁsu the hair stuck to the head Ja i.64 khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair Ja i.273-(b) figuratively to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (SN iii.190 variant reading ; Text ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (SN iii.190 variant reading ; Text manāyati MN i.260 Text dhanāyati, but variant reading p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati “to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of” (c.
    • accusative ) at MN i.260 & SN iii.190 Ja iv.5 Ja v.154 (allīyituṁ, variant reading illīyituṁ) Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati a);
    • past participle allīna-
    • causative alliyāpeti cp. Sanskrit ālāpayati, but B. Sanskrit allīpeti Mvu iii.144
    • past participle allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408;
    • passive allīpīyate iii.127.
    1. to make stick to to bring near to (c. accusative or
    2. locative ) Ja ii.325 (hatthiṁ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaṁ alliyāpetvā)
    3. ā + līyati, , līyate, layate
    Aḷa
    1. the claw of a crab MN i.234 SN i.123 Ja i.223 Ja i.505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; Text spells ala˚); ii.342 iii.295
    2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91
    etymology unknown
    Aḷāra
    adjective
    1. only used with reference to the eyelashes, & usually explained by visāla, i.e. extended wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning etymology is as yet uncertain. Kern, (; Toevoegselen s.v.) transls. by “bent, crooked, arched". ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) Ja i.306 (= visāla-netta Commentary ); ˚pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 357 (= bahala-saṁyata-pakhuma Commentary ; v.l ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes Ja vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; Commentary explains by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). cp. āḷāra
    Is it the same as uḷāra?
    Aḷhaka
    1. in udak’aḷhaka Vv-a 155 read āḷhaka
    Ava˚
    1. ; (prefix) I. Relation between ava & o.; Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that; ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed-that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards.; Okaḍḍhati okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like English ripe: rife, quash: squash German Knabe: Knappe etc ‣See below B 2
    • A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a compound we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o ‣See e.g. avakāsa (—˚) → okāsa (˚-); avacara → ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna
    • B 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas are the following forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati.
    • The Pāli form (o˚ shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms ava˚;) ‣See the following:
    1. avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence
    1. avakkanti (not Sanskrit): okkanti appearance
    1. avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued
    1. avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy
    1. avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love
    1. avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal
    1. (2) In certain secondary verb-formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the; infinitive usually; the causative s throughout.

      1. II. Ava as prefix.
      • Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp ut˚ ‣See e.g. uccâvaca high & low, and below; iii. c) explained as heṭṭhā (Dhp-a iv.54 under avaṁ) or adho (ibid 153 Snp-a 290)
      • (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e.g. avasūra sun-down;
      • adverb avaṁ (q.v. opposite uddhaṁ)
      • (a) literally away from, off: ava-kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over
      • down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down
      • (b) figuratively “down” in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Latin de-in despico to despise, literally look down on) ‣See ava-jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati away from, i.e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the negative prefix a (an˚), e.g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚) ˚pakkhin, ˚patta
      1. Affinities of ava.-(a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚ the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question ‣See on this apa 2 and cp. the following words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati avekkhati
      • (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi; ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the following words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana ˚siñcati
      • (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2) Among the frequently contrast-pairs showing the two, like English up & down, are the following ukkaṁsâvakaṁsa, uggaman-oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti-olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituṁuggilituṁ onaman-unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba olugga-vilugga
      P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o Avestan ava; Latin au-(aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.) Obg. u-; Old Irish ō, ua ‣See further relations in Walde, Latin Wtb. under au
    Avaṁ
    adverb
    1. the preposition ava in adverb use, down, downward; in Commentary often explained by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Snp 685 (avaṁ sari he went down, variant reading avasari, explained by otari Snp-a 486). O
    2. past participle uddhaṁ (above, up high). Frequently in cpd avaṁsira
    3. adjective head downward (+ uddhaṁpāda feet up) a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory) e.g. SN i.48 Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṁ avaṁsirā adhogata-sīsā Snp-a 290) Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaṁpāda); Pv iv.146 Ja i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaṁ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaṁsiro) Nd1 404 (uddhaṁpāda +) Dhp-a iv.153 (gloss adhosira)

      • On avaṁ˚ cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati
      Vedic avāk & avāṁ
    Avakaṁsa
    1. dragging down, detraction, abasement, in compound ukkaṁsāvak˚; lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering rise & fall DN i.54
    from ava-karṣati; on ṁs: *rṣ cp. haṁsati: harṣati
    Avakaṅkhati
    (—˚)
    1. to wish for, strive after SN iv.57 (n’) Ja iv.371 (n’); v.340 (n’), 348 (n’ = na pattheti C)
    ava + kankhati; cp. Sanskrit anu-kānkṣati
    Avakaḍḍhati
    1. Nett 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass.; avakaḍḍhati Ja iv.415 (hadayaṁ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; variant reading avakassati). past participle avakaḍḍhita
    2. ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati
    Avakaḍḍhita
    1. pulled down, dragged away Dhp-a iii.195
    past participle of avakaḍḍhati
    Avakata
    1. = apakata, variant reading at Iti 89
    Avakanta
    1. cut, cut open, cut off Ja iv.251 (galak’âvakantaṁ)
    for *avakatta, Sanskrit avakṛtta; past participle of avakantati ‣See kanta2
    Avakantati
    okantati;
    (okk˚)
    1. to cut off, cut out, cut away carve-ava :) Ja iv.155 past participle avakanta & avakantita;
    2. cp. Sanskrit avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati
    Avakantita
    1. cut out Pv-a 213 Avakappana & okappana
    past participle of avakantati
    Avakappanā
    okappanā
    feminine
    1. preparation, fixing up, especially harnessing Ja vi.408
    ava + kappanā
    Avakaroti
    1. “to put down”, to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin.; past participle avakata (q.v.)

      • ‣ See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati.2
      Sanskrit apakaroti, cp. Pali apa˚
    Avakassati
    okassati;
    1. to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove
    • A; v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati)
    cp. Sanskrit avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ ‣See also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati
    Avakārakaṁ
    adverb
    1. throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214
    from avakāra
    Avakārin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. despising, degrading, neglecting Vb 393f. (an˚). Avakasa & okasa;
    from avakāra
    Avakāsa
    okāsa;
    1. “appearance”: akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) DN i.114 ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the a
    2. past participle of an Aryan Ja v.87 katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229
    3. “opportunity”: kata˚ given leave DN i.276 Snp 1030 anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Mil 383
    4. anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaṁ etaṁ anavakāso Vin ii.199 AN i.26 AN v.169 Pug 11 12 Pv-a 28
    ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sanskrit avakāśa
    Avakirati
    okirati;
    1. to pour down on, to pour out over;
    2. aorist avakiri Pv-a 86
    3. absolutive ˚kiritvā Ja v.144
    4. to cast out, reject, throw out;
    5. aorist avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (variant reading ˚kari Vv-a 126 explains by chaḍḍesi vināsesi)
    6. passive avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174);
    7. gerundive ˚kiriya ‣See sep ‣See also apakiritūna. pp okiṇṇa
    ava + kirati
    Avakiriya
    1. to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible Ja v.143 (taken by Commentary as absolutive = avakiritvā)
    2. grd of avakirati
    Avakujja
    adjective
    1. face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opposite ukkujja & uttāna) Ja i.13 Bu ii.52 Ja v.295 Ja vi.40 Pv iv.108 Pv-a 178
    1. ˚pañña adjective one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) AN i.130 Pug 31 (= adhomukha-pañña Pug AN 214)
    2. ava + kujja, cp. B. Sanskrit avakubja Mvu i.29 avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412
    Avakkanta
    (—˚)
    1. entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by instrumental SN iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚)
    past participle ofnext
    Avakkanti
    feminine
    1. entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth SN ii.66 (nāmarūpassa) iii.46 (pañcannaṁ indriyānaṁ) Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa) Mil 123 (gabbhassa)
    from avakkamati
    Avakkama
    1. entering, appearance Ja v.330 (gabbhassa)
    from avakkamati
    Avakkamati
    okkamati;
    1. to approach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in absolutive (poetically) avakamma Ja iii.480 (variant reading apa˚)
    2. ava + kamati from kram
    Avakkāra
    1. throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in compound ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash-bin Vin i.157 352; ii.216 MN i.207 Dhp-a i.305
    Sanskrit avaskara faeces, from avaṁ + karoti
    Avakkhalita
    1. washed off, taken away from, detracted DN-a i.66 (variant reading apa˚)
    past participle of avakkhaleti, causative of kṣal
    Avakkhitta
    okkhitta;
    1. = Sanskrit avakṣipta
      1. thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped thrown out, rejected. ava :) MN i.296 (ujjhita +) DN-a i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa) Pv-a 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [= Sanskrit utkṣipta? thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sed’âvakkhitta gained by sweat AN ii.67 AN iii.45
      past participle of avakkhipati
    Avakkhipati
    okkhipati;
    1. to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig usually applied to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of “to keep under, to restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati), aorist ˚khipi DN-a i.268 (bhusaṁ, variant reading avakkhasi)
    ava + khipati; cp. Sanskrit avakṣipati
    Avakkhipana
    neuter
    1. throwing down, putting down Ja i.163
    from avakkhipati
    Avagacchati
    1. to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) Pv-a 87 Avaganda (-karaka)
    ava + gacchati
    Avagaṇḍa (-kāraka)
    adjective
    1. “making a swelling”, i.e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks full (when eating); only neuter ˚ṁ as
    2. adverb after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214 Vin iv.196
    3. ava + gaṇḍa˚
    Avagata
    1. at Pv-a 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is “known, understood” (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so Burmese variant ). Avagahati & ogahati;
    past participle of avagacchati
    Avagāhati
    ogāhati;
    1. to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (accusative &
    2. locative ) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiṁ); Sdhp 370 Sdhp 383
    3. ava + gāhati
    Avaguṇṭhana
    adjective (—˚)
    1. covering Sdhp 314
    from oguṇṭheti
    Avaggaha
    1. hindrance, impediment, used at DN-a i.95 as synonym for drought (dubuṭṭhikā)
    Sanskrit avagraha
    Avaṅga
    1. ‣See apanga
    Avaca
    adjective
    1. low, only in combinationuccāvacā (plural ) high and low ‣See ucca. KvuA 38
    2. derived from ava after the analogy of ucca → ut
    Avacana
    neuter
    1. “non-word”, i.e. the wrong word or expression Ja i.410
    a + vacana
    Avacara
    1. (—˚) (n adjective)
      1. (a) adjective living in or with, moving in DN i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); figuratively dealing or familiar with, at home in AN ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚) Ja i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician ‣See tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚) Mil 44 (identical and yoga˚)

        • (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmāvacara rupāvacara arūpāvacara or the 3 realms of sense-desires form and non-form: kāma˚ DN i.34 (˚deva) Dhs 431 (as adjective); rūpa˚ Pug 37
        • arūpa˚ Pug 38 Ps i.83, 84, 101 Dhs-a 387 Pv-a 138 Pv-a 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268 1278
        ava + car, also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210
    Avacaraka
    ocaraka;
    adjective-noun
    1. only in compound kāmâvacarika as adjective to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp 254
    2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in Commentary on Thag 1, 315 ff. quoted in Psalms of the Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit (Divy 127)
    from avacara
    Avacaraṇa
    neuter
    1. being familiar with, dealing with, occupation Ja ii.95
    from avacarati.1
    Avacuttha
    1. 2nd preterite of vac, in prohib form mā evaṁ avacuttha do not speak thus Ja vi.72 Dhp-a iv.228
    Avacchidda
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. perforated, only in reduplicated intensive compound chiddāvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes Ja iii.491 Dhp-a i.122 284 319. cp. chidda-vicchidda
      ava + chidda
    Avacchedaka
    (—˚) adjective
    1. cutting off, as neuter ˚ṁ
    2. adverb in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaṁ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214 iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i.259
    3. ava + cheda + ka
    Avajaya
    1. defeat Dhp-a ii.228 (variant reading for Text ajaya)
    ava + jaya, cp. apajita
    Avajāta
    adjective
    1. low-born, of low or base birth, fig of low character (opposite abhijāta) Snp 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta Snp-a 479) Iti 63 Mil 359
    ava + jāta; cp. B. Sanskrit avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage
    Avajānāti
    1. to deny Vin ii.85 AN iii.164 = Pug 65
    2. (later) to despise Dhp-a iii.16 Pv-a 175 (grd ˚jānitabba)-Of short stem-form ñā are found the following
    3. gerundive avaññeyya Pv-a 175 and with o˚:
    4. gerundive oñātabba Pv-a 195
    5. past participle avañāta, besides avaññāta
    ava + jñā
    Avajīyati
    1. to be diminished, to be lost, be undone Ja i.313 (jitaṁ a; variant reading avajījy˚) Dhp 179 (jitaṁ a = dujjitaṁ hoti Dhp-a iii.197)
    ava + jīyati; Sanskrit avajiryate
    Avajja
    adjective
    1. low, inferior, blamable bad, deprecable Dhp 318 Dhp 319 Dhs 1160 More figuratively in negative form anavajja blameless, faultless DN i.70 (= anindita DN-a i.183) AN ii.26 = Iti 102 Snp 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood ‣See Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita Kp-a 140): Ps ii.116, 170 Pug 30 41, 58; Sdhp 436. O past participle sāvajja
    2. Sanskrit avadya seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a derived from ava. According to Childers = Sanskrit avarjya from vraj, thus meaning “not to be shunned, not forbidden” This interpretn is justified by context of Dhp 318 Dhp 319 The Pali commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava-vadya in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati
    Avajjatā
    feminine [abstract to preceding), only negative an˚; blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25 41 Dhs 1349
    Avajjha
    adjective
    1. not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Snp 288 Ja v.69 Ja vi.132
    grd of a + vadhati, Sanskrit vadhya, vadh
    Avañcana
    adjective
    1. not (even) tottering, i.e. unfit for any motion (especially walking), said of crippled feet Ja i.214 = cp. iii.910
    a + vañcana from vañc
    Avañña
    adjective
    1. despised, despicable Pv iii.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba Pv-a 175)
    to avaññā
    Avaññatti
    feminine
    1. only as negative an˚; the fact of not being despised inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance Iti 72 Vb 350 356; ˚kāma adjective wishing not to be surpassed unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised AN ii.240 iv.1 sq
    2. ava + ñatti = Sanskrit *avajñapti, from ava + jñā
    Avaññā
    feminine
    1. contempt, disregard, disrespect Ja i.257 (˚ya)
    Sanskrit avajñā, from ava + jñā
    Avaññāta
    adjective
    1. despised, treated with contempt Pv-a 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88 Sdhp 90
    past participle of avajānāti
    Avaṭaṁsaka
    1. (= vaṭ˚) ‣See Vin Texts ii.347
    Avaṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. position, standing place Ja i.508 Pv-a 286
    Sanskrit avasthāna
    Avaṭṭhita
    (ad.)
    1. “standing down” = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Thag 1, 1140 Usually negative an˚; unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dhp 38 (˚citta; cp. Dhp-a i.308 cittaṁ thāvaraṁ natthi) Pv-a 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever)
    Sanskrit avasthita, ava + thita
    Avaṭṭhitatā
    feminine
    1. steadiness, only as negative an˚; unsteadiness, fickleness Thag-a 259
    abstract from preceding
    Avaṭṭhiti
    feminine
    1. (firm) position, posture, steadfastness SN v.228 Dhs 11 570
    Sanskrit avasthiti
    Avaḍḍhi
    feminine
    1. “non-growth”, decay Dhp-a iii.335 C on AN iii.76 (cp. apajaha)
    a + vaḍḍhi
    Avaṇṭa
    adjective
    1. without a stalk Ja v.155
    a + vaṇṭa
    Avaṇṇa
    1. blame, reproach, fault DN i.1 (= dosā nindā DN-a i.37) Iti 67 Pug 48 59
    a + vaṇṇa
    Avaṇṇanīya
    adjective
    1. indescribable Ja v.282
    gerundive of a + vaṇṇeti
    Avataṁsa
    1. ‣See vataṁsaka
    Avatata
    otata;
    1. stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 (—˚) Vv-a 276 (chādita)
    ava + tata, past participle of tan
    Avatiṭṭhati
    1. to abide, linger, stand still. DN i.251 = SN iv.322 =. AN v.299 (tatra˚) SN i.25 (v.l otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21 Ja ii.62 Ja iv.208 (aorist avaṭṭhāsi).
    2. past participle avaṭṭhita (q.v.) Avatinna & otinna; ava + tiṭṭhati
    Avatiṇṇa
    otiṇṇa;
    1. fallen into, affected with (—˚), as ava˚; rare late or poetical form of ; , e. g Ja v.98 (issâ˚) ‣See otiṇṇa
    past participle of otarati
    Avattha1
    1. aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu’s wandering, going on tour) AN iii.171 (Commentary avavatthika)
    derivation uncertain
    Avattha2
    1. thrown away Ja v.302 (= chaḍḍita Commentary )
    Sanskrit apāsta, apa + āsta, past participle of as2
    Avattharaṇa
    neuter
    1. setting in array, deploying (of an army) Ja ii.104 (of a robber-band), 336
    from avattharati
    Avattharati
    1. to strew, cover over or up Ja i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā absolutive ); iv.84; Dāvs i.38.
    2. past participle otthaṭa cp. pariy˚
    3. ava + tharati, stṛ
    Avatthāraṇa
    neuter = avattharaṇa DN-a i.274 Avatthu (& ka);
    Avatthu (& ˚ka);
    adjective
    1. groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241 Ja i.440 (˚kaṁ vacanaṁ). For lit meaning ‣See vatthu
    a + vatthu
    Avadāta
    1. (= odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa)
    Avadāna
    1. ‣See apadāna
    Avadāniya
    adjective
    1. stingy, niggardly Snp 774 (= Nd1 36 which explains as follows: avaṁ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaṁ vacanaṁ n’âdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Snp-a 516 condenses this explanation into the following avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaṁ vacanaṁ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā)
    from avadāna cutting off; ava + 2 to cut
    Avadāpana
    1. (cleansing) ‣See vodāpana
    Avadāpeti
    1. (to deal out) only Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pary˚ Divy 202
    Avadāyati
    1. to have pity on, to feel sorry for Ja iv.178 (bhūtānaṁ nâvadāyissaṁ, gloss n’ânukampiyaṁ)
    denominative from avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to 1 ‣See dayati2
    Avadīyati
    1. to burst, split open Ja vi.183 (= bhijjati Commentary ‣See also uddīyati,
    Sanskrit avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti ‣See etymology under darī
    Avadehaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. in the idiom udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjati, to eat one’s fill MN i.102 Thag 1, 935 Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka-bhojana, a heavy meal
      ava + deha + ka but more likely direct from ava + dih
    Avadhāraṇa
    neuter
    1. calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as technical term used by C’s in explanation of evaṁ at DN-a i.27 and of kho at Pv-a 11 Pv-a 18
    cp. Sanskrit avadhāraṇa, from ava + dhṛ
    Avadhi
    1. 3 singular aorist of vadhati
    • At Dhp-a ii.73 avadhi = odhi
    Avanata
    1. ‣See oṇata
    Avanati
    1. (—˚) feminine

      1. stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Mil 387 (unnat’âvanati)
      from avanamati
    Avani
    feminine
    1. bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5
    Vedic avani
    Avapakāsati
    1. is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combined ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati ‣See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati- Vin ii.204 (apakāsati + ; variant reading avapakassati Buddhaghosa in explanation on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems to imply (a)vavakassati) AN iii.145f. (avapakāsituṁ)
    ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, from kṛṣ
    Avapatta
    1. ‣See opatta
    Avapāyin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. coming for a drink, drinking Ja i.163
      cp. avapivati
    Avapivati
    1. to drink from Ja i.163
    ava + , cp. apapibati
    Avabujjhati
    (—˚)
    1. to understand AN iv.96 = Iti 83 (n’avabujjhati) AN iv.98 (identical) Ja i.378 iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avabudhyate
    Avabodha
    1. perception, understanding, full knowledge Snp-a 509 (sacca˚)
    • negative an˚; not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha Vv-a 319)
    ava + bodha
    Avabodhati
    (—˚)
    1. to realise, perceive, pay attention to Ja iii.151 nâva˚)
    cp. Sanskrit avabodhati
    Avabhāsa
    1. Only in compound gambhīrāvabhāso DN ii.55 looking deep. Same compound at AN ii.105 Pug 46 has obhāsa
    later form of obhāsa
    Avabhāsaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14
      from avabhāsa
    Avabhāsita
    (—˚)
    1. shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590
    late form of obhāsita
    Avabhuñjati
    1. to eat, to eat up Ja iii.272 (infinitive ˚bhottuṁ), 273
    ava + bhuñjati
    Avabhūta
    adjective
    1. “come down”, despised, low, unworthy MN ii.210
    ava + bhūta, past participle of ava + bhū
    Avamaṅgala
    adjective
    1. of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opposite abhimangala); neuter bad luck, ill omen Ja i.372 Ja i.402 Ja ii.197 vi.10 424 Dhp-a iii.123 Pv-a 261 Cp. next
    2. ava + mangala, ava here in privative function
    Avamaññati
    1. to slight, to disregard, despise Dhp-a i.170 Pv-a 37 Pv-a 175; Sdhp 271. past participle Caus avamānita
    2. Sanskrit avamanyate
    Avamaṅgalla
    adjective
    1. of bad omen, neuter anything importune, unlucky Ja i.446 Avamana & omana;
    from avamangala
    Avamāna
    omāna;
    1. disregard, disrespect, contempt Ja ii.386 Ja iii.423 Ja v.384 cp. next
    from ava + man, think
    Avamānana
    neuter
    1. = avamāna Ja i.22
    from avamāna
    Avamāneti
    1. to despise Ja v.246 - past participle avamānita Pv-a 36
    2. causative of avamaññati
    Avaya
    1. only in negative anavaya
    Avayava
    1. limb, member, constituent, part Vv-a 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168 201, 276 Pv-a 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As technical term in grammar at Snp-a 397 In the commentaries avayava is often used where aṅga would have been used in the older texts
    Dern uncertain. cp. mediaeval Sanskrit avayava
    Avarajjhati
    (—˚)
    1. to neglect, fail, spurn Thag 1, 167 Ja iv.428 (variant reading ˚rujjh˚)
    ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sanskrit avarādhyate
    Avaruddha
    1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181 apparently meaning ʻ in revolt, out of hand ʼ (of slaves)
    2. late form of oruddha
      1. restrained Sdhp 592
      from avarundhati
    Avaruddhaka
    1. subdued, expelled, banished Ja vi.575 Dīpavaṁsa i.21 (Np)
    avruddha + ka
    Avaruddhati
    1. to expel, remove, banish Ja vi.505 (= nīharati Commentary ), 515 ‣See also avarundhati
    Sanskrit aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh
    Avarundhati
    1. to put under restraint to put into one’s harem as subsidiary wife
    ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (Thag-a 271) on oruddha
    Avalambati
    1. . Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. German avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 cp. olubbha
    = olambati
    Avalitta
    (—˚)
    1. besmeared; in compound ullittāvalitta “smeared up & down” i.e. plastered inside & outside AN i.101
    Sanskrit avalipta, past participle of ava-limpati
    Avalekhati
    1. to scrape off Vin ii.221 (variant reading apa˚)
    ava + lekhati, likh, Sanskrit avalikhati
    Avalekhana1
    neuter
    1. (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in writing down Ja iv.402 (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters)
    from avalekhati
    Avalekhana2
    1. neuter variant reading for apalekhana
    Avalepana
    1. (—˚) neuter

      1. smearing, daubing, plastering MN i.385 (pīta˚) Snp 194 (kāyo taca-maṁs’âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh)
      from ava + lip
    Avasa
    adjective
    1. powerless Sdhp 290. Avasata & Osata;
    a + vasa
    Avasaṭa
    Osaṭa;
    1. withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216 217 (= titthāyatanaṁ saṁkata)
    Sanskrit apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, past participle of ava + sṛ
    Avasarati
    1. to go down, to go away (to) Snp 685 (Burmese variant Text avaṁsari)
    ava + sṛ
    Avasāna
    (—˚)
    1. neuter stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion Ja i.87 (bhattakicc-âvasāne at the end of the meal) Pv-a 76 (identical)
    for osāna
    Avasāya
    1. stopping, end, finish Thag 2, 12 (= avasānaṁ niṭṭhānaṁ Thag-a 19). But the identical passage at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte
    from avaseti
    Avasiñcanaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. pouring over (active & medium), overflowing Ja i.400 (an˚)
      2. from osiñcati
    Avasiṭṭha
    (sic & not osiṭṭha)
    1. left, remaining, over SN ii.133 Ja i.138 Ja v.339 Vv-a 66 plural avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others Pv-a 165 (janā)
    2. past participle of avasissati, Sanskrit avaśiṣṭa
    Avasiṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. remaining, left Ja iii.311
    from avasiṭṭha
    Avasitta
    (—˚)
    1. besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto of a properly consecrated king (‣ See also khattiya) DN i.69 DN ii.227 DN iii.64 Pug 56 DN-a i.182 (Text muddhâvassita variant reading ˚abhisitta); etc
    • ‣ See also abhisitta
    past participle of osiñcati
    Avasin
    adjective-noun
    1. not having control over oneself, DN ii.275
    a + vasin from vaś
    Avasissati
    1. to be left over to remain, in phrase yaṁ pamāṇa-kataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrâvasissati DN i.251 AN v.299 = SN iv.322 Ja ii.61 ‣See explanation on p. 62. Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maṁsa-lohitaṁ MN i.481 AN i.50 SN ii.28 and sarīrāni avasissanti SN ii.83 With the latter phrases cp. avasussati
    Sanskrit avaśiṣyate; passive of ava + śis; but explained by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as fut of avasīdati
    Avasī
    1. metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aorist of vas4 to stop, stay, rest Ja v.66 (mā avasī)
    Avasussati
    1. to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaṁ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maṁsalohitaṁ Ja i.71 Ja i.110 Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu ‣See Trenckner (M i.569) future avasucchati (= Sanskrit *˚śokṣyati, future of Intens.) Ja vi.550 (Burmese variant ˚sussati; Commentary avasucchissati)
    2. Sanskrit *ava-suṣyati of śuṣ
    Avasūra
    1. sundown, sunset, accusative ˚ṁ as adverb at or with sundown Ja v.56 (anāvasūraṁ metrically)
    2. ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaṁs ‣See ava ii
    Avasesa1
    1. remainder, remaining part; only in compounds. an˚; adjective without any remainder i.e. fully, completely MN i.220 =. AN v.347 (˚dohin) AN i.20f. 88 Snp 146 Pug 17 Dhs 363 553 Snp-a 417 (˚pharaṇa) Pv-a 71 (˚ato, adverb altogether not leaving anything out); & sāvasesa leaving something over, having something left AN i.20f. 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left)
    2. Sanskrit avaśeṣa, from ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati
    Avasesa2
    adjective
    1. remaining, left Snp 694 (āyu avaseso) Ja iii.19 Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā) Pv-a 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi-tacamatt’âvasesa-sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi-sanghātamatt; ’âvasesa-sarīra)
    • nt. (as pred.) ˚ṁ what is left Pv-a 52 (app’avasesaṁ); Kp-a 245 (n’atthi tesaṁ avasesaṁ)
    ‣See preceding
    Avasesaka
    adjective
    1. being left, overflowing, additional, more Ja i.400 (an˚); Dīpavaṁsa iv.45
    from avasesa2
    Avassa
    adjective
    1. against one’s will, inevitable Ja i.19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as neuter ˚ṁ adv inevitably (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avaśyaṁ Divy 347; Avs i.209 etc. Ja iii.271 DN-a i.263 Sdhp 293
    2. a + vaś
    Avassakaṁ
    adverb
    1. inevitably Dīpavaṁsa ix.13
    ‣See avassa
    Avassajati
    ossajati;
    1. to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava) Ja iv.425 Ja v.487 (aorist avassaji read for avissaji)
    2. ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sanskrit utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati The form ossajati puzzled the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203
    Avassana
    neuter
    1. not bleating Ja iv.251
    a + vassana, Sanskrit vāsana of vāś to bleat
    Avassaya
    1. support, help, protection, refuge Ja i.211 Ja ii.197 Ja iv.167 Mil 160 Dhp-a ii.267 Dhp-a iv.198 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 113
    Sanskrit *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya ‣See Pali apassaya1
    Avassava
    1. outflow, effect, only negative anassava no further effect Vin ii.89 MN i.93 MN ii.246 AN iii.334 sp
    ava + sava, Sanskrit ˚srava from sru to flow
    Avasseti
    1. to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (locative ) Ja ii.80 (
    2. aorist avassayiṁ = vāsaṁ kappesiṁ Commentary ).
    3. past participle avassita
    4. ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati ‣See apasseti
    Avassāvana
    neuter
    1. straining, filtering (?) Ja ii.288
    from ava + causative of sru to flow
    Avassita
    1. depending on, dealing with Ja v.375 ‣See apassita
    for apassita, Sanskrit apaśrita
    Avassuta
    adjective
    1. (literally) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking Ja iv.20
    2. (figuratively) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire lustful (opposite; anavassuta, q.v.) Vin ii.236 SN iv.70 SN iv.184 (an˚) AN i.261 AN i.262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201 Snp 63 (an˚) Pug 27 36; Dīpavaṁsa ii.5 (Text reads avassita. negative anavassuta : 1. not leaking, without a leak Ja iv.20 (nāvā = udaka-pavesan’âbhāvena a. Commentary )
    3. free from leakage, i.e. from lust or moral intoxication Dhp 39 (˚citta) Snp 63 ‣See explained in detail at Nd2 40 Snp-a 116 (kilesa-anvāssava-virahita).

      Sanskrit *avasruta, past participle of ava + sru, cp. avassava
    Avahaṭa
    1. taken away, stolen Mil 46
    past participle of avaharati
    Avaharaṇa
    (—˚)
    1. taking away, removal; theft Pv-a 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚)
    from avaharati in both meanings
    Avaharati
    oharati;
    1. to steal Ja i.384 Pv-a 47 (avahari vatthaṁ), 86 (identical, = apānudi). past participle avahaṭa (q.v.)
    2. ava + hṛ
    Avahasati
    1. to laugh at, deride, mock Ja v.111 (aññamaññaṁ) Pv-a 178 aorist avahasi Ja iv.413
    2. ava + has
    Avahāra
    1. taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚ paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚)
    from avaharati
    Avahīyati
    1. to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340
    for ohīyati
    Avāgata
    1. only in phrase dhammā avāgat-amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, Ja v.82 (Commentary explains apāgata)
    ava + ā + gacchati
    Avākaroti
    1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy Ja iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya Commentary ); v.495, 500; vi.280
    2. to give back, restore Ja vi.577 (= deti Commentary )
    either ava + ā + karoti or avaṁ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as Sanskrit apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ
    Avākirati
    1. wrong by Hardy Vv-a Index for avakirati (q.v.)
    Avāṭuka
    1. ‣See apāṭuka
    Avāpuraṇa
    neuter
    1. a key SN iii.132 AN iv.374
    same as apāpuraṇa
    Avāpurati
    1. to open (a door) Ja i.63 Ja vi.373
    same as apāpurati
    Avāvaṭa
    adjective
    1. unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married Ja v.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā Commentary )
    a + vāvaṭa
    Avikampamāna
    adjective
    1. not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting Ja iv.310 (= anosakkamāna Commentary ; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna ‣See Toevoegselen s.v., but unnecessarily) vi.176 (= nirāsanka Commentary ) Ja vi.273
    a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. medium of kamp
    Avikampin
    adjective
    1. unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala Vv-a 215)
    from a + vi + kamp
    Avikopin
    adjective
    1. not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed Ja vi.226 (acchejja +)
    a + vikopin; from vi + kup
    Avikkhepa
    1. calmness, balance, equanimity DN iii.213 AN i.83 Ps i.94; ii.228 Dhs 11 15, 570
    a + vikkhepa
    Avicāreti
    1. not to examine Vv-a 336
    a + vicāreti
    Aviccaṁ
    at Ja v.434 read aviviccaṁ
    1. i.e. not secretly, openly
    a + viviccaṁ
    Avijānaṁ
    1. not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60 Iti 103
    a + vijānaṁ
    Avijjā
    feminine
    1. ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth ‣See paṭicca-samuppāda, cp. SN ii.6 SN ii.9 SN ii.12 Snp p. 141 & many other passages ‣See on term; Compendium 83 note 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail; vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (DN iii.254 DN iii.282 SN iv.205 SN iv.208f. 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4 DN i.84 DN iii.216 Iti 49 Dhs 1100 1109), of the oghā (DN iii.230 DN iii.276 Dhs 390 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (SN ii.23 AN i.223 Iti 8 Dhs 1162 1486), of the saṁyojanāni (DN iii.254 Dhs 1131 1460) ‣See for various characterisatons the following passages: Vin i.1 Vin iii.3 DN iii.212 230, 234, 274 MN i.54 MN i.67 MN i.144 SN ii.4 SN ii.26 SN ii.263 SN iii.47 SN iii.162 SN iv.256 SN v.52 AN i.8 AN i.285 AN ii.132 AN ii.158 AN ii.247 AN iii.84f. 414; iv.228 Iti 34 (yā kāc’imā duggatiyo asmiṁ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā-lobha-sammussayā) 57, 81 Snp 199 Snp 277 Snp 729 (jāti-maraṇa-saṁsāraṁ ye vajanti punappunaṁ … avijjāy’eva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko) Dhp 243 Nd2 99 Pug 21 Dhs 390 1061, 1162 Dhp-a iii.350 Dhp-a iv.161 (˚paligha)
    Sanskrit avidyā; from a + vid
    Aviññāṇaka
    adjective
    1. senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling Dhp-a i.6 (saviññāṇaka +)
    a + viññāṇa + ka
    Aviññū
    adjective = aviddasu.
    Avitakka
    adjective
    1. free from thought DN iii.219 DN iii.274 Thag 2, 75 (“where reasonings cease” translation) Dhs 161 (“free from the working of conception” translation), 504 etc
    a + vitakka
    Avidūra
    adjective
    1. not far, near; usually in locative ˚e as
    2. adverb near Snp 147
    3. a + vidūra
    Aviddasu
    adjective
    1. ignorant, foolish Snp 762 (= bāla Snp-a 509) Dhp 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395) Pv-a 18 (so read for avindasu). Avinasaka (ika)
    a + viddasu
    Avināsaka (˚ika)
    adjective
    1. not causing destruction AN iii.38 (˚ika) Ja v.116 (= anāsaka Commentary )
    a + vināsa + ka
    Avināsana
    adjective
    1. imperishable Dīpavaṁsa iv.16
    a + vināsana
    Avinicchayaññū
    adjective
    1. not knowing how to decide Ja v.367
    a + vinicchaya + ñū
    Avinibbhujaṁ
    adjective
    1. unable to distinguish or to know Ja v.121 (= atīrento Commentary )
    ppr. of a + vinibbhujati
    Avinibbhoga
    (ad.)
    1. not to be distinguished, indistinct Ja iii.428 (˚sadda)
    a + vinibbhoga
    Avipariṇāma
    1. absence of change, steadfastness, endurance DN i.18 DN iii.31 DN iii.33 (˚dhamma) DN-a i.113 (= jarā-vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato)
    a + viparināma
    Avippaṭisāra
    1. absence of regret or remorse AN iii.46
    a + vippaṭisāra
    Avippavāsa
    adjective-noun
    1. thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adjective not neglectful, mindful, attentive eager Vin v.216 Snp 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento) DN-a i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso) Dhp-a iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa)
    a + vippavāsa
    Aviruddha
    adjective
    1. not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dhp 406 Snp 365 Snp 704 Snp 854
    a + viruddha
    Avirūḷhi
    feminine
    1. absence or cesssation of growth Snp 235 Dhp-a i.245 (˚dhamma)
    a + virūḷhi
    Avirodha
    1. absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Thag 1, 875
    a + virodha
    Avirodhana
    neuter = avirodha Ja iii.320 Ja iii.412 Ja v.378
    Avivāda
    1. absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony DN iii.245 Snp 896 (˚bhūma Snp-a 557 or ˚bhumma Nd1 308 explained as Nibbāna)
    a + vivāda
    Avisaṁvādaka
    adjective
    1. not deceiving, not lying DN i.4 DN iii.170 Pug 57 DN-a i.73
    a + visaṁvada + ka
    Avisaṁvādanatā
    feminine
    1. honesty, faithfulness, uprightness DN iii.190
    abstract from a + visaṁvāda
    Avisaṁvādeti
    1. to keep one’s word, to be honest, to be true Ja v.124
    a + visaṁ + causative of vad
    Avisaggatā
    feminine
    1. state of being undisturbed harmony, balance Ja vi.224 (Commentary avisaggata). cp. avyagga
    a + visaggatā, variant reading viy˚, thus as a + viyagga, Sanskrit vyagra = ākula
    Avisare
    at Ja v.117 according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i.e. towards a wrong or unworthy object
    1. Commentary differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; variant reading adhisare
    a + visaya, loc
    Avisāhaṭa
    adjective
    1. imperturbed Dhs 15 24, 287, 570. (˚mānasata)
    a + visāhaṭa
    Avissaji
    1. at Ja vi.79 is with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. better to be read avassaji ‣See avassajati
    Avissajjiya
    adjective
    1. not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚) Ja vi.568
    gerundive of a + vissajjati
    Avissāsaniya
    adjective
    1. not to be trusted, untrustworthy Ja iii.474
    a + visāsana + iya, ika
    Aviha
    1. the world of the Aviha’s, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā-words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 note 3; Compendium 139
    • SN i.35 SN i.60 AN i.279 Pug 17 Avihimsa (Avihesa)
    of uncertain etymology
    Avihiṁsa (Avihesa)
    feminine
    1. absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love DN iii.213 DN iii.215 DN iii.240 (avihesā) Snp 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva Snp-a 318) Iti 82 (˚vitakka)
    a + vihiṁsā
    Aviheṭhaka
    adjective
    1. not harassing, not hurting DN iii.166 (but cp. Snp-a 318
    • avihesaka in same context) Mil 219
    a + viheṭhaka
    Avī˚
    1. ; in general ‣See vī˚;
    Avīci
    1. 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells ‣See niraya, described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g at Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 Nd1 18 347, 405 = Nd2 304 iiid; Ps i.83 Dhs 1281 Ja i.71 Ja i.96 Ja iii.182 iv.159 Dhp-a i.148 Pv-a 52 Snp-a 290 Sdhp 37 Sdhp 194; Pgdp 5 sq. etc etc
    • disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma)
    • B. Sanskrit avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etymology
    Avekalla
    (˚-) adjective)
    1. without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge Ja vi.297
    a + vekalla
    Avekkhati
    1. to look at, to consider, to ‣See Iti 33 (variant reading ap˚) Dhp 28 Dhp 50, Ja iv.6 Dhp-a i.259 (= passati)
    B. Sanskrit avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit av˚ corresponds
    Avekkhipati
    1. to jump, hop literally to throw (a foot) down Ja iv.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati Commentary )
    avaṁ + khipati, avaṁ here in form ave corresponding to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.
    Avecca
    adverb
    1. certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, explained by Buddhaghosa as acala (on DN ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Snp 229); by Dhp. as apara-paccaya-bhāvena (on Pv iv.125)
    • Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Saṅghe avecca-pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at MN i.47 SN ii.69 SN iv.271f. 304 v.344, 405 AN i.222 AN ii.56 AN iii.212 AN iii.332 AN iii.451 AN iv.406 v.183; further at Ps i.161 (˚pasanna) Snp 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125
    Usually taken as ava +
  • absolutive of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by Pali grammarians as a vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically B. Sanskrit avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the Pali form
  • Avedha
    adjective
    1. not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable unshakable, imperturbable Snp 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva Snp-a 331)
    a + vedha, gerundive of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sanskrit avedhya
    Avebhaṅgika
    adjective
    1. not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305 cp. next
    from a + vi + bhanga
    Avebhaṅgiya
    neuter
    1. that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171 which are the same as under avissajjiya (q.v.); v.129
    = avebhangika
    Avera
    adjective
    1. peaceable, mild, friendly Snp 150 (= veravirahita Kp-a 248); Sdhp 338
    • ˚ṁ
    • neuter friendliness kindness DN i.247 (˚citta) Dhp 5 (= khantimetta Dhp-a i.51)
    a + vera
    Averin
    adjective-noun = avera Dhp 197 Dhp 258.
    Avosita
    1. only in negative an˚; unfulfilled, undone Thag 1, 101
    reading uncertain, cp. avyosita
    Avyagga
    (ad)
    1. not bewildered, not confused SN v.66 cp. avisaggatā
    a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra
    Avyattatā
    feminine
    1. state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding Dhp-a ii.38
    abstract from avyatta
    Avyatha
    adjective
    1. not miserable, fortunate Ja iii.466 (= akilamāna Commentary )
    a + vyatha, cp. Sanskrit vyathā misfortune
    Avyaya
    1. [a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. i.72 instrumental ˚ena safely) Mil 393 (as abbaya Text
    Avyāpajjha1
    1. (abyābajjha) neuter

      1. (active) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (epithet of Nibbāna Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta) Iti 31 (abyābajjh’ārāma)
      a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad
    Avyāpajjha2
    (abyābajjha) adjective)
    1. free from oppression or injury not hurting, kind DN ii.242 (avera +), 276 MN i.90 Iti 16 = 52 (sukhaṁ) Mil 410 (avera +)
    either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya
    Avyāpanna
    adjective
    1. free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent DN iii.8283 (˚citta) AN ii.220 (identical) Pug 68 (identical)
    • Same in B. Sanskrit e.g. Divy 105 Divy 302
    a + vyāpanna
    Avyāpāda
    1. absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice DN iii.215 DN iii.229 DN iii.240 Iti 82 (all MSS have aby˚) Dhs 33 36, 277, 313, 1056
    a + vyāpāda
    Avyāyata
    adjective
    1. at random, without discrimination, careless Ja i.496 (= avyatta Commentary )
    a + vyāyata of yam
    Avyāyika
    adjective
    1. not liable to loss or change, imperishable Ja v.508 (= avigacchanaka Commentary )
    from avyaya
    Avyāvaṭa
    adjective
    1. not occupied, i.e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136 Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Snp 43) Ja iii.65 Ja vi.188 Mil 177 (abyā˚)
    a + vyāvaṭa = Sanskrit vyāpṛta
    Avyāseka
    adjective
    1. untouched, unimpaired DN i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka-virahitattā avyāseka DN-a i.183) Pug 59
    a + vy + āseka
    Avyāharati
    1. not to bring or procure Ja v.80
    a + vy + āharati
    Avyosita
    adjective
    1. not having reached perfection, imperfect Thag 1, 784 (aby˚)
    a + vyosita, Sanskrit vyavasita
    Avhaya
    1. calling, name; adjective (—˚) called, having the name of Snp 684 (isi˚) 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd2 624)
    from avhayati; cp. Sanskrit āhvaya “betting”
    Avhayati
    Avheti;
    1. -1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to DN i.244 (avhayāma imperative ) Pv-a 164
    2. to call, call up, summon MN 1.17 Ja ii.10 252 (= pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha preterite) Vv 331 (avheti)
    3. to give a name to call, to address Snp-a 487 (= āmanteti ālapati)

      • pp avhāta (q.v.)
      Sanskrit āhvayati, ā + or hvā
    Avhāta
    1. called, summoned Ja iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123 cp. Pv-a 64 The id p. at Thag 2, 129 reads ayācita
    past participle of avhayati
    Avhāna
    neuter
    1. - 1. begging, calling, asking Snp 710 Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā)
    • addressing, naming Snp-a 605 (= nāma)
    • from avhayati, Sanskrit āhvāna in different meaning
    Avhāyana
    neuter
    1. calling to, asking, invocation, imploration DN i.11 (Sir-avhāyane, variant reading avhayana explained at DN-a i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as “ehi Siri mayhaṁ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaṁ sire Siriyā avhayanaṁ”) 244, 245 (variant reading avhāna)
    cp. Sanskrit āhvayana
    Avhāyika
    adjective
    1. calling, giving a name; masculine one who gives a name Ja i.401 = iii.234
    2. from avhaya
    Asa
    adjective
    1. bad Ja iv.435 = vi.235 (sataṁ vā asaṁ accusative singular with variant reading santaṁ …, expld- by sappurisaṁ vā asappurisaṁ vā Commentary ); v.448 (
    2. nominative
    3. plural feminine asā explained by asatiyo lāmikā Commentary ; cp. p. 446 v.319)
    4. for asaṁ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning “good”
    Asaṁvata
    adjective
    1. unrestricted, open Ja vi.306
    past participle of + saṁvuṇati, cp. saṁvuta
    Asaṁvara
    1. absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345
    a + saṁvāra
    Asaṁvāsa
    adjective
    1. deprived of co-residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213 214
    a + saṁvāsa
    Asaṁvindaṁ
    1. not finding, not knowing Thag 1, 717
    ppr. a + saṁvindati
    Asaṁvuta
    adjective
    1. not restrained Dhs 1345 1347
    past participle of a + saṁvuṇāti, cp. saṁvata
    Asaṁsaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society MN i.ai4 SN i.63 Snp 628 = Dhp 404 (= dassana-savana-samullāpa paribhogakāya-saṁsaggānaṁ abhāvena Snp-a 468 = Dhp-a iv.173)
    a + saṁsaṭṭha
    Asaṁhārima
    adjective = asaṁhāriya (?) Vin iv.272
    Asaṁhāriya
    adjective
    1. not to be destroyed or shattered Iti 77 Thag 1, 372 Nd2 110
    gerundive of a + saṁharati
    Asaṁhīra
    adjective
    1. immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96 SN i.193 AN iv.141 v.71 Snp 1149 (as epithet of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110) Ja i.62 Ja iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dīpavaṁsa iv.12
    = asaṁhāriya of saṁ + hṛ
    Asakka
    adjective
    1. impossible Ja v.362 (˚rūpa)
    a + sakka; Sanskrit aśakya
    Asakkuṇeyya
    adjective
    1. impossible, unable to Ja i.55 Kp-a 185 and passim
    gerundive of a + sakkoti
    Asakkhara
    adjective
    1. not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth Ja v.168 Dhp-a iii.401 (opposite sasakkhara)
    a + sakkhara
    Asakyadhītā
    feminine
    1. not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214
    a + sakyadhītā
    Asagguṇa
    1. bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhāvin, the a˚ belongs to the whole compound). Asankita & iya;
    a + sagguṇa
    Asaṅkita
    ˚iya;
    adjective
    1. not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold Ja i.334 (˚iya) v.241; Sdhp 435 Sdhp 541
    a + sankita, past participle of śaṅk
    Asaṅkuppa
    adjective
    1. not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (epithet of Nibbāna) Snp 1149 (cp. Nd2 106) Thag 1, 649
    a + sankuppa, gerundive of kup
    Asaṅkusaka
    adjective [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sanskrit sankasuka splitting, crumbling ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen p. 18 not contrary Ja vi.297 (˚vattin, Commentary appaṭilomavattin, cp. Ja trsln.vi.143).
    Asaṅkheyya
    adjective
    1. incalculable, innumerable, neuter an immense period AN ii.142 Mil 232 (cattāri a.), 289 Dhp-a i.5 83, 104
    a + sankheyya, gerundive of saṁ-khyā
    Asaṅga
    adjective
    1. not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Thag 2, 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta Thag-a 259) Mil 343 cp. next
    a + sanga
    Asaṅgita
    adjective
    1. not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick Ja v.409
    from asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?
    Asacca
    adjective
    1. not true, false Ja v.399
    a + sacca
    Asajjamāna
    adjective
    1. not clinging, not stuck, unattached Snp 38 Snp 71 (cp. Nd2 107) Dhp 221 (nāmarūpasmiṁ a. = alaggamana Dhp-a iii.298)
    ppr. medium of a + sajjati, sañj
    Asajjittho
    1. 2nd singular preterite medium of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate Ja i.376 ‣See sajjati
    Asajjhaya
    1. non-repetition Dhp 241 (cp. Dhp-a iii.347)
    a + sajjhāya
    Asañña
    adjective
    1. unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings. Name of a class of Devas DN i.28 (cp. DN-a i.118 and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit asaṁjñika-sattvāḥ Divy 505)
    a + saññā
    Asaññata
    adjective
    1. unrestrained, intemperate, lacking self-control Iti 43 = 90 Snp 662 = Dhp 307
    a + saññata, past participle of saṁ + yam
    Asaññin
    adjective
    1. unconscious DN i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DN-a i.163); iii.111, 140, 263 Iti 87 Snp 874
    a + saññin
    Asaṭha
    adjective
    1. without guile, not fraudulent, honest DN iii.47 DN iii.55 DN iii.237 Dhp-a i.69
    a + saṭha
    Asaṁṭhita
    adjective
    1. not composed, unsettled, fickle Iti 62 94
    a + saṇṭhita
    Asat (Asanto)
    1. not being, not being good, i.e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); frequently, e.g. Snp 94 Snp 131 Snp 881 Snp 950 Dhp 73 Dhp 77 Dhp 367 Iti 69 (asanto nirayaṁ nenti) ‣See also asaddhamma
    a + sat, ppr. of asti
    *Asati
    (& Asanāti q.v.)
    1. to eat; imperative asnātu Ja v.376
    2. future asissāmi Thag 1, 223 Snp 970

      • ppr. med asamāna Ja v.59 Snp 239
      • absolutive asitvā Mil 167 & asitvāna Ja iv.371 (an˚).
      • past participle asita (q.v.) ‣See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati; (añhamāna Snp 240), also āsita1
      Sanskrit aśnāti, to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aṁśa share, part
    Asatiyā
    adverb
    1. heedlessly, unintentionally Ja iii.486
    instrumental of a + sati
    Asatta
    adjective
    1. not clinging or attached, free from attachment Snp 1059 Dhp 419 Nd2 107 108 Dhp-a iv.228
    past participle of a + sajjati
    Asattha
    (n. adjective)
    1. absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combined with adaṇḍa in various phrases ‣See under daṇḍa. Also at Thag 1, 757 (+ avaṇa)
    a + sattha
    Asadisa
    adjective
    1. incomparable, not having its like Dhp-a ii.89 Dhp-a iii.120 (˚dāna)
    a + sadisa
    Asaddha
    adjective
    1. not believing, without faith DN iii.252 DN iii.282
    a + saddha
    Asaddhamma
    1. evil condition, sin, especially sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at Iti 85 as 4 at AN ii.47 as 7 at DN iii.252 DN iii.282 as 8 at Vin ii.202
    a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit asaddharma
    Asana1
    neuter
    1. stone, rock Ja ii.91 Ja v.131
    Vedic aśan(m)
    Asana2
    neuter
    1. eating, food; adjective eating Ja i.472 (ghatâsana epithet of the fire; v.64 (identical) Usually in negative form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324) DN-a i.139 ‣See also nirasana
    cp. Sanskrit aśana of , cp. asati
    Asana3
    neuter
    1. the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja i.40 (as Bodhi-tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530
    Sanskrit asana
    Asana4
    neuter
    1. an arrow MN i.82 = SN i.62 cp. asani
    cp. Sanskrit asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw
    Asanāti
    1. to eat, to consume (food) Ja i.472 Ja v.64 Ja vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; Commentary paribhuñjati)
    ‣See asati
    Asani
    feminine
    1. originally a sharp stone as hurling-weapon thence in mythol. Indra’s thunderbolt thunder-clap, lightning Ja i.71 Ja i.167 Ja ii.154 iii.323 Mil 277 Vv-a 83
    1. ˚aggi the fire of thunder, i.e. lightning or fire caused by lightning Dhp-a iii.71
    • ˚pāta the falling of the thunderbolt thunderclap, lightning DN-a i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?) Pv-a 45
    • ˚vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) SN ii.229 (= lābha-sakkāra-silokassa adhivacana) DN iii.44 DN iii.47 Asantasam & anto;
    Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sanskrit aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered ‣See assa, to Latin ācer pointed, sharp, Anglo-Saxon egl sting, Old High German ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sanskrit aśan ‣See asana1. cp. also aṁsa & asama; 2
    Asantasaṁ
    ˚anto;
    adjective
    1. fearless, not afraid Snp 71 Snp 74 Ja iv.101 Ja vi.306 Nd2 109
    ppr. of a + santasati
    Asantāsin
    adjective
    1. fearless, not trembling, not afraid Snp 850 Dhp 351 Nd2 109 Dhp-a iv.70
    a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaṁ
    Asantuṭṭha
    1. not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Snp 108 cp. next
    past participle of a + santussati
    Asantuṭṭhitā
    feminine
    1. dissatisfaction, discontentment DN iii.214 (so read for tutth˚ = AN i.95
    abstract from asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha
    Asanthava
    1. dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Snp 207
    a + santhava
    Asandhitā
    feminine
    1. absence of joints, disconnected state Ja vi.16
    a + sandhi + tā
    Asannata
    adjective
    1. not bent or bending Sdhp 417
    a + sannata
    Asapatta
    adjective-noun
    1. (active) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure peaceful DN ii.276 Snp 150 (= vigata-paccatthika, mettavihārin Kp-a 249) Thag 2, 512
    a + sapatta = Sanskrit sapatna
    Asapattī
    feminine
    1. without co-wife or rival in marriage SN iv.249
    a + sapattī
    Asappurisa
    1. a low, bad or unworthy man MN iii.37 Snp-a 479 (= anariya Snp 664)
    a + sappurisa, cp. asat
    Asabala
    adjective
    1. unspotted DN ii.80 = iii.245
    a + sabala
    Asabbha
    adjective
    1. not belonging to the assembly-room, not consistent with good manners; impolite, vile, low, of base character Ja iii.527 (mātugāma) Dhp 77 = Ja iii.367 = Thag 1, 994 Mil 221 Dhp-a i.256 Thag-a 246 (akkhi). cp. next
    • Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form
    a + sabbha, i.e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.
    Asabbhin = asabbna
    J i.494, more frequently in compounds. as asabbhi˚; , e.g.
    1. ˚kāraṇa a low or sinful act Mil 280
    • ˚rūpa low common Ja vi.386 (= asādhu-jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita-jātika). cp. preceding

    *Asabha
    1. ‣See usabha
    Sanskrit ṛṣabha
    Asama1
    adjective
    1. unequal, incomparable Ja i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). especially frequently in cpd ˚dhura literally carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Snp 694 (= asama-viriya Snp-a 489) Ja i.193 Ja vi.259 Ja vi.330
    a + sama
    Asama2
    neuter
    1. stone, rock DN-a i.270 271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; Burmese variant ayamuṭṭhika) Snp-a 392 (instrumental asmanā)
    the diaeretic form of Sanskrit aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q.v.); connected with Latin ocris “mons confragosus”; Lithuanian akmů̃ stone ‣See also asana1 (Sanskrit aśan stone for throwing) and asani
    Asamaggiya
    neuter
    1. lack of concord, disharmony Ja vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya)
    abstract from a + samagga
    Asamaṇa
    1. at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q.v.)
    Asamapekkhana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. lack of consideration SN iii.261 Dhs 390 1061, 1162
      from a + sam + apekkhati
    Asamāhita
    adjective
    1. not composed, uncontrolled, not firm Iti 113 (opposite susamāhita) Dhp 110 Dhp 111 Pug 35
    a + samāhita
    Asamijjhanaka
    adjective
    1. unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; feminine ˚ikā Ja iii.252
    2. a + samijjhana + ka
    Asamiddhi
    feminine
    1. misfortune, lack of success Ja vi.584
    a + samiddhi
    Asamosaraṇa
    neuter
    1. not coming together, not meeting, separation Ja v.233
    a + samosaraṇa
    Asampakampiya
    adjective
    1. not to be shaken, not to be moved Snp 229 (= kampetuṁ vā cāletuṁ vā asakkuṇeyyo Kp-a 185)
    gerundive of a + sampakampeti
    Asampajañña
    neuter
    1. lack of intelligence DN iii.213 Dhs 390 1061, 1162, 1351
    a + sampajañña
    Asampāyanto
    1. unable to solve or explain Snp p. 92
    ppr. of a + sampāyati
    Asambādha
    adjective
    1. unobstructed Snp 150 (= sambādha-virahita Kp-a 248) Ja i.80 Thag-a 293
    a + sambādha
    Asammodiya
    neuter
    1. disagreement, dissension Ja vi.517 (= asamaggiya Commentary )
    a + sammodiya
    Asammosa
    1. absence of confusion DN iii.221 = Dhs 1366
    a + sammosa cp. B. Sanskrit asammoṣadharman epithet of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc
    Asayaṁvasin
    adjective
    1. not under one’s own control, i.e. dependent DN ii.262 Ja i.337
    a + sayaṁ + vasiṁ
    Asayha
    adjective
    1. impossible, insuperable Ja vi.337 Usually in compound ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Thag 1, 536 Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa) Iti 32
    a + sayha, gerundive of sah = Sanskrit asahya
    Asahana
    neuter-adjective
    1. not enduring, non-endurance, inability Ja iii.20 Pv-a 17
    a + sahana
    Asahāya
    adjective
    1. one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Mil 225
    a + sahāya
    Asā
    1. ‣See āsa
    Asāta
    adjective [a + sāta, Sanskrit aśāta, Kern’s interpretation & etymology of asāta at; Toevoegselen s.v. p. 90 is improbable disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā Mvu i.5) Snp 867 Ja i.288 Ja i.410 Ja ii.105 Dhs 152 1343.
    Asādhāraṇa
    adjective
    1. not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35 Kh viii.9 Ja i.58 Ja i.78 Mil 285 DN-a i.71 Sdhp 589 Sdhp 592
    a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561
    Asāmapāka
    adjective
    1. one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DN-a i.270
    a + sāma + pāka
    Asāra
    (n. adjective)
    1. that which is not substance, worthlessness; adjective worthless, vain, idle Snp 937 (= asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd1 409) Dhp 11 Dhp 12 (cp. Dhp-a i.114 for interpretation)
    a + sāra
    Asāraka
    adjective
    1. unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Thag 1, 260 Ja ii.163 = Dhp-a i.144
    a + sāraka
    Asāraddha
    adjective
    1. not excited, cool AN i.148 = Iti 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; variant reading assāraddha)
    a + sāraddha
    Asāhasa
    neuter
    1. absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness DN iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc as adverb asāhasaṁ without violence, not arbitrarily Ja iii.319 instrumental asāhasena identical Ja vi.280 Dhp 257 (= amusāvādena Dhp-a iii.382)
    2. a + sāhasa
    Asi
    a sword, a large knife DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222) MN ii.99 AN i.48 = (asinā sīsaṁ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṁ) Ja iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning “sickle”), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either “āsiñ ca me or “āsiñcam me”); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge) Pv-a 253 (asinā pahaṭa).
    1. ˚camma sword & shield Vin ii.192 AN iii.93 Ja vi.449
    • ˚tharu the hilt of a sword Dhp-a iv.66
    • ˚nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29
    • ˚patta having sword-like leaves with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword-leaf-wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology ‣See e.g. Mārk-aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii.75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur
    • past participle 23 sq.) Ja vi.250 (˚niraya) Pv-a 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194
    • ˚pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Mil 191
    • ˚māla (-kamma) sword-garland (-torture) Ja iii.178 (+ sīsaṁ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation “sword-dirt” ‣See māla (mālā)
    • ˚lakkhana “swordsign”, i.e. (fortune -telling from) marks or a sword DN i.9 Ja i.455
    • ˚loma having swords for hair SN ii.257 cp. Vin iii.106
    • ˚sūna slaughter-house (so also B. Sanskrit asisūnā Divy 10 Divy 15 ‣See further detail under “kāma similes) Vin ii.26 MN i.130 MN i.143 AN iii.97
    • ˚sūla a swordblade Thag 2, 488 (explained at Thag-a 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena i.e. with reference to the executioner’s block, cp. also sattisūla)
    Vedic asi, Avestan aṁhū Latin ensis
    Asika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhitt’asika with drawn sword, MN i.377 Ja i.393
    asi + ka
    Asita1
    1. having eaten, eating; neuter that which is eaten or enjoyed, food MN i.57 AN iii.30 AN iii.32 (˚pīta-khāyita etc.) Pv-a 25 (identical) Ja vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one’s food, satisfied). cp. āsita1
    2. Sanskrit aśita, past participle of *asati, Sanskrit aśnāti
    Asita2
    adjective
    1. not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires DN ii.261 (˚âtiga) MN i.386 Thag 1, 38 1242 ‣See Mrs Rhys Davids in Psalms of the Brethren 404 note 2 Ja ii.247 Iti 97 Snp 251 Snp 519 Snp 593 Snp 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. Snp-a 487), 698 (identical), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya)
    a + sita
  • past participle of *śri, Sanskrit aśrita
  • Asita3
    adjective
    1. black-blue, black MN ii.180 (˚vyābhangī) AN iii.5 (identical) Thag 2, 480 (= indanīla Thag-a 286) Ja iii.419 (˚âpangin black-eyed); v.302 Dāvs i.45
    Sanskrit asita; Indogermanic *ās, cp. Latin āreo to be dry, i.e. burnt up; originally meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i.e. black colour (of ashes)
    Asita4
    masculine neuter
    1. a sickle Ja iii.129 Ja v.46
    from asi
    Asīti
    numeral
    1. 80 (on symbolical meaning & frequently application ‣See; aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref’s In addition we mention the following:) Ja i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i.e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa-vāraṇa-parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni) Mil 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiṁ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) Dhp-a i.14 19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi-vibhava). cp. ạ̄sītika
    Sanskrit aśīti
    Asu
    1. (pronoun )

      pronoun dẹmonstr “that”, that one, usually combined with yo (yaṁ), e.g. asu yo so puriso MN i.366 yaṁ aduṁ khettaṁ SN iv.315 nominative singular masculine asu SN iv.195 Mil 242

    2. feminine asu Ja v.396 (asū metri causâ);
    3. neuter aduṁ MN i.364 MN i.483 AN i.250 Of oblique cases e.g. amunā instrumental AN i.250 cp. also next
    4. Sanskrit asau
    5. masculine, adas
    6. neuter ; base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g.
    7. adverb amutra (q.v.)
    Asuka
    1. (pron adjective)
      1. such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87 Ja i.148 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 109 Pv-a 122 (˚ṁ gatiṁ gata)
      asn + ka
    Asuci
    adjective
    1. not clean, impure, unclean Snp 75 (˚manussā ‣See Nd2 112) Pug 27 36; Sdhp 378 Sdhp 603
    a + suci
    Asucīka
    neuter
    1. impurity, unclean living, defilement Snp 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva-missita Snp-a 286
    abstract from asuci
    Asubha
    adjective
    1. impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; neuter ˚ṁ nastiness, impurity. cp. on term and the Asubha-meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 70 and Compendium 121 note 6

      • SN iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320 Snp 341 Sdhp 368
      • ˚subhāsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Snp 633 Ja iii.243 Mil 136
      1. ˚ānupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) Iti 80 81 Dhp-a i.76
      • ˚kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68
      • ˚kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity Dhp-a iii.425
      • ˚nimitta sign of the unclean i.e. idea of impurity Vism 77
      • ˚bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68
      • ˚saññā idea of impurity DN iii.253 DN iii.283 DN iii.289 DN iii.291
      • ˚saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) Iti 93
      a + subha
    Asura
    1. a fallen angel, a Titan plural asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhammapāla at Pv-a 272 & the Commentary on Ja v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka-bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e.g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Mil 117 with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DN-a i.51 The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the following passages under; the title of devāsura-saṅgāma : DN ii.285 SN i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447 MN i.253 AN iv.432

      • Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna-yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e.g. at Iti 93 Ja v.186 Pv iv.111 ‣See also apāya
      • Other passages in general: SN i.216 sq (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203 AN ii.91 AN iv.198f. 206 Snp 681 Nd1 89 92, 448 Dhp-a i.264 (˚kaññā) Sdhp 366 Sdhp 436
      1. ˚inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (SN i.222 SN iv.201f.) and Rāhu (AN ii.17 AN ii.53 AN iii.243) Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at AN iv.197
      • ˚kāya the body or assembly of the asuras AN i.143 Ja v.186 Thag-a 285
      • ˚parivāra a retinue of Asuras AN ii.91
      • ˚rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Snp 310 (defined by Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 323 as pabbata-pāda-nivāsino dānava-yakkha-saññitā)
      Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; connected with Avestan ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Avestan anhuš & Latin erus master
    Asuropa
    1. P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions anger, malice, hatred abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vb 357 Dhs 418 1060, 1115, 1341 (an˚) Dhs-a 396
    probably a haplological contraction of asura-ropa. On various suggestions as to etymology & meaning ‣See Morris’s discussion at; J
    Asussūsaṁ
    1. not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient Ja v.121
    ppr. of a + susūsati, Desidentical of śru, cp. Sanskrit śuśrūṣati
    Asūyaka
    1. ‣See anasūyaka
    Asūra
    adjective
    1. -1. not brave, not valiant, cowardly Snp 439
    • uncouth, stupid Ja vi.292 (cp. Kern Toevoegselen p. 48)
    • a + sura1
    Asekha
    1. (& Asekkha) adjective-noun

      1. not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, masculine one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp B. Sanskrit aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261 Divy 337; Avs i.269 335; ii.144) Vin i.62f.; iii.24 SN i.99 DN iii.218 DN iii.219 Iti 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; variant reading asekkha) Pug 14 (= arahant) Dhs 584 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq
      1. ˚muni the perfectly Wise Dhp-a iii.321
      • ˚bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps ii.173, cp. 176
      a + sekha
    Asecanaka
    adjective
    1. unmixed, unadulterated, i.e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely MN i.114 SN i.213 (a. ojava “that elixir that no infusion needs Mrs Rhys Davids) = Thag 2, 55 (explained as anāsittakaṁ pakatiyā ’va mahārasaṁ at Thag-a 61) = Thag 2, 196 (= anāsittakaṁ ojavantaṁ sabhāva-madhuraṁ Thag-a 168) SN v.321 AN iii.237f. Mil 405
    a + secana + ka, from sic to sprinkle, cp. B. Sanskrit asecanaka-darśana in same meaning e.g. Divy 23 Divy 226, 334
    Asevanā
    feminine
    1. not practising, abstinence from Snp 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā Kp-a 124)
    a + sevanā
    Asesa
    adjective
    1. not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Snp 2f. 351, 355, 500 1037 (= sabba Nd2 113). As ˚-(adverb ) entirely, fully completely Snp p. 141 (˚virāga-nirodha) Mil 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement)
    2. a + sesa
    Asesita
    adjective
    1. leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole all Ja iii.153
    past participle of a + causative of śiṣ ‣See seseti & sissati
    Asoka1
    adjective
    1. free from sorrow Snp 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha-soka-salla Kp-a 153) Dhp 412 Thag 2, 512
    a + soka, cp. Sanskrit aśoka
    Asoka2
    1. the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka Ja v.188 Vv 354 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura) Vv-a 173 (˚rukkha)
    Sanskrit aśoka
    Asoṇḍa
    adjective
    1. not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink Ja v.116 feminine asoṇḍī AN iii.38
    2. a + soṇḍa
    Asotatā
    neuter [abstract a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless Ja vi.16
    Asnāti
    1. to eat; imper asnātu Ja v.376
    Sanskrit aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti
    Asman
    neuter
    1. stone, rock; only in instrumental asmanā Snp-a 362
    Vedic aśman; the usual Pali forms are amha and asama2
    Asmasati
    1. to trust, to rely on Ja v.56 (Pot. asmase)
    spurious form for the usual assasati = Sanskrit āśvasati
    Asmi
    1. (I am) ‣See atthi
    Asmimāna
    1. the pride that says “I am”, pride of self, egotism (same in B. Sanskrit e.g. Divy 210 Divy 314 Vin i.3 DN iii.273 MN i.139 MN i.425 AN iii.85 Ps i.26 Kvu 212 Dhp-a i.237 cp. ahaṁ asmi
    asmi + māna
    Asmiye
    1. 1 singular indicative present medium of to eat, in sense of a
    2. future “I shall eat” Ja v.397 Ja v.405 (Commentary bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be explained as
    3. denominative formn. from

      • āśa food, = aṁsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati ‣See also añhati which would correspond either to *aṁśyati or aśnāti ‣See asati
    Assa1
    1. shoulder; in compound assapuṭa shoulder-bag, knapsack i.e. a bag containing provisions instrumental assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and variant readings as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris JP T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Buddhaghosa when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena sīse chārikaṁ okiritvā ti attho DN-a i.267 After all it is the same as puṭaṁsa ‣See under aṁsa1
    • DN i.98 cp. AN ii.242 (variant reading bhasma˚) DN-a i.267 (variant reading bhassa˚)
    for aṁsa1, q.v. for etymology
    Assa2
    1. corner, point; occurs only in compound caturassa four-cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316 Ja iv.46 Ja iv.492 Pv ii.119 Perhaps also at Thag 2, 229 ‣See under assa3. Occurs also in form caturaṁsa under catur)
    for aṁsa2 = Sanskrit aśra point, corner, cp. Sanskrit aśri, Latin acer
    Assa3
    1. a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combined with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa-satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka) AN ii.207 v.271 Snp 769 (gavâssa). At Thag ii.229 the Commentary explains caturassa as ʻ four in hand ʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa ‣See assa2 was probably what the poet meant Dhp 94 Dhp 143 Dhp 144 (bhadra, a good horse, 380 (identical) Vv 203 (+ assatarī) Vv-a 78 Dhp-a i.392 (hatthi-assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚)

    -ājāniya cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aśvājāneya Divy 509 Divy 511

    1. a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse AN i.77 AN i.244 AN ii.113f. 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323 Pv-a 216 ‣See also ājāniya
    • āroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, name of an occupation “cavalry” DN i.51 (+ hatthâroha; explained at DN-a i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja-assabhaṇḍādayo)
    • ˚kaṇṇa name of a tree, Vatica Robusta, literally “horse-ear” (cp. similarly Gothic aíhva-tundi the thornbush, literally horse-tooth) Ja ii.161 Ja iv.209 Ja vi.528
    • ˚khaluṅka an inferior horse (“shaker”), opposite sadassa. AN i.287 = iv.397
    • ˚tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192 DN i.7
    • ˚damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion AN ii.112 ˚sārathi a horse trainer AN ii.112 AN ii.114 AN v.323f. Dhp-a iv.4
    • ˚potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt Ja ii.288
    • ˚bandha a groom Ja ii.98 Ja v.449 Dhp-a i.392
    • ˚bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse-trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 ‣See on form of word Kern, Toevoegselen p. 35 -bhaṇḍaka horse-trappings Ja ii.113
    • ˚maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. MN i.446
    • ˚maṇḍalika exercising-ground Vin iii.6
    • ˚medha name of a sacrifice: the horse-sacrifice Vedic aśvamedha as proper name
    1. SN i.76 (variant reading sassa˚) Iti 21 (+ purisamedha) Snp 303
    • ˚yuddha a horse-fight DN i.7
    • ˚rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse Dhp-a ii.69 (+ hatthi-rūpaka)
    • ˚lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging the marks on a horse DN i.9
    • ˚laṇḍa horse-manure, horsedung Dhp-a iv.156 (hatthi-laṇḍa +)
    • ˚vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6
    • ˚sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind AN i.289 = iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚)
    Vedic aśva, cp. Avestan aspō; Latin equus; Old Irish ech; Gallic epo-; Welsh. ep, Gothic aíhva; Os ehu; Anglo-Saxon eoh
    Assa4
    1. is genitive dative singular of ayaṁ, this
    Assa5
    1. 3. singular Pot. of asmi ‣See atthi
    Assaka1
    (—˚)
    1. with a horse, having a horse; an’without a horse Ja vi.515 (+ arathaka)
    assa3 + ka
    Assaka2
    adjective
    1. not having one’s own, poor, destitute MN i.450 MN ii.68 AN iii.352 Ps i.126 (variant reading asaka)
    a + saka; Sanskrit asvaka
    Assatara
    1. a mule Dhp 322 Dhp-a i.213 Dhp-a iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta) Ja iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342. feminine assatarī a she-mule Vin ii.188 SN i.154 SN ii.241 AN ii.73 Mil 166

      • assatarī-ratha a chariot drawn by she-mules Vv 203 208 (Text assatarī ratā = 438 Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha Pv-a 56) Ja vi.355
      Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in function of “a kind of”, thus literally a kind of horse, cp. Latin matertera a kind of mother. i.e. aunt
    Assattha1
    1. the holy fig-tree, Ficus, Religiosa the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment i.e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35 DN ii.4 (sammā-sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho) SN v.96 Ja i.16 (v.75 in word-play with assattha2 of v.79)
    Vedic aśvattha, explained in K Z i.467 as aśva-ttha dialectical for aśva-stha “standing place for horses, which etymology is problematic; it is likely that the Sanskrit word is borrowed from a local dialect.
    Assattha2
    1. encouraged, comforted AN iv.184 (variant reading as gloss assāsaka) Ps i.131 (loka an˚; variant reading assaka) Ja i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1) vi.309 (= laddhassasa Commentary ), 566
    past participle of assasati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsvasta Avs i.210
    Assaddha
    adjective
    1. without faith, unbelieving, Snp 663 Pug 13 20 Dhs 1327 Dhp-a ii.187
    a + saddhā
    Assaddhiya
    neuter
    1. disbelief SN i.25 AN iii.421 v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161 Vb 371 DN-a i.235 Sdhp 80
    a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a gerundive of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya cp. Sanskrit aśradheyya incredible
    Assama
    1. a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic especially a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.26, 246; iii.147 Snp 979 Snp p. 104, 111 Ja i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (identical) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books where “the 4 āśramas” is used as a technical term for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth) ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.211–⁠217
    ā + śram
    Assamaṇa
    1. not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96 Snp 282 Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug AN 207
    • f assamaṇī Vìn iv.214
    a + samaṇa
    Assaya
    1. resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DN-a i.67 (puññ˚). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning “body” ‣See Avs i.175 & Index; ii.223
    ā + sayati, śri
    Assava
    adjective
    1. loyal DN i.137 Snp 22 Snp 23 Snp 32 Ja iv.98 Ja vi.49 Mil 254
    • an˚ inattentive, not docile Dhp-a i.7
    ā + sunāti, śru
    Assavati
    1. to flow Ja ii.276 (= paggharati Commentary ). cp. also āsavati
    ā + sru
    Assavanatā
    feminine
    1. not listening to, inattention MN i.168
    abstract from assavana
    Assavanīya
    adjective
    1. not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82
    a + savanīya
    Assasati
    1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale Ja i.163 Ja vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaṁ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combination with passasati to inhale, i.e. to breathe in & out, DN ii.291 = MN i.56 cp. MN i.425 Ja ii.53 cp. v.36
    2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage SN iv.43 Ja iv.93 assasitvāna
    3. absolutive = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa
    4. imperative, with mā soci);
    5. medium assase Ja iv.57 (C for asmase Text; explained by vissase), 111 (˚itvā)
    6. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession Ja iv.495 (= assāsa-vātena upahanati āvisati Commentary )

      • Caus assāseti.
      • past participle assattha2 ‣See also assāsa-passāsa
      ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa ‣See under ā; 1 3
    Assāda
    1. taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction DN i.22 (vedanānaṁ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.) MN i.85 SN ii.84f. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq (ko rū passive assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq. AN i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi Ja i.508 Ja iv.113 Snp 448 Ps i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157 cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚) Vb 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq. Mil 388 Vism 76 (paviveka-ras’); Sdhp 37 Sdhp 51 ‣See also appassāda under appa
    2. ā + sādiyati, svad
    Assādanā
    feminine
    1. sweetness, taste, enjoyment SN i.124 Snp 447 (= sādubhāva Snp-a 393)
    cp. assāda
    Assādeti
    1. to taste SN ii.227 (lābha-sakkārasilokaṁ); Vism 73 (paviveka-sukha-rasaṁ) Dhp-a i.318
    denominative from assāda
    Assāraddha
    variant reading at Iti 111 for asāraddha.
    Assāvin
    adjective
    1. only in an˚; not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. sāta-vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā-santhava-virahita Snp-a 549) ‣See also āsava
    ā + sru
    Assāsa
    1. (literally) breathing, especially breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opposite to passāsa inhalation, with which often combined or contrasted; thus as compound assāsa-passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath DN ii.157 = SN i.159 Thag 1, 905 DN iii.266 MN i.243 SN i.106 SN iv.293 SN v.330 SN v.336 AN iv.409 AN v.135 Ja ii.146 Ja vi.82 Mil 31 Mil 85 Vism 116, 197
    2. assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq
    3. (figuratively) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence MN i.64 SN ii.50 (dhamma-vinaye); iv.254 (param-assāsa-ppatta) AN i.192 AN iii.297f. (dhamma-vinaye); iv.185 Ja vi.309 ‣See assattha2 Mil 354 Pv-a 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313
    Sanskrit āśvāsa, ā + śvas
    Assāsaka
    adjective noun
    1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚; not able to draw breath Vin iii.84 Vin iv.111
    2. (cp. assāsa2)
    3. masculine> &
    4. neuter that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy Ja i.84 Ja vi.150 cp. next
    from assāsa
    Assāsika
    adjective
    1. only in negative an˚; not able to afford comfort giving no comfort or security MN i.514 MN iii.30 Ja ii.298 (= aññaṁ assāsetuṁ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Avs 139, 144; whereas the corresponding Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma-dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of Pali asassata
    from assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2
    Assāsin
    adjective
    1. reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy SN iv.43 (an˚)
    Sanskrit āśvāsin
    Assāseti
    1. to console, soothe, calm, comfort, satisfy Ja vi.190 Ja vi.512 Dhp-a i.13
    causative of assasati
    Assita
    adjective
    1. dependent on, relying, supported by (accusative ); abiding, living in or on DN ii.255 (tad˚) Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaṁ a.) Thag 1, 149 (janaṁ ev’assito jano); Sdhp 401
    2. Sanskrit aśrita, ā + past participle of śri
    Assirī
    adjective
    1. without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassar’iva, cp. Commentary on passage loc. cit.)
    a + sirī
    Assu1
    neuter
    1. DN i.115 DN i.141 Dhp 67 Pug 56 DN-a i.284 Pv-a 39
    • ˚mocana shedding of tears Pv-a 18
    Vedic aśru, Avestan asrū, Lith aszarà, with etymology not definitely clear ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under lacrima a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears) SN ii.282 (identical) Dhp 74 Thag 2, 496 (cp. Thag-a 289); Kp-a 65 Dhp-a i.12 (˚puṇṇa-netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98 Pv-a 125 ˚dhārā a shower of tears Dhp-a iv.15 (pavatteti to shed) -mukha
  • adjective with tearful face [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aśrumukha e. g Jtm 3116
  • Assu2
    1. is 3rd plural pot. of atthi.

    Assu3
    indeclinable
    1. expletive participle also used in emphatic sense of “surely, yes, indeed” Snp 231 (according to Fausböll but preferably with P. Text S. edition as tayas su for tay’assu, cp. Kp-a 188) Vv 324 (assa variant reading SS) = Vv-a 135 (assū ti nipāta-mattaṁ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the following assu4 as a modification of ssu ‣See su2. cp. āsu
    Sanskrit sma
    Assu4
    1. participle for Sanskrit svid (and sma?) ‣See under su2. According to this view Fausbölls reading ken’assu at Snp 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu
    Assuka
    neuter
    1. a tear Vin ii.289 Snp 691 Pv iv.53
    assu1 + ka
    Assutavant
    adjective
    1. one who has not heard, ignorant MN i.1 MN i.8 MN i.135 Dhs 1003 1217, cp. Dhs translation 258
    a + sutavant
    Aha1
    indeclinable
    1. exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc “ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in compound ˚kāmā miserable pleasures literally “woe to these pleasures!”) gloss at Thag-a 292 for Text kāmakāmā of Thag 2, 506 (explained by Commentary as “ahā ti lāmaka-pariyāyo”) ‣See also ahaha
    cp. Sanskrit aha & Pali aho; Germ. aha; Latin ehem etc.
    Aha2
    1. (—˚) & Aho (˚-) neuter

      1. a day. (1); ˚aha only in following compounds. & cases:; instrumental ekâhena in one day Ja vi.366 locative tadahe on that (same) day Pv-a 46
      2. accusative katipâhaṁ (for) some or several days Ja i.152 etc (kattpâha); sattāhaṁ seven days, a week Vin i.1 DN ii.14 Ja iv.2 and frequently; anvahaṁ daily Dāvs iv.8

        • The initial a of ahaṁ (
        • accusative ) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ’haṁ how many days? SN i.7 ekâha-dvī ’haṁ one or two days Ja i.292 dvīha-tī ’han two or three days Ja ii.103 Vv-a 45 ekâha-dvī ’h’accayena after the lapse of one or two days Ja i.253
        • A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha; (q.v.); an adjective derived from aha is ˚ahika ‣See pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days).
        • aho˚; in compound ahoratta
        • masculine> &
        • neuter cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ahorātraṁ Avs; i.209
        1. & ahoratti feminine day & night occurring mostly in oblique cases and
        2. adverb ially in;
        3. accusative ahorattaṁ : MN i.417 (˚ânusikkhin) Dhp 226 (identical; explained by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324) Thag 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti) Ja iv.108 (˚ānaṁ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ṁ) Mil 82 (ena)

          • ahorattiṁ Dhp 387 Ja vi.313 (Burmese variant for Text aho va rattiṁ)
          Vedic ahan & ahas
    Ahaṁ
    (prom.)
    1. pronoun of 1st person “I". nominative singular ahaṁ SN iii.235 AN iv.53 Dhp 222 Dhp 320 Snp 172 Snp 192 Snp 685 Snp 989 Snp 1054 Snp 1143 Ja i.61 Ja ii.159
    • In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only i.e. egotistically) in following phrases: yaṁ vadanti mama. na te ahaṁ SN i.116 SN i.123 ahaṁ asmi “I am” (cp. ahaṁkāra below) SN i.129 SN iii.46 SN iii.128f.; iv.203 AN ii.212 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaṁ pure ti “I am the first” Vv 8450 (= ahamahaṁkārā ti Vv-a 351)
    • genitive dative mayhaṁ Snp 431 Snp 479 Ja i.279 Ja ii.160 mama SN i.115 Snp 22 Snp 23 Snp 341 Snp 997Ja ii.159 & mamaṁ SN i.116 Snp 253 (= mama Commentary ), 694, 982
    • instrumental mayā Snp 135 Snp 336 Snp 557 Snp 982 Ja i.222 Ja i.279
    • accusative maṁ Snp 356 Snp 366 Snp 425 Snp 936 Ja ii.159 Ja iii.26 & mamaṁ Ja iii.55 Ja iii.394
    • locative mayi Snp 559
    • J iii.188. The enclitic form in the singular is me, & functions in different cases, as genitive (Sn 983 Ja ii.159), accusative (Sn 982), instrumental (J i.138, 222), & ablative
    • plural nominative; mayaṁ (we) Snp 31 Snp 91 Snp 167 Snp 999 Ja ii.159 Ja vi.365 amhe Ja ii.129 & vayaṁ (q.v.)
    • genitive amhākaṁ Ja i.221 Ja ii.159 & asmākaṁ Snp p. 106
    • accusative amhe Ja i.222 Ja ii.415
    • asme Ja iii.359
    • instrumental amhehi Ja i.150 Ja ii.417 & asmābhi Thag-a 153 (Ap. 132)
    • locative amhesu Ja i.222 The enclitic form for the
    • plural is no (for
    • accusative dat & genitive) ‣See under; vayaṁ
    1. ˚kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (‣ See also mamaṁkāra) MN iii.18 MN iii.32 SN ii.253 SN iii.80 SN iii.136 SN iii.169f.; iv.41 197, 202 AN i.132f.; iii.444 Ud 70 Nett 127, and frequently passim
    Vedic ahaṁ = Avestan azəm; Latin ego; Gothic ik, Anglo-Saxon ic, Old High German ih etc.
    Ahaha
    1. exclamation of woe Ja iii.450 (ahahā in metre)
    2. (neuter name of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), literally oh woe!. AN v.173 = Snp p. 126
    onomat. after exclamation ahahā ‣See aha1
    Ahāsa
    1. absence of exultancy, modesty Ja iii.466 (= an-ubbillāvitattaṁ Commentary )
    a + hāsa, cp. Sanskrit ahāsa & aharṣa
    Ahāsi
    3rd singular aorist of harati (q.v.)
    Ahi
    a snake Vin ii.109 DN i.77 SN iv.198 AN iii.306f.; iv.320; v.289 Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.) Vv-a 100 Pv-a 144
    1. ˚kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = MN i.73 AN iv.377
    • ˚gāha a snake catcher or trainer Ja vi.192
    • ˚guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as variant readings ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non-Aryan, word ‣See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 153 a snake charmer Ja i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚) iv.456 (Text ˚guṇṭ; Burmese variant ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (Text ˚kuṇḍ˚, variant reading SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (Text ˚guṇṭ˚; Burmese variant ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (Text ˚guṇḍ˚; Burmese variant ˚kuṇḍ˚) Mil 23 Mil 305
    • ˚chattaka
    • neuter “a snake’s parasol”, a mushroom DN iii.87 Ja ii.95 Ud 81 (Commentary on viii.5, 1)
    • ˚tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304 500
    • ˚peta a Peta in form of a snake Dhp-a ii.63
    • ˚mekhalā “snake-girdle”, i.e. outfit or appearance of a snake Dhp-a i.139
    • ˚vātaka (-roga) name of a certain disease (“snakewind-sickness”) Vin i.78 Ja ii.79 Ja iv.200 Dhp-a i.169 187, 231; iii.437
    • ˚vijjā “snake-craft”, i.e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes DN i.9 (= sappa-daṭṭhatikicchana-vijjā c’eva sapp’avhāyana-vijjā ea “the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)” DN-a i.93)
    Vedic ahi, with Avestan aži perhaps to Latin anguis etc ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Ahiṁsaka
    adjective
    1. not injuring others, harmless, humane, SN i.165 Thag 1, 879 Dhp 225 Ja iv.447
    from ahiṁsā
    Ahiṁsā
    feminine
    1. not hurting, humanity, kindness DN iii.147 AN i.151 Dhp 261 Dhp 270 Ja iv.71 Mil 402
    a + hiṁsā
    Ahita
    adjective-noun
    1. not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness DN iii.246 Dhp 163 Snp 665 Snp 692 Mil 199 (˚kāma). Ahirika & Ahirika;
    a + hita
    Ahirika
    Ahirīka;
    adjective
    1. shameless, unscrupulous DN iii.212 DN iii.252 DN iii.282 AN ii.219 Dhp 244 Snp 133 (˚īka) Iti 27 (˚īka) Pug 19 (also neuter unscrupulousness) Dhs 365 Nett 39, 126 Dhp-a iii.352
    2. from a + hirī
    Ahīnindriya
    1. ‣See discussed under abhinindriya
    Ahuvāsiṁ
    1. 1st singular preterite of hotī (q.v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiṁ Vv-a 321)
    Ahuhāliya
    neuter
    1. a hoarse & loud laugh Ja iii.223 (= danta-vidaṁsaka-mahā-hasita Commentary )
    onomat.
    Ahe
    indeclinable
    1. exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in compound ahevana a dense forest (literally oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i.e. how big it is) Ja v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. Commentary on p. 64 explains as “ahevanaṁ vuccati vanasaṇḍo”)
    = aho, cp. aha1
    Aho
    indeclinable
    1. exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed well; I say! for sure! Vv-a 103 (aho ti acchariy’atthena nipāto) Ja i.88 (aho acchariyaṁ aho abbhutaṁ), 140. Usually combined with similar emphatic particles, e.g. aho vata Dhp-a ii.85 Pv-a 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re DN i.107 Pv ii.94 5. cp. ahe
    Sanskrit aho, for etymology ‣See aha1
    Ahosi-kamma
    neuter an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Compendium 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one ‣See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix.
    1. ā

    Ā

    Ā1

    indeclinable

    1. a frequent prefix, used as well-defined simple base-prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i.e. first part of a double prefix compound like sam-ā-dhi) except in one case ā-ni-saṁsa (which is doubtful & of different origin, viz. from combination āsaṁsa-nisaṁsa ‣See below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇ’atthe nipāto Pv-a 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb
    • (1.) As preposition c. abl only in Ja in meaning “up to, until, about, near” Ja vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. Commentary ), probably a late development As prefix in meaning “forth, out, to, towards, at, on” in following applications:-(a) aim in general or touch in particular (literally), e.g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad-duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at-tempt; ˚rohana a-scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad-vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by ˚hanati strike at
    • (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e.g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaṁsa subjective gain ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself)
    • (c) in
    1. transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e.g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad-dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in
    • (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive-frequentative prefix in sense of “all-round, completely, very much” e.g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about
    • Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the following preposition (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saṁsati), pa (˚tapati) paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a-c; and vi (˚kirati ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d ‣See also 3b.

  • Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base anu + ā (anvā-gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā-janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā-ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā-disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati)

    • (b) Contrast-combns. with other prefix in a double compound of noun, adj or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of “up & down, in & out to & fro”; ā + ni: āvedhika-nibbedhika, āsaṁsa-nisaṁsa (contracted to ānisaṁsa), āsevita-nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning viz. assasati is taken as “breathing out”, passasati as “breathing in” ‣See Vism 271), assāsa-passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna-pāhuna, āhuneyya-pāhuneyya; ā + paccā ākoṭita-paccākoṭita; ā + pari : ākaḍḍhana-parikaḍḍhana āsankita-parisankita; ā + vi : ālokita-vilokita, āvāha-vivāha āveṭhana-viniveṭhana; a + sam : allāpa-sallāpa: ā + samā āciṇṇa-samāciṇṇa
    • Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e.g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda
    • Vedic ā, preposition with accusative, locative, ablative, meaning “to, towards”, & also “from". originally an emphatic-deictic participle (Indogermanic *ē); Old High German

      • ā etc., increment of a (Indogermanic *e), as in Sanskrit a-sau
  • Ā˚2
    1. guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suffixes as-ya,-iya,-itta. So in āyasakya from ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya from aroga; ālasiya from alasa; ādhipacca from adhipati; ābhidosika from abhidosa etc
    Ā˚3
    1. of various other origins (guṇa e.g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (from usabha)
    Ā˚4
    1. infix in repetition-compounds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa-or increment-form of negative prefix a ‣See a2, as in following: phalāphala all sorts of fruit (literally what is fruit not fruit) frequently in Jātakas, e.g.; i.416; ii.160; iii.127 iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇākāraṇāni all sorts of duties Ja vi.333 Dhp-a i.385
    • khaṇḍākhaṇḍa pêle-mêle Ja i.114 Ja iii.256
    • gaṇḍāgaṇḍa a mass of boils Dhp-a iii.297
    • cirāciraṁ continually Vin iv.261
    • bhavābhava all kinds of existences Snp 801 cp. Nd1 109 Nd2 664 Thag 1, 784 (˚esu = mahant-âmahantesu bh. Commentary ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate Thag-a 285 etc.

    Ākaṅkhati
    1. to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna) DN i.78 DN i.176 SN i.46 Snp 569 (˚amāna); Snp p. 102 (= icchati Snp-a 436) Dhp-a i.29 Snp-a 229 Vv-a 149 Pv-a 229
    ā + kāṅkṣ, cp. kaṅkhati
    Ākaṅkhā
    feminine
    1. longing, wish; as adjective at Thag 1, 1030
    from ā + kāṅkṣ
    Ākaḍḍhati
    1. to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Buddhaghosa for apakassati ‣See under apakāsati); iv.219 Ja i.172 Ja i.192 Ja i.417 Mil 102 Mil 135 Thag-a 117 (˚eti) Vv-a 226 Pv-a 68 passive ākaḍḍhiyati Ja ii.122 (˚amāna-locana with eyes drawn away or attracted) Mil 102 Vism 163 Vv-a 207 (˚amāna-hadaya with torn heart).
    2. past participle ākaḍḍhita
    3. ā + kaḍḍhati
    Ākaḍḍhana
    neuter
    1. drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction Vv-a 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about) Dhs-a 363 Mil 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352
    • As f Vin iii.121
    from ākaḍḍhati
    Ākaḍḍhita
    1. pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown Ja iii.256 (= akkhitta2)
    past participle of akaḍḍheti
    Ākantana
    1. (?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Thag 1, 1123 for which we might read durākantana
    Ākappa
    1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213 Ja i.505
    2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi-ākāro Dhs-a 321)
      1. ˚sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, AN iii.78 Ja iv.542
      • an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, Ja i.420
      cp. Sanskrit ākalpa ā + kappa
    Ākampita
    1. shaking, trembling Mil 154 (˚hadaya)
    past participle of ākampeti, causative of ā + kamp
    Ākara
    1. a mine, usually in compound ratan-ākara a mine of jewels Thag 1, 1049 Ja ii.414 Ja vi.459 Dīpavaṁsa i.18
    • cp. also Mil 356 Vv-a 13
    cp. Sanskrit ākara
    Ākassati
    1. to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428
    ā + kassati
    Ākāra

    “the (way of) making”, i.e. (1) state, condition Ja i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium) cp. paṇṇ˚.

  • property, quality, attribute DN i.76 (anāvila sabb˚-sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta) Ja ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities).
  • sign, appearance form, DN i.175 Ja i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger) Mil 24 (˚ena by the sign of..) Vv-a 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.) Pv-a 90 Pv-a 283 (rañño ā. the king’s person) Sdhp 363.
  • way, mode, manner, sa-ākāra in all their modes DN i.13 = 82 = iii.111 Ja i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). especially in instrumental singular &

    • plural with;
    • number or
    • pronoun (in this way, in two ways etc.): chah’ākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense) Nett 73, 74 (dvādasah’ākārehi); Vism 613 (navah’ākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti) Pv-a 64 (yen’ākārena āgato ten’ākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (identical). (5) reason, ground, account DN i.138 DN i.139 Nett 4, 8 sq. 38 Dhp-a i.14 Kp-a 100 (in explanation of evaṁ). In this meaning frequently with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc. in Commentary style “what is meant by”, the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea Pv-a 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚-dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ṁ dassesi) 121 (pucchan˚-nidassanaṁ what has been asked) Snp-a 135 (˚nidassana).

      1. ˚parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration examination of reasons SN ii.115 SN iv.138 AN ii.191 Nd2 151
      a + karoti, kṛ
  • Ākāraka
    neuter
    1. appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) Ja i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena Commentary )
    ākāra + ka
    Ākāravant
    adjective
    1. having a reason, reasonable, founded MN i.401 (saddhā)
    from ākāra
    Ākāsa1
    1. air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept ‣See Compendium 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etymology of ākāsa (from ā + kassati of kṛṣ at Dhs-a 325 ‣See Dhs translation 178. DN i.55 (˚ṁ indriyāni sankamanti the sense-faculties passive into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265 SN iii.207 SN iv.218 SN v.49, 264 Ja i.253 Ja ii.353 Ja iii.52 Ja iii.188 Ja iv.154 vi.126 Snp 944 Snp 1065 Nd1 428; Pv ii.118 Snp-a 110 152 Pv-a 93 Sdhp 42 Sdhp 464
    2. ˚ākāsena gacchati to go through the air Pv-a 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati identical Ja ii.103 ˚e gacchati identical Pv-a 65 (cando)

      • Formula "ananto ākāso” frequently; e.g. at DN i.183 AN ii.184 AN iv.40 AN iv.410f.; v.345
      1. ˚anta “the end of the sky”, the sky, the air (on ˚anta ‣See anta1 4) Ja vi.89
      • ˚ānañca (or ānañca the infinity ef space, in compound ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the “space-infinity-plane”, the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇ’ānañc-āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚ (4) n’eva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala

        • DN i.34 183; ii.70, 112, 156; iii.224, 262 sq. MN i.41 MN i.159 iii.27, 44 SN v.119 Ps i.36 Dhs 205 501, 579, 1418 Nett 26, 39; Vism 326, 340, 453 DN-a i.120 ‣See Nd2 under ākāsa Dhs 265f.; Dhs translation 71. As classed with jhāna ‣See also Nd2 672 (sādhu-vihārin)
        • ˚kasiṇa one of the kasiṇ’āyatanas ‣See under kasiṇa DN iii.268 AN i.41
        • ˚gaṅgā name of the celestial river Ja i.95 Ja iii.344
        • ˚gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Mil 201
        • ˚cārika walking through the air Ja ii.103
        • ˚cārin = ˚cārika Vv-a 6
        • ˚ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu i.29 Mil 181 Mil 285 Kp-a 120 Snp-a 476
        • ˚tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace Snp-a 87
        • ˚dhātu the element of space DN iii.247 MN i.423 MN iii.31 AN i.176 AN iii.34 Dhs 638
        Sanskrit ākāśa from ā + kāś, literally shining forth, i.e. the illuminated space
    Ākāsa2
    1. neuter? a game, playing chess ʻ in the air ʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = DN i.6 (= aṭṭhapada-dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaṁ DN-a i.85)
    Ākāsaka
    adjective
    1. being in or belonging to the air or sky Ja vi.124
    ākāsa + ka
    Ākāsati
    1. to shine Ja vi.89
    from ākāsa1
    Ākiñcañña
    neuter
    1. state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical technical term; cp. below ˚āyatana & ‣See; i → Dhs translation 74)
    • Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd2 116) Thag 2, 341 (= akiñcanabhāva Thag-a 240 translation “cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer”) Nd2 115 ‣See ākāsa Mil 342
    1. ˚āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚ DN i.35 DN i.184 DN ii.156 DN iii.224 DN iii.253 DN iii.262f. MN i.41 MN i.165 ii.254, 263; iii.28, 44, SN iv.217 AN i.268 AN iv.40 AN iv.401 Ps i.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333 ‣See also jhāna & vimokkha
    abstract from akiñcana
    Ākiṇṇa
    1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚-) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair) SN i.204 (˚kammanta “in motley tasks engaged”) iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.) AN iii.104 (˚vihāro) iv.4; v.15 (an˚ Commentary for appakiṇṇa) Snp 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula- varalakkh˚ Snp-a 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā-dijagaṇ = āyutta Pv-a 157) Pug 31 Pv-a 32 (= parikiṇṇa) Sdhp 595
    2. frequently in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city “iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa-manussa” e.g. DN i.211 DN ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas i.e. under their protection) AN iii.215 cp. Mil 2 (˚jana-manussa)
    3. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa from avakirati.2) dejected base, vile, ruthless SN i.205 = Ja iii.309 = 539 = Snp-a 383 At Kindred Sayings 261, Mrs. Rhys Davids translates “ruthless” & quotes Commentary as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Buddhaghosa explains the same verse differently at Snp-a 383 viz. by; vipula˚; , as above under Snp 408 & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i.e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1
    past participle of ākirati
    Ākirati
    1. to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Snp 665 Dhp 313 Pv ii.49 (dānaṁ vipulaṁ ākiri vippakirati Pv-a 92) Mil 175 Mil 238 Mil 323 (imperative ākirāhi) Snp 383
    2. past participle ākiṇṇa
    3. ā + kirati
    Ākiritatta
    neuter
    1. the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Mil 173 (sakataṁ dhaññassa ā)
    ākirita + tta; abstract from ākirita, past participle of ākirati causative
    Ākilāyati
    variant reading at Kp-a 66 for āgilāyati.
    Ākucca
    (or ˚ā ?)
    1. an iguana Ja vi.538 (Commentary godhā; gloss amatt’ākuccā)
    etymology unknown, probably non-Aryan
    Ākurati
    1. to be hoarse Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati)
    onomat. to sound-root *kur = *kor as in Latin cornix, corvus etc ‣See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etymology by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as denominative of ākula) & Morris (; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886 154 as contr.
  • denominative of ankura “intumescence”, thus meaning “to swell”) are hardly correct
  • Ākula

    adjective

    1. entangled, confused upset, twisted, bewildered Ja i.123 (salākaggaṁ ˚ṁ karoti to upset or disturb) Vv 849 (andha˚) Pv-a 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Mil 117 Mil 220 Pv-a 56
    • ākula-pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula-pakkula); ākula-samākula Ja vi.270 On phrase tantākula- jātā gulā-guṇṭhika-jātā ‣See guḷā
    ā + *kul of which Sanskrit P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; literally meaning “revolving quickly”, & so “confused”
    Ākulaka
    adjective
    1. entangled DN ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā)
    from ākula
    Ākulanīya
    adjective
    1. in an˚; not to be confounded or upset Pv-a 118
    gerundive of ā + *kulāyati, denominative of kula
    Ākulī
    1. (-puppha) at Kp-a 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta-bakula-puppha. Vism 260 (identical passage however reads ākulī-puppha “tangle-flower” (?), cp. Ud 5 gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula
    Ākoṭana1
    neuter
    1. beating on, knocking MN i.385 Mil 63 Mil 306 Dhs-a 144
    from ākoṭeti
    Ākoṭana2
    adjective
    1. beating, driving, inciting, urging Ja vi.253 (feminine ākoṭanī of paññā, explained by “nivāraṇapatoda-laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti” p. 254)
    2. = ākoṭana1
    Ākoṭita
    1. -1. beaten, touched, knocked against Ja i.303 Mil 62 (of a gong)
    • pressed beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita-paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) SN ii.281 Dhp-a i.37
    • past participle of ākoṭeti
    Ākoṭeti
    1. -1. to beat down, pound, stamp Ja i.264 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217 Ja ii.274 Pv-a 55 (aññamaññaṁ); Sdhp 159
    • especially with reference to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaṁ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt DN i.89 AN iv.359 AN v.65 DN-a i.252 (cp. aggaḷa) dvāraṁ ā. Ja v.217 Dhp-a ii.145 or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā Vv-a 316)

  • (intransitive to knock against anything Ja i.239

    • past participle ākoṭita (q.v.)
    • causative ii.ākoṭapeti Ja iii.361
    a + koṭṭeti, Sanskrit kuṭṭayati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ākoṭayati e.g. Divy 117 dvāraṁ trir ā˚, Cowell “break” (?); Avs Index p 222 s.v.
  • Ākhu
    1. a mouse or rat Pgdp 10
    Vedic ākhu, from ā + khan, literally the digger in, i.e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha
    Āgacchati
    to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.
    1. I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1 √gacch : pres. āgacchati DN i.161 Ja ii.153 Pv iv.151 future āgacchissati Ja iii.53
    2. aorist āgacchi Pv ii.133 Pv-a 64
    3. gam :
    4. aorist āgamāsi Pv-a 81 āgamā DN i.108 Ja iii.128 and
    5. plural āgamiṁsu Ja i.118
    6. future āgamissati Vv-a 3 Pv-a 122
    7. absolutive āgamma (q.v.) & āgantvā Ja i.151 Mil 14
    8. causative āgameti (q.v.)
    9. :
    10. aorist āgā Snp 841 Pv i.123 (= āgacchi Pv-a 64).
    11. past participle āgata (q.v.)

      II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive DN i.108 Pv i.113 ii.133 Mil 14 to return, to come back (cp āgata) Pv-a 81 Pv-a 122.

    12. to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) DN i.161 (gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ deserve blame come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to upakappati Pv-a 241).
    13. to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) Ja i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiṁsu) Snp-a 321 Vv-a 3 ‣See also āgamma.

      ā + gacchati, gam
    Āgata
    1. come, arrived Mil 18 (˚kāraṇa the reason of his coming) Vv-a 78 (˚ṭṭhāna) Pv-a 81 (kiṁ āgat’attha why have you come here) come by got attained (˚-) AN ii.110 = Pug 48 (˚visa); Mhvs xiv.28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -āgat’āgatā (
    2. plural ) people coming & going, passers by, all comers Pv-a 39 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 129 Vv-a 190 (epithet of sangha)
    3. ˚sv’āgata “wel-come”, greeted hailed;
    4. neuter welcome, hail Thag 2, 337 Pv iv.315, opp durāgata not liked, unwelcome, AN ii.117 AN ii.143 AN ii.153 AN iii.163 Thag 2, 337
    5. come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) DN i.88 Dhp-a ii.35 Kp-a 229 Vv-a 30 āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127 337; ii.8; iv.158 AN ii.147 Mil 19 Mil 21
    6. anāgata not come yet i.e.
    7. future ; usually in combination with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present) ‣See; atīta and anāgata
    8. past participle of āgacchati
    Āgati
    feminine
    1. coming, coming back, return SN iii.53 Ja ii.172 Usually opposed to gati going away. Used in special sense of rebirth and re-death in the course of saṁsāra Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti DN i.162 AN iii.54f. 60 sq., 74; cp. also SN ii.67 Pv ii.922 (gatiṁ āgatiṁ vā)
    ā + gati
    Āgada
    masculine & Āgadana
    • neuter

      1. a word; talk, speech DN-a i.66 (= vacana)
      ā + gad to speak
    Āgantar
    1. one who is coming or going to come AN i.63 AN ii.159 Iti 4 95 (nominative āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚ AN i.64 AN ii.160
    2. name ag. from āgacchati
    Āgantu
    adjective
    1. -1. occasional, incidental Ja vi.358
    • an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger Ja vi.529 (= āgantuka-jana Commentary ) Thag-a 16
    • Sanskrit āgantu
    Āgantuka
    adjective-noun
    1. -1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest stranger, especially a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132 167; ii.170; iii.65, 181; iv.24, AN i.10 AN iii.41 AN iii.366 Ja vi.333 Ud 25 Dhp-a ii.54 74 Vv-a 24 Pv-a 54
    • adventitions incidental (= āgantu1) Mil 304 (of megha & roga).; 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195
    1. ˚bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opposite gamika˚); ii.16
    āgantu + ka; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āgantuka in same meaning as Pali viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Avs i.87 286; Divy 50
    Āgama
    1. -1. coming, approach, result, DN i.53 (āgamanaṁ pavattatī ti DN-a i.160 cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚)
    • that which one goes by, resource, reference source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DN-a i.1 2 (dīgh˚). A definition at Vism 442 runs “antamaso opamma-vagga-mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaṁ" ‣See also āgata 2, for phrase āgat’āgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin
    • locative cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgat’āgamo, Pv-a 230) Mil 215 Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit in same use and meaning, e.g. Divy 17 Divy 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas

  • rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Snp 834 (āgamā parivitakkaṁ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). 4. meaning, understanding, Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇ˚).

    • repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245

  • as grammatical technical term “augment”, a consonant or syllable added or inserted Snp-a 23 (sa-kār’āgama).

    from ā + gam
  • Āgamana
    neuter
    1. oncoming, arrival, approach AN iii.172 DN-a i.160 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 81; Sdhp 224 Sdhp 356. an˚; not coming or returning Ja i.203 Ja i.264
    from āgacchati, Sanskrit same
    Āgameti
    1. to cause somebody or something to come to one, i.e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii.166 182, 212 DN i.112 DN i.113 SN iv.291 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 55. (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna) MN i.161 (identical) Ja i.69 (identical + kālaṁ)
    caus of agacchati
    Āgamma
    adverb
    1. . With reference to (c. accusative ), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca ‣See; i → Kindred Sayings 318 s.v. DN i.229 Iti 71 Ja i.50 vi.424; Kh viii.14 (= nissāya Kp-a 229) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 21 etc
    2. originally
    3. absolutive of āgacchati, q.v. under i.2 for form & under; ii.3 for meaning. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e.g. Divy 95 Divy 405 (with genitive); Avs i.85, 210 etc.; MN Vastu i.243, 313
    Āgāmitā
    1. found only in negative form anāgāmitā
    Āgāmin
    adjective noun
    1. returning, one who returns, especially one who returns to another form of life in saṁsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth AN i.63 AN ii.159 Iti 95 ‣See anāgāmin
    ā + gāmin
    Āgāra
    1. (—˚) ‣See agāra. Agaraka & ika;
    Āgāraka
    ˚ika;
    adjective-noun (—˚)
    1. belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in compounds.; koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209
    • bandhan˚ prison-keeper AN ii.207
    • bhaṇḍ˚ keeper of wares, treasurer Pv-a 2 (‣ See also bhaṇḍ˚).
    • being in the house, sharing (the house), companion SN iii.190 (paṁsv˚ playmate)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āgārika Divy 275 & agārika
    Āgāḷha
    adjective (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sanskrit samāgāḍhaṁ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instrumental as adv āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a i.283, 295 Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug AN 215 has a˚, but explains by atigāḷhena vacanena); instrumental feminine āgāḷhāya Vin v.122 (ceteyya; Buddhaghosa on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and explains by daḷhabhāvāya) ‣See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (identical; variant reading agāḷhā).
    Āgilāyati
    1. to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200 DN iii.209 MN i.354 SN iv.184 Kp-a 66 (hadavaṁ ā.). cp. āyamati
    ā + gilāyati; Sanskrit glāyati, cp. gilāna
    Āgu
    neuter
    1. guilt, offence, SN i.123 AN iii.346 Snp 522 = Nd2 337 (in explanation of nāga as āguṁ na karotī ti nāgo) Nd1 201. Note. AN reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in compound akatāgasa not having committed sin
    1. ˚cārin one who does evil, DN ii.339 MN ii.88 MN iii.163 SN ii.100 SN ii.128 AN ii.240 Mil 110
    for Vedic āgas nt.
    Āghāta
    1. anger, ill-will hatred, malice DN i.3, 31; iii.72 sq. SN i.179 Ja i.113 Dhs 1060 1231 Vb 167 362, 389 Mil 136 Vism 306 DN-a i.52 Vv-a 67 Pv-a 178
    • ˚anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249 AN v.80

      1. ˚paṭivinaya repression of ill-will; the usual enumeration of ā—˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which ‣See D iii.262 289 Vin v.137 AN iv.408 besides this there are sets of five at AN iii.185f. Snp-a 10 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138
      • ˚vatthu occasion of ill-will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enum; d. in sets of nine (Vin v.137 AN iv.408 Ps i.130 Ja iii.291 Ja iii.404 Ja v.149 Vb 389 Nett 23 Snp-a 12), and of ten (Vin v.138 AN v.150 Ps i.130 Vb 391)
      Sanskrit āghāta only in literally meaning of striking, killing, but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āghāta in meaning “hurtfulness” at Mvu i.79 Avs ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti
    Āghātana
    neuter
    1. -1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Thag 1, 418 711; death DN i.31 (= maraṇa DN-a i.119). 2. shambles, slaughter-house Vin i.182 (gav˚) AN iv.138 Ja vi.113
    • place of execution Vin iii.151 Ja i.326 439; iii.59 Mil 110 Dhp-a iv.52 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 5
    • ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning
    Āghāteti
    1. only in phrase cittaṁ a. (with locative ) to incite one’s heart to hatred against, to obdurate one’s heart. Sdhp 126 = SN i.151 =. AN v.172
    2. denominative from āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but different in meaning
    Ācamati
    1. to take in water, to resorb, to rinse Ja iii.297 Mil 152 Mil 262 (+ dhamati). causative I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.142 MN ii.112 AN iii.337 Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaṁ vikkhāletvā Pv-a 241) Mil 152 (˚ayamāna)

      • (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221
      • Caus II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself Ja vi.8
      ā + cam
    Ācamana
    neuter
    1. rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth DN i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi-karaṇa DN-a i.98); (b) after evacuation Ja iii.486
    1. ˚kumbhī water-pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49 52 ii.142, 210, 222
    2. ˚pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190 Vin ii.142 222
    3. ˚sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142 221
    ā + camana of cam
    Ācamā
    feminine
    1. absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Snp 945 which both in Text and in Snp-a reads ājava explained by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to Snp-a (Pj iii has ācāma
    from ā + cam
    Ācaya
    1. heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opposite apacaya ‣See on term Dhs translation 195 & Compendium 251, 252
    • SN ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi) AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opposite apacaya) Dhs 642 685 Vb 319 326, 330; Vism 449 Dhp-a ii.25
    1. ˚gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth). AN v.243 276 Dhs 584 1013, 1397; Kvu 357
    ā + caya
    Ācarati
    1. -1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56 Vin ii.118 Snp 327 (ācare dhamma-sandosa-vādaṁ) 401 Mil 171 Mil 257 (pāpaṁ). cp. past participle ācarita in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Avestan SN i.124 SN i.153 SN i.213 in same meaning
    2. pp āciṇṇa
    3. to step upon, passive through Ja v.153
    ā + aarati
    Ācarin
    adjective-noun
    1. treaching, feminine ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya masculine at Vin iv.130), 317 (identical)
    2. from ā + car
    Ācariya
    1. a teacher (almost synonym with upajjhāya Vin i.60 61, 119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher cp. feminine ācarinī) DN i.103 DN i.116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq. MN iii.115 SN i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚) AN i.132 (pubb˚) Snp 595 Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚) Ja ii.100 411; iv.91; v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 (= ācāra-samācāra-sikkhāpaka Pv-a 252) Mil 201 Mil 262 (master goldsmith?) Vism 99 sq.; Kp-a 12, 155 Snp-a 422 Vv-a 138 For contracted form of ācariya ‣See ācera.

      1. ˚kula the clan of the teacher AN ii.112
      • ˚dhana a teacher’s fee SN i.177 AN v.347
      • ˚pācariya teacher upon teacher, literally “teacher & teacher’s teacher” ‣See ā1 3b DN i.94 DN i.114 DN i.115 DN i.238 SN iv.306 SN iv.308 DN-a i.286 Snp-a 452 (= ācariyo c’eva ācariya-ācariyo ca
      • ˚bhariyā the teacher’s fee Ja v.457 Ja vi.178 Dhp-a i.253
      • ˚muṭṭhi “the teacher’s fist” i.e. close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, DN ii.100 SN v.153 Ja ii.221 Ja ii.250 Mil 144 Snp-a 180 368
      • ˚vaṁsa the line of the teachers Mil 148
      • ˚vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. Dhp-a i.92
      • ˚vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching sectarian teaching (opposite theravāda orthodox doctrine) Mil 148 Dīpavaṁsa v.30; Mhbv.96
      from ā + car
    Ācariyaka
    1. a teacher Vin i.249 Vin iii.25 41 DN i.88 119, 187; ii.112 MN i.514 MN ii.32 SN v.261 AN ii.170 AN iv.310 ‣See also sācariyaka
    ācariya + ka, different from Sanskrit ācariyaka neuter art of teaching
    Ācāma
    1. the scum or foam of boiling rice DN i.166 MN i.78 AN i.295 Ja ii.289 Pug 55 Vv-a 99f. Dhp-a iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka)
    Sanskrit ācāma
    Ācāmeti
    1. at MN ii.112 in imperative ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?) perhaps the reading is incorrect
    2. for ācameti? cp. Sanskrit ācāmayati, causative of ā + cam
    Ācāra
    1. way of behaving, conduct, practice, especially right conduct, good manners; adjective (—˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct
    • Sn 280 (pāpa˚) Ja i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚) Snp-a 157 Pv-a 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441
    • ˚an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ṁ ācarati indulge in bad habits) Dhp-a ii.201 (˚kiriyā). cp. sam˚
    1. ˚kusala versed in good manners Dhp 376 (cp. Dhp-a iv.111)
    2. ˚gocara pasturing in good conduct; i.e. practice of right behaviour DN i.63 = Iti 118 MN i.33 SN v.187 AN i.63f.; ii.14, 39; iii.113, 155, 262; iv.140, 172 352; v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198 Vb 244 246 (cp. Mil 368 Mil 370 quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8
    3. ˚vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171
    ā + car
    Ācārin
    adjective noun
    1. of good conduct, one who behaves well AN i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 from bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with variant reading )
    from ācāra
    Ācikkhaka
    adjective noun
    1. one who tells or shows Dhp-a i.71
    ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati
    Ācikkhati
    1. to tell, relate, show, describe, explain DN i.110 AN ii.189 (atthaṁ ā to interpret) Pug 59 Dhp-a i.14 Snp-a 155 Pv-a 121 Pv-a 164 (describe) imperative pres. ācikkha Snp 1097 (= brūhi Nd2 119 & 455) Pv i.109 ii.81; and ācikkhāhi Dhp-a ii.27
    2. aorist ācikkhi Pv-a 6 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 83
    3. ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e.g. Nd1 271 Nd2 465; Vism 163
    4. attānaṁ ā. to disclose one’s identity Pv-a 89 Pv-a 100.
    5. past participle ācikkhita (q.v.)
    6. causative II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell Dhp-a ii.27
    7. frequently of ā + khyā, i.e. akkhāti
    Ācikkhana
    adjective neuter
    1. telling, announcing Ja iii.444 Pv-a 121
    ā + cikkhana of cikkhati
    Ācikkhita
    1. shown, described, told Pv-a 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta)
    past participle of acikkhati
    Ācikkhitar
    1. one who tells or shows Dhp-a ii.107 (for pavattar)
    agent noun from ācikkhati
    Āciṇa
    1. accumulated; practised, performed Dhp 121 (pāpaṁ = pāpaṁ āciṇanto karonto Dhp-a iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina
    past participle of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?
    Āciṇṇa
    practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in MN i.372 (kamma, cp. Mil 226 and the explanation of āciṇṇaka kamma as “chronic karma at Compendium 144) SN iv.419 AN v.74f. Ja i.81 DN-a i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at DN i.8), 275; Vism 269 Dhp-a i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled) Vv-a 108 Pv-a 54 Sdhp 90.
    1. ˚kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79 Vin ii.301 Dīpavaṁsa iv.47; cp. v.18
    ā + ciṇṇa, past participle of ācarati
    Ācita
    1. accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with Ja vi.250 (= nicita) Vv 411 Dhs-a 310 ‣See also āciṇa
    past participle of ācināti
    Ācināti
    1. to heap up, accumulate SN iii.89 (variant reading ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaṁ) Dhs-a 44
    • pp ācita & āciṇa; (ācina)
    • passive ācīyati (q.v.)
    ā + cināti
    Ācīyati
    (& Āceyyati)
    1. to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna Ja v.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto Commentary )
    passive of ācināti, cp. cīyati
    Ācera
    1. is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.248 Ja vi.563
    Ācela
    1. in kañcanācela-bhūsita “adorned with golden clothes” Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚;
    Ājañña
    1. is the contracted form of ājāniya
    Ājava
    1. ‣See ācamā;
    Ājāna
    adjective
    1. understandable, only in compound durājāna hard to understand SN iv.127 Snp 762 Ja i.295 300
    ā + jāna from jñā
    Ājānana
    neuter
    1. learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge Ja i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn) Pv-a 225
    ā + jānana, cp. Sanskrit ajñāna
    Ājānāti
    1. to understand, to know, to learn DN i.189 Snp 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aññāti at Vism 200. past participle aññāta. cp. also āṇāpeti. Ajaniya (ajaniya) ā + jānāti
    Ājāniya (ājānīya)

    adjective noun

    1. of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Snp 462 Snp 528 Snp 532 Ja i.178 Ja i.194 Dīpavaṁsa iv.26 Dhp-a i.402 Dhp-a iii.49 iv.4 Vv-a 78 Pv-a 216
    • (b) ājānīya : MN i.445 AN v.323 Dhp 322 = Nd2 475
    • (c ājañña = (mostly in poetry): Snp 300 = 304 Ja i.181 Pv iv.154; purisājañña “a steed of man”, i.e. a man of noble race) SN iii.91 = Thag 1, 1084 = Snp 544 = Vv-a 9 AN v.325
    • ˚anājāniya of inferior birth MN i.367
    1. ˚susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal MN i.445 (˚ûpamo dhamma-pariyāyo)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ājāneya & Sanskrit ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + ; jan (to be born, i.e. well-born) it is by Buddhaghosa connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i.e. to be trained) ‣See for these popular etymology e.g. Ja i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaṁ kāraṇaṁ ājānana-sabhāvo ājañño, and Dhp-a iv.4: yaṁ assadamma-sārathi kāraṇaṁ kāreti tassa khippaṁ jānana samatthā ājāniyā The contracted form of the word is ājañña
    Ājānīyatā
    feminine
    1. good breed Pv-a 214
    abstract from ājāniya
    Ājira
    1. a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3
    = ajira with lengthened initial a
    Ājīva
    livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, DN i.54 AN iii.124 (parisuddha˚) Snp 407 (˚ṁ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaṁ hitvā sammājīvaṁ eva pavattayī Snp-a 382), 617 Pug 51 Vb 107 235 Mil 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (identical) Dhs-a 390 Sdhp 342 Sdhp 375 392. especially frequently in the contrast pair sammā -ājīva; micchā-ā˚; right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living e.g. at SN ii.168f.; iii.239; v.9 AN i.271 AN ii.53 AN ii.240 AN ii.270 iv.82 Vb 105 246 ‣See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).
    1. ˚pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Mil 336 Vism 22 sq., 44 Dhp-a iv.111
    • ˚vipatti failure in method of gaining a living AN i.270
    • ˚sampadā perfection of (right livelihood AN i.271 DN-a i.235
    ā + jīva; Sanskrit ājīva
    Ājīvaka
    (& ˚ika)
    1. an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non-buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living ‣See especially Dhp-a; ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas,; 1951-(a) ājīvaka : Vin i.291 Vin ii.284 Vin iv.74 91 MN i.31 MN i.483 SN i.217 AN iii.276 AN iii.384 Ja i.81 Ja i.257 Ja i.390
    • (b) ājīvika Vin i.8 Snp 381 (Burmese variant ˚aka)
    1. ˚sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii.130 165 AN i.217
    ājīva + ka, originally “one finding his living” (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ājīvika Divy 393 Divy 427
    Ājīvika
    neuter (or ājīvikā
    • feminine ?)

      1. sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vb 379 (˚bhaya) Mil 196 (identical) Pv-a 274 and in phrase ājīvik’âpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living MN i.463 = SN iii.93 (Text reads jīvikā pakatā) = Iti 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Mil 279
      from ājīva
    Ājīvin
    adjective-noun
    1. having one’s livelihood, finding one’s subsistence, living, leading a life of (—˚) DN iii.64 AN v.190 (lūkha˚)
    from ājīva
    Āṭa
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (= dabbimukha Commentary )
    etymology? cp. Sanskrit āṭi Turdus Ginginianus ‣See Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148
    Āṭaviya
    1. is to be read for aṭaviyo (q.v.) at Ja vi.55
    = Sanskrit āṭavika
    Āṭhapanā
    feminine at Pug 18 & variant reading at Vb 357 is to be read; aṭṭhapanā (so Text at Vb 357).
    Āṇañja
    1. ‣See ānejja
    Āṇaṇya
    1. ‣See ānaṇya
    Āṇatti
    feminine
    1. order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62 Kp-a 29 Pv-a 260 Sdhp 59 Sdhp 354
    ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), causative of jñā
    Āṇattika
    adjective
    1. belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction Kp-a 29
    āṇatti + ka
    Āṇā
    feminine
    1. order, command, authority Mil 253 DN-a i.289 Kp-a 179, 180, 194 Pv-a 217 Sdhp 347 Sdhp 576. rāj’āṇā the king’s command or authority Ja i.433 Ja iii.351 Pv-a 242
    • āṇaṁ deti to give an order Ja i.398 ˚ṁ pavatteti to issue an order Mil 189 cp. āṇāpavatti Ja iii.504 Ja iv.145
    Sanskrit ājñā, ā + jñā
    Āṇāpaka
    adjective noun
    1. adjective giving an order Vism 303
    2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders a town-crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority Mil 147
    from āṇāpeti
    Āṇāpana
    neuter
    1. ordering or being, ordered, command, order Pv-a 135
    abstract from āṇāpeti
    Āṇāpeti
    1. to give an order, to enjoin, command (with accusative of person) Ja iii.351 Mil 147 Dhp-a ii.82 Vv-a 68 (dāsiyo), 69 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 81
    2. ā + ñāpeti, causative of ā + jānāti from jñā, cp. Sanskrit ājñāpayati
    Āṇi
    1. -1. the pin of a wheel-axle, a linch-pin MN i.119 SN ii.266 SN ii.267 AN ii.32 Snp 654 Ja vi.253 Ja vi.432 Snp-a 243 Kp-a 45, 50
    • a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) MN i.119 SN ii.266 (drum stick) Ja iv.30 Ja vi.432 Ja vi.460 Thag 1, 744 Dhp i.39. 3. (figuratively) (˚-) peg-like (or secured by a peg, of a door) small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271 cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana-colaka); ˚dvāra Thag 1, 355 C khuddaka-dvāra, quoted at Psalms of the Brethren 200, translation by Mrs Rhys Davids as “the towngate’s sallyport” by Neumann as “Gestöck” (fastening, enclosure) āṇi-gaṇṭhik’āhato ayopatto at Vism 108 DN-a i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood
    • Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n-enlargement of Indogermanic *olenā, cp. Old High German lun, German lünse Anglo-Saxon lynes = English linch, further related to Latin ulna elbow, Old High German elina, Anglo-Saxon eln = English el-bow ‣See Walde Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus
    Ātaṅka
    1. illness, sickness, disease MN i.437 SN iii.1 Snp 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd1 486) frequently in compound appātaṅka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) DN i.204 DN iii.166 AN iii.65 AN iii.103 Mil 14 feminine abstract appātaṅkatā MN i.124
    2. etymology uncertain; Sanskrit ātanka
    Ātaṅkin
    adjective
    1. sick, ill Ja v.84 (= gilāna Commentary )
    from ātanka
    Ātata
    1. generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dīpavaṁsa xiv.14 Vv-a 37 (q.v. for enumeration of musical instruments), 96
    from ā + tan, past participle tata; literally stretched, covered over
    Ātatta
    1. heated, burnt. scorched, dry Ja v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha-sarīra Commentary )
    ā + tatta1, past participle of ā-tapati
    Ātapa
    1. -1. sun-heat Snp 52 Ja i.336 Dhs 617 Dīpavaṁsa i.57 Vv-a 54 Pv-a 58
    • glow, heat (in general Pv i.74 Sdhp 396

  • (figuratively) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal exertion Pv-a 98 (viriyā-tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q.v.). cp. ātappa.

    1. ˚vāraṇa “warding off the sun-heat”, i.e. a parasol sun-shade Dāvs i.28; v.35
    ā + tapa
  • Ātapatā
    feminine
    1. glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122
    abstract of ātapa
    Ātapati
    1. to burn Ja iii.447
    ā + tap
    Ātappa
    neuter
    1. ardour, zeal, exertion DN i.13 DN iii.30f. 104 sq., 238 sq. MN iii.210 SN ii.132 SN ii.196 sq. AN i.153 AN iii.249 AN iv.460f.; v.17 sq. Snp 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122) Ja iii.447 Nd1 378 Vb 194 (= vāyāma) DN-a i.104
    Sanskrit *ātāpya, from ātāpa
    Ātāpa
    1. glow, heat; figuratively ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better “torturing mortification” Mil 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo) Pv-a 98 (viriya˚) cp. ātappa & ātāpana;
    ā + tāpa from tap; cp. tāpeti
    Ātāpana
    neuter
    1. tormenting, torture, mortification MN i.78 AN i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (identical) Pug 55 (identical); Vism 3 (identical)
    ā + tāpana
    Ātāpin
    adjective
    1. ardént, zealous, strenuous, active DN iii.58 DN iii.76f. 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276 MN i.22 56, 116, 207, 349; ii.11; iii.89, 128, 156; SN 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54 218; v.165, 187, 213 AN ii.13f.; iii.38, 100 sq.; iv.29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq. Snp 926 Nd1 378 Iti 41 42 Vb 193f. Mil 34 Mil 366 Vism 3 (= viriyavā) Dhp-a i.120 Snp-a 157 503
    • frequently in the formula of Arahantship “eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto” ‣See arahant II. B ‣See also satipaṭṭhāna. O
    • past participle anātāpin SN ii.195f. AN ii.13 Iti 27 (+ anottappin)
    from ātāpa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ātāpin Avs i.233; ii.194 = Divy 37; 618
    Ātāpeti
    1. to burn, scorch; figuratively to torment, inflict pain, torture MN i.341 (+ paritāpeti) SN iv.337 Mil 314 Mil 315
    ā + tāpeti
    Ātitheyya
    neuter
    1. great theft (?) AN i.93 AN iv.63f. (variant reading ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred)
    from ati + theyya
    Ātu
    1. father MN i.449 (cp. Trenckner’s note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois)
    dialectical
    Ātuman
    1. self. nominative singular ātumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhāvo Pv-a 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (identical) & ātumāno Nd1 351; accusative ātumānaṁ Snp 782 (= attānaṁ Snp-a 521), 888, 918;
    2. locative ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani Commentary )
    3. Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. cp. also the shortened form tuman
    Ātura
    adjective
    1. ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected SN iii.1 (˚kāya) AN i.250 Snp 331 Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna-kāya Vv-a 328) Ja i.197 (˚anna “food of the miserable”, i.e. last meal of one going to be killed; Commentary explains as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201 v.90, 433; vi.248 Mil 139 Mil 168 Dhp-a i.31 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 160 Pv-a 161 Vv-a 77 Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as synonym of aṭṭo, e.g. at Ja iv.293 Snp-a 489
    • ˚anātura healthy, well, in good condition SN iii.1 Dhp 198
    Sanskrit ātura, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ātura, e.g. Jtm 3170
    Āthabbaṇa
    neuter
    1. the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Snp 927 (variant reading ath˚ ‣See interpreted at Nd1 381; explained as āthabbaṇika-manta-ppayoga at Snp-a 564)
    = athabbaṇa, q.v.
    Āthabbaṇika
    adjective noun
    1. one conversant with magic, wonder-worker, medicine-man Nd1 381 Snp-a 564
    from athabbana
    Ādapeti
    1. to cause one to take, to accept, agree to MN ii.104 SN i.132
    causative of ādāti
    Ādara
    1. consideration of, esteem, regard, respect reverence, honour Ja v.493 Snp-a 290 DN-a i.30 Dhs-a 61 Vv-a 36 61, 101, 321 Pv-a 121 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 135 Pv-a 278 Sdhp 2 Sdhp 21 Sdhp 207 Sdhp 560
    2. ˚anādara lack of reverence, disregard disrespect; adjective disrespectful SN i.96 Vin iv.218 Snp 247 (= ādara-virahita Snp-a 290 DN-a i.284 Vv-a 219 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 257
    3. Sanskrit ādara, probably ā + dara, cp. semantically German ehrfurcht awe
    Ādaratā
    feminine
    1. = ādara, in negative an˚; want of consideration Ja iv.229 Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 (in explanation of dovacassatā)
    abstract from ādara
    Ādariya
    neuter
    1. showing respect of honour; negative an˚; disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220 AN v.146 AN v.148 Pug 20 Vb 371 Mil 266
    abstract from ādara
    Ādava
    1. is gloss at Vv-a 216 for maddava Vv 5123 meaning: excitement, adjective exciting. The passage in Vv-a is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear
    ā + dava2?
    Ādahati1
    1. to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaṁ ā. = samādahati). cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati
    ā + dahati1
    Ādahati2
    1. to set fire to, to burn Ja vi.201 Ja vi.203
    ā + dahati2
    Ādā
    1. taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā Commentary ; cp. the usual form ādāya). Adati (Adadati)
    absolutive of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti.1b
    Ādāti (Ādadāti)
    1. to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; gerundive ādātabba Vin i.50 infinitive ādātuṁ DN iii.133 (adinnaṁ theyyasankhātaṁ ā.).
    2. absolutive ādā & ādāya; ‣See sep.;
    3. gerundive ādeyya, causative ādapeti (q.v.)

      • ‣ See also ādiyati & ādeti;
      ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā
    Ādāna
    neuter

    taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; figuratively appropriating clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (literally) taking (food), pasturing MN iii.133 Ja v.371 (& ˚esana).

  • getting, acquiring, taking, seizing SN ii.94 AN iv.400 (daṇḍ˚) Pv-a 27 (phal˚); especially freq in adinn˚; seizing what is not given, i.e. theft ‣See under adinna.
  • (figuratively) attachment, clinging. AN v.233 AN v.253 (˚paṭinissagga) Dhp 89 (identical; cp. Dhp-a ii.163) Snp 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta) Nd1 98 (˚gantha) Nd2 123 124 -an˚; free from attachment SN i.236 (sādānesu anādāno “not laying hold mong them that grip” translation) AN ii.10 Iti 109 Ja iv.354 Mil 342 Dhp-a iv.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). cp. upa˚, pari˚.

    ād + āna, or directly from ā + , base 1 of dadāti
  • Ādāya
    1. having received or taken taking up, seizing on, receiving; frequently used in the sense of a preposition “with” (c. accusative ) Snp 120 Snp 247 Snp 452 Ja v.13 Vb 245 Dhp-a ii.74 Snp-a 139 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 61 etc

      • At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f ādāyā in meaning of “a casually taken up belief” (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). cp. upa˚, pari˚
      absolutive of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy) ‣See also ādiya
    Ādāyīn
    adjective-noun
    1. taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates DN i.4 (dinn˚) AN iii.80 AN v.137 (sār˚) DN-a i.72
    from ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya
    Ādāsa
    a mirror Vin ii.107 DN i.7 DN i.11 (˚pañha mirror-questioning, cp. DN-a i.97: “ādāse devataṁ otaretvā pañha-pucchanaṁ”), 80 ii.93 (dhamna’-ādāsaṁ nāma dhamma-pariyāyaṁ desessāmi) SN v.357 (identical) AN v.92 AN v.97f. 103 Ja i.504 Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); Kp-a 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237 Dhp-a i.226
    1. ˚tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450 456, 489
    Sanskrit ādarśa, ā + dṛś, Pali dass, of dassati1 2
    Ādāsaka
    1. = ādāsa Thag 2, 411
    Ādi
    1. -1. masculine starting-point, beginning Snp 358 (
    2. accusative ādiṁ = kāraṇaṁ Snp-a 351) Dhp 375 (
    3. nominative ādi) Mil 10 (ādimhi) Ja vi.567 (ablative ādito from the beginning). For use as
    4. neuter ‣See below 2 b
    5. (adj &
    6. adverb ) (a) (˚-) beginning, initially, first, principal chief ‣See compounds
    7. (b) (˚-) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i.e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e.g. rukkha-gumb-ādayo (
    8. accusative plural trees, jungle etc. Ja i.150 amba-panas’ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) Ja i.278 amba-labuj’ādīnaṁ phalānaṁ anto Ja ii.159 asi-satti-dhami-ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) Ja i.150 kasi-gorakkh’ādīni karonte manusse Ja ii.128 … ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways Ja i.81 Pv-a 30 Absolute as
    9. neuter plural ādinī with ti (evaṁ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning “this and such like”, e.g. at Ja ii.128 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā)
    10. In phrase ādiṁ katvā meaning “putting (him, her, it) first”, i.e. heginning with, from.. on, from … down (c.
    11. accusative ) e.g. Dhp-a i.393 (rājānaṁ ādiṁ K. from the king down) Pv-a 20 (vihāraṁ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiṁ K.)
    12. -kammika cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ādikarmaka Divy 544

      1. a beginner Vin iii.146 Vin iv.100 Mil 59 Vism 241 Dhs-a 187
      • ˚kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe-kalyāṇa pariyosāna-kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, “beautiful in the beginning, the middle the end” ‣See references under dhamma Commentary 3 and cp. DN-a i.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.) Snp-a 444 abstract ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4
      • ˚pubbaṅgama original Dīpavaṁsa iv.26
      • ˚brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life DN i.189 DN iii.284 MN i.431 MN ii.125 MN ii.211 MN iii.192 SN ii.75 SN ii.223 SN iv.91 SN v.417 SN v.438
      • feminine ˚ikā Vin i.64 68 AN i.231f. -majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Mil 10 cp. above ādikalyāṇa
      Sanskrit ādi, etymology uncertain
    Ādika
    adjective
    1. from the beginning, initial ‣See adhika; instrumental ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time MN i.395 MN i.479 MN ii.213 SN ii.224 Ja vi.567 cp. ādiya3
    ādi + ka
    Ādicca
    the sun SN i.15 SN i.47 SN ii.284 SN iii.156 SN v.44 SN v.101 AN i.242 AN v.22 AN v.263 AN v.266f. Iti 85 Snp 550 Snp 569 Snp 1097(“ādicco vuccati suriyo” Nd2 125) Dhp-a iv.143 Sdhp 14 Sdhp 17 Sdhp 40.
    1. ˚upaṭṭhānā sun-worship DN i.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DN-a i.97) Ja ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaṁ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaṁ namassamāno tiṭṭhati Commentary )
    2. ˚patha the path of the sun, i.e. the sky, the heavens Dhp 175 (ākāsa Dhp-a iii.177)
    3. ˚bandhu “kinsman of the sun”, Ep of the Buddha Vin ii.296 SN i.186 SN i.192 AN ii.54 Snp 54 Snp 915 Snp 1128Nd1 341 Nd2 125b Vv 425 7810 Vv-a 116
    Vedic āditya
    Ādiṇṇa
    1. broken, split open SN iv.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. MN i.306
    Sanskrit ādīrṇa, past participle of ā + dṛ; ‣See ādiyati2
    Ādiṇṇata
    neuter
    1. state of being broken or split Ps i.49
    abstract from ādiṇṇa
    Āditta
    set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34 Kv.209 (sabbaṁ ādittaṁ) SN iii.71 SN iv.19 SN iv.108 AN iv.320 (˚cela) Snp 591 Ja iv.391 Pv i.85 (= paditta jalita Pv-a 41); Kvu 209 DN-a i.264 Pv-a 149 Sdhp 599.
    1. ˚pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (literally being in fllames) SN iv.168f. Vin i.34 Dhp-a i.88
    ā + ditta1, Sanskrit ādīpta, past participle of ā + dīp
    Ādina
    1. only at DN i.115 (Text reading ādīna, but variant reading SN identical ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina-khattiya-kula primordial ‣See note in Dialogues of the Buddha i.148
    Ādiya1
    1. adjective gerundive of admi, ad, Sanskrit ādya] edible, eatable AN iii.45 (bhojanāni)
    Ādiya2
    1. in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at AN iii.164f. (variant readings ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps “graspmouth”, i.e. gossip; thus equal to absolutive of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (Text ādheyya˚, Commentary has variant reading ādheyya˚) where Pug AN 248 explns. “ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama-vacanasmiṁ yeva ṭhapita-mukho ti attho” (sticking to one’s word?) ‣See ādheyya.

    Ādiya3
    1. = ādika, instrumental ādiyena in the beginning Ja vi.567 (= ādikena Commentary )
    Ādiya4
    1. absolutive of ādiyati
    Ādiyati1
    1. to take up; take to oneself seize on, grasp, appropriate, figuratively take notice of, take to heart, heed
    • pres. ādiyati AN iij.46 Snp 119 Snp 156 Snp 633 Snp 785 Nd1 67 Nd2 123 124 Ja iii.296: v.367
    • pot ādiye Snp 400
    • imperative ādiya MN iii.133 (so read for ādissa?).
    • aorist ādiyi DN iii.65 AN iii.209 ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaṁ daṇḍaṁ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi Pv-a 241) & ādapayi (
    • causative formation from ādāti?) to take heed SN i.132 (variant reading ādiyi, translation “put this into thy mind”)
    • ger ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā) Ja ii.224 Commentary for ādiya Text iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; variant reading anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending Ja iii.196) Dhp-a iii.32 (identical) Pv-a 13 (Text anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaṁ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya SN iii.26 (variant reading an˚ for anādīya) Ja ii.223 (= ādiyitvā Commentary ) ‣See also ādiya2, & ādīya SN iii.26 (an˚) ‣See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati
    ā + diyati, medium passive base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚ ‣See also ādāti & ādeti
    Ādiyati2
    1. to split, go asunder, break Ps i.49. past participle ādiṇṇa ‣See also avadīyati. cp. also upādiṇṇa
    2. ā + diyati, Sanskrit ādīryate, passive of dṛ; to split ‣See etymology under darī
    Ādiyanatā
    feminine
    1. in an˚; the fact of not taking up or heeding Snp-a 516
    abstract formation ādiyana (from ādiya absolutive of ādiyati) + ta
    Ādisati
    1. (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to
    • (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaṁ or dānaṁ). present indicative ādisati DN i.213 = AN i.170 (tell or read one’s character) Snp 1112 (atītaṁ) Nd1 382 (nakkhattaṁ set the horoscope) Mil 294 (dānaṁ); pot. ādiseyya Thag 2 307 (dakkhiṇaṁ); Pv iv.130 (identical = uddiseyya Pv-a 228) & ādise Vin i.229 = DN ii.88 (dakkhiṇaṁ);
    • imperative ādisa Pv-a 49
    • future ādissati Thag 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaṁ) Pv-a 88 (identical).
    • aorist ādisi Pv ii.28 Pv-a 46 (dakkhiṇaṁ); pl ādisiṁsu ibid. 53 (identical) & ādisuṁ Pv; i.106 (identical)
    • ger ādissa Vin iii.127 Snp 1018 Pv ii.16 (dānaṁ), & ādisitvāna Thag 2, 311
    • gerundive ādissa
    • adjective to be told or shown MN i.12
    ā + disati
    Ādiso
    adverb
    1. from the beginning, i.e. thoroughly, absolutely DN i.180 MN iii.208
    originally ablative of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ
    Ādissa
    1. at MN iii.133 is an imperative pres. meaning “take”, & should probably better be read; ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not
    2. gerundive of ādisati, which its form might suggest.

    Ādissa2
    1. adjective blameworthy MN i.12 MA = garāyha
    Ādīna
    1. at DN i.115 & SN v.74 (variant readings ādina, & abhinna) ‣See ādina ‣See; diṇṇa
    Ādīnava
    1. disadvantage, danger (in or through = locative ) DN i.38 (vedanānaṁ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriye MN i.318 SN i.9 (ettha bhīyo) ii.170 sq. (dhātūnaṁ); iii.27, 62, 102 (rū
    2. passive etc.); iv.7 168 AN i.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo) iii.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala-ppasāde) iv.439 sq.; v.81 Ja i.146 Ja iv.2 Iti 9 = AN ii.10 = Nd2 172a Snp 36 Snp 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732 Thag 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa Thag-a 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa Thag-a 287); Pv iii.107 (= dosa Pv-a 214); iv.67 (= dosa Pv-a 263); Ps i.192 sq.; ii.9, 10 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 208

      • There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla-vipattiyā ā. at DN ii.85 = iii.235 = AN iii.252 five akkhantiyā ā. at Vb 378 six of six each at DN iii.182 sq
      • In phrase kāmānaṁ ā. okāro saṅkileso DN i.110 DN i.148 MN i.115 Nett 42; Dhp-a 16
      1. ˚ānupassin realising the danger or evil of SN ii.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstract ˚ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695 -dassāvin same as ˚ânupassin DN i.245 (an˚) AN v.178 (identical) DN iii.46 SN ii.194 SN ii.269 AN iii.146 AN v.181f. Nd2 141
      2. ˚pariyesanā search for danger in (—˚) SN ii.171 SN iii.29; iv.8 sq
      3. ˚saññā consciousness of danger DN i.7) iii.253, 283 AN iii.79
      ā + dīna + va neuter, a substantivised adjective, originally meaning “full of wretchedness”, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ādīnava Mvu iii.297 (misery); Divy 329
    Ādīpanīya
    adjective
    1. to be explained Mil 270
    gerundive of ā + dīpeti
    Ādīpita
    1. ablaze, in flames SN i.31 (loka; variant reading ādittaka) 108 Ja v.366 Dhp-a iii.32 (variant reading āditta)
    past participle of ādīpeti, ā + causative of dīp, cp. dīpeti
    Ādu
    indeclinable

    emphatic (adversative) participle (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather Ja iii.499 = vi.443; v.180; vi.552.

  • as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu … ādu (= kiṁ … udāhu Snp-a 350), viz. is it so … or Thag 1, 1274 = Snp 354 Pv iv.317 = Dhp-a i.31 Ja v.384 vi.382; without udāhu at Ja v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an explanation of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.

    ‣ See also adu
  • Ādeti
    1. to take, receive, get Snp 121 (= gaṇhāti Snp-a 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd; 1 444); cp. i.43 Ja iii.103 Ja iii.296 Ja v.366 (= gaṇhāti Commentary ; cp. ādiyati on p. 367) Mil 336
    a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati
    Ādeyya
    adjective
    1. to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158 Ja vi.243 Mil 110 Thag-a 42 Adeva, Adevana
    gerundive of ādāti (q.v.)
    Ādeva, Ādevanā
    1. lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaṁ pari˚ Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps i.38
    ā + div. devati
    Ādesa
    1. information, pointing out; as technical term g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e.g. kutonidānā is at Snp-a 303 said to equal kiṁ-nidānā, the to of kuto ablative equalling or being substituted for the acc case: paccatta-vacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo
    from ādisati, cp. Sanskrit ādeśa
    Ādesanā
    feminine
    1. pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind-reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii.200 DN i.212 DN i.213 DN iii.220 AN i.170 AN i.292 AN v.327 Ps ii.227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (literally variety of i.e. act or performance etc.) at DN iii.103
    ā + desanā
    Ādhāna
    neuter
    1. -1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying AN iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaṁ, variant reading of 6 MSS ādānaṁ)
    • receptacle MN i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. 3. enclosure, hedge Mil 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake ‣See under kaṇṭaka)
    1. ˚gāhin holding one’s own place, i.e. obstinate (?) reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsin ādhāna-gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89 MN i.43 MN i.96 AN iii.335 (variant reading ādāna˚, Commentary explains by daḷhagāhin) DN iii.247 (adhāna˚)
    ā + dhāna
    Ādhāra
    1. -1. a container, receptacle, basin, literally holder AN iii.27 Ja vi.257
    • “holding up”, i.e. support, basis, prop. especially a (round) stool or stand for the alms-bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto) MN iii.95 SN v.21 Ja v.202
    • figuratively SN v.20 (an˚ without a support cittaṁ); Vism 8, 444

  • (technical term g.) name for the

    • locative case (“resting on”) Snp 211
    ā + dhāra
  • Ādhāraka
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. -1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra; 2) (always masculine, except at Ja i.33 where ˚āni
      2. plural neuter Ja i.33 Dhp-a iii.290 = Vv-a 220 Dhp-a iii.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaṁ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaṁ)
      3. a reading desk, pulpit Ja iii.235 iv.299
      ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka
    Ādhāraṇatā
    feminine
    1. concentration, attention, mindfulness Snp-a 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (identical)
    ā + dhāraṇatā
    Ādhārita
    1. supported, held up Mil 68
    past participle of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1
    Ādhāvati
    1. to run towards a goal, to run after MN i.265 (where identical passage SN ii.26 has upadh˚) DN-a i.39 Frequently in combinationādhāvati paridhāvati to run about e.g. Ja i.127 Ja i.134 Ja i.158 Ja ii.68
    ā + dhavati1
    Ādhāvana
    neuter
    1. onrush, violent motion Mil 135
    from ādhāvati
    Ādhipacca
    1. (& Ādhipateyya) neuter

      1. supreme rule lordship, sovereignty, power SN v.342 (issariy˚) AN i.62 (identical), 147, 212; ii.205 (identical); iii.33, 76; iv.252 singular; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b ‣See also D iii.146, where spelt ādhipateyya; explained by issariya at Pv-a 137) Ja i.57 Dāvs v.17 Vv-a 126 (gehe ā = issariya) The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14
      from adhi + pati + ya “being over-lord” ‣See also adhipateyya
    Ādhuta
    1. shaken, moved (by the wind, i.e. fanned Vv 394 (variant reading adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i.e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaṁ Dāvs v.49 Vv-a 178 explains by saṇikaṁ vidhūpayamāna, i.e. gently fanned)
    ā + dhuta1
    Ādheyya
    adjective

    to be deposited (in one’s head & heart Pug A), to be heeded to be appropriated in latter meaning easily mixed with; ādheyya, cp. variant readings under ādiya2

    1. ; neuter depository (ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug AN 217) Pug 34 (˚ṁ gacchati is deposited) Mil 359 (sabbe tass’ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i.e. his deposits or his property).

      1. ˚mukha ‣See ādiya2
      gerundive of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2
    Ānaka
    1. a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end SN ii.266 Ja ii.344 Dīpavaṁsa xvi.14
    Sanskrit ānaka, cp. Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 10
    Ānañca
    1. ‣See ākāsa˚; and viññāṇa˚;
    Ānañja
    1. ‣See ānejja
    Ānaṇya
    neuter
    1. freedom from debt DN i.73 AN iii.354 (epithet of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa Nd1 160; Vism 44 DN-a i.3
    Sanskrit ānṛṇya, so also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, Pali iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an-aṇa as base of ānaṇya
    Ānadati
    1. to trumpet (of elephants) Ja iv.233
    ā + nadati
    Ānana
    neuter
    1. the mouth; adjective (—˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚)
    Vedic āna, later Sanskrit ānana from an to breathe
    Ānantarika
    (& ˚ya)
    1. without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321 Vin ii.212 Pug 13 Dhs 1291
    1. ˚kamma “conduct that finds retribution without delay (Kvu translation 275 note 2) Vin ii.193 Ja i.45 Kvu 480 Mil 25 (cp. Dhs translation 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna)
    from an + antara + ika
    Ānanda
    1. joy, pleasure, bliss, delight DN i.3 Snp 679 Snp 687 Ja i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum) DN-a i.53 (= pītiyā etaṁ adhivacanaṁ)
    Vedic ānanda, from ā + nand, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ānandī joy Divy 37
    Ānandati
    1. to be pleased or delighted Ja vi.589 (aorist ānandi in Text reading ānandi vittā, explained by Commentary as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi-cittā with gladdened heart) ‣See also ānandiya
    2. ā + nandati
    Ānandin
    adjective
    1. joyful, friendly Thag 1, 555 Ja iv.226
    from ā + nand
    Ānandiya
    1. (adjective
    • .)
    1. enjoyable, neuter joy, feast Ja vi.589 (˚ṁ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa Commentary )
    gerundive of ānandati
    Ānandī
    feminine
    1. joy, happiness in compound ānandi-citta Ja vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta ‣See ānandati)
    ā + nandī, cp. ānanda
    Ānaya
    adjective
    1. to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring SN i.124 = Ja i.80
    ā + naya
    Ānayati
    1. ‣See āneti
    Ānāpāna
    neuter
    1. inhaled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration SN v.132 SN v.311 sq. Ja i.58 Ps i.162 (˚kathā); usually in compound ˚sati concentration by in-breathing & out-breathing (cp. ; Man of Mystic 70) MN i.425 (cp. DN ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70 AN i.30 Iti 80 Ps i.166, 172, 185 (˚samādhi) Nd2 466 B (identical) Mil 332 Vism 111, 197, 266 sq. Snp-a 165 ‣See detail under sati
    āna + apāna, compounds. of an to breathe
    Ānāpeti
    1. ‣See āneti
    Ānāmeti
    1. to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under Ja v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, variant reading ānayissati, Commentary ānessasi = lead to)
    ā + nāmeti, causative of namati, which is usually spelt nameti
    Ānisaṁsa
    1. praise i.e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage good result, blessing in or from (c. locative ). There are five ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīla-sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at DN ii.86 viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report visārada self-confidence, asammūlho kālaṁ karoti an untroubled death, saggaṁ lokaṁ uppajjati a happy state after death

      • DN i.110 DN i.143 DN iii.132 (four), 236 (five) MN i.204 SN i.46 SN i.52 SN iii.8 SN iii.93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven) 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276 AN i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne) 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita-satissa) 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto-vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442 443 sq. (ākās’ānañcāyatane); v.i, 106 (mahā˚), 311 Iti 28 29, 40 (sikkhā˚) Snp 256 (phala˚), 784, 952 Ja i.9 94; v.491 (variant reading anu˚) Nd1 73 104, 441; Kvu 400 Mil 198 Vv-a 6 113 Pv-a 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 (= phala) 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263
      • Eleven ānisaṁsas of mettā (cp. Ps ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311 314; on another eight ‣See
      • past participle 644 sq
      ā + ni + saṁsa, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit distorted to anuśaṁsa
    Ānisada
    neuter
    1. “sit down”, bottom, behind MN i.80 = 245 Ja iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = Kp-a 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maṁsa)
    a + sad
    Ānuttariya
    neuter
    1. incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal DN iii.102f. AN v.37
    ‣ See also anuttariya which as—˚ probably represents ānutt˚
    Ānīta
    1. fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced Ja i.291 Ja iii.127 Ja iv.1
    past participle of ānetī
    Ānupuṭṭha
    1. metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q.v.)
    Ānupubba
    neuter
    1. rule, regularity, order Thag 1, 727 (cp. Mvu ii.224 ānupubbā)
    abstract from anupubba
    Ānupubbatā
    feminine (or ˚ta nt.?)
    1. succession; only in grammatical technical term padânu-pubbatā word sequence, in explanation of iti Nd1 140 Nd2 137 (variant reading ˚ka)
    from last
    Ānupubbikathā
    1. [for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & ‣See also anupubbi˚ regulated exposition, graduated sermon DN i.110; ii.41 sq. MN i.379 Ja i.8 Mil 228 DN-a i.277 308 Dhp-a iv.199
    Ānubhāva
    1. greatness, magnificence majesty, splendour Ja i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491 Dhp-a ii.58
    the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q.v. for details. Only in later language
    Ānejja
    and Ānañja
    1. immovability, imperturbability, impassibility The word is; n. but occurs as adjective at Vin iii.109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ānijyā śāntiḥ at Avs i.199
    • The term usually occurs in cpd ānejja-ppatta
    • adjective immovable literally having attained impassibility explained by Buddhaghosa at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6 as acala, niccala, i.e. motionless. This compound is indicated below by (p.) after the reference
    • The various spellings of the word are as follows:
    1. -1. ānejja DN i.76 (variant reading ānañja-p.) AN ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.) Nd2 471 (variant reading aneja, ānañja) = Vb 137 (āneñja) Nd2 569a (variant reading ānañja), 601 (variant reading anejja & aneñja) Pug 60 (p.) DN-a i.219 (Burmese variant āneñja)
    • ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (variant reading ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Buddhaghosa ānejja p. 267), 109 Ud 27 (samādhi, adjective variant reading ānañca) Dhp-a iv.46 ‣See also below compound ˚kāraṇa
    • A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at MN ii.229 (variant reading aṇañja aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254

  • āneñja SN ii.82 (variant reading āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?) DN iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu translation 358) Nd1 90 (identical), 206, 442; Ps ii.206 Vb 135 340 Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Nett 87, 99 ‣See also iñjati.

    1. ˚kāraṇa trick of immovability, i.e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but ‣See differently Morris J Pali T S. 1886, 154) Ja i.415 Ja ii.325 (variant reading āṇañja, āneñca ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310
    abstract from an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of iṅg to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *aṅg in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sanskrit ṛj ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sanskrit ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa iṇa, both a & i representing Sanskrit ṛ. The form; añja would thus correspond to a Sanskrit *añjya (*añgya). The third Pali form ān-eñja is a direct (later, and probably re-instituted formation from Sanskrit iñjya, which in an interesting way became in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit re-sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form) The editions of Pali Texts show a great variance of spelling based on manuscripts vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation
  • Āneñjatā
    feminine
    1. steadfastness Vism 330, 386
    from āneñja
    Āneti
    1. to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Snp 110 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 92. pot. 1st plural ānema (or
    2. imperative 2nd pl ānetha MN i.371
    3. future ānayissati SN i.124 Pv ii.65 Ja iii.173 Ja v.154 (variant reading ),; ānessati Ja v.154 infinitive ānayituṁ Pv ii.610, absolutive ānetvā Pv-a 42 Pv-a 74.
    4. aorist ānesi Pv-a 3 & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiṁ).
    5. past participle ānīta (q.v.)

      • Med.
      • passive ānīyati & āniyyati; DN ii.245 (āniyyataṁ
      • imperative shall be brought) MN i.371 (ppr. ānīyamāna).
      • causative II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched Ja iii.391 Ja v.225 Apa & Apo;
      ā + neti
    Āpa
    Āpo;

    neuter

    1. water; philosophically technical term for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo vāyo ‣See Compendium 268 & Dhs translation 201, also below ˚dhātu. DN ii.259 MN i.327 SN ii.103 SN iii.54 SN iii.207 AN iv.312 AN iv.375 Snp 307 Snp 391 (˚ṁ), 392 (locative āpe), 437 (identical) Ja iv.8 (paṭhavi-āpa-teja˚) Dhs 652 Mil 363 (genitive āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.

      1. ˚kasiṇa the water-device, i.e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 note) DN iii.268 Ja i.313 Dhs 203 Vism 170 Dhp-a i.312 Dhp-a iii.214
      • ˚dhātu the fluid element the essential element in water, i.e. element of cohesion (see Compendium 155 note 2; Mystic 9 note 2; Dhs translation 201, 242 DN iii.228 DN iii.247 MN i.187 MN i.422: Dhs 652 Nett 74 ‣See also dhātu

        • rasa the taste of water AN i.32 Snp-a 6
        • ˚sama resembling water MN i.423
        Vedic ap & āp, feminine singular apā, plural āpaḥ, later Sanskrit also āpaḥ neuter

        • Indogermanic; *ap & *ab; , primarily to Lithuanian ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Latin amnis river Sanskrit abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water
    Āpakā
    feminine
    1. river Ja v.452 Ja vi.518
    = āpagā
    Āpagā
    feminine
    1. a river Thag 1, 309 Snp 319 Ja v.454 Dāvs i.32 Vv-a 41
    āpa + ga of gam
    Āpajjati
    1. to get into, to meet with (accusative ); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saṁvaraṁ) DN i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiṁ) Iti 113 (vuddhiṁ) Ja i.73 Pug 20 33 (diṭṭh’ânugatiṁ) Pv-a 29 (ppr. āpajjanto) Dhp-a ii.71-pot. āpajjeyya DN i.119 (musāvādaṁ).
    2. aorist āpajji Ja v.349 Pv-a 124 (sankocaṁ); āpādi SN i.37 AN ii.34 Iti 85 Ja ii.293 3rd
    3. plural āpādu DN ii.273
    4. absolutive āpajjitva Pv-a 22 (saṁvegaṁ), 151.
    5. past participle āpanna (q.v.)
    6. causative āpādeti (q.v.)

      • Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naṁ Iti 86 is uncertain (variant readings āsajja & ālajja). The identical passage at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8 has āsajjanaṁ, for which Buddhaghosa, on p. 325 has āpajjanaṁ cp. pariyāpajjati
      Sanskrit āpadyate, ā + pad
    Āpaṇa
    1. a bazaar, shop Vin i.140 Ja i.55 Ja v.445 Pv ii.322 Mil 2 Mil 341 Snp-a 440 Dhp-a i.317 Dhp-a ii.89 Vv-a 157 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215
    Sanskrit āpaṇa, ā + paṇ
    Āpaṇika
    1. a shopkeeper, tradesman Ja i.124 Mil 344 Vv-a 157 Dhp-a ii.89
    from āpaṇa
    Āpatacchika
    1. at Ja vi.17 is Commentary reading for apatacchika in khārāpat˚; (q.v.)
    Āpatati
    1. to fall on to, to rush on to Ja v.349 (= upadhāvati Commentary ); vi.451 (= āgacchati Commentary ) Mil 371
    ā + patati
    Āpatti
    feminine
    1. an ecclesiastical offence (cp. ; Kvu translation 362 note 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ṁ paṭikaroti) 322 (˚ṁ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ṁ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ṁ paṭikaroti); iv.344 DN iii.212 (˚kusalatā) AN i.84 (identical) 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya) Dhs 1330f. (cp. Dhs translation 346). anāpatti Vin iii.35
    1. ˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti)
    Sanskrit āpatti, from ā + pad, cp. apajjati & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āpatti, e. g, Divy 330
    Āpattika
    adjective
    1. guilty of an offence MN i.443 Vin iv.224
    • an˚ Vin i.127
    āpatti + ka, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āpattika Divy 303
    Āpatha
    1. in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vb Index p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚ dvedhā˚
    Āpathaka
    1. in ˚jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka˚; at Nd1 226 and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26
    Āpadā
    feminine
    1. accident, misfortune distress, DN iii.190 AN ii.68 (locative plural āpadāsu), 187; iii.45; iv.31 Thag 1, 371 Ja iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; variant readings Text aparattā, āpadatvā, Commentary aparatthā; explained by āpadāya); v.340 (
    2. locative āpade), 368 Pv-a 130 (quot.) Sdhp 312 Sdhp 554. Note. For the contracted form in
    3. locative pl āpāsu (= *āpatsu) ‣See *āpā;
    4. Sanskrit āpad, from ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āpad, e.g. in āpadgata Jtm 31; 33
    Āpanna
    1. -1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiṁ ā.); iii.90 DN i.4 (dayāpanna merciful) Nd2 32 (taṇhāya)
    • unfortunate miserable Ja i.19 (v.124). cp. pari˚. *Apa
    • past participle of āpajjati
    *Āpā
    1. (& *Āvā) feminine

      1. misery, misfortune Ja ii.317 (locative plural āpāsu, variant reading avāsu, Commentary āpadāsu); iii.12 (
      2. Burmese manuscripts āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, variant reading apagata, C apagata parihīna), 445 (
      3. locative āvāsu, variant reading avāsu, Commentary āpadāsu) 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; variant reading apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in
      4. locative plural, the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sanskrit āpatsu
      5. for āpadā, q.v.
    Āpāṇa
    1. life, literally breathing, only in compound ˚koṭi the end of life Mil 397 Dāvs iii.93; adjective -koṭika MN ii.120 Vism 10
    ā + pāṇa
    Āpātha
    sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs translation 199), appearance AN ii.67 Ja i.336 Vb 321 Mil 298 Vism 21, 548 DN-a i.228 Dhs-a 308 333 Vv-a 232 (˚kāla) Dhp-a iv.85 Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaṁ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear MN i.190 SN iv.160 or ˚ṁ āgacchati Vin i.184 AN iii.377f.; iv.404; Vism 125. cp. ˚gata below.
    1. ˚gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible MN i.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an˚ unapproached) Pv-a 23 (āpāthaṁ gata) -gatatta abstract from last: appcarance Vism 617
    etymology? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: “I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so”
    Āpāthaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible DN iii.44 DN iii.47 cp. āpathaka
    from āpātha
    Āpādaka
    adjective-noun
    1. -1. adjective producing, leading to (—˚) Vv-a 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha-jjhāna)
    2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian AN i.62 = 132 = Iti 110 (+ posaka).
    3. feminine āpādikā a nurse, foster-mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā)
    from ā + pad
    Āpādā
    feminine
    1. a nursing woman, in an˚; not nursing, unmarried Ja iv.178
    short for āpādikā
    Āpādi
    aorist of āpajjati (q.v.)
    Āpādeti
    1. to produce, make out, bring, bring into MN i.78 MN iii.248 SN iv.110 (addhānaṁ to live one’s life, cp. addhānaṁ āpādi Ja ii.293 = jīvit’addhānaṁ āpādi āyuṁ vindi Commentary ) Snp-a 466
    • cp. pari˚
    causative of āpajjati
    Āpāna
    neuter
    1. drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting-hall, drinking-hall Ja i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (identical) Dhp-a i.213 (identical, rañño)
    from ā +
    Āpānaka
    adjective
    1. drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking DN i.167
    āpāna + ka
    Āpānīya
    adjective
    1. drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaṁsa drinking-bowl, goblet MN i.316 SN ii.110
    from āpāna, ā +
    Āpāyika
    adjective-noun
    1. one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = Iti 85 (variant reading ap˚) Vin ii.205 DN i.103 AN i.265 Iti 42 Vism 16 Pv-a 60
    from apāya
    Āpiyati
    1. to be in motion (in etymology of āpo) Vism 364
    from ; , cp. appāyati & appeti
    Āpucchati
    1. to enquire after, look for, ask, especially to ask permission or leave; aorist āpucchi Ja i.140 Pv-a 110
    2. gerundive āpucchitabba Dhp-a i.6
    3. absolutive āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā +) Mil 29 Pv-a 111
    4. āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Thag 2, 426
    5. āpuccha Thag 2, 416 & āpucchā = āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya
      1. only in negative form an˚; without asking Vin ii.211 219; iv.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā) Dhp-a i.81 past participle āpucchita Vin iv.272
      2. ā + pucchati
    Āpūrati
    1. to be filled, to become full, to increase Ja iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati Commentary ); iv.26, 99, 100
    a + pūrati
    Āpeti
    1. to cause to reach or obtain Ja vi.46 cp. vy˚
    causative of āp ‣See appoti & pāpuṇāti
    Āphusati
    1. to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aorist āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi Vv-a 84)
    2. ā + phusati
    Ābaddha
    1. tied, bound, bound up DN-a i.127 figuratively bound to, attached to, in love with Dhp-a i.88 Pv-a 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya)
    past participle of ābandhati
    Ābandhaka
    adjective
    1. (being) tied to (locative ) Pv-a 169 (sīse)
    2. ā + bandh, cp. Sanskrit ābandha tie, bond
    Ābandhati
    1. (ā + bandhati, Sanskrit ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; figuratively to tie to, to attach to, Ja iv.132 Ja iv.289 Ja v.319 Ja v.338 Ja v.359 past participle ābaddha.

    Ābandhana
    neuter
    1. -1. tie, bond DN-a i.181 = Pug AN 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo). 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) Ja v.319 (but cp. C explanation “hatthi-assa-rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni” thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i.e. wares, loads etc.) With this cp. Sanskrit ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough
    from ā + bandh
    Ābādha
    1. affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261 DN i.72 DN ii.13 AN i.121 AN iii.94 AN iii.143 AN iv.333 AN iv.415f. 440 Dhp 138 Pug 28 Vism 41 (udara-vāta˚) 95 Vv-a 351 (an˚ safe & sound) Snp-a 476 Sdhp 85
    • A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu-pariṇāmajā visama-parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304i.c., recurring with slight variations at SN iv.230 AN ii.87 AN iii.131 AN v.110 Nd1 17 47 Mil 112 cp. 135). Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351
    • Five ābādhas at Vin i.71 viz. kuṭṭhaṁ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93
    • Three ābādhas at DN iii.75 viz. icchā anasanaṁ jarā, cp. Snp 311
    • ‣ See also compound appābādha (health) under appa
    ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression
    Ābādhika
    adjective-noun
    1. affected with illness, a sick person AN iii.189 AN iii.238 Nd1 160 Mil 302 DN-a 212 Dhp-a i.31 Pv-a 271 feminine ābādhikinī a sick woman AN ii.144
    2. from ābādha
    Ābādhita
    1. afflicted, oppressed, molested Thag 1, 185
    past participle of ābādheti, causative of ā + bādh
    Ābādheti
    1. to oppress, vex, annoy, harass SN iv.329
    ā + causative of bādh, cp. ābādha
    Ābila
    adjective
    1. turbid, disturbed, soiled Ja v.90
    Sanskrit āvila ‣See also Pali āvila
    Ābhata
    1. brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken DN i.142 SN i.65 AN ii.71 83 Iti 12 14 with phrase yathābhataṁ as he has been reared (cp. Ja v.330 evaṁ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ rattiyaṁ ā. Pv-a 199) Dhp-a ii.57 81; iv.89 Vv-a 65 cp. yathābhata
    past participle of ā + bharati from bhṛ
    Ābhataka
    adjective = ābhata DN-a i.205 (variant reading ābhata).
    Ābharaṇa
    neuter
    1. that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets DN i.104 Vv 802 Ja iii.11 Ja iii.31 Dhp-a iii.83 Vv-a 187
    Sanskrit ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ
    Ābharati
    1. to bring, to carry; absolutive ābhatvā Ja iv.351
    2. ā + bhṛ
    Ābhassara
    adjective-noun
    1. shining, brilliant, radiant, name of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens “the radiant gods”, usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā) thus at DN i.17 Dhp 200 Iti 15 Dhp-a iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq
    etymology uncertain; one suggested in Compendium 138 note 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i.e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combination of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i.e. shining in splendour
    Ābhā
    feminine
    1. shine, splendour, lustre, light DN ii.12 MN iii.147 (adjective
    • ˚) SN ii.150 (˚dhātu) AN ii.130 AN ii.139 AN iii.34 Mhvs xi.11 Vv-a 234 (of a Vimāna variant reading pabhā) Dhp-a iv.191 Sdhp 286
    Sanskrit ābhā, from ā + bhā ‣See ābhāti
    Ābhāti
    1. to shine, shine forth, radiate Dhp 387 (= virocati Dhp-a iv.144) Ja v.204 ‣See also ābheti
    ā + bhā
    Ābhāveti
    1. to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (mettacittaṁ; gloss & variant reading abhāvetvā; explained as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā Pv-a 168)
    ā + bhāveti
    Ābhāsa
    1. splendour, light, appearance MN iii.215
    Sanskrit ābhāsa, from ā + bhās
    Ābhicetasika
    adjective ‣See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.
    Ābhidosika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale) MN i.170 (˚kālakata died last night) Mil 291
    abhidosa + ika
    Ābhidhammika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Mil 17 Mil 341 Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKhA 151 Ja iv.219
    abhidhamma + ika
    Ābhindati
    1. to split, cut, strike (with an axe) SN iv.160 (variant reading a˚)
    ā + bhindati
    Ābhisekika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin v.129
    from abhiseka
    Ābhujati
    1. to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallaṅkaṁ ā˚; “to bend in the round lap” or “bend in hookwise”, to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e.g. at Vin i.24 DN i.71 MN i.56 (variant reading ābhuñjitvā), 219 AN iii.320 Pug 68 Ps i.176 Ja i.71 Ja i.213 Mil 289 DN-a i.58 210. In other connection Ja i.18 (v.101; of the ocean “to recede”) Mil 253 (kāyaṁ)
    ā + bhujati, bhuj1
    Ābhujana
    neuter
    1. crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallank’ābhujana sitting cross-legged Ja i.17 (v.91) Pv-a 219
    from ābhujati
    Ābhujī
    feminine
    1. name of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr Ja v.195 (bhūjapatta-vana Commentary ), 405 (= bhūjapatta Commentary )
    literally the one that bends, probably a poetic metaphor
    Ābhūñjati
    1. to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience Ja iv.456 (bhoge; Rhys Davids “hold in its hood"?) Dhs-a 333
    ā + bhuj2, Sanskrit bhunakti
    Ābhuñjana
    neuter
    1. partaking of, enjoying, experiencing Dhs-a 333
    from ābhuñjati
    Ābheti
    1. to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī) Vv 82 (˚antī, variant reading ˚entī; = obhāsentī Vv-a 50)
    *ābhayati = ābhāti, q.v.
    Ābhoga
    1. ideation idea, thought DN i.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DN-a i.122 cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food) Vb 320 Mil 97 Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; Kp-a 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (identical) 68
    from ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu translation 221 note 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara “pasturing”, figuratively perception etc.
    Āma1
    indeclinable
    1. affirmative participle “yes, indeed, certainly” DN i.192f. (as Burmese variant ; Text has āmo) Ja i.115 226 (in Commentary explanation of Text amā-jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448 Mil 11 Mil 19 Mil 253 Dhp-a i.10 34 ii.39, 44 Vv-a 69 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 93 etc
    a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q.v.) or a gradation of pronoun base amu˚ “that ‣See asu, thus deictic-emphatic exclamn. cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āma e.g. Avs i.36
    Āma2
    1. adjective [Vedic āma = Latin amārus. The more common Pali form is āmaka (q.v.) raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Snp 443 (b) uncooked (of flesh), neuter raw flesh, only in following compounds.: ˚gandha “smell of raw flesh”, verminous odour a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp similarly Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āmagandha Mvu iii.214) DN ii.242f. AN i.280 Snp 241 Snp 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha Snp-a 286), 248, 251 Dhs 625 and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) Ja vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa Commentary )
    Āmaka
    adjective
    1. raw, uncooked DN i.5 = Pug 58 (˚maṁsa raw flesh) MN i.80 (titta-kalābu āmaka-cchinno)
    1. ˚dhañña “raw” grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state DN i.5 = Pug 58 ‣See DN-a i.78 for definition Vin iv.264 Vin v.135
    • ˚sāka raw vegetables Vism 70
    • ˚susāna “cemetery of raw flesh” charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i.e. fetid smelling cremation ground Ja i.264 Ja i.489 iv.45 sq.; vi.10 Dhp-a i.176 Vv-a 76 Pv-a 196
    = āma2
    Āmaṭṭha
    1. touched, handled Ja i.98 (an˚) DN-a i.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333
    Sanskrit āmṛṣṭa, past participle of āmasati; cp. āmasita
    Āmaṇḍaliya
    1. a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ṁ karoti to form a ring (of people or a circle, to stand closely together MN i.225 (cp. Sanskrit āmaṇḍalikaroti)
    ā + maṇḍala + iya
    Āmata
    1. in anāmata at Ja ii.56 is métric for amata
    Āmattikā
    feminine
    1. earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler’s shop Vin iv.243
    ā + mattikā
    Āmaddana
    neuter
    1. crushing Vv-a 311
    ā + maddana of mṛd
    Āmanta

    (adjective adverb )

    1. asking or asked, invited only as an˚; without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra) AN iii.259 (identical)
    either
  • absolutive of āmanteti (q.v.) or root derived from ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā
  • Āmantana
    neuter & ˚nā (
    • feminine, also ˚ṇā

      1. addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Snp 40 (ep. Nd2 128) ˚vacana the address-form of speech i.e. the vocative case (cp. Sanskrit āmantritaṁ identical) Snp-a 435 Kp-a 167
      from āmanteti
    Āmantanaka
    adjective-noun
    1. addressing, speaking to, conversing; feminine ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa-sallāpa-yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i.e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā Vv-a 96)
    2. from āmantana
    Āmantaṇīya
    adjective
    1. to be addressed Ja iv.371
    gerundive of āmanteti
    Āmantita
    1. addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 (= nimantita Pv-a 86)
    past participle of āmanteti
    Āmanteti
    1. to call, address, speak to, invite, consult Ja vi.265 DN-a i.297 Snp-a 487 (ālapati & avhayati) Pv-a 75 Pv-a 80 Pv-a 127. aorist āmantesi DN ii.16 Snp p. 78 (= ālapi Snp-a 394) & in poetry; āmantayi Snp 997 Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with variant reading SS samantayi).
    2. absolutive āmanta (= Sanskrit *āmantrya) Ja iii.209 315 (= āmantayitvā Commentary ), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511.
    3. past participle āmantita (q.v.)
    4. causative II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for DN i.134 (variant reading āmanteti) Mil 149
    5. denominative of ā + *mantra
    Āmaya
    1. affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚; adjective not afflicted, not decaying, healthy well (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294 Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74); 177; 368 Ja iii.260 Ja iii.528 Ja iv.427 vi.23. Positive only very late, e.g. Sdhp 397
    2. etymology? cp. Sanskrit āmaya
    Āmalaka
    1. emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201 278; ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu) SN i.150 AN v.170 Snp p. 125 (˚matti) Ja iv.363 Ja v.380 (as variant reading for Text āmala) Mil 11 Dhp-a i.319 Vv-a 7
    cp. Sanskrit āmalaka
    Āmalakī
    feminine āmalaka Vin i.30 MN i.456 (˚vana).
    Āmasati
    1. to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221 Vin iii.48 (kumbhiṁ) Ja iii.319 (identical) AN v.263 AN v.266 Ja iv.67 Ps ii.209 Mil 306 Snp-a 400 Dhs-a 302 Vv-a 17 aorist āmasi Ja ii.360
    2. absolutive āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaṁ) Ja ii.330
    3. gerundive āmassa Ja ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba identical (Commentary ).
    4. past participle āmaṭṭha & āmasita; (q.v.)
    5. ā + masati from mṛś
    Āmasana
    neuter
    1. touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214 cp. iii.118 Mil 127 Mil 306 DN-a i.78
    from āmasati
    Āmasita
    1. touched, taken hold of, occupied Vv-a 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land)
    past participle of āmasati
    Āmāya
    adjective
    1. “born in the house”, inborn, being by birth, in compound ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth Ja vi.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiṁ jātadasī Commentary ), 285 (dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā)
    to be considered either a derived from amā ‣See amājāta in same meaning or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚
    Āmāsaya
    1. receptacle of undigested food, i.e. the stomach Vism 260 Kp-a 59. O past participle pakkāsaya
    2. āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sanskrit āmāśaya & āmāśraya
    Āmilāka
    neuter?
    1. a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DN-a i.87
    etymology?
    Āmisa

    neuter

    1. ; 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of “raw unprepared, uncultivated”; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i.206
    • “fleshy, of the flesh” (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma ‣See dhamma B 1. a. and also next no. thus at MN i.12 (˚dāyāda) Iti 101 (identical) AN i.91 = Iti 98 (˚dāna material gifts opposed to spiritual ones) Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs translation 350)

  • food, especially palatable food (cp. English sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269f. Ja ii.6 Mil 413 (lok˚) DN-a i.83 (˚sannidhi),

    • bait SN i.67 SN iv.158 Ja iv.57 Ja iv.219 Ja vi.416 DN-a i.270

  • gain reward, money, douceur, gratuity, “tip” Pv-a 36 Pv-a 46; esp in phrase ˚kiñcikkha-hetu for the sake of some (little gain SN ii.234 AN i.128 AN v.265 AN v.283f. 293 sq. Pug 29 Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaṁ patthento Pv-a 107) Mil 93 Vv-a 241 (= bhogahetu).

    • enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise-laggacitto Pv-a 107)

  • greed, desire lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opposite mettacitto) AN iii.144 (identical), 184 (identical); i.73 (˚garū parisā) Ja v.91 (˚cakkhu); Ps ii.238 (mār˚) ‣See also compounds. with nir˚ and sa˚.

    derived from āma raw, q.v. for etymology Vedic āmis
  • masculine ; later Sanskrit āmiṣa
  • neuter, both in literally & figuratively meaning
  • Āmuñcati
    1. to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to Dhs-a 305 past participle āmutta (q.v.)
    2. ā + mtic
    Āmutta
    1. having put on, clothed in, dressed with adorned with (always ˚-) DN i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa) Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi-kuṇḍala) SN i.211 Ja iv.460 Ja v.155 Ja vi.492 Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala); J iv.183 Vv-a 182
    Sanskrit āmukta, past participle of ā + muc, cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āmukta jewel Divy 2 Divy 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e.g. at Pv-a 134 Semantically cp. ābharaṇa
    Āmeṇḍita
    (or Āmeḍita
    1. - neuter sympathy in ˚ṁ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 106) DN-a i.228 Snp-a 155 (variant reading at DN-a āmeḍita)
    2. Sanskrit āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical
    Āmo
    1. = āma DN i.192 DN i.3
    Āmoda
    1. that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51
    Sanskrit āmoda, from ā + mud
    Āmodanā
    feminine
    1. rejoicing Dhs 86 285
    from ā + mud
    Āmodamāna
    adjective
    1. rejoicing, glad SN i.100 (variant reading anu˚) = Iti 66 Vv 648 (= pamodamāna Vv-a 278) Ja v.45
    ppr. medium of āmodeti
    Āmodita
    1. pleased, satisfied, glad Ja i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased) Mil 346
    past participle from āmodeti
    Āmodeti
    1. to please, gladden, satisfy Thag 1, 649 (cittaṁ) Ja v.34 past participle āmodita (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit āmodayati, causative of ā + mud
    Āya
    1. coming in, entrance MN iii.93 - 2. tax Ja v.113
    2. income, earning, profit, gain (opp vaya loss) AN iv.282 = 323 Snp 978 Ja i.228 Kp-a 38 (in explanation of kāya), 82 (in etymology of āyatana) Pv-a 130 Pv-a 4. (āyā
    3. feminine ?) a lucky dice (“the incomer”) Ja vi.281
      1. ˚kammika a treasurer Dhp-a i.184
      • ˚kusala clever in earnings Nett 20
      • ˚kosalla proficiency in money making DN iii.220 (one of the three kosallas) Vb 325
      • ˚pariccāga expediture of one’s income Pv-a 8
      • ˚mukha (literally entrance, inflow, going in DN i.74 (= āgamana-magga DN-a 1.78) MN ii.15 AN ii.166 (figuratively) revenue income, money Snp-a 173
      Sanskrit āya; ā + i
    Āyata
    1. -1. adjective outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) DN iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?) MN i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata) Ja i.77 Ja i.273 (tettiṁs’-angul’āyato khaggo); iii.438 Vv 8415 (˚aṁsa; cp. explanation at Vv-a 339) Snp-a 447 Dhs-a 48 Pv-a 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair) 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257
    2. (n.) a bow Ja iii.438
      1. ˚agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i.e. in the future ‣See āyati Iti 15 52
      2. ˚paṇhin having long eye-lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17 iii.143
      3. ˚pamha a long eye-lash Thag 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma Thag-a 250)
      4. Sanskrit āyata, past participle of ā + yam, cp. āyamati
    Āyataka
    adjective
    1. -1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara) AN iii.251 (identical) Ja i.362
    • sudden, abrupt, instrumental ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237
    • = āyata
    Āyatana

    neuter

    1. -1. stretch, extent, reach, com passive region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Buddhaghosa’s definition at DN-a i.124 as “samosaraṇa”) DN iii.241 DN iii.279 (vimutti˚) SN ii.41 SN ii.269 SN iv.217 SN v.119 sq., 318. sq. AN iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚ q.v.) Snp 406 (rajass˚ “haunt of passion” = rāgādi-rajassa uppatti-deso Snp-a 381) Ja i.80 (raj˚). Frequently in phrase araññ˚; a lonely spot, a spot in the forest Ja i.173 Vv-a 301 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 54
    2. exertion, doing, working, practice performance (comprising Buddhaghosa’s definition at DN-a i.124 as paññatti), usually—˚, viz. kamm˚ Nd1 505 Vb 324 353; kasiṇ˚ AN v.46f. 60; Ps i.28; titth˚ AN i.173 175 Vb 145 367; sipp˚; (art, craft) DN i.51 Nd2 505 Vb 324 353; cp. an˚; non-exertion, indolence, sluggishness Ja v.121
    3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense-organ & object; relation order

      • Compendium p. 183 says rightly: “āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense-organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects"
      • These āyatanāni (relations, functions reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the following: (a) ajjhatt˚; : 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind (b) bāh˚; : 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3 gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object
      • For details as regards connotation & application ‣See; i → Dhs translation introduction li sq. Compendium 90 note 2; 254 sq
      • Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Buddhaghosa’s definition of āyatana at DN-a i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause i.e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations) ‣See also Nd; 2 under rūpa for further classifications-For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni ‣See the following passages: DN ii.302f.; iii.102, 243 AN iii.400 v.52 Snp 373 (cp. Snp-a 366); Ps i.7, 22, 101, 137; ii.181, 225, 230 Dhs 1335 Vb 401f.; Nett 57, 82 Vism 481 Thag-a 49 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at SN i.113 SN ii.3; iv.100, 174 sq. Iti 114 Vb 135f. 294 Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at DN ii.112 DN ii.156 of 2 at DN ii.69
      • Here also belongs ākās’ānañc’āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc ‣See under ākāsa etc. and s.v., e.g. at DN i.34f. 183 AN iv.451f. Vb 172 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq
      • Unclassified passages: MN i.61 MN ii.233 MN iii.32 MN iii.216 MN iii.273 SN i.196 SN ii.6 SN ii.8 SN ii.24 SN ii.72 sq.; iii.228; iv.98; v.426 AN i.113 AN i.163 AN i.225 iii.17, 27, 82, 426; iv.146, 426; v.30, 321, 351, 359 Nd1 109 133, 171, 340 Ja i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚) Vb 412f. (identical)
      1. ˚uppāda birth of the āyatanas ‣See above 3 Vin i.185
      • ˚kusala skilled in the ā. MN iii.63
      • ˚kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) DN iii.212 Dhs 1335
      • ˚ṭṭha founded in the sense-organs Ps i.132; ii.121
      Sanskrit āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but frequently in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The plural is āyatanā at SN iv.70

      • For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators ‣See Buddhaghosa’s explanation at DN-a i.124 125, with which cp. the popular etymology at Kp-a 82 “āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saṁsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni” and at Vism 527 “āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā.”
    Āyatanika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the sphere of (some special sense ‣See āyatana 3) SN iv.126 (phass niraya & sagga)
    from āyatana
    Āyati
    feminine
    1. “stretching forth”, extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in accusative āyatiṁ (
    2. adverb ) in
    3. future Vin ii.89 185; iii.3 Snp 49 Iti 115 (Text reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where Text āyatiṁ, variant reading āyati) Ja i.89 Ja v.431 DN-a i.236
    4. from ā + yam, cp. Sanskrit āyati
    Āyatika
    adjective
    1. future SN i.142
    from last
    Āyatikā
    feminine
    1. a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123
    of āyataka
    Āyatta
    1. -1. striving, active, ready, exerted Ja v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana Commentary ). 2. striven after, pursued Ja i.341
    • dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa-passāsa˚); Nett 194; Sdhp 477 Sdhp 605
    • Sanskrit āyatta, past participle of ā + yat
    Āyanā
    feminine
    1. at Dhs-a 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian’s construction, abstracted from feminine abstract words ending in ˚āyanā, e.g. kankhā → kankhāyanā, of which the correct explanation is a derivation from
    2. causative

      • formation kankhāyati → kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Buddhaghosa was in propounding his explanation is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna
      ?
    Āyamati
    1. to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Mil 176 usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaṁ āyamissāmi “my back feels weak, I will stretch it” Vin ii.200 DN iii.209 MN i.354 SN iv.184 Ja i.491 Besides this in commentaries e.g. Ja iii.489 (mukhaṁ āyamituṁ)
    ā + yam
    Āyasa
    adjective
    1. made of iron SN ii.182 AN iii.58 Dhp 345 Ja iv.416 Ja v.81 Vv 845 (an˚ cp. the rather strange explanation at Vv-a 335)
    Sanskrit āyasa, of ayas iron
    Āyasakya
    neuter dishonour, disgrace, bad repute AN iv.96 Ja v.17 Vv-a 110 usually in phrase ˚ṁ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Thag 1, 292 Ja ii.33 = 271; iii.514. Buddhaghosa on AN iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya
    Āyasmant
    adjective
    1. literally old, i.e. venerable; used, either as adjective or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera. It occurs usually in nominative āyasmā and is explained in Nd by typical formula “piya-vacanaṁ garu˚, sagārava-sappaṭissâdhivacanaṁ”, e.g. Nd1 140 445 Nd2 130 on various Snp loci (e.g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096)
    • frequently in all texts, of later passages ‣See Snp-a 158 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 63 78
    • ‣ See also āvuso
    Sanskrit āyuṣmant, the Pali form showing assimilation of u to a
    Āyāga
    1. sacrificial fee, gift; masculine recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Snp 486 (= deyyadhammānaṁ adhiṭṭhāna-bhūta Snp-a 412) Thag 1, 566 Ja vi.205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees)
    2. ā + yāga of yaj
    Āyācaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who begs or prays, petitioner Mil 129
    from ā + yāc
    Āyācati
    1. -1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (accusative ) Vin iii.127 DN i.240 Pv-a 160
    2. to make a vow, to vow, promise AN i.88 Ja i.169 = v.472; i.260; ii.117.
    3. past participle āyācita (q.v.)
    ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sanskrit āyācate Divy 1.
    Āyācana
    neuter
    1. -1. asking, adhortation, addressing (technical term in grammar in explanation of imperative ) Snp-a 43 176 412
    2. a vow, prayer AN i.88 AN iii.47 Ja i.169 = v.472
    from āyācati
    Āyācita
    1. vowed, promised Ja i.169 (˚bhattajātaka name)
    past participle of āyācati
    Āyāta
    1. gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407
    past participle of āyāt.; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210
    Āyāti
    1. to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into SN i.240 Snp 669 Snp p. 116 (= gacchati Snp-a 463) Ja iv.410 Pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati Pv-a 158) Dhp-a i.93 (imperative āyāma let us go).
    2. past participle āyāta
    3. ā + yāti of
    Āyāna
    neuter
    1. coming, arrival ‣See āyanā;
    from ā + to go
    Āyāma
    1. -1. (literally) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = Ja iii.488 (mukh˚). 2. (ap plural ) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combined with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as
    2. noun (especially in ablative āyāmato instrumental āyāmena in length) or as adjective (—˚): Ja i.7 Ja i.49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389 Mil 17 (ratanaṁ soḷasahatthaṁ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaṁ vitthārena) 282 (ratanaṁ catuhatth’āyāmaṁ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚) Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa) Vv-a 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚) Pv-a 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (identical + ubbedha) Dhp-a i.17 (saṭṭhi-yojan˚)
    3. from ā + yam ‣See āyamati
    Āyāsa
    1. trouble, sorrow, only negative an˚; adjective peaceful, free from trouble AN iv.98 Thag 1, 1008
    2. cp. Sanskrit āyāsa, etymology?
    Āyu
    neuter
    1. life, vitality, duration of life, longevity DN iii.68 DN iii.69 DN iii.73 DN iii.77 SN iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294 AN i.155 AN ii.63 AN ii.66 (addh˚); iii.47 iv.76, 139 Snp 694 Snp 1019 Iti 89 Ja i.197 (dīgh˚) Vv 555 (cp. Vv-a 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man’s āyu = 100 years) Dhs 19 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234 Sdhp 239 Sdhp 258
    • Long or divine life, dibbaṁ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty ‣See ṭhāna thus at Vin i.294 DN iii.146 SN iv.275f. AN i.115 AN iii.33 AN iv.242 AN iv.396 Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaṁ Pv-a 136)
    1. ˚ūhā ‣See āyūhā
    2. ˚kappa duration of life Mil 141 Dhp-a i.250
    • ˚khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita-kkhaya) DN i.17 (cp. DN-a i.110); iii.29
    • ˚pamāṇa span or measure of life time DN ii.3 AN i.213 AN i.267 AN ii.126f.; iv.138 252 sq., 261; v.172 Pug 16 Vb 422f. Snp-a 476
    • ˚pariyanta end of life Iti 99 Vism 422
    • ˚saṅkhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dīpavaṁsa v.102
    • ˚saṅkhāra (usually
    • plural ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle DN ii.106 MN i.295f. SN ii.266 AN iv.311f. Ud 64 Ja iv.215 Mil 285 Vism 292 Dhp-a i.129 Pv-a 210 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āyuḥ-saṁskāra Divy 203
    Vedic āyus; Avestan āyu, gradation form of same root as Latin aevum, Goth aiws. Old High German ēwa, io always; German ewig eternal; Anglo-Saxon āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)
    Āyuka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. -being of life; having a life or age AN iv.396 (niyat˚) Vv-a 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). especially freq in combination with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka AN iv.240 Pv-a 27 appāyuka AN iv.247 Pv-a 103 both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years DN ii.5–⁠12 ‣See Table at Dialogues of the Buddha ii.6 Dhp-a ii.9 Pv-a 135 dasa-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) Pv-a 73 cattāḷīsa˚ Dhp-a i.103 catusaṭṭhi-kapp’āyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422
      from āyu
    Āyukin
    adjective
    1. = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416
    from āyu
    Āyuta
    adjective
    1. -1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Thag 1, 753 (dve pannaras’āyuta due to twice fifteen) Snp 301 (nārī-varagaṇ˚ = ˚saṁyutta Snp-a 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā-saragaṇ˚ ˚yutta Pv-a 157)
    • seized, conquered, in dur˚; hard to conquer, invincible Ja vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada Commentary )
    • Sanskrit ayuta, past participle of ā + yu, yuvati
    Āyutta
    1. -1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejas’āyuta Text, but Pv-a 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta) Pv-a 157 (ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124)
    • intent upon, devoted to SN i.67
    • Sanskrit āyukta; past participle of ā + yuj
    Āyuttaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer Ja i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492 Dhp-a i.101 103, 180
    āyutta + ka
    Āyudha
    1. is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at DN i.9 (variant reading āvudha)
    Āyuvant
    adjective
    1. advanced in years, old, of age Thag 1, 234
    from āyu
    Āyusmant
    adjective
    1. having life or vitality Pv-a 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?)
    Sanskrit āyuṣmant ‣See also the regular Pali form āyasmant
    Āyussa
    adjective
    1. connected with life, bringing (long) life AN iii.145 dhamma)
    Sanskrit *āyuṣya
    Āyūhaka
    adjective
    1. keen, eager, active Mil 207 (+ viriyavā)
    from āyūhati
    Āyūhati

    literally to push on or forward aim at, go for, i.e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself SN i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaṁ unstriving), 48 Ja vi.35 (viriyaṁ karoti Commentary ), 283 (= vāyamati Commentary ).

  • to be keen on (w.

    • accusative ), to cultivate, pursue, do Snp 210 (karoti Snp-a 258) Mil 108 (kammaṁ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaṁ āyūhi), 326 (maggaṁ).
    • past participle āyūhita (q.v.)
    ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, from Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah ‣See etymology under vahati. Kern’s etymology on Toevoegselen 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris’ explanation at Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 58 sq. although contradictory in participle
  • Āyūhana
    adjective neuter
    1. -1. endeavouring, striving, Ps i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579 feminine āyūhanī Dhs 1059 (“she who toils” translation) = Vb 361 Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā)
    2. furtherance, pursuit DN-a i.64 (bhavassa)
    from āyūhati
    Āyūhā
    feminine
    1. life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life Pv-a 136 Pv-a 162 Vv-a 319
    āyu + ūhā
    Āyūhāpeti
    1. to cause somebody to toil or strive after Dhs-a 364
    causative II. from āyūhati
    Āyūhita
    1. busy, eager, active Mil 181
    * Sanskrit ā + ūhita, past participle of ūh
    Āyoga
    1. -1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135 Vv 3341 Vv-a 142 (˚paṭṭa)
    • yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162

  • ornament, decoration Nd1 226 Ja iii.447 (˚vatta, for variant reading ˚vanta?).

    • occupation devotion to, pursuit, exertion DN i.187 Dhp 185 (= payoga-karaṇa Dhp-a iii.238)

  • (technical term) obligation guarantee(?) Snp-a 179

    • cp. sam˚
    Sanskrit āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta
  • Ārakatta
    neuter
    1. warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. genitive); occurring only in popular etymology of arahant at AN iv.145 Dhp-a iv.228 DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105 106 = Pv-a 7 cp. Dhs-a 349
    *ārakāt + tvaṁ
    Ārakā
    adverb

    far off, far from, away from, also used as preposition c ablative and as adjective plural keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = AN iv.202 (sanghamhā) DN i.99 DN i.102 (adjective 167 MN i.280

  • adjective SN ii.99 SN iv.43f. AN i.281 Iti 91 Ja i.272 Ja iii.525 Ja v.451 Mil 243 Vv-a 72 73 (adj + viratā)
  • Sanskrit ārāt & ārakāt, ablative formation from *āraka ‣See ārā; 2
    Ārakkha
    1. watch, guard, protection, care DN ii.59 DN iii.289 SN iv.97 SN iv.175 SN iv.195 AN ii.120 AN iii.38 AN iv.266 AN iv.270 AN iv.281 (˚sampadā), 322 (identical), 400; v.29 sq. Ja i.203 Ja ii.326 Ja iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i.e. harem) 374 (˚parivāra) Pug 21 (an˚), 24 Mil 154 Vism 19 (˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness) Snp-a 476 (˚devatā); Kp-a 120 (identical), 169 Dhp-a ii.146 Pv-a 195 Sdhp 357 Sdhp 365
    ā + rakkha
    Ārakkhika
    1. a guard, watchman Ja iv.29
    from ārakkha
    Ārakkheyya
    1. ‣See arakkheyya
    Āragga
    neuter
    1. the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind ‣See Halayudha p. 151 AN i.65 Snp 625 Snp 631 Dhp 401 Dhp 407; Vism 306 Dhp-a ii.51 Dhp-a iv.181
    ārā + agga; Sanskrit ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick
    Āracayāracayā
    1. by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Snp 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā from ā + *rañj or *raj
    • Snp-a 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i.e. yathā manussā allacammaṁ bhūmiyaṁ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaṁ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaṁ koṭiṁ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (Burmese variant āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho
    • cp. ārañjita
    ā + racayā a absolutive or ablative formation from ā + *rac, in usual Sanskrit meaning “to produce”, but here as a sound-root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic
    Āraññaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Frequently spelt araññaka (q.v.)
    • Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.) 265 (bh.) MN i.214 AN iii.100f. 219; iv.21; v.66 Ja iii.174 (Burmese variant a˚) Mil 342 Dhp-a ii.94 (vihāra)
    from arañña + ka
    Āraññakatta
    neuter
    1. the habit of sequestration or living in solitude MN i.214 MN iii.40 AN i.38
    abstract from āraññaka ‣See also araññakatta
    Āraññika
    adjective = āraññaka Vin iii.15 AN i.24 Pug 69 Vism 61, 71 (where defined) Mil 341
    Ārañjita
    1. furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed torn (perhaps also “beaten”) MN i.178 (hatthipadaṁ dantehi ārañjitaṁ an elephant-track bearing the marks of tusks, i.e. occasional slashes or furrows)
    in form = Sanskrit *ārañjita, ā + past participle of rañjayati, causative of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac ‣See āracayā˚ mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q.v.
    Ārata
    1. leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining Ja iv.372 (= virata) Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata)
    Sanskrit ārata, past participle of ā + ram, cp. ārati
    Ārati
    feminine
    1. leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati Vv-a 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combination with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e.g. at Nd2 462 Dhs 299
    Sanskrit ārati, ā + ram
    Āratta
    neuter?
    1. time, period (originally affected, tinted with), only in compound vassāratta the rainy season, lent Ja iv.444 Dāvs ii.74
    Sanskrit cp. ārakta, past participle of ā + raj
    Āraddha
    adjective
    1. begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm AN i.148 (āraddhaṁ me viriyaṁ Iti 30 Pv-a 73 (ṭhapetuṁ began to place) 212 (gantuṁ). cp. ārādhaka 1
    1. ˚citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled DN i.176 MN i.414 SN ii.21 Snp p. 102 Snp-a 436 cp. ārādheti.1 -viriya adjective strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182 DN iii.252 DN iii.268 DN iii.282 DN iii.285 AN i.24 Snp 68 Snp 344 Iti 71 (opposite hīna-viriya) Nd2 131; Ps i.171 Thag-a 95 cp. viriyārambha;
    2. feminine abstract ˚viriyatā MN i.19
    3. past participle of ā + rabh
    Ārabbha
    indeclinable
    1. -1. beginning undertaking etc., in compound ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort concern, duty, obligation DN iii.256 = AN iv.334 (eight such occasions enumerated)
    • (preposition with
    • accusative ) literally beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to concerning, with reference to, about DN i.180 AN ii.27 Iti 103 (senāsanaṁ ā.) Snp 972 (upekhaṁ; variant reading ārambha Commentary uppādetvā) Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.) Dhp-a i.3 Dhp-a ii.37 Pv-a 3 (seṭṭhiputta-petaṁ ā.), 16, and passim
    • absolutive of ārabhati2 in absolute function; cp. Sanskrit ārabhya meaning since, from
    Ārabhati1
    1. to kill, destroy MN i.371 (pāṇaṁ)
    not with Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 202 from rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toevoegselen s. v identical with Sanskrit ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha
    Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati;
    1. to begin, start, undertake, attempt SN i.156 (ārabbhatha “bestir yourselves”) = Mil 245 Thag 1, 256 (bh.) Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaṁ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) AN iv.334 aorist ārabhi Dhp-a ii.38 & ārabbhi Pv-a 35

      • ger ārabbha ‣See sep.
      • past participle āraddha (q.v.)
      ā + rabhati, Sanskrit ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + ; rabh
    Ārambha
    1. -1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs translation 15 & Kindred Sayings p. 318 giving Commentary defined as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i.e. 1. undertaking duty, 2. object) SN i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu) iii.338 (identical), 166 (˚ja; Text arabbhaja, variant reading ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64 Mil 244 Net 41 Dhs-a 145
    • ˚viriyārambha (cp. āraddha-viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197 SN iv.175 AN i.12 AN i.16
    • support, ground object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an˚; unsupported, independent Snp 743 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507). cp. also nirambha upārambha, sārambha
    • Sanskrit ārambha in meaning “beginning”, from ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati
    Ārammaṇa
    neuter

    primary meaning “foundation”, from this applied in the following senses: (1 support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i.e. basis of operation, chance Snp 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132) Pv i.41 (yaṁ kiñc’ārammaṇaṁ katvā) ārammaṇaṁ labhati (+ otāraṁ labhati) to get the chance SN ii.268 SN iv.185

  • condition, ground, cause, means especially a cause of desire or clinging to life, plural ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Snp 474 (= paccayā Snp-a 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); Kp-a 23 Dhp-a i.288 (sappāy˚) Pv-a 279
  • a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i.e. sense-object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of “relation” it is closely connected with āyatana ‣See āyatana3, so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Compendium 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda-& sukhuma-rūpa, paññatti nibbāna ‣See on term especially; Compendium 3, 14; Dhs translation xli. & 209

    • A 1. sq.; iv.385 Snp 506 Ps i.57 sq. 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143 Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim Vb 12 79, 92 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in various sets with reference to various objects) 533 Dhs-a 48 127 Vv-a 11 38
    • rūpārammaṇa lit dependence on form, i.e. object of sight, visible form especially striking appearance, visibility, sight DN iii.228 SN iii.53 AN i.82 Ja i.304 Ja ii.439 Ja ii.442 Pv-a 265 ārammaṇaṁ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one’s concern (cp. Pv i.41 above 1)-ārammaṇa-kusala clever in the objects (of meditation SN iii.266 ā˚-paccayatā relation of presentation (i.e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80.
    • (—˚)
    • adjective being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon Pv-a 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚) Vv-a 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha)
    cp. Sanskrit ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh ‣See rabhati
  • Āraha
    1. adjective metri causa for araha deserving Ja vi.164
    Āraha
    1. neuter only in plural gihīnaṁ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, DN iii.163

    Ārā1
    feminine
    1. an awl ‣See cp. āragga. Perhaps a derivative of ārā is āḷakā (q.v.)
    Sanskrit ārâ; *ēl “pointed”, as in Old High German āla = German ahle, Anglo-Saxon āēl = English awl; Old Icelandic alr
    Ārā2
    indeclinable
    1. far from, remote (from) (adverb as well as preposition with ablative) Snp 156 (pamādamhā), 736 Dhp 253 (āsavakkhayā Dhp-a iii.377 explains by dūragata) Ja ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita Commentary ) v.78 (saṁyame; = dūrato Commentary ) ‣See also ārakā.

      -cāra in this combination by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. unecessarily explained as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā

      1. a life remote (from evil) AN iv.389
      • ˚cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life DN i.4 MN i.179 MN iii.33 AN iii.216 AN iii.348 AN iv.249 AN v.138 AN v.205 DN-a i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra-cārin)
      Vedic ārād, ablative as adverb ; originally a root derived from *ara remoteness, as in Sanskrit araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q.v. under araṇa; 1 and arañña
    Ārādhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh
      1. successful accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails) MN i.491 MN ii.197 = AN i.69 Mil 243 SN v.19 AN v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya)
      • pleasing, propitiating Mil 227 Vv-a 220 (˚ikā
      • feminine )
    from ā + rādh
    Ārādhana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine (either from ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment DN ii.287 (opposite virādhanā failure) MN i.479 ii.199 AN v.211f. Ja iv.427

    Ārādhanīya
    adjective
    1. to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚) Ja ii.233 (dur˚)
    gerundive from ārādheti
    Ārādhita
    1. pleased Sdhp 510
    past participle of ārādheti; Sanskrit ārādhita, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ārāgita, e.g. Divy 131 Divy 233
    Ārādheti
    1. -1. to please, win favour propitiate, convince Ja i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti Text); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana-vāsena mānasaṁ) Dhp-a ii.71 Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaṁ) Mil 352 In older literature only in phrase cittaṁ ārādheti to please one’s heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate DN i.118f. 175 (but cp. āraddha-citta to ārabhati); MN i85, 341 SN ii.107 SN v.109 Ja ii.372 Mil 25
    • to attain, accomplish, fulfill succeed SN v.23 (maggaṁ), 82, 180, 294 Iti 3 (variant reading ārām˚) Snp 488 = 509. cp. ārādhaka 1.
    • past participle ārādhita (q.v.)
    • ‣ See also parābhetvā
    • causative of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq in Divy as well as Avs
    Ārāma
    1. -1. pleasure, fondness of (—˚), delight, always as adjective (—˚) delighting in, enjoying finding pleasure in (usually combined with rata, e.g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) SN i.235 SN iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚) AN i.35 AN i.37 AN i.130 AN ii.28 (bhāvan˚) Iti 82 (dhamm˚) Snp 327 (identical; explained by Snp-a 333 as rati and “dhamme ārāmo assā ti”) Pug 53 (samagg˚) Vb 351
    • a pleasure-ground, park, garden (lit sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i.e. orchard) definition at Dhp-a iii.246 as Veḷuvana-Jīvak’ambavan’ādayo i.e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango-groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109 DN i.106 Dhp 188 Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes) Vv-a 305 (identical); Pv ii.78 (
    • plural ārāmāni = ārām’ûpavanāni Pv-a 102)
    • (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus where they meet & hold discussions about sacred secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana ‣See Ja i.92
    1. -94) DN i.178 Vin iv.69 others more frequently mentioned are e. g the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (DN i.178) etc
    • Vin i.39 140, 283, 291; ii.170; iii.6, 45, 162 iv.85 AN ii.176 Dīpavaṁsa v.18
    1. ˚pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii.109 Vv-a 288
    • ˚ropa,-ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves SN i.33 Pv-a 151
    • ˚vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140 Vin ii.170 Vin iii.50 90
    Sanskrit ārāma, ā + ram
    Ārāmakinī
    feminine ‣See ārāmika.
    Ārāmatā
    feminine
    1. pleasure, satisfaction AN ii.28 AN iii.116 Vb 381 Mil 233
    abstract from ārāma 1
    Ārāmika
    adjective
    1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. genitive) (or servant in general?) Mil 6 (sanghassa translation at the service of the order)
    2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207f. ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204 AN ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (identical), 275 (˚pesaka) Ja i.38 (˚kicca Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa).
    3. feminine ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208
    from ārāma
    Ārāva
    1. cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46
    cp. Sanskrit ārāva, from ā + ru
    Āriya
    1. in anāriya at Snp 815 is metric for anariya (q.v.)
    Āruṇṇa
    neuter
    1. weeping, crying, lamenting Mil 357
    originally pp of ā + rud
    Āruppa
    adjective
    1. formless, incorporeal; neuter formless existence DN iii.275 MN i.410 cp. 472; iii.163 SN i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123 AN iv.316 Iti 61 Snp 754 Ja i.406 Dhs 1385 (cp. translation 57); Vism 338 DN-a i.224 Snp-a 488 508; Sdhp 5 Sdhp 10; the four Vism iii, 326 sq
    2. from arūpa as ā (= a2)-*rūpya
    Āruhati
    1. to climb, ascend, go up or on to Snp 1014 (aorist āruhaṁ); Sdhp 188;
    2. absolutive āruhitvā Snp 321 āruyha Ja vi.452 Snp 139 (variant reading abhiruyha) Iti 71
    3. causative āropeti (q.v.)
    4. ā + ruh
    Ārūgya
    1. ‣See ārogya
    Ārūḷha
    1. -1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137 Ja vi.452 (Text āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma-paṭipadaṁ an˚) Vv-a 64 (magga˚) Pv-a 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚)
    • come about, effected, made done Pv-a 2 Pv-a 144 (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26)

  • (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed Ja vi.153 Ja vi.488

    past participle of āruhati
  • Ārūha
    1. ‣See āroha
    Ārogatā
    feminine
    1. freedom from illness, health Mil 341
    abstract from a + roga + tā
    Ārogya
    neuter
    1. absence of illness, health DN i.11 DN iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā) MN i.451 (Text ārūgya, variant reading ārogya), 508, 509 SN ii.109 AN i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq. Snp 749 Snp 257 = Dhp 204 = Ja iii.196 Nd1 160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health) Pv-a 129 Pv-a 198; Sdhp 234
    abstract from aroga, i.e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya
    Ārocāpana
    neuter
    1. announcement Dhp-a ii.167
    from ārocāpeti, causative of āroceti
    Ārocāpeti
    1. (causative II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaṁ ā. Snp p 111 Ja i.115 Ja i.125 Dhp-a ii.89 Pv-a 141

    Ārocita
    1. announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla)
    past participle of āroceti
    Āroceti

    to relate, to tell, announce, speak to address DN i.109 DN i.224 Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 13 (aññamaññaṁ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81 274 & frequently passim past participle ārocita;

  • causative II. ārocāpeti (q.v.)
  • ā + roceti, causative of ruc; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ārocayati Sp. Avs i.9 etc.
    Ārodana
    neuter
    1. crying, lamenting AN iii.268f. Ja i.34 Dhp-a i.184 Dhp-a ii.100
    from ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa
    Āropana
    neuter
    1. “putting on to”, impaling Mil 197 (sūl˚), 290 (identical)
    from āropeti
    Āropita
    1. -1. produced, come forward, set up Pv-a 2
    • effected, made SN iii.12 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 257

  • put on (to a stake), impaled Pv-a 220 (= āvuta).

    past participle of āropeti
  • Āropeti
    1. -1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. accusative ) Pv-a 76 (pāsādaṁ), 160 (identical)
    2. to put on, take up to (w.
    3. accusative or
    4. locative ) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaṁ yānaṁ āropayitvāna) Pv-a 62 (sarīraṁ citakaṁ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaṁ sakaṭesu ā.)
    5. to put on, commit to the care of entrust, give over to (w.

      • locative ) Ja i.227 Pv-a 154 (rajjaṁ amaccesu ā.)
      • to bring about, get ready, make Pv-a 73 Pv-a 257 (sangahaṁ ā. make a collection) Snp-a 51 142. 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give SN i.160 (ovādaṁ) Mil 176 (dosaṁ) Dhp-a ii.75 (identical)

    6. vādaṁ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of genitive Vin i.60 MN ii.122 SN i.160

      • past participle āropita (q.v.)
      causative of āruhati
    Āroha
    (—˚)
    1. -1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in compound ˚pariṇāha length & circumference SN ii.206 AN i.288 AN ii.250 AN iv.397 AN v.19 Ja iii.192 Ja v.299 Ja vi.20 Vb 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha-māna) Snp-a 382
    • one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider usually in compound ass˚ & hatth˚; horse-rider & elephantrider SN iv.310 AN ii.166 = iii.162 (Text ārūha); iv.107 Dhs-a 305

  • outfit, possession (or increase, as 1? Snp 420 (vaṇṇ˚).

    from ā + ruh
  • Ārohaṇa
    neuter
    1. climbing, ascending; ascent Ja i.70 Ja vi.488 Mil 352 Vism 244 Pv-a 74 Alaka-manda
    from ā + ruh
    Ālaka-manda
    1. at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning (“open to view"? or “not having pegs” āḷaka?) variant readings āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Buddhaghosa on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā i.e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as “the city of Kuvera” (cp. Sanskrit alakā)
    ālaya˚?
    Ālaggeti
    1. to (make) hang on to (locative ), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaṁ veḷagge ālaggetvā)
    2. ā + causative of lag
    Ālapati
    1. to address SN i.177 SN i.212 Ja v.201 Snp-a 42 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Snp 997), 487 (avhayati) Pv-a 11 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 69
    ā + lapati
    Ālapana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with reference to exclam. “ambho”) Ja v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā) Snp-a 396 Pv-a 131 (re ti ā.)
      from ā + lap
    Ālapanatā
    feminine
    1. speaking to, conversing with, conversation MN i.331) (an˚)
    abstract from ālapana
    Ālamba
    1. anything to hang on, support SN i.53 (an˚ without support) Snp 173 (identical + appatiṭṭha) Ja iii.396 Mil 343 Sdhp 245 Sdhp 463
    Sanskrit ālamba, ā + lamb
    Ālambati
    1. to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28 Ja i.57 Ja vi.192 Vv 8448 Thag-a 34
    • ālambeti identical Vv-a 32
    ā + lamb
    Ālambana
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective hanging down from, hanging up Ja iii.396 Ja iv.457 Snp-a 214 neuter support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117 152 (˚bāha) Mil 126 Alambara & Alambara; from ā + lamb, cp. ālamba
    Ālambara
    Āḷambara;
    neuter
    1. a drum Vin i.15 (l) Ja ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l) Vv 5418 (ḷ)
    Sanskrit āḍambara
    Ālaya
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. -1. originally roosting place, perch i.e. abode settling place, house Ja i.10 (geh˚) Mil 213 Dhp-a ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka)
      • “hanging on”, attachment, desire, clinging, lust SN i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma “devoted to the things to which it clings” Kindred Sayings) Vin iii.20 111 SN iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (identical) AN ii.34 AN ii.131 (˚rāma); iii.35 Iti 88 Snp 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā-diṭṭhi-vasena duvidho ālayo Snp-a 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (identical) 497 Mil 203 (Buddh ˚ṁ akāsi?) Dhp-a i.121 Dhp-a iv.186 (taṇhā) Snp-a 468 (= anoka of Snp 366)

    • pretence pretext, feint cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ālaya Mvu iii.314
      1. Ja i.157 (gilān˚) 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi.20, 262 (gilān˚)
      cp. Sanskrit ālaya, ā + ; , līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya
    Ālayati
    1. ‣See allīyati
    Ālassa
    neuter
    1. sloth, idleness, laziness SN i.43 DN iii.182 AN iv.59 AN v.136 Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya SN i.43 (Burmese variant ) Vb 352 Mil 289 and ālasiya Ja i.427 DN-a i.310 Dhp-a i.299 Vv-a 43 Alana & Alana;
    Derived from alasa
    Ālāna
    Āḷāna;
    neuter
    1. a peg, stake, post, esp one to which an elephant is tied Ja i.415 Ja iv.308 Dhp-a i.126 (ḷ) where all manuscripts have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly
    for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning “tying to” then the thing to which anything is tied
    Āli1
    masculine or
    • feminine ?

      1. a certain kind of fish Ja v.405
      Sanskrit āḷi
    Āli2 & Āḷi;
    feminine
    1. a dike, embankment Vin ii.256 MN iii.96 AN ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28 Ja i.336 Ja iii.533 Ja iii.334
    Sanskrit ālī
    Ālika
    1. in saccālika at SN iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood SN iv.306
    Ālikhati
    1. to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing Ja i.71 Mil 51
    ā + likhati
    Āliṅga
    1. a small drum Ja v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚-tala)
    ā + ling
    Āliṅgati
    1. to embrace, enfold DN i.230 DN iii.73 Ja i.281 Ja iv.21 Ja iv.316 Ja iv.438 Ja v.8 Mil 7 Dhp-a i.101: Vv-a 260
    ā + liṅg
    Ālitta
    1. besmeared, stained Thag 1, 737
    past participle of ālimpati; Sanskrit ālipta
    Ālinda
    (& Āḷinda)
    1. a terrace or verandah before the house-door Vin i.248 Vin ii.153 DN i.89 MN ii.119 SN iv.290 (ḷ) AN v.65 (ḷ) Ja vi.429 DN-a i.252 Dhp-a i.26 Dhp-a iv.196 Snp-a 55 (˚ka-vāsin; variant reading alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at Ja iii.283
    Sanskrit alinda
    Ālippati
    passive of ālimpeti (q.v.)
    Ālimpana
    neuter
    1. conflagration, burning, flame Mil 43
    for āḷimp˚ = Sanskrit ādīpana ‣See ālimpeti2
    Ālimpita
    1. ignited, literally AN iv.102 (variant reading ālepita)
    past participle of ālimpeti2
    Ālimpeti1
    1. to smear, anoint Vin ii.107 SN iv.177 (vaṇaṁ)
    • Caus II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316
    • passive ālimpīyati Mil 74 & ālippati Dhp-a iv.166 (variant reading for lippati).
    • past participle ālitta (q.v.)
    Sanskrit ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp
    Ālimpeti2
    1. to kindle, ignite set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85 DN ii.163 (citakaṁ) AN i.257 Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṁ read āvāpaṁ), 225 Pv-a 62 (kaṭṭhāni). past participle ālimpita (q.v.)
    2. for Sanskrit ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup → lump, lip → limp
    Ālu
    neuter
    1. a bulbous plant, Radix; Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) Ja iv.371 = vi.578; iv.373
    Sanskrit ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Latin ālum & alium ‣See Walde Latin Wtb. under alium
    Āluka1
    1. = ālu Ja iv.46 (Commentary for ālupa)
    Āluka2
    adjective
    1. susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (—˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚) DN-a i.198 (identical) Ja ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy)
    etymology?
    Ālupa
    neuter
    1. = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus Ja iv.46 (= āluka-kaṇḍa Commentary )
    1. the form āluva occurs at Ap 237
    etymology? Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. suggests ālu-a → āluva → ālupa
    Ālumpakāra
    1. breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) Dhp-a ii.55 (˚gūtha)
    reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa
    Ālumpati
    1. to pull out, break off MN i.324
    ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa
    Āluḷa
    (adjective
    1. being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated Ja vi.431
    from ā + lul
    Āluḷati
    1. to move here & there, ppr. medium; āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about Dhp-a iv.47 (Text ālūl˚; variant reading āḷul˚) confuse Dhs-a 375
    2. causative āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound Ja ii.9 33.
    3. past participle āluḷita (q.v.)
    4. ā + lul; Sanskrit ālolati, cp. also Pali āloḷeti
    Āluḷita
    1. agitated, confused Ja ii.101 Mil 397 (+ khalita)
    past participle of āluḷeti
    Ālepa
    1. ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274 Mil 74 Dhs-a 249
    cp. Sanskrit ālepa, of ā + lip
    Ālepana
    neuter
    1. anointing, application of salve DN i.7 (mukkh˚)
    from ā + lip
    Āloka
    ‣Seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i.e.
    1. -1. sight, view, look SN iv.128 = Snp 763 AN iii.236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one’s eye). anāloka without sight, blind Mil 296 (andha +)
    • light AN i.164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = Iti 100 (vihato) AN ii.139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom) Ja ii.34 Dhs 617 (opposite andhakāra) Vv-a 51 (dīp˚)

  • (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combination with vijjā knowledge DN ii.33 = SN ii.7 = 105, cp. Ps ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, SN AN on ii.7).

    • splendour Vv-a 53 DvA 71
    1. ˚kara making light, bringing light, noun light-bringer Iti 108
    • ˚karaṇa making light, illumining Iti 108
    • ˚da giving light or insight Thag 1, 3
    • ˚dassana ‣Seeing light, i.e. perceiving Thag 1, 422
    • ˚pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vb 334 Nett 89
    • ˚bahula good in sight figuratively full of foresight AN iii.432
    • ˚bhūta light Ja vi.459
    • ˚saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception DN iii.223 AN ii.45 AN iii.93
    • ˚saññin conscious of sight i.e. susceptible to sight or insight DN iii.49 MN iii.3 AN ii.211 AN iii.92 AN iii.323 AN iv.437 AN v.207 Pug 69
    • ˚sandhi “break for the light”, a slit to look through, an opening a crack or casement Vin i.48 = ii.209 = 218; ii.172 iii.65; iv.47 Ja iv.310 Pv-a 24
    ā + lok, Sanskrit āloka
  • Ālokana
    neuter
    1. looking at, regarding DN-a i.194
    from ā + lok
    Ālokita
    neuter
    1. looking before, looking at, looking forward (opposite vilokitaṁ looking behind or backward), always in combinationālokita-vilokita in ster. phrase at DN i.70 = e.g. AN ii.104 AN ii.106 AN ii.210 Pug 44 45, 50 Vism 19 Vv-a 6 DN-a i.193 (ālokitaṁ purato pekkhanaṁ vil˚ anudisā p.)
    past participle of āloketi
    Āloketar
    1. one who looks forward or before, a beholder DN-a i.194 (opposite viloketar)
    agent noun to āloketi
    Āloketi
    1. to look before, look at, regard ‣See DN-a i.193, 194. past participle ālokita (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit ālokayati, ā + lok
    Ālopa
    1. a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, especially bits of food gathered by bhikkhus DN i.5 =. AN v.206 AN iii.176 AN ii.209 AN iii.304 AN iv.318 Thag 1 1055 Iti 18 Pv ii.17 Pug 58 Mil 231 Mil 406 Vism 106 DN-a i.80 (= vilopa-karaṇaṁ)
    ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ālopa, e.g. Avs i.173, 341; Divy 290 Divy 481
    Ālopati
    1. to break in, plunder, violate Thag 1, 743
    ālopeti? ā + lopeti, causative of ālumpati
    Ālopika
    adjective
    1. getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55
    ālopa + ika
    Āloḷa
    1. confusion, uproar, agitation Dhp-a; i.38
    from ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti
    Āloḷī
    feminine
    1. that which is stirred up, mud, in compound sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206
    a + luḷ
    Āloḷeti
    1. to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble SN i.175 Ja ii.272 Ja ii.363 Ja iv.333 vi.331 Vism 105
    causative of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti
    Āḷaka
    1. (or ˚ā feminine )

      1. -1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike used either as arrow-straightener Mil 418 Dhp-a i.288 or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb Vv-a 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of “alum” in Index to Vv-a is incomprehensible)
      • a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna. cp. ii.13. Alamba = alambara
    Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i (?) ‣See Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 158
    Āḷamba = āḷambara
    1. Vv 189 = 5024 ‣See ālambara
    Āḷavaka
    1. (& ˚ika) adjective-noun

      1. dwelling in forests, a forest-dweller SN ii.235 As proper name at Vism 208
      = āṭavika
    Āḷādvāraka
    adjective at Ja v.81 Ja v.82 is corrupt & should with variant reading perhaps better be read; advāraka without doors. cp. Kern, Toevoegselen 29 (ālāraka?). Ja v.81 has āḷāraka only.
    Āḷāra
    adjective
    1. thick, massed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in compound ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma Vv-a 279) Pv iii.35 (= vellita-dīgha-nīla-pamukha). cp. alāra. Alarika & iya;
    = aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sanskrit arāla?
    Āḷārika
    ˚iya;
    adjective-noun
    1. a cook DN i.51 (= bhattakāraka DN-a i.157) Ja v.296 (bhattakāraka Commentary ); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, Commentary ˚ika = sūpika) Mil 331
    Sanskrit ārālika, of uncertain etymology
    Āḷāhana
    neuter
    1. a place of cremation, cemetery DN i.55 Ja i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76 Mil 350 DN-a i.166 Dhp-a i.26 Dhp-a iii.276 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 161 Pv-a 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha-ṭṭhāna)
    • Note. For āḷāhana in meaning “peg, stake” ‣See ālāna
    from ā + ḍah or dah ‣See dahati
    Āḷika
    1. at AN iii.352 AN iii.384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika ‣See āḷhaka
    Āḷha
    neuter = āḷhaka; only at AN iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with variant reading to be read as āḷhaka. The id p. at AN ii.55 has ālhaka only.
    Āḷhaka
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 476 as follows: “cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaṁ etc."-udakāḷhaka SN v.400 AN ii.55 = iii.337 Vv-a 155
      • In other connections at Ja i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaṁ āḷhakena dhañña-māpaka-kammaṁ kataṁ Commentary ) Mil 229 (patt˚) Dhp-a iii.367 (aḍḍh˚)
      1. ˚thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i.240 AN iii.369 Dhp-a iii.370 (variant reading bhatta-thālikā)
      Sanskrit āḍhaka, from *āḍha probably meaning “grain”
    Āḷhiya
    1. (& āḷhika) adjective

      1. rich, happy, fortunate; only in negative anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable MN i.450 MN ii.178 (+ daḷidda) AN iii.352f. (so read with Burmese variant ˚āḷhika for T ˚āḷika; combined with daḷidda; variant reading SS. anaddhika) Ja v.96 Ja v.97 (+ daḷidda; Commentary na āḷhika)
      from *āḷha, Sanskrit āḍhya, originally possessing grain, rich in grain, i.e. wealth; semantically cp. dhañña2
    Āvajati
    1. -1. to go into, to or towards Ja iii.434 Ja iv.49 Ja iv.107
    • to return, come back Ja v.24 Ja v.479
    • ā + vajati, vraj
    Āvajjati
    1. -1. to reflect upon, notice, take in advert to, catch (a sound), listen Ja i.81 Ja. Ja. Ja v.3 Mil 106
    • to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiṁ) Ja ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati).
    • causative āvajjeti (q.v.)
    • not with Senart Mvu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sanskrit āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. active āvajjeti Sanskrit āvarjayati
    Āvajjana
    neuter
    1. turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind
    • See discussion of term at Compendium 85, 227 (the Commentary derive āvajjana from āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu translation 221 note 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 note 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā)
    • Ps ii.5, 120 Ja ii.243 Vb 320 Mil 102f.; Vism 432 DN-a i.271
    from āvajjati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āvarjana in different meaning
    Āvajjita
    1. bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Mil 297 Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433
    past participle of āvajjeti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āvarjita, e.g. Divy 171 Iti 221
    Āvajjitatta
    neuter
    1. inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps ii.27 sq
    abstract from āvajjita
    Āvajjeti
    1. to turn over, incline, bend MN iii.96 Ja iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto) DN-a i.10 (kāyaṁ). 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think heed, listen for. According to Compendium 227 often paraphrased in Commentary by pariṇāmeti
    2. J i.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200 Mil 297 Dhp-a ii.96 Pv-a 181 (= manasikaroti)
    3. to cause to yield AN iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚).
    4. past participle āvajjita (q.v.)
    causative of āvajjati
    Āvaṭa
    1. covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited DN i.97 DN i.246 MN i.381 (˚dvāra) Ja vi.267
    • ˚anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open DN i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā) SN i.55 Ja v.213 Pv iii.64 Mil 283 cp. āvuta2 & vy˚
    Sanskrit āvṛta, past participle of ā + vṛ
    Āvaṭṭa
    adjective-noun
    1. -1. turning round, winding, twisting MN i.382 SN i.32 (dvi-r-ā˚ turning twice) Ja ii.217 Snp-a 439 (˚gangā)
    • turned, brought round changed, enticed MN i.381 Dhp-a ii.153

  • an eddy whirlpool, vortex MN i.461 = AN ii.123 (˚bhaya) Mil 122 196, 377.

    • circumference Ja v.337 Dāvs v.24 Dhp-a iii.184
    • Sanskrit āvarta, ā + vṛt
  • Āvaṭṭati
    1. in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504
    = āvattati
    Āvaṭṭana
    neuter
    1. turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation Ja iii.494 Dhp-a ii.153
    from ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin
    Āvaṭṭanā
    feminine
    1. turning to (of the mind), adverting apprehending Kvu 380, 491
    most likely for āvajjana. q.v. & ‣See also; i → Kvu translation 221, 282
    Āvaṭṭanin
    adjective
    1. turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing MN i.375 MN i.381 AN ii.190 Ja ii.330 = iv.471 DN-a i.250
    • cp. etymologically the same, but semantically different āvattanin
    from āvaṭṭana
    Āvaṭṭin
    adjective-noun
    1. only at MN i.91 in negative an˚; not enticed by (locative ), i.e. kāmesu. cp. āvattin
    2. from āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana
    Āvaṭṭeti
    1. to turn round, entice, change convert, bring or win over MN i.375 MN i.381 MN i.383 MN i.505 AN iii.27 DN-a i.272
    ā + vatteti, causative of vṛt, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438
    Āvatta1
    adjective
    1. gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāy’āvatta (see same phrase under āvattati MN i.460 SN ii.50 Ja i.206
    past participle of āvattati
    Āvatta2
    1. neuter [ Sanskrit āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[winding, turn, bent Ja i.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (variant reading āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta)
    Āvattaka
    adjective
    1. turning, in dakkhiṇ˚; turning to the right, dextrorsal DN ii.18 cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DN-a i.259
    āvatta + ka
    Āvattati
    1. to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to “the low”, i.e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17 MN i.460 SN ii.231 SN iv.191 Snp p 92 (= osakkati Snp-a 423) Ud 21 Pug 66 Mil 246 past participle āvatta (q.v.) cp. āvaṭṭati
    2. ā + vattati, of vṛt
    Āvattana
    adjective neuter
    1. turning; turn, return Nett 113 Mil 251
    Sanskrit āvartana
    Āvattanin
    adjective
    1. turning round or back Thag 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin
    from āvattana
    Āvattin
    adjective-noun
    1. returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, synonym with āgāmin (an˚), only in negative anāvattin not returning, a non-returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at DN i.156 DN iii.132 SN v.346 SN v.357 SN v.376 SN v.406 MN i.91 DN-a i.313
    from āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in different meaning
    Āvatthika
    adjective
    1. befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nominativenclature) Vism 210 = Kp-a 107
    ā + vatthika
    Āvapati
    1. to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Mil 279
    a + vap
    Āvapana
    neuter
    1. sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering Ja i.321
    from āvapati
    Āvara
    adjective
    1. obstructing, keeping off from Ja v.325 (so to be read in ariya-magg-âvara)
    from ā + vṛ
    Āvaraṇa
    adjective-noun
    1. shutting off, barring out withstanding; neuter hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ṁ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (identical) DN i.246 (synonym of pañca nīvaraṇāni) SN v.93f. AN iii.63 Ja i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiṁ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river) Snp 66 (pahāya pañc’āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an˚-dassāviṇ); Ps i.131 sq.; ii.158 (an˚) Pug 13 Dhs 1059 1136 Vb 341 342 Mil 21 (dur hard to withstand or oppose)

      • dant˚ “screen of the teeth”, lip Ja iv.188 Ja vi.590
      from ā + vṛ; , cp. āvarati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āvaraṇa in pañc’āvaraṇāni Divy 378
    Āvaraṇatā
    feminine
    1. keeping away from, withholding from AN iii.436
    abstract from āvaraṇa
    Āvaraṇīya
    adjective
    1. MN i.273
    • an˚ not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct MN iii.3 Mil 157
    gerundive from āvarati
    Āvarati
    1. to shut out from ablative, hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct MN i.380 (dvāraṁ) Snp 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd1 368) DN-a i.235 (dvāraṁ) Dīpavaṁsa i.38. past participle āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q.v.)
    2. ā + vṛ; , cp. āvuṇāti
    Āvalī
    feminine
    1. a row, range Ja v.69 DN-a i.140
    cp. Sanskrit āvalī & ‣See valī
    Āvasati
    1. to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay MN ii.72 SN i.42 Snp 43 Snp 805 Snp 1134 Nd1 123 127 Nd2 133 Ja vi.317 past participle āvuttha (q.v.)
    2. ā + vas
    Āvasatha
    1. dwelling-place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i.226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 (= kavāṭabaddha) SN i.94 SN i.229 SN iv.329 Snp 287 Snp 672 Ja iv.396 Ja vi.425 Pug 51 Mil 279
    Sanskrit āvasatha, from ā + vas
    Āvaha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚) Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37 Pv-a 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15 Sdhp 98 Sdhp 206
    from ā + vah
    Āvahati
    1. to bring, cause, entail, give SN i.42 = Snp 181 Snp 182 (āvahāti sukhaṁ metri causā) Ja iii.169 Ja v.80 Snp 823 Nd1 302 Pv-a 6 passive āvuyhati Vv-a 237 (ppr. ˚amāna
    2. ā + vahati
    Āvahana
    adjective (—˚)
    1. bringing, causing Thag 1, 519 Snp 256
    = āvaha
    Āvahanaka
    1. (adjective
    • nt)
    1. one who brings Vv-a 114 (sukhassa)
    = āvahana
    Āva
    1. (misery, misfortune) ‣See avā;
    Āvāṭa
    1. a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well DN i.142 (yaññ˚) Ja i.99 Ja i.264 Ja ii.406 iii.286; iv.46 (caturassa); vi.10 Dhp-a i.223 Vv-a 63 Pv-a 225
    etymology?
    Āvāpa

    1. R AN S. 1898, 750 sp. a potter’s furnace Dhp-a i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178
    if correct, from ā + 2 to blow with causative p

    • cp. J
    Āvāra
    1. warding off, protection, guard Ja vi.432 (yanta-yutta˚, does it mean “cover, shield"?). For compound khandh’āvāra ‣See khandha
    Sanskrit āvāra, from ā + vṛ
    Āvāreti
    1. to ward off, hold back, bar, SN iv.298 Nett 99
    Sanskrit āvārayati, ā + causative of vṛ
    Āvāsa
    1. sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling-place, residence Vin i.92 DN iii.234 SN iv.91 AN ii.68 AN ii.168 AN iii.46 AN iii.262 Snp 406 Dhp 73 (cp. Dhp-a ii.77) Nd1 128 Ja vi.105 Dhs 1122 Pug, 15, 19, 57 Kp-a 40 Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṁ ālimpeti: read āvāpaṁ) Pv-a 13 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 36 Vv-a 113 Sdhp 247
    2. ˚anāvāsa (n. & adjective uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place AN iv.345 Ja ii.77 Pv ii.333 Pv-a 80 (= anāgāra) Vv-a 46
    1. ˚kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294 300, 306 Dīpavaṁsa iv.47, cp. v.18
    2. ˚palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) Kp-a 39; cp. Vism 90 sq
    3. ˚sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127
    Sanskrit āvāsa; ā + vas
    Āvāsika
    adjective
    1. living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually applied to bhikkhus (opposite āgantuka) Vin i.128f.; ii.15, 170; iii.65; v.203 sq. MN i.473 AN i.236 AN iii.261f. 366 Ja iv.310 Pv iv.84 (= nibaddha-vasanaka Pv-a 267)
    āvāsa + ika
    Āvāha
    1. taking in marriage, literally carrying away to oneself, marriage DN i.99 Ja vi.363 Snp-a 273 448 Dhp-a iv.7 Often in compound ā˚ vivāha(ka) literally leading to (one’s home & leading away (from the bride’s home), wedding feast DN iii.183 (˚ka) Ja i.452 Vv-a 109 157. (variant reading ˚ka)
    ā + vah
    Āvāhana
    neuter
    1. -1. = āvāha, i.e. marriage, taking a wife DN i.11 (= āvāha-karaṇa DN-a i.96)
    • “getting up, bringing together”, i.e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army Ja iv.91
    • ā + vshana, of vah
    Āvi
    adverb
    1. clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one’s eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret. AN v.350 AN v.353 Pv ii.716 = Dhp-a iv.21 (āvī variant reading ), explained at Pv-a 103 by pakāsanaṁ paresaṁ pākaṭavasana Otherwise in following compounds. (with kar & bhū ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88 iii.24 Pug 19 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain DN iii.121 Snp 84 Snp 85 Snp 349 Ja v.457 Pug 57 Vv-a 79 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear Ja i.136 Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati) Dhp-a ii.51 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation DN i.78 AN iii.17 Ja ii.50 Ja ii.111 Vism 390 sq. (revelation opposite tirobhāva). cp. pātur. Avijjhati (avinjati, avinchati)
    Sanskrit āviḥ, to Latin audio (from *auizdiō) to hear
    Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati)
    P T S. 1884, 72 against Trenckner, Note. 59 (to piñj & Hardy Nett; indicative = vicchāy
    1. -1. to encircle, encom passive comprise, go round, usually in
    2. absolutive āvijjhitvā (w.
    3. accusative ) used as prep round about, near Ja i.153 (khettaṁ), 170 (pokkharaṇiṁ) DN-a i.245 (nagaraṁ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (
    4. accusative ) at Ja iv.59 (chārika-puñjaṁ)
    5. as in literally Sanskrit
      1. to swing round brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaṁ āviñji) MN iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn) Ja i.313 Ja v.291 (cakkaṁ, of a potter’s wheel) Snp-a 481 (Text āviñj˚, variant reading āvijjh˚ ‣See āracaya˚) Dhp-a ii.277 (āviñchamāna Text; variant reading āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚)
      • to resort to, go to, approach incline to SN iv.199 (Text āviñch˚; variant reading avicch˚ āviñj˚); Nett 13

    6. to arrange, set in order Ja ii.406 5. to pull (?) AN iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, variant reading āvijj˚ āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Note. 59 āviñjati “to pull”).

      • past participle āviddha (q.v.)
      ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J
    Āvijjhana
    1. (so for āviñchana & āviñjana) adjective-noun

      1. -1. (āvijjhati.2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in; āvijjhana-rajju a loose, rope, especially in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world’s wheel or axis, in the latter sense at Dhp-a ii.143 (Text āviñch˚ (variant reading āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope? Vin ii.120 148 Ja v.298 Ja v.299 (Text āviñj˚, variant reading āvicch˚ āvij˚)
      • (cp. āvijjhati.3) going to, approach, contact with Dhs-a 312 (˚rasa, Text āviñj˚, variant reading āviñch˚; or is it “encompassing"? = āvijjhati.1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa)

    2. (cp. āvijjhati.5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma).

      from āvijjhati, literally piercing through, i.e. revolving axis
    Āvijjhanaka
    neuter
    1. whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling-round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter’s wheel), the worldaxis Dhp-a ii.146 (Text āviñch˚)
    from āvijjhati in meaning 2
    Āviddha
    1. whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion Ja iv.6 (cakkaṁ = kumbhakāra-cakkam iva bhamati Commentary ); v.291. What does an-āviddha at Pv-a 135 mean?
    past participle of āvijjhati.2, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Avestan SN i.87 Lal. v.207
    Āvila
    adjective
    1. stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained soiled, dirty AN i.9 AN iii.233 Ja v.16 Ja v.90 (ābila) Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489 Thag-a 251 DN-a i.226 More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene DN i.76 SN iii.83 iv,118 AN i.9 AN iii.236 Snp 160 Dhp 82 Dhp 413 Ja iii.157 Mil 35 Vv-a 29 30 Thag-a 251
    is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?
    Āvilati
    1. to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Mil 259 (+ luḷati)
    from āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?
    Āvilatta
    neuter
    1. confusion, disturbance, agitation Snp 967 Nd1 488
    abstract from āvila
    Āvisati
    1. to approach, to enter Vin iv.334 Snp 936 (aorist āvisi) Ja iv.410 Ja iv.496 Vism 42
    2. ā + vīś
    Āvuṇāti
    1. [in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ; , cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former to string upon, to fix on to (c. locative ), to impale Ja i.430 iii.35; v.145; vi.105.
    2. causative II. āvuṇāpeti Ja iii.218 (sūle).
    3. past participle āvuta1 (q.v.), whereas the other
    4. past participle āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ;.

    Āvuta
    1. -1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to DN i.76 (suttaṁ); ii.13 (identical) AN i.286 (tantāvutaṁ web) Ja iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena) DN-a i.94 (˚sutta)
    • impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) Ja i.430 Ja iii.35 Ja v.497 Ja vi.105 Pv-a 217 Pv-a 220
    • past participle of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sanskrit āvayati, the corresponding Sanskrit form being ā + uta = ota
    Āvuta2 = Āvaṭa
    1. ‣ See āvuṇāti & āvuta; 1 covered, obstructed, hindered Iti 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DN-a i.59
    Āvuttha
    1. inhabited DN ii.50 (an˚) SN i.33
    past participle of āvasati
    Āvudha
    neuter
    1. an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. DN iii.219 MN ii.100 AN iv.107 AN iv.110 Snp 1008 Ja i.150 Ja ii.110 Ja iii.467 Ja iv.160 Ja iv.283 Ja iv.437 Nd2 on Snp 72 Mil 8 Mil 339 Dhp-a ii.2 Dhp-a iv.207 Snp-a 225 466 (˚jīvika = issattha) ‣See also āyudha
    Vedic āyudha, from ā + yudh to fight
    Āvuyhamāna
    1. ppr. of āvuyhati (passive of āvahati), being conveyed or brought Vv-a 237 (reading uncertain).

    Āvuso
    1. (voc. plural masculine )

      1. friend, a form of polite address “friend, brother Sir”, usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the plural of the verb, like bhavaṁ and bhavanto

        • Vin ii.302 DN i.151 DN i.157 DN ii.8 Snp-a 227 Dhp-a i.9 Dhp-a ii.93 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 208
        a contracted form of āyusmanto
      2. plural of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e.g. āvudha for āyudha
    Āveṭhana
    neuter
    1. rolling up, winding up or round, figuratively explanation Mil 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling) 231 (˚viniveṭhana)
    ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ
    Āveṭhita
    1. turned round, slung round or over Ja iv.383f. (variant reading āvedhita & āveḷita, Commentary explains by parivattita)
    past participle of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ; , cp. āvedhikā
    Āveṇi
    adjective (—˚)
    1. special peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.) Ja i.490 (˚sangha-kammāni)
    according to Trenckner, Note. 75 from ā + vinā “Sine quā non”, but very doubtful
    Āveṇika
    adjective
    1. special, extraordinary, exceptional SN iv.239 AN v.74f.; Vism 268 Vv-a 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), Kp-a 23, 35
    from āveṇi; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āveṇika Avs i.14, 108; Divy 2 Divy 182, 268, 302
    Āveṇiya
    adjective = āveṇika Vin i.71 Ja iv.358 Ja vi.128
    Āvedha
    1. piercing, hole, wound Ja ii.276 (variant reading aveddha; Commentary = viddha-ṭṭhāne vaṇa)
    cp. Sanskrit āviddha, ā + past participle of vyadh
    Āvedhika
    (adjective feminine scil. pannā)
    1. piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination thinking over Ja ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, variant reading for both ṭh)
    ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ; , cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka
    Āveḷa
    1. (adjective & ˚ā feminine )

      1. -1. turning round swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at Ja i.12 Ja i.95 Ja i.501 2. feminine a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv.36; 2 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa-pilandhana VuA 167) ‣See āveḷin
      2. not with Müller; Pali Grammar 10, 30, 37 = Sanskrit āpīḍa, but from ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round which in Pali is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or Dhp (āvedha, q.v.) There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dialectical (Prakrit) āmela
    Āvelita
    (ḷ?)
    1. turned round wound, curved Ja vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns variant reading āvellita)
    past participle of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āviddha curved, crooked Avs; i.87, Lal. v.207
    Āveḷin
    adjective
    1. wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in feminine ˚inī Ja v.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā Commentary ) Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at identical passage 482 āveline) 323 Vv-a 125 (on Vv 302 explains as ratana-maya-pupph’āveḷavatī)
    2. from āveḷā
    Āvesana
    neuter
    1. entrance; workshop; living-place, house Vin ii.117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?) MN ii.53 Pv ii.915
    from āvisati
    Āsa1
    1. contr
    • form of aṁsa in compound koṭṭhāsa participle, portion etc. ‣See aṁsa1. Can we compare Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsapātrī ‣See next
    Āsa3
    1. food, only in compound pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Snp 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍapātass’etaṁ nāmaṁ Snp-a 374) Dhp-a iv.211 ‣See further ref under pātar; and pacchā-āsa aftermath SN i.74 Can we compare Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsa-pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Derived from āsa is āsaka with abstract ending āsakattaṁ “cating”, food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Snp 249 ‣See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā
    Sanskrit āśa
    Āsa3
    1. the adjective form of āsā feminine, wish, hope ‣See under āsā.

    Āsa4
    1. archaic 3rd singular perfect of atthi to be, only in compound itihāsa = iti ha āsa “thus it has been"
    Āsaṁsa
    adjective
    1. hoping, expecting something, longing for AN i.108 = Pug 27 (explained by Pug AN 208 as “so hi arahattaṁ āsaṁsati patthetī ti āsaṁso”) Snp-a 321 336. cp. nir˚
    of *āśaṁsā ‣See next
    Āsaṁsati
    1. to expect, hope for, wish Pug AN 208 (= pattheti) ‣See also āsamāna
    for the usual āsiṁsati, ā + śaṁs
    Āsaṁsā
    feminine
    1. wish, desire, expectation, hope Ja iv.92
    • cp. nirāsaṁsa
    from ā + śaṁs
    Āsạṁsuka
    adjective
    1. full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Thag 2, 273 (= āsiṁsanaka Thag-a 217 translation “cadging”)
    from āsaṁsā
    Āsaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to food, having food, only in negative an˚; fasting SN iv.118 Dhp 141 (feminine ā fasting bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77) Ja v.17 Ja vi.63
    2. of āsa2
    Āsakatta
    neuter
    1. having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292)
    abstract from āsaka
    Āsaṅkati
    1. to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, Ja i.151 (preterite āsankittha), 163 (aorist āsanki); ii.203 Snp-a 298
    2. past participle āsaṅkita (q v.), ā + śaṅk
    Āsaṅkā
    feminine
    1. fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion Ja i.338 Ja ii.383 Ja iii.533 Ja vi.350 Ja vi.370 Dhp-a iii.485 Vv-a 110
    • cp. sāsaṅka & nirāsaṅka;
    Sanskrit āśankā from ā + śaṅk
    Āsaṅkita
    adjective
    1. suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Mil 173 Mil 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion) Dhp-a i.223 Vv-a 110
    • cp. ussaṅkita & parisaṅkita;
    past participle of āsankati
    Āsaṅkin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. fearing, anxious, apprehensive Snp 255 (bhedā˚) Ja iii.192 (identical)
      from āsankā
    Āsaṅga
    1. -1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit Ja iv.11
    • that which hangs on (the body), clothing garment, dress; adjective dressed or clothed in (—˚); usually in compound uttarāsaṅga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g Vin i.289 SN iv.290 Pv-a 73 VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (identical)
    • ā + sanga from sañj to hang on, cp. Sanskrit āsaṅga & āsakti
    Āsaṅgin
    adjective
    1. hanging on, attached to Ja iv.11
    from āsanga
    Āsajja
    indeclinable
    1. -1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated belonging to; sometimes merely as preposition acc “near” (cp. āsanna) Snp 418 (āsajja naṁ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaṁ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaṁ) Ja ii.95 Ja vi.194 Mil 271
    • put on to (literally sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking SN i.127 (khaṇuṁ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā “ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama” translation p. 159; Commentary explains by paharitvā which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) 3. knocking against or “giving one a setting-to”, insulting offending, assailing DN i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DN-a i.276) AN iii.373 (tādisaṁ bhikkhuṁ ā.) Ja v.267 (isiṁ ā. Gotamaṁ; Commentary p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiṁ ā. āsādetvã Pv-a 266)

  • “sitting on”, i.e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously MN i.250 DN iii.258 AN iv.236 (dānaṁ deti) Vv 106 (dānaṁ adāsiṁ; cp. Vv-a 55 samāgantvā) ‣See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.

    absolutive of āsādeti, causative of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sanskrit āsādya
  • Āsajjana
    neuter
    1. “knocking against”, setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ṁ Tathāgataṁ an insult to the Text; quoted as such at Vv-a 55 where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = Iti 86 (so to be read with variant reading ; Text has āpajja naṁ) SN i.114 (apuññaṁ pasavi Māro āsajjanaṁ Tathāgataṁ; translation “in ‣Seeking the Text to assail”) Ja v.208
    from āsajja in meaning of no. 3
    Āsati
    1. to sit DN-a i.208 h. singular āsi SN i.130 - past participle āsīna (q.v.)
    2. from as
    Āsatta1
    1. (a) literally hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120 Ja i.5
    • (b) figuratively attached to, clinging to Ja i.377 (+ satta lagga) Thag-a 259 (an˚)
    past participle of ā + sañj
    Āsatta2
    1. accursed, cursed Ja v.446 (an˚)
    past participle of ā + śap
    Āsatti
    feminine
    1. attachment, hanging on (w. locative ), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 SN i.212 Snp 777 (bhavesu) Nd1 51 221; Nett 12, 128

      • Cp nirāsattin
      ā + sañj
    Āsada
    1. -1. approach, dealing with, business with (accusative ), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = Ja v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado) MN i.326 (metaṁ āsado = mā etaṁ āsado do not meddle with this, literally, be not this any affair) Ja i.414 (cakkaṁ āsado you have to do with the wheel interpreted as adjective in meaning patto = finding, getting) vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i.e. means of getting something)
    2. (as adjective) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i.e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Snp p. 107 (cp. Snp-a 451) Ja vi.272 Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado Vv-a 213) Mil 21 Dīpavaṁsa v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384
    ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti
    Āsana
    neuter
    1. sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne MN i.469 Vin i.272 (= pallankassa okāsa) SN i.46 (ek sitting alone, a solitary seat) AN iii.389 (an˚ without a seat) Snp 338 Snp 718 Snp 810 Snp 981 Nd1 131 Ja iv.435 (āsān ûdaka-dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (identical); vi.413 Dhp-a ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher’s seat or throne) Snp-a 401 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 141
    1. ˚ābhihara gift or distinction of the seat Ja i.81
    • ˚ūpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Snp 708 (= nisinna Snp-a 495)
    • ˚paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305
    • ˚paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down DN i.167 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Pug 55
    • ˚sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69 Dhp-a ii.65 Dhp-a iv.46
    from āsati
    Āsana2
    1. (?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam-āsita Mil 302) ‣See, however, māsana
    Āsanaka
    neuter
    1. a small seat Vv 15
    āsana + ka
    Āsanika
    adjective
    1. having a seat; in ek˚; sitting by oneself Vism 69
    from āsana
    Āsandi
    feminine
    1. an extra long chair, a deck-chair Vin i.192 Vin ii.142 163, 169, 170 DN i.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant’ āsanaṁ DN-a i.86), 55 = MN i.515 = SN iii.307 (used as a bier) AN i.181 Ja i.108 ‣See note at Dialogues of the Buddha i.11
    from ā + sad
    Āsandikā
    feminine from āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii.149 Kp-a 44.
    Āsanna
    adjective
    1. near (cp. āsajja1), opposite dūra Ja ii.154 Dhp-a ii.91 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 243
    past participle of ā + sad ‣See āsīdati
    Āsappanā
    (from)
    1. literally “creeping on to”, doubt, mistrust, always combined with parisappanā Nd3 1 Dhs 1004 (translation “evasion”, cp. Dhs translation p 116), 1118, 1235 DN-a i.69
    from + sṛp
    Āsabha
    (in compound) a bull peculiar to a bull, bull-like, figuratively a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Snp 687 nar˚ Snp 684 Snp 696 āsabha-camma bull’s hide Ja vi.453 (variant reading usabha˚).
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) “bull’s place”, first place distinguished position, leadership MN i.69 SN ii.27 AN ii.8 (Commentary seṭṭha-ṭṭhāna uttama-ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq. DN-a i.31 Kp-a 104
    the guṇa-and compound form of usabha, corresponding to Sanskrit ārṣabha → ṛṣabha ‣See usabha
    Āsabhin
    adjective
    1. bull-like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ṁ vācaṁ bhāsati “speak the lordly word” DN ii.15 DN ii.82 MN iii.123j Ja i.53 DN-a i.91 cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaṁ āsabhiṁ)
    from āsabha
    Āsamāna
    adjective
    1. wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiṁ ā = kiṁ paccāsiṁ santo Vv-a 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiṁsamāna patthayamana Pv-a 226)
    ppr. of āsaṁsati or āsiṁsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna
    Āsaya
    1. -1. abode haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition SN i.38 Vin iii.151 Ja ii.99 Mil 257 Vv-a 60 Pv-a 210 jal˚ river Vv-a 47 Pgdp 80; adjective depending on, living in (—˚) Mil 317 Nd1 362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.) ‣See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya
    • (figuratively) inclination, intention will, hope; often combined & compared with; anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e.g. at Ps i.133; ii.158 Vb 340 Vism 140 (˚posana) Pv-a 197 Snp-a 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), Kp-a 103 (˚sampatti) cp. nirāsaya

  • outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh = gabbha-mala Pv-a 198); Vism 344.

    ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sanskrit āśraya from ā + ; śri is in Pali represented by assaya. cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āśayataḥ intentionally in earnest Divy 281; Avs ii.161
  • Āsayati
    1. to wish, desire, hope, intend Ja iv.291 (gerundive āsāyana, gloss esamāna) ‣See āsaya
    2. ā + śī; literally “lie on”, cp. German anliegen & Sanskrit āśaya = German Angelegenheit
    Āsava
    1. that which; flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on DN iii.182 (five kinds Dhs-a 48 Kp-a 26 Ja iv.222 Ja vi.9
    • discharge from a sore, AN i.124 AN i.127 = Pug 30

  • in psychology technical term for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the “Āsavas” constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term ‣See; i → Cpd. 227 ‣See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at Dhs-a 48 (cp Expositor

    • past participle 63 sq) ‣See also Compendium 227 sq., & especially; Dhs translation 291 sq

      • The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚; , i.e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance
      • They are mentioned as such at DN ii.81 DN ii.84 DN ii.91 DN ii.94 DN ii.98 DN ii.123 DN ii.126 AN i.165f. 196 ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Ps i.94, 117 Dhs 1099 1448 Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq
      • The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at MN i.55 AN i.165 AN iii.414 SN iv.256 SN v.56 SN v.189 Iti 49 Vb 364 For other connections ‣See Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciṁsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya ˚nirodha etc.) DN i.83 DN i.167 DN iii.78 DN iii.108 DN iii.130 DN iii.220 DN iii.223 DN iii.230 DN iii.240 DN iii.283 MN i.7f. 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277 SN ii.187f. (˚ehi cittaṁ vimucci); iii.45 (identical); iv.107 (identical), 20; v.8, 28, 410 AN i.85f. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.) 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaṁ vimuttaṁ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta-pariḷāha); v.70 237 Thag 2, 4 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe) Snp 162 Snp 374 Snp 535(
      • plural āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100 Dhp 93 Dhp 253 Dhp 292 Nd1 331 (pubb˚) Vb 42 64, 426 Pug 11 13, 27, 30 sq. Mil 419 Dhs-a 48 Thag-a 94 173; Kp-a 26 DN-a i.224 Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava-surā, meaning?)

      Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the following passages: (1); āsavānaṁ khaya DN i.156 SN ii.29 SN ii.214 SN iii.57, 96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203 220, 271, 284 AN i.107f. 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291 ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii.69, 114, 131, 202, 306 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq. Iti 49 Pug 27 62 Vb 334 344; Vism 9 DN-a i.224 cp. ˚parikkhaya. AN v.343f. ‣See also arahatta formula Commentary

    • khīṇāsava (adjective one whose Āsavas are destroyed ‣See khīṇa SN i.13 SN i.48 SN i.53 SN i.146 SN ii.83, 239; iii.199, 128, 178; iv.217 AN i.77 109, 241, 266; iv.120, 224, 370 sq.; v.40, 253 sq.; Ps ii.173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā AN iv.418 AN iv.434 AN iv.451f. āsavakhīṇa Snp 370
    • anāsava

      • adjective one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = 164 DN iii.112 SN i.130 SN ii.214 SN ii.222 SN iii.83 SN iv.128 AN i.81 AN i.107f. 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400 AN v.10f. 36, 242 340 Snp 1105 Snp 1133 Dhp 94 Dhp 126 Dhp 386; Thag i.100 Iti 75 Nd2 44; Pv ii.615 Pug 27 Vb 426 Dhs 1101 1451 Vv-a 9 cp. nirāsava Thag-a 148

        • O
        • past participle sāsava SN iii.47 SN v.232 AN i.81 v.242 Dhs 990 Nett 10; Vism 13, 438
        from ā + sru, would corresponding to a Sanskrit *āsrava, cp. Sanskrit āsrāva. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava
  • Āsavati
    1. to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116
    ā + sru, cp. Sanskrit āsravati; its doublet is assavati
    Āsasāna
    1. hoping wishing, desiring, longing for Snp 369 (an˚ Snp-a 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090 Thag 1, 528 Ja iv.18 (= āsiṁsanto Commentary ), 381; v.391 (= āsiṁsanto Commentary ) ‣See anāsasāna āsaṁsati, āsamāna & āsayāna
    either gerundive for *āsaṁsāna or contracted form of ppr.
  • medium of āsaṁsati (= āsiṁsati) for *asaṁsamāna
  • Āsā
    feminine
    1. expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adjective āsa (—˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope-destroying), 259 DN ii.206 DN iii.88 MN iii.138 (āsaṁ karoti) AN i.86 (dve āsā) 107 (vigat-āso one whose longings have gone) Snp 474 Snp 634 Snp 794 Snp 864 Ja i.267 Ja i.285 Ja v.401 vi.452 (˚chinna chinnāsa Commentary ) Nd1 99 261, 213 sq Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with variant reading SS ahaṁ, cp. Vv-a 172) Pug 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug AN 208) Dhs 1059 (+ āsiṁsanā etc.), 1136 Pv-a 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78 111, 498, 609
    cp. Sanskrit āśaḥ feminine
    Āsāṭikā
    feminine
    1. a fly’s egg, a nit MN i.220f. AN v.347f. 351, 359; Nett 59 Ja iii.176
    cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī
    Āsādeti
    1. - 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; figuratively to offend, assail insult MN i.371 Ja i.481 Ja v.197 aorist āsādesi Thag 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate);
    2. absolutive āsādetvā Ja v.272 Mil 100 Mil 205 (˚ayitvā) Pv-a 266 (isiṁ), āsādiya Ja v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiṁ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q.v.); infin. āsāduṁ Ja v.154 & āsādituṁ ibid.;
    3. gerundive āsādanīya Mil 205 Vv-a 213 (an˚)
    4. to come near to (c.
    5. accusative ), approach get Ja iii.206 (khuracakkaṁ). Asalha & Asalhi
    causative of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna
    Āsāḷhā
    Āsāḷhī
    feminine
    1. name of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compound as Āsaḷha˚ Āsaḷhi˚, viz.; ˚nakkhatta Ja i.50 Snp-a 208
    • ˚puṇṇamā Ja i.63 Dhp-a i.87 Snp-a 199 Vv-a 66 Pv-a 137
    • ˚māsa Snp-a 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.) Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṁ pacchimo māso)
    Sanskrit āṣāḍha
    Āsāvati
    feminine name of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) Ja iii.250 Ja iii.251
    Āsāsati
    1. to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaṁs in āsaṁsati & āsiṁsati (q.v.) & their derivations. past participle ; āsiṭṭha (q.v.) Asi & Asim cp. Sanskrit āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + ; śās
    Āsi
    Āsiṁ
    1. 3rd & 1; st singular aorist of atthi (q.v.)
    Āsiṁsaka
    adjective
    1. wishing, aspiring after, praying for Mil 342
    from ā + siṁsati, cp. āsaṁsā
    Āsiṁsati
    1. to hope for wish, pray for (literally praise for the sake of gain), desire (w. accusative ) SN i.34 SN i.62 Snp 779 Snp 1044 Snp 1046 ‣See Nd2 135 Ja i.267 Ja iii.251 Ja iv.18 Ja v.435 Ja vi.43 Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100 Vv-a 337 Pv-a 226 (ppr. āsiṁsamāna for āsamāna, q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit āśaṁsati, ā + śaṁs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaṁsati, abhisiṁsati & āsaṁsati
    Āsiṁsanaka
    adjective
    1. hoping for something, literally praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging Thag-a 217 (for āsaṁsuka Thag 2, 273)
    from āsiṁsanā
    Āsiṁsanā
    feminine
    1. desire, wish, craving Ja v.28 Dhs 1059 1136 (+ āsiṁsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53
    abstract from ā + śaṁs, cp. āsiṁsati
    Āsiṁsaniya
    adjective
    1. to be wished for, desirable Mil 2 (˚ratana)
    gerundive of āsiṁsati
    Āsikkhita
    1. sohooled, instructed Pv-a 67 Pv-a 68
    past participle of ā + śikṣ, Sanskrit āśikṣita
    Āsiñcati
    1. to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44 Vin ii.208 Ja iv.376 Vv 796 (= siñcati Vv-a 307) Pv-a 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (absolutive ˚itvā).
    2. past participle āsitta (q.v.) cp. vy˚
    3. ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati
    Āsiṭṭha
    1. wished or longed for Pv-a 104 *Asita
    past participle of āsāsati, Sanskrit āśiṣṭa
    *Āsita1
    1. “having eaten”, but probably māsita (past participle of mṛś to touch, cp. Sanskrit mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. Ja ii.446 (dumapakkani-m-asita, where C reading is māsita & explanation khāditvā asita (variant reading āsita) dhāta) Mil 302 (visam-āsita affected with poison = visamāsita) cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at Ja vi.354 (tiṇa˚, explained by Commentary as khādaka)

      • āsita at Ja v.70 is very doubtful, variant reading āsina & asita; Commentary explains by dhāta suhita p. 73. *Asita
      = asita1?
    *Āsita2
    1. at Vv-a 276 is better read with variant reading SS bhāsita (-vādana etc.)
    registered as such with meaning “performed” by Hardy in Index
    Āsitta
    1. sprinkled, poured out, anointed Ja v.87 Pug 31 Mil 286 Dhs-a 307 Dhp-a i.10 Vv-a 69
    past participle of āsiñcati, Sanskrit āsikta
    Āsittaka
    adjective
    1. mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna “decorated divan"?) Thag-a 61 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q.v.)
    āsitta + ka
    Āsītika
    adjective
    1. 80 years old MN ii.124 Ja iii.395 Snp-a 172
    from asīta
    Āsītika
    masculine
    1. a certain plant MN i.80 = 245 (˚pabba)
    etymology? cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsītakī Lal. v.319
    Āsīdati
    1. -1. to come together, literally to sit by DN i.248 (Burmese variant ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?)
    • to come or go near, to approach (w.
    • accusative ), to get (to) AN iii.69 (āsīvisaṁ), 373 (na sādhurūpaṁ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na) Ja iv.56

  • to knock against, insult, offend attack Ja v.267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa-vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya Commentary ).

    • past participle āsanna (q.v.) ‣See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada &
    • causative āsādeti
    cp. Sanskrit āsīdati, ā + sad
  • Āsīna
    adjective
    1. sitting SN i.195 = Nd2 136 Snp 1105 Snp 1136 Dhp 227 Dhp 386 Ja i.390 Ja iii.95 Ja v.340 Ja vi.297 Dāvs ii.17
    past participle of ās ‣See āsati
    Āsīyati
    1. P. Text S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sanskrit More likely as a passive formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i.e. to abide etc. to have one’s home, one’s abode or support in (
    2. locative ), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Mil 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i.e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water)
    3. etymology doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, Pali Grammar 40 same with meaning “cool oneself”; MorrisJ.
    Āsīvisa
    1. Derivation uncertain. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āsīviṣa (e.g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake’s poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108 SN iv.172 AN ii.110 AN iii.69 Ja i.245 Ja ii.274 Ja iv.30 Ja iv.496 Ja v.82 Ja v.267 Pug 48 Vism 470 (in comparison) Dhp-a i.139 Dhp-a ii.8 38 Snp-a 334 458, 465 Vv-a 308
    Āsīsanā
    1. ‣See āsiṁsanā;
    Āsu
    1. expletive particle = assu3 Ja v.241 (variant reading assu; nipātamattaṁ Commentary p.243)
    Āsuṁ
    1. 3rd plural aorist of atthi.

    Āsumbhati
    (& Āsumhati)
    1. to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263 265 Vv 5011 (˚itvāna) Ja iii.435 (aorist āsumhi, gloss khipi)
    2. ā + śumbh to glide
    Āsevati
    1. to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy AN i.10 Snp 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps ii.93 (maggaṁ). past participle āsevita
    2. ā + sev
    Āsevana
    neuter & āsevanā
    • feminine

      1. -1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117 Pv-a 45
      • succession repetition Dhs 1367 Kvu 510 (cp. translation 294, 362); Vism 538
      • from āsevati
    Āsevita
    1. frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed Ja i.21 (v.141; āsevita-nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93 Sdhp 237
    past participle of āsevati
    Āha
    1. a perfect in meaning of preterite & pres. “he says or he said” he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. accusative ), as at Ja i.197 (cullalohitaṁ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Snp 839 Snp 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191).

      1. -3rd singular āha Vin ii.191 Snp 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888 Ja i.280 Ja iii.53 and frequently passim; 3rd pl āhu Snp 87 Snp 181 Dhp 345 Ja i.59 Snp-a 377 and āhaṁsu Ja i.222 Ja iii.278 and frequently
      Vedic āha, originally perfect of ah to speak, meaning “he began to speak”, thus in meaning of pres. “he says”
    Āhacca1
    1. absolutive of āhanati
    Āhacca2
    adjective
    1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka-pīṭha & ˚mañca; a collapsible bed or chair, i e whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 note 5); iv.40, 46 (defined as “ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti” it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169
    2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition MN iii.139 Dhs-a 9 & in compounds.; ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Mil 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in definition of suttaṁ)
    gerundive of āharati, corresponding to a Sanskrit *āhṛtya
    Āhaṭa
    1. brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121 Vin iii.53 DN ii.180 (spelt āhata) Ja iii.512 (gloss ānīta) Dāvs i.58
    past participle of āharati
    Āhata
    1. struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (—˚) Vin iv.236 = DN iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata-citto) Vin i.75 76 SN i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā-hata, affected with freckles, Commentary kāḷa-setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, Kindred Sayings p. 318) Ja iii.456 Sdhp 187 Sdhp 401
    past participle of āhanati
    Āhataka
    1. “one who is beaten”, a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in definition of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā)
    from āhata
    Āhanati
    1. to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Mil 21 (dhamma-bheriṁ); Dāvs iv.50. absolutive āhacca touching MN i.493 Ja i.330 Ja vi.2 Ja vi.200 Snp 716 = uppīḷetva Snp-a 498 Vism 420.
    2. past participle āhata (q.v.)

      1st singular future āhañhi Vin i.8 DN ii.72 where probably to be read as āhañh (= āhañhaṁ) ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 153, 2

    3. ā + han
    Āhanana
    neuter
    1. beating, striking, coming into touch, “impinging” Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (cp. Expositor 151); Vism 515 (identical)
    from ā + han
    Āharaṇa
    adjective-noun
    1. to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Mil 320 Kh viii.9; Kp-a 224; Sdhp 589
    from āharati
    Āharaṇaka
    1. one who has to take or bring, a messenger Ja ii.199 Ja iii.328
    āharaṇa + ka
    Āharati
    1. -1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away MN i.429 (sallaṁ) SN i.121 SN iii.123 Ja i.40 (absolutive āharitvā “with”), 293 (te hattaṁ) Nd2 540c (puttamaṁsaṁ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310 DN-a i.186 188 2. to bring, bring down, fetch DN ii.245 Ja iv.159 (nāvaṁ variant reading āhāhitvā); v.466 Vv-a 63 (bhattaṁ) Pv-a 75 Pv-a 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself Ja v.433 (padosaṁ) Dhp-a ii.89
    2. to bring on to, put into (w.
    3. locative ); fig & intransitive to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to MN i.395 (kaṭhalaṁ mukhe ā.; also infinitive āhattuṁ); Thag 1 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rhys Davids Psalms of the Brethren ver. 1156, not as “accost” p. 419, n.)
    4. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Thag 1, 1173

      • (figuratively) to take up, fall or go back on (w.
      • accusative ), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaṁ dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) Ja iii.383 (desanaṁ), 401; v.462 (vatthuṁ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example) Snp-a 376 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 39 (atītaṁ) 42, 66, 99 (dhamma-desanaṁ) ‣See also payirudāharati.
      • past participle āhaṭa (q.v.)
      • causative II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for Ja iii.88 Ja iii.342 Ja v.466 Pv-a 215
    ā + hṛ
    Āharima
    adjective
    1. “fetching”, fascinating, captivating, charming Vin iv.299 Thag 2, 299 Thag-a 227 Vv-a 14 15, 77
    from āharati
    Āhariya
    1. one who is to bring something Ja iii.328 Ahavana & Ahavaniya;
    gerundive of āharati
    Āhavana
    Āhavanīya;
    1. ‣See under āhuneyya
    Āhāra
    1. feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & figuratively). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enum; n. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine) (2) phassāhāro noun of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚
    2. noun of volition (= cetanā SN-a. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness Thus at MN i.261 DN iii.228 DN iii.276 Dhs 71–⁠73 Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla’s refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food Pv-a 25 A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1910

      1. -12) 54 ‣See on term also Dhs translation 30
      • Vin i.84 DN i.166 SN i.172 SN ii.11 SN ii.13 SN ii.98f. (the 4 kinds in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391 AN iii.51 (sukhass˚) 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four) 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq (nerayikānaṁ etc.) Snp 78 Snp 165 Snp 707 Snp 747 Nd1 25 Ps i.22 (the four) 122 (identical), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508 Pug 21 55 Vb 2 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four) Dhs 58 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124 Dhs-a 153 401 Dhp-a i.183 (˚ṁ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87 Vv-a 118 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 148 (utu physical nutriment); Sdhp 100 Sdhp 395 Sdhp 406 AN v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā
      • ˚an˚; without food unfed MN i.487 (aggi) SN iii.126 SN v.105 Snp 985
      1. ˚ūpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii.136
      • ˚ṭhitika subsisting or living on food DN iii.211 DN iii.273 AN v.50 AN v.55 Ps i.5, 122
      • ˚pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Mil 244 or is it “restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combination at Mil 313
      • ˚maya “food-like” feeding stuff, food Ja iii.523
      • ˚lolatā greed after food Snp-a 35
      • ˚samudaya origin of nutriment SN iii.59
      from ā + hṛ; , literally taking up or on to oneself
    Āhāratthaṁ

    the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati Vin i.199 of medicine, ʻ to penetrate into food-ness ʼ, to come under the category of food Mil 152 of poison, to turn into food. According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaṁ and ˚atthaṁ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaṁ, and records no variant ‣See p. 425 āhāra + tta

    Āhāreti
    1. to take food, eat, feed on SN ii.13 SN iii.240 SN iv.104 AN i.114 AN i.295 AN ii.40 AN ii.145 AN ii.206 AN iv.167 Nd2 540c (āhāraṁ & puttamaṁsaṁ cp. SN ii.98)
    denominative from āhāra
    Āhika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaṁ & sattāhaṁ) MN iii.157
      derived from aha2
    Āhiṇḍati
    1. to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. accusative ) Vin i.203 (senāsana-cārikaṁ), 217; ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṁ); iv.62 Ja i.48 108, 239 Nd2 540b; Pv iii.229 (= vicarati Pv-a 185) Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviṁ) Vv-a 238 (tattha tattha) Pv-a 143
    2. ā + hiṇḍ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.
    Āhita
    1. put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Snp 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā Snp-a 28) ‣See sam˚
    past participle of ā + dhā
    Āhu
    1. 3rd plural of āha (q.v.)

    Āhuti
    feminine
    1. oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration MN iii.167 SN i.141 Thag 1, 566
    • ˚īnaṁ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts) Ja i.15 Ja v.70 (identical) Vv 6433 (paramâhutiṁ gato deserving the highest adoration) Snp 249 Snp 458 Kvu 530 Snp-a 175 Vv-a 285
    Vedic āhuti, ā + hu
    Āhuna
    1. = āhuti, in āhuna-pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing Vv-a 155 by itself at Vism 219
    Āhuneyya
    adjective
    1. sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful DN iii.5 DN iii.217 (aggi) AN ii.56 AN ii.70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (identical); iv.13, 41 (aggi) Iti 88 (+ pāhuneyya) Vv 6433 (cp. Vv-a 285) ‣See definition at Vism 219 where explained by “āhavanīya” and “āhavanaṁ arahati” deserving of offerings
    a gerundive formation from ā + hu, cp. āhuti
    Āhundarika
    adjective
    1. according to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 73 “crowded up, blocked up, impassable Vin i.79 Vin iv.297 Vism 413 (˚ṁ andha-tamaṁ)
    1. I
    doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?

    I

    I
    1. in i-kāra the letter or sound i Snp-a 12 (˚lopa), 508 (identical)
    Ikka
    1. a bear Ja vi.538 [= accha Commentary )
    Sanskrit ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is Pali accha2
    Ikkāsa
    (?)
    1. at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is translation by “slime of trees”, according to Buddhaghosa’s explanation on p. 321 (to Commentary V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa
    uncertain as regard meaning & etymology
    Ikkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. ‣Seeing Vism 16
    from īkṣ
    Ikkhaṇika
    1. a fortuneteller Vin iii.107 SN ii.260 Ja i.456 Ja i.457 Ja vi.504
    from īkṣ to look or ‣See, cp. akkhi
    Ikkhati
    1. to look Ja v.153 Thag-a 147 Dhs-a 172
    from īkṣ
    Iṅgita
    neuter
    1. movement, gesture, sign Ja ii.195 Ja ii.408 Ja vi.368 Ja vi.459
    past participle of ingati = iñjati
    Iṅgha
    indeclinable
    1. participle of exhortation literally “get a move on”, come on, go on, look here Snp 83 Snp 189 Snp 862 Snp 875 = 1052 Ja v.148 Pv iv.57 Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto Vv-a 237) Vv-a 47 Dhp-a iv.62
    Sanskrit anga probably after Pali ingha (or añja, q.v.); from iñjati, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1883, 84
    Iṅghāḷa
    1. P. Text S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Thag 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra-kāsu Thag-a 256). The whole compound is doubtful
    according to Morris J.
    Icc'
    1. ‣See iti
    Iccha
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires SN i.50 SN ii.156; an˚ without desires SN i.61 SN i.204 Snp 707 app identical Snp 628 Snp 707
      the adjective form of icchā
    Icchaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. wishing, desirous, only in neuter adverb yad-icchikaṁ (and yen˚;) after one’s wish or liking MN iii.97 AN iii.28
      2. from iccha
    Icchati1
    1. to wish, desire, ask for (c. accusative ), expect SN i.210 (dhammaṁ sotuṁ i.) Snp 127 Snp 345 Snp 512 Snp 813 Snp 836 Dhp 162 Dhp 291 Nd1 3 138, 164; Nd2 s.v.; Pv ii.63 Pug 19 Mil 269 Mil 327 Snp-a 16 23, 321; Kp-a 17 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 74; Pot. icche Dhp 84 Snp 835 Pv ii.66 & iccheyya DN ii.2 DN ii.10 Snp 35 Dhp 73 Dhp 88; ppr. icchaṁ Snp 826 Snp 831 Snp 937Dhp 334 (phalaṁ)
    2. aorist icchi Pv-a 31

      • grd icchitabba Pv-a 8
      • past participle iṭṭha & icchita; (q.v.) Note. In preposition
      • compounds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with
      • past participle both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita Thus ajjhesati, past participle ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sanskrit anvicehati); pariyesati (Sanskrit parīcchati), past participle pariyiṭṭha pariyesita
      Sanskrit icchati, iṣ, cp. Avestan isaiti, Old Bulgarian iskati, Old High German eiscōn, Anglo-Saxon āscian = English ask; all of same meaning “seek wish”
    Icchati2
    1. ‣See aticchati & cp. ; icchatā
    Sanskrit rcchati of ṛ, concerning which ‣See appeti
    Icchatā
    1. (—˚) feminine

      1. wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vb 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚; Vb 351 370
      abstract from icchā
    Icchana
    neuter
    1. desiring, wish Ja iv.5 Ja vi.244
    from iṣ2, cp. Sanskrit īpsana
    Icchā
    feminine
    1. wish, longing, desire DN ii.243 DN iii.75 SN i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraṁ parikassati) AN ii.143 AN iv.293f.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq. Snp 773 Snp 872 Dhp 74 Dhp 264 (˚lobha-samāpanna) Nd1 29 30 Pug 19 Dhs 1059 1136 Vb 101 357, 361, 370; Nett 18 23, 24; Asl. 363 Dhs-a 250 (read icchā for issā? ‣See Dhs translation 100) Snp-a 108 Pv-a 65 Pv-a 155; Sdhp 242 Sdhp 320
    1. ˚āvacara moving in desires MN i.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27 -āvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Snp 306
    • ˚pakata same Vin i.97 AN iii.119 AN iii.191 AN iii.219f. Pug 69 Mil 357 Vism 24 (where Buddhaghosa however takes it as “icchāya apakata” and puts apakata = upadduta) -vinaya discipline of one’s wishes DN iii.252 AN iv.15 v.165 sq
    from icchati, iṣ2
    Icchita
    1. wished, desired, longed for Ja i.208 Dhs-a 364 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113 127 (twice)
    past participle of icchati
    Ijjhati
    1. to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed prosper, be successful SN i.175 (“work effectively translation; = samijjhati mahapphalaṁ hoti Commentary ); iv.303 Snp 461 Snp 485 Ja v.393 Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati Pv-a 120) Pot. ijjhe Snp 458 Snp 459 preterite ijjhittha (= Sanskrit ṛdhyiṣṭha Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha Vv-a 103). past participle iddha ‣See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. cp. sam˚
    2. Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Latin alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & Pali iddhi power
    Ijjhana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. success, carrying out successfully Ps i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174 Vb 217f.; Vism 266, 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi) Dhs-a 91 118, 237
      from ijjhati
    Iñjati
    1. to shake, move, turn about, stir DN i.56 SN i.107 SN i.132 SN i.181 (aniñjamāna ppr. medium “impassive”); iii.211 Thag 1, 42 2, 231; Nd2 s.v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377 DN-a i.167
    2. past participle iñjita (q.v.)
    3. Vedic ṛñjati (cp. Pali ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as aṅg in Sanskrit anga = Pali añja & ingha Vedic pali-angati to turn about ‣See also ānejja & añjati; 1
    Iñjanā
    feminine & ˚aṁ
    • neuter

      1. shaking, movement, motion Snp 193 (= calanā phandanā Snp-a 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā Commentary ). an˚; immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15 ii.118
      from iñj ‣See iñjati
    Iñjita
    1. shaken, moved Thag 1, 386 (an˚). Usually as neuter iñjitaṁ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation MN i.454 SN i.109 SN iv.202 AN ii.45 Snp 750 Snp 1040 (
    2. plural iñjitā), 1048 ‣See Nd2 140 Dhp 255 Vb 390 On the 7 iñjitas ‣See J.P. Text S. 1884, 58
    3. past participle of iñjati
    Iñjitatta
    neuter
    1. state of vacillation, wavering, motion SN v.315 (kāyassa)
    abstract from iñjita nt.
    Iṭṭha
    adjective
    1. pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) DN i.245 DN ii.192 MN i.85 SN iv.60 SN iv.158 SN iv.235f.; v.22, 60, 147 AN ii.66f.; v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure) Snp 759 It. 15 Vb 2 100, 337
    • Alone as
    • neuter meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Snp 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (identical) Pv-a 116 (= bhadraṁ), 140
    • ˚aniṭṭha unpleasant disagreeable Pv-a 32 Pv-a 52 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 116
    • ‣ See also pariy˚ in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. Itthaka (Itthaka)
    past participle of icchati
    Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā)
    feminine
    1. -1. a burnt brick a tile Vin ii.121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished from silāpakāra & dāru˚) Ja iii.435 Ja iii.446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya) Pv-a 4 (˚cuṇṇa-makkhita-sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder i.e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa-cūṛn’âvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ’haṁ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka → piṣṭa). 2. plural (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope Dhp-a iii.29 61 Vv-a 157
    2. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit iṣṭakā, e.g. Divy 221; from the Indogermanic root *idh → *aidh to burn, cp. Sanskrit idhma firewood inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr burn, fire-brand; Latin aedes, aestas & aestus more especially Avestan ištya tile, brick
    Iṭṭhi˚
    1. ; in ˚khagga-dhāra at Ja vi.223 should be read iddha
    Iṇa
    neuter
    1. debt DN i.71 DN i.73 AN iii.352 AN v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali) Snp 120 Ja i.307 Ja ii.388 Ja. Ja. Ja iii.66 iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?) 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193 Mil 375 Pv-a 273 Pv-a 276, iṇaṁ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556 Snp-a 289 Pv-a 3
    • iṇaṁ muñcati to discharge a debt Ja iv.280 Ja v.238 ˚ṁ sodheti same Pv-a 276
    • labhati same Pv-a 3
    1. ˚apagama absence of debt Thag-a 245
    • ˚gāhaka a borrower Mil 364
    • ˚ghāta stricken by debt Snp 246 (iṇaṁ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta)
    • ˚ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as variant reading at all passages ‣See aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt MN i.463 = SN iii.93 = Iti 89 = Mil 279
    • ˚paṇṇa promissory note Ja i.230 Ja iv.256
    • ˚mokkha release from debt Ja iv.280 Ja v.239
    • ˚sādhaka negotiator of a loan Mil 365
    Sanskrit ṛṇa ‣See also Pali an-aṇa
    Iṇāyika

    one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor SN i.170 Ja iv.159 Ja iv.256 Ja vi.178 Thag-a 271 ‣See also dhanika) Pv-a 3

  • a debtor Vin i.76 Nd1 160.

    from iṇa
  • Ita
    1. gone, only in compound dur-ita gone badly, as neuter evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compound with preposition, as peta, vīta etc
    2. past participle of eti, i
    Itara1
    adjective
    1. other second, next; different Dhp 85 Dhp 104 Dhp 222 Ja ii.3 Ja iii.26 iv.4 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 83 Pv-a 117. In repetition compound itarītara one or the other, whatsoever, any Snp 42 Ja v.425 Nd2 141 Mil 395 Kp-a 145, 147; accusative itarītaraṁ instrumental; itarītarena used as
    2. adverb of one kind or another in every way, anyhow cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit itaretara Mvu iii.348 and ‣See Wackernagel Altindische Grammatik II. Ś 121 c.
      1. Ja vi.448 (˚ṁ) Dhp 331 (˚ena) Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, variant reading itaritarena, explained by itaritaraṁ Vv-a 333)
      Vedic itara = Latin iterum a second time; compar. of
    3. pronoun base *i, as in ayaṁ, etaṁ, iti etc.
    Itara2
    1. adjective frequently spelling for ittara (q.v.)
    Iti (ti)
    indeclinable
    1. emphatic deictic particle “thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of “iti” is explained by the old Pāli Commentary in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a “filling” particle than trying to define its meaning viz
    • itī ti padasandhi padasaṁsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc.” Nd1 123 = Nd2 137. The same explanation also for iti’ haṁ ‣See below iv.-I. As deictic
    • adverb “thus, in this way” (Vism 423 iti = evaṁ pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Snp 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naṁ vijaññā), 805 Iti 123 (ito devā … taṁ namassanti) Dhp 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti) Vv 7910 (= evaṁ Vv-a 307) Vv-a 5
    • (b) referring to what follows DN i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati) AN i.205 (identical)-II. As emphatic participle pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one’s own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one’s own or other’s) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e.g. bālo ti vuccati Dhp 63 = bālo vuccati)
    1. -1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e.g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataṁ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaṁ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaṁ bhante ti kho Sīho …. DN i.151
    • in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact “so it is that” (cp. English “viz.”, German “und zwar”), mostly untranslated Kh iv. (arahā ti pavuccati) Ja i.253 (tasmā pesanaka-corā t’ eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuṁ makkato sigālo uddo ti) Pv-a 112 (ankuro pañca-sakaṭasatehi … aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca-sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata-sahassehi … patipannā)
    • (b) as statement of a thought “like this”, “I think”, so, thus Snp 61 (“sango eso” iti ñatvā knowing “this is defilement”), 253 (“neso maman” ti iti naṁ vijaññā), 783 (“iti’ han” ti) 1094 (etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ Nibbānaṁ iti naṁ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraṁ gaccheyya tasmā “Parāyanaṁ” iti)
    • III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combination with other participle It is elided & contracted as follows icc’ eva, t’ eva, etc.
    • final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e.g. mā evaṁ akatthā ti Dhp-a; i.7 kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc’ eva Pv i.119 (evam eva Pv-a 59); t’ eva Ja i.253 Miin 114; tv’ eva Ja i.203 Ja ii.2
    • ˚iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say DN i.228 DN i.229 DN i.240
    • ˚iti kho thus, therefore DN i.98 DN i.103 iii.135. iti and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1
    • ˚iti ha thus surely, indeed Snp 934 Snp 1084 ‣See below under ītihītihaṁ; cp. Snp-a Index 669: itiha? and itikirā Iti 76 DN-a i.247 as iti haṁ at Snp 783 (same explanation at Nd1 71 as for iti)
    • ˚kin ti how Ja ii.159
    1. ˚kirā feminine a substantivised iti kira
      1. hearsay, literally “so I guess” or “I have heard” AN i.189 = ii.191 sq. = Nd2 151. cp. itiha
      2. ˚bhava becoming so & so (opposite abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava) DN i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DN-a i.91) AN ii.248 Iti 109 (identical); synonym with itthabhava (q.v.) -vāda “speaking so & so”, talk, gossip MN i.133 SN v.73 AN ii.26 Iti iii.35
      3. ˚vuttaka neuter a noun formation from iti vuttaṁ

        “so it has been said” (book of) quotations, “Logia”, name of the fourth book of the Khuddaka-nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaṁ h’ etaṁ Bhagavatā “thus has the Buddha said” ‣See khuddaka and navanga Vin iii.8 MN i.133 AN ii.7 AN ii.103 AN iii.86 AN iii.177 AN iii.361f. Pug 43 62 Kp-a 12. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. compares the interesting Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit distortion itivṛttaṁ

      4. ˚hāsa = iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd singular perfect of atthi
        1. “thus indeed it has been”, legendary lore, oral tradition, history usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa-pañca-mānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. DN i.88 = ‣See DN-a i.247 AN i.163 AN iii.223 Snp 447 Snp 1020 cp. also Mvu i.556
        • hītiha itiha + itiha
        1. “so so” talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp itikirā & anītiha. Nd; 2 spells ītihītiha) MN i.520 SN i.154 Snp 1084 Nd2 151
        Vedic iti, of pronoun base *i, cp. Sanskrit itthaṁ thus, itthā here, there; Avestan ipa so; Latin ita & item thus cp. also Pali ettha; literally “here, there (now), then”
    Ito

    indeclinable

    1. adverb of succession or motion in space & time “from here". “from now". (1) with reference to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opposed to the “other” world) Iti 77 Snp 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence attabhāvaṁ sandhāy’ āha Snp-a 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i.e. from me), 1101 Pv i.57 (ito dinnaṁ what is given in this world); i.62 (i.e. manussalokato Pv-a 33); i.123 (= idhalokato Pv-a 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā) Pv-a 46 (ito dukkhato mutti)
    • (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c’ ito here and there Pv-a 4 Pv-a 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there Dhp-a; ii.80.
    • with reference to time from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with numeral ordinal or card., with reference either to past or
    • future ) (a) referring to the past, since DN ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago) Snp 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago Snp-a 457 Text reads atthami) Vv-a 319 (ito kira tiṁsa-kappa-sahasse) Pv-a 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (identical), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re-birth)
    • (b) referring to the
    • future, i.e. henceforth in
    • future, from now e.g. ito sattame divase in a week Vv-a 138 ito paraṁ further, after this Snp-a 160 178, 412, 549 Pv-a 83 ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward Ja i.63 (ito dāni p.) Pv-a 41
    Vedic itaḥ, ablative adverb formation from
  • pronoun base *i, cp. iti, ayaṁ etc.
  • Ittara
    1. (sometimes spelt itara adjective

      1. -1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief unstable MN i.318 (opposite dīgharattaṁ) AN ii.187 Ja i.393 iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ Commentary ), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode) Pv i.1111 (= na cira-kāla-ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma-dhamma Pv-a 60) DN-a i.195 Pv-a 60 (= paritta khaṇika)
      • small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean MN ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth) AN ii.34 Snp 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna Snp-a 509) Mil 93 Mil 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit itvaṛa, e.g. Divy 317 (dāna)
    Vedic itvara in meaning “going”, going along, hence developed meaning “passing” from i
    Ittaratā
    feminine
    1. changeableness Mil 93 (of a woman)
    from ittara
    Ittha
    indeclinable
    1. here, in this world (or “thus, in such a way”) only in compound ˚bhāv’ aññathā-bhāva such an (i.e. earthly existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form” (cp. itibhāva & itthatta Snp 729 Snp 740 = 752 Iti 9 (variant reading itthi˚ for iti˚) = AN ii.10 = Nd2 172a Iti 94 (variant reading ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sanskrit itthā & itthaṁ Sanskrit itthaṁ ‣See next
    the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in compounds. while the Pāli form is ettha
    Itthaṁ
    indeclinable
    1. thus, in this way DN i.53 DN i.213 Dāvs iv.35; v.18
    1. ˚nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56 Vin iv.136 Ja i.297 Mil 115 Dhp-a ii.98
    • ˚bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in compound ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i.e. the ablative case Snp-a 441 Vv-a 162 174 Pv-a 150
    adverb from pronoun base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning
    Itthatta1
    1. neuter [ittha + *tvaṁ, abstract from ittha. The curious Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit distortion of this word is icchatta Mvu 417 being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not “thusness” or “life as we conceive it”, as Mrs. Rhys Davids in Kindred Sayings i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaṁ seems to exist ‣See ittha); “life in these conditions” Kindred Sayings ii.17; explained by itthabhāva Commentary on SN i.140 ‣See Kindred Sayings 318
    • ‣ See also freq formula AN of arahatta
    • DN i.18 DN i.84 AN i.63 AN ii.82 AN ii.159 203 Snp 158 Dhs 633 Pug 70 71 DN-a i.112
    Itthatta2
    neuter
    1. state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (itthi-sabhāva Dhs-a 321). Itthi & Itthi
    itthi + *tvaṁ abstract from itthi
    Itthi
    Itthī
    feminine
    1. woman female; also (usually as—˚) wife. O past participle purisa man ‣See e.g. for contrast of itthi and purisa Ja v.72 Ja v.398 Nett 93 Dhp-a i.390 Pv-a 153

      • SN i.33 (nibbānass’ eva santike) 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185 AN i.28 AN i.138 AN ii.115 AN ii.209 iii.68, 90, 156; iv.196 (purisaṁ bandhati) Snp 112 Snp 769 (
      • nominative
      • plural thiyo = itthi-saññikā thiyo Snp-a 513) Ja i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (genitive
      • plural itthinaṁ); ii.415 (
      • nominative
      • plural thiyo) v.397 (thi-ghātaka), 398 (genitive dative itthiyā), v.425 (nom
      • plural itthiyo) Vb 336 337 DN-a i.147 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 44 Pv-a 46 67, 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64 Sdhp 79
      • anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife Ja ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ Commentary ); kul'-itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10 AN iii.76 AN iv.16 AN iv.19 dahar a young wife Ja i.291 dur˚ a poor woman Ja iv.38 Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 =. AN v.264 = Vv-a 72 viz. mātu-rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚ ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā ‣See Vin iii.139 for explanation- SN i.38 (malaṁ brahmacariyassa), 43 (identical) Ja i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv.222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaṁ pamathenti); v.425 (sīho yathā … tath’ itthiyo); women as goods for sale SN i.43 (bhaṇḍānaṁ uttamaṁ) Dhp-a i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaṁ)
      1. ˚agāra (-āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women’s apartment, seraglio Vin i.72 Vin iv.158 SN i.58 SN i.89 Ja i.90 also collective for womenfolk women (cp. German frauenzimmer) DN ii.249 Ja v.188
      • ˚indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opposite puris indriya) SN v.204 AN iv.57f.; Vism 447, 492 Dhs 585 633 653 et passim -kathā talk about women DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.90)
      • ˚kāma the craving for a woman SN iv.343
      • ˚kutta a woman’s behaviour, woman’s wiles, charming behaviour coquetry AN iv.57 = Dhs 633 Ja i.296 Ja i.433 Ja ii.127 Ja ii.329 iv.219, 472 Dhp-a iv.197
      • ˚ghātaka a woman-killer Ja v.398
      • ˚dhana wife’s treasure, dowry Vin iii.16
      • ˚dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Snp 106 Ja iii.260 Pv-a 5
      • ˚nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633 713, 836
      • ˚pariggaha a woman’s company, a woman Nd1 11
      • ˚bhāva existence as woman womanhood SN i.129 Thag 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī cp. Thag-a 178 Dhs 633 Pv-a 168
      • ˚rūpa womanly beauty AN i.1 AN iii.68 Thag 2, 294
      • ˚lakkhaṇa fortune-telling regarding a woman DN i.9 (cp. Dhp-a i.94 + purisa˚) Ja vi.135
      • ˚liṅga “sign of a woman”, feminine quality, female sex Vism 184 Dhs 633 713, 836 Dhs-a 321f. -sadda the sound (or word) “woman” Dhp-a i.15
      • ˚soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112
      Vedic stri, Avestan strī woman, perhaps with Sanskrit sātuḥ uterus from Indogermanic ˚sī to sow or produce, Latin sero Gothic saian, Old High German sāen, Anglo-Saxon sāwan etc., cp. also Welsh hīl progeny, Old Irish sīl ‣Seed ‣See J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29 The regular representative of Vedic strī is Pali thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & comp; n.) ‣See thī
    Itthikā
    feminine
    1. a woman Vin iii.16 DN ii.14 Ja i.336 Vv 187 Sdhp 79. As adjective itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men) SN ii.264 (identical and appitthikāni. Ida & Idam
    from itthi
    Ida
    Idaṁ
    indeclinable
    1. emphatic demonstrative adverb in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here:; idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i.e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = SN i.136 DN i.185 Dhs 1004 1061 Vb 340 362, 365; Vism 518; etc.
    2. now, then which idha is more frequently) DN ii.267 DN ii.270 almost synonym (for with kira.
    3. just (this), even so, only: idam-atthika just sufficient, proper, right Thag 1, 984 (cīvara) Pug 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika ‣See Pug AN 250); as idam-atthitā “being satisfied with what is sufficient” at Vism 81 explained as atthika-bhāva at Pug AN 250. idaṁsaccābhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i.e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya-ganthā, viz abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṁ˚ ‣See Dhs 1135 & Dhs translation 304 DN iii.230 SN v.59 Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq
    4. nt. of ayaṁ (idaṁ) in function of a deictic participle
    Idāni
    indeclinable
    1. now Dhp 235 Dhp 237; Kp-a 247
    Vedic idānīṁ
    Iddha1
    1. in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear Ja vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for Text iṭṭhi-khagga˚); Dīpavaṁsa vi.42
    past participle of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma
    Iddha2
    1. (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy DN i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana of a prosperous town) AN iii.215 (identical) Ja vi.227 361 (= issara Commentary ), 517; Dāvs i.11
    • (b) successful satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaṁ); iv.313 (ovādo)
    past participle of ijjhati; cp. Sanskrit ṛddha
    Iddhi
    . There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻ potency ʼ.
    1. -1. Pre-Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life good health, and popularity (DN ii.177 MN iii.176 cp. Ja iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons 4. of good food, AN i.145 At MN i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at DN ii.72 It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175)
    • Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums ‣See under Abhiññā. Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind-made images of oneself; to become invisible; to
    • passive through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (DN i.77 DN i.212 DN ii.87 DN ii.213 iii.112, 281 SN ii.121 SN v.264 SN v.303 AN i.170 AN i.255 AN iii.17 28, 82, 425; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384 DN-a i.122). For other such powers ‣See S i.144; iv.290 v.263 AN iii.340

  • The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At DN i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻ It is because I ‣See danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof ʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from MN i.34 AN iii.425 and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D; ii.213 MN i.103 AN i.39 AN i.297 AN ii.256 AN iii.82 Ps i.111; ii.154, 164, 205 Vb 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man ‣Seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (DN iii.112 AN i.93 Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dialogues of the Buddha i.272, 3; Compendium 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps ii.150; Vism xii Dhp-a i.91 Ja i.47 Ja i.360

    1. ˚ānubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; iii.67 SN i.147 SN iv.290 Pv-a 53
    • ˚ābhisaṅkhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16 17, 25 DN i.106 SN iii.92 SN iv.289 SN v.270 Snp p. 107 Pv-a 57 Pv-a 172 Pv-a 212
    • ˚pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25 28, 180, 209; ii.76, 112, 200 DN i.211 DN i.212 DN iii.3 DN iii.4 DN iii.9 DN iii.12f. 27 SN iv.290 AN i.170 292; Ps ii.227
    • ˚pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240 DN ii.103 DN ii.115f. 120; iii.77, 102 127, 221 MN ii.11 MN iii.296 SN i.116 SN i.132 SN iii.96 SN iii.153 SN iv.360; v.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285 AN iv.128f. 203, 463; v.175 Nd1 14 45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd1 s.v.; Ps i.17, 21, 84; ii.56, 85 sq., 120 166, 174 Ud 62 Dhs 358 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83 Dhs-a 237 Dhp-a iii.177 Dhp-a iv.32
    • ˚bala the power of working wonders Vv-a 4 Pv-a 171
    • ˚yāna the carriage (figuratively) of psychic faculties Mil 276
    • ˚vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq
    • ˚vidhā kinds of iddhi DN i.77 DN i.212 DN ii.213 DN iii.112 DN iii.281 SN ii.121 SN v.264f. 303 AN i.170f. 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 384 DN-a i.222
    • ˚visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67 Nett 23
    Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati
  • Iddhika1
    1. (—˚) adjective the compound form of addhika in compound kapaṇ-iddhika tramps & wayfarers ‣See kapaṇa, e.g. at Ja i.6 Ja iv.15 Pv-a 78

    Iddhika2
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. possessed of power, only in compound mah-iddhika of great power, always combined with mah-ānubhāva, e.g. at Vin i.31 Vin ii.193 Vin iii.101 SN ii.155 MN i.34 Thag 1, 429 As mahiddhiya at Ja v.149 ‣See mahiddhika
      iddhi + ka
    Iddhimant
    adjective
    1. -1. (literally) successful, proficient, only in negative an˚; unfortunate, miserable, poor Ja vi.361 2. (figuratively) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67 Vin iv.108 AN i.23 AN i.25 AN ii.185 AN iii.340 AN iv.312 Snp 179 Nett 23 Sdhp 32 Sdhp 472
    from iddhi
    Idha
    indeclinable
    1. here in this place, in this connection, now; especially in this world or present existence Snp 1038 Snp 1056 Snp 1065 Iti 99 (idh ûpapanna reborn in this existence) Dhp 5 Dhp 15 Dhp 267 Dhp 343 Dhp 392 Nd1 40 109, 156 Nd2 145 146 Snp-a 147 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 71
    2. ˚idhaloka this world, the world of men Snp 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c) Pv-a 64 in this religion Vb 245 On different meanings of idha ‣See Dhs-a 348
    Sanskrit iha, adverb of space from pronoun base *i (cp. ayaṁ, iti etc.), cp. Latin ihi, Avestan ida
    Idhuma
    1. fire-wood - Tela-kaṭāha-gāthā, p. 53, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884
    Sanskrit idhma ‣See etymology under iṭṭhakā
    Inda
    1. -1. The Vedic god Indra DN i.244; ii.261, 274 Snp 310 Snp 316 Snp 679 Snp 1024 Nd1 177
    • lord, chief, king Sakko devānaṁ indo DN i.216 DN i.217 DN ii.221 DN ii.275 SN i.219 Vepɔcitti asurindo SN i.221 ff. manussinda, SN i.69 manujinda Snp 553 narinda, Snp 863 all of the Buddha, ʻ chief of men ʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken god of war ‣See the passages collected in Dialogues of the Buddha ii.294 298. The idiom sa-Indā devā, DN ii.261 DN ii.274 AN v.325 means ʻ the gods about Indra, Indra’s retinue ʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiṁsā sahindakā means the Text gods together with their leader (DN ii.208
    1. -212 SN iii.90 cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story]
    1. ˚aggi (ind’ aggi) Indra’s fire, i.e. lightning Pv-a 56
    • ˚gajjita
    • neuter Indra’s thunder Mil 22
    • ˚jāla deception DN-a i.85
    • ˚jālika a juggler, conjurer Mil 331
    • ˚dhanu the rainbow DN-a i.40
    • ˚bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiṁsa-bhavana)
    • ˚liṅga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491
    • ˚sāla name of tree Ja iv.92
    Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Indogermanic *eid to shine, cp. Latin īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Old Irish ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Latin neriosus strong Nero).
    Indaka
    [
    1. -1. proper name ‣See Dict. of names, e.g. at Pv ii.957 Pv-a 136f.
    • (—˚) ‣See inda 2
    • dimin. from inda
    Indakhīla
    1. . “Indra’s post”; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house DN ii.254 (˚ṁ ūhacca, cp. Dhp-a ii.181) Vin iv.160 (explained ibid. as sayani-gharassa ummāro, i.e. threshold) SN v.444 (ayokhīlo +) Dhp 95 (˚ûpama, cp. Dhp-a ii.181) Thag 1, 663 Ja i.89 Mil 364 Vism 72, 466 Snp-a 201 DN-a i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā) Dhp-a ii.180 (˚sadisaṁ Sāriputtassa cittaṁ), 181 (nagara-dvāre nikhataṁ ˚ṁ)
    inda + khīla, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit indrakīla Divy 250 Divy 365, 544; Avs i.109, 223
    Indagū
    1. ‣See hindagū;
    Indagopaka
    1. a sort of insect (“cochineal, a red beetle”, Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Thag 1, 13 Vin iii.42 Ja iv.258 Ja v.168 Dhp-a i.20 Psalms of the Brethren p. 18, n.
    inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector
    Indanīla
    1. a sapphire Ja i.80 Mil 118 Vv-a 111 (+ mahānīla)
    inda + nīla “Indra’s blue”
    Indavāruṇī
    feminine
    1. the Coloquintida plant Ja iv.8 (˚ka-rukkha)
    inda + vāruṇa
    Indīvara
    neuter
    1. the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula Ja v.92 (˚ī-samā ratti); vi.536 Vv 451 (= uddālaka-puppha Vv-a 197)
    etymology?
    Indriya
    neuter
    1. A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics meaning “controlling principle, directive force, élan, ” in the following applications: (a) with reference to sense-perceptibility “faculty, function”, often wrongly interpreted as “organ”; (b) with reference to objective aspects of form and matter “kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign mark” (cp. woman-hood, hood = Gothic haidus “kind form”); (c) with reference to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, “principle, controlling” force; (e) with reference to cognition & insight “category". Definitions of indriya among others at Dhs-a 119 cp. Expositor 157; Dhs translation lvii; Compendium 228, 229
    1. B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumerated under AN a-e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vb 122f. ‣See translation at Compendium 175, 176; and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq a. sensorial (1) cakkh-undriya (“the eye which is a power”, Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of vision, (2) sot-indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚; nose or smell, (4) jivh˚; tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚; body-sensibility, (6) man˚;) mind; b. material (7) itth˚; female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚; male sex or masculinity (9) jīvit˚; life or vitality; c. sensational (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚; pain, (12) somanasa˚; joy, (13 domanass˚; grief, (14) upekh˚; hedonic indifference d moral (15) saddh˚; faith, (16) viriy˚; energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚; concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; e. cognitional (20) anaññāta-ñassāmīt˚; the thought “I shall come to know the unknown”, (21) aññ˚ (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā-v˚; one who knows
    • Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth (no. 7), e.g. at Ps i.7, 137
    • From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections no. 6 manas (mano, man-indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc’ indriyāni, the 6th being silently included ‣See below. This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The following groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1–⁠19) at Ps i.137; 10 (pañca rūpīni; pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos 1
    1. -5, 10
    1. -14, 15
    1. -19) at DN iii.239 cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i.e. nos. 15
    1. -18) at AN ii.141 three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i.e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at AN i.118f. Under aṭṭhavidhaṁ indriya-rūpaṁ (Compendium 159) or rūpaṁ as indriyaṁ “form which is faculty” Dhs 661 (cp translation p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1
    1. -5) the 2 séx-states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9) i.e. groups a & b of enum; n.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709
    1. -717, 971
    1. -973
    • It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under Commentary feminine
    • ; Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas
    1. Commentary Material in detail (grouped according to AN a-e (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1
    1. -5): MN i.295: SN iii.46 (pañcannaṁ ˚ānaṁ avak kanti), 225; iv.168 AN ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos 1
    1. -6): MN i.9 SN iv.176 SN v.74 SN v.205 SN v.230 AN i.113 AN ii.16 39, 152; iii.99, 163, 387 sq.; v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in following phrases: in driyāni saṁvutāni SN ii.231 SN ii.271 SN iv.112 pañcasu ˚esu saṁvuto Snp 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaṁ pi vuttaṁ yeva hoti, i.e. the 6th as manas included, Snp-a 343) ˚esu susaṁvuta Thag 2, 196 (= mana-chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saṁvutā Thag-a 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā DN iii.107 SN ii.218 SN iv.103 SN iv.112 SN iv.175 AN i.25 AN i.94 AN i.113 ii.39; iii.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; iv.25, 166; v.134 Iti 23 24 Nd1 14 Vb 248 360 DN-a i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita-dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni SN ii.275 SN iii.2 SN iii.235 SN iv.294 SN v.301 AN i.181 AN iii.380 ˚ānaṁ samatā (variant reading samatha) AN iii.375f. (‣ See also feminine below ˚āni bhāvitāni Snp 516 (= cakkh’ ādīni cha i. Snp-a 426) Nd2 475 B8

      • Various: SN i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚) Vb 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚)
      • (b); physical: (above B 7
      1. -9) all three: SN v.204 Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ AN iv.57 Vb 122 415 sq.; puris˚ AN iii.404 jīvit Vb 123 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa) ‣See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa
      • (c); sensational (above B 10
      1. -14): SN v.207f. ‣See Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15, 211 sq. Vb 15 71; Nett 88
      • (d) moral (above B 15 19): SN iii.96 SN iii.153 SN iv.36 SN iv.365f.; v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), AN iv.125f. 203, 225; v.56, 175; Ps ii.49, 51 sq., 86 Nd1 14 Nd2 628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kvu 589 Vb 341 Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combination with satipaṭṭhāna sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga magga ‣See Nd2 s.v. p. 263 DN ii.120 Vin iii.93 Ps ii.166 & passim As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16; 19) at Nett 83
      • (e) cognitional (above B 20
      1. -22) DN iii.219 = SN v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship) Iti 53 Ps i.115; ii.30
      • (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a-e, also various peculiar uses: personal; esp physical faculties. SN i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (identical); iii.207 (ākāsaṁ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari-bhinnāni) AN iii.441 (˚ānaṁ avekallatā). magic power AN iv.264f. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaṁ paripāko (moral or physical) over-ripeness of faculties SN ii.2 SN ii.42 AN v.203 Nd2 252 (in definition of jarā) Vb 137 moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaṁ samatā + viriyānaṁ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaṁ jīvaṁ Vin iii.156 Mil 259 heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one’s heart Pv-a 16 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one’s vow Ja ii.274 Ja iv.190
      1. D. Unclassified material DN i.77 (ahīn˚); iii.239 domanass˚ & somanass˚; MN i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (identical); ii.11, 106; iii.296 SN iii.225 SN v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚) AN i.39 AN i.42f. 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282 Ps i.16, 21, 88, 180; ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143 145, 110, 223 Nd1 45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā) Dhs 58 121, 528, 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736 Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara) Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280 Sdhp 342 Sdhp 364 Sdhp 371 Sdhp 449 Sdhp 473
      1. English As adjective (—˚) having one’s senses, mind or heart as such & such SN i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚) v.269 (identical) AN i.70 (id) & passim (identical) AN i.70 (saṁvut˚ 266 (identical), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well-composed) Pv-a 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart)
      1. FeMININE Some compounds: -gutta one who restrains & watches his senses SN i.154 Dhp 375
      • ˚ gutti keeping watch over the senses, self-restraint Dhp-a iv.111
      • a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a Ja i.78 b. AN v.34 AN v.38 b Ps i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175 b Vb 340 342; c SN v.205 c Nett 101 ‣See remark under paropariya
      • ˚bhāvanā cultivation of the (five ‣See above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā) MN iii.298
      • ˚saṁvara restraint or subjugation of the senses DN ii.281 MN i.269 MN i.346 SN i.54 AN iii.360 AN iv.99 AN v.113f. 136, 206 Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq
      Vedic indriya adjective only in meaning “belonging to Indra”; neuter strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense “belonging to the ruler”, i.e. governing, ruling
    2. neuter governing, ruling or controlling principle
    Indhana
    neuter
    1. firewood, fuel Ja iv.27 (adjective an˚ without fuel aggi); v.447 Thag-a 256 Vv-a 335 Sdhp 608. cp. idhuma
    Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1
    Ibbha
    adjective
    1. menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādāpaccā DN i.90 (variant reading SS imbha Text kiṇhā, variant reading kaṇhā), 91, 103 MN i.334 (kiṇhā, variant reading kaṇhā). Also at Ja vi.214 explained by Buddhaghosa as gahapatika at DN-a i.254 (also at Ja vi.215)
    Vedic ibhya belonging to the servants
    Iriṇa
    neuter
    1. barren soil, desert Ja vi.560 (= niroja Commentary ) cp. īriṇa
    Vedic iriṇa, on etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under rarus
    Iriyati
    1. to move, to wander about stir; figuratively to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment MN i.74 MN i.75 SN i.53 (dukkhaṁ aticca iriyati); iv.71 AN iii.451 AN v.41 Snp 947 Snp 1063 Snp 1097 Thag 1, 276 Ja iii.498 (= viharati) Nd1 431 Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16 DN-a i.70
    from īr to set in motion, to stir, Sanskrit īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sanskrit iyarti of; ‣See acchati & icchati; 2; cp. causative īrayati (= Pali īreti)
  • past participle īrṇa & īrita ‣See also issā
  • Iriyanā
    feminine
    1. way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19 82, 295, 380, 441, 716
    from iriyati
    Iriyā
    feminine
    1. movement, posture, deportment MN i.81 Snp 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148) Iti 31 Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana)
    1. ˚patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down ‣See Ps ii.225 & DN-a; i.183. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit īryāpatha Divy 37
    • Vin i.39 Vin ii.146 (˚sampanna) Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple) SN v.78 (cattāro i.) Snp 385 Nd1 225 226; Nd2 s.v. Ja i.22 (of a lion) 66, 506 Mil 17 Vism 104, 128, 290, 396 Dhp-a i.9 iv.17 Vv-a 6 Pv-a 141 Sdhp 604
    cp. from iriyati, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit īryā Divy 485
    Irubbeda
    1. the Rig-veda Dīpavaṁsa v.62 (iruveda) Mil 178 DN-a i.247 Snp-a 447
    Illiyā
    feminine
    1. = illī Ja v.259 Ja vi.50
    from illī, cp. Sanskrit *īlikā
    Illī
    feminine
    1. a sort of weapon, a short one-edged sword Ja v.259
    cp. Vedic ilībiśa proper name of a demon
    Illīyituṁ
    variant reading for allīyituṁ at Ja v.154
    Iva
    indeclinable
    1. participle of comparison: like, as Dhp 1 Dhp 2 Dhp 7 Dhp 8 Dhp 287 Dhp 334 Ja i.295 Snp-a 12 (opamma-vacanaṁ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic-metathetic form viya (q.v.)
    Vedic iva & va
    Isi
    1. [Vedic ṛṣi from ṛṣ
    • Voc. ise Snp 1025
    • plural npm. isayo, genitive isinaṁ SN ii.280 & isīnaṁ SN i.192 etc. inst. isibhi Thag 1, 1065–⁠1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a ‣Seer, Sage, Saint, “Master DN i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi) SN i.33 SN i.35 SN i.65 SN i.128 SN i.191 SN i.192 SN i.226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaṁ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaṁ dhajo) AN ii.24 AN ii.51 Vin iv.15 = 22 (˚bhāsito dhammo) Iti 123 Snp 284 Snp 458 Snp 979 Snp 689 Snp 691 Snp 1008 Snp 1025 Snp 1043 Snp 1044 Snp 1116 (dev˚ divine ‣Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi-nāmakā ye keci isi-pabbajjaṁ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā) Dhp 281 Ja i.17 (v.90: isayo n’ atthi me samā of Buddha) Ja v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (yama-niyam’ ādīnaṁ esanatthena isayo Pv-a 98); ii.133 (= jhān’ ādīnaṁ guṇānaṁ esanatthena isi Pv-a 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaṁ sīlakkhandh’ ādīnaṁ esanatthena isiṁ Pv-a 265) Mil 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika) DN-a i.266 (gen isino); Sdhp 200 Sdhp 384 ‣See also mahesi
    • (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i.245 DN i.104 DN i.238 AN iii.224 AN iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi) Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu
    1. ˚nisabha the first (literally “bull”) among Saints, epithet of the Buddha Snp 698 Vv 167 (cp. Vv-a 82)
    2. ˚pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123 Dhp-a i.105 Dhp-a iv.55 Pv-a 162
    • ˚vāta the wind of a Saint Mil 19 Vism 18 -sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i.e. Gotama Buddha as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) MN i.386 SN i.192 Snp 356 Thag 1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena Snp-a 351) Vv 211 (= buddha-isinaṁ Vipassi-ādīnaṁ sattamo Vv-a 105). Isika (isika)

    Isikā (isīkā)
    feminine
    1. a reed DN i.77 cp. DN-a i.222 Ja vi.67 (isikā)
    Sanskrit iṣīkā
    Isitta
    neuter
    1. rishi-ship DN i.104 (= isi-bhāva DN-a i.274)
    abstract from isi
    Issati
    1. to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy Ja iii.7 ppr. medium issamānaka Sdhp 89 feminine ˚ikā AN ii.203
    2. past participle issita (q.v.)
    3. denominative from issā. Avestan areṣyeiti to be jealous, Latin erro; & Sanskrit irasyati to be angry; Anglo-Saxon eorsian to be angry
    Issattha

    neuter masculine

    1. -1. neuter archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) MN i.85 MN iii.1 SN i.100 (so read with variant reading ; T has issatta, Commentary explns. by usu-sippaṁ Kindred Sayings p. 318) Snp 617 (˚ṁ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaṁ Snp-a 466) Ja vi.81 Sdhp 390
    2. masculine an archer Mil 250 Mil 305 Mil 352 Mil 418
    cp. Sanskrit iṣvastra neuter bow, from iṣu (= Pali usu) an arrow + as to throw. cp. Pali issāsa

    • Buddhaghosa in a strange way dissects it as “usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaṁ hoti” (i.e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) Snp-a 466
    Issatthaka
    1. an archer Mil 419
    issattha + ka
    Issara
    1. lord, ruler, master, chief AN iv.90 Snp 552 Ja i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada) Mil 253 (an˚ without a ruler) Dhs-a 141 DN-a i.111 Pv-a 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348 Sdhp 431
    • creative deity, Brahmā, DN iii.28 MN ii.222 = AN i.173 Vism 598
    • Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also Pali īsa
    Issariya
    1. rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) DN iii.190 SN i.43 SN i.100 (˚mada) v.342 (issariy-âdhipacca) AN i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205 249; iii.38; iv.263 Snp 112 Dhp 73 Ud 18 Ps ii.171 176 Ja i.156 Ja v.443 Dhp-a ii.73 Vv-a 126 (for ādhipacca Pv-a 42 Pv-a 117 Pv-a 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418 Sdhp 583
    from issara
    Issariyatā
    feminine
    1. mastership, lordship Sdhp 422
    from issariya
    Issā1
    feminine
    1. jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will DN ii.277 (˚macchariya); iii.44 (identical) MN i.15 SN ii.260 AN i.95 AN i.105 (˚mala), 299; ii.203; iv.8 (˚saññojana), 148 349, 465; v.42 sq., 156, 310 Snp 110 Ja v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa) Pv ii.37 Vv 155 Pug 19 23 Vb 380 391 Dhs 1121 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (definition) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 87 Dhp-a ii.76 Mil 155 Sdhp 313 Sdhp 510
    1. ˚pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature SN ii.260 Mil 155 Pv-a 31 ‣See remarks under apakata & pakata
    Sanskrit īrṣyā to Sanskrit irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Latin īra anger, Anglo-Saxon eorsian to be angry ‣See also issati
    Issā2
    feminine
    1. in issammiga (= issāmiga) Ja v.410 & issāmiga Ja v.431 a species of antelope, cp. J v.425 issāsiṅga the antlers of this antelope
    cp. Sanskrit ṛśya-mṛga
    Issāyanā
    (& Issāyitatta)
    1. = issā Pug 19 23 Dhs 1121 Vism 470
    abstract formations from issā
    Issāsa
    1. an archer Vin iv.124 MN iii.1 AN iv.423 (issāso vā issās’ antevāsī vā) Ja ii.87 iv.494 Mil 232 DN-a i.156
    Sanskrit iṣvāsa ‣See issattha
    Issāsin
    1. an archer, literally one having a bow Ja iv.494 (= issāsa Commentary )
    Sanskrit iṣvāsa in meaning “bow” + in
    Issita
    1. being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger Ja v.44
    past participle of īrṣ ‣See issati; Sanskrit īrṣita
    Issukin
    adjective
    1. envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin) DN iii.45 DN iii.246 MN i.43 MN i.96 SN iv.241 AN iii.140 AN iii.335 AN iv.2 Dhp 262 Ja iii.259 Pv. ii.34 Pug 19 23 Dhp-a iii.389 Pv-a 174 ‣See also an˚
    from issā, Sanskrit īrṣyu + ka + in
    Iha
    indeclinable
    1. adverb of place “here” Snp 460
    1. ī
    Sanskrit iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q.v.)

    Ī

    Īgha
    (?)
    1. confusion, rage badness Snp-a 590 (in explanation of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e.g. Ja iii.343 (= niddukkha Commentary ); v.343. Iti & Iti
    doubtful as to origin & etymology since only found in compound anīgha & absolute only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to; ṛgh Sanskrit ṛghāyati to tremble rage etc ‣See discussed under nigha1
    Īti
    Ītī
    feminine
    1. ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ītay’ opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. Snp 51 Ja i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava Nd1 381 Nd2 48 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa) Mil 152 Mil 274 418
    2. ˚anīti sound condition, health, safety AN iv.238 Mil 323
    Sanskrit īti, of doubtful origin
    Ītika
    adjective
    1. connected or affected with ill or harm, only in negative an˚;
    from īti
    Ītiha
    1. a doublet of itiha, only found in negative an˚;
    Īdisa
    adjective
    1. such like, such Dhs-a 400 (feminine ˚ī) Pv-a 50 (identical) 51
    2. Sanskrit īdṛs, ī + dṛś, literally so-looking
    Īriṇa
    neuter
    1. barren soil, desert DN i.248 AN v.156f. Ja v.70 (= sukkha-kantāra Commentary ); vi.560 Vv-a 334
    = iriṇa, q.v. & cp. Sanskrit īriṇa
    Īrita
    1. -1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by the wind) Ja i.32 (identical) Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv ii.123 (malut'erita) Pv-a 156 (has erita for ī˚) Vv-a 177 (calita)
    • uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12
    • past participle of īreti, causative of īr ‣See iriyati
    Īsa
    1. lord, owner ruler Ja iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa-sīha Commentary ) Vv-a 168 feminine īsī ‣See mahesī a chief queen. cp. also mahesakkha
    2. from to have power, perfect īśe = Gothic aih; cp. Sanskrit īśvara = Pali issara, & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit īśa, e.g. Jtm 31; 81
    Īsaka
    1. a pole Ja ii.152 Ja vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole)
    dimin. of īsā
    Īsakaṁ
    adverb
    1. a little, slightly, easily MN i.450 Ja i.77 Ja vi.456 DN-a i.252 310 Vv-a 36 Vism 136 137, 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586
    nt. of īsaka
    Īsā
    feminine
    1. the pole of a plough or of a carriage SN i.104 (nangal’ īsā read with variant reading for nangala-sīsā Text) 172, 224 (˚mukha): AN iv.191 (rath˚) Snp 77 Ja i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209 Ud 42 Mil 27 Snp-a 146 Vv-a 269 (˚mūlaṁ = rathassa uro)
    1. ˚danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough-pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352 MN i.414 Vv 209 = 439 (ratha-īsā-sadisa-danto) Ja vi.490 = 515
    Vedic īṣā
    Īsāka
    adjective
    1. having a pole (said of a carriage) Ja vi.252
    from īsā
    Īhati
    1. to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Buddhaghosa Ja vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toevoegselen p. 112) DN-a i.139 Vv-a 35
    Vedic īh, cp. Avestan īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed
    Īhā
    feminine
    1. exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adjective nir-īha void of activity Mil 413
    1. U
    from īh

    U

    U
    1. the sound or syllable u, explained by Buddhaghosa at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud)
    Ukkaṁsa
    1. exaltation, excellence, superiority (opposite avakkaṁsa) DN i.54 (ukkaṁs-âvakkaṁsa hāyana-vaḍḍhana DN-a i.165) MN i.518 Vism 563 (identical) Vv-a 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instrumental ukkaṁsena par excellence exceedingly) Pv-a 228 (˚vasena, with reference to devatās; variant reading SS okk˚)
    from ud + kṛṣ ‣See ukkassati
    Ukkaṁsaka
    adjective
    1. raising, exalting (oneself), extolling MN i.19 (att˚; opposite para-vambhin) Ja ii.152 cp. sāmukkaṁsika
    from ukkaṁsa
    Ukkaṁsati
    1. to exalt, praise MN i.498 Ja iv.108 past participle ukkaṭṭha

      • ukkaṁseti in same meaning MN i.402f. (attānaṁ u. paraṁ vambheti) AN ii.27 Nd2 141
      ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, literally draw or up, raise
    Ukkaṁsanā
    feminine
    1. raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self-exaltation, self-praise MN i.402 (opp para-vambhanā) Nd2 505 (identical)
    abstract of ukkaṁsati
    Ukkaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. -1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most frequently opposed to hīna in phrase hīna-m-ukkaṭṭha-majjhime Vin iv.7 Ja i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama Commentary ). In other combination at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas) Snp-a 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaṁ ukkaṭṭhā) Vv-a 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with reference to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis) Sdhp 506 (opposite lāmaka)
    • large, comprehensive great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as different from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak’ odanaṁ gaṇhāti catu-bhāgaṁ khādanaṁ vā tadūpiyaṁ vā byañjanaṁ)

  • detailed, exhaustive specialised Vism 37 (ati-ukkaṭṭha-desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail Snp-a 181

    • arrogant, insolent Ja v.16

  • used as nominativeat Ja i.387 in meaning “battle conflict"

    • an˚ Vism 64 (˚cīvara)
    1. ˚niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence Dhs-a 70 Vv-a 231 Pv-a 7
    • ˚pariccheda comprehensive connotation Snp-a 229 231, 376
    past participle of ukkaṁsati
  • Ukkaṭṭhatā
    feminine
    1. superiority, eminence, exalted state Ja iv.303 (opposite hīnatā)
    abstract from ukkaṭṭha
    Ukkaṭṭhita
    1. boiled up, boiling ‣Seething AN iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, variant reading ukkuṭṭhito) Ja iv.118 (variant reading pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss)
    for ukkaṭhita, ud + past participle of kvath ‣See kaṭhati & kuthati
    Ukkaṇṭhati
    to long for, to be dissatisfied
    1. to fret Ja i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto) Dhs-a 407 Pv-a 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi variant reading ukkaṇhi, so read for Text mā khuṇḍali). past participle ukkaṇṭhita (q.v.) cp. pari˚
    2. from ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, literally to stretch one’s neck for anything; i.e. long for, be hungry after, etc.
    Ukkaṇṭhanā
    feminine
    1. emotion, commotion DN ii.239
    from ukkaṇṭhati
    Ukkaṇṭhā
    feminine
    1. longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88 Pv-a 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152
    from ukkanṭḥ˚
    Ukkaṇṭhi
    feminine
    1. longing, dissatisfaction Thag-a 239 (= arati)
    from ukkanṭḥ˚
    Ukkaṇṭhikā
    feminine
    1. = ukkaṇṭhi, i.e. longing, state of distress, pain Ja iii.643
    abstract from ukkaṇṭhita
    Ukkaṇṭhita
    1. dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting Ja i.196 Ja ii.92 Ja ii.115 Ja iii.185 Mil 281 Dhp-a iv.66 225 Pv-a 13 (an˚), 55, 187
    past participle of ukkaṇṭhati
    Ukkaṇṇa
    adjective
    1. having the ears erect (?) Ja vi.559
    ud + kaṇṇa
    Ukkaṇṇaka
    (ad.)
    1. a certain disease (? mange) of jackals SN ii.230 SN ii.271 SN-a ʻ the fur falls off from the whole body ʼ
    ut + kaṇṇa + ka literally “with ears out” or is it ukkandaka?
    Ukkantati
    1. to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva) Ja i.164 Ja iv.210 (variant reading for okk˚); v.10 (ger ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, Burmese variant ukkacca) Pv-a 210 (variant reading SS ni˚), 211 (= chinditvā)
    ud + kantati
    Ukkapiṇḍaka
    1. only in plural ; vermin, Vin i.211 = 239 ‣See comment at Vinaya Texts ii.70
    2. etymology unknown
    Ukkantikaṁ
    neuter
    • adverb in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.

    Ukkamati
    (or okk˚; which is variant reading at all passages quoted)
    1. to step aside, step out from (w. ablative), depart from AN iii.301 (maggā) Ja iii.531 Ja iv.101 (maggā) Ud 13 (identical) DN-a i.185 (identical). causative ukkāmeti;
    2. causative II. ukkamāpeti Ja ii.3
    3. ud + kamati from kram
    Ukkamana
    neuter
    1. stepping away from Vism 374
    from ukkamati
    Ukkala
    in phrase ukkala-vassa-bhañña SN iii.73 = AN ii.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as “the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old” ‣See Kvu translation 95 with note 2. Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i.e. ukkalā + avassa
    1. one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sanskrit utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman MN iii.78 reads Okkalā (variant reading Ukkalā)-Vassa-Bhaññā all as name pr
    *avaśya˚
    Ukkalāpa
    1. ‣See uklāpa
    Ukkalissati
    1. to become depraved, to revoke(?) Mil 143
    = ukkilissati? ud + kilissati
    Ukkā
    feminine
    1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch DN i.49 DN i.108 SN ii.264 Thag 2, 488 (˚ûpama) Ja i.34 (dhamm-okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428 Thag-a 287 DN-a i.148 Dhp-a i.42 205 Pv-a 154 Esp as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass MN i.128 MN i.365 Nd2 40Ie Dhp-a i.126 Sdhp 573
    2. a furnace or forge of a smith AN i.210 AN i.257 Ja vi.437 ‣See also below ˚mukha. 3. a meteor ‣See below ˚pāta
      1. ˚dhāra a torch-bearer Snp 335 Iti 108 Mil 1
      • ˚pāta “falling of a firebrand”, a meteor DN i.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaṁ patanaṁ DN-a i.95) Ja i.374 Ja vi.476 Mil 178
      • ˚mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot A i.257 Ja vi.217 (= kammār’uddhana Commentary ), 574 Snp 686 Dhp-a ii.250
      Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Latin Volcanus Old Irish Olcān, Indogermanic *ṷI̊q to be fiery
    Ukkācanā
    feminine
    1. enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vb 352 (in definition of lapanā, variant reading ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sanskrit uddīpana in same sense. Definition at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā)
    from ukkāceti, ud + *kāc ‣See ukkācita
    Ukkācita
    1. enlightened, made bright (figuratively) or cleaned, cleared up AN i.72 AN i.286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained)
    past participle either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denominative from kāca1
    Ukkāceti
    1. to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets Ja ii.70 (variant reading ussiñcati)
    according to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 112 a denominative from kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole
    Ukkāmeti
    1. to cause to step aside Ja vi.11
    causative of ukkamati
    Ukkāra
    1. dung, excrement Ja iv.485 otherwise only in compound ukkāra-bhūmi dung-hill Ja i.5 Ja i.146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305 Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa) Dhp-a iii.208 cp. uccāra
    from ud + kṛ; “do out”
    Ukkāsati
    1. to “ahem"! to cough, to clear one’s throat Vin ii.222 Vin iv.16 MN ii.4 AN v.65 aorist ukkāsi Ja i.161 Ja i.217
    2. past participle ukkāsita
    3. ud + kāsati of kas to cough
    Ukkāsikā
    feminine?
    1. at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vinaya Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Buddhaghosa’s explanation is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? cp. SN iii.141), probably = vaṭṭi (Sanskrit varti a kind of pad) ‣See details given by Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 113, who trsls. “rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction"
    doubtful
    Ukkāsita
    1. coughed, clearing one’s throat, coughed out, hawking DN i.89 Bu i.52 (+ khipita) ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat DN i.50 Ja i.119 Dhp-a i.250 (+ khipita˚)
    past participle of ukkāsati
    Ukkiṇṇa
    1. dug up or out DN i.105 Ja iv.106 Mil 330 DN-a i.274 (= khāta)
    past participle of ud + kṛ; dig2
    Ukkiledeti
    1. to take the dirt out, to clean out DN-a i.255 (dosaṁ) Snp-a 274 (rāgaṁ Burmese variant uggileti)
    causative of ud + klid ‣See kilijjati
    Ukkujja
    adjective
    1. set up, upright, opposite either nikkujja or avakujja AN i.131 SN v.89 (ukkujj’âvakujja) Pug 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito Commentary 214)
    ud + kujja
    Ukkujjati
    (˚eti)
    1. to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181 Vin ii.126 (pattaṁ), 269 (bhikkhuṁ) mostly in phrase nikkujjitaṁ ukkujjeyya “(like) one might raise up one who has fallen” DN i.85 DN i.110 DN ii.132 DN ii.152 Snp p. 15 (= uparimukhaṁ karoti DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155)
    denominative from ukkujja
    Ukkujjana
    neuter
    1. raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚)
    from ukkujjati
    Ukkuṭika
    1. a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission ‣See; Dialogues of the Buddha i.231 note 4
    • Vin i.45 (˚ṁ nisīdati); iii.228 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Pug 55 Vism 62, 104 105 (quot. from Papañca Sūdanī) 426 Dhp-a i.201 217 ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223

    -padhāna in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit distorted to utkuṭuka-prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dhp 141

    1. exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit DN i.167 MN i.78 MN i.515 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Ja i.493 Ja iii.235 iv.299 Dhp 141 (= ukkuṭika-bhāvena āraddha-viriyo Dhp-a iii.78)
    from ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; literally “bending up". The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is ukkuṭuka, e.g. Av SN i.315
    Ukkuṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. shouting out, acclamation Ja ii.367 Ja vi.41 Bu i.35 Mil 21 Vism 245 Dhp-a ii.43 Vv-a 132 (˚sadda)
    from ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in Pali kuñca & Sanskrit krośati
    Ukkusa
    1. an osprey Ja iv.291 (˚rāja), 392
    ‣See ukkuṭṭhi & cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453
    Ukkūla
    adjective
    1. sloping up, steep, high (opposite vikkūla) AN i.35f.; Vism 153 (nadi) Snp-a 42 cp. utkūlanikūla-sama Lal. v.340
    ud + kūla
    Ukkoṭana
    neuter
    1. crookedness, perverting justice taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Buddhaghosa) DN i.5; iii.176 SN v.473 AN ii.209 AN v.206 DN-a i.79 = Pug AN 240 (“assāmike sāmike kātuṁ lañcagahaṇaṁ”)
    from ud + *kuṭ; to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked
    Ukkoṭanaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94
    from ukkoṭana
    Ukkoṭeti
    1. to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged Vin ii.94 303; iv.126 Ja ii.387 DN-a i.5
    denominative from *ukkoṭ-ana
    Ukkhali
    1. (˚lī) feminine

      1. a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) Ja i.68 Ja i.235 Ja v.389 Ja v.471 Pug 33 Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla in comparison) Dhp-a i.136 Dhp-a ii.5 iii.371; iv.130; Pug AN 231 Vv-a 100 cp. next
      derived from Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Latin aulla (from *auxla); Gothic auhns oven
    Ukkhalikā
    feminine = ukkhali. Thag 2, 23 (= bhatta-pacanabhājanaṁ Thag-a 29) Dhp-a iv.98 (˚kāla) Dhs-a 376
    Ukkhā
    (?)
    1. in ukkhasataṁ dānaṁ, given at various times of the day (meaning ?) SN ii.264 (variant reading ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataṁ d. i.e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaṁ?). SN A: paṇītabhojana-bharitānaṁ mahā-ukkhalinaṁ sataṁ dānaṁ. cp. ukhā cooking vessel Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.38) Kern, Toevoegselen under ukkhā translation “zeker muntstuck”, i.e. kind of gift
    can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?
    Ukkhita
    1. besmeared, besprinkled Ja iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). cp. okkhita
    past participle of ukṣ sprinkle
    Ukkhitta
    taken up, lifted up, technical term of the canon law “suspended” Vin iv.218 Ja iii.487
    1. —˚āsika with drawn sword MN i.377 SN iv.173 Ja i.393 Dhs-a 329 Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479
    2. ˚paligha having the obstacles removed MN i.139 AN iii.84 Dhp 398 = Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittatāya u. Snp-a 467 Dhp-a iv.161)
    3. ˚sira with uplifted head Vism 162
    past participle of ukkhipati
    Ukkhittaka
    adjective-noun
    1. a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97 121; ii.61, 173, 213
    from ukkhitta
    Ukkhipati
    1. . To hold up, to take up Ja i.213 Ja iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaṁ) Pv-a 265 A technical term of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309 Pug 33
    • ˚ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61
    • causative II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported Ja i.52 Ja ii.15 Ja ii.38 Ja iii.285 Ja iii.436
    • past participle ukkhitta, absolutive ukkhipitvā as
    • adverb “upright” Vism 126
    ut + khipati, kṣip
    Ukkhipana
    neuter
    1. pushing upwards Ja i.163
    2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya)
    from ud + kṣip
    Ukkheṭita
    1. spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = iv.27
    past participle of ud + kheṭ; or *khel ‣See kheḷa
    Ukkhepa
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective throwing away Dhp-a iv.59 (˚dāya a throw-away donation, tip)
    • (m. lifting up raising Ja i.394 (cel˚); vi.508 DN-a i.273
    • dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347
    from ud + kṣip
    Ukkhepaka
    adjective
    1. throwing (up); ˚ṁ (accusative ) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = iv.195 (piṇḍ˚)
    2. from ukkhepa
    Ukkhepana
    neuter
    1. suspension Ja iii.487
    from ud + kṣip
    Ukkhepanā
    feminine
    1. throwing up, provocation, sneering Vb 352 = Vism 23, explained at p. 29
    = last
    Ukkhepaniya
    adjective
    1. referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49 53, 98, 143, 168; ii.27, 226, 230, 298: AN i.99 Uklapa (ukkalapa)
    ukkhepana + iya, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utkṣepanīyaṁ karma Divy 329
    Uklāpa (ukkalāpa)
    adjective
    1. - 1. deserted Ja ii.275 (ukkalāpa Text; variant readings uklāpa ullāpa)
    • dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154 208, 222; Vism 128 Dhp-a iii.168 (ukkalāpa)
    • cp. Sanskrit ut-kalāpayati to let go
    Ugga1
    adjective
    1. mighty, huge, strong fierce, grave, masculine, a mighty or great person, noble lord DN i.103 SN i.51 = Vv-a 116 (uggateja “the fiery heat”) Ja iv.496 Ja v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, explained with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by Commentary ) Mil 331 Dhp-a ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (identical). cp. sam˚. As proper name at Vism 233 & Ja i.94
    1. ˚putta a nobleman, mighty lord SN i.185 (“high born warrior” translation) Ja vi.353 (= amacca-putta Commentary ) Thag 1, 1210
    Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Latin augeo & Pali oja
    Ugga2
    1. = uggamana, in aruṇ-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272
    Uggacchati
    1. to rise, get up out of (literally & figuratively) Thag 1, 181 aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise Vv-a 75 Pv iv.8; Vism 43, absolutive uggañchitvāna Mil 376
    • pp uggata (q.v.)
    ud + gam
    Uggajjati
    1. to shout out Nd1 172
    ud + gajjati
    Uggaṇhāti

    to take up, acquire, learn cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e.g. Divy 18 Divy 77 etc.

    1. Snp 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti Snp-a 561); imperative uggaṇha Ja ii.30 (sippaṁ); uggaṇhāhi Mil 10 (mantāni);
    2. absolutive uggayha Snp 832 Snp 845 Nd1 173
    3. causative uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520;
    4. aorist uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta-yogaṁ = akari Pv-a 198);
    5. absolutive uggahetvā Ja v.282 Vv-a 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṁ); infin. uggahetuṁ Vv-a 138 (sippaṁ to study a craft).
    6. causative II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct Ja v.217 Ja vi.353
    7. past participle uggahita (q.v.) ‣See also uggahāyati

      • A peculiar ppr.
      • medium is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DN-a i.32 (cp. uggāhaka
      ud + gṛh ‣See gaṇhāti
    Uggata
    1. come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted Ja iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata-sabhāva samiddha Pv-a 220) Vv-a 217 (˚mānasa) DN-a i.248 Pv-a 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i.e. emaciated for upphāsulika). cp. acc˚
    past participle of uggacchati
    Uggatta
    1. in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚; , thus at Pv iii.32 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 188
    Uggatthana
    1. at Ja vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should probably be read ugghaṭṭana [from ghaṭṭeti literally “tinkling”, i.e. a bangle
    Uggama
    1. rising up Sdhp 594
    from ud + gam; Sanskrit udgama
    Uggamana
    1. (˚na) neuter

      1. going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) DN i.10, 240 SN ii.268 (suriy˚) Ja iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚) DN-a i.95 (= udayana) Dhp-a i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (identical) Vv-a 326 (oggaman˚) Pv-a 109 (aruṇ˚). cp. ugga2 & uggama
      from ud + gam
    Uggaha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. -1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa)
    • noticing, taking notice, perception (as opposed to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq negative an˚ Snp 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 330). cp. dhanuggaha
    • from ud + gṛh ‣See gaṇhāti
    Uggahaṇa
    neuter
    1. learning, taking up, studying Pv-a 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277
    from uggaṇhāti
    Uggahāyati
    1. to take hold of, to take up Snp 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 91). absolutive uggahāya Snp 837
    2. poetic form of uggaheti ‣See uggaṇhati, but according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. representing Vedic udgṛbhāyati
    Uggahita
    1. taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212 Ja iii.168 (˚sippa, adjective), 325; iv.220; vi.76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Snp 795 Snp 833 Snp 1098 Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha)
    past participle of uggaṇhāti
    Uggahetar
    1. one who takes up, acquires or learns AN iv.196
    agent noun to ugganhāti, causative uggaheti
    Uggāra
    1. spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54 DN-a i.41 Kp-a 61
    ud + gṛ; or *gḷ to swallow ‣See gala & gilati; literally to swallow up
    Uggāhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who is eager to learn Ja v.148 cp. Mvu iii.373
    • ogrāhaka in same context from ud + gṛh ‣See uggaṇhāti
    Uggāhamāna
    1. ‣See uggaṇhāti
    Uggirati1

    1. to vomit up (“swallow up”) to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna) DN-a i.41 (uggāraṁ uggiranto). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589
    Sanskrit udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation from gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraṁ udgirati Jtm 3126 The by-form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of ḷ and ṛ roots *gṛ & *gI̊ ‣See gala & gilati
    Uggirati2
    1. to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50 (talasattikaṁ explained by uccāreti) Ja i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. cp. sam˚
    cp. Sanskrit udgurate, ud + gur
    Uggilati
    1. = uggirati1, i.e. to spit out (opposite ogilati) MN i.393 SN iv.323 Ja iii.529 Mil 5 Pv-a 283
    Uggīva
    neuter
    1. a neckband to hold a basket hanging down Ja vi.562 (uggīvañ c’âpi aṁsato = aṁsakūṭe pacchi-lagganakaṁ Commentary )
    ud + gīva
    Ugghaṁseti
    1. to rub Vin ii.106 - past participle ugghaṭṭha (q.v.)
    2. ud + ghṛṣ ‣See ghaṁsati1
    Ugghaṭita
    adjective
    1. striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd ˚ññū of quick understanding AN ii.135 Pug 41 Nett 7–⁠9, 125 DN-a i.291
    past participle of ud + ghaṭati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3 Divy 26 and phrase at Mvu iii.260 udghaṭitajña
    Ugghaṭeti
    1. to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid. Ugghatta (Ugghattha?)
    ud + ghaṭati
    Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?)
    1. knocked crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa-pāda foot-sore Snp 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa-pādatala etc Snp-a 582) Ja iv.20 (ṭṭh; explained by uṇha-vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa-pāda Commentary not to the point)
    should be past participle of ugghaṁsati = Sanskrit udghṛṣṭa ‣See ghaṁsati1, but taken by Buddhaghosa either as
  • past participle of or an adjective derived from ghaṭṭ ‣See ghaṭṭeti
  • Uggharati
    1. to ooze Thag 1, 394 = Dhp-a iii.117
    ud + kṣar
    Ugghāṭana
    neuter?
    1. that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s.v. gives “rope & bucket of a well” as meaning (kavāṭaṁ anugghāṭeti). cp. ugghaṭanā
    from ugghāṭeti
    Ugghāṭita
    1. opened Mil 55 Dhp-a i.134
    past participle of ugghāṭeti
    Ugghāṭeti
    1. to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaṁ); iv.37 Ja ii.31 Ja vi.68 Mil 140 (bhava-paṭisandhiṁ), 371; Vism 374. causative II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened Ja v.381
    2. for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udghāṭayati Divy 130
    Ugghāta
    1. shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii.276 (yān˚) Ja vi.253 (an˚) Dhp-a iii.283 (yān˚)
    ud + ghāta
    Ugghāti
    feminine
    1. -1. shaking, shock Vv-a 36
    • striking, conquering; victory, combined with nighāti Snp 828 Nd1 167 Snp-a 541 Nett 110 (Text reads ugghāta˚)
    • from ud + ghāta
    Ugghātita
    1. struck, killed AN iii.68
    past participle of ugghāteti, denominative from udghāta
    Ugghosanā
    feminine
    1. proclamation DN-a i.310
    abstract from ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā
    Ugghoseti
    1. to shout out, announce, proclaim Ja i.75 Dhp-a ii.94 Pv-a 127
    ud + ghoseti
    Ucca
    adjective
    1. high (opposite avaca low) DN i.194 MN ii.213 AN v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaṁ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaṁ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraṁ katvā Pv-a 265) Pug 52 58 DN-a i.135 Pv-a 176
    1. ˚āvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70 203 Ja iv.115 Ja iv.363 (= mahaggha-samaggha Commentary p. 366) Snp 703 Snp 714 Snp 792 Snp 959 Dhp 83 Nd1 93 467 Vv 121 (vividha Vv-a 60); 311
    2. ˚kulīnatā high birth AN iii.48 (cp. uccā˚)
    For udya, adjective formation from preposition ud above, up
    Uccaka
    adjective
    1. high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair)
    from ucca
    Uccatta
    neuter
    1. height Ja iii.318
    from ucca = Sanskrit uccatvaṁ
    Uccaya
    1. heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dhp 115 Dhp 191 Dhp 192 Vv 4711 827 (= cetiya Vv-a 321) Dhp-a iii.5 9 Dhs-a 41 (pāpassa)
    2. ˚siluccaya a mountain Thag 1, 692 Ja i.29 (v.209) vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63
    from ud + ci ‣See cināti; Sanskrit uccaya
    Uccā
    1. (˚-) (adverb )

      1. high (literally & figuratively), raised, in following compounds
      1. ˚kaṇerukā a tall female elephant MN i.178
      • ˚kāḷārikā identical MN i.178 (variant reading ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred)
      • ˚kula a high noble family Pv iii.116 (= uccā khattiya-kul-âdino Pv-a 176)
      • ˚kulīnatā birth in a high-class family, high rank MN iii.37 Vv-a 32
      • ˚sadda a loud noise DN i.143 DN i.178 AN iii.30
      • ˚sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i.192 DN i.5 DN i.7 cp. DN-a i.78
      cp. Sanskrit uccā, instrumental singular of uccaṁ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instrumental
    2. plural -In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Avs iii.117) as well as uccaṁ (uccaṁgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to compounds.
    Uccāra
    1. discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ṁ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati) Dhp-a ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine DN i.70 MN i.83 Ja i.5 Ja ii.19
    Ud + car
    Uccāranā
    feminine
    1. lifting up, raising Vin iii.121
    from uccāreti
    Uccārita
    1. -1. uttered, let out Pv-a 280 (akkharāni)
    • lifted, raised Thag-a 255
    • past participle of uccāreti
    Uccāreti
    1. to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81 Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50 MN i.135 past participle uccārita (q.v.)
    2. ud + cāreti, causative of car
    Uccāliṅga
    1. a maw-worm Vin iii.38 112 Ja ii.146
    etymology?
    Uccināti
    1. to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73 Vin ii.285 (aorist uccini) Ja iv.9 Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana-vasena gahetvāna Pv-a 185); Dīpavaṁsa iv.2
    2. ud + cināti
    Ucchaṅga
    1. the hip, the lap Vin i.225 MN i.366 AN i.130 (˚pañña) Ja i.5 Ja i.308 Ja ii.412 iii.22; iv.38 151 Pug 31 Vism 279 Dhp-a ii.72
    Sanskrit utsanga, ts → cch like Sanskrit utsahate → Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ucchahate ‣See ussahati
    Ucchādana
    neuter
    1. rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing DN i.7 DN i.76 at the latter passage in combinationanicc˚-dhamma, of the body, meaning “erosion, decay” and combined with parimaddana abrasion ‣See about detail of meaning Dialogues of the Buddha i.87; thus in same formula at MN i.500 SN iv.83 Ja i.146 & passim AN i.62 AN ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386 Iti 111 Thag 2, 89 (nahāpan˚) Mil 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana) DN-a i.88
    ut + sād, causative of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada
    Ucchādeti
    1. to rub the body with perfumes Ja vi.298 Mil 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti) DN-a i.88
    from ut + sād ‣See ucchādana
    Ucchiṭṭha
    1. left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaṁ); iv.266 (identical) Ja ii.83 (bhattaṁ ucchiṭṭhaṁ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ṁ piṇḍaṁ), 388; vi.508 Mil 315 Dhp-a i.52 Dhp-a ii.85 iii.208 Pv-a 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaṁ). At Ja iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha
    • an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) Ja iii.257 Dhp-a ii.3
    • ‣ See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka;
    past participle of ud + śiṣ
    Ucchiṭṭhaka
    1. (from ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha Ja iv.386 Ja vi.63 Ja vi.509
    Ucchindati
    1. to break up, destroy, annihilate SN v.432 (bhavataṇhaṁ), AN iv.17 (future ucchecchāmi to be read with variant reading for Text ucchejjissāmi) Snp 2 (preterite udacchida), 208 (
    2. absolutive ucchijja) Ja v.383 Dhp 285
    3. passive ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist SN iv.309 Ja v.242 Ja v.467 Mil 192 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi).
    4. past participle ucchinna (q.v.)
    5. ud + chid ‣See chindati
    Ucchinna
    1. broken up, destroyed SN iii.10 AN v.32 Snp 746 cp. sam˚
    past participle of ucchindati
    Ucchu
    sugar-cane Vin iv.35 AN iii.76 AN iv.279 Mil 46 Dhp-a iv.199 (˚ūnaṁ yanta sugar-cane mill), Pv-a 257 Pv-a 260 Vv-a 124
    1. ˚agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172
    2. ˚khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar-cane Vv 3326
    • ˚khādana eating s. c. Vism 70 -khetta sugar-cane field Ja i.339 Vv-a 256
    • ˚gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar-cane, Batatas Paniculata Ja i.339 Ja vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika)
    • ˚pāla watchman of s

      • c. Vv-a 256
      • ˚pīḷana, cane-pressing, Asl. 274
      • ˚puṭa sugar-cane basket Ja iv.363
      • ˚bīja ‣Seed of s
      • c. AN i.32 AN v.213
      • ˚yantra a sugar-mill Ja i.339
      • ˚rasa s
      • c. juice Vin i.246 Vism 489 Vv-a 180
      • ˚vāta, Asl. 274
      • ˚sālā, Asl. 274
      Sanskrit cp. Vedic proper name Ikṣvāku from ikṣu
    Uccheda
    breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) DN i.34 DN i.55 SN iv.323 Nd1 324 Mil 413 Nett 95, 112, 160 DN-a i.120
    1. ˚diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul) as opposed to sassata-or atta-diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) SN ii.20 SN iii.99 SN iii.110 sq; Ps i.150, 158 Nd1 248 (opposite sassati˚) Dhs 1316 Nett 40, 127 Snp-a 523 (opposite atta˚)
    2. ˚vāda adjective one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235 Vin iii.2 DN i.34 DN i.55 SN ii.18 SN iv.401 AN iv.174 AN iv.182f. Nd1 282 Pug 38
    3. ˚vādin = ˚vāda Nett 111 Ja v.244
    4. from ud + chid, chind ‣See ucchindati & cp. cheda
    Ucchedana
    adjective
    1. cutting off, destroying; feminine ˚anī Ja v.16 (surā)
    2. from ud + chid
    Ucchedin
    adjective an adherent of the ucchedavāda Ja v.241
    Ucchepaka
    neuter
    1. leavings of food MN ii.7 (variant reading uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A different connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima translation2ii.682)
    = ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭhabhatta
    Uju
    Ujju;
    adjective
    1. straight direct; straightforward, honest, upright DN iii.150 Text ujja) 352 (do.) 422, 550 Vv 187 (= sabba-jimha-vanka-kuṭilabhāv’âpagama-hetutāya u. Vv-a 96) Pug 59 Vb 244 (ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila) DN-a i.210 (identical), Kp-a 236 Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṁ ujuṁ akuṭilaṁ nibbisevanaṁ karoti) Vv-a 281 (˚koṭi-vanka) Pv-a 123 (an˚)
    1. ˚aṅgin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, negative an˚ not having straight limbs, i.e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīra Commentary ); vi.500 (T anuccangin = anindita-agarahitangin Commentary )
    2. ˚gata walking straight, of upright life MN i.46 AN iii.285f. (˚citta) v.290 sq. Snp 350 (ujju˚), 477 (identical) Dhp 108 (ujju˚ ‣See Dhp-a ii.234 for interpretation)
    3. ˚gāmin, negative an˚ going crooked, a snake Ja iv.330
    • ˚cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vb 350
    • ˚diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Mil 257
    • ˚paṭipanna living uprightly DN i.192 SN iv.304 SN v.343 Vism 219 - magga the straight road DN i.235 Vin v.149 Iti 104 Ja i.344 vi.252 Dhp-a ii.192
    • ˚bhāva straightness, uprightness Snp-a 292 317 Pv-a 51
    • ˚bhūta straight, upright SN i.100 SN i.170 SN ii.279; v.384, 404 AN ii.57 AN iv.292 Ja i.94 Ja v.293 (an˚) Vv 3423 ‣See Vv-a 155 Pv i.1010 (= citta-jimha-vankaKutīla-bhāva-karānaṁ kilesānaṁ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta Pv-a 51)
    • ˚vaṁsa straight lineage, direct descendency Ja v.251
    • ˚vāta a soft wind Mil 283
    • ˚vipaccanīka in direct opposition DN i.1 MN i.402 DN-a i.38
    Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Latin rego to govern; Goth ufrakjan to straighten up; Old High German recchen = German recken English reach; Old Irish rēn span ‣See also Pali ajjava
    Ujuka
    Ujjuka;
    adjective
    1. straight, direct, upright MN i.124 SN i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna) 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165 Ja i.163 Ja v.297 (opp khujja) Dhp-a i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321
    2. ˚anujjuka crooked not straight SN iv.299 Ja iii.318
    uju + ka
    Ujukatā
    feminine
    1. straightness, rectitude Dhs 50 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq
    abstract from ujuka
    Ujutā
    feminine
    1. straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50 51
    abstract of uju
    Ujjagghati
    1. to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128 Thag 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati Thag-a 78) AN iii.91 (ujjh˚, variant reading ujj˚) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiṁ paharitvā mahāhasitaṁ hasati Pug AN 249)
    ud + jagghati
    Ujjaṅgala
    1. hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place DN ii.146 (˚nagaraka, translation “town in the midst of a jungle”, cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.161) Ja i.391 Vv 855 (= ukkaṁsena jangala i.e. exceedingly dusty or sandy dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, explained by ativiya-thaddhabhūmibhāga at Pv-a 139); Vism 107. Also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ujjangala e.g. Mvu ii.207
    ud + jangala
    Ujjala
    adjective
    1. blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful Ja i.220 Dāvs ii.63
    ud + jval ‣See jalati
    Ujjalati
    1. to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31 Vv-a 161 (+ jotati). causative ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31 Mil 259 Vism 428 Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāṁ ujjālayiṁ) Vv-a 51 (padīpaṁ)
    2. ud + jalati, jval
    Ujjava
    adjective
    1. “running up”, in compound ujjav-ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv.300 explained by “yattakaṁ patthena (patthana?) añcitaṁ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite"
    ud + java
    Ujjavati
    1. to go up-stream Vin ii.301
    ud + javati
    Ujjavanikāya

    instrumental feminine of ujjavanaka used as

  • adverb

    1. up-stream, lit “running up” Vin ii.290 iv.65 (in explanation of uddhaṁgāmin, opposite ojavanikāya)
    ud + javanaka, q.v.
  • Ujjahati
    1. to give up, let go; imperative ujjaha SN i.188 Thag 2, 19 Snp 342
    2. ud + jahati
    Ujju
    Ujjuka;
    1. ‣See uju & ujuka;
    Ujjota
    1. light, lustre Ja i.183 (˚kara) Mil 321
    ud + *jot of jotati, Sanskrit uddyotate
    Ujjotita
    1. illumined Dāvs v.53
    past participle of ujjoteti, ud + joteti
    Ujjhaggati
    1. ‣See ujjagghati
    Ujjhaggikā
    feminine
    1. loud laughter Vin ii.213 cp. iv.187
    from ujjagghati, spelling varies
    Ujjhati
    1. -1. to forsake, leave, give up Ja vi.138 Dāvs ii.86
    • to sweep or brush away Ja vi.296
    • past participle ujjhita (q.v.)
    • Sanskrit ujjhati, ujjh
    Ujjhatti
    feminine
    1. irritation, discontent AN iv.223 AN iv.467 (variant reading ujj˚) cp. ujjhāna
    from ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sanskrit *ud-dhyāti
    Ujjhāna
    neuter
    1. -1. taking offence, captiousness Dhp 253 (= paresaṁ randha-gavesitāya Dhp-a iii.377) Mil 352 (an˚-bahula)
    • complaining, wailing Ja iv.287
    1. ˚saññin,-saññika irritable SN i.23 Thag 1, 958 Vin ii.214 cp. iv.194; Dīpavaṁsa ii.6 Dhp-a iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability)
    ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?
    Ujjhāpana
    neuter
    1. stirring up, provoking Ja v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma)
    from ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna
    Ujjhāpanaka
    adjective
    1. one who stirs up another to discontent Vin iv.38
    from ujjhāpana
    Ujjhāpeti
    1. to harass, vex, irritate MN i.126 SN i.209 (“give occasion for offence”) Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356) Ja v.286 Pv-a 266
    causative of ujjhāyati
    Ujjhāyati
    1. to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53 62, 73; ii.207; iv.226 SN i.232 passim
    • S; i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha) Ja ii.15 Dhp-a ii.20
    • aorist ujjhāyi Ja i.475 Dhp-a ii.88 infinitive ujjhātuṁ Ja ii.355
    • causative ujjhāpeti (q.v.)
    ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, figuratively to be consumed. According to Müller Pali G past participle 12 & 42 = Sanskrit ava-; dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically
    Ujjhita
    1. destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away MN i.296 (+ avakkhitta) Thag 1, 315 (itthi); 2 386 (cp. Thag-a 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano) Dhp 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings Dhp-a i.445) Ja iii.499 v.302; vi.51. Uncha & Uncha
    past participle of ujjhati
    Uñcha
    Uñchā
    feminine
    1. anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning SN ii.281 AN i.36 AN iii.66f. 104 Vin iii.87 Snp 977 Thag 2 329, 349 Ja iii.389 Ja iv.23 Ja iv.28 Ja iv.434 Ja iv.471 (˚ya, dative phalâphal’atthāya Commentary ) Thag-a 235 242. cp. samuñchaka
    1. ˚cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, Ja ii.272 Ja iii.37 Ja iii.515 Ja v.3 DN-a i.270 Vv-a 103 Thag-a 208
    • ˚cārika
    • adjective going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā Snp-a 295 (cp. DN-a i.270 271)
    • ˚patta the gleaning-bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato “fond of that which has come into the gl. b.” Thag 1, 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato Pv-a 265 trsld. in Psalms of Brethren “contented with whatever fills the bowl”). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) SN ii.281 so SN A
    Sanskrit uñcha & uñchana, to; uñch. Neumann’s etymology uñchā = English ounce, German unze (Majjhima translation2ii.682) is incorrect ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under uncia
    Uñchati
    1. to gather for sustenance ‣Seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati)
    from uñch
    Uññā
    feminine
    1. contempt Vin iv.241 Vb 353f. (att˚)
    = avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba?
    Uññātabba
    adjective

    to be despised, contemptible, only in stock-phrase “daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo” SN i.69 Snp p. 93 Snp-a 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṁ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at Ja v.63 mā naṁ daharo ti

    1. uññāsi (variant reading maññāsi) apucchitvāna (variant reading ā˚)
    gerundive from ava + jñā (?)
    Uṭṭitvā
    1. at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading ‣See p. 318, variant reading uḍḍhetvā, and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (oḍḍetva ‣See uḍḍeti), meaning “putting into a sling, tying or binding up"
    Uṭṭepaka
    1. one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (variant readings uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚) ‣See remarks on uṭṭepeti
    Uṭṭepeti
    1. in phrase kāke u. “to scare crows away” (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79 Reading doubtful should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? causative of uḍḍeti oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The variant readings given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti ‣See also; uṭṭepaka.

    Uṭṭhapana
    1. ‣See vo˚. Utthahati & Utthati;
    Uṭṭhahati
    Uṭṭhāti;
    1. to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres.; uṭṭhahati Pug 51
    • pot. uṭṭhaheyya SN i.217 as
    • imperative uttiṭṭhe Dhp 168 (explained by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṁ gharadvāre ṭhatvā Dhp-a iii.165 cp. Vin Texts i.152)
    • imperative 2nd
    • plural uṭṭhahatha Snp 331 Snp 2nd singular uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61 Ja iv.433
    • ppr uṭṭhahanto MN i.86 SN i.217 Ja i.476
    • aorist uṭṭhahi Ja i.117 Pv-a 75
    • absolutive uṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 4 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 55 152, & uṭṭhāya Snp 401
    • infinitive uṭṭhātuṁ Ja i.187 Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e.g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278 āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126 ‣See also under vuṭṭhahati
    • pp uṭṭhita;
    • causative uṭṭhāpeti
    • cp. pariyuṭṭhāti
    ud + sthā ‣See tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati
    Uṭṭhahāna
    1. exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an˚; sluggish, lazy Dhp 280 (= ayāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409); cp. anuṭṭhahaṁ SN i.217
    ppr. of uṭṭhahati
    Uṭṭhātar
    1. one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy SN i.214 AN iv.285 AN iv.288 AN iv.322 Snp 187 Ja vi.297
    • ˚an˚ one who is without energy SN i.217 Snp 96
    agent noun of ut + ṣṭhā ‣See uṭṭhahati
    Uṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. -1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opposite sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) DN ii.134 (sīha-seyyaṁ kappesi uṭṭhāna-saññaṁ manasikaritvā) Dhp 280 (˚kāla) Ja i.392 (an˚-seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ-uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) Dhp-a i.17
    • rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adjective (—˚) producing Ja i.47 (kapp˚) vi.459 Mil 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaṁ atthi)

  • “rousing” exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry often synonym with viriya MN i.86 AN i.94 AN ii.135 (˚phala) iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā) Iti 66 (˚adhigataṁ dhanaṁ earned by industry); Pv iv.324 Pug 51 (˚phala) Mil 344 Mil 416 Thag-a 267 (˚viriya) Pv-a 129 (+ viriya) -an˚; want of energy, sluggishness AN iv.195 Dhp 241 Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q.v.) gabbha-vuṭṭhānaṁ Ja i.114 ‣See also vuṭṭh˚; , and cp. pariy˚.

    from ut + ṣṭhā
  • Uṭṭhānaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. -1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing Ja i.377 Ja i.420 (satasahass˚); iii.229 (identical); v.44 (identical). cp. uṭṭhāyika
      • energetic Ja vi.246
    from uṭṭhāna
    Uṭṭhānavant
    adjective
    1. strenuous, active Dhp 24
    uṭṭhāna + vant
    Uṭṭhāpeti
    1. -1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaṁ (suriyaṁ) u. to let the sun rise, i.e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise Ja i.318 Ja vi.330 Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaṁ)
    • to raise Ja vi.32 (paṭhaviṁ). 3. to fit up Ja vi.445 (nāvaṁ)

  • to exalt, praise DN-a i.256

    • to turn a person out Dhp-a iv.69
    • ‣ See also vuṭṭhāpeti
    • causative ii. of utthahati
  • Uṭṭhāyaka
    adjective
    1. “getting-up-ish”, i.e. ready to get up, quick, alert active, industrious; feminine ˚ikā Thag 2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna-viriyasampannā Thag-a 267 variant reading uṭṭhāhikā)
    2. adjective formation from uṭṭhāya, absolutive of uṭṭhahati
    Uṭṭhāyika
    adjective
    1. yielding, producing Ja ii.403 (satasahass˚)
    = uṭṭhānaka
    Uṭṭhāyin
    adjective
    1. getting up DN i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā-nipātin rising early & lying down late)
    adjective formation from uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka
    Uṭṭhāhaka
    adjective
    1. = uṭṭhāyaka Ja v.448 feminine ˚ikā AN iii.38 (variant reading ˚āyikā) iv.266 sq
    2. for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.
    Uṭṭhita
    1. -1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73
    • arisen, produced Ja i.36 Mil 155

  • striving, exerting oneself, active Ja ii.61 Dhp 168 Mil 213

    • ˚an˚ SN ii.264 Ps i.172

      • cp. pariy˚. Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel ‣See vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati; , e.g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion DN ii.9 pāto vuṭṭhito risen early Pv-a 128
      past participle of uṭṭhahati
  • Uḍḍayhana
    neuter
    1. burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (˚velā = jhāyana-kālo Pug AN 187) Kp-a 181 (Text uḍḍahanavelā, variant reading preferable uḍḍayh˚)
    from uḍḍayhati ‣See uddahati
    Uḍḍahati
    1. to burn up intranstitive Kp-a 181 (uḍḍaheyya with variant reading uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable) Usually in
    2. passive uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up
    3. intranstitive SN iii.149 SN iii.150 (variant reading for ḍayhati) Ja iii.22 (udayhate); v.194.
    4. future uḍḍayhissati Ja i.48
    5. ud + ḍahati
    Uḍḍita
    1. ensnared (?), bound, tied up SN i.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita Commentary ; trsld. “the world is all strung up”)
    past participle of uḍḍeti2
    Uḍḍeti1
    1. to fly up MN i.364 (kāko maṁsapesiṁ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; variant readings ubbaḍaheyya, uyya dayeyya) Ja v.256 Ja v.368 Ja v.417
    ud + ḍeti to fly. The etymology is doubtful, Müller Pali Grammar 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti; 2 both as causative s to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning (“lay snares”), it may be a cpd with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably; , layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l → ḍ is a frequently Pāli phenomenon. Another
  • causative II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti
  • Uḍḍeti2
    1. (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, variant reading uḍḍhetvā)
    • (b) to throw away, reject Pv-a 256 (chaḍḍayāmi gloss).
    • past participle uḍḍita
    ‣See discussion under uḍḍeti1
    Uḍḍha
    (—˚) (numeral ordinal)
    1. the fourth, only in compound aḍḍhuḍḍha “half of the fourth unit”, i.e. three & a half (cp; diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha-teyya 2 1/2) Ja v.417f. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs xii.53
    the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha
    Uṇṇa
    neuter & Uṇṇā
    • feminine

      1. -1. wool AN iii.37 = iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) Ja ii.147 Snp-a 263 (patt˚)
      • hair between the eyebrows Snp 1022 & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamuk; ’antare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. DN ii.18 = iii.144 = 170 = Snp-a 285 Also at Vism 552 in jāti-uṇṇāya
      1. ˚ja in uṇṇaja mukha Ja vi.218 meaning “rounded swelling” (Commentary explains by kañcan’ādāso viya paripuṇṇaṁ mukhaṁ)
      2. ˚nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Indogermanic *ṷebh to weave as in Latin vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sanskrit a spider, literally “wool-i.e. thread-weaver”, only in combination with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = AN ii.73 = Ja ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C)
      Sanskrit ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Latin lāna wool; Gothic wulla; Old High German wolla = English wool; Lithuanian vilna; Welsh gwlan (= English flannel); Latin vellus (fleece) = Anglo-Saxon wil-mod
    Uṇṇata
    adjective
    1. raised, high, figuratively haughty (opposite oṇata) AN ii.86 Snp 702 (an˚ care uddhaccaṁ n’āpajjeyya Snp-a 492) Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug AN 229). cp. unnata
    past participle of uṇṇamati, Sanskrit unnata
    Uṇṇati
    feminine
    1. haughtiness Snp 830 Nd1 158 170 Dhs 1116 1233. cp. unnati
    from uṇṇamati
    Uṇṇama
    1. loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116 1233. cp. unnama
    from uṇṇamati
    Uṇṇamati
    1. to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Snp 366 Snp 829 Snp 928 Nd1 169 Ja vi.346 infinitive uṇṇametave Snp 206 cp. unnamati
    ud + nam
    Uṇṇī
    feminine
    1. a woollen dress Vin ii.108
    Sanskrit aurṇī from aurṇa woollen, derivation of ūrṇa
    Uṇha
    adjective-noun
    1. hot, as adj only in phrase uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i.e. to kill oneself Dhp-a i.95 otherwise in compounds. absolute only as neuter “heat” & always in contrast to sītaṁ “cold” Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi) DN ii.15 (opp sīta) MN i.85 AN i.145 = 170 = Ja v.417 (sītaṁ vā uṇhaṁ vā tiṇaṁ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā) Snp 52 Snp 966 (acc ˚) Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita) Ja i.17 (v.93) Mil 410 (megho uṇhaṁ nibbāpeti) Pv-a 37 (ati˚).

      1. ˚ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa paṇḍu-kambala-sil’āsanaṁ uṇhākāraṁ dassesi, of Sakka’s throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e.g. Ja i.330 v.92 Dhp-a i.17 and passim -odaka hot water Vv-a 68
      • ˚kalla glowing-hot embers or ashes Ja ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, variant reading ˚kukkuḷavassa)
      • ˚kāla hot weather Vin ii.209
      Vedic uṣṇā feminine to oṣati to burn, past participle uṣṭa burnt, Sanskrit uṣṇa = Latin ustus; cp. Latin uro to burn Anglo-Saxon ysla glowing cinders, Lithuanian usnis nettle
    Uṇhatta
    neuter
    1. hot state, heat Vism 171
    abstract from uṇha
    Uṇhīsa
    1. a turban DN i.7 DN ii.19 = iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.16) Ja ii.88 Mil 330 DN-a i.89 Dhs-a 198 Ut(t)anda
    Sanskrit uṣṇīṣa
    Ut(t)aṇḍa
    1. ‣See uddaṇḍa
    Utu
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. -1. (literally (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa-utu occasion or time of the sun(-rise) Dhp-a i.165 utuṁ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraṁ utuṁ gaṇhāpeti “to cause the body to take season”, i.e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. Ja iii.527 DN-a i.252
      • (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha vassa & hemanta; AN iv.138 Snp-a 317 Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at Ja v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā in the wintry season SN v.51
      • (c) the menses Snp-a 317 Ja v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi
      • locative as explained by Commentary pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya)
      • (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opposite kamma), physical order ‣See Asl. 272
      • feminine ; Dialogues II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddhism p. 119
      • feminine, Compendium 161, Dhs trsln. introduction xvii; & cp. compounds So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614 Ja vi.105 (kamma-paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Mil 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā)
      1. ˚āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) Pv-a 148
      • ˚ūpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Snp 249 (= gimhe ātapa-ṭṭhāna-sevanā vasse rukkha-mūla-sevanā hemante jalappavesa-sevanā Snp-a 291)
      • ˚kāla seasonable favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299 Vin ii.173
      • ˚ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Mil 268 (kamma˚ hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451
      • ˚nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Mil 268
      • ˚pamāṇa measure of the season, i.e. the exact season Vin i.95
      • ˚pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) SN iv.230 AN ii.87 AN iii.131 AN v.110 Mil 112 Mil 304 Vism 31
      • ˚parissaya danger or risk of the seasons AN iii.388
      • ˚pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons Ja vi.524
      • ˚vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season Ja i.58
      • ˚vikāra change of season Vism 262
      • ˚veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Snp 291 (cp. Snp-a 317)
      • ˚saṁvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, plural ˚ā the seasons DN iii.85 AN ii.75 SN v.442 The phrase utusaṁvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi compound, viz cycles of seasons & of years, i.e. vasanta-gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta-saṁvacchar; ’adi bahūni saṁvaccharāni ca Pv-a 135 Similarly at Ja v.330 (with Cy)
      • ˚sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable Dhp-a 327
      • ˚samaya time of the menses Snp-a 317
      Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adjective ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Latin ars “art”, Gr (), further Latin rītus (rite), Anglo-Saxon rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q.v. under appeti
    Utuka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. seasonable, only in compound sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial DN ii.179 Pv iv.122 (= pupphupaga-rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha Pv-a 275); Sdhp 248
      utu + ka
    Utunī
    feminine
    1. a menstruating woman Vin iii.18 Vin iv.303 SN iv.239 AN iii.221 AN iii.229 Mil 127
    • an˚ AN iii.221 AN iii.226
    formed from utu like bhikkhunī from bhikkhu
    Utta
    1. [ past participle of vac, Sanskrit ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚; speaking badly or spoken of badly i.e. of bad repute AN ii.117 AN ii.143 AN iii.163 Kh viii.2 Kp-a 218.

    Uttaṇḍāla
    adjective
    1. “grainy”, i.e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp atikilinna too thin or liquid) Ja i.340 Ja iii.383 (identical) iv.44 (identical)
    ud + taṇḍula
    Uttatta
    1. heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure Ja vi.574 (hemaṁ uttattaṁ agginā) Vv 8417 Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa so read for uggata˚, reading correct at Pv-a 188 ˚singī) Pv-a 10 (˚kanaka, Text uggatta˚); Mhbv.25 (identical)
    ud + tatta1, past participle of ud + tap, Sanskrit uttapta
    Uttanta
    1. frightened, faint Vin iii.84 ‣See uttasta & utrasta;
    = utrasta, is reading correct?
    Uttama
    adjective
    1. “ut-most”, highest, greatest, best Snp 1054 (dhammaṁ uttamaṁ the highest ideal = Nibbāna for which seṭṭhan Snp 1064 cp. Nd2 317) Dhp 56 Nd1 211 Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combined with pavara) Kp-a 124 Dhp-a i.430: Pv-a 1 Pv-a 50
    • dum-uttama a splendid tree Vv 393 nar˚ the best of men Snp 1021 (narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Snp 1012 puris˚ the noblest man Thag 1, 629 1084;
    • neuter uttamaṁ the highest ideal, i.e. Arahantship Ja i.96
    1. ˚aṅga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = MN i.32 = AN iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiṁ) Ja ii.163 also in cpd ˚bhūta the hair of the head Thag 2, 253 (= kesa-kalāpa Thag-a 209 210) & ˚ruha identical Ja i.138 = vi.96 (= kesā Commentary ) (b) the eye Ja iv.403 (c) the penis Ja v.197
    • ˚attha the highest gain or good (i.e. Arahantship Snp-a 332) Snp 324 Dhp 386 Dhp 403 Dhp-a iv.142 Thag-a 160
    • ˚adhama most contemptible Ja v.394 Ja v.437
    • ˚guṇā (
    • plural ) loftiest virtues Ja i.96
    • ˚purisa Iti 97 & -porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 ‣See Dhp-a ii.188
    • ˚bhāva the highest condition, state or place Dhp-a ii.188 (˚ṁ patto = puris’ uttamo)
    superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara ‣See etymology under ud˚
    Uttamatā
    feminine
    1. highest amount, climax, limit DN-a i.169 (for paramatā)
    abstract from uttama
    Uttara1
    adjective compar. of ud˚, q.v. for etymology; the superl. is uttama]
    1. -1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in compounds., Ja ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2) ‣See also below
    • northern (with disā region or point of com
    • passive DN i.153 MN i.123 SN i.224 Pv-a 75 uttarāmukha (for uttaraṁmukha) turning north, facing north Snp 1010

  • subsequent following, second (˚-) Ja i.63 (˚āsāḷha-nakkhatta). 4. over, beyond (—˚): aṭṭh’utara-sata eight over a hundred i.e. 108 Dhp-a i.388

    • sa-uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i.e. inferior DN i.80 (citta), ii.299 MN i.59 SN v.265 Vb 324 (paññā) Dhs 1292 1596 Dhs-a 50
    • anuttara without a superior unrivalled, unparalleled DN i.40 SN i.124 SN ii.278 SN iii.84 Snp 179 ‣See also under anuttara
    1. ˚attharaṇa upper cover Ja vi.253
    • ˚ābhimukha facing North DN ii.15
    • ˚āsaṅga an upper robe Vin i.289 Vin ii.126 SN i.81 SN iv.290 AN i.67 AN i.145 AN ii.146 Dhp-a i.218 Pv-a 73 Vv-a 33 = 51
    • ˚itara something higher, superior DN i.45 DN i.156 DN i.174 SN i.81 Ja i.364 Dhp-a ii.60 Dhp-a iv.4
    • ˚oṭṭha the upper lip (opposite adhar˚) Ja ii.420 Ja iii.26 Ja iv.184
    • ˚chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) DN i.7 AN i.181 AN iii.50
    • ˚chadana = ˚chada DN ii.187 Dhp-a i.87
    • ˚dvāra the northern gate Ja vi.364
    • ˚dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness DN ii.188 (paṭividdha-lok’uttara-dhammatāya uttama-bhāvaṁ patta)
    • ˚pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = 148 -pubba north-eastern Ja vi.518
    • ˚sse (variant reading ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow AN i.240

  • Uttara2
    adjective
    1. crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚; difficult to cross or to get out of SN i.197 (not duruttamo) Mil 158 and in compound ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Mil 194 (cp. uttara-setu)
    from uttarati
    Uttaraṇa
    neuter
    1. bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Thag 1, 418 Ja i.195 In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e.g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). cp. uttara
    from uttarati
    Uttarati
    1. -1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opposite otarati) Ja i.108 (identical)
    • to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Mil 117 Mil 118 Mil 132 260, 277

  • to cross over, to go beyond MN i.135

    • aorist udatāri Snp 471 (oghaṁ)
    • to go over, to overspread Ja v.204 (
    • absolutive uttariyāna = avattharitvā Commentary )
    • pp otiṇṇa (q.v.)
    • causative uttareti (q.v.) Uttari (-) & Uttarim
    • ud + tarati1
  • Uttari (˚-)
    Uttariṁ
    adverb

    out, over, beyond; additional moreover, further, besides.

  • uttariṁ : DN i.71 MN i.83 iii.148 SN iv.15 Snp 796 (uttariṁ kurute = uttariṁ karoti Nd2 102 i.e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially) Ja ii.23 Ja iii.324 Mil 10 (ito uttariṁ anything beyond this, any more) Dhp-a iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially ‣See vuttari) Vv-a 152

    • uttariṁ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i.e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314 referring to Ps ii.131, which is quoted at Mil 198 as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā.
    • uttari˚; in following compounds
    1. ˚karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation SN ii.99 SN iii.168 AN v.157 = 164 Iti 118
    • ˚bhaṅga an extra portion, tit-bit, dainties, additional or after-meal bits Vin ii.214 Vin iii.160 Vin iv.259 Ja ii.419 Dhp-a i.214 sa-uttaribhanga together with dainty bits Ja i.186 cp. 196 (yāgu) -bhaṅgika serving as dainties Ja i.196
    • ˚manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in compound ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adjective of a transcendental character, miraculous overwhelming Vin i.209 Vin ii.112 Vin iii.105 Vin iv.24 DN i.211 DN iii.3 DN iii.12 DN iii.18 MN i.68 MN ii.200 SN iv.290 SN iv.300 SN iv.337 AN iii.430 AN v.88 Dhp-a iii.480
    • ˚sāṭaka a further i.e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle Ja ii.246 Dhp-a iv.200 Pv-a 48 Pv-a 49 (= uttarīyaṁ)
    compound form of uttara, cp. angi-bhūta uttāni-karoti etc.
  • Uttarika
    adjective
    1. transcending, superior, superhuman Nett 50
    from uttara
    Uttariya
    neuter
    1. -1. state of being higher. cp. iii.35; negative an˚ state of being unsurpassed (literally with nothing higher), preeminence ‣See anuttariya
    • an answer, rejoinder Dhp-a i.44 (karaṇ˚-karaṇa)
    • abstract from uttara; uttara + ya = Sanskrit *uttarya
    Uttarīya
    neuter
    1. an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 (= uparivasanaṁ uparihāraṁ uttarisāṭakaṁ Pv-a 49); Dāvs iii.30 Thag-a 253
    from uttara
    Uttasati1
    1. only in causative uttāseti to impale, q.v
    2. identical in form with next
    Uttasati2
    1. -1. to frighten Ja i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati) iii.145 (identical) Ja ii.384 Ja vi.79 ppr. uttasaṁ Thag 1, 863 uttasanto Pv; ii.23
    • See utrasati.
    • causative uttāseti (q.v.)
    • past participle uttasta & utrasta (q.v.) cp. also uttanta
    ut + tasati2
    Uttasana
    adjective neuter
    1. frightening, fear Ja i.414 (variant reading for uttasta)
    from ud + tras, cp. uttāsana
    Uttasta
    1. frightened, terrified, faint-hearted Ja i.414 (˚bhikkhu; variant reading uttasana˚)
    past participle of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q.v.)
    Uttāna
    adjective
    1. -1. streched out (flat), lying on one’s back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaṁ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch) ii.215 Ja i.205 Pv iv.108 (opposite avakujja) Pv-a 178 (identical) 265
    • clear, manifest, open, evident cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uttāna in same sense at Avestan SN ii.106
    1. DN i.116 SN ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito) Ja ii.168 (= pākaṭa); v.460 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 89 Pv-a 140 Pv-a 168
    • anuttāna unclear, not explained Ja vi.247
    • The compound form (˚-) of uttāna in combination with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q.v.)
    • superficial, “flat”, shallow AN i.70 (parisa) Pug 46
    1. ˚mukha “clear mouthed”, speaking plainly, easily understood DN i.116 ‣See DN-a i.287 Dhp-a iv.8
    • ˚seyyaka “lying on one’s back”, i.e. an infant MN i.432 AN iii.6 Thag 1, 935 Mil 40 Vism 97 (˚dāraka)
    from ut + tan ‣See tanoti & tanta
    Uttānaka
    adjective
    1. -1. (= uttāna1) lying on one’s back Ja vi.38 (˚ṁ pātetvā) Dhp-a i.184
    • (uttāna2) clear, open DN ii.55 MN i.340 = Dhp-a i.173
    • from uttāna
    Uttānī
    (˚-)
    1. open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation SN v.443 Pug 19 Vb 259 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38
    • ˚karaṇa id Snp-a 445
    • ˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103 SN ii.25 SN ii.154 SN iii.132 SN iii.139 SN iv.166 SN v.261 AN i.286 AN iii.361f.
    the compound form of uttāna in compounds. with kṛ & bhū cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uttānī-karoti Mvu iii.408 uttānī-kṛta Avs i.287; ii.151
    Uttāpeti
    1. to heat, to cause pain, torment Ja vi.161
    causative of uttapati
    Uttāra
    1. crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) SN iv.174 = MN i.134 cp. uttara2
    from ud + tṛ; as in uttarati
    Uttārita
    1. pulled out, brought or moved out Ja i.194
    past participle of uttāreti
    Uttāritatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having or being brought or moved out Ja i.195
    abstract from uttārita
    Uttāreti
    1. to make come out, to move or pull out Ja i.194 Snp-a 349 past participle uttārita (q.v.)
    2. causative of uttarati
    Uttāsa
    1. terror, fear, fright DN iii.148 SN v.386 Mil 170 Pv-a 180
    Sanskrit uttrāsa, from ud + tras
    Uttāsana
    neuter
    1. impalement Ja ii.444 Snp-a 61 (sūle)
    from uttāseti2
    Uttāsavant
    adjective
    1. showing fear or fright, fearful SN iii.16f.
    uttāsa + vant
    Uttāsita
    1. impaled Pv iv.16 (= āvuta āropita Vv-a 220) Ja i.499 Ja iv.29
    past participle of uttāseti2
    Uttāseti1
    1. to frighten, terrify Ja i.230 Ja i.385 Ja ii.117
    Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taṁs is uttāseti2 is a variant
    Uttāseti2
    1. to impale AN i.48 Ja i.230 Ja i.326 Ja ii.443 iii.34 iv.29. past participle uttāsita (q.v.) cp. uttāsana
    2. cp. Sanskrit uttaṁsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taṁs to shake, a variation of tars to shake tremble
    Uttiṭṭha
    1. [= ucchiṭṭha? cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati “alms which one stands up for, or expects” left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta) Thag 1, 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka-piṇḍa Thag-a 242) Ja iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C similarly as at Thag-a; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa Commentary ) Mil 213 Mil 214
    Uttiṭṭhe
    1. ‣See uṭṭhahati
    Uttiṇa
    adjective
    1. in uttiṇaṁ karoti to take the straw off, literally to make off-straw; to deprive of the roof MN ii.53 cp. next
    ud + tiṇa
    Uttiṇṇa
    1. drawn out, pulled out, neuter outlet, passage Ja ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?
    past participle of uttarati
    Utrasta
    1. frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin ii.184 SN i.53 SN i.54 (an˚) Snp 986 Mil 23 Dhp-a ii.6 (˚mānasa) Pv-a 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva)
    past participle of uttasati, also cp. uttasta
    Utrāsa
    1. terror Ja ii.8 (citt˚)
    = uttāsa
    Utrāsin
    adjective
    1. terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious SN i.99 SN i.219
    • Usually negative an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away SN i.99 Thag 1, 864 Nd2 13 Ja iv.296 Ja v.4 Mil 339 ‣See also apalāyin
    from * Sanskrit uttrāsa = Pali uttāsa
    Ud-
    1. [Vedic ud-; Gothic ūt = Old High German ūz = English out, Old Irish ud-; cp. Latin ūsque “from-unto” = Sanskrit uttara prefix in verbal & nominativenal combination One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compound appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli
    • I. Original meaning “out in an upward direction”, out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one’s neck out high (cp. German “empor”); uggilati to “swallow up” i.e. spit out
    • The opposites of ud-are represented by either ava or ‣See under II. & IV. & cp. ucc-âvaca uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya, ni ‣See below or vi (as udaya: vi-aya or vaya)
    • II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from—˚aṇha (“day-out”); ˚agga (“top-out”); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opposite o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opposite o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. German aus-lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika “ribs out”; etc. etc.
    • up (high) or high up, upwards on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher)-: ˚kujja erect (opposite ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opposite vi˚); ˚khipati throw-up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up-stream, ˚javana identical (opposite o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna “standing up” ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opposite o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opposite o˚); ˚nama e-levation ˚nāmin raised (opposite ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc
    • III More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, “ex-”, e.g. unnangala “outplough” = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex-bhikkhu. (2) ud˚ = off, i.e. out of the way, wrong, e.g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga identical
    • ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i.e. exceedingly, e.g. ujjangala extremely dusty uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard
    • IV Dialectical variations & combinations.
    • Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between; ud˚; and ava˚; (cp. English break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the different between; ū & u; or o & u; . For comparison ‣See the following: ukkamati & okk˚ uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati → abbhukkirati.
    • the most frequently comb; ns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚; and sam˚; ‣See e.g. abhi ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc. sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc
    Uda1
    indeclinable
    1. disjunctive participle “or” either singly, as at Snp 455 Snp 955 Snp 1090 Ja v.478 (variant reading udāhu) Nd1 445 (explained as “padasandhi” with same formula as iti, q.v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combined with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Snp 193 Snp 842 Snp 1075 Iti 82 = 117 (caraṁ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṁ nisinno uda vā sayaṁ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); Kp-a 191
    • ‣ See also udāhu
    Sanskrit uta & u, with Latin aut (or); Gothic auk = German auch to pron base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.
    Uda2
    (˚-)
    1. water, wave. In compounds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ ‣See under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta udapāna, udabindu
    Vedic udan neuter, also later uda (but only ˚-), commonly udaka, q.v.
    Udaka
    neuter
    1. water Vin ii.120 213 DN ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.) Dhp 80 Dhp 145 Ja i.212 Pv i.57 Pug 31 32 Mil 318 Vv-a 20 (udake temanaṁ aggimhe tāpanaṁ) Dhp-a i.289 Dhp-a iii.176 256 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 70
    • Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. The compound form (—˚) is either ūdaka (āsanûdaka-dāyin Ja iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet Pv-a 78) odaka occurs also in absolute form (q.v.), cp. also oka Bdgh.’s kaṁ = udakaṁ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology DN-a i.209
    1. ˚aṇṇava water-flood MN i.134
    • ˚āyatika a water-pipe Vin ii.123
    • ˚āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of with SN v.400 AN ii.55 = iii.337 Vv-a 155
    • ˚ūpama resembling water, like water AN iv.11 (puggala)
    • ˚ ogāhana plunging into water Ja iii.235
    • ˚ogha a water flood Vv-a 48
    • ˚orohaka descending into water, bathing; name of a class of ascetics, literally “bather” MN i.281 SN iv.312 AN v.263
    • ˚orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing DN i.167 SN i.182 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Ja iv.299 Pug 55
    • ˚kalaha the “water dispute” Dhp-a iii.256
    • ˚kāka a water crow Ja ii.441
    • ˚kicca libation of water, literally water-performance; cleansing, washing DN ii.15
    • ˚kīḷā sporting in the with Ja vi.420
    • ˚gahaṇasāṭaka bathing-gown Ja v.477
    • ˚ghaṭa a water pitcher Pv-a 66
    • ˚cāṭi a water jar Dhp-a i.52
    • ˚ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120
    • ˚tumba a water vessel Ja ii.441 DN-a i.202 Dhp-a ii.193
    • ˚telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107
    • ˚dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth-cleaner Vin iii.51 Vin iv.90 92, 233 Ja iv.69
    • ˚daha a lake (of water DN i.45
    • ˚doṇikā a water-tub or trough Vin ii.220
    • ˚dhārā a shower of water Ps i.125 Ja iv.351
    • ˚niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120 123 Dhp-a ii.37
    • ˚nibbāhana an aquaduct Mil 295
    • ˚paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213
    • ˚patta a waterbowl Vin ii.107 DN i.80 SN iii.105
    • ˚puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122
    • ˚posita fed or nourished by water Vv-a 173
    • ˚phusita a drop of water SN ii.135
    • ˚bindu a drop of with Iti 84 (variant reading for udabindu) Pv-a 99
    • ˚bubbula a with bubble AN iv.137 Vism 109, 479 (in comparison)
    • ˚bhasta devoid of water Thag-a 212 (for anodaka Thag 2, 265)
    • ˚maṇika a water-pot Vin i.227 MN i.354 AN iii.27 Mil 28 Dhp-a i.79
    • ˚mallaka a cup for with AN i.250
    • ˚rakkhasa a water-sprite Dhp-a iii.74
    • ˚rahada a lake (of w.) DN i.74 DN i.84 AN i.9 AN ii.105 AN iii.25 Snp 467 Pug 47
    • ˚rūha a water plant Vv 356
    • ˚lekhā writing on with AN i.283 = Pug 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug AN 215)
    • ˚vāra “waterturn”, i.e. fetching water Dhp-a i.49
    • ˚vāraka bucket SN ii.118
    • ˚vāha a flow of water, flowing with Ja vi.162
    • ˚vāhaka rise or swelling (literally carrying or pulling along (of water) overflowing, flood AN i.178
    • ˚vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju)
    • ˚sadda sound of water Dhs 621
    • ˚sarāvaka a saucer for with Vin ii.120
    • ˚sāṭaka = sāṭikā Ja ii.13
    • ˚sāṭikā “water-cloak”, a bathing-mantle Vin i.292 Vin ii.272 Vin iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati Commentary ) Dhp-a ii.61 (Text ˚sāṭaka)
    • ˚suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta-karaṇassa dhovanā Commentary )
    Vedic udaka, uda + ka ‣See uda2, of Indogermanic *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sanskrit odatī, odman flood odana gruel, q.v.); cp. Sanskrit unatti, undati to water, udra = Avestan udra = Anglo-Saxon otor = English otter (“water-animal”) Latin unda wave; Gothic watō = Old High German wazzar = English water Old Bulgarian voda water, vydra otter
    Udakaccha
    1. watery soil, swamp Ja v.137
    uda + kaccha
    Udakumbha
    1. a water jug Ja i.20 Dhp 121 Dhp 122 Pv i.129
    uda + kumbha
    Udagga
    adjective
    1. topmost, high, lofty Thag 1, 110 figuratively elated, exalted, exultant joyful, happy DN i.110 (˚citta) Snp 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (identical); Pv iv.155 (attamana +); iv.58 (haṭṭha +) Mil 248 Dhp-a ii.42 (haṭṭha-pahaṭṭha udagg-udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (identical); Sdhp 323 ‣See also derivation odagya
    ud + agga, literally “out-top”, cp. Sanskrit udagra
    Udaggatā
    feminine
    1. exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298
    abstract from udagga
    Udaggi˚
    ; in udaggihuttaṁ
    1. the fire prepared (for sacrifice) Ja v.396 (uda-aggihuttaṁ Commentary wrongly), literally “the sacrifice (being) out”
    = ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra
    Udaṅgaṇa
    neuter
    1. an open place Ja i.109
    ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana “a place for digging for water” ‣See Toevoegselen p. 96
    Udacchidā
    3rd singular praet. of ucchindati to break up Snp 2 Snp 3 (˚ā metri causa).
    Udañcana
    neuter
    1. a bucket for drawing water out of a well Dhp-a i.94
    from ud + añc ‣See añchati
    Udañcanin
    adjective-noun
    1. draining, pulling up water feminine ˚ī a bucket or pail Ja i.417 (
    2. feminine ˚ī)
    3. ud + añcanin to añc ‣See añchati
    Udañjala
    1. in ˚ṁ kīḷati a water-game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Buddhaghosa udañjalan ti udaka-cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)
    udan + jala ‣See uda2
    Udaññavant
    adjective
    1. rich in water, well-watered Ja v.405 (= udaka-sampanna Commentary )
    udan = uda(ka) + vant
    Udaṇha
    1. day-break, dawn, sunrise Ja v.155
    ud + aṇha
    Udatāri
    1. 3rd sg aorist of uttarati to cross over Snp 471 (oghaṁ).

    Udatta
    adjective
    1. elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 (= uḷārapañña Commentary )
    Sanskrit udātta
    Udadhi
    1. the sea, ocean SN i.67 Iti 86 Snp 720 Ja v.326 Ja vi.526 Thag-a 289 Vv-a 155 (“udakaṁ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi”); Sdhp 322 Sdhp 577
    uda + dhi, literally water-container
    Udapatta1 [ụda
    1. for ud, and patta, past participle of pat, for patita? Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. takes it as udak-prāpta, risen, flying up sprung up Ja iii.484 (= uppatita Commentary ); v.71 (= uṭṭhita Commentary )
    Udapatta2
    1. a bowl of water, a water-jug, ewer MN i.100 SN v.121 AN iii.230f. 236 v.92, 94, 97 sq
    uda + patta; Sanskrit udapātra
    Udapādi
    3rd singular aorist of uppajjati to arise, originate, become DN i.110 DN i.180 DN i.185 SN ii.273 Iti 52 99 Snp-a 346 462.
    Udapāna
    1. a well, a cistern Vin i.139 Vin ii.122 MN i.80 AN iv.171 Ja iii.216 Ud 78 Pv ii.78; ii.925 Mil 411 Vism 244 (in simile) DN-a i.298 Vv-a 40 Pv-a 78
    uda + pāna literally “(place for) drinking water”; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna
    Udappatta
    1. ‣See udapatta
    Udabindu
    1. a drop of water MN i.78 Snp 812 Dhp 121 Dhp 122 Dhp 336 Iti 84 (variant reading udaka˚) Nd1 135 Snp-a 114 Dhp-a ii.51
    uda + bindu
    Udabbhadhi
    aorist 3rd singular of ubbadhati
    1. to destroy, kill Snp 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati Snp-a 18)
    ud + vadh
    Udabbahe
    3rd singular Pot. of ubbahati
    1. to draw out, tear out, remove Thag 1, 158 Snp 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) Snp-a 460) Ja ii.223 (udabbaheyya Commentary ); vi.587 (= hareyya Commentary ); aorist udabbahi Vin iv.5
    2. ud + bṛh1 ‣See also abbahati
    Udaya
    1. rise, growth; increment, increase; income, revenue, interest AN ii.199 Ps i.34 Vv 847 (dhan’atthika uddayaṁ patthayāna = ānisaṁsaṁ atirekalābhaṁ Vv-a 336); 8452 Dhp-a ii.270 Pv-a 146 (ulār vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa-satāni labhitvā with interest); Sdhp 40 Sdhp 230 Sdhp 258
    • ‣ See also uddaya
    1. ˚attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha; 2) MN i.356 SN v.197f. 395 AN iii.152f.; iv.111, 289, 352; v.15 25
    2. ˚atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp above Vv 847 dhan’atthika) AN ii.199
    • ˚bbaya (ud-aya vy-aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death up & down DN iii.223 SN i.46 = 52 (lokassa); iii.130 AN ii.90 AN iii.32 AN iv.153 Iti 120 Vism 287; Ps i.54 Thag-a 90
    • ˚vyaya = ˚bbaya SN iv.140 AN ii.15 (khandhānaṁ) Dhp 113 Dhp 374 (khandhānaṁ ‣See Dhp-a iv.110). Udayam & Udayanto;
    from ud + i, cp. udeti
    Udayaṁ
    Udayanto;
    1. ppr. of udeti (q.v.)
    Udayana
    neuter
    1. going up, rise DN-a i.95
    from ud + i
    Udara
    neuter
    1. the belly, stomach DN ii.266 Snp 78 Snp 604 Snp 609 Snp 716 Ja i.146 Ja i.164 Ja i.265 Mil 213 Pv-a 283 Kp-a 57, 58 Dhp-a i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102
    2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir-odare) -ūnūdara with empty belly Thag 1, 982 Mil 406 Mil 407 cp. ūna
      1. ˚aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i.e. of digestion Kp-a 59 Snp-a 462 Pv-a 33
      • ˚āvadehakaṁ (
      • adverb ) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous MN i.102 AN v.18 Thag 1, 935 Vism 33
      • ˚paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr˚abbhantara 261) Snp-a 248 Kp-a 55, 61
      • ˚pūra stomachfilling Vism 108
      • ˚vaṭṭi “belly-sack”, belly Vin iii.39 117; Vism 262 where Kp-a reads ud. paṭala)
      • ˚vāta the wind of the belly, stomach-ache 9J i.33, 433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha) Dhp-a iv.129
      Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Latin uterus belly, womb; Lithuanian védaras stomach ‣See also Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under vensica
    Udariya
    neuter
    1. the stomach Kh iii. (cp. Kp-a 57); Vism 258, 358. cp. sodariya
    from udara
    Udassaye
    2nd singular pot. of ud + assayati
    1. Ja v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), explained by Commentary as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?)
    ā + śri, cp. assaya
    Udahāraka
    1. a water-carrier Ja ii.80
    uda + hāraka
    Udahāriya
    adjective
    1. going for water Vv 509
    from udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ
    Udāgacchati
    1. to come to completion Da i.288. cp. sam
    ud + ā + gacchati
    Udāna
    neuter
    1. -1. “breathing out”, exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. Kindred Sayings p. 29 note 2) DN i.50 92 SN i.20 SN i.27 SN i.82 SN i.160 AN i.67 Ja i.76 Pug 43 62 Nett 174 Pv-a 67 Sdhp 514
    • The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi” i.e. breathed forth this solemn utterance cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udānaṁ udānayati Divy 99 etc.
    1. e.g. at Vin i.2f. 12, 230, 353 DN i.47 DN ii.107 (udāna of triumph) SN iii.55 Mhvs xix.29 DN-a i.140 Ud. 1 passim Snp-a 354 (“the familiar quotation about the sakyas”). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g udānaṁ pavatti Ja i.61 abhāsi Vin iv.54 kathesi Ja vi.38
    • one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures ‣See under nava & aṅga;
    • cp. vodāna
    • from ud + an to breathe
    Udānita
    1. uttered, breathed forth, said Dhp-a iv.55
    past participle of udāneti
    Udāneti
    1. to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaṁ udānesi ‣See under udāna1. Absolutely only at Ja iii.218
    denominative feminine udāna, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udānayati
    Udāpatvā
    1. at Ja v.255 is uncertain reading (variant reading udapatvā, Commentary explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up) perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, preterite of ud pat = Sanskrit *udapaptat (so Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.)
    Udāyati
    1. at DN-a i.266 (udāyissati future ) is hardly correct DN i.96 has here udrīyissati (q.v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DN-a i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To variant reading undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya ‣See udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in explanation of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (
    2. causative = uṭṭhapeti).

    Udāra
    adjective
    1. raised, sublime noble, excellent Dāvs; iii.4 (samussit-odāra-sitātapattaṁ) DN-a i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429 Sdhp 591
    Sanskrit udāra, of which the usual Pali form is ulāra (q.v.) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit audāra & audārika.
    Udāvatta
    1. retired, desisting Ja v.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C)
    past participle of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati
    Udāsīna
    adjective
    1. indifferent, passive, neutral Dhs-a 129
    ud + āsīna, past participle of ās to sit; literally sit apart, be indifferent
    Udāhaṭa
    1. uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41
    pp of udāharati
    Udāharaṇa
    neuter
    1. example, instance Ja iii.401 (˚ṁ āharitvā dassento), 510 Mil 345 Snp-a 445 Vv-a 297
    from udāharati
    Udāharati
    1. to utter, recite. speak. Snp 389 Ja iii.289 DN-a i.140 ‣See udāhāra
    • pp udāhaṭa (q.v.) cp. pariy˚
    ud + ā + hṛ
    Udāhāra
    1. utterance, speech DN-a i.140 (˚ṁ udāhari = udānaṁ udānesi); Pug AN 223,
    from udāharati
    Udāhu
    indeclinable
    1. disjunctive-adversative particle “or”, in direct questions DN i.157 DN ii.8 Snp 599 Snp 875 Snp 885 Ja i.20 Ja i.83 Vv-a 258 (= ādu) Pv-a 33 Pv-a 51 Mil 10
    • The first part of the question is often introduced with kiṁ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e.g. kin nakkhattaṁ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṁ karissasi Vv-a 63 kiṁ amhehi saddhiṁ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? Dhp-a ii.96 ‣See under kiṁ
    • Often combined with other expletive particles, e.g. udāhu ve Snp 1075 Snp 1077 udāhu no Snp 347 eva … no udāhu (so.. or not) DN i.152 (ayaṁ) nu kho-udāhu (ayaṁ) is it (this)-(this) Vism 313
    uta + āho, cp. Pali uda & aho and Sanskrit utāro
    Udi
    1. (or udī is artificial adjective formn. from udeti, meaning “rising, excelling”, in explanation of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho)
    Udikkhati
    1. -1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. plural pres.
    2. medium) Ja v.71 Ja v.296 Vv 8121 (
    3. aorist udikkhisaṁ = ullokesiṁ Vv-a 316); Dāvs ii.109; Sdhp 308
    4. to look out for, to expect Ja i.344 Vv-a 118
    5. to envy Mil 338

      ud + īkṣ, Sanskrit udīkṣate
    Udikkhitar
    1. one who looks for or after DN iii.167
    agent noun of udikkhati
    Udicca
    adjective
    1. “rising”, used in a geographical sense of the name W. country, i.e. north-westerly, of north-western origin (cp. Psalms of the Brethren 79, Miln trsln. ii.45 note 1) Ja i.140 Ja i.324 343, 373 Mil 236
    • ‣ See also uddiya
    apparently an adjectivised absolutive of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sanskrit udañc, feminine udīcī northern the north
    Udiccare
    1. 3sd. plural pres.
    2. medium of udikkhati (q.v.)

    Udita1
    1. risen, high, elevated Mil 222 (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun 442 (˚odita)
    past participle of ud-i ‣See udeti
    Udita2
    1. spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka-pātha ed 1869, p. 22)
    past participle of vad ‣See vadati
    Udīraṇa
    neuter
    1. utterance, saying Ja v.237 Dhs 637 720 Mil 145
    from udīreti
    Udīrita
    1. uttered Ja iii.339 Ja v.394 = 407
    past participle of udīreti
    Udīreti
    1. -1. to set in motion, stir up, cause Ja iii.441 (dukkhaṁ udīraye Pot. udīreyya Commentary ); v.395 (kalahaṁ to begin a quarrel)
    • to utter, proclaim, speak, say SN i.190 Snp 632 (pot. ˚raye bhāseyya Snp-a 468) Dhp 408 (giraṁ udīraye = bhāseyya Dhp-a iv.182) Ja v.78 (vākyaṁ);
    • passive udīyati (uddiyyati = Sanskrit udīryate) Thag 1, 1232 (nigghoso)
    • ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita
    Udu
    adjective
    1. straight, upright, in ˚mano straight-minded DN iii.167, 168 (= uju˚ in variant reading and explanation by Commentary )
    = *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju
    Udukkhala
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle) Ja i.502 Ja ii.428 Ja v.49 Ja ii.161 Ja ii.335 Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa) Dhp-a ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comparison). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DN-a i.200 where the lower teeth play the role of ud. the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etymology ‣See Morris; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 37
      Sanskrit ulukhala
    Udukkhalikā
    feminine
    1. part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara-pasaka lintel of a door)
    from udukkhala
    Udumbara
    1. the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata DN ii.4 Vin iv.35 AN iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (identical), 324 (identical) Snp 5 Dhp-a i.284 Snp-a 19 Kp-a 46, 56 Vv-a 213 cp. odumbara
    Sanskrit udumbara
    Udeti
    1. (ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi) Ja ii.33 Ja iii.324 ppr. udayaṁ Iti 85 (ādicco), & udayanto Pv-a 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). past participle ; udita ‣See udita1. cp. udicca & udi.

    Udda1
    1. an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s.v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver- Vin i.186 (˚camma otter-skin, used for sandals); cp. i.102 (˚pota) Ja iii.51f. 335. The names of two otters at Ja iii.333 are Gambhīra-cārin and Anutīra-cārin
    Vedic udra, to uda2 water, literally living in water; cp. Old High German ottar = Anglo-Saxon otor = English otter Lithuanian ûdra = Old Bulgarian vydra otter
    Udda2
    1. water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i.e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid DN ii.14 MN iii.122
    for uda2?
    Uddaṇḍa
    1. a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda = Vism 25 (Burmese variant uṭṭanda)
    ud + daṇḍa
    Uddaya1
    1. gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 ‣See udaya Ja v.39 (satt˚-mahāpaduma of profit to beings?)
    a (metric?) variant of udaya
    Uddaya2
    1. in compounds dukkh˚; and sukh˚ ‣See udraya
    Uddalomī
    1. ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end DN i.7 (= ubhato dasaṁ uṇṇā-may’attharaṇaṁ; keci ubhato uggata-pupphaṁ ti vadanti DN-a i.87) AN i.181 ‣See however uddha-lomin under uddhaṁ
    = udda + lomin beaver-hair-y
    Uddasseti
    [
    1. to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct DN ii.321f. MN i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?) ii.60 (variant reading uddiset˚) AN iv.66
    ud + dasseti, causative of dassati1
    Uddāna
    neuter
    1. a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka with reference to each Khandhaka, in the Saṁyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Mil 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. Dhs-a 27). The Uddāna gives in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered “summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work
    • Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes “macchuddāna” (so Ja ii.425 Dhp-a ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case
    from ud + , dayati to bind ‣See under dāma
    Uddāpa
    1. foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚; etc. DN iii.101 SN v.194 = also at Ja vi.276 (= pākāra-vatthu Commentary ). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. refers it to Sanskrit ud-vapati to dig out, and translates “moat, ditch". The meaning “wall” or “mound” however harmonises quite well with the derived from “digging”, cp. English dike → German Teich ‣See also uddāma 2
    *udvāpa
    Uddāpavant
    adjective
    1. having a wall or embankment SN ii.106 (variant reading uddhā˚); Commentary explains as apato uggatattā Ja iv.536 (so read with variant reading for Text uddhā pavatta; C explains as tīra-mariyādā-bandhana)
    from uddāpa
    Uddāma
    1. adjective “out of bounds”, unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara)
    2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as “binding in” protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa from ud + vam “to throw up” in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla-uddāma-parikhâdīni watchtowers enceintes, moats etc. Dhp-a iii.488
    from ud + as in uddāna ‣See dāma
    Uddāraka
    1. some wild animal Ja v.416 (reading uncertain, explanation ditto)
    ?
    Uddāla
    1. = uddālaka, only as proper name Ja iv.298f.
    Uddālaka
    1. the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa literally “uprooter” Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati Vv-a 43) Ja iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (vātaghātaka Commentary ), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚) Vv-a 197 (˚puppha = indīvara) Pv-a 169
    from ud + dal ‣See dalati
    Uddālanaka
    adjective
    1. referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169
    from uddālana → ud + dāleti
    Uddāleti
    1. to tear out or off Vin iv.170 SN iv.178
    ud + dāleti, causative of dal ‣See dalati
    Uddiṭṭha
    1. -1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified MN i.480 (pañha); Snp p. 91 (identical = uddesa-matten’eva vutta, na vibhangena Snp-a 422) Snp-a 372
    • appointed, dedicated Ja v.393 (an ˚ṁ pupphaṁ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti) Pv-a 50 Kp-a 138
    • past participle of uddisati
    Uddiya
    adjective

    northern, northwestern (i.e. Nepalese) Ja iv.352 (˚kambala) in explanation of uddiyāna Sanskrit udīcīna?

    1. ‣See udicca & cp. Morris in; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49) 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet
    Sanskrit udīcya?
    Uddisati
    1. -to propose, point out, appoint, allot Dhp 353 cp. Dhp-a iv.72 Mil 94 (satihāraṁ) future uddisissati MN i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q.v.)
    2. to specify Pv-a 22 (
    3. aorist uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27
    4. passive uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati Pv-a 46
    5. past participle uddiṭṭha (q.v.)
    6. causative II. uddisāpeti (q.v.)
    7. absolutive uddissa (q.v.)
    ud + disati
    Uddisāpeti
    1. -1. to make recite Vin i.47 = ii.224; iv.290
    • to dedicate Pv-a 35 (variant reading ādisati
    • causative II. of uddisati
    Uddissa
    indeclinable
    1. -1. indicating, with signs or indications Ja iii.354 = Mil 230
    • prep with
    • accusative : (a) (literally) pointing to, tending towards, towards to Pv-a 250 Suraṭṭha-visayaṁ)
    • (b)
    • applied with reference to, on account of, for, concerning Pv-a 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaṁ), 70 (maṁ), 146
    1. ˚kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maṁsa); ii.163 DN i.166 = AN i.295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā) MN i.77 Kp-a 222 Ja ii.262 Ja ii.263 (bhatta)
    originally absolutive of uddisati
    Uddissana
    neuter
    1. dedication Pv-a 27 Pv-a 80
    from uddissa
    Uddīpanā
    feminine
    1. explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). Uddiyati, Uddiyana
    from ud + dīpeti
    Uddīyati, Uddīyana
    1. ete ‣See udrī˚;
    Uddeka
    1. vomit, spouting out, eruption Vism 261 (where identical passage at Kp-a 61 reads uggāra) ˚ṁ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277
    Sanskrit udreka, ud + ric
    Uddekanika
    adjective
    1. spouting, ejecting MN ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with variant reading as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water)
    uddeka + ana + ika
    Uddesa
    1. -1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme MN iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239 SN iv.299 Snp-a 422
    • explanation SN v.110f.; sa-uddesa
    • adjective with (the necessary) explanation point by point, in detail, DN i.13 DN i.81 DN iii.111 AN iii.418 Iti 99 Nd2 6171

  • samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) DN i.151 MN iii.128 AN iv.343 uddesa-bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ṁ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaṁ d) AN iv.114 (+ paripucchā) v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaṁ) Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā) Ja i.116 Mil 257 (+ paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47 AN iii.67 AN iii.180 Mil 10 Mil 18

    from uddisati
  • Uddesaka
    adjective
    1. assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food Vv-a 92
    from uddesa
    Uddesika
    adjective neuter
    1. -1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; neuter indication, definition DN ii.100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho) Mil 159 (identical); Kp-a 29. especially as—˚ in phrase aṭṭha-vass' uddesika-kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i.e. at the age of 8 Pv-a 67
    2. soḷasa-vass˚ MN i.88 Ja i.456 Vv-a 259 In the same application padesika (q.v.)
    3. memorial Ja iv.228 (cetiya)
    from uddesa
    Uddehaka
    adjective
    1. “bubbling up”, only adverb ˚ṁ in compound pheṇ˚; (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) MN iii.167 AN i.141 Ja iii.46 Mil 357
    2. from ud + dih ‣See deha
    Uddosita
    1. shed, stable (?) Vin i.140 Vin ii.278 Vin iii.200 Vin iv.223
    Derivation uncertain. cp. Müller Pali Grammar 42
    Uddha
    adjective
    1. in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes Ja iv.154 (of a devatā passage may be corrupt)
    possibly a combination of aḍḍha2 & uddhaṁ; or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?
    Uddhaṁ
    1. (& Uddha˚) indeclinable
      1. DN iii.237 SN v.69 SN v.201 SN v.205 SN v.237 SN v.285 SN v.314 SN v.378 AN i.233 AN ii.134 AN iv.14f. 73 sq., 146 380; v.120 Dhp 218 Thag ii.12 Pug 17 Nett 190 Dhp-a iii.289 literally up-stream at Ja iii.371
      nt. of adjective *uddha = Sanskrit ūrdhva high; to Indogermanic *ared (h) as in Latin arduus steep or *ured as in Sanskrit vardhate to raise, on top, above (
    2. adverb & preposition)

      • On uddhaṁ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application ‣See in detail Nd; 2 155
      • I. (
      • adverb ).-A. (of space) up aloft, on top, above (opposite adho) Vin iii.121 Kp-a 248 (= upari)
      • In contrast with adho (above → below DN i.23 DN i.153 DN i.251 Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaṁ explained) DN-a i.98 (‣ See also adho)
      • Especially with reference to the points of the com
      • passive as “in zenith” (opposite adho “in nadir”) e.g. at DN i.222 (“straight up”) Iti 120 Ja i.20 B. (of time) in
      • future, ahead, hence Snp 894 Nd1 303 (u vuccati anāgataṁ)
      • II. preposition with ablative & instrumental).; A. (of space in phrase uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) DN ii.293, 294; iii.104 AN iii.323 AN v.109
      • B. (of time after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months catunnaṁ māsānaṁ upari Pv-a 52) Pv-a 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past &
      • future ), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari Burmese variant )
      • In compounds uddha˚ & uddhaṁ˚ ‣See below. The reading udhogalaṁ at Pv-a 104 is to corrected to adho˚
      • III.; Note (cp Trenckner, Note. 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaṁ for uddhaṁ. Notice the following: ubbhaṁ yojanaṁ uggato Ja v.269 ubbhaṭṭhako hoti “standing erect” DN i.167 MN i.78 ubbhamukhu “mouth (face) upwards”, turned upwards SN iii.238 Mil 122 (1) uddha˚; in: -gāmin going upwards SN v.370 sq cchiddaka (-vātapānā) (windows) having openings above Dhp-a i.211
      • ˚pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) AN iv.133 or avansira Vv 5225 (variant reading ) Ja i.233
      • ˚mukha turned upwards, adverb ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Mil 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Mil 122)
      • ˚lomin “having hair on the upper side”, a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch Vin i.192 = ii.163, 169. So is probably to be read for uddalomī (q.v.) -virecana action of an emetic (literally throwing up) (opposite adho-virecana of a purgative) DN i.12 (= uddhaṁ dosānaṁ nīharaṇaṁ DN-a i.98) Dhp-a iii.126 Snp-a 86
      • ˚suddha clean on top Vin ii.152
      • uddhaṁ˚ in -āghātanika an after-deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death DN i.31 cp. DN-a i.119
      • ˚pāda feet up (& head down) Vv.52; 25 (variant reading uddha˚) -bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opposite oram˚) ‣See saṁyojana
      • ˚virecana Burmese variant at Snp-a 86 for uddha˚ -sara(ṁ) (
      • adverb ) with raised or lofty voice, literally “sounding high” Snp 901 ‣See Nd1 315
      • ˚sota
      • adjective one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46
    Uddhaṁsati
    1. to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatth’uddhaṁsati rajo; explained by uggacchati Vv-a 304
    • pp uddhasta (q.v.)
    ud + dhaṁsati, in literally meaning of dhvaṁs ‣See dhaṁsati
    Uddhagga
    adjective
    1. -1. standing on end (literally with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 = iii.144, 154
    • prominent, conspicuous Ja iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opposite adhagga point-downwards) Ja v.156 (= heṭṭhima-danta Commentary ). 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) AN ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (identical) ‣See also uddhaggika
    • uddha + agga
    Uddhaggika
    adjective [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) DN i.51 = iii.66 SN i.90 AN iii.259 DN-a i.158
    Uddhacca
    neuter
    1. over-balancing, agitation, excitement distraction, flurry ‣See on meaning; Dialogues of the Buddha i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Compendium 18, 45, 83. AN i.256 AN i.282 AN iii.375 AN iii.421 449; iv.87; v.142, 145, 148 DN iii.234 SN v.277f. Dhs-a 260 Snp-a 492 (in sense of “haughtiness"? for Snp 702 uṇṇata) Nd1 220 501; Ps i.81, 83; ii.9, 97 sq. 119, 142, 145, 169, 176 Pug 18 59 Dhs 427 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482 Vb 168 369, 372 377; Vism 137, 469 (= uddhata-bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca “flurry or worry” u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa’s and as the 9th of the 10 saṁyojana’s (q.v.), e.g. at DN i.71 DN i.246 DN iii.49 DN iii.234 DN iii.269 278 SN i.99 AN i.3 AN iii.16 AN v.30 Nd2 379 Dhs 1486
    substantivised absolutive of ud-dharati, ud + dhṛ; , cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit auddhatya shows a strange distortion. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca
    Uddhaja
    adjective
    1. upright, honest MN i.386 (variant reading for pannadhaja)
    uddhaṁ + ja
    Uddhaṭa
    1. -1. pulled out Ja ii.26
    • pulled out destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) Ja i.505 Ja ii.259 Ja vi.6

  • cut off or out Mil 231 (uddhaṭ-uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off).

    • drawn out, lifted out, raised Ja i.143 sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paṁsu) cp. uddhaṭa-bīja castrated Ja ii.237
    • past participle of uddharati2 ‣See also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca
  • Uddhata
    1. -1. lifted up, raised risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u aruṇo) Vin ii.236 Ud 27 (variant readings uggata & uddhasta).; 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken SN i.61 (+ unnaḷa “muddled in mind & puffed up” translation), 204 (identical v.112 (līnaṁ cittaṁ uddhataṁ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269 AN ii.23 AN iii.391 AN v.93f. 142, 163 Iti 72 Thag 2, 77 (so read with variant reading, Text has uddhaṭa Thag-a 80 explns. as nān’ārammaṇe vikkhitta-citta asamāhita) Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta-citto) Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug AN 217)
    2. ˚an˚; well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued MN i.470 AN ii.211 AN v.93f. 104 Snp 850 (= uddhaccavirahita Snp-a 549) Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitto Dhp-a iv.93) Ja v.203 Vv 648
    • ‣ See also ubbhata
    past participle of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa ‣See remarks under uddhacca
    Uddhana
    neuter
    1. an oven Ja i.33 Ja i.68 Ja i.71 Ja i.346 Ja ii.133 Ja ii.277 iii.178, 425 v.385, 471; ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Snp p. 105 Mil 118 Mil 259 Vism 171, 254 Dhp-a i.52 224; ii.3; iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176
    *ud-dhvana, from ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sanskrit) ‣See dhamati
    Uddhamma
    1. false doctrine Dīpavaṁsa v.19
    ud + dhamma
    Uddharaṇa
    neuter
    1. -1. taking up, lifting, raising Mil 307 (sass˚-samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati.1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati.2). DN-a i.192
    • pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati.2) Vin iii.29 ‣See also ubbahati2
    • abstract from uddharati
    Uddharati
    1. -1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with; bṛh ‣See abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc. ‣See pp uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa
    • (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away DN i.135 (baliṁ uddhareyya raise a tax) MN i.306 (hiyaṁ) Ja i.193 (
    • aorist poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi Commentary ) Vv-a 157
    • Caus uddharāpeti Vin ii.180 181 Ja vi.95
    • to pull out draw out (synonym with abbahati, q.v. for comparison) DN i.77 (ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato Pv-a 115 (= abbahati);
    • imperative uddharatha Ja ii.95 (for abbaha) Dhp 327 (attānaṁ duggā);
    • aorist uddhari Ja iii.190 (ankena);
    • conditional uddhare Thag 1, 756
    • absolutive uddharitvā DN i.234 Nd1 419 Snp-a 567 Dhp-a iv.26 Pv-a 139 & (poet.) uddhatvā Ja iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for Text laddhatvañ cakkhūni akkhīni uddharitvā Commentary ).
    • past participle uddhaṭa & ubbhata;
    • ud + dharate of dhṛ
    Uddharin
    1. īn an˚ Snp 952 ‣See under niṭṭhurin
    Uddhasetā
    1. ‣See uddhasta
    Uddhasta
    1. attacked, perhaps “spoilt” (smothered!) in combination with pariyonaddha (covered) at AN i.202 (Text uddhaseta explained by upari dhaṁsita Commentary ); ii.211 (variant readings uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaṁso)
    • Registered with; an˚; as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q.v.) cp. also viddhasta
    past participle of uddhaṁseti ‣See dhaṁsati & cp. anuddhaṁ seti
    Uddhāra
    (& ubbhāra in Vin.; e.g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra)
    1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚; (q.v. Vin i.255f.; iii.262; iv.287; v.177 sq
    2. a tax levy, debt, in phrase ˚ṁ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc cit.) to clear up a debt Ja ii.341 Ja iii.106 Ja iv.45 Ja iv.247
    3. uddhāra-sodhana (variant reading sādh˚) the clearance of a debt Ja ii.341
    4. synopsis or abstract Dīpavaṁsa v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.) Snp-a 237 (atth˚ + pad˚).

      from uddharati1
    Uddhālaka
    1. at Ja vi.530 is to be read uddālaka
    Uddhita
    1. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed Ja vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa-bīja Commentary )
    a by-form of uddhaṭa
    Uddhunāti
    1. to shake Vv-a 279
    ud + dhunāti
    Uddhumāta
    adjective
    1. swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) AN i.140 Snp 200 (of a corpse) Snp-a 100f. 171 DN-a i.114 cp. next
    past participle of uddhumāyati
    Uddhumātaka
    adjective
    1. swollen, bloated, puffed up MN i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (identical) Ja i.164 (udaraṁ ˚ṁ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up) Mil 332 Dhp-a i.307 ‣See also subha & asubha
    1. ˚saññā the idea of a bloated corpse AN ii.17 Dhs 263 Mil 331 cp. Dhs trsln. 69
    preceding + ka
    Uddhumātatta
    neuter
    1. swollen condition Vism 178
    abstract from uddhumāta
    Uddhumāyati
    1. to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aorist ˚āyi Ja iii.26 Vv-a 76
    2. absolutive ˚ājitvā Ja ii.18 Dhp-a i.126

      • pp uddhumāta & ˚āyita; (q.v.)
      ud + dhmā ‣See dhamati & remarks on uddhacca
    Uddhumāyana
    neuter
    1. puffing, blowing or swelling up Ja iv.37
    from uddhumāyati
    Uddhumāyika
    adjective
    1. like blowing or swelling up, of blown-up appearance MN i.142f.
    cp. uddhumāyita
    Uddhumāyita
    1. swollen, bloated, puffed up Vv-a 218
    past participle of uddhumāyati
    Udrabhati
    1. to eat MN i.306 (upacikā bījaṁ na udrabheyyuṁ; variant readings on p. 555: udrah˚ udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuṁ Commentary (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.))
    • Note. The Dhātupāṭha 212, and the Dhātu-mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating
    ? doubtful in form & etymology
    Udraya
    1. (& Uddaya) (—˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit usually renders Pali dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya; 1 coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in following two phrases: dukkh˚; (yielding pain) & sukh˚; (giving pleasure) e.g. as dukkh˚; at MN i.415 Ja iv.398 Ja v.119 (variant reading ˚indriya) Pv i.1110 (so read for Text ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as variant reading for udāyati); Ps ii.79 (kammaṁ); as sukh˚; at Ja v.389 (variant reading ˚indriya) Dhp-a ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh & sukh˚ at Ps; i.80. Besides these in following combns.: kaṭuk causing bitterness Ja v.241 sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences SN ii.29 MN i.271
    Udrīyati
    (& Uddīyati)
    1. to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii.174 (id); iv.254 (i) DN i.96 (˚īyissati bhijjhissati DN-a i.96 so read for udāyati) SN i.113 SN i.119 Udriyana & Uddiyana;
    cp. Sanskrit ud dīryate, passive of ud + dṛ; , dṛṇōti, and Pali darati & dalati ‣See also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati
    Udrīyana
    Uddīyana;
    neuter
    1. breaking or splitting open, bursting Ja i.72 Dhp-a ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī-uddīyana-sadda; variant readings uddri˚, udri˚)
    from udrīyati
    Undura
    1. a rat Vin i.209 Vin ii.148 152; iii.151 Ja i.120 Mil 23 Mil 363 Spelt undūra at Vism 62
    etymology ?
    Unna
    1. in phrase pīti-vegen; ’unna “bubbling up with the excitement of joy” overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (explained by uggatacitta i.e. lofty, exalted Commentary )
    • It may however be better more in keeping with Pāli word-formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud na, taking ˚na as absolute (base)-form of; nam, thus literally “bent up”, i.e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata
    past participle of ud, unatti & undati ‣See udaka
    Unnaka
    1. a species of perfume Ja vi.537 (gloss kuṭantaja)
    etymology?
    Unnaṅgala
    adjective
    1. in phrase ˚ṁ karoti, according to Morris JP T S 1887, 120 “to make an up-ploughing, to turn up etc.”, but more aptly with Commentary on Ja vi.328 to make “out-plough” (not “up-plough”) in sense of out-of-work i.e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday AN typical “Jātaka"-phrase Ja i.228 Ja ii.296 Ja ii.367 Ja iii.129 Ja iii.414 iv.355; vi.328 Dhp-a iii.10
    ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case ‣See ud
    Unnata
    1. raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opposite oṇata) Pv iv.66 (= sāmin Pv-a 262) Ja i.71 ii369; vi.487 Mil 146 Mil 387 DN-a i.45 ‣See also unnaḷa
    past participle of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in figuratively special meaning, q.v.
    Unnati
    (f)
    1. rising, lifting up, elevation Mil 387 (˚avanati)
    from unnamati; cp. uṇṇati
    Unnadati
    1. to resound, shout out, roar Ja i.110 Ja ii.90 Ja iii.271 Ja iii.325 Mil 18 aorist unnadi Ja i.74 Mil 13
    2. causative unnādeti (q.v.)
    3. ud + nadati
    Unnama
    1. rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh vii.7 = Pv i.57 (thala unnata-padesa Pv-a 29) Mil 349 DN-a i.154
    fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in figuratively meaning
    Unnamati
    1. to rise up, ascend Mil 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306
    • Caus unnāmeti (q.v.)
    • past participle unnara & uṇṇata; (q.v.) Unnala & Unnala;
    ud + namati ‣See uṇṇamati in figuratively meaning
    Unnala
    Unnaḷa;
    adjective
    1. showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala MN i.32 SN i.61 = 204 (trsld. as “muddled in mind, puffed up, vain”, explained as uggata-nala uddhaṭa-tuccha-māna Kindred Sayings 318) AN i.70 AN i.266 ii.26; iii.199, 355, 391 Iti 113 (+ asamāhita) Dhp 292 (+ pamatta; explained as “māna-naḷaṁ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala” Dhp-a iii.452) Thag 1, 634 Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha-mānaṁ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217)
    Buddhaghosa has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n → l change frequently cp. Pali nangala → lāngala; nalāṭa → lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning “sporting, sporty, wild” etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. a dialectical form of unnata Pali uṇṇata, although the Pali Commentators never thought of that. cp. with this the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala Mvu i.305 and the Marathic Prakrit mula = Sanskrit mṛta, Pischel, Grammar § 244 To these may be added Pali celakedu → cetakedu Ja vi.538
    Unnahanā
    feminine
    1. flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27
    ud + nah ‣See nayhati
    Unnāda
    1. shout, shouting Ja ii.405
    from ud + nad
    Unnādin
    adjective
    1. shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336 DN i.95 DN i.143 DN i.178 Ja ii.216
    from ud + nad
    Unnādeti
    1. to make resound Ja i.408 (paṭhaviṁ), ii.34
    causative of unnadati
    Unnāmin
    adjective
    1. raising or rising; in combination with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low AN iv.237 (of cultivated land)
    ud + nam in causative form
    Unnāmeti
    (unn˚)
    1. to raise Dhs-a 5 written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids at Snp 206 (infinitive uṁṇametave)
    causative of unnamati
    Upa
    1. -[Vedic upa; Avestan upa on, up; Latin sub from *(e)ks-upo; Gothic uf under & on; Old High German ūf = Anglo-Saxon up = English up; Old Irish fo under ‣See also upari prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā) usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by
    • In compound a upa is always contracted to upa, e.g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita-Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up—˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup-ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac-cumulated ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc.
    • (Aim): (out up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as “higher, above” in upara, upari, upama Latin superus, supremus English g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad-ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap-proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad-vise; ˚dhāvati run up to ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc
    • (3 (Nearness): close by, close to, near, “ad-”; e.g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap-plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at-tending ṭṭhita ap-proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by.
    • (intensive use) quite, altogether, “up”; e.g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up.
    • (Diminutive use as in Latin subabsurdus, Old Irish fo-dord; Welsh. go-durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary by-, miniature, made after the style of, e.g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚
    Upaka
    (—˚)
    1. found only in combinationkulūpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with reference to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192 208; iii.84 SN ii.200f. AN iii.258f. Nd2 3851; Pv iii.85 Pv-a 266 feminine kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268 Vin iv.66

      • Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at Ja iv.219
      for ˚upaga
    Upakaccha
    (˚-)
    1. only in combination with ˚antare literally “in between the hips or loins or arm-pits” in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.140 s.v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs Ja i.63 Ja i.425
    • khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits Ja v.211 & ṭhapetvā identical Ja v.46
    upa + kacchā2
    Upakacchaka
    1. = upa + kaccha1 + ka

      like an enclosure adjective in the form of a hollow or a shelter Ja i.158 (2) = upa + kacchā2 + ka

      1. like the armpit, a hollow usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39 Vin iv.260 (pudendum muliebre) Mil 293 Ja v.437 (= kaccha2)
      upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sanskrit upakakṣa in different meaning
    Upakaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. approaehing, near Ja iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in following two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i.e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175 Vv-a 6 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253 Pv-a 42 Vv-a 44 cp. vūpakaṭṭha locative upakaṭṭhe as
    2. adverb or preposition “near, in the neighbourhood of” Nd2 639 (= santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe)
    3. past participle of upa + karś to draw up or near to
    Upakaḍḍhati
    1. to drag or pull on to (w. dative), or down to DN i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (identical) MN i.365 SN i.49 SN ii.99 Dhp 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti Dhp-a iii.484)
    upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha
    Upakaṇṭha
    1. at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha
    Upakaṇḍakin
    1. (Pv ii.113) ‣See under uppaṇḍukin
    Upakaṇṇa
    (˚-)
    1. literally (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in derivation ˚ka (q.v.) Thag 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear)
    upa + kaṇṇa
    Upakannaka
    adjective [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in
    • locative as
    • adverb upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237 Vin ii.99 Vin iv.20 271 SN i.86 AN iii.57 Snp-a 186 and in compound ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports AN iii.136 cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.

    Upakappati
    1. intransitive) to be beneficial to (w. dative), to serve, to accrue SN i.85 Pv i.44 (= nippajjati Pv-a 19); i.57 (petānaṁ); i.104 (= viniyujjati Pv-a 49) Ja v.350 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 29 (petānaṁ), 27 (identical), 241; Sdhp 501 Sdhp 504
    upa + kappati
    Upakappana
    neuter
    1. profit Pv-a 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚)
    from upakappati
    Upakappanaka
    adjective
    1. profitable Ja i.398 Dhp-a ii.133
    from upakappana
    Upakaraṇa
    neuter
    1. help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood DN ii.340 AN ii.86 Ja i.7 Pv-a 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adjective suitable, fit) Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship Ja iv.165
    • tunnavaya˚ a weaver’s outfit Ja ii.364
    • dabb˚ fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚; materials for a gift Pv-a 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚; bathing requisites Vv-a 248 vitt˚ luxuries. AN v.264f. 283, 290 sq. Pv-a 71
    from upa + kṛ
    Upakaroti
    1. to do a service, serve, help, support Thag 2, 89 (aorist upakāsiṁ = anugaṇhiṁ santappesiṁ Thag-a 88).
    2. past participle upakkhaṭa (q.v.)
    3. upa + karoti
    Upakāra
    1. service, help, benefit, obligation, favour DN iii.187f. Vv-a 68 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283 Sdhp 447 Sdhp 530. bahūpakāra adjective of great help, very serviceable or helpful SN iv.295 Pv-a 114 upakāraṁ karoti to do a favour, to oblige Pv-a 42 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered Pv-a 116

      1. ˚āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good Pv-a 86
      from upa + kṛ; , cp. upakaraṇa
    Upakāraka
    adjective
    1. serviceable, helping, effective Ja v.99 Vism 534. feminine upakārikā 1. benefactress helper Ja iii.437
    2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall DN i.105 ‣See DN-a i.274 & cp. parikkhāra MN i.86 (= Nd2 1996)
    3. (philosophy) cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11

      from upakāra
    Upakārin
    adjective-noun
    1. a benefactor Ja iii.11 DN-a i.187 Sdhp 540 546
    from upakāra; cp. A Sanskrit upakārin Jtm. 3142
    Upakiṇṇa
    1. strewn over with (—˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; explained by okiṇṇa Vv-a 160)
    past participle of upakirati
    Upakiriyā
    feminine
    1. implement, ornament Ja v.408
    from upa + kr
    Upakūjati
    1. to sing to (of birds) Ja iv.296 (kūjantaṁ u. = replies with song to the singing)
    • pp upakūjita (q.v.)
    upa + kūjati
    Upakūjita
    (—˚)
    1. resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) Ja iv.359 Pv-a 154
    past participle of upakūjati
    Upakūla
    1. embankment, a river’s bank, riverside Ja vi.26 (rukkh’ûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank)
    upa + kūla
    Upakūlita
    1. used of the nose in old age Thag 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the Commentary Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs Rhys Davids in "Sisters” takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller JR AN S. 1919. 538 This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita
    derivation uncertain
    Upakūḷita
    1. singed, boiled, roasted Ja i.405 (“half-roasted” = aḍḍhajjhāmaka Commentary ) ‣See also upakūsita
    past participle of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati
    Upakūsita
    1. at Ja ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by Commentary explanation “kukkule jhāmo” and also by variant reading ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (Burmese variant ) by ˚kupita (meaning “shaken, disturbed by fire”)
    Upakka
    1. ‣See uppakka
    Upakkanta
    1. attacked by (—˚) Mil 112
    2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (
    3. locative DN-a i.140
    past participle of upakkamati
    Upakkama
    1. literally (a) going to, nearing, approach (—˚) Vv-a 72
    2. (b) attack Vin ii.195 Mil 157 DN-a i.69 71.
    3. applied (a) in general: doing acting, undertaking, act SN i.152 = Snp p. 126
    4. (b) in special: ways, means, i.e. either good of helpful means expedient, remedy Snp 575 Mil 151 Mil 152 or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Thag 1, 143 Ja iv.115 (punishment) Mil 135 Mil 176
    5. from upa + kram
    Upakkamati

    to go on to, i e. (1) to attack MN i.86 = Ud 71

  • to undertake Vin iii.110 111.
  • to begin Vin iv.316 DN-a i.318

    upa + kamati of kram
  • Upakkamana
    neuter
    1. going near to, attacking Ja iv.12
    from upa + kram
    Upakkitaka
    1. a buyer, hawker, dealer combined with bhataka Dhp-a i.119 = Ud 23 (Commentary explains by “yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati”) Ps ii.196 (? Text upakkhittaka)
    from upa + krī to buy
    Upakkiliṭṭha
    1. soiled, stained, depraved, impure SN i.179 AN i.207 (citta) Vism 13
    past participle of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next
    Upakkilesa
    1. anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134 & ‣See abbha) MN i.36 MN i.91 DN iii.42f. 49 sq., 201 SN v.92f. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115 AN i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima-suriyānaṁ samaṇa-brāhmaṇānaṁ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Ps i.164 (eighteen) Pug 60 Dhs 1059 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216 Sdhp 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633
    from upa + kliś
    Upakkuṭṭha
    1. blamed, reproached, censured, faulty DN i.113 (an˚); Snp p. 115 (identical) Ja iii.523 DN-a i.211
    past participle of upakkosati
    Upakkosa
    1. censure, reproach Ja vi.489
    from upa + kruś
    Upakkosati
    1. to scold, reprove, blame DN i.161 Ja iii.436 Ja iii.523 Ja iv.81 Ja iv.317 Ja iv.409 Upakkhata & ta;
    upa + kosati
    Upakkhaṭa
    ˚ta;
    1. done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered DN i.127 (= sajjita DN-a i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita Pv-a 107) Ja vi.139 Mil 156
    past participle of upakaroti
    Upakkhalati
    1. to stumble, trip DN ii.250 MN ii.209 AN iii.101 Ja iii.433
    upa + khalati
    Upakkhalana
    neuter
    1. stumbling, tripping Vism 500
    from preceding
    Upakkhittaka
    1. at Ps ii.196 ‣See upakk˚
    Upakhandha
    1. literally upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder Ja iv.210 (= khandha Commentary )
    upa + khandha
    Upaga
    1. (always as ˚ûpaga) adjective

      1. -1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, SN ii.24 ākās’ānañc’āyatan˚ etc. Ps i.84; kāy˚ SN ii.24 brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319 yathākamm˚ DN i.82
      • coming into, experiencing, having as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283 phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower Pv-a 275 Pv-a 3. attached to, belonging to, being at Ja i.51 (hatth˚) Vv-a 12 (identical + pādûpaga)

    2. in phrase gayh˚; literally “accessible to the grip”, acquisition of property, theft Ja iv.219 (Text gayhûpaka) Mil 325 Dhp-a ii.29 Pv-a 4

      upa + ga
    Upagacchati
    1. -1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) DN ii.12 Pv-a 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaṁ), 29, 32 (vāsaṁ) 132; absolutive ˚gantvā Pv-a 70 (attano santikaṁ), & ˚gamma SN ii.17 SN ii.20
    2. to undergo go (in) to, to begin, undertake Snp 152 (diṭṭhiṁ anupagamma) Ja i.106 (vassaṁ) Pv-a 42 (identical) Ja i.200 niddaṁ upagacchati to drop off into sleep Pv-a 43 (
    3. aorist upagacchi manuscripts ˚gañchi), 105, 128.
    4. past participle upagata (q.v.)
    upa + gacchati
    Upagaṇhanā
    feminine
    1. taking up, keeping up. meditating Mil 37
    abstract of upa + gṛh
    Upagaṇhāti
    1. to take up (for meditation) Mil 38
    upa + gaṇhāti
    Upagata
    1. -1. gone to, come, approached intranstitive Snp 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna Snp-a 495) Pv-a 77 (santikaṁ), 78, 79 (petalokaṁ), 123
    2. undergoing coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same connection at. AN v.187) Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚) Pv-a 60 (= abhibhūta)
    past participle of upagacchati
    Upagamana
    neuter
    1. approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚) Nett 27; Vism 600 Pv-a 42 (vass˚)
    from upa + gam
    Upagamanaka
    adjective
    1. going to, one who goes to (with accusative ) Pv-a 168 (= ˚upaga)
    2. from upagamana
    Upagaḷita
    1. flowing out, spat or slobbered out Ja v.471 (˚khelo; variant reading paggharita)
    past participle of upagaḷati
    Upagāmin
    adjective
    1. going to, undergoing, experiencing AN ii.6 (jāti jar˚)
    from upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga
    Upagūhati
    1. to embrace Ja i.346 Ja i.349 Ja ii.424 iii.437; v.157, 328, 384. absolutive upaguyha Ja vi.300
    2. upa + gūhati
    Upagghāta
    1. scented, smelled, kissed Ja vi.543 (Commentary sīsamhi upasinghita)
    past participle of next
    Upagghāyati
    1. to smell at, in sense of “to kiss” Ja v.328 (also infinitive upagghātuṁ)
    upa + ghrā ‣See ghāyati1
    Upaghaṭṭita
    1. knocked or knocking against Ja i.26 (v.179)
    past participle of upaghaṭṭeti
    Upaghāta
    1. hurting, injuring, injury MN iii.237 SN ii.218 SN iv.323f. AN iii.173 Thag 1 583 Mil 274 Mil 307 Mil 347 DN-a i.273
    • an˚ not hurting others, kindness Dhp 185
    from upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta
    Upaghātana
    neuter
    1. hurting Dhp-a iii.237 (an˚)
    from upaghāta
    Upaghātika
    adjective
    1. injuring, offending Vin ii.13
    from upaghāta
    Upaghātin
    adjective
    1. hurting, injuring Ja iii.523
    from upaghāta
    Upacaya
    1. heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As technical term with reference to kamma “conservation”, with reference to body & form “integration” ‣See discussion & defin. at; Compendium 253; Dhs translation 195. DN i.76 (= odana = kummās’ûpacayo ‣See under kāya) Dhs 582 642 (rū passive u. = āyatanānaṁ ācayo), 864 Vb 147 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449 DN-a i.220 Pv-a 198 (but variant reading paccayassa preferable)
    2. from upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya
    Upacarati
    1. to deal with, handle, use Ja vi.180 past participle upaciṇṇa & upacarita; (q.v.)
    2. upa + carati
    Upacarita
    1. practised, served, enacted, performed Mil 359 Mil 360
    past participle of upacarati
    Upacāra
    1. -1. approach, access Vin ii.120 152; iv.304 Ja i.83 Ja i.172 Dhs-a 328 (phal˚)
    • habit practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚) Snp-a 140 (identical) Ja iii.280

  • way, means application, use of (especially of spells etc.) Ja iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180 Mil 153 Mil 154 (dur˚ an evil spell) Vv-a 127 (grammatical technical term kāraṇ˚).

    • entrance, access, i.e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of (—˚) Ja iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚ Vin i.109 iii.46; iv.230; Kp-a 77 Snp-a 83 179

  • attention attendance Vin iv.272 Ja vi.180 Mil 154

    • civility polite behaviour Ja ii.56 Ja vi.102

  • On upacāra as philos, technical term and its relation to appanā ‣See Dhs trsln. 53 54; Compendium 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood-, or access-concentration, distinguishing it from appanā-samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim

    from upa + car
  • Upacikā
    feminine
    1. the termite or white ant Vin ii.113 148, 152; iii.151 MN i.306 Ja iii.320 Ja iv.331 Mil 363 Mil 392 Vism 62, Dhp-a ii.25 Dhp-a iii.15
    connected with Sanskrit upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Note. 62 (*utpādikā → upatikā → upacikā) & Kern,; Toevoegselen p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this from upajihikā for ˚dihikā, variant readings upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct derived from upa + ; ci, thus meaning “making heaps, a builder”
    Upaciṇṇa
    1. used, frequented, known (as value) Ja vi.180
    past participle of upacarati
    Upacita
    1. -1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Snp 697 Kp-a 132 Snp-a 492 Vv-a 7 271, 342 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 150
    • built up, conserved (of the body Mil 232 DN-a i.220
    • past participle of upacināti
    Upacitatta
    neuter
    1. storing up, accumulation Dhs 431
    abstract from upacita
    Upacināti
    1. -1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaṁ or pāpaṁ) Vv-a 254 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 241
    • to concentrate pay attention Thag 1, 199 Commentary upacetuṁ for ocetuṁ Text Ja v.339 (= oloketi)
    • passive upaciyyati Thag 1 807.
    • past participle upacita (q.v.)
    • upa + ci
    Upacca = uppacca
    1. (q.v.) “flying up” (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) at Thag 2, 248 (= Thag-a 205 where variant reading and gloss upecca & upacca, explained by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= Pv-a 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca)
    Upaccagā
    3rd singular preterite of upâtigacchati (q.v.) to escape, passive go by; to overcome Snp 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami Snp-a 339) = Thag 2, 5 (= mā atikkami Thag-a 12) Snp 636 Snp 641 Snp 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167) Dhp 315 Dhp 412 Dhp 417 (= atikkanta Dhp-a iv.225); Bu ii.43
    • plural upaccaguṁ SN i.35 AN iii.311
    upa + ati + agā of gam
    Upaccati
    1. (?) in phrase “akkhīni upacciṁsu” at Ja vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiṁsu aorist of apaciyyati, passive of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati → upacināti) “the eyes failed” lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiṁsu from upacchindati “were destroyed”, which however is not quite the sense wanted.

    Upacchindati
    1. to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Snp 972 (pot. ˚chinde) Ja iv.127 Nd1 502 Thag-a 267 Pv-a 31 (kulavaṁso upacchijji aorist pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaṁ)
    2. upa + chindati
    Upacchinna
    1. cut off, interrupted Ja i.477 Mil 306
    past participle of upacchindati
    Upacchubhati
    1. to throw at MN i.364 (variant readings ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚)
    upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh ‣See chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti
    Upaccheda
    1. breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption MN i.245 MN i.327 (pāṇ murder) Ja i.67 Mil 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition Pv-a 82 (kulavaṁs˚) Dhp-a i.152 (āhār ˚ṁ karoti to prevent from taking food) DN-a i.136 159
    from upa + chid
    Upacchedaka
    adjective-noun
    1. destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting Ja i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357 DN-a i.69 (jīvit’indriy˚) Vv-a 72 (identical)
    from upaccheda
    Upajānāti
    1. to learn, acquire or have knowledge of (w. genitive or instrumental), to know Vin i.272 (saṁyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvās’atthena) AN i.50 (dvinnaṁ dhammānaṁ upaññāsin) future upaññissati (& upaññassati; Snp 716) Snp 701 Snp 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati Snp-a 498) Ja v.215
    2. past participle upaññāta (q.v.)
    3. upa + jānāti
    Upajīvati
    1. to live on (w. accusative ), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (
    2. accusative ) DN i.228 SN i.217 Snp 612f. Thag 1, 943 Ja iii.309 Ja iii.338 iv.271 (= anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraṁ u. ti taṁ nissāya jīvanti Pv-a 134) Mil 231
    3. upa + jīvati
    Upajīvika
    adjective
    1. Sdhp 501 ‣See next
    = upajīvin
    Upajīvin
    1. (—˚) adjective-noun

      1. living on, subsisting by AN ii.135 (phal˚) Snp 217 (para-datt˚), Ja i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380 Pug 51 Mil 160 (Satth˚) Vv-a 141 (sipp˚). feminine upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i.e. a courtesan) Mil 122 Pv-a 46 cp. kiliṭṭha-kamm˚ gaṇikā Pv-a 195
      2. from upa + jīv
    Upajūta
    neuter
    1. stake at game Ja vi.192
    upa + jūta
    Upajjha
    1. ‣See next
    Upajjhāya
    1. a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combined with ācariya e.g. Vin i.119 Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45 53, 62, 120; iv.130 SN i.185 AN ii.66 AN ii.78 AN iii.69 Snp-a 346 Dhp-a ii.93 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 230
    • A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e.g. at Vin i.94 Vin iii.35 with
    • feminine upajjhā Vin iv.326
    Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. “one who is gone close up to”
    Upaññāta
    1. found out, learnt, known Vin i.40 Ja v.325 Ja v.368 AN i.61
    past participle of upajānāti
    Upaṭṭita
    1. pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed Ja vi.82 (visavegena). Upatthapeti & tthapeti;
    upa + aṭṭita, from ard ‣See aṭṭita
    Upaṭṭhapeti
    ˚ṭṭhāpeti;
    1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210 DN ii.19 MN i.429 Ja i.266 Ja iv.2 Ja v.218 Pug 59 68 Mil 15 Mil 257 Mil 366 (pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ), 397 DN-a i.270 Sdhp 356
    2. to cause to be present Vin i.45 SN i.170 Pv iv.170
    3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed. AN v.72 (gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātuṁ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṁ vā).

      • to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267 5. to ordain Vin i.62 83. Upatthahati & tthati;
    causative II. of upaṭṭhahati
    Upaṭṭhahati
    ˚ṭṭhāti;
    1. 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with accusative ), to wait on attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50 302; iv.326 MN iii.25 SN i.167 AN iii.94 AN v.72 Snp 82 = 481 (
    2. imperative ˚ṭṭhahassu) Ja i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396 Dīpavaṁsa ii.16 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 20.
    3. aorist upaṭṭhahi Pv-a 14 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 82
    4. infinitive upaṭṭhātuṁ. AN v.72 Pv-a 20
    5. absolutive upaṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 76
    6. gerundive upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302 Pv-a 20
    7. past participle upaṭṭhita (q.v.)
    8. intranstitive to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present MN i.104f. AN iv.32 Ja iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207 Mil 64 Thag-a 258
    9. aorist upaṭṭhāsi Ja i.61 Ja iv.3 Pv-a 42
    10. causative I. upaṭṭheti;
    11. causative II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti; (q.v.)
    12. passive upaṭṭhīyati Ja iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati AN iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna)
    upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati
    Upaṭṭhāka
    1. a servitor, personal attendant, servant, “famulus” Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha ‣See D i.206 Thag 1, 1041 feminine ; Thag-a in Psalms of the Brethren
    2. locative cit. Vin i.179 (Sāgato u., 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47 DN i.150 (Nāgita) SN iii.113 AN i.121 AN iii.31 AN iii.189 Ja i.15 Ja i.100 (a merchant’s) ii.416 Pug 28 Dhp-a ii.93 Vv-a 149 Pv-a 211

      • agg˚ main follower, chief attendant DN ii.6
      • gilān˚ an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303 AN i.26
      • saṅgh˚ one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216 AN i.26 iii.39
      • dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka; a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302
      1. ˚kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (genitive Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286 Vv-a 120
      from upa + sthā, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasthāka Mvu i.251 and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Avs i.214; ii.85 112.
    Upaṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. -1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering AN i.151 AN i.225 Snp 138 Ja i.226 Ja i.237 Ja i.291 Ja ii.101 iv.138; vi.351 Ps i.107; ii.7 sq., 28, 230 Pv-a 104 Pv-a 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176 Vv-a 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560
    • worship (divine) service DN iii.188f. (˚ṁ gacchati) Pv-a 122
    • Buddh˚ attendance on a Buddha Pv-a 93 Thag-a 18 3. a state room Ja iii.257
    1. ˚sambhāra means of catering, provisions Pv-a 20
    • ˚sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasthāna-śālā Divy 207
      1. Vin i.49 139; ii.153, 208; iii.70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42 DN ii.119 (at Vesālī) SN ii.280 SN v.321 AN ii.51 AN ii.197 AN iii.298 Dhp-a i.37 38; iii.413
      from upa + sthā
    Upaṭṭhāpana
    neuter
    1. attendance, service Vin iv.291
    from upa + sthā
    Upaṭṭhita
    -1. furnished provided, served got ready, honoured with Snp 295 (˚asmiṁ yaññasmiṁ) Ja v.173 (annena pānena) Pv i.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta Pv-a 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 116) Pv-a 132 Pv-a 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Snp 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come) 898 Dhp 235 Mil 274 Pv-a 124 (dānakāle ˚e). 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness MN i.77 AN ii.206 Snp 708 (= ṭhito Commentary ); Pv ii.953 (ready for service serving, waiting upon cp. Pv-a 135
    1. ˚sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed concentrated Vin i.63 DN iii.252 DN iii.282 SN iv.186 AN iii.251 Pug 25
    past participle of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasthita Divy 281 Divy 342
    Upaṭṭheti
    1. to make serve or attend; sakkaccaṁ u. (with accusative ) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275
    2. future ˚essati Vin iv.291 to place, fix (parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244
    3. causative of upaṭṭhahati
    Upaḍayhati
    1. to be burnt up Mil 277
    upa + ḍayhati
    Upaḍḍha
    adjective neuter
    1. half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana) Ja iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma) Dhp-a i.15 205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; Kp-a 239 (˚gāthā) Snp-a 298 Vv-a 38 61, 120 Pv-a 209 Pv-a 276
    upa + aḍḍha, used absolute whereas aḍḍha only in compound, cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upārdha Divy 86 Divy 144 514; Av SN i.211 SN i.240
    Upatappati
    1. to be vexed or tormented Ja v.90 Dhs-a 42
    upa + tappati1)
    Upatāpa
    1. vexation, trouble Vism 166
    from upa + tap
    Upatāpana
    neuter
    1. vexation, tormenting, torture Ja iv.13 Thag-a 243
    upa + tāpana
    Upatāpika
    adjective
    1. causing pain, molesting Ja ii.224
    from upatāpa
    Upatāpeti
    1. to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass Ja ii.178 Ja ii.224 Ja iv.11 Dhs-a 42 (vibādhati +)
    upa + tāpeti
    Upatiṭṭhati
    1. literally “to stand by”, to look after, to worship Pv iii.118 Ja ii.73 (ādiccaṁ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati Commentary ) Mil 231 (ger ˚tiṭṭhitvā) Ja v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). past participle upaṭṭhita (q.v.)
    2. upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.
    Upatta
    1. smeared, spread over MN i.343 Ja i.399
    upa + akta, past participle of añj
    Upatthaddha
    1. - 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni)
    • supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Thag 1, 1058 1194 2, 72 (yobbanena) Ja i.47 (v.267: mettābalena); v.121 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ “when it is the medium of an idea”); Nett 117 Mil 110 (kāruñña-bal˚)
    • upa + thaddha, past participle of upatthambhati
    Upatthambha
    1. -1. a support, prop, stay Mil 355 Mil 415 Mil 417 Sdhp 565
    • relief, ease Vin iii.112

  • encouragement Ja v.270 Dhp-a i.279

    from upa + stambh
  • Upatthambhaka
    adjective neuter [from upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining Dhs-a 153
    Upatthambhana
    neuter = upatthambha Mil 36 Ja i.447 DN-a i.124 Thag-a 258 Vism 279.
    Upatthambhita
    1. propped up, supported, sustained Ja i.107 Mil 36 DN-a i.234 Pv-a 117 (puñña-phal˚), 148 (utu-āhārehi u.)
    past participle of upatthambheti
    Upatthambheti
    1. to make firm, shore up, support, prop up Ja i.127 [ppr ˚ayamāna), 447 DN-a i.113 Dhp-a iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). past participle upatthambhita
    2. upa + thambheti, causative of thambhati
    Upatthara
    1. a (floor) covering, carpet, rug DN i.103 (rath˚) Ja ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534
    from upa + stṛ
    Upatheyya
    1. a cushion Ja vi.490 Ja vi.513
    for upadheyya ‣See Trenckner, Note. 6216
    Upadaṁsitar
    1. one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaṁsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J Pali T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists and translators, like upadaṁseti. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sanskrit dharṣati & trsl; s. “one who confirms". The Pug AN leaves the word unexplained)
    agent noun from upadaṁseti
    Upadaṁseti
    1. to cause to appear, to manifest MN ii.120 SN i.64 SN i.65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour-tones) AN ii.84 = iii.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Thag i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on) Vin iv.309
    = upadasseti with ˚aṁs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhanseti = Sanskrit dharṣayati, haṁsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages
    Upadasseti
    1. (upa + dasseti, causative of drś, cp. also upadaṁseti] to make manifest, to show Mil 276 Mil 316 Mil 347
    Upadahati
    1. to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149 DN ii.135 (vippaṭisāraṁ) AN i.203 (dukkhaṁ) Mil 109 Mil 139 Mil 164 Mil 286 383. gerundive passive ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = AN iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). cp. upadhi
    2. upa + dahati1
    Upadāyaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. giving, bestowing Sdhp 319
    from upa +
    Upadiṭṭha
    1. pointed out, put forth, specified Mil 144 (pañha)
    past participle of upadisati
    Upadisati
    1. to point out, show, advise, specify Ja v.457 (sippaṁ) Mil 21 (dhamma-maggaṁ)
    • pp upadiṭṭha (q.v.)
    upa + disati
    Upadissati
    1. to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Snp 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti Snp-a 192)
    upa + dissati
    Upadeva
    1. a secondary, lesser, minor god Pv-a 136
    upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning ‣See upa 5
    Upadesa
    1. pointing out, indication, instruction, advice Pv-a 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; Kp-a 208 differs at identical passage); Kp-a 100; Sdhp 227
    from upadisati
    Upaddava
    1. literally rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression SN ii.210 AN i.101 Snp 51 Dhp 338 (an˚) Dhp-a i.16 Sdhp 267 Sdhp 398
    upa + dava2 of dru
    Upaddavati
    1. to annoy, trouble DN-a i.213 past participle upadduta (q.v.)
    2. from upa + dru
    Upadduta
    1. overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170 Vin iii.144 283 SN ii.210 SN iv.29 Ja i.26 Ja i.61 Ja i.339 Ja ii.102 iv.324, 494; Pv ii.108 Vism 24 (= apakata) Mil 279 Vv-a 311 (aṭṭita +) Pv-a 61
    • an˚ unmolested Pv-a 195 anupaddutatta state of not being molested Vv-a 95 Upadhamsitar & Upadhamseti;
    past participle of upaddavati
    Upadhaṁsitar
    Upadhaṁseti;
    1. at Pug 49 is to be read upad˚; (q.v.)
    Upadhāna
    adjective neuter
    1. “putting under”, i.e. (1) a pillow, cushion DN i.7 SN ii.267 = Mil 366 (kaḷingar˚) SN iii.145 AN i.137 AN i.181 AN iii.50 Ja iv.201 Ja v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ Commentary ); (2) imposing, giving causing Dhp 291 dukkh˚)
    from upa + dhā, cp. upadahati
    Upadhāneti
    1. to suppose, think, reflect Dhp-a i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti
    feminine upa + dhā
    Upadhāraṇā
    1. neuter [from upa + dhṛ;) “receptacle”, milk-pail DN ii.192 AN iv.393 Ja vi.503 ‣See kaṁs˚. Kern, Toevoegselen i.142 proposes corruption from kaṁs’ûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali
    Upadhāraṇā
    (f)
    1. calculation Vv-a 7
    cp. upadhāraṇa
    Upadhārita
    1. considered, reflected upon Dhp i.28; sûpadh˚ Mil 10 dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275
    past participle of upadhāreti
    Upadhāreti
    1. (causative of upa + dhṛ; , cp. dhāreti.3] 1. “to hold or take up” (cp. semantically Latin teneo = English tenet) to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such such, realise Ja i.338 Dhp-a i.28 41; ii.15, 20, 37, 96 iv.197 (an˚) Vv-a 48 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324 Pv-a 119 (for jānāti)
    2. to look out for (
    3. accusative ) Ja iii.65 Ja vi.2
    Upadhāvati
    1. to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207 Vin iv.260 (past participle ˚dhāvita) SN i.185 SN ii.26 (aparantaṁ) Thag 1, 1209 Mil 209 Vv-a 256 Pv-a 154 Pv-a 168 Pv-a 173 (for padhāvitā)
    2. upa + dhāvati.1
    Upadhi
    1. putting down or under, foundation basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) SN i.117 SN i.124 SN i.134 SN i.186 AN ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (identical); iv.150 (˚kkhaya) Iti 21 69 Snp 364 Snp 728 (upadhī-nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa-dukkhaṁ Snp-a 505), 789, 992 Nd1 27 141 Nd2 157 Vb 338 Nett 29 Dhp-a iv.33
    2. clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost synonym with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi) SN A. = pañcakkhandhā, SN ii.108 At MN i.162 (cp. Snp 33 = SN i.6 = i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454 SN ii.108 Snp 728 = 1051 Thag i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna DN ii.36 (cp. SN i.136 SN iii.133 SN v.226 AN i.80 MN i.107 = ii.93 Vin i.5 36 = Ja i.83 = Mvst ii.444 Iti 46 62) DN iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (non-Aryan). At SN i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saṁgo). cp. opadhika
    3. The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows: 5 taṇh’upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma, duccarita), āhār-upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda ‣See D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa-kāyā u. Another modified classification ‣See at Psalms of the Brethren p. 398. Upadhika (Upadhika) from upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upadhi Divy 50 Divy 224, 534
    Upadhika (Upadhīka)
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in compounds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36 Snp 1057 & nir˚; identical SN i.141
    from upadhi
    Upadheyya
    neuter
    1. a cushion Ja vi.490 (for upatheyya, q.v.)
    cp. upadhāna
    Upanaccati
    1. to perform a dance DN ii.268
    upa + naccati
    Upanata
    1. inclined, bent, prone Pv-a 190
    past participle of upanamati
    Upanadati
    1. to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 (= vikūjati Pv-a 189)
    upa + nadati
    Upanandha
    1. scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118
    past participle of upanayhati ‣See naddha & nandhati
    Upanandhati
    1. to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with locative )
    2. aorist upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiṁ); iv.83; Mhvs 36, 117
    3. a secondary derived from upanandha, past participle of upanayhati
    Upanamati
    1. to be bent on, strive after Ja iii.324 (= upagacchati Commentary ). past participle upanata; Caus upanāmeti (q.v.)
    2. upa + namati
    Upanayana
    neuter
    1. technical term for the minor premiss, subsumption ‣See; i → Kvu translation 11 Mil 154 Nett 63 Dhs-a 329 (so read with variant reading for ˚najana
    from upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana
    Upanayhati
    1. -1. to come into touch with Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 (pūtimacchaṁ kusaggena, cp. Dhp-a i.45)
    • to bear enmity towards (
    • locative ), to grudge scorn Dhp 3 Dhp 4
    • past participle upanandha (for ˚naddha)
    • ‣ See also upanandhati
    • upa + nayhati
    Upanayhanā
    feminine & ˚nayhitatta
    • neuter are synonym for upanāha (grudge, ill-will) in exegesis at Pug 18 = 22, whereas id p. at Vb 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaṁ (with variant reading upanayihanā & upanayihitattaṁ).

    Upanāmita
    1. brought up to, placed against DN ii.134
    past participle of upanāmeti
    Upanāmeti
    1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near DN ii.134 SN i.207 Thag 1, 1055 Snp p. 48 (= attano kāyaṁ Bhagavato upanāmeti) Ja i.62 Ja v.215 Snp-a 151
    2. to offer, to present Ja iv.386 Ja ii.5 Mil 210 Mil 373 Pv-a 274-
    3. past participle upanāmita (q.v.) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13 Divy 14, 22
    4. causative of upanamati
    Upanāyika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. -1. referring to, belonging to in compound att˚; reference to oneself Vin iii.91 Vism 27
      • beginning, in phrase vass'ūpanāyikā
      • feminine the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit varṣopanāyikā Divy 18 Divy 489 & ‣See also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253 AN i.51 (divided into 2 parts first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā) Ja iii.332 DN-a i.8 Dhp-a i.203 Dhp-a iii.438 Vv-a 44 Pv-a 42
    from upa +
    Upanāha
    1. ill-will, grudge, enmity MN i.15 AN i.91 AN i.95 AN i.299 AN iv.148 AN iv.349 AN iv.456 AN v.39 AN v.41f. 209 310 Pug 18 = Vb 357 (pubbakālaṁ kodho aparakālaṁ upanāho Mil 289
    from upa + nah ‣See upanayhati, same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ; e.g. at Mvu ii.56
    Upanāhin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who bears ill-will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89 MN i.95 DN iii.45 SN ii.206 SN iv.241 AN iii.260 AN iii.334 AN v.123 AN v.156 Snp 116 Thag 1, 502 Ja iii.260 (kodhana +) Pug 18 Vb 357
    • O
    • past participle an˚; not being angry (
    • locative ) DN iii.47 SN ii.207 SN iv.244 AN v.124f. Ja iv.463
    from upanāha
    Upanikkhamati
    1. to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Thag 2, 37 169 Ja iii.244 Pv i.101 (aorist ˚nikkhami;
    2. imperative ˚nikkhamassu)
    3. upa + nikkhamati
    Upanikkhitta
    1. laid down (secretly), placed by or on top SN v.457 Ja vi.390 Mil 80
    • m. a spy Ja vi.394 (˚purisa)
    upa + n˚
    Upanikkhittaka
    1. a spy Ja vi.409 (˚manussa), 431 (identical), 450 (identical)
    = preceding
    Upanikkhipati
    1. (upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312 SN ii.136f. Mil 78 Mil 80 Nett 21, 22 DN-a i.125 past participle upanikkhitta (q.v.)

    Upanikkhipana
    neuter
    1. putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77
    from ˚nikkhipati
    Upanikkhepa
    “putting near”, depositing
    1. -1. applied to the course of memory, association of ideas Mil 78 Mil 80 cp. ˚nikkhepana SN ii.276
    • deposit, pledge Ja vi.192 Ja vi.193 (= upajūta)
    • from upa + nis + kṣip
    Upanighaṁsati
    1. to rub up against, to crush (close) up to Dhp-a i.58
    upa + ni + ghaṁsati1
    Upanijjhāna
    neuter
    1. meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚ with reference to jhāna Ja v.251 Dhp-a i.230 Dhp-a iii.276 Vv-a 38 213. cp. nijjhāyana
    upa + nijjhāna1
    Upanijjhāyati
    1. to meditate upon, consider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 (“covet”); ii.269; iii.118 DN i.20 AN iv.55 Mil 124 Vism 418
    • pp upanijjhāyita (q.v.)
    upa + nijjhāyati
    Upanijjhāyana
    1. meditation, reflection Mil 127 Vism 418
    for ˚nijjhāna
    Upanijjhāyita
    1. considered, looked at, thought over or about Snp p. 147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita Snp-a 508)
    past participle of ˚nijjhāyati
    Upanidhā
    feminine
    1. comparison Nd2 158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?)
    abstracted from upanidhāya or direct formation from upa + ni + dhā ?
    Upanidhāya
    indeclinable
    1. comparing in comparison, as preposition with accusative “compared with” MN i.374 MN iii.177 (Himavantaṁ pabbatarājānaṁ) SN ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviṁ), 262; v.457 (Sineru-pabbata-rājānaṁ) AN iii.181f.; iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaṁ) Thag 1, 496 (kammaṁ) Ja ii.93 DN-a i.29 59, 283
    2. absolutive of upa + nidahati of dhā
    Upanidhi
    feminine
    1. -1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51
    • comparison, in phrase upanidhiṁ na upeti “does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with” MN iii.177 SN ii.263 SN v.457 (so read for upanidhañ) Ud 23
    • upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi
    Upanipajjati
    1. to lie down close to or on top of (accusative ) Vism 269 Ja v.231
    2. upa + ni + pad
    Upanibajjhati
    1. ‣See upanibandhati
    Upanibaddha
    1. -1. tied on to Mil 253 Mil 254
    • closely connected with, close to Vin iii.308 (Samanta Pāsādikā)

  • attached to DN-a i.128

    past participle of ˚nibandhāti
  • Upanibandha
    1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara)
    2. (adjective
    3. ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaṁ assāsa-passāsa˚ etc)
    upa + ni + bandh
    Upanibandhati
    1. [upa + n˚) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach MN iii.132 Mil 254 Mil 412 passive upanibajjhati to be attached to Snp 218
    2. past participle ˚nibaddha (q.v.)
    Upanibandhana
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective closely connected with DN i.46 DN-a i.128 neuter tie, fetter, leash Mil 253
    2. upa + n˚
    Upanibbatta
    1. come out, produced DN-a i.247
    upa + nibbatta
    Upanibha
    (adjective
    1. somewhat like (—˚) MN i.58 = AN iii.324 (sankha-vaṇṇa˚) Ja i.207 (= sadisa Commentary ) v.302 (tāla˚)
    upa + nibha
    Upanivattati
    1. to return Snp 712 Ja iv.417 Ja v.126
    upa + n˚
    Upanisā
    feminine
    1. -1. cause, means DN ii.217, 259 MN iii.71 (samādhiṁ sa-upanisaṁ) SN ii.30

    -32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25 AN i.198 AN iii.20 AN iii.200f. 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq. Snp 322 (= upanissaya Snp-a 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana Snp-a 503) Dhp 75 (cp. Dhp-a ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). 2. likeness, counterfeit = Sanskrit upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79

    1. Ja vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka Commentary )
    if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be from upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be from upa + ni + śri. The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad
    Upanisīdati
    1. to sit close to or down by DN i.95 AN iv.10 Ja ii.347 Pv iv.163 (absolutive ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā Pv-a 242); Vism 269
    2. upa + nisīdati of sad
    Upanisevati
    1. to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) MN i.306 past participle upanisevita (q.v.)
    2. upa + n˚
    Upanisevana
    adjective
    1. going close after, following Ja v.399 [feminine ˚ī.)
    from upanisevati
    Upanisevita
    1. gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of Ja v.302 (kakka˚)
    past participle of upanisevati
    Upanissaya
    1. basis, reliance, support, foundation, assurance, certainty; especially sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship ‣See long article in Childers s.v.; no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature Ja i.78 Ja i.508 Ja iv.96 vi.70; Nett 80 Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya) Dhs-a 315 (identical) Dhp-a ii.33 Vv-a 98 Pv-a 38 (sotāpatti-phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti) Sdhp 265 Sdhp 320
    upa + ni˚
    Upanissayati
    1. to depend or rely on (accusative ) Mil 240 (attānaṁ).
    2. absolutive ˚nissāya (q.v.); -pp ˚nissita (q.v.)
    3. upa + ni˚
    Upanissāya
    • adverb [
    • absolutive of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with
    • accusative ); depending on, by means of (acc) MN ii.3 SN ii.269 Snp 867 (taṁ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, Pv-a 9 (Rājagahaṁ), 67 (identical) Vv-a 63 (Rājagaha-seṭṭhiṁ “with”). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upaniśritya also a
    • absolutive formation, in same meaning, e.g. at Divy 54 Divy 207, 505.

    Upanissita
    1. dependent or relying on Snp 877 Nd1 283 Mil 245
    upa + ni˚
    Upanīta
    1. brought up to or into (mostly—˚) Thag 2, 498 Snp 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚) Ja iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚) Nd1 38 Dhp 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo Dhp-a iii.337 advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚ Snp 846
    2. offered, presented Ja i.88 Pv-a 274 Pv-a 286. 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) Ja v.375 (= maraṇa-santikaṁ u. Commentary )
    3. bringing up (for trial), charging MN i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya). Upaniya (iyya, eyya)

      past participle of upaneti
    Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya)
    1. “bringing up” (for trial), charging, accusing DN i.107 (vadati, cp. DN-a i.276) AN i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3
    absolutive of upaneti
    Upanīla
    adjective
    1. somewhat dark-blue Ja v.168
    upa + nīla
    Upaneti
    1. to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give Ja i.200 Mil 396 DN-a i.276 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 74 passive upanīyati (˚niyyati)
      1. -1. to be brought (up to) Ja iv.398 ppr. ˚nīyamāna Ja i.200 Pv-a 5
      • to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) MN ii.68 SN i.2

    2. to be carried along or away AN i.155

      • past participle upanīta (q.v.)
      • absolutive upanīya (q.v.)
      upa + neti
    Upanti
    adverb
    1. near, before, in presence of Ja iv.337
    upa + anti
    Upantika
    adjective
    1. neuter accusative ˚ṁ near Ja iv.337 Ja v.58 (with genitive); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); locative ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 (= samīpe gehassa Pv-a 120)
    2. upa + antika
    Upapacciyati
    1. ‣See uppaccati
    Upapajjati
    1. to get to, be reborn in (accusative ) to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaṁ) AN iii.415 AN v.292f. Snp 584 Iti 13 (nirayaṁ), 14 (sugatiṁ; variant reading upp˚), 67 (saggaṁ lokaṁ; variant reading upp˚); 43 = Dhp 307 (nirayaṁ) Dhp 126 Dhp 140 Pv i.107 (Burmese variant udapajjatha = uppajja Pv-a 50) Pug 16 51, 60; Nett 37, 99, cp. Kvu 611 sq.
    2. past participle upapannā (q.v.)
    3. causative upapādeti &
    4. past participle ; upapādita (q.v.)
    5. doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Note. 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry The variant reading upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other
    Upapatti
    -1. birth, rebirth, (literally attainment) MN i.82 SN iii.53 SN iv.398 AN v.289f. Snp 139 Snp 643 Snp 836 Dhp 419 (sattānaṁ); in various specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods Pv-a 6 Pv-a 81 devaloka˚ AN i.115 kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe DN iii.218 Iti 94 arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vb 172 267, 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vb 171f. 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory Pv-a 53 Pv-a 2. occasion, opportunity (literally “coming to”); object for in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts AN iv.239 (where 8 enumd. ‣See dāna).
    1. ˚deva a god by birth (or rebirth) Vv-a 18 also given as uppatti-deva, e.g. at Kp-a 123 ‣See detail under deva
    from upa + pad, cp. uppatti
    Upapattika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta Pv-a 119
      • Cp upapātika
      from upapatti
    Upapanna
    1. -1. (—˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Snp 68 (thāma-bala) 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna-ñāṇa). 2. reborn, come to existence in (with accusative ) SN i.35 (Avihaṁ, explained by Commentary not quite to the point as “nipphattivasena upagata”, i.e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?). AN v.68
    2. past participle of upapajjati
    Upaparikkhaṇa
    neuter = upaparikkhā Vv-a 232
    Upaparikkhati
    1. to investigate, ascertain, test, examine MN i.133 MN i.292 MN i.443 SN ii.216 SN iii.42 SN iii.140 SN iv.174 Ja i.489 ii.400; v.235 Mil 91 Mil 293 Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539 Pv-a 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya)
    upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upaparīkṣate Divy 5 Divy 230
    Upaparikkhā
    feminine
    1. investigation, examination Vin iii.314 MN ii.175 (attha˚) AN iii.381f.; iv.221; v.126 Dhs 16 20 292 Pug 25 Nett 8, 42 DN-a i.171
    from upaparikkhati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.
    Upaparikkhin
    adjective
    1. investigating, reflecting, testing SN iii.61 AN iv.221f. 296, 328. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upaparīkṣaka Divy 212
    from upaparikkhati
    Upapāta
    = upapatti
    1. rebirth Vin iii.4 SN iv.59 (cut˚) Pug 50
    but derived from pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad with the meaning of the casual & unusual
    Upapātika
    adjective
    1. = opapātika i.e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DN-a on DN iii.107 Thag-a 207
    from upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upapāduka Avestan SN ii.94 SN ii.95 Divy 523
    Upapādita
    1. accomplished Ja ii.236
    past participle of upapādeti, causative of upapajjati
    Upapādeti
    1. to execute, perform Ja v.346
    causative of upapajjati
    Upapāramī
    feminine
    1. minor perfection Bu i.77 (opposite paramattha-pāramī) Dhp-a i.84
    upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5
    Upapisana
    1. grinding, powder, in añjan˚; powdered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203 Vin ii.112
    upa + piṣ
    Upapurohita
    1. a minor or assistant priest Ja iv.304
    upa + purohita ‣See upa 5
    Upapīla
    1. at DN i.135 read uppīḷa (q.v.)
    Upapphusati
    1. to touch; aorist upapphusi Ja v.417 Ja v.420
    2. upa + phusati, of spṛś
    Upaplavati
    1. to swim or float to (accusative ), in uncertain reading as
    2. aorist upaplaviṁ at Snp 1145 (dīpā dīpaṁ upaplaviṁ floatcd from land to land variant readings at Snp-a 606 uppalaviṁ & upallaviṁ; all manuscripts of Nd2 p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviṁ). Perhaps we should better read; uppalaviṁ (or upallaviṁ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviṁ, aorist of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v explained at Nd2 160 by samupallaviṁ
    3. upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati
    Upabbajati
    1. to go to, resort to, visit Thag 1, 1052 Ja iv.270 Ja iv.295 Ja v.495 (= upagacchati Commentary ); vi.43
    upa + vraj
    Upabbūḷha
    1. ‣See sam˚
    Upabrūhaṇa
    neuter
    1. expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145 Dhs-a 117
    from upa + bṛh2, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upabṛṁhita Jtm 3195
    Upabhunjaka
    adjective
    1. one who eats or enjoys Vism 555
    from next
    Upabhunjati
    1. to enjoy Ja iii.495 Ja v.350 (infinitive ˚bhottuṁ)- gerundive upabhogga.
    2. past participle upabhattu (q.v.)
    3. upa + bhuj
    Upabhutta
    1. enjoyed Dāvs iii.65
    past participle of upabhunjati
    Upabhoga
    1. enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267 Ja ii.431 Ja iv.219 (variant reading paribhoga); vi.361 Mil 201 Mil 403 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 220 (˚paribhoga) Dhp-a iv.7 (identical); Sdhp 268 Sdhp 341 Sdhp 547
    from upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati
    Upabhogin
    adjective
    1. enjoying Mil 267
    from upabhuñjati
    Upabhogga
    adjective
    1. to be enjoyed, enjoyable Mil 201
    Sanskrit upabhogya, gerundive of upabhuñjati
    Upama

    adjective

    1. “coming quite or nearly up to” i.e. like, similar, equal DN i.239 (andha-veṇ˚) MN i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow) AN iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water) Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa Pv-a 7) Pv-a 2 Pv-a 8 etc
    • Note. ūpama metri causa ‣See ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā
    compar superl. formation from upa, cp. Latin summus from *(s)ub-mo
    Upamā
    feminine
    1. likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. SN ii.114 MN i.148) Snp 705 (cp. Dhp 129 Dhp 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaṁ paṭibhāgo Nd2 158) Iti 114 Vism 341 478, 512, 582 sq., 591 sq. Pv-a 29 Pv-a 112 (dhen˚) Snp-a 329 384; Sdhp 29 Sdhp 44 Sdhp 259
    1. ˚vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to participle evaṁ) Snp-a 13 472; Kp-a 185, 195, 208, 212 Pv-a 25
    feminine of upama in abstract meaning
    Upamāna
    neuter
    1. comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison Ja v.341 Vv-a 13
    from upa +
    Upamānita
    1. measured out, likened, like, comparable Thag 2, 382 (= sadisa Thag-a 255)
    past participle of causative upa +
    Upameti
    1. to measure one thing by another, to compare Ja vi.252 Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?)
    upa +
    Upameyya
    adjective
    1. to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison Vv-a 13
    gerundive of upa +
    Upaya
    1. approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adjective (—˚) in an˚; (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached SN i.141 SN i.181 SN ii.284 Snp 786 Snp 787 Snp 897 (cp. Snp-a 558); and in rūpūpaya (variant readings rūpupaya & rūpupāya “clinging to form” (etc.) SN iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (+ rup’ārammaṇa)
    from upa + i, cp. upāya
    Upayācati
    1. to beg, entreat, pray to Ja vi.150 (divyaṁ)
    upa + yācati
    Upayācitaka
    neuter
    1. begging, asking, praying, propitiation Ja vi.150 (= devatānaṁ āyācana)
    of adjective upa + yācita + ka; past participle of yācati
    Upayāti
    1. to go to, to approach SN i.76 SN ii.118 (also causative ˚yāpeti; Dīpavaṁsa vi.69; Sdhp 579
    2. upa + yāti of
    Upayāna
    neuter
    1. nearing, approach, arrival DN i.10 DN-a i.94
    from upa + , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upayāna Jtm 3163
    Upayānaka
    1. a crab Ja vi.530
    from upayāna
    Upayuñjati
    1. to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. medium upayujjamāna Vv-a 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food)
    2. upa + yuj
    Upayoga
    1. connection, combination; employment, application Ja vi.432 (nagare upayogaṁ netvā for use in the town? variant reading upabhogaṁ). Usually in cpd ˚vacana as technical term g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis Snp-a 386 Kp-a 236 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 135 or the accusative case, which is frequently substituted for the following cases: sāmi-vacana Snp-a 127 Pv-a 102 bhumma Snp-a 140 Kp-a 116; karaṇa˚ Snp-a 148 sampadāna˚ Ja v.214 Snp-a 317 itthambhūta˚ Snp-a 441 nissakka˚ Ja v.498
    2. from upa + yuj
    Uparacita
    1. formed Thag-a 211 Sdhp 616
    past participle of upa + rac
    Uparajja
    neuter
    1. viceroyalty AN iii.154 (variant reading opa˚) Ja i.511 Ja iv.176 DN-a i.134
    upa + rajja, cp. uparaja
    Uparata
    1. having ceased, desisting from (—˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt-ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti-bhojanato uparata DN-a i.77) DN i.5 (identical) MN i.319 (bhaya˚) Snp 914 (virata etc. Nd1 337) Mil 96 Mil 307 Dhs-a 403 (vihiṁs˚)
    past participle of uparamati
    Uparati
    feminine
    1. ceasing, resting; cessation MN i.10 SN iv.104 Mil 274
    from upa + ram
    Uparamati
    1. to cease, desist, to be quiet Ja iii.489 Ja v.391 (variant reading for upāramati, also in Commentary ) Mil 152
    upa + ram
    Uparamā
    feminine
    1. cessation Mil 41 Mil 44 (an˚)
    cp. literally Sanskrit uparama, to uparamati
    Uparava
    1. noise Ja ii.2
    from upa + ru
    Uparājā
    1. a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy Ja i.504 Ja ii.316 Dhp-a i.392
    upa + rājā ‣See upa 5
    Upari
    indeclinable
    1. over, above (preposition & prefix) 1. (adverb on top, above (opposite adho below) Vin iv.46 (opposite heṭṭhā) Ja vi.432 Kp-a 248 (= uddhaṁ; opposite adho) Snp-a 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Snp 442) Pv-a 11 (heṭṭhā manussa-saṇṭhānaṁ upari sūkara-s˚) 47 (upari chattaṁ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything)
    2. (preposition with gen) with reference either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? Dhp-a i.41 attano u. patati falls upon himself Pv-a 45 etissā upari kodho anger on her, i.e. against her Vv-a 68 or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaṁ māsānaṁ upari after 4 months Pv-a 52 (= uddhaṁ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012) sattannaṁ vassa-satānaṁ upari after 700 years Pv-a 144 Pv-a 3. (
    3. adverb in compound, meaning “upper, higher, on the upper or top side”, or “on top of”, if the phrase is in
    4. locative case ‣See below
      1. ˚cara walking in the air, suspended, flying Ja iii.454
      • ˚pāsāda the upper story of a palace, locative on the terrace DN i.112 (
      • locative ) Pv-a 105 Pv-a 279
      • ˚piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii.207 locative
      • ˚bhaddaka name of a tree either Sanskrit bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba after Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
        1. Ja vi.269
        • ˚bhāga the upper part used in instrumental, loc or
        • aorist in sense of “above, over beyond” Ja iv.232 instrumental
        • ˚bhāva higher state or condition MN i.45 (opposite adh˚)
        • ˚mukha face upwards DN-a i.228 Pug AN 214
        • ˚vasana upper garment Pv-a 49
        • ˚vāta higher than the wind, locative on the wind Ja ii.11 or in ˚passe (
        • locative ) on the upper (wind-) side Dhp-a ii.17
        • ˚visāla extended on top, i.e. of great width, very wide Ja iii.207
        • ˚vehāsa high in the air (˚-), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the Commentary means by explanation majjhimassa purisassa asīsa-ghaṭṭā “not knocking against the head of a middle-(sized) man” is not quite clear)
        • ˚sacca higher truth Pv-a 66 (so read for upari sacca)
        Vedic upari, derived from upa, Indogermanic *uper(i); Latin s-uper; Gothic ufar, Old High German ubir = German über English over; Old Irish for
    Upariṭṭha
    adjective
    1. highest, topmost, most excellent Thag 1, 910 cp. next
    superl. formation from upari in analogy to seṭṭha
    Upariṭṭhima
    adjective
    1. = upariṭṭha uparima Dhs 1016 1300, 1401 Pug 16 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaṁbhāgiya-sañyojanāni Pug AN 198)
    double-superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā
    Uparima
    adjective
    1. uppermost, above, overhead DN iii.189 (disā); Nett 88. cp. upariṭṭhima
    upari + ma, superl. formation
    Upariya
    adverb
    1. above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚; below and above Vism 1
    from upari
    Uparujjhati
    1. to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed DN i.223 Thag 1 145 Iti 106 Snp 724 Snp 1036 Snp 1110 Nd2 159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati) Mil 151 Sdhp 280. past participle uparuddha
    2. Sanskrit uparudhyate, passive of uparundhati
    Uparuddha
    1. stopped, ceased Mil 151 (˚jīvita)
    past participle of uparujjhati
    Uparundhati
    1. to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check MN i.243 Ja i.358 Thag 1, 143 1117 Snp 118 Snp 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd1 346 = uparuddheyya etc.) Mil 151 Mil 245 Mil 313 absolutive uparundhiya Thag 1, 525 Snp 751
    2. aorist uparundhi Ja iv.133 Pv-a 271

      • passive uparujjhati (q.v.)
      upa + rudh
    Uparūḷha
    1. grown again, recovered Ja iv.408 (cakkhu)
    upa + rūḷha, past participle of ruh
    Uparocati
    1. to please intranstitive Ja vi.64
    2. upa + ruc
    Uparodati
    1. to lament Ja vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati)
    2. to sing in a whining tone Ja v.304
    upa + rud
    Uparodha
    1. obstacle; breaking up, destruction, end Ja iii.210 Ja iii.252 Pv iv.15 Mil 245 Mil 313
    from upa + rudh
    Uparodhana
    neuter
    1. breaking up, destruction Snp 732 Snp 761
    from upa + rudh
    Uparodheti
    1. to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73
    Caus of uparundhati
    Uparopa
    1. “little plant”, sapling Vin ii.154 ‣See also next
    upa + ropa, cp. upa 5
    Uparopaka
    1. = uparopa, sapling Ja ii.345 Ja iv.359
    Upala
    1. a stone Dāvs iii.87
    Literally Sanskrit upala, etymology uncertain
    Upalakkhaṇā
    feminine & ˚aṁ
    • neuter

      1. discrimination SN iii.261 (an˚) Dhs 16 20, 292, 1057 Pug 25 Vv-a 240
      upa + lakkhaṇa
    Upalakkheti
    1. to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172
    upa + lakṣay
    Upaladdha
    1. acquired, got, found Ja vi.211 (˚bāla; variant reading paluddha˚); Sdhp 4 Sdhp 386
    past participle of upalabhati
    Upaladdhi
    feminine
    1. acquisition; knowledge Mil 268 Vv-a 279
    from upa + labh
    Upalabhati
    1. to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Mil 124 (kāraṇaṁ); usually in passive upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist MN i.138 (an˚) SN i.135 SN iv.384 Snp 858 Pv ii.111 (= paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146); Kvu 1, 2 Mil 25 Pv-a 87
    2. upa + labh
    Upalāpana
    neuter
    1. talking over or down, persuasion; diplomacy, humbug DN ii.76 Mil 115 Mil 117
    from upa + lap
    Upalāpeti
    1. to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119 Vin iii.21 Ja ii.266 Ja iii.265 iv.215 Pv-a 36 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 276
    causative of upa + lap
    Upalāḷita
    1. caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301
    past participle of upalāḷeti
    Upalāḷeti
    1. -1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over Ja ii.267 Vism 300; Sdhp 375
    • to boast of, exult in Ja ii.151
    • past participle upalāḷita (q.v.)
    • causative of upa + lal; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upalāḍayati Divy 114 Divy 503
    Upaḷāseti
    1. to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) DN ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q.v.)
    upa + causative of las
    Upalikkhati
    1. to scratch, scrape, wound AN iii.94f. (= vijjhati Commentary )
    upa + likh
    Upalitta
    1. smeared with (—˚), stained, tainted Thag 2, 467 (cp. Thag-a 284 Text reads apalitta) Pug 56 Usually negative an˚; free from taint, undefiled MN i.319 MN i.386 Mil 318 metri causa anūpalitta SN i.141 SN ii.284 Snp 211 Snp 392 Snp 468 Snp 790 Snp 845 Dhp 353 (cp. Dhp-a iv.7)
    past participle of upalimpati
    Upalippati
    1. to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Snp 547 Snp 812 Ja iii.66 (= allīyati Commentary ) Mil 250 Mil 337
    passive of upalimpati
    Upalimpati
    1. to smear, defile DN ii.18 Vin iii.312 Ja i.178 Ja iv.435 Mil 154 passive upalippati, pp upalitta (q.v.)
    2. upa + lip
    Upalepa
    1. defilement Ja iv.435
    from upa + lip
    Upalohitaka
    (adjective
    1. reddish Ja iii.21 (= rattavaṇṇa Commentary )
    upa + lohita + ka ‣See upa 5
    Upallaviṁ
    1. Sn 1145 ‣See upaplavati
    Upavajja
    adjective
    1. blameworthy SN iv.59 SN iv.60 AN ii.242
    • an˚ blameless, without fault SN iv.57 sq AN iv.82 Mil 391
    gerundive of upavadati
    Upavajjatā
    feminine
    1. blameworthiness SN iv.59 (an˚)
    abstract from upavajja
    Upavaṇṇeti
    1. to describe fully Sdhp 487
    upa + vaṇṇeti
    Upavattati
    1. to come to passive to take place Ja vi.58
    2. upa + vṛt
    Upavadati
    1. to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame DN i.90 SN iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.) AN ii.121 (identical); v.88 Ja ii.196 Pv-a 13
    upa + vad
    Upavana
    neuter
    1. a kind of wood, miniature wood, park Ja iv.431 Ja v.249 Mil 1 Vv-a 170 (= vana), 344 Thag-a 201 Pv-a 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚)
    upa + vana ‣See upa 5
    Upavasati
    1. -1. to dwell in or at Ja iii.113 DN-a i.139
    • to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaṁ upavasati to observe the fast day SN i.208 AN i.142 AN i.144 AN i.205 Snp 402 (ger upavassa) Ja iii.444 Snp-a 199 Pv-a 209
    • past participle upavuttha (q.v.) ‣See also uposatha
    • upa + vasiti
    Upavāda
    1. insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd1 386 Pv-a 269
    • an˚
    • adjective not grumbling or abusing Dhp 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa)
    from upa + vad
    Upavādaka
    adjective
    1. blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of genitive, generally in phrase ariyānaṁ u insulting the gentle Vin iii.5 AN i.256 AN iii.19 AN iv.178 v.68 Iti 58 99
    • an˚ Ps i.115 Pug 60
    from upavāda
    Upavādin
    (adjective
    1. = upavādaka; in ariy˚ SN i.225 SN ii.124 SN v.266 Pv iv.339. an˚ MN i.360
    from upavāda
    Upavāyati
    1. to blow on or towards somebody MN i.424 AN iv.46 Thag 1, 544 Pv iii.66 Mil 97
    upa + vāyati
    Upavāsa

    keeping a prescribed day, fasting, self-denial, abstaining from enjoyments Same as uposatha; used extensively in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit in meaning of uposatha, e.g. at Avs i.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga-samanvāgataṁ upavāsaṁ upavasati

    1. . AN v.40 (? uncertain; variant readings upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa) Ja vi.508 Snp-a 199 (in explanation of uposatha)
    from upa + vas ‣See upavasati
    Upavāsita
    adjective (upa + vāsita] perfumed Pv-a 164 (for gandha-samerita).
    Upavāhana
    neuter
    1. carrying away, washing away Snp 391 (sanghāṭi-raj-ûpa˚ = paṁsu-malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaṁ Snp-a 375)
    upa + vāhana
    Upavicāra
    1. [upa + vicāra; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upavicāra Divy 19 translated on p. 704 in Notes by “perplexed by doubts” (?) applying (one’s mind) to, discrimination DN iii.245 (domanass˚) MN iii.239 SN iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.) AN iii.363f.; v.134; Ps i.17 Dhp 8 Dhp 85 Dhp 284 Vb 381
    Upavijaññā
    feminine adjective
    1. about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth MN i.384 Thag 2, 218 Ud 13 Dāvs iii.38 Thag-a 197
    gerundive formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sanskrit vijanya
    Upavisati
    1. to come near, to approach a person Ja iv.408 Ja v.377 aorist upāvisi Snp 415 Snp 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaṁ gantvā nisīdi Snp-a 384)
    2. upa + visati
    Upavīna
    1. the neck of a lute SN iv.197 Mil 53
    upa + vīṇā
    Upavīta
    1. covered (?) at Vv-a 8 in phrase “vettalatâdīhi upavītaṁ āsanaṁ” should probably be read upanīta (variant readings uparivīta & upajita); or could it be past participle of upavīyati (woven with)? ?
    Upavīyati
    1. te be woven Ja vi.26
    passive of upa + 2 to weave
    Upavuttha
    1. celebrated, kept (of a fastday) AN i.211 (uposatha) Snp 403 (uposatha). cp. uposatha
    past participle of upavasati
    Upavhyati
    1. to invoke, call upon DN ii.259 SN i.168
    upa + ā + , cp. avhayati for *āhvayati
    Upasaṁvasati
    1. to live with somebody, to associate with (accusative ) Ja i.152
    2. upa + saṁ + vas
    Upasaṁharaṇa
    neuter
    1. drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq. Ja v.186
    from upasaṁharati
    Upasaṁharati
    1. -1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Mil 132
    • to dispose arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaṁ) MN i.436 (cittaṁ), 468 (cittaṁ tathattāya) SN v.213f. (identical) Dhs-a 309 (cakkhuṁ)

  • to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Mil 232

    upa + saṁ + hṛ
  • Upasaṁhāra
    1. taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚; being seized or possessed by a god Mil 298
    from upa + saṁ + hṛ
    Upasaṁhita
    adjective
    1. accompanied by, furnished or connected with (—˚) DN i.152 MN i.37 119 (chand˚) SN ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (identical) Snp 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraṁ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaṁ Nd2) Thag 1, 970 Ja i.6 Ja ii.134 Ja ii.172 Ja v.361
    past participle of upa + saṁ + dhā
    Upasaṅkamati
    1. -1. to go up to (with accusative ), to approach come near; frequently in stock phrase “yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) ten’upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi’', e.g. Vin i.270 DN i.109 DN ii.1 and passim
    2. aorist ˚sankami Pv. ii.210 Snp-a 130 140; Kp-a 116 Pv-a 88
    3. absolutive ˚sankamitvā Snp-a 140 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 88; ˚sankamma Snp 166 Snp 418 Snp 460 Snp 980 Snp 986 inf ˚sankamituṁ Pv-a 79

      • . 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Mil 169 Mil 233 Mil 353 DN-a i.7
      upa + saṁ + kram, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasankramati Avs i.209
    Upasaṅkamana
    neuter
    1. going near, approach MN ii.176 SN v.67 = Iti 107 Pv-a 232
    from upasankamati
    Upasaṅkheyya
    adjective
    1. to be prepared, produced or contracted Snp 849 (= ˚sankhātabba Snp-a 549 cp. Nd1 213)
    grd of upa + sankharoti
    Upasagga
    1. -1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33 AN i.101 Thag 2, 353 Dhp 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. Dhp-a iii.70) Mil 418
    • (technical term g. prefix, preposition Ja ii.67 (saṁ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni pa) DN-a i.245 (adhi); Kp-a 101 (sa˚ and an˚) Pv-a 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, explanation of handa) Dhs-a 163 405
    • Sanskrit upasarga, of upa + sṛj
    Upasaṇṭhapanā
    feminine
    1. stopping, causing to cease, settling Pug 18 (‣ See also an˚;)
    from upa + sanṭḥapeti
    Upasanta
    1. calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace MN i.125 SN i.83 SN i.162 AN iii.394 Snp 848 Snp 919 Snp 1087 Snp 1099 Nd1 210 352, 434 Nd2 161 Dhp 201 Dhp 378 Mil 394 Dhp-a iii.260 Dhp-a iv.114 Pv-a 132 (= santa)
    past participle of upa + śam, cp. upasammati
    Upasama
    1. calm, quiet, appeasement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i.10 SN iv.331 = v.421 (in frequently phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati ‣See nibbāna iii.7) DN i.50 DN iii.130f. 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚) MN i.67 MN iii.246 SN i.30 SN i.34 (sīlena), 46 citta-v-ûpasama), 48 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaṁ … v-ūpasamo) DN ii.157 SN i.158 ‣See vūpasama and sankhāra; (ariyaṁ maggaṁ dukkh˚-gāminaṁ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq. AN i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq. Snp 257 Snp 724 Snp 735 Snp 737 Iti 18 (dukkh˚) 83 Dhp 205 Nd1 351 Ja i.97 Ps i.95 Mil 170 Mil 248 Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587 cp. vi˚ (vū˚)
    Sanskrit upaśama, upa + śam
    Upasamati
    1. to appease, calm, allay, assuage Snp 919 Thag 1, 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd1 352). past participle upasanta q.v.)
    2. upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intransitive meaning
    Upasamāna
    neuter = upasama Thag 1, 421 Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚).
    Upasampajjati
    1. to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in absolutive upasampajja MN i.89 SN iii.8 AN iv.13 AN v.69 Dhs 160 ‣See Dhs-a 167 DN-a i.313 Snp-a 158
    2. past participle upasampanna (q.v.)
    3. upa + sampajjati
    Upasampadā
    feminine
    1. -1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking DN ii.49 MN i.93 AN iii.65 Dhp 183 (cp. Dhp-a iii.236) Nett 44 (kusalassa)
    • (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasampad ˚padā Divy 21 Divy 281 etc.
    1. Vin i.12 20, 95, 146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52 DN i.176 DN i.177 DN i.202 SN i.161 AN iv.276f. & passim Dhp-a ii.61 (pabbajjā +) Pv-a 54 (laddh one who has received ordination), 179 (identical)
    from upa + saṁ + pad
    Upasampanna

    obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship ordained cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upasampanna Divy 281

    1. SN i.161 AN v.70 Vin iii.24 Vin iv.52 130 Mil 13
    past participle of upasampajjati
    Upasampādeti
    1. to attain to, obtain, produce Dhs-a 167 (= nipphādeti)
    2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130 226, 317 (= vutṭhāpeti);
    3. gerundive ˚etabba Vin i.64f.; iv.48 AN v.72
    denominative from upasampadā
    Upasamphassati
    1. to embrace Ja v.297
    upa + sam + spṛś
    Upasammati
    1. to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased SN i.62 SN i.221 Dhp 100f.
    Sanskrit upasamyati, upa + śam in intransitive function
    Upasavyāna
    neuter?
    1. “a robe worn over the left shoulder” (Hardy, Index to ed.) Vv-a 166 (variant reading upavasavya)
    ?
    Upasiṁsaka
    adjective.
    1. striving after, longing or wishing for Mil 393 (āhār˚ Morris JP T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka)
    from upa + siṁsati = śaṁs, cp. āsiṁsaka
    Upasiṅghaka
    adjective
    1. sniffing after Ja ii.339 Ja iii.144 Mil 393 (? ‣See upasiṁsaka)
    from upa + siṅgh
    Upasiṅghati
    1. -1. to sniff at SN i.204 (padumaṁ); i.455 Ja ii.339 Ja ii.408 Ja vi.336
    • to sniff up Vin i.279
    • causative āyati to touch gently Kp-a 136
    • causative II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke Ja iv.407
    • upa + siṅgh
    Upasiṅghita
    1. scented, smelled at (locative ) Ja vi.543 (sisaṁhi, Commentary for upagghata)
    2. past participle of upasinghati
    Upasussati
    1. to dry up MN i.481 Snp 433 Ja i.71
    upa + sussati
    Upasecana
    neuter
    1. sprinkling over, i.e. sauce Thag 1, 842 Ja ii.422 Ja iii.144 Ja iv.371 (maṁs˚); vi.24 ‣See also nandi˚ & maṁsa˚
    from upa + sic
    Upaseniyā
    feminine
    1. (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling Ja vi.64 (= mātaraṁ upagantvā sayanika Commentary )
    Sanskrit upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī
    Upasevati
    1. -1. to practice, frequent, pursue Mil 355
    • to serve, honour, Snp 318 (˚amāna).
    • past participle upasevita (q.v.)
    • upa + sev
    Upasevanā
    feminine
    1. serving, pursuing, following, service, honouring, pursuit SN iii.53 = Nd1 25 Nd2 570 (nand˚ pleasure-seeking) Iti 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚) Snp 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons) Mil 351
    abstract from upasevati
    Upasevita
    1. visited, frequented Pv-a 147 (for sevita)
    past participle of upasevati
    Upasevin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. pursuing, following, going after AN iii.136 (vyatta˚) Mil 264 (rāj˚) Dhp-a iii.482 (para-dār˚)
    from upasevati
    Upasobhati
    1. to appear beautiful, to shine forth Thag 1, 1080 causative ˚sobheti to make beautiful embellish, adorn Vv 526 Ja v.132 Pv-a 153

      • pp upasobhita (q.v.)
      upa + śubh
    Upasobhita
    1. embellished, beautified, adorned Pv-a 153 Pv-a 187; Sdhp 593
    past participle of upasobheti
    Upassagga
    1. ‣See upasagga
    Upassaṭṭha
    1. “thrown upon”, overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed SN iv.29 AN iii.226 (udak˚) Ja i.61 Ja ii.239
    Sanskrit upasṛṣṭa, past participle of upa + sṛj
    Upassaya
    1. abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum SN i.32 SN i.33 Vv 684 Mil 160 especially frequently as bhikkhuni˚; or bhikkhun˚; a nunnery Vin ii.259 Vin iv.265 292 SN ii.215 Ja i.147 Ja i.428 Mil 124
    from upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya
    Upassāsa
    1. breathing Ja i.160
    upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas
    Upassuti
    feminine
    1. listening to, attention SN ii.75 SN iv.91 Ja v.100 Mil 92
    from upa + śru
    Upassutika
    adjective
    1. one who listens, an eavesdropper Ja v.81
    from upassuti
    Upahacca
    (˚-)
    1. -1. spoiling, impairing, defiling Ja v.267 (manaṁ)
    • reducing, cutting short only in phrase upahacca-parinibbāyin “coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life”) SN v.70 SN v.201f. AN i.233f.; iv.380 Pug 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaṁ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pug AN 199); Nett 190
    • The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca → upapajja → uppajja, as indicated by Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upapadya-parinirvāyin, and by remarks of Commentary on Kvu 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159
    • absolutive of upahanti
    Upahaññati
    1. to be spoilt or injured Snp 584 Ja iv.14 Mil 26
    passive of upahanti
    Upahata
    injured, spoilt; destroyed DN i.86 (phrase khata + upahata) SN i.238 (na sûpahata “not easily put out” translation); ii.227 AN i.161 Dhp 134 Ja vi.515 Mil 223 Mil 302 Dhp-a ii.33 (an˚).
    1. The formula at DN i.86 (khata + upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning According to Buddhaghosa it means “one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation, i.e. one who cannot be savedic Thus at DN-a i.237: “bhinna-patiṭṭho jāto, i.e. without a basis. cp. remarks under khata. The translation at Dialogues of the Buddha i.95 gives it as “deeply affected and touched in heart”: doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata
    past participle of upahanti
    Upahattar
    1. a bringer (of) MN i.447f.
    Sanskrit *upahartṛ, agent noun of upa + hṛ
    Upahanti
    (& ˚hanati Ja i.454)
    1. to impair, injure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in absolutive upahacca;
    2. past participle upahata & Pass.; upahaññati (q.v.)
    3. upa + han
    Upaharaṇa
    neuter
    1. -1. presentation; luxury Ja i.231
    • taking, seizing Ja vi.198
    • from upa + hṛ
    Upaharati
    1. to bring, offer, present AN ii.87 AN iii.33 Dhp i.301, 302 Ja v.477
    upa + hṛ
    Upahāra
    1. bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) AN ii.87 AN iii.33 AN v.66 (mett˚) Ja i.47 Ja iv.455 Ja vi.117 DN-a i.97
    from upa + hṛ
    Upahiṁsati
    1. to injure, hurt Vin ii.203 Ja iv.156
    upa + hiṁs
    Upāgacchati
    1. to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aorist upāgañchi cp. i.1010, plural upāgañchuṁ Snp 1126 or upāgami Snp 426 Snp 685 plural upāgamuṁ Snp 302 Snp 1126 Besides in pres.
    2. imperative upāgaccha Pv-a 64 (so read for upagaccha).
    3. past participle upāgata
    4. upa + ā + gam
    Upāgata
    1. come to, having reached or attained Snp 1016 Pv-a 117 (yakkhattaṁ); Sdhp 280
    past participle of upāgacchati
    Upāta
    1. P. Text S. 1884 75 = uppāta “flying up” thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Thag 1, 675
    according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. = Sanskrit upātta, pp of upa + ā + “taken up”; after Morris J.
    Upātigacchati
    1. to “go out over”, to sur passive overcome, only in 3rd singular preterite upaccagā Snp 333 Snp 636 Snp 641 Snp 827 Thag 1, 181 2, 4 Ja i.258 Ja vi.182 & 3; rd
    2. plural upaccaguṁ SN i.35 AN iii.311 Ja iii.201
    3. upa + ati + gacchati
    Upātidhāvati
    1. to run on or in to Ud 72
    upa + ā + dhāvati
    Upātipanna
    1. fallen into, a prey to (with locative ) Snp 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta Snp-a 415)
    2. past participle of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad
    Upātivatta
    1. gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with accusative ) SN i.143 AN ii.15 Snp 55 Snp 474 Snp 520 Snp 907 Ja iii.7 Ja iii.360 Fd1 322 = Nd2 163. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upātivṛtta in same sense at Mvu iii.281
    2. past participle of upâtivattati
    Upātivattati
    1. to go beyond, overstep MN i.327 Snp 712 (variant reading for upanivattati); Nett 49. past participle upātivatta (q.v.)
    2. upa + ati + vattati
    Upādā
    adverb
    1. literally “taking up”, i.e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877 960, 1210; Vism 275 444 (24 fold) Dhs-a 215 299, 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127 197
    • Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā as negative anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning “not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)”, not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q.v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaṁ “unsupported emancipation” MN i.148 SN iv.48 SN v.29 Dhp-a i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release. AN v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattass’etaṁ nāmaṁ) Vin v.164 Ps ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto DN i.17 (= kinci dhammaṁ anupādiyitvā vimutto DN-a i.109); cp. MN iii.227 (paritassanā)
    shortened
  • absolutive of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning
  • Upādāna
    neuter
    1. -(literally that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adjective (—˚) supported by, drawing one’s existence from SN i.69 SN ii.85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚) Ja iii.342 sa-upādāna adjective provided with fuel SN iv.399 anupādāna without fuel Dhp-a ii.163 2.
    2. applied “drawing upon”, grasping, holding on, grip attachment; adjective (—˚) finding one’s support by or in clinging to, taking up, nourished by ‣See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Compendium 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād or the graspings arising from sense-desires, speculation belief in rites, belief in the soul-theory DN ii.58 DN iii.230 MN i.51 MN i.66 SN ii.3 SN v.59 Dhs 1213 Ps i.129; ii.46 47 Vb 375 Nett 48; Vism 569

      • For upādāna in various connections ‣See the following passages: DN i.25 DN ii.31 DN ii.33 56; iii.278 MN i.66 MN i.136 (attavād˚) 266 SN ii.14 SN ii.17 SN ii.30 SN ii.85 SN iii.10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq. 102 (tannissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ tadupādānaṁ), 390, 400 (taṇhā) AN iv.69 AN v.111 (upāy˚) Snp 170 Snp 358 Snp 546 Ps i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113 Vb 18 30, 67, 79, 119 132 Dhs 1059 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq. Dhp-a iv.194
      • sa˚ full of attachment (to life) MN i.65 Vin iii.111 SN iv.102
      • an˚ unattached, not showing attachment to existence SN iv.399 Vin iii.111 Thag 1, 840 Mil 32 DN-a i.98

      -kkhandha, usually as pañc’upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the “fivefold clinging to existence” cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pañc’u˚-skandhāḥ Avs ii.1681 & note

      1. DN ii.35, 301 sq.; iii.223, 286 MN i.61 MN i.144 MN i.185 MN iii.15 MN iii.30 MN iii.114 MN iii.295 Ps ii.109 sq. Vb 101 Vism 505 (khandha-pañcaka) ‣See for detail khandha ii.B 2
      2. ˚kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment SN ii.54 AN iii.376f. Snp 475 Snp 743 Iti 75
      • ˚nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj founded on or caused by attachment Ps ii.111 Vb 135 sq -nirodha destruction of “grasping” Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca-samuppāda) SN ii.7 SN iii.14 AN i.177
      • ˚paccaya = ˚nidāna SN ii.5 SN iii.94 Snp 507 Snp 742
      from upa + ā +
    Upādāniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derivedic ‣See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322
    • SN ii.84 SN iii.47 SN iv.89 SN iv.108 Dhs 584 1219, 1538 Vb 12f. 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326
    from upādāna, for *upādānika → ˚aka
    Upādāya
    adverb
    1. -1. (as preposition with accusative ) literally “taking it up” (as such & such), i.e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaṁ upādāya out of pity or mercy DN i.204 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 164
    2. (b) compared with alongside of, with reference to, according to DN i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca
    3. accusative to time & convenience) Dhp-a i.391 Vv-a 65 (paṁsucuṇṇaṁ) Pv-a 268 (manussalokaṁ) The same use of upādāya is found in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e.g. at Divy 25 Divy 359, 413; Avs i.255
    4. (ic same meaning application as upādā, i.e. in negative form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term “hanging on to”, i.e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vb 12 67 etc. Nd1 266. Usually as anupādāya “not clinging to”, without any (further) clinging (to rebirth) emancipated, unconditioned, free cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paritt-anupādāya free from the world Divy 655
      1. frequently in phrase a nibbuta completely emancipated SN ii.279 AN i.162 AN iv.290 besides in following pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaṁ vimuccati.182 (identical) SN ii.187f.; iv.20, 107; v.317 Dhp 89 = SN v.24 (ādānapaṭi-nisagge a. ye ratā) Dhp 414 Snp 363 Iti 94 (+ aparitassato)
      absolutive of upādiyati
    Upādi˚
    ;
    1. = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of “stuff of life”, substratum of being, khandha; only in combination with ˚sesa adjective having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i.e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined SN v.129 SN v.181 AN iii.143 Iti 40 Vism 509. More frequently negative an-upādi-sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit anupādi-vimukti Mvu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna-dhātu) DN iii.135 MN i.148 (parinibbāna) AN ii.120 AN iv.75f. 202, 313 Ja i.28 Ja i.55 Snp 876 Iti 39 121 (nibbāna-dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509 Dhp-a iv.108 (nibbāna) Vv-a 164 165. O
    2. past participle saupādisesa AN iv.75f. 378 sq. Snp 354 (opposite nibbāyi) Vism 509; Nett 92 ‣See further reference under nibbāna parinibbāna
    3. the compound-from of upādāna, derived from upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in comp; n. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a noun formation from analogous to ˚dhi from dhā in upadhi
    Upādiṇṇa
    1. grasped at, laid hold of; or “the issue of grasping”, i.e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā) ‣See definition at Dhs trsln. 201, 324
    • Dhs 585 877, 1211, 1534 Vb 2f. 326, 433; Vism 349, 451; an˚ Vin iii.113 Dhs 585 991, 1212, 1535
    for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as past participle from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1
    Upādiṇṇaka
    1. (adj,) = upādiṇṇa Dhs-a 311 315, 378; Vism 398
    Upādiyati
    1. to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna DN ii.292 MN i.56 MN i.67 SN ii.14 SN iii.73 SN iii.94 SN iii.135 SN iv.168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati) Snp 752 Snp 1103 Snp 1104 Nd1 444 (= ādeti) Nd2 164. ppr. upādiyaṁ SN iv.24 = 65 (an˚); -ppr. medium upādiyamāna SN iii.73 Snp-a 409 & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Snp 470 Dhp 20
    2. absolutive upādāya in literally meaning “taking up” Ja i.30 Mil 184 Mil 338 Mil 341 for specialised meaning & use as prep ‣See separately as also; upādā and upādiyitvā Vv-a 209 DN-a i.109 (an˚) Dhp-a iv.194 (an˚).
    3. past participle upādiṇṇa (q.v.)
    4. upa + ā + ‣See ādiyati1
    Upādhi
    1. cushion Ja vi.253
    2. supplement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha “the chariot with the outfit”, explained by Commentary as the royal chariot with the golden slipper Ja vi.22
    from upa + ā + dhā
    Upādhiya
    1. being furnished with a cushion Ja vi.252 adjective
    2. from upāhi
    Upāya
    1. approach; figuratively way, means, expedient, stratagem SN iii.53f. 58 DN iii.220 (˚kosalla) Snp 321 (˚ññū) Ja i.256 Nd2 570 (for upaya) Pv-a 20 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 104 Pv-a 161; Sdhp 10 Sdhp 12. 350, 385
    • Cases
    • adverb ially; instrumental upāyena by artifice or means of a trick Pv-a 93 yena kenaci u. Pv-a 113
    • ablative upāyaso by some means, somehow Ja iii.443 Ja v.401 (= upāyena Commentary ). anupāya wrong means Ja i.256 Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for SN i.181 MN iii.25
    1. ˚kusala clever in resource Ja i.98 Nett 20 Snp-a 274
    from upa + i, cp. upaya
    Upāyatta
    neuter
    1. a means of (—˚) Vv-a 84 (paṭipajjan˚)
    abstract from upāya
    Upāyana
    neuter
    1. going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present Ja v.347 Ja vi.327 Mil 155 Mil 171 Mil 241 Sdhp 616 Sdhp 619
    from upa + i, cp. upāya
    Upāyāsa
    1. (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance unsettled condition MN i.8 MN i.144 MN i.363 MN iii.237 AN i.144 AN i.177 AN i.203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429 Snp 542 Iti 89 = AN i.147 = MN i.460 Ja ii.277 (˚bahula); iv.22 (identical) Pug 30 36 Vb 247 Nett 29 Mil 69 Vism 504 (definition) DN-a i.121
    • anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure serenity, sincerity DN iii.159 AN iii.429 Ps i.11 sq
    upa + āyāsa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upāyāsa Divy 210 Divy 314.
    Upāramati
    1. to cease, to desist Ja v.391 Ja v.498
    upa + ā + ram
    Upāraddha
    1. blamed, reprimanded, reproved. AN v.230
    past participle of upārambhati
    Upārambha
    1. -1. reproof, reproach, censure MN i.134 MN i.432 SN iii.73 SN v.73 AN i.199 AN ii.181 AN iii.175 AN iv.25 Vb 372adjective indisposed hostile Thag 1, 360f. DN-a i.21 263
    Sanskrit upārambha, upa + ālambhatc
    Upārambhati
    1. to blame, reprimand, reproach MN i.432 MN i.433 past participle upāraddha (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit upālambhate, upa + ā + labh
    Upālāpeti
    1. at Pv-a 276 read upalāpeti (q.v.)
    Upāvisi
    3rd singular aorist of upavisati (q.v.)
    Upāsaka
    1. a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109 DN i.85 DN ii.105 113; iii.134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264 MN i.29 MN i.467 490 SN v.395 SN v.410 AN i.56f.; ii.132 (˚parisā); iii.206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti) Snp 376 Snp 384 Ja i.83 Pv i.104 Vb 248 (˚sikkhā) DN-a i.234 Pv-a 36 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 207. feminine upāsikā Vin i.18 141 216; iii.39; iv.21, 79 DN iii.124 DN iii.148 DN iii.172 DN iii.264 MN i.29 467, 491 SN ii.235f. AN i.88 AN ii.132 AN v.287f. Mil 383 Pv-a 151 Pv-a 160
    2. from upa + ās, cp. upāsati
    Upāsakatta
    neuter
    1. state of being a believing layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37 SN iv,301 Vv 8421
    abstract from upāsaka
    Upāsati
    literally “to sit close by”, to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship DN ii.287 AN i.162 Ja v.339 Ja v.371 (= upagacchati Commentary ) Mil 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target).
    1. -3rd plural pres. med upāsare AN i.162 Ja iv.417 (= upāyanti Commentary ). cp. payirupāsati.
    2. past participle upāsita & upāsīna; (q.v.) ‣See also upāsaka, upāsana1
    3. upa + ās
    Upāsana1
    neuter
    1. attendance, service, honour SN i.46 (samaṇ˚) Thag 1, 239 Mil 115 cp. payir˚
    from upāsati
    Upāsana2
    neuter
    1. -1. archery Ja vi.448 usually in phrase katūpāsana skilled in archery MN i.82 SN ii.266 AN ii.48 Ja iv.211 Mhvs 24, 1
    • Mil 232 (˚ṁ sikkhitvā)
    • practice Mil 419

  • in ˚sālā gymnasium training ground Mil 352

    from upāsati
  • Upāsikā
    1. ‣See upāsaka; cp. payir˚
    Upāsita
    1. honoured, served, attended SN 1133, cp. Nd2 165 Thag 1, 179
    past participle of upāsati
    Upāsīna
    1. sitting near or close to Ja v.336
    past participle of upāsati
    Upāhata
    1. struck, afflicted, hurt Ja i.414
    upa + āhata
    Upāhanā
    feminine
    1. a shoe, sandal Vin i.185 Vin ii.118 207 (adjective sa-upāhana), 208 SN i.226 Ja iv.173 Ja iv.223 Pv ii.49 Nd2 226; Kp-a 45 Dhp-a i.381 (chatt ˚ṁ as nt? variant reading ˚nā) Pv-a 127 Pv-a 186. upāhanaṁ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals Ja iv.16 Ja vi.524 opposite omuñcati take off Vin ii.207 208 Ja iii.415 Ja iv.16
    • Note. An older form upānad˚; (for upānadh = Sanskrit upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama Ja ii.223 which is read by him as upānadûpama (variant reading upāhan-upama) ‣See Toevoegselen s.v. upānad
    with metathesis for upānahā = Sanskrit upānah feminine or upānaha
  • masculine ; but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upānaha
  • neuter Divy 6
  • Upiya
    1. undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya (—˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiṁ opiya SN i.199 = Thag 1, 119 senûpiya Ja v.96 (variant reading senopiya; Commentary sayanûpagata). In tadūpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adjective upaka from upa ‣See ta I. a, thus found at Mil 9
    absolutive of upeti
    Upekkhaka
    adjective
    1. disinterested, resigned, stoical Vin iii.4 DN i.37 DN i.183 DN iii.113 DN iii.222 DN iii.245 DN iii.269 DN iii.281 SN v.295f. 318 AN iii.169f. 279; v.30 Snp 515 Snp 855 Snp 912Iti 81 Nd1 241 330 Pug 50 59 Dhs 163 Dhs-a 172
    from upekkhā
    Upekkhati
    1. to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Snp 911 Nd1 328 Ja vi.294
    upa + īkṣ
    Upekkhanā
    feminine
    1. is commentator’s paraphrase for upekkhā (q.v.) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166 Vb 230
    abstract from upa + īkṣ
    Upekkhavant
    adjective = upekkhaka Ja v.403 Upekkha & Upekha
    Upekkhā
    Upekhā
    feminine
    1. “looking on”, hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66) disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham-asukha-vedanā “feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure" ‣See detailed discussion of term at Compendium 229–⁠232, & cp. ; Dhs trsln. 39
    • Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at Dhs-a 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505)
    • D 138 (˚sati-parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4 Dhs 165 & Dhs trsln; n. 50), 251 ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282 MN i.79 MN i.364 MN iii.219 SN iv.71 SN iv.114 sq., v.209 sq. (˚indriya) AN i.42 81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq. 300, 443; v.301, 360 Snp 67 Snp 73 Snp 972 Snp 1107 (˚satisaṁsuddha) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps i.8, 36, 60, 167 177 Pug 59 (˚sati); Nett 25, 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq. Vb 12 15 (˚indriya), 54 (identical), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra) Dhs 150 153, 165 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (definition & tenfold) 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461 Snp-a 128 Sdhp 461
    from upa + īkṣ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā ‣See Müller Pali Grammar 16
    Upeta
    1. furnished with, endowed with, possessed of Snp 402 Snp 463 Snp 700 Snp 722 Dhp 10 Dhp 280; Nd2 s.v. Thag 1, 789 Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii.712 (phal˚, variant reading preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaṁ aṭṭhangavaraṁ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaṁ yuttaṁ Pv-a 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata samupagata etc) Pv-a 7
    • Note. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit usually has samanvāgata for upeta ‣See aṭṭhanga
    past participle of upeti
    Upeti
    1. to go to (with accusative ), come to, approach, undergo, attain DN i.55 (paṭhavi-kāyaṁ an-upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180 MN i.486 (na upeti, as answer: “does not meet the question”) SN iii.93 Iti 89 Snp 209 (na sankhaṁ “cannot be reckoned as”) 749, 911 1074; 728 (dukkhaṁ), 897 Snp 404 (deve) Nd1 63 Nd2 167 Dhp 151 Dhp 306 Dhp 342 Snp 318 Ja iv.309 (maraṇaṁ upeti to die), 312 (identical), 463 (identical); v.212 (variant reading opeti, q.v.) Thag 1, 17 (gabbhaṁ); Pv ii.334 (saggaṁ upehi ṭhānaṁ); iv.352 (saraṇaṁ buddhaṁ dhammaṁ); Nett 66;
    2. future upessaṁ Snp 29 Snp 2nd singular upehisi Dhp 238 Dhp 348
    3. absolutive upecca Vv 337 SN i.209 = Nett 131 Vv-a 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā) Pv-a 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up) ‣See also upiya & uppacca.
    4. past participle ; upeta
    5. upa + i
    Upocita
    1. heaped up, abounding, comfortable Ja iv.471
    past participle of upa + ava + ci
    Uposatha
    1. . At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon’s waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre-Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101 The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half-month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102 They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day ‣See Sīla The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half-month (pakkha), so the twenty-third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi-uposatho, “reconciliation-Up.”, which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the genitive confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123 Mah. 42)
    • Vin i.111 112, 175, 177; ii.5, 32, 204, 276; iii.164, 169 DN iii.60 DN iii.61 DN iii.145 DN iii.147 AN i.205f. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚ nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga-samannāgata), 258 sq. (identical), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83 Snp 153 (pannaraso u) Vb 422 Vism 227 (˚sutta = AN i.206f.); Sdhp 439 DN-a i.139 Snp-a 199 Vv-a 71 109 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 201
    • The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaṁ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraṁ (Vin i.107 Dhp-a ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102 Vin v.142 Ja i.232 Ja iii.342 Ja iii.444 Dhp-a i.205) uposathaṁ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107 175, 177 Ja i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen is called uposathaṁ upavasati (AN i.142 AN i.144 AN i.205 AN i.208 iv.248 ‣See upavasati), or uposathavāsaṁ vasati (J v.177) The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaṁ samādiyati ‣See sīlaṁ & samādiyati; uposatha-sīla observance of the Up. (Vv-a 71) The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha-divasa (J iii.52)
    Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation
    Uposathika
    adjective
    1. -1. belonging to the Uposatha in phrase anuposathikaṁ (adverb ) on every U., i.e. every fortnight Vin iv.315
    2. observing the Sabbath fasting (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uposadhika Mvu ii.9) Vin i.58 Vin iv.75 78 Ja iii.52 Vism 66 (bhatta) Dhp-a i.205
    from uposatha
    Uposathin
    adjective
    1. = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6
    from upusatha
    Uppakitaka
    1. indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakkitaka (q.v.)
    Uppakka
    adjective
    1. -1. “boiled out”, scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiṁ uppakkaṁ okiliniṁ okiriniṁ Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260 explained by Buddhaghosa Vin iii.273 as “kharena agginā pakkasarīra"
    • “boiled up”, swollen (of eyes through crying) Ja vi.10
    • from ud + pac, cp. Sanskrit pakva & ‣See also uppaccati
    Uppacca
    1. flying up Thag 2, 248 ‣See under upacca) SN i.209 (Burmese variant upecca, Commentary uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) = Dhp-a iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca)
    absolutive of uppatati
    Uppaccati
    1. in ppr. uppacciyamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by Burmese variant uppajj˚) “being boiled out”, i.e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) Ja iv.327 Not with Morris JP T S. 1887, 129 “being tormented”, nor with Kern, Toevoegselen under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) “dicht opgesloten”, a meaning foreign to this root
    ud + paccati, passive of pac
    Uppajjati
    1. to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence DN i.180 Snp 584 Pv ii.111 (= nibbattati Pv-a 71) Pv-a 8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati) DN-a i.165 passive uppajjiyati Vin i.50

      • ppr. uppajjanto Pv-a 5 Pv-a 21;
      • future ˚pajjissati Pv-a 5 (bhummadevesu, corresponding with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye);
      • aorist uppajji Pv-a 21 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 66; & udapādi (q.v.) Vin iii.4 Ja i.81
      • absolutive ˚pajjitvā DN ii.157 = SN i.6 SN i.158 = ii.193 = Ja i.392 = Thag 1, 1159 & uppajja Ja iv.24
      • causative uppādeti (q.v.)
      • past participle uppanna (q.v.) ‣See also upapajjati and upapanna
      ud + pajjati of pad
    Uppajjana
    adjective neuter
    1. coming into existence; birth, rebirth Pv-a 9 (˚vasena), 33 (identical)
    from uppajjati
    Uppajjanaka
    adjective
    1. (belonging to) coming into existence, i.e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove Ja iii.150
    from uppajjana
    Uppajjitar
    1. one who produces or is reborn in (with accusative ) DN i.143 (saggaṁ etc.)
    2. agent noun from uppajjati
    Uppaṭipāṭiyā
    1. literally “out of reach”, i.e. in a distance Ja i.89 or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As technical term g. “with reference to the preceding”, supra Vism 272 Snp-a 124 128 Dhs-a 135 (Text ˚paṭipāṭika)
    ablative of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi
    Uppaṇḍanā
    feminine
    1. ridiculing, mocking Mil 357 Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā)
    abstract from ut + paṇd or unknown etymology
    Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta
    adjective

    “having become very pale” (?), or “somewhat pale” (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, AN 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani-santhata-gatto Vin i.276 iii.19, 110 MN ii.121 distorted to Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334.

  • kiso upp˚. Ja vi.71 Dhp-a iv.66
  • upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ Ja i.346 Ja ii.92 v.95 Dhp-a i.367 Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, variant reading uppaṇḍ˚

    • Burmese manuscripts ), explained at Pv-a 72 “upakaṇḍakajāta”, variant readings uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚
    reduplicated intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka upa in meaning of “somewhat like”, cp. upanīla upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is explained at Pv-a 72 by upakaṇḍaka-jāta “shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)". The trsln. is thus doubtful; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is the Pali form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334 Divy 463, and trsld. “very pale”
  • Uppaṇḍeti
    1. to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216 272, 293; iv.278 AN iii.91 = Pug 67 (ūhasati ullapati +) Ja v.288 300 Dhp-a ii.29 Dhp-a iii.41 Pv-a 175 (avamaññati +). Note. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the Pali uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (variant readings at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati)
    ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin
    Uppatati

    to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. preterite udapatta Sanskrit *udapaptat

    1. Ja iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); absolutive uppatitvā Ja iii.484 Ja iv.213 Pv-a 103 Pv-a 215; and uppacca (q.v.)
    2. past participle uppatita (q.v.)
    3. ud + patati
    Uppatita
    1. jumped up, arisen, come about Snp 1 (= uddhamukhaṁ patitaṁ gataṁ Snp-a 4), 591 Dhp 222 (= uppanna Dhp-a iii.301) Thag 1, 371
    past participle of uppatati
    Uppatti
    feminine
    1. coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion AN ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni) Vb 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 feminine (khaṇa) Mil 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.) Snp-a 46 159, 241, 254, 312, 445 Pv-a 144 Pv-a 215. On uppatti deva ‣See deva and upapatti ‣See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti
    2. Vedic utpatti, ud + pad
    Uppatha
    1. a wrong road or course DN i.10 (˚gamana, of planets) SN i.38 SN i.43 Ja v.453 Ja vi.235 Dhp-a iii.356 (˚cāra)
    Sanskrit utpatha, ud + patha
    Uppanna
    1. born, reborn, arisen, produced, DN i.192 (lokaṁ u. born into the world) Vin iii.4 Snp 55 ˚ñāṇa ‣See Nd2 168), 998 Ja i.99 Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaṁ) Dhs 1035 1416 Vb 12 17, 50, 319; 327 Dhp-a iii.301 Pv-a 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155
    • anuppanna not arisen MN ii.11 not of good class DN i.97 ‣See DN-a i.267
    past participle of uppajjati
    Uppabbajati
    1. to leave the Order Dhp-a i.68 Pv-a 55 past participle ˚pabbajita.
    2. causative uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order Ja iv.219 Dhp-a iv.195

      • Caus II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order Ja iv.304
      ud + pabbajati
    Uppabbajjita
    1. one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex-bhikkhu Vv-a 319 Dhp-a i.311
    ud + pabbajita
    Uppala
    1. the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at Ja v.37 are: nīla-ratta-set-uppala, ratta-seta-paduma, seta-kumuda kalla-hāra
    • DN i.75 DN ii.19 Vin iii.33 (˚gandha) Ja ii.443 Dhp 55 Vv 322 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105 Dhp-a i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (identical) Thag-a 254 255 Vv-a 132 161. What is meant by uppala-patta (lotus-leaf?) at Vin iv.261?
    Sanskrit utpala, uncertain etymology
    Uppalaka
    1. “lotus-like”, name of a hell (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utpala at Divy 67 etc.). AN v.173 ‣See also puṇḍarika
    uppala + ka
    Uppalin
    adjective-noun
    1. having lotuses rich in l., only in feminine uppalinī a lotus-pond DN i.75 DN ii.38 SN i.138 AN iii.26 Vv 322 DN-a i.219
    2. from uppala
    Uppaḷāseti
    1. to sound out or forth, to make sound Mil 21 (dhamma-sankhaṁ). Reading at DN ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning
    ud + pra + las, cp. Sanskrit samullāsayati in same meaning
    Uppāṭaka
    1. an insect, vermin SN i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno “a siesta-couch covered by vermin swarm” trsld. p. 215 & note)
    from ud + paṭ; in meaning of “biting, stinging”
    Uppāṭana
    neuter
    1. pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning Ja i.454 Ja ii.283 Ja vi.238 Mil 166 Pv-a 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). cp. sam˚
    from ud + paṭ
    Uppāṭanaka
    adjective
    1. pulling up, tearing out, uprooting Ja i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (identical)
    from uppāṭana
    Uppāṭeti
    1. to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviṁ to skin) MN ii.110 (attānaṁ); Thag 2 396 (absolutive uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā Thag-a 259) Ja i.281 (bījāni) iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati) Mil 86 Dhp-a iii.206
    2. causative uppāṭāpeti in
    3. past participle uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off Dhp-a iii.208 ‣See also upphāleti
    4. Sanskrit utpāṭayati, causative uf ud + paṭ; to split, cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Avs i.294
    Uppāda1
    1. flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen DN i.9 (variant reading uppāta) Vism 30 (Text uppāta, variant reading uppāda) Snp 360 Ja i.374 Ja vi.475 Mil 178
    Sanskrit utpāta, ud + pat
    Uppāda2
    1. coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185 DN i.185 SN iii.39 (+ vaya) iv.14; v.30 AN i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚) iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (identical) Dhp 182 Dhp 194 Ja i.59 Ja i.107 (sat˚) Vb 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚) Pv-a 10 Thag-a 282
    • anuppāda either “not coming into existence” DN iii.270 MN i.60 AN i.286 AN i.296 AN ii.214 AN ii.249 iii.84 sq.; Ps i.59, 66 Dhs 1367 or “not ripe” DN i.12
    Sanskrit utpāda, ud + pad
    Uppādaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. producing, generating Pv-a 13 (dukkh˚). feminine ˚ikā Dhp-a iv.109 (jhān’)
    2. from uppāda2
    Uppādana
    neuter
    1. making, generating, causing Pv-a 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114
    from uppada2
    Uppādin
    adjective
    1. having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037 1416 Vb 17 50, 74, 92 and passim Dhs-a 45
    from uppāda2
    Uppādetar
    1. one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer MN i.79 SN i.191 SN iii.66 SN v.351 Mil 217
    agent noun from uppādeti
    Uppādeti
    1. -1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make DN i.135 M. i.162, 185 Pug 25 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 59; Sdhp 539
    • cittaṁ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with
    • locative Ja i.81 Mil 85 Dhp-a ii.89 Pv-a 3
    • to get, obtain find Ja iv.2 Mil 140 Dhp-a i.90 Pv-a 121

  • in lohitaṁ u. to draw (blood) Mil 214

    causative of uppajjati, ud + pad
  • Uppilavati
    (& Uplavati)
    1. -1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float SN iv.313 (uplava imperative ) Mil 80 Mil 379 Vv-a 47 (uplavitvā, variant reading uppalavitvā) DN-a i.256 (variant reading upari lavati)
    2. to jump up frisk about, to be elated or buoyant Ja ii.97 (cp. Morris JP T S. 1887, 139) Mil 370
    3. ‣ See also upaplavati uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc
    Sanskrit utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Avs i.209
    Uppīḷa
    adjective
    1. oppressing or oppressed: an˚; free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed DN i.135 (opp sa-uppīḷa; Text upapīḷa but variant reading upp˚) Ja iii.443 Ja v.378 Pv-a 161
    ud + pīḍ
    Uppīḷita
    1. pressed Ja vi.3
    past participle of uppīḷeti
    Uppīḷeti
    1. -1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight to (with accusative ), to cover up or close MN i.539 (piṭṭhi-pāṇiṁ hanukena) Ja i.483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaṁ); v.293 (aggalaṁ) Thag-a 188
    2. to stampede Vv-a 83 (paṭhaviṁ)
    ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti
    Uppoṭheti
    1. to beat Pv-a 4
    ud + poṭheti
    Upplavana
    1. at Dhp-a i.309 remains to be explained, Text faulty
    Upphāleti
    1. to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara-cchaviṁ upphāletvā; variant reading uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable)
    causative of ud + phal
    Upphāsulika
    adjective
    1. “with ribs out”, i.e. with ribs showing emaciated, thin, “skinny” Pv ii.11 (= uggata-phāsuka Pv-a 68); iv.101 (manuscripts uppā˚) Thag-a 133 (spelt uppā˚)
    ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phāsuka a rib
    Uplāpeti
    1. to immerse MN i.135 (variant readings upal˚ & opil˚) Ja iv.162 (figuratively put into the shade, overpower; variant reading upal˚) ‣See also opilāpeti ubbillāvita;
    Sanskrit avaplāvayati, causative of ava + plu, with substitution of ud for ava ‣See also uppilavati
    Ubbaṭuma
    adjective
    1. going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase; ubbaṭumaṁ rathaṁ karoti to put a cart out of its direction AN iv.191 AN iv.193
    ud + *vṛti (of vṛt + ma (for mā → mant); cp. Sanskrit udvṛtta & vṛtimant
    Ubbaṭṭeti
    1. to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo Ja i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (identical); v.89, 438
    causative of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udvartayati Divy 12 Divy 36
    Ubbaṭṭhaka
    1. misprint in Pug Index as well as at Pug AN 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q.v.)
    Ubbattati
    1. to go upwards, to rise, swell Ja vi.486 (sāgaro ubbatti) ‣See also next
    ud + vṛt
    Ubbatteti
    1. -1. to tear out Ja i.199 Mil 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante) Dhp-a i.5 (hadayamaṁsaṁ) 75 (rukkhaṁ)
    • to cause to swell or rise Ja iii.361 (Gangāsotaṁ); iv.161 (samuddaṁ)

    • intranstitive to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; variant reading uppaṭṭati) Dhp-a iii.155
    causative of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma
  • Ubbadhati
    1. to kill, destroy Snp 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti Snp-a 18)
    ud + vadhati
    Ubbandhati
    1. to hang up, strangle Vin iii.73 (rajjuyā) Ja i.504 (identical); iii.345 Thag 2, 80 Vism 501 Vv-a 139 207 (ubbandhitu-kāmā in the intention of hanging herself)
    ud + bandhati
    Ubbarī
    feminine
    1. fertile soil, sown field; figuratively woman, wife Ja vi.473 (= orodha Commentary )
    Sanskrit urvarā, Avestan urvara plant
    Ubbasati
    1. ‣See ubbisati
    Ubbaha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. only in compound dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Thag 1 124, 495 = 1053
    from ud + vṛh, i.e. to ubbahati1
    Ubbahati1
    1. to pull out, take away, destroy Snp 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya Snp-a 460) Thag 1, 158 Ja ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya Commentary ); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya Commentary )
    ud + bṛh or vṛh ‣See also uddharati
    Ubbahati2
    1. to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in causative II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii.180 = AN i.241

      • Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. cp. also pavāḷha
      ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubbahati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati
    Ubbāḷha
    1. oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed vexed Vin i.148 353; ii.119; iv.308 Ja i.300 Vism 182 (kuṇapa-gandhena) Dhp-a i.343
    adjective past participle of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh
    Ubbāsīyati
    1. “to be dis-inhabited”, i.e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mhvs 6, 22 (= chaḍḍīyati Commentary )
    • cp. ubbisati
    passive of ubbāseti, ud + vas
    Ubbāhana
    neuter
    1. carrying, lifting, in ˚samattha fit for carrying, i.e. a beast of burden, of an elephant Ja vi.448
    from ubbahati2
    Ubbāhikā
    feminine
    1. a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instrumental ubbāhikāya “by means of a referendum”, the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq. Vin ii.95 97, 305; v.139, 197 AN v.71 Mhvs 4, 46
    originally feminine of ubbāhika, adjective from ubbāheti in abstract use
    Ubbāheti
    1. to oppress vex, hinder, incommodate Ja v.417f.
    hardly to be decided whether from ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati.2
    Ubbigga
    1. agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184 SN i.53 Thag 1, 408 Ja i.486 Ja iii.313 Mil 23 Mil 236 Mil 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚) Dhp-a ii.27 Thag-a 267 Sdhp 8 Sdhp 77
    Sanskrit udvigna, past participle of ud + vij
    Ubbijjati
    1. to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (identical) SN i.228 (aorist ubbijji) Mil 149 (tasati +), 286 (+ saṁviji) Vism 58.
    2. causative ubbejeti (q.v.)
    3. past participle ubbigga (q.v.)
    4. passive of ud + vij
    Ubbijjanā
    feminine
    1. agitation, uneasiness DN-a i.111 cp. ubbega
    abstract from ubbijjati
    Ubbinaya
    adjective
    1. being outside the Vinaya, ex-or un-Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307 Dīpavaṁsa v.19
    ud + vinaya
    Ubbilāpa
    1. (variant reading uppilāva, which is probably the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37 ‣See next
    Ubbilāvita
    1. (according to the very plausible explanation given by Morris JP T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, past participle of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti d. under uppilavati ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sanskrit ālīyate → Pali allīyati, ālāpa → allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sanskrit vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt frisky; only in compounds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind DN i.3 DN i.37 Ja iii.466 Mil 183 DN-a i.53 122; and ˚ākāra identical Dhp-a i.237 At Vism 158 “cetaso ubbilāvitaṁ stands for ubbilāvitattaṁ, with Burmese variant uppilāvitaṁ. cp. J v.114 (ubbilāvita-cittatā)
    Ubbilla
    1. elation, elated state of mind MN iii.159
    • ˚bhāva identical DN-a i.122 Sdhp 167 ‣See next
    either a secondary formation from ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu as discussed under ubbilāvita. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit word udvilya Lal. v.351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sanskrit dvādaśa → dialectical Pali bārasa, whereas the original Sanskrit dv is in regular Pali represented by dd, as in dvīpa → dīpa *udvāpa → uddāpa. Müller’s construction ubbilla → *udvela rests on the same grounds ‣See Pali Grammar 12.
    Ubbisati
    1. “to be out home”, to live away from home Ja ii.76
    • ‣ See also ubbāsīyati.
    • past participle ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid
    better reading variant reading ubbasati, ud + vas
    Ubbūḷhavant
    1. ‣See uruḷhavant
    Ubbega
    1. excitement, fright, anguish DN iii.148 later, also transport, rapture, in cpd (˚pīti); Vism 143 Dhs-a 124 PugA 226
    Sanskrit udvega, from ud + vij
    Ubbegin
    adjective
    1. full of anguish or fear Ja iii.313 (= ubbegavant Commentary )
    from ubbega
    Ubbejanīya
    adjective
    1. agitating, causing anxiety Ja i.323 Ja i.504
    from ubbejeti
    Ubbejitar
    Ubbejetar;
    1. a terrifier, a terror to AN ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (identical) Pug 47 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaṁ karotī ti PugA 226)
    agent noun from ubbejeti
    Ubbejeti
    1. to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Mil 388 (˚jayitabba gerundive ); PugA 226
    2. causative of ud + vij
    Ubbeṭhana
    neuter
    1. an envelope, wrap Ja vi.508
    from ud + veṣṭ
    Ubbedha
    1. height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width Ja i.29 (v.219; asīti-hatth˚), 203 (yojana-sahass˚) Vv-a 33 (yojana˚) 66 (asīti-hatth˚), 158 (hattha-sat˚), 188 (soḷasa-yojan˚), 221 339 Pv-a 113 ‣See also pabbedha
    ud + vedha of vyadh
    Ubbedhati
    1. to be moved, to shake intranstitive, quiver, quake Ja vi.437 (= kampati Commentary )
    2. ud + vedhati = Sanskrit vyathate
    Ubbhaṁ
    1. (& Ubbha˚) indeclinable

      1. up, over, above, on top Ja v.269 (ubbhaṁ yojanaṁ uggata); in compounds. like ubbhakkhakaṁ above the collar bone Vin iv.213
      • ubbhajānumaṇḍalaṁ above the knee Vin iv.213
      • ubbhamukha upwards SN iii.238 Mil 122
      a doublet of uddhaṁ ‣See uddhaṁ iii.
    Ubbhaṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. standing erect or upright DN i.167 MN i.78 MN i.92 MN i.282 MN i.308 MN i.343 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Pug 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaṁ ṭhitaka PugA 233)
    ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, probably contracted from ubbhaṭṭhitaka
    Ubbhaṇḍita
    1. bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287
    past participle of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa
    Ubbhata
    1. [ past participle of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaṁ for uddhaṁ; cp. ubbahati and ‣See also the doublet uddhaṭa drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra) iii.196 (identical) DN i.77 (cp uddharati) MN i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi) Dhp 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.) Ja i.268 Pv-a 163

    Ubbhava
    1. birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚ 492 (identical)
    ud + bhava
    Ubbhāra
    1. = uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255 300; v.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157
    Ubbhijjati
    1. to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout DN i.74 = MN iii.93 = iii.26 Ja i.18 (v.104) Dhp 339 (absolutive ubbhijja uppajitvā Dhp-a iv.49) DN-a i.218
    2. past participle ubbhinna
    3. ud + bhid
    Ubbhida1
    neuter
    1. kitchen salt Vin i.202 cp. Vin Texts ii.48
    Sanskrit udbhida
    Ubbhida2
    adjective
    1. breaking or bursting forth, in compound ˚odaka “whose waters well up”, or “spring water DN i.74 MN i.276 DN-a i.218
    from ud + bhid
    Ubbhinna
    1. springing up, welling up Dhp i.218
    past participle of ubbhijjati
    Ubbhujati
    1. to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), absolutive ˚itvā in meaning of “forcibly” Vin ii.222 Vin iii.40
    ud + bhuj
    *Ubha
    1. ‣See ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya
    Ubhato
    adverb
    1. both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides usually ˚-, as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways DN ii.71 Dialogues of the Buddha ii.70, n. 1 MN i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha) SN i.191 AN i.73 AN iv.10 AN iv.77 Png 14 73; Nett 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89 136, 168 iii.28; v.222; ˚saṅgha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ bhikkhunī Vin ii.255 Vin iv.52 242, 287; Mhvs 3234 ‣See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye) DN i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DN-a i.87) MN i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho SN iv.323 (identical)
    ablative of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho
    Ubhaya
    adjective
    1. both, twofold Snp 547 Snp 628 Snp 712 Snp 1106 Snp 1107 Snp 801 (˚ante) Nd1 109 (˚ante) Ja i.52 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 24 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 51
    • nt. ˚ṁ as
    • adverb in combination with ca c'ûbhayaṁ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) “and both” for both-and; and also, alike, as well Dhp 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c'ûbhayaṁ with householders and houseless alike) Pv i.69
    • Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as
    • feminine plural of ubho (= duve Pv-a 86)
    1. ˚aṁsa literally both shoulders or both parts, i.e. completely thoroughly, all round (˚-) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained DN i.154 (cp. DN-a i.312 ubhaya-koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito)
    *ubha + ya ‣See ubho
    Ubhayattha
    1. in both places, in both cases Vin i.107 AN iii.64 Dhp 15–⁠17 Dhp-a i.29 (˚ettha), 30 Pv-a 130
    adverb ) [ Sanskrit ubhayatra, from ubhaya
    Ubho

    (udj.)

    1. both; nominative accusative ubho SN i.87 AN iii.48 = Iti 16 Iti 43 = Snp 661 = Dhp 306 Snp 220 Snp 543 Snp 597Dhp 74 Dhp 256 Dhp 269; 412 Nd1 109 Pv i.76 Ja i.223 Ja ii.3 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 82 (tā ubho)

      • ubhantaṁ both ends, both sides Snp 1042 ‣See Nd2 169; Snp-a 588 explains by ubho ante
      • genitive ubhinnaṁ SN i.162 SN ii.222 Ja ii.3 instrumental ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256 Ja iv.142
      • locative ubhosu Snp 778 (antesu) Ja i.264 (passesu Pv-a 94 (hatthesu). Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nominative
      • feminine (= duve Pv-a 86)
      Sanskrit ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Latin ambo, Lithuanian abū, Gothic bai Old High German beide = English both. To preposition adverb *amb, *ambi ‣See abhi & cp. also vīsati
    Ummagga
    1. -1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main MN i.171 AN ii.189 Ja vi.426 Ja vi.432 Snp-a 50 (“ummaggo paññā pavuccati”) Dhp-a i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104 Pv-a 44 (read with variant reading SS kummagga)
    • a side track, a wrong way, devious way SN i.193 (variant reading ˚manga) = Thag 1 1242 SN iv.195 AN iv.191
    • ud + magga, literally “off-track”
    Ummaṅga
    1. “out luck”, i.e. unlucky; or “one who has gone off the right path” Vin v.144
    ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q.v. for variant readings
    Ummatta
    adjective
    1. out of one’s mind, mad SN v.447 (+ viceta) Ja v.386 Mil 122 Sdhp 88 Pv-a 40 (˚puggala read with variant reading SS for dummati puggala). cp. next & ummāda
    1. ˚rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81 ii.62 (where Ja iii.156 has santaramāna)
    ud + matta of mad
    Ummattaka
    adjective = ummatta Vin i.123 321; ii.60, 80; iii.27, 33 AN iv.248 Vism 260 (reason for) Mil 277 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95.
    • feminine ummattikā Vin iv.259 265 Thag-a 111

    Ummaddeti
    1. to rub something on (accusative ) Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaṁ)
    2. ud + maddeti, causative of mṛd
    Ummasati
    1. to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121 cp. next
    ud + masati of mṛś.
    Ummasanā
    feminine
    1. lifting up Vin iii.121 (= uddhaṁ uccāraṇā)
    abstract from ummasati
    Ummā
    feminine
    1. flax, only in compound ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax MN ii.13 =. AN v.61 (variant reading dammā˚ ummāta˚) DN ii.260 Thag 1, 1068 Dhs-a 13 Also name of a gem Mil 118
    cp. Sanskrit umā
    Ummāda
    1. madness, distraction, mental aberration SN i.126 (˚ṁ pāpuṇeyya citta-vikkhepaṁ vā) AN ii.80 iii.119; v.169 Pug 69 Pv-a 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta)
    ud + māda
    Ummādanā
    feminine or ˚aṁ
    • neuter

      1. maddening Snp 399 (+ mohanaṁ = paraloke ummādanaṁ ihaloke mohanaṁ Snp-a 377) Thag-a 2 357 (cp. Thag-a 243)
      abstract from ummāda
    Ummāra
    1. - 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla) Thag 2, 410 Ja i.62 Ja iii.101 Vism 425 Dhp-a i.350
    • a curb-stone Ja vi.11

  • as uttar˚; (the upper threshold) the lintel Ja i.111 Dhp-a ii.5 (variant reading upari˚).

    • window-sash or sill Ja i.347 Ja iv.356
    • according to Müller Pali Grammar = Sanskrit udumbara (?)
  • Ummi
    1. (& Ummī) feminine

      1. a wave Thag 1, 681 Mil 346
      for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi → bhūmi
    Ummisati
    1. to open one’s eyes Ja iii.96 (opposite nimisati; variant reading ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?)
    ud + misati
    Ummihati
    1. to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati +)
    ud + mih
    Ummīleti
    1. to open one’s eyes Ja i.439 Ja ii.195 Ja iv.457 Ja vi.185 Mil 179 Mil 357 Mil 394 Vism 185, 186 Dhp-a ii.28 (opposite ni˚) Vv-a 205 314
    causative of ud + mīl; opposite ni(m)mīleti
    Ummuka
    neuter
    1. a fire brand Vin iv.265 SN iv.92 (Text ummukka meaning “loosened"?) Ja ii.69 variant reading ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356
    Sanskrit ulmuka perhaps to Latin adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. s.v. adoleo
    Ummujjati
    1. to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180 SN iv.312 AN iv.11 sq Ja ii.149 Ja ii.284 Ja iii.507 iv.139 Pug 71 Mil 118 DN-a i.37 127 Pv-a 113
    ud + majj
    Ummujjana
    neuter
    1. emerging Vism 175 (+ nimmujjana) DN-a i.115
    from ummujjati
    Ummujjamānaka
    adjective
    1. emerging AN ii.182
    ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of ummujjati, + ka
    Ummujjā
    feminine
    1. emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja-nimujjaṁ karoti to emerge & dive DN i.78 MN i.69 AN i.170 Ja iv.139 Nett 110; Vism 395 (= Ps ii.208)
    from ummujjati
    Ummūla
    adjective
    1. “roots-out”, with roots showing, laying bare the roots Ja i.249 (˚ṁ karoti); Sdhp 452
    ud + mūla
    Ummūlaka
    adjective
    1. uprooting, laying bare the roots Ja i.303 (vāta)
    = ummūla
    Ummūleti
    1. to uproot, to root out Ja i.329
    causative from ummūla
    Umhayati
    1. to laugh out loud Ja ii.131 (= hasitaṁ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna hasamāna Commentary ). causative umhāpeti Ja v.297
    2. Sanskrit *ut-smayate, ud + smi
    Uyyassu
    1. (imperative 3rd. singular) is Burmese variant and Commentary reading at Ja vi.145 Ja vi.146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of to go.

    Uyyāti
    1. to go out, to go away Ja ii.3 Ja ii.4 (imperative uyyāhi); iv.101.
    2. causative uyyāpeti to cause to go away to bring or take out SN iv.312
    3. ud +
    Uyyāna
    neuter
    1. a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden Ja i.120 Ja i.149 Ja ii.104 iv.213 v.95; vi.333 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76 Vv-a 7 Sdhp 7
    1. ˚kīḷā amusement in the park, sports Dhp-a i.220 Dhp-a iv.3
    • ˚pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper Ja ii.105 Ja ii.191 Ja iv.264
    • bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground Ja i.58 Vv 6419 Pv ii.129 DN-a i.235
    Sanskrit udyāna, from ud +
    Uyyānavant
    adjective
    1. full of pleasure gardens Pv iii.36
    from uyyāna
    Uyyāma
    1. exertion effort, endeavour Dhs 13 22, 289, 571 Dhs-a 146
    Sanskrit udyama, ud + yam; Pali uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma → niyama; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udyama Jtm 210
    Uyyuñjati
    1. to go away, depart, leave one’s house Dhp 91 (cp. Dhp-a ii.170). past participle uyyutta

      • Caus uyyojeti (q.v.)
      ud + yuj
    Uyyuta
    adjective
    1. striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Snp 247 Snp 248 Ja v.95
    ud + yuta
    Uyyutta
    1. striving, active, zealous, energetic Ja i.232
    past participle of uyyuñjati
    Uyyoga
    1. departure, approach of death Dhp 236 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335)
    from ud + yuj
    Uyyojana
    neuter
    1. inciting, instigation AN iv.233
    from uyyojeti
    Uyyojita
    1. instigated Mil 228 Pv-a 105
    past participle of uyyojeti
    Uyyojeti
    1. -1. to instigate Vin iv.235 Ja iii.265
    • to dismiss, take leave of (
    • accusative ), send off let go Vin i.179 AN iii.75 Ja i.119 (bhikkhu-sanghaṁ) 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91 Dhp-a i.14 15, 398 ii.44 Vv-a 179 Pv-a 93
    • past participle uyyojita (q.v.)
    • causative of uyyuñjati
    Uyyodhika
    neuter
    1. a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107 DN i.6 AN v.65 DN-a i.85
    from ud + yudh
    Ura
    masculine neuter & Uro
    • neuter

      1. -1. the breast, chest
      • Cases after the
      • neuter s
      • declension are instrumental urasā Thag 1, 27 Snp 609 &
      • locative ; urasi Snp 255 Ja iii.148 Ja iv.118 also urasiṁ Ja iii.386 (= urasmiṁ Commentary ). Other cases of
      • neuter a-stem, e.g. instrumental urena Ja iii.90 Pv-a 75 loc ure DN i.135 Ja i.156 Ja i.433 Ja i.447 Pv-a 62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa)
      • Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129 Ja iv.3 Ja v.159 Ja v.202 Nd2 659; Pv iv.108 Dhp-a iii.175 DN-a i.254 Dhs-a 321 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 66
      • uraṁ deti (with
      • locative ) to put oneself on to something with one’s chest figuratively to apply oneself to Ja i.367 Ja i.401 Ja i.408 Ja iii.139 Ja iii.455 iv.219; v.118, 278
      • applied the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla Vv-a 269)
      1. ˚ga going on the chest, creeping, i.e. a snake SN i.69 Snp 1 Snp 604 Ja i.7 Ja iv.330 Ja vi.208 Vv 808 Pv i.121 (urena gacchati ti urago sappass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ Pv-a 63) Pv-a 61 Pv-a 67
      2. ˚cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya Ja i.363 Ja i.414
      • ˚cchada “breast cover”, breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10 Ja iv.3 Ja v.215 Ja v.409 Ja vi.480 Thag-a 253
      • ˚ttāḷi beating one’s breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) MN i.86 136 AN ii.188 AN iii.54 AN iii.416 AN iv.293 Pv-a 39
      • ˚tthala the breast AN ii.174
      Sanskrit uras
    Urabbha
    1. a ram DN i.127 AN i.251f. ii.207; iv.41 sq. Ja v.241 Pug 56 DN-a i.294 Dhp-a ii.6 ‣See also orabbhika
    Sanskrit urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Latin vervex Anglo-Saxon waru = English ware (originally sheepskins) = German ware Here also belongs Pali urāṇī
    Urāṇī
    feminine
    1. an ewe Ja v.241 (= urāṇikā Commentary ); variant reading uraṇī & uraṇikā
    or uraṇī?, feminine of uraṇa ‣See urabbha
    Uru
    adjective [cp. Avestan ravah space; Latin rūs free or wide space, field; Indogermanic *ru, *uer wide, to which also Gothic rūms space = Anglo-Saxon rūm, English room, German raum wide, large; excellent, eminent Ja v.89 Mil 354 Sdhp 345 Sdhp 592
    • plural urū sands, soil Ja v.303
    Urundā
    feminine
    1. freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief DN ii.269 (variant reading uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura uddharana lifting or raising the chest)
    ura + undā?
    Urūḷhava
    adjective
    1. large, bulky, immense; great big, strong. Only in one stock phrase “nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo” Vv 209 439 Ja vi.488 of which variant noun ī ubbuḷhavā MN i.414 = 450. The word is explained at Ja vi.488 by “ubbāhana-samattha”; at Vv-a 104 (
    2. plural urṳ̄ḷhavā) by “thāmajava-parakkamehi byūhanto (variant reading brahmanto) mahantaṁ yuddha-kiccaṁ vahituṁ samatthā ti attho". The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha
    3. doubtful, probably for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a past participle formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as ud-ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is explained ‣See Kern, s.v. as
    4. past participle of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, past participle of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus “overgrown”
    Ulati
    1. is a commentator’s invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paṁsu-kūla; paṁsu viya kucchita-bhāvaṁ ulatī ti paṁsu-kūlaṁ)
    Ulūka
    an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl’s skin); iii.34 AN v.289f. Ja ii.208 Ja ii.352 (as king of the birds) Mil 403 Dhp-a i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls).
    1. ˚pakkha owls’ wings (used as dress) Vin i.305 DN i.167
    • ˚pakkhika dress of owls’ wings, or owl feathers AN i.241 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Pug 55 (= ulūka-pattāni ganthetvā kata-nivāsanaṁ Pug AN 233)
    Sanskrit ulūka; cp. Latin ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, German uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Sanskrit ululi, Lithuanian ulůti
    Ullaṅghati
    1. to leap up Ja iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā). causative ullaṅgheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i.e. to make dance up & down Vin iii.121 Ja v.434 Dhp-a iv.197
    2. past participle ullaṅghita (q v.)
    3. ud + laṅgh, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prollanghya transgressing (= pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596
    Ullaṅghanā
    feminine
    1. jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121 Ja iv.5 (˚samattha?)
    abstract from ud + laṅgh
    Ullaṅghita
    1. being jumped on, set on Commentary on SN i.40 ‣See Kindred Sayings i.318 (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita)
    past participle of ullangheti
    Ullapati
    1. to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97 Vin iii.105 Pug 67 (= katheti Pug AN 249)
    ud + lapati
    Ullapana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101 Thag 2, 357 Mil 127 Thag-a 243
      • ullapanā = uddhaṁ katvā lapanā Vism 27
      from ullapati
    Ullahaka
    adjective
    1. only in accusative neuter ullahakaṁ used
    2. adverb ially, in compound dant˚; after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth MN iii.167 seems to be a
    3. ?
    Ullāpa
    1. is variant reading for uklāpa (q.v.)
    Ullikhana
    neuter
    1. combing, scratching Vv-a 349 Thag-a 267
    from ud + likh
    Ullikhita
    1. scratched, combed Vin i.254 Ja ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi) Ud 22 (identical with upaḍḍh for aḍḍh˚) Vv-a 197
    past participle of ud + likh
    Ulliṅgeti
    1. to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492
    denominative of ud + linga
    Ullitta
    1. smeared; only in combinationullittāvalitta smeared up & down, i.e. smeared all round Vin ii.117 MN ii.8 AN i.101 AN i.137 AN iv.231 Thag 1, 737
    past participle of ud + lip
    Ullumpati
    1. to take up, to help (with accusative ), to save Vin ii.277 DN i.249
    2. ud + lup, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ullumpati Mahāvy § 268
    Ullumpana
    neuter
    1. saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva-saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DN-a i.177 Pv-a 35 Same as ullopana (q.v.)
    from ullumpati
    Ullulita
    1. waved, shaken (by the wind); waving Ja vi.536
    past participle of ulloleti
    Ulloka
    1. doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaṁ ohāreti, translation Vin Texts by “a cloth to remove cobwebs”, but better by Andersen Pāli Reader as “as soon as it is seen”; at Vin ii.151 the translators give “a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out" ‣See on term Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 31
    • In cpd ulloka-paduma at Ja vi.432 it may mean “bright lotus” (literally to be looked at) ‣See ulloketi
    ud + lok˚
    Ullokaka
    adjective
    1. looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚; looking into a person’s face; i.e. cheerful winning; or “of bright face”, with a winning smile DN i.60 DN-a i.59 168 Pv-a 219 (˚ika for ˚aka)
    from ulloketi
    Ullokita
    1. looked at, looked on Ja i.253 DN-a i.193
    past participle of ulloketi
    Ulloketi
    1. to look on to, look for, await Ja i.232 (ākāsaṁ), 253; ii.221, 434 DN-a i.153 168 Vv-a 316 past participle ullokita (q.v.)
    2. ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka
    Ullopana
    neuter = ullumpana Dhp-a i.309 (Text faulty ‣See remarks ad locum).
    Ullola
    1. -1. a wave Ja iii.228 Ja vi.394 - 2. commotion, unrest Ja iv.306 Ja iv.476
    from ud + lul
    Ullolanā
    feminine
    1. wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed Thag-a 243
    from ulloleti
    Ulloleti
    1. to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect Thag-a 243 past participle ullulita
    2. denominative from ullola
    Uḷāra
    adjective
    1. great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich
    • Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10–⁠11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraṁ paṇītaṁ (excellent), seṭṭhaṁ (best), mahantaṁ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga) DN i.96 MN iii.38 (˚bhogatā) SN v.159 Snp 53 Snp 58 Snp 301 Nd2 170 Ja i.399 Ja v.95 Vv 11 8426 Pv i.512 (= hita samiddha Pv-a 30) Vv-a 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva) Thag-a 173 280 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 58 and passim; Sdhp 26 Sdhp 260 Sdhp 416. Derived oḷārika (q.v.)
    Vedic udāra, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit audāra
    Uḷāratā
    feminine = uḷāratta Sdhp 254.
    Uḷāratta
    neuter
    1. greatness etc.; only negative an˚; smallness, insignificance, inferiority Vv-a 24
    abstract from uḷāra
    Uḷu
    1. a lunar mansion Mil 178
    Sanskrit uḍu, dialectical?
    Uḷuṅka
    1. a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286 Ja i.120 Ja i.157 Ja iii.461 Mil 8 Dhp-a i.425 Dhp-a ii.3 20; iv.75, 123
    dialectical?
    Uḷumpa
    1. a raft, a float Vin i.230 Vin iii.63 (˚ṁ bandhati) Ja iv.2 Dhp-a ii.120
    dialectical?
    Uviṭṭa
    1. having entered, come in DN ii.274 (variant reading BK. upa˚)
    = viṭṭha, past participle of viś, with prefixed u
    Usabha1
    1. a bull; often fig as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) DN i.6 (˚yuddha bull-fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127 Vin iii.39 (puris˚ “bull of a man”, a very strong man) AN i.188 AN ii.207 AN iv.41f. 376; v.347, 350 Snp 26f. 416, 646, 684 Dhp 422 Ja i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136 Pug 56 Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile) Dhp-a i.396 Snp-a 226 333 Kp-a 144 Pv-a 163 Vv-a 85
    • The compound forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q.v.) The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at Snp-a 40
    Vedic ṛṣabha; Avestan aršan male, to Indogermanic *eres & *rēs; to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sanskrit rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Latin rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sanskrit varṣa rain, Gr dew; Sanskrit vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull
    Usabha2
    neuter
    1. a certain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis ‣See yaṭṭhi or 140 cubits Ja i.64 (eight, 70 (identical); ii.91; iv.17 (one) 142 (eight) Dhp-a i.108 (˚mattaṁ)
    = usabha1, in special application (?)
    Usā
    feminine
    1. (a certain) food Ja vi.80
    doubtful
    Usīra
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201 Vin ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī) SN ii.88 (˚nāḷi) AN ii.199 (identical) Dhp 337 Ja v.39 Thag 1 402 (˚attho)
      Sanskrit uśīra
    Usu
    masculine & f) Sanskrit iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma) DN i.9 MN i.86 MN iii.133 SN i.127 AN ii.117 AN iii.162 Ja iv.416 vi.79, 248, 454 Mil 331 Mil 339 Snp-a 466 Pv-a 155
    1. -kāra an arrow-maker, fletcher MN ii.105 Dhp 80 Dhp 145 Thag 1, 29 Ja ii.275 Ja vi.66 Dhp-a i.288
    Usumā
    feminine
    1. heat Ja i.31 (= uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma-vaṭṭi-sadisa) DN-a i.186 Dhp-a i.225 Dhp-a ii.20
    the diaeretic form of Sanskrit uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is Pali usmā (q.v.)
    Usuyyaka
    adjective
    1. envious, jealous Vin ii.190 Snp 318 Snp 325 Ja ii.192 (variant reading asuyy˚); v.114
    • Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in compound abbhusūyaka (q.v.) Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 ‣See Vv-a 147 Usuyyati & Usuyati;
    from usuyyā
    Usuyyati
    Usūyati;
    1. to be jealous or envious, to envy (with accusative ) Vin i.242 Ja iii.27 (ppr. an-usuyyaṁ); Pv ii.320 (maṁ usūyasi = mayhaṁ issaṁ karosi Pv-a 87)
    2. Sanskrit asūyati; from usuyā envy
    Usuyyanā
    feminine & Usuyyitatta
    • neuter are exegetical abstract formations of usuyyā (q.v.) Dhs 1121 Pug 19 Usuyya & Usuya

    Usuyyā
    Usūyā
    feminine
    1. envy, jealousy, detraction SN i.127 (ū) Snp 245 (u) Ja ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; variant reading ussuyyā) Mil 402 (ū) Dhs 1121 (u) Vv-a 71 (u) Snp-a 332 (u)
    Sanskrit asūyā
    Usmā
    feminine
    1. heat DN ii.335 DN ii.338 MN i.295 SN ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212 Dhs 964 DN-a i.310
    • In combination with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚; , e.g. at MN i.132 MN i.258
    1. ˚gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964 as technical term one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic Ja v.209 (samaṇateja Commentary ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166 Divy 240, 271. 469, & ‣See Kern’s mistakes at; Toevoegselen s.v.)
    ‣See usumā
    Ussa
    adjective
    1. superior, higher (opposite oma inferior) AN iii.359 Snp 860 (= Nd1 251 with spelling ossa), 954
    derived from ud = *ud-s(y)a, in analogy to oma from ava; but taken by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as an abbreviated ussada
    Ussakkati1
    1. to creep out or up to, to rise AN iii.241f. Mil 260
    ud + sakkati ‣See sakkati
    Ussakkati2
    1. to endeavour Vism 437 Vv-a 95 (causative II. ussakkāpesi), 214
    2. by-form of ussukkati
    Ussaṅkita
    adjective
    1. = ussankin AN iii.128 Dhp-a iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚)
    past participle of ud + śaṅk
    Ussaṅkin
    adjective
    1. distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192
    from ud + śaṅk
    Ussaṅkha
    adjective
    1. with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17 DN iii.143 DN iii.154 DN-a explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot
    ud + sankha
    Ussajjati
    1. to dismiss, set free, take off, hurl AN iv.191
    ud + sṛj, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit protsṛjati Divy 587
    Ussaṭa
    1. run away MN ii.65
    past participle of ud + sarati of sṛ; , cp. saṭa for *sūta
    Ussada
    1. : this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt-ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows (1) prominence (cp. Sanskrit utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as “projecting, prominent hells”, ussadanirayā (but ‣See also below 4) Ja i.174 Ja iv.3 Ja iv.422 (pallankaṁ, variant reading caturassạṁ, with four corners); v.266
    • adj prominent Thag-a 13 (tej-ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?)
    • protuberance, bump, swelling Ja iv.188 also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa DN iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back)

  • rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adjective anointed with (—˚), in candan˚ Ja iii.139 Ja iv.60 Thag 1, 267 Vv 537 Dhp-a i.28 Vv-a 237

    • a crowd adjective full of (—˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) DN i.87 (cp. DN-a i.245: aneka-satta-samākiṇṇa; but in same sense Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sapt- otsada Divy 620 Divy 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, explained by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita Pv-a 221

  • qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada “having the four qualifications (of a good village)” Ja iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water Commentary ). The phrase is evidently shaped after DN i.87 (under 4). As “preponderant quality, characteristic” we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cp. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the “Ussadakittana”), and similarly at Vv-a 19 in Dhammapāla’s definition of manussa (lobh’ādīhi alobh’ādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa-jātikā tesu lobh’ādayo alobh’ādayo ca ussadā.

    • (metaph.) self-elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3 Snp 515 Snp 624 (an˚ = taṇhā-ussada-abhāvena Snp-a 467), 783 (explained by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i.e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855
    • ‣ See also ussādana, ussādeti etc
    • most likely to ud + syad ‣See ussanna
  • Ussadaka
    adjective
    1. over-full, overflowing AN iii.231 AN iii.234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with variant readings ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚)
    from ussada 4
    Ussanna
    adjective
    1. -1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant preponderant, excessive, full of (˚-) Vin i.285 (cīvaraṁ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaṁ too abundant); iii.286 Thag 2, 444 (= upacita Thag-a 271) Ja i.48 Ja i.145 ˚kusalamūla) Dhp-a i.26 (identical); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267 Mil 223 (identical) Ja i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. Pv-a 197) Pv-a 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). cp. accussanna
    • anointed Vv-a 237

  • spread out wide Dhp-a ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (identical).

    past participle of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna
  • Ussannatā
    feminine
    1. accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā) Vv-a 18 19
    abstract from ussanna
    Ussaya
    1. in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚; “using envious language, quarrelsome"
    • Another ussaya [from ud + śri, cp. Sanskrit ucchrita, Pali ussita & ussāpeti meaning “accumulation” is found in compound samussaya only
    Ussayāpeti
    1. ‣See udassaye
    Ussarati
    1. to run out, run away Ja i.434 (imperative ussaratha); v.437.
    2. past participle ussaṭa (q.v.)

      • Caus ussāreti (q.v.)
      ud + sarati of sṛ
    Ussava
    1. feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii.249 Ja i.475 Ja ii.13 Ja ii.248 Vv-a 7 109 (˚divasa)
    Sanskrit utsava
    Ussahati
    1. to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47 83; ii.208; iii.17 DN i.135 SN iv.308 SN iv.310 Mil 242 Vv-a 100 causative ussāheti ‣See
    2. past participle ussāhita
    3. ud + sah, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Avs ii.21
    Ussāda
    1. throwing up on DN-a i.122
    from ussādeti
    Ussādana
    neuter
    1. -1. overflowing, piling up, abundance MN iii.230 (opposite apasādana)
    • (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion AN iii.91 AN iii.92 (variant reading ussāraṇa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaṁ c’eva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda-mahāsaddo Pug AN 249)
    • to ussādeti, cp. ussādita
    Ussādita

    . ‣See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting unfolding, viz.; sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad ‣See ussada ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti from ussādeti, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ucchrāyita Divy 76 Divy 77, 466

    Ussādiyati
    1. to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167
    passive medium of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4
    Ussādeti

    -1. to dismiss DN iii.128 for ussāreti1

    • to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up MN i.135 MN iii.230 AN iv.198 AN iv.201 Mil 187 Mil 250
    • passive ussādiyati (q.v.)
    • past participle ussādita (q.v.)
    • denominative from ussada 1
    Ussāpana
    neuter
    1. lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) AN iv.41 Nd2 503 (dhamma-dhajassa)
    from ussāpeti
    Ussāpita
    1. lifted, raised, unfurled Mil 328 (dhamma-dhaja) Ja ii.219
    past participle of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita
    Ussāpeti
    1. to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195 AN iv.43 Ja ii.219 Ja iv.16 Ja v.95 (chattaṁ) Pv-a 75 (identical) Mil 21 Dhp-a i.3 Dhp-a iii.118 (kaṭṭhāni). past participle ussāpita & ussita; (q.v.) ‣See also usseti
    2. causative of ud + śri, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ucchrāpayati Avestan SN i.384 SN i.386 SN i.387 SN ii.2
    Ussāraṇa
    neuter
    1. procession, going or running about, tumult Dhp-a ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). cp. ussādana
    from ussāreti
    Ussārita
    1. lifted out or up Vism 63 (samuddavīcīhi thale ussārita; variant reading ussādita)
    past participle of ussāreti2
    Ussāreti1
    1. to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32 46 (here a student, when folding up his master’s robe, has to make the corners move back a hand’s breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred) Ja i.419 Ja iv.349 Ja v.347 causative II. ussārāpeti Ja ii.290
    2. causative of ussarati
    Ussāreti2
    1. to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift Ja v.319 (= ussāpeti). past participle ussārita
    2. = ussādeti
    Ussāva1
    1. hoarfrost, dew DN ii.19 Ja iv.120 Ja v.417
    • ˚bindu a dew drop AN iv.137 Pv iv.15 Snp-a 458 in comparisons: Vism 231, 633
    either = Sanskrit avaśyāya, or to ud + sru
    Ussāva2
    1. outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) Dhp-a iv.165 (taṇhā˚; variant reading ussada, to ussada 6)
    from ud + sru
    Ussāvana
    neuter
    1. proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239
    = ussāpana
    Ussāsa
    1. ‣See nirussāsa
    Ussāha
    1. strength, power, energy; endeavour, good-will MN ii.174 SN v.440 AN i.147 AN ii.93 AN ii.195 AN iii.75 AN iii.307 AN iv.320 AN v.93f. Mil 323 Mil 329(dhiti +) Vism 330; Sdhp 49 Sdhp 223 Sdhp 535 Sdhp 619 Snp-a 50 Dhp-a iii.394 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 106 Pv-a 166 Vv-a 32 48
    • In exegetical literature often combined with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e.g. at Nd2 s.v. Dhs 13 22, 289, 571
    Sanskrit utsāha & utsaha ‣See ussahati
    Ussāhana
    feminine
    1. = ussāha Nett 8
    from ussahati cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utsahana Divy 490
    Ussāhita
    1. determined, incited, encouraged, urged Ja i.329 Vv-a 109 Pv-a 201 cp. sam˚
    past participle of ussāheti, causative of ussahati
    Ussiñcati
    1. to bale out, exhaust Ja i.450 Ja ii.70 Ja iv.16 Mil 261
    ud + sic
    Ussiñcana
    neuter
    1. drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting Ja i.417
    from ussiñcati
    Ussita
    1. erected, high SN v.228 Thag 1, 424 (pannaddhaja) Ja v.386 Vv 8415 Vv-a 339 cp. sam˚
    Sanskrit ucchrita, past participle of ud + sri ‣See ussāpeti
    Ussīsaka
    neuter
    1. the head of a bed, a pillow for the head Ja i.266 Ja ii.410 Ja ii.443 Ja iv.154 v.99; vi.32 37, 56 Dhp-a i.184 (˚passe, opposite pāda-passe)
    ud + sīsa + ka
    Ussuka
    adjective
    1. -1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active SN i.15 (an˚ inactive) AN iv.266 Snp 298
    • greedy, longing for Dhp 199 (an˚)
    • Sanskrit utsuka, also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Jtm 3168
    Ussukita
    adjective = ussukin; only negative an˚; free from greed Vv-a 74
    Ussukin
    adjective
    1. greedy, longing; only negative an˚ Pug 23
    from ussuka
    Ussukka
    neuter
    1. zeal, energy, endeavour hard work, eagerness Vin i.50 SN iv.288 SN iv.291 SN iv.302 Nd2 s.v. Nett 29 Vv-a 147 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati) 644 (˚ppahānaṁ)
    • cp. appossukka
    *utsukya from ussuka; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Avs i.85
    Ussukkatā
    feminine = ussukka AN y.195
    Ussukkati
    1. to endeavour DN i.230 - causative II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in to perform Vv-a 95 98, 243 ‣See also ussakkati
    2. denominative from ussukka
    Ussuta
    adjective
    1. defiled, lustful (cp. āsava), only negative an˚; free from defilement Dhp 400 Ussuya, Ussuyaka
    past participle of ud + sru, cp. avassuta
    Ussuyā, Ussuyaka
    1. , uss
    Ussussati
    1. to dry up intranstitive SN i.126 SN iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.) Snp 985 Ja vi.195
    2. ud + sussati of śuṣ
    Ussūra
    adjective
    1. “sun-out”, the sun being out; i.e. after sunrise or after noon, adverb ially in ˚bhatta eating after mid-day, unpunctual meals AN iii.260 and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late DN iii.184 Dhp-a ii.227 Besides as locative adverb ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i.e. at evening Vin i.293 Vin iv.77 Ja ii.286 also in ati-ussūre too long after sunrise Vv-a 65 Dhp-a iii.305
    2. ut + sūra
    Usseti
    1. to erect, raise, stand up Ja iv.302 aorist ussesi Ja vi.203
    2. causative ussāpeti;
    3. past participle ussita & ussāpita; (q.v.)
    4. ud + śri
    Usseneti
    1. to draw on to oneself, to be friendly SN iii.89 (variant reading ussi˚) AN ii.214f. (opposite paṭisseneti); Ps ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i.93 (reading ussineti + visineti) ‣See also paṭiseneti
    denominative from ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)
    Usseḷheti
    1. (?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya
    Ussota
    adjective
    1. neuter ussotaṁ as adverb “up-stream” Mil 117
    2. ud + sota
    Ussoḷhi
    feminine
    1. exertion MN i.103 SN ii.132 SN v.440 A. ii.93, 195; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q.v.)
    a by-form of ussāha from ud + sah, past participle *soḍha dialectical
    Ussoḷhikā
    feminine
    1. belonging to exertion, only in instrumental as adverb ussoḷhikāya “in the way of exertion” i.e. ardently, keenly, eagerly SN i.170 (naccati)
    2. adjective of ussoḷhi
    Uhuṅkara
    an owl (literally “uhu"-maker) Ja vi.538 (= ulūka Commentary ).
    1. ū
    onomat. uhu + kara ‣See under ulūka

    Ū

    Ūkā
    feminine
    1. a louse Ja i.453 Ja ii.324 Ja iii.393 Ja v.298 Mil 11 Vism 445 Dhs-a 307 319 Dhp-a iii.342 Vv-a 86
    1. is also used as linear measure (cp. Sanskrit yūkālikṣaṁ) Vb-a 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā)
    Sanskrit yūkā, probably dialectical
    Ūtagītaṁ
    1. at Ja i.290 in phrase “jimaṁ ūtagītaṁ gāyanto” read “imaṁ jūtagītaṁ g.”
    Ūna
    adjective
    1. wanting, deficient less MN ii.73 Ja v.330 Dhp-a i.77 Dhp-a iv.210 Mostly adverb ially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e. g ekūna-aṭṭhasataṁ (799) Ja i.57 ekūna-pañcasate Kp-a 91 ekūna-vīsati (19) Vism 287; eken’ūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) Ja i.167 also with eka in instrumental as eken'ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285 Kp-a 91; sometimes without eka, e.g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284 ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130 148. With “two” less: dvīhi ūnaṁ sahassaṁ (998) Ja i.255

      • anūna not deficient complete Pv-a 285 (= paripuṇṇa)
      1. ˚udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach adjective of empty stomach; ˚udara Ja ii.293 Ja vi.295
      • ˚ūdara

        1. J vi.258 Mil 406 odara Snp 707 Dhp-a i.170
        • ˚bhāva depletion, deficiency Snp-a 463 (variant reading hānabhāva)
        Vedic ūna; cp. Avestan ūna, Latin vāpus, Gothic wans, Anglo-Saxon won = English want
    Ūnaka
    adjective
    1. deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81 254; iv.263 Snp 721 Mil 310 Mil 311 (˚satta-vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414 Dhp-a i.79
    ūna + ka
    Ūnatta
    neuter
    1. depletion, deficiency Vin ii.239 Ja v.450
    abstract from ūna
    Ūpāya
    1. at Dhp-a ii.93 stands for upāya
    Ūpiya
    1. ‣See upiya & opiya;
    Ūmika
    1. wave Mil 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract). Umi & Umi;
    feminine ūmi
    Ūmī
    Ūmi;
    feminine
    1. a wave MN i.460 (˚bhaya) SN iv.157 SN v.123 (˚jāta) AN iii.232f. (identical) Snp 920 Ja ii.216 Ja iii.262 iv.141 Mil 260 (˚jāta)
    • Note. AN parallel form of ūmī is ummī
    Sanskrit ūrmi, from Indogermanic *ṷel ‣See nibbāna i.2; cp. Latin volvo to roll Anglo-Saxon wylm wave; Old High German wallan; also Sanskrit ulva, varutra valaya, valli, vṛṇoti ‣See details in Walde, Latin Wtb under volvo
    Ūru
    the thigh Snp 610 Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii.106 Ja i.277 Ja ii.275 Ja ii.443 Ja iii.82 v.89, 155 Nd2 659 (so read for uru) Vv 6413 DN-a i.135 = Vin ii.190
    1. ˚aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone MN i.58 MN iii.92 Ja i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); Kp-a 49, 50 (ūraṭṭhi)
    2. ˚(k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) MN i.237 Ja v.23
    Vedic ūru; cp. Latin vārus bow-legged, of Indogermanic *ṷā, to which also Old High German wado = German wade calf of leg
    Ūsa
    1. salt-ground; saline substance, always combined with khāra SN iii.131 (˚gandha) AN i.209
    Sanskrit ūṣa
    Ūsara
    adjective
    1. saline SN iv.315 AN iv.237 Dhs-a 243
    • nt. ˚ṁ a spot with saline soil Pv-a 139 (gloss for ujjhangala)
    Sanskrit ūṣara, from ūṣa
    Ūha
    1. ‣See vy˚, sam˚
    Ūhacca1
    indeclinable
    1. -1. lifting up, raising or rising Ja iii.206
    • pulling out, taking away, removing DN ii.254 (cp. Dhp-a ii.181) SN i.27 (variant reading for ohacca) Snp 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd2 171)
    • absolutive of ūharati, ud + hṛ; (or ava + hṛ; , cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati.1 & 2
    Ūhacca2
    indeclinable
    1. soiling by defecation, defecating Ja ii.71 (= vaccaṁ katvā Commentary )
    absolutive of ūhanati2 = ūhadati
    Ūhaññati
    1. to be soiled; to be disturbed aorist ūhaññi Vin i.48 MN i.116
    2. aorist also ūhani MN i.243
    3. passive of ūhanati1
    Ūhata1
    1. -1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70 Ja v.403 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Thag 1, 223 = Nd2 974 Thag 1, 514 Dhp 338 (= ucchinna Dhp-a iv.48)
    • soiled with excrements Vin ii.222
    • past participle of ud + hṛ; or dhṛ; thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata
    Ūhata2
    1. disturbed MN i.116
    past participle of ūhanati1
    Ūhadati
    1. to defecate Ja ii.355 Dhp-a ii.181 (so read with variant reading for Text ūhadayati)
    for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily from ūhacca or ohacca?
    Ūhana
    neuter
    1. reasoning, consideration, examination Mil 32 (“comprehension” translation; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = Dhs-a 114 (“prescinding” translation as characteristic of vitakka)
    from ūhanati?
    Ūhanati1
    1. to disturb, shake up, defile, soil MN i.243 Ja ii.73 passive aorist ūhani ‣See ūhaññati
    2. pp ūhata2 (q.v.) cp. sam˚
    3. ud + han
    Ūhanati2
    1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78 Vin iii.227 2. probably for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1
      1. to lift up, to take away MN i.117 (opposite odahati). cp. ohana in bimb ohana. absolutive ūhacca2 (q.v.)
      2. either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati
    Ūharati
    1. only in forms of absolutive ūhacca1 and
    2. past participle ūhata1 (q.v.)
    3. for uddharati
    Ūhasati
    1. to laugh at, deride, mock AN iii.91 Ja v.452 (+ pahasati) Pug 67 (= avahasati Pug AN 249)
    either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati
    Ūhasana
    neuter
    1. laughing, mocking Mil 127
    from ūhasati
    Ūhā
    feminine
    1. life, only in compound āyūha lifetime Pv-a 136 Pv-a 162 (˚pariyosāna)
    • As name of a river at Mil 70 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ūhā in ūhāpoha Avestan SN i.209 SN i.235
    1. E
    etymology?

    E

    Eka
    adjective-numeral
    1. one. Eka follows the pronoun declension i.e. nominative
    2. plural is eke (e.g. Snp 43 Snp 294 Snp 780 etc.)

      1. “one” as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also “single” opposed to nānā various, many (q.v.) Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11 Dhp-a iii.127 eka
      2. passive in one quarter Dhp-a ii.52 ekamaccha a single fish Ja i.222 In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa Dhp-a i.24 With other numerals: eka-tiṁsa (31) DN ii.2 ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20 ˚navuti (91) Dhp-a i.97 ˚sata (101 Dhp-a ii.14 cp. use of “one less” in ekūna ‣See under compounds. & ūna
      3. (as predicative and adjective) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary AN iii.67 (ek-uddesa) Ja i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i.e. on the same day) Dhp 395 Snp 35 Snp 1136 ‣See Nd2 172a, ekaṁ ekaṁ one by one SN i.104 (devo ekaṁ ekaṁ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka
      4. a certain one, some one, some; adjective in function of an indefinite article = a one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiṁ samaye once upon a time Ja i.306 ekena upāyena by some means Ja iii.393 ekaṁ kulaṁ gantuṁ to a certain clan (corresponding with asuka Dhp-a i.45 ekadivasaṁ one day Ja i.58 Ja iii.26 Pv-a 67 cp. Snp 1069 ‣See Nd2 172b

        • All these three categories are found represented in frequently compounds., of which the following are but a small selection

        -akkhi ‣See ˚pokkhara

      5. ˚agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected cp. Buddh. Sanskrit ekāgra Jtm 3170
        1. SN iv.125 AN i.70 AN i.266 AN ii.14 AN ii.29 AN iii.175 (˚citta), 391 Snp 341 Ja i.88 Nett 28, cp. Mil 139
        • ˚aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind ‣See on term Compendium 16, 1785 237, 240 SN v.21 SN v.197 SN v.269 (cittassa) AN i.36 AN iv.40 Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84
        • ˚aṅga a part, divisioh, something

          1. belonging to Ja iii.308 Ud 69
          • ˚aṅgaṇa one (clear space Ja ii.357
          • ˚āgārika a thief, robber DN i.52 DN i.166 AN i.154 AN i.295 AN ii.206 AN iii.129 Nd1 416 Nd2 304 iii.a. DN-a i.159 (= ekam eva gharaṁ parivāretvā vilumpanaṁ DN-a i.159)
          • ˚āyana leading to one goal, direct way or “leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga MN i.63 SN v.167 SN v.185
          • ˚ārakkha having one protector or guardian DN iii.269 AN v.29f. -ālopika = ekāgārika DN i.166 AN i.295 AN ii.206
          • ˚āsana sitting or living alone MN i.437 Snp 718 Dhp 305 Ja v.397 Mil 342 Vism 60 (explained with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaṁ ekāsanaṁ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The following ˚āsanika is ibid. explained as “taṁ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko”) -āsanika one who keeps to himself Mil 20 Mil 216 Vism 69
          • ˚āha one day MN i.88 usually in compound ekâhadvîhaṁ one or two days Ja i.255 Dhp-a i.391
          • ˚āhika of or for one day DN i.166
          • ˚uttarika (-nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika-nikāya Mil 392
          • ˚ūna one less, minus one usually as 1st part of a numeral compound, like ˚vīsati (20

            1. = 19) Dhp-a i.4 ˚paññāsa (49) Ja iii.220 ˚saṭṭhi (59 Dhp-a iii.412 ˚pañcasatā (499) Dhp-a ii.204 ‣See ūna-eka one by one, each, severally, one to each DN ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (identical), 157 Ja i.222 Dhp-a i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaṁ māsaṁ one month for each of us); ii.114 Vv-a 256 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 43
            2. ˚ghana compact, solid, hard Dhp 81
            3. ˚cara wandering or living alone, solitary SN i.16 Snp 166 Snp 451 Dhp 37
            4. ˚cariyā walking alone, solitude Dhp 61 Snp 820
            5. ˚cārin = ˚cara Mil 105
            6. ˚cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138
            7. ˚cintin “thinking one thing (only)”, simple Mil 92
            8. ˚thūpa (all in one heap, mixed up, together Ja v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya Commentary )
            9. ˚doṇikā (-nāvā) a trough-shaped canoe with an outrigger Ja vi.305
            10. ˚paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125
            11. ˚paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109
            12. ˚padika (-magga) a small (literally for one foot) foot-path Ja i.315 Ja v.491
            13. ˚pala one carat worth ‣See pala Vism 339
            14. ˚passayika is to be read ek’apassayika ‣See under apa˚
            15. ˚pahārena all at once Vism 418 Dhs-a 333
            16. ˚piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62 -puttika having only one son Kp-a 237
            17. ˚purisika (itthi (a woman) true to one man Ja i.290
            18. ˚pokkhara a sort of drum Ja vi.21 Ja vi.580 (Commentary explns. by ek-akkhi-bherī) -bījin having only one (more) ‣Seed, i.e. destined to be reborn only once SN v.205 AN i.233 AN iv.380 Nett 189 -bhattika having one meal a day AN i.212 AN iii.216 Ja i.91
            19. ˚bhattakinī a woman true to one husband Ja iii.63
            20. ˚rajja sole sovereignty Dhp 178 Pv-a 74
            21. ˚rājā universal king Ja i.47 (of the Sun)
            22. ˚vāciya a single remark or objection Ja ii.353
            23. ˚vāraṁ once Ja i.292
            24. ˚vārena identical Dhp-a i.10
            25. ˚sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical Ja i.291
            26. ˚sama equal Ja vi.261
            27. ˚sāṭa & sāṭaka; having a single vestment, a “one-rober” SN i.78 (˚ka) Ud 65
          Vedic eka, i.e. e-ka to Indogermanic *oi as in Avestan aēva, Latin ū-nus, cp. Gothic etc ains = English one
    Ekaṁsa1
    adjective
    1. belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsangaṁ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46 Vin ii.188 & passim
    eka + aṁsa1
    Ekaṁsa2
    1. “one part or point”, i.e. one-pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty absoluteness DN i.153 AN ii.46 Snp 427 Snp 1027 Ja iii.224 (ekaṁsatthe nipāto for “nūna”) Snp-a 414 (˚vacana for “taggha”)
    • O
    • past participle an˚ Mil 225
    • instrumental ekaṁsena as
    • adverb for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably DN i.122 161, 162 MN i.393 SN iv.326 AN v.190 Ja i.150 Ja iii.224 Pv-a 11
    eka + aṁsa1 or better aṁsa2
    Ekaṁsika
    adjective
    1. certain DN i.189 DN i.191
    • an˚ uncertain, indefinite DN i.191
    from ekaṁsa2
    Ekaṁsikatā
    feminine
    1. as negative an˚; indefiniteness Mil 93
    abstract from ekaṁsika
    Ekaka
    adjective
    1. single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212 Ja i.255 Ja ii.234 Ja iv.2 feminine ekikā Vin iv.229 Ja i.307 Ja iii.139
    2. eka + ka
    Ekacca
    adjective
    1. one, certain, definite DN i.162 AN i.8 often in pl ekacce some, a few DN i.118 AN v.194 Thag 2, 216 Ja ii.129 Ja iii.126 ‣See also app˚ under api
    derived from eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, literally “one-like”, cp. English one-like = one-ly only
    Ekaccika
    adjective
    1. single, not doubled (of cloth, opposite to diguṇa) Ja v.216 (˚vasana = eka-paṭṭa-nivattha)
    from ekacca
    Ekacciya
    adjective = ekacca SN i.199 Ja iv.259
    • accusative as
    • adverb ˚ṁ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212).

    Ekajjhaṁ
    adverb
    1. in the same place, in conjunction together Mil 144 (karoti), Kp-a 167 Snp-a 38
    from eka, cp. literary Sanskrit aikadhyaṁ, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ekadhyaṁ Mvu i.304
    Ekato
    adverb
    1. -1. on the one side (opposite on the other) Ja iii.51 Ja iv.141 2. together Ja ii.415 Ja iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti) 391; iv.390 Dhp-a i.18 ekato karoti to put together, to collect Vv-a 3 ekato hutvā “coming to one”, agreeing Dhp-a i.102 cp. ekato ahesuṁ Ja i.201
    ablative formation from eka, cp. Sanskrit ekataḥ
    Ekatta
    neuter
    1. -1. unity DN i.31
    • loneliness, solitude, separation Snp 718 Thag 1, 49 Mil 162 Ja vi.64 Vv-a 202 (= ekībhāva)
    • abstract from eka
    Ekattatā
    feminine
    1. unity, combination, unification, concentration Nett 4, 72 sq, 107 sq
    from ekatta
    Ekadatthu
    adverb
    1. once, definitely, specially Ja iii.105 (= ekaṁsena Commentary )
    eka-d-atthu, cp. aññadatthu
    Ekadā
    adverb
    1. once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time SN i.162 Snp 198 Dhp-a ii.41 Mil 213
    from eka
    Ekanta
    adjective
    1. one-sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚-) usually in function of an adverb as ˚-meaning “absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite” etc. 1. (literally) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end DN i.7 (= ekato dasaṁ uṇṇāmay’attharaṇaṁ keci ekato uggata-pupphan ti vadanti DN-a i.87) Vin i.192 Vin ii.163 169 AN i.181
    2. (figuratively) extremely very much, in frequently combinations; e.g. ˚kāḷaka AN iii.406 AN iv.11 ˚gata SN v.225 AN iii.326 ˚dukkha MN i.74 SN ii.173 SN iii.70 (+ sukha) AN v.289 ˚dussīlya Dhp-a iii.153 ˚nibbida AN iii.83 AN iv.143 ˚paripuṇṇa SN ii.219 SN v.204 ˚manāpa SN iv.238 ˚sukha AN ii.231 AN iii.409 ˚sukhin DN-a i.119 etc
    Sanskrit ekānta
    Ekantarika
    adjective

    with one in between, alternate Ja iv.195 ˚bhāvena (instrumental adverb ) in alternation alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (

  • adverb ) with intervals Vism 244
  • eka + antarika
    Ekamantaṁ
    adverb
    1. on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47 94 = ii.272 DN i.106 Snp p. 13 (explained at Snp-a 140 as follows: bhāvana-puṁsaka-niddeso, ek’okāsaṁ ekapassan ti vuttaṁ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṁ) Snp 580 Snp 1009 Snp 1017 Ja i.291 Ja ii.102 Ja ii.111 Snp-a 314 456. Also in locative ekamante on one side Dhp-a i.40
    2. eka + anta, accusative in
    3. adverb function, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ekamante Mvu i.35
    Ekameka
    adjective
    1. one by one, each. AN v.173 Vv 782
    eka-m-eka, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ekameka Mvu iii.358
    Ekavidha
    adjective
    1. of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adverb ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528
    2. eka + vidha
    Ekaso
    adverb
    1. singly, one by one Ja iii.224 (an˚)
    Sanskrit ekaśaḥ
    Ekākiya
    adjective alone, solitary Thag 1, 541 Mil 398
    Ekādasa
    numeral
    1. eleven Vin i.19
    • numeral ordinal ekādasama the eleventh Snp 111 Snp 113
    Sanskrit ekādaśa
    Ekānika
    adjective = ekākiya; instrumental ekānikena as
    • adverb “by oneself” Mil 402

    Ekikā
    1. ‣See ekaka
    Ekībhāva
    1. being alone, loneliness, solitude DN iii.245 MN ii.250 AN iii.289 AN v.89 AN v.164 Vism 34 Snp-a 92 93 Dhp-a ii.103 Vv-a 202 DN-a i.253 309
    eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compound with bhū
    Ekodi
    adjective
    1. concentrated attentive, fixed AN iii.354 Nd1 478. Usually in compound with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi-karoti to concentrate MN i.116 SN iv.263
    • ˚bhavati to become settled SN iv.196 SN v.144
    • ˚bhūta concentrated Snp 975
    • ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one’s mind on one point DN i.37 DN iii.78 DN iii.131 AN i.254 AN iii.24 Vism 156 (explained as eko udeti) Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46) Dhs-a 169 Nett 89
    most likely eka + odi for odhi ‣See avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, literally of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e. g at Mvu iii.212 213; Lal. Vist. 147, 439
    Ejā
    feminine
    1. motion, turbulence, distraction seduction, craving SN iv.64 Snp 791 Iti 91 Nd1 91 353 Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277) Vv-a 232
    • aneja (adjective unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless SN i.27 SN i.141 SN i.159 SN iii.83; iv.64 AN ii.15 Nd1 353 Vv-a 107
    to iñj, q.v. and ‣See ānejja. There is also a Sanskrit root ej to stir, move
    Eṭṭha
    1. ‣See pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi
    past participle of ā + iṣ
    Eṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. desire, wish, in combination with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vb 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc
    from eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sanskrit eṣṭi
    Eṇi
    feminine
    1. a kind of antelope, only two following compounds.: ˚jaṅgha “limbed like the antelope” (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) DN ii.17 DN iii.143 156 MN ii.136 SN i.16 Snp 165
    • ˚miga the eṇi deer Ja v.416 Snp-a 207 217
    etymology? dialectical
    Eṇeyya
    1. DN iii.157 Ja vi.537f. & Eṇeyyaka AN i.48 AN ii.122 Ja v.155 Nd2 604 = eṇi
    Etad
    1. (pronoun adjective)

      1. demonstrative pronoun “this”, with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad Cases:
      2. neuter singular etad (poetical-archaic form) AN ii.17 Snp 274 Snp 430 Snp 822 Snp 1087 Ja i.61 Ja i.279 & etaṁ (the usual form) Snp 51 Snp 207 Snp 1036 Snp 1115 Ja ii.159
      3. plural etāni Snp 52 Ja ii.159

        • m. singular esa Snp 81 Snp 416 Snp 1052 Ja i.279 Ja ii.159 Mil 18 Dhp-a i.18 & eso Snp 61 Snp 312 Snp 393 Ja vi.336
        • plural ete Snp 188 Snp 760 Ja i.223
        • feminine singular esā Snp 80 Snp 451 Ja i.307
        • plural etā Snp 297 Snp 897 Ja ii.129
        • Oblique cases: genitive dative etassa Ja ii.159
        • feminine etissā Ja iii.280 instr etena Snp 655 Ja i.222
        • plural locative etesu Snp 248 Snp 339 Snp 1055
        • feminine etāsu Snp 607 Other cases regular & frequent
        Vedic etad, of
      4. pronoun base *e ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under equidem
    Etarahi
    adverb
    1. now, at present DN i.29, 151, 179, 200; ii.3 Ja i.215 (opposite tadā) iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna)
    Sanskrit etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi
    Etādisa
    adjective
    1. such, such like, of this kind DN ii.157 Snp 588 Snp 681 Snp 836 Pv i.94 iv.186 (= edisa yathā-vutta-rūpa Pv-a 243); Pv-a ii.71
    etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sanskrit etādṛśa
    Eti
    1. to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Snp 364 Snp 376 Snp 666 (come) Ja vi.365 (return); ppr. ento Ja iii.433 (accusative suriyaṁ atthaṁ entaṁ the setting sun); imper 2nd singular ehi only in meaning “come” ‣See separately 3rdetu DN i.60 2nd
    2. plural etha DN i.211 Snp 997 Ja ii.129 Dhp-a i.95 (in admission formula “etha bhikkhavo” come ye and be
      1. bhikkhus! ‣See ehi bhikkhu) future essati Ja vi.190 Ja vi.365 & ehiti Ja ii.153 2nd singular ehisi Dhp 236 Dhp 369
      2. past participle ita (q.v.)
      3. P. eti represents Sanskrit eti as well as ā-eti, i.e. to go and to come (here); with Sanskrit eti cp. Avestan aeiti, Latin eo, it; Gothic iddja went, Old Bulgarian iti, Old Irish etha
    Etta
    adverb
    1. there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. Kp-a 254 note)
    = Sanskrit atra ‣See also ettha
    Ettaka
    adjective
    1. so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little plural so few, just so many DN i.117 (opposite aparimāṇa), 124 AN iv.114 Nd2 304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much) Vv 7912 (cp. Vv-a 307) Mil 10 Mil 18 (alaṁ ettakena enough of this much) Dhp-a i.90 (enough this much), 93, 399 (
    2. plural ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq. Vv-a 233 (a little), 323

      • ettakaṁ kālaṁ a short time (but ‣See also under 2) Ja i.34 Dhp-a ii.20
      • ever so much (and not less), so much, plural so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot AN iii.337 Ja i.207 (pl ettakā), 375 (
      • neuter ettakaṁ); iii.80 (identical), 94 (˚ṁ dhanaṁ such great wealth) Mil 37 (
      • plural ) Dhp-a i.392 396 (pl
      • feminine ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (
      • plural ), 241 (
      • plural so many) Vv-a 65 (dhanaṁ)
      • ettakaṁ kālaṁ for some time, such a long time (‣ See also above, under 1) Dhp-a ii.62 81 iii.318 Vv-a 330
      etta + ka, contrasting-comparative function, cp. tattaka
    Ettato
    adverb
    1. from here, therefore SN i.185
    with double suffix for *atra-taḥ
    Ettāvatā
    adverb
    1. so far, to that extent, even by this much DN i.205 DN i.207 SN ii.17 Snp 478 Vv 556 (cp. Vv-a 248); Pv iv.167 Mil 14 DN-a i.80 Snp-a 4 Pv-a 243
    from etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka
    Etto
    adverb
    1. originally ablative of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Snp 448 Snp 875 Ja i.223 (opposite ito), v.498 Pv i.11ii.104 Dhp-a ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there) Pv-a 103
    in analogy to ito from *et˚, as ito from *it˚
    Ettha
    adverb
    1. here, in this place; also temporal “now”, & modal “in this case, in this matter” DN ii.12 SN v.375 Dhp 174 Snp 61 Snp 171 Snp 424 Snp 441 Snp 502 Snp 1037, & frequently passim
    = Sanskrit atra, cp. etta
    Edisa
    adjective
    1. such like, such Vv 373 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 243
    Sanskrit īdṛśa
    Edisaka
    1. = edisa Snp 313
    Edha
    1. fuel, fire etc. Only in adjective negative an˚ without fuel Ja iv.26
    Sanskrit edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Latin aedes, Old High German eit, Anglo-Saxon ād funeral pile, etc ‣See idhuma iṭṭhaka
    Edhati
    1. to prosper, succeed in, increase SN i.217 (sukhaṁ) Snp 298 Dhp 193 Ja i.223 Ja iii.151 sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita as at Ja vi.219
    edh, cp. iddhati
    Ena
    1. (pronoun )

      1. only used in accusative enaṁ (taṁ enaṁ) “him, this one, the same” Snp 583 Snp 981 Snp 1114 Dhp 118 Dhp 313 Ja iii.395 Nd2 304iii.b. ‣See also naṁ
      2. from
      3. pronoun base *ē̆, cp. e-ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Latin ūnus; Old High German ein, Old Irish ōin
    Eraka1
    adjective
    1. driving away, moving Ja iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture MN i.87 = AN i.47 = ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Mil 197
    from ereti
    Eraka2
    neuter
    1. Typha-grass Ja iv.88 As eragu (?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Buddhaghosa on DN i.166)
    from ereti
    Eraṇḍa
    1. the castor oil plant Nd2 680ii. Ja ii.440 cp. elaṇḍa
    dialectical?
    Erāvaṇa
    1. name of Indra’s elephant Snp 379 Vv 4413 Vv-a 15
    Erita
    1. moved, shaken, driven Ja iv.424 Vv 394 424 Thag 1, 104 Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita) 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). cp. īrita
    past participle of ereti
    Ereti
    1. to move, set into motion, raise (one’s voice) MN i.21 Snp 350 (eraya imperative ) Thag 1, 209 (eraye) Ja iv.478
    2. past participle erita (q.v.)
    3. = īreti (q.v.) causative of īr, Sanskrit īrayati
    Ela
    neuter
    1. salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el˚ambu-ja) born in (salt) water Snp 845 (= ela-saññaka ambumhi jāta) Nd1 202 (elaṁ vuccati udakaṁ)
    ?
    Elaṇḍa
    1. = eraṇḍa (?) MN i.124
    Elambaraka
    1. name of a creeping vine Ja vi.536 Elaluka (Elaluka)
    ?
    Elāluka (Eḷāluka)
    neuter
    1. a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329 Ja i.205 Ja v.37 Dhp-a i.278
    etymology?
    Eḷa
    neuter
    1. in eḷamūga deaf & dumb AN ii.252 AN iii.436 AN iv.226 Mil 20 Mil 251 (cp. Miln translation ii.71). A rather strange use and explanation of eḷamūga (with reference to a snake “spitting”) we find at Ja iii.347 where it is explained as “eḷa-paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaṁ” i.e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, variant reading elamukha
    • cp. neḷa & aneḷa;
    Sanskrit enas
    Eḷaka1
    1. a threshold ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 146 Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka-pītha, why not “having feet resembling those of a ram"? cp. Vin Texts iii.165 “a chair raised on a pedestal”) DN i.166 AN i.295 AN ii.206 The word its meaning seems uncertain
    ?
    Eḷaka2
    1. a ram, a wild goat Snp 309 Vism 500 (in simile) Ja i.166 Pug AN 233 (= urabbha). feminine eḷakā SN ii.228 eḷakī Thag 2, 438 eḷikī Ja iii.481
    2. Sanskrit eḍaka
    Eḷagala
    1. ‣See aneḷa
    Eḷagalā
    feminine
    1. the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sanskrit eḍagaja the ringworm-shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), Ja iii.222 (= kambojī Commentary )
    dialectical?
    Eḷagga
    1. in kāmāmis˚ at Pv-a 107 is to be read kāmāmise lagga˚
    Eva
    adverb
    1. emphatic part “so, even, just”; very frequently in all contexts & comb; ns.
    1. -1. eva Ja i.61 (ajj’eva this veryday), 278 (tath’eva likewise); ii.113 (ahaṁ e just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own)
    • eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi-)y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ṁ, cp. Ja i.293 Ja i.307 Ja ii.110 Ja ii.128 Ja ii.129 159; iv.3; vi.363

  • After ṁ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ṁ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva Ja i.223 tasmiñ ñeva Ja i.139 ahañ ñeva Mil 40

    • After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q.v.)

    -rūpa (1) such, like that Snp 279 Snp 280 Iti 108 Ja ii.352 etc.

  • of such form, beauty or virtue Ja i.294 iii.128, etc.

    Vedic eva
  • Evaṁ
    adverb

    so, thus, in this way, either referring to what precedes or what follows, e.g. (1) thus (as mentioned, explained at Vism 528 as “niddiṭṭha-nayanidassana”) DN i.193 (evaṁ sante this being being so) 195 (identical) Vin ii.194 (evaṁ bhante, yes) Ja i.222 Pv ii.1312 evaṁ etaṁ, just so).

  • thus (as follows) MN i.483 (evaṁ me sutaṁ “thus have I heard”)

    • Often combined with similar emphatic participle, as evam eva kho “in just the same way” (in final conclusions) DN i.104 DN i.199 228, 237, 239; in older form evaṁ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin ii.26 Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27 evam evaṁ “just so” DN i.51 Snp 1115 evaṁ kho DN i.113 evam pi Snp 1134 evaṁ su DN i.104 etc. etc
    1. ˚diṭṭhin holding such a view MN i.484
    • ˚nāma having that name MN i.429
    Vedic evaṁ
  • Esa1
    1. ‣See etad
    Esa2
    1. adjective = esin Snp 286
    Esati
    1. to ‣Seek, search, strive for Snp 592 (esāno ppr. medium), 919 Dhp 131
    2. ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati ‣See also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati
    Esanā
    feminine
    1. desire, longing, wish DN iii.216 DN iii.270 MN i.79 SN v.54 SN v.139 AN i.93 AN ii.41 AN v.31 Vv-a 83 Pv-a 98 Pv-a 163 Pv-a 265 ‣See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚;
    from esati
    Esanī
    feminine
    1. a surgeon’s probe MN ii.256
    from iṣ
    Esabha
    1. (—˚) a by-form of usabha (q.v.), in compound rathesabha
    Esika
    neuter & Esikā1
    • feminine

      1. a pillar, post AN iv.106 AN iv.109 frequently in compound ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar DN i.14 SN iii.202 SN iii.211 SN iii.217 DN-a i.105
      a by-form of isīkā
    Esikā2
    1. desire ‣See abbūḷha
    Esin
    adjective
    1. ‣Seeking, wishing, desiring SN ii.11 (sambhav˚) Ja i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam) Pv-a 132
    Sanskrit eṣin, of iṣ
    Ehi
    1. come, come here Snp 165 Ja ii.159 Ja vi.367 Dhp-a i.49 In the later language participle of exhortation = Latin age, “come on” Dhp-a ii.91 Pv-a 201 (+ tāva =). ehipassika adjective ehi +
    2. passive ika
      1. of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to ‣See for himself, open to all, explained at Vism 216 as “ehi, passive imaṁ dhamman ti evaṁ pavattaṁ ehi-passavidhaṁ arahatī ti”, DN ii.217 DN iii.5 DN iii.227 SN i.9 SN iv.41 SN iv.272 SN v.343 AN i.158 AN ii.198
      • ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation DN i.166 MN i.342 MN ii.161 AN i.295 AN ii.206
      • ehi bhikkhu “come bhikkhu!” the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12 Vin iii.24 Dhp-a i.87 Ja i.82
      • feminine ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214
      • plural etha bhikkhavo Dhp-a i.95 ehibhikkhu-pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship Snp-a 456 ehibhikkhubhāva-state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order Ja i.82 Ja i.86 Dhp-a ii.32 Snp-a 456
      • ehisāgata-(& svāgata-)vādin; a man of courtesy (literally one who habitually says: “come you are welcome” DN i.116 Vin ii.11 Vin iii.181

        1. O
        imperative of eti

    O

    O
    1. Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au ‣See ojas, ogha, etc.. Or it may be guṇa of u ‣See oḷārika opakammika, etc.. But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post-canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survivedic Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava ‣See note on ogamana
    Oka
    neuter [Vedic okas
    • neuter, from uc to like, thus originally “comfort”, hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = figuratively room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd1 487 on Snp 966 ‣See anoka Snp-a 573 ibid. Snp-a 547 ‣See anoka Snp-a 573 ibid. Snp-a 547 ‣See below) partly with udaka (as contraction) ‣See below on Dhp 34 Geiger (Pali Grammar § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both literally & figuratively) is ālaya resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; figuratively (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) SN iii.9 = Snp 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is explained at Snp-a 547 by rūpa-vatth’ādi-viññaṇass’okāso) SN v.24 =. AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokam āgamma) Dhp 34 (oka-m-okata ubbhato, i.e. oka-m-okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Buddhaghosa takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise

      1. except by Buddhaghosa’s quotation “okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaṁ". This quot. is taken from Vin i.253 which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Buddhaghosa on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at Dhp-a i.289 runs: “okaṁ okaṁ pahāya aniketa-sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i.e. at Dhp 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka-sankhātā ālayā ti attho” i.e. from the water’s abode. Buddhaghosa’s explanation is of course problematic) Dhp 91 (okam okaṁ jahanti “they leave whatever shelter they have”, explained by ālaya Dhp-a ii.170)
      1. ˚cara (feminine ˚carikā Ja vi.416 ˚cārikā MN i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i.e. tame (cp. same etymology of “tame” = Latin domus, domesticus). The passage MN i.117 MN i.118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as “water". But from the context as well as from Commentary on Ja vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at MN i.117 runs “odaheyya okacaraṁ ṭhapeyya okacārikaṁ” i.e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opposite “ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o.” i.e. takes away the male & kills the female
      2. ˚(ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Snp 1101 (= ālayaṁjahaṁ Snp-a 598 cp. Nd2 176 with variant reading oghaṁjaha)
      3. ˚anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment ‣See separately.

    Okaḍḍhati
    1. to drag away, remove Thag 2, 444 ‣See also ava˚. Okantati (okkant)
    o + kaḍḍhati
    Okantati (okkant˚)
    1. to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati MN i.129 Pv iii.102 (= ava˚ Pv-a 213); absolutive okantitvā Ja i.154 (migaṁ o. after carving the deer) Pv-a 192 (piṭṭhi maṁsāni), & okacca Ja iv.210 (Text okkacca, Burmese variant ukk˚ Commentary explains by okkantitvā).
    2. past participle avakanta & avakantita;
    3. o + kantati, cp. also apakantati
    Okappati
    1. to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4 Ps ii.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21) Mil 150 Mil 234 DN-a i.243
    o + kappati
    Okappanā
    feminine
    1. fixing one’s mind (on), settling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12 25, 96 288; Nett 15, 19, 28 Vb 170
    o + kappanā
    Okappeti
    1. to fix one’s mind on, to put one’s trust in MN i.11 Mil 234 (okappessati)
    o + kappeti
    Okampeti
    1. to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaṁ okampeti to shake one’s head MN i.108 171 SN i.118
    o + causative of kamp
    Okassati
    1. to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in absolutive ; okassa, always combined with pasayha “removing by force” DN ii.74 (Text okk˚) AN iv.16 (Text okk˚, variant reading ok˚) 65 (identical) Mil 210 Also in
    2. causative okasseti to pull out draw out Thag 2, 116 (vaṭṭiṁ = dīpavaṭṭiṁ ākaḍḍheti Thag-a 117). manuscripts often spell okk˚ o + kassati ‣See also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati
    Okāra
    1. only in stock phrase kāmānaṁ ādīnavo okāro sankileso DN i.110 DN i.148 (= lāmaka-bhāva DN-a i.277) MN i.115 379, 405 sq.; ii.145 AN iv.186 Nett 42 (variant reading vokāra) Dhp-a i.6 67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Buddhaghosa prefers folly vanity, and this suits the context better
    o + kāra from karoti, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit okāra, e.g. Mvu iii.357
    Okāsa
    1. -1. literally “visibility”, (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space DN i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā pariccheda), 243 (identical) Pv-a 14 (okāsaṁ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa
    • “visibility”, i.e. appearance, as adj looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e.g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises Pv-a 63 okāsaṁ deti to give one’s appearance, i.e. to let any one ‣See, to be seen by (dative Pv-a 19

  • occasion, chance, opportunity, permission consent, leave AN i.253 AN iv.449 Ja iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access) Snp-a 547

    • In this meaning frequently in combination with following verbs: (a) okāsaṁ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, frequently with pañhassa veyyā-karaṇāya (to ask a question), e.g. DN i.51 DN i.205 MN ii.142 SN iv.57 Vin i.114 170 Nd1 487 Pv-a 222
    • causative ˚ṁ karoti Vin ii.5 6, 276;
    • causative II. ˚ṁ kārāpeti Vin i.114 170. katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience granted leave Snp 1031 Vv-a 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114
    • (b) okāsaṁ yācati to ask permission MN ii.123
    • (c) okāsaṁ deti to give permission, to consent, give room Ja ii.3 Vv-a 138 (d) with bhū : anokāsa-bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa-bhūta not giving (literally becoming) an opportunity Snp-a 573 Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara’s Man. 4 etc
    1. ˚ādhigama finding an opportunity DN ii.214f. AN iv.449
    • ˚kamma giving opportunity or permission Snp p. 94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ṁ karoti to give permission) -matta permission Snp p. 94
    • ˚loka the visible world (manussa-loka) Vism 205 Vv-a 29
    ava + kāś to shine
  • Okāsati
    1. to be visible; causative okāseti to make visible, let appear, show SN iv.290
    2. ava + kāś
    Okiṇṇa
    1. strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of Ja v.74 Ja v.370 Pv-a 86 Pv-a 189 (= otata of Pv iii.33)
    past participle of okirati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192
    Okiraṇa

    casting out ‣See the later avakirati2, only as adjective feminine okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation a cast-out woman (cast-out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combination okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Buddhaghosa’s allegorical explanation at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa cp. kirāta o + kiraṇa

    Okirati
    1. -1. to pour down on, pour out over MN i.79 aorist okiri Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260 Pv ii.38 Pv-a 82
    2. to cast-out, reject, throw out ‣See okiraṇa.
    3. past participle okiṇṇa (q.v.)
    4. causative II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaṁ)
    o + kirati
    Okilinī
    1. ‣See okiraṇa
    Okoṭimaka
    adjective
    1. literally “having the top lowered”, with the head squashed in or down, i.e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rhys Davids translates hunchback at SN i.94 pot-bellied at SN i.237 Warren Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud-das(s)ika okoṭimaka “of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed” at Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN i.107 = ii.85 = iii.285 sq. = Pug 51 The same also at MN iii.169 SN i.237 SN ii.279 Ud 76
    o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Avs i.280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sanskrit avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on SN i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat-bellied as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pug AN 227 explains by lakuṇṭaka only
    Okkanta
    1. coming on, approaching, taking place DN ii.12 Mil 299 (middhe okkante) ‣See also avakkanta SN ii.174 SN iii.46
    past participle of okkamati
    Okkanti
    feminine
    1. entry (literally descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti MN iii.249 SN ii.3 SN iii.225 Nd2 257; Pug AN 184 Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DN-a i.130
    from okkamati
    Okkantika
    adjective
    1. coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. “flooding”)
    from okkanti
    Okkandika
    1. at Ja ii.448 is doubtful, variant reading okkantika. It is used adverb ially: okkandikaṁ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). Commentary explns. as “migo viya okkandi-katvā kīḷati”; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about(?), like a deer
    2. kand or kram?
    Okkamati
    1. literally to enter, go down into, fall into. figuratively to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻ he went to sleep ʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻ sleep overcame him ʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same an internal change, or developement, culminating in sleep So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15
    • niddaṁ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, Dhp-a i.9 Pv-a 47 At Iti 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaṁ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At DN ii.12 MN iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother’s womb (kucchiṁ okkami). At DN ii.63 occurs the question ʻ if consciousness were not to develop in the womb? ʼ (viññāṇaṁ na okkamissatha) SN v.283 ʻ abiding in the sense of bliss ʼ (sukha-saññaṁ okkamitvā) ‣See also Pug 13 = 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻ he enters on the Path ʼ).
    • causative okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to SN iv.312 (saggaṁ).
    • past participle okkanta ‣See also avakkamati
    o + kamati from kram
    Okkamana
    neuter
    1. entering into, approaching, reaching MN iii.6 AN iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya AN iv.111f. cp. 230 sq
    from okkamati
    Okkala
    1. ‣See ukkala
    Okkassa
    1. ‣See okassati
    Okkhāyati
    1. to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) SN iv.144f. (cakkhuṁ etc okkhāyati)
    ava + khāyati, corresponding to Sanskrit kṣeti from kṣi to lie
    Okkhāyika
    adjective
    1. low-lying, deep remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka-tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā MN i.80 MN i.245
    from ava + khāyin from kṣi, cp. avakkhāyati; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. suggests relation to Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. v.319
    Okkhita
    1. besprinkled, bestrewn with (—˚) Thag 2, 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta Thag-a 137) Ja v.72 (so in variant reading Text reads okkita; Commentary explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita)
    past participle of ava + ukkhati, Sanskrit avokṣita, from ukṣ to sprinkle
    Okkhitta
    1. thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta-cakkhu, with down-cast eyes, i.e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning “with eyes under control” Snp 63 Snp 411 Snp 972 Nd1 498 Nd2 177; Pv iv.344 (variant reading ukkh˚) Vv-a 6
    • For further use & meaning ‣See; avakkhitta
    past participle of okkhipati
    Okkhipati
    1. to throw down or out, cast down, drop; figuratively usually applied to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning “keep under, restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati); aorist ˚khipi AN iv.264 (indriyāni);
    2. absolutive ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (identical).
    3. past participle avakkhitta & okkhitta; (q.v.)
    4. ava + khipati; Sanskrit avakṣipati
    Ogacchati
    1. to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set DN i.240 (opposite uggacchati) AN iv.101 (udakāni og.) ‣See also ava˚;
    ava + gacchati
    Ogaṇa
    adjective
    1. separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80 Ja iv.432 = (gaṇaṁ ohīna Commentary )
    Vedic ogaṇa with dialectical o for ava
    Ogadha
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases viz.; Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha; diving into name Besides these only in jagat’ogadha steeped in the world SN i.186
      Sanskrit avagāḍha; Pali form with shortened a, from ava + gāh ‣See gādha1 & gāhati
    Ogamana
    neuter
    1. going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to; uggamana (rising), therefore frequently variant reading ogg DN i.10 DN i.68 DN-a i.95 (= atthangamana) Vv-a 326
    o + gam + ana; Sanskrit avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the Pali could be derived from the Sanskrit On the other hand the Sanskrit cannot be derived from the Pali for it was formed at a time & place when & where Pali was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sanskrit was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word-formation common to the two languages
    Ogahana
    neuter
    1. submersion ducking, bathing; figuratively for bathing-place Snp 214 (= manussānaṁ nahāna-tittha Snp-a 265) ‣See also avagāhana
    o + gahana from gāhati; Sanskrit avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha
    Ogādha1
    adjective
    1. immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in (—˚), spelt ogāḷha Mil 1 (abhidhamma-vinay˚). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. cp. pariyogāḷha
    Sanskrit avagāḍha; ava + gādha2
    Ogādha2
    neuter
    1. a firm place, firm ground, only in compound ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing AN iii.297f.
    ava + gādha2
    Ogāha
    1. diving into; only in compound pariy˚;. Ogahati (ogaheti)
    from o + gah
    Ogāhati (ogāheti)
    1. to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. accusative or
    2. locative ). Pv ii.1211 Vv 61 (= anupavisati Vv-a 42), 392 (sālavanaṁ o = pavisati Vv-a 177). ogāheti Pv-a 155 (pokkharaṇiṁ)
    3. absolutive ogāhetvā MN iii.175 (Text ogah˚; variant reading ogāhitvā) Pv-a 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaṁ, variant reading ˚itvā) ‣See also ava˚;
    4. Sanskrit avagāhate; ava + gāhati
    Ogāhana
    neuter
    1. plunging into (—˚) Pv-a 158
    from ogāhati
    Ogilati
    1. to swallow down (opposite uggilati) M. i.393 (infinitive ogilituṁ) Mil 5 (identical)
    o + gilati
    Oguṇṭhita
    1. covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207 Pv-a 86 (variant reading okuṇṭhita)
    past participle of oguṇṭheti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avaguṇṭhita, e.g. Jtm 30
    Oguṇṭheti
    1. to cover, veil over, hide SN iv.122 (absolutive oguṇṭhitvā sīsaṁ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā variant reading SS. okuṇṭhitū).
    2. past participle oguṇṭhita (q.v.)
    3. o + guṇṭheti
    Ogumpheti
    1. to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (passive ogumphiyanti; variant readings ogumbhiyanti ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā)
    2. ava + denominative of gumpha garland
    Oggata
    1. gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (identical = ratt’andhakāre) Thag 1, 477 (anoggatasmiṁ suriyasmiṁ)
    past participle of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of contrast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller Pali Grammar 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata
    Ogha
    1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water Vv-a 48 (udak’ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dhp 47 Vism 512 Vv-a 110 Dhp-a ii.274 = Thag-a 175
    2. (always in singular) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation To him who has “crossed the flood”, oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details ‣See Snp 173 Snp 219 Snp 471 Snp 495 Snp 1059 Snp 1064 Snp 1070 Snp 1082 AN ii.200f. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts AN iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095 where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at SN i.3 and Thag 1, 15 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the “flood” is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill-temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at SN i.126 are possibly these last. Snp 945 says that the flood is gedha greed and the avijjogha of Pug 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path SN i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaṁ); iv.257; v.59; Iti iii (˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith SN i.214 = Snp 184 = Mil 36 mindfulness SN v.168 SN v.186 the island Dhp 25 and the dyke Thag 1, 7 Snp 4 (cp. DN ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the
    3. plural, and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants) ‣See DN iii.230 DN iii.276 SN iv.175 SN iv.257 SN v.59 SN v.292 SN v.309 Nd1 57 159 Nd2 178 When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151 Vb 25f. 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114
      1. -24). Grouped in combination āsavagantha-ogha-yoga-agati-taṇh’upādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (Vv-a 48 110 ‣See above 1)
      1. ˚ātiga one who has overcome the flood Snp 1096 (cp Nd2 180)
      2. ˚tiṇṇa identical SN i.3 SN i.142 Snp 178 Snp 823 Snp 1082 Snp 1101 Snp 1145Dhp 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa Dhp-a iv.109) Vv 6428 (= catunnaṁ oghānaṁ saṁsāra-mah’oghassa taritattā o. Vv-a 284); 827 Nd1 159 Nd2 179
      Vedic ogha and augha; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ogha, e.g. Divy 95 caturogh’ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etymology uncertain
    Oghana
    neuter watering, flooding (?) MN i.306 (variant reading ogha).
    Oghaniya
    adjective
    1. that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs translation 308) Vb 12 25 & passim Dhs-a 49
    from ogha(na)
    Ocaraka
    1. in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā Commentary on Ud 66)
    • Thus also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli
    • Vin iii.47 52 MN i.129 = 189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?) SN i.79 (purisā carā (variant reading corā) ocarakā (okacarā variant reading SS) janapadaṁ ocaritvā etc.; cp. Kindred Sayings p. 106 note 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.)
    from ocarati
    Ocarati
    1. to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (absolutive ˚itvā) MN 1502 (ocarati) SN i.79 (˚itvā: so read for Text ocaritā Commentary explns. by vīmaṁsitvā taṁ taṁ pavattiṁ ñatvā).
    2. past participle ociṇṇa
    3. o + carati
    Ociṇṇa
    1. gone into, investigated, scouted, explored SN i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa)
    past participle of ocarati
    Ocita
    1. gathered, picked off Ja iii.22 Ja iv.135 Ja iv.156 Sdhp 387. Ocinati (ocinati)
    o + cita, past participle of ocināti1
    Ocināti (ocinati)
    -1.
    1. to gather, pluck, pick off Dhp-a i.366 also in past participle ocita. 2. [= Sanskrit avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2 to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) Ja vi.4 (= avajānāti Commentary )
    2. = Sanskrit avacinoti, ava + ci1
    Ocīraka
    1. ‣See odīraka
    Occhindati
    1. to cut off, sever Ja ii.388 (maggaṁ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; Burmese variant ochijjati), 404
    o + chindati
    Ojavant
    adjective
    1. possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength MN i.480 SN i.212 (so read for ovajaṁ; phrase ojavaṁ asecanakaṁ of Nibbāna, trsld. “elixir”) Thag 2, 196 (identical ojavantaṁ Thag-a 168) AN iii.260 (an˚ of food, i.e. not nourishing Dhp-a i.106
    from ojā; Vedic ojasvant in different meaning: powerful
    Ojavantatā
    feminine
    1. richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality Ja i.68 (of milk)
    abstract from ajavant
    Ojahāti
    1. to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, absolutive ohāya DN i.115 (ñāti-sanghaṁ & hirañña-suvaṇṇaṁ) MN ii.166 (identical) Ja v.340 (= chaḍḍetvā Commentary ) Pv-a 93 (maṁ). passive avahīyati & ohīyati; , past participle ohīna (q.v.)

      • ‣ See also ohanati
      o + jahati
    Ojā
    feminine
    1. strength, but only in meaning of strength-giving, nutritive essence (appl; d. to food) MN i.245 SN ii.87 SN v.162 (dhamm’) AN iii.396 Ja i.68 Dhs 646 740, 875 Mil 156 Dhp-a ii.154 (paṭhav˚) ‣See also definition at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkār’āhāra. The compound form is oja, e.g. ojadāna Ja v.243 ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341
    Vedic ojas nt., also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit oja neuter Divy 105; from *aug to increase, as in Latin auges, augustus & auxilium Gothic aukan (augment), Anglo-Saxon ēacian; cp. also Sanskrit ukṣati & vakṣana increase
    Ojināti
    1. to conquer, vanquish, subdue Ja vi.222 (ojināmase)
    Sanskrit avajayati, ava + ji
    Oñāta
    1. despised Mil 191 Mil 229 Mil 288
    past participle o + jānāti ‣See also avañāta
    Oṭṭha1
    1. the lip AN iv.131 Snp 608 Ja ii.264 Ja iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip) 278; v.156 Dhp-a i.212 Dhp-a iii.163 iv.1 Vv-a 11 Pv-a 260 cp. bimboṭṭha
    Vedic oṣṭha, indogermanic *ō (u) sN Avestan aosta lip; Latin ōs mouth = Sanskrit āḥ Anglo-Saxon ōr margin
    Oṭṭha2
    1. . It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52 Mil 32 At Ja iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī-vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung-cart. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 150 suggests elephant
    Vedic uṣṭra, feminine uṣṭrī, buffalo = Old High German Anglo-Saxon ur, Latin urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sanskrit it means a camel
    Oṭṭhubhati
    1. to spit out MN i.79 MN i.127
    cp. Sanskrit avaṣṭhīvati
    Oḍḍita
    1. thrown out, laid (of a snare) Ja i.183 Ja ii.443 Ja v.341 Thag-a 243
    past participle of oḍḍeti
    Oḍḍeti
    1. to throw out (a net), to lay snares AN i.33 = Ja ii.37 Ja ii.153 Ja iii.184 and passim Thag-a 243 past participle oḍḍita (q.v.)
    2. for uḍḍeti (?) ‣See further under uḍḍeti
    Oḍḍha
    1. carried away, appropriated, only in compound sah-oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sanskrit sahoḍha Manu ix.270)
    better spelling oḍha, past participle of ā + vah
    Oṇata
    1. bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combined with & opposed to; uṇṇata i.e. raised & degraded, lofty and low AN ii.86 = Pug 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug AN 229); Pv iv.66 Mil 387 DN-a i.45 Pv-a 29
    past participle of oṇamati
    Oṇamati
    instrumental to incline, bend down to, bow to dative Mil 220 Mil 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400 DN-a i.112
    • causative oṇāmeti MN ii.137 (kāyaṁ).
    • past participle oṇata &
    • causative ; oṇamita
    o + namati
    Oṇamana
    neuter
    1. bending down, inclining, bowing down to Mil 234
    from oṇamati
    Oṇamita
    1. having bowed down, bowing down Mil 234
    past participle of oṇameti, causative of nam
    Oṇi
    masculine or
    • feminine )

      1. charge, only in compound oṇi-rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47 53 (= āhaṭaṁ bhaṇḍaṁ gopento)
      cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel
    Oṇīta
    1. ‣See onīta
    Oṇojana
    neuter
    1. washing off, cleaning, washing one’s hands Vin ii.31 (Buddhaghosa refers it to figuratively meaning onojeti2 by explaining as “vissajjana gift, presentation)
    from oṇojeti, Sanskrit avanejana
    Oṇojeti
    1. (with vowel assimilation o nij. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.138, complementary to remarks s.v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj˚i.39; iv.156 AN iv.210 = 214 (oṇojesi aorist ) Mil 236

    Otata
    1. stretched over, covered, spread over with Dhp 162 (variant reading otthata) Mil 307 (+ vitata) Dhp-a iii.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita) ‣See also avatata & sam-otata;
    o + tata, past participle of tan
    Otaraṇa
    adjective
    1. going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107
    from otarati
    Otarati
    1. to descend, to go down to (c. accusative ), to be-take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221
    2. aorist otari Snp-a 486 (for avaṁsari) Dhp-a i.19 (cankamanaṁ) Pv-a 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaṁ), 75

      • infinitive otarituṁ Pug 65 75 (sangamaṁ).
      • absolutive otaritvā Pv-a 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato).
      • causative II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to Ja vi.345
      • pp otiṇṇa.
      • causative I. otāreti. O
      • past participle uttarati
      o + tarati
    Otallaka
    adjective
    1. clothed in rags, poor indigent Ja iv.380 (= lāmaka olamba-vilamba-nantakadharo Commentary )
    of uncertain etymology perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ; , or from uttāḷa?
    Otāpaka
    adjective
    1. drying or dried (in the sun), with reference to food Snp-a 35 (parivāsika-bhattaṁ bhuñjati hatth’otāpakaṁ khādati)
    from otāpeti
    Otāpeti
    1. to dry in the sun Vin ii.113 Vin iv.281 Mil 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaṁ o. fig applied to mānasa)
    o + tāpeti
    Otāra

    -1. descent to, i.e. approach to, access, figuratively chance, opportunity otāraṁ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻ gets his chance ʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, MN i.334 SN i.122 SN iv.178 SN iv.185 Dhp-a iii.121 (avatāraṁ labhati Divy 144 Divy 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance Snp 446 Fausböll here translates ʻ defect ʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect

    1. . Ot gavesati to ‣Seek an opportunity, Dhp-a iii.21
    • Otārāpekkha watching for a chance, SN i.122 At one passage, AN iii.67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Commentary has nothing. ʻ Carelessness ʼ would suit the context o. gavesati to look for an opportunity Dhp-a iii.21 and otāraṁ labhati to get a chance SN i.122 SN iv.178 SN iv.185 MN i.334 Dhp-a iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraṁ labhati Divy 144 Divy 145 etc
    • access, figuratively inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adjective) AN iii.67 AN iii.259

  • (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Snp 446 (= randha vivara Snp-a 393); also in phrase otārāpekkha spying faults SN i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avatāraprekṣin Divy 322) Mrs. Rhys Davids translates the latter passage by “watching for access".

    from otarati, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avatāra. The Sanskrit avatāra is centuries later and means ʻ incarnation ʼ
  • Otāreti
    1. to cause to come down, to bring down, take down Ja i.426 Ja iv.402 Nett 21, 22 Dhp-a ii.81
    causative of otarati
    Otiṇṇa
    1. -1. (med.) gone down, descended Pv-a 104 (uddho-galaṁ na otiṇṇaṁ not gone down further than the throat)
    • (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by MN i.460 = AN ii.123 (dukkh’otiṇṇa) = Iti 89 (as variant reading ; Text has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa) MN ii.10 SN i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (identical) Snp 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, explained by Nd1 414 as “sallena viddho phuṭṭho”) Ja v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa Commentary )

  • (in special sense affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha-citto) AN iii.67 AN iii.259 (˚citta) Snp-a 322 (identical)

    • Note. otiṇṇa at SN v.162 should with variant reading SS be deleted ‣See also avatiṇṇa
    past participle of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as—˚ e.g. issâvatiṇṇa Ja v.98 dukkha˚, soka˚ etc ‣See below 2
  • Ottappa
    neuter
    1. fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse ‣See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs translation 20, also Dhs-a 124 126; Vism 8, 9 and the definition at Snp-a 181 Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures ‣See ariya-dhanā. Hiri-ottappa Iti 36 Ja i.129 hir-ottappa at MN i.271 SN ii.220 SN v.1 AN ii.78 AN iv.99 151; v.214 Iti 34 Ja i.127 Ja i.206 Vv-a 23 ‣See also hiri
    • Further passages: DN iii.212 MN i.356 SN ii.196 SN ii.206 SN ii.208 SN v.89 AN i.50 AN i.83 AN i.95 AN iii.4f. 352; iv.11 v.123 sq. Pug 71 Dhs 147 277; Nett 39
    • anottappa
    • neuter lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality AN i.50 AN i.83 AN i.95 AN iii.421 AN v.146 AN v.214 Vb 341 359, 370, 391; as adjective Iti 34 (ahirika +)
    1. ˚gāravatā respect for conscience, AN iii.331 AN iv.29
    • ˚dhana the treasure of (moral) self-control DN iii.163 DN iii.251 282 Vv-a 113
    • ˚bala the power of a (good) conscience DN iii.253 Ps ii.169, 176 Dhs 31 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame)
    from tappati1 + ud, would corresponding to a Sanskrit form *auttapya from ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya Mvu iii.53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, Pali Grammar & Fausböll Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form as also recently Kern,; Toevoegselen s.v.
    Ottappati
    1. to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil SN i.154 Ps ii.169, 176 Pug 20 21 Dhs 31 Mil 171 Ottappin & Ottapin;
    ut + tappati1
    Ottappin
    Ottāpin;
    adjective
    1. afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin DN iii.252 DN iii.282 Iti 28 119
    • (b) ottāpin MN i.43f. SN ii.159f. 196 207; iv.243 sq. AN ii.13f.; iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at SN ii.159f. 195, 206; iv.240 sq. Snp 133 (ahirika +)
    from ottappa
    Otthaṭa
    1. -1. spread over, veiled, hidden by (—˚) Mil 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog)
    • strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 (—˚). Otthata = Otthata
    • past participle of ottharati
    Otthata = Otthaṭa
    1. , variant reading at Dhp 162 for otata
    Ottharaka
    neuter
    1. a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119
    from of tharati
    Ottharaṇa
    neuter
    1. spreading over, veiling Mil 299 (mahik˚)
    from ottharati
    Ottharati
    1. to spread over, spread out, cover Mil 121 (opposite paṭikkamati, of water) ‣See also avattharati
    o + tharati, Sanskrit root str
    Odaka
    neuter
    1. water; absolute only at Ja iii.282
    • an˚ without water, dried up Thag 2, 265 (udaka-bhasta Thag-a 212). cp. combinationsītodaka, e.g. MN i.376 ‣See udaka
    1. ˚antika
    1. -1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water ‣See antika1 Kh viii.1, 3 (gambhīre odakantike which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets “a deep pit” ‣See also KhA 217 sq.)
    • “water at the end”, i.e. final ablution ‣See antika2, in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21 cp. odak-antikatā
    • feminine abstract final ablution, cleansing Ja ii.126
    • compound form of udaka
    Odagya
    neuter
    1. exultation, elation Nd1 3 = Nd2 446 = Dhs 9 86, 285, 373 Dhs-a 143 (= udaggasabhāva a “topmost” condition)
    derived from udagga
    Odana
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. boiled (milk-)rice, gruel Vin ii.214 masculine DN i.76 DN i.105 SN i.82 (nāḷik˚) Dhp-a iv.17 (identical) AN iii.49 AN iv.231 Snp 18 Ja iii.425 (til˚
      2. masculine ) Dhs 646 740, 875 Pv-a 73 Vv-a 98 Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o-k-upa-caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body ‣See kāya I. also at MN i.247
    Sanskrit odana, to Indogermanic; *ud, from which also udaka, q.v. for full etymology
    Odanika
    1. a cook Ja iii.49
    from odana
    Odaniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to rice-gruel, made of rice-gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen) Vv-a 73 (˚surā rice-liquor)
    from odana, cp. Sanskrit odanika
    Odapattakinī
    feminine adjective [feminine of uda + pattaka + in, i.e. having a bowl of water, epithet of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water Thus in enumeration of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (explained by udakapattaṁ āmasitvā vāseti) = Vv-a 73
    Odapattiyā
    1. at cp. ii.48 = last. Odarika & ya;
    Odarika
    ˚ya;
    adjective
    1. living for one’s belly, voracious, gluttonous Mil 357 Ja vi.208 (˚ya) Thag 1, 101
    from udara
    Odarikatta
    neuter
    1. stomach-filling MN i.461 Vism 71
    from odarika
    Odahati
    1. -1. to put down, to put in, supply MN i.117 (okacaraṁ ‣See under oka); ii.216 (agad’angāraṁ vaṇa-mukhe odaheyya) Thag 1, 774 (migavo pāsaṁ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified) Ja iii.201 (visaṁ odahi araññe), 272 (passaṁ o to turn one’s flanks towards, dative) Mil 156 (kāye ojaṁ odahissāma supply the body with strength)
    • (figuratively to apply, in phrase sotaṁ odahati to listen DN i.230 Dāvs v.68.
    • past participle ohita
    • o + dahati, from dhā
    Odahana
    neuter
    1. -1. putting down, applying, application MN ii.216 heaping up, storing Dhp-a iii.118 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Nett 29
    from odahati
    Odāta
    adjective Derivation unknown. The Sanskrit is avadāta, ava + dāta, past participle of hypothetical 4 to clean, purify clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions DN ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha) iii.268 AN iii.239 AN iv.94 AN iv.263 AN iv.306 AN iv.349 AN v.62 Dhs 617 = (in enumn. of colours) DN-a i.219 Vv-a 111 ‣See also ava˚;
  • ˚kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174 -vaṇṇa of white colour, white MN ii.14 Dhs 247

    • ˚vattha a white dress; adjective wearing a white dress, dressed in white DN i.7 DN i.76 DN i.104 Ja iii.425 (+ alla-kesa)
    • ˚vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) DN i.211 DN iii.118 124 sq., 210 MN i.491 ii.23 AN i.73 AN iii.384 AN iv.217 [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avadāta-vasana Divy 160
  • Odātaka
    adjective
    1. white, clean, dressed in white SN ii.284 (variant reading SS odāta) Thag 1, 965 (dhaja)
    from odāta
    Odissa
    adverb
    1. only in negative anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (? Mil 156 (should we read anudissa?)
    absolutive of o + disati = Sanskrit diśati, cp. uddissa
    Odissaka
    adjective
    1. only in adverb expression odissaka-vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opposite to anodissaka-vasena in general, universally) Ja i.82 Ja ii.146 Vv-a 97 ‣See also anodissaka & odhiso;
    2. from odissa
    Odīraka
    in odīrakajāta SN iv.193 should with variant reading be read ocīraka
    1. “with its bark off”, stripped of its bark
    = ava + cira + ka
    Odumbara
    adjective
    1. belonging to the Udumbara tree Vv 5016 cp. Vv-a 213
    from udumbara
    Odhasta
    1. fallen down, scattered MN i.124 = SN iv.176 (˚patoda; SN reads odhasata but has variant reading odhasta)
    Sanskrit avadhvasta, past participle of ava + dhvaṁsati ‣See dhaṁsati
    Odhānīya
    neuter
    1. a place for putting something down or into a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salāk’odhāniyan ti yattha salākaṁ odahanti taṁ DN E)
    • cp. samodhāneti
    from avadhāna, ava + dhā ‣See odahati
    Odhi
    1. putting down, fixing, i.e. boundary, limit, extent Dhp-a ii.80 (jaṇṇu-mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i.e. kneedeep); iv.204 (identical)
    • odhiso (
    • adverb ) limited, specifically Vb 246 Nett 12; Vism 309. O
    • past participle anodhi MN iii.219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (
    • adverb ) unlimited, universal general Ps ii.130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso “piecemeal” Kvu 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271)
    1. ˚suṅka “extent of toll”, stake Ja vi.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaṁ Commentary )
    from odahati, Sanskrit avadhi, from ava + dhā
    Odhika
    adjective
    1. “according to limit”, i.e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60 cp. Nd2 526 Ja v.392 (identical)
    from odhi
    Odhunāti
    1. to shake off MN i.229 SN iii.155 AN iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (Burmese variant ophun˚, SS otu˚) = Pv-a 256 Vin ii.317 (Buddhaghosa in explanation of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117) Mil 399 (+ vidhunāti)
    o + dhunāti
    Onaddha
    1. bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150 270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha) MN ii.64 Dhp 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182 ‣See also onayhati
    past participle of onandhati
    Onandhati
    1. to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf onandhituṁ) Mil 261
    o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form constructed from naddha after bandhati → baddha ‣See also apiḷandhati
    Onamaka
    adjective
    1. bending down, stooping Dhp-a ii.136 (an˚)
    from onamati
    Onamati
    1. to bend down instrumental, stoop DN ii.17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (identical) Vv 393 (onamitvā absolutive ).
    2. past participle oṇata
    3. o + namati
    Onamana
    neuter
    1. in compound with ˚unnamana lowering & raising, bending down & up Dhp-a; i.17
    abstract from onamati
    Onayhati
    1. to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud Dhs-a 378 (megho ākāsaṁ o.)- past participle onaddha
    2. ava + nayhati
    Onāha
    1. drawing over, covering, shrouding DN i.246 (spelt onaha) Mil 300 Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaṁ kāyaṁ onayhati)
    from ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati
    Onīta
    1. [in form = Sanskrit avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit apanīta, past participle of apa + ‣See apaneti only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta-patta-pāṇi “having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl” a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as “onitta˚” (from nij, i.e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. explanation as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i.e. “the hand is taken away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through Burmese manuscripts sources ‣See on term also Trenckner, Note. 6624 cp. apa-nīta-pātra at Mvu; iii.142. The expression is always combined with bhuttāvin “having eaten” and occurs very frequently, e.g. at Vin ii.147: DN i.109 (= DN-a i.277 q.v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above MN ii.50 MN ii.93 SN v.384 AN ii.63 Snp p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha Snp-a 456) Vv-a 118 Pv-a 278

    Oneti
    1. , probably for apaneti ‣See apaneti & past participle ; onīta.

    Onojeti
    1. ‣See oṇojeti
    Opakkamika
    adjective
    1. characterising a sensation of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā MN i.92 MN i.241 SN iv.230 = AN ii.87 = iii.131 = v.110 = Nd2 304ic = Mil 112
    from upakkama
    Opakkhin
    adjective
    1. “with wings off” i.e. having one’s wings clipped, powerless AN i.188 (˚ṁ karoti to deprive of one’s wings or strength; so read for Text opapakkhiṁ karoti)
    o + pakkhin, adjective from pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta
    Opaguyha
    1. ‣See opavayha
    Opatati
    1. to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. accusative ) Ja ii.228 (lokāmisaṁ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā
    2. absolutive ) Mil 368 Mil 396
    3. past participle opatita
    4. o + pat
    Opatita
    1. falling (down) Pv-a 29 (udaka; variant reading ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at Pv-a 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but identical passage at Kp-a 213 reads mahāsobbha-sannipātehi)
    past participle of opatati
    Opatta
    adjective
    1. with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) Ja iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita-patta Commentary )
    o + patta, Sanskrit avapattra
    Opadhika
    adjective
    1. forming a substratum for rebirth (always with reference to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885 38 as “exceedingly great”; the correct interpretation is given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 154 as “atta-bhāva-janaka paṭisandhi-pavatti-vipāka-dāyaka"
    • SN i.233 = AN iv.292 Vv 3421 Iti 20 (variant reading osadhika), 78
    from upadhi. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit after the P., aupadhika Divy 542
    Opanayika
    adjective
    1. leading to (Nibbāna) SN iv.41f. 272, 339; v.343 AN i.158 AN ii.198 DN iii.5 Vism 217
    from upaneti, upa +
    Opapakkhi
    1. in phrase ˚ṁ karoti at AN i.188 read opakkhiṁ karoti to deprive of one’s wings, to render powerless
    Opapaccayika
    adjective
    1. having the characteristic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna)
    = opapātika
    Opapātika
    adjective
    1. arisen or reborn without visible cause (i.e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu translation 2832), apparitional rebirth (Compendium 1654, q.v.) DN i.27 55, 156; iii.132, 230 (˚yoni), 265 MN i.34 MN i.73 MN i.287 MN i.401f. 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247 SN iii.206 SN iii.240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406 AN i.232 245, 269; ii.5, 89, 186; iv.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; v.265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq. Pug 16 62, 63 Vb 412f. Mil 267 Vism 552 sq., 559 DN-a i.165 313. The C on MN i.34 explns. by “sesa-yoni-paṭikkhepa-vacanaṁ etaṁ” ‣See also Pug. A 1, § 40
    from upapatti; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is a curious distortion of the Pali form, viz. aupapāduka Avs ii.89 Divy 300 Divy 627, 649
    Opapātin
    adjective = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at SN v.282 (so read for Text opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.
    Opama
    1. at Ja i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for; upama
    Opamma
    neuter
    1. likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor MN i.378 Vin v.164 Mil 1 Mil 70 Mil 330 Vism 117, 622 Thag-a 290
    from upama; cp. Sanskrit aupamya
    Oparajja
    1. viceroyalty is variant reading for uparajja. Thus at MN ii.76 AN iii.154
    Opavayha
    adjective noun
    1. fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state-elephant (of the elephant of the king) SN v.351 = Nett 136 (variant reading opaguyha Commentary explns. by ārohana-yogga) Ja ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv.91 (variant reading ˚guyha); vi.488 (Text opavuyha, variant reading opaguyha gajuttama opavayha = rāja-vāhana Commentary ) DN-a i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, variant reading ˚guyha) Vv-a 316 (Text opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha)
    from upavayha, gerundive of upavahati
    Opasamika
    adjective
    1. leading to quiet, allaying quieting; epithet of Dhamma DN iii.264f. AN ii.132
    from upa + sama + ika; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aupaśamika Avs ii.107; MN Vastu ii.41
    Opasāyika
    adjective
    1. being near at hand or at one’s bidding (?) MN i.328
    from upasaya, upa + śī
    Opāṭeti
    1. to tear asunder, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviṁ opāṭetvā)
    ava + causative of paṭ; , Sanskrit avapāṭayati
    Opāta
    1. -1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent Ja vi.561
    • a pitfall Ja i.143 Dhp-a iv.211
    • o + pāta from patati to fall, Vedic avapāta
    Opāteti
    1. to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i.e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaṁ opāteti to interrupt a conversation MN ii.10 MN ii.122 MN ii.168 AN iii.137 392 sq.; Snp p. 107
    • to drop, to omit (a syllable Vin iv.15
    • o + causative of pat
    Opāna
    neuter
    1. . Only in phrase opāna-bhūta adjective a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men’s wants; explained as “khata-pokkharaṇī viya hutvā” DN-a i.298 = Ja v.174

      • Vin i.236 DN i.137 MN i.379 AN iv.185 Vv 654 Pv iv.160 Ja iii.142 Ja iv.34 Ja v.172 Vb 247 Mil 411 Vism 18 Vv-a 286 DN-a 1177, 298
      o + pāna from pivati. Vedic avapāna. The Pali Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e.g. Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.298 = udapāna
    Opārambha
    adjective
    1. acting as a support, supporting, helpful MN ii.113
    from upārambha
    Opiya
    is metric for upiya
    1. undergoing, going into SN i.199 = Thag 1, 119 (nibbānaṁ hadayasmiṁ opiya; Mrs. Rhys Davids trsls. “suffering name in thy heart to sink”, SN A. hadayasmiṁ pakkhipitvā
    upa + absolutive of i
    Opilavati
    1. to be immersed, to sink down SN ii.224 causative opilāpeti ‣See sep
    2. Sanskrit avaplavati, ava + plu
    Opilāpita
    1. immersed into (locative ), gutted with water, drenched Ja i.212 Ja i.214
    2. past participle of opilāpeti
    Opilāpeti
    1. to immerse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = locative ) Vin i.157 = 225 = SN i.169 (Commentary nimujjapeti ‣See Kindred Sayings 318) MN i.207 = iii.157 Dhp-a iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with variant readings for opīḷetvā) Ja iii.282
    2. past participle opilāpita
    3. causative of opilavati, cp. Sanskrit avaplāvayati
    Opīḷeti
    1. in “bhattaṁ pacchiyaṁ opīḷetvā” at Dhp-a ii.3 is with variant reading to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i.e. dropping the food into the basket
    Opuñchati
    1. is uncertain reading for opuñjeti
    Opuñchana
    1. or Opuñjana neuter

      1. heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer Dhp-a iii.296
      from opuñjeti
    Opuñjeti
    or ˚ati
    1. to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 153 trsls. “cleanse”) Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaṁ) Ja iv.377 (opuñchetvā Text, but variant reading opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā) Dhp-a iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). causative opuñjāpeti in same meaning “to smear” Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; variant reading opuñchāpetvā)
    2. o + puñjeti denominative of puñja, heap
    Opunāti
    also as opuṇāti (Dh)
    1. to winnow, sift; figuratively lay bare, expose Dhp 252 (= bhusaṁ opuṇanto viya Dhp-a iii.375) Snp-a 312 causative opunāpeti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit opunāpeti Mvu iii.178
      1. to cause to sift AN i.242 Ja i.447
      o + punāti from
    Opuppha
    1. bud, young flower Ja vi.497 (variant readings p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta)
    o + puppha
    Opeti
    1. [unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in causative sense, i e.
    2. causative from upa + i. Trenckner Note. 77, 78 offers an etymology of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates derivation of opiya from opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya (“conform with this” ‣See ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl formation is upamā (“likeness”). Trenckner’s explanation of ūpiya as derived from ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning to make go into (c.
    3. locative ), to deposit, receive (synonym with osāpeti) SN i.236 (SA na.. pakkhipanti) = Thag 2, 283 Ja v.252 (Text upeti); in which Thag 2, 283 has oseti (Thag-a 216 with explanation of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219).
    4. aorist opi Ja iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss).
    5. absolutive opitvā (opetvā?) Ja iv.457 (gloss khipetvā).

    Ophuṭa
    1. covered, obstructed; always in combinationāvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa ovuta) DN i.246 (Text ophuta, variant readings ophuṭa & opuṭa) MN iii.131 (Text ovuṭa) Nd1 24 ovuṭa, variant reading SS ophuṭa) Nd2 365 (ophuṭa, Burmese variant oputa; SS ovuta) DN-a i.59 (oputa) Snp-a 596 (oputa = pariyo-naddha) Mil 161 (ovuta)
    a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava-vuta (= Sanskrit vṛta from vṛ; opposite *apāvuta Pali apāruta) and ava-phuṭa (Sanskrit sphuṭa from sphuṭ;). We should probably read ovuta in all instances
    Obandhati
    1. to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā absolutive )
    2. o + bandhati
    Obhagga
    1. broken down, broken up, broken SN v.96 (˚vibhagga) AN iv.435 (obhagg’obhagga) Dhp-a i.58 (identical) Ja i.55 (˚sarīra)
    o + bhagga, past participle of bhañj, Sanskrit avabhagna
    Obhañjati
    1. to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only causative II. obhañjāpeti Ja i.499 (dhovāpeti +) ‣See also
    2. past participle obhagga
    3. o + bhañj
    Obhata
    1. having taken away or off, only in compound ˚cumbaṭā with the “cumbaṭa” taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = Vv-a 73 (Hardy: “a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head"?)
    past participle of obharati
    Obharati
    1. to carry away or off, to take off. past participle obhata
    2. ava + bharati, cp. Sanskrit avabharati = Latin aufero
    Obhāsa
    1. shine, splendour, light, lustre, effulgence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also “aura ‣See Compendium 2141 with Commentary explanation “rays emitted from the body on account of insight”- DN i.220 (effulgence of light) MN iii.120 MN iii.157 AN ii.130 AN ii.139 AN iv.302 Iti 108 (obhāsakara); Ps i.114, 119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq. 159, 162; Vism 28, 41 Pv-a 276 (˚ṁ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23 Snp-a 497 ‣See also avabhāsa
    from obhāsati
    Obhāsati1
    1. to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti Pv-a 10). causative obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent to illumine, to fill with light or splendour

      • pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti Pv-a 176) Mil 336 ppr obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna Pv-a 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaṁ karonto Pv-a 71)
      • absolutive obhāsetvā SN i.66 Kh v. = Snp p. 46; Kp-a 116 (ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaṁ karitvā).
      • past participle avabhāsita
      o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sanskrit avabhāsati
    Obhāsati2
    1. to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262 Vin iii.128
    ava + bhāsati from bhāṣ; Sanskrit apabhāṣati
    Obhāsana
    neuter-adjective
    1. shining Vv-a 276 (Hardy: “speaking to someone”)
    from obhāsa, cp. Sanskrit avabhāsana
    Obhoga
    1. bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaṁ kātabbaṁ)
    o + bhoga from bhuj to bend
    Oma
    adjective
    1. lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; plural omā AN iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors) Snp 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954 Snp-a 347 (= paritta lāmaka)

      • More frequently in negative form anoma not inferior i.e. excellent
      Vedic avama, superl. formation from ava
    Omaka
    adjective
    1. lower in rank, inferior; low, insignificant Nd1 306 (appaka +) Ja ii.142 Dhp-a i.203
    oma + ka
    Omaṭṭha
    1. touched SN i.13 = 53 = Thag 1, 39
    past participle of omasati
    Omaddati
    1. -1. to rub Ja vi.262 (sarīraṁ omaddanto) Mil 220
    • to crush, oppress MN i.87 = Nd2 1996 (abhivaggena) Ja ii.95
    • o + maddati from mṛd, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avamardati Jtm 3133
    Omasati
    1. -1. (literally) to touch Ja v.446
    • (figuratively) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4f.
    • past participle omaṭṭha
    • o + mas = Sanskrit mṛṣ
    Omasanā
    feminine
    1. touching, touch Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā)
    from omasati
    Omāna1
    1. disregard, disrespect, contempt Dhp-a ii.52 (+ atimāna) cp. following & ‣See also; avamāna
    from o + man, think. The Sanskrit avamāna is later
    Omāna2
    1. [at Ja ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻ Oh bird, flying high ʼ. With the present material we ‣See no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the Commentary “flying”, the Burmese variant is ḍemāna (from ḍī. Commentary explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, Pali Grammar 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna
    Omissaka
    adjective
    1. mixed, miscellaneous, various Ja v.37 Ja vi.224 (˚parisā). cp. vo˚
    o + missaka
    Omukka
    adjective
    1. cast off, second hand Vin i.187
    from + muc
    Omuñcati
    1. to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff DN i.126 (veṭhanaṁ as form of salute) Ja ii.326 vi.73 (sāṭakaṁ); Vism 338 Pv-a 63 (tacaṁ) Vv-a 75 (ābhāraṇāni). causative omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273
    2. past participle omutta
    3. o + muc
    Omutta
    1. released, freed, discharged, taken off Iti 56 (read omutt’assa Mārapāso for Text omukkassa masculine )
    2. past participle of omuñcati
    Omutteti
    1. to discharge urine, passive water MN i.79 MN i.127
    Sanskrit avamūtrayati, denominative from mūtra, urine
    Oyācati
    1. to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137
    o + yāc, opposite āyācati
    Ora
    adjective
    1. below, inferior, posterior. Usually as neuter oraṁ the below, the near side, this world Snp 15 Vv-a 42 (orato ablative from this side)

      • Cases
      • adverb ially:
      • accusative oraṁ (with ablative on this side of, below, under, within MN ii.142 Snp 804 (oraṁ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraṁ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; identical passage at Pv i.1012 has uddhaṁ) Pv-a 154 (dahato); instrumental orena J. v.72 ablative orato on this side Mil 210
      1. ˚pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Snp 1 ‣See Snp-a 13 = Nd; 2 422b and cp. paroparaṁ Mil 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean) -pure (avarapure) below the fortress MN i.68 (bahinagare +) -mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85 203 Iti 85 DN i.3 MN i.449 AN iv.22 AN v.157 AN v.164 Vb 247 Nett 62 Dhp-a i.203 DN-a i.55
      compar. formation from ava; Vedic avara
    Oraka
    adjective
    1. inferior, posterior Vin i.19 Vin ii.159 MN ii.47 Snp 692 (= paritta Snp-a 489 cp. omaka) Ja i.381
    ora + ka
    Orata
    1. -1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Mil 210 (cp. abhirata)
    • desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself Vv-a 72 (= virato; cp. uparata)
    • o + rata, past participle of ramati
    Orabbhika
    1. one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) MN i.343 MN i.412 SN ii.256 AN i.251 AN ii.207 = Pug 56 iii.303 Thag 2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka Thag-a 204) Ja v.270 Ja vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug AN 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko)
    from urabbha. The Sanskrit aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning
    Oramati
    1. to stay or be on this side, i.e. to stand still, to get no further Ja i.492 (oramituṁ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema) Note. This form may also be explained & taken as imper of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i.e. let us desist, let us give up, (i.e. we shall not get through to the other side)
    2. ˚anoramati (negative) ‣See sep
    • On the whole question ‣See also Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 154 sq
    denominative from ora instead of orameti
    Oramāpeti
    1. (causative II. of oramati] to make someone desist from Ja v.474 (manussa-maṁsā).

    Orambhāgiya
    adjective
    1. being a share of the lower, i e this world, belonging to the kāma world, epithet of the 5 saṁyojanāni (‣ See also saṁyojana) DN i.156 DN iii.107 DN iii.108 132 MN i.432 Iti 114 Pug 22 Nett 14 Snp-a 13 DN-a i.313
    • Note. AN curious form of this word is found at Thag 2, 166 orambhāga-manīya, with gloss (Thag-a 158) oraṁ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted
    ora + bhāga + iya; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avarabhāgīya, e.g. Divy 533
    Oravitar
    1. doubtful reading at. AN v.149 meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The variant readings are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi
    ora + agent noun of vitarati?
    Orasa
    adjective
    1. belonging to one’s own breast, self-begotten, legitimate; innate natural, own MN ii.84 MN iii.29 SN ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83 Ja iii.272 Vv 5022 Thag-a 236 Kp-a 248 Pv-a 62 (urejāta +)
    From ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa
    Orima
    1. the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opposite yonder) only in combinationorima-tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opposite pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) DN i.244 SN iv.175 (sakkāyass’adhivacanaṁ) = Snp-a 24 Dhs 597 Vism 512 (˚tīra-mah’ogha) Dhp-a ii.99
    superl. formation from ora, equivalent to avama
    Oruddha
    1. -1. kept back, restrained, subdued AN iii.393
    • imprisoned Ja iv.4 ‣See also ava˚
    • from orundhati. In meaning equalling Sanskrit aparuddha as well as ava˚
    Orundhati
    1. to get, attain, take for a wife. absolutive orundhiya Ja iv.480
    2. aorist oruddha Thag 2, 445
    3. past participle oruddha ‣See also avarundhati
    4. cp. Sanskrit avarundhate
    Orodha
    1. obstruction; confinement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290 Vin iv.261 (rāj’orodhā harem-lady, concubine) Ja iv.393 Ja iv.404
    from orundhati; Sanskrit avarodha
    Oropaṇa
    neuter
    1. taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes’ oropaṇa hair-cutting Dhp-a ii.53 (Text has at one place orohaṇa, variant reading oropaṇa)
    abstract from oropeti
    Oropeti
    1. to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) Vv-a 64 (bhattabhājanaṁ oropeti)- absolutive oropayitvā Snp 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd2 181 apanetvā Snp-a 91) Ja vi.211 (kesamassuṁ)
    2. causative from orohati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avaropayati
    Orohaṇa
    neuter
    1. descent, in udak’orohaṇânuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i.e. bathing Pug 55 Ja i.193 Mil 350
    abstract from orahati
    Orohati
    1. to descend, climb down DN ii.21 MN iii.131 Ja i.50 Mil 395 Pv-a 14 causative oropeti (q.v.)
    2. o + rohati
    Olaggeti
    1. to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain MN ii.178 AN iii.384 (variant readings oloketi olabheti, oketi) Thag 1, 355
    causative of o + lag
    Olagga
    1. restrained, checked Thag 1, 356
    Sanskrit avalagna, past participle of avalagati
    Olaṅghanā
    feminine
    1. bending down Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā)
    from olaṅgheti
    Olaṅgheti
    1. to make jump down, in phrase ullaṅgheti olaṅgheti to make dance up down Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (the latter has Text ullaggheti ol˚; but variant reading ullangheti ol˚)
    causative of ava + laṅgh
    Olamba
    adjective
    1. hanging down Vin iii.49 Ja iv.380 (˚vilamba)
    from ava + lamb
    Olambaka
    adjective-noun
    1. -1. adjective hanging down Vv-a 32 (˚dāma)
    2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick Ja iv.40 (hatth˚)
    3. (b) plumb-line Ja vi.392
    ‣See olambati
    Olambati
    avalambati;
    1. to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti Pv-a 77); ii.102 (= olambanti Pv-a 142); olambati MN iii.164 (+ ajjholambati) Ja i.194 Pv-a 46
    • ger avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva Pv-a 189 & olambetvā Ja iii.218 ‣See also olubbha
    ava + lamb
    Olambanaka
    1. an armchair, literally a chair with supports Vin ii.142
    from olambati
    Olikhati
    1. to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) AN iii.295 (veṇiṁ olikhituṁ); Thag 1 169 (kese olikhissaṁ); 2, 88
    o + likh, cp. Sanskrit apalikhati
    Oligalla
    1. a dirty pool near a village MN iii.168 SN v.361 AN i.161 AN iii.389 Mil 220 Vism 343
    of unknown etymology: probably Non-Aryan, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit oḍigalla Saddh. Pali chap. vi.
    Oliyati
    1. to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to Iti 43 Nett 174. past participle olīna ‣See avalīna
    2. o + līyate from
    Olīna
    1. adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated MN i.200 (˚vuttika) Ja vi.569 (anolīna-mānasa) Vb 350 (˚vuttikā) Mil 393 (an˚)
    past participle of oliyate
    Olīyanā
    1. adhering, infatuation Ps i.157 Dhs 1156 1236
    from oliyati
    Olugga
    1. breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away MN i.80 MN i.245 (olugga-vilugga), 450 (identical) Vism 107 (identical)
    past participle of olujjati
    Olujjati
    1. to break off, go to wreck, fall away SN ii.218 (variant reading ull˚). past participle olugga
    2. Sanskrit avarujyate, passive of ava + ruj
    Olubbha
    1. holding on to leaning on, supporting oneself by (with accusative ); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaṁ olubbha leaning on a stick e.g. MN i.108 (= daṇḍaṁ olambitvā Commentary ‣See M i.539) AN iii.298 Thag 2, 27 (= ālambitvā) Vv-a 105 In other connections: SN i.118 SN iii.129 Ja i.265 (āvāṭa-mukha-vaṭṭiyaṁ); vi.40 (hatthe) Dhp-a ii.57 (passaṁ; gloss olambi) Vv-a 217 219
    2. assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, absolutive of olambati. The form presents difficulties ‣See also Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 156
    Olumpeti
    1. to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, variant readings ulumpetvā, oḷump˚ odametvā)
    o + causative of lup
    Olokana
    neuter
    1. looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhass’)
    ‣See oloketi
    Olokanaka
    adjective-noun
    1. window Vin ii.267 (olokanakena olokenti, adverb )
    from oloketi
    Oloketi
    1. to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider Ja i.85 Ja i.108 (nakkhattaṁ); Pv ii.964 Dhp-a i.10 12 25, 26; ii.96 (variant reading for Text voloketi); iii.296 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 124
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avalokayati or apaloketi
    Oḷāra
    1. at Pv-a 110 is with Burmese variant to be read uḷāra
    Oḷārika
    adjective
    1. gross, coarse, material, ample ‣See on term Dhs translation 208 & Compendium 159 note 4 DN i.37 DN i.186 sq (attā) 195, 197, 199 MN i.48 MN i.139 MN i.247 MN ii.230 MN iii.16 299 SN ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opposite sukhuma); iv.382 (identical); v.259 sq. AN iv.309f. (nimittaṁ obhāso) Ja i.67 Dhs 585 675, 889 Vb 1 13, 379; Vism 155 (˚anga) 274 sq. (with reference to breathing), 450
    from uḷāra
    Oḷumpika
    adjective
    1. Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no reference in Pāli Canon?); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit olumpika Mvu iii.113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443
    Deriv. unknown, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit olumpika and oḍumpika Mvu iii.113 443. In the Śvet-Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.
    Ovaja
    1. at SN i.212 read ojava
    Ovaṭa
    1. obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = iv.52 AN iv.277 (variant reading ovāda); also an˚; ibid
    o + vaṭa, past participle of vṛ; , another form of ovuta = ophuta, q.v.
    Ovaṭṭika
    neuter
    1. -1. girdle, waistband MN ii.47 Ja iii.285 (variant reading ovaddhi˚); Vism 312 Dhp-a ii.37 iv.206 DN-a i.218 (Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 156: a kind of bag)
    • a bracelet Vin ii.106 (= vaḷayaṁ Commentary ). 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚) Ja ii.197 (variant reading ovaddhi˚) ‣See also ovaddheyya (ava˚)
    • from ava + vṛt
    Ovadati
    1. to give advice, to admonish exhort, instruct, usually combined with anusāsati
    • pres ovadati Vin iv.52f. Dhp-a i.11 13;
    • imperative ovadatu MN iii.267
    • pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati) Snp 1051 (= anusāseyya).
    • aorist ovadi Dhp-a i.397
    • infinitive ovadituṁ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituṁ).
    • gerundive ovaditabba Vin ii.5 and ovadiya ‣See sep.
    • passive avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pug 64 (anusāsiyamāna)
    o + vadati. The Sanskrit avavadati is some centuries later and is different in meaning
    Ovadiya
    adjective
    1. who or what can be advised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya) Vv 8436 (ovāda-vasena vattabbaṁ Vv-a 345)
    gerundive of ovadati
    Ovaddheyya
    1. a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254 ‣See the note at Vinaya Texts ii.154 Vin i.254 is not clear ‣See explanation by Commentary on p. 388. The variant readings are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya ovaṭṭheyya˚
    Ovamati
    1. to throw up, vomit Ud 78
    o + vam
    Ovaraka
    neuter
    1. an inner room Vin i.217 MN i.253 Ja i.391 (jāto varake Text to be read as jāt’ovarake i.e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at Vv-a 158); Vism 90, 431 Vv-a 304 (= gabbha)
    Deriv. uncertain. The Sanskrit apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sanskrit apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha “lying-in chamber”
    Ovariyāna
    1. forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Thag 2, 367 (variant reading ovadiyāna, thus also Thag-a 250 explained “maṁ gacchantiṁ avaditvā gamanaṁ nisedhetvā”). Ovassa & ka;
    absolutive of o + vṛ
    Ovassa
    ˚ka;
    1. ‣See anovassa(ka)
    Ovassati
    1. to rain down on, to make wet. - passive ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121
    2. o + vassati
    Ovahati
    1. to carry down passive ovuyhati Iti 114 (indicative & pot. ovuyheyya)
    2. o + vahati
    Ovāda
    1. advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = ii.228; ii.255 iv.52 DN i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king) Ja iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92 Dhp-a i.13 398 (dasavidha o.) Vv-a 345
    • ovādaṁ deti to give advice Pv-a 11 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 15,
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avavāda in same sense as P.
    Ovādaka
    adjective-noun
    1. admonishing (active) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser MN i.145 AN i.25 SN v.67 Iti 107
    • anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible Ja i.159 Ja iii.256 Ja iii.304 Ja v.314
    from ovāda; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avavādaka in same meaning, e.g. Divy 48 Divy 254, 385
    Ovādin
    adjective-noun
    1. = ovādaka MN i.360 (anovādin)
    from ovāda
    Ovijjhati
    1. to pierce through Vism 304
    ava + vyadh
    Ovuta
    1. ‣See ophuta
    Ovuyhati
    1. to be carried down (a river) Iti 114
    passive of ovahati
    Osakkati
    1. to draw back, move back DN i.230 Ja iv.348 (for apavattati Commentary ); v.295 (an-osakkitvā) ‣See also Trenckner, Note. p. 60
    o + sakkati from Pali sakk = * Sanskrit ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. Pali osappati & Sanskrit apasarpati
    Osajjati
    1. to emit, evacuate Pv-a 268 (vaccaṁ excrement, + ohanati). past participle osaṭṭha
    2. o + sṛj
    Osaṭa
    1. having withdrawn to (accusative ), gone to or into, undergone, visited MN i.176 MN i.469 (padasamācāro sangha-majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaṁ vass˚āvāsaṁ o.) Mil 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū) ‣See also avasaṭa
    2. past participle of o + sṛ
    Osaṇheti
    1. to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese) Ja iv.219 (identical)
    o + saṇheti, denominative from saṇha
    Osadha
    neuter
    1. ‣See osadhī
    Vedic auṣadha
    Osadhika
    variant reading Iti 20 for opadhika.
    Osadhikā
    feminine
    1. remedy, especially poultice, fomentation Ja iv.361
    from osadha
    Osadhī
    feminine
    1. . There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine whether of herbs or other ingredients. cp. e.g. AN iv.100 (bījagāma-bhūtagāmā.. osadhi-tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610 with Snp 296 (gāvo … yāsu jāyanti osadhā) DN i.12 cp. DN-a i.98 Pv iii.53 Pv-a 86 Ja iv.31 Ja vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻ balm of salvation ʼ (amatosadha) Mil 247 Osadhi-tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, SN i.65 Iti 20 =. AN v.62 Vv 92 Pv ii.110; cp. Pv-a 71 Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence other translators render it ʻ morning star ʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star
    Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment
    Osanna
    adjective
    1. given out, exhausted, weak Mil 250 (˚viriya)
    o + past participle of syad to move on
    Osappati
    1. to draw back, give way Ja vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati)
    o + sṛp to creep
    Osaraka
    adjective
    1. of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over-hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153 ‣See also osāraka
    from osarati, osarana & osaṭa
    Osaraṇa
    neuter
    1. -1. return to, going into (accusative ) visiting Ja i.154 (gāmantaṁ ˚kāle)
    2. withdrawal distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Snp 538 (ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho Snp-a 434)
    from avasarati
    Osarati
    1. to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit MN i.176 (gāmaṁ etc.); ii.122. past participle osaṭa ‣See also avasarati
    2. o + sṛ
    Osāna
    neuter
    1. stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion SN v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344 Snp 938
    from osāpeti
    Osāpeti
    1. P. Text S. 1887, 158 causative of ava + , Sanskrit avasāyayati (cp. Pali avaseti, oseti), but by MSS & Pāli grammarians taken as
    2. causative of; sṛ; : sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sanskrit sārayati = Pali sāreti (thus variant readings ). Not with Trenckner, Note. 78 and Müller Pali Grammar 42.
    3. causative of ā + viś to sling to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide SN i.81 (
    4. future osāpayissāmi; variant readings oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ Ud 66 (Text otarissāmi? variant readings obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚ Commentary paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi) Ja i.25 (osāpeti, variant reading obhāseti) Nd1 412 (in explanation of osāna) Vv-a 77 (agghaṁ o to fix a price; variant readings ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = Dhp-a; iii.108 (variant reading osāreti). cp. osāreti
    5. With Morris, J.
    Osāraka
    1. shelter, outhouse Ja iii.446 ‣See also osaraka
    from osarati
    Osāraṇā
    feminine
    1. -1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322 Mil 344
    • procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) Dhp-a ii.1 (Text oss˚)
    • from osāreti.3
    Osārita
    1. restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138
    past participle of osāreti.3
    Osāreti
    1. -1. (with variant reading osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (‣ See also opeti) Ja vi.52 Ja vi.67 (pattaṁ thavikāya o.)
    • to bring out, expound, propound, explain Mil 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaṁ), 203 (kāraṇaṁ), 349 (lekhaṁ to compose a letter)

  • (technical term) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96 322, 340; iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti)

    • passive osāriyati Vin ii.61
    • past participle osārita (cp. osāraṇā
    causative of o + sṛ; to flow
  • Osiñcati
    1. -1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262 MN i.87 (telena) Pv i.85 (ppr osiñcaṁ = āsiñcanto Pv-a 41)
    • to scoop out, empty drain (water) Ja v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya Commentary ).
    • past participle avasitta & ositta;
    • o + siñcati
    Osita
    1. inhabited (by), accessible (to) Snp 937 (an˚). cp. vy˚
    past participle of ava +
    Ositta
    1. sprinkled, besprinkled Ja v.400 ‣See also avasitta
    past participle of osiñcati
    Osīdati
    1. to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) SN iv.314 (osīda bho sappi-tela) Mil 277 (nāvā osīdati). absolutive osīditvā Ja ii.293
    2. causative II osīdāpeti Ja iv.139 (nāvaṁ)
    3. from o + sad
    Osīdana
    neuter
    1. sinking Dhs-a 363
    from osīdati
    Ossa
    1. ‣See ussa
    Ossakk˚
    1. ‣See osakk˚;
    Ossagga
    1. relaxation, in compound sati-ossagga (for which more common sati-vossagga) relaxation of memory inattention, thoughtlessness Dhp-a iii.163 (for pamāda Dhp 167) ‣See vossagga
    from ossajati
    Ossajjati
    1. to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release DN ii.106 (aorist ossaji) Snp 270 = SN i.207 Thag 1, 321 Ja iv.260
    2. past participle ossaṭṭha ‣See also avassajati
    3. o + sṛj send off
    Ossajjana
    neuter
    1. release, dismissal, sending off DN-a i.130
    from ossajati
    Ossaṭṭha
    1. let loose, released, given up, thrown down DN ii.106 SN iii.241 Ja i.64 Ja iv.460 (= nissaṭṭha)
    past participle of ossajati
    Ossanna
    1. sunk, low down, deficient, lacking Ja i.336 (opposite ussanna) Hardly to be derived from ava + syad
    past participle of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna
    Ossavana
    neuter
    1. outflow, running water MN i.189 (variant reading ossāvana & osavana). cp. ; avassava
    from ava + sru
    Ohana
    1. only in compound bimb’ohana ‣See under bimba
    Ohanati
    1. [ava + han, but probably a new formation from passive avahīyati of , taking it to han instead of the latter to defecate, to empty the bowels Pv-a 268 (+ osajjati).

    Oharaṇa
    neuter
    1. literally “taking away”, leading astray, side-track, deviating path Ja vi.525 (Commentary gamana-magga) cp. avaharaṇa
    from oharati
    Oharati
    1. -1. to take away, take down, take off SN i.27 (absolutive ohacca, variant reading ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper ohara = ohārehi Pv-a 95) Dhp-a iv.56 ‣See ohārin ‣See also ava˚.
    2. causative I. ohāreti ‣See avahārati;
    3. causative II oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) Ja vi.52 (kesamassuṁ) Dhp-a ii.53 (cp oropeti).
    4. past participle avahaṭa
    5. o + hṛ; take
    Ohāya
    absolutive of ojahāti.
    Ohāra
    1. ‣See avahāra & cp. ; vohāra
    Ohāraṇa
    neuter
    1. taking down, cutting off (hair) Ja i.64 (kesa-massu˚)
    from ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa
    Ohārin
    adjective-noun
    1. dragging down, weighty, heavy Dhp 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti Dhp-a iv.56)
    from avaharati
    Ohāreti
    1. -1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Snp 64 (= oropeti Nd2 183)
    • to take down ‣See oharati 1 Vin i.48 Pv-a 95

  • to cut down, shave off (hair ‣See oharāpeti under oharati) Iti 75 (kesamassuṁ hair & beard, variant reading ohāyāpetvā) Pug 56 (identical).

    causative of oharati
  • Ohita
    1. -1. put down into, deposited Dhp 150
    • put down, laid down, taken off relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaṁ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden ‣See arahatta iii. Commentary ; cp. ˚khandhabhāra Dhp-a iv.168

  • put down in, hidden, put away in (—˚) Snp 1022 = (kos’ohita).

    • (figuratively) put down to applied to, in ohita-sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaṁ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇāti MN i.480 MN iii.201 SN v.96 AN iv.391 Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiṁ katvā)
    • past participle of odahati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit avahita (Jtm 210 e.g.) as well as apahita (Lal. v.552 e.g.)
  • Ohiyyaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208 Vin iv.94 SN i.185 (vihārapāla)
    from ohīyati, avahiyyati
    Ohīna
    1. having left behind Ja iv.432 (gaṇaṁ)
    past participle of ojahāti
    Ohīyati
    (ohiyyati)
    1. - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340 (avahīyati ohiyyati Commentary )
    • to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate);
    • absolutive ohīyitvā Vin iv.229 Dhp-a ii.21 (cp. ohanati) ‣See also ohiyyaka
    • ava + hīyati, passive of ha ‣See avajahāti
    Ohīḷanā
    feminine
    1. scorning, scornfulness Vb 353 (+ ohīḷattaṁ)
    1. K
    ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ

    K

    Ka˚
    1. ; (pronoun interrogative)

      1. who?-m. ko feminine kā (
      2. neuter kiṁ, q.v.); follows regular declension of an atheme with some formations from ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the
      3. neuter

        • From ka˚ also
        • neuter plural kāni (Sn 324, 961) & some
        • adverb forms like kathaṁ, kadā kahaṁ, etc
        1. -1.; (a) ka˚; nominative masculine ko Snp 173 Snp 765 Snp 1024 Ja i.279 Dhp 146
        2. feminine Ja vi.364 Pv-a 41 genitive singular kassa Mil 25 instrumental kena; ablative kasmā
        3. neuter as
        4. adverb “why Snp 883 Snp 885 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 63, etc

          • (b) ki˚; (m. &
          • feminine ; nt ‣See kiṁ): genitive singular kissa Dhp 237 Ja ii.104
          • ko-nāmo (of) what name Mil 14 Dhp-a ii.92 occurs besides kin-nāmo Mil 15
          • kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho
          • All cases are frequently emphasized by addition of the affirm. participle nu & su; . e.g. ko su'dha tarati oghaṁ (who then or who possibly) Snp 173 kena ssu nivuto loko “by what then is the world obstructed? Snp 1032 kasmā nu saccāni vadanti … Snp 885 Snp 2 In indefinite meaning combined with-ci (Sanskrit cid ‣See under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with negative na koci, etc., equalling “not anybody”), nt kiñci (q.v.); e.g. mā jātu koci lokasmiṁ pāpiccho Iti 85 no yāti koci loke Dhp 179 n'âhaṁ bhatako ’smi kassaci Snp 25 na hi nassati kassaci kammaṁ “nobody’s trace of action is lost” Snp 666 kassaci kiñci na (deti (he gives) nothing to anybody Vv-a 322 Pv-a 45
          • In Sandhi the originally d of cid is restored, e.g. app’ eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh’ agaccheyya, “would that some man or other would come here!” Pv-a 153 Also in correlation with rel.
          • pronoun ya ‣See details under ya˚ yo hi koci gorakkhaṁ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever-he) Snp 612 ‣See also kad˚
          Sanskrit kaḥ, Indogermanic *qṷo besides *qui ‣See ki˚ & kiṁ & *qṷu ‣See ku˚. cp. Avestan ka-; Latin quī; Old Irish co-te; Welsh. pa; Goth hvas, Anglo-Saxon hwā (= English who), Old High German hwër
    Kaṁsa
    1. bronze Mil 2 magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus Ja vi.504 (silver) and Ja i.338 Ja iv.107 vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king
    2. a bronze gong Dhp 134 (Dhp-a iii.58)
    3. a bronze dish Ja i.336 āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet M. i.316.

      • a “bronze,” i.e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255 256 ‣See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22
      • "Golden bronze” in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla Vv-a 36 as “bells."-It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaṁsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware ‣See the compounds
      1. ˚upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk-pail (?) in phrase dhenusahassāni dukūla-sandanāni (?) kaṁsūpadhāraṇām DN ii.192 AN iv.393 Ja vi.503 (explained at 504). Kern (Toevoegselen p. 142) proposes correction to kaṁs'ûpadohana (= Sanskrit kāṁsy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful
      2. ˚kaṇṭaka metal thorns bits of sharp metal, nails Ja v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka -kūta cheating with false or spurious metal DN i.5 (= DN-a i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones)
      3. ˚tāla bronze gong Dhp-a i.389 Dhs-a 319 (˚tāḷa) Vv-a 161 or cymbals Ja vi.277 411
      4. ˚thāla metal dish, as
      1. distinguished from earthenware DN i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako = AN iii.25) cp. DN-a i.217 Vism 283 (in simile) Dhp-a iii.57 (: a gong) DN-a i.217 Dhp-a iv.67 = J iii.224; reading at Mil 62 to be ˚tāla ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 122
      2. ˚pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135
      • ˚pāti & pātī a; bronze bowl, usually for food: MN i.25 AN iv.393 Snp 14 Pv-a 274
      • ˚pūra full of metal Ja iv.107
      • ˚bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135
      • ˚bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile)
      • ˚maya made of bronze Vin i.190 Vin ii.112
      • ˚mallaka metal dish e.g. of gold Ja iii.21
      • ˚loha bronze Mil 267
      cp. Sanskrit kaṁsa; of uncertain etymology, perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña
    Kaṁsati
    1. = kassati ‣See ava˚
    Kakaca
    a saw Thag 1, 445 Ja iv.30 Ja v.52 Ja vi.261 DN-a i.212 in simile ˚-ūpama ovāda MN i.129 Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, 281.
    1. ˚khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw Ja i.321
    • ˚danta tooth of a saw, DN-a i.37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṁ kīḷamāna)
    onomat. to sound root kṛ, cp. note on gala; Sanskrit krakaca
    Kakaṇṭaka
    1. , the chameleon Ja i.442 Ja i.487 Ja ii.63 vi.346 Vv-a 258
    Kaku
    1. a peak, summit, projecting corner SN i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaṁ vijjumālā satakkaku. Commentary explanationsikhara, kūṭa AN iii.34 (= AA 620~kūṭa). cp. satakkaku & Morris,; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891–⁠93, 5
    Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Latin cacumen, & cumulus
    Kakuṭa
    a dove, pigeon, only in compounds.:
    1. ˚pāda dove-footed (i.e. having beautiful feet) Dhp-a i.119 feminine pādī ap
    2. plural to Apsaras, Ja ii.93 Dhp-a i.119 Mil 169

    Kakutthaka
    1. ‣See ku˚
    Kakudha
    1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull Ja ii.225 Ja vi.340 2. a cock’s comb ‣See sīsa kakudha
    2. a king’s symbol or emblem
    3. neuter Ja v.264 There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha-bhaṇḍa
    4. a tree the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28 Ja vi.519 kakudharukkha Dhp-a iv.153 Note. On pakudha as twin-form of ka˚ ‣See Trenckner, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 108.

      1. ˚phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl ‣See mutta
      2. ˚bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty Ja i.53 Ja iv.151 Ja v.289 (= sakāyura) The 5 regalia (as mentioned at Ja v.264) are vāḷavījanī uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword canopy, slippers
      • pañcavidha-k˚ Pv-a 74
      cp. Sanskrit kakuda, and kaku above
    Kakka1
    1. a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard-paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth-paste, cp. Fuller’s earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DN-a i.88 a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚ used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha-cuṇṇa). cp. kakku
    cp. Sanskrit kalka, also kalanka & kalusa
    Kakka2
    1. [cp. Sanskrit karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour Vv-a 111
    Kakkaṭa
    1. a large deer (?) Ja vi.538 (explained as mahāmiga)
    Kakkaṭaka
    a crab SN i.123 MN i.234 Ja i.222 Vv 546 (Vv-a 243 245) Dhp-a iii.299 (mama … kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). cp. kakkhaḷa.
    1. ˚nala a kind of sea-reed of reddish colour, Ja iv.141 also a name for coral, ibid
    2. ˚magga fissures in canals frequented by crabs, Dhs-a 270
    • ˚yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs ix.17
    • ˚rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab-curry Vv-a 243
    cp. Sanskrit karkaṭa, karkara “hard,” kankata “mail”; cp. Latin cancer; also B. Sanskrit kakkaṭaka hook
    Kakkara
    1. a jungle cock used as a decoy Ja ii.162 purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & ‣See Kern,; Toevoegselen p. 118 K˚-Jātaka, N˚ 209
    onomat, cp. Sanskrit kṛkavāku cock, Latin querquedula, partridge; sound-root kṛ ‣See note on gala
    Kakkaratā
    feminine roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug 19 23.
    Kakkariya
    neuter harshness, Pug 19 23.
    Kakkaru
    1. a kind of creeper (˚jātāni = valliphalāni) Ja vi.536
    Kakkasa
    adjective
    1. rough, hard, harsh, especially of speech (vācā para-kaṭukā Dhs 1343), MN i.286 = Dhs 1343 AN v.265 = 283, 293 Dhs-a 396
    • akakkasa: smooth Snp 632 Ja iii.282 v.203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891–⁠93, 13); akakkasanga with smooth limbs, handsome, Ja v.204
    Sanskrit karkaśa to root kṛ as in kakkaṭaka
    Kakkassa
    1. roughness Snp 328 Mil 252
    Kakkārika
    (and ˚uka
    1. a kind of cucumber Vv 3328 = eḷāluka Vv-a 147
    from karkaru
    Kakkāru
    1. (Sanskrit karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin-gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera Ja vi.536 kakkārujātāni = valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corrected)
    • a heavenly flower Ja iii.87 Ja iii.88 = dibbapuppha
    Kakkāreti
    1. to make the sound kak, to half choke Ja ii.105
    *kaṭ-kāreti to make kaṭ ‣See note on gala for sound-root kṛ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa
    Kakku
    1. a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, Ja v.302 where 5 kinds are enumerated: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚
    cp. kakka = kalka
    Kakkoṭaka
    1. (?) Kp-a 38, spelt takk˚; at Vism 258
    Kakkola
    1. ‣See takkola
    Kakkhaḷa
    1. rough, hard, harsh (literally & figuratively) Dhs 648 (opposite; muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaṁ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaṁ kharagataṁ kakkhaḷattaṁ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (= thaddha) 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa) Dhp-a ii.95 Dhp-a iv.104 Mil 67 Mil 112 Pv-a 243 (= asaddha, akkosakāraka, opposite muduka Vv-a 138 (= pharusa)
    2. cruel, fierce, pitiless Ja i.187 266; ii.204; iv162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh smooth, pleasant Dhs-a 397
    3. ˚˚vacata, kind speech ibid. (= apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚)
      1. ˚kathā hard speech, cruel words Ja vi.561
      • ˚kamma cruelty, atrocity Ja iii.481
      • ˚bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 ‣See kakkhala MA 21; harshness, cruelty Ja iii.480
      • absence of hardness or rigidity Dhs-a 151
      kakkhaṭa, cp. Sanskrit karkara = Pali kakkaṭaka
    Kakkhaḷatā
    feminine
    1. hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859 Vb 82 Ja v.167 Dhs-a 166
    • akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44 45, 324 640, 728, 859 Dhs-a 151 Vv-a 214 (= saṇha)
    abstract from preceding
    Kakkhalatta
    neuter hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86 Vb 82 Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166 kakkhaṭatva.
    Kakkhaḷiya
    1. hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vb 350
    Kaṅka
    a heron MN i.364 MN i.429 Ja v.475
    1. ˚patta a heron’s plume Ja v.475
    Sanskrit kanka, to sound-root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & ‣See note on gala
    Kaṅkata
    1. elephant’s trappings Vv-a 104 (= kappa)
    = kaṁ or kiṁ + kṛta, to kiṇi, “the tinklings”
    Kaṅkaṇa
    neuter
    1. a bracelet, ornament for the wrist Thag 2, 259 (= Thag-a 211)
    to same root as kanka
    Kaṅkala
    1. skeleton; only in compound atthi˚ Aṭṭhikankal’ ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25 MN i.130 MN i.364 Ja v.210 Thag 1, 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Thag 2, 488 (= Thag-a 287 cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 75) aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi-puñja aṭṭhi-rāsi SN ii.185 = It 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass’ aṭṭhisañcayo). cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā Pv-a 152 aṭṭhika sankhalikā Ja i.433 aṭṭhi-sanghāṭa Thag 1, 60
    Sanskrit kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa → śṛnga), originally meaning “chain”
    Kaṅkuṭṭhaka
    1. a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mhvs 32. 6 ‣See note on p. 355
    cp. Sanskrit kankuṣṭha
    Kaṅkhati
    1. with
    2. locative : to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (synonym vicikicchati with which always combined). Kaṅkhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇesu DN i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh’s gloss, patthanaṁ uppādati DN-a i.275 is more edifying than exactive) = Sn 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati SN ii.17 = iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya SN ii.50 SN ii.54 SN iii.122 SN v.225 (correct to khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ AN iv.460 = v.17 = M i.101 = Dhs 1004 cp. Dhs. 1118
    3. with
    4. accusative : to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaṁ k. to abide one’s time, to wait for death SN i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto) Snp 516 (identical with bhāvito sadanto) Iti 69 (identical bhāvitatto)
    5. J v.411 (= icchati) vi.229 (= oloketi).
    6. past participle kaṅkhita SN iii.99 Snp 540 (+ vicikicchita); infinitive kaṅkhituṁ SN iv.350 = 399 (+ vicikicchituṁ)
    Sanskrit kāṅkṣ cp. śaṅk, Latin cunctor
    Kaṅkhana
    neuter doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97 Dhs-a 259
    Kaṅkhanīya
    1. to be doubted SN iv.399
    gerundive of kankhati
    Kaṅkhā
    feminine
    1. doubt, uncertainty SN i.181 SN iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd2 1) Snp 541 Snp 1149 ˚ṁ vinayati Snp 58 Snp 559 Snp 1025 k. pahīyati Ps ii.62; combined with vimati : DN i.105 DN iii.116 SN iv.327 SN v.161 AN ii.79 160, 185 DN-a i.274 with vicikicchā : SN iv.350 Dhs. 425 Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd; 21 Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumerated at DN iii.217 4 in passages with vimati ‣See above; 7 at Dhs 1004 8 at Nd2 1 & Dhs 1118 16 at MN i.8 & Vism 518
    2. as adjective doubting, doubtful, in; akaṅkha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combinations akankha apiha anupaya SN i.181 akhila a. Snp 477 Snp 1059 Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa Snp 514 avitiṇṇa˚ Snp 249 Snp 318 Snp 320 (= ajānaṁ); nikkankha SN ii.84 (+ nibbicikiccha)
    3. expectation SA 183-On connotation of k. in general ‣See Dhs translation p. 115 n1.

      1. ˚cchida removing or destroying doubt Snp 87
      • ˚cchedana the removal of d. Ja i.98 Ja iv.69
      • ˚ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) DN iii.285 AN iv.152 AN iv.154 v.16; AA 689
      • ˚dhamma a doubting state of mind doubt DN ii.149 SN iv.350
      • ˚vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Mil 233 Dhs-a 352 ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt DN iii.288 MN i.147 Ud 60 Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq
      • ˚samaṅgin affected with doubts, having doubts Dhs-a 259
      cp. Sanskrit kānkṣā
    Kaṅkhāyati
    1. to doubt, past participle Kaṅkhāyita Snp 1021
    denominative from kankhā
    Kaṅkhāyanā
    feminine + kaṅkhāyitatta
    • neuter doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd2 1 Dhs 425 1004, 1118 Dhs-a 259

    Kaṅkhin
    adjective
    1. doubting, wavering, undecided, irresolute DN ii.241 Snp 1148 Nd2 185; combined with vecikicchin SN iii.99 MN i.18 AN ii.174 Snp 510–⁠2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚)
    2. akaṅkhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akaṅkha DN ii.241 AN ii.175
    3. Sanskrit kānkṣin
    Kaṅgu
    feminine
    1. the panic ‣Seed, Panicum Italicum; millet used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains ‣See dhañña at Vin iv.264 DN-a i.78
    • Mil 267 Mhvs 32, 30
    1. ˚piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of millet meal Ja vi.581
    • ˚bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile)
    derivation unknown, probably non-Aryan, cp. Sanskrit kangu
    Kaca
    1. the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51
    Sanskrit kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix
    Kacavara
    1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combination with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati Ja i.292 iii.163; iv.300; Vism 70 DN-a i.7 Dhp-a i.52 Snp-a 311–⁠2 rags, old clothes SA 283 (= pilotikā).

      1. ˚chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin Ja i.290
      • ˚chaḍḍanaka a dust pan Ja i.161 (+ muṭṭhi-sammjjanī)
      • ˚chaḍḍani a dust pan Dhp-a iii.7 (sammajjanī +)
      • ˚chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella Dhp-a iv.210
      to kaca?
    Kacci
    kaccid;
    indeclinable
    1. indefinite interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense equivalent to Latin ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc. Vin i.158 350 DN i.50 (k. maṁ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106 SN iii.120 SN iii.125 Snp 335 Snp 354 p. 87 Ja i.103 Ja i.279 Ja v.373 Dhp-a ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā “have you not gone,” answer: āma “yes”) Pv-a 27 (k. tan dānaṁ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piṁḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). cp. kin
    • Often combined with other indefinite particles, e.g. kacci nu Vin i.41 Ja iii.236 vi.542; k. nu kho “perhaps” (German etwa, doch nicht Ja i.279 k. pana Ja i.103
    • When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi kaccinnu Ja ii.133 Ja v.174 Ja v.348 Ja vi.23
    • kaccissu Snp 1045 Snp 1079 ‣See Nd2 186
    Sanskrit kaccid= kad + cid ‣See kad˚
    Kaccikāra
    1. a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna Ja vi.535 (should we write with Burmese manuscripts kacchi˚?).

    Kaccha1
    neuter
    1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed SN i.52 (te hi sotthiṁ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k-nakha-lomā with nails and hair like long-grown grass cp. same at Ja iii.315 & Sdhp 104) Ja v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha-kacchā tagarā) Snp 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo) Snp-a 33 (pabbata opposed to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (; Toevoegselen ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚
    2. an arrow (made of reed) MN i.429 (kaṇḍo … yen’ amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaṁ yadi vā ropiman ti)
    cp. Sanskrit kaccha, probably dialectical
    Kaccha2
    adjective
    1. fit to be spoken of AN i.197 (Commentary = kathetuṁ yutta). akaccha ibid
    absolutive of kath
    Kacchaka1
    1. a kind of fig-tree DN-a i.81
    • the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35 SN v.96 Vism 183
    Kacchati1
    passive of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna AN iii.181).
    • passive of karoti
    Kacchantara
    neuter
    1. interior, dwelling, apartment Vv-a 50 (= nivesa)
    2. the armpit ‣See upa˚
    ‣See kacchā2
    Kacchapa
    1. a tortoise, turtle SN iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) MN iii.169 = SN v.455 Thag 2, 500 (cp Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 73, 174). feminine kacchapinī a female t Mil 67

      1. ˚lakkhaṇa “tortoise-sign,” i.e. fortune-telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna-vijjā DN i.9DN-a i.94
      • ˚loma “tortoise-hair, i.e. an impossibility, absurdity Ja iii.477 cp. sasavisāṇa ˚maya made of t. hair Ja iii.478
      Sanskrit kacchapa, dialectical from *kaśyapa, originally Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā
    Kacchapaka
    1. ‣See hattha˚
    Kacchapuṭa
    1. reed-basket, sling-basket, pingo, in -vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar Ja i.111
    ‣See kaccha1
    Kacchā1
    feminine
    1. enclosure denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed i.e. wall or room ‣See kacchantara
    2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv.21; 9 = 699 (= gīveyyaka Vv-a) Ja iv.395 (kacchaṁ nāgānaṁ bandhatha gīveyyaṁ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt loin-or waist-cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319 Ja v.306 (= saṁvelli) Mil 36 Dhp-a i.389
    derivation unknown, cp. Sanskrit kakṣā, Latin cohus, incohare & ‣See details under gaha; 1
    Kacchā2

    feminine & kaccha

  • masculine neuter

    1. ; the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa … kacche vīṇaṁ … aññissā kacche ālambaraṁ) SN i.122 = Sn 449 (sokaparetassa vīṁā kacchā abhassatha) Iti 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti sweat drops from their armpits) Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (thanaṁ dasseti k˚ṁ dass˚ nābhiṁ dass˚) Ja v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; explained on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha-kaccha-nakhaloma means “with long-grown finger-nails and long hair in the armpit,” e.g. SN i.78
    1. ˚loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Mil 163 (should probably be read parūḷha-k
    • nakha-l., as above)
    Derivation unknown, cp. Sanskrit kakṣa & kakṣā, Latin coxa, Old High German hahsa
  • Kacchikāra
    1. ‣See kacci˚;
    Kacchu
    1. [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sanskrit kacchu, dialectical for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin Dhp-a iii.297 (mahā-phalāni)
    • itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati “to be eaten by itch (cp. English itch → eat) Vin i.202 296 Ja v.207 Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345 Dhp-a i.299
    1. ˚cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens causing itch Dhp-a iii.297
    • ˚piḷakā scab & boils Ja v.207

    Kajjala
    1. [ Sanskrit kajjala, dialectical from kad + jala, from jalati, jval, originally burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 167)
    Kajjopakkamaka
    1. a kind of gem Mil 118 (vajira k. phussarāga lohitanka)
    Kañcaka
    1. a kind of tree (dāsima˚) Ja vi.536 (explained as “dve rukkhajātiyo”). Burmese manuscripts have koñcaka.

    Kañcana
    neuter
    1. gold AN iii.346 Thag 1, 691 (muttaṁ selā va k.) Thag 2, 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaṁ va) Vv-a 4 9 (= jātarūpa). especially frequently in compounds. = of or like gold
    1. ˚agghika a golden garland Bu X. 26
    2. ˚agghiya id Bu v.29
    3. ˚āveḷā identical Ja vi.49 Vv 362 Pv ii.127 (thus for ˚ācela); iii.93 Pv-a 157
    • ˚kadalikkhaṇḍa a g bunch of bananas Ja vi.13
    • ˚thūpa a gilt stupa Dhp-a iii.483 Dhp-a iv.120
    • ˚patimā a gilt or golden image or statue Ja vi.553 Vv-a 168
    • ˚paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet Ja vi.217
    • ˚patta a g. dish Ja v.377
    • ˚pallaṅka a gilt palanquin Ja i.204
    • ˚bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but explained at Vv-a 168 by majjita-kpaṭimā-sadisa “like a polished golden statue”) -bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mhvs 34, 74 -rūpa a g. figure Ja iii.93
    • ˚latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum Ja vi.589
    • ˚vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt shining, bright Ja v.342 (= paṇḍara)
    • ˚velli a g. robe girdle or waist cloth Ja v.398 (but explained as “k-rūpakasadisa-sarīra “having a body like a g. statue”), cp. J v.306, where velli is explained by kacchā, girdle
    • ˚sannibha like g., golden-coloured (cp. k-vaṇṇa and Sanskrit kanaka-varṇa Sp. Avs i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca “with golden-coloured skin,” epithet of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) DN ii.17 DN iii.143 DN iii.159 MN ii.136 Mil 75 attr of a devatā Vv 302 322 Vv-a 284 of a bhikkhu Snp 551 = Th 1, 821
    • ˚sūci a gold pin, a hair-pin of gold Ja vi.242
    Derivation uncertain, cp. Sanskrit kāñeana, either from khacati (shine = the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sanskrit ; kāś, or from kanaka gold. Pali kañcana is poetical
    Kañcanaka
    adjective golden Ja iv.379 (˚daṇḍa).
    Kañcuka
    1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306 = ii.267 AN i.145 Dhp-a iii.295 (paṭa˚ṁ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice) Pv-a 63 (urago tacaṁ kañcukaṁ omuñcanto viya)
    2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DN-a i.222
    3. armour, coat of mail Ja v.128 (sannāha˚) DN-a i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14

      • a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mhvs i.42
    from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Sanskrit kañcuka
    Kañjaka
    1. name of a class of Titans Pv-a 272 (kāḷa-k˚-bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? cp. Hardy Manual of Buddhism 59)
    Kañjika
    neuter
    1. sour rice-gruel Ja i.238 (udaka˚) Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 (= yāgu Vv-a 186) Dhp-a i.78 288 Vv-a 99 (ācāma-k˚-loṇudaka as explanation of loṇa-sovīraka “salty fluid, i.e. the scum of sour gruel”). cp. next
    Sanskrit kāñjika
    Kañjiya
    neuter = kañjika Ja iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa) Dhp-a ii.3 Dhp-a iv.164
    1. -teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice-gruel used in straightening arrows Dhp-a i.288
    Kaññā
    feminine
    1. a young (unmarried woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111
    • As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya-kaññā vā … pannarasa-vassuddesikā vā solasa-vassuddesikā vā … MN i.88 in combination khattiya-kaññā, brāhmaṇa-k˚, etc. AN ii.205 iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya-k˚ Ja i.60 deva˚ a celestial nymph Ja i.61
    1. ˚dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85
    from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; originally “newly sprung” from *qen, cp. Gr , Vedic kanyā, Latin re-cen(t)s, Anglo-Saxon hindema “novissimus.” ‣See also kaniṭṭha
    Kaṭa1
    a mat ‣See compounds. & kaṭallaka.
    1. ˚sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine Dhs-a 78
    • ˚sāra (Dhp-a i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw-pine, Pandanus Furcatus Ja vi.474 Ja v.97 DN-a i.137 Dhp-a ii.183
    Sanskrit kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker-work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Latin cratis = English crate Gothic haurds, English hurdle
    Kaṭa2
    another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in compounds.:
    1. ˚aṭṭhika the hip-bone DN ii.296 = M i.58, 89 = MN iii.92 (as variant reading ). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at MN iii.92 and as variant reading at DN ii.296
    • ˚sāṭaka a loin-cloth Ja iv.248

    Kaṭa3
    = kata
    1. in meaning of “original,” good (cp. sat); as neuter “the lucky die” in phrase kaṭaggaha ‣See below. Also in combination with su˚ & duk˚; for sukata & dukkata (e.g. Vin ii.289 Dhp-a iii.486 Dhp-a iv.150) and in meaning of “bad, evil” in kaṭana. cp. also kali.

      1. ˚ggaha “he who throws the lucky die,” one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase “ubhayattha k.” lucky in both worlds, i.e. here & beyond Thag 1, 462 Ja iv.322 (= jayaggaha victorious Commentary ); cp. Morris in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 159. Also in “ubhayam ettha k.” SN iv.351 sq-Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliṁ gaṇhāti to have bad luck Ja vi.206 (kaliggaha = parājayasaṁkhāta, i.e. one who is defeated, as opposed to kaṭaggaha = jayasankhāta), 228, 282
      past participle of karoti
    Kaṭaka
    masculine neuter anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet Pv-a 134
    Kaṭakañcukatā
    1. ‣See kaṭu˚
    Kaṭakaṭāyati
    1. = taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34 Vv-a 121 (as variant reading ); Vism 264. cp. also karakarā
    Kaṭacchu
    1. a ladle, a spoon; explained by uḷunka Dhp-a iv.75 123; by dabbi Pv-a 135 Used for butter Vv-a 68 otherwise for cooked food in general, especially rice gruel
    • Vin ii.216 Ja i.454 Ja iii.277
    1. ˚gāha “holding on to one’s spoon,” i.e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess Dhs-a 376 cp. Dhs translation 300 n2
    2. ˚gāhika “spoon in hand,” serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna Pv-a 135
    • ˚parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118
    • ˚bhikkhā “ladle-begging,” i.e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Thag 1, 934 Mil 9 Dhp-a iv.123 as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka-bhatta) Dhp-a i.379
    • ˚matta (bhatta “only a spoonful of rice” Mil 8 Dhp-a iv.75
    cp. on etymology Morris in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 163
    Kaṭacchuka
    adjective relating to spoons Vin ii.233
    Kaṭana
    neuter
    1. an evil deed AN iv.172 (variant reading = AA 744 kaṭanaṁ vuccati pāpakammaṁ)
    from kaṭa, past participle of karoti
    Kaṭallaka
    1. a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance Ja v.16 (dāru explained by dārumaya-yanta-rūpaka)
    to kaṭa1
    Kaṭasī
    feminine
    1. a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiṁ vaḍḍheti “to increase the cemetery” referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, explained by susāna & āḷāhana Thag-a 291-vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiṁ ghoraṁ ādiyanti punabbhavaṁ Vin ii.296 = AN ii.54 = Th 1, 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575 Thag 2, 502 Also in compounds. ˚vaḍḍhana Ja i.146 Ud 72 = Nett 174; ˚vaḍḍhita SN ii.178f. Nd2 664
    probably a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel-house, under influence of following va (ḍḍh˚), cp. Sanskrit kaṭa (?) a corpse
    Kaṭākaṭa
    1. ‣See kata i.3
    Kaṭāha
    masculine neuter

    a pot in older texts only as—˚

    1. -1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚ Vin ii.122
    • ghaṭi˚ Vin ii.115
    • loha˚ Vin ii.170
    • ayo˚ (in simile “diva-santatte ayokaṭāhe”) MN i.453 = AN iv.138
    • gūtha˚ Vin iv.265
    • tumba˚ (a gourd used as receptacle for food) Vin ii.114; alābu˚ Dhs-a 405
    • Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mhvs 17, 47; 18, 24
    • anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚ DN ii.297 MN i.58 Mil 197
    • Sanskrit kaṭāha
    Kaṭi
    hip, waist Vin iii.22 112 Nd2 659 Ja iv.32 Mil 418 In compounds. also kaṭa (q.v.)
    1. ˚thālaka a certain bone on the small of the back Ja vi.509
    • ˚padesa the buttocks Ja iii.37
    • ˚pamāṇa (adjective as far as the waist Ja vi.593
    • ˚pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom Ja ii.275
    • ˚puthulaka
    • adjective with broad hips, having beautiful hips Ja v.303 (in explanation of soṇī puthulā)
    • ˚bhāga the waist Ja iii.373
    • ˚bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137 Vin iii.49
    • ˚sandhi the joint of the hip Mil 418 Vism 185
    • ˚samohita
    • adjective fastened or clinging to the waist Ja v.206
    • ˚sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) Pv-a 134
    • ˚suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin-cloth Vin ii.271 also an ornamental waist-band, girdle Vin ii.107 ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.69, 142, 348
    Sanskrit kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; originally bending, curvature, cp. Latin scelus crooked deed, German scheel squint
    Kaṭuka
    adjective
    1. sharp, bitter, acid, severe
    1. -1. severe, sharp (figuratively), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc MN i.10 = AN ii.143 Ja vi.115 Thag 2, 451 (= Thag-a 281) SA 56
    • painful, terrible, frightful (-applied to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya ‣See kammapphala & niraya) Ja iii.519 Pv i.102 111iv.18, 76
    • bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291 Mil 65 Mil 112 Ja iii.201
    • neuter pungency, acidity bitterness DN ii.349 = J i.380 Thag 2, 503 (pañca˚) Ja vi.509
    • Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at Vv-a 316 where it explains maraṇa? cp. Ja iii.201 tesaṁ taṁ kaṭukaṁ āsi, maraṇaṁ ten’ upāgamuṁ
    1. ˚udraya causing bitterness or pain Ja v.241 cp. dukkhudraya Ja v.119
    • ˚odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159
    • ˚pabhedana
    • adjective having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dhp 324 (= tikhiṇamada Dhp-a iv.13)
    • ˚pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475 (kappūra-k˚-ādīni), cp. Sanskrit kakkolaka.
    • adjective of bitter fruit Ja ii.106 (of the mango) SN i.57 = J iii.291 = Dh 66 (of kamma) Pv i.1110 (identical)
    • ˚bhaṇḍa (singular &
    • plural ) spices There are 4 enum; d at Ja iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka marica, pipphali; 3 at Vv-a 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp. kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa Pv-a 135 Dhp-a ii.131
    • ˚bhāva stinginess Dhs-a 376
    • ˚rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine)
    • ˚vipāka (adjective having a bitter result (of pāpa) Mil 206 compar. ˚tara SN ii.128
    • ˚sāsana a harsh command Ja vi.498
    Sanskrit kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sanskrit kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Latin caro “cutlet."-k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually explained in prose by aniṭṭha tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combined with khara opposite madhura, e.g. Pv-a 119
    Kaṭukañcukatā
    feminine
    1. closeness, tightness close-fistedness, niggardliness. explained as “the shrinking up of the heart,” which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase “vevicchaṁ kadariyaṁ k. aggahitattaṁ cittassa” in macchariya -passage at Nd2 614 = Dhs 1122 = Pug 19 23 = Vb 357 371; and in the macchariya explanation at Vism 470
    der. by Buddhaghosa as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (Dhs-a 376). At Dhs 1122 and as variant reading K in Vb we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 159 sq. and Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 300 n2-Morris’ derivation is kaṭa kar + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka = kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern from kañcuka “bodice” and meaning “being tightened in by a bodice,” i.e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the various lect. kaṭakuñc˚; is probably etymology correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel-metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī-mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is explained by “sankucitaṁ mukhaṁ akāsi” ‣See kuñcita
    Kaṭukatta
    neuter pungency, acidity, bitterness Mil 56 Mil 63
    Kaṭumikā
    feminine
    1. artificiality, outward help, suggestion appl; d to sati Mil 78 Mil 79 (cp. Miln translation i.121 n and MVastu i.477)
    from karoti ‣See Sanskrit kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti
    Kaṭula
    adjective
    1. containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka
    Sanskrit kaṭura
    Kaṭuviya
    adjective
    1. impure, defiled, in ˚kata AN i.280
    kaṭu viya?
    Kaṭerukkha
    1. a kind of creeper Ja vi.536 (perhaps read as next)
    Kaṭeruha
    1. a flowering plant Ja vi.537 (= pupphagaccha). cp. kaseruka
    Kaṭṭha1
    1. ploughed, tilled Snp 80 Mil 255 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well-ploughed AN i.229 Mil 255
    Sanskrit kṛṣṭa, past participle of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha
    Kaṭṭha2
    adjective
    1. bad, useless ‣See kaṭṭhaka2. Only in compounds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka
    1. ˚aṅga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) Ja ii.163 Dhp-a i.144
    • ˚mukha “with the injurious mouth,” a kind of snake Dhs-a 300
    Sanskrit kaṣṭa
    Kaṭṭha3
    neuter
    1. a piece of wood, especially a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood SN i.168 = Sn 462 MN i.234 (+ kaṭhala) Pv-a 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase “sattussada sa-tiṇa-kaṭṭh’ odaka sa-dhañña” (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon’s) DN i.87 DN i.111 etc. Both sg (collective) &
    2. plural as “sticks” DN ii.341 especially in phrase kaṭṭhaṁ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31 Snp p. 104 Ja ii.144 Pv ii.951 (= Pv-a 135), or k˚ṁ pāteti (phāṭeti = phāleti ‣See pāteti) MN i.21 Frequent also in similes: MN i.241 ii.93 = iii.95 (alla k.) MN iii.242 = SN ii.97 = iv.215 v.212 (dve k.) AN iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa) i.124 = Pug 30 36 (+ kaṭhala)
    3. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) MN i.190 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚; (for scraping) Vin ii.141 221 and in danta˚; a tooth-pick Vv-a 63 etc ‣See danta
      • adjective in compounds. = of wood, woo
      • denominative native

        1. ˚ aggi wood-fire, natural fire AN iv.41 AN iv.45 enumerated last among the 7 fires
        2. ˚atthaṁ for the purpose of fuel in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93 Iti 90 = J i.482
        3. ˚atthara a mat made of twigs (cp kaṭasāra) Ja v.197 also as -attharika (& ˚kā) Ja vi.21 Dhp-a i.135 feminine at Ja i.9 Ja iv.329 Ja vi.57
        4. ˚kaliṅgara chips and chaff Dhp-a iii.122 (cp. k-khaṇḍa)
        5. ˚khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless trifling Dhp-a i.321 (as explanation of niratthaṁ va kalingaraṁ) Thag-a 284 (as explanation of chuṭṭho kalingaraṁ viya)
        6. ˚tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.162) -tāḷa a with gong Dhs-a 319
        7. ˚tumba a with vessel Vin i.205
        8. ˚pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188
        9. ˚puñja a heap of with AN iv.72 Ja ii.327
        10. ˚phālaka wood-cutter Vism 413
        11. ˚bhatin a wood-cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa
        12. ˚mañcaka a wooden bed Mil 366
        13. ˚maya wooden Vin i.203 Ja i.289 v.435
        14. ˚rūpa (& ˚ka) a with figure, doll Ja i.287
        15. ˚vāha a cartload of fire-wood SN ii.84
        16. ˚vāhana riding on a faggot Ja i.136
        17. ˚vipalāvita drifting wood Ja i.326
        18. ˚hatthin a with elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy Dhp-a i.193
        19. ˚hāraka (
        20. feminine ˚ikā) gathering fire-wood, an occupation of poor people MN i.79 SN i.180 Ja i.134 ii.412; iv.148; v.417 Mil 331 Vism 120 Vv-a 173
        21. ˚hārin = ˚hāraka Vin iii.41 Ja i.133 (title of Ja no. 7 referred to at Dhp-a i.349)
      Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Old High German holz
    Kaṭṭhaka1
    masculine neuter
    1. a kind of reed Dhp 164 Dhp-a iii.156 (= velu-sankhāta-kaṭṭha)
    to kaṭṭha3
    Kaṭṭhaka2
    masculine plural )
    1. a kind of fairy DN ii.261
    to kaṭṭha2
    Kaṭṭhissa
    neuter
    1. a silken coverlet embroidered with gems DN i.7 = Vin i.192 = ii.163 DN-a i.87 = AA 445
    Sanskrit ?
    Kaṭhati
    1. to boil, to stew Buddhaghosa on Vin i.205 ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.57 n1, where
    2. past participle is given as kuthita Similarly Thag 2, 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil trs. ii.271 “distressed”; English Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910 539)
    3. to be scorched, past participle kaṭhita (= hot) Mil 323 Mil 325 Mil 357 Mil 397
    4. The
    5. past participle occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita ˚kuṭṭhita in compounds uk˚ pa˚ (q.v.) ‣See also kuṭṭhita
    Sanskrit kvathati; cp. Gothic hvapo scum, hvapjan to ‣Seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen Smith) comments on; kaṭh with “sosāna-pākesu.” ‣See also kuthati
    Kaṭhala
    1. gravel, pebble, potsherd Ja iii.225 Ja v.417 Vv-a 157 combined with sakkhara at DN i.84 = AN i.9 and in simile at AN i.253 As feminine combined with kaṭṭha at AN i.124 = Pug 30 36 AN iii.6 as
    2. masculine in same combination at Vism 261
    3. Sanskrit kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Avestan SN and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi
    Kaṭhalaka
    1. gravel, potsherd Ja iii.227 Mil 34
    Kaṭhina
    adjective-noun
    1. . 1. adjective hard, firm, stiff cp. ii.2 Dhs 44 45 (where also derivation from abstract akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combined with akakkhalatā, cp. Dhs-a 151 akaṭhina-bhāva) Pv-a 152 (˚dāṭha)
    2. (figuratively hard, harsh, cruel Ja i.295 = v.448 (= thaddha-hadaya)
    3. adverb ˚ṁ fiercely, violently Mil 273 Mil 274
    4. neuter the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253f.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115
      1. -117
      • On the k. robe ‣See Vin i.298f.; iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq. 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. cp. Vinaya Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92
      1. ˚attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266 ‣See next
      2. ˚atthāra the spreading out, i.e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony ‣See Vin i.254f.; Bu ix.7; cp. Vin v.128f. 205 -uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255 259; iii.262; iv.287, 288; v.177
      1. -179, cp. next & Vinaya Texts ii.157, 234, 235
      2. ˚ubbhāra = ˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya “for the suspension of the k privileges” Vin i.255
      • ˚khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253

        1. -267
        2. ˚cīvara a k. robe made of k cloth Bu ix.7
        3. ˚dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254
        • ˚maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117
        • ˚rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116
        • ˚sālā = ˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116
        Sanskrit kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dialectical ṭh for rth; cp. Gothic hardus = Anglo-Saxon heard = English hard. cp. also Sanskrit kṛtsna = Pali kasiṇa
    Kaṭhinaka
    adjective referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61 114.
    Kaḍḍhati
    1. [dialect. form supposed to equal Sanskrit karṣati, cp. Prakrit kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug-out ‣See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv.1921 p. 465. 1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug Ja i.193 Ja i.225 Ja i.265 Ja i.273 (khaggaṁ k. to draw the sword)
    • to draw in, suck up (udakaṁ) Ja iv.141

  • to draw a line, to scratch J. i.78, 111, 123; vi.56 (lekhaṁ).

  • Kaḍḍhana
    neuter. 1. pulling, drawing Mil 231 - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, ap
    • plural to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha’s example Mhvs 12, 55.

    Kaḍḍhanaka
    adjective pulling, dragging Ja v.260
    Kaṇa
    1. the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder DN i.9 (˚homa), explained at DN-a i.93 by kuṇḍaka. adjective made of husk-powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes Ja i.423 (k-pūva = kuṇḍakena pakka-pūva)-akaṇa
    2. adjective free from the coating of red powder characteristic of the best rice Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaṁ karoti to whiten the rice). cp. kākaṇa.

      1. ˚bhakkha eating husk-powder, a practice of cert ascetics DN i.166 = M i.78 = AN i.241
      Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān = small; Vedic kaṇa
    Kaṇaya
    a sort of spear, lance Ja i.273 Ja ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird’s beak) Mil 339
    1. ˚agga the point of a spear Ja i.329 (like …, of a beak)
    Derivation unknown, cp. Sanskrit kaṇaya = kaṇapa
    Kaṇavīra
    1. Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp Rouse, J. translation iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning diṇṇa-kalavīla-dāme ‣See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n) Dhs-a 317 Snp-a 283 Vv-a 177 cp. next
    Sanskrit karavīra
    Kaṇavera
    1. = kaṇavīra Ja iii.61 Ja iv.191 Ja v.420 Ja vi.406
    Kaṇājaka
    neuter a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga-dutiya; always in this combination except at Ja v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.9) SN i.90 SN i.91 AN i.145 AN iv.392 Ja i.228 Ja iii.299 Dhp-a iii.10 Dhp-a iv.77 Vv-a 222 298 (correct to bilanka; Hardy at Vv-a Index p. 364 ex
    • plural as “a certain weight"(?)).

      1. ˚bhatta a meal of k. porridge Ja v.230
    Kaṇikā
    feminine
    1. a small particle of broken rice (opposite taṇḍula a full grain) Ja vi.341 Ja vi.366 (˚āhi pūvaṁ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in ; (adjective having no moles DN i.80 and sa˚; with moles D. i.80 (cp DN-a i.223)
    2. cp. kaṇa
    Kanikāra
    masculine neuter & kaṇṇikāra Ja iv.440 Ja v.420 the difference stated at Ja v.422 is kaṇi˚ = mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚ = khuddakapupphā)
    1. -1. masculine the tree Pterospermum acerifolium Ja i.40 Ja v.295 Ja vi.269 537
    2. neuter its (yellow) flower (k-puppha, taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at DN ii.111 (= pīta) MN ii.14 (ṇṇ) = AN v.61 (ṇṇ) Dhp-a i.388 of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) Ja ii.25 with reference to the blood of the heart Vism 256; = golden Vv-a 65 Dhp-a ii.250 (variant reading ṇṇ)
      1. ˚makula a k. bud Ja ii.83
      Sanskrit karṇikāra
    Kaṇerika
    neuter a helmet (?) Ja vi.397
    Kaṇeru
    masculine feminine )
    1. a young elephant Ja ii.342 Ja iv.49 Ja v.39 Ja v.50 Ja v.416 Ja vi.497 Dhp-a i.196 (variant reading ) kareṇukā) feminine ˚kā MN i.178

      • ‣ See also kareṇu
      Derivation uncertain, just possibly connected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru
    Kaṇṭa
    1. (cp. next) a thorn Mil 351
    Kaṇṭaka
    1. a thorn Snp 845 Vin i.188 Ja v.102 vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚
    2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. 3. a bone, fish-bone Ja i.222 in piṭṭhi˚; a bone of the spine DN ii.297≈ ‣See kaṭaṭṭhi MN i.80 = 245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102
    3. (figuratively) an obstacle, hindrance nuisance (“thorn in my side”); Kvu 572; enemy infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber DN i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp. DN-a i.296) Ja i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Thag 1 946 Dhp-a i.177 (akkhimhi) Vv-a 301

      • (figuratively) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions SN iv.189 SN iv.195 SN iv.198 Ud 24 Kvu 202; cp. sa˚
      • Thus grouped, like saṁyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.). AN v.134 as “bringing much trouble Ja iv.117 Often in standing phrase khāṇu-kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction AN i.35 Snp-a 334 As abstr kaṇṭakattaṁ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚)
      • akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns Ja ii.118 Ja v.260

    4. (figuratively free from thieves, quiet, peaceful DN i.135 also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path). AN v.135 Vv 187 Vv-a 96

      • sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) Ja iv.192 Ja iv.193
      • (figuratively) beset with thieves, dangerous DN i.135 thorny, i.e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) SN iv.195 Thag 2, 352 Ja v.260
      • cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka
      1. ˚āpacita covered with thorns Ja vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita) -āpassaya (= kaṇṭak’ apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics DN i.167 = M i.78≈
      2. ˚āpassayika (adj to preceding) “bed-of-thorns-man” DN i.167≈. At Ja i.493 the reading is k-āpassaya, at iii.74 k-apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka-seyyaṁ kappetha (should it be k-āpassaye seyyaṁ k˚?) DN i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā-passayika
      3. ˚ācita covered with thorns Ja v.167
      • ˚ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge MN i.10 (k-dhāna; for dhāna = ṭhāna ‣See dhāna & cp. rāja-dhānī) AN i.35 Mil 220
      • ˚kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture Ja iii.41
      • ˚gahana a thorny thicket or jungle SN ii.228
      • ˚gumba a th. bush Ja i.208
      • ˚latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica Ja v.175
      • ˚vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge MN i.448
      From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka
    Kaṇṭaki
    1. feminine in compound ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154

    Kaṇṭha
    1. throat AN iv.131 Ja v.448 Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse) Pv-a 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: Pv-a 99 (k-oṭṭha-tālūnaṁ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle’s eye, cp. sūcicchidda variant reading sūcikaṭṭha “whose bones are like needles”), 260 (visukkha-k-ṭṭha-jivhā)
    2. neck Vin i.15 Dhp 307 (kāsāva˚) Vv 6417 (expid at Vv-a 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi-ābharaṇāni). especially in
    3. locative kaṇṭhe round the neck, with reference to various things tied round, e.g. kuṇapaṁ k āsattaṁ AN iv.377 kuṇapaṁ k. baddhaṁ Ja i.5 k. mālā Ja i.166 Ja i.192 k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaṁ Ja iii.226 with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q.v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa-virala-mālāya bandhakaṇṭha Pv-a 4 (cp. Avs i.102; ii.182; karavīra-mālābaddha sakta ii.182
      1. -kaṇṭheguṇa)
      1. ˚kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv.137
      2. ˚ja produced in the throat, i.e. guttural Sāsv.150
      3. ˚suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106
      *qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Latin collus “the turner.” Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat Brh. kaṇṭha
    Kaṇṭhaka1
    1. thorn ‣See kaṇṭaka
    Kaṇṭhaka2
    1. name of Gotama’s horse, on which he left his father’s palace Mhbv.25; spelt kanthaka at Ja i.54 Ja i.62f.
    Kaṇḍa
    masculine neuter
    1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general MN i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp. kaṇḍa-cittaka) Ja i.150 Ja ii.91 Ja iii.273 Ja v.39 Mil 44 Mil 73 Mhvs 25, 89. As arrow also in the “Tell story of Culladhanuggaha at Ja iii.220 & Dhp-a; iv.66. 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DN-a i.12 Pgdp 161
    2. a small portion, a bit or lump Dhp-a i.134 (pūva˚); Mhvs 17, 35
    3. kaṇḍaṁ (

      • adverb ) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36

        • ‣ See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der upa-kaṇḍakin
        • adjective (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī)
        1. ˚gamana the going of an arrow, i.e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow-shot Ja ii.334 cp. kaṇḍu
        2. ˚cittaka (Sanskrit kāṇḍa-citraka) an excellent arrow AN ii.202
        • ˚nāḷī a quiver Ja iii.220
        • ˚pahāra an arrow-shot, arrow-wound Mil 16 (ekena k-paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā “two birds killed with one stone”), 73
        • ˚vāraṇa
        • adjective warding off arrows, appl to a shield Ja vi.592
        • neuter ; a shield Ja iv.366
        perhaps as *kaldno from *kalad to break, cp. Latin clades, etc., Sanskrit kāṇḍa ‣See also khagga and khaṇḍa
    Kaṇḍaka
    1. = kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Buddhaghosa) AN iii.383 Bu xiii.29
    • akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure Pv-a 161
    Kaṇḍarā
    feminine sinew, tendon Vin i.91 322 (in compound kaṇḍara-cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kvu 23, 31; Vism 253, 254 (where Kp-a 49 reads miñja).
    Kaṇḍita
    1. at Ja i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taṁ kaṇḍinaṁ
    Kaṇḍin
    adjective having a shaft inserted, ap
    • plural to the head of an arrow (salla) Ja i.155
    • masculine an archer ibid.

    Kaṇḍu1
    feminine
    1. the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202 296; J. v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuṁ karoti to make or cause to itch Ja v.198 vineti to allay the itch, to scratch Ja v.199
    • (figuratively) worldly attachment irritation caused by the lusts, in “kaṇḍuṁ saṁhanti (as result of jhāna) AN iv.437
    1. ˚uppala a kind of lotus-blossom Dāvs iv.48
    2. ˚paṭicchādi an “itch-cloth,” i.e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296 297; iv.171, 172
    3. ˚rogin (adjective suffering from the itch Khus 105
    perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. kaṇḍu
  • masculine &
  • feminine
  • Kaṇḍu˚2

    an arrow-shot (as measure), in sahassa-kaṇḍu sata-bheṇḍu Thag 1, 164 = J ii.334 (but the latter: sata-bhedo), explained at Thag 1, 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa sata?

    1. -bhūmako, and at Ja ii.334 by sahassa-kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is “sahassa-kaṇḍagamanaṁ uccaṁ.”
    = kaṇḍa in compound
    Kaṇḍuka
    1. the itch, itchy feeling, irritation Ja v.198
    Kaṇḍuvati
    (kandūvati)
    1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205 Vin ii.121 Ja v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati) Dhp-a iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī)
    2. to scratch, rub, scrape AN ii.207 Ja vi.413 Pug 56
    denominative from kaṇḍu. Sanskrit kandūyati
    Kaṇḍuvana
    neuter
    1. itching, itchy feeling Dhp-a i.440 cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana. 2. scratching, scraping MN i.508 Ja ii.249 (ap
    2. plural to bad music)
    3. from kaṇḍūvati
    Kaṇḍusa
    neuter a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254 and ˚ka ibid. 290.
    Kaṇḍūyana
    neuter
    1. the itch Ja v.69
    ‣See kaṇḍuvana
    Kaṇḍolikā
    feminine a wicker-basket or stand Vin ii.114 143 ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.86.
    Kaṇṇa
    1. [Vedic karṇa, originally not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi → cakkhu), but as “projection” to *ker, from which also Sanskrit śṛṇga horn. cp. Latin cornu & cervus = English corner, horn & hart Further related Sanskrit aśri (caturaśraḥ four-cornered) śaṣkuli auditory passage; Latin ācer = German ecke; also Sanskrit śūla & Pali koṇa 1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48 286 Ja i.73 Ja iii.42 v.38; vi.519 Pv-a 74 Dhp-a ii.178 Dāvs ii.111-cīvara˚; the edge of the garment Vism 389. Frequently in compound catu˚; (catukkaṇṇa) four-cornered, square, as Ep of Niraya Nd2 304iii = Pv i.1013 (explained by catu-koṇa) Also of cloth Vin ii.228 Ja i.426 Ja iv.250
    • the ear Snp 608 Ja i.146 Ja i.194 Dhp-a i.390 (dasā˚). Frequently in phrase kaṇṇaṁ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment e.g. AN i.47
    • locative kaṇṇe in the ear, i.e. in a low tone, in a whisper Dhp-a i.166

  • the tip of a spoon J. i.347

    • assakaṇṇa name of a tree ‣See under assa3
    1. ˚alaṅkāra an ornament for the ear Ja v.409
    • ˚āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear Ja ii.275 276
    • ˚kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paṁsukita, malaggakita; kita = kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes)
    • ˚gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134 Snp 197 Ja i.146
    • ˚cālana shaking the ears Ja iii.99
    • ˚cūḷa the root of the ear Ja vi.488 as ˚cūlikā at Ja ii.276 Vism 255 Dhp-a iv.13
    • ˚chidda
    • neuter the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci-chidda eye of the needle Vin iii.39 Ja ii.244 Ja ii.261
    • ˚chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322 Kvu 31
    • ˚cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Mil 197 Mil 290
    • ˚jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98
    • sa˚ whispered into the ear, ap
    • plural to a method of taking votes ibid. cp. upakaṇṇakajappin
    • ˚jappana whispering into the ear DN i.11 DN-a i.97
    • ˚tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil DN i.12 (explained at DN-a i.98 where reading is ˚telanaṁ)
    • ˚nāsa ear & nose Ja ii.117 Mil 5 (˚chinna)
    • ˚patta the lobe of the ear Ja v.463 As ˚panta at Thag-a 211
    • ˚pāli = ˚patta Thag 2, 259 (explained by ˚panta)
    • ˚piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear Dhp-a i.394
    • ˚puccha the “tail” or flap of the ear Sdhp 168
    • ˚bila orifice of the ear Vism 195
    • ˚bheri a sort of drum. cp. ix.24
    • ˚mala “ear-dirt,” ear-wax in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135
    • ˚mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111
    • ˚muṇḍa 1.
    • adjective one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. Pv-a 152 chinnakaṇṇa)
    • (˚ka) “with blunt corners,” name of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta-mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumerated at Ja v.415 Vism 416 DN-a i.164
    • ˚mūla the root of the ear, the ear in genitive Ja i.335 Ja iii.124
    • locative fig in a low tone Dhp-a i.173 near, near by Dhp-a ii.8 (mama k.)
    • ˚roga a disease of the ear Dhs-a 340
    • ˚vallī the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94
    • ˚vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear-piercing Dhp-a ii.87 cp. mangala -vedha (cp. preceding) ear-piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children Ja v.167
    • ˚sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear Dhp-a i.148 Dhs-a 334 in which latter passage ˚ikaṁ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaṁ bhindati (= bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) Dhp-a ii.178 (Text sankhaliṁ, variant reading sakkhaliṁ)
    • ˚saṅkhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it Ja v.438
    • ˚sandhovika washing the ears. AN v.202
    • ˚sukha 1
    • adjective pleasant to the ear, agreable DN i.4 = M i.179, 268 = AN ii.209Mil 1 DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397

    • neuter pleasant speech Ja ii.187 Ja v.167 opposite kaṇṇa -sūla -sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143
    • ˚suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes-line Vin i.286
    • ˚sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit stake) in the ear, ear-ache Vv-a 243
    • what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech Dhs-a 397 (opposite ˚sukha)
    1. ˚sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika-sotāni as ubho sotāni, i.e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) DN i.106 = Sn p. 108 AN iv.86 Ja ii.359 Mil 286 Mil 357 Dhp-a ii.72
  • Kaṇṇaka
    1. (& ˚ika) adjective

      1. having corners or ears (—˚); feminine ˚ikā Vin ii.137 Ja ii.185

        • kāḷa-kaṇṇika ‣See under kāḷa
        from kaṇṇa
    Kaṇṇavant
    adjective
    1. having an (open) ear, i.e. clever, sharp Ja ii.261 (= kaṇṇachiddaṁ pana na kassaci n'atthi Commentary )
    from kaṇṇa
    Kaṇṇikā
    feminine
    1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa ‣See below
    2. the pericarp of a lotus Ja i.152 Ja i.183 Ja v.416 Mil 361 Vism 124 (paduma˚) Vv-a 43
    3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house-top Ja i.201 Ja iii.146 Ja iii.318 431, 472 Dhp-a i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚) DN-a i.43 Vv-a 304 Bdhd 92.

      • a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle Dhp-a i.98
      • In compounds. kaṇṇika˚;
      1. ˚baddha bound into a sheaf; figuratively of objects of thoughts Dhp-a i.304
      • ˚maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317 Dhp-a iii.66 Dhp-a vi.178
      • ˚rukkha a tree or log used to form the top of a house Ja i.201 = Dhp-a i.269
      • ˚lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house-top DN i.9 (= pilandhana-k˚ pi geha-k˚ pi vasena DN-a i.94)
      cp. kaṇṇaka & Sanskrit karṇikā
    Kaṇṇikāra
    1. ‣See kaṇikāra
    Kanha
    adjective
    1. dark, black, as attribute of darkness, opposed to light, synonym with kāḷa (q.v. for etymology); opposite sukka. In general it is hard to separate the literally and figuratively meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications with reference to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright (about black white ‣See nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red-green and yellow-blue systems). As such enum; d in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at DN ii.328 = M i.509 sq = ii.201 (‣ See also mañjeṭṭha)
    • II. (objective) 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā
    • feminine Ja ii.215 (= kāḷa-sappa C); ˚sappa Ja i.336 Ja iii.269 Ja iii.347 Ja v.446 Vism 664 (in simile) Mil 149 Pv-a 62
    • ˚sīsā with black heads AN iii.241 (kimī)
    • of (an abundance of smooth, dark (= shiny) hair (cp. in meaning English gloom gloss = black: shiny), as epithet of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61 synonym with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. Samson, etc ‣See also siniddha-, nīla-, kāla-kesa) sukaṇha-sīsa with very dark hair Ja v.205 also as sukaṇha-kaṇha-sīsa Ja v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair Ja vi.507 cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish Ja v.155 (explained as sukhumakaṇha-lom’ ācitattā)

  • of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa-vartaniṁ agniṁ R. V. viii.23, 19) SN i.69 = J iii.140 (cp. iii.9) Ja v.63 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti “kaṇh-uttara black on the surface Vin i.195

    • III. (Applied) 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail Pv-a 135 cp. Pv iii.64 ‣See also pakkha1 3
    • attribute of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e.g. of Māra Snp 355 Snp 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) DN i.93 with reference to the “black-born” ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dhp i.263 kāḷa-vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory Pv-a 152

  • of a dark, i.e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition DN iii.81f. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DN-a i.162 AN iii.383f. ˚abhijātika “of black birth,” of low social grade DN iii.251 = A. iii.384 Snp 563 cp. Thag 1, 833 and Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 11; in the sense of “evil disposition” at Ja v.87 (explained as kāḷaka-sabhāva).

    • of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma. AN v.232 = Dh 87 DN iii.82 Snp 967 Pug 30 Mil 200 Mil 337
    • ˚paṭipadā Ja i.105 and ˚magga the evil way. AN v.244 AN v.278
    • ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re-)birth Ja iv.9 (+ pāpa-kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combined with ˚sukka at AN iv.33 Snp 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚) Mil 37
    • ˚kamma “black action” MN i.39
    • ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha-sukka˚, akaṇha-asukka˚ DN iii.230 = M i.389 sq. = AN ii.230f.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i.e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep of King Pingala-netta Ja ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala-cakkhu is also epithet of Māra or his representatives, cp. Ja v.42 Pv ii.41)

  • not evil i.e. good AN ii.230 AN ii.231

    • atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7
    • sukaṇha identical ‣See above ii.2
    cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lithuanian kérszas
  • Kata
    (& sometimes; kaṭa
    1. done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of English make, German machen, or From faire ‣See the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati; its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaṁ, kusalaṁ kammaṁ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of “built, prepared, worked out” is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a)
    1. I. As verb-determinant (predicative)
    1. -1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominativenal determination “done made” (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dhp 17 (pāpaṁ me kataṁ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaṁ kataṁ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaṁ nagaraṁ kataṁ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaṁ kataṁ kammaṁ)-(b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instrumental DN i.84 = 177 = M i.40 = Sn p. 16 (in formula kataṁ karanīyaṁ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.) Vin iii.72 (kataṁ mayā kalyāṇaṁ akataṁ mayā pāpaṁ) Pv i.55 (amhākaṁ katā pūjā done to us is homage)
    • So also in composition (˚-), e.g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) Ja vi.145 (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him Vv-a 24 Pv-a 4 (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) Vv-a 331 (tesaṁ) ˚pubba done before DN ii.75 = AN iv.17 (kena) Ja vi.575
    • ˚matta (made drunk Thag 1, 199 (cira) ˚saṁsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar Ja iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj (med-passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive made, or made of; done by = being like, consisting of or medio-reflexive: one who has done, having done also “with” (i.e. this or that action done)
    • (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled kaṭ-âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa) akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48 ii.209 DN-a i.78 98; untrained Ja iii.57 Ja iii.58
    • ˚atta selfpossessed disciplined Ja vi.296
    • ˚indiya trained in his senses Thag 1, 725
    • ˚ūpāsana skilled, especially in archery MN i.82 SN i.62 AN ii.48 = iv.429 SN i.99 Ja iv.211 Mil 352 ˚kamma practised, skilled Ja v.243 of a servant SN i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief AN iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i.e. with) its hood erected, of a snake Ja vi.166
    • ˚buddhi of trained mind clever Ja iii.58 a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made-up teeth, an artificial back-scratcher Vin ii.316 a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106
    • ˚yogga trained serviceable SN i.99 a˚ useless SN i.98
    • ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously Ja v.317 (explained by ˚jāniya ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i.e. with) the hair done up into a chignon Ja v.431
    • ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, especially in archery MN i.82 SN i.62 SN i.98 SN ii.266 AN ii.48 Ja iv.211; v.41; vi.448 Mil 353 Dhp-a i.358 a˚ unskilled, awkward SN i.98 su˚ well-trained Ja v.41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy-elephant Ja vi.551
    • (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) Ja i.167 Vv-a 252 Pv-a 10
    • ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) Pv-a 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of Ja iii.400 Mhbv.33 ˚saṅketa (one who has made an agreement) Ja v.436-(c) with
    • adverb ial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato puro, atta, sayaṁ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road Ja vi.293 well built, of a cart Snp 300 = 304 Ja iv.395 well done, i.e. good AN i.102 (˚kamma-kārin doing good works)
    • ˚dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i.e. evil AN i.102 (˚kamma kārin) sukata-dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) DN i.27 55 = SN iv.351 Mil 5 Mil 25 3. as noun
    • neuter kataṁ that which has been done, the deed
    • (a) absolute: Ja iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed) v.434 (kataṁ anukaroti he imitates what has been done kat-ākataṁ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211 katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dhp 50
    • (b); with
    • adverb determination (su˚, du˚) sukataṁ goodness (in moral sense) Snp 240 Dhp 314 dukkataṁ badness Vin i.76 Vin ii.106 Dhp 314 dukkatakārin doing wrong Snp 664
    1. II. As noun-determinant (attributive) in composition (various applications & meanings)
    1. -1.; As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with reference to the act or state resulting, i.e. “so and so made or done” or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the active The literally translation would be “having become one who has done” (active ‣See a), or “to whom has been done” (pass. ‣See b)
    • (a) medio-active Temporal: the action being done, i.e. “after.” The noun-determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal-times, as kat-anna-kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta-kicca after the meal Ja iv.123 Pv-a 93
    • ˚purebhatta-kicca having finished the duties of the morning DN-a i.45f. Snp-a 131f.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast Ja i.227 Dhp-a i.117 a before breakfast. AN iv.64
    • ˚pātarāsa-bhatta identical Ja vi.349
    • ˚ānumodana after thanking (for the meal) Ja i.304
    • ˚bhatt'ānumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal Pv-a 141 In the same application: kat-okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp Vv-a 113) Pv-a 63
    • ˚kamma (-cora) (a thief) who has just “done the deed,” i.e. committed a theft Ja iii.34 Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their “job” & those who have not) Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi katakammaṁ the job done by the th.), cp. above i.2 a; ˚kāla “done their time,” deceased, of Petas Ja iii.164 (pete kālakate) Pv-a 29 cp. kāla ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255 265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet Ja iii.93
    • ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) Vv-a 3
    • ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i.e. after the end was made Vv-a 250
    • ˚buddha-kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha Vv-a 165 319 DN-a i.2
    • ˚maraṇa after dying i.e. dead Pv-a 29
    • ˚massu-kamma after having his beard done Ja v.309 ‣See note to ii.1 b
    • Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action i.e. of such habit, or “like, of such character.” The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa-kamma one who has done wrong Dhp-a i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaṁ khīṇ'āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant; ii.A MN i.4 MN i.235 Iti 38 Mil 138
    • ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, epithet of an Arahant, usually in combination with anāsava SN i.47 SN i.178 Dhp 386 Pv ii.615 Thag 2, 337 as adjective: kata-kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Nett 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Mil 339
    • With other determinations: -āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294
    • ˚ādhikāra having exerted oneself one who strives after the right path Ja i.56 Mil 115
    • ˚āparādha guilty, a transgressor Ja iii.42
    • ˚ābhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) Ja i.2 Dhp-a i.135
    • ˚ābhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination Ja i.110 (& a˚)
    • ˚ussāha energetic Sdhp 127
    • ˚kalyāṇa in passage kata-kalyāno kata-kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata-pāpo akata-luddho (luddo) : ˚thaddho It
    1. akata-kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. AN ii.174 = Vin iii.72 = It 25 = Dhs-a 383 Pv-a 174 also passive to whom something good has been done Ja i.137 Ja iii.12 Pv ii.99; akata-kalyāṇa a man of bad actions Iti 25 Pv ii.79
    2. ˚kibbisa a guilty person MN i.39 Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77 Pv-a 59
    3. ˚kusala a good man ‣See ˚kalyāṇa -thaddha hard-hearted, unfeeling, cruel ‣See ˚kalyāṇa -nissama untiring, valiant, bold Ja v.243
    4. ˚parappavāda practised in disputing with others DN-a i.117
    5. ˚pāpa an evil-doer Iti 25 Pv ii.79 (+ akata-kalyāṇa) Pv-a 5 a˚ ‣See ˚kalyāṇa
    6. ˚puñña one who has done good deeds a good man DN ii.144 Dhp 16 Dhp 18 Dhp 220; Pv iii.52 Mil 129 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Mil 250 Vv-a 94
    7. ˚puññatā the fact of having done good deeds DN iii.276 (pubbe in former births) AN ii.31 Snp 260 cp. Kp-a 132, 230 Ja ii.114
    8. ˚bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39
    9. ˚bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful ‣See ˚kalyāṇa
    10. ˚bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground-work (of sanctification) Mil 352
    11. ˚ludda cruel MN iii.165 a˚ gentle Nett 180; cp. ˚kalyāṇa -vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin Ja i.467
    12. ˚vissāsa trusting, confiding Ja i.389
    13. ˚ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚)
    14. (b) medio-passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or “possessed of, afflicted or affected with.” In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive
    15. Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e. g kata-massu-kamma “having had the beard (-doing done,” as different from secondary nouns (i.e. verb-derivations) e.g. kat-âbhiseka “having had the anointing done
    16. In this application: ˚citta-kamma decorated, variegated Dhp-a i.192 ˚daṇḍa-kamma afflicted with punishment (= daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76 ˚massu-kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard-trimming Ja v.309 (cp. Ja iii.11 & karana)
    17. Various combinations:; katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Snp 1023 Thag 2, 482 Ja i.17 = Bu 24, 27 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 141 Vv-a 78
    18. ˚attha one who has received benefits Ja i.378
    19. ˚ānuggaha assisted, aided Ja ii.449 Vv-a 102
    20. ˚ābhiseka anointed, consecrated Mhvs 26, 6 -ūpakāra assisted, befriended Ja i.378 Pv-a 116
    21. ˚okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7 DN ii.39 DN ii.277 Snp 1030 Snp 1031 (˚âva˚) Ja v.140 Ja vi.341 Mil 95
    22. ˚jātihiṅgulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion Ja iii.303
    23. ˚nāmadheyya having received a name, called Ja v.492
    24. ˚paṭisanthāra having been received kindly Ja vi.160 Dhp-a i.80
    25. ˚pariggaha being taken to wife, married to instrumental Pv-a 161 (& a˚)
    26. ˚paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm-protected Mil 152
    27. ˚bhaddaka one to whom good has been done Pv-a 116
    28. ˚sakkāra honoured, revered Ja v.353 Mhvs 9, 8 (su˚) -saṅgaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mhvs 5, 106
    29. ˚sannāha clad in armour Dhp-a i.358
    30. ˚sikkha (having been) trained Mil 353
    31. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with reference to the object affected by it i.e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant with emphasis of the verb-notion: “made so & so, used as, reduced to” (garukata = garavita). (a) with nouns ‣See s. v. e.g., anabhāva-kata, kavi˚ kāla-vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48 ii.209, tāl'āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār'ûpekkhā˚ etc
    32. (b) with adjectives, e.g. garu˚, bahu˚-(c) with
    33. adverb ial substitutes, e.g. atta˚, para (paraṁ˚), sacchi˚, sayaṁ, etc
    past participle of karoti
    Kataka
    neuter
    1. a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129 143; cp. Vinaya Texts ii.318
    from kantati2
    Kataññu
    adjective
    1. literally knowing, i.e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i.e. grateful often in combination with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits SN ii.272 AN i.87 = Pug 26 Vv 8127 Sdhp 509 Sdhp 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful SN i.225 Ja iii.26 (= kata-guṇaṁ ajānanto Commentary ), 474; iv.124 Pv-a 116 Bdhd 81
    • (separate akata-ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i.e. knowing Nibbāna Dhp 97 Dhp 383 Dhp-a ii.188 Dhp-a iv.139
    • akataññu-rūpa (& ˚sambhava of ungrateful nature Ja iv.98 Ja iv.99
    • cp. Sanskrit kṛtajña
    Kataññutā
    feminine
    1. gratefulness (defined at Kp-a 144 as katassa jānanatā) Snp 265 Ja i.122 (Text ˚nā variant reading ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97 Vv-a 63 Sdhp 497 Sdhp 540. In combination with kataveditā SN ii.272 AN i.61 AN ii.226 AN ii.229 kataññū-kataveditā Ja iii.492
    • ˚akataññutā ungratefulness in combination with akataveditā AN i.61 AN iii.273 Ja v.419 as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya AN ii.226
    abstract from last
    Katatta
    neuter
    1. the doing of, performance of, only in ablative katattā DN ii.213 AN i.56 Ja iii.128 Dhs 431 654 Snp-a 356 Dhp-a iii.154 iv.142. Used adverb ially in meaning of “owing to, on account of” Mil 275 Dhs-a 262 Mhvs 3, 40
    2. ˚akatattā through non-performance of, in absence or in default of A. i.56 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 154
    3. abstract from kata, cp. Sanskrit kṛtatvaṁ
    Katana
    neuter
    1. a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) Ja iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi … katanaṁ kataṁ), cp. Morris in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 15
    from kata
    Katama
    adjective
    1. which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89 MN i.7 Ja i.172 Mil 309 Pv-a 27 In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e. g Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?) DN i.197 (katamo so atta-paṭilābho?) Ja i.97 Snp 995 Mil 51
    • instr katamena (scil. maggena)
    • adverb by which way, how Mil 57 Mil 58
    cp. Vedic katama, interrogative pronoun with formation of numeral ordinal, in function = katara, cp. antama → antara, Latin dextimus → dexter
    Katara
    adjective
    1. which one (of a certain number, usually of two) Ja i.4 Pv-a 119 Often only emphatic for ko, e.g. Ja i.298 (kataraṁ upaddavaṁ na kareyya), and used uninflected in compounds. as katara-geha Ja iii.9 ˚gandhaṁ Ja vi.336 ˚divasaṁ Ja ii.251 ˚nagarato (from what city) Dhp-a i.390 ˚nāma (kataraṁnāma, adjective) (of what name) ibid
    • katarasmiṁ magge in which way, how? Ja iv.110
    Vedic katara, interrogative pronoun with formation of numeral ordinal, cp. Latin uter
    Katavedin
    adjective
    1. mindful, grateful SN i.225 Pug 26 Ja i.424 Ja ii.26
    kata + vedin ‣See kataññu
    Kataveditā
    feminine
    1. gratefulness ‣See kataññutā;
    abstract from last
    Katāvin
    adjective-noun
    1. one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship SN i.14 Mil 264
    secondary formation from kata
    Kati
    indeclinable
    1. how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155 SN i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments), 70 Snp 83 Snp 960 Snp 1018 Ps ii.72 Mil 78 Dhp-a i.7 188 Pv-a 74
    interrogative pronoun ; used like Latin quot. Already Vedic.
    Katikā
    feminine
    1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (Text kātikā, 309 Ja vi.71 Mil 171 Mil 360–⁠2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp. kathikā & kathā) Ja ii.449
    2. katikaṁ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104 220, 230 J. i.81; iv.267 Dhp-a i.91 Vv-a 46 In compounds. katika˚ e.g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ṁ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dhp i.8; ˚ṁ bhindati to break an agreement Ja vi.541
    3. ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76 208: iii.160
    4. to katheti or karoti?
    Katipaya
    adjective
    1. some, several; a few (in compounds. or in plural ) Ja i.230 Ja i.487 Ja iii.280 Ja iii.419 iv.125 v.162; Pv ii.920 (= appake only a few) Dhp-a i.94 (very few) Pv-a 46 In singular little, insignificant Vv 5320 (= appikā
    2. feminine ). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns Ja v.132 vi.52 Pv-a 135 Mhbv.3
    3. cp. Sanskrit katipaya
    Katipāhan
    adverb
    1. (for) a few days Vin iii.14 Ja i.152 Ja i.298 Ja i.466 Ja ii.38 iii.48; iv.147; Mhvs 7, 38 Pv-a 145 Pv-a 161 Vv-a 222
    • katipāhena instrumental within a few days Mhvs 17, 41 Dhp-a i.344 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 161. katipāh'accayena after (the lapse of) a few days Ja i.245 Dhp-a i.175 Pv-a 47
    katipaya + ahan, contracted ‣See aha2
    Katima
    feminine katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half-month Vin i.117 numeral ordinal from kati
    Kativassa
    adjective
    1. (having) how many years, how old? Ja v.331
    2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu’s career) of how many years’ seniority? Vin i.86 Ud 59 Mil 28 Dhp-a i.37
    kati + vassa
    Katividha
    adjective
    1. of how many kinds Vism 84
    kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā
    Kate
    adverb
    1. for the sake of, on behalf of; with accusative maṁ k. Ja iv.14 with genitive maṁsassa k. Ja v.500
    2. locative of kata
    Katta
    1. is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in compound pari˚
    past participle of kantati2; cp. Sanskrit kṛtta
    Kattabba
    adjective
    1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dhp 53 Ja i.77 Ja i.267 Ja v.362
    2. neuter that which is to be done, obligation, duty Thag 1, 330 Ja ii.154 Ja v.402 Dhp-a i.211
    3. akattabba
    4. adjective not to be done Ja iii.131 v.147;
    5. neuter that which ought not to be done Ja v.402
    6. kattabb’ ākattabba to be done and not to be done Ja i.387
    7. kattabba-yuttaka 1.
    8. adjective fit or proper to be done Dhp-a i.13
      • neuter duty, obligation Ja iii.9 vi.164 Dhp-a i.180 (the last) duties towards the deceased Ja i.431

        • cp. kātabba
        gerundive of karoti
    Kattabbaka
    neuter
    1. task, duty Thag 1, 330
    from last
    Kattabbatā
    feminine
    1. fitness, duty, that which is to be done Ja ii.179 (iti—˚āya because I had to do it thus)
    from kattabba
    Kattar
    1. one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in following construction. I. Dependent Either in verb-function with accusative, as
    2. noun agent to all phrases with karoti e.g. pañhaṁ karoti to put a question, pañhaṁ kattā one who puts a question or in
    3. noun function with genitive, e.g. mantānaṁ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in compound rāja-kattāro makers of kings

      • II. Dependent. as
      • noun kattā the doer kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words
      1. -1. (indefinite) one who does anything (with accusative AN i.103 AN ii.67 AN v.347 AN v.350f.; (with genitive) Ja i.378 iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26 Commentary akataññū, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 15: not to kṛt! iv.98 (explained as kata by C); v.258 Mil 25 Mil 296 Bdhd 85 sq
      2. an author, maker, creator DN i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaṁ) AN ii.102 Dhp i.111
      3. an officer of a king, the king’s messenger Ja v.220 (= 225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492 Note. At Ja v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a-declension) cp. also nominative ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla-katta.

        • as technical termg. name of the instrumental case Vv-a 97 Kacc 136, 143, 277
      agent noun from karoti, cp. Sanskrit kartṛ
    Kattara
    adjective (only˚-)
    1. ˚daṇḍa a walking-stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188 ii.76 = 208 sq.; iii.160 Ja i.9 Ja v.132 Ja vi.52 Ja vi.56 Ja vi.520 Vism 91, 125, 181. ˚yaṭṭhi = preceding Ja ii.441 DN-a i.207 iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot Ja iii.299
    • ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269 = Dhp-a i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra-kūṭe chaḍḍehi). Kattari & i
    cp. Sanskrit kṛtvan (?), in different meaning
    Kattari
    ˚ī
    feminine
    1. scissors, shears Ja iii.298 with reference to the “shears” of a crab, “as with scissors”: cp. Vinaya Texts iii.138 ‣See next
    to kantati2
    Kattarikā
    feminine
    1. scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134 J. i.223
    from last
    Kattikā
    feminine (& ˚kattika
    1. name of a month (Oct
    • Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika-puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba-kattikā, whereas the fifth K., is also known as pacchima-kattikā; both are comprised in the term k
    • dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika-temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k
    • cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k
    • temāsinī; that of Kattika is k
    • cātumāsinī ‣See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta
    • Nett 143 (kattiko variant reading kattikā)
    1. ˚cātumāsinī ‣See above Vin iii.263
    • ˚coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262
    • ˚chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba-kattikā and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā Ja i.433 Ja ii.372 v.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17
    • ˚temāsi (-puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261 Mhvs 17, 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī)
    • ˚māsa the month K. Ja ii.372 Mhvs 12, 2 (kattike māse)
    • ˚sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mhvs 17, 64
    cp. Sanskrit kṛttikā feminine plural the Pleiades & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit karthika
    Kattu˚
    1. ; 1. base of infinitive kattuṁ (of karoti), in compds˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vb 208 Vism 320, 385 Dhp-a iii.289
    • ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226
    • ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466 Vv-a 43–⁠2 base of kattar in compound

    Kattha
    adverb
    1. where? where to whither? Vin i.83 107; ii.76 DN i.223 Snp 487 Snp 1036 Ja iii.76 Pv ii.916 Dhp-a i.3
    • k. nu kho where then where I wonder? DN i.215f. Pv-a 22 (with Pot
    • ˚katthaci(d) (indefinite) anywhere, at some place or other Ja i.137 Ja v.468 wherever, in whatever place Mil 366 Pv-a 284 Kp-a 247 Ja iii.229 Ja iv.9 Ja iv.45 as katthacid eva J. iv.92 Pv-a 173 Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place Ja iv.341
    • na k. nowhere M. i.424 Mil 77 Vv-a 14
    1. ˚ṭhita figuratively in what condition or state? DN ii.241 (corresponding with ettha) Ja iv.110
    • ˚vāsa in what residence Snp 412
    • ˚vāsika residing where? Ja ii.128 Ja ii.273
    derived from interrogative base ka˚; (kad2), whereas Sanskrit kutra is derived from base ku˚; , cp. kuttha
    Katthati
    1. to boast Snp 783 (ppr. medium akatthamāna). cp. pavikatthita
    2. cp. Sanskrit katthate, etymology unexplained
    Katthitar
    1. (agent noun from katthati] a boaster Snp 930
    Katthin
    adjective
    1. boasting. AN v.157 (+ vikatthin)
    from katth
    Katthu
    1. (?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs Ja vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚)
    Kathaṁ
    adverb
    1. dubit. interrogative participle 1. how; with indicative present Pv-a 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with future &
    2. conditional Ja i.222 Ja ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500 Pv-a 54 (na dassāmi)
    3. why for what reason? Ja iii.81 Ja v.506 Combined with -ca Vin i.114 Vin ii.83
    4. ˚carahi DN ii.192
    5. ˚nu &-nu kho; Vin ii.26 Ja iii.99 Ja iv.339 Nd2 189 ‣See also evaṁ nu kho
    6. ˚pana DN ii.163
    7. ˚su Nd2 189
    8. ˚hi Ja iv.339 Dhp-a i.432
    9. ˚hi nāma Vin i.45 Vin ii.105 Vin iii.137 Vin iv.300 all in the same meaning
    10. ˚ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Thag 1, 456
      1. ˚kathā “saying how? how?” i.e. doubt, uncertainty unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); ex plural as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd2 190 DN ii.282 Snp 500 Snp 866 Snp 1063 Snp 1088 Dhp-a iv.194 as adjective and at end of compound ˚-katha e.g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa-vicikiccha … vesārajjappatta) DN i.110 = Vin i.12 tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Snp 17 Snp 86 Snp 367. k-k-salla “the arrow of doubt” DN ii.283 (vicikicchā +)
      2. ˚kathin having doubts, unsettled uncertain DN ii.287 MN i.8 Nd2 191 Dhs-a 352
      3. free from doubt, epithet of Arahant (explained DN-a i.211: “not saying how and how is this?”) MN i.108 Iti 49 Snp 534 Snp 635 Snp 868 Snp 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa-vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu DN i.71 = Pug 59 jhāyī anejo a˚ Dhp 414 (: Dhp-a iv.194) = Sn 638
      4. ˚kara
      5. adjective how acting, what doing? k. ahaṁ no nirayam pateyyaṁ (“”) Ja iv.339 Snp 376 Ja iv.75 Ja v.148
      6. ˚jīvin leading what kind of life? Snp 181
      7. ˚dassin holding what views? Snp 848 ‣See ˚sīla
      8. ˚pakāra of what kind Vin i.358 Snp 241 (:kathappakāra)
      9. ˚paṭipanna going what way, i.e. how acting? DN ii.277 DN ii.279 DN ii.281
      10. ˚bhāvita how cultivated or practised? SN v.119
      11. ˚bhūta “how being,” of what sort, what like DN ii.139 DN ii.158
      12. ˚rūpa of what kind MN i.218 AN i.249 AN iii.35 Ja iii.525
      13. ˚vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? DN ii.244
      14. ˚vidha what sort of Ja v.95 Ja v.146 Dhs-a 305
      15. ˚sameta how constituted Snp 873
      16. ˚sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Snp 848 (kathaṁdassī kathaṁsīlo upasanto ti vuccati)
      17. cp. Vedic kathaṁ & kathā
    Kathana
    neuter
    1. conversing, talking Ja i.299 Ja iii.459 Ja vi.340
    2. telling i.e. answering solving (a question) Ja v.66 (pañha˚)
    3. preaching Dhp-a i.7

      • reciting, narrating Kaccāyana 130. cp. kathita-akathana not talking or telling Ja i.420 Ja vi.424 not speaking from anger Ja iv.108 Dhp-a i.440
      1. ˚ākāra, in ˚ṁ karoti to enter into conversation with Ja vi.413
      • ˚samattha able to speak (of the tongue Ja iii.459 able to talk or converse with (saddhiṁ Ja vi.340
      • ˚sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous Ja i.299Ja i.420
      from kath ‣See katheti
    Kathala
    1. (potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala
    Kathali
    1. (metri causâ) = next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234
    Kathalika
    neuter
    1. always in combination pād'odaka pāda-pīṭha pāda-k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9 47 ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At Vv-a 8 however with pāda-pīṭha explained as a footstool (pāda-ṭhāpana-yoggaṁ dārukhaṇḍaṁ āsanaṁ). Buddhaghosa (on CV ii.1.1) explained pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda-kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaṁsana)
    1. the meaning “bowl” seems to be preferable to Buddhaghosa’s forced interpretation as “towel.”
    der. uncertain
    Kathā
    feminine
    1. talk talking, conversation AN i.130 Pv-a 39 So in antarā˚ DN i.179 Snp p. 107, 115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚; low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in enumerated in full at DN i.7 = 178 = iii.36 & passim (e. g SN v.419: correct suddha˚ to yuddha˚! AN v.128 = Nd2 192) reference to at AN iii.256 AN v.185 Ja i.58 Pug 35 Similarly in gāma˚ Snp 922
    2. viggāhikā k. AN iv.87 Snp 930 Ten good themes of conversation (kathā-vatthūni) are enumerated at MN iii.113 = AN iii.117 = iv.357 = v.67 Mil 344 similarly dhammī kathā AN ii.51 AN iv.307 AN v.192 Snp 325
    3. pavattanī k. AN i.151 yutta kathāyaṁ Snp 826
    4. sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ṁ k˚ṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā DN i.52 DN i.108 etc. AN v.185 Snp 419 past participle 86, 93 107, 116
    5. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203 290 (˚ṁ karoti to discuss) AN iii.174 AN iv.358 frequently in anupubbi˚; a sermon in regular succession graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of “holiness,” viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ ‣See anupubba Vin i.15 AN iii.184 AN iv.186 AN iv.209 AN iv.213 Dhp-a i.6 Vv-a 66
    6. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚; an account in detail, e.g. Pv-a 19

      • bāhira˚ profane story Kp-a 48
      • word, words, advice: ˚ṁ gaṇhāti to accept an advice Ja ii.173 Ja iii.424

    7. explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚; (q.v.), cp. gati Ps ii.72.

      • discussion, in ˚vatthu ‣See below Mhvs 5 138
      • ˚dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk AN iii.181 opposite su˚ AN iii.182
      • ˚kathaṁ vaḍḍheti “to increase the talk,” to dispute sharply Ja i.404 Ja v.412
      • ˚ṁ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation Ja i.119 Ja iv.73-At the end of compounds. (as adjective) ˚kathā e.g. chinna Snp 711 ṭhita˚ DN-a i.73 madhura˚ Ja iii.342 Ja vi.255
      1. ˚ābhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Mil 78 Mil 79
      • ˚ojja (k˚-udya, to vad a dispute, quarrel Snp 825 Snp 828
      • ˚dhamma a topic of conversation DN-a i.43
      • ˚nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery Ja ii.350
      • ˚pavatti the course of a conversation Ja i.119 Dhp-a i.249 Mhbv.61 -pābhata subject of a conversation, story Ja i.252 Ja i.364
      • ˚bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity AN iv.87
      • ˚magga narrative, account, history Ja i.2
      • ˚rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Mil 345
      • ˚vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument MN i.372 MN ii.127 MN ii.132 There are 10 enumerated at AN iv.352 AN iv.357 ‣See kathā and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa-mitta, referred to at. AN v.67 AN v.129 Vism 127 Dhp-a iv.30 Three are given at DN iii.220 = AN i.197 ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion Vv-a 354
      • Name of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumerated at various places (e.g. DN-a i.17 Mhbv.94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place) ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1882, 1888 1896
      • ˚samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mhvs 5 138
      • ˚samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation Ja i.119 iii.278 Dhp-a i.250
      • ˚sampayoga conversational intercourse AN i.197
      • ˚sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77 DN i.89f. 107 sq.; ii.150 MN i.178 AN ii.197 AN v.188 Ud 40 Ja ii.283 Mil 31 DN-a i.276 (explained as kathanapaṭikathana) Dhp-a ii.91 (˚ṁ karoti) Vv-a 153
    from kath to tell or talk ‣See katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc’ âbhilāpa & sallāpa
    Kathāpeti
    causative ii. of katheti (q.v.)
    Kathālikā
    feminine
    1. kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (variant reading kathālaka), and meda˚ AN iv.377 Dhp-a ii.179
    from kuth, to boil
    Kathika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in compounds. citta˚ Thag 2, 449 (cp. citra-kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚ AN iv.153
    • dhamma˚ Ja i.148 Ja iii.342 Ja iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚) as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder AN iii.174 Mhvs 14, 64 (mahā˚)
    from kathā, cp. Sanskrit kathaka
    Kathikā
    feminine
    1. agreement Dpvs 19, 22 ‣See katikā;
    from last?
    Kathita
    1. said, spoken, related Ja ii.310 Ja iv.73 Ja v.493
    • su˚ well said or told J. iv.73. As
    • neuter with instrumental Ja iv.72 (tena kathitaṁ the discourse (given) by him)
    past participle of katheti, cp. Sanskrit kathita
    Kathin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher Ja i.148 (dhamma-kathikesu citrakathī) Mil 90 Mil 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers) ‣See also kathaṁ-kathin
    cp. kathika
    Katheti
    1. (v. denominative native from kathā, cp. Sanskrit kathayate]
    2. aorist kathesi, infinitive kathetuṁ & kathetave (Vin i.359);
    3. passive kathīyati & katheti (Mil 22 cp. Trenckner,; Note. 122); ppr
    4. passive kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A.; iii.181); grd kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha,

      1. -1. to speak, say tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato Pv-a 77). mā kathesi (= mā bhaṇi) do not speak Pv-a 16
      • to tell (a story) J.; i.2; iv.137 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13
      • to converse with J. vi.413 Pv-a 86 (= āmantayi)

    5. to report, to inform Ja v.460

      • to recite Dhp-a i.166

    6. to expound, explain, preach Ja i.30 Mil 131 Dhp-a i.88 Nd2 s.v.

      • to speak about (with
      • accusative ) Vin ii.168

    7. to refer to Ja i.307

      • to answer or solve (a question) Ja i.165 Ja v.66
      • Caus ii.kathāpeti to make say Mhvs 24, 4 (
      • aorist kathāpayi) Dhp-a ii.35 Kp-a 118
    Kad˚
    1. originally “what?” used adverb ially; then indefinite “any kind of,” as (na) kac(-cana) “not at all”; kac-cid “any kind of; is it anything? what then?” Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚; (in denoting badness or smallness, e.g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa ‣See also kantāra kappaṭa),; kiṁ˚, ku.˚; For relation of ku → ka cp. kutra → kattha & kadā.

      1. ˚anna bad food Kacc 178
      2. ˚asana identical Kacc 178 -dukkha (?) great evil (= death) Vv-a 316 (explained as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka)
      old form of interrogative pronoun neuter, equal to kiṁ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaṁ = kiṁarthaṁ to what purpose
    Kadamba
    1. (cp. Sanskrit kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange-coloured, fragrant blossoms J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206 Dhp-a i.309 (˚puppha) Mhvs 25, 48 (identical)
    Kadara
    adjective miserable Ja ii.136 (explained as lūkha, kasira).
    Kadariya
    adjective
    1. mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually explained by thaddhamaccharī (Pv-a 102 Dhp-a iii.189 313), and mentioned with maccharī, frequently also with paribhāsaka SN i.34 SN i.96 AN ii.59 AN iv.79f. Dhp 177 Dhp 223 Ja v.273 Snp 663 Vv 295 As cause of Peta birth frequently in Pv., e. g i.93; ii.77; iv.148 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 99 Pv-a 236. neuter avarice stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122 Snp 362 (with kodha)
    2. cp. Sanskrit kadarya, kad + arya?
    Kadariyatā
    feminine
    1. stinginess, niggardliness DN ii.243 Mil 180 Pv-a 45
    abstract from last
    Kadala
    neuter the plantain tree Kacc 335.
    Kadalī1
    feminine
    1. -1. the plantain, Musa sapientium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: SN i.154 = Vin ii.188 = SN ii.241 = AN ii.73 = Dhp-a iii.156 cp. Mil 166 -as an image of unsubstantiality cp. iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: Ja i.11 Ja vi.590 (in simile), 592 Vv-a 31
    • a flag, banner, i.e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners (-dhaja) Ja v.195 Ja vi.412 In compounds. kadali˚;
    1. ˚khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e.g. MN i.233 SN iii.141 = iv.167; Vism 479 Nd2 680 Aii. Ja vi.442 as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs Vv-a 280
    • ˚taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49
    • ˚toraṇa a triumphal arch made of
    • plural stems and leaves Mhbv.169
    • ˚patta a
    • plural leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from Ja v.4 Dhp-a i.59
    • ˚phala the fruit of the plantain Ja v.37
    Sanskrit kadalī
    Kadalī2

    feminine a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga Ja v.406 Ja v.416 Ja vi.539 DN-a i.87 and ˚pavara-p

  • accusative attharaṇa
  • neuter the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = ii.163, 169; sim D. ii.187;
  • adjective (of pallanka) AN i.137 = iii.50 = iv.394.

  • Kadā
    indeclinable
    1. . interrogative adverb when? (very often following by
    2. future ) Thag 1, 1091–⁠1106 Ja ii.212 Ja vi.46 Dhp-a i.33 Pv-a 2

      • Combd with-ssu Ja v.103 Ja v.215 Ja vi.49 sq -ci cid
      1. indefinite
      1. -1. at some time AN iv.101
      • sometimes Ja i.98 Pv-a 271

    3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30.

      • perhaps, may be Ja i.297 Ja vi.364 + eva kadācideva Vv-a 213
      • ˚kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then Ja i.216 Ja iv.120 Dhs-a 238 Pv-a 253
      • ˚kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times AN i.179 Mil 73 Dhp-a iii.362
      • ˚na kadāci at no time, never SN i.66 Ja v.434 Ja vi.363 same with mā k Ja vi.310 Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana
      • kadāc -uppattika
      • adjective happening only sometimes, occasional Mil 114
    Vedic kadā. cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando
    Kaddama
    1. mud, mire, filth Nd2 374 (= panka) Ja i.100 Ja iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390 Pv-a 189 (= panka), 215; compared with moral impurities Ja iii.290 & Mil 35
    • free from mud or dirt clean Vin ii.201 of a lake Ja iii.289 figuratively pure of character Ja iii.290
    • kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled Ja vi.59 (kilesehi).

      1. ˚odaka muddy water Vin ii.262 Vism 127
      2. ˚parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence Ja vi.390
      • ˚bahula
      • adjective muddy, full of mud Dhp-a i.333
      Derivation unknown. Sanskrit kardama
    Kanaka
    neuter
    1. gold, usually as uttatta˚; molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu i.59; Pv iii.32 Ja v.416 Pv-a 10 suvaṇṇa)
    1. ˚agga gold-crested Ja v.156
    • ˚chavin of golden complexion Ja vi.13
    • ˚taca
    • adjective identical Ja v.393
    • ˚pabhā golden splendour Bu xxiii.23
    • ˚vimāna a fairy palace of gold Vv-a 6 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 53
    • ˚sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i.e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30
    cp. Sanskrit kanaka; Anglo-Saxon hunig = English honey ‣See also kañcana
    Kaniṭṭha
    adjective
    1. younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger) Ja ii.6 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 54; especially the younger brother (opposite jeṭṭha, ˚ka) Ja i.132 Dhp-a i.6 13; Mhvs 9, 7 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder younger brothers Ja i.253 sabba-k. the very youngest Ja i.395 feminine kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter Dhp-a i.396

      • Figuratively later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188
      • akaniṭṭha “not the smaller” i.e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) SN v.237 SN v.285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487
      Sanskrit kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl. ‣See kaññā
    Kaniṭṭhaka
    adjective younger (opposite jeṭṭha) AN iv.93 = J ii.348 Dhp-a i.152 the younger brother Mhvs 5, 33, 8, 10 35, 49; 36, 116; —˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mhvs 1, 49 Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā).
    Kaniṭṭhatta
    neuter the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) Dhp-a i.152
    Kaniṭṭhī
    feminine a younger sister Mhvs 7, 67.
    Kaniya
    adjective
    1. younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian’s construction not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā = kaññā)
    compar. of kan˚, Sanskrit kanīyaṁs
    Kanta1
    1. -1. adjective in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; frequently in form iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses SN i.245 SN ii.192 SN iv.60 SN iv.158 SN iv.235f.; v.22, 60, 147 AN ii.66f. MN i.85 Snp 759 Iti 15 Vb 2 100, 337 bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Snp 399 DN ii.265 DN iii.227 (ariya˚) Ja iii.264 Ja v.447 with reference to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kvu 35, 211 Pv-a 277 (hatthi-) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta Dhp-a i.163 of vīṇā Ja vi.255 Ja vi.262 Dhp-a i.163
    2. beloved by, favourite of, charming Ja vi.255 Ja vi.262 Dhp-a i.163
    3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband Ja vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Mil 118 Sdhp 608 cp. suriya˚, canda˚-kantā

      • feminine the beloved one, the wife Ja v.295
      • kantena instrumental agreeably with kind words AN ii.213 Ja v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak’ ante)-a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e.g. DN ii.192 in other combination Ja v.295 Vb 100 Nett 180 Pv-a 193

        • akantena with unpleasant words AN ii.213
        • kantatara compar. Ja iii.260
        1. ˚bhāva the state of being pleasant DN-a i.76 Vv-a 323
        Sanskrit kānta, past participle of kāmeti
    Kanta2
    1. cut cut out or off Thag 2, 223 (˚salla = samucchinna-rāg'-ādisalla Thag-a 179) cp. katta & pari˚
    past participle of kantati2, Sanskrit kṛtta. kanta is analogy formed after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta ‣See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen under parikanta.
    Kantati1
    1. to plait, twist, spin, especially suttaṁ (thread) Vin iv.300 Pv-a 75 Dhp-a iii.273 kappāsaṁ AN iii.295 cp. pari˚
    Sanskrit kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Latin cratis, crassus, English crate
    Kantati2
    1. to cut, cut off Ja ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154 Dhp-a iii.152 (+ viddhaṁseti)
    Sanskrit kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Latin caro, cena; Old High German sceran, English shear ‣See also kaṭu
    Kantāra
    adjective noun
    1. difficult to passive scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, explained as nirudaka īriṇa Vv-a 334 (on Vv 843), combined with maru˚ Pv-a 99 and marukantāramagga Pv-a 112 opposite khemantabhūmi Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha Ja i.99 SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd2 630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚ nirudaka˚. The term is used both literally & fig (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas frequently in Pv ‣See above, also Ja i.395 As diṭṭhi˚; in
    2. passive diṭṭhi-gata, etc. MN i.8 MN i.486 Pug 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti).

      1. ˚addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (figuratively)Th 1, 95~ DN i.73 = M i.276
      2. ˚paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i.e. a forester Ja iii.537
      • ˚magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) Ja ii.294 (literally); in simile SN ii.118
      • ˚mukha the entrance to a desert Ja i.99
      perhaps from kad-tarati, difficult to cross, Sanskrit (?) kāntāra
    Kantāriya
    adjective
    1. (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (= Vv-a 341)
    from kantāra
    Kantika1
    adjective
    1. spinning Pv-a 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo)
    to kantati1
    Kantika2
    1. = kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (= Pv-a 193)
    Kantita1
    1. spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300
    Sanskrit kṛtta, past participle of kantati1
    Kantita2

    adjective Sanskrit kṛtta

  • past participle of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Mil 240 better as kantita1, i.e. spun.

  • Kanda
    1. a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. Ja i.273 Ja iv.373 Ja vi.516 Vv-a 335 ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) DN i.101 a bulbous root Ja v.202
    Sanskrit kanda
    Kandati
    1. to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dhp 371 Vv 8312 Ja vi.166 Mil 11 Mil 148 frequently of Petas: Pv-a 43 Pv-a 160 Pv-a 262 (cp. rodati)
    • In kāmaguṇā
    • passive urattāḷiṁ k M. i.86 = Nd2 s.v. AN iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iṁ variant reading ); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237 Vin ii.284 Ja v.267
    Sanskrit krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Latin clamor, calare, calendae, Old High German hellan to shout
    Kandana
    neuter
    1. crying, lamenting Pv-a 262
    Sanskrit krandana
    Kandara
    1. -1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76 146 used as a dwelling-place Thag 1, 602 Ja i.205 Ja iii.172 2. a glen, defile, gully DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pug 59 AN iv.437 Mil 36 explained at DN-a i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etymology is a popular one, viz. “kaṁ vuccati udakaṁ; tena dāritaṁ”) k-padarasākhā AN i.243 = ii.240 Pv-a 29
    Sanskrit kandara
    Kandala
    1. name of a plant with white flowers Ja iv.442
    • makuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews)
    Kandaḷa
    1. name of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb DN i.264
    Kandita
    adjective
    1. weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping Ja iii.58 noun neuter crying, lamentation Ja iii.57 Mil 148
    2. past participle of kandati
    Kanna
    adjective
    1. trickling down Ja v.445
    Sanskrit skanna
    Kannāma
    1. = kinnāma Ja vi.126
    Kapaṇa
    adjective noun [ Sanskrit kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Latin crepo; Anglo-Saxon hraefn = English raven. cp. also Sanskrit kṛcchra
    1. -1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq explained by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low-caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Snp 818 Ja i.312 Ja i.321 Ja iii.199 Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52 DN-a i.298 Dhp-a i.233 Thag-a 178
    • small, short, insignificant AN i.213 Bdhd 84. (
    • feminine ˚ā a miserable woman Ja iv.285
    • ˚˚an (
    • adverb ) pitifully piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. Ja iii.295 Ja v.499 vi.143; ; not poor Ja iii.199 -ati˚; very miserable Pgdp 74. Derived ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315
    1. ˚addhikā plural often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa-k˚-vaṇibbaka-yācakā (e.g. DN i.137 Pv-a 78 beggars and wayfarers, tramps Ja i.6 Ja i.262 Dhp-a i.105 188 (written k˚-andhika) ‣See also DN-a i.298 and kapaṇikā-iddhikā
    2. plural (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp. Trenckner, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 130) DN i.137 Iti 65 DN-a i.298
    3. ˚itthī a poor woman Ja iii.448
    4. ˚jīvikā in ˚aṁ kappeti to make a poor livelihood Ja i.312
    5. ˚bhāva the state of being miserable Pv-a 274
    6. ˚manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343
    7. ˚laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children Ja vi.150 cp. kiccha laddhaka
    8. ˚visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4
    9. ˚vuttin leading a poor life Pv-a 175

    Kapaṇikā
    feminine a (mentally) miserable woman Thag 2, 219 Thag-a 178 cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā Ja vi.93
    Kapalla
    1. at Vin i.203 is an error for kajjala, lamp-black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887 167)
    Kapalla
    neuter
    1. ; 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles ‣See kapāla
    • an earthenware pan used to carry ashes Ja i.8 Ja vi.66 Ja vi.75 Dhp-a i.288

  • a frying pan ‣See compounds. & cp. angāra-kapalla Snp 672

    • ˚kapalla is only a variant of kapāla.

      1. ˚pāti an earthen pot, a pan Ja i.347 = Dhp-a i.371
      • ˚pūva a pancake Ja i.345 Dhp-a i.367 Vv-a 123 Mhvs 35, 67
      Sanskrit kapāla; originally skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Latin caput, capula, capillus, Gothic haubi, English head
  • Kapallaka
    1. -1. a small earthen bowl Ja vi.59 Dhp-a i.224
    • a frying pan Ja i.346
    Kapāla
    neuter
    1. -1. a tortoiseor turtle-shell SN i.7 = Mil 371 SN iv.179 as ornament at DN-a i.89
    • the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e.g. AN iv.70 Nd2 304iii Vv-a 335) Ja ii.352 Vv 845 Dhp-a i.148 (variant reading ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile)

  • a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics SN iv.190 SN v.53 SN v.301 AN i.36 AN iii.225 Ja i.89 Pv-a 3

    • a potsherd Ja ii.301
    1. ˚ābhata the food collected in a bowl AN i.36
    • ˚khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd Ja ii.301
    • ˚hattha “with a bowl in his hand,” begging, or a beggar, Thag 1, 1118 Ja i.89 Ja iii.32 v.468 Pv-a 3
    Sanskrit kapāla ‣See kapalla
  • Kapālaka
    1. -1. a small vessel, bowl Ja i.425
    • a beggar’s bowl Ja i.235 Dhp-a ii.26
    Kapāsa
    1. = kappāsa, q.v. Dāvs ii.39
    Kapi
    a monkey (frequently in similes) Snp 791 Thag 1, 1080 Ja i.170 Ja iii.148 cp. kavi.
    1. ˚kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit Pv-a 86
    • ˚citta “having a monkey’s mind, capricious, fickle Ja iii.148 = 525
    • ˚naccanā N
    • plural, Pv iv.137
    • ˚niddā “monkey-sleep,” dozing Mil 300
    Sanskrit kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota
    Kapiñjala
    1. a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kvu 268 Ja vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara)
    Derivation unknown. Sanskrit kapiñjala
    Kapiṭhana
    1. the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv.35
    Kapiṭṭha
    and ˚ttha
    1. -1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood-apple tree Ja vi.534 Vism 183 (˚ka); Mhvs 29, 11
    • ˚ṁ
    • neuter the wood apple Mil 189

  • the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in Ja i.237

    • kapitthaka SN v.96

  • Kapitthana
    1. = kapiṭhana Ja ii.445 Ja vi.529 Ja vi.550 Ja vi.553 variant reading at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka
    Kapila
    adjective
    1. brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard Vv-a 222
    • ˚ā
    • feminine a brown cow Dhp-a iv.153
    Sanskrit kapila, cp. kapi
    Kapisīsa
    1. the lintel of a door DN ii.143 (cp. Rhys Davids Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) —˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120 148 (cp. Vin Texts ii.106 n3)
    Sanskrit kapiśīrṣa
    Kapota
    [ Sanskrit kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi)
    1. -1. masculine a pigeon, a dove Ja i.243 Mil 403
    2. feminine ˚i a female pigeon Pv-a 47
    3. ˚ka (
    4. feminine ˚ikā Mil 365) a small pigeon Ja i.244
      1. ˚pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon’s foot Ja i.9
    Kapola
    1. the cheek Vism 263, 362 Dhp-a i.194
    Sanskrit kapola, cp. kapalla, originally meaning “hollow”
    Kappa
    adjective noun
    1. anything made with a definite object in view prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper ‣See also DN-a i.103 & Kp-a 115 for various meanings-I; Literal Meaning.
    1. -1. adjective fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) (= kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Thag 1, 251 ˚kovido Mhvs 15, 16 Snp 911 as juice Mil 161 (—˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚) Snp 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Snp 16 Mil 105 -a˚ incomparable Mhvs 14, 65
    2. neuter a fitting, i.e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (Vv-a 104); -a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255 Vin iv.227 286: also figuratively a making-up (of a trick) lesa˚ DN-a i.103 Vv-a 348
    3. II. Applied Meaning. 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice manner Vin ii.294 301 (:kappati singiloṇa-kappo “fit is the rule concerning …”); cp. Mhvs 4, 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation Vv-a 265
    4. (temporal) a “fixed” time, time with reference to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DN-a i.103 (cp. kappaṁ); as a cycle of time = saṁsāra at Snp 521 Snp 535 Snp 860 (na eti kappaṁ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109 Mil 108 Sdhp 256 Sdhp 257 Pv-a 21 Iti 17 = Bdhd 87 = SN ii.185 There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asaṅkheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā consists of 4 asankheyya-kappas, viz. saṁvaṭṭa˚ saṁvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ AN ii.142 often abbreviated to saṁvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa˚ DN i.14 Iti 15 freq in formula ekampijātiṁ, etc. Vin iii.4 = DN iii.51 DN iii.111 Iti 99 On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past &

      • future kappas ‣See D; i.12 sq. paṭhama-kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) Ja i.207 When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā-kappa is understood DN-a i.162 A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Snp
      • past participle 18 = 46~125 Snp 517 also dīgha SN ii.181 Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa ‣See S ii.181 & DN-a; i.164 = Pv-a 254-
      • accusative kappaṁ
      • adverb : for a long time DN ii.103 = 115 Ud 62 quot. at DN-a i.103 Vin ii.198 Iti 17 Mil 108 mayi āyukappaṁ Ja i.119 cp. Mil 141 cp. saṅkappa.

        1. ˚ātīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Snp 373
        • ˚āvasesaṁ (
        • accusative ) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaṁ vā k-âvasesaṁ vā DN ii.117 = AN iv.309 = Ud 62 Mil 140: -āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs v.87
        • ˚uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -aggi the fire which destroys the Universe Ja ii.397 Ja iii.185 Ja iv.498 Ja v.336 Ja vi.554 Vism 304 -kāla the time of the end of the world Ja v.244 -uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world Ja i.4 = Vism 415
        • ˚kata on which a kappa, i.e. smudge, has been made, reference to the cīvara of a bhikkhu ‣See above Vin i.255 Vin iv.227 286 DN-a i.103
        • ˚(ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind free from saṁsāra, an Arahant Snp 1101 (but explained at Nd2 s.v ‣See also DN-a i.103, as free from dve kappā diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚)
        • ˚jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dīpavaṁsa i.61
        • ˚ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i.e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202 206 AN iii.402 ~iv.160 Iti 11~85
        • ˚ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle of a vimāna Thag 1, 1190
        • ˚ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198 = 204; (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.254) sālarukkha Ja v.416 ‣See also ṭhitakappiṁ Pug 13
        • ˚ṭṭhitika identical Dhp-a i.50 (vera) Mil 108 (kammaṁ) (“sabbe pi magga-samangino puggalā ṭhita-kappino.” -ṭṭhiya- = preceding. AN v.75 Ja i.172 Ja i.213 Ja v.33 Mil 109 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, reference to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet-tree in the abode of the Asuras Ja i.202
        • ˚nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (ap
        • plural to the flames of purgatory) Ja v.272
        • ˚parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dīpavaṁsa i.59
        • ˚pādapa = ˚rukkha Mhbv.2
        • ˚rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes figuratively Ja vi.117 Ja vi.594 Vism 206 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 176 Pv-a 121 Vv-a 32 (where combined with cintāmaṇi) Dhp-a iv.208
        • ˚latā a creeper like the kapparukkha Vv-a 12
        • ˚vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) Dhp-a iii.362
        • ˚samaṇa an ascetic
        • accusative to precepts, an earnest ascetic Ja vi.60 (cp. samaṇa-kappa)
        • ˚halāhala “the k-uproar,” the uproar near the end of a kalpa Ja i.47
        Sanskrit kalpa ‣See kappeti for etymology & formation
    Kappaka
    1. a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DN-a i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182 DN i.51 (= DN-a i.157 in list of various occupations) Ja i.60 Ja i.137 iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where ex plural by nahāpita in the meaning of “bathed,” cp. ex
    2. plural ad i.106) Dhp-a i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser).

      1. ˚jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, “black” birth Pv-a 176
      from kḷp, kappeti
    Kappaṭa
    1. a dirty, old rag, torn garment (of a bhikkhu) Thag 1, 199
    kad-paṭa = ku-paṭa
    Kappatā
    feminine
    1. fitness, suitability DN-a i.207
    abstract from kappa
    Kappati
    1. to be fit seeming, proper, with dative of person DN ii.162 Vin ii.263 294; iii.36; Thag 1, 488; Mhvs 4, 11; 15, 16
    passive of kappeti, cp. Sanskrit kalpyate
    Kappana
    neuter
    1. the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed 1. kappanā feminine the fixing of a horse’s harness harnessing, saddling Ja i.62
    2. neuter (—˚) procuring making: jīvika˚; a livelihood Ja iii.32 putting into order; danta˚ Ja i.321
      • adjective (—˚) trimmed arranged with: nānāratana˚ Vv-a 35
      from kappeti, cp. Sanskrit kalpana
    Kappara
    1. the elbow Vin iii.121 = iv.221 Ja i.293 Ja i.297 Dhp-a i.48 394 Vv-a 206
    cp. Sanskrit kūrpara
    Kappāsa
    1. the silk-cotton tree Ja iii.286 Ja vi.336
    2. cotton DN ii.141 AN iii.295 SN v.284 Ja i.350 Ja vi.41 comb. with uṇṇa AN iii.37 = iv.265 = 268
      1. ˚aṭṭhi a cotton ‣Seed Dhp-a iii.71
      • ˚paṭala the film of the cotton ‣Seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66
      • ˚picu cotton SN v.284 Ja v.110 Ja v.343 Ja vi.184: -maya made of cotton Pv-a 77
      cp. Sanskrit karpāsa
    Kappāsika
    adjective made of cotton DN ii.188 cp. AN iv.394 DN ii.351 Vin i.58 = 97 = 281 Ja vi.590 Pv ii.117. (nt cotton stuff Mil 267
    1. -paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin i.201
    • ˚sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff DN ii.188 AN iv.394 Mil 105

    Kappāsī
    feminine
    1. cotton Ja vi.537 Pv-a 146
    = kappāsa
    Kappika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚; -kāla the time of thé first Age DN-a i.247 Vb 412 (of manussā) Vv-a 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (identical) at Ja i.222 as noun the men of the first Age Ja ii.352
      2. In compounds…. pubbanta˚ and aparanta the ika˚ belongs to the whole compound DN i.39f. DN-a i.103 ‣See also kappiya 2
      from kappa
    Kappita
    1. prepared, arranged, i.e. harnessed DN i.49 Ja vi.268 i.e. plaited DN-a i.274 i.e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu “with hair & beard trimmed DN ii.325 SN iv.343 Ja v.173 Ja v.350 Ja vi.268 Vv 731 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living Ja v.270 made ready, drawn up (in battle array) DN ii.189 3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247
    2. su˚ well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601
    3. past participle of kappeti
    Kappin
    adjective
    1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Snp 1090
    2. (cp kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pug 13 in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DN-a i.164 = Pv-a 254
    from kappa
    Kappiya
    adjective
    1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (Pv-a 26 = anucchavika paṭirūpa) Ja i.392 DN-a i.9 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 141
    2. not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45 211; ii.118; iii.20; (nt) that which is proper AN i.84 Dhs 1160 -; ibid
    3. ˚kappiyākappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not Ja i.316 DN-a i.78 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i.e. temporal, of time, subject to saṁsāra; of devamanussā Snp 521 na + of the Muni Snp 914 In another sense (“belonging to an Age”) in compound paṭhama ˚-kāla the time of the first Age Ja ii.352
    4. delivered from time, free from saṁsāra, epithet of an Arahant Snp 860 cp. Mil 49 Mil 50 ‣See also kappika.

      1. ˚ānuloma neuter accordance with the rule Nett 192 -kāraka “one who makes it befitting,” i.e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206
      2. ˚kuṭī
      3. feminine a building outside the Vihāra wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139 Vin ii.159
      4. ˚dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DN-a i.78 (Burmese variant ˚kāraka)
      5. ˚bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus Ja i.41 Dhp-a i.412
      6. thing unauthorised Vin ii.169 a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192
      7. ˚bhūmi
      8. feminine a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi) -lesa cp. Sanskrit kalpya
        1. guile appropriate to one’s own purpose Vv-a 348
        • ˚saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) AN i.84
        • opposite ibid

          • ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) ap
          • plural to kukkucca Dhs 1160
          • opposite ibid
          from kappa
    Kappu
    neuter = kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, DN i.54 DN-a i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332 Pv-a 254).
    Kappūra
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. camphor: (a) the plant Ja vi.537
      • (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475 Mil 382 Dāvs v.50
      cp. Sanskrit karpūra
    Kappeti
    to cause to fit, to create, build, construct arrange, prepare, order.
    1. I. literally 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i.e. harness: Ja i.62 plait DN-a i.274 an offering (yaññaṁ) Snp 1043 i.e. to trim etc. MN ii.155 Ja i.223 Mhvs 25, 64 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc (= From passer), viz. iriyāpathaṁ to keep one’s composure Thag i.570 Ja v.262 Bdhd 33; jīvitaṁ : to lead one’s life Pv-a 3 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 13; divāvihāraṁ to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajjaṁ to sit down Vin iii.191
    • vāsaṁ, saṁvāsaṁ to make one’s abode DN ii.88 Snp 283 Pv-a 36 Pv-a 47 saṁvāsaṁ to have (sexual) intercourse with Ja iii.448 Mhvs 5, 212 Pv-a 6
    • seyyaṁ : to lie down, to make one’s bed Pug 55 etc. (acelaka-passage = DN i.166).

      1. II. figuratively 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Snp 799 DN-a i.103–⁠2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine Ja v.238 (= say vidahati)- causative II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e.g. Vin ii.134 (massuṁ k. to get one’s beard done) Ja v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant-cars) DN-a i.147 (pañca hatthinikā-satāni k. harness the 500 elephants).
      2. passive kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed Ja i.62
    Derived from kappa, cp. Sanskrit kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep causative from. from *qṷer = Sanskrit kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti
    Kabara
    adjective
    1. variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) Dhp-a i.71 (˚go-rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha Ja v.106 of a dog (˚vaṇṇa = sabala q.v.) Ja vi.107 of leprosy Ja v.69 of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp sanda˚) MN i.75 Ja iv.152 Dhp-a i.375
    1. ˚kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster Ja i.273
    • ˚kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy Ja v.69
    • ˚maṇi the cat’s eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla but also an emerald; both are probably varieties of the cat’s eye Vv-a 167 304
    cp. Sanskrit kabara
    Kabala
    masculine neuter
    1. a small piece (= ālopa Pv-a 70) a mouthful, always ap plural to food, either solid (i.e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating) or liquid Vin ii.214 Iti 18 = J iii.409; iv.93 Dhp 324 Mil 180 Mil 400 Bdhd 69 Dhp-a ii.65 Pv-a 39 Mhvs 19 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel Ja i.68 Mil 231
    2. ˚sakabala ap
    3. plural to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214 Vin iv.195 -Sometimes written kabala.

      1. ˚āvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214 Vin iv.196
      cp. Sanskrit kavala Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ ālopa), 298, 470
    Kabaliṅkāra
    adjective
    1. always in combination with āhāra, food “made into a ball,” i.e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food ‣See stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā … at MN i.48 SN ii.11 SN ii.98 = DN iii.228 DN iii.276 Bdhd 135 Dhs 585 646 (where fully described), 816 Mil 245 Vism 236, 341 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74 DN-a i.120 Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh manuscripts; s. also Nett 114–⁠118
    1. ˚āhāra-bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food DN i.34 DN i.186 DN i.195
    • ˚bhakkha, same AN iii.192 = v.336 (ap
    • plural to the kāmâvacara devas) DN-a i.120
    kabala in compound form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚
    Kabaḷikā
    feminine
    1. a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.58 n4)
    cp. Sanskrit kavalikā
    Kabba
    neuter
    1. a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ṁ karoti to compose a song Ja vi.410
    • ˚karaṇa making poems DN-a i.95 and -kāra a poet Kh 21 Ja vi.410
    cp. Sanskrit kāvya
    Kabya
    1. = kabba in compounds. ˚ālaṅkāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ṁ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -kāraka a poet, ibid
    Kama
    1. -1. neuter going, proceeding course, step, way, manner, e.g. sabbatth'âvihatakkama “having a course on all sides unobstructed Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚ where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚ pahānak˚, desanāk˚)
    2. oblique cases (late and technical) “by way of going,” i.e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, 483, 497 Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs i.30 Snp-a 455 Bdhd 88; yathākkamaṁ Bdhd 96
      • adjective (—˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (= catuppāda Pv i.113
      from kram, cp. Vedic krama (—˚) step, in uru˚, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit krama reprieve, Divy 505
    Kamaṇa
    1. a step, stepping, gait Ja v.155 in explanation Ja v.156 taken to be ppr. medium

      • See san˚;
    Kamaṇḍalu
    masculine neuter
    1. the waterpot with long spout used by non-Buddhist ascetics SN i.167 Ja ii.73 (= kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570 Snp p. 80 Dhp-a iii.448-adjective kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚; ? “with the waterpot”. AN v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.)
    etymology uncertain
    Kamati
    1. to walk (I) literally 1. c. locative to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Snp 176 ariye pathe SN i.33 ākāse DN i.212 = M i.69 = AN iii.17
    2. c.
    3. accusative to go or get to, to enter MN ii.18 Ja vi.107 Pv i.12 (saggaṁ)-(II) figuratively 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect MN i.186 Ja v.198 Mil 198
    4. to plunge into, to enter into AN ii.144 3. impersonal to come to (c. dat) SN iv.283

      kram, Dhtp. explained by padavikkhepe; ppr. medium kamamāna SN i.33 Snp 176 Intens. cankamati.
    Kamatthaṁ
    adverb
    1. for what purpose, why? Ja iii.398 (= kimatthaṁ)
    kaṁ atthaṁ
    Kamanīya
    adjective
    1. (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely Ja v.155 Ja v.156 Mil 11 (b) pleasant, sweet (-sounding) DN ii.171 Ja i.96
    • As
    • neuter a desirable object SN i.22
    grd of kāmayati
    Kamala
    neuter a lotus, frequently combined with kuvalaya; or with uppala Ja i.146 DN-a i.40 explained as vārikiñjakkha Pv-a 77 Pv-a 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium Ja i.146 DN-a i.40 Mhbv.3; Sdhp 325 Vv-a 43 181, 191 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 77; -At Ja i.119 Ja i.149 a better reading is obtained by correcting kambala to kamala, at Ja i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained.
    • a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vinaya Texts ii.23 note)

    • feminine kamalā a graceful woman Ja v.160

      1. ˚komalakarā feminine (of a woman) having lotus-like (soft hands Mhbv.29
      2. ˚dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv.3 Bdhd 19 Dhs-a 127 Vv-a 35 38

        • ˚pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190
  • Kamalin
    adjective
    1. rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī-kāmuka “the lover of lotuses,” epithet of the Sun Mhbv.3 (variant reading ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred)
    from kamala
    Kampa
    (—˚)
    1. trembling, shaking; tremor DN-a i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; ; adjective not trembling unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mhvs 15, 175
    2. from kamp
    Kampaka
    adjective
    1. shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Mil 343 (paṭhavi˚)
    from kampa
    Kampati
    1. -to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6 Ja i.23 Snp 268 (ex plural Kp-a 153: calati, vedhati) Bdhd 84; -cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚

      • kampamāna
      • adjective trembling Ja iii.161 agitated, troubled (˚citta Ja ii.337
      • not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast Ja vi.293
      kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kampanto, kampaṁ, kampamāna; aorist akampi; caus kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dīpavaṁsa xvii.51;
    2. absolutive kampayitvāna DN ii.108 Ja v.178
    Kampana
    1. adjective causing to shake Dhp-a i.84 trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake Ja i.26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) Ja iii.163

      1. ˚rasa adjective “whose essence is to tremble,” said of doubt (vicikicchā) Dhs-a 259
      2. from kamp
    Kampin
    adjective
    1. ‣See vi˚
    from kampa
    Kampiya
    adjective
    1. in ; not to be shaken, immovable, strong Thag 2, 195 Mil 386 neuter firmness said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DN-a i.64
    2. gerundive of kampati
    Kampurī
    1. (va.) at Thag 2, 262 is to be corrected into kambu-r-iva ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 76
    Kambala
    masculine neuter
    1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From Ja iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 203); enumerated as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras together with koseyya & kappāsika; at Vin i.58 = 96, also at AN iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); frequently preceded by ratta (e.g. DN-a i.40 cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Snp 689 Bdhd 1
    2. Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281 Vin ii.174 ‣See further Ja i.43 Ja i.178 Ja i.322 Ja iv.138 Mil 17 Mil 88 Mil 105 Dhp-a i.226 Dhp-a ii.89f. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair (blankets, i.e.) garments viz. kesa˚; and vāla˚; mentioned Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240 AN i.295
    3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (explained by uṇṇā) (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.23) Ja vi.340
    4. a tribe of Nāgas Ja vi.165

      1. ˚kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74
      2. ˚kūṭāgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth used as funeral pile Dhp-a i.69
      • ˚pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190
      • ˚puñja a heap of blankets Ja i.149
      • ˚maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.154)
      • ˚ratana a precious rug of wool Ja iv.138 Mil 17 (16 ft. long 18 ft. wide)
      • ˚vaṇṇa
      • adjective of the colour of woollen fabric, i.e. red Ja v.359 (˚maṁsa)
      • ˚silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone-seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka Dhp-a i.17
      • ˚sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff DN ii.188 = AN iv.394 Mil 105
      • ˚sutta a woollen thread Ja vi.340
      cp. Sanskrit kambala
    Kambalin
    adjective
    1. having a woollen garment DN i.55 DN ii.150
    from kambala
    Kambalīya
    neuter
    1. (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. Pv-a 77)
    from kambala
    Kambu
    1. a conch, a shell: saṇha-kambu-r-iva … sobhate su gīvā Thag 2, 262 (for kampurī'va); SN compounds
    2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold ‣See Kern. Toevoegselen s. v.) Ja iv.18 Ja iv.466 (+ kāyūra) Pv ii.127, iii.93 (= Pv-a 157 sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (= Vv-a 167 hatth'âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.)
    3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at Vv-a 167 so also ex

      • plural at Ja iv.18 Ja iv.130 Ja v.400

        1. ˚gīva adjective having a neck shaped like a shell, i.e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky Ja iv.130 (= suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1 -tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, figuratively the lines of the neck Ja v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā explained on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala-sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness Ja v.204 Ja v.207
        2. ˚pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet Vv-a 167
      cp. Sanskrit kambu, Halāyudha = śankha; Dhtp. saṁvaraṇe
    Kambussa
    1. gold or golden ornament (bracelet) Ja v.260 Ja v.261 (: kambussaṁ vuccati suvaṇṇaṁ)
    from preceding
    Kambojaka
    adjective coming from Kamboja Ja iv.464 (assatara).
    Kambojā
    feminine N of a country Ja v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, 334, 336.
    Kamboji
    masculine neuter

    the plant Cassia tora or alata Ja iii.223 (˚gumba = elagalāgumba; variant readings kammoja˚ & tampo˚ for kambo˚

    1. )
    meaning & etymology unexplained
    Kamma
    neuter
    1. the doing, deed, work originally meaning ‣See karoti either building (cp. Lit kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ “the intertwining of garlands and creepers”; also in kamma-kara possibly orig employed in weaving, i.e. serving); cp. Latin texo, to weave = Sanskrit takṣan builder, artisan, & German wirken originally weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the-a declension, the cons forms for instrumental & ablative kammā and kammanā genitive dat kammuno, are rare. The nominative plural is both kammā and kammāni.

      1. I. Crude meaning. 1. (literally) Acting in a special sense i.e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6 viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā
      • Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles ‣See palibodha. In this sense it is at Vism 94 explained by navakamma ‣See below 2a
      • kassa˚ ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚; profession of a potter Ja vi.372
      • tunna˚ weaving Vism 122 Pv-a 161
      • purohita˚ office of a high-priest (= abstr
      • noun porohiccaṁ) Snp-a 466
      • vāṇija˚ trade Sāsv.40
      • kammanā by profession Snp 650 Snp 651
      • kammāni (
      • plural ) occupations Snp 263 = Kh v.6 (anavajjāni k. = anākulā kammantā Snp 262). paresaṁ k˚ṁ katvā doing other people’s work = being a servant Vv-a 299 sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations DN i.135 cp. attano k˚-kubbānaṁ Dhp 217 kamma-karaṇa-sālā work-room (here: weaving shed) Pv-a 120
      1. 2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always—˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action like cīvara˚; mending the cloak Vv-a 250
      • uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vb 422
      • nava˚ making new renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119 159 (˚karoti to make repairs) Ja i.92: Vism 94, adjective navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15 SN i.179
      • patthita˚ the desired action (i.e. sexual intercourse) Dhp-a ii.49
      • kammaṁ karoti to be active or in working, to act nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet MN i.414
      • kata˚ the job done by the thieves Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi), as adjective kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180 also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e; necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaṁ n'atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done (—˚), anything done (in its result) work, often as collect. abstract (to be translated. by English ending-ing): apaccakkha˚; not being aware, deception Vb 85
      • daḷhī˚ strengthening, increase Vb 357 Vism 122 citta˚; variegated work, mālā˚; garlands, latā˚; creeper (-work) Vism 108; nāma˚; naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, “questionnaire” Vism 6

        • So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚ = niṭṭhuriya Vb 357 nimitta˚ nimitta, obhāsa˚ = obhāsa (apparition → appearing) Vb 353
        • (c)
        • intranstitive making, getting, act, process (—˚) Often translation as abstract
        • noun with ending-ion or-ment, e. g okāsa˚; opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Snp p. 94; pātu˚; making clear, manifestation Dhp-a iv.198
        • anāvi˚, anuttāni˚ concealment Vb 358
        • kata˚
        • adjective one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience Snp-a 355
        • añjali˚, sāmīci˚ veneration honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) DN iii.83 (≈ Vin ii.162 255) AN i.123 AN ii.180 J. i.218, 219
        1. 3. (Specialised) an “act” in an ecclesiastical sense proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49 53, 144, 318; ii.70 93; v.220 sq.; Khus Journal of the Pali Text Society 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56 after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89 if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vinaya Texts i.169 n2) There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform ‣See Vin i.317f.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions ‣See Vin i.312–⁠333 (cp Vin Text ii.256
        1. -285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚ paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚ sammukhākaraṇīya˚
        • In this sense: kammaṁ karoti (w. genitive) to take proceedings against Vin i.49 143, 317 ii.83, 260; kammaṁ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5 kammaṁ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145
        1. 4. In compounds.:--ādhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98
        2. ˚ādhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Mil 288
        • ˚ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21
        • ˚āraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an “act” Vin iv.153 v.221
        • ˚ārāma (a) delighting in activity DN ii.77 AN iv.22 Iti 71 79
        • ˚ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly activity DN ii.78 = AN iv.22 cp. Vb 381 AN iii.116 AN iii.173 293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163 Iti 71
        • āvadāna a tale of heroic deeds Ja vi.295
        • ˚kara or ˚kāra used indiscriminately. 1.
        • adjective doing work, or active in puriso dāso + pubbuṭṭhāyī “willing to work DN i.60 et sim. (= DN-a i.168: analaso). AN i.145 AN ii.67 Vv 754 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver? usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243 DN i.141 = Pug 56 (also ˚kārā) AN ii.208 iii.77, 172 Thag 2, 340 Ja i.57 Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā AN iii.37 = iv.265, 393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240 272; ii.154 DN iii.191 SN i.92 -a handyman Ja i.239 Mil 378 (f) a female servant Vin ii.267
        • ˚kāra Vin iv.224 kārī Dhs A98 = Vv-a 73 (ap
        • plural to a wife)
        • ˚karaṇa 1. working, labour, service Ja iii.219 Pv-a 120 DN-a i.168 2. the effects of karma Ja i.146
        • ˚karanā and kāraṇā ‣See below
        • ˚kāma liking work industrious; a˚ lazy AN iv.93 = J ii.348
        • ˚kāraka a workman, a servant DN-a i.8 Mhvs 30, 42 Nd2 427 a sailor Ja iv.139
        • ˚garu bent on work Mil 288
        • ˚ccheda the interruption of work Ja i.149 246; iii.270
        • ˚jāta sort of action Ja v.24 (= kammam eva)
        • ˚dhura (m.
        • neuter draught-work Ja i.196
        • ˚dheyya work to be performed duty AN iv.285 = 325; cp. Ja vi.297
        • ˚dhoreyya “fit to bear the burden of action” Mil 288 (cp. Mil. translation ii.140)
        • ˚niketavā having action as one’s house or temple ibid
        • ˚nipphādana accomplishing the business Ja vi.162
        • ˚ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles act Vin i.318 Vin v.221
        • ˚bahula abounding in action (ap
        • plural to the world of men) Mil 7
        • ˚mūla the price of the transaction Mil 334
        • ˚rata delighting in business DN ii.78 Iti 71
        • ˚vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116
        • ˚vācā the text or word of an official Active These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317f.; iii.174, 176 iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k is eleven ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ṁ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207 Dhs-a 399 —˚ṁ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317
        • ˚vossagga difference of occupation Ja vi.216
        • ˚sajja (a) “ready for action,” i.e. for battle Ja v.232
        • ˚sādutā “agreeableness to work” Dhs-a 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā) -sāmin “a master in action,” an active man Mil 288
        • ˚sippī an artisan Vv-a 278
        • ˚sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Mil 288
        • indolent lazy Ja vi.245 a˚-ttaṁ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21 -hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Mil 288

          1. II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with reference to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i.e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i.e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i.e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the active In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with reference both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the following different sides of a “deed,” viz
          1. 1. the deed as expressing the doer’s will, i.e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer’s habit = his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer’s merit and demerit (his “karma”). Thus pāpakamma = a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed = bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer
          1. Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time as past = done, meaning deed (with kata); or future = to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual “karma,” appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i.e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal “karma,” appearing in Saṁsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause-consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.

            1. 1. (Objective): with reference to the Past: kiṁ kammaṁ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92 tassā katakammaṁ pucchi he asked what had been done by her Pv-a 37 Pv-a 83, etc
            • with reference to the
            • future : k kātabbaṁ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni DN iii.255 = AN iv.332 cattāri kammāni kattā hoti “he performs the 4 obligations” (of gahapati) AN ii.67
            1. 2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action deed; various kinds of doings enumerated under micchājīva DN i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed DN iii.156 dukkaraṁ kamma-kubbataṁ he who of those who act, acts badly SN i.19 abhabbo taṁ kammaṁ kātum incapable of doing that deed SN iii.225 sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally MN iii.207 AN v.292f. pamāṇakataṁ k. DN i.251 = SN iv.322 kataraṁ k˚ṁ karonto ahaṁ nirayaṁ na gaccheyyaṁ? how (i.e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? Ja iv.340 yaṁ kiñci sithilaṁ k˚ṁ … na taṁ hoti mahapphalaṁ.. SN i.49 = Dh 312 = Th 1, 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action Pv-a 25 k. classed with sippa, vijjā-caraṇa DN iii.156 kāni k˚āni sammā-niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Snp 324 (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person’s habit of acting or character (cp. kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. especially in phrase kammena samannāgata “endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character”: tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto “endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to name” AN i.292f.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā “bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)” Nd2 112; anavajja kāya-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.69 (cp. AN iv.364); kāya-kammavacī-kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) “a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech” DN i.63 kāya … (etc.)-k˚sam˚ bāla (and opposite paṇḍita) AN ii.252 (cp. AN i.102 AN i.104); visamena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam AN i.154 = iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.135-kammaṁ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaṁ jīvitam uttamaṁ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā SN i.34 = 55 MN iii.262 quoted at Vism 3, where k is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Snp 136 Snp 164; 599; nihīna manussā (of bad, wretched character) Snp 661 manāpena bahulaṁ kāya (etc.)-kammena AN ii.87 = iii.33, 131 and especially with mettā, as enumerated under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā DN ii.80 AN iii.288 mettena kāya (etc.)-kammena DN ii.144 DN iii.191 AN v.350f. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚-dvārā), expressions of personality as by deed, word and thought (kāyena vācāya, manasā). Kamma means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Snp 330 Snp 365 later specified by kāya-kamma, for which kāya-kammanta in some sense (q.v.), and complementing vacī-k˚ mano-k˚; so in following combinations: citte arakkhite kāya-k˚ pi arakkhitaṁ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚ AN i.261f.; yaṁ nu kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaṁ me kāya-k˚ attabyādhāya pi saṁvatteyya … “whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands likely to bring me evil?” MN i.415 kāya-(vacī-etc. kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaṁ and a˚) AN i.110 = iii.150; as anulomika˚ AN i.106 sabbaṁ kāya-k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati “all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha” Nd2 235; yaṁ lobhapakataṁ kammaṁ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaṁ anubhoti … Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m dukkaṭaṁ kataṁ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and frequently; ekūna-tiṁsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa-kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adjective, cp. pāpa-kammanta adjective). pāpakamma : n'atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato “there is no hiding (-place) in this world for him who does evil” AN i.149 so p˚-o dummedho jānaṁ dukkaṭaṁ attano … “he afflicted with (the result of) evil-doing …” AN iii.354 p˚-ṁ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaṁ p˚-ṁ kataṁ sabban taṁ idha vedanīyaṁ “whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for”. AN v.301 pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚-ṁ vivajjayī “avoid evil acting” Snp 407 nissaṁsayaṁ p˚-ṁ … “undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i.e. some evil karma Pv iv.161
            • pāpaṁ kammaṁ : appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataṁ taṁ enaṁ nirayaṁ upaneti “even a small sin brings man to name AN i.249 tayā v'etaṁ p˚ k˚ kataṁ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasi “you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences” MN iii.180 AN i.139 na hi p˚ kataṁ k˚ sajju khīraṁ va muccati Dhp 71 = Nett 161; yassa p˚ kataṁ k˚ kusalena pithīyati so imaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti “he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104 Dhp 173 = Th 1, 872; p˚-ssa k˚-ssa samatikkamo “the overcoming of evil karma” SN iv.320 p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya “in the performance of evil” MN i.372 p˚āni k˚āni karaṁ bālo na bujjhati “he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds” Dhp 136 = Th 1, 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaṁ upapajjare “sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to name” Dhp 307 te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Snp 140
            • ˚pāpakāni kammāni : p˚ānaṁ k˚ānaṁ hetu coraṁ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti “for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished” AN i.48 ye loke p˚āni k karonti te vividhā kamma-kāraṇā karīyanti “those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments” MN iii.186 = AN i.142 k˚ṁ karoti p˚ṁ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Snp 232 (= kh 190) similarly Snp 127 karontā p˚ṁ k˚ṁ yaṁ hoti kaṭukapphalaṁ “doing evil which is of bitter fruit” Dhp 66 SN i.57 = Nett 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Snp 215
            • In the same sense: na taṁ k˚ṁ kataṁ sādhu yaṁ katvā anutappati “not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse” SN i.57 = Dh 67 = Nett 132; āveni-kammāni karonti (with reference to sangha-bheda). AN v.74 adhammikakammāni AN i.74 asuci-k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) AN iii.269 sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opposite avajja → sagga AN ii.237 kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumerated at Vb 378 (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious kusala bhaddaka, etc.) taṁ k˚ṁ katvā kusalaṁ sukhudrayaṁ DN iii.157 puñña-kammo of meritorious (character SN i.143 kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Ps i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vb 173f. 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala-k˚-paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power Vv-a 32 (cp. puññânubhāva-nissandena “in consequence of their being affected with merit Pv-a 58)-cp. also compounds.: kamma-kilesa, k˚-ṭṭhāna k˚-patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚-samādāna
            1. 3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚-or independt; phala : tassa mayhaṁ atīte katassa kammassa phalaṁ “the fruit of a deed done by me in former times Thag-a 270 Vv 479 (= Vv-a 202); desanā … k-phalaṁ paccakkhakāriṇī “an instruction demonstrativeting the fruit of action” Pv-a 1 similarly Pv-a 2 cp. also ibid 26, 49, 52, 82 (variant reading for kammabala). vipāka : yassa k˚ssa vipākena … niraye pacceyyāsi … “through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i.e. tortured in name” MN ii.104 tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaṁ lokaṁ uppajji “by the result of that deed he went to Heaven SN i.92 SN ii.255 k-vipāka-kovida “well aware of the fruit of action,” i.e. of retribution Snp 653 kissa kvipākena “through the result of what (action)” Pv i.65 inunā asubhena k-vipākena Nett 160; k-vipāka with reference to avyākata-dhammā: Vb 182 with reference to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with reference to dukkha ibid. 106 k-vipāka-ja produced by the maturing of (some evil action, as one kind of ābādha, illness:. AN v.110 = Nd2 3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps ii.174; -vipāka adjective. asakkaccakatānaṁ kammānaṁ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds AN iv.393 derivation vepakka
            2. adjective in dukkha-vepakka resulting in pain Snp 537

              • ˚phala + vipāka : frequently in formation sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko DN i.55 = iii.264 = M i.401 = SN iv.348 = AN i.268 = iv.226 v.265, 286 sq.; cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1883, 8; nissanda-phalabhūto vipāko Thag-a 270 tiṇṇaṁ k˚ānaṁ phalaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ k-ānaṁ vipāko DN ii.186-(b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaṁ puriso kammaṁ karoti tathā tathā taṁ paṭisaṁvedissati “in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)” AN i.249 na vijjati so jagati-ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa-kammā “there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil-doing” Dhp 127 = Mil 150 = Pv-a 104 cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the
              • future state, as good or bad, as much or little AN iv.382 the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k-dāyādā k-yonī k-bandhū … yaṁ k˚ṁ karonti kalyānaṁ vā pāpakaṁ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti MN iii.203 = AN iii.72f. = 186 = v.88~288 sq. (‣ See also compounds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), “being done back with the deed, or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma-karaṇaṁ kāreti or kārāpeti “he causes the reaction of the deed to take place” and
              • passive kamma-karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i.e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya ‣See under kāraṇaṁ, the usual punishments (beating with whips etc.) are enumerated passim, e.g. MN iii.164 MN iii.181 and Nd2 604. As regards form and meaning Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā
              • feminine “pain, punishment” from k̆ṛ̆ to tear or injure, “the pains of karma, or torture”; Professor Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as
              • neuter causative -abstract from karoti presents no difficulty.
              1. -ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚-āni karonti te diṭṭh’ eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k-kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! “Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!” MN iii.181 MN iii.186 = AN i.142 sim k˚-kāraṇāni kārenti (variant reading better than text-reading SN iv.344 Sdhp 7; Nd2 on dukkha. As k-karaṇaṁ saṁvidahiṁsu Ja ii.398 kamma-kāraṇa-ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500 ‣See also examples under 2d and MN i.87 AN i.47 Ja v.429 Mil 197
              1. B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence
              • (a) karma as cause of existence (‣ See also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataṁ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu AN i.223 (kāmadhātu-vepakkañ ce kammaṁ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h'etaṁ … iti kho kammaṁ khettaṁ …); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence AN iii.410 kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā “by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on” Snp 654 kamma-paccayā through karma Pv-a 25 (= Kh 207); k˚ṁ kilesā hetu saṁsārassa “k. and passions are the cause of saṁsāra (renewed existence)” Nett 113 ‣See on k. as principle Ps ii.78; 79 (ch. vii., kamma-kathā) MN i.372f.; Nett 161; 180
              1. -182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold MN iii.215 and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumerated as one of the 4 paccaya’s or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq. Vb 366 Mil 40f. as a factor in the five-fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚-niyama DN-a. on DN 11, 12 Dhs-a. 272; cp. compounds.: kammaja (resulting from karma Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚-vātā, birth-pains i.e. the winds resulting from karma (caliṁsu) Dhp-a i.165 Dhp-a ii.262 k˚-nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚-sambhava Bdhd 66 k˚-samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72 ‣See further compounds. below
              • (b) karma as result or consequence There are 3 kamma-nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaṁ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described AN i.134 = 263 = iii.338 = Nd2 517 so also. AN v.86 262 Vb 208 With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha-kkhayā kamma-nidāna-saṁkhayo. AN v.262 There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda AN i.264 and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma-bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vb 137 = Nd2 471
              • (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like “as the cause, so the result.” Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dhp 127 as quoted above 3 AN (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taṁ pāpakaṁ kammaṁ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt atthi)-na hi nassati kassaci kammaṁ “nobody’s (trace, result of) action is ever lost” Snp 666 puññâpuñña-kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti “through the consequence of both merit and demerit” Pv-a 47 cp. Vv-a 14 yatth’ assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taṁ k˚ṁ vipaccati “wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action AN i.134 -correspondence between “light” and “dark” deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha-kamma → kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka akaṇha-asukka: DN iii.230 = M i.389 = AN ii.230f.; so sakena kammena nirayaṁ upapajjati Nd2 304iii-ānubhāva -ukkhitta “thrown, set into motion, by the power of k.” Pv-a 78 sucarita-k-ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni “created by the power of their result of good conduct” Vv-a 127; k-ânubhāvena by the working of k. Pv-a 77-vega -ukkhittā (same) Pv-a 284 yathā kamm-ūpaga “undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma ‣See compounds., and cp. yathā kammaṁ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma Ja i.153 & frequently ‣See compounds.; k-sarikkhatā “the karma-likeness, the correspondence of cause and consequence: taṁ k-s˚ṁ vibhāventaṁ suvaṇṇamayaṁ ahosi “this, manifesting the karma-correspondence, was golden Vv-a 6 so also k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma-phalaṁ, the result of action: tassa kamma-sarikkhakaṁ kammaphalaṁ hoti “for her the fruit of action became like action,” i.e. the consequence was according to her deed. Pv-a 206 Pv-a 284; 258; as nt.: k-s˚ṁ pan'assa udapādi “the retribution for him has come” Dhp-a i.128 Ja iii.203 cp. also Mil 40f.; 65 sq.; 108
              • (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya constitutes Arahantship. nava → purāṇa-kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe DN i.54 = SN iii.212 as pañca-kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo.. purāṇaṁ k˚ṁ abhisankhataṁ (“our body is an accumulation of former karma”) SN ii.65 = Nd2 680 D ‣See also A ii.197; Pv iv.71 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā … santo yathā kammaṁ gacchati) Pv-a 63
              • k˚-nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so … na tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ vyanti hoti “He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted” AN i.141≈; nava-purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚-nirodhaṁ k˚-nirodha-gāminiñ ca paṭipadaṁ “the new and the old karma I shall demonstrativete to you the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k.” SN iv.132~ AN iii.410 … navānaṁ k˚ānaṁ akaraṇā setughātaṁ; iti k-kkhayā dukkhakkhayo … (end of misery through the end of karma AN i.220 = MN ii.214 same Ps i.55
              1. -57; cp. also AN i.263 Nd2 411 (ex plural as kamma-parāyaṇa vipāka-p˚: “gone beyond karma and its results,” i.e. having attained Nibbāna) ‣See also the following compounds.: k˚-âbhisankhīsa ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana.

                1. ˚ādhikata ruled by karma, Mil 67 Mil 68 ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid
                2. ˚ādhiggahita gripped by karma Mil 188 Mil 189
                • ˚ānurūpa
                • adjective (of vipāka) according to one’s karma Ja iii.160 DN-a i.37
                • ˚ābhisaṅkhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd2 116 283, 506
                • ˚ābhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Mil 276 cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886 146
                • ˚āraha ‣See I
                • ˚āyatana 1. work Vb 324 cp. Mil 78 2. action = kamma Ja iii.542 cp. Ja iv.451 Ja iv.452
                • ˚āyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530 Dhs-a 267 268; cp. k˚ṁ āyūhi Mil 214 and Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 58 -āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. AN iii.436 Pug 13 = Vb 341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚..), Kvu 341 Mil 154 Mil 155 Vism 177 (= ānantariya-kamma) -ūpaga in yatha kamm-ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in formation cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate … pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5 = DN i.82 = SN ii.122 (214) v.266 = AN iv.178 = v.13 (35, 200, 340) = Vb 344 abbreviated in MN iii.178 Netechnical term 178 ‣See also similar Snp 587 Bdhd 111
                • ˚upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156 -kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps ii.98
                • ˚kāma (adjective desirous of good karma Thag 2, 275 Pv-a 174 a˚ opposite inactive, indolent AN iv.92 Pv-a 174
                • ˚ kiriyā -dassana
                • adjective understanding the workings of k. Ja i.45
                • ˚kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dhp 15 (= Dhp-a i.129 ex
                • plural kiliṭṭha-k˚) -kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumerated at DN iii.181 = J iii.321, as the non-performance of sīla 1
                • ‣See sīla, equal to pāpa-kāya-k˚
                • ˚kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k. its destruction: sabba-k˚-kkhayaṁ patto vimutto upadhi-sankhaye SN i.134 as brought about by neutral indifferent kamma: DN iii.230 = AN ii.230f. MN i.93 Dhs-a 89
                • ˚ja (3 B) produced by k. Ja i.52 as one mode of the origin of disease Mil 135 Nd2 3041; applied. to all existence Mil 271 Vism 624 (kammajaṁ āyatanadvāra-vasena pākaṭaṁ hoti); applied to rūpa Vism 451 614; ap
                • plural to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) Ja i.52 Dhp-a i.165 a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Mil 268 Mil 271
                • ˚ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession said of different occupations as farmer, trader householder and mendicant MN ii.197 AN v.83 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma ‣See ṭhāna ii.2. c., kamma-subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, especially objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises (“stations of exercise” Expositor 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship Dhp-a i.8 (yāva arahattaṁ kamma-ṭṭhānaṁ kathesi), 96 Pv-a 98 (catu-saccakamma-ṭṭhāna-bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Frequently in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass'eva arahattaṁ pāpuṇi: Ja iii.36 Sāsv.49 ‣See also Ja i.7 Ja i.97 182, 303, 414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at Dhs-a 168 (cp. Compendium 202), as 32 (dvattiṁs’ ākāra-k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca-sandhika at Vism 277 some of them are mentioned at Ja i.116 Dhp-a i.221 336 iv.90; —˚ṁ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv.151 Pv-a 61 —˚ṁ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); Kp-a 40 Dhp-a i.9 262; iv.106 Pv-a 42 —˚ṁ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ Dhp-a i.8 248 336 Pv-a 61 —˚ṁ adāsi Dhp-a iv.106 ˚gaṇhāti Ja iii.246 Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise Dhs-a 246 ˚dāyaka the giver of a k-ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q.v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89 Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241
                • ˚ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, 187, 189 Dhp-a i.335
                • ˚tappana the being depressed on acct. of one’s (bad) karma Dhp-a i.150
                • ˚dāyāda (3 AN (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i.e. inheriting the consequences of one’s own deeds MN i.390 Mil 65 = Dhs-a 66
                • ˚dvāra “the door of action,” i.e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) Ja iv.14 KvuA 135 Dhs-a 82 Bdhd 8
                • ˚dhāraya name of a class of noun-compounds Kacc 166
                • ˚nānatta manifoldness of k. Dhs-a 64 (also-nānākaraṇa ib.)
                • ˚nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass'āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Snp 654
                • ˚nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Mil 268 Dhs-a 361
                • ˚nimitta the sign token of k. Dhs-a 411
                • ˚nirodha the destruction of k ‣See 3 B (d)
                1. ˚paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k Ja vi.105 Vism 538; adjective Ja v.271 Dhs-a 304
                2. ˚paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector Ja vi.102 Mil 65 cp. Dhs-a 66
                3. ˚paṭibāḷha strong by k. Mil 301
                4. ˚pathā (2 b)
                5. plural the ways of acting (= sīla q.v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚ altogether 10; so at Vin v.138 SN ii.168. AN v.57 AN v.268 as kus˚ and akus˚ at DN iii.71 DN iii.269 DN iii.290 as 7 only at SN ii.167 as akus˚ only at. AN v.54 AN v.266 Vb 391 Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56 Sdhp 57
                6. ˚phala 3 AN (a)
                  1. the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions Ja i.350 Vv-a 39 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 52; ˚-upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one’s labour (ad I) Ja iv.160
                  • living according to the result of former deeds AN ii.135
                  • ˚bandhu having k. as one’s relative, i.e. closely tied to one’s karma ‣See ˚ssaka Thag 1, 496 cp. Ja vi.100 etc -bala the power of k. Ja vi.108 Pv-a 82
                  • ˚bhava 3 B (b)
                  1. karmic existence, existence through karma Vb 137 Dhs-a 37
                  • ˚bhūmi 1. the place of work Ja iii.411 2. the ground of actions, i.e. the field of meritorious deeds Mil 229
                  • ˚mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Mil 333 Mil 334 Mil 341
                  • ˚mūlaka produced by k. Mil 134
                  • ˚yoni having k. for matrix, i.e. as the cause of rebirth Mil 65 Dhs-a 66
                  • ˚lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic AN i.102 AA 370
                  • ˚vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232

                    1. -238) AN ii.230f.
                    2. ˚vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. Dhs-a 85
                    • ˚vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. SN ii.33f. AN i.287 (+ kiriyavāda, viriyavāda)
                    • ˚vādin believing in k. DN i.115 Vin i.71 Ja vi.60
                    • ˚vipāka 3 AN (a)
                      1. the ripening of k., the result of one’s actions ‣See above Vb 106 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni of Buddhism at Mil 189
                      • ˚ja produced as a result of k.: DN ii.20 Mhbv.78; Ps ii.174, 213 Mil 135 Vism 382 (applied to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k ‣See AN v.110 Mil 134 Mil 135 AN-a 433 AN-a 556
                      • ˚visuddhi meritorious karma Dhp 16 (= Dh i.132)
                      • ˚visesa variety or difference of k Dhs-a 313
                      • ˚vega the impetus of k. Pv-a 284
                      • ˚sacca
                      • adjective having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world AN ii.232
                      • ˚samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one’s character, or the incurring of karma either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm-ûpaga passage (q.v.): DN iii.96 MN i.70 MN iii.178 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enumerated at Nett 98; of Buddha’s knowledge as regards the quality of a man’s character: SN v.304 AN iii.417f.; Ps ii.174 Vb 338
                      • ˚samārambha 3 B (a)
                      1. having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists AN ii.232
                      • ˚samuṭṭhāna 3 B (a)
                        1. rising from k. Mil 127 Dhs-a 82 Kvn 100
                        2. ˚sambhava produced by k. Mil 127
                        • ˚sarikkhaka ‣See above 3 B (c)
                          1. similar or like in consequence to the deed done Dhp-a iii.334 (˚vipāka)
                          2. ˚sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result
                          3. ˚sahāya “companion to the deed,” said of thought Dhs-a 323
                          • ˚socana sorrowing for one’s (bad) deeds Dhp-a i.128
                          • ˚(s)saka 3 AN (b), q.v.
                            1. (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. MN iii.203 etc. (in phrase k., kamma-dāyāda, kamma-bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism 301) Ja iv.128 Mil 65 DN-a i.37 = who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaṁ gatiṁ gacchanti, n'eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena …); derivation ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma AN iii.186 Dhs 1366 Vb 324 ˚ta as adjective; qualifying ñāṇa, i.e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366 Vb 328
                            Vedic karman, work especially sacrificial process. For ending ˚man = Indogermanic *men cp. Sanskrit dhāman = Gr , Sanskrit nāman = Latin nominativen
    Kammaka
    adjective
    1. connected with, dependt on karma Mil 137 (a˚). Kammaniya, iya & kammanna;
    from kamma
    Kammanīya, ˚iya
    kammañña;
    adjective “workable,” fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta “with active mind” in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta DN i.76 etc. = M i.22 Pug 68 SN iii.232 SN v.92 SN v.233 AN i.9 Dhp-a i.289 Bdhd 101, explained at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) AN i.257 (reads ˚iyañ) = Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd2 661 cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute = workable, ready for playing AN iii.375 = Vin i.182 Of the body AN iv.335
    • not ready, sluggish AN iv.333 Vism 146
    • kammañña-bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46 of vedanā etc., Dhs 326 of citta Dhs-a 130 ‣See next; unworkable condition Dhs-a 130
    Kammaññatā
    feminine
    1. workableness, adaptability, readiness, ap plural to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) AN i.9 said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaṁ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46 47 = 326 = 641 = 730; cp. Dhs 585 similar Bdhd 16, 20 71 Dhs-a 136 151 (= kammasādutā) ; unworkableness inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Mil 300 Nett 86 108, cp. Dhs 1156 1236 Dhs-a 255 explained as cittagelaññaṁ Dhs-a 377 as cetaso līnattaṁ Vb 373
    2. abstract from preceding
    Kammanta
    1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Snp 127 Vb 357 as being punished in Niraya AN i.60 SN iv.180 as occupation especially in
    2. plural kammantā: SN v.45 = 135 Dhp-a i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds all occupations are at a standstill); anākula Snp 262 = Kh v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife AN iii.37 = iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field AN iii.77 ‣See also D i.71 MN iii.7 SN i.204 Mil 9 Mil 33 and below; as place of occupation: Snp p. 13, Pv-a 62 Phrases: ˚ṁ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business AN i.115 Pv-a 141
    3. jahati give up the occupation SN iv.324 Pv-a 133 ˚ṁ payojeti to do or carry on business DN i.71 DN ii.175 DN iii.66 DN iii.95 AN iii.57 ˚ṁ pavatteti to set a business on foot Pv-a 42 (and vicāreti: Pv-a 93); ˚ṁ saṁvidahati to provide with work AN iv.269 = 272 Mhvs vi.16
    4. deed, action in ethical sense kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚ = kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; iv.161 Ja vi.104 (opposite puñña˚) as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚. AN v.292f. Vv-a 130 (in parisuddha-kāya-kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā MN ii.191 ākiṇṇa-k˚ (evam-) of such character SN i.204 kurūra-k˚
    5. adjective of cruel character AN iii.383 = Pug 56 (in definition of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚; of right doing opposite micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to “Magga” (: q.v.) DN ii.216 SN ii.168 SN v.1 AN iii.411 Bdhd 135; ex
    6. plural as kāya-kamma (= sīla 1
      1. -3) at SN v.9 = Vb 105 Vb 235 as kāya-duccaritehi ārati virati … Vb 106
      1. ˚ādhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work Dhp-a i.393
      • ˚ṭṭhāna : 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place Ja i.57 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar Ja iv.306
      • ˚dāsa a farm-servant Ja i.468
      • ˚bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business Dhp-a iii.100
      • ˚vipatti “failure of action,” evil-doing AN i.270 opposite -sampadā “perfection of action, right-doing” AN i.271
      • ˚saṁvidhāna the providing of work DN iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati)
      Sanskrit karmānta; kamma + anta, cp. anta 14.
    Kammantika
    adjective
    1. a business manager Ja i.227
    2. a labourer, artisan, assistant Ja i.377
    from kammanta
    Kammāra
    a smith, a worker in metals generally DN ii.126. AN v.263 a silversmith Snp 962 Dhp 239 Ja i.223 a goldsmith Ja iii.281 Ja v.282 The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold-and silver-smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e.g. from Ja iii.282 and Vv-a 250 where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well-to-do as appears from what is said of Cunda at DN ii.126 owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike Ja iii.281
    1. ˚uddhana a smith’s furnace, a forge Ja vi.218
    • ˚kula a smithy MN i.25
    • kūṭa a smith’s hammer Vism 254 -gaggarī a smith’s bellows SN i.106 Ja vi.165 Vism 287 (in comparison)
    • ˚putta “son of a smith,” i.e. a smith by birth and trade DN ii.126 AN v.263 as goldsmith Ja vi.237 Snp 48 (Nd2 ad
    • locative : k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro) -bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sanskrit bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76
    • ˚sālā a smithy Vism 413 Mhvs 5, 31
    Vedic karmāra
    Kammāsa
    1. variegated, spotted, blemished Ja v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy
    2. figuratively inconsistent, varying AN ii.187
    3. neuter inconsistency, blemish, blot AN iv.55 Vism 51
    4. not spotted, i.e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct DN ii.80 AN ii.52 AN iii.36 AN iii.572 AN vi.54 AN vi.192 Bdhd 89
      1. ˚kārin in ; not acting inconsistently AN ii.187 cp. ibid. 243
      2. ˚pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet Ja v.475 (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i.e. an ogre; also name of a Yakkha Ja v.503 Ja v.511 (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909, 236 sq.)
      Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Latin cālīgo & callidus
    Kammika
    adjective-noun
    1. (—˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character:; āya˚; revenue-overseer, treasurer Dhp-a i.184
    2. sabba˚ (always with reference to amacca, the king’s minister one who does everything, the king’s confidant Vism 130 Pv-a 81
    3. On term ādi˚ beginner (e.g. Vism 241 ‣See Compendium 53, 129 note 2
    4. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚; and thalapatha˚; by sea & by land Ja i.121
    5. a superintendent, overseer, manager Ja ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mhvs 30, 31.

      • one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106
    from kamma
    Kammin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. doing, performing, practising Ja vi.105 Sdhp 196 Sdhp 292
    from kamma, cp. kammaka
    Kamya
    adjective (—˚)
    1. wishing for, desiring Dhs-a 365 (sādhu˚; variant reading ˚kāma); kamyā, ablative in the desire for ‣See next
    from kām
    Kamyā
    1. (—˚) in ablative function (of kamyā feminine for kamyāya or kamya adjective?) in the desire for: SN i.143 = J iii.361 (explained by kāmatāya) Snp 854 Snp 929 Kamyata (-) & kammata

    Kamyatā (—˚)
    kammatā
    (Nd)
    1. wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with infinitive or equivalent kathetu˚ Vv-a 18 muñcitu˚ (+ paṭisankhā) Ps i.60 65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vb 372 especially in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚ Vb 208 Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚ Vb 351 361 = Dhs 1059 Nd2 s.v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; variant reading pucchañci˚ both Vb and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚ ‣See detail under puñcikatā) of māna; ketu˚ Nd2 505 Dhs 1116 = 1233 Vb 350f.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (variant reading cāṭu˚) Vb 246 352
    • As ablative (= kamyā) in dassana˚ SN i.193 = Th 1 1241 Snp 121 (ex
    • plural as icchāya Snp-a 179). cp. kammaññatā & kamma-sādutā
    from kām
    Kaya
    purchase, buying AN iii.226 (+ vi˚).
    1. ˚(a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv; i.56 (‣ See also Kh vii.6 and note)
    2. ˚vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata DN i.5 = AN ii.209 = v.205 Pug 58 DN i.64 SN v.473 Snp 929 Ja v.243 Khus 114 Dhp-a i.78 Pv-a 29 (= KhA 212)
    from kri
    Kayati
    1. to buy; infinitive ketuṁ Ja iii.282 cp. kiṇāti
    krī, perhaps connected with kṛ
    Kayika
    1. a buyer, trader, dealer Mil 334
    from krī, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit krayika Divy 505
    Kayin
    1. a buyer Ja vi.110
    Kara
    1. adjective (—˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e.g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaṁ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day-maker, i.e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a “black” existence (of pāpakamma) Ja iv.9 padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus Pv-a 52 vacana˚, etc. 2. (m) “the maker,” i.e. the hand Mhvs 5, 255–⁠256 30, 67
    2. ˚atikaraṁ (
    3. adverb ) doing too much, going too far Ja i.431
    4. ˚dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard arduous SN i.7 SN iv.260 AN i.286 AN iv.31 AN iv.135 AN v.202 + durabhisambhavo Snp 429 Snp 701 Ud. 61;
    5. noun neuter something difficult, a difficult task AN i.286 (cp. iv.31) Ja i.395 Mil 121 dukkara-kārikā “doing of a hard task,” exertion, austerity MN i.93 Nd2 262b
    6. ˚sukara easy to do SN i.9 SN ii.181 Dhp 163 Ud 61 na sukaraṁ with infinitive it is not easy to … DN i.250 AN iii.52 AN iii.184 iv.334.

      1. ˚kaṭaka masculine neuter a hand-wheel, i.e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.112
      2. ˚ja “born of kamma” in karaja-kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore = the impure, vile, low body. AN v.300 Ja i.5 Vism 287, 404 DN-a i.113 217 221 Dhp-a i.10 Dhp-a iii.420 Dhs-a 403 karaja-rūpa Vism 326
      3. ˚tala the palm of the hand Mhbv.6, 34 -mara “one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy),” but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave Ja iii.147 Ja iii.361 Ja iv.220 Dhp-a iii.487 —˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives ‣See itthi Vin iii.140 (= dhajāhaṭā); -gāhaṁ gaṇhāti to make prisoner Ja i.355 Ja iii.361
      4. ˚mita “to be measured with (two) hands,” in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist Ja v.219 Ja vi.457
      5. from kṛ
    Karaka1
    1. [Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco-nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Latin carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism 1. Water-pot, drinking-vessel (= : pānīya-bhājana Pv-a 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302 It is called dhammakaraka there and at ii.118, 177. This means “regulation waterpot” as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana to prevent injury to living things ‣See also Mil 68 Pv iii.224 Pv-a 185
    • hail (also karakā) Ja iv.167 Mil 308 Mhvs xii.9
    1. ˚vassa a shower of hail, hail-storm Ja iv.167 Mil 308 Dhp-a i.360
    Karakarā
    1. (for kaṭakaṭā, q.v.) (adverb ) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sanskrit dantān kaṭakaṭāpya) i.e. severely (of biting) Ja iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā).

    Karañja
    1. the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201 Ja vi.518 Ja vi.519
    cp. Sanskrit karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea
    Karaṇa
    1. adjective (
    2. feminine ī) (—˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) SN iv.331 SN v.97 Iti 83 and acakkhu etc. SN v.97 nāthā ˚ā dhammā. AN v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ AN ii.22 dubbaṇṇa˚ SN v.217 ‣See also D i.245 M. i.15 SN v.96 SN v.115 AN iv.94 AN v.268 Mil 289 2.
    3. neuter (—˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (= kamma), as bali˚ offering of food = bali kamma) Pv-a 81 gabbha˚ Snp 927 pānujja Snp 256 Snp 3 (absolute) (a) the doing up, preparing Ja v.400 vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ (“commission and omission”) Dhp-a i.214 means of action Ja iii.92 (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) Pv-a 33 Vv-a 25 53, 162, 174. —˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case Ja iii.98 Ja v.444 Pv-a 35 Vv-a 304 Dhs-a 48 Kacc 157–⁠4. (—˚) state, condition; in noun-abstract function ˚ttaṁ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (= nānattaṁ) difference MN ii.128 SN iv.294 Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing Pv-a 66 kattabba˚ (= kattabbattaṁ) “what is to be done, i.e. duty Pv-a 30 pūjā˚ veneration Pv-a 30 sakkāra reverence, devotion Snp-a 284

      Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ; , to hurt, cut, torture ‣See Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 15, which is however quite unnecessary ‣See kamma 3 AN (b), kataii 1 (b)

      1. . Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by Ja vi.270 where it explains kappita-kesa-massu, and Ja v.309 & Dhp-a; i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and Ja iii.314 where it is represented by massu-kutti (Commentary massukiriya). cp. also DN-a i.137 a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i.e. the non-performing Ja i.131 Ja v.222 Nett 81 Pv-a 59 Dhs-a 127 non-undertaking (of business) Ja i.229 noncommission MN i.93 abstaining from Dhs 299 Cpd -uttariya neuter angry rejoinder, vehement defence Dhp-a i.44
      2. from kṛ; , cp. Vedic karaṇa
    Karaṇīya
    1. adjective (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (= kātabbaṁ karaṇârahaṁ Kp-a 236) Vin i.58 DN i.3 cp. Mil 183 AN v.210 DN-a i.7 Often—˚ in the sense of “doing making,” as yathā kāma˚ SN ii.226 cp. iv.91, 159 “having business” bahu˚ DN ii.76 AN iii.116 SN ii.215 anukampa˚ Pv-a 61:-(b) done, in the sense of undoing i.e. overcome, undone DN ii.76 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.81 n
    2. masculine one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha Ja iii.23
      • neuter (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation affairs, business DN i.85 DN ii.68 DN ii.74 cp. AN iv.16 MN i.271 SN iii.168 SN iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12 Vin i.139 AN i.58 Snp 143 Snp p. 32 (yan te karanīyaṁ taṁ karohi “do what you have to do”); —˚ṁ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158 Ja v.298 Kataṁ ˚ṁ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in frequently formula “khīṇā jāti vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ …” to mark the attainment of Arahantship DN i.84 DN ii.68 = 153 Thag 2, 223 Vin i.14 Snp p. 16 DN-a i.226 etc ‣See Arahant ii. Commentary There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at AN i.229 3 of a bhikkhu AN i.230-(b) use, need (with instrumental): appamādena k˚ SN iv.125 cetanāya k˚. AN v.2 AN v.312 cp. Mil 5 Mil 78
      • akaraṇīya 1.
      • adjective (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited AN i.58 AN iii.208 = DN-a i.235
      • (b) incapable of being done (c. genitive) Iti 18
      • (c) improper, not befitting (c. genitive) Vin i.45 = 216 = iii.20 Pv-a 64
      • (d) not to be “done,” i.e. not to be overcome or defeated DN ii.76 AN iv.113 -(e) having nothing to do Vin i.154 2.
      • neuter a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155
      • one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) DN ii.143 Thag 1, 1045 DN-a i.9
    gerundive of karoti
    Karaṇīyatā
    feminine
    1. the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89 93; sa˚ being left with something to do Mil 140
    abstract from preceding
    Karaṇḍa
    masculine neuter
    1. a basket or box of wicker-work Mhvs 31, 98; Dāvs v.60 Dhp-a iii.18
    2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222 ahi-kañcuka) cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.88
    cp. Sanskrit karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātumañjūsā explains k. by “bhājanatthe”
    Karaṇḍaka
    1. a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ MN i.215 = SN v.71 = AN iv.230 (in simile) SN iii.131 SN v.351 cp. Pug 34 Ja i.96 Ja iii.527 Ja v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka) DN-a i.222 (vilīva˚) Snp-a 11
    from last
    Karamanda
    1. a shrub Vism 183 (+ kanavīra)
    etymology?
    Karati1
    1. to cut, injure, hurt; in “karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato …” DN i.52 = M i.516 SN iii.208
    cp. Sanskrit kṛntati
    Karati2
    1. (˚tī) feminine a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang Ja vi.536 (= rājamāsa).

    Karabha
    1. the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚ + ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv.29
    Karamara
    1. ‣See Kara
    Karaḷa
    1. (karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) Dhp-a iii.38 Dhs-a 272
    Karavī
    1. the Indian cuckoo Ja vi.539
    cp. Sanskrit kala-kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow
    Karavīka
    same Ja v.204 Ja v.416 Vv 364 Vism 112, 206 Vv-a 166 219.
    1. ˚bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i.e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇas DN ii.20 = iii.144 = 173 = MN ii.137 etc.; cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.17 n and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kalaviṅka-manojña-bhāṣin Sp. Avs i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given)
    Karavīya
    1. (˚iya) = preceding Ja vi.538
    Karavīra
    1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents ‣See kaṇṭha
    2. a kind of grass Ja iv.92
    3. ˚patta a kind of arrow MN i.429
    cp. Sanskrit karavīra
    Karahi
    1. (Sanskrit karhi, when? kar = locative of
    2. pronoun st. *quo = Latin cur why, Gothic hvar, English where), only in karaha-ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci DN i.17 DN ii.139 MN i.177 MN i.454 AN i.179 AN iv.101 Mil 73 Mil 76

    Karin
    adjective
    1. “one who has a hand,” an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mhvs 24, 34; 25, 68; Dāvs iv.2. In compounds. kari
    1. ˚gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant’s trumpeting Dāvs v.56
    2. ˚vara an excellent elephant Mhbv.4, 143 Dāvs iv.2
    from kara
    Kari-paribandha
    adjective
    1. bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; epithet of the body Thag 1, 1152 Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 ‣See note ad locative
    2. = karīsa-paribaddha
    Karīsa1
    1. neuter a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of ‣Seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa) ‣See Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18 Ja i.94 Ja i.212 Ja iv.233 Ja iv.276 Vv-a 64
    Karīsa2

    neuter

    1. refuse, filth, excrement dung DN ii.293 Ja i.5 Vism 259, 358 (in detail) Pv-a 87 Pv-a 258; Kp-a 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces AN i.139 Snp 835
    1. ˚magga the anus Ja iv.327
    • ˚vāca
    • neuter a cesspool Ja iii.263 (= gūthakūpa)
    • ˚vāyin, feminine ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement Pv-a 87
    cp. Sanskrit karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Latin cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda
    Karuṇā
    feminine
    1. pity compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto-vimutti) in the 4 sentiments viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā frequently found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and Snp-a 128 (on Snp 73 explains k˚ as “ahita-dukkh-âpanaya-kāmatā,” the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one’s fellowmen), whilst mettā is ex plural as “hita-sukh-ûpanayakāmatā,” the desire of bringing (to one’s fellow-men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṁ hadayakampanaṁ karotī ti” Bdhd 21; “sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṁ karuṇā cetovimutti” as ex
    2. plural of avihiṁsa dhātu Vb 87 paradukkhāsahana-rasā Vism 318. K˚-sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one’s good influence ‣See cātuddisa “extending over the 4 i.e. all, directions): DN i.251 DN iii.78 DN iii.50 DN iii.224 SN iv.296 SN iv.322 SN iv.351 SN v.115 AN i.183 AN i.196 AN ii.129 AN ii.184 AN iii.225 v.300, 345 Ja ii.129 Nd2 on Snp 73 Vb 273 280 Dhs 1258 The definition of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṁ hadaya-kampanaṁ karoti. Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in connection with bhāvanā & jhāna), so in “karuṇaṁ cetovimuttiṁ bhāveti” SN v.119 AN i.38 AN v.360 in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī-katā, etc. DN iii.248 AN iii.291 iv.300; in k˚-sahagataṁ saddhindriyaṁ AN i.42 unspecified SN v.131 AN iii.185 Nett 121, 124; Ps i.8 k˚ + mettā Nett 25; k˚ + muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq. 29; ananta k˚ pañña as epithet of Buddha Bdhd 1 karuṇaṁ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚; great compassion Ps i.126, 133; —˚samāpatti a ʻ gest, ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help DN ii.237 Ps. 1, 126 f Dhp-a i.26 367 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 195
    3. As adjective only in compounds. (e.g. ˚vācā merciful speech; negative akaruṇa merciless Mhbv.85, & ati˚ very merciful Ja iv.142) and as
    4. adverb karuṇaṁ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k paridevati Ja vi.498 Ja vi.513 Ja vi.551 cp. ix.54; also in abl karuṇā Ja vi.466
    5. ‣ See also kāruñña
      1. ˚ādhimutta intent upon compassion DN ii.241 DN ii.242
      • ˚ānuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46 -guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570
      • ˚jala water of c., shower of mercy Mil 22 Mhbv.16
      • ˚jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. DN ii.237

        1. -39 -ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. Pv-a 72
        • ˚para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112 Sdhp 345
        • ˚bala the power of c. Mhvs 15, 61, 130; Sdhp 577
        • ˚brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319
        • ˚bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq
        • ˚rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv.16
        • ˚vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adjective ˚vihārin) DN-a i.33
        • ˚sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv.7
        • ˚sītala “cool with c.” + hadaya whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33 DN-a i.1
        cp. Vedic karuṇa neuter (holy) action; Sanskrit karuṇā, from kṛ;. As adjective karuṇa ‣See under 3.
    Karuṇāyati
    1. to feel pity for, to have compassion on Snp 1065 (˚āyamāna; ex plural by Nd2 as anuddayamāno anurakkh anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚) Vb 273 Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vb 87 = 273 (and ˚āyitattaṁ ibid.)
    2. v. denominative native from karuṇā; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit karuṇāyati Divy 105
    Karumbhaka
    1. a species of rice-plant of a ruddy colour Mil 252 ‣See Mil. translation ii.73
    Karumhā
    1. (plural ) a class of Devas DN ii.260

    Kareṇu
    1. elephant, in compound -lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Thag 2, 373
    metathesis for kaṇeru, q.v., cp. Sanskrit kareṇu
    Kareṇukā
    feminine [from kareṇu) a female elephant Ja ii.343 Dhp-a i.196 (variant reading for kaṇeru).
    Kareri
    1. in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but ‣See Brethren, p. 363, note 2: musk-rose tree or “karer” Thag 1, 1062 Ud 31 Ja v.405 Ja vi.534
    Karoṭi1

    feminine

  • a basin, cup, bowl, dish Ja i.243 Ja ii.363 Ja iii.225 Ja iv.67 Ja v.289 Ja v.290
  • the skull (cp. kaḷopi On the form cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.227 note) Ja vi.592
  • Karoṭi2
    1. masculine a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras Ja i.204 associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 22). As name of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas explained as “tesaṁ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṁ” by C on Ja i.204 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. compares Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas MVastu i.30
    Karoṭika
    1. a bowl, basin Ja iv.68 Dhp-a ii.131 (sappi˚)
    2. the skull Ja vi.592 where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull
    from karoṭi1)
    Karoṭiya
    1. = karoṭika 2, Ja vi.593
    Karoti
    v. irreg.
    1. . Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the following are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed found in grammatical works only): I. Active 1. Indicative present karomi, etc. Snp 78 Snp 216 Snp 512 Snp 666 = Dh 306 = It 42 Opt. kare Dhp 42 Dhp 43, plural (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Snp p. 101; or (sing.) kareyya (frequently), kareyyāsi Pv-a 11 kareyya Snp 920 Snp 923 kuriyā (= Sanskrit kuryāt) Ja vi.206 Ppr. karan Dhp 136 or karonto (feminine karontī) Dhp 16 Dhp 116–⁠2. Imperfect (akara, etc.)
    2. aorist (akaṁ) akariṁ etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Snp 343 Snp 537 Snp 2nd
    3. plural akattha Pv i.112 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 75; 3rd
    4. plural akariṁsu; akaṁsu Snp 882 Pv-a 74 without augment kari Dhp-a ii.59 Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Snp 339 Snp 1068 etc
      • imperative karohi Snp p. 32; 1062; karotha Snp 223 Kp-a 168
      • future karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaṁ Ja iv.286 vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually with puññaṁ & kusalaṁ poetical only) Pv; ii.113 Vv 33192 2nd sing. kāhasi Snp 427 Snp 428 Dhp 154 Dhp 1st
      • plural kāhāma Pv iv.1011

    5. infinitive kātuṁ Pv-a 4 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 115, Kh vi.10, etc.; kattuṁ Vv-a 13 kātave Mhvs 35, 29 Vv 4415 (= kātuṁ); kātuye Thag 2, 418

      • Pp kata ‣See sep

    6. German katvā Snp 127 Snp 661 Snp 705 etc. katvāna (poet.) Snp 89 Snp 269 Pv i.13 karitvā ‣See iv. II. Med. 1. Indicative present (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Snp 168 Snp 811 Snp 3rd

      • plural kubbanti Snp 794 or 3rd sing kurute Snp 94 Snp 796 Snp 819 It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd
      • plural kubbetha Snp 702 Snp 719 Snp 917 Iti 87 or 3rd sing kayirā Snp 728 = 1051 SN i.24 Dhp 53 Dhp 117; kayirātha (always ex
      • plural by kareyya) Dhp 25 Dhp 117 Iti 13 Pv i.1111 Kp-a 224; kubbaye Snp 943
      • Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno karāno) (a)kubbaṁ Snp 844 Snp 913 (a)kubbanto Iti 86
      • feminine (vi)kubbantī Vv 112 (a)kubbamāna Snp 777 Snp 778 Snp 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331
      • Imperfect (akariṁ 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318 1st
      • plural akaramhase Ja iii.26 ˚a Dhp-a i.145

      • aorist (none)
      • imperative (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaṁ 2nd
      • plural kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaṁ (= Sanskrit kurutāṁ Ja vi.288

      • future (none). III. Pass. 1. Indicative present (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dhp 292 = Thag 1, 635 Kp-a 168 and kīrati Thag 1, 143 Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). 2.
      • future kariyissati Vin i.107
      • Grd. karaṇīya (q.v.), (kayya) kātabba Dhp-a i.338 IV.
      • causative I (
      • denominative to kāra) kārayati = kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and figuratively perform, exercise, rule wield (rajjaṁ): kārehi Pv-a 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaṁ Ja v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuṁ Mhvs iv.3; akāresi Mhvs 23, 85 kāretuṁ Pv-a 74 kārayamāna Vv-a 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaṁ) Pv-a 162 karitvā Snp 444 (vasiṁ) 674; 680 (vittiṁ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaṁ). V.
      • causative II. Kārāpeti SN i.179 Pv-a 20
      • aorist kārāpesi he had (= caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159
      • future kārāpessāmi Mhvs 20, 9;
      • absolutive kārāpetvā Pv-a 123
      • gerundive kārapetabba Vin ii.134

      Meanings of karoti:

    7. to build, erect Mhvs 19, 36 20, 9 (

      • causative )
      • to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155 Ja i.24 Ja ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na … I prevent cp. Latin facio ne …); iii.297 Pv i.88 = ii.619; Mhvs 3, 1; 7, 22

    8. to produce Dhp-a i.172

      • to write compose Ja vi.410 Pv-a 287

    9. to put on, dress Vin ii.277 Ja i.9

      • to impose (a punishment Mhvs 4, 14

    10. to turn into (with

      • locative or two
      • accusative Ja ii.32 Mhvs 9, 27
      • to use as (with two
      • accusative Ja i.113 Ja ii.24

    11. to bring into (with

      • locative ) Ja v.454
      • to place (with
      • locative ) Ja v.274 (with
      • accusative of the person Dhp 162 It is very often used periphrastically, where the translation would simply employ the noun as verb, e. g kathaṁ k˚ DN ii.98 kodhaṁ k˚ and kopaṁ k˚ to be angry Ja iv.22 Ja vi.257 cayaṁ k˚ to hoard up; corikaṁ k˚ to steal Vin i.75 taṇhaṁ k˚ (c.
      • locative ) to desire Ja i.5 sītaṁ k˚ to cool DN ii.129
      • It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear DN ii.105 pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚ muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q.v.) cp. the same process in conn with bhavati
      • The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aṁse k˚ to place on one’s shoulder Ja i.9 antarāyaṁ k˚ to prevent Ja i.232 ādiṁ k˚ (c.
      • accusative ) to begin with; nimittaṁ k˚ to give a hint DN ii.103 pātarāsaṁ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaṁ k˚ to make up one’s mind; mahaṁ k˚ to hold a festival DN ii.165 massuṁ k˚ to trim the beard Dhp-a i.253 musāvādaṁ k˚ to tell a lie Ja vi.401 rajjaṁ k˚ to reign SN i.218 vase k˚ to bring into one’s power Ja i.79 sandhiṁ k˚ to make an agreement Mhvs 16; sinehaṁ k˚ to become fond of Ja i.190
      • Similarly, cpd with
      • adverb s: alaṁ k˚ to make much of, i.e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i.e. keep free from Pv-a 17 Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i.e. to honour Pv iii.71
      • Note phrase kiṁ karissati what difference does it make? (cp. German was macht’s) DN i.120 or what about … Ja i.152
    Sanskrit karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? ‣See kamma), cp. kar-man, Lithuanian kùrti to build, Old Turkish cruth form; Latin corpus, with p-addition as Sanskrit kṛpa, kḷp = kṛp. Derived are kalpa → kappa, kalpate → kappeti
    Kalakala
    adjective
    1. any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv.23 (of the tramping of an army); in -mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. cp. karakarā
    cp. Sanskrit kala
    Kalati
    1. to utter an (indistinct) sound: past participle kalita Thag 1, 22
    2. kal, kālayati
    Kalanda
    1. heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Mil 292 (sīsa˚)
    cp. Sanskrit karaṇḍa piece of wood?
    Kalandaka
    1. 1. a squirrel Mil 368
    • an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat Ja vi.224
    • ˚nivāpa name of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels DN ii.116 Vin i.137 Vin ii.105 290, etc
    Kalabha
    1. the young of an elephant ‣See hatthi˚; and cp. kalāra
    cp. Sanskrit kalabha
    Kalamba
    neuter
    1. name of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish Ja iv.46 (= tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C explains by tāla-kanda; gloss Burmese manuscripts however gives latā-tanta); vi.578 ‣See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba; .

      1. ˚rukkha the Cadamba tree Ja vi.290
      cp. Sanskrit kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens
    Kalambaka
    1. = kalamba, the Commentary tree Ja vi.535
    Kalambukā
    feminine = kalambaka DN iii.87 (variant readings kaladukā, kalabakā) the translation (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.84) has “bamboo.”
    Kalala

    masculine neuter

  • mud Ja i.12 Ja i.73 Mil 125 Mil 324 Mil 346 Mhbv.150 Pv-a 215 (= kaddama) Dhp-a iii.61 Dhp-a iv.25-su˚; “well-muddied” i.e. having soft soil (of a field Mil 255

    • the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming Ja ii.155

  • in Embryology: the “soil,” the placenta SN i.206 = Kvu ii.494 Mil 125 Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1

    • & 10 ‣See Vism 236 Nd1 120; & cp. Mil 40)

  • the foetus, ap

    • plural to an egg, i.e. the yolk Mil 49

      • In compounds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚
      1. ˚gata (a) fallen into the mud Mil 325
      • ˚gahaṇa “mud thicket,” dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes Ja i.329
      • ˚kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (Vv-a 343)
      • ˚bhūta = preceding, AN i.9 cp. Ja ii.100 AN iii.233 Mil 35
      • ˚makkhita soiled with mud Dhp-a iii.61

  • Kalasa
    neuter
    1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar MN iii.141 Ja iv.384 Dāvs iv.49 Pv-a 162
    2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv.2, 22
    cp. Vedic kalaśa
    Kalaha
    1. quarrel, dispute, fight AN i.170 AN iv.196 AN iv.401 Snp 862 Snp 863 (+ vivāda) Ja i.483 Nd2 427 Dhp-a iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water) iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ṁ udīreti to quarrel Ja v.395 karoti identical Ja i.191 Ja i.404 Pv-a 13 vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise Ja v.412 Dhp-a iii.255
    • harmony accord, agreement SN i.224 mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row Ja iv.88
    1. ˚ābhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Snp 276 Thag 1, 958
    • ˚ṅkara picking up a quarrel Ja vi.45
    • ˚karaṇa quarrelling, fighting Ja v.413
    • ˚kāraka (
    • feminine

      • ī quarrelsome, pugnacious AN iv.196 Vin i.328 Vin ii.1
      • ˚kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute Ja iii.151 vi.336
      • ˚jāta “to whom a quarrel has arisen,” quarrelling disputing AN i.70 Vin i.341 Vin ii.86 261 Ud 67 Ja iii.149
      • ˚pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) DN iii.182 = Dhs-a 380
      • ˚ vaḍḍhana
      • neuter inciting & incitement to quarrel Ja v.393 Ja v.394
      • ˚sadda brawl, dispute Ja vi.336
      cp. Sanskrit kalaha, from kal
    Kalā
    1. a small fraction of a whole generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon’s disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part ‣See Vv-a 103 Dhp-a ii.63 in this sense in the expression kalaṁ nâgghati soḷasiṁ “not worth an infinitesimal portion of” = very much inferior to SN i.19 SN iii.156 = v.44 = It 20 AN i.166 213; iv.252 Ud 11 Dhp 70 Vv 437 Dhp-a ii.63 (= koṭṭhāsa) Dhp-a iv.74
    2. an art, a trick (literally part, turn Ja i.163
    3. kalaṁ upeti to be divided or separated Mil 106 Dhp-a i.119 ‣See sakala
    4. In compound with bhū as kalī -bhavati to be divided, broken up Ja i.467 (= bhijjati). cp. vikala
    Vedic kalā *squel, to Latin scalpo, Old High German scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) explains kala by “sankhyāne.”
    Kalāpa
    1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo-or sugar-canes, sometimes of hair and feathers SN iv.290 (tiṇa˚) Ja i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚) Mil 33 Pv-a 257 Pv-a 260 (ucchu˚) 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora-piñja˚)
    2. a quiver Vin ii.192 Iti 68 Ja vi.236 Mil 418 Pv-a 154 Pv-a 169
    3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚ 626 (phassa-pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚ 78, 120.

      1. ˚agga neuter “the first (of the) bunch,” the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms Dhp-a i.98
      2. ˚sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, 606, 626 sq
      3. cp. Sanskrit kalāpa
    Kalāpaka
    1. 1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315 Mhvs 30, 67
    • a bundle, group Ja i.239
    Kalāpin
    adjective
    1. having a quiver Ja vi.49 (accusative plural ˚ine).
    2. feminine kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) SN iv.201 SN ii.114 (naḷa˚)
    3. from kalāpa
    Kalābuka
    neuter
    1. a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136 144, 319
    cp. Sanskrit kalāpaka
    Kalāya
    a kind of pea, the chick-pea MN i.245 (kaḷāya) SN i.150 AN v.170 Snp p. 124 Ja ii.75 (= varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja-māsa) Ja iii.370 Dhp-a i,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at. AN v.170 = SN i.150 Snp p. 124 (where the size of an ever-increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).
    1. ˚matta of the size of a chick-pea SN i.150 AN v.170 Snp p. 124 (ḷ) Ja iii.370 Dhp-a i.319
    Kalāyati
    1. to have a measure, to outstrip Ja i.163 (taken here as “trick, deceive”)
    denominative from kalā
    Kalāra
    1. in hatthi˚ at Ud 41 explained in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at Dhp-a i.58 which reads kalabha undoubtedly better. cp. kaḷārikā
    Kali
    masculine
    1. the unlucky die ‣See akkha; “the dice were ‣Seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka.. An extra ‣Seed was called the kali” (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.368 note DN ii.349 Ja i.380 Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) at Ja vi.228 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q.v
    2. (= kaliggaha an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliṁ vicināti “gathers up demerit” Snp 658 appamatto kali … akkhesu dhanaparājayo … mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = v.171, 174 = Sn 659 = Nett 132; cp. MN iii.170 AN v.324 Dhp 202 (= Dhp-a iii.261 aparādha)
    3. the last of the 4 ages of the world ‣See ˚yuga.

      • sinful, a sinner Snp 664 (= pāpaka). 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Thag 2, 458 501 Ja v.134
      1. ˚(g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds MN i.403 = 406; iii.170 (in simile) ‣See kaṭaggaha -devatā (m. plural ) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Mil 191 ‣See Miln translation i.266 note -(p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68
      2. ˚yuga
      3. neuter one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv.4, 44, Vinl 281
      4. ˚sāsana
      5. neuter in ˚ṁ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93 360
      6. cp. Sanskrit kali
    Kaliṅgara
    masculine neuter (
    • Burmese manuscripts ḷ)

      1. a log, a piece of wood MN i.449 MN i.451 SN ii.268 Dhp-a iii.315 often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combined with kaṭṭha q.v.) Dhp 41 Dhp-a i.321 (= kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Thag 2, 468 (identical) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni Dhp-a ii.142
      2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128 cp. sopāna-kaḷevara
    1. ˚ūpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one’s head on when sleeping SN ii.267 Mil 366
    • ˚kaṇḍa a wooden arrow Ja iii.273 (acittaṁ k˚: without feeling)
    cp. Sanskrit kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of “log” ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. kalingara
    Kaliṅgu
    masculine neuter
    1. the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel Ja vi.537
    cp. Sanskrit kalinga & kalingaka
    Kalita
    1. sounding indistinctly Thag 1, 22
    past participle of kalati
    Kalusa
    1. muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DN-a i.275
    cp. Sanskrit kaluṣa
    Kalevara
    1. ‣See kaḷebara
    Kalya
    1. ‣See kalla;
    Kalyatā

    feminine

  • the state of being sound, able, pliant Ja ii.12

    • pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in ; opposite (applied to citta) Dhs 1156 Dhs-a 377 (= gilānabhāva)
  • Kalyāṇa
    (& kallāṇa)
    1. adjective beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn bhaddaka Pv-a 9 Pv-a 116) and kusala (SN ii.118 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 122); opposite pāpa (SN i.83 MN i.43 Pv-a 101 Pv-a 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚ = katûpakāra Pv-a 116 Applied to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ DN i.62 and ≈ SN v.152 Snp p. 103 Vv-a 87 Vism 213 sq. (in various applications); etc
    2. As
    3. masculine one who observes the sīlapadaṁ (opposite pāpa, who violates it) AN ii.222 cp. k˚-mittā = sīlâdīhi adhikā Snp-a 341
    4. SN iv.303 SN v.2 SN v.29 SN v.78 AN iii.77 AN iv.361 Vin ii.8 95 Ja i.4 Mil 297-kata˚ (opposite kata-pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. Iti 25 etc ‣See kata ii.1 a k˚ of kitti (-sadda) DN i.49 (= DN-a i.146 seṭṭha) SN iv.374 SN v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā friends in general (‣ See also compound) Dhp 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte … bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin) Snp 338
    5. neuter (a) a good or useful thing good things Vin i.117 AN iii.109 cp. bhadraṁ. (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action Ja v.49 (kalyāṇā here
    6. neuter nominative in sense of
    7. plural ; cp. Vedic
    8. neuter 492; —˚ṁ karoti to perform good deeds SN i.72 AN i.138f. Vin i.73 Pv-a 122
    9. (c) kindness, good service Ja i.378 Ja iii.12 (= upakāra), 68 (˚ṁ karoti). (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumerated as 5 kalyāṇāni viz. kesa˚, maṁsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i.e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth Ja i.394 Dhp-a i.387
      1. ˚ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good Dhp-a i.9 --ādhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness SN ii.154 SN ii.158 Iti 70 78 Vb 341
      • ˚kāma desiring what is good AN iii.109
      • ˚kārin (a) doing good virtuous (opposite pāpa˚) SN i.227 cp. Ja ii.202 = iii.158 Dhs-a 390
      • masculine who has rendered a service Ja vi.182
      • ˚carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vb 341
      • ˚jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable Ja iii.82
      • ˚dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Snp 551 = Th 1, 821 (+ kañcanasannibhattaca)
      • ˚dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73 Vin iii.133 SN v.352 Pug 26 Iti 96 Pv iv.135 Mil 129 Dhp-a i.380 Ja ii.65 (= sundara˚), Pv-a 230 (= sundara-sīla); sīlavā + k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) MN i.334 SN iv.303 Pv-a 13
      • k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous AN ii.224
      • the Good Doctrine Dhp-a i.7
      • ˚˚tā the state of having a virtuous character AN ii.36
      • ˚pañña “wise in goodness” possessed of true wisdom Thag 1, 506 Iti 97
      • ˚paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā Ja iii.342
      • ˚paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply AN iii.58 cp. Mil 3
      • ˚pāpaka good and bad Ja v.238 Ja vi.225 Kvu 45;
      • neuter goodness and evil Ja v.493
      • ˚pīti one who delights in what is good Snp 969
      • ˚bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77 iii.160 (of a householder)
      • ˚mitta 1. a good companion a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he is said to “have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise” MN i.43 (opposite pāpa˚) SN i.83 SN i.87 (do.) AN iv.30 357 Pug 37 41 Ja iii.197 Bdhd 90; not a virtuous friend Dhs-a 247
      • as technical term a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence but any other Arahant can act as such SN v.3 Vism 89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna-dāyaka
      • ˚mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous SN i.87 such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection SN v.3 SN v.32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas SN v.78 = 101 AN i.16 AN i.83 it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu DN iii.212 AN iv.29 AN iv.282 Thag 2, 213 Iti 10 Dhs 1328 = Pug 24 Vism 107
      • not having a virtuous friend and good adviser Dhs-a 247
      • ˚rūpa beautiful, handsome Ja iii.82 v.204
      • ˚vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly DN i.93 DN i.115 AN ii.97 AN iii.114 AN iii.263 AN iv.279 Vin ii.139 Mil 21 DN-a i.263 (= madhura-vacana); not pronouncing or reciting clearly DN i.94 122; —˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address AN i.38
      • ˚vāca, usually in formation k˚ k˚-vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato DN i.114 AN ii.97 AN iii.114 AN iii.195 AN iii.263 iv.279 Vin ii.139 DN-a i.282
      • ˚sadda a lucky word or speech Ja ii.64
      • ˚sampavaṅka a good companion AN iv.357 (in phrase k˚-mitta k˚-sahāya k˚- s˚) Pug 37
      • ˚˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend SN i.87
      • ˚sahāya a good, virtuous companion AN iv.284 357 Pug 37 cp. preceding, —˚tā = preceding SN i.87
      • ˚sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Thag 1, 1008 Iti 96
    Vedic kalyāṇa
    Kalyāṇaka
    adjective
    1. good, virtuous DN-a i.226 Dhs-a 32
    from last
    Kalyāṇatā
    feminine
    1. beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚-kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20
    abstract from kalyāṇa
    Kalyāṇin
    adjective
    1. (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5; -(b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper Ja v.124 Ud 59 -(c) feminine cp
    2. ˚ī Vedic kalyāṇī
      1. a beautiful woman a belle, usually in janapada˚ DN i.193 = MN ii.40 SN ii.234 Ja i.394 Ja v.154
      from kalyāṇa
    Kalla1 & Kalya;
    adjective
    1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291
    2. clever, able, dexterous Mil 48 87
    3. ready, prepared Ja ii.12 cp. -citta.

      • fit proper, right SN ii.13 (pañha)
      • nt. kallaṁ it is proper befitting (with infinitive or infinitive
      • substitute): vacanāya proper to say DN i.168 DN i.169 AN i.144 abhinandituṁ DN ii.69-kallaṁ nu kho
      1. is it proper? MN iii.19 SN iv.346 Mil 25
      • 1. not well, unfit Thag 2, 439 cp. Thag-a 270 2. unbecoming, unbefitting DN ii.68 Ja v.394
      1. ˚kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291
      • ˚kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) SN iii.265
      • ˚citta of ready, amenable mind, in formation k˚, mudu-citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚ etc. DN i.110 = 148 = ii.41 = AN iv.209 = Vin i.16 = ii.156 Vv-a 53 286 Vv 5019 (= kammaniya-citta “her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma”) Pv-a 38
      • ˚cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) Ja ii.12 (cp citta-kalyatā) -rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Thag 1, 212
      • pleased joyful (kalya˚) Snp 680 Snp 683 Snp 691
      • ˚sarīra having a sound body, healthy Ja ii.51 a˚-tā not being sound in body ill-health Vv-a 243
    cp. Sanskrit kalya
    Kalla2
    masculine neuter ashes Ja iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚-vassa a shower of ashes Ja iv.389
    Kallaka
    adjective
    1. in ; unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62 Ja iii.464 Dhs-a 377
    from last
    Kallatā
    feminine ‣See kalyatā
  • ˚a˚; unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in explanation of thīna Nd2 290 Dhs 1156 = 1236 = Nett 86 Dhs-a 378 Nett 26. The reading in Nd2 is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā.
  • Kallahāra
    1. the white esculent water lily Ja v.37 Dīpavaṁsa xvi.19
    cp. Sanskrit kahlāra, the Pali form to be explained as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra → kallahāra
    Kallita
    neuter
    1. pleasantness, agreeableness SN iii.270 SN iii.273 (samādhismiṁ—˚kusala) AN iii.311 AN iv.34 (identical)
    from kalla
    Kallola
    1. a billow, in —˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44
    cp. Sanskrit kallola
    Kaḷāya
    1. = kalāya
    Kaḷāra
    adjective
    1. always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attribute of the dog of the “Underworld” Pv-a 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina-dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy-tales) Ja v.91 (= nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara-dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (= k˚-danto Pv-a 90)
    cp. Sanskrit karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny
    Kaḷārikā
    feminine
    1. a kind of large (female) elephant MN 1. 178 (so read with variant reading for kāḷ˚). cp. kalāra
    from last, literally with protruding teeth
    Kaḷiṅgara
    1. = kalingara. Kalimb(h)aka
    Kaḷimb(h)aka
    1. (cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116 317 (variant reading kaḷimpaka)
    Kaḷīra
    the top sprout of a plant or tree, especially of the bamboo and certain palm trees (e.g. coco-nut tree) which is edible Snp 38 (vaṁsa˚ = veḷugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58) Thag 1, 72 Ja i.74 cp. iii.179; vi.26 Mil 201 (vaṁsa˚) Vism 255 (vaṁsa˚-cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚ Kp-a 50 at identical passage reads kaḷīra-daṇḍa).
    1. ˚(c)chejja neuter “the cutting off of the sprout,” a kind of torture Mil 193 cp. Miln. translation i.270 and kadalīccheda.

    Kaḷebara
    1. (: kale˚ and kalevara) masculine> &
    2. neuter

      1. the body SN i.62 = AN ii.48 = iv.429 = M i.82 Ja ii.437 Ja iii.96 Ja iii.244 Vism 49, 230
      2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaṁ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, DN ii.355 M. i.49 = Vb 137 Thag 2, 467 Ja iii.180 Ja iii.511 Ja v.459 Mhvs 2010; 3781 Pv-a 80 cp. kuṇapa
      3. the step in a flight of stairs MN ii.92 cp. kalingara.

        cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kaḍebara Avs; ii.26
    Kaḷopī
    1. (= khaḷopi) feminine 1. a vessel, basin, pot ‣See compounds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi Thag-a 219 Ja v.252) MN i.77 342 SN i.236 = Th 2, 283 (where osenti is to be corrected to openti) Ja v.252

      • On the form of the word (= karoṭi? ‣See Trenckner Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 109 and Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is explained at Pug AN p. 231 as “ukkhalī, pacchi vā.”
      1. ˚mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel DN i.166 = M i.77 = 342 = AN i.295 = ii.206 (kumbhi-m˚ + kaḷopim˚)
      2. ˚hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand AN iv.376
    Kavaca
    neuter
    1. a mail, a coat of mail, armour DN ii.107 = Ud 64 (applied to existence); Thag 1 614 (of sīla) Ja iv.92 Ja iv.296 Mil 199 Mil 257 Vism 73
    1. ˚jālikā a mail-coat Mil 199
    cp. Sanskrit kavaca
    Kavandha
    masculine neuter
    1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107 cp. SN ii.260 (asīsaka˚) Mil 292 Dhp-a i.314
    2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body Ja v.424 Ja v.427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaṁsa xii.57)
    cp. Sanskrit kavandha & kabandha
    Kavāṭa

    masculine neuter

  • the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114 120, 207, 208 ‣See Vin ii.148 for the description of a door iv.269, 304 (˚baddha = āvasatha) Ja i.19 Nd2 2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner).

    • dvāra˚ a door-post Ja i.63 Ja ii.334 Pv-a 280

  • a window Mhvs ix.17; —˚ṁ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114 120, 207; ˚ṁ ākoṭeti to knock at the door DN i.88 (= DN-a i.252) Vin ii.208

    • akavāṭaka
    • adjective having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148 154 (variant reading for akkavāta Text)
    1. ˚piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door-posts Vin i.47 48 = ii.208, 218
    2. ˚baddha “door-bound,” closed, secure Vin iv.292 (‣ See also above)
  • Kavāṭaka
    1. = kavāṭa Vin ii.148 DN-a i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚)
    Kavi
    a poet SN i.38 SN ii.267 Dāvs i.10; four classes enumerated at AN ii.230 & DN-a; i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor
    1. ˚kata composed by poets SN ii.267 AN i.72
    Vedic kavi
    Kavya
    poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) Ja vi.213 Ja vi.216
    1. ˚kāra a poet Ja vi.216
    cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer
    Kaviṭṭha
    1. the elephant-apple tree, Feronia elephantum Ja v.38 (˚vana)
    cp. kapittha
    Kasaka
    1. ‣See kassaka
    Kasaṭa
    1. (metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1. adjective bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting AN i.72 Ja ii.96 159
    2. masculine (a) fault, vice, defect MN i.281 Ps ii.87
    3. (b) leavings, dregs Vv-a 288 (variant reading sakaṭa)
    4. (c) something bitter or nasty Ja ii.96 Ja v.18-(d) bitter juice Ja ii.105 (nimba˚)
    5. sa˚ faulty wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Mil 119
      1. ˚odaka insipid, tasteless water Ja ii.97
    Kasati
    1. to till, to plough SN i.172 SN i.173 = Sn 80; Thag i.531 Ja i.57 Ja ii.165 Ja vi.365
    • kassate (3rd sing
    • medium) Thag 1, 530
    • past participle kattha (q.v.)
    • causative II. kasāpeti Mil 66 Mil 82 Dhp-a i.224
    kṛṣ or karṣ
    Kasana
    neuter ploughing, tilling Ja iv.167 Ja vi.328 Ja vi.364 Vism 384 (+ vapana sowing).
    Kasambu
    anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; figuratively low passions SN i.166 Snp 281 = Mil 414 = AN iv.172 Vism 258 (maṁsa˚), 259 (parama˚).
    1. ˚jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ SN iv.181 AN ii.240 AN iv.128 AN iv.201 Vin ii.236 Pug 27 34, 36; Vism 57 (+ avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -jāta ibid. in variant readings
    Derivation uncertain
    Kasā
    feminine
    1. a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna) MN i.87 etc. Dhp 143 Mil 197
    • ˚kasāhi tāḷeti to whip lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya ‣See kamma-karaṇā MN i.87 = AN i.47 ii.122, etc. Pv-a 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution) Dhp-a ii.39 (identical)
    1. ˚niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dhp 144 (= Dhp-a iii.86)
    2. ˚pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash Ja iii.178
    • ˚hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75 91 = 322; Sdhp 147
    Vedic kaśā
    Kasāya
    and Kasāva
    1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151
    2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201 277 Ja v.198
    3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629 Mil 65 Dhp-a ii.31 4. (of colour) reddish-yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277

      • (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa moha) AN i.112 Dhp 10 Vb 368
      • ˚a˚ faultless, flawless in akasāvattaṁ being without defect AN i.112 (of a wheel with -sa˚; ibid.)
      • ˚sa˚; faulty Dhp-a i.82
      • ˚mahā˚ wicked Ja iv.387 In compounds. both forms, viz. (kasāya)-yoga an astringent remedy Ja v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.)
      • ˚rasa reddishyellow dye Ja ii.198
      • (kasāva)-odaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205
      • ˚gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277
      • ˚rasa having an astringent taste ibid
      • ˚vaṇṇa of reddish-yellow colour ibid
    Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva
    Kasāyatta
    neuter
    1. astringency Mil 56
    abstract from kasāya
    Kasi
    1. and Kasī feminine

      1. tilling, ploughing; agriculture, cultivation MN ii.198 SN i.172 SN i.173 = Sn 76 sq. Vin iv.6 Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā) Pv-a 7 Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā) Vv-a 63
      • ˚ṁ kasati to plough to till the land Ja i.277 Vism 284
      1. ˚kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture Ja ii.165 Ja ii.300 Ja iii.270
      • ˚karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field Pv-a 66
      • ˚khetta a place for cultivation, a field Pv-a 8 (kasī˚)
      • ˚gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding DN i.135
      • ˚bhaṇḍa ploughing implements Dhp-a i.307
      from kasāti
    Kasiṇa1
    1. adjective entire, whole Ja iv.111 Ja iv.112
    Vedic kṛtsna
    Kasiṇa2

    neuter one of the aids to kammaṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at. AN v.46f. 60; usually enumerated as ten sāvakā dasa k˚-āyatanāni bhāventi

    1. paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚ odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚-that is, earth, water, fire air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) MN ii.14 DN iii.268 DN iii.290 Nett 89 112 Dhs 202 Ps i.6, 95; cp. Manual 49–⁠52; Bdhd 4 90 sq., 95 sq
    • For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚ we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn’) ākāsa Vism 110; cp. Dhs translation 43 note 4, 57 note 2; Compendium 54, 202-Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Ps i.49, 143, 149
    • See further Ja i.313 Ja iii.519 Dhs-a 186f. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚-ânulomaṁ k˚-paṭilomaṁ; k˚-ânupaṭilomaṁ; jhānânulomaṁ; jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚-ânupaṭi˚; jh˚-ukkantikaṁ; k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚-ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi-) kasiṇa are enumerated at Vism 117
    • Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaṁ, adho, tiriyaṁ, advayaṁ, appamāṇaṁ MN ii.15 etc
    • kasiṇaṁ oloketi to fix one’s gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen Ja v.314
    • ˚ṁ samannāharati to concentrate one’s mind on the k. Ja iii.519
    1. ˚āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise ‣See above as 10 such objects DN iii.268 MN ii.14 Ps i.28 etc
    2. ˚ārammaṇa = ˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚ odāta˚, āloka˚)
    3. ˚kamma the k. practice Ja i.141 iv.306; v.162, 193
    4. ˚jhāna the k. meditation Dhs-a 413
    • ˚dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī-kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours) -parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. Ja i.8 245; iii.13, 526 Dhs-a 187 —˚ṁ katheti to give instructions in these preparations Ja iii.369 ˚ṁ karoti to perform the k-preparations Ja iv.117 Ja v.132 Ja v.427 Ja vi.68
    • ˚maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. cp. Compendium 54
    • feminine 202
    • feminine Ja iii.501 Dhp-a iv.208
    • ˚samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd2 4668 (ten such)
    Deriv. uncertain
    Kasita
    1. (past participle of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44
    2. ˚a˚; untilled ibid. 27, 44

      • cp. vi˚
    Kasira
    adjective
    1. miserable, painful, troubled wretched AN iv.283 Snp 574 Ja ii.136 Ja iv.113 = vi.17 Pv iv.121 (= Pv-a 229 dukkha) adverb kasirā ablative with difficulty Ja v.435
    2. ˚kasirena instrumental DN i.251 MN i.104 SN i.94 Vin i.195 Ja i.338 Ja iii.513
    3. without pain easy, comfortable Ja vi.224 (= niddukkha)
    4. ˚lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī AN iv.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. MN i.33 SN ii.278 AN i.184 AN ii.23 AN ii.36 AN iv.106 Ud 36 Pug 11 12
      1. ˚ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth Ja v.435
      • ˚vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood AN i.107 = Pug 51
      Probably from Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain
    Kaseruka
    1. a plant, shrub Snp-a 284 (variant reading kaṁsīruka for kiṁsuka?) ‣See also kaṭeruha
    etymology connected with Sanskrit kaseru backbone?
    Kassaka
    1. a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman DN i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi-vaḍḍhako) AN i.241 A. i.229, 239 (the three duties of a farmer) SN i.172 = Sn 76; iii.155 (variant reading for Text kasaka) iv.314 Vin iv.108 Bdhd 96 DN-a i.170 often in similes, e.g. Pv i.11 ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320
    2. ˚vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant SN i.115 (of Māra)
    from kasati
    Kassati
    1. ‣See ava˚, anu˚ (aorist anvakāsi), pari˚; otherwise kasati; cp. also kissati
    2. kṛṣ
    Kassāma
    future of karoti.
    Kahaṁ
    1. interrogative adverb where? whither? Vin i.217 DN i.151 Snp p. 106 Ja ii.7 iii.76; v.440

      • k-nu kho where then? DN i.92 DN ii.143 263
      cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.
    Kahāpaṇa
    1. [doubtful as regards etymology; the (later) Sanskrit kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dialectical form 1. A square copper coin MN ii.163 AN i.250 AN v.83f. Vin ii.294 Vin iii.238 Dhs-a 280 (at this passage included under rajataṁ, silver, together with loha-māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu-māsaka) SN i.82 AN i.250 Vin ii.294 iv.249 Ja i.478 Ja i.483 Ja ii.388 Mhvs 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin
    • Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (J i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128 217 Pv-a 153 Pv-a 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (Dhp-a iii.239) 80 (Pv-a 102); 10 or 20 (Dhp-a iv.226); 8 (which is considered socially, almost the lowest sum Ja iv.138 Ja i.483) AN nominativenal fine of 1 k. (= a farthing) Mil 193
    • ekaṁ k˚ pi not a single farthing Ja i.2 similarly eka-kahāpaṇen eva Vism 312
    • Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Buddhaghosa in similes at Vism 437 and 515 Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at Dhp-a iii.254
    • See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India,
    • past participle 100–⁠102, figuratively 24; Miln translation i.239
    1. ˚gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe Dhp-a iv.104
    • ˚vassa a shower of money Dhp 186 (= Dhp-a iii.240).

    Kahāpaṇaka
    neuter name of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors MN i.87 = AN i.47 AN ii.122 cp. Mil 97 Mil 290 Mil 358
    1. indeclinable interj. imitating the crow’s cry: kā kā Ja iv.72
    Kā˚
    1. ; in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa
    Kāka
    1. the crow; frequently in similes: SN i.124 Snp 448 Ja i.164 Its thievish ways are described at Dhp-a iii.352 said to have ten bad qualities. AN v.149 Ja i.342 Ja iii.126 kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40
    • As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass-eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Snp 201 Pv-a 198 (= dhanka); cp. kākoḷa-In compounds. often used derisively.
    • feminine kākī Ja ii.39 Ja ii.150 iii.431
    1. ˚āmasaka “touching as much as a crow,” attribute of a person not enjoying his meals Dhp-a iv.16 Dhs-a 404
    • ˚uṭṭepaka a crow-scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371 -opamā the simile of the crow Dhp-a ii.75
    • ˚orava “crow-cawing,” applied to angry and confused words Vin i.239 cp. iv.82
    • ˚olūka crows and owls Ja ii.351 Dhp-a i.50 Mhbv.15
    • ˚guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) Ja ii.174 cp. J. translation ii.122 -nīḷa a crow’s nest Ja ii.365
    • ˚paññā “crow -wisdom, i.e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed Ja v.255 Ja v.258 cp. vi.358
    • ˚paṭṭanaka a deserted village inhabited only by crows Ja vi.456
    • ˚pāda crow’s foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern)
    • ˚peyya “(so full that a crow can easily drink of it,” full to the brim overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ “with even banks and drinkable for crows” (i.e. with the water on a level with the land) DN i.244 SN ii.134 (do.) DN ii.89 MN i.435 AN iii.27 Ja ii.174 Ud 90 cp. note to J. translation ii.122 Pv-a 202 ‣See also peyya
    • ˚bhatta “a crow’s meal,” i.e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows Ja ii.149
    • ˚vaṇṇa “crow-coloured” name of a king Mhvs 2211
    • ˚vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17
    • ˚sīsa the head of a crow Ja ii.351 as adjective: having a crow’s head, applied to a fabulous flying horse DN ii.174 cp. Ja ii.129
    • ˚sūra a “crow-hero,” ap
    • plural to a shameless unconscientious fellow Dhp 244 Dhp-a iii.352
    • ˚ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115
    onomat., cp. Sanskrit kāka; for other onomat. relatives ‣See note on gala
    Kākacchati
    1. to snore Vin iv.355 AN iii.299 Ja i.61 Ja i.160 (= ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DN-a i.42 ghurû-ghurûpassāsī); i.318 vi.57 Mil 85 Vism 311
    derived by Fausböll from kās, to cough; by Trenckner from krath; by Childers & English Müller from; kath should it not rather be a denominative native from kakaca a saw?
    Kākaṇa
    neuter
    1. a coin of very small value Sdhp 514
    kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa = less than a particle
    Kākaṇikā
    feminine = preceding Ja i.120 Ja i.419 Ja vi.346 DN-a i.212 Dhp-a i.391 Vv-a 77 = Dhp-a iii.108 From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz. kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā “for nothing.”
    1. -agghanaka “not even a farthing’s worth,” worth next to nothing Ja vi.346
    Kākola
    and Kākoḷa
    1. a raven, especially in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) Ja iii.246 (= vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā … khādanti naraṁ kibbisakārinaṁ); vi.566
    1. ˚gaṇā (plural ) flocks of ravens Snp 675 VV5215 (= Vv-a 227)
    2. Onomat. The Literally Sanskrit has the same form
    Kāca1
    1. a glass-like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190 Vin ii.112 (cp Divy 503 kācamaṇi rock-crystal)
    • not of glass or quartz, i.e. pure, clear, flawless, ap
    • plural to precious stones DN ii.244 = J ii.418 (= akakkasa) Snp 476 In the same sense also MVastu i.164
    1. ˚ambha neuter red crystal Ja vi.268 (= rattamaṇi) -maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190 Vin ii.112
    2. Derived unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non-Aryan
    Kāca2
    a pingo, a yoke, a carryingpole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato-kājo) with only one basket and “middle” p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137 Ja i.154 Ja v.13 Ja v.293 295 sq., 320, 345 Pv-a 168
    1. ˚daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DN-a i.41
    cp. Sanskrit kāca & kāja
    Kācanā
    feminine
    1. balancing like carrying on a kāca, figuratively deliberation, pondering Vb 352 = Vism 27
    from kāca2
    Kācin
    adjective
    1. only negative ; free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (= niddosa Vv-a 253)
    from kāca1
    Kāja
    = kāca2, i.e. carrying-pole MN iii.148 Ja i.9 Ja iii.325 Ja v.200 Dīpavaṁsa xii.3; Mhvs 5, 24 Dhp-a iv.232
    1. ˚koṭi the end of a carrying-pole Ja i.9 Ja v.200
    • ˚hāraka a pingo-bearer Dhp-a iv.128 Kata-kotacika

    Kāṭa-koṭacikā
    1. a low term of abuse, “pudendum virile & muliebre” Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa-nimittaṁ); cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 89
    kāṭa + koṭacikā
    Kāṇa
    adjective
    1. blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both ‣See PugA 227 SN i.94 Vin ii.90 AN i.107 = ii.85 = Pug 51 (in explanation of tamaparāyaṇa purisa) Thag 2, 438 Ja i.222 (one-eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes) Dhp-a iii.71
    1. ˚kaccha proper name Sdhp 44
    2. ˚kacchapa “the blind turtle in the well-known parable of a man’s chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Thag 2, 500 (= Thag-a 290) Mil 204 Dhs-a 60 cp. MN iii.169 = SN v.455
    cp. Sanskrit kāṇa
    Kātabba
    adjective-noun (
    • gerundive of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done ‣See karoti Ja i.264 etc. Also as kattabba Pv-a 30

    Kātuṁ
    and Kātu˚; (in compound with kāma) infinitive of karoti.
    1. ˚kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 3734 (a˚) Pv-a 115
    • ˚kāmatā the desire to do, etc. Ja iv.253 Ja v.364 ‣See also kattu˚ in same combinations

    Kātuye
    1. is Vedic infinitive of karoti Thag 2, 418 (in Thag-a 268 taken as kātuṁ ayye!)
    Kādamba
    1. a kind of goose with grey wings Ja v.420 Vv-a 163
    cp. Sanskrit kādamba
    Kādambaka
    1. made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at Ja v.320
    Kānana
    neuter
    1. a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Snp 1134 (= Nd2 s.v. vanasaṇḍa) Thag 2, 254 (= Thag-a 210 upavana) Ja vi.557 Sdhp 574
    cp. Sanskrit kānana
    Kānāmā
    1. feminine of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272 273 Ja vi.338
    Kāpilanī
    1. patron. feminine of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Thag 2, 65

    Kāpilavatthava
    adjective of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. DN ii.165 DN ii.256 SN iv.182
    Kāpurisa
    1. a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188 DN iii.279 SN i.91 SN i.154 SN ii.241 SN v.204 Thag 1, 124 495 Ja ii.42 Ja vi.437 Pv ii.930 (Pv-a 125 = lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path AN iii.24 Thag 2, 189
    kad + purisa
    Kāpotaka
    adjective
    1. pigeon-coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton DN i.55 Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112)
    from kapota
    Kāpotikā
    feminine
    1. a kind of intoxicating drink of a reddish colour (like pigeons’ fect) Vin iv.109 cp. J i.360 (surā)
    of doubtful origin, from kapota, but probably popular etymology, one may compare Sanskrit kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a different notion, i.e. from kapi
    Kāma
    masculine neuter
    1. to desire cp. Latin carus, Gothic hōrs, English whore
    1. -1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure-giving, an object of sensual enjoyment
    • subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense-desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Compendium 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense-desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma-bhava or-loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati’s) of existence and part of the fifth or deva-loka ‣See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd1 1 distinguishes (1 vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i.e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd2 202 quoted Dhp-a ii.162 Dhp-a iii.240 and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (Vv-a 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi-visayā

  • chandarāga.

    • sabbasmiṁ lobha

  • gāmadhamma.

    • hitacchanda

  • serībhāva i.e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust (5) effort to do good, (6) self-determination.

    1. In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k stands first on the list of the six factors of existence kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at AN iii.410f. as regards their origin difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion) with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. The following is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma-cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd2 200 Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. Dhs-a 370 similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214 Vb 375 This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām-ogha, kāma-yoga kām-upādāna at Nd2 200 cp. Vism 141 (kām-ogha ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at DN iii.238: kāme avigata-rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha ˚taṇha ‣See also kāma-chanda below under compounds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma-context are verbs the primary meaning of which is “adhering to” or “grasping,” hence, attachment; viz. esanā iṣ to Latin ira) upādāna (upa + ā + taking up), taṇhā tṛṣ, Latin torreo = thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha snih, Latin nix = melting), etc
    • On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati “to be eaten up” pariḍayhati “to be burnt, etc. The following passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma-pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma-pariyesanāyā ussukko, AN i.68 cp. MN i.463 MN iii.129 Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā) ‣See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next-world happiness Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv where a standing epithet of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha “fully equipped with all objects of pleasure, e.g. Pv i.105 Pv-a 46 The other-world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: SN v.409 but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, Iti 4: api dibbesu kāmesu ratiṁ so nâdhigacchati Dhp 187 rāgaṁ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Snp 361 ‣See also Iti 94
    • Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla Pug 38 39 Iti 63 etc. itthi-kāmehi paricāreti “he enjoys himself with the charms of woman” SN iv.343 Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Snp 1041 Kāmatthā for sexual amusement AN iii.229
    1. Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saṁyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge right effort and renunciation. “To give up passion” as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaṁ pahānaṁ, kāmasaññānaṁ pariññā, kāma-pipāsānaṁ-paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaṁ samugghāto kāma-pariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo Vin iii.111 -kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto “uddhaṁsoto” ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called “one who is above the stream” Dhp 218 cp. Thag 2, 12 -tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Snp 771 -yo kāme parivajjeti Snp 768 = Nett 69-nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Snp 359 -ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaṁ AN iii.69
    • Kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññāpeti Gotamo MN i.84 cp. AN v.64 kāme pajahati: SN i.12 = 31 Snp 704 kāmānaṁ vippahāna SN i.47 -ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Snp 464-kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) AN iv.410 kāme panudati Dhp 383 = SN i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaṁ analaṁkaritvā Snp 59 -kāmesu anapekkhin Snp 166 = Ś i.16 (abbrev.) SN ii.281 Snp 857 -cp rāgaṁ vinayetha … Snp 361 vivicc’ eva kāmehi aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna-exercise
    1. Applications of these expressions:-kāmesu palāḷita AN iii.5 kāmesu mucchita SN i.74 kāmālaye asatta SN i.33 kāmesu kathaṁ nameyya SN i.117 kāmesu anikīḷitāvin SN i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Snp 823 (gadhitā Nd1); -kāmesu asaññata Snp 243 -yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ Dhp 401 -Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Snp 845
    • kāmesu giddha DN iii.107 Snp 774 kāmesu gedhaṁ āpajjati SN i.73 -na so rajjati kāmesu Snp 161 -kāmānaṁ vasam upāgamum Snp 315 (= kāmānaṁ āsattataṁ pāpuniṁsu Snp-a 325); kāme parivajjeti Snp 768 kāme anugijjhati Snp 769

      1. Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. AN ii.177) and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says “Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo” ‣See k-sukha. Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) SN i.9 SN i.117
      • aniccā (transitory) SN i.22 kāmā citrā madhurā “pleasures are manifold and sweet” (i.e. tasty) Snp 50 but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. MN i.91 ‣See Nd2 71. Another passage with various descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app’ assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at Ja iv.118
      • ˚atittaṁ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaṁ Dhp 48 -na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito “not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures-of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand” Dhp 186 cp. MN i.130 Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224)-Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaṁ kāmato vippamuttassa n'atthi soko kuto bhayan ti “of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear” Dhp 215 Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha AN iv.289 Nd2 p. 62 on Snp 51 same, except salla gabbha: AN iii.310 The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha’s discourse on pains of pleasures MN i.85 and parallel passages ‣See e.g. Nd2 199 how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness Kāmānaṁ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) MN i.85 sq = Nd2 199 quot. Snp-a 114 (on Snp 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṁkilesaṁ AN iv.186 AN iv.209 AN iv.439 -they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Snp 436 -yo evamvādī … n'atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataṁ āpajjati AN i.266 = M i.305 sq.

        1. Similes.-In the following passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi-kankhala, a chain of bones; (2) maṁsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; -(3) tiṇ'ukkā a torch of grass; (4) angāra-kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; -(5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings-(7) rukkha-phala, the fruit of a tree; -(8) asisūna a slaughter-house; -(9) satti-sūla, a sharp stake; -(10) sappa-sira, a snake’s head, i.e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25 MN i.130 AN iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala) Nd2 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at DN iii.283 AN iv.224 = v.175; No. 5 at Dhp-a iii.240 No. 8 at MN i.144 No. 9 at SN i.128 = Th 2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaṁ for khandhāsaṁ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Thag 2, 451 and several at many other places of the Canon
        1. Cases used adverb ially:-kāmaṁ
        2. accusative as
        3. adverb (a) yathā kāmaṁ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses SN i.227 Ja i.203 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 113 Pv-a 176; yena kāmaṁ wherever he likes, just as he pleases AN iv.194 Vv i.11 (= icchānurūpaṁ Vv-a 11)-(b) willingly gladly, let it be that, usually with
        4. imperative SN i.222 Ja i.233 Ja iii.147 Ja iv.273 Vv-a 95 kāmaṁ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maṁsa-lohitaṁ “willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body” MN i.481 AN i.50 SN ii.28 Ja i.71 Ja i.110
        5. ˚kāmasā instrumental in same sense Ja iv.320 Ja vi.181
        6. ˚kāmena (instrumental do. Ja v.222 Ja v.226
        7. ˚kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) Ja iii.466 Ja iv.285 Ja iv.365 Ja v.294 vi.563, 589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467
        8. ˚akāmā unwillingly DN i.94 Ja vi.506 involuntarily Ja v.237

          1. ˚kāma adjective desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing in kāma-kāma pleasure-loving Snp 239 (kāme kāmayanto Snp-a 284) Dhp 83 (cp. on this passage Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 39

            1. -41); same explanation as preceding at Dhp-a ii.156 Thag 2, 506
            • atthakāma well-wishing, desirous of good, benevolent Ja i.241 Ja v.504 (anukampakā +) sic lege for attakāmarūpā, MN i.205 iii,155, cp. SN i.44 with ib. 75 AN ii.21 Pv iv.351 Vv-a 11 (in quotation) Pv-a 25 Pv-a 112; mānakāma proud SN i.4 lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish AN ii.240 dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212 dhamma˚ Snp 92 pasaṁsa˚ Snp 825 So frequently in comb. with infinitive, meaning, willing to wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚ dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚ bhojetu˚, etc
            • ˚sakāma (-adjective) willing Ja v.295
            • ˚akāma 1. not desiring, i.e. unwilling: MN ii.181 mayhaṁ akāmāya against my wish (= mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, Ja v.121 Ja v.183 etc. 2. without desire, desireless passionless Snp 445
            • ˚nikkāma same Snp 1131
            1. ˚agga neuter the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment MN ii.43 Vv 163 (= Vv-a 79 attributed to the Paranimmita-vasavattino-devā)
            2. ˚aggi the fire of passion Ja v.487
            3. ˚ajjhosāna
            4. neuter attachment to lust and desire No. 10 in kāmacchanda series ‣See above
            5. ˚ādhikaraṇa having its cause in desire MN i.85 SN i.74
            6. ˚ādhimutta bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures AN iii.168 Ja vi.159
            7. ˚ānusārin pursuing worldly pleasures Ja ii.117
            8. ˚andha blinded by passion Ud 76 = Th 1, 297; -ābhibhū overcoming passions, epithet of the Buddha DN ii.274
            9. ˚ābhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous Pv-a 3
            10. ˚āvacara “having its province in kāma,” belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience DN i.34 (of the soul, explained DN-a 120: cha k˚-devapariyāpanna) Ja i.47 Dhs 1 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101 Vb 324 Vism 88, 372, 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara) 493 (of indriyas), 574 Pv-a 138 -kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma-worlds Dhs 414 418 431; -devatā Pv-a 138 (+ brahmādevatā) and -devā the gods of the pleasure-heavens Ja i.47 Ja v.5 Ja vi.99 Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara-devaloka Ja vi.586 -bhūmi and -loka the plane or world of kāma Ps i.83 Ja vi.99 ‣See also avacara
            11. ˚āvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma Ja vi.99 Sdhp 254 (˚ika)
            12. ˚assāda the relish of sensual pleasures Pv-a 262 DN-a i.89 311
            13. ˚ātura affected by passion, love-sick Ja iii.170
            14. ˚ārāma pleasure-loving AN iv.438 (gihī k-bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā)
            15. ˚ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i.e. kāma-loka) SN i.33 = Sn 177 Snp 306
            16. ˚āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality Ja ii.330
            17. ˚āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality lusts; defined as kāmesu kāma-chando, etc ‣See above k-chando Vb 364 374 Dhs 1097 as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship) Vb 373 Dhs 1096 1448; as three (preceding without diṭṭhi˚) at Iti 49 Vb 364 cp. DN i.84 DN ii.81 DN iii.216 MN i.7
            18. ˚itthi a pleasure-woman, a concubine Vin i.36 Ja i.83 Ja v.490 Ja vi.220
            19. ˚upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures Vv-a 79
            20. ˚upādāna clinging to sensuality arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda DN iii.230 MN i.51 Vb 136 375; Vism 569
            21. ˚ūpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā (including mankind four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals) (2) Nimmāna-ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita-vasavattino devā DN iii.218 Iti 94
            22. ˚ūpasaṁhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā “forms (sounds etc. = any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires” DN i.245 = M i.85; 504 DN ii.265 MN iii.267 Vv-a 127
            23. ˚esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ DN iii.216 270 AN ii.42 Vb 366 Iti 48 SN v.54
            24. ˚ogha the flood of sensual desires AN iii.69 DN iii.230 DN iii.276 Vb 375 Vism 141 Dhs-a 166 Nd2 178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚)
            25. ˚kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27
            26. ˚ kara the fulfilment of one’s desires Ja v.370 (= kāmakiriyā) -karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (literally one with whom one can do as one likes MN i.173 Iti 56
            27. ˚kalala the mud of passions Ja iii.293
            28. ˚kāra the fulfilment of desires Snp 351 = Th 1, 1271 -kārin acting according to one’s own inclination Thag 1 971; or acting willingly DN-a i.71
            29. ˚koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (= kāmaguṇa) Ja iii.382 Ja v.149 DN-a i.121 Pv-a 205
            30. ˚kopa the fury of passion Thag 1, 671
            31. ˚gavesin, pleasure-seeking Dhp 99 = Th 1, 992
            32. ˚gijjha Ja i.210 and -giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love Ja iii.432 Ja v.256 Ja vi.245
            33. ˚giddhimā, same Ja vi.525
            34. ˚giddhin
            35. feminine ˚inī same Mhvs vi.3
            36. ˚guṇā (
            37. plural ) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Defined as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. AN iii.411 DN i.245 DN ii.271 iii.131, 234; Nd2 s.v.; Ps i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma-koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DN-a i.121 where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81

              • In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in “heaven”: saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k-guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72 mentioned as pleasures in Nandana SN i.5 MN i.505 AN iii.40 AN iv.118 in various other connections SN iv.202 Vv 307 Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; ex
              • plural Pv-a 205 by kāma-koṭṭhāsehi) Pv-a 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma-kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā SN v.409 AN v.272 but the same passage with “dibbehi pañcahi k˚-guṇehi samappita …” also refers to earthly pleasures, e.g. SN i.79 SN i.80 (of kings) SN v.342 (of a Cakkavatti) AN ii.125 AN iv.55 AN iv.239 AN v.203 of the soul DN i.36 Vb 379 other passages simply quoting k-g as worldly pleasures are e.g. SN i.16 = Sn 171 SN i.92 SN iv.196. 326 AN iii.69 (itthirūpasmiṁ) DN i.60 DN i.104 Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with “pañc’ ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā …” and is found at various places, e.g. in full at MN i.85 = Nd2 s.v. MN i.454 MN ii.42 iii.114; quoted at MN i.92 AN iii.411 AN iv.415 AN iv.430 AN iv.449 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are gedho pañcannaṁ k˚-guṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ AN iii.312f. asisūnā … adhivac˚ MN i.144
              • nivāpo … adhivac M. i.155; sāvaṭṭo … adhivac˚ Iti 114 In connection with rata & giddha Pv-a 3 pahīna MN iii.295 gathita mucchita MN i.173 mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ “Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures Dhp 371 cittassa vossaggo Vb 370 asantuṭṭha Vb 350 ‣See also Snp 50 Snp 51 Snp 171 Snp 284 Snp 337
              • ˚guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, ap
              • plural to rāga SN ii.99 Ja iv.220 Dhs A.371
              • ˚gedha a craving for pleasure SN i.100 Thag-a 225
              • ˚cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Snp 719
              • ˚citta impure thought Ja ii.214
              • ˚chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) DN i.156 DN i.246 DN iii.234 278 AN i.231 AN iv.457 AN i.134 = Sn 1106 SN i.99 SN v.64 Bdhd 72, 96, 130 Nd2 200 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saṁyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1
              1. -10 at Nd2 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vb 364 Dhs 1114 1153; Nd2 ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at AN ii.10 -as nine (like above omitting gedha) at Vb 374 Dhs 1097 -as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage AN ii.10) at MN i.241 -as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at SN iv.188 -as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170 1486 ‣See also DN i.246 DN iii.234 DN iii.269 Ps i.103, 108; ii.22, 26, 44, 169 Vism 141; Sdhp 459
              2. ˚jāla the net of desires Thag 1, 355
              • ˚taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ DN iii.216 275 Iti 50 Vb 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaṁyutto rāgo) Dhs 1059 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga-sahagatā, tatratatr’ âbhinandinī at Vin i.10 Vb 101 as k-taṇhāhi khajjamāno k-pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno MN i.504 ‣See also DN ii.308 SN i.131 AN ii.11 Thag 2, 140 Ja ii.311 Ja v.451 Mil 318
              • ˚da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; epithet of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) Ja vi.498 Ja vi.525 Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138
              • ˚dada = preceding Pv ii.918 Pv-a 112 Ja vi.508 of a stone Mil 243 Mil 252 of Nibbāna Mil 321 Kh viii.10 esa devamanussānaṁ sabbakāmadado nidhi “this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men” -dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures Ja iv.118
              • ˚duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk Ja v.33 Ja vi.214
              • feminine ˚duhā the cow of plenty Ja iv.20
              • ˚dhātu “element of desire.” i.e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality extending from the Avīci-niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas SN ii.151 Thag 1, 181 also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiṁsā˚, nekkhamma˚ avyāpāda˚, avihiṁsā˚, Vb 86 Nett 97 DN iii.215 Vb 363 (as the first three = akusaladhātus) Vb 404 ‣See also DN iii.275 Thag 1, 378 Ja v.454 Vism 486 (cp Vb 86)
              • ˚nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) AN ii.11 Dhs 1114 etc
              • ˚nidānaṁ
              • accusative adverb as the consequence of passion, through passion, MN i.85 etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage)
              • ˚nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion Iti 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. AN iii.245
              • ˚nissita depending on craving Mil 11
              • ˚nīta led by desire Ja ii.214 Ja ii.215
              • ˚paṅka the mire of lusts Snp 945 Thag 2, 354 Ja v.186 Ja v.256 Ja vi.230 505; Mhbv.3
              • ˚paṭisandhi -sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire MN iii.230
              • ˚pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion MN i.242 MN i.508 SN iv.188 AN i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.) AN ii.11 Vin iii.20 Nd2 374 (comd with ˚palibodha) Dhp-a ii.2 ‣See also kāmacchanda passage
              • ˚pāla the guardian of wishes i.e. benefactor Ja v.221
              • ˚pipāsā thirst for sensuality MN i.242 AN ii.11 and under k˚-chanda
              • ˚bandha Ud 93 and -bandhana the bonds of desire Ja vi.28 also in the sense of k˚-guṇā, q.v
              • ˚bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vb 137 It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma-dhātu AN i.223 It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36 DN iii.216 AN iv.402 Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Snp 176 Snp 1059 Snp 1091 (ex
              • plural Snp-a 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61 ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire-existence Dhp 415 = Sn 639
              • ˚bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures gratification of desires SN i.74 (sāratta—˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā) Thag 2, 464 Iti 94 (—˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures) Ja ii.65
              • ˚bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203 287; ii.136, 149 DN iii.124 DN iii.125 Mil 243 350, as epithet of the kāmûpapatti-beings Iti 94 as ten kinds. AN v.177 as bringing evil, being blameworthy SN i.78 cp. AN iv.281 AN iv.438 SN iv.333f. AN iii.351 Thag 2 486 Ja iii.154 ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k-bhogino (etc.) AN ii.6 cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām'ārāmo kāmarato kāma-sammudita AN iv.439 —˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) AN ii.244
              • ˚bhojin = ˚bhogin Ud 65
              • ˚magga the path of sensuous pleasures Ja v.67
              • ˚matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures Ja vi.231
              • ˚mucchā sensual stupor or languor SN iv.189 AN ii.11 Dhs 1114 etc ‣See kāmacchanda
              • ˚yoga application to sensuous enjoyment one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚ avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) AN ii.10 only the first two at Iti 95 cp. DN iii.230 DN iii.276 SN v.59 Dhs-a 166
              • ˚rata delighting in pleasures Ja v.255
              • ˚rati amorous enjoyment (as arati Thag 2, 58 and 141 Ja i.211 Ja iii.396 Ja iv.107

                • n'atthi nissaraṇaṁ loke kiṁ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī SN i.128 mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaṁ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaṁ sukhan SN i.25 = Dh 27 = Th 1 884
                • ˚rasa the taste of love Ja ii.329 Ja iii.170 Ja v.451
                • ˚rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131 1460 Nett 28 MN i.433f. DN iii.254 DN iii.282 SN i.22 AN iii.411 SN i.13 SN i.53 SN iii.155 Thag 2, 68 77 Pv-a 6 ‣See also k-chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Snp 139 (˚ṁ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k-rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362 Snp-a 205
                • ˚rūpa a form assumed at will Vv-a 80 or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vb 426
                • ˚lāpin talking as one likes DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 yadicchaka-bhāṇin)
                • ˚lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin AN iii.353
                • ˚ loka the world of pleasures = kāmâvacara, q.v. Sdhp 233 Sdhp 261
                • ˚vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean Ja ii.255 iii.409 = Vv 33191 Ja v.157 Vv 163 Vv-a 80 143, 146 -vasika under the influence of passions Ja ii.215
                • ˚vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiṁsā˚ DN iii.215 DN iii.226 MN i.114 AN i.68 Ja i.63 Ja iii.18 Ja iii.375 iv.490; vi.29 Iti 82 115 Vb 362 Mil 310
                • ˚vega the impulse of lust Ja vi.268
                • ˚sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q.v. under sagga Ja i.105 ii.130; iii.258; iv.490; vi.29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumerated; cp. k-âvacara
                • ˚saṅkappa- bahula full of aspirations after pleasure AN iii.145 AN iii.259 DN iii.215
                • ˚saṅga attachment to passion Ud 75
                • ˚saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) DN i.182 DN iii.215 MN ii.262 SN i.126 Vb 363 Thag 1, 1039 virata k˚ āya SN i.53 = Sn 175 -saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga epithet of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust AN iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaṁ virājetvā)
                • ˚sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha MN i.241 SN iv.188 AN ii.10) ‣See k-chanda
                • ˚sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit ‣See kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaṁ ime pañca k-guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati k-sukhaṁ AN iv.415 SN iv.225 varying with … somanassaṁ ayaṁ kāmānaṁ assādo MN i.85 MN i.92 etc
                • As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ AN i.80 as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ṁ pahāya Dhp 346 SN i.77 MN iii.230 Snp 59 ‣See Nd2 s.v ‣See also SN iv.208 MN ii.43 Thag 2, 483 Vv 617 Ja ii.140 Ja iii.396 v.428; kāmasukhallik’ ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment SN iv.330 SN v.421 Vin i.10 DN iii.113 Nett 110; Vism 5, 32
                • ˚sutta name of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn
                • ˚seṭṭhā (
                • plural ) a class of devas DN ii.258
                • ˚sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure Ja ii.180 Ja iii.464
                • ˚sevin adjective to preceding Ja iv.118
                • ˚hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava-section following on kāmaguṇā MN i.86 etc., of wealth SN i.74
                • ˚hetuka caused by passion Thag 2, 355 = Thag-a 243 Ja v.220 Ja v.225
                Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by “icchāyaṁ,” cp. Vedic kāma, kam = Indogermanic *qā
  • Kāmaka
    adjective
    1. only—˚ in negative akāmaka unwilling, undesirous DN i.115 MN i.163 Vin iii.13 Ja iv.31 cp. kāmuka
    from kāma
    Kāmaṇḍaluka
    adjective having a kamaṇḍalu (q.v.) SN iv.312 cp. AN v.263
    Kāmatā
    feminine
    1. desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚ … to be alone Pv-a 43 anattha˚ Ja iv.14 with infinitive Pv-a 65 (gahetu˚) Ja iii.362 (vināsetu˚) Mhvs 5, 260 Dhp-a i.91
    abstract from kāma
    Kāmin
    adjective
    1. having kāma, i.e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one’s own desires in kāma-kāmin realizing all wishes; attribute of beings in one of the Sugatis the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 = Pv-a 16), as a reward for former merit usually in combination with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as “nandino devalokasmiṁ modanti kkāmino” AN ii.62 = It 112 Thag 1, 242 Ja iii.154 Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (ex
    2. plural “as enjoying after their hearts content all pleasures they can wish for”)
    3. giving kāma, i.e. benevolent, fulfilling people’s wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Snp 986-akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Snp 1096 synonym of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd2 4)
    from kāma
    Kāmuka
    adjective-noun
    1. desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover Ja v.306 Mhbv.3
    cp. Sanskrit kāmuka
    Kāmeti
    1. to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Thag 1, 93 Ja iii.154 Ja iv.167 v.480
    • to desire a woman, to be in love with DN i.241 MN ii.40 Ja ii.226 Ja v.425 Ja vi.307 Ja vi.326 etc.
    • past participle kāmita in kāmita-vatthu the desired object Pv-a 119 Vv-a 122
    • gerundive kāmitabba to be desired, desirable Pv-a 16 (variant reading for kañña, better), 73 Vv-a 127 and kāmetabba J. v.156 (= kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaṁ kāmayamānassa Snp 766 (= icchamānassa, etc., Nd1) Ja vi.172 = Nett 69
    • denominative native from kāma
    Kāya
    1. [der. probably from ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sanskrit kāya group, heap, collection, aggregate, body
    • Definitions and synonyms
    • Snp-a 31 gives the following synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn 772), deha, sandeha (Dh 148 = Th 1, 20), nāvā (Dh 369), ratha (SN iv.292) dhaja, vammīka (M i.144), kuṭikā (Th 1, 1); and at Kp-a 38 the following definition: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraṁ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṁ vā kesādīnaṁ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati…. It is equivalent to deha : SN i.27 Pv-a 10 to sarīra Kp-a 38 Pv-a 63 to nikāya (deva˚ DN iii.264 and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti … Nd2 257
    1. Literal meaning.
    1. -1. mahājana-kāya a collection of people, a crowd SN iv.191 SN v.170 Vv-a 78 -bala˚ a great crowd Snp p. 105 Dhp-a i.193 398
    • group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) DN i.56 = M i.517 = SN iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana’s theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense-organs, as vedanā-kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚ phassa˚, etc. SN iii.60 SN iii.61 DN iii.243 DN iii.244 taṇhā DN iii.244 ap
    • plural to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers SN i.72
    • A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at Ja ii.91 viz. camma˚ dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or “bodies” (great masses, substances) of skin, wood copper, iron, sand, water, and planks
    • Var. other combinations: Asura˚ AN i.143 DN iii.7 Ābhassara˚ (“world of radiance”) DN i.17 = iii.29, 84; Deva˚ SN i.27 SN i.30 DN iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā AN i.143 Tāvatiṁsa DN iii.15
    1. Applied meaning.-I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four “great elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (DN i.55). This “heap,” in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought Dhs-a. 311 cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 feminine

      1. I. (Physical).-(a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati-paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection the recognition of the true character of “body” comes first ‣See Vb 193 The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyānupassī … contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: “he ‣Sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth,” etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e.g. DN ii.293 DN ii.294 DN iii.104 DN iii.141 AN iii.323 = v.109 SN iv.111 = v.278 Vb 193 194 Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânu passiveAN iii.142f.; v.109 (under asubhasaññā) Iti 81 cp. kāye aniccânu
      2. passive SN iv.211 and kāyagatā sati

        • This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaṁ … kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā-pettika-sambhavo odana-kummās’ upacayo etc. “this body has form (i.e. is material, visible) is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending to breaking up and decay,” etc., with inferences DN i.55 = SN iii.207 SN ii.94 SN iv.194 SN v.282 SN v.370 DN i.76 209 MN i.144 MN i.500 MN ii.17 AN iv.386 = SN iv.83
        1. (b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) SN ii.231 also at Pv i.83 as depending on nourishment (āhāra-ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64 AN ii.145 (with taṇhā māna, methuna); as needing attention ‣See ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness AN iv.53 SN ii.252 = SN iii.80 SN iii.103 SN iii.136 SN iii.169 cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaṁ yadā kāyaṁ jahant’ imaṁ SN iii.143 As in need of breathing assāsa-passāsa SN v.330 SN v.336 as tired fatigued (kilanta-kāya) kilanta-kāyā kilanta-cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti “tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly” (DN i.20 DN iii.32≈) in other connection Pv-a 43 ‣See also kilanta. kāyo kilanto DN iii.255f.; = AN iv.332 SN v.317 MN i.116 jiṇṇassa me … kāyo na paleti Snp 1144 ātura-kāyo SN iii.1 (cittaṁ anāturaṁ); paripuṇṇa-k˚ suruci sujāto etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Snp 548 Thag 1, 818 cp. mahā-k˚ (of Brahmins) Snp 298 The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsa mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni … Snp p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma-kāyo “author and speaker of Doctrine,” in the same sense Brahma-kāyo “the best body” (i.e. of Doctrine) DN iii.84 (Dialogues of the Buddha iii, 81)
        1. (c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object-kāye anicc’ ânu passive SN iv.211 (and vay’ ânu
        2. passive nirodh’ ânupassī), so also asubhânu
        3. passive Iti 81 kāyañ ca bhindantaṁ ñatvā Iti 69 evaṁdhammo (i.e. a heap of changing elements) AN iii.324 aciraṁ vat ayaṁ kāyo paṭhaviṁ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaṁ va kaliṅgaraṁ Dhp 41 pittaṁ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Snp 198 As bahu-dukkho bahuādīnavo. AN v.109 as anicca dukkha, etc. MN i.500 MN ii.17 kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā SN iv.62 SN v.320 dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi SN ii.94

          • This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: SN v.370 Represented as pūti˚; foul SN i.131 SN iii.120
          • Buddhaghosa at Vism 240 defines kāya as “catu-mahābhūtika pūti-kāya” (cp similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo pūtiko bhavati kāyo)
          1. (d) Similes.-Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under definition & synonym): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) SN iv.83 = AN iv.386 a city (nagara) SN iv.194 a cart (ratha) SN iv.292 an anthill (vammīka) MN i.144 all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ ûpamaṁ kāyaṁ imaṁ viditvā “knowing that the body is like froth” Dhp 46 kumbh’ ûpamaṁ kāyaṁ imaṁ viditvā nagar’ ûpamaṁ cittaṁ idaṁ ṭhapetvā Dhp 40 the body is as fragile as a water-pot
          1. (e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā …, i.e. after death … upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e.g. DN i.82 DN i.107 DN i.143 DN i.162 DN i.245 DN i.247 DN i.252 iii.96, 97, 146, 181, 235 MN i.22 SN i.94 SN iii.241 Dhp 140 Iti 12 14 Ja i.152 Pv-a 27 etc., etc. cp. also iv
          1. II. (Psychological).-As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni) It is ajjhattika as sense (i.e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e.g. kāya-viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā DN i.245 kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā DN iii.226 DN iii.250 DN iii.269 MN i.33 MN ii.42 SN iv.104 SN iv.112 kāyena phusitvā. AN v.11 kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca DN iii.102 Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy the whole being, the “inner sense,” or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti-sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaṁ eva kāyaṁ vivekajena pīti-sukhena abhisandeti … “His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness” DN i.73f. = M i.277 AN ii.41 etc
          • A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i.e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This “peace” of the body (may be translated as “my senses my spirits” in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati DN iii.241 DN iii.288 SN iv.351 MN i.37 AN iii.21 AN iii.285 AN iv.176 AN v.3 AN v.333 Vb 227 Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚ passadhakāyā sukhaṁ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vinaya Texts ii.224: “all my frame will be at peace,” or “individuality” ‣See note) passaddhakāya-sankhāra mentioned at. AN v.29f. is one of the ten ariya-vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi-analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages kāya-chando—˚sneho—˚anvayatā pahīyati MN i.500 ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaṁ virājaye Snp 203 kāye avigata-rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) DN iii.238 = AN iii.249 madhurakajāto viya kāyo SN iii.106 AN iii.69
          1. III. (Ethical).-Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man’s personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas These three; kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action , character in its pregnant sense
          1. Kāya as one of a triad.-Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā : yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taṁ hi tassa sakaṁ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati SN i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaṁsanti pacca sagge pamodati SN i.102
          • So also at AN i.63 Snp 232 Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena SN ii.231 = 271; iv.112. With su- and duccarita the combination is extremely frequent e.g. SN i.71 SN i.72 MN i.22 etc., etc. In other comb we have kāya-(v˚., m˚.) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc-k˚. v˚. m˚. hiṁsati SN i.165 saṁsappati. AN v.289f. kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya-sañcetanā-hetu uppajjati SN ii.39f.; The variations of k-in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'être of kamma: yaṁ.. etarahi kammaṁ karoti kāyena v˚. m˚. idaṁ vuccati navakammaṁ SN iv.132
          • Passages with reference to good works are e.g. DN iii.245 AN i.151 AN v.302f.; (‣ See also Kamma ii.2 b. c.)
          • With reference to evil SN iii.241 SN iii.247 AN i.201 kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaṁ kataṁ Pv ii.13 and passim Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m SN ii.151 pāpaṁ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke SN i.12 = 31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n'atthi dukkaṭaṁ saṁvutaṁ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ Dhp 391 = Nett 183. Kāyena saṁvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saṁvaro manasā saṁvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saṁvaro Dhp 361 = SN i.73 Mil 399 ye ca kāyena v˚. m˚. ca susaṁvutā na te Māravasânugā na te Mārassa paccagū SN i.104 vācānurakkhī manasā susaṁvuto kāyena ca akusalaṁ na kayirā Dhp 281 = Nett 183
          1. Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: SN i.172 (˚gutta) MN i.461 (rakkhita and a˚) Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opposite); Vism 28 (k˚-vacī-kamma) Pv-a 98
          1. Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: AN i.54 Dhp 259 Dhp 391 Snp 206 Snp 407 kāye avītarāgo MN i.101 AN iii.249 AN iv.461f.; ˚-samācāra SN v.354 kāyaṁ paṇidhāya Ps i.175 Vb 244 = 252; bhāvita and a˚ MN i.239 AN i.250 AN iii.106f. cp. : kāya-ppakopaṁ rakkheyya, kāyena saṁvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaṁ hitvā kāyena sucaritaṁ care Dhp 231 Ahiṁsakā ye munayo niccaṁ kāyena saṁvutā Dhp 225
          1. Kāya in combination with citta : ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaṁ cittaṁ … SN v.74 anikaṭṭha-kāyo nikaṭṭha-citto AN ii.137 sāraddha-kāyo sankiliṭṭha-citto. AN v.93 = 95 97; bhāvita-kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño SN iv.111 AN iv.111 AN v.42f. Apakassa kāyaṁ apakassa cittaṁ SN ii.198 Kāya-citta-passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29
          1. -51 In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as = the cetasikas (mental properties or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96 ‣See also combination kilantakāya kilanta-citta under kilamati
          1. IV. (Various).-Kāyena (i.e. “visibly”) aññamaññaṁ passituṁ AN ii.61 as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at AN iv.39 = Nd2 570. The relation between rūpa-kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma-kāya, the mental compound (= vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps i.183 sq ‣See also S ii.24. K. is anattā, i.e. k. has no soul. AN v.109 SN iv.166 n'âyaṁ kāyo tumhākaṁ n'āpi paresaṁ, purāṇaṁ idaṁ kammaṁ … “neither is this body yours, nor anyone else’s: it is (the appearance of) former karma” SN ii.64 SN ii.65 = Nd2 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha-dissamānena SN i.156 Manomaya-kāya a body made by the mind (cp. Vv-a 10 and DN-a i.110 120, 222) according to Buddhaghosa only at the time of jhāna SN v.282f.; manomaya pīti-bhakkha sayaṁpabha DN i.17 = Vv-a 10 manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināya … DN i.77 m˚ sabbanga-paccangī DN i.34 DN i.77 DN i.186 DN i.195
          • Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saṁvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i.e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) SN v.265 DN i.78 = AN i.170 ‣See also S v.283, 284
          • In the various stages of Saṁsāra; kāyaṁ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body SN iv.60 SN iv.400 cp. SN iii.241 (ossaṭṭha-kāya) referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211
          1. ˚aṅga a limb of the body, kāy'angaṁ vāc'angaṁ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (reference to the bhikkhus begging) Ja iii.354 Dhs-a 93 240
          2. ˚ānupassin in combination kāye kāyânu passive “realizing in the body an aggregate” DN ii.94 DN ii.100 DN ii.291f. DN iii.58 77, 141, 221, 276 MN i.56 AN i.39 AN i.296 AN ii.256 AN iii.449 iv.300, 457 sq. SN iv.211 SN v.9 SN v.75 SN v.298 SN v.329f. Vb 193f.; 236 ‣See also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Netechnical term 123 -āyatana the sense of touch DN iii.243 DN iii.280 DN iii.290 Dhs 585 613, 653, 783; -indriya same DN iii.239 Dhs 585 613, 972
          3. ˚ujjukatā straightness of body (+ citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53 277, 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20 -ūpaga going to a (new) body SN ii.24
          4. ˚kamma “bodily action,” deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought ‣See above DN i.250 DN iii.191 DN iii.245 DN iii.279 MN i.415 MN iii.206 AN i.104 iii.6, 9, 141 sq.; v.289 Thag 2, 277 Ps ii.195 Dhs 981 1006 Vb 208 321, 366 Pug 41 Bdhd 69 Dhs-a 68 77, 344
          5. ˚kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46 277 326
          6. ˚kammanta = ˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa. AN v.292 AN v.294 AN v.297 MN i.17
          7. ˚kali “the misfortune of having a body” = this miserable body Thag 2 458, 501 Thag-a 282 291
          8. ˚kasāva bodily impurity or depravity AN i.112
          9. ˚gata “relating to the body, always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above SN i.188 M. iii.92 AN i.44 Snp 340 (cp. Snp-a 343) Thag 1, 468 1225 Ja i.394 Dhp 293 Nett 39 Dhp 299 Mil 248 Mil 336 Mil 393 Vism 111, 197 240 sq
          10. ˚gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saṁsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṁ-saccâbhinivesa DN iii.230 SN v.59 = Dhs 1135 = Vb 374 cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Dhs translation p. 304; -gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Nett 115 119
          11. ˚gutta one who guards his body, i.e. controls his action (+ vacīgutta) SN i.172 = Sn 74
          12. ˚gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295 Ja ii.162
          13. ˚citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease Ja iv.166 ‣See other combinations above
          14. ˚ḍāha fever Vin i.214
          15. ˚tapana chastisement of body, curbing one’s material desires, asceticism Pv-a 98
          16. ˚thāma physical strength Ja iii.114
          17. ˚daratha bodily distress Ja v.397 vi.295
          18. ˚daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76 313
          19. ˚dukkha bodily pain (+ ceto˚) MN iii.288
          20. ˚duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) DN iii.52 DN iii.96 DN iii.111 DN iii.214 AN i.48 Dhp 231 Iti 54 58 Dhs 300 1305; Bdhd 16, 20 -duṭṭhulla unchastity Thag 1, 114
          21. ˚dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses Ja i.276 Ja iv.14 Vv-a 73 Dhp-a iv.85 Bdhd 69
          22. ˚dhātu the “element” of body, i.e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613 Kvu 12 -pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+ vacī˚ mano˚) Dhp 231 = Dhp-a 330
          23. ˚pacālaka
          24. neuter shaking or swaying the body, “swaggering” Vin ii.213
          25. ˚paṭibaddha 1. adjective (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body SN iv.293 attached or bound to the body Ja iii.377 Ja v.254 2.
          26. masculine an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123 iv.214
          27. ˚payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DN-a i.72 = Dhs-a 98
          28. ˚pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation SN v.320 = AN ii.198
          29. ˚parihārika tending or protecting the body DN i.71 = AN ii.209 = Pug 58 Vism 65 (cīvara) DN-a i.207
          30. ˚pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general Dhs-a 306 Bdhd 62, 66, 74 cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 173n, 198n
          31. ˚passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses SN iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above) v.66, 104 Dhs 40 277, 320 Dhs-a 130 Bdhd 16, 19 29
          32. ˚pāgabbhiya “body-forwardness” immodesty lasciviousness, gener. said of women Ja ii.32 Ja v.449
          33. ˚pāgabbhiniya same Ja i.288
          34. ˚pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opposite kāyagelañña apathy Dhs 46 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157
          35. ˚phandita
          36. neuter bodily activity Ja iii.25
          37. ˚baddha fastened to the body, ap
          38. plural to robes DN-a i.207
          39. ˚bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46 51; ii.118 135, 177, 213, 266 MN i.237
          40. ˚bala physical strength Pv-a 30
          41. ˚bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action DN iii.219 MN i.237 cp. Mil 85
          42. ˚macchera “body-selfishness,” pampering the body Thag 1, 1033
          43. ˚mudutā pliability of sense = ˚kammaññatā Dhs 44 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157
          44. ˚muni a sage with regard to action Iti 56
          45. ˚moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action Iti 56 67 DN iii.220 AN i.273 Nd2 514
          46. ˚ratha the “carriagelike” body Ja vi.253
          47. ˚lahutā buoyancy of sense ˚muduta, same loci
          48. ˚vaṅka crookedness of action AN i.112
          49. ˚vikāra change of position of the body Ja iii.354
          50. ˚vijambhana alertness Dhp-a iv.113
          51. ˚viññatti intimation by body, i.e. merely by one’s appearance, appl chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585 636, 654, 844 Dhs-a 82 301 Mil 229 Mil 230 Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70 -viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness DN iii.243 Dhs 556 585, 651, 685, 790 Mil 59 Vb 180 ˚dhātu element of touch-consciousness Dhs 560 Vb 88 Kvu 12
          52. ˚viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+ phoṭṭhabba ‣See above DN i.245 DN ii.281 DN iii.234 MN i.85 MN i.144 Dhs 589 967 1095 Vb 14 Kvu 210 Mil 270
          53. ˚vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, applied to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70 Dhs-a 323
          54. ˚viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism Ja i.289 Dhs-a 165
          55. ˚vūpakāsa ˚viveka DN iii.285 (+ citta˚ “singleness” of heart) -veyyāvacca menial duties Ja i.12 ˚kara a servant Ja ii.334
          56. ˚veyyāvaṭika same Ja vi.418 Snp p. 104 Dhp-a i.27 ˚kamma identical Ja v.317 (= veyyāvacca) Dhs-a 160
          57. ˚saṁsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121 190 Ja vi.566
          58. ˚sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp ˚anupassin) DN iii.105 DN iii.254 MN i.478 = Pug 14 29 MN ii.113 MN iii.45 AN i.74 118; iv.10, 451; v.23; Ps ii.52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387
          59. ˚saṅkhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71 SN ii.40 SN iii.125 SN iv.293 AN i.122 AN ii.158 231; Ps i.184, 186; Vism 530
          60. ˚saṅgaha control of body (+ citta˚) Nett 91
          61. ˚sañcetanā (-hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i.e. impure thoughts AN ii.157 Vism 530 (+ vacī˚, mano˚)
          62. ˚samācāra (good) conduct as regards one’s actions DN ii.279 (+ vacī˚) MN i.272f. ii.113; iii.45 SN v.354 AN iii.186f. -sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29
          63. ˚samphassa the sense of touch ‣See āyatana DN iii.243 SN v.351 Dhs 585 616, 651, 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility DN iii.244 Dhs 445 558
          64. ˚sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚ DN iii.52 DN iii.96 DN iii.111 DN iii.169 DN iii.215 Iti 55 59, 99, Dhs 1306
          65. ˚suci purity of body, i.e. of action (+ vacī˚, ceto˚ AN i.273 Iti 55
          66. ˚soceyya purification of body (+ vacī˚ mano˚) DN iii.219 AN i.271 AN v.264 AN v.266 Iti 55

    Kāyika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the body, i.e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i.e. done by the body (= acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaṁ physical happiness (opposite cetasika˚) SN v.209 AN i.81 dukkhaṁ DN ii.306 MN i.302 (opposite cetasikaṁ); kāyikaṁ (sc. dhammaṁ sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opposite vācasikaṁ Vin ii.248 In comb. with vācasika also at SN i.190 Pug 21 Vism 18 (of anācara) Pv-a 119 (of saṁyama control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to different kinds of amusements Nd2 219 = Snp-a 86 2
    2. ˚ (of devas belonging to the company of-: ˚ DN i.220 gandhabba Pv-a 119 Kayura & Kayura; from kāya
    Kāyūra
    Kāyura;
    1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh'âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana Ja iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106 Ja iii.437 Ja iv.92 Pv iii.93 Vv 362
    2. adj as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia “regis” Ja v.289 = 486
    ‣ See also keyūra, which is the only form in Sanskrit
    Kāyūrin
    adjective
    1. wearing bracelets Pv iii.91
    from last
    Kār
    1. -secondary root of karoti, in denominative and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations.

    Kāra
    1. absolute (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra-paṇṇaka Ja vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiṁ āvahati “even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods” Pv-a 6
    2. ˚kāraka one who performs a religious duty DN i.61 (= DN-a i.170). (b) doing manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaṁ phalaṁ “as you have done so will be the fruit Pv-a 45
    3. (—˚) (a) the production or application of i.e. the state or quality of …: atta˚; one’s own state = ahaṁ kāra, individuality; para˚; the personality of others AN iii.337
    4. citti˚ reflection, thought Pv-a 26 ‣See e.g. andha˚; darkness, sak˚; homage, etc
    5. balakkārena forcibly Pv-a 68
    6. (b) as ttg. the item, i.e. particle letter, sound or word, e.g. ma-kāra the letter m Pv-a 52 ca-kāra the particle ca Pv-a 15 sa-kāra the sound sa Snp-a 23
    7. (c)
    8. adjective-noun cp. kara
      1. one who does handles or deals with: ayakāra iron-smith Mil 331
      from kār-, cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived from kṛ = kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, from kṛ
    Kāraka
    1. (usually—˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu-capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Snp 445 Bdhd 85 sq.; feminine kārikā : veyyāvacca˚ a servant Pv-a 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of (—˚) service: dukkara-kārikā the performance of evil deeds SN i.103 Thag 2, 413 (= Thag-a 267)
    2. ˚agga-kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80

    Kāraṇa
    neuter
    1. (a) a deed, action, performance, especially an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma MN iii.181 ‣See kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaṁ kārāpeti “he makes somebody perform the task.
    2. passive kāraṇaṁ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha-bandhana “the group of five” (not, as Warren translation p. 257 “inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion”), a means of punishment in Niraya (q.v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln translation i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At Dhp-a iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa-dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning “punishment” also at Ja iv.87 (tantarajjukaṁ k˚ṁ katvā), whereas at Ja vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by “maraṇa,” as much as “killing.” Often spelt karaṇa q.v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as
    3. feminine ) at Mil 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaṁ ‣See karaṇa for further reference
    4. Kiṁ kāraṇaṁ ajja kāressati “what task will he impose on me to-day?”. AN v.324 as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ AN i.141 Pv-a 251 Nd2 304iii
    5. As adjective ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ “being obliged to go through the dreadful trial” Pv-a 221
    6. (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ’ âkāraṇā (
    7. plural ) duties great and small Dhp-a i.385 cp. also kāraṇaṁ karoti to try MN i.444
    8. (c) a trick (i.e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) Ja ii.325 (ānañja˚) Mil 201 (ākāsa-gamana˚) 2
    9. (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚-bhūta being the cause of … Pv-a 15 -(b) (intellectual cause, reason Mil 150 Dhp-a i.389 especially as—˚: arodana the reason for not crying Pv-a 63 asocana˚ same, ibid 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81 106. = pariyatti, Dhp-a. 36. = attha, SA on i.215, Snp-a i.238-instrumental kāraṇena by necessity, needs Pv-a 195 tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40-ablative kāranā by means of through, by (= hetu or nissāya) Pv-a 27 imasmā k therefore Pv-a 40
    10. kāraṇaṭṭhā (ex
    11. plural as attha-kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Snp 75 opposite nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid
    12. sakāraṇa
    13. adjective with good reason (of vacana) Pv-a 109
    14. in meaning 1 represented in later Sanskrit by kāraṇā feminine, in meaning 2 = Sanskrit kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause
    Kāraṇika
    1. the meaning ought to be “one who is under a certain obligation” or “one who dispenses certain obligations.” In usu˚ SN ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow-maker fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka
    derived from preceding
    Kāraṇḍava1
    1. chaff, offal, sweepings, figuratively dirt, impurity: yava˚ AN iv.169 (chaff) samaṇa˚ ibid
    • In passage kāraṇḍavaṁ niddhamatha kasambuṁ apakassatha AN iv.172 = Sn 281 = Mil 414 translated by Rh. Davids Miln translation ii.363 “get rid of filth put aside rubbish from you,” ex
    • plural Snp-a 311 by kacavara (q.v.) Rh. D’s note3
    • locative cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given
    of uncertain etymology, cp. karaṇḍa
    Kāraṇḍava2
    1. a sort of duck Vv 358 (explained as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose)
    cp. Sanskrit kāraṇḍava
    Kārā
    feminine
    1. confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75
    cp. Sanskrit kārā
    Kārāpaka
    1. a schemer, inventor Ja vi.333
    from kārāpeti
    Kārāpaṇa
    1. ‣See kāreti
    Kārāpita
    1. made to do Ja vi.374
    past participle of kārāpeti, causative of karoti
    Kārikā
    1. ‣See kāraka
    Kāritā
    1. = kārikā (performance) ‣See pāripūri˚
    Kārin
    1. (—˚) adjective doing: yathāvādī tathākārī “as he says so he does” DN iii.135 Snp 357 ‣See for examples the various compounds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚ dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚ sampajāna˚, etc.

    Kāriya
    adjective
    1. to be done, negative akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good Iti 18
    gerundive of kāreti, causative of karoti
    Kāruñña
    neuter
    1. compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) SN ii.199 AN iii.189 Vism 300 Pv-a 75 Sdhp 509
    from karuṇa
    Kāruññatā
    feminine compassionateness SN i.138
    Kāruṇika
    adjective
    1. compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113 Pv-a 16 Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚; : of great mercy Sdhp 330 Sdhp 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha “the Saviour of great mercy” in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv
    from karuṇa
    Kāreti
    1. (causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.;
    2. past participle kārita; derivation -kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚ Dhp-a i.416 For details ‣See karoti iv. ‣See also kārāpaka & kārāpita.

    Kāla
    1. (and Kāḷa-Preliminary. 1. dark (synonym kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death ghosts, etc
    • There are two etymologies suggestible both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla = Sanskrit kāla, blue-black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which connection *qel in kalanka spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Latin cālīgo mist, fog, darkness-(b) ‣See below, under note
    • Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak morning (cp. English morning = Gothic maúrgins twilight Sanskrit marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming gleaming = twilight), then: time in general, especially a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i.e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem)
    • Note. The definition of colour-expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour-sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. English gleam → gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of “shining” is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well as e.g. by *skei in Sanskrit chāyā = Anglo-Saxon hāēven “blue” (English heaven) and Old High German skīnan, English to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light-reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (= sukāḷa) may readily be called “brilliant.” In the same way kāla, combined with other colour-words of black connotation does not need to mean “black,” but may mean simply a kind of black i.e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. cp. Sanskrit śyāma (dark-grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla = Sanskrit śāra, mottled, speckled = Latin caerulus, black-blue and perhaps caelum “the blue” (cp. heaven). (On k → s cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilamati → śramati, kilissati → ślis˚, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra
    • The definition of kāḷa as jhām’ angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Buddhaghosa and Dhammapāla: Dhs-a 317 and Pv-a 90
    1. 1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumeration of colours Vv 221 ‣See Vv-a 111 na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura-cchavi samano G. “The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin” MN i.246 similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at DN i.193 M. ii.40; kāḷa-sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark-grey
    • Of the dark half of the month ‣See ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe “on the next new moon day” Vin i.176
    • of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī
    • feminine ) Pv-a 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha Pv-a 151
    • In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa-bhūmi darkbrown (i.e. fertile) soil Vin i.48 = ii.209
    1. ˚añjana black collyrium Vini.203
    2. ˚ānusārī black (polished?) Anusāri (“a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood” Vinaya Texts ii.51) Vin i.203 SN iii.156 = v.44. AN v.22
    • ˚ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rhys Davids, Miln translation ii.364; cp. blacksmith → silversmith) Mil 414 Mil 415
    • ˚kañjaka a kind of Asuras Titans DN iii.7 Ja v.187 Pv-a 272
    • ˚kaṇṇī “black-cared, as an unlucky quality. cp. iii.611 Ja i.239 Ja iv.189 v.134, 211; vi.347 Dhp-a i.307 Dhp-a ii.26 the vision of the “black-eared” is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e.g. at Dhp-a iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as “witch” Pv-a 272 Dhp-a iii.38 181 as k-k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen Ja ii.153
    • ˚kaṇṇika preceding
    • ˚kabara spotted, freckled Ja vi.540
    • ˚kesa (adjective with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa-kesa) rare e.g. at Ja vi.578 usually in compound susukāḷa-kesa “having an over-abundance of brilliant hair” said of Gotama This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). cp. the Shamash-Saga which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (= polished, dark) hair (= rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q.v.) in similar combinations (e.g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā) On this feature of the Sun-god and various expressions of it ‣See ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga
    • past participle 33–⁠46

      • The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as or duh˚ in combinations like sudubbala Pv-a 149 sudullabha Vv-a 20 Buddhaghosa already interprets the compound in this way (DN-a i.284 = suṭṭhu-k˚ añjana-vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh-añjana Ja v.155) cp. also siniddha-nīla-mudu-kuñcita-keso Ja i.89 and sukaṇhakaṇha Ja v.202
      • susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: MN ii.66 Modern editors and lexicographers ‣See in susu˚ the Sanskrit śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at MN i.82 = AN ii.22 = J ii.57 MN i.163 = AN i.68 = SN i.9 SN i.117 also in Childers' (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at SN iv.111 the only passages showing the right reading susu-k˚ are DN i.115 MN i.463 Konow under susu Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909 212 has both
      • ˚kokila the black (brown) cuckoo Vv-a 57
      • ˚jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) AN i.253
      • ˚daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attribute to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi.6, 1, 7 and 13)
      • ˚pakkha the dark side, i.e. moonless fortnight of the month AN ii.18—˚ cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight Pv-a 55—˚ ratti a moonless night Vv-a 167 (opposite dosina r
      • ˚meyya a sort of bird Ja vi.539
      • ˚loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Buddhaghosa pakati-loṇa, natural salt)
      • ˚loha “black metal,” iron ore Mil 267
      • ˚valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, 183
      • ˚sīha a special kind of lion Ja iv.208
      • ˚sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405 Mil 413 also name of a Purgatory (nivaya) Ja v.266 ‣See Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 76- 78 -hatthin “black elephant,” an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195
      1. 2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 (= pāto Pv-a 128), kālassa in the morning (genitive of time), early Vv-a 256 cp. paccūsa-kāle at dawn Dhp-a iii.242 Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opposite sāyaṁ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd2 631
      • (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time Dhp-a i.319 evaṁ gacchante kāle as time went on Pv-a 54 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 127 etc
      • kālaṁ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaṁ); kañci kālaṁ some time yet Vv-a 288 ettakaṁ kālaṁ for a long time Pv-a 102
      • kālena kālaṁ (1) from time to time Pv-a 151 Vv-a 255 276; -(2) continuously constantly AN iv.45 Pug 11 (+ samayena samayaṁ) DN i.74 (: but explained at DN-a i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of “every fortnight or every ten days”). kāle in (all) time, always (cp.) Snp 73 (ex
      • plural in Nd2 by niccakāle under sadā; but at Snp-a 128 by phāsu-kālena “in good time”)
      • ˚kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly Vv-a 352 ‣See also cira˚, sabba˚
      • (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity; or (3) time of death, death. (1) Mealtime: Pv-a 25 Vv-a 6 especially in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattaṁ “it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready” DN i.119 = 226; Snp p. 111; and in kālaṁ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner DN i.109 DN i.226 Snp p. 111 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 141 Vv-a 173 -date: kālato from the date or day of …, e.g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day that she first saw her” Vv-a 206 gihī˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day of being a layman Pv-a 13 (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚; favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299 Vin ii.173 kālaṁ jānāti “he knows the proper time” A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities AN ii.140 yassa kālaṁ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i.e. goodbye DN i.106 DN i.189 etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and
      • future
      • kāla˚
      • adjective in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death)
      • O
      • past participle akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune DN i.205 akāla-cārin going (begging at the improper time Snp 386 akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Mil 144-kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opposite) Vin i.199 200 Ja ii.133 Snp 386
      • akāle in the wrong season Vv-a 288
      • kālena in proper time, at the right moment AN ii.140 Snp 326 Snp 387 (= yutta kālena Snp-a 374) Pv i.53 (= ṭhitakālena Pv-a 26) Pug 50 Iti 42 Kp-a 144 (= khaṇena samayena). cp. vikāla. (3) The day as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the “last hour,” cp. , illa dies. So in the meaning of death applied not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc. as well, in phrase kālaṁ karoti “he does his time = he has fulfilled his time” Vin iii.80 Snp 343 Dhp-a i.70 and frequently elsewhere; cp. -kata,-kiriyā
      • As death in kālaṁ kankhati to await the appointed time SN i.187 Snp 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika
      • Other examples for this use of kāla ‣See under bhatta˚, yañña˚ vappa˚
      1. ˚antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while Pv-a 13 na kālantare at once Pv-a 19
      • ˚kata (adjective dead Snp 586 Snp 590 in combination petā kālakatā “the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Snp 807 Pv i.57i.121. Also as kālaṅkata Pv ii.79 Vv 809 Vism 296 -kiriyā death (often combined with maraṇa) MN ii.108 AN i.22 AN i.77 AN i.261 (as bhaddikā, cp. AN iii.293); iv.320 Snp 694 Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence) Dhp-a ii.36 Dhp-a iv.77
      • ˚gata = ˚kata Pv-a 29 Pv-a 40
      • ˚ññū knowing the proper time for … (c dative or
      • locative ) Snp 325 described at AN iv.113f.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) AN iii.148 one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (= preceding + atta˚ puggala˚) DN iii.252 DN iii.283 as quality of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd2 276 Pug 50
      • ˚ññutā
      • noun abstract to prec AN ii.101
      • ˚(p)pavedana announcement of death (-time Thag 1, 563 = J i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248
      • ˚bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time SN v.470
      • ˚vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: DN i.4 DN iii.175 DN-a i.76 AN ii.22 AN ii.209 Pug 58
      • ˚vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity Iti 41
      • ˚sataṁ (˚sahassaṁ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243.

    Kālika
    adjective
    1. belonging to time, in time, as sabba-kālika always in time, Vv 392 with time, i.e. gradual, slowly, delayed SN i.117 = Nd2 645; usually negative akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika SN ii.58 SN i.117 SN iv.41 = 339 = v.343
    • subject to time, i.e. temporal vanishing Pv-a 87

  • unusual, out of season Mil 114 (cp. akāla)

    • ‣ See also tāva-kālika
    from kāla 2
  • Kālīya
    1. a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 ‣See note on p. 381
    Kālusiya
    1. (and Kālussiya neuter

      1. darkness obscurity DN-a i.95 Pv-a 124 (cakkhu˚); figuratively (dosa˚ Vv-a 30
      derived from kalusa, stained, dirty ‣See cognates under kammāsa and kāla
    Kāḷa
    1. ‣See kāla 1
    Kāḷaka
    adjective
    1. black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe AN ii.241 feminine kāḷikā Vv-a 103 -
    2. neuter a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) DN i.110 = AN iv.186 = 210 = 213; vicita˚ (of rice) “with the black grains removed” DN i.105 AN iv.231 Mil 16
    3. vigata˚ (same) AN iii.49

      • A black spot (of hair) Ja v.197 (= kaṇha-r-iva)
      • Figuratively of character Dhp-a iv.172
      from kāḷa
    Kāḷārika
    1. ‣See kaḷārika
    Kāveyya
    neuter
    1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations DN i.11 (= DN-a i.95 kabba-karaṇa)
    2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) AN i.72 = iii.107
      1. ˚matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming SN i.110 SN i.196
      gerundive from kāvyate from kavi poet cp. Sanskrit kāvya
    Kāsa1
    1. a kind of reed, Saccharum spontaneum SN iii.137
    cp. Sanskrit kāśa
    Kāsa2
    1. cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā. AN v.110 = Nd2 3041
    cp. Sanskrit kāsa
    Kāsāya
    1. and Kāsāva adjective [ Sanskrit kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya probably from Sanskrit śyāma or śyāva brown = Pāli sāma with kā = kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown i.e. yellow ‣See further under sāma and cp. kāla 1. Kāsāya as attribute of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the “homeless state” DN i.60 DN i.61 DN i.63 DN i.115 MN ii.67 AN i.107 AN ii.208 AN iv.118 AN iv.274 AN iv.280 Pug 57 Nd2 172. ˚vattha
    2. adjective with yellow robes Snp 64 cp. ’nivattha Ja iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner ‣See Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya-nivāsana Ja iii.41 kāsāviya Ja iv.447) Pv-a 20
    3. ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Snp 487
    4. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287 SN iv.190 = v.53 = 301 Dhp 9 Dhp 10 = Th 1, 969, 970 = J ii.198 = v.50 Mil 11
    5. ˚kaṇṭhā (
    6. plural ) the “yellow necks those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dhp 307 (Dhp-a iii.480) = It 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vb 247 Mil 19
    Kāsāvaka
    1. a yellow robe Dhp-a ii.86
    from kāsāva
    Kāsāviya
    1. one who is dressed in yellow, especially of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya-vattha) Ja iv.447 (= cora-ghātaka Commentary )
    from kāsāva
    Kāsika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108 Ja vi.49 (where to be read kāsik’ uttama for kāsi-kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin AN i.248 iii.50 Pug 34 Mil 2 Dhp-a i.417 Vism 115
    cp. Sanskrit kāśika & in a different sense aḍḍha-kāsika
    Kāsu
    1. a hole; only in compound aṅgārakāsu a cinderhole, a fire-pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders Ja i.232 Mostly found in similes e.g. SN iv.56 SN iv.188 Snp 396 Sdhp 208; and in kāmā angārakās’ ûpamā metaphor AN iv.224 = v.175 ‣See also kāma
    cp. Sanskrit karṣū, from kṛṣ
    Ki˚
    1. ; 2nd. stem of interrogative pronoun (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as genitive kissa.
    2. locative kismiṁ & kiṁhi.; 2. in
    3. neuter kiṁ what? (cp. Latin quid; ending-m besides-d in kad, as Latin quom, tum besides quod id)
    4. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (= Sanskrit kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Latin quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiṁ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc
    Kiṁ
    1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaṁ kiṁ nivāraṇaṁ what is the obstruction? Snp 1032 kiṁ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i.e. what good is your wish? Vv-a 226 kim idaṁ this is what, that is why, therefore, Pv-a 11 often with su in dubitative question: kiṁ sū’ dha vittaṁ purisassa seṭṭhaṁ what then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Snp 181 or with nu : kiṁ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṁ nu kho) Nd2 186
    2. Gen kissa of what? Pv i.91 ii.940 (= kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i.e. why? Snp 1131 Pv ii.81 (= kiṁ nimittaṁ)
    3. instrumental kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Snp 1032
    4. accusative kiṁ : kiṁ kāhasi what will you do? Snp 428 kiṁ āgamma kiṁ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? DN i.13 14, etc.; kiṁ nissita to what purpose Snp 1043
    5. locative kismiṁ in what or what about: kismiṁ vivādo “what is the quarrel about?” DN i.237 or kimhi, e.g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? DN ii.241 (corresponds to ettha = in this). The ṁ of kiṁ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes ki ha = kiṁ ha Kp-a 78, kissa = kiṁ assa Snp 1032 kīdisa (q.v.) = kiṁ disa; kiñci ‣See below = kiṁ cid; kiṁ va a little ‣See kittaka
    6. as interrogative particle, introducing a question = Latin nonne, Latin utrum-an): kim imasmiṁ attabhāve pitaraṁ pucchasi udāhu atīte? “do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one? Pv-a 38 kiṁ nakkhattaṁ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṁ karissasi “Will you take a holiday or will you work?” Vv-a 63
    7. Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiṁ aññatra (with ablative) unless (by), except for Snp 206 ‣See aññatra kin nu kho why but why, why in the world? DN ii.131 Ja ii.159 Dhp-a ii.91 As kimo in kimo nu why then? Ja iii.373 v.479 (= kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana = nonne kim pana bhante addasa? “Have you not seen? DN ii.132 kim pana tvaṁ maññasi what then do you think = do you not think then, that? … Ja i.171
    8. kim aṅga how much more or less, i.e. far more, or far less Mil 274 as kim aṅga pana why then? MN iii.181 Mil 23 Vism 233; kin ti how then? DN ii.74 kin ti te sutaṁ have you not heard? DN i.104 kintikaro kathankaro q.v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci) num-que, nonne; is it not that, rather Ja i.135 (explained in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto)
    9. kiñci in comb. with yaṁ or yad: whatever; in other combination positive: some, negative: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of … Snp 231 n'atthi kiñci there is nothing ‣See under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n'atthi loke there is nothing in this world … Snp 1122
    10. kiñcāpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti “however much they endeavour in this Snp 1080 Ja i.147 Iti 114 Kp-a 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with following pana: (= Latin quamvis kiñcāpi hi … pana although … yet Dhp-a i.391 kiñcâpi with pot…. atha kho although-yet; it may be that-but SN i.72
    11. In composition (˚-) often implying doubt, uncertainty (“what is it, that is so & so?”), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e.g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half-man kimpakka odd-looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiṁsuka.

      1. ˚akkhāyin preaching what? in connection with kiṁ vādin saying what? i.e. holding what views? AN i.62
      • ˚atthaṁ for what purpose Ja i.279
      • ˚atthiya to what purpose Ja iv.239 Mil 19 Vv-a 230 to any purpose, of any use SN v.171
      • ˚abhiñña having what name? Ja vi.126
      • ˚kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚-patissāvin an obedient servant DN i.60 (cp. explanation at DN-a i.168 AN iii.37 AN iv.265f. Thag-a 252
      • ˚karaṇīya business occupation AN iii.113 AN iii.116 AN iii.258 AN v.24 AN v.90 AN v.338
      • ˚kāraṇā (ablative of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i.e. why? Pv-a 25
      • ˚kusalagavesin striving after that which is good MN i.163 = 240
      • ˚jacca of what caste? Snp p. 80
      • ˚nāma of what name? Mil 15 Mil 17 Dhp-a iii.397 (both konāma and kiṁnāma)
      • ˚pakka strange or unknown (doubtful fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i.e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) Ja i.368
      • ˚purisa 1. a wild man of the woods Ja iv.254 Ja vi.272 Ja vi.497
      • = kinnara (q.v.) AN i.77 Ja v.42 Ja v.416
      • feminine kimpurisī Ja v.215 216
      • ˚phala = ˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit Ja i.271
      • ˚rukkha what kind of tree Ja v.203
      • ˚vādin holding what view? AN i.62
      • ˚samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with
      • ˚sīla of what character Snp 324 (= Snp-a 331)
    nt. of rel. pronoun ka
    Kiṁsuka
    name of a tree (creeper), literally “whatever-like,” or “what do you call it,” i.e. strange tree ‣See kiṁ su & kiṁ 3, popular name for the Butea frondosa SN iv.193 (parable of the k.) Ja ii.265 (˚opama-jātaka) v.405; vi.536. Perhaps variant reading at Snp-a 284
    1. ˚puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252 -vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) Ja i.73 (angārā ashes)
    kiṁ + su + ka
    Kikita
    1. (?) dense, thick (?) SS at SN iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat
    Kikī
    1. (m. the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo)
    2. feminine a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile from the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaṁ anurakkhamānā) Ja iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. Snp-a 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti)
    onomat. to sound-root kṛ ‣See note on gala, cp. Sanskrit kṛka-vāku cock, after the cry of the bird
    Kiṅkaṇika
    masculine neuter
    1. a small bell Ja iv.362 Vv-a 12
    = kinkiṇika
    Kiṅkiṇika
    masculine neuter
    1. a small bell Ja iv.259 Ja iv.413 (suvaṇṇa˚) Vv 781 (= kinkiṇi Vv-a 303) Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo)
    1. ˚jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells DN ii.183 Ja i.32 Dhp-a i.274
    onomat. formation from sound participle kiṇi ‣See note on gala
    Kicca
    neuter
    1. adjective that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt something to do Dhp-a i.15 Defined as kātabban ti kiccaṁ kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti Kp-a 218; kattabaṁ karaṇīyaṁ Dhp-a iii.452
    2. neuter (a) duty, obligation, service attention; ceremony, performance. The singular is used collectively as
    3. plural -adjective (—˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due AN ii.67 Dhp 276 Dhp 293 Ja iii.26 Dhp-a i.5
    4. kattabbak˚-karaṇa “the performance of incumbent duties Pv-a 30 idaṁ me kiccaṁ akāsi “he has done me this service” Pv-a 29
    5. In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaṁ tava pitu ˚ṁ karomi “I will do the last duty to your father” Pv-a 274
    6. that which is not (his) duty AN ii.67 Dhp 292 Dhp 293
    7. (b) (as philosophical term function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚-or sampatti r function or property. Compendium 13, 213, note 1; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous
    8. feminine ), 264 (abbhañjana
    9. feminine of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaṁ kiccaṁ), 547 (tad-ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of
    10. feminine Abhdh
    11. sangaha v.8, cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 132 (with reference to Dhs-a 264); kiccato Vism 581
    12. appa˚ having few or no duties Snp 144 (cp. Kp-a 241
    13. ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma Ja i.38
    14. udaka˚ water-performance, ablution DN ii.15
    15. kata˚ one who has performed his duties or mission, i.e. an Arahant Snp 1105 Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231
    16. bahu˚ having many obligations, being very busy AN iii.116 sq
    17. bhatta˚ meal DN-a i.45f. Pv-a 76 frequently in formula kata˚ ‣See kata, cp. kat-annakicca Dāvs i.59
    18. mata˚ funeral rites Pv-a 274
    19. sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i.e. funeral rites Pv-a 74). Note. In compound with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk-kucca (q.v.)
      1. ˚ākiccā plural (kicca + kicca ‣See Trenckner, Notes Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu “they shall serve me in all duties” Dhp 74 (Dhp-a ii.78 = khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu “in small and great duties”) ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid “of all work” Vv-a 298 ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Snp 298 (but explained at Snp-a 319 as “zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done,” taken as kicca akicca cp. akicca)
      2. ˚ādhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89 = iii.164 iii.168; v.101 sq.; 150 sq. ‣See Vin Texts iii.45
      3. ˚kara doing one’s duty SN i.91 Snp 676
      4. ˚karaṇīyāni
      5. plural = kiccākicca, various duties AN iv.87
      6. ˚kārin = kiccakara AN iii.443
      7. gerundive of karoti = Sanskrit kṛtya
    Kiccayatā
    feminine
    1. duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇīyatā) Mil 42
    abstract from last
    Kiccha
    1. adjective (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaṁ idha vutti yaṁ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Snp 676 = parihīnattha, in poverty Pv-a 220 (kicco = kiccho)
    2. (b) difficult to obtain, hard troublesome Dhp 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, Dhp-a 235 = dullabho)
    3. neuter distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaṁ āpanno loko DN ii.30 SN ii.5 ˚ṁ vā so nigacchati “he gets into difficulties (i.e. becomes poor)” Ja v.330 (= dukkhaṁ nigacchati); Vism 314 Dhp-a i.80
    4. Oblique cases used
    5. adverb ially: instr kicchena with difficulty Ja i.147 Ja i.191 (paṭijaggita) v.331 (identical) ablative kicchā identical Ja v.330
    6. akiccha (˚-) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha-lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+ kasira-lābhin) MN i.33 MN i.354 = SN ii.278 = AN ii.23 AN ii.36 AN iii.31 AN iii.114
      1. ˚patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (= Pv-a 199 dukkhappatta) -vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (= dukkhajīvita)
      ‣See kasira
    Kicchati
    1. to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Thag 1, 962 (w. accusative of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Thag 1 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Buddhaghosa at Dhs-a 354 as “ārammaṇaṁ nicchetuṁ asakkonto kicchati kilamati” and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaṁ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati
    2. v. denominative from kiccha, cp. Sanskrit kṛcchrāyate
    Kiñcana
    adjective neuter
    1. only in negative sentences: something, anything From the frequently context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. Defined as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha at DN iii.217 MN i.298 SN iv.297 Vb 368 Nd2 206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at Dhp-a iii.258 (on Dhp 200). Khīṇa-saṁsāro na c'atthi kiñcanaṁ “he has destroyed saṁsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)” Thag 1, 306 n'āhaṁ kassaci kiñcanaṁ tasmiṁ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaṁ n'atthi “I am not part of anything (i.e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything” AN ii.177 akiñcana adjective having nothing Mil 220

      • In special sense “being without a moral stain,” definition at Nd2 5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus frequently an attribute of an Arahant: “yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n'atthi kiñcanaṁ akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇan” Dhp 421 = Sn 645, cp. Thag i.537 kāme akiñcano “not attached to kāma” as epithet of a khīṇāsava. AN v.232f. = 253 sq. Often combined with anādāna: Dhp 421 Snp 620 Snp 645 Snp 1094
      • Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto “having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths” Vin i.36 Snp 176 Snp 1059 -akiñcanaṁ nânupatanti dukkhā “ill does not befall him who has nothing” SN i.23
      • sakiñcana
      • adjective full of worldly attachment Snp 620 = DN-a 246
      kiṁ + cana, equal to kiṁ + ci, indefinite pronoun
    Kiñcikkha
    neuter
    1. a trifle, a small thing: yaṁ vā taṁ vā appamattakaṁ Snp 121 Snp 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa-kiñcikkha-hetu “for the sake of a little gain” AN i.128 = Pug 29 at Pv ii.83 as āmisa-kiñci-hetu (but all variant readings B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) “for some food” (explained at Pv-a 107 kiñci āmisaṁ patthento); -katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at SN iv.118 is evidently corrupt (variant reading ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā)
    1. ˚kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Snp 121 (cp. Snp-a 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya)
    English Mūller Pali Grammar p. 35 explains kiñcid + ka
    Kiñjakkha
    masculine neuter
    1. a filament, especially of the lotus SN iii.130 Ja i.60 Ja i.183 Ja v.39 Vv 221 -vāri˚ Pv ii.120 (= kesara Pv-a 77) in combination with kesara Vv-a 12 111, 175
    cp. Sanskrit kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht; Halāyudha p. 186
    Kiṭaka
    1. only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is ex plural at Pv-a 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti “they become like (hot) copper plates.” doubtful
    Kiṭika
    1. at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saṁsaraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176
    Kiṭṭha
    growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield AN iii.393 (in simile), cp. SN iv.195
    1. ˚āda eating corn AN iii.393
    • ˚ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield SN iv.196
    • ˚sambādha “when the corn is thick,” in ˚samaye near harvest-time MN i.115 (in simile) Ja i.143 (sassa-samaye +), 338
    cp. Sanskrit kṛṣṭa kṛṣ
    Kiṇakiṇāyati
    1. to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati Ja iii.315 ‣See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sanskrit kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one’s teeth) & Prakrit kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber,; Bhagavatī p. 289; also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251 ‣See taṭataṭayati & note on gala
    = kinkiṇāyati, denominative from kinkiṇi, small bell
    Kiṇāti
    1. to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe Ja v.375 absolutive kiṇitvā MN i.384 Ja i.92 Ja i.94 infinitive kiṇituṁ Ja iii.282
    2. krī Vedic kriṇāti
    Kiṇi
    indeclinable a participle, expressing the sound of a small bell: “tink” Dhp-a i.339 (variant reading kiri ‣See also kili and note on gala).
    Kiṇṇa1
    1. ferment, yeast Vin ii.116 Vv-a 73
    cp. Sanskrit kiṇva
    Kiṇṇa2
    1. strewn, scattered, covered; only in compound with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saṁ˚ ‣See also appa˚
    past participle of kirati
    Kiṇha
    adjective
    1. black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā DN i.90 = 116 SN iv.117 MN i.334 MN ii.177 in a moral sense = bad, wicked, with nâlam-ariyā dhammā DN i.163
    ‣See kaṇha DN-a i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho
    Kita
    1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249
    2. soiled, only in compounds kaṇṇa˚; said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48 ii.209; and paṁsu˚; , soiled with dust Vin ii.121 174. Kitava & kitava
    past participle of kṛ; , with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. explained by nivāsane
    Kitava
    kitavā
    1. one who plays false; a cheat; adjective deceitful SN i.24 Ja v.116 117 (a˚); -kitavā at Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) in combination with saṭha also at Ja vi.228 where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaṁ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. explained at Dhp-a iii.375 as taken from fowling kitavāya attabhāvaṁ paṭicchādeti “he hides himself by means of a pretence” (behind sham branches)
    = kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa
    Kittaka
    1. (pronoun interrogative)

      1. how much how great? neuter as
      2. adverb : to what extent?
      3. plural : how many? Vin i.297 k˚ṁ antovassaṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ “how much of the rainy season is left?” Vv-a 66 kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra-bhikkhū? “How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?” Ja i.32

        • As indefinite: a little; kittakaṁ jīvissāmi, Ja v.505 kittakaṁ addhānaṁ a short time Vv-a 117 (= kiṁva ciraṁ)
        from kīva, cp. ettaka & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kettaka (MVastu; i.50) ‣See Trenckner, Note. p. 134
    Kittana
    neuter
    1. praise Pv-a 31 Pv-a 107
    feminine kitteti
    Kittāvatā
    • adverb to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti “in what respect is a man a great man?” Nd2 502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? MN i.292 Kitti & Kitti

    Kitti
    Kittī

    feminine

    1. fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca SN i.25 kittiñ ca sukhañ ca SN i.187 yaso kitti sukhañ ca AN ii.32 yaso kittī ca “fame and renown” Snp 817 (= Nd1 147 where ap plural to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa) Snp 185 (in the same sense) Vv-a 68 (bāhira˚-bhāva becoming known outside) yaso kitti Sdhp 234.

      1. ˚sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DN-a i.146) especially applied to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaṁ Gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo k˚-saddo abbhuggato “the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama”: (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc. DN i.49 DN i.87 DN i.115 DN i.116 DN i.236 SN iv.323 SN iv.374 SN v.352 AN i.57 180; iii.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Mil 284 Applied to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pug 37 the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: AN i.126 iii.269 Pug 36
      • ˚vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise DN iii.191 cp. ˚bhatā Nd1 147
      Vedic kīrti, *qer : cp. Latin carmen hymn of praise The explains of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are; saṁsadde saṁsaddane;
    Kittika
    adjective
    1. famous Vv-a 200
    from kitti
    Kittita
    1. (past participle of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Snp 1057

    Kittima
    adjective
    1. . cp. also kutta, feminine kittimā at Ja iii.70 Ja vi.508 is according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. a misspelling for tittima
    cp. Sanskrit kṛtimā, derived from kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful Thag-a 227 Dhp-a 391 (of nāma) Vv-a 275 (of ratha cleverly constructed)
    Kitteti
    1. to praise, extol Pv-a 124 Pv-a 162
    2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising Pv-a 159
    3. future kittayissati in sense of
    4. aorist Vv 345 (= katheti Vv-a 151)
    5. kittayissāmi I shall relate Snp 1053 Snp 1132 grd: kittanīya to be praised Pv-a 9
    6. aorist akittayi Snp 875 Snp 921
    7. past participle kittita
    v. denominative native from kitti
    Kinnara
    1. a little bird with a head like a man’s] Ja iv.106 Ja iv.254 Ja iv.438 Ja v.47 Ja v.456 Mil 267. Canda kinnara proper name Ja i.91 Ja vi.283 Ja vi.74 feminine kinnarā proper name of a queen Ja v.437f. and kinnarī Thag 2 381 (cp. Thag-a 255), Ja ii.121 (matta-kinnarī viya), 230 iv.432 sq. cp. kimpurisa
    2. kiṁ + nara, literally what-man ‣See kiṁ 3
    Kinnāma
    1. ‣See under kiṁ
    Kipillikā
    feminine & Kipillaka
    • neuter

      1. an ant Snp 602 (kuntha˚) Dhp-a i.360 Ja iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚—˚āni) Mil 272
      • kipillaka Ja i.487 (Burmese variant for pillaka) iv.375 (tamba˚-puṭa) Dhp-a iv.134 (variant reading SS. for T pillaka)
      • cp. kuntha & pipīlikā
      cp. Sanskrit pipīlikā ‣See Trenckner, Notes, p. 108
    Kibbisa
    neuter
    1. wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ṁ karoti to do wrong Snp 246 Sdhp 204 Ja iii.135 or ˚ṁ pasavati. AN v.75 Vin ii.198
    • ˚kata˚
    • adjective having done wrong in akata-kalyāṇo, etc. AN ii.174 and ≈‣ See kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a MN i.39 Pv iv.77 Pv-a 59

      1. ˚kāraka1 = next Ja iii.14
      • ˚kārin, doing wrong Snp 665f. Pv-a 58
      Vedic kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally “stain, dirt.” Buddh Sanskrit kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No 903
    Kibbisaka
    1. = kibbisa Sdhp 290
    Kimi
    m.
    1. a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇhasīsā AN iii.241 Mil 272 DN-a i.199 -As animal of death and putrefaction MN i.507 Ja i.146 Snp 201 esp with reference to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31 Thag 2 439 Pv-a 192 Sdhp 603. As glow-worm MN ii.34 41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Mil 312 In similes: Thag 1, 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, 598. In compound kimi-kula the worm kind (genus worm) Mil 100 Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314
    Vedic kṛmi
    Kimina
    adjective
    1. covered with worms Ja v.270
    from kimi
    Kira
    1. (& Kila) (adverb )

      1. emphatic: really, truly, surely
      2. presumptive (with present or
      3. future ) I should think one would expect
      4. narrative (with

        • aorist ): now, then, you know (Latin at, G. aber). kira in continuous story is what “iti” is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed It is
        • aorist ic in character (cp. Sanskrit sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: “people say” or “I have heard”: kirasaddo anussavane: “kira refers to a report by hearsay” Pv-a 103 kira-saddo anussav'atthe Ja i.158 Vv-a 322 are conventional and one-sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for Ja i.158 Ja ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto).

          1. -1. mahantaṁ kira Bārāṇasirajjaṁ “the kingdom of B. is truly great Ja i.126 attā hi kira duddamo “self is difficult to subdue we know” Dhp 159 amoghaṁ kira me puṭṭhaṁ Snp 356
          • na kira surely not Snp 840 Ja i.158
          • esā kira Visākhā nāma “that I presume is the Visākhā (of whom we have heard) Dhp-a i.399 petā hi kira jānanti “the petas, I should say, will know” Pv ii.710 evaṁ kira Uttare? “I suppose this is so, Uttarā” Vv-a 69 evaṁ kira saggaṁ gamissatha “thus you will surely go to Heaven” Vv 828 “I hear” Dhp-a i.392

        • atīte kira with

          • aorist once upon a time … Pv-a 46 etc.; so kira pubbe … akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made … Ja i.125 sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her … Pv-a 46 cp. Ja i.195 etc
          Vedic kila
    Kiraṇa

    neuter

    1. an occupation, place of work, workshop Ja iv.223 cp. kita & kittima.; 2. from kṛ; , kirati to scatter, cp. past participle kiṇṇa
      1. scattering effusion (of sun rays), effulgence Vv-a 169 199
      from kṛ; , karoti to do
  • Kirati
    1. to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in compounds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚ ‣See also past participle, kiṇṇa2
    2. kīr
    Kirāta
    (& kirāṭa)
    1. a man of a tribe of junglemen, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DN-a i.148 ‣See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. cp. also apakiritūna & okirati; 2, okiraṇa
    • A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat ‣See kirāsa & kerāṭika
    probably dialectical
    Kirāsa
    adjective
    1. false, fraudulent Ja iv.223 (= kerāṭika)
    a by-form of kirāṭa
    Kiriyati
    1. to be affected or moved Vism. 318. Kiriya, Kiriya & Kriya
    passive of kirati or karoti
    Kiriya, Kiriyā
    Kriyā
    1. (n.)-(a) (—˚) action, performance, deed; the doing = fulfilment cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) SN iii.149 SN iv.93 Snp 454 Snp 725 -kāla˚ “fulfilment of one’s time” i.e. death SN iii.122 Pv i.1012 Snp 694 Pug 17 kusala˚ performance of good actions SN i.101 SN v.456 dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts Pv-a 123 pāpa˚ commission of sin Pug 19 = 23; puñña˚ the performance of good works SN i.87 = 89 = AN iii.48 a Pv-a 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival Pv-a 86 massu-kiriyā the dressing of the beard Ja iii.314 (cp m-karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization ‣See s. v -akiriyā the non-performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa = veramaṇī) Ja iii.530 Vb 285 (b) an act in a special sense = promise, vow, dedication intention, pledge: Pv-a 18 justice: Mil 171 kiriyaṁ bhindati to break one’s vow Mil 206
    2. (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non-
    3. causative an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rhys Davids in Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation xciii.), inoperative ‣See Compendium 19. In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā German sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali n'atthi kammaṁ, n'atthi kiriyaṁ n'atthi viriyan ti there is no karma, no after-effect and no vigour in this world AN i.286 (different at DN i.53); n'atthi kiriyā it does not matter MN i.405
    4. adjective (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as definition of avyākatā dhammā Vb 106 182 = 302 = Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vb 268 = 281 Dhs-a 388
    5. (b) indecisive, in akiriyaṁ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively DN i.53 and≈
      1. ˚pada (ttg.) the verb (i.e. that which supplies the action) Vv-a 315
      • ˚vāda
      • adjective promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combined with kammavāda (q.v.) also ˚vādin: DN i.115 (of Gotama) AN i.62 Vin i.71
      • denying the difference between merit & demerit AN iv.174 = Vin i.234 242, Vin iii.2 AN iv.180f. SN iii.73 (+ natthikavāda)
      • ˚vādin adjective to preceding AN i.62
      • ˚hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424f.
      abstract from karoti
    Kiriyatā
    feminine
    1. the performance of (—˚), state of, etc ‣See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚
    abstract from last
    Kirīṭin
    adjective enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (= veṭhitasīsa).
    Kila
    1. ‣See kili (the sound click)
    Kilañjā
    feminine a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating tassa gandhabbaṁ kilañjā-kaṇḍūvanaṁ viya hutvā.. Ja ii.249 “his music was like the scraping of a mat” suvaṇṇa-kilañjā a gilt mat Ja iv.212 As a fascine used in making a road: Dhp-a i.442 as a screen (combined with chatta, fan) Pv-a 127 as faggots: Ja i.158 Mil 287 as a crate or basket, used by distillers: MN i.228 374 (soṇḍikā-kilañjā) (cp. the translation under soṇḍa in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake SN i.106 (snake = māra).
    Kilanta
    1. tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body Pv-a 43 Vv-a 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind DN i.20 iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta + , of the waning of the gods) or both ˚kāya-citta Pv iii.23; opposite akilanta-kāya-citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind
    past participle of kilamati
    Kilama
    1. fatigue Ja v.397 (= kilantabhāva)
    spelt klama, from klam
    Kilamati
    1. to go short of, to be in want of instrumental Dhp-a ii.79 na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15 87; iv.23 sq
    2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery Pv-a 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress);
    3. future kilamissāmi Pv-a 76 cp. pari˚
    4. pp kilanta
    Sanskrit klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as “sleepy,” and Latin clīnāre clemens. To k → ś cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilissati → śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase; kilam by gilāne.
    Kilamatha
    1. tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion MN i.168 AN ii.199 SN i.136 as kāya˚, citta˚ SN v.128 as daratha˚ AN iii.238 Pv-a 23 as niddā˚ AN ii.48 AN ii.50
    from klam, in formation cp. samatha
    Kilamita
    1. worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83
    past participle of kilameti
    Kilameti
    1. to be tired or fatigued Ja i.115 ppr. kilamayanto DN i.52 past participle kilamita
    2. denominative from kilama
    Kilāsa
    1. a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumerated under the various diseases (ābādhā together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271 AN v.110 Nd2 3041. Kilasika & iya;
    cp. Sanskrit kilāsa
    Kilāsika
    ˚iya;
    adjective
    1. afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combination as kilāsa, Vin i.93 Kvu 31 (˚iya)
    from last
    Kilāsu
    1. exhausted, tired of (c. dative or infinitive) Vin iii.8
    • untiring in (c. dative or
    • accusative ) SN i.47 SN v.162 Ja i.109 Mil 382
    from sram, cp. kilamatha. English Müller Pali Grammar 38 = glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna
    Kili
    (sometimes kila
    1. indeclinable the sound “click,” of the noise of a trap when shutting Ja i.243 Ja ii.363 Ja ii.397 (as “kilī”)
    2. Also repeated “kilikilī ti” click, click Ja i.70
    3. as
    4. noun feminine tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliṁ karoti to tinkle Ja v.203
    onomat. from sound-root kḷ
    Kilikilāyati
    1. to tinkle Ja v.206 (frequently from kili or denominative native from kilikilā; cp. kilakilā “shouting for joy” Avs i.48 and in compound hāhākārakilakilā “shouting hā-hā and hail-hail” ibid. i.67 MVastu iii.312 and Divy 459) ‣See also kiṇakiṇāyati Note.-Kil is one of the variations of the sound-imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Latin cal-are, Old High German hell-an (cp. Sanskrit krandati?) also Gr , Latin clango, Gothic hlahjan (“laugh”) and in Sanskrit kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sanskrit ululī, ulūka (owl), Latin ululare ‣See also the cognate qer under kitti
    2. denominative from kili with reduplication
    Kilijjati

    1. to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered) Snp 671 (gloss for kilissati, explained at Snp-a 481 by pūti hoti)- past participle kilinna ‣See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to “disinfect”)
    2. med- passive of kilid = Sanskrit klid, to be wet. probably = śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning “to get wet, to be soiled” only in
    3. past participle kilinna

      • The Dhtm (199), however explains k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in Pali we have a confusion between klid kliś in a meaning which differs from Sanskrit
    Kiliṭṭha
    1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs Ja i.129 of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha clothes Dhp-a ii.261 of pāvāra-puppha, mango blossom Kp-a 58 = Vism 258
    2. unclean, lustful (morally bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i.e. cohabitation Ja iv.190 Pv-a 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Mil 250
    pp of kilissati
    Kilinna
    1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37 Ja i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚) DN-a i.284 (assu˚) Vv-a 67 (seda˚)
    2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna-sarīra
    3. adjective with an inflamed body (i.e. suffering from a skin-disease), which is Buddhaghosa’s explanation of okilinī ‣See under okiraṇa
    past participle of kilijjati
    Kilissati
    1. [ Sanskrit kliśyati = kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. Pali kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sanskrit śleṣma, slime. Same root as Anglo-Saxon slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed with reference to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) explanation by upatāpe. 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure Iti 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva) Thag 1, 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps i.130. Kilisseyya Dhp 158 (explained as nindaṁ labhati) to do wrong cp. pari˚
    Kilissana
    neuter getting dirty, staining Ja i.8
    Kilesa
    (and klesa
    1. stain, soil, impurity, figuratively affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices passions.

      1. 1. Kilesa as obstacle ‣See ˚āvaraṇa, ˚-sampayutta ˚-vippayutta, ˚pahāna Ps i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso “one whose passions are broken up Vḅh 246, Pv-a 51 upasanta kileso “one whose passions are calmed” Pv-a 230 no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaṁ vihāne Snp 348 pariyodapeyya attānaṁ cittaklesehi paṇḍito SN v.24 = AN v.232 AN v.253 = Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487; kilesa + khandha: Ps i.69 72; ii.36, 140; cp. Vb 44 68; kilesa + saṁsāra Pv-a 7 kammaṁ kilesā hetu saṁsārassa Nett 113, cp. 191. 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combination of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa “clinging to existence, false ideas and lust” ‣See Nd2 s.v. taṇhā v.
      • In the same function it stands with rāga, viz rāga dosa moha kilesa, i.e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust ‣See Nd2 s.v. rāga ii., cp. Dhs 982 1006. The grouping as dasa kilesa-vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaṁ uddhaccaṁ ahirikaṁ anottappaṁ Dhs 1548 = Vb 341 Vism 683; mentioned at Ps i.130
      • These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚-vatthūni at Vb 385
      • As three kilesas (past, present and
      • future at Ps ii.217

    2. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil ‣See Nd2 s.v. dukkha ii.. Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Nett 191.

      1. ˚āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vb 342 Pug 13 Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā identical AN iii.436
      • ˚kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81
      • ˚paripantha danger of lust Ja vi.57
      • ˚pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92f. iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131
      • ˚puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni Nett 113, 114; 116 sq
      • ˚bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Nett 2, 192; there are four mentioned at Nett 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saṁyojana˚ upādāna˚
      • ˚māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire Dhp-a i.317 (in ex
      • plural of Māra)
      • ˚vatthūni (
      • plural ) the (10) divisions of kilesa ‣See above Dhs 1229 1548; Vism 20
      • ˚vinaya the discipline of lust Nett 22 -vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555
      • ˚sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles) Vb 18 = 30 = 44 = 56, 68, 80, 96, 120, 323
      from kilissati
    Kileseti
    1. to become soiled or stained (figuratively): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp 364
    v. denominative native from kilesa
    Kiloma
    1. at Ja iii.49 taken as synonym of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maṁsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma-vācā)
    = next?
    Kilomaka
    1. the pleura MN i.185 = Kh iii Nett 77 = Vb 193 Ja iv.292 Mil 26 Discussed in detail at Vism 257, 357
    = Sanskrit kloman, the right lung, cp. Greek , Latin pulmo
    Kisa
    adjective
    1. lean, haggard, emaciated, opposite thūla fat (Vv-a 103). As Ep of ascetics Snp 165 Dhp 395 = Th 1, 243; especially as epithet of petas: Pv ii.113 Snp 426 Snp 585 Sdhp 101 Mil 303 For phrase kisa-dhamani-santhata ‣See the latter
    Sanskrit kṛśa, perhaps to Latin gracilis, slim
    Kisaka
    1. = kisa Vin i.36 = J i.83; feminine kisikā Thag 2, 27

    Kissati
    1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry Ja vi.495 (preterite mā kisittha Commentary mā kisā bhava)
    2. passive of kassati, kṛṣ
      1. ‣See pari˚
      denominative native from kisa
    Kissava
    1. in negative akissava at SN i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The translation gives “without wisdom.” Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required?
    Kīṭa
    neuter
    1. a general term for insect Dhp-a i.187 usually in combination with paṭanga, beetle (moth? MN iii.168 (with puḷava) Snp 602 Ja vi.208 Mil 272 (˚vaṇṇa) Pv-a 67 Vism 115. kīṭa at Ja v.373 means a kind of shield (= cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should probably be kheṭa
    cp. Sanskrit kīṭa
    Kīṭaka
    neuter one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188
    Kīta
    1. bought Ja i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185
    past participle of kiṇāti
    Kīdisa
    (interrogative adjective)
    1. what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Snp 836 Snp 1089 (= kiṁ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 51 Vv-a 76)
    • As proper name SN iv.193
    • ‣ See also Kīrisa
    cp. Sanskrit kīdṛś = kiṁ dṛśa
    Kīra
    1. a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi)
    cp. Sanskrit kīra
    Kīrisa
    1. = kīdisa Thag 2, 385 (cp. Thag-a 256)
    Kīla
    1. = a pin, a stake ‣See Khīla
    Kīḷati
    1. to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 (= indriyāni paricarāmi Pv-a 77) DN ii.196 Ja v.38 Thag 2, 147 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 189; -c. accusative to celebrate nakkhattaṁ Ja i.50 Vv-a 63 Pv-a 73 Thag-a 137 chaṇaṁ Dhp-a iii.100
    2. past participle kīḷita.
    3. causative II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train Ja ii.267 (sappaṁ to train or tame a snake)
    4. Sanskrit krīḍati
    Kīḷanaka
    1. a plaything, a toy Thag 2, 384 (with reference to the moon)
    from kīḷati
    Kīḷanā
    feminine [from same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18 Pv-a 67 Dhp-a iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration).
    Kīḷā
    feminine
    1. play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaṁ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water Pv-a 189
    • uyyāna˚ amusement in the park Dhp-a i.220 iv.3; nakkhatta-kīḷaṁ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i.e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) Vv-a 109 Thag-a 137 sāla-kīḷā sport in the sāla woods Ja v.38 kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun Pv-a 215-cp. kīḷikā
    1. ˚goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254
    2. ˚goḷaka id Vism 256 (cp. Kp-a 53) Thag-a 255
    • ˚pasuta bent on play Ja i.58
    • ˚bhaṇḍaka
    • neuter toy Mil 229 (= kīḷāpanaka MN i.266)
    • ˚maṇḍala play-circle, children’s games, playground Ja vi.332 Dhp-a iii.146
    • ˚sālā playhouse Ja vi.332
    from krīḍ, cp. Sanskrit krīḍā
    Kīḷāpanaka
    1. 1. neuter a plaything, toy MN i.266 MN i.384 a list given at. AN v.203
    2. adjective one who makes play Ja iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake-trainer, cp. sappaṁ kīḷāpeti Ja ii.267)
    Kīḷikā
    feminine play, sport, amusement; always—˚, like kumāra˚ DN ii.196 uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden Ja iii.275 Ja iv.23 Ja iv.390 udaka˚ Thag-a 186
    Kīḷita
    1. played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) AN iv.55 (hasitalapita˚) Pv-a 76 (sādhu˚). neuter amusement, sport celebration MN i.229 (kīḷita-jātaṁ kīḷati). cp. sahapaṁsu˚˚ ‣See also keḷi & khiḍḍā.; Kivant & Kiva; past participle of kīḷati
    Kīvant
    Kīva;
    1. (interrogative adjective and adverb )

      1. how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp rel. yāva). As indefinite: Kīvanto tattha bheravā “however great the terrors” Snp 959
      • Kīva kaṭuka how painful? Pv-a 226 k˚-ciraṁ how long? Pj and Snp 1004 k˚-dīghaṁ same Snp p. 126; k˚ dūre how far? Mil 16 Dhp-a i.386 k˚-mahantaṁ how big? Dhp-a i.29 Vv-a 325 k˚ bahuṁ how much? Dhp-a iv.193
      Sanskrit kiyant and kīvant; formed from interrogative stem ki
    Kīvatika
    (interrogative adjective)
    1. of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus Vin i.117
    from last
    Ku
    1. (kud-and kum-) 3rd stem of interrog. pronoun ka (on form and meaning cp. kad; = Latin* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara 1. Kuto where from? whence? Dhp 62 k˚bhayaṁ whence i.e. why fear? Dhp 212f. Snp 270 Snp 862 Pv ii.69; how? Ja vi.330 with nu whence or why then Snp 1049 (= kacci ssu Nd2 s.v.). kut-ettha = kuto ettha J. i.53

      • na kuto from nowhere Snp 35 Snp 919 a-kuto id in akutobhaya “with nothing to fear from anywhere i.e. with no reason for fear SN i.192 Thag 1, 510 Thag 11 333 Snp 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (identical) kuto-ja arisen from where? Snp 270 —˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Snp 270 Snp 864f.
      1. 2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pug 27 indefinite kudācanaṁ : at any time, na k˚ never Snp 221 (ex plural by soḷasim pi kalaṁ Snp-a 277) Dhp 5 Dhp 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto k˚ “by walking, the end of the world can never be reached” SN i.62

        1. 3. Kuva, kva, where? Snp 970 (kuvaṁ & kuva) indef kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upamā kvaci “of whom (i.e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere” Snp 1137 cp. 218, 395; explained by Nd2 like kuhiñci. kuvaṁ at DN iii.183
        1. 4. Kutha (kudha) where? Ja v.485 (= kuhiṁ)
        1. 5. Kuhiṁ (= kuhaṁ, cp. Sanskrit kuha) where? whither Often with future : k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Snp 411 ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaṁ ettakaṁ divasaṁ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days Pv-a 6 Pv-a 13; 42; indefinite kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚ nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi taṇhā k˚ loke “he has no desire for anything in this world” Snp 496 Snp 783 Snp 1048‣See Nd on 783 & 1048 = kimhici Dhp 180

    Kukutthaka
    1. (Burmese variant kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird Ja vi.539 Kern (Toevoegselen s.v.) takes it to be Sanskrit kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus
    Kukku
    1. a measure of length SN v.445 = AN iv.404 and in kukkukata Vin i.255 = v.172 (cp however Vinaya Texts i.154, on Buddhaghosa’s note = temporary)
    cp. Sanskrit kiṣku?
    Kukkuka
    1. “of the kukku-measure,” to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone-pillar, 16 k’s high SN v.445 AN iv.404
    • akukkuka-jāta of enormous height (of a tree) MN i.233 = SN iii.141 (text: akukkajāta = iv.167 AN ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta. Kern (Toevoegselen s.v. kukka) takes it to mean “grown crooked, a˚ the opposite
    from kukku
    Kukkucca
    1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Definition kucchitaṁ kataṁ kukataṁ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṁ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; -Various explanations in Nd2 on Snp 1106 = Dhs 1160 in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha-pada˚ Ja i.119 = DN-a i.42 (in combination with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone Ja ii.142
    2. remorse, scruple worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in connection with uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q.v.) Vin i.49 Vin iv.70 DN i.246 SN i.99 MN i.437 AN i.134 = Sn 1106 AN i.282 Snp 925 Nd2 379 Dhp-a iii.483 Dhp-a iv.88 Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96
    3. na kiñci k˚ṁ na koci vippaṭissāreti “has nobody any remorse?” SN iii.120 = iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ṁ vinodetuṁ. AN v.72 k. pahāya DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pug 59 chinnakukkucca
    4. adjective free from remorse MN i.108 khīṇāsava k˚-vūpasanta SN i.167 = Sn 82
    5. akukkucca
    6. adjective free from worry, having no remorse Snp 850 Kukkuccaṁ kurute (c. genitive) to be scrupulous about Ja i.377 kariṁsu Dhp-a iv.88 cp. kukkuccaṁ āpajjati (ex
    7. plural by sankati Ja iii.66
    kud-kicca
    Kukkuccaka
    adjective conscientious (too) scrupulous, “faithful in little” Ja i.376 Vv-a 319
    Kukkuccāyati
    1. to feel remorse, to worry AN i.85 Pug 26 Derived are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta = kukkucca in definition at Dhs 1160 = Nd2 s.v
    denominative from kukkucca
    Kukkucciya
    1. = kukkucca Snp 972
    Kukkuṭa
    1. (Sanskrit kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic = Latin cucurio, German kikeriki) a cock Mil 363 Ja iv.58 Vv-a 163 feminine kukkuṭī a hen Dhp-a i.48 Thag-a 255 in simile MN i.104 = 357 = AN iv.125f. 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako).

      1. ˚aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen’s egg Vism 261
      2. ˚patta the wing of a cock AN iv.47
      • ˚potaka a chicken, in simile MN i.104 = 357 = AN iv.126 = 176
      • ˚yuddha a cock fight DN i.6
      • ˚lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock DN i.9
      • ˚sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) AN i.159 = DN iii.75 cp. Divy 316 and ‣See Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 38
      • ˚sūkarā (
      • plural ) cocks and pigs DN i.5 AN ii.209 = Pug 58 DN i.141 AN ii.42f. Iti 36

    Kukkura
    1. [ Sanskrit kurkura, or is it ku-krura? cp. kurūra) a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound AN iii.389 v.271 Ja i.175f.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes SN iv.198 MN i.364 AN iv.377 feminine kukkurinī Mil 67

      1. ˚vatika adjective imitating a dog, cynic MN i.387 (+ dukkara kāraka; also as k˚-vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa) DN iii.6 DN iii.7 Nett 99 (+ govatika
      2. ˚saṅgha a pack of hounds AN iii.75

    Kukkuḷa
    hot ashes, embers SN iii.177 Ja ii.134 Kvu 208 cp. trans. 127; with reference to Purgatory SN i.209 Ja v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24.
    1. ˚vassa a shower of hot ashes Ja i.73 Ja iv.389 (variant reading )
    taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 39; occurs also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as Name of a Purgatory e.g. MVastu i.6; iii.369, 455. The classical Sanskrit form is kukūla
    Kukkusa
    1. 1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 ‣See Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaṁ mattikaṁ = kuṇḍakañ c'eva mattikañ ca.adjective variegated, spotted Ja vi.539 (= kaḷakabara 540; variant reading B. ukkusa)
    Kuṅkuma
    neuter
    1. saffron Mil 382 Vism 241
    cp. Sanskrit kunkuma
    Kuṅkumin
    adjective fidgety Ja v.435
    Kuṅkumiya
    neuter noise, tumult Ja v.437 (= kolāhala).
    Kucchi
    feminine
    1. a cavity, especially the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227 Ja v.416 jāla˚ the hollow of the net Ja i.210 As womb frequent, e.g. mātu˚ Ja i.149 DN-a i.224 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 111 Pv-a 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha Ja i.50 Ja ii.2 Ja vi.482 Dhp-a ii.261
    1. ˚ḍāha enteric fever Dhp-a i.182
    • ˚parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly DN i.71 = Pug 58
    • ˚roga abdominal trouble Ja i.243
    • ˚vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301
    • ˚vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646 = 740 = 875
    Sanskrit kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa
    Kucchita
    1. contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms Vv-a 215 in definition of kāya Kp-a 38 in definition of kusala Dhs-a 39 Vv-a 169 in definition of kukkucca Vism 470; in definition of paṁsu-kūla Vism 60
    Sanskrit kutsita, past participle of kutsāy
    Kucchimant
    adjective
    1. pregnant Ja v.181
    from kucchi
    Kujati
    1. in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked?
    or kujjati? ‣See kujja
    Kujana
    adjective
    1. only negative ; not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma SN i.33
    from kujati
    Kujja
    adjective
    1. literally “bent,” as nt kujjaṁ in ajjhena-kujjaṁ Snp 242 crookedness, deceit fraud (cp. Snp-a 286 kūṭa?). cp. kujati & khujja ‣See also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚
    Sanskrit kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Latin cubare, Middle High German hogger, humpback
    Kujjhati
    1. to be angry with dative AN i.283 = Pug 32 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataṁ, “don't be angry” SN i.240 mā kujjhi Ja iii.22 na kujjheyya Dh. 224; absolutive kujjhitvā Pv-a 117 gerundive kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11 cp. Vedic krunhyate, from krudh
    Kujjhana
    adjective
    1. angry = kodhana Vv-a 71 Pug AN 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā feminine anger, irritation together with kujjhitattaṁ in definition of kodha Dhs 1060 Pug 18 22
    2. from kujjhati
    Kujjhāpana
    neuter
    1. being angry at Dhp-a iv.182
    causative formation from kujjhati
    Kuñca
    neuter
    1. ; all of crowing noise; from sound-root kṛ ‣See note on gala a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only)-kāra cackling (of a hen) Thag-a 255
    • ˚nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) Ja iii.114
    kruñc, cp. Sanskrit krośati, Pali koñca, Latin crocio, cornix, corvus.
    Kuñcikā
    feminine a key, Buddhaghosa on Commentary V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148 Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key) DN-a i.200 207, 252 Dhp-a ii.143
    Kuñcita
    adjective
    1. bent, crooked Ja i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair) v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: explained on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102
    past participle of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sanskrit kruñcati, to be crooked, Latin crux, Old High German hrukki, also Sanskrit kuñcita bent
    Kuñja
    masculine a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhammapāla in explanation of kuñjara at Vv-a 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati and Pv-a 57 (kuṁ pathaviṁ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraṁ aticarati kuñjaro ti)
  • ˚nadī˚; a river glen DN-a i.209
  • Kuñjara
    masculine
    1. an elephant Vin ii.195 MN i.229 MN i.375 SN i.157 Dhp 322 Dhp 324 Dhp 327 Ja v.336 Vv 51 Pv i.113 Dhp-a iv.4 Thag-a 252 Mil 245
    • deva˚ chief of the gods epithet of Sakka Vv 477 Ja v.158
    1. ˚vara a state elephant Vv-a 181
    • ˚sālā an elephant’s stable Dhp-a iv.203
    Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant’s trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sanskrit of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚
    Kuṭa
    1. a pitcher Vv 509 Ja i.120 Dhp-a ii.19 261; iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at Ja i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at Dhs-a 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge-hammer
    Kuṭaka
    1. a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka SN ii.258
    Kuṭaja
    1. a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45)
    Kuṭati
    1. ‣See paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in different sense kuṭṭa; 1
    Kuṭava
    1. (variant reading Sinhalese kū˚; Burmese kulāvaka) a nest Ja iii.74 variant reading at Dhp-a ii.23 (for kuṭikā)
    Kuṭikā
    feminine from kuṭī
    1. a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35 41, 42 = Vv-a 10 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 81 Dhp-a ii.23 cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña a hut in the woods SN i.61 SN iii.116 SN iv.380 Often figuratively for body ‣See kāya. Thag 1, 1
    • As adjective
    • ˚, e.g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dhp i.313
    B. Sanskrit kuṭikā Avs. ii.156
    Kuṭimbika
    1. (also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family, Ja i.68 Ja i.126 Ja i.169 Ja i.225 Ja. Ja. Pv-a 31 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 82. Kutumbiya-putta proper name Vism 48
    Kuṭila
    adjective bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 15) Ja iii.112 (= jimha) Mil 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow);
    • neuter a bend, a crook Mil 351
    • ˚a˚ straight Vv 167 (-magga).

      1. ˚bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466 Pv-a 51 Vv-a 84
      • ˚a˚ uprightness Bdhd 20.

    Kuṭilatā
    feminine
    1. crookedness, falseness, in a˚, uprightness of character Dhs 50 51 Dhp-a i.173
    from kuṭila
    Kuṭī
    1. (kuṭi˚) feminine any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa-kuṭī ‣See vehāsa Vin iv.46) Snp 18 Snp 19 Pv ii.28 Vv-a 188 256 (cīvara˚ a cloak as tent) ‣See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚ vacca˚.

      1. ˚kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut Ja ii.282 Ja iii.78 351
      2. ˚dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest Dhp-a ii.23-purisa a “hut man,” a peasant Mil 147
    Kuṭukuñcaka
    1. ‣See kaṭukañcuka
    Kuṭumba
    neuter family property & estates Ja i.122 Ja i.225 rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king’s property Ja i.369 439
    • kuṭumbaṁ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment Ja i.225 Ja. Ja. Ja iii.376
    Kuṭumbika
    1. ‣See kuṭimbika
    Kuṭṭa1
    1. powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205 Vin ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205
    cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ; to crush, which is explained by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with; koṭṭ; by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ; of kūṭa1 which is explained as koṭilla
    Kuṭṭa2
    1. only found in compounds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince SN iii.156 (variant reading kuḍḍa˚) = v.44 (variant reading kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ Ja v.102f. where ex plural pāpa-rājā, with variant readings kuṭa and kūṭa ‣See also khujja and khuddaka-rājā
    2. of doubtful origin & form, cp. various Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e.g. MVastu; i.231
    Kuṭṭha1
    1. neuter (cp. kus; Sanskrit kuṣṭhā feminine ) leprosy Ja v.69 Ja v.72 Ja v.89 Ja vi.196 Ja vi.383 Vism 35 (+ gaṇḍa) DN-a i.260 261 272. The disease described at Dhp-a 161 sq. is probably leprosy. cp. kilāsa. On various kinds of leprosy ‣See Ja v.69 Ja iv.196

    Kuṭṭha2
    1. a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice Ja vi.537
    Kuṭṭhita
    1. hot, sweltering (of uṇha) SN iv.289 (variant reading kikita; molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33 ‣See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita
    Kuṭṭhin
    1. a leper MN i.506 (in simile) Thag 1, 1054 Ja v.413 Ja vi.196 Ud 49 Dhp-a iii.255
    Kuṭṭhilikā
    1. the pericarp or envelope of a ‣Seed (phala˚) Vv-a 344 (= sipāṭikā)
    Kuṭhārī
    feminine
    1. . An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144 SN iv.160 SN iv.167 MN i.233 = SN iii.141 A. i.141; ii.201; iv.171 Ja i.431 Dhp-a iii.59 Pv-a 277 Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe “when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)” SN i.149 = Sn 657 = AN v.174
    cp. Sanskrit kuṭhāra, axe = Latin culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Latin caro, etc
    Kuḍumalaka
    1. an opening bud AN iv.117 AN iv.119
    for kusuma˚
    Kuḍḍa
    1. a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka “a little wattle and daub town” DN ii.146 DN ii.169 (cp. Rhys Davids on this in Buddh Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply-built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266 viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The explanation of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is “geha-bhittiyā etam adhivacanaṁ. Kuḍḍa-rājā ‣See under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaṁ outside the wall MN i.34 = ii.18 AN iv.55 Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh viii1 = Pv i.51
    • parakuḍḍaṁ nissāya Ja ii.431 (near another man’s wall) is doubtful; variant readings Sinhalese kuḍḍhaṁ. Burmese kuṭaṁ and kuṭṭaṁ. (kuḍḍa-) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152 Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa. Kudda-mula
    to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa
    Kuḍḍa-mūla
    1. a sort of root Vin iii.15
    Kuḍḍaka
    1. in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls Ja i.92
    Kuṇa
    adjective
    1. distorted bent, crooked, lame Pv; ii.926 (variant reading kuṇḍa; cp. Pv-a 123 kuṇita paṭikuṇita an-ujubhūta) Dhp-a iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame)
    cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend = Latin curvus & coluber snake
    Kuṇapa
    1. a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68 = M i.73 = AN iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa pūti˚) AN iv.198f. Snp 205 Ja i.61 Ja i.146 Pv-a 15 Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120 Ja i.5 also Vin iii.68
    • The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚; , go˚, mahiṁsa˚ manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. cp. kaḷebara
    1. -gandha smell of a rotting corpse Snp-a 286 Pv-a 32
    derived from kuṇa? cp. Sanskrit kuṇapa
    Kuṇalin
    1. in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, contorted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy’s S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), explained Pv-a 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṁ (or vikucitaṁ SS.) sakuṇitaṁ (better: sankucitaṁ) (cp. Sanskrit kuc or kuñc to shrink)
    Kuṇāla
    1. name of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) Ja v.214f. (kuṇāla-jātaka). Kuṇāla-daha “cuckoo-lake,” name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416
    Kuṇālaka
    1. the cuckoo Ja v.406 (= kokila)
    from kuṇāla
    Kuṇi
    adjective deformed, paralysed (originally bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, accusative to Pug AN iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) Ja i.353 (ex
    • plural kuṇṭhahattha) Dhp-a i.376 Pug 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja) ‣See khañja.

    Kuṇita
    1. (or kuṇika) = kuṇa Pv-a 123 Pv-a 125 (or should it be kucita?). cp. paṭi˚
    Kuṇṭha
    1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) Dhp-a i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pug AN i.34 (of asi, opp tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353
    2. a cripple Ja ii.117
    cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa
    Kuṇṭhita
    1. Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita SN i.197 both in phrase paṁsu˚, according to Hardy, Pv-a p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust ‣See guṇṭheti The variant reading at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paṁsukuṇṭhita at Ja vi.559 (= ˚makkhita C; variant reading B B kuṇḍita)
    a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in compound palikuṇṭhita
    Kuṇḍa
    1. (a) bent, crooked DN-a i.296 (˚daṇḍaka) Pv-a 181
    Kuṇḍaka
    1. the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151 280 Ja ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka) = Dhp-a iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder Dhp-a ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraṁ makkhetvā)
    • sakuṇḍaka (-bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder-cake Ja v.383
    1. ˚aṅgārapūva pancake of rice powder Dhp-a iii.324
    • ˚kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka “the rice-(cake-) belly colt” Ja ii.288
    • ˚khādaka (a) eating rice-powder Ja ii.288 (cp. Dhp-a iii.325)
    • ˚dhūma, literally smoke of red rice powder epithet of the blood Ja iii.542
    • ˚pūva cake of husk-powder Ja i.422f.
    • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of rice-powder Vv-a 5 Dhp-a i.425
    • ˚yāgu husk-powder gruel Ja ii.288

    Kuṇḍala
    1. a ring especially earring AN i.254 = iii.16 Ja iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings) Dhp-a i.25 Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156 SN i.77 MN i.366 Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called “lion’s mouth” Ja v.205 (= kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Mil 220 = J iii.32 (where ex plural as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaṁ) cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt Vv-a 212

      • kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round DN ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa)
      cp. kuṇḍa, originally bending, i.e. winding
    Kuṇḍalin1
    adjective
    1. wearing earrings SN iv.343 Ja v.136 Ja vi.478
    • su˚ Vv 731 cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np Dhp-a i.25 Pv ii.5
    from kuṇḍala
    Kuṇḍalin2
    1. in kuṇḍalī-kata contorted Pv ii.927 ‣See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 14
    Kuṇḍi
    feminine
    1. a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍipaddhana giving a pailful of milk Ja vi.504 (Kern Toevoegselen s.v. compares phrase Sanskrit kāṁsy'ôpadohana proposes reading; kuṇḍ’ opadohana ‣See also kaṁsupadhāraṇa)
    = kuṇḍikā
    Kuṇḍika
    1. bending, in ahi-kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (literally bender) Ja iv.308 (variant reading Sinhalese guṇṭhika) ‣See ahi and catu-kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i.e. walking on all fours MN i.79 Pv iii.24 (ex plural at Pv-a 181)
    2. cp. kuṇḍa
    Kuṇḍikā
    feminine a water-pot Ja i.8 Ja i.9 Ja ii.73 (= kamaṇḍalu), Ja ii.317 Ja v.390 Dhp-a i.92 (cp. kuṭa).
    Kutuka
    adjective eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41.
    Kutumbaka
    1. (-puppha) name of a flower Ja i.60
    Kutūhala
    masculine neuter tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22 Dhp-a iii.194 (variant reading kot˚). ;
    • adjective unperturbed, not shamming Ja i.387 (ex
    • plural by avikiṇṇa-vaco of straight speech) ‣See also kotūhala.

      1. ˚maṅgala a festivity, ceremony, Nd2 in ex plural of anekarūpena Snp 1079 Snp 1082
      2. ˚sālā a hall for recreation a common room DN i.179 = SN iv.398 = MN ii.2 cp. Divy 143.

    Kuto
    1. ‣See under ku˚;
    Kutta

    neuter

    1. “being made up.” 1. Work The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. DN iii.28–⁠2. behaviour, i.e. charming behaviour, coquetry Ja ii.329 combined with līḷā (graceful carriage) Ja i.296 433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) Ja ii.127 iv.219, 472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ AN iv.57 = Dhs 633 (ex plural at Dhs-a 321 by kiriyā)

      • As adjective in kuttavāla well arranged, plaited tails DN i.105 (explained at DN-a i.274 as kappita-vāla; cp. kappita)
      Derived from kattā = Sanskrit kṛtṛ as kṛttra = Pali kutta, cp. Sanskrit kṛtrima artificial = Pali kuttima, in causative passive sense = kappita of kḷp
    Kuttaka
    1. neuter a woollen carpet (DN-a i.87 = as used for dancing-women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = ii.163
    2. adj “made up,” pretending, in samaṇa-k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68
      1. -71
      derived from kutta, that which is made up or “woven,” with originally meaning of karoti to weave?
    Kuttama
    1. in kāsi-kuttama Ja vi.49 should be read as kāsik'uttama
    Kutti
    feminine
    1. arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony) Ja iii.314 (massu˚ beard-dressing, explained by massu-kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sanskrit *kḷpti!) iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā) v.215 (= karaṇa, cp. Sanskrit kalpa)
    cp. kutta
    Kutthaka
    1. SN i.66 should be replaced by variant reading koṭṭhuka
    Kutha
    1. ‣See under ku˚;
    Kuthati
    1. to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s.v. Ja vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita). past participle kuthita
    2. Sanskrit kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita; 2
    Kuthana
    neuter
    1. digestion Vism 345
    from kvath = kuth
    Kuthita
    1. boiled, cooked Thag 2, 504 Kp-a 62; Vism 259 = KhA 58. cp. vikkuthita. 2. digested Vism 345
    2. figuratively tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati = pūti hoti) Mil 250 (+ kiliṭṭha)
    3. cp. Vinaya Texts ii.57 on Buddhaghosa’s note to MV vi.14, 5
    past participle of kuthati
    Kudaṇḍaka
    1. a throng Ja iii.204
    Kudassu
    1. (kud-assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. future ) AN i.107 Nett 87 Snp-a 103

    Kudā
    1. ‣See under ku˚;
    Kudāra
    1. (ku-dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147
    Kudārikā
    1. at Pv iv.147 & Pv-a 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā
    Kudiṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. wrong belief Sdhp 86
    ku + diṭṭhi
    Kuddāla
    1. a spade or a hoe (kanda-mūla-phalagahaṇ'atthaṁ DN-a i.269) Vin iii.144 Ja v.45 Dhp-a iv.218 Often in combination kuddāla-piṭaka “hoe and basket DN i.101 SN ii.88 SN v.53 AN i.204 AN ii.199 Ja i.225 Ja i.336
    Kuddālaka
    1. = preceding Dhp-a i.266
    Kuddha
    adjective
    1. angry AN iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93) Pv i.77 Ja ii.352 Ja ii.353 Ja vi.517 Dhp-a ii.44 Nom. plural kuddhāse Iti 2 = 7
    2. past participle of kujjhati
    Kudrūsa
    1. a kind of grain Mil 267 also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264 DN iii.71 Nd2 314 DN-a i.78 Dhs-a 331
    Kunta
    1. a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa Ja iv.466
    cp. Sanskrit kunta lance?
    Kuntanī
    feminine a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird Ja iii.134
    Kuntha
    1. , only in combination kuntha-kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant Ja i.439 Ja iv.142 Snp 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; Kp-a 189. cp. kimi
    Kunda
    neuter the jasmine Dāvs v.28.
    Kunnadī
    feminine (kuṁ-nadī) a small river, a rivulet SN i.109 SN ii.32 SN ii.118 AN iv.100 Ja iii.221 Vism 231, 416 DN-a i.58
    Kupatha
    1. (kuṁ + patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Mil 390
    Kupita
    adjective
    1. -1. shaken, disturbed Thag 2, 504 (by fire = Thag-a 292) Ja iii.344 (˚indriya). 2. offended, angry DN iii.238 = M i.101 = AN iv.460 v.18; M. i.27 AN iii.196f. Pv i.67 Often combined with anattamana “angry and displeased” Vin ii.189 DN i.3 DN i.90 (= DN-a i.255 kuddha)
    • As
    • neuter kupitaṁ disturbance in paccanta˚; a disturbance on the borderland Ja iii.497 Mil 314 Pv-a 20
    past participle of kuppati
    Kuppa
    adjective
    1. shaking, unsteady, movable AN iii.128 ˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu Snp 784 of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaṁ anger Vin ii.133 (karissāmi I shall pretend to be angry)

      • akuppa
      • adjective and akuppaṁ
      • neuter steadfast, not to be shaken, an epithet of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asaṅkuppa); akuppa-dhammo Pug 11 ‣See akuppa. Akuppaṁ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251
      absolutive of kuppati
    Kuppati
    1. to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. aorist kuppi, past participle kupita, absolutive kuppa, causative kopeti AN iii.101 Snp 826 Snp 854 Pug 11 12, 30. Of the wind Mil 135 of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) Ja ii.393 Ja ii.433 paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed Ja iv.446 (cp. kupita)
    2. Sanskrit kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake = Latin cupio, cupidus, “to crave with agitation,” cp. semantically Latin tremere → From craindre
    Kuppila
    1. a kind of flower Ja vi.218 (C: mantālakamakula)
    ?
    Kubbati2
    1. etc ‣See karoti ii
    Kubbanaka
    1. brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Snp 1134 (ex plural Nd2 by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka)
    2. from kuṁ-vana
    Kubbara
    1. the pole of a carriage AN iv.191 AN iv.193 Vv-a 269 271, 275. ratha˚ SN i.109 Vv 642 (= vedikā Vv-a) Derived (vividha-) kubbaratā Vv-a 276
    Kumati
    1. wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137
    Kumāra
    1. a young boy, son Snp 685f. (kuhiṁ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: with reference to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 41 (= māṇava) daharo kumāro MN ii.24 MN ii.44
    • a son of (—˚) rāja˚ Pv-a 163 khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ Ja iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84
    1. ˚kīḷā the amusement of a boy Ja i.137
    • ˚pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kh iii
    • ˚lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+ kumāri˚) DN i.9
    Vedic kumāra
    Kumāraka
    1. 1. masculine a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls SN iii.190 SN iii.2
    2. neuter ˚ṁ a childish thing AN iii.114
    3. feminine ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin Ja i.290 411; ii.180; iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64 Dhp-a iii.171

      1. ˚vāda speech like a young boy’s SN ii.219
    Kumārī
    feminine a young girl Vin ii.10 Vin v.129 (thulla˚) AN iii.76 Ja iii.395 (daharī k˚) Pug 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā).
    1. -pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.97)
    Kumina
    neuter a fish net Vin iii.63 Thag 1, 297 Ja ii.238 Thag-a 243
    Kumuda

    neuter

  • the white lotus Dhp 285 Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161) Ja v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174 DN-a i.139

    • a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā. AN v.173 = Sn p. 126
    1. ˚naḷa a lotus-stalk Ja i.223
    • ˚patta (-vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals Ja i.58 (epithet of sindhavā steeds)
    • ˚bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Mil 292
    • ˚vaṇṇa
    • adjective of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) Pv-a 74
    • ˚vana a mass of white lotuses Ja v.37

  • Kumbha
    1. a round jar, waterpot (= kulālabhājana earthenware Dhp-a i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: AN i.130 AN i.131 = Pug 32 AN v.337 SN ii.83 Mil 414 As uda˚ waterpot Dhp 121 Ja i.20 Pv i.129
    2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa) Vv-a 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these)
      1. ˚ūpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dhp 40 (= Dhp-a i.317); of various kinds of puggalā AN ii.104 = Pug 45
      • ˚kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at DN i.51 = Mil 331 Vin iv.7 In similes, generally referring to his skill DN i.78 = MN ii.18 Vism 142, 376 Snp 577 Dhp-a i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the king’s potter Ja i.121
      • a bird (Phasianus gallus Hardy) Vv-a 163
      • compounds.: ˚antevāsin the potter’s apprentice DN i.78 = MN ii.18 —˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342 344 SN iii.119 ˚pāka the potter’s oven SN ii.83 AN iv.102 ˚-putta son of a potter (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.100), a potter Vin iii.41f. -kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in Buddhaghosa) Vin ii.143 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.156
      • ˚ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well DN i.8 = DN iii.36 = AN v.128 SN v.419 explained. at DN-a i.90 by udaka-ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha-kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha-dāsikathā vā
      • ˚thūṇa a sort of drum DN i.6 (ex
      • plural at DN-a i.84 caturassara-ammaṇakatāḷaṁ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke) DN iii.183 Ja v.506 (pāṇissaraṁ +). —˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285 = 302
      • ˚tthenaka of cora a thief, “who steals by means of a pot” (i.e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Buddhaghosa on Vin ii.256 cp. Vin Texts iii.325 “robber burglars”) only in simile Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278
      • ˚dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well DN i.168 Mil 331 Dhp-a i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā)
      • ˚dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Snp 309 cp. kuṇḍi
      • ˚bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold Ja v.46
      • ˚matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, explanation. of kumbhaṇḍā Ja iii.147
    for etymology s. kūpa and cp. Low German kump or kumme, a round pot
    Kumbhaṇḍa
    1. 1. masculine a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras SN ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaṁ gacchanto) Ja i.204 Ja iii.147 (with definition) Mil 267 Dhp-a i.280 Pgdp 60
    2. neuter a kind of gourd Ja i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka-lābuka˚) DN-a i.73 Dhp-a i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as
    3. feminine kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu +)
    Kumbhī
    feminine a large round pot (often combined with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49 52, 286; ii.142, 210 Thag 2, 283 loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Snp 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya Pv-a 221 Also a name for one of the Nirayas ‣See lohakumbhī. cp. nidhi˚.
    1. -mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi-mukha DN i.166 and≈‣ See kaḷopī; Vism 328
    Kumbhīla
    (kuṁ + bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) Ja i.216 Ja i.278 Dhp-a i.201 Dhp-a iii.362
    1. ˚bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at MN i.459f. = AN ii.123f. Mil 196 = Nd2 on bhaya
    • Th 2, 502
    • ˚rājā the king of the crocodiles Ja ii.159
    Kumbhīlaka
    1. a kind of bird (“little crocodile”) Ja iv.347
    from kumbhīla
    Kumma
    1. a tortoise SN iv.177 (+ kacchapa) MN i.143 Ja v.489 Mil 363 Mil 408 (here as land-tortoise cittaka-dhara˚)
    Vedic kūrma
    Kummagga
    (and kumagga
    1. a wrong path (literally and figuratively) Mil 390 (+ kupatha); figuratively (= micchāpatha) Dhs 381 1003 Pug 22 Kummaggaṁ paṭipajjati to lose one’s way, to go astray. literally Pv iv.35 Pv-a 44 (variant reading SS.); figuratively Snp 736 Iti 117 Thag 2, 245
    kuṁ + magga
    Kummāsa
    1. junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc ‣See kāya) DN i.76 = MN ii.17 and ≈; in enumerated of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646 740, 875. Vin iii.15 Ja i.228 Vv 146 (= Vv-a 62 yava˚) Vv-a 98 (odana˚). In combination with pūva (cake) Dhp-a i.367 Pv-a 244
    Vedic kulmāṣa
    Kummiga
    1. (kuṁ + miga] a small or insignificant animal Mil 346
    Kuyyaka
    1. a kind of flower Ja i.60 (˚puppha)
    Kuraṇḍaka
    1. a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (‣ See also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa N plural Vism 38
    2. cp. Sanskrit kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth
    Kurara
    1. an osprey Ja iv.295 Ja iv.397 (= ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (= seta˚)
    Kuravaka
    1. name of a tree, in ratta˚ Ja i.39 (= bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree)
    = Sanskrit kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka
    Kuruṅga
    1. a kind of antelope, in -miga the antelope deer Ja i.173 (k˚-jatāka); ii.153 (do.)
    deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sanskrit forms are kulunga and kulanga
    Kuruṭṭharū
    1. (variant reading kururū) a badly festering sore DN ii.242
    Kurundī
    1. name of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vinaya Texts i.258 ii.14)
    Kuruvindaka
    1. vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath-powder made from k. Ja iii.282 and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Buddhaghosa Vin ii.315 Vinaya Texts iii.67)
    Kurūra
    adjective
    1. bloody raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc. AN iii.383 = Pug 56 (explained. Pug AN 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at Pv-a 181)
    Sanskrit krūra, cp. Latin cruor thick blood, Sanskrit kravih; Old High German hrō, English raw
    Kurūrin
    1. = kurūra Pv iii.23
    Kula
    neuter ; but poetic
    • plural kulā Pv ii.943

      1. clan a high social grade, “good family,” cp. Gothic kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Old High German sippa, clan; “house” in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric). Buddhaghosa at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaṁ & upaṭṭhāka-kulaṁ.

        1. -1. AN ii.249 (on welfare and ill-luck of clans) Snp 144 Snp 711Iti 109f. (sabrahmakāni, etc.) Dhp 193
        • brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family. AN v.249 Ja iv.411 etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader Ja iii.82 kassaka˚ identical of a farmer Ja ii.109 purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker Ja vi.364 upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of Sāriputta. Vin i.83 sindhava˚ Vv-a 280
        • uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opposite nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚ etc. MN ii.152 = AN i.107 = ii.85 = iii.385 = Pug 51 sadisa a descent of equal standing Pv-a 82 kula-rūpa-sampanna endowed with “race” and beauty Pv-a 3 Pv-a 280
        • household, in the sense of house; kulāni people Dhp-a i.388 parakulesu among other people Dhp 73 parakule do. Vv-a 66 kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Snp 65 cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd2 on taṇhā iv
        • devakula temple Ja ii.411 rāja˚ the king’s household palace Ja i.290 Ja iii.277 Ja vi.368 kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ AN iv.278) appapurisāni “communities in which there are many women but few men” Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278 ñāti-kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaṁ sandhāya Vv-a 171)
        1. ˚aṅgāra “the charcoal of the family” i.e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer SN iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but variant readings show ti as superfluous) printed kulanguro (for kul-ankuro? variant reading kulangāro kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp. variant readings at Ja iv.69) dhanavināsako Ja vi.380 Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo Ja iv.69 Both these refer to an avajāta putta. cp. also kulassa angārabhūta Dhp-a iii.350 Snp-a 192 (of a dujjāto putto) and kulagandhana
        2. ˚itthi a wife of good descent together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10 AN iii.76 Vism 18
        3. ˚ūpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga ‣See Trenckner P.M. 62, note 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Frequently in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e. g Vin iii.131 135; iv.20
        • Vin i.192 208; iii.84, 237 v.132 SN ii.200f. AN iii.136 AN iii.258f.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28 DN-a i.142 (rāja˚) Pv-a 266
        • feminine kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268 Vin iv.66
        • ˚gandhana at Iti 64 and kule gandhina at Ja iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J
        • passages on avajāta-putta. The It-manuscripts either explain k-gandhana by kulacchedaka or have variant readings kuladhaṁsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? cp. gandhina
        • ˚geha clanhouse i.e. father’s house Dhp-a i.49
        • ˚tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi-rakkhako anujāto putto “one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family” Ja vi.380
        • ˚dattika (and ˚dattiya given by the family or clan Ja iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where Dhp-a i.346 reads ˚santaka) 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati)
        • ˚dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10 Vv-a 196
        • ˚dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Snp 89 Dhp-a ii.109
        • ˚dvāra the door of a family Snp 288
        • ˚dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10 Dhp-a iii.172 Vv-a 6 Pv-a 112
        • ˚pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour AN i.25 cp. Snp-a 165 opposite of kuladūsaka
        • ˚putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low German haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at DN i.93 94≈ Vin i.15 43, 185, 288, 350 MN i.85≈(in kāmānaṁ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463 AN ii.249 Ja i.82 vi.71 Iti 89 Vv-a 128 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 29
        • ˚macchariya selfishness concerning one’s family, touchiness about his clan DN iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚
        • ˚vaṁsa lineage, progeny MN ii.181 AN iii.43 AN iv.61 DN-a i.256 expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana DN iii.189 Pv-a 5 nassati or nāseti Ja iv.69 Vv-a 149 upacchindati Pv-a 31 Pv-a 82
        • ˚santaka belonging to one’s family, property of the clan Ja i.52 Dhp-a i.346 (where Ja iv.146 reads ˚dattika)
        Indogermanic *qṷel (revolve) ‣See under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati
    Kulaṅka
    1. -pādaka “buttresses of timber” (Vinaya Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Buddhaghosa p. 321 and also Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 78)
    Kulattha
    1. a kind of vetch MN i.245 (˚yūsa): Mil 267 Vism 256 (˚yūsa)
    Kulala
    1. a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combination with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka + k˚ Vin iv.40 Snp 675 (= Snp-a 250); gijjha + k˚ Pv-a 198 gijjhā kākā k Vin iii.106 kākā k˚ gijjhā MN i.58 cp. gijjho kanko kulalo MN i.364 MN i.429
    Kulāla
    1. a potter; only in -cakka a potter’s wheel Ja i.63
    • ˚bhājana a potter’s vessel Dhp-a i.316 Pv-a 274

    Kulāva
    1. 1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaṁ gamenti “don't let anything go to waste.” Reading doubtful
    • a certain bird Ja vi.538
    Kulāvaka
    neuter a nest DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaṁ) SN i.8 SN i.224 = J i.203 (a brood of birds = supaṇṇapotakā) Ja iii.74 (Burmese variant ), 431; vi.344 Dhp-a ii.22
    Kulika
    adjective
    1. belonging to a family, in agga˚; coming from a very good family Pv-a 199
    from kula
    Kuḷika
    1. (?) in kata˚-kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Buddhaghosa Vin ii.315 (Commentary V. v.1, 3) in explanation of kuruvindaka-sutti
    Kuliṅka
    1. a bird Ja iii.541 (= sakuṇika 542). cp. kulunka
    Kulin
    1. = kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introduction ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader p. 1024
    Kulīna
    1. = preceding in abhijāta-kula-kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Mil 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family SN i.87 MN iii.37 Vv-a 32 nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 462
    Kulīra
    1. a crab, in kulīra-pādaka “a crab-footer,” i.e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149 Vin iv.40 (kulira), cp. Buddhaghosa on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; especially when carved to represent animal’s feet (Vinaya Texts iii.164)
    Kulīraka
    1. a crab Ja vi.539 (= kakkaṭaka 540)
    Kuluṅka
    1. a certain small bird Ja iii.478 cp. kulinka
    Kulla1
    1. a raft (of basket-work) (originally meaning “hollow shaft,” cp. Sanskrit kulya, bone; Latin caulis stalk, Gr , Old High German hol, English hollow) Vin i.230 DN ii.89 (kullaṁ bandhati) MN i.134 (kullūpama dhamma)
    Kulla2
    adjective
    1. belonging to the family Ja iv.34 (˚vatta family custom)
    from kula, Sanskrit kaula & kaulya, *kulya
    Kullaka
    crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket Ja vi.64
    1. ˚vihāra adjective the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Buddhaghosa uttānavihāra ibid. passage 330, and Vinaya Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern’s explanation (Toevoegselen s.v.) which puts kullaka in this combination = kulla2 (Sanskrit kauyla), thus meaning well-bred, of good family, gentlemanly
    2. ˚saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft Ja ii.406–⁠408 (not correct Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 78). cp. Kern Toevoegselen i.154.

    Kuva
    1. (ṁ) ‣See ku-
    Kuvalaya
    1. the (blue) water-lily, lotus, usually combined with kamala, q.v. Vv 354 DN-a i.50 Vv-a 161 181 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 77
    Kuvilāra
    1. = koviḷāra Ja v.69 (variant reading B. ko˚)
    Kusa
    1. 1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) Dhp-a iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraṁ tiṇaṁ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi Dhp 311 Ja i.190 (= tiṇa); iv.140
    • a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse “when the lot has been cast” Vin i.299 kusaṁ sankāmetvā “having passed the lot on” Vin iii.58
    1. ˚agga the point of a blade of grass Pv-a 254 = DN-a i.164 Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dhp 70 Vv-a 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105)
    2. ˚kaṇṭhaka = prec Pv iii.228
    3. ˚cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240 AN i.295 = ii.206 = Pug 55
    • ˚pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285
    • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of grass. AN v.234 249.

    Kusaka
    1. = preceding Vv 355 (= Vv-a 162)
    Kusala
    adjective
    1. adjective clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious MN i.226 Dhp 44 Ja i.222 especially ap
    2. plural in moral sense (= puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaṁ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti Iti 21 sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Snp 591 cp. 523 Pv i.33 (= nipuṇa). With kamma = a meritorious action, in kammaṁ katvā kusalaṁ DN iii.157 Vv iii.27 Pv i.1011 ‣See compounds
    3. ācāra-k˚ good in conduct Dhp 376 parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dīpavaṁsa iv.19; magga˚ (and opposite amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (literally & figuratively) SN iii.108 samāpatti˚, etc. AN v.156f. sālittaka-payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing potsherds Pv-a 282
    4. In derivation k. is explained by Dhammapāla & Buddhaghosa by; kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita-salanādi atthena kusalaṁ Vv-a 169 kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaṁsenti ti kusalā Dhs-a 39 where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. lxxxii)
    5. neuter a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. Dhs-a 162 200, etc.): yassa pāpaṁ kataṁ kammaṁ kusalena pithīyati, so imaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti “he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104 = Dh 173 = Th 1 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Snp 981 Vv 301 (= ārogyaṁ) DN i.24 Ja vi.367 Pv i.13 (= puñña) Pv-a 75 Mil 25
    6. In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaṁ (cp. sīla) MN i.47 AN v.241 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase-kusala-dhammā Snp 1039 Snp 1078 explained. in extenso Nd2 s.v ‣See also compound ˚dhamma
    7. Kusalaṁ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i.e. kāyena, vācāya manasā Iti 78 cp. Dhp 53 sabba-pā
    8. passive akaraṇaṁ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaṁ etaṁ Buddhānusāsanaṁ DN ii.49 = Dh 183; cp. Nett 43, 81 171, 186. Kusalaṁ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaṁ pajahati to give up wrong habits) AN i.58 AN iv.109f. Iti 9
    9. akusala adjective: improper wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed DN i.37 DN i.163 bālo + akusalo Snp 879 Snp 887 = pāpa Pv-a 60 cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaṁ & akusalaṁ are discussed in detail (with reference to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452
      1. -454
      • ; kusalākusala good and bad MN i.489 SN v.91 Mil 25 Nett 161, 192 Dhs 1124 sq
      • sukusala (dhammānaṁ) highly skilled DN i.180 (cp. M. ii.31)
      1. ˚anuesin striving after righteousness Snp 965 cp. kinkusalānuesin DN ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin MN i.163f.
      2. ˚abhisanda overflow of merit (+ puñña˚) AN ii.54f.; iii.51; 337
      3. ˚kamma meritorious action, right conduct AN i.104 292 sq.; Ps i.85; ii.72 sq. Pv-a 9 Pv-a 26 -cittā (plural ) good thoughts Vb 169

        1. -173, 184, 285 sq. 294 sq
        2. ˚cetanā right volition Vb 135
        • ˚dhammā (
        • plural (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character SN ii.206 MN i.98 AN iv.11f.; v.90 sq.; 123 sq. Pug 68 71 Vb 105 Ps i.101, 132; ii.15, 230 Vv-a 74 127
        • ˚pakkha “the side of virtue,” all that belongs to good character MN iii.77 (and a˚) with adjective ˚pakkhika SN v.91
        • ˚macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family cp. Nd2 on veviccha
        • ˚mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha MN i.47 MN i.489 = AN i.203 = Nett 183 DN iii.214 Dhs 32 313 981 Vb 169f. 210; Nett 126. cp. ˚paccaya Vb 169 ˚ropanā Nett 50
        • ˚vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiṁsā˚ DN iii.215 Iti 82 Nett 126
        • ˚vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454 Vism 454 (twofold, viz ahetuka & sahetuka)
        • ˚vedanā good, pure feeling Vb 3f.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vb 6f.; Nett 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā)
        • ˚sīla good proper conduct of life MN ii.25f.; adjective ˚sīlin DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286)
        cp. Sanskrit kuśala
    Kusalatā
    1. (only—˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality
    • lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs Vv-a 138 aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities Pv-a 67 For following cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation
    • past participle 345–⁠348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at DN iii.212 and Dhs 1329
    1. -1338; cp. AN i.84 AN i.94
    feminine abstract from kusala
    Kusi
    neuter one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287 Vin ii.177 and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid ‣See Buddhaghosa’s note in Vinaya Texts ii.208.
    Kusīta
    adjective
    1. indolent, inert, inactive. Ex plural by kāma-vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo Dhp-a ii.260 by nibbiriyo Dhp-a iii.410 by alaso Pv-a 175 Often combined with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal Iti 27 116 Dhp 7 Dhp 112 Dhp 280 Mil 300 Mil 396 Also equivalent to alasa Dhp 112 combined with dussīla Mil 300 Mil 396 with duppañña DN iii.252 = 282 AN ii.227 AN ii.230 AN iii.7 AN iii.183 AN iii.433

      • In other connections: MN i.43 MN i.471 AN iii.7f. 127; v.95 146, 153, 329 sq. SN ii.29 SN ii.159 SN ii.206 Iti 71 102 Ja iv.131 (nibbiriya +); Vism 132 Dhp-a i.69 The eight kusītavatthūni occasions of indolence, are enumerated at AN iv.332 DN iii.255 Vb 385
      • akusīta alert, mindful careful Snp 68 (+ alīnacitto); Nd2 s.v.; Sdhp 391
      Sanskrit kusīda; cp. kosajja
    Kusītatā
    feminine
    1. in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness Vv-a 138
    abstract from kusīta
    Kusuma
    neuter any flower Ja iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37 Pv-a 157 (= puppha) Vv-a 42 Dīpavaṁsa i.4; Sdhp 246 Sdhp 595 Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), figuratively vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Thag 1, 100 Mil 399
    Kusumita
    adjective in flower, blooming Vv-a 160 162.
    Kusumbha
    neuter the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red Ja v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do) Khus iv.2.
    Kussubbha
    1. and kussobbha neuter

      1. a small pond, usually combined with kunnadī and applied in similes: SN ii.32 = AN i.243 = v.114 SN ii.118 SN v.47 SN v.63 SN v.395 AN ii.140 AN iv.100 Snp 720 Pv-a 29 DN-a i.58
      Sanskrit kuśvabhra
    Kuha
    adjective
    1. deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā siṅgī AN ii.26 = Thag 1, 959 Iti 113
    • akuha honest, upright MN i.386 Snp 957 Mil 352
    Sanskrit kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Anglo-Saxon hȳdan, English hide
    Kuhaka
    1. deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combined with lapaka DN i.8 AN iii.111
    • AN v.159f. Snp 984 Snp 987 Ja i.375 (˚tāpasa) Dhp-a iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora) Mil 310 Mil 357 Pv-a 13 DN-a i.91
    derived from preceding
    Kuhanā
    feminine
    1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combination kuhana-lapana “deceit and talking-over” = deceitful talk DN i.8 AN iii.430 DN-a i.92 Mil 383 Nd2 on avajja
    2. MN i.465 = It 28, 29 SN iv.118 AN v.159f.; Vism 23 Vb 352 Sdhp 375
    3. menacing Snp-a 582
    4. Opp akuhaka Snp 852
    5. Var. commentator’s derivations are kuhāyanā (from kuhanā) and kuhitattaṁ (from kuheti) to be found at Vism 26
      1. ˚vatthūni (plural ) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd2 on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24 DN-a i.91 & Snp-a 107
      2. abstract from adjective kuhana = kuhaka
    Kuhara
    neuter (derived from kuha) a hole, a cavity; literally a hidingplace Dāvs i.62.
    Kuhiṁ
    1. ‣See under ku˚;
    Kuhilikā
    1. (plural ) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaṁsa 216.

    Kuhīyati
    1. only in pahaṁsīyati + k˚ “he exults and rejoices” at Mil 325 (cp. Miln translation ii.220, where printed kuhūyati)
    Kuheti
    1. to deceive DN-a 91; absolutive kuhitvā deceiving Ja vi.212
    2. v. denominative from kuha
    Kūjati
    1. to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) Ja ii.439 iv.296; Dāvs v.51. past participle kūjita ‣See abhi˚, upa˚
    2. kuj, explained with guj at Dhtp 78 by “avyatte sadde”
    Kūṭa1
    neuter
    1. a trap, a snare; figuratively falsehood, deceit. As trap Ja i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (explanation paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaṁsa māna˚ “cheating with weight, coin and measure (DN-a i.78 = vañcana) DN i.5 = iii.176 = SN v.473 = M i.180 = AN ii.209 AN v.205 = Pug 58 māna˚ Pv-a 278
    • As adjective false, deceitful, cheating ‣See compounds
    • Note. kūṭe Ja i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya cp. ghaṭa)
    1. ˚aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor Ja ii.2 Dhp-a i.353
    • ˚jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic Ja i.375 Dhp-a i.40
    • ˚māna false measure Pv-a 191
    • ˚vāṇija a false-trader Pv iii.42 Pv-a 191
    • ˚vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) Pv-a 210
    • ˚vedin lier, calumniator Ja iv.177
    Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 ex plural ; kuṭ; of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sanskrit kūṭa trap
    Kūṭa2
    masculine neuter
    1. -(a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 (= sikhara); aṁsa˚ shoulder clavicle, Vv-a 121 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193 Ja i.73 cp. koṭa
    • (b) the top of a house roof, pinnacle AN i.261 Vv 784 (= kaṇṇikā Vv-a 304) gaha˚ Dhp 154 Pv-a 55 cp. also kūṭāgāra
    • (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust-heap MN ii.7 Pv-a 144
    • (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaṁ gahetvā or desanā kūtaṁ gaṇhanto “leading up to the climax of the instruction” Ja i.275 Ja i.393 Ja i.401 v.151; vi.478 Vv-a 243 cp. arahattena kūṭaṁ gaṇhanto Ja i.114 arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiṁ Thag-a 99
    1. ˚aṅga the shoulder Vv 158 (= Vv-a 123)
    2. ˚āgāra neuter a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268 SN ii.103 SN v.218; iii.156; iv.186; v.43, 75, 228 AN i.101 AN i.261 iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21; Pv iii.17; 221 Vv 82 (= ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto Vv-a 50) Vv-a 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) variant reading kuṭṭhāgāra Pv-a 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit) Dhp-a iv.186 In compounds.:—˚ matta as big as an upper chamber Ja i.273 Mil 67 —˚sālā a pavilion ‣See description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DN-a i.43 Vin iii.15 68, 87; iv.75 DN i.150 SN ii.103 = v.218; iv.186
    3. ˚(n)gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit SN ii.263 SN iii.156 = v.43
    4. ˚ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin DN i.14 = 56 SN iii.211 = M i.517 (ex
    5. plural DN-a i.105 by pabbatakūṭaṁ viya ṭhita)
    6. ˚poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa ‣See kūṭa4
    7. Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Latin celsus, collis, columen; Anglo-Saxon holm, English hill
    Kūṭa3
    neuter
    1. a hammer, usually as aya˚; an iron sledge hammer Ja i.108 or ayo˚ Pv-a 284
    • ayomaya˚ Snp 669
    • kammāra˚ Vism 254
    *qolā to beat; cp. Latin clava; Latin clades, procello. The explanation of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is “āko ṭane”
    Kūṭa4
    adjective
    1. without horns, i.e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5 = J i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. translation misses the point translates “rascal”). These maimed oxen (cows calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, 269: kūṭa-goṇa-(so read for ˚poṇa)-yutta-ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaṁ dhāvati runs the wrong way) kūṭa-dhenuyā khīraṁ pivitvā kūṭa-vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post
    • Kūṭa-danta as proper name should probably belong here, thus meaning “ox-tooth” (derisively (DN i.127 Vism 208), with which may be compared danta-kūṭa ‣See under danta
    Sanskrit kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Latin caro, curtus; also Sanskrit kṛdhu maimed The explanation of kuṭ; as “chede,” or “chedane” (cutting at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa ‣See also kuṭṭa
    Kūṭeyya
    neuter
    1. fraud, deceit, in combination with sāṭheyya vankeyya MN i.340 AN v.167
    derived from *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya
    Kūpa
    masculine
    1. . 1. a pit, a cavity akkhi˚; the socket of the eye MN i.80 MN i.245 Dhs-a 306
    • gūtha˚ a cesspool DN ii.324 Snp 279 Pv ii.316 Pug 36
    • miḷha˚ a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma˚; the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DN-a i.57 Vism 262 360; also in na loma-kūpamattaṁ pi not even a hairroot Ja i.31 Ja iii.55
    • vacca˚ = gūtha˚ Vin ii.141 222. As a tank or a well: Ja vi.213 Vv-a 305
    • the mast of a boat Ja iii.126 Mil 363 Mil 378 ‣See next
    1. ˚khaṇa one who digs a pit Ja vi.213
    • ˚tala the floor of a pit Vism 362
    Vedic kūpa, originally curvature viz. (a) interior = cavity, cp. Latin cupa, Sanskrit kumbha; -(b) exterior = heap, cp. Anglo-Saxon hēap, Old High German heap, Sanskrit kūpa mast
    Kūpaka
    1. = kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (identical); = kūpa. 2. Ja ii.112 Ja iv.17
    Kūla
    neuter
    1. a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: SN i.143 = J iii.361 AN i.162 Snp 977 Ja i.227 Mil 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122 vaccakū passive k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141 ‣See also paṁsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚ paṭi˚
    2. Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe
    Kūra
    neuter in sukkha˚; boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86 Dhp-a ii.171
    Keka
    1. name of a tree Ja v.405 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris
    ?
    Keṭubha
    1. explained by Buddhaghosa DN-a i.247 as “the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion” (so Trenckner, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 116) In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered DN i.88 AN i.163 AN i.166 Snp 1020 Mil 10 Mil 178 So in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Avs ii.19; Divy 619
    deriv. unknown
    Keṭubhin
    1. MA 152 (on MN i.32) has “trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful false all through”; iii.6 = AN iii.199
    deriv. unknown
    Ketaka
    1. name of a flower Ja iv.482
    etymology uncertain
    Ketana
    1. sign etc ‣See saṁ˚
    Ketu

    1. -1. ray, beam of light splendour, effulgence Thag 1, 64 which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu
    • flag, banner, sign perhaps as token of splendour Thag 1, 64
    • dhamma-k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner AN i.109 = iii.149 dhūma-k˚ having smoke as its splendour, of fire, Ja iv.26 Vv-a 161 in explanation of dhūmasikha
    1. ˚kamyatā desire for prominence, self-advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469 Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233 = Nd2 505; Nd1 on Snp 829 (= uṇṇama); -mālā “garland of rays” Vv-a 323
    Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Latin caelum (= *caidlom), Old High German heitar, heit; Gothic haidus; English hood, orig appearance, form, like
    Ketuṁ
    1. ‣See kayati
    Ketuvant
    adjective
    1. having flags, adorned with flags Vv-a 50
    from ketu
    Kedāra
    masculine neuter an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma “we shall till the fields after watering them” Ja i.215 as square-shaped (i.e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Buddhaghosa on MV viii.12, 1) Ja iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary (-mariyādā) Dhp-a iii.6
    • J iv.167; v.35 Pv-a 7 (= khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 variant reading ) ‣See Trenckner Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke-suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning “water,” as also in kebuka ke-vaṭṭa; perhaps Sanskrit kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara ked + dṛ; , bursting forth of water = inundation; kebuka = kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa = ked + vṛ; , moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. Avs Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel)
    1. ˚koṭi top or corner-point of a field Vism 180
    Kebuka
    1. water Ja vi.38 (= 42: k. vuccati udakaṁ). As nadī a river at Ja iii.91 where Seruma at similar passage p. 189
    on ke-see note to preceding
    Keyūra
    neuter a bracelet, bangle Dhp-a ii.220 (variant reading kāyura).
    Keyūrin
    adjective wearing a bracelet Pv-a 211 (= kāyūrin).
    Keyya
    1. (absolutive of kayati) for sale Ja vi.180 (= vikkiṇitabba).

    Kerāṭika
    adjective
    1. deceitful, false, hypocritic Ja i.461 (explained by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 (= kirāsa) MA 152 Dhp-a iii.389 (= saṭha)
    • a˚ honest, frank Ja v.117 (= akitava, ajūtakara)
    from kirāṭa
    Kerāṭiya
    1. = preceding Ja iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152
    Kelisā
    1. at Thag 1, 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo ‣See keḷi2
    Keḷanā
    feminine
    1. desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus “selfishness” Vb 351 = DN-a i.286 (+ paṭikeḷanā. In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful explanation of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver cp. explanation Dhtp 278 kela khela = calane. Another passage is Nd2 585 where it is combined with parikeḷanā and acts as synonym of vibhūsanā
    from kilissati? or is it kheḷana?
    Keḷāyati
    1. to adorn oneself with (accusative ), to fondle, treasure take pride in genitive MN i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by variant reading SN iii.190 & MN i.552) SN iii.190 (identical) Mil 73
    2. past participle keḷāyita
    3. denominative from kīḷ in meaning “to amuse oneself with,” i.e. take a pride in. Always combined with mamāyati. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit same meaning (to be fond of) śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver ‣See also keḷanā
    Keḷāyana
    neuter
    1. playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opposite majjhatta), 317
    from keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi
    Keḷāyita
    1. desired, fondled, made much of Ja iv.198 (explained with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho)
    past participle of keḷāyati
    Keḷāsa
    1. (cp. Sanskrit kailāsa] name of a mountain Bdhd 138
    Keḷi1
    feminine
    1. play, amusement, sport Pv-a 265 (= khiḍḍā); parihāsa merry play, fun Ja i.116
    2. playing at dice, gambling in ˚maṇḍala “circle of the game,” draught-board; ˚ṁ bhindati to break the board, i.e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) Ja i.379
    from krīḍ to play, sport ‣See kīḷati
    Keḷi2
    feminine
    1. the meaning is not quite defined it may be taken as “attachment, lust, desire,” or “selfishness, deceit” (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or “unsettledness, wavering."-keḷi-sīla of unsettled character unreliable, deceitful Pv-a 241
    • ˚sīlaka identical Ja ii.447

      • pañca citta-keḷiyo = pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Thag 1, 1010 (correct kelisā to keḷiyo!)
      • citta-keḷiṁ kīḷantā bahuṁ pāpakammaṁ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart’s content Ja iii.43 cp. kāmesu a-ni-kīḷitāvin unstained by desires SN i.9 SN i.117
      either from kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or from; kel, as given under keḷanā
    Kevaṭṭa
    1. fisherman DN i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) AN iii.31 = 342, cp. iv.91 Ud 24f. Ja i.210 Dhp-a ii.132 Dhp-a iv.41 Pv-a 178
    • ˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. Ja vi.399 name of a brahmin minister, also DN i.411 name of Kevaḍḍha (?).

      1. ˚dvāra name of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197 Vv-a 97
      on ke-see kedāra
    Kevala

    (adjective adverb )

    1. expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv altogether or only
    1. -1. ˚ṁ (adverb ) (a) only = just: k tvaṁ amhākaṁ vacanaṁ karohi “do all we tell you Pv-a 4 -only = but, with this difference: Vv-a 203 249; -k…. vippalapati he only talks Pv-a 93 and yet: “sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituṁ” is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaṁ mano-pasāda-mattena only by purity of mind Dhp-a i.33 kevalaṁ vacchake balava-piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaṁ gamissāmi Vv-a 260 -exclusive Mil 247
    2. na k…. atha kho not only … but also Vv-a 227
    3. whole, entire Snp p. 108; cp. i.1019; Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95); Vism 528 (= asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95). k. → akevala entire → deficient MN i.326 ˚ṁ entirely thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti Vv-a 282
      1. ˚kappa a whole kappa Snp past participle 18, 45, 125; Kp-a 115 Vv-a 124 255
      2. ˚paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DN-a i.177) of the Doctrine; explained also at Nett 10
      3. cp. Latin caelebs = *caivilo-b˚ to live by oneself, i.e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth hails, Old High German heil, English whole
    Kevalin
    adjective
    1. one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa Definition sabbaguṇa-paripuṇṇa sabba-yoga-visaṁyutta Snp-a 153
    • ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaṁ tesaṁ natthi paññâpanāya SN iii.59f. i.e. “those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished …”; kevalīnaṁ mahesiṁ khīṇ’ āsavaṁ Snp 82 = SN i.167 -k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd2 on tiṇṇa = AN v.16
    • with genitive: brahmacariyassa k. “perfected in morality” AN ii.23
    • As epithet of “brāhmaṇa Snp 519 = Nd2 s.v.; of dhammacakka AN ii.9 ‣See also Snp 490 Snp 595
    • akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Snp 878 Snp 891
    from kevala
    Kesa
    1. the hair of the head SN i.115 (haṭa-haṭa-k˚, with dishevelled hair) AN i.138 (palita-kesa with grey hair; also at Ja i.59) Snp 456 (nivutta˚), 608 Thag 1, 169 Ja i.59 Ja i.138 Ja iii.393 Mil 26 Kp-a 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107f.; 133 (cp. kesa-massu); -dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa-keso (of Gotama DN i.115 cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa Pv-a 26
    • The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled Pv-a 56 Sdhp 103 it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna “covered only with my hair” Pv i.102
    • kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) DN i.234 -kesaṁ oropeti to have one’s hair cut Vin ii.133
    1. ˚oropaṇa (-satthaka) (a) hair-cutting (knife), i.e. a razor Dhp-a i.431
    • ˚ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413
    • ˚kambala a hair blanket (according to Buddhaghosa human hair) DN i.167 = AN i.240 AN i.295 = ii.206 Vin i.305 = M i.78 = Pug 55 AN i.286
    • ˚kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) DN i.55
    • ˚kalāpā (
    • plural (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses Pv-a 46
    • ˚kalyāṇa beauty of hair Dhp-a i.387 -kārika hairdresser Vv 175-dhātu the hair-relic (of the Buddha) Ja i.81
    • ˚nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh’ eva paṭicchādita-kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita-k˚-m˚
    • adjective with h. and b. dressed DN i.104 AN iv.94 Ja vi.268 especially frequently in form kesa-massuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state, i.e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer DN i.60 DN i.115 DN iii.60 DN iii.64 DN iii.76 AN i.107 AN iii.386 Iti 75 Pug 57 similarly AN ii.207 = Pug 56
    • ˚sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair Pv-a 46
    • ˚hattha a tuft of hair Pv-a 157 Vv-a 167
    Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane = Latin caesaries, hair of the head, Anglo-Saxon heord = English hair
    Kesayati
    1. ‣See kisa
    Kesara1
    1. a mane, in -sīha a maned lion Ja ii.244 Snp-a 127
    Kesara2
    filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants especially of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha Pv-a 77 Vv-a 12 111; -sa-kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs Vv-a 32 nicula-k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree Vv-a 134
    1. ˚bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) Vv-a 278
    from kesa
    Kesarin
    1. having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle-array (˚saṁgāmo) Dīpavaṁsa i.7; cp. Avs i.56
    from kesara1
    Kesava
    1. of rich hair, of beautiful hair. epithet of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62
    from last
    Kesika
    adjective
    1. hairy, of mangoes Mil 334
    from kesa
    Ko
    1. ‣See ka
    Koka1
    1. a wolf Ja vi.525 Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 Mil 267 = J v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf’s meal Vin iii.58
    not = Sanskrit koka, cuckoo
    Koka2
    1. name of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris ‣See keka
    cp. Sanskrit koka
    Kokanada
    neuter
    1. the (red) lotus AN iii.239 = J i.116
    cp. Sanskrit kokanada
    Kokāsika
    1. the red lotus in ˚jāta “like the red lotus,” said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree AN iv.118
    Kokila
    1. the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at Vv-a 57: kāḷa˚; and phussa˚ black and speckled k. As citra˚; at Ja v.416
    • Vv 111 588 Vv-a 132 163
    cp. Sanskrit koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Latin cuculus English cuckoo
    Koca
    1. ‣See saṁ˚
    from kuc
    Koci
    1. ‣See ka
    Koccha1
    1. neuter some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149 Vin iv.40 (where the following definition is given: kocchaṁ nāma vāka-mayaṁ vā usīra-mayaṁ vā muñjamayaṁ vā babbaja-mayaṁ vā anto saṁveṭhetvā baddhaṁ hoti. cp. Vinaya Texts i.34; iii.165) Ja v.407 Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Mil 11
    Koccha2
    neuter a comb (for hair-dressing) Vin ii.107 Vv 8446 (= Vv-a 349) Thag 2, 254 411 (= Thag-a 267).
    1. ˚kāra a comb-maker Mil 331 (not in corresponding list of vocations at DN i.51)
    Koja
    1. mail armour Ja iv.296 (= kavaca)
    Kojava
    1. a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281 Dhp-a i.177 Dhp-a iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36 Often in explanation of goṇaka (q.v.) as dīgha-lomaka mahākojava DN-a i.86 Pv-a 157
    Koñca1
    1. the heron, often in comb; n with mayūra (peacock): Thag 1, 1113 Vv 111 358 Ja v.304 Ja vi.272 or with haṁsa Pv ii.123
    • explained as sārasa Vv-a 57 jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dhp 155
    cp. Sanskrit krauñca & kruñc
    Koñca2
    = abbr. of koñca-nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaṁ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109 Ja vi.497
    1. ˚nāda the trumpeting of an elephant (“the heron’s cry”)
    1. Ja i.50 Mil 76 (in etymol play with koñca) Vv-a 35
    • ˚rāva = preceding Dhp-a iv.70
    • ˚vādikā a kind of bird Ja vi.538
    not with Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Latin crux, English ridge), but probably a contamination of krośa, from krus to crow, and kuñja = kuñjara, elephant (q.v.) Partly suggested at Divy 251 ‣See also explanation at Vv-a 35 where this connection is quite evident.
    Koṭa
    1. belonging to a peak, in compound ˚pabbata “peak-mountain,” N plural Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292
    2. from kūṭa2
    Koṭacikā
    1. pudendum muliebre, in connection with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Buddhaghosa koṭacikā ti itthinimittaṁ … hīno nāma akkoso)
    Koṭi
    feminine
    1. the end-(a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at Ja vi.371): dhanu-koṭiṁ nissāya “through the (curved) end of my bow,” i.e. by means of hunting Ja ii.200 aṭṭhi-koṭi the tip of the bone Ja iii.26 cāpa a bow Vv-a 261 vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved Dhp-a iii.175 khetta˚ the top (end) of the field Snp-a 150 cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister Ja iv.30 Pv-a 79
    • (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the
    • future, in pubba˚; the past (cp pubbanta), also as purima˚; ; and pacchima˚; the
    • future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saṁsāra: saṁsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati “the first end, i.e. the beginning of Saṁsāra is not known” Nd2 664 Dhs-a 11 of pacchimā koṭi ibid
    • anamatagg âyaṁ saṁsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S’s end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting-point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) SN ii.178 = iii.149 Nd2 664 = Kvu 29 = Pv-a 166 cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati)
    • koṭiyaṁ ṭhito bhāvo “my existence in the past” Ja i.167
    • (c) of number: the “end” of the scale, i.e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd2 664 and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, especially in records of wealth (dhana) Snp 677 Ja i.227 Ja i.230 Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367 (asīti˚-vibhavo) Ja i.478 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Mil 6 Mil 18-kahāpaṇa-koṭi-santhārena “for the price (literally by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas” Vin ii.159 Ja i.94 (reference to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika)
    1. ˚gata “gone to the end,” having reached the end i.e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd2 436
    2. ˚ppatta = prec Nd2 436; as “extreme” Ja i.67
    • ˚simbalī name of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194
    cp. Sanskrit koṭi & kūṭa; 2
    Koṭika
    adjective
    1. having a point or a top, with reference to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚; , ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251
    2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta ‣See KS. p. 320 āpāna˚; lasting till the end of life Mil 397: Vism 10. 3. referring to (both) ends (of saṁsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past &
    3. future MN i.393f.
    from koṭi
    Koṭin
    adjective
    1. aiming for an end or goal Ja vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2)
    from koṭi
    Koṭilla
    neuter
    1. crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472
    from kuṭila
    Koṭumbara
    neuter
    1. a kind of cloth Ja vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). —˚ka k
    • stuffs Mil 2
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kauṭumba Divy 559
    Koṭṭa
    1. (?) breaking, asi-k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚
    Koṭṭana
    1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) Ja i.475
    2. ˚pacan’ ādi pounding and cooking, etc Dhp-a ii.261
    3. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru Ja ii.18 Ja vi.86 (maṁsa˚, here “beating,” Text spells ṭṭh) cp. adhikuṭṭanā
    from koṭṭeti
    Koṭṭita
    1. (past participle of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255.

    Koṭṭima
    1. a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47
    Koṭṭeti
    1. -1. to beat, smash, crush, pound Ja i.478 vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh) Dhp-a i.25 (suvaṇṇaṁ) 165
    • to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors) Ja vi.332

  • to cut, kill Snp-a 178 (= hanti of Snp 121) Dhp-a i.70 (pharasunā).

    • past participle koṭṭita

      • Caus koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266 Ja iv.37 (ṭṭ the only variant reading B.; Text has ṭṭh)
      cp. Sanskrit kuṭ; & kuṭṭa; 1. explained one-sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as “chedane” which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning “beat” is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root; kuṭ3 ‣See kūṭa3 by expla “akoṭane.” cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti
  • Koṭṭha1
    masculine neuter
    1. anything hollow and closed in (cp. gabbha for both meanings) as
    1. -1. the stomach or abdomen Mil 265 Vism 357; Sdhp 257
    • a closet, a monk’s cell, a storeroom MN i.332 Thag 2, 283 (?) = Thag-a, 219 Ja ii.168 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171
    1. ˚aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, 255
    2. ˚abbhantara the intestinal canal Mil 67
    • ˚āgāra
    • neuter storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn with kosa (q.v.) in formula paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhâgāra
    • adjective DN i.134 explained at DN-a i.295 as threefold, viz dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse Pv-a 126 Pv-a 133
    • ˚āgārika a storehouse-keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209 Dhp-a i.101
    • ˚āsa = koṭṭha + aṁsa
      1. share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa adjective divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Commentarial passages is used to explain bhāga: Ja i.254 266 vi.368 Mil 324 Dhp-a iv.; 108 (= pada), 154 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 111 Pv-a 205 (kāma˚ = kāmaguṇā) Vv-a 62 anekena k˚-ena infinitely Pv-a 221
    Sanskrit koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Latin cunnus pudendum, German hode testicle
    Koṭṭha2
    1. a bird Ja vi.539 (woodpecker?)
    Koṭṭha3
    1. name of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) Ja v.420
    cp. Sanskrit kuṭṭha
    Koṭṭhaka1
    1. neuter “a kind of koṭṭha,” the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store-room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153 210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121 = 142; 220 treasury Ja i.230 Ja ii.168 -store-room Ja ii.246 koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i.e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291 -udaka-k a bath-room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Buddhaghosa’s explanation at Vinaya Texts ii.57); so also nahāna-k˚; and piṭṭhi-k˚; , bath-room behind a hermitage Ja iii.71 Dhp-a ii.19 a gateway Vin ii.77 usually in compound dvāra-k˚; “door cavity, i.e. room over the gate: gharaṁ satta-dvāra-koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaṁ “a mansion adorned with seven gateways” Ja i.227 = 230, 290 Vv-a 322 dvāra-koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti “they spread mats in the gateways” Vv-a 6 especially with bahi : bahi-dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā “leading him out in front of the gateway” AN iv.206 ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway SN i.77 MN i.161 MN i.382 AN iii.30
    • bala-k. a line of infantry Ja i.179
    • koṭṭhaka-kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6 Kern, Toevoegselen s. v “someone who sweeps away dirt.”
    Koṭṭhaka2
    1. the paddy-bird, as rukkha˚ Ja iii.25 Ja ii.163 (variant reading ṭṭ)
    cp. Sanskrit koyaṣṭika
    Koṭṭhu
    1. ‣See kotthu
    Koṭṭheti
    1. at Ja ii.424 the variant reading khobheti (nāvaṁ) should be substituted ‣See also koṭṭeti
    Koṇa
    1. a corner Vin ii.137 catu˚ = catu-kaṇṇa Pv-a 52 -˚racchā crossroads Pv-a 24
    2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Mil 53
    cp. Sanskrit koṇa & also Pali kaṇṇa
    Koṇṭa
    1. (variant reading B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits Ja ii.209 210, 212
    Koṇṭha
    1. a cripple Ja ii.118 Konda-
    Koṇḍa-
    damaka (?)
    1. Ja iv.389 also as variant reading B at Ja ii.209
    cp. kuṇḍa
    Koṇḍañña
    1. a well-known gotta Ja ii.360
    Kotūhala
    neuter
    1. excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80 especially in ˚maṅgalaṁ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of … MN i.265 A. iii.439; ˚maṅgalika celebrating feasts, festive AN iii.206 Ja i.373 Mil 94 (cp. Miln translation i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika)-(b) adjective: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Mil 4 Dhp-a i.330
    1. ˚sadda shout of excitement Mil 301
    on formation cp. kolāhala ‣See also kutūhala
    Kotthalī
    1. (koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189 = iv.269
    Kotthu
    1. a jackal DN iii.25 DN iii.26 MN i.334 Nd1 149 (spelt koṭṭhu) Ja vi.537 (˚sunā: explained by sigāla-sunakhā, katthu-soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka) = preceding SN i.66 (where text has kutthaka) Ja ii.108 Mil 23
    koṭṭhu Ja only: cp. Sanskrit kroṣṭu, of kruś
    Kodaṇḍa
    neuter
    1. a cross-bow MN i.429 (opposite to cāpa) Mil 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same Ja iv.433 (explained by dhanu)
    cp. Sanskrit kodaṇḍa
    Kodumbara
    1. ‣See koṭumbara
    Kodha
    1. an absolutive Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060 = Nd2 576 both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp , Middle High German toûm = anger). As pair k. and upanāha AN i.91 AN i.95 in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa etc. Nd2 rāga 1. Vb 357f.; Vism 53, 107, 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha MN i.36 AN i.299 = iv.148; cp. AN iv.456 = v.209; v.39, 49 sq., 310 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060 = Nd2 576 cp. Pug 18 In other combination : with mada and thambha Snp 245
    2. kadariya Snp 362
    3. pesuniya Snp 928
    4. mosavajja Snp 866 Snp 868 (cp. SN i.169). Other passages, e. g AN i.283 SN i.240 Snp 537 (lobha˚) Pv ii.37; Dhp i.52 (anattha-janano kodho) Pv-a 55 Pv-a 222

      • kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind
      • mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi “let not anger get the better of you” SN i.240 māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaṁ etc. “anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes” SN i.169 = Nd2 576
      • kodhaṁ chetvā cutting off anger SN i.41 = 47 = 161 = 237; kodhaṁ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṁ “give up anger, renounce conceit Ja i.23 25 = Dh 221; kodhaṁ pajahanti vipassino: “the wise give up anger” Iti 2 = 7; panuṇṇa-kodha
      • adjective one who has driven out anger Snp 469 akkodhena jine kodhaṁ conquer anger by meekness Dhp 223 = J ii.4 = Vv-a 69 Yo ye uppatitaṁ kodhaṁ rathaṁ bhantaṁ va dhāraye tam ahaṁ sārathiṁ brūmi-"He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner” Dhp 222 cp. Snp 1
      • akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation MN i.44 SN i.240 (with avihiṁsā tenderness, kindness) AN i.95 Dhp 223 = J ii.4 = Vv-a 69
      1. ˚ātimāna anger and conceit Snp 968
      • ˚upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opposite akkodh˚) MN i.360 MN i.363 often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. “uddhumāyika” kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaṁ MN i.144 “sa-ummī” Iti 114 “sobbho papāto” SN iii.109
      • ˚garu “having respect for” i.e. pursuing anger (opposite saddhammagaru) AN ii.46f. 84 -paññāṇa
      • adjective knowing the true nature of anger Snp 96 (cp. Snp-a 170)
      • ˚bhakkha feeding on, i.e. fostering anger, epithet of a Yakkha SN i.238
      • ˚vinaya the discipline or control of anger AN i.91 AN v.165 AN v.167 (combined with upanāha vinaya)
      Vedic krodha from krudh, cp. kujjhati
    Kodhana
    adjective
    1. ; usually in combination with upanāhin, e.g. Vin ii.89 DN iii.45 DN iii.246 AN v.156 cp. Snp 116 SN ii.206 Pug 18
    • k˚ kodhābhibhūta AN iv.94f.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī. AN v.165
    • Used of caṇḍa Pv-a 83
    • cp. SN iv.240 MN i.42f. 95 sq. Pv-a 82 akkodhana friendly, well-disposed, loving DN iii.159 SN ii.207 SN iv.243 MN i.42f. 95 sq. Snp 19 Snp 624 Snp 850 Snp 941 Vv 155 Vv-a 69
    from kodha) having anger, angry, uncontrolled
    Konta
    1. a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) Ja vi.454 DN-a i.244 Snp-a 317
    Kontīmant
    1. at Ja vi.454 is explained by camma-kāra, thus “worker in leather (-shields or armour),” with derived from konta (“satthitāya kontāya likhattā …”), but reading and meaning are uncertain
    Kopa
    1. ill-temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184 = Sn 6 Dhs 1060 with appaccaya (mistrust) MN i.27 almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) “he shows forth ill-temper malice and mistrust” (of a “codita” bhikkhu) DN iii.159 SN iv.305 MN i.96f. 250, 442 AN i.124 AN i.187 ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193 Ja i.301 Snp p. 92. akopa adjective friendly, without hatred, composed Snp 499

      1. ˚antara adjective one who is under the power of ill-temper SN i.24
      2. from kup
    Kopaneyya
    adjective
    1. apt to arouse anger Ja vi.257
    from kopa
    Kopīna
    neuter
    1. a loin-cloth Ja v.404 Pv ii.323 Pv-a 172 Sdhp 106
    1. ˚niddaṁsanin “one who removes the loin-cloth,” i.e. shameless, impure DN iii.183
    cp. Sanskrit kaupīna
    Kopeti
    1. to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules Pv-a 161 Ja ii.366 = Dhp-a iv.88 kammaṁ kopetuṁ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision kāyangaṁ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body ‣See kāya. cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saṁ˚
    causative of kuppati
    Komala
    1. ‣See kamala; Mhbv.29
    Komāra
    adjective juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden:
    • feminine komārī a virgin AN iv.210

      1. ˚pati husband of a girl-wife Ja ii.120
      • ˚brahmacariyā (˚ṁ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity AN iii.224 Thag-a 99
      • ˚bhacca proper name “master of the k˚-science,” i.e. of the medical treatment of infants ‣See note on Vin i.269 at Vinaya Texts ii.174. As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka DN i.47 (as Komārabhacca DN-a i.132) Vin i.71 Ja i.116 cp. Sdhp 351
      from kumāra
    Komāraka
    1. (and ˚ika) = preceding AN i.261 Ja ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree SN iv.160 feminine ˚ikā Ja iii.266

    Komudī
    feminine
    1. moonlight; the full-moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155 176, sq. DN i.47 (explained at DN-a i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya Dhp-a iii.461
    from kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sanskrit kaumudī
    Koraka
    masculine neuter
    1. a bud Ja ii.265 - 2. a sheath Ja iii.282
    2. cp. Sanskrit koraka
    Korakita
    adjective
    1. full of buds Vv-a 288
    from koraka
    Korajika
    adjective
    1. affected, excitable, infatuated Nd1 226 = Nd2 342 (variant reading kocaraka) = Vism 26 (variant reading korañjika)
    from ku + raj or rañj, cp. rāga
    Koraṇḍaka
    1. a shrub and its flower Ja v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as N plural in Koraṇḍaka-vihāra Vism 91
    2. = kuraṇḍaka
    Korabya
    1. proper name as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru Ja ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya)
    Sanskrit kauravya
    Koriyā
    feminine a hen variant reading (ti vā pāḷi) at Thag 2, 381 for turiyā ‣See also Thag-a 255 (= kuñcakārakukkuṭī).
    Kola
    masculine neuter
    1. the jujube fruit MN i.80 AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolakaṁ sūkaramaṁsa “pork with jujube”) Ja iii.22 (= badara); vi.578
    1. ˚mattiyo (plural ) of the size of a j. truit, always comb with kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo, of boils. AN v.170 = Sn p. 125, cp. SN i.150
    2. ˚rukkha the j. tree Snp-a 356 DN-a i.262
    3. ˚sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (= Vv-a 186)
    4. Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of “hog,” corrupted from kroḍa
    Kolaṅkola
    1. going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saṁsāra: AN i.233 = Pug 16 SN v.205 Nett 189 cp. AN iv.381 AN v.120
    derived from kula
    Kolañña
    adjective
    1. born of (good) family (cp. kulaja); as—˚, belonging to the family of … DN i.89 DN-a i.252 Mil 256
    • khīṇa-kolañña
    • adjective one who has come down in the world Vin i.86
    from kula
    Kolaṭṭhi
    1. the kernel of the jujube, only in compound ˚mattiyo (plural ) SN i.150 = AN v.170 = Sn p. 125 (with kolamattiyo) and ˚mattā Thag 2, 498 = Thag-a 289 Dhp-a i.319

    Kolaputti
    1. at AN i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the following
    • vaṇṇa-pokkharatā i.e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern Toevoegselen s.v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as “heroncolour,” comparing Sanskrit kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd1 80 = Nd2 505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaṁ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The AN passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaṁ
    Kolamba
    1. (and koḷamba Vv-a) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208 213, 225, 286 Ja i.33 DN-a i.58 Vv-a 36
    Kolāhala
    neuter (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excitement about (—˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumerated at Kp-a 120 sq. viz. kappa˚; (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚; (of a worldking), buddha˚; (of a Buddha), maṅgala˚; (that a Buddha will pronounce the “”), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom cp. Snp-a 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā-)halāhalāni given at Ja i.48 as kappa-halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka-kolāhalaṁ one uproar Ja iv.404 Ja vi.586 Dhp-a ii.96 ‣See also Vin ii.165 275, 280 Ja v.437 Dhp-a i.190 Pv-a 4 Vv-a 132
    Koliya
    adjective
    1. of the fruit of the jujube tree Ja iii.22 but wrongly explained as kula-dattika ph. = given by a man of (good) family
    from kola
    Kolīniyā
    feminine well-bred, of good family Ja ii.348 (
    • Burmese manuscripts koleyyaka.

    Koleyyaka
    adjective of good breed, noble, applied to dogs Ja i.175 Ja iv.437 cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed.
    Koḷāpa
    1. (and kolāpa adjective
    2. dry, sapless; always applied to wood, frequently in similes SN iv.161 SN iv.185 MN i.242 MN iii.95 Ja iii.495 Mil 151 Dhp-a ii.51 Dhp-a iv.166
    3. hollow tree Nd2 40 Snp-a 355 (where Weber, Indische Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara = Sanskrit koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted)
    Koḷikā
    1. (or kolika?) feminine adjective = kolaka, ap
    2. plural to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Thag 2, 395 (ex
    3. plural at Thag-a 259 akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati).

    Kovida
    adjective
    1. one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with reference either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita SN i.146 SN i.194 SN i.196 (ceto-pariyāya˚) AN ii.46 MN i.1 MN i.7 135, 300, 310, 433 Dhp 403 = Sn 627 Snp 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚) Pv i.1112 Vv 159 (= Vv-a 73), 6330 (= Vv-a 269) Mil 344 Sdhp 350-akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) SN i.162 Snp 763 SN iv.287 = Nd2 on attānudiṭṭhi
    ku + vid.
    Koviḷāra
    Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k-blossom called p. Vv-a 174) AN iv.117f. Snp 44 Ja iv.29 Vv 381 Dhp-a i.270
    1. ˚puppha the flower of the K. tree Snp-a 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower)
    cp. Sanskrit kovidāra
    Kosa1
    1. masculine neuter [cp. Sanskrit kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Gothic hūs, English house; related also kukṣi = Pali kucchi any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store-room or storehouse, treasury or granary AN iv.95 (rāja˚) Snp 525 Ja iv.409 (= wealth, stores) Ja vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in compound
    • ˚ koṭṭhāgāra explained at DN-a i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraṁ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaṁ˚. 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ Kp-a 46. 3. a vessel or bowl for food ‣See kosaka
    • a cocoon ‣See—˚kāraka

  • the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium Ja v.197 The Com explains by sarīra-saṁkhāta k˚ ‣See compound kosohita. cp. also kosī.

    1. ˚ārakkha the keeper of the king’s treasury (or granary AN iii.57
    • ˚ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha “having the pudendum in a bag.” Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā-purisa) DN iii.143 DN iii.161 Applied as to this item to the Buddha DN i.106 (in the Cy DN-a i.275 correct the misprint kesa into kosa) DN ii.17 Snp 1022
    • past participle 106, 107 Miln 167. For the myth ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha iii.132

      1. -136
      2. ˚kāraka the “cocoon-maker,” i.e. the silk-worm, Vin iii.224 Vism 251
      3. ˚koṭṭhāgāra “treasury and granary” usually in phrase paripuṇṇa-k-k adjective “with stores of treasures and other wealth” Vin i.342 DN i.134 SN i.89 Mil 2 & passim

  • Kosa2
    1. at Vv-a 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and translated by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresponding passage in Thag-a 267 (cp. koccha)
    Kosaka
    1. a sheath for a needle Ja iii.282 - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food Ja i.349 (variant reading kesaka) MN ii.6 MN ii.7 (—˚āhāra adjective living on a bowl-full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263
    2. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251
    from kosa
    Kosajja
    neuter
    1. idleness, sloth, indolence; explained at Vb 369
    • Vin ii.2 SN v.277–⁠280 AN i.11 AN i.16 ii.218; iii.375, 421; v.146 sq.; 159 sq. AN iv.195 Dhp 241 Mil 351 Vism 132; Nett 127 Dhp-a iii.347 iv.85 Dhs-a 146 Snp-a 21
    From kusīta
    Kosamattha
    1. = ka + samattha “who is able,” i.e. able, fit DN-a i.27
    Kosalla
    neuter
    1. proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at DN iii.220 Vb 325 & Vism 439 sq. viz.; āya˚, apāya˚; and upāya˚; ; at Dhs 16 = 20 = 292 555 = Nd2 ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña ‣See also Pug 25 Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚) 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚) Pv-a 63 Pv-a 99 (upāya˚)
    derived from kusala
    Kosātakī
    feminine
    1. a kind of creeper Vv 474 Vism 256, 260, 359 Vv-a 200 -bīja the ‣Seed of the k. AN i.32 = v.212
    cp. Sanskrit kośātakī
    Kosika
    1. = kosiya, an owl Ja v.120
    Kosiya
    1. an owl Ja ii.353 cp. proper name Kosiyāyana Ja i.496 Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) Ja iv.69
    Kosī
    feminine a sheath DN i.77 = MN ii.17
    Koseyya
    silk; silken material Vin i.58 = Mil 267 Vin i.192 281; ii.163, 169 DN i.7 cp. AN i.181 ‣See DN-a i.87 AN iv.394 Pv ii.117 Ja i.43 Ja vi.47
    1. ˚pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281
    • ˚vattha a silk garment Dhp-a i.395
    derived from kosa, cp. Sanskrit kauśeya silk-cloth and Pali kosa-kāraka
    Kohañña
    neuter
    1. hypocrisy, deceit Ja ii.72 Ja iii.268 Ja iv.304 Dhp-a i.141
    from kuhana
    Kvaṇ
    indeclinable is together with kuṇ registered as a participle of sound (“sadde”) at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173.
    1. Kh

    Kh

    Kha
    1. syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning “void, empty” or as noun meaning “space”; explained. by Buddhaghosa with reference to dukkha as “khaṁ saddo pana tucche; tucchaṁ hi ākāsaṁ khan ti vuccati” Vism 494-In meaning “space, sky” in compound khaga “sky-goer (cp. viha-ga of same meaning), i.e. bird Abhp 624 Bdhd 56.

    Khagga
    1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at DN i.7 (Dh i.89 = asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit khaḍga-maṇi Divy 147 one of the royal insignia); -khaggaṁ bhandati to gird on one’s sword Pv-a 154 khaggaṁ sannayhati identical Dhp-a iii.75
    2. ˚gāhaka a sword-bearer Mil 114
    3. ˚tala sword-blade Mhvs 25, 90
    4. a rhinoceros Ja v.406 (= gavaja)
      1. 416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In compound ˚visāṇā (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294 = Sn 36) the horn of a rh (: khagga-visāṇaṁ nāma khagga-miga-singaṁ Snp-a 65 Snp 35f. (name of Sutta) Nd2 217 (khagga-visāṇa-kappa “like the horn of the rh.” epithet of a Paccekabuddha (cp. Divy 294 Divy 582), also at Vism 234
      Sanskrit khaḍga; perhaps to Latin clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3
    Khacita
    1. inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e.g. Vv-a 14 277; maṇi-muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā “bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc.” Vv-a 36 of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta-khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.) Suvaṇṇa-khacita-gajak’ attharaṇā “elephants’ trappings interwoven with gold” Vv-a 104 of a chair, inlaid with pearls Ja i.41 of a canopy embroidered with golden stars Ja i.57
    past participle of khac as root explained at Dhtm. 518 by “bandhana”
    Khajja
    adjective neuter
    1. to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in compound -bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita sāyita Pv i.52 (= Pv-a 25) Ja i.58 Mil 2
    • ˚bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (= v.204); iv.38, 155
    gerundive of khajjati
    Khajjaka
    adjective
    1. eatable, i.e. solid food (as ˚bhojjanāni opposed to yāgu Pv-a 23); neuter Ja i.186 (of 18 kinds, opposite yāgu); i.235 (identical) Mil 294

      • ˚bhājaka preceding
      from last
    Khajjati
    1. (= khādiyati, passive of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhakkhaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals upacikāhi Vin ii.113 suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi Ja iii.177 cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two)
    • to be itchy to be irritated by itch (cp. English “itch” = Intens. of “eat”) Ja v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚)

  • to be devoured (figuratively), to be consumed to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi M. i.504; rūpena SN iii.87 SN iii.88 (khajjanīya-pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).

  • Khajjara
    1. caterpillar Pgdp 48
    Khajjopanaka
    1. the fire-fly MN ii.34 = 41 Ja ii.415 Ja vi.330 Ja vi.441 Dhp-a iii.178 also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile) ‣See Trenckner Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908 59 & 79
    cp. Sanskrit khadyota
    Khañja
    adjective
    1. lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227 Vin ii.90 = AN i.107 = ii.85 = Pug 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi) Thag 2, 438 (+ kāṇa) Dhp-a i.376 (+ kuṇi)
    cp. Sanskrit khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gativekalye
    Khañjati
    1. to be lame Pv iii.228
    from khañja
    Khañjana
    neuter hobbling, walking lame Pv-a 185
    Khaṭakhaṭa
    1. (khāṭ-kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one’s throat: -sadda Vin i.188 Dhp-a iii.330 cp. khakkhaṭa (variant reading khaṭkhaṭa Divy 518 = utkāśanaśabda
    Khaṭopikā
    feminine
    1. couch, bedstead MN i.450 MN i.451 (variant readings ka˚, khajj˚)
    perhaps connected with Sanskrit khaṭvā? uncertain
    Khaṇa1
    masculine
    1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen’ eva “in no time” Pv-a 38117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā “let not the slightest time be wasted Snp 333 = Dh 315; cp. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n’ atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaṁ (nadī) āramati “there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing” AN iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa-vasena uppād’ ādi-khaṇa-ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431) Ja iv.128 aṭṭha-kkhaṇa-vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4 Sdhp 16; cp. 45, 46
    2. moment as coincidence of two events: “at the same moment,” especially in phrase taṁ khaṇaṁ yeva “all at once,” simultaneously with which synonym ṭhānaso Ja i.167 Ja i.253 Ja iii.276 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 35; tasmiṁ khaṇe Ja ii.154 Pv-a 67 Sdhp 17. 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with reference to birth, rebirth, fruit of action attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in compounds.: cuti-kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vb 411f.; sotāpattimagga˚ Ps ii.3; phala˚ Ps i.26 Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94 citta˚ identical 38, 95
    3. khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dhp 239 (= okāse okāse Dhp-a iii.340 but cp. Comp. 161, note 5) Buddhuppāda˚, Thag ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa ‣See sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin
    4. ˚akkhaṇe at the wrong time inopportune Pv iv.140 (= akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, note 5
      1. ˚ātīta having missed the opportunity Snp 333 = Dh 315 (= Dhp-a iii.489)
      2. ˚ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Snp 325 (cp. Snp-a 333)
      3. ˚paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚) -paritta small as a moment Vism 238
      Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sanskrit kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa ‣Seeing by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.
    Khaṇa2
    1. digging Ja ii.296 cp. atikhaṇa
    from khaṇ
    Khaṇati
    1. to dig (? better “destroy”; cp. Kern Toevoegselen s.v.), dig out uproot Dhp 247 Dhp 337; Snp p. 101 Ja ii.295 Ja iv.371 Ja iv.373 Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp. ; abhikkhaṇati palikkhaṇati
    2. = Sanskrit kṣanati
      1. to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaṁ) MN i.132 (identical). past participle khata & khāta; (cp palikkhata)
      2. from khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe
    Khaṇana
    neuter
    1. digging Mil 351 (pokkharaṇi˚)
    from khaṇ
    Khaṇika
    adjective
    1. unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually synonym with ittara, e.g. Ja i.393 Ja iii.83 Pv-a 60
    • Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti “momentary joy” is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā pharaṇā ‣See pīti Vism 143, Dhs-a 115
    1. ˚citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289 -maraṇa sudden death Vism 229
    2. ˚vassa momentary i.e. sudden rain (-shower) Ja vi.486
    from khaṇa
    Khaṇikatta
    neuter
    1. evanescence, momentariness Vism 301
    from khaṇika
    Khaṇḍa
    1. adjective broken, usually of teeth Thag 2, 260 (= Thag-a 211) Mil 342 Vism 51. 2.
    2. masculine neuter a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122 coḷa˚ a bit of cloth Pv-a 70 pilotika˚ bits of rags Pv-a 171 pūva˚ a bit of cake Ja iii.276 -akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla-precepts Vv.113 cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89.

      -ākhaṇḍa (reduplicated-iterative formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115

    3. ˚ākhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ṁ chindati to break up into fragments AN i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā) SN ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ṁ chedāpetvā) Ja v.231 (˚ṁ katvā)
    4. ˚danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc “with broken teeth and grey hair” AN i.138 and ≈ Ja i.59 Ja i.79 (identical)
    5. ˚phulla Buddhaghosa on Vin ii.160 khaṇḍa = bhinn'okāso, phulla = phalit’ okāso.
      1. broken and shattered portions; ˚ṁ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (= navakammaṁ karoti) 286; iii.287 AN iii.263 cp. same expression at Divy 22. ; unbroken and unimpaired figuratively of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316 = Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla) = Dhp-a i.32
      frequently spelt kaṇḍa (q.v.) cp. Sanskrit khaṇḍa; explained at Dhtp 105 as “chedana”
    Khaṇḍati
    1. to break, Dhp-a iv.14 past participle khaṇḍita broken, Pv-a 158 (-kaṇṇo = chinnakaṇṇo).

    Khaṇḍikā
    feminine
    1. a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 (= ucchu-yaṭṭhi Dhp-a iii.315)
    from khaṇḍa
    Khaṇḍicca
    neuter the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age ‣See above MN i.49 = DN ii.305 AN iii.196 Dhs 644 = 736 = 869 Dhp-a iii.123 in similar connection Vism 449.
    Khaṇḍeti
    1. to renounce, to remit, in vetanaṁ ˚etvā Ja iii.188
    v. denominative from khaṇḍa
    Khata1
    1. dug up, uprooted, figuratively one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combination with upahata DN i.86 (= DN-a i.237); khataṁ upahataṁ attānaṁ pariharati “he keeps himself uprooted and half-dead” i.e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas AN i.105 = ii.4; opposite akkhataṁ anupahataṁ etc. AN i.89
    2. past participle of khanati
    Khata2
    1. hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya “he grazed his foot” SN i.27 = Mil 134 Mil 179
    • akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta Vv-a 351) ‣See also parikkhata
    past participle of kṣan, to wound
    Khataka
    1. damage, injury Vv-a 206 khatakaṁ dāsiyā deti “she did harm to the servant, she struck the s.” Or is it khalikaṁ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt
    from khata2
    Khatta
    neuter
    1. rule, power, possession; only in compounds.:
    1. ˚dhamma the law of ruling, political science Ja v.490 (is it khattu˚ = khattā˚?) -vijjā polity DN i.9 condemned as a practice of heretics. Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.93 explains it as nīti-sattha, political science (= ˚dhamma) ‣See Rhys Davids Dialogues of the Buddha i.18
    2. ˚vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks Ja v.228 (paraphrased mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti “even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself”), so also Ja v.240
    • ˚vijjācariya one who practises kh—˚vijjā ibid
    • ˚vida (so read for ˚vidha) = ˚vijja
    • adjective a tricky person, ibid (variant reading ˚vijja, better). cp. Sanskrit kṣātra-vidya
    Sanskrit kṣatra, to kṣi
    Khattar
    1. attendant, companion, charioteer, the king’s minister and adviser (Latin satelles “satellite” has been compared for etymology) DN i.112 (= DN-a i.280 kh˚ vuccati pucchita-pucchita-pañhaṁ vyākaraṇa-samattho mahāmatto: “kh˚ is called the King’s minister who is able to answer all his questions”) Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond = katthā; gādhaṁ k˚ AN ii.107 = Pug 43 variant reading for kattā (cp. Pug AN 225)
    Sanskrit kṣattṛ from kṣatra
    Khattiya
    plural nominative also khattiyāse Ja iii.441 A shortened form is khatya Ja vi.397
    • feminine khattiyā AN iii.226–⁠229, khattī D. i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha’s time is discussed in Dialogues of the Buddha i.97–107 and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiṁ DN i.199 = ii.97 = M i.358 = SN i.153 SN ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas ‣See further MN ii.150–157 MN iii.169 AN ii.86 SN i.71 SN i.93 Vin iv.6–10 On the religious side of the question DN iii.82 93 MN i.149 MN i.177 ii.84 SN i.98 Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place Such are referred to at SN i.15 All kings and chieftains were khattiyas DN i.69 DN i.136 DN iii.44 DN iii.46 DN iii.61 AN i.106 iii.299; iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294 quoted Netti.165.

      1. ˚ābhiseka the inauguration of a king AN i.107 AN i.108 (of the crown-prince) = AN ii.87
      • ˚kaññā a maid of khattiya birth Ja i.60 Ja iii.394
      • ˚kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. reference to Gotama’s descent) iii.80
      • ˚parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa) at Vin i.227 AN ii.133 as the first one of the eight (1
      • as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṁsa˚ Māra˚, Brahma˚) at MN i.72 = DN iii.260
      • ˚mahāsāla “the wealthy khattiya” ‣See above ii.1 DN iii.258 etc
      • ˚māyā “the magic of the noble” Dhp-a i.166
      • ˚vaṁsa aristocratic descent DN-a i.267
      • ˚sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) Dhp-a i.5
      • derived from khatta = kṣatra “having possessions”; Sanskrit kṣatriya
    Khattiyī
    feminine a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī AN iii.229 similarly MN ii.33 MN ii.40
    ˚Khattuṁ
    1. in compound with numerals “times”: dvikkhattuṁ, tikkhattuṁ, etc.; twice, three times, etc
    Sanskrit ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad
    Khadira
    1. the tree Acacia catechu, in compounds
    2. ˚aṅgārā (plural embers of (burnt) acacia-wood Ja i.232 Pv-a 152
    3. ˚ghaṭikā a piece of a

      • wood Ja iv.88
      • ˚tthambha a post of a
      • wood Dhp-a iii.206
      • ˚patta a bowl made of a
      • wood Ja v.389
      • ˚vana a forest of acacias Ja ii.162
      • ˚sūla an impaling stake of a
      • wood Ja iv.29
      Sanskrit khadira; Latin hedera, ivy
    Khanati
    1. ‣See khaṇati
    Khanittī
    feminine
    1. a spade or hoe Vin i.270 Ja vi.520 = V.89 (+ ankusa)
    to khan, cp. Sanskrit khanitra
    Khantar
    1. possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant AN ii.116 = iii.161 sq. Khanti & Khanti
    n. agent of khanti
    Khanti
    Khantī
    feminine
    1. patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Definition at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaṁ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love ‣See below
    2. ˚titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaṁ tapo titikkhā nibbānaṁ paramaṁ vadanti Buddhā Dhp 184 = DN ii.49 = Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, SN i.226 cp. Dhp-a iii.237: titikkhā-sankhātā khantī; -avihiṁsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiṁsā, mettatā anudayatā, SN v.169
    • ˚akodhana (forbearing, gentle Vv-a 71
    • ˚soraccaṁ (docility, tractableness) DN iii.213 AN i.94 also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well-bred horse AN iii.248 cp. AN ii.113 and khantā -sovaccassatā (kind speech) Snp 266 (cp. Kp-a 148) ‣See also compounds

      • Khantī is one of the ten paramitās Ja i.22 23: cp. AN iii.254 AN iii.255
      • In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta SN i.30 ativissuto Sdhp 473 anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) AN iii.437 AN iii.441 Ps ii.236 sq. Vb 340 ‣See also AN iii.372 Snp 189 Snp 292 Snp 897 Snp 944 In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in definition of idha (Vb 245), tattha (Nd2) diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd2 151 and Vb 325 sq
      • akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (= kopa) Vb 360 (in def as opposite of khanti Dhs 1341 q.v. above), 378
      1. ˚bala neuter the force of forbearance;
      2. adjective one whose strength is patience: … aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaṁ balānīkaṁ tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ Dhp 399 = Sn 623; - Dhp-a iv.164 Ps ii.171, 176 -mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚-mettânuddayasampanna
      3. adjective one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance Ja i.151 Ja i.262 Pv-a 66 (+ yuttakāra) Vv-a 71 (in explanation of akodhana)
      4. ˚suñña
      5. neuter the void of khanti Ps ii.183
      6. ˚soracca
      7. neuter gentleness and forbearance SN i.100 SN i.222 AN ii.68 Ja iii.487 Dhp-a i.56 ˚e niviṭṭha “established in forbearance and meekness” AN iii.46 = DN iii.61
    Sanskrit kṣānti
    Khantika
    adjective
    1. acquiescing in-, of such and such a belief, in añña˚; belonging to another faith combined with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika DN i.187 MN i.487
    from preceding
    Khandati
    1. to jump, only in compound pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning “pakkhandana.”
    skand
    Khandha
    1. -I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. especially used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i.e. its back SN i.95 vāraṇassa Ja iii.392 hatthi-khandha-vara-gata on the back of the state elephant Ja i.325 Pv-a 75 Also with reference to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ “to whom has grown bulk = a large back” Snp 53 ex plural Snp-a 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho “well endowed with bulk.” (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaṁ khandhe karitvā SN i.115 ap
    2. plural to Māra; Vism 100 Dhp-a iv.168 (ohita˚-bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). -(c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa Pv-a 114 also as rukkha˚ Ja i.324 tāla˚ the stem of a palm Pv-a 56 nigrodhassa khandhaja ‣See compounds. SN i.207 = Sn 272 mūlaṁ atikkamma kh˚ ṁ sāraṁ pariyesitabbaṁ “one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness” SN iv.94

      • (d) as technical term in exegetical literature section, chapter, literally material as collected into uniform bulk; frequently in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries ‣See also khandhaka
      • B. More general as denoting bulk (—˚); e.g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire MN ii.34 MN ii.41 Ja iv.139 udaka˚ a mass of water (i.e. ocean) AN iii.336 SN iv.179 Ja i.324 Pv-a 62 puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit AN iii.336 = SN v.400 bhoga˚ a store of wealth. AN v.84 Ja i.6 maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) Ja ii.102f. -
      1. II. Applied meaning.-A. (—˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense “all that is comprised under”; forming the substance of. (a) dukkha˚; all that is comprised under “dukkha,” all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of “ill.” Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin destruction of all that is suffering) with reference to the paṭiccasamuppāda the chain of causal existence (q.v.) Vin i.1 SN ii.95 SN iii.14 AN i.177 AN v.184 & passim Similarly samudaya Vb 135f. nirodha Nett 64; antakiriyā AN i.147 vyādhimaraṇatunnānaṁ dukkhakkhandhaṁ vyapānudi Thag 2, 162
      • (b) lobha˚; dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, literally “the big bulk or mass of greed” (‣ See also under padāleti), SN v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā)
      • (c) vayo˚; a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima Nd2 in definition of sadā
      • (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5 groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla-sampadā, citta˚ paññā˚ DN i.172f. ‣See sīla. - DN i.206 Nett 64 sq.; 126 tīhi dhammehi samannāgato “possessed of the three qualities,” viz. sīla-kkhandhesu, etc. Iti 51 cp. AN i.291 AN v.326 tīhi khandhehi … aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito MN i.301 sīlakkhandhaṁ, etc. paripūreti “to fulfil the sīla-group” AN i.125 AN ii.20 AN iii.15f. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti-ñāṇa-dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1–⁠4 only at DN iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp. AN i.125 As 5 at SN i.99 = AN i.162 SN v.162 AN iii.134 271; v.16 (all
      • locative = SN i.99) Iti 107 108; Nd2 under sīla
      1. B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (plural ) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as rāsi, heap, e.g. Asl. 141; Vibh AN 1
      2. feminine ; cf B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the following stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚; (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), saṅkhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness) For further reference ‣See rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rhys Davids Dhs translation
      3. past participle 40

        1. -56. They are enumerated in a different order at SN i.112 viz. rūpaṁ vedayitaṁ saññaṁ viññāṇaṁ yañ ca sankhataṁ n’ eso 'ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature ‣See e.g. SN iii.101 (= Vb 1
        1. -61) SN iii.47 SN iii.86 As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚; rūpa˚ arūpa-dhātu Vb 404f.
        1. (a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: “yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaṁ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti” “just as it is by the condition precedent of the co-existence of its various parts, that the word ʻ chariot ʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻ being ʼ” (Rhys Davids (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) SN i.135 = Mil 28 Their connotation “khandha” is discussed at SN iii.101 = MN iii.16: “kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaṁ khandhâdhivacanaṁ rūpaṁ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ,” etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā … paccayo rūpa-khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso … vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc. nāmarūpaṁ … viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (SN iii.101); cp. MN i.138f. 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa-kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā “the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors” Nett 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu-pariyāpanno: Vb 409 the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Ps ii.74, also at Vb 230 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna)-Being the “substantial” factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi-kkhaṇe ‣See Ps ii.72
        1. -76. Thus the various phases of life in transmigration are defined as-jāti : ya tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho Nd2 on Snp 1052 cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti Vv-a 29 khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo jāti SN ii.3 Nett 29; khandhānaṁ nibbatti jāti Vism 199
        • maraṇaṁ :) yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ.. cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ maccu maraṇaṁ kālakiriyā khandhānaṁ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo MN i.49 = Vb 137 = SN ii.3 SN ii.42
        • vivaṭṭa-kkhandha
        • adjective one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away) i.e. dead SN i.121 = iii.123
        • kh˚anaṁ udaya-vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dhp 374 = Th 1, 23, 379 = It 120 = KhA 82 Ps i.54 sq
        • (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaṁ adhikuṭṭanā SN i.128 = Th 2, 58, 141 (Thag-a 65: natthi tesaṁ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. SN i.134 the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vb 208 -(c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i.e. of their cause & removal: yaṁ rūpaṁ, etc…. n’ etaṁ mama n’ eso 'haṁ asmi na m’ eso attā ti; evaṁ etaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passati; evaṁ kho jānato passato.. ahankāramamankāra-mānânusayā na hontī ti SN iii.103-pañca-kkhandhe pariññāya SN iii.83 pañca-kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Thag 2, 106 ‣See also SN i.134
        • (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense-perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuṁ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare SN i.134 kh˚-dh˚-āyatanaṁ sankhataṁ jātimūlaṁ Thag 2, 472 dhammaṁ adesesi khandh’ āyatana-dhātuyo Thag 2, 43 (cp. Thag-a 49). Enumerated under sabba-dhammā Ps i.101 = ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121 as lokuttara-kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358 528, 552
        • khandhānaṁ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo dhātūnaṁ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Ps i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157 In definition of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Ps i.83. In definition of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In definition of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 on sankhāta-dhammā (“kh sankhātā,” etc.), on tiṇṇa (“khandha-(etc.) pariyante thitā”), & passim
        • (e); their valuation & their bearing on the “soul"-conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaṁ), anattā, aniccaṁ and dukkhaṁ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaṁ (etc.) … aniccaṁ, dukkhaṁ, n’ eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me attā “material qualities (etc. kh. 2
        1. -5) are evanescent bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul” Vin i.14 = SN iv.382 n’ eso 'ham asmi na m’ eso attā SN i.112 SN iii.103 SN iii.130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaṁ (anattā rūpaṁ) SN ii.65 Nd2 680; and rūpaṁ na tumhākaṁ SN iii.33 MN i.140 = Nd2 680
        • rūpaṁ etc. as anattā: Vin i.13 SN iii.78 SN iii.132
        1. -134 AN i.284 ii.171; 202; cp. SN iii.101 Vin i.14
        • as aniccaṁ SN iii.41 SN iii.52 SN iii.102 SN iii.122 SN iii.132f. 181 sq., 195 sq., 202
        1. -224 227 AN iv.147 (aniccânu passive dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Ps ii.238 sq. Vb 324
        2. Specified as panc’ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna-kkhandha, etc.) SN iii.47 SN iii.86
          1. -88; also Vin i.10 SN iii.127f. Specified SN iii.58 SN iii.100 = MN iii.16 SN iii.114 SN iii.158f.; v.52, 60 AN iv.458 Vism 443 sq (in ch. xiv: Khandha-niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato etc.)
          • Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5 Kh iii.; Ps i.22, 122. Enumerated in various connections SN i.112 DN iii.233 MN i.190 AN v.52 Kh iv. (explained Kp-a 82 = AN v.52) Mil 12 (various references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma)
          • What is said of the khandhas alone-see above 1 (a)-(e)-is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā “rooted in desire, or in wilful desire” SN iii.100 cp. yo kho … pañcas’ upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṁ tattha upādānaṁ ti MN i.300 MN i.511 Therefore the following attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann’ etaṁ upād˚ ānaṁ adhivacanaṁ MN i.144 bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā SN iii.26 pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann’ … adhivacanaṁ SN iv.174 pañc’ upād˚ … sakkāyo vutto MN i.299 SN iv.259
          • (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaṁ vā attaniyaṁ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu SN iii.128 rogato, etc…. manasikātabbā pañc˚ SN iii.167 pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânu
          • passive “realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment”. AN v.109 same with udayavyayânu
          • passive SN iii.130 AN ii.45 AN ii.90 AN iii.32 AN iv.153 and dhammânu
          • passive MN i.61 Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc’ … khandhānaṁ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. SN iii.31 SN iii.160f. AN ii.45 AN ii.90 iv.153; Nd2 under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā “in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain Vin i.10 = M i.48 = AN i.177 = SN v.421 Ps i.37, 39 Vb 101 & passim; cp. katamaṁ dukkham ariyasaccaṁ pañc'upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaṁ, seyyathīdaṁ.. SN iii.158 = v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dhp 202 (ex
          • plural Dhp-a; iii.261)
          • Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) Dhp-a i.22 viññāṇa-kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Definition of manas: manindriyaṁ viññāṇaṁ viññ˚-khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd2 on Snp 1142 = Dhs 68
          1. ˚ādhivacana having kh. as attribute ‣See above SN iii.101 = MN iii.16
          • ˚āvāra a camp, either (1 fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), especially in the latter meaning with reference to a halting place of a caravan (= khandhāvāra?) (1) Ja iv.151 Ja v.162 Dhp-a i.193 199. (2) Ja i.101 Ja i.332 Pv-a 113 Dhp-a ii.79 Said of a hermitage Ja v.35

            • figuratively in sīla-khandhāvāraṁ bandhitvā “to settle in the camp of good conduct” DN-a i.244-ja
            • adjective-noun sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i.e. a growth or parasite SN i.207 = Sn 272, ex
            • plural at Snp-a 304 khandhesu jātā khandha-jā, pārohānam etaṁ adhivacanaṁ -niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv especially) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389
            • ˚paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq
            • ˚paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as name of a Suttanta) Vism 414
            • ˚bīja “trunk ‣Seed” as one kind of various ‣Seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132 & DN i.5, explained DN-a i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam-ādi -rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629 = Nd2 540
            • ˚loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu-and āyatanaloka Ps i.122
            • ˚vibhaṅga division dealing with the khandhas (i.e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Mil 12
            • ˚santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414
            Sanskrit skandha
    Khandhaka
    1. division, chapter, especially in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ “here ends the chapter of …”); in compound ˚vatta, i.e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188
    from khandha
    Khandhiman
    adjective having a (big) trunk, of a tree AN iii.43
    Khama
    adjective
    1. (a) patient, forgiving. (b) enduring, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e.g.), fit for
    • (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaṁ, saddānaṁ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) AN iii.113 = 138; the same applied to the king’s horse AN iii.282 Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opposite akkhamā), viz. akkosantaṁ na paccakosati “not to shout back at him who shouts at you” AN ii.152f.; cp. Nett 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at DN iii.229 In combn. w vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words SN i.63 SN ii.282 Mil 380 cp. suvaco khamo. AN v.24f. forgiving: Mil 207 (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat AN iii.389 = v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) AN iii.30 ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ MN i.385
    • akkhama
    • adjective impatient, intolerant, in combination dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata SN ii.204f. AN ii.147f. With reference to rūpa, saddā, etc. (‣ See also above), of an elephant AN iii.156 sq
    • DN iii.229 Sdhp 95
    from kṣam
    Khamati
    1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (
    2. accusative of object and genitive of person): n’ âhaṁ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) SN i.221 SN i.222; aparādhaṁ kh. to forgive a fault Ja iii.394 khamatha forgive Dhp-a ii.254 khamatha me pardon me Mil 13 Dhp-a i.40
    3. (impersonal) to be fit, to seem good; especially in phrase yathā te khameyya “as may seem good to you; if you please” DN i.60 DN i.108 MN i.487 sabbaṁ me na khamati “I do not approve of” MN i.497f.; na khamati “it is not right” DN ii.67
    4. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaṁ khamanti MN i.133 MN i.480 cp. diṭṭhi-nijjhāna-kkhanti MN i.480 & AN i.189

      • ppr.
      • medium khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaṁ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp. Buddhaghosa note Vin Texts i.195.
      • gerundive khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204 DN ii.99
      • causative khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one’s pardon, to apologize (to =
      • accusative ) Ja i.267 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 195 Dhp-a i.38 39; ii.75, 254
      • to ask permission or leave (i.e. to say good-bye) Dhp-a i.14
      Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sanskrit kṣamate, perhaps to Latin humus, cp. Sanskrit kṣāh, kṣāman soil.
    Khamana
    neuter long-suffering Mil 351 bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24.
    Khamanatā
    feminine forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harshness both as synonym of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342 Vb 360
    Khamā
    feminine
    1. (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & ‣See khamati) Ja iv.8 (variant reading B. chamāya)
    from ksam
    Khamāpanā
    feminine
    1. asking for pardon Ja iv.389
    abstract from khamāpeti, causative of khamati
    Khambha
    1. prop, support, in; ˚kata “making a prop,” i.e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213 = iv.188
    2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis in ūru˚ “stiffening of the thigh” MN i.237 (through pain) Ja v.23 (through fear) ‣See also chambheti thambha
    Sanskrit khambha & sthambha
    Khambheti

    1. to prop, to support Thag 2, 28 (but ex
    2. plural at Thag-a 35 by vi˚, obstruct)
    3. to obstruct, to put out, in pp khambhita (= vi˚) Nd2 220 where it explains khitta.
    4. absolutive khambhiya ‣See vi˚
    causative from preceding Sanskrit skambh, skabhnāti
    Khaya
    1. wasting ‣See also khepeti under khipati waste, destruction, consumption decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night Vv-a 52 mostly in applied meaning with reference to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth e.g. āsavānaṁ kh. Iti 103f. especially in formula āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ upasampajja AN i.107 221 = DN iii.78 DN iii.108 DN iii.132 = It 100 and passim
    • rāgassa dosassa, mohassa kh. MN i.5 AN i.299 cp. rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚, AN i.159 dosa˚ SN iii.160 SN iii.191 SN iv.250
    • taṇhānaṁ kh. Dhp 154 sankhārānaṁ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaṁ etc. MN i.486 āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502-yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh’ eva khayaṁ attano Snp 626 = Dh 402; khayaṁ virāgaṁ amataṁ paṇītaṁ Snp 225-In exegesis of rū
    • passive aniccatā: rū
    • passive khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645 = 738 = 872
    • ‣ See also khīṇa and the following compounds. s.v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚ taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saṁyojana sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚
    1. ˚ātīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon = the new moon) Snp 598
    • ˚ānupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay AN iv.146f.v.359 (+ vayânupassin)
    • ˚ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay MN ii.38 = Pug 60 in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191, cp. kvu 230 sq
    • ˚ dhamma the law of decay AN iii.54 Ps i.53, 76, 78
    Sanskrit kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Latin situs withering.
    Khara1
    1. adjective rough, hard, sharp; painful DN ii.127 (ābādha) Ja iii.26 (vedanā) Mil 26 (+ sakkhara-kaṭhala-vālikā), Pv-a 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. proper name Khara-loma-yakkha Vism 208)
    2. ˚ka khara rough, stony Pv-a 265 (= thaṇḍila)
    3. masculine a donkey, a mule, in -putta, nickname of a horse Ja iii.278
    4. a saw Ja ii.230 (= kakaca Commentary ); vi.261.

      1. ˚ājina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Snp 249 (= kharāni ajina-cammāni Snp-a 291) Pug 56
      • ˚gata of rough constitution Dhs 962 also as khari-gata MN i.185 Vism 349 (= pharusa)
      • ˚mukha a conch Ja vi.580
      • ˚ssara of rough sound SN ii.128
      cp. Sanskrit khara
    Khara2
    1. water Ja iii.282
    Sanskrit kṣara
    Kharatta
    neuter
    1. roughness AN i.54 Pv-a 90 (in explanation of pharusa)
    from khara
    Khala
    1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd2 587; Vism 120 DN-a i.203 (khalaṁ sodheti)
    2. threshing, mash, in ekamaṁsa-khalaṁ karoti “to reduce to one mash of flesh” DN i.52 = M i.377 (+ maṁsa-puñja DN-a i.160 = maṁsa-rāsi)
      1. ˚agga the best corn for threshing Dhp-a i.98 Dhp-a iv.98
      • ˚kāla the time for threshing Dhp-a iv.98
      • ˚bhaṇḍ'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing Dhp-a i.98 Dhp-a iv.98
      • ˚bhaṇḍa-kāla the time for the application of the latter Dhp-a iv.98
      • ˚maṇḍala a threshing-floor Vism 123 Dhp-a i.266 (˚matta, as large as …)
      cp. Sanskrit khala
    Khalaṅka
    1. in -pāda at Ja vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q.v.)
    Khalati
    1. to stumble; absolutive khalitvā Thag 1, 45 Mil 187
    2. past participle khalita q.v. cp. upa˚, pa˚
    3. Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sanskrit skhalati.
    Khali
    1. a paste Vin ii.321 (:Buddhaghosa on Commentary V. vi.3, 1 for madda)
    Khalika
    1. (or khalikā feminine ) a dice-board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice ‣See illustration in Rhys Davids Buddhist India p. 77 Vin ii.10 cp. DN i.6 (in enumeration of various amusements ex
    2. plural at DN-a i.85 by jūta-khalika pāsaka-kīḷanaṁ ‣See also kali.

    Khalita1
    1. bald-headed AN i.138 (+ vilūna) Thag 2, 255 (= vilūnakesa Thag-a 210)
    Sanskrit khalati = Latin calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa
    Khalita2
    1. (adjective & noun ) 1. faltering, stumbling wrong-doing, failure AN i.198 Nd1 300 Thag 2, 261 Dhp-a iii.196 (of the voice Thag-a 211 = pakkhalita) Ja i.78 Mil 94 Mil 408
    2. disturbed, treated badly Ja vi.375
    3. akhalita undisturbed Thag 1, 512
    past participle medium of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala = soceyye
    Khalu
    1. either positive: indeed, surely, truly DN i.87 Snp p. 103 Ja iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mhvs vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 (= paṭisedhan’ atthe nipāto)
    2. ˚pacchābhattika adjective = na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131 = 193 Pug 69 Vism 61 ‣See Commentary quot. by Childers, p. 310
    3. indeclinable, usually contracted to kho, q.v.
    Khaluṅka
    1. only applied to a horse shaking, a shaker, racer (especially as java AN i.287), figuratively of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage AN iv.190f.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred. AN v.166 Three kinds at AN i.287f. = iv.397 sq. In ex plural of vaḷavā (mare) at Ja i.180 = sindhavakule ajāto khalunk'asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā Ja i.184

      • Der khaluṅkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness Vv-a 278
      adjective from khala in causative sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation = khalanga → khalanka → khalunka, cp. kulūpaka for kulūpaga
    Khaleti
    1. literally to wash (cp. pakkhāleti), slang for “to treat badly,” “to give a rubbing or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at Ja iv.205 = 382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaṁ “take the rascal by the throat and thrash him” (Commentary khalayātha khalīkāraṁ (i.e. a “rub,” kind of punishment pāpetvā niddhamatha = give him a thrashing & throw him out. variant reading at both passages is galayātha)
    Sanskrit kṣālayati of kṣal ?
    Khallaka
    1. in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel-coverings (?) Vin i.186 ‣See Buddhaghosa note on it Vin Texts ii.15. Also as khalla- baddhâdibhedaṁ upāhanaṁ at Pv-a 127 in explanation of upāhana. Kern (Toevoegselen s.v.) ‣Sees in it a kind of stuff or material
    Khallāta
    1. bald, in -sīsa a bald head Dhp-a i.309 Derived khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald-headed Petī Pv-a 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67
    Sanskrit khalvāta, cp. khalita
    Khallika
    1. only at SN v.421 cp. SN iv.330 (Dhammacakka-p-Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg Vin i.10 kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense) ‣See kāmasukha and allika
    Khaḷopī
    1. a pot, usually with kumbhī: DN i.167 (-mukha + kumbhi-mukha) Pug 55 Mil 107
    and khalopi, also kalopī, q.v. cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly = karoṭi
    Khāṇu
    1. a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka thorns AN i.35 AN iii.389 Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ’ aggi), 342 (˚magga) Snp-a 334
    • jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) SN iv.193
    • nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DN-a i.73 Khāṇu-kondañña name of a Thera Vism 380 Dhp-a ii.254
    also often spelled khānu; probably = Sanskrit sthāṇu, corrupted in etymology with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Note. 58, note 6
    Khāṇuka
    1. = khāṇu SN v.379 (avihata˚): Ja ii.18 Ja ii.154 Ja v.45 (loha-daṇḍa-kh˚ pins & stakes of brass) Mil 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā … khalitvā stumbling over roots stumps); Vism 381 = Dhp-a ii.254 (with reference to the name of Khāṇu-kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump) Vv-a 338 (in a road = sankuka)
    Khāta
    adjective
    1. dug DN-a i.274 (= ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Mil 351 (˚taḷāka). cp. atikhāta Ja ii.296
    Sanskrit khāta; past participle of khan
    Khāda
    neuter eating, in -kāraṇa the reason of eating … Pv-a 37
    Khādaka
    adjective eating
    • neuter Vism 479; eating, living on (adjective

      • ˚), an eater Ja iv.307 Pv-a 44 lohita-maṁsa˚ (of Yakkhas) Ja i.133 Ja i.266 camma˚ Ja i.176 gūtha˚ (of a Peta) Pv-a 266
    Khādati
    1. to chew, bite, eat devour (= German fressen); to destroy
    • Pres. Dhp 240 Ja i.152 (sassāni); iii.26 Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī) i.94
    • kaṭṭhaṁ kh˚ to use a toothpick Ja i.80 Ja i.282 dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth Ja i.161
    • santakaṁ kh to consume one’s property Dhs-a 135
    • of beasts, e. g Snp 201 Snp 675
    • Pot. khādeyya Ja iii.26
    • imperative khāda Ja i.150 (maṁsaṁ); ii.128 (khādaniyaṁ); vi.367 (pūvaṁ) Pv-a 39 Pv-a 78
    • Part. pres. khādanto Ja i.61 iii.276
    • future khādissati Ja i.221 Ja ii.129
    • aorist khādiṁsu Pv-a 20
    • passive ppr. khādiyamāna (cp khajjati) Pv-a 69 (taṇhāya) (ex
    • plural of khajjamāna). infinitive khādituṁ Ja i.222 Ja ii.153 Dhp-a iv.226
    • German khāditvā Ja i.266 Ja i.278 (phalāni) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 32 (devour) poetical khādiyā Ja v.464 (= khāditvā)
    • Grd. khāditabba Ja iii.52 and khādaniya (q.v.)
    • past participle khādita (q.v.) cp. pali˚
    Dhtp 155 “khāda bhakkhane”; cp. Sanskrit khādati, cp. Lithuanian kándu to bite
    Khādana
    neuter the act of eating (or being eaten) Pv-a 158
    • adjective
    • feminine khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at Ja ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q.v.) cp. vi˚
    Khādaniya
    1. hard or solid food, opposite to and freq, combined with bhojaniya (q.v.) So at DN ii.127 Ja i.90 Ja i.235 Ja iii.127 Sn. p 110 Mil 9 Mil 11
    • Also in combination anna, pāna, kh˚ Snp 924 ii.49. By itself Ja iii.276
    • piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248
    gerundive of khādati; also as khādanīya
    Khādā
    feminine food, in rāja˚ royal food Snp 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho = rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd1 171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout).
    Khādāpana
    1. causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Mil 197 (sunakhehi)
    from khādāpeti
    Khādāpeti
    1. (causative ii. of khādati] to make eat Ja iii.370 Ja vi.335

    Khādika
    1. = khādaka, in aññamañña˚ SN v.456
    Khādita
    adjective
    1. eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed Ja i.223 Ja ii.154 Pv-a 5
    • A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed probably on analogy of sāyita, with which frequently combined (cp. , however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e.g. Pug 59 Vism 258 Pv-a 25 Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (ex
    • plural Pv-a 158 = khādita)
    • Derived khāditatta
    • neuter the fact of being eaten Ja i.176
    1. -ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding Ja v.447
    past participle medium & passive of khādati
    Khādin
    1. , feminine khādinī = khādaka Pv-a 31
    Khāyati
    1. to seem to be, to appear like (viya) Ja i.279 aorist khāyiṁsu Ja i.61 ppr
    2. medium khāyamāna Ja iv.140 Pv-a 251 cp. pakkhāyati
    3. passive = Sanskrit khyāyate, khyā
    Khāyita
    1. ‣See khādita; cp. avakkhāyika
    Khāra
    1. any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combination with ūsa (salt earth) at SN iii.131 (-gandha) AN i.209
    • Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281 ‣See also chārikā
    1. ˚āpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumeration of various tortures (under vividha-kamma-kāranā kārenti) MN i.87 AN i.48 = ii.122 = Nd2 604 Ja vi.17 (variant reading ˚ṭicch˚; Commentary has āpatacchika, variant reading paṭicchaka); Vism 500 Mil 197 Both AN & Nd have variant reading kharāpaṭicchaka
    2. ˚odaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, 420 Dhp-a i.189 Pv-a 213 cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194
    Sanskrit kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Latin serenus, dry, clear seresco to dry
    Khāraka
    adjective
    1. sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka AN iv.117f.
    from khāra
    Khārī
    feminine
    1. a certain measure of capacity (especially of grain ‣See below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in connection with his yoke (kāja): “a khārī-load.”
    1. ˚kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132) Ja v.204
    • ˚bhaṇḍa Dhp-a iii.243 (:kahaṁ te kh-bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro) -bhāra a shoulder-yoke SN i.169 Ja iii.83
    • ˚vidha = ˚kāja SN i.78 = Ud 65 DN i.101 At Ud and DN passages it is read vividha, but DN-a i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi-kamaṇḍalu-sūcâdayo tāpasa-parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaṁ kācam ādāyā ti attho As Kern (Toevoegselen s.v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja
    and khāri-
    Khārika1
    1. alkaline, in enumeration of tastes (cp. rasa) at SN iii.87 Dhs 629 and ≈
    adjective to khāra
    Khārika2
    1. of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho. AN v.173 = Sn p. 126
    adjective of khārī
    Khāleti
    causative of khalati ‣See khaleti & vikkhāleti.
    Khāhinti
    1. at Thag 2, 509 is to be read kāhinti (= karissanti Thag-a 293)
    Khiḍḍā
    1. play, amusement, pleasure usually combined with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at. AN v.203 various kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at DN i.6 under jūta-pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd; 2 Snp-a 86) Ex plural as kīḷanā Snp-a 86 as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) Pv-a 226 sahāyakādīhi keḷi Pv-a 265 cp. Sn 926; Pv iv.121.

      1. ˚dasaka “the decad of play,” i.e. the second 10 years of man’s life, from 11–⁠20 years of age Vism 619
      2. ˚padosika corrupted by pleasures DN i.19 DN i.20 = DN-a i.113 (variant reading padūsika)
      3. ˚rati play & enjoyment Snp 41 Snp 59 Vv 1612 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619
      Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati
    Khitta
    1. thrown; cast, overthrown Dhp 34 rajo paṭivātaṁ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind SN i.13 SN i.164 = Sn 662 = Dh 125 Ja iii.203 ratti-khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dhp 304 = Nett 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Snp 1074 (explained Nd2 220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā) in interpreterite of khetta Pv-a 7 said of sowing: khittaṁ vuttaṁ bījaṁ
    • akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed in qualities required of a brahmin with reference to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto DN i.113 = Sn p. 115, etc. cp. vi˚
    1. ˚citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged usually combined with ummattaka, out of one’s mind Vin i.131 321; ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. cp. citta-kkhepa
    past participle of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe
    Khipa
    neuter
    1. a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide DN i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (= kumina) eel-basket AN i.33 = 287 Thag 2, 357 (= Thag-a 243). cp. khippa & vikkhepika
    from ksip
    Khipati
    1. to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Snp p. 32 (cittaṁ) Ja i.223 (sīsaṁ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaṁ dalhassa: to pit force against force)- aorist khipi SN iv.2 SN iv.3 (khuracakkaṁ) Pv-a 87 (= atthāresi)

      • absolutive khipitvā Ja i.202
      • 1st
      • causative khepeti (perhaps to kṣi ‣See khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaṁ khepetvā Ja i.137 Thag 2, 168 (khepeti jātisaṁsāraṁ = pariyosāpeti Thag-a 159) Dhp-a i.102 (dvenavuti-kappe khepesuṁ) āyuṁ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life Pv-a 148
      • absolutive khepayitvāna (saṁsāraṁ) Pv iv.332 (= khepetvā Pv-a 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sanskrit kṣāpayati of kṣi = to cause to waste ‣See also khepana
      1. -2nd causative khipāpeti to cause to be thrown Ja i.202 Ja iv.139 (jalaṁ). cp. also khepa
      2. Vedic kṣipati
    Khipana
    neuter the act of throwing or the state of being thrown Ja i.290 (pasaka-k˚).
    Khipanā
    feminine
    1. throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Mil 357 Vb 352 cp. Vism 29
    from khipati
    Khipita
    neuter
    1. sneezing expectoration Pv ii.23 (ex plural Pv-a 80: mukhato nikkhantamala) Dhp-a i.314 (˚roga + kāsa, coughing).

      1. ˚sadda the sound of expectorations DN i.50 Dhp-a i.250
      past participle of khipati = that which is thrown out; accusative to Trenckner Note. p. 75 for khupita from kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two
    Khippa
    adjective :
    1. quick, literally in the way of throwing (cp. “like a shot”) Snp 350 (of vacana = lahu Snp-a)
    2. a sort of fishing net or eel-basket (cp. khipa & Sanskrit kṣepaṇī) SN i.74
    3. nt.
    4. adverb khippaṁ quickly AN ii.118 = iii.164 Snp 413 Snp 682 Snp 998 Dhp 65 Dhp 137 Dhp 236 Dhp 289 Ja iv.142 Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pug 32
    5. Compar khippatara Snp p. 126
      1. ˚ābhiññā quick intuition (opposite dandh˚;) DN iii.106 Dhs 177 Nett 7, 24, 50, 77, 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138
      Vedic kṣipra to kṣip
    Khippati
    1. to ill-treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444 explained at Vv-a 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto
    from kṣip
    Khila
    masculine neuter
    1. waste or fallow land AN iii.248 figuratively barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto-khilā enumerated in detail at MN i.101 = AN iv.460 DN iii.238 ‣See under ceto; mentioned. AN v.17 Snp-a 262 As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at SN v.57 also with other qualities at Nd2 9. In combination with paligha SN i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ṁ); khilaṁ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one’s heart) SN i.193 SN iii.134 Snp 973
    • akhila
    • adjective not fallow, unobstructed, open-hearted cittaṁ susamāhitaṁ … akhilaṁ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261 SN iv.118 in combination with anāsava Snp 212 with akankha Snp 477 Snp 1059 with vivattacchada Snp 1147 cp. vigatakhila Snp 19
    cp. Sanskrit khila
    Khiḷa
    1. hard skin, callosity Ja v.204 (variant reading kiṇa)
    cp. Sanskrit kiṇa
    Khīṇa
    1. destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in compounds. ˚-often to be translated “without.” It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti “destroyed is the possibility of rebirth,” in frequently occurring formula “kh. j vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ nâparaṁ itthattāya,” denoting the attainment of Arahantship ‣See arahant ii, formula A Vin i.35 DN i.84 DN i.177 DN i.203 MN ii.39 Snp p. 16 Pug 61 etc ‣See explanation at DN-a i.225 Snp-a 138
    • khīṇaṁ mayhaṁ kammaṁ Ja iv.3 similarly khīṇaṁ purāṇaṁ navaṁ natthi sambhavaṁ Snp 235 (khīṇa = samucchinna Kp-a 194); pāpakamme khīṇe Pv-a 105 āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Snp 370 cp. 162
    1. ˚āsava adjective whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, epithet of an Arahant Vin i.183 MN i.145 ii.43; iii.30 DN iii.97 DN iii.133 DN iii.235 Iti 95 Snp 82 Snp 471 Snp 539 Snp 644 Dhp 89 Dhp 420 Pv-a 7 (= arahanto); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542

      • The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava-balāni) discussed at DN iii.283 Ps i.35; ten powers at Ps ii.173, 176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air)
      • ˚punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (= khīṇāsava) Snp 514 Snp 656
      • ˚bīja one who is without the ‣Seed (of renewed existence) (= preceding) Snp 235 (= ucchinna-bīja Kp-a 194)
      • ˚maccha without fish (of a lake) Dhp 155
      • ˚vyappatha without the way of (evil speech (vyapp˚ = vācāya patho; ex
      • plural Snp-a 204 as na pharusavāco) Snp 158
      • ˚sota with the stream gone, i.e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Snp 777
      past participle of khīyati, passive to khayati
    Khīṇatta
    neuter DN-a i.225 & khīṇatā
    • feminine Dhp-a iv.228 the fact of being destroyed.

    Khīya
    1. in -dhammaṁ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151 154 AN iii.269 iv.374 ‣See also remarks by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v
    cp. khīyati2
    Khīyati
    1. to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152 Ja i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Ps i.94, 96 ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80
    • ppr. khīyamāna Snp 434 Bdhd 19.
    • aorist khīyi DN iii.93
    • gerundive khīyitabba ibid ‣See also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase “ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 Sanskrit kṣāyati
    1. and the meaning is “to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence”; as evidenced by the combination with quâsi-synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim ‣See ujjhāyati for further refs
    Sanskrit kṣīyate, passive to khayati
    Khīyanaka
    (a)
    1. in combination with pācittiya a “falling away” offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) ‣See khīya Vin ii.94 100; iv.38
    derived from khīya
    Khīra
    neuter
    1. milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243 Vin ii.301 MN i.343f. = AN ii.207 = Pug 56 AN ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi-maṇḍa) DN i.201 Dhp-a i.98 enumerated with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646 = 740 = 875; -J iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140 Dhp 71 = Nett 161 Mil 41 Pv-a 198 (= sneha, milky juice) Vv-a 75 Dhp-a i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water)
    • duddha-khīra one who has milked Snp 18
    1. ˚odaka neuter milk-water or milk & water literally Ja ii.104 106; figuratively in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā “a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend AN i.70 SN iv.225 = M i.207, 398 = AN iii.67 AN iii.104
    2. ˚odana
    3. neuter milk-rice (boiled) Vv3324 (= Vv-a 147)
    4. ˚gandha the smell of milk Ja vi.357
    5. ˚ghaṭa a pot of milk Mil 48
    6. ˚paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dhp 284 (variant reading khīra-pāna) Dhp-a iii.424
    7. ˚paṇṇin
    8. masculine name of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea MN i.429
    9. ˚matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) SN i.108
    10. ˚mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk Dhp-a iv.217
    11. ˚sāmin master of the milk (+ dhīrasāmin Bdhd 62
    12. Sanskrit kṣīra
    Khīranikā
    feminine a milk-giving cow SN i.174
    Khīla
    1. a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaṁ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post) SN iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, epithet of satī); Mhvs 29, 49
    • ayo˚ an iron stake AN i.141 SN v.444 Nd2 304iii Snp 28 (nikhāta, erected) Snp-a 479 cp. inda˚
    1. ˚ṭṭhāyi-ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse AN iv.192 AN iv.194
    Sanskrit kīla & khīla
    Khīlaka
    adjective having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed Ja v.203 (= akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206).
    Khīḷana
    1. scorn Mil 357
    derived from khīḷeti
    Khīḷeti
    1. to scorn, deride, only in combination hīḷita khīḷita garahita (past participle ) Mil 229 Mil 288 cp. khīḷana
    2. to kīḷ or to khila ?
    Khu
    1. (—˚) is doubtful second part of iṅghāḷa˚; (q.v.)
    Khuṁseti
    1. [kruś ? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52 to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against DN i.90 DN-a i.256 (= ghaṭṭeti) Vin iv.7 Snp-a 357 Dhp-a iv.38 past participle khuṁsita Dhp-a ii.75

    Khujja
    adjective
    1. humpbacked Ja v.426 (+ piṭhasappī) DN-a i.148 (in combination with vāmana kirāta);
    2. feminine Dhp-a i.194 226
    3. small, inferior, in kh˚-rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453
    either Sanskrit kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. cubitum) or Sanskrit kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52) ‣See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa; 2
    Khuṇḍali
    1. at Pv-a 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi
    Khudā
    1. hunger Snp 52 (+ pipāsā Nd; 2 s.v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966 Pv i.64 (= jighacchā) ii.15 (+ taṇhā), 24 Pv-a 72 ‣See khuppipāsā
    Sanskrit kṣudh & kṣudhā, also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30
    Khudda
    adjective
    1. small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaṁ samācare kiñci “he shall not pursue anything trifling” Snp 145 (= lāmakaṁ Kp-a 243) kh˚ ca bālaṁ Snp 318 O past participle to strong Vv 3210 (of migā balavasena nihīnā Vv-a 136).

      1. ˚ānukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154 Vin iv.143 AN i.233 cp. Divy 465
      2. ˚āvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well-bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) DN i.114 DN i.120 etc
      3. ˚desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348
      Vedic kṣudra
    Khuddaka
    1. = khudda; usually in compounds. In sequence khuddaka-majjhima-mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq (with reference to the paññattis) ‣See also below
    • catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Snp 603 Khuddaka
    • masculine the little one, Mil 40 (mātā ˚assa)
    1. ˚nadī = kunnadī, a small river Pv-a 154
    • ˚nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the following 15 books: Khuddaka-Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka Sutta-Nipāta, Vimāna-Vatthu, Peta-Vatthu Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha-Vaṁsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh-name is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books-short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886) p. 35 Gvns (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886) p. 57 Pv-a 2 etc
    • ˚pāṭha name of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya
    • ˚mañcaka a small or low bed Ja i.167
    • ˚rājā an inferior king Ja v.37 (+ mahārājā) Snp-a 121 cp. khujja & kuṭṭa
    • ˚vaggulī
    • feminine a small singing bird Dhp-a iii.223
    • ˚vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114

    Khuppipāsā
    1. hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno MN i.85 Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Snp 436 = Nd2 on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the; Petas: Pv i.1110ii.22, Pv-a 10 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 37 Pv-a 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9 Sdhp 101 507
    cp. khudā
    Khubhati
    1. ‣See saṁ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as “khubha = sañcalane.”
    Khura1
    the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse = turagānaṁ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse’s hoof Vv-a 279), cp. Sanskrit kṣura, a monkey’s claw Sp. Avs i.236.
    1. khura-kāse MN i.446 read (with Neumann) for khura-kāye, “in the manner of dragging kṛṣ the hoofs.”
    Vedic khura
    Khura2
    a razor Vin ii.134 SN iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) Dhp-a ii.257
    1. ˚agga the hall of tonsure Pv-a 53
    • ˚appa a kind of arrow DN i.96 MN i.429 (+ vekaṇḍa); Vism 381
    • ˚kosa razor-sheath Vism 251, 255
    • ˚cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor Ja iv.3
    • ˚dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Snp 674 (+ tiṇha dhāra) Ja v.269 Vism 163
    • the haft of a razor or its case Snp 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500 Dhp-a ii.257
    • ˚nāsa having a nose like a razor Ja iv.139
    • ˚pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher-knife DN i.52 (= DN-a i.160 khura-nemi khura-sadisa-pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka -māla name of an ocean, in ˚samudda Ja iv.137
    • ˚mālī
    • feminine preceding ibid
    • ˚muṇḍa close-shaven Vin i.344 Vv-a 207 Khuramuṇḍaṁ karoti to shave closely DN i.98 SN iv.344 AN ii.241
    • ˚bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura khura-silā, khura-sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249 Vin ii.134 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.138
    • ˚silā a whetstone Vin ii.134
    • ˚sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134 Khulukhulu-karakam
    • Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whetstone; cp. Latin novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings “chedana & vilekhana”
    Khulukhulu-kaṛakaṁ
    neuter
    • adverb “so as to make the sound khulu, khulu,” i.e. clattering or bumping about MN ii.138 cp. ghuru-ghuru.

    Kheṭa
    1. a shield ‣See kīṭa
    cp. Sanskrit kheṭaka
    Khetta
    neuter
    1. (literally) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, DN i.231 SN i.134 (bījaṁ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at SN iv.315 viz. agga˚ majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile) AN i.229 = 239; iv.237 (do.) Snp 524 Ja i.153 (sāli-yava˚); Pv ii.968 = Dhp-a iii.220 (khette bījaṁ ropitaṁ) Mil 47 Pv-a 62 Dhp-a i.98 Often as a mark of wealth = possession, e.g. DN iii.93 in definition of khattiya: khettānaṁ patī ti khattiya. In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc DN i.5 (explained at DN-a i.78: khetta nāma yasmiṁ pubbaṇṇaṁ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiṁ aparaṇṇaṁ rūhati “kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the se
    2. conditional ” AN similar explanation at Nd1 248 where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚ godhūma˚, tila˚, i.e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu explained ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra without reference to aṇṇa.) SN ii.41 Snp 769 Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa Snp 858 Nd2 on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597 Vb 71 sq
    3. Kasī a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12 cp. Pv-a 8 jāti˚ “a region in which a Buddha may be born (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) Pv-a 138 cp. the threefold division of a Buddha-kkhetta at Vism 414 viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚
    4. figuratively (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the “giver” of gifts or the “doer” of good works ‣See dakkhiṇeyya˚ puñña˚ ‣See detailed explanation at Vism 220; khetta here virūhana-ṭṭhāna, brahma˚
    5. AN i.162 AN i.223 (kammaṁ khettaṁ, viññāṇaṁ bījaṁ); iv.237 Iti 98 Vv-a 113
    6. akhetta barren soil AN iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.) Pv-a 137
    7. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land SN i.21 Pv-a 137 opposite dukkhetta SN v.379
      1. ˚ūpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, epithet of an Arahant Pv i.11
      • ˚kammanta work in the field AN iii.77
      • ˚gata turned into a field, of puññakamma “good work becoming a field of merit” Pv-a 136 Pv-a 191
      • ˚gopaka a field watcher Ja iii.52
      • ˚ja “born on one’s land,” one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd1 247 Nd2 448 Ja i.135
      • ˚jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a “field” Snp 523 Snp 524
      • ˚pāla one who guards a field Ja iii.54
      • ˚mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) Vv-a 108
      • ˚rakkhaka the guardian of a field Ja ii.110
      • ˚vatthu possession of land & goods ‣See above DN iii.164 SN v.473 = AN ii.209 AN v.137 Pug 58 Pv-a 3
      • ˚sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) Pv-a 198 Vv-a 102 ‣See Vv-a 30 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚ payoga˚
      • ˚sāmika the owner of the field Mil 47 Vv-a 311
      • ˚sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) Dhp-a iii.284
      Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling-place, Latin situs founded, situated, English site; cp. also Sanskrit kṣema “being settled,” composure ‣See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip trā in his explanation at Pv-a 7: khittaṁ vuttaṁ bījaṁ tāyati … ti khettaṁ
    Kheda
    adjective
    1. subject to fatigue, tired Vv-a 276
    • As noun “fatigue” at Vism 71
    Sanskrit kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Latin caedo
    Khepa
    1. (—˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta-kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dhp 138 cp. vi˚, saṁ˚
    cp. khipati
    Khepana
    1. —˚ the passing of, applied to time: āyu˚ Vv-a 311
    cp. khepeti
    Khepita
    1. destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta neuter the fact of being destroyed destruction, annihilation, Dhp-a ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.)
    2. past participle of khepeti
    Khepeti
    1. ‣See khipati
    Khema
    1. adjective full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm DN i.73 (of a country) SN i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i.e. Nibbāna) i.189 = Sn 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā) MN i.227 (vivaṭaṁ amatadvāraṁ khemaṁ nibbānapattiyā “opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna”) AN iii.354 (of ñāna) Iti 32 Snp 268 (= abhaya, nirupaddava Kp-a 153) Dhp 189f. Pv iv.33 (of a road = nibbhaya Pv-a 250) Vv-a 85 2.
    2. neuter shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (epithet of Nibbāna). In general DN i.11 (peace, opposite bhaya) Snp 896 (+ avivādabhūmi) 953
    3. In particular of Nibbāna: SN iv.371 AN iv.455 Vv 5320 (amataṁ khemaṁ); Ps i.59 ‣See also yoga ablative khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene SN ii.109 Snp 414 Snp 1098 Nd2 s.v. (+ tāṇato, etc.).

      1. ˚atta one who is at peace (+ viratta) SN i.112 (= khemībhūtaṁ assabhāvaṁ SA)
      2. ˚anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as epithet of Nibbāna) DN i.73 Nd2 on Satthā; Vism 303
      3. ˚ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Thag 2, 350 (= Nibbāna Thag-a 242)
      4. ˚ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested DN i.135
      • ˚ dassin looking upon the Serene Snp 809
      • ˚ppatta having attained tranquillity (= abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) MN i.72 = AN ii.9
      Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta
    Khemin
    adjective one who enjoys security or peace SN iii.13 Snp 145 (= abhaya Kp-a 244) Dhp 258
    Kheḷa
    phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat AN i.34 AN iv.137 Snp 196 (+ singh˚); Kh ii. = Mil 26 (cp Vism 263 in detail, & Kp-a 66) Ja i.61 Ja iv.23 Ja vi.367 Vism 259, 343 (+ singhāṇikā), 362 Dhp-a iii.181 Dhp-a iv.20 170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. AvestanS. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya) Pv-a 80 (= niṭṭhubhana).
    1. ˚kilinna wet with exudation Ja i.164
    • ˚mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48 Vin ii.175 209 sq
    • ˚siṅghānikā phlegm & mucus Dhp-a; i.50
    Sanskrit kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, Pali silesuma ‣See also kilid & kilis; , cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela ‣See keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning “calana. The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa
    Kheḷāpaka
    1. (Vin) & kheḷāsika (Dhp-a) an abusive term “eating phlegm” (?) [Müller, P.G. 30 = kheṭâtmaka Vin ii.188 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term “phlegm-eater,” calling one by this name Vin ii.189 Dhp-a 140. cp. āpaka.? spittle-dribbler; “wind bag.”
    Kho
    1. an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Defined as adhikār’ antara-nidassan’ atthe nipāto Kp-a 113 as avadhāraṇaṁ (affirmative particle) Pv-a 11 Pv-a 18
    • A few of its uses are as following: abhabbo kho Vin i.17 pasādā kho DN ii.155 After
    • pronoun : mayhaṁ kho Ja i.279 ete kho Vin i.10 idaṁ kho ibid.; so ca kho Ja i.51 yo kho MN i.428 -After a negation: na kho indeed not Ja ii.111 no ca khv’ āssa. AN v.195 mā kho Ja i.253 -Often combined with pana : na sakkhā kho pana “is it then not possible” Ja i.151 api ca kho pana Ja i.253 siyā kho pana DN ii.154 -Following other particles. especially in
    • aorist ic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaṁ bhante ti kho; evaṁ byā kho Vin iv.134 Dhp i.27, etc-In interrogative sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho Ja i.279 atthi nu kho Ja iii.52 kahan nu kho Ja i.255
    before vowels often khv'; contr. of khalu = Sanskrit khalu
    Khobha
    masculine
    1. shaking, shock Vism 31, 157; khobhaṁ karoti to shake Vv-a 35 36 278; khobha-karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474 ‣See also akkhobbha
    cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake = Gothic skiuban German schieben, to push, English shove
    Khoma
    adjective flaxen;
    • neuter a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combined with kappāsika Vin i.58 96, 281 AN iv.394 AN v.234 = 249 (˚yuga) Ja vi.47 Ja vi.500 Pv ii.117 Dhp-a i.417

      1. ˚pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296
      1. G
      cp. Vedic kṣauma

    G

    ˚Ga
    adjective, only as ending: going ‣See e.g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚ hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e.g. in addha˚, anta˚ paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚
    • dugga
    • masculine> &
    • neuter a difficult road Dhp 327 = Mil 379 Pv ii.78 (= duggamana-ṭṭhāna Pv-a 102); ii.925 Ja ii.385
    from gam
    Gagana
    neuter the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya Ja i.149 Ja i.212 g˚ tale canda-maṇḍalaṁ Ja iii.365 cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito Ja v.137 cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaṁ viya Dhp-a i.372 g˚ tale puṇṇacanda “the full-moon in the expanse of the heavens Vv-a 3 g˚ talamagga the (moon’s) course in the sky Pv-a 188 etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd2 on Snp 1097 Unspecified: Ja i.57 Vism 176 (˚tal-âbhimukhaṁ).
    Gaggara
    1. roaring, only in
    2. feminine gaggarī a blacksmith’s bellows: kammāra˚, in simile MN i.243

      1. SN i.106 Vism 287.neuter cackling, cawing, in haṁsa˚; the sound of geese Ja v.96 (ex
      2. plural by haṁsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as name of a lake at Vism 208-See note on gala
      Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Latin gurges, gurgulio Old High German querechela “kehle”
    Gaggaraka
    1. a whirlpool, eddy Ja v.405 according to Kern Toevoegselen s.v. a sort of fish (Sanskrit gargaraka Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Mil 197
    from gaggara
    Gaggarāyati
    1. to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Mil 3
    • cp. gaḷagaḷāyati
    v. denominative native from preceding; cp. gurgulio: gurges, English gargle & gurgle
    Gaccha
    1. [not = Sanskrit kaccha, grass-land, as Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 16. The passage Ja iii.287 stands with gaccha variant reading kaccha for gaccha at AN iv.74 g˚ for k˚ at Snp 20 a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper; rukkha, tree, e.g. Nd2 235 id Ja i.73 Mil 268 Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood AN iv.74 puppha˚ a flowering shrub Ja i.120 khuddaka˚-vana a wood of small shrubs Ja v.37
    • Pv-a 274 Vv-a 301 (-gumba, brushwood, underwood) Dhp-a i.171 (-pothana-ṭṭhāna); iv.78 (-mūla)
    Gacchati
    1. . These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres gacchati; imperative gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dh 46, 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, medium gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati;
    2. aorist agacchi (Vv-a 307 variant reading agañchi).
    3. gam˚ in three variations; viz (a) gam˚ in pres.
    4. causative gameti;
    5. future gamissati;
    6. aorist 3 singular agamā (Sn 408, 976 Vv 797 Mhvs vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv; ii.86) 1.
    7. plural agamiṁhase (Pv ii.310), pl agamuṁ (Sn 290), agamaṁsu & gamiṁsu; prohib. mā gami;
    8. absolutive gamya (J v.31);
    9. gerundive gamanīya (KhA 223) ‣See also derivation gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin
    10. (b gan˚, in
    11. aorist agañchi (on this form ‣See Trenckner Notes, p. 71 sq
    12. In n'āgañchi Ja iii.190 it belongs to ā + gam); pres.
    13. aorist gañchisi (Sn 665); infinitive gantuṁ
    14. absolutive gantvā;
    15. gerundive gantabba ‣See also derivation gantar. (c) ga˚, in
    16. past participle gata ‣See also ga, gati, gatta
    17. gā˚ in preterite agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd
    18. plural aorist agū (= Sanskrit ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q.v.)
      1. Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opposite to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq in combination with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaṁ kappeti “to go to stand, sit down & lie down,” to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd2 s.v. gacchati. evaṁ kāle gacchante, as time went on Ja iii.52 or evaṁ g˚ kāle (Pv-a 54 Pv-a 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle Dhp-a i.319 gacchati = paleti Pv-a 56 vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) Dhp-a iii.176
      • to go, to walk (opposite to run, dhāvati) Dhp-a i.389

    19. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opposite to stay, or to come āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maṁ icchati anvetu yo vā n’ icchati gacchatu “who wants me may come, who does not may go” Snp 564 āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaṁ n’ atthi “there was no end of all who came & went” Ja ii.133 gacchāma “let us go” Ja i.263 gaccha dāni go away now! Ja ii.160 gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then Ja i.151 Ja i.222 mā gami do not go away! Ja iv.2

      • plural mā gamittha Ja i.263 gacchanto on his way Ja i.255 Ja i.278 agamaṁsu they went away Ja iv.3 gantukāma anxious to go Ja i.222 Ja i.292 kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opposite agacchasi) Dhp-a iii.173 kahaṁ gacchissatha identical Ja ii.128 kuhiṁ gamissati where is he going Snp 411 Snp 412
      • with
      • accusative or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig to come to know, to experience, to realize
      • (a) with
      • accusative of direction: Rājagahaṁ gami he went to R Pv ii.86; Devadaha-nagaraṁ gantuṁ Ja i.52 gacchām ahaṁ Kusināraṁ I shall go to K. DN ii.128 Suvaṇṇabhūmiṁ gacchanti they intended to go (“were going” to Suvanṇabhūmi. Ja iii.188 migavaṁ g. to go hunting Ja i.149 janapadaṁ gamissāma Ja ii.129 paradāraṁ g. to approach another man’s wife Dhp 246
      • (b) with
      • adverb s of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaṁ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in genitive), pitu s. gacchāma Dhp-a iii.172 devāna santike gacche Dhp 224 santikaṁ also Ja i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaṁ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? Ja i.159 Ja ii.159 tattha agamāsi he went there Ja ii.160 dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā “going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering” Ja iv.3 vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (=
      • future ) on business Ja ii.133
      • Similarly (figuratively) in following expressions (op. “to go to Heaven,” etc. = to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaṁ gamissati Ja vi.368 saggaṁ lokaṁ g. Ja i.152 gacche pāram apārato Snp 1129 in this sense interpreted at Nd2 223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience-Sometimes with double
      • accusative : Bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi “I entrust myself to Bh.” Vin i.16-cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā-gacchati to come between, to obstruct

    20. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i.e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. German es geht gut, From cela va bien = it is good). Here belongs gati “existence,” as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb “to be” ‣See b

      • (a) sugatiṁ gamissasi you will go to the state of well-being, i.e. Heaven Vin ii.195 Iti 77 opposite duggatiṁ gacchanti Dhp 317
      1. -319 maggaṁ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Snp 441 gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare “they will go where one sorrows not” Snp 445 Vv 514 yan ca karoti … tañ ca ādāya gacchati “whatever a man does that he will take with him SN i.93
      • (b) periphrastic (w.
      • absolutive of governing verb) nagaraṁ pattharitvā gaccheyya “would spread through the town” Ja i.62 pariṇāmaṁ gaccheyya “could be digested” DN ii.127 sīhacammaṁ ādāya agamaṁsu “they took the lion’s skin away with them” Ja ii.110 itthiṁ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone Ja vi.348 sve gahetvā gamissāmi “I shall come for it tomorrow” Mil 48
      Vedic gacchati, a desiderative ( future ) formation from *gṷem “I am intent upon going,” i.e. I go, with the following bases.
    21. future -present *gṷemskéti → *gaścati → Sanskrit gacchati = Latin venio, Gothic qiman, Old High German koman, English come; and non-present formations as Osk kúmbened, Sanskrit gata = Latin ventus; gantu = (ad) ventus-(3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in preterite Sanskrit ágām
    Gaja
    an elephant Ja iv.494 Mil 2 Mil 346 Dhs-a 295 (applied to a kind of thought).
    1. ˚potaka the young of an elephant Pv-a 152 -rājā the king of the elephants Mil 346
    Sanskrit gaja
    Gajaka
    1. = gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant’s cover Vv-a 104
    Gajjati
    1. to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs; v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) Ja i.226 Ja ii.412 (mā gajji) Nd1 172 (= abhi˚) Ja iv.25 causative gajjayati, absolutive gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati Iti 66
    2. Sanskrit garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggajjati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde
    Gajjitar
    1. one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud AN ii.102 = Pug 42
    n. agent from preceding
    Gaṇa
    1. -1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58 74, 195, 197 ii.170, 171; iv.130, 216, 226, 231, 283, 310, 316, 317 v.123, 167
    • (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many ‣See compounds
    • as—˚: a collection of, viz. of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass flock, herd; host, group, cluster
    • (a) deva˚ Ja i.203 Dhp-a iii.441 Pv-a 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ SN i.33 tidasa˚ Snp 679
    • (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers Ja i.264 ariya˚ troup of worthies Ja vi.50 naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Mil 2 dāsi˚ a crowd of servants Ja ii.127 tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics Ja i.140 (˚parivuta) bhikkhu˚ Ja i.212 (˚parivuta)
    • (c) dvija˚ Ja i.152 dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds Ja i.207 Ja ii.352 go˚ of cows AN i.229 AN v.347 AN v.359 Ja ii.128 kākola˚, of ravens Snp 675 bhamarā˚, of bees Ja i.52 miga˚ of beasts Ja i.150
    • (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees Pv-a 154 tāra˚ a host of stars AN i.215 Pv ii.967; with reference to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93
    1. ˚ācariya “a teacher of a crowd,” i.e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with reference either to Gotama DN i.116 MN ii.3 or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: DN i.47 DN i.163 SN i.68 SN iv.398 MN i.198 MN i.227 MN i.233 MN ii.2 Snp p. 91; cp. DN-a i.143 In general: Mil 4
    • ˚ārāma
    • adjective & -ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataṁ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd AN iii.422f. MN iii.110 = Nd2 on Snp 54
    • ˚gaṇin the leader of many, epithet of Bhagavā Nd2 307
    • ˚(ṁ)gaṇupāhanā (
    • plural ) shoes with many linings Vin i.185 187; cp. Vinaya Texts ii.14 ‣See also Buddhaghosa on aṭaliyo (q.v. under aṭala)
    • ˚pūraka
    • adjective one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143f. -bandhana in ˚ena dānaṁ datvā to give by co-operation to give jointly Dhp-a ii.160
    • ˚bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196 Vin iv.71 Vin v.128 135, 205
    • ˚magga in ˚ena gaṇetuṁ to count by way of batches Vin i.117
    • ˚vassika
    • adjective through a great many years Snp 279
    • ˚saṅganika
    • adjective coming into contact with one another Dhp-a i.162
    Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Latin grex flock, Sanskrit jarante “conveniunt” ‣See Wackernagel Altindische Grammatik i.193. Another form of this root is grem in Sanskrit grāma, Latin gremium ‣See under gāma
    Gaṇaka
    1. a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumerated as an occupation together with muddika at DN i.51 (expl DN-a i.157 by acchidda-pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika SN iv.376 as an office at the king’s court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka-mahāmatta = a ministerial treasurer) DN iii.64 and in same context DN iii.148 153, 169, 171, 177; as overseer Vin iii.43 as accountant Mil 79 Mil 293 Vv-a 66
    from gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up
    Gaṇakī
    feminine = gaṇikā Vin iii.135–⁠136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adjective gaṇakī-dhītā the daughter of a courtesan.
    Gaṇanā
    feminine counting, i.e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number Ja i.29 Vism 278 sq. Mil 79 Vv-a 194 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94 Ja i.35 Mil 4 (senā ˚ṁ kāretvā) Dhp-a i.11 34.
    • the art of counting arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77 = iv.129 (˚ṁ sikkhati to study ar.) DN i.11 (ex
    • plural DN-a i.95 by acchiddaka-gaṇanā) MN i.85 iii.1 (˚ājīva) DN-a i.157
    • ˚gaṇana-patha (time-) reckoning, period of time Mil 20 Mil 116
    Gaṇikā1

    feminine “one who belongs to the crowd,” a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.) ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī) Ud 71 Mil 122 Dhp-a iii.104 Vv-a 75 (Sirimā) Pv-a 195 Pv-a 199

  • Customs of a gaṇikā Ja iv.249 Ja v.134
  • cp. saṁ˚.

  • Gaṇikā2
    1. feminine = gaṇanā, arithmetic Mil 3
    Gaṇin1

    adjective one who has a host of followers, epithet of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combination sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo ‣See above Also in following: Snp 955 Snp 957 Dīpavaṁsa iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī-bhūtā (

  • plural ) in crowds, combined with sanghā sanghī DN i.112 explained at DN-a i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa-sainpannā ti ‣See also paccekagaṇin.

  • Gaṇin2
    1. a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gokaṇṇa)
    Gaṇeti
    1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dhp 19 Ja vi.334 Mil 79 Mil 293
    2. past participle gaṇita Snp 677
    3. passive gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; infinitive (vedic gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28;
    4. causative gaṇāpeti MN iii.1
    5. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for Ja i.300 iv.267
    denominative to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne
    Gaṇṭhi
    masculine
    1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) Ja i.172 DN-a i.163 Dhp-a i.321 (˚jātaṁ what has be come knotty or hard); -diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine Vv-a 297 anta-gaṇṭh-ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275
    2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood)
      1. ˚ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i.e. of execution) Ja iii.538 (reads gaṇṭhi-gaṇṭi-ṭṭhāna) Vism 248
      • bhedaka, in ˚cora “the thief who breaks the block” (or rope, knot?) Dhp-a ii.30
      Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold together, cp. Latin gremium, Sanskrit gaṇa & grāma ‣See also gantha
    Gaṇṭhikā
    feminine (frequently spelled gaṇḍikā, q.v.) = gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DN-a i.199 (catu-pañca-gaṇṭhik'āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi-gaṇṭhik’ āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but ‣See āṇi) Dhp-a i.335 (˚jāta = gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394.
    • a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? + pāsaka; cp. Vinaya Texts iii.144) v.140. especially in phrase gaṇṭhikaṁ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46 ii.213, 215, translated at Vinaya Texts iii.286 “fasten the block on (to the robe)” but at i.155 “tie the knots. Also in dhamma-gaṇṭhikā a block for execution Ja i.150 (variant reading gaṇḍikā)

  • Name of a plant Pv-a 127

    • ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane ‣See ucchu
    1. ˚kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) Ja iv.446
  • Gaṇḍa
    1. -1. a swelling, especially as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Frequently in similes with reference to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q.v. for loci). As epithet of kāya SN iv.83 = AN iv.386 of kāmā AN iii.310 AN iv.289 Nd2 on Snp 51 also Thag 2 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya Thag-a 288) SN iv.64 (= ejā) Snp 51 Snp 61 (variant reading for gaḷa) Ja i.293 Vism 360 (˚pilakā) Dhp-a iii.297 (gaṇḍ-ā-gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175 Pv-a 55 cp. Avestan SN ii.1681
    • a stalk, a shaft, in name of a plant—˚tindu-rukkha Ja v.99 and in derivation gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Avestan SN ii.13312. 3. = gaṇḍuppāda in compound gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth-worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Buddhaghosa gaṇḍuppādagūtha-mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vinaya Texts iii.172)
    1. ˚uppāda (literally producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth-worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā puḷavā at MN iii.168 Ja v.210 (˚pāṇa) Dhp-a iii.361 (˚yoni) Snp-a 317
    a variation of gaṇṭha (-i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object i.e. stem, stalk
    Gaṇḍaka
    adjective having boils Sdhp 103.
    Gaṇḍamba
    1. name of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with reference to this freq in phrase gaṇḍamba-rukkha-mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaṁ katvā Ja i.77 Ja iv.263f. DN-a i.57 Pv-a 137 Mil 349 Dāvs v.54. Also at Dhp-a iii.207 in play of words with amba-rukkha
    Gaṇḍikā
    feminine
    1. -1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) Ja i.474 Dhs-a 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚-ākoṭana-sadda)
    • a lump, a block of wood (more frequently spelling gaṇṭhikā, q.v.)

  • Name of a plant Vv 354 (= bandhujīvaka Vv-a 161).

    1. ˚ādhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2
    a-n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha ‣See also gaṇṭhikā
  • Gaṇḍin
    1. -1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī feminine with swellings on the chest, i.e. breasts Ja v.159 202 (thane sandhāyâha 205)
    2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin kilāsin) Kvu 31
    adjective from gaṇḍa
    Gaṇḍī
    feminine
    1. -1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar Ja i.237
    • a gong Dhp-a i.291 (gaṇḍiṁ paharati to beat the g.) ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiṁ ākoṭetvā Kp-a 251. cp. Av SN i.258 SN i.264 SN i.272 SN ii.87, 95 & Divy 335 Divy 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā “sign with the gong” Ja iv.306

  • the executioner’s block (= gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) Ja iii.41

    = gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; probably = Sanskrit ghaṇṭā in meaning 2
  • Gaṇḍusa
    1. a mouthful Ja i.249 (khīra˚). Ganhati & Ganhati;
    cp. Sanskrit gaṇḍūṣa
    Gaṇhati
    Gaṇhāti;
    1. . The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1); gaṇha- (Sanskrit gṛhṇā-); present indicative gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi Pv-a 87) pot. gaṇheyya, imperative gaṇha (J i.159 Pv-a 49 = handa) & gaṇhāhi (J; i.279). future gaṇhissati;
    2. aorist gaṇhi. infinitive gaṇhituṁ (J iii.281). German gaṇhitvā
    3. causative ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti
    4. ; gahe- (Sanskrit gṛhī-)
    5. future gahessati.
    6. aorist aggahesi (Sn 847 Ja i.52). Inf gahetuṁ (J i.190, 222). German gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv ii.3)
    7. gah- (Sanskrit gṛh-):

      • aorist aggahi. German gayha & gahāya (Sn 791).
      • passive gayhati
      • past participle gahita & gahīta. cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha.

        1. Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp seize; assume; e.g. ovādaṁ g. to take advice Ja i.159 khaggaṁ to seize the sword Ja i.254
        1. -255; gocaraṁ to take food Ja iii.275 jane to seize people Ja i.253 dhanaṁ to grasp the treasure Ja i.255 nagaraṁ to occupy the city Ja i.202 pāde gāḷhaṁ gahetvā holding her feet tight Ja i.255 macche to catch fish Ja iii.52 mantaṁ to use a charm Ja iii.280 rajjaṁ to seize the kingdom Ja i.263 ii.102; sākhaṁ to take hold of a branch Snp 791 Ja i.52 Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate Pv-a 18 paṭisandhiṁ g. to be born Ja i.149 maraṇaṁ g. to die Ja i.151 mūlena g. to buy Ja iii.126 vacanaṁ g. to obey Ja iii.276 (in negative). The absolutive gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as “with,” e.g. tidaṇḍaṁ gahetvā caranto Ja ii.317 satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi Vv-a 149

          1. causative gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni Ja ii.105 rājānaṁ Ja i.264 cp. gāhāpeti
      Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti past participle gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr enclosure, Latin hortus, co-hors (homestead) Gothic gards (house); Old High German gart; English yard & gar
    8. denominative native To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in Pali gaha˚, gihin, geha ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand
    Gata
    1. gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q.v.) viz. 1. literal gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. accusative ), opp ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (
    2. locative absolute) when going standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati.1) DN i.70 opp āgata: yassa maggaṁ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Snp 582 (cp. gati.2). Also periphrastic (= gacchati.5 b) aṭṭhi paritvā gataṁ “the bone fell down” Ja iii.26 Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (=
    3. aorist gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaṁ.. saraṇaṁ gato (cp. gacchati.4) Dhp 190 attano vasanaṭṭhānaṁ gato he went to his domicile Ja i.280 Ja ii.160 nāvā Aggimālaṁ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā Ja iv.139 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i.e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata ‣See below and as 2nd part of compounds. in genitive, viz.; gone; atthaṁ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat-addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combined with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e.g. Vism 111, 197, 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view sankhāra˚, etc

      • Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaṁkata → anabhāvaṁ gacchati kālagata → kālakata (q.v.)
      1. agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ṁ disaṁ (of Nibbāna) Dhp 323 purisantaraṁ ˚ṁ mātugāmaṁ “a maid who has not been with a man” Ja i.290
      1. sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (= sugatiṁ gata ‣See gati), blessed. As np. a common epithet of the Buddha Vin i.35 Vin iii.1 DN i.49 SN i.192 AN ii.147 et passim ‣See Sugata
      • DN i.83 Snp 227 ‣See ex
      • plural Kp-a 183
      1. duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiṁ gata Pv-a 33 ‣See gati) Pv i.62 ii.317; duggata-bhāva (poverty) Ja vi.366 duggat-itthi (miserable, poor Ja i.290 parama-duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) Pv-a 176
      • Compar. duggatatara Dhp-a i.427 Dhp-a ii.135
      1. ˚atta (from attā) self-perfected, perfect DN i.57 (expl by koṭippatta-citto DN-a i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata MN i.82
      • ˚addhin (adj of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp addhagata) Dhp 90
      • ˚kāle (in gata-gata-kāle) whenever he went Ja iii.188
      • ˚ṭṭhāna place of existence Pv-a 38 = gamana in āgata-ṭṭhānaṁ vā: coming and going (literally state of going) Ja iii.188
      • ˚ yobbana
      • adjective past youth, of old age AN i.138 Snp 98 = 124
      past participle of gacchati in medio-reflexive function
    Gataka
    1. a messenger Ja i.86
    Gatatta
    1. 1. = Sanskrit gat-ātman ‣See preceding
    • = Sanskrit gatatvaṁ the fact of having gone Kp-a 183
    Gati
    feminine
    1. going, going away, (opposite āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2 ‣See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) DN ii.16 = Sn p. 106 Snp 1001 or of a gihī arahattaṁ patto Mil 264 with reference to the distinction of the child Gotama Ja i.56
    2. phassâyatanānaṁ gati (course or direction) AN ii.161 jagato gati (identical AN ii.15 AN ii.17 sakuntānaṁ g. the course, flight of birds Dhp 92 = Th 1, 92
    3. O
    4. past participle āgati Pv ii.922
    5. tassā gatiṁ jānāti “he knows her going away, i.e. where she has gone” Pv-a 6
    6. going away, passing on (= cuti opposite upapatti coming into another existence); course esp after death, destiny, as regards another (
    7. future existence AN i.112 DN ii.91 MN i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combination āgati vā gati vā (= cutûpapatti) rebirth & death MN i.328 MN i.334 In definition of saṁsāra explained as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti = one existence after the other Nd2 664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd2 on dhātu (also as puna-gati rebirth)
    8. The Arahant as being beyond Saṁsāra is also beyond gati yassa gatiṁ na jānanti devā gandhabba-mānusā Dhp 420 = Sn 644; yesaṁ gati n’ atthi Snp 499 and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaṁ parinibbānaṁ Snp-a 368
    9. attā hi attano gati “everybody is (the maker of) his own
    10. future life Dhp 380 esā maccharino gati “this is the fate of the selfish” Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu “all fate be a success to you” Ja v.393 gato so tassa yā gati “he has gone where he had to go (after death)” Pv i.122 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence element, especially characterized as sugati duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaṁ pavanaṁ, ākāso pakkhīnaṁ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaṁ nibbānaṁ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149 = Snp-a 346 apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dhp 310 duggati Ja i.28 avijjāy’ eva gati the quality of ignorance Snp 729 paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour MN i.82 ‣See also definition at Vism 237. 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (= loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (= Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (= Yamaloka apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the following order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world (4) manussā (m-loka) human beings, (5) devā gods MN i.73 DN iii.234 AN iv.459 Nd2 550; cp. SN v.474
      1. -77 Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. Latin Feer, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 152 sq.; translation by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v.514
      1. -528) under Naraka-kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚ Of these Nos. 1
      • are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1

    11. as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā (6) devā, of which 1

      • are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q.v.) or duggatiyo ‣See Pv iv.11 cp. Pv-a 103 These six also at DN iii.264
      • lokassa gatiṁ pajānāti Bhagavā Snp 377 (gati = nirayādipañcappabhedaṁ Snp-a 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino DN i.228 dve niṭṭhā DN-a i.249 (q.v. for various ap
      • plural of gati) as well as the dussīlā (AN i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60)
      1. ˚gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26) Ja ii.1
      1. agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha there you have no access SN i.115
      • = duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life DN iii.133 AN i.72 AN ii.18f.; iii.274 sq. Ja v.510 Pv-a 161 Technically the four agati-gamanāni are: chanda dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ DN iii.228 (‣ See also under chanda)
      1. sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e.g. Ja vi.224 a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. cp. sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiṁ) & gata “gone to Heaven” Vin ii.195 DN ii.202 Iti 77 Pv-a 65 In combination with sagga loka (sugatiṁ, etc. uppajjati) DN i.143 AN i.97 Ja i.152 parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā Iti 24 suggatiṁ gata Dhp 18 sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti “bliss is not gained by evil” Pv-a 87 = sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna Pv-a 89 sugati-parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib.
      1. duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery ‣See above gati.4. Usually with gacchati (duggatiṁ gata reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati DN i.82 AN i.97 138 (+ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364 Dhp 17 Snp 141 Snp-a 192 (= dukkhappatti) Pv-a 87 Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiṁ, one’s own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dhp 240 with reference to a Peta existence: Pv i.62 ii.16; 113; 317. cp. duggata
      from gacchati; cp. Latin (in-) ventio, Gothic (ga-)qumps
    Gatika

    adjective

  • going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148

    • leading to: yaṁ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) SN v.230

  • having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaṁ˚ DN i.16 (w. reference to one of the first 3 gatis: DN-a i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. reference to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. reference to a duggati) Dhp-a iii.173

  • Gatin
    1. (adjective = gatika) 1. going, i.e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī “every river flows crooked” Ja i.289
    • having a certain gati, fated destined, especially in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162 = J i.219 saggaṁ sugatino yanti “those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens” Dhp 126
    Gatimant
    adjective of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati.3) MN i.82
    Gatta
    neuter
    1. the body, plural gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47 SN i.169 = 183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but variant reading analla˚) AN i.138 Snp 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up) Pv i.112 (bhinna-pabhinna˚, identical) Pv-a 56 (= sarīra); 68
    • As limbs: SN iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores) MN i.506 (identical) MN i.80 = 246 Ja i.61 (lālākilinna˚) Snp 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019 Pv iii.91 (= sarīrâvayavā Pv-a 211) Mil 357 (arupakkāni)
    Vedic gātra
    Gathita
    adjective
    1. tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to greedy for, intoxicated with (c. locative ). When absolute always in combination with paribhuñjati and with reference to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) “full of greed & blind desire.” In this connection it is frequently (by B manuscripts) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: DN i.245; iii.43 MN i.162 MN i.173 SN ii.270 SN iv.332 AN v.178 AN v.181 Nd2 on nissita Commentary

      • c.
      • locative : Ja iv.371 (gharesu) DN-a i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaṁ gathitaṁ visajja Snp 794 (cp. Nd1 98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Snp 940
      • J iv.5 (= giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha) Pv-a 262 (gadhita as explanation of giddha)-agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire without desire, free from the ties of craving (+ m˚, a˚ SN ii.194 SN ii.269 AN v.181 Mil 401 (translation Rhys Davids ii.339 “without craving, without faintness, without sinking”)
      past participle of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sanskrit grathita
    Gada
    1. speech, sentence Dhp i.66, DN-a i.66 feminine ; and on DN iii.135 (§ 28); gada at SN ii.230 (variant reading ) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s.

    Gaddula
    1. (and gaddūla) a leather strap SN iii.150 Ja ii.246 Ja iii.204 fig, in taṇhā-gaddūla “the leash of thirst,” Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 cp. Dhs-a 367
    Gaddūhana
    neuter
    1. a small measure of space & time MN iii.127 SN ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA “pulling just once the cow’s teat”) AN iv.395 Mil 110 ‣See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375
    Derivation unknown; Sanskrit dadrūghna
    Gaddha
    1. a vulture; in gaddhabādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25 = iv.218 MN i.130 ‣See also Vinaya Texts ii.377
    Vedic gṛdha ‣See gijjha
    Gadrabha
    1. an ass, donkey Vin v.129 MN i.334 AN i.229 Ja ii.109 Ja ii.110 Ja v.453 DN-a i.163 feminine gadrabhī Ja ii.340

      1. ˚bhāraka a donkey load Ja ii.109 Dhp-a i.123
      • ˚bhāva the fact of being an ass Ja ii.110 -rava (-rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415
      Vedic gardabha., Latin burdo, a mule ‣See Walde Latin Wtb., s.v.
    Gadhita
    1. ‣See gathita
    Gantar
    1. “goer” in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combined with sotā hantā khantā, of the king’s elephant AN ii.116 = iii.161; variant reading for gatā at MN ii.155
    n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future
    Gantha
    1. (in Burmese manuscripts often misspelt gandha)

      1. -1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always figuratively and usually referring to and enumerated as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚ ‣See under kāya): SN v.59 = Dhs 1135 DN iii.230 Nd1 98 Dhp-a iii.276 4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa idaṁsaccâbhinivesa; thus Nd1 98; Vism 683. In other connection Snp 347 Snp 798 Snp 847 Snp 857 Snp 912 Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā) Dhp 211 Ps i.129 Dhs 1059 1472 Vb 18 24, 55, 65, 77, 117, 120; Nett 31, 54, 114, 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616
      • chinna˚
      • adjective one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body) combination with anigha nirāsa SN i.12 (˚gandha), 23; with asita anāsava Snp 219 cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā SN i.14 ‣See also ādāna˚; cp. ganthaniya
      • only in late Pali, and in Sanskrit
      1. composition, text, book (not with reference to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together ‣See gantheti.2)
      1. ˚dhura the burden of the books, i.e. of studying the Scriptures, explained as one who knows by heart one, two or all Nikāyas. Always combined with vipassanādhuraṁ the burden of contemplation Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a iv.37
      • ˚pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the “body” always with reference to Nibbāna SN i.210 AN ii.24 Iti 104 cp. 122
      • ˚pahīna
      • adjective connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480 opposite vi˚ Dhs 1482
      from ganthati
    Ganthati
    Gantheti;
    1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaṁ mittāni ganthati “how does he bind friends” SN i.214 Snp 185 mālaṁ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento Vv-a 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare Ja iv.361
    2. past participle ganthita tied, bound, fettered catūhi ganthehiPs i.129; -
    3. gerundive ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of “body”); ex
    4. plural as ārammaṇa-karaṇa-vasena ganthehi ganthitabba Dhs-a 69 dhammā g˚ ā (“states that tend to be are liable to be ties” Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141 1478 In combination saññojaniya g˚ oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584 = Vb 12 of rūpa-kkhandha Vb 65 of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. i.29, saccā g˚ and ag (= gantha-sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117
    5. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (variant reading ; gandhitvā Snp 302 Snp 306
    Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Latin gremium ‣See also gaṇṭhi gathita gantha
    Ganthika
    adjective
    1. hard-studying Dhp-a i.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha-dhura)
    from gantha 2
    Gandha
    smell, viz.
    1. -1. odour, smell, scent in gen Ja iii.189 Dhp 54
    1. -56 = Mil 333 Dhs 605 under ghānâyatanāni); āma˚ smell of raw flesh AN i.280 DN ii.242 Snp 241 sq; maccha˚ the scent of fish Ja iii.52 muttakarīsa˚ the smell of faeces and urine AN iii.158 catujāti˚ four kinds of scent Ja i.265 Pv-a 127 dibba-g˚puppha a flower of heavenly odour Ja i.289
    • odour smell in particular: enumerated as mūla˚, sāra˚ puppha˚, etc., SN iii.156 = v.44 = AN v.22 Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚ under tīṇi gandhajātāni AN i.225-puppha˚ Dhp 54 = AN i.226

  • smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense-impressions and sensory objects & enumerated in set of the 12 ajjhatta-bāhirāni āyatanāni ‣See under rūpa with ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā “sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ” DN iii.102 244 = 250 269 = Nd2 on rūpa MN iii.55 MN iii.267 SN iv.71 Vin i.35 Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviññeyya under kāmaguṇā MN ii.42 DN iii.234 etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality (-rūpa, etc. as characteristic of devas DN iii.146 Pv ii.958; as sāra˚, pheggu˚ taca˚, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba-kāyikā devā SN iii.250 sq

    • In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa-g˚-ras'ûpeto Dhp 49 Ja ii.106 gandhānaṁ khamo & akkhamo (of king’s elephant) AN iii.158f.; itthi˚, purisa˚ AN i.1 AN i.2 AN iii.68 in combination with other four senses Snp 387 Snp 759 Snp 974 Snp 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallaesthetics is stated in the Sīlas (DN i.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): DN i.5 = Kh ii DN i.7 (˚kathā) Vin ii.123 Snp 401 Ja i.50 Ja i.291 Pv-a 62 The use of scented ointment (-vilepana & ālepa ‣See compounds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin i.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5
    1. -14 (anna-pāna-vattha-yānamālā-gandhā-vilepana-seyy-âvasatha-padīpeyya): SN iii.252 Nd2 523 = It 65. Out of this enumeration g˚-m˚-v˚-Pv ii.316; chatta-g˚-m˚-upāhanā Pv ii.49ii.936; m˚-g˚-v˚ kappūra-kaṭukapphalāni Ja ii.416 The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e. g Pv-a 50 (on Pv i.106) Ja i.254 Ja i.265 Ja iii.277 Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g˚dhūpa-cuṇṇa-kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) Ja i.290 vāsa-cuṇṇa-dhūpanādi g˚ Kp-a 37 ‣See also compounds
    • occurs as variant reading for gantha (book)
    1. duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625 ˚ṁ vāyati to emit a nasty odour Pv-a 14 as adjective having a bad smell, putrid Snp 205 Pv-a 15 (= pūtigandha), feminine
    • ā duggandhā pūti vāyasi “you emit a bad odour” Pv i.61 (= aniṭṭha˚)
    • ˚sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625 as adjective of pleasant smell Ja iii.277 Sdhp 246
    1. ˚āpaṇa a perfumery shop Ja i.290 ˚ika perfume seller Mil 344
    • ˚āyatana an olfactory sense-relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations DN iii.243 DN iii.290 Dhs 585 625, 655
    • ˚ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147 157, 365 410, 556, 608
    • ˚ālepa
    • neuter anointing with perfumes Vin i.206
    • ˚āsā “hunger for odours,” craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059
    • ˚odaka scented water Ja i.50 Ja ii.106 Ja iii.189
    • ˚ karaṇḍaka a perfume-box SN iii.131 SN v.351 Pug 34
    • ˚kuṭī
    • feminine a perfumed cabin name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (J i.92). Gotamassa g˚ Ja ii.416 cp. Avs ii.401 Dhp-a iv.203 206
    • ˚cuṇṇa scented (bath-) powder Ja iii.277
    • ˚jāta
    • neuter odour, perfume (“consisting of smell”). Three kinds at AN i.225 (māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚); enumerated as candanādi Dhp-a i.423 in defin. of gandha DN-a i.77 -Dh 55
    • ˚taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g˚-āsā) Dhs 1059 = Nd2 on jappā
    • ˚tela scented oil (for a lamp) Ja i.61 Ja ii.104 Dhp-a i.205
    • ˚tthena a perfume-thief SN i.204
    • ˚dhātu the (sensory element of smell Dhs 585 625. 707 (in connection with ˚āyatana)
    • ˚pañcaṅgulika ‣See sep
    • ˚sañcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with ˚saññā perception of odours DN iii.244 AN iv.147 AN v.359
    • ˚sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents DN i.6 (= DN-a i.82)
    Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & ‣See Pali ghāna. Possibly connection with Latin fragro English fragrant
  • Gandhana
    1. ‣See gandhina
    Gandhabba
    1. a musician, a singer Ja ii.249f.; iii.188 Vv-a 36 137
    2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class ‣See ˚kāyika belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm DN ii.212 AN ii.39 (as birds); iv.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. SN iii.250f.; also said to preside over child-conception: MN i.265f. Mil 123f.
      1. ˚kāyika belonging to the company of the G. SN iii.250f. Pv-a 119
      • ˚mānusā (
      • plural ) G. & men Dhp 420 Snp 644
      • ˚hatthaka “a G

        • hand,” i.e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird’s claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin ii.106 ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.67
        Vedic gandharva
    Gandhabbā
    feminine music, song Ja ii.254 Vv-a 139 Mil 3 ˚ṁ karoti to make music Ja ii.249 Ja iii.188
    Gandhāra
    adjective belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar)
    • feminine gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā name of a magical charm DN i.213 at Ja iv.498 it renders one invisible.

    Gandhika
    (and ˚uja Pv ii.120; ii.121)
    1. -1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, Ja i.266 (su˚); Pv ii.110 (= surabhigandha); ii.121 (sogandhiya) Vv-a 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi)
    • dealing in perfume, a perfumer Mil 262 (cp. gandhin 2)
    Gandhin

    adjective

  • having a scent of, smelling of (—˚), i.e. candana˚ of sandal wood Ja iii.190 gūtha of˚ faeces Pv ii.315 (= karīsavāyinī Pv-a).

    • dealing with scents a perfumer Pv-a 127 (= māgadha; cp. gandhika 2)
  • Gandhina
    1. in kule antimagandhina Ja iv.34 (ex plural by sabbapacchimaka) and gandhana in kula-gandhana Iti 64 ‣See under kula˚.

    Gabbita
    adjective proud, arrogant Ja ii.340 (˚bhāva = issariya); iii.264 (˚sabhāva = dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on DN iii.153 (= avamata).
    Gabbha
    1. interior, cavity (
    2. locative gabbhe in the midst of: angāra˚ Ja iii.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cell. Of a Vihāra Vin ii.303 Vin iii.119 Vin iv.45 Vv-a 188 220; -J i.90 (siri˚ royal chamber); iii.276 Vv 785 (= ovaraka Vv-a 304) Dhp-a i.397 Mil 10 Mil 295 ‣See also anto˚. 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp kucchi). ˚ṁ upeti to be born Dhp 325 = Th 1, 17 Nett 34, 129; ˚ṁ upapajjati to be born again Dhp 126 gabbhā gabbhaṁ … dukkaṁ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i.e. from birth to birth) Snp 278 gabbhato paṭṭhāya from the time of birth Ja i.290 Ja i.293 As a symbol of defilement g. is an epithet of kāma AN iv.289 etc
    3. the contents of the womb, i.e. the embryo foetus: dasa māse ˚ṁ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the foetus in the womb for 10 months DN ii.14 dibbā gabbhā DN i.229 on g. as contained in kucchi foetus in utero ‣See Ja i.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134 ii.2; iv.482 MN i.265 Mil 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti) Dhp-a i.3 47; ii.261
    4. Pv i.67 Pv-a 31 gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin ii.278 itthi-gabbho & purisa˚ female & male child Ja i.51 gabbhaṁ pāteti to destroy the foetus Vin ii.268 apagatagabbhā (adjective having had a miscarriage Vin ii.129 mūḷha-gabbhā identical MN ii.102 (+ visatā˚); paripuṇṇa-gabbhā ready to be delivered Ja i.52 Pv-a 86 saññi˚ a conscious foetus DN i.54 = M i.518 = SN iii.212 sannisinna-gabbhā having conceived Vin ii.278
      1. ˚avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd2 3041) conception DN iii.103 DN iii.231 Vism 499, 500 (˚okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna ‣See Nd; 2
      2. ˚āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv iii.53 (= ˚mala) -karaṇa effecting a conception Snp 927
      • ˚gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born Pv-a 112
      • ˚dvāra the door of the bed-chamber Ja i.62
      • ˚pariharaṇa = next Vism 500
      • ˚parihāra “the protection of the embryo,” a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant Ja ii.2 Dhp-a i.4
      • ˚pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin iii.83f. Pv i.66 (akariṁ) Pv-a 31 (dāpesi) Dhp-a i.47 (˚bhesajja)
      • ˚mala the uncleanness of delivery, i.e. all accompanying dirty matter Pv-a 80 Pv-a 173 (as food for Petas), 198 Dhp-a iv.215
      • ˚vīsa in ahañc’ amhi gabbhavīso “I am 20 years, counting from my conception” Vin i.93
      • ˚vuṭṭhāna
      • neuter childbirth delivery Ja i.52 Dhp-a i.399 Dhp-a ii.261
      • ˚seyyā
      • feminine the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaṁ “he does not go into another womb,” of an Arahant Snp 29 Snp 152 Snp 535 Vv 5324 and gabbhaseyyaka
      • adjective one who enters another womb Vb 413f.; Vism 272, 559, 560 Bdhd 77, 78
      Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Latin galba, Gothic kalbo, Old High German kalba, English calf, or *gṷe bh, as in Gr womb, sharing the womb, brother young pig; cp. *gelt in Gothic kilpei womb. Anglo-Saxon cild, German kind, English child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow or seen from its outside, a swelling
    Gabbhara
    neuter
    1. a cavern Snp 416 (giri˚) Vv 635 (giri˚)
    Derivation uncertain. cp. Sanskrit gahvara
    Gabbhinī
    1. (adjective feminine ) pregnant, enceinte Vin ii.268 SN iii.202 Ja i.151 Ja i.290 Ja iv.37 Pv i.66 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 82: Vv-a 110 (-bhāva); in combination g˚ pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse AN i.295 = ii.206 = M i.77, 238, 307, 342 = Pug 55 with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) AN iii.226f.
    ˚Gama
    1. 1. adjective going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Snp 221 Snp 606 Thag i.1108 Ja i.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi˚ identical Vv 161 (= vehāsaṁ Vv-a 78); nabhasi˚ going on clouds Snp 687 nibbāna leading to name SN v.11 dūraṁ˚ going far, hadayaṁ˚ going to one’s heart, q.v.masculine course, going to; in atthaṁ going home, going to rest, etc., q.v
    Gamana
    1. 1. neuter the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; (—˚) striving for, the leading of, pursuit AN ii.48f. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto = one cannot walk to the end of the world) Dhp 178 (saggassa going to heaven) Snp 40 Snp 691 cp. vāraṁ˚ Ja i.62 216 (in ex
    2. plural of vihaṁgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaṁ gamā ti vuccanti); 295 Pv-a 57
    3. pahiṇa˚ going on messages DN i.5 etc.; agati˚ wrong pursuit, ˚ṁ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life AN ii.18 Pv-a 161 magga tramping, being on the road Pv-a 43 saraṇa˚ finding shelter (in the Dhamma) Pv-a 49
    4. adjective (—˚) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna˚ maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna SN i.186 Dhp 289 duggati˚ magga the road to misery Thag 2, 355 duggamana-ṭṭhānā (
    5. plural inaccessible places Pv-a 102 (in ex
    6. plural of duggā)
      1. ˚antarāya an obstacle to one’s departure Ja i.62
      • ˚āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv.83; 6 (= ogamanuggamana Vv-a 326) Dhp-a i.80 (˚kāle); ˚sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i.e. easily accessible. AN v.15 Ja i.85 ˚ṁ karoti to go to and fro Vv-a 139
      • ˚kamma going away Dhp-a ii.81
      • ˚kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in ˚ṁ karoti to try to go Ja i.2
      • ˚bhāva the state of having gone away Ja ii.133
      • ˚magga (pleonastic) the way Ja i.202 279
      • ˚vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey Ja i.87

    Gamanīya
    1. (adjective; grd to gam 1. as gerundive to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a˚ not to be gone to (+ ṭhāna) Vv-a 72
    2. as
    3. gerundive to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kh viii.8 ‣See ex
    4. plural as Kp-a 223 Pv-a 87 (= kālikā, transient)
    Gamika
    1. (and gamiya Ja i.87) adjective going away, setting out for a journey (opposite āgantuka coming back) ap
    2. plural to bhikkhus only: Vin i.292 (˚ bhatta food for outgoing bh.); ii.170 (āgantuka˚), 211, 265; v.196 Ja vi.333 (āgantuka˚) ‣See also under abhisankhāra. cp. Avs i.87; Divy 50.

    Gamina
    adjective being on a “gati,” only at Snp 587 in “aññe pi
    • passive gamine yathākamm’ ûpage nare.”

    Gameti
    1. to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go Iti 115 (anabhāvaṁ to destroy) ‣See under gacchati
    causative of gacchati
    Gambhīra
    adjective
    1. deep, profound, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive difficult
    • (a) literally of lakes: Dhp 83 Pv ii.119 (= agādha) Pug 46 of a road (full of swamps) Ja i.196
    • (b) fig of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso.. MN i.487 SN i.136 Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho MN i.487 parisā g. (opposite uttāna, shallow, superficial thoughtless) AN i.70 g. ṭhāna with reference to jhāna, etc Ps ii.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. Pv-a 1 also with nipuṇa Ja vi.355 Mil 234 Bdhd. 118, 137; -
    • neuter the deep deep ground, i.e. secure foundation Snp 173 Kh viii.1 3 ‣See KhA 217
    1. ˚avabhāsa adjective having the appearance of depth or profundity, DN ii.55 SN ii.36 Pug 46 (+ uttāna), cp. Pug AN 226
    2. ˚pañña one whose wisdom is profound Snp 176 Snp 230 Snp 627= Dh 403 (+ medhāvin) cp. Dhp-a iv.169 & ‣See Ps; ii.192 for detailed explanation
    3. ˚sita resting on depth (of soil), well-founded AN iv.237
    4. Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra
    Gambhīratā
    feminine
    1. depth Dhp-a i.92
    abstract from preceding
    Gamma
    adjective
    1. of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. From villain), always combined with hīna, low & pagan Vin i.10 and ≈ (anta standard of life) AN iii.325 (dassana, view) DN iii.130 (sukhallikânuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. cp. pothujjanika
    from gāma. Vedic gramya
    Gayha
    adjective
    1. to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga adjective for being taken up, for common use Snp-a 283
    2. neuter that which comes into one’s grasp, movable property, acquisition of property Dhp-a ii.29 Dhp-a iii.119 Pv-a 4 As gayhūpakaṁ at Ja iv.219
    3. gerundive of gayhati; Vedic grāhya
    Gayhaka
    1. (adjective = gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in ˚niyyamāna identical SN i.143 = J iii.361 (ex plural as karamaragāhaṁ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara).

    Gayhati
    1. to get seized, to be taken ‣See gaṇhāti; p.pres. gayhamāna being caught Dhp-a iii.175 (˚ka). gerundive gayha
    2. passive to gaṇhāti
    Garahaka
    adjective finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī˚ āpa˚, etc., combined with paṭhavī-jigucchaka, etc. (disgusted with the great elements) MN i.327
    Garahaṇa
    neuter reproof Vv-a 16 as
    • feminine ˚ṇā at Vism 29.

    Garahati
    1. to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha “do not blame the blameless” SN i.240 DN i.161 (tapaṁ to reject, disapprove of) DN iii.92 DN iii.93 (aorist garahi, gerundive garahitabba) Snp 313 Snp 665 Mil 222 (+ jigucchanti) Pv-a 125 Pv-a 126 Sdhp 382

      • pp garahita blameworthy Dhp 30 (pamādo) Snp 313 Ja v.453 Mil 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless faultless Pv-a 89 (= anindita, 131)
      • ‣ See also gārayha & cp. vi˚
      Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaṁ
    Garahā
    feminine blame, reproach DN i.135 “stating an example,” ‣See DN-a i.296 DN iii.92 DN iii.93 Snp 141 Ja i.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garaha-bhaya-bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Nett 184.
    Garahin
    adjective blaming, censuring Snp 660 (ariya˚), 778 (atta˚), 913 (anatta˚) Mil 380 (pāpa˚).
    Garu
    1. adjective (a) literally heavy, opposite lahu light, appl; d to bhāra, a load SN iii.26 Ja i.196 (= bhārika); vi.420 Dhp-a i.48 Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of “form”). Compar. garutara (as against Sanskrit garīyaṁ Pv-a 191
    2. (b) figuratively important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable AN iii.110f. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya) c. genitive or—˚ bent on (often in sequence ˚garu, ˚ninna ˚poṇa, etc., e.g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma˚, Sanghe g. AN iii.331 = iv.28 sq.; dosa˚ SN i.24 kodha˚, saddhamma˚ (pursuing, fostering) AN ii.46f. = 84 sq. Sdhp 1 (sabba-loka˚ worshipped by all the world) Dīpavaṁsa iv.12
    3. agaru (c. genitive) irreverent towards Snp p. 51 (Gotamassa). cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru agalu
    4. Name a venerable person, a teacher: garunaṁ dassanāya & sakāsaṁ Snp 325 Snp 326 (variant reading garūnaṁ to be preferred, so also Snp-a 332 333); garūnaṁ dārā Iti 36-garukaroti (for garuṁ k˚) to esteem, respect, honour usually in series sakkaroti g˚ māneti pūjeti Vin ii.162 MN i.31 DN i.91 AN iii.76 AN iv.276 Nd2 334 (on namati) 530 (on yasassin) Pv-a 54 Ex
    5. plural at DN-a i.256 by gāravaṁ karoti. -garukātabba worthy of esteem Pv-a 9
    6. garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana esteem, honour, regard Pug 19 = Dhs 1121
    7. ‣ See also guru
      1. ˚upanissita adjective depending on a teacher, one being taught Ps ii.202
      2. ˚ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher AN iii.21 AN iii.393 Nett 8; Vism 344
      3. ˚dhamma a rule to be observedic There are 8 chief rules enum at Vin ii.255 = AN iv.276 AN iv.280 ‣See also Vin iv.51 315 v.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin i.49 = ii.226; i.52, 143, 144; ii.279
      4. ˚nissaya in ˚ṁ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i.e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303
      5. ˚saṁvasa association with a teacher Nd2 235Mil 408
      6. Vedic guru; Latin gravis & brutus, Gothic kaurus
    Garuka
    somewhat heavy.
    1. -1. literally Ja i.134 (of the womb in pregnancy) Dhp 310 Mil 102 Usually coupled & contrasted with; lahuka, light: in definition of sense of touch Dhs 648 similarly with sithila, dhanita dīgha, rassa Mil 344 DN-a i.177 (in ex plural of dasavidha vyañjana)
    2. figuratively (a) heavy, grave, serious especially applied to-āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opposite lahuka Vin v.115 130, 145, 153 Dhp 138 (ābādha, illness) applied to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds)
    3. neuter as
    4. adverb considerably Mil 92 (˚ṁ parinamati). (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Thag 2 368 (Satthu sāsana = garukātabba Thag-a 251) Mil 140
    5. (c)—˚ “heavy on,” bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna˚ fond of bathing Vin i.196 tadattha engaged in (jhāna) Nd2 264; kamma˚ attributing importance to k. Nd2 411; saddhamma˚ revering the Doctrine Sdhp 520. Nibbāna-garuka Vism 117 (+ Nâdhimutta & N-pabbhāra)
      1. ˚āpatti a grievous offence ‣See above. As terasa g—˚ino at Mil 310
      from garu
    Garutta
    neuter the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness. AN v.164f.
    Garuḷa
    1. . Name of a mythical bird, a harpy Ps ii.196 = Nd2 235 3 q.; Vism 206 Vv-a 9 (= supaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.144
    Derivation uncertain. Sanskrit garuḍa, Latin volucer winged, volo to fly
    Gala
    the throat Ja i.216 Ja i.264 iii.26; iv.494: i.194 (a dewlap) Pv-a 11 Pv-a 104.
    1. ˚agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379
    2. ˚ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646 740, 875 -ggaha taking by the throat, throttling DN i.144 (+ daṇḍapahāra)
    3. ˚nāḷī the larynx Dhp-a i.253 Dhp-a ii.257
    • ˚ppamāṇa
    • adjective going up to the neck Ja i.264 (āvāṭa) -pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat Ja iii.126
    • ˚ppavedhaka
    • neuter pain in the throat MN i.371
    • ˚mūla the bottom of the throat Pv-a 283
    • ˚vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (oesophagus?) Vism 185, 258.

      1. Note.-gala with many other words containing a guttural + liquid element belongs to the onomatopoetic roots kḷ gḷ (kṛ gṛ), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following:
      1. 1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch gargle, gurgle
      1. 2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough; per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i.e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e.g.). To be divided into:
      1. A. palatal group (“light” sounds): squeak, yell giggle, etc., applied to-(a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. Pali koñca Latin gallus)-(b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.)
      1. B. guttural group (“dark” sounds): groan, growl howl, etc., applied to-(a) Animate name: the snorting grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. Pali koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar)-(b) Inanimate name: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati)
      1. 3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion):
      1. A. palatal group (“sharp” sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): Pali gaggaraka whirlpool
      1. B. guttural group (“dull” sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound-element applied to swelling & fullness, as in “bulge”
      1. These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa
      • The formation of kḷ gḷ roots is by no means an extinct process nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic; family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg origin are the following which are all represented in Pāli (the categories are marked
      • accusative to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): , clango, Gothic hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): , Sanskrit kāru (cp. Pali kitti) cārmen; kel (2 A): , calo (cp. Pali kandati) Old High German hellan; ker (2 Aa): = querquedula = kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba) cornix (cp. Pali kāka), corvus = crow = raven; Sanskrit krośati Pali koñca
      • gṷel (1) Latin gula, glutio, ; gṷer (1) , Latin voro, Sanskrit girati, Old High German querka; (3) (whirlpool) Sanskrit gargara: gel (1) Sanskrit gilati, Old High German kela-gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): , garrulus, Old High German kara: gel (2 A) (a) hirrio (to whine), Old High German gellan (b): ger (1) (gargle) Sanskrit gharghara (gurgling) (2 Aa) = crane, German krähen, Latin gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Old High German kerran (grunt), Sanskrit gṛṇāti (sing) (2 Ab) Sanskrit jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): = grundio grunt; Latin gurgulio; Sanskrit ghurghura
      1. With special reference to Pāli formations the following list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s.v. Closely connected with Indogermanic kḷ gḷ is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa)-; kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sanskrit kṛka˚), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle) kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk to be hoarse; khaṭ; (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking) kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle cp. Sanskrit gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sanskrit gharghara (gurgling) (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sanskrit ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb ghurughurāyati (grunt)
      • ‣ See also kakaca, kanka kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa
      *gel to devour, to swallow = Latin gula, Old High German kela, cp. Sanskrit gala jalukā, and *gṷel, cp. also Sanskrit girati, gilati. Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal “adana.” This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful definition of “puggala”; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)
    Galaka
    neuter throat Ja iii.481 Ja iv.251
    Gaḷa
    1. a drop, i.e. a fall ‣See gaḷāgala
    2. a swelling, a boil (= gaṇḍa Ja iv.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple-swellings broken; ex
    3. plural p. 497 by madaṁ gaḷantā) Snp 61 (? variant reading gaṇḍa)
    4. a hook, a fishhook Snp 61 (?), ex

      • plural at Snp-a 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso.

        1. gaḷāgaḷaṁ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i.e. from fall to fall, with reference to the gatis Ja v.453 (ex plural by apāyaṁ gacchati)
      same as gala ‣See note on preceding
    Gaḷagaḷāyati
    1. to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (locative absolute) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g˚; amidst rain and heavy thunder DN ii.132 SN i.106 AN v.114 sq (gala˚) Thag 1, 189 Mil 116 (gaganaṁ ravati galag˚) Kp-a 163 (mahāmegha)

      • Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Mil 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.)
      = gaggarāyati ‣See note on gala
    Gaḷati
    1. (and galati) [ Sanskrit galati, cp. Old High German quellan to well up, to flow out ‣See note on gala and cp. also jala water 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intransitive) Vin i.204 (natthu g.) MN i.336 (sīsaṁ lohitena gaḷati) Ja iv.497 (madaṁ) iv.3 (lohitaṁ g.); v.472 (do. variant reading paggharati); Pv iv.53 (assukāni g.)
    • to rain Thag 1, 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. cp. gala-gaḷāyati)

  • to drop down, to fall Dhp-a ii.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito)-cp. pari˚.

  • Gaḷayati
    1. to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Snp 691
    denominative to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati.1
    Gaḷita
    1. rough, in a˚ smooth Ja v.203 Ja v.206 (+ mudu & akakkasa); vi.64
    Gaḷocī
    feminine. Name of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā Dhp-a iii.110 a creeper. cp. pūtilatā.
    Gava˚
    ; base of the name go, a bull, cow, used in compounds ‣See gāv˚, go.
    1. ˚akkha a kind of window Mhvs 9. 15, 17
    2. ˚āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin i.182 -âssa cows & horses Vin v.350 DN i.5~ Snp 769
    • ˚caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pug 47
    • ˚pāna milky rice pudding Ja i.33-(˚m)pati “lord of cows,” a bull Snp 26 Snp 27 (usabha).

    Gavacchita
    1. furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) Vv-a 276 of a carriage (= suvaṇṇajālavitata)
    Gavaja
    1. ‣See gavaya
    Gavaya
    (and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal
    1. Ja v.406 (˚ja = khagga) Mil 149 Dhs-a 331
    Sanskrit gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo
    Gavi
    1. a tree-like creeper, in -pphala the fruit of a g. Snp 239 (= rukkhavalliphala Snp-a)
    ˚Gavesaka
    1. (adjective from next) looking for ‣Seeking Ja i.176 (kāraṇa˚); ii.3 (aguṇa˚)
    Gavesati
    1. to ‣Seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dhp 146 (gavessatha), 153 Thag 1, 183 Nd2 2 70, 427 Ja i.4 Ja i.61 Mil 326 Pv-a 187 Pv-a 202 (aorist gavesi = vicini); Bdhd 53 In Nd2 always in combination esati gavesati pariyesati
    2. gava + esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298 = maggana tracking
    Gavesana
    1. search for Pv-a 185
    Gavesin
    adjective ‣Seeking, looking for, striving after (usually—˚) DN i.95 (tāṇa˚, etc.) Dhp 99 (kāma˚), 245 (suci˚), 355 (pāra˚) Nd2 503 (in ex
    • plural of mahesi, with esin pariyesin); Bdhd 59.

    Gassetuṁ
    1. at Dhs-a 324 is to be corrected into dassetuṁ
    Gaha1
    a house, usually in compounds ‣See below. Ja iii.396 (= the layman’s life; Commentary geha).
    1. ˚kāraka a house-builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dhp 153 Dhp 154 = Th 1, 183, 184 Dhp-a iii.128
    • ˚kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge-pole, metaph. of ignorance Dhp 154 (= kaṇṇika-maṇḍala Dhp-a 128) replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Thag 1, 184 in corresp passage (= kaṇṇikā Commentary )
    • ˚ṭṭha a householder one who leads the life of a layman (opp anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin i.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present) SN i.201 AN iii.114 AN iii.116 AN iii.258 It. 112 (gharaṁ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dhp 404 = Snp 628 Snp 43 (gharaṁ āvasanto ‣See Nd2 226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaṁ gahaṭṭhaṁ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. —˚vatta a layman’s rule of conduct Snp 393 (= agāriyā paṭipadā Snp-a 376) —˚ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. AN ii.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni) iii.296 (brahmacariyā)
    • ˚pati ‣See sep
    ‣See under gaṇhāti
    Gaha2
    1. “seizer,” seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at SN i.208 where Sānu is “seized by an epileptic fit ‣See note in Kindred Sayings i.267, 268. Used of dosa (anger) Dhp 251 (exemplified at Dhp-a iii.362 by ajagara˚ the grip of a boa, kumbhīla˚ of a crocodile yakkha˚ of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+ sarakkhasa) Iti 57 cp. gahaṇa & saṁ˚
    Sanskrit graha, gaṇhāti, q.v. for etymology
    Gahaṇa
    adjective seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail) Usually—˚: nāma˚-divase on the day on which a child gets its name (literally acquiring a name) Ja i.199 Ja i.262 arahatta˚ Dhp-a i.8 dussa˚ Dhp-a ii.87 maccha˚ Ja iv.139 hattha˚ Ja i.294 byanjana˚-lakkhaṇa Nett 27 gahaṇatthāya in order to get … Ja i.279 Ja ii.352 amhākaṁ g˚ sugahaṇaṁ we have a tight grip Ja i.222 Ja i.223 from gaṇhāti
    Gahaṇī
    feminine the “seizer,” a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama-vepākiniyā g˚ iyā samannāgata “endowed with good digestion” DN ii.177 = iii.166. Same phrase at Avs i.168, 172. cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67.
    1. Gahaṇika in phrase saṁsuddha-gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enumerated of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble DN i.113 DN i.115 DN i.137 (gahaṇī ex plural as kucchi DN-a i.281) AN i.163 AN iii.154 AN iii.223 Snp p. 115. Ja i.2 duṭṭha-gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin i.206

    Gahana
    1. adjective deep, thick, impervious, only in a˚ clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka +) Mil 160 (gahanaṁ a kataṁ the thicket is cleared)
    2. neuter an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle
    3. (a) 18 gahanāni at Ja v.46 usually ap
    4. plural to grass: tiṇa˚ AN i.153 = iii.128 (+ rukkha˚) Mil 369 adjective tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin ii.138 - SN i.199 (rukkhamūla˚) Ja i.7 Ja i.158 Pv-a 5 (pabbata˚), 43 Vv-a 230 (vana˚)
    5. (b) figuratively imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction ap
    6. plural to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combined with diṭṭhi-kantāra, the wilderness of d ‣See diṭṭhi) MN i.8 MN i.485 Pug 22 DN-a i.108 Of rāga˚, moha˚, etc., and kilesa˚ Nd2 630 (in ex
    7. plural of Satthā; rāgagahanaṁ tāreti) Dhp-a iv.156 (on Dhp 394) Vv-a 96
    8. manussa˚ MN i.340
      1. ˚ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle Ja i.150 Ja i.253
      Sanskrit gahana, cp. also ghana
    Gahapati
    the possessor of a house, the head of the household pater familias (frequently + seṭṭhi).
    1. -1. In formulas (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i.e. not official) life, classed with khattiyā brāhmaṇā in kh˚-mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm˚mahāsālā do. Brahmins, gah˚-m˚ well-to-do gentry SN i.71 Nd2 135 Dhp-a i.388
    • kh˚-kula, br˚-kula g˚-kula the kh˚, etc. clans: Vin ii.161 Ja i.218 kh˚ amaccā, br˚, g.˚ DN i.136
    • (b) as regards education mode of life ranking with kh˚, br˚, g.˚ and samaṇā Vin i.227 AN i.66 Nd2 235 ‣See also compound
    • paṇḍita. 2. Other applications: frequently in combination brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen ‣See gahapatika. In comb; n with gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle class, and implies a tinge of “respectable people” esp in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah˚-putto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto DN i.62 MN i.344 gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives AN ii.57 In sg the voc. gahapati may be rendered by “Sir” (Mil 17 e.g. and frequently), & in
    • plural gahapatayo by “Sirs” (e. g Vin i.227 MN i.401 AN ii.57)
    • As regards occupation all respectable businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino ‣See below & cp. seṭṭhi˚ Vin i.16 but also kassaka, farmer AN i.229 239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter AN iii.391 Var duties of a g. enumerated at AN i.229 AN i.239
    • The wealth comfortably-living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa-bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin ii.77 = iii.160.
    • feminine gahapatānī Vin iii.211 213 sq., 259 (always with gahapati Dhp-a i.376
    • plural gahapatāniyo ‣See above
    • Note. The genitive singular of gahapati is ˚ino (J i.92) as well as-issa (Vin i.16 DN iii.36)
    • Single cases of gahapatis, where g almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin ii.158f. SN i.56 SN ii.68 AN ii.65 Ja i.92 Pv-a 16 Meṇḍaka g. Vin i.240f.; Citta SN iv.281f.; Nakulapitā SN ii.1f.; Potaliya MN i.359 Sandhāna DN iii.36f. Hāliddikāni SN ii.9
    • See next
    1. ˚'aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one’s children & servants AN iv.45 ‣See enumerated under aggī at AN iv.41 DN iii.217
    • ˚cīvara the robe of a householder (i.e. a layman’s robe) Vin i.280f.; ˚dhara wearing the householder’s (private man’s robe (of a bhikkhu) MN i.31 AN iii.391f.
    • ˚necayika (always with brāhmaṇa-mahāsālā) a business man of substance DN i.136 DN iii.16f.
    • ˚paṇḍita a learned householder cp. above 1 (b), together with khattiya˚, etc MN i.176 MN i.396 with samaṇa-brāhmaṇa˚ Mil 5
    • ˚parisā a company of gahapatis (together with khattiya˚, etc ‣See above) Vin i.227 MN i.72 DN iii.260
    • ˚putta a member of a g. clan DN i.62 DN i.211 MN i.344 SN iii.48 SN iii.112 Pv-a 22
    • ˚mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combination with khattiya˚, etc. DN iii.258 SN i.71 SN iv.292 AN ii.86 AN iv.239
    • ˚ratana the “householder-gem” one of the seven fairy jewels of the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure-finder ‣See ratana DN ii.16 DN ii.176 Snp p. 106. cp. Rhys Davids Dialogues etc. ii.206
    gaha + pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of “lord,” “master, implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. cp. Sanskrit dampati = dominus = ; ; and pati in Pali senāpati commander-in-chief, Sanskrit jāspati householder, Latin hospes, Old Bulgarian gospoda = potestas, Gothic brūp-faps bride-groom, hunda-faps = senāpati ‣See details under pati.
    Gahapatika
    adjective-noun belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means ‣See gahapati DN i.61 (ex
    • plural as gehassa pati ekageha-matte jeṭṭhaka DN-a i.171) Nd2 342 Pv-a 39 Often in combination with khattiya & brāhmaṇa: AN i.66 DN iii.44 DN iii.46 DN iii.61 & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only brāhmaṇa-gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests laymen, Rhys Davids; Buddh. S. p. 258) MN i.400 AN i.110 Iti iii. Ja i.83 Ja i.152 Ja i.267 Pv-a 22

      • paṇṇika g˚ “owner of a house of leaves” as nickname of a fruiterer Ja iii.21 of an ascetic Ja iv.446
    Gahita
    1. (and gahīta Dhp 311) adjective

      1. seized. taken, grasped DN i.16 DN-a i.107 (= ādinna, pavattita) Ja i.61 Ja iv.2 Pv-a 43 (variant reading for text gaṇhita)
      • nt a grasp, grip Dhp-a iii.175 -gahitakaṁ karoti to accept Vv-a 260
      • ˚duggahīta (always ˚gahīta) hard to grasp MN i.132f. AN ii.147 AN ii.168 AN iii.178 Dhp 311 Ja vi.307f.; sugahita (sic) easy to get Ja i.222
      1. ˚bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back) holding back, preventing to act (generously) Dhs-a 370 (in explanation of aggahitattaṁ cittassa Dhs 1122 ‣See under ā˚)
      past participle of gaṇhāti
    Gāthaka
    1. = gāthā, in ekaṁ me gāhi gāthakaṁ “sing to me only one little verse” Ja iii.507
    demin. of gāthā
    Gāthā
    feminine
    1. a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaṁ or a Tuṭṭhubbaṁ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half-lines AN ii.178 Ja iv.395 Defined as akkhara-padaniya-mita-ganthita-vacanaṁ at Kp-a 117. For a riddle on the word ‣See S i.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon ‣See navanga Satthu sāsana. Pl gāthā Snp 429 Ja ii.160 gāthāyo Vin i.5 349 DN ii.157 gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin i.36 38; Kh v. intr
    • gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin i.222 230, 246, 294, etc
    • gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin i.38
    • anantaragāthā the following stanza Ja iv.142 Snp 251 Ja i.280 Dhp 102 (˚sataṁ)
    1. ˚abhigīta gained by verses SN i.167 = Sn 81, 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaṁ Commentary cp. German “ersungen”) -āvasāne after the stanza has been ended Dhp-a iii.171
    • ˚jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35
    • ˚dvaya
    • neuter a pair of stanzas Ja iii.395f. Pv-a 29 Pv-a 40
    • ˚pada a half line of a gāthā Dhp 101 Kp-a 123
    • ˚sukhattaṁ in order to have a well-sounding line, metri causā, Pv-a 33
    Vedic gāthā, on dern ‣See gāyate
    Gādha1
    1. depth; a hole, a dugout AN ii.107 = Pug 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (˚ṁ khaṇati). cp. gāḷha2
    Sanskrit gāḷha past participle of gāh ‣See gāhati
    Gādha2
    1. adjective passable, fordable in a˚ unfathomable, deep Pv-a 77 (= gambhīra). neuter a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre ˚ṁ vindati. AN v.202 ˚ṁ esati to ‣Seek the terra firma SN i.127 similarly: ˚ṁ labhati to gain firm footing SN i.47 ˚ṁ ajjhagā SN iv.206 ˚ṁ labhate Ja vi.440 (= patiṭṭhā). cp. o˚, paṭi˚
    2. Sanskrit gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 “paṭiṭṭhāyaṁ” cp. also Sanskrit gādha, fordable & ‣See gāḷha; 1
    Gādhati
    1. to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati “the four elements have no footing DN i.223 = SN i.15 -Dhamma-Vinaye gādhati “to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline” SN iii.59f.
    v. derived from gādha2
    Gāma
    a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. German gemeinde), a habitable place (opposite arañña: gāme vā yadi vâraññe Snp 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin i.109 110; iii.46). In size varying, but usually small distinguished from nigama, a market-town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a “state (raṭṭhaṁ) ‣See definition & description at Vin iii.46 200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaṁ piṇḍāya carati “to visit the parish for alms” is extremely frequent.
    1. -1. a village as such Vin i.46 Ārāmika˚, Pilinda˚ Vin i.28 29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda-gāmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyānaṁ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Snp 683 Uruvela˚ Pv ii.1318; gāmo nâtikālena pavisitabbo MN i.469 ˚ṁ raṭṭhañ ca bhuñjati Snp 619 Snp 711 gāme tiṁsa kulāni honti Ja i.199 -Sn 386, 929, 978 Ja ii.153 Ja vi.366 Dhp 47 Dhp 49 Dhs 697 (suñño g.) Pv-a 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena)
    • gāmā gāmaṁ from hamlet to hamlet MN ii.20 Snp 180 (with nagā nagaṁ; ex
    • plural Snp-a 216 as devagāmā devagāmaṁ), 192 (with purā puraṁ); Pv ii.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaṁ Nd2 177 (with nigamena n˚, nagarena n˚., raṭṭhena r˚., janapadena j˚.)
    • grouped with nigama, a market-town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo AN iv.365f. cp. v.101 (w. janapadapadeso)- Vin iii.25 184 (˚ṁ vā nigamaṁ vā upanissāya) iv.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre DN i.237 MN i.488 gāme vā nigame vā Pug 66

  • as a geographical-political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumerated in two sets: (a) gāma-nigamarājadhāniyo Vin iii.89 AN iii.108 Nd2 271iii; Pv ii.1318 Dhp-a i.90

    • (b) gāma-nigama-nagara-raṭṭha-janapada Nd2 177 304iii (˚bandhana), 305 (˚kathā); with the following variations: g. nigama nagara MN ii.33
    1. -40; g nigama janapada Snp 995 Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Snp 118 (explained by Snp-a 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaṁ)
    • ‣ See also dvāra˚; paccanta˚ bīja˚; bhūta˚; mātu˚
    1. ˚anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in ˚nāyaka leading to the village AN iii.189 ˚vihārin (= āraññaka) living near a v. MN i.31 MN i.473 AN iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati-cīvara -dhara)-Sn 710
    2. ˚antara the (interior of the) village, only in technical term gāmantaraṁ gacchati to go into the v. Vin ii.300 & in; ˚kappa the “village-trip-licence” (Vinaya Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210
    3. ˚ūpacāra the outskirts of a v. Vin i.109 110; defined at Vin iii.46 200
    4. ˚kathā village-talk, gossip about v
    • affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+ nigama˚, nagara˚ janapada˚) DN i.7 ‣See explanation at DN-a i.90 Snp 922 ‣See kathā
    • ˚kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in ˚ṁ karoti to make a place habitable Ja i.199
    • ˚kūṭa “the village-fraud,” a sycophant SN ii.258 Ja iv.177 (= kūṭavedin)
    • ˚goṇā (
    • plural ) the village cattle Ja i.194
    • ˚ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder dacoit (of corā thieves) DN i.135 SN ii.188
    • ˚ghātaka (corā = ˚ghāta SN iv.173 Mil 20 Vism 484;
    • neuter village plundering Ja i.200
    • ˚jana the people of the v. Mil 47-ṭṭhāna in purāṇa˚ a ruined village Ja ii.102
    • ˚dārakā (
    • plural ) the youngsters of the v. Ja iii.275
    • feminine -dārikā the girls of the v. Pv-a 67
    • ˚ dvaya, in ˚vāsika living in (these) two vs. Pv-a 77
    • ˚dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52 Ja ii.110 Ja ii.301 cp. Pv-a 67-dhamma doings with women-folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct DN i.4≈(+ methuna) AN i.211 Ja ii.180 (= vasaladhamma) Vv-a 11 DN-a i.72 (= gāma-vāsīnaṁ dhamma?)
    • ˚poddava (variant reading kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vinaya Texts iii.66; Buddhaghosa explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi-rāga-maṇḍanânuyuttā nāgarikamanussā gāmaṁ podavā ti pi pādho es’ ev’ attho, Vin ii.315 Vin ii.105
    • ˚bhojaka the village headman Ja i.199 Dhp-a i.69
    • ˚majjhe in the midst of the v. Ja i.199 vi.332
    • ˚vara an excellent v. SN i.97 Ja i.138
    • ˚vāsin the inhabitant of a v. Ja ii.110 Ja v.107 DN-a i.72
    • ˚saññā the thought of a v. MN iii.104
    • ˚samīpe near a v. Ja i.254
    • ˚sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin i.179
    • ˚sāmanta in the neighbourhood of a v., near a v. DN i.101 (+ mgama˚) -sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin i.110 (+ nigama˚) -sūkara a village pig Ja iii.393
    Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Latin gremium; Anglo-Saxon crammian (English cram) Old Bulgarian gramada (village community) Old High German chram; cp. *ger in Latin grex.
  • Gāmaka
    1. 1. = gāma Vin i.208 Ja i.199 (Macala˚), 253; iv.431 (cora˚) Pv-a 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī) Dhp-a ii.25 (dvāra˚)
    • a villager Ja v.107 (= gāmavāsin)
    1. ˚āvāsa an abode in a village Pv-a 12 Vv-a 291
    Gāmaṇika
    1. = gāmaṇi SN i.61 AN iii.76 (pūga˚)
    Gāmaṇī
    masculine the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin ii.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G. Saṁyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana-Vagga) SN iv.305f.; & of the G
    • Jātaka Ja i.136 Ja i.137
    • SN iv.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa˚), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya)
    Gāmaṇḍala
    1. "the round of the ox,” like the oxen driven round & round the threshing-floor Thag 1, 1143
    • Cp gomaṇḍala (s.v. go)
    Gāmika
    1.
    1. a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin i.179 AN iii.76 AN iii.78 AN iii.300 (in series with raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika)
    • to gam
    1. adjective going wandering, travelling (—˚) Ja ii.112
    to gāma
    ˚Gāmin
    adjective
    1. feminine ˚iṇī, in composition ˚gāmi˚
    • (a) going, walking, literally: sīgha˚ walking quickly Snp 381 -(b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either literally Pāṭaliputtagāmi-magga the road to Pali Mil 17 or figuratively of ways means connected with one of the “gatis.” as apāya Dhp-a iii.175 udaya˚ paṭipadā SN v.361 nibbāna dhamma Snp 233 amata-gāmi-magga SN v.8 udayatthagāmiṇī paññā. AN v.15 dukkhanirodha˚ paṭipadā Vin i.10 cp. ācaya˚ Dhs 584 1013.
    • accusative ˚gāminaṁ khemaṁ Amata˚ MN i.508 brahmacariyaṁ: nibbān ogadha˚ Iti 28 29; dukkhûpasama˚ maggaṁ Snp 724 Dhp 191 niraya˚ maggaṁ Snp 277 Thag-a 243 Or ˚gāmiṁ Snp 233 Snp 381
    from gacchati, gam
    Gāmeyya
    adjective belonging to a village in sa˚; of the same v., a clansman SN i.36 = 60 (+ sakhā).
    Gāyaka
    1. a singer Pv-a 3 (naṭaka˚)
    from next
    Gāyati
    1. to sing, to recite, often comb with naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin i.38); imperative gāhi (J iii.507);
    2. future gāyissati
    3. gerundive gāyitabba. Vin ii.108 (dhammaṁ), 196 (gāthaṁ) Snp 682 (g˚ ca vādayanti ca) Ja i.290 (gītaṁ); iii.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (
    4. aorist gāyi) Pv-a 151 cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya
    5. Vedic gai, gāyate
    Gāyana
    neuter singing Vv-a 315 (naccana +).
    Gārayha
    adjective
    1. contemptible, low Vin iii.186 Vin iv.176f.; 242; v.149 MN i.403 AN ii.241 (kammaṁ pādaṁ gārayhaṁ mosallaṁ) Snp 141 Nett 52 Snp-a 192
    • not to be blamed Ja vi.200 (spelt aggarayha)
    gerundive of garahati
    Gārava
    masculine and

    neuter cp. Sanskrit gaurava, from garu

    1. reverence, respect, esteem; with locative respect for reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects Buddhe Satthari
      1. Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde paṭisanthāre Vin v.92 = DN iii.244 As 7 gāravā (the 6 + samānhi) in adjective ; and sa˚; at AN iv.84 ‣See below DN iii.284 Snp 265 Vism 464 (atta˚ & para˚). explained Kp-a 144 by garubhāvo; often in combination with bahumāna Pv-a 135 (= pūjā), sañjāta-g˚-bahumāna (adjective Pv-a 50 Vv-a 205 instrumental gāravena out of respect respectfully DN ii.155 Ja i.465 Applied to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante Pv-a 33 Pv-a 121, & āyasmā ‣See compound ˚adhivacana
      • agārava
      • masculine neuter disrespect Vin v.92 (six: as above) Ja i.217 Pv-a 54
      • As adjective in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with
      • locative ) & disrespectful DN iii.244 (six g.) AN iv.84 (seven) MN i.469 combined with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient AN iii.7f. 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba-gārava full of keen respect (Satthu-garu Dhamma-garu Sanghe ca tibba-gārava, etc.) AN iii.331 = iv.28 sq
      1. ˚ādhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd2 466 (with reference to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd2 130 (āyasmā)
      later
    Gāravatā
    1. reverence, respect, in Satthu˚, Dhamma˚, etc. AN iii.330f. 423 sq.; iv.29 (ottappa˚)
    Derived from gārava
    Gāḷha
    adjective
    1. cp. gādha1
      1. strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaṁ g˚ bandbanaṁ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly DN i.245 AN ii.241 Ja i.264 Pv-a 4 Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtankena phuṭṭha) AN ii.174f.; applied to poison smeared on an arrow MN i.429
      • gālhaṁ & gālhakaṁ (
      • adverb ) tightly Ja i.265 Ja i.291
      • agāḷha (? probably to be read āgāḷha (of vacana, speech, combined with pharusa) strong (?) Pug 32 (expl by Commentary atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. 2. [cp. gādha1 deep Ja i.155 (˚vedhin, piercing) Mil 370 (ogāhati). cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita pagāḷha
      cp. Sanskrit gāḍha
    Gāvī
    feminine
    1. genitive singular gāviyā (Pug 56 = AN ii.207); nominative plural gāviyo (Snp-a 323 Vv-a 308); genitive
    2. plural gāvīnaṁ Dhp-a i.396 Snp-a 323 Vv-a 308)

      • A cow Vin i.193 AN iv.418 Ja i.50 Ud 8 49; Vism 525 (in simile) Dhp-a ii.35 Vv-a 200
      ‣See go
    Gāvuta
    neuter
    1. a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana = 80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league Ja i.57 Ja i.59 Ja ii.209 Vism 118 Dhp-a i.396
    cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district
    Gāvutika
    adjective reaching a gāvuta in extent DN-a i.284
    Gāvo
    1. ‣See go
    Gāha
    1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda˚ suriya˚ an eclipse (literally the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) DN i.10 (= DN-a i.95: Rāhu candaṁ gaṇhāti). especially applied to the sphere of the mind obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in definition of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd; 2 271iii (on lepa) Pug 22 Dhs 381 (= obsession like the grip of a crocodile Dhs-a 253), 1003 Vb 145 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp. viparīta˚ Vv-a 331 ‣See diṭṭhi. As doubt & error in anekaṁ sa + g˚ in def; n of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd; 2 1 Vb 168 ekaṁsa˚ & apaṇṇaka˚ certainty, right thought Ja i.97
    2. gāhaṁ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea Ja ii.387
    3. adjective active holding: rasmi˚ holding the reins Dhp 222 dabbi˚ holding the spoons Pv ii.953 (= gāhaka Pv-a 135)
    4. (b)
    5. medium
    6. passive taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in ˚ṁ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive SN i.84 karamaragāhaṁ gaheti same Ja iii.361 ‣See kara
    from gaṇhāti
    Gāhaka
    adjective feminine gāhikā holding (—˚) chatta˚ Snp 688 Dāvs ii.119; katacchu˚ Pv-a 135 cāmarī˚ Ja vi.218 cp. saṁ˚.
    Gāhati
    1. to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into ‣See gādha & gāḷha; cp. also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati
    Sanskrit gāhate but Dhtp 349 = viloḷana
    Gāhana
    neuter
    1. submersion ‣See avagahana, avagāhati & avagāhana
    from last
    Gāhavant
    1. in ekaṁsa-gāhavatī nibbici kicchā “doubtlessness consisting in certainty” Vv-a 85 in explained of ekaṁsika
    Gāhāpaka
    1. one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin ii.177 (patta˚)
    from gāhāpeti
    Gāhāpeti
    1. to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi Ja i.53 Ja ii.37 gāhāpayi Pv iv.142
    • German gāhāpetvā Ja i.166 Ja ii.127 Ja iii.281 Dhp-a i.62 (patta-cīvaraṁ) With double
    • accusative mahājanaṁ kathaṁ g˚ made people believe your words Ja ii.416 cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips Ja iii.281 cp. gaṇhāpeti
    causative of gaṇhāti
    Gāhi
    • imperative pres. of gāyati Ja iii.507

    Gāhika
    1. (—˚) = gahin ‣See anta˚
    Gāhin
    adjective (—˚) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna˚ DN iii.247 udaka˚ Ja i.5 piya˚ Dhp 209 nimitta˚ anubyañjana˚ etc.
    Gāheti
    1. to understand, to account for DN-a i.117
    v. denominative from gāha
    Giṅgamaka
    1. (Burmese variant kinkamaka) a sort of ornament Ja vi.590
    Gijjha
    1. masculine a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk MN i.88 (kākā +) 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.) Snp 201 (kākā +) Pv-a 198 (+ kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha
    2. adjective greedy, desirous of (—˚) kāma˚ Ja i.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi˚
      1. ˚kūṭa “Vulture’s Peak” proper name of a hill near Rājagaha Vin ii.193 Dhp-a i.140 Pv-a 10 and passim -potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile)
      Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati
    Gijjhati
    1. to desire, to long for, to wish: past participle gaddha & giddha. cp. abhi˚, pali˚.;
    2. past participle (Pass.) gijjhita Thag 2, 152 (= paccāsiṁsita Thag-a)
    3. Sanskrit gṛdhyati, to Latin gradior?
    Giñjakā
    feminine a brick, in ˚āvasatha a house of bricks, as N
    • plural “the Brick Hall” DN i.91 Vin i.232 MN i.205

    Giddha
    adjective
    1. greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with locative ) SN i.74 (+ kāmesu mucchita); ii.227 AN ii.2 AN iii.68 Snp 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv iv.62 (sukhe) Pv-a 3 (+ rata (= gadhita), 271 (āhāre = hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd2 369 (nissita) Snp-a 286 cp. gathita

      • agiddha without greed, desireless controlled Iti 92 (+ vītagedha) Snp 210 (do), 845 cp. pa˚
      past participle of gijjhati
    Giddhi
    feminine
    1. greed, usually in compounds.: ˚māna greed & conceit Snp 328; ˚lobha g. desire MN i.360 MN i.362 (also a˚ and giddhilobhin) Ja v.343 Derived giddhikatā (feminine abstract = Sanskrit gṛdhnutā) greed Vb 351 (variant reading gedhi˚)
    2. cp. Sanskrit gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā
    Giddhin
    1. (adjective from preceding) greedy, usually—˚ greedy for, desirous after Pv iv.107 (āhāra˚) feminine giddhinī : gāvī vaccha Vin i.193 SN iv.181 cp. also paligedhin.

    Giddhimā
    1. (adjective from giddhi) greedy, full of greed Ja v.464 (rasa˚)
    Gini
    (poet.)
    1. fire AN iii.347 (mahāgini) Snp 18 Snp 19 (āhito → nibbuto: made → extinguished) Ja iv.26 Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diaeresis & one by contraction is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e.g. supina & soppa (Sanskrit svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc
    Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combination like mahāgni = mahā-gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi
    Gimha
    1. I. (singular) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in locative as a designation of time. 1. of the day: Vv-a 40 (˚samaye; variant reading gimhānamāse)
    2. of summer usually in combination with and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta-gimhisu in with & s. Dhp 286 (cp. gimhika for ˚isu). Mil 274 Dīpavaṁsa i.55; Vism 231 (˚âbhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (˚kāle). In enumeration with other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd2 631 (sadā) vasanta gimhādika utū Pv-a 135
    3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiṁ gimhe Snp 233 ‣See KhA 192 for explanation-II. (

      • plural ) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in ˚naṁ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer MN i.79 SN iii.141 SN v.50 SN v.321 Vv 795 (= āsāḷhimāse Vv-a 307)
      Vedic grīṣma
    Gimhāna
    adjective-noun
    1. of summer, summerly, the summer season AN iv.138 (+ hemanta & vassa) Snp 233 (gimhānamāse) Vv-a 40 (variant reading ). On terms for seasons in genitive cp. Miln translation ii.113
    originally genitive plural of gimhā = gimhānaṁ, from combination gimhāna(ṁ) māse, in a month of summer
    Gimhika
    1. (adjective from gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin i.15 DN ii.21 (+ vassika & hemantika)
    Girā
    1. utterance (originally song, important utterance still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words DN iii.174 Snp 350 Snp 632 Snp 690 Snp 1132 Dhp 408 Thag 2, 316 402 Vv 5018 (= vācā Vv-a) Dhs 637 720 Dhs-a 93 DN-a i.61 (aṭṭhangupetaṁ giraṁ) Ja ii.134
    Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise = Latin grates “grace”; to *ger or *gṷer ‣See note on gala
    Giri
    a mountain; as a rule only in compounds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumeration of the 7 large mountains).
    1. ˚agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja name of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, originally a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.8 & Vinaya Texts iii.71). Vin ii.107 150; iv.85, 267 Ja iii.538 Dhp-a i.89 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit version is girivaggu-samāgama Avs ii.24
    2. ˚kannikā feminine name of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173 Dhp-a i.383 (variant reading kaṇṇikā cp. Sanskrit ˚karnī;) -gabbhara = ˚guhā Snp 416
    3. ˚guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g˚, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin ii.146 DN i.71 MN i.269 MN i.274 MN i.346 MN i.440 = AN ii.210 = Pug 59 (as giriṁ guhaṁ) AN iv.437 ex
    4. plural at DN-a i.210: dvinnaṁ pabbatānaṁ antaraṁ ekasmiṁ yeva vā ummagga-sadisaṁ mahā-vivaraṁ
    5. ˚bbaja
    6. neuter Etym. uncertain, according to Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 79 to vaja “a pen,” cp. Marāthī vraja “a station of cowherds,” Hindi vraja “a cow-pen”; the Vedic giribhraj˚ (RV. x.68. 1) “aus Bergen hervorbrechend” (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break = bhañj = Latin frango
      1. = ˚guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place Ja iii.479 (translation by Morris locative cit. a hill-run, a cattle-run on the hills); v.260 (sīhassa, a lion’s abode) explained as kañcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara-guhā? cp. Kern Toevoegselen p. 130). SN ii.185 Also name for Rājagaha Snp 408 Dīpavaṁsa v.5; in its Sanskrit form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddhistic Records ii.149 explains as “the hill-surrounded,” cp. ib ii.158 (= Chin. Shan-Shing), 161 ‣See also Cunningham Ancient Geography 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas
      2. ˚rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Mil 21 Mil 224
      3. ˚sikhara mountain top, peak Vv-a 4 (kañcana˚, shining)
      4. Vedic giri, Old Bulgarian gora mountain
    Giriyā
    1. (plural ) in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Mil 191

    Gilati
    1. to swallow to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraṁ antalikkhe SN i.51 = Vv-a 116 mā gilī lohagulaṁ Dhp 371 -J iii.338 Mil 106- past participle gilita : gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook SN iv.159 cp. ud˚, o˚, pari˚; -
    2. causative gilāpeti to make swallow Ja iii.338
    3. Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Old High German kela, English gullet ‣See note on gala
    Gilana
    neuter
    1. devouring, swallowing Mil 101
    from gilati
    Gilāna
    adjective
    1. sick ill Vin i.51 53, 61, 92, 142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; ii.165 227 sq.; iv.88, etc. SN v.80 SN v.81 (bāḷha˚ very ill) AN i.120 = Pug 27 AN iii.38 AN iii.143f.; iv.333; v.72 sq. Ja i.150 Ja ii.395 Ja iii.392 Pv-a 14 Vv-a 76
    1. ˚ālaya pretence of illness Ja vi.262
    • ˚upaṭṭhāka (
    • feminine -ī) one who attends to the sick Vin i.92 121 sq. 142 sq.; 161, 303, AN i.26 AN iii.143f.; —˚bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin i.292f.
    • ˚upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick DN iii.191
    • ˚paccaya support or help for the sick Pv-a 144 usually with ˚bhesajja medicine for the sick in frequently formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta˚ (the requisites of the bhikkhu) ‣See cīvara
    • ˚pucchaka one who asks (i.e. enquires after) the sick Vin iv.88 = 115 118
    • ˚bhatta food for the sick Vin i.142f.; 292 sq. 303; Vism 66
    • ˚bhesajja medicine Vin i.292f. -sālā a hall for the sick, hospital SN iv.210 AN iii.142 Vism 259
    Sanskrit glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, explained suitably by “hāsa-kkhaya” at Dhtp 439
    Gilānaka

    adjective

  • ill (= gilāna) AN iii.142

    • fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Mil 74
  • Gilāyati
    1. ‣See āgilāyati
    Giha
    1. only in agiha adjective houseless, homeless (= pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Snp 456 Snp 464 Snp 487 Snp 497
    2. = gaha
    Gihin
    adjective-noun
    1. a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opposite pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. singular gihissa (D; iii.147, 167) & gihino (D; iii.174); nominative plural gihī; in compounds. gihī˚ & gihi˚; (usually the latter). gihī agāraṁ ajjhāvasantā AN i.49 gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished from kasāva-vasanā the yellowrobed i.e. bhikkhus) DN i.211 DN iii.117 DN iii.124 DN iii.210 MN i.340 MN iii.261 AN i.74

      • Contrasted with pabbajitā AN i.69 DN iii.147 DN iii.167 DN iii.179 gihī dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati DN iii.165
      • Other passages in general SN ii.120 SN ii.269 SN iii.11 SN iv.180 SN iv.300f. AN ii.65 69 (kāmabhogī); iv.438 (do.) DN iii.124 (do.) AN iii.211 (sambodhiparāyano); iv.345 sq. DN iii.167f.; 171 sq.; 176 192 Snp 220 Snp 221 Snp 404 Dhp 74 Mil 19 Mil 264 Dhp-a i.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376 Sdhp 426 Pv-a 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship) Dhp-a ii.49 (identical)
      1. ˚kicca a layman’s or householder’s duties Pv iv.142 (= kuṭumba-kiccāni Pv-a 240)
      2. ˚dhamma a layman’s duty AN iii.41
      • ˚parisā a congregation of laymen SN i.111 MN i.373 AN iii.184
      • ˚bandhanāni (
      • plural ) a layman’s fetters Snp 44 (= Nd2 228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.)
      • ˚byañjanāni (
      • plural ) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. reference to articles of dress & ornament Snp 44 Snp 64 (= Nd; 2 229) Mil 11
      • ˚bhūta as a householder DN ii.196
      • ˚bhoga riches of a worldly man SN iii.93 Iti 90
      • ˚liṅga characteristic of a layman Dhp-a ii.61
      • ˚saṁsagga association with laymen AN iii.116 AN iii.258
      • ˚saṁyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. ˚bandhanāni) MN i.483
      • ˚sukha the welfare of a g. AN i.80
      from gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sanskrit gṛhin
    Gīta
    1. past participle sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ DN i.104 (cp. gira)
    2. neuter singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd2 219 Snp-a 86 Usually combined with nacca, dancing: AN i.261 Vv8110 as naca gītādi Ja i.61 Vv-a 131 referring to nacca-gīta-vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment DN iii.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities) Vv 324 Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.77 Kp-a 36)
      1. ˚rava sound of song Mhvs vii.30
      2. ˚sadda identical Ja iv.3 Dhs 621 Dhp-a i.15
      • ˚ssara identical Vin ii.108 AN iii.251 Ja iii.188
      past participle of gāyati
    Gītaka
    neuter & gītikā
    • feminine a little song Ja iii.507

    Gīvā
    feminine
    1. the neck Snp 609 Ja i.74 (˚ṁ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita˚) 207, 222, 265; iii.52 Vv-a 27 (mayūra˚), 157 DN-a i.296 (˚āya kuṇḍa-daṇḍaka-bandhana, as exhibition punishment): similarly in the sense of “life” (hinting at decapitation) Ja ii.300 (˚ṁ karissāmi “I shall go for his neck”); iv.431 = v.23
    • Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā originally throat
    Sanskrit grīvā, to *gṷer to swallow, as signifying throat ‣See note on gala for etymology
    Gīveyyaka
    neuter
    1. necklace, an ornament for the neck (originally “something belonging to the neck,” cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin i.287 AN i.254 sq (= Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; iii.16 Ja iv.395 (gīveyya only); v.297; vi.590 Vv-a 104
    cp. Sanskrit graiveyaka
    Guggula
    1. a kind of perfume Ja vi.537
    ?
    Gucch˚
    1. In jigucchati (Desiderative of gup = Sanskrit jugupsate) to detest ‣See s. v
    Guñjā
    feminine a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes Dhp-a iv.133 (˚vaṇṇāni akkhīni) ‣See also jiñjuka.
    Guṇa1
    1. a string, a cord-(a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya-bandhanaṁ) saguṇaṁ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin i.46 (Vin. Texts: “laying the garments on top of each other,” wrongly construed) ii.213 (trsln. “folding his garments”); cp. guṇaka. (b) of musical instruments Vin i.182 = AN iii.375 (vīṇā)
    2. (c) of a bow, in aguṇa stringless Ja v.433 (dhanu).
    3. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals-fold, e.g. pañca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5-fold craving ‣See kāma; ekaguṇaṁ once, diguṇaṁ twice Snp 714 diguṇaṁ nivāpaṁ pacitvā cooking a double meal Vv-a 63 catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti DN ii.128 SN ii.221 cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha ii.145 aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka-bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv iv.19; sataguṇena sahassa˚ 100 and 1,000 times Pv-a 41 asankheyyena guṇena infinitely, inconceivably Mil 106 sataguṇaṁ sahassaguṇaṁ Vism 126
    4. (a part as quality, especially good quality, advantage, merit Ja i.266 ii.112; iii.55, 82

      • lobha˚ Snp 663 sādhu˚ Snp 678 sīla˚ Ja i.213 Ja ii.112 Buddha˚ Ja ii.111 pabbajita Ja i.59
      1. ˚ aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos iv.1
      2. ˚aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312 Sdhp 561
      • ˚upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as Pv-a 10 is to be read khuppipās’ âbhibhūto peto
      • ˚kathā “tale of virtue,” praise Ja i.307 Ja ii.2
      • ˚kittana telling one’s praises Pv-a 107 Pv-a 120
      • ˚guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g-g-jāta at SN iv.158 ‣See under guḷā-guṇṭhika
      Non-Aryan?
    Guṇa2
    1. a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta˚ the intestines MN i.185-, Kh 11., cp. Kp-a 57 for expln
    • mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster of flowers Dhp 53 (but ˚guḷa at Ja i.73 Ja i.74) ‣See guḷa3
    for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa → mālāguṇa; cp. Sanskrit guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala
    Guṇa2
    1. a woodworm Ja iii.431 (˚pāṇaka)
    Derivation unknown. cp. Sanskrit ghuna
    Guṇaka
    adjective
    1. having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with reference to kāyabandha ‣See guṇa 1a) Vin ii.136 cp. Vinaya Texts ii.143
    to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?
    Guṇavant
    adjective
    1. possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv ii.971 (= jhān’ ādiguṇa-yutta) Pv-a 62 (mahā˚)
    to guṇa1
    Guṇi
    feminine
    1. a kind of armour Ja vi.449 (g. vuccate kavacaṁ Commentary ) ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen p. 132
    of adjective guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i.e. strings or knots
    Guṇṭhika
    1. (in meaning = guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi˚; a snake-trainer (like a Laocoon) ‣See details under ahi or Ja ii.267 Ja iii.348 (text ˚guṇḍika) Ja iv.308 (ahi-kuṇḍika, variant reading SS guṇṭhika) iv.456 (text ˚guṇṭika; Burmese variant ˚kuṇḍika). Also in guḷā-guṇṭhika (q.v.)
    Guṇṭhima
    1. covered over (?) ‣See pāli˚
    Guṇṭheti
    1. to cover to veil, to hide; past participle guṇṭhita in paṁsu˚ covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy’s conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q.v.) Also in compound paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Snp 131 (mohena) where Burmese variant kuṇṭhita. cp. o˚
    2. cp. Sanskrit guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots; guṇṭh & guṇḍ as synonym of veṭh
    Guṇḍika
    1. ‣See guṇṭhika
    Gutta
    1. [ Sanskrit gupta, past participle of gup in medium

      • passive sense, cp. gopeti)
      • I. as
      • past participle guarded, protected
      • (a) lit nagaraṁ guttaṁ a well-guarded city Dhp 315 = Th 1, 653 1005; Devinda˚ protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308-(b) figuratively (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained guarded in, watchful as regards … (with
      • locative SN iv.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita) AN iii.6 (atta˚ self-controlled) Snp 250 (sotesu gutto vijitindriyo), 971 (identical + yatacārin) Dhp 36 (cittaṁ). II. as
      • noun agent (= Sanskrit goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla-kata kāḷaṁ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian in Dhammassa gutta Dhp 257 observer of the Norm (ex
      • plural Dhp-a iii.282: dhammojapaññāya samannāgata) cp. dhammagutta SN i.222
      1. ˚indriya one whose senses are guarded; with well-guarded senses Snp 63 (+ rakkhita-mānasāno; expl Snp-a: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo) Nd2 230 Vv 5015 Pv iv.132
      2. ˚dvāra “with guarded doors” always in combination with indriyesu g-d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self-control DN i.63≈(explained DN-a i.182 by pihita-dvāro), 70 SN ii.218 SN iv.103 SN iv.112 SN iv.119 sq., 175 Snp 413 (+ susaṁvuta) Pug 24 cp. following -dvāratā (feminine abstract to preceding) in indriyesu g˚ self constraint, control over (the doors of) one’s senses, always combined with bhojane mattaññutā (moderation in taking food) DN iii.213 Iti 24 Pug 20 24 Dhs 1347 Pv-a 163 O
      3. past participle ; lack of sense-control DN iii.213 Iti 23 Dhs 1345

    Gutti
    feminine
    1. protection, defence, guard; watchfulness
    • (a) literally of a city AN iv.106 sq
    • (b) figuratively of the senses in indriyānaṁ gutti Dhp 375 Pug 24 (+ gopanā) Dhs 1348 Sdhp 341 (agutti) Vin iv.305 AN ii.72 (atta˚) also in
    • plural : guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness DN iii.148
    Vedic gupti
    Guttika
    1. a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara˚; the town-watchman, the chief-constable Pv-a 4 Mil 345
    from last
    Gumpha
    1. ‣See ogumpheti
    Gumba
    1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers Vin i.345 of fish (maccha˚) DN i.84 = M i.279 = ii.22 AN i.9
    2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana˚ Ja iv.256) SN iii.6 (eḷagalā˚) Ja iii.52 (nivāsa˚, vasana˚) Vv-a 301 (gaccha˚ underwood) Ja i.149 Ja i.167 Ja ii.19 iii.55; iv.438 Vv-a 63 66 cp. pagumba = gumba, in vana˚ Snp 233 ‣See KhA 192 veḷu˚ Thag 1, 919
    3. accusative gumbaṁ (
    4. adverb ) thickly, in masses balled together Mil 117 (of clouds)
      1. ˚antara thicket Vv-a 233
      Sanskrit gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to conglomerate, cp. Latin glomus (ball), globus, etc ‣See guḷa
    Gumbiya
    adjective
    1. one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin i.345
    from gumba
    Guyha
    1. adjective to be hidden, hidden in ˚bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body Dhp-a iv.197
    2. neuter that which is hidden; literally in vattha˚; hidden by the dress, i.e. the pudendum DN i.106 Snp 1022 etc ‣See vattha, figuratively a secret Mil 92 guyhaṁ pariguyhati to keep a secret AN iv.31 Nd2 510
    absolutive of guh = Vedic guhya
    Guru
    adjective-noun
    1. venerable, reverend, a teacher Vv-a 229 230 (˚dakkhiṇā a teacher’s fee) Pv-a 3 (˚janā venerable persons) Sdhp 227 (˚ûpadesa), 417
    a younger form of garu (q.v.); Sanskrit guru
    Guḷa1
    A ball, in compounds. sutta˚ a ball of string (= Old High German chliuwa) DN i.54 = MN iii.95 Pv-a 145 ayo˚ an iron globe Dhp 308 DN-a i.84 loha˚ of copper Dhp 371 sela˚ a rockball i.e. a heavy stone-ball Ja i.147
    1. ˚kīḷā play at ball Dhp-a i.178 Dhp-a iii.455 iv.124
    2. ˚parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or adjective round globular, like a ball Pv-a 253
    3. Sanskrit guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu to make into a ball, to conglomerate. cp. Sanskrit glauḥ ball; Old High German chliuwa; German kugel kloss; English clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning Sanskrit gulma tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Latin glomus, globus; German klamm; English clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of “mokkha”.
    Guḷa2
    1. (Non-Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin i.210 224 sq., 245
    • saguḷa sugared, sweet, or “with molasses” Ja vi.324 (saguḷāni, i.e. saguḷa-pūve pancakes)
    1. ˚āsava sugar-juice Vv-a 73
    • ˚odaka s

      • water Vin i.226
      • ˚karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210
      • ˚pūvaka sweet cake Mhvs 10. 3
      • ˚phāṇita molasses Vv-a 179
    Guḷa3
    1. a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi˚; a cluster of jewels, always in simile with reference to sparkling eyes “maniguḷa-sadisāni akkhīni” Ja i.149 Ja iii.126 Ja iii.184 (Burmese variant ˚guḷika); iv.256 (variant reading identical); mālā˚; a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland Ja i.73 Ja i.54
    • puppha˚ identical Dh. 172 233
    for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇiguṇa and mālāguṇa → maṇigula and mālāgula; cp. similarly in meaning and form Old High German chliuwa → absolutive knäuel
    Guḷā
    feminine
    1. a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in compound guḷā-guṇṭhika-jāta DN ii.55 which is also to be read at AN ii.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to AN ii.4 whose trsln. is otherwise correct) = guḷā-gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i.e. blight); cp. similar expression at Dhp-a iii.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa (-jāta) “having become covered all over with pustules (i.e. rash).” All readings at corresponding passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz. SN ii.92 (guḷigandhika˚); iv.158 (guṇaguṇika˚); the reading at Dīpavaṁsa xii.32, also variant reading SS at AN ii.211 is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā “entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight.”
    to guḷa1
    Guḷika
    adjective
    1. like a chain, or having a chain, neuter & feminine a cluster, a chain in maṇi a string of jewels, a pearl necklace Ja iii.184 (Burmese variant for ˚guḷa); iv.256; Vism 285 (+ muttā-guḷikā)
    2. to guḷa3 = guṇa, cp. also guṇaka
    Guḷikā
    feminine
    1. a little ball SN v.462 (satta-kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo guḷikā, plural ) Thag 2, 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g˚ balls of the size of a jujube) cp. Thag-a 289
    to guḷa1; cp. Sanskrit guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour
    Guhanā
    1. (feminine abstract to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vb 358 (+ pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q.v.

    Guhā
    feminine
    1. a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp kandara & ‣See giriguhā); figuratively the heart (in ˚āsaya) According to Buddhaghosa (on Vin i.58 ‣See Vinaya Texts i.174 “a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood.” Vin i.58 96, 107, 239, 284; ii.146; iii.155; iv.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā) Snp 772 Snp 958 Ja ii.418 Ja vi.574 Vv 5016
    1. ˚āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart AN iv.98 (maccupāso +) Ja v.367 (identical) Dhp 37 (cittaṁ ‣See Dhp-a i.304)
    Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q.v.) Dhtp 337: saṁvaraṇa
    (—˚)
    1. going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in ‣See addha˚, anta˚ chanda˚, dhamma˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra, veda˚
    from gam, cp. ˚ga
    Gūtha
    excrements, faeces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin i.206 e.g.). Often combination with mutta (urine): Pv i.91 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 78 DN-a i.198
    1. ˚kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265
    • ˚kalala dung & mire Ja iii.393
    • ˚kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531
    • ˚kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) MN i.74 Snp 279 Pv ii.316 Pug 36 Ja vi.370 Vism 54
    • ˚khādaka living on faeces Ja ii.211 (˚pāṇaka) Pv-a 266
    • ˚gata having turned to dung Iti 90
    • ˚gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315
    • ˚ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Thag 1 1153
    • ˚naraka = following Vism 501
    • ˚niraya the mirepurgatory Vv-a 226 Sdhp 194
    • ˚pāṇa an insect living on excrement (= ˚khādakapāṇa) Ja ii.209 Ja ii.212
    • ˚bhakkha feeding on stercus MN iii.168 Pv-a 192 Dhp-a ii.61
    • ˚bhānin of foul speech AN i.128 Pug 29 (Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. corrects into kūṭa˚?)
    Sanskrit gūtha; probably to Latin bubino ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Gūthaka
    1. "a sort of gūtha,” excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi˚; and kaṇṇa˚; (of eye & ear) Snp 197 (cp. Snp-a 248 Vism 345 sq.). Gulha & gulhaka;
    Gūḷha
    gūḷhaka;
    adjective
    1. hidden, secret Vin ii.98 (gūḷha-ko salākagāho)
    past participle of gūhati
    Gūhati
    1. to hide, to conceal ‣See paṭi˚, pari˚. causative gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaṁ ppr.). cp. gūḷha
    2. Sanskrit gūhati, past participle gūḍha ‣See guyha, guhā, etc.
    Gūhana
    neuter hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi˚-citta).
    Gūhanā
    feminine
    1. = gūhanā (q.v.) Pug. 19. cp. pari˚;
    abstract from gūhati
    Geṇḍuka
    1. a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and Dhs-a. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh → g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā
    • bheṇḍukena kīḷi Ja iv.30 bhūmiyaṁ pahata-bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) Ja iv.30 Vism 143 (pahaṭa-citra˚) = Dhs-a 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka) Ja v.196 (citra-bh˚) Dhp-a iii.364
    Gedha1
    1. greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g˚ SN i.73 Snp 152 AN iii.312f. (gedho pañcann’ etaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ). gedhataṇhā SN i.15 (variant reading kodha˚) Snp 65 Snp 945 Snp 1098 Thag 2, 352 Nd2 231 Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Nett 18 Dhp-a i.366 Pv-a 107
    • ˚agedhatā freedom from greed Mil 276

      • ‣ See also gedhi & paligedha
      Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati
    Gedha2
    1. a cave AN i.154 = iii.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. variant reading under gedhi)
    = geha? Kern
    Gedhi
    1. greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiṁ karoti (c. locative ) to be desirous after MN i.330
    2. ˚gedhikata in ˚citta
    3. adjective jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā
    4. feminine vanity, greed, conceit Nd2 585 (variant reading rodhigatā)
    5. Sanskrit gṛdhi, cp. gedha
    Gedhita
    1. greedy, in gedhita-mano greedy-minded Pv ii.82; as neuter greed, in derivation gedhifatta (syn of gedhikatā) Nd2 585
    2. past participle of gijjhati
    Geyya
    neuter
    1. a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaṁ geyyaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ ‣See under; navaṅga
    gerundive of gāyati, Sanskrit geya
    Geruka
    neuter & gerukā
    • feminine

      1. yellow ochre (Buddhaghosa suvaṇṇa˚ cp. Sanskrit kañcana˚ & svarṇa˚), red chalk used as colouring Vin i.203 Vin ii.151 AN i.210 Mil 133 (˚cuṇṇa). Frequently in ˚parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin ii.117 151, 172; ˚parikammakata “coated with red colouring” Vin i.48 ii.218
      Sanskrit gairika
    Gelañña
    neuter
    1. sickness, illness DN ii.99 AN i.219 AN iii.298 AN iv.333f.; Vism 321, 466, 478
    n-abstract from gilāna
    Geha
    neuter
    1. a dwelling, hut, house the household Ja i.145 Ja i.266 Ja i.290 Ja ii.18 Ja ii.103 Ja ii.110 Ja ii.155 vi.367; Vism 593 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 82; figuratively of kāya (body) Thag 1, 184 = Dh 154
    • Applied to a cowshed at Mil 396
    1. ˚aṅgana the open space in front of the house Vv-a 6
    • ˚jana (singular collective) the members of the household, the servants Pv-a 16 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 93
    • ˚jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326
    • ˚ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling Dhp-a iii.307
    • ˚dvāra the house door Pv-a 61
    • ˚nissita
    • adjective concerning the house, connected with (the house and worldly life Snp 280 (pāpiccha) Iti 117 (vitakka); cp. ˚sita
    • ˚patana the falling of the house Ja iii.118
    • ˚pavesana (-mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut Dhp-a iii.307
    • ˚piṭṭhi the back of the house Pv-a 78
    • ˚rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home Vv-a 76 (dārakā)
    • ˚vigata
    • neuter the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Thag 2, 327 (= upakaraṇa Thag-a 234)
    • ˚sita (*śrita) = ˚nissita, connected with worldly life (opposite nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (
    • plural ) MN i.123 domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) SN iv.232 = Mil 45 Vb 381 Dhs-a 194 dhammā, etc. SN iv.71 Vb 380 Nett 53
    Sanskrit geha = gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara ‣See also gedha2
    Go
    masculine feminine )
    1. a cow, an ox, bull, plural cattle. For feminine cp. gāvī ‣See also gava˚ for compounds

      • singular nominative go (Sn 580 also in composition, cp. aja-go-mahisādi Pv-a 80 = pasū) genitive gavassa (M i.429); instrumental gavena, gāvena; acc gavaṁ, gāvan; ablative gavamhā, gavā (DN i.201 = AN ii.95 Pug 69);
      • locative gavamhi, gāvimhi (Snp-a 323), gave (Sn 310)
      • plural nominative gāvo (DN i.141 MN i.225 AN i.205 ii.42 sq. Snp 20 Snp 296 Snp 307 Ja i.295); genitive gonaṁ AN ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaṁ (J iv.172, cp. gavaṁ pati) gunnaṁ (AN i.229 AN ii.75 AN v.271 Ja i.194 Ja iii.112 Ja iv.223) instrumental gohi (Sn 33);
      • accusative gāvo (M i.225 AN i.205 Snp 304 Dhp 19 Dhp 135); ablative gohi;
      • locative gosu, gavesu
      • ‣ See also gava, gavesati, goṇa
      1. ˚kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in ˚haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin i.195 AN i.136 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.34)
      2. ˚kaṇṇa a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gaṇin) 416 (khagga +) Dhs-a 331 (gavaya +); cp. next -kāṇā feminine = gokaṇṇa DN iii.38 = 53
      3. ˚ kula
      4. neuter a cow pen, a station of cattle SN iv.289
      5. ˚gaṇa a herd of cattle MN i.220 AN i.229 Ja ii.127 Dhp-a i.175 Vv-a 311
      6. ˚ghaṁsikā a cow-hide (?). Vin ii.117 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.98)
      7. ˚ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher DN ii.294 (in simile) MN i.58 MN i.244 MN i.364 (˚sūnā, slaughter-house) SN ii.255 SN iv.56 AN iii.302 AN iii.380 Ja v.270 Vism 348 (in simile)
      8. ˚cara I. Literally A. (noun-m.) pasture, literally “a cow’s grazing,” search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: Ja i.221 Ja iii.26 Dhp 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraṁ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati “the lion goes forth for his hunt” AN ii.33 iii.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Snp 39 Ja i.243 gocare carati to go feeding, to feed Ja i.242 (b) metaph. of persons, especially the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) “enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i.e. the houses in which he begs for food)” Vin ii.208 samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his “grazing” Pv iv.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g

        • gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation
        • B.
        • adjective (—˚) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana living in the woods Pv ii.65; vāri˚ (in water) Snp 605 jala˚ (identical) Ja ii.158 (opposite thala˚). Vesiyā˚ (etc.) associating with v. Vin i.70
        • II. Applied. A. (
        • noun, masculine or
        • neuter a “field” (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object—˚ food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaṁ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense-perception SN v.218 sense-object (= ārammaṇaṁ) Ps i.180; ii.97 150 sq. Dhs-a 314 315 (sampatta˚ physical contact with an object, gandha˚ smell-contact, i.e. sensation) indriya˚ Sdhp 365
        • (b) ethically: ariyānaṁ gocare ratā “finding delight in the pasture of the good, walking in the ways of the good Dhp 22 vimokho yesaṁ gocaro “whose pasture is liberty” Dhp 92 = Th 1, 92 especially in phrase ācāra-gocara-sampanna “pasturing in the field of good conduct” DN i.63 = It 118 MN i.33 SN v.187 It. 96; analysed as Dvandva compound at Vb 246 247 but cp. pāpācāra-gocara Snp 280 Snp 282 This phrase (ācāra-gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19 where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya˚ ārakkha˚, upanibandha˚. So also in contrast with agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i.e. bad sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere AN iii.389 AN iv.345f. DN iii.58 = 77 SN v.147 Vb 246 247 (ex
        • plural with vesiyā etc., cp. above = having bad associations)
        • B. (adjective
        • ˚: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of eta˚ dependent on this MN i.319 sattasaddhamma˚ moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules SN iii.83 rūpa˚ to be perceived by sight Ja i.396 Nibbāna belonging to name Sdhp 467. —˚kusala
        • adjective skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living—˚ behaving properly in, exercising properly MN i.220 = AN v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle) SN iii.266f. (samādhi˚) AN iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. reference to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); —˚gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding Ja i.242 —˚gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) Pv-a 12 Pv-a 42; —˚ṭṭhāna pasturage Ja iii.52 —˚pasuta intent on feeding Ja iii.26 —˚bhūmi pasturage, a common Dhp-a iii.60 —˚visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense SN v.218 Vb 319
        • ˚caraṇa pasturing Ja vi.335
        • ˚ṭṭha
        • neuter Sanskrit goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Latin stabulum stable; super-stes; Gothic awistr
        1. a cow-stable, cow-pen MN i.79 Ja iv.223
        • ˚pa Sanskrit gopa, cp. gopati
          1. a cowherd herdsman Snp 18 Dhp 19 Ja iv.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile) Dhp-a 157, feminine gopī Snp 22 Snp 32
          • ˚pakhuma
          • adjective having eyelashes like a heifer DN ii.18 DN iii.144 167 sq. Vv-a 162 279 (= āḷārapamha)
          • ˚pada a cow’s footprint, a puddle AN iii.188 AN iv.102 Mil 287 also ˚padaka AN iii.188 variant reading DN-a i.283
          • ˚pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, epithet of a bull (gopitā +) MN i.220 MN i.225
          • ˚pāla a cowherd (usually as ˚ka) Dhp 135
          • ˚pālaka = preceding Vin i.152 243 sq. MN i.79 MN i.115f. 220 = AN v.347 MN i.333 SN iv.181 AN i.205 (—˚uposatha) Mil 18 Mil 48 Vism 279 (in comparison) Dhp-a iii.59
          • ˚pitā “father (protector of the cows” = gavaṁ pati, epithet of a bull MN i.220 (+ ˚pariṇāyaka)
          • ˚pī
          • feminine of gopa, q.v
          • ˚pura
          • neuter Sanskrit gopura
            1. the gate of a city Ja vi.433 Mil 1 Mil 67 Mil 330 Bdhd 138
            2. ˚balivadda in ˚nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black-cattle-bull) i.e. by an accumulation of words Vv-a 258
            • ˚bhatta cows’ fodder Ja iv.67
            • ˚maṇḍala ox-beat, ox-round, cp. iii.151 (as gā˚), quoted Ja i.47 (cp. assa-m˚) Snp-a 39 also in phrase ˚paribbūḷha Snp 301 (explained by Snp-a 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa) Ja vi.27 at MN i.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants ‣See note MN i.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to variant reading gāmaṇḍala cp. gāmaṇḍala
            • ˚maya (m.
            • neuter cowdung MN i.79 AN i.209 AN i.295 AN v.234 AN v.250 AN v.263f. Nett 23 Dhp-a i.377 —˚pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle Ja ii.156 —˚piṇda a lump of cowdung Ja i.242 —˚bhakkha eating cowdung DN i.166
            • ˚māyu a jackal Pgdp 49
            • ˚mutta (and ˚ka) a precious stone of light red colour Vv-a iii Dhs-a 151
            • ˚medaka = gomuttaka Vv-a 111
            • ˚medha a cow sacrifice, in ˚yañña Snp-a 323
            • ˚yūtha a herd of cows Snp-a 322 Dhp-a i.323
            • ˚rakkhā
            • feminine cow-keeping, tending cattle, usually combined with kasī, agriculturing MN i.85 Pv i.56 Ja i.338 Ja ii.128 given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha-kamma) Vin iv.6
            • ˚ravaka the bellowing of a cow MN i.225
            • ˚rasa (usually
            • plural ) produce of the cow, enumerated in set of five, viz khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin i.244 Dhp-a i.158 323 397 Vv-a 147 Snp-a 322
            • ˚rūpa (collect.) cattle Ja i.194 iv.173 Mil 396 (bull)
            • ˚lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows DN i.9
            • ˚vaccha (khīra˚ & takka˚) Vism 28
            • ˚vatika Sanskrit govratin
              1. one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices MN i.387 Nett 99 (cp. govata Dhs-a 355 and Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 261)
              2. ˚vikattana (and ˚vikantana; Sanskrit vikṛntana) a butcher’s knife MN i.244 449 AN iii.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only)
              3. ˚vittaka one whose wealth is cattle Ja i.191
              • ˚vinda the supt. of cowherds AN iii.373
              • ˚sappi ghee from cow’s milk Vin iii.251 Dhs-a 320
              • ˚sālā cow-stable AN i.188
              • ˚siṅga a cow’s horn Vism 254
              • ˚sita mixed with milk Vv-a 179
              • ˚sīla = govatika Dhs-a 355
              • ˚sīsa
              • neuter an excellent kind of sandal wood Pv-a 215 (cp. Sp. Av SN i.67 SN i.68 SN i.109) -hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in ˚ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh˚ J) to massage with a cow’s jaw bone Vin ii.266 Ja iv.188 Ja v.303
              Vedic go, Latin bos, Old High German chuo, Anglo-Saxon cū = English cow
    Goṭaviya
    1. (goṭavisa Text) variant reading Ja vi.225 part of a boat, the poop (ex plural ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho).

    Goṭhaphala
    a medicinal ‣Seed
    1. Vin i.201
    Sanskrit gotravṛkṣa? Kern
    Goṇa1
    1. an ox, a bullock SN iv.195f. Ja i.194 iv.67 Pv i.82 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 40 Vv-a 63 (for ploughing) DN-a i.163 Dhp-a iii.60
    • ˚˚sira wild ox Ja vi.538(= araññagoṇaka)
    The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali
    Goṇa2
    1. = goṇaka2, in ˚santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818 Pv iii.117; (text saṇṭhita Burmese variant goṇakatthata, cp. next)
    Goṇaka1
    1. a kind of ox, a wild bull Ja vi.538
    • (arañña˚)
    goṇa1
    Goṇaka2
    1. a woollen cover with long fleece (DN-a i.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) DN i.7SN iii.144 Ja v.506 Pv ii.128 Thag 2, 378 (+ tūlika) Thag-a 253 (= dīgha-lomakāḷakojava). —˚atthata spread with a goṇaka-cover AN i.137 iii.50 = iv.394; cp. iv.94, 231 (always of a pallaṅka) ‣See also goṇa2
    Sanskrit Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. iii.236; also spelled gonaka
    Goṇisādika
    1. an ox-stall Vin i.240 cp. Vinaya Texts ii.121. As gonisādi Vin iii.46
    Gotta
    neuter
    1. ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick-name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known They are all assigned to the Buddha’s time ‣See also Rhys Davids Dialogues of the Buddha i.27, 195 sq
    • jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Snp 1004 gotta salakkhaṇa Snp 1018 Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Snp 423 jāti gotta kula Ja ii.3 jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa “equal in rank lineage & wealth” Dhp-a ii.218
    • evaṁ-gotta (adjective belonging to such & such an ancestry MN i.429 MN ii.20 MN ii.33 kathaṁ˚ of what lineage, or: what is your family name DN i.92 nānā˚ (
    • plural ) of various families Pv ii.916
    • With nāma (name & lineage, or nominativen et cognomen): nāmagottaṁ Vin i.93 Vin ii.239 DN i.92 (ex
    • plural at DN-a i.257 paññatti-vasena nāmaṁ paveṇi-vasena gottaṁ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage) Snp 648 Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; ex
    • plural at Vv-a 348 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.)
    • gottena by the ancestral name: Vin i.93 DN ii.154 Snp 1019 Dhp 393
    • gottato same Ja i.56 Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana-gottena DN i.92 Vi
    • passive Koṇḍañño g˚; Kakusandho Kassapo g˚ Bhagavā Gotamo g˚ DN ii.3 Nāgito Kassapo g˚ DN-a i.310 Vasudevo Kaṇho g˚ Pv-a 94
    1. ˚thaddha conceited as regards descent (+ jāti˚ dhana˚) Snp 104
    • ˚pañha question after one’s family name Snp 456
    • ˚paṭisārin
    • adjective relying on lineage DN i.99 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.122) AN v.327f.
    • ˚bandhava connected by family ties (ñāti˚ +) Nd2 455
    • ˚rakkhita protected by a (good) name Snp 315 Vv-a 72
    • ˚vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent DN i.99
    Vedic gotra, to go
    Gottā
    feminine gottī protectress Ja v.329 agent noun to gopeti = Sanskrit goptṛ
    Gotrabhū
    "become of the lineage”; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. IIi.256), and in another found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (AN iv.373 and v.23). Defined at Pug 12 13 & Vism 138 amplified at Ps i.66–⁠68, frequent in Pali (Tikap. 154 sq. 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at Vv-a 155 On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology ‣See Aung, in Compendium 66
    1. -68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at Ja i.235—˚ñāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā˚ Vism 683
    Godhaka
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.358
    Godharaṇī
    feminine-adjective being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Snp 26
    Godhā1
    feminine
    1. iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin i.215–⁠16 (˚mukha) DN i.9≈(˚lakkhaṇa, cp. DN-a i.94) Ja ii.118 Ja iii.52 538 Dhp-a iii.420 As godha masculine at Ja v.489 Dimin. golikā at Ja ii.147
    2. Sanskrit godhā
    Godhā2
    1. feminine string of a lute Ja vi.580 (cp. Rv.8, 58, 9)
    Godhūma
    1. wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Mil 267 DN-a i.163 Snp-a 323 ‣See dhañña
    Gopaka
    1. a guardian, watchman DN-a i.148 cp. khetta˚
    Gopanā
    feminine protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pug 24 (+ gutti) Dhs 1347 Mil 8 Mil 243
    Gopānasī
    feminine a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped ; figuratively of old people, bent by age ‣See ˚vanka Vin iii.65 81 SN ii.263 SN iii.156 SN v.43 SN v.228 MN i.80 AN i.261 AN iii.364 AN v.21 Vism 320 Dhp-a ii.190 Vv-a 188
    1. ˚gaṇā (plural ) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784-bhogga (-sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) Ja iii.395
    2. ˚vaṅka (gopānasi˚) as crooked as a rafter (of old people cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit gopānasī-vakra Avs ii.25n5) SN i.117 MN i.88 AN i.138

    Gopita
    adjective
    1. protected, guarded, watched (literally & figuratively) Ja vi.367 Mil 345 Snp-a 116 (˚indriya guttindriya); Sdhp 398
    past participle of gopeti
    Gopeti
    1. to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dhp 315 - past participle gopita (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā
    Gopphaka
    1. the ankle Vin iv.112 AN iv.102 Ja v.472 Dhp-a ii.80 214; Snp-a ii.230
    Dem. of goppha = Sanskrit gulpha
    Gomika
    1. an owner of cows SN i.6 = Sn 33, 34
    Sanskrit gomin
    Golikā
    1. ‣See godhā1
    Golomika
    adjective
    1. like a cluster; in phrase massuṁ golomikaṁ kārāpeti “to have the beard trimmed into a ball-or cluster-shape Vin ii.134 Buddhaghosa’s explanation “like a goat’s beard” (cp Vinaya Texts iii.138) is based on popular etymology go + loma ika “cow-hair-like,” the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat.
    inverted diaeretic form from Sanskrit gulma = Pali gumba: viz. *golmika → *golmika → golomika
    Goḷaka
    a ball Thag-a 255 (kīḷā˚).
    1. Gh

    Gh

    ˚Gha
    1. (adjective
    • suffix to ghan killing, destroying ‣See hanati
    • iṇagha at Snp 246 is variant reading SS for iṇaghāta. cp. paṭi & ‣See also ghana; 2 & ghāta
    Ghaṁsati1
    1. to rub, crush, grind, SN ii.238 Ja i.190 (= ghasituṁ? to next?) 216; vi.331
    • Caus ghaṁsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin ii.266 cp. upani˚, pari˚, & pahaṁsati; 1.
    • passive ghaṁsīyati (ghaṁsiyati) to rub (intransitive), to be rubbed Vin i.204 Vin ii.112
    Sanskrit gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Latin frendo Anglo-Saxon grindan to grind
    Ghaṁsati2
    1. to be pleased, to rejoice Ja iv.56 (variant reading ghasati). cp. pahaṁsati2
    = haṁsati for Sanskrit haṛsati ‣See haṁsati
    Ghaṁsana
    1. rubbing, in pāda-gh ˚ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin ii.130
    Ghaṁsikā
    1. in go˚, cow-hide (?) ‣See go
    Ghaccā
    feminine
    1. destruction (usually—˚) DN iii.67 (mūla˚) Ja i.176 (sakuṇa˚)
    from hanati, han and ghan
    Ghañña
    adjective-noun
    1. killing, destroying (—˚) ‣See atta˚
    from Sanskrit ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya
    Ghaṭa1
    1. a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya˚ paribhojana vacca˚ at Vin i.157 = 352 = M i.207. In the Vinaya frequently combined with kolamba, also a deep vessel: i.209 213, 225, 286
    • As water-pitcher: Ja i.52 Ja i.93 (puṇṇa˚) 166 Vv-a 118 207, 244 (˚satena nhāto viya) Pv-a 66 (udaka˚), 179 (pānīya˚), 282
    • In general: SN iv.196 For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) Ja i.235 (cp. kuṭa), Pv-a 38 Used as a drum Ja vi.277 (= kumbhathūna); as bhadda Sdhp 319 Sdhp 329
    1. ˚pamāṇa adjective of the size of a large pot Ja ii.104 Pv-a 55
    2. Non-Aryan?
    Ghaṭa2
    1. masculine & feminine )

      1. multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i.e. thicket, cluster. itthi˚ a crowd of women Ja iv.316 maccha˚ a swarm of fish Ja ii.227 vana˚ dense forest Ja ii.385 Ja iv.56 Ja v.502 Ja vi.11 Ja vi.519 Ja vi.564 brahma company of brahmins Ja vi.99
      Sanskrit ghaṭā; connection with ganthati to bind together
    Ghaṭaka
    1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129 130 (combined with kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vinaya Texts iii.130
    2. the capital of a pillar Ja i.32 (cp. kumbha)
    Dem. of preceding
    Ghaṭati
    1. to apply oneself to, to exert oneself to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh˚ vāyamati MN i.86 SN i.267 (yamati for vāy˚) Pug 51 or yuñjati gh˚ vāy˚ Ja iv.131
    • Sdhp 426 Sdhp 450
    Sanskrit ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ; , of which one is explained by “ghāṭane” (No. 554), the other by “īhāyaṁ,” i.e. from exertion (No. 98)
    Ghaṭana
    1. ‣See Ghaṭṭana]
    Ghaṭikā1
    feminine
    1. a small bowl, used for begging alms Thag 2, 422 (= Thag-a 269: bhikkhā-kapāla)
    to ghaṭa1
    Ghaṭikā2
    feminine
    1. a small stick, a piece of a branch a twig Ja i.331 Ja iv.87 (khadira˚); vi.331 Thag 2, 499 (= khaṇḍa Thag-a 290). upadhānaghaṭikā Ja iii.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa Ja ii.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (= pāsaka) 2. a game of sticks (“tip-cat” sticks Miln translation ii.32) DN i.6≈(DN-a i.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha-daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka-paharaṇa kīḷā, tip-cat) Vin ii.10 iii.181 MN i.266 AN v.203 Mil 229
    2. a stack of twigs SN ii.178 SN ii.4 (a stick used as) a bolt Vin ii.120 208; iii.119; usually as sūci˚ a needle-shaped stick Vin ii.237 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.106) SN iv.290 Ud 52 Ja i.346 cp. gaṇḍikādhāna
    to ghaṭa2, originally meaning “knot,” cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also; gaṇḍa
    Ghaṭita
    1. connected, combined Vism 192
    past participle of ghaṭeti
    Ghaṭī
    feminine
    1. a jar Dhp-a i.426 In compounds. also ghaṭi˚
    1. ˚odana rice boiled in a jar Dhp-a i.426
    • ˚kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1 Vin ii.115 (= ghaṭi-kapāla Buddhaghosa)
    • ˚kāra a potter Dhp-a i.380 proper name of a kumbhakāra SN i.35 SN i.60 MN ii.45 sq (= ˚suttanta, mentioned as such at Dhp-a iii.251) Ja i.43
    to ghaṭa1
    Ghaṭīyati
    1. to be connected or continued Dhp-a i.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174
    2. to be obstructed Nd2 102 (= virujjhati, paṭihaññati)
    passive of ghaṭeti
    Ghaṭeti
    1. to join, to connect, to unite Ja i.139 frequently in anusandhiṁ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) Ja i.220 Ja i.308
    denominative from ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti
    Ghaṭṭa
    1. ‣See araghaṭṭa; meaning “rubbed, knocked against” in phrase ghaṭṭa-pāda-tala Snp-a 582 (for ugghaṭṭha) also at Vin iv.46 in definition of vehāsa-kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i.e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a-sīsa-ghaṭṭā “so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)”; of uncertain meaning (“beating"?) at Ja i.454 (variant reading for Text ghota)
    Ghaṭṭana
    neuter
    1. combining, putting together, combination, composition Ja i.220 PA. 312, etc
    2. striking, figuratively insulting (ghaṭṭana = āsajjana) Vv-a 55 To meaning “strike” cp. saṁghaṭṭana
    Sanskrit ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha
    Ghaṭṭeti
    1. to strike, beat, knock against, touch; figuratively to offend, mock, object to. (a) literally MN ii.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, variant reading ghaṭeti) Snp 48 (= saṁ˚ Nd2 233) Ja i.218 Pv iv.109 (= paṭihaṁsati Pv-a 271) DN-a i.256 (= khuṁseti) Dhp-a i.251
    • (b) fig AN iii.343 Snp 847 (cp. Nd1 208); Vism 18
    • pp ghaṭṭita Pug 30 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati = ruppati B or SN iii.86
    • passive ghaṭīyati (q.v.)
    • cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti
    Sanskrit ghaṭṭayati
    Ghaṇṭā
    feminine a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) Ja iv.215 Vv-a 36 37, 279 (khuddaka˚). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181.
    Ghata
    neuter
    1. clarified butter Vv-a 326 Mil 41 Sdhp 201 (-bindu) With reference to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled with ghee) ghatāsana Ja i.472 Ja v.64 Ja v.446 Pv i.85 (ghatasitta)
    Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ; to sprinkle, moisten
    Ghana1
    1. (a) adjective solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka˚ of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin i.185 = Dh 81 = Th 1, 643 Mil 386 AN iii.378 cp. ghanasela-pabbata Dhp-a i.74-gh. paṁsu Ja i.264 paṭhavī (solid ground) Ja i.74 Pv-a 75 palāsa (foliage) Pv-a 113 buddharasmiyo Ja i.12 ˚maṁsa solid, pure flesh Dhp-a i.80 ˚sāṭaka (thick cloth) Ja i.292 ˚sañchanna (thickly covered Pv-a 258 ˚suvaṇṇakoṭṭima Dhp-a iv.135 abbha˚ a thick cloud Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348)

      • (b) (m. the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth the 4; th in the enumerated of the following stages: kalala, abbuda pesī, gh.) SN i.206 Ja iv.496 Mil 40 Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as “swelling”; to swell and = embryo (the gravid uterus)
      Vedic ghana
    Ghana2
    1. a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo˚ an iron club Vv-a 20 Also collective term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine etc. Vv-a 37
    Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gṷhen “strike,” cp. Latin of-fendo Anglo-Saxon gud, Old High German gundea
    Ghanika
    1. a class of devas (cloud-gods?) Mil 191
    to ghana1 in meaning of “cloud” (Sanskrit)
    Ghamma
    1. heat; hot season, summer. Either in locative ghamme Ja iv.172 (= gimha-kāle); Pv iv.53 ghammani (“in summer” or “by the heat”) SN i.143 Ja iii.360 (sampareta overcome by heat) Snp 353 Ja iv.239 Ja v.3

      • Or. in compound with ˚abhitatta (ghammâbhitatta, overpowered by heat) MN i.74 DN ii.266 AN iii.187f. Snp 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta) Mil 318 Vv-a 40 Pv-a 114
      Vedic gharma = Latin formus, Old High German etc. warm; to *gṷher “warm,” cp. Sanskrit ghṛṇoti, hara.
    Ghara1
    1. nt. plural ˚ā Dhp 241 Dhp 302

      1. a house AN ii.68 Snp 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaṁ āvasantā), 337 (abl gharā), 889 (identical gharamhā) Ja i.290 (identical gharato) iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo˚) Pug 57 Mil 47 Combd with vatthu Pv-a 3 Pv-a 17
      • sūcighara a needle-case Vv-a 251
      1. ˚ājira house-yard Vism 144 (where Dhs-a 116 in identical passage reads gharadvāra)
      2. ˚āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180 (gharāvāsatthaṁ) AN ii.208 MN i.179 MN i.240 MN i.267 344 Snp 406 (cp. SN v.350) Ja i.61 Pv-a 61
      • ˚kapoṭa Sanskrit gṛhakapota
        1. the house-pigeon Mil 364 Mil 403
        • ˚golikā house or domestic lizard Ja ii.147
        • ˚dāsī a female house-slave Pv ii.321
        • ˚dvāra a house-door Ja iv.142 Dhs-a 116 Pv-a 93
        • ˚bandhana the bonds of the house i.e. the establishing of marriage Dhp-a i.4
        • ˚mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd2 177
        • ˚mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Snp 188 Iti 112 (gahaṭṭha +) Ja vi.575
        • ˚sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house Pv-a 24
        • ˚sūkara a tame, domestic pig Dhp-a iv.16
        cp. gaha & geha
    Ghara2
    1. (˚-); in —˚dinnakābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (ex plural as suffering from the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.60)
    2. ˚visa poison Pug 48 Dhp-a ii.38
    3. ˚sappa a poisonous snake Dhp-a ii.256
    4. a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison
    Gharaṇī
    feminine
    1. a house-wife Vin i.271 SN i.201 Pv iii.19 (= ghara-sāminī Pv-a 174) Dhp-a iii.209
    from ghara1
    Ghasa
    adjective-noun eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater. AN v.149 (of the crow) Dhp 325 Mil 288
    Ghasati
    1. to eat Ja iii.210 ppr. ghasamāna Vin ii.201 Thag 1, 749
    • Cp ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa ‣See also jaddhu. Desid jighacchati
    Vedic grasati & *ghasti, past participle grasta, cp. Latin gramen grass
    Ghasta
    1. only in vanka˚ having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta-vanka) DN ii.266 (v-g˚ va ambujo) Ja vi.113
    past participle of ghasati = Sanskrit grasta
    Ghāṭa
    1. ‣See saṁ˚; ghāṭana ‣See ghaṭati
    Ghāta
    (usually—˚)
    1. killing murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery DN i.135 (gāma˚, etc. village robbery); setu˚ the pulling down of a bridge (figuratively) Vin i.59 etc ‣See setu; pantha highway robbery, brigandage, “waylaying” Ja i.253 Thag 2, 474 493 (= samugghāta Commentary ) Snp 246 (ina˚) Vv-a 72 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-vadha & ˚atipāta). cp. next vi˚; saṁ˚
    Sanskrit ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill ‣See etymology under ghana2 & hanti
    Ghātaka
    1. (adjective
    • ˚) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin i.89 (arahanta˚), 136 (identical), 168 (identical); ii.194 (manussa˚); iv.260 (tala˚) Ja iv.366 (gāma˚ corā robbers infesting the village); v.397 (thī˚ = itthi˚) Pug 56 (maccha˚)
    • As noun:
    • masculine one who slays, an executioner: go˚ a bull-slaughterer MN i.244 etc ‣See go cora˚ an executioner or hangman Ja iii.41 Pug 56 Pv-a 5
    • neuter brigandage, robbery, slaughtering gāmaghātakaṁ karoti Ja i.200
    Ghātikā
    1. (feminine abstract to ghātaka) murder Ja i.176f.

    Ghātita
    adjective
    1. killed, destroyed Thag-a 289 also in Derived ghātitatta neuter the fact of having killed Ja i.167 cp. ugghātita
    2. past participle of ghāteti
    Ghātin
    adjective-noun killing; a murderer Ja i.168 (pāṇa˚); vi.67 (ghātimhi = ghātake).
    Ghātimant
    adjective able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana˚ going through hard material easily Ja iii.282
    Ghāteti
    1. tc kill, slay, slaughter Iti 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti) Dhp 129 Dhp 405 Ja i.255 Mhvs vii.35, 36. aorist aghātayi Ja i.254
    2. absolutive ghātetvā Ja i.166
    3. causative ghātāpeti to have somebody killed Ja iv.124

      • cp. ghacca, ghātita āghāteti
      denominative from ghāta, cp. Sanskrit ghātayati to han
    Ghāna
    neuter
    1. the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell = sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana-viññeyyā gandhā odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enumerated of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear) ‣See under rūpa. In this connection: Vin i.34 DN i.21 DN i.245 iii.102, 244 sq. SN i.115 MN i.112 MN i.191 MN ii.42 Dhp 360 Pug 20 Mil 270 Vism 444 sq. (with definition)
    • In other connections: Pv ii.24 (ghāna-chinna, one whose nose is cut off)
    1. ˚āyatana the organ of smell DN iii.243 DN iii.280 Dhs 585 605, 608
    2. ˚indriya the sense of smell DN iii.239 Dhs 585 etc. (as above)
    3. ˚dhātu the element of smell Dhs as above
    4. ˚viññāṇa perception of smell Dhs 443 608 628
    5. ˚samphassa contact with the sense of smell SN i.115 DN iii. & Dhs as above
    Sanskrit ghrāṇa to ghrā ‣See ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81
    Ghāyati1
    1. to smell, always with gandhaṁ; absolutive ghātvā SN iv.71 SN iv.74 or ghāyitvā Ja i.210 (jālagandhaṁ); iii.52 (macchagandhaṁ) Mil 347 cp. sāyati & upagghāyati
    2. Sanskrit ghrāti & jighrati, to; ghrā, cp. gandha
    Ghāyati2
    1. to be consumed, to be tormented by thirst Pv i.1110 (ghāyire = ghāyanti Pv-a 60 Burmese variant jhāyire & jhāynati) Mil 397
    a variant of jhāyati
    Ghāsa
    1. grass for fodder, pasturing: food Ja i.511 (˚ṁ kurute) Pv-a 173 (˚atthāya gacchati “go feeding”) Mostly in: -esana search for food (= gocara) SN i.141 Snp 711
    • cp. vi˚
    1. ˚chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i.e. tending, fostering, good care (= posana) (active) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pug 51 chāda: Ja i.94 AN i.107 AN ii.85 AN iii.385 chādana DN i.60 MN i.360 Vv-a 23 137
    2. ˚hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Thag 1, 910
    Vedic ghāsa, from ghasati, q.v. cp. Latin gramen = grass
    Ghāsana
    neuter = ghāsa; in —˚ṭṭhāna pasture (= gocara) Vv-a 218
    Ghuṭṭha
    1. proclaimed, announced; renowned Ja i.50 (of festival) 425 (nakkhattaṁ); ii.248 (ussava); Pv ii.82 (dūra˚ of wide renown, world-famed of Bārāṇasī) Dhp-a iii.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened)
    Sanskrit ghuṣṭa, past participle ghuṣ ‣See ghoseti & cp. saṁ˚
    Ghuru-ghuru
    onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise
    1. in -passāsa (& ˚in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing SN i.117 (of Māra) Ja i.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus gh˚ kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring) cp. next
    gṛ-gṛ to; *gel or *ger ‣See note on gala
    Ghurughurāyati
    1. to snore Ja iii.538 Dhp-a i.307 cp. Prakrit ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers)
    denominative from preceding
    Ghoṭaka
    1. a (bad) horse Ja vi.452
    cp. Sanskrit ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281
    Ghota
    1. is read at Ja i.454 probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is “striking, stroke,” combined with kasā, whip
    Ghora

    adjective

    1. terrible, frightful, awful Vin ii.147 frequently as attribute of niraya (synonym with dāruṇa Pv-a 87 Pv-a 159 Pv-a 206) Pv i.1012 iv.18. Of an oath (sapatha Pv i.68 ii.1216
    • ghorassara of a terrible cry (epithet of an ass) Mil 363 Mil 365
    Vedic ghora, originally meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger ‣See note on gala & cp. ghuru AN root; ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of “bhīma,” i.e. horrible Rel. to Gothic gaurs, sad; Old High German gōrag, miserable; & perhaps Latin funus, funeral ‣See Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Ghosa
    1. shout, sound, utterance Vin ii.155 (“Buddha"-ghosa) MN i.294 AN i.87 AN i.228 Snp p. 106 Snp 696 Snp 698 Dhs 637 720 (+ ghosa-kamma)
    2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34iv.36, 338
      1. ˚pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) b y one’s reputation AN ii.71 = Pug 53 also as pamāṇika Dhp-a iii.114 (in same context)
      Vedic ghoṣa to ghus
    Ghosaka
    adjective sounding, proclaiming, shouting out (—˚), in dhamma˚ praising the Law Ja ii.286 Satthu guṇa sounding the praise of the Master Dhp-a iii.114 As n Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) Dhp-a i.173
    Ghosanā
    feminine fame, renown, praise, in Māra˚ Ja i.71
    Ghosavant
    adjective full of sound, roaring Ja iii.189
    Ghosita
    1.
    1. proclaimed, renowned, Pv-a 107 (= ghuṭṭha) Vv-a 31 (nakkhattaṁ). As Npl Ghositārāma Dhp-a i.53 161, 208
    • agent noun = ghositṛ cp. ghosaka
    1. one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds in proper name Ghositaseṭṭhi Dhp-a i.187
    past participle of ghoseti
    Ghoseti
    1. to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout Ja ii.112 Ja iii.52 Pv ii.937 (= uggh˚); iv.63; past participle ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q.v.)
    2. causative ; ghosāpeti to have proclaimed Ja i.71

      1. C
      denominative of ghosa, cp. Sanskrit ghoṣayati, causative to ghuṣ

    C

    Ca

    (indefinite enchtic particle)

    1. Indefinite (after demonstrative
    2. pronoun in the sense of kiṁ = what about? or how is it? cp. kiṁ) = ever, whoever what-ever, etc. Sanskrit kaśca, Latin quisque Gothic hvazuh
      1. so ca whoever ‣See below 3, tañ ca pan amhākaṁ ruccati tena c’ amhā attamanā MN i.93 yañ ca kho … ceteti yañ ca pakappeti … whatever he thinks, whatever he intends … SN ii.65 As a rule the Pali form corresponding to Sanskrit kaśca is *kascid= koci & ci (cid) is the regular Pali representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api)
      • ; Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) Ja iii.188 Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaṁ anatthañ ca Dhp 256 pubbâparāni ca Dhp 352 alaṁ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca Ja ii.160
      • In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca-ca (cp. Sanskrit ca-ca, Latin que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api-ca, cp.) tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (originally this or whatever to you, whatever to her) = to you as well as to her Ja i.151 Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c’ eva, as well as: hasi c’ eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried Ja i.167 maṁsena c’ eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit Ja iii.127 subhaddako c’ eva supesalo ca Ja iii.82 c’ eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile Thag-a 72 (Ap v.40). (b) disjunctive: but (especially after a negation): yo ca but who Thag 1, 401 yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) Ja iii.128 In
      • conditional clauses (cp. 3) combined with sace = but if on the other hand: sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati … sace ca pabbajati agārā Snp 1003 With neg, na ca = but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) Ja ii.160 3.
      • conditional : if = Vedic ced, Latin absque
      1. DN i.186
      1. 207; ii.36, 57 (jāti ca not va) MN i.91 SN iii.66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa) AN i.58 AN v.87 Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaṁ … ravamāno ca dūsayi: “he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry,” or “but”); iv.487; v.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaṁ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: “if Sakka will give me a wish, that wish will be granted,” or: “whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled”); vi.206 208
      • na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase) if not SN i.190 (ahaṁ ca kho … pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me) For Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ca = ced ‣See Avs ii.189, n. o
      Vedic ca adverb to rel.
    3. pronoun *qṷo, indogermanic *que = Cr. , Latin que, Gothic

      • h. cp. ka ki, ku
    Cakita
    adjective
    1. disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs iv.35, 46
    Sanskrit cakita, cak
    Cakora
    1. the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) Ja v.416 Vv 358 Vv-a 163 ‣See also cankora
    Sanskrit cakora to kol (kor) ‣See note on gala
    Cakka
    neuter
    1. I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dhp 1 Pv-a 65 (ratha˚) Mil 27
    • a discus used as a missile weapon Ja i.74 Pgdp 36; cp. khura˚ a razor as an instrumental of torture

  • a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17 iii.143 DN iii.149

    • J ii.331 Mil 51
    • an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma˚ cakka˚ sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.404 = iv.343
    • II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad =) collection, set, part; succession; sphere region, cycle Vin i.330 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.281); iii.96 iriyāpatha˚ the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DN-a i.249 Sdhp 604. sā˚, miga˚ the sphere or region of dogs wild animals Mil 178 cakkena instrumental in succession Pv-a iii.cakkaṁ kātabbaṁ, or bandhitabbaṁ frequently in Yam. and Paṭṭh, “The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated.”

  • (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage =) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality state, condition, especially good condition (fit instrumentality) catucakka an instrumental of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas AN ii.32 SN i.16 SN i.63 (catucakkaṁ). In this sense generalized as a happy state consisting of “4 blessings”: paṭirūpadesa-vāsa, sappurisûpassaya atta-sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe-kata-puññatā AN ii.32 Ja v.114 mentioned at Ps i.84. cp. also Snp 554f.; 684. especially pronounced in the two phrases dhamma-cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i.e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma-c˚ the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known.; dhamma˚; e.g. SN i.191 AN i.23 AN i.101 AN ii.34 AN ii.120 iii.151; iv.313 Snp 556f.; 693 Ja iii.412 Ps ii.159 sq. Pv-a 67 ‣See dhamma. brahma˚ MN i.71 SN ii.27 AN ii.9 AN ii.24 AN iii.9 AN iii.417 AN v.33 Vb 317f.; 344 ‣See brahma. cp. cakkavattin (below)

    • cp. vi˚
    1. ˚chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83
    • ˚bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good Ja v.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala-cakkassa bhañjanī Commentary )
    • ˚bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin ii.198 Vin iii.171
    • ˚yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832
    • ˚ratana the treasure of the wheel that is of the sun (cp. Rhys Davids Buddh. Suttas p. 252 Dialogues of the Buddha ii.197, 102) DN ii.171 DN iii.59f. 75 Ja i.63 ii.311 DN-a i.249 ‣See also cakkavattin
    • ˚vaṭṭaka
    • neuter a scoop-wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin ii.122
    • ˚vattin (cp dhammacakkaṁ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Snp p. 106, in corresponding
    • passive v.1002 as vijeyya pathaviṁ imaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena-m-anusāsati). A definition is given by Buddhaghosa at DN-a; i.249

      • Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla-c˚ a universal king, or cāturanta-c˚ (ruling over four great continents Snp p. 106 Kp-a 227), a dīpa-c˚ (ruling over one), a padesa-c (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: DN i.88 DN iii.156 DN iv.302 DN v.44 DN v.99 DN v.342 DN ii.16 172; iii.59 sq., 75, 142 sq. MN iii.65 AN i.76 AN i.109f. ii.37, 133, 245; iii.147 sq; 365; iv.89, 105; v.22; Kh viii.12 (˚sukha) Ja i.51 Ja ii.395 Ja iv.119 Vb 336 Pv-a 117 Vv-a 18 Sdhp 238 Sdhp 453 Dhp-a ii.135 (˚sirī)—˚gabbha Vism 126:—˚rajjaṁ kāresi Ja ii.311
      • ˚viddha
      • neuter a particular form of shooting Ja v.130
      • ˚samārūḷha
      • adjective having mounted the wheels, i.e. their carts (of janapadā) AN i.178 AN iii.66 AN iii.104
      Vedic cakra, reduplicated formation from *quel to turn round (cp. Pali kaṇṭha → Latin collus & ‣See also note on gala) = that which is (continuously) turning, i.e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i.e. circle; Cakra = Latin colo, incolo; Old Bulgarian kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel
  • Cakkalaka
    1. a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra˚, where Kp-a 50 reads in same context kaḷīra-daṇḍa)
    from cakka
    Cakkali
    feminine drapery Vin ii.174
    Cakkalikā
    1. a window blind, curtain Vin ii.148
    Cakkavāka
    1. the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca Ja iii.520 Ja iv.70f. (name of Ja No. 451); Pv ii.123 Mil 364 Mil 401 feminine cakkavākī Ja iii.524 Ja vi.189 = 501
    2. Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ ‣See note on gala
    Cakkavāḷa
    masculine> &
    • neuter a circle, a sphere, especially a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl worlds or spheres Ja i.53 Ja i.203 Ja vi.330 Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421 Dhs-a 297 Dhp-a 11. 15; iii.498 in the trope “cakkavāḷaṁ atisambādhaṁ brahmaloko atinīco” (= the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity Dhp-a i.310 Vv-a 68

      1. ˚gabbha the interior of the Commentary sphere Ja iv.119 DN-a i.284
      • ˚pabbata
      • neuter the Commentary mountains, “world’s end Ja iii.32 Ja vi.272
      • ˚rajja
      • neuter the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere Ja ii.392

    Cakkhu
    neuter [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etymology not clear, as reduplicated perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens to cit, cp. cinteti, & ‣See Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under inquam the eye (
    • nominative singular cakkhuṁ Vin i.34 SN i.115 MN iii.134 etc.)
    • I. The eye as organ of sense-(a) psychologically cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā “seeing visible object (shape with the eye” (Nd2 on rūpa q.v.) is the defin. of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv; ii.61 dakkhiṇa c. = the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DN-a i.194f. and more fully at Dhs 597f. ‣See Dhs-a 306 sq; Dhs translation 173 sq.; cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd2 234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e.g. Vin i.34 DN i.21 DN ii.308 DN ii.336f.; iii.102, 225, 244 sq.; 269 Nett 28
    • See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: MN i.318 iii.264 AN i.281
    • cakkhusmiṁ haññati rūpehi SN iv.201 hata˚ AN i.129 passāmi naṁ manasā cakkhunā va “I ‣See him with my mind as with my eye” Snp 1142
    • Vin i.184 SN i.32 SN i.199 SN iv.123 Dhp 360 Ja iv.137 DN-a i.183 Nett 191. Vism 444 sq. As adjective (—˚) ‣Seeing, having or catching sight of: eka˚ (dvi˚) one-eyed (two˚) AN i.128f.; āmisa ‣Seeing an object of sensual enjoyment SN ii.226 SN iv.159 Ja v.91 (= kilesalola). acakkhu blind AN iii.250 AN iii.256 Ps i.129
    • (b) ethically: as a “sense” belonging to what is called “body” (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter ‣See kāya, & is to be regarded as an instrumental only i.e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one’s eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu with down-cast eyes Snp 63 Snp 411 Snp 972 Pv iv.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; ˚indriya). In this connection the following passages may be mentioned: Vin i.34 DN i.70 SN iv.123 SN ii.244 (aniccaṁ, etc.); iii.255 (do.) iv.81, 128 (na tumhākaṁ); Ps I.132 (aniccatṭhaṁ). Numerous others ‣See under rūpa
    • II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, to vid, to ‣See). In connection with ñāṇa () it refers to the apperception of the truth ‣See dhamma-cakkhu: intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati “to know and to ‣See” = to understand clearly) ‣See e.g. SN ii.7–⁠11, 105; iv.233; v.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma˚; “the eye of the truth,” said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaṁ vitamalaṁ dh-cakkhuṁ uppajjati Vin i.16 DN i.86 DN i.110 SN ii.134f.; iv.47 107; v.467 AN iv.186 Ps ii.150 sq.; 162 Mil 16 Similarly paññā˚, Iti 52 ariya˚ MN i.510
    • III. The eye as the instrumental of supersensuous perception, “clear” sight clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others and who through right cognition have acquired the two “eyes” or visionary faculties, termed dibba- cakkhu & buddha- cakkhu Iti 52 DN ii.38 respectively. They are most completely described at Nd2 235 (under cakkhumā), & the following categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1.; maṁsa-cakkhu : the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive ‣See Kv; iii.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maṁsa 2 ñāṇa˚)
    • dibba—˚ : the deva-eye, the eye of a ‣Seer, all-pervading, & ‣Seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.; 3. paññā˚; : the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaṁ passaṁ recognizing & ‣Seeing, i.e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa˚ dhamma˚ brahma˚)

  • buddha˚; : the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i.e. of a person who “sees the heart of man, of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge

    • samanta˚ : (a summary account of Nos. 1
    1. -4, & in all Scripture-passages a standing epithet of Gotama Buddha ‣See below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom
    • Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in sets; (Nos. 1
    1. -5): Dhs-a 306 Snp-a 351 (Nos. 1
    1. -3:) Iti 52 = Kvu 251 sq. (It 52 = Kvu 254); (dibba:) Vin i.8 288; ii.183 iii.5 DN i.82 DN i.162 DN iii.52 iii.281 MN i.213 SN i.144 SN i.196 SN ii.122, 213, 276; iv.240; v.266, 305 AN i.165 AN i.256 AN i.281f.; iii.19, 29, 418; iv.85, 141, 178, 291; v.13, 35, 68 200, 211, 340 Ja iii.346 Ps i.114; ii.175 Vb 344 Pv-a 5
    • (paññā˚:) SN iv.292 SN v.467 AN i.35 Dhp-a iii.174 175
    • (buddha˚:) Vin i.6 SN i.138 Ps ii.33 Pv-a 61
    • (samanta˚:) SN i.137 = Nd2 2354 Snp 345 Snp 378 Snp 1063 Snp 1069 Snp 1090 Snp 1133; Ps ii.31 = Nd2 2355
    1. ˚āyatana (either cakkh’ or cakkhv˚) the organ or sense of sight DN iii.243 DN iii.280 DN iii.290 Dhs 585 653
    2. ˚indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision DN i.70 DN iii.225 DN iii.239 AN i.113 Dhs 585 597, 661, 830, 971 Vism 7
    3. ˚karaṇa (always in combination with ñāṇa-karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) Iti 82 (of kusalavitakkā); feminine ˚ī SN iv.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Ps ii.147
    4. ˚dada one who gives the eye (of understanding Thag 1, 3
    5. ˚dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597 703, 817 -patha the range of vision; sight Ja i.65 = Dhp-a i.173 Ja i.146 Ja iv.189 Ja iv.378 Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṁ etaṁ nāmaṁ Commentary ) Vv-a 119
    6. ˚bhāta (+ ñāṇa˚)
    7. adjective one who has become the possessor of right understanding SN ii.255 SN iv.94 AN v.226f. -lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd2 177
    8. ˚viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception visual cognition Vin i.34 DN ii.308 DN ii.310 iii.243 Dhs 433 556, 585, 589, 620; cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Miln translation i.80, 89
    9. ˚viññeyya
    10. adjective (i.e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin i.184 DN ii.281 DN iii.234 Dhs 589 967, 1095 -samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with ˚ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā feelings) Vin i.34 DN ii.308f.; iii.243; Ps i.5, 40, 136.

  • Cakkhuka
    adjective having eyes ‣Seeing (—˚), in dibba˚ AN i.23 148 ‣See cakkhu iii.2 and a˚ blind DN i.191 SN iii.140 Nd 67.
    Cakkhumant
    adjective
    1. having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) DN i.76 (one who knows, i.e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti “those who have eyes to ‣See shall ‣See” (of the Buddha) DN i.85 DN i.110 etc
    • Vin i.16 SN i.27 AN i.116 124; iv.106 Dhp 273 Iti 108 115 DN-a i.221 Dhp-a iii.403 Dhp-a iv.85
    • Especially as epithet of the Buddha: the Allwise SN i.121 SN i.134 SN i.159 SN i.210 Snp 31 Snp 160 Snp 992 Snp 1028 Snp 1116 Snp 1128 Vv 125 (= pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā Vv-a 60 cp. cakkhu iii.) Vv 8127
    cakkhu + mant
    Cakkhula
    adjective
    1. in visama˚ squint-eyed. squinting Ja i.353 Ja vi.548
    = cakkhuka
    Cakkhussa
    adjective
    1. pleasing to or good for the eyes (opposite a˚) Vin ii.137 148
    Vedic cakṣuṣya
    Caṅkama
    1. (a) walking up & down SN iv.104
    • (b) the place where one is walking, especially a terraced walk, cloister Vin i.15 182; ii.220 DN i.105 SN i.212 AN i.114 183; iii.29 iv.87 Ja i.17 Ja ii.273 Ja v.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa-passages)
    Sanskrit cankrama & cankramā, from cankamati
    Caṅkamati
    1. to walk about, to walk up & down Vin i.15 182; ii.193, 220; iv.18 SN i.107 SN i.212 Pv-a 105
    • Caus cankamāpeti Ja iii.9
    Intens. of kamati, to kram = Sanskrit cankramīti; cp. kamati
    Caṅkamana
    neuter
    1. walking up & down SN ii.282 Dhp-a i.10
    2. a cloister walk (= cankama Vv-a 188 Usually ˚-: Vin i.139 (˚sālā) Ja iii.85 iv.329 Pv-a 79 (˚koṭi the far end of the cloister)
    from cankamati
    Caṅkamika
    adjective
    1. one who has the habit of walking about Mil 216 (ṭhāna˚ standing & walking)
    from cankama
    Caṅkora
    1. the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 163) Ja vi.538
    cp. cakora
    Caṅgavāra
    1. a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask MN i.142 Ja v.186 (in similes). As ˚ka Mil 365 (translation Miln ii.278 by “straining cloth”). cp. cañcu “a box” Divy 131
    cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo-Indian ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log ‣See also doṇi
    Caṅgoṭaka
    1. a casket, a box Ja i.65 Ja iv.257 Ja v.110 Ja v.303 Ja vi.369 Ja vi.534 Dhp-a ii.116 Dhp-a iii.101 Vv-a 33 158; Mhvs iv.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173
    cp. cangavāra
    Caccara
    neuter
    1. a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin iii.151 Vin iv.271 Mil 1 (+ catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.) Ja i.425 (˚raccha)
    Sanskrit catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56
    Caja
    adjective giving up, to be given up; in compound duc˚ hard to give up AN iii.50 Ja v.8 cp. cāga.
    Cajati
    1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge AN ii.33 Ja ii.342 (mutta karīsaṁ) figuratively to utter (a speech) Ja v.362
    2. to abandon to give up, sacrifice (with
    3. locative of person to whom Asuresu pāṇaṁ SN i.224 = J i.203) Dhp 290 Ja ii.205 iii.211; v.464; vi.570.
    4. past participle catta, q.v.
    5. gerundive caja Sanskrit tyajya
      1. q.v
      Sanskrit tyajate, tyaj
    Cañcala
    adjective
    1. moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady Ja iv.498 (= calācala) Sdhp 317 Sdhp 598
    Intens. of cal = car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sanskrit cañcūryate = carcarīti cañcala (= *carcara) ‣See also note on gala & cp. cankamati
    Caṭula
    adjective
    1. clever, skilled Mhbv.148 ‣See catura
    Sanskrit catura
    Caṇḍa
    adjective
    1. fierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatthī); D. i.90 (= māṇa-nissita-kopa-yutta DN-a i.256) SN i.176 SN ii.242 AN ii.109 = Pug 47 (sakagava˚) Ja i.450 Ja ii.210 Ja ii.349 Vism 343, 279 (˚sota, fierce current), (˚hatthi) Dhp-a iv.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41 Sdhp 590 Sdhp 598. feminine caṇḍī MN i.126 Ja ii.443 Ja iii.259 Pv ii.34 (= kodhanā Pv-a 83). Compar. caṇḍatara SN ii.242

      Sanskrit caṇḍa
    Caṇḍaka
    adjective = caṇḍa;
    • feminine caṇḍikā Pv ii.35, & caṇḍiyā Ja iii.259 (= kodhaṇā).

    Caṇḍāla1
    1. a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at AN i.107 = ii.85 = Pug 51 As caṇḍāla-pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society ‣See jāti & khattiya at AN i.162
    • Vin iv.6 MN ii.152 SN v.168f. (˚vaṁsa) AN iii.214 AN iii.228 (brāhmaṇa˚); iv.376 Ja iv.303 Pv-a 175 Mil 200
    • f caṇḍālī AN iii.226 Pv iii.113 Dhp-a ii.25 ‣See also pukkusa
    Vedic caṇḍāla
    Caṇḍāla2
    1. neuter a kind of amusement or trick DN i.6≈(= ayogulakīḷā play with an iron ball DN-a i.84)
    Caṇḍikata
    adjective
    1. angry Vin iv.310
    cp. caṇḍa
    Caṇḍikka
    neuter
    1. ferocity anger, churlishness Nd2 313 576, Dhs 418 1060, 1115 1231 Vb 357 Dhp-a ii.227 cp. caṇḍitta
    *caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika → caṇḍaka
    Caṇḍitta
    neuter anger Dhs 418 Pug 18 = 22. cp. caṇḍikka.
    Catukka1
    neuter
    1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: ˚pañcakajjhānā (
    2. plural ) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation Dhs-a 168 ‣See compounds
    3. a place where four roads meet Ja vi.389 Mil 330 (‣ See also below); especially in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it “in sets of four” ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 79) Ja i.326 Ja ii.123 Dhp-a iv.52
    4. a square (in a village) Mil 1 Mil 365 Ja ii.194 v.459; Dhp-a 317.

      1. ˚bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77 Vin iii.160
      • ˚magga the 4 fold path Nett 113
      • ˚yañña (usually sabba catukka˚) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts Ja iii.44 Ja iii.45 Pv-a 280 cp. Ja i.335 (Or is it the “cross-road sacrifice"?)
      from catu = *catuka → *catukyaṁ
    Catukka2
    1. empty, shallow, little Nd2 415 (˚pañña, with omakapañña lāmaka-p˚) Ja iv.441 (nadī = tuccha Commentary )
    origin. “consisting only of one quarter"?
    Catuttha
    (numeral ordinal)
    1. the fourth Snp 97 Snp 99 Snp 450Ja iii.55 Ja vi.367 ˚ṁ (adverb ) for the fourth time Dhp-a iii.174
    2. feminine catutthī Snp 436 Vism 338

      • ‣ See also (s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha
      1. ˚bhatta food eaten only every fourth day Ja v.424
      • ˚magga “the fourth Path,” of Arahantship Dhp-a i.309
      • ˚mana (?)
      • neuter name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: Ja v.155 extremely doubtful
      Vedic caturtha, Indogermanic *queturto = Latin quartus, Old High German fiordo
    Catur
    , catu˚ in composition
    1. ; instrumental catubbhi (Snp 229), catūhi (Snp 231) & catuhi; locative catūsu (J i.262) catusu
    2. As
    3. numerical
    4. adverb catu˚ catur˚ in compounds catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa Pv-a 55 Pv-a 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Snp 457 catusaṭṭhi (64) Ja i.50 Ja ii.193 Pv-a 74 caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa-sahassāni Ja i.137 ii.311; Pv iv.77 Dhp-a ii.58 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 254, etc ‣See also cattārīsa (40)
      1. ˚(r)aṁsa (= caturassa, having four edges, four-edged Dhs 617 Pv-a 189 (read ˚sobhitāya)
      2. ˚(r)aṅga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold MN i.77 Ja i.390 Ja ii.190 Ja ii.192 Ja vi.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga) Dīpavaṁsa i.6; Sdhp 64
      3. ˚(r)aṅgika = preceding Dhs 147 157, 397 Kp-a 85; Sdhp 58
      4. ˚(r)aṅgin adjective comprising four parts
      5. feminine ˚inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots cavalry & infantry DN ii.190 Ja ii.102 Ja ii.104 Vism 146 Snp-a 225 353 Dhp-a iv.144 cp. Ja vi.275
      6. ˚(r)aṅgula
      7. adjective measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin i.46 SN ii.178 Ja vi.534 Thag 1, 1137 Vism 124
      8. ˚(r)aṅgulika = preceding Thag 2, 498 (-Thag-a, 290)
      9. ˚(r)anta ‣See cātur˚
      10. ˚(r)assa catur + assa2
        1. four-cornered, quadrangular regular Vin ii.310 (Buddhaghosa) Ja iv.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); v.49; Pv ii.119. cp. caturaṁsa & next
        2. ˚(r)assara ‣See last with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; ˚muggara Dhp-a i.126
        • ˚(r)ādhiṭṭhāna
        • adjective one who has taken the four resolutions ‣See adhiṭṭhāna MN iii.239
        • ˚(r)āpassena
        • adjective endowed with the four apassena: literally reclining on four. AN v.29 AN v.30 DN iii.269 DN iii.270
        • ˚ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes Ja iv.309 (explained. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); iv.422 = 461 “with four pillows” (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt-ussada (full of people) DN i.111 e.g. & Pv; iv.18 ‣See satta. The formation “cattussada” has probably been influenced by “sattussada”
        • ˚(k)kaṇṇa (& ˚ka (a) with 4 corners Vin ii.137 Ja iii.255

          • (b) “between four ears,” i.e. secret, of manta (counsel) Ja vi.391
          • ˚(k)kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648 Pv i.113
          • ˚kuṇḍika on all fours MN i.79 AN iii.188 DN iii.6 Pv iii.27 (cp. Pv-a 181)
          • ˚koṇa four cornered crossed, in ˚raccha cross road Pv-a 24
          • ˚(k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect ‣See khandha Dhs-a 345
          • ˚(g)guṇa fourfold quadruple DN ii.135 SN i.27 Ja i.213 Vv-a 186 Sdhp 240
          • ˚cakka with four wheels SN i.16 = 63 (said of the human body ‣See under cakka)
          • ˚jāta of four sorts viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients Thag-a 72 ‣See next -jāti of four kinds Ja i.265 Ja v.79 (gandha) These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana)
          • ˚jātiya (& ˚jātika) in ˚gandha preceding Ja iii.291 Ja iv.377 Pv-a 127 Mil 354 Ja i.178 (˚ka)
          • ˚(d)disā (
          • plural ) the 4 quarters of the globe SN i.167 = Sn p. 79 DN i.251 may also be taken for ablative singular as
          • adverb : in the 4 quarters Vin i.16 cp.
          • accusative catuddisaṁ DN ii.12
          • ˚(d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) Dhp-a ii.95
          • ˚dvāra with 4 gates, of a house DN i.102 (= DN-a i.270); of Avīciniraya Iti 86 Ja iv.3 Pv i.1013 cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439 Ja iv.1f.)
          • ˚nahuta ninety-four Ja i.25 Ja vi.486
          • ˚paccaya the four requisites ‣See paccaya Ja iii.273 ˚santosa contentment with ˚ Dhp-a iv.111
          • ˚paṇṇasa fifty-four Dhp-a i.4
          • ˚(p)patha a fourways Ja iv.460
          • ˚(p)pada Sanskrit caturpād, Latin quadrupes
          1. a quadruped Vin ii.110 SN i.6 AN v.21 Snp 603 Snp 964 Iti 87 Ja i.152 iii.82
          2. ˚parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha ˚adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304) fourfold circle SN iii.59f. (pañcupādānakkhandhe)
          3. ˚parisā feminine the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) Pv-a 11
          4. ˚pala fourfold Vism 339
          5. ˚(p)pādaka
          6. adjective consisting of 4 padas, i.e. a sloka;
          7. feminine ˚ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35
          8. ˚pārisuddhasīla
          9. neuter the four precepts of purity Ja iii.291 Dhp-a iv.111-(b)bidha (catur + vidha) fourfold Thag-a, 74
          10. ˚(b)bipallāsa (catur + vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Nett 85 Th + 1, 1143 Snp-a 46
          11. ˚byūha (catur + vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Nett 3, 105
          12. ˚bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dhp 108
          13. ˚bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) Dhp-a i.21 Dhp-a iv.72 Dhs-a 344 345 cp. Vism 493 (of indriya)
          14. ˚madhura
          15. neuter sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DN-a i.136 Thag-a 68
          16. ˚mahāpatha a crossing on a high-road Vism 235
          17. ˚mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements Dhs-a 403
          18. ˚(m)mahārājika ‣See cātum˚
          19. ˚māsa 4 months, a season Pv-a 96 Dīpavaṁsa i.24, 37 (cā˚) ‣See under māsa
          20. ˚sacca the four truths or facts ‣See ariyasacca Dhp-a iii.380 Mil 334 (s)sāla
          21. neuter catur + sāla
            1. a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṁ catussälaṁ kāretvā Vv-a 220 Dhp-a iii.291
            • ˚'ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days catuhena within 4 days SN ii.191 catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin iv.280

              • ‣ See also compounds. with cātu˚
              Vedic catvārah masculine catvāri
            • neuter from *qṷetuor, *qṷetur = Latin quattuor, Gothic fidwōr, Old High German fior, Anglo-Saxon fēower, English four; catasras
            • feminine from *qṷ(e)tru, cp. tisras Also as
            • adverb catur from *quetrus = Latin quater & quadru˚ base of numeral four; 1. As
            • numerical adjective nominative &
            • accusative m cattāro (Dhp 109 Ja iii.51) and caturo (Snp 84 Snp 188), feminine catasso (Sn 1122), neuter cattāri (Snp 227); genitive
            • masculine catunnaṁ (Snp p. 102), [
            • feminine catassannaṁ
    Catura
    1. clever, skilled, shrewd Ja iii.266 Ja vi.25
    • Derived
    • feminine abstract caturatā cleverness Vb 351 (= cāturiya)
    Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sanskrit catura
    Caturiya
    1. at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise ‣See cāturiya
    Catta
    1. given up. sacrificed AN ii.41 AN iii.50 Thag 1, 209 (˚vaṇṇa who has lost fame) Ja ii.336 Ja iv.195 v.41 (˚jīvita)
    past participle of cajati
    Cattatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vb 254f. Dhs-a 381
    from catta
    Cattārīsa
    (& cattālīsa)
    1. forty SN ii.85 Snp p. 87 Iti 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa Ja i.58 Ja v.433 Dhp-a i.41 Dhp-a ii.9 93
    1. ˚danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.172
    Sanskrit catvāriṁśat
    Cattārīsaka
    adjective having forty MN iii.77
    Cadika
    1. at Mil 197 (ūmikavankacadika) probably for ˚madika
    Cana

    (—˚)

    1. indefinite particle “like, as if,” added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. cp. ca & ci
    Vedic cana from rel. pronoun *qṷo + demonstrative
  • pronoun *no, cp. anā, nānā; Latin

    • ne in quandone = Pali kudācana. cana = Gothic hun, Old High German gin, German ir-gen-d cp. ci
  • Canaṁ
    1. = cana; and then, if Vin iii.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naṁ?
    Canda
    1. the moon (i.e. the shiner) SN i.196 SN ii.206 MN ii.104 AN i.227 ii.139 sq.; iii.34 Dhp 413 Snp 465 Snp 569 Snp 1016 Ja iii.52 vi.232 Pv i.127 ii.66 Vv 647 (maṇi˚ a shiny jewel or a moonlike jewel ‣See Vv-a 278 variant reading ˚sanda)
    2. ˚puṇṇa˚ the full moon Ja i.149 Ja i.267 Ja v.215 ˚mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) Dhp-a iii.171 Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens ‣See list in; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e.g. DN ii.259 AN i.215 AN ii.139 Nd2 308 (under Devatā). cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol etymology ‣See Vism 418
    1. ˚kanta a gem Mil 118
    • ˚(g)gāha a moon-eclipse (lit seizure, i.e. by Rāhu) DN i.10 (cp. DN-a i.95)
    • ˚maṇḍala the moon’s disc, the shiny disc, i.e. the moon AN i.283 Ja i.253 Ja iii.55 Ja iv.378 Ja v.123 Dhs 617 Vism 216 (in compar,) Pv-a 65
    • ˚suriyā (
    • plural ) sun & moon Ja iv.61
    Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Latin candeo, candidus, incendo; Welsh. cann white; English candid, candle, incense, cinder
    Candaka
    1. = canda Vv-a 278 (maṇi˚); Sdhp 92 (mayūra˚ the eye in a peacock’s tail)
    Candatta
    neuter
    1. in compound paripuṇṇa˚; state or condition of the full moon Snp-a 502
    abstract from canda
    Candana
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. sandal (tree wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin i.203 AN i.9 AN i.145 226; iii.237 Dhp 54 Ja v.420 (tree, masculine ) Mil 382 Dhp-a i.422 Dhp-a iv.189 (˚pūjā) Vv-a 158 (agalu˚ with aloe & sandal) Pv-a 76
      • Kāsika˚ sandal from Kāsī AN iii.391 AN iv.281 Mil 243 Mil 348 ratta˚ red s. Ja iv.442 lohita˚ identical AN v.22 Ja i.37 hari˚ yellow s. Ja i.146
      1. ˚ussada covered with sandal perfumes Thag 1, 267 Pv iii.91 (= candanasārānulitto Pv-a 211)
      2. ˚gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi ‣See the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin ii.110
      • ˚gandhin having a scent of sandal Ja iii.190
      • ˚vilepana sandal unguent Ja iv.3
      • ˚sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523 Ja i.53 Ja i.340
      Deriv. unknown. Possibly nonAryan; but ‣See under canda, Sanskrit candana
    Candanikā
    feminine a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty ‣See Vin ii.122 & cp. candanapanka Avs i.221 ‣See also PW sub candana2) SN v.361 MN i.11 MN i.73 MN i.448 AN i.161 Thag 1, 567 Ja v.15 Mil 220 Vism 264, 343, 359; Sdhp 132.
    Candimā
    masculine or
    • feminine ?

      1. the moon. By itself only in similes at Dhp 208 Dhp 387 (at end of pada) & in “abbhā mutto va candimā MN ii.104 = Dh 172 = Th 1, 871 Dhp 382 = Th 1, 873 Ps i.175
      • Otherwise only in combination with suriya moon & sun, DN i.240; ii.12; iii.85 sq., 90, 112 SN ii.266 SN v.264 sq. AN i.227 AN ii.53 AN ii.130 AN v.59 Vv.30 Ja ii.213 Mil 191 Vism 153. Also in compound candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus
      • Burmese manuscripts, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā˚ or candiya-pabhā) SN iii.156 = v.44 Iti 20
      Sanskrit candramas
    • masculine & candrimā
    • feminine, cp. pūrṇimā; a compound of canda + mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation from canda + mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely
    • masculine On this formation cp. Latin lumen = Sanskrit rukmān luminous shiny
    Capala
    adjective
    1. moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle SN i.204 SN v.269 MN i.470 (and a˚ steady) AN iii.199 AN iii.355 AN iii.391 Dhp 33 Pug 35 Ja i.295 Ja ii.360 At Ja vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (explained by paggharita-lāla “trickle-spit”)
    Sanskrit capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under caperro
    Capalatā
    feminine
    1. fickleness, unsteadiness Mil 93 Mil 251 Pgdp 47, 64. At Nd2 585 as capalanā + cāpalyaṁ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at Ja vi.548)
    from last
    Capu
    1. (or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one’s lips Vin ii.214 (capucapukāraka adjective), 221; iv.197
    Cappeti
    1. to chew Buddhaghosa on Vin ii.115 cp. jappati
    Sanskrit carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning “adana”
    Camati
    (& cameti)
    1. to rinse, only in cpd ācamati (ācameti)
    ; cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning “adana,” eating
    Camara
    1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) Ja i.149 Ja iii.18 375; v.416 Mil 365
    2. feminine Ja i.20 Sdhp 621
    3. In compounds. camari˚ Ja iv.256
    4. a kind of antelope (-ī Ja vi.537
      1. ˚vījanī feminine a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin ii.130 This is one of the royal ensigns ‣See kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp. vāla-vījanī
      2. Deriv. unknown, probably non-Aryan. Sanskrit camara
    Camasa

    a ladle or spoon for sacrificing into the sacred fire Ja vi.52824 = 5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and note 4: aggijuhana-kaṭacchu-sankhātimasañca for camasañ ca

    1. variant reading Bd). cp. Kern Toevoegselen s.v
    Vedic camasa, a cup
    Camu
    feminine
    1. an army Ja ii.22 camūpati a general Mhvs 10, 65; 23, 4; Dāvs i.3
    Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sanskrit it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel
    Campa
    1. = campaka Ja vi.151
    Campaka
    1. the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers Ja v.420 Ja vi.269 Mil 338 DN-a i.280 Vism 514 (˚rukkha, in simile) Dhp-a i.384 Vv-a 194
    Campā
    feminine name of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river DN i.111 DN-a i.279 Ja iv.454
    Campeyya
    1. name of a Nāgarāja Ja iv.454 (= ˚jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304
    Campeyyaka
    adjective belonging to Campā Vin v.114 Ja vi.269 (here: a Champaka-like tree).
    Camma
    neuter
    1. skin, hide, leather Vin i.192 (sīha˚ vyaggha˚ dīpi˚), 196 (elaka˚ aja˚ miga˚) AN iv.393 (sīha˚ dīpi˚) Pv-a 157 (kadalimiga˚ as rug) Ja ii.110 (sīha˚); iii.82, 184 Mil 53 Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument) & next to the bone: chaviṁ chindetvā cammaṁ chindati SN ii.238 = AN iv.129 frequently in expr. like aṭṭhi-cammanahāru-matta (skin & bones) Pv-a 68 ‣See under nahāru camma-maṁsa-nahāru Pv-a 80
    2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi˚ sword & shield) MN i.86 AN iii.93 Ja v.373 vi.580
      1. ˚aṇḍa a water-skin Ja i.250
      • ˚kāra a worker in leather a tanner Vin iv.7 Mil 331 a harness-maker Ja v.45 a waggon-builder and general artisan Ja iv.174 (= rathakāra); also as -kārin Pv-a 175 (= rathakārin)
      • ˚khaṇḍa an animal’s skin, used as a rug Mil 366 Vism 99; skin used as a water-vessel ‣See khaṇḍa Vin ii.122 Ps i.176 -ghaṭaka a water- skin Ja ii.345
      • ˚naddha
      • neuter a drum Bu i.31
      • ˚pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather Thag-a 283 Ja vi.431 Ja vi.432 (as variant reading )
      • ˚bandha a leather strap Vin i.194
      • ˚bhastā
      • feminine a sack Ja v.45
      • ˚māluka a leather bag Ja vi.431 Ja vi.432
      • ˚yodhin a soldier in cuirass DN i.51≈(in list of various occupations DN-a i.157: cammakañcukaṁ pavisitvā) AN iv.107 AN iv.110
      • ˚varatta
      • feminine a leather thong Ja ii.153
      • ˚vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i.e. a hermit Ja vi.528
      • ˚sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin Ja iii.82 (nāma paribbājaka)
      Vedic carman, cp. Latin corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Old High German herdo; Anglo-Saxon heorδa = English hide; also Sanskrit kṛtti; Old High German scirm (shield) English skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu) = the cut-off hide
    Cammaka
    1. a skin Bu ii.52
    Caya
    1. piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin ii.117 Dhs-a 44 in building: a layer Vin ii.122 152 As—˚ one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder MN i.452 (nikkha˚, khetta˚, etc.) ‣See also ā˚, apa˚, upa˚
    from cināti
    Cara
    (n-adjective)
    1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually—˚): oka˚ living in water MN i.117 Ja vi.416 antara˚ SN iv.173 eka˚ solitary Snp 166 saddhiṁ˚ a companion Snp 45 anattha˚ Ja v.433 jala˚ Dāvs iv.38 ‣See also cāreti & gocara
    2. Instr; carasā (
    3. adverb ) walking MN i.449
    4. cara-vāda “going about talk,” gossip, idle talk SN iii.12 SN v.419
    5. sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin iii.26
    6. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy SN i.79 Also as carapurisa Ja ii.404 Ja iv.343 Ja vi.469 Dhp-a i.193 Note.-cara-purāya at. AN v.133 should be changed into variant reading SS paramparāya
    from car, carati
    Caraka
    1. 1. = cara2 (a messenger) Ja vi.369 (attha˚); adjective walking through: sabbalokaṁ˚ Ja v.395
    • any animal SN i.106 Pv-a 153 (vana˚)
    Caraṇa
    neuter
    1. walking about grazing, feeding Vv-a 308 (˚ṭṭhāna)
    2. the foot Vin iv.212 Ja v.431
    3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, frequently in combination with vijjā, e.g. AN ii.163 v.327 Dhp 144 Vism 202 (in detail) Pv-a 1 etc. DN iii.97 DN iii.156 Snp 410 Snp 462 Snp 536 Mil 24 sampannacaraṇa

      • adjective accomplished in right behaviour SN i.153 SN i.166 Snp 1126 Pv ii.138

        • cp. sañ˚
        of a deer, called pañca-hattha “having 5 hands,” i.e. the mouth and the 4 feet
    Caraṇavant
    adjective one of good conduct (= sampannacaraṇa) Snp 533 Snp 536
    Carati
    1. to move about, to “live and move,” to behave, to be
    • imperative active cara (J i.152), carā (metri causa, Ja iii.393);
    • imperative medium carassu (Sn 696), plural carāmase (= exhortative, Snp 32); -ppr. caranto (J i.152 Pv-a 14) caraṁ (Sn 151 Dhp 61 Dhp 305 Iti 117);
    • medium caramāna (Vin i.83 Pv i.1010 Pv-a 160); -pot. careyya (Sn 45 386, 1065 Dhp 142 Dhp 328) & care (Sn 35 Dhp 49 Dhp 168 Dhp 329 Iti 120); -
    • future carissati (M i.428); -
    • aorist singular 1st acariṁ (SN iii.29), acārisaṁ (Pv iii.95), 3rd acari (Sn 344) acāri (Sn 354 Dhp 326); cari (J ii.133)
    • plural 3rd acariṁsu (Sn 809), acārisuṁ (Sn 284); cariṁsu (Sn 289) acaruṁ (Sn 289), acāruṁ (J vi.114); -infinitive carituṁ (caritu-kāma Ja ii.103); -
    • absolutive caritvā (J i.50) & caritvāna (Sn 816); -
    • past participle ciṇṇa (q.v.)-
    • causative cāreti (=
    • denominative of cara), past participle carita. 2nd
    • causative carāpeti (q.v.)-‣ See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin
    1. Meaning: 1. Literally (a) to move about, to walk, travel etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṁ nisinno udāhu sayaṁ Iti 117 (walking, standing, sitting reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye Iti 120 tiṭṭhaṁ caraṁ nisinno vā sayāno vā Snp 151 Defined as “catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati” (i.e. more generally applied as “behaviour,” irrespective of position) Dhp-a ii.36 Ex plural constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd2 237
    2. carāmi loke I move about (= I live) in the world Snp 25 Snp 455 agiho c. I lead a homeless life Snp 456 Snp 464 eko c. he keeps to himself Snp 35 Snp 956 Dhp 305 Dhp 329; sato c. he is mindful Snp 1054 Snp 1085 gocaraṁ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing ‣See below Ja iii.275 gavesanto c. to look for Ja i.61
    3. (b) With definition of a purpose piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaṁ to the village) Snp 386 bhikkhāya c. identical Ja iii.82
    4. With
    5. accusative (in etymol constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaṁ to wander about, to travel: Vin i.83 SN i.305 (applied: “walk ye a walk”) Snp 92 Dhp 326 Pv-a 14 (janapada-cārikaṁ) 160 (pabbata-c˚ wandering over the mountains); or with cāraṁ : piṇḍa-c.˚ carati to perform the begging-round Snp 414 or with caritaṁ : duccaritaṁ c. to lead a bad life Snp 665 ‣See carita. Also with
    6. accusative of similar meaning, as esanaṁ c. to beg Thag 1, 123 vadhaṁ c. to kill Thag 1, 138 dukkhaṁ c. to undergo pain SN i.210 (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraṁ c. to pasture ‣See gocara). Ap
    7. plural to cows caranti gāvo Snp 20 Ja iii.479 or to the bhikkhu Pv i.1010 (bh. caramāno = bhikkhāya c. Pv-a 51) Snp 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time)
    8. Applied meaning: (a) absolute to behave, conduct oneself Snp 1080 Ja vi.114 Mil 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality)
    9. (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaṁ c to lead a life of purity Vin i.17 Snp 289 Snp 566 Snp 1128 dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness Ja i.152 sucaritaṁ c. to act rightly, duccaritaṁ c. to act perversely SN i.94 Dhp 231
    Vedic carati, *qṷel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula) = Latin colo (incolo); (also goat-herd & cowherd = gocara) also Pali cakka, q.v. A doublet of car is cal ‣See calati Dhtp 243 explainedcar by “gati-bhakkhanesu”
    Carahi
    adverb
    1. then, therefore now, especially after interrogative pronoun : ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Snp 990 kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Snp 999 kiñ c. AN v.194

      • Vin i.36 Vin ii.292 Snp 988 Ja iii.312 Mil 25 DN-a i.289
      Sanskrit tarhi; with change t → c due to analogy with ˚ci (˚cid) in combination with interrogative
    Carāpeti
    1. to cause to move, to make go Ja i.267 (bheriṁ c. to have the drum beaten) Pv-a 75 (do.) Dhp-a i.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti Ja v.510 (bheriṁ)
    causative 11. of carati
    Carita
    1. adjective going, moving, being like, behaving (—˚) Ja vi.313 Mil 92 (rāgac˚ = ratta); Vism 105, 114 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ etc.)
    2. neuter action, behaviour, living Dhp 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Ps i.124 Mil 178 ‣See also carati.1b, 2b. especially frequently with su˚ and duc˚: good, right proper or
    3. neuter good action, right conduct & the opposite; e.g. sucarita Dhp 168 Dhp 231 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 120 duccarita AN i.146 AN ii.85 AN ii.141 AN iii.267 AN iii.352 DN iii.111 214 Dhp 169 Snp 665 Pv i.94 (˚ṁ caritvā), etc ‣See also kāya˚ vacī˚ mano˚ under kāya
    past participle of cāreti ‣See cara & carati
    Caritaka
    neuter conduct (= carita2) Thag 1, 36
    Caritar
    1. walking, performing (c. accusative ) MN i.77
    2. n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita
    Carima
    adjective
    1. subsequent, last (opposite pubba) Thag 1, 202 Iti 18 Ja v.120
    • acarima not later (apubba ac˚ simultaneously) DN i.185 MN iii.65 Pug. 13
    1. ˚bhava the last rebirth (in Saṁsāra, with reference to Arahantship) Thag-a 260 cp. caramabhavika in Divy (frequently & next
    Vedic carama
    Carimaka
    adjective last (= carima) MN i.426 Nd2 569b (˚viññāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291.
    Cariya
    neuter & cariyā
    • feminine

      1. (mostly—˚) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Ps i.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Ps ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd; 2 237b. Very frequently in dhamma & brahma˚, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity-eka˚ living alone Snp 820 unchā˚ begging Ja ii.272 iii.37; bhikkhā˚ a life of begging Snp 700 nagga˚ nakedness Dhp 141
      • ‣ See also carati.2b. In compounds. cariyā˚
      1. ˚piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka-nikāya -manussa a spy, an outpost Ja iii.361 (variant reading cārika˚)
      from; car, carati
    Cala
    adjective
    1. moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient SN iv.68 (dhammā calā c’ eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.) Ja ii.299 Ja iii.381 Ja v.345 Mil 93 Mil 418 Sdhp 430 Sdhp 494
    2. ˚acala steadfast, immovable SN i.232 Ja i.71 (ṭṭhāna) Vv 514 (˚ṭṭhāna = epithet of Nibbāna) acalaṁ sukhaṁ (= Nibbāna) Thag 2, 350 cp. niccala motionless Dhp-a iii.38

    -ācala intens. reduplicated

    1. moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady Ja iv.494 Ja iv.498 (= cañcala) Mil 92 (cp. Divy 180 Divy 281)
    2. ˚kkaku having a quivering hump Ja iii.380 iv.330 (= calamānakakudha or calakakudha)
    ‣See calati
    Calaka1
    1. masculine a camp marshal, adjutant DN i.51≈(in list of various occupations) AN iv.107f.
    Calaka2
    neuter
    1. a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115 iv.266 (= vighāsa) Vv-a 222 (˚aṭṭhikāni meat-remnants & bones)
    perhaps from carv to chew; but Sanskrit carvana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of Pali calaka. cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa
    Calati
    1. to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver SN i.107 Snp 752 Ja i.303 (kileso cali) iii.188 (macchā c.) Mil 260
    • ppr.
    • medium calamāna Ja iv.331
    • Especially frequent in expression kammaja-vātā caliṁsu the labour-pains began to stir Ja i.52 Ja vi.485
    • past participle calita (q.v.)
    • causative caleti to shake SN i.109
    Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati
    Calana
    adjective & neuter shaking, trembling, vibrating; excitement Ja iii.188 Dhs-a 72
    • feminine calanī (quick, + langhī a kind of antelope Ja vi.537

    Calita
    adjective
    1. wavering, unsteady Mil 93 Mil 251 Vism 113 Vv-a 177 neuter Snp p. 146
    2. past participle of calati
    Cavati
    1. to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, especially to passive from one state of existence into another DN i.14 (sañsaranti c˚ upapajjanti, cp. DN-a i.105); Kh viii.4 (= KhA 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya-vasena aññaṁ thānaṁ gacchati) Iti 99 Nd2 2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne) Iti 77 (devo deva-kāyā c. “the god falls from the assembly of gods”) Snp 1073 for bhavetha (= Nd2 238;) Pv-a 10 Caus cāveti: infinitive cāvetuṁ SN i.128f. 134 (˚kāma.)-pp cuta (q.v.) ‣See also cuti
    2. Vedic cyavate from cyu = Latin cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gothic haitan = Old High German heizan
    Cavana
    neuter
    1. shifting, moving, passing away, only in ˚dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease DN i.18 DN i.19 DN iii.31 DN iii.33 MN i.326 Iti 76 Ja iv.484 Ja vi.482 (˚dhammatā)
    from cavati
    Cavanatā
    1. (f) state of shifting, removal SN ii.3≈(cuti +) MN i.49 (identical)
    Cāga
    1. (a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin i.10 SN iii.13 SN iii.26 SN iii.158 MN i.486 AN i.299 More frequently as (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous munificent adjective : sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati “he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity” AN iii.34 In frequently combinations e.g. sacca dama dhiti c. Snp 188 = SN i.215 sacca dama c. khanti Snp 189 SN i.215 mutta˚
    2. adjective liberal, munificent, SN v.351 = 392 ˚paribhāvita citta “a heart bent on giving” SN v.309 In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & ‣See ˚dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality wisdom) SN i.232 AN i.210 AN iii.80 = SN iv.250 MN iii.99 DN iii.164 DN iii.165 cp. AN i.152 = iii.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) SN v.395 AN ii.62 (sama˚); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga Ja ii.112 (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati mati Ja ii.327 cp. śīla-śruta-tyāga Itm 311

      • Pv-a 30 Pv-a 120; Sdhp 214 Sdhp 323 ‣See also anussati & anussarati
      1. ˚ādhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā˚, sacca˚, c˚., upasama˚ DN iii.229
      • ˚ānussati generosity AN i.30 AN v.331 DN iii.250 DN iii.280 Vism 197
      • ˚kathā talk about munificence AN iii.181
      • ˚dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c. paññā DN iii.163 DN iii.251 AN iv.5 Vv-a 113 as one of 5 ‣See above AN iii.53
      • ˚sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence AN i.62 AN ii.66 AN iii.53 AN iv.221 etc
      from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. cp. Sanskrit tyāga
    Cāgavant
    adjective generous AN iii.183 AN iv.217 AN iv.220 Pug 24
    Cāgin
    adjective giving up, sacrificing, resigning Snp 719 (kāma˚).
    Cāṭi
    feminine
    1. a jar, vessel, pot Ja i.199 302 (pānīya˚); iii.277 (madhu˚ honey jar) Dhp-a i.394 (tela oil tank) Vv-a 76 (sālibhatta˚ holding a meal of rice). 2. a measure of capacity Ja ii.404 Ja iv.343
    2. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin i.153
      1. ˚pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush Ja v.372 Ja v.385
      • ˚pāla
      • neuter an earthenware shield (? Ja v.373 (= kīṭa)
      cp. Hindī cāṭā
    Cāṭu
    1. pleasant, polite in ˚kammatā politeness, flattery Mil 370 (cp. Sanskrit cāṭukāra); cāṭu-kamyatā Vb 246 Vism 17, 23, 27; Kp-a 236
    cp. cāru
    Cātur˚
    ; (and cātu˚)
    1. consisting of four. Only in compounds. viz
    1. ˚(r)anta adjective “of four ends,” i.e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the com
    2. passive all-encircling, Ep of the earth: Ja ii.343 (paṭhavī); iv.309 (mahī)-(n-m. one who rules over the 4 points; i.e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) DN i.88 (cp. DN-a i.249); ii.16 Snp 552 ‣See also Sp. Av SN ii.111 note 2
    3. ˚kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients Vv-a 308
    4. ˚(d)dasī
    5. feminine to catuddasa fourteen
      1. the 14th day of the lunar half month AN i.144 Pv-a 55 Vv-a 71 99, 129. With pancadasī aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Snp 402 Vv 155˚dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin iv.315
      • ˚(d)disa
      • adjective belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, applied to a man of humanitarian mind Snp 42 (“showing universal love,” ‣See Nd2 239); cp. RV x.136. especially applied to the bhikkhu-sangha “the universal congregation of bhikkhus” Vin i.305 Vin ii.147 DN i.145 Ja i.93 Pv ii.28; iii.214 (explained Pv-a 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata-bhikkhu-sangha). cp. Avs i.266 ii.109
      • ˚(d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Thag 2, 486 cp. Mvu i.108 114
      • ˚(d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin i.290 cp. Ja iv.314 & Avs i.258 -(b)bedā (
      • plural ) the four Vedas Mil 3
      • ˚māsin of 4 months
      • feminine ˚inī Vin i.155 DN i.47 MN iii.79 DN-a i.139 cp. komudī -(m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad DN i.102 DN i.194 = 243 MN i.124 MN iii.91 cp. catu˚ -(m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) DN i.34 DN i.55 DN i.186 DN i.195 SN ii.94f. Mil 379 cp. Avs ii.191 & Sanskrit cāṭurbhautika
      • ˚(m)mahārājikā (
      • plural (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin i.12 Vin iii.18 DN i.215 Nd2 307 (under devā) Ja ii.311 (deva-loka)
      • ˚yāma (saṁvara) fourfold restraint ‣See yāma DN i.57 DN i.58 (cp DN-a i.167); iii.48 sq. SN i.66 MN i.377 Vism 410 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.75 n1
      ‣See catur
    Cāturiya
    neuter
    1. skill, cleverness, shrewdness Ja iii.267 Ja vi.410 Thag-a, 227 Vb 551 Vism 104 Dāvs v.30
    cp. catura + iya
    Cāpa
    masculine neuter
    1. a bow MN i.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa) Dhp 156 (˚âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp. Dhp-a iii.132), 320 (ablative cāpāto metri causa) Ja iv.272 v.400 Mil 105 (daḷha˚), 352
    1. ˚koṭi the end of a bow Vv-a 261 nāḷi feminine a bow-case Ja ii.88
    2. ˚lasuṇa
    3. neuter a kind of garlic Vin iv.259
    4. Sanskrit cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering
    Cāpalla
    neuter
    1. fickleness DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286). Also as cāpalya MN i.470 Vb 351 Vism 106
    Derived from capala, Sanskrit cāpalya
    Cāmara
    neuter
    1. a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Snp 688 Vv 643 Ja vi.510 Vv-a 271 276. Cpd. cāmarī-gāhaka Ja vi.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk
    from camara
    Cāmikara
    neuter.
    1. gold Vv-a 12 13, 166
    Deriv. unknown. Sanskrit cāmīkara
    Cāvati
    1. to honour, only in compound -apacāyati (q.v.) The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā
    from ci
    Cāra
    motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Mil 162 (+ vihāra) Dhs 8 = 85 (= vicāra) Dhs-a 167 Usually—˚ (n. adjective): kāma˚ going at will Ja iv.261 pamāda˚ a slothful life Ja i.9 piṇḍa˚ alms-begging Snp 414 Snp 708 sabbaratti wandering all night SN i.201 samavattha˚ AN iii.257 ‣See also carati ib.
    1. ˚vihāra doing & behaving, i.e. good conduct Ja ii.232 Dpvs. vi.38; cp. Mil 162 (above)
    from car carati to move about
    Cāraka
    1. (cārika) adjective wandering about, living, going, behaving, always—˚, like ākāsa˚, niketa˚, pure˚ ‣See pubbangama, vana˚, feminine cārikā journey, wandering especially as cārikaṁ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage ‣See carati ib Vin i.83 Ja i.82 Ja ii.286 Dhp 326 Mil 14 Mil 22 ˚ñ pakkamati to set out wandering Ja i.87 Mil 16 SN i.199 MN i.117 AN iii.257 DN-a i.239f. (in detail on two cārikā) Vv-a 165 EnA 295 (unchā˚).

    Cāraṇa
    adjective = cāraka Snp 162 (saṁsuddha˚).
    Cāraṇika
    1. v.v. vāraṇika Thag i.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sanskrit cāraṇa & Mrs. Rhys Davids; Pss of the Brethren, 419
    Cāritta
    neuter
    1. practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct Ja i.90 Ja i.367 Ja ii.277 (loka˚); v.285 (vanka˚) Mil 133 Vv-a 31
    • cārittaṁ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c.
    • locative MN i.470 SN ii.270 (kulesu) MN i.287 = iii.40 (kāmesu) Ja iii.46 (rakkhita-gopitesu)
    1. ˚vāritta manner of acting & avoiding Ja iii.195 cp. Thag 1. 591; Vism 10 ‣See on their mutual relation Vism 11
    2. ˚sīla code of morality Vv-a 37
    From car
    Cārin
    1. (only—˚) adjective walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) literally asanga˚ SN i.199 akāla˚ Snp 386 ambu˚ Snp 62 vihangapatha˚ Sdhp 241; sapadāna˚ MN i.30 Snp 65 pariyanta˚ Snp 904 (b) figuratively anudhamma˚ Snp 69 āgu˚ AN ii.240 AN iii.163 dhamma˚ Mil 19 brahma˚ Snp 695 manāpa˚ Vv 314 yata˚ Snp 971 sama˚ Mil 19 ‣See all s.v. & cp. caṭu.

    Cāru
    adjective
    1. charming, desirable pleasant, beautiful Ja vi.481 Mil 201 Sdhp 428 Sdhp 512 Vv-a 36 (= vaggu), sucāru SN i.181 Pv ii.1212 (= suṭṭhumanorama)
    1. ˚dassana lovely to behold Snp 548 Ja vi.449 (ex plural on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaṁ = suvaṇṇadassana) vi.579;
    2. feminine Pv iii.614
    3. Vedic cāru & cāyu to; *qe-*qā, as in kāma, Latin carus, etc ‣See under kāma
    Cāreti
    1. to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one’s senses (cp. German “augenweide”) Pv-a 58 khantiṁ c to feed meekness DN-a i.277 olambakaṁ cārento drooping Ja i.174 passive ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round Ja iv.2 (not vā˚)-
    2. past participle carita

      • cp. vi˚
      denominative from cara; cp. carati
    Cāla
    1. shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi˚; earthquake
    From calati
    Cālanī
    feminine
    1. a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in cuṇṇa˚ & dussa˚, cp. saṇha)
    to cālana of calaka2
    Cāleti
    1. to move, to shake Ja v.40 to scatter Ja i.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin i.202
    causative of calati
    Cāvanā
    feminine moving, shifting, disappearance Vin iii.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (identical).
    Cāveti
    1. to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract AN iv.343 (samādhimhā) Ja i.60 (inf cāvetu-kāma); ii.329 (jhānā, ablative). aorist acāvayi (prohib.) Snp 442 (ṭhānā)
    2. causative of cavati
    Ci
    (cid in Sandhi)
    1. indefinite interr particle (always—˚), in koci (= Sanskrit kaścid) whoever kiñci (kincid-eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q.v.) ‣See also ca, cana, ce
    Vedic cid nominative neuter to interrogative base *qṷi (as in Latin quis, Gothic hvi-leiks ‣See ki˚, cp. ka˚, ku˚), = Latin quid & quid(d)em, Avestan ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taṁ, yaṁ, kiṁ)
    Cikicchati
    1. usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend aim at. past participle cikicchita Kp-a 188 (in explanation of vicikicchita q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit cikitsati, Desidentical of cit, cinteti. cp. vicikicchā
    Cikkhati
    (cikkhanā, etc.)
    1. to tell, to announce ‣See ā˚ & paṭisaṁ˚
    frequently of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh = vacane
    Cikkhalla
    neuter
    1. mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka˚. Vin i.253 Vin ii.120 159, 291: iii.41 AN iii.394 Ja i.196 Mil 286 Mil 311 Mil 397 Pv-a 102 Pv-a 189 Pv-a 215. adjective Vin ii.221 Vin iv.312 Pv iv.116 Mil 286
    2. Sanskrit cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery + ya
    Cikkhallavant
    adjective muddy Pv-a 225
    Cikkhassati
    1. to wish to drop, to ooze out Mil 152 (˚ssanto) ‣See Kern. Toevoegselen ii.139 & Morris,; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 87
    Desidentical of kṣar = Sanskrit cikṣariṣati
    Ciṅgulaka
    1. (& ˚ika) masculine neuter
    2. a kind of plant Snp 239 (= kaṇavīra-pupphasaṇṭhāna-sīsa Snp-a 283)
    3. a toy windmill, made of palm-leaves, etc. (DN-a; i.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṁ vātappahārena paribbhamana-cakkaṁ Vin ii.10 DN i.6 MN i.266 AN v.203 Mil 229
    Ciṅgulāyati
    1. to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill AN i.112
    denominative from cingula
    Cicciṭāyati
    1. to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combined with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin i.225 SN i.169 Snp p. 15 Pug 36 Mil 258f.
    onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati
    Cicciṭāyana
    neuter fizzing Vism 408 (˚sadda).
    Ciñcā
    feminine
    1. the tamarind tree Ja v.38 (˚vana) Snp-a 78 Citi-citi
    Sanskrit ciñcā & tintiḍikā
    Ciṭi-ciṭi
    1. fizz DN-a i.137
    reduplicated interj.
    Ciṭiciṭāyati
    1. ‣See cicciṭāyati Vin i.225 cp. Divy 606
    Ciṇṇa
    1. travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised Ja iii.541 Mil 360-su˚ well performed, accomplished SN i.42 = 214 = Sn 181; Pv iii.56
    • cp. ā˚, pari˚, vi˚
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go Ja ii.159
    • ˚mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin iv.242
    • ˚vasin one who has reached mastership in (c.
    • locative ) Thag-a 74 Vism 154, 158, 164, 169, 331 sq., 376; derivation -vāsibhāva Dhs-a 167 (read vasī˚)
    past participle of carati
    Ciṇṇatta
    neuter
    1. custom, habit Mil 57 Mil 105
    Derived from ciṇṇa
    Cita
    heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā DN ii.178 cp. Vin ii.123
    1. ˚antaraṁsa “one whose shoulder-hole is heaped up, one who has the shoulders well filled out (epithet of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.164 Citaka & Citaka
    past participle of cināti
    Citaka
    Citakā
    feminine
    1. -1. a heap, a pile, especially a funeral pile; a tumulus DN ii.163
    • cp ii.1014. Ja i.255 Ja v.488 Ja vi.559 Ja vi.576 DN-a i.6 Dhp-a i.69 ii.240 Vv-a 234 Pv-a 39
    • adjective inlaid: suvaṇṇa˚ with gold Ja vi.218 (= ˚khacita)
    • from ci, cināti to heap up
    Citi
    feminine
    1. a heap, made of bricks Ja vi.204 (city-avayata-piṭṭhikā) ‣See also cetiya
    From ci, cināti, to heap up
    Cittaka
    neuter
    1. a sectarian mark on the forehead in ˚dhara-kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Mil 364 Mil 408 cp. Miln translation ii.352
    to citta1
    Cittaka2
    1. ‣See acittaka
    Citta1 & Citra;
    adjective
    1. variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), Ja iv.30 (geṇḍuka) Dhp 171 (rājaratha) Vv 479 Pv ii.112 (aneka˚); iv.313 (pūvā = madhurā Pv-a 251). Citta neuter painting Thag 1, 674

      • Sn 50 (kāmā = Nd2 240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā) Ja v.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 vi.218
      • sucitta gaily coloured or dressed SN i.226 (b) Dhp 151 (rājaratha) Pv i.109 (vimāna)
      1. ˚akkhara adjective with beautiful vowels SN ii.267 (Cp ˚vyañjana)
      2. ˚attharaka a variegated carpet DN-a i.256
      3. ˚āgāra a painted house, i.e. furnished with pictures a picture gallery Vin iv.298
      4. ˚upāhana a gaily coloured sandal DN i.7
      5. ˚kata adorned, dressed up MN ii.64 Dhp 147 = Th 1, 769 Dhp-a iii.109 (= vicitta)
      6. ˚katha
      7. adjective = next SN i.199 (+ bahussuta)
      8. ˚kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq combined with bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e. g paṇḍita … medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna SN iv.375 samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426

        • AN iii.58 Ja i.148 Mil 1 Mil 21
        • ˚kathika = ˚kathin AN i.24 Thag 2, 449 (+ bahussuta), explained at Thag-a 281 by cittadhammakatha -kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting Ja iv.408 vi.333 Mil 278 Vism 306 Pv-a 147 Dhs-a 334
        • masculine a painter Ja vi.481
        • ˚kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) SN ii.101 = iii.152 Thag 2, 256 Ja vi.333
        • ˚chatta at Ja vi.540 to be changed into ˚patta
        • ˚patta
        • adjective having variegated wings Ja vi.540 Ja vi.590
        • ˚pāṭalī
        • feminine name of a plant (the “pied” trumpet-flower) in the world of Asuras Ja i.202 Dhp-a i.280
        • ˚pekhuna having coloured wings Ja i.207 Ja vi.539
        • ˚bimba (-mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image Ja v.452 (cp cittakata)
        • ˚miga the spotted antelope Ja vi.538
        • ˚rūpa
        • neuter a wonder, something wonderful Ja vi.512 as
        • adverb ˚ṁ (to citta2?) easily Vin ii.78 = iii.161; iv.177 232
        • ˚latā the plant Rubia Munjista Ja vi.278 ˚vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra’s gardens Sanskrit caitraratha
        1. Ja i.52 Ja i.104 Ja ii.188 vi.590, etc
        2. ˚vitāna a bright canopy Dhp-a iv.14
        • ˚vyañjana
        • adjective with beautiful consonants (cp. ˚akkhara) SN ii.267 = AN i.73 = iii.107 -sāṇī variegated cloth Ja ii.290 Dhp-a iv.14
        • ˚sālā a painted room or picture gallery DN-a i.253
        • ˚sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Snp 304 Ja iv.395 Ja vi.218
        to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sanskrit citra, Sanskrit Pali ketu, Avestan ciprō, Latin caelum Anglo-Saxon hador, Old High German heitar ‣See also citta2
    Citta2
    1. neuter
    1. I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i.e. the centre & focus of man’s emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i.e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted ‣See kamma II. introduction, for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr , although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning ‣See § III., viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, MN i.120 MN i.242 (cp attanā coday’ attānaṁ Dhp 379 feminine ); cetasā cittaṁ samannesati SN i.194 (cp. cetasā cittaṁ samannesati SN i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two ‣See § III.

      • The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or “thought” more than its mental & rational side (for which ‣See manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term “thought” in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (= heart) & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the
      • plural (= thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general.; On the whole subject ‣See Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddh. Psych Eth. introduction & Bud. Psy. ch. II
      1. II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enum; d for grammatical purposes)
      • The paradigma is (numbers denoting %, not including compounds.): Nom cittaṁ; genitive (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr cetasā (42) & cittena (3);
      • locative citte (2) & cittamhi (2)-Nom.; cittaṁ ‣See below. genitive cittassa only (of older passages) in c˚ upakkileso SN iii.232 SN v.92 AN i.207 c˚ damatho Dhp 35 & c˚ vasena MN i.214 MN iii.156 instrumental cittena only in SN i. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39 upakkiliṭṭha˚ p. 179; asallīnena c˚ p. 159.
      • locative citte only as
      • locative absolute in samāhite citte ‣See below & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti AN i.162
      • cittamhi only SN i.129 & cittasmiṁ only SN i.132
      • plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṁsu “they purified their hearts from intoxications Vin i.35 SN iii.132 SN iv.20 Snp p. 149; besides this in scholastic works = thoughts, e.g. Vb 403 (satta cittāni)
      1. III. Citta & cetas; in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are compounds. having both citta˚ ceto˚ in identical meanings ‣See e.g. citta-samādhi ceto˚, others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto-khila & ceto-vimutti (but: vimutta-citta), whereas citta is restricted to comb; n with upakkilesa, etc. The following sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaṁ cittaṁ bhāveti “with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought” SN v.263 = DN iii.223 = AN iv.86 cetasā cittaṁ samannesati vippamuttaṁ “with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind” SN i.194 vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaṁ parisodheti DN iii.49 anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaṁ pahātuṁ. AN v.149 cetaso vūpasamo following by vūpasanta-citto AN i.4 samāhite citte following by ceto-samādhi DN i.13≈ cittaṁ paduṭṭhaṁ following by ceto-padosa AN i.8 cp. It. 12 13; cetaso tato cittaṁ nivāraye “a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this” SN iv.195
      1. IV. Citta in itṡ relation to other terms referring to mental processes
      1. 1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man’s personality: hadayaṁ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaṁ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) SN i.126 cittaṁ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi identical SN i.207 SN i.214; Snp p. 32; kāmarāgena cittaṁ me pariḍayhati SN i.188 → nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ Mil 318 (“my heart is on fire”); cp. abhinibbutatto Snp 343 = apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347 cittaṁ adhiṭṭhahati to set one’s heart on, to wish Dhp-a i.327
      1. 2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta → kāya, e.g. kilanta˚ weary in body mind DN i.20 = iii.32; ātura˚ SN iii.2–⁠5; nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137 ṭhita˚ steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta SN v.74 ˚passaddhi quiet of body & soul SN v.66 The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha or the cetasikas: citta-kāya-passaddhi-lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma-kāya (Dhs-a 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha DN iii.241 DN iii.288
      • (b) intellectual status: citta → manas & viññāṇa (mind → thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (;) ayaṁ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., DN i.21 () tatr’ assutavā puthujjano n’ âlaṁ nibbindituṁ, etc. SN ii.94 () taṁ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña-d-eva uppajjati aññaṁ nirujjhati SN ii.95 cp. Thag-a. 1 on 125
      • Under ādesanā-pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṁ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i.e. habit of thinking) DN i.213 = iii.103 AN i.170
      • niccaṁ idaṁ c. niccaṁ idaṁ mano SN i.53 cittena niyyati loko “by thoughts the world is led” SN i.39 = AN ii.177 (cp KS 55); apatiṭṭhita-citto ādīna-manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso SN v.74 vyāpanna-citto paduṭṭha-manasankappo SN iii.93 paduṭṭha-citto = paduṭṭha-manaso Pv-a 34 Pv-a 43
      1. 3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active = intention contrasted or compared with: () will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaṁsā DN iii.77 SN v.268 Vb 288
      • () action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṁ hoti “when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well” AN i.262 cittaṁ appamāṇaṁ … yaṁ kiñci pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ, etc. AN v.299
      • Especially in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā ‣See under kāya III.) SN ii.231 SN ii.271 = iv.112. Similarly taṁ vācaṁ appahāya (cittaṁ˚, diṭṭhiṁ˚) SN iv.319 = DN iii.13 15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta-sampatti, citta˚, payoga˚ (the recipient of the gift, the good-will, the means) Vv-a 30 32
      • (b); passive = mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā DN iii.219 SN iv.111 AN iii.106 cp. MN i.237 Nett 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas DN ii.95 DN ii.100 DN ii.299f. SN v.114 etc ‣See kāya compounds.. As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin v.181 Ps ii.243 Vb 325 cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi ‣See sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika AN i.269
      • citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e.g. SN i.13 = 165 DN iii.269 Thag i.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi AN ii.52 Ps ii.80 Vb 376
      1. 4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaṁ bhūmikavatthu-ārammaṇa-kiriyādi-cittatāya pan’ etaṁ cittan ti vuttaṁ Dhp-a i.228 cittan ti mano mānasaṁ Kp-a 153; cittaṁ manoviññāṇaṁ ti cittassa etaṁ vevacanaṁ Nett 54. yaṁ cittaṁ mano mānasaṁ hadayaṁ paṇḍaraṁ, etc. Dhs 6 = 111 (same for definition of manindriya, under § 17 ‣See Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism 376
      1. V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc ‣See I.
      1. (a) heart as general status of sensory-emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaṁsu cittaṁ attano ujukaṁ akaṁsu sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā SN i.26 ujugato-citto ariyasāvako AN iii.285 ṭhita c SN i.159AN iii.377 = iv.404 (+ ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Snp 268 na vikampate SN iv.71 opposite capalaṁ c. Dhp 33
      • khitta˚ a heart unbalanced AN ii.52 (+ visaññin); opposite: avikkhitta˚. AN v.149 Pv-a 26 c. rakkhitaṁ mahato atthāya saṁvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit AN i.7 similarly: c. dantaṁ, guttaṁ, saṁvutaṁ ibid

        • cittaṁ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaṁ guttaṁ sukhāvahaṁ Dhp 36 cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutassa viharato cittaṁ vyāsiñcati … rūpesu SN iv.78 ye cittaṁ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā “from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart” Dhp 37 pāpā cittaṁ nivāraye Dhp 116 bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati SN ii.198 (cp. Schiller: “Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz”)
        1. (b) Contact with kāma & rāga; : a lustful, worldly craving heart
        • () kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaṁ Snp 50 SN iv.210 kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi SN i.188 kāme nâpekkhate cittaṁ Snp 435 mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ Dhp 371 manussakehi kāmehi cittaṁ vuṭṭhapetvā SN v.409
        • na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaṁ namati AN iv.392 SN i.92 kāmāsavā pi cittaṁ vimuccati AN ii.211 etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) DN iii.239 kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto SN iii.93 kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) Pv-a 107-() rāgā: rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁseti (defilement harasses his heart) SN i.185 SN ii.231 = 271 AN ii.126 iii.393; rāga-pariyuṭṭhitaṁ c. hoti AN iii.285 sārattacitto SN iv.73 viratta˚ SN iv.74 Snp 235 Pv-a 168 () various: patibaddha-c. (fettered in the bonds of ˚) AN iv.60 Snp 37 Snp 65 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 151, etc
        • pariyādinna˚ (grasping, greedy), usually combined with lābhena abhibhūta: SN ii.226 SN ii.228 SN iv.125 AN iv.160 DN iii.249-upakkiliṭṭha˚ (etc.) (defiled) SN i.179 SN iii.151 SN iii.232f.v.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso) AN i.207 v.93 sq
        • otiṇṇa˚ fallen in love AN iii.67 Snp-a 322
        1. (c) AN heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled mastered, constrained
        • () c. pasīdati (pasanna—˚c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) SN i.98 AN i.207 AN iii.248 Snp 434 pasanna˚: AN iv.209 AN iv.213 Snp 316 Snp 403 Snp 690 cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati SN iii.133 AN iii.245 also vippasanna˚: SN v.144 Snp 506 cp. vippasannena cetasā Pv i.1010
        • () c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) SN ii.273 SN iv.263 AN ii.94 AN ii.157
        • () c samādhiyati (samāhita-c˚, cp. ceto-samadhi quiescence DN i.13 = iii.30, 108 SN i.120 SN i.129 SN i.188 SN iv.78 = 351 AN i.164 AN ii.211 AN iii.17 AN iii.280 AN iv.177 Vb 227 Vism 376 etc
        • () supatiṭṭhita -c˚ always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu-s-c˚: SN iii.93 SN v.154 SN v.301 DN iii.101 AN v.195-() susaṇṭhita c. SN v.74
        • vasībhūta c. SN i.132 AN i.165
        • danta c. Dhp 35
        • (d) “with purpose of heart,” a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring etc
        • () cittaṁ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat appossukkatāya SN i.137); nekkhamma-ninna SN iii.233 viveka˚ DN iii.283 AN iv.233 AN v.175
        • () cittaṁ padahati (pa + dhā :) in phrase chandaṁ janeti vāyamati viriyaṁ ārabbhati c˚ ṁ paggaṇhāti padahati DN iii.221 AN ii.15 = iv.462 SN v.269 Nd2 97; Nett 18 In the same ṣense pa-ni-dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto-paṇidhi) SN i.133 (tattha iv.309 (dup˚); v.157 Dhp 42 = Ud 39 Dhp 43 (sammā˚)
        1. (e) An evil heart (“out of heart proceed evil thoughts Mk. 7, 21)-() paduṭṭha -c˚ (cp. ceto-padosa) DN i.20 iii.32 AN i.8 (opposite pasanna-c˚); iv.92 Iti 12 13; Pv AN 33, 43, etc
        • () vyāpanna -c˚: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṁ hoti AN i.262 O
        • past participleSN iv.322 AN ii.220
        • () samoha -c˚ (+ sarāga, etc. DN i.79 DN ii.299 DN iii.281 Vism 410, & passim
        1. (f) “blessed are the pure in heart,” a pure, clean, purified (cp. German geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. () mutta -c˚, vimutta - c˚, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho ceto-vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciṁsu SN iii.132 etc.; vi˚ Snp p. 149
        • vimutta SN i.28 (+ subhāvita), 29, 46 = 52; iii.45 (+ viratta), 90 iv.236 (rāgā) Snp 23 (+ sudanta) Nd2 587
        • suvimutta: SN i.126 SN i.141 SN i.233 SN iv.164 AN iii.245 AN v.29 Snp 975 (+ satimā)
        • () cittaṁ parisodheti MN i.347 AN ii.211 SN iv.104
        • () alīna c. (unstained) SN i.159 AN v.149 Snp 68 Snp 717Nd2 97 (cp. cetaso līnatta)
        1. (g) good-will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness love (“love the Lord with all your heart”)-() metta -c˚ usually in phrase mettacittaṁ bhāveti “to nourish the heart with loving thought,” to produce good-will DN i.167 SN ii.264 AN i.10 AN v.81 Snp 507 (cp mettā-sahagatena cetasā)
        • () bhāvita -c˚ “keep thy heart with all diligence” (Prov.4, 23) SN i.188 (+ susamāhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddhā-paribhāvita) AN i.6 (+ bahulīkata, etc.) Snp 134 (= SN i.188) Dhp 89 = SN v.29 Pv-a 139
        1. (h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless santa upasanta˚;) D.iii.49 SN i.141 Snp 746
        1. (i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth an open & receptive mind:; kalla˚, mudu˚, udagga˚ pasanna˚ AN iv.186
        • kalla˚ Pv-a 38 (sanctified); lahu SN i.201
        • udagga˚ Snp 689 Snp 1028 SN i.190 (+ mudita) mudu˚ Pv-a 54

          1. (k) Various phrases. Abbhuta-cittajātā “while wonder filled their hearts” SN i.178 evaṁcitto “in this state of mind” SN ii.199 Snp 985 cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) SN i.178 theyya-citto intending to steal Vin iii.58 āraddha-citto of determined mind MN i.414 SN ii.21 cp. 107; Snp p. 102; aññācittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti SN ii.267 nānā˚ of varying mind Ja i.295 nihīnacitto low-minded Pv-a 107 nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137 āhata˚ AN iv.460 = v.18; supahata˚ SN i.238 (cp. Mil 26); visankhāragata˚ Dhp 154 sampanna˚ Snp 164 vibbhanta˚ SN i.61 = AN i.70 = ii.30 = iii.391
          1. (2) thought: mā pāpakaṁ akusalaṁ cittaṁ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) SN v.418 na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) Pv-a 3 mama cittaṁ bhaveyya (I should think) Pv-a 40 For further instances ‣See Dhs & Vb Indexes & cp. compounds ‣See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425
          1. ˚ādhipati the influence of thought (adjective ˚pateyya Nett 16 Dhs 269 359 Dhs-a 213 Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our “thought” in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, note 2 -ānuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671 772 1522
          2. ˚ānupassanā the critique of heart, adjective ˚ânupassin DN ii.299 DN iii.221 DN iii.281 MN i.59 & passim (cp kāy˚)
          3. ˚āvila disturbance of mind Nd2 576 (˚karaṇa) -ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51 277, etc
          4. ˚uppāda the rise of a thought, i.e. intention, desire as theyya ˚ṁ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56 -M i.43; iii.45 Ja ii.374
          • ˚ekaggatā “one-pointedness of mind,” concentration Nett 15, 16 Vism 84, 137, 158 Dhp-a iii.425 Thag-a 75 cp. ekagga-citto AN iii.175
          • ˚kali a witch of a heart, a witch-like heart Thag 1, 356
          • ˚kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind Vv-a 330
          • ˚kilesa stain of h. Dhp 88 (Dhp-a ii.162 = pañca nīvaraṇā)
          • ˚kelisā pastime of the mind Thag 1, 1010
          • ˚kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189 = 193 (ummāda +) AN iii.219 (ummāda +) Dhp-a iii.70 (= ummāda) Pv-a 39 Dhp 138 cp. ˚vikkhepa
          • ˚cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i.e. mental state thought, mind DN i.213 Dhs 1022 (-dhammā, Mrs Rhys Davids: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense-impressions) 1282; Ps i.84 Mil 87 Vism 61, 84, 129, 337 -dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue-like heart Thag 1, 214
          • ˚pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind Iti 84 (dosa)
          • ˚pamaddin crushing the h. Thag 2, 357 (= Thag-a 243 variant reading pamāthin & pamādin; -pariyāya the ways (i.e. behaviour) of the h. AN v.160 (cp. ceto-paricca)
          • ˚passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya˚) SN v.66 Dhs 62
          • ˚bhāvanā cultivation of the h. MN iii.149
          • ˚mala stain of h. Pv-a 17
          • ˚mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62 277, 325 -rucita after the heart’s liking Ja i.207
          • ˚rūpaṁ according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222 Vin ii.78 iii.161; iv.177, 232
          • ˚lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62 323, 1283; Vism 465
          • ˚vikkhepa (cp. ˚kkhepa madness SN i.126 (+ ummāda Nett 27; Vism 34
          • ˚vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192 1515
          • ˚visaṁsaṭṭha detached from thought Dhs 1194 1517
          • ˚vūpasama allayment of one’s h. SN i.46
          • ˚saṅkilesa
          • adjective with impure heart (opposite c

            • vodāna) SN iii.151
            • ˚saññatti conviction Mil 256
            • ˚santāpa “heart-burn,” sorrow Pv-a 18 (= soka)
            • ˚samādhi (cp. ceto-samādhi concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self-possession SN iv.350 SN v.269 Vb 218
            • ˚samodhāna adjustment calming of thoughts Thag-a 45
            • ˚sampīḷana
            • adjective h. crushing (cp. ˚pamaddin & ˚pakopana; Nett 29 (domanassa)
            • ˚sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670 769, 1520
            • ˚hetuka
            • adjective caused by thought Dhs 667 767
            Sanskrit citta, originally past participle of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta → yuñjati, mutta → muñcati. On etymology from cit ‣See cinteti
    Citta2
    1. [cp. Sanskrit caitra, the first month of the year: MarchApril, originally name of the star Spica (in Virgo) ‣See English Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., past participle 134 sq., 171 sq. name of the month Chaitra Pv-a 135 cp. Citra-māsa Kp-a 192
    Cittaka(a) & Citraka(; b)
    1. 1. adjective (a) coloured Ja iv.464 - 2.
    2. masculine (b) the spotted antelope Ja vi.538
    3. neuter a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Mil 408 (˚dharakumma).
    4. feminine cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DN-a i.86 cittikā: vāna
      1. citra-uṇṇā-may attharaṇaṁ) Vin i.192 Vin ii.163 169 DN i.7 AN i.181
      read nāna˚
    Cittatara
    1. , compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. SN iii.151 sq
    • a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66 Expositor 88
    Cittatā
    .
    1. SA on SN iii.151f. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta)
    feminine abstract to citta1
    Cittatā
    1. “being of such a heart or mind,” state of mind, character SN iii.152 SN iv.142 (vimutta˚); v.158 (identical) AN v.145f. (upārambha˚) Vb 372 (identical) Vb 359 (amudu˚) Pv-a 13 (visuddhi˚ noble character); paṭibaddha˚ (in love with) Pv-a 145 Pv-a 147 Pv-a 270. In SN iii.152 l cittitā q.v
    feminine abstract to citta2
    Cittatta
    1. (n.) = cittatā SN v.158
    Citti
    feminine
    1. “giving thought or heart only in combination with kar : cittikaroti to honour, to esteem German cittikatvā MN iii.24 AN iii.172 Pv ii.955 (cittiṁ k. = pūjetvā Pv-a 135); Dīpavaṁsa i.2; -acittikatvā MN iii.22 AN iv.392 past participle cittikata thought (much) of Vin iv.6 (& a˚) Vb 2
    2. from cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti → muc, sitti → sic
    Cittikāra
    1. respect, consideration Vv-a 178 (garu˚), 242 Pv-a 26 Vb 371 (a˚); Vism 123 (cittī˚), 188
    ‣See citti
    Cittita
    1. painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with (—˚) SN iii.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten’ eva cittitaṁ for cintitaṁ. Thag 1, 736 2, 390 (su˚) Vv 367 402
    past participle of citteti, denominative from citta1
    Citra
    1. = citta3, the month Chaitra, Kp-a 192 (˚māsa)
    Cināti
    1. to heap up, to collect, to accumulate infinitive cinituṁ Vin ii.152 past participle cita (q.v.)
    2. passive cīyati Ja v.7
    3. causative cināpeti to construct, to build Ja vi.204 Mil 81

      • Note cināti at Ja ii.302 (to weave is to be corrected to vināti ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
      • Cp ā˚, pa˚, vi˚
      • Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa˚
      Sanskrit cinoti & cayati,; ci, to which also kāya, q.v ‣See also caya, cita
    Cintaka
    adjective
    1. one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara˚; the grammarian Pv-a 120 nīti˚; the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212 Divy 451, “overseer.”
    cp. cintin
    Cintana
    neuter = cintā Thag 1, 695 Mil 233
    Cintanaka
    adjective thoughtful, considerate Ja i.222
    Cintā
    1. “the act of thinking” (cp. citti), thought SN i.57 Pug 25 Dhs 16 20, 292; Sdhp 165 216
    • loka˚ thinking over the world, philosophy SN v.447 AN ii.80
    1. ˚kavi “thought-poetry,” i.e. original poetry ‣See kavi AN ii.230
    • ˚maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher’s stone Vv-a 32 name of a science Ja iii.504
    • ˚maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical DN iii.219 Ja iv.270 Vb 324 Nett 8, 50, 60 (˚mayin, of paññā); Vism 439 (identical)
    to cit, cinteti
    Cintita
    1. (a) adjective thought out, invented, devised SN i.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); iii.151 (caraṇaṁ nāma cittaṁ citten’ eva c.); Pv ii.613 (mantaṁ brahma˚, ex
    2. plural Pv-a 97 by kathitaṁ)

      • (b)
      • neuter a thought, intention, in duc˚ su˚; (bad & good) AN i.102 Thag-a 76
      • ˚matta as much a a thought, locative cintita-matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it Dhp-a i.326 (= cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329)
      past participle of cinteti, cp. also cintaka
    Cintin
    1. only—˚: thinking of, having one’s thoughts on AN i.102 (duccintita˚ & su˚) Snp 174 (ajjhatta˚; variant reading B. ˚saññin) 388 Ja iii.306 = iv.453 v.176 = v.478 Mil 92
    adjective to cintā
    Cinteti
    ceteti;
    1. -Forms: (a) cint : pres. cinteti pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Sn 834)- aorist cintesi, 3rd
    2. plural cintesuṁ (J i.149), acintayuṁ (Sn 258); -
    3. absolutive cintetvā (J i.279) & cintiya (Mhvs; vii.17, 32); -
    4. gerundive cinteyya & cintetabba;
    5. past participle cintita (q.v.) cp. also cintana, cintin

      • (b) cet : pres ceteti & cetayati (S; i.121), pot. cetaye (Pv ii.97 cinteyya Pv-a 116); ppr. cetayāna (J v.339); fut cetessati (Vin iii.19); -
      • aorist acetayi (Pv i.66 = cetesi Pv-a 34); -ger cecca (Vin iii.112 Vin iv.290); also cicca ‣See sañ˚.
      • gerundive cetabba (for *cetetabba only at Ja iv.157 variant reading ceteyya, ex
      • plural by cintetabba); -pp cetayita (q.v.) cp. also cetanā
      1. Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually explained by cint, whereas cint is never explained by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar formation
      1. Meaning: (a) (intransitive) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling) the consciousness SN iv.68 Its seat is frequently mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834 na pāpaṁ manasā pi cetaye Pv ii.97 Ja i.279 Pv-a 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaṁ c you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaṁ c. identical) Mhvs vii.18, 32 Mil 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba)
      • Prohibitive mā cintayi don't think about it, don't worry, don't be afraid, never mind Ja i.50 Ja i.292 Ja i.424 Ja iii.289 vi.176
      • plural mā cintayittha Ja i.457 Ja iv.414 Ja vi.344 Vism 426 Dhp-a i.12 Dhp-a iii.196 also mā cintesi Ja iii.535
      • (b) (with
      • accusative ) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out SN ii.65 maraṇaṁ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) SN i.121 acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni AN ii.80 cetabba-rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) Ja iv.157 (= cintetabba); loka-cintaṁ c SN v.447 ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin iii.113 mangalāni acintayuṁ Snp 258 diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834 kiṁ cintesi Ja i.221 sokavinayan'-upāyaṁ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief Pv-a 39
      • Especially with pāpaṁ & pāpakaṁ to intend evil, to have ill-will against (c. dative): mā pāpakaṁ akusalaṁ cittaṁ cinteyyātha SN v.418 na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv ii.97 (= cinteyya piheyya Pv-a 116); p. na cintetabba Pv-a 114 tassā p. acetayi Pv i.66 (= cetesi Pv-a 34); kiṁ amhākaṁ cintesi what do you intend against us? Ja i.211
      • (c (with dative) (restricted to ceteti) to set one’s heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a
      • future rebirth SN iv.201 vimokkhāya c to strive after emancipation SN iii.121 attavyābadhāya c. MN iii.23 = AN i.157 = SN iv.339 pabbajjāya c. Iti 75 rakkhāya me tvaṁ vihito … udāhu me cetayase vadhāya Ja iii.146-acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought AN ii.80 (cattāri ˚āni four reflections to be avoided) Vv-a 323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.)
      Sanskrit cetati to appear, perceive, & cintayati to think,; cit ‣See citta2 in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med base ( denominative ) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc & the analogous formations of; chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait ‣See citta1, with which further cp. caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he ‣Sees = he knows); = vidi, English view = thought German anschauung
    Cipiṭa
    adjective
    1. pressed flat, flattened Vv-a 222 To be read also at Ja vi.185 for vippita
    past participle to cip (?) ‣See next: cp. Sanskrit cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling
    Cippiyamāna
    1. crushed flat (Rhys Davids; cp. also Kern Toevoegselen) Mil 261
    ppr. passive of cip ‣See cipiṭa
    Cimilikā
    feminine ‣See cilimikā Vin ii.150 Vin iv.40 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.167; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 39.
    Cira
    adjective
    1. long (of time), usually in compounds. & as adverb Either; ciraṁ (
    2. accusative ) for a long time Snp 678 Snp 730 Snp 1029 Dhp 248 Kh vii.5 Ja ii.110 Ja iv.3 Pv ii.333 or cirena instrumental after a long time Vin iv.86 Dhs-a 239 or cirāya dative for long Dhp 342 cirassa genitive ‣See cirassaṁ

      • cirataraṁ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long AN iii.58 Pv ii.87. cir-â-ciraṁ continually Vin iv.261 Ja v.233
      • acira not long (ago) lately, newly: ˚arahattappatta SN i.196 ˚pabbajita SN i.185 ˚parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant DN i.204 etc.; Snp p. 59
      1. ˚kālaṁ (adverb ) a long time frequently e.g. Pv-a 19 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 60 109
      2. ˚ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long AN iv.339 (opp pariyāpajjati) Vv 801 Pug 32 33; Vism 37, 175 DN-a i.3
      3. ˚dikkhita (not ˚dakkhita) having long since been initiated SN i.226 = J v.138 (= cirapabbajita) -nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time SN ii.227
      4. ˚paṭika cp. Sanskrit ciraṁ prati
        1. long since, adjective constr in conformity with the subject Vin i.33 DN ii.270 SN iii.120
        • ˚pabbajita having long since become a wanderer AN iii.114 Snp p. 92 DN-a i.143
        • ˚ppavāsin
        • adjective long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293)
        • ˚rattaṁ (
        • adverb ) for a long time Snp 665 Snp 670 Ja iv.371 and -rattāya identical Ja ii.340 Pv i.94
        Vedic. cira, perhaps to *quei̯e to rest, cp. Latin quiēs, civis; Gothic hveila; Old High German wīlōn; English while
    Cirassaṁ
    adverb
    1. at last Vin ii.195 DN i.179 SN i.142 Ja ii.439 Ja iii.315 Ja iv.446 (read cirassa passāmi); v.328 Thag 1, 868 Thag-a 217 Pv-a 60-na cirass’ eva shortly after DN iii.11 Ja iv.2 Dhp-a iii.176 Pv-a 32
    • sucirass’ eva after a very long while SN i.193
    origin. genitive of cira = cirasya
    Cirāyati
    1. to be long, to tarry, to delay, Dhp-a i.16 Vv-a 64 208; cp. ciraṁ karoti identical Ja ii.443
    Sanskrit cirayati, v. denominative from cira
    Cirīṭa
    1. a parrot Ja v.202 (in compound cirīti˚)
    Sanskrit ciri, cp. kīra
    Cilimikā
    feminine
    1. as cimilikā at Vin ii.150 Vin iv.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves bark, etc. Also at Pv-a 144 (doubtful reading)
    Derived from cīra
    Cillaka
    1. a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka˚ Thag 2, 390 (cp. Thag-a 257). Not with Kern (Toevoegselen) “a wooden puppet,” as derived from citta.1
    kilaka or khīlaka, q.v.
    Cīnaka
    masculine neuter a kind of bean Snp 239 (= aṭavi-pabbatapadesu āropita-jāta-cīna-mugga Snp-a 283) Ja v.405
    Cīnapiṭṭha
    neuter red lead DN-a i.40 Dhs-a 14
    Cīyati
    1. to be gathered, to be heaped up Snp 428 (cīyate pahūtaṁ puññaṁ) ‣See also ā˚
    passive of cināti
    Cīra
    neuter
    1. bark, fibre DN i.167 (kusa˚, vāka˚, phalaka˚) Vin iii.34 AN i.295 Pug 55-a bark dress Vin i.305 Ja vi.500 (cp. cīraka)
    2. a strip (originally of bark), in suvaṇṇa˚-khacita gold-brocaded Vv-a 280 (‣ See also next). cp. ocīraka (under odīraka)
    Sanskrit cīra, cp. cīvara
    Cīraka
    1. bark ‣See compounds
    2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa˚; gold brocade (dress) Ja v.197
      1. ˚vāsika neuter bark-dress (a punishment) MN i.87 = AN i.48 = Mil 197
      2. cp. cīra
    Cīriya
    adjective
    1. like or of bark, in compound dāru˚; (as proper name) “wood-barker” Dhp-a ii.35
    from cīra
    Cīriḷikā
    feminine
    1. a cricket AN iii.397 (variant reading cīrikā). cp. on word-formation pipiḷikā; cricket
    cp. Sanskrit cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish
    Cīvara
    neuter
    1. the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant Commentary is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c˚, piṇḍapāta alms-bowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e.g. Vin iii.89 99, 211; iv.154 sq. DN i.61 MN ii.102 AN i.49 Nd2 s.v. Iti 111 In abbreviated form Snp 339 Pv-a 7 Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta-cīvaraṁ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka given thus, e.g. at Vin i.289 that is literally ʻ taking his bowl & robe. ʼ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning ʻ putting on his outer robe and taking his bowl. ʼ AN bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply; an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes ‣See the note at Dialogues of the Buddha ii.145
    • Vin iii.11 DN ii.85 Snp p. 21 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 13 & passim The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity ‣See under kaṭhina. There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin.; i.58 = 96 = 281 (cp. ˚dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c proper, called paṁsukūlaṁ c. “the dust-heap robe Vin v.117 (cp. gahapati)
    • On cīvara in general also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling ‣See Vin i.46 49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq. 285, 287 sq., 306 = ii.267 (of various colours); ii.115 sq (sibbati to sew the c.); iii.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195–⁠223 254
    1. -266; iv.59
    1. -62, 120
    1. -123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds)- AN iii.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); v.100, 206; Vism 62 Iti 103 Pv-a 185
    • Sīse cīvaraṁ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin ii.207 217; ˚ṁ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin ii.208 217; ˚ṁ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin i.47f.; ii.152 224; iii.198, 203, 263; ˚ṁ saṁharati to fold it up Vin i.46
    • Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe atireka˚; an extra robe Vin iii.195
    • acceka˚ identical Vin iii.260f.; kāla˚; (& akāla˚) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin iii.202f.; iv.284, 287; gahapati˚ a layman’s r. Vin iii.169 171; ti˚; the three robes, viz sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin i.288 289 iii.11, 195, 198 sq.; v.142; adjective tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin v.193
    • dubbala˚ (as adjective) with a worn-out c Vin iii.254 Vin iv.59 154, 286; paṁsukūla˚; the dust-heap robe Pv-a 141
    • sa˚-bhatta food given with a robe Vin iv.77
    • lūkha˚
    • adjective having a coarse robe Vin i.109 (+ duccola); iii.263 (identical) AN i.25
    • vihāra˚ a robe to be used in the monastery Vin iii.212
    1. ˚kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk’s robe Dhp-a iii.420 Vv-a 76 = Dhp-a iii.106 cp. cīvarakarṇaka Avs ii.184 & ˚ika Divy 239 Divy 341, 350
    2. ˚kamma neuter robe-making Vin ii.218 Vin iii.60 240; iv.118, 151 AN v.328f. Dhp-a iii.342 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 145
    3. ˚kāra (-samaya) (the time of sewing the robes Vin iii.256f. -kāla (-samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin iii.261 Vin iv.286 287 -dāna (-samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin iv.77 99
    4. ˚dussa clothing-material Vin iv.279 280
    5. ˚nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin i.284
    6. ˚paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin i.283 Vin ii.176 Vin v.205 AN iii.274f. -paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin i.263 285, 301 -palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person a technical term of the canon law ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.149, 157, 169
      1. . It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa˚ Vin i.265 Vin v.117 cp. 178
      2. ˚paviveka neuter the seclusion of the robe, i.e. of a non-Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta˚ & senāsana˚) at AN i.240
      3. ˚bhaṅga the distribution of robes Vin iv.284
      4. ˚bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin iii.265
      5. ˚bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin i.285 Vin ii.176 v.205 AN iii.274f. (cp. ˚paṭiggāhaka)
      6. ˚bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin i.287f.
      7. ˚rajju
      8. feminine a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combined with ˚vaṁsa ‣See below
      9. ˚lūkha
      10. adjective one who is poorly dressed Pug 53
      11. ˚vaṁsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. ˚rajju) Vin i.47 286; ii.117 121, 152, 153, 209, 222; iii.59 Ja i.9 Dhp-a iii.342
      12. ˚saṅkamanīya
      13. neuter a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin iv.282 283
      14. * Sanskrit cīvara, probably = cīra, applied originally to a dress of bark
    Cuṇṇa
    1. past participle broken up powdered; only in compound ˚vicuṇṇa crushed to bits smashed up, piecemeal Ja i.73 Ja ii.120 Ja ii.159 Ja ii.216 Ja iii.74–⁠2.
    2. neuter (a) any hard substance ground into a powder dust, sand Ja i.216 Vv-a 65 (paṁsu˚); Pv iii.33 (suvaṇṇa gold-dust Pv-a 189 = vālikā) DN-a i.245 (identical) Dhs-a 12
    3. (b) especially “chunam” (Anglo-Indian) i.e. a plaster of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap-powder in bathing. Often comb; d with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes ‣See Vin i.202 cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin i.202
    4. Vin i.47 = 52; ii.220, 224 sq. AN i.208 AN iii.25 Ja v.89 cuṇṇa-tela-vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaṁ vā telaṁ vā leḍḍūpaka)-nahāniya˚ DN i.74 = MN iii.92 Pv-a 46 na-hāna Ja ii.403 Ja ii.404
    5. gandha -cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder Ja i.87 Ja i.290 Ja iii.276
    6. candana˚ identical Mil 13 Mil 18
    7. iṭṭhaka˚ plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) Pv-a 4 cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) “piṣṭa-cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo 'haṁ paśūkṛtaḥ.”

      1. ˚cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin i.202
      • ˚piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin iii.260 Vin iv.154f.
      Sanskrit cūrṇa, past participle of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Latin caro, Sanskrit kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp. Literally kirwis axe, Latin scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus scortum ‣See also calaka2 & cp. Sanskrit kṣunna of; kṣud to grind, to which probably Pali kuḍḍa
    Cuṇṇaka
    adjective
    1. (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha˚) DN i.7 MN ii.64 = Th 1 771 Ja v.302
    • (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder MN iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni).
    • feminine ˚ikā in cuṇṇikamaṁsa mince meat Ja i.243
    from cuṇṇa
    Cuṇṇeti
    1. to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint with chunam Vin ii.107 (mukhaṁ) Ja iv.457
    • ppr.
    • passive cuṇṇiyamāna being ground Ja vi.185
    denominative of cuṇṇa
    Cuta
    1. adjective shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216 Snp 774 Snp 899 Iti 19 99 Ja i.139 Ja i.205 Pug 17
    2. ˚accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death epithet of Nibbāna Dhp 225
    3. (n.) in compound cutūpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saṁsāra ‣See cuti SN ii.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c˚ hoti) AN iii.420 AN iv.178 Dhp-a i.259 usually in phrase sattānaṁ cutûpapāta-ñāṇa the discerning of the saṁsāra of beings DN i.82 = M i.248 DN iii.111 As cutuppāta at AN ii.183 cp. jātisaṁsāra-ñāṇa
    past participle of cavati; Sanskrit cyuta
    Cuti
    feminine
    1. vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opposite upapatti, cp. also gati & āgati) DN i.162 SN ii.3 = 42; iii.53 MN i.49 Snp 643 Dhp 419 Ja i.19 Ja i.434 Vism 292, 460, 554 Dhp-a iv.228
    cp. Sanskrit cyuti, to cavati
    Cudita
    adjective
    1. being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin i.173 Vin ii.250 Vin ii.250 251 MN i.95f. AN iii.196f. —˚ka identical Vin v.115 158, 161, 164
    past participle of codati
    Cuddasa
    1. fourteen Ja i.71 Ja vi.8 Mil 12 Dhp-a iii.120 186
    contracted from catuddasa, Sanskrit caturdaśa, cp. catur
    Cunda
    1. an artist who works in ivory Ja vi.261 (Com: dantakāra) Mil 331
    Cundakāra
    1. a turner Ja vi.339
    Cumbaṭa
    neuter
    1. (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow Ja i.53 (dukūla˚); ii.21 (identical) Vv-a 73
    • (b) a wreath Ja iii.87 cp. next
    cp. Prakrit cumbhala
    Cumbaṭaka
    neuter cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow Dhp-a i.139 Vv-a 33 165
    • (b) a wreath Ja iv.231 (puppha˚) Snp-a 137 Dhp-a i.72 (mālā˚)
    Cumbati
    1. to kiss Ja ii.193 Ja v.328 Ja vi.291 Ja vi.344 Vv-a 260 cp. pari˚. Culla & cula;
    Sanskrit cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as “vadanasaṁyoge”
    Culla
    cūḷa;
    adjective
    1. small, minor (opp mahā great, major), often in connection with names & titles of books, e.g. c˚ Anāthapiṇḍika = A jr. Ja ii.287 cp. Anglo-Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hindi chhota = culla); or Culla-vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mahā-vagga (Vin i.) Culla-niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā-niddesa); culla-sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opposite mahā˚ the detailed sīla) DN i.5 etc. Otherwise only in compounds.:
    1. ˚aṅgulī little finger Dhp-a ii.86
    • ˚ūpaṭṭhāka a “lesser follower, i.e. a personal attendant (of a thera) Ja i.108 (cūl˚); ii.325 (cull˚ Dhp-a i.135 Dhp-a ii.260 cūḷ)
    • ˚pitā an uncle (“lesser” father = sort of father, cp. Latin matertera, patruus, German Vetter = father jun.) Ja ii.5 iii.456 (variant reading petteyya) Pv-a 107 Dhp-a i.221 (cūḷa˚)
    Sanskrit kṣulla = kṣudra (P. khudda ‣See khuddaka), with c: k = cuṇṇa: kṣud
    Cullāsīti
    1. eighty-four Ja vi.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saṁsāra) Pv-a 254 (identical). Also as cūḷāsīti q.v
    = caturāsīti
    Cūlikā
    feminine
    1. = cūḷa; kaṇṇa˚; the root of the ear Ja ii.276 Vism 249, 255 Dhp-a iv.13 (of an elephant). ˚baddha SN ii.182 KS ii.122 ‣See also cūḷā
    Sanskrit cūlikā, cp. cūḍā
    Cūḷa
    1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa-cūḷa the root of an elephant’s ear Ja vi.488
    2. aḍḍha-cūḷa a measure ‣See aḍḍha ‣See also cūlikā
    3. adjective ‣See culla
    Sanskrit cūḍa & cūlikā
    Cūḷaka
    adjective
    1. having a cūḷa or top-knot; pañca˚; with five top-knots Ja v.250 (of a boy)
    from cūḷā
    Cūḷanikā
    feminine
    1. only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu “the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds” (distinguished from the dvi-sahassī majjhimakā & the ti-sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) AN i.227 Nd2 235 2b
    Derived from culla, q.v.
    Cūḷā
    feminine
    1. = cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, especially denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo-Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) Ja i.64 462; v.153, 249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā) Dhp-a i.294 as mark of distinction of a king Ja iii.211 Ja v.187 of a servant Ja vi.135
    • a cock’s comb Ja ii.410 Ja iii.265
    1. ˚maṇi masculine a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest Ja i.65 Ja ii.122 Ja v.441
    2. Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa
    Cūḷāsīti
    1. for cullāsīti at Thag 2, 51
    Ce
    conditional particle “if,” constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here DN i.117) or
    • conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā DN i.3), or Potential (
    • passive ce vipulaṁ sukhaṁ Dhp 290)

      • Always enclitic (like Latin que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dhp 118 brāhmaṇo ce tvaṁ brūsi Snp 457 Usually added to pronouns or
      • pronoun adverb s ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaṁ DN i.185 ettha ce te mano atthi SN i.116 or combined with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q.v.) frequently also in combination with other indefinite interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ DN i.117 ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaṁ DN i.125
      • api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataṁ jīve mānavo Snp 589
      Vedic ced; ce = Latin que in absque, ne-c, etc., Gothic h in ni-h ‣See also ca 3
    Cecca
    1. = cicca (equal to sañcicca), absolutive of cinteti, corresponding to either *cetya

    or *cintya cint

    1. ; only in stereotyped definition jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin ii.91 Vin iii.73 112; iv.290
    cet
    Ceṭa
    1. a servant, a boy Ja iii.478 ‣See next
    Ceṭaka
    1. a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin iv.66] ii.176 = Dhp-a iv.92 (duṭṭha˚ miserable fellow); iii.281 iv.82 (bhātika-ceṭakā rascals of brothers); v.385 Mil 222
    Cetaka
    1. a decoy-bird (Commentary dīpaka-tittira, exciting partridge) Ja iii.357
    Cetakedu
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.538 ‣See also cela˚
    Cetanaka
    adjective
    1. connected with a thought or intention Ja vi.304 usually in ; without a thought unintentional Ja ii.375 Ja vi.178 Vb 419
    ‣See cetanā
    Cetanā
    1. state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will Defined as action kamma : AN iii.415 cp. KV. viii.9 § 38 untraced quotation; cp. AN v.292). Often combined with patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e.g. SN ii.99 SN ii.154 AN i.32 AN i.224 AN v.212 Nd2 112 (in definition of asucimanussā people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e.g. 343, 380-Combd with vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in definition of nāmakāya (opposite rūpakāya) SN ii.3 (without citta), Ps i.183 (do.); Nett 77, 78
    • Enumerated under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka (-sampadā) & defined as “cetanāya somanassa-sahagatañāṇa-sampayutta-bhāvo” at Dhp-a iii.94 Commentary is opposed to cetasika (i.e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct ‣See sīla which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Nett 43, 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya-& vacīkammantā. AN v.292f.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8–⁠10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Netechnical term, mano-kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views. Vin iii.112 SN iii.60 AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong-doing) Vv-a 72 (vadhaka-cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20 āhār’ āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30 (pariccāga˚ intention to give) Pug 12 Mil 94 Sdhp 52 Sdhp 72
    • In scholastic lgg. often explained as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5 Vb 285
    • cp. Dhs 58 (+ citta) Vb 401 (identical) Vb 40 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho)
    feminine abstract from cet ‣See cinteti
    Cetayita
    1. intended. AN v.187 Mil 62
    past participle of ceteti ‣See cinteti
    Cetasa1
    1. name of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan Ja v.420
    Cetasa2
    adjective
    1. only in—˚: sucetasa of a good mind, good-hearted SN i.4 = 29, 46 = 52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa˚ of a wicked mind, evil-minded SN i.70 = 98; a˚ without mind SN i.198
    • sabba˚ all-hearted, with all one’s mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) SN i.112f. = 189, 220 AN ii.116 AN iii.163 AN iii.402 AN iv.167 The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we frequently find variant readings with sabbaṁ cetaso & sabbaṁ cetasā-appamāṇa˚ SN iv.186 avyāpanna˚ SN v.74
    originally the genitive of ceto used as nominative
    Cetasika
    adjective belonging to ceto, mental (opposite kāyika physical). Kāyikaṁ sukhaṁ → cetasikaṁ s. AN i.81 SN v.209 kāyikā darathā → c. d. MN iii.287 MN iii.288 c. duk khaṁ DN ii.306 AN i.157 c. roga Ja iii.337 c. kamma is sīla 8–⁠10 ‣See under cetanā Nett 43
    • As n combined with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co-efficients (cp. vitakka-vicāra sach compounds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) DN i.213 ‣See also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in singular only, it came to be used in
    • plural and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha-category ‣See Compendium p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. 6 148, 175. —˚cetasikā dhammā Ps i.84 Vb 421 Dhs 3 18, etc. (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation
    • past participle 6, 148)
    Cetaso
    genitive singular of ceto, functioning as genitive to citta ‣See citta & ceto.
    Cetāpana
    neuter
    1. barter Vin iii.216 ‣See also Vinaya Texts i.22 & Kaccāyana 322
    ‣See cetāpeti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit cetanika
    Cetāpeti
    1. to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (explained by parivatteti), 237; iv.250
    causative of *cetati to ci, collect ‣See also Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Cetiya
    neuter
    1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, MN i.20 Dhp 188 Ja i.237 Ja vi.173 Snp-a 194 (dhātu-gharaṁ katvā cetiyaṁ patiṭṭhāpesuṁ); Kp-a 221 Dhp-a iii.29 (dhātu˚) iv.64 Vv-a 142 Sdhp 428 Sdhp 430. Pre-Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava˚ Vin ii.172 SN i.185 Snp p. 59 Dhp-a iii.170 Ānanda˚ DN ii.123 DN ii.126 Udena˚ DN ii.102 DN ii.118 DN iii.9 Dhp-a iii.246 Gotama (ka) ibid.; Cāpāla˚ DN ii.102 DN ii.118 SN v.250 Ma-kuṭabandhana˚ DN ii.160 Bahuputta˚ DN ii.102 DN ii.118 DN iii.10 SN ii.220 AN iv.16 Sattambaka˚ DN ii.102 DN ii.118 Sārandada DN ii.118 DN ii.175 AN iii.167 Supatiṭṭha˚ Vin i.35

      1. ˚aṅgaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Mil 366 Vism 144, 188, 392 DN-a i.191 197 Vv-a 254
      • ˚vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299
      cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti
    Ceteti
    1. ‣See cinteti
    Ceto
    neuter
    1. = citta, q.v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. cp. also cinteti.; Only the genitive cetaso & the instrumental; cetasā are in use besides these there is an adjective cetaso, derived from nominativebase cetas. Another adjective
    • form is the inflected nominativeceto, occurring only in viceto SN v.447 (+ ummatto, out of mind)
    1. I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā : kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand speech & heart) Snp 232 Kh IX. kāya (vācā˚, ceto˚-muni a saint in action, speech & thought AN i.273 Nd2 514. In this phrase the Nd has mano˚ for ceto˚ which is also a variant reading at A-passage
    • (b) with paññā ‣See citta iv. b in ceto-vimutti, paññā-vimutti ‣See below iv.
    • (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc. ‣See ˚pharaṇatā below
    1. II. Cetaso genitive (a) heart. c˚ upakkilesa (stain of h.) DN iii.49 DN iii.101 SN v.93 līnatta (attachment) SN v.64 appasāda (unfaith) SN i.179 ekodibhāva (singleness) DN iii.78 SN iv.236 ‣See 2nd jhāna; āvaraṇāni (hindrances) SN 66
    • vimokkha (redemption) SN i.159 santi (tranquillity) Snp 584 Snp 593 vūpasama (identical AN i.4 SN v.65 vinibandha (freedom) DN iii.238 AN iii.249 AN iv.461 sq
    • (b) mind. c˚ vikkhepa (disturbance) AN iii.448 AN v.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vb 367 abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7
    • (c) thought. in c˚ parivitakko udapādi “there arose a reflection in me genitive SN i.139 SN ii.273 SN iii.96 SN iii.103
    1. III. Cetasā instrumental-(a) heart. mettā-sahagatena c (with a h. full of love) frequently in phrase ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā etc. e.g. DN i.186 DN iii.78 DN iii.223 SN iv.296 AN i.183 ii.129; iv.390; v.299, 344 Vb 272 ujubhūtena (upright) SN ii.279 AN i.63 vivaṭena (open) DN iii.223 SN v.263 AN iv.86 macchera-maḷa-pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) SN iv.240 AN ii.58 santim pappuyya c. SN i.212 taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) SN iii.103-vippasannena (devout) SN i.32 = 57, 100 Dhp 79 Pv i.1010 muttena AN iv.244 vimariyādi-katena SN iii.31 vigatâbhijjhena DN iii.49 pathavī-āpo etc
    • samena AN iv.375f. ākāsasamena AN iii.315f. sabba˚ SN ii.220 abhijjhā-sahagatena AN i.206 satārakkhena DN iii.269 AN v.30
    • migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature MN i.450
    • acetasā without feeling heartlessly Ja iv.52 Ja iv.57
    • (b) mind: in two phrases viz. () c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti “to ponder & think over in one’s mind” DN iii.242 AN i.264 AN iii.178 () c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) “to know in one’s mind,” in the following expressions: para-sattānaṁ para-puggalānaṁ cetasā ceto-paricca pajānāti “he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings” ‣See ceto-paricca & ˚pariyāya MN ii.19 SN ii.121 SN ii.213 SN v.265 AN i.255 = iii.17 = 280. puggalaṁ paduṭṭha-cittaṁ evaṁ c˚ ceto-paricca p. Iti 12 cp. 13 Arahanto … Bhagavanto c˚ cetoparicca viditā DN iii.100 para-cittapariyāya kusalo evaṁ c˚ ceto paricca manasikaroti. AN v.160 Bhagavā brāhmaṇassa c˚ ceto-parivitakkaṁ aññāya “perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.
    1. SN i.178 DN iii.6 AN iii.374 Mil 10
    1. IV. compounds. -khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind usually as pañca c-khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching or from anger against one’s fellow-disciples, DN iii.237 278 MN i.101 AN iii.248 = iv.460 = v.17 Ja iii.291 Vb 377 Vism 211
    2. ˚paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (= cittassa samma-d-eva ṭhapanaṁ Vv-a 203) Mil 129
    • ˚padosa corruption of the h., wickedness AN i.8 Iti 12 13 (opposite pasāda): -paricca “as regards the heart,” i.e. state of heart, ways of thought, character mind (= pariyāya) in ˚ñāṇa Thag 2, 71 = 227 (explained at Thag-a 76 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) ‣See phrase cetasā c-p above (iii. b.)
    • ˚pariyāya the ways of the heart (= paricca), in para-ceto-pariyāya-kusalo “an expert in the ways of others’ hearts”. AN v.160 c

      • p-kovido encompassing the heart of others SN i.146 SN i.194 = Th 1 1248; i.196 = Th 1, 1262. Also with syncope: ˚pariyañāṇa DN i.79 DN iii.100 Vism 431 DN-a i.223
      • ˚parivitakka reflecting, reasoning SN i.103 SN i.178
      • ˚pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti-pharaṇatā sukha˚, ceto˚, āloka˚ DN iii.278
      • ˚vasippatta mastery over one’s h. AN ii.6 AN ii.36 AN ii.185 AN iv.312 MN i.377 Vism 382 Mil 82 Mil 85
      • ˚vimutti emancipation of h. (always w paññā-vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavā c
      • v.) Vin i.11 (akuppā) DN i.156 DN i.167 DN i.251 DN iii.78 DN iii.108 248 (muditā) SN ii.265 (mettā) MN i.197 (akuppā), 205 296; iii.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā) AN i.124 AN ii.6 36; iii.84 Snp 725 Snp 727 = It 106 Iti 20 (mettā), 75, 97 Pug 27 62 Vb 86 (mettā) Nett 81 (virāgā) DN-a i.313 (= cittavimutti)
      • ˚vivaraṇa setting the h. free AN iv.352 v.67 ‣See also arahant II D
      • ˚samatha calm of h Thag 2, 118
      • ˚samādhi concentration of mind (= cittasamādhi DN-a i.104) DN i.15 DN iii.30 SN iv.297 AN ii.54 iii.51
      • ˚samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3
      Sanskrit cetas
    Cela
    neuter
    1. cloth, especially clothes worn, garment, dress AN i.206 Pv ii.127 (kañcanā˚ for kañcana˚); iii.93 (for veḷa); dhāti˚ baby’s napkin Ja iii.539 In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta˚ + ādittasīsa) SN v.440 AN ii.93 AN iii.307 AN iv.320-acela a naked ascetic DN i.161 DN i.165Ja v.75 Ja vi.222
    1. ˚aṇḍaka (variant reading aṇḍuka) a loincloth MN i.150
    • ˚ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra Ja i.54 Ja ii.253 Ja iii.285 Ja v.67 Dhp-a ii.43 Snp-a ii.225 Vv-a 132 140
    • ˚paṭṭikā (not ˚pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Buddhaghosa celasandhara) MN ii.93 Dhp-a iii.136
    • ˚vitāna an awning Ja i.178 Ja ii.289 Ja iv.378 Mhbv.122; Vism 108
    Derivation unknown. cp. Sanskrit cela
    Celaka
    1. 1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes DN i.166 MN i.77
    • a standard-bearer
    1. DN i.51 DN-a i.156 AN iv.107 AN iv.110 Mil 331
    cp. Sanskrit ceḍaka Pali ceṭa & in meaning English knight → German knecht; knave → knabe, knappe
    Celakedu
    1. = cetakedu Ja vi.538
    Celāpaka
    1. = celāvaka Ja v.418
    Celāvaka
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.538 (Commentary celabaka; is it celā bakā?) Ja v.416 ‣See also celāpaka
    cp. Sanskrit chilla?
    Cokkha
    adjective
    1. clean Ja iii.21
    • ˚bhāva cleanliness MN i.39 (= visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha˚? ‣See Trenckner’s note on p. 530)
    cp. Sanskrit cokṣa
    Coca
    neuter
    1. the cocoa-nut or banana, or cinnamon Ja v.420 (˚vana); —˚pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa-nut milk Vin i.246
    Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan ‣See the note at; Vinaya Texts ii.132
    Codaka
    adjective
    1. one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin i.173 Vin ii.248f.; v.158, 159 etc. SN i.63 MN i.95f. DN iii.236 AN i.53 AN iii.196 AN iv.193f. DN-a i.40
    to codeti
    Codanā
    feminine
    1. reproof, exhortation DN i.230 DN iii.218 AN iii.352 Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276
    • As ttg in codan’ atthe nipāto an exhortative particle Ja vi.211 (for ingha) Vv-a 237 (identical) Pv-a 88 variant reading (for handa)
    ‣See codeti
    Codita
    1. urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Snp 819 Ja vi.256 Pv ii.966 Vv 161 Pv-a 152 Sdhp 309
    past participle of codeti, q.v.
    Codetar
    1. one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin v.184
    agent noun to codeti
    Codeti
    aorist acodayi (J v.112), infinitive codetuṁ, gerundive codetabba;
    • passive cujjati & codiyati;
    • past participle cudita & codita (q.v.):
    • causative ; codāpeti (Vin. iii.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J vi.69 iṇaṁ codetvā 245 Snp 120 iṇaṁ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up Pv-a 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) DN i.230 Vin i.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq. 322 sq.; ii.2 sq., 80 sq.; iii.164, etc. Ja v.112 Dhp 379 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 74
    Vedic codati & codayati, from; cud
    Copana
    neuter
    1. moving, stirring Dhp-a iv.85 Dhs-a 92 240, 323
    cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup ‣See kuppati
    Cora
    1. a thief, a robber Vin i.74 75, 88, 149 SN ii.100 SN ii.128 = AN ii.240 SN ii.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); iv.173 MN ii.74 = Th 1, 786 AN i.48 AN ii.121f.; iv.92, 278 Snp 135 Snp 616 Snp 652 Ja i.264 (˚rājā, the robber king); ii.104; iii.84 Mil 20 Vism 180 (sah’ oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja-puris ânubandha˚, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha-pasāraṇaṁ viya) Dhp-a ii.30 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 274-mahā˚; a great robber Vin iii.89 DN iii.203 AN i.153 iii.128; iv.339 Mil 185
    • Often used in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 87
    1. ˚āṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190
    2. ˚upaddava an attack from robbers Ja i.267
    • ˚kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes ‣See kathā) DN i.7 = Vin i.188
    • ˚ghātaka an executioner AN ii.207 Ja iii.178 iv.447; v.303 Pv-a 5
    cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530 = theyye
    Coraka
    1. a plant used for the preparation of perfume Ja vi.537
    cp. Sanskrit coraka
    Corikā
    1. feminine thieving, theft Vin i.208 Ja iii.508 Mil 158 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 86 Pv-a 192 Vv-a 72 (= theyyā)
    Corī
    feminine a female thief Vin iv.276 Ja ii.363
    • adjective thievish, deceitful Ja i.295

      • dāraka˚ a female kidnapper Ja vi.337
    Corovassikaṁ
    1. at Nd2 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṁ (as SN iv.185)
    Cola
    (& coḷa)
    1. a piece of cloth, a rag SN i.34 Ja iv.380 Mil 169 Pv-a 73 Sdhp 396
    2. ˚bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin iv.40
    • duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin i.109 Vin iii.263
    cp. Sanskrit coḍa
    Colaka
    (& coḷaka) = cola Vin i.48 296; ii.113, 151, 174, 208, 225; Pv ii.17 Mil 53 (bark for tinder?) Dhp-a ii.173
    1. Ch. Cha & Chal

    Ch

    Cha
    Chaḷ
    (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e.g. chabbīsati = cha + vīsati, chabbaṇṇa cha + vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compound chaḷanga, chaḷ-abhiññā)
    1. the number six
    1. Cases: nominative cha, genitive channaṁ, instrumental chahi (chambhī (?) Ja iv.310 which should be chambhi & prob chabbhi = ṣaḍbhiḥ ‣See also chambhī), locative chasu (chassu), numeral ordinal chaṭṭha the sixth. cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a “major set is concerned ‣See 2, as in the following: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd2 514 (in pairs of 3 ‣See muni); 6 bhikkhus as a “clique” ‣See chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number; 6 are the sciences of the Veda ‣See chaḷanga; there are 6 buddha-dhammā (Nd2 466) 6 viññāṇakāyā ‣See upadhi; 6 senses & sense-organs ‣See āyatana-cha dānasālā Ja i.282 oraṁ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i.e. not just yet, but very soon, after the “next” moon) Pv iv.335. Six bodily faults Ja i.394 (viz. too long, too short too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas Ja ii.334
    1. ˚aṁsa six-cornered Dhs 617
    • ˚aṅga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti) 6. jotisattha (thus enumerated at Vv-a 265 at Pv-a 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): DN iii.269 Vv 6316 Pv ii.613 Mil 178 Mil 236 With reference to the upekkhās, one is called the “one of six parts” (chaḷ-ang’ upekkhā) Vism 160 -abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin ii.161 Pug 14 ‣See abhiññā
    • ˚āsīti eighty-six i.e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80 6 X (4 X 2)10
      1. of people: an immense number, millions Pv ii.137: of Petas Pv-a 212 of sufferings in Niraya Pv iii.106
      2. ˚āhaṁ for six days Ja iii.471
      • ˚kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i.e. public (opposite catukaṇṇa) Ja vi.392
      • ˚tiṁsa(ti) thirty-six AN ii.3 Iti 15 Dhp 339 Dhp-a iii.211 224 (˚yojana-parimaṇḍala); iv.48
      • ˚danta having six

        1. tusks, in ˚daha name of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta-mahā-sarā), literally lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha-visāṇa Vism 416
        2. ˚dvārika entering through six doors (i.e. the senses) Dhp-a iv.221 (taṇhā)
        3. ˚dhātura (= dhātuya) consisting of six elements MN iii.239
        • ˚pañca (chappañca) six or five Mil 292
        • ˚phass’ āyatana having six seats of contact (i.e. the outer senses) MN iii.239 Thag 1, 755 Pv-a 52 cp. Snp 169
        • ˚baṇṇa (= vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raṁsi, rays) Ja v.40 Dhp-a i.249 Dhp-a ii.41 iv.99
        • ˚baggiya (= vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384) Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin ii.1 77, and passim Ja ii.387 Dhp-a iii.330
        • ˚bassāni (= vassāni) six years Ja i.85 Dhp-a iii.195
        • ˚bidha (= vidha) sixfold Vism 184 -bisāṇa (= visāṇa) having six (i.e. a “major set”) of tusks (of pre-eminent elephants) Ja v.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta

          • bīsati (= vīsati) twenty-six Dhp-a iv.233 (devalokā). Chakana & Chakana;
          Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ = chaḷ) Latin sex, Goth, saihs
    Chakana
    Chakaṇa;
    neuter
    1. the dung of animals Vin i.202 Ja iii.386 (ṇ); v.286; vi.392 (ṇ)
    Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Sanskrit chagana is later ‣See Trenckner, Note. 62 note 16
    Chakaṇatī
    feminine = chakana Nd2 199.
    Chakala
    1. a he-goat Ja vi.237
    • ˚ka ibid. & Vin iii.166
    • feminine chakalī Ja vi.559
    cp. Sanskrit chagala, from chāga heifer
    Chakka
    neuter [from cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda˚ & mutta˚).
    Chakkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. six times DN ii.198 Dhp-a iii.196
    Sanskrit ṣaṭkṛtvas
    Chaṭṭha
    1. the sixth Snp 171 Snp 437 Dhp-a iii.200: Snp-a 364 Also as chaṭṭhama Snp 101 Snp 103 Ja iii.280
    Chaḍḍaka
    adjective throwing away, removing, in puppha˚ a flower-rubbish remover ‣See pukkusa Thag 1, 620 Vism 194;
    • feminine chaḍḍikā ‣See kacavara˚.

    Chaḍḍana
    neuter throwing away, rejecting Ja i.290 Dhtp 571
    • ī
    • feminine a shovel, dust-pan Dhp-a iii.7 ‣See kacavara˚
    Chaḍḍita
    1. thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind SN iii.143 Ja i.91 Ja i.478 Pv ii.23 (= ucchiṭṭhaṁ vantan ti attho Pv-a 80) Vv-a 100 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 185
    past participle of chaddeti
    Chaḍḍeti
    1. [Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From; *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Latin ex (s)cerno), cp. Latin mus(s)cerda, Anglo-Saxon scearn to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265 MN i.207 SN i.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi) = Sn p. 15 Ja i.61 Ja i.254 Ja i.265 Ja i.292 v.427 Pug 33 Dhp-a i.95 (uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ ch. to kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171 Vv-a 126 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 174 211; 255 Mil 15 absolutive chaḍḍūna Thag 2, 469 (= chaḍḍetvā Thag-a 284);
    2. gerundive chaḍḍetabba Vin i.48 Ja ii.2 chaḍḍanīya Mil 252 chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) MN i.12 sq

      • passive chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174
      • causative chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265 Ja i.137 Ja iv.139 vi.185, 534; Vism 182.
      • past participle chaḍḍita (q.v.)
      • ‣ See also kacavara˚
    Chaṇa
    1. a festival Ja i.423 Ja i.489 (surā˚), 499; ii.48 (mangala˚), 143, iii.287, 446, 538; iv.115 (surā˚); v.212; vi.221 399 (˚bheri) Dhp-a iii.100 (surā˚), 443 (˚vesa); iv.195 Vv-a 173
    Chaṇaka
    1. the Chaṇaka plant Mil 352 cp. akkhaṇa
    = akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sanskrit *ākhaṇa
    Chatta1
    neuter
    1. a sunshade (“parasol” would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin i.152 Vin ii.114 DN i.7≈; ii.15 (seta˚, under which Gotama is seated) Ja i.267 (seta˚); iv.16 v.383; vi.370 Snp 688 Snp 689 Mil 355 Dhp-a i.380f. DN-a i.89 Pv-a 47
    • Especially as seta˚ the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta-pamukhaṁ pañcavidhaṁ rāja-kakudhabhaṇḍaṁ Pv-a 74) ‣See kakudhabhaṇḍa Ja vi.4 Ja vi.223 Ja vi.389
    • ˚ṁ ussāpeti to unfold the r canopy Pv-a 75 Dhp-a i.161 167 ‣See also paṇṇa˚
    1. ˚daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade Dhp-a iii.212
    • ˚nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades MN ii.116
    • ˚maṅgala the coronation festival Ja iii.407 Dhp-a iii.307 Vv-a 66
    late Vedic chattra = *chad-tra, covering to chad ‣See chādati
    Chatta2
    1. a pupil, a student Ja ii.428
    cp. Sanskrit chātra, one who carries his master’s sunshade
    Chattaka

    masculine neuter

  • a sun-shade Ja vi.252 Thag 2, 23 (= Thag-a 29 as nickname of sun-shade makers) ‣See also paṇṇa˚.

    • ahi˚ “snake’s sun-shade,” name for a mushroom: toadstool DN iii.87 Ja ii.95 a mushroom, toadstool Ja ii.95
  • Chattiṁsakkhattuṁ
    • adverb thirty-six times Iti 15

    Chada
    1. anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning DN i.7≈ (sa-uttara˚ but ˚chadana at DN ii.194); -a veil in phrase vivaṭacchada “with the veil lifted” thus spelt only at Nd2 242 593, Dhp-a i.106 (vivattha˚ variant reading vaṭṭa˚) & DN-a; i.251 (vivatta˚), otherwise ˚chadda -shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pug 51 ‣See ghāsa & cp. chāda; -a hedge Ja vi.60 -a wing Thag 1 i.108 (citra˚)
    cp. chādeti chad = saṁvaraṇe Dhtp 586
    Chadana
    neuter
    1. = chada, viz. literally 1. a cover, covering Ja i.376 Ja v.241
    • a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various kinds), 195 Ja ii.281 Dhp-a ii.65 (˚piṭṭha) iv.104 (˚assa udaka-patana-ṭṭhāna), 178 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 3. a leaf, foliage Ja i.87 Thag 1, 527

  • hair Ja v.202

    • figuratively pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Snp 89 (= paṭirūpaṁ katvā Snp-a 164) Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 Nd2 271ii. Dhs reads chandanaṁ & Vb chādanaṁ
    1. ˚iṭṭhikā a tile Dhp-a iv.203
    Vedic chad
  • Chadda
    neuter
    1. = chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa˚) DN i.89 Snp 372 Snp 378 Snp 1003 Snp 1147 DN-a i.251 Nd2 however & DN-a read ˚chada ex plural by vivaṭa-rāgadosamoha-chadana Snp-a 365
    2. Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 explanation a root chadd by “vamane,” thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ
    Chaddhā
    1. sixfold Mil 2
    Sanskrit ṣaṭśaḥ
    Chanda
    1. . 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will desire for, wish for, delight in (c. locative ). explained at Vism 466 as “kattu-kāmatāy” adhivacanaṁ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as; chand = icchāyaṁ

      • A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness SN i.202 tibba˚ ardent desire, zeal AN i.229 AN iv.15 kusaladhamma˚ AN iii.441 Often combined with other good qualities, e.g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi AN iv.320 ch. viriya citta vīmaṁsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) DN iii.77 ‣See below, & in compound ˚âdhipateyya-kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati viriyaṁ ārabhati, etc ‣See citta; v.1 d. MN ii.174 AN i.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); iii.50 (chandasā instrumental) Snp 1026 (+ viriya) Vv 2412 (= kusala˚ Vv-a 116) Ja vi.72 Dhp-a i.14
      • B. As vice: (a) kinds character of ch
      • With similar expressions: (kāya-ch. sneha anvayatā MN i.500
      • ch. dosa moha bhaya DN iii.182 Nd2 3372 (‣ See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e.g. ch rāga dosa paṭigha DN i.25 (cp. DN-a i.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo SN iv.195 ‣See below ˚rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma ‣See kāma kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. Dhs-a 370 Vism 466 & Mrs. Rhys Davids in; Dhs translation 292 & the comb; n kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda “delight in the body” MN i.500 Snp 203 bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Thag 2, 14 (cp. bhavachanda) lokasmiṁ ch. (hankering after the world) Snp 866 methunasmiṁ (sexual desire) Snp 835 (ex
      • plural by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd1 181)
      • Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass’ upakkileso SN iii.232f.v.92; mūlaṁ dukkhassa Ja iv.328 sq
      • Other passages illustrating ch. are e.g. vyāpāda˚ & vihiṁsā˚ SN ii.151 rūpa-dhātuyā˚ SN iii.10 SN iv.72 yaṁ aniccaṁ, etc… tattha˚ SN iii.122 SN iii.177 SN iv.145f.; asmī ti ch. SN iii.130 atilīno ch. SN v.277f. cp. also DN ii.277
      • (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship
      • vigata˚ (free from excitement) and a˚ SN i.111 SN iii.7 SN iii.107 SN iii.190 SN iv.387 AN ii.173f. DN iii.238 ettha chandaṁ virājetvā Snp 171 = SN i.16 Kāye chandaṁ virājaye Snp 203 (a)vīta˚ AN iv.461f. ˚ṁ vineti SN i.22 SN i.197 ˚ṁ vinodeti SN i.186 ch. suppaṭivinīta SN ii.283 na tamhi ˚ṁ kayirātha Dhp 117 Dhp 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin i.121 122. dhammikānaṁ kammānaṁ chandaṁ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin iv.151 152 cp. ˚dāyaka ii.94
      • Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation ‣See Nd2 s.v. Dhs-a 370 Dhp-a i.14 Ja vi.72 Vv-a 77
      1. ˚āgati in ˚gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni viz. ch˚, dosa˚, moha˚, bhaya˚ DN iii.133 DN iii.228 Vb 376 ‣See above
      2. ˚ādhipateyya adjective standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269 359, 529 Vb 288 (+ viriya˚, citta˚, vīmaṁsā˚)
      3. ˚ānunīta led according to one’s own desire SN iv.71 Snp 781
      4. ˚āraha
      5. adjective fit to give one’s consent Vin ii.93 Vin v.221
      6. ˚ja sprung from desire (dukkha) SN i.22
      7. ˚nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire SN ii.143f. DN iii.289 Vb 425
      8. ˚pahāna the giving up of wrong desire SN v.273
      9. ˚mūlaka
      10. adjective having its root in excitement AN iv.339 AN v.107
      11. ˚rāga exciting desire (cp kāmachanda) DN ii.58 DN ii.60 DN iii.289 SN i.198 SN ii.283 SN iii.232 sq. (cakkhusmiṁ, etc.); iv.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch-r. n’ atthi), 233 AN i.264 (atīte ch-r-ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); ii.71; iii.73 Nd2 413 Dhp-a i.334
      12. ˚samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya˚; citta˚ vīmaṁsā˚ DN iii.77 SN v.268 AN i.39 Vb 216f.; Nett 15
      13. ˚sampadā the blessing of zeal SN v.30
      14. cp. Vedic and Sanskrit chanda, and skandh to jump
    Chandaka
    1. a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as ˚ṁ saṁharati to make a vol. collective Vin iv.250 Ja i.422 Ja ii.45 Ja ii.85 (saṁharitvā Burmese variant ; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; iii.288 (nava˚, a new kind of donation); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit chandaka-bhikṣana Avs vol. ii.227
    Chandatā
    feminine
    1. (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd2 394 Vb 350 370
    ‣See chanda
    Chandavantatā
    feminine
    1. = chandatā Vv-a 319
    abstract to adjective chandavant, chanda + vant
    Chandasā
    feminine
    1. metrics, prosody Mil 3
    ‣See chando
    Chandika
    adjective
    1. having zeal, endeavouring usually as ; without (right) effort, & always comb; d with anādara & assaddha Pug 13 Vb 341 Pv-a 54 (variant reading ), 175
    ‣See chanda
    Chandīkata
    adjective & chandīkatā
    • feminine (with) right effort, zealous, zeal
    • adjective Thag 1, 1029 (chandi˚) (n.) Vb 208

    Chando
    neuter
    1. metre, metrics, prosody, especially applied to the Vedas Vin ii.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaṁ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or accusative to Buddhaghosa in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vinaya Texts iii.150) SN i.38 Snp 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṁ: the best of Vedic metres).

      1. ˚viciti prosody Vv-a 265 (enumerated as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas ‣See chaḷanga)
      Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sanskrit pada
    Channa1
    1. covered Ja iv.293 (vāri˚); vi.432 (padara˚, ceiling) Thag-a 257 2. thatched (of a hut) Snp 18
    2. concealed, hidden secret Ja ii.58 Ja iv.58
    3. nt. channaṁ a secret place Vin iv.220
    past participle of chad ‣See chādeti1
    Channa2
    1. fit, suitable, proper Vin ii.124 (+ paṭirūpa); iii.128 DN i.91 (+ paṭirūpa) SN i.9 MN i.360 Ja iii.315 Ja v.307 vi.572; Pv ii.1215 (= yutta Pv-a 159)
    past participle to chad (chand), chandayati ‣See chādeti2
    Chapaka
    1. name of a low-class tribe Vin iv.203 (= caṇḍāla Buddhaghosa on Sekh. 69 at Vin iv.364), feminine ˚ī ib
    Chappañca
    1. six or five Mil 292
    cha + pañca
    Chab˚
    1. ‣See under cha
    Chamā
    feminine
    1. the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adverb instrumental chamā on the ground, to the ground (= vedic kṣamā) MN i.387 DN iii.6 Ja iii.232 Ja iv.285 Ja vi.89 Ja vi.528 Vv 414 (Vv-a 183 bhūmiyaṁ) Thag 2, 17 112 (Thag-a 116: chamāyaṁ); Pv iv.53 (Pv-a 260: bhūmiyaṁ)

      • locative chamāyaṁ Vin i.118 AN i.215 Snp 401 Vism 18 Thag-a 116
      • chamāya Vin ii.214
      from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (= kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane
    Chambhati
    1. to be frightened Dhp-a iv.52 (+ vedhati)
    ‣See chambheti
    Chambhita
    1. . Only in derivation chambhitatta neuter the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction consternation, always combined with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa SN v.386 bhaya Ja i.345 (where spelled chambhittaṁ); ii.336 (where wrongly explained by sarīracalanaṁ), frequently in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaṁsa (fear stupefaction & horripilation (“gooseflesh”) Vin ii.156 SN i.104 SN i.118 SN i.219 DN i.49 (explained at DN-a i.50 wrongly by sakala-sarīra calanaṁ) Nd2 470 Mil 23 Vb 367 Vism 187

      • In other connections at Nd2 1 (= Dhs 425 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch˚) Dhs 965 (on which ‣See Dhs translation 242)
      past participle of chambheti
    Chambhin
    adjective
    1. immovable, rigid; terrified, paralysed with fear SN i.219 MN i.19 Ja iv.310 (variant reading jambhī, here with reference to one who is bound (stiff with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instrumental of cha & explained by chasu ṭhānesu, viz on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha)
    • acchambhin firm steady, undismayed SN i.220 Snp 42 Ja i.71
    • See chambheti & chambhita
    ‣See chambheti
    Chambheti
    1. to be firm or rigid, figuratively to be stiff with fear, paralysed ‣See chambhin & chambhitatta, cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha; 2)
    cp. Sanskrit skabhnāti & stabhnāti,; skambh, and Pali khambha, thambha & khambheti
    Challi
    1. bark, bast Dhp-a ii.165 Buddhaghosa on MV. viii.29
    Sanskrit challi
    Chava
    1. a corpse Vin ii.115 (˚sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull) ‣See compounds
    2. adjective vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112 188 SN i.66 MN i.374 AN ii.57 Ja iv.263
      1. ˚aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?) -ālāta a torch from a pyre SN iii.93 = AN ii.95 = It 90 Ja i.482 Vism 54, 299 (˚ûpama)
      2. ˚kuṭikā a charnelhouse morgue, Vin i.152
      • ˚dāhaka one who (officially burns the dead, an “undertaker” Vin i.152 Dhp-a i.68 (
      • feminine ˚ikā); Vism 230 Mil 331
      • ˚dussa a miserable garment DN i.166AN i.240 AN ii.206
      • ˚sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq
      • ˚sitta a water pot ‣See above 1 Thag 1 127
      Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava
    Chavaka
    1. 1. a corpse Ja v.449
    • wretched Mil 156 Mil 200 (˚caṇḍāla ‣See explanation at Ja v.450)
    Chavi
    feminine
    1. the (outer thin) skin, tegument SN ii.256 AN iv.129 Snp 194 Ja ii.92 Distinguished from camma, the hide (under-skin corium) SN ii.238 ‣See camma; also in combination ch-cammamaṁsa Vism 235 Dhp-a iv.56
    1. ˚kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties ‣See kalyāṇa 2d Dhp-a i.387
    • ˚dos'-ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin i.206
    • ˚roga skin disease Dhp-a iii.295
    • ˚vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, especially beautiful com
    • plural, beauty Vin i.8 Ja iii.126 Dhp-a iv.72 Pv-a 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (= vaṇṇa)
    *(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Latin ob-scurus; Old High German skūra (Nhg. scheuer) Anglo-Saxon scēo → English sky also Gothic skōhs → English shoe
    Chāta
    adjective
    1. hungry Ja i.338 Ja ii.301 Ja v.69 Pv ii.113 (= bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta Pv-a 72 ii.936 (jighacchita Pv-a 126) Pv-a 62 Vv-a 76 Mil 253 Mhvs vii.24. cp. pari˚
    1. ˚ajjhatta with hungry insides Ja i.345 Ja ii.203 Ja v.338 359 Dhp-a i.125 Dhp-a i.367 (chātak’); iii.33, 40
    2. ˚kāla time of being hungry
    cp. Sanskrit psāta from bhas (*bhsā), cp. bhasman probably Non-Aryan
    Chātaka
    1. adjective hungry Ja i.245 Ja i.266
    2. neuter hunger, famine Ja i.266 Ja ii.124 Ja ii.149 Ja ii.367 Ja vi.487 Dhp-a i.170
    from preceding
    Chātatā
    1. hunger (literally hungriness) Dhp-a i.170
    feminine abstract from chāta
    Chādana
    neuter
    1. covering. clothing, often combined with ghāsa˚; food & clothing (q.v.) Ja ii.79 (vattha˚) Pv i.107 (bhojana˚); ii.17 (vattha˚) Pv-a 50 (= vattha) Dhp-a iv.7
    • As adjective Ja vi.354 (of the thatch of a house)
    to chādeti
    Chādanā
    feminine
    1. covering, concealment Pug 19 23. cp. pari˚
    from chādeti
    Chādi
    feminine
    1. shade Ja iv.351
    chādeti1
    Chādiya
    neuter covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) Ja vi.354 (= gehacchādana-tiṇa).
    Chādeti1
    1. (a) to cover, to conceal Vin ii.211 (passive chādīyati) Snp 1022 (mukhaṁ jivhāya ch.) Dhp 252 Pv iii.43

      • (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill Ja ii.253 Ja vi.195
      • past participle channa1 (q.v.)
      causative of chad, Sanskrit chādayati
    Chādeti2
    1. (a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure SN ii.110 AN iii.54 Dhp-a iii.285 (bhattaṁ me na ch.). (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c accusative ) especially in phrase bhattaṁ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin ii.138 DN i.72 (= rucceyya); v.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463 Thag 2, 409 Pv i.118 (nacchādimhamhase), past participle channa2. Chapa & ka; for chandeti, cp. Sanskrit chandati & chadayati; to khyā ?
    Chāpa
    ˚ka;
    1. the young of an animal MN i.384 (˚ka) SN ii.269 (bhinka˚) Ja i.460 Ja ii.439 (sakuṇa˚) Mil 402 feminine chāpī Ja vi.192 (maṇḍūka˚)
    2. Sanskrit śāva
    Chāyā
    feminine
    1. shade, shadow SN i.72 SN i.93 MN ii.235 MN iii.164 AN ii.114 Snp 1014 Dhp 2 Ja ii.302 iv.304; v.445 Mil 90 Mil 298 Dhp-a i.35 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 45 81, etc
    • Yakkhas have none Ja v.34 Ja vi.337 chāyā is frequent in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 87
    Vedic chāyā, light & shade,; *skei (cp. (s)qait in ketu), cp. Sanskrit śyāva; Gothic skeinan ‣See note on kāla, vol. ii. p. 382
    Chārikā
    feminine
    1. Ashes Vin i.210 Vin ii.220 DN ii.164 = Ud 93 AN i.209 AN iv.103 Ja iii.447 Ja iv.88 Ja v.144 Dhp-a i.256 ii.68 Vv-a 67 Pv-a 80 (chārikangāra)
    cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Latin serenus dry, clear ‣See also khāra bhasma.
    Chiggaḷa
    1. a hole, in eka˚-yuga MN iii.169≈; tāḷa˚ key hole SN iv.290 Vism 394
    cp. chidda
    Chida
    1. (always—˚) adjective breaking, cutting, destroying MN i.386 SN i.191 = Th 1, 1234 Thag 1, 521 1143 Snp 87 (kankha˚) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha˚) Vv-a 82 (identical).

    Chidda
    1. adjective having rents or fissures, perforated SN iv.316 Ja i.419 (figuratively) faulty defective, Vin i.290
    2. neuter a cutting, slit, hole aperture, SN i.43 Ja i.170 (eka˚), 172, 419, 503; ii.244 261; (kaṇṇa˚); Vism 171, 172 (bhitti˚), 174 (tāḷa˚) Snp-a 248 (akkhi˚) Dhp-a iii.42 Vv-a 100 (bhitti˚) Pv-a 180 (kaṇṇa˚), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig a fault, defect, flaw Dhp 229 (acchidda-vutti faultless conduct) Mil 94
      1. ˚āvachidda full of breaches and holes Ja iii.491 Vism 252 Dhp-a i.122 284 (cp. ˚vichidda); iii.151 -kārin inconsistent AN ii.187
      • ˚vichidda = ˚âvachidda Ja i.419 Ja v.163 (sarīraṁ chiddavichiddaṁ karoti to perforate a body)
      cp. Old High German scetar. For suffix ˚ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid + ra. cp. Sanskrit chidra
    Chiddaka
    adjective having holes or meshes (of a net) DN i.45
    Chiddatā
    feminine perforation, being perforated Ja i.419
    Chiddavant
    adjective having faults, full of defects MN i.272
    Chindati

    1. to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both literally (bandhanaṁ, pāsaṁ, pasibbakaṁ, jīvaṁ, gīvaṁ, sīsaṁ hatthapāde, etc.) and figuratively (taṇhaṁ, mohaṁ, āsavā saṁyojanāni, vicikicchaṁ, vanathaṁ, etc.) frequently in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 88
    • Forms: (1) chid :
    • aorist acchidā Snp 357 as acchidaṁ MN ii.35 acchidda Dhp 351 (cp. agamā);
    • passive pres. chijjati (Sanskrit chidyate) Dhp 284 Iti 70 Ja i.167 Thag 1, 1055 = Mil 395 Mil 40
    • aorist chijji Ja iii.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two)
    • future chijjissati Ja i.336 -
    • absolutive chijjitvā Ja i.202 Ja iv.120 -pp chijjita Ja iii.389 ‣See also chida, chidda, chinna. (2) chind : Active pres. chindati SN i.149 = AN v.174 Snp 657 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 114 Vv-a 123 -
    • imperative chinda Snp 346 Ja ii.153
    • chindatha Dhp 283 -pot. chinde Dhp 370 -ppr. chindamāna Ja i.70 Ja i.233
    • future chindissati Dhp-a ii.258
    • aorist acchindi Vin i.88 & chindi Ja i.140
    • absolutive chinditvā Ja i.222 Ja i.254 Ja i.326 Ja ii.155 infinitive chindituṁ Vin i.206 Pv-a 253
    • gerundive chindiya Ja ii.139 (duc˚).
    • causative chindāpeti Ja ii.104 Ja ii.106 Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.).
    • ched :
    • future checchati (Sanskrit chetsyati) MN i.434 Dhp 350 Mil 391
    • aorist acchecchi (Sanskrit acchaitsīt) SN i.12 AN ii.249 Snp 355 = Th 1, 1275 Ja vi.261
    • acchejji (variant reading of acchecchi) is read at SN iv.205 SN iv.207 SN iv.399 SN v.441 AN iii.246 AN iii.444 Iti 47
    • inf chetuṁ Ja iv.208 Pv iv.328, & chettuṁ Snp 28
    • ger; chetvā Snp 66 Snp 545 Snp 622 Dhp 283 Dhp 369 Ja i.255 Nd2 245 & chetvāna Snp 44 Dhp 346 Ja iii.396
    • gerundive chetabba Vin ii.110 & chejja (often combined with bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin iii.47 (+ bh˚) Ja v.444 (identical) vi.536 Mil 83 Mil 359 Also chejja in neg acchejja SN vi.226
    • causative chedeti Vin i.50 & chedāpeti ib. Ja iv.154 ‣See also cheda, chedana
    Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perfect) base chid; 2. Active (pres.) base with nasal infix. chind; 3. Med ( denominative. base with guṇa ched. cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti

    • Indogermanic* sk(h)eid, Gr (English schism); Latin scindo (English scissors); Old High German scīzan; Anglo-Saxon scītan; cp. also Gothic skaidan, Old High German sceidan Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, 406 as “dvedhākaraṇa”
    Chindanaka
    adjective
    1. breaking ‣See pari˚
    from chindati
    Chinna
    cut off, destroyed Vin i.71 (acchinna-kesa with unshaven hair) MN i.430 DN ii.8 (˚papañca) Ja i.255 Ja ii.155 Ja iv.138 Dhp 338 Pv i.112 (variant reading for bhinna), 116 Dhp-a iv.48 Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa˚) or mutilation (hatthapāda˚, etc.) e.g. Vin i.91 Vin iii.28 Pv ii.24 (ghāna-sīsa˚) Mil 5 cp. sañ˚. As first part of compound chinna˚ very frequently is to be rendered by “without, e.g.
    1. ˚āsa without hope Ja ii.230 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 174
    2. ˚iriyāpatha unable to walk, i.e. a cripple Vin i.91
    • ˚kaṇṇa without ears Pv-a 151
    • ˚gantha untrammelled, unfettered Snp 219
    • ˚pilotika with torn rags, or without rags SN ii.28 Pv-a 171 (+ bhinna˚)
    • ˚bhatta without food i.e. famished starved Ja i.84 Ja v.382 Dhp-a iii.106 = Vv-a 76
    • ˚saṁsaya without doubt Snp 1112 Iti 96 97, 123 Nd2 244
    • ˚sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51
    past participle of chindati
    Chinnaka
    adjective
    1. cut; ; uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297
    from chinna
    Chinnikā
    feminine deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combination with dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appl; d to women Vin iii.128 iv.61 Ja ii.114 Mil 122
    Chuddha
    1. thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dhp 41 = Th 2 468 (spelled chuṭṭha) Ja v.302
    Sanskrit kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, past participle ṣṭyūta ‣See niṭṭhubhati, cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar §§ 66, 120 & Trenckner; Note. p. 75 ‣See also khipita
    Chupati
    1. to touch Vin i.191 Vin iii.37 121 Ja iv.82 Ja vi.166 Vism 249 Dhp-a i.166 (mā chupi). past participle chupita
    2. Dhtp 480 = samphasse
    Chupana
    neuter touching Vin iii.121 Ja vi.387
    Chupita
    1. touched Vin iii.37 Ja vi.218
    past participle of chupati
    Chubhati
    1. given as root chubh (for kṣubh with definition “nicchubhe” at Dhtm 550 ‣See khobha
    Churikā
    feminine
    1. a knife, a dagger, kreese Thag 2, 302 Ja iii.370 Mil 339 cp. Miln trsln. ii.227 Thag-a 227 Dhp-a iii.19
    Sanskrit kṣurikā to kṣura ‣See khura, cp. chārikā → khara
    Churita
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Cheka

    adjective

  • clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c.

    • locative ) Vin ii.96 MN i.509 Ja i.290 (anga-vijjāya); ii.161, 403 v.216, 366 (˚pāpaka good & bad); vi.294 (identical) Mil 293 DN-a i.90 Vv-a 36 215 Dhp-a i.178
    • genuine Vism 437 (opposite kūṭa)
  • Chekatā
    feminine
    1. skill Vv-a 131
    cheka + tā
    Chejja
    1. 1 ‣See chindati
    • one of the 7 notes in the gamut Vv-a 139
    Cheta
    1. an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leopard SN i.198
    Chettar
    1. cutter, destroyer Snp 343 Ja vi.226
    Sanskrit chettṛ, n-agent to chindati
    Cheda
    1. cutting, destruction, loss Snp 367 (˚bandhana) Ja i.419 485; sīsa˚; decapitation Dhp-a ii.204 Pv-a 5
    • aṇḍa˚ castration Ja iv.364 -bhatta ˚ṁ karoti to put on short rations Ja i.156
    • pada˚ separation of words Snp-a 150
    • ˚˚gāmin
    • adjective liable to break fragile AN ii.81 Ja v.453

      • cp. vi˚
      ‣See chindati
    Chedaka
    adjective
    1. cutting; in aṇḍa˚; one who castrates Ja iv.366
    from cheda
    Chedana
    neuter
    1. cutting, severing, destroying DN i.5 (= DN-a i.80 hattha˚-ādi); iii.176 Vin ii.133 AN ii.209 AN v.206 SN iv.169 (nakha˚); v.473 Mil 86 Vism 102 (˚vadha-bandana, etc.)
    ‣See chindati
    Chedanaka
    1. 1. adjective one who tears or cuts off Pv-a 7 - 2.
    2. neuter the process of getting cut (a certain penance for offences: in combination with āpattiyo & pācittiyaṁ) Vin ii.307 Vin iv.168 170, 171, 279; v.133, 146 (cha ch. āpattiyo).

    Cheppā
    feminine
    1. tail Vin i.191 Vin iii.21
    1. J
    Sanskrit sépa

    J

    Ja

    (—˚)

    1. born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Frequently in compounds.: atta˚, ito˚, eka˚, kuto˚, khandha˚, jala˚ daratha˚, dāru˚, di˚, puthuj˚, pubba˚, yoni˚, vāri˚ saha˚, sineha˚
    adjective suffix from jan ‣See janati; cp. ˚ga; gacchati
    Jagat
    neuter
    1. the world, the earth AN ii.15 AN ii.17 (jagato gati) SN i.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world)
    Vedic jagat, intens. of gam ‣See gacchati
    Jagatī
    feminine
    1. only in compounds. as jagati˚:
    1. ˚ppadesa a spot in the world Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104
    • ˚ruha earth grown, i.e. a tree Ja i.216
    ‣See jagat
    Jagga
    neuter
    1. wakefulness SN i.111
    jaggati + ya
    Jaggati
    1. (= jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning “niddā-khaya.”] (a) to watch, to lie awake Ja v.269 (b) to watch over, i.e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up Ja i.148 (dārakaṁ), 245 (āsīvisaṁ)
    Jaggana
    neuter
    1. watching, tending, bringing up Ja i.148 (dāraka˚)
    from jaggati
    Jagganatā
    1. (to jāgarati] watchfulness Ja i.10
    Jagghati
    1. to laugh, to deride Ja iii.223 Ja v.436 Ja vi.522 past participle jagghita Ja vi.522 ‣See also anu˚, pa˚
    2. Intens. to sound-root ghar. for *jaghrati ‣See note on gala. Kern compares Vedic jakṣati, Intens of hasati (Toevoegselen under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh hasane
    Jagghitā
    feminine laughter Ja iii.226
    Jaghana
    neuter
    1. the loins, the buttocks Vin ii.266 Ja v.203
    Vedic jaghana ‣See janghā
    Jaṅgala
    neuter a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle. AN v.21 Ja iv.71 Vv-a 338 cp. ujjangala.
    Jaṅghā
    feminine
    1. the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) DN ii.17≈(SN i.16 = Sn 165 (eṇi˚) Snp 610 Ja ii.240 Ja v.42 Ja vi.34 Thag-a 212). In compounds. jangha (except in janghā-vihāra)
    1. ˚ummagga a tunnel fit for walking Ja vi.428
    • ˚pesanika adjective going messages on foot Vin iii.185 Ja ii.82 Mil 370 (˚iya); Vism 17
    • ˚bala(ṁ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (literally by the strength of, cp. From à force de) -magga a footpath Ja ii.251 Ja v.203 Vv-a 194
    • ˚vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually

      1. in phrase ˚ṁ anucaṅkamati anuvicarati DN i.235 MN i.108 Snp p. 105, p. 115; or ˚ṁ carati Pv-a 73
      • AN i.136 Ja ii.272 Ja iv.7 Ja iv.74 Dhp-a iii.141
      Vedic janghā; cp. Avestan zanga, ankle; Gothic gaggan, to go; Anglo-Saxon gang, walk. From *gheṅgh to walk ‣See also jaghana
    Jaṅgheyyaka
    neuter
    1. literally “belonging to the knees”; the kneepiece of a robe Vin i.287
    ‣See janghā
    Jacca
    adjective
    1. of birth, by birth (usually—˚) MN ii.47 (ittara˚. of inferior birth); Snp p. 80 (kiṁ˚ of what birth, i.e. of what social standing) Ja i.342 (hīna˚ of low birth): Sdhp 416 (identical) Ja v.257 (nihīna˚) Mil 189 (sama˚ of equal rank)
    1. ˚andha adjective blind from birth Ud 62f. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4) Ja i.45 Ja i.76 Ja iv.192 Vb 412f.; in similes at Vism 544, 596
    2. jāti + tya
    Jaccā
    instrumental of jāti.
    Jajjara
    1. withered, feeble with age Thag 2, 270 Ja i.5 Ja i.59 (jarā˚) Thag-a 212 Pv-a 63 (˚bhāva, state of being old)-; not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna SN iv.369
    From intensive of jarati
    Jajjarita
    1. weakened Dhp-a i.7
    past participle of intens. of jar ‣See jarati
    Jañña
    adjective
    1. of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful MN i.30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528) Ja ii.417 (= manāpa sādhu). Ja ii.436
    = janya, cp. jātya ‣See kula & koleyyaka
    Jaṭa
    1. a handle, only in vāsi˚; (h. of an adze) Vin iv.168 SN iii.154 = AN iv.127
    Jaṭā
    feminine
    1. tangle, braid, plaiting, especially (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics ‣See jatila Snp 249 Dhp 241 Dhp 393 Ja i.12 (ajina +); ii.272
    • (b) the tangled branches of trees Ja i.64
    • (c) (figuratively) (the tangle of desire, lust SN i.13 = 165
    1. ˚aṇḍuva (= ˚andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot SN i.117
    • ˚ājina braided hair & an antelope’s hide (worn by ascetics) Snp 1010 (˚dhara), cp. above Ja i.12
    • ˚dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair MN i.282
    B. Sanskrit jatā
    Jaṭita
    1. entangled SN i.13 Mil 102 Mil 390 Vism 1 (etymology)
    past participle of jaṭ; , to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte
    Jaṭin
    1. one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Snp 689 feminine -inī Ja vi.555

    Jaṭila
    1. one who wears a jaṭā, i.e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumerated amongst other ʻ religious ʼ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j paribbājakā Nd2 308; ājīvikā nig˚ j. tāpasā Nd2 149 513; - Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.38 (purāṇa˚ who had previously been j.) = Vv-a 13 = Pv-a 22 SN i.78 Snp p. 103 104 (Keṇiya j.) Ja i.15 Ja ii.382 Ud 6 Dīpavaṁsa i.38
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit jaṭila
    Jaṭilaka
    1. = jaṭila MN i.282 AN iii.276 Mil 202 Vism 382
    Jaṭhara
    masculine neuter [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt = *gelbh ‣See gabbha, cp. Gothic kilpei uterus, Anglo-Saxon cild = English child the belly Mil 175 Jannu(ka)
    Jaṇṇu(ka)
    1. the knee DN ii.160 Ja vi.332 Snp-a ii.230 Dhp-a i.80 (˚ka); ii.57 (identical), 80; iv.204 Vv-a 206 (jaṇṇu-kappara)
    cp. jānu & jannu
    Jatu
    1. lac. As medicine Vin i.201
    • ˚maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin iv.261 consisting of either jatu kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay)
    Sanskrit jatu; cp. Latin bitumen pitch; Anglo-Saxon cwidu. resin, Old High German quiti glue
    Jattu
    neuter
    1. the collar-bone Dhp-a ii.55 (gloss: aṁsakūṭa); Dāvs iv.49
    Vedic jatru
    Jaddhu
    1. only in composition as ; not eating, abstaining from food. ˚ka one who fasts MN i.245
    • ˚māra death by starvation Ja vi.63 (= anāsaka-maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha˚?) ˚mārika AN iv.287 (variant reading ajeṭṭha˚)
    for jaddhuṁ, infinitive to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresponding to Sanskrit jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati
    Jana
    1. a creature, living being: (a) singular an individual, a creature person, man Snp 121 Snp 676 Snp 807 Snp 1023 (sabba everybody) Usually collectively: people, they, one (= From on), with plural of verb Dhp 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd SN i.115 Ja i.167 Ja i.294 Pv-a 6 lokamahājana = loka Dhp-a iii.175 or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many AN i.68 Dhp 320 Dhp-a iii.175 ‣See also puthujjana

      • (b)
      • plural men, persons, people, beings nānā˚ various living beings Snp 1102 (explained at Nd2 248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā Ja i.151 Ja ii.105 tayo j. Ja i.63 iii.52; keci janā some people Pv-a 20 ‣See also Snp 243 Snp 598 Snp 1077 Snp 1121
      1. ˚ādhipa a king of men Ja ii.369
      • ˚inda = preceding Ja iii.280 294
      • ˚esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dhp 255
      • ˚kāya a body or group of people Ja i.28 Dhp-a i.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā-diṭṭhikā); Dīpavaṁsa i.40 -pada country ‣See sep
      • ˚majjhe (
      • locative ) before (all) the people Ja i.294 Thag 2, 394
      • ˚vāda people’s talk, gossip Snp 973
      *gené ‣See janati. cp. Latin genus = From gens, to which also similar in meaning
    Janaka
    1. producing, production Vism 369; adjective (—˚) producing: pasāda˚ Mhvs i.4 (= ˚kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Compendium 144 (A.i)
    2. noun f ˚ikā genetrix, mother Ja i.16 Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by synonym māyā & B. Sanskrit janikā Lal. v.541; Kern, Toevoegselen p. 41)
    to janati
    Janatā
    feminine
    1. a collection of people (“mankind”), congregation, gathering; people, folk DN i.151 (= DN-a i.310 correct jananā), 206 Vin ii.128 = MN ii.93 (pacchimā) AN i.61 (identical); iii.251 (identical) Iti 33 Ja iv.110 Pv iii.57 (= janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa Pv-a 200)
    from janati
    Janati1
    1. only in causative janeti Sanskrit janayati
      1. often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & passive intranstitive jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, synonym sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd; 2 s.v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṁ j. to put forth exertion Ja ii.407 ‣See chanda; (saṁ)vegaṁ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) Ja iii.184 Pv-a 32 Mhvs i.4 dukkhaṁ j. to cause discomfort Pv-a 63
      2. aorist janayi Thag 2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṁ: she bore).
      3. past participle janita produced Pv-a 1

        • ‣ See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti ñāti, etc
        Sanskrit janati (trs.) & jāyate intranstitive ; *gene & *gné to (be able to) produce; Latin gigno, natura, natio; Goth knōps & kunps; Welsh. geni, Anglo-Saxon cennan, Old High German kind etc.
    Janati2
    1. to make a sound Ja vi.64 (= sanati saddaṁ karoti)
    Janana
    adjective
    1. producing, causing (—˚) Iti 84 (anattha˚ dosa) Ja iv.141 Dīpavaṁsa i.2 Dhs-a 258 Dhtp 428. feminine jananī Pv-a 1 (saṁvega˚ dẹsanā); mother (cp. janettī) Ja iv.175 Pv-a 79 Note. jananā DN-a i.310 is misprint for janatā
    2. to janati
    Janapada
    inhabited country, the country (opposite town or market-place), the continent politically: a province, district, county DN i.136 (opp nigama); ii.349 AN i.160 AN i.178 Snp 422 Snp 683 Snp 995 Snp 1102 Ja i.258 Ja ii.3 (opposite nagara), 139, 300 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 111 (province) ‣See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā-janapadā (Mil 350) enumerated at AN i.213 = iv.252 sq. = Nd2 247 (on Snp 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+ Kālingā Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā AN iv.) Vaṁsā (Vangā AN i.), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A) Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.
    1. ˚kathā talk or gossip about the province DN i.7-kalyāṇī a country-beauty, i.e. the most beautiful girl in the province DN i.193 ‣See kalyāṇa
    2. ˚cārikā tramping the country Pv-a 14
    • ˚tthāvariya stableness, security of the realm, in ˚patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin DN i.88 DN ii.16 Snp p. 106
    • ˚padesa a rural district AN iv.366 AN v.101
    jana + pada, the latter in function of collective noun-abstract ‣See pada 3
    Janavati
    1. (?) AN iv.172
    Janitta
    neuter
    1. birthplace Ja ii.80
    jan + tra, cp.
    Janettī
    feminine [feminine to janitṛ = = genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sanskrit form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti˚: pitri˚ mother DN ii.7f. MN iii.248 AN iv.276 Ja i.48 Ja ii.381 iv.48.
    Jantāghara
    1. -1. a (hot room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin i.47 139 ii.119, 220 sq., 280; iii.55 MN iii.126 Ja ii.25 Ja ii.144 Vism 18; Dīpavaṁsa viii.45
    • living room Ja i.449
    • accusative to Abhp. 214 = aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i.e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Middle High German kemenate = Latin caminata German stube = English stove; Low German pesel (room) Latin pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325 = yantra-gṛha (oil-mill?); English Hardy (D. Literally Ztg. 1902, p. 339) = jentāka (hot dry bath), cp. Vinaya Texts i.157; iii.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt-āgāra, to jhā to burn = Sanskrit kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (= Sanskrit kṣāti) + āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (= āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels = jant-āghara
    Janti
    at DN-a i.296 in jantiyā (for DN i.135 jāniyā) = hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine
    1. . But ‣See jāni
    probably = jahanti to jahāti
    Jantu1
    1. a creature, living being, man, person SN i.48 AN iv.227 Snp 586 Snp 773f. 808 1103 Nd2 249 (= satta, nara, puggala) Dhp 105 Dhp 176 Dhp 341 Dhp 395 Ja i.202 Ja ii.415 Ja v.495 Pv ii.949 (= sattanikāya, people, a crowd Pv-a 134)
    Vedic jantu ‣See janati
    Jantu2
    1. a grass Vin i.196
    Jannu
    1. the knee Dhp-a; i.394. —˚ka DN ii.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, variant reading ṇṇ) Ja iv.165 Dhp-a i.48
    cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu
    Japa
    (& jappa variant readings )
    1. muttering, mumbling.; recitation AN iii.56 = J iii.205 (+ manta) Snp 328 (jappa (= niratthaka-kathā Snp-a 334)
    2. studying Ja iii.114 (= ajjhena)
    from japati
    Jap(p)aka
    adjective whispering ‣See kaṇṇa
    Japati
    1. (& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190 = vacane; sound-root jap to mumble, whisper, utter, recite Ja iv.204 Pv ii.61 (= vippalapati Pv-a 94) Pv-a 97 ppr. jappaṁ SN i.166 (palāpaṁ) Ja iv.75 ‣See japa japana; also pari˚
    Japana
    1. (sic. DN-a i.97 otherwise jappana whispering, mumbling ‣See japati, in kaṇṇa˚ ‣See also pari˚
    Jappati
    1. to hunger for, to desire, yearn long for, (c. accusative ) Snp 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaṁ), 899, 902 Nd2 79 (= pajappati),-
    2. past participle jappita Snp 902 ‣See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa˚
    3. not, as customary, to jalp, Sanskrit jalpati (= japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp as in cappeti = Sanskrit carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q.v.) cp. also calaka
    Jappanā
    1. = jappā Snp 945 Dhs 1059≈. cp. pa˚
    Jappā
    feminine
    1. desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd2 on taṇhā) SN i.123 (bhava-lobha˚) Snp 1033 Nd2 250; Nett 12 Dhs 279 1059
    to jappati
    Jambāla
    1. mud; adjective jambālin muddy, as noun jambālī
    2. feminine a dirty pool (at entrance to village) AN ii.166
    3. Sanskrit jambāla
    Jambu
    feminine
    1. the rose-apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana Ja ii.160 Ja v.6 Vv 67 4413, 164
    • As adj
    • feminine jambī sarcastically “rose-apple-maid,” applied to a gardener’s daughter Ja iii.22
    1. ˚dīpa the country of the rose-apples i.e. India Ja i.263 Vv-a 18 Mil 27 etc
    2. ˚nada ‣See jambonada -pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose-apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409
    3. ˚pesī the rind of the r
    • a. fruit Ja v.465
    • ˚rukka the r
    • a. tree Dhp-a iii.211
    • ˚saṇḍa rose-apple grove (= ˚dīpa, name for India) Snp 552 Thag 1, 822
    Sanskrit jambu
    Jambuka
    1. a jackal Ja ii.107 Ja iii.223
    Sanskrit jambuka, to jambh ?
    Jambonada
    1. a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J iv.105 Vv-a 13 340) AN i.181 AN ii.8 AN ii.29 Vv 8417 cp. jātarūpa
    Sanskrit jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)
    Jambhati
    1. to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion Ja vi.40
    cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define; jambh as “gatta-vināma,” i.e. bending the body
    Jambhanā
    feminine
    1. arousing, activity, alertness Vb 352
    to jambhati
    Jamma
    adjective
    1. miserable, wretched, contemptible Ja ii.110 Ja iii.99 (= lāmaka) feminine SN v.217 Dhp 335 Dhp 336 (of taṇhā) Ja ii.428 Ja v.421 Dhp-a iv.44 (= lāmakā)
    2. Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?
    Jamman(a)
    neuter
    1. birth, descent, rank Snp 1018
    to janati
    Jaya
    vanquishing, overcoming, victory DN i.10 Snp 681 Ja ii.406 opposite parājaya Vism 401.
    1. ˚ggaha the lucky die Ja iv.322 (= kaṭaggaha, q.v.) -parājaya victory & defeat Dhp 201
    • ˚pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; ˚ṁ pivati Dhp-a i.193
    • ˚sumana “victory’s joy,” name of a plant (cp. jātisumana Vism 174 Dhp-a i.17 383
    ‣See jayati
    Jayati
    (jeti, jināti)
    1. to conquer sur passive to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat-Pres. jayati
      1. jeti Ja ii.3
      • jināti Snp 439 Dhp 354 Ja i.289 Ja iv.71
      • Pot. jeyya Commentary on Dhp 103 jine Dhp 103 = J ii.4 = Vv-a 69 3rd
      • plural jineyyuṁ SN i.221 (opp parājeyyuṁ)
      • Ppr. jayaṁ Dhp 201
      • future jessati Vv 332 jayissati ib.; jinissati Ja ii.183
      • aorist jini Ja i.313 Ja ii.404 ajini Dhp 3
      • plural jiniṁsu SN i.221 (opp parājiṁsu), 224 (opposite parājiṁsu, with variant reading ˚jiniṁsu) AN iv.432 (opposite ˚jiyiṁsu, with variant reading ˚jiniṁsu). Also
      • aorist ajesi Dhp-a i.44 (= ajini)
      • Proh. (mā) jīyi Ja iv.107
      • Ger jetvā Snp 439 jetvāna Iti 76
      • infinitive jinituṁ Ja vi.193 Vv-a 69
      • Grd. jeyya Snp 288 (a˚); jinitabba Vv-a 69 (variant reading jetabba)
      • Pass. jīyati ‣See parā˚, jīyati is also
      • passive to jarati-
      • causative 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) Ja ii.213 Ja ii.369 375; iv.403
      • jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite to plunder MN i.231 Iti 22 = J iv.71 (variant reading hāpayati) Mil 402 Ja vi.108 (to annul) Mil 227
      • Des jigiṁsati (q.v.)
      • past participle jina & jita; (q.v.)
    Sanskrit jayati, ji to have power, to conquer, cp. jaya = ; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old ‣See jīrati
    Jayā
    feminine
    1. wife only in compound jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply “the pair of them,” and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. husband & wife, a married couple SN ii.98 Ja i.347 Ja iv.70 of birds ‣See also jāyampatikā
    Vedic jāyā
    Jara
    adjective (˚-)
    1. old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable
    2. ˚ūdapānaṁ a spoilt well Ja iv.387
    • ˚gava = ˚goṇa Pv i.81
    • ˚goṇa cp. Sanskrit jaradgava
      1. a decrepit, old bull Ja ii.135
      • ˚sakka “the old Sakka”. Ja iv.389
      • ˚sālā a tumble-down shed Pv-a 78
      ‣See jarati
    Jaratā
    feminine
    1. old age Dhs 644≈ (rū passive j. decay of form); Vism 449
    2. ‣See jarati
    Jarati

    to suffer destruction or decay, to become old in two roots, viz. 1. jar jarati

    1. in causative jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin Ja v.501 = vi.375
    2. jīr Sanskrit jīryati
      1. ‣See jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti
      • Pp jiṇṇa
      • cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā
      Vedic jarati & jīryati,; *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intransitive to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Latin granum, Goth kaúrn, English etc. corn
    Jarā
    feminine & (older); jaras
    • neuter
    1. decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10 34 AN i.51 AN i.138 (as Death’s messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraṁ pahātuṁ) Snp 311 (cp. DN iii.75) Ja i.59 Thag 2, 252f.; Vism 502 (def as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha) Defined as “yā tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṁ pāliccaṁ valittacatā āyuno saṁhāni indriyānaṁ paripāko” DN ii.305 = M i.49 SN ii.2 = Nd2 252 = Dhs 644 cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 195
    • Frequently combined with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) “decay death” ‣See under jāti as to formulas: ˚maraṇa DN ii.31f. MN i.49 Snp 575 ˚maccu Snp 581 Snp 1092 Snp 1094
    • ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara Thag II, 512; Pv ii.611 Vv 6311 Ja iii.515
    1. ˚ghara the house of age adjective like a decayed house Thag 2, 270 (= jiṇṇagharasadisa Thag-a 213)
    2. ˚jajjara feeble with age Ja i.59
    3. ˚jiṇṇa decrepit with age Pv-a 148
    4. ˚dhamma subject to growing old AN i.138 AN i.145 ii.172, 247; iii.54 sq., 71 sq
    5. ˚patta old Ja iii.394 iv.403
    6. ˚bhaya fear of old age AN i.179 AN ii.121
    7. ˚vata the wind of age Dhp-a iv.25
    8. ˚sutta the Suttanta on old age, name of Sutta Nipāta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with “appaṁ vata jīvitaṁ idaṁ”), quoted at Dhp-a iii.320
    9. of the latter only the instrumental jarasā in use: Snp 804 Snp 1123 (= jarāya Nd2 249) Sanskrit jarā & jaraḥ to; *gerā ‣See jarati ‣See also jīraṇa(tā)
    Jala
    neuter
    1. water Snp 845 Ja i.222 Ja iii.188 Ja iv.137
    1. ˚gocara living in the water Ja ii.158
    • ˚ja born or sprung from with Ja iv.333 Ja v.445 Vv-a 42
    • ˚da “giving water,” rain-cloud Dāvs v.32
    • ˚dhara cp. jalandhara rain-cloud
      1. the sea Mil 117
      • ˚dhi = preceding Dāvs v.38
      Sanskrit jala, connection with gala drop (?), probably dialectical; cp. udaka
    Jalati
    1. to burn, to shine DN 3, 188 MN i.487 Ja i.62 ii.380; iv.69 Iti 86 Vv 462 Vv-a 107 Mil 223 Mil 343- causative jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire light, kindle SN i.169 Ja ii.104 Mil 47
    2. past participle jalita Intens. daddaḷhati (q.v.) cp. ujjāleti
    3. Sanskrit jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaṁ), cp. Old High German kol = coal Celtic gûal
    Jalana
    1. (n adjective)
      1. burning Pgdp 16
      Sanskrit jvalana
    Jalābu
    1. the womb SN iii.240
    2. the embryo Ja iv.38
    3. the placenta Ja ii.38

      1. ˚ja born from a womb, viviparous MN i.73 DN iii.230 Ja ii.53 = v.85
      Sanskrit jarāyu, slough & placenta, to; jar ‣See jarati, originally that which decays (= decidua); cp. Gr slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha
    Jalita
    adjective
    1. set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Snp 396 Snp 668 Snp 686 Vv 216 (= jalanto jotanto Vv-a 107) Pv i.1014 (burning floor of Niraya) ii.112 (˚ânubhāva: shining majesty) Pv-a 41 (= āditta burning) Thag-a 292
    past participle to jalati
    Jalūpikā
    feminine
    1. a leech Mil 407 (variant reading jalopikā)
    Sanskrit *jalūkikā = jalūkā & (popular etymology) jalankā (sprung from water), borrowed from Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Celtic gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)
    jalūkā
    1. leech DN-a i.117
    Jalogi
    neuter? toddy (i.e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin ii.294 (pātuṁ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mhvs 4, 10.
    Jalla1
    neuter
    1. moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda˚ or in compound rajo˚, q.v. Snp 249 (= rajojalla Snp-a 291) Ja vi.578 (sweat under the armpits = jallikā Commentary )
    *jalya to jala or gal
    Jalla2
    1. athlete, acrobat Ja vi.271
    probably = jhalla ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Jallikā
    feminine
    1. a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda˚; , etc. AN i.253 (kāli˚) Snp 198 = J i.146; vi.578
    demin. of jalla
    Jaḷa
    adjective
    1. dull, slow, stupid DN iii.265 (a˚) AN ii.252 Pug 13 Mil 251 DN-a i.290
    Sanskrit jaḍa
    Java
    1. (n.) speed SN ii.266 SN v.227 MN i.446 AN ii.113 AN iii.248 Snp 221 Ja ii.290 Ja iv.2 Often combined with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness Ja i.62 Vv-a 104 Pv-a 4 Mil 4
    2. javena instrumental speedily Ja ii.377
    3. adjective swift, quick Ja iii.25 Ja vi.244 (mano˚, as quick as thought); Vv.16 (= vegavanto Vv-a 78) Vv-a 6 (sīgha˚)
      1. ˚cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opposite sīghajava) Dhp-a i.262
      • ˚sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness or alacrity AN i.244f.; ii.250 sq
      Sanskrit java, to javati
    Javati
    1. Vedic ju javate intransitive to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten SN i.33 Ja iv.213 Dāvs v.24 Dhs-a 265 past participle jūta
    Javana

    neuter

  • alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Ps i.80 sq.; Vism 22 Dhs-a 265 (cp. Dhs translation

    • past participle 132 156) DN-a i.194 Usually in compound javana-pañña (adjective of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa-pañña (hāsu˚ at MN iii.25 Ja iv.136) & puthu tikkha˚ SN v.376 SN v.377 Nd2 235 3a. Also in compounds. ˚paññā Ps ii.185 sq.; ˚paññatā AN i.45 ˚paññattaṁ SN v.413 SN v.2. The twelfth stage in the function kicca of an act of perception (or vīthicitta: the stage of full perception or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e.g. p. 459) Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 kiccaṁ; Comp.
    • past participle 29, 115, 245 In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of “going” (not “swiftness”), and the “going” is understood as intellectual movement.

  • Javanaka
    1. = java 2 adjective Vv-a 78

    Jaha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. leaving behind, giving up ‣See attaṁ˚, okaṁ˚, kappaṁ˚, raṇaṁ˚, sabbaṁ˚, etc (SN i.52 Iti 58 Snp 790 Snp 1101 etc.); duj˚; hard to give up Thag 1 495. Jahati & jahati;
    to jahati
    Jahati
    jahāti;
    1. to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce forsake. Ster. explanation at Nd2 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaṁ gameti. Literally as well as figuratively; especially with reference to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities
    • Pres.; jahāti Snp 1 Snp 506 (dosaṁ), 589 Dhp 91
    • imperative jahassu Snp 1121 (rūpaṁ); pot. jahe Iti 34 Dhp 221 Ja iv.58 & jaheyya Snp 362 Iti 115 Ja i.153 iv.58
    • future jahissāmi Ja iii.279 Ja iv.420 Ja v.465 in verse: hassāmi Ja iv.420 Ja v.465
    • German hitvā (very frequent) Snp 284 Snp 328 Dhp 29 Dhp 88, etc.; hitvāna (Sn 60) jahitvā & jahetvā (Sn 500)
    • infinitive; jahituṁ Ja i.138-
    • past participle jahita Snp 231 Kh 9 Mil 261
    • Pass. hāyati SN ii.224 Snp 817 Mil 297 hāyate Ja v.488 & hīyati Ja ii.65 Snp 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare Ja ii.327 pp hīna (q.v.)
    • causative hāpeti (q.v.) ‣See also hāni hāyin, jaha
    Vedic root . cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of); Latin her-es; Sanskrit jihīte to go forth = Old High German gēn, gān, Anglo-Saxon gan = go; also Sanskrit hāni want = Gothic gaidw.
    Jahitikā
    feminine
    1. (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated Ja i.148
    ‣See jahati
    Jāgara
    adjective
    1. waking, watchful, careful, vigilant SN i.3 AN ii.13 = It 116 MN ii.31 Iti 41 Mil 300
    • bahu˚ wide awake, well aware, cautious Snp 972 (cp. rakkhita-mānasāno in same context v.63) Dhp 29
    from jāgarti
    Jāgaraṇa
    neuter
    1. a means for waking or keeping awake Mil 301
    derived from jāgara
    Jāgaratā
    feminine
    1. watchfulness, vigilance SN i.3
    cp. Sanskrit jāgaraṇa
    Jāgarati
    1. to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dhp 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226 Iti 41 Mil 300 past participle jāgarita (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit jāgarti to be awake (reduplicated perfect for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Latin expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr , perfect (for *). Definition at Dhtp 254 by niddā-khaya
    Jāgarita
    neuter
    1. waking, vigil Iti 41 Pug 59
    past participle of jāgarti
    Jāgariyā
    feminine
    1. keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, especially in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore frequently in combination “indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṁ anuyutto” (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e.g. SN ii.218 MN i.32 MN i.273 MN i.354f. 471 AN i.113f.; ii.40
    • Also in ˚ṁ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) Iti 42 Snp 926 (niddaṁ na bahulīkareyya j˚ṁ bhajeyya ātāpī)
    • SN iv.104 MN i.273 MN i.355 Mil 388
    1. ˚ānuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd1 484
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Mvu jāgarikā
    Jāta
    1. As adjective
    2. noun (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (= nibbatta pātubhūta Nd2 256) Snp 576 (jātānaṁ maccānaṁ niccaṁ maraṇato bhayaṁ); jātena maccena kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ bahuṁ Dhp 53 = Mil 333 yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G. Ja vi.337 rukkho j. Ja i.222 latā jātā Dhp 340 gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya-paṇṇāni Vism 250
    3. (n. he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaṁ hoti Snp 742 jātassa jarā paññāyissati Ja i.59 jātaṁ + bhūtaṁ (opposite ajātaṁ abhūtaṁ) Iti 37
    4. (b) “genuine,” i.e natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opposite ajāta like akata, abhūta) ‣See compounds
    5. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata); born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred happened Snp 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto) bhayaṁ jātaṁ (arose) Snp 207 vivādā jātā Snp 828 ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) Ja iii.391 aphāsukaṁ jātaṁ (has occurred Ja i.291
    6. So in loc absolute jāte (jātamhi) “when … has arisen, when there is …,” e.g. atthamhi Vin i.350 = MN iii.154 = Dh 331 vādamhi Snp 832 oghe Snp 1092 kahāpaṇesu jātesu Ja i.121
    7. ˚jāta

      • neuter characteristic; pada˚ pedal character SN i.86 anga˚ the sexual organ Vin i.191 as adjective having become … (= bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of …, sometimes to be rendered by an adjective or a
      • past participle implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (= cuṇṇayitāni) MN iii.92 jālakajāta in bud AN iv.117 chandajāta = chandika Snp 767 sujāta Snp 548 (well-born, i.e. auspicious, blessed happy); pītisomanassa˚ joyful & glad Snp p. 94 Ja i.60 etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume ‣See gandha Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto Ja iii.126 vināsa-ppaccayo jāto Ja i.256
      • a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story Dhp-a i.34
      1. ˚āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant Vv-a 10
      • ˚ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born Vv-a 158 Ja i.391 (so read for jāto varake)
      • ˚kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected with birth, in ˚ṁ karoti to set the horoscope Pv-a 198 (= nakkhatta-yogaṁ uggaṇhāti)
      • ˚divasa the day of birth, birthday Ja iii.391 iv.38
      • ˚maṅgala birth festival, i.e. the feast held on the birth of a child Dhp-a ii.86
      • ˚rūpa “sterling,” pure metal, i.e. gold (in its natural state, before worked cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i.e. the brightcoloured metal: Vv-a 9 Dhp-a iv.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DN-a i.78 it is explained by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha j. Satthu-vaṇṇa. At AN i.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the “white"-smith as opposed to “black"-smith)

        • Combd with hirañña Pv ii.75; very frequently with rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (D; i.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e.g. Vin i.245 Vin ii.294f. SN i.71 SN i.95 SN iv.326 (the moral dangers of “money”: yassa jātarūpa-rajataṁ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); v.353, 407 Dhs 617
        • Other passages illustr the use & valuation of j. are SN ii.234 (˚paripūra); v.92 (upakkilesā) AN i.210 (identical); iii.16 (identical); - SN i.93 SN i.117 MN i.38 AN i.215 AN iii.38 AN iv.199 AN iv.281 AN v.290 Ja ii.296 iv.102
        • ˚veda cp. Vedic jātaveda = Agni
        1. fire SN i.168 Snp 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93 Ja i.214 Ja ii.326 iv.471; v.326; vi.204, 578; Vism 171 DN-a i.226 Dhp-a i.44 (nirindhana, without fuel)
        2. ˚ssara a natural pond or lake Vin i.111 Ja i.470 Ja ii.57
        past participle of janati (janeti), cp. Latin (g)nātus, Gothic kunds; also Old High German knabo
    Jātaka1
    neuter
    1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (M i.133 AN ii.7 AN ii.103 108 Vin iii.8 Pug 43 ‣See navanga
    2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, especially as an animal In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. b.c.), and is frequent in the Jātaka book. 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited ‣See Rh. Davids’ Buddhist India, 189
      1. -209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introduction, for history of the Jātaka literature
      • jātakaṁ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale Ja vi.363 jātakaṁ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106 Dhp-a i.82 Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at Dhp-a i.34
      1. ˚atthavaṇṇanā the Commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq
      2. ˚bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Mil 341
      jāta + ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened
    Jātaka2
    masculine
    1. a son Ja i.239 Ja iv.138
    jāta + ka, belonging to what has been born
    Jātatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250 Dhp-a i.241
    abstract from jāta
    Jāti

    feminine instrumental jātiyā (Sn 423) & jaccā (D; ii.8 Ja iii.395 Dhp 393); ablative jātiyā (SN i.88) & jātito (by descent: DN ii.8);

  • locative jātiyaṁ (Pv-a 10) & jātiyā (Pv-a 78)
    1. -1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth “ future life” as disposition to be born again, “former life” as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp explanation of jarā) as: yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattanaṁ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaṁ paṭilābho DN ii.305 = SN ii.3 = Nd2 257

      • Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca-samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enum; d in various formulae, either in full or abbreviated ‣See Nd2 258 viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass’ upāyāsa in the dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin i.10 AN i.176 AN iii.416 ˚dhamma destined to be born, etc. MN i.161f. 173; - AN v.216 Nd2 258 304, 630, etc., in various connections (referring to some dukkha)
      • (b) as Nos. 1
      1. -4: Nd2 254 494b Ja i.168 etc
      • (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation implying the whole series 1
      1. -5): SN v.224 AN v.144 jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ Vin i.1 DN ii.31 DN ii.57 etc. ˚ika AN ii.11 AN ii.173 ˚īya MN i.280 Nd2 40
      • (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saṁsāra: Nd2 282f; cp. kicchaṁ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca DN ii.30
      • (e) as Nos. 1 + 4 pahīna-jātimaraṇa
      • adjective (= free from life & death i.e. saṁsāra) AN i.162 ˚bhayassa pāraga AN ii.15 ˚kovida Snp 484 atāri ˚ṁ asesaṁ Snp 355 (cp. 500) ˚assa pāraga Snp 32
      • (f) = e + saṁsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saṁsāraṁ jātimaraṇagāmino AN ii.12 = 52 jātimaraṇasaṁsāraṁ ye vajanti punappunaṁ.. avijjāy’ eva sā gati Snp 729
      • (g) as Nos. 1 + 2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraṁ AN i.133 Snp 1048 jātijar’ upaga Snp 725 = It 106; saṁyojanaṁ jātijarāya chetvā Iti 42 -Sn 1052, 1060 Dhp 238 Dhp 348 cp. jāti ādinā nihīna Pv-a 198
      • Other phrases applications:; Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D; i.81; iii.50 AN i.164 MN ii.20) Arahantship implies the impossibility of a
      • future rebirth ‣See formula khīṇā jāti (M i.139; Snp p. 16, etc. and arahant ii.A: jātiyā parimuccati SN i.88 jātiṁ bhabbo pahātuṁ. AN v.144 sq
      • antimā jāti the last rebirth DN ii.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence Pv-a 1 atītajātiyaṁ in a former life (= pure Pv-a 10 On jāti as dukkha ‣See Vism 498
      1. -501. 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. , genus), often combined with gotta. Two grades of descent are enumerated at Vin iv.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas Brāhmaṇas
      • The various meanings of jāti are given by Buddhaghosa at Vism 498, 499 in the following classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata-lakkhaṇa paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya-sīla
      • Kiṁ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage DN i.121; jāti-rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings Ja i.338 na naṁ jāti nivāresi brahmalok’ ûpapattiyā Snp 139 jātiṁ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father mother Snp 421 Snp 1004 cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Snp 136 Snp 142; identical with brāhmaṇo Snp 650 with nāma gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena etc. Vin iv.6 jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name DN ii.8; cp. jāti-gotta-kula Ja ii.3 ‣See also j
      • vāda
      • a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3) catujātigandha four kinds of scent Ja i.265 Ja ii.291 4. (jāti˚) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opposite adulterated inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in compounds., like ˚maṇi, ˚vīṇā, etc
      1. ˚kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn SN v.168 AN i.167 Snp 209 Snp 517 Snp 743 Dhp 423
      • ˚khetta the realm of rebirth Pv-a 138 (= dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni)
      • ˚thaddha conceited, proud of birth Snp 104 (+ dhanatthaddha, gotta˚: proud of wealth & name) -thera a Th. by rank DN iii.218
      • ˚nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1
      • ˚pabhava the origin or root of existence Snp 728
      • ˚puppha nutmeg Ja vi.367
      • ˚bhaya the fear of rebirth AN ii.121
      • ˚bhūmi natural ground, in ˚bhūmaka, ˚bhūmika, ˚bhūmiya living on natural ground (vassaṁ vasati) MN i.145 AN iii.366
      • ˚maṇi a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417
      • ˚maya constituting birth, being like birth Thag-a 285
      • ˚vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a “well-bred brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena “of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation” DN i.120 etc. (= DN-a i.281) AN i.166 AN iii.152 AN iii.223 Snp 315 Snp 596 cp. gotta-vāda (e.g. DN i.99)
      • ˚vibhaṅga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Snp 600
      • ˚vīṇā a first-class lute Ja ii.249
      • ˚sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.˚) AN iii.152
      • ˚sambhava the origin of birth AN i.142 AN iii.311 Ja i.168
      • ˚sambheda difference of rank Dhp-a i.166
      • ˚saṁsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saṁsāra of rebirths ‣See above 1 d.
      • feminine : pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) MN i.139 AN iii.84 AN iii.86 ˚ṁ khepetvā identical Thag 2 168; vitiṇṇo j.˚ n’ atthi tassa punabbhavo Snp 746
      • ˚sindhava a well-bred horse Ja ii.97
      • ˚ssara the remembrance of (former) births (˚ñāṇa) Ja i.167 Ja iv.29 Dhp-a ii.27 Dhp-a iv.51 cp. cutûpapāta-ñāṇa)
      • ˚hiṅgulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion Ja v.67 Vv-a 4 168 324
      ‣See janati & cp. Latin gens; Gothic kind-ins
    Jātika
    1. (—˚) adjective
    2. being like, being of, having, etc ‣See jāta 3: duppañña˚ & sappañña˚ MN i.225 dabba AN i.254 mukhara˚ Snp 275 viññū˚ Snp 294 māna Ja i.88
    3. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana˚ MN ii.19 aviheṭhaka˚ Mil 219 samāna˚ (of equal rank) Dhp-a i.390 veṇa˚ (belonging to the bamboo-workers) Pv-a 175
    Jātimant
    adjective
    1. of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Snp 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo) Ja i.342 (jātimanta-kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.˚ DN i.76 = MN ii.17 DN-a i.221 Mil 215 Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Snp 1136 Nd2 259 (explained by paṇḍita paññavā)
    • ajātima not of good birth Ja vi.356 (opposite sujātimant ibid.)
    jāti + mant
    Jātu
    (indeel.)
    1. surely, undoubtedly (ekaṁsavacanaṁ Snp-a 348) usually in negative (& interrog. sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu) mā jātu Vin ii.203 Snp 152 Snp 348 (no ce hi jātu) Ja i.293 374; iv.261; v.503. Na jātucca at Ja vi.60 is apparently for na jātu ca
    Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Latin credo Pali maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu “it might happen.” Neither of these derivations is satisfactory
    Jāna
    adjective
    1. knowing or knowable, understandable Ja iii.24 (= jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand DN i.170 DN i.187 MN i.487 MN ii.43
    • su˚ recognizable, intelligible Pv iv.135 (= suviññeyya Pv-a 230). cp. ājāna
    to jñā ‣See jānāti
    Jānana
    neuter
    1. knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill Ja i.145 (attānaṁ—˚kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self-recognition), 200 (—˚manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by tumhākaṁ) ii.221 Snp-a 330 Dhp-a ii.73 (˚sabhāva ñatta) DN-a i.86 (akkhara˚); Vism 391 (˚atthāya in order to know), 436 (= pajānana). cp. ājānana. ajānana not knowing (˚-) Ja v.199 Ja vi.177 not known Ja i.32 (˚sippa)
    from jñā
    Jānanaka
    adjective
    1. knowing Dhs-a 394
    Sanskrit *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sanskrit jānaka (c. genitive) expert Avs ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216
    Jānanatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of knowing, knowledge Kp-a 144
    abstract from jānana
    Jānapada
    adjective-noun
    1. belonging to the country, living in the c.; plural country-folk (opposite negamā townsfolk) DN i.136 DN i.142 MN ii.74 Ja ii.287 Ja ii.388 DN-a i.297 (= janapada-vāsin)
    2. from janapada
    Jānāti
    to know.
    1. I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān˚ & jñā˚; are represented in Pali by jān˚ & ñā˚ (ña˚) 1.; jān : pres. jānāti pot. jāneyya (Sn 781) & jaññā (A; iv.366 Snp 116 Snp 775 Dhp 157 Dhp 352 Ja ii.346 Ja iv.478) 2nd singular jāneyyāsi (M i.487 Ja i.288), 1st plural jāniyāma (Sn 873) & (archaic jānemu (Sn 76, 599 Vv 8311); -
    2. imperative jānāhi (Sn 596 1026; Pv ii.912), 3rd. singular jānātu (It 28); -ppr. jānanto & jānaṁ (D; i.192 AN i.128 Snp 722), ppr.
    3. medium jānamāna (J i.168); -
    4. future jānissati (J ii.342; vi.364); -
    5. aorist ajāni (Sn 536) & jāni (J; i.125, 269), 3rd
    6. plural jāniṁsu (J ii.105 Vv-a 113); -
    7. absolutive jānitvā (J i.293; iii.276) infinitive jānituṁ (J i.125).
    8. causative jānāpeti ‣See below iv.2
    9. ñā :
    10. future ñassati (DN i.165); -
    11. aorist aññāsi (J i.271 & nāsi (Sn 471), 3rd
    12. plural aññaṁsu (Vv.22; 4).
    13. absolutive ñatvā (frequently); -
    14. gerundive ñeyya AN ii.135 ‣See below & ñātabba (Pv-a 133); -infinitive ñātuṁ (frequently)-
    15. past participle ñāta (q.v.)
    16. passive ñāyati to be called or named (Mil 25)
      1. II. Cognate Forms: Nd2 s.v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṁ katvā (very frequently) The 1st explanation is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaṁ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? DN i.193; Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto MN i.111 similarly AN iv.153f. ‣See further DN i.2 DN i.40 DN i.84 DN i.157 sq, 165 192 sq., 238 sq. AN i.128 AN iii.338 AN v.226 Snp 908 Nd2 35 413, 517; Vism 200
      1. III. Meaning: (1) Intransitive to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know DN i.216 te kho evaṁ jāneyyaṁ they ought to know ib. jānantā nāma n’ âhesuṁ “nobody knew” Ja iii.188 jānāhi find out Ja i.184 kālantarena jānissatha you will ‣See in time Pv-a 13 ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajānamāna identical Pv ii.314
      • Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c.
      • accusative, but also with genitive: Ja i.337 Ja ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaṁ ahaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ jānāsi DN i.88 aham p’ etaṁ na jānāmi Snp 989 jānanti taṁ yakkhabhūtā Pv iv.135 paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally Ja i.262 iii.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti SN i.178 jānāti maṁ Bhagavā SN i.116 kathaṁ jānemu taṁ mayaṁ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311 yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaṁ so that we may know what a b. is Snp 599 yath’ âhaṁ jāneyyaṁ vasalaṁ Snp p. 21; ajānanto ignorant Pv-a 4 annapānaṁ ajāṇanto (being without bread water) Pv-a 169 ittaraṁ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv i.1111 ingha me uṇh’ odakaṁ jānāhi find me some hot water SN i.174 seyyaṁ jānāhi Vin iv.16 phalaṁ pā
      • passive jānamāna (having experienced) Ja i.168 mantaṁ j. (to be in possession of a charm Ja i.253 maggaṁ na j. Snp 441 pamāṇaṁ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) Pv-a 130

    17. With double

      • accusative : to recognize as, to ‣See in, take for, identify as, etc (cp.
      • causative ): petaṁ maṁ jānāhi “see in me a Peta Pv ii.912 (= upadhārehi Pv-a 119); bhadd’ itthiyā ti maṁ aññaṁsu (they knew me as = they called me Vv 224

        1. IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as neuter = knowledge (cp ñāṇa): yāvatakaṁ ñeyyaṁ tāvatakaṁ ñāṇaṁ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i.e. he knows all) Nd2 2352m ñāṇaṁ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n’ atthi “beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge” ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge Pv-a 1
        2. Caus jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaṁ to identify, to reveal oneself Ja i.107 (atechnical term ajānāpetvā) vi.363; Vism 92 (atechnical term) Pv-a 149 (atechnical term) Dhp-a ii.62
        Vedic jña, jānāti *genē & *gné, cp. Latin nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp English i-gnorant); Gothic kunnan; Old High German kennan, Anglo-Saxon cnāwan = English know
    Jāni1
    feminine
    1. deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill-treatment DN i.135 = AN i.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā) SN i.66 (hatajānisu), Ja i.55 (variant reading jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): iv.72 (dhana,˚ variant reading hāni) Dhp 138 (= Dhp-a iii.70 dhanassa jāni, variant reading hāni)
    from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati ‣See jahati & cp. janti
    Jāni2

    feminine wife, in jānipatayo (

  • plural ) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) AN ii.59f.

  • Jānu
    neuter
    1. (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee Ja ii.311 Ja iv.41 Ja vi.471 DN-a i.254
    1. ˚maṇḍala the knee-cap, the knee AN i.67 AN ii.21 iii.241 sq. Pv-a 179
    Vedic jānu = Latin genu, Gothic, Old High German, etc. kniu, English knee
    Jānuka
    neuter = jānu AN iv.102
    Jāpayati
    causative of jayati.
    Jāmātar
    (& jāmāta Ja iv.219)
    1. daughter’s husband, son-inlaw Thag 2, 422 (= Thag-a 269 duhitu pati) Ja ii.63 Ja v.442
    Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. uncertain. BR. take it as jā + mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife’s family, a bīna marriage. More likely from ldg *gem, to marry. cp. Gr , Latin gener
    Jāyati
    (jāyate)
    1. to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd plural jāyare Ja iii.459 Ja iv.53 Mil 337 ppr, jāyanto Snp 208
    2. aorist jāyi Ja iii.391 infinitive jātum Ja i.374

      • jāyati (loko) jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies DN ii.30 Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire-wood is born the fire Snp 462
      • Vin ii.95 = 305 Snp 114 Snp 296 Snp 657 Dhp 58 Dhp 193 Dhp 212 Dhp 282; Pv iii.114 (are reborn as). cp. vi˚
      from jan ‣See janati
    Jāyampatikā
    1. (plural )

      1. wife & husband Vv-a 286
      ‣See jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī
    Jāyā
    feminine
    1. wife Vin ii.259 = 264 Ja iv.285
    1. ˚patī (plural ) husband & wife Pv-a 159 Dāvs v.2
    2. from jan
    Jāyikā
    1. feminine (cp. jāyā) wife MN i.451
    Jāra
    1. a paramour, adulterer Ja i.293 Ja ii.309 feminine ˚t adulteress Vin ii.259 268; iii.83
    2. Vedic jāra
    Jāla1
    neuter
    1. a net; netting, entanglement (literally or figuratively): snare, deceptíon (= māyā)
    • A I.it. Nd2 260 (= suttajāla, a plaiting of threads) Snp-a 115 263 (= suttamaya) DN i.45 (anto-jālikata caught in a net) Snp 62 Snp 71 Snp 213 Snp 669 Ja i.52 Ja vi.139
    • kinkiṇika a row of bells DN ii.183 muttā˚ a net of pearls Ja i.9 Vv-a 40 loha˚ Pv-a 153 hema˚ Vv.35; a fowler’s net Dhp 174 a spider’s web Dhp 347 nets for hair Ja vi.188 pabbata˚ a chain of mountains Ja ii.399 sirā˚ network of veins Ja v.69 Pv-a 68
    • frequently in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 90
    • B. figUratively Very often applied to the snares of Māra: SN i.48 (maccuno) Snp 357 (identical) Dhp-a iii.175 (Māra˚) Snp 527 (deception); taṇhā˚ the snare of worldly thirst (cp. ˚tanhā) MN i.271 Thag 1, 306 Snp-a 351 kāma˚ Thag 1, 355 moha˚ SN iii.83 mohasama Dhp 251 diṭṭhi˚ the fallacies of heresy DN i.46 Ja vi.220 ñāṇa the net of knowledge Vv-a 63 Dhp-a iii.171 bhumma (vijjā) “earthly net,” i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth Snp-a 353
    1. ˚akkhi a mesh of a net Ja i.208: - taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059 1136 Dhs-a 367
    • ˚pūpa a “netcake"? Dhp-a i.319
    • ˚hatthapāda
    • adjective having net-like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa probably with reference to long nails DN ii.17 ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.14, note 3, cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (explained at Vv-a 315: jālavantehi abhilohita-nakkehi. Tena jāli (variant reading jāla-) hatthataṁ mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇaṁ tambanakhataṁ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti)
    Vedic jāla, probably from jaṭ; to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa
    Jāla2
    glow, blaze Ja v.326 Pv-a 52 (= tejas), 154 (raṁsi˚) Mil 357 Vism 419 (kappavināsaka˚).
    1. ˚roruva name of one of the two Roruva hells (“blazes” Ja v.271
    • ˚sikhā a glowing crest i.e. a flame Nd2 11 (= accī)
    Sanskrit jvāla, from jalati
    Jālaka
    neuter
    1. a net Ja vi.536 Dāvs v.51. - 2. a bud AN iv.117f. (˚jāta in bud).
    2. feminine jālikā chain armour Mil 199
    3. jāla1 + ka
    Jālā
    feminine
    1. a flame Ja i.216 Ja i.322 Mil 148 Mil 357
    ‣See jāla2
    Jālin
    adjective-noun “having a net,” ensnaring, deceptive: (a) literally a fisherman Ja ii.178
    • (b) figuratively usually in f ˚inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) SN i.107 = Dh 180 AN ii.211 Thag 1, 162 908 Dhs 1059 Vism 1 Dhs-a 363 cp. Mvu i.166 iii.92
    Jāleti
    1. to cause to burn, to light, kindle Ja ii.104 Ja iv.290 Ja v.32
    causative of jalati ‣See also jaleti
    -Ji
    1. (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. winning, victorious: sangāma˚ victorious in fight, in sangāmaj uttama “greatest of conquerors” Dhp 103 sabba SN iv.83
    From jayati to conquer
    Jigacchā
    feminine ‣See jighacchā.
    Jigiṁsaka
    adjective
    1. one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Snp 690
    ‣See next
    Jigiṁsati
    1. to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet Snp 700 Ja ii.285 Ja iii.172 (Burmese variant jigissaṁ); iv.406 (variant reading SS. jihiṁ˚, Burmese manuscripts jigī˚); v.372; vi.268. As jigīsati Thag 1, 1110
    Desidentical of ji, jayati. On etymology ‣See also Kern, Toevoegselen p. 44
    Jigiṁsanatā
    feminine
    1. desire for, covetousness Vb 353 (Burmese variant nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29
    n. abstract from jigiṁsati
    Jigucchaka
    adjective one who dislikes or disapproves of MN i.327 (paṭhavī˚, āpa˚ etc.) Mil 343
    Jigucchati
    1. to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instrumental) DN i.213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): AN iv.174 (kāyaduccaritena) Snp 215 (kammehi pāpakehi Snp-a 266 = hiriyati) Ja ii.287 Pug. 36
    • ppr. jigucchamāna Iti 43
    • gerundive jigucchitabba AN i.126
    • past participle jigucchita Snp 901
    • ‣ See also jeguccha, jegucchin
    Desidentical of gup
    Jigucchana
    neuter dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159 Pv-a 120
    Jigucchā
    feminine disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo˚ (detesting asceticism) DN i.174 SN i.67 AN ii.200 jigucchabībhaccha-dassana detestable & fearful-looking Pv-a 56 Note. AN different spelling, digucchā, occurs at Dhs-a 210
    Jighacchati
    1. to have a desire to eat, to be hungry DN ii.266 past participle jighacchita Dhp-a ii.145
    2. Desidentical to ghasati, eat
    Jighacchā
    feminine
    1. appetite, hunger, often combined with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e.g. SN i.18 AN ii.143 AN ii.153 Mil 304
    • M i.13, 114; 364; iii.97, 136 AN iii.163 Dhp 203 (j. paramā rogā) Ja ii.445 Ja iii.19 (˚abhibhūta = chāta) Mil 204 Mil 304 Sdhp 118 Sdhp 388 cp. khudā & chāta.; Note. AN different spelling as dighacchā occurs at AN ii.117
    from jighacchati
    Jiñjuka
    1. the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) Ja iv.333 (akkhīni j. ˚phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); v.156 (j. ˚phalasannibha) Dhp-a i.177 (˚gumba)
    Jiṇṇa
    1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo-anupatta Nd2 261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DN-a i.283
    2. Vin ii.189 DN i.114 MN ii.48f. 66 AN ii.249 AN iv.173 Snp 1 (urago va jiṇṇaṁ tacaṁ jahāti) Pv i.121 (same simile) Snp 1120 Snp 1144 Ja i.58 Ja iii.22 (-pilotikā worn-out rags) Dhp 155 Dhp 260; Pv ii.114 (jarājiṇṇa Pv-a 147) Pug 33 Vism 119 (˚vihārā), 356 (˚sandamānikā), 357 (˚koṭṭha) Thag-a 213 (-ghara a tumble-down house) Pv-a 40 (-goṇa = jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). cp. ˚tara Ja iv.108
    3. digested Ja ii.362
    past participle of jarati
    Jiṇṇaka
    adjective = jiṇṇa Snp 98 Snp 124 Ja iv.178 Ja iv.366 Sdhp 299 (sālā).
    Jiṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. decrepitude DN-a; i.283 (jarā˚)
    cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā
    Jita
    1. conquered, subdued, mastered: neuter victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin i.8 Dhp 40 Dhp 104 (attā jitaṁ seyyo for attā jito seyyo ‣See Dhp-a ii.228), 105, 179 Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya)

      • cp. vi˚
      past participle of jayati, conquer
    Jitatta
    neuter
    1. mastery, conquest Vv-a 284
    n. abstract of jita
    Jina
    conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, “Victor”: jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaṁ Upaka jino ti Vin i.8 = M i.171 Vin v.217 Snp 379 Snp 697 Snp 989 Snp 996 magga˚ conqueror of the Path Snp 84f.; saṁsuddha˚ (identical) Snp 372 cp. khetta˚. In other connections: Pv iv.333 Thag 2, 419 (jin’ amhase rūpinaṁ Lacchiṁ explained at Thag-a 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat’ amha rūpavatiṁ Siriṁ).
    1. ˚cakka the Buddha’s reign, rule, authority Ja iv.100
    • ˚putta disciple of the B. Mil 177
    • ˚bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror Pv-a 254
    • ˚sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dīpavaṁsa iv.3, 10
    past participle medium of jayati
    Jināti
    1. = jayati (jeti) ‣See also vi˚
    Jimha
    adjective
    1. crooked, oblique, slant, figuratively dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opposite uju | MN i.31 (+ vanka). AN v.289 AN v.290 Ja i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111 = v.222 vi.66; Vism 219 (ajimha = uju) Pv-a 51 (citta˚ vanka …; opposite uju). cp. kuṭila
    Vedic jihma
    Jimhatā
    feminine
    1. crookedness, deceit (opposite ujutā) Dhs 50 51 (+ vankatā) Vb 359
    n. abstract to jimha
    Jimheyya
    neuter
    1. crookedness, deceit, fraud MN i.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.˚) AN iv.189 (identical) v.167
    from jimha
    Jiyā
    feminine
    1. a bow string MN i.429 (five kinds) Ja ii.88 iii.323; Vism 150 DN-a i.207
    • ˚kāra bowstring-maker Mil 331
    Vedic jyā = Latin filum thread
    Jivhā
    feminine
    1. the tongue. (a) physically: Vin i.34 AN iv.131 Snp 673 Snp 716 Dhp 65 Dhp 360 Ja ii.306 Pv-a 99 (of Petas: visukkha-kanthaṭṭha j.), 152
    • Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Snp 1022 p. 108; & pahūta-jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni) DN i.106 = Sn p. 107 DN ii.18
    • ˚dujjivha
    • adjective having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) AN iii.260
    • (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumeration of sense-organs (jivhāya rasaṁ sāyati Nd2 under rūpa; jivhā-viññeyya rasa DN i.245 DN ii.281 MN ii.42) Vin i.34 DN iii.102 DN iii.226 MN i.191 Vism 444
    1. ˚agga the tip of the tongue AN iii.109 AN iv.137 Dhp-a ii.33
    • ˚āyatana the organ of taste DN iii.243 DN iii.280 DN iii.290 Dhs 585 609, 653
    • ˚indriya the sense of taste DN iii.239 Dhs 585 609, 972
    • ˚nittaddana (correct to -nitthaddhana tying the tongue by means of a spell DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96) -viññāṇa the cognition of taste MN i.112 DN iii.243 Dhs 556 612, 632
    • ˚samphassa contact with the sense of taste SN i.115 DN iii.243 Dhs 585 632, 787
    Vedic jihvā, cp. Latin lingua (older dingua); Gothic tuggo; Old High German zunga; English tongue
    Jīna
    1. diminished, wasted, deprived of (with accusative or ablative) having lost; with
    2. accusative : Ja iii.153 Ja iii.223 Ja iii.335 v.99 (atthaṁ: robbed of their possessions; Com parihīna vinaṭṭha)

      • with ablative: Ja v.401 (read jīnā dhanā)
      past participle of jīyati
    Jīyati
    1. to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni) to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi Ja v.100 jīyanti Ja iii.336 (dhanā); jīyittha SN i.54 Ja i.468 mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiṁ) Ja iv.107 Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) DN ii.30 cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless Ja vi.528 (= jīyissanti) gerundive jeyya ‣See ajeyya2. cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy˚: jiyyati Ja vi.150 jiyyāma Ja ii.75 (we lose parihāyāma).
    2. past participle jīna, q.v
    3. passive of ji, cp. Sanskrit jyāti & jīryate
    Jīraka1
    1. digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion Ja ii.181 ‣See ajīraka
    Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Latin viridis
    Jīraka2
    1. cummin-seed Mil 63 Ja i.244 Ja ii.363 Vv-a 186
    Jīraṇa
    neuter
    1. decaying, getting old Dhtp 252
    from jīr
    Jīraṇatā
    feminine
    1. the state of being decayed or aged, old age decay, decrepitude MN i.49 SN ii.2 Nd2 252 = Dhs 644 Pv-a 149 Jirati & Jirayati;
    n. abstract of jīr = jar ‣See jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā
    Jīrati
    Jīrayati;
    1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin i.237 (jīrati) Ja v.501 (Burmese variant for jarayetha, Commentary vināseyya) = vi.375 Pv-a 57 Pv-a 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old AN iii.54 (jarā-dhammaṁ mā jīri “old age may not get old,” or “the law of decay may not work”); Vism 235 (where identical passage DN ii.30 reads jīyati) Dhp-a i.11 (cakkhūni jīranti)
    2. intranstitive to be digested Vism 101. Jireti & Jirapeti;
    causative of jarati
    Jīreti
    Jīrāpeti;
    1. to work out, to digest Ja i.238 Ja i.274 (jīreti) Dhp-a i.171 Appl to bhati, wages: bhatiṁ ajīrāpetva not working off the with Ja ii.309 Ja ii.381
    • jīrāpeti as “destroy” at Thag-a 269 in explanation of nijjareti (+ vināseti)
    Verbal formation from jīra1
    Jīva1
    adjective-noun
    1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumerated with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla DN i.53 (= DN-a i.161 jīvasaññī). “taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ udāhu aññaṁ j. aññaṁ s.” (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) ‣See D i.157 188; ii.333, 336, 339 SN iv.392f. MN i.157 MN i.426f. AN ii.41
    2. Also in this sense at Mil 30 Mil 54 Mil 86
    3. Vin iv.34 SN iii.215 SN iii.258f.; iv.286; v.418 AN v.31 AN v.186 193
    4. life, in yāvajīvaṁ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime DN iii.133 Vin i.201 Dhp 64 Ja ii.155 Pv-a 76
      1. ˚gāhaṁ (adverb ) taken alive, in phrase j.˚ gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti SN i.84 Ja i.180 Ja ii.404 cp. karamara
      2. ˚loka the animate creation Ja iii.394
      3. ˚sūla “life-pale,” a stake for execution Ja ii.443
      4. ˚sokin (= sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow Ja vi.509
      5. Sanskrit jīva, Indogermanic *gīṷos = Latin vīvus, Gothic quius, Old High German queck, English quick, Lithuanian gyvas
    Jīva2
    1. neuter the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on DN iii.201
    Jīvaka
    adjective = jīva, in bandhu˚; name of a plant Vv-a 43
    • feminine ˚ikā q.v. Jivam-jivaka

    Jīvaṁ-jīvaka
    masculine onomatopoeic name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaṁ jīva DN iii.201 Ja v.406 Ja v.416 Ja vi.276 Ja vi.538
    1. . With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaṁjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaṁjīveṇaṁ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī past participle 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation (“living he goes with life"? or “he goes like the j bird"?)
    2. Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer Avs ii.227 has jīvañjīvaka
    Jīvati
    1. to live be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instrumental or nissāya). Imper pres. jīva Snp 427 very frequently with ciraṁ live long … as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraṁ jīva Ja vi.337 c. jīvāhi Snp 1029 Pv ii.333; c. jīvantu Pv i.55 -pot jīve Snp 440 Snp 589 Dhp 110 -ppr. jīvaṁ Snp 427 Snp 432 ppr. medium jīvamāna Ja i.307 Pv-a 39 -infinitive jīvituṁ Ja i.263 Dhp 123

      • Sn 84 sq., 613 sq., 804 Dhp 197 Ja iii.26 Ja iv.137 Ja vi.183 (jīvare) Pv-a 111
      Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇadhāraṇe *gei̯é = Latin vīvo Gothic ga-quiunan; Middle High German quicken, cp. English quicken
    Jīvana
    neuter living, means of subsistence, livelihood Pv-a 161 Spelt jīvāna (variant reading jīvino)
    • adjective at Ja iii.353 (yācana˚).

    Jīvamānaka
    adjective
    1. living, alive Vism 194
    ppr. medium of jīvati + ka
    Jīvikā
    feminine
    1. living, livelihood SN iii.93 AN v.87 AN v.210 Ja iv.459 Mil 122 Snp-a 466 frequently in combination ˚ṁ kappeti to find or get one’s living: Ja ii.209 Pv-a 40 etc.; ˚kappaka finding one’s livelihood (c. absolutive by) Ja ii.167 cp. next
    2. abstract from jīvaka
    Jīvita
    neuter
    1. (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp jīvikā) Vin ii.191 SN i.42 SN iv.169 SN iv.213 MN ii.73 (appaṁ) AN i.155 AN i.255 AN iii.72 AN iv.136 (appakaṁ parittaṁ) Snp 181 Snp 440 Snp 574 Snp 577 Snp 931 Snp 1077 Dhp 110 Dhp 111 Dhp 130 Ja i.222 Pv i.1111 (ittaraṁ); ii.67 (vijahati) Dhs 19 295; Vism 235, 236; Ps ii.245 Pv-a 40
    • jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin iii.73 DN iii.235 MN ii.99 AN iii.146 436; iv.370 sq. Pv-a 67
    1. ˚āsā the desire for life AN i.86
    • ˚indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin iii.73 SN v.204 Kvu 8, 10 Mil 56 Dhs 19 Vism 32, 230 (˚upaccheda destruction of life) 447 (definition) Dhp-a ii.356 (˚ṁ upacchindati to destroy life) Vv-a 72
    • ˚kkhaya the dissolution of life, i.e. death Ja i.222 Pv-a 95 Pv-a 111
    • ˚dāna “the gift of life,” saving or sparing life Ja i.167 Ja ii.154
    • ˚nikanti desire for life AN iv.48
    • ˚parikkhārā (
    • plural ) the requisites of life MN i.104f. AN iii.120 AN v.211
    • ˚pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life DN i.46 (= DN-a i.128) SN ii.83 AN iv.13
    • ˚pariyosāna the end of life, i.e. death Ja i.256 Pv-a 73
    • ˚mada the pride of life, enumerated under the 3 madā viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life DN iii.220 AN i.146 AN iii.72
    • ˚rūpa
    • adjective living (lifelike) Ja ii.190
    • ˚saṅkhaya = ˚khaya Snp 74 Dhp 331 Nd2 262 (= ˚pariyosāna)
    • ˚hetu (
    • adverb ) on the ground of life, for the sake of life AN iv.201 AN iv.270
    Vedic jīvita, originally past participle of jīvati “that which is lived,” cp. same formation in Latin vīta = *vīvita; Gr living, sustenace, & , “diet”
    Jīvin
    adjective (usually—˚) living, leading a life (of …) SN i.42 SN i.61 Snp 88 Snp 181 Dhp 164 Pv-a 27 cp. dīgha˚ dhamma˚.
    Juṇhā
    feminine [ Sanskrit jyotsnā ‣See also Pali dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp kālapakkha) Vin i.138 176 Ja i.165 Ja iv.498 (˚pakkha).
    Juti
    feminine
    1. splendour, brightness, effulgence, light Ja ii.353 Pv-a 122 Pv-a 137 Pv-a 198. The spelling juti at MN i.328 (in combination gati + juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as variant reading given on p. 557)
    1. ˚dhara (jutin˚) carrying or showing light, shining resplendent, brilliant SN i.121 Ja ii.353 Dhp-a i.432
    Sanskrit jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate ‣See jotati
    Jutika
    adjective (—˚) having light, in mahā˚; of great splendour DN ii.272 AN i.206 AN iv.248
    Jutimatā
    feminine
    1. splendour, brightness, prominence Ja 14; v.405
    from jutimant
    Jutimant
    adjective
    1. brilliant, bright; usually figuratively as prominent in wisdom: “bright.” distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as variant reading to jātimant) DN ii.256 (ī) SN v.24 Dhp 89 (= Dhp-a ii.163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā) Snp 508 Pv iv.135 (= Pv-a 230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā)
    from juti
    Jutimantatā
    feminine
    1. splendour Snp-a 453
    from jutimant
    Juhati
    1. to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate AN ii.207 (aggiṁ) Snp 1046 (= Nd2 263 deti cīvaraṁ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaṁ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiṁ) Pug 56 future juhissati SN i.166 (aggiṁ);
    2. causative hāpeti2
    3. past participle huta ‣See also hava, havi, homa
    4. Sanskrit juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Latin fundo; Gothic giutan, Old High German giozan
    Juhana
    neuter
    1. offering, sacrifice DN i.12 Ja ii.43
    from juhati
    Jūta
    neuter
    1. gambling, playing at dice DN i.7 (˚ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DN-a i.85)≈; iii.182, 186 (identical) Ja i.290 Ja iii.198 vi.281 Dhp-a ii.228
    • ˚ṁ kīḷati to play at d. Ja i.289 iii.187

      • ‣ See also dūta2
      1. ˚gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) Ja i.289 293
      2. ˚maṇḍala dice board (= phalaka Ja i.290) Ja i.293
      • ˚sālā gambling hall Ja vi.281
      Sanskrit dyūta past participle of div, dīvyati, Pali dibbati to play at dice
    Je
    1. (participle) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin i.232 292 (gaccha je) MN i.126 Vv-a 187 207 Dhp-a iv.105
    Jeguccha
    adjective & jegucchiya (J ii.437)
    1. contemptible, loathsome, detestable Ja iv.305 Vism 250 Thag 1, 1056 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 192 (asuci +). cp. pari˚
    • a˚ not despised Snp 852 Thag 1, 961
    sec. derived from jigucchā
    Jegucchitā
    feminine
    1. avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin i.234 MN i.30 AN iv.182f.
    ‣See jigucchita
    Jegucchin
    adjective one who detests or avoids (usually—˚) MN i.77 (parama˚), 78 AN iv.174 AN iv.182f. 188 sq., Mil 352 (pāpa˚).
    Jeṭṭha

    adjective

    1. better (than others), best first, supreme; first-born; elder brother or sister, elder eldest DN ii.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho = the first, foremost & best of all) AN i.108 AN ii.87 AN iii.152 AN iv.175 Ja i.138 (˚putta); ii.101 (˚bhātā), 128 (˚yakkhinī); iv.137
    1. ˚apacāyin, in phrase kule-j
    • apacāyin paying due respect to the clan-elders DN iii.72 DN iii.74 SN v.468 Vism 415 Dhp-a i.265 Same for ˚apacāyikā
    • feminine honour to … Nd2 294 & ˚apacāyitar DN iii.70 DN iii.71 DN iii.145 DN iii.169
    • ˚māsa name of a month Snp-a 359
    compar superl. formation of jyā power. from ji in jināti & jayati “stronger than others, used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old-elder, eldest The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian’s construction ‣See remarks on kaniṭṭha
    Jeṭṭhaka
    1. = jeṭṭha Ja i.253 Ja ii.101 (˚tāpasa); iii.281 (˚kam māra: head of the silversmith’s guild); iv.137, 161 v.282 Pv i.113 (putta = pubbaja Pv-a 57) Dhp-a iii.237 (˚sīla); iv.111 (identical) Pv-a 36 (˚bhariyā), 42 (˚pesakāra head of the weaver’s guild), 47 (˚vāṇija), 75
    Jeti
    1. ‣See jayati
    Jevanīya
    neuter a kind of (missile) weapon AN iv.107 = 110 (combined with āvudha & salāka; variant readings vedhanika jeganika, jevanika).
    Jotaka
    adjective
    1. illuminating, making light; explaining Ja ii.420 Dīpavaṁsa xiv.50 Mil 343 (= lamp-lighter). feminine ˚ikā explanation, Commentary, name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (KhA 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Thag 2; Vv & Pv.).; Jotika proper name Dhp-a i.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, 382
    2. from juti
    Jotati
    1. to shine, be splendid Jˋ i.53; vi.100, 509 Pv-a 71
    • jotantī = obhāsentī
    Sanskrit dyotate to shine, *dei̯ā; cp. Latin dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning “ditti,” i.e. light
    Jotana
    neuter & jotanā
    • feminine

      1. illumination, explanation Ja vi.542 Ps ii.112 Vv-a 17 (˚nā)
      cp. Sanskrit dyotana
    Joti
    masculine neuter
    1. light, splendour, radiance SN i.93 AN ii.85 Vv 162
    2. a star ‣See compounds
    3. fire SN i.169 Thag 1 415 Ja iv.206 sajotibhūta set on fire SN ii.260 AN iii.407f. Ja i.232

      1. ˚parāyaṇa adjective attaining to light or glory SN i.93 AN ii.85 DN iii.233 Pug 51
      2. ˚pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (ex
      3. plural Vv-a 79: candima-suriya-nakkhatta tāraka-rūpānaṁ sādhāraṇa-nāmaṁ)
      4. ˚pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal Dhp-a iv.209
      5. ˚mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland MN i.87 = AN i.47 = ii.122 = Nd1 154 = Nd2 604 = Mil 197
      6. ˚rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) Vv-a 111 339 Dhp-a i.198 Mil 118
      7. ˚sattha the science of the stars astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines ‣See chaḷanga cp. jotisā
      8. Sanskrit jyotis (cp. dyuti) neuter to dyotate ‣See jotati
    Jotimant
    adjective
    1. luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Snp 348 (= paññājoti-sampanna Snp-a 348)
    joti + mant, cp. also Pali jutimant
    Jotisā
    feminine
    1. astronomy Mil 3
    = Sanskrit jyotiṣa neuter
    Joteti
    1. (a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain AN ii.51 = J v.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṁ; Gloss Ja v.510 katheyya for joteyya = jotaye Iti 108 Ja ii.208 Pv-a 18
    • (b) intransitive to shine Dhp-a ii.163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā);
    • past participle jotita resplendent Pv-a 53
    1. Jh
    causative of jotati

    Jh

    Jhatta
    1. set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched combined with chāta Ja ii.83 Ja vi.347
    past participle of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta → *jñāpayati
    Jhatvā
    1. ‣See jhāpeti
    Jhasa
    1. (?) a window or opening in general Ja ii.334
    Jhāna1
    neuter
    1. literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation It is the technical term for a special religious experience reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma-saṁgani makes a second list of five stages by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167–⁠175). And the Vibhaṁga calls the first jhāna the; pañcaṅgika-jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vb 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at DN i.76: “with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable.” It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent ‣See F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918. Laymen could passive through the four jhānas (SN iv.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (DN i.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy. In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they

      1. made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra-Kāḷāma Uddaka-Rāmaputta (MN i.164 feminine )
      2. The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: DN i.34 sq.; 73 sq. SN ii.210f.; iv.217 sq., 263 sq.; v.213 sq. MN i.276f. 350 sq., 454 sq. AN i.53 AN i.163 AN ii.126 AN iii.394f. iv.409 sq.; v.157 sq. Vin iii.4 Nd2 on Snp 1119 & s.v. Ps i.97 sq.; ii.169 sq. Vb 257f.; 263 sq.; 279 sq. Vism 88, 415
      3. They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1
      4. e.g. at Vin i.104 Vin ii.161 (following by sotāpanna, etc.) DN ii.156 DN ii.186 iii.78, 131, 222 SN ii.278 (nikāmalābhin) AN ii.36 (identical) iii.354 SN iv.299 SN v.307f. MN i.21 MN i.41 MN i.159 MN i.203 MN i.247 398, 521; ii.15, 37 Snp 69 Snp 156 Snp 985 Dhp 372 Ja i.139 Vv-a 38 Pv-a 163
      5. Separately: the 1st: AN iv.422 v.135 MN i.246 MN i.294 Mil 289 1st
        1. -3rd: AN iii.323 MN i.181 1st & 2nd: MN ii.28 4th: AN ii.41 AN iii.325 v.31 DN iii.270 Vv-a 4
        • ‣ See also Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddh Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 52 sq. Index to Saṁyutta name for more refs.; also Kasiṇa
        1. ˚anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Snp 972
        • ˚aṅga a constituent of meditation (with reference to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190
        • ˚kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation Ja iii.45
        • ˚pasuta identical (+ dhīra) Snp 709 Dhp 181 (cp. Dhp-a iii.226)
        • ˚rata fond of meditation SN i.53 SN i.122 SN iv.117 Iti 40 Snp 212 Snp 503 Snp 1009 Vv 5015 Vv-a 38
        • ˚vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna AN iii.417 AN v.34
        • ˚sahagata accompanied by jh (of paññābala) AN i.42
        from jhāyati,1 Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit dhyāna. The (popular etym-) explanation of jhāna is given by Buddhaghosa at Vism 150 as follows: “ārammaṇ’ ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṁ,” i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse
    Jhāna2
    neuter
    1. conflagration, fire DN iii.94 Ja i.347
    from jhāyati2
    Jhānika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the (4) meditations Vism 111
    from jhāna1
    Jhāpaka
    adjective one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary Ja iii.71
    Jhāpana
    neuter setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra˚-kicca cremation Vv-a 76
    Jhāpita
    1. set on fire Mil 47 Vism 76 ˚kāla time of cremation)
    past participle jhāpeti
    Jhāpeti
    1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin iv.265 Ja i.255 Ja i.294 Dhp-a ii.66 Pv-a 62
    2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen, p. 37 sq. Ja iii.441 (= ḍahati pīḷeti Vv-a 38 (= jhāyati1, connected with jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf jhāpetuṁ Ja vi.300 (+ ghātetuṁ hantuṁ);
    3. absolutive jhatvā reference SN i.161 (reads chetvā) = Nett 145 (reads jhitvā, with variant reading chetvā) SN i.19 (reads chetvā, variant readings ghatvā & jhatvā) = J; iv.67 (Text jhatvā, variant reading chetvā; explained by kilametvā) SN i.41 (variant reading for Text chetvā, Buddhaghosa says “jhatvā ti vadhitvā”) Ja ii.262 (+ hantvā vadhitvā; explained by kilametvā) vi.299 (+ vadhitvā); also jhatvāna Ja iv.57 (= hantvā)-
    4. past participle jhatta & jhāpita;
    causative of jhāyati2
    Jhāma
    adjective-noun
    1. burning, on fire, conflagration, in ˚khetta charcoal-burner’s field Ja i.238 Ja ii.92
    • ˚aṅgāra a burning cinder Pv-a 90 By itself: Ja i.405 Dhp-a ii.67
    jhāyati2
    Jhāmaka
    1. name of a plant Ja vi.537 also in ˚bhatta (?) Ja ii.288
    Jhāyaka
    adjective one who makes a fire DN iii.94
    Jhāyati1
    1. to meditate, contemplate think upon, brood over (c. accusative ): search for, hunt after DN ii.237 (jhānaṁ) SN i.25 SN i.57 AN v.323f. (+ pa,˚ ni, ava˚) Snp 165 Snp 221 Snp 425 Snp 709 Snp 818 (= Nd1 149 pa˚, ni˚ ava˚) Dhp 27 Dhp 371 Dhp 395 Ja i.67 Ja i.410 Vv 5012 Pv iv.166 Mil 66 Snp-a 320 (
    2. aorist jhāyiṁsu thought of)

      • pp jhāyita
      Sanskrit dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Gothic filu-deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti → citta; 1
    Jhāyati2
    1. to burn, to be on fire: figuratively to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up DN i.50 (= jāleti DN-a i.151) iii.94 (to make a fire) Ja i.61 Ja i.62 Pv i.1110 (jhāyare Burmese variant for ghāyire) Mil 47 Pv-a 33 (= pariḍayhati)- aorist jhāyi Dhp-a ii.240 sq

      • (figuratively) Dhp 155 Ja vi.189-
      • causative jhāpeti
      • cp. khīyati2
      Sanskrit kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā
    Jhāyana1
    neuter
    1. meditating, in ˚sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sanskrit dhyānayoga) Vv-a 38
    derived from jhāyati1
    Jhāyana2
    neuter
    1. cremation, burning Pug AN 187
    from jhāyati2
    Jhāyin
    adjective
    1. pondering over (c. accusative ) intent on: meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice Vin ii.75 SN i.46 = 52; ii.284 MN i.334 AN i.24 AN iii.355 AN iv.426 AN v.156 AN v.325f. Snp 85 (magga˚) 638, 719, 1009, 1105 Iti 71 74, 112 Ja iv.7 Dhp 23 Dhp 110 Dhp 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. Dhp-a iv.144) Nd2 264 Vv 58 Pv iv.132 Vb 342 Nd1 226 Nd2 3422 = Vism 26 (āpādaka˚)
    2. ‣See jhāyati1 & jhāna
    Jhitvā
    1. is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā ‣See jhāpeti

    Ñ

    Ñatta
    neuter
    1. the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dhp 72 (= Dhp-a ii.73: jānanasabhāva)
    nomen agentis from jānāti
    Ñatti
    feminine
    1. announcement, declaration, especially as technical term a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is “esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho”: Vin i.340 Vin iii.150 173, 228; —˚ṁ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin iv.152
    • Vin v.142 217 (na c’ âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin ii.89 iv.152; v.116 AN i.99 Two kinds are distinguished viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i.e. a ñatti-dutiya-kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i.e. a ñ-catuttha-kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin i.56 317 sq.; ii.89; iii.156 iv.152; & passim cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha cp. āṇatti, viññatti
    Sanskrit jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā
    Ñatvā
    1. etc. ‣See jānāti
    Ñāṇa
    neuter
    1. knowledge, intelligence insight, conviction, recognition, opposite añāṇa avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance
    1. -1.; Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple-compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view) e.g. in cakkhu-karaṇa ñāṇa-karaṇa “opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge” i.e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) ‣See cakkhu, jānāti passati & compound ˚karaṇa: Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto (= he is one perfected in knowledge) MN i.111 = Nd2 2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaṁ dassanaṁ hoti “through ‣Seeing & knowing,” i.e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence SN v.126 cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds yāvatakaṁ ñeyyaṁ tāvatakaṁ ñāṇaṁ Nd2 2353m; yaṁ ñāṇaṁ taṁ dassanaṁ, yaṁ dassanaṁ taṁ ñāṇaṁ Vin iii.91 ñāṇa + dassana (i.e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship ‣See arahant ii.D. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit jñānadarśana, e.g. Avs i.210
    • Scope and
    1. character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom = perfected knowledge) The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaṁ anattā dukkhaṁ: Mil 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience ‣See Nd2 2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps; i.59 sq.; 118 sq. ii.189 sq.
    • Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (DN i.185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (SN iv.298); at Vin iii.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd2 266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti-ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc’ abhiññā (the 5 higher knowledges ‣See paññā & abhi˚), micchā (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DN-a; i.100, viz. sāvaka-pāramī-ñāṇa, paccekabuddha˚ sabbaññuta˚ (highest k. of a relig. student k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enum; d as dhamme ñāṇaṁ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ at DN iii.226 DN iii.277 other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha-samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i.e. the knowledge of the paṭicca-samuppāda) at DN iii.227 Ps i.118 Vb 235 (= sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth is contrasted with false k. (micchā-ñāṇa = micchādiṭṭhi): SN v.384 MN ii.29 AN ii.222 AN v.327 Vb 392 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin i.35 DN ii.155 (opp pasāda) SN i.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); ii.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ. ‣See ñ-vatthu) AN i.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.) Snp 378 Snp 789 Snp 987 (muddhani ñāṇaṁ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation personal knowledge, i.e. intelligence; differently expl at Nd2 266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaṁ) Ps i.194 sq.; ii.244 Vb 306f. (ñ-vibhanga) 328 sq. (kammassakataṁ ñ.); Nett 15 sq.; 161 (+ ñeyya) 191 (identical)
    • (b) ñāṇaṁ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i.e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti = that …) SN ii.124 = iii.28 (uppajjati) DN iii.278 (identical) AN ii.211≈; iv.75; v.195 SN iii.154 ‣See also arahant ii.D
    • (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya. AN v.37 aparapaccayā (k. of the non-effect of causation through lack of cause) SN ii.17 SN ii.78 SN iii.135 SN v.179, 422 sq. (= sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu-ñāṇa SN v.126 asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k. AN iii.441 Pv-a 197 akuppa DN iii.273 ariya AN iii.451 pariyodāta SN i.198 bhiyyosomatta SN iii.112 yathā bhūtaṁ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya etc.) SN v.144 AN iii.420 AN v.37
    • (d) knowledge of about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by
    • locative or—˚ (equal to subj. or obj. genitive)-(a) with
    • locative : anuppāde ñ. DN iii.214 DN iii.274 anvaye DN iii.226 DN iii.277 kāye DN iii.274 khaye DN iii.214 DN iii.220 (āsavānaṁ; cp. MN i.23 MN i.183 MN i.348 MN ii.38), 275 SN ii.30 Nett 15; cutûpapāte DN iii.111 DN iii.220 dukkhe (etc. DN iiii.227 SN ii.4 SN v.8 SN v.430 dhamme DN iii.226 SN ii.58 nibbāne SN ii.124 (cp. iv.86)
    • () as—˚: anāvaraṇa˚ DN-a i.100 ariya SN i.228 AN iii.451 khanti Ps i.106 jātissara Ja i.167 cutûpapāta MN i.22 MN i.183 MN i.347 MN ii.38 etc.; ceto-pariya DN iii.100 & ˚pariyāya SN v.160 dibbacakkhu Ps i.114; dhammaṭṭhiti SN ii.60 SN ii.124 Ps i.50; nibbidā Ps i.195; pubbe-nivāsânusati MN i.22 248, 347; ii.38, etc.; Buddha˚ Nd2 2353; Ps i.133 ii.31, 195 DN-a i.100 sabbaññuta Ps i.131 sq. DN-a i.99f. Pv-a 197 sekha SN ii.43 SN ii.58 SN ii.80 & asekha SN iii.83
    • (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance untruth SN i.181 SN ii.92 SN iii.258f.; v.126 AN ii.11 Snp 347 Snp 839 Ps i.80 Pug 21 Dhs 390 1061 ‣See avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi
    1. ˚indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157
    • ˚ūpapanna endowed with k. Snp 1077 (= Nd2 266b ˚upeta)
    • ˚karaṇa
    • adjective giving (right) understanding enlightening, in combination with cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in)-sight, cp. “your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil” genitive 35): kusalavitakkā anandha-karaṇā cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ Iti 82
    • feminine

      • ī (of majjhimā-paṭipadā) SN iv.331
      • ˚cakkhu the eye of k Pv-a 166
      • ˚jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i.e. into the range of one’s intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) Dhp-a i.26 ii.37, 58, 96; iii.171, 193; iv.61 Vv-a 63
      • ˚dassana “knowing and ‣Seeing,” “clear sight,” i.e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i.e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all-comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā ‣See above 2 at Vin iv.26 fully discussed at DN-a i.220 cp. also definition at Ps ii.244
      • Vin ii.178 (parisuddha˚; + ājīva, dhammadesanā veyyākaraṇa); iii.90 sq.; v.164, 197 DN i.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā ‣See paññā-sampadā); iii.134, 222 (˚paṭilābha) 288 (˚visuddhi) MN i.195f.; 202 sq., 482; ii.9, 31 Nett 17, 18, 28 ‣See also vimutti˚
      • ˚dassin one who possesses perfect k. Snp 478
      • ˚patha the path of k. Snp 868
      • ˚phusanā experience, gaining of k. Dhp-a i.230
      • ˚bandhu an associate or friend of k. Snp 911
      • ˚bhūta in comb” with cakkhubhūta, having become ‣Seeing knowing, i.e. being wise SN ii.255 SN iv.94 AN v.226f. -vatthūni (
      • plural ) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i.e. 4 X 11 all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) SN ii.56f. as 77 (7 X 11) SN ii.59f. discussed in extenso at Vb 306
      1. -344 (called ñāṇavatthu)
      2. ˚vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme knowledge DN iii.13f. AN v.42f.
      3. ˚vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147 157, 270
      4. ˚vimokkha emancipation through k. Ps ii.36, 42
      5. ˚visesa distinction of k., superior k. Pv-a 196
      • ˚sampayutta associated with k Dhs 1 147, 157, etc. Vb 169f. 184, 285 sq., 414 sq
      from jānāti ‣See also jānana. *gené, as in Latin (co)gnitio; Goth kunpi; Ogh. kunst; English knowledge
    Ñāṇika
    adjective in pañca˚ having five truths (of samādhi) DN iii.278
    Ñāṇin
    adjective knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge SN ii.169 AN ii.89 (sammā˚); iv.340
    • aññāṇin not knowing, unaware Vv-a 76
    Ñāta
    1. known, well-known experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd2 s.v. constantly ex plural by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as explanation. of diṭṭha & vidita. AN v.195 Ja i.266 Snp 343 (+ yasassin) Mil 21 (identical)-aññāta not known, unknown Vin i.209 MN i.430 SN ii.281 Dhp-a i.208
    2. past participle of jānāti = Latin (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = = ignotus
    Ñātaka
    1. a relation, relative, kinsman Vin ii.194 MN ii.67 Dhp 43 Snp 263 (= KhA 140 ñāyante amhākaṁ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv ii.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy ˚ika) Pv-a 19 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 69 DN-a i.90
    for *ñātika from ñāti
    Ñāti
    1. a relation, relative (= mātito pitito ca sambandhā Pv-a 25 = bandhū Pv-a 86 specialized as ˚sālohitā ‣See below). plural ñātayo (Pv i.43 Kp-a 209 214) and ñātī (MN ii.73 Kp-a 210, cp. 213;
    2. accusative also ñātī Pv i.67) Snp 141 Dhp 139 Dhp 204 Dhp 288 Ja ii.353 Pv i.53 122; ii.313, 67

      • Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94
      1. ˚kathā (boastful) talk about relatives DN i.7≈ (cp DN-a i.90)
      2. ˚gata coming into (the ties of) relationship Ja vi.307
      • ˚gataka ib. 308)
      • ˚ghara the paternal home Ja i.52
      • ˚dhamma the duties of relatives Pv i.512 (= ñātīhi ñātīnaṁ kattabba-karaṇaṁ Pv-a 30)
      • ˚parivatta the circle of relations DN i.61 MN i.267 Pug 57-peta a deceased relation Pv i.54
      • ˚majjhagata
      • adjective in the midst of one’s relations Pug 29
      • ˚mittā (
      • plural ) friends & relatives Dhp 219 Ja iii.396 Pv i.126
      • ˚ vyasana misfortune of relatives (opposite ˚sampada) DN iii.235 enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha ‣See Nd2 304F
      • ˚saṅgha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan AN i.152 Snp 589
      • ˚sālohita a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Snp p. 104), often with reference to the deceased: petā ñ-sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood-relations MN i.33 AN v.132 AN v.269 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 28
      • ˚sineha the affection of relationship Pv-a 29
      • ˚hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen Pv-a 27
      ‣See janati; cp. Sanskrit jñāti, Latin cognatus, Gothic knops
    Ñāpeti
    1. to make known, to explain, to announce Ja ii.133 cp. jānāpeti āṇāpeti
    causative of jānāti, cp. also ñatti
    Ñāya
    1. method, truth, system, later = logic: ˚gantha book on logic Dāvs iii.41
    2. fitness right manner, propriety, right conduct, often applied to the “right path” (ariyamagga = ariyañāya Vin i.10) DN iii.120 SN v.19 SN v.141 SN v.167f. 185 AN ii.95 iv.426; v.194; Dhp i.249; ariya ñ. SN ii.68 SN v.387 the causal law SN v.388 = kalyāṇa-kusala-dhammatā AN ii.36 used in apposition with dhamma and kusala DN ii.151 MN ii.181 MN ii.197 is replaced herein by sacca SN i.240 = Nibbāna at Vism 219, 524; ñ
    3. paṭipanna walking in the right path SN v.343 AN ii.56 AN iii.212 AN iii.286 v.183. -Nu
    Sanskrit nyāya = ni + i
    -Ñū
    1. (-ññū) (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita˚, kata˚, kāla˚, khaṇa˚, matta˚, ratta˚, vara˚ vipacita˚, veda˚, sabba˚, etc. (q.v.)-feminine abstract ˚ñutā in same combinations
    Sanskrit
  • jña, from jānāti, *gn : cp. Pali gū → Sanskrit ga
  • Ṭan
    1. (?) (adverb ) part of sound Ja i.287 (ṭan ti saddo).

      1. Ṭh

    Ṭh

    ˚Ṭha
    1. (˚ṭṭha) (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e.g. appa˚ based on little DN i.143) ‣See kappa˚ (lasting a k.), kūṭa˚ (immovable) gaha˚ (founding a house, householder), dhamma˚, nava˚ vehāsa˚ (= vihan-ga)
    • (n.) a stand i.e. a place for goṭṭha a stable
    from tiṭṭhati
    Ṭhapana

    neuter

  • setting up, placing, founding; establishment, arrangement, position Vin v.114 Ja i.99 (aggha fixing prices) Mil 352 (pāda˚) DN-a i.294 (= vidhārite) Pv-a 5 (kulavaṁsa˚).

    • letting alone, omission suspension, in pāṭimokkha˚ Vin ii.241
  • Ṭhapanā

    feminine

  • arrangement DN-a i.294

    • application of mind, attention Pug 18 Vism 278 (= appanā)
  • Ṭhapita
    1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (= being): saṁharitvā ṭh. being folded up Ja i.265 (cp similar use of gahetvā c.
    2. absolutive ): mukkhe ṭh. Ja vi.366 ˚sankāra (dustheap) Pv-a 82 pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts Pv-a 124
    3. suspended left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pāṭimokkha)
    past participle of ṭhapeti
    Ṭhapeti
    1. to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. locative ); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin ii.32 (pavāraṇaṁ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaṁ); v.193 (uposathaṁ), 196 (give advice) DN i.120 (leaving out discarding) Dhp 40 (cittaṁ ṭh. make firm) Ja i.62 Ja i.138 223, 293 (except); ii.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter) Ja ii.159 Ja vi.365 (putting by) Vv-a 63 (kasiṁ ṭhapetvā except ploughing) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 20 (varaṁ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up) Mil 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later)

      • infinitive ṭhapetuṁ Vin ii.194 Pv-a 73 (saṁharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd ṭhapetabba Ja ii.352 (rājaṭṭhāne) Pv-a 97 & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over i.e. not to be asked) DN iii.229.
      • absolutive ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as preposition c. acc (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides except DN i.105 (ṭh. dve) Ja i.179 (maṁ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); ii.154 (ekaṁ vaddhaṁ ṭh.); iv.142 (ṭh maṁ) Vv-a 100 (ṭh. ekaṁ itthiṁ) Pv-a 93 (ṭh. maṁ) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sthāpayitvā “except” Avs ii.111
      • Caus ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up Ja i.266 Dhp-a ii.191
      causative of tiṭṭhati
    Ṭhāna
    1. (ṭṭhāna) neuter

      1. -I. Connotation As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location
      1. II. Meanings-(1) Literal: place, region, locality abode, part (—˚ of, or belonging to)-(a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited DN ii.140 = AN ii.120 vāse ṭhāne gamane Snp 40 (ex plural by Snp-a 85 as mahā-upaṭṭhāna-sankhāte ṭhāne but may be referred to i.1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one’s place Snp 442 Ja iv.138 Pv-a 55 (spot of the body)

        • (b) kumbha˚ (the “locality of the pitcher, i.e. the well) q.v.; arañña˚ (part of the forest) Ja i.253 Pv-a 32 nivāsana˚ (abode) Pv-a 76 phāsuka˚ Ja ii.103
        1. Pv-a 13 vasana˚ Ja i.150 Ja i.278 Vv-a 66 virūhana˚ (place for the growing of …) Pv-a 7 vihāra (place of his sojourn) Pv-a 22 saka˚ (his own abode) Ja ii.129 Pv-a 66
        • (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of “condition, state” ‣See 2 & cp. gati in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions SN i.21 tidivaṁ SN i.96 saggaṁ ṭh. a happy condition Pv i.13 pitu gata the place where my father went (after death Pv-a 38 Yamassa ṭh. = pettivasaya Pv-a 59
        • (d) In its pregnant sense in combination with accuta & acala it represents the connotation i.1 (b), i.e. perdurance, constancy i.e. Nibbāna Vv.51; 4 Dhp 225
        • Applied meanings (a) state, condition; also—˚ (in singular) as collective-abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to English ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abṡtr formations in ˚tā & ˚ttaṁ (Sanskrit tā & tvaṁ), as lahuṭṭhāna = lahutā & collect. formations in ˚ti (Sanskrit daśati ten-hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti = Pali sabbattaṁ comprehensiveness; cp. also Latin civitātem, juventūtem)
        • SN i.129 (condition) ii.27 (asabha˚) = M i.69 SN iii.57 (atasitāyaṁ fearless state): AN ii.118f. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaṁ aññataraṁ th.˚ nigacchati he undergoes one of the following ten conditions, i.e. items of affliction, explained at Dhp-a iii.70 with kāraṇa “labours”), 309 (states = dukkhakāraṇāni Dhp-a iii.482 conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha-pasāraṇa-ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands Dhp-a i.298
        • locative ṭhāne (—˚) when required, at the occasion of.. Dhp-a i.89 (hasitabba˚, saṁvega˚, dātuṁ yutta˚); pubbe nibbatta -ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya “since the state (or the time) of his former birth” Pv-a 100
        • vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment DN i.5 Snp 59 (DN-a i.77 superficially: ṭhānaṁ vuccati kāraṇaṁ Snp-a 112 simply vibhūsā eva v-ṭṭhānaṁ); jūta-pamāda˚ (gambling & intoxication) DN i.6 (cp. ex
        • plural at Kp-a 26); gata˚ & āgata˚; (her) going coming Ja iii.188 -pariccāga˚ distribution of gifts Pv-a 124
        • (b) (part =) attribute, quality, degree aggasāvaka˚ (degrees of discipleship) Vv-a 2 especially in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1

        -5), āyu, vaṇṇa sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya DN iii.146 SN iv.275 Pv ii.958 also collectively ‣See (a)

        1. as dasaṭṭhānaṁ SN i.193 out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha bala at Vv 327 other ten at. AN v.129 (pāsaṁsāni). (c) (counter-part =) object (—˚ for), thing; item, point plural grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often = a (five)fold collection of … SN iv.249f. (5 objects or things, cp. German fünferlei) AN iii.54f. (identical), 60 sq. 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dhp 224 manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties AN 151 sq.; cp. ii.119 sq. (= saṁvutaṁ tīhi ṭhānehi Dhp 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Commentary equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaṁ ṭh. (object) Snp 256 ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti “I agree in certain points, but not in others” DN i.162 kankhaniya doubtful point SN iv.350 SN iv.399 -n’ atthi aññaṁ ṭhānaṁ no other means, nothing else Dhp-a ii.90 agamanīya something not to be done, not allowed Vv-a 72 cp. also kamma˚

          • (d) (standpoint =) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, especially a sound conclusion logic, reasonableness (opposite a˚ ‣See 4): garayhaṁ th. āgacchati “he advocates a faulty principle” DN i.161 catuhi ṭh. paññāpeti (four arguments) SN iii.116 SN iv.380 ṭhāna-kusala accomplished in sound reasoning SN iii.61 sq (satta˚) AN ii.170f. Also with aṭṭhāna-kusala ‣See below 4
          1. III. adverb ial use of some cases
          2. accusative ṭhānaṁ : ettakaṁ ṭh. even a little bit Dhp-a i.389

            • ablative ṭhānaso : in combination with hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned ‣See 2 (d)
            1. SN v.304 AN iii.417 AN v.33 Nett 94 (ñāṇa); absolute without moving ‣See I. 1 (b & cp. Latin statim) i.e. without an interval or a cause (of change) at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp compound˚ uppatti) SN i.193 SN v.50 SN v.321 SN v.381 Pv i.44 (= khaṇaṁ yeva Pv-a 19) locative ṭhāne instead = like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter Vv-a 209 puttaṭṭhāne as a son Ja ii.132
            2. IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna) The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 especially 1 (c)

              1. & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place → not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i.e. somewhere → nowhere and of possibility → impossibility (truth → falsehood) (a) ṭhānaṁ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Mil 255 opposite na ṭhānaṁ upa˚ to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Mil 180 Mil 237 Mil 270
              • (b) ṭhānaṁ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible DN i.163 175 MN iii.64 Ps ii.236 sq.; cp. Mvu ii.448 opp na etaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible logically correct Vin ii.284 DN i.104 DN i.239 MN ii.10 iii.64 Mil 237 Nett 92 sq
              • (c) aṭṭhānaṁ an impossibility Snp 54 (aṭṭhāna, with elision of ṁ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time Ja i.256 ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis ‣See gati Pv-a 27f. In compound ṭhānāṭhāna-gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i.e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Nett 94 In comb; n apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānâṭhānagate (Mil 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānâṭhāna-ñāṇa is “knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions” Nett 94, cp. Kvu 231 sq.; the same combination occurs with ˚kusala ˚kusalatā “accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions” DN iii.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha) MN iii.64 Dhs 1337 1338 (translation by Mrs Rhys Davids on p. 348 Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation as “skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture”). In the same sense ṭhānaṁ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaṁ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i.e. which is logical) SN v.304 MN i.69f. = AN iii.417 AN v.33
              1. ˚uppatti arising instantaneously ‣See ṭhānaso, above III. Vv-a 37 Ja vi.308 (˚kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -ka adjective on the spot, momentary spontaneous Ja vi.304
              2. Vedic sthāna, sthā ‣See tiṭṭhati; cp. Sanskrit sthāman Latin stamen
    Ṭhānīya
    adjective
    1. standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by (—˚) Vin ii.194 (-nīca˚) AN i.264 (chanda-rāga-dhamma˚) ‣See also under tiṭṭhati
    gerundive of tiṭṭhati
    Ṭhāyika
    adjective at Mil 201 “one who gains his living or subsists on” instrumental is doubtful reading.
    Ṭhāyin
    adjective-noun
    1. standing, being in, being in a state of (—˚), staying with, dependent on (with genitive) pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin “being in a state of one to whom it has arisen,” i.e. one who has got the idea of … or one who imagines SN iii.3f.; arūpa-ṭṭhāyin Iti 62 Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv i.119
    from tiṭṭhati
    Ṭhita
    1. standing, i.e ‣See ṭhāna I either upright (opp nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with absolutive pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita); -resting in abiding in (—˚ or with
    2. locative ); of time: lasting, enduring figuratively steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev’ assa cittaṁ hoti, ṭhitaṁ ānejjappattaṁ AN iii.377 = iv.404 tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaṁ cittaṁ (firm, unshaken SN v.74 = Nd2 475 B2; - DN i.135 (khema˚) AN i.152 Snp 250 (dhamme) Iti 116f. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna) Ja i.167 279; iii.53

      • with
      • absolutive : nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) Ja i.265 dārakaṁ gahetvā th. Ja vi.336 cp. saṇ˚
      1. ˚atta self-controlled, composed, steadfast DN i.57 (+ gatatta yatatta; ex plural at DN-a i.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto) SN i.48 SN iii.46 AN ii.5 AN iv.93 AN iv.428 Snp 370 (+ parinibbuta), 359 (identical ex
      2. plural at Snp-a 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya-citta) Pug 62
      3. ˚kappin
      4. adjective (for kappa-*ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pug 13 (ex
      5. plural at Pug AN 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaṁ ṭhapetuṁ samattho ti attho)
      6. ˚citta
      7. adjective of controlled heart (= ˚atta) DN ii.157
      8. ˚dhamma
      9. adjective everlasting eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin ii.237 AN iv.198
      10. past participle of tiṭṭhati = Latin status, Celtic fossad (firm)
    Ṭhitaka
    adjective = ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin ii.165 DN ii.17 = iii.143 MN ii.65 Ja i.53 Ja i.62 Vv-a 64
    Ṭhitatā
    feminine the fact of standing or being founded on (—˚) SN ii.25 = AN i.286 (dhamma˚ + dhamma-niyāmatā).
    Ṭhitatta
    neuter standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment Ja i.124
    Ṭhiti
    feminine
    1. state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance immobility; persistence, keeping up (of c. genitive); condition of (—˚) relation SN ii.11 SN iii.31 SN iv.14 SN iv.104 SN iv.228 sq.,. AN v.96 Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna SN iii.264 SN iii.269f. saddhammassa (prolongation of) SN ii.225
    • AN i.59 AN ii.148 AN iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. MN ii.26f.; -dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa (state or condition of) SN ii.124 Ps i.50 sq

      • n atthi dhuvaṁ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long MN ii.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 = Vv-a 77 cp. Thag 2, 343 (= Thag-a 241) Snp 1114 (viññāṇa˚) Pv-a 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita˚ as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin) Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+ āyu = subsistence)
      1. ˚bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting permanent (only ap plural to samādhi) DN iii.277 AN iii.427 Nett 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala “one who is accomplished in lasting concentration” AN iii.311 AN iii.427 AN iv.34
    from tiṭṭhati Sanskrit sthiti, Latin statio (cp. stationary), Old High German stat, Anglo-Saxon stede
    Ṭhiṭika
    adjective
    1. standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on (—˚), e.g. āhāra˚ dependent on food Kh iii ‣See āhāra; neuter adverb ṭhitikaṁ constantly Vv-a 75
    2. Derived from ṭhiti
    Ṭhīyati
    1. ‣See patiṭṭhīyati

    Ḍaṁsa
    1. a yellow fly, gadfly (originally “the bite”) Nd2 268 (= pingala-makkhika, same at Ja iii.263 Snp-a 101); usually in combination with other biting or stinging sensations, as ˚siriṁsapa Snp 52 & frequently in cpd; ḍaṁsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṁsapa-samphassa MN i.10 AN ii.117 AN ii.143 = iii.163 AN iii.388 AN v.15 Vin i.3 Nd2 s.v. (enumerated under various kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here explained as ḍaṁsana-makkhikā or andha-makkhikā)
    ‣See ḍasati
    Ḍaṭṭha
    1. bitten Pv-a 144
    past participle of daṁśati or dasati to bite
    Ḍasati
    (& ḍaṁsati)
    1. to bite (especially of flies snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati MN i.519 pot ḍaseyya MN i.133 AN iii.101 = iv.320 (where ḍaṁs˚) ḍaṁseyya AN iii.306 ppr. ḍasamāna Ja i.265 (gīvāya) future ḍaṁsayissāmi Ja vi.193 (variant reading ḍass˚);
    2. aorist aḍaṁsi Vv 808 (= Sanskrit adānkṣīt), ḍaṁsi Pv-a 62 & ḍasi Ja i.502 Dhp-a ii.258 infinitive ḍasituṁ Ja i.265
    3. absolutive ḍasitvā Ja i.222 ii.102; iii.52, 538 Dhp-a i.358
    4. past participle daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa
    5. cp. Sanskrit da ati & daṁśati; Old High German zanga, Anglo-Saxon tonge, English tong
    Ḍahati
    (& dahati)
    1. to burn (trs.) consume, torment MN i.365 MN ii.73
    1. AN v.110 Ja ii.44 (aorist 3 singular
    2. medium adaḍḍha = Sanskrit adagdha) Dhp 31 Dhp 71 Dhp 140 Mil 45 Mil 112 (cauterize).
    3. past participle daḍḍha -
    4. passive ḍayhati SN i.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaṁ) MN ii.73 SN iii.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) especially in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dhp 371 Iti 23 (˚ena kāyena cetasā Pv; i.1110, 122; ii.23) (of a corpse being cremated) Pv-a 63 Pv-a 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse) ‣See also similes Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 90. cp. uḍ˚
    5. Sanskrit dahati, past participle dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Latin favilla (glowing) cinders, Gothic dags, German tag. English day = hot time
    Ḍāka
    masculine neuter
    1. green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (˚rasa), 248 Thag 2, 1 Vv 206 (variant reading sāka) Vv-a 99 (= taṇḍuleyyakādi-sākavyañjana)
    Sanskrit sāka neuter on ś → ḍ cp. Sanskrit sākinī → dākinī
    Ḍāha
    1. burning, glow, heat DN i.10 (disā˚ sky-glow = zodiacal light?) MN i.244 Pv-a 62 Mil 325 Sometimes spelt dāha, e.g. AN i.178 (aggi˚) Sdhp 201 (identical); -dava˚; a jungle fire Vin ii.138 Ja i.461
    Sanskrit dāha ‣See ḍahati
    Ḍeti
    [ Sanskrit *ḍayate = dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with definition of “ākāsa-gamana” to fly; only in simile “seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen’ eva ḍeti …” DN i.71 = M i.180, 269 = AN ii.209 Pug 58 Ja v.417 cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti.
    1. T

    T

    -T-
    1. as composition-consonant ‣See Müller past participle 62, 63, on euphonic consonants especially with agge (after, from), in ajja-t-agge, tama-t-agge, dahara-t-agge. AN v.300 cp. deva ta-t-uttari for tad-uttari AN iii.287 AN iii.314 AN iii.316

    Ta˚
    ;
    1. base of demonstrative pronoun for nt., in oblique cases of
    2. masculine &
    3. feminine, in demonstrative
    4. adverb of place & time (‣ See also sa).; 1. Cases: nominative singular
    5. neuter tad (older) Vin i.83 Snp 1052 Dhp 326 Mil 25 & taṁ (cp. yaṁ, kiṁ) Snp 1037 Snp 1050 Ja iii.26
    6. accusative
    7. masculine taṁ Ja ii.158 feminine taṁ Ja vi.368 genitive tassa
    8. feminine tassā (Sn 22, 110 Ja i.151); instrumental tena, feminine tāya (J iii.188); ablative tasmā (J i.167); tamhā Snp 291 Snp 1138 (J iii.26) & tato (usually as
    9. adverb ) (Sn 390);
    10. locative tasmiṁ (J i.278), tamhi (Dh 117); tahiṁ (
    11. adverb ) (Pv i.57) tahaṁ (
    12. adverb ) (J; i.384 Vv-a 36);
    13. plural nominative masculine te (J ii.129), feminine tā (J ii.127), neuter tāni (Sn 669, 845); genitive tesaṁ, feminine tāsaṁ (Sn 916); instrumental tehi, feminine tāhi (J ii.128)
    14. locative tesu, feminine tāsu (Sn 670)

      • In composition (Sandhi both tad-& taṁ-are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a); tad˚; : () in subst function: tadagge henceforth DN i.93 taduṭṭhāya Dhp-a iii.344 tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Note. 77, 78 = tadopya ‣See discussion under opeti, but cp. Sanskrit tadrūpa Divy
      1. 543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad-upa-ka, the adjective; positive of upa, of which the compar
      • superlative is upama, meaning like this, i.e. of this or the same kind Also spelt tadūpikā
      • feminine (at Ja ii.160) agreeing with, agreeable pleasant Mil 9 tadatthaṁ to such purpose Snp-a 565
      • With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Snp 1114 tappoṇa (= tad-pra-ava-nata) ‣See taccarita tabbisaya (various) Pv-a 73 tabbiparīta (different Vism 290 Dhp-a iii.275 tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450
      • () as crude form (not
      • neuter ) originally only in
      • accusative neuter in adjective function like tad-ahan this day then felt as euphonic d, especially in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja-t-agge). Hence ta- is abstracted as a crude (
      • adverb ial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad-ah-uposathe on this day’s fast-day = to-day (or that day) being Sunday DN i.47 Snp p. 139 (explained as tam-ah-uposathe, uposatha-divase ti at Snp-a 502); tadahe on the same day Pv-a 46 tadahū (identical) Ja v.215 (= tasmiṁ chaṇa-divase) tad-aṅga for certain, surely, categorical (originally concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga-nibbuta SN iii.43
      • tadaṅga-samatikkama Nd2 203; tadaṅga-vikkhambhana-samuccheda Vism 410; tadaṅga-pahāna Dhs-a 351 Snp-a 8 tadangena AN iv.411
      • (b) tan˚; : () as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Snp 846 (= tapparāyana Nd2 206) AN i.150
      • () Derived from
      • accusative use (like a) as adjective is tankhaṇikā (from taṁ khaṇaṁ Vin iii.140 (= muhuttikā)
      • () a reduced form of taṁ is to be found as ta˚ in the same origin & application as ta-d-(under a;) in combination ta-y-idaṁ (for taṁidaṁ → taṁ-idaṁ → ta-idaṁ → ta-y-idaṁ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. cp. in application also Latin hic, From ci in voici cet homme-ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combined with api: te c’ âpi (even these) Snp 1058 It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. English thus): this now, especially in
      • adverb use ‣See below; taṁ kiṁ maññasi DN i.60 yam etaṁ pañhaṁ apucchi Ajita taṁ vadāmi te: Snp 1037 taṁ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Snp 1050 tesaṁ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Snp 1127 te tositā (and they, pleased …) ib. 1128
      • Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya˚ (preceding ta˚): yaṁ ahaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ jānāsi “what I know (that) you know” DN i.88 yo nerayikānaṁ sattānaṁ āhāro tena so yāpeti “he lives on that food which is (characteristic of the beings in name; or: whichever is the food of the name beings, on this he lives” Pv-a 27
      • (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaṁ taṁ = that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adjective; ye te those who, i.e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā … te evam ahaṁsu … “all those people who were full of faith said” Vin ii.195 yena tena upāyena gaṇha “catch him by whatever means (you like),” i.e. by all means Ja ii.159 yaṁ taṁ kayirā “whatever he may do” Dhp 42

    15. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Latin quisquis, etc.): … taṁ taṁ this & that, i.e. each one; yaṁ yaṁ passati taṁ taṁ pucchati whomsoever he ‣Sees (each one) he asks Pv-a 38 yaṁ yaṁ manaso piyaṁ taṁ taṁ gahetvā whatever.. (all) that Pv-a 77 yo yo yaṁ yaṁ icchati tassa tassa taṁ taṁ adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him” Pv-a 113 So with

      • adverb of ta˚: tattha tattha here & there (frequently); tahaṁ tahaṁ identical Ja i.384 Vv-a 36 187; tato tato Snp 390
      • (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taṁ … taṁ is this so & is this so (too) = the same as, viz. taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ is the soul the same as the body (opposite aññaṁ j. a. s.). AN v.193 etc ‣See jīva
      • adverb ial use of some cases (locala temporalb, & modal; c):
      • accusative taṁ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there D. ii.126, 156; (b) taṁ enaṁ at once, presently (= tāvad-eva) Vin i.127 (cp. Ved enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiṁ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: SN ii.17 MN i.487 Snp 1110 Pv i.23 (= tasmā Pv-a 11 & 103); ii.716; cp. taṁ kissa hetu Nd2 on jhāna
      • genitive tassa (c) therefore AN iv.333 instrumental tena (a) there (direction = there to), always in correlation with yena: where-there, or in whatever direction here & there. Frequently in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e.g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaṁ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went = he went to the M. of J. DN i.49 yena Gotamo ten’ upasankama go where G is DN i.88 yena āvasathâgāraṁ ten’ upasankami DN ii.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here there AN ii.33 (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) Ja i.151 Ja i.279 Pv-a 60 Mil 23 tena hi DN ii.2 Ja i.266 Ja iii.188 Mil 19
      • ablative tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Snp 1051 Snp 1104 Nd2 279 (= taṁ kāraṇaṁ) Pv-a 11 Pv-a 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv i.123 (b) then, hereafter Pv-a 39
      • locative tahiṁ (a) there (over there → beyond) Pv i.57 (c) = therefore Pv-a 25
      • tahaṁ (a) there; usually repeated ‣See above Ii.3 (a)
      • ‣ See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc
    Vedic tad, etc.; Latin is-te, tālis, etc.; Lithuanian tás tā; Gothic pata; Old High German etc. daz; English that
    Taka
    1. a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin i.201
    Takka1
    1. doubt; a doubtful view (often diṭṭhi, ap plural like sammā˚, micchā-diṭṭhi), hair-splitting reasoning, sophistry (= itihītihaṁ Nd2 151). O
    2. past participle to takka (= micchā-sankappo Vb 86 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-sankappo Nd2 318; cp. Dhs 7 298), DN i.16 (˚pariyāhata) MN i.68 (identical) Snp 209 (˚ṁ pahāya na upeti sankhaṁ) 885 (doubt), 886 Dhs 7 21, 298 (+ vitakka, translation as “ratiocination” by Mrs. Rhys Davids) Vb 86 237 (sammā˚) 356; Vism 189 ‣See also vitakka.

      1. ˚āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs v.22
      2. ˚āvacara as negative atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a˚ nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i.e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin i.4 = DN i.12 = SN i.136 = M i.487. Gogerley translation “unattainable by reasoning,” Andersen “being beyond the sphere of thought”
      3. ˚āsaya room for doubt Snp 972
      • ˚gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry Ja i.97
      • ˚vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Snp 1084 ‣See Nd2 269
      • ˚hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) AN ii.193 = Nd2 151
      Sanskrit tarka doubt; science of logic (literally “turning & twisting”) *treik, cp. Latin tricae, intricare (to “trick,” puzzle), & also Sanskrit tarku bobbin, spindle, Latin torqueo (torture, turn)
    Takka2
    neuter
    1. buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin i.244 made by churning dadhi Mil 173 Ja i.340 Ja ii.363 Dhp-a ii.68 (takkâdi-ambila)
    Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?
    Takkaṇa
    neuter thought, representation (of:—˚) Ja i.68 (ussāvabindu˚).
    Takkara1
    1. (= tat-kara) a doer thereof DN i.235 MN i.68 Dhp 19
    Takkara2
    1. a robber, a thief Ja iv.432
    Takkaḷa
    neuter a bulbous plant, a tuberose Ja iv.46 Ja iv.371 (biḷāli˚, ex
    • plural at 373 by takkala-kanda) = vi.578.

    Takkārī
    feminine the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Thag 2, 297 (= dālika-laṭṭhi Thag-a 226).
    Takkika
    adjective
    1. doubting, having wrong views, foolish; masculine a sophist, a fool Ud 73 Ja i.97 Mil 248
    2. from takka1
    Takkin
    adjective-noun
    1. thinking, reasoning, especially sceptically; a sceptic DN i.16≈(takkī vīmaṁsī) MN i.520 DN-a i.106 (= takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi-gāhino etaṁ adhivacanaṁ), cp. past participle 114, 115 (takki-vāda)
    2. from takka1
    Takketi
    1. to think, reflect, reason, argue DN-a i.106 Dhs-a 142
    • attānaṁ t. to have self-confidence, to trust oneself Ja i.273 Ja i.396 Ja i.468 Ja iii.233
    denominative of tarka
    Takkoṭaka
    1. a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at identical passage Kp-a 58 is kakkoṭaka
    is reading correct?
    Takkola
    1. Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant Ja i.291 also as N plural at Mil 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps Sanskrit karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59)
    2. Sanskrit kakkola & takkola
    Tagara
    neuter the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin i.203 Iti 68 (= Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8) Dhp 54 Dhp 55 Dhp 56 (candana +) Ja iv.286 Ja vi.100 (the shrub) 173 (identical) Mil 338 Dāvs v.50 Dhp-a i.422 (tagara-mallikā two kinds of gandhā).
    Taggaruka
    1. = tad + garuka ‣See taccarita
    Taggha
    1. affirmative particle (“ekaṁsena” DN-a i.236 ekaṁsa-vacana Ja v.66 ekaṁse nipāta Ja v.307) truly, surely, there now! Vin ii.126 297 DN i.85 MN i.207 MN i.463 MN iii.179 Ja v.65 (variant reading tagghā); Snp p. 87
    tad + gha, cp. in-gha & Latin ec-ce ego-met
    Taca
    1. & taco neuter

      1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin ‣See chavi & cp. Ja i.146).

        1. -1. bark: MN i.198 MN i.434 MN i.488 AN v.5
        • skin: often used together with nahāru aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: AN i.50 = Sdhp 46; tacamaṁsâvalepana (+ aṭṭhī nahārusaṁyutta) Snp 194 Ja i.146 (where ˚vilepana) Snp-a 247 aṭṭhi-taca-mattâvasesasarīra “nothing but skin & bones” Pv-a 201 Of the cast-off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaṁ tacaṁ jahāti Snp 1 same simile Pv i.121 (= nimmoka Pv-a 63)-kañcanasannibha-taca
        • adjective of golden-coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Snp 551 Vv 302 = 323 Mil 75 Vv-a 9
        • valita-tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd2 252≈; Kh iii.; Kp-a 45; Sdhp 102
        1. ˚gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625
        • ˚pañcaka-kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold “body is skin,” etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna-practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy’ ânupassanā:) ‣See kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis ‣See Kh iii.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca-p-kammaṭṭhānaṁ ācikkhitvā taṁ pabbājesi Ja i.116 Dhp-a i.243 Dhp-a ii.87 140, 242. cp. also Vism 353 Dhp-a ii.88 Snp-a 246 247
        • ˚pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) Pv-a 172
        • ˚rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629
        • ˚sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i.e.) tree SN i.70 = 90 Iti 45 -(b) a (rope of) strong fibre Ja iii.204 (= veṇudaṇḍaka)
        Vedic tvak
      2. feminine, genitive tvacaḥ
    Taccarita
    adjective in combination with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra frequently as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd2 under tad. The same combination with Nibbāna-ninna, name
    • poṇa, name
    • pabhāra frequently ‣See Nibbāna
    Taccha1
    1. a carpenter, usually as ˚ka: otherwise only in compound ˚sūkara the carpenter-pig (= a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (; iv.342 sq.). cp. vaḍḍhakin
    Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati ‣See taccheti, Latin textor
    Taccha2
    adjective
    1. true, real, justified, usually in combination w bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, DN i.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) SN v.229 (dhamma; text has tathā variant reading tathaṁ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) DN i.230 bhūta + taccha: AN ii.100 = Pug 50 Vv-a 72
    • yathā tacchaṁ according to truth Snp 1096 which is interpreted by Nd2 270: tacchaṁ vuccati amataṁ Nibbānaṁ, etc.
    • neuter taccha a truth Snp 327-ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood DN i.3 (abhūta +) Vv-a 72 (= musā)
    Derived from tathā + ya = tath-ya “as it is,” Sanskrit tathya
    Tacchaka
    1. = taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dhp 80 (cp. Dhp-a ii.147) Mil 413 magga˚ a road-builder Ja vi.348-(b) = taccha-sūkara Ja iv.350
    • (c) a class of Nāgas DN ii.258
    • feminine tacchikā a woman of low social standing (= veṇī, bamboo-worker) Ja v.306
    Tacchati
    1. to build, construct; maggaṁ t. to construct or repair a road Ja vi.348
    from taccha1, cp. taccheti
    Taccheti
    1. [probably a denominative from taccha1 = Latin texo to weave (originally to plait, work together, work artistically) cp. Sanskrit taṣṭṛ architect = Latin textor; Sanskrit takṣan, etc. Old High German dehsa hatchet. Cp. also originally meaning of karoti & kamma to do wood-work, to square, frame, chip Ja i.201 Mil 372 Mil 383

    Tajja
    1. “this like,” belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; especially in combination with vāyāma (a suitable effort as “causa movens”) AN i.207 Mil 53 Also with reference to sense-impressions, etc denoting the complemental sensation SN iv.215 MN i.190 MN i.191 Dhs 3–⁠6 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 6 & Commentary expl anucchavika)
    • Pv-a 203 (tajjassa pā
    • passive katattā by the doing of such evil, variant reading SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa); Note. The explanation of Kern, Toevoegselen ii.87 (tajja = tad + ja “arising from this”) is syntactically impossible
    tad + ya, cp. Sanskrit tadīya
    Tajjanā
    feminine
    1. threat, menace Ja ii.169 Vv 509 Vv-a 212 (bhayasantajjana)
    from tajjeti
    Tajjaniya
    1. to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a˚); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. MN 50th Sta Mil 365 As technical term ˚kamma one of the sangha-kammas Vin i.49 53, 143 sq., 325; ii.3 sq., 226, 230 AN i.99
    gerundive of tajjeti
    Tajjārī
    1. a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu’s and of which 36 form one rathareṇu Vb-a 343 cp. Abhp 194 tajjarī
    Tajjita
    1. threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by (—˚) DN i.141 (daṇḍa˚, bhaya˚) Dhp 188 (bhaya˚) Pug 56 especially in combination maraṇabhaya˚; moved by the fear of death Ja i.150 Ja i.223 Pv-a 216
    past participle of tajjeti
    Tajjeti
    1. to frighten threaten; curse, rail against Ja i.157 Ja i.158 Pv-a 55 past participle tajjita.
    2. causative tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse Pv-a 23 (= paribhāsāpeti)
    3. causative of tarjati, to frighten. cp. Latin torvus wild, frightful
    Taṭa
    1. declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank Ja i.232 Ja i.303 Ja ii.315 (udapāna˚); iv.141 Snp-a 519 Dhp-a i.73 (papāta˚) ‣See also talāka
    *tḷ ‣See tala & cp. tālu, also Latin tellus
    Taṭataṭāyati
    1. to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one’s teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. ˚yanto or ˚yamāna) Ja i.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); ii.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana “boiling with rage” like a “uddhane pakkhitta-loṇaṁ viya”); the latter trope also at Dhp-a iv.176 Dhp-a i.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta-loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); iii.328 (vātâhata-tālapaṇṇaṁ viya) Vv-a 47 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; variant reading kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+ akkosati paribhāsati), 256. cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā
    Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭtaṭ. Root *kḷ (on ṭ for ḷ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one’s teeth, to be in a frenzy. cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti ‣See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati
    Taṭṭaka
    1. a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver Ja iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 97, 121, 538 iv.281. According to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaṁ, cp. also Avestan taśta. Morris (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer)
    Etym. unknown
    Taṭṭikā
    feminine
    1. a (straw) mat Vin iv.40 (Buddhaghosa on this: teṭṭikaṁ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357) Ja i.141 (variant reading taddhika) Vism 97
    cp. kaṭaka
    Taṇḍula
    1. (* Sanskrit taṇḍula: dialectical] rice-grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; frequently combined with tila (q.v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaṁ telaṁ taṇḍulaṁ khādaniyaṁ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin i.220 238, 243, 249; talitaṇḍulâdayo Ja iii.53 Pv-a 105
    • Vin i.244 AN i.130 Ja i.255 Ja iii.55 Ja iii.425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); vi.365 (mūla˚ coarse r., majjhima medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain) Snp 295 Pug 32 Dhp-a i.395 (sāli-taṇḍula husked rice) DN-a i.93 cp. ut˚
    1. ˚ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice Ja ii.436
    • ˚dona a rice-vat or rice-bowl Dhp-a iv.15
    • ˚pāladvārā “doors (i.e. house) of the rice-guard” N
    • plural MN ii.185
    • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of rice Pv-a 131
    • ˚homa an oblation of rice DN i.9

    Taṇḍuleyyaka
    1. the plant Amaranthus polygonoides Vv-a 99 (enumerated amongst various kinds of ḍāka)
    cp. Sanskrit taṇḍulīya
    Taṇhā

    feminine

    1. lit drought, thirst; figuratively craving, hunger for, excitement the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. locative : kabaḷinkāre āhāre “thirst” for solid food SN ii.101f.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā = greed for Snp 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi)

      • A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv; ii.15 (= pipāsāya Pv-a 69)
      • B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phaedo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (DN ii.34) we are told how Taṇhā arises-when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā In the First Proclamation (S; v.420 ff. Vin i.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be livedic Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental “thirst, arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of; lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saṁsāra, of being reborn & dying again again (2; b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of
      • future births removed (2; c). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with “sabbupadhi-paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho” ‣See Nibbāna
      1. -1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (SN v.420 Vin i.10) and often afterwards DN ii.61 DN ii.308 DN iii.216 DN iii.275 SN iii.26 SN iii.158 Iti 50 Ps i.26 39; ii.147 Vb 101 365; Nett 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma˚, rūpa˚ & arūpa at DN iii.216 Vb 395 & yet another as rūpa˚, arūpa & nirodha˚ at DN iii.216
      • The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni ‣See rūpa, objects of sense or sensations viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: DN ii.58; Ps i.6 sq. Nd2 271i; in threefold aspects (as kāma-taṇhā, bhava & vibhava˚) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha-taṇha-kāyā (sixfold group ‣See compounds.) MN i.51 MN iii.280 Ps i.26 elsewhere called chadvārika-taṇhā “arising through the 6 doors” Dhp-a iii.286
      1. -18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & well-living are enum; d at Nd2 271iii (under taṇhā-lepa) 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at AN ii.212 Nett 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd; 2 271ii (under Jappā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361
      • Taṇhā as “kusalā pi akusalā pi” (good & bad) occurs at Nett 87 cp. Tālapuṭa’s good t. Thag i.1091
      • feminine
      • Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā˚ Snp 114 kāma˚ Si.131; gedha˚ Si.15; bhava˚ DN iii.274 (+ avijjā) grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd2 271iii, 271vi. T fetters the world & causes misery: “yāya ayaṁ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto” AN ii.211f. taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaṁ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaṁ Dhp 216 taṇhāya uḍḍito loko SN i.40 yaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ etth’ esā taṇhā … Vb 103 it is the 4th constituent of Māra’s army (M-senā) Snp 436 M’s daughter SN i.134 In comparisons: t. + jālinī visattikā SN i.107 = bharâdānaṁ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga-sahagatā SN iii.26 SN v.402: gaṇḍa = kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy etaṁ adhivacanaṁ SN iv.83 = sota SN iv.292 (and a khīṇāsavo = chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta-cārino t vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dhp 334
      • (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saṁsāra kammaṁ khettaṁ viññāṇaṁ bījaṁ; taṇhā sineho.. evaṁ āyatiṁ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti AN i.223 t ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṁ vuccati dukkha-samudayo Vb 107 similarly Nett 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) SN iii.26 Ps ii.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation ‣See paṭiccasamuppāda: vedanā-paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā-paccayā upādānaṁ Vin i.1 5 DN ii.31 DN ii.33 DN ii.56 etc.; t. & upadhi; taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti SN ii.108 ye taṇhaṁ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiṁ vaḍḍhenti, etc. SN ii.109 taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati SN i.39 taṇhā saṁyojanena saṁyuttā sattā dīgharattaṁ sandhāvanti saṁsaranti Iti 8 ‣See also t
      • dutiya
      • (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata- taṇha vigata-pipāsa vigata-pariḷāha DN iii.238 SN iii.8 SN iii.107f. 190 samūlaṁ taṇhaṁ abbuyha SN i.16 = 63, 121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); iii.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta Snp 83 Snp 849 Snp 1041 (+ nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena SN i.39 (“Nibbānan” iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaṁ chindati bandhanaṁ); taṇhaṁ mā kāsi mā lokaṁ punar āgami Snp 339 taṇhaṁ pariññāya … te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Snp 1082
      • ucchinna -bhava-taṇhā Snp 746 taṇhāya vūpasama SN iii.231 t
      • nirodha SN iv.390
      • ‣ See also MN i.51 Dhp 154 Iti 9 (vita˚ + anādāna), 50 (˚ṁ pahantvāna) Snp 495 Snp 496 Snp 916 & cp. ˚khaya

    2. ; Kindred terms which in Commentaries are explained by one of the taṇhā-formulae (cp. Nd2 271v & 271; vii): (a) t. in groups of 5: () with kilesa saṁyoga vipāka duccarita () diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; () diṭṭhi kil˚ kamma duccarita

      • (b) quasi-synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa vāna, visattikā, sibbanī
      • In compounds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc
      1. ˚ādhipateyya mastery over t. SN iii.103
      • ˚ādhipanna seized by t. SN i.29 Snp 1123
      • ˚ādāsa the mirror of t AN ii.54
      • ābhinivesa full of t. Pv-a 267
      • ˚āluka greedy Ja ii.78
      • ˚uppādā (
      • plural ) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) AN ii.10 = It 109 DN iii.228 Vb 375
      • ˚kāyā (
      • plural ) (six) groups of t ‣See above B i SN ii.3 DN iii.244 280; Ps i.26 Vb 380
      • ˚kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna ‣See above B2c: ˚rata Dhp 187 (explained at Dhp-a iii.241: arahatte c’ eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti) Vv 735 (explained by Nibbāna Vv-a 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with name Vin i.5 SN iii.133 Iti 88 etc ‣See name. In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin i.8 MN i.171 = Dh 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna AN ii.34 explained at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaṁ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka˚ avyāpajjha˚, upādānakkhaya˚, taṇhakkhaya˚ asammoha˚ Vin i.183 cp. also Snp 70 Snp 211 Snp 1070 Snp 1137
      • ˚gata obsessed with excitement, i.e. a victim of t Snp 776
      • ˚gaddula the leash of t. Nd2 271ii
      • ˚cchida breaking the cravings Snp 1021 Snp 1101
      • ˚jāla the snare of t. MN i.271 Thag 1, 306 Nd2 271ii
      • ˚dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion AN ii.10 Iti 9 = 109 = Sn 740, 741 = Nd2 305; cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p 278
      • ˚nadī the river of t. Nd2 271ii; cp. nadiyā soto ti taṇhāy’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ Iti 114
      • ˚nighātana the destruction of t. Snp 1085
      • ˚pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Nett 53, 69, 88, 160
      • ˚paccaya caused by t. Snp p. 144; Vism 568
      • ˚mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Ps i.26, 130 Vb 390
      • ˚lepa cleaving to t. Nd2 271iii; (+ diṭṭhi-lepa)
      • ˚vasika being in the power of t. Ja iv.3
      • ˚vicarita a thought of t AN ii.212
      • ˚saṅkhaya (complete) destruction of t. ˚sutta MN i.251 (cūḷa˚), 256 (mahā˚): ˚vimutti salvation through cessation of t. MN i.256 MN i.270 & ˚vimutta (adjective SN iv.391
      • ˚samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271ii
      • ˚sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaṁ kāyo) AN ii.145 (cp. Snp p. 144 yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti sabbaṁ taṇhāpaccayā) -saṁyojana the fetter of t.
      • adjective fettered, bound by t. in phrase t

        • saṁyojanena saṁyuttā sattā dīgharattaṁ sandhāvanti saṁsaranti Iti 8 & t
        • saṁyojanānaṁ sattānaṁ sandhāvataṁ saṁsarataṁ SN ii.178 = iii.149 Pv-a 166 AN i.223
        • ˚salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. SN i.192 (˚assa hantāraṁ vande ādiccabandhunaṁ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd2 503 (˚assa abbuḷhana; cp. above)
        Sanskrit tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa masculine & ṭṛṣ
      • feminine = Avestan tarśna thirst, Latin torreo to roast, Gothic gapaírsan Old High German derren

        • Another form of t. is tasiṇā
    Taṇhīyati
    1. to have thirst for SN ii.13 (for variant reading SS tuṇhīyati; Burmese manuscripts tasati); Vism 544 (+ upādiyati ghaṭ yati); cp. tasati &
    2. past participle tasita
    3. = taṇhāyati, denominative from taṇhā, cp. Sanskrit tṛṣyati to have thirst
    Tata
    1. stretched, extended, spread out SN i.357 (jāla) Ja iv.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni variant reading for tatāni). Note. samo tata at Ja i.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over)
    past participle of tanoti
    Tatiya
    1. Num. ord. the third
    • Sn 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001 Ja ii.353 Dhp 309 Pv-a 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaṁ
    • neuter adverb for the 3rd time DN ii.155 Snp 88 Snp 95 Snp 450 tatiyavāraṁ identical Dhp-a i.183 Vv-a 47 (= at last); yāva tatiyaṁ id Vin ii.188 Ja i.279 Dhp-a ii.75 Pv-a 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaṁ id DN i.95
    Sanskrit tṛtīya, Avestan ðritya, Latin tertius, Gothic pridja, English third
    Tato
    1. from this, in this SN iii.96 (tatoja) Ja iii.281 (tato paraṁ beyond this after this) Nd2 664 (identical) DN-a i.212 (tatonidāna). 2. thence Ja i.278 Mil 47
    2. thereupon, further afterwards Ja i.58 Dhp 42 Mil 48 Pv-a 21 etc
    ablative of pronoun base ta˚ ‣See ta˚ ii.4
    Tatta1
    1. heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) AN ii.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment) Dhp 308 (ayoguḷa) Ja ii.352 (identical); iv.306 (tattatapo “of red-hot heat, i.e. in severe self-torture) Mil 26 Mil 45 (adverb red-hot) Pv-a 221 (tatta-lohasecanaṁ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya)
    2. past participle of tapati
    Tatta2
    neuter
    1. truth; ablative tattato according to truth; accurately Ja ii.125 (ñatvā); iii.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly)
    tad + tva
    Tattaka1
    1. pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Mil 238 (bhojana)
    tatta past participle of tappati2 + ka
    Tattaka2
    1. adjective (= tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaṁ kālaṁ so long, just that time, i.e. the specified time (may be long or short = only so long) Dhp-a i.103 (variant reading ettakaṁ) ii.16 (= ettaka)
    Tattha
    1. A. 1. of; place: (a) place where there, in that place Snp 1071 Snp 1085 Dhp 58 Ja i.278 Pv i.1015 often with eva: tatth’ eva right there, on the (very same) spot SN i.116 Ja ii.154 Pv-a 27 In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage in this, here, in this connection (‣ See also tatra) Dhs 584 Dhp-a i.21 Pv-a 7 etc. (b) direction: there, to this place Ja ii.159 (gantvā); vi.368 Pv-a 16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i.e. wherever you like of a Yakkha)
    • as (
    • locative ) case of
    • pronoun base ta˚ in this, for or about that, etc. Snp 1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: Snp-a tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dhp 249 (= tasmiṁ dāne
    • masculine Dhp-a iii.359) tattha kā paridevanā Pv i.123 (“why sorrow for this?”)

  • of time: then, for the time being, interim (= ettha cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha-parinibbāyin, where corresponding phrases have antarā-parinibbāyin (AN ii.238 e.g.≈i.134 ‣See under parinibbāyin) DN i.156 AN i.232 ii.5; iv.12 SN v.357 MN ii.52 etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra AN 3 ‣See next

    • B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever … there Iti 115 Nett 96 (˚gāmini-paṭipadā) Vv-a 297 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 2 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 77, etc-See tatra
    Sanskrit tatra adverb of place, cp. Gothic papro & also Sanskrit atra, yatra
  • Tatra
    1. (Sanskrit tatra] = tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dhp 375 Pv-a 54 tatrâpi DN i.81 = It 22≈(tatrâpâsiṁ). tatra pi DN i.1 (= DN-a i.42). tatra kho Vin i.10 34 AN v.5f.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). In explanations: Pv-a 19 (tatrâyaṁ vitthārakathā “here follows the story in detail”)
    • in this Snp 595 (tatra kevalino smase) Dhp 88 (tatr’ abhirati enjoyment in this)

  • a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha AN 3 is that as first part of a compound, where it is to be taken as generalizing (= tatra tatra): all kinds of (originally in this & that), in whatever condition, all-round, complete (cp. yaṁ taṁ under ta˚; ii.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra-majjhatt’ upekkhā 160) Dhs-a 132 133 (majjh˚ + tatra majjh˚); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (= tatra upāyaññū) having all-round knowledge of the means and ways Snp 321 (correct reading at Snp-a 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaṁsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin iv.211 (or may it be taken as “suitable, corresponding proportionate"? cp. tadūpiya)

    • B. tatra tatra, in t
    • t
    • abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin i.10 Ps ii.147; Nett 72 Vism 506
  • Tatha
    adjective
    1. (being) in truth, truthful true, real DN i.190 (+ bhūta taccha) MN iii.70 Thag 1 347 Snp 1115 (= Nd2 275 taccha bhūta, etc.). neuter tathaṁ = saccaṁ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths SN v.430 SN v.435; Ps ii.104 sq. (+ avitathāni anaññathāni). As epithet of Nibbāna ‣See derivations & cp. taccha. abl tathato exactly variant reading B for tattato at Ja ii.125 ‣See tatta2

      • yathā tathaṁ (cp. yathā tacchaṁ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Snp 699 Snp 732 Snp 1127
      • Cp vitatha
      1. ˚parakkama reaching out to the truth Ja v.395 (= saccanikkama)
      2. ˚vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Mil 401
      an adjectivized tathā out of combination tathā ti “so it is,” cp. taccha
    Tathatā
    feminine
    1. state of being such, such-likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518
    abstract from tathā → tatha
    Tathatta
    neuter
    1. “the state of being so,” the truth, Nibbāna; only in following phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i.e. attain) Nibbāna DN i.175 similarly SN ii.199 SN ii.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to name) Mil 255 Vism 214
    • (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaṁ bhāvitaṁ) identical SN iv.294 = M i.301 SN v.90 SN v.213 sq
    • (c) tathattāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati identical MN i.468
    • ablative tathattā in truth, really Snp 520f. (cp. Mvu iii.397)
    *tathātvaṁ
    Tathā
    adverb
    1. so, thus (and not otherwise, opposite aññathā), in this way, likewise Snp 1052 (variant reading yathā) Ja i.137 etc
    • Often with eva tath’ eva just so, still the same, not different DN iii.135 (taṁ tath’ eva hoti no aññathā) Ja i.263 Ja i.278 Pv i.83 Pv-a 55 Corresponding with yathā : tathā-yathā so-that Dhp 282 Pv-a 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that …, cp. Latin ut consecutive); yathā-tathā asso also Snp 504 Ja i.223 Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone)
    • In compounds. tath before vowels
    1. ˚ūpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Snp 229 (= tathāvidha Kp-a 185), 233 Iti 33 90
    2. ˚kārin acting so (corresponding w yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin Snp 357 Iti 122
    • ˚gata ‣See sep
    • ˚bhāva “the being so, such a condition Ja i.279
    • ˚rūpa such a, like this or that especially so great, such Vin i.16 Snp p. 107 Iti 107 DN-a i.104 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 56.
    • neuter adverb thus Pv-a 14 cp. evarūpa-vādin speaking so (cp. ˚kārin) Snp 430 Iti 122 (of the Tathāgata)
    • ˚vidha such like, so (= tathārūpa) Snp 772 Snp 818 Snp 1073 Snp 1113 Nd2 277 (= tādisa taṁsaṇṭhita tappakāra)
    Sanskrit tathā, cp. also kathaṁ
    Tathāgata
    1. -67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non-Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre-Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre-Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898 suggests “he who has won through to the truth.” Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaṁgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī-karoti as well as upadhiṁ karoti
    • DN i.12 DN i.27 DN i.46 DN i.63 DN ii.68 DN ii.103 DN ii.108 115, 140, 142; iii.14, 24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq. 273 sq. SN i.110f.; ii.222 sq.; iii.215; iv.127, 380 sq. AN i.286 AN ii.17 AN ii.25 AN ii.120 AN iii.35 etc. Snp 236 Snp 347 Snp 467 Snp 557 Snp 1114Iti 121f.; Kp-a 196; Ps i.121 sq. Dhs 1099 1117, 1234 Vb 325f. 340, etc., etc
    1. ˚balāni (plural ) the supreme intellectual powers of a Text usually enumerated as a set of ten: in detail at. AN v.33 sq = Ps ii.174 MN i.69 SN ii.27 Nd2 466. Other sets of five at AN iii.9 of six AN iii.417f. ‣See bala
    2. ˚sāvaka a disciple of the Text DN ii.142 AN i.90 AN ii.4 AN iii.326f. Iti 88 Snp p. 15
    3. Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DN-a i.59
    Tathiya
    adjective [
    1. true, Snp 882 Snp 883
    Sanskrit tathya = taccha
    Tadanurūpa
    adjective
    1. befitting, suitable, going well with Ja vi.366 Dhp-a iv.15
    cp. ta˚ i a
    Tadā
    adverb
    1. then, as that time (either past or future ) DN ii.157 Ja ii.113 Ja ii.158 Pv i.105 Pv-a 42 Also used like an adjective: te tadā-mātāpitaro etarahi m˚ ahesuṁ “the then mother & father” Ja i.215 (cp Latin quondam); tadā-sotāpanna-upāsaka Ja ii.113 Tadupika & Tadupiya; Vedic; cp. kadā
    Tadūpika
    Tadūpiya;
    1. ‣See ta˚ I. a
    Tanaya
    tanuya;
    1. offspring, son Mhvs vii.28. plural tanuyā = Sanskrit tanayau
      1. son & daughter SN i.7
      at SN i.7 variant reading tanaya, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit tanuja Avs ii.200
    Tanu
    1. adjective thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara graceful = uttamarūpa-dhara Vv-a 79 perhaps to 2) Pv-a 46 (of hair: fine + mudhu)
    2. noun neuter body (originally slender part of the body = waist) Vv 537 (kañcana˚) Pv i.121 Vism 79 (uju +). cp. tanutara
      1. ˚karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316 (Buddhaghosa on CV. v.9, 2)
      2. ˚bhāva decrease Pug 17
      • ˚bhūta decreased, diminished Pug 17 esp in phrase ˚soka with diminished grief, having one’s grief allayed Dhp-a iii.176 Pv-a 38
      Vedic tanu, feminine tanvī; also neuter tanu & tanū
    3. feminine body; *ten ‣See tanoti = Latin tenuis, Old High German dunni, English thin
    Tanuka
    adjective = tanu; little, small Dhp 174 (= Dhp-a 175) Snp 994 (soka).
    Tanutara
    1. the waist (literally smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro “her waist is beautiful”)
    Tanutta

    neuter

    1. diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance AN i.160 (manussānaṁ khayo hoti tanuttaṁ paññāyati); ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚); especially in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin “rāga-d
    • mohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti” DN i.156 SN v.357f. 376, 406 AN ii.238 Pug 16
    n abstract of tanu
    Tanoti
    1. to stretch extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in past participle tata. Pgdp 17
    2. *ten; cp. Sanskrit tanoti, Latin teneo, tenuis, tendo (English ex-tend); Gothic panjan Old High German denen; cp. also Sanskrit tanti, tāna, tantra
    Tanta
    neuter
    1. a thread, a string, a loom Ja i.356 (˚vitata-ṭṭhāna the place of weaving) Dhp-a i.424 At Ja iv.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out)
    1. ˚ākula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta “entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight” SN ii.92 SN iv.158 AN ii.211 Dīpavaṁsa xii.32 ‣See guḷā
    2. ˚āvuta weaving weft, web SN v.45 AN i.286
    • ˚bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin ii.135
    • ˚rajjuka “stringing & roping,” hanging execution Ja iv.87
    • ˚vāya a weaver Ja i.356 Mil 331 Vism 259 Dhp-a i.424
    Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī feminine string
    Tantaka
    neuter “weaving,” a weaving-loom Vin ii.135
    Tanti
    feminine
    1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182 Thag 2, 390 (cp. Thag-a 257) Ja iv.389 Dhp-a i.163 Pv-a 151
    2. line lineage (+ paveṇi custom, tradition) Ja vi.380 Dhp-a i.284
    3. ˚dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+ vaṁsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake)
    4. a sacred text a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu-peyyāla˚) avimutta-tanti-magga DN-a i.2 M AN i.2

      1. ˚ssara string music Vin i.182 Ja iii.178
      Vedic tantrī ‣See tanta
    Tantu
    1. a string, cord, wire (of a lute) Ja v.196
    Vedic tantu, cp. tanta
    Tandita
    adjective
    1. weary, lazy, giving way Mil 238 (˚kata). Usually ; active, keen, industrious sedulous Dhp 305 Dhp 366 Dhp 375 Vv 3322 Mil 390 Vv-a 142 cp. next
    past participle of tandeti = Sanskrit tandrayate & tandate to relax. From; *ten ‣See tanoti
    Tandī
    feminine
    1. weariness, laziness, sloth SN v.64 MN i.464 AN i.3 Snp 926 Snp 942 Ja v.397 (+ ālasya) Vb 352 (identical)
    Sanskrit tanita
    Tapa
    Tapo;
    1. torment, punishment, penance, especially religious austerity, selfchastisement ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahati tapassiṁ lūkhajīviṁ upavadati DN i.161 = SN iv.330 anattha-sañhitaṁ ñatvā yaṁ kiñci aparaṁ tapaṁ SN i.103 Ja iv.306 (tattatapa ‣See tatta)
    2. mental devotion self-control, abstinence, practice of morality (often brahmacariyā & saṁvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. DN iii.42f. 232 (attan & paran˚) 239 SN i.38 SN i.43 SN iv.118 SN iv.180 MN ii.155 MN ii.199 DN ii.49 Dhp 184 (paramaṁ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho) Snp 77 SN i.172 (saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi) Snp 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (identical), 901 Pv i.32 (instrumental tapasā brahmacariyena Pv-a 15) Ja i.293 Nett 121 (+ indriyasaṁvara); Kp-a 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): Vv-a 114 (instrumental tapasā) Pv-a 98
      1. ˚kamma ascetic practice SN i.103
      • ˚jigucchā disgust for asceticism DN i.174 DN iii.40 DN iii.42f. 48 sq. AN ii.200
      • ˚pakkama = ˚kamma DN i.165f. (should it be tapopakkama = tapa + upakkama, or tapo-kamma?)
      • ˚vana the ascetic’s forest Vism 58, 79, 342
      from tapati, cp. Latin tepor, heat
    Tapati
    1. to shine, to be bright, Dhp 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc. = virocati Dhp-a iv.143) Snp 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuṁ), 687 (suriyaṁ tapantaṁ)
    2. ger tapanīya ‣See sep.
    3. past participle tatta1
    4. Sanskrit tapati, *tep, cp. Latin tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus = tepid
    Tapana
    adjective-noun
    1. burning, heat; figuratively torment, torture, austerity
    1. -1. (as neuter ) Pv-a 98 (kāya ˚sankhāto tapo)
    2. (as
    3. feminine ) tapanī Ja v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin Commentary visīvana-aggiṭṭha-sankhātā-tapanī)
    to tapati & tapa
    Tapanīya1
    1. burning: figuratively inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying AN i.49 = It 24 AN iv.97 (Commentary tāpajanaka); v.276 Ja iv.177 Dhs i305
    gerundive of tapati
    Tapanīya2
    neuter also tapaneyya (J v.372) & tapañña (J vi.218)
    1. shining; (n.) the shining bright metal, i.e. gold (= rattasuvaṇṇa Ja v.372 Thag-a 252) Thag 2, 374 Vv 8416 Vv-a 12 37, 340
    originally gerundive of tapati
    Tapassin
    adjective-noun
    1. one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non-Buddhist). Figuratively one who exercises self-control & attains mastery over his senses Vin i.234 = AN iv.184 (ta passive samaṇo Gotamo) DN iii.40 DN iii.42f. 49 SN i.29 SN iv.330 SN iv.337 sq. MN i.77 Snp 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuṁ saññatattā tapassino) Vv 2210 Pv i.32 (˚rūpa, under the appearance of a “holy” man: samaṇa-patirūpaka Pv-a 15); ii.614 (= saṁvāraka Pv-a 98 tapo etesaṁ atthī ti ibid.)
    2. tapas + vin ‣See tapati & tapa
    Tappaṇa
    neuter
    1. satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta˚ some sort of eye-wash DN i.12 (in combination with kaṇṇa-tela & natthu-kamma)
    Sanskrit tarpaṇa
    Tappati1
    1. to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dhp 17 Dhp 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho = paccati Dhp-a iii.64)
    Sanskrit tapyate, passive of tapati
    Tappati2
    1. instrumental to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied Ja i.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); ii.443; v.485 = Mil 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers) Vv 8413 gerundive tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability Ja iii.342 (in full). Also tappaya in compound dut˚; hard to be satisfied AN i.87 Pug 26
    2. past participle titta

      • causative tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed Iti 67 (annapānena) Pv ii.48 (identical) Mil 227 -
      • past participle tappita
      Sanskrit tṛpyate, causative tarpayati; *terp =
    Tappara
    adjective
    1. quite given to or intent upon (—˚), diligent, devoted Thag-a 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana˚ & buddhopaṭṭhāna˚)
    Sanskrit tatpara
    Tappetar
    1. one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combination titto ca tappetā ca: self-satisfied & satisfying others AN i.87 Pug 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha)
    agent noun to tappeti
    Tab˚
    1. ; in compounds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc. = taṁ˚ ‣See under ta˚ I. a
    Tama
    neuter & tamo
    1. darkness (synonym andhakāra, opposite joti), literally as well as figuratively (mental darkness = ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adjective living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Snp 248 (pecca tamaṁ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaṁ avaṁsirā), 763 (nivutānaṁ t. hoti andhakāro apassataṁ), 956 (sabbaṁ tamaṁ vinodetvā) Vb 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future ) adjective: puggalo tamo tama-parāyaṇo DN iii.233 AN ii.85 Pug 51 Ja ii.17

      • tamā tamaṁ out of one “duggati into another Snp 278 (vinipātaṁ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaṁ t. t…. dukkaṁ nigacchati), cp. Mvu ii.225 also tamāto tamaṁ ibid. i.27; ii.215
      • tamat-agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sanskrit tamaḥ pāre) SN v.154 SN v.163
      1. ˚andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) variant reading for samandha˚ at Ja iii.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra)
      2. ˚nivuta enveloped in d. Snp 348
      • ˚nuda (tama˚ & tamo˚), dispelling darkness, frequently as epithet of the Buddha or other sages Snp 1133 Snp 1136 Iti 32 108 Nd2 281 Vv 352 (= Vv-a 161) Mil 1 Mil 21 etc
      • ˚parāyaṇa
      • adjective having a state of darkness or “duggati” for his end or destiny SN i.93 AN ii.85 = Pug 51
      Sanskrit tamas, tam & tim; , cp. tamisra = Latin tenebrae; also timira dark & Pali tibba, timira Old High German dinstar & finstar; Anglo-Saxon thimm, English dim
    Tamāla
    1. name of a tree (Xanthochymus pictorius) Pv iii.105 (+ uppala)
    Sanskrit tamāla
    Tamba
    neuter
    1. copper (“the dark metal”); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e.g. lākhātamba adjective Thag 2 440 (colour of an ox); ˚akkhin Vv 323 (timira˚) Sdhp 286; ˚nakhin Ja vi.290
    2. ˚nettā
    3. feminine ibid.; ˚bhājana Dhp-a i.395
    4. ˚mattika Dhp-a iv.106
    5. ˚vammika Dhp-a iii.208
    6. ˚loha Pv-a 95 (= loha)
    7. Sanskrit tāmra, originally adjective = dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sanskrit adjective taṁsra identical, to tama
    Tambūla
    neuter
    1. betel or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal) Ja i.266 Ja i.291 Ja ii.320 Vism 314 Dhp-a iii.219
    • ˚˚pasibbaka betel-bag Ja vi.367
    Sanskrit tambūla
    Taya
    neuter
    1. a triad, in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) ‣See ratana e.g. Pv-a 1 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 141
    • piṭaka-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas Snp-a 328
    Sanskrit trayaṁ triad, cp. trayī ‣See also tāvatiṁsa
    Tayo
    feminine tisso, neuter tīṇi
    1. numeral cardinal three
    1. nominative- accusative masculine tayo (Sn 311), & tayas (tayas; su dhammā Snp 231 ‣See KhA 188)
    2. feminine tisso (DN i.143 AN v.210 Iti 99)
    3. neuter tīṇi (AN i.138 etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kh iii. (cp. Kp-a 79 tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Snp 1019); genitive
    4. masculine nt tiṇṇaṁ (J iii.52, 111, etc.), feminine tissannaṁ; instrumental tīhi (ṭhānehi Dhp 224 vijjāhi Iti 101);
    5. locative tīsu (janesu Ja i.307 vidhāsu Snp 842)

      • In composition & derivation: ti in numerical compounds.: tidasa (30) q.v.; tisata (300) Snp 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (janā ˚ā); in numerical derivations: tiṁsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṁ (thrice) tidhā (threefold)
      • In nominativenal compounds. ‣See ti˚ te (a) in numerical compounds.: terasa (Snp-a 489 Dhs-a 333 Vv-a 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (SN i.192 Snp
      • past participle 102 103) (13) Sanskrit trayodaśa, Latin tredecim
      1. ; tevīsa (23 Vv-a 5
      • tettiṁsa (33) Ja i.273 Dhp-a i.267
      • tesaṭṭhi (63 Pv-a 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). (b) in nominativenal compounds. ‣See te˚
      Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Latin trēs, tria; Gothic preis, prija; Old High German drī English three, etc.
    Tara
    1. (n.) crossing, “transit,” passing over Snp 1119 (maccu˚). adjective to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross SN iv.157 Snp 174 Snp 273 (oghaṁ t duttaraṁ) Thag 2, 10 Iti 57 Also as su-duttara SN i.35 SN v.24

      1. ˚esin wanting to passive over Ja iii.230
      2. ‣See tarati
    Taraṅga
    1. a wave Vism 157
    tara + ga
    Taraccha
    1. hyena Vin iii.58 AN iii.101 Mil 149 Mil 267 Dhp AN 331; Mhbv.154. feminine taracchi Ja v.71 406; vi.562
    2. Derivation unknown. The Sanskrit forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa
    Taraṇa
    neuter
    1. going across, passing over, traversing Vin iv.65 (tiriyaṁ˚); Ps i.15; ii.99, 119
    ‣See tarati
    Tarati1
    1. (literally) to go or get through, to cross (a river), passive over, traverse (figuratively) to get beyond, i.e. to surmount, overcome, esp oghaṁ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc. SN i.53 SN i.208 SN i.214 SN v.168 SN v.186 Snp 173 Snp 273 Snp 771 Snp 1069 sangaṁ Snp 791 visattikaṁ Snp 333 Snp 857 ubhayaṁ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv; iv.131 (= atikkameti Pv-a 278) Nd2 282-ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati) gerundive taritabba Vin iv.65 (nadī);
    2. aorist atari Ja iii.189 (samuddaṁ) & atāri Snp 355 Snp 1047 (jāti-maraṇaṁ), pl atāruṁ Snp 1045

      • ‣ See also tāreti (
      • causative ), tāṇa, tāyate tiro, tiriyaṁ, tīra, tīreti
      Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Latin termen, terminus, trans = Gothic pairh = Anglo-Saxon purh = English through
    Tarati2
    1. to be in a hurry, to make haste Thag 1, 291 ppr. taramāna in ˚rūpa adjective quickly, hurriedly Snp 417 Pv ii.62 Pv-a 181 (= turita) & ataramāna Vin i.248
    2. gerundive taraṇīya Thag 1, 293

      • ‣ See also tura, turita, turiya
      tvarate, past participle tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Old High German dweran = English twirl Latin torqueo & turba & perhaps German stūren, zerstören English storm ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under trua
    Tarahi
    adverb
    1. then, at that time Vin ii.189
    Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi
    Tari
    feminine
    1. a boat Dāvs iv.53
    from tarati
    Taritatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through Vv-a 284
    abstract of tarita past participle of tarati1
    Taru
    1. tree, Pv-a 154 (˚gaṇā), 251
    Perhaps dialect. for dāru
    Taruṇa
    adjective
    1. tender, of tender age, young new, newly (˚-) fresh. especially applied to a young calf MN i.459 (in simile); ˚vaccha, ˚vacchaka, ˚vacchī Vin i.193 Ja i.191 Dhp-a ii.35 Vv-a 200
    2. Vin i.243 (fresh milk) DN i.114 (Gotamo t. c’ eva t
    3. paribbājako ca “a young man and only lately become a wanderer”) Pv-a 3 Pv-a 46 (˚janā), 62 (˚putta); Bdhd 93, 121
    4. masculine neuter the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin i.189 (tāla˚) MN i.432 Vism 361 (taruṇa-tāla)
    Vedic taruṇa, cp. Latin tener & perhaps tardus
    Tala
    neuter
    1. (a) flat surface (w. reference to either top or bottom: cp. German boden), level, ground, base Ja i.60 62 (pāsāda˚ flat roof); iii.60 (identical); paṭhavī˚ (level ground) Ja ii.111 cp. bhūmi˚ Pv-a 176 ādāsa˚ surface of a mirror Vism 450, 456, 489; salila˚ (surface of pond Pv-a 157 Vv-a 160 heṭṭhima˚ (the lowest level Ja i.202 Pv-a 281 -J i.233 (base); 266 (khagga˚ the flat of the sword); ii.102 (bheri˚)
    • (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot Ja ii.223 Vism 250 & compounds
    • ‣ See also taṭa, tāla, tālu
    1. ˚ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260 261
    2. ˚sattika in ˚ṁ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin iv.147 Dhp-a iii.50 cp. Vinaya Texts i.51
    Derivation uncertain. cp. Sanskrit tala masculine & nt.; cp. Latin tellus (earth), tabula (= table). Old Irish talam (earth), Anglo-Saxon pel (= deal), Old High German dili = German diele
    Talika
    adjective
    1. having a sole, in eka—˚upāhanā a sandal with one sole Ja ii.277 Ja iii.80 Ja iii.81 (Burmese variant paṭilika); cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 165
    from tala
    Taluṇa
    1. = taruṇa Dhs-a 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573)
    Taḷāka
    neuter
    1. a pond, pool reservoir Vin ii.256 Ja i.4 Ja i.239 Pv-a 202 DN-a i.273 Mil 1 Mil 66 = 81, 246, 296, 359
    Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sanskrit forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga
    Tasa
    adjective
    1. trembling, frightened Ja i.336 = 344 (vakā, ex
    2. plural at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of:
    3. moving, running (to flee & to tremble), always in comb; ntasa-thāvarā (
    4. plural ) movable & immovable beings cp. Mvu; i.207 jangama-sthāvara; ii.10 calaṁ sthāvara
      1. . Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (= Arahant Kp-a 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati; 1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at Kp-a 245 tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaṁ sabhayānañ c’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; also at Nd2 479: tasa ti yesaṁ tasitā (tasiṇā? taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaṁ āpajjanti. SN i.141 SN iv.117 SN iv.351 SN v.393 Snp 146 Snp 629 Dhp 405 Thag 1, 876 Ja v.221 Nd2 479 Dhp-a iv.175
      from tasati2
    Tasati1
    1. to be thirsty figuratively to crave for SN ii.13 Mil 254 past participle tasita1. cp. pari˚
    2. Sanskrit tṛṣyati = Latin torreo (= English torrid, toast), Gothic gapairsan & gapaúrsnan Old High German derren ‣See also taṇhā & taṇhīyati
    Tasati2
    1. to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Snp 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke) Nd2 479 (= santāsaṁ āpajjati); Kp-a 245 (may be taker as tasati1 ‣See tasa). past participle tasita2, cp. also tasa uttasati
    2. Vedic trasati = Latin terreo (= terror); *ters from *ter in Sanskrit tarala, cp. also Latin tremo (= tremble and trepidus
    Tasara
    neuter
    1. a shuttle Snp 215 Snp 464 Snp 497 Dhp-a i.424 Dhp-a iii.172 cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 160
    Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.
    Tasiṇā
    feminine
    1. thirst; figuratively craving ‣See taṇhā SN v.54 SN v.58 Nd2 479 (to be read for tasitā? Dhp 342 Dhp 343
    Diaeretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā → juṇhā, kasiṇa → kṛtsṇa, etc.
    Tasita1
    1. dried up, parched, thirsty SN ii.110 SN ii.118 Snp 980 Snp 1014 (not with Fausböll = tasita2) Ja iv.20 Pv ii.936 (chāta +), 103 (= pipāsita Pv-a 143); iii.65 (= pipāsita Pv-a 127 Pv-a 202) Mil 318 (kilanta +)
    past participle of tasati1
    Tasita2
    1. frightened, full of fear Ja i.26 (bhīta +). 342, iv.141 (identical): Nd2 479 (or = tasiṇā?). atasita fearless SN iii.57 Tassa-papiyyasika
    past participle of tasati2
    Tassa-pāpiyyasikā
    feminine (viz. kiriyā) name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin i.325 in detail ex
    • plural MN ii.249 + tiṇavatthāraka DN iii.254 AN i.99
    • ˚kammaṁ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin ii.85 86; ˚kata one against whom the latter is carried out AN iv.347

    Tāṇa
    neuter
    1. shelter, protection refuge, especially as technical term of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in comb; n with leṇa & saraṇa; (also dīpa & abhaya; , in various contexts, especially with ref to Nibbāna ‣See Nd2 s.v.: DN i.95 (˚ṁ, etc. gavesin ‣Seeking refuge) AN i.155 SN iv.315 (maṁtāṇa, etc. adj protected by me, in my shelter)
    • SN i.2 SN i.54 SN i.55 SN i.107 (˚ṁ karoti); iv.372 (˚gāmī maggo) AN iv.184 Snp 668 (˚ṁ upeti) Dhp 288 Ja i.412 (= protector, explained by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224 Sdhp 289. cp. tātar & tāyati
    from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. originally bringing or ‣Seeing through
    Tāṇatā
    feminine
    1. protection, sheltering Dhp 288
    abstract of tāṇa
    Tāta
    1. father; usually in voc. singular tāta (and plural tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps = tātā ‣See next) at Thag 2, 423 424 (+ ammā). tāta (singular) in addr. one: Ja iii.54 Ja iv.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) Dhp-a; ii.48 (= father) iii.196 (identical) Pv-a 41 (= father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister) Ja i.179 (identical) Mil 15 Mil 16 Mil 17 (a bhikkhu or thera) in addr. several Vin i.249 Ja ii.133 Pv-a 50 tātā (
    2. plural ) Ja i.166 263; iv.138
    3. Vedic tāta, Latin tata, German tate, English dad(dy); onomat.
    Tātar
    1. protector, saviour, helper DN-a i.229 For meaning “father ‣See tāta & cp. pitā = tāyitā at Ja i.412
    from Vedic trā, agent noun to trāyati to protect
    Tādin
    adjective noun (
    • nominative tādī & tādi, in compounds. tādi˚)

      1. such, such like of such (good) qualities, “ecce homo”; in pregnant sense ap plural to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as “such” in 5 ways ‣See Nd1 114f. Snp-a 202 & cp. Mil 382 tādī: Snp 712 Snp 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino ‣See Snp-a 201f.); tādi Snp 488 Snp 509 Snp 519f. Dhp 95 genitive tādino Dhp 95 Dhp 96; with reference to the Buddha DN ii.157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ Avs ii.199) Vv 186 (explanation Vv-a 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu ‣See Nd1 114f.) of Arahant AN ii.34 Snp 154 (or tādī no); instrumental tādinā Snp 697 Mil 382
      2. accusative tādiṁ Snp 86 Snp 219 Snp 957 :
      3. locative pl tādisu Pv ii.971 (= iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu Pv-a 140 cp. Vv-a 95)

        • See tādisa1
        1. ˚bhāva “such-ness,” high(est) qualification Vism 5 214
        2. ˚lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being Ja iii.98 (˚yoga, cp. nakkhatta-yoga) Snp-a 200 (˚patta) Vv-a 95 (˚sampatti)
        Vedic tādṛś from tad-dṛś of such appearance
    Tādina
    adjective [enlarged form of tādin) = tādin, only in
    • locative tādine Vv 212 (= tādimhi Vv-a 106).

    Tādisa1
    adjective
    1. such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition Ja i.151 iii.280 Snp 112 Snp 317 Snp 459 Nd2 277 (in ex plural of tathāvidha) Iti 68 Pv ii.94 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 72 Mil 382 Also correlative tādisa-tādisa the one-the other Vv-a 288
    2. feminine tādisī Sanskrit tādṛsī
      1. Pv i.56 (vaṇijjā)
      Vedic tādṛśa from tad-dṛsa = tad-rūpa; a reduction of this form in Pali tādin
    Tādisa2
    adjective
    1. like you Ja i.167 Ja v.107
    tvaṁ + disa. cp. Sanskrit tvādṛśa
    Tādisaka
    adjective = tādisa1, of such character Snp 278 Iti 68
    Tāpana
    neuter
    1. burning, scorching, roasting; figuratively tormenting, torture, self-mortification Vv-a 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaṁ). cp. ā˚; upa˚ pari˚
    from tāpeti
    Tāpasa
    1. one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enum; d at DN-a i.270 & Snp-a 295
    • J; ii.101, 102; v.201 Pv-a 153
    • ˚pabbajjā the life of an a. Ja iii.119 Dhp-a iv.29 DN-a i.270
    • feminine tāpasī a female ascetic Mhvs vii.11, 12
    from tapa & tapas
    Tāpeti
    1. to burn out, scorch, torment, figuratively root out, quench Snp 451 (attānaṁ) Ja v.267 (janapadaṁ) Vv-a 114 (kilesaṁ t. in ex plural of tapassin). cp. pari˚
    2. Sanskrit tāpayati, causative to tapati
    Tāma
    1. desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasangha-suppahīna Thag 1, 310 an epithet of frogs which perhaps (with Kern, Toevoegselen ii.88) is to be read as tāma-tamata-suppahita; “horribly greedy” (Kern gruwelijk vraatzuchtig)
    Sanskrit tāma
    Tāyati
    1. to shelter protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish SN iv.246 (rūpa-balaṁ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚) Ja iv.387 Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṁ ñātī vā pana ñātake) Pv-a 7 (khettaṁ tāyati bījaṁ)
    Sanskrit trāyate & trāte, connected with; *ter in tarati, originally to ‣See through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.
    Tāyitar
    1. one who protects, shelters or guards Ja i.412 (in ex plural of tāṇa, q.v.)
    2. agent noun from tāyati
    Tārā
    feminine
    1. a star, a planet Snp 687 (tārāsabha the lord, literally “the bull” of the stars, i.e. the Moon)
    1. ˚gaṇa (tāra˚) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t
    • gaṇe atirocati)
    • ˚maṇivitāna “star-jewel-awning” canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76
    Sanskrit tārā = Latin stella, Gothic staírnō, Old High German sterro (:English star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources
    Tārakā
    feminine
    1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning-star (Venus) Vv 92 = Pv ii.110; -J i.108; tāraka-rūpa the light (or sparkling of the stars DN iii.85 DN iii.90 SN iii.156 = It 19 SN v.44 Vv-a 79 Dhs 617
    2. figuratively sparkling, glitter, twinkle akkhi˚ the pupil of the eye MN i.80 udaka˚ sparkling of the water ibid
    Sanskrit tārakā
    Tāreti1
    1. to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Snp 319 (pare tārayetuṁ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe) Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataṁ varo: “one who is through is the best of those who can help through”) Ja i.28 (v.203). aorist atārayi Snp 539 Snp 540 & ṭāresi Snp 545
    2. causative of tarati1
    Tāreti2
    1. to make haste Thag 1, 293
    causative of tarati2
    Tāla
    1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; frequently in comparisons similes MN i.187 Ja i.202 (˚vana), 273 (˚matta as tall as a palm): Vv-a 162 Pv-a 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo)
    2. a strip, stripe, streak Ja v.372 (= raji)
      1. ˚aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit Dhp-a ii.53 cp. 60 (˚aṭṭhi-khaṇḍa)
      2. ˚kanda a bulbous plant Ja iv.46 (= kalamba)
      3. ˚kkhandha the trunk of a palm Ja iv.351 Vv-a 227 (˚parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya) Pv-a 56
      • ˚cchidda ‣See tāḷa˚
      • ˚taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin i.189
      • ˚pakka palm fruit Iti 84
      • ˚paṇṇa a palm-leaf Dhp-a i.391 Dhp-a ii.249 iii.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata-maṇḍalavījanī Vv-a 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for ˚vaṇṭha of Goon ed. p. 30) Vv-a 147 (variant reading ˚vaṇṭa q.v.) Nd2 562 (+ vidhūpana)
      • ˚patta a palm-leaf Vin i.189 Vv-a 147
      • ˚miñja the pith of a p. Ja iv.402
      • ˚vaṇṭa [ Sanskrit tālavṛṇta a fan Vin ii.130 (+ vidhūpana), 137 Ja i.265 Vv-a 44 cp. ˚paṇṇa
      • ˚vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu = tāla-avatthu) in tālāvatthukata a palm rendered groundless i.e. uprooted; frequently as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.) Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna-mūla t anabhāvaṁ-kata “given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again” (Kern, Toevoegselen ii.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit : Mvu iii.360 has kālavastuṁ

        • The readings vary: tālāvatthu e.g. at MN i.370 SN i.69 SN iv.84 AN i.135 AN ii.38 Ja v.267 tālav SN iii.10 SN v.327 Thag 2, 478 (Thag-a 286: tālassa chindita-ṭṭhāna-sadisa); Nd2 frequently ‣See under pahīna; tālāvatthukatā at Vin iii.3
        • In other combination tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away Ja v.267 (= chinnamūla-tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. MN i.250
        • ˚vāra “palm-time” (?) or is it tāḷa˚ (gong-turn?) Dhp-a ii.49 (note: from tala-pratiṣṭhāyāṁ?)
        Sanskrit tāla, cp. Latin talea shoot, sprout
    Tālīsa
    neuter (also tālissa Ja iv.286 tālīsaka Mil 338)
    1. the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+ tagara) Ja iv.286 (identical) Mil 338
    cp. Sanskrit tālī, tālīśa & talāśā
    Tālīsa2
    1. (No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim
    Tālu
    1. the palate Snp 716 Ja i.419 Vism 264 (˚matthaka top of p.) Pv-a 260
    Sanskrit tālu ‣See tala
    Tāḷa1

    1. , cp. Sanskrit tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck i.e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instrumental of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. Ja i.3 Ja vi.60 Thag 1, 893 DN-a i.85 Dhs-a 319 (kaṁsa˚)
    • (b) music in general Dhp-a iv.67
    1. ˚āvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician DN ii.159 (variant reading tāla˚) Ja i.60 (l); iv.41 Vv-a 257 (˚parivuta, of an angel)
    taḍ
    Tāḷa2
    neuter [
    1. a key (originally a “knocker"?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, visāṇa˚); Bdhd 1
    1. ˚cchiggala a key-hole SN iv.290 SN v.453 Vism 500 -cchidda identical Vin ii.120 148, 153 (all tāla˚); iii.118 Dhp-a iii.8 (l)
    Sanskrit tālaka = tāḍa Avs ii.56, tāḍaka Divy 577
    Tāḷī
    feminine a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiṁ karoti to strike one’s chest (as a sign of grief) Pv-a 39 etc ‣See ura.
    Tāḷeti
    1. to strike a blow, flog, beat, especially frequently in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments ‣See kasā) MN i.87 AN ii.122 Nd2 604 Pv-a 4 etc
    • ppr.
    • passive taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) Ja vi.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna).
    • past participle tāḷita Ja vi.60 (turiya˚) Vv 621 (identical); Sdhp 80. cp. abhi˚
    Sanskrit tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps = tud
    Tāva
    adverb
    1. so much, so long; usually correlated with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation Thus I. yāva-tāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuṁ tāva aññamaññaṁ ghātayiṁsu Ja i.254 yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraṁ vasitabbaṁ Snp 678 negative na tāva-yāva na not until MN i.428 SN v.261 AN i.141≈(na t. kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time (tāvakālikaṁ = yāvak˚tāvak˚ ‣See below)
    • comparative: (such-) as, like so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuṁ suvaṇṇaṁ so much gold Vin i.209 t
    • mahanto so much Ja i.207 t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit Ja ii.105 asītiyā tāva kimi-kulānaṁ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i.e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni Pv-a 44 paṭhamaṁ t. (even) at once, right away Pv-a 113 Pv-a 132; gilānāya t. ayaṁ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful Vv-a 76 parittakassa kusalakammassa t. = quidem Pv-a 51 paṁsukūlikangaṁ t. in the first place Vism. 62

  • concessive (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaṁ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṁ mudukaṁ “even if the father as man does not weep, surely,” & c., Pv-a 63

    • (b) with
    • imperative in expr like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (= gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i.e. if you like, cp. German geh'immer;
    • passive tāva just look = Latin licet. Therefore sometimes = please or simply an emphatic
    • imperative as “do go,” etc. Ja ii.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please) iii.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to-morrow, i.e. wait tillt-m.); iv.2 taṁ t. me detha give me this though) Vv-a 289 (vīmaṁsatha t. just think) Pv-a 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvâyaṁ puriso pānīyaṁ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water) 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv ii.322
    • hortative with 1st pers.
    • future equal to
    • imperative -subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp Latin age in dic age, etc.). Ja i.62 (puttaṁ t. passissāmi please let me ‣See the son), 263 (vīmaṁsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). III. In other combinations: tāva-na although-yet not even: ajjā pi t. me balaṁ na passasi not even to-day have you yet seen my full strength Ja i.207 t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuṁ piyaṁ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv ii.76. na-tāva (or tāva in negative sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (= Latin ne-quidem) Pv ii.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit) Pv-a 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataṁ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva-d-eva just now instantly, on the spot, at once Snp 30 Ja i.61 Ja i.151 iv.2; Pv ii.89 (= tadā eva Pv-a 109) Pv-a 23 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 74 88, etc. tāvade (= tāva-d-eva) for all times Pv iv.338 (= Pv-a 255)
    1. ˚kālika adjective “as long as the time lasts,” i.e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin ii.174 Vin iii.66 iv.286 Ja i.121 Ja i.393 Vism 95 Thag-a 288 Pv-a 87 (= na sassata)
    2. Sanskrit tāvat
  • Tāvataka
    adjective
    1. just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without a corresponding yāvataka Vin i.83 (yāvatake-t. as many as) DN ii.18 (yāvatakv’ assa kāyo tāvatakv’ assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instrumental as adverb tāvatakena after a little time Mil 107 Dhp-a iii.61

      • ‣ See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka)
      derived from tāva
    Tāvatā
    adverb
    1. so long (correct to yāva) Dīpavaṁsa iv.17
    2. on that account, thus DN i.104 (variant reading ettāvatā) Dhp 266
    from tāva
    Tāvatiṁsa
    1. No. 33, only in compounds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiṁsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with reference to the gods & is also found in Zend-Avesta ‣See Haug,; Language & Writings,; etc., past participle 275, 276. The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra ‣See for details; Dialogues of the Buddha ii.294–⁠298. Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the realm of the Thirty-three (DN ii.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirty-three with a song of triumph (DN ii.209 DN ii.211 DN ii.221 DN ii.227) The Thirty-three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (DN ii.213 DN ii.221) ‣See further Vin i.12 MN i.252 MN ii.78 MN iii.100 AN iii.287 AN iv.396 = Vv-a 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); v.59, 331, Vism 225, etc
    • ‣ See also tidasa
    1. ˚devaloka the god-world of the 33; frequently e.g. Ja i.202 Vism 399 Dhp-a iii.8
    • ˚bhavana the realm of the 33 gods Ja i.202 Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim
    tayo + tiṁsa. cp. Vedic trayastriṁśat
    Tāvata
    neuter
    1. literally “so-much-ness,” i.e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, 482
    abstract from tāva
    Tāsa
    1. terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety SN iii.57 Ja i.342 Ja iii.177 Ja iii.202 Mil 24 cp. san˚
    ‣See tasati2
    Tāsaniya
    adjective to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Mil 149
    Tāhaṁ
    1. contraction of 1. taṁ ahaṁ ‣See ta˚; 2. te ahaṁ ‣See tvaṁ
    Ti
    1. adverb

      1. the apostrophe form of iti, thus ‣See iti
      cp. Sanskrit iti
    Ti˚
    ;
    1. base of numeral three in compound; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical compounds. also three (3 times)
    1. ˚kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka-bhaṇḍa) Vv-a 186
    • ˚gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i.e. about 2 miles), Dhp-a i.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; ii.43, 61, 64, 69; iii.202, 269 Vv-a 227 B. on SN i.52 (sarīra)
    • ˚catu three or four Dhp-a i.173
    • ˚cīvara
    • neuter the 3 robes of a bhikkhu consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin i.289 296; ii.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin i.109 sq
    • Vism 60, 66 Dhp-a iv.23
    • ˚tālamattaṁ 3 palm-trees high Dhp-a ii.62
    • ˚daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water-pot on (kuṇḍikā) Ja i.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa-parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); ii.317 ‣See tedaṇḍika
    • part of a chariot AN iv.191 (variant reading daṇḍa only)
    • ˚diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiṁsa heaven) DN ii.167 DN ii.272 (tidivûpapanna) SN i.96 (˚ṁ ṭhānaṁ upeti), 181 (ākankha-māno ˚ṁ anuttaraṁ)
    • ˚ pada cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Latin tripes: tripod
    1. consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody of 3 padas Snp 457 (w. reference to metre Sāvittī)
    2. ˚(p)pala threefold Vism 339
    3. ˚pallattha “turning in 3 ways, i.e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toevoegselen: zeer listig Ja i.163 (of miga; Commentary ex plural as lying on 3 sides of its lair)
    4. ˚piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, 241 Dhp-a i.382
    5. ˚peṭaka = tepiṭaka Mil 90
    6. tipeṭakin at Vin v.3
    7. ˚maṇḍala
    8. neuter the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin ii.213
    9. ˚ṁ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaṁ nivāsento cp. Vinaya Texts i.155
    10. ˚yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i.e. 20 miles, or figuratively a long distance; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta) Dhp-a ii.41 (˚magga) Vv-a 75 (˚mattake vihāraṁ agamāsi) Pv-a 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā ˚mattake hoti); ˚satika 300 cubits long Ja ii.3
    11. ˚loka the 3 worlds (i.e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa-loka) Sdhp 29 Sdhp 276 Sdhp 491 (cp. tebhūmaka)
    12. ˚vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DN-a i.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti) -(v)aṅgika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161
    13. ˚vassika for the 3 seasons (-gandha-sālibhattaṁ bhuñjantā) Dhp-a ii.9 Ja i.66 (identical)
    14. ˚vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña DN i.128 DN i.134 DN i.143 of aggi (fire) Ja i.4 & Mil 97 Vism 147 (˚kalyāṇatā)
    15. ˚visākha a three-forked frown on the forehead SN i.118 MN i.109
    16. ˚sandhi consisting of 3 spaces Ja vi.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t

      • parivāritā) explained as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry and infantry, with a space between each two
      Vedic tris, Avestan priś, Latin ter (from ters → *tris, cp. testis → *tristo, trecenti → *tricenti), Icl. prisvar Old High German driror
    Tiṁsaṁ
    (tiṁsa˚)
    1. the number 30 DN i.81≈(tiṁsaṁ pi jātiyo) SN ii.217 (t
    • mattā bhikkhū); dative instrumental tiṁsāya. AN v.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Snp p. 87 (pi dadāmi) Pv-a 281 (vassasahassehi): t
    • yojana-maggaṁ (āgato) Dhp-a ii.76 79; iii.172 Pv-a 154 ˚yojanika kantāra Dhp-a ii.193 (cp. 192) Ja v.46 (magga) Dhp-a i.26 (vimāna) t
    • vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ (of Konāgamana Buddha) DN ii.3 t
    • mattāni vassāni Mil 15 t
    • vassasahassāni Pv-a 281 = Dhp-a ii.10 So of an immense crowd: tiṁsa bhikkhu-sahassāni DN ii.6 tiṁsa-mattā sūkarā Ja ii.417 ˚sahassa-bhikkhū Dhp-a i.24
    Vedic triṁśat, cp. Latin trīginta, Old Irish tricha
    Tika
    adjective-noun
    1. consisting of 3, a triad SN ii.218 (t
    • bhojana) Dhp-a iv.89 (-nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t
    • catukka-jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas) Mil 12 (tika-duka-paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq. Dhs-a 39 (-duka triad & pair)
    Vedic trika
    Tikicchaka
    1. a physician, a doctor. AN v.219 Ja i.4 (adjective & vejja); iv.361 Pv-a 233
    from tikicchati
    Tikicchati
    1. to treat medically, to cure Vin i.276 SN i.222 Mil 172 Mil 272 Mil 302 causative tikicchāpeti Ja i.4
    2. also cikicchati = Sanskrit cikitsati. Desidentical of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal
    Tikicchā
    feminine
    1. the art of healing, practice of medicine DN i.10 (dāraka˚ infant healing) Snp 927 (˚ṁ māmako na seveyya)
    • ‣ See also tekiccha
    from last
    Tikkaṁ
    1. at Ja v.291 in “yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva” is to be read as “yāva majjhantik’ âtikkamm’ âgami yeva.”
    Tikkha
    adjective
    1. sharp, clever, acute, quick (only figuratively of the mind), in tikkh-indriya (opposite mud-indriya Nd2 2353p = Ps i.121 = ii.195; & tikkha-paññatā AN i.45
    = tikhiṇa
    Tikkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), especially in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaṁ katvā “having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times” Vv-a 173 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times Ja ii.352 Dhp-a ii.4 t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times Pv-a 74 ‣See also Ja iv.267 Ja v.382 Ja vi.71 Dhp-a ii.5 42, 65, 338; iv.122 & passim
    Sanskrit trikṛtvaḥ
    Tikhiṇa
    adjective
    1. pointed, sharp pungent, acrid; figuratively “sharp,” clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) Ja v.264 Dhp-a ii.9 Dhp-a iv.13 Pv-a 152 Pv-a 221 (= tippa). (ati-tikhinatā Mil 278 ‣See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo
    Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diaeretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q.v. & tikkha. cp. also Sanskrit tikta past participle of; tij, tejate. From *steg in Latin instīgo Old High German stehhan, German stecken, English stick
    Tiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. dry, hard, rough Ja vi.212 (˚sela hard rock)
    past participle of tasati1
    Tiṭṭhati
    1. to stand, etc
    • I. Forms: present indicative tiṭṭhati (Sn 333, 434 Pv i.51);
    • imperative 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu ppr. tiṭṭhaṁ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Sn 918, 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Snp 942);
    • future ṭhassati (J i.172 217);
    • aorist aṭṭhāsi (J i.279, plural aṭṭhaṁsu Ja ii.129) aṭṭhā (cp. agā, originally imperfect) (Sn 429 Ja i.188); inf ṭhātuṁ (Pv-a 174);
    • absolutive ṭhatvā (Sn 887);
    • gerundive ṭhānīya (Pv-a 72).
    • past participle ṭhita, causative ṭhapeti. An apparent Med
    • passive ṭhīyati, as found in compound pati-ṭṭhīyati is to be explained as Med. of paṭi + sthyā ‣See thīna, and should be written paṭi-tthīyati ‣See under patiṭṭhīyati ‣See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti
    • II.; Meanings.
    1. -1. to stand stand up, to be standing ‣See ṭhāna i.1a: ṭhānakappana-vacanaṁ nisajjādi-paṭikkhepato Pv-a 24 opp to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaṁ caraṁ nisinno vā Snp 151 Snp 193 tiṭṭhamānāya eva c’ assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaṁ ahosi “she was delivered standing” Ja i.52 ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi Pv-a 68 etc.; cankamana-koṭiyaṁ ṭhatvā Pv-a 79
    • to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure be at rest; figuratively to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in ‣See ṭhāna i.1b. In
    • imperative tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naṁ dakkhinti deva-manussā (as long as the body shall last) DN i.46 tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Snp 1053 Snp 1072 = Nd2 283 tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaṁ DN ii.103 tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiṁ “remaining inside the castle” Pv i.101 tiṭṭha tāva “stop please” Ja ii.352 tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combined w ehi-bh˚) DN i.166 MN i.342 AN i.295 AN ii.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) Ja i.153 Ja vi.367 similarly Ja vi.336-
    • imperative tiṭṭhatu Ja iv.40 Mil 14 Pv-a 74

  • to live (on = instrumental), behave, exist, be ‣See ṭhāna i.2; to be in a certain condition gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)
    1. . Often periphrastically for finite verb (with absolutive : cp. gata ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaṁ jānāti (he knows their “gati” Snp 1114 ‣See Nd2 283; āhārena tiṭṭhati Pv-a 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaṁ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) Pv-a 66 karuṇa-ṭhānīya (= *kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity Pv-a 72 yā tvaṁ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441 etc

      • with
      • absolutive : pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) Ja vi.367 aṭṭhiṁ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) Ja iv.415 gehaṁ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṁsu (encircled the house) Pv-a 22
      frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Latin sto ‣See ṭhāna) = Avestan hiśtaiti, Latin sisto
  • Tiṇa
    neuter
    1. grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch hay, litter SN iii.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa) satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) DN i.87, 111, etc.; sītaṁ vā uṇhaṁ vā rajo vā tiṇaṁ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) DN ii.19 AN i.145 t. + paṇṇa (grass & leaves; 1) AN i.183 Vv-a 5
    • J i.108 (dabba˚), 295; iii.53 Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha˚) DN-a i.77 (alla˚ fresh grass) Pv-a 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112 Dhp-a iv.121 Mil 47 (thatch) 224 (identical)
    1. ˚aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208 = iii.249
    2. ˚āgāra a thatched cottage AN i.101 (+ naḷāgāra)
    3. ˚ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay SN ii.152 SN iii.185 Ja i.212 296; Vism 428 Dhp-a i.126 Thag-a 287 Bdhd 107 -karala a wisp of grass Dhp-a iii.38
    • ˚kājaka a load of g Dhp-a iv.121
    • ˚gahana a thicket of g., a jungle AN i.153
    • ˚cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin i.203 Vv-a 100 (-rajânukiṇṇa)
    • ˚jāti grass-creeper Vv-a 162
    • ˚dāya a grass-jungle SN ii.152
    • ˚dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dhp 356 Pv-a 7
    • ˚pupphaka (-roga sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay-fever Mil 216
    • ˚purisaka a straw-man, a scarecrow Mil 352 Vism 462 Dhs-a 111
    • ˚bhakkha eating grass; of animals MN iii.167 of ascetics DN i.166 Pug 55 AN i.241 295
    • ˚bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass Vv-a 47
    • ˚rukkha a shrub
    • ˚vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled ‣See Vin Texts, iii.30–⁠34. This is the “covering over as if with grass” Vin ii.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā) DN iii.254 AN i.99 MN ii.250
    • ˚santhāraka a mat of grass Vin i.286 Vin ii.113 116 Ja i.360
    Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, originally “point” (= blade); Gothic paúrnus, Anglo-Saxon porn = English thorn, German dorn
    Tiṇava
    1. a sort of drum AN ii.117
    Tiṇḍuka
    1. ‣See tinduka
    Tiṇṇa
    one who has reached the other shore (always figuratively) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha˚ gone through the great flood SN i.3 SN i.142 Snp 178 Snp 823 Snp 1082 Snp 1101 Snp 1145 DN iii.54 Snp 21 (+ pāragata), 359 (+ parinibbuta), 515 545 (tiṇṇo tāres’ imaṁ pajaṁ) Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataṁ varo) Dhp 195 (-sokapariddava) Nd2 282.
    1. ˚kathaṅkatha adjective having overcome doubt, free from doubt Snp 17 Snp 86 Snp 367
    2. ˚vicikiccha = preceding Vin i.16 DN i.110 DN ii.224 DN ii.229 Pug 68 DN-a i.211
    3. past participle of tarati
    Tiṇha
    1. sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) DN i.56 (sattha) SN iv.160 SN iv.167 (kuṭhārī) AN iv.171 Snp 667 (˚dhāra), 673 (asipattavana) Ja i.253 Sdhp 381
    ‣See tikhiṇa
    Titikkhati
    1. [ Sanskrit titikṣate, Desidentical of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa to bear, endure, stand SN i.221 Snp 623 Dhp 321 = Nd2 475 B7 Dhp 399 (titikkhissaṁ = sahissāmi Dhp-a iv.3) Ja v.81 Ja v.368
    Titikkhā
    feminine
    1. endurance, forgiveness, longsuffering SN i.7 SN v.4 Dhp 184 Nd2 203
    ‣See last
    Titta
    1. satisfied (with = instrumental) enjoying (c. genitive), happy, contented AN i.87 = Pug 26 (+ tappetar) Mil 249 Vv-a 86 (= pīṇita) Pv-a 46 (dibbâhārassa) 59 (= suhita), 109 (= pīṇita)
    • atitta dissatisfied, insatiate Ja i.440 Ja iii.275 Dhp 48 (kāmesu)
    past participle of tappati2
    Tittaka
    adjective
    1. sharp, bitter (of taste) MN i.80 (˚alābu), 315 (identical) Pv-a 47 (identical; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629 = Nd2 540 (tittika; enumerated between lavaṇa & kaṭuka) Dhs-a 320
    cp. Sanskrit tiktaka from tij
    Tittakatta
    neuter
    1. bitterness, enumerated with lavaṇattaṁ & kaṭukattaṁ at Mil 56 = 63 (cp. Nd; 2 540)
    abstract to tittaka
    Titti
    feminine
    1. satisfaction (in = locative ) Dhp 186 = Thag-a 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n atthi t. kāmānaṁ Thag 2, 487 Ja v.486 (dhammesu) Vv-a 11 Pv-a 32 (˚ṁ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati) 127
    2. from tappati2
    Tittika
    1. in sama˚; at DN i.244 Vin i.230 brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful ‣See the note at; Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9
    Tittimant
    adjective
    1. satisfied, contented, so read at Ja iii.70 & vi.508 for kittimant
    titti + mant
    Tittira
    1. partridge Ja i.218 Ja iii.538
    • ˚pattikā a kind of boot Vin i.186
    Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Latin tetrinnio to cackle
    Tittiriya
    adjective
    1. belonging to a partridge, like a partridge Ja i.219 (brahmacariya)
    from tittira
    Tittha
    neuter
    1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place DN ii.89 = Vin i.230 (Gotama˚ the G. ford) Ja i.339 Ja i.340 (titthāraṇa); ii.111; iii.228 (˚nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā˚ a ferry); iv.379; Pv ii.120; iii.64iv.122 (su˚); Dāvs.v.59 (harbour). Titthaṁ jānāti to know a “fording place,” i.e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt MN i.223 = AN v.349 (negative 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).

      1. ˚āyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya Vin i.60 69; ii.279 MN i.483 AN i.173 Pug 22 Dhs 381 1003 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 101n) DN-a i.118 Ledi Sadaw in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1913, 117–⁠118
      2. ˚kara a “ford-maker, founder of a sect DN i.47 DN i.116 MN i.198 Snp past participle 90, 92 Mil 4 Mil 6 etc
      3. ˚ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig sense of titthaṁ jānāti ‣See above Nett 29, 80
      4. Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to passive through, originally passage (through a river), ford
    Titthika
    adjective Possible reading in Burmese manuscripts for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant
    Titthiya
    1. [from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; Avs i.48; ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña˚), an heretic Vin i.54 84, 136, 159 (˚samādāna), 306 (˚dhaja), 320 SN i.65 SN iv.37 SN iv.394 DN iii.44 DN iii.46 Snp 381 Snp 891 Nd2 38; Ps i.160 Pug 49 Vb 247 añña˚ e.g. Vin i.101 DN i.175f.; iii.130 sq. Ja ii.415 Ja ii.417
    • ˚sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172 Ja i.95 Vism 17.

    Tithi
    1. a lunar day Dhp-a i.174 Pv-a 198
    Sanskrit tithi
    Tidasa
    numeral
    1. thirty (cp. tiṁsa), especially the thirty deities (plural ) or belonging to them
    2. adjective. It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiṁsa. Nandanaṁ rammaṁ tidasānaṁ mahāvanaṁ Pv iii.119 = Vv 1813 devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301 Sdhp 420.

      1. ˚ādhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478-inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411 Sdhp 478
      2. ˚gaṇa the company of the 30 Snp 679 (Commentary tettiṁsa) Vv 416
      • ˚gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (= tidasabhavanaṁ gata Tāvatiṁsadevanikāyaṁ uppanna Vv-a 164) -pura the city of the 30, i.e. Heaven Mil 291
      • ˚bhavana the state of the 30, i.e. heavenly existence Vv-a 164 (= Tāvatiṁsabhavana)
      Vedic tridaśa
    Tidhā
    adverb
    1. in three ways or parts, threefold Mil 282 (-pabhinna nāgarājā)
    ti + dhā
    Tinta
    adjective
    1. wet, moist Mil 286 Dhp-a ii.40 (˚mukha)
    = timita from temeti
    Tintaka
    1. at Pv-a 47 (˚alābu) is to be read as tittaka˚;
    Tintiṇa
    neuter greed, desire;
    • adjective greedy. epithet of a pāpabhikkhu. AN v.149 (Commentary tintiṇaṁ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā) Vb 351 (tintiṇaṁ tintiṇāyanā, etc. = loluppaṁ). Tintinati & Tintinayati;

    Tintiṇāti
    Tintiṇāyati;
    1. to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint Ja i.243 (tintiṇanto corresponding with mucchita); vi.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, variant reading tiṇāy˚)
    either = Sanskrit timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sanskrit *tistimāyati → *stistim˚ after tiṣṭhati → *stiṣṭhati; = Pali titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in compound nitammati (q.v. = Sanskrit nitāmyati) at Ja iv.284 explained by atikilamati
    Tinduka
    1. the tree Diospyros embryopteris DN i.178 (variant reading tiṇḍ˚ Ja v.99
    • tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage Ja iv.434 Ja vi.532

      • tindukakandarā N
      • plural the Text cave Vin ii.76
      • ‣ See also timbaru & timbarūsaka
      Sanskrit tinduka
    Tipu
    1. lead, tin Vin i.190 (˚maya) SN v.92 Ja ii.296 Mil 331 (˚kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (˚maṇḍala) Dhp-a iv.104 (˚parikhā)
    cp. Sanskrit trapu, non-Aryan?
    Tipusa
    neuter
    1. a species of cucumber Ja v.37 Vv-a 147
    Sanskrit trapusa
    Tippa
    adjective
    1. piercing, sharp acute, fierce; always & only with reference to pains, esp pains suffered in Niraya. In full comb; ns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā MN i.10 AN ii.116 AN ii.143 AN ii.153 ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā vedic MN i.74 bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv iv.19 (= tikhiṇadukkha˚ Pv-a 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved˚ vediyamānā Mil 148
    a variant of tibba = Sanskrit tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Buddhaghosa connected w tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana-vasena vā tippā Commentary to Anguttara ‣See M i.526
    Tibba
    adjective probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim; (of tamas) or = stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen eager: tibbagārava very devout AN ii.21 Nett 112 (cp tīvraprasāda Avs i.130); t
    • cchanda DN iii.252 DN iii.283 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t
    • rāga Dhp 349 (= bahalarāga Dhp-a iv.68) AN ii.149 tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaṁ SN iii.109 tibbasārāga (kāmesu SN iii.93 = It 90 AN ii.30 tibbo manussaloko (dark dense) Mil 7 ˚andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq. ˚kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87
    Timi
    1. a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combination with timiṅgala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala ‣See next
    Derivation unknown. Sanskrit timi
    Timiṅgala
    1. in combination with timi, timitimiṅgala. Sanskrit has timingila & timingilagila reduplicated in 2nd syllable where Pali has reduplicated in 1st; fisheater reduplicated as intens. = greedy or monstrous fisheater a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin ii.238 = AN iv.200 = Nd2 2353q; Ps ii.196 Mil 377 At Ud 54f. & Mil 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty AN Sanskrit ized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502 ‣See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sanskrit cilicima a sort of fish
    timi + gila, gl ‣See note on gala
    Timira
    adjective
    1. dark; neuter darkness Vv 323 (t

      • tamba) Ja iii.189 (t
      • rukkha); vanatimira a flower Ja iv.285 v.182
      Sanskrit timira from tim = tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from; tim in temeti to (be or) make wet ‣See tama
    Timiratipiṅgala
    neuter a great ocean fish, Dhs-a 13 v. timingala.
    Timirāyittata
    neuter
    1. gloom, darkness SN iii.124 (= Māra)
    abstract to timirāyita, past participle of timirayati to obscure, denominative to timira
    Timisa
    neuter
    1. darkness Ja iii.433 (andhakāra-timissāya) Pug 30 (andh˚-timisāya) Mil 283
    Vedic tamisrā = tamas
    Timīsikā
    feminine
    1. darkness, a very dark night Vv 96 Ja iv.98
    timisa + ka
    Timbaru
    1. a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Diospyros) Ja vi.336
    • ˚tthanī
    • feminine “with breasts like the t fruit” Snp 110 Ja vi.457 (Snp-a 172: taruṇadārikā) Vv-a 137 (t

      • nādasadisa)
    Timbarukkha
    1. = timbarūsaka Ja vi.529
    Timbarūsaka
    1. = timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin iii.59 Vv 3327 (= tindukaphala Vv-a 147 tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti) Dhp-a iii.315
    Tiraccha
    adverb
    1. across, obliquely; in ˚bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DN-a i.89 ‣See under tiracchāna-kathā
    Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Gothic pairh, Old High German durh, English through; cp. tiriyaṁ
    Tiracchāna
    an animal Iti 92 (tiracchānaṁ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna-yoniyo) Vb 339 (˚gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts) Vv-a 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal-man, wild man, “werwolf”).
    1. ˚kathā “animal talk”; wrong or childish talk in general Vin i.188 DN i.7 DN i.178 DN iii.54 Vism 127; explained at DN-a i.89 by anīyānikattā sagga-mokkha-maggānaṁ tiraccha-bhūtā kathā
    2. ˚gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7 SN iii.152 = DN-a i.23 (t. pāṇā) MN iii.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd2 on Snp 72 (t
    • pāṇā) Ja i.459 (= vanagocara) Vb 412f.
    • ˚yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati a state of misery DN i.228 DN iii.234 SN i.34 SN iii.225f. iv.168, 307 AN i.60 AN ii.127 AN ii.129 Pv iv.111; Vism 103 427 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 166
    • ˚yonika (& yoniya; AN i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals SN v.356
    • ˚vijjā a low art, a pseudo-science Vin ii.139 DN i.9f.
    for ˚gata = Sanskrit tiraścīna (˚gata) = tiraśca; “going horizontally,” i.e. not erect. cp. tiraccha tiriyaṁ, tiro
    Tiriyaṁ
    adverb
    1. transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp to uddhaṁ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting across. In comb; nuddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi “in all directions whatever” DN i.251 = AN ii.129 similarly uddhaṁ adho t. vâpi majjhe Snp 1055 with uddhaṁ adho DN i.23, 153; Vism 176 (where explained)
    • AN ii.48 Snp 150 Snp 537 Ja i.96 Iti 120 Dhp-a i.40 (dvāra-majjhe t across the doorway), 47 (sideways) DN-a i.312 Kp-a 248
    1. ˚taraṇa ferrying across, adjective ˚ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin iv.65
    Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras ‣See tiro & cp. perhaps German quer = English thwart, all to; *ter in tarati
    Tiriyā
    feminine a kind of grass or creeper AN iii.240 AN iii.242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Commentary dabbatiṇa).
    Tirivaccha
    1. a certain tree Ja v.46
    Tirīṭa
    neuter the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin i.306 (˚ka) DN i.166 = AN i.295 MN i.343 Pug 51
    Tiro
    1. (preposition & adverb ) (always ˚-)

      1. across, beyond, over, outside afar ‣See also tiraccha & tiriyaṁ
      1. ˚karaṇī feminine a curtain, a veil (literally “drawing across” Vin i.276 Vin ii.152
      2. ˚kucchigata having left the womb DN ii.13
      3. ˚kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265 (˚kuḍḍe uccāraṁ chaḍḍeti) DN i.78 AN iii.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaṁ t. kuḍḍaṁ t. pākāraṁ t

        • pabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement) Pv i.51 (˚kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa-Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, 394 Dhp-a i.104 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 31
        • ˚gāma a distant village Vin iii.135
        • ˚chada “outside the veil,” conspicuous Ja vi.60
        • ˚janapada a distant or foreign country DN i.116
        • ˚pākāra beyond or over a fence (˚pākāraṁ or ˚pākāre) Vin iv.266 ‣See also ˚kuḍḍa
        • ˚bhāva (ṁ) beyond existence, out of existence magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (= a-pākaṭa-pāṭihāriya) ‣See also under ˚kuḍḍa
        • ˚raṭṭha a foreign kingdom DN i.161 (= pararaṭṭha DN-a i.286)
        Vedic tiras across, crossways, from; *ter of tarati = to go through; cp. Av tarō, Latin trans, Welsh. tra
    Tirokkha
    1. 1. adjective one who is outside, or absent Vin iii.185
    2. (
    3. adverb )
      1. in tirokkha-vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard Ja v.78
      = tiras + ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain abuse
    Tila
    masculine neuter
    1. the sesame plant & its ‣Seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared ‣See tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often comb; d with taṇḍula e.g. AN i.130 = Pug 32 Ja i.67 Ja iii.53
    • Vin i.212 (navātilā) AN iv.108 Snp p. 126 Ja i.392 Ja ii.352 Vism 489 (ucchu˚) Dhp-a i.79 Pv-a 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṁ karoti)
    1. ˚odana rice with sesame Ja iii.425
    • ˚kakka sesame paste Vin i.205
    • ˚tela ses. oil Vv-a 54 (˚ṁ pātukāma) Dhp-a iii.29 Bdhd 105
    • ˚piññāka tila ‣Seed-cake, oilcake Vv-a 142
    • ˚piṭṭha sesamum-grinding, crushed SN ‣Seed Vin iv.341
    • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of ses. Ja ii.278
    • ˚rāsi a heap of t ‣Seeds Vv-a 54
    • ˚vāha a cartload of t ‣Seeds. AN v.173 = Sn p. 126
    • ˚saṅgulikā a ses. cake Dhp-a ii.75
    Vedic tila masculine
    Tilaka
    1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle MN i.88 SN i.170 Vv-a 253 Dhp-a iv.172 (˚ṁ vā kālakaṁ vā adisvā)
    2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (= bandhu-jīvaka-puppha-sadisa-pupphā ekā rukkha-jāti)
    tila + ka, from its resemblance to a sesame ‣Seed
    Tilañchaka
    1. at J. iv.364 accusative to Kern (Toevoegselen ii.91) to be read as nilañchaka.

    Tisata
    numeral
    1. three hundred Ja vi.427 (˚mattā nāvā) ‣See also under tayo
    ti + sata
    Tīra
    neuter [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; originally the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha a shore, bank Vin i.1 DN i.222 DN i.244 AN ii.29 AN ii.50 Dhp 85 Snp 672 Ja i.212 Ja i.222 Ja i.279 Ja ii.111 Ja ii.159 Dhs 597 Vb 71f.; Vism 512 (orima˚) Pv-a 142 Pv-a 152
    • tīra-dassin finding the shore SN iii.164 AN iii.368
    • a-tīra-dassanī
    • feminine not ‣Seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) Ja v.75
    Tīraṇa
    1. measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd2 413 (variant reading tir˚); Nett 54 (+ vipassanā), 82 (≈ñāṇa), 191; Vism 162
    • tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariññās, viz. t˚, pahāna˚, ñāta-pariññā ‣See under pariññā
    from tīreti.2
    Tīriya
    adjective
    1. dwelling on the banks of … Vin ii.287
    from tīra
    Tīreti
    1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaṁ Mil 7 Pv-a 203 kiccaṁ Pv-a 278
    2. to measure, judge recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd2 tul˚ tir˚, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp tīrita (Nd2 tirita) Ps ii.200; Nd2 under ñāta & No. 413
    causative of tarati
    Tīvarā
    1. (plural ) name of a people in the time of Buddha Kakusandha SN ii.191

    Tīhaṁ
    adverb
    1. a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as compound dvīhatīhaṁ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha Ja ii.103 etc
    tri + aha
    Tu
    indeclinable
    1. however, but, yet, now, then (similar in ap plural to tāva); kin tu but (= quid nunc). Frequent in late verse ante tu, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1913 53; Bd’s Manote 1152 & c. Usually comb; d with eva: tv eva however Snp p. 141; na tv eva not however, but not. AN v.173
    2. Vedic tu, belonging to pronoun base of 2nd singular tvaṁ = Latin tu; Gothic pu, etc., cp. tuvaṁ
    Tuṅga
    adjective [ Sanskrit tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Latin tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill high, prominent, long Ja i.89 Ja iii.433 (pabbata, explained however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. iv.30.
    1. -nāsika one with a prominent or long nose SN ii.284 cp. saṇha-tunga-sadisī nāsikā Thag 2, 258
    2. ˚vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; name of a plant Ja vi.537
    Tuccha
    adjective
    1. empty, vain, deserted very often combined with ritta DN i.55 DN iii.53 (˚kumbhi) MN i.207 Ja i.209 (˚hattha, empty-handed); vi.365 Snp 883 Pug 45 46 Mil 5 (+ palāpa), 10 (identical), 13 Dhp-a ii.43 Pv-a 202 Sdhp 431
    Sanskrit tuccha, probably rel. to Latin tesqua deserted place ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Tucchaka
    1. = tuccha; always combined with rittaka DN i.240 SN iii.141 MN i.329
    Tujjati
    passive of tudati.
    Tuṭṭha
    1. pleased, satisfied; often combined with haṭṭha (q.v.) i.e. tuṭṭha-haṭṭha Ja i.19 or haṭṭha-tuṭṭha Ja ii.240 cp. tuṭṭha-pahaṭṭha Ja ii.240
    • Sn 683 Iti 103 Ja i.62 (˚mānasa), 87, 266 (˚citta), 308 (identical); iv.138
    • tuṭṭhabba (
    • gerundive ) to be pleased with Vin iv.259
    past participle of tussati to be satisfied
    Tuṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. pleasure, joy, enjoyment SN i.48 Dhp 331 (nominative tuṭṭhī) Ja i.60 Ja i.207
    2. from tussati
    Tuṇḍa
    neuter
    1. the beak of birds, the mouth, snout SN v.148 (of a monkey) Ja i.222 Ja iv.210 Dhp-a i.394
    Sanskrit tuṇḍa, probably dialectical for tunda which belongs to tudati
    Tuṇḍaka
    neuter = tuṇḍa Ja i.222 Ja iii.126
    Tuṇḍika
    1. ‣See ahi˚;
    Tuṇḍiya
    adjective
    1. having a beak; noun a pecker, figuratively a tax-collector Ja v.102 (= adhamma-bali-sādhaka 103)
    2. from tuṇḍi
    Tuṇhikkhaka
    adjective
    1. silent Ja iv.25 (= kiñci avadanto)
    from tūṣṇīṁ ‣See next
    Tuṇhī
    indeclinable
    1. silently, especially in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i.e. he had nothing to say against it) DN ii.155 AN v.194 Dhp 227 Snp 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi) Pv-a 117
    1. ˚bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form adhivāsesi tuṇhī-bhāvena he agreed Vin i.17 Snp p 104, etc
    • SN ii.236 SN ii.273 (ariyo t
    • bhāvo) MN i.161 (identical) AN iv.153 (identical)
    • Mil 15 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 20, etc
    • ˚bhūta silent Snp p. 140; Vv.20; Dhp-a 172, etc
    Sanskrit tūṣṇīṁ accusative singular of
  • feminine abstract tūṣṇī, used
  • adverb ially, from tussati
  • Tuṇhīyati
    1. = taṇhāyati, misspelling at SN ii.13
    Tuṇhīra
    1. inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver Ja v.128 also as variant reading at Ja v.48
    Tutta
    neuter
    1. a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) DN ii.266 (˚tomara) Ja iv.310 v.268; cp. iii.5, 2 (t
    • vegahata)
    Sanskrit tottra, from tudati to prick, push
    Tudati
    1. to strike with an instrument; to prick peck, pierce; to incite, instigate Ja iii.189 (= vijjhati) passive tujjati to be struck Thag 1, 780 Vism 503 (cp vitujjati); Sdhp 279
    2. past participle tunna ‣See also tuṇḍa (beak = pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance = striker & thūpa (point)
    3. Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged from *steu, cp. Latin tundo, tudes (hammer); Gothic stautan, Old High German stozan (to push), English stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Anglo-Saxon styntan = English stunt
    Tudampatī
    (dual) husband & wife
    1. ‣See under dampati
    tu˚ = dialectical for du˚, Sanskrit dve; dampati from dama = domus, Sanskrit daṁpati = Gr ; cp. also Kern, Toevoegselen ii.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva
    Tunna1
    1. struck Thag 2, 162 (vyādhimaraṇa˚ str. with sickness and death)
    past participle of tudati
    Tunna2
    1. any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin i.290 (+ aggaḷa means of fastening) Ja i.8 (identical)

    -kamma “needle-work,” tailoring, patching, sewing Ja iv.40 Ja vi.366 Vism 112

  • ˚kāra (& ˚ka) a (mending tailor Ja iv.38 (variant reading ˚ka) Vv-a 251 (˚ka) Pv-a 120) -vāya Sanskrit tunnavāya
    1. a “needle-weaver,” a tailor Vin ii.159 Ja vi.364 Ja vi.368 (˚vesaṁ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor) Pv-a 161 (identical); Pv ii.914 (= tunnakāra Pv-a 120) Mil 331 Mil 365
    from tudati
  • Tuma
    1. (pron adjective)
      1. oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (= quisque) yaṁ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin ii.186 = AN iii.124 Snp 890 (cp. ātumānaṁ v.888), 908; Pv iii.24 (= attānaṁ Pv-a 181)
      most likely apostrophe form of ātuma = attā, Sanskrit ātman self; cp. also Sanskrit tman oneself ‣See Oldenberg, KZ. xxv.319. Less likely = Sanskrit tva one or the other (Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.). explained by Commentary to AN iii.124 as esa.
    Tumula
    1. tumult, uproar, commotion Ja vi.247 (by Commentary explained as “andhakāra,” darkness); Dīpavaṁsa xvii.100
    Sanskrit tumala; to *teu, Latin tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. English thumb (swelling), cp. tunga tūla
    Tumba
    masculine neuter
    1. a kind of water vessel (udaka DN-a i.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, English skull) Vin i.205 (loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, phala˚); ii.114 (˚kaṭāha of gourd) Ja iii.430 (udaka˚); iv.114 Dhp-a ii.193 (udaka˚)
    2. a measure of capacity, especially used for grain Ja i.233 (mahā˚), 467 (= 4 nāḷi p. 468) Mil 102
    possibly = Sanskrit tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula
    Tumhādisa
    1. (pron adjective)
      1. like you, of your kind Snp 459 Ja vi.528 DN-a i.146
      tumhe + ādisa
    Tumhe
    plural of pronote 2nd pers ‣See tuvaṁ
    Tura
    adjective
    1. swift, quick; only in composition with ˚ga, etc., “going swiftly,” denoting the horse; viz. turaga Vv-a 279
    • turaṅga Vv-a 281 Mil 192 (gaja˚, etc.), 352 (identical) 364; turaṅgama Dāvs v.56; turagamana Pv-a 57
    Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa
    Turati
    1. to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten Ja vi.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.). past participle turita. cp. also tura, etc
    2. = tarati2
    Turita
    1. hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Snp 1014 Ja i.69 (turita-turita) Vv 808 (= sambhamanto Vv-a 311) DN-a i.319 Pv-a 181-aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow Ja i.87
    • ‣ See also tuvaṭaṁ
    past participle of turati
    Turiya
    neuter
    1. sometimes tūriya (e.g. Vv 54) musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcangika t. e.g. Vv 54 391 Vv-a 181 183, 210, 257), viz ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira (Vv-a 37) frequently in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) “surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music” Vin i.15 DN ii.21 AN i.145 Ja i.58
    • Vv 384 412; 5024, 645; Pv iii.81 Dhp-a iii.460 Vv-a 92 Pv-a 74
    1. ˚sadda the sound of music, music Mhvs vii.30
    Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sanskrit tūrya
    Turī
    1. a hen Thag 2, 381 (= migī Thag-a 254) (variant reading korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen)
    Tula
    adjective
    1. only in negative atula incomparable, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 (= anupama Vv-a 126); Pv ii.89 (= appamāṇa Pv-a 110); iii.32 (= asadisarūpa Pv-a 188) Mil 343
    ‣See tuleti
    Tulanā
    feminine
    1. weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation MN i.480 MN ii.174 Nett 8, 41
    ‣See tuleti
    Tulasi
    1. basil (common or sweet) Ja v.46 (˚gahana a thicket of b.; variant reading tūlasi); vi.536 (tuḷasi = tuḷasigaccha)
    Derivation unknown
    Tulā
    feminine
    1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin ii.122 Vv-a 188 (+ gopānasī) Dhs-a 107
    2. a weighing pole or stick, scales balance AN i.88 Ja i.112 Dhp 268 Mil 356 (t. nikkhepanāya)
    3. figuratively measure (“weighing,” cp. tulanā) standard, rate SN ii.236 (+ pamāṇa).

      1. ˚kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combined with kaṁsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring DN i.5 = AN ii.209DN-a i.79 Dhp-a i.239
      • ˚daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance Ja i.113
      • ˚puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) Ja v.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka)
      ‣See tuleti. Vedic tulā; Latin tollo (lift); Gothic pulan (to carry patiently, suffer) German geduld, etc.
    Tulita
    1. weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Thag 2, 153 (yattakaṁ esā t. what she is worth = lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna Thag-a 139); Nd2 under ñāta (as synonym of tirita) Pv-a 52 (in explanation of mita measured)
    past participle of tuleti
    Tuliya
    1. a flying fox Ja vi.537
    Sanskrit ?
    Tuleti
    1. to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal MN i.480 Thag 1, 107 Ja vi.283- absolutive tulayitvā MN i.480
    2. gerundive tuliya & tulya ‣See sep..
    3. past participle ; tulita
    4. from tulā; Latin tollo, etc.
    Tulya
    Tuliya;
    1. (also tulla Ja iv.102) adjective

      1. to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched equal, comparable Snp 377 Ja iii.324 Pv-a 87 (= samaka) Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Snp 83 Snp 683 Ja iv.102 (atulla) Mil 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (identical)-‣ See also tula. Tuvam & Tvam
      originally
    2. gerundive of tuleti
    Tuvaṁ
    Tvaṁ
    1. Snp 983 Snp 1030 Ja i.279 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 73, etc
    • (b) ta˚, tay˚, taṁ (
    • accusative MN i.487 Snp 31 Snp 241 Snp 1043 Snp 1049 Ja i.222 Ja ii.159 Pv i.101 ii.16; tayā instrumental Snp 335 Snp 344 Ja i.222 Pv ii.36 (= bhotiyā Pv-a 86): Pv-a 71
    • tayi (
    • locative ) Snp 382 Ja i.207
    • tava genitive Snp 1102 Snp 1110 Ja ii.153 Pv-a 106–⁠2.
    • plural : tumh˚; Sanskrit yuṣm˚
    1. : tumhe (nominative &
    2. accusative Iti 31 Ja i.221 (
    3. accusative ) Pv i.112 Also as
    4. plural majesticus in addressing one person Ja ii.102 Ja iv.138
    5. tumhaṁ genitive Pv-a 58 (for singular), 78; tumhākaṁ (genitive dative SN ii.65 Iti 32 Ja i.150 Ja ii.102
    6. tumhesu (
    7. locative ) Ja i.292 (for singular); tumhehi instrumental Ja ii.154 Pv i.512
    8. II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative “in your interest,” therefore also as possessive genitive or as instrumental or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. singular te DN ii.127 dative Snp 76 Snp 120 Snp 1099 dative, 1102 dative Ja i.151 Ja ii.159 instrumental Pv i.23 dative; ii.32 genitive, 46 genitive
    9. pl vo SN iii.33 instrumental Snp 135 Snp 172 dative, 331 dative Ja i.222 (
    10. accusative ); ii.133; iii.395 genitive
    Sanskrit tvaṁ & (Vedic) tuaṁ, cp. also participle tu; Latin tu; Gothic pu; English thou, etc.; Old Irish tū pronoun of 2nd pers. in following forms & applications:; 1. Full forms: 1. singular: (a) tv˚, tu˚, tuyh˚; : nominative tvaṁ (in prose & verse) Snp 179 Snp 241 Snp 1029 Snp 1058 Ja i.279 ii.159 Pv i.84 Also for nominative
  • plural at Ja i.391 Ja i.395 vi.576; tuvaṁ (in verse) Snp 1064 Snp 1102 Snp 1121 Ja iii.278 394 Pv i.33 ii.32; also for
  • accusative Snp 377 Pv ii.81tuyhaṁ genitive & dative [ Sanskrit tubhyaṁ
  • Tuvaṭaṁ
    adverb
    1. quickly. AN v.342 Ja i.91 Ja ii.61 Ja vi.519 (as tvātaṁ Mil 198 Vism 305 313
    Sanskrit tvaritaṁ, cp. tūrta
    Tuvaṭṭeti
    1. (for * Sanskrit dvandvayati, denominative from dvandva] to share (with = locative or ablative) Vin ii.10 124; iv.288.

    Tuvantuva
    neuter
    1. quarrel, strife MN i.110 MN i.410
    Sanskrit dvandva, with dialectechnical term (cp. tudampati), not (with Müller, Pali Grammar 38) through confusion with pronoun tvaṁ
    Tussati
    1. to be satisfied, pleased or happy Ja iii.280 Ja iv.138 Mil 210 cp. tuṭṭha (past participle ), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana toseti
    2. Sanskrit tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy
    Tussana
    neuter
    1. satisfying, pleasing, in ˚kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight Ja iii.448
    Sanskrit toṣaṇa
    Tūṇira
    1. = tūṇī, Vism 251
    Tūṇī
    feminine
    1. a quiver (literally “carrier”) Ja ii.403 (dhanuṁ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); v.47
    Sanskrit *tūṇa & tūṇī, to; *tI̊n ‣See under tulā; cp. Latin tollo. On ṇ → l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa → guḷa, kiṇi → kili, etc.
    Tūla
    neuter
    1. a tuft of grass, cotton Vin ii.150 (3 kinds: rukkha˚, latā˚ poṭaki˚) Snp 591 = J iv.127 (vāto tūlaṁ va dhaṁsaye) DN-a i.87
    1. ˚picu cotton-wool Vism 282, 285, 404 Dhp-a iii.202 Kp-a 173
    2. ˚puṇṇikā (“stuffed with tuft of cotton” a kind of shoe Vin i.186
    Sanskrit tūla, to *teu, Sanskrit tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Anglo-Saxon pol peg
    Tūlikā
    feminine
    1. a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaṁ tūlānaṁ aññatara-puṇṇa-tūlikā DN-a i.87) Vin i.192 Vin ii.150 DN i.7 AN i.181
    derived from tūla
    Tūlinī
    feminine
    1. the silk-cotton tree MN i.128
    Sanskrit tūlinī
    Te˚
    ;
    1. secondary base of numeral three (from ti) in compound: having a relation to a triad of, three-; in numerical compounds. also = three ‣See under tayo
    1. ˚kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila taṇḍula, mugga Vin i.210 Vin iii.66
    • ˚cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin i.253 Ud 42 Pug 69 Vism 60
    • ˚daṇḍika carrying the tripod ‣See tidaṇḍa epithet of a brahmin ascetic AN iii.276 Ja ii.316 (= kuṇḍikaṁ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaṁ gahetvā caranto)
    • ˚dhātuka
    • neuter the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements = tiloka Nett 14, 63 (tedhātuke vimutti sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kvu 605
    • ˚piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas ‣See piṭaka, epithet of theras bhikkhus Ja iv.219 Mil 18f. Dhp-a i.7 384; iii.385 Dāvs v.22. cp. Sanskrit tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (Avs i.334 Index to Divy)
    • ˚bhātika having 3 brothers Dhp-a i.88 97
    • ˚bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. ˚dhātuka & tiloka) Dhp-a; i.305; iv.72 Dhs-a 50 214 (˚kusala) 291
    • ˚māsa
    • neuter 3 months, i.e. a season MN i.438 Mil 15 Dhp-a ii.192 Pv-a 20
    • ˚vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa-gata) Vin i.18
    • ˚vijja (adjective possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i.e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i.e. the 3 Vedas cp. Sanskrit trayī vidyā = the knowledge of the Vedas
      1. or of the Buddha Arahants, as defined at AN i.164f. viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future ) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i.e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic DN i.238 AN i.163 also as tevijjaka (n.) DN i.88 DN i.107 DN i.119–⁠2. buddhistic: Vin ii.161 MN i.482 SN i.194 AN i.167 = It 100 Snp 594 = Vv-a 10 Pug 14 Dhp-a i.138 Sdhp 420
      2. ˚tevijjatā abstract Vism 5
    Sanskrit trai˚
    Tekiccha
    adjective
    1. curable; figuratively one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in compounds. ; incurable unpardonable Vv-a 322 (of a sick person) Dhp-a i.25 (identical) Mil 322 of Devadatta with reference to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202 = It 85 MN i.393 & sa˚; pardonable Mil 192 Mil 221 Mil 344
    derived from tikiccha
    Teja
    Tejo;
    1. [Vedic tejas neuter from tij to be sharp or to pierce = a (piercing) flame ‣See tejate; semantically (sharp → light) cp. German strahl (ray of light) = Anglo-Saxon strael (arrow)

      • The
      • neuter tejo is the usual form; instrumental tejasā (Dh 387 Snp 1097) & tejena (J; iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo “sharpness,” heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence splendour, glory, energy, strength, power DN ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo-dhātu) SN iv.215 MN i.327 Snp 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha) Dhp 387 (sabbaṁ ahorattiṁ Buddho tapati tejasā) Ja iii.53 (sīla˚); i.93 (puñña˚ the power of merit) Vb 426 (identical); Ps i.103; Vism 350 (definition) Vv-a 116
      1. ˚kasiṇa fire-contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice ‣See kasiṇa DN iii.268 Dhs 203 Vism 171 Dhp-a ii.49 Dhp-a iii.214 Bdhd 106
      2. ˚dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 242) DN iii.27 228, 247 MN i.188 MN i.422 AN i.176 AN ii.165 Dhs 588 648 964; Nett 74; Vism 363
    Tejate
    1. to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc
    • See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati tittaka, teja, etc
    Vedic tejate from tij (*stij) = Latin in-stīgo (to spur), Old High German stehhan, Nhg. stecken English stick
    Tejana
    neuter
    1. the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Thag 1, 29 Dhp 80 Dhp 145 Dhp-a ii.147
    ‣See tejate
    Tejavant
    adjective
    1. splendid, powerful, majestic Dhp-a i.426
    2. in flames, heated, burning with (—˚) Mil 148
    tejas + vant
    Tejin
    adjective-noun
    1. having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Snp 1097 (= Nd2 286 tejena samannāgata)
    ‣See teja
    Tettiṁsa
    numeral
    1. thirty-three Ja i.273 Dhp-a i.267f. ‣See also under tayo & tāvatiṁsa
    tayo + tiṁsa
    Temana
    neuter
    1. wetting, moistening Vism 338 Vv-a 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṁ udake vā temanaṁ) Dhp-a iii.420
    from temeti
    Temeti
    1. to make wet, to moisten Vin i.47 (temetabba); ii.209 (temetvā) Dhp-a i.220 394 (identical) Ja i.88≈KhA 164 Ja ii.325 (temento) Pv-a 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā)
    cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; causative of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (= tamas), timira
    Terasa
    1. ‣See under tayo
    Terovassika
    adjective
    1. lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed SN iv.161 (thero vassiko in text) = 185 (of wood) MN i.58 (of bones)
    tiro + vassa + ika
    Tela
    neuter
    1. sesamum-oil (prepared from tila ‣Seeds), oil in general (tela = tilatelādika DN-a i.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin i.205 220 245, etc. AN i.209 AN i.278 (sappi vā t. vā); ii.122≈(tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil) Ja i.293 Ja ii.104 Pv iv.148 (tiṇena telaṁ pi na tvaṁ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants) Pug 55 Dhs 646 740, 815 Pv-a 80 (kaḷebarānaṁ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general)
    • tila ˚ṁ pātukāma desire to drink tila-wine Vv-a 54 pāka-tela oil concoction Vv-a 68 = Dhp-a iii.311 Ja ii.397 (sata˚); iii.372 (sahassa worth a thousand); v.376 (sata˚ worth a hundred) pādabbhañjana˚ oil for rubbing the feet Vv-a 44 sāsapa˚ (mustard ‣Seed & oil) Pv-a 198 sappi˚ (butter & oil) Snp 295 Pv-a 278 (also + madhu) as various objects of grocery trade (dhañña)
    1. ˚koṭṭhāgāra oil store Dhp-a i.220
    • ˚ghaṭa oil jar DN-a i.144
    • ˚cāṭī an oil tank Dhp-a i.220
    • ˚dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435
    • ˚nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99 Dhp-a ii.193 (+ udakatumba)
    • ˚pajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 DN i.85 = AN i.56 = Sn p. 15
    • ˚padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15 SN iii.126 SN v.319 Vv-a 198
    • ˚pāka an oil decoction mixed with spirits, oil-wine Vin i.205
    • ˚pilotikā (
    • plural rags soaked in oil Dhp-a i.221
    • ˚makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Mil 11
    • ˚miñjaka an oil-cake Pv-a 51
    • ˚vaṇijjā oil trade Pv-a 47
    • ˚homa an oblation of oil DN i.9
    from tila
    Telaka
    neuter = tela Vin i.204 (“a small quantity of oil”); ii.107 (sittha-t. oil of beeswax).
    Teliya
    adjective oily Ja iii.522
    Tevijja
    1. ‣See Vijjā
    Tomara
    masculine neuter
    1. a pike, spear, lance, especially the lance of an elephant-driver DN ii.266 (tutta-t. a driving lance) MN iii.133 (t. hattha) Vism 235 DN-a i.147
    Sanskrit tomara from tud ‣See tudati
    Toya
    neuter
    1. water (poetical for udaka) only in simile: puṇḍarīkaṁ (or padumaṁ) toyena na upalippati AN ii.39 = Sn 547 Snp 71 = 213 Thag 1, 700 Nd2 287 (t. vuccati udakaṁ); -Bdhd 67, 93
    Vedic toya from *tāu̯ to melt away; Latin tabeo, tabes (consumption); Anglo-Saxon pāwan = English dew, Old Irish tām tabes; also etc.
    Toraṇa
    neuter
    1. an arched gateway, portal Vin ii.154 DN ii.83 Vv 351 (= dvārakoṭṭhaka-pāsādassa nāmaṁ Vv-a 160) Ja iii.428 Dāvs v.48
    Sanskrit toraṇa, perhaps related to Latin turris (tower), cp. Homer Odysseus i.47 “regumque turris” = palaces
    Tosana
    adjective-noun
    1. satisfying, pleasing; satisfaction Snp 971
    ‣See toseti
    Tosāpana
    adjective
    1. pleasing, giving satisfaction Ja ii.249
    = tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti
    Toseti
    1. to please, satisfy, make happy Snp 1127 (= Nd2 288) Ja iv.274 Sdhp 304
    • pp tosita contented, satisfied Snp 1128 cp. pari˚
    causative of tussati
    Tya
    1. base of demonstrative pronoun = ta˚, this that;
    2. locative singular tyamhi Ja vi.292
    3. locative plural feminine tyāsu Ja v.368 (Commentary tāsu)
    4. Sanskrit tya˚, neuter tyad
    Tyassu
    1. = te assu DN ii.287 ‣See su3
    Tvaṁ
    1. ‣See tuvaṁ
    Tvātaṁ
    ‣See tuvaṭaṁ.
    1. Th

    Th

    Thakana
    neuter
    1. covering, lid; closing up Dhp-a iv.85 (saṁvara +)
    ‣See next
    Thaketi
    1. to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors windows) Vin ii.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); iv.54 Ja iv.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api-dhā; cp. Homer Odysseus 9, 243 the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) v.214 Dhp-a iv.180 (ṭhakesi, variant reading ṭhapesi) Vv-a 222 Pv-a 216 (dvārā Dāvs iv.33; v.25 (chiddaṁ mālāguḷena th.)
    Sanskrit sthagayati, causative to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Latin tego tegula (English = tile), toga; Old Irish tech house; Old High German decchu cover, dah roof. On Pali form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62
    Thañña
    neuter
    1. mother’s milk Vin ii.255 = 289 (˚ṁ pāyeti) AN iv.276 Ja iii.165 Ja vi.3 (madhura˚) Thag 2 496
    ‣See thana
    Thaṇḍila
    neuter
    1. bare, especially hard, stony ground Pv iv.75 (= kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa Pv-a 265)
    1. ˚sāyikā feminine the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sthaṇḍila-śāyikā
      1. SN iv.118 Dhp 141
      1. (= Dhp-a iii.77: bhūmisayana)
      2. ˚seyyā feminine a bed on bare ground DN i.167≈(Burmese variant taṇḍila˚) Mil 351 cp. Sanskrit sthaṇḍilaśayyā
      3. Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground
    Thaddha
    1. literally hard, rigid firm Ja i.293 (opposite muduka); Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa) Pv-a 139 (= ujjhangala)
    2. figuratively (a) hardened, obdurate callous, selfish DN i.118 (māna˚); iii.45 (+ atimānin) AN ii.26 = It 113 (kuha th. lapa) Snp 104 ‣See gotta˚ Ja i.88 (māna˚) ii.136; Sdhp 90
    3. (b) slow Mil 103 (opposite lahuka; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit dhandha, on which Kern, Toevoegselen ii.90)
    4. See thambha & thūṇa
      1. ˚maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish Dhp-a; iii.313 Vv-a 69 Pv-a 45
      • ˚hadaya hard-hearted Ja iii.68
      past participle of thambeti, Sanskrit stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Avestan stawra firm; Gothic stafs, Anglo-Saxon staef = English staff; Old High German stab ‣See also khambha & chambheti
    Thana
    1. the breast of a woman DN ii.266 Ja v.205 Ja vi.483 Sdhp 360
    2. the udder of a cow MN i.343 = Pug 56 Dhp-a ii.67
      1. ˚mukha the nipple Ja iv.37
      • ˚sita-dāraka [see sita a child at the breast, a suckling Mil 364 = 408
      Vedic stana
    Thanaka
    1. A little breast, the breast of a girl Thag 2, 265 (= Thag-a 212)
    Thanita
    neuter
    1. thundering thunder Ja i.470 Thag 1, 1108 Mil 377
    past participle of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder = Latin tonitrus, Old High German donar, etc.
    Thanin
    adjective having breasts,-breasted; in timbaru˚ Snp 110 Ja vi.457
    • pucimanda˚ Ja vi.269
    Thaneti
    1. to roar, to thunder DN ii.262 SN i.100 SN i.154 (megho thanayaṁ), 154 (thaneti devo) Iti 66 (megho thanayitvā). past participle thanita ‣See also gajjati & thunati
    2. Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Latin tono; Anglo-Saxon stunian; German stöhnen
    Thapati
    1. a builder, master carpenter MN i.396 = SN iv.223 MN iii.144 MN iii.2 officer, overseer SN v.348
    2. Vedic sthapati, to sthā + pati
    Thabbha
    1. is to be read for ˚tthambha in para˚ Ja iv.313
    Thambha
    1. a pillar, a post Vin i.276 DN i.50 (majjhimaṁ ˚ṁ nissāya) ii.85 (identical) Snp 214 Vv 782 (veḷuriya˚, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv iii.31 (identical) Dhp-a iv.203 Vv-a 188 (+ tulā-gopānasī) Pv-a 186
    2. (figuratively) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. German “verstockt”): thambho ti thaddha-bhāvo Snp-a 288 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaṁ kakkhaliyaṁ phāruliyaṁ ujucittatā (an˚?) amudutā Vb 350
    3. Often combined with māna (= arrogance), frequently in set sāṭheyyaṁ th. sārambho māno, etc. AN i.100 AN i.299 = Nd2 under rāga = Mil 289 cp. MN i.15
    4. AN iii.430 (+ māna) iv.350, 465 (+ sāṭheyya) Snp 245 (+ mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra’s combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo) Ja i.202
    5. a clump of grass MN i.324 cp. thambhaka.

      ‣See etymology under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. AN i.100 MN i.324 Pv-a 186 Pv-a 187
    Thamhhaka
    1. (= thambha 3) a clump of grass Vv-a 276 (= gumba)
    Thambhati
    1. & thambheti ‣See upa˚, paṭi˚
    Thambhanā
    feminine
    1. firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636 = 718 Vb 350
    abstract to thambha
    Thambhitatta
    neuter

    = thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vb 350 Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is “fluctuation unsteadiness, inflation” at Dhs 965 (in definition of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaṁ ?

    1. thambhitattaṁ ‣See on this Dhs. translation p. 242), & at Vb 168 (in definition of vicikicchā variant reading chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha
    abstract to thambha
    Thambhin
    adjective obstinate Thag 1, 952
    Tharaṇa
    neuter
    1. strewing, spreading. In compounds. like assa˚, bhumma˚, ratha˚, hattha˚, etc. the reading ass-attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (= ā stṛ;) ‣See attharaṇa and compounds
    Sanskrit staraṇa to stṛ
    Tharati
    1. only in compounds. ā˚, ava˚, etc
    Sanskrit stṛṇoti
    Tharu
    1. the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword AN iii.152 Ja iii.221 (= sword) Mil 178 Dhp-a ii.249 (˚mūla); iv.66 (asi˚)
    • tharusmiṁ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin ii.10 Mil 66
    1. ˚ggaha one who carries a sword-(handle) Mil 331 (dhanuggaha + ; not in corresponding list of occupations at DN i.51)
    2. ˚sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31
    Sanskrit tsaru
    Thala1
    neuter
    1. dry ground, viz. high, raised (opposite low) or solid, firm (opposite water) SN iv.179 As plateau opposed to ninna (low lying place) at Snp 30 (Snp-a 42 = ukkūla) Dhp 98 Iti 66 = SN i.100 (megho thalaṁ ninnañ ca pūreti) Pv-a 29 (= unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opposed to jala at Dhp 34 Ja i.107 Ja i.222 Pv iv.121 Pv-a 260 As firm, even ground or safe place at DN i.234 Snp 946 cp. Ja iii.53 Ja iv.142 Vism 185
    1. ˚gocara living on land Ja ii.159
    • ˚ja sprung from land (opposite vārija Dhp 34 or udakarūha Vv 356 = water-plant) referring to plants AN i.35 Ja i.51 Vv 356 (= yodhikādikā Vv-a 162) Mil 281
    • ˚ṭṭha standing on firm ground AN ii.241
    • ˚patha a road by land (opposite jala˚ by water Ja i.121 Ja iii.188
    Vedic sthala, to sthā, originally standing place; Anglo-Saxon steall (place); also Pali thaṇḍila
    Thala2
    neuter
    1. the haft of a sword, the scabbard Ja iii.221 (reading uncertain)
    probably dialect. variant of tharu
    Thava
    1. praise, praising, eulogy Nett 161, 188, 192
    ‣See thavati
    Thavati
    1. to praise, extol; infinitive thutuṁ Snp 217 (= thometuṁ Snp-a 272). causative thaveti Sanskrit stavayati
      1. past participle thavita Miln 361 ‣See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi
      Sanskrit stauti, Avestan staviti, cp.
    Thavikā
    feminine
    1. a knapsack, bag, purse; especially used for the carrying of the bhikkhu’s strainer Vin i.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte + pariss˚ + th.) Ja i.55 (pattaṁ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); vi.67 (pattaṁ thavikāya osāretvā) Vv-a 40 (patta-thavikato parissāvanaṁ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces Ja i.54 Ja i.195 Ja i.506 Vv-a 33 Anvs 35 ‣See also Vin ii.152 217; Vism. 91
    derivation uncertain
    Thāma
    1. (& thāmo neuter in instrumental thāmasā MN i.498 SN ii.278 = Thag 1, 1165 iii.110 ‣See below)

      1. “standing power, power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness vigour, instrumental thāmena (Mil 4 Pv-a 193); thāmasā ‣See above; thāmunā (J vi.22). Often combined with bala Ja i.63 Snp 68 with bala + java Pv-a 4 with bala viriya Nd2 289 651; with java Ja i.62 Vv-a 104 with viriya Ja i.67
      • DN iii.113 SN i.78 SN ii.28 SN v.227 AN i.50 ii.187 sq.; iv.192. Ja i.8 Ja i.265 (˚sampanna); ii.158 (identical) Dhs 13 22; Vism 233 (˚mahatta) Dhp-a iv.18 Pv-a 259
      • instrumental used as
      • adverb : thāmena hard, very much Pv-a 193
      • thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly MN i.257
      1. ˚gatadiṭṭhika adjective one in whom heresy has become strong Ja i.83 = vi.220
      2. Vedic sthāman sthāmas nt.,; sthā cp. Latin stamen (standing structure); Gothic stoma foundation
    Thāmaka
    adjective having strength Snp 1144 (dubbala˚ with failing strength) Nd1 12 (appa˚ + dubbala).
    Thāmavant
    adjective
    1. strong, steadfast, powerful, persevering SN v.197 SN v.225 AN ii.250 AN iv.110 AN iv.234 AN iv.291 v.24 Nd2 131 Vv 51 (= thira balavā Vv-a 35)
    thāma + vant
    Thāra
    1. ‣See vi˚, san˚
    Thāla
    neuter
    1. a plate, dish, vessel DN i.74 Ja i.69 Mil 282
    • Kaṁsa˚ a gong Mil 62 Vism 283 (in simile) ‣See also thālī
    from thala originally a flat dish
    Thālaka
    neuter
    1. a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thālakassa pānīyaṁ), 119 (identical); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Commentary )
    thāla + ka
    Thālikā
    feminine = thālaka Vin i.203 240 ‣See āḷhaka˚.
    Thālī
    feminine (thāli˚ in compounds.)
    1. an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in -dhovana washing of the dish AN i.161 (+ sarāva-dhovana)
    2. ˚pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin iii.15 DN i.97 (= DN-a i.267) SN ii.242 SN v.384 AN i.166 Ja i.186 Mil 249
    Sanskrit sthālī, cp. thāla
    Thāvara1
    adjective
    1. “standing still,” immovable (opp to tasa) firm, strong (epithet of an Arahant: Kp-a 245 Dhp-a iv.176 Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e.g. Snp 394 (“sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṁ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke”) Iti 32 (tasaṁ vā thāvaraṁ vā) ‣See tasa for reference
    Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Latin re-stauro, Gothic stana judgment & stojan to judge
    Thāvara2
    neuter
    1. old age Pv-a 149 (thāvari-jiṇṇa in ex plural of therī, otherwise jarā-jiṇṇa Should we read thāvira-jiṇṇa?)
    2. from thavira = thera, old
    Thāvariya
    neuter
    1. immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada˚; an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. explained at DN-a i.250 as “janapadesu dhuvabhāvaṁ thāvarabhāvaṁ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuṁ.” DN i.88 DN ii.16 DN ii.146 DN ii.169 SN i.100 Snp p. 106 Iti 15
    from thāvara
    Thāvareyya
    neuter
    1. the rank of a Thera. AN i.38 AN ii.23 This has nothing to do with seniority It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera
    from thāvara2
    Thāsotu˚
    1. ; in thāsotujana savana at Thag-a 61 according to Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana˚
    Thika
    adjective
    1. dropping forming drops: madhutthika Ja iii.493 Ja vi.529 (= madhuṁ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530 “dropping honey.”
    cp. Sanskrit styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass ‣See cognates under thīna & cp. theva
    Thiṇṇa
    past participle of tharati, only in compounds. parivi˚, vi˚.
    Thira
    adjective
    1. solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful Ja i.220 iv.106 (= daḷha) Mil 194 (thir-âthira-bhāva strength or weakness) Vv-a 212 (identical), 35 (= thāmavant); Sdhp 321
    Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Indogermanic ster (der. of stā to stand out = to be stiff; cp. Gr ; Latin sterilis (sterile = hardened, cp. Sanskrit starī) Old High German storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, English stare; also Latin strenuus
    Thiratā
    feminine
    1. steadfastness, stability Dhp-a iv.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira˚)
    from thira
    Thī
    feminine [Vedic strī, on which ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dialectical) form is itthi a woman Ja i.295 Ja i.300 Ja v.296 (thī-pura), 397; vi.238.
    Thīna
    neuter
    1. stiffness, obduracy, stolidity indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with; middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship ‣See below Defined as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (= immobility) at Nd2 290 = Dhs 1156 1236 = Nett 86; as citta-gelaññaṁ morbid state of mind (“psychosis”) at DN-a i.211
    • Sn 942 (niddaṁ tandiṁ sahe thīnaṁ pamādena na saṁvase), 1106 Vb 352 (= Nd2 290 as explanation of līnatta); Vism 262 (˚sineha where p. 361 reads patthinna˚)
    1. ˚middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni (Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation past participle 120, 310) Vin ii.200 (vigata˚) DN i.71 DN i.246 DN iii.49 DN iii.234 DN iii.269 DN iii.278 SN i.99 SN iii.106; v.277 sq. AN iii.69f.; 421 Snp 437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa) Iti 27 120; Ps. i.31, 45, 162; ii.12, 169 179, 228 Pug 68 Dhs 1154 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459
    2. Sanskrit styāna; originally past participle of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; stei̯ā (cp. also thira) = Latin stīpo to compress; also Sanskrit stimita (motionless) = Pali timi; stīma (slow), Middle High German stīm; Goth etc. stains = English stone; Latin stīpes (pale); Old High German stīf = English stiff
    Thīyati
    1. ‣See patiṭṭhīyati
    Thīyanā
    feminine & thīyitatta
    • neuter

      1. = thīna, in exegesis at Nd2 290≈‣ See thīna Vb 352
      abstract formations from thīna
    Thuta
    1. praised Dhs-a 198 Ja iv.101 (sada˚ = sadā thuto niccapasattho) Mil 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha)
    cp. past participle of thavati
    Thuti
    feminine
    1. praise Ja iv.443 (thutiṁ karoti) Vv-a 158
    cp. thavati
    Thunati
    1. to moan, groan, roar SN v.148 (thunaṁ ppr.; variant reading thanaṁ) Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya otherwise ghosenti), variant readings S thananti (better?). 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati Snp 884
    2. ‣See thaneti
    Thulla
    1. ‣See thūla
    Thusa
    neuter
    1. husk of grain, chaff AN i.242 (together with other qualities of corn) Ja iv.8 Vism 346. athusa DN iii.199
    1. ˚aggi a fire of husks Nett 23
    2. ˚odaka gruel (= sabbasambhārehi kataṁ sovīrakaṁ Pug AN 232) DN i.166 AN i.295 = Pug 55
    • ˚pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw-bird Ja i.242
    • ˚piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin ii.151
    • ˚rāsi a heap of h. Dhp-a i.309
    • ˚homa an oblation of h DN i.9 (= DN-a i.93 Burmese variant kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma DN i.9)
    Vedic tuṣa masculine
    Thūṇā
    feminine
    1. a pillar, prop support AN ii.198 Vv 541 (= thambha Vv-a 245) DN-a i.124 especially the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta “lead to sacrifice” (yūpa-sankhātuṁ thūṇaṁ upa DN-a i.294): DN i.127SN i.76Dhp-a ii.7 Ja iii.45
    • kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum DN i.6 etc ‣See kumbha where also kumbha -thūṇika Vin iv.285

      • eka-thūṇaka with one support Ja iv.79
      Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (= thūrā, on r: ṇ = l (thūla): n ‣See tūṇī). cp. Gr (post); Latin restauro (to prop up again); Gothic stojan etc ‣See thāvara; Anglo-Saxon styran = English steer, German steuer
    Thūṇira
    1. house-top, gable Thag 1, 184 (= kanṇikā Commentary )
    derived from thūṇā
    Thūpa
    1. a stupa or tope, a bell-shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, especially a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha = dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin iv.308 Ja iii.156 (mattika˚) = Pv i.84 in special as tope: DN ii.142 DN ii.161 DN ii.164f. AN i.77 MN ii.244 Ja v.39 (rajata˚) Vv-a 156 (Kassa passive bhagavato dvādasayojanikaṁ kanaka˚) Ud 8 Pv iii.105. Four people are thūpārahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin DN ii.143 AN ii.245

      • At Dīpavaṁsa vi.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaṁ
      Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable. Old Icelandic stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati
    Thūpika
    adjective
    1. having domed roofs (“house-tops” Ja vi.116 (of a Vimāna = dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaṁ vimānaṁ explained as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataṁ)
    from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound
    Thūpikata
    adjective
    1. “made a heap,” heaped of an alms-bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin iv.191
    thūpa + kata
    Thūla
    1. (a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in compounds.) adjective

      1. compact, massive; coarse gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined rough DN i.223 Snp 146 (aṇuka˚), 633 (identical) Dhp 31 Dhp 265 Dhp 409 Ja i.196 (b) Dhs 617 Kp-a 246 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 74 (of a cloak) Vv-a 103 Sdhp 101 Sdhp 346
      • thullāni gajjati to speak rough words Ja i.226 (= pharusavacanāni vadati)
      1. ˚aṅga adjective heavy-limbed Ja i.420
      2. ˚accaya a grave offence Vin i.133 167, 216; ii.110, 170 etc.; Vism 22 -kacchā thick scurf Vin i.202
      3. ˚kumārī (Vin. v.129); kumārikā a stout, fat girl Ja iii.147 Ja iv.220 (Commentary pañcakāmaguṇika-rāgena thūlatāya thullak˚ ti vuccati) Vism 17
      4. ˚phusitaka (deva) (the rain-god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DN-a i.45 SN iii.141 SN v.396 AN i.243 AN ii.140 (a); v.114 sq. Dhp-a iii.243
      5. ˚vajja a grave sin Vin ii.87 (a) MN ii.250
      6. ˚vattha a coarse garment Ja v.383
      7. ˚sarīra
      8. adjective fat, corpulent Ja i.420 Ja iv.220 (opposite kisa thin)
      9. ˚sāṭaka coarse cloth Dhp-a i.393 (a)
      10. Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lithuanian storas (thick) Latin taurus, Gothic stiur, Anglo-Saxon steor (bull = strong, bulky) Old High German stūri (strong). From sthā ‣See thīna, cp. thūṇā To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla
    Thūlatā
    feminine
    1. coarseness, roughness, vileness Ja iv.220
    abstract to thūla
    Theta
    adjective
    1. firm, reliable, trustworthy, true DN i.4 (DN-a i.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita-katho ti attho) MN i.179 SN iv.384 AN ii.209 = Pug 57 Nd2 623 ablative thetato in truth SN iii.112
    2. attheta Ja iv.57 (= athira)
    3. Sanskrit from tiṭṭhita, Müller Pali Grammar 7 = sthātṛ
    Thena
    1. a thief adjective stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly DN i.4 DN-a i.72 feminine athenī AN iii.38 cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 ‣See k
    2. Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter probably original; to deprive; Old Irish tāid thief, to a root meaning “conceal”
    Thenaka
    1. a thief Ja vi.115
    = preceding
    Theneti
    1. to steal, to conceal Ja iv.114 Dhp-a i.80
    denominative from thena
    Theyya
    neuter
    1. theft Vin i.96 AN i.129 Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṁ ādiyati); 242, 967 (˚ṁ na kareyya) Vv 158 (: theyyaṁ vuccati thenabhāvo Vv-a 72) Mil 264 Mil 265 Vism 43 (˚paribhoga) DN-a i.71 Sdhp 55 Sdhp 61
    1. ˚citta intending to steal Vin iii.58
    • ˚saṁvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always following by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin i.86 135, 168, 320; v.222 Mil 310
    • ˚saṅkhātaṁ (
    • adverb ) by means of theft, stealthily DN iii.65f. 133 AN iii.209 AN iv.370f.; v.264
    Vedic steya
    Thera
    1. technical term only used with reference to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha’s community
    • (a)
    • adjective senior Vin i.47 290 (th. bhikkhū opposite navā bh.), 159 (th. bhikkhu a senior bh. as opposed to navaka bh. a novice), 187 ii.16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at DN i.78
    • ‣ See also AN ii.23 AN ii.147 AN ii.168 AN v.201 AN v.348 DN iii.123f. 218 Dhp 260 Dhp 261. In Sangha-thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished Vin ii.212 303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv iv.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi. Ja v.456 At AN ii.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera-high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior-that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function
    • Note. thera in thero vassiko at SN iv.161 is to be read tero-vassiko
    1. ˚gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, name of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka-Nikāya. Theratara very senior, oppd to navatara, novice DN ii.154
    • ˚vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine MN i.164 Dīpavaṁsa iv.6, 13
    Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then “old = venerable”; (in meaning to be compared with Latin senior, etc. from number sem “one” = one year old, i.e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus = English wether, one year old ram, as compound with veteran old man. Or it may come from sthā in derivation *stheṷā in sthūra (sthūla ‣See etymology under thūla) thus, “strong venerable”
    Theraka
    adjective strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni DN ii.354 (variant readings thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). Theri & Therika
    Therī
    Therikā
    feminine
    1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā Mvu iii.283) Pv ii.116 (= thāvarijiṇṇā Pv-a 149)
    2. a female thera ‣See compounds., as therikā at Thag 2, 1 Dīpavaṁsa xviii.11
      1. ˚gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q.v.)
      ‣See thera
    Theva
    masculine ?)
    1. a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase cīvaraṁ … na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaṁ Vin i.50 53 = ii.227, 230 Ja vi.530 (madhu-ttheva a drop of honey)
    ‣See etymology under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Latin stīria, both drop. cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70 from; stip
    Thevati
    1. to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) Ja vi.529 (= virocati p. 530)
    from theva; originally “to be congealed or thick”
    Thoka
    adjective
    1. little, small, short, insignificant; neuter a trifle. AN iv.10 Ja vi.366 Pv-a 12 (kāla):
    2. neuter thokaṁ as
    3. adverb = a little Ja i.220 ii.103, 159; v.198 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 43

      • thokaṁ thokaṁ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dhp 121 Dhp 239 Mil 9 Snp-a 18 Pv-a 168
      for etymology ‣See under thīna
    Thokaka
    adjective = thoka;
    • feminine thokikā Dhp 310

    Thoma
    1. praise
    Vedic stoma a hymn of praise
    Thomana
    neuter & thomanā
    • feminine

      1. praising, praise, laudation Ja i.220 (= pasaṁsa) Pug 53 Pv-a 27
      ‣See thavati
    Thometi
    1. to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) DN i.240 Snp 679 Snp 1046 Nd2 291 Ja vi.337 Snp-a 272 (= thutuṁ) Vv-a 102 Pv-a 196 past participle thomita Ja i.9

      1. D
      denominative from thoma; cp. thavati

    D

    -D-
    1. euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) originally only sandhi-consonants in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat kocid, etc.) & thus restored in compounds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi-consonants (like puna-d-eva for punar eva).; (a) dvipa-d-uttama Snp 995 koci-d-eva Pv-a 153 kincid-eva ibid. 70; tāva-d-eva ib. 74; yāva-d-atthaṁ ib 217; ahu-d-eva Mil 22 etc
    • (b) puna-d-eva Pv ii.113 (Burmese variant ) Dhp-a ii.76 samma-d-eva Snp p. 16 Vv-a 148 Pv-a 66 etc.; cp. Snp-a 284 bahu-d-eva Ja i.170
    -Da
    adjective
    1. giving, bestowing, presenting, only —˚; , as anna˚, bala˚, vaṇṇa˚, sukha˚, Snp 297 vara˚ Snp 234 kāma˚ Ja vi.498 Pv ii.138; ambu giving water, i.e. a cloud Dāvs v.32; amatamagga Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala˚ ib. 26; maṁsa˚ Pgdp 49, etc
    Suffix of ‣See dadāti
    Daṁsaka
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Daṁseti
    1. (for dasseti) ‣See upa˚; pavi˚, vi˚
    Daka
    neuter
    1. Vin iii.112 SN iii.85 AN ii.33 = Nd2 420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd1 14 daka)
    1. ˚āsaya adjective (beings) living in water AN ii.33
    2. ˚ja
    3. adjective sprung from water, aquatic Ja i.18 (thalajā d pupphā)
    4. ˚rakkhasa a water-sprite Ja i.127 Ja i.170 vi.469
    5. = udaka, aphaeretic from combinations like sītodaka which was taken for sīto + daka instead of sīt odaka
    Dakkha1
    adjective
    1. dexterous skilled, handy, able, clever DN i.45 DN i.74 DN i.78 DN iii.190 (+ analasa) MN i.119 MN iii.2 SN i.65 Nd2 141 (+ analasa & sampajāna) Ja iii.247 DN-a i.217 (= cheka) Mil 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of “fit” appearance)
    Vedic dakṣa = Latin decet to be fit, proper, etc. On various theories of connections of root ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation from *diś to point ‣See disati, then the original meaning would be “pointing,” i.e. the hand used for pointing. For further etymology ‣See dakkhiṇa
    Dakkha2
    neuter
    1. dexterity, ability, skill Ja iii.466
    dakkha1 + ya ‣See dakkheyya
    Dakkhati
    Dakkhiti;
    1. ‣See dassati
    Dakkhiṇa

    adjective

    1. right (opp vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky prominent: Vin ii.195 (hattha) Pv-a 112 Pv-a 132 (identical) Ps i.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with reference to a Tathāgata’s body) Ja i.50
    2. passive the right side) Pv-a 178 (identical), 112 (˚bāhu); Snp p. 106 (bāha) Pv-a 179 (˚jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration)
    3. skilled, well-trained (= dakkha) Ja vi.512 (Commentary susikkhita)
    4. (of that point of the com

      • passive which is characterized through “orientation” by facing the rising sun, & then

        1. lies on one’s right:) southern, usually in combination with disā (direction): DN iii.180 (one of the 6 points ‣See disā), 188 sq. (identical) MN i.487 MN ii.72 SN i.145 etc
        1. ˚āvattaka adjective winding to the right DN ii.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i.e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right Avs i.205; Divy 51 Divy 67, 116) Ja v.380
        2. ˚janapada the southern country the “Dekkan” (= dakkhiṇaṁ) DN i.96 DN i.153 (explained by Buddhaghosa as “Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa-janapado” DN-a i.265)
        3. ˚samudda the southern sea Ja i.202
      Vedic dakṣiṇa, Avestan dašinō; adjective formation from adverb *deksi = *deksinos, cp. purāṇa from purā viṣuṇa from viṣu, Latin bīni (= bisni) from bis. From same root *deks are Latin dexter (with compar

      • antithetic suffix ter = Sanskrit tara, as in uttara); cp. also Gothic taihswa (right hand), Old High German zeso & zesawa ‣See dakkha for further connections
    Dakkhiṇā
    feminine
    1. a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a “holy” person with reference to unhappy beings in the Peta existence (“Manes”), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, “don attributif” (Feer) ‣See Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to Avs p. 480 DN i.51 = iii.66 (d
    • uddhaggikā), cp. AN ii.68 (uddhaggā d.) AN iii.43 AN iii.46 AN iii.178 AN iii.259 AN iv.64f. 394 MN iii.254 sq (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Snp 482 Snp 485 Iti 19 Ja i.228 Pv i.44 (= dāna Pv-a 18), i.59 (petānaṁ d ˚ṁ dajjā), iv.151 Mil 257 Vism 220 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 70 Pv-a 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya) guru-d. teacher’s fee Vv-a 229 230; dakkhiṇaṁ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dative) Vin i.229 = DN ii.88
    1. ˚āraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv ii.86
    2. ˚odaka water to wash in (originally water of dedication consecrated water) Ja i.118 Ja iv.370 Dhp-a i.112 Pv-a 23
    • ˚visuddhi. purity of a gift MN iii.256f. = AN ii.80f. = DN iii.231 cp. Kvu 556 sq
    Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as feminine of dakkhiṇa by grammarians ex
  • plural as gift by the “giving” (i.e. the right) hand with popular analogy to to give (dadāti)
  • Dakkhiṇeyya

    adjective-noun

    1. one worthy of a dakkiṇā The term is explained at Kp-a 183, & also (with ref to brahmanic usage) at Nd; 2 291; - SN i.142 SN i.168 SN i.220 MN i.37 MN i.236f.; 446 AN i.63 AN i.150 AN ii.44 AN iii.134 AN iii.162 AN iii.248 AN iv.13f. DN iii.5 Iti 19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaṁ … saggaṁ gacchanti dāyakā) Snp 227 Snp 448f. 504, 529 Nd2 291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). cp. i.105 (where also adjective to be given, of dāna). Pv iv.133 Vv-a 120 155 (epithet of the Sangha ujubhūta) Pv-a 25 Pv-a 125 Pv-a 128 Pv-a 262
    1. ˚aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice as one of the 7 fires (= duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha AN iv.41 AN iv.45 DN iii.217
    • ˚khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift Pv-a 92
    • ˚puggala an individual deserving a donation Ja i.228 there are 7 kinds enumerated at DN iii.253 8 kinds at DN iii.255
    • ˚sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā Pv-a 27 Pv-a 137 sq
    gerundive formation from dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti = pūjeti
    Dakkhiṇeyyatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Mil 240 (a˚)
    abstract from preceding
    Dakkhita
    1. consecrated, dedicated Ja v.138 cp. dikkhita
    Vedic dīkṣita past participle of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati ‣See dakkha1
    Dakkhin
    adjective
    1. ‣Seeing, perceiving; feminine ˚ī in atīra-dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land DN i.222
    2. from dakkhati ‣See dassati
    Dakkheyya
    neuter
    1. cleverness, skill Ja ii.237 (Commentary kusalassa-ñāṇa-sampayuttaṁ viriyaṁ); iii.468
    cp. dakkha2
    Daṭṭha
    1. bitten Ja i.7 Mil 302 Pv-a 144
    past participle of daśati ‣See ḍasati
    Daṭṭhar
    1. one who ‣Sees AN ii.25
    agent noun to dassati
    Daṭṭhā
    feminine
    1. a large tooth, tusk, fang Mil 150 (˚visa)
    cp. dāṭhā
    Daḍḍha
    burnt, always with aggi˚; consumed by fire Snp 62 Pv i.74 Mil 47 Pv-a 56 (indaggi˚).
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire Ja i.212 also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) Pv-a 163 (= āḷāhana)
    Sanskrit dagdha, past participle of dahati ‣See ḍahati
    Daḍḍhi˚
    ;
    1. making firm, strengthening, in; kayādaḍḍhi-bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete Ja iii.310 (variant reading daḷhi˚), iv.219 (variant reading distorted kādaḷiphahuna)
    not with Trenckner, Note. p. 65 = Sanskrit dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toevoegselen 113 = Sanskrit dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha ‣See daḷha), as in compound dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong
    Daṇḍa

    ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sanskrit dala, dalati. cp. Latin dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr work of art; Middle High German zelge twig; zol a stick Possibly also from *dand

    ra (r = l frequently, ṇ: l as tulā tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would be connected with Sanskrit dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e.g. a handle, etc. Ja ii.102 405 (variant reading dabba) Vism 313 Pv-a 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena variant reading dabbena

    1. katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod
    • a stick staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking-stick of a Wanderer Vin ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṁ), 196 SN i.176 AN i.138 AN i.206 Snp 688 (suvaṇṇa˚) Ja iii.395 Ja v.47 (loha˚); Sdhp 399 (eka˚, ˚dvaya, ti˚). daṇḍaṁ olubbha leaning on the st. MN i.108 AN iii.298 Thag 2, 27

  • a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaṁ upakkamanti “they go for each other with sticks” MN i.86 = Nd2 199; ˚ṁ dadāti to give a thrashing Ja iv.382 Ja v.442 daṇḍena pahāraṁ dadāti to hit with a stick SN iv.62 brahma˚ a certain kind of punishment DN ii.154 cp. Vin ii.290 & Kern,; Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin i.247 paṇīta receiving ample p. Pv iv.166; purisa-vadha˚ Ja ii.417 rāja-daṇḍaṁ karoti (c.

    • locative ) to execute the royal beating Pv-a 216 ‣See also Dhp 129 Dhp 131 Dhp 310 Dhp 405
    • a stick as a weapon in general, only in certain phrases & usually in comb; n with sattha, sword. daṇḍaṁ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta = ā-dā violent Snp 935 attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dhp 406 = Sn 630 a. + kodhâbhibhūta SN iv.117: ādinna-daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin i.349 opposite daṇḍaṁ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṁ Snp 35 Snp 394 Snp 629 nihita-d. nihita-sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma DN i.4 DN i.63 MN i.287 AN i.211 AN ii.208 AN iv.249 AN v.204 daṇḍaṁ nikkhipati identical AN i.206 d
    • sattha parāmasana Nd2 576 daṇḍa-sattha-abbhukkirana & daṇḍa-sattha-abhinipātana Nd; 2 5764. cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dhp 133 Dhp 5. (figuratively) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence teasing. In this meaning used as
    • neuter as MN i.372 tīṇi daṇḍāni pā
    • passive kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaṁ vacī˚, mano˚; in the same sense as mano˚ at Nd2 293 (as explained to Snp 35)

  • a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem with a penalty Ja vi.576 (dhanaṁ datvā Commentary ); daṇḍaṁ dhāreti to inflict a fine Mil 171 Mil 193 daṇḍaṁ paṇeti identical Dhp 310 (cp. Dhp-a iii.482) Dhp-a ii.71 aṭṭha-kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. Vv-a 76

    • adaṇḍa without a stick, i.e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena ‣See above 4: Vin ii.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviṁ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati DN i.89 = AN iv.89 AN iv.105 or dhammena-manusāsati Snp 1002 = SN i.236
    1. ˚ābhighata slaying with cudgels Pv-a 58
    • ˚āraha (adjective deserving punishment Ja v.442 Vv-a 23
    • ˚ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combined with satth ādāna MN i.110 MN i.113 MN i.410 DN iii.92 DN iii.93 DN iii.289 AN iv.400 Vism 326
    • ˚kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin ii.116
    • ˚kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin i.286
    • ˚kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement Ja iii.276 527; v.89 Mil 8 ˚ṁ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin i.75 76, 84; ii.262
    • ˚koṭi the tip of a branch or stick Dhp-a i.60
    • ˚dīpikā a torch Ja vi.398 Vism 39 Dhp-a i.220 399
    • ˚ppatta liable to punishment Mil 46
    • ˚ paduma name of a plant (cp. Sanskrit daṇḍotphala = sahadevā Halāyudha) Ja i.51
    • ˚parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) MN i.88 AN i.138 Mil 282
    • ˚parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin ii.119
    • ˚pahāra a blow with a stick DN i.144
    • ˚pāṇin carrying a staff, “staff in hand” MN i.108
    • ˚bali (-ādi) fines taxes, etc. Dhp-a; i.251
    • ˚bhaya fear of punishment AN ii.121f. = Nd2 470 = Mil 196
    • ˚(m)antara among the sticks DN i.166 = AN i.295 = ii.206 = M i.77, 238, 307, 342 Pug 55 ‣See note at Dialogues of the Buddha i.228
    • ˚yuddha a club-fight DN i.6 Ja iii.541
    • ˚lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from sticks DN i.9
    • ˚vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, MN i.153
    • ˚veḷupesikā a bamboo stick Ja iv.382
    • ˚sikkā a rope slung round the walking-staff Vin ii.131
    • ˚hattha with a stick in his hand Ja i.59
    Vedic daṇḍa, dialectical = *dal[d
  • Daṇḍaka
    1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle DN i.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament ‣See DN-a i.89) Ja i.120 (sukkha˚ a dry twig) ii.103; iii.26 Dhp-a iii.171 Vism 353
    2. aḍḍha˚ a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) AN i.47 ii.122 = M i.87 = Nd2 604 = Mil 197
    3. ubhato˚ two handled (of a saw) MN i.129 = 189; ratha˚; the flag-staff of a chariot Mil 27
    4. veṇu˚ a jungle rope Ja iii.204
    5. ‣ See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying Ja iii.204
    6. the crossbar or bridge of a lute Ja ii.252 Ja ii.253
      1. ˚dīpikā a torch Ja i.31
      • ˚madhu “honey in a branch, a beehive Dhp-a i.59
      Demin. of daṇḍa
    Daṇḍaniya
    adjective
    1. liable to punishment Mil 186
    gerundive formation from daṇḍa
    Datta1
    1. given (—˚ by; often in proper name as Brahmadatta, Deva-datta = Theo-dor. etc.) Snp 217 (para˚ = Snp-a 272 (variant reading dinna)
    past participle of dadāti
    Datta2
    adjective-noun
    1. stupid; a silly fellow MN i.383 Ja vi.192 (Commentary dandha lāḷaka)
    probably = thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1 ‣See also dandha & cp. dattu
    Datti
    feminine
    1. gift, donation, offering DN i.166 MN i.78 MN i.342 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55
    from dadāti + ti
    Dattika
    adjective
    1. given Ja iii.221 (kula˚); iv.146 (identical); neuter a gift DN i.103 (= dinnaka DN-a i.271)
    2. derived from datta
    Dattiya
    1. = dattika, given as a present Ja ii.119 (kula˚); v.281 (sakka˚); vi.21 (identical): Vv-a 185 (mahārāja˚ by the King)
    Dattu
    (adjective?)
    1. stupid, in d˚-paññatta a doctrine of fools DN i.55 = M i.515 Ja iv.338
    is it base of agent noun dātar? ‣See datta2
    Dada
    1. (—˚) (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. giving, to be given SN i.33 (paññā˚); Kh viii.10 (kāma˚); Pv ii.91 (identical = dāyaka Pv-a 113); ii.124 (phala = dāyin Pv-a 157) Vv-a 171 (puriṁ˚)
    • duddada hard to give SN i.19 = iv.65 = J ii.86 = vi.571
    Sanskrit ˚ dad or ˚dada, cp. ˚da & dadāti base 3
    Dadāti
    to give, etc. I. Forms. The following bases form the Pāli verb-system: dā, dāy, dadā & di.
    1. -1. Bases dā & (reduced); da
    • (a) dā˚; :
    • future dassati Ja i.113 Ja i.279 iii.83 AN iii.37 1st singular dassāmi Ja i.223 Ja ii.160 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 35, etc
    • dammi interpreted by Commentary as
    • future is in reality a contraction from dātuṁ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (from dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do from kātuṁ īhāmi) Snp p. 15 (“shall I give”); ii.112; iv.10 (varaṁ te dammi) Pv i.103ii.324 (kin t’ āhaṁ dammi what can I give thee = dassāmi Pv-a 88)
    • preterite adā Snp 303 Pv ii.28 (= adāsi Pv-a 81) Mhvs vii.14; 2nd singular ado Ja iv.10 (= adāsi Commentary ): Mil 384 1st.
    • plural adamha Ja ii.71 Mil 10 2nd
    • plural adattha Ja i.57 (mā ad.) Mil 10 & dattha Ja ii.181 -
    • aorist adāsi Ja i.150 Ja i.279 Pv-a 73 etc.;
    • plural adaṁsu Pv i.116
    • inf dātuṁ Ja iii.53 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 48 (˚kāma), etc. & dātave Snp 286
    • gerundive dātabba Ja iii.52 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 88, etc. (b) da˚; :
    • past participle datta -
    • absolutive datvā Ja i.152 Ja i.290 (a˚) Pv-a 70 Pv-a 72, etc. & datvāna Pv i.113 also as ˚dā (for ˚dāya or ˚dāna) in preposition compounds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc. Der from 1. are
    • causative dāpeti, past participle dāpita; agent noun dātar; nt dāna ‣See also suffix dā,˚ datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp atta (= ā-da
    1. ta)
    • Bases dāy & (reduced); day contracted into de. (a) dāy˚; : only in derivation dāya, dāyaka dāyin and in preposition compounds. ā-dāye (
    • absolutive of ādāti). (b) de˚; : present indicative deti Snp 130 Ja ii.111 Ja ii.154 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 1st singular demi Ja i.228 Ja i.307 2nd desi Ja i.279 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 1st
    • plural dema Ja i.263 Ja iii.126 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 75 (shall we give) 2nd detha Ja iii.127 3rd denti Snp 244
    • imperative dehi Vin i.17 Ja i.223 Ja iv.101 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 73; 3rd singular detu Ja i.263 Ja ii.104 2nd
    • plural detha Iti 66 Ja iii.126 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 76
    • ppr. dento Ja i.265 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 11 etc
    • grd deyya Mhvs vii.31. Bt Sanskrit deya
    • Other derived from base 2 are dayati & dayā (q.v.)

  • Base dadā : pres. ind dadāti SN i.18 Snp p. 87; 1st. singular dadāmi Ja i.207 Snp 421 Snp 3rd.

    • plural dadanti Ja iii.220 Dhp 249
    • imperative dadāhi Pv ii.14
    • pot. dadeyya Pv-a 17 Mil 28 & dade Pv ii.322 Vv 625 1st. singular dadeyyaṁ Ja i.254 Ja i.265 2nd singular dadeyyāsi Ja iii.276 Also contracted forms dajjā SN i.18 (may he give) Dhp 224 Pv i.41 (= dadeyya Pv-a 17); ii.940; 1st singular dajjaṁ Vin i.232 (dajjâhaṁ = dajjaṁ ahaṁ). cp. i.109 (dajjâhaṁ) Ja iv.101 (= dammi Commentary ) Pv ii.945; 2nd.
    • plural dajjeyyātha Vin i.232 3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd.
    • plural dajjuṁ in compound anupa˚
    • ppr.; dadanto Snp p. 87. genitive etc. dadato It. 89 Dhp 242 Pv ii.942 & dadaṁ Snp 187 Snp 487 Pv ii.942 Vv 676
    • ppr. med dadamāna Ja i.228 Ja ii.154 Pv-a 129
    • aorist adadaṁ Vv 3411 (= adāsiṁ Vv-a 151); proh. 2nd.
    • plural mā dadiṭṭha Dhp-a i.396 Ja iii.171
    • absolutive daditvā Pv ii.89.ii (Burmese variant datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja Pv ii.967 (= datvā Pv-a 139)
    • Derived dada for ˚da. 4. (Passive) base di (& dī); :
    • past participle dinna pres. dīyati SN i.18 Thag 2, 475 Pv-a 26 & diyyati Vv-a 75 cp. ādiyati; preterite dīyittha Dhp-a i.395 -ppr. dīyamāna Pv-a 8 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 110 Pv-a 133, etc
    • Derived from 4 are Desid dicchati, diti, etc
    • II. Meanings i. (trs.) with
    • accusative to give, to present with: dānaṁ deti (w. dative & absolute) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present SN i.18 Iti 89 Pv i.41 ii3 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 27, etc
    • (figuratively okāsaṁ to give opportunity, allow Ja i.265 ovādaṁ to give advice Pv-a 11 jīvitaṁ to spare one’s life Ja ii.154 paṭivacanaṁ to answer Ja i.279 sādhukāraṁ to applaud Ja i.223 paṭiññaṁ to promise Pv-a 76 -to offer, to allow: maggaṁ i.e. to make room Vin ii.221 Ja ii.4 maggaṁ dehi let me
    • passive Ja iv.101 -to grant: varaṁ a wish Ja iv.10 Pv ii.940; -to give or deal out: daṇḍaṁ a thrashing Ja iv.382 pahāraṁ a blow SN iv.62
    • with
    • absolutive to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiṁ katvā d. to provide with fire Ja ii.102 sāṭake āharitvā to present with clothes Ja i.265 dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out Ja i.226 kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṁsu had huts built & gave them Pv-a 42

  • (absolute); with infinitive to permit, to allow: khādituṁ Ja i.223 nikkhamituṁ Ja ii.154 pavisituṁ Ja i.263 etc.

    Redu plural formation as in Latin do, perfect de-di, Latin dōs dowry; Old High German dati Lithuanian důti to give
  • Daddabha
    1. a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud Ja iii.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), variant reading duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sanskrit gloss = dundubhyaśabda ‣See also dabhakka
    onomatop.
    Daddabhāyati
    1. to make a heavy noise, to thud Ja iii.77
    denominative from preceding
    Daddara1
    1. partridge Ja iii.541
    onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala
    Daddara2
    1. a certain (grinding, crashing) noise AN iv.171 Ja ii.8 Ja iii.461 name of a mountain, explained as named after this noise Ja ii.8 Ja iii.16 Ja iii.461
    cp. Sanskrit dardara
    Daddaḷhati
    1. to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in past participle medium daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth SN i.127 = J i.469 Vv 173 341; Pv ii.126; iii.35 Vv-a 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna) Pv-a 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto)

      • Spelling daddallamāna at Ja v.402 Ja vi.118
      Sanskrit jājvalyati, Intens. of jval ‣See jalati
    Daddu
    neuter
    1. a kind of cutaneous eruption Mil 298 Vism 345
    1. ˚bandhana in d
    • bandhanādi-bandhana at Thag-a 241 should be read daṇḍa˚
    Sanskrit dadru feminine & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); from *der in Sanskrit dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split ‣See dara & dala; cp. Latin derbiosus; Old High German zittaroh; Anglo-Saxon teter
    Daddula1
    1. a certain kind of rice DN i.166 MN i.78 MN i.343 AN i.241 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55
    Daddula2
    neuter
    1. in nahāru˚ (variant reading dala & dadalla) both at MN i.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n-daddulena pi aggiṁ gavesanti) & AN iv.47 (kukkuṭapattaṁ vā n-daddulaṁ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṁ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle
    Sanskrit dārdura?
    Dadhi
    neuter
    1. sour milk, curds junket Vin i.244 (in enumeration of 5-fold cow-produce, cp. gorasa) DN i.201 (identical) MN i.316 AN ii.95 Ja ii.102 iv.140 Mil 41 Mil 48 Mil 63 Dhs 646 740, 875; Vism 264 362
    1. ˚ghaṭa a milk bowl Ja ii.102
    • ˚maṇḍaka whey SN ii.111
    • ˚māla “the milk sea,” name of an ocean Ja iv.140
    • ˚vāraka a pot of milk-curds Ja iii.52
    Sanskrit dadhi, red plural formation from dhayati to suck. cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.
    Danta1
    a tooth, a tusk, fang, especially an elephant’s tusk; ivory Vin ii.117 (nāga-d. a pin of ivory); Kh ii. (as one of the taca-pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco ‣See detailed description at Kp-a 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira “with sand between his teeth & dust on his head” (of a wayfarer) Snp 980 Ja iv.362 Ja iv.371 MN i.242 Ja i.61 Ja ii.153 Vism 251 Vv-a 104 (īsā˚ long tusks) Pv-a 90 Pv-a 152 (fang); Sdhp 360.
    1. ˚ajina ivory MN ii.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaṁ)
    2. ˚aṭṭhika “teeth-bone,” ivory of teeth i.e. the tooth as such Vism 21
    3. ˚āvaraṇa the lip (literally protector of teeth Ja iv.188 Ja vi.590 Dhp-a i.387
    • ˚ullahakaṁ (MN iii.167 ‣See ullahaka
    • ˚kaṭṭha a tooth-pick Vin i.46 = ii.223 i.51, 61; ii.138 AN iii.250 Ja i.232 Ja ii.25 Ja vi.75 Mil 15 Dhp-a ii.184 Vv-a 63
    • ˚kāra an artisan in ivory ivory-worker DN i.78 Ja i.320 Mil 331 Vism 336 -kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaṁ danta-kūṭaṁ DN iii.44 = 47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.40: “munching them all up together with that wheel-less thunderbolt of a jawbone,” with note: “the sentence is not clear”) -pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251
    • ˚poṇa tooth-cleaner, always combined with mukh’ odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51 Vin iv.90 233 Ja iv.69 Mil 15 Snp-a 272 The Commentary on Pārāj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna
    • ˚mūla the root of a tooth; the gums Ja v.172
    • ˚vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth? DN-a i.271
    • ˚vaṇṇa ivory-coloured, ivory-white Vv 4510-valaya an iv. bangle Dhp-a i.226
    • ˚vikati a vessel of iv DN i.78 MN ii.18 Ja i.320 Vism 336
    • ˚vikhādana biting with teeth, i.e. chewing Dhs 646 740, 875
    • ˚vidaṁsaka (either = vidassaka or to be read ˚ghaṁsaka) showing one’s teeth (or chattering?) AN i.261 (of hasita, laughter) -sampatti splendour of teeth Dhp-a i.390
    Sanskrit danta from accusative dantaṁ of dan, genitive datah = Latin dentis. cp. Avestan dantan, Latin dentem Old Irish dēt; Gothic tunpus, Old High German zand, Anglo-Saxon tōot (= tooth & tusc (= tusk); originally ppr. to *ed in atti to eat = "the biter.” cp. dāṭhā
    Danta2
    adjective
    1. made of ivory, or iv
    • coloured Ja vi.223 (yāna = dantamaya)
    1. ˚kāsāva ivory-white & yellow Vin i.287
    Sanskrit dānta
    Danta3
    1. tamed, controlled restrained Vin ii.196 SN i.28 SN i.65 SN i.141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo) AN i.6 (cittaṁ dantaṁ) Iti 123 (danto damayataṁ seṭṭho) Snp 370 Snp 463 Snp 513 Snp 624 Dhp 35 Dhp 142 (= catumagga-niyamena d. Dhp-a iii.83), 321 sq. = Nd2 475
    • sudanta well-tamed, restrained Snp 23 Dhp 159 Dhp 323
    1. ˚bhūmi a safe place (= Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed SN iii.84 Nd2 475 (in continuation of Dhp 323) Dhp-a iv.6
    Sanskrit dānta, past participle dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Latin domitus ‣See dameti
    Dantaka
    1. a pin of tooth or ivory; makara˚; the tooth of a sword-fish Vin ii.113 117; iv.47 ‣See details under makara
    Dandha
    adjective
    1. slow slothful, indocile; silly, stupid MN i.453 SN iv.190 Dhp 116 Ja i.116 Ja i.143 Ja ii.447 v.158; vi.192 (+ laḷāka) Thag 1, 293 Mil 59 Mil 102 Mil 251 Dhp-a i.94 251; iii.4 Vism 105, 257 (with reference to the liver)
    1. ˚ābhiññā sluggish intuition DN iii.106 AN v.63 Dhs 176 Nett 7, 24, 50, 123 sq., cp. AN ii.149f.; Vism 85
    Sanskrit ? Fausböll refers it to Sanskrit tandra; Trenckner (Note. 65) to dṛḍha ‣See also Müller, Pali Grammar 22, & Lüders; Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta; 2 (q.v.)
    Dandhatā
    feminine stupidity Dhp-a i.250 as dandhattaṁ at DN iii.106
    Dandhanatā
    feminine, in ; absence of sluggishness Dhs 42 43.
    Dandhāyanā
    feminine clumsiness Mil 105
    Dandhāyitatta
    neuter
    1. stupidity (= dandhatā) DN i.249 (opposite vitthāyitatta) SN ii.54 Mil 105 DN-a i.252
    derived from dandheti
    Dandheti
    1. to be slow, to tarry Thag 1, 293 (opposite tāreti). past participle dandhāyita ‣See in derivation ˚tta
    2. denominative from dandha
    Dapeti
    causative from 4 to clean ‣See pariyo˚;
    • past participle dāta ‣See ava˚.

    Dappa
    1. wantonness, arrogance Ja ii.277 Mil 361 Mil 414 Pgdp 50. cp. ditta2
    • In definition of root gabb at Dhtm 289
    Sanskrit darpa, to dṛpyati
    Dappita
    adjective arrogant, haughty Ja v.232 Ja v.301
    Dabba1
    adjective-noun
    1. (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, SN i.187 = Th 1, 1218, cp. Pss of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (= Sanskrit bhavya, cp. Pāṇini v.3, 104 dravyaṁ ca bhavyaḥ)
    • (b) material, substance property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14
    1. ˚jātika of good material, fit for, able MN i.114 AN i.254 (cp. Sanskrit pātrabhūta); Vism 196
    2. ˚saṁhāra collecting something substantial Pv-a 114 (should probably be read sambhāra)
    3. ˚sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving Ja iv.311 Ja v.48 Ja vi.427 Dhp-a i.321 Dhp-a ii.114
    Sanskrit dravya, neuter to dravati dru
    Dabba2
    adjective-noun
    1. treelike, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood Ja i.108 (d
    • tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); v.46 (d
    • gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (˚tiṇa)
    Sanskrit dravya, of dru wood ‣See dāru
    Dabbī
    feminine
    1. a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā Dhp-a iv.132)
    • Dh 64 genitive & instr, davyā Ja iii.218 Mil 365
    • In compounds dabbi˚
    1. ˚kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle Dhp-a i.371
    • ˚gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering MN ii.157 (of a priest); Pv ii.953 (= kaṭacchu-gāhika Pv-a 135) -mukha a kind of bird Ja vi.540 (= āṭa)
    • ˚homa a spoonoblation DN i.9
    Sanskrit darvī = *dāru-ī made of wood ‣See dāru
    Dabbha
    a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) DN i.141 MN i.344 AN ii.207
    1. ˚puppha “kuśa-flower,” epithet of a jackal Ja iii.334
    Sanskrit darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lithuanian darbas plaiting, crating
    Dabhakkaṁ
    1. (?) indeclinable = daddabhaṁ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) Ja iii.77 (variant reading duddabha = daddabha).

    Dama
    adjective-noun (& of a nt.; damo the instrumental damasā)
    1. taming, subduing; self-control, self-command moderation DN i.53 (dānena damena saṁyamena = It 15 ex plural at DN-a i.160 as indriya-damena uposatha-kammena) iii.147, 229 SN i.4 SN i.29 SN i.168 = Sn 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto) SN iv.349 AN i.151 AN ii.152f. MN iii.269 (+ upasama) Snp 189 Snp 542 (˚ppatta), 655 Dhp 9 Dhp 25 Dhp 261; Nett 77 Mil 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dhp 159 Pv-a 280 Sdhp 367

      • arindama taming the enemy (q.v.)
      Vedic dama; Anglo-Saxon tam = English tame, Old High German zam to *demā in dameti
    Damaka
    adjective-noun
    1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self-control MN i.446 (assa˚); iii.2 (identical) Ja i.349 (kula˚ bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self-mastery 505 (go˚, assa˚, hatthi˚) Thag 2, 422 (= kāruññāya paresaṁ cittassa damaka Thag-a 268)
    2. one who practises self-mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467
    = dama
    Damatha
    1. taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control MN i.235 DN iii.54 (+ samatha) Dhp 35 (cittassa d.) Pv-a 265 Dīpavaṁsa vi.36
    Sanskrit damatha
    Damana
    adjective neuter taming, subduing, mastery Pv-a 251 (arīnaṁ d˚-sīla = arindama).
    Damaya
    adjective
    1. to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Thag 1, 5 (better to be read damiya
    Sanskrit damya ‣See damma
    Damita
    1. subdued, tamed Ja v.36 Pv-a 265
    Sanskrit damāyita = danta3; cp. Latin domitus
    Dametar

    1. one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaṁ dametā “the tamer of the untamed” (of a Buddha) MN ii.102 Thag 2 135
    n ag. to dameti = Sanskrit damayitṛ, cp. Sanskrit damitṛ = Latin domitor
    Dameti

    to make tame, chastise, punish master, conquer, convert Vin ii.196 (daṇḍena) MN ii.102 Dhp 80 Dhp 305 (attānaṁ) Iti 123 (ppr. danto

    damayataṁ seṭṭho santo

    1. samayataṁ isi) Mil 14 Mil 386 Pv-a 54 (core d. = converted)
    Sanskrit damayati, causative to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Latin domare; Old Irish dam (ox); Gothic tamjan = Old High German zemman = Anglo-Saxon temian = English tame; to *demā of dama house ‣See dampati
    Dampati
    1. master of the house, householder ‣See tudampati & cp. gahapati
    Sanskrit dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Latin domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gothic timrjan; Old High German zimbar; English timber
    Damma
    adjective
    1. to be tamed or restrained; esp with reference to a young bullock MN i.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers) Iti 80 also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer AN ii.112 & figuratively of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (epithet of the Buddha “the trainer of the human steer” DN i.62 (misprint ˚dhamma˚) = ii.93 = iii.5 MN ii.38 AN ii.112 Vv 1713 (nara-vara-d
    • sārathi cp. Vv-a 86
    Sanskrit damya, gerundive of dāmyati ‣See dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)
    Dayati1
    1. = dayati (q.v.) to fly Ja iv.347 (+ uppatati); vi.145 (dayassu = uyyassu Commentary )
    Dayati2
    =
    1. to have pity (c. locative ), to sympathize, to be kind Ja vi.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi = dayaṁ kareyyāsi)
    2. Vedic dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Latin daps ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Dayā
    feminine
    1. sympathy, compassion, kindness MN i.78 Snp 117 Ja i.23 Ja vi.495 Usually as anuddayā; frequently in compound dayāpanna showing kindness DN i.4 (= dayaṁ metta-cittaṁ āpanno DN-a i.70) MN i.288 AN iv.249f. Pug 57 Vv-a 23
    Vedic dayā, to dayati2
    Dara
    1. fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 (vineyya hadaye daraṁ) SN ii.101 SN ii.103 SN iv.186f. Thag 2, 32 (= cittakato kilesa-patho Thag-a, 38) Ja iv.61 Vv 838 (= daratha Vv-a 327) Pv i.85 (= citta-daratha Pv-a 41)
    • sadara giving pain, fearful, painful MN i.464 AN ii.11 AN ii.172 SN i.101 cp. ādara & purindada
    Sanskrit dara ‣See etymology connection under darī
    Daratha
    1. anxiety, care, distress AN ii.238 MN iii.287f. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.) Snp 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever) Ja i.61 (sabbakilesa-d.) Pv-a 230 (identical) Dhp-a ii.215 Mil 320 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 41 Vv-a 327
    Sanskrit daratha, derived from dara
    Darī
    feminine
    1. a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern Ja i.18 (v.106), 462 (mūsikā˚ mouse-hole); ii.418 (= maṇiguhā) Snp-a 500 (= padara)
    1. ˚cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) Ja v.70
    • ˚mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110
    • ˚saya a lair in a cleft cp. iii.71
    Sanskrit darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, causative darayati *der; Lithuanian dirù (identical) Gothic ga-taíran = Anglo-Saxon teran (tear = Old High German zeran (German zerren). To this the variant (r:l *del in dalati, dala, etc ‣See also daddara, daddu, dara avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (= puraṁ-dara)
    Dala
    neuter
    1. a blade, leaf, petal (usually—˚); akkhi-d eyelid Thag-a 259 DN-a i.194 Dhs-a 378 uppala˚ Dhs-a 311 kamala˚ (lotus-petal) Vv-a 35 38; muttā˚ (? DN-a i.252 ratta-pavāḷa˚ Ja i.75
    Sanskrit dala, *del (various of *der ‣See dara) in dalati (q.v.) originally a piece chipped off = a chip, piece of wood cp. daṇḍa, Middle High German zelge (branch); Old Irish delb (figure, form) deil (staff, rod)
    Dalati
    1. to burst, split break. causative dāleti Snp 29 (dalayitvā = chinditvā Snp-a 40) Mil 398

      • passive dīyati (Sanskrit dīryate) ‣See uddīyati. Dalidda & Dalidda;
      Sanskrit dalati, del to split off, tear; Latin dolare & delere ‣See dala & dara
    Dalidda
    Daḷidda;
    adjective-noun
    1. vagrant, strolling, poor, needy wretched; a vagabond, beggar-(l:) Vin ii.159 SN i.96 (opposite aḍḍha) AN ii.57 AN ii.203 AN iii.351 AN iv.219 AN v.43 Pug 51 Vv-a 299 (ḷ:) MN ii.73 SN v.100 SN v.384 SN v.404 Vv201 (= duggata Vv-a 101) DN-a i.298 Pv-a 227 Sdhp 89 Sdhp 528
    Sanskrit daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run ‣See dava, in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer = poor
    Daḷiddatā
    feminine
    1. poverty Vv-a 63
    Sanskrit daridratā
    Daḷiddiya
    1. ‣See dāḷiddiya
    Daḷha
    adjective
    1. firm, strong, solid; steady, fast neuter adverb very much, hard, strongly- DN i.245 SN i.77 AN ii.33 Snp 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (˚ṁ karoti to strengthen), 966 (identical) Dhp 112 Ja ii.3 Ja iv.106 Dhp-a iv.48 Kp-a 184 Vv-a 212 (= thira) Pv-a 94 Pv-a 277-daḷhaṁ (
    2. adverb ) Dhp 61 Dhp 313.

      1. ˚dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art proficient SN ii.266 = AN ii.48 (of an archer) MN i.82 Ja vi.77 Vv 631 accusative to Trenckner, Note. p. 60 (cp also Vv-a 261) = dṛḍha-dhanva, from dhanu = having a strong bow
      2. ˚nikkama of strong exertion Snp 68 (= Nd2 294)
      3. ˚parakkama of strong effort, energetic MN ii.95 AN ii.250 Dhp 23 Thag 2, 160
      4. ˚pahāra a violent blow Ja iii.83
      5. ˚pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified SN iv.194
      6. ˚bhattin firmly devoted to somebody Dhs-a 350
      7. Sanskrit dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Latin fortis (strong), Lithuanian dir̃žas (strap). For further relations ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under fortis
    Daḷhī˚
    ;
    1. in kāya-daḷhī-bahula strong in body athletic Vin ii.76 cp. Commentary on p. 313 Ja iii.310 Ja iv.219 daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance Snp-a 290 (+ ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In compounds. also daḷhi˚ viz
    2. ˚kamma making firm; strengthening Vin i.290 Ja v.254 Pug 18 22; Vism 112
    feminine of dṛḍha → daḷha in compound like dṛḍhī-bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi
    Dava1
    1. fire, heat Ja iii.260
    • ‣ See also dāva & dāya
    1. ˚ḍāha (= Sanskrit davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle-fire Vin ii.138 MN i.306 Ja i.641 cp. iii.93 Mil 189 Vism 36
    Sanskrit dava, to dunoti (q.v.)
    Dava2
    1. running, course, flight quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin ii.13 MN i.273 iii.2 AN i.114 AN ii.40 AN ii.145 AN iv.167 Pug 21 25
    • davā ablative in sport, in fun Vin ii.101
    • davāya dative identical Nd2 540 Mil 367 Dhs 1347 cp. Dhs-a 402
    • davaṁ karoti to sport, to play Ja ii.359 Ja ii.363
    1. ˚atthāya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113
    • ˚kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin iv.11 354 MN i.565
    Sanskrit drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā ‣See dalidda & *dram; cp. abhiddavati also dabba = dravyaṁ
    Davya
    1. = dabba1, in sarīra˚; fitness of body, a beautiful body Ja ii.137
    for *dravya
    Dasa1
    the number ten; gen dasannaṁ (Dh 137); instrumental dasahi (Kh iii.) & dasabhi (Vin i.38). In compounds. (—˚) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) rasa (terasa 13; pannar˚ 15; aṭṭhār˚ 18).
    1. Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal comb; ns (100, 1000) Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power
    1. Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the com passive ‣See disā): Snp 719 Snp 1122 Pv-a 71 etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv ii.961 (= 10X1000 Pv-a 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation kucchiyā pariharitvā Ja i.52 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 82

      • (B) (figuratively 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: genitive 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matechnical term 25, 1) divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv i.6
      • (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin i.83), cp. Exod 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata-balāni; with reference to the Buddha ‣See Vin i.38 & cp. ; Vinaya Texts i.141 sq.; dasah’ angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10 Kh iii. dasahi asaddhammehi sam˚ kāko Ja iii.127–⁠10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. DN iii.146 SN v.275 Pv-a 9 opposite 10 afflictions as punishment (cp 10 plagues Exod. 7
      1. -11): dasannaṁ aññataraṁ ṭhānaṁ nigacchati Dhp 137 (= das. dukkha-kāraṇānaṁ, enumerated v.138, 139) “afflicted with one of the 10 plagues” cp. Dhp-a iii.70
      1. -10 good gifts to the bhikkhu ‣See deyyadhamma Nd2 523 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 10 rules for the king Pv-a 161 -dividing the Empire into 10 parts: Pv-a 111 etc. vassa-dasa a decade: das’ ev’ imā vassa-dasā Ja iv.396 (enumerated under vassa); dasa-rāja-dhammā Ja ii.367 das’ akkosa-vatthūni Dhp-a i.212
      • See on similar sets. AN v.1
      1. -310 DN iii.266
      1. -271
      • a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space) (a); personal, often meaning “all” (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro Ja i.307 dasa bhātikā Pv-a 111 dasa-kaññā-sahassa-parivārā Pv-a 210 etc. (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10 = many times, S.B.English 43, 3) dasa-yojanika consisting of a good many miles Dhp-a iii.291 dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto (“for ever and aye”) Pv-a 76 etc

      -kkhattuṁ Sanskrit ˚kṛtvah

      1. ten times Dhp-a i.388
      • ˚pada
      • neuter a draught-board (with 10 squares on each side) a pre-Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board DN i.6 Vin ii.10 = iii.180 (˚e kīḷanti) DN-a i.85
      • ˚bala, Sanskrit daśabala
        1. endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, epithet of the Buddhas, especially of Kassapa Buddha Vin i.38 = J i.84 SN ii.27 Vism 193, 391 Dhp-a i.14 Vv-a 148 206, etc
        2. ˚vidha tenfold Dhp-a i.398
        • ˚sata ten times a hundred Vin i.38 (˚parivāro) Snp 179 (yakkhā) Dhs-a 198 (˚nayano)
        • ˚sahassa ten times a thousand (frequently); ˚ī in dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu Vin i.12 ‣See lokadhātu
        Sanskrit daśa = Avestan dasa, Latin decem, Gothic taíhun, Old Irish deich, Anglo-Saxon tīen, Old High German zehan from *dekm̊, a compound of dv + km̊ = "two hands”
    Dasa2

    (—˚)

    1. ‣Seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood DN i.18 (aññadatthu˚ sureseeing all-perceiving = sabbaṁ passāmī ti attho DN-a i.111) Snp 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda˚), 733 (sammad˚) Ja i.506 (yugamatta˚; variant reading dassa)
    • duddasa difficult to be seen or understood DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d ‣See gambhīra) MN i.167 MN i.487 Snp 938 Dhp 252 also as sududdasa Dhp 36
    Sanskrit dṛśa; cp. dassa
    Dasaka

    neuter

  • a decad, decade, a decennial Ja iv.397 Dhs-a 316

    • khiḍḍā˚ the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu etc. sense-decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya˚ Vism. 588.

  • Dasana
    1. a tooth Dāvs v.3 (d.dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha)
    Sanskrit daśana to ḍasati
    Dasā
    feminine & dasa;
    • neuter

      1. unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment DN i.7 (dīgha˚ long-fringed, of vatthāni) Ja v.187 Dhp-a i.180 iv.106 (dasāni)
      • sadasa
      • neuter a kind of seat, a rug (literally with a fringe) Vin iv.171 (= nisīdana); opposite adasaka
      • adjective without a fringe or border Vin ii.301 = 307 (nisīdana)
      • ˚anta edge of the border of a garment Ja i.467 Dhp-a i.180f. 391
      Sanskrit daśā
    Dasika1
    adjective (—˚)
    1. to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud˚; or frightful a past participle, fierce, ugly Si.94 & identical passage (q.v. under okoṭimaka) Ja i.504 (kodha, anger) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 90 (of Petas)-Note. The spelling is sometimes ˚dassika : AN ii.85 Pug 51 Pv-a 90
    2. Sanskrit dṛśika, cp. dassin
    Dasika2
    adjective
    1. belonging to a fringe, in dasika -sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241 Dhp-a iv.206 (˚mattam pi not even a thread, i.e. nothing at all, cp. Latin nihīlum = ne-fīlum not a thread = nothing) ‣See also dasaka under dasā
    from dasā
    Dassa

    (—˚)

    1. to ‣See or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Snp 1134 (appa˚ of small sight, not ‣Seeing far, knowing little = paritta-dassa thoka-dassa Nd2 69). cp. akkha˚ a judge Mil 114
    • ˚su˚ easily perceived (opposite duddasa) Dhp 252
    Sanskrit darśa; cp. dasa2
    *Dassati1
    1. to ‣See, to perceive

    1. (pres.) base dakkh Sanskrit drakṣ

    1. : pres. (a) dakkhati Nd2 428 (= passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (= passāmi) 2nd dakkhasi SN i.116 Pv ii.113 (Burmese variant adakkhi) imperative dakkha Nd2 428 (= passa)

      • (b) dakkhiti Snp 909 (Burmese variant dakkhati), 3rd
      • plural dakkhinti Vin i.16≈Sn p. 15 (Burmese variant dakkhanti) DN i.46
      • aorist addakkhi (Sanskrit adrakṣīt) Vin ii.195 SN i.117 Snp 208 (= addasa Snp-a 257), 841, 1131 Iti 47 Ja iii.189 & dakkhi Iti 47 1st singular addakkhiṁ Snp 938 Spelling also adakkhi (Burmese variant at Pv ii.113) & adakkhiṁ (Nd; 2 423)
      • infinitive dakkhituṁ Vin i.179
      • causative p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Mil 119
      • Derived dakkhin (q.v.)
      1. 2. (preterite) base dass (Sanskrit darś & draś): aorist (a); addasa (Sanskrit adarśat) Snp 358 Snp 679 Snp 1016 Ja i.222 Ja iv.2 Pv ii.323 (mā addasa = addakkhiṁ Pv-a 88) Dhp-a i.26 Pv-a 73 & (older, cp. agamā); addasā Vin ii.192 195 DN i.112 ii.16 Snp 409 (Burmese variant addasa), 910 (identical) Mil 24 Mil 1st singular addasaṁ SN i.101 Nd2 423 & addasaṁ Snp 837 (= adakkhiṁ Nd1 185), 1st
      2. plural addasāma Snp 31 Snp 178 Snp 459 Snp 3rd
      3. plural (mā) addasuṁ Pv ii.76 (= mā passiṁsu Pv-a 102). (b) addasāsi, 1st singular addasāsiṁ Snp 937 Snp 1145 Vv 3552 (variant reading addasāmi), 3rd
      4. plural addasāsuṁ Vin ii.195 DN ii.16 MN i.153

        • (c) shortened forms of
        • aorist are: adda Thag 1 986; addā Ja vi.125 Ja vi.126
        • infinitive daṭṭhuṁ Snp 685 (daṭṭhukāma) Ja i.290 Pv iv.13 (= passituṁ Pv-a 219) Pv-a 48 Pv-a 79 Vv-a 75
        • absolutive daṭṭhu (= Sanskrit dṛṣṭvā) Snp 424 (in phrase nekkhammaṁ daṭṭhu khemato) = 1098; 681 Ex
        • plural at Nd2 292 with ex
        • plural of disvā = passitvā, etc.
        • gerundive daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) DN ii.154 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya ‣See sep.. Also in
        • causative ‣See below & in daṭṭhar (q.v.)
        1. 3. (med
        • pass.) base diss (Sanskrit dṛś): pres.
        • passive dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16 Snp 194 Snp 441 Snp 688 (dissare), 956 Ja i.138 Dhp 304 Pv i.84 Pv-a 61 (dissasi you look, intransitive); ppr. dissamāna (visible) Pv-a 71 Pv-a 6 (˚rūpa), 162 (identical) Vv-a 78 (˚kāya); Mhvs. vii.35, & der; dissamānatta
        • neuter (visibility) Pv-a 103
        • absolutive disvā Snp 48 Snp 409 Snp 687f. Iti 76 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 68, etc., & disvāna Vin i.15 Vin ii.195 Snp 299 Snp 415 Snp 1017 Pv ii.87, etc., also a
        • absolutive form diṭṭhā, q.v. under adiṭṭhā.
        • past participle diṭṭha (q.v.)
        1. 4. causative (of base 2) dasseti (Sanskrit darśayati), aorist dassesi & (exceptional); dassayi, only in dassayi tumaṁ showed himself at Pv iii.24 (= attānaṁ uddisayi Pv-a 181) & iii.216 (= attānaṁ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi Pv-a 185). 3rd
        2. plural dassesuṁ;
        3. absolutive dassetvā; infinitive dassetuṁ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dhp 83 Ja i.84 Ja i.200 Ja i.263 Ja i.266 Ja ii.128 Ja ii.159 iii.53, 82 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16 (ovādaṁ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc

          • to point to (
          • accusative ) Pv-a 151 (sunakhaṁ), 257 (dārakaṁ)
          • to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intransitive to appear Ja ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaṁ dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (= sammukhībhāvaṁ gacchanti Pv-a 181) Pv-a 13 (mitto viya attānaṁ dassetvā: acting like a friend) Mil 271 especially in phrase attānaṁ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): Pv-a 32 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 79, etc. (cp above dassayi).
          • past participle dassita
          Sanskrit *darś in dadarśa prefix to dṛś; causative darśayati. cp. Old Irish derc eye; Anglo-Saxon torht; Gothic ga-tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the
        4. aorist addakkhi = Sanskrit adrākṣīt The Sanskrit
        5. future draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the
        6. future ; whereas the
        7. causative dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc ‣See also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Note.
        8. past participle 57, 61 Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 554
    Dassati2
    1. future of dadāti, q.v
    Dassana
    neuter

    -1. Literally ‣Seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive “to ‣See,” especially as dative dassanāya in order to ‣See, for the purpose of ‣Seeing (cp. dassana-kāma = daṭṭhu-kāma): Bhagavantaṁ

    1. dassanāya MN ii.23 MN ii.46 AN i.121 AN iii.381 Snp 325
    • (a)
    • neuter “sight” DN ii.157 (visūka˚, looking on at spectacles) AN iii.202 (+ savana hearing); iv.25 sq. (bhikkhu˚) Snp 207 (muni˚, may be taken as 2, cp. Snp-a 256), 266 (= pekkhaṇa Kp-a 148) Dhp 206 (ariyānaṁ d., cp. ariyānaṁ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaṁ), 274 Vv 342 Vv-a 138 (sippa˚ exhibition of art, competition). (b) adjective as (—˚) “of appearance” (cp. ˚dasa) Snp 548 (cāru˚ lovely to behold) Pv-a 24 (bhayānaka˚ fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha˚)
    • Appld. (power of perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view theory; especially (a) in combination ñāṇa-dassana either “knowing & ‣Seeing,” or perhaps “the insight arising from knowledge,” perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): SN i.52 SN ii.30 SN v.28 SN v.422 MN i.195f. 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba-dassāvī aparisesaṁ ñ-d ˚ṁ paṭijānāti; identical ii.31) DN iii.134 AN i.220 AN ii.220 AN iv.302f.; cp. ñ-d-paṭilābha AN i.43 ii.44 sq.; iii.323; ñ-d-visuddhi MN i.147f. Also with further determination as adhideva -ñ-d˚ AN iv.428
    • alam-ariya˚ SN iii.48 SN iv.300 SN v.126f. MN i.68 MN i.71 MN i.81 207, 246, 440 sq., AN i.9 AN iii.64 AN iii.430 AN v.88
    • parisuddha AN iii.125
    • maggāmagga˚ AN v.47
    • yathābhūta˚ AN iii.19 200; iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti˚ SN i.139 SN v.67 AN iii.12 AN iii.81 AN iii.134 AN iv.99 AN iv.336 AN v.130 Iti 107 108 Mil 338 ‣See also vimutti
    • (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna-dassana Snp 267 ujubhūta˚ SN v.384 SN v.404 dhamma˚ (the right doctrine) SN v.204 SN v.344 SN v.404 AN iii.263 pāpa˚ (a sinful view) Pv iv.355; viparīta AN iii.114 AN iv.226 AN v.284f. (and a˚), 293 sq. sammā (right view) SN iii.189 AN iii.138 AN iv.290 AN v.199 sabbalokena d. SN iv.127 sahetu d. SN v.126f.; suvisuddha d. SN iv.191
    • SN iii.28 SN iii.49 MN ii.46 MN iii.157 Snp 989 (wisdom: Jinānaṁ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line) Dhs 584 1002 (insight: cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 256).
    • adjective perceiving or having a view (cp dasseti) SN i.181 (visuddha˚) Thag 1, 422
    • (c) as nt. from the
    • causative dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication definition, statement (in Commentary style) Pv-a 72 often as ˚ākāra -dassana: Pv-a 26 (dātabba˚), 27 (thomana˚), 35 (kata˚) & in; dassanatthaṁ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. Pv-a 9 Pv-a 68

  • adassana not ‣Seeing SN i.168 = Sn 459; invisibility Ja iv.496 (˚ṁ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view. AN v.145f. Snp 206 Pug 21

    1. ˚anuttariya neuter the pre-eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni viz. d˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutta˚ at DN iii.219 DN iii.250 DN iii.281 AN iii.284 AN iii.325
    2. ˚kāma
    3. adjective desirous of ‣Seeing AN i.150 iv.115 Mil 23
    4. ˚bhūmi the level or plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50
    5. ˚sampanna endowed with right insight SN ii.43f. 58
    6. Sanskrit darśana ‣See dassati1
  • Dassanīya
    adjective
    1. fair to behold, beautiful good-looking (= dassituṁ yutta DN-a i.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: DN i.114 SN ii.279 Pv-a 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful DN i.47
    • Vin iv.18 SN i.95 Ja iii.394 Pug 52 66 DN-a i.281 Pv-a 44 (= subha), 51 (= rucira)
    • Comparative dassanīyatara SN i.237 Sdhp 325: Dhp-a i.119
    Sanskrit darśanīya; gerundive formation of dassana, also as dassaneyya
    Dassaneyya
    adjective = dassanīya Ja v.203 (bhusa˚).
    Dassāvitā
    feminine
    1. ‣Seeing, sight (—˚) Mil 140 (guṇavisesa˚)
    abstract to dassāvin
    Dassāvin
    adjective-noun
    1. full of insight ‣Seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combination with ˚ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term = knowing & ‣Seeing i.e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with “clear” sight or intuition ‣See jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa-dassana.; (a) As adjective
    • ˚ ‣Seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca SN iii.1 ādīnava˚ SN ii.194 SN iv.332 MN i.173 AN v.181f. pariyanta˚. AN v.50f.; bhaya˚ SN v.187: Iti 96 especially in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya˚ DN i.63 = It 118 (cp bhaya-dassin); lokavajjabhaya˚ SN i.138
    • sabba˚ (+ sabbaññū) MN i.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s˚ s˚); ii.31 Mil 74 (Buddho s˚ s˚); cp. Mvu iii.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra˚ Vin ii.139
    • (b) (n.) one who ‣Sees or takes notice of in phrase ariyānaṁ dassāvī (+ sappurisānaṁ dassāvī kovido) MN i.8 SN iii.4 opposite adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones SN iii.3 SN iii.113 MN iii.17 Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 350)
    Sanskrit *darśavant
    Dassika
    1. (—˚) ‣See dasika1
    Dassita1
    1. shown, exhibited, performed Vin iv.365 Ja i.330 cp. san˚
    Sanskrit darśita, past participle of dasseti1
    Dassita2
    1. at Ja vi.579 accord. to Kern (Toevoegselen p. 114) = Sanskrit daṁśita mailed, armed
    Dassin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. ‣Seeing, finding, realizing, perceiving. Only in compounds., like attha˚ Snp 385 ananta SN i.143 ādīnava˚ Sdhp 409; ekanga˚ Ud 69 jātikkhaya˚ Snp 209 Iti 40 ñāṇa˚ Snp 478 (= sacchikatasabbaññuta-ñāṇa Snp-a 411 cp. dassāvin); tīra˚ SN iii.164f. AN iii.368 cp. tīra-dakkhin; dīgha˚ (= sabbadassāvin) Pv-a 196 bhaya˚ Dhp 31 (˚dassivā = dassī vā?), 317 Iti 40 DN-a i.181 (= bhaya dassāvin); viveka Snp 474 Snp 851
      Sanskrit ˚darśin
    Dassimant
    1. ‣See attha˚
    Dassu
    1. enemy, foe; robber, in dassukhīla robber-plague DN i.135 DN i.136 (= corakhīla DN-a i.296)
    Sanskrit dasyu, cp. dāsa
    Dassetar
    1. one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher AN i.62 132 = It 110
    Sanskrit darśayitṛ, noun agent to dasseti
    Dasseti
    causative of dassati1 (q.v.)
    Dasso
    nominative
    • plural of dāsī.

    Daha
    1. a lake DN i.45 (udaka˚) Ja i.50 Ja ii.104 Ja v.412 Mil 259 Pv-a 152 Dīpavaṁsa i.44
    Sanskrit draha, through metathesis from hrada, hlād ‣See hilādate
    Dahati1
    (dahate)
    1. to put, place; take for (acc or ablative), assume, claim, consider DN i.92 (okkākaṁ pitāmahaṁ = ṭhapeti DN-a i.258) SN iii.113 (mittato daheyya) AN iv.239 (cittaṁ d. fix the mind on) Snp 825 (bālaṁ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṁ = passanti dakkhanti, etc Nd1 163). passive dhīyati (q.v.);
    2. gerundive dheyya (q.v.) Note. dahati is more frequent in combination with prefixes compositions like ā˚, upa˚, pari˚, sad˚, san˚, samā˚, etc
    3. past participle ; hita
    4. Sanskrit dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe = Latin facio, Old High German tuon, Anglo-Saxon dōn English to do ‣See also dhātu
    Dahati2
    1. = ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv ii.98 (= dahati vināseti Pv-a 116)
    Dahana
    1. fire Vism 338 (˚kicca) Thag-a 256 Dāvs v.6; Sdhp 20
    Sanskrit dahana, to dahati, originally “the burner”
    Dahara
    adjective
    1. small, little delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad DN i.80 DN i.115 SN i.131 SN ii.279 (daharo ce pi paññavā) MN i.82 MN ii.19 66 AN v.300 Snp 216 Snp 420 (yuvā +), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaṁ yanti) Ja i.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (˚itthī a young wife); ii.160, 353; iii.393 Dhp 382 Pv iv.150 (yuvā) Dhp-a i.397 (sāmaṇera) DN-a i.197 (bhikkhū), 223 (= taruṇa), 284 (identical) Pv-a 148 Vv-a 76 Thag-a 239 251 Opposed to mahallaka Ja iv.482 to vuḍḍha Vism 100. feminine daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+ yuvā Vv-a 129); daharī Ja iv.35 Ja v.521 Mil 48 (dārikā)
    2. Sanskrit dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive
    Daharaka
    1. = dahara, young Mil 310 feminine ˚ikā a young girl Thag 2, 464 483.

    Dāṭhā
    feminine
    1. a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adjective (—˚) having tusks or fangs DN ii.18 (susukkha˚) Ja i.505 (uddhaṭa-dāṭho viya sappo); iv.245 (nikkhanta˚) Dhp-a i.215 Pv-a 152 (kaṭhina˚); Sdhp 286

    -āvudha Sanskrit daṁṣṭrāyudha

    1. using a tusk as his weapon Ja v.172
    • ˚danta a canine tooth Kp-a 44
    • ˚balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Snp 72
    Sanskrit daṁṣṭrā to ḍasati (q.v.), cp. also daṭṭha
    Dāṭhikā
    feminine
    1. beard, whiskers Vin ii.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus) Ja i.305 Ja v.42 (tamba˚), 217 (mahā˚ having great whiskers) DN-a i.263 (parūḷha-massu˚ with beard whiskers grown long)
    Sanskrit *dāḍhikā = Prakrit for daṁṣṭrikā
    Dāṭhin
    adjective
    1. having tusks Ja ii.245 Ja iv.348 Thag 1, p. 1; Sdhp 286
    cp. Sanskrit daṁṣṭrin
    Dātar
    1. a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50
    • adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv ii.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) AN ii.203 Iti 65
    Sanskrit dāṭr, agent noun of dadāti to give; cp.
    Dātta
    neuter
    1. sickle, scythe Mil 33
    Sanskrit dātra, to , Sanskrit dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out ‣See dāna, dāpeti dāyati
    Dāna
    neuter
    1. a giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving liberality, munificence; especially a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaṁ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puññaṁ, sīlamaya p. bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence good character & meditation (D; iii.218 e.g. cp. cāga, puñña, sīla). Thus in formula dānâdīni puññāni katvā Ja i.168 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 105; cp. compounds. under ˚maya
    • b Special merit & importance is attached to the; mahādāna the great gift, i.e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajña the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas ‣See Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88
    • AN iv.246 Ja i.50 74; v.383 (devasikaṁ chasatasahassa-pariccāgaṁ karonto mahādānaṁ pavattesi “he gave the great largesse spending daily 600,000 pieces”) Pv-a 19 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 75 127, etc
    • c Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enum; d as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha-vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment conveniences for lying down & dwelliṅg, lightiṅg facility) AN iv.239 cp. Pv ii.49 & ‣See ˚vatthu & deyyadhamma; Eight ways of giving alms at DN iii.258 AN iv.236 five ways, called sappurisa-dāna (& asapp˚) at AN iii.171f.; eight sapp˚ at AN iv.243 Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1–⁠5 at AN iv.246 DN-a i.306 Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at AN iii.172 viz. saddhāya dānaṁ deti, sakkaccaṁ d.d. kālena (cp. kāladāna AN iii.41), anuggahitacitto, attānañ ca parañ ca anupahacca d.d
    • d Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin i.236 DN i.53 (+ dama & saṁyama; cp. Iti 15 Pv-a 276); ii.356 sq (sakkaccaṁ & a˚) AN iv.392f. (identical) DN iii.147f. 190 sq., 232 SN i.98 (dānaṁ dātabbaṁ yattha cittaṁ pasīdati) AN i.91 = It 98 (āmisa˚ and dhamma˚, material & spiritual gifts) AN i.161 AN iii.41 (dāne ānisaṁsā) iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (˚ssa vipāka) v.269 (petānaṁ upakappati) Ja i.8 (aggaḷa˚); ii.112 (dinna˚), iii.52 (identical) Snp 263 Snp 713 (appaṁ dānaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ) Pv-a 54 (āgantuka˚ gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211
    1. -213
    • adāna withholding a gift neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945 Mil 279 Pv-a 25 cp. ˚sīla under compounds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945 (cp. Pv-a 129) Mil 277

    -agga Sanskrit dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga ‣See Trenckner, Note. p. 56

    1. a house where alms or donations are given, a store-house of gifts, figuratively a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty Ja vi.487 Dhp-a i.152 189 Mil 2 Pv-a 121 Pv-a 124 Pv-a 127 Pv-a 141. A possible connection with agga = āgra is suggested by combination dānāni mahādānāni aggaññāni AN iv.246
    • ˚ādhikāra supervision or charge of alms-distributing. Pv-a 124 (cp. Pv ii.927) -ānisaṁsa praise of generosity Pv-a 9 cp. AN iii.41
    • ˚upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift Pv-a 105
    • ˚upapatti (read uppatti at DN iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned ‣See above c AN iv.239 = DN iii.258
    • ˚kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of almsgiving, one of the anupubbi-kathā Vin i.15 18
    • ˚dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) Pv-a 9
    • ˚pati “lord of alms,” master in liberality, a liberal donor (defined by Buddhaghosa as: yaṁ dānaṁ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DN-a i.298) DN i.137 (+ saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king) AN iii.39 AN iv.79 sq (+ saddho) Snp 487 Pv i.114 (+ amaccharin) Ja i.199 Mil 279f.; Sdhp 275 Sdhp 303
    • ˚puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality ‣See above a Pv-a 73
    • ˚phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) AN iii.39 AN iv.79 Pv ii.83 (˚ṁ hoti paramhi loke is rewarded in the life to come, cp. Iti 19) Pv-a 8 (cp Pv i.1)
    • ˚maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal ‣See above a DN iii.218 (puññakiriya-vatthu) Vb 135 (kusala-cetanā), 325 (pañña) Pv-a 8 (puñña), 60 (identical) 9 (kusala-kamma), 51, etc
    • ˚vaṭṭa alms Ja vi.333
    • ˚vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation DN iii.258 AN iv.236 Pv-a 20 (= annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu Pv-a 7)
    • ˚veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts Dhp-a iii.19
    • ˚saṁvibhāga liberal spending of alms DN iii.145 DN iii.169 AN i.150 AN i.226 AN iii.53 313; v.331 Iti 19 Vism 306; frequently with ˚rata fond of giving alms SN v.351 SN v.392 AN iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (identical)
    • ˚salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers Ja i.231 Ja i.262 Ja iv.402 (six); v.383 (identical)
    • ˚sīla liberal disposition Pv-a 89 usually as adāna-sīla
    • adjective of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Snp 244 Pv ii.83 (˚ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaṁ hoti paramhi loke) Pv-a 45 (= adāyaka), 59 (+ maccharin) 68 (identical)
    Vedic dāna, as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp. Latin damnum (English damages); Gr , Latin donum; also Anglo-Saxon tīd (= English tide, portion, i.e. of time), & tīma (= English time) ‣See further dadāti dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Def; n at Vism 60: dānaṁ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaṁ
    Dānava
    1. a kind of Asuras or Titans, the offspring of Danu Ja iii.527 Ja v.89 Mil 153 Dīpavaṁsa xvii.98
    Sanskrit dānava
    Dāni
    adverb
    1. now, Vin i.180 Vin ii.154 SN i.200 SN i.202 SN ii.123 SN iv.202 Ja ii.246 Mil 11 etc
    shortened form for idāni, q.v.
    Dāpana
    1. ‣See vo˚
    Dāpita
    1. given, sent Pv-a 6 Mhvs vii.26
    Sanskrit dāpayita past participle of dāpeti1
    Dāpeti1
    1. to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate Ja vi.485 Pv-a 46 aorist dāpesi Ja iv.138 Dhp-a i.226 393 (sent) Pv-a 5 (identical), 31
    2. future dāpessati Ja ii.3 Dhp-a 371. cp. ava˚
    3. Sanskrit dāpayati, dap from ‣See dadāti & dayati = deal out, spend, etc., cp. Latin daps (identical), damnum (expense from *dapnom) ‣See also dātta & dāna
    Dāpeti2
    1. to cause to run Ja ii.404
    Sanskrit drāvayati & drapayati, causative to; dru ‣See davati
    Dāma
    neuter
    1. a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland SN iv.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (identical) AN iii.393 (dāmena baddho) Snp 28 (= vacchakānaṁ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. Usually—˚, viz. anoja-puppha Ja i.9 Ja vi.227 olambaka˚ Vv-a 32 kusuma˚ Ja iii.394 gandha˚ Ja i.178 Vv-a 173 198; puppha˚ Ja i.397 Vv-a 198 mālā˚ Ja ii.104 rajata˚ Ja i.50 Ja iii.184 Ja iv.91 rattapuppha˚ Ja iii.30 sumana˚ Ja iv.455
    Sanskrit dāman to dyati to bind
    Dāya1
    wood jungle, forest; a grove Vin i.10 (miga˚), 15, 350; ii.138 SN ii.152 (tiṇa˚); iv.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d. = jungle). AN v.337 (tiṇa˚) Ja iii.274 Ja vi.278 ‣See also dāva.
    1. ˚pāla a grove keeper Vin i.350 MN i.205
    Sanskrit dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood = easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus dāvayati, cp. Pali dava; 1
    Dāya2
    1. a gift, donation; share, fee DN i.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king’s grant, cp. rājadattiya) Ja iv.138 Ja v.363 Ja vi.346 cp. dāyāda & brahmadeyya
    Sanskrit dāya, to dadāti, etc.
    Dāyaka
    adjective giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually—˚); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person MN i.236f. AN i.26 AN i.161 AN ii.64 AN ii.80 AN iii.32 AN iii.336 AN iv.81 Snp p. 87 Iti 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaṁ gacchanti dāyakā) Ja v.129 (kaṇḍa˚) Pv i.11f.; 12; 42; 55 DN-a i.298 Pv-a 113 (= dada) Mil 258 (˚ānaṁ dakkhiṇā); Sdhp 276
    • f dāyikā Vin ii.216 (bhikkhā˚), 289 (khīrassa)
    • adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv i.119
    • feminine ˚ikā Pv i.93
    Sanskrit dāyaka, as in dadāti & dāna
    Dāyajja
    neuter
    1. inheritance Vin i.82 DN iii.189 AN iii.43 Ja i.91 Vism 43 sq.; dowry Ja iii.8 adjective one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).

      1. ˚upasampadā, literally the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old Dhp-a; iv.137
      Sanskrit dāyādya ‣See dāyāda
    Dāyati
    1. to cut, mow, reap, causative dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed Dhp-a iii.285
    Sanskrit dāti & dyāti; (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna
    Dāyana
    neuter
    1. cutting; ˚agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) Dhp-a i.98
    • ˚atthaṁ for the purpose of mowing Dhp-a iii.285
    ‣See dayati
    Dāyāda
    1. heir MN i.86 = Nd2 199 SN i.69 SN i.90 SN iv.72 AN iii.72f. Ja iii.181 Ja vi.151 Kh viii.5. Often figuratively with kamma˚; one who inherits his own deeds ‣See kamma 3 AN b & compounds.: MN i.390f. AN v.289 & as; dhamma˚; (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa (material h.): MN i.12 Iti 101 also as dhamma˚ DN iii.84 as brahma˚ MN ii.84 DN iii.83
    • adāyāda not having an heir SN i.69 Ja v.267 ‣See dāyajja & dāyādaka
    Sanskrit dāyāda = dāya + ā-da receiving the (son’s) portion, same formation on ground of sam̊e idea as Latin heres = *ghero + ē-do receiver of what is left ‣See Brugmann Album Kern p. 29 sq.
    Dāyādaka
    1. heir MN ii.73 Thag 1, 781 1142; feminine ˚ikā Thag 2, 327 (= dāyajjarahā Thag-a 234)
    2. = dāyāda
    Dāyika
    adjective = dāyaka Pv-a 157 Sdhp 211 Sdhp 229. -Dayin
    -Dāyin
    adjective
    1. giving, granting, bestowing Pv-a 121 (icchit’ icchita˚), 157 (= [kāma dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga˚). Dara & Dara
    Sanskrit dāyin, of dadāti
    Dāra
    Dārā
    feminine
    1. a young woman, especially married woman, wife. As; dārā feminine at Nd2 295 (d. vuccati bhariyā & Iti 36
    2. feminine also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115 Otherwise as dāra (coll-masc.): Dhp 345 Ja i.120 Ja ii.248 iv.7; v.104, 288 Vv-a 299 (˚paṭiggaha)

      • putta-dārā (
      • plural ) wife & children Snp 108 Snp 262 Ja i.262 cp. saputtadāra with with & ch. Pv; iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Snp 38 Snp 123 frequently in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha AN iii.348 AN v.138 Snp 108 (a˚); Pv.177, etc-paradāra the wife of another MN i.404f. Dhp 246 Dhp 309 Snp 396 (parassa d.) Pv-a 261
      Sanskrit dāra masculine & dārā
    3. feminine, more frequently dārā (m.
    4. plural ); instrumental singular dārena Ja iv.7 Pv iv.177, etc. instr, plural dārehi Snp 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), locative plural dāresu Snp 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), originally “wives, womenfolk,” female members of the household; cp. also origin of German frauenzimmer & English womanhood). Remnants of
    5. plural use are seen in above passage. from Sn.
    Dāra
    Dārā
    feminine
    1. a young woman, especially married woman, wife. As dārā feminine at Nd2 295 (d. vuccati bhariyā & Iti 36
    2. feminine also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115 Otherwise as dāra (coll-masc.): Dhp 345 Ja i.120 Ja ii.248 iv.7; v.104, 288 Vv-a 299 (˚paṭiggaha)

      • putta-dārā (
      • plural ) wife & children Snp 108 Snp 262 Ja i.262 cp. saputtadāra with with & ch. Pv; iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Snp 38 Snp 123 frequently in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha AN iii.348 AN v.138 Snp 108 (a˚); Pv.177, etc-paradāra the wife of another MN i.404f. Dhp 246 Dhp 309 Snp 396 (parassa d.) Pv-a 261
      Sanskrit dāra masculine & dārā
    3. feminine, more frequently dārā (m.
    4. plural ); instrumental singular dārena Ja iv.7 Pv iv.177, etc. instr, plural dārehi Snp 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), locative plural dāresu Snp 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), originally “wives, womenfolk,” female members of the household; cp. also origin of German frauenzimmer & English womanhood). Remnants of
    5. plural use are seen in above passage. from Sn.
    Dāraka
    1. a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. feminine dārikā girl ‣See next Vin i.83 Ja i.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); ii.127; vi.336 Pv i.127 (= bāla˚ Pv-a 65) Dhp-a i.99 (yasa˚ = yasa-kulaputta) Mil 8 Mil 9 Pv-a 176-frequently as gāmadārakā (
    2. plural ) the village-boys, streeturchins Ja ii.78 Ja ii.176 Ja iii.275

      1. ˚tikicchā the art of infant-healing DN i.12 (= komārabhacca-vejjakamma DN-a i.98)
      Sanskrit dāraka, cp. dāra
    Dārikā
    feminine
    1. a young girl, daughter Ja iii.172 Ja vi.364 Mil 48 Mil 151 Pv-a 16 (daughter), 55 67, 68
    Sanskrit dārikā ‣See dāraka
    Dāru
    neuter
    1. wood, piece of wood; plural woodwork, sticks AN i.112 Iti 71 Dhp 80 Ja ii.102 Ja iii.54 Ja vi.366 Dhp-a i.393 Pv-a 76 (candana˚) 141.

      1. ˚kuṭikā a hut, log-house Vin iii.43
      • ˚kkhandha pile of wood Pv-a 62
      • ˚gaha a wood yard Vin iii.42f. -ghaṭika wooden pitcher Thag-a 286
      • ˚cīriya “woodbarked” Np, Dhp-a ii.35
      • ˚ja made of wood SN i.77 Dhp 345
      • ˚dāha the burning of wood SN i.169
      • ˚dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin iii.36 126
      • ˚patta a wooden bowl Vin ii.112 143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms DN i.157 DN iii.22 DN-a i.319
      • pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin ii.143
      • ˚bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin ii.143 (specified), 170, 211
      • ˚maṇḍalika a wooden disk Dhp-a iii.180
      • ˚maya wooden Vv-a 8 Dhp-a i.192
      • ˚yanta a wooden machine Vism 595 -saṅghāta (-yāna) “a vehicle constructed of wood, i.e. a boat Ja v.194
      • ˚samādahāna putting pieces of wood together SN i.169
      Sanskrit dāru, *dereṷo (oak) tree; cp. Avestan dāuru (wood) Latin larix (fr *dārix) = larch; Old Irish daur (oak); Gothic triu, Anglo-Saxon treo tree. Also Sanskrit dāruṇa, Latin dūrus (hard) etc., Old Irish dru strong ‣See also dabba2, dabbī & duma
    Dāruka
    1. (cp. dāru] a log SN i.202 = Th 1, 62 = Dhp-a iii.460 adjective made of wood Thag 2. 390 (˚cillaka, a wooden post ‣See Thag-a 257)
    Dāruṇa
    adjective
    1. strong, firm, severe harsh, cruel, pitiless SN i.101 SN ii.226 Snp 244 Dhp 139 Ja iii.34 Pv iv.36 (= ghora Pv-a 251) Mil 117 (vāta) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 52 (= ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath ghora), 181 (= kurūrin), 221 (˚kāraṇa); Sdhp 5 Sdhp 78 Sdhp 286
    Vedic dāruṇa, to dāru (“strong as a tree”), cp. Latin dūrus; Old Irish dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Anglo-Saxon trum
    Dālana
    1. ‣See vi˚. Dalika & Dalima;
    feminine dalati
    Dālikā
    Dālima;
    1. in; ˚laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Thag 2, 297 (dālikā) = Thag-a 226 (dālikā & dālima)
    Sanskrit dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree
    Dāḷiddiya
    1. (& daḷiddiya) neuter

      1. poverty DN iii.65 DN iii.66 AN iii.351f. Ja i.228 Dāvs ii.60; Sdhp 78
      Sanskrit *dāridrya
    Dāleti
    1. ‣See dalati
    Dāva
    1. in ˚aggi a jungle-fire Ja i.213 Ja iii.140 Vism 470 Dhp-a i.281
    Sanskrit dāva ‣See dava1 & daya; 1
    Dāvika
    adjective in piṇḍa˚, a certain rank in the army (variant reading piṇḍa-dāyika) DN i.51 = Mil 331 (DN-a i.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā etc., with popular ex
    • plural of the terms piṇḍa & davayati).

    Dāsa
    1. a slave, often combined with feminine dāsī. Defined by Buddhaghosa as “antojāto” (DN-a i.300), or as “antojātadhanakkīta-karamarânīta-sāmaṁ dāsabyaṁ upagatānaṁ aññataro” (ibid. 168)

      • In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā “slaves & labourers” Vin i.243 272; ii.154; as dāso kammakaro “a slave-servant” DN i.60 (cp. d. kammakara)
      • Vin i.72 76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo the slave cannot become a bhikkhu) DN i.72 MN ii.68 (figuratively taṇhā˚) Ja i.200 Ja i.223 Ja iii.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347 Pug 56 Pv-a 112
      1. ˚kammakara (porisa) a slave-servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin i.240 AN i.206 DN iii.189 Dhp-a iv.1
      • ˚gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv iv.141
      • ˚purisa a servant Ja i.385
      • ˚porisa a servant, slave Snp 769 (cp. Nd1 11 where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned)
      • ˚lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves DN i.9
      Vedic dāsa; originally adjective meaning “non-Aryan,” i.e. slave (cp. German sklave = slave); Avestan dāha a Scythian tribe. Also connected with dasyu ‣See dassukhīla
    Dāsaka
    1. = dāsa in ˚putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp’ āyatanas at DN i.51 (ex plural by Buddhaghosa as balavasinehā-gharadāsa-yodhā DN-a i.157)

      • sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324
      • feminine dāsikā a female slave (= dāsī) MN i.126 Ja vi.554
    Dāsabyatā
    feminine = dāsavya Sdhp 498. Dasavya & Dasabya;
    Dāsavya
    Dāsabya;
    neuter
    1. the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom DN i.73 MN i.275 (b) Ja i.226 DN-a i.168 (b), 213 Dhp-a iii.35 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 152
    cp. Sanskrit dāsya
    Dāsitta
    neuter
    1. the status of a (female) slave Mil 158
    Sanskrit dāsītva
    Dāsima
    1. a species of tree Ja vi.536
    Dāsiyā
    1. = dāsikā, a female slave Ja vi.554
    Dāsī
    feminine
    1. a female servant, a handmaiden a slave-girl Vin i.217 269, 291; ii.10 (kula˚), 78 iii.161 MN i.125 MN ii.62 (ñāti˚); Pv ii.321 (ghara˚) Pv-a 46 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 65
    • cp. kumbha˚
    1. ˚gaṇa a troop of slave-girls Ja ii.127
    • ˚dāsā (
    • plural ) maid& man-servants Dhp-a; i.187; frequently to compound d-d-paṭiggahaṇa slave-trading DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.78)
    • ˚putta the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dhp i.257; cp. Sanskrit dāsīsuta) DN i.93 (˚vāda)
    • ˚bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin iii.136
    Sanskrit dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. plural dasso for dāsiyo Ja iv.53 in compounds. dāsi˚
    Dāha
    1. ‣See ḍāha
    Di˚
    1. ; secondary base of numeral “2,” contracted from dvi ‣See under dvi B i.4
    Dikkhita
    1. initiated, consecrated, cira˚ initiated long since SN i.226 = J v.138, 139 (where dakkhita q.v.; Commentary cira-pabbājita)
    Sanskrit dīkṣita “having commenced the preparatory rites for sacrifice”
    Digucchā
    feminine
    1. disgust Dhs-a 210 (asuci˚)
    = jigucchā; Sanskrit jugupsā
    Dighacchā
    feminine
    1. hunger AN ii.117
    = jighacchā
    Dighañña
    adjective
    1. inferior, low, last, hindmost (i.e. westward) Ja v.24 (where the Commentary seems to imply a reading jighacchaṁ with meaning of 1st singular pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (˚rattiṁ at the end of the night)
    for jighañña = Sanskrit jaghanya from janghā
    Dicchati
    1. to wish to give, to be desirous of giving SN i.18 SN i.20 (dicchare 3rd plural ) Ja iv.64
    2. Sanskrit ditsati, Desidentical from dadāti, base 4, q.v.
    Dija
    1. ‣See under dvi B i.4
    Diṭṭha1
    1. seen; a˚ not seen DN i.222 (a˚ + avedita asacchikata) MN i.3f. (diṭṭhaṁ diṭṭhato sañjānāti) Snp 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā) 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto … Satthā) Ja ii.154 Ja iii.278 Pv i.23 (sāmaṁ d. = seen by yourself) 33 (identical)
    2. nt. diṭṭhaṁ a vision Ja iii.416
    3. Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any sense-impression, & diṭṭha combined with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell taste & touch), to which; viññāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition Thus; diṭṭha + suta stands collectively for the whole series Snp 778 Snp 812 Snp 897 Snp 1079 Pv iv.13; diṭṭha suta muta ‣See Nd2 298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena Snp 790 Snp 901 Snp 914 Snp 1082 Snp 1086 Snp 1122 (na tuyhaṁ adiṭṭhaṁ asutaṁ amutaṁ kiñcanaṁ atthi = you are omniscient); d. suta muta viññāta in the same sense as Snp 1122 in “yaṁ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v. sabbaṁ taṁ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṁ” of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd2 276 Iti 121 DN iii.232 Snp 1086 Snp 1122
    4. known, understood MN i.486 Snp 761 diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved Ja vi.532 ‣See also conclusion of No. 1
      • adjective visible, determined by sight, in connection with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opposite samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in compounds. (—˚) of this world, in this world

        • diṭṭhadhamma Vin ii.188 DN iii.222f. AN i.249 AN ii.61 Nd2 297 (= ñātadhamma) DN-a i.278 Sdhp 470
        • ˚abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth AN i.142 Snp 1087 ‣See Nibbāna ˚nibbāna earthly name DN i.36 DN-a i.121 ˚sukhavihāra (& ˚in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin ii.188 MN i.40 MN i.331 MN i.459 SN ii.239 Dhs 577 1283 Dhs-a 296 ˚vedanīya to be perceived in this condition AN i.249 AN i.251 Pv-a 145
        • frequently in
        • locative diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) Iti 17 (attha, opposite samparāyika attha) or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) DN i.156 DN i.167 DN i.177 DN i.196 DN iii.108 MN i.341f. 485; ii.94, 103 AN ii.155 AN ii.167 AN iii.429 Snp 141 Snp 343 Snp 1053 Iti 22 23, etc
        • In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika
        • adjective belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a
        • future state: Vin i.179 Vin iii.21 DN iii.130 AN i.47 AN i.98 Nd2 26 Iti 16 Vv-a 149 Pv-a 131 etc
        1. ˚ānugati imitation of what one ‣Sees, emulation, competition SN ii.203 MN i.16 AN i.126 AN iii.108 AN iii.251 AN iii.422 Pug 33 Dhp-a iv.39
        • ˚āvikamma making visible or clear open statement, confession Vin v.183 187 sq
        • ˚kāla the time of ‣Seeing (anybody), opportunity Vv-a 120
        • ˚ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Nett 190
        • ˚padā (
        • plural ) visible signs or characteristics AN iv.103
        • ˚maṅgalika
        • adjective of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. Ja iv.390 as ˚ikā
        • feminine Np at Ja iv.376f. Snp-a 185f. -saṁsandana Nd2 447 = Dhs-a 55
        Sanskrit dṛṣṭa, past participle of *dassati
    Diṭṭha2
    1. (n.) an enemy Ja i.280 cp. Sanskrit dviṣat. adjective poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow SN ii.230 misreading for diddh-agadena, q.v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with variant reading dibba-gadena
    2. Sanskrit dviṣṭa, past participle of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate
    Diṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. seen, visible, apparent Dhp-a ii.53 90
    = diṭṭha1
    Diṭṭhā
    indeclinable
    1. exclamation of joy, hurrah! DN iii.73 Ja i.362
    Sanskrit dṛṣṭyā, instrumental of diṭṭhi
    Diṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, especially false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion
    • (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa˚; (AN iv.172) and pāpikā d. (opp bhaddikā:. AN v.212f. Iti 26): Vin i.98 323 Dhp 164 Pv iv.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d is opposed to micchā d. wrong views or heresy ‣See b Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs ii.58
    • (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10 SN ii.17 SN v.11 SN v.14 SN v.30f. 458 sq., MN i.315 MN ii.12 MN ii.29 MN ii.87 iii.72 Nd2 485 Vb 104f. ‣See magga
    • ujukā d SN v.143 SN v.165
    • ujugatā d. MN i.46 sq
    • () micchā d wrong theory, false doctrine SN i.145 SN ii.153 (caused by avijjā) MN iii.71 Dhp 167 Dhp 316 Nd2 271iiib Vb 361 389
    • The following theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumeration) akiriyavāda SN iii.208 SN iv.349
    • aññaṁ aññena SN iii.211
    • antaggāhikā AN i.154 AN ii.240 AN iii.130
    • antānantikā DN i.22f. SN iii.214 SN iii.258f.; assāda˚ AN iii.447
    • ahetukavādā SN iii.210
    • ucchedavādā DN i.34 SN ii.20 SN iii.99 SN iii.110 sq.; bhava˚ SN iii.93 MN i.65 AN i.83
    • sakkāya˚ AN iii.438 AN v.144 Snp 231 (cp. Kp-a 188) Nd2 271iiib (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā DN i.13 SN ii.20 SN iii.98 SN iii.213f. 258 sq
    • (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin i.115 SN i.133 SN ii.61f. 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.; iv.286; v.448 (= DN i.31) DN iii.13f. 45, 246, 267 MN i.40 AN i.32 AN ii.252f. iii.132, 289, 349 Thag 2, 184 Ps i.135 sq. Pug 22 Dhs 392 1003 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation
    • past participle 257 sq., 293, 325) Vb 145 245, 341, 393 sq.; Sdhp 13 Sdhp 333
    • (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vb 376 also at Vism 511 (sakkāya˚, uccheda˚, sassata˚, akiriya˚); 5 Vb 378 6 at MN i.8 Vb 382 7 at Vb 383 20 ‣See under sakkāya˚; 62 under diṭṭhigata
    • In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing “diṭṭhadhamma” at Nd2 299 & passim Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena in definition of a theory of cognition at Nd; 2 300 as complementing taṇhā ‣See taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taṁ) vācaṁ appahāya cittaṁ appahāya diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā … (nikkhitto evaṁ niraye) at SN iv.319 DN iii.13 DN iii.15 combined with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at Iti 26 27
    • diṭṭhiṁ āsevati to hold a view MN i.323 ˚ṁ bhindati to give up a view Ja i.273 Dāvs ii.58
    1. ˚ānugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108 SN ii.203 Pug 33
    • ˚ānusaya inclination to speculation DN iii.254 282 SN v.60 AN iv.9
    • ˚āsava the intoxicant of speculation the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, d.˚ avijjā˚ Vin iii.5 Nd2 134 Dhs 1099 1448 Vb 373 cp. ˚ogha
    • ˚upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments viz. kāma˚, d.˚, sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ DN iii.230 Dhs 1215 1536
    • ˚ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha’s as under ˚āsava DN iii.230 DN iii.276 Nd2 178
    • ˚kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381 1003, 1099, etc. ‣See ˚gata
    • ˚gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism Vv-a 297 cp. ˚sanghāṭa
    • ˚gata
    • neuter “resorting to views,” theory, groundless opinion false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d

      • gahana, ˚kantāra, ˚visūka, ˚vipphandita ˚saññojana, e.g. MN i.8 Nd2 271iiib. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at Iti 43 Ps i.129 6 at Ps i.130; 62 (the usual number, expressing “great and small” sets, cp. dvi AN ii.) at DN i.12–⁠39 (in detail) SN iv.286 Ps i.130 Nd2 271iiib; Nett 96, 112, 160. Vin i.49 DN i.162 DN i.224 DN i.226 SN i.135 SN i.142 SN ii.230 SN iii.109 SN iii.258 sq. (anekavihitāni); iv.286 (identical) MN i.8 MN i.176 MN i.256f. (pāpaka), 326 (identical), 426 sq. AN iv.68 AN v.72f. 194 (pāpaka) Snp 649 Snp 834 Snp 913 Pug 15 Dhs 277 339, 392 505; Vism 454
      • adjective ˚gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dīpavaṁsa vi.25
      • ˚gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381 1003 ‣See ˚gata
      • ˚jāla the net of sophistry DN i.46 DN-a i.129
      • ˚ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy DN i.16 MN i.136 AN v.198 Ps i.138 (eight) Mil 332 DN-a i.107
      • ˚nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views SN ii.115 SN iv.139 AN i.189f.; ii.191 Nd2 151
      • ˚nipāta a glance Vv-a 279
      • ˚nissaya the foundation of speculation MN i.137 DN ii.137f.
      • ˚pakkha the side or party of sophists Nett 53, 88, 160
      • ˚paṭilābha the attainment of speculation MN iii.46
      • ˚paṭivedha = prec DN iii.253
      • ˚patta one who has formed (a right or wrong view DN iii.105 DN iii.254 MN i.439 AN i.74 118, iv.10; v.23 -parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498
      • ˚maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics Dhs-a 109
      • ˚vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla˚, ācāra˚, d.˚, ājīva˚; opposite ˚sampadā Vin v.98 DN iii.213 AN i.95 AN i.268 Pug 21 Dhs 1362 Vb 361
      • ˚vipallāsa contortion of views AN ii.52
      • ˚visaṁyoga disconnection with false doctrine DN iii.230 DN iii.276
      • ˚visuddhi beauty of right theory AN i.95 MN i.147f. DN iii.214 288
      • ˚visūka
      • neuter the discord or disunion (literally the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppet-show of opinion MN i.8 MN i.486 Snp 55 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S ii.44 Vv 8426 Pv iv.137 Nd2 301 (= vīsati-vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd2 25 (attānudiṭṭhi) Dhs 381 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 101), 1003, 1099 ‣See also ˚gata
      • ˚vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+ sīla˚, in character) DN iii.235 Nd2 304
      • ˚saṁyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. ˚anusaya) DN iii.254 AN iv.7f.
      • ˚saṅghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. ˚gaṇṭhi) Nd1 343 Nd2 503
      • ˚samudaya the origin of wrong views AN iv.68
      • ˚sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views attainment of truth DN iii.213 235 (opposite ˚vipatti), SN v.30f. AN i.95 AN i.269 AN iii.438 AN iv.238 Pug 25 Dhs 1364 Vv-a 297
      • ˚sampanna endowed with right views SN ii.43 SN ii.58 SN ii.80 SN v.11 AN iii.438f.; iv.394 Vb 366 Dialogues of the Buddha iii.206, n. 10
      • ˚sārin
      • adjective following wrong views Snp 911
      Sanskrit dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana
    Diṭṭhika
    adjective (—˚) ‣Seeing, one who regards; one who has a view MN iii.24 (āgamana˚ one who views the arrival i.e. of guests) SN ii.168f. (sammā˚ & micchā˚ hoḷding right & wrong theories) DN iii.96 (vītimissa˚) ‣See añña˚, micchā˚, sammā˚.
    Diṭṭhitā
    feminine
    1. the fact of having a (straightforward) view (uju˚) Mil 257
    from diṭṭhi
    Diṭṭhin
    adjective-noun one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaṁ˚ + evaṁ vādin).
    Diṇṇa
    1. broken, split, undone, torn, as negative adiṇṇa unbroken DN i.115 (so read for ādina-khattiya-kula; Burmese variant abhinna˚) SN v.74 (so read for ādīna-mānaso, Burmese variant adinā & SS ādina˚) cp. also; ādiṇṇa
    Sanskrit dīrṇa, past participle of dṛ; , dṛṇāti ‣See darī
    Ditta1
    1. blazing. Dāvs v.32. Usually in compound āditta
    Sanskrit dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa
    Ditta2
    1. proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Thag 1, 198 Ja ii.432 Ja iii.256 = 485; v.17, 232 vi.90, 114
    Sanskrit dṛpta; cp. dappa
    Diddha
    1. smeared Ja v.425f.; especially smeared with poison, poisoned Ja iv.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at Iti 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at SN ii.230 for diṭṭha cp. san˚
    Sanskrit digdha to dih ‣See deha
    Dina
    neuter
    1. day Sdhp 239
    • ˚duddinaṁ darkness Dāvs v.50 (d. sudinaṁ ahosi, cp. i.49, 51); also as
    • feminine duddinī Vin i.3
    Sanskrit dina; Latin nun-dinae (*noven-dinom); Old Irish denus; Gothic sin-teins; cp. divasa
    Dindibha
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.538
    cp. Sanskrit ṭiṭṭibha?
    Dindima
    neuter
    1. a musical instrument, a small drum Ja vi.580 Bu i.32 ‣See also deṇḍima
    Sanskrit ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi
    Dinna
    1. given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q.v.; especially of giving alms Pv iv.326 (= mahādāna Pv-a 253) & in phrase adinn'ādāna taking what is not given, i.e. stealing, adj adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla ‣See under sīla
    • ; dinna : DN i.55≈(n’ atthi dinnaṁ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving) Ja i.291 Ja ii.128 Snp 191 Snp 227 Snp 240 Dhp 356 Pv-a 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense frequently e.g. Ja i.151 Ja i.152 Ja vi.366
    • adinna : MN i.39 MN i.404 Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṁ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633 Pv-a 33 etc
    1. ˚ādāyin taking (only) what is given DN i.4 DN-a i.72
    • ˚dāna almsgiving Ja iii.52 Dhp-a i.396
    • ˚dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent DN iii.191
    Sanskrit dinna, past participle of dadāti
    Dinnaka
    1. an adopted son, in enumeration of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd2 448 Ja i.135 (= posāvanatthāya dinna)
    Dippati
    1. to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin ii.285 cp. pa˚
    Sanskrit dīpyate ‣See under dīpa1 & cp. jotati
    Dibba
    adjective [Vedic divya = Pali divya in verse (q.v.), Latin dīus (*divios) = divine. cp. deva of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opposite mānusaka human. Frequently qualifying the following “summa bona” cakkhu the deva-eye, i.e. the faculty of clairvoyance attribute in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings ‣See cakkhumant DN i.82, 162; ii.20 (yena sudaṁ samantā yojanaṁ passati divā c’ eva rattiñ ca); iii.219 SN i.196 SN ii.55f. MN ii.21 Iti 52 Thag 2, 70 Ps i.114 ii.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482 Pv-a 5 (of Moggallāna) Tika-Paṭṭhāna 278; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye DN i.79 DN i.154 Ja v.456 also as sotadhātu AN i.255 MN ii.19 DN iii.38 DN iii.281 Vism 430. rūpa DN i.153
    • Āyu, vaṇṇa etc ‣See dasa ṭhānāni AN i.115 AN iii.33 AN iv.242 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 89. kāmā Snp 361 Dhp 187 Iti 94 also as kāmaguṇā. AN v.273 Of food, drink, dress & other commodities AN i.182 Ja i.50 Ja i.202 Ja iii.189 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 70 Pv-a 76 etc. Defined as devaloke sambhūta DN-a i.120 divibhavattā dibba Kp-a 227; divibhāvaṁ devattabhāva-pariyāpanna Pv-a 14

      • See further e.g. SN i.105 DN iii.146 Snp 176 Snp 641 Dhp 236 Dhp 417 Pug 60 Vism 407 (definition) 423
      1. ˚osadha magical drugs Mil 283
      • ˚kāmā (
      • plural ) heavenly joys ‣See above Ja i.138 (opposite mānusakā)
      • ˚cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye SN ii.156 AN i.23 25
      • ˚paṇṇākāra (dasavidha˚) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc. ‣See ṭhāna) Dhp-a iii.292
      • ˚bhāva divine condition or state Pv-a 110
      • ˚yoga union with the gods SN i.60
      • ˚vihāra supreme condition of heart Mil 225
      • ˚sampatti heavenly bliss Ja iv.3 Dhp-a iii.292 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 30.

    Dibbati
    1. to sport, to amuse oneself Vv-a 18 (in ex plural of devī); to play at dice MN ii.106 (akkhehi)
    2. Sanskrit dīvyati, past participle dyūta ‣See jūta
    Dirasaññu
    adjective
    1. one who has little common-sense Ja vi.206 Ja vi.207 213, 214. Commentary explains wrongly on p. 209 with “one who possesses two tongues” (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña +)
    Sanskrit dara-saṁjña? ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen p. 118
    Diva
    1. [ Sanskrit diva neuter, weak base diṷ (div) of strong form di̯ē ‣See deva to *dei̯eṷo to shine; cp. Sanskrit dyo heaven divā
    2. adverb by day; Latin biduum (bi-divom) two days (a) heaven Ja iv.134 (˚ṁ agā); v.123 (˚ṁ patta) Pv-a 74 (˚ṁ gata)

      • (b) day Snp 507 (rattindivaṁ night day) Vv-a 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i.e. 24 hrs.) Dhp-a ii.8 (divā-divassa so early in the day) Also in divaṁ-kara, daymaker, = sun, Vv-a 307 usually as divākara (q.v.) cp. devasika ‣See also ajja
      1. ˚santatta heated for a whole day Ja iv.118 (cp. divasa˚)
    Divasa
    1. (m; neuter only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week Ja iv.139 Mil 15)

      1. a day AN i.206 (˚ṁ atināmeti) Ja iii.52 (uposatha˚) Pv-a 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso) Usually in oblique cases adverb ially, viz.
      2. accusative divasaṁ (during) one day, for one day, one day long AN iii.304 iv.317 Ja i.279 Ja ii.2 Dhp-a iii.173 (taṁ d. that day) eka˚ one day Ja i.58 Ja iii.26 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 67

        • genitive divasassa (day) by day SN ii.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca) Ja v.162 DN-a i.133
        • instrumental divasā day by day Ja iv.310
        • divasena (eka˚) on the same day Ja i.59 sudivasena on a lucky day Ja iv.210
        • locative divase on a day: eka Ja iii.391 jāta˚ on his birth-day Ja iii.391 Ja iv.138 dutiya˚ the next day Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 80 etc.; puna identical Ja i.278 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Snp 983 Mil 15 Pv-a 6 ussava˚ on the festive d. Vv-a 109 apara˚ on another day Pv-a 81 Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day Ja i.87 Pv-a 3 ablative divasato from the day (—˚) Ja i.50 DN-a i.140
        1. ˚kara the “day-maker,” i.e. the sun (cp. divākara Vv-a 169 271
        2. ˚bhāga the day-part (opposite ratti˚ the night-part), day-time Mil 18 (˚ena) Pv-a 152 (˚ṁ) 206 (˚e = divā)
        3. ˚santatta heated the livelong day SN i.169 MN i.453 AN iv.70 cp. Vin i.225 Mil 325 cp. diva˚
        Sanskrit divasa ‣See diva
    Divā
    adverb
    1. by day SN i.183 MN i.125 Dhp 387 DN-a i.251 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 142 Pv-a 206 (= divasa-bhāge) Often combined & contrasted with; rattiṁ (or ratto) by night; e.g. divārattiṁ by day & by night SN i.47 divā c’ eva rattiñ ca DN ii.20 rattim pi divā pi Ja ii.133
    • divā ca ratto ca SN i.33 Snp 223 Dhp 296 Vv 314 Vv-a 128

      • divātaraṁ (compar.
      • adverb ) later on in the day MN i.125 Ja iii.48 Ja iii.498
      • atidivā too late SN i.200 AN iii.117
      1. ˚kara (= divaṁ kara) the day-maker, the sun Thag-a 70 (= Ap. v.16) Pv-a 155
      • ˚divassa (
      • adverb ) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190 SN i.89 SN i.91 SN i.97 AN v.185 MN ii.100 MN ii.112 Ja ii.1 Ja vi.31 Dhp-a ii.8 Vv-a 239 242
      • ˚vihāra the day-rest, i.e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28 SN i.129 SN i.132 SN i.146 SN i.193 = Th 1 1241 Snp 679
      • ˚saññā consciousness by day, daily c DN iii.223 = AN ii.45
      • ˚ seyyā = ˚vihāra DN i.112
      Vedic divā, cp. diva
    Divi˚
    1. ; an abstraction from divya constructed for etymology explanation of dibba as divi-bhava (˚bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in “divi-bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā” Snp-a 219 “divi-bhavattā dibbā ti” Kp-a 227; “divibhāvaṁ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo” Pv-a 14
    Divilla
    1. a musical instrument Dīpavaṁsa xvi.14
    Divya
    adjective divine Snp 153 (cp. Snp-a 219 under divi˚), 524 (+ mānusaka) Ja vi.172
    • neuter the divinity a divine being (= devatā) Ja vi.150 Snp-a 219
    Sanskrit divya; the verse-form for the prose-form dibba (q.v.)
    Disa
    1. an enemy Dhp 42 Dhp 162 Ja iii.357 Ja iv.217 Ja v.453 Thag i.874–⁠6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i
    Sanskrit dviṣant & dviṣa (—˚); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Latin dīrus = English dire
    Disatā1
    feminine
    1. direction, quarter, region, part of the world Ja iv.359 Pv ii.921 (kiṁ disataṁ gato “where in the world has he gone?”); Vv ii.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. Vv-a 102)
    Sanskrit diśatā ‣See disā
    Disatā2
    feminine
    1. state of being an enemy, a host of enemies Ja iv.295 (= disasamūha, variant reading as gloss: verasamoha)
    Sanskrit *dviṣatā ‣See disa
    Disati
    1. to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combination with prefix ā, or in causative deseti (q.v.) As simplex only at SN i.217 (varaṁ disā to be read for disaṁ cp. Sanskrit adiśat) ‣See also upa˚
    2. Vedic diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Latin dico (indico, index = pointer judex), Gothic gateihan = German zeigen, Anglo-Saxon taecan = English token
    Disā
    feminine
    1. point of the com passive region quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumerated are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at SN i.101 SN i.145 SN ii.103 SN iii.84 SN iv.185 SN iv.296 Nd2 302 Pv ii.126 (caturo d.) Pv-a 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim

      • To these are often added the two locations “above & below” as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaṁ adho SN iii.124 e.g. also called paṭidisā DN iii.176), making in all 6 directions: DN iii.188f. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: SN i.224 SN iii.239 DN iii.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states activities or other happening: Snp 719 Snp 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaṁ adho: dasa disā imāyo) Thag 2, 487 Ps ii.131 Nd2 239 (‣ See also cātuddisa in this sense) Pv i.111 ii.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: SN i.75 DN ii.15 Pv i.21 Vv-a 184 Pv-a 71
      • anudisā (singular) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of “in between,” so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at SN i.122 SN iii.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10 four disā plus uddhaṁ & anudisaṁ at DN i.222 = AN iii.368 four d. + uddhaṁ adho & anudisaṁ at SN i.122 SN iii.124 AN iv.167 In phrase “mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati” (etc. up to 4th) the all-comprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ etc., e.g. DN i.250 Vb 272 ‣See mettā
      • As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically (“set, circle”) for various combinations viz. the 8 states of jhāna at MN iii.222 the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Nett 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Nett 117 ‣See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of “foreign country”); ii.217 SN i.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu˚); iii.106; v.216 DN iii.197f. Iti 103 Thag 1 874 Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā)
      • disaṁ kurute to run away Ja v.340
      • diso disaṁ (often spelt disodisaṁ) in all directions (literally from region to region) DN iii.200 Ja iii.491 Thag 1, 615 Bu ii.50; Pv iii.16 Mil 398 But at Dhp 42 to disa (enemy), cp. Dhp-a i.324 = coro coraṁ ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 82 on ablative diso = diśatah. cp. vidisā
      1. ˚kāka a compass-crow, i.e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173 English Hardy, Buddha p. 18) Ja iii.126 Ja iii.267
      • ˚kusala one who knows the directions Vin ii.217
      • ˚cakkhuka “seeing” (i.e. wise) in all directions Ja iii.344
      • ˚ḍāha “sky-glow,” unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) DN i.10 Ja i.374 vi.476 Mil 178 DN-a i.95 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit diśodāha Avs ii.198
      • ˚pati (disampati) a king SN i.86 Ja vi.45
      • ˚pāmokkha world-famed Ja i.166
      • ˚bhāga [ Sanskrit digbhāga direction, quarter Vin ii.217
      • ˚mūḷha [ Sanskrit diṅmūḍha one who has lost his bearings Dīpavaṁsa ix.15
      • ˚vāsika living in a foreign country Dhp-a iii.176
      • ˚vāsin = ˚vāsika Dhp-a iv.27
      Vedic diś & diśā, to diśati “pointing out,” point
    Dissati
    passive of *dassati, q.v.
    Dīgha
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective long DN i.17 MN i.429 SN i.104 (˚ṁ addhānaṁ) Snp 146 Snp 633 (opposite rassa) Dhp 60 Dhp 409 Pv i.1011 (˚ṁ antaraṁ all the time); ii.955 (identical) Thag 1, 646 (˚m-antare) Dhs 617 Kp-a 245 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 28 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 46 ‣See definition at Vism 272
    2. dīghato lengthways Ja vi.185 dīghaso in length Vin iv.279 atidīgha too long Vin iv.7 8
    3. masculine a snake (cp. Mvu ii.45 dīrghaka) Ja i.324 Ja ii.145 Ja iv.330
    4. Name of the Dīgha Nikāya (“the long collection”) Vism 96.

      1. ˚aṅgulin having long fingers (the 4th of the marks of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17 DN iii.143 DN iii.150
      • ˚antara corridor Ja vi.349
      • ˚āyu long-lived (opposite app’ āyu) DN i.18 Ja v.71 Also as ˚ka DN iii.150 DN-a i.135 Sdhp 511
      • ˚āvu = ˚āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q.v.) Ja v.120
      • ˚jāti
      • feminine a being of the snake kind, a snake Dhp-a iii.322 also as ˚ka at Ja ii.145 Ja iii.250 Ja iv.333 Ja v.449 DN-a i.252
      • ˚dasa having long fringes DN i.7
      • ˚dassin Sanskrit dīrghadarśin
        1. far-seeing (= sabba-dassāvin) Pv-a 196
        • ˚nāsika having a long nose Vism 283
        • ˚bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya Ja i.59 Vism 36, 266, 286 DN-a i.15 131
        • ˚rattaṁ (
        • adverb ) Sanskrit *dīrgharātraṁ ‣See Indexes to Avs Divy & Lal. V. otherwise dīrgha-kālaṁ
          1. a long time DN i.17 DN i.206 AN v.194 Snp 649 Iti 8 Ja i.12 Ja i.72 Pv i.44 ii.1311 (˚rattāya = ˚rattaṁ Pv-a 165) Pug 15 Dhp-a iv.24
          • ˚loma long-haired Vin iii.129 also as ˚ka at Ja i.484 feminine ˚ikā SN ii.228
          • ˚sotthiya
          • neuter long welfare or prosperity Dhp-a ii.227
          Vedic dīrgha, cp. causative drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Latin indulges; Goth tulgus (enduring)
    Dīghatta
    neuter
    1. length AN i.54
    Sanskrit dīrghatvaṁ
    Dīna
    adjective
    1. poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low DN ii.202 (?) (˚māna; variant reading ninnamāna) Ja v.448 Ja vi.375 Pv ii.82 (= adānajjhāsaya Pv-a 107) iv.81 Mil 406 Pv-a 120 (= kapaṇa), 260 (identical), 153 Sdhp 188 Sdhp 324
    Sanskrit dīna
    Dīnatta
    neuter
    1. wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78
    Sanskrit *dīnatvaṁ
    Dīpa1
    [Vedic dīpa to Vedic , dīpyate; Indogermanic *dei̯ā to shine ‣See dibba, deva ‣See also jotati a lamp Ja ii.104 (˚ṁ jāleti to light a l.) Dhp-a ii.49 (identical), 94 (identical)
    1. ˚acci the flame of a lamp Thag-a 154
    • ˚āloka light of a l. Ja i.266 Ja vi.391 Dhp-a i.359 Vv-a 51 -(˚ṁ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd2 399 (= pabhaṁ kara Snp 1136 but cp. Dhp 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203 -tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka˚) Ja iii.64
    • ˚rukkha literally lamp-tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick Dhp-a iv.120
    • ˚sikhā the flame (literally crest) of a l. Vism 171 Dhp-a ii.49

    Dīpa2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. an island continent (mahā˚, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, resting-place, shelter, refuge (in this sense frequently combined with tāṇa lena & saraṇa & ex plural in Com by patiṭṭhā)-(a) literally island: SN v.219 Ja iii.187 Vv-a 19 Mhvs vii.7, 41

        • continent: cattāro mahādīpā SN v.343 Vv 2010 (= Vv-a 104) Vv-a 19 Pv-a 74 etc. O
        • past participle the 2000 paritta-dīpā the smaller islands Kp-a 133
        • (b) figuratively shelter, salvation etc. (‣ See also tāṇa): SN iii.42 (atta˚ + attasaraṇa etc., not with SN Index to dīpa1); v.154, 162 (identical) iv.315 (maṁ˚, not to dīpa1), 372 AN i.55f. (+ tāṇa etc.) Snp 501 (atta˚ selfreliant self-supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1) 1092, 1094, 1145 (= Satthā) Nd2 303 Dhp 236 (˚ṁ karohi = patiṭṭhā Pv-a 87); Pv iii.19 (identical Pv-a 174) Ja v.501 = vi.375 (dīpañ ca parāyaṇaṁ) Mil 84 Mil 257 (dhamma-dīpa, Arahantship)
        1. ˚ālaya resting place Ja vi.432
        • ˚gabbhaka same Ja vi.459 Ja vi.460
        Vedic dvīpa = dvi + ap (*sp.) of āpa water, literally “double-watered,” between (two) waters
    Dīpa3
    1. a car covered with a panther’s skin Ja i.259 Ja v.259 = vi.48
    cp. Sanskrit dvīpa tiger’s skin
    Dīpaka1
    1. (= dīpa1) (a) feminine dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa˚ a torch Dhp-a i.220 399,-(b) (˚-) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -kakkara a decoy partridge Ja ii.161
    2. ˚tittira same Ja iii.358
    3. ˚pakkhin a decoy bird Ja v.376
    4. ˚miga a d. antelope Ja v.376

    Dīpaka2
    1. (= dīpa2) a (little) island Ja i.278 Ja i.279 Ja ii.160
    Dīpaka3
    1. in vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120 for vanibbaka (q.v.)
    Dīpana
    adjective illustrating, explaining;
    • feminine ˚ī explanation, Commentary, name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramattha-dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Thag 2; Pv Vv

      • cp. jotikā & uddīpanā
    Dīpika
    1. a panther Ja iii.480
    from dīpin
    Dīpita
    1. explained Vism 33
    past participle of dīpeti
    Dīpitar
    1. one who illumines Vism 211
    agent noun from dīpeti
    Dīpin
    1. a panther, leopard, tiger Vin i.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin = Sanskrit dvīpicarman) AN iii.101 Ja i.342 Ja ii.44 Ja ii.110 Ja iv.475 v.408; vi.538. dīpi-rājā king of the panthers Vism 270. feminine dīpinī Mil 363 Mil 368 Dhp-a i.48
    2. Sanskrit dvīpin
    Dīpeti
    1. to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain. AN v.73f. Dhp 363 Mil 40 Pv-a 94 Pv-a 95 Pv-a 102 Pv-a 104 etc.; Sdhp 49 Sdhp 349. cp. ā˚
    Sanskrit dīpayati, causative to dīp ‣See dīpa1 & cp. dippati
    Du˚1
    1. (& before vowels; dur˚;) indeclinable

      1. syllable of exclamation (= duḥ “bad, woe” (beginning the word du (j)-jīvitaṁ) Dhp-a ii.6 10 = Pv-a 280 cp. Ja iii.47 Buddhaghosa’s explanation of the syllable ‣See at Vism 494
      2. prefix, implying perverseness difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur- before vowels, but assimilated to a following consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i.e. the consonant is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening; before r (but also du˚). For purposes of convenience all compounds. with du are referred to the simplex, e.g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc
        1. See: A. dur˚;. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha
        • B. du˚; (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta (c)caja, carita, cola; (j)jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)pañña paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha pabhajja, pamuñca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb = b): bala, balika budha; (bb = v): dubbaca =) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta (du + r) = du-ratta, ropaya (dū + r): dū-rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara
        Sanskrit duḥ & duṣ = Old Irish du-, Old High German zur-, zer-; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su˚. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from opposite or wrong
    Du˚2
    1. in compounds. meaning two˚ ‣See dvi B II
    Du3
    1. (—˚) (adjective
    • suffix)
    1. hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta˚ deceiving one’s friends SN i.225 Snp 244 ex plural as mitta-dūbhaka Snp-a 287 variant reading B mittadussaka; cp. mitta-dubbhika & mitta-dubbhin
    2. Sanskrit druha, druh ‣See duhana & duhitika
    Duka
    neuter
    1. a dyad Dhs-a 36 343, 347, 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books “in pairs, on pairs, e.g. Dukapaṭṭhāna; or chapters, e.g. Ja ii.1 (˚nipāta)
    ‣See dvi B ii
    Dukūla
    1. a certain (jute?) plant; neuter cp. Sanskrit dukūlaṁ woven silk
      1. very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant SN iii.145 AN iv.393 Ja ii.21 Ja iv.219 v.400; vi.72; Vism 257, 262 Vv-a 165 DN-a i.140 Dāvs v.27
      Sanskrit dukūla
    Dukkha
    adjective-noun
    1. A. (adjective unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opposite sukha pleasant Vin i.34 Dhp 117 Literally of vedanā (sensation) MN i.59 (˚ṁ vedanaṁ vediyamāna ‣See also below iii.1 e) AN ii.116 = M. i.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). Figuratively (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā DN i.36 (= paṭipīḷan-aṭṭhena DN-a i.121) Dhp 186 (= bahudukkha Dhp-a iii.240); of jāti MN i.185 (cp ariyasacca, below B I.); in combination dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā DN iii.106 Dhs 176 Nett 7, 112 sq., cp. AN ii.149f. ekanta˚; very painful, giving much pain SN ii.173 SN iii.69
    • dukkhaṁ (
    • adverb ) with difficulty, hardly Ja i.215

      1. B. neuter ; but
      2. plural also dukkhā, e.g. SN i.23 Snp 728 Dhp 202 Dhp 203 Dhp 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dhp 83 Dhp 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exactive Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental ‣See Mrs. Rhys Davids; Bud. Psy. 83–⁠86, quoting Ledi Sadaw.

        1. I. Main Points in the Use of the Word.-The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts ‣See saccāni deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Pañc’ upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp. SN iii.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha ‣See Taṇhā. The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so ‣See Magga. These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin i.10 = SN v.421 (with addition of soka-parideva … etc. [see below in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur SN iii.158 SN iii.159 with explanation of each term (+ soka) DN i.189 DN iii.136 DN iii.277 MN i.185 AN i.107 Snp p. 140; Nd2 under sankhārā Iti 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Ps i.37; ii.204, 147 Pug 15 68 Vb 328 Nett 72, 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin i.16 18, 19 DN iii.227 Nd2 304iib; as āsavānaṁ khaya-ñāṇa at DN i.83 Vin iii.5 as sacca No. 1 + paṭiccasamuppāda at AN i.176f. (+ soka˚); in a slightly different version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka instead) at DN ii.305; and in the formula catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ ananubodhā etc. at DN ii.90 = Vin i.230
        1. II. Characterisation in Detail.
        1. -1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic = samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic = nirodha the dukkha-synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e.g. at Vin 1 DN ii.32 sq = SN ii.2f. SN ii.17 SN ii.20 SN ii.65 = Nd2 680i.c SN iii.14 MN i.266f.; ii.38 AN i.177 mentioned e.g. at AN i.147 MN i.192f. 460 Iti 89 (= dukkhassa antakiriyā). 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q.v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: SN i.188 SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṁ taṁ dukkhaṁ); iii.112 (identical) iii.67, 180, 222; iv.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq
        • rūpe anicc’ ânu
        • passive (etc. with dukkh’ & anatt’) SN iii.41 anicca-saññā, dukkha˚ etc. DN iii.243 AN iii.334 cp. iv.52 sq
        • sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd2 under sankhārā
        • Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd; 2 304i.), & one explanation (304iii.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Snp 36 The latter defines illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya-pālā ‣See detail under niraya, & cp. below IIi.2 b)
        • The first explanation (304i.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system ‣See Sānkhya-kārikā-bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1 & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the following groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one’s kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha˚, sankhāra˚, vipariṇāma˚ ‣See below IIi.1 c-(b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp ādhyātmikaṁ dukkhaṁ of Sānkhya k.); -(c) pain (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat-bites etc. (cp ādhibhautikaṁ & ādhidaivikaṁ d. of Sanskrit); -(d) (Mental distress & painful states caused by the death of one’s beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa)
        • This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these various states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his “refuge,” i.e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path ‣See above B I.
        1. III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha
        1. -1. As; simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opposite cetasika dukkha mental ill ‣See domanassa) Thus defined as kāyikaṁ d. at DN ii.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraṁ & mānasaṁ dukkhaṁ in Sānkhya philosophy) MN i.302 SN v.209 (in definition of dukkhindriya) AN ii.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Nett 12 (duvidhaṁ d.: kāyikaṁ = dukkhaṁ; cetasikaṁ domanassaṁ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aññaṁ na bādhakaṁ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika) Snp-a 119 (sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā Snp 67 = kāyikaṁ sātāsātaṁ). Buddhaghosa usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha e.g. at Snp-a 44 212, 377, 505
        • (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combination dukkha domanassa “pain & grief,” where d. can also be taken as the genitive term & dom˚ as specification, e.g. in cetasikaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti AN i.157 AN i.216 iv.406 SN ii.69 rāgajan d ˚ṁ dom ˚ṁ paṭisaṁvedeti AN ii.149 kāmûpasaṁhitaṁ d ˚ṁ dom ˚ṁ AN iii.207 d ˚ṁ dom ˚ṁ paṭisaṁvediyati SN iv.343 Also as compound dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthangamāya AN iii.326 & frequently in formula soka-parideva-d˚-domanass-upāyāsā (grief sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i.e. all kinds of misery) DN i.36 (arising from kāmā) MN ii.64 AN v.216f. Iti 89 etc ‣See above B i.4. cp. also the combination dukkhī dummano “miserable and dejected” SN ii.282-(c) dukkha as “feeling of pain” forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d
        • dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra identical having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma˚, being caused by change SN iv.259 SN v.56 DN iii.216 Nett 12 (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita “that which is not good or profitable,” usually opposed to sukha hita. It is frequently in the ster. expression “hoti dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya” for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain AN i.194f. MN i.332 DN iii.157 Pug 33 Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya DN iii.246 & akusalaṁ … ahitāya dukkhāya saṁvattati AN i.58
        • (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaṁ (or sukhā vedic) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaṁ pain (painful sens.), adukkham-asukhaṁ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā) Their rôle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaṁ atthangamā adukkham-asukhaṁ upekhā parisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati ‣See jhāna
        • As contents of vedanā: sukhaṁ vediyati dukkhaṁ v. adukkham-asukhaṁ v. tasmā vedanā ti SN iii.86 SN iii.87 cp. SN ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā sukha, d˚, adukkham-asukhā˚ DN iii.275 SN ii.53 SN iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. MN i.396 AN i.173 AN iv.442 Iti 46 47. yaṁ kiñc’ āyaṁ purisa-puggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā d ˚ṁ vā a ˚ṁ vā sabban taṁ pubbe katahetū ti = one’s whole life-experience is caused by one’s former kamma AN i.173 = MN ii.217
        • The combination (as complementary pair) of sukha + dukkha is very freq for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e.g. n’ âlam aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211 Thus under the 8 “fortunes of the world” (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a˚), yasa (a˚) pasaṁsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at DN iii.260 Nd2 55 Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo … sukhakāmo dukkha-paṭikkūlo SN iv.172 SN iv.188
        • In similar contexts: DN i.81≈; iii.51, 109, 187 SN ii.22 SN ii.39 SN iv.123f. AN ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha)
        1. 2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort ‣See above, I.; cp. especially kāma & bhava Ps; i.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaṁ = mahabbhayaṁ SN i.37 bhārādānaṁ dukkhaṁ loke bhāra-nikkhepanaṁ sukhaṁ (pain is the great weight) SN iii.26 kāmānaṁ adhivacanaṁ AN iii.310 AN iv.289 cp. AN iii.410f. (with kāmā, vedanā saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaṁ)
        • (b) ekanta˚; (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & originally meaning of dukkha; e.g. MN i.74 AN ii.231 (vedanaṁ vediyati ekanta-d˚ṁ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā) ‣See ekanta. In the same sense:.. upenti Roruvaṁ ghoraṁ cirarattaṁ dukkhaṁ anubhavanti SN i.30 niraya-dukkha Snp 531 pecca d˚ṁ nigacchati Snp 278 Snp 742 anubhonti d˚ṁ kaṭuka-pphalāni Pv i.1110 (= āpāyikaṁ d˚ṁ Pv-a 60) Pv-a 67 mahādukkhaṁ anubhavati Pv-a 43 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 107 etc. atidukkhaṁ Pv-a 65 dukkhato pete mocetvā Pv-a 8
        • (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in following terms: dukkhaṁ anubhavati (only w reference to Niraya ‣See b); anveti Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṁ cetasikaṁ vipāka-dukkhaṁ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), upeti Snp 728 carati SN i.210 nigacchati MN i.337 Snp 278 Snp 742 paṭisaṁvedeti MN i.313 ‣See above; passati SN i.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe) vaḍḍheti SN ii.109 viharati AN i.202 AN ii.95 AN iii.3 SN iv.78 (passaddhiyā asati d˚ṁ v. dukkhino cittaṁ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc ‣See above Iii.1 e; sayati AN i.137
        • (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment:; (a) Origin (‣ See also above I. & Ii.1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito SN i.40 yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti sabbaṁ sankhāra-paccayā Snp 731 ye dukkhaṁ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. SN ii.109 d˚ṁ ettha bhiyyo Snp 61 Snp 584 yo paṭhavī-dhātuṁ abhinandati dukkhaṁ so abhin˚ Si i.174; taṇhā d ˚ssa samudayo etc. Nett 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi SN iv.147 of chanda SN i.22 of upadhi SN ii.109 cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Snp 728 d˚ṁ eva hi sambhoti d˚ṁ tiṭṭhati veti ca SN i.135
        • () Salvation from Suffering ‣See above I.: kathaṁ dukkhā pamuccati Snp 170 dukkhā pamuccati SN i.14 SN iii.41 SN iii.150 SN iv.205 SN v.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d ˚ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma-savanaṁ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaṁ SN i,210 na appatvā lokantaṁ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṁ AN ii.49 Kammakkhayā … sabbaṁ d˚ṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissati MN ii.217 cp. i.93. kāme pahāya … d˚ṁ na sevetha anatthasaṁhitaṁ SN i.12 = 31; rūpaṁ (etc.) abhijānaṁ bhabbo d—˚kkhayāya SN iii.27 SN iv.89 d˚ṁ pariññāya sakhettavatthuṁ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaṁ Snp 473 pajahati d˚ṁ Snp 789 Snp 1056 dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca SN ii.72 SN iii.228f.; iv.86, 327
        • dukkhass’ antakaro hoti MN i.48 AN iii.400f. Iti 18 antakarā bhavāmase Snp 32 antaṁ karissanti Satthu sāsana-kārino AN ii.26 d ˚parikkhīṇaṁ SN ii.133 akiñcanaṁ nânupatanti dukkhā SN i.23 sankhārānaṁ nirodhena n’ atthi d˚assa sambhavo Snp 731
        • muniṁ d˚assa pārayuṁ SN i.195 = Nd2 136v; antagū ’si pāragū d˚assa Snp 539
        • sang’ ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d˚ṁ apunabbhavāya SN iv.158 ucchinnaṁ mūlaṁ d˚assa, n’ atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin i.231 DN ii.91
        1. ˚ādhivāha bringing or entailing pain SN iv.70
        • ˚anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) Ja iv.3
        • ˚antagū one who has conquered suffering Snp 401
        • ˚ābhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress Iti 89
        • ˚āsahanatā non-endurance of ills Vism 325 -indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation SN v.209 SN v.211 Dhs 556 560 Vb 15 54, 71 -udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress MN i.415f. AN i.97 AN iv.43 (+ dukkhavipāka); v.117 (dukh˚), 243 Ja iv.398 of kamma Ps i.80; ii.79 Pv i.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya which is also found at Pv-a 60) Dhp-a ii.40 (˚uddaya) -ūpadhāna causing pain Dhp 291
        • ˚ūpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d-ûpasama-gāmino SN iii.86 Iti 106 Snp 724 = Dh 191; -(m)esin wishing ill, malevolent Ja iv.26
        • ˚otiṇṇa fallen into misery SN iii.93 MN i.460 ii.10
        • ˚kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment Dhp-a iii.70 ‣See Dhp 138 Dhp 139 & cp. dasa; 1 B 1 b - khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction ‣See above B Ii.1 SN ii.134 SN iii.93 MN i.192f.; 200 sq.; etc.; -khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill MN i.93 MN ii.217 (kammakkhayā d-kkhayo) SN iii.27 Snp 732 frequently in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā-d-kkhayāya “leads to the complete extinction of ill,” with reference to the Buddha’s teaching or the higher wisdom, e.g. of brahmacariyā SN ii.24 of paññā DN iii.268 AN iii.152f.; of ariyā diṭṭhi DN iii.264 = AN iii.132 of sikkhā AN ii.243 of dhamma MN i.72
        • ˚dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. ˚khandha DN iii.88 SN iv.188 (˚ānaṁ samudayañ ca atthagamañ ca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti) Iti 38 (nirodha ˚anaṁ)
        • ˚nidāna a source of pain MN ii.223 Dhs 1059 1136
        • ˚nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering ‣See above B Ii.1 MN i.191 MN ii.10 AN iii.410 AN iii.416 etc
        • ˚paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combination sukhakāmo d-p. SN iv.172 (spelt ˚kulo), 188 MN i.341
        • ˚patta being in pain Ja vi.336
        • ˚pareta afflicted by pain or misery SN iii.93 Iti 89 = AN i.147
        • ˚bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985
        • ˚vāca hurtful speech Pv i.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha˚)
        • ˚vipāka (adjective having pain as its fruit, creating misery SN ii.128 DN iii.57 DN iii.229 AN ii.172 (kamma); Ps ii.79 (identical)
        • ˚vepakka = ˚vipāka Snp 537 (kamma)
        • ˚saññā the consciousness of pain Nett 27
        • ˚samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opposite ˚nirodha ‣See above B Ii.1) SN iv.37 MN i.191 MN ii.10 MN iii.267 Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṁ vuccati d-s.)
        • ˚samphassa contact with pain MN i.507 Dhs 648
        • feminine abstract ˚tā Pug 33
        • ˚seyya an uncomfortable couch Dhp-a iv.8
        Sanskrit duḥkha from duḥ-ka, an adjective formation from prefix duḥ ‣See du. According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q.v.; Buddhaghosa (at Vism 494) explains dukkha as du + kha, where du = du1 and kha = ākāsa ‣See also definition at Vism 461.
    Dukkhatā
    feminine
    1. state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain ‣See dukkha B IIi.1 c DN iii.216 SN iv.259 SN v.56 Nett 12 (ex plural )
    2. cp. Sanskrit duḥkhatā, abstract to dukkha
    Dukkhati
    1. to be painful Vism 264
    from dukkha
    Dukkhatta
    neuter
    1. = dukkhatā DN iii.106 (+ dandhatta)
    Sanskrit *duhkhatvaṁ
    Dukkhāpana
    neuter
    1. bringing sorrow, causing pain Mil 275f. 351
    abstract to dukkhāpeti
    Dukkhāpita
    1. pained, afflicted Mil 79 Mil 180
    past participle of dukkhāpeti
    Dukkhāpeti
    1. to cause pain, to afflict Ja iv.452 Mil 276f. Pv-a 215 past participle dukkhāpita
    2. causative to dukkha
    Dukkhita
    adjective
    1. afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed miserable, suffering, ailing (opposite sukhita) DN i.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha-gilāno); ii.24 SN i.149 SN iii.11 = iv.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); v.211 MN i.88 MN ii.66 Vin iv.291 Snp 984 Snp 986 Ja iv.452 Mil 275 Dhp-a ii.28 Vv-a 67
    Sanskrit duḥkhita; past participle of *dukkhāpeti
    Dukkhin
    adjective-noun
    1. afflicted, grieved, miserable SN i.103f. 129 sq., ii.282 (+ dummano) iv.78 AN iii.57
    2. a loser in the game Ja ii.160
    Sanskrit duḥkhin
    Dukkhīyati
    1. to feel pain, to be distressed Dhp-a; ii.28 (= vihaññati)
    Sanskrit duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati denominative from dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati
    Dugga
    1. a difficult road Dhp 327 Pv ii.78. dugge saṅkamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combined with papā (water-shed) SN i.100 Vv 5222 Pv ii.925
    du + ga
    Duṭṭha
    adjective-noun
    1. spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118 SN ii.259 SN ii.262 SN iv.339 AN i.124 (˚âruka), 127 (identical), 157 sq. Iti 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho) Ja i.187 254 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.391 (˚caṇḍāla) Pv-a 4 (˚corā rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86 Sdhp 367 Sdhp 434
    • aduṭṭha not evil, good Snp 623 Iti 86 Dhp-a iv.164 cp. pa˚
    1. ˚gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206
    • ˚citta evil-minded Vin ii.192 MN iii.65
    Sanskrit duṣṭha, past participle of dussati, q.v.
    Duṭṭhu
    adverb
    1. badly, wrong Dhs-a 384 Snp-a 396 Vv-a 337
    Sanskrit duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu
    Duṭṭhulla
    adjective wicked, lewd Vin iv.128 SN i.187 (˚bhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd,” cp. Thag 1, 1217 padulla gāhin, explained as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of the Brethren 399 n. 3) MN i.435 MN iii.159 Vism 313.
    • neuter wickedness Vin iii.21
    • kāya˚ unchastity MN iii.151 Thag 1, 114 Vism 151.

      1. ˚āduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin v.130
      • ˚āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin iv.31 (opposite a˚ Vin iv.32).

    Dutiya
    (numeral ordinal)
    1. (a) numeral the second, the following Ja ii.102 Ja ii.110 dutiyaṁ for the second time (cp. tatiyaṁ in series 1, 2, 3) Vin ii.188 DN ii.155

      • (b)
      • adjective-noun one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by (—˚); a companion, friend, partner Vin iv.225 SN i.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti = his 2nd self); iv.78 (identical) i.131 Iti 9 Ja v.400 Thag 2, 230 (a husband) Snp 49 (= Nd2 305 where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā˚ puggalo˚). taṇhā-dutiyā either “connected with thirst” or “having thirst as one’s companion” ‣See taṇhā SN iv.37 Iti 109 = AN ii.10 bilanga˚ kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin ii.77 SN i.90 SN i.91
      • adutiya alone, unaccompanied Pv-a 161
      Sanskrit dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compound mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning “companion” cp. numeral ordinal for two in Latin secundus< sequor i.e. he who follows. Also Sanskrit davīyas farther
    Dutiyaka
    adjective-noun
    1. (a) the second, following, next Ja i.504 (˚cittavāre); ˚ṁ a 2nd time MN i.83
    • (b) a companion; only in
    • feminine dutiyikā a wife or female compound Vin iv.230 270 (a bhikkhunī as compound of another one); frequently as purāṇa-dutiyikā one’s former wife Vin i.96 Vin iii.16 SN i.200 MN ii.63 Ja i.210 Ja v.152 Dhp-a i.77 cp. Mvu ii.134 dvitīyā in the same sense
    Dimin. of dutiya
    Dutiyyatā
    feminine companionship, friendship, help Ja iii.169
    Duddabha
    1. ‣See daddabha
    Duddha
    1. (Sanskrit dugdha, past participle of duh ‣See dohati] milked, drawn Snp 18 (duddha-khīra = gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra Snp-a 27) MN ii.186 neuter milk Dāvs v.26.

    Dudrabhi
    1. a kettle-drum, in; Amata˚; the drum of Nibbāna Vin i.8 = M i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage) Pv-a 189 (variant reading for dundubhi)
    another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya
    Dundubhi
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. a kettle-drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva in the latter meaning) Pv iii.34 Ja vi.465 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 189 (variant reading dudrabhi)
      • Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva˚ thunder DN ii.156 AN iv.311
      Sanskrit dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi
    *Dunoti
    1. to burn ‣See der, dava, dāva & dāya
    Dupaṭṭo
    1. ‣See dvi B II
    Dubbaṇṇa
    1. ‣See under vaṇṇa
    Dubbuṭṭhika
    1. ‣See under vuṭṭhi
    Dubbha
    1. (& dūbha) adjective

      1. deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin ii.203 (= It 86 where dubbhe); Pv ii.93 (mitta˚). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv ii.98 (˚pāṇin = ahiṁsakahattha). As neuter harmlessness, frankness, friendliness good-will Vin i.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. variant readings p. 395 adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya) SN i.225 (adubbhāya trustily) Ja i.180 (identical as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with variant reading adrabhaka in ex
      2. plural of adubbha-pāṇin) at Ja vi.311 Note. dabhāya dative is also used in Sanskrit in sense of an
      3. adverb or infinitive which confirms the etymology of the word. cp. dobha
      4. Sanskrit dambha ‣See dubbhati
    Dubbhaka
    adjective
    1. perfidious, insidious, treacherous Thag 1, 214 (citta˚). cp. dubbhaya dūbhaka
    Sanskrit dambhaka
    Dubbhati
    (& dūbhati)
    1. to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either with dative Ja v.245 Ja vi.491 or with loc Ja i.267 Ja iii.212) SN i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225 Iti 86 (dubbhe = dusseyya Commentary ) = Vin ii.203 (where dubbho) Thag 1, 1129 Ja ii.125 Ja iv.261 Ja v.487 Ja v.503
    • ppr. also dūbhato Ja iv.261
    • absolutive dubbhitvā Ja iv.79
    • gerundive dubbheyya (variant reading dūbheyya) to be punished Ja v.71 cp. pa˚
    Sanskrit dabhnoti cp. ; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), past participle dabdha; indogermanic *dhebh, cp. Sanskrit druh (so Kern, Toevoegselen p. 11 s.v. padubbhati) ‣See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka dūbhi
    Dubbhana
    neuter
    1. hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. locative ) Pv-a 114 (= anattha)
    2. Sanskrit *dambhana
    Dubbhaya
    1. = dubbhaka, SN i.107
    Dubbhika
    1. = dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (= mittadubbhika, mittānaṁ bādhaka Pv-a 175)
    Dubbhikkha
    1. ‣See bhikkhā;
    Dubbhin
    adjective-noun
    1. ‣Seeking to injure, deceitful; a deceiver, hypocrite Ja iv.41 Pv ii.98 (mitta˚) Dhp-a ii.23 (mitta-dūbhin). feminine dubbhinī Vv-a 68 (so read for dubbinī)
    2. Sanskrit dambhin
    Dubha
    numeral-adjective
    1. both; only in ablative dubhato from both sides Thag 1, 1134 Ps i.69; ii.35, 181 Vv 4621 Vv-a 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato)
    ‣See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.
    Dubhaya
    numeral-adjective
    1. both ‣See ubhaya Snp 517 Snp 526 Snp 1007 Snp 1125Ja iii.442 Ja vi.110
    a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya ‣See dvi B II.
    Duma
    tree AN iii.43 Ja i.87 Ja i.272 Ja ii.75 Ja ii.270 vi.249, 528 Vv 8414 Mil 278 Mil 347 Vv-a 161
    1. ˚agga 1. the top of a tree Ja ii.155
    • a splendid tree Vv 354

  • a tooth-pick Ja v.156

    • ˚inda “king of trees,” the Bodhi tree Dīpavaṁsa i.7
    • ˚uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393
    • ˚phala fruit of a tree MN ii.74 Vism 231 (in comparison)
    Sanskrit druma = ‣See dāru
  • Duyhati
    passive to dohati (q.v.)
    Dussa1
    neuter
    1. woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290 ii.128, 174; iv.159. DN i.103 SN v.71 MN i.215 MN ii.92 AN v.347 Snp 679 Pv i.103 (= uttarīyaṁ sāṭakaṁ Pv-a 49); ii.314 Pug 55 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 75
    • cīvara˚, q.v. chava˚ a miserable garment DN i.166 AN i.295 AN ii.206 MN i.78 MN i.308
    1. ˚karaṇḍaka a clothes-chest SN v.71 = M i.215 AN iv.230
    • ˚koṭṭhagāra a store-room for cloth or clothes Dhp-a i.220 393
    • ˚gahaṇa (-mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment Dhp-a ii.87
    • ˚cālanī a cloth sieve Vin i.202
    • ˚paṭṭa turban cloth Vin ii.266 (= setavattha-paṭṭa Buddhaghosa) SN ii.102
    • ˚phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199) -maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. Vv-a 199) -yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278 MN i.215 = SN v.71 Mil 31 (cp. Mvu i.61) Dhp-a iv.11
    • ˚ratana “a pearl of a garment,” a fine garment Mil 262
    • ˚vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin ii.266
    • ˚veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266
    Sanskrit dūrśa & dūṣya
    Dussa2
    1. at Ja iii.54 is usually taken as = amussa (cp. amuka). Commentary explains as “near,” & adds “asammussa.” Or is it Sanskrit dūṣya easily spoilt? ‣See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader ii.124
    Dussaka
    1. = dūsaka (q.v.)
    Dussati
    1. to be or become bad or cor rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin ii.113 SN i.13 = 164 Dhp 125 = Pv-a 116 Dhp 137 Iti 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. AN iii.110 (dussanīye d.) Ja vi.9 Mil 101 Mil 386 past participle duṭṭha (q.v.)

      • Caus dūseti (q.v.) ‣See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa˚
      Sanskrit duṣyati, denominative from prefix duḥ (du˚); past participle duṣṭha, causative dūṣayati
    Dussanā
    feminine & Dussana
    • neuter

      1. defilement, guilt AN ii.225 Pug 18 22 Dhs 418 1060 DN-a i.195 (rajjana-d. muyhana)
      Sanskrit dūṣana, cp. dussati
    Dussanīya
    adjective
    1. able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combined with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha AN iii.110 (dusanīye dussati, where Iti 84 has dosaneyye) Ja vi.9 Mil 386
    cp. Sanskrit dveṣanīya, because of doṣa = dveṣa taken to dus
    Dussassa
    1. ‣See sassa
    Dussika
    1. a cloth merchant Ja vi.276 Mil 262 Mil 331f.
    Dussitatta
    neuter
    1. = dussanā, Pug 18 22
    Sanskrit *dūṣitatva
    Duha
    1. (adjective
    • ˚.)
    1. milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma˚ giving pleasures Ja iv.20 Ja v.33
    Sanskrit duh & duha ‣See dohati
    Duhati
    1. (to milk) ‣See dohati
    Duhana
    adjective-noun
    1. one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha a dacoit DN i.135 DN-a i.296 neuter waylaying, robbery (pantha˚) Ja ii.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana variant readings duhana & dūhana) Dhs-a 220

      • Cp maggadūsin
      Sanskrit *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Old Irish droch; Old High German triogan to deceive, traum dream; also Sanskrit dhvarati. For further connections ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under fraus
    Duhitika
    adjective
    1. infested with robbers, beset with dangers SN iv.195 (magga). Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika hard to get through (q.v.), to be compared are the variant readings of the latter at SN iv.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika)
    cp. Sanskrit druha, from druhyati
    Dūta1
    1. a messenger, envoy Vin i.16 ii.32, 277 DN i.150 SN iv.194 Snp 411 (rāja˚), 417. deva˚ Yama’s envoy, Death’s messenger AN i.138 AN i.142 MN ii.75f. Ja i.138
    • ˚ṁ pāheti to send a messenger Mil 18 Pv-a 133
    Vedic dūta, probably to dūra (q.v.) as “one who is sent (far) away” ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under dudum
    Dūta2
    neuter
    1. play, gaming, gambling Ja iv.248
    Sanskrit dyūta ‣See jūta
    Dūteyya
    neuter
    1. errand, commission, messages AN iv.196 Ja iii.134 DN-a i.78 ˚ṁ gacchati to go on an errand Vin ii.202 ˚ṁ harati to obtain a commission Vin iii.87 Vin iv.23
    1. ˚kamma doing a messenger’s duty Vin i.359
    • ˚pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages DN i.5 = MN iii.34 AN ii.209 MN i.180
    Sanskrit dūtya, but varying in meaning
    Dūbha
    adjective deceiving ‣See dubbha.
    Dūbhaka1
    adjective
    1. deceiving, treacherous, harmful Snp-a 287 (mitta˚); feminine ˚ikā Ja ii.297
    2. Sanskrit dambhaka
    Dūbhaka2
    1. a diamond Ja i.363 = iii.207
    Sanskrit dambha, cp. dambholi
    Dūbhana
    neuter deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at Ja ii.388 is to be read as (pantha-) duhana.
    Dūbhin
    adjective -dubbhin Ja ii.180 (variant readings dūbha & dubbhi), 327; iv.257 Dhp-a ii.23
    Dūbhī
    feminine
    1. perfidy, treachery, Ja i.412 Ja iv.57 (variant reading dubhī; vi.59 (= aparādha
    cp. Sanskrit dambha ‣See dubbhati
    Dūra
    adjective
    1. far distant, remote,; opposite āsanna (J ii.154) or santika (Dhs 677 Vism 402)
    • Pv-a 117 Often in compounds ‣See below, also as dūri˚; , e.g. dūri-bhāva distance Vism 71 377 Dhs-a 76
    • Cases mostly used
    • adverb ially, viz
    • accusative dūraṁ far Ja ii.154 Dhp-a i.192
    • ablative dūrato from afar, aloof Vin i.15 Vin ii.195 SN i.212 Snp 511 Dhp 219 Ja v.78 (dūra-dūrato) Mil 23 Pv-a 107 dūrato karoti to keep aloof from Pv-a 17
    • locative dūre at a distance also as preposition away from, far from (c. ablative), e. g Snp 468 Ja ii.155 Ja ii.449 (= ārā); iii.189
    • Sn 772 Dhp 304 Ja vi.364 Dhs 677
    • dūre-pātin one who shoots far cp. Sanskrit dūra-pātin
    1. AN i.284 AN ii.170 AN ii.202 Ja iv.494 ‣See also akkhaṇavedhin
    • atidūre too far Vin ii.215
    1. ˚kantana at Thag 1, 1123: the correct reading seems to be the variant reading durākantana ‣See ākantana
    2. ˚gata gone far away Pv ii.134 (= paralokagata Pv-a 164) Dhp-a iii.377 (durā˚)
    3. ˚(ṁ)gama far-going, going here there Dhp 37 (cp. Dhp-a; i.304); Pv ii.910
    4. ˚ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv ii.82
    5. ˚vihāra (-vuttin) living far away Snp 220
    Sanskrit dūra, Vedic duva (stirring, urging on), compar. davīyān, Avestan dūrō (far), *dāu; cp. Old High German zawen, Gothic taujan = English do. Another form is *deṷā far in respect to time, as in Latin dū-dum (cp. dū-rare = en-dure) ‣See also dutiya & dūta
    Dūrakkha
    1. ‣See rakkha & cp. du; 1
    du1 + rakkha
    Dūratta
    adjective
    1. reddish MN i.36 (˚vaṇṇa)
    du1 + ratta
    Dūsaka
    adjective-noun
    1. corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel. AN v.71 (bhikkhunī˚) Ja ii.270 Ja iv.495 Snp 89 (kula˚ one who spoils the reputation of the clan) Dhp-a ii.23 (kuṭi˚ an incendiary) Mil 20 (pantha˚). As dussaka at Ja v.113 (kamma˚); Snp-a 287 (mitta˚, variant reading B. for dūbhaka)-panthadūsaka a highwayman Mil 290 feminine dūsikā Ja iii.179 (also as dūsiyā = dosakārikā); ; harmless Snp 312 ‣See a˚
    2. Sanskrit dūṣaka
    Dūsana
    neuter
    1. spoiling, defiling Ja ii.270 Sdhp 453
    ‣See dūseti
    Dūsita
    1. depraved, sinful, evil Pv-a 226 (˚citta)
    Sanskrit dūṣita, past participle of dūseti
    Dūsin
    adjective-noun
    1. = dūsạka, in magga˚; (cp. pantha-dusaka) a highway robber Snp 84 sq
    Sanskrit dūṣin
    Dūseti
    1. to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin i.79 85, 86; iv.212 (maṁ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuṁ) AN iv.169f. Ja i.454 Ja ii.270 Dhp-a ii.22 (kuṭiṁ, damage destroy). aorist dūsayi Ja ii.110 (fared ill)

      • pp dūsita. cp. pa˚, pari˚
      Sanskrit dūṣayati, causative of dussati (q.v.) Also as dusseti Pv-a 82
    Dūhana1
    neuter
    1. infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha˚; (with variant reading duhana) waylaying Ja ii.281 Ja ii.388 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 280
    ‣See duhana
    Dūhana2
    neuter
    1. milking (—˚), in kumbha˚; filling the pails with milk, i.e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sanskrit droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Snp 309
    Sanskrit dohana ‣See dohati
    Dūhitika
    1. ‣See duhitika
    Dejjha
    1. (= dvejjha ‣See dvi B i.5] divided, in ; undividedness Ja iii.7 (com. abhejja), 274 = iv.258 (dhanuṁ a ˚ṁ karoti to get the bow ready, Burmese variant sarejjhaṁ C explained jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiṁ ekam eva katvā)
    Deḍḍubha
    1. a water-snake; salamander Ja iii.16 Ja vi.194 Sdhp 292 ‣See next
    Sanskrit duṇḍubha
    Deḍḍubhaka
    1. 1. a sort of snake ‣See preceding Ja i.361
    • a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake’s head) Vin ii.136 (explained by udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa)
    Deṇḍima
    masculine neuter
    1. a kind of kettle-drum DN i.79 (variant reading dindima) Nd2 219 (˚ka, variant reading dind˚) Ja i.355 (= paṭaha-bheri); v.322 = vi.217 vi.465 = 580
    Sanskrit diṇḍima, cp. dindima
    Depiccha
    adjective
    1. having two tail-feathers Ja v.339
    = dvepiccha ‣See dvi B i.5
    Deyya
    adjective
    1. (a) to be given ‣See below
    • (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms Ja iii.12 (a˚) Mil 87 (rāja˚) -nt. a gift offering Vin i.298 (saddhā˚)
    1. ˚dhamma a gift, literally that which has the quality of being given; especially a gift of mercy, meritorious gift SN i.175 AN i.150 AN i.166 AN ii.264 (saddhā˚) Pv i.11 ii.318 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 7 sq., 26, 92 (˚bīja), 103, 129; cp. Avs i.308 The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumerated at Nd2 523 under the old Brahman’s term yañña “sacrifice”) (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumeration in different order is found at Nd1 373
    Sanskrit deya, gerundive of ‣See dadāti i.2, b
    Deva
    1. a god, a divine being; usually in plural devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily ‣See 1a used of the first of the next-world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake-demons: nāgas, tree-gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etymology) & mobility, beauty goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead ‣See Yama & below 1 c. Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. DN i.17f. SN iii.85), hence “gods” is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saṁsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th i.627–⁠9; Thag ii.365)

      • The collective appellations differ; there are various groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiṁsa) include some or most of the well-known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa-indakā (the gods including Indra or with their ruler at their head: DN ii.208 SN iii.90. AN v.325), sa-pajāpatikā (SN iii.90), sa-mārakā ‣See deva-manussaloka, sa-brahmakā (SN iii.90) ‣See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e. g at DN ii.253 DN iii.194
      • A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti- devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i.e. kings & princes Ja i.132 DN-a i.174) visuddhi˚; (beings divine by purity, i.e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas),; upapatti˚; (being born divine, i.e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma-devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd2 307 Vb 422 Kp-a 123 Vv-a 18 Under the 3rd category (upapatti˚) seven groups are enumerated in the following order: Cātummahārājikā devā Tāvatiṁsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d. Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita-vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at DN i.216f. AN i.210 AN i.332f. Nd2 307; cp. SN i.133 & Ja i.48 ‣See also devatā
      1. 1. good etc
      • (a) singular a god, a deity or divine being MN i.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā) SN iv.180 = AN iv.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods angels) Snp 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati) Dhp 105 (+ gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā) AN ii.91 AN ii.92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.) Pv-a 16 (yakkho vā devo vā)
      • (b)
      • plural devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaṁ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur-indo SN i.222) SN i.216f.; iv.101, 269 AN i.144 Snp 346 Pv-a 22 etc-Var. kinds are e.g. appamāṇ'-ābhā (opposite paritt ābhā) MN iii.147 ābhassarā DN i.17 Dhp 200 khiḍḍāpadosikā DN i.19 gandhabba-kāyikā SN iii.250f. cattāro mahārājikā SN v.409 SN v.423 Jat i.48; Pv iv.111 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 272; naradevā tidasā SN i.5 bhummā Pv-a 5 manāpa-kāyikā AN iv.265f.; mano-padosikā DN i.20 valāhaka-kāyikā SN iii.254
      • Var. attributes of the Devas are e.g. āyuppamāṇā AN i.267 AN ii.126f. iv.252 sq.; dīghāyukā SN iii.86 AN ii.33 rūpino manomayā MN i.410 etc. etc
      • See further in general: DN i.54 (satta devā); ii.14, 157, 208 SN v.475 = AN i.37 Snp 258 (+ manussā), 310 (identical); 404, 679 Dhp 30 Dhp 56 Dhp 94 Dhp 230 Dhp 366; Ps i.83 sq.; ii.149 Vb 86 395, 412 sq.; Nett 23 Sdhp 240
      • (c) deva = Yama ‣See deva-dūta (explained at Ja i.139: devo ti maccu)
      • atideva a pre-eminent god god above gods (epithet of the Buddha) Nd2 307 Dhs-a 2 etc. ‣See under compounds
      • the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i.e. rain-cloud, rainy sky, rain-god (cp Jupiter Pluvius; Kindred Sayings i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) DN i.74 (: devo ti megho DN-a i.218) SN i.65 SN i.154 (cp. Iti 66 megha) Snp 18 Snp 30 Ja v.201 Dhp-a ii.58 82 Pv-a 139 devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i.e. lightly SN i.104f. 154, 184; iv.289
      • thulla-phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain SN iii.141 SN v.396 AN i.243 AN ii.140 AN v.114 Vism 259-vigata-valāhake deve when the rain-clouds have passed SN i.65 MN ii.34 MN ii.42

    2. king, usually in voc deva, king! Vin i.272 Vin iii.43 AN ii.57 Ja i.150 Ja i.307 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 74 etc.

      1. devī feminine
      2. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc. ‣See etymology ex
      3. plural at Vv-a 18
      4. Pv ii.112 Vv 13 etc
      5. queen Vin i.82 (Rahulamātā), 272 DN ii.14 AN ii.57 AN ii.202 (Mallikā) Ja i.50 (Māyā); iii.188 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 75
        1. ˚accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy-maiden Vism 531 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 279
        2. ˚aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god SN iv.180 AN iv.461 Pv-a 16
        • ˚ātideva god of gods, i.e. divine beyond all divinities, a super-deva, of Buddha Nd2 307 & on Snp 1134 Ja iv.158 = Dhp-a i.147 Vv 6427 Vv-a 18 Mil 241 Mil 258 Mil 368 Mil 384 & passim; cp. Mvu i.106 257 283, 291
        • ˚attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god Pv-a 14
        • ˚ānubhāva divine majesty or power DN ii.12 MN iii.120 Ja i.59
        • ˚āsana a seat in heaven Iti 76
        • ˚āsurasaṅgāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans DN ii.285 SN i.222 SN iv.201 SN v.447 MN i.253 AN iv:432 (at all passages in identical phrase)
        • ˚iddhi divine power Vv 313 Vv-a 7
        • ˚isi a divine ‣Seer Snp 1116 Nd2 310
        • ˚ūpapatti rebirth among the gods Pv-a 6
        • ˚orohaṇa descent of the gods Dhp-a iii.443
        • ˚kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph SN i.200 Ja i.61 Vv-a 37 78
        • ˚kāya a particular group of gods SN i.200 Iti 77 Thag 2, 31
        • ˚kuñjara “elephant of the gods,” of Indra Ja v.158
        • ˚kumāra son of a god (cp. ˚putta) Ja iii.391
        • ˚gaṇa a troop of gods Ja i.203 Dhp-a iii.441
        • ˚gaha a temple chapel Vin iii.43
        • ˚cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka Vv-a 3 7, 165 etc
        • ˚ṭṭhāna heavenly seat Ja iii.55 a temple, sacred place Mil 91 Mil 330
        • ˚dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary Pv-a 145
        • ˚dattiya = ˚dattika Ja iii.37 Dhp-a i.278
        • ˚dāruka a species of pine Ja v.420
        • ˚dundubhi the celestial drum, i.e. thunder DN i.10 Mil 178 DN-a i.95
        • ˚dūta the god’s (i.e. Yama’s ‣See above 1˚) messenger AN i.138 142 MN ii.75 MN iii.179 Ja i.138 Dhp-a i.85 (tayo d.) Mhbv.122 (˚suttanta)
        • ˚ deva “the god of gods,” Ep of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Thag 1, 533 1278 (of Kappāyana) Dhs-a 1 Pv-a 140
        • ˚dhamma that which is divine or a god AN iii.277
        • (˚ika) Dhp-a iii.74
        • ˚dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), literally daughter of a god Ja ii.57 Vv-a 137 153 (with reference to Vimānapetīs) -nagara the city of the Devas, heaven Ja i.168 Ja i.202 Dhp-a i.280
        • ˚nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition DN ii.261 (sixty enumerated) SN iv.180 MN i.102f. AN i.63f.; ii.185; iii.249 sq. iv.55; v.18
        • ˚pañha questioning a god, using an oracle DN i.11 (= DN-a i.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataṁ otāretvā pañha-pucchanaṁ)
        • ˚parivāra a retinue of gods AN ii.91
        • ˚parisā the assembly of gods AN ii.185 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 241
        • ˚putta “son of a god,” a demi-god, a ministering god (cp. f deva-dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also applied to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) DN i.217 sq. cp. Ja i.48

          • DN ii.12 DN ii.14 SN i.46f.; 216 sq.; iv.280 AN i.278 Iti 76 Ja i.59 (jarā-jajjara); iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.) Pv-a 6 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto) Mil 23
          • ˚pura the city of the gods heaven SN iv.202 Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahānagara Vv-a 285) Ja iv.143
          • ˚bhava celestial existence Pv-a 167
          • ˚bhoga the wealth of the gods Pv-a 97
          • ˚manussā (
          • plural ) gods & men DN i.46, 62≈, 99 (˚mānuse) MN ii.38 55 Snp 14 (sa˚), 236 (˚pūjita), 521 Iti 80 (˚seṭṭhā) Kh viii.10; Kp-a 196 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 117; —˚loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i.e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā corresponding to sammuti-devā ‣See above); (2) samaṇas brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi-devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti-devā): Snp 1047 Snp 1063 ex
          • plural at Nd2 309 & (with different interpretations DN-a; i.174 sq
          • ˚yāna leading to the (world of the gods, i.e. the road to heaven Snp 139 also in ˚yāniya (magga) DN i.215
          • ˚rājā king of the devas, viz Sakka Nd1 177 Ja iii.392 (= devinda) Dhp-a iii.441 Pv-a 62
          • ˚rūpa divine appearance or form Pv-a 92
          • ˚loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens ‣See loka; when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka’s & Brahma’s heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saṁsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dhp 177 Ja i.202 203; iv.273 Thag-a 74 Kp-a 228 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 81 89; Vism 415, etc
          • ˚vimāna the palace of a deva Ja i.58 Vv-a 173
          • ˚saṅkhalikā a magic chain Ja ii.128 Ja v.92 Ja v.94
          • ˚sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas Iti 75 (three such sounds)
          Vedic deva, Indogermanic *dei̯ā to shine ‣See dibba & diva, originally adjective *deiṷos belonging to the sky, cp. Avestan daēvō (demon.), Latin deus, Lithuanian dë̃vas; Old High German Ƶīo; Anglo-Saxon Tīg genitive Tīwes (= Tuesday); Old Irish dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho Kp-a 123
    Devaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa˚-loka the world including the gods in general DN i.62 Nd2 309 Snp 86 Snp 377 Snp 443 Snp 760 etc. Mil 234 ‣See also devamanussa-loka
    deva + ka
    Devata
    adjective (—˚) having such & such a god as one’s special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Mil 234 (Brahma˚ + Brahma (garuka).
    • feminine ; devatā in pati “worshipping the husband,” i.e. a devoted wife Ja iii.406 Vv-a 128

    Devatā
    feminine
    1. “condition or state of a deva, divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd; 2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de-vatā = yesaṁ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion “ye yesaṁ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaṁ devatā”) is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā) to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky-god as devadevatā & disā-devatā)
    • Another definition at Vv-a 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati
    • Among the various deities the following are frequently mentioned:; rukkha˚; tree-gods or dryads MN i.306 Ja i.221 Pv-a 5
    • vatthu˚ earth gods (the four kings) Pv.41 Pv-a 17
    • vana˚ wood-nymphs MN i.306
    • samudda˚ water-sprites Ja ii.112 etc. etc. DN i.180 (mahiddhikā, plural ), 192; ii.8, 87, 139, 158 SN i. sq.; iv.302 MN i.245 MN ii.37 AN i.64 AN i.210 AN i.211 AN ii.70 (sapubba˚); iii.77 (bali-paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo) v.331 Snp 45 Snp 316 Snp 458 Snp 995 Snp 1043 Dhp 99 Ja i.59 Ja i.72 223, 256; iv.17, 474 Vv 163 Pv ii.110; Kp-a 113, 117 Pv-a 44
    1. ˚ānubhāva divine power or majesty Ja i.168
    • ˚ānussati “remembrance of the gods,” one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind DN iii.250 DN iii.280 cp. AN i.211 Vism 197
    • ˚uposatha a day of devotion to the gods AN i.211
    • ˚paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods Ja ii.104
    • ˚bali an offering to the gods AN ii.68
    • ˚bhāva at Pv-a 110 read as devattabhāva (opposite petattabhāva)
    deva + tā, qualitative-abstract suffix, like Latin juventa, senecta, Gothic hauhipa, Old High German fullida cp. Sanskrit pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.
    Devati
    1. to lament, etc. ‣See pari˚. cp. also parideva etc
    div
    Devatta
    neuter
    1. the state of being a deva, divinity Thag-a 70 Pv-a 110 (˚bhāva as Yakkha, opposite petatta bhāva; so read for devatā-bhāva)
    deva + tta
    Devattana
    neuter
    1. state or condition of a deva Thag 1, 1127 cp. petattana in the following verse
    = last
    Devara
    1. husband’s brother, brother-in-law Ja vi.152 Vv 326 (sa˚), popularly explained at Vv-a 135 as “dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā.”
    Sanskrit devṛ & devara Latin levir, Old High German zeihhur, Anglo-Saxon tācor
    Devasika
    adjective
    1. daily Ja v.383 DN-a i.296 (˚bhatta = bhattavetena) Dhp-a i.187f.-nt. ˚ṁ as adv daily, every day Ja i.82 Ja i.149 Ja i.186 Vv-a 67 75 Dhp-a i.28 Dhp-a ii.41
    Derived from divasa
    Desa
    1. point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin i.46 Vin ii.211 MN i.437 Ja i.308 Dhs-a 307 (˚bhūta) Pv-a 78 (˚antara probably to be read dos˚), 153 Kp-a 132, 227
    • desaṁ karoti to go abroad Ja v.340 (p. 342 has disaṁ)
    • kañcid-eva desaṁ pucchati to ask a little point DN i.51 MN i.229 AN v.39 sometimes as kiñcid-eva d. p. SN iii.101 MN iii.15 variant reading at DN i.51-desāgata pañha a question propounded, literally come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Mil 262
    Vedic deśa, cp. disā
    Desaka
    adjective
    1. pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217 Sdhp 519- neuter advice, instruction, lesson MN i.438
    2. Sanskrit deśaka
    Desanā
    feminine
    1. discourse, instruction, lesson SN v.83 SN v.108 Ja iii.84 Pug 28 Nett 38; Vism 523 sq (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda) Pv-a 1 Pv-a 2 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Frequently in dhamma˚; moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin i.16 AN i.53 ii.182; iv.337 sq. Iti 33 Ja i.106 etc. (a˚ gāminī āpatti) a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin ii.3 87; v.187 cp. Vinaya Texts ii.33
    2. (legal) acknowledgment Mil 344
    3. cp. ā˚
      1. ˚avasāne (locative ) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon Dhp-a iii.175 Pv-a 54
      2. ˚pariyosāne = proc Pv-a 9 Pv-a 31 etc
      3. ˚vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21
      4. Sanskrit deśanā
    Desika
    adjective
    1. = desaka, su˚; one who points out well, a good teacher Mil 195
    Sanskrit deśika
    Desita
    1. expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin iii.152 (marked out) v.137 DN ii.154 (dhamma) Dhp 285 (nibbāna) Pv-a 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given)
    past participle of deseti
    Desetar
    1. one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher MN i.221 MN i.249 AN i.266 iii.441; v.349
    agent noun to deseti
    Deseti
    1. to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very frequently in phrase dhammaṁ d. to deliver a moral discourse to preach the Dhamma Vin i.15 Vin ii.87 188; v.125, 136 DN i.241 AN ii.185 AN v.194 Iti 111 Ja i.168 Ja iii.394 Pug 57 Pv-a 6 aorist adesesi (SN i.196 = Th 1 1254) & desesi (Pv-a 2 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 78 etc.)-
    2. past participle desita (q.v.)
    3. Sanskrit deśayati, causative of disati, q.v.
    Dessa
    Dessiya;
    adjective
    1. disagreeable, odious, detestable Ja i.46 Ja ii.285 Ja iv.406 vi.570, Thag-a 268 Mil 281
    Sanskrit dveṣya, to dvis ‣See disa
    Dessati
    1. to hate, dislike, detest Snp-a 168 (= na piheti, opposite kāmeti)
    Sanskrit dviṣati & dveṣṭi ‣See etymology under disa
    Dessatā
    feminine
    1. repulsiveness Mil 281
    Sanskrit dvesyatā
    Dessin
    adjective
    1. hating, detesting Snp 92 (dhamma˚); better desin, cp. viddesin
    Sanskrit dveṣin
    Deha
    1. body AN ii.18 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 122. Usually in following phrases: hitvā mānusaṁ dehaṁ SN i.60 Pv ii.956; pahāya m. d. SN i.27 SN i.30 jahati d MN ii.73 ˚ṁ nikkhipati Pv ii.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo antima-deha-dhārin (˚dhāro) SN i.14 SN i.53 SN ii.278 Snp 471 Thag ii.7, 10 Iti 32 40, 50, 53. ˚nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236
    Sanskrit deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya = heap) ‣See diddha. So also in uddehaka. cp. Kern, Toevoegselen p. 75 s.v. sarīradeha. cp. Latin fingo & figura; Gothic deigan (knead) = Old High German teig = English dough
    Dehaka
    neuter = deha;
    • plural limbs Thag 2, 392 cp. Thag-a 258

    Dehin
    adjective-noun that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, 16.
    Doṇa
    a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv iv.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula˚ a doṇa of rice Dhp-a iii.264 iv.15. At Ja ii.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka ‣See below.
    1. ˚pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food SN i.81 Dhp-a ii.8
    • ˚māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa-revenue (of rice) Ja ii.367 Ja ii.378 Ja ii.381 Dhp-a iv.88
    • ˚mita a d measure full DN i.54 MN i.518
    Sanskrit droṇa neuter connection with *dereṷo tree, wood, wooden ‣See dabbi & dāru & cp. Sanskrit druṇī pail
    Doṇika
    adjective
    1. measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin i.240 (catu˚ piṭaka)
    from doṇa
    Doṇikā
    feminine = donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin i.286 (rajana˚ for dyeing); ii.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka˚), 221 (vacca˚ used for purposes of defaecation) ‣See also passāva˚.
    Donī1
    feminine
    1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub SN ii.259 AN i.253 AN v.323 Ja i.450 Mil 56-tela˚ an oil vat AN iii.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus)
    2. a trough-shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon “a long flat-bottomed boat made of unḍi wood,” Kanarese ḍoni “a canoe hallowed from a log”] Ja iv.163 (= gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164) Pv-a 189
    3. a hollow dug in the ground Mil 397

      • the body of a lute, the sounding-board (?)] i.450 Mil 53 Vv-a 281
    Sanskrit droṇī ‣See doṇa
    Doṇī2
    feminine
    1. an oil-giving plant (?) (or is it = donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -nimmiñjana oil-cake Pv i.1010 as ˚nimmijjani at Vv 3338 explained by telamiñjaka at Pv-a 51 & by tilapiññāka at Vv-a 147
    Sanskrit droṇi?
    Dobbhagga
    neuter
    1. ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277 Dhp-a 281 (text: ˚dobhagga)
    Sanskrit daurbhāgya from duḥ + bhāga
    Dobha
    1. fraud, cheating DN ii.243 (variant reading dobbha = dubbha)
    ‣See dubbha
    Domanassa
    neuter
    1. distress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaṁ asātaṁ cet. dukkhaṁ SN v.209 = Nd2 312; cp. DN ii.306 Nett 12) opposed to dukkha physical pain ‣See dukkha B IIi.1 a). A synonym of domanassaṁ is appaccaya (q.v.) For definition of the term ‣See Vism 461 504. The frequently combination dukkha-domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body ‣See dukkha B Iii.1 b; e.g. SN iv.198 SN v.141 MN ii.64 AN i.157 Iti 89 etc. the contrary of somanassaṁ with which dom˚ is combined to denote “happiness & unhappiness,” joy & dejection e.g. DN iii.270 MN ii.16 AN i.163 Snp 67 ‣See somanassa- Vin i.34 DN ii.278 DN ii.306 SN iv.104 SN iv.188 SN v.349 SN v.451 MN i.48 MN i.65 MN i.313 MN i.340 MN ii.51 MN iii.218 AN i.39 (abhijjhā covetousness & dejection ‣See abhijjhā); ii.5, 149 sq. iii.99, 207; v.216 sq. Snp 592 Snp 1106 Pug 20 59; Nett 12 29 (citta-sampīḷanaṁ d.) 53, Dhs 413 421, 1389 Vb 15 54, 71, 138 sq.; Dhp i.121
    1. ˚indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief DN iii.239 (+ som˚) SN v.209f.
    2. ˚upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind DN iii.245
    • ˚patta dejected, disappointed Ja ii.155
    Sanskrit daurmanasya, duḥ + manas
    Dolā
    feminine
    1. a swing Ja iv.283 Ja vi.341 Vism 280 (in simile)
    Sanskrit dolā, *del as in Anglo-Saxon tealtian = English tilt, adjective tealt unstable = Sanskrit dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman
    Dolāyati
    1. to swing, to move to & fro Ja ii.385
    denominative of dolā
    Dovacassa
    neuter
    1. unruliness indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness SN ii.204 sq (˚karaṇā dhammā) MN i.95 (identical specified) AN ii.147 iii.178; Nett 40, 127
    contamination of Sanskrit *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance
    Dovacassatā
    feminine
    1. unruliness, contumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy AN i.83 AN iii.310 AN iii.448 v.146 sq. DN iii.212 DN iii.274 Pug 20 Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs translation p. 344) Vb 359 369, 371
    2nd abstract of dovacassa
    Dovacassiya
    neuter = dovacassa Pug 20 Dhs 1325
    Dovārika
    1. gatekeeper, janitor Vin i.269 DN ii.83 DN iii.64f. 100 SN iv.194 MN i.380f. AN iv.107 AN iv.110 AN v.194 Ja ii.132 Ja iv.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa-kucchi), 447 vi.367 Mil 234 Mil 332 Vism 281; Sdhp 356
    cp. Sanskrit dauvārika ‣See dvāra
    Dovila
    adjective
    1. being in the state of fructification, budding Ja vi.529 (cp. p. 530) Mil 334
    Sanskrit ?
    Dosa1
    1. corruption blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted state; usually—˚, as khetta˚ blight of the field Mil 360 tiṇa˚ spoilt by weeds Dhp 356 Pv-a 7 visa ill effect of poison Thag 1, 758 768; sneha˚ blemish of sensual affection Snp 66 Four kasiṇa-dosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq
    • J ii.417; iii.104 Mil 330 (sabba-d
    • virahita faultless) DN-a i.37 141
    • plural dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Mil 43 adj with disturbed humours Mil 172 cp. DN-a i.133
    Sanskrit doṣa to an Indogermanic *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in
    Dosa2
    1. anger, ill-will evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred In most frequently combination of either rāga (lust) d. & moha; (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha ‣See rāga & lobha to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For def; n ‣See Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd; 2 313 as “cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho … kopo.. kodho … vyāpatti."-The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DN-a; i.116 as: dosa = dubbalakodha; paṭigha = balavakodha
    • In combination lobha d moha e.g. SN i.98 MN i.47 MN i.489 AN i.134 AN i.201 AN ii.191 iii.338 Iti 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga moha; : Dhp 20 Iti 2 = 6; with rāga & avijjā; Iti 57
    • rāga & māna; Snp 270 Snp 631 etc
    • See for reference: Vin i.183 DN iii.146 DN iii.159 DN iii.182 DN iii.214 DN iii.270 SN i.13 SN i.15 SN i.70 SN v.34f. MN i.15 MN i.96f. 250 sq., 305 AN i.187 AN ii.172 AN ii.203 iii.181 Snp 506 Iti 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiṁ); Ps i.80 sq., 102 Pug 16 18 Dhs 418 982 1060 Vb 86 167, 208, 362; Nett 13, 90; Sdhp 33 43
    • Variously characterised as: 8 purisa-dosā Vb 387 khila, nīgha, mala SN v.57 agati (4 agati-gamanāni chanda, d. moha, bhaya) DN iii.228 cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaṁ AN iii.357f.; its relation to kamma AN i.134 AN iii.338 v.262; to ariyamagga SN v.5 SN v.8
    • sadosa corrupted depraved, wicked DN i.80 AN i.112
    • adosa absence of ill-will, adjective kind, friendly, sympathetic AN i.135 AN i.195 AN i.203 ii.192 Vb 169 210 Dhs 33 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 21, 99) Vv-a 14 (+ alobha amoha)
    1. ˚aggi the fire of anger or ill-will DN iii.217 SN iv.19f. Iti 92 (+ rāgaggi moh˚) Ja i.61
    • ˚antara
    • adjective bearing anger, intending evil in one’s heart Vin ii.249 DN iii.237 MN i.123 AN i.59 AN iii.196f.; v.81 (opposite metta-citta) perhaps at Pv-a 78 (for des˚)
    • ˚kkhaya the fading away dying out of anger or malice SN iii.160 SN iii.191 SN iv.250 SN v.8 Vb 73 89
    • ˚gata = dosa (+ paṭigha) SN iv.71
    • ˚garu full of anger SN i.24
    • ˚dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dhp 357
    • ˚ saññita connected with ill-will Iti 78
    • ˚sama like anger Dhp 202
    • ˚hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity. AN v.261 (pāṇātipāta). Dosaniya, Dosaniya & Dosaneyya;
    Sanskrit dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa ‣See under disa
    Dosaniya, Dosanīya
    Dosaneyya;

    adjective

    1. corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful sinful SN iv.307 AN ii.120 Iti 84 (where AN iii.110 has dussanīya in same context)
    gerundive formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely = Sanskrit *dūṣanīya = dūṣya ‣See dussa2 & dussati influenced by dveṣaṇīya
    Dosā
    feminine
    1. evening, dusk. Only in accusative as
    2. adverb dosaṁ (= doṣāṁ) at night Ja vi.386
    3. Sanskrit doṣā & doṣas; to set (of the sun)
    Dosin
    adjective
    1. angry Ja v.452 Ja v.454
    to dosa2
    Dosinā
    feminine [ Sanskrit jyotsnā, cp. Pali juṇhā) a clear night, moonlight; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti “lovely is the moonlight night” DN i.47≈J i.509 Ja v.262 Mil 5 Mil 19 etc. explained in popular fashion by Buddhaghosa as “dosâpagatā” ratti DN-a i.141
    1. -puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Thag 1, 306 1119 -mukha the face of a clear night Ja vi.223
    Doha1
    1. milking, milk Ja v.63 Ja v.433
    Sanskrit doha & dogha
    Doha2
    adjective
    1. injuring (—˚) DN-a i.296
    Sanskrit droha
    Dohaka
    1. a milk-pail Ja v.105
    Sanskrit doha
    Dohati
    1. to milk
    • pres. 1
    • plural ; dohāma & duhāma; Ja v.105 preterite 1
    • plural duhāmase ibid.; pot duhe Jvi.211;
    • absolutive duhitvā Snp-a 27
    • past participle duddha (q.v
    • passive duyhati SN i.174 (so read for duhanti) Ja v.307 ppr. duyhamāna Mil 41
    • ‣ See also dūhana, doha1 dohin
    Sanskrit dogdhi, to which probably duhitṛ daughter ‣See under dhītā & cp. dhenu
    Dohaḷa
    1. (a) the longing of a pregnant woman Ja iii.28 Ja iii.333 Dhp-a i.350 Dhp-a ii.139-(b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general Ja ii.159 Ja ii.433 Ja v.40 Ja v.41 vi.263, 308 Dhp-a ii.86 (dhammika d.)
    Sanskrit dohada & daurhṛda, of du + hṛd, sick longing, sickness ‣See hadaya. Lüders; Gōttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi + hṛd
    Dohaḷāyati
    1. to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) Ja vi.263
    denominative from dohaḷa
    Dohaḷinī
    1. (adjective feminine ) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general Ja ii.395 Ja ii.435 Ja iii.27 iv.334; v.330 (= gabbhinī); vi.270, 326, 484 Dhp-a iii.95
    Dohin
    adjective noun one who milks, milking MN i.220f. = AN v.347f. (anavasesa˚ milking out fully).
    Drūbha
    1. incorrect spelling for dubbha (q.v.) in adrūbhāya Vin i.347
    Dva˚
    1. ; in numeral composition, meaning two etc ‣See under dvi B III
    Dvaya
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective (a) twofold Snp 886 (saccaṁ musā ti dvayadhammaṁ) Dhp 384 Pv iv.129 (dvayaṁ vipākaṁ = duvidhaṁ Pv-a 228)-advaya single. AN v.46
    • (b) false, deceitful Vin iii.21-nt. a duality, a pair, couple SN ii.17 (˚ṁ nissito loko) Ja iii.395 (gātha˚) Pv-a 19 (māsa˚) Dhp-a ii.93 (pada two lines, “couplet”)
    1. ˚kārin “doing both,” i.e. both good & evil deeds (su˚ & duccaritaṁ) SN iii.241 cp. 247 sq. DN iii.96
    Vedic dvaya; cp. dvi B i.6
    Dvā
    1. (cp. dva˚) ‣See dvi B III
    Dvāra
    neuter [Vedic dvār
    • feminine & dvāra
    • neuter, base; *dhvār, cp. Avestan dvarəm; Latin fores (gate), forum Gothic daúr, Old High German turi = German tür, Anglo-Saxon dor = English door. 1. literally an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin i.15 SN i.58 SN i.138 SN i.211 Ja i.346 Ja ii.63 Ja vi.330 Vb 71f. Pv-a 4 Pv-a 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54 Sdhp 356

      • That d. cannot be used for an inner door ‣See Vin ii.215 on knocking at a d ‣See DN-a i.252; cp. Dhp-a i.145 (dvāraṁ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock thaketi. dvāraṁ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin ii.220
      • mahā˚ the main or city gate Ja i.63
      • culla˚ Ja ii.114
      • catu˚
      • adjective having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv i.1013
      • cha˚ with 6d. (nagaraṁ, with reference to the 6 doors of the senses ‣See below) SN iv.194
      • pure˚ the front d Ja ii.153
      • pacchima˚ the back d. Ja vi.364
      • uttara˚ the English gate (Pv-a 74); nagara˚; the city gate (J i.263; deva Dhp-a i.280); gāma˚; the village g. (Vin iii.52 Ja ii.110) ghara˚; (J iv.142 Pv-a 38) & geha˚; (Pv-a 61) the house door; antepura˚; the door of the inner chamber MN ii.100
      • kula˚ the doors of the clan-people Snp 288
      • metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata˚ SN i.137 AN v.346 2. (figuratively) the doors = in-& outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta-dvāra (adjective guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind) ‣See gutta (e.g. SN ii.218 SN iv.103 & cp. ; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 175)
      • SN iv.117 SN iv.194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city) Vv-a 72 (kāya-vacī˚). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in
      • feminine abstract guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors ‣See gutta
      1. ˚kavāṭa a door post Ja i.63 Ja ii.334 Ja vi.444 Pv-a 280
      • ˚koṭṭhaka [cp. Sanskrit dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. Avs i.24, 31 gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52 65 Ja i.290 iii.2; iv.63, 229 Vv-a 6 160 Dhp-a i.50 Dhp-a ii.27 46 iv.204; Vism 22 Mil 10

        • bahidvārakoṭṭhake or ˚ā outside the gate MN i.382 MN ii.92 AN iii.31 AN iv.206
        • ˚gāma a village outside the city gates, i.e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma Ja i.361) Ja iii.126 (˚gāmaka), 188 iv.225 Dhp-a ii.25 (˚ka)
        • ˚toraṇa a gateway Ja iii.431
        • ˚pānantara at Ja vi.349 should be read ˚vātapānantara -pidahana shutting the door Vism 78
        • ˚bāhā a door post SN i.146 Pv i.51 Dhp-a iii.273
        • ˚bhatta food scattered before the door Snp 286
        • ˚vātapāna a door-window Vin ii.211 Ja vi.349
        • ˚sālā a hall with doors MN i.382 ii.61
    Dvārika
    1. (—˚) adjective referring or belonging to the door of-; in cha ˚ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) Dhp-a iv.221 & kāya˚; -saṁvara control over the “bodily” door, i.e. over action (opp speech) Pv-a 10 (so read for kāyañ cārika˚).

    Dvi

    1. ] number two
    1. A. Meanings-I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combination (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this connection frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. English g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants’ tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake) ‣See also dutiya & dvaya
    • dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Sn 1001), dānāni (It 98), piyā, phalāni (Sn 896 Iti 39), mittā, sinehā etc ‣See Nd2 under dve, cp. AN i.47 100 DN iii.212–⁠214
    • (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.) ‣See dvidhā & compounds
    • with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a); only two (i.e. next to one or “next to nothing”), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii.42), two sons of Rachel (genitive 30) dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin ii.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv i.67); dvevācika; duvangula ‣See below
    • (b) a few-more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a; very long time): māsadvayaṁ a couple of months dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands (= a large number) diyaḍḍhasata 150 = very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3 a couple of days) q.v.; dvirattatiratta (identical of nights) dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (Pv-a 47); dvatikkhattuṁ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuṁ (more than once), dutiyaṁ (for the 2nd time)
    1. II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other; decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak “a year & a day.” English g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely 10 + 2 ‣See sep.); -32 : rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30 + 2 the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair; -62 views of heresy ‣See diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity 60 kappas + 2; -92 : as measure of eternity = 90 + 2 kappas = a year & a day
    1. III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saṁvaccharo Vv-a 247)
    • Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob genitive 35, 22 cakes as shewbread Lev.25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus Pv-a 67 Pv-a 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Snp 677 five groups of 12 musicians Vv-a 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge)
    • (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance Vv-a 16 12 y. as respectful distance Pv-a 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna-petas or Yakkhas Vv.55; 1 Ja vi.116 Vv-a 6 217, 244, 291, 298 etc. In the same connection we frequently find the No. 16: solasa-yojanikaṁ kanaka-vimānaṁ Vv 671 Vv-a 188 289 etc
    • Of years: Ja iii.80 Vv-a 157 (dvādasa-vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12 soḷasa-vassuddesika Vv-a 259 etc ‣See soḷasa)
    1. B. Bases & Forms; -I. dvi; main base for numeral nominativenal composition & derivation, in:
    1. 1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nominative accusative ; dve (Sn p. 107 Iti 98 Ja i.150 Ja iv.137 etc.) & (in verse); duve (Sn 896, 1001); genitive dative dvinnaṁ (It 39, 40, 98 Ja ii.154) instrumental dvīhi (J i.87: variant reading dīhi; 151; ii.153);
    2. locative dvīsu (J i.203 Pv-a 47) & duvesu (Vv 412).

      1. 2. as numeral base: -sahassa 2000 ‣See A i.2b Ja i.57 Vv-a 261 Pv-a 74 also in dvittā and adverb dvikkhattuṁ twice & dvidhā in two parts

        • (b) as nominativenal base:-(r)āvaṭṭa [Sanskrit dviḥ cp. Latin bis
        1. turning twice SN i.32
        • ˚ja “twice born,” i.e. a bird Ja i.152 (gaṇā) -jātin one who is born twice, i.e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (Thag-a 269 = brahmajātin)
        • ˚tālamatta of the size of 2 palms Dhp-a ii.62
        • ˚pad Sanskrit dvipad, Latin bipes, Gr etc.
          1. a biped, man SN i.6
          • ˚pala twofold Vism 339 -pādaka = dvipad Vin ii.110
          • ˚bandhu having two friends Ja vi.281
          • ˚rattatiratta two or three nights Vin iv.16 also in dvīha two days (q.v.)

            1. 3. as diaeretic form duvi˚:-ja (cp. dija) “growing again” i.e. a tooth Ja v.156
            1. 4. as contracted form di˚:-(y)aḍḍha one and a half (literally the second half, cp. German anderthalb) Dhp 235 Ja i.72 (diyaḍḍha-yojana-satika 150 y. long or high etc.) 202; iv.293 (˚yāma) Dhp-a i.395 DN-a i.17 Mil 243 Mil 272 Dhs-a 12
            • ˚guṇa twofold, double Vin i.289 Snp 714 Ja v.309 Mil 84 Dhp-a ii.6 Vv-a 63 120
            • ˚ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) “twice-born,” a bird SN i.224 Snp 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd2 296) Ja i.152 Ja i.203 ii.205; iv.347; v.157; Pv ii.124 Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 178) Mil 295

              • (b) a brahmin Thag-a, 70, 73
              • ˚jivha “twotongued,” i.e. a snake (cp. du˚) Ja iii.347
              • ˚pad (-pada or-pa) a biped (cp. dvi˚) AN i.22 AN v.21 Snp 83 (dipa-duttama), 995 (identical) 998 Dhp 273
              • ˚pādaka = ˚pad Thag 1 453 = Sn 205
              1. 5. as sec. compound form (with guṇa) dve˚; (and de˚) -caturaṅga twice fourfold-eightfold Thag 1, 520 (˚gāmin)
              2. ˚patha a “double” path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 (-sīmantika-patha Vv-a 241)
              3. ˚piccha having two tail-feathers Ja v.341 (cp. de˚)
              4. ˚pitika having two feathers Ja v.424
              • ˚bhāva doubling k
              • accusative 21
              • ˚māsika two months old Pv i.67
              • ˚vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa-formula), Vin i.4 Ja i.81
              • ˚sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight cp. Sanskrit dvisapta
                1. Ja vi.230
                • ‣ See also derived from numer.
                • adverb dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha) dvedhā˚, dveḷhaka
                1. 6. as noun-derivation dvaya a dyad (q.v.)
                1. II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominativenal compound & der; n:
                1. ˚(v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q.v.) Vv 6419 (= dubhato Vv-a 281)
                2. ˚(v)aṅgika consisting of two parts Dhs 163
                • ˚(v)aṅgula & dvaṅgula; two finger-breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure ‣See above AN I.2a Vin ii.107 iv.262; usually in compounds

                  • kappa the 2 inch rule, i.e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin ii.294 306 -pannā wisdom of 2 finger-breadths, i.e. that of a woman SN i.129 = Th 2, 60 (dvanguli˚, at Thag-a 66 as ˚saññā); -buddhika = ˚paññā Vv-a 96
                  • ˚jivha twotongued (cp. di˚); a snake Ja iv.330 Ja v.82 Ja v.425
                  • ˚paṭṭa “double cloth” (Hindi dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen i.179) Ja i.119 Ja iv.114 Ja iv.379 (ratta˚) Dhp-a i.249 (suratta˚) iii.419 (˚cīvarā)
                  • ˚matta (about) 2 in measure Mil 82
                  • ˚māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair Vin ii.107
                  • ˚vagga consisting of two Vin i.58
                  • ˚vassa 2 years old Vin i.59
                  • ˚vidha twofold, instrumental duvidhena MN iii.45f.; etc
                  • Derivations from du˚ ‣See sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms; dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya)
                  1. III. dvā (& reduced; dva, base in numeral compound only: dvatikkhattuṁ two or three times Ja i.506 DN-a i.133 264 Dhp-a iv.38
                  • dvādasa twelve (on meaning of this & following numerals ‣See above AN II. & III.) Ja iii.80 vi.116 Dhp-a i.88 Dhp-a iii.210 Vv-a 156 247 etc.; ˚yojanika Ja i.125 Ja iv.499
                  • dvāvīsati (22) Vv-a 139
                  • dvattiṁsa (32) Kh ii. (˚ākāra the 32 constituents of the body) Dhp-a ii.88 Vv-a 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd2 15 Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd2 271iii. & dvaṭṭhi (62) DN i.54 SN iii.211 DN-a i.162); dvānavuti (92) Pv-a 19 Pv-a 21-Note. AN singular case of dva as
                  • adverb = twice is in dvâhaṁ Snp 1116
                  Sanskrit dvi, dva etc Bases: I. dvi = Sanskrit dvi in dvipad = Latin bipēs (from dṷipēs), Anglo-Saxon twiféte; dvidant = bidens. Reduced to di ‣See B I.4 as in Latin du-plex, dubius etc.)
                • III. dvā (& dva) = Sanskrit dvāu, dvā, feminine neuter dve (declined as dual, but the Pali (
                • plural ) inflexion from base I ‣See B I.; 1); Latin duo; Old Irish dāu, dā, feminine dī; Gothic twai, feminine twōs; Anglo-Saxon twā (= English two); Old High German zwēne, zwō zwei. Also in compound numeral dva-daśa twelve = Latin duodecim
    Dvikkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. twice Nd2 on Snp 1116 (= dva) Nd2 296 (jāyati dijo) ‣See dvi B i.2a
    Sanskrit *dvikṛtvaḥ
    Dvittā
    1. (plural )

      1. two or three SN i.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaṁ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha 108)
      Sanskrit dvitrā ‣See dvi B i.2a
    Dvidhā
    numeral
    • adverb

      1. in two parts, in two MN i.114 Ja i.253 (karoti), 254 (chindati) 298 (identical); iii.181; iv.101 (jāta disagreeing); vi.368 (bhindati) ‣See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka
      1. ˚gata gone to pieces Ja v.197
      • ˚patha a twofold way a crossing; only figuratively doubt Siii.108 MN i.142 MN i.144 Ud 90 ‣See also dvedhāpatha
      Sanskrit dvidhā ‣See dvi B i.2a
    Dvīha
    adverb
    1. two days; dvīhena in 2 days SN ii.192 dvīha-mata 2 days dead MN i.88 MN iii.91
    1. ˚tīha 2 or 3 days (˚ṁ adverb ) (on meaning cp. dvi AN I.2b) DN i.190 (˚assa accayena after a few days) Ja ii.316 Dhp-a iii.21 (˚accayena identical, gloss: katipāh’ accayena) DN-a i.190 (˚ṁ) 215 Vv-a 45
    2. Sanskrit dvis-ahnah ‣See dvi B I.2b
    Dvīhika
    adjective every other day MN i.78
    Dvīhitika
    adjective
    1. to be gained or procured with difficulty (i.e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase "dubbhikkhā d setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā,” of a famine Vin iii.6 15, 87 iv.23 SN iv.323 On the term & its explanation by Buddhaghosa (at Vin iii.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī … dukkhena īhitaṁ ettha pavattatī ti) ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen i.122
    • Note. Buddhaghosa’s explanation is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolvedic The case of du; 1 appearing as du-(and not as dur-) before a vowel is most peculiar there may be a connection with druh ‣See duhana, which is even suggested by variant readings at SN iv.223 as dūhitika duhitika (q.v.) Dve & Dve;
    du-īhitika, of du1 + īhati
    Dve
    Dve˚;
    1. ‣See dvi B 1 & 5
    Dvejjha
    adjective
    1. divided, twofold, only in negative advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory AN iii.403 Ja iv.77 Nd2 30 (+ adveḷhaka) Mil 141
    • cp. dejjha
    Sanskrit dvaidhya; cp. dvi B i.5
    Dvejjhatā
    feminine
    1. in ; undividedness Ja iv.76
    from preceding
    Dvedhā
    adverb
    1. in two Ja v.203 Ja v.206 (˚sira) Dhp-a ii.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder)
    Sanskrit dvedhā, cp. dvidhā
    Dvedhāpatha
    1. (a) a double, i.e. a branching road; a cross-road Dhp-a ii.192 Mil 17 (b) doubt Dhp 282 Dhs 1004 1161 Vism 313
    cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5
    Dveḷhaka
    neuter
    1. doubt Vin iii.309 Dhs 1004 1161 DN-a i.68 Dhs-a 259
    • ˚citta uncertain Pv-a 13
    • ˚jāta in doubt Vin iii.309 DN iii.117f.; 210

      • adveḷhaka (adjective sure, certain, without doubt Nd2 30 (+ advejjha)
      1. Dh
      Sanskrit *dvaidhaka from adverb dvidhā, cp. dvi B i.5

    Dh

    Dhaṁsati
    1. to fall from, to be deprived of (c. ablative) to be gone DN iii.184 (with ablative asmā lokā dh.) AN ii.67 v.76, 77 Iti 11 Thag 1, 225 610 Ja iii.260 Ja iii.318 Ja iii.441 Ja iii.457 iv.611; v.218, 375. causative dhaṁseti Sanskrit dhvaṁsayati but more likely = Sanskrit dharṣayati (to infest, molest Latin infestare. On similar sound-change Pali dhaṁs˚ → Sanskrit dharṣ cp. Pali daṁseti → Sanskrit darśayati).
    2. causative of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Latin festus, Gothic gadars = English dare; Old High German gitar
      1. to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune DN i.211 SN iii.123 Snp 591 Ja iii.353 Mil 227 Sdhp 357 Sdhp 434. cp. pa˚, pari˚
      Vedic dhvaṁsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Indogermanic dheṷes to fly like dust, cp. Sanskrit dhūsara “dusky” Anglo-Saxon dust; German dust & dunst; English dusk & dust; prob also Latin furo
    Dhaṁsana
    1. (n adjective)
      1. destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula˚ as variant reading to kula-gandhana (q.v.) at Iti 64 and in dhaṁsanatā at Dhp-a iii.353 in explanation of dhaṁsin (q.v.)
      Sanskrit dharṣana
    Dhaṁsin
    adjective-noun
    1. obtrusive, bold, offensive MN i.236 AN ii.182 Dhp 244 (= Dhp-a iii.353 paresaṁ guṇaṁ dhaṁsanatāya dh.)
    Sanskrit dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti ‣See dhaṁseti
    Dhaṅka
    1. a crow SN i.207 SN ii.258 Snp 271 = Nd2 420 Ja ii.208 Ja v.107 Ja v.270 Ja vi.452 Pv iii.52 (= kāka Pv-a 198) Vv-a 334
    Sanskrit dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā
    Dhaja
    a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin i.306
    1. (titthiya˚: outward signs of); ii.22 (gihi˚) SN i.42 SN ii.280 AN ii.51 AN iii.84f. (panna˚) MN i.139 (identical) AN iii.149 (dhamma) Ja i.52 (+ patākā) Vv-a 173 (identical) Ja i.65 (arahad ˚;)Th i.961 Ja v.49 = Mil 221 Ja v.509 vi.499 Nd1 170 Vv 361 6428 (subhāsita˚ = dhamma Vv-a 284) Dhs 1116 1233; Vism 469 (+ paṭȧka, in comparison) Pv-a 282 Vv-a 31 73 Mil 21 Sdhp 428 Sdhp 594. cp. also panna
    1. ˚agga the top of a standard SN i.219 AN iii.89f. Pug 67 68; Vism 414 (˚paritta)
    2. ˚ālu adorned with flags Thag 1, 164 = J ii.334 (: dhajasampanna Commentary )
    3. ˚āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin iii.139 140; Vism 63
    4. ˚baddha captured (= ˚āhaṭa Vin i.74 (cora)
    Sanskrit dhvaja, cp. Old High German tuoh “cloth” (from *dwōko)
    Dhajinī
    feminine
    1. “bearing a standard,” i.e. an army, legion Snp 442 (= senā Snp-a 392)
    Sanskrit dhvajinī, feminine to adjective dhvajin
    Dhañña1
    neuter
    1. grain, corn. The usual enumeration comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain-fruit proper (“corn”) but includes, like other enumns, pulse ‣Seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice-sorts), yava (barley) godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans) kudrūsaka (?) Vin iv.264 Nd2 314 DN-a i.78
    • Nd2 314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural pubbaṇṇa & the prepared (; aparaṇṇa kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry) ‣See also bīja-bīja
    • Six sorts are mentioned at MN i.57 viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. DN i.5
    • āmaka˚ , q.v.) AN ii.209 (identical) MN i.180 AN ii.32 (+ dhana) Thag 1, 531 Pug 58 Dhp-a i.173 Vv-a 99 Pv-a 29 (dhanaṁ vā Dhp ˚ṁ vā), 198 (sāsapa-tela-missitaṁ) 278 (sappi-madhu-tela-dhaññādīhi vohăraṁ katvā)-dhaññaṁ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv iii.54 (= mangalaṁ karoti Pv-a 198 ‣See also mangala)
    1. ˚āgāra a store house for grain Vin i.240
    • ˚piṭaka a basket full of grain Dhp-a iii.370
    • ˚rāsi a heap of g AN iv.163 AN iv.170
    • ˚samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain MN i.451
    Vedic dhānya, derived from dhana
    Dhañña2
    adjective
    1. “rich in corn,” rich ‣See dhana happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combination dhanadhañña- Dhp-a i.171 Dhp-a iii.464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i.e. lucky) Dhs-a 116
    • dhaññapuñña-lakkhaṇa a sign of
    • future good fortune & merit Pv-a 161 as adjective endowed with the mark of … Ja vi.3 ‣See also dhāniya
    Sanskrit dhānya, adjective to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya
    Dhata
    1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved AN iii.114 Dāvs v.52–⁠2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95 AN i.36
    2. Sanskrit dhṛta, past participle of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti
    Dhana
    neuter
    1. wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures 1.; Literally DN i.73 (sa˚) MN ii.180 AN iii.222 AN iv.4f. Nd2 135 (+ yasa, issariya etc.) Thag 2, 464 (+ issariya) Ja i.225 (paṭhavigataṁ karoti: hide in the ground), 262 289; ii.112; iv.2 Snp 60 Snp 185 Snp 302 Pv ii.610 Dhp-a i.238 Often in combination aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth ‣See aḍḍha Pv-a 3 Pv-a 214 etc (‣ See also below ˚dhañña)
    • figuratively Used in the expression sattavidha-ariya-dhana “the 7 fold noble treasure” of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā cāga etc ‣See enumerated under cāga DN iii.163 DN iii.164 DN iii.251 Vv-a 113 Thag-a 240
    1. ˚agga the best treasure (i.e. the ariya-dhana) DN iii.164
    • ˚atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Snp 987
    • ˚āsā craving for wealth
    • ˚kkīta bought for money Dhp-a ii.3 -thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Snp 104
    • ˚dhañña, usually Dvandva-compound “money & money’s worth,” but as adjective (always in phrase pahūta˚) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa “rich in treasures,” otherwise “possessing money & money’s worth” cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā Ja i.3 As
    • noun Pv i.1111 iii.104 Pv-a 60 Mil 2 Mil 280 as adjective frequently “pahūtadhana-dhañña Vv 6313 = Pv ii.611: Pv-a 97 Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. DN iii.163f. SN i.71 AN ii.86
    • ˚parājaya loss of money, as adjective ap
    • plural to kali: the dice marking loss in game Snp 659
    • ˚lobha “greed of gold Ja iv.1
    • ˚lola = lobha Ja ii.212
    • ˚viriya wealth & power Snp 422
    • ˚hetu for the sake of wealth Snp 122
    Vedic dhana; usually taken to dhā ‣See dadhāti as “stake, prize at game, booty,” cp. pradhāna & Gr; ; but more likely in originally meaning “grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.,” cp. Lithuanian dūna bread, Sanskrit dhānā plural grains & dhañña = dhana-like, i.e. corn grain
    Dhanatta
    neuter
    1. being bent on having money Ja v.449
    Sanskrit *dhanatvaṁ
    Dhanavant
    adjective
    1. wealthy Nd2 462 Ja i.3
    Sanskrit dhanavant
    Dhanāyati
    1. to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after MN i.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati ‣See formula under allīyati, and note MN i.552)
    denominative to dhana
    Dhanika
    1. a creditor, Thag 2, 443 Thag-a, 271 Pv-a 276 cp. dhaniya
    Sanskrit dhanika
    Dhanita
    1. sounded; as nt sonant (said of a letter) Mil 344
    Sanskrit dhvanita, past participle of dhvan, cp. Anglo-Saxon dyn noise = English din; Anglo-Saxon dynnan to sound loud
    Dhaniya
    1. = dhanika Vin i.76
    Dhanu
    neuter
    1. a bow MN i.429 Ja i.50 Ja i.150 ii.88; iv.327 Pv-a 285
    1. ˚kalāpa bow & quiver Vin ii.192 MN i.86 MN ii.99 AN iii.94 Pv-a 154
    • ˚kāra a bow maker Mil 331
    • ˚kārika name of a tree Ja v.420
    • ˚kārin = preceding Ja v.422 (= ˚pāṭali)
    • ˚ggaha an archer DN i.51 AN ii.48 AN iv.107 Ja i.58 Ja i.356 Ja ii.87 Ja ii.88 iii.220 (dhanuggaha) Ja iii.322 v.129 (where 4 kinds are enumerated); Vism 150 (in simile) DN-a i.156
    • ˚takkāri
    • feminine a plant Ja vi.535
    • ˚pāṭali name of a tree Ja v.422
    • ˚lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow DN i.9
    Sanskrit dhanus, to Old High German tanna fir-tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru
    Dhanuka
    neuter
    1. a (small) bow Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 DN i.7 AN iii.75 AN v.203 Ja vi.41 Mil 229 DN-a i.86
    Sanskrit dhanuṣka
    Dhanta
    1. blown, sounded AN i.253 Ja i.283 Ja i.284
    Sanskrit dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita from dhvan to sound, or dhamita from dhmā to blow ‣See dhameti
    Dhama
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. blowing, noun a blower, player (on a horn: sankha˚) DN i.251 SN iv.322
      Sanskrit dhama, to dhamati
    Dhamaka
    1. (—˚) adjective one who blows Mil 31 ‣See vaṁsa˚, sankh˚, singa˚.

    Dhamati
    1. to blow, to sound (a drum) to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe AN i.254 iv.169 Ja i.283 Ja i.284 Ja vi.441 Nd1 478 Mil 262 ppr. dhamāna SN i.106 Mil 67 causative dhameti to blow (an instrument) Ja ii.110 Mil 31 and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle Dhp-a i.442
    2. past participle dhanta dhanita; (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. cp. uddhana)
    3. Vedic dhamati, dhmā, past participle Dhp amita & dhmāta, cp. Old High German dampf “steam”
    Dhamadhamāyati
    1. to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Mil 117
    cp. Sanskrit dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati
    Dhamani
    feminine
    1. a vein Thag 1, 408 Usually in compound: -santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i.e. emaciated (: nimmaṁsa-lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta Pv-a 68) Vin iii.110 Ja iv.371 v.69 Dhp 395 = Th 1, 243 = Pv ii.113; Pv iv.101 Dhp-a i.299 367; iv.157 Thag-a 80 So also in Jain Pk. “kisa dhamaṇisaṁtata”: Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal Vist. 226
    • Also as ˚santhatagatta
    • adjective having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55 iii.146 MN ii.121 Ja i.346 Ja ii.283 Thag-a 80
    Sanskrit dhamani, to dhamati, originally a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe
    Dhamma1
    1. masculine & rarely neuter )

      1. constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Buddhaghosa gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DN-a i.99 Dhp-a i.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct (2) desanāyaṁ, to preaching & moral instruction (3) pariyattiyaṁ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh Scriptures ‣See navanga; (4) nissatte (-nijjīvate), to cosmic (non-animistic) law
      • No. 1 is referred to freq in explains of the term, e.g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DN-a i.249 dhamman ti kāraṇaṁ ñāyaṁ Pv-a 211 as paṭipatti-dhamma at Vv-a 84 No. 3 e. g also at Pv-a 2 Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Buddhaghosa is given in Dhs-a 38 viz. (1) pariyatti or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action (4) nissatta-nijīvatā, or “the phenomenal” as opposed to “the substantial,” “the noumenal,” “animistic entity.” Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: “analytic knowledge in dhamma’s means insight into condition, causal antecedent Vibh 293, and ‣See Niyama (dhamma˚). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation:-doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition phenomenon
      • For other exegetic definitions ‣See the Coms & the Niddesa, e.g. Nd; 1 94; for modern explains & analyses ‣See e.g. Rhys Davids,; Buddhist India
      • past participle 292–⁠4; Mrs. Rhys Davidsavids, Buddhism (1912)
      • past participle 32 sq. 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation xxxiii. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger,; Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi.1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary
      1. B. Applications and Meaning.
      1. -1. Psychologically; “mentality” as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as “object” to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own:-a presentation; (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho-physical phenomenon or sensation (re-action of sense-organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense-organ when reacting to external objects Thus cakkhu “faculty of sight” corresponds to rūpa “relation of form” & mano “faculty of thought (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation corresponds to dhamma “mentalized” object or “idea” (Mrs. Rhys Davids “mental object in general,” also “state of mind”)-(a) subjective: mental attitude thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i.e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom = philosophy of the Buddha as contained expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas ‣See below Commentary -; Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi-personification of the Dh. with the phrase “dhammaja dh-nimmita dh-dāyāda” (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm ‣See under compounds. and Dhammatā; also s.v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuṁ atītaṁ addhānaṁ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaṁ yeva sakkatvā SN i.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness (“Norm”), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe = Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man one who is “truly enlightened” (sammā-sambuddha) so Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto dhamma˚ brahma˚ & in this possession of the truth he is not; like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the “master of the Truth” vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī SN iv.94 & similarly “yo kho Dhammaṁ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaṁ passati = he who ‣Sees the Buddha ‣Sees the Truth SN iii.120 cp. with this also the dhamma-cakka idea ‣See compounds.. On equation Dhamma = Brahman ‣See especially Geiger, Dhamma past participle 76

        1. -80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja)
        • In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs ‣See e. g Tika-Paṭṭhāna AN 366
        1. As 6th sense-object “dhamma” is the counterpart of “mano”: manasā dhammaṁ viññāya “apperceiving presentations with the mind” SN iv.185 etc ‣See formula under rūpa; mano-viññeyyā dhammā SN iv.73 cp. SN iii.46 SN iv.3f.; v.74 DN iii.226 DN iii.245 DN iii.269 Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā-formula (q.v.) “dhammesu dhamm-ânupassin” realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e.g. DN ii.95 DN ii.100 299 AN i.39 AN i.296 AN ii.256 AN iii.450 AN iv.301 Also as one of the 6 taṇhās “desire for ideas” DN iii.244 DN iii.280
        • As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. āmisa: Iti 98 (˚dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift)
        • (b); objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (= khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing “world,” cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas vedanādayo tayo kh. Dhp-a; i.35 ‣See Khandha B 3; to rūpa vedanā saññā sankhārā viññāna SN iii.39 = sankhārā DN iii.58 DN iii.77 DN iii.141 frequently in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+ dukkhā anattā ‣See nicca) “the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc.” SN iii.132f. & passim; diṭṭhe va
        1. dhamme in the phenomenal world (opposite samparāyika dh. the world beyond) ‣See under diṭṭha (SN iv.175 SN iv.205 etc.)
        • ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaṁ hetuṁ Tathāgato āha “of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told” Vin i.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame happiness etc ‣See under lābha) DN iii.260 Nd2 55. uttari-manussa-dh˚ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena DN i.211 cp. DN iii.4 abbhuta-dh˚ā wonderful signs, portents Mil 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuṁ) Pv-a 2: hassa-khiḍḍhā-rati-dh
        • samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play enjoyment DN i.19; iii.31; gāma˚ things or doings of the village DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.72)
        1. 2. Ratio-ethically-(a) objective: “rationality,” anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i.e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e; Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaṁ ca asesam uparujjhati, taṁ te dhammaṁ idhâññāya acchiduṁ bhavabandhanaṁ (recognising this law) SN i.35 cittacetasikā dh˚ ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cp. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma-vidū Vin i.38 ‣See dasa; with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge AN ii.160 Pṭs i.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 feminine, Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense frequently

          • ˚ as adjective: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be …, of the (natural) property of …, like (cp. English -able, as in change-able = liable to change, also English -hood, -ly & Pali -gata, -ṭhita), e.g.; khaya -dhamma liable to decay (+ vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚), with reference to the Sankhāras SN iv.216f.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda SN ii.60 akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152 (dānaṁ a-dh. atthu). cavana˚ destined to shift to another state of existence DN i.18 iii.31 Iti 76 Vv-a 54 jāti-jarā-maraṇa˚ under the law of birth, age, & death DN iii.57 AN i.147 AN iii.54 Pv-a 41 (sabbe sattā …); bhedana˚; fragile (of kāya) DN i.76 SN i.71 Pv-a 41 (bhijjana˚ of sankhārā). vipariṇāma changeable AN i.258 AN iv.157 Pv-a 60 (+ anicca). unchanging DN iii.31f. samudaya˚ & nirodha˚; , in formula yaṁ kiñci s-dh˚ṁ sabban tan n-dh˚ṁ “anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist” DN i.110 DN i.180 SN iv.47 & passim cp. further anāvatti˚ avinipāta˚ DN i.156; iii.107, 132 AN i.232 ii.89, 238; iv.12; anuppāda˚ DN iii.270
          • (b) subjective: “morality,” right behaviour, righteousness practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application i.e. Moral Law.-Often in
          • plural : tenets, convictions moral habits; & as; adjective that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opposite adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice-a Righteousness etc.: SN i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct ii.280 (dh. isinaṁ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. DN i.224 dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168 ñāti˚ duty against relatives Pv-a 30 deyya˚ dāna Pv-a 9 Pv-a 70; sad˚ faith (q.v.)-opposite adhamma unrighteousness, sin AN ii.19 AN v.73f. DN iii.70 (˚rāga visama-lobha & micchā-dhamma); Pv iii.96 (˚ṁ anuvattisaṁ I practised wrong conduct)
          • In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin i.5 = SN i.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa˚
          • adjective of evil conduct Vin i.3 aṭṭhita˚ unrighteous DN iii.133 lobha˚ greedy quality DN i.224 DN i.230 methuna dh. fornication DN iii.133-() (
          • plural ) Tenets, practices etc
          • (aa) good: kusalā dh. DN ii.223 DN ii.228 DN iii.49 DN iii.56 DN iii.82 DN iii.102 etc. SN ii.206 sappurisa˚. AN v.245 AN v.279 Pv-a 114 samaṇa˚ Wanderer’s practice or observances Dhp-a ii.55 brāhmaṇakaraṇā DN i.244 yesaṁ dh˚ānaṁ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin DN i.206 cp. sīlaṁ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā DN ii.123 dhammānaṁ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities DN i.180 samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti “with composed mind appear true views” SN iv.78 dhammesu patiṭṭhito SN i.185 ananussutesu dh˚esu cakkhuṁ udapādi “he visualized undiscovered ideas” SN ii.9 (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā SN iv.104 pāpakā Vin i.8 DN i.70 AN i.202 akusalā DN iii.56 DN iii.57 DN iii.73 DN iii.91 etc.; lobha˚, dosa˚ moha˚ SN i.70 = It 45 = Nd2 420 SN i.43 MN iii.40 dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saṁkilesikā ponobbhavikā DN i.195 iii.57
          • (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin i.4 DN i.12 SN i.136 -cp. SN ii.15 SN ii.26 Nd2 320 Iti 22 24 Ps i.5, 22, 28 Vb 105 228, 293 sq. etc. etc
          • () (adjective good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaṁ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṁ “the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven” Thag 1, 304 = DN-a i.99 = Dhs-a 38 Dhp-a i.22 kalyāṇa˚ virtuous AN i.74 AN i.108 AN ii.81 AN ii.91 224 sq. Pv-a 13 O
          • past participle pāpa˚ Vin iii.90 cp. above a.-() (phrases). Very frequently used as
          • adverb is the instr dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin i.3 DN i.122 SN iv.331 Vv 3419 (= kāraṇena ñāyena vā Vv-a); Pv ii.930 (= yutten’ eva kāraṇena Pv-a 125 as just punishment); iv.169 (= anurūpakāraṇena Pv-a 286). especially in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) DN i.89 DN ii.16 SN i.236 = Sn 1002; cp. Snp 554 (dhammena cakkaṁ vattemi, of the Buddha). O
          • past participle adhammena unjustly unfitly, against the rule Vin iv.37 SN i.57 SN iv.331 DN-a i.236
          • dhamme (
          • locative ) honourably Ja ii.159 dhammaṁ carati to live righteously Pv ii.334 ‣See also below C 3 & dh
          • cariyā
          1. Commentary The Dhamma, i.e. moral philosophy, wisdom truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma-vinayaṁ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā Vv-a 3 cp. mayaṁ dh.˚ṁ ca vinayañ ca sangāyāma Vin ii.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as explained under B 1 a, & being in short the “doctrinal” portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order ‣See piṭaka. Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma “what follows on the Dhamma."-(1) Dhamma and Vinaya, “wisdom & discipline,” as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression “Piṭako” is later ‣See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya-dharā dhamma kathikā, i.e. “the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha” Vin ii.75 (≈i.169), cp. iv.67. Dhamma & Vinaya comb; d: yo 'haṁ evaṁ svâkkhāte Dh-vinaye pabbajito SN i.119 bhikkhu na evarūpiṁ kathaṁ kattā hoti: na tvaṁ imaṁ Dh-v˚ṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ Dh-v˚ṁ ājānāmi etc. SN iii.12 imaṁ Dh-v˚ṁ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituṁ SN i.9 samaṇā … imasmiṁ Dh-v˚e gādhanti SN iii.59
          • Thus in various compounds ‣See below, as Dh-dhara (+ V-dh.) one who knows both by heart Dh-vādin (+ V-v.) one who can recite both, etc
          • See e.g. the following passages: Vin ii.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90 DN i.8 DN i.176 DN i.229 DN ii.124 (ayaṁ Dh. ayaṁ V. idaṁ Satthu-sāsanaṁ); iii.9, 12, 28, 118 sq. SN i.9 SN i.119 SN i.157 SN ii.21 SN ii.50 (dh-vinaye assāsa) AN iii.297 (identical) SN ii.120 SN iii.91 SN iv.43f. 260 AN i.34 AN i.121 AN i.185 266; ii.2, 26, 117, 168; iii.8, 168 sq.; iv.36, 200 sq.v.144, 163, 192 Iti 112 Snp p. 102 Ud 50 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle explained in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the “Doctrine,” the “Word,” the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhamma-kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaṁ DN iii.84) AN person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community (“Church” Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ upemi (gacchāmi), Dhp ˚ṁ …, Sanghaṁ … i.e. I put myself into the shelter of the Buddha, the Dhamma & the Saṅgha ‣See further reference under Saṅgha. SN i.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare i.e. those who adore the Buddha & his Church will shine in Heaven) DN ii.152f. 202 sq., 352 SN iv.270 sq (˚saraṇagamana) Dhp-a i.206 Pv-a 1 (vande taṁ uttamaṁ Dhp ˚ṁ, B ˚ṁ, SN ˚ṁ). cp. Satthari, Dhamme Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto-khilā AN iii.248
          • Character of the Dhamma in various attributes, general phraseology
          • The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of “dhammaṁ deseti ādi-kalyāṇaṁ majjhe-k˚ pariyosāna-k˚, etc. “beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end,” e.g. DN i.62 SN i.105 SN iv.315 AN ii.147 AN ii.208 AN iii.113f. 135, 262 DN iii.96 DN iii.267 Nd2 316 Iti 79 Vv-a 87 It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate:; sv’ akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. DN ii.93 DN iii.5 DN iii.39 DN iii.45 DN iii.102 SN i.9 SN i.117 SN ii.199 SN iv.271 AN iii.285 etc. It is mahā -dh. SN iv.128
          • ariya˚ SN i.30 AN v.241 AN v.274 Snp 783
          • sammā˚ SN i.129 It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain-top Vin i.5 = It 33 or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks SN i.169 = 183 and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti SN i.71 Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā … dhammassa magganā SN i.210 ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā … devakāyaṁ paripūressanti SN i.30 Dhp ˚ṁ garukaroti DN iii.84 O
          • past participle Dhamme agārava AN iii.247 340; iv.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death SN i.30 (upenti Roruvaṁ ghoraṁ)-Var. phrases: to find the truth (i.e. to realize intuitively the Dh.) = dh˚ṁ anubodhati DN ii.113 SN i.137 or vindati DN i.110 DN i.148 To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy dh˚ṁ deseti Vin iv.134 SN i.210 etc.; katheti Pv-a 41 bhāsati Vin i.101 bhaṇati Vin i.169 pakāseti SN ii.28 SN iv.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh˚ṁ suṇāti SN i.114 SN i.137 SN i.196 SN i.210 AN i.36 AN iii.163 Dhp-a iii.81 113. To attain full knowledge of it: Dhp ˚ṁ pariyāpuṇāti AN ii.103 AN ii.185 AN iii.86 cp. 177 & ˚pariyatti To remember the Dh.: dhāreti AN iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh
          • accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: Dhp ˚ṁ viciṇāti SN i.34 = 55, 214 AN iv.3f. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: Dhp ˚ṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati ‣See above 2 Pv iv.348 dhammaṁ saraṇatthaṁ upehi Vv 532 (cp. Vv-a 232) ‣See further Ps i.34, 78, 131; ii.159 sq. Pug 58 66 Vb 293f. 329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. compounds

        2. ; Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with “lesser or inferior dhamma,” but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like “in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma” i.e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma

          • past participle 115

            1. -118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the following contexts: dhammassa c’ ânudh ˚ṁ vyākaroti “to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma” DN i.161 iii.115 Ud 50 dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin “walking in perfect conformity to the Dh.” AN ii.8 dh
            • anudh ˚ṁ ācaranti identical DN iii.154 dh
            • anudh˚ paṭipanna “one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh.” DN ii.224 DN iii.119 SN iii.40f. Iti 81 AN iii.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge viz. (1) Dhp ˚ṁ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaṁ upaparikkhati; (5) dh-anudh ˚ṁ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara dh-anudh˚-paṭipanna DN ii.104 SN v.261 AN ii.8 Ud 63 also in dhamma-kathika, dh-anudh˚-paṭi panna, diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna-patta SN ii.18 = 114 iii.163; & in atthaṁ aññāya, dhammaṁ aññāya, dhanudh˚-paṭipanna AN i.36 AN ii.97
            1. ˚akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd1 91
            2. ˚ atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Mil 21
            • ˚ādhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. SN iv.63 = v.346
            • ˚ādhipa Lord of righteousness (+ anudhamma-cārin) AN i.150 cp. ˚ssāmi;
            • neuter abstract ˚ādhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. AN i.147f. DN iii.220 Mil 94 Vism 14
            • ˚ānudhamma ‣See above C 4
            • ˚anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dhp 86 cp. Dhp-a ii.161
            • ˚ānusārin of righteous living DN iii.105 DN iii.254 (+ saddhā˚) MN i.226 MN i.479 AN i.74 AN iv.215 AN iv.23 SN v.200 Pug 15 Nett 112, 189
            • ˚anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., DN ii.83 iii.100 MN ii.120
            • ˚abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200
              1. SN ii.134 (+ dh
              • cakkhu-paṭilābha) Pug 41 Mil 20 Dhp-a i.27 Dhp-a iv.64 Pv-a 31 etc
              • ˚āmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Mil 22 (˚meghena lokaṁ abhitappayanto), 346
              • ˚ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma DN ii.93 (name of an aphorism SN v.357 (identical) Thag 1, 395 Thag-a 179
              • ˚āyatana the field of objects of ideation SN ii.72 Dhs 58 66, 147, 397, 572 594 Vb 70 72 sq
              • ˚ārammaṇa : dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146 157, 365; cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 2
              • ˚ārāma “one who has the Dh. as his pleasure-ground,” one who rejoices in the Dh. AN iii.431 Iti 82 (+ dh-rata) Snp 327 Dhp 364 cp. Dhp-a iv.95
              • ˚ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.193
              1. -196 Ja v.418
              • ˚āsana “the Dh-seat,” i.e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching Ja i.53 Dhp-a ii.31
              • ˚ūposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. AN i.208
              • ˚okkā the torch of Righteousness Ja i.34
              • ˚oja the essence or sap of the Dh. SN v.162 Dhp-a iv.169
              • ˚osadha the medicine of the Dh. Mil 110 Mil 335
              • ˚kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh. advice DN iii.151 Ja i.217 Vv-a 6 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 66
              • ˚kathika
              • adjective one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya-dhara “one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya,” & bahussuta “one who has a wide knowledge of tradition” Vin iv.10 13, 141 AN iii.78 Dhp-a ii.30 also with suttantika “one who is versed in the Suttantas” Vin i.169 Vin ii.75 Vin iv.67 The ability to preach the Dhp is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness ‣See dhamm-ânudhamma, above C 4: SN ii.18 SN ii.114 = iii.163 MN iii.40

                • AN i.25f. ii.138 Pug 42 Ja i.217 Ja iv.2 (˚thera). cp. also Avs ii.81
                • ˚kathikatta
                • neuter speaking about the Dh.; preaching MN iii.40 AN i.38 (+ vinayadhara-katta)
                • ˚kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin iv.37 136, 232 AN i.74 (+ vinaya˚); a˚ an illegal act Vin iv.232 AN i.74
                • ˚karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water-pot i.e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin ii.118 177, 301 Ja i.395 Ja vi.331 Dhp-a iii.290 452 Vv-a 220 (not ˚karaṇena) Pv-a 185 Mil 68
                • ˚kāma a lover of the Dh. DN iii.267 AN v.24 AN v.27 90, 201 Snp 92
                • ˚kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies) ‣See Buddhaghosa as translated in Dialogues of the Buddha iii. ad
                • locative ; having a normal body (sic Buddhaghosa, especially of the B. DN iii.84
                • ˚ ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard AN i.109 = iii.149
                • ˚khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla samādhi, paññā, vimutti) DN iii.229 cp. Sp. Avs ii.155
                • ˚gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. Pv-a 194
                • ˚gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i.e. of execution Ja i.150 Ja i.151 Ja ii.124 vi.176; v.303
                • ˚garu worshipping the Dh. SN iv.123 Dhp-a i.17 (˚ka)
                • ˚gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, literally excellent t. (+ brahma˚ Mil 191
                • ˚gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) Ja v.222 Ja vi.261
                • ˚gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh ‣See gutta SN i.222 Ja v.222 (+ Dhammapāla)
                • ˚ghosaka (-kamma) praise of the Dh. Dhp-a iii.81
                • ˚cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness ‣See details under cakka, always in phrase dhcakkaṁ pavatteti (of the Buddha) “to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness” Vin i.8 = M i.171 Vin i.11 SN i.191 SN iii.86 Snp 556 Snp 693 Mil 20 Mil 343 Dhp-a i.4 Vv-a 165 Pv-a 2 Pv-a 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at SN i.33 of the car of righteousness
                • ˚cakkhu “the eye of wisdom, perception of the law of change. Frequently in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the “opening of the eyes” or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. “virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhcakkhuṁ udapādi” DN i.86 DN i.110 DN ii.288 SN iv.47 AN iv.186 Vin i.11 16, 40 etc. Ex
                • plural at DN-a i.237 dhammesu vā cakkhuṁ dhammamayaṁ vā cakkhuṁ cp. SN ii.134 (˚paṭiĺābha; + dhammâbhisamaya); Dialogues of the Buddha i.184; ii.176
                • ˚cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (= dānādi-puññapaṭipatti Vv-a 282) SN i.101 (+ samacariyā kusalakiriyā) AN ii.5 AN iii.448 AN v.87 AN v.302 Snp 263 (= kāyasucaritâdi˚ Snp-a 309), 274 (+ brahma˚). a˚ evil way of living AN i.55 (+ visama-cariyā)
                • ˚cārin virtuous, dutiful MN i.289 MN ii.188 Dhp 168 Mil 19 (+ samacārin) -cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. MN ii.124
                • ˚chanda virtuous desire (opposite kāma˚) Dhs-a 370 Vb 208
                • ˚ja born of the Dh ‣See above, Note on B 1 a, in formula “Bhagavato putto oraso dh-jo, dh-nimmito dh.dāyādo” (the spiritual child of the Buddha) DN iii.84 = SN ii.221 Iti 101
                • ˚jāla “net of the Dh.,” name of a discourse (cp. ˚ādāsa & pariyāya) DN i.46
                • ˚jīvin living righteously Iti 108 Dhp 24 (= dhammenā samena Dhp-a i.239)
                • ˚ññū one who knows the Dh. Ja vi.261
                • ˚ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous SN i.33 (+ sīlasampanna) Snp 749 Ja iii.334 Ja iv.211 Thag-a 244
                • ˚ṭṭhita = ˚ṭṭha DN i.190
                • ˚ṭṭhiti˚ having a footing in the Dh. SN ii.60 SN ii.124 cp. ˚ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects SN ii.25
                • ˚takka right reasoning Snp 1107 (= sammāsankappa Nd2 318)
                • ˚dāna gift of
                • ˚dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) DN iii.84 SN ii.221 MN i.12 MN iii.29 Iti 101
                • ˚dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combined with atta-dīpa: having oneself as one’s refuge, self-dependent) DN ii.100 DN iii.58 77 SN v.154
                • ˚desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin i.16 DN i.110 etc ‣See desanā
                • ˚dessin a hater of the Dh. Snp 92
                • ˚dhaja the banner of the Dh. AN i.109 iii.149 Nd2 503 Mil 21
                • ˚dhara
                • adjective one who knows the Dh. (by heart) ‣See above C 4. Combd with Vinayadhara Vin i.127 337; ii.8 AN i.117 & bahussuta (ibid) Snp 58 (cp. Snp-a 110)
                • ‣ See also AN iii.361f. iv.310 Nd2 319
                • ˚dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58 67, 147 etc. Vb 87 89 ‣See above B 1; an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law DN ii.8 MN i.396 SN ii.143f.; Nett 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq
                • ˚dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. MN ii.175
                • ˚nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty Ja v.279
                • ˚nimmita ‣See ˚ja
                • ˚niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm DN i.190 DN-a on DN ii.12: dhammatā (˚ka)
                • ˚niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects SN ii.25 Points of Controversy, 387
                • ˚netti niyāma Mil 328 DN-a i.31 cp. Sanskrit dharmanetrī Mvu ii.357 iii.234, 238
                • ˚pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Mil 21
                • ˚pada
                • neuter a line or stanza of the Dhamma a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā-sati sammā-samādhi DN iii.229 AN ii.29f. (in detail) Nett 170
                • SN i.22 (dānā ca kho dh-padaṁ va seyyo) 202 (dh-padesu chando) AN ii.185 Snp 88 (dh-pade sudesite = nibbāna-dhammassa padattā Snp-a 164) Ja iii.472 (= nibbāna) Dhp-a iii.190 (ekaṁ dh-padaṁ) As proper name title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya
                • ˚pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of Dh. Pug 53 Dhp-a iii.114 (˚ikāni jātisatāni)
                • ˚pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general AN iii.86 (w. reference to the 9 angas ‣See navanga)
                • ˚pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine DN i.46 DN ii.93 DN iii.116 MN i.445 Vin i.40 (a single verse) AN i.65 AN iv.63 (a poem Snp 190
                1. -218, where also it is called a dh˚pariyāyo). AN v.288 AN v.291 Such a dh˚pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net DN i.46 Dhammādāso dh˚p˚, the Mirror of the Law DN ii.93 = SN v.357 Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow’s dart extractor AN iii.62 Ādittap˚ dh˚p˚, the Red-hot lancet SN iv.168 Lomahaṁsana˚ MN i.83 Dhammatā-dhamma Mil 193 etc
                2. ˚pāla guardian of the Law or the Dhp Ja v.222 frequently also as proper name
                3. ˚pīti (-rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaṁ) Snp 257 Dhp 79 (= dhammapāyako dhammaṁ pivanto ti attho Dhs-a ii.126) -bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an epithet of Ānanda Thag 1, 1048 Ja i.382 Ja i.501 Ja ii.25 Dhp-a iii.250 Pv-a 2
                • ˚bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated said of the Buddhas DN iii.84 Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu-bhūta … dh-bhūta brahmabhūta. AN v.226f. (cp. cakkhu) Thag 1, 491 ‣See also above, note B 1 a
                • ˚bheri the drum of the Dh. Mil 21
                • ˚magga the path of righteousness Snp 696 Mil 21
                • ˚maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) SN i.137
                • ˚yanta the (sugar-) mill of the Dh. (figuratively) Mil 166
                • ˚yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) SN v.5
                • ˚rakkhita rightly guarded Snp 288
                • ˚rata fond of the Law Snp 327 Dhp 364 Dhp-a iv.95 cp. dh

                  • gatā
                  1. rati Thag i.742; Dhp. 354
                  2. ˚rasa taste of Dhp. 354
                  3. ˚rājā king of righteousness, epithet of the Buddha SN i.33 = 55 DN i.88 (of a cakkavatti) AN i.109 AN iii.149 Snp 554 Ja i.262 interpreted by Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.249 as “dhammena rajjaṁ labhitvā rājā jāto ti” = a king who gained the throne legitimately
                  4. ˚laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious SN ii.21 Ja iii.472 justly acquired (bhogā) Snp p. 87
                  5. ˚vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Snp 233 Snp 234
                  • ˚vādin speaking properly speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin ii.285 Vin iii.175 (+ Vinaya-vādin) DN iii.135 (identical) DN i.4 DN i.95 (of Gotama DN-a i.76: nava-lokuttara-dhamma sannissitaṁ katvā vadati) SN iv.252 AN i.75 AN ii.209
                  • ˚vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs 16 20, 90, 309, 333, 555 Vb 106 Vism 132 -vitakka righteous thought AN i.254
                  • ˚vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. Ja v.222 vi.261
                  • ˚vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Snp 327 Dhp 144 Dhp-a iii.86
                  • ˚vihārin living according to the Dh. AN iii.86f.
                  • ˚saṁvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i.e. spiritual gifts Iti 98 (opposite āmisa˚ material gifts)
                  • ˚saṅgāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a Vv-a 3 169 -saññā righteous thought, faith, piety Pv-a 3
                  • ˚sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse Ja vi.333 Dhp-a i.31 Dhp-a ii.51 iv.91 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 196 -samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached SN i.26
                  • ˚samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at MN i.305 DN iii.229
                  • ˚saraṇa relying on or putting one’s faith in the Dh ‣See above C 3 DN iii.58 77 SN v.154
                  • ˚savana hearing the preaching of the Dh. “going to church” Vin i.101 MN ii.175 AN ii.248 AN ii.381 iv.361 Snp 265 Dhp-a iii.190
                  • ˚sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Snp 266
                  • ˚ssāmi Lord of the Truth, epithet of the Buddha ‣See above B 1 a note SN iv.94
                  • ˚sāra the essence of the Dh. SN v.402
                  • ˚sārathi in purisa-dh

                    • s˚ at DN i.62 misprint for purisa-damma-s˚
                    • ˚sārin a follower of the Dh. SN i.170
                    • ˚sudhammatā excellency of the Dhp SN ii.199 Thag 1, 24 220, 270, 286
                    • ˚senāpati “captain of the Dhamma,” epithet of Sāriputta Thag 1, 1083 Ja i.408 Mil 343 Dhp-a iii.305 Vv-a 64 65, 158
                    • ˚soṇḍatā thirst after justice Ja v.482
                    • ˚sota the ear of the Dh. SN ii.43
                    Vedic dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman ‣See kamma for explanation of subj. & obj. meanings; dhṛ ‣See dhāreti to hold support: that which forms a foundation and upholds constitution. cp. Latin firmus & fretus Lithuanian derme (treaty), cp. also Sanskrit dhariman form, constitution perhaps = Latin forma, English form
    Dhamma2
    adjective
    1. only in feminine in combination with kathā : relating to the Dhamma, viz conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin ii.161 Vin iv.56 & in instrumental

      • abl dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saṁpahaṁseti: ster. formula) SN i.114 SN i.155 SN i.210 SN iv.122 Pv-a 30 etc.; or as compound dhammī-kathā DN ii.1 MN i.161 Snp 325 & dhammi-kathā SN i.155 Pv-a 38
      Sanskrit *dhārma, cp. dhammika
    Dhamma3
    adjective
    1. having a bow ‣See daḷha˚; also as dhammin in daḷha˚ SN i.185 ‣See dhammin
    Sanskrit dhanvan
    Dhammatā
    feminine
    1. conformity to the Dhammaniyāma ‣See niyāma, fitness, propriety; a general rule higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect SN i.140 (Buddhānaṁ dh. the law of the B.’s i.e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su˚); iv.216 sq. (khaya˚ etc.) DN ii.12 AN ii.36 (kusala˚); v.46 Thag 1, 712 Ja i.245 ii.128; Nett 21, 50, cp. Mil 179 Pv-a 19 Vv-a 7 ‣See also Avs Index
    Sanskrit dharmitā
    Dhammatta
  • neuter
    1. liability to be judged Vin ii.55 (& a˚)
    Sanskrit *dharmatvaṁ
    Dhammani
    1. only found in SN i.103 where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, “in a forest on dry land” (araññe thale). cp. Kindred Sayings i.129, n. 2.

    Dhammika
    adjective
    1. lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable of good character, just, especially an attribute of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) DN i.86 DN ii.16 AN i.109 = iii.149 Ja i.262 Ja i.263 defined by Buddhaghosa as “dhammaṁ caratī ti dh.” (DN-a i.237) & “dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti” (ib. 249). Vin iv.284 DN i.103 SN ii.280 (dhammikā kathā) iii.240 (āhāra); iv.203 (dhammikā devā, adh˚ asurā) AN i.75 AN iii.277 Snp 404 Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷa); iv.185 (˚lābha) Pv-a 25 (= suddha, manohara). Also as saha-dh˚; (especially in connection with pañha, a justified, reasonable proper question: DN i.94 SN iv.299 in detail) Vin iv.141 DN i.161 DN iii.115 AN i.174
    • unjust, illegal etc. Vin iv.285 SN iv.203 AN iii.243
    = Sanskrit dharmya, cp. dhammiya
    Dhammin1
    adjective
    1. only—˚: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as ˚dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda-vaya˚ DN ii.157 maraṇa˚ (= maraṇadhamma) AN i.147 pāpa Pv i.117 of evil nature
    Sanskrit dharmin
    Dhammin2
    1. (—˚) only in daḷha-dh˚; , which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow = having a strong bow ‣See dhamma3; although some passages admit interpretation as “of strong character or good practice, e.g. SN i.185
    Dhammiya
    adjective
    1. in accordance with the Dhamma Pv-a 242 (also ;); Vism 306 (˚lābha)
    Sanskrit dharmya; cp. dhammika
    Dhammilla
    1. the braided hair of women Dāvs iv.9
    Sanskrit dhammilla
    Dhammī
    1. in ˚kathā ‣See dhamma2
    *Dhayati
    1. to suck ‣See dhātī. causative dhāpayati, past participle dhāta (q.v.)

    Dhara
    1. (usually—˚, except at Mil 420) adjective

      1. bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Frequently in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q.v.), vinaya˚, mātikā e.g. DN ii.125 dhamma˚ also Snp 58 Thag 1, 187 Nd2 319; vinaya˚ Mil 344 jaṭājina˚ Snp 1010 ‣See also dhāra
      Sanskrit dhara, to dhr ‣See dharati
    Dharaṇa
    adjective bearing, holding, comprising Vv-a 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa˚ nikkha holding, i.e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold).
    • feminine bearing, i.e. pregnant with Snp 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo = gabbhiniyo Snp-a 39). As
    • noun the Earth Ja v.311 Ja vi.526 Mil 34
    • dharaṇī-ruha name of a tree Ja vi.482 Ja vi.497 Mil 376

    Dharati
    1. [ Sanskrit dharati, dhṛ; as in Latin firmus & fretus ‣See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last continue, live Snp 385 (take to heart, remember) Dhp-a ii.68 -ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting Ja i.75 (dh˚e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); ii.6 Mil 240 Mil 291(Bhagavato dh˚-kāle); - gerundive dhareyya, in dh˚divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) Thag-a, 25; cp. dhāreyya Thag 2 472 = vivāha Thag-a 285
    2. past participle dhata (q.v.)-Caus dhāreti (q.v.)

    Dhava1
    1. the shrub Grislea Tomentosa AN i.202 AN i.204 Ja iv.209 Ja vi.528
    Sanskrit dhava = madhuratvaca, Halāyudha
    Dhava2
    1. a husband Thag-a 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho)
    Sanskrit dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q.v.
    Dhavala
    adjective
    1. white, dazzling white Vv-a 252 Dāvs ii.123 v.26
    Sanskrit dhavala, to dhavati ‣See dhāvati & dhovati
    Dhavalatā
    feminine whiteness Vv-a 197
    Dhāta
    1. fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin i.222 Ja i.185 Ja ii.247 Ja ii.446 Ja v.73 vi.555 Pv i.118 (so read for dāta) = Pv-a 59 (: suhita titta) Mil 238 Mil 249
    • f abstract dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati Ja ii.293
    Sanskrit *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, past participle dhīta
    Dhātar
    1. upholder Ja v.225
    agent noun from dhṛ
    Dhātī
    feminine
    1. wet nurse, fostermother DN ii.19 MN i.395 ii.97 Ja i.57 Ja iii.391 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 176. In compounds. dhāti˚; viz
    2. ˚cela swaddling cloth, baby’s napkin SN i.205 Ja iii.309
    Sanskrit dhātrī = Latin felare, femina (“giving suck”), filius (“suckling”); Old Irish dīnu lamb; Goth daddjan; Old High German tila breast ‣See also dadhi, dhītā dhenu
    Dhātu
    feminine
    1. element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its genitive connotation cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 198
    1. -1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): DN i.215 DN ii.294 DN iii.228 SN i.15 SN ii.169f. 224; iv.175, 195 AN ii.165 AN iii.243 Vb 14 72; Nett 73 ‣See discussed at Compendium 254 sq
    • A definition of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485
    • Singly or in other combinations paṭhavī˚ SN ii.174 tejo˚ SN i.144 DN iii.227 the four plus ākāsa SN iii.227 plus viññāna SN ii.248 SN iii.231 ‣See below 2 b
    • (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in various combinations & applications, especially closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with; khandha & āyatana; (sensory element & element of sense-perception) as bodily or physical element, factor ‣See khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd; 2 under dhātu Thag 2, 472 As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha˚ dhātu˚ āyatana˚ Nd2 550). Freq also in combination kāma-dhātu, rūpa˚ arūpa˚ “the elements or properties of k. etc.” as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd; 2 s.v.) ‣See under d
    • As “set of conditions or state of being (—˚) in the following: loka˚; a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: Pv-a 138) SN i.26 SN v.424 Pv ii.961 Vb 336 Pv-a 138 KS ii.101, n. 1; -nibbāna˚; the state of name SN v.8 AN ii.120 AN iv.202 Ja i.55 Iti 38 (dve ‣See under Nibbāna) Mil 312 Also in the following connections: amata˚ Iti 62 bhū˚ the verbal root bhū DN-a i.229 ṭhapitāya dhātuyā “while the bodily element, i.e. vitality lasts” Mil 125 vaṇṇa˚ form beauty SN i.131 Pv i.31 In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to English abstract suffix-hood or-ity (cp. ˚hood = origin. “form” ‣See ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna˚ = Nibbāna-dom. cp. dhātuka
    • (b) elements in sense-consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni SN ii.140f. Of these sep. sota˚ DN i.79 DN iii.38 Vb 334 dibbasota˚ SN ii.121 SN ii.212 SN v.265 SN v.304 AN i.255 AN iii.17 280; v.199; cakkhu˚ Vb 71f.; mano˚ Vb 175 182 301; mano-viññāṇa˚ Vb 87 89, 175, 182 sq. (c) various: aneka˚ AN i.22 AN iii.325 AN v.33 akusala˚ Vb 363 avijjā˚ SN ii.132 ābhā˚ SN ii.150 ārambha˚ SN v.66 SN v.104 sq. AN i.4 AN ii.338 ṭhiti˚ SN ii.175 SN iii.231 AN iii.338 dhamma˚ SN ii.56 nekkhamma˚ SN ii.151 AN iii.447 nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) DN iii.239 AN iii.245 AN iii.290 ‣See further SN i.134 SN i.196 SN ii.153 SN ii.248 (aniccā); iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67 AN i.176 AN ii.164 AN iv.385 Dhs 58 67, 121 Nett 57, 64 sq. Thag-a 20 49, 285,-(d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa AN i.223 iii.447; Ps i.137 Vb 86 363, 404 sq.; under rūpa˚ arūpa˚, nirodha˚ Iti 45
    • as 6 (pathavī etc. + ākāsa & viññāṇa˚): DN iii.247 AN i.175f. MN iii.31 MN iii.62 MN iii.240 Ps i.136 Vb 82 sq
    • as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): SN ii.150
    1. -18: Ps i.101, 137; ii.230, Dhs 1333 Vb 87f. 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq
    • a humour or affection of the body DN-a i.253 (dhātusamatā)

  • the remains of the body after cremation Pv-a 76 a relic Vv-a 165 (sarīra˚, bodily relic); Dāvs v.3 (dasana˚ the toothrelic)

    • ablative dhātuso according to one’s nature SN ii.154f. (sattā sattehi saddhiṁ saṁsandanti etc.) Iti 70 (identical) SN iii.65
    1. ˚kathā name of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96 -kucchi womb Mil 176
    • ˚kusala skilled in the elements MN iii.62 ˚kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements DN iii.212 Dhs 1333
    • ˚ghara “house for a relic,” a dagoba Snp-a 194
    • ˚cetiya a shrine over a relic Dhp-a iii.29
    • ˚nānatta diversity of specific experience DN iii.289 SN ii.143 SN iv.113f. 284
    • ˚vibhāga distribution of relics Vv-a 297 Pv-a 212
    Sanskrit dhātu to dadhāti, Indogermanic *dhé, cp. Latin facio, Sanskrit dhāka ‣See also dhamma
  • Dhātuka
    adjective (only—˚) having the nature, by nature, affected with,-like (cp. ˚dhamma B 2a); often simply first part of compound (cp. English friend-like = friendly = friend Ja i.438 (kiliṭṭha˚ miserable), ii.31 (sama˚), 63 (badhira deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga˚ having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika˚); iv.137 (vāmanaka˚ deformed), 391 (muddhā˚) v.197 (āvāṭa˚) Dhp-a i.89 (anattamana˚).
    Dhātura
    1. (adjective
    • ˚)
    1. in cha˚ consisting of six elements (purisa) MN iii.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake) ‣See dhātu 2 c
    = *dhātuya
    Dhāna
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective holding, containing (—˚) MN i.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka˚; cp. ādhāna & kaṇṭaka)
    • (n.)
    • neuter a receptacle Dhp 58 (sankāra˚ dust-heap = ṭhāna Dhp-a; i.445).
    • feminine dhānī a seat (= ṭhāna), in rāja˚; “the king’s seat,” a royal town Often in comb with gāma & nigama ‣See gāma 3 a Vin iii.89 Ja vi.397 Pv ii.1318
    Sanskrit dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu
    Dhāniya
    adjective
    1. wealthy, rich, abundant in (—˚) Ja iii.367 (pahūtadhana˚; Burmese variant ˚dhāritaṁ); neuter riches, wealth Ja v.99 Ja v.100
    2. Sanskrit dhānya, cp. dhañña2
    Dhāra
    adjective (—˚)
    1. bearing, holding, having DN i.74 (udaka-rahado sītavāri˚) MN i.281 (ubhato˚) Snp 336 (ukkā˚) Iti 101 (antimadeha˚) 108 (ukkā˚) ‣See also dhārin
    Sanskrit dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara
    Dhāraka

    adjective-noun

  • bearing, one who holds or possesses Dhp-a iii.93 (sampattiṁ).

    • one who knows or remembers AN ii.97 (˚jātika); iv.296 sq., 328 (identical)
  • Dhāraṇa
    neuter
    1. wearing, in mālā˚ (etc.) DN i.5 = AN ii.210 = Pug 58 Kp-a 37 cīvara˚ AN ii.104 = Pug 45
    2. maintaining, sustaining keeping up Mil 320 (āyu˚ bhojana)
    3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin iv.305 MN ii.175 (dhamma˚).

      cp. Sanskrit dhāraṇa, to dhāreti
    Dhāraṇaka
    1. a debtor ‣See dhāreti 4 Ja ii.203 Ja iv.45
    2. a mnemonician Mil 79
    derived from dhāraṇa
    Dhāraṇatā

    feminine

  • wearing, being dressed with (= dhāraṇa 1) Mil 257

    • mindfulness (= dhāraṇa 3) Nd2 628 Dhs 14
  • Dhāraṇā
    feminine
    1. memory Mil 79
    2. the earth (“the upholder,” cp. dharaṇī) Ja vi.180
    to dhāraṇa
    Dhārā1
    feminine
    1. torrent, stream, flow, shower DN i.74 (sammā˚ an even or seasonable shower DN-a i.218 = vuṭṭhi); ii.15 (udakassa, streams) Ja i.31 Ps i.125 (udaka˚); Pv ii.970 (sammā˚) Vv-a 4 (hingulika˚) Pv-a 139 Dhp-a iv.15 (assu˚); Sdhp 595 (vassa˚)
    Sanskrit dhārā, from dhāvati.1
    Dhārā2
    feminine
    1. the edge of a weapon Ja i.455 Ja vi.449 Dhp-a 317 DN-a i.37
    • (adjective (—˚) having a (sharp) edge Ja i.414 (khura˚) Mil 105 (sukhuma˚); ekato˚-ubhato˚ single-& double-edged Ja i.73 (asi); iv.12 (sattha)
    Sanskrit dhārā, from dhāvati.2.
    Dhārin
    1. (adjective
    • ˚)
    1. holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha˚ “wearing the last body” (of an Arahant SN i.14 Snp 471 Iti 32 40
    • J i.47 (virūpa-vesa˚) Dāvs v.15.
    • feminine ˚inī Pv i.108 (kāsikuttama˚)
    Sanskrit dhārin ‣See dhāreti & cp. ˚dhara, ˚dhāra
    Dhāretar
    1. one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) AN iv.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.)
    agent noun to dhāreti.3
    Dhāreti
    1. to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring give DN i.166≈(chavadussāni etc.) Vin i.16 = DN i.110 (telapajjotaṁ) DN ii.19 (chattaṁ to hold a sunshade over a person) Pv-a 47 (identical); dehaṁ dh. to “wear,” i.e. to have a body Iti 50 53 (antimaṁ d.) Ja iv.3 (padumaṁ) vi.136 Pv i.31 (vaṇṇaṁ dh. = vahasi Pv-a 14); tassa kahāpaṇaṁ daṇḍaṁ dh. “to inflict a fine of a k. on him Mil 171
    • to hold back, restrain Vin iv.261 (kathaṁ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?) Dhp 222 (kodhaṁ)

  • to bear in mind know by heart, understand: dhammaṁ to know the Dhamma AN iii.176 tipiṭakaṁ buddhavacanaṁ to know the 3 Piṭakas Mil 18

    • DN ii.2 Pug 41 (suṇāti bhaṇati, dh. = remember). cp. upadhāreti
    • With double
    • accusative : to receive as, to take = believe, to take for consider as, call: upāsakaṁ maṁ dhāretu Bhagavā “call me your disciple” Vin i.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naṁ dhārehi (call it …) DN i.46 yathā pañhaṁ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naṁ dhareyyāsi (believe it) DN i.222 yathā no (atthaṁ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naṁ dhāressāma DN i.236 evaṁ maṁ dhārehi adhimuttacittaṁ (consider as) Snp 1149 (= upalakkhehi Nd2 323)
    • to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe DN i.125 (may allow), 126 AN ii.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute) Mil 47 (atthaṁ)
    • causative of dharati, q.v. for etymology
  • Dhāreyya
    neuter
    1. the ceremony of being carried away, i.e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Thag 2, 472 (text has vāreyya but Thag-a, 285 explains dhāreyya = vivāha)
    originally gerundive of dhāreti
    Dhāva
    1. running, racing MN i.446
    Sanskrit dhāva
    Dhāvati
    • to clean (by running water) etc. = P.; dhovati, q.v.] 1. to run run away, run quickly Snp 939 (cp. Nd1 419) Dhp 344 Ja i.308 Ja vi.332 Nd1 405 = Nd2 304iii.; Pv iv.161 = palāyati Pv-a 2841 Dhp-a i.389 (opposite gacchati) Pv-a 4 Sdhp 378

  • to clean etc. ‣See dhovati; cp. dhavala & dhārā; 2.

    Sanskrit dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; Anglo-Saxon déaw = English dew; Old High German tou = German tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti.
  • Dhāvana
    neuter [
    1. running, galloping Ja ii.431 Mil 351
    Sanskrit dhāvana
    Dhāvin
    1. ‣See pa˚
    Dhi1 & Dhī
    indeclinable
    1. an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with accusative or genitive) SN v.217 (read dhī taṁ for dhītaṁ) Dhp 389 (dhī = garahāmi Dhp-a iv.148) Ja i.507 Dhp-a i.179 (haṁ dhī), 216 (Burmese variant but text has haṁdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi-consonant in dhī-r-atthu jīvitaṁ Snp 440 cp. Thag i.1150; dhi-r-atthu jātiyā Ja i.59
    2. Sanskrit dhik
    Dhi2
    feminine
    1. wisdom, only in Commentary ex plural of paññā: “dhi vuccati paññā” (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd1 44 = J ii.140 = iii.38
    2. Sanskrit dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Avestan dī to ‣See, Gothic (filu-) deisei cunning ‣See also dhīra
    Dhikkita
    adjective
    1. reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning Ja i.155 (= garahitā Commentary ); also in Com ex plural of dhīra (= dhikkita-pāpa detesting evil) at Nd1 44 = J ii.140 = iii.38 (cp. dhi2)
    2. Sanskrit dhikkṛta, of dhi1 + kata
    Dhiti
    feminine
    1. energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. SN i.122 SN i.215 = Sn 188 (cp. Snp-a 237) Ja i.266 Ja i.280 Ja iii.239 vi.373 Vb 211 Dhs 13 (+ thāma), 22, 289, 571 Mil 23 Mil 329 Sdhp 574. Equivalent to “wisdom” (cp. juti jutimant & Sanskrit dhīti) in ex plural of dhīra as “dhitisampanna” Nd1 44≈‣ See dhi2 Pv-a 131
    2. Sanskrit dhṛti to dhṛ; ‣See dharati
    Dhitimant
    adjective
    1. courageous, firm, resolute AN i.25 Snp 462 Snp 542 Thag i,6 Ja ii.140 Ja vi.286 (wise, cp. dhiti)
    Sanskrit dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant
    Dhītar
    1. and Dhītā feminine

      1. daughter Thag 2, 336 (in faith) Ja i.152 Ja i.253 vi.366 Pv i.115 Dhp-a iii.171 176 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 105 deva˚ a female deva ‣See deva Vv-a 137 etc.; nattu˚ a granddaughter Pv-a 17 mātula˚ a niece Pv-a 55 rāja a princess Ja i.207 Pv-a 74 In compounddhītu
      1. ˚kkama one who is desirous of a daughter Ja vi.307 (= dhītu atthāya vicarati Commentary ; variant reading dhītu-kāma) -dhītā granddaughter Pv-a 16
      Sanskrit dhītā, originally
    2. past participle of dhayati to suck (cp. Latin filia) ‣See dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sanskrit duhitṛ, although etymologically different
    Dhītalikā
    feminine
    1. a doll Vin iii.36 126 (dāru˚) Dhs-a 321 Pv-a 16
    Dimin. of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & potthalikā
    Dhītikā
    feminine
    1. a doll Thag 2, 374 (= dhītalikā Thag-a 252)
    cp. dhītalikā
    Dhīna
    1. ‣See adhīna
    Dhīyati
    1. to be contained Thag-a 13 (so read for dhiyati) Pv-a 71
    Sanskrit dhīyate, passive to dahati1
    Dhīra
    adjective
    1. constant, firm, self-relying of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often = paṇḍita & epithet of an Arahant DN ii.128 SN i.24 (lokapariyāyaṁ aññāya nibbutā dh.) 122, 221 Snp 45 Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052 Iti 68 (˚upasevanā, opposite bāla) 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano) Dhp 23 Dhp 28 Dhp 177 (opp bāla) Thag 1, 4 2, 7 (dhammā = tejussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi Thag-a 13) Ja iii.396 Ja v.116 Pv ii.16ii.945 Nd1 44 55, 482 Nd2 324 (= jutimant) Mil 342 Kp-a 194, 224, 230 Dhp-a iii.189 (= paṇḍita)
    combining in meaning 1. Sanskrit dhīra “firm” from dhārayati ‣See dharati & dhiti; 2. Vedic. dhīra “wise” from dīdheti ‣See dhi2. The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the explains of Coms which always give the following three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa dhiti-sampanna, dhiyā (= paññāya) samannāgata Nd144≈‣ See dhi2
    Dhuta
    (& Dhūta
    1. shaken, moved Dāvs; v.49 (vāta˚)
    2. literally “shaken off,” but always explained in the commentaries as “one who shakes off” either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin i.45 = 305 = ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213) it is an adj opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At DN i.5 it is used of a pain At Snp 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor elementary matters. cp. Vism 61 for a definition of dhuta
      1. ˚aṅga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131 193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at MN i.282 & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin iii.15 Bu i.59 Ja iii.342 Ja iv.8 Mil 133 Mil 348 Mil 351 Vism 59 (˚kathā), 65 (˚cora), 72 (identical), 80 (definition) Snp-a 494 Dhp-a i.68 Dhp-a ii.32 (dhūtanga); iv.30. Nd1 188 says that 8 of them are desirable
      2. ˚dhara mindful of punctiliousness Mil 342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin)
      3. ˚vata the vow to perform the dhutangas Dhp-a vi.165
      • ˚vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness SN ii.156 AN i.23 Mil 380 Vism 80 Thag-a 69 Dhp-a ii.30
      • ˚vādin ˚vāda Ja i.130
      cp. Sanskrit dhuta & dhūta, past participle of dhunāti
    Dhutatta
    neuter
    1. the state of being punctilious Vin i.305 (of going naked)
    Sanskrit *dhūtatvaṁ
    Dhutta
    1. of abandoned life, wild fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. masculine a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha˚; in gambling, itthi˚; with women, surā˚; in drink (Sn 106 Ja iv.255)

      • Vin ii.277 (robber, highwayman) AN iii.38 (a˚); iv.288 (itthi˚) Ja i.49 (surā˚), 290, 291; ii.416 iii.287; iv.223, 494 (surā˚) Thag-a 250 (itthi˚), 260 (˚purisa), 266 (˚kilesa) Pv-a 3 Pv-a 5 (itthi˚, surā˚), 151.
      • feminine dhutti (dhuttī) Ja ii.114 (˚brāhmaṇī)
      Sanskrit dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Latin fraus; Indogermanic *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sanskrit druhyati, drugdha = Old High German triogan, troum etc. ‣See duhana
    Dhuttaka
    1. = dhutta SN i.131 Thag 2, 366 (= itthi-dhutta Thag-a 250) Dhp-a iii.207 Dīpavaṁsa ix.19. feminine dhuttikā always in combination with chinnikā (meretrix, q.v.) Vin iii.128 Ja ii.114 Mil 122

    Dhunana
    neuter
    1. shaking, in ˚ka adjective consisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa˚) Snp-a 373
    2. Sanskrit dhūnana
    Dhunāti
    1. to shake, toss; to shake off, remove destroy SN i.156 (maccuno senaṁ) Thag 1, 256 = Mil 245 dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaṁ va māluto Thag i.2 Ja i.11 (v.48); iii.44 (hatthe dhuniṁsu, wrung their hands) Vv 649 (= Vv-a 278 misprint dhumanti) aorist adhosi = Sanskrit adhauṣīt
      1. Snp 787 (micchādiṭṭhiṁ pajahi Snp-a 523). past participle dhuta & dhūta; (q.v.) cp. nis˚, o˚
      2. Sanskrit dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, causative dhūnayati. Indogermanic; *dhū to be in turbulent motion cp. Latin fūmus (smoke = fume), suffio Lithuanian duja (dust); Gothic dauns (smoke & smell); Old High German toum. Connected also with dhāvate ‣See further dhūpa dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg; *dheṷes in dhaṁsati
    Dhuma
    1. in ˚kaṭacchuka = druma˚; having a wooden spoon ‣See duma, cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) Dhp-a ii.59
    Doubtful reading.
    Dhura
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage Ja i.192 (purima-sakaṭa˚) 196; cp. ii.8, 4
      2. (figuratively) a burden, load, charge office, responsibility Snp 256 (vahanto porisaṁ Dhp ˚ṁ “carrying a human yoke” = purisânucchavikā bhārā Snp-a 299), 694 (asama˚ one who has to bear a heavy burden = asamaviriya Snp-a 489) Dhp-a ii.97 (sama˚) dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha˚ & vipassanā study & contemplation) Dhp-a; i.7; iv.37; asamadhura Ja i.193 Ja vi.330 Three dhurā are enumerated at Ja iv.242 as saddhā˚, sīla˚, and paññā˚
      3. Sdhp 355 (saddhā˚), 392 (+ viriya), 413 (paññā˚) dh ˚ṁ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility ‣See ˚nikkhepa: nikkhittadhura AN i.71 AN ii.148 AN iii.65 AN iii.108 AN iii.179f.; SN v.197 SN v.225 Nd2 131 Snp-a 236 (= dhuravant)

  • the forepart of anything, head, top, front; figuratively chief, leader leading participle nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship Ja iii.127 = iv.142; dh-vāta head wind Ja i.100 ekaṁ Dhp ˚ṁ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DN-a i.135 4. the far end, either as top or beginning Ja iii.216 (yāva dh-sopānā); iv.265 (dh- sopānaṁ katvā making the staircase end); v.458 (magga-dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i.e. opposite gloss

    • Burmese manuscripts maggantare) Vv-a 44 (dh-gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i.e. the first or last house).

      1. ˚gāma a neighbouring village (literally the first v. that one meets) Ja i.8 Ja i.237 Ja iv.243 Dhp-a iii.414
      • ˚dhorayha a yoked ox SN i.173 = Sn 79 (viriyam me dh-dh ˚ṁ) Snp-a 150
      • ˚nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one’s office Ja iii.243 Vism 413
      • ˚bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it Ja i.449 variant reading (for dhuva˚) iii.97 (variant reading dhuva˚); Vism 66
      • ˚yotta yoke-tie, i.e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox Ja i.192 vi.253
      • ˚vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) Dhp-a iii.472
      • ˚vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. ˚gāma Ja i.23 Ja iv.243 Dhp-a i.126 (proper name); iii.224 (identical)
      • ˚sampaggāha “a solid grip of the burden” (Mrs. Rhys Davids) Dhs 13 22 etc. (opposite nikkhepa)
      • ˚ssaha enduring one’s yoke Thag 1, 659 cp. dhuratā
      Sanskrit dhur
    • feminine & dhura
    • masculine
  • Dhuratā
    feminine
    1. in compound anikkhitta-dh. “a state of unflinching endurance” Nd2 394 405 = Dhs 13 etc. = Vb 350 370 (+ dhura-sampaggāha); opp nikkhitta-dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (= pamāda) ibid
    abstract from dhura
    Dhuravant
    adjective
    1. one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring SN i.214 = Sn 187 (: cetasikaviriya-vasena anikkhittadhura Snp-a 236)
    cp. Sanskrit dhuradhara
    Dhuva
    adjective
    1. stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular certain, sure DN i.18 SN i.142 SN iv.370 AN ii.33 Ja i.19 v.121 (˚sassataṁ maraṇaṁ); iii.325; Bu ii.82 Mil 114 (na tā nadiyo dh-salilā). 334 (˚phala); Vism 77 DN-a i.112 (maraṇaṁ apassanto dh.), 150 (= thāvara) Dhp-a iii.170 (adhuvaṁ jīvitaṁ dhuvaṁ maraṇaṁ) Thag-a 241 Sdhp 331 nt. permanence, stability MN i.326 Dhp 147 Also epithet of Nibbāna ‣See ˚gāmin
    2. nt. as adv dhuvaṁ continuously, constantly, always Ja ii.24 = Mil 172 Pv-a 207 certainly Ja i.18 Ja v.103
    3. adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent DN i.19 (anicca a. appāyuka) MN i.326 SN iv.302 Ja i.393 Ja iii.19 (addhuva-sīla) Vv-a 77
      1. ˚gāmin leading to permanence, i.e. Nibbāna SN iv.370 (magga)
      2. ˚colā feminine constantly dressed, of a woman Vin iii.129
      3. ˚ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin i.190
      4. ˚dhamma one who has reached a stable condition Dhp-a iii.289
      5. ˚paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat Vin iv.274
      6. ˚bhatta a constant supply of food Vin i.25 243; ii.15 (˚ika) Ja i.449 (where the variant reading dhura˚ seems to be preferable instead of dhuva˚ ‣See dhurabhatta) cp. niccabhatta
      7. ˚yāgu constant (distribution of) rice-gruel Vin i.292f.
      8. ˚lohitā
      9. feminine a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin iii.129
      10. ˚ssava always discharging, constantly flowing Ja i.6 Ja v.35 Dhuta & Dhutanga; Sanskrit dhruva, cp. Lithuanian drúta firm; Gothic triggws = Old High German triuwi (German treue, trost); Anglo-Saxon tréowe English true, of Indogermanic *dheru, enlarged form of *dher ‣See dharati
    Dhūta
    Dhūtaṅga;
    1. ‣See dhuta
    Dhūpa
    1. incense Ja i.51 Ja i.64 Ja i.290 (gandha˚, dvandva compound); iii.144; vi.42 Pv-a 141 (gandhap̄uppha˚) dh˚ṁ dadāti to incense (a room) Ja i.399 Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e.g. Vv-a 173 (gandhapuppha˚)
    Sanskrit dhūpa of Indogermanic *dhūp, enlarged from *dhū in dhunāti (q.v.)
    Dhūpana
    neuter
    1. incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice Ja iii.144 Ja iv.236 Pv iii.53 (sāsapa˚). Dhupayati & Dhupayati;
    Sanskrit dhūpana
    Dhūpāyati
    Dhūpayati;
    1. to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180 SN i.40 (dhūpāyita) = Th 1, 448 AN ii.214f. Ja i.73 Mil 333 (sīlagandhena lokaṁ dh.) Dhp-a i.370 (aorist dhūpāyi) iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna).
    2. past participle dhūpita
    3. Sanskrit dhūpayati; causative from dhūpa
    Dhūpāyati
    Dhūpayati;
    1. to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180 SN i.40 (dhūpāyita) = Th 1, 448 AN ii.214f. Ja i.73 Mil 333 (sīlagandhena lokaṁ dh.) Dhp-a i.370 (aorist dhūpāyi) iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna).
    2. past participle dhūpita
    3. Sanskrit dhūpayati; causative from dhūpa
    Dhūpita
    1. fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela˚ flavoured with oil). cp. pa˚
    past participle of dhūpāyati
    Dhūma
    1. smoke, fumes Vin i.204 (aroma of drugs) MN i.220 (dh ˚ṁ kattā) AN v.352 (identical) AN ii.53 AN iv.72f.v.347 sq. Ja iii.401 Ja iii.422 (tumhākaṁ dh-kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i.e. at your cremation) Dhp-a i.370 (eka˚ one mass of smoke) Vv-a 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha˚) Pv-a 230 (micchā-vitakka in ex plural of vidhūma).

      1. ˚andha blind with smoke Ja i.216
      • ˚kālika (cp. above dh

        • kāle) lasting till a person’s cremation Vin ii.172 288
        • ˚ketu fire (literally whose sign is smoke) Ja iv.26 Ja v.63
        • ˚jāla a mass of smoke Ja v.497
        • ˚netta a smoke-tube, i.e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin i.204 Vin ii.120 Ja iv.363 Thag-a 14
        • ˚sikhā fire (epithet of Agni; literally smoke-crested) Vv 352 (sikha) = Vv-a 161 Vism 416; also as sikhin Ja vi.206 Dhumayati & Dhumayati;
        Vedic dhūma = Latin fumus; Old High German toum etc. Indogermanic *dhu ‣See also dhunāti
    Dhūmāyati
    Dhūmayati;
    1. to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured to cloud over MN i.142 (variant reading dhūpāyati) Pv i.64 (pariḍayhati + dh. hadayaṁ) Dhp-a i.425 (akkhīni me dh. I ‣See almost nothing). past participle dhūmāyita
    2. Sanskrit dhūmayati, denominative from dhūma
    Dhūmāyanā
    feminine smoking, smouldering MN i.143 Nett 24 (as variant reading to dhūpāyanā).
    Dhūmāyitatta
    neuter
    1. becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration SN iii.124 (+ timirāyitattaṁ)
    abstract to dhūmāyati
    Dhūsara
    adjective
    1. dust-coloured Vv-a 335
    Sanskrit dhūsara, Anglo-Saxon dust = English dust & dusk, German dust ‣See dhvaṁsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under furo
    Dhenu
    feminine
    1. a milch cow, a female animal in general Ja i.152 (miga˚ hind) Vv 806 Dhp-a i.170 396 Pv-a 112 In simile at Vism 313
    Sanskrit dhenu, to dhayati to give suck ‣See dhātī & dhītar
    Dhenupa
    1. a suckling calf MN i.79 Snp 26
    dhenu + pa from pibati
    Dheyya
    (—˚)
    1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña˚ Ja iv.110
    2. kamma˚ AN iv.285
    3. maccu˚ (q.v.) SN i.22 Snp 358 Snp 1104 Thag 2, 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13) māra˚ AN iv.228
    4. putting on, assigning, in nāma˚ Dhs 1307
    Sanskrit dheya, originally gerundive of dhā ‣See dahati1
    Dhota
    1. washed, bleached, clean Ja i.62 (˚sankha a bleached shell); ii.275 Pv-a 73 (˚vattha), 116 (˚hattha with clean hands), 274 (identical); Vism 224 (identical)
    Sanskrit dhāuta, past participle of dhavati2 ‣See dhovati
    Dhona
    adjective-noun
    1. purified MN i.386 Snp 351 Snp 786 Snp 813 Snp 834 (= dhutakilesa Snp-a 542) Ja iii.160 (˚sākha = patthaṭasākha Commentary ; Burmese variant vena˚) Nd1 77 = 176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following)
    2. (
    3. plural the four requisites of a bhikkhu Dhp-a; iii.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Commentary on atidhonacārin Dhp 240 gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887 100)
    either = dhota, Sanskrit dhauta ‣See dhovati or = dhuta ‣See dhuta & dhunana. Quite a different suggestion as regards etymology is given by Kern,; Toevoegselen 117 who considers it as a possible dern from (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful
    Dhopati
    1. to wash, cleanse DN i.93 (dhopetha, imperative ; variant reading B dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; variant reading B. dhoveyya)
    a variant of dhovati, taken as causative formation
    Dhopana
    neuter
    1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead DN i.6
    2. aṭṭhi-dhovana Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.84 AN v.216 ‣See Commentary at 364. 2. Surgical washing of a wound Ja ii.117
    3. In vaṁsadhopana apparently a feat by acrobats Ja iv.390 It is possible that the passage at DN i.6 really belongs here ‣See the note at Dialogues of the Buddha i.9
    a variant of dhovana, q.v.
    Dhorayha
    [for *dhor-vayha = Sanskrit *dhaurvahya, abstract from dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter “carrying a yoke,” a beast of burden SN i.28 DN iii.113 (purisa˚) AN i.162
    1. ˚vata neuter the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery SN i.28
    2. ˚sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dhp 208 (= dhuravahana-sīlatāya dh. Dhp-a iii.272)
    3. ˚sīlin ˚sīla Ja ii.97 (= dhura-vahanaka-ācārena sampanna Commentary ).

    Dhoreyya
    (—˚)
    1. “to be yoked,” accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma˚ Mil 288
    Sanskrit dhaureya, derived from dhura
    Dhova
    adjective-noun
    1. washing, cleansing Bu ii.15
    Sanskrit dhāva ‣See dhovati
    Dhovati
    1. to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin ii.208 210, 214; Snp p. 104 (bhājanāni) Ja i.8 Ja v.297
    • dhovi Ja vi.366 Dhp-a iii.207
    • absolutive dhovitvā Ja i.266 Ja iv.2 Vv-a 33 (pattaṁ), 77 (identical) Pv-a 75 Pv-a 144. infinitive dhovituṁ Vin ii.120 Vin iv.261 pp dhota (q.v.) & dhovita Ja i.266
    • ‣ See also dhopati (*dhopeti)
    Sanskrit dhāvati ‣See dhāvati
    Dhovana
    neuter
    1. washing Vin iv.262 SN iv.316 (bhaṇḍa˚) AN i.132 AN i.161 AN i.277 Iti 111 (pādānaṁ) Ja ii.129 Ja vi.365 (hattha˚) Mil 11 Vism 343 Pv-a 241 (hattha-pāda˚) Dhp-a ii.19 (pāda˚) figuratively (ariyaṁ). AN v.216
    1. N
    Sanskrit dhāvana ‣See also dhopana

    N

    Na1
    1. expletive-emphatic particle, often used in comparative-indefinite sense just so, like this, as if, as ‣See cana & canaṁ Ja v.339 (Commentary cttha na-kāro upamāne). Also as naṁ (cp. cana → canaṁ) Vin ii.81 186 (kathaṁ naṁ = kathaṁ nu) Ja ii.416 Ja v.302 Ja vi.213 (Commentary p. 216: ettha eko na-karo pucchanattho hoti) Thag 1, 1204 Mil 177 Perhaps at Snp 148 (kattha-ci naṁ, Burmese variant na; but Commentary Kp-a 247 etaṁ). To this na belongs na3 ‣See also nu & nanu
    Sanskrit na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi-nā) Indogermanic pronoun base *no, cp. Latin nē, nae surely, also enclitic in ego-ne & in question utruṁne, nam; fuller form *eno as in Sanskrit anā (
  • adverb ) anena, anayā (instrumental pronote 3rd) Latin enim
  • Na2
    1. negātive & adversative particle “not” (Nd2 326: paṭikkhepa; Kp-a 170 paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n': n’ atthi, n’ etaṁ etc.; or contracted: nāhaṁ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaṁ (It 29, Ja iv.3), nayidha (It 36, 37) nayimaṁ (It 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything Ja i.295
    • In disjunctive clauses: na … na neither-nor, so-or not so. In question: karoti na karoti (“or not”) Ja ii.133 cp. in same use. Often with added pi (api) in second part: na-nāpi neither-nor (“not-but also not”) SN ii.65 MN i.246 Pv i.119

  • In syntactic context mostly emphasized by various negative & adversative particles, viz.; nāpi ‣See under 2; n’ eva indeed not, not for all that Ja iii.55 or not Kp-a 219; n’ eva-na neither-nor DN i.33 DN i.35 MN i.486 AN v.193 Ja i.207 Ja i.279 Vin ii.185 Dhp-a i.328 Dhp-a ii.65 DN-a i.186 188; n’ eva-na pana identical DN i.24

    • na kho not indeed Ja ii.134
    • na ca but not (= this rather than that Ja i.153
    • na tāva = na kho Vv 3713
    • na nu (in quest. noune) is it not? Pv-a 74 Pv-a 136; na no surely not Snp 224
    • na hi certainly not Dhp 5 Dhp 184 Snp 666 Kh vii.6; na hi jātu identical Snp 152-‣ See also nu, nū, no.

      1. -4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a-(an-) in cases where the word-negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g (a) nacira (= acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuṁsaka neuter, neka (= aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q.v.)
      Vedic na = Indogermanic *ně; Latin ne in n’ unquam etc., Gothic ni; Sanskrit na ca = Latin neque = Gothic nih. Also Sanskrit nā Indogermanic *nē, cp. Latin Gothic nē
  • Na3
    1. base of demonstrative pronote 3rd pers. (= ta˚), only in following cases: accusative singular naṁ (mostly enclitic) fuller form enaṁ him, her, that one etc. Snp 139 Snp 201 Snp 385 Snp 418 Snp 980 Snp 1076 Iti 32 Dhp 42 Dhp 230 Ja i.152 Ja i.172 Ja i.222 iii.281; Kp-a 220 Dhp-a i.181 Dhp-a iii.173 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 73.

      1. - accusative plural ne them Iti 110 (variant reading te) Snp 223 (= te manusse Kp-a 169) Ja ii.417 Ja iii.204 Ja v.458 Dhp-a i.8 13, 61, 101, 390 Vv-a 299

        • genitive dative
        • plural nesaṁ DN i.175 DN i.191 Iti 63 Ja i.153 Dhp-a iv.41 Vv-a 37 136. Pv-a 54 Pv-a 201 Pv-a 207 ‣See also cna; cp. nava2
        identical with na1
    Nakula
    1. a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon. AN v.289f. Ja ii.53 Ja vi.538 Mil 118 Mil 394
    Vedic nakula, cp. nakra crocodile
    Nakkhatta
    neuter
    1. the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with different constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity
    • The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sanskrit sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumerated at Abhp. 58–⁠60 as follows Assayuja Sanskrit Aśvinī

    Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraṁ Sanskrit Mṛgaśīrṣa

    Addā Sanskrit Ārdrā

    Punabbasu Phussa Sanskrit Puṣya

    Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba-phaggunī Sanskrit Pūrva-phalgunī). Uttara˚, Hattha, Cittā [ Sanskrit Chaitra

    Sāti Svātī

    Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā Mūlaṁ, Pubb-āsāḷha ˚āṣāḍha

    Uttar˚, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā Satabhisaja Śatatāraka

    1. Pubba-bhaddapadā Uttara˚, Revatī
    • It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 name instead of 27 (Nd1 382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one name (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī ‣See Plunkett; Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.
    • Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e.g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi˚) Ja i.50 & Uttarāsāḷha Ja i.63 Ja i.82 Kattikā & Rohiṇī Snp-a 456
    • nakkhattaṁ; ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd1 382; oloketi to read the stars to scan the constellations Ja i.108 Ja i.253
    • ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Latin calandae from cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated Ja i.250 n. ghuṭṭhaṁ Ja i.50 Ja i.433 sanghuṭṭhaṁ Pv-a 73 ghositaṁ Vv-a 31
    • kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta-) festival Ja i.50 Ja i.250 Vv-a 63 Dhp-a i.393 (cp. ˚kīḷā below). n. ositaṁ the festival at an end Ja i.433
    • nakkhatta (singular) a constellation Snp 927 collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (
    • plural ) the stars: nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Thag 2.143 Vin i.246 = Sn 569 (but cp. ex
    • plural at Snp-a 456: candayogavasena “ajja kattikā ajja Rohiṇī” ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando ti vutto) DN i.10 (nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ & uppatha-gamanaṁ a right or wrong course, i.e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); ii.259; iii.85, 90 AN iv.86 Thag 2, 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā)
    1. ˚kīḷana = kīḷā Dhp-a iii.461
    • ˚kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday Ja i.50 Thag-a 137 Vv-a 109
    • ˚ ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon ‣See gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) DN i.10 (ex
    • plural at DN-a i.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi-gahasamāyoga)
    • ˚patha “the course of the stars,” i.e. the nocturnal sky Dhp 208
    • ˚pada a constellation Vin ii.217
    • ˚pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd1 382
    • ˚pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) Dhp-a i.166 -mālā a garland of stars Vv-a 167
    • ˚yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope Ja i.82 253 Dhp-a i.174 (+ tithi-karaṇa); ˚ṁ oloketi to set the horoscope Dhp-a i.166 ˚ṁ uggaṇhāti identical Pv iii.54
    • ˚rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i.e. the moon) Ja iii.348
    Vedic nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā = Latin nox, Gothic nahts, English night = the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataṁ mukhaṁ Vin i.246
    Nakha
    1. a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin ii.133 Snp 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā) Ja v.489 (pañcanakhā sattā five-nailed or-toed beings); Kh ii. = Mil 26 cp. taca (pañcatacakaṁ); Kp-a 43 Vv-a 7 (dasa-nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together) Pv-a 152 Pv-a 192; Sdhp 104
    Vedic nakha, cp. Sanskrit anghri foot; Latin unguis = Old Irish inga; Old High German nagal = English nail
    Nakhaka
    adjective belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi˚; like elephants’ claws, epithet of a castle (pāsāda) Vin ii.169 (Buddhaghosa on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṁ, evaṁ evaṁkatassa kir’ etaṁ nāmaṁ) (?).
    Nakhin
    adjective having nails Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with coppercoloured nails).
    Naga
    1. mountain SN i.195 Nd2 136a (nagassa passive āsīna, of the Buddha) Snp 180 (= devapabbata royal mountain Snp-a 216 or should it mean “forest"?) Thag 1, 41 (˚vivara), 525; Pv ii.961 (˚muddhani on top of the Mount, i.e. Mt. Sineru Pv-a 138 the Buddha was thought to reside there) Mil 327 (identical) Vv 166 (˚antare in between the (5) mountains ‣See Vv-a 82)
    2. Sanskrit naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na + gacchati, i.e. immovable (= sthāvara) more probably however with Lidén ‣See Walde under nāvis to Old High German nahho, Anglo-Saxon naca “boat = tree”; semantically mountain = trees, i.e. forest
    Nagara
    neuter
    1. a stronghold, citadel, fortress a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma nigama (village & market-place or township) Vin iii.47 (˚bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva˚; deva-city Ji.3 168, 202 Dhp-a i.280 etc.; cp. yakkha˚ Ja ii.127
    • Vin i.277 342, 344; ii.155, 184 DN ii.7 SN ii.105f.; iv.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaṁ); v.160 AN i.168 AN i.178 AN iv.106 sq (paccantima); v.194 (identical) Dhp 150 (aṭṭhīnaṁ) Snp 414 Snp 1013 (Bhoga˚) Ja i.3 Ja i.50 (Kapilavatthu˚); ii.5; iii.188 vi.368 etc. Pug 56 Dhp-a iv.2 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 73; Dīpavaṁsa xiv.51 (+ pura). cp. nāgara
    1. ˚ūpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base DN i.105 cp. DN-a i.274
    • ˚ūpama like a citadel (of citta) Dhp 40 cp. Dhp-a i.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340
    • ˚kathā town-gossip DN i.7
    • ˚guttika superintendent of the city police Ja iii.30 Ja iii.436 Ja iv.279 Mil 345 (dhammanagare n-g.), Dhp-a iv.55 cp. Kern Toevoegselen p. 167
    • ˚vara the noble town (of Rājagaha Vv 166 cp. Vv-a 82
    • ˚vīthi a city street Ja ii.416
    • ˚sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan Ja ii.367 (˚anā); iii.435 (Sulasā), 475 (˚anī) Dhp-a i.174 Dhp-a ii.201 Pv-a 4 (Sulasā) Mil 350
    Vedic nagara, Non-aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic
    Nagaraka
    neuter a small city DN i.146 = 169, quoted Ja i.391
    Nagga
    adjective
    1. naked, nude Vin ii.121 Ja i.307 Pv i.61 (= niccola Pv-a 32); ii.15; 81 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 106
    1. ˚cariyā going naked Dhp 141 Dhp-a iii.78 cp. Sanskrit nagnacaryā Divy 339
    2. ˚bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic Ja iv.160 Ja v.75 Ja vi.225
    Vedic nagna = Latin nudus (from *nogṷedhos) Gothic naqaps = Old High German naccot, Anglo-Saxon nacod = naked; Old Irish nocht; perhaps
    Naggatta
    neuter
    1. = naggiya nakedness Pv-a 106
    Sanskrit nagnatva
    Naggiya
    neuter
    1. naked state, nudity Vin i.292 305 SN iv.300 Snp 249
    Sanskrit *nagnyaṁ
    Naggiyā
    (adjective feminine )
    1. = naggā, naked Pv ii.312
    Sanskrit nagnikā
    Naṅgala
    neuter
    1. a plough SN i.115 SN iii.155 AN iii.64 Snp 77 (yuga˚ yoke & plough); Snp p. 13 Ja i.57 Thag 2, 441 (= sīra Thag-a 270) Snp-a 146 Vv-a 63 65 Pv-a 133 (dun˚ hard to plough) Dhp-a i.223 (aya˚) iii.67 (identical)

    -īsā the beam of a plough SN i.104 (of an elephant’s trunk)

  • ˚kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing SN v.146 = J ii.59 -phāla modern Indian phār
    1. ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) Dhp-a i.395
    Vedic lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda → Menandros Etym. unknown, probably dialectical (already in RV iv.574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. cp. Balūčī nangār
  • Naṅgalin
    adjective-noun having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha˚ “using the mouth as plough” Thag 1, 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rhys Davids harsh of speech).
    Naṅguṭṭha
    neuter
    1. = nangula AN ii.245 Ja i.194 (of a bull); ii.19 (of an elephant); iii.16 (sūci˚), 480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer) Dhp-a i.275 (of a fish); ii.64
    dialectical for *nangūlya → *nanguḷhya?
    Naṅgula
    neuter
    1. a tail Thag 1, 113 = 601 (go˚)
    Sanskrit lāngū̆la to langa & lagati (q.v.) cp. Latin langueo
    Nacira
    adjective
    1. not of long duration, short Snp 694 gen nacirass’ eva after a short time shortly Snp p. 16 Ja iv.2 Ja iv.392 Mil 250
    Sanskrit nacira = na + cira
    Nacca
    neuter
    1. (pantomimic) dancing usually combined with singing (gīta, q.v.) & instrumental music (vādita)
    • ; nacca : AN i.261 DN iii.183 Ja i.61 207 DN-a i.77 Pv-a 231
    • nacca-gīta : Ja i.61 Pv iv.72 Dhp-a iii.129 Vv-a 131 135
    • nacca-gīta-vādita (+ visūkadassana): Vin i.83 DN i.5 DN i.6 Kp-a 36; cp. Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite)
    Vedic nṛtya = Anglo-Indian nautch, etymology uncertain, cp. naccati & naṭati
    Naccaka
    1. a dancer, (pantomimic actor Mil 191 Mil 331 Mil 359 (naṭa˚). feminine naccakī Vin ii.12
    2. Sanskrit *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q.v.
    Naccati
    1. to dance, play Vin ii.10 Ja i.292 Vv 501 (= naṭati Vv-a 210); 6421. past participle naccento DN i.135
    2. future naccissati Vin ii.12
    3. aorist nacci Ja iii.127 infinitive naccituṁ Ja i.207
    4. causative naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch˚)
    5. Vedic nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati
    Naccana
    neuter
    1. dance, dancing Vv-a 282 315
    Vedic *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana
    Najjuha
    1. a kind of cock or hen Ja vi.528 Ja vi.538
    Sanskrit dātyūha
    Naṭa
    1. a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin iv.285 SN iv.306f. Dhp-a iv.60 (˚dhītā), 65 (˚karaka), 224 (˚kīḷā) Mil 359 (˚naccaka); Sdhp 380
    • cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka
    Sanskrit naṭa dialectical ṭ, cp. Prakrit naḍa, of nṛt ‣See naccati
    Naṭaka
    1. = naṭa Vin iv.285 Mil 331 Pv-a 3 feminine naṭikā DN-a i.239
    2. Sanskrit naṭaka
    Naṭati
    1. to dance, play Vv-a 210 (= naccati)
    Sanskrit naṭati, of nṛt, with dialectical ṭ, cp. naccati
    Naṭṭha
    1. perished, destroyed; lost AN ii.249 Ja i.74 267
    Sanskrit naṣṭha, past participle of nassati (naśyati), q.v.
    Naṭṭhana
    neuter
    1. destruction Mil 180 Mil 237
    Derived from naṭṭha
    Naṭṭhāyika
    1. bankrupt Mil 131 Mil 201
    cp. Sanskrit naṣṭhārtha, i.e. naṣṭha + artha
    Nata
    1. bent (on) SN i.186 (a˚) Snp 1143 Nd2 327
    Sanskrit nata, past participle of namati, q.v.
    Nati
    feminine
    1. bending, bent, inclination SN ii.67 SN iv.59 MN i.115 Kalya-rupa
    Sanskrit nati of nam
    Kalya-rūpa
    1. pleased, glad Snp 680 Snp 683
    • not pleased Snp 691

    Natta
    neuter
    1. night, accusative nattaṁ by night, in nattam-ahaṁ by day & by night Snp 1070 (Burmese variant and Nd; 2 rattamahaṁ)
    Sanskrit nakta ‣See nakkhatta
    Nattar
    1. grandson Ja i.60 (nattu, genitive), 88 Ud 91 92 Pv-a 17 (nattu-dhītā great-grand-daughter), 25 (nattā nominative)
    Sanskrit naptṛ, analogy-formation after mātṛ etc. from Vedic napāt; cp. Latin nepos; Anglo-Saxon nefa = English nephew Old High German nevo
    Natthika
    adjective-noun
    1. one who professes the motto of “natthi,” a sceptic, nihilist SN i.96 usually in compounds
    1. ˚diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Snp 243 (= micchāditthi Commentary ) Vv-a 342 Pv-a 244
    • ˚vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine SN iii.73 MN i.403 AN ii.31 Pv-a 215 (+ micchādiṭṭhika)
    Sanskrit nāstika
    Natthitā
    feminine
    1. nihilism SN ii.17 Ja v.110
    Sanskrit nāstitā, from n’ atthi
    Natthibhāva
    1. non-existence Dhp-a iii.324
    n’ atthi-bhāva
    Natthu
    1. the nose Ja v.166 (= nāsā Commentary )
    2. = ˚kamma medical treatment through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti)
      1. ˚kamma nose-treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DN-a i.98: telaṁ yojetvā n-karaṇaṁ) DN i.12 Vin i.204 MN i.511 Dhp-a i.12
      • ˚karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin i.204
      cp. Sanskrit nas feminine & nasta ‣See etymology under nāsā
    Nadati
    1. to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaṁ nadati frequently) Snp 552 (sīha), 684 (identical), 1015 Ja i.50 Ja i.150 Ja ii.110 aorist nadi Ja iii.55
    2. anādisuṁ Ja iv.349
    3. causative nadāpeti to make roar Ja ii.244 ‣See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati
    4. Vedic nadati, nad of unknown etymology
    Nadana
    neuter
    1. roaring Ja i.19 (sīhanāda˚ the sound of a lion’s roar)
    cp. Sanskrit nadanu
    Nadita
    neuter
    1. roar, noise Ja ii.110
    cp. Sanskrit nādita, past participle of causative nadayati
    Nadī
    feminine
    1. a river; often characterised as mahā˚ in opp to kun˚ rivulet; plural nadiyo also collect. “the waters

      • DN i.244 (Aciravatī nadī) SN ii.32 SN ii.118 SN ii.135 SN v.390 AN i.33 AN i.136 AN i.243 (mahā˚); ii.55, 140 (mahā˚); iii.52 iv.101 (m˚), 137 Snp 425 Snp 433 Snp 568 Snp 720 Dhp 251 Ja i.296 Ja ii.102 Ja iii.51 Ja iii.91 (Kebukā); v.269 (Vetaraṇī˚); vi.518 (Ketumatī); Pv iv.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā) Pv-a 256 (m˚); Sdhp 21 Sdhp 194 Sdhp 574
      • genitive sg nadiyā Ja i.278 Iti 113 instrumental nadiyā Ja i.278 Pv-a 46
      • plural nominative nadiyo Mil 114 (na tā n. dhuva-salilā), najjo Pv-a 29 (mahā˚); & najjāyo Ja vi.278 gen nadīnaṁ Vin i.246 = Sn 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaṁ)
      • kunnadī a small river SN i.109 SN ii.32 SN ii.118 SN v.47 SN v.63 AN ii.140 AN iv.100 V.114 sq
      • On n. in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1906, 100
      1. ˚kuñja a river glen DN-a i.209
      • ˚kūla the bank of a river cp. iii.71
      • ˚tīra = ˚kūla Ja i.278
      • ˚dugga a difficult ford in a river SN ii.198
      • ˚vidugga = ˚dugga AN i.35 AN iii.128
      Vedic nadī, from nadati = "the roaring,” cp. also nandati
    Naddha
    1. tied, bound, fastened, put on Ja i.175 (rathavarattaṁ); Bu i.31 (camma˚, of a drum); Mhvs vii.16 (˚pañcāyudha) Mil 117 (yuga˚) Dhs-a 131 cp. onaddha, vi˚, san˚
    Sanskrit naddha past participle of nah ‣See nayhati
    Nanandar
    feminine
    1. husband’s sister Ja v.269 (= sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275)
    Sanskrit nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā “mother”
    Nanikāma
    adjective
    1. disagreeable, unpleasant Dhp 309 (˚seyyā an uncomfortable bed)
    na + nikāma = anikāma
    Nanu
    indeclinable
    1. participle of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv ii.67 (so to be read for nanda? Burmese variant nuna); Manor. Pūr. on. AN v.194 (Andersen Pali R. 91)
    2. participle of interrogation (= Latin nonne) “is it not (cp. na2): Ja i.151 Ja iii.393 Dhp-a i.33
    Vedic nanu
    Nantaka
    neuter
    1. a shred rag, worn-out cloth, usually explained by jiṇṇapilotika (J iii.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (Pv-a 185) or pilotika only (Vv-a 311)
    • SN v.342 AN iii.187 AN iv.376 (˚vāsin as variant reading ; text has nantikavāsin) Vv 807 (anantaka) Pv iii.214 Ja iii.22 (˚vāsin clad in rags)
    a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toevoegselen p. 169), maybe Sanskrit naktaka “cover for nakedness (Trenckner, Note. 811), unless it be non-Aryan
    Nanda
    1. at Pv ii.67 used either as interj. (= nanu, q.v.) or as voc. in the sense of “dear”; the first explanation to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (variant reading nuna or; handa (in which case nanu would be gloss)
    Nandaka
    adjective
    1. giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; feminine nandikā Ja iv.396 (+ khiḍḍā), either as adj or
    2. feminine abstract pleasure, rejoicing (= abhindandanā Commentary )
    3. Sanskrit nandikā
    Nandati
    1. to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instrumental) SN i.110 AN iv.94f. Snp 33 Dhp 18 causative nandeti to please, to do a favour Ja iv.107 (nandaya = tosehi Commentary ) Pv-a 139 (= toseti)-ppr. nandayanto Ja vi.588

      • cp. ānandati
      Vedic nandati, nand = nad (cp. vind → vid etc.) originally to utter sounds of joy
    Nandanā
    feminine
    1. rejoicing, delight, pleasure SN i.6 = Sn 33
    Sanskrit nandanā
    Nandi1
    1. & (frequently); Nandī feminine

      1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c
      2. locative ) SN i.16 SN i.39 SN i.54 SN ii.101f. (āhāre); iii.14 (= upādāna) iv.36 sq. AN ii.10 (kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚), iii.246 iv.423 sq. (dhamma˚) Snp 1055 (+ nivesana) Nd2 330 (= taṇhā) Pug 57 Dhs 1059≈(in definition of taṇhā) Vb 145 356, 361 Dhs-a 363 Thag-a 65 167
      3. For nandī at Mil 289 read tandī
      4. a musical instrument: joy-drum Sanskrit nandī
        1. Vin iii.108 (= vijayabheri) cp. ā˚
        1. ˚(y)āvatta “turning auspiciously” (i.e. turning to the right ‣See dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Nett 2 4, 7, 113 (always attribute of naya)
        2. ˚ūpasecana (rāgasalla sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maṁsûpasecana (odana) Ja iii.144 = vi.24 -kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight SN iii.51
        • ˚(ṁ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Snp 1101 (+ okañjaha & kappañjaha) Nd2 331
        • ˚bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in ˚parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i.e. an Arahant), explained however by Com as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469 SN i.2 SN i.53 Snp 175 Snp 637 = Dh 413
        • ˚ mukhī (adjective
        • feminine ) “joyfaced,” showing a merry face, epithet of the night (esp the eve of the uposatha) Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (identical) -rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight SN ii.227 SN iii.51; iv.142, 174, 180 MN i.145 Dhs 1059≈, 1136 especially as attribute of taṇhā in phrase n-r-sahagata-taṇhā (cp Mvu iii.332: nandīrāgasahagatā tṛṣṇā) Vin i.10 SN iii.158 SN v.425f.; Ps ii.137; Nett 72
        • ˚saṁyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Snp 1109 Snp 1115 Nd2 332
        • ˚samudaya the rise or origin of delight MN iii.267
        Sanskrit nandi, but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nandī Divy 37
    Nandi2
    1. = nandhi
    Nandin
    adjective
    1. finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening SN ii.53 (vedanā) AN ii.59 AN ii.61 Iti 112
    Sanskrit nandin
    Nandha
    1. ‣See yuga˚
    Nandhati
    1. meaning not so much “to bind as “to cover” ‣See apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati pariyonandhati
    for nayhati, derived from naddha after analogy of baddha → bandhati
    Nandhi
    feminine (usually spelt nandi)
    1. a strap, thong Ja i.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca) Snp 622 = Dh 398 (+ varatta) Snp-a 400 Dhp-a i.44 iv.160
    Sanskrit naddhrī to naddha, past participle of nah to bind
    Napuṁsaka
    adjective
    1. of no sex; literally Vism 548, 553 Thag-a 260 Vb 417 in grammar of the neuter gender Kaccāyana 50 Pv-a 266 (is reading correct?)
    Vedic napuṁsaka = na + puṁs “not-male”
    Nabha
    neuter & Nabhas (in oblique cases)
    1. mist, vapour clouds, sky AN i.242 AN ii.50 (nabhā), iii.240, Snp 687 (nabhasi-gama, of the moon) Vv 323 352 (= ākāsa Vv-a 161), 534 (identical 236), 6327 (identical 268) Pv-a 65 Mhvs vii.9 (nabhasā instrumental)
    Sanskrit nabhas; Latin nebula, Old Irish nēl, Anglo-Saxon nifol (darkness), Old High German nebul ‣See also abbha
    Nabbho
    1. = nābhiyo, nominative plural of nābhi (q.v.)

    Namataka
    neuter
    1. a piece of cloth Vin ii.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (˚ṁ dhāreti)
    word & etymology doubtful; cp. nantaka & Buddhaghosa Vin ii.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaṁ (= veṭhanakaṁ) pilotikakhaṇḍaṁ
    Namati
    1. to bend, bend down (trs. & instrumental) direct, apply SN i.137 (cittaṁ) Snp 806 Ja i.61 (aorist nami, cittaṁ).
    2. causative nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Snp 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n’ âpenti) to bend, to wield Dhp 80 = 145 (namayati). As nāmeti at Ja vi.349
    3. past participle namita (q.v.)
    4. Vedic namati, Indogermanic *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gothic niman = German nehmen ‣See cognates in Walde locative cit. under nemus
    Namana
    neuter
    1. naming, giving a name Kp-a 78 Dhs-a 52 ‣See nāma2; Vism 528
    a philosophical term constructed by Buddhaghosa from nāma, cp. ruppana-rūpa
    Namanā
    feminine
    1. bent, application, industry Vb 352
    abstract to namati, cp. Sanskrit namana nt.
    Namassati
    1. to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṁ katvā) Snp 236 Snp 485 Snp 598 Snp 1058 Snp 1063 Nd2 334 Ja iii.83 Pv ii.1220; Kp-a 196; pot namasseyya Iti 110 Dhp 392 Dhp 1st plural namassemu Snp 995 ppr. namassaṁ Snp 334 Snp 934 namassanto Snp-a 565 (usually) namassamāna Snp 192 Snp 1142 Nd1 400 Ja ii.73 Vv-a 7
    2. aorist namassiṁsu Snp 287
    3. absolutive namassitvā Ja i.1
    4. gerundive (as adjective) namassaniya (venerable) Mil 278
    5. Vedic namasyati, denominative from namo
    Namassana
    neuter (?) veneration Ja i.1
    Namassiyā
    1. (namassā) feminine

      1. worship, veneration Mil 140
      Sanskrit namasyā
    Namita
    1. bent on, disposed to (—˚), able or capable of Ja iii.392 (pabbajjāya-namita-citta) Mil 308 (phalabhāra˚)
    past participle nameti
    Namo
    neuter & Nama
    • neuter

      1. nominativege, veneration especially used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Snp 540 Snp 544 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 67
      Vedic namas, cp. Avestan nəmo prayer; Latin nemus ‣See namati
    Namuci
    1. (proper name) a name of Māra
    Naya
    adjective-noun
    1. “leading”; usually m: way (figuratively), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct AN ii.193 = Nd2 151 (˚hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (identical), 7, 113 Mil 316 (nayena = nayahetu); Kp-a 74 Vv-a 112 (sense, context, sentence) Pv-a 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (identical), 136 280
    • nayaṁ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave SN ii.58 = Vb 329 Ja iv.241 (anayaṁ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion) Pv-a 227 (+ anumināti)
    • With ˚ādi˚; name has the function of continuing or completing the context “and similarly,” e.g. ˚ādinaya-pavatta dealing with this & the following Vv-a 2 … ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth Ja i.81 Pv-a 30
    • instrumental nayena (—˚) as
    • adverb in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata according to what has been shown or said in.. Ja i.59 Vv-a 3 Pv-a 280 purima˚ as before Ja i.59 iv.140; vutta˚ as said (above) (cp. vutta-niyāmena Pv-a 13 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 36 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 92 etc
    • sunaya a sound judgment Ja iv.241
    • dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adjective: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible AN iii.178 = Nett 21 Ja iv.241
    from nayati, to lead ‣See neti
    Nayati
    1. ‣See neti
    Nayana
    neuter
    1. the eye Thag 2, 381 Vv 353 Dhs 597 Vb 71f. Mil 365 Thag-a 255 Vv-a 161 (= cakkhu) Pv-a 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448 Sdhp 621
    Sanskrit nayana, to nayati = the leader cp. also netra = Pali netta
    Nayhati
    1. to tie, bind; only in comparison with preposition as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc
    • pp naddha (q.v.) ‣See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati unnahanā, piḷayhati
    Vedic nahyati, Indogermanic *nedh as in Latin nodus & Vedic nahu
    Nayhana
    neuter
    1. tying, binding; bond, fetter Dhp-a iv.161
    Sanskrit nahana
    Nara
    1. man (in poetry especially a brave, strong heroic man), plural either “men” or “people” (the latter e.g. at Snp 776 Snp 1082 Pv i.1112)
    • AN i.130 ii.5; iii.53 Snp 39 Snp 96 Snp 116 Snp 329 Snp 591 Snp 676 Snp 865 etc. Dhp 47 Dhp 48 Dhp 262 Dhp 309 Dhp 341 Ja iii.295 Nd1 12 = Nd2 335 (definition) Vv-a 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i.e. a “leading” man) Pv-a 116 = Dh 125
    1. ˚ādhama vilest of men Snp 246
    • ˚āsabha “man bull, i.e. lord of men Snp 684 Snp 996
    • ˚inda “man lord,” i.e. king Snp 836 Ja i.151
    • ˚uttama best of men (epithet of the Buddha) SN i.23 DN iii.147 Snp 1021
    • ˚deva god-man or man-god (
    • plural ) gods, also epithet of the B. “king of men SN i.5 Pv iv.350
    • ˚nārī (
    • plural ) men & women, ap
    • plural to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv.32; 4, 337 538; Pv ii.112
    • ˚vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Thag 1 736 naravīrakata “by human skill & wit” Mrs. Rh D.)
    • ˚sīha lion of men Ja i.89
    Vedic nara, cp. nṛtu; Indogermanic *ner to be strong or valiant = Latin vir); Old Irish nert
    Naraka
    1. a pit DN i.234 Thag 1, 869 Ja iv.268 (˚āvāṭa Pv-a 225)
    2. a name for Niraya, i.e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased ‣See niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67 SN i.209 Snp 706 Pv-a 52 Sdhp 492 (saṁsāraghora˚), 612
      1. ˚aṅgāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32
      Sanskrit naraka; etymology doubtful, problematic whether to Anglo-Saxon nord = north as region of the underworld
    Narada
    neuter
    1. nard, ointment Ja vi.537 Nala & Nala;
    Sanskrit nalada, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebrew nīrd
    Nala
    Naḷa;
    a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35 AN ii.73 Dhp 337 Nd2 680ii Ja i.223 Ja iv.141 396 (n. va chinno) Pv i.116 (identical) Dhp-a iii.156 Dhp-a iv.43 ‣See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.
    1. ˚āgāra a house built of reeds SN i.156 SN iv.185 (+ tiṇāgāra) AN i.101 (+ tiṇāgāra) Nd2 40d (identical), Mil 245 cp. Avs Index ii.228 (naḍāgāra)
    2. ˚aggi a fire of reeds Ja vi.100 (˚vaṇṇaṁ pabbataṁ)
    3. ˚kalāpī a bundle of r SN ii.114
    • ˚kāra a worker in reeds, basket-maker DN i.51 (+ pesakāra & kumbhakāra) Ja v.291 Thag-a 28 Pv-a 175 (+ vilīvakāra) Dhp-a i.177
    • ˚daṇḍaka a shaft of r. Ja i.170
    • ˚maya made of r. Vin ii.115
    • ˚vana a thicket of reeds Ja iv.140 Mil 342
    • ˚sannibha reedcoloured Ja vi.537 (Commentary naḷa-puppha-vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha)
    • ˚ setu a bridge of reeds Snp 4
    Vedic naḍa & Sanskrit naḷa, with dialectical ḍ (ḷ) for *narda
    Naḷapin
    1. a water-animal Ja vi.537
    Nalāṭa
    neuter
    1. the forehead SN i.118 Ja iii.393 Ja iv.417 (nalāṭena maccuṁ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185 Dhp-a i.253
    1. ˚anta the side of the forehead Ja vi.331
    • ˚maṇḍala the round of the
    • feminine DN i.106 Snp p. 108
    Vedic lalāṭa = rarāṭa; on n → l cp. nangala
    Nalāṭikā
    feminine
    1. “belonging to the forehead,” a frown Vin ii.10 (nalāṭikaṁ deti to give a frown)
    Sanskrit lalāṭikā
    Nalinī
    feminine
    1. a pond Ja iv.90 Vism 84, 17
    Sanskrit nalinī
    Nassati
    (v. intransitive)
    1. to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Snp 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaṁ) Iti 90 Ja i.81 Ja i.116 Ja i.150 preterite nassaṁ (prohib.) Snp 1120 pl anassāma MN i.177 aorist nassi AN iii.54 (mā nassi prohib.) Ja iv.137 (cakkhūni ˚iṁsu: the eyes failed);
    2. future nassisati Ja i.5
    3. conditional nassissa Ja ii.112
    4. causative nāseti (q.v.) ‣See also pa˚
    5. Vedic naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Latin neco, noceo, noxius
    Nassana
    neuter
    1. disappearance, loss, destruction AN iii.54 (˚dhamma adjective doomed to perish)
    cp. Sanskrit naśana
    Nahāta
    1. one who has bathed Vin ii.221 Ja i.266 Dhp-a iv.232 (˚kilesatā washed off moral stain)
    Sanskrit snāta ‣See nahāyati
    Nahātaka
    1. “one who has bathed,” a brahmin who has finished the studies MN i.280 AN iv.144 Dhp 422 (ex plural at Dhp-a iv.232 with reference to perfection in the Buddha’s teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Snp 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646
    2. Vedic snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati
    Nahāna
    neuter
    1. bathing, a bath Vin i.47 51 = ii.224; i.196 (dhuva˚ constant bathing), 197 SN i.183 SN v.390 (figuratively) Ja i.265 Pv-a 50 Vism 27
    1. ˚kāla bathing time Pv-a 46
    • ˚koṭṭhaka bath-room Dhp-a iii.88
    • ˚garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196
    • ˚cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya˚) Dhp-a i.398
    • ˚tittha a shallow place for bathing Dhp-a i.3 Dhp-a iii.79
    Sanskrit snāna
    Nahāniya
    adjective belonging to a bath, bath-; in ˚cuṇṇa bath-powder Pv-a 46
    Nahāpaka
    1. a barber, bath attendant DN i.74 AN iii.25 DN-a i.157 (= ye nahāpenti) Pv-a 127 (= kappaka)
    Sanskrit snāpaka, from Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita
    Nahāpana
    neuter bathing, washing (trs.) DN i.7 DN i.12 AN i.62 AN i.132 AN ii.70 AN iv.54 Iti 111 (ucchādana +) Vv-a 305 (udakadāna +).
    Nahāpita
    1. a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. absolutive “bader”) a bath-attendant ‣See kappaka. Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber’s family was considered unfortunate. Vin i.249 (˚pubba who had formerly been a barber) DN i.225 Ja i.137 ii.5; iii.451; iv.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber’s fee) DN-a i.157 (= kappaka) Vv-a 207 (˚sālā a barber’s shop)
    2. Sanskrit only snāpaka ‣See nahāpaka; new formation from causative nahāpeti as agent noun with a- theme instead of ar-, cp. sallakatta for sallakattar
    Nahāpeti
    1. to wash, to give a bath, bathe Ja i.166 Pv-a 49 Vv-a 68 305
    Sanskrit snāpayati, causative of nahāyati
    Nahāmin
    adjective-noun
    1. a barber, a low-class individual Pv iii.114 (= kappaka-jātika Pv-a 176)
    = nahāpaka; Kern, Toevoegselen asks: should it be nahāpin?
    Nahāyati
    (rarely nhāyati
    1. to bathe (trs. & intransitive), to wash, to perform an ablution (especially at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin ii.280 Ja i.265 Ja vi.336 Pv-a 93 ppr. nahāyanto (Pv-a 83); nahāyamāna (Vin ii.105); infinitive nahāyituṁ (Vin i.47 Pv-a 144); absolutive nahāyitvā (J i.50; vi.367 Pv-a 42); nahātvā (J i.265; iii.277 Dhp-a iii.88 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 62 (after mourning), 82;
    2. gerundive nahāyitabba (Vin ii.220 280). Naharu & Nharu; Vedic snāti & snāyati,; snā = Latin nare (to swim); cp. also Sanskrit snauti, Gothic sniwan
    Nahāru
    Nhāru;
    1. sinew, tendon muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maṁsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone) as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maṁsa nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi-miñja (e.g. at Vin i.25 Ja iii.84) ‣See also definition in detail at Snp-a 246f. & Kp-a 47. Vin i.25 (nh˚) MN i.429 (used for bow strings) AN i.50 iii.324; iv.47 sq. (˚daddula), 129; Kh 111. Snp 194 (aṭṭhi˚) Nd2 97 (nh˚) Dhp-a iii.118 Thag-a 257 (nh˚) Pv-a 68 (aṭṭhi-camma˚), 80 (camma-maṁsa˚); Sdhp 46 103
    Sanskrit snāyu, Indogermanic *sné to sew, cp. Old High German nājan; Latin nervus; Anglo-Saxon sinu (= sinew); Old High German senawa Gothic nepla = Anglo-Saxon nāēdl (= needle); Old Irish snātha (thread); Old High German snuor (cord) = Anglo-Saxon snōd
    Nahuta
    neuter
    1. a vast number, a myriad Snp 677 Ja i.25 Ja i.83 Pv iv.17 Dhp-a i.88 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 265
    Sanskrit nayuta (m. plural ) of unknown etymology Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v → y → h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3
    Nāga
    1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy-tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies are classed with other divinities ‣See devatā, with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) DN i.54 SN iii.240f.v.47, 63; Bu. i.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā) Mil 23 Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas) Ja i.64 Dhp-a ii.4 Pv-a 272 Descriptions e.g. at Dhp-a iii.231 242 sq. ‣See also compounds
    2. an elephant, especially a strong, stately animal (thus in combination hatthi-nāga characterising “a Nāga elephant”) & frequently as symbol of strength & endurance (“heroic”). Thus epithet of the Buddha & of Arahants Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguṁ na karoti = he is faultless, etc.) ‣See Nd; 1 201 = Nd2 337 Thag 1, 693 Pv-a 57
    3. (a) the animal DN i.49 SN i.16 SN ii.217 SN ii.222 SN iii.85 SN v.351 AN ii.116 AN iii.156f. Snp 543 Vv 55 (= hatthināga Vv-a 37) Pv i.113 mahā˚ AN iv.107 AN iv.110
    4. (b) figuratively hero or saint: SN ii.277 SN iii.83 MN i.151 MN i.386 Dhp 320 Snp 29 Snp 53 Snp 166 Snp 421 Snp 518 Of the Buddha: Snp 522 Snp 845 Snp 1058 Snp 1101Mil 346 (Buddha˚)
    5. The Nāga-tree (now called “iron-wood tree,” the Pali meaning “fairy tree”), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (= Sanskrit nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.) ‣See compounds ˚rukkha, ˚puppha, ˚latā.

      1. ˚āpalokita “elephant-look” (turning the whole body) a mark of the Buddhas MN i.337 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nāgâvalokita Divy 208
      2. ˚danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin ii.117 (˚ka Vin ii.114 152) Ja vi.382
      • ˚nāṭaka snakes as actors Dhp-a iv.130
      • ˚nāsūru (
      • feminine (woman) having thighs like an elephant’s trunk Ja v.297
      • ˚puppha iron-wood flower Mil 283
      • ˚bala the strength of an elephant Ja i.265 Ja ii.158
      • ˚bhavana the world of snakes Nd1 448 Ja iii.275 Dhp-a iv.14
      • ˚māṇavaka a young serpent Ja iii.276
      • feminine ˚ikā ib. 275 Dhp-a iii.232
      • ˚rājā king of the Nāgas, i.e. serpents Ja ii.111 Ja iii.275 Snp 379 (Erāvaṇa ‣See detail Snp-a 368) Dhp-a i.359 iii.231, 242 sq. (Ahicchatta); iv.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka) -rukkha the iron-wood tree Ja i.35 (cp. Mvu ii.249) -latā = rukkha Ja i.80 (the Buddha’s toothpick made of its wood), 232 Dhp-a ii.211 (˚dantakaṭṭha toothpick) -vatta habits of serpents Nd1 92 also adjective ˚ika ibid. 89 -vana elephant-grove Dhp 324 Dhp-a iv.15
      • ˚vanika cl hunter MN i.175 MN iii.132
      • ˚hata one who strikes the el (viz. the Buddha) Vin ii.195
      Vedic nāga; etymology of 1. perhaps from *snagh = Anglo-Saxon snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non-Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1
    Nāgara
    1. a citizen Ja i.150 Ja iv.404 Ja v.385 Dāvs ii.85 Vv-a 31 Pv-a 19 Dhp-a i.41
    Sanskrit nāgara ‣See nagara
    Nāgarika
    adjective
    1. citizen-like, urbane, polite DN-a i.282
    Sanskrit nāgarika
    Nāṭaka
    1. masculine a dancer, actor, player Ja i.206 Ja v.373 Dhp-a iii.88 Dhp-a iv.59 130; nāṭakitthi a dancing-girl, nautch-girl Dhp-a iii.166 Vv-a 131
    2. neuter a play, pantomime Ja i.59 Ja v.279 also used collective = dancing-woman Ja i.59 (?) ii.395
    Sanskrit nāṭaka ‣See naccati
    Nātha
    1. protector, refuge, help. AN v.23 AN v.89 Dhp 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380 Snp 1131 (Nd2 has nāga) Dhp-a iv.117 Pv-a 1
    • lokanātha Saviour of the world (epithet of the Buddha) Snp 995 Pv-a 42

      • anātha helpless, unprotected, poor Ja i.6 (nāthânāthā rich poor) Pv-a 3 (˚sālā poor house) 65. cp. nādhati
      Vedic nātha, nāth, to which Gothic nipan (to support), Old High German gināda (grace)
    Nāda
    1. loud sound, roaring, roar Ja i.19 (sīha˚), 50 (koñca˚), 150 (mahā˚). cp. pa˚
    Sanskrit nāda ‣See nadati
    Nādi
    feminine = nāda, loud sound, thundering (figuratively) Vv 6410
    Nādhati
    1. to have need of to be in want of (c. genitive) Ja v.90 (Commentary explains by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno)
    Sanskrit nādhate = nāthate ‣See nātha, only in nadhamāna, cp. RV x.65, 5: nādhas
    Nānatta
    neuter masculine
    1. diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opposite ekatta, cp. MN i.364: “the multiformity of sensuous impressions,” M.A.). enumeration of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu˚ phassa˚ vedanā˚ saññā˚ sankappa chanda˚ pariḷāha˚ pariyesanā˚ lābha˚ DN iii.289 SN ii.140f. cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Ps i.87
    • AN iv.385 Ps i.63 sq., 88 sq. SN ii.115 (vedanā˚); Ps i.91 (samāpatti & vihāra˚) Ja ii.265 In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.14, n. 2
    1. ˚kathā desultory talk, gossip DN i.8 (= niratthakakathā DN-a i.90) SN v.420
    • ˚kāya
    • adjective having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combined with or opposed to ekatta˚, nānatta-saññin, & ekatta-saññin), ap
    • plural to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattâvāsā) AN iv.39f. = Nd2 5702 DN iii.253 DN iii.263 DN iii.282
    • ˚saññā consciousness of diversity (Rhys Davids: “idea of multiformity, Dialogues of the Buddha ii.119; Mrs. Rhys Davids “consciousness of the manifold”) MN i.3 SN iv.113f. DN iii.224 DN iii.262f. 282 AN i.41 AN i.267 AN ii.184 AN iii.306 Ps ii.172 Dhs 265 (cp translation p. 72) Vb 342 369
    • ˚saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. ˚kāya), DN i.31 (cp. DN-a i.119) 183 iii.263
    Sanskrit nānatva; abstract from nānā
    Nānattatā
    feminine
    1. = nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vb 425: ārammaṇa manasikāra˚ chanda˚ paṇidha˚ adhimokkha˚ abhinīhāra paññā˚
    2nd abstract to nānā
    Nānā
    adverb
    1. variously differently. 1. (absolute) AN i.138 (on different sides, viz right
    1. 1 285), 884 sq
    • more frequently in compounds., as first part of adjective or
    • noun where it may be translated as “different, divers, all kinds of” etc. Before a double consonant the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā + agga), nānappakāra etc ‣See below
    1. ˚agga (-rasa) all the choicest delicacies Ja i.266 (˚bhojana, of food); vi.366 Pv-a 155 (˚dibbabhojana) -ādhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DN-a i.44 Nett 98
    2. ˚āvudhā (plural ) various weapons Ja i.150
    3. ˚karaṇa difference, diversity Vin i.339 (sangha˚) MN ii.128 cp. Divy 222
    4. ˚gotta of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916-citta of varying mind Ja i.295 (itthiyo)
    5. ˚jana all kinds of folk Snp 1102 Nd1 308 (puthu˚)
    6. ˚titthiya of various sects DN iii.16f.
    7. ˚pakkāra various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā) 127, 278 (phalāni); DN-ai.148 (āvudhā) Pv-a 50 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 135
    8. ˚ratta multi-coloured Snp 287 Ja vi.230
    9. ˚rasā (
    10. plural all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911
    11. ˚vāda difference of opinion DN i.236
    12. ˚vidha divers, various, motley Pv-a 53 Pv-a 96 Pv-a 113, and passim
    13. ˚saṁvāsaka living in a different part or living apart Vin i.134f. (opposite samāna˚), 321; ii.162. Nabhi & Nabhi Vedic nānā, a reduplicated nā (emphatic particle ‣See na1) “so and so,” i.e. various, of all kinds
    Nābhi
    Nābhī
    feminine
    1. the navel AN iii.240 Ja i.238 DN-a i.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā)
    2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (
    3. plural nabhyo & nabbho SS = nābhiyo Vv-a 276) Ja i.64 Ja iv.277 Mil 115
    Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Avestan nabā; Latin umbo & umbilicus; Old Irish imbliu (navel); Anglo-Saxon nafu; Old High German naba (nave), German nabel = English nave & navel
    Nāma
    neuter
    1. name
    1. -1. Literal. nominative nāmaṁ SN i.39 Snp 808 Ja ii.131 Mil 27 accusative nāmaṁ Pv-a 145 (likhi: he wrote her name)
    2. nāmaṁ karoti to give a name Snp 344 Nd2 466 (n’ etaṁ nāmaṁ mātarā kataṁ on “Bhagavā”) Ja i.203 Ja i.262 (w. double
    3. accusative )
    4. nāmaṁ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate Ja iv.402 Pv-a 18 (Burmese variant nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin iv.6 (two kinds : hīna & ukkatṭha˚) and at Vism 528 (= namanalakkhaṇa)
    5. ; Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saññā sankhāra viññāṇa ‣See khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combined with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by “name & body” from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aññamaññûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Mil 49). SN i.35 (yattha n. ca rūpañ ca asesaṁ uparujjhati taṁ te dhammaṁ idh’ aññāya acchiduṁ bhavabandhanaṁ) Snp 1036 Snp 1100 Nd1 435 = Nd2 339 (nāma = cattāro arūpino khandhā) Dhp-a iv.100 (on Dhp 367): vedanādīnaṁ catunnaṁ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti pañcannaṁ khandhānaṁ vasena pavattaṁ nāmarūpaṁ Dhs-a 52: nāmarūpa-duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaṁ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṁ. cp. DN i.223 DN ii.32 DN ii.34 DN ii.56 DN ii.62 SN i.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n-rūpasmiṁ asajjamāna); ii.3, 4, 66 (nrū
    6. passive avakkanti), 101 sq. (identical) MN i.53 AN i.83 AN i.176 iii.400; iv.385 (˚ārammaṇa); v.51, 56 Snp 355 Snp 537 Snp 756 Snp 909Dhp 367 Iti 35 Ps i.193; ii.72, 112 sq. Vb 294 Nett 15 sq., 28, 69 Mil 46 Nāma + rūpa form an elementary pair DN iii.212 Kh iv. Also in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viññāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), DN ii.34 Vin i.1f. SN ii.6f. Snp 872 (nāmañ ca rūpañca paṭicca phassā ‣See in detail explained at Nd1 276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya Snp 1074 Nd2 338; Ps i.183; Nett 27, 41, 69, 77. In this connection to be mentioned are various definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark (“label” of the individual, given by Coms, e.g. Nd1 109 127 Kp-a 78; with which cp. Buddhaghosa’s speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rhys Davids at Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 341
    7. Use of Cases. instrumental nāmena by name Pv-a 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mhvs vii.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.)

      • accusative nāma (the older form, cp. Sanskrit nāma by name SN i.33 SN i.235 (Anoma˚) Snp 153 Snp 177 Ja i.59 (ko nām’ esa “who by name is this one” = what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiṁsaddo nāma esa); ii.4; iii.187; vi.364 (kā nāma tvaṁ) ‣See also evaṁnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the following
      • ; nāma (
      • accusative ) as
      • adverb is used as emphatic particle = just, indeed for sure, certainly Ja i.222 Ja ii.133 Ja ii.160 Ja ii.326 Ja iii.90 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 63 etc. Therefore frequently in exclamation exhortation (“please,” certainly) Ja vi.367 Dhp-a iii.171 Pv-a 29 (n. detha do give); in combination with interrogative
      • pronoun = now, then Ja i.221 (kiṁ n.), 266 (kathaṁ n.); iii.55 (kiṁ); Kh iv. (ekaṁ n. kiṁ); with negative = not at all, certainly not Ja i.222 Ja ii.352 Ja iii.126 etc
      • Often further emphasised or emphasising other participle; e. g pi (= api) nāma really, just so Vin i.16 (seyyathā p. n.) Snp p. 15 (identical) Vv-a 22 (read nāma kāro) Pv-a 76
      • app' (= api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin i.16 Iti 89 = M i.460 Ja i.168 Pv ii.26 (= api nāma Pv-a 80) eva nāma in truth Pv-a 2
      • nāma tāva certainly Dhp-a i.392 etc
      1. ˚kamma giving a name, naming, denominative nation Dhs 1306 Bdhd 83
      2. ˚karaṇa name-giving, “christening Dhp-a ii.87
      • ˚gahaṇa receiving a name, “being christened” Ja i.262 (˚divasa) -gotta ancestry, lineage SN i.43 (˚ṁ na jīrati) Snp 648 Nd2 385 (mātāpettikaṁ n.) -dheyya assigning a name, name-giving Ja iii.305 iv.449; v.496 Dhs 1306
      • ˚pada ‣See pada
      • ˚matta a mere name Mil 25
      Vedic nāman, cp. Latin nominativen; Gothic namō; Anglo-Saxon nominative, Old High German namo
    Nāmaka
    adjective
    1. (—˚) by name SN ii.282 (Thera˚) Pv-a 67 Pv-a 96 (kaṇha˚)
    2. consisting of a mere name i.e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous DN i.240
    from nāma
    Nāmeti
    1. at Snp 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nâpenti. Otherwise ‣See under namati
    Nāyaka
    1. a leader, guide, lord, mostly as epithet of the Buddha (loka˚ “Lord of the World” Snp 991 (loka˚); Mhvs vii.1 (identical); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa) bala-nāyakā gang leaders Ja i.103
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide Avs i.210); from neti; cp. naya
    Nārāca
    1. an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin MN i.429 Ja iii.322 Mil 105 Mil 244 Mil 418
    • ˚valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mhvs vii.20 (Com “vaṭṭita-assanārāca-pasa” = a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle)
    Sanskrit nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & connection with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa
    Nārī
    feminine
    1. woman, wife, female Snp 301 Snp 836 Dhp 284 Ja i.60 Ja iii.395 Ja iv.396 (˚gaṇa) Vv 61 4416 Pv i.91 (= itthi Pv-a 44). plural nariyo (Sn 299, 304, 703), nāriyo (Sn 703 Burmese variant ; Pv ii.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e.g. Vv.53; 8 Pv ii.112 ‣See nara. Nala & Nala; Sanskrit nārī to nara man, originally “the one belonging to the man”
    Nāla
    Nāḷa;
    neuter
    1. a hollow stalk, especially that of the water lily AN iv.169 Ja i.392 (˚pana variant reading ˚vana) Vv-a 43 ‣See also nāḷikā & nālī
    Sanskrit nāla ‣See nala
    Nālaṁ
    adverb
    1. not enough, insufficient Iti 37 Ja i.190 DN-a i.167
    = na alaṁ
    Nāḷikā
    feminine
    1. a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin ii.116 (sūci˚, cp. sūcighara, needle-case) DN i.7 (= bhesajja˚ DN-a i.89) AN i.210 Ja i.123 (taṇḍula a nāḷi full of rice); vi.366 (aḍḍha-n-matta) Nd2 229 cp. pa˚
    1. ˚odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice SN i.82 Dhp-a iv.17
    • ˚gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin ii.152
    Sanskrit nāḍikā & nālikā
    Nāḷikera
    1. the coconut tree Vv 4413 Ja iv.159 Ja v.384 DN-a i.83 Vv-a 162
    Sanskrit nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etymology
    Nāḷikerika
    adjective belonging to the coconut tree Ja v.417
    Nāḷī
    feminine & (in compounds.); nāḷi
    1. a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin i.249 AN iii.49 Ja i.98 (suvaṇṇa˚), 124 (taṇḍula˚), 419; iii.220 (kaṇḍa˚ a quiver); iv.67 Dhp-a ii.193 (tela˚), 257. cp. pa˚
    1. ˚paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap Ja vi.370 Ja vi.444 (text ˚vaṭṭa)
    2. ˚matta as much as a tube holds AN ii.199 Pv-a 283 Dhp-a ii.70 Ja i.419 (of aja-laṇḍikā)
    Sanskrit nāḍī ‣See nala
    Nāvā
    feminine
    1. a boat, ship Vin iii.49 (q.v. for definition & description) SN i.106
    • (eka-rukkhikā) iii.155 = v.51 = AN iv.127 (sāmuddikā “a liner”) AN ii.200 AN iii.368 Snp 321 Snp 770 Snp 771 Dhp 369 (metaphor of the human body) Ja i.239 ii.112; iii.126; 188; iv.2, 21, 138; v.75 (with “500 passengers), 433; vi.160 (= nāvyā canal? or read nālaṁ?) Vv 61 (= pota Vv-a 42 with popular etymology “satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati”); Pv iii.35 (= doṇi Pv-a 189) Mil 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs iv.42 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 53 Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690.

      1. ˚tittha a ferry Ja iii.230
      • ˚sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Mil 359
      Vedic nāuḥ & nāvā, Latin navis
    Nāvāyika
    1. a mariner, sailor, skipper Mil 365
    Sanskrit nāvāja = Latin navigo
    Nāvika
    1. a sailor, mariner Ja ii.103 Ja iv.142 Mil 359 Dāvs iv.43 (captain)
    2. a ferryman Ja ii.111 Ja iii.230 (Avariya-pitā.)
    Sanskrit nāvika
    Nāvutika
    adjective
    1. 90 years old Ja iii.395 (˚ā itthi) Snp-a 172
    from navuti
    Nāsa
    1. destruction, ruin, death Ja i.5 Ja i.256 Sdhp 58 Sdhp 319. Usually vi˚, also adjective vināsaka cp. panassati
    Sanskrit nāśa ‣See nassati
    Nāsana
    neuter
    1. destruction, abandoning, expulsion, in ˚antika adjective a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin i.255
    2. Sanskrit nāśana
    Nāsā
    feminine
    1. the nose, Snp 198 Snp 608
    2. the trunk (of an elephant) Ja v.297 (nāga˚-uru); Sdhp 153
      1. ˚puṭa “nose-cup”; the outside of the nose, the nostril Ja vi.74 Vism 195 (nāsa˚), 264 (nāsa˚, but Kp-a 67 nāsā˚), 283 (nāsa˚)
      2. ˚vāta wind, i.e. breath from the nostrils Ja iii.276
      Vedic nāsā (du.); Latin nāris, Old High German nasa, Anglo-Saxon nasu
    Nāsika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the nose, nasal, in ˚sota the nostril or nose (originally “sense of smell” DN i.106 Snp p. 108
    cp. Sanskrit nāsikya
    Nāsitaka
    adjective
    1. one who is ejected Vin iv.140 (of a bhikkhu)
    ‣See nāsa & nāseti
    Nāseti
    1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill Ja i.59 Ja ii.105 Ja ii.150 Ja iii.279 Ja iii.418 2. to atone for a fault (with ablative) Vin i.85 86, 173 etc. cp. vi˚
    2. Sanskrit nāśayati, causative of nassati, q.v.
    Nāha
    neuter
    1. armour Ja i.358 (sabba˚sannaddha). cp. onāha
    cp. nayhati, naddha
    Ni˚

    ;

    1. . Nearly all (ultimately probably all words under this heading are compounds. with the prefix ni.; A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni˚; combines the two prefixes ni nis; (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double consonant is usually restored in composition, like ni-kkhipati = ni + kṣip; nissita ni + sri. Sometimes the double consonant is merely graphic or due to analogy, especially in words where ni-is contrasted with ud- (“up”), as nikkujja → ukkujja, niggilati → uggilati, ninnamati → unnamati). On the other hand a compound with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation viz. either doubling of consonant (nibbhoga = nir-bhoga where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa from nir-vindati) or lengthening of ni to (nīyādeti as well as niyy˚ nīharati = nir + har, or single consonant in the special cases of r & v; (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta → dūrakkha; niveṭheti = nibbeṭheti, nivāreti = *nivvāreti = nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi-consonant r is restored: nir-aya, nir-upadhi etc
    • Both ni & nis are base-prefixes only, & of stable, well-defined character i.e. never enter comb; ns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb-function (like saṁ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combination in noun-compounds negating the whole term: nir-upadhi, nis-saṁsaya etc. 3. ni is frequently emphasised by saṁ as saṁni˚ (tud, dhā pat, sad); nis most frequently by abhi as abhinis˚ (nam, pad vatt, har)
    1. B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca “low”) is a verb-prefix only, i.e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opposite abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim (= down into, on to, cp. Latin sub in subire, or prefix ad˚); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion = back (identical with b); e.g. (a) ni-dhā (put down), ˚kkhip (throw d.), ˚guh (hide d.), ˚ci (heap up) ˚pad (fall d.), ˚sad (sit d.); (b) ni-ratta (at-tached to) ˚mant (speak to); ˚yuj (ap-point), ˚ved (ad-dress), ˚sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni-vatt (turn back)
    • nis (a) as verb-prefix it denotes the directional “out” with further development to “away from, opposite, without, pointing out the finishing, completion or vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action = "un” (Latin dis-), e.g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opposite pavisati (to enter into), ˚ccharati (nis to car to go forth), ˚ddhamati (throw out), ˚pajjati (result from), ˚bbattati vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy)
    • (b) as nounpref it denotes “being without” or “not having” English -less, e.g. niccola without clothes, ˚ttaṇha (without thirst), ˚ppurisa (without a man), ˚pphala (without fruit); niccala motion-less, ˚kkaruṇa (heartless), ˚ddosa (fault˚), ˚maṁsa (flesh˚), ˚saṁsaya (doubt˚) nirattha (useless), ˚bbhaya (fear˚)
    • Buddhaghosa evidently takes ni- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni-saddo abhāvaṁ dīpeti Vism 495
    • Sanskrit ni-& nih-, insep. prefixes: (a) ni down = Avestan ni, cp. Latin nīdus (*ni-zdos: place to sit down = nest); Anglo-Saxon nēol, nider = English nether; Gothic nidar = Old High German nidar; also Sanskrit nīca, nīpa etc (b) niḥ out, probably from *seni & to Latin sine without
    Nikacca
    1. ‣See nikati
    Nikaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n-kāya + ncitta) AN ii.137 locative nikaṭṭhe (
    2. adverb ) near Ja iii.438 Thag-a 105 (v.33) (= santike Ja iii.438)
    3. cp. Sanskrit nikṛṣṭa, ni + kasati
    Nikaṇṇika
    adjective under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa Ja iii.124
    • neuter adverb secretly Vin iv.270 271.

    Nikata
    adjective
    1. deceived, cheated MN i.511 (+ vañcita paladdha) SN iv.307 (+ vañcita paluddha)
    Sanskrit nikṛta, ni + karoti “done down”
    Nikati
    feminine
    1. fraud, deceit, cheating DN i.5 (= DN-a i.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaṁ); iii.176 Snp 242 (= nirāsaṁ-karaṇaṁ Snp-a 286) Ja i.223 Pv iii.95 (+ vañcana) Pug 19 23, 58 Vv-a 114 Pv-a 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaṁ vikāro) instrumental nikatiyā (metri causa) Ja i.223 nikatyā Ja ii.183 nikacca SN i.24 cp. nekatika
    2. Sanskrit nikṛti ‣See preceding
    Nikanta
    adjective
    1. cut, (ab-)razed MN i.364 (of a fleshless bone)
    Sanskrit nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537 Divy 539), ni + kantati; 2
    Nikantati
    1. to cut down, to cut up, cut off Pv-a 210 (piṭṭhi-maṁsāni the flesh of the back, variant reading SS for ukkant˚); Pgdp 29
    Sanskrit ni-kṛṇtati ‣See kantati2
    Nikanti
    feminine
    1. desire, craving, longing for, wish Thag 1, 20 Ps ii.72, 101 Dhs 1059 1136; Vism 239, 580 Dhs-a 369 Dhp-a iv.63 DN-a i.110 Dāvs iii.40
    Sanskrit nikānti, ni + kamati
    Nikara
    1. a multitude Dāvs v.25 (jātipuppha˚)
    Sanskrit nikara, ni + karoti
    Nikaraṇā
    feminine (or is it ˚aṁ?) = nikati (fraud) Pug 19 23 (as synonym of māyā).
    Nikaroti
    1. to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Snp 138 (nikubbetha Pot. = vañceyya Kp-a 247). past participle nikata (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit nikaroti, ni + karoti
    Nikasa
    1. a whetstone Dāvs iii.87 (˚opala)
    Sanskrit nikasa, ni + kasati
    Nikasāva
    adjective
    1. free from impurity Vin i.3 opposite anikkasāva (q.v. Dhp 9
    Sanskrit niṣkaṣāya nis + kasāva ‣See kasāya 2d
    Nikāma
    desire, pleasure, longing: only in compounds. ‣See nanikāma.
    1. ˚kāra read by Kern (Toevoegselen 174) at Thag 1, 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified ‣See Snp-a on Snp 351
    • ˚lābhin gaining pleasure SN ii.278 MN i.354 MN iii.110 AN ii.23 AN ii.36 Pug 11 12 Vb 332
    Vedic nikāma, ni + kāma
    Nikāmanā
    feminine = nikanti, Dhs 1059
    Nikāmeti
    1. to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaṁ SN i.122 & nikāmayamāna Vin ii.108 cp. nikanta & nikanti
    Sanskrit ni-kāmayati, ni + kāmeti
    Nikāya
    1. collection (“body”) assemblage, class, group; 1. generally (always—˚): eka˚; one class of beings Dhs-a 66
    • tiracchāna˚ the animal kingdom SN iii.152
    • deva˚ the assembly of the gods, the gods DN ii.261 (60) MN i.102 SN iv.180 AN iii.249 AN iv.461 Pv-a 136
    • satta˚ the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings SN ii.2 SN ii.42 SN ii.44 MN i.49 (tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi s
    • nikāye of all beings in each class) Vb 137 Pv-a 134
    • especially the collective of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha˚, Majjhima˚, Saṁyutta˚ Anguttara˚ (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka˚; enumerated Pv-a 2 Anvs p. 35 Dhp-a ii.95 (dhammāsanaṁ āruyha pañcahi nikāyehi atthañ ca kāraṇañ ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumerated also at Vism 711; one is referred to at Snp-a 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart) ‣See further details under piṭaka. cp. nekāyika
    • Sanskrit nikāya, ni + kāya
    Nikāra
    1. service, humility Ja iii.120 (nikāra-pakāra, probably to be read nipaccākāra, q.v.)
    Sanskrit nikāra in different meaning, ni + kāra
    Nikāsa
    1. (n adjective)
      1. appearance; adjective of appearance, like Ja v.87 (—˚), corresponding to ˚avakāsa
      ni + kaś
    Nikāsin
    adjective
    1. “shining,” resembling, like Ja iii.320 (aggi-nikāsinā suriyena)
    cp. Sanskrit nikāśin; from ni + kāsati
    Nikiṇṇa
    adjective
    1. “strewn down into,” hidden away, sheltered Ja iii.529
    Sanskrit *nikīrṇa, past participle ni + kirati, cp. kiraṇa
    Nikiḷita
    adjective
    1. engrossed in play Ja vi.313
    Sanskrit *nikrīḍita, past participle of nikrīḍayati, ni + kīḷati
    Nikīḷitāvin
    adjective
    1. playful, playing or dallying with (c. locative ), finding enjoyment in SN i.9 (a˚ kāmesu) iv.110 (identical)
    2. from ni-kīḷati
    Nikujja
    1. ‣See nikkujja, q.v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya & ‣See ni˚ AN 1)
    Nikujjati
    1. to be bent down on, i.e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on DN i.53 (as variant readings to be preferred to text reading nikkujj˚ cp. nikujja) DN-a i.160 (nikk˚)
    ni + kujjati ‣See kujja & cp. nikkujja
    Nikuñja
    1. a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs iv.32
    Sanskrit nikuñja, ni + kuñja
    Nikūjati
    1. to chirp, warble, hum Thag 1, 1270 (nikūjaṁ) Thag-a 211 (nikūji)
    2. to twang, jingle, rustle Ja iii.323
    3. past participle nikūjita
    4. Cp abhi˚
    ni + kūjati “to sing on”
    Nikūjita
    1. sung forth, warbled out Thag 2, 261
    ‣See nikūjati
    Nikūṭa
    1. a corner, top, climax Ja i.278 (arahatta˚, where usually arahattena kūṭaṁ etc.) DN-a i.307 (identical)
    ni + kūṭa to kūṭa2
    Niketa
    1. house, abode Dhp 91 (= ālaya Dhp-a ii.170)
    2. (figuratively) company association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu “sign, characteristic, mark,” and niketa-sārin would have to be taken as “following the banner or flag of …,” i.e. belonging or attached to i.e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) ; not living in company, having no house Snp 207 Mil 244 (+ nirālaya)
      1. ˚vāsin (a˚) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Mil 201
      • ˚sayana = ˚vāsin Mil 361
      • ˚sārin (a˚) “wandering homeless” or “not living in company, i.e. not associating with, not a follower of … SN iii.9f. = Nd1 198 Snp 844 = SN iii.9 Snp-a 255 = SN iii.10 Snp 970 (= Nd1 494 q.v.)
      Sanskrit niketa settlement, ni + cināti
    Niketavant
    adjective
    1. parting company with Mil 288 (kamma˚)
    to niketa
    Niketin
    adjective having an abode, being housed, living in Snp 422 (kosalesu) Ja iii.432 (duma-sākhā-niketinī
    • feminine ).

    Nikkaṅkha
    adjective
    1. not afraid, fearless, not doubting confident, sure Ja i.58 cp. nissaṁsaya
    Sanskrit niḥśanka, nis + kankha, adjective of kankhā, cp. kankhin
    Nikkaṅkhā
    feminine
    1. fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) SN v.221
    Sanskrit niḥśankā, nis + kankhā
    Nikkaḍḍhati
    1. to throw out Vin iv.274 (causative nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.) Ja i.116 Ja ii.440 Snp-a 192
    2. past participle nikkaḍḍhita
    3. Sanskrit niṣkarṣati, nis + kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati
    Nikkaḍḍhanā
    feminine throwing out, ejection Ja iii.22 (a˚); v.234. (= niddhamanā).
    Nikkaḍḍhita
    adjective
    1. thrown out Ja ii.103 (gehā) Pv-a 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ)
    Sanskrit *niṣkarṣita ‣See nikkaḍḍhati
    Nikkaṇṭaka
    adjective
    1. free from thorns or enemies Mil 250 cp. akaṇṭaka
    Sanskrit niṣkaṇṭaka, nis + kaṇṭaka
    Nikkaddama
    adjective
    1. unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DN-a i.226
    nis + kaddama
    Nikkama
    1. (n adjective)
      1. exertion, strength, endurance. The originally meaning of “going forth” is quite obliterated by the figuratively meaning (cp nikkhamati & nekkhamma) AN i.4 AN iii.214 Vv 187 (= viriya Vv-a 96) Dhs 13 22, 219, 571; Vism 132 Mil 244 (+ ārambha). adjective strong in (—˚), enduring exerting oneself SN i.194 (tibba˚); v.66, 104 sq. Snp 68 (daḷha˚, cp. Nd2 under padhānavā), 542 (sacca˚)
      2. Sanskrit niṣkrama; nis + kama
    Nikkamati
    1. to go out, to go forth; in fig meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of “kāma” (craving), to show right exertion strength Mil 245 (+ arabhati) + S; i.156 (kkh)
    Sanskrit niṣkramati, nis + kamati ‣See also nikkhamati & nekkhamma
    Nikkaya
    1. “buying off,” redemption Ja vi.577
    cp. Sanskrit niṣkraya, nis + kaya cp. nikkiṇāti
    Nikkaruṇa
    adjective
    1. without compassion, heartless Snp 244 (= sattānaṁ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508
    nis + karuṇa, adjective of karuṇā
    Nikkarunatā
    feminine = following Vism 314.
    Nikkaruṇā
    feminine
    1. heartlessness Pv-a 55
    Sanskrit niṣkaruṇatā; nis + karuṇā
    Nikkasāva
    1. ‣See nikasāva
    Nikkāma
    adjective
    1. without craving or lust, desireless Snp 1131 (= akāmakāmin Nd2 340 pahīnakāma Snp-a 605 with variant reading : nikkāma). cp. next
    Sanskrit niṣkāma, nis + kāma
    Nikkāmin
    adjective
    1. = nikkāma Snp 228 (= katanikkhamana Kp-a 184)
    nis + kāmin
    Nikkāraṇā
    1. (ablative = adverb )

      1. without reason, without cause or purpose Snp 75 (= akāraṇā ahetu Nd2 341)
      Sanskrit niṣkāraṇā, nis + kāraṇaṁ
    Nikkāsa
    1. is Buddhaghosa’s reading for ikkāsa (q.v.) Vin ii.151 with Commentary on p. 321
    Nikkiṇati
    1. to buy back, to redeem Ja vi.576 Ja vi.585 Mil 284
    Sanskrit niṣkriṇāti, nis + kiṇāti
    Nikkiṇṇa
    adjective
    1. spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) Ja vi.182 (= ṭhapita Commentary )
    Sanskrit niṣkīrṇa, nis + kiṇṇa ‣See kiraṇa
    Nikkilesa
    1. freedom from moral blemish Nd1 340 = Nd2 under pucchā Nd2 185; as adjective pure, unstained Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469 (= anāvila)
    nis + kilesa
    Nikkujja
    adjective
    1. bent down, i.e. head forward, lying on one’s face; upset, thrown over AN i.130 SN v.48 Pv iv.77 (k) Pug 31 O past participle ukkujja
    2. ni + kubja, better spelling is nikujja ‣See nikkujjati
    Nikkujjati
    1. to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113 AN iv.344 (pattaṁ). past participle nikkujjita
    2. for nikujjati (q.v.) through analogy with opposite ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sanskrit kubja, but better with Kern, Toevoegselen 1. p. 175 = Sanskrit nyubjati influenced by kubja with regard to k.
    Nikkujjita
    adjective
    1. lying face downward, overturned, upset fallen over, stumbled Vin i.16 DN i.85 DN i.110 147, MN i.24 (k.) AN i.173 AN iii.238 Thag 2, 28 30 (k.) Ja iii.277 Snp-a 155 (= adhomukha-ṭhapita) DN-a i.228
    past participle of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q.v.
    Nikkuha
    adjective
    1. without deceit, not false AN ii.26 = It 113 Snp 56 Nd2 342
    nis + kuha
    Nikkodha
    adjective
    1. without anger, free from anger Ja iv.22
    nis + kodha
    Nikkha
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring Ja ii.444 Ja vi.577
      2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a “pound sterling”) equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (Vv-a 104 = suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa-dharaṇaṁ nikkhan ti vadanti) SN ii.234 (suvaṇṇa & singi˚) Ja i.84 (identical) AN iv.120 (suvaṇṇa˚) Vv 208 438 (variant reading SS nekkha) Ja vi.180 Mil 284 suvaṇṇanikkha-sataṁ (100 gold pieces) Ja i.376 Ja iv.97 Ja v.58 ˚sahassaṁ (1000) Ja v.67 Dhp-a i.393
      3. ‣ See also nekkha
      Vedic niṣka; cp. Old Irish nasc (ring), Old High German nusca (bracelet)
    Nikkhanta
    adjective
    1. gone out, departed from (c. ablative), gone away; also med going out, giving up, figuratively leaving behind, resigning renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati = desireless) SN i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṁ) Snp 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako) Ja i.149 Ja ii.153 iv.364 (˚bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita˚, variant reading nikkhitta˚ perhaps preferable, explained p. 366 nibaddha˚ designed for, given to) Snp-a 605 (figuratively; as variant reading for nikkāma) Dhp-a ii.39 Pv-a 61 (bahi); Nd2 under nissita Nd2 107 (free, unobstructed)
    past participle of nis + kamati ‣See nikkhamati
    Nikkhama
    adjective
    1. going out from Pv-a 80 (nāsikāya n
    • mala). dun˚; at Thag 1, 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by variant readings ‣See the latter
    cp. Sanskrit niṣkrama
    Nikkhamati
    1. to go forth from, to come out of (c. ablative), to get out, issue forth depart, figuratively to leave the household life behind agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.) or to give up evil desire
    • (a) literally (often with bahi outside, out; opposite pavisati to enter into:. AN v.195) DN ii.14 (mātu kucchismā) Ja i.52 (mātukucchito)
    • imperative nikkhama Pv. i.103; ppr. nikkhamanto Ja i.52 ii.153; iii.26 (mukhato) Pv-a 90
    • aorist nikkhami Ja ii.154 Ja iii.188
    • future ˚issati Ja ii.154
    • absolutive nikkhamma Ja i.51 Ja i.61 (figuratively) & nikkhamitvā Ja i.16 Ja i.138 (figuratively), 265 iii.26; iv.449 (n. pabbajissāmi) Pv-a 14 Pv-a 19 (figuratively) 67 (gāmato), 74 (identical); infinitive nikkhamituṁ Ja i.61 (figuratively); ii.104 Pv i.102 (bahi n.);
    • gerundive nikkhamitabba Vin i.47 (b) figuratively (‣ See also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit niṣkramati in same meaning, e.g. Divy 68 etc.) SN i.156 (ārabbhati +) = Mil 245 (where nikkamati) Ja i.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaṁ “the great renunciation”), Pv-a 19 (identical).
    • past participle nikkhanta;
    • causative nikkhameti (q.v.)
    Sanskrit niṣkramati, nis + kamati
    Nikkhamana
    1. going out, departing Ja ii.153 Vv-a 71 (opposite pavesana); fig renunciation Kp-a 184 (kata˚ as adjective = nikkāmin) ‣See also abhi˚. Nikkhameti & Nikkhameti;
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati
    Nikkhameti
    Nikkhāmeti;
    1. to make go out or away, to bring out or forth SN ii.128 Ja i.264 ii.112. past participle nikkhāmita Ja iii.99 (+ nicchuddha thrown out, in explanation of nibbāpita; Burmese variant nikaḍhāpita)
    2. causative of nikkhamati
    Nikkhaya
    adjective
    1. liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun˚; hard to destroy Ja iv.449 (= dun-nikkaḍḍhiya Commentary ); also to be read (variant reading ) at Thag 1, 72 for dunnikkhama. cp. nikhīṇa
    Sanskrit *niḥkṣaya, nis + khaya
    Nikkhitta
    adjective
    1. laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in compounds. (˚-having laid down = freed of, rid of DN ii.14 (maṇi-ratanaṁ vatthe n. set into) Iti 13 (sagge: put into heaven) Ja i.53 Ja i.266 Pv iii.68 Mil 343
    • agga˚ put down as the highest, i.e. of the highest praise; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit agranikṣipta Lal. v.167) Pv-a 148 (dhana n. = collected variant reading SS. nikkita). nikkhitta-daṇḍa
    • adjective not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) SN i.141 etc.; nikkhitta-dhura unyoked freed of the yoke AN i.71 AN iii.108 cp. Dhs-a 145 -su˚; well set, well arranged AN ii.147f. (˚assa pada-vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opposite dun˚ AN i.59 Nett 21
    Sanskrit nikṣipta ‣See nikkhipati
    Nikkhittaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one to whose charge something has been committed Dīpavaṁsa iv.5 agga˚; thera original depositary of the Faith)
    from nikkhitta
    Nikkhipati
    1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114 Iti 13 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya) Pug 34 Ja i.49 (aṇḍakaṁ)
    2. to lay aside, to put away Vin i.46 (patta-cīvaraṁ) AN i.206 (daṇḍaṁ to discard the weapon ‣See daṇḍa) Mhvs 14, 10 (dhanu-saraṁ)
    3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (dehaṁ to get rid of the body) Dhs-a 344 (vitthāra-desanaṁ).

      • to give in charge to deposit, entrust, save Pug 26 Vv-a 33 (sahassathavikaṁ).
      • aorist nikkhipi DN ii.161 (Bhagavato sarīraṁ Ja ii.104 Ja ii.111 Ja ii.416
      • future ˚issati DN ii.157 (samussayaṁ)
      • absolutive ˚itvā MN iii.156 (cittaṁ) Ja ii.416 Ja vi.366 grd ˚itabba Vin i.46
      • past participle nikkhitta (q.v.)
      • causative nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. Pv-a 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiṁ). cp. abhi˚
    Sanskrit nikṣipati, ni + khipati
    Nikkhepa
    1. putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment Dhs-a 6 344 ‣See under mātikā; in grammar pada˚ the setting of the verse; i.e. rules of composition (Mil 381). Vin i.16 (pādukānaṁ = the putting down of the slippers i.e. the slippers as they were, put down) Ja iii.243 (dhura˚ giving up one’s office or charge), i.236 (sarīra ˚ṁ kāresi had the body laid out); Dīpavaṁsa xvii.109 (identical). Vism 618 (= cuti) Dhp-a ii.98 (sarīra˚) DN-a i.50 (sutta˚) Dhs-a 344 Mil 91
    Sanskrit nikṣepa ‣See nikkhipati
    Nikkhepana
    neuter = nikkhepa SN iii.26 (bhāra˚ getting rid of the load, opposite bhārâdānaṁ) Mil 356 (= comparison) Vism 236 (deha˚). Nikhanati & Nikhanati;
    Nikhanati
    Nikhaṇati;
    1. to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin ii.116 Vin iii.78 (akkhiṁ = cover the eye, as a sign) Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (identical) DN ii.127 (ṇ) Ja i.264 Snp-a 519 (ṇ, to bury)- past participle nikhāta
    2. Sanskrit nikhanati, ni + khanati
    Nikhāta
    1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) Snp-a 519
    2. dug in, erected (of a post) Snp 28 Dhp-a ii.181 (nagara-dvāre n. indakhīla) ‣See also a˚
    past participle of nikhaṇati
    Nikhādana
    neuter
    1. “eating down,” a sharp instrument, a spade or (accusative to Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149 iv.211 Ja ii.405 (so read for khādana); iv.344; v.45
    2. Sanskrit *nikhādana, ni + khādati, cp. khādana
    Nikhila
    adjective
    1. all, entire, whole Dāvs v.40 (˚loka variant reading sakala˚)
    Sanskrit nikhila cp. khila
    Nikhīṇa
    adjective
    1. having or being lost Ja vi.499 (˚patta without wings, deprived of its wings)
    nis + khīṇa
    Niga
    1. in gavaya-gokaṇṇa-nig-âdīnaṁ Dhs-a 331 is misprint for miga
    Nigacchati
    1. to go down to, to “undergo,” incur, enter, come to; to suffer especially with dukkhaṁ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment SN iv.70 (dukkhaṁ) MN i.337f. (identical) AN i.251 (bandhanaṁ) Dhp 69 (dukkhaṁ = vindati, paṭilabhati Dhp-a ii.50), 137 Nd2 1994 (maraṇaṁ + maraṇamattam pi dukkhaṁ) Pv iv.77 (preterite nigacchiṭṭha = pāpuṇi Pv-a 266)
    Sanskrit nigacchati, ni + gacchati
    Nigaṇṭha
    1. a member of the Jain order ‣See M i.370–⁠375 380 & cp. jaṭila Vin i.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. DN i.57 also Sīho senāpati n-sāvako) SN i.78 SN i.82 (˚bhikkhā) AN i.205f. (˚uposatha), cp. 220; ii.196 (˚sāvaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata) Snp 381 Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā paribbājakā) Ja ii.262 (object to eating flesh) DN-a i.162 Dhp-a i.440 Dhp-a iii.489 Vv-a 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti)
    • f nigaṇṭhī DN i.54 (nigaṇṭhi-gabbha)
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirgrantha (Divy 143 Divy 262 etc.) “freed from all ties,” nis + gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etymology Prakrit niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165
    Nigati
    feminine
    1. destiny, condition, behaviour Ja vi.238 ‣See also niyati & cp. niggatika
    ni + gati, q.v.
    Nigama
    1. a small town market town (opposite janapada); often combined with gāma ‣See gāma 2 Vin i.110 (˚sīma), 188 (˚kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika˚) DN i.7 (˚kathā), 101 (˚sāmanta), 193, 237 MN i.429 MN i.488 Pv ii.1318 Ja vi.330 Pv-a 111 (Asitañjana˚, Burmese variant nagara). cp. negama
    Sanskrit nigama, from nigacchati = a meeting-place or market, cp. English moot-hall = market hall
    Nigamana
    neuter
    1. quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (˚vacana quotation) Pv-a 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g Paṭṭh.A 366 Vb-a 523
    Sanskrit nigamana
    Nigaḷa
    1. an (iron) chain for the feet Ja i.394 Ja ii.153 Ja vi.64 (here as “bracelet”)
    Sanskrit nigaḍa, ni + gaḷa, cp. gala3
    Nigāḷhika
    (better variant reading nigāḷhita)
    1. sunk down into, immersed in Thag 1 568 (gūthakūpe)
    Sanskrit nigāḍhita; ni + gāḍhita ‣See gāḷha2
    Nigūḷha
    1. hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret Ja i.461 Dāvs iii.39
    Sanskrit nigūḍha, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni + gūḷha
    Nigūhati
    1. to cover up, conceal, hide Ja i.286 Ja iii.392 Ja iv.203 Pv.iii.43 (≈parigūhāmi variant reading SS guyhāmi). past participle nigūḷha (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit nigūhati, ni + gūhati
    Nigūhana
    neuter
    1. covering, concealing, hiding Vv-a 71
    Sanskrit nigūhana ‣See nigūhati
    Niggacchati
    1. to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in past participle niggata (q.v.); at Ja vi.504 as ni˚
    2. Sanskrit nirgacchati, nis + gacchati
    Niggaṇṭhi
    adjective
    1. free from knots (said of a sword) Mil 105 ‣See also nighaṇḍu
    Sanskrit nirgranthi, nis + gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha
    Niggaṇhāti
    1. to hold back, restrain Dhp 326 Ja iv.97 Mil 184 Vism 133
    2. Opp paggaṇhāti
    3. to rebuke, censure (c. instrumental) AN iii.187 Ja iii.222 Mil 9 (musāvādena) Dhp-a i.29
    4. absolutive niggayha, past participle niggahīta (q.v.) cp. abhi˚
    Sanskrit nigṛhṇāti, ni + gaṇhāti
    Niggata
    adjective
    1. going out, proceeding from ablative: dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) Pv-a 152
    2. (= nigata? or = nis + gata “of ill fate”) destined, fateful; miserable unfortunate Pv-a 223 (˚kamma = punishment in explanation of niyassa kamma, variant reading SS. nigaha for niggata ‣See also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya = miserable), cp. niggatika & niggamana
    Sanskrit nirgata ‣See niggacchati
    Niggatika
    1. having a bad “gati” or fate, ill-fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable Ja iii.538 (Burmese variant as gloss, nikkāruṇika); iv.48 (Burmese variant nikatika)
    Sanskrit *nirgatika, nis + gati-ka
    Niggama
    1. (n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1
    Niggamana
    1. going away DN-a i.94
    2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172 Sdhp 173 (dun˚)
    3. (log.) conclusion Kvu 4. Niggayha-vadin

      Sanskrit *nirgamana, of niggacchati
    Niggayha-vādin
    adjective
    1. one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dhp 76 ‣See explanation in detail at Dhp-a ii.107 & cp. MN iii.118
    ‣See niggaṇhāti
    Niggayhati
    1. to be seized by (?), to be blamed for Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṁ dukkhena n., in explanation of dunniggaha)
    Sanskrit nigṛhyate, ni + gayhati, passive of niggaṇhāti
    Niggaha
    1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196 AN i.98 AN i.174 AN v.70 Ja v.116 (opposite paggaha); vi.371 (identical) Mil 28 Mil 45 Mil 224
    2. dun˚ hard to control (citta) Dhp 35 (cp. ex
    3. plural at Dhp-a i.295)
    4. (log.) refutation Kvu 3
    Sanskrit nigraha, ni + gaha2 ‣See niggaṇhāti
    Niggahaṇa
    adjective
    1. without acquisitions, i.e. poor Ja ii.367 (Burmese variant as gloss nirāhāra)
    Sanskrit *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis + gahaṇa
    Niggahaṇatā
    feminine
    1. restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). O past participle pagg˚
    2. abstract from ni + gṛh, cp. next
    Niggahīta
    adjective
    1. restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved SN iii.12 AN i.175 (aniggahīto dhammo) Ja vi.493
    Sanskrit nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni + gahita
    Niggāhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Snp 118 (= bādhaka Snp-a 178 with variant reading ghātaka) Ja iv.362 (= balisādhaka Commentary )
    ni + gāhaka ‣See niggaṇhāti
    Niggilati
    (niggalati)
    1. to swallow down (opposite uggilati to spit out, throw up) Ja iv.392 (sic as variant reading ; text niggalati)
    Sanskrit nigirati, ni + gilati
    Nigguṇa
    adjective
    1. devoid of good qualities, bad Mil 180
    Sanskrit nirguṇa, nis + guṇa
    Nigguṇḍi
    feminine
    1. a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Mil 223 (˚phala); Vism 257 (˚puppha)
    Sanskrit nirguṇḍī, of obscure etymology
    Niggumba
    adjective
    1. free from bushes, clear Ja i.187 Mil 3
    Sanskrit *nirgulma, nis + gumba
    Nigghātana
    neuter
    1. destruction, killing, rooting out Snp 1085 (taṇhā˚ Snp-a 576 = vināsana) Nd2 343 (variant reading nighātana)
    Sanskrit nirghātana, nis + ghātana, but cp. nighāta
    Nigghosa
    1. “shouting out,” sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation word of reproach, blame SN i.190 AN iv.88 (appa˚ noiseless literally of little or no noise) Snp 719 Snp 818 (= nindāvacana Snp-a 537), 1061 Ja i.64 Ja vi.83 Vv 55 Nd1 150 Nd2 344 Dhs 621 Vv-a 140 (madhura˚); 334 (in quotation appa-sadda, appa˚); Sdhp 245
    2. (adjective noiseless, quiet, still Snp 959 (= appasadda appanigghosa Nd1 467)
    Sanskrit nirghoṣa, nis + ghosa
    Nigrodha
    1. the banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica, usually as compound ˚rukkha Vin iv.35 DN ii.4 Snp 272 Ja iii.188 (r.) Dhp-a ii.14 (r.) Pv-a 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270
    2. ˚pakka the fruit of the fig-tree Vism 409
    3. ˚parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.162
    Sanskrit nyagrodha; Non-Aryan?
    Nigha1
    1. (nīgha) adjective-noun is invented by Commentary & scholiasts to explain the comb; nanigha (anīgha sporadic, e. g SN v.57). But this should be divided an-īgha instead of a-nīgha.
    2. masculine rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj anīgha. Thus at SN iv.292 = Nd2 45 SN v.57

      • (adjective anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etymology under īgha = Sanskrit ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave SN i.54 SN iv.291 Ja v.343 Otherwise always combined with nirāsa : SN i.12 = 23, 141 Snp 1048 Snp 1060 Snp 1078 explained correctly at Snp-a 590 by rāgādi-īgha-virahita. Spelling anīgha Ja iii.443 (Commentary niddukkha); Pv iv.134 (+ nirāsa explained by niddukkha Pv-a 230). anīgha also at Iti 97 (+ chinnasaṁsaya) Ud 76 Dhp 295 (variant reading aniggha explained by niddukkha Dhp-a iii.454)
    Nigha2
    neuter
    1. killing, destruction Thag 2, 491 (= maraṇasampāpana Thag-a 288)
    probably ni + gha = Sanskrit ˚gha of hanati (‣ See also Pali ˚gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in preceding nigha1
    Nighaṁsa
    1. rubbing, chafing Dhs-a 263 308
    Sanskrit nigharṣa
    Nighaṁsati
    1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin ii.133 Vism 120 Dhp-a i.396–⁠2. to polish up, clean Ja ii.418 Ja iii.75
    2. Sanskrit nigharṣati, ni + ghaṁsati1
    Nighaṁsana
    neuter
    1. = nighaṁsa Mil 215
    Sanskrit nigharṣana
    Nighaṇḍu

    1. an explained word or a word explanation, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin “sanighaṇḍu-keṭubhānaṁ … padako” ‣See detail under keṭubha DN i.88 AN i.163 AN i.166 AN iii.223 Snp p. 105 Mil 10 Buddhaghosa’s explanation is quoted by Trenckner Note. p. 65
    Sanskrit nighaṇṭu, dialectical for nirgrantha from grathnāti ‣See gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana, originally disentanglement unravelling, i.e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nighaṇṭa (Divy 619 Avs ii.19), Prakrit nighaṇṭu
    Nighāta
    1. striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing MN i.430 Nett 189. cp. nighāti
    Sanskrit nighāta, ni + ghāta
    Nighāti
    1. “slaying or being slain,” defeat, loss (opposite ugghāti) Snp 828 cp. nighāta
    ni + ghāti
    Nicaya
    1. heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions SN i.93 SN i.97 Vin v.172 (˚sannidhi) ‣See also necayika
    Sanskrit nicaya, ni + caya, cp. nicita
    Nicita
    adjective
    1. heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Thag 2, 480 (of hair) Pv-a 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya)
    Sanskrit nicita, ni + cita, of nicināti
    Nicula
    1. a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) Vv-a 134
    Sanskrit nicula
    Nicca

    adjective

    1. constant, continuous, permanent DN iii.31 SN i.142 SN ii.109 SN ii.198 SN iv.24f. 45, 63 AN ii.33 AN ii.52 v.210; Ps ii.80 Vb 335 426. In chain of synonyms nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma DN i.21 SN iii.144 SN iii.147 ‣See below anicca,-nt. adverb niccaṁ perpetually, constantly, always (synonym sadā) MN i.326 iii.271 Snp 69 Snp 220 Snp 336 Dhp 23 Dhp 109 Dhp 206 Dhp 293 Ja i.290 iii.26, 190 Nd2 345 (= dhuvakālaṁ) Pv-a 32 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 134. Far more frequently as anicca (adjective; aniccaṁ
    2. neuter noun ) unstable impermanent, inconstant;
    3. neuter evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence

      • The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca-saññaṁ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence SN ii.47 SN iii.155 SN v.132 Ps ii.48 sq., 100 Pv-a 62 etc
      • kāye anicc’ ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha˚) SN iv.211 SN v.324 SN v.345 Ps ii.37, 45 sq., 241 sq ‣See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning especially in the famous triad “aniccaṁ dukkhaṁ anattā” ‣See dukkha ii.2, e.g. SN iii.41 SN iii.67 SN iii.180 SN iv.28 (sabbaṁ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma DN i.21 anicca + dukkha SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṁ taṁ dukkhaṁ); iv.28, 31, v.345 AN iv.52 (anicce dukkhasaññā) MN i.500 (+ roga etc.) Nd2 214 (identical cp. roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā DN i.36 aniccasaññī anattasaññī AN iv.353 etc. Opposed to this ever-fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q.v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma)
      • See further for reference SN ii.244 sq (saḷāyatanaṁ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); iii.102 (rūpa etc.) iv.131, 151 AN ii.33 AN ii.52 AN v.187f. 343 sq. Snp 805 Ps i.191; ii.28 sq., 80, 106 Vb 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373 Pv-a 60 (= ittara)
      1. ˚kālaṁ (adverb ) constantly Nd2 345
      2. ˚dāna a perpetual gift DN i.144 (cp. DN-a i.302)
      3. ˚bhatta a continuous food-supply (for the bhikkhus) Ja i.178 Vv-a 92 Pv-a 54
      4. ˚bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin ii.78 Vin iii.237 (= dhuva-bhattika) iv.271
      5. ˚saññā (& adjective; saññin the consciousness or idea of permanence (adjective having etc.) AN ii.52 AN iii.79 AN iii.334 iv.13, 145 sq.; Nett 27
      6. ˚sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct Vv-a 72 Pv-a 256
      7. Vedic nitya, adjective formation from ni, meaning “downward” = onward, on and on; according to Grassmann Wtb. z. Rig Veda originally “inwardly homely”
    Niccatā
    feminine
    1. continuity, permanence, only as ; changeableness, impermanence SN i.61 SN i.204 SN iii.43; iv.142 sq., 216, 325
    abstract to nicca
    Niccatta
    neuter = niccatā Vism 509.
    Niccamma
    1. without skin, excoriated, in ˚ṁ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off Ja iii.281
    • niccamma-gāvī “a skinless cow,” used in a well-known simile at SN ii.99 referred to at Vism 341 & 463
    Sanskrit niścarman, nis + camma
    Niccala
    adjective
    1. motionless Ja iv.2 Pv-a 95
    Sanskrit niścala, nis + cala
    Niccittaka
    adjective
    1. thoughtless Ja ii.298
    Sanskrit niścitta, nis + citta (ka)
    Niccola
    adjective
    1. without dress, naked Pv-a 32 (= nagga)
    nis-cola
    Nicchanda
    adjective
    1. without desire or excitement Ja i.7
    nis + chanda
    Nicchaya
    1. discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination Ja i.441 (˚mitta a firm friend) Dhs-a 133 (adhimokkha = its paccupaṭṭhāna) Snp-a 60 (daḷha˚ adjective of firm resolution) ‣See vi˚
    Sanskrit niścaya, nis + caya of cināti
    Niccharaṇa
    neuter
    1. emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303
    from niccharati
    Niccharati
    1. to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out Iti 75 (devasadda) Vv 382 Ja i.53 Ja i.176 Dhp-a i.389 Vv-a 12 37 (saddā). causative nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth get rid of, emit, utter, give out DN i.53 (anattamanavācam a˚ not utter a word of discontent) Ja iii.127 v.416 (madhurassaraṁ) Pug 33 Mil 259 (garahaṁ) Dāvs i.28 (vācaṁ)
    2. Sanskrit niścarati, nis + carati
    Nicchāta
    1. having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. epithet of an Arahant always in combination with nibbuta or parinibbuta : SN iii.26 (tanhaṁ abbuyha); iv.204 (vedanānaṁ khayā) MN i.341 412, AN iv.410 AN v.65 (sītibhūta) Snp 707 (aniccha), 735, 758 Iti 48 (esanānaṁ khayā); Thag 2 132 (abbūḷhasalla)
    • explained at Ps ii.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati
    Sanskrit *niḥpsāta, nis + chāta
    Nicchādeti
    1. ‣See nicchodeti
    Nicchāreti
    causative of niccharati, q.v.
    Nicchita
    adjective
    1. determined, convinced Mhvs 7, 19
    Sanskrit niścita, nis + cita ‣See nicchināti
    Nicchināti
    1. to discriminate, consider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Snp 785 (explained by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd1 76) Dhp 256 (gloss K vinicchaye). past participle nicchita
    2. Sanskrit niścinoti, nis + cināti
    Nicchuddha
    adjective
    1. thrown out Ja iii.99 (= nibbāpita, nikkhāmita) Mil 130
    Sanskrit niḥkṣubdha, nis + chuddha ‣See nicchubhati
    Nicchubhati
    1. to throw out Ja iii.512 (= nīharati Commentary ; variant reading nicchurāti) Mil 187 past participle nicchuddha q.v
    2. Sanskrit *niḥkṣubhati, nis + khubhati or chubhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and ‣See Trenckner, Miln past participle 423, 424
    Nicchubhana
    neuter
    1. throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Mil 357
    ‣See nicchubhati
    Nicchodeti
    (& variant reading ; nicchādeti
    1. to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at SN iii.155 = M i.229 374 = AN iii.365 where SN has correct reading (variant reading ˚choṭeti); MN has ˚chādeti (variant reading ˚chodeti); AN has ˚chedeti (variant reading ˚choreti, ˚chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The Commentary on AN iii.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati-nicchedeti chid is pardonable because of Prakrit chollai “to cut.” cp. also nicchubhati with Burmese variant nicchurāti. For sound change Pali ch< sk. kṣ cp. Pali chamā< k ch churik etc
    shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prakrit origin, viz. chaḍḍ; choṭ; , the former = Pali chaḍḍeti, the latter = Sanskrit kṣodayati or Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit chorayati, Apabhraṁśa chollai; with which cp. Pali chuddha
    Nija
    adjective
    1. own Dāvs ii.68. cp. niya
    Sanskrit nija, wth dialectical j. for nitya = Pali nicca
    Nijana
    neuter
    1. washing, cleansing Vism 342 (variant reading nijj˚)
    from nij
    Nijigiṁsati
    1. to desire ardently, to covet DN-a i.92 (= maggeti pariyesati)
    Sanskrit nijigīṣati, ni + jigiṁsati
    Nijigiṁsanatā
    feminine
    1. covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (identical = magganā), referring to Vb 353 where T has jigiṁsanatā, with variant reading nijigīsanatā
    from last
    Nijigiṁsitar
    (n. adjective)
    1. one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious DN i.8 (lābhaṁ) AN iii.111 (identical)
    agent noun from preceding
    Nijjaṭa
    adjective
    1. disentangled Ja i.187 Mil 3
    Sanskrit *nirjaṭa, nis + jaṭa, adjective to jaṭā
    Nijjara
    adjective
    1. causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; feminine ˚ā decay, destruction, death SN iv.339 AN i.221 AN ii.198 AN v.215f. (dasa-n-vatthūni) Ps i.5 (identical)
    2. Sanskrit nirjara in different meaning, Pali nis functioning as emphatic prefix; nis + jara
    Nijjareti
    1. to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist MN i.93 Thag 2, 431 (nijjaressāmi = jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi Thag-a 269)
    Sanskrit nir-jarayati; nis + jarati1
    Nijjāleti
    1. to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out Ja vi.495 (aggiṁ)
    nis + jāleti
    Nijjiṇṇa
    adjective
    1. destroyed, overcome, exhausted, finished, dead DN i.96 MN ii.217 AN i.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ n. bhavissati) MN i.93 AN v.215f.; Nett 51
    Sanskrit nirjīrṇa, nis + jiṇṇa
    Nijjita
    adjective
    1. unvanquished Mil 192 (˚kammasūrā), 332 (˚vijita-sangāma); Sdhp 360
    Sanskrit nirjita, nis + jita
    Nijjīvata
    adjective
    1. lifeless, soulless Dhs-a 38 Mil 413
    Sanskrit nirjīvita, nis + jīva1
    Nijjhatta
    adjective
    1. satisfied, pacified, appeased Ja vi.414 (= khamāpita Commentary ) Vv 6319 (= nijjhāpita Vv-a 265) Mil 209 ‣See also paṭi˚
    past participle of nijjhāpeti, * Sanskrit nidhyapta or nidhyāpita
    Nijjhatti
    feminine
    1. conviction, understanding realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction MN i.320 AN iv.223 Ps ii.171, 176 Mil 210
    abstract to nijjhatta, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nidhyapti, formation like Pali ñatti → Sanskrit jñapti
    Nijjhāna1
    neuter
    1. understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (= nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight Ja vi.207 Often as ˚ṁ khamati : to be pleased with, to find pleasure in SN iii.225 SN iii.228 MN i.133 MN i.480 Vv 8417 Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna-kkhanti delighting in speculation AN i.189f. ii.191. cp. upa˚
    * Sanskrit nidhyāna, ni + jhāna1
    Nijjhāna2
    neuter
    1. conflagration, in anto˚ = nijjhāyana Pv-a 18 (cittasantāpa + in explanation of soka)
    nis + jhāna2
    Nijjhāpana
    neuter
    1. favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence Ja iv.495 (˚ṁ karoti = khamāpeti Commentary ; text reads nijjhapana)
    Sanskrit *nidhyāpana, ni + jhāpana, causative to jhāpeti
    Nijjhāpaya
    adjective
    1. to be discriminated or understood, in dun˚; hard to.. Mil 141 (pañha)
    Sanskrit *ni-dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti
    Nijjhāpeti
    1. to make favourably disposed, to win somebody’s affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96 MN i.321 Ja iv.108 414, 495; vi.516 Mil 264 Vv-a 265 (nijjhāpita = nijjhatta)
    Sanskrit nidhāyayati, ni + jhāpeti, causative to jhāyati1; cp. Sanskrit nididhyāsate
    Nijjhāma
    adjective noun
    1. burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed AN i.295 Nett 77, 95 paṭipadā
    1. ˚taṇha adjective of consuming thirst, very thirsty Ja i.44
    2. ˚taṇhika = ˚taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q.v. Mil 294 Mil 303 Mil 357
    3. Sanskrit niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis + jhāma of jhāyati2 = Sanskrit kṣāyati
    Nijjhāyati1
    1. to meditate, reflect, think SN iii.140f. (+ passati, cp. jānāti), 157 MN i.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); iii.14 (identical). cp. upa˚
    Sanskrit nidhyāyati, ni + jhāyati1
    Nijjhāyati2
    1. to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd1 433
    ni + jhāyati2
    Nijjhāyana
    neuter
    1. burning away, consumption; figuratively remorse, mortification in anto˚ Ja i.168 (cp. nijjhāna2)
    Sanskrit *niḥkṣāyana, nis + jhāyana of jhāyati2
    Niṭṭha
    adjective
    1. dependent on, resting on, intent upon SN iii.13 (accanta˚) Nd1 263 (rūpa˚)
    Sanskrit niṣṭha, ni + ˚tha; cp. niṭṭhā1
    Niṭṭhā1
    feminine
    1. basis, foundation, familiarity with Snp 864 (expl Snp-a 551 by samiddhi, but ‣See Nd1 263)
    Sanskrit niṣṭhā; ni + ṭhā, abstract of adjective
  • suffix ˚ṭha
  • Niṭṭhā2
    feminine
    1. end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object aim Vin i.255 SN ii.186 AN i.279 (object); Ps i.161 niṭṭhaṁ gacchati to come to an end; figuratively to reach perfection be completed in the faith MN i.176 Ja i.201 Mil 310 frequently in past participle niṭṭhaṁ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection (= pabbajitānaṁ arahattaṁ patta) Dhp-a iv.70 SN iii.99 (a˚) AN ii.175 AN iii.450 v.119 sq. Dhp 351 Ps i.81, 161
    2. Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis + ṭhā from ˚ṭha
    Niṭṭhāti
    1. to be at an end, to be finished Ja i.220 Ja iv.391 Dhp-a i.393 past participle niṭṭhita, Caus niṭṭhāpeti (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis + tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compound
    Niṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. being finished, carrying out, execution, performance DN i.141 Thag-a 19 (= avasāya). cp. san˚
    abstract of niṭṭhāti
    Niṭṭhāpita
    (& niṭṭhapita)
    1. accomplished, performed, carried out Ja i.86 Ja i.172 (˚ṭha˚), 201
    past participle of niṭṭhāpeti
    Niṭṭhāpeti
    1. to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish Ja i.86 Ja i.290 Ja vi.366 Dhp-a iii.172 past participle niṭṭhāpita cp. pari˚
    2. causative to niṭṭhāti
    Niṭṭhita
    adjective
    1. brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i.e. the preparations being finished) Vin i.35 DN i.109 (bhattaṁ: the meal is ready); ii.127 (identical) Ja i.255 (identical) Ja ii.48 Ja iii.537 (finished) Vv-a 188 Pv-a 81 & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed Dhp-a; iii.172
    • su˚ well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Snp 48 Snp 240 cp. pari˚
    Sanskrit niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis + ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti
    Niṭṭhubhati
    (& nuṭṭhubhati Vin i.271 Ja i.459 also niṭṭhuhaṭi)
    1. to spit out, to expectorate Vin i.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā) iii.132 (identical) Ja ii.105 Ja ii.117 (nuṭṭh˚); vi.367 Dhp-a ii.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). past participle nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121

      • cp. oṭṭhubhati
      Sanskrit niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning = Sanskrit niṣṭhīvati nis + *thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi
    Niṭṭhubhana
    neuter
    1. spitting out, spittle Ja i.47 Pv-a 80 (= kheḷa, variant reading SS niṭṭhuvana, Burmese manuscripts niṭhūna)
    Sanskrit niṣṭhīvana ‣See niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prakrit niṭṭhuhana
    Niṭṭhurin
    adjective
    1. rough, hard, cruel, merciless Snp 952 (a˚; this reading is mentioned as variant reading by Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 569 & the reading; anuddharī given; variant readings SS anuṭṭhurī, Burmese manuscripts anuṭṭharī, explained as anissukī Nd1 440 however has aniṭṭhurī with explanation of nitthuriya as under issā at Vb 357)
    Sanskrit niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni + thūra = thūla; cp. Prakrit niṭṭhura
    Niṭṭhuriya
    neuter
    1. hardness, harshness, roughness Nd1 440 Nd2 484 (in exegesis of makkha) Vb 357
    cp. Sanskrit niṣṭhuratva
    Niḍḍāyati
    1. to cut out, to weed DN i.231 (niddāyit˚) Iti 56 (as variant reading niddāta for niṇhāta, q.v.) Ja i.215 Caus niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin ii.180
    Sanskrit nirdāti, nis + dāyati, cp. Sanskrit nirdātar weeder
    Niḍḍha
    neuter
    1. nest, place, seat Dhp 148 (variant reading niḷa)
    Vedic nīḍa resting-place ni + sad “sitting down”
    Niṇhāta
    adjective
    1. cleansed, purified Iti 56 (˚pāpaka = sinless; with several variant readings amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati = cleansed of weeds = Nd1 58 (ninhāta˚) = Nd2 514 (ninhāta, variant reading SS ninnahāta)
    Sanskrit *niḥsnāta, nis + nahāta
    Nitamba
    1. the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DN-a i.209
    Sanskrit nitamba; etymology unknown
    Nitammati
    1. to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety Ja iv.284 (Commentary atikilamati)
    Sanskrit nitāmyati, ni + tam as in tama
    Nitāḷeti
    1. to knock down, to strike Ja iv.347
    Sanskrit nitāḍayati, ni + tāḷeti
    Nittaṇha
    adjective
    1. free from thirst or desire, desireless Pv-a 230 (= nirāsa) feminine abstract nitthaṇhatā Nett 38
    2. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis + taṇhā
    Nittaddana
    1. (better: nitthaddhana neuter

      1. paralysing DN i.11 (jīvhā˚ = mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DN-a i.96 variant reading (gloss) nibandhana)
      Sanskrit *niṣṭambhana, abstract from ni + thaddha = making rigid
    Nittāreti
    1. ‣See nittharati
    Nittiṇa
    adjective
    1. free from grass Ja iii.23
    Sanskrit niṣṭṛṇa, nis + tiṇa
    Nittiṇṇa
    1. (past participle )

      1. got out of, having crossed or overcome DN ii.275 (-ogha; Burmese variant nitiṇṇa) Nd1 159 (as variant reading ; text has nitiṇṇa) Nd2 278 (t.). cp. nittharati
      Sanskrit nistīrṇa, nis + tiṇṇa
    Nittudana
    neuter
    1. pricking, piercing AN i.65 (text: nittuddana) iii.403 sq
    nis + tudana, abstract from tudati; cp. Sanskrit nistodā
    Nitteja
    adjective
    1. without energy Vism 596
    2. “put out, abashed, put to shame, in ˚ṁ karoti to make blush or put to shame Ja ii.94 (lajjāpeti +)
    cp. Sanskrit nistejas only in meaning 1; nis + teja
    Nitthanati
    Nitthunati;
    1. to moan, groan: (a) ˚thanati Ja i.463 Ja ii.362 Ja iv.446 Ja v.296 DN-a i.291
    • (b) ˚thunati Vin ii.222 Ja v.295 Ja v.389 Vism 311 Vv-a 224 cp. nitthuna
    Sanskrit nisstanati “moan out,” nis + thaneti & thunati; 1
    Nitthanana
    neuter
    1. groaning, moaning DN-a i.291 (Burmese variant ˚ṭhuna). As nitthunana Vism 504
    nis + thanana, abstract to thaneti
    Nittharaṇa1
    neuter
    1. getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming SN i.193 (oghassa) AN ii.200 (identical) Iti 111 (identical) MN i.134 Ja i.48 (loka˚); Dāvs ii.29 (identical); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava˚), 619 (tiloka˚)
    Sanskrit nistaraṇa, nis + taraṇa, cp. nittharati
    Nittharaṇa2
    neuter
    1. “strewing or being strewn down,” putting down, carrying, bearing SN iv.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa) Vv-a 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba-bhārassa nsamatthā = able to carry the burden of a household)
    Sanskrit nistaraṇa, ni + tharaṇa
    Nittharati
    1. to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over DN i.73 (kantāraṁ). pp nittiṇṇa q.v. causative nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd2 630 (nittāreti)
    2. Sanskrit nistarati, nis + tarati1
    Nitthāra
    1. passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in ˚ṁ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot-free MN i.442 (variant reading netth˚, which is the usual form) ‣See netthāra
    Sanskrit nistāra; nis + tāra of tarati1
    Nitthuna
    1. (a) (of thunati; 1) moan, groan DN-a i.291 (as Burmese variant for nitthanana)-(b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse Pv-a 76 (˚ṁ karoti to revile or curse)
    Sanskrit *nis-stanana & nistava to thunati
    Nitthunati
    1. etc ‣See nitthanati etc
    Nidassana
    neuter
    1. “pointing at” evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute characteristic; sign, term DN i.223 (a˚ with no attribute) iii.217 (identical) SN iv.370 (identical) AN iv.305f. (nīla˚, pīta etc.) Snp 137 Vb 13 64, 70 sq. (sa˚, a˚) Vv-a 12 13 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 121 (pucchanākāra˚) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaṁ n “sign, token”)
    Sanskrit nidarśana, ni + dassana
    Nidassati
    Burmese variant at Snp 785 for nirassati (q.v.) Nd1 76 has nid˚ in text, nir˚ as variant reading SS Snp-a 522 reads nirassati
    Nidassita
    1. (past participle )

      1. pointed out, defined as, termed Pv i.512 Pv-a 30
      ‣See nidasseti
    Nidasseti
    1. to point out (“down”), explain, show, define Vv-a 12 13 (˚etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correlated to nidassana-vacana). past participle nidassita (q.v.)
    2. Sanskrit nidarśayati, ni + dasseti
    Nidahati
    1. to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cīvaraṁ) Mil 271 absolutive nidahitvā Pv-a 97 (dhanadhaññaṁ) & nidhāya Dhp 142 Dhp 405 Snp 35 (daṇḍaṁ), 394 629 Nd2 348; pres. also nidheti Kp-a 217, 219; fut nidhessati Pv-a 132
    2. passive nidhīyati Kp-a 217. Caus nidhāpeti Pv-a 130 (bhoge) ‣See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya
    3. Sanskrit nidadhāti, ni + dahati1
    Nidāgha
    1. heat, summer-heat, summer, drought Ja i.221 (-samaya dry season); ii.80; Vism 259 (˚samaya, where Kp-a 58 reads sarada-samaya) Pv-a 174 (-kāla summer). fig Ja iv.285 Ja v.404 Dāvs ii.60
    Sanskrit nidāgha, from nidahati, ni + dahati2 ‣See ḍahati
    Nidāna
    neuter
    1. (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (literally or figuratively), foundation, occasion source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject (“sujet”) MN i.261 AN i.134f.; 263 sq., 338; ii.196 iv.128 sq. Dhs 1059 (dukkha˚, source of pain), 1136 Nett 3, 32 Mil 272 (of disease: pathology, aetiology) 344 (˚paṭhanakusala, of lawyers) Pv-a 132 Pv-a 253. (b) (adjective
    • ˚) founded on, caused by, originating in relating to SN v.213f. (a˚ & sa˚) AN i.82 (identical) Snp 271 (ito˚), 866 (kuto˚), 1050 (upadhi˚ = hetuka, paccayā kāraṇā Nd2 346); 872 (icchā˚) etc. Vv-a 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha˚ playing at or referring to R.)
    • (c) nidānaṁ (
    • accusative as
    • adverb ) by means of, in consequence of, through usually with tato˚ through this, yato˚ through which DN i.52 DN i.73 MN i.112 Pv iv.161 (through whom = yaṁ nimittaṁ Pv-a 242) Pv-a 281 ito˚ by this Nd2 2912
    Sanskrit nidāna, ni + *dāna of , dyati to bind ‣See dāma
    Nidāhaka
    adjective
    1. one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara˚ Vin i.284
    from nidahati
    Nidda
    neuter
    1. a cave Nd1 23 (epithet of kāya)
    nis + dara ‣See darī
    Niddanta
    1. = niddā Ja vi.294
    so read for niddanna, variant reading niddhā = niddā; cp. supinanta
    Niddaya
    adjective
    1. merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143 Sdhp 159
    Sanskrit nirdaya, nis + dayā adjective
    Niddara
    adjective
    1. free from fear, pain or anguish Dhp 205 = Sn 257 (explained at Dhp-a iii.269 by rāgadarathānaṁ abhāvena n.; at Snp-a 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.)
    nis + dara
    Niddasa
    1. ‣See niddesa
    Niddā
    feminine
    1. sleep AN ii.48 AN ii.50 AN iii.251 Snp 926 (opposite jāgariyā), 942 ‣See explanation at Nd1 423 Ja i.61 Ja i.192 Ja ii.128
    • niddaṁ okkamati to fall asleep Vin i.15 (niddā?) Ja iii.538 iv.1 Dhp-a i.9 Vv-a 65 Pv-a 47 ˚ṁ upagacchati id Pv-a 43 Pv-a 105 Pv-a 128
    1. ˚ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish Iti 72 (+ kammarāma, bhassarata)
    2. ˚ārāmatā fondness of sleep laziness, sluggishness AN iii.116 AN iii.293f. 309 sq.; iv.25 (+ kamm˚, bhass˚); v.164
    3. ˚sīlin of drowsy habits slothful, sleepy Snp 96
    Vedic nidrā, ni + drā in Sanskrit drāti, drāyate, Indogermanic *dorē; cp. Latin dormio
    Niddāna
    neuter
    1. cutting off, mowing, destroying Snp 78 (= chedana lunana uppāṭana Snp-a 148) = SN i.172 Kindred Sayings i.319, cp. niḍḍāyati
    Sanskrit *nirdāna, nis + dāna of dayati2, Sanskrit dāti, cp. dātta
    Niddāyati
    1. to sleep DN i.231 Ja i.192 Ja i.266 Ja ii.103 v.68, 382 Dhp-a iii.175 Snp-a 169
    denominative from niddā
    Niddāyitar
    1. a sleepy person Dhp 325
    agent noun from niddāyati
    Niddiṭṭha
    1. (past participle )

      1. expressed, explained, designated Mil 3 Dhs-a 57 Vism 528 Vv-a 13
      ‣See niddisati
    Niddisati
    (& niddissati)
    1. to distinguish, point out, explain designate, define, express, to mean Iti 122 = Nd2 276f Mil 123 Mil 345 Dhs-a 57 Dhp-a ii.59 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 217 (˚itvā); aorist niddisi Dhs-a 57 Snp-a 61
    2. gerundive niddisitabba Dhs-a 56 Nett 96.
    3. passive niddissīyati Pv-a 163-
    4. past participle niddiṭṭha (q.v.)
    5. Sanskrit nir-diśati, nis + disati, cp. Latin distinguo
    Niddukkha
    adjective
    1. without fault or evil Ja iii.443 (in explanation of anīgha) Pv-a 230 (identical); (in explanation of mārisa) Kindred Sayings (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1
    nis + dukkha
    Niddesa
    1. description, attribute, distinction Pv-a 7 (ukkaṭṭha˚) ˚vatthu object of distinction or praise DN iii.253 AN iv.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as variant reading at DN iii.253 & Ps; i.5)
    2. descriptive exposition analytic explanation by way of question & answer interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa˚); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism 26 Dhs-a 54 Vv-a 78 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 147. 3. Name of an old Commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyana-vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P. Text S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e.g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc
    Sanskrit nirdeśa, from niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.
    Niddosa1
    adjective
    1. faultless, pure, undefiled Snp 476 Dhs-a 2 Pv-a 189 (= viraja) Dhp-a i.41
    Sanskrit nirdośa, nis + dosa1
    Niddosa2
    adjective
    1. free from hatred Ja iv.10 (su˚; Commentary “adussanavasena,” following upon sunikkodha)
    Sanskrit nirdveṣa, nis + dosa2
    Niddhana
    adjective
    1. without property, poor Ja v.447
    nis + dhana
    Niddhanta
    adjective
    1. blown off, removed, cleaned, purified AN i.254 (jātarūpa “loitered,” cp. niddhota) Snp 56 (˚kasāva-moha; Com vijahati) Dhp 236 (˚mala, malānaṁ nīhaṭatāya Dhp-a iii.336) Nd2 347 (= vanta & pahīna) Ja vi.218 (of hair Commentary explains siniddharutā, Burmese variant siniddha-anta thus meant for Sanskrit snigdhānta)
    past participle of niddhamati, nis + dhanta, q.v.
    Niddhamati
    1. to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Snp 281 = Mil 414 (kāraṇḍavaṁ) Snp 282 (˚itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaṁ = pajahati (Nd1 478) Dhp 239 (identical) Mil 43 past participle niddhanta
    2. in form = Sanskrit nirdhmāti, nis + dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2) ‣See niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati
    Niddhamana
    neuter
    1. drainage, drain, canal Vin ii.120 (udaka˚; dhovituṁ immediately preceding) Ja i.175 409, 425; iii.415; iv.28; v.21 (udaka˚) Dhp-a ii.37
    of niddhamati or = *nirdhāvana = ˚dhovana to dhāvati2
    Niddhamanā
    feminine
    1. throwing out, ejection, expulsion Ja v.233 (= nikkaḍḍhanā Commentary )
    either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti
    Niddharaṇa
    neuter not with Hardy (Index Vv-a) = Sanskrit nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa ‣See nittharaṇa2.
    Niddhāpita
    adjective
    1. thrown out Ja iii.99 (variant reading for nibbāpita)
    past participle of niddhāpeti, q.v.
    Niddhāpeti
    1. to throw out, chase away, expel Ja iv.41 (niddhāpayiṁsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). past participle niddhāpita
    2. Sanskrit nirdhāvayati, nis + dhāveti (dhāpeti), causative of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti causative from niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at Ja iv.48 unless misread for niddhāpaye, as Burmese variant bears out
    Niddhāmase
    1. at Ja iv.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as Burmese variant ), q.v
    Niddhunāti
    1. to shake off SN iii.155 AN iii.365 (odhunāti + ; spelt nidhunāti) MN i.229 Thag 1, 416 Pv-a 256 (= odhunāti)
    Sanskrit nirdhunoti, nis + dhunāti
    Niddhuniya
    1. (?) neuter

      1. hypocrisy Pug 18 (= makkha); cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 83
      = Sanskrit nihnuvana from nihnute with different derivation
    Niddhūpana
    adjective
    1. unscented Ja vi.21 (udaka)
    nir + dhūpana
    Niddhota
    adjective
    1. washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs v.63 (˚rūpiya; cp. niddhanta)
    nis + dhota; past participle of niddhovati
    Niddhovati
    1. to wash off, clean, purify AN i.253 (jātarūpaṁ, immediately followed by niddhanta). past participle niddhota
    2. Sanskrit nirdhāvati, nis + dhovati, cp. niddhamati
    Nidhāna
    neuter
    1. laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden treasure Ja iv.280 (nidhi˚) Pv-a 7 (udaka-dāna-nīharaṇa-n˚), 97 (n-gata dhana = hoarded, accumulated), 132 (˚ṁ nidhessāmi gather a treasure) Dhs-a 405 (˚kkhama)
    Vedic nidhāna ‣See nidahati
    Nidhānavant
    adjective forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving DN i.4 (= hadaye nidhātabba-yuttavāca DN-a i.76). Nidhapeti, Nidhaya & Nidhiyati;
    Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya
    Nidhīyati;
    1. ‣See nidahati
    Nidhi
    1. “setting down,” receptacle; (hidden) treasure Snp 285 (brahma n.) Dhp 76 Kh viii.2 ‣See KhA 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, definition of n., 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. “treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal” Matechnical term 6, 20) Sdhp 528 Sdhp 588
    2. “putting on,” a cloak Ja vi.79 (explained as vākacīra-nivāsanaṁ = a bark dress). cp. sannidhi
      1. ˚kumbhī a treasure-pot, a treasure hidden in a pot = a hidden treasure Dhp-a ii.107 Dhp-a iv.208
      • ˚nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure Ja iv.280
      • ˚mukha an excellent treasure. AN v.346
      Vedic nidhi, ni + dhā ‣See nidahati
    Nidhura
    1. ‣See nīdhura
    Nidheti
    1. ‣See nidahati
    Nindati
    1. to blame, find fault with, censure AN ii.3 AN v.171 174 Snp 658 Ja vi.63 Dhp 227 infinitive nindituṁ Dhp 230 gerundive nindanīya Snp-a 477
    2. past participle nindita (q.v.); cp. also nindiya
    3. Sanskrit nindati, nid as in Lithuanian naids (hatred), Gothic naitjan (to rail or blaspheme), Old High German neizzan (to plague); cp. Gothic neip = Old High German nīd (envy)
    Nindana
    neuter
    1. blaming, reviling, finding fault Dhp-a iii.328
    abstract from nindati
    Nindā
    feminine
    1. blame, reproach, fault-finding, fault, disgrace SN iii.73 AN ii.188 AN iv.157f. MN i.362 Snp 213 (+ pasaṁsā blame & praise) Dhp 81 (identical) Snp 826 Snp 895 Snp 928 Dhp 143 Dhp 309 Nd1 165 306, 384 Dhp-a ii.148
    • In compoundnindi˚ ‣See anindi˚
    cp. Sanskrit nindā, to nindati
    Nindita
    adjective
    1. blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dhp 228 Pv ii.334 (a˚ blameless agarahita pasaṁsa Pv-a 89); Sdhp 254 Sdhp 361
    • anindita Ja iv.106 (˚angin)
    past participle of nindati
    Nindiya
    adjective
    1. blameable, faulty, blameworthy Snp 658 (= nindanīya Snp-a 477) Nett 132. pi nindiyā at Pv-a 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā
    Sanskrit nindya, originally gerundive of nindati
    Ninna
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective bent down (cp ninnata), low-lying, deep, low, sunken Ja ii.3 (magga) Pv-a 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); especially frequently as—˚ bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combined with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadādhimutta (with variation nibbāna˚ viveka˚ etc. for tad˚): Nd2 under tad Ja ii.15 Ps ii.197- Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 (samuddo anupubba˚ etc.) AN iv.224 (viveka˚); v.175 (identical) MN i.493 (Nibbāna˚) Similarly: samudda˚ Gangā MN i.493 nekkhamma Ja i.45 (v.258); samādhi˚ Mil 38
    2. (
    3. accusative as
    4. adverb downward: ninnaṁ pavattati to flow downward MN i.117 Pv i.57 ninnagata running down Mil 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs iv.28
      • neuter low land, low ground, plain (opposite thala elevation, plateau): usually with reference to a raincloud flooding the low country Snp 30 (mahamegho ˚ṁ pūrayaṁto) Snp-a 42 (= pallala) Iti 66 (megho ˚ṁ pūreti); Pv ii.945 (megho ˚ṁ paripūrayanto).

        1. ˚unnata low lying & elevated Mil 349 (desabhāga)
        Vedic nimna, derived from ni down, probably combined with ˚na of nam to bend, thus meaning “bent down,” cp. unna & panna
    Ninnata
    adjective
    1. bent down, bent upon, in ninnatattā feminine abstract aim, purpose (?) Dhs-a 39 (is the reading correct?)
    2. ni + nata
    Ninnāda
    (& Nināda Miln, Dāvs)
    1. sounding forth, sound, tune, melody AN ii.117 (˚sadda) Ja vi.43 Vv-a 161 Mil 148 Dāvs v.31
    Sanskrit nināda, ni + nāda
    Ninnādin
    adjective
    1. sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) DN ii.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu)
    from ninnāda
    Ninnāmin
    adjective
    1. bending downwards, descending AN iv.237
    from ni + nam
    Ninnāmeti
    1. to bend down, put out (the tongue) DN i.106 (jivhaṁ = nīharati DN-a i.276) Ja i.163 Ja i.164 cp. Divy 7 Divy 71 (nirṇāmayati)
    causative of ni + namati
    Ninnīta
    adjective
    1. lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (˚-) AN i.254 (ninnīta-kasāva of gold: free from dross)
    past participle of ninneti
    Ninnetar
    1. one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. genitive) bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: “Heilbringer”) of the Buddha SN iv.94 MN i.111 AN v.226f. 256 sq.; Ps ii.194
    agent noun to ni-nayati = Sanskrit *ninayitṛ, cp. netar
    Ninneti
    1. to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaṁ), desiccate Vin ii.180
    • pp ninnīta, q.v
    Sanskrit ninayati, ni + nayati
    Ninhāta
    1. ‣See niṇhāta
    Nipa
    1. at Ja v.6 read as nīpa
    Nipaka
    adjective
    1. intelligent, clever, prudent, wise SN i.13 SN i.52 SN i.187 MN i.339 AN i.165 (+ jhāyin); iii.24, 138 Snp 45≈Dh 328≈ Dhp-a i.62 Snp 283 Snp 962 Snp 1038 Nd2 349 (= jātimā = Nd1 478; Bu i.49 Vb 426 Mil 34 Mil 342 Mil 411 Vism 3 (definition)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nipaka chief, from Sanskrit nipa, chief, master
    Nipakka
    1. at Vin i.200 read nippakka. Nipacc-akara
    Nipacc-ākāra
    1. obedience, humbleness, service SN i.178 SN v.233 AN v.66 Ja i.232 iv.133 Vv-a 22 320 Pv-a 12 Nipacca-vadin
    nipacca, absolutive of nipatati + ākāra
    Nipacca-vādin
    adjective
    1. speaking hurtfully Snp 217 (= dāyakaṁ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā Snp-a 272)
    nipacca, absolutive of nipāteti + vādin
    Nipajjati
    1. to lie down (to sleep) DN i.246 AN iv.332 Ja i.150 Dhp-a i.40 Pv-a 280 aorist nipajji Ja i.279 Ja ii.154 Ja iii.83 Vv-a 75 76 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 93;
    2. absolutive nipajja Ja i.7 (v.44: ˚ṭṭhānacankama)

      • Caus nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit Ja i.50 Ja i.253 Ja i.267 iii.26, 188 Dhp-a i.50 Vv-a 76 (˚etvā rakkhāpetha) cp. abhi˚
      Sanskrit nipadyate, ni + pajjati
    Nipatati
    1. intrs.) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin ii.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.) Pv-a 60 (identical) Ja i.278 Ja v.467 (nippatissāmi = nikkhamissāmi Commentary ) Pv ii.89 (Burmese variant parivisayitvā) = nikkhamitvā Pv-a 109 (cp. nippatati)
    2. (trs.) to bring together to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) “shall we convene” Ja iv.361 ‣See also nipadāmase
    3. cp. abhi˚ san˚
    Sanskrit nipatati, ni + patati
    Nipadāmase
    1. at Ja iii.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into; nipatāmase (= let us gather, bring together = dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (= do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Commentary explanation p. 121: nikārapakārā (= nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern,; Toevoegselen p. 175. It cannot be ni + pa dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying verb-component ‣See ni˚ AN 2, & Buddhaghosa’s explanation is popular etymology cp. nipatāmase at Ja iv.361 ‣See nipatati
    Nipanna
    adjective
    1. lying down Ja i.151 Ja i.279 Ja ii.103 iii.276 (˚kāle while he was asleep), iv.167 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 265 (spelt nippanna, opposite nikujja)
    past participle of nipajjati
    Nipannaka
    adjective = nipanna Ps ii.209 Ja i.151
    Nipalāvita
    1. (past participle ) (Commentary reading for vipalāvita text)

      1. made to swim, immersed, thrown into water Ja i.326
      Sanskrit viplāvita ‣See plavati
    Nipāka
    adjective
    1. full grown, fully developed, in full strength Ja vi.327 (of a tree)
    Sanskrit nipāka, ni + pāka (pacati)
    Nipāta
    1. falling down Dhp 121 (udabindu˚) Vv-a 279 (diṭṭhi˚, a glance) Pv-a 45 (asa˚)
    2. descending MN i.453
    3. a particle the grammatical term for

      • adverb s, conjunctions & interjections Ja v.243 (assu) Pv-a 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taṁ) 50 (ca)
      • a section of a book ‣See next. cp. vi˚ san˚
    Sanskrit nipāta, ni + pāta, of nipatati
    Nipātaka
    adjective
    1. divided into sections or chapters Dīpavaṁsa iv.16
    to nipāta
    Nipātana
    neuter
    1. falling upon Dhp-a i.295 - 2. going to bed Vv-a 71 (pacchā˚ opposite pubbuṭṭhāna) cp. nipātin
    2. to nipatati
    Nipātin
    adjective
    1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dhp 35 Dhp 36 (yatthakāma˚ cittaṁ = yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth’ eva nipatati Dhp-a i.295). 2. going to bed DN i.60 (pacchā˚ going to bed late). cp. abhi˚
    2. to nipatati
    Nipāteti
    1. to let fall, throw down into (c. locative ); bring to fall, injure; figuratively cast upon, charge with DN i.91 MN i.453 (ayokaṭāhe) Ja iii.359 Snp-a 272 Pv-a 152 (bhūmiyaṁ).
    2. past participle nipātita corrupt, evil wicked Vin ii.182 (caṇḍa + ; text nippātita, variant reading nipphātita)
    3. ni + causative of patati
    Nipuṇa
    adjective
    1. clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse DN i.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita +) MN i.487 (dhamma) SN i.33 SN iv.369 AN iii.78 Snp 1126 (= gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd2 350) Vb 426 Mil 233 Mil 276 DN-a i.117 Vv-a 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala +) 232 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 16. cp. abhinipuṇa
    Sanskrit nipuṇa, dialectical for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ
    Nippakāra
    adjective
    1. of no flavour, tasteless, useless Ja i.340
    nis + pakāra 2
    Nippakka
    adjective
    1. boiled, infused Vin i.200
    nis + pakka
    Nippajjati
    Nipphajjati;
    1. to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen result, happen Dhp-a ii.4 (pph) Pv-a 19 (= upakappati) 71 (phalaṁ ijjhati n.), 120 (identical). past participle nipphanna ‣See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi˚
    2. Sanskrit niṣpadyate, nis + pajjati
    Nippañña
    adjective
    1. unwise, foolish Pv-a 40 Pv-a 41 (= dummati)
    nis + pañña
    Nippatati
    Nipphatati;
    1. to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. ablative) Vin ii.151 (nipphaṭati variant reading nippaṭati) Ja v.467 (= nikkhamati Commentary ; or is it nipatati?). absolutive nippacca (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirpatya Avs i.209)
    2. nis + patati
    Nippatta
    adjective
    1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin iv.259
    2. without leaves Ja iii.496 (= patita-patta) Snp-a 117 (˚puppha)
    3. Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta
    nis + patta
    Nippatti
    1. ‣See nipphatti
    Nippadā
    1. (?) at SN i.225 read nipphādā (q.v.)
    Nippadesa
    1. only in instrumental & ablative = separately Dhs-a 2 30, 37, 297
    Sanskrit *niṣpradesa, nis + padesa
    Nippanna
    1. ‣See nipanna & nipphanna
    Nippapañca
    adjective
    1. free from diffuseness SN iv.370 Dhp 254 (Tathāgata); ˚ārāma not fond of delay MN i.65 (Neumann translation i.119: “dem keine Sonderheit behagt”) AN iii.431 AN iv.229f. Mil 262
    nis + papañca
    Nippabha
    adjective
    1. without splendour Ja ii.415 Mil 102
    nis + prabhā
    Nippariyāya
    1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstrativetion Dhs-a 317 (˚ena not figuratively), 403 (˚desanā) Vv-a 320
    2. unchangeable, not to be turned Mil 113 Mil 123 212
    nis + pariyāya
    Nippalāpa
    adjective
    1. free from prattle or talk, not talking AN ii.183 (apalāpa + ; variant reading ˚palāsa)
    nis + palāpa
    Nippalibodha
    adjective
    1. without hindrances, unobstructed Mil 11
    nis + palibodha
    Nippādeti
    1. ‣See nipphādeti
    Nippāpa
    adjective
    1. free from sin Snp 257 = Dh 205
    nis + pāpa
    Nippitika
    adjective
    1. a bastard Ja i.133 (variant reading nippītika q.v.)
    Sanskrit *niṣpaitṛka = fatherless or *niṣprītika?
    Nippipāsa
    adjective
    1. without thirst or desire Snp 56 Nd2 351
    nis + pipāsā
    Nippītika
    adjective
    1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q.v.) DN i.75 AN i.81
    2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) ‣See nippitika
    nis + pīti + ka
    Nippīḷana
    neuter
    1. squeezing, pressing; a blow Ja iii.160 cp. abhinippīḷanā
    nis + pīḷana
    Nippīḷeti
    1. to squeeze, press, clench, urge Ja i.63 Ja i.223 passive nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin ii.303 Vv-a 138 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 192. cp. abhi˚
    2. nis + pīḷeti
    Nippurisa
    adjective
    1. without men Pv-a 177 - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas only (of turiyā = a female orchestra) Vin i.15 DN ii.21 Ja v.506 cp. Mvu iii.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena & Avs i.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa ‣See also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 ‣See Index has niṣparuṣa (soft), with variant reading niṣpuruṣa
    2. nis + purisa
    Nippesika
    1. one who performs jugglery, a juggler DN i.8 (= nippeso sīlaṁ etesan ti DN-a.i.91) AN iii.111
    cp. Sanskrit niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ + piṣ
    Nippesikatā
    feminine
    1. jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toevoegselen p. 176) Vb 353 (explained at Vism 29) Mil 383
    abstract from preceding
    Nippothana
    neuter
    1. crushing, beating, destroying Snp-a 390
    nis + pothana of puth to crush
    Nipphajjati
    1. ‣See nippajjati
    Nipphajjana
    neuter (or ˚nā
    • feminine ?)

      1. resulting, procedure, achievement, plot Ja iv.83
      n. abstract from nipp(h)ajjati
    Nipphatti
    feminine
    1. result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection Ja i.56 Ja i.335 (of dreams), 343, 456; iv.137 (sippe); vi.36 Vv-a 138 (sippa˚) Dhp-a ii.6 (import, meaning, of a vision) Dhs-a 354 Pv-a 122 Pv-a 282 (sippe); Nett 54. cp. abhi˚
    cp. Sanskrit niṣpatti
    Nipphattika
    adjective
    1. having a result Ja iii.166 (evaṁ˚ of such consequence)
    from nipphatti
    Nipphanna
    adjective
    1. accomplished, perfected, trained SN i.215 (˚sobhin, spelt nippanna) Ja iv.39 (˚sippa master of the art, M.A.) Dhp-a iii.285 (sasse) Dhs-a 316 in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu xi.7; xxiii.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395 cp. abhi˚, pari˚ ‣See also Compendium 156, 157
    past participle of nippajjati
    Nipphala
    adjective
    1. without fruit, barren in ; not without fruit, i.e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv i.42 55, Pv-a 194 Sdhp 504
    nis + phala
    Nipphalita
    adjective
    1. broken out, split open Ja i.493 (lasī = nikkhantā Commentary ; variant reading nipphaḷita)
    Sanskrit niṣphārita, past participle of nipphaleti, nis + phaleti
    Nipphāṇitatta
    neuter
    1. state of being free from sugar or molasses Ja iii.409
    nis + phāṇita + tva
    Nipphādaka
    adjective
    1. producing, accomplishing Dhs-a 47 Pv-a 147 (sukha—˚ṁ puññaṁ)
    from nipphādeti
    Nipphādana
    neuter
    1. accomplishment Mil 356 DN-a i.195
    Sanskrit niṣpādana, to nipphādeti
    Nipphādar
    1. one who produces or gains SN i.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā nominative for nippadā)
    agent noun = Sanskrit niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar
    Nipphādita
    1. (having) produced, producing (perhaps = nipphāditar) Vv-a 113
    past participle of nipphādeti
    Nipphāditar
    1. one who produces or accomplishes Pv-a 8 (read “so nipphāditā” for sā nipphādikā). cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka
    agent noun to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar
    Nipphādeti
    1. to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform Ja i.185 (lābhasakkāraṁ); v.81 Mil 299 Vv-a 32 72 (gerundive nipphādetabba, noun of ablative case); Sdhp 319 Sdhp 426
    2. past participle nipphādita. cp. abhinipphādeti
    3. causative of nippajjati
    Nipphoṭana
    neuter
    1. beating SN iv.300 (variant reading ṭh.). cp. nippothana
    nis + pothanā
    Nipphoṭeti
    1. to beat down, smother, crush SN i.101 SN i.102
    nis + potheti
    Nibaddha
    adjective

    bound down to, i.e. (1) fixed, stable, sure Ja iv.134 (bhattavetana) Mil 398 (a˚ unstable, ˚sayana). At DN-a i.243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha˚; definite, regular and anibaddha˚; indefinite irregular pilgrimage.

  • asked, pressed, urged Ja iii.277
  • nibaddhaṁ (

    • neuter as
    • adverb ) constantly always, continually Ja i.100 Ja i.150 Ja iii.325 v.95, 459 vi.161 Pv-a 267 (˚vasanaka) Dhp-a ii.41 52 sq
    ni + baddha
  • Nibandha
    1. binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity SN ii.17 Vv-a 259 260 (perseverance). accusative nibandhaṁ (often misspelt for nibaddhaṁ continually Vv-a 75 cp. vi˚
    2. Sanskrit nibandha, ni + bandha
    Nibandhati
    1. to bind Mil 79
    2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin ii.151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding) Ja i.201 (yāgubhattaṁ). 3. to press, urge, importune Ja iii.277
    ni + bandhati
    Nibandhana
    neuter
    1. tying, fastening; binding, bond; adjective tied to, fettered Snp 654 (kamma˚) Mil 78 Mil 80
    2. ni + bandhana
    Nibodhati
    1. to attend to, to look out for, to take Ja iii.151 (= gaṇhati). causative nibodheti to waken, at Thag 1, 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti
    2. ni + bodhati
    Nibbatta
    1. (past participle )

      1. existing, having existed, being reborn Vin i.215 (n. bījaṁ phalaṁ fruit with ‣Seed) Ja i.168 Ja ii.111 Pv-a 10 (niraye) 35 (petayoniyaṁ), 100 (pubbe n
      • ṭhānato paṭṭhāya) Mil 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚ & utu˚)
      • cp. abhi˚
      Sanskrit nirvṛtta, nis + vaṭṭa, past participle of nibbattati
    Nibbattaka
    adjective
    1. producing, yielding Pv-a 26 (phala ˚ṁ kusalakammaṁ), 126 (= sukha˚ = sukhāvaha)
    cp. nibbatta
    Nibbattati
    1. to come out from (cp. English turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex-ist (= nir-vatt) Dhp 338 Pv i.11 (nibbattate) Thag-a 259 (= jāyati) Dhp-a iii.173 Pv-a 8 (= uppajjati) 71 (identical); absolutive nibbattitvā Ja ii.158 (kapiyoniyaṁ) Pv-a 68 Pv-a 78;
    2. aorist nibbatti Ja i.221 Pv-a 14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule).
    3. past participle nibbatta (q.v.)
    4. causative nibbatteti (q.v.) cp. abhi˚
    5. nis + vattati
    Nibbattana
    neuter
    1. growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life Ja ii.105 Pv-a 5 (devaloke n-araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9 67 etc
    abstract from nibbattati
    Nibbattanaka
    adjective
    1. arising, coming out, growing Thag-a 259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā)
    2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth Ja iii.304 (sagge)
    from nibbattana
    Nibbattāpana
    neuter
    1. reproduction Mil 97
    from nibbattāpeti ‣See nibbatteti
    Nibbatti
    feminine
    1. constitution, product; rebirth Ja i.47 Nett 28, 79; Vism 199, 649 Vv-a 10 cp. abhi˚
    Sanskrit nirvṛtti, nis + vatti
    Nibbattita
    adjective
    1. done, produced, brought forth Pv-a 150 (a˚kusalakamma = akata)
    past participle of nibbatteti
    Nibbattin
    adjective
    1. arising, having rebirth, in negative anibbattin not to be born again Ja vi.573
    from nibbatti
    Nibbatteti
    1. to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Mil 218) Nd2 = jāneti (s.v.) Ja i.66 Ja i.140 Ja iii.396 (jhānâbhiññaṁ) Pv-a 76 (jhānāni) 30 Mil 200 Sdhp 470. past participle nibbattita (q.v.) 2nd
    2. causative nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth Dhp-a iii.484 ‣See also nibbattāpana

      • cp. abhi˚
      nis + vatteti, causative of nibbattati
    Nibbaṅka
    adjective
    1. not crooked, straight Dhp-a i.288
    nis + vanka
    Nibbajjeti
    1. to throw away, to do without, to avoid Thag 1, 1105
    nis + vajjeti
    Nibbana

    adjective

    1. without forest, woodless Ja ii.358
    • [an abstract from nibbāna ‣See nibbāna I. cp. vana2. Frequently nibbāna as variant reading instead of nibbana without cravings Snp 1131 (nikkāmo nibbano) Dhp 283 (nibbanā
    • plural ) Vv 5014 (better reading nibbāna, in phrase “vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ,” as found at AN iii.346 Thag 1, 691 although the latter has nibbanaṁ in text) explained by “nittaṇhabhāvaṁ nibbānam eva upagataṁ Vv-a 213
    • Sanskrit nirvana
  • Nibbanatha
    adjective
    1. free from lust or cravings Si.180, 186 (so 'haṁ vane nibbanatho visallo) Thag 1, 526 Dhp 344 Dāvs i.18
    nis + vanatha
    Nibbasana
    adjective
    1. no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) SN ii.202 SN ii.221
    nis + vasana
    Nibbahati
    1. to stretch out Ja iii.185 (asiṁ); to pull out Ja v.269 (jivhaṁ = jivhaṁ balisena note 275) ‣See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti
    nis + bahati
    Nibbāti
    instrumental to cool off (literally & figuratively), to get cold to become passionless Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṁ padīpo = vijjhāyanti; yathâyaṁ padīpo nibbuto evaṁ nibbanti Kp-a 194, 195), 915 (kathaṁ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu = rāgaṁ etc. nibbāpeti Nd1 344) Ja iv.391 (pāyāsaṁ) ‣See also parinibbāti (e.g. Vb 426). ‣See nibbuta etymology; influenced in meaning by Sanskrit nirvāti, nis + vāti to blow, i.e. to make cool ‣See vāyati & nibbāpeti
    Nibbāna
    neuter
    • I. Etymology. Although nir + “to blow". (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period ‣See nibbāpeti, we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where is fused with vṛ; in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ; (to cover), and not to (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q.v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis + ‣See vāyati refers only to the (non-emittance of an odour, which could never be used for a meaning of “being exhausted”; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis + vana ‣See nibbana For Buddhaghosa’s definition of nibbāna ‣See e.g. Vism 293-The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning)
    • health, the sense of bodily well-being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness)

  • The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha; lust, ill-will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning).; 4. the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation victory and peace, salvation, bliss.

    1. II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach name is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N is realised in one’s heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard
    • AN very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, “Die buddhistische Versenkung” (München2 1922), past participle 36
    1. -42, where also the main literature on the subject is given
    • name is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha’s own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to
    • passive from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is “no measure” (i.e. no dimension): “atthangatassa na pamāṇam atthi … yena naṁ vajju: taṁ tassa n’ atthi” Snp 1076 The simile in v.1074: “accī yathā vāta-vegena khitto atthaṁ paleti, na upeti sankhaṁ evaṁ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaṁ paleti, na upeti sankhaṁ”). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e.g. accutaṁ ṭhānaṁ, pāraṁ amataṁ padaṁ, amata (& nibbāna-) dhātu
    • It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i.e ‣Seeing in name a definite; state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i.e ‣Seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted loc. cit. p. 41) describes it, “only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment however, a positive item in most pronounced form
    • We may also quote Rh. Davids’ words: “One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them-for they are not synonyms-emphasising one or other phase of this many-sided conception-the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, ʻ the state of him who is worthy ʼ; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the ʻ dying out, ʼ that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins-sensuality, ill-will, and stupidity (Saṁyutta iv.251, 261), (Early Buddhism
    • past participle 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 loc. cit.): “Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but ʻ eternal salvation, ʼ after which the heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth.”
    1. The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg-aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna)
    • Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books ‣See Ja i.212 Mil 346 Mil 410 Snp-a 28 Sdhp 584. For the older view ‣See M i.487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel) Snp 1094
    • (akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ Nibbānaṁ iti) SN i.236
    • (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno) SN ii.85
    • (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa-upādāno devānaṁ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping SN iv.102 pāragū sabbadhammānaṁ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162 pāragato jhāyī anup˚ nibbuto, a philosopher freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth AN iv.290 (etc ‣See nibbuta). dāvaggi-nibbānaṁ the going out of the jungle fire Ja i.212
    • aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out MN i.487
    • aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Mil 304
    • nibbuto ginī my fire is out Snp 19 The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto ’smi nibbuto Vin i.8 Pv i.87
    • sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin ii.156 AN i.138
    • nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) AN ii.208 AN v.65
    • anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel Thag-a 154 (Ap 153)
    • nibbanti dhīrā yath’ āyaṁ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Snp 235 This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiṁ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya SN ii.86 Thag 2, 116
    • (padī
    • passive eva nibbānaṁ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiṁ okassayāmi (= dīpavaṭṭiṁ ākaḍḍhemi Thag-a 117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha; 71; Mrs. Rhys Davidsavids, Buddhism 176; Neumann Lieder 298). pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṁ like the going out of a lamp SN i.159
    1. B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to (1) the; fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness = peace) (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removedic
    1. -1. Fuel = cause of rebirth & suffering; āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free SN v.29
    • sāvakā āsavānaṁ khayā viharanti AN iv.83
    • kodhaṁ pahatvāna parinibbiṁsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) AN iv.98
    • āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Snp 370
    • saggaṁ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dhp 126
    • nibbānaṁ adhimuttānaṁ atthaṅgacchanti āsavā Dhp 226
    • āsavānaṁ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto Iti 49
    • vimutti-kusuma-sañchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Thag 1, 100

      • kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Snp 1131
      • kilesa-(nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa-nibbānass’ āpi anupādā parinibbānass’ āpi santike Dhp-a i.286
      • upādānaṁ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa-nibbānena nibbutā Dhp-a iv.194
      • nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaṁ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saṁvattati SN ii.223
      • nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaṁ attano Snp 940
      • rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ SN i.136≈; desento virajaṁ dhammaṁ nibbānaṁ akutobhayan SN i.192
      • yo rāgakkhayo (dosa˚ … moha˚ …): idaṁ vuccati nibbānaṁ SN iv.251 same of Amata SN v.8
      • chandarāga-vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Snp 1086
      • kusalo ca jahati pāpakaṁ rāgadosamoha-kkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85 ye 'dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṁ bhavarāgânusayañ ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 5324
      • vana sabba-saṁyojan’ atītaṁ vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ AN iii.346 nikkhantaṁ vānato ti nibbānaṁ Kp-a 151; taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato nibbānaṁ Snp-a 253
      1. 2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya Iti 27 ajaraṁ amaraṁ khemaṁ pariyessāmi nibbutiṁ Ja i.3
      • acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaṁ Vv 514
      • accuta (stable) patthayaṁ accutaṁ padaṁ SN iii.143 chandarāga-vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Snp 1086
      • nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ kāmehi nekkhammarataṁ AN iii.346

        • pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaṁ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162 (cp AN iv.290 with tiṇṇo pāragato)
        • santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiṁ ñatvā Snp 933 santimaggaṁ eva brūhaya nibbānaṁ sugatena desitaṁ Dhp 285 s. = acala Vv-a 219
        • samatha (allayment, quietude) sabbasankhārasamatho nibbānaṁ SN i.136
        • sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaṁ Snp 235
        1. 3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut-atto Snp 456
        • thiṭatto frequent, e.g. parinibbuto ṭh˚ Snp 359
        • danto parinib˚ ṭh˚ Snp 370

          • (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347 (for abhinibbutatto Snp 343)-(c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaṁ hadayasmiṁ opiya SN i.199
          • mātuhadayaṁ nibbāyate Ja i.61
          • nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ (quench the fever of my heart Mil 318
          • (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade Ja i.27
          • disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 5014
          1. 4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaṁ aññāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. SN i.24
          • nibbanti dhīrāSnp 235
          • sabbābhibhū dhīro sabbagantha-ppamocano Iti 122 Recognition of anicca (transitoriness ‣See nicca). aniccasaññī … bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh’ eva dhamme nibbānaṁ AN iv.353

            • paññā. nibbānaṁ ev’ ajjhagamuṁ sapaññā SN i.22 n’ abhirato paññā SN i.38
            • paṇḍita & nipaka; . anupubbena n˚ṁ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162 nipakā asesaṁ parinibbanti Iti 93
            • vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaṁ bhecchati vijjaṁ uppādessati n˚ṁ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna AN i.8
            • idh’ aññāya parinibbāti anāsavo AN iii.41
            • sabb’ āsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vb 426
            1. 5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaṁ adhigantabbaṁ sabba-g˚-pamocanaṁ SN i.210 Iti 104 similarly Iti 122 ‣See above. gabbhaseyyā (rebirth) na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaṁ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 5324-nīvaraṇa (obstacles). pañca n˚ anibbāna-saṁvattanikā SN v.97
            • punabbhava (rebirth) nibbāpehi mahārāgaṁ mā ḍayhittho punappunaṁ SN i.188 vibhavañ ca bhavañ ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Snp 514 bhava-nirodha nibbānaṁ SN ii.117
            • saṅkhārā (elements of life). sabbasaṅkhāra-samatho nibbānaṁ SN i.136 name = sabbasankhārā khayissanti AN iii.443
            • saṁyojanāni (fetters). sabbas-âtītaṁ vanā Nibbānaṁ āgataṁ AN iii.346 s. pahāya n˚ṁ sacchikarissati AN iii.423
            • saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā antarā-parinibbāyī hoti SN v.69
            1. III. Nibbāna : its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of name nibbānass’ eva santike, near name, sure of name): SN i.33 (yassa etādisaṁ yānaṁ … sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching name); iv.75 AN ii.39
            • abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one “catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaññutā jāgariyā”); iii.331 (identical with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); ii.40 = It 40 (identical with appamāda-rato) Snp 822

              • 2. Steps and Means to name: nibbāna-sacchikiriyā, attainment of name, is maṅgalaṁ uttamaṁ & to be achieved by means of; tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna-dassanaṁ Snp 267
              • brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n
              • parāyanā (leading to name SN iii.189 cp. v.218; also called n
              • ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid. AN ii.26 = It 28, cp. Iti 29 (nibbān'-ogadha-gāminaṁ b˚ṁ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula “nibbidā virāgo vimutti.. vimuttasmiṁ vimuttaṁ iti ñāṇaṁ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc. (i.e. no more possibility of birth) SN ii.124 = iv.86. dhamma : Buddha’s teaching as the way to name “dhammavaraṁ adesayi n
              • gāmiṁ paramaṁ hitāya Snp 233 ahaṁ sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desemi sattānaṁ visuddhiyā … n˚assa sacchikiriyāya. AN v.194 cp. 141; pubbe dh
              • ṭhiti-ñāṇaṁ pacchā nibbāne ñāṇan ti SN ii.124
              • magga : Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga) Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati; nibbānassa hi so maggo SN i.217
              • ekāyano ayaṁ maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā … N˚assa sacchikiriyāya DN ii.290 SN v.167 SN v.185 bhāvayitvā sucimaggaṁ n˚-ogadha-gāminaṁ … Vb 426 ādimhi sīlaṁ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṁ vibhāvaye, pariyosānamhi nibbānaṁ.. DN-a i.176
              • name
              • gamanaṁ maggaṁ : tattha me nirato mano “my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna SN i.186
              • name
              • gāminī paṭipadā AN iv.83 (the path to salvation). cp. §§ 4 & 7
              • ; 3. The Search for name or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya-paramā lābhā nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ, aṭṭhangiko ca maggānaṁ khemaṁ amata-gāminaṁ “name is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia” MN i.508 cp. Dh 204 (“the fullest gain is for health etc.; name is the highest happiness” Dhp-a iii.267). Similarly: khantī paramaṁ tapo titikkhā, n˚ṁ paramaṁ vadanti buddhā DN ii.49 = Dh 184; n˚ṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ : Dhp 204 = Sn 257 = J iii.195; identical: Dhp 203 jhānaṁ upasampajja.. okkamanāya n.˚assa AN iv.111f.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu … ārakā hoti N˚ā AN i.281 n˚ṁ ajjhagamuṁ sapaññā SN i.22 devalokañ ca te yanti.. anupubbena n˚ṁ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162
              • n˚ṁ abhikaṅkhati SN i.198
              • abhipassati AN i.147 tiṇṇakathankatho visallo n
              • ābhirato Snp 86 bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṁ sītibhāvaṁ sacchikātuṁ … paṇītâdhimutto hoti ṇ-ābhirato ca AN iii.435
              • n
              • ābhirato … sabbadukkhā pamuccati SN i.38
              • n
              • ogadhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vussati n
              • parāyaṇaṁ n
              • pariyosānaṁ SN iii.189 = v.218 n˚ṁ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, Ja i.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by various similes in the phrase; n
              • ninna, ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra, e. g SN v.75 = 134 = 137 = 190; v.244 AN v.75 AN v.134 AN v.190 AN v.244 291 Vv 8442 Saddahāno arahataṁ dhammaṁ n. pattiyā sussūsā labhate paññaṁ appamatto SN i.214 Snp 186 cp. SN i.48 Gotamo n
              • paṭisaṁyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti SN i.214 = 192 = 210 Ud 80 n˚ṁ pariyesati AN ii.247
              • n
              • pariyosānā sabbe dhammā. AN v.107 n
              • poṇaṁ me mānasaṁ bhavissati, saṁyojanā pahāṇaṁ gacchanti AN iii.443 odhunitvā malaṁ sabbaṁ patvā n
              • sampadaṁ muccati sabba-dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā AN iv.239 nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n˚ṁ attano Snp 940 cp. 1061
              • 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaṁ AN ii.24 = It 122 accutaṁ padaṁ (careyya āditta-sīso va patthayaṁ a. p. SN iii.143 Snp 1086 pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṁ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 514
              • amataṁ AN ii.247 MN iii.224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a ˚assa dātā) Mil 319 Vv 6427 (apāpuranto a ˚assa dvāraṁ) Vv-a 85 (a-rasa) Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga = nibb˚-gāminī paṭipadā) amosadhammaṁ Snp 758
              • khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ SN iv.175 SN i.189 = Sn 454 Thag 2, 350 (˚ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaṁ sukhaṁ) MN i.508 (+ amatagāminaṁ) AN ii.247 (yogakkhemaṁ anuttaraṁ); same at AN iii.294 Iti 27 Dhp 23
              • taṇhakkhaya Vv 735 ṭhānaṁ dud- dasaṁ SN i.136 (= sabba-sankhāra -samatho); dhuvaṁ (q.v.); niccaṁ Kvu 121; nekkhammaṁ AN i.147 (˚ṁ daṭṭhu khemato … nibbānaṁ abhipassanto) Vv 8442
              • sabba-gantha-pamocanaṁ (deliverance from all ties) SN i.210 SN ii.278 (sabbadukkha˚) Iti 222 = AN ii.24
              • yathābhūtaṁ vacanaṁ SN iv.195
              • yathāsukhaṁ (the Auspicious) AN iv.415f.; (chanda-) rāga vinodanaṁ Snp 1086
              • rāgakkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚) SN v.8
              • rāgavinayo (dosa˚, moha˚) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 5021 = Sn 204 (chandarāga-viratto bhikkhu paññāṇavā ajjhagā amataṁ santiṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ) Vv-a 219 (= acala); santimaggaṁ eva brūhaya n˚ṁ Sugatena desitaṁ Dhp 285 = Nett 36; sandiṭṭhikaṁ akālikaṁ etc. AN i.158
              • samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo SN iii.109
              • sassataṁ Kvu 34; suvatthi Snp 235
              • 5. Name is realisable in this world, i.e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): SN ii.18 = 115 = iii.163 = iv.141 (diṭṭha-dh-npatta) MN ii.228 AN iv.353 = 358, cp. 454
              • 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n˚ṁ iti vuccati SN i.39 = Sn 1109; as sabba-saṅkhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin i.5 SN i.136 AN ii.118 = iii.164; iv.423; v.8, 110, 320, 354 akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ n˚ṁ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu-parikkhayaṁ Snp 1094
              • bhavanirodho n˚ṁ ti SN ii.117 AN v.9
              • rāga-kkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚ SN iv.251 = 261; virāgo nirodho n˚ṁ in typical & very frequently exposition at Nd; 2 = SN i.136≈ ‣See also vana cp. the following: taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato n˚ṁ Snp-a 253 nikkhantaṁ vānato ti n˚ṁ Kp-a 151; kilesa-n ass’ âpi anupādā parinibbānass’ âpi santike yeva Dhp-a i.286 (on Dhp 32)
              • 7. Name as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state saṁvattati. The following phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very frequently; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as; "upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati,” with reference to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin i.10 = SN iv.331 = v.421; of satta bojjhangā at SN v.80 and in a fuller form as “ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above” at DN i.189 (negative); ii.251 (of brahmacariyaṁ), 285 iii.130 (sukhallikânuyogā, negative) 136 (avyākataṁ, negative) SN ii.223 (brahmacariya); v.82 (satta bojjhangā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438 AN iii.83 AN iii.326f.; etc
              • cp. n-saṁvattanika SN v.97 (upekhāsambojjhanga) Nd2 281 (negative of tamo). 8. Name as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Frequently is the combination of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at SN ii.18 Vin iii.20 = 111 AN ii.118 = iii.164 = iv.423 = v.8 = Nd2 under Nibbāna AN ii.34 = It 88 (dhammānaṁ aggaṁ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa-vinayo ālaya-samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaṁ), cp. Vin iii.20≈. Similarly SN i.192 (Sugataṁ payirupāsati desentaṁ virajaṁ dhammaṁ nibbānaṁ akutobhayaṁ). 9. Various Characterisations & Similes; (cp. above II AN 4 & 5). sukkâbhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ n˚ṁ abhijayati DN iii.251 AN iii.384f.; aniccā sabbe sankhārā dukkhā 'nattā ca sankhātā: nibbānañ c’ eva paññatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin v.86 On anicca anattā in rel. to name ‣See also S iv.133 sq. AN iv.353 dukkhato & sukhato n˚ṁ samanupassati AN iii.442 On comparison with a lamp ‣See e.g. SN i.159 = DN ii.157 Thag 1, 906 (pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṁ vimokkho cetaso ahū), AN iv.3 (pajjotass’ eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso) Snp 235 (… te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṁ padīpo)
              1. ˚abhirata fond of name (cp. IIi.3) SN i.38 AN iii.435 Snp 86 (visalla +)
              2. ˚ogadha merging into name (of brahmacariya) SN iii.189 SN v.218 AN ii.26 = It 28 Vb 426 cp. amatogadha. AN v.107
              • ˚gamana (magga; cp. IIi.2 leading to name DN ii.223 SN i.186 SN i.217 AN iv.83 (dhamma: SN v.11 Snp 233
              • ˚dhātu the sphere or realm of name always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n

                • dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin ii.239 DN iii.135 Iti 38 121; Ps i.101; cp. rāgavinayo n
                • dhātuyā adhivacanaṁ SN v.8 ‣See parinibbāyin
                • ˚ninna (+ ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra; cp. IIi.3) converging into name AN iii.443 Vv 8442 & passim
                • ˚paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. IIi.2) relating or referring to name SN i.114 = 192 = 210 Ud 80
                • ˚patta having attained name (diṭṭha-dhamma˚ ‣See above IIi.5) SN ii.18 = 114 iii.163
                • ˚patti attainment of name SN i.48 SN i.214 = Sn 186 -pada = Nibbāna ‣See pada 3 Snp 204
                • ˚pariyosāna ending in name having its final goal in name SN iii.189 SN v.218 AN v.107
                • ˚saṁvattanika conducive to name; contributing toward the attainment of name SN v.97 Nd2 281 (a˚); cp. above IIi.7
                • ˚sacchikiriyā realisation of name (identical with ñāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above IIi.2) Snp 267 cp. also DN ii.290 SN v.167 AN iii.423 v.141
                • ˚saññā perception of name AN iii.443
                • ˚sampatti successful attainment of name Kh viii.13
                • ˚sampadā the blessing of the attainment of name AN iv.239
  • Nibbāpana
    neuter
    1. means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching SN i.188 (cittaṁ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaṁ brūhi = allayment of the glow) AN iv.320 (celassa n˚āya chandaṁ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth) Mil 302 (jhāyamāno n˚ṁ alabhamāno) 318 (pariḷāha˚)
    abstract from nibbāpeti
    Nibbāpita
    adjective
    1. extinguished, put out, quenched Ja iii.99 (= nicchuddha)
    past participle of nibbāpeti
    Nibbāpeti
    1. to extinguish, put out, quench SN i.188 (mahārāgaṁ) Iti 93 (rāg-aggiṁ; & nibbāpetvā aggiṁ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiṁ nijjāleti Ja vi.495 Pv i.85 (vārinā viya osiñcaṁ sabbaṁ daraṁ nibbāpaye) Mil 304 (aggikhandhaṁ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.) 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ), 410 (megho uṇhaṁ n.) Dhp-a ii.241 (fire); Sdhp 552 (bhavadukkh aggiṁ)
    2. to cleanse, purify (cittaṁ, one’s heart Vism 305.
    3. past participle nibbāpita ‣See also nibbāpana
    Sanskrit ni(r)vārayati, causative of ni(r)varati, influenced in meaning by nirvāpayati. causative of nirvāti make cool by blowing (e.g. RV x.1613) ‣See nibbuta on etymology
    Nibbāyati
    1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up = to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with reference to fire or heat or (figuratively) burning sensations ‣See nibbāna II. A end:; aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya SN ii.85 (opposite jāleyya); do. of telaṁ & vaṭṭiṁ paṭicca; telappadīpo n. SN ii.86 = iii.126 = iv.213 = v.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaṁ: ayaṁ … aggi nibbuto MN i.487 AN iv.70
    2. papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. Ja i.212
    3. mātuhadayaṁ n. Ja i.61
    4. aggi upādāna-sankhayā n. Mil 304
    5. aorist nibbāyi Sanskrit niravāri
      1. Ja i.27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); vi.349 (cooled down)
      • to go out (of light) Vism 430 (dīpā nibbāyiṁsu the lights went out) Thag-a 154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out) ‣See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana
    Sanskrit ni-(or nir-)vriyate, passive of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intransitive to cease to blow ‣See on etymology & Pāli derivation nibbuta
    Nibbāyin
    1. ‣See pari˚
    Nibbāhana
    adjective-noun
    1. leading out, removing, saving; neuter removal, clearance, refuge, way out Mil 119 Mil 198 Mil 295 Mil 309 Mil 326 (˚magga). Miln. the only references! from nibbāheti
    Nibbāhati
    to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Mil 188
    1. -2nd causative nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin ii.159 (hiraññaṁ) iii.43 ‣See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati
    2. nis + vahati
    Nibbikappa
    1. distinction, distinguishing Vism 193
    nis + vikappa
    Nibbikāra
    adjective
    1. steady, unchanged, steadfast; persevering Ja i.66 Pv-a 178 Pv-a 253 (+ nicca) Snp-a 189 497; Vism 311
    nis + vikāra
    Nibbicikicchā
    feminine
    1. surety, reliance, trust SN ii.84 SN v.221 (= nikkankhā) Vv-a 85 (= ekaṁsikā)
    nis + vicikicchā
    Nibbijjhati
    1. to pierce, transfix, wound SN v.88 (+ padāleti); Sdhp 153 (patodehi). absolutive nibbijjha Snp 940 (= paṭivijjhitvā Nd1 420)

      • pp nibbiddha. cp. abhi˚
      nis + vijjhati, vyadh
    Nibbiṭṭha
    1. (past participle )

      1. gained, earned Vin iv.265 Snp 25 Snp-a 38
      nis + viṭṭha, of nibbisati
    Nibbiṇṇa
    adjective
    1. tired of, disgusted with (c. instrumental or locative ), wearied of, dissatisfied with, “fed up” Ja i.347 Ja vi.62 Thag 2, 478 (= viratta Thag-a 286) Dhp-a i.85 (˚hadaya) Vv-a 207 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 159 (tattha-vāsena n-mānaso tired of living there) 272 (˚rūpa), 283 (˚rūpa, tired of: purohite)
    2. Sanskrit nirviṇṇa, past participle of nibbindati
    Nibbidā
    feminine
    1. weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment name is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna ‣See nibbāna II B 1 & occurs frequently together with; virāga, vimutti & nibbāna; in the formula: etaṁ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya … sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati “this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna,” e.g. at DN i.189 SN v.82 SN v.179 SN v.255 SN v.361 AN iii.83 AN iv.143 AN v.216

      • In other connections Vin i.15 (nibbidāya cittaṁ saṇṭhāsi) DN iii.130f. SN ii.30 SN iii.40 SN iii.179 SN iii.189 SN iv.86, 141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?) AN i.51 AN i.64 AN iii.19 AN iii.200 AN iii.325f.; iv.99, 336 v.2 sq., 311 sq. Ja i.97 Ja iv.471 Ja iv.473 Snp 340 Ps i.195 ii.43 sq. Vb 330 Nett 27, 29; Vism 650. cp. abhi˚
      Sanskrit nirvid, feminine (also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Lal. v.300) & nirveda; to nibbindati
    Nibbiddha
    1. in phrase ˚piṅgala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps = nibbiṇṇa?) Ja v.42 (of a giant)
    2. with reference to a road: broken up, i.e. much frequented, busy street Ja vi.276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a-nibbiddha-raccha carriage-road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at Ja vi.276 for which nibbiddha-vīthiyo is the Commentary explanation is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo)
    past participle of nibbijjhati
    Nibbindati
    1. to get wearied of (c. locative ); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind : prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combination with virajjati & vimuccati; (cp nibbāna IIi.2). Vin i.35 SN ii.94 SN iv.86 SN iv.140 AN v.3 Dhp 277f. Iti 33 Ja i.267 Mil 235 Mil 244 Sdhp 612 ppr. nibbindaṁ SN iv.86 Pv-a 36 (nibbinda-mānasa)
    2. absolutive nibbindiya Ja v.121 (˚kārin)

      • B. vid : Pot. nibbide (Burmese variant nibbije) Ja v.368 (= nibbindeyya Commentary );
      • absolutive nibbijjitvā Ja i.82 & nibbijja Snp 448 = SN i.124 (nibbijjâpema = nibbijja pakkameyya Snp-a 393).
      • past participle nibbiṇṇa ‣See also nibbidā
      nis + vindati, vid2
    Nibbiriya
    adjective
    1. lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak Ja iv.131 Pv-a 175 (= alasa, kusīta]
    nis + viriya
    Nibbivara
    adjective
    1. without holes or fissures, without omissions Ja v.429 Vv-a 275 (= atīva sangata)
    nis + vivara
    Nibbisa
    1. earnings, wages Thag 1, 606 = 1003 = Mil 45 (cp. Manu vi.45) Snp-a 38
    to nibbisati
    Nibbisaṅka
    adjective
    1. fearless, not hesitating, undaunted Snp-a 61
    nis + visanka, Sanskrit viśankā
    Nibbisati
    1. to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in past participle anibbisaṁ not finding Thag 2, 159 (= avindanto Thag-a 142) Ja i.76 = Dh 153.
    2. past participle nibbiṭṭha ‣See also nibbisa
    3. nis + visati
    Nibbisaya
    adjective
    1. having no residence, banished, driven from (—˚) Ja ii.401
    nis + visaya
    Nibbisevana
    adjective
    1. not self-indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle Ja ii.210 (dametvā nibbisevanaṁ katvā), 351; v.34, 381, 456; vi.255 Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṁ ujuṁ akuṭilaṁ n. karoti), 295 Vv-a 284 (˚bhava = jitindriya)
    nis + visevana
    Nibbisesa
    adjective
    1. showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar Ja ii.32 Ja vi.355 Mil 249
    nis + visesa
    Nibbujjhati
    1. to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin iii.180 past participle nibbuddha
    2. ni + yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy˚ = niyy˚ = nivv˚ = nibb˚
    Nibbuta

    adjective

    1. (literally) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (figuratively) desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased pleased, happy
    • (a) (literally) aggi anāhāro n. MN i.487 Snp 19 (ginī n. = magga-salila-sekena n. Snp-a 28) Ja iv.391 (anibbute pāyāse) Mil 304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n˚ṁ pathaviṁ) Thag-a 154 (anupādānā dīp’ accī); Kp-a 194 (padīpo n.)
    • (b) (figuratively) combined with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin i.8 MN i.341 AN ii.208 = DN iii.233 = Pug 56 61 AN iv.410 AN v.65 Snp 593 Snp 707 Pv i.87
    • In phrase anupādāya nibbuta : SN ii.279 AN i.162 AN iv.290 = Dh 414 = Sn 638
    • In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno SN i.236 Dhp 406 = Sn 630; aññāya nibbutā dhīrā SN i.24 tadangan SN iii.43 ejânugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto Iti 91 vītataṇho n. Snp 1041 tiṇṇa-sokapariddavo n. Dhp 196 rāg’ aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī Ja i.60 n. veyyākaraṇena Mil 347 upādānānaṁ abhāvena … kilesanibbānena n. Dhp-a iv.194
    • ‣ See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta
    Nibbuta represents Sanskrit nirvṛta (e.g. Avs i.48) as well as nivṛta, both past participle of vṛ; , which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sanskrit itself: (a) Indogermanic ṷer to cover, cover up (Latin aperio = *apa-verio to cover up, Sanskrit varutram upper garment, “cover”) and (b) *ṷel to resolve, roll move (Latin volvo = revolve; Sanskrit vāṇa reed = Latin ulva; Sanskrit ūrmi wave; Pali valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *ṷer is represented in Pali by e.g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *ṷel by āvuta, khandh-āvāra, parivāra vyāvaṭa (busy with = moving about), samparivāreti Thus we gain the two meanings combined and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by Pali nibbuta

    • In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ; (= Pali bbu˚) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sanskrit vārayati vrāyati) or vrā = Pali bbā˚ (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa = *prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi = Sanskrit nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in instrumental nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (
    • causative : to make cease, to stop or cool and further in nibbāna (
    • neuter instrumental abstract) (the dying out)
    Nibbuti
    feminine
    1. allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness Ja i.3 (khemaṁ pariyessāmi n˚ṁ) Snp 228 (nikkāmino n˚ṁ bhuñjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n˚ṁ ñatvā) Nd1 399 Pv i.74 (n˚ṁ n’ âdhigacchāmi = quenching of hunger & thirst) Kp-a 185 (= paṭippassaddha-kilesa-daratha)
    Sanskrit nirvṛti, abstract to nibbuta
    Nibbuddha
    1. wrestling, fist-fight DN i.6 (= mallayuddhaṁ DN-a i.85) Dhs-a 403
    Sanskrit niyuddha, past participle of nibbujjhati
    Nibbuyhati
    1. to be led out to (c. accusative ): susānaṁ Thag 2 468 (= upanīyati Thag-a 284); to be led out of = to be saved SN i.1 cp. RV i.117, 14; vi.62, 6
    2. Sanskrit niruhyate, nis + vuyhati, passive of vahati, cp. nibbāhati
    Nibbusitattā
    (nibbusitattan?)
    1. a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest uneasiness DN i.17
    Sanskrit *nir-vasit-ātman or *nirvasitatvaṁ neuter abstract, to nis-vasati, cp. nirvāsana = nibbisaya
    Nibbecikicchā
    1. = nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd2 185 (opposite savicikicchā)
    Nibbejaniya
    1. at SN i.124 should probably be read as nibbeṭhaniya (rejecting, evading)
    Nibbeṭhana
    neuter
    1. unwinding, figuratively explanation Mil 28
    Sanskrit nirveṣṭana, nis + veṭhana
    Nibbeṭhita
    1. explained, unravelled, made clear Mil 123 (su˚)
    past participle of nibbeṭheti
    Nibbeṭheti
    1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear DN i.54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, Burmese variant nibbedh˚); Pv iv.329 (˚ento = niveṭhīyamāna Pv-a 253 Burmese variant nibbedh˚) Mil 3 Sdhp 153
    2. to deny, reject Vin ii.79 DN i.3 (= apanetabba Commentary ) SN iii.12 (Burmese variant ˚dh˚). 3. to give an evasive answer Vin iii.162
    3. ‣ See also nibbejaniya.
    4. past participle nibbeṭhita, q.v
    Sanskrit nirveṣṭate, nis + veṭheti, to twist round
    Nibbedha

    penetration, insight; adjective: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Frequently in phrase nibbedha-bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with reference to samādhi, saññā etc. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirvedha˚ Divy 50; but also nirbheda˚ Avs ii.181, of kusalamūlāni; explained as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Nett 274

    1. DN iii.251 DN iii.277 AN iii.427 Vb 330 Nett 21, 48, 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, 88 Dhs-a 162
    • Also in nibbedha-gāminī (paññā) Iti 35 & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Mil 155 Mil 233 (pañha); spelt dunniveṭha at Mil 90)
    nis + vedha, to vyadh
    Nibbedhaka
    adjective
    1. piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in feminine nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), applied to paññā (wisdom) DN iii.237 DN iii.268 SN v.197 SN v.199 MN i.356 AN i.45 AN ii.167 iii.152; 410 sq., 416; v.15; Ps ii.201 Nd2 235 3a (+ tikkha-paññā), 415, 689 Ja ii.9 Ja ii.297 Ja iv.267
    2. nis + vedhaka, to vyadh
    Nibbematika
    adjective
    1. not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin ii.65 Dhp-a i.34
    nis + vimati + ka
    Nibbhacceti
    1. to threaten, revile, scorn Ja iii.338
    Sanskrit nirbhartsayati, nis + bhaccheti
    Nibbhaya
    adjective
    1. free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid Ja i.274 Ja iii.80 Ja v.287 Vism 512
    nis + bhaya
    Nibbhujati
    1. to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Mil 253 cp. vi˚
    Sanskrit ni-or nirbhujati, nis + bhujati
    Nibbhoga
    adjective
    1. deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless Ja vi.556 Pv i.12. cp. vi˚
    Sanskrit nirbhoga, nis + bhoga1
    Nibbhoga
    1. bending, contortion Ja ii.264 (oṭṭha˚)
    ni + bhoga2
    Nibyaggha
    1. ‣See nivyaggha
    Nibha
    adjective
    1. shining; like, equal to, resembling (—˚) Ja v.372 Vv 401 Pv iv.312 Vv-a 122 (vaṇṇa˚ = vaṇṇa) Nd2 608
    Sanskrit nibha, to bhāti
    Nibhatā
    feminine
    1. likeness, appearance Vv-a 27
    abstract to nibha
    Nibhā
    feminine
    1. shine, lustre, splendour Vv-a 179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā)
    to nibha
    Nibhāti
    1. to shine Vv-a 179 (= dippati)
    ni + bhāti
    Nimajjhima
    adjective the middle one Ja v.371
    Nimantaka
    adjective-noun one who invites Mil 205
    Nimantana
    neuter
    1. invitation Vin i.58 = ii.175 DN i.166 MN i.77 AN i.295 Ja i.116 (ṇ), 412 Pug 55
    to nimanteti
    Nimantanika
    adjective inviting;
    • neuter name of a Suttanta MN i.331 quoted at Vism 393.

    Nimantita
    1. invited Snp p. 104 Pv-a 22 (bhattena to the meal), 86 (= āmantita), 141
    past participle of nimanteti
    Nimanteti
    1. to send a message, to call, summon, invite, coax (to = c. instrumental Snp 981 (nimantayi aorist, āsanena asked him to sit down) Ja vi.365 Nd2 342 Dhp-a iii.171 (˚ayiṁsu) DN-a i.169 Vv-a 47 (pānīyena invite to a drink) Pv-a 75 Pv-a 95.
    2. past participle nimantita, q.v

      • cp. abhi˚
      Sanskrit nimantrayati, ni + manteti
    Nimitta
    neuter
    1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication DN i.9 (study of omens = n. satthaṁ DN-a i.92 q.v. for detailed explanation) Ja i.11 (caturo nimitte nâddasaṁ) Mil 79 Mil 178 especially as pubba˚; signs preceding an event, portents, warnings, foreshadowings SN v.154 SN v.278 SN v.442 Iti 76 (cp. Divy 193 of the waning of a god) Ja i.48 Ja i.50 (32 signs before birth, some at DN-a i.61), 59 Mil 298 Vism 577. 2. outward appearance, mark, characteristic, attribute phenomenon (opposite essence) DN iii.249 AN i.256 AN iii.319 375 sq.; iv.33, 418 sq. Ja i.420 Ps i.60, 91 sq., 164, 170 ii.39, 64 Vb 193 sq
    2. Mental reflex, image (with ref to jhāna) Vism 123, cp. Dhs-a 167
    3. Specified e. g as following: oḷārika SN v.259 pasādaniya SN v.156 paccavekkhana˚ DN iii.278 Vb 334 bahiddhā-sankhārā Ps i.66 sq.; bāla˚ (opposite paṇḍita˚) MN iii.163 AN i.102 mukha˚ (= face) DN i.80 SN iii.103 SN v.121 AN v.92 AN v.97f. 103; rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc. SN iii.10 MN i.296 Ps i.92 112; samatha˚ DN iii.213 samādhi˚ etc. AN i.256f. subha˚ (& asubha˚) SN v.64 SN v.103f. AN i.3f. 87, 200 v.134; Vism 178 sq. nimittaṁ gaṇhāti to make something the object of a thought, to catch up a theme for reflection Vin i.183 cp. SN v.150f. (˚ṁ uggaṇhāti) MN i.119 (= five sorts of mental images) Nd2 659 Dhs-a 53 (= ākāra) ‣See below n-gāhin & animitta.; nimittaṁ parivajjeti to discard the phenomenal SN i.188 Snp 341
    4. mark, aim: in nimittaṁ karoti to pick out the aim, to mark out Ja v.436 Nd2 235 1d Mil 418 4. sexual organ (cp. lakkhaṇa) Vin iii.129 (n. & a˚, as term of abuse) ‣See also kāṭa & koṭacikā
    5. ground reason, condition, in; nimittena instrumental and nimittaṁ (

      • accusative ) as
      • adverb = by means of, on account of Dhp-a iii.175 instrumental Pv-a 8 Pv-a 97 (jāti-nimittaṁ), 106 (kiṁ n˚ṁ = kissa hetu), 242 (yaṁ n˚ṁ = yato nidānaṁ). gahita-nimittena “by means of being caught” Vism 144 = Dhs-a 116 (read translation 154 accordingly!). adjective nimitta (—˚ caused by, referring to Pv-a 64 (maraṇa-nimittaṁ rodanaṁ)

        • animitta free from marks or attributes not contaminated by outward signs or appearance undefiled, ụnaffected, unconditioned (opposite sa˚) SN i.188 SN iv.225 (phassa), 268, 360 (samādhi) MN i.296 (cetovimutti) AN i.82 AN iii.292 AN iv.78 Vin iii.129 Thag 1, 92 DN iii.219 DN iii.249 Dhp 92 Snp 342 Ps i.60, 91; ii.36, 59 sq (vimokha), 65 sq., 99 Dhs 530 (read a˚ for appa˚) Vism 236 Dhs-a 223 (absence of the 3 lakkhaṇas) Mil 333 Mil 413 Dhp-a ii.172 Thag-a 50 ‣See also Compendium 199 2115. sanimitta SN v.213f. AN i.82
        1. ˚ānusārin following outward signs (= ˚gāhin) AN iii.292 Nett 25
        2. ˚kamma prognostication, prophecy Vin v.172 Vb 353
        • ˚karaṇa = gāhin SN iv.297
        • ˚gāhin “taking signs,” enticed or led away by outward signs entranced with the general appearance, sensuously attracted DN i.70 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.80); iii.225 SN iv.104 SN iv.168 AN ii.16 AN iii.99 AN v.348 Pug 20 24, 58 Dhs 1345 Mil 367 Mil 403 cp. Vism 151, 209
        cp. Sanskrit nimitta, to , although etymology uncertain
    Nimināti
    1. to turn round, change to barter, exchange for (c. instrumental): pres. imperative niminā Ja v.343 (= parivattehi Commentary ); pres. 1st
    2. plural nimimhase Ja ii.369 pot. nimineyya Ja iii.63
    3. future nimissati Ja v.271 453 (devatāhi nirayaṁ);
    4. aorist nimmini Ja iii.63
    5. absolutive niminitvā Milo 279
    6. Sanskrit niminoti in different meaning, the Pali meaning being influenced by ; ni + mināti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sanskrit nimaya barter, change
    Nimisa
    1. winking, shutting the eyes; animisa not winking Dāvs v.26 ‣See also nimesa
    cp. Vedic nimiṣ feminine & nimiṣa nt.
    Nimisatā
    feminine
    1. winking Ja vi.336 (a˚)
    abstract to nimisati
    Nimisati
    1. to wink DN ii.20 (animisanto, not winking; Burmese variant animm˚ Ja iii.96 (ummisati +). cp. nimisatā
    Sanskrit nimiṣati, ni + misati
    Nimīlati
    (& Nimmīlati)
    1. to shut, close (the eyes) Ja i.279 Dhp-a ii.6 (akkhīni nimmīlituṁ nâsakkhi) causative nim(m)īl-eti identical MN i.120 Dhp-a ii.28 (paralokaṁ opposite ummīleti) Ja i.279 Vism 292 (akkhīni ni˚)
    2. ni + mīlati
    Nimugga
    adjective
    1. plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into (—˚) (c. locative Vin iii.106 (gūthakūpe sasīsakaṁ n.) DN i.75 Ja i.4 iii.393 (gūthakalale), 415 Nd1 26 Pug 71 Mil 262 Sdhp 573. Nimujja (nimmujja) cp. Sanskrit nimagna, past participle of nimujjati
    Nimujjā (nimmujjā)
    1. diving, immersion, in compound ummujja-nimujja(ṁ karoti) DN i.78 ‣See ummujjā
    Sanskrit *nimajj-yā
    Nimujjati
    1. to sink down, plunge into (with locative ), dive in, be immersed AN iv.11 Pug 74 Ja i.66 Ja i.70 Ja iii.163 Ja iii.393 (kāmakalale); iv.139;
    2. aorist nimujji Ja ii.293 Pv-a 47 (udake).
    3. causative nimujjeti (so read for nimujjati Ja v.268) & nimujjāpeti to cause to sink or dive, to drown J-iii.133; iv.142 (nāvaṁ)

      • pp nimugga q.v
      Sanskrit nimajjati, ni + mujjati
    Nimujjana
    neuter
    1. diving, ducking; bathing Pv-a 47
    Sanskrit nimajjana
    Nimesa
    1. winking Mil 194
    = nimisa, cp. Vedic nimesa
    Nimokkha
    1. = vimokkha SN i.2 (variant reading SS vi˚, preferable)
    Nimba
    1. the Nimb tree (Azadirachta Indica), bearing a bitter leaf, & noted for its hard wood Vin i.152 (˚kosa), 284 (identical), 201 (˚kasāva) AN i.32 v.212 Vv 3336 (˚muṭṭhi, a handful of name leaves) Ja ii.105 Ja ii.106 Dhp-a i.52 (˚kosa) Dhs-a 320 (˚paṇṇa, the leaf of the name as example of tittaka, bitter taste) Vv-a 142 (˚palāsa) Pv-a 220 (˚rukkhassa daṇḍena katasūla)
    Sanskrit nimba, non-Aryan
    Nimmaṁsa
    adjective
    1. fleshless MN i.58 MN i.364 Pv-a 68
    nis + maṁsa
    Nimmakkha
    adjective
    1. without egotism, not false, not slandering Snp 56 (cp Nd2 356 makkha = niṭṭhuriya ‣See also Snp-a 108 paraguṇa-vināsana-lakkhaṇo makkho)
    nis + makkha, cp. Sanskrit nirmatsara
    Nimmakkhika
    adjective
    1. free from flies Ja i.262 Dhp-a i.59 Nimmajjana (Nimminjana?)
    Sanskrit nirmakṣika
    Nimmajjana (Nimmiñjana?)
    1. a kind of (oil-)cake Vv 3338 (nimmajjani = tilapiññāka Vv-a 147) Pv i.1010 (˚miñjana, Burmese variant ˚majjani) Pv-a 47 (doṇi˚)
    *mṛd-yana? perhaps nonAryan
    Nimmathana
    neuter
    1. crushing Ja iii.252 Vism 234 (sattu˚) Dhp-a iii.404 Vv-a 284
    nis + mathana
    Nimmatheti
    1. to crush out, suppress, destroy Ja i.340 cp. abhimatthati
    nis + matheti
    Nimmadana
    neuter
    1. touching, touch, crushing, subduing AN ii.34 (mada-nimmadana, crushing out pride; may, however, be taken as nis + mada of mad “de-priding,” literally disintoxication); Bu i.81; Vism 293
    to nimmādeti
    Nimmadaya
    adjective
    1. suppressible DN ii.243
    Sanskrit nirmṛdya, gerundive of nimmadeti
    Nimmaddana
    neuter
    1. touching, crushing Mil 270 (na vāto hattha-gahaṇaṁ vā nimmaddanaṁ vā upeti the wind cannot be grasped)
    nis + mṛd
    Nimmanussa
    neuter
    1. void of men, absence of men Ja iii.148
    nis + manussa + ya
    Nimmala
    adjective
    1. free from impurity, stainless, clean, pure AN iv.340 Dhp 243 Nd2 586; Vism 58 Sdhp 250. Nimmata-pitika
    nis + mala
    Nimmāta-pitika
    adjective
    1. one who has neither mother nor father, an orphan Dhp-a ii.72
    nis + māta-pitika
    Nimmātar
    1. maker, builder, creator DN i.18 DN i.56 (in formula: brahmā.. kattā nimmātā …)
    Sanskrit nirmātṛ, agent noun of nimmināti
    Nimmādeti
    1. to crush, subdue humiliate; insult DN i.92 (variant reading ˚maddeti; = DN-a i.257 nimmadati nimmāne karoti), 93, 96
    either = Sanskrit nirmṛdayati mṛd or *nirmādayati to nirmada. free from pride = nirmāna
    Nimmāna1
    neuter
    1. measuring; production, creation, work; issara-n-hetu caused by God MN ii.122 AN i.173 Vb 367
    • name

      • ratī devā a class of devas, e.g. at DN i.218 Iti 94 Vism 225 DN-a i.114 Thag-a 169 Vv-a 149 cp. (para-) nimmita
      Sanskrit nirmāṇa ‣See nimmināti
    Nimmāna2
    adjective
    1. free from pride, humble DN-a i.257
    Sanskrit nirmāna, nis + māna
    Nimmāniyati
    1. to be abased, to be mocked Vin ii.183
    passive to nimmāna, of nis + māna
    Nimmita
    (adjective past participle )
    1. measured out, planned, laid out; created (by supernatural power iddhi); measured, stately DN i.18 DN i.56 (iddhiyā pi DN-a i.167), 219 (Su˚ devaputta. proper name), ibid. (Paranimmitavasavattī devā a class of devas, literally “created by others, but also possessed of great power: Vv-a 79 80); also one of the 5, or the 3 spheres (kāmûpapattiyo) in the kāmaloka, viz. paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā, nimmānarati˚ (or nimmita˚), paranimmita˚. Iti 94 Dhs 1280 (cp. kāma) DN iii.218 Ja i.59 Ja i.146 (kāyo n’ eva deva˚ na brahma˚) 232, Nd2 202a, also under pucchā; Pali ii.119 (su˚, well constructed i.e. symmetrical); Vism 228 (Mārena nimmitaṁ Buddharūpaṁ) Vv-a 36 (= mitaṁ gacchati vāraṇo), 79 Thag-a 69 70 Mil 1 Mil 242 ‣See also abhinimmita
    past participle of nimmināti
    Nimmināti
    1. to measure out, fashion, build, construct form; make by miracle, create, compose produce, lay out, plan, aorist nimmini Ja i.232 Pv-a 245 Dhp-a iv.67 absolutive nimminitvā Ja i.32 Vv-a 80 & nimmāya Vv 163
    2. past participle nimmita ‣See also nimmātar and nimmāna. cp. abhi˚
    3. cp. Sanskrit nirmimīti & nirmāti, nis + mināti,; ; cp. nimināti
    Nimmīleti
    1. ‣See nimīlati
    Nimmūla
    adjective
    1. without root, rootless Ja vi.177
    nis + mūla
    Nimmoka
    1. the slough or castoff skin of a snake Pv-a 63
    Sanskrit nirmoka from nis + moceti
    Niya
    adjective
    1. one’s own Snp 149 (˚putta = orasaputta Kp-a 248); niyassakamma at AN i.99 & Pv; iv.113 (variant reading Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q.v.)
    Sanskrit nija, q.v.
    Niyaka
    adjective
    1. one’s own Thag 2, 469 Thag-a 284 Dhs-a 169 337 DN-a i.183 Vb 2 Vism 349
    = niya
    Niyata
    adjective
    1. restrained, bound to, constrained to, sure (as to the future ), fixed (in its consequences), certain, assured, necessary DN ii.92 (sambodhiparāyanā), 155; iii.107 Snp 70 (= ariyamaggena niyāmappatta Snp-a 124 cp. Nd2 357) Dhp 142 (= catumagga niyamena n. Dhp-a iii.83) Ja i.44 (bodhiyā) Pug 13 16 63; Kvu 609 sq. Dhs 1028f. (micchatta˚ etc.; cp. Dhs. translation 266, 267), 1414, 1595 Vb 17 24, 63, 319 324 Mil 193 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 168 (˚micchādiṭṭhi) Dhp-a iii.170 Pv-a 211 Discussed in Pts. of Contr. ‣See Index. aniyata ‣See separately
    2. past participle of ni + yam
    Niyati
    feminine
    1. necessity, fate, destiny DN i.53 DN-a i.161 Vv-a 341 Pv-a 254
    cp. Sanskrit niyati, ni + yam
    Niyama
    1. restraint, constraint, training, self-control Mil 116 (yama +) Pv-a 98 (yama +)
    2. definiteness certainty, limitation Dhp-a iii.83 (catumagga˚, variant reading niyāma) Snp-a 124 (niyāma) Dhs-a 154 Pv-a 166 (ayaṁ n. saṁsāren’ atthi: law, necessity)
    3. aniyama indefiniteness choice, generality Dhs-a 57 Vv-a 16 (yaṁ kiñci = aniyame, i.e. in a general sense), 17 (same of ye keci) Pv-a 175 (vā saddo aniyamattho = indefinite)-niyamena instrumental
    4. adverb by necessity, necessarily Pv-a 287
    5. niyamato ablative identical Dhs-a 145 304 (so read). 3. natural law, cosmic order; in Commentarial literature this was fivefold: utu-, bīja-, kamma-, ćitta-, dhammaDN-a on DN ii.11 Dialogues of the Buddha ii.8 Dhs-a 272 trs. 360
    cp. Sanskrit niyama, ni + yam; often confused with niyāma
    Niyamana
    neuter
    1. fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Mil 352 (lakkha-n aiming at the target) Vv-a 22 (visesattha˚); 231, Pv-a 255 (so read for nigamana?)
    Sanskrit niyamana, to niyameti
    Niyameti
    1. to tie down, to fix; explain in detail, exemplify Pv-a 265 Vism 666. past participle niyamita ‣See a˚;
    2. cp. Sanskrit niyamayati, ni + yamati
    Niyāteti
    1. ‣See niyyādeti
    Niyāma
    1. way, way to an end or aim, especially to salvation, right way (sammatta˚); method manner, practice SN i.196 SN iii.225 (sammatta˚) AN i.122 Snp 371 (˚dassin = sammatta-niyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvin Snp-a 365) Nd1 314 (˚avakkanti) Nd2 358 (= cattāro maggā); Ps ii.236 sq. (sammatta˚ okkamati) Pug 13 15 Vb 342
    • niyāmena instrumental adv in this way, by way of, according to Ja i.278 Ja iv.139 414 (suta˚ as he had heard) Dhp-a i.79 Dhp-a ii.9 21 Vv-a 4 Pv-a 260 Kvu trs. 383
    • aniyāmena (‣ See also aniyāmena) without order, aimlessly, at random Ja v.337
    Sanskrit niyama & niyāma
    Niyāmaka1
    adjective
    1. sure of or in, founded in, or leading to, completed in DN i.190 (dhamma-n. paṭipadā, cp. niyamatā)
    either to niyama or niyāma
    Niyāmaka2
    1. ‣ See niyyāmaka ship’s captain Vism 137 (simile)
    Niyāmatā
    feminine
    1. state of being settled, certainty, reliance surety, being fixed in (—˚) SN ii.25 (dhamma˚ + dhammaṭṭhitatā) AN i.286 (identical), Ja i.113 (saddhammassa n assurance of …); Kvu 586 (accanta˚ final assurance)
    abstract to niyāma, influenced in meaning by niyama
    Niyāmeti
    1. to restrain, control, govern, guide Mil 378 (nāvaṁ)
    denominative from niyāma or niyama
    Niyujjati
    1. to be fit for, to be adapted to, to succeed, result, ensue Pv-a 49 (= upakappati)
    passive of niyuñjati
    Niyutta(ka)
    adjective
    1. tied to, appointed to (with locative ), commissioned, ordered Dhs-a 47 Pv-a 20 (janapade), 124 (dānâdhikāre), 127 (dāne)
    2. past participle of niyuñjati
    Niyoga
    1. command, order; necessity. ablative niyogā “strictly speaking” Dhs 1417
    ni + yoga
    Niyojeti
    1. to urge, incite to (with locative ) Vin ii.303 AN iv.32 Pv ii.14 Mil 229 Niyyati = Niyati causative of niyuñjati
    Niyyati = Nīyati
    1. (passive of nayati).

    Niyyatta
    neuter
    1. escape Ja i.215
    cp. Sanskrit niryaṇa
    Niyyāta
    1. (past participle ) = niyyādita MN i.360

    Niyyātana
    neuter
    1. returning, return to (—˚) Ja v.497 (saka-raṭṭha˚); Vism 556 DN-a i.234
    from niyyāti
    Niyyātar
    1. a guide, leader MN i.523f.
    agent noun to niyyāma
    Niyyāti
    1. to go out, get out (especially of saṁsāra) SN v.6 (niyyanti dhīrā lokamhā) Snp-a 212 aorist niyyāsi DN i.49 DN i.108 Ja i.263 Snp 417 Snp 3rd
    2. plural niyyiṁsu. AN v.195
    3. future niyyassati. AN v.194

      • ‣ See also niyyāna & niyyānika
      Sanskrit niryāti, nis + yāti
    Niyyādita
    1. assigned, presented, given, dedicated Pv-a 196 (dhana nī˚). As niyyātita at Vism 115
    past participle of niyyādeti
    Niyyādeti
    (niyyāteti, nīyādeti)
    1. to give (back), give into charge give over, assign, dedicate, to present, denote SN i.131 (niyyātayāmi); iv.181 (sāmikānaṁ gāvo), 194 Ja i.30 66, 496; ii.106, 133 Vv 468 niyyādesi = sampaṭicchāpesi adāsi Vv-a 199); Pv iii.211 (niyātayiṁsu = adaṁsu Pv-a 184); Vism 115 (t) Dhp-a i.70 Dhp-a ii.87 Vv-a 33 67 Pv-a 20 (vihāraṁ nīyādetvā), 25 (= uddissati dadāti), 42 81, 276 (at all Pv-a passages as nī˚). past participle niyyādita cp. similarly paṭiyādeti & paṭiyādita
    2. cp. Sanskrit ni-or nir-yātayati, causative of ni(r)yatati
    Niyyāna
    neuter
    1. going out, departure DN i.9 (= niggamana DN-a i.94)
    2. way out, release deliverance Snp 170 Snp 172 (“magga-saccaṁ bhāvento lokamhā niyyāti” Snp-a 212); Ps i.163, 176; Nett 119 cp. niyyānika
    3. aniyyāna Dhp-a ii.209
    nis + yāna, cp. niyyāti
    Niyyānika
    adjective
    1. leading out (of saṁsāra), leading to salvation, salutary, sanctifying, saving profitable DN i.235 DN i.237 SN i.220 SN v.82 SN v.166 SN v.255 SN v.379f. Ja i.48 (a˚), 106 Dhs 277 339, 505 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation past participle 82 335) Vb 12 19, 56, 319, 324; Nett 29, 31, 63, 83 Dhp-a iv.87

      • Also found in spelling nīyānika e. g AN iii.132 (ariyā diṭṭhi n. nīyāti takkarassa sammādukkha-khayāya) DN-a i.89 (anīyānikattā tiracchanabhūtā kathā). Niyyama(ka)
      to niyyāna
    Niyyāma(ka)
    1. a pilot, helmsman, master mariner, guide Ja i.107 (thala˚); iv.137, 138 Mil 194 Mil 378f.; Dāvs iv.42
    Sanskrit niyāmaka & niryāma(ka). cp. also Pali niyāmaka
    Niyyāsa
    1. any exudation (of plants or trees), as gum, resin, juice, etc. Vism 74 (˚rukkha, one of the 8 kinds of trees), 360 (paggharitan
    • rukkha). cp. nivāyāsa
    cp. Sanskrit niryāsa, Halāyudha 5, 75
    Niyyūha
    1. a pinnacle, turret, gate MN i.253 DN-a i.284 (pāsāda +)
    Sanskrit niryūha (& nirvyūha?), perhaps to; vah
    Niraṅkaroti
    (& nirākaroti)
    1. to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate throw away, ruin, destroy Thag 1, 478 Iti 83 (nirākare) Ja iii.280 = v.498; iv.302; Pv iii.96 (= chaḍḍeti pajahati Pv-a 211) Vv-a 109 past participle (a)nirākata Iti 39
    2. Sanskrit nirākaroti, nis + ā kṛ
    Niraggala
    1. (niraggaḷa) adjective

      1. unobstructed, free, rich in result SN i.76 = It 21 AN ii.43 AN iv.151 MN i.139 Snp 303 Nd2 284 Ca Vv 6431 (= Vv-a 285)
      nis + aggala
    Niraggika
    adjective
    1. without fire Mil 324 (˚okāsa)
    nis + aggi + ka
    Nirajjati
    1. to be thrown out, to be expelled, to lose (with ablative) Ja vi.502 Ja vi.503 (raṭṭhā); Burmese variant nirajhati Commentary ni(g)gacchati Thag 2, 93 (aorist nirajji 'haṁ = na jānim ahaṁ Thag-a, 90. Kern (wrongly) proposes reading virajjhi)
    2. passive of nirajati, nis + ajati, Vedic nirajati to drive out cattle
    Nirata
    adjective
    1. fond of, attached to (—˚) SN i.133 DN-a i.250 Pv-a 5 (duccarita˚), 89, 161 (hitakaraṇa˚)
    past participle of niramati
    Niratta1
    adjective neuter
    1. soulless; view of soullessness or unsubstantiality; thus interpreted (in preference to niratta2) by Commentary on Snp 787 Snp 858 Snp 919‣See following
    Sanskrit *nirātman, nis + attan
    Niratta2
    adjective
    1. rejected, thrown off, given up Snp 1098 Nd2 359. Note. At Snp 787 Snp 858 Snp 919 the interpretation of Nd1 82 248 = 352 and also Buddhaghosa assume a compound of nis + attan (= nirātman) ‣See niratta1
    Sanskrit nirasta, past participle of nirasyati ‣See nirassati
    Nirattha
    adjective
    1. useless, groundless, unproficient, vain (opposite sāttha profitable) Snp 582 (neuter as
    2. adverb ) 585 (niratthā paridevanā) Dhp 41 Ja iii.26 Pv-a 18 (˚bhāva uselessness), 83 (= duḥ)
    3. nis + attha
    Niratthaka
    adjective = nirattha Vv-a 324 Pv-a 18 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 102 etc.
    • feminine ˚ikā Thag-a 258 Mil 20 Sdhp 68.

    Nirantara
    adjective
    1. having no interval, continuous, uninterrupted Pv-a 135 Usually in neuter as adv nirantaraṁ always, incessantly, constantly; immediately at once Dhs-a 168 Pv-a 52 Pv-a 80 Pv-a 107 Pv-a 110 (= satataṁ) 120 Dhp-a i.13
    2. nis + antara
    Niraparādha
    adjective
    1. without offence, guiltless, innocent Ja i.264
    nis + aparādha
    Nirapekkha
    adjective
    1. not heeding, unsuspecting, disregarding, indifferent, reckless Vv-a 27 47 (jīvitaṁ) Pv-a 62 DN-a i.177 Mil 343 (jīvitaṁ)
    nis + apa + īkṣ
    Nirabbuda1
    masculine neuter
    1. a vast number; also name of a hell SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = v.171 (explained at 173 as “seyyathā pi vīsati abbudā nirayā evam eko nirabbudo nirayo”) Ja iii.360 (Commentary vīsati abbudāni ekaṁ nirabbudaṁ)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirarbuda & abbuda 3
    Nirabbuda2
    adjective
    1. free from boils or tumours, healthy (also figuratively) Vin iii.18 (of the Sangha)
    nis + abbuda2
    Niraya
    1. purgatory, hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i.e. kamma ripens = paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals (kāraṇāni) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades & Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most fearful is the; Avīcimahāniraya ‣See Avīci. Names of other purgatories occur frequently in the Jātaka collection, e.g. Kākola vi.247; Khuradhāra v.269 sq.; Dhūma-roruva v.271 Patāpana v.266, 271, 453; Paduma iv.245; Roruva iii.299; v.266; vi.237; Sanghāta v.266; Sañjīva ibid. Sataporisa v.269; Sattisūla v.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned with the other apāyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchānayoni (animal world) & pittivisaya (the; manes), e.g. at Nd1 489 Nd2 517 550 Pv iv.11 Thag-a 282 Pv-a 27f. ‣See apāya
    • There is a great variety of qualifying adjectives connected with niraya, all of which abound in notions of fearful pain, awful misery & continuous suffering, e.g. kaṭuka ghora, dāruṇa, bhayānaka, mahābhitāpa, sattussada etc
    • Descriptions of name in glowing terms of frightfulness are frequently found from the earliest books down to the late Peta-Vatthu, Pañcagati-dīpana & Saddhammopāyana Of these the following may be quoted as characteristic: SN i.152 (10 nirayas) MN iii.183 AN i.141 Snp p. 126 = AN v.173 Nd1 404f. = Nd2 304iii.c Ja iv.4 (Mittavindaka); Vv.52 (Revatī); Pv i.10; iii.10; iv.1 7 Dhp-a i.148
    • See on the whole subject, especially L Scherman, Materialen zur indischen Visionsliteratur, Leipzig 1792; & W. Stede,; Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914, past participle 33–⁠39
    • References: Vin i.227 (apāya duggati vinipāta niraya) DN i.82 DN i.107 (identical) Vin ii.198 (yo kho sanghaṁ bhindati kappaṁ nirayamhi paccati), 204; ii.203 = It 86 DN i.228 (+ tiracchānayoni), 54 (read nirayasate for niriyasate); iii.111 SN iv.126 SN v.356 SN v.450 MN i.73 MN i.285 MN i.308 MN i.334 MN ii.86 MN ii.149 186; iii.166, 203, 209 AN iv.405 AN v.76 AN v.182 AN v.184 Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṁ avaṁsirā), 333, 660 sq., 677 sq. Dhp 126 Dhp 140 Dhp 306 Dhp 311 Dhp 315 Thag 1, 304 (adhammo nirayaṁ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṁ) = Dhs-a 38 = DN-a i.99 = Dhp-a i.22 Thag 2, 456 Iti 12 Ja iv.463 Pug 60 Ps i.83 (Avīci˚) Vb 86 337; Vism 102 Mil 148 Dhp-a i.22 Dhp-a iii.71 Sdhp 7 Sdhp 285
    • ‣ See also nerayika
    1. ˚gāmin adjective leading to purgatory (magga) Snp 277
    2. ˚dukkha the pain of H. Snp 531
    3. ˚pāla a guardian of Pali a devil AN i.138 AN i.141 MN iii.179 Nd1 404 Vv-a 226 Names of guardians (after their complexion) e.g. Kāḷa (black) & Upakāḷa (blackish) Ja vi.248
    4. ˚bhaya the fear of Pali Ja i.168 Vism 392
    5. ˚saṁvattanika conducive to Pali Nd1 489
    6. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit niraya, nis + aya of i = to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirṛti. The popular etymology given by Dhammapāla at Pv-a 53 is “n’ atthi ettha ayo sukhan ti” = there is no good; that given by Buddhaghosa at Vism 427 “n’ atthi ettha assādasaññito ayo” (no refreshment)
    Niravasesa
    adjective
    1. without remainder, complete, inclusive Nett 14, 15, cp. Mil 91 Mil 182
    nis + avasesa
    Nirasana
    adjective
    1. without food or subsistence, poor Ja iv.128
    nis + asana2
    Nirassati
    1. to throw off, despise, neglect Snp 785 Snp 954 Nd1 76 (so read for nidassati, variant reading SS nir˚), 444 Snp-a 522
    • pp niratta2
    cp. Sanskrit nirasyati, nis + assati, as to throw
    Nirassāda
    adjective
    1. without taste, insipid, dull Vism 135. cp. nirāsāda
    nis + assāda
    Nirākaroti
    1. ‣See nirankaroti
    Nirākula
    adjective
    1. unconfused, clear, calm, undisturbed Ja i.17 (v.94)
    nis + ākula
    Nirātaṅka
    adjective
    1. healthy Mil 251 (of paddy)
    nis + ātanka
    Nirādīnava
    adjective
    1. not beset with dangers, not in danger, unimperilled Vin iii.19
    nis + ādīnava
    Nirāma
    adjective
    1. healthy, undepraved, without sin, virtuous Snp 251 Snp 252 (˚gandha nikkilesayoga Snp-a 293), 717 (identical = nikkilesa Snp-a 499)
    nis + āma, cp. nirāmaya
    Nirāmaya
    adjective
    1. not ill, healthy, good, without fault Pv-a 164
    nis + āmaya
    Nirāmisa
    adjective
    1. having no meat or prey; free from sensual desires, disinterested, not material SN i.35 SN i.60 SN iv.219 SN iv.235 SN v.68 SN v.332 AN iii.412 DN iii.278 Vb 195 Vism 71; Sdhp 475 Sdhp 477
    nis + āmisa
    Nirārambha
    adjective
    1. without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i.e. without the killing of animals (of yañña) SN i.76 AN ii.42f.
    nis + ārambha
    Nirālamba
    adjective
    1. unsupported Mil 295 (ākāsa)
    nis + ālamba
    Nirālaya
    adjective
    1. houseless, homeless Mil 244 (= aniketa). At Dhp-a iv.31 as explanation of appossukka. feminine abstract nirālayatā homelessness Mil 162 Mil 276 Mil 420
    2. nis + ālaya
    Nirāsa
    adjective
    1. not hungry, not longing for anything, desireless SN i.12 SN i.23 SN i.141 AN i.107f. Snp 1048 (anigha +), 1078 (identical) Nd2 360 Pug 27 Pv iv.133 (= nittaṇha Pv-a 230) ‣See also amama
    nis + āsā
    Nirāsaṁsa
    adjective
    1. without wishes, expectations or desires, desireless Snp 1090 (Nd2 reading for nirāsaya) Nd2 361 (cp. Dhp-a iv.185 nirāsāsa *nirāsaṁsa, variant reading for nirāsaya)
    nis + āsaṁsa, śaṁs
    Nirāsaṅka
    adjective
    1. without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting Ja i.264 Vism 180
    nis + āsankā
    Nirāsaṅkatā
    feminine
    1. the not hesitating Ja vi.337
    abstract from nirāsanka
    Nirāsattin
    adjective
    1. not hanging on to, not clinging or attached to (c. locative ) Snp 851 (= nittaṇha Snp-a 549) Nd1 221
    2. adjective to past participle āsatta1 with nis
    Nirāsaya
    adjective
    1. without (outward) support, not relying on (outward) things, without (sinful) inclinations Snp 56 (: Nd2 360 b reads nirāsasa) 369, 634, 1090 (Nd2 361 reads nirāsaṁsa) Dhp 410 Dhp-a iv.185 (Burmese variant nirāsāsa; explained by nittaṇha)
    nis + āsaya, from śri
    Nirāsava
    adjective
    1. without intoxication, undefiled, sinless Thag-a 148
    nis + āsava
    Nirāsāda
    adjective
    1. tasteless, yielding no enjoyment Thag 1, 710 cp. nirassāda
    nis + assāda
    Nirāhāra
    adjective
    1. without food, not eating, fasting Ja iv.225 Sdhp 389
    nis + āhāra
    Niriñjana
    adjective
    1. not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 (= acala, āneñja)
    nis + iñjanā, from iñjati
    Nirindhana
    adjective
    1. without fuel (of fire), Thag-a 148 (aggi) Dhp-a i.44 (jātaveda). Niriha(ka)
    nis + indhana
    Nirīha(ka)
    adjective
    1. inactive, motionless, without impulse Thag-a 148 (˚ka) Mil 413 (+ nijjīvata); Vism 484, 594 sq
    nis + īha
    Nirujjhati
    1. to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin i.1 DN i.180f. 215; ii.157 SN iii.93 (aparisesaṁ); iv.36 sq., 60, 98, 184 sq.; 294 402; v.213 sq. AN iii.165f. (aparisesaṁ); v.139 sq. Ja i.180 Pug 64 Sdhp 606. past participle niruddha. cp. nirodha
    2. passive of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni + rundhati
    Niruttara
    adjective
    1. making no reply Pv-a 117
    nis + uttara
    Nirutti
    feminine
    1. one of the Vedāngas ‣See chaḷanga, explanation of words, grammatical analysis etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect way of speaking, expression Vin ii.139 (pabbajitā.. sakāya niruttiyā Buddhavacanaṁ dūsenti) DN i.202 (loka˚, expression) MN iii.237 (janapada˚) SN iii.71 (tayo n-pathā) AN ii.160 (˚paṭisambhidā); iii.201 Dhp 352 (˚padakovida = niruttiyañ ca sesapadesu cā ti catūsu pi paṭisambhidāsu cheko ti attho Dhp-a iv.70 i.e. skilled in the dialect or the original language of the holy Scriptures); Ps i.88 sq.; ii.150 (˚paṭisambhidā) Nd2 563 Dhs 1307 Nett 4, 8, 33, 105 Mil 22 Vism 441 Snp-a 358 Pv-a 97
    Sanskrit nirukti, nis + vac
    Nirudaka
    adjective
    1. without water, waterless MN i.543 Nd2 630
    nis + udaka
    Niruddha
    1. (past participle )

      1. expelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased SN iii.112 Dhs 1038
      past participle of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati
    Nirundhati
    1. ‣See nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. cp. parirundhati
    Nirupakāra
    adjective
    1. useless Ja ii.103
    nis + upakāra
    Nirupaghāta
    adjective
    1. not hurt, not injured or set back Mil 130
    nis + upaghāta
    Nirupatāpa
    adjective
    1. not harassed (burnt) or afflicted (by pain or harm) Thag 2, 512
    nis + upatāpa
    Nirupaddava
    adjective
    1. without affliction or mishap, harmless, secure, happy Ja iv.139 Pv-a 262 (sotthi)
    nis + upaddava
    Nirupadhi
    adjective (in verse always nirūpadhi
    1. free from passions or attachment, desireless controlled Vin ii.156 SN i.194 (vippamutta +) iv.158 AN i.80 AN i.138 (sītibhūta +) Dhp 418 (identical); Thag 1 1250; 2, 320 (vippamutta + ; explained by niddukkha Thag-a 233) Iti 46 50, 58, 62 Snp 33 Snp 34 Snp 642 (sītibhūta +) Pv iv.134 Dhp-a iv.225 (= nirupakkilesa) Pv-a 230
    nis + upadhi, cp. upadhīka
    Nirupama
    adjective
    1. without comparison, incomparable Snp-a 455 (= atitula)
    nis + upama
    Nirumbhati
    1. to suppress, hush, silence Ja i.62 (text nirumhitvā, variant reading SS nirumbhitvā, cp. san-nirumhitvā Vv-a 217)
    Sanskrit ? Trenckner, Note. p. 59 ni + rudh (?)
    Niruḷha
    adjective
    1. grown, risen; usual, customary, common Vv-a 108
    cp. Sanskrit nirūḍha, past participle of niruhati
    Nirussāsa
    adjective
    1. breathless Ja iii.416 Ja iv.121 cp. vi.197; vi.82
    cp. Sanskrit nirucchvāsa, nis + ussāsa
    Nirussukka
    adjective
    1. careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. locative ) Thag-a 282
    2. nis + ussukka
    Niroga
    1. ‣See nīroga
    Niroja
    adjective
    1. tasteless, insipid Ja ii.304 Ja iii.94 Ja vi.561
    nis + oja
    Nirodha
    1. oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling being in general: sankhārā). Buddhaghosa’s explanation of the word is: “ni-saddo abhāvaṁ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṁ dīpeti Vism 495
    • name in many cases is synonymous with nibbāna & parinibbāna; it may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore frequently combined with nibbāna in formula “sabbasankhāra-samatho … virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ,” e. g SN i.136 Iti 88 Nd2 s. nibbāna ‣See nibbāna iii.6. Also in combination with nibbidā, e.g. SN iii.48 SN iii.223 SN iii.163f.v.438
    • The opposite of nirodha is samudaya, cp. formula “yaṁ kiñci samudaya-dhammaṁ sabban taṁ nirodha-dhammaṁ” e.g. Nd2 under sankhārā & passim (a) Vin i.1 10 DN ii.33 DN ii.41 DN ii.57f. 112; iii.130 sq. 136 sq., 226 sq. Ja i.133 Ja ii.9f. 223; iii.59 sq., 163 v.438 MN i.140 MN i.263 MN i.410 AN i.299 AN iv.456 (= āsavānaṁ parikkhaya) Thag 2, 6 (= kilesanirodha Thag-a 13), 158 Iti 46 = Sn 755 (nirodhe ye vimuccanti te janā maccuhāyino) Iti 62 = Sn 754 Snp 731 Snp 1037 Ps i.192; ii.44 sq. 221 Pug 68 Vb 99f. 229; Nett 14, 16 sq.; Vism 372 Vv-a 63 Pv-a 220 (jīvitassa)
    • (b) (as—˚): anupubba DN iii.266 AN iv.409 AN iv.456 abhisaññā˚ DN i.180 asesavirāga˚ SN ii.4 SN ii.12 SN iv.86 SN v.421f. AN i.177 AN ii.158 AN ii.161 upādāna˚ SN iii.14 kāma˚ AN iii.410f.; jāti˚ SN iv.86 taṇhā˚ DN iii.216 dukkha˚ DN iii.136 SN iii.32 SN iii.60 SN iv.4 sq., 14, 384 AN i.177 nandi˚ SN iii.14 SN iv.36 bhava (= nibbāna) SN ii.117 SN iii.14 AN v.9 Ps i.159; sakkāya DN iii.240 SN v.410 AN ii.165f.; iii.246, 325 sq.v.238 sq.; saññāvedayita˚ DN iii.262 DN iii.266 SN iv.217 SN iv.293f.; v.213 sq. AN i.41 AN iii.192 AN iv.306 AN v.209
    1. ˚dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed destructible (usually in formula of samudaya-dhamma ‣See above) Vin i.11 DN i.110 SN iv.47 SN iv.107 SN iv.214 MN iii.280 AN v.143f.
    2. ˚dhammatā liability to destruction SN iv.217
    • ˚dhātu the element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhātus, viz. rūpa, arūpa˚ n˚. DN iii.215 Iti 45 Nett 97
    • ˚saññā perception or consciousness of annihilation DN iii.251f. 283 AN iii.334
    • ˚samāpatti attainment of annihilation Ps i.97, 100 Mil 300 Vism 702
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha
    Nirodhika
    adjective
    1. obstructing, destroying Iti 82 (paññā˚), cp. MN i.115
    from nirodha
    Nirodheti
    1. to oppress, destroy Vism 288 (in explanation of passambheti)
    denominative from nirodha
    Nilaya
    1. a dwelling, habitation, lair, nest Ja iii.454
    from ni +
    Nilicchita
    1. ‣See nillacchita
    Nilīna
    adjective
    1. sitting on (c. locative ), perched; hidden, concealed, lying in wait Ja i.135 Ja i.293 Ja iii.26 Vv-a 230
    2. past participle of nilāyati
    Nilīyati
    1. to sit down (especially for the purpose of hiding), to settle, alight; to keep oneself hidden, to lurk, hide Ja i.222 Ja i.292 Mil 257 Pv-a 178 aorist nilīyi Ja i.158 Ja iii.26 Dhp-a ii.56 Pv-a 274

      • pp nilīna.
      • causative II. nilīyāpeti to conceal, hide (trs.) Ja i.292
      ni + līyati
    Nilīyana
    neuter
    1. hiding Ja v.103 (˚ṭṭhāna hiding-place)
    abstract from nilīyati, cp. Sanskrit nilayana
    Nilenaka
    neuter
    1. settling place, hiding-place, refuge Ja v.102 (so read for nillenaka explained by nilīyanaṭṭhāna p. 103)
    cp. Sanskrit nilayana, from ni +
    Nillacchita
    adjective
    1. castrated Thag 2, 440 written as nilicchita at Ja vi.238 (Burmese variant as gloss niluñcita). explained by “vacchakakāla … nibbījako kato, uddhaṭabījo (p. 239)
    Sanskrit *nirlāñchita, nis + lacchita of nillaccheti
    Nillaccheti
    1. to deprive of the marks or characteristics (of virility), to castrate Thag 2, 437 (= purisa-bhāvassa lacchana-bhūtāni bījakāni nillacchesi nīhari Thag-a 270) ‣See also nillañchaka & nillacchita
    nis + laccheti of lāñch, cp. lakkhaṇa
    Nillajja
    adjective
    1. shameless Sdhp 382. Ni(l)lanchaka
    nis + lajjā
    Ni(l)lañchaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who marks cattle, i.e. one who castrates or deprives of virility Ja iv.364 (spelt tilañchaka in text, but right in variant reading ), explained as “tisūlâdi-ankakaraṇena lañchakā ca lakkhaṇakārakā ti attho” (p 366). cp. nillacchita
    cp. Sanskrit nirlāñchana, of nirlāñchayati = nis + laccheti
    Nillapa
    adjective
    1. without deceit, free from slander AN ii.26 = It 113. Nillaleti & Nilloleti;
    nis + lapa
    Nillāḷeti
    Nilloḷeti;
    1. to move (the tongue) up & down SN i.118 MN i.109 DN-a i.42 (past participle nillāḷita-jivhā) Dhp-a iv.197 (jivhaṁ nilloleti; variant reading nillāleti & lilāḷeti) = J; v.434 (variant reading nillelati for ˚lo˚)
    2. nis + lul, cp. Sanskrit laḍayati & loḍayati
    Nillekha
    adjective
    1. without scratches, without edges (?) Vin ii.123 (of jantāghara)
    nis + lekha
    Nillokana
    adjective-noun
    1. watching out; watchful, careful Ja v.43 Ja v.86 (˚sīla)
    nis + lokana
    Nilloketi
    1. to watch out, keep guard, watch, observe Vin ii.208
    nis + loketi
    Nillopa
    1. plundering, plunder DN i.52 AN i.154 Nd1 144 (˚ṁ harati) Nd2 1997; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 167, 280 DN-a i.159
    cp. Sanskrit nirlopa, nis + lup
    Nillobha
    adjective
    1. free from greed Ja iv.10
    nis + lobha
    Nillolup(p)a
    adjective
    1. free from greed or desires Snp 56 (= Nd2 362 nittaṇha) Ja v.358
    nis + loluppā
    Nivatta
    1. (past participle )

      1. returned, turning away from, giving up, being deprived of, being without (˚- Vin ii.109 (˚bīja) Ja i.203 Vv-a 72
      past participle of nivattati
    Nivattati
    1. to turn back, to return (opposite gacchati), to turn away from, to flee vanish, disappear Vin i.46 DN i.118 Ja i.223 Ja ii.153 iv.142; Snp p. 80; Pv ii.934; iv.107 Snp-a 374 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 161. aorist nivatti Ja ii.3 Pv-a 141
    2. past participle nivatta (q.v.)-
    3. causative I. nivatteti to lead back, to turn from, to make go back, to convert Ja i.203 Vv-a 110 Pv-a 204 (pāpato from sin). cp. upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.
    4. causative II. nivattāpeti to send back, to return Pv-a 154
    5. Vedic nivartati, ni + vattati
    Nivattana
    neuter
    1. returning, turning, figuratively turning away from, giving up, “conversion” Pv-a 120 (pāpato)
    2. a bend, curve (of a river), nook Ja i.324 Ja ii.117 Ja ii.158 Ja iv.256 v.162
    from nivattati
    Nivattanīya
    adjective
    1. only negative ; not liable to return, not returning Dhp-a i.63
    gerundive formation from nivattana
    Nivatti
    feminine
    1. returning, return Pv-a 189 (gati˚ going & coming)
    from ni + vṛt
    Nivattha
    1. (past participle )

      1. clothed in or with (—˚ or accusative ), dressed, covered SN i.115 Ja i.59 (su˚), 307 (sāṭakaṁ) Pv-a 47 Pv-a 49 (dibbavattha˚), 50
      2. past participle of ni + vasati1
    Nivapati
    1. to heap up, sow, throw (food) MN i.151f. (nivāpaṁ). past participle nivutta (q.v.)
    2. ni + vapati
    Nivaraṇa
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Nivarati
    1. only in causative nivāreti (q.v.), past participle nivuta
    2. ni + varati
    Nivasati
    1. to live, dwell, inhabit, stay Vin ii.11 past participle nivuttha, cp. also nivāsana2 & nivāsin
    2. ni + vasati2
    Nivaha
    1. multitude, quantity, heap Dāvs iv.53; v.14, 24, 62
    from ni + vah
    Nivāta1
    adjective
    1. with the wind gone down, i.e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin i.57 72 MN i.76 AN i.137 (kūṭāgāra) AN i.101 (identical) Iti 92 (rahada); Thag 1 1 (kuṭikā); 2, 376 (pāsāda). neuter a calm (opposite pavāta Vin ii.79
    2. Sanskrit nivāta, ni + vāta “wind-down”
    Nivāta2
    1. lowliness, humbleness, obedience, gentleness MN i.125 Snp 265 (= nīcavattana Kp-a 144) Ja vi.252 Pv iv.712. cp. Mvu ii.423 frequently in compound nivātavutti (identical) AN iii.43 Snp 326 (= nīcavutti Snp-a 333) Ja iii.262 Mil 90 Mil 207 Vv-a 347
    identical with nivāta1, sheltered from the wind = low
    Nivātaka
    1. a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) Ja i.289 = v.435; cp. Mil 205 (where reading is nimantaka, with variant reading nivātaka ‣See note on p. 426) ‣See Commentary on this stanza at Ja v.437
    from nivāta1
    Nivāpa
    food thrown (for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration MN i.151f. (Nivāpa-sutta) Ja i.150 Ja iii.271 Dhp-a i.233 (share); iii.303 Vv-a 63 (diguṇaṁ ˚ṁ pacitvā cooking a double portion). cp. nevāpika.
    1. ˚tiṇa grass to eat Ja i.150
    • ˚puṭṭha fed on grains Dhp 325 (= kuṇḍakâdinā sūkara-bhattena puṭṭho Dhp-a iv.16 = Nett 129 = Th 1, 17
    • ˚bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding MN i.156)
    cp. Sanskrit nivāpa, ni + vap, cp. nivapati
    Nivāyāsa
    1. (?) oozing of trees; Buddhaghosa’s explanation of ikkāsa at Vin ii.321 ‣See niyyāsa
    Nivāraṇa
    neuter &
    • adjective

      1. warding off, keeping back, preventing; refusal Snp 1034 Snp 1035 Snp 1106 (= Nd2 363 āvāraṇa rakkhaṇa gopana) Dhs-a 259 Pv-a 102 Pv-a 278; Sdhp 396
      from nivāreti
    Nivāraya
    adjective
    1. in dun˚; hard to check or keep back Mil 21 (+ durāvaraṇa)
    gerundive of nivāreti
    Nivārita
    adjective
    1. unobstructed, open Pv-a 202 (= anāvaṭa)
    past participle of nivāreti
    Nivāretar
    1. one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opposite pavesetar) DN ii.83 = SN iv.194 AN v.194 (dovāriko aññātānaṁ nivāretā ñātānam pavesetā)
    n. agent to nivāreti
    Nivāreti
    1. to keep back, to hold back from (c. ablative), to restrain; to refuse, obstruct, forbid warn Vin i.46 Vin ii.220 SN i.7 (cittaṁ nivāreyya), 14 (yato mano nivāraye); iv.195 (cittaṁ) Dhp 77 Dhp 116 (pāpā cittaṁ nivāraye) Ja i.263 Pv iii.74 Vv-a 69 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 102 Dhp-a i.41
    causative of nivarati
    Nivāsa
    1. stopping, dwelling, resting-place, abode; living, sheltering Ja i.115 (˚ṁ kappeti to put up) ii.110 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 78. Usually in phrase pubbe-nivāsaṁ anussarati “to remember one’s former abode or place of existence (in a former life),” characterising the faculty of remembering one’s former birth DN i.13 DN i.15 DN i.16 81 SN i.167 SN i.175 SN i.196 SN ii.122 SN ii.213 SN v.265 SN v.305 AN i.25 164; ii.183; iii.323, 418 sq.; iv.141 sq.; v.211, 339 Also in pubbenivāsaṁ vedi Iti 100 Snp 647 = Dh 423 p-n-paṭisaṁyuttā dhammikathā DN ii.1 p-n-anussatiñāṇa DN iii.110 DN iii.220 DN iii.275 AN iv.177 cp. nevāsika
    from nivasati2
    Nivāsana1
    adjective neuter
    1. dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opposite pārupana) Vin i.46 Vin ii.228 Ja i.182 (manāpa˚), 421; iii.82 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76 173 (pilotikakkhaṇḍa˚ dressed in rags)
    from nivāseti
    Nivāsana2
    neuter
    1. dwelling, abode Pv-a 44 (˚ṭṭhāna place of abode), 76 (identical)
    from nivasati2
    Nivāsika
    adjective
    1. staying, living, dwelling Ja ii.435 (= nibaddha-vasanaka Commentary )
    from nivāsa
    Nivāsin
    adjective-noun
    1. dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dāvs v.45
    to nivasati
    Nivāseti
    1. to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq in ster. phrase “pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā patta- cīvaram ādāya …,” describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e.g. DN i.109 DN i.178 DN i.205 DN i.226 Vin i.46 Vin ii.137 194 DN ii.127 Ja i.265 Pug 56 Pv i.103 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 127 (nivāsessati + pārupissati) 147 (= pārupāmi). causative II. nivāsāpeti to cause or order to be dressed (with 2
    2. accusative ) Ja i.50 Ja iv.142 Dhp-a i.223
    3. causative of nivasati1
    Nivicikicchā
    1. ‣See nibbicikicchā MN i.260
    Nivijjha
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Niviṭṭha
    adjective
    1. settled, established (in); confirmed, sure; fixed on, bent on, devoted to (locative Snp 57 (= satta allīna etc. Nd2 364), 756, 774, 781 (ruciyā) 824 (saccesu), 892 Nd1 38 65, 162 Iti 35 77 Ja i.89 259 (adhammasmiṁ) Mil 361 Vv-a 97 (˚gāma, built situated) DN-a i.90 (su˚ & dun˚ of a street = well & badly built or situate). cp. abhi˚
    2. past participle of nivisati
    Nivisati
    1. to enter, stop, settle down on (locative ), to resort to, establish oneself Vin i.207 Ja i.309 = iv.217 (yasmiṁ mano nivisati).
    2. past participle niviṭṭha
    3. absolutive nivissa (q.v.)
    4. causative niveseti. Nivissa-vadin ni + visati
    Nivissa-vādin
    adjective-noun
    1. “speaking in the manner of being settled or sure,” a dogmatist Snp 910 Snp 913 explained at Nd1 326 as “sassato loko idam eva saccaṁ, mogham aññan ti”; at Snp-a 560 as “jānāmi passāmi tath’ eva etan ti.”
    nivissa ( absolutive of nivisati) + vādin
    Nivuta
    adjective
    1. surrounded, hemmed in, obstructed, enveloped DN i.246 SN ii.24 SN iv.127 Snp 348 (tamo˚), 1032, 1082 Iti 8 Nd2 365 (= ophuṭa, paṭicchanna, paṭikujjita) Mil 161 Snp-a 596 (= pariyonaddha)
    past participle of nivarati (nivāreti) cp. nivārita
    Nivutta1
    1. (past participle )

      1. called, termed, designated Pv-a 73 (dasavassa-satāni, vassa-sahassaṁ n. hoti)
      past participle of ni + vac
    Nivutta2
    1. (past participle )

      1. shorn, shaved, trimmed Snp 456 (˚kesa = apagatakesa ohāritakesamassu Snp-a 403)
      Sanskrit *nyupta, past participle of vapati1 to shear
    Nivutta3
    1. (past participle )

      1. sown, thrown (of food), offered, given MN i.152 Ja iii.272
      Sanskrit *nyupta, past participle of vapati2 to sow
    Nivuttha
    1. (past participle of nivasati) inhabited; dwelling, living ‣See san˚.

    Niveṭha
    1. in pañhe dunniveṭha at Mil 90 ‣See nibbedha
    Niveṭhana
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Niveṭheti
    1. ‣See nibbeṭheti
    Nivedaka
    adjective
    1. relating, admonishing Ja vi.21
    to nivedeti
    Nivedeti
    1. to communicate, make known, tell, report, announce Ja i.60 Ja i.307 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 66 (attānaṁ reveal oneself); Dāvs v.42
    ni + vedeti, causative of vid.
    Nivesa
    1. entering, stopping, settling down; house, abode Vv 82 (= nivesanāni kacchantarāni Vv-a 50)
    2. = nivesana 2, in diṭṭhi˚ Snp 785 (= idaṁ-sacchâbhinivesa-sankhātāni diṭṭhi-nivesanāni Snp-a 522)
    Vedic niveśa, from ni + viś
    Nivesana
    neuter
    1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house home DN i.205 DN i.226 DN ii.127 Ja i.294 Ja ii.160 (˚ṭṭhāna) Pv-a 22 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 112
    2. (figuratively) (also nivesanā
    3. feminine : Nd2 366 settling on, attachment, clinging to (in diṭṭhi˚ clinging to a view = dogmatism cp. nivissa-vādin) Snp 1055 (nandi + ; = taṇhā Nd2 366) Dhp 40 (diṭṭhi˚) Nd1 76 110 ‣See also nivesa
    Vedic niveśana, from nivesati, cp. niviṭṭha
    Nivesita
    adjective
    1. settled, arranged, designed, built Vv-a 82 (= sumāpita)
    past participle of nivesati
    Niveseti
    1. to cause to enter, to establish; to found, build, fix, settle; (figuratively) to establish in, exhort to (c. locative ), plead for, entreat, admonish DN i.206 SN v.189 Dhp 158 Dhp 282 (attānaṁ) Iti 78 (brahmacariye) Thag 2, 391 (manaṁ) Ja v.99 Pv iii.77 (saṁyame nivesayi) DN-a i.273 (gāmaṁ) Pv-a 206
    2. causative of nivesati
    Nivyaggha
    adjective
    1. free from tigers Ja ii.358 (variant reading nibbyaggha)
    nis + vyaggha
    Nisagga
    (& Nissagga)
    1. giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature SN i.54 (˚ss˚). cp. nisaṭṭha
    ni or nis + sṛj
    Nisaṅkhiti
    feminine
    1. deposit (of merit or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma Snp 953 (= Nd1 442 abhisankhārā)
    Sanskrit ni-saṁskṛti, ni + saṁ + kṛ
    Nisajjā
    feminine
    1. sitting down, opportunity for sitting, seat Pv iv.12 (seyyā +) Ja i.217 Pv-a 24 (˚ādipaṭikkhepa-ṭṭhāna), 219 (pallankâbhujanādi-lakkhaṇā nisajjā). cp. nesajjika
    Sanskrit *niṣadyā of ni sad
    Nisajjeti
    1. to spend, bestow, give, give up Pv-a 105 (dānûpakaraṇā nisajjesi read better as ˚karaṇǡni sajjesi) ‣See also nissajjati
    sic manuscripts for niss˚; Sanskrit niḥsarjayati, nis + sajjeti, causative of sṛj
    Nisaṭṭha
    1. (past participle )

      1. given up, spent, lost Thag 2, 484 (variant reading ˚ss˚) Thag-a 286 (= pariccatta). cp. nisajjeti & nisagga.; Nisada & Nisada
      nis + saṭṭha of sṛj
    Nisada
    Nisadā
    feminine
    1. a grindstone, especially the understone of a millstone Vin i.201 (˚pota identical) Mil 149 Vism 252 (˚pota, where Kp-a at identical passage reads ˚putta). cp. ā˚
    Sanskrit dṛṣad feminine ; for n: d cp. Pali nijjuha = Sanskrit dātyūha etc.
    Nisanti
    feminine
    1. careful attention or observation AN ii.97 AN iii.201 AN iv.15 (dhamma˚), 36 (identical) 296; v.166 (dhamma˚); Dīpavaṁsa i.53 (˚kāra). cp. nisamma & nisāmeti
    Sanskrit *niśānti, ni + śam
    Nisabha
    1. “bull among men,” i.e. prince, leader; “princeps,” best of men epithet of the Buddha SN i.28 SN i.48 SN i.91 MN i.386 Ja v.70 vi.526 Vv 167 (isi˚), cp. Vv-a 83 for explanation Vv 637 (isi˚ = ājānīya Vv-a 262)
    Sanskrit nṛ + ṛṣabha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha: vasabha: nisabha ‣See Snp-a 40
    Nisamma
    adverb
    1. carefully, considerately, observing Snp 54 Nd2 367 481 b (= sutvā). especially in phrase n
    • kārin acting considerately Dhp 24 (= Dhp-a i.238) Ja iii.106 Ja vi.375 Mil 3 cp. n. kiriyāya Mil 59 cp. nisanti
    originally
  • absolutive of nisāmeti, Sanskrit niśamya, śam
  • Nisā
    feminine
    1. night Vv 352 (locative nise) Vv-a 161 (
    2. locative nisati, variant reading nisi = rattiyaṁ) Mil 388 (
    3. locative nisāya) Dāvs ii.6; v.2 (nisāyaṁ) ‣See also nisītha
    4. Sanskrit niś & niśā, probably with niśītha (midnight) to ni + ; śi = lying down
    Nisātaka
    1. in koka˚ Ja vi.538 a certain wild animal; the meaning is not clear, etymologically it is to be derived from Sanskrit niśātayati to strike, to fell ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen 1. p. 152, s.v. koka. The variant reading is ˚nisādaka, evidently influenced by nisāda
    Nisāda
    1. a robber Ja iv.364 cp. nesāda
    cp. Sanskrit niṣāda, a Non-Aryan or barbarian
    Nisādana
    1. grinding Dhp-a i.308
    = ni + śātana
    Nisādika
    adjective
    1. fit for lying down, suitable for resting Vin i.239 (go˚)
    cp. Sanskrit niṣādin, ni + sad
    Nisādin
    adjective
    1. lying down DN iii.44 DN iii.47
    from ni + sad
    Nisāna
    1. a hone on which to sharpen a knife Mil 282
    ni + śā to sharpen, to whet, cp. nisita
    Nisāmaka
    adjective
    1. observant, listening to, attending to, careful of. AN v.166 AN v.168 (dhammānaṁ)
    cp. Sanskrit niśāmana
    Nisāmeti
    1. to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful of, mind Ja iv.29 (anisāmetvā by not being careful); v.486 Dhp-a i.239 (+ upadhāneti) Pv-a 1 (imper nisāmayatha). cp. nisanti, nisamma
    ni + sāmeti
    Nisāra
    adjective-noun
    1. full of sap, excellent, strong (of a tree) Vv 631 (= niratisaya sārassa nisiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa Vv-a 261)
    ni + sāra
    Nisiñcati
    1. to besprinkle Mhvs vii.8
    ni + siñcati
    Nisita
    adjective
    1. sharp MN i.281 (āvudhajāta pīta˚?) Ja iv.118 (su˚) Vv-a 233 Pv-a 155 Pv-a 192 Pv-a 213
    Sanskrit niśita, ni + past participle of śā to whet
    Nisinna
    adjective
    1. sitting down, seated Ja i.50 Ja i.255 Ja iii.126 Kp-a 250 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 39 passim
    • Often comb; d & contrasted with; tiṭṭhaṁ (standing), caraṁ (walking) & sayaṁ (sayāna; lying down), e.g. at Snp 151 Snp 193 Iti 82
    Sanskrit niṣanna, past participle of nisīdati
    Nisinnaka
    adjective = nisinna MN i.333 Ja i.163 Dhp-a iii.175
    Nisītha
    1. midnight, night Thag 1, 3 (aggi yathā pajjalito nisīthe; Burmese variant nisive), 524 (variant reading nisive) Ja iv.432 Ja v.330 Ja v.331 (Burmese variant nisive), 506 (= rattibhāga Commentary )
    Sanskrit niśītha ‣See nisā
    Nisīdati
    1. to sit down, to be seated, to sit, to dwell Nd2 433 Ja iii.392 Ja vi.367 Pv ii.93 (nisīdeyya Pot.) Pv-a 74 aorist nisīdi Vin i.1 Ja ii.153 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 44; 3rd
    2. plural nisīdiṁsu (J i.307) nisīdisuṁ (Mhvs; vii.40);
    3. absolutive nisīditvā (J ii.160 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74), nisajja DN ii.127) and nisīditvāna (Sn 1031); grd nisīditabba Vin i.47
    4. past participle nisinna (q.v.)
    5. causative II nisīdāpeti cp. Sanskrit niṣādayati
      1. to cause to sit down, to make one be seated, to invite to a seat Ja iii.392 Ja vi.367 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 35 (there āsane) Mil 20 cp. abhi˚, san˚
      Sanskrit niṣīdati, ni + sīdati
    Nisīdana
    neuter
    1. sitting down, occasion or opportunity to sit, a mat to sit on Vin i.295 ii.123 (˚ena vippavasati) SN v.259 (˚ṁ gaṇhāti). ˚paccattharaṇa a mat for sitting on Vin i.47 295; ii.209 218
    Sanskrit niṣadana, from nisīdati
    Nisumbhati
    1. to knock down Thag 2, 302 (= pāteti Thag-a 227)
    ni + sumbh (subhnāti)
    Nisūdana
    neuter
    1. destroying, slaughtering Mil 242
    ni + sūd
    Nisedha
    adjective-noun
    1. holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dhp 389 Dhp-a iv.148
    • hirī˚ restrained by shame SN i.168 = Sn 462 Dhp 143
    from ni + sedh
    Nisedhaka
    adjective
    1. prohibiting, restraining; one who prohibits, an obstructer Ja ii.220
    from nisedha
    Nisedhanatā
    feminine
    1. refusing, refusal, prohibition Mil 180 (a˚)
    abstract to nisedheti
    Nisedheti
    1. to keep off, restrain, prohibit, prevent SN i.121 (nisedha, imperative ) Ja iii.83 Ja iii.442 Thag-a 250 Vv-a 105 (nirayûpapattiṁ)
    • cp. nisedha
    causative of ni + sedh
    Nisevati
    1. to resort to, practise, pursue, follow, indulge in Ja ii.106 Snp 821 (= Nd1 157); Pv ii.319 (= karoti Pv-a 87) Mil 359 past participle nisevita
    2. ni + sev
    Nisevana
    neuter also
    • feminine )

      1. practising, enjoying; pursuit Pug 20 24; Sdhp 406
      Sanskrit niṣevana, cp. nisevati
    Nisevita
    adjective
    1. frequented, practised, enjoyed, indulged in MN i.178 Sdhp 373
    past participle of nisevati
    Nissaṁsaya
    adjective
    1. having no doubt, free from doubt Mil 237 accusative as
    2. adverb without doubt undoubtedly Pv iv.81 Dhp-a i.106 Pv-a 95
    3. nis + saṁsaya
    Nissakka
    1. “going out from,” ttg. a name of the ablative case Ja v.498 Vv-a 152 154, 180 311 Pv-a 147 Pv-a 221
    from nis + sakkati = sakk
    Nissakkana
    neuter
    1. going out, creeping out; only in biḷāra˚; at DN ii.83 (Burmese variant as gloss nikkhamana) + SN iv.194 AN v.195
    Sanskrit *niḥsarpana, nis + sakk, confused with sṛp ‣See Trenckner, Note. p. 60 & cp. apassakkati o˚, pari˚
    Nissaggiya
    adjective
    1. to be given up, what ought to be rejected or abandoned Vin i.196 254; iii.195 sq
    Sanskrit *niḥsārgya gerundive of nis + sajjeti, not = Sanskrit naisargika
    Nissaṅga
    adjective
    1. unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371 Sdhp 398 Sdhp 411 etc.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 10 feminine abstract ˚tā disinterestedness Ja i.46
    2. nis + sanga
    Nissajjati
    1. to let loose, give up, hand over, give, pour out Vin ii.188 absolutive nissajja Sanskrit niḥsṛjya
      1. Snp 839 (variant reading nisajja) Nd1 189 (identical) Snp-a 545 past participle nisaṭṭha & nissaṭṭha; (q.v.) cp. nissaggiya & paṭi˚
      2. nis + sajjati, sṛj ‣See also nisajjeti
    Nissaṭa
    adjective
    1. flown or come out from, appeared; let loose, free, escaped from SN iii.31 SN iv.11 sq. AN i.260 AN iv.430 (a˚); v.151 sq. Ja iii.530 vi.269; Nd2 under nissita; Ps ii.10 sq. Mil 95 Mil 225 (bhava˚) ‣See also nissaraṇa. cp. abhi˚
    past participle of nis + sarati, sṛ
    Nissaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. dismissed, given up, left, granted, handed over, given Vin iii.197 (˚cīvara) MN i.295 MN ii.203 Vv-a 341 ‣See also nisaṭṭha & paṭi˚
    past participle of nissajjati
    Nissatta
    adjective
    1. powerless, unsubstantial; feminine abstract ˚tā absence of essence, unsubstantiality ‣See dhamma A Dhs-a 38 139, 263; cp. Dhs translation
    2. past participle xxxiii. & 26
    3. Sanskrit *niḥsattva, nis + satta
    Nissadda
    adjective
    1. noiseless, soundless, silent Ja i.17 (v.94) Dhp-a iii.173
    nis + sadda
    Nissantāpa
    adjective
    1. without grief or selfmortification Pv-a 62
    nis + santāpa
    Nissanda
    1. flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping issue; result, outcome, especially effect of Kamma AN iii.32 Ja i.31 Ja i.205 Ja i.426 (sarīra˚) Dhp-a i.395 Dhp-a ii.36 86 Vv-a 14 (puñña-kammassa n-phala) Pv-a 47 (puññakammassa), 58 (identical) Mil 20 Mil 117 Pgdp 102
    Sanskrit nisyanda & niṣyanda, ni + ; syand (syad) ‣See sandati
    Nissama
    1. exertion, endeavour Ja v.243
    ni + sama
    Nissaya
    1. that on which anything depends, support help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply foundation, reliance on (accusative or—˚) Vin i.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz. piṇḍiyālopa-bhojanaṁ, paṁsukūla-cīvaraṁ, rukkhamūla-senāsanaṁ, pūtimuttabhesajjaṁ); ii.274, 278 DN iii.137 DN iii.141 AN i.117 AN iii.271 iv.353; v.73 Snp 753 Snp 877 Nd1 108 (two n.: taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚), 190, cp. Nd; 2 s.v. Nd2 397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in different enumeration); Ps ii.49 sq., 58 sq. 73 sq.; ii.220; Nett 7, 65; Vism 12, 535. nissayaṁ karoti to rely on, to be founded on to take one’s stand in Snp 800

      • cp. nissāya & nissita
      1. ˚kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical act of help or protection Vin i.49 143, 325; ii.226 AN i.99 Pv iv.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa˚)
      2. ˚sampanna finding one’s strength in AN iv.353
      Sanskrit niśraya, of ni + śri, corresponding in meaning to Sanskrit āśraya
    Nissayatā
    feminine
    1. dependence, requirement, resource Snp 856 Nd1 245
    abstract to nissaya
    Nissayati
    1. to lean on, a foundation on, rely on, trust, pursue Snp 798 (sīlabbataṁ Snp-a 530 = abhinivisati) Vv-a 83 (katapuññaṁ). passive nissīyati Vv-a 83
    2. past participle nissita
    3. absolutive nissāya (q.v.)
    4. Sanskrit niśrayati, but in meaning = āśrayati, ni + śri
    Nissaraṇa
    neuter
    1. going out, departure; issue, outcome, result; giving up, leaving behind being freed, escape (from saṁsāra), salvation Vin i.104 DN iii.240 DN iii.248f. SN i.128 SN i.142 SN ii.5 SN iii.170 (catunnaṁ dhātūnaṁ); iv.7 sq. (identical); v.121 sq. AN i.258 AN i.260 AN ii.10 (kāmānaṁ etc.); iii.245 sq.; iv.76 (uttariṁ); v.188 MN i.87 (kāmānaṁ), 326 (uttariṁ); iii.25 Iti 37 61 Ps ii.180, 244 Vb 247 Vism 116 Thag-a 233 Dhs-a 164 Sdhp 579. cp. nissaṭa & nissaraṇīya
    1. ˚dassin wise in knowing results, prescient, able to find a way to salvation SN iv.205
    • ˚pañña
    • adjective = ˚dassin DN i.245 (a˚); iii.46 SN ii.194 SN iv.332 AN v.178 (a˚), 181 sq. Mil 401
    Sanskrit niḥsaraṇa, to nis + sarati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nissaraṇa giving up (?) Avs ii.193
    Nissaraṇīya
    adjective
    1. connected with deliverance, leading to salvation able to be freed. The 3 nissaraṇīya dhātuyo (elements of deliverance) are nekkhamma (escape from cravings) āruppa (from existence with form), nirodha (from all existence), in detail at Iti 61 (kāmānaṁ n. nekkhammaṁ rūpānaṁ n. āruppaṁ, yaṁ kiñci bhūtaṁ sankhataṁ n nirodho). The 5 n-dh. are escape from kāma, vyāpāda vihesā, rūpa, sakkāya: AN iii.245 cp. AN i.99 iii.290
    1. Note. The spelling is often nissāraṇīya, thus at Vin iv.225 DN iii.239 (the five n-dhātuyo), 247, 275
    gerundive of nissarati, with relation to nissaraṇa
    Nissarati
    1. to depart, escape from, be freed from (c. ablative) AN i.260 (yasmā atthi loke nissaraṇaṁ tasmā sattā lokamhā nissaranti). past participle nissaṭa, grd nissaraṇīya (q.v.); cp. also nissaraṇa & paṭi˚
    2. nis + sarati
    Nissāya
    (preposition c, accusative )
    1. leaning on (in all figuratively meanings) Nd2 368 (= upanissāya, ārammaṇaṁ ālambanaṁ karitvā). 1. near, near by, on, at Ja i.167 (pāsānapiṭṭhaṁ), 221 (padumasaraṁ) Pv-a 24 (bāhā), 134 (taṁ = with him). 2. by means of, through, by one’s support, by way of Ja i.140 (rājānaṁ: under the patronage of the k.); iv.137 (identical); ii.154 (tumhe) Mil 40 (kāyaṁ), 253 (identical) Pv-a 27 (ye = yesaṁ hetu), 154 (nadī˚ alongside of)
    • because of, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of Ja i.203 (amhe), 255 (dhanaṁ), 263 (maṁ) Pv-a 17 (kiṁ), 67 (namaṁ), 130 (taṁ)
    • cp. nissaya, nissita
    • absolutive of nissayati, Sanskrit *niśrāya, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit niśritya, ni + śri
    Nissāra
    adjective
    1. sapless, worthless, unsubstantial Ja i.393 Sdhp 51 Sdhp 608 Sdhp 612
    nis + sāra
    Nissārajja
    adjective
    1. without diffidence, not diffident, confident Ja i.274 (+ nibbhaya)
    Sanskrit niḥ + śārada + ya
    Nissāraṇa
    neuter
    1. going or driving out, expulsion Mil 344 (osāraṇa-n
    • paṭisāraṇa), 357
    from nissarati
    Nissita
    adjective
    1. hanging on, dependent on, inhabiting; attached to, supported by, living by means of, relying on, being founded or rooted in, bent on As—˚ often in sense of a preposition = by means of, on account of, through, especially with pronoun kiṁ˚ (= why, through what Snp 458 taṁ˚ (therefore, on acct. of this) SN iv.102 For combination with various synonyms ‣See Nd2 s.v. & cp. Nd; 1 75, 106

      • SN ii.17 (dvayaṁ; cp. iii.134); iv.59, 365 v.2 sq., 63 sq. AN iii.128 Dhp 339 (rāga˚) Snp 752 Snp 798 Snp 910 Ja i.145 Nd1 283 Pv i.86 (sokaṁ hadaya˚ lying in) ii.66 (paṭhavi˚ supported by) Vb 229 Nett 39 (˚citta) Mil 314 (inhabiting) Pv-a 86 (māna˚)
      • anissita unsupported not attached, free, emancipated Snp 66 Snp 363 Snp 753 Snp 849 Snp 1069 (unaided) Ja i.158 Mil 320 Mil 351
      • Cp apassita
      Sanskrit niśrita, past participle of nissayati, corresponding in meaning to Sanskrit āśrita
    Nissitaka
    adjective-noun
    1. adherent, supporter (originally one who is supported by), pupil Ja i.142 Ja i.186 Dhp-a i.54
    from preceding
    Nissitatta
    neuter
    1. dependence on, i.e. interference by, being too near, nearness Vism 118 (pantha˚). cp. san˚
    from nissita
    Nissirīka
    adjective
    1. having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity Ja vi.225 (ājīvika), 456 (rājabhavana)
    nis + sirī
    Nissīma
    adjective
    1. outside the boundary Vin i.255 (˚ṭṭha), 298 (˚ṁ gantuṁ); ii.167 (˚e ṭhito)
    cp. Sanskrit niḥsīman with different meanings (“boundless”), nis + sīma
    Nissuta
    adjective
    1. flown out or away, vanished, disappeared MN i.280
    from nis + sru ‣See savati
    Nisseṇi
    feminine
    1. a ladder, a flight of stairs DN i.194 DN i.198 Ja i.53 Ja ii.315 Ja iii.505 Mil 263 Vism 244, 340 (in simile) Dhp-a i.259
    from nis + śri, originally that which leans against, or leads to something, cp. Sanskrit śreṇī a row
    Nissesa
    adjective
    1. whole, entire; neuter accusative as
    2. adverb nissesaṁ entirely, completely Nd2 533
    3. nis + sesa
    Nissoka
    adjective
    1. free from sorrow, without grief, not mourning Pv-a 62 Kp-a 153
    nis + soka
    Nihata
    adjective
    1. “slain”; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin ii.307 (settled) Ja v.435 (˚bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed)
    1. ˚māna “with slain pride,” humiliated, humble SN iv.203 Thag 2, 413 (= apanīta-māna Thag-a 267) Ja ii.300 vi.367
    past participle of nihanti, ni + han
    Niharati
    1. ‣See nīharati
    Nihita
    adjective
    1. put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up renounced. As ˚-often in the sense of a preposition without, e.g. ˚daṇḍa ˚sattha without stick & sword ‣See daṇḍa … DN i.70 (˚paccāmitta); Pv iv.326 (su˚ well applied) Pv-a 252 (bhasma-nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp 311
    Sanskrit nihita, past participle of ni + dhā ‣See dahati
    Nihīna
    adjective
    1. lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant SN i.12 Snp 890 Nd1 105 194 Pv-a 198 (jāti˚ low-born) Sdhp 86. O past participle to seyya Ja vi.356f.

      1. ˚attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv iv.15-kamma of low action Snp 661 = It 43 Dhp 306 Ja ii.417
      • ˚citta low-minded Pv-a 107 (= dīna)
      • ˚jātika of inferior birth or caste Pv-a 175
      • ˚pañña of inferior wisdom Snp 890 (= paritta-pañña Nd1 299)
      • ˚sevin of vile pursuit AN i.126
      Sanskrit nihīna, past participle of nihīyati or nihāyati
    Nihīnatā
    feminine
    1. lowness, inferiority; vileness, baseness DN i.98 DN i.99
    abstract to nihīna
    Nihīyati
    1. to be left, to come to ruin, to be destroyed AN i.126 = J iii.324 (= vināsaṁ pāpuṇāti). past participle nihīna (q.v.)
    2. ni + hīyati, passive of ‣See jahāti
    Nihuhuṅka
    adjective
    1. one who does not confide in the sound huṁ Vin i.3 (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1901 42)
    from nī˚; = nis + huhunka
    Nīka
    1. a kind of deer (or pig) Ja v.406 (vv.ll. nika, ninga)
    Sanskrit nyanku? Doubtful reading
    Nīgha
    1. (in anīgha ‣See nigha1
    Nīca

    adjective

    1. low, inferior, humble (opposite ucca high, from adverb ud˚) Vin i.46 47; ii.194 DN i.109 DN i.179 194 AN v.82 Snp-a 424 (nīcaṁ karoti to degrade); passim

      1. ˚kula of low clan Ja i.106 Snp 411 -(˚ā) kulīna belonging to low caste Snp 462
      • ˚cittatā being humble-hearted Dhs 1340 Dhs-a 395
      • ˚pīṭhaka a low stool Dhp-a iv.177
      • ˚mano humble Snp 252 (= nīcacitto Snp-a 293)
      • ˚seyyā a low bed AN i.212 (opposite uccâsayana)
      Vedic nīca, adjective formation from
    2. adverb ni˚, cp. Sanskrit nyañc downward
    Nīceyya
    adjective
    1. lower inferior, rather low MN i.329 Snp 855 Snp 918 Nd1 244 351
    compar. of nīca (for ˚īya?), in function of ˚eyya as “of the kind of,” sort of, rather
    Nīta
    1. (past participle )

      1. led, guided; ascertained, inferred AN i.60 (˚attha) Ja i.262 Ja ii.215 (kāma˚); Nett 21 (˚attha natural meaning, i.e. the primarily inferred sense, opp neyyattha); Sdhp 366 (dun˚). cp. vi˚
      past participle of neti
    Nīti
    feminine
    1. guidance, practice, conduct, especially right conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity Pv-a 114 (˚mangala commonsense), 129 (˚sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (˚cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (˚naya polity & law), 132 (˚kusala versed in the wisdom of life) Mil 3 (here meaning the Nyāyaphilosophy cp. Trenckner, Note. p. 58)
    Sanskrit nīti, from nīta
    Nīdha
    1. = nu idha ‣See nu
    Nīdhura
    (?)
    1. bracelet, bangle Ja vi.64 (= valaya; Burmese variant nivara). Also given as nīyura (cp Prakrit neura & Pali nūpura)
    Sanskrit ? cp. keyura
    Nīpa
    adjective
    1. literally lying low, deep, name of the tree Nauclea cadamba, a species of Asoka tree Ja i.13 (v.61) = Bu ii.51 Ja v.6 (so read for nipa)
    Vedic nīpa, contr. from ni + āpa “low water”
    Nībhata
    1. bought out Ja iii.471
    cp. Sanskrit nirbhṛta, past participle of nis + bhṛ
    Nīyati
    1. to be led or guided, to go, to be moved SN i.39 (cittena nīyati loko) Dhp 175 Pv i.111 (= vahīyati Pv-a 56) Ja i.264 (ppr. nīyamāna) Pv-a 4 (identical) Dhp-a iii.177 Sdhp 292 Sdhp 302. Also found in spelling niyyati at Snp 851 Nd1 223 (= yāyati vuyhati), 395
    • In the sense of a Med. in imper nīyāmase (let us take) Pv ii.91 (= nayissāma Pv-a 113)
    Sanskrit nīyati, passive of neti
    Nīyāti
    1. ‣See niyyāti. Niyadita, Niyadeti
    Nīyādita, Nīyādeti
    1. ‣See niyy˚;
    Nīyānika
    1. ‣See niyy˚;
    Nīraja
    adjective
    1. free from passion Sdhp 370
    Sanskrit nīraja, nis + raja
    Nīrava
    adjective
    1. soundless, noiseless, silent DN-a i.153 (tuṇhī +)
    Sanskrit nīrava, nis + rava
    Nīrasa
    adjective
    1. sapless, dried up, withered, tasteless, insipid Ja iii.111
    Sanskrit nīrasa, nis + rasa
    Nīruja
    adjective
    1. = nīroga Sdhp 496
    Sanskrit nīruja, nis + rujā
    Nīroga
    adjective
    1. free from disease, healthy, well, unhurt Ja i.421 Ja iii.26 Ja iv.31 Pv-a 198 (ni˚). cp. nīruja
    Sanskrit nīroga, nis + roga
    Nīla
    adjective
    1. dark-blue, blue-black blue-green. Nīla serves as a general term to designate the “coloured-black,” as opposed to the “colouredwhite” (pīta yellow), which pairs (nīla-pīta) are both set off against the “pure” colour-sensations of red (lohitaka) & white (odāta), besides the distinct black or dark ‣See kaṇha. Therefore n. has a fluctuating connotation (cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids; Buddh. Psych. p. 49; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 62), its only standard combination being that with pīta, e.g. in the enumeration of the ten kasiṇa practices ‣See kasiṇa: nīla pīta lohita odāta; in the description of the 5 colours of the Buddha’s eye: nīla pītaka lohitaka kaṇha odāta (Nd2 235 Ia under cakkhumā); which goes even so far as to be used simply in the sense of “black & white,” e.g. Vv-a 320 Applied to hair (lomāni DN ii.144 MN ii.136 ‣See further enumeration at Vv-a 111 & under kaṇha
    • A; iii.239; iv.263 sq., 305, 349 v.61; Vism 110, 156, 173 Thag-a 42 (mahā˚ great blue lotus) Dhs 617 Pv ii.25 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 158; Sdhp 246 270, 360
    1. ˚abbha a black cloud Pv iv.39
    2. ˚abhijāti a dark (unfortunate) birth (cp. kaṇh˚) AN iii.383
    • ˚uppala blue lotus Ja iii.394 Vv 454 (= kuvalaya) Dhp-a i.384
    • ˚kasiṇa the “blue” kasiṇa (q.v.) DN iii.248 Dhs 203 (Vam 172 etc
    • ˚gīva “blue neck,” a peacock Snp 221 = maṇi-daṇḍa-sadisāya gīvāya n. ti Snp-a 277)
    • ˚pupphī name of plant (“blue-blossom”) Ja vi.53
    • ˚bījaka a waterplant (“blue-seed”) Buddhaghosa at Vin iii.276
    • ˚maṇi a sapphire (“blue-stone”) Ja ii.112 Ja iv.140 Dhp-a iii.254
    • ˚vaṇṇa blue colour, coloured blue or green Ja iv.140 (of the ocean) Dhs 246
    Vedic nīla, perhaps connection with Latin nites to shine ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Nīlaka
    adjective for nīla MN ii.201 ‣See vi˚.
    Nīliya
    1. an (indigo) hair dye Ja iii.138 (Commentary nīliyaka)
    from nīlī
    Nīlī
    feminine
    1. the indigo plant, indigo colour AN iii.230 AN iii.233
    Sanskrit nīlī
    Nīḷa
    1. a nest (J v.92) ‣See niḍḍha : cp. ˚pacchi bird cage Ja ii.361 roga˚ Iti 37 vadharoga˚ Thag i.1093
    Vedic nīḍa
    Nīvaraṇa
    neuter occasionally
    • masculine

      1. an obstacle, hindrance, only as technical term applied to obstacles in an ethical sense & usually enum; d or referred to in a set of 5 (as pañca nīvaraṇāni and p. āvaraṇāni), viz. kāmacchanda, (abhijjhā-)vyāpāda, thīna-middha, uddhaccakukkucca vicikicchā i.e. sensuality, ill-will, torpor of mind or body, worry, wavering (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation p. 310) DN i.73 (˚e, accusative plural ), 246; ii.83, 300; iii.49 sq., 101, 234 278 SN ii.23 SN iii.149 SN v.60 SN v.84f. 93 sq., 145, 160, 226 327, 439 MN i.60 MN i.144 MN i.276 MN iii.4 MN iii.295 AN i.3 AN i.161 iii.16, 63, 230 sq.; 386; iv.457; v.16, 195, 322 Snp 17 Nd1 13 Nd2 379; Ps i.31, 129, 163 Pug 68 Dhs 1059 1136, 1495 Vb 199 244, 378; Nett 11, 13, 94; Vism 146, 189 DN-a i.213 Sdhp 459 Sdhp 493 and passim Other enumns are occasionally found e.g. 10 at SN v.110 SN v.8 at MN i.360f.; 6 at Dhs 1152
      Sanskrit *nivāraṇa, nis + varaṇa of vṛ; (vṛṇoti) ‣See nibbuta & cp. nivāraṇa
    Nīvaraṇiya
    adjective
    1. belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584 1164, 1488 Vb 12 30, 66, 130 etc
    from nīvaraṇa
    Nīvāra
    1. raw rice, paddy DN i.166 AN i.241 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55 Ja iii.144 (˚yāgu)
    Sanskrit nīvāra, unexplained
    Nīhaṭa
    1. thrown out, removed; in feminine abstract ˚tā ejection, removal cp. Sanskrit nirhṛti
      1. Dhp-a iii.336 (malānaṁ n. the extirpation of impurity or removal of stain)
      past participle of nīharati = Sanskrit nirhṛta
    Nīharaṇa
    neuter
    1. taking out, carrying away, removing DN-a i.296 Pv-a 7
    from nīharati
    Nīharati
    1. to take out, to throw out, drive out Ja i.150 Ja i.157 Ja iii.52 vi.336 Nd2 1997 (ni˚) Vv-a 222 256 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 254 Mil 8 Mil 219 aorist nīhari DN i.92 Ja i.293 Ja ii.154 Pv-a 41 Pv-a 178 (gehato taṁ n.). grd nīharitabba Dhp-a i.397 (opposite pavesetabba).
    2. past participle nīhaṭa -
    3. causative nīharāpeti to have thrown out, to order to be ejected Vv-a 141
    4. nis + hṛ
    Nīhāra
    1. way, manner Vin i.13 Ja i.127 Dhp-a iv.7 At Vin i.13 also in nīhāra-bhatta (= nīhāraka)
    cp. Sanskrit nirhāra
    Nīhāraka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who carries away Vin i.13 (nīhāra-bhatta) SN v.12 SN v.320 SN v.325 (piṇḍapāta)
    from nīhāra, cp. nīharaṇa
    Nu
    indeclinable
    1. affirm
    • indef participle “then, now.”
    1. -1. most frequently combined with interr pronoun and followed by kho, as kin nu kho Ja ii.159 kacci Ja i.279 kaccin nu (for kaccid nu) Ja ii.133 kathan nu (kho) Vin i.83 kattha Pv-a 22 etc
    2. as interrogative participle (= Latin ne, num) in enclitic position Vin i.17 Ja iii.52 Snp 866 Snp 871 Snp 1071 etc. As such also combined with na = nanu (Latin nonne), which begins the sentence: Vin ii.303 (nanu tvaṁ vuḍḍho vīsativasso ’sī ti?) Pv i.84 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 136 etc
    3. Often combined with other emphatic or dubitative particles, like api nu Vin ii.303 DN i.97
    4. nu idha, contr. to nīdha Vv 836 or with sandhi as nu-v-idha DN i.108 (variant reading nu khv idha). cp. na1 nūna, no
    Vedic nu, Indogermanic *nu, originally adverb of time = now; cp. Latin num (to nunc, now) ‣See nūna
    Nuṭṭhubhati
    1. ‣See niṭṭhubhati. (aorist nuṭṭhubhi, e.g. Ja ii.105).

    Nuda
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. expelling, casting out, dispelling; in tamo˚; dispelling darkness Snp 1133 Vv 352 (= viddhaṁsana Vv-a 161)
      Sanskrit ˚nud & ˚nuda, to nudati
    Nudaka
    1. or Nūdaka (—˚) = nuda Ja v.401 (āsa-nūdaka)
    Nudati
    1. to push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dhp 28 Ja iv.443 Dhp-a i.259 aorist nudi Nd2 281. cp. apa˚, pa˚, vi˚.
    2. past participle nunna (nuṇṇa). Nunna (nunna) Vedic nudati; Indogermanic *(s)neu to push, cp. Sanskrit navate, Latin nuo; Anglo-Saxon neosian, Low German nucken
    Nunna (nuṇṇa)
    1. thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd2 220 (ṇṇ) = khitta, cp. panuṇṇa AN ii.41
    past participle of nudati
    Nūtana

    adjective

    1. “of now,” i.e. recent, fresh, new Dāvs iv.47
    Vedic nūtana, adjective formation from
  • adverb nū, cp. nūna. In formation cp. Sanskrit śvastana (of to-morrow) Latin crastinus etc.
  • Nūna
    1. (& nūnaṁ Dhs-a 164) indeclinable

      1. affirmative-dubitative particle with Pot or Indicative, viz. 1. (dubit
      • interrog.) is it then, now, shall I etc. (= Latin subjunctive, hortative & dubitative DN i.155 (= Latin num, cp. nu). especially frequently with rel
      • pronoun yaṁ = yaṁ nūna what if, shall I, let me (Latin age Snp p. 80 (yaṁ nūn’ âhaṁ puccheyyaṁ let me ask, I will ask) Ja i.150 Ja i.255 Ja iii.393 Pv-a 5 (y. n. âhaṁ imassa avassayo bhaveyyaṁ = let me help him)
      • (affirm. surely, certainly, indeed Snp 1058 (api nūna pajaheyyuṁ) AN v.194 Ja i.60 Ja v.90 Pv ii.924 (nuna) Mil 20 Dhs-a 164 Pv-a 95 (nuna as variant reading ; text reads nanda)
    Vedic nūnaṁ = Latin nunc (cp. num); Gothic nu, German nun, cp. English now ‣See also nu
    Nūpura
    1. an ornament for the feet, an anklet Thag 2, 268 DN-a i.50
    Sanskrit nūpura; Non-Aryan. cp. Prakrit ṇeura & nīdhura (nīyura)
    Ne, Nesan
    1. ‣See na3
    Neka
    adjective
    1. not one, several, many Snp 308 Vv 536 (˚citta variegated = nānāvidhacitta Vv-a 236), 641 (identical = anekacitta Vv-a 275); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 366
    Sanskrit naika = na eka, cp. aneka
    Nekatika
    adjective
    1. deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat DN iii.183 Thag 1, 940 Mil 290 Pv-a 209 Ja iv.184
    from nikati
    Nekada
    1. = anekadā (frequently)
    Nekāyika
    adjective
    1. versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Mil 22 cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52
    from nikāya
    Nekkha
    1. a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold SN i.65 AN i.181 AN ii.8 AN ii.29 Dhp 230 (= Dhp-a iii.329 jambonada nikkha); Vism 48; variant reading at Vv 208 438
    Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha
    Nekkhamma
    neuter
    1. giving up the world leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness self-abnegation, Nibbāna Vin i.18 (˚e ānisaṁsa) DN i.110 (identical), iii.239, 275, 283 MN iii.129 AN i.147 (= khema, i.e. nibbāna); iii.245; iv.186 (ānisaṁsa), 439 sq. Snp 424 (˚ṁ daṭṭhu khemato) Dhp 181 Ps i.107 sq.; ii.169 sq. Nd2 370; Vism 116, 325 Ja i.19 137 Vv 8442 (= nibbāna Vv-a 348); Nett 53, 87 106 sq. Mil 285 (˚ṁ abhinikkhanta) Dhp-a iii.227 Thag-a 266
    1. ˚ādhimutta bent on self-abnegation (enumerated with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin i.183 AN iii.376
    • ˚ābhirata fond of renunciation AN iv.224 v.175; Ps ii.173
    • ˚dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness SN ii.152 Vb 86 Nett 97; Vism 487 -ninna merging into or bent on a holy life SN iii.233
    • ˚vitakka a thought of self-abnegation SN ii.152 AN i.275 ii.252 Iti 82
    • ˚saṅkappa = preceding SN ii.152 AN iii.146 Vb 104 235
    • ˚sita based or bent on a holy life (opp geha˚ q.v.) SN iv.232
    • ˚sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship MN iii.110 AN i.80 Dhp 267 Dhp 272 Dhp-a iii.400
    formally a derivation from nikkhamma ( absolutive of nikkhamati) = Sanskrit *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation from nikkāma = Sanskrit *naiṣkāmya, although the adjective nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with; kāma is pre-eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by various passages where a play of word exists between n & kāma (cp. kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yad idaṁ nekkhammaṁ Iti 61 cp. Vin i.104 AN iii.245 also MN i.115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation from nikkhamati
    Negama
    adjective-noun
    1. the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect. = jana, people Vin i.268 273 DN i.136 DN i.139 Ja iv.121 Ja vi.493 Dāvs iii.3 DN-a i.297 Often combined with ˚jānapadā (plural ) “townsmen & countryfolk” SN i.89 DN iii.148 DN iii.172 Ja 149
    2. from nigama
    Necayika
    adjective
    1. rich, wealthy DN i.136 DN i.142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika Mvu iii.38) AN v.149 (Burmese variant nerayika, Commentary nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro)
    from nicaya
    Netar
    1. a leader, guide, forerunner Snp 86 Snp 213 Nd1 446
    Vedic netṛ, agent noun of neti
    Neti (nayati)
    1. to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); figuratively to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dhp 80 Dhp 145 Dhp 240 Dhp 257 Ja i.228 iv.241 (nayaṁ n. to draw a proper conclusion) Vv-a 42 (narati = nayati); imperative naya Pv ii.113, & nehi Ja ii.160 Pv-a 147 poetic
    2. imperative nayāhi ‣See in paṭi˚; pot. naye Dhp 256 (to lead a cause = vinicchineyya Dhp-a iii.381)
    3. future nessāmi Ja ii.159 Pv ii.45;
    4. aorist nayi Ja iv.137
    5. ger netvā Pv-a 5 Pv-a 6, etc. infinitive netuṁ Pv-a 123 Pv-a 145 (˚kāma) & netave; Ja i.79 = Dh 180.
    6. gerundive neyya ‣See sep., pp nīta.
    7. passive nīyati (q.v.) cp. naya, nīti, netta etc. also ā˚, upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚
    8. Vedic nayati,
    Netta1
    1. a guide Ja iii.111 Netechnical term 130
    Sanskrit netra, from neti
    Netta2
    neuter
    1. guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, figuratively the eye. SN i.26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā = the reins) Vin i.204 (dhūma˚ for smoke) Ja iv.363 (identical) DN i.12 (˚tappana, set t. & cp. DN-a; i.98) Snp 550 (pasanna˚), 1120 Nd2 371 (= cakkhu), 669 Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with red eyes) Pv i.83 (eyes = nayanāni Commentary ) Dhs 597 Vb 71f.
    Sanskrit netra
    Netti
    feminine
    1. a guide, conductor; support (= nettika2) Iti 37 (āhāra˚-pabhava), 38 (bhava˚) 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu = Arahant). cp. nettika2 dhamma˚, bhava˚
    Vedic netrī, feminine to netṛ
    Nettiṁsa
    1. a sword Ja ii.77 (˚vara-dhārin; Commentary nettiṁsā vuccanti khaggā); iv.118 (Commentary gives it as adjective = nikkaruṇa merciless; & says “khaggassa nāmaṁ”); vi.188 (˚varadhārin)
    cp. Sanskrit nistriṁśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis + triṁśa (thirty), probably a dial distortion
    Nettika
    adjective-noun
    1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagavaṁ˚’ dhamma MN i.310 AN i.199 iv.158, 351; v.355
    2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dhp 80 (= udakaṁ nenti nettikā), 145; figuratively that which supplies with food or water, in bhava˚; (“the roots of existence, clinging to existence”) DN i.46 (ucchinna˚ with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man AN ii.54 cp. netti
    netta + ika
    Netthar
    1. only in phrase netthāraṁ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin ii.5 Vin iii.183 MN i.442
    • Buddhaghosa on Vin ii.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaṁ etan ti netthāraṁ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṁ taṁ aṭṭhārasa-vidhaṁ sammāvattuṁ vattantī ti attho
    ‣See nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?
    Nepakka
    neuter
    1. prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as sati˚ SN v.197f. MN i.356 AN iii.11 iv.15 Nd2 629 B Vb 244 249; Vism 3 (= paññā) Dhp-a iv.29
    from nipaka
    Nepuñña
    neuter
    1. experience, skill, cleverness Pug 25 35 Dhs 16 292 Dhs-a 147
    from nipuṇa
    Nema
    1. edge, point; root SN v.445 AN iv.404
    • gambhīra˚
    • adjective with deeply rooted point, firmly established SN v.444 AN iv.106
    cp. nemi
    Nemantaṇika
    adjective
    1. one who lives by invitations MN i.31
    from nimantana
    Nemi
    feminine
    1. the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema AN i.112 Vv 645 Mil 238 Mil 285 Vism 198 (figuratively jarāmaraṇa˚ the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saṁsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha) Dhp-a ii.124 (˚vaṭṭi) Vv-a 277
    Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati
    Nemitta
    1. a fortune-teller, astrologer DN ii.16 DN ii.19 AN iii.243
    Sanskrit naimitta, from nimitti
    Nemittaka
    Nemittika;
    1. an astrologer, fortune-teller, soothsayer DN i.8 (i) = DN-a i.91 AN iii.111 Ja iv.124 Mil 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i) Dhp-a ii.241 (a)
    Sanskrit naimittika, from nimitta
    Nemittikatā
    feminine
    1. = nimitta-kammaṁ, i.e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vb 352 = Vism 23; explained at Vism 28
    abstract from nemittika
    Nemiya
    adjective
    1. (—˚) having a circumference etc. Ja vi.252
    = nemika
    Neyya
    adjective
    1. to be led, carried etc.; figuratively to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Snp 55 Snp 803 Snp 846 Snp 1113 Nd1 114 206 Nd2 372 Pug 41 Nett 9 sq., 125
    2. ˚attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opposite nītattha) AN i.60 Nett 21
    gerundive of neti; Sanskrit neya
    Nerayika
    adjective
    1. belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta = inhabitant of n. Vin ii.205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); iv.7 DN iii.6 DN iii.9 DN iii.12 AN i.265 AN ii.231 (vedanaṁ vediyati … seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); iii.402 sq. Snp 664 Nd1 97 (gati) Vv 521 Ja iv.3 (sattā) Pug 51 Vb 412f.; Vism 415 (˚sattā), 424 Mil 148 (sattā) Pv-a 27 (identical), 52 (˚bhāva) 255 Vv-a 23 Sdhp 193 Sdhp 198
    from niraya, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit nairayika Divy 165
    Nerutta
    adjective-noun
    1. based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist Thag-a 153 Nett 8, 9, 32, 33
    from nirutti
    Neḷa
    1. (& Nela) adjective

      1. without fault or sin blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle merciful, innocuous DN i.4 (Buddhaghosa explains: elaṁ vuccati doso; n’ assā (i.e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. “Nelango setapacchādo” ti ettha vuttanelaṁ viya DN-a i.75) AN ii.209 AN v.205 Ja v.156 Vv 5018 636 (= niddosa Vv-a 262) Pug 29 57 Dhs 1343 (vācā) = niddosa Dhs-a 397
      2. (somewhat doubtful “clean,” with reference to big cats (mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṁ vuccati), whereas young ones are called “elephants, cubs” (something like “pigs”) (taruṇā bhinka-cchāpamaṇḍalaṁ) Ja v.418
        1. ˚aṅga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha = running perfectly SN iv.291 = Ud 76 (nelagga text nelanga variant reading ) = DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397
        • ˚patī
        • feminine = neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle Ja vi.558 (na elapatī elapāta-rahitā madhurā Commentary )
        na + eḷa = Sanskrit anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning “pure clean,” is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q.v. On ḷ → n cp. lāngala → nangala; tulā → tūṇa etc.
    Neva
    indeclinable
    1. ‣See na2
    • nevasaññā-nâsañña (being) neither perception nor non-perception, only in compound ˚āyatana & in nevasaññī-nâsaññin ‣See saññā
    na + eva
    Nevāpika
    adjective-noun
    1. a deer-feeder MN i.150f.
    from nivāpa
    Nevāsika
    adjective
    1. one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local Ja i.236f. Dhp-a ii.53f. cp. necayika
    from nivāsa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit naivāsika Av SN i.286 SN i.287
    Nesajjika
    adjective
    1. being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) AN iii.220 Thag 1, 904 1120 Nd2 587 Ja iv.8 Pug 69 Vism 79 Mil 20 Mil 342 The n—˚aṅga is one of the dhūtanga-precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping ‣See Vin v.193 Vism 61, & dhūtanga
    from nisajjā
    Nesāda
    1. a hunter; also a low caste Vin iv.7 (+ veṇa & rathakāra) SN i.93 (˚kula) AN i.107 AN ii.85 Ja ii.36 iii.330; iv.397, 413; v.110, 337; vi.71 Pug 51 (˚kula) Mil 311 Dhp-a iii.24 Pv-a 176
    from nisāda; cp. Sanskrit niṣāda & naiṣāda = one who lies in wait
    No1
    1. indeclinable affirm. & emphatic participle = ; nu (cp. na1): indeed, then, now Snp 457 Snp 875 Snp 1077 Ja v.343 (api no api nu), 435 (= nipātamattaṁ p. 437)
    No2
    1. indeclinable [ Sanskrit no = na + u, a stronger na; cp. na2) negative & adversative particle = neither, nor, but not surely not, indeed not
    • (a) in negative sentences: Snp 852 Snp 855 Snp 1040 Iti 103 (but not); Pv ii.313 (but not) as answer: no hi etaṁ “indeed not, no indeed” Vin i.17 DN i.3 no hi idaṁ DN i.105
    • no ca kho “but surely not” DN i.34 DN i.36 AN v.195
    • Often emphasized by na, as no na not at all Ja i.64 na no Snp 224 (= "avadhāraṇe” Kp-a 170); disjunctively na hi … no neither-nor Snp 813
    • na no … na neither-nor (notnor) Snp 455
    • (b) in disjunctive questions: “or not, as evaṁ hoti vā … no vā (is it so-or not) DN i.61 DN i.227 kacci … no (is it so-or not; Latin ne-annon) DN i.107 nu kho … no udāhu (is it that-or not; or rather DN i.152
    • (c) noce (no ce = Sanskrit no ced) if not (opp sace) Snp 348 Snp 691 Snp 840 Ja i.222 Ja vi.365 Vv-a 69 Also in sense of “I hope not” Ja v.378
    No3

    enclitic form, genitive dative accusative plural of pronote 1st (we) = amhākaṁ ‣See vayaṁ; cp. na3 Sanskrit naḥ

    Nodeti
    1. ‣See vi˚
    from nud
    Nonīta
    1. ‣See navanīta
    Nhāru
    ‣See nahāru. Found e.g. at Vin i.25
    1. P

    P

    Pa˚
    1. ; indeclinable

      1. directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. German ver-in its function of Gothic fra German vor). Thus the sphere of pa-may be characterised in following applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i.e. down; ˚neti bring forth (to); ˚gaṇhāti hold out; ˚tharati spread forth; ˚dhāvati run out ˚bajati go forth; ˚sāreti stretch out; etc
      • (intensive in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. English up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be translated by “up,” or “out,” or “about”): pakopeti up-set ˚chindati cut up; ˚bhañjati break up; ˚cinati heap up ˚kiṇṇaka scattered about; ˚nāda shouting out; ˚bhāti shine forth; ˚bhavati grow up, prevail; ˚dūseti spoil entirely; ˚jahati give up entirely; ˚tapeti make shine exceedingly (Commentary ativiya dīpeti); ˚jalati blaze up; ˚jānāti know well
      • In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; ˚thaddha quite stiff; ˚dakkhiṇa right in pre-eminence; ˚bala very strong

    2. “onward”

      1. paṭṭhāya from … onward; pavattati move on; fig “further, later”: paputta a later (secondary) son, i.e. grandson
      • “in front of,” “before”: padvāra before the door

    3. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp. German besingen an-rufen)

      • The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam-ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaṁsiya (a + pa˚)
      Vedic pra, Indogermanic *pro, cp. Latin pro, Gothic fra, Lithuanian pra, prō, Old Irish ro-
    ˚Pa
    adjective
    1. drinking; only in following compounds. dhenu˚ drinking of the cow, suckling calf MN i.79 Snp 26 (= dhenuṁ pivanto Snp-a 39); -pāda˚; a tree (literally drinking with its feet, cp. explanation at Pv-a 251 “pādasadisehi mūl âvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti”) Pv iv.39-majja˚; drinking intoxicants Snp 400 Pv iv.177 (a˚)
    cp. Vedic ˚pa, adjective base of to drink, as ˚ga from gam or ˚ṭha from sthā
    Paṁsu
    1. dust, dirt, soil SN v.459 AN i.253 Pv ii.37
    • paṁsvāgārakā playmates SN iii.190 saha paṁsukīḷitā identical (literally playing together with mud, making mud pies) AN ii.186 Ja i.364 Pv-a 30 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sahapāṁśukrīḍita MVastu iii.450
    1. ˚kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.156 Vin i.58 MN i.78 SN ii.202 AN i.240 AN i.295 AN ii.206 AN iv.230 Iti 102 = AN ii.26 Dhp 395 Pug 69 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 144. A quâsi definition of p
    • k. is to be found at Vism 60 -kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap MN i.30 SN ii.187 AN iii.187 AN iii.219 AN iii.371f. Vin iii.15 Vin iv.360 Ud 42 Pug 55 Dhp-a iv.157 ˚attan
    • neuter abstract the habit of wearing rags MN i.214 iii.41 AN i.38 AN iii.108
    • ˚guṇṭhita (variant readings ˚kuṇḍita ˚kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt SN i.197 Ja vi.559 Pv ii.35
    • pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) Ja iii.147 Ja iv.380 Dhp-a ii.26
    • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of soil Ja vi.405
    • ˚vappa sowing on light soil (opposite kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud Snp-a 137
    cp. Vedic pāṁsu
    Paṁsuka
    adjective
    1. dusty; masculine a dusty robe Kp-a 171 (variant reading paṁsukūla)
    2. Epic Sanskrit pāṁśuka; Vedic pāṁsura
    Pakaṭṭhaka
    adjective troublesome, annoying;
    • masculine a troubler worrier SN i.174 (variant reading pagaṇḍaka; Commentary rasagiddha; trsl “pertinacious”)
    pa + kaṭṭha + ka; kaṭṭha past participle of kṛṣ, cp. Sanskrit prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha2
    Pakaṭṭhita
    1. ‣See pakk˚
    Pakata
    1. done, made; as—˚ by nature (cp. pakati) Snp 286 Ja iv.38 Pv i.68 ii.316; iii.105 (pāpaṁ samācaritaṁ Pv-a 214) Mil 218 Dhp-a ii.11 (pāpaṁ) Pv-a 31 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 103 (ṭ), 124
    • icchāpakata covetous by nature AN iii.119 AN iii.219f. Pug 69 Vism 24 (here however taken by Buddhaghosa as “icchāya apakata” or “upadduta”) issāpakata envious by nature SN ii.260 Pv-a 46 cp. macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness Pv-a 124 On pakata at Iti 89 ‣See apakata
    • pakatatta (pakata attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour incorrupt, “integer” Vin ii.6 33, 204 Ja i.236 (bhikkhu, + sīlavā, etc.). At Vin ii.32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer
    past participle of pa + kṛ
    Pakati
    feminine
    1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (literally make-up); as ˚-: primary original, real Vin. i.189; ii.113 Ja i.146 (˚vesena in her usual dress); Kp-a 173 (˚kammakara, ˚jeṭṭhaputta) Vv-a 12 (˚pabhassara), 109 (˚bhaddatā)
    2. instrumental pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Ps ii.208 Vv-a 78 Pv-a 215 Pv-a 263
    3. occasion, happening, opportunity (common) occurrence DN i.168 (translation “common saying”) Pv ii.89 (= ˚pavutti Pv-a 110)
    4. Derived pakatika pākatika
      1. ˚upanissaya sufficing condition in nature ‣See Compendium 194 note 3
      • gamana natural or usual walk Dhp-a i.389
      • ˚citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kvu 615 (cp Kvu translation 359 note 5, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prakṛti-nirvāṇatva Bodhicary at Poussin 256)
      • ˚yānaka ordinary vehicle Dhp-a i.391
      • ˚sīla natural or proper virtue DN-a i.290
      cp. Vedic prakṛti
    Pakatika
    adjective
    1. being by nature, of a certain nature Ja ii.30 Mil 220 DN-a i.198 Pv-a 242 (= rūpa) Dhs-a 404
    from pakati
    Pakattheti
    1. talk out against, denounce Ja v.7 (mā ˚katthāsi; Commentary akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be 'pakaḍḍhāsi?
    pa + kattheti
    Pakappanā
    feminine
    1. fixing one’s attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Snp 945 (cp Nd1 72 186, where two pakappanā’s, viz. taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚; at Nd1 429 it is synonymous with taṇhā Buddhaghosa has reading pakampana for ˚kapp˚ and explained by kampa-karaṇa Snp-a 568)
    from pakappeti
    Pakappita
    1. arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Snp 648 (= kata Snp-a 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi “prejudiced view” Fausböll; cp. Nd1 72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (= kappita abhisankhata saṇṭhapita Nd1 186), 902, 910
    past participle of pakappeti
    Pakappeṭi
    1. to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan SN ii.65 (ceteti p. anuseti) Snp 886 (pakappayitvā = takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saṁkappayitvā Nd1 295). past participle pakappita (q.v.)
    2. pra + causative of kḷp, cp. Vedic prakalpayitar
    Pakampati
    1. to shake, quake, tremble Ja i.47 (v.269) Pv-a 199 causative pakampeti SN i.107
    2. pa + kampati. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prakampati Jtm 220; Mvyutp. 151 = kampati.
    Pakampana
    1. ‣See pakappanā
    Pakampita
    1. shaken, trembling SN i.133 = Thag 2, 200
    past participle of pa + kamp
    Pakaraṇa
    neuter
    1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) DN i.98 (“offence"? ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.120) SN iii.91 Mil 189
    2. occasion Vin i.44 ii.75; iii.20
    3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz Abhidhamma˚ Ja i.312 Dīpavaṁsa v.37; Kathāvatthu Paṭṭhāna˚ Mil 12 Netti˚ one of the Canonical books ‣See netti.

      from pa + kṛ
    Pakaroti
    1. to effect, perform, prepare, make, do SN i.24 (pakubbati) Snp 254 (identical) 781, 790 (ppr. medium pakubbamāna; cp. Nd1 65) Iti 21 (puññaṁ) Snp-a 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati).
    2. past participle pakata (q.v.)
    3. pa + kṛ; , Vedic prakaroti
    Pakāra
    1. make-up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation mode, way, manner Ja ii.222 DN-a i.132 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 109 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 135 Pv-a 178 Pv-a 199; Sdhp 94 Sdhp 466
    2. ingredient flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Snp 241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho) Mil 63
    3. (—˚) of a kind by way of, in nānā˚;

      • adjective various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni) Pv-a 50
      • vutta˚ as said, the said Vism 42, 44 Pv-a 136
      pa + kṛ; , cp. last; but Sanskrit prakāra “similarity”
    Pakāraka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. of that kind SN ii.81 Ja vi.259
      from pakāra
    Pakāreti
    1. to direct one’s thought towards dative Ja vi.307
    denominative from pakāra
    Pakāsati
    1. to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Snp 445 Snp 1032 (= bhāsati tapati virocati Nd2 373). causative pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain make known, give information about Vin ii.189 SN i.105 Iti 111 (brahmacariyaṁ) Dhp 304 Snp 578 Snp 1021 Pug 57 Ja vi.281 (atthaṁ to explain the meaning or matter) Dhp-a ii.11 (identical) Pv-a 1 Pv-a 12 (ānisaṁsaṁ) 29 (atthaṁ upamāhi), 32 (attānaṁ), 40 (adhippāyaṁ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc.
    2. gerundive pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in ˚kamma explanation, information annunciation Vin ii.189 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.239)

      • pp pakāsita (q.v.)
      pa + kāś
    Pakāsana
    neuter
    1. explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Ps i.104 (dhamma˚) Mil 95 Snp-a 445 Pv-a 2 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 103 (explanation of āvi)
    pa + kāś, cp. pakāsati
    Pakāsita
    1. explained, manifested, made known SN i.161 SN i.171f.; ii.107 (su˚) Pv-a 53 Pv-a 63
    past participle of pakāseti
    Pakiṇāti
    1. to deal in Vin ii.267 (gerundive ˚kiṇitabba)
    2. pa + kiṇāti
    Pakiṇṇaka
    adjective
    1. scattered about; figuratively miscellaneous, particular, opposite to sādhāraṇa Kp-a 74; cp. Compendium 13, 952; Vism 175 (˚kathā) 317 sq. (identical)
    • Name of the xivth book of the Jātakas
    pa + kiṇṇa ( past participle of kirati) + ka
    Pakitteti
    1. to proclaim Ja i.17 (v.85)
    pa + kitteti
    Pakirati
    1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall DN ii.139 = 148 (
    2. absolutive pakiriya) Ja v.203 (so read for parikati); vi.207 (
    3. aorist ˚kiriṁsu).
    4. absolutive pakira (= pakiritvā) Ja vi.100 (read pakira-cārī, cp. Commentary on p. 102), 198 (read p
    5. parī).
    6. causative pakireti 1. to throw down upset Vin iv.308 (thūpaṁ) SN i.100 Iti 90 (variant reading kīrati)
    7. to scatter SN i.100 = It 66 Pug 23
    8. past participle pakiṇṇa ‣See ˚ka
    pa + kirati
    Pakiledeti
    1. to make wet, moisten (with hot water) Ja vi.109 (= temetvā khipati Commentary )
    Caus of pa + kliś, cp. kelideti
    Pakujjhati
    1. to be angry SN i.221 SN i.223 (˚eyyaṁ)
    pa + krudh
    Pakuṭa
    (?)
    1. an inner verandah Vin ii.153 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.175
    • Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. explained it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha (= Sanskrit prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prakrit paoṭṭha, cp. Pali koṭṭha1 & koṭṭhaka; 1) Spelling pakulla at Nd2 485 B (for magga, variant reading makula)
    variant reading pakuṭṭa
    Pakuppati
    1. to be angry Ja iv.241
    pa + kup
    Pakubb˚
    1. ‣See pakaroti
    Pakūjin
    adjective
    1. to sing out to (each other) (aññamaññaṁ) Ja vi.538
    pa + kūj
    Pakopa
    1. agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs 1060 Vism 235, 236
    pa + kopa
    Pakopana
    adjective
    1. shaking, upsetting, making turbulent Iti 84 (moho citta-pakopano)
    pa + kopana, of kup
    Pakka

    adjective

    • ripe for destruction overripe, decaying, in phrase ˚gatta
    • adjective having a decaying body, with putrid body [Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pakvagātra Divy 82], combined with arugatta at MN i.506 SN iv.198 Mil 357 (cp. Miln translation ii.262), 395

  • heated, glowing Dīpavaṁsa i.62.

    1. ˚āsaya receptacle for digested food, i.e. the abdomen (opposite āmāsaya) Vism 260, 358; Kp-a 59
    2. ˚odana (adjective having cooked one’s rice Snp 18 (= siddhabhatta Snp-a 27), cp. Ja iii.425
    • ˚jjhāna “guessing at ripeness,” i.e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live in list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9 explained at DN-a i.94 as “paripāka-gata-cintā.” -pakka ripe fruit Kp-a 59 -pūva baked cake Ja iii.10
    • ˚vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pug 44 45, cp. PugA 225
    • ˚sadisa ripe-like, appearing ripe PugA 225
    Vedic pakva, a past participle formation of pac to cook, Indogermanic *peqṷo = Latin coquo “cook,” Avestan pac-, Obulg pekaͅ, Lithuanian kepû, Latin coctus 1. ripe (opposite āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also “cooked, boiled, baked” SN i.97 (opposite āmaka); iv.324 (˚bhikkhā) Snp 576 Ja v.286

    • nt. pakkaṁ that which is ripe, i.e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pug 44 45; often in connection with amba˚ i.e. a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 394; Pv iv.123 Dhp-a iii.207 Pv-a 187
    • apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp 102.
  • Pakkaṭhati
    [
    1. to cook, boil up; only in causative II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexplained ṭṭh for ṭh to cause to be boiled up Ja i.472 (variant reading pakkuṭṭh˚, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 84).
    2. past participle pakkaṭhita (q.v.) Pakkathita (pakkuthita) pa + kaṭhati of kvath
    Pakkaṭhita (pakkuthita)
    1. cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaṁsa 4833 Ja v.268 (pakaṭṭh˚ variant readings pakkudh & jakankaṭhi); vi.112 (˚kaṭṭh˚), 114 (identical; Burmese variant ˚kuṭhita) Dhp-a i.126 (kaṭṭh˚, variant reading pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh˚, variant reading pakuṭṭh˚); ii.5 (kaṭṭh˚, variant readings pakuṭṭh & pakkuth˚); iii.310 (1st passage kaṭṭh˚, variant reading pakuṭṭh˚ pakkuṭṭh˚, pakkuthita; = pakkuṭṭhita at identical passage Vv-a 67 in 2nd passage kaṭṭh˚, variant reading pakuṭṭh˚ & pakkuthita, left out at identical passage Vv-a 68) Thag-a 292 (pakkuthita)
    also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etymology pakka + ṭṭhita for pa + kaṭhita. To kvath, Pali kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in past participle as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp. Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 42
    Pakkaṭṭhī
    feminine
    1. a boiling (-hot) mixture (of oil?) MN i.87 explained by Commentary as katita-(= kaṭh˚ gomaya, boiling cow-dung, variant reading chakaṇakā ‣See p. 537 The identical passage at Nd2 199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as “cow-dung” is more likely than “boiling oil.”
    from pa + kvat, evidently as abstract to pakkaṭṭhita; reading uncertain
    Pakkanta
    1. gone, gone away, departed SN i.153 Snp p. 124 Ja i.202 (spelt kkh) Pv-a 78
    past participle of pakkamati
    Pakkandati
    1. to cry out, shout out, wail Snp 310 (3rd preterite pakkanduṁ Ja vi.55 (identical), 188 (identical), 301 (identical)
    Vedic prakrandati, pra + krand
    Pakkama
    1. going to, undertaking, beginning DN i.168 (tapo˚; translation “all kinds of penance”)
    from pa + kram
    Pakkamati
    1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth MN i.105 Pug 58 DN-a i.94 Pv-a 13
    2. preterite 3 singular pakkāmi SN i.92 SN i.120 Snp
    3. past participle 93, 124 Pv-a 5 (uṭṭhāy'āsanā), 19 (identical); 3rd
    4. plural pakkamuṁ Snp 1010 and pakkamiṁsu SN i.199
    5. past participle pakkanta (q.v.)
    6. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Mil 250
    Vedic prakramati, pra + kram
    Pakkava
    1. a kind of medicinal plant Vin i.201 (cp. paggava)
    etymology ?
    Pakkula
    1. ‣See pākula
    Pakkosati
    1. to call, summon Ja i.50 Ja ii.69 Ja ii.252 (= avheti); v.297; vi.420 Dhp-a i.50 Pv-a 81 (variant reading ˚āpeti). causative II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for order to come Ja i.207 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 153 Dhp-a i.185
    2. pa + kosati, kruś
    Pakkha1
    1. side of the body, flank wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in compounds. ˚biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Buddhaghosa on ulūka-camma at Vin i.186 (MV. v.2, 4; cp. Vinaya Texts ii.16 where read ulūka˚ for lūka?) Ja vi.538 and ˚hata one who is struck on (one side, i.e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sanskrit pakṣāghāta) Vin ii.90 MN iii.169 AN iii.385 Pug 51 (= hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227) Mil 245 Mil 276 (cp. Miln translation ii.62, 117)-also as wing of a house at Dhs-a 107 and wing of a bird at SN ii.231 Snp-a 465 (in explanation of pakkhin)
    2. side, party, faction; adj (—˚ associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin ii.299 Snp 347 (aññāṇa˚), 967 (kaṇhassa p. = Māra˚ etc ‣See Nd1 489; Nett 53 (taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚) 88 (identical), 160 (identical) DN-a i.281 Dhp-a i.54 Pv-a 114 (paṭiloma˚). pakkhasankanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin i.60 iv.230, 313
    3. pakkhaṁ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (
    4. locative ) Ja i.343
    5. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon-lit fortnight is called sukka-pakkha (or juṇha˚), the dark or moonless one kāḷa˚ (or kaṇha˚) MN i.20 (cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14th, 15th & 8; th day of the fortnight) Snp 402 AN i.142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144 = Vv 156 (cātuddasī etc.; cp. Vv-a 71):. AN v.123f. (kāḷa˚, juṇha˚) Thag 2, 423 (= aḍḍhamāsa-mattaṁ Thag-a 269); Pv ii.955 (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca = kaṇha-sukka-bheda p. Pv-a 135); Vism 101 (dasâhaṁ vā pakkhaṁ vā) Vv-a 314 (sukka˚) Pv-a 55 (kāḷa˚).

      • alternative, statement
      • locative pakkhe (—˚) with regard or reference to Kp-a 80 (tassa pañhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe) Snp-a 168 (identical)
    Vedic pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Latin pectus ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Pakkha2
    adjective
    1. visible, clear; —˚ resembling, like Mil 75 (mātu˚ and pitu˚)
    cp. Vedic prakhya clear, & Sanskrit (—˚) prakhya like, of pra + ; khyā
    Pakkha3
    1. a cripple. cp. iii.6, 10 Ja vi.12 (= pīṭha-sappī Commentary ). Note Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit phakka is enumerated at Mvyut. 271120 with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa pangu, reminding of the comb; n kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN ii.85 iii.385. = Pug 51
    cp. Sanskrit phakka (?)
    Pakkhaka
    1. (& ˚ika) neuter?

      1. a dress made of wings or feathers, in compound ulūka˚ of owl’s wings ‣See ulūka˚ Vin iii.34 (˚ṁ nivāsetvā) AN ii.206 ≈ (˚ika)
      from pakkha1
    Pakkhatta
    neuter
    1. being a partner of, siding in with Vism 129, 130
    from pakkha1
    Pakkhanta
    1. at DN-a i.38 read as pakkanta
    Pakkhandaka
    adjective = pakkhandin Snp-a 164
    • feminine pakkhandikā [Vedic (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs. diarrhoea, dysentery DN ii.127 (lohita˚) Ja iii.143 Ja v.441 (lohita˚) Mil 134

    Pakkhandati
    1. to spring forward, to jump on to MN i.86 Ja i.461 Vv 8412 (absolutive pakkhandiyāna = pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā Vv-a 338); to be after someone in pursuit Dhp-a i.198 usually figuratively to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (
    2. locative ), to take to, in phrases cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati MN i.186 SN iii.133 cp. Mil 326 (nibbāne) AN ii.165 iii.245 (avyāpāde); iv.442 (adukkha-m-asukhe) Iti 43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaṁ p. Mil 135
    3. past participle pakkhanna (q.v.)
    4. pa + khandati, of skand
    Pakkhandana
    neuter
    1. leaping, springing Ja ii.32 Ps 1. 194 (pariccāga-& pakkh˚-nissagga).; 2. attack, assault, chasing Dhp-a i.198
    2. from pakkhandati
    Pakkhandin
    adjective noun
    1. adjective bold, braggart, literally jumping on or forth Dhp 244 Snp 89 (= pakkhandaka Snp-a 164)
    2. a military scout, lit an onrusher, a bravo DN i.51 (cp. Dial. i.68) DN-a i.157 Ja ii.32 Ja ii.281
    from pakkhandati
    Pakkhanna
    1. jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired MN i.39 Thag 1, 342 (diṭṭhigahanā˚) Ja v.471 Mil 144 (saṁsaya˚), 156, 390 (kupatha˚)
    past participle of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta
    Pakkhara
    1. bordering, trimming Ja vi.223 (of a carriage)
    cp. Sanskrit prakṣara & prakhara “ein Panzer für Pferde” BR.
    Pakkhalati1
    1. to wash, cleanse Ja v.71 (absolutive pakkhalya = dhovitvā Commentary p. 74).
    2. causative pakkhāleti (q.v.)
    3. pa + kṣal
    Pakkhalati2
    1. to stumble, trip, stagger Ja iii.433 Ja vi.332 DN-a i.37 Dhs-a 334
    pa + khalati, of skhal
    Pakkhāyati
    1. to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible DN ii.99 (cp. Thag 1, 1034 where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causâ) MN ii.32 SN iv.144 SN v.153 SN v.162 AN iii.69f.
    pa + khyā, Vedic prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha; 2
    Pakkhāleti
    1. to wash, cleanse Vin i.9 (pāde) DN ii.85 (identical) MN i.205 SN i.107 Ja vi.24 (pāde) Vv-a 261
    causative of pa + ksal, cp. khaleti
    Pakkhika
    adjective
    1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumeration of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin i.58 = ii.175; iv.75 Ja ii.210 Vism 66
    2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with (—˚) Vism 130, in phrase vighāta˚ anibbāna-saṁvattanika associated with destruction, etc. MN i.115 Dhs-a 382 Also in mūga˚ leading to deafness Ja i.45 (v.254). Dhp-a i.82 (paramattha-sacca˚)
    for pakkhiya = Vedic pakṣya of pakkha1 3
    Pakkhitta
    1. put down into, thrown into (locative ) Snp p. 15 (pāyāso udake p.) Pv-a 58 (ātave p naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaṁ p.)
    2. past participle of pakkhipati
    Pakkhin
    adjective noun
    1. winged the winged one, a bird DN i.71 (+ sakuṇa = pakkhayutto sakuṇo DN-a i.208) = AN ii.209 = v.206 = Pug 58 SN ii.231 Snp 606 (= sakuṇo Snp-a 465); Pv iii.53 (˚gaṇā = sakuṇagaṇā Pv-a 198)
    2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to SN v.97 (vighāta˚ for the usual ˚pakkhika)
    from pakkha1 = pakkhānaṁ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati Snp-a 465 Vedic pakṣin bird
    Pakkhipati
    1. to put down into (with
    2. locative of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) DN ii.162 (tela-doṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraṁ p.) SN ii.85 Ja ii.210 (mukhe) Mil 247 (Amat’ osadhaṁ) Pv-a 41 (atthikāni thūpe p.) Dhp-a i.71 (the corpse into the fire)
    3. to throw into hurl into, in Niraya-passage at MN iii.183 = AN i.141 Nd2 304iii; cp. nikkhipati
    4. (figuratively) to include in insert, arrange, interpolate Mil 13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaṁ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.).

      • causative II. pakkhipāpeti Ja i.467 DN-a i.136
      • past participle pakkhitta (q.v.)
      pa + kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334
    Pakkhima
    1. a bird Thag 1, 139 (read ˚me for ˚maṁ) Ja v.339
    = pakkhin
    Pakkhiya
    adjective noun
    1. siding with, associating with; masculine part, side; only in phrase (satta-tiṁsa-) bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment Iti 75 (satta only) Ja i.275 Vism 678 sq. Snp-a 164 Vv-a 95 ‣See Compendium 179 and note 1. pakkhiya at Thag 2, 425 is not clear (explained at Thag-a 269 by vaccha, variant reading sacca)
    2. from pakkha1 2; cp. pakkhikā
    Pakkhepa
    masculine & ˚na
    • neuter

      1. throwing, hurling; being thrown into (locative ) Pv-a 221 (lohakumbhi˚ in passage of ordeals in Niraya) Dhp-a i.357 (nadiyaṁ visa-pakkhepana)
    from pa + kṣip
    Pakhuma
    1. an eyelash unsally as adjective: having eyelashes (—˚) DN ii.18 (go˚) SN i.132 (˚antarikāyaṁ between the lashes) Ja v.216 (visāla˚ for alārapamha Text) Thag-a 255 (dīgha˚ for āyatapamha Thag 2, 383) Vv-a 162 279
    Vedic pakṣman, diaeretic form for the contracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etymology cp. Avestan pasnem eyelid, Latin pecto to comb, pecten comb, Old High German fahs hair
    Pagaṇḍaka
    1. ‣See pakaṭṭhaka
    Pagabbha
    adjective
    1. bold, daring, forward, reckless MN i.236 SN i.201 (sup˚) AN iii.433 Snp 89 Snp 852 (ap˚ = na pagabbha Kp-a 242, cp. also Nd1 228) Dhp 244 (= kāyapāgabbhiyâdīhi samannāgata Dhp-a iii.354) Ja ii.32 Ja ii.281 Ja ii.359 Ja v.448 Mil 389 Dāvs iii.26
    • apagabbha at Vin. iii.3 is used in quite a different sense, viz. “one who has no more connection with a womb” (a + pa + *garbha)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pragalbha
    Pagabbhatā
    feminine
    1. resoluteness, boldness, decision Ja vi.273 ‣See also pāgabbhiya
    abstract from pagabbha, cp. Sanskrit pragalbhatā
    Pagabbhin
    adjective
    1. bold Ja vi.238
    = pagabbha
    Pagama
    1. going forth from (—˚) Dhs-a 329
    from pra + gam
    Pagāḷha
    1. sunk into, immersed in (locative ) Snp 441 Snp 772 (= ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd1 26)
    2. past participle of pagāhati
    Pagāhati
    1. to dive into, sink into Snp 819 (≈ ajjhogāha Snp-a 537 = ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd1 152). past participle pagāḷha
    2. pa + gāhati
    Pagiddha
    adjective
    1. greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (locative ) Ja v.269 (= gadhita mucchita Commentary on p. 274)
    2. pa + giddha
    Paguṇa
    adjective
    1. learned, full of knowledge, clever, well-acquainted, familiar DN iii.170 Vv 532 (= nipuṇa Vv-a 232) Ja ii.243 Ja iv.130 Ja v.399 Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā) DN-a i.95 Snp-a 195 Kp-a 73
    • paguṇaṁ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly Ja ii.166 Ja iii.537 (tayo vede) Mil 12 (Abhidhamma-piṭakaṁ)
    1. ˚bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguñña Ja iii.537 Dhs 48 49
    pa + guṇa cp. Sanskrit praguṇa straight, derivation “kind”
    Paguṇatā
    feminine & Paguṇatta
    • neuter (doubtful) abstract to paguṇa in explanation of pāguññatā at Dhs 48 & 49 (translation fitness competence).

    Pagumba
    1. a thicket, bush, clump of trees Snp 233
    pa + gumba
    Pageva
    adverb
    1. (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, literally “right at the earliest” Ja i.354 Ja v.242 Mil 91 Vism 93, 259, 322 Vv-a 258 Pv-a 115 Pv-a 116 Pv-a 117
    • Compar. pagevataraṁ MN iii.145
    • atippage too early Ja iii.48
    • atippago id MN i.84 SN ii.32 AN v.48
    page = Sanskrit prage + eva, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prāgeva
    Paggaṇhāti
    1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up DN i.123 (sujaṁ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliṁ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting) SN i.141 SN ii.280 Ja i.89 (paveṇiṁ) Pv-a 74 (turiyāni).
    2. absolutive paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Snp 350 (= uttāretvā Snp-a 349) Dhp 268 (tulaṁ); Pv ii.917 (bāhuṁ); iv.74 (uccaṁ p.) Vv-a 7 (añjaliṁ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) Ja v.267 Ja vi.188 Pv-a 92 (= pasāreti)
    3. to take up, take care of, favour support, befriend (opposite niggaṇhāti) Ja i.511 Ja ii.21 v.116, 369 Mil 185 Mil 186 Pv-a 114 (sappurisa-dhammaṁ)
    4. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaṁ one’s mind) SN v.9 Ps ii.20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati).

      • past participle paggahita (q.v.)
      • causative paggaheti to exert Mil 390 (mānasaṁ).
      • causative II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Mil 21 (dhamma-dhajaṁ) Ja v.248 Pv-a 74 (turiyāni)
      pa + gaṇhāti
    Paggalita
    1. dripping Pv-a 56 (variant reading for Text vigalita)
    past participle of pa + gal
    Paggava
    1. a medicinal plant with bitter fruit Ja ii.105 (variant reading pakkava). Paggaha & Paggaha;
    etym?
    Paggaha
    Paggāha;
    1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha : DN iii.213 (variant reading paggāha, also ˚nimitta) Ps ii.8 (˚cariyā), 20 (˚ṭṭha) DN-a i.63 (viriy-indriyassa ˚lakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha : AN i.83 AN i.256 (˚nimitta) Dhs 277 (translation “grasp”), 336, 1359 (˚nimitta) Dhs-a 406 2. paggaha favour, kindness, patronage same meaning in epithet Sanskrit
      1. Vin iii.145 = AN iii.66 Ja v.116 (opposite niggaha); vi.371 (identical)
      from paggaṇhāti
    Paggahaṇa
    neuter
    1. stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliṁ paggaṇhāti) Ja iii.82-abstract ˚tā = paggaha 1. Vism 134
    from pa + gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti
    Paggahita
    1. holding up, or (being) held up Vin ii.131 (chatta˚ holding up a parasol,) 207 (identical) Ja vi.235 Snp-a 175 (= Sn p. 21)
    past participle of paggaṇhāti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7 Divy 102
    Paggāha
    1. ‣See paggaha
    Paggāhika
    adjective
    1. belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in compound ˚sālā a shop Vin ii.291 (cp. Vin Texts iii.383: “would he set up as a hawker in cloth or would he open a shop”)
    paggāha + ika
    Paggharaṇa
    adjective-noun
    1. trickling, oozing, dripping Ja i.146 Ja vi.187 (a˚); feminine ˚ī DN i.74 (= bindubinduṁ udakaṁ paggharati DN-a i.218); the ʻ mark ʼ of liquid Dhs-a 332
    2. from paggharati
    Paggharaṇaka
    adjective
    1. flowing, trickling, oozing out Ja vi.187 (app˚-velā), 531 Dhp-a i.126 (lohitaṁ); Vism 262
    from paggharati
    Paggharati
    1. to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip SN i.150 Snp p. 125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.) Ja vi.328 Pv i.67 (gabbho pagghari = vissandi Pv-a 34); ii.911 (= vissandati Pv-a 119); ii.926 (akkhīni p. = vissandanti Pv-a 123 sic lege!) Mil 180 Vv-a 76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariṁsu). past participle paggharita (q.v.)
    2. pa + gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sanskrit nirjhara, Prakrit pajjharati Mālatī-M. p. 51. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pragharati Divy 57 Divy 409 Avs i.282
    Paggharita
    1. flowing, trickling SN ii.179 Thag 2, 466 Pv-a 198 (khīra)
    past participle of paggharati
    Paghaṇa
    neuter
    1. a covered terrace before a house Vin ii.153 (“paghanaṁ nāma yaṁ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra-dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṁ niharitvā katapadesass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ” Buddhaghosa, quoted Vinaya Texts iii.175)
    cp. Sanskrit praghaṇa
    Paṅka
    1. mud mire; defilement, impurity SN i.35 SN i.60 SN iii.118 AN iii.311 iv.289 Snp 970 (˚danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); iii.236 (identical); iv.362 (identical) Snp 535 Snp 845 Snp 945 Snp 1145 (Nd2 374 kāma-panko kāma-kaddamo etc.) Dhp 141 Dhp 327 Nd1 203; Pv iii.33; iv.32 Mil 346 Dhs 1059 1136
    cp. Epic Sanskrit panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Latin palus; cp. Gothic fani mire, excrements Old High German, fenna “fen,” bog; also Ital. fango mud Old High German fūht wet ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under palus Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit panka, e.g. Jtm 215 panka-nimagna
    Paṅga
    1. only in compound paṅgacīra neuter at DN i.6 “blowing through toy pipes made of leaves” (Dialogues of the Buddha i.10, where is compound Sinhalese pat-kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 205). Buddhaghosa explains as “p vuccati paṇṇa-nāḷikā; taṁ dhamantā kīḷanti” DN-a i.86
    2. ?
    Paṅgu
    adjective
    1. lame, crippled ‣See pakkha3 and next
    Sanskrit pangu; etymology?
    Paṅgula
    adjective
    1. lame Ja vi.12 Vism 280
    from pangu
    Pacati
    1. to cook, boil, roast Vin iv.264 figuratively torment in purgatory (trs. and intransitive): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in name SN ii.225 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 14
    • ppr. pacanto tormenting, genitive pacato (+
    • causative pācayato) DN i.52 (explained at DN-a i.159 where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa).
    • past participle pakka (q.v.)
    • causative pacāpeti & pāceti; (q.v.)
    • passive paccati to be roasted or tormented (q.v.)
    Vedic pacati, Indogermanic *peqṷō, Avestan pac-; Old Bulgarian peka to fry, roast, Lithuanian kepū bake
    Pacana
    neuter
    1. cooking J̄ iii.425 (˚thālikā); v.385 (˚bhājana) Thag-a 29 (bhatta˚) DN-a i.270 Pv-a 135
    from pac, su pacati
    Pacarati
    1. to go after, walk in; figuratively practise, perform, observe Vv 329 (variant reading pavarati, cp. Vv-a 136)
    pa + carati
    Pacala
    1. shaking, trembling, wavering Dhs-a 378
    from pa + cal
    Pacalati
    1. to dangle Vv-a 36 (Burmese variant paj˚)
    pa + calati
    Pacalāyati
    1. to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze AN iii.343 iv.344; iv.85 (quot. at Dhs-a 236) Ja i.384 (˚āyituṁ ārabbhi); Vism 300
    quasi- denominative or
  • causative from pacala, pa + cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti
  • Pacalāyikā
    feminine
    1. nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs 1157 (= akkhidalādīnaṁ pacalabhāvaṁ karoti Dhs-a 378)
    abstract from pacalāyati
    Pacalita
    1. shaken, wavering, unstable Thag 1, 260
    past participle of pacalati
    Pacāpeti
    1. to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin iv.264 Ja i.126 (āhāraṁ); ii.15 (bhattaṁ), 122
    causative of pacati
    Pacāreti
    1. to go about in (accusative ), to frequent, to visit AN i.182 AN i.183 (pacārayāmi, gloss sañcarissāmi)
    2. pa + cāreti, causative of car
    Pacālaka
    adjective
    1. swinging, shaking; neuter accusative as
    2. adverb in kāya- (& bāhu˚); ppacālakaṁ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin ii.213
    3. from pacāleti
    Pacāleti
    1. to swing, sway, move about Thag 1, 200 (mā pacālesi “sway and nod” Translation)
    pa + causative of cal
    Pacinati
    1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate SN iii.89 SN iv.74 (dukkhaṁ = ācināti p. 73) Dhp 47 Dhp 48 (pupphāni ocinati Dhp-a i.366) Ja iii.22
    2. future pacinissati Dhp-a i.361
    3. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Snp 837 (ppr. pacinaṁ = pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd1 185; = pavicinati Snp-a 545);
    4. future pacessati Dhp 44 Dhp 45 (sic F.; MSS vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac˚; explained at Dhp-a i.334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati)
    5. passive pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate SN iv.74 (opposite khīyati)
    or ˚cināti) [pa + cināti, cp, ācināti
    Pacuṭa
    1. is doubtful reading at DN-a i.164 (with variant readings pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for DN i.54 Text paṭuva (variant readings pamuṭa, samudda) and is explained by gaṇṭhika, i.e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt ‣See discussed under pavuṭā
    Pacura
    adjective
    1. general, various, any; abundant, many Ja v.40 (= bahu salabha Commentary ) Mil 408 (˚jana) Dāvs iv.11, 50 Vv-a 213 (˚jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 5011) ‣See also pasura
    cp. late Sanskrit pracura
    Pacessati
    1. ‣See pacinati
    Pacca˚
    1. ; is contracted form of paṭi before a˚, like paccakampittha preterite from paṭikampati
    Paccakkosati
    1. to curse in return SN i.162 AN ii.215
    paṭi + ā + kruś
    Paccakkosana
    neuter
    1. cursing in return Dhp-a iv.148 (a˚)
    from paṭi + ā + kruś
    Paccakkha
    adjective
    1. “before the eye,” perceptible to the senses, evident clear, present Dhs-a 254 Pv-a 125 Sdhp 416. Often in obl. cases, viz. instrumental ˚ena personally Ja i.377 abl ˚ato from personal experience Ja v.45 Ja v.195 Ja v.281
    • appaccakkhāya without ‣Seeing or direct perception, in explanation of paccaya at Vism 532; also in phrase paccakkhato ñatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally Ja i.262 Ja iii.168

      1. ˚kamma making clear, i.e. demonstrativetion, realisation only negative ; not realising etc. SN iii.262 Dhs 390 (translation “inability to demonstrativete”; cp. Dhs-a 254)
      paṭi + akkha3, cp. Vedic pratyakṣa
    Paccakkhāta
    1. rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin ii.244 245 (sikkhā); iii.25 (identical) Ja iv.108 Dhp-a i.12 cp. Vinaya Texts i.275
    past participle of paccakkhāti
    Paccakkhāti
    1. literally to speak against, i.e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaṁ, dhammaṁ sikkhaṁ or similar terms of a religious-moral nature Vin iii.25 SN ii.231 SN ii.271 AN iv.372 absolutive paccak- khāya, in following connsācariyaṁ Ja iv.200
    2. sikkhaṁ Vin iii.23 34 (a˚) SN ii.231 SN iv.190 Pug 66 67; sabbaṁ SN iv.15
    3. ariyasaccaṁ SN v.428
    4. paccakkhāsi at Ja v.8 is gloss for pakatthāsi.
    5. past participle paccakkhāta (q.v.) Intens. paccācikkhati (q.v.)
    6. paṭi + akkhāti = ā + khyā
    Paccakkhāna
    neuter
    1. rejection, refusal Ja vi.422
    from paṭi + ā + khyā
    Paccagū
    adjective-noun
    1. “one who goes toward,” a pupil SN i.104 (Mārassa); variant readings baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha translates “unter M’s Herrschaft,” and refers paṭṭhagu to Sanskrit pātyagāḥ. Buddhaghosa ‣See Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319 reads baddhagū and explains by bandhavara sissa antevāsika
    a difficult word, composed of pacca + gū, the latter a by-form of ˚ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adverb formn of prep praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well ‣See paṭṭhagū The form may also be explained as a substantivised pl 3rd preterite of praṭi + gacchati = paccaguṁ
    Paccaggaḷa
    adjective
    1. in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi “stuck in his throat” MN i.333
    pratyak + gaḷa
    Paccaggha
    adjective
    1. recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin i.4 Ja i.80 Ja ii.435 Pv ii.316 (= abhinava mahaggha vā Pv-a 87); iii.105 (= abhinava Pv-a 214); Dāvs v.25 Pv-a 44
    paṭi + aggha, cp. Sanskrit pratyagra of different derivation
    Paccaṅga
    neuter
    1. literally “by-limb,” small limb, only in compdaṅgapaccaṅgāni limbs great and small all limbs ‣See anga
    paṭi + anga
    Paccañjana
    neuter
    1. anointing, ointment, unction DN i.12 = M i.511 DN-a i.98 (= bhavanīya-sītalabhessajj’ añjanaṁ)
    paṭi + añjana
    Paccati
    1. to be boiled, figuratively to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally
    • SN i.92 SN v.344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.) AN i.141 (phenuddehakaṁ p. niraye) Snp 670 Snp 671 Dhp 69 Dhp 119 Dhp 120 (pāpaṁ suffer for sin, cp. Dhp-a iii.14) Ja v.268 Pv iv.129 (= dukkhaṁ pāpuṇanti Pv-a 228); iv.339 (niraye paccare janā = paccanti Pv-a 255) Dhp-a iii.64 (explanation for tappati)
    passive of pacati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pacyate Divy 422
    Paccatta
    adjective
    1. separate, individual; usually accusative ˚ṁ
    2. adverb separately, individually, singly, by himself in his own heart DN i.24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DN-a on DN ii.77 = attano attano abbhantare MN i.251 MN i.337 (˚vedaniya name of a purgatory), 422 SN ii.199 SN iii.54f. iv.23, 41 sq., 168, 539 Snp 611 Snp 906 Dhp 165 Pv iii.106 (˚vedanā separate sufferings, = visuṁ visuṁ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā Pv-a 214) Dhs 1044 (ajjhatta + ; translated “self referable”) Mil 96 (˚purisa-kāra) Dhs-a 169 Vv-a 9 13 Pv-a 232

      1. ˚vacana expression of separate relation, i.e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, name of the accusative case Snp-a 303 Vv-a 281 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 35; Kp-a 213 236; in lieu of karaṇa Kp-a 213, of sāmin Snp-a 594
      2. paṭi + attan
    Paccatthata
    1. spread out DN ii.211
    past participle of gaṭi + ā + stṛ
    Paccattharaṇa
    neuter
    1. something spread against, i.e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on bedding of a couch (nisīdana˚) Vin i.47 295, 296 ii.208, 218 DN i.7 (kadali-miga-pavara˚, cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.137 (identical); iii.50 (identical) Ja i.126 Ja iv.353 (uṇṇāmaya) Pv-a 141 Pv-a 137
    pati + ā + stṛ; , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyāstaraṇa Divy 19
    Paccatthika
    adjective noun
    1. an opponent adversary, enemy Vin ii.94f. (atta˚ personal enemy). AN v.71 (identical; Text attha˚) DN i.50 DN i.70 DN i.137 Iti 83 Pv-a 62 cp. paccāmitta
    paṭi + attha + ka, literally opposite to useful, cp. Sanskrit pratyanīka & pratyarthin
    Paccana
    neuter
    1. being boiled, boiling. torture, torment Ja v.270 Snp-a 476 (˚okāsa). Paccanika, Paccaniya
    from paccati, cp. pacana
    Paccanika, Paccanīya
    adjective noun
    1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m enemy, adversary, opponent MN i.378 SN i.179 SN iv.127 Snp 761 Ps ii.67 sq. Snp-a 288 cp. vi.˚
    2. (in method reverse, negative, opposite to anuloma. Tika-Paṭṭhāna 71 passim cp. paṭiloma
      1. ˚gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā Snp-a 39
      cp. Sanskrit pratyanīka & ‣See paccatthika
    Paccanubhāsati
    1. to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate Kp-a 78, 79 sq
    paṭi + anubhāsati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyavabhāṣate to call to Divy 9
    Paccanubhoti
    1. to experience, undergo, realise MN i.295 SN v.218 SN v.264f. 286 sq. 353 AN iii.425f. Iti 38 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 44 Pv-a 107 (dukkhaṁ) future paccanubhossati DN ii.213 SN i.133 SN i.227 Pv iii.56
    2. passive paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146 (for upalabbhati).
    3. past participle paccanubhūta MN ii.32 SN ii.178 Iti 15
    4. paṭi + anu + bhū, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyanubhavati Divy 54 Divy 262 etc.
    Paccanusiṭṭha
    1. advised, admonished DN ii.209 = 225
    paṭi + anusiṭṭha
    Paccanta
    adjective noun
    1. adjective adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dhp 315 Ja i.11 (v.47, ˚desa), 377 (˚vāsika) Pv-a 201 (˚nagara) Dhp-a iii.488 (identical); Sdhp 11 (˚visaya). masculine the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin i.73 Ja i.126 (vihāra˚); ii.37 Mil 314 (˚e kupite in a border disturbance) Dhp-a i.101 (identical) Pv-a 20 (identical). ˚ṁ vūpasāmeti to appease the border Pv-a 20

      • P. in sense of “heathen” at Vism 121
      paṭi + anta, cp. Sanskrit pratyanta
    Paccantima
    adjective
    1. bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. ii.166; Sdhp 5
    from paccanta, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyantima frontier Divy 21 Divy 426
    Paccabhiññāṇa
    neuter
    1. recognition Dhs-a 110
    paṭi + abhi + ñāṇa
    Paccaya
    1. literally resting on, falling back on, foundation cause, motive etc ‣See on term as technical term of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1916, 21 feminine ; Compendium 42 sq. & especially 259 sq.

      1. -1. (literally) support, requisite means, stay. Usually with reference to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu’s daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana (gilānapaccaya-) bhesajja, i.e. clothing, food as alms a dwelling-place, medicine ‣See under; cīvara. Snp 339 (paccaya = gilāna-paccaya Snp-a 342) Mil 336 Mhvs 3 15
      • (applied) reason, cause, ground, motive, means condition MN i.259 (yaṁ yad eva paccayaṁ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means) SN ii.65 Nett 78 sq. DN-a i.125 Pv-a 104 The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism 600. Var. paccayas discussed at Vb-a 166f. (twofold, with reference to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause SN v.213f. AN i.82 Nd2 mūla Dhs 1084 1437
      • yathā paccayaṁ karoti do as he likes Nd2 p. 280 = SN iii.33 Often coupled with hetu, e.g. at SN iv.68f.; A. i.66; iv.151 sq. DN iii.284 Nd2 under mūla; Ps ii.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. i.e. paccaya became synonymous with our “relation,” understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 1
      • feminine (and foreword); Compendium 197 cp. Paṭṭhāna
      • ablative paccayā as
      • adverb by means of through, by reason of, caused by DN i.45 (vedanā ˚taṇhā etc ‣See paṭicca-samuppāda) MN i.261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ) Pv i.52
      • kamma˚); iv.150 tap˚;) Pv-a 147 (kamma˚)

    2. ground for, belief, confidence trust, reliance Ja i.118 Ja i.169 apara˚ without relying on anyone else SN iii.83 SN iii.135 AN iv.186 AN iv.210 Pv-a 226

      1. ˚ākāra the mode of causes, i.e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda Dhs-a 2 3 Vb-a 130f. (cp. Vism 522 sq.)
      from paṭi + i, cp. Vedic pratyaya & Pali pacceti, paṭicca
    Paccayatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adverb ) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin i.5 DN i.185 SN i.136 SN ii.25
    2. abstract from paccaya
    Paccayika
    adjective
    1. trustworthy DN i.4 SN i.150 AN ii.209 Ja vi.384 (paccāyika) Pug 57 DN-a i.73 Snp-a 475
    from paccaya
    Paccaladdhaṁsu
    1. ‣See paṭilabhati. Paccavidhum & Paccavyadhim
    Paccavidhuṁ
    Paccavyādhiṁ
    1. ‣See paṭivijjhati
    Paccavekkhati
    1. to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate ‣See M i.415 SN iii.103 SN iii.151 sq., iv.111, 236 sq. Ja v.302 Vb 193 194 (cp AN iii.323) Mil 16 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 277 Vv-a 6 48
    paṭi + avekkhati
    Paccavekkhana
    neuter & ˚nā
    • feminine

      1. looking at, consideration regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp. ; Compendium 58) MN i.415 DN iii.278 AN iii.27 Pug 21 (a˚) Dhs 390 (a˚ = dhammānaṁ sabhāvaṁ pati na apekkhati Dhs-a 254 translation “inability to consider”) Mil 388 Nett 85 Vb-a 140 Vism 43 (twofold); Sdhp 413
      paṭi + avekkhana, cp. late Sanskrit pratyaveksana & ˚nā
    Paccavekkhā
    feminine
    1. imagination Mbhv.27
    cp. late Sanskrit pratyavekṣā
    Paccasāri
    1. ‣See paṭisarati
    Paccassosi
    1. ‣See patissuṇāṭi
    Paccākata
    1. rejected, disappointed Vin iv.237 238
    past participle of paṭi + a + kṛ
    Paccākoṭita
    1. flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita + of the robes) MN i.385 SN ii.281 Dhp-a i.37
    past participle of paṭi + ākoṭeti
    Paccāgacchati
    1. to fall back on, return again, to go back to (accusative ), withdraw, slide back from (˚ to) Vin i.184 MN i.265 MN iii.114 Nd1 108 312; Kvu 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā˚) Pv-a 14 Pv-a 109 Pv-a 250. cp. pacceti
    2. paṭi + āgacchati
    Paccāgata
    1. gone back, withdrawn Ja v.120 Mil 125
    past participle of paccāgacchati
    Paccāgamana
    neuter
    1. return, going back, backsliding Mil 246
    from paṭi + ā + gam
    Paccācamati
    1. to swallow up, resorb SN v.48 AN v.337 Ja i.311 Mil 150 causative ˚camāpeti Mil 150
    2. paṭi + ā + camati; often spelt ˚vamati, but ‣See Trenckner, Mil 425
    Paccācikkhati
    1. to reject, repudiate, disallow DN iii.3 MN i.245 428 Vin iv.235
    Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi + ā + cikkhati of khyā
    Paccājāta
    1. reborn, come to a new existence DN i.62 DN iii.264 MN i.93 Pug 51
    past participle of paccājāyati
    Paccājāyati
    1. to be reborn in a new existence MN iii.169 SN ii.263 SN v.466 SN v.474 past participle paccājāta (q.v.)
    2. paṭi + ā + jāyati
    Paccāneti
    1. to lead back to (accusative ) Pv ii.116 (= punar āneti Commentary )
    2. paṭi + ā + neti
    Paccābhaṭṭha
    1. recited, explained Ja ii.48
    past participle of paccābhāsati
    Paccābhāsati
    1. to retort, recite, explain, relate Pv-a 57 (sic lege for pacchā˚). past participle paccābhaṭṭha
    2. paṭi + ābhāsati
    Paccāmitta
    1. literally “back-friend,” adversary, enemy DN i.70 AN iv.106 Ja i.488: DN-a i.182 Pv-a 155
    paccā = Sanskrit pratyak, adverb ; + mitta, cp. epithet Sanskrit pratyamitra
    Paccāropeti
    1. to show in return, retort, explain MN i.96 AN iv.193 cp. paccabhāsati
    paṭi + āropeti
    Paccāsati
    1. to ask, beg, pray Pv iv.56 (˚anto for ˚āsaṁsanto? C explnns by āsiṁsanto)
    from paṭi + āśā or = paccāsaṁsati or ˚siṁsati?
    Paccāsanne
    adverb
    1. near by Pv-a 216 = 280
    paṭi + āsanne
    Paccāsā
    feminine
    1. expectation Vin iv.286
    paṭi + āśā, cp. Sanskrit pratyāśā
    Paccāsāreti
    1. to make go (or turn) backward MN i.124 = AN iii.28 (= paṭinivatteti Commentary ) Vism 308 (sāreti pi p. pi)
    paṭi + ā + sāreti, causative of sṛ
    Paccāsiṁsati
    1. to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask DN ii.100 AN iii.124 Ja i.346 Ja i.483 Ja iii.176 v.214 Dhp-a i.14 Dhp-a ii.84 DN-a i.318 Vv-a 336 346 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 260
    paṭi + āsiṁsati
    Paccāharati
    1. to bring back, take back Vin ii.265 Vin iii.140 Ja iv.304
    paṭi + āharati
    Paccukkaḍḍhati
    1. to draw out again Vin ii.99
    paṭi + ukkaḍḍhati
    Paccukkaḍḍhana
    neuter
    1. drawing out again Vin v.222
    from preceding
    Paccuggacchati
    1. to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin ii.210 MN i.206 Snp 442 (= abhimukho upari gacchati Snp-a 392)
    paṭi + ud + gam
    Paccuggata
    1. illustrious Ja vi.280
    past participle of paccuggacchati
    Paccuggamana
    neuter
    1. going out to, meeting, receiving Ja iv.321 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 141 (˚ṁ karoti)
    from preceding
    Paccuṭṭhapanā
    feminine
    1. putting against, resistance, opposition Snp 245 (= paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā Snp-a 228)
    paṭi + ud + causative of sthā
    Paccuṭṭhāti
    1. to rise, reappear, to rise from one’s seat as a token of respect; always combined with abhivadati DN i.61 (Pot. ˚uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut ˚uṭṭhassati)
    paṭi + ud + sthā
    Paccuṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. rising from one’s seat, reverence DN i.125
    from preceding
    Paccuttarati
    1. to go out again, to withdraw SN i.8 AN iii.190 cp. paccupadissati
    paṭi + uttarati, but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229
    Paccudāvattati
    1. to return again to (accusative ) SN i.224 SN ii.104 AN v.337
    2. paṭi + ud + ā + vattati
    Paccudāvattana
    neuter
    1. coming back, return Dhs-a 389
    from preceding
    Paccudāharati
    1. recite in reply Thag 2, 40
    paṭi + ud + ā + hṛ
    Paccudeti
    1. go out towards Ja vi.559
    paṭi + ud + i
    Paccuddharati
    1. to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin ii.122 (udakapuñchaniṁ translation Vinaya Texts ii.152 “to wear out a robe”), 151 (gerukaṁ; translation Vinaya Texts ii.151 “to wipe down”)
    paṭi + uddharati
    Paccuddhāra
    1. taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin iv.121
    paṭi + uddhāra
    Paccupaṭṭhahati
    1. “to stand up before,” to be present; only in past participle paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q.v.)
    2. paṭi + upa + sthā
    Paccupaṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. (re)appearance, happening, coming on phenomenon Ja iii.524 Nett 28 Snp-a 509 Dhs-a 332 Thag-a 288 2. tending DN iii.191 3. variant readings gilānupaṭṭhāna
    2. from paṭi + upa + sthā; cp. Compendium 13 & Lakkhaṇa
    Paccupaṭṭhāpeti
    1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix SN iv.121 Ja iii.45 Ja iv.105 Ja v.211 2. to minister to, wait upon DN iii.189f.
    2. causative of paccupaṭṭhahati
    Paccupaṭṭhita
    1. (re)presented, offered, at one’s disposal, imminent, ready, present DN iii.218 (˚kāmā) Iti 95 (identical); Snp p. 105 Iti 111 Kvu 157, 280 Mil 123
    past participle of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyupasthita, Divy Index
    Paccupadissati
    1. to accept, receive; or: to show, point out Ja v.221 (variant reading paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; Commentary on p. 225 explains by sampaṭicchissati)
    reading uncertain; either paṭi + upadissati, or future of paṭi + upadisati, cp. upadaṁseti. It is not to be derived from ˚upadadāti
    Paccupalakkhaṇā
    feminine
    1. differentiation SN iii.261 (a˚) Dhs 16 = Pug 25 Dhs 292 555, 1057
    paṭi + upalakkhaṇā
    Paccupekkhaṇā
    feminine = paccavekkhaṇā SN iii.262 (a˚).
    Paccupeti
    1. to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset Ja iii.214 future ˚upessati Ja iv.362 (gloss upasevati)
    2. pati + upeti
    Paccuppanna
    1. what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future ) MN i.307 MN i.310 MN iii.188 190, 196 SN i.5 SN iv.97 AN i.264 AN iii.151 AN iii.400 DN iii.100 220, 275 Iti 53 Nd1 340; Pv iv.62 Dhs 1040 1043 Vb-a 157f. Pv-a 100 ‣See also atīta
    2. past participle of paṭi + uppajjati, cp. Sanskrit pratyutpanna
    Paccuyyāti
    1. to go out against, to go to meet somebody SN i.82 SN i.216
    paṭi + ud +
    Paccūsa˚
    ;
    1. “the time towards dawn,” morning, dawn; always. in compound with either ˚kāle (locative ) at morning Dhp-a iv.61 DN-a i.168 or ˚velāyaṁ (
    2. locative ) identical Vv-a 105 118, 165 Pv-a 61 or ˚samaye (
    3. locative ) identical SN i.107 Ja i.81 Ja i.217 Snp-a 80 Pv-a 38
    4. paṭi + Vedic uṣas feminine ; later Sanskrit pratyūṣa nt.
    Paccūha
    1. an impediment, obstacle SN i.201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl “Ay there is busy to-and-fro of words.” Commentary explains by paṭiloma-saddā) Ja vi.571
    cp. late Sanskrit pratyūha, prati + vah
    Pacceka
    adjective
    1. each one, single, by oneself, separate, various several DN i.49 (itthi); ii.261 (˚vasavattin, of the 10 issaras) SN i.26 (˚gāthā a stanza each), 146 (˚brahma an independent Brahma) AN ii.41 (˚sacca); v.29 (identical) Snp 824 (identical), 1009 (˚gaṇino each one having followers visuṁ visuṁ gaṇavanto Snp-a 583) Ja iv.114 (˚bodhiñāṇa) Nd1 58 (˚muni) DN-a i.148 (paccekā itthiyo) Snp-a 52 (˚bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha) 67 (identical), 73 (˚sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory) Pv-a 251 (identical), Sdhp 589 (˚bodhi)-paccekaṁ (adverb ) singly, individually, to each one Vv-a 282 ‣See also pāṭekka.

      1. ˚buddha one enlightened by himself, i.e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. MN iii.68 SN i.92 (“Silent Buddha” translation) Ja iii.470 Ja iv.114 Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Nett 190; Kp-a 178, 199 Snp-a 47 58, 63 Dhp-a i.80 171, 224, 230; iv.201 Pv-a 144 Pv-a 263 Pv-a 265 (= isi), 272, 283
      paṭi + eka, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratyeka Divy 335 Divy 336
    Pacceti
    1. to come on to, come back to, figuratively fall back on, realise, find one’s hold in DN i.186 (“take for granted,” cp. note Dialogues of the Buddha i.252) MN i.309 (kaṁ hetuṁ) 445 (identical) SN i.182 (“believe in,” Commentary icchati pattheti) Snp 662 Snp 788 Snp 800 Snp 803 Snp 840 = 908 Dhp 125 (= paṭieti Dhp-a iii.34) Nd1 85 108 (= paccāgacchati), 114 Pv ii.320 (= avagacchati Pv-a 87); Nett 93 Mil 125 Mil 313 Pv-a 116 (bālaṁ), 241 (agree to = paṭijānāti). absolutive paṭicca (q.v.) cp. paccāgacchati-
    2. past participle paṭīta (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + i
    Paccoḍḍita
    1. laid in return (of a snare) Ja ii.183 (variant reading paccoṭṭita)
    paṭi + oḍḍita
    Paccora
    adjective
    1. lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) AN iv.130 Dhp-a i.189
    paṭi + avara, cp. Sanskrit pratyavara
    Paccorohaṇī
    feminine
    1. the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (accusative ) especially the holy fire. AN v.234f. 249 sq., v.251. cp. orohaṇa & Sanskrit pratyavarohaṇa “descent,” name of a cert Gṛhya celebration (BR.)
    2. from paccorohati
    Paccorohati
    1. to come down again, descend DN i.50 DN ii.73 AN v.65 AN v.234
    paṭi + orohati
    Paccosakkati
    1. to withdraw, retreat, go away again DN i.230 Ja i.383 Mhvs 25, 84
    paṭi + osakkati which is either ava + sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, Pali Grammar § 282 or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60) or apa + sakkati
    Paccosakkanā
    feminine
    1. withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from Dhs-a 151
    abstract from paccosakkati
    Pacchaḍḍana
    neuter
    1. vomiting, throwing out Sdhp 137
    pa + chaḍḍana
    Pacchato
    adverb
    1. behind after Dhp 348 (= anāgatesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63 opp pure) Pv-a 56 Pv-a 74 Dhp-a iii.197 (˚vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i.e. always or close behind, Ja ii.123 (opposite purato purato)
    • cp. pacchā & pacchima;
    ablative formation from *paccha = Vedic paścā & paścāt, from Indogermanic *pos as in Lithuanian pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Avestan pasca behind, Latin post, after
    Pacchada
    1. a cover, wrapper; girdle Thag 2, 378 (= uracchada Thag-a253) Dhs-a 397 (variant reading for ˚cchāda)
    from pa + chad, cp. Sanskrit pracchada
    Pacchanna
    1. covered, wrapped, hidden Thag 1, 299 Ja iii.129
    pa + channa, of chad
    Pacchā
    adverb
    1. behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward DN i.205 Snp 645 Snp 773 Snp 949Nd1 33 (= pacchā vuccati anāgataṁ, pure vuccati atītaṁ) Nd2 395 Dhp 172 Dhp 314 Dhp 421 Pv i.111 115 (opposite purato); ii.99 (= aparabhāge Pv-a 116) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 88 Vv-a 71

    -ānutappati from ânutāpa

    1. to feel remorse Pv ii.712 Ja v.117
    • ānutāpa cp. Sanskrit paścattāpa
    1. remorse repentance Sdhp 288
    2. ˚āsa neuter āsa2
      1. “eating afterwards” i.e. aftermath SN i.74-gacchati at Kvu 624 ‣See paccā˚
      2. ˚gataka going or coming behind Ja vi.30
      • ˚jāta (-paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q.v. causal relation of posteriority in time
      • ˚nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opposite pubb’ uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) DN i.60 DN iii.191 AN iii.37 iv.265, 267 sq. DN-a i.168

        • bāhaṁ “arm behind, i.e. with arms (tied) behind one’s back DN i.245 Ja i.264 Dhp-a ii.39
        • bhatta “after-meal,” i.e. after the midday meal, either as ˚ṁ (
        • accusative -
        • adverb ) in the afternoon after the main meal, usually combined with piṇḍapāta paṭikkanta “returning from the alms-round after dinner” AN iii.320 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 38 and passim (cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paścādbhakta-piṇḍapāta-pratikrānta ‣See Indexes to Avs. & Divy), or as ˚kicca the duties after the midday meal (opposite purebhatta˚) DN-a; i.47 (in detail) Snp-a 133 134
        • ˚bhattika one who eats afterwards, i.e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat AN iii.220 (khalu˚ q.v.)
        • ˚bhāga hind or after part Ja ii.91 Pv-a 114
        • ˚bhāsati ‣See paccā˚
        • ˚bhūma belonging to the western country SN iii.5
        • ˚bhūmaka identical SN iv.312 = AN v.263
        • ˚mukha looking westward MN iii.5 DN ii.207 Thag 1, 529 Dhp-a iii.155 (opposite pācīna eastern)
        • vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part Ja iv.137
        • samaṇa Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paścācchramaṇa & opposite purahśramaṇa Avs ii.67, 150; Divy 154 Divy 330, 494
        1. a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin i.46 iii.10 (Ānanda); iv.78 (identical) Ud 90 (Nāgasamāla) Ja iv.123 Mil 15 (Nāgasena) Pv-a 38 Pv-a 93 (Ānanda)
        Vedic paścā & paścāt ‣See pacchato
    Pacchāda
    1. cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelango setappacchādo SN iv.291 = Ud 76 = DN-a i.75 Dhs-a 397
    pa + chāda
    Pacchānutappati
    1. ‣See under pacchā
    Pacchāyā
    feminine
    1. a place in the shade, shaded part Vin i.180 Vin ii.193 DN i.152 (= chāyā DN-a i.310) ii.205 AN iii.320
    pa + chāyā
    Pacchāḷiyaṁ
    1. at AN iii.76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti : either “throw into the lap” (? or (better) read pacchiyaṁ, locative of pacchi “into the basket” (of the girls & women)
    Pacchāsa
    1. aftermath SN i.74
    cp. pacchāli? perhaps from pacchā +
    Pacchi
    feminine
    1. a basket Ja i.9 Ja i.243 Ja ii.68 iii.21; vi.369 (paṇṇa˚), 560 (phala˚) Dhp-a ii.3 Dhp-a iv.205 (˚pasibbaka)
    etymology doubtful
    Pacchijjati
    1. to be cut short, to be interrupted Ja i.503 (lohitaṁ p.)
    pa + chijjati, passive of chid
    Pacchijjana
    neuter
    1. stopping, interruption Ja iii.214 (read assu-pacchijjana-divaso? passage corrupt.)
    from last
    Pacchita
    1. cut off, skinned Ja vi.249
    pa + chita, Sanskrit pracchita, past participle of chā, only in combination with prefixes
    Pacchindati
    1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin iv.272 Ja i.119 (kathaṁ ˚itvā), 148 (kathaṁ ˚ituṁ); iv.59 Pv-a 78 (dānavidhiṁ ˚i)
    2. to bring up (food), to vomit Dhp-a i.183 (āhāraṁ)
    pa + chindati
    Pacchima
    adjective
    1. hindmost, hind-, back-, last (opposite purima), latest DN i.239 MN i.23 (˚yāma the last night watch) DN-a i.45f. (identical ˚kicca duties or performances in the 3rd watch, corresponding to purima˚ & majjhima˚) Snp 352 Ja iv.137 (˚pāda); vi.364 (˚dvāra) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 75–⁠2. western (opposite purima or puratthima) DN i.153 (disā) SN i.145
    2. lowest, meanest Vin ii.108 MN i.23 SN ii.203
    Sanskrit paścima, superl. formation from *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā
    Pacchimaka
    adjective
    1. last, latest (opposite purimaka) Vin ii.9 Nd2 284 D. = Th 1, 202 Dhs-a 262 Ja vi.151
    2. lowest, meanest Ja i.285 (pacchimakā itthiyo)
    from pacchima
    Pacchedana
    neuter
    1. breaking, cutting DN-a i.141
    from pa + chid
    Pajagghati
    1. to laugh out loud Ja vi.475
    pa + jagghati
    Pajappati
    1. to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after SN i.5 = J vi.25 (anāgataṁ = pattheti Commentary )
    pa + jappeti
    Pajappā
    feminine
    1. desire, greed for, longing Ja vi.25 (anāgata˚) Snp 592 Dhs 1059 1136
    pa + jappā
    Pajappita
    1. desired, longed for SN i.181 Ja vi.359
    past participle of pajappeti
    Pajaha
    adjective
    1. only negative ; not giving anything up, greedy AN iii.76
    pa + jaha, pres. base of jahati
    Pajahati
    (˚jahāti)
    1. to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq as synonym of jahati ‣See Nd2 under jahati with all forms. Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at SN vi.57 (Index vol.)
    • Pres. pajahati SN i.187 SN iii.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3 (yaṁ na tumhākaṁ taṁ pajahatha) Iti 32 (kiṁ appahīnaṁ kiṁ pajahāma); 117 AN iv.109 sq (akusalaṁ, sāvajjaṁ) Snp 789 (dukkhaṁ), 1056, 1058 Ps i.63; ii.244. ppr. pajahaṁ SN iii.27
    • future pahāssaṁ (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 1511) MN ii.100
    • aorist pajahi pahāsi; Vin i.36 SN i.12 = 23 (sankhaṁ) Snp 1057
    • ger pahāya SN i.12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaṁ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Snp 17 Snp 209 Snp 520 & passim Nd2 430 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 122 (= hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Snp 639 and pajahitvā. fut pajahissati SN ii.226
    • gerundive pahātabba MN i.7 Snp 558 Vv-a 73 & pajahitabba -
    • past participle pahīna (q.v.)
    • passive pahīyati (q.v.)
    pa + jahati of
    Pajā
    feminine
    1. progeny, offspring, generation, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Biblical Greek in same meaning) DN ii.55 SN v.346 SN v.362 sq. AN ii.75f.; iv.290; v.232 sq., 253 sq. Snp 298 Snp 545 Snp 654 Snp 684 Snp 776 Snp 936 Snp 1104 (= sattā Nd2 377) Dhp 28 Dhp 85 Dhp 254 Dhp 343 (= sattā Dhp-a iv.49) Nd1 47 292; Pv ii.117; iv.334 Pug 57 Vism 223 (= pajāyana-vasena sattā) Dhp-a i.174 Pv-a 150 Pv-a 161
    • Very frequently in formula sassamana-brāhmaṇī pajā “this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans” DN i.250 SN i.160 SN i.168 SN i.207 SN ii.170; iii.28, 59; iv.158; v.204, 352 AN ii.130 AN v.204 Snp p. 15 Iti 121 etc
    Vedic prajā, pra + jan
    Pajānanā
    feminine
    1. knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as synonym of paññā Nd2 380 = Dhs 16 20, 555 Pug 25 Nett 28 54. As neuter ˚a at Vism 436
    2. from pajānāti
    Pajānāti
    1. to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish DN i.45 (yathābhūtaṁ really truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249 Snp 626 Snp 726f. 987 Iti 12 (ceto paricca) Dhp 402 Pv i.1112 (= jānāti Pv-a 60) Ja v.445 Pug 64
    • ppr. pajānaṁ Snp 884 Snp 1050 Snp 1104 ‣See explanation at Nd1 292 = Nd2 378 Iti 98 Pv iv.164; and pajānanto Snp 1051
    • absolutive paññāya (q.v.
    • causative paññāpeti;
    • past participle paññatta;
    • passive paññāyati
    • past participle ; paññāta (q.v.) cp. sampajāna
    pa + jānāti
    Pajāpati
    1. ˚ī 1. adjective together with his wife Vin i.23 342; iv.62 Ja i.345 Pv-a 20
    2. masculine

      1. Prajāpati (proper name), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of following Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā
      • ; prajāpati
      • feminine of Vedic prajāvant, adjective
      • n. from prajā “having (or rich in) progeny,” with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Note. 6216
      1. “one who has offspring,” a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case = "chief queen”) or a gahapati, in which case simply “wife”; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prajāpatī “lady” Divy 2 Divy 98
      • Vin i.23 Vin iii.25 Vin iv.18 258 SN ii.243 AN i.137 (catasso ˚iyo); iv.210, 214 Vv 416 (= one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka Vv-a 183) Dhp-a i.73 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 31. sapajāpatika
      • adjective together with his wife Vin i.23 342; iv.62 Ja i.345 Pv-a 20
      Vedic prajāpati, prajā + pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation
    Pajāyati
    1. to be born or produced Ja v.386 Ja vi.14
    pa + jāyati
    Pajāyana
    neuter
    1. being born Vism 223
    from pa + jan
    Pajja1
    1. a path, road Snp 514 DN-a i.262
    cp. Sanskrit padya
    Pajja2
    neuter
    1. foot-oil, foot-salve Vin i.205 DN ii.240 Ja iii.120 Ja iv.396 Ja v.376 (= pādabbhañjana Commentary )
    cp. Sanskrit padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Latin acupedius swift-footed ‣See also pattika1
    Pajjati
    1. to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compound with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc
    • Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. AN iv.362 (variant readings paccati, pabbati gacchati.).
    • past participle panna (q.v.)
    pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning “to come to fall,” later Sanskrit also “to go to”
    Pajjalati
    1. to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin i.180 Snp 687 (sikhi pajjalanto) Ja i.215 Thag-a 62 Pv-a 38 past participle pajjalita (q.v.)
    2. pa + jalati of jval
    Pajjalita
    1. in flames, burning, blazing SN i.133 Snp p. 21 (aggi) Dhp 146 Pv-a 43 (sāṭakā)
    past participle of pajjalati
    Pajjunna
    1. rain-cloud Ja i.332 (p. vuccati megho); iv.253. Otherwise only as proper name of the Rain God DN ii.260 SN i.29 Ja i.331
    Vedic parjanya, for etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under quercus & spargo
    Pajjota
    1. light, lustre, splendour, a lamp SN i.15 SN i.47 AN ii.140 Snp 349 Pug 25 Sdhp 590
    • telapajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 = DN i.85 AN i.56 ≈ Snp p. 15
    • dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Mil 21 paññā-pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16 20, 292, 555 Vb-a 115 pajjotassa nibbānaṁ the extinguishing of the lamp DN ii.157 SN i.159 AN iv.3
    cp. Vedic pradyota, pra + dyut
    Pajjhāyati
    1. to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; figuratively to be consumed or overcome with grief disappointment or remorse Vin iii.19 Vin iv.5 AN ii.214 216; iii.57 Ja iii.534 (pajjhāti metri causa; C = anusocati) = Mil 5
    • ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto mankubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. MN i.132 MN i.258 and passim
    pa + jhāyati2
    Pañca
    adjective-numeral
    1. number 5
    • Cases: genitive dative pañcannaṁ, instrumental abl pañcahi, locative pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca˚ (cp. Vedic pañcāra with 5 spokes i.16413; Gr , Latin quinqu-ennis etc.)
    1. -1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with reference to literal & figurative application. “Five” is the number of “comprehensive and yet simple” unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (‣ See also below pañc’ angulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *prəq cp. Latin com˚, decem, centum etc.) -
    1. A. No. 5, applied (a) with reference to time: catupañcāhaṁ 4 or 5 days Ja ii.114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat i.316); maraṇaṁ tuyhaṁ oraṁ māsehi pañcahi after 5 months Vv 6310 p. māse vasitvā DN-a i.319 (cp. qu menses Hor. Sat. ii.3289)
    • (b) of space: ˚yojanaṭṭhāna Ja iii.504 ˚yojan-ubbedho gajavaro Vv-a 33 ˚bhūmako pāsādo Ja i.58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam)-(c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV iii.379; vi.114; viii.92 etc.; gods x.553; priests ii.3414iii.77; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171 ambassadors Genesis 472; quinque viri Hor. Sat. ii.555 Epist. ii.124): p. janā Ja v.230 p. amaccā Ja v.231 p hatthino Dhp-a i.164 pañca nāriyo agamiṁsu Vv 322 p. puttāni khādāmi Pv i.63
    • Note. No. 5 in this appln is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e.g.); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq the higher decimals 50 and 500 ‣See also below §§ 3, 4
    1. B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (feminine ˚ī the 15th day of the month Vv 156 = AN i.144 Snp 402) Vv-a 67 (˚kahāpaṇa-sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f ī of the 15th or full-moon day Pv iii.31 Dhp-a i.198 iii.92; iv.202 Vv-a 314 Snp-a 78) Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho) Vv 642 (paṇṇarase va cando; explained as paṇṇarasiyaṁ Vv-a 276) Dhp-a i.388 (of age, 15 or 16 years) DN-a i.17 (˚bhedo Khuddaka-nikāyo) Snp-a 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu-satehi = 1500, instead of the usual 500) Pv-a 154 (˚yojana). The appln is much the same as 5 and 50 ‣See below, although more rare, e.g. as measure of space: ˚yojana Dhp-a i.17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa-yojana) Ja i.315 Pv-a 154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood genitive 7. 20).

      1. Commentary No. 25 in two forms: pañcavīsati (the usual) e. g Dhs-a 185f. Mil 289 (citta-dubbalī-karaṇā dhammā) paṇṇa-vīsati, e.g. Ja iv.352 (nāriyo) Thag 2, 67 and paṇṇuvīsaṁ (only at Ja iii.138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca-cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with ˚yojana, e.g. at Ja i.147 Ja i.348 Dhp-a i.367
      • Application: of 25: (1) time: years Ja iii.138 Dhp-a i.4 (2) space: miles high and wide Dhp-a ii.64 (ahipeto) Vv-a 236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā)
      1. 2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our “thousands,” cp. the use of Latin mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e.g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be explained as “a great hand,” i.e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like “a lot (originally “only one,” cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc
      • Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of “comm-union” are especially frequently in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king’s retinue, etc
      • A. No. 50 (paññāsa; the by-form paṇṇāsa only at Dhp-a iii.207), in following applns: (a) of time: does not occur, but ‣See below under 55
      • (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah’s ark genitive 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14 7. 9) Ja i.359 (yojanāni) Dhp-a iii.207 (˚hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism 417 (paripuṇṇa ˚yojana suriyamaṇḍala) Dhp-a i.17 (˚yojana)
      • (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV ii.185; v.185; wives viii.1936; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170 servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) Ja iii.220 (corā) v.161 (pallankā), 421 (dijakaññāyo); Snp p. 87 Snp-a 57 (bhikkhū)
      • Note. 55 (pañcapaññāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years) e.g. at Dhp-a i.125 Dhp-a ii.57 Pv-a 99 Pv-a 142; also in groups: Dhp-a i.99 (janā)
      • B. No. 500 (pañcasata˚, pañcasatā pañcasatāni)
      • (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 8434 Pv ii.15 Pv-a 152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv iv.328 Ja i.204 (˚yojana-satikā); Vism 72 (˚dhanu-satika, 500 bows in distance)
      • (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV x.9314; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15
      1. -6; men armed Vergil Aen 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied where it is only meant to denote a “goodly company 500 or more”) Arahants Kp-a 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e.g. DN i.1 Vin ii.199 Ja i.116 Ja i.227 Dhp-a ii.109 153; iii.262, 295; iv.184, 186; Sāvakas Ja i.95 Upāsakas Ja ii.95 Pv-a 151 Paccekabuddhas Dhp-a iv.201 Pv-a 76 Vighāsâdā Ja ii.95 Dhp-a ii.154 Sons Pv-a 75 Thieves Dhp-a ii.204 Pv-a 54 Relatives Pv-a 179 Women-servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv ii.126 Vv-a 69 78, 187 Pv-a 152 Oxen AN iv.41 Monkeys Ja iii.355 Horses Vin iii.6
      • Money etc. as present reward or fine representing a “round-sum” (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. ii.743 kahāpaṇas Snp 980 Snp 982 Pv-a 273 blows with stick as fine Vin i.247
      • Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e.g. Ja i.101 Dhp-a ii.79 Pv-a 100 Pv-a 112; chariots Vv-a 78 ploughs Snp p. 13. cp. SN i.148 (vyagghī-nisā) Vin ii.285 (ūna-pañcasatāni) Ja ii.93 (accharā); v.75 (vāṇijā) Dhp-a i.89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rāja-satāni); iv.182 (jāti˚) Kp-a 176 (paritta-dīpā). Also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pañ'opasthāyikā-śatāni Divy 529; pañca-mātrāṇi strī-śatāni Divy 533
      • Note. When Gotama said that his “religion” would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e.g. at Dhp-a i.62 (ariya-sāvaka-koṭiyo), 256 (˚mattā-ariyasāvakā) iv.190 (p. koti-mattā ariya-sāvakā)
      1. 3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. ˚aggaṁ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ i.e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor the granary, the pottery, the larder Snp-a 270
      • ˚aṅgā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita ‣See anga; on another combination with anga ‣See below. The phrase pañc’ angasamannāgata & ˚vippahīna (S; i.99 AN v.16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni ‣See explained at Vism 146. ˚aṅgikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana susira. ˚abhiññā 5 psychic powers ‣See Compendium 209 ˚ānantarika-kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Mil 25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q.v. or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs translation 267. ˚indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paññā (see indriya B. 15

        1. -19). ˚vidhaṁ (rāja-) kakudhabhaṇḍaṁ insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta pādukā. ˚kalyāṇāni, beauty-marks: kesa˚, maṁsa˚ aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚. ˚kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses (= taggocarāni pañc’ āyatanāni gahitāni honti Snp-a 211). ˚gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi takka, navanīta, sappi. ˚cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maṁsa˚ dibba˚ paññā˚ buddha˚ samanta˚ ˚taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each ‣See Nd2 271v. ˚nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha˚ Majjhima˚ Saṁyutta˚, Anguttara˚ Khuddaka˚, e.g. Vin ii.287
        • ˚nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā-vyāpāda, thīnamiddha uddhacca-kukkucca, vicikicchā. ˚patiṭṭhitaṁ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase ˚ena vandati (sometimes ˚ṁ vandati, e.g. Snp-a 78 267 Ja v.502 Snp-a 267 271, 293, 328, 436 Vv-a 6 Dhp-a i.197 Dhp-a iv.178 etc. ˚bandhana either 5 ways of binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage Ja iv.3 (as “ure pañcangika-bandhanaṁ” cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā SN iv.201); Nda 304iii.b2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu-bandhanena vā rajju˚, sankhalika˚, latā˚, parikkhepa˚), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājñā pañcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ

          • There is a diff kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana-kāraṇaṁ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this “bandhana” is a corruption of “vaddhana” (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhana-kāraṇa (instead of pañca-vidha-bandhana-k˚) ‣See passages under bandhana & cp. MN iii.182 AN i.141 Kvu 597 Snp-a 479
          • ˚balāni 5 forces: saddhā˚ viriya˚ sati samādhi˚ paññā˚ DN ii.120 MN ii.12 SN iii.96 AN iii.12 (‣ See also bala). ˚bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṁsa Vin iv.176
          • ˚macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa˚ kula˚ lābha vaṇṇa˚ dhamma˚. ˚rajāni defilements: rūpa˚, sadda etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd1 505 Snp-a 574
          • ˚vaṇṇā 5 colours ‣See reference for colours under pīta and others, viz nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B’s eye) Nd2 235I.a; others with reference to paduma-puṇḍarīka Vv-a 41 to paduma Dhp-a iii.443 to kusumāni DN-a i.140 Dhp-a iv.203 ˚vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q.v.) ˚saṁyojanāni fetters (q.v.) ˚saṅgā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) Dhp-a iv.109
          • ˚sīla the 5 moral precepts as sub-division of the 10 ‣See dasasīla and Nd2 under sīla on p. 277
          1. 4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Snp 660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca) Thag 2, 503 (˚kaṭuka = pañcakāmaguṇa-rasa Thag-a 291) Dhp-a ii.25 (˚mahānidhi) Snp-a 39 (˚pakāra-gomaṇḍala-puṇṇabhāva). cp. further: guṇā Mil 249
          • paṇṇāni Vin i.201 (nimba˚, kuṭaja˚, paṭola˚, sulasi˚, kappāsika˚); Paṇḍu-rāja-puttā Ja v.426
          • pabbagaṇṭhiyo Mil 103
          • pucchā Dhs-a 55 mahā-pariccāgā Dhp-a iii.441 mahā-vilokanāni Dhp-a i.84
          • vatthūni Vin ii.196f. vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) Dhp-a i.196
          • suddhāvāsā Dhs-a 14. In general ‣See Vin v.128

            1. -133 (various sets of 5)
            1. ˚aṅga five (bad) qualities ‣See anga 3 and above 3, in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins DN iii.269 Nd2 284 C; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pañcānga-viprahīna. epithet of the Buddha Divy 95 Divy 264 & ˚samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities. AN v.15 (of senāsana, explained at Vism 122) ‣See also above
            2. ˚aṅgika consisting of 5 parts fivefold, in following combinations: ˚jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra pīti, sukha, cittass’ ekaggatā) Dhs 83 ˚turiya orchestra SN i.131 Thag 1, 398 2, 139 Vv 364 Dhp-a i.274 394 ˚bandhana bond Ja iv.3
            • ˚aṅgula = ˚angulika Ja iv.153 (gandha˚) Snp-a 39 (usabhaṁ nahāpetvā bhojetvā ˚ṁ datvā mālaṁ bandhitvā)
            • ˚aṅgulika (also ˚aka) the 5 finger-mark, palm-mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood) ‣See Vogel, the 5 finger-token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (especially against the Evil Eye). Vin ii.123 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.116) Ja i.166 Ja i.192 Ja ii.104 (gandha ˚ṁ deti), 256 (gandhaā applied to a cetiya); iii.23, 160 (lohita˚) Vv 3318 (gandha˚ṁ adāsiṁ Kassa
            • passive thūpasmiṁ); Mhvs 32, 4 ‣See trsl p. 220 Dhp-a iii.374 (goṇānaṁ gandha—˚āni datvā) Snp-a 137 (setamālāhi sabba-gandha-sugandhehi p˚akehi ca alankatā paripuṇṇa-angapaccangā, of oxen). cp. MVastu i.269 (stūpeṣu pañcangulāni ‣See note on p 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature ‣See at Vogel p. 6 sq
            • ˚āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle-axe, shield, after Childers) Mil 339 ‣See Miln translation ii.227, cp. p˚ sannaddha Ja iii.436 Ja iii.467 Ja iv.283 Ja iv.437 v.431; vi.75 sannaddha-p˚ Ja iv.160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at different passages
            • ˚āhaṁ 5 days Vin iv.281 Ja ii.114
            • ˚cūḷaka with 5 topknots Ja v.250 (of a boy)
            • ˚nakha with 5 claws, name of a five-toed animal Ja v.489 (so read for pañca na khā, misunderstood by Commentary )
            • ˚paṭṭhika at Vin ii.117 121, 152; is not clear (variant reading paṭika). Vinaya Texts iii.97 translation “cupboards” and connect it with Sanskrit paṭṭikā, as celapattikaṁ Vin ii.128 undoubtedly is (“strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes,” translation iii.128). It also occurs at Vin iv.47
            • ˚patikā
            • feminine having had 5 husbands Ja v.424 Ja v.427
            • ˚mālin of a wild animal Ja vi.497 (= pancangika-turiya-saddo viya Commentary, not clear)
            • ˚māsakamattaṁ a sum of 5 māsakas Dhp-a ii.29
            • ˚vaggiya (or ˚ika Snp-a 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū Their names are Aññākondañña, Bhaddiya Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. MN i.170 MN ii.94 SN iii.66 Pv-a 21 (˚e ādiṁ katvā) Snp-a 351 cp. chabbaggiya -vidha fivefold Ja i.204 (˚ā abhirakkhā); vi.341 (˚paduma), ˚bandhana: ‣See this
            • ˚sādhāraṇa-bhāva fivefold connection Ja iv.7
            • ˚seṭṭha (Bhagavā) “the most excellent in the five” Snp 355 (= pañcannaṁ paṭhamasissānaṁ pañcavaggiyānaṁ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma-khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho Snp-a 351)
            • ˚hattha having 5 hands Ja v.431
            Vedic pañca, Indogermanic *penqṷe; cp. Latin quīnque, Gothic fimf, Lithuanian penki, Old Irish coic
    Pañcaka
    adjective
    1. fivefold, consisting of five Ja i.116 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167–⁠175 (˚naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 52) Snp-a 318 (˚nipāta of Anguttara)
    • nt. pañcakaṁ a pentad, five Vin i.255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe ‣See Vin Texts ii.155), cp. p. 287;
    • plural pañcakā sets of five Vism 242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka’s (i.e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca˚; “skin-pentad,” the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco vakka˚; the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa˚; identical ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthaluṅga˚; identical ending with the brain and 2 chakka’s (sets of 6), viz. meda˚ & mutta˚; ‣See e.g. Vb-a 249 258
    from pañca
    Pañcakkhattuṁ
    • adverb five times.

    Pañcadhā
    • adverb in five ways, fivefold Dhs-a 351

    Pañcama

    adjective

    1. numeral ordina l the fifth DN i.88 Snp 84 Snp 99 Snp 101 Vv-a 102 Pv-a 52 (˚e māse in the 5th month the Petī has to die) Dhp-a iii.195 (˚e sattāhe in the 5th week). feminine pañcamā Pv-a 78 (ito ˚āya jātiyā) and pañcamī Snp 437 (senā) Pv-a 79 (jāti)
    2. compar superl. formation from pañca, with ˚ma as in Latin supremus, for the usual ˚to as in Gr , Latin quintus, also Sanskrit pañcathaḥ
    Pañcamaka
    adjective = pañcama Ja i.55
    Pañcaso
    • adverb by fives.

    Pañja
    1. heap, pile AN ii.75 (meaning different?); cp. i.1016
    is it to be puñja?
    Pañjara
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a cage, Ja i.436 Ja ii.141 Ja iii.305 (sīha˚); iv.213; v.232 (sīha), 365; vi.385 (sīha˚), 391 Mil 23 (˚antaragata gone into the c.); 27 Dhp-a i.164 (nakha˚), where meaning is “frame” Vb-a 238 + sīha˚ meaning window
      cp. Epic Sanskrit pañjara, which probably belongs to Latin pango, q.v. Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Pañjali
    adjective
    1. with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Snp 1031 in compound pañjalī-kata (cp. añjalīkata; añjali + past participle of kṛ; raising one’s folded hands Snp 566 Snp 573 Thag 1, 460 Ja vi.501 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prāñjalīkṛta MV astu ii.257, 287, 301
    2. pa + añjali. cp. epithet Sanskrit prāñjali
    Pañjalika
    adjective
    1. holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation SN i.226 Snp 485 Snp 598
    from pañjali
    Pañjasa
    adjective
    1. in the right order, straight AN ii.15
    pa + añjasa
    Pañña
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. of wisdom, endowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in following compounds.: anissaraṇa˚ DN i.245 SN ii.194 SN iv.332 anoma˚ Snp 343 appa˚ SN i.198 Ja ii.166 iii.223, 263; avakujja˚ AN i.130 gambhīra˚ SN i.190 javana˚ SN i.63 Nd2 235; tikkha˚; dup˚ DN iii.252 DN iii.282 SN i.78 SN i.191 SN ii.159f. MN iii.25 AN ii.187f. Dhp 111 Dhp 140 Pug 13 Dhp-a ii.255 nibbedhika˚ SN i.63 AN ii.178 Nd2 235; puṭhu˚ ibid.; bhāvita˚ SN iv.111 AN v.42f. bhūri˚ SN iii.143 SN iv.205 manda˚ Vb-a 239 mahā SN i.63 SN i.121 SN ii.155 AN i.23 AN i.25 AN ii.178f. Nd2 235 Snp-a 347 sap˚ SN i.13 SN i.22 SN i.212 SN iv.210 AN iv.245 Pv i.88 115 Pv-a 60 (= paṇḍita), 131 (+ buddhimant); suvimutta˚. AN v.29f.; hāsa˚ SN i.63 SN i.191 SN v.376 Nd2 235 By itself (i.e. not in compound) only at Dhp 208 (= lokiyalokuttara-paññāya sampanna Dhp-a iii.172) and 375 (= paṇḍita Dhp-a iv.111)
      the adjective form of paññā
    Paññatā
    feminine
    1. having sense, wisdom AN iii.421 (dup˚ = foolishness) v.159 (identical); mahā˚, puthu˚ vipula˚ AN i.45 ‣See also paññatta2
    secondary abstract formation from paññā, in meaning equal to paññāṇa
    Paññatta1
    1. pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed ordained SN ii.218 AN i.98 AN i.151 AN iv.16 AN iv.19 AN v.74f.; Pv iv.135 Dhp-a i.274 Vv-a 9 (su˚ mañca-pītha), 92 (niccabhatta) Pv-a 78 especially frequently in ster. formula paññatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i.e. special) chair (seat) DN i.109 DN i.125 DN i.148 SN i.212 Dhp 148 Snp-a 267 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 61
    past participle of paññāpeti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prajñapta
    Paññatta2
    neuter
    1. wisdom, sense etc. SN v.412 (variant reading paññatā) ‣See also paññatā
    abstract from paññā
    Paññatti
    feminine
    1. making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea notion, concept. On term ‣See Compendium 3 sq., 198, 199 Kvu translation 1; Dhs translation 340
    • MN iii.68 SN iii.71 SN iv.38 (māra˚), 39 (satta˚, dukkha˚, loka˚) AN ii.17 AN v.190 Ps ii.171, 176 Pug 1 Dhs i.309; Nett 1 sq., 38, 188 Kp-a 102, 107 DN-a i.139 Snp-a 445 470 Pv-a 200 The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e.g. at Ja ii.65 (˚vahāra) Mil 173 (loka˚); Kp-a 28; adjective paṇṇattika (q.v.)
    from paññāpeti, cp. paññatta1
    Paññavant
    adjective
    1. possessed of insight, wise, intelligent sensible Vin i.60 DN iii.237 DN iii.252 DN iii.265 DN iii.282 DN iii.287 MN i.292 iii.23 SN i.53 SN i.79 SN ii.159f. 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.) iv.243; v.100, 199, 392, 401 AN ii.76 AN ii.187 AN ii.230 AN iii.2f. 127, 183; iv.85, 217, 271, 357; v.25, 124 sq. Snp 174 Nd2 259 Dhp 84 Ja i.116 Pug 13 Dhp-a ii.255 Kp-a 54 Vb-a 239 278 Pv-a 40 cp. paññāṇavant
    paññā + vant, with reduction of ā to a ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 23
    Paññā
    feminine
    1. intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, “intellect as conversant with general truths” (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.68), reason wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition ‣See on term Mrs. Rhys Davids "Buddhism” (1914) past participle 94, 130, 201; also Compendium 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 17 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd2 380 = Dhs 16 (paññā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As technical term in Buddhist Psych Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard “Code of religious practice which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation These 3 stages are: (1) sīla-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of moral duties; (2) samādhi-kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of con centration & meditation; (3) paññā-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (‣ See also jhāna1. They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1 (given in extenso at DN i.62–⁠85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. DN ii.81 DN ii.84 DN ii.91 ‣See khandha, citta sīla

      • D; i.26 = 162 (˚gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni) 174 (˚vāda), 195 (˚pāripūrin); ii.122 (ariyā); iii.101 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq. SN i.13 = 165 (sīla citta, paññā), 17, 34, 55; ii.185 (sammā˚), 277; v.222 (ariyā) MN i.144 (identical); iii.99 (identical), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā˚) AN i.61 AN i.216 AN ii.1 (ariyā); iv.105 (identical) iii.106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); iv.11 (identical); v.123 sq. Iti 35 40 (˚uttara), 51 (sīlaṃ samādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā˚) Snp 77 Snp 329 Snp 432 Snp 881 Snp 1036 and passim Dhp 38 Dhp 152 Dhp 372 Nd1 77 Nd2 380; Ps i.53 64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; ii.150 sq., 162, 185 sq. Pug 25 35, 54 (˚sampadā) Dhs 16 20, 555; Nett 8, 15 17, 28, 54, 191 Vb-a 140 396 Pv-a 40 (paññāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp 343. On paññāya ‣See sep. article ‣See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta +)
      1. ˚ādhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom AN ii.137
      • ˚indriya the faculty of reason (with sati˚ & samādhi˚ DN iii.239, 278 Dhs 16 20 etc.; Netechnical term 7, 15 sq; 191 -obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Ps i.119 Dhs 16 20 etc -kkhandha the code of cognition ‣See above Vin i.62 DN iii.229 DN iii.279 Iti 51 Nd1 21; Nett 70, 90, 128. It is always combined with sīla˚ & samādhi-kkhandha
      • ˚cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha ‣See under cakkhumant) DN iii.219 SN v.467 Iti 52 Nd1 354 Nd2 235
      • ˚dada giving or bestowing wisdom SN i.33 Snp 177
      • ˚dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures ‣See dhana DN iii.163 DN iii.251 AN iii.53 Vv-a 113
      • ˚nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason SN v.97 Iti 82
      • ˚paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom SN v.411 AN i.45 Ps ii.189 -pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dhp 28 (= dibba-cakkhuṁ sankhātaṁ ˚ṁ)
      • ˚bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers DN iii.229 DN iii.253 MN iii.72 AN iv.363 Snp 212 Dhs 16 20 etc.; Nett 54 191 Vv-a 7
      • ˚bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom SN v.411 AN i.45
      • ˚bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca-samuppāda by Buddhaghosa at Vism xvii, past participle 517 sq. (˚niddesa)
      • ˚ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs 16 20 etc
      • ˚vimutta freed by reason DN ii.70 DN iii.105 DN iii.254 MN i.35 MN i.477 AN i.61 ii.6; iv.452 Snp 847 Nd1 207; Kvu 58; Nett 199 -vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto-vimutti) DN i.156 DN i.167 DN iii.78 102, 108, 132, 281 Iti 75 91 Snp 725 Snp 727 Nett 7, 40 81, 127 DN-a i.313 Vb-a 464
      • ˚visuddhi purity of insight DN iii.288
      • ˚vuddhi increase of knowledge SN v.97 SN v.411 AN i.15 AN i.45 AN ii.245
      • ˚sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge ‣See above AN i.62 AN ii.66 AN iii.12f. 182 sq.; iv.284, 322
      • ˚sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dhp 229 (˚samāhita = lokuttarapaññāya c’ eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata Dhp-a iii.329) Vv 3423 identical = ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata Vv-a 155). Often used with yathābhūtaṁ q.v. cp. paññāya
      cp. Vedic prajñā, pa + jñā
    Paññāṇa
    neuter
    1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence DN i.124 (sīla +) SN i.41 AN iv.342 Snp 96 Snp 1136 DN-a i.171 290
    2. mark, sign, token Ja v.195
    pa + ñāṇa, cp. Vedic prajñāno in both meanings & paññā
    Paññāṇavant
    adjective
    1. reasonable, sensible, wise Snp 202 Snp 1090 Ja v.222 Ja vi.361 Nd2 382
    paññāṇa + vant
    Paññāta
    1. known, renowned DN-a i.143 ap˚ unknown, defamed Vin iv.231 SN iv.46 AN iii.134 (where also derivation appaññātika)
    past participle of pajānāti
    Paññāpaka
    adjective noun
    1. one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin ii.305 (āsana˚)
    from paññāpeti
    Paññāpana
    neuter
    1. disclosure, discovering MN iii.17 SN iii.59 declaration Dhs-a 11
    from paññāpeti
    Paññāpetar
    1. one who imparts knowledge, discloser of truths, discoverer DN ii.223
    agent noun of paññāpeti
    Paññāpeti
    1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define DN i.119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ), 180, 185, 237 Iti 98 (tevijjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ), Pug 37 38 Pv-a 61 (āsanaṁ)
    2. to lay down, fold out, spread Pv-a 43 (sanghāṭiṁ)
    3. pp paññatta (q.v.)
    4. causative II. paññāpāpeti Ja iii.371
    causative of pajānāti
    Paññāya
    indeclinable
    1. understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaṁ (q.v. SN i.13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiṁ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); ii.7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); iii.6 (identical); v.324 (ajjhupekkhati) AN i.125 (anuggahissati) iii.44 (vaḍḍhati); iv.13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); v.39 (disvā) Snp 1035 ‣See Nd2 380ii Iti 93 (moh'aggiṁ, variant reading saññāya) Pv-a 60 (upaparikkhitvā, as explanation of ñatvā) 140 = viceyya
    absolutive of pajānāti, in relation ˚ñāya: ñatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so explained by Pali Commentators whereas modern interpreters have taken it as instrumental of paññā
    Paññāyati
    1. to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived seen or taken for, to appear Iti 89 Dhp-a i.14 95 (future paññāyissatha you will be well known); ii.75 Pv-a 83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati +); ppr. paññāyamāna Dhp-a i.29 Pv-a 96 (= perceivable).
    2. aorist paññāyi Pv-a 172
    3. (paccakkhato)
    4. passive of pajānāti
    Pañha
    mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question DN i.11 (deva˚) MN i.83 MN iii.30 AN i.103 AN i.288 AN iii.81 AN iii.191f. 419 sq.; v.50 sq. Snp 512 Snp 957 Snp 1005 Snp 1024 Snp 1148 etc. Nd1 464 Mil 28 Mil 340 DN-a i.97 pañhaṁ pucchati to ask a question Nd2 under pucchā (q.v.)
    1. ˚paṭibhāna an answer to a question MN i.83 Mil 28
    • ˚vīmaṁsaka one who tests a question Snp 827 Nd1 166 Snp-a 538
    • ˚vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaṁsa “direct,” vibhajja “qualified,” paṭipucchā “after further questioning, ṭhapanīya “not to be answered or left undecided,” thus enumerated at DN iii.229 AN i.197f.; ii.46 Mil 339
    Vedic praśna, for details of etymology ‣See pucchati
    Paṭa
    1. cloth; cloak, garment SN ii.219 (˚pilotika); Thag 1 1092 (bhinna-paṭan-dhara “wearing the patchwork cloak” translation) Ja iv.494 Kp-a 45, 58 (˚tantu) DN-a i.198 Dhp-a ii.45 (puppha˚); iii.295 ˚kañcuka, variant reading kaṭak˚) Vism 16 (bhinna-paṭa-dhara in definition of bhikkhu) Vb-a 327 (identical) Dhs-a 81 (paṭa-paṭa sadda) Vv-a 73 201 Pv-a 185 cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa
    cp. Epic Sanskrit paṭa, etymology unknown, probably dialectical
    Paṭaggi
    1. counter-fire Vin ii.138 Ja i.212 k accusative 31
    2. paṭi + aggi
    Paṭaṅga
    1. a grasshopper Snp 602 Ja vi.234 506 Mil 272 Mil 407 Dhp-a iv.58 Pv-a 67 Pgdp 59
    cp. * Sanskrit phaḍingā, but influenced by Sanskrit pataga a winged animal, bird
    Paṭaccarin
    adjective
    1. poor (literally dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at Ja vi.227 (variant readings paḷaccari paṭiccari)
    paṭa + carin but cp. Sanskrit pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185
    Paṭala
    neuter
    1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin film Vism 257 (maṁsa˚ of the liver, where Kp-a 54 reads maṁsa-piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa˚) Dhs-a 307 (7 akkhi˚ membranes of the eye); Kp-a 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (identical) Dhs-a 330 (identical) Snp-a 248 (identical) Pv-a 186 (eka˚ upāhanā, singlelined cp. paṭalika & palāsika & ‣See Morris; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887 165); Vism 446 (kappāsa˚ film of cotton ‣Seed); Bdhd 66 (identical)
    2. roof, ceiling Pv-a 52 (ayo˚ of iron). 3. a heap, mass (especially of clouds) Ja i.73 (megha˚) Dhs-a 239 (abbha˚)
    3. madhu˚ honey comb Ja i.262 Dhp-a i.59 Dhp-a iii.323
    4. cataract of the eye Dāvs v.27.

      connected with paṭa, cp. Sanskrit paṭala in meaning “section” Vedic, in all other meanings later Sanskrit
    Paṭalika
    adjective
    1. belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adjective said of sandals (eka˚ with single lining) Ja ii.277 (variant reading for ekatalika); iii.80, 81 (identical)
    • as
    • noun feminine paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers) usually combined with paṭikā Vin i.192 Vin ii.162 DN i.7 (= ghana-puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DN-a i.87) AN i.137 AN i.181 AN iii.50 iv.94 231, 394
    from paṭala
    Paṭaha
    1. a kettle-drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at Dhs-a 319 viz. mahā-bheri & p
    • bheri Ja i.355 Dpvs 16, 14 Pv-a 4
    cp. Epic Sanskrit paṭaha, dialectical
    Paṭāka
    neuter
    1. a flag MN i.379 Mil 87 Vism 469 Thag-a 70
    cp. Sanskrit paṭāka, connected with paṭa
    Paṭāṇi
    1. at Vin iv.46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is explained by Buddhaghosa as “mañcapidhānaṁ (for ˚pīṭhānaṁ pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti.” At DN-a i.77 we find the following. “visūkaṁ paṭāni (sic.)-bhūtaṁ dassanan ti visūkadassanaṁ” and at Dhs-a 393: “paṭāni-gahaṇaṁ gahetvā ekapaden’ eva taṁ nissaddaṁ akāsiṁ.”
    Paṭi
    indeclinable
    1. directional prefix in well-defined meaning of “back (to), against towards, in opposition to, opposite.” As preposition (with accusative and usually postponed) towards, near by, at usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Snp 291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati) Thag 1, 628 (suriyass’ uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.) Ja i.457 (paṭi suriyaṁ thatvā standing facing the sun); iv.93; vi.491; Pv ii.941 (suriy’ uggamanam p.) Mil 116 (dānam p.) Pv-a 154 (paṭi Gangaṁ against the G.)

      • Most frequently combinations are: paṭi + ā (patiyā˚) patisaṁ˚; vi + paṭi˚, sampaṭi˚. The composition (assimilation-) form before vowels is pacc˚; (b. v.)
      • Meanings. I. (literally) “back,” in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opposite anu ‣See below III.), contrary: viz (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti-against): ˚kaṇṭaka, ˚kosati (re-ject), ˚kūla, ˚khipati (re-fuse, op-pose), ˚gha, ˚codeti (re-prove), thambhati ˚disā, ˚deseti, ˚pakkha, ˚patha, ˚piṁsati, ˚pīḷita, ˚magga ˚manteti, ˚yodha (at-tack), ˚vacana (re-ply), ˚vadati ˚vedeti, ˚sattu (enemy), ˚suṇāti, ˚hata; -(b) warding off, protecting against (counter-, anti-): ˚kara (antidote), ˚sedhati (ward-off)
      • (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter-, rival): ˚puggala (one’s equal), ˚purisa (rival), ˚bala (adequate), ˚bimba (counterpart), ˚bhāga (identical); ˚malla (rival wrestler) ˚sama, ˚sāsana, ˚sūra, ˚seṭṭha; -(d) close contact (against, be-): ˚kujjita (covered), ˚gādha, ˚channa (“be-deckt”) ˚vijjhana.
      • in return, in exchange (in revenge) ˚akkosati, ˚āneti, ˚katheti, ˚karoti, ˚kūṭa1 ˚kkamati, ˚khamāpeti, ˚gāti (sing in response), ˚gīta ˚daṇḍa (retribution), ˚dadāti, ˚dāna, ˚nivāsana, ˚paṇṇa (in reply), ˚pasaṁsati, ˚piṇḍa, ˚pucchati (ask in return) ˚māreti (kill in revenge), ˚bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange) ˚bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) ˚rodana, ˚roseti, ˚vera (revenge), ˚sammodeti, ˚sātheyya.
      • (temporal again, a second time (re-): ˚dasseti (re-appear), ˚nijjhatta, ˚nivattati, ˚pavesati, ˚pākatika (re-stored) ˚bujjhati, ˚vinicchinati, ˚sañjīvita (re-suscitated) ˚sandhi (re-incarnation), ˚sammajjati.
      • away from back to (especially in compound paṭivi˚): ˚kuṭati (shrink back) ˚ghāta (repulsion), ˚dhāvati, ˚neti, ˚paṇāmeti (send away), ˚bandhati (hold back), ˚bāhati (identical), ˚vijacchati ˚vineti, ˚vinodeti (drive out), ˚virata, ˚saṁharati, ˚sallīna, ˚sutta, ˚sumbhita
      • II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at-: ˚oloketi (look at), ˚gijjha (hankering after) ˚ggaha, ˚jānāti ˚pūjeti ˚peseti (send out to), ˚baddha (bound to), ˚bhaya ˚yatta, ˚rūpa, ˚laddha, ˚labhati (at-tain), ˚lābha ˚lobheti, ˚sāmeti, ˚sevati (go after), ˚ssata. (2) together (con-, com-), especially combined with ˚saṁ˚; ; ˚saṁyujati ˚passaddha, ˚maṇḍita, ˚sankharoti, ˚santhāra
      • (3 asunder, apart (“up”): ˚kopeti (shake up), ˚viṁsa (part), ˚vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary by-, sham (developed out of meaning i.1 c.): ˚nāsikā (a false nose), ˚sīsaka (sham top knot) especially frequently in reduplicated (iterative) compounds., like anga-paccanga (limb & by-limb, i.e. all kinds of limbs), vata-paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent ‣See ā; 5
      • III. The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is frequently combined either (a) in negative contrast or (b) in positive emphasis e.g. (a) anuvātaṁ paṭivātaṁ with and against the wind anuloma + paṭiloma with and against the grain; ˚sotaṁ with & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (literally up & down)
      • ; Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination it is established in the combination with st (as patiṭṭhāti patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enumerated under the respective form of paṭi˚, with the exception of patiṭṭh˚ Pati-aneti
      Ved, prati, to Indogermanic *preti as in Latin pretium (from *pretios)” price” (cp. precious), i.e. equivalent
    Paṭi-āneti
    1. to lead or bring back, in duppaṭi-ānaya difficult to bring back Ja iv.43 Pati-orohati
    paṭi + ā +
    Paṭi-orohati
    1. to descend from DN-a i.251 (˚itvā)
    paṭi + ava + ruh
    Paṭikaṅkhati
    1. to wish for, long for SN i.227 adjective ˚kankhin MN i.21 ‣See also pāṭikankhin
    paṭi + kānkṣ
    Paṭikacca
    indeclinable
    1. previously (literally as cautioned) Vin iv.44 Mil 48 (variant reading ˚kacca) usually as paṭigacc’ eva, e.g. Vin i.342 DN ii.118-(2) providing for (the
    2. future ), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin ii.256 SN i.57 SN v.162 AN ii.25 DN ii.144 Thag 1, 547 Ja iii.208 Ja iv.166 (in explanation of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); v.235
    3. so read for ˚gacca as given at all passages mentioned ‣See Trenckner Miln p. 421, Geiger; Pr. § 381. absolutive from paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sanskrit pratikāra in same meaning “caution, remedy”
    Paṭikaṇṭaka
    1. an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman Ja i.186 Ja ii.239 Dhp-a iii.456 (variant reading ˚kaṇḍaka)
    paṭi + kantaka4
    Paṭikata
    1. “done against,” i.e. provided or guarded against Ja iv.166
    past participle of paṭikaroti
    Paṭikatheti
    1. to answer, reply Ja vi.224 DN-a i.263
    paṭi + katheti
    Paṭikampati
    1. to shake; preterite paccakampittha Ja v.340
    paṭi + kampati
    Paṭikamma
    neuter
    1. redress, atonement AN i.21 (sa˚ & a˚ āpatti) Mil 29 DN-a i.96
    paṭi + kamma, cp. paṭikaroti
    Paṭikara
    1. counteracting; requital, compensation Vin iv.218 (a˚) DN i.137 (ovāda˚ giving advice or providing for? variant reading pari˚); iii.154
    from paṭi + kṛ
    Paṭikaroti
    1. [paṭi + karoti) 1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiṁ) Vin i.98 164; ii.259 iv.19 SN ii.128 = 205 AN v.324 Dhp-a i.54
    • to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious Ja iv.166 3. to imitate Ja ii.406
    • absolutive paṭikacca (q.v.)
    • pp paṭikata (q.v.)
    Paṭikassana
    neuter
    1. drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. “throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again” Vin ii.7 162 AN i.99
    paṭi + kṛṣ
    Paṭikassati
    1. to draw back, remove, throw back Vin i.320 (mūlāya); ii.7 (identical)
    paṭi + kassati
    Paṭikā
    feminine
    1. a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set’ attharako DN-a i.86 DN i.7 AN i.137 AN i.181 AN iii.50 AN iv.94 AN iv.231 AN iv.394 Dāvs v.36 ‣See also paṭiya
    Sanskrit paṭikā dialectical from paṭa cloth
    Paṭikāra
    1. counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp 201 Sdhp 498; usually negative app˚; adjective not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin iv.218 (= anosārita p. 219) Pv-a 274 (maraṇa cp. following
    paṭi + kṛ
    Paṭikārika
    adjective
    1. of the nature of an amendment; app˚; not making amends, not making good Ja v.418
    from preceding
    Paṭikiṭṭha
    1. inferior, low, vile AN i.286 = Dh i.144; in meaning “miserable” at Dhp-a ii.3 is perhaps better to be read with variant reading as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha?
    Paṭikibbisa
    neuter
    1. wrong doing in return, retaliation Ja iii.135
    paṭi + kibbisa
    Paṭikirati
    1. to strew about, to sprawl Pv iv.108 (uttānā paṭikirāma = vikirīyamān'angā viya vattāma Pv-a 271)
    paṭi + kirati
    Paṭikiliṭṭha
    adjective
    1. very miserable Pv-a 268 (variant reading ); and perhaps at Dhp-a ii.3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q.v.)
    paṭi + kiliṭṭha
    Paṭikujjati
    1. to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose DN ii.162 MN i.30 AN iii.58 causative ˚eti Ja i.50 Ja i.69
    2. past participle paṭikujjita (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + kubj ‣See kujja & cp. patikuṭati
    Paṭikujjana
    neuter
    1. covering, in ˚phalaka covering board, seat Kp-a 62 (vacca-kuṭiyā)
    from paṭi + kubj
    Paṭikujjita
    1. covered over, enclosed AN i.141 Thag 1, 681 Ja i.50 Ja i.69 Ja v.266 Pv i.1013 (= upari pidahita Pv-a 52) Dhs-a 349
    past participle of paṭikujjeti
    Paṭikujjhati
    1. to be angry in return SN i.162 = Thag 1, 442
    paṭi + krudh
    Paṭikuṭati
    1. to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig to shrink from, to refuse AN iv.47f. (variant reading ˚kujjati) Mil 297 (pati˚; cp. Miln translationii.156); Vism 347 (Burmese variant ; Text ˚kuṭṭati) Dhp-a i.71 Dhp-a ii.42 causative patikoṭṭeti (q.v.)
    2. past participle paṭikuṭita (q.v.) ‣See also paṭilīyati
    3. paṭi + kuṭ; as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati
    Paṭikuṭita
    1. bent back, turned over (?) Vin ii.195 (reading uncertain, variant readings paṭikuṭṭiya paṭikuṭiya)
    past participle of paṭikuṭati
    Paṭikuṭṭha
    1. scolded, scorned, defamed blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin i.317 Pv-a 268 (variant reading paṭikiliṭṭha); as negative app˚; blameless, faultless SN iii.71 SN iii.73 AN iv.246 Kvu 141, 341 ‣See also paṭikiṭṭha
    past participle of paṭi + kruś ‣See paṭikkosati & cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500
    Paṭikuṇika
    adjective
    1. bent, crooked Pv-a 123 (variant reading kuṇita & kuṇḍita)
    for ˚kuṭita?
    Paṭikuṇṭhita
    1. = pariguṇṭhita (q.v.); covered, surrounded Ja vi.89
    cp. kuṇṭhita
    Paṭikuttaka
    1. a sort of bird Ja vi.538
    or uncertain etymology; paṭi + kuttaka?
    Paṭikubbara
    1. the part of the carriage-pole nearest to the horse(?) AN iv.191
    paṭi + kubbara
    Paṭikulyatā
    feminine
    1. reluctance, loathsomeness MN i.30 AN v.64 Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q.v.)
    from paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patikkulyatā
    Paṭikūṭa
    neuter
    1. cheating in return Ja ii.183
    paṭi + kūṭa1
    Paṭikūlatā
    feminine
    1. disgustiveness Vism 343 sq
    from paṭikkūla
    Paṭikeḷanā
    1. ‣See parikeḷanā; i.e. counter-playing Dhp i.286
    Paṭikoṭṭeti
    1. to bend away, to make refrain from MN i.115 SN ii.265 (cp. identical passage AN iv.47 with trs. ˚kuṭati & variant reading ˚kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The Text prints pati˚
    paṭi + koṭṭeti as causative of kuṭati
    Paṭikopeti
    1. to shake, disturb, break (figuratively) Ja v.173 (uposathaṁ)
    paṭi + kopeti
    Paṭikkanta
    1. gone back from (—˚), returned (opposite abhi˚) DN i.70 (abhikkanta +) AN ii.104 106 sq., 210; Pv iv.143 (cp. Pv-a 240) DN-a i.183 (= nivattana) Vv-a 6 (opposite abhi˚) Pv-a 11 (piṇḍapāta˚), 16 (identical). For opposite of paṭikkanta in connection with piṇḍāya ‣See paviṭṭha
    past participle of paṭikkamati
    Paṭikkantaka
    1. one who has come or is coming back Dhp-a i.307
    from last
    Paṭikkama
    1. going back Pv iv.12 (abhikkama + "going forward and backward”; cp. Pv-a 219)
    from paṭi + kram
    Paṭikkamati
    1. to step backwards, to return (opposite abhi˚) Vin ii.110 208 MN i.78 SN i.200 SN i.226 SN ii.282 Snp 388 (absolutive ˚kkamma = nivattitvā Snp-a 374) Snp-a 53
    2. causative paṭikkamāpeti to cause to retreat Ja i.214 Mil 121
    3. past participle paṭikkanta (q.v.)
    4. paṭi + kram
    Paṭikkamana
    neuter
    1. returning, retiring, going back Dhp i.95; in ˚sālā meaning “a hall with seats of distinction” Snp-a 53
    from paṭikkamati
    Paṭikkūla
    adjective
    1. literally against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin i.58 (˚kūla) DN iii.112 DN iii.113 MN i.341 (dukkha˚) SN iv.172 (identical) Ja i.393 Vv-a 92 (K.) Pv-a 77 Vb-a 250 sq
    • app˚ without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 532 (K.) Vism 70 (k)
    • nt. ˚ṁ loathsomeness, impurity Vv-a 232 ‣See also abstract pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi˚)
    1. ˚gāhitā as negative a˚ “refraining from contradiction (Dhs translation) Pug 24 (k.) Dhs 1327 (k.)
    2. ˚manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body Dhp-a ii.87 (˚kkula) Vb-a 251
    • ˚saññā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food DN iii.289 DN iii.291 SN v.132 AN iv.49 adjective ˚saññin SN i.227 SN v.119 SN v.317 AN iii.169
    paṭi + kūla
    Paṭikkosati
    1. to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin i.115 Vin ii.93 MN iii.29 DN i.53 (= paṭibāhati DN-a i.160) SN iv.118 (+ apavadati) Snp 878 Dhp 164 Ja iv.163 Mil 131 Mil 256 Dhp-a iii.194 (opposite abhinandati)- past participle paṭikuṭṭha (q.v.)
    2. paṭi + kruś
    Paṭikkosana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. protest Vin i.321 Vin ii.102 (a˚)
      from paṭikkosati
    Paṭikkhati
    1. to look forward to, to expect Snp 697 (paṭikkhaṁ sic ppr. = āgamayanā Snp-a 490)
    paṭi + īks
    Paṭikkhitta
    1. refused, rejected DN i.142 MN i.78 MN i.93 AN i.296 AN ii.206 Ja ii.436 Nett 161, 185 sq. Dhp-a ii.71
    past participle of paṭikkhipati
    Paṭikkhipati
    1. to reject, refuse, object to, oppose Ja i.67 Ja iv.105 Mil 195 DN-a i.290 Dhp-a i.45 ii.75 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 114 Pv-a 151 Pv-a 214 (aorist ˚khipi = vāresi)-appaṭikkhippa (
    2. gerundive ) not to be rejected Ja ii.370 Contrasted to samādiyati Vism 62, 64 & passim paṭi + khipati
    Paṭikkhepa
    1. opposition, negation, contrary Snp-a 228 for “na”), 502 Pv-a 189 (˚vacana the opp expression). ˚to ablative in opposition or contrast to Pv-a 24
    from paṭi + kṣip
    Paṭikhamāpita
    1. forgiven Dhp-a ii.78
    past participle of paṭi + khamāpeti, causative of khamati
    Paṭigacca
    1. ‣See paṭikacca
    Paṭigacchati
    1. to give up, leave behind Ja iv.482 (gehaṁ); cp. paccagū
    Paṭigandhiya
    1. only as negative appaṭi˚; (q.v.)
    Paṭigāthā
    feminine
    1. counter-stanza, response Snp-a 340 cp. paccanīka-gāthā
    paṭi + gāthā
    Paṭigādha
    1. a firm stand or foothold AN iii.297f. Pug 72 = Kvu 389. Patigayati (gati)
    paṭi + gādha2
    Paṭigāyati (˚gāti)
    1. to sing in response, to reply by a song Ja iv.395 (imperative ˚gāhi
    2. paṭi + gāyati
    Paṭigijjha
    adjective
    1. greedy; hankering after Snp 675 (Snp-a 482 reads ˚giddha and explains by mahāgijjha)
    paṭi + gijjha, a doublet of giddha ‣See gijjha2
    Paṭigīta
    neuter
    1. a song in response, counter song Ja iv.393 Patiguhati (guhati)
    paṭi + gīta
    Paṭiguhati (˚gūhati)
    1. to concert, keep back cp. i.918
    paṭi + gūhati
    Paṭiggaṇhanaka
    adjective-noun
    1. receiving, receiver Pv-a 175 Patigganhati (patiganhati)
    paṭiggaṇhana (= paṭiggahaṇa) + ka
    Paṭiggaṇhāti (paṭigaṇhāti)
    1. to receive, accept, take (up) DN i.110 (vatthaṁ), 142 Vin i.200 ii.109, 116 (a sewing-needle) SN iv.326 (jātarūpa-rajataṁ) Snp 479 Snp 689 Snp 690 Dhp 220 Ja i.56 Ja i.65 DN-a i.236 Pv-a 47 In special phrase accayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin ii.192 DN i.85 MN i.438 Ja v.379 past participle paṭiggahita (q.v.)
    2. causative ˚ggaheti Vin ii.213 MN i.32
    3. paṭi + gaṇhāti
    Paṭiggaha
    1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient Ja i.146 Ja ii.9 Ja vi.474 Pv iii.111
    2. friendly reception Ja vi.526
    3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin ii.115 213 (udaka˚).

      • a thimble Vin ii.116
    from paṭiggaṇhāti
    Paṭiggahaṇa
    neuter
    1. acceptance, receiving, taking MN iii.34 SN v.472 Snp-a 341
    • accaya˚ acceptance of a sin, i.e. pardon, absolution Ja v.380
    from paṭigganhāti
    Paṭiggahita
    1. received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin i.206 214 Ja vi.231
    • As appaṭiggahitaka
    • neuter “that which is not received” at Vin iv.90
    past participle of paṭigganhāti
    Paṭiggahītar
    1. one who receives, recipient DN i.89
    agent noun of paṭiggaṇhāti
    Paṭiggāha
    1. ‣See patiṭṭhāha
    Paṭiggāhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin ii.213 DN i.138 AN i.161 AN ii.80f.; iii.42, 336 Ja i.56 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 128 Pv-a 175 (opposite dāyaka) Vv-a 195 Sdhp 268
    from paṭiggaṇhāti
    Paṭiggāhaṇa
    neuter
    1. reception, taking in Ja vi.527
    from paṭiggaṇhāti
    Paṭigha
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance anger DN i.25 DN i.34 DN iii.254 DN iii.282 SN i.13 SN iv.71 SN iv.195 SN iv.205 SN iv.208 sq.; v.315 AN i.3 AN i.87 AN i.200 Snp 371 Snp 536 Dhs 1060 Mil 44 DN-a i.22
      2. (psychologically) sensory reaction DN iii.224 DN iii.253 DN iii.262 SN i.165 SN i.186 AN i.41 AN i.267 ii.184 Dhs 265 501, 513, 579 Vb-a 19 ‣See on term Dhs translation 72, 204, 276 and passim
      3. appaṭigha ‣See separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaṁso at Dhs-a 308? (paṭigha-ṭṭhāna-nighaṁso or paṭighaṭṭana-nighaṁso?)
      paṭi + gha, adjective suffix of; ghan = han, literally striking against
    Paṭighavant
    adjective
    1. full of repugnance, showing anger SN iv.208 SN iv.209
    from paṭigha
    Paṭighāta
    1. (literally) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off DN iii.130 MN i.10 AN i.98 AN iv.106f. Ja i.344 Vism 31 (= paṭihanana) Mil 121 Dhp-a ii.8 Pv-a 33
    2. (psych. resentment Dhs 1060 cp. Dhs translation 282
    paṭi + ghāta, of same root as paṭigha
    Paṭighosa
    1. echo Vism 554
    paṭi + ghosa
    Paṭicamma
    1. in ˚gataṁ sallaṁ at Ja vi.78 to be explained not with Commentary as from paṭi + camati cam to wash, cp. ācamati) which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toevoegselen ii.29, s.v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna-camma, i.e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opposite side) which falls in with the Commentary explanation “vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti.”
    Paṭicaya
    & (paṭiccaya)
    1. adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin ii.74 Vin iii.158 (pati˚) SN iii.169 AN iii.376f. (variant reading pati˚); iv.355; v.336 sq. Thag 1, 642 Ud 35 (pati˚) Mil 138
    paṭi + caya
    Paṭicarati
    1. [paṭi + carati) 1. to wander about, to deal with Mil 94
    • to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaṁ p. “to be saved by another in another way,” or to from one (thing) to another, i.e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked DN i.94 Vin iv.35 MN i.96 MN i.250 MN i.442 AN iv.168 (variant reading paṭivadati); explained at DN-a i.264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti “to cover over,” i.e. to conceal (a question) ‣See on expression Dialogues of the Buddha i.116
    Paṭicaleti
    1. to nudge Ja v.434
    causative of paṭicalati
    Paṭicāra
    1. intercourse, visit, dealing with Mil 94
    from paṭi + car
    Paṭicodana
    neuter
    1. rebuking, scolding (back) Dhs-a 393
    abstract from paṭicodeti
    Paṭicodeti
    1. to blame, reprove MN i.72 Vin iv.217 Ud 45
    paṭi + codeti
    Paṭicca
    1. grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with accusative ) MN i.265 (etaṁ on these grounds) SN iii.93 = It 89 (atthavasaṁ) Ja ii.386 (= abhisandhāya) Snp 680 Snp 784 Snp 872 Snp 1046Snp-a 357 Dhp-a i.4 Pv-a 64 (maraṇaṁ), 164 181 (kammaṁ), 207 (anuddayaṁ) ‣See also following

      1. ˚vinīta trained to look for causality MN iii.19 Paticca-samuppanna
      absolutive of pacceti, paṭi + i; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratītya
    Paṭicca-samuppanna
    1. evolved by reason of the law of causation DN iii.275 MN i.500 SN ii.26 AN v.187 Ps i.51 sq., 76 sq. Vb 340 362. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratitya samutpanna MVastu iii.61. Paticca-samuppada
    p. + samuppana
    Paṭicca-samuppāda
    1. “arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)” happening by way of cause working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes
    • See on this Mrs. Rhys Davids in Buddhism 90
    • feminine, Ency. Rel. & Ethics,; s.v. & KS ii., preface Compendium p. 260 sq. with diagram of the “Wheel of Life” Pts. of Controversy, 390
    • feminine
    • The general formula runs thus: Imasmiṁ sati, idaṁ hoti, imass’ uppādā, idaṁ uppajjati; imasmiṁ asati, idaṁ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaṁ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases MN ii.32 SN ii.28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) “individual” or “being,” in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a “Buddhist” to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma-paṭilomaṁ manas’ âkāsi Vin i.1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces saṅkhārā : karma, dimly conscious elements capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rhys Davids), which in their turn give rise to viññāṇa thinking substance (consciousness Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rhys Davids), then follow in succession the following stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rhys Davids); saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rhys Davids), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rhys Davids), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rhys Davids), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+ soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass’ ûpayāsā) old age & death (+ tribulation grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is pratītya-samutpāda, e.g. at Divy 300 Divy 547
    1. The Paṭicca-samuppāda is also called the Nidāna (“basis,” or “ground,” i.e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay’ ākāra (“related-condition”), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya-ñāya (“the noble method or system”). The term paccay’ ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma-literature
    • The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (DN ii.30f.; cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viññāṇa. The same chain occurs again at SN ii.104 sq
    • A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and saṅkhārā added to precede viññāṇa (as above). Thus at SN ii.5 sq
    • A detailed exposition of the Pali
    • s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Buddhaghosa at Vism xvii. (
    • past participle 517–⁠586 under the title of Paññā-bhūmi-niddesa), and at Vb-a 130
    1. -213 under the title of Paccayākāra-vibhanga. Some passages selected for reference: Vin i.1f. MN i.190 257 SN i.136 SN ii.1f. 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq. Ai.177; v.184 Snp 653 Ud 1f.; Ps i.50 sq.; 144 Nett 22, 24, 32, 64 sq. DN-a i.125 126
    1. ˚kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation MN iii.63 Nd1 171; feminine abstract ˚kusalatā DN iii.212
    2. p. + samuppāda, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prātītyasamutpāda, e.g. Divy 300 Divy 547
    Paṭicchaka
    adjective [from paṭicchati) receiving Ja vi.287
    Paṭicchati
    1. to accept, receive, take AN iii.243 (udakaṁ) Vin iv.18 Thag 2, 421 Ja i.233 Ja ii.432 iii.171; iv.137; v.197 Dhp-a iii.271 past participle paṭicchita (q.v.)
    2. causative II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give Ja i.64 Ja i.143 Ja i.159 Ja i.383 Ja i.506 Ja ii.133 Pv-a 81
    3. paṭi + icchati of iṣ2; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati
    Paṭicchanna
    1. covered, concealed, hidden Vin ii.40 AN i.282 Snp 126 Snp 194 Pv i.102 (kesehi = paṭicchādita Pv-a 48); ii.102 (kesehi) DN-a i.276 228 Snp-a 155 Kp-a 53 Vb-a 94 (˚dukkha) Pv-a 43 Pv-a 103
    2. ˚appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin ii.38 Ja i.207
    1. ˚kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions AN ii.239 Snp 127
    past participle of paṭicchādeti
    Paṭicchavi
    1. in appaṭicchavi at Pv ii.113 read with variant reading as sampatitacchavi
    Paṭicchāda
    1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv ii.116 (= vattha Pv-a 76)
    2. deceiving, hiding concealment, deception Snp 232
    from paṭi + chad
    Paṭicchādaka
    1. = preceding Dhs-a 51
    Paṭicchādana
    neuter
    1. covering, hiding, concealment MN i.10 AN iii.352 Vb 357 = Snp-a 180
    from paṭicchādeti
    Paṭicchādaniya
    neuter
    1. the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin i.206 217 Mil 291
    from paṭicchādeti
    Paṭicchādita
    1. covered, concealed, hidden Ja vi.23 (= paṭisanthata Pv-a 48
    past participle of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna
    Paṭicchādī
    feminine
    1. covering, protection Vin ii.122
    2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin i.296 Vin iv.171
    from paṭicchādeti
    Paṭicchādeti
    1. to cover over, conceal, hide SN i.70 SN i.161 DN-a i.264 Vv-a 65 (dhanaṁ); Kp-a 191 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 142 (kesehi), 194 (= parigūhati)
    2. to clothe oneself Vin i.46
    3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) MN i.220

      • to conceal or evade (a question) DN-a i.264
      • past participle paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna; (q.v.)
    paṭi + chādeti, causative of chad
    Paṭicchita
    1. accepted, taken up Snp 803 (plural ˚tāse, cp. Nd1 113 & Snp-a 531)
    2. past participle of paṭicchati
    Paṭijaggaka
    adjective
    1. fostering, nursing, taking care of Ja v.111
    from paṭijaggati
    Paṭijaggati
    1. literally to watch over, i.e. to nourish, tend, feed look after, take care of, nurse Dhp 157 Ja i.235 Ja i.375 ii.132, 200, 436; Vism 119 Dhp-a i.8 45, 99, 392; iv.154 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 43. past participle paṭijaggita (q.v.)
    2. causative ˚jaggāpeti
    3. paṭi + jaggati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratijāgarti Divy 124 Divy 306
    Paṭijaggana
    neuter
    1. rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care Ja i.148 Mil 366 Dhp-a i.27 ii.96
    from paṭijaggati
    Paṭijagganaka
    adjective
    1. to be reared or brought up Ja vi.73 (putta)
    from paṭijaggana
    Paṭijaggāpeti
    1. to make look after or tend Vism 74
    causative II. of paṭijaggati
    Paṭijaggita
    1. reared, cared for, looked after, brought up Ja v.274 Ja v.331
    past participle of paṭijaggati
    Paṭijaggiya
    adjective
    1. to be nursed Dhp-a i.319
    gerundive of paṭijaggati
    Paṭijānāti
    1. to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent DN i.3 DN i.192 SN i.68 SN i.172 SN ii.170 SN iii.28 SN v.204, 423 Snp 76 Snp 135 Snp 555 Snp 601 Snp 1148 Ja i.169 Dhp-a i.21 Pv-a 223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (identical), 241; absolutive paṭiññāya Vin ii.83 (a˚).
    2. past participle paṭiññāta (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + jānāti
    Patijīvan
    1. (—˚) in phrase jīva-paṭijīvaṁ at Ja ii.15 is to be taken as a sort of reduplicated compound of jīva, the imperative of jīvati “live,” as greeting. We might translate “the greeting with ʻ jīva ʼ and reciprocating it.”

    Paṭiñña
    adjective
    1. acknowledged; making belief, quâsi-; in phrase samaṇa˚; a quâsi-Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa AN i.126 AN ii.239 cp. Sakyaputtiya˚ SN ii.272 sacca˚ Ja iv.384 Ja iv.463 Ja v.499
    = paṭiññā
    Paṭiññā
    feminine
    1. acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission DN iii.254 Ja i.153 Pv iv.112, 144 Mil 7 Dhp-a ii.93 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 123 Snp-a 397 539
    • patiññaṁ moceti to keep one’s promise Dhp-a i.93
    from paṭi + jñā; cp. later Sanskrit pratijñā
    Paṭiññāta
    1. agreed, acknowledged, promised Vin ii.83 102 DN i.88 AN i.99 AN iv.144 Pv-a 55
    past participle of paṭijānāti
    Paṭita
    adjective satisfied, happy Dhp-a ii.269 (˚ācāra) Patititthati (patitthahati)
    Paṭitiṭṭhati (paṭiṭṭhahati)
    1. etc ‣See pati˚;
    Paṭitittha
    neuter
    1. opposite bank (of a river) Ja v.443
    paṭi + tittha
    Paṭitthambhati
    1. to stand firm (against) Mil 372
    paṭi + thambhati
    Paṭidaṇḍa
    1. retribution Dhp 133 cp. Dhp-a iii.57 58
    paṭi + daṇḍa
    Paṭidadāti
    1. to give back, to restore Ja i.177 Ja iv.411 (˚diyyare) Pv-a 276 (absolutive ˚datvā)
    2. paṭi + dadāti
    Paṭidasseti
    1. to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv iii.227
    paṭi + dasseti
    Paṭidāna
    neuter
    1. reward, restitution, gift Pv-a 80
    paṭi + dāna
    Paṭidisā
    feminine
    1. an opposite (counter-) point of the com passive opposite quarter DN iii.176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca)
    2. paṭi + disā
    Paṭidissati
    1. to be seen, to appear Ja iii.47 = Pv-a 281 Snp 123 Ja iv.139 Snp-a 172
    paṭi + dissati; usually spelt pati˚
    Paṭidukkhāpanatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Mil 180
    paṭi + abstract of dukkhāpeti, causative denominative from dukkha
    Paṭideseti
    1. to confess Vin ii.102 ‣See also pāṭidesaniya
    paṭi + deseti
    Paṭidhāvati
    1. to run back to (accusative ) MN i.265SN ii.26 (pubbanṭaṁ; opposite aparantaṁ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp 167
    2. paṭi + dhāvati
    Paṭinandati
    1. to accept gladly, to greet in return SN i.189
    paṭi + nandati
    Paṭinandita
    1. rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Snp 452 (pati˚) Ja vi.14 Ja vi.412
    past participle of paṭi + nand
    Paṭināsikā
    feminine
    1. a false nose Ja i.455 Ja i.457
    paṭi + nāsikā
    Paṭinijjhatta
    adjective
    1. appeased again Ja vi.414
    paṭi + nijjhatta
    Paṭiniddesa
    1. coming back upon a subject Nett 5
    paṭi + niddesa
    Paṭinivattati
    1. to turn back again Vin i.216 Ja i.225 Mil 120 Mil 152 (of disease), 246 Pv-a 100 Pv-a 126. causative ˚nivatteti to make turn back Pv-a 141 Commentary on AN iii.28 ‣See paccāsāreti
    2. paṭi + nivattati
    Paṭinivāsana
    neuter
    1. a dress given in return Vin i.46 = ii.223
    paṭi + nivāsana1
    Paṭinissagga
    1. [paṭi + nissagga of nissajjati, nis + sṛj, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratinisarga Avs ii.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. ii.194 MVastu ii.549; pratinissagga MVastu iii.314, 322 giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin iii.173 MN iii.31 SN v.421f. AN i.100 AN i.299 AN iv.148 AN iv.350 Ps i.194 (two p., viz. pariccāga˚ and pakkhandana˚) Pug 19 21, 22
    • ādāna˚ SN v.24 AN v.233 AN v.253f.; upadhi˚ Iti 46 62; sabbûpadhi˚ SN i.136 SN iii.133 SN v.226 AN i.49 AN v.8 AN v.110 AN v.320f.; ˚ânupassanā Ps ii.44 sq.; ˚ânupassin MN iii.83 SN iv.211 SN v.329 AN iv.88 AN iv.146f.; v.112, 359
    Paṭinissaggin
    adjective
    1. giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in compound duppaṭi˚; (sup˚) hard (easy) to renounce DN iii.45 MN i.96 AN iii.335 AN v.150
    from paṭinissagga
    Paṭinissajjati
    1. to give up, renounce, forsake Vin iii.173f. iv.294 SN ii.110 AN v.191f. absolutive paṭinissajja SN i.179 AN iv.374f. Snp 745 Snp 946 (cp. Nd1 430).
    2. past participle paṭinissaṭṭha (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + nissajjati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratinisṛjati Avs ii.190
    Paṭinissaṭṭha
    1. given up, forsaken (act & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin iii.95 iv.27, 137 MN i.37 SN ii.283 AN ii.41 Iti 49 Nd1 430 431 (vanta pahīna p.) Pv-a 256
    past participle of paṭinissajjati, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and ˚nisṛṣṭa Divy 275
    Paṭinissarati
    1. to depart, escape from, to be freed from Nett 113 (= niyyāti vimuccati Commentary )
    paṭi + nissarati
    Paṭineti
    1. to lead back to (accusative ) Vv 5217 Thag 2, 419 Pv ii.1221 (
    2. imperative ˚nayāhi) Pv-a 145 Pv-a 160
    3. paṭi + neti
    Paṭipakkha
    adjective-noun
    1. opposed, opposite; masculine an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd1 397 Ja i.4 Ja i.224 Nett 3, 112, 124; Vism 4 Dhp-a i.92 Snp-a 12 21, 65, 168, 234, 257, 545 Pv-a 98 Dhs-a 164 Sdhp 211 Sdhp 452
    2. paṭi + pakkha
    Paṭipakkhika
    adjective
    1. opposed, inimical Sdhp 216
    from paṭipakkha
    Paṭipajjati
    1. to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan) to go by; figuratively to take a line of action, to follow a method to be intent on, to regulate one’s life DN i.70 (saṁvarāya) 175 (tathattāya) SN ii.98 (kantāramaggaṁ); iv.63 (dhammass’ anudhammaṁ); v.346 (identical); iv.194 (maggaṁ) AN i.36 (dhammânudhammaṁ); ii.4 Snp 317 Snp 323 Snp 706 Snp 815 Snp 1129 (cp. Nd2 384) Dhp 274 (maggaṁ) Pug 20 (saṁvarāya) Pv-a 43 (maggaṁ), 44 (ummaggaṁ), 196 (dhanaṁ); Sdhp 30

    -3rd singular aorist paccāpādi Ja iv.314-

  • absolutive pajjitabba to be followed Pv-a 126 (vidhi), 131 (identical), 281.
  • past participle paṭipanna (q.v.)
  • causative paṭipādeti (q.v.)
  • paṭi + pad, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratipadyate
    Paṭipajjana
    neuter
    1. a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in ˚vidhi method, line of action Pv-a 131 (Burmese variant ), 133
    from paṭipajjati
    Paṭipaṇāmeti
    1. to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away MN i.327 (siriṁ) SN iv.152 (ābādhaṁ) Mil 17 (sakaṭāni)
    paṭi + pa + causative of nam
    Paṭipaṇṇa
    neuter
    1. a letter in return, a written reply Ja i.409
    paṭi + paṇṇa
    Paṭipatti
    feminine
    1. “way,” method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example AN i.69 v.126 (dhammânudhamma˚), 136; Ps ii.15 Nd1 143 Nd2 s.v. Mil 131 Mil 242 Dhp-a ii.30 Dhp-a iv.34 (sammā good or proper behaviour) Pv-a 16 (parahita˚), 54, 67 DN-a i.270 Sdhp 28 Sdhp 29 Sdhp 37 Sdhp 40 Sdhp 213 Sdhp 521
    from paṭi + pad
    Paṭipatha
    1. a confronting road, opposite way Vin ii.193 (˚ṁ gacchati to go to meet); iii.131; iv.268 Mil 9 Vism 92 Dhp-a ii.88
    paṭi + patha
    Paṭipadā
    feminine
    1. means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratipad in meaning of pratipatti “line of conduct” Avs ii.140 with note) DN i.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to) SN ii.81 (nirodhasāruppa-gāminī p.); iv.251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) v.304 (sabbattha-gāminī) 361 (udaya-gāminī sotāpatti˚), 421 DN iii.288 (ñāṇadassana-visuddhi˚) AN i.113 AN i.168 (puñña˚) ii.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā) Vb 99 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq-In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna ‣See specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca, thus a quâsi synonym of magga with which frequently comb; d (e.g DN i.156) Vin i.10 DN i.157 DN iii.219 (anuttariya) MN ii.11 MN iii.251 MN iii.284 SN i.24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti) AN i.295f. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā) Snp 714 (cp. Snp-a 497), 921; Ps ii.147 (majjhimā); Nett 95 sq. Pug 15 68 Vv-a 84 (˚sankhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava-nirodha-gāminī p DN i.84 dukkha-nirodha-g˚. DN i.84 DN i.189 DN iii.136 SN v.426f. AN i.177 Ps i.86, 119 Dhs 1057 lokanirodha-g˚ AN ii.23 Iti 121 with the epithets sammā anuloma˚ apaccanīka˚ anvattha˚ dhammânudhamma Nd1 32 143, 365 Nd2 384 etc ‣See detail under sammā˚-There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz (a) dukkhā dandhâbhiññā, sukhā & khippâbhiññā dandh˚ & khipp˚, i.e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way DN iii.106 AN ii.149f. 154; v.63 Snp-a 497 (b) akkhamā, khamā damā & samā p. i.e. want of endurance, endurance self-control, equanimity
    from paṭi + pad
    Paṭipanna
    1. (having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i.e. practising), entering on, obtaining SN ii.69 SN iv.252 AN i.120 (arahattāya); iv.292 sq. (identical), 372 sq. Iti 81 (dhammânudhamma˚) Snp 736 Dhp 275 (maggaṁ) Vv 3423 (= maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path Vv-a 154) = Pv iv.349 Pug 63 Mil 17 DN-a i.26 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 112 (maggaṁ), 130 174 (sammā˚), 242; (dhammiyaṁ paṭipadaṁ) Dhp-a i.233 (magga˚ on the road, wandering)
    past participle of paṭipajjati
    Paṭipannaka
    adjective noun
    1. one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pug 13 (= maggaṭṭhaka phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186) Mil 342 Mil 344 Nett 50 Dhs-a 164 ‣See also Miln translation ii.231, 237
    from paṭipanna
    Paṭiparivatteti
    1. to turn back or round once more MN i.133
    paṭi + p.
    Paṭipaviṭṭha
    1. gone inside again Snp 979
    past participle of paṭipavisati
    Paṭipavisati
    1. to go in(to) again; causative ˚paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside again Vin i.276
    2. past participle paṭipaviṭṭha (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + pavisati
    Paṭipasaṁsati
    1. to praise back or in return Ja ii.439
    paṭi + pasaṁsati
    Paṭipaharati
    1. to strike in return Dhp-a i.51
    paṭi + paharati
    Paṭipahiṇati
    1. to send back (in return) Dhp-a i.216
    paṭi + pahinati
    Paṭipākatika
    adjective
    1. restored, set right again, safe and sound Ja iii.167 (= pākatika at Pv-a 66) iv.407; vi.372 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 284
    paṭi + pākatika
    Paṭipāṭi
    feminine
    1. order, succession Vin i.248 (bhatta˚); Vism 411 (khandha˚); usually in ablative paṭipāṭiyā adverb successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = Ja v.253 (ghara˚ from house to house) Thag-a 80 (magga˚) Dhp-a i.156 Dhp-a ii.89 iii.361 Snp-a 23 506 Pv-a 54 Vv-a 76 137
    2. paṭi + pāṭi
    Paṭipāṭika
    adjective
    1. being in conformity with the (right) order Thag-a 41
    from last
    Paṭipādaka
    1. the supporter (of a bed) Vin i.48 Vin ii.208
    from paṭi + pad
    Paṭipādeti
    1. to impart, bring into give to, offer, present MN i.339 Ja v.453 Ja v.497 Pv ii.81 (vittaṁ)
    causative of paṭipajjati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratipādayati in same meaning Avs i.262, 315
    Paṭipiṁsati
    1. to beat against SN ii.98 (ure) Ja vi.87 Vism 504 (urāni)
    paṭi + piṁsati
    Paṭipiṇḍa
    1. alms in return Ja ii.307 Ja v.390 (piṇḍa˚ giving & taking of alms) Mil 370
    paṭi + piṇḍa
    Paṭipīta
    1. in asuci˚; at AN iii.226 is not clear (variant reading ˚pīḷita perhaps to be preferred)
    Paṭipīḷana
    neuter
    1. oppression Mil 313 Mil 352
    from paṭipīḷeti
    Paṭipīḷita
    adjective
    1. pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Mil 262 Mil 354
    paṭi + past participle of pīḍ
    Paṭipuggala
    1. a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival MN i.171 = Mil 235 SN i.158 Snp 544 Iti 123 (natthi te paṭipuggala)
    • appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare SN i.158 SN iii.86 Thag 2, 185 Ja i.40 Mil 239 (cp. Miln translation ii.43)
    paṭi + puggala
    Paṭipuggalika
    adjective
    1. belonging to one’s equal, individual Dhs 1044 Perhaps read pāṭi˚ (q.v.)
    from paṭipuggala
    Paṭipucchati

    to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire DN i.60 MN i.27 SN iii.2 Snp p. 92 Ja i.170 Ja iv.194 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 81 AN i.197 AN ii.46 also negative appaṭipucchā (ablative adverb ) without inquiry Vin i.325 paṭi + pucchati

    Paṭipucchā
    feminine
    1. a question in return, inquiry; only ˚-(as ablative) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in following compounds.: ˚karaṇīya Vin i.325
    • ˚vinīta AN i.72
    • ˚vyākaraṇīya (pañha) DN iii.229
    paṭi + pucchā
    Paṭipurisa
    1. a rival, opponent Nd1 172
    paṭi + purisa
    Paṭipūjana
    neuter or ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. worship, reverence, honour Mil 241
      from paṭi + pūj
    Paṭipūjeti
    1. to honour, worship, revere Snp 128 Pv i.13 Mil 241
    paṭi + pūjeti
    Paṭipeseti
    1. to send out to Pv-a 20
    paṭi + peseti
    Paṭippaṇāmeti
    1. to bend (back), stretch out Dhs-a 324
    paṭi + paṇāmeti
    Paṭippassaddha
    1. allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided SN iv.217 SN iv.294 SN v.272 AN i.254 ii.41 Ja iii.37 Ja iii.148 Ja iv.430 Ps ii.2 Pug 27 Kp-a 185 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 245 Pv-a 274. Note. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265
    past participle of paṭippassambhati
    Paṭippassaddhi
    feminine
    1. subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin i.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Ps ii.3 71, 180; Nett 89 Dhs 40 41, 320 Snp-a 9 Esp frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e.g. Nd2 429
    from paṭippassaddha
    Paṭippassambhati
    1. to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated to passive away, to be allayed SN i.211 SN v.51
    2. aorist ˚ssambhi Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷo); iv.133 (ābādho).
    3. past participle paṭippassaddha (q.v.)
    4. causative paṭippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin i.49 (kammaṁ), 144 (identical), 331 (identical) ii.5 (identical), 226 (identical) MN i.76 Ja iii.28 (dohaḷaṁ)
    5. paṭi + ppa + sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is ˚praśrambhyati as well as ˚srambhyati, e.g. MVastu i.253, 254; Divy 68 Divy 138 494, 549, 568
    Paṭipassambhanā
    feminine & ˚ppassambhitatta
    • neuter are exegetical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs 40 41, 320.

    Paṭippharati
    1. to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, figuratively splurt out, bring against, object MN i.95f. AN iv.193 (codakaṁ) Ja i.123 Ja i.163 Nd1 196 (vādaṁ start a word-fight) Mil 372 Dhp-a iv.4 (vacanaṁ)
    paṭi + pharati
    Paṭibaddha
    adjective
    1. bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on DN i.76 Vin iv.302 (kāya˚) AN v.87 (para˚) Dhp 284 Mil 102 (āvajjana˚) Pv-a 134 (˚jīvika dependent on him for a living)
    • frequently in compound ˚citta affected enamoured, one’s heart bound in love Vin iii.128 iv.18 Snp 37 ‣See Nd2 385 65 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 145 (˚tā f abstract), 151, 159 (rañño with the king)
    paṭi + baddha, past participle of bandh
    Paṭibandha
    adjective
    1. bound to, connected with, referring to Ps i.172, 184
    paṭi + bandha
    Paṭibandhati
    1. to hold back, refuse Ja iv.134 (vetanaṁ na p. = aparihāpetvā dadāti)
    paṭi + bandhati
    Paṭibandhu
    1. a connection, a relation, relative Dhs 1059 1136, 1230 Dhs-a 365
    paṭi + bandhu
    Paṭibala
    adjective
    1. able, adequate, competent Vin i.56 342; ii.103, 300; iii.158 AN v.71 Mil 6
    paṭi + bala
    Paṭibāḷha
    1. (op)pressed, forced, urged Vb 338 = Mil 301
    past participle of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi + vah2
    Paṭibāhaka
    1. antidote Mil 335 repelling, preventing Ja vi.571
    of paṭi + bādh
    Paṭibāhati
    1. to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin i.356 Vin ii.162 166 sq., 274; iv.288 Ja i.64 Ja i.217 Dhp-a ii.2 (rañño āṇaṁ), 89 (sītaṁ) Vv-a 68 Pv-a 96 (maraṇaṁ), 252, 286 (gerundive appaṭibāhanīya)
    2. causative ˚bāheti in same meaning Ja iv.194 Dhp-a ii.71 Pv-a 54
    3. past participle paṭibāḷha (q.v.)
    4. paṭi + *bāh of bahis adverb outside
    Paṭibāhana
    1. exclusion, warding off, prevention Mil 81 Vism 244
    Paṭibāhiya
    adjective
    1. to be kept off or averted, negative ap˚ Ja iv.152
    gerundive of paṭibāhati
    Paṭibāhira
    adjective
    1. outside, excluded Vin ii.168
    paṭi + bāhira
    Paṭibimba
    neuter
    1. counterpart, image, reflection Vism 190 Vv-a 50 Vb-a 164
    paṭi + bimba
    Paṭibujjhati
    1. to wake up, to understand, know, AN iii.105f. Thag-a 74 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 128
    • pp paṭibuddha (q.v.)
    paṭi + bujjhati
    Paṭibuddha
    1. awakened, awake Snp 807
    past participle of paṭibujjhati
    Paṭibodha
    1. awaking, waking up Vv 5024
    from paṭi + budh, cp. paṭibujjhati
    Paṭibhajati
    1. to divide MN iii.91
    paṭi + bhaj
    Paṭibhaṇḍa
    1. merchandise in exchange, barter Ja i.377 Pv-a 277
    paṭi + bhaṇḍa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratipanya Divy 173 Divy 271, 564
    Paṭibhaṇḍati
    1. to abuse in return SN i.162 (bhaṇḍantaṁ p.) AN ii.215 (identical) Nd1 397 (identical)
    paṭi + bhaṇḍati
    Paṭibhaya
    1. fear, terror, fright SN iv.195 Pv-a 90 Dāvs iv.35. Frequently in compound ap˚ & sap˚, e. g Vin iv.63 MN i.134 MN iii.61
    paṭi + bhaya
    Paṭibhāga
    1. counterpart, likeness, resemblance Nd2 s.v.; Vism 125 (˚nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory-image) Snp-a 65 76, 83, 114, 265 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 178 Pv-a 279
    2. rejoinder Ja vi.341 (pañha˚)
    3. counterpart, opposite, contrary MN i.304

      • appaṭibhāga
      • adjective unequalled, incomparable, matchless Mil 357 (+ appaṭiseṭṭha) Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara)
      paṭi + bhāga
    Paṭibhāti
    1. to appear, to be evident, to come into one’s mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin Texts ii.30) SN i.155 (˚tu taṁ dhammikathā); v.153 (T reads patibbāti) Snp 450 (p. maṁ = mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399) Nd1 234 = Nd2 386 (also future ˚bhāyissati) Ja v.410 Vv-a 78 = 159 (maṁ p. ekaṁ pañhaṁ pucchituṁ “I should like to ask a question”)
    2. paṭi + bhā
    Paṭibhāna
    neuter
    1. understanding, illumination, intelligence readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vinaya Texts iii.13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 feminine DN i.16 DN i.21 DN i.23 SN i.187 AN ii.135 AN ii.177 AN ii.230 AN iii.42 iv.163; v.96; Ps ii.150, 157 Ja vi.150 Pug 42 Vb 293f. Vb-a 338 394, 467 Mil 21 DN-a i.106-appaṭibhāna
    2. adjective bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin ii.78 = iii.162 MN i.258 AN iii.57 Ja v.238 369; vi.362
    3. paṭi + bhāna. cp. late Sanskrit pratibhāna, from Pali
    Paṭibhānavant
    adjective
    1. possessed of intelligence or ready wit AN i.24 Snp 58 Snp 853 Snp 1147 Nd1 234 Nd2 386 Snp-a 111 (pariyatti˚ & paṭivedha˚)
    from paṭibhāna
    Paṭibhāneyyaka
    adjective
    1. = paṭibhānavant Vin i.249 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.140) AN i.25
    absolutive formation + ka from paṭibhāna
    Paṭibhāsati
    1. to address in return or in reply SN i.134 Snp 1024
    paṭi + bhās
    Paṭimaṁsa
    adjective
    1. as negative app˚; not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin ii.248 (acchidda +) AN v.79
    for paṭimassa = Sanskrit *pratimṛśya, absolutive of prati + mṛś, cp. in consonants haṁsa for harṣa etc.
    Paṭimagga
    1. the way against, a confronting road; ˚ṁ gacchati to go to meet somebody Ja iv.133 Ja vi.127
    paṭi + magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha
    Paṭimaṇḍita
    1. decorated, adorned with Ja i.8 Ja i.41 Ja i.509 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 211
    past participle of paṭi + maṇḍ
    Paṭimantaka
    1. one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i.e. (1) an interlocutor Ja iv.18 (= paṭivacana-dayaka Commentary ); -(2) an amiable person (cp. Latin affabilis = affable) MN i.386
    from paṭi + mant
    Paṭimanteti
    1. to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati˚; at Vin ii.1 DN i.93 (vacane), 94; Dhp i.263 Ja vi.82 Ja vi.294
    paṭi + manteti
    Paṭimalla
    1. a rival wrestler SN i.110 Nd1 172
    paṭi + malla
    Paṭimasati
    1. to touch (at) DN i.106 Snp p. 108 (anumasati +). causative paṭimāseti (q.v.)
    2. paṭi + masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaṁsa
    Paṭimā
    feminine
    1. counterpart, image, figure Ja vi.125 Dāvs v.27 Vv-a 168 (= bimba) Dhs-a 334 -appaṭima adjective without a counterpart, matchless incomparable Thag 1, 614 Mil 239
    2. from paṭi +
    Paṭimānita
    1. honoured, revered, served Pv-a 18
    past participle of paṭimāneti
    Paṭimāneti
    1. to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin ii.169 Vin iv.112 DN i.106 Ja iv.2 Ja iv.203 Ja v.314 Mil 8 Pv-a 12 DN-a i.280
    • pp paṭimānita (q.v.)
    paṭi + causative of man
    Paṭimāreti
    1. to kill in revenge Ja iii.135
    paṭi + causative of mṛ
    Paṭimāseti
    1. to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imperative paṭimāse (for ˚māsaya Dhp 379 (opposite codaya; explained by ˚parivīmaṁse “watch Dhp-a iv.117)
    2. causative of patimasati
    Paṭimukka
    adjective
    1. fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in SN iv.91 MN i.383 Iti 56 Thag 2, 500 (? variant reading paripuṇṇa, cp. Thag-a 290) Ja i.384 vi.64 Mil 390 Dhp-a i.394 (sīse) Vv-a 167 (so read for ˚mukkha), 296
    past participle of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka ‣See Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 197
    Paṭimukha
    adjective
    1. facing, opposite; neuter ˚ṁ
    2. adverb opposite Snp-a 399 (gacchati)
    3. paṭi + mukha
    Paṭimuñcati
    1. to fasten, to bind (in literally as well as applied sense), to tie, put on Vin i.46 SN i.24 (veraṁ ˚muñcati for ˚muccati!) Ja i.384 Ja ii.22 Ja ii.88 Ja ii.197 iv.380 (
    2. absolutive ˚mucca, variant reading ˚muñca), 395; v.25 (attain) 49; vi.525 Dhp-a iii.295
    3. passive paṭimuccati to be fastened, aorist ˚mucci Ja iii.239 Ja vi.176
    4. to attain obtain, find Ja iv.285 = vi.148
    paṭi + muc
    Paṭimutta
    1. (& ˚ka) adjective

      1. in sup˚ well purified, cleansed, pure Ja iv.18 (˚kambu = paṭimutta-suvaṇṇ’ ālankāra Commentary ); v.400; Pv iv.133 (˚ka-suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin Pv-a 230)
      past participle of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭimukka
    Paṭimokkha
    1. a sort of remedy, purgative DN i.12 osadhīnaṁ p. explained at DN-a i.98 as “khārâdīni datvā tad-anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaṁ apanayanaṁ.” cp. Dialogues of the Buddha 26
    2. binding, obligatory Ja v.25 (sangaraṁ p a binding promise). cp. pāṭimokkha
    from paṭi + muc
    Paṭiya
    neuter
    1. a white woollen counterpane Ja iv.352 (= uṇṇāmaya-paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva Commentary )
    = paṭikā
    Paṭiyatta
    1. prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin iv.18 (alankata˚) Ja iv.380 (Commentary for pakata) Pv-a 25 (Commentary for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alankata˚), 135 (identical), 232 (identical), 279 (identical); Kp-a 118 (alankata˚)
    past participle of paṭi + yat
    Paṭiyāti
    1. to go back to, reach Ja vi.149 (Commentary for paṭimuñcati)
    paṭi + , cp. pacceti
    Paṭiyādita
    1. given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Mil 9 Dhp-a ii.75
    past participle of paṭiyādeti
    Paṭiyādeti
    1. to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate Snp-a 447 past participle paṭiyādita (q.v.)
    2. causative II. paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin i.249 (yāguṁ); Snp p. 110 (bhojaniyaṁ); P.vA 22, 141. Pati-y-alokam for *paṭiyāteti = Sanskrit pratiyātayati, causative of paṭi + yat, like Pali niyyādeti = Sanskrit niryātayati
    Paṭi-y-ālokaṁ
    1. gacchati “to go to the South” Vin iv.131 161
    Paṭiyodha
    1. counterfight Ja iii.3
    paṭi + yodha
    Paṭiyoloketi
    (Text paṭi-oloketi)
    1. to look at, to keep an eye on, observe Ja ii.406
    paṭi + oloketi
    Paṭirava
    1. shouting out, roar Dāvs iv.52
    paṭi + rava
    Paṭirājā
    1. hostile king, royal adversary Ja vi.472 Dhp-a i.193
    paṭi + rājā
    Paṭiruddha
    1. obstructed, hindered, held back, caged Ja iv.4 (oruddha-paṭiruddha sic.)
    past participle paṭi + rudh
    Paṭirūpa
    adjective
    1. fit, proper, suitable, befitting seeming DN i.91 Vin ii.166 (seyyā) MN i.123 SN i.214 SN ii.194 (ap˚) Thag 2, 341 Pv ii.1215 Ja v.99 Pug 27 Dhp-a iii.142 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 122 (= yutta), 124. —˚desavāsa living in a suitable region DN iii.276 = AN ii.32 Nett 29, 50
    • Spelt pati˚; at Dhp 158 Snp 89 Snp 187 Snp 667 Snp-a 390 cp. pāṭirūpika
    paṭi + rūpa
    Paṭirūpaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. like, resembling, disguised as, in the appearance of, having the form of SN i.230 Dhp-a i.29 (putta˚) Pv-a 15 (samaṇa˚). As pati˚ at Snp-a 302 348, 390
    • nt. an optical delusion Dhp-a iii.56
    from paṭirūpa
    Paṭirūpatā
    feminine
    1. likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence Pv-a 268 (= vaṇṇa)
    abstract from paṭirūpa
    Paṭirodati
    1. to cry in return, to reply by crying Ja iii.80 past participle paṭirodita = paṭirodana
    2. paṭi + rodati of rud
    Paṭirodana
    neuter
    1. replying through crying Ja iii.80
    paṭi + rodana
    Paṭirodeti
    1. to scold back SN i.162
    paṭi + causative of rud
    Paṭirosati
    1. to annoy in return, to tease back SN i.162 AN ii.215 Nd1 397
    paṭi + rosati
    Paṭiladdha
    1. received, got, obtained Pv-a 15 (= laddha), 88
    past participle of paṭilabhati
    Paṭilabhati
    1. to obtain, receive, get Iti 77 Ja i.91 Nd2 427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati) Pug 57 Vv-a 115 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 67 etc preterite 3rd pl paccaladdhaṁsu SN i.48 (so variant reading & Commentary Text ˚latthaṁsu) explained by paṭilabhiṁsu cp. Kindred Sayings 319.
    2. aorist 1st sg paṭilacchiṁ Ja v.71
    3. causative paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob Ja v.76 (paṭilābhayanti naṁ “rob me of him”)
    4. paṭi + labhati
    Paṭilābha
    1. obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment DN i.195 MN i.50 AN ii.93 AN ii.143 Ps ii.182, 189 Nd1 262 Dhp 333 Pug 57 Vv-a 113 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 74
    • attabhāva˚ obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence SN ii.256 SN iii.144 AN ii.159 AN ii.188 AN iii.122 sq
    • ‣ See also paribhoga
    from paṭi + labh
    Paṭilika
    Burmese variant together with paṭalika for talika at Ja iii.80 (cp. AN iii.36?).
    Paṭilīna
    1. having withdrawn, keeping away SN i.48 (˚nisabha “expert to eliminate”; reading pati˚); with reading pati also AN ii.41 AN iv.449 Snp 810 Snp 852 Nd1 130 224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno)
    past participle of paṭilīyati
    Paṭilīyati
    1. to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (+ paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Miln & identical passage at SN ii.265 print pati˚) Vism 347 (+ paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati). past participle paṭilīna
    2. causative paṭileṇeti (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + līyati of
    Paṭileṇeti
    1. to withdraw, to make keep away not to touch SN ii.265 (pati˚, as at Mil 297 patilīyati)
    Sec. dern from past participle paṭilīna in sense of
  • causative ; cp. Sanskrit ˚lāpayati of
  • Paṭilobheti
    1. to fill with desire, to entice Ja v.96
    paṭi + causative of lubh
    Paṭiloma
    adjective
    1. “against the hair,” in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually combined with anuloma i.e. forward & backward Vin i.1 AN iv.448 etc ‣See paṭiccasamuppāda Ja ii.307
    • ˚˚pakkha opposition Pv-a 114 (cp. paṭipakkha
    paṭi + loma
    Paṭivacana
    neuter
    1. answer, reply, rejoinder Ja iv.18 Mil 120 Pv-a 83 (opposite vacana) Thag-a 285
    paṭi + vacana
    Paṭivaṭṭati
    (& ˚vattati)
    1. intranstitive to roll or move back, to turn away from AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); causative paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs (but cp. Childers s.v. “to knock, strike”) SN ii.265 (T spells pati˚, as also at Mil 297).
    2. gerundive paṭivattiya only in negative ap˚ (q.v.)
    3. past participle paṭivatta (q.v.)
    4. paṭi + vṛt
    Paṭivatta
    neuter
    1. moving backwards, only in compound vatta-paṭivatta-karaṇa “moving forth or backwards” performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other Dhp-a; i.157
    past participle of paṭivattati
    Paṭivattar
    1. one who contradicts SN i.222
    paṭi + vattar, agent noun of vac
    Paṭivadati
    1. to answer, reply AN iv.168 (variant reading for paṭicarati) Snp 932 Dhp 133 Nd1 397 Pv-a 39
    paṭi + vadati
    Paṭivasati
    1. to live, dwell (at) DN i.129 Vin ii.299 SN i.177 Ja i.202 Snp-a 462 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 67. Pativana, Pativanita, Pativani
    paṭi + vasati
    Paṭivāṇa, Paṭivāṇitā, Paṭivāṇī
    1. etc. occur only in negative form app˚, q.v
    Paṭivātaṁ
    adverb
    1. against the wind (opposite anuvātaṁ) Vin ii.218 SN i.13 Snp 622 Dhp 54 Dhp 125 Pv-a 116 Sdhp 425
    paṭi + vātaṁ, accusative cp. Sanskrit prativāta & prativātaṁ
    Paṭivāda
    1. retort, recrimination Mil 18 (vāda˚ talk and counter-talk)
    paṭi + vāda
    Paṭivāpeti
    1. to turn away from, to free from, cleanse MN i.435 = AN iv.423 Dhs-a 407
    causative of paṭi + vap
    Paṭivāmeti
    to throw out again DN-a i.39
    1. cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh˚, or paṭibādhayamāno and referring to Thag 1, 744
    paṭi + causative vam
    Paṭiviṁsa
    1. literally “divided part,” sub-part, share, bit portion, part Vin i.28 Vin iii.60 (Text reads paṭivisa) Ja ii.286 Dhs-a 135 Dhp-a i.189 Dhp-a iii.304 Vv-a 61 (˚vīsa), 64 (variant reading ˚vīsa), 120 (identical)
    paṭi-aṁsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṁsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṁsa → paṭiviṁsa)
    Paṭiviṁsaka
    1. part share, portion Dhp-a ii.85
    preceding + ka
    Paṭivigacchati
    1. to go apart again, to go away or asunder AN iii.243 Mil 51
    paṭi + vi + gacchati
    Paṭivijānāti
    1. to recognise Vin iii.130 Nd2 378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati) Mil 299
    paṭi + vi + jānāti
    Paṭivijjha
    adjective
    1. in compound dup˚; hard to penetrate (literally & figuratively) SN v.454
    gerundive of paṭivijjhati
    Paṭivijjhati
    1. to pierce through, penetrate (literally & figuratively), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin i.183 SN ii.56 SN v.119 SN v.278 SN v.387 SN v.454 AN iv.228 AN iv.469 Nd2 378 Ja i.67 Ja i.75 Ps i.180 sq. Mil 344 Dhp-a i.334 aorist paṭivijjha Snp 90 (= aññāsi sacchākāsi Snp-a 166), and paccavyādhi Thag 1, 26 = 1161 (˚byādhi); also 3rd
    2. plural paccavidhuṁ AN iv.228

      • pp paṭividdha (q.v.) On phrase uttariṁ appaṭivijjhanto ‣See uttari
      paṭi + vijjhati of vyadh
    Paṭivijjhanaka
    adjective
    1. only in negative ap˚; impenetrable Dhp-a iv.194
    paṭi + vijjhana + ka,of vyadh
    Paṭividita
    1. known, ascertained DN i.2 Ps i.188
    past participle of paṭi + vid
    Paṭividdha
    1. being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing MN i.438 SN ii.56 (sup˚); Ps ii.19, 20 Ja i.214 Vv-a 73 (˚catusacca = saccānaṁ kovida)
    • appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt Ja vi.446
    past participle of paṭivijjhati
    Paṭivinaya
    1. repression, subdual, only in compound āghāta˚ DN iii.262 DN iii.289 AN iii.185f. ‣See āghāta
    paṭi + vi +
    Paṭivinicchinati
    1. to try or judge a case again, to reconsider Ja ii.187
    paṭi + vinicchinati
    Paṭivinīta
    1. removed, dispelled, subdued SN ii.283 SN v.76 SN v.315
    past participle of paṭivineti
    Paṭivineti
    1. to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue SN i.228 MN i.13 AN iii.185f. Ja vi.551 Pv-a 104 (pipāsaṁ). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prativineti MVastu ii.121
    • pp paṭivinīta (q.v.)
    paṭi + vi +
    Paṭivinodana
    neuter
    1. removal, driving out, explusion AN ii.48 AN ii.50 Mil 320
    from paṭivinodeti
    Paṭivinodaya
    adjective-noun
    1. dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal; dup˚ hard to dispel AN iii.184f.
    from paṭivinodeti
    Paṭivinodeti
    1. to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of DN i.138 MN i.48 Pv iii.58 Pug 64 Vv-a 305 Pv-a 60
    paṭi + vi + causative of nud, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prativinudati Divy 34 Divy 371 etc.
    Paṭivibhajati
    1. to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts MN i.58 (cp. iii.91; paṭibhaj˚ & variant reading vibhaj˚)
    paṭi + vibhajati
    Paṭivibhatta
    adjective
    1. (equally) divided MN i.372 AN iv.211 Vv-a 50 On negative ap˚; in cpd ˚bhogin ‣See appaṭivibhatta
    paṭi + vibhatta
    Paṭivirata
    adjective
    1. abstaining from, shrinking from (with ablative) DN i.5 MN iii.23 SN v.468 Iti 63 Pug 39 58 DN-a i.70 Pv-a 28 Pv-a 260
    • app˚ not abstaining from Vin ii.296 SN v.468 Iti 64
    past participle of paṭiviramati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prativiramati Divy ii, 302, 585
    Paṭivirati
    feminine
    1. abstinence from Dhs 299 MN iii.74 Pv-a 206
    from paṭivirata
    Paṭiviramati
    1. to absṭain from MN i.152
    paṭi + viramati
    Paṭivirujjhati
    1. to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṁ) Ja iv.104
    • pp paṭiviruddha (q.v.)
    paṭi + vi + rudh
    Paṭiviruddha
    1. obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent Ja vi.12 DN-a i.51 (˚ā satta = pare) Mil 203 Mil 403
    past participle of paṭivirujjhati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445
    Paṭivirūhati
    1. to grow again Vism 419
    paṭi + virūhati
    Paṭivirodha
    1. hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs 418 1060 Pug 18 Mil 203
    paṭi + virodha
    Paṭivisiṭṭha
    1. peculiar MN i.372
    paṭi + visiṭṭha
    Paṭivisesa
    1. sub-discrimination Ja ii.9
    paṭi + visesa
    Paṭivissaka
    adjective
    1. dwelling near, neighbouring MN i.126 Ja i.114 Ja i.483 Ja iii.163 iv.49; v.434 Dhp-a i.47 (˚itthi), 155, 235 (˚dārakā)
    from paṭi + *veśman or *veśya
    Paṭivutta
    1. (paṭi + vutta, past participle of vac] said against, replied Vin iii.131 274
    Paṭivekkhiya
    1. ‣See ap˚;
    Paṭivedeti
    1. to make known, declare, announce Vin i.180 SN i.101 SN i.234 Snp 415 (aorist ˚vedayi) DN-a i.227 Pv-a 6 (pītisomanassaṁ)
    2. paṭi + vedeti, causative of vid
    Paṭivedha
    1. literally piercing, i.e. penetration comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge AN i.22 44 DN iii.253 Ps i.105; ii.50, 57, 105, 112, 148, 182 Vb 330 Mil 18 Snp-a 110 111; Sdhp 65
    • appaṭivedha non-intelligence, ignorance Vin i.230 SN ii.92 SN iii.261; v.431 AN ii.1 Dhs 390 1061, 1162; Pug 21-duppaṭivedha
    • adjective hard to pierce or penetrate; flg difficult to master Mil 250
    • maggaphala˚ realisation of the fruit of the Path Dhp-a i.110
    from paṭi + vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prativedha MVastu; i.86
    Paṭivera
    1. revenge Dhp-a i.50
    paṭi + vera
    Paṭivellati
    1. to embrace, cling to Ja v.449
    paṭi + vellati
    Paṭivyāharati
    1. to desist from, aorist paccavyāhāsi DN ii.232
    paṭi + vyāharati
    Paṭivyūhati
    (pati˚)
    1. to heap up against (?) Snp-a 554
    paṭi + vyūhati
    Paṭisaṁyamati
    1. to restrain, to exercise self-control Ja iv.396
    paṭi + saṁyamati
    Paṭisaṁyujati
    1. to connect with, figuratively to start, begin (vādaṁ a discussion or argument) SN i.221 (bālena paṭisaṁyuje = paṭipphareyya Commentary ; “engage himself to bandy with a fool” Kindred Sayings 284) Snp 843 (vādaṁ p. paṭipphareyya kalahaṁ kareyya Nd1 196). past participle paṭisaṁyutta (q.v.)
    2. paṭi + saṁ + yuj
    Paṭisaṁyutta
    1. connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin iv.6 SN i.210 (nibbāna ˚dhammikathā) Thag 1, 598 Iti 73 Vv-a 6 87 Pv-a 12
    past participle of paṭisaṁyujati
    Paṭisaṁvidita
    1. apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase “pubbe appaṭisaṁvidita pañho” SN ii.54
    past participle of paṭi + saṁ + vid; same (prati) at MVastu iii.256
    Paṭisaṁvedin
    adjective
    1. experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering MN i.56 SN i.196 SN ii.122 SN iv.41 SN v.310f. AN i.164 (sukhadukkha˚); iv.303 (identical); v.35 (identical) Iti 99 Ps i.95, 114 (evaṁsukhadukkha˚), 184, 186 sq. Pug 57 58
    from paṭisaṁvedeti; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisaṁvedin Divy 567
    Paṭisaṁvedeti
    1. to feel, experience, undergo, perceive DN i.43 DN i.45 AN i.157 (domanassaṁ); iv.406 (identical) Pug 59 Pv-a 192 (mahādukkhaṁ). There is also a by-form, viz. paṭisaṁvediyati SN ii.18 SN ii.75 SN ii.256 (attabhāva-paṭilābhaṁ) Iti 38 (sukkha-dukkhaṁ; variant reading ˚vedeti)
    paṭi + saṁ + vedeti, causative of vid
    Paṭisaṁharaṇa
    neuter
    1. removing Nett 27, 41
    from paṭisaṁharati
    Paṭisaṁharati
    1. to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin ii.185 (sakavaṇṇaṁ) DN i.96 SN v.156 Pv-a 92 (devarūpaṁ)
    paṭi + saṁ + hṛ; , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisaṁharati MVastu i.82
    Paṭisakkati
    1. to run back Vin ii.195 AN iv.190
    paṭi + sakkati
    Paṭisaṅkhayanto
    1. is ppr. of paṭi + saṁ + kṣi, to be pacified Thag 1, 371
    Paṭisaṅkharoti
    1. to restore, repair, mend Vin ii.160 AN ii.249 Ja iii.159 (nagaraṁ). causative II paṭisaṅkhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again MN iii.7 Ja vi.390 (gehāni)
    2. paṭi + saṁ + kṛ
    Paṭisaṅkhā
    feminine
    1. reflection, judgment, consideration Vin i.213 SN iv.104 (˚yoniso) Ps i.33, 45, 57, 60, 64 Pug 25 57 Dhs 1349
    • appaṭisaṅkhā (‣ See also ˚sankhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Ps i.33, 45 Dhs 1346 = Pug 21

      • Note. In combination paṭisaṅkhā yoniso “carefully, with proper care or intention” p. is to be taken as
      • absolutive of paṭisankhāti (q.v.) This connection is frequent, e.g. SN iv.104 AN ii.40 Nd1 496 Nd2 540
      paṭi + sankhā of khyā
    Paṭisaṅkhāti
    1. to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in absolutive paṭisaṅkhā (as
    2. adverb ) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin i.213 MN i.273 MN iii.2 Ja i.304 Nd2 540 Pug 25 cp. paṭisankhā (+ yoniso); also
    3. absolutive paṭisaṅkhāya Sddp 394

      • O
      • past participle appaṭisaṅkhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app˚ rashly & without a thought MN i.94 SN ii.110 SN ii.219
      • cp. paṭisañcikkhati
      paṭi + saṁ + khyā
    Paṭisaṅkhāna
    neuter
    1. carefulness, mindfulness, consideration Ja i.502 Vv-a 327 Dhs-a 402 (˚paññā); Sdhp 397. —˚bala power of computation AN i.52 AN i.94 AN ii.142 DN iii.213 DN iii.244 Ps ii.169, 176 Dhs 1354 (cp. Dhs translation 354); Nett 15, 16, 38. Patisankharika & ya;
    from paṭisankhāti
    Paṭisaṅkhārika
    ˚ya;
    adjective
    1. serving for repair Vin iii.43 (dārūni) Pv-a 141 (identical; ˚ya)
    from paṭisankharoti
    Paṭisañcikkhati
    1. to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin i.5 DN i.63 MN i.267 MN i.499 MN iii.33 SN i.137 AN i.205 Pug 25 Vism 283
    paṭi + saṁ + cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭisankhāti & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisañcikṣati MVastu; ii.314
    Paṭisañjīvita
    1. revived, resurrected MN i.333
    past participle of paṭi + saṁ + jīv
    Paṭisatena
    adverb
    1. by the hundred, i.e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin i.269
    paṭi + instrumental of sataṁ
    Paṭisattu
    1. an enemy (in retaliation) Ja ii.406 Nd1 172 173 Mil 293
    paṭi + sattu
    Paṭisanthata
    1. kindly received (covered, concealed? Commentary ) Ja vi.23 (= paṭicchāditaṁ guttaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ vā Commentary )
    past participle of paṭisantharati
    Paṭisantharati
    1. to receive kindly, to welcome, Mil 409 Dhs-a 397 absolutive ˚santhāya Ja vi.351
    2. past participle paṭisanthata (q.v.)
    3. paṭi + saṁ + tharati of stṛ
    Paṭisanthāra
    1. literally spreading before, i.e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill favour, friendship DN iii.213 DN iii.244 AN i.93 AN iii.303f. iv.28, 120; v.166, 168 (˚aka adjective one who welcomes) Ja ii.57 Dhp 376 (explained as āmisa˚ and dhamma˚ at Dhp-a iv.111 ‣See also Dhs-a 397f. & Dhs translation 350) Dhs 1344 Vb 360 Mil 409 paṭisanthāraṁ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly Pv-a 12 Pv-a 44 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 187
    from paṭi + saṁ + stṛ
    Paṭisandahati
    1. to undergo reunion ‣See next Mil 32
    paṭi + sandahati
    Paṭisandhi
    1. reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Ps i.11 sq. 52, 59 sq.; ii.72 sq.; Nett 79, 80 Mil 140 Dhp-a ii.85 Vv-a 53 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 136 Pv-a 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at Vb-a 155–⁠160
    • appaṭisandhika ‣See sep
    from paṭi + saṁ + dhā
    Paṭisama
    adjective
    1. equal, forming, a counterpart Mil 205 (rāja˚); negative appaṭisama not having one’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94 Mil 331
    paṭi + sama
    Paṭisambhidā
    feminine

    literally “resolving continuous breaking up,” i.e. analysis, analytic insight discriminating knowledge ‣See full discussion explanation of term at Kvu translation 377–⁠382. Always referred to as “the four branches of logical analysis” (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha˚; analysis of meanings “in extension”; dhamma˚; of reasons, conditions, or causal relations; nirutti˚; of meanings “in intension as given in

    1. definitions paṭibhāna˚ or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu translation). In detail at AN ii.160 AN iii.113 120; Ps i.88, 119; ii.150, 157, 185, 193 Vb 293
    1. -305 Vb-a 386f. (cp. Vism 440 sq.), 391 sq
    • See further AN i.22 AN iv.31 Nd2 386 under paṭibhānavant; Ps i.84 132, 134; ii.32, 56, 116, 189 Mil 22 (attha-dh˚nirutti-paṭibhāna-pāramippatta), 359 Vv-a 2 Dhp-a iv.70 (catūsu p—˚ āsu cheka). p˚-patta one who has attained mastership in analysis AN i.24 AN iii.120 Ps ii.202
    • Often included in the attainment of Arahantship in formula “saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṁ pāpunāti,” viz. Mil 18 Dhp-a ii.58 78, 93
    paṭi + saṁ + bhid; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisaṁvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid; , favoured by use & meaning of latter root in Pali paṭisaṁvidita. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find pratisaṁvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha˚ dharma nirukti˚ pratibhāna˚ (?). MVastu; iii.321
    Paṭisammajjati
    1. to sweep over again Mil 15
    paṭi + sammajjati
    Paṭisammodeti
    1. to greet friendly in return Ja vi.224 (= sammodanīya-kathāya paṭikatheti Commentary )
    paṭi + saṁ + causative of mud
    Paṭisaraṇa
    neuter
    1. refuge in (—˚), shelter, help, protection MN i.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses) iii.9 SN iv.221 SN v.218 AN i.199 (Bhagavaṁ˚); ii.148 (sa˚ able to be restored); iii.186 (kamma˚); iv.158 351; v.355 Ja i.213 Ja vi.398
    • appaṭisaraṇa (adjective without shelter, unprotected Vin ii.153 (so read for appaṭiss˚)
    • Note. In meaning “restoration” the derivation is probably from paṭi + sṛ; to move (Sanskrit saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). cp. paṭisāraṇiya
    paṭi + saraṇa1
    Paṭisarati1
    1. to run back, stay back, lag behind Snp 8f. (opposite atisarati; aorist paccasāri explained by ohiyyi Snp-a 21)
    2. paṭi + sṛ
    Paṭisarati2
    1. to think back upon, to mention DN-a i.267
    paṭi + smṛ
    Paṭisallāna
    1. (& ˚āṇa, e.g. SN v.320) neuter

      1. retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion DN iii.252 MN i.526 SN i.77 SN iii.15 SN iv.80 SN iv.144 SN v.12 SN v.398 SN v.414 AN ii.51 AN ii.176 AN iii.86f. 116 sq., 195; iv.15 36, 88; v.166, 168 Snp 69 (cp. Nd2 s.v.) Ja ii.77 (pati˚) Vb 244 252 Mil 138 Mil 412
      1. ˚ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also ˚rata AN iii.261f. Iti 39 Nd2 433
      2. ˚sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism 90
      for *paṭisallayana, from paṭi + saṁ + , cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisaṁlayana Divy 156 Divy 194, 494
    Paṭisalliyati
    (˚līyati)
    1. to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin iii.39 (infinitive ˚salliyituṁ) DN ii.237 SN v.12 (identical), 320, 325 Mil 139 past participle paṭisallīna (q.v.)
    2. from paṭi + saṁ + , cp. paṭilīyati
    Paṭisallīna
    1. secluded, retired, gone into solitude abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin i.101 (rahogata +) DN i.134 DN i.151 SN i.71 SN i.146f. (divāvihāragata +), 225; ii.74 (rahogata +); iv.80, 90, 144 v.415 AN ii.20 Snp-a 346 (pati˚) Ja i.349 Mil 10 Mil 138f. Vv-a 3 DN-a i.309 (pati˚)
    past participle of paṭisalliyati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisaṁlīna Divy 196 Divy 291.
    Paṭisāṭheyya
    neuter
    1. a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) Ja ii.183
    paṭi + sāṭheyya
    Paṭisāmita
    1. arranged, got ready Vism 91
    past participle of paṭisāmeti
    Paṭisāmeti
    1. to set in order arrange, get ready Vin ii.113 211, 216 MN i.456 Ja iii.72 Mil 15 (pattacīvaraṁ) Vv-a 118 (variant reading ˚yāpeti) 157 (variant reading ˚nameti)
    paṭi + causative of śam, samati to make ready; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratiśāmayati Divy passim
    Paṭisāyati
    1. to taste, eat, partake of food Vin ii.177
    paṭi + sāyati
    Paṭisāra
    1. ‣See vi˚
    paṭi + smṛ
    Paṭisārana
    neuter
    1. act of protection, expiation, atonement Mil 344 (in law); applied
    from paṭi + sāreti
    Paṭisāraṇiya
    adjective neuter
    1. only as technical term in combination with kamma (official act, chapter), i.e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.364 Vin i.49 (one of the 5 Sangha-kammas, viz. tajjaniya˚ nissaya˚, pabbājaniya˚, p.˚, ukkhepaniya˚), 143 (identical) 326; ii.15–⁠20, 295 AN i.99 AN iv.346 Dhp-a ii.75
    a gerundive formation from paṭi + sāreti, causative of sṛ; to move
    Paṭisārin
    adjective
    1. falling back upon, going back to, trusting in leaning on (—˚) DN i.99 (gotta˚) SN i.153 (identical); ii.284 (identical)
    from paṭi + sṛ; , cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note
    Paṭisāsana
    neuter
    1. counter-message, reply Dhp-a i.392
    paṭi + sāsana
    Paṭisibbita
    1. sewn, embroidered Vv-a 167 (pati˚)
    past participle of paṭi + sibbati
    Paṭisīsaka
    1. a false top-knot, “chignon” (?) Ja ii.197 (˚ṁ paṭimuñcitvā); v.49 (identical) Mil 90 (muṇḍaka˚)
    paṭi + sīsaka
    Paṭisutta
    1. sunk into sleep Thag 1, 203
    past participle of paṭi + svap
    Paṭisumbhita
    1. fallen down Pv iii.18 (= patita Pv-a 174)
    past participle of paṭi + śumbh
    Paṭisūra
    1. a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Snp 831 (= paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd1 172) Nd1 173 (identical)
    paṭi + sūra
    Paṭiseṭṭha
    adjective
    1. having a superior; negative app˚; incomparable, unsurpassed Mil 357 (appaṭibhāga +)
    paṭi + seṭṭha
    Paṭisedha
    1. warding off, prohibition Mil 314 (“resubjugation”) Snp-a 402 (with reference to part “na”); Kp-a 170 (identical) Pv-a 11 (˚nipāta = "mā”) Vv-a 224
    from paṭi + sidh1, sedhati drive off
    Paṭisedhaka
    adjective noun
    1. warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to SN i.221 Mil 344
    from paṭisedha
    Paṭisedhati
    1. & (causative ); ˚sedheti

      1. to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse SN iv.341 Pv-a 11
      paṭi + sedhati
    Paṭisedhana
    neuter
    1. warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping SN i.221 SN i.223 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 25; Sdhp 397
    cp. paṭisedha
    Paṭisedhitar
    1. one who prohibits or refuses Ja ii.123 = v.91
    agent noun from paṭisedhati
    Paṭisena
    1. repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compound with kṛ; as ˚senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Snp 932 cp. Nd1 397; —˚senikattar (n ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Snp 832 cp. Nd1 173
    paṭi + sena, of either or śri, cp. usseneti
    Paṭiseneti
    1. to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opposite usseneti) AN ii.215 (paṭisseneti) Snp 390 (˚seniyati)
    paṭi + seneti ‣See usseneti
    Paṭisevati
    1. to follow, pursue, indulge in (accusative ) practise Vin ii.296 (methunaṁ dhammaṁ) MN i.10 AN ii.54 (methunaṁ) Ja i.437 Ja vi.73 Ja vi.505 Dhp 67 Nd1 496 Pug 62 Mil 224 Dhp-a ii.40 Pv-a 130 Sdhp 396. Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati˚; at Dhp 67 Dhp 68 Ja iii.275 278
    2. paṭi + sevati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning
    Paṭisevana
    neuter
    1. going after, indulging in, practice MN i.10
    from paṭisevati
    Paṭisevitar
    1. one who practises, pursues or indulges in (accusative ) AN iii.143f. (bhesajjaṁ)
    2. agent noun of paṭisevati
    Paṭisotaṁ
    adverb
    1. against the stream (opposite anusotaṁ) Iti 114 Ja i.70 Pv-a 154 paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work SN i.136 AN ii.6 (opposite anu˚), 214 sq
    paṭi + sotaṁ, accusative of sota
    Paṭissata
    1. recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Snp 283 = Mil 411 Dhp 144 (t) Vv 2110 and with spelling pati˚; at SN iii.143 SN iv.74 SN iv.322 SN iv.351 AN iii.24 Iti 10 21, 81 Snp 283 Snp 413
    paṭi + sata, past participle of smṛ
    Paṭissati
    feminine
    1. mindfulness, remembrance, memory MN i.36f. Dhs 23 Pug 25 app˚ lapse of memory Dhs 1349
    paṭi + sati of smṛ
    Paṭissatika
    adjective
    1. mindful, thoughtful Thag 1, 42
    from paṭissati
    Paṭissava
    1. assent, promise, obedience Ja vi.220 Vv-a 351 (cp. paṭissaya Vv-a 347)
    from paṭi + śru
    Paṭissavatā
    feminine
    1. obedience; negative appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs 1325 = Pug 20 Patissa & Patissa
    abstract from paṭissava
    Paṭissā
    Patissā
    feminine [paṭi + śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin; in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in compound sapratīśa respectful Divy; also MVastu i.516; ii.258; besides as sapratisa MVastu iii.345 deference, obedience, only in compound sappaṭissa (q.v. obedient, deferential Iti 10 (sappatissa) Vv 8441 (cp Vv-a 347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to SN i.139 SN ii.224f. AN ii.20 AN iii.7 AN iii.247 AN iii.439 Ja ii.352 (˚vāsa anarchy; reading t) Pv-a 89
    Paṭissāvin
    adjective
    1. assenting, ready, obedient, willing DN i.60 SN iii.113 (kinkāra-paṭi˚)
    from paṭi + śru
    Paṭissuṇāti
    1. to assent, promise, agree aorist paccassosi Vin i.73 DN i.236 SN i.147 SN i.155 Snp p. 50, and paṭisuṇi Snp-a 314
    2. absolutive ˚suṇitvā frequently in formula “sādhū ti patissuṇitvā” asserting his agreement, saying yes SN i.119 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā SN i.155
    3. feminine abstract paṭissutavatā Snp-a 314
    4. paṭi + śru
    Paṭisseneti
    1. ‣See paṭiseneti
    Paṭihaṁsati
    1. to beat, knock against Pv-a 271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv iv.108; variant reading paṭipisati)
    for ghaṁsati?
    Paṭihaṅkhati
    1. only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaṁ paṭihankhāmi navañ ca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi “I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new” SN iv.104 = AN ii.40 iii.388 = iv.167 = Nd1 496 = Nd2 5402; Vism 32, 33
    future of paṭihanti
    Paṭihata
    1. stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv iii.79 Pv-a 20 (˚citta), 207 (identical)
    • app˚ unobstructed Dhp-a ii.8 Vv-a 14
    past participle of paṭihanti
    Paṭihanana
    neuter
    1. repulsion, warding off Vism 31
    from paṭi + han
    Paṭihananaka
    adjective
    1. one who offers resistance Dhp-a i.217
    from paṭi + han
    Paṭihanati
    1. to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy MN i.273 Mil 367 ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism 343. absolutive paṭihacca SN v.69 SN v.237 SN v.285
    2. future paṭihaṅkhati; pp paṭihata (q.v.)

      • passive paṭihaññati Iti 103 Ja i.7 Dhs-a 72
      paṭi + han
    Paṭiharati
    1. to strike in return Vin ii.265 DN i.142 SN iv.299 causative paṭihāreti to repel, avoid Ja vi.266 Ja vi.295

      • cp. pāṭihāriya etc
      paṭi + hṛ
    Paṭu
    adjective
    1. sharp, pungent; figuratively keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism 337 (˚saññākicca), 338. cp. paddha1 & pāṭava
    cp. Epic. Sanskrit paṭu
    Paṭuppādana
    neuter
    1. subtraction (opposite sankalana) DN-a i.95 The word is not clear (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.22)
    paṭa (?) + upp˚
    Paṭuva
    1. at DN i.54 is read as pacuṭa by Buddhaghosa & translation ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.72 ‣See under pavuṭā
    Paṭola
    1. a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin i.201 (˚paṇṇa)
    dialectical?
    Paṭṭa
    1. slab, tablet, plate, in compounds. ayo˚; iron plate AN iv.130 AN iv.131 Ja iv.7 (suvaṇṇa˚) Pv-a 43 (ayomaya˚); loha˚; brass plate Pv-a 44 silā˚ stone slab Ja i.59 etc. When written on it is placed into a casket (mañjūsā) Ja ii.36 Ja iv.335 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 3341 (āyoga˚) = Vv-a 142
    2. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban (-cloth) Vin ii.266 (dussa˚ = setavattha-paṭṭa Buddhaghosa ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.341) SN ii.102 (identical) Ja i.62 (sumana cloth with a jasmine pattern); vi.191 (˚sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi˚); Kp-a 51 (˚bandhana) DN-a i.87 (āmilāka) Dhp-a i.395 (˚vattha); ii.42 (rajata˚)
    3. dupaṭṭa “double cloth ‣See under dvi B ii
    cp. late Sanskrit paṭṭa, doubtful etymology
    Paṭṭaka
    adjective noun
    1. made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin ii.136 (paṭṭikā) AN i.254 (= paṭṭikā Commentary ) Ja v.359 (aya˚ an iron girdle), Vb-a 230 (paṭṭikā)
    from paṭṭa
    Pattana
    neuter
    1. a place, city, port Ja i.121 Ja iv.16 Ja iv.137 Ja v.75 Pv-a 53
    • ˚ka a sort of village Ja vi.456
    * Sanskrit paṭṭana
    Paṭṭikā
    1. ‣See paṭṭaka
    Paṭṭoli
    1. in yāna˚ at Vism 328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna-kaḷopi (on account of combination with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with Burmese variant ), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The translation would be “provision bag for a carriage.” ‣See further discussed under mutoḷi
    Paṭṭha
    adjective
    1. “standing out,” setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever? Vin iii.210 (dhammiṁ kathaṁ kātuṁ); iv.60 (cīvarakammaṁ kātuṁ), 254 (dhammiṁ kathaṁ kātuṁ) 285 290; Nd2 p. 46 (for Snp prose part puṭṭha; variant reading seṭṭha) Nd2 no. 388 (in explanation of paṭṭhagū Snp 1095 here it clearly means “being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of”) ‣See also paddha1 and paddhagu
    from pa + sthā ‣See patthahati
    Paṭṭhapita
    1. established, or given Pv-a 119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta)
    past participle of paṭṭhahati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prasthapita Divy 514
    Paṭṭhahati
    1. to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna Pv-a 128 (varamāna + ; variant reading paṭṭhap˚); aorist paṭṭhayi Pv ii.934 (dānaṁ; variant reading paṭṭhapayi, explained by paṭṭhapesi Pv-a 126)
    2. absolutive paṭṭhāya ‣See sep.
    3. causative II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give SN ii.25 Pv ii.924 (
    4. future ˚ayissati dānaṁ, variant reading paṭṭhayissati; explained by pavattessati Pv-a 123) Ja i.117 Pv-a 54 (bhattaṁ), 126 (dānaṁ).
    5. past participle paṭṭhapita (q.v.)
    6. pa + sthā = Pali tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning ‣See patiṭṭhahati
    Paṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. setting forth, putting forward; only in compound sati˚; setting up of mindfulness (q.v. and ‣See discussion of term at Dialogues of the Buddha ii.324) Besides in later literally meaning “origin,” starting point cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa ‣See Ledi, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1915–⁠16 p. 26; Mrs. Rhys Davids, Tika p. 1, vi
    • At Sdhp 321 it has the Sanskrit meaning of “setting out” (?)
    from pa + sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati
    Paṭṭhāya
    indeclinable
    1. putting down, starting out from, used as preposition (with ablative) from.. onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of e.g. ajjato p. from to-day Vv-a 246 ito p. from here henceforth Ja i.60 Ja i.63 Ja i.150 cp. Ja i.52 (mūlato); vi.336 (sīsato) Pv-a 11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with accusative ) from-up to Vism 374
    2. absolutive from paṭṭhahati
    Paṭṭhika
    1. in pañca˚ ‣See under pañca
    Paṭhati
    1. to read (of a text) Vv-a 72 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 59 Pv-a 70 etc. ‣See also pāṭha
    paṭh to read, Sanskrit paṭhati
    Paṭhana
    neuter
    1. reading (textual) Mil 344
    from paṭhati
    Paṭhama
    adjective
    1. numeral ordinal “the first,” in following meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Snp 93 Snp 436 Snp 1031 Ja ii.110 Kp-a i.192 Dhp-a iii.5 196 (˚vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 56. neuter accusative paṭhamaṁ at first, for the first time Vin i.16 DN ii.14 Dhp 158 Ja i.222 Ja ii.103 Ja ii.153 often as first part of compound ˚-, meaning either “first” or “recently, newly, just” Vin i.1 (˚âbhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship) DN iii.253 (˚âbhinibbatta), Snp 420 (˚uppattika “in his first youth”) Ja iii.394 (˚uggata newly sprung up)

      • A second compar formation is paṭhamatara, only as
      • adverb ˚ṁ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin i.30 Ja vi.510 Dhp-a i.138 Vv-a 230 Pv-a 93
      Vedic prathama, cp. Avestan fratəma; also Vedic prataraṁ further, Sanskrit pra etc ‣See pa˚
    Paṭhavatta
    neuter
    1. earthliness MN i.329
    abstract from paṭhavī
    Paṭhavant
    adjective-noun
    1. a wayfarer SN i.37
    from paṭhavī
    Paṭhavī
    feminine
    1. the earth. Acc to Nd2 389 synonym with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumeration of the 4 elements ‣See dhātu 1, viz p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion Compendium 155). At DN iii.87f.≈ Vism 418 rasa˚ is opposed to bhūmi-pappaṭaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground ‣See DN ii.14 DN ii.16 MN i.327f. SN i.113 (p. udrīyati) 119 (identical), 186; ii.133, 169 sq.; v.45, 78, 246, 456 sq. AN ii.50 AN iv.89 AN iv.374 v.263 sq. Snp 307 Snp 1097 Iti 21 Dhp 41 Dhp 44 Dhp 178 (pathavyā); Pv ii.66 Mil 418 Pv-a 57 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 174
    • mahā˚ MN i.127 SN ii.179 SN ii.263 SN iii.150 Ja i.25 Ja i.74 Ja iii.42 Mil 187 aya˚ iron soil (of Avīci Dhp-a i.148 In compound both paṭhavī˚ & pathavi˚
    1. ˚ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth Dhp-a ii.154
    • ˚kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DN-a i.130
    • ˚kampana = kampa Ja i.47
    • ˚kasiṇa the earth artifice ‣See Dhs trsl 43 DN iii.286
    • ˚dhātu the earth element ‣See above DN i.215 DN ii.294 DN iii.228 DN iii.247 MN i.185 421 SN ii.170 Dhs 588 648, 962 (cp. Dhs translation 241); Nett 73, 74 Vb-a 55
    • ˚maṇḍala the circle of the English DN i.134 SN i.101 AN iv.90
    • ˚rasa taste of earth SN i.134 Snp-a 5
    • ˚lekha writing on (or in) carth AN i.283 Pug 32
    • ˚saññā earth consciousness M. ii.105 AN iv.312 AN v.7f. 318 sq. 353 sq
    • ˚sama like the earth MN i.127 MN i.423 Dhp 95
    Vedic pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar §§ 124, 17n. To ad. pṛthu ‣See puthu, prath to expand, thus literally the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Buddhaghosa at Vism 364 patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Compendium 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived from pattharati
    Paḍayhati
    variant reading at Pv-a 60 for Text pariḍayhati.
    Paṇa

    a shop Ja iv.488 variant reading pana in this meaning unknown in Sanskrit only in one faulty various lect. as “house” ‣See BR s.v. paṇa. Usual meaning “wager”

    Paṇaka
    1. ‣See paṇṇaka
    Paṇati
    1. to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet Ja v.24 (= voharati attānaṁ vikkiṇati Commentary )
    • ‣ See also paṇitaka & paṇiya
    cp. Sanskrit paṇati
    Paṇamati
    1. to bend, to be bent or inclined Ps i.165, 167; - past participle paṇata ibid.
    2. causative panāmeti (q.v.)
    3. pa + nam
    Paṇaya
    1. affection Ja vi.102
    classical Sanskrit praṇaya, from pra +
    Paṇava
    1. a small drum or cymbal DN i.79 SN ii.128 SN iv.344 AN ii.117 AN ii.241 Ja iii.59 (of an executioner Pv-a 4 in identical passage has paṭaha) Thag 1, 467 Bu i.32 Vv 8110 Dhs 621 (˚sadda) Dhp-a i.18
    cp. epithet Sanskrit paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava
    Paṇāma
    1. bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti.1) Vv-a 321 (˚ṁ karoti = añjaliṁ karoti)
    • As paṇāmana
    • neuter at Ja iv.307
    from pa + nam ‣See paṇamati
    Paṇāma
    1. bowing, bow, obeisance Thag 2, 407 (˚ṁ karoti)
    from pa + nam ‣See paṇamati
    Paṇāmita
    1. (= paṇāmeti.1) raised, bent or stretched out Snp 352 (añjalī sup˚)
    2. (= paṇāmeti.3) dismissed, given leave Vin i.54 MN i.457 (bhikkhusangho) Mil 209 (identical), 187
    past participle of paṇāmeti
    Paṇāmeti
    1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliṁ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin ii.188 DN i.118 Snp p. 79. 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaṁ p. to shut the door Vin i.87 Vin ii.114 207; pattaṁ Vin ii.216 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave dismiss Vin i.54 Vin ii.303 SN i.7 Thag 1, 511 557 Ja v.314 Mil 187 (parisaṁ);
    2. passive paṇāmīyati (ibid.)-pp paṇāmita (q.v.)
    3. causative of paṇamati
    Paṇitaka
    adjective neuter
    1. staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play Ja vi.192 (so read for paṇīta˚)
    from paṇita- past participle of paṇati
    Paṇidahati
    1. to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for SN v.156 (atthāya cittaṁ paṇidahiṁ). absolutive paṇidhāya SN i.42 = Sn 660 (vācaṁ manañ ca pāpakaṁ) SN i.170 (ujuṁ kāyaṁ) AN iii.249 (deva-nikāyaṁ p.); iv.461 sq (identical) Vb 244 (ujuṁ kāyaṁ p.) = DN-a i.210 Also lit (as prep with
    2. accusative ) “in the direction of, towards MN i.74 (angārā-kāsuṁ).
    3. past participle paṇihita (q.v.)
    4. pa + ni + dhā
    Paṇidhāna
    neuter
    1. aspiration, longing, prayer Vv-a 270 Sdhp 344
    from paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praṇidhāna
    Paṇidhi
    feminine
    1. aspiration, request, prayer, resolve DN iii.29 276 SN ii.99 SN ii.154 SN iii.256 (ceto˚); iv.303 AN ii.32 iv.239 sq. (ceto˚); v.212 sq. Snp 801 Vv 4712 Nd1 109 Dhs 1059 1126 Snp-a 132 (= paṇidhāna) Dhp-a ii.172 Dhs-a 222 (rāga-dosa-moha˚)
    1. ˚kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow DN i.12 cp. DN-a i.97 (which Kern, however, Toevoegselen s.v., interprets as “application of an enema,” comparing Sanskrit pranidheya to be injected as a clyster)
    from paṇidahati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praṇidhi Divy 102 Divy 134, in same meaning. The usual Sanskrit meaning is “spy”
    Paṇipatati
    1. to fall down before Thag 1, 375
    pa + ni + pat
    Paṇipāta
    1. prostration, adoration Dāvs v.53
    from pa + ni + pat
    Paṇipātika
    adjective
    1. consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, devotional Snp-a 157
    from paṇipāta
    Paṇiya
    adjective
    1. to be sold or bought, vendible, neuter article of trade, ware AN ii.199 Vv 847 (= bhaṇḍa Vv-a 337) Ja iv.363 (= bhaṇḍa C 366)
    absolutive formation from paṇ ‣See paṇati & cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paṇya in tara-paṇya fare Avs i.148
    Paṇihita
    1. applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled SN iv.309 (dup˚) AN i.8 v.87 Dhp 43 (sammā ˚ṁ cittaṁ) Snp 154 (su˚ mano suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo Snp-a 200); Ps ii.41 (vimokkha) Mil 204 Mil 333 413
    • appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean “free from all longings,” ‣See Vin iii.93 = iv.25 SN iv.295 SN iv.309 SN iv.360 Ps ii.43 sq., 100 Mil 337
    past participle of paṇidahati
    Paṇīta
    adjective
    1. (literally) brought out or to, applied executed; used with reference to punishment ‣See paṇeti daṇḍaṁ Pv iv.166 (˚daṇḍa receiving punishment ṭhapita-sarīra-daṇḍa Pv-a 242)
    2. (applied) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent with reference to food (very often used in this sense) “heaped up, plentiful, abundant.” Synonymous with uttama (DN-a i.109 171), uḷāra (Pv-a 25 Pv-a 228), atuḷa (Pv-a 110) opposite hīna (DN iii.215 AN iii.349 AN v.140 Vism 11) lūkha (SN ii.153 Vv-a 64)
    3. DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā … paṇītā …), 109 (khādaniya); ii.127 (identical iii.215 (with hīna & majjhima-dhātu) SN i.136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); ii.153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); iii.47 iv.360; v.66 (dhammā), 226 (etaṁ padaṁ), 266 (sattā) AN i.284 AN ii.171 AN ii.190 AN iv.10 AN iv.332 AN iv.423 AN v.8 AN v.36 and passim Snp 240 Snp 389 Iti 44 Pv i.53 iv.127 Pug 28 (˚âdhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60 Dhs 269 1027, 1411 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 35 (āhāra), 42 (identical) Dhp-a ii.154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often combined with abhikkantatara, e.g. DN i.62 DN i.74 DN i.216 SN i.80 AN i.119 171; v.37, 140, 203 sq
    past participle of pa + neti in same application Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ; cp. Divy 385
    Paṇītaka
    1. a gambler’s stake Ja vi.192 ‣See paṇitaka. Panudati, Panunna
    perhaps = Sanskrit paṇita, or paṇ ‣See paṇa, as Pali formation it may be taken as pa + nīta + ka, viz. that which has been produced
    Paṇudati, Paṇunna
    1. ‣See panudati etc
    Paṇeti
    1. to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, figuratively decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaṁ paṇeti to give a punishment DN ii.339 = Mil 110 MN ii.88 Dhp 310 Ja ii.207 Ja iii.441 Ja iv.192 Mil 29 Dhp-a iii.482 past participle paṇīta (q.v.)
    2. pa +
    Paṇḍa
    1. ‣See bhaṇḍati
    Paṇḍaka
    1. a eunuch, weakling Vin i.86 135, 168, 320; iv.20, 269 AN iii.128 AN v.71 Sdhp 79
    • With reference to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin ii.271 (itthi˚)
    cp late (dialectical) Sanskrit paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under pello
    Paṇḍara
    adjective
    1. white, pale, yellowish Ja ii.365 Ja v.340 Nd1 3 Dhs 6 Vb 88 (Dhs translation “that which is clear"? in definition of citta & mano) Dhs 17 293, 597 Mil 226 Dhp-a iv.8 Vv-a 40 Pv-a 56 (= seta); Sdhp 430
    Vedic pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q.v. for etymology
    Paṇḍicca
    neuter
    1. erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom Ja i.383 Ps ii.185 Pug 25 Dhs 16 (= paṇḍitassa bhāvo Dhs-a 147), 292, 555. As pandicciya Ja vi.4
    from paṇḍita
    Paṇḍita
    adjective
    1. wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin ii.190 (+ buddhimanto) DN i.12 (˚vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise) 120 (opposite duppañña); iii.192 MN i.342 MN iii.61 MN iii.163 MN iii.178 SN iv.375 (+ viyatta medhāvin); v.151 (+ vyatta kusala) AN i.59 AN i.68 AN i.84 AN i.101f. 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaṁ adhigacchanti); ii.3 sq., 118, 178, 228; iii.48 = It 16 Snp 115 Snp 254 Snp 335 Snp 523 Snp 721 Snp 820 Snp 1007 Snp 1125 (epithet of Jatukaṇṇī) Iti 86 Dhp 22 Dhp 28 Dhp 63 (˚mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238 289 Ja iii.52 (sasa˚) Nd1 124; Pv iv.332 (opposite bāla = sappañña Pv-a 254) Dhs 1302 Mil 3 Mil 22 DN-a i.117 Dhp-a iv.111 Vv-a 257 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 41 Pv-a 60 (= pañña), 93 99
    cp. Vedic paṇḍita
    Paṇḍitaka
    adjective
    1. a pedant DN i.107
    paṇḍita + ka
    Paṇḍu
    adjective [cp. Vedic pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale-red); Latin palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lithuanian patvas (pale-yellow), pilkas (grey); Old High German falo (pale, yellowish, withered); English pale pale-red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Thag 2, 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up-paṇḍ'-uppaṇḍuka-jātā : “thin, pale and colourless” ‣See Thag-a 80). Otherwise only in compounds. e.g.
    1. -kambala a light red blanket, orange-coloured cloth SN i.64 (= ratta-kambala Commentary ) AN i.181 Snp 689 (= ratta Snp-a 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka’s throne (p
    • k
    • silā) is made of it Ja i.330 Ja ii.93 Ja ii.53 (˚silāsana); v.92 (identical); Pv ii.960 (˚silā = p
    • k-nāmaka sīlāsana Pv-a 138) Vv-a 110 (identical); Kp-a 122 (˚varāsana) Dhp-a i.17 (˚silāsana)
    • ˚palāsa a withered leaf Vin i.96 = iii.47; iv.217 Dhp 233 Vb-a 244 Kp-a 62 on ˚palāsika (DN-a i.270) ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 37
    • ˚mattikā yellow loam, clay soil Kp-a. 59
    • ˚roga jaundice Vin i.206 (˚ābādha) 276 (identical) Ja i.431 Ja ii.102 Dhp-a i.25
    • ˚rogin suffering from jaundice Ja ii.285 Ja iii.401
    • ˚vīṇā yellow flute (of Pañcasikha) ‣See beluva
    • sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds Snp-a 125 (cp. Manor
    • pūr. on AN ii.33)
    • ˚sutta orange-coloured string DN i.76
    Paṇḍuka
    1. (-roga) perhaps to be read with variant reading at MN ii.121 for bandhuka˚;
    Paṇṇa
    neuter
    1. a leaf (especially betel leaf) Vin i.201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba˚; Azadirachta Indica kuṭaja˚; Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola˚; Trichosanthes dioeca, sulasi˚; or tulasi˚ basil, kappāsika˚ cotton ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.46) AN i.183 (tiṇa +) Snp 811 (p. vuccati paduma-pattaṁ Nd1 135) Ja i.167 Ja ii.105 (nimba)˚; Kp-a 46 (khitta-p
    2. kosa-saṇṭhāna) Pv-a 115 (= patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 3343 (= tālapattehi kata-maṇḍala-vījanī Vv-a 147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable Snp-a 283 sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf Ja i.98
    3. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest ‣See below paṇṇākāra Ja i.409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa; ii.104; iv.151 (ucchangato p ˚ṁ nīharati) Dhp-a i.180 Pv-a 20 (likhā˚ written message). paṇṇaṁ āropeti to send a letter Ja i.227 pahiṇati identical Ja iv.145 Ja v.458 peseti identical Ja i.178 Ja iv.169 paṇṇaṁ likhati to write a letter Ja ii.174 Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa˚ a promissory note Ja i.230 Ja iv.256-p. as ticket or label at Dhs-a 110
    4. a feather wing ‣See su˚;.

      1. ˚ākāra “state or condition of writing” ‣See ākāra 1 i.e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift Ja i.377 Ja ii.166 Ja iii.10 Ja iv.316 Ja iv.368 Ja vi.68 Ja vi.390 Snp-a 78 Dhp-a.184 326, 392, 339: ii.80; iii.292 (dasavidha dibba˚ viz. āyu etc. ‣See ṭhāna); iv.11
      2. ˚kuṭi a hut of leaves DN iii.94 SN i.226 Ja ii.44 Pv iii.220 DN-a i.318
      • ˚chatta a fan of leaves Ja ii.277
      • ˚chattaka a leaf-awning SN i.90 SN i.92
      • ˚dhāra a holder made of leaves Ja v.205
      • ˚pacchi leaf-basket, a b. for greens Ja vi.369
      • ˚puṭa a palm-leaf basket Pv-a 168
      • ˚saññā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) Ja i.153
      • ˚santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adjective spread with leaves AN i.136 Ja vi.24
      • ˚sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage Ja i.6 Ja i.7 Ja i.138 Ja ii.101f.; vi.30, 318 (nala-bhittikaṁ ˚ṁ katvā); vi.24
      • ˚susa (& sosa); drying the leaves (said of the wind) Kp-a 15
      Vedic parṇa, cp. Anglo-Saxon fearn, English fern
    Paṇṇaka
    1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens Ja vi.24 (kāra˚ vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv iii.33 (panko paṇṇako ca, explained as “kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā” Pv-a 189 but evidently misunderstood for “withered leaves”) Pv-a 256 (tiṇakaṭṭha-paṇṇaka-sala, is reading correct?)
    2. Name of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern ‣See Kern Toevoegselen ii.16 q.v.. Often combined with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e.g. at Ja ii.324 Ja v.37
    3. The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also combined with sevāla, e.g. Vin iii.177 (in combination saṇkha-sevāla˚, where Buddhaghosa explains “sankho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka-pappaṭaka-nīla-bījak’ ādi sabbo 'ti paṇako ti sankhaṁ gacchati”) SN v.122 AN iii.187 AN iii.232 AN iii.235 Ja iv.71 (sevāla˚) Mil 35 (sankha-sevāla-p. which the Manor-pūṛ explains by udaka-pappaṭaka, and also as “nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiṁ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaṁ” ‣See Trenckner, Mil 421 and cp. Miln. translation i.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa˚), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka-bhakkho); Kp-a 61 (sevāla˚; cp. Schubring’s kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.)
    4. ‣See paṇṇa 2 a written leaf, a ticket Dhs-a 110

      paṇṇa + ka
    Paṇṇatti
    1. ‣See paññatti
    Paṇṇattika
    adjective
    1. having a manifestation or name, in a˚-bhāva state without designation, state of non-manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) Dhp-a i.89 Dhp-a ii.163 Pannarasa & Pannavisati;
    from paṇṇatti
    Paṇṇarasa
    Paṇṇavīsati;
    1. ‣See pañca 1. B, & Commentary
    Paṇṇāsa
    1. ‣See pañca 2. A
    Paṇṇi
    feminine
    1. a leaf Vin i.202 (taka˚)
    = paṇṇa
    Paṇṇika
    1. one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer Ja i.411 Ja ii.180 Ja iii.21 (˚dhītā) Mil 331
    paṇṇa + ika
    Paṇṇikā
    feminine
    1. greens, green leaves vegetable Vin ii.267 (na harītaka ˚ṁ pakinitabbaṁ translation at Vinaya Texts iii.343 by “carry on the business of florist and ‣Seedsman,” thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vinaya Texts iii.112) Ja i.445 (paṇṇikāya saññaṁ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya “with the goad, of saṇ(ṇ)ikā = Sanskrit sṛṇi elephant-driver’s hook)
    to paṇṇaka; cp. Sanskrit parṇikā; meaning uncertain, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen p. 17 s.v.
    Paṇhi
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. the heel Vin ii.280 (˚samphassa) Ja ii.240 Ja v.145 Sdhp 147 Sdhp 153 ‣See next
      Vedic pārṣṇi, Avestan paṣṇā, Latin perna; Gothic fairzna, Old High German fersana = German ferse
    Paṇhikā
    feminine
    1. the heel Ja i.491 Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhi); Vism 253 (identical) Pv-a 185
    from paṇhi
    Paṇhin
    adjective
    1. having heels DN ii.17 (āyata˚ having projecting heels, the 3rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa)
    from paṇhi
    Patati
    1. to fall, jump, fall down on (locative accusative & instrumental), to alight Ja i.278 (dīpake) Snp 248 (nirayaṁ); Pv iv.108 (1st
    2. plural patāmase) Mil 187 Pv-a 45 ppr. patanto Ja i.263 (asaniyā); iii.188 (nāvāya); fut patissati Ja iii.277
    3. aorist pati Snp 1027 (sirasā) Ja iii.55 Pv i.78
    4. absolutive patitvā Ja i.291 Ja iii.26 Pv-a 16 Dhp-a iii.196 (variant readings papāta & papatā the latter
    5. aorist of papatati q.v.);
    6. absolutive patitvā Ja i.291 Ja iii.26 Pv-a 16
    7. past participle patita (q.v.)
    8. causative pāteti (q.v.)
    9. passive (
    10. causative patīyati is brought to fall also intransitive rush away Ja iv.415 (= palāyati Commentary ) Mil 187
    11. Vedic patati, Indogermanic *pet “to fly” as well as “to fall.” cp. Avestan pataiti fly, hurry; Latin praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.
    Patatthi
    1. at Ja vi.276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q.v.)
    Patana
    neuter adjective)
    1. falling, falling out, ruin, destruction Ja i.293 (akkhīni); ii.154; iii.188 (geha˚) vi.85 (usu˚ range of his arrow)
    from patati
    Patanaka
    adjective
    1. on the point of falling, going to fall, falling Ja vi.358
    from patana
    Patanu
    adjective
    1. very thin Ja vi.578 (˚kesa) Dhs 362 (˚bhāva) = Dhs-a 238 Kvu 299 (identical)
    pa + tanu
    Patara
    1. a split a slit Ja iv.32
    Vedic pradara, pa + dṛ; , with t. for d. ‣See Trenckner, Note. 6216; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 39, 4
    Patarati
    1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over DN i.248 Ja iii.91 (
    2. aorist patari)
    3. to overflow, boil over (of water) Mil 260
    4. Caus patāreti (q.v.)
    pa + tarati
    Patākā
    feminine
    1. a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) Ja i.52 Vv-a 31 173
    cp. later Sanskrit patākā
    Patāpa
    1. splendour, majesty Vv 408 (= tejas, ānubhāvo Vv-a 180)
    from pa + tap
    Patāpavant
    adjective
    1. splendid, majestic Snp 550 (= jutimantatāya p. Snp-a 453) Thag 1, 820
    from patāpa
    Patāpeti
    1. scorch, burn fiercely Vv 795 (= ativiya dīpeti Vv-a 307). Sdhp 573
    pa + tāpeti, causative of tap
    Patāyati
    1. to be spread out, intransitive to spread (?) AN iv.97 (kodho p., as if from pat Ja iii.283 (Commentary nikkhamati as if from tṛ; , Kern. translates “to be for sale”)
    in form = pa + tāyati, different in meaning; not sufficiently explained ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen p. 29 s.v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati ‣See under pharati phalaka and phāteti
    Patāreti
    1. to make go forth, to bring over or through MN i.225 AN iii.432 (variant reading M. pakaroti)- aorist patārayi in meaning “strive” at Ja iii.210 (= patarati vāyamati Commentary but Rhys Davids. “to get away from”); as “assert” at Ja v.117
    2. causative of patarati
    Pati1
    lord, master, owner, leader.
    1. -1. in general DN iii.93 (khettānaṁ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly—˚ ‣See under gavam˚, gaha˚, dāna˚, yūtha˚, senā˚
    • husband SN i.210 Snp 314 Ja iii.138 Pv-a 161 ‣See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika
    1. ˚kula her husband’s clan Thag-a 283 Vv-a 206
    • ˚devatā a devoted wife Ja iii.406 Vv-a 128
    Vedic pati, Avestan paitis lord, husband; Latin potis, potens, possum, hos-pes; Goth brūp-faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lithuanian pāts husband
    Pati2
    1. indeclinable [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep (with accusative ) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi˚, except in the case of patiṭṭh˚. The more frequent cases are the following: patikāra, ˚kuṭati, ˚caya ˚dissati, ˚nandati, ˚manteti, ˚māneti, ˚ruddha, ˚rūpa ˚līna, ˚sallāna, etc. ˚sibbati, ˚sevati, ˚ssata, ˚ssaya ˚ssava.

    Patika
    adjective
    1. having a husband in mata˚ “with husband dead,” a widow Thag 2, 221 (= vidhuva Thag-a 179) Ja v.103 (ap˚ without husband, variant reading for appatīta, Commentary explains by assāmika) pavuttha˚ (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin ii.268 Vin iii.83 Mil 205 (pavuttha˚) ‣See also pañcapatika & sapatika
    only
  • feminine patikā and only as—˚
  • Patika
    1. at Vism 28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish)
    Patiṭṭhahati
    (& Patiṭṭhāti)
    1. to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (locative ), to be established
    2. intranstitive, to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay;
    3. aorist patiṭṭhahi Dhp-a iii.175 (sotāpattiphale), Pv-a 42 (identical), 66 (identical) Vv-a 69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Mil 16

      • future ˚ṭṭhahissati Ja v.458 (˚hessati) Dhp-a iii.171-
      • absolutive patiṭṭhāya Snp 506 Ja ii.2 (rajje); iii.52; v.458 (rajje) Mil 33 Pv-a 142
      • past participle patiṭṭhita (q.v.)
      • causative patiṭṭhāpeti (q.v.)
      paṭi + sthā
    Patiṭṭhā
    feminine
    1. support, resting place, stay, ground, help also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation SN i.1 (ap˚) ii.65; iii.53 Snp 173 Dhp 332 Ja i.149 Ja iv.20 Mil 302 Dhs-a 261 Vv-a 138 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 60 (= dīpa), 87 (= dīpa), 141 (su˚), 174 (su˚ = dīpa)
    from pati + sthā. cp. Vedic pratiṣṭhā support, foundation
    Patiṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation Snp 1011: Pv-a 123
    from paṭi + sthā cp. late Sanskrit pratiṣṭhāna
    Patiṭṭhāpita
    1. put down, set down, established Pv-a 139
    past participle of patiṭṭhāpeti
    Patiṭṭhāpitar
    1. one who establishes. AN v.66
    agent noun of patiṭṭhāpeti
    Patiṭṭhāpeti
    1. to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal DN i.206 SN i.90 Ja i.152 168, 349 (sotāpatti-phale) Pv-a 22 (identical), 38 (identical) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (identical), 76 (ceṭiyaṁ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe)- aorist patiṭṭhāpesi Ja i.138
    2. past participle patiṭṭhāpita (q.v.)
    3. causative of patiṭṭhahati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praṭiṣṭhāpayati Jtm 224
    Patiṭṭhāha
    1. having one’s footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs 381 = Nd2 271iii Dhs-a 253 The variant reading at Nd2 is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs
    from patiṭṭhahati
    Patiṭṭhita
    1. established in (locative ), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported founded in DN iii.101 (supatiṭṭhita-citta) MN i.478 SN i.40 SN i.45 SN i.185 (dhammesu) Iti 77 Snp 409 Snp 453 Ja i.51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje) Pv i.44 ii.969 (dussīlesu) Mil 282 Vv-a 110 (˚gabbhā), 259 (˚saddha) Pv-a 34 (jāta + -nt. ˚ṁ arrangement, settling, in pañca˚; the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting ‣See under pañca
    2. past participle of patiṭṭhahati
    Patiṭṭhīyati
    1. to be obdurate, to offer resistance AN i.124 AN ii.203 AN iii.181f. Ja iv.22 (aorist ˚ṭṭhīya) Pug 36 Kp-a 226
    2. only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality = Sanskrit prati-sthyāyate, of sthyā ‣See thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati
    Patita
    1. fallen Dhp 68 Dhp 320 Ja i.167 Mil 187 Pv-a 31 (read pātita), 56
    past participle of patati
    Patitaka
    adjective
    1. thrown or fallen into (locative ), dropped Vism 62
    2. from last
    Patitiṭṭhati
    1. to stand up again Thag 1, 173
    paṭi + titthati
    Patittha
    1. a bank of a river or lake, su˚ adjective with beautiful banks SN i.90 Pv ii.120 (= sundaratittha Pv-a 77)
    2. pa + tittha
    Patibbatā
    feminine
    1. a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) Ja ii.121 Ja vi.533 Vv-a 56 110
    pati + vatā
    Patissata
    1. ‣See paṭi˚
    Patīta
    1. pleased, delighted Dhp 68 Snp 379 Snp 679 Vv 8410 (= pahaṭṭha Vv-a 337)
    • negative appatīta displeased MN i.27 Ja v.103 (variant reading appatika, C explains by assāmika, i.e. without husband)
    past participle of pacceti
    Patīyati
    1. ‣See patati
    Pateyya
    1. in phrase alam-pateyya at DN iii.71 (kumārikā alam-pateyyā), 75 (identical) means “surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage” (?)
    Patoda
    1. a goad, driving stick, prick, spur MN i.124 MN iii.97 SN iv.176 AN ii.114 iii.28; iv.91; v.324 Thag 1, 210 Ja i.57 Ja i.192 Dhs 16 20, 292 Pug 25 Snp-a 147 Thag-a 174 Sdhp 367

    -laṭṭhi a driver’s stick, goad-stick cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7 Divy 76, 463, 465

    1. DN i.105 DN i.126 Ja vi.249 Mil 27 Dhp-a i.302 Dhp-a ii.38 iv.216 Vv-a 64 As ˚yaṭṭhi at Dīpavaṁsa xi.30
    from pa + tud cp. Vedic pratoda
    Patodaka
    adjective noun
    1. literally pushing, spurring; only in phrase aṅguli˚; nudging with one’s fingers Vin iii.84 = iv.110 (here to be taken as “tickling”) DN i.91 (cp Dial. i.113) AN iv.343
    from pa + tud
    Patta1
    neuter
    1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin iv.259 DN i.71 kukkuṭa˚ a hen’s quill (for sewing) Vin ii.215–⁠2. a leaf MN i.429 Snp 44 = 64 (sañchinna˚ ‣See Nd2 625); 625 (pokkhara˚ lotus l.) Dhp 401 (identical) Nd1 135 (paduma˚); Pv ii.95 (= paṇṇa Pv-a 15) Vv-a 147 (tāla˚) Thag-a 71 Pv-a 283 (nigrodha˚). asi-patta-vana “sword-leaf-forest” (a forest in Niraya) Snp 673 Pv-a 221
    2. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Mil 53 Vv-a 281
      1. ˚āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm-leaves Vin ii.10 iii.180 DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86) MN i.266 AN v.203 Mil 229
      • ˚gandha odour of leaves Dhs 625
      • ˚nāḷī rib of a feather Dhp-a i.394
      • ˚phala leaf-fruit, a leaf and fruit vegetables Snp 239 (= yaṁ kiñci harita-pannaṁ Snp-a 283) Pv-a 86
      • ˚yāna having wings as vehicle, “winggoer,” i.e. a bird Snp 606 (= pattehi yantī ti pattayānā Snp-a 465) Ja ii.443
      • ˚rasa taste of leaves Dhs 629 juice of leaves Vin i.246 (+ puppharasa & ucchurasa)
      • ˚salākā leaf-ticket Dhp-a iv.65
      Vedic patra, to *pet as in patati (q.v. & ‣See also paṇṇa); cp. Latin penna feather = German fittig.; acci-piter; Old High German fedara = English feather etc.
    Patta2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. a bowl, esp the alms-bowl of a bhikkhu Vin i.46 50, 51, 61, 224 (patte pūresuṁ); ii.111, 126, 224, 269 SN i.112 AN iv.344 Snp 413 Snp 443 Ja i.52 Ja i.55 (pattaṁ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; iii.535 (puṇṇa ˚ṁ deti to give a full bowl, i.e. plenty); v.389 (plural pattāni); Vism 108 (āṇigaṇṭhik’ āhato ayopatto) Dhp-a iv.220 (˚ṁ pūreti) Pv-a 35 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 141

        • Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin iii.243 viz. ayo˚ of iron & mattikā˚ of clay, dāru˚ a wooden bowl Vin ii.112 143. uda˚ a bowl of water or a water-bowl MN i.100 SN v.121 AN iii.230f. cp. odapattakinī
        • pattassa mukhavaṭṭi Ja v.38
        • future pātī (q.v.)
        1. ˚ādhāraka bowl support, bowl-hold Vin ii.113
        • ˚kaṇḍolikā a wicker-work stand for a bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.86)
        • ˚gata gone into the bowl alms given Thag 1, 155 Pv iv.73
        • ˚gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin ii.177 (+ sāṭiya˚ etc.) AN iii.275
        • ˚cīvara bowl and robe ‣See note in Dialogues of the Buddha ii.162 Vin i.46 Vin ii.78 194 SN i.76 Ja iii.379 Pv ii.1316 DN-a i.45 186 Pv-a 61
        • ˚tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin ii.114 Ja iii.364 Vv-a 40 63 Kp-a 45
        • ˚dhovana “bowl-washing,” (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin ii.214
        • ˚pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Snp 713 Iti 89 = SN iii.93≈; onīta˚ removing the hand from the bowl ‣See onīta
        • ˚piṇḍika “eating from one vessel only” AN iii.220
        • ˚maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin ii.112
        • ˚māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.86)
        • ˚mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin ii.269
        • ˚vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl SN iv.168
        • ˚saññin paying attention to one’s bowl Vin ii.214
        Vedic pātra, from Indogermanic *pōtlom = Latin poculum beaker, Old Irish ōl ‣See pāna & pibati
    Patta3
    1. obtained, attained, got, reached (passive &
    2. medium) Snp 55 Snp 138 Snp 478 Snp 517 Snp 542 Snp 992 Dhp 134 (nibbānaṁ) 423 Ja i.255 (vināsaṁ); iv.139 (samuddaṁ) Pv-a 4 (anayavyasanaṁ), 5 (sīsacchedaṁ), 71 (manussabhāvaṁ). Very frequent as—˚ and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling ˚ppatta is restored (Sanskrit prāpta), e.g. ummādappatta out of mind Pv-a 6 jara˚ old Ja iii.394 dukkha˚ afflicted with pain Ja vi.336 domanassa˚ dejected Ja ii.155 patti˚ attained one’s (possible) share Iti 32 bala˚ (become) strong DN ii.157 vaya˚ (become) old, come of age Ja ii.421 (+ soḷasa-vassa-kāle) Pv-a 68 somanassa˚ pleased Ja iii.74 haritu˚ covered with green MN i.343 Ja i.50 399. Also as ˚-, but less frequent, meaning often equal to preposition “with,” “after,” etc., as pattâbhiseka after consecration Dhp-a iv.84 Snp-a 484 pattuṇṇa with wool Snp-a 263 ˚dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin i.16 the same at Dhp-a iv.200 in meaning of patti˚, i.e. “merit attained”; ˚mānasa (?) Iti 76 (variant reading satta˚); ˚sambodhi Iti 97 (variant reading satta˚)

      • O
      • past participle appatta not obtained (‣ See also patti 2), i.e. without Dhp 272 (cp. Dhp-a iii.58) Pug 51 (˚pānabhojana, so read for appanna˚)
      • cp. sam
      past participle of pāpuṇāti
    Patta4
    1. at Dīpavaṁsa xi.18 for pattin or pattika, foot-man, infantry
    Patta-kkhandha
    1. downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin ii.77 = iii.162 (translated “with fallen hearts,” explained as patita ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.13) SN i.124 MN i.132 MN i.258 MN iii.298 AN iii.57 Ja v.17 Mil 5
    perhaps patta1 + khandha, thus “leaf- shouldered,” i.e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus “with shoulders falling.” We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna (= pa + nam bent down, put down), which explanation would suit the sense better than any other
    Pattaka
    neuter
    1. a (little) bowl Thag 2, 28
    from patta2
    Pattatta
    neuter (—˚)
    1. the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism 524
    abstract from patta3
    Pattabba
    adjective
    1. to be gained or attained; neuter that which can be attained or won Snp-a 443 ‣See also pattiya2
    2. gerundive of pāpuṇāti
    Pattali
    1. (˚lī) feminine

      1. plantain Thag 2, 260 (= kadali Thag-a 211)
      according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā
    Patti1
    on foot, one who is on foot, a foot-soldier Vin iv.105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry) Ja iv.494 (hatthī assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism 19. cp. pattika1.
    1. ˚kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry SN i.72 (cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit same, at Jtm 215 with hasty-aśva-ratha˚)
    2. ˚kārika (for ˚kārika, of preceding) a foot soldier, literally one of a body of infantry Ja iv.134 Ja v.100 Ja vi.15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.)
    Vedic patti, *pad (of pada) + ti
    Patti2
    feminine
    1. (—˚) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of SN i.189 = Th 1, 1230 (nibbāna˚) Snp 68 (paramattha˚) 186 (nibbāna˚) Pv-a 5 (vyasana), 112 (identical); Sdhp 379
    2. attainment, acquisition SN ii.29 (aggassa) Snp 425 (yogakkhemassa) Nd2 390 (= lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaṁ sacchikiriyā); especially in phrase apattassa patti “attt of the unattained” DN iii.255 AN iv.332 SN i.217 SN ii.29 AN ii.148 AN iii.179 Kvu 581. 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage SN i.169 (brahma “best vantage ground”)
    3. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a “dakkhiṇǡ”), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit Ja ii.423 Ja ii.425 (= dakkhiṇā); iv.21 Dhp-a i.270 (opposite to mūla price); ii.4; iv.200 sq. (opposite to mūla) ‣See also compounds. ˚dāna & ˚dhamma.

      • that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state place, as grammatical technical term
      • locative pattiyaṁ or pattiyā (—˚) in lieu of Snp-a 310 317
      • See sam˚
      1. ˚dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit Vv-a 188 190 Pv-a 9 (˚vasena dānadhamma-pariccāgo), 49 (= dakkhiṇā) 88 (identical); Sdhp 229
      2. ˚dhamma the practice of transferred merit ‣See Kvu translation 1611, 170, & cp. pattadhamma
      3. ˚patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i.e. Nibbāna) Snp 536 (= pattabbaṁ patto pattabbaṁ arahattaṁ patto ti vuttaṁ hoti Snp-a 433), 537, 540
      Classical Sanskrit prāpti from pa + āp, cp. patta3
    Patti3
    feminine
    1. leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin i.201 (taka, taka-patti, taka-paṇṇi)
    for patta1?
    Pattika1
    1. on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, DN i.50 DN i.89 DN i.106 DN i.108 DN ii.73 AN ii.117 (hatth'-āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.) Ja vi.145 Vism 396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti) Snp 418 a form pattikārika is found, e.g. at Ja iv.134 Ja v.100 Ja vi.15 463; Ap. 316
    from patti1 cp. pajja2
    Pattika2
    1. having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor Dhp-a i.270 271
    from patti2
    Pattika3
    adjective-noun
    1. in dāru˚; (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl DN i.157 (cp. DN-a i.319)
    from patta2
    Pattikā
    feminine
    1. a leaf, in tāla˚; palm-leaf SN ii.217 SN ii.222
    from patta1 or patti3
    Pattin
    adjective noun
    1. attaining, one who obtains or gains Snp 513 (kiṁ˚ = kiṁ patta, adhigata Snp-a 425)
    from patta3, Sanskrit *prāptin
    Pattiya1
    adjective noun
    1. believing, trusting, relying Ja v.414 (para˚) masculine belief, trust Ja v.231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (identical), 414 (identical)
    2. for *pratyaya = paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Note. 73, 9
    Pattiya2
    adjective
    1. to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv ii.931 (para˚ profitable to others ‣See explanation at Pv-a 125)
    gerundive of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba
    Pattiyāyati
    1. to believe, trust, rely on Ja i.426 Ja v.403 DN-a i.73
    denominative from pattiya1
    Pattiyāyana
    neuter
    1. belief Ja v.402
    from pattiyāyati
    Pattīyati
    1. to gain, to profit from (accusative ) Mil 240 (attānaṁ na p. does not profit from himself)
    2. denominative from patti2
    Pattha1
    1. a lonely place, in compound vana˚ DN i.71 Pug 59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, explained by Buddhaghosa as “gāmantaṁ atikkamitvā manussānaṁ anupacāra-ṭṭhānaṁ yattha na kasanti na vapanti” DN-a i.210 Ud 43 (patthañ ca sayan’ āsanaṁ, ed.; but better with identical passage Dhp 185 as pantañ, which is explained at Dhp-a iii.238 by “vivittaṁ, i, e. separately). cp. with this Sanskrit vana-prastha a forest situated on elevated land
    from pa + sthā. cp. Epic Sanskrit prastha plateau
    Pattha2
    1. a Prastha (certain measure of capacity) = 1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha Dhp-a ii.154 Snp-a 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaṁ)
    cp. late Sanskrit prastha
    Patthaṭa
    1. stretched, spread out Ja i.336 Vism 364 DN-a i.311
    past participle of pattharati
    Patthaṇḍila
    1. hermitage MN ii.155
    pa + thandila
    Patthaddha
    1. (quite) stiff Vin ii.192 Thag 1, 1074
    pa + thaddha
    Patthanā
    feminine
    1. aiming at, wish, desire, request aspiration, prayer SN ii.99 SN ii.154 AN i.224 AN iii.47 AN v.212 Nd1 316 337 (p. vuccati taṇhā) Nd2 112; Nett 18, 27 Dhs 1059 Mil 3 Snp-a 47 50 Dhp-a ii.36 Pv-a 47-patthanaṁ karoti to make a wish Ja i.68 Dhp-a i.48 ˚ṁ ṭhapeti identical Dhp-a i.47 Dhp-a ii.83 iv.200
    of ap + arth, cp. Sanskrit prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā feminine
    Patthara
    1. stone, rock SN i.32
    2. stoneware Mil 2
    cp. late Sanskrit prastara. The ord. meaning of Sanskrit pr. is “stramentum”
    Pattharati
    1. to spread, spread out, extend Ja i.62 Ja iv.212 Ja vi.279 Dhp-a i.26 Dhp-a iii.61 (so read at Ja vi.549 in cpd ˚pāda with spreading feet, variant reading patthaṭa˚)- past participle patthaṭa (q.v.)
    2. causative patthāreti with pp patthārita probably also to be read at Thag 1, 842 for padhārita
    3. pa + tharati
    Pattharika
    1. a merchant Vin ii.135 (kaṁsa˚)
    from patthara
    Patthita
    1. wished for, desired, requested, sought after Snp 836 Mil 227 Mil 361 Dhp-a iv.201 Pv-a 47 (˚ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for) Sdhp 79 (a˚)
    past participle of pattheti
    Patthīna
    1. stiff DN ii.335 Dhs-a 307 Also as patthinna at Vin i.286 (= atirajitattā thaddha Buddhaghosa on p. 391); Vism 361 (= thīna p. 262) Vb-a 67 (˚sneha)
    pa + thīna
    Pattheti
    1. to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for SN iv.125 SN v.145 Snp 114 Snp 899 Thag 2, 341 Nd1 312 316; PugA 208 (āsaṁsati +) Pv-a 148 Sdhp 66 Sdhp 319; ppr. patthento Pv-a 107
    • patthayanto Ja i.66 (paramâbhisaṁbodhiṁ); patthayaṁ Snp 70 (= icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd2 392) patthayamāna MN i.4 Snp 902 Ja i.259 Dhp-a iii.193 Pv-a 226
    • (= āsiṁsamāna); & patthayāno; Snp 900 Iti 67 115.
    • gerundive patthetabba Pv-a 96 patthayitabba Pv-a 95 and patthiya which only occurs in negative form apatthiya what ought not to be wished Ja iv.61 Pv ii.67 (= apatthayitabbaṁ Pv-a 95) Dhp-a i.29 also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Snp 914 (cp. Nd2 337).
    • past participle patthita (q.v.)
    pa + arth, cp. Sanskrit prārthayati
    Patvā
    1. ‣See pāpuṇāti
    Patha
    1. 1 path, road, way DN i.63 Snp 176 (locative pathe), 385, 540 868 Nd2 485 B (+ pantha, in explanation of magga) Ja i.308 (
    2. locative pathe); ii.39; vi.525 (ablative pathā) Thag 1, 64 Pug 22 57; Mhvs 21, 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (
    3. locative pathi ‣See Geiger, Grammar § 89); Sdhp 241
    4. Very frequent as—˚, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in ˚tā or ˚ttaṁ (cp similar use of anta ‣See anta1 5; and pada ‣See pada 3), e.g. anila˚ (air) Ja iv.119 anupariyāya˚ AN iv.107 ādicca˚ (path of the sun, sky) Dhp-a iii.177 ummagga SN i.193 kamma˚ Dhp-a i.36 gaṇana˚ (range of) calculation Mil 20 cakkhu˚ Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṁ etaṁ nāmaṁ Commentary ); catummahā˚ AN iii.28 AN iii.42 AN iii.394 dve˚ Vv 5317 nakkhatta˚ Dhp 208 yañña˚ (= yañña) Nd2 524 yogga˚ AN iii.122 rajā˚ SN ii.219 rāga˚ (sensuality SN iv.70 vacana˚ (way of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262), etc ‣See also cakkhu˚, ñeyya˚ dveḷhā˚, manussa˚, yañña˚, vāda˚, sagga˚, hattha˚ derivation pātheyya
    5. ‣ See also byappatha
    6. apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way Ja ii.287 Thag-a 255 Vv-a 337
      1. ˚addhan “the journey or stretch of the path” ‣See under addhan
      2. ˚addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll Ja vi.276 Unclear in meaning, explained by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road? -gamana “going on their course,” of the stars DN i.10 ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.20 “their usual course”
      of path, Vedic pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path˚ and panth˚, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q.v.)
    Pathabya
    1. belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) AN iv.90 (reading uncertain)
    from pathavi = paṭhavi
    Pathavi
    1. ‣See paṭhavi
    Pathāvin
    1. a traveller Vin iv.108 Ja vi.65 DN-a i.298
    from patha
    Pada

    neuter

    1. foot Dhp 273 = Snp-a 366 (? saccānaṁ caturo padā) DN-a i.85 usually—˚, like hatthipadaṁ elephant’s foot MN i.176 MN i.184 SN i.86 SN v.43 SN v.231 and with numerals dvi˚ & di˚, catup˚, aṭṭha˚ (q.v.) In aṭṭha˚ also meaning “square of a chessboard.”
    2. step, footstep track Dhp 179 (of a Buddha, cp. Dhp-a iii.194 & 197 Ja i.170 (footmark) ii.154; in reduplicated-iterative formation padāpadaṁ step by step Snp 446 (variant reading padânupadaṁ), and pade padaṁ Snp p. 107 (cp. Snp-a 451)
    3. (Often synonymous with ˚patha i.e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) literally way, path, position, place Vin ii.217 (nakkhatta˚ constellation) Ja i.315 (assama = assama); v.75 (identical), 321 (identical); vi.76 (identical); vi.180 (variant reading patha; Commentary mahāmagga); mantapada = manta DN i.104 (cp. DN-a i.273) ‣See also janapada, saggapada-(b) in applied meaning (modal): case, lot, principle part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing element MN i.176 (cattāri padāni.4 characteristics) SN i.7 (pade pade “now in this thing, now in that Commentary ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataṁ p. = nibbāna) ii.280 (identical) AN ii.51 (identical), Iti 39 (p. asankhataṁ = nibbāna) Snp 88 (dhammapade sudesite; explained as nibbānadhamma Snp-a 164 dhammapada = Dhamma), ibid (anavajja-padāni sevamāna = principles), 700 (moneyyaṁ uttamaṁ padaṁ, thing; but Snp-a 491 explains as uttama-paṭipadaṁ), 765 Dhp 21 Dhp 93 Dhp 114 (amataṁ) 254, 368 (santaṁ = nibbānass’ etaṁ nāmaṁ, santakoṭṭhāsaṁ Dhp-a iv.108); Pv iv.348 (amataṁ); Nett 2 192 (nava padāni kusalāni) Snp-a 397 (nāmādi p.) Sdhp 47 (accutaṁ santaṁ p.), 615 (paramaṁ) ‣See further dhamma˚, nibbāna˚, santi˚, sikkhā˚.

      • a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence SN ii.36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto) SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (agga˚) AN ii.182 (+ vyañjana desanā); 189 (attha˚ text, motto); iii.356 (identical) Snp 252 (= dhamma-desanā Snp-a 293), 374 Dhp 273 Ja i.72 (atireka-pada-satena); Nett 4 (akkharaṁ padaṁ vyañjanaṁ cp. nāmādīhi padehi at Snp-a 397 which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyañjana, i.e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mvyutp. 104, 74
      1. -76) Mil 148 (āhacca˚); Kp-a 169 Snp-a 409 (ubhaya˚), 444 Vv-a 3 13 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 117 (word, term). ablative padaso (adverb ) sentence by stce or word by word Vin iv.14 (dhammaṁ vāceti = anupadaṁ Commentary ; cp. Kp-a 190 p ˚dhamma). At M AN i.2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas

        • negative apada (1) without feet footless AN iv.434 (Māra; variant reading apara) Iti 87 (sattā, dvipada etc.).
        • trackless, leaving no footprint, fig having no desires (i.e. signs of worldliness) Dhp 179 (rāga, etc., as padāni Dhp-a iii.197 but cp. also p. 194.)
        1. ˚attha meaning of a word Kp-a 81, 84 Snp-a 91
        • ˚ānupadaṁ (
        • adverb ) on the track Dhp-a ii.38
        • ˚ānupadika following one’s footsteps Ja ii.78 Dhp-a ii.94 (therānaṁ)
        • neuter adverb ˚ṁ close behind Dhp-a i.290
        • ˚ānupubbatā (or ˚ta) succession of words Nd1 140 (in explanation of “iti” cp. Snp-a 28) Nd2 137 (identical; reading ˚ka)
        • ˚uddhāra synopsis of a verse Snp-a 237 (atthuddhāra +)
        • ˚kusala clever at following a trail Ja iii.501 Ja iii.505
        • ˚cārikā a female (foot-) servant Ja iv.35
        • ˚cetiya “step-shrine,” a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man Dhp-a iii.194
        • ˚ccheda separation of words parsing Snp-a 150
        • ˚jāta
        • neuter pedal character SN i.86
        • ˚ṭṭhāna cp. Sanskrit padasthāna footprint
          1. “proximate cause” (Compendium 13, 23) Nett 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104 Vism 84
          2. ˚dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i.e. antecedent and subsequent Dhs-a 164
          • ˚parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) AN ii.135 Ja vi.131 Pug 41 (“vyañjanapadam eva paramaṁ assā ti” PugA 223
          • ˚pāripūrī
          • feminine expletive particle Nd2 137 Snp-a 28
          • ˚pūraṇa filling out a verse; as technical term g. expletive particle Snp-a 590 (a) 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su) 416 (ha), 377 (hi); Kp-a 219 (tam), 188 (su) Vv-a 10 (maya)
          • ˚bhājana dividing of words, i.e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately Dhs-a 234
          • ˚bhājaniya division of a phrase Dhs-a 54
          • ˚bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.95 iii.345; iv.18
          • ˚vaṇṇanā explanation of a pada or single verse Snp-a 65 237; Kp-a 125, 132, 228
          • ˚valañja a footprint track Ja vi.560 Dhp-a ii.38 Dhp-a iii.194
          • ˚viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components Vv-a 326
          • ˚vibhāga separation of words parsing Snp-a 269 Pv-a 34
          • ˚saṁsagga contact of words Nd1 139 Nd2 137 Snp-a 28
          • ˚sadda sound of footsteps Snp p. 80 Ja iv.409
          • ˚sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd1 445 Nd2 137; Kp-a 155, 224 Snp-a 28 40 157 etc. Pv-a 52
          • ˚silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin ii.121 = 154
          Vedic pad, pād masculine foot, and also pāda; pada
        • neuter step. cp. Latin pēs, Gothic fōtus = Old High German fuoz = English foot; further Arm. het track, Gr after, field, on foot, etc.; Lithuanian péda track; Anglo-Saxon fetvan = English fetch

          • The declension in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root declension is instrumental singular padā (Th 1, 457 Snp 768), of consonant (s declension instrumental padasā with the foot, on foot (DN i.107 Ja iii.371 Dhp-a i.391)
          • Gender is nt., but nominative
          • plural is frequently found as padā, e.g. at Dhp 273 Nett 192 (mūla˚)
    Padaka1
    adjective
    1. one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (epithet of an educated Brahmin) DN i.88 = Sn p. 105 (where Avs ii.19 in identical passage has padaśo = Pali padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako) MN i.386 AN i.163 AN i.166 Snp 595 Mil 10 Mil 236
    from pada4
    Padaka2
    1. neuter = pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line Ja v.116 (= kāraṇa-padāni Commentary )
    Padaka2
    neuter
    1. in compound aṭṭha˚; an “eight-foot,” i.e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha-pada chess-board) a patch (?) Vin i.297 ‣See also padika
    from pada1
    Padakkhiṇa
    adjective
    1. “to the right,” in phrase padakkhiṇaṁ karoti (with
    2. accusative of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one’s right side, i.e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin i.17 SN i.138 AN i.294 ii.21, 182; iii.198 Snp 1010 Ja i.50 Ja i.60 Ja iii.392 2. “(prominent) with the right,” i.e. skilful, clever quick in learning Ja iv.469 (= susikkhita Commentary )
    3. lucky auspicious, turning out well or favourable Ja v.353 (= sukha-nipphattin vuddhi-yutta Commentary )
      1. ˚ggāhin “right-handed,” i.e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding AN iii.79 AN iii.180 v.24 sq., 90, 338 Dhp-a ii.105
      • Opp appadakkhiṇaggāhin “left-handed,” unskilled, untrained (cp. German “linkisch”) SN ii.204f. Ja iii.483
      • ˚ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness Kp-a 148
      pa + dakkhiṇa
    Padatta
    neuter
    1. being or constituting a lot, part or element Snp-a 164
    abstract from pada
    Padara
    neuter
    1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice MN i.469 SN ii.32 Snp 720 (= darī Snp-a 500); combined with kandara at Mil 36 Mil 296 Mil 411 Pv-a 29
    2. a board, plank Ja ii.10 91 (˚sakaṭa 112; iii.181; v.47 sq.; vi.432 (˚cchanna) Snp-a 330 (dabba˚ oar), 355 Dhp-a ii.55 Dhp-a iii.296
    3. Wrong spelling for badara at Ja iv.363 (beluvā p˚āni ca); vi.529.

      1. ˚sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin iv.46
      • ˚samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) MN i.469
      pa + dara of dṛ; , cp. dabba, darati, dāru
    Padahati
    1. to strive, exert DN iii.221 (cittaṁ paggaṇhāti p.) Pv-a 31 (yoniso p.)
    2. to confront take up, fight against, stand Ja vi.508 (usīraṁ muñjapubbajaṁ urasā padahessāmi “I shall stand against the grasses with my chest”; Commentary explains by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i.e. break and go forward). Note. padahasi at Ja iv.383 read pade hasi ‣See Windisch Māra & Buddha p. 124 & Morris,; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa + dah to burn, & translates “du willst das Feuer brennen,” i.e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you
    3. pp pahita (q.v.)
    pa + dhā
    Padahana
    1. ‣See padhāna
    Padātar
    1. extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68
    agent noun of padāti
    Padāti
    (padadāti, padeti)
    1. to give, bestow Pv i.116 (
    2. absolutive padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā as Burmese variant ) Ja iii.279 (
    3. future padassati); v.394 (identical). 2. to acquire, take, get Ja i.190 (infinitive padātave, Commentary gahetuṁ)
    4. passive padīyati (q.v.)
    5. pa +
    Padāna
    neuter
    1. giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of “attainment, characteristic attribute” AN i.102 (bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚) Ja i.97 (sotāpattimagg’ ādi˚) Pv-a 71 (anubala˚) Thag-a 35 (anupattidhammatā˚)
    • At Thag 1, 47 Kern (Toevoegselen ii.138) proposes to read tuyhaṁ padāne for Text tuyh’ âpadāne, and translates padāna by “footstep, footprint.” ‣See also sampadāna
    from pa +
    Padāraṇa
    neuter
    1. splitting, tearing Thag 1, 752
    pa + dṛ
    Padālana
    neuter
    1. cleaving, bursting open, breaking Nett 61, 112 (mohajāla˚) Thag-a 34 (mohakkhandha˚)
    from padāleti
    Padālita
    1. broken, pierced, destroyed SN i.130 SN iii.83 AN v.88 (appadālita-pubbaṁ lobhakkhandhaṁ) Snp 546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at Vv-a 9) Thag-a 34 (as A. v.88 with moha˚)
    past participle of padāleti
    Padālitatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, ablative padālitattā on account of having broken Mil 287
    abstract from padālita
    Padāletar
    1. one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) AN i.284f. (in sequence dūre-pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); ii.170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti1
    agent noun to padāleti
    Padāleti
    1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combination ˚khandhaṁ padāleti to destroy the great mass of …, e.g. tamo˚ Iti 8 (padālayuṁ); Thag 2 28 (
    2. absolutive padāliya = moha˚ padālitvā Thag-a 34); lobha SN v.88 avijjā˚ AN i.285
    3. to break, break down tear down, burst open Ja i.73 (pabbata-kūṭāni); iv.173 (matthakaṁ p˚etvā uṭṭhita-singā); v.68 (silāya matthakaṁ) Mil 332 (diṭṭhi-jālaṁ) DN-a i.37 (Sineruṁ) ‣See also sam˚-
    4. past participle padālita (q.v.)
    causative of pa + dal
    Padika
    adjective
    1. consisting of feet or parts,-fold; dvādasa˚ twelve fold Ja i.75 (paccayākāra)
    from pada 1; cp. padaka3
    Paditta
    1. kindled, set on fire, blazing SN iii.93 ≈ (chav’ âlataṁ ubhato padittaṁ) Ja vi.108 Sdhp 208 (˚angārakāsuṁ)
    past participle of pa + dīp, cp. Sanskrit pradīpta
    Padippati
    1. to flame forth, to blaze cp. iii.93 (davaḍāho p.). past participle paditta (q.v.)
    2. causative padīpeti (q.v.)
    3. pa + dippati
    Padissa
    adjective
    1. being seen, to be seen, appearing DN ii.205 (upasantappa˚)
    gerundive of padissati
    Padissati
    1. to be seen Snp 108 (doubtful; variant reading padussati; explained at Snp-a 172 by paṭidissati variant reading padussati, cp. p. 192); cp. i.102 Ja vi.89 Sdhp 427
    pa + dissati, passive of dṛś
    Padīpa
    1. a light Dhp 146 Vv 462 (jalati blazes); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 14 Mil 40 Vv-a 51 (padīpaṁ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light) Pv-a 38 Sdhp 250
    2. a lamp Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath âyaṁ p.) Dhp-a ii.163 (anupādāno viya p.). ˚ṁ karoti to make a light, to light up Vin i.118 ˚ṁ ujjāleti ‣See under 1. Usually as tela-padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15 SN ii.86 (telañ ca vaṭṭiñ ca telapadīpo jhāyati) = iv.213 v.319 AN i.137 Vv-a 198
    3. appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin iv.268
      1. ˚kāla lighting time Vv 96
      cp. Epic Sanskrit pradīpa
    Padīpita
    1. lit, burning, shining Mil 40 Padipiya & Padipeyya;
    past participle of padīpeti
    Padīpiya
    Padīpeyya;
    neuter
    1. that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant ‣See Nd2 523 yañña as deyyadhamma. The form in ˚eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at AN ii.85 AN ii.203 AN iv.239 Iti 65 Pug 51 Vv-a 51
    • The form in ˚iya at Vv 225 266, 376 Ja vi.315 Vv-a 295
    padīpa + (i) ya
    Padīpeti
    1. to light a light or a lamp Vin i.118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba) Mil 40 Thag-a 72 (Ap. v.46); Sdhp 63 Sdhp 332 Sdhp 428. past participle padīpita (q.v.)
    2. causative of padippati
    Padīyati
    1. to be given out or presented; Pv ii.916; Sdhp 502 Sdhp 523
    passive of padāti
    Paduṭṭha
    1. made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opposite pasanna, e.g. at AN i.8 Iti 12 13 DN iii.32 (˚citta) MN iii.49 AN ii.30 Snp 662 Dhp 1 Ja ii.401 Dhp-a i.23 (opposite pasanna) Pv-a 34 Pv-a 43 (˚manasa)
    • appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt DN i.20 DN iii.32 MN iii.50 SN i.13 Pv iv.710
    past participle of padussati
    Padubbhati
    1. to do wrong, offend, plot against Ja i.262 (absolutive ˚dubbhitvā)
    2. pa + dubbhati
    Paduma
    neuter

    the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta˚; and seta˚; , i.e. red and white lotus so at Ja v.37 Snp-a 125 as ratta˚ at Vv-a 191 Pv-a 157 The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa-paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e.g. at Ja i.222 Ja v.337 Ja vi.341 Vv-a 41 It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta- p., viz lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: Vv-a 191 Compared with other species at Ja v.37 where 7 kinds are enumerated as uppala (blue, red & white),; paduma (red white),; kumuda (white) and kallahāra ‣See further kamala and kuvalaya.

  • the lotus or lotus flower MN iii.93 SN i.138 SN i.204 AN i.145 AN ii.86f.; iii.26, 239 Snp 71 Snp 213 Ja i.51 (daṇḍa˚ name of a plant, cp. Sanskrit daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha˚, latā˚, daṇḍaka˚, olambaka˚) iv.3; vi.564 Dhp 458 Nd1 135 Vv 354 (= puṇḍarīka Vv-a 161); 4412 (nānā-paduma-sañchanna); Pv ii.120 (identical); ii.122 (identical) Pug 63 Vism 256 (ratta˚) DN-a i.219 Kp-a 53 Snp-a 97 Sdhp 359.
  • name of a purgatory (˚niraya) SN i.151–⁠152 Snp 677 p. 126 Snp-a 475f.

    1. ˚acchara (heavenly) lotus-maiden Snp-a 469
    • uttara name of Buddha Snp-a 341 455 etc
    • ˚kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus Vv-a 181
    • ˚kalāpa a bunch of lotuses Vv-a 191
    • ˚gabbha the calyx of a l. Thag-a 68 (˚vaṇṇa)
    • ˚patta a l. leaf Nd1 135 (= pokkhara) Dhp-a iv.166 (= pokkhara-patta)
    • ˚puñja a l. cluster Ja iii.55
    • ˚puppha a lotus flower Nd2 393 Snp-a 78
    • ˚rāga “lotus hued,” a ruby Vv-a 276
    • ˚vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.˚; cakka˚, sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.406 iv.343 (cp. Sanskrit p
    • vyūha-samādhi a kind of concentration & ‣See Ja translationii.275)
    • ˚sara a lotus pond Ja i.221 v.337 Snp-a 141
    cp. Epic Sanskrit padma, not in RV.
  • Padumaka
    1. the Paduma purgatory SN i.152
    2. a lotus Ja ii.325
    from paduma
    Padumin
    adjective-noun
    1. having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus-like; name of (the spotted) elephant Snp 53 (explained at Snp-a 103 as “padumasadisa-gattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī,” cp. Nd2 p. 164). feminine paduminī cp. Sanskrit padminī lotus plant
      1. a lotus pond or pool of lotuses DN i.75 DN ii.38 MN iii.93 SN i.138 AN iii.26
      2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum Ja i.128 (˚paṇṇa); iv.419 (˚patta) Snp-a 369 Kp-a 67 (˚patta) Pv-a 189
      cp. Sanskrit padmin, spotted elephant
    Padulla
    1. in compound padulla-gāhin is perhaps misreading; translation “clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion), explained by Commentary as duṭṭhullagāhin; at identical passage SN i.187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd” ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 399, note 3
    ?
    Padussati
    1. to do wrong, offend against (with locative ), make bad, corrupt DN-a i.211 ‣See padosa Snp 108 (variant reading for padissati);
    2. aorist padussi Ja ii.125 Ja ii.401

      • pp paduṭṭha;
      • causative padūseti (q.v.)
      pa + dussati
    Padūsita
    1. made bad, corrupted, spoilt Iti 13 (variant reading padussita). Paduseti & Padoseti;
    past participle of padūseti
    Padūseti
    Padoseti;

    to defile, pollute, spoil make bad or corrupt cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pradūṣyati cittaṁ Divy 197 Divy 286

    1. DN i.20 MN i.129 Iti 86 DN-a i.211 ‣See padosa1 Thag-a 72 (Ap. v.40; to be read for paduse, Pot. = padoseyya) Ja v.273 (manaṁ p., for upahacca)
    • padusseti read also at AN iv.97 for padasseti (dummanku 'yam padusseti dhūm’ aggimhi va pāvako)
    • As padoseti at Pv-a 212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaṁ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of “to set upon anger” (cp padosa2) SN i.149 (“sets his heart at enmity”) = AN ii.3 v.171, 174 = Sn 659 (= manaṁ padoseyya Snp-a 477) Nett 132 SN iv.70 Snp-a 11 (mano padoseyya)
    • pp padūsita (q.v.)
    causative of padussati, but the latter probably denominative from padosa2
    Padesa
    indication, location, range, district; region, spot, place SN ii.227 SN ii.254 SN v.201 AN ii.167 (cattāro mahā˚) Dhp 127 (jagati˚), 303 Ja ii.3 Ja ii.158 (Himavanta˚); iii.25 (identical), 191 (jāti-gottakula˚) Snp-a 355 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 33 (hadaya˚), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp 252.
    1. ˚kārin effecting a limited extent SN v.201
    • ˚ñāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge SN v.457
    • ˚bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kvu 283 (cp. Kvu translation 1393, 1662)
    • ˚rajja principality over a district, local government Iti 15 Thag-a 26 (Ap. v.10) -rājā a local or sub-king Vism 301 (cakkavatti +)
    • ˚lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kvu 283 -vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district Iti 64–⁠66
    from pa + diś, cp. late Sanskrit pradeśa
    Padesika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa˚ at the time of 16 years) Ja i.259 (identical) 262 (identical ii.277 (identical)
    • ‣ See also uddesika in same application
    from padesa
    Padosa1
    1. defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin DN i.71 (= padussati paraṁ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DN-a i.211) MN iii.3 SN iv.322 (vyāpāda˚) AN i.8 (ceto˚); iii.92 (vyāpāda) Iti 12 Ja v.99 Pug 59 68 Dhs 1060
    • Note. At Thag-a 72 we find reading “apace paduse (padose?) pi ca” as uncertain conjecture for Burmese variant “amacce manase pi ca.”
    pa + dosa1, Sanskrit pradoṣa
    Padosa2
    1. anger, hatred, ill-will; always as mano˚; “anger in mind” MN i.377 Snp 328 (= khāṇu-kaṇṭak’ ādimhi p Snp-a 334), 702 Ja iv.29 Mil 130 Vism 304 Snp-a 477
    pa + dosa2, Sanskrit pradveṣa ‣See remarks to dosa2
    Padosika
    adjective
    1. sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā˚ “debauched by pleasure” DN i.19 and mano˚; “debauched in mind” DN i.20 DN i.21
    from padosa1
    Padosin
    adjective
    1. abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring SN i.13 (appaduttha˚); Pv iv.710
    from padosa1
    Padoseti
    1. ‣See padūseti
    Paddha1
    adjective
    1. expert in (
    2. locative Ja vi.476 (variant reading patha = paṭṭha; Commentary cheko paṭibalo). 2. subject to, serving, attending Ja iv.35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.; Commentary padacārikā)
    3. cp. Sanskrit prādhva (?) in different meaning “being on a journey,” but rather prahva
    Paddha2
    adjective
    1. half (?) Ja iii.95 (probably = paddha1, but Commentary explains as aḍḍha upaḍḍha)
    cp. Sanskrit prārdha
    Paddhagu
    adjective noun
    1. going, walking Ja iii.95 (Text na p’ addhaguṁ, but Commentary reads paddhaguṁ)
    2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave SN i.104 (so read for paccagu) Snp 1095 (Text for paṭṭhagu q.v
    3. Nd2 reads paṭṭhagu but Snp-a 597 paddhagu and explains by paddhacara paricārika) Ja vi.380 (hadayassa) Thag 1, 632
    cp. Sanskrit prādhvaga
    Paddhacara
    adjective-noun
    1. ready to serve, subject to ministering; a servant SN i.144 (Text baddhacara, variant reading paṭṭha˚; translation “pupil”) Ja iv.35 (read paddhacarā ’smi tuyhaṁ for Text baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern Toevoegselen s.v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and explained as “tuyhaṁ baddha carāmi, but adds “veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā”); v.327 (as baddhañcara; Commentary veyyāvacca-kara); vi.268 (˚ā female servant = Commentary pāda-paricārikā) Nd1 464 (+ paricārika) Snp-a 597 (+ paricāraka, for paddhagū)
    paddha1 + cara, cp. Sanskrit prādhva and prahva humble
    Padma
    1. ‣See paduma
    Padmaka
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. name of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus Ja v.405 Ja v.420 Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain), 537
      Sanskrit padmaka
    Padvāra
    neuter
    1. a place before a door or gate Ja v.433 Ja vi.327
    1. ˚gāma suburb Dāvs v.3
    pa + dvāra
    Padhaṁsa
    1. ‣See appadhaṁsa
    Padhaṁsati
    1. to fall from ablative, to be deprived of Vin ii.205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh˚). causative padhaṁseti to destroy, assault, violate offend Ja iv.494 (= jīvitakkhayaṁ pāpeti) Pv-a 117
    2. gerundive padhaṁsiya in compounds. su˚ & dup˚ easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin ii.256 SN ii.264 Also negative appadhaṁsiya (& ˚ka); (q.v.)
    3. past participle padhaṁsita (q.v.)
    4. pa + dhaṁsati
    Padhansita
    1. offended, assaulted Ja ii.422 ‣See also app˚;
    past participle of padhaṁseti
    Padhāna
    neuter

    exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind DN iii.30 77, 104, 108, 214, 238 MN ii.174 MN ii.218 SN i.47 SN ii.268 SN iv.360; v.244 sq. AN iii.65–⁠67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; iv.355; v.17 sq. Snp 424 Snp 428 Iti 30 Dhp 141 Ja i.90 Nd2 394 (= viriya) Vb 218 (citta-samādhi p˚ etc.); Nett 16 DN-a i.104 Dhp-a i.85 (mahā-padhānaṁ padahitvā) Thag-a 174 Pv-a 134 Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saṁvara˚, pahāna˚, bhāvana˚ anurakkhaṇā˚ or exertion consisting in the restraint of one’s senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one’s character. These 4 are mentioned at DN iii.225 AN ii.16 Ps i.84; ii.14 sq. 56, 86, 166, 174 Ud 34 Nd1 45 340; Sdhp 594. Very frequently termed sammappadhāna cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samyak-pradhāna MVastu iii.120; but also samyakprahāṇa e.g. Divy 208

    1. or “right exertion,” thus at Vin i.22 SN i.105 SN iii.96 (the four) AN ii.15 (identical); iii.12 iv.125 Nd1 14; Ps i.21, 85, 90, 161 Snp-a 124 Pv-a 98
    • As padahana at Ps i.17, 21, 181
    from pa + dhā, cp. padahati
    Padhānavant
    adjective
    1. gifted with energy, full of strength (of meditation etc.), rightly concentrated SN i.188 SN i.197 Snp 70 (cp. Nd2 394), 531
    from padhāna
    Padhānika
    adjective
    1. making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising “padhāna” DN-a i.251
    from padhāna
    Padhāniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in compound ˚aṅga neuter a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5 expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha-viriyo, paññavā DN iii.237 = MN ii.95 MN ii.128 = AN iii.65 referred to at Miln translation i.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi-padhāniy’ angāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚) AN ii.194 or of 9 (the four + kankhā-vitaraṇa˚, maggâmagga-ñāṇa paṭipadāñāṇa-dassana˚, ñāṇa-dassana˚ paññā˚) DN iii.288 Ps i.28
    2. from padhāna
    Padhārita
    1. (“born in mind”) read patthārita at Thag 1, 842 ‣See pattharati
    • padhārehi (variant reading F.) at Snp 1149 read dhārehi
    • padhārita in meaning of “considered, understood” in compound su˚ at SN iii.6 SN v.278
    Padhāvati
    1. to run out or forth Pv iii.17 (absolutive ˚itvā = upadhāvitvā Pv-a 173)
    2. pa + dhāvati
    Padhāvin
    adjective
    1. rushing or running out or forth MN ii.98
    from padhāvati
    Padhūpāti
    (= padhūpāyati)
    1. to blow forth smoke or flames Vin i.25 (aorist padhūpāsi); iv.109 (identical); Vism 400 (identical), (so read for padhūmāsi Text, variant reading SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi).
    2. past participle ; padhūpita (q.v.)
    3. pa + dhūpāyati
    Padhūpita

    fumigated, reeking, smoked out SN i.133 (translated “racked wrapt

    1. in flames”; Commentary santāpita) Vv-a 237 (so read with variant reading SS. for Text pavūsita; meaning scented, filled with scent)
    pa + dhūpita, latter only in meaning “incensed,” cp. dhūpa etc.
    Padhota
    adjective
    1. cleansed, in compound sup˚ well cleansed DN ii.324
    pa + dhota
    Pana
    indeclinable

    adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna “again, further”) merely connecting & continuing the story.

  • (adversative) but, on the contrary Ja i.222 Ja ii.159 Vv-a 79 (correlated with tāva). ca pana “but” Ja i.152 atha ca pana “and yet” DN i.139 Ja i.279 na kho pana “certainly not” Ja i.151 vā pana “or else” Vin i.83 Dhp 42 Snp 376 Snp 829
  • (in questions) then, now Ja ii.4 (kiṁ p.), 159 (kahaṁ p.) Vv-a 21 (kena p.) Pv-a 27 (katamaṁ p.).
  • (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover DN i.139 (siyā kho p. be it now that …) Snp 23 Snp 393 Snp 396 Snp 670Ja i.278 Pv-a 3

    doublet of Sanskrit puna(ḥ) wiṭh different meaning ‣See puna, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 34
  • Panaccati
    1. to dance (forth), to dance Thag-a 257 (ppr. panaccanta). past participle panaccita (q.v.)
    2. pa + naccati
    Panaccita
    1. dancing, made to dance Thag 2, 390
    past participle of panaccati
    Panasa
    1. the Jack or bread-fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit Ja i.450 Ja ii.160 v.205, 465 Vv 4413 Kp-a 49, 50, 58 (˚phala, where Vism 258 reads panasa-taca) Snp-a 475 Vv-a 147
    cp. late Sanskrit panasa, Latin penus stores, Lithuanian pẽnas fodder, perhaps Gothic fenea
    Panassati
    1. to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be MN i.177 SN ii.272 (read panassissati with Burmese manuscripts ) Ja v.401 vi.239 Thag 1, 143
    2. pa + nassati, cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praṇāśa Divy 626
    Panāda
    1. shouting out, shrieks of joy Ja vi.282
    pa + nāda
    Panādeti
    1. to shout out, to utter a sound Thag 1, 310
    causative of pa + nad
    Panāḷikā
    feminine
    1. a pipe, tube, channel, water course DN-a i.244
    from panāḷī
    Panāḷī
    feminine
    1. a tube, pipe AN iv.171 (udapāna˚)
    pa + nāḷī
    Panigghosa
    1. in compound appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in AN Index (for AN iv.88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa ‣See nigghosa
    Panudati
    1. to dispel, repel, remove, push away SN i, 167 sq., 173 Dhp 383 Snp 81 Snp 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyya = pajaheyya etc. Nd1 385) Ja vi.491 (1. plural panudāmase).
    2. absolutive panuditvā Snp-a 591 & panujja Snp 359 Snp 535 Snp 1055 (explained at Nd2 395 as
    3. imperative pres. = pajaha, cp. Snp-a 591 = panudehi) Ja iii.14 Ja v.198 (= pātetvā Commentary )

      • future panudahissati Thag 1, 27 233
      • passive panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase “api panujjamānena pi” even if repulsed MN i.108 cp. AN iv.32 & Nett 164 (variant reading to be substituted for Text pamajjamānena).
      • past participle ; panunna & panudita; (q.v.)
      pa + nudati
    Panudita
    1. dispelled, driven out Snp 483 (panūdita metri causa, variant reading panudita) ‣See also panunna. Panunna (Panunna & Panunna);
    past participle of panudati
    Panunna (Paṇunna
    Panuṇṇa);
    (med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled driven away, sent AN ii.29 AN v.31 Snp 469 (˚kodha) Ja vi.247 Ja vi.285 Kvu 597 (ito p., translated “ending here”).
    1. ˚paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5th of the 10 noble states ariyavāsā ‣See Vinaya Texts i.141) DN iii.269 DN iii.270 AN ii.41 v.29 sq
    past participle of panudati
    Panūdana
    neuter
    1. removal, dispelling, rejection Snp 252 (sabba-dukkhâpanūdana Snp-a 293 should be read as sabba-dukkha-apanūdana, as at Vin ii.148 = J i.94) 1106 (= pahānaṁ etc. Nd2 396)
    from panudati
    Panta
    adjective [cp. Epic Sanskrit prānta edge, margin, border, pra + anta; also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prānta in meaning of Pali, e. g MVastu iii.200; Divy 312 (prānta-śayan-āsana-sevin) distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaṁ senāsanaṁ (sayanāsanaṁ) or pantāni senāsanāni “solitary bed & chair” MN i.17 MN i.30 AN i.60 AN ii.137 iii.103; v.10, 202 Snp 72 (cp. Nd2 93), 338, 960 (˚amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante) Dhp 185 (= vivitta Dhp-a iii.238) Ud 43 (so read for patthañ) Ja iii.524 (˚amhi sayanāsane); Vism 73 (panta-senāsane rata) Snp-a 263 (variant reading pattha).
    1. ˚sena adjective one who has his resting place far away from men, epithet of the Buddha MN i.386

    Panti
    feminine
    1. a row, range, line Vism 392 (tisso sopāna-pantiyo) Dhp-a iii.219 (uddhana˚) Thag-a 72 (satta pantiyo) Vv-a 198 (amba˚)
    Vedic pankti set or row of five, group in general
    Pantha

    a road, roadway, path SN i.18 (genitive plural panthānaṁ kantāramagga C; “jungle road” translation) Snp 121 (

  • locative panthasmiṁ) Nd2 485 B (+ patha in explanation of magga) Mil 157 ‣See panthaṁ

    1. ˚gū a traveller (literally going by road) SN i.212 (variant reading addhagū, as at identical passage Thag 2, 55) Ja iii.95 (variant reading )
    2. ˚ghāta highway robbery Ja i.253 Ja iv.184
    • ˚duhana waylaying robbery;
    • masculine a robber DN i.135 ‣See DN-a i.296 Ja ii.281 388 DN iii.68 and Tika-Paṭṭhāna 280 (˚dūhana)
    • ˚dūbhin a highwayman Ja ii.327
    • ˚dūsaka a robber Mil 20
    • ˚devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road-goddess Ja vi.527
    • ˚makkaṭaka a (road) spider Mil 364 Mil 407
    • ˚sakuṇa a “road-bird,” i.e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice Ja vi.527 (variant readings pattha˚ & bandha˚)
    base panthan˚, Vedic panthāḥ, with bases path˚ panth˚ and pathi. Same as patha (q.v.) For etymology cp. Avestan pantā˚, also Gothic finpan = English find, of Idg *pent to come or go (by)
  • Panthāna
    1. (for saṇṭhāna) at Snp-a 20 ‣See saṇṭhāna 3
    Panthika
    1. a traveller Mil 20
    from pantha, formation panthika: panthan = addhika: addhan
    Panna
    fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping only in following compounds.:
    1. ˚ga a snake Thag 1, 429 (˚inda chief of snake-demons) Ja v.166 Mil 23
    • ˚gandha with gone down (i.e. deteriorated) smell, ill-smelling, or having lost its smell Ja v.198 (= thokaṁ duggandha Commentary )
    • ˚dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i.e. whose fight is over (Ep of the Buddha), cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prapātito māna-dhvajaḥ Lal. v.448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad cp. papātana) MN i.139f. 386 AN iii.84f.; in eulogy on the Buddha ‣See exegesis to mahesi Nd1 343 Nd2 503 reference is made to mānadhaja (˚papātanaṁ which is opposed to dhamma-dhaja (-ussapana); thus we should explain as “one who has put down the flag of pride.” - bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved MN i.139 AN iii.84 SN i.233 Dhp 402 (= ohitakhandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168) Snp 626 Snp 914 (cp Nd1 334) Thag 1, 1021
    • ˚bhūmi state of one who has fallen DN-a i.103 (opposite to jina-bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa-bhūmiyo-cp. DN i.54 & Dialogues of the Buddha i.722)
    • ˚loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i.e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opposite haṭṭha loma) Vin ii.184 (cp. Vin ii.5 & Buddhaghosa on p. 309 lomaṁ pāteti, Buddhaghosa pādeti; also Vinaya Texts ii.339); iii.266 MN i.450 Ja i.377 Another form is palloma (q.v. & cp. ; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 206) ‣See also remarks on parada-vutta
    past participle of pajjati but not satisfactorily explained as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in compounds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp˚, upa˚, sam˚ etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as past participle of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as
  • past participle of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to; pat. A more satisfactory explanation (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as
  • past participle of pa + nam, with derived from short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata) as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be “bent down, laid down,” as panna-ga going bent, panna-dhaja = flag bent or laid down etc. Perhaps patta of patta-kkhandha should belong here as panna˚
  • Pannaka
    adjective
    1. silent (?) DN-a i.163
    from panna
    Pannarasa
    adjective numeral
    1. fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i.e. the full-moon day Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15th day SN i.191 = Th 1, 1234 MN iii.20 Snp 502 Snp 1016 feminine locative pannarasāya identical SN i.233 ‣See also paṇṇarasa
    2. ‣See pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca
    Pannarasama
    numeral ordinal
    1. the 15th Snp-a 366 (gāthā)
    from pannarasa
    Pannarasika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the 15th day (of the lunar month) Vin iv.315
    from pannarasa
    Papa
    neuter
    1. water Ja i.109 (āpaṁ papaṁ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etymology construction ‣See also papā
    ‣See pibati, pānīya etc. of
    Papaccati
    1. to be cooked, to become ripe Pv-a 55 (˚itvā)
    passive of pa + pacati
    Papañca
    1. [in its Pali meaning uncertain whether identical with Sanskrit prapañca (pra + pañc to spread out; meaning “expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness”; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etymology & meaning of Latin im-ped-iment-um, connected with; pada, thus perhaps originally “pa-pad-ya,” i.e. what is in front of (i.e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle) 1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay hindrance, delay Dhp-a i.18 Dhp-a ii.91 (kathā˚). ˚ṁ karoti to delay, to tarry Ja iv.145 ˚ṁ akatvā without delay Ja i.260 Ja vi.392
    • ati˚ too great a delay Ja i.64 Ja ii.92–⁠2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress MN i.65 SN i.100 SN iv.52 SN iv.71 AN ii.161f.; iii.393 sq. Snp 530 (= taṇhā-diṭṭhi-mānabheda-p. Snp-a 431 and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis) Ud 77 (as
    • feminine papañcā) Thag 1, 519 902, 989 (cp. Psalms of the Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann translates “Sonderheit,” ‣See Lieder p. 210, 211; Mittlere Sammlung i.119 in translation of MN i.65 nippapañca) Dhp 195 Dhp 254 (˚âbhiratā pajā, nippapañcā Tathāgatā = taṇhādisu p˚ esu abhiratā Dhp-a iii.378) Ja i.9 Pv iv.134 (= taṇh'-ādi-p. Pv-a 230); Nett 37, 38 Snp-a 495 (gihi)
    • nippapañca (q.v.) without obsessionote 3. diffuseness, copiousness Snp-a 40
    1. ˚saṅkhā sign or characteristic of obsession Snp 874 (cp. Snp-a 553 = taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚ and māna˚ Nd1 280), 916 (= avijjādayo kilesā mūlaṁ Snp-a 562) -saññā (˚sankhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion DN ii.277 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.312) MN i.109 MN i.112 MN i.271 MN i.383 SN iv.71
    Papañcita
    1. obsessed, illusioned Snp-a 495 (a˚ gihipapañ-cena)
    • nt. obsession, vain imagination illusion SN iv.203Vb 390
    past participle of papañceti
    Papañceti
    1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed MN i.112 Dhp-a i.198 (tesaṁ suvaṇṇa-lobhena papañcentānaṁ)
    2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on Snp-a 136
    3. past participle papañcita
    denominative from papañca
    Papaṭā
    1. (papatā) feminine

      1. a broken-off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity precipice, pit (?) SN ii.227 (papatā ti kho lābha-sakkāra-silokass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; cp. SN iii.109: sobbho papāto kodh’ ûpāyāsass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ); So 665 (= sobbha Snp-a 479 gloss papada) ‣See also pappaṭaka
      from papāta? cp. papaṭikā
    Papaṭikā
    feminine
    1. a splinter piece, fragment, chip Vin ii.193 (read tato pap.˚) AN iv.70f. (of ayophāla) Ja v.333 (same as Vin passage) Mil 179
    2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts MN i.78 192 sq., 488 AN i.152 AN iii.19f. 44, 200, 360; iv.99 336; v.4 sq., 314 sq. Ja iii.491 cp. pheggu
    cp. Sanskrit prapāṭikā (lexicographical & grammatical) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sanskrit parpaṭa name of a plant
    Papatati
    1. to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (accusative ) Vin ii.284 MN i.79 MN i.80 SN i.48 (visame magge), 187 (= Th 1, 1220 patanti) 100, ii.114; v.47 Dhp 336 Ja v.31 Pv i.1012 (nirayaṁ papatiss’ ahaṁ, cp. Pv-a 52 variant reading SS niray’ ûpapatiss âhaṁ).
    2. aorist papatā Vin iii.17 cp. ii.126 Ja vi.566 ‣See also patati
    3. pa + patati
    Papatana
    neuter
    1. falling down Snp 576 = J iv.127 (ablative papatanā papatanato Commentary )
    from pa + pat
    Papada
    (or Papadā ?)
    1. tip of the foot. toes; but in different meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat “falling down, abyss, pit” at Snp 665 (gloss for papaṭa; explained at Snp-a 479 by “mahāniraya”)
    pa + pada
    Papā
    feminine
    1. a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water a well, cistern DN iii.185 SN i.33 = Kvu 345 (= pānīyadāna-sālā SA) SN i.100 (read papañ ca vivane) Ja i.109 Dhp-a iii.349 = J i.302 (= pānīya-cāṭī Commentary ) Vv 5222 (+ udapāna); Pv ii.78 (nominative
    2. plural papāyo = pānīya-sālā Pv-a 102); ii.925 (+ udapāna)
    3. Vedic prapā, pa +
    Papāta
    1. falling down, a fall Vin ii.284 (chinna-papātaṁ papatanti) SN v.47 SN v.2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock MN i.11 SN iii.109 (sobbho p. kodh’ upāyāsass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; cp. papaṭā) AN iii.389 (sobbho p.) Ja iii.5 530; v.70; vi.306, 309 Vism 116 Pv-a 174 Sdhp 208 Sdhp 282 Sdhp 353
    2. adjective falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.).

      1. ˚taṭa a rocky or steep declivity Dhp-a i.73
      cp. Epic. Sanskrit prapāta, of pra + pat
    Papātin
    adjective
    1. falling or flying forward, flying up Ja iii.484 (uccā˚ flying away)
    from papatati
    Papitāmaha
    1. a paternal great-grandfather Dāvs iii.29
    pa + pitāmaha
    Papīyana
    neuter
    1. drinkable, to be drunk, drinking Ja i.109 (udakaṁ papīyana-bhāvena papā ti)
    from , absolutive pa-pīya
    Papīliṭa
    1. worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) Ja ii.223
    pa + pīḷita
    Paputta
    1. a grandson Ja vi.477
    pa + putta, cp. Sanskrit praputra (BR.: “doubtful”) Inscr.
    Papupphaka
    adjective
    1. “with flowers in front,” flower-tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dhp 46 (but explained at Dhp-a i.337 as “p.˚ sankhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni,” i.e. existence in the 3 stages of being)
    pa + pupphaka
    Pappaṭaka
    1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rhys Davids in Dialogues of the Buddha iii.83 “outgrowth” DN iii.87 (bhūmi ˚ṁ paribhuñjati); Vism 418 (≈) Nett 227 (Commentary ) (˚ojaṁ khādāpento)
    2. a water plant ‣See paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā2 & Sanskrit parpaṭa name of medicinal plant
    etymology uncertain
    Pappoṭheti
    1. to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin i.48 Vin ii.208 217 MN i.333 (papph˚) Ja ii.153 (pakkhe); iii.175 (papoṭh˚ sañcuṇṇeti Commentary ) Mil 368 (papph˚) DN-a i.7 Vism 283 (pph)
    pa + poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti
    Pappoti
    1. to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain DN iii.159 DN iii.165 Snp 185 Snp 187 Snp 584 Dhp 27 Dhp-a i.395
    • Pot. 1st pl pappomu Ja v.57 (= pāpuṇeyyāma Commentary ).
    • absolutive pappuyya SN i.48 Snp 482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (= pāpuṇitvā Nd1 170)
    • For further reference ‣See pāpuṇāti
    the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sanskrit prāpnoti
    Papphāsa
    neuter
    1. the lungs DN ii.293 MN i.185 MN i.421 iii.90 Snp 195 = J i.146; Kh iii. (cp. Kp-a 56) Mil 26
    from sound-root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sanskrit pupphusa (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sanskrit) or phurati → pharati. From same root Gr to blow and Latin pustula bubble, blister ‣See Walde under pustula
    Pabandha
    adjective (˚-)
    1. continuous Vism 32
    pa + bandha
    Pabala
    adjective
    1. very strong, mighty Sdhp 75
    cp. Sanskrit prabala
    Pabāḷha1
    1. pulled out, drawn forth DN i.77 (Text reads pavāḷha) ‣See pavāḷha
    past participle of pabāhati
    Pabāḷha2
    adjective
    1. strong, sharp (of pain) DN ii.128 Ja v.422 Mil 174
    pa + bāḷha
    Pabāhati
    1. to pull out, draw forth DN i.77 (Text reads pavāhati, variant reading pabbāḷhati, evidently from pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa iv.3, 3 16. past participle pabāḷha1 (q.v.)
    2. pa + bṛh to pull ‣See abbahati
    Pabujjhati
    1. to wake up intranstitive, awake SN i.4 SN i.209 Dhp 296f. Iti 41 (suttā p.) Ja i.61 Ja ii.103 iv.431 (opposite niddāyati) DN-a i.140
    2. past participle pabuddha (q.v.)
    3. pa + bujjhati
    Pabuddha
    1. awakened SN i.143 (sutta˚ from sleep awakened), Ja i.50 Vv-a 65
    past participle of pabujjhati
    Pabodhati
    1. to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaṁ appabodhati SN i.7 = Dh 143 (= nindaṁ apaharanto bujjhati Dhp-a iii.86 translation KS 13 “forestalleth blame”). causative pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign Ja i.142 Ja iii.511
    2. to set going, arouse Ja i.298 v.390.
    3. to render oneself conspicuous Ja v.8
    4. pa + bodhati
    Pabodhana
    adjective neuter
    1. neuter awakening waking, arising Dhp-a i.232 (˚codana-kamma)
    2. (adjective arousing (or realising?) Vv 6422 (= kata-pīti-pabodhano Vv-a 282); awaking Thag 1, 893 (samma-tāḷa˚)
    from pabodhati
    Pabba
    neuter
    1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin iv.35 MN i.80 Ja i.245 (veḷu˚); Vism 358 (identical; but nāḷika p. 260) Vb-a 63 (identical) Thag 1, 243-angula˚ finger joint Vin iv.262 MN i.187 DN-a i.285-pabba-pabbaṁ knot for knot Dhs-a 11
    2. the elbow SN iv.171
    3. section, division, part Vism 240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati) Vb-a 275 286.

      1. ˚gaṇṭhi a knot Mil 103
      • ˚valli a species of Dūrvā Ja v.69
      • ˚vāta intermittent ague Vin i.205
      Vedic parvan
    Pabbaja
    1. a species of reed. bulrush Vin i.190 (Text reads babbaja) SN i.77 SN ii.92; iii.137 (variant reading babbaja), 155 (˚lāyaka) Thag 1, 27 Ja ii.140 Ja ii.141 Ja v.202 vi.508. For further refs ‣See babbaja
    Sanskrit balbaja, cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 39. 6
    Pabbajati
    1. to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). SN i.140 SN i.141 Snp 157 Snp 1003 imperative pabbaja Dhp-a i.133 Pot. pabbajeyya Ja i.56 Pug 57

      • future pabbajissati Snp 564 Dhp-a i.133 iv.55.
      • aorist pabbaji MN iii.33 SN i.196 = Th 1, 1255 Snp 405 Vv 826 Pv-a 76
      • absolutive pabbajitvā Ja i.303 Pv-a 21 and ˚vāna Snp 407
      • (agārasmā) anagāriyaṁ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin iii.12 MN iii.33 SN i.196 AN v.204 Pv ii.1316. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha Ja i.56 Pv-a 12 pabbajjaṁ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.) ‣See pabbajjā
      • Caus pabbājeti (q.v.)
      • past participle pabbajita
      cp. Sanskrit pravrajati, pra + vraj
    Pabbajana
    neuter
    1. going into an ascetic life Ja iii.393 (a˚)
    from pabbajati
    Pabbajita
    1. one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar) gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍha-pabbajito bhikkhu); iv.159 DN i.131 (agārasmā anagāriyaṁ p.), 157; iii.31 sq., 147 sq. MN i.200 267, 345, 459; ii.66, 181; iii.261 SN i.119 (dhammavinaye p.); iv.260, 330; v.118 sq., 421 AN i.69 AN i.107 147, 168; ii.78, 143; iii.33, 78 (vuḍḍha˚), 244, 403 (acira˚); iv.21 (cira˚); v.82, 348 sq. Snp 43 ‣See Nd2 397 274, 385, 423 Dhp 74 Dhp 174 Dhp 388 Ja i.56 Pv ii.81 (= samaṇa Pv-a 106); ii.111 (bhikkhu = kāmādimalānaṁ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito Pv-a 146); ii.1317 (= pabbajjaṁ upagata Pv-a 167) Mil 11 DN-a i.270 Dhp-a i.133 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 55
    past participle of pabbajati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pravrājita Divy 236
    Pabbajjā
    feminine

    leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe ordination.

  • ordination or admission into the Buddha’s Order in particular: Vin iii.13 SN i.161 etc-sāmanera˚ ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin i.82

    • pabbajjaṁ yācati to beg admission Vin iv.129 labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin i.12 17, 32 DN i.176 SN iv.181
    • ascetic or homeless life in general DN iii.147f. MN iii.33 (abbhokāso p.) SN v.350 (identical; read pabbajjā) AN v.204 (identical) SN ii.128 (read ˚jjā for ˚jā); iv.260 AN i.151 AN i.168 AN iv.274f. Snp 405 Snp 406 Snp 567 Iti 75 (pabbajjāya ceteti) Mil 19 (dhamma-cariya-samacariy’ atthā p.) Dhp-a i.6 Snp-a 49 327, 423 Thag-a 251
    • pabbajjaṁ upagata gone into the homeless state Pv-a 167 (for pabbajita) agārasmā anagāriyaṁ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin ii.253 MN ii.56 pabbajjaṁ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in following varieties: isi˚ of a Saint or Sage Ja i.298 Ja i.303 Dhp-a iv.55 Pv-a 162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa˚ of a Hermit Ja iii.119 DN-a i.270 (described in detail) Dhp-a iv.29 Pv-a 21 samaṇa˚ of a Wanderer Pv-a 76 Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q.v.) if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon
    from pa + vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pravrajyā
  • Pabbata
    1. a mountain (-range), hill, rock SN i.101 SN i.102 SN i.127 SN i.137 SN ii.32, 185, 190 AN i.243 AN ii.140 AN iv.102 (dhūpāyati) Snp 413 Snp 417 Snp 543 Snp 958 Snp 1014 Nd1 466 Dhp 8 Dhp 127 (˚ānaṁ vivaro) = Pv-a 104 Dhp 188 (n. pl ˚āni), 304 DN-a i.209 Mil 346 (dhamma˚) Pv-a 221 (angāra˚) Sdhp 352 Sdhp 545 Sdhp 574
    2. The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enumerated at Ja v.38
    3. Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa Ja vi.282 Caṇḍoraṇa Ja iv.90 Canda Ja iv.283 Ja v.38 Ja v.162 Daṇḍaka-hirañña Ja ii.33 Daddara Ja ii.8 Ja iii.16 Nemindhara Ja vi.125 Neru Ja iii.247 Ja v.425 Paṇḍava Snp 417 Snp-a 382f.; Mahāneru Ja iv.462 Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) Meru Ja i.25 Ja iv.498 Yugandhara Pv-a 137 Rajata Ja i.50 Vipula Ja vi.518 Sineru SN ii.139 Ja i.48 passim; Suvaṇṇa Ja i.50 Ja vi.514 (˚giritāla).
    4. cp Sanskrit pārvata mountainous
      1. a mountaineer Mil 191
      1. ˚utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) Dhp-a i.165 (megha-utu, p. utu, aruṇa-utu)
      2. ˚kaccha a mountain meadow (opp nadī-kaccḥa) Snp-a 33
      • ˚kandara a mountain cave SN ii.32 SN v.396, 457 sq. AN v.114f.
      • ˚kūṭa mountain peak Vin ii.193 Ja i.73
      • ˚gahaṇa mountain thicket or jungle Pv-a 5
      • ˚ṭṭha standing on a mountain Dhp 28
      • ˚pāda the foot of a mountain Ja iii.51 Dhp-a iv.187 Pv-a 10
      • ˚muddhā mountain top Vin i.5
      • ˚raṭṭha mountain

        • kingdom Snp-a 26
        • ˚rājā “king of the mountain,” epithet of Himavā SN i.116 SN ii.137f. 276 iii.149; v.47, 63, 148 AN i.152 AN iii.240 AN iv.102 Pv-a 143
        • ˚saṅkhepa top of a mountain DN i.84 (= p
        • matthaka DN-a i.226)
        • ˚sānu mountain
        • glen Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) -sikhara mountain-crest Ja v.421
        Vedic parvata, from parvan, originally knotty, rugged, massive
    Pabbataka
    1. a mountain Ja i.303
    from pabbata
    Pabbateyya
    adjective
    1. belonging to mountains, mountain-born (of a river) AN iii.64 (nadī p˚ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); iv.137 (identical); Vism 231 (identical), 285 (nadī)
    from pabbata
    Pabbaniya
    adjective
    1. forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to Kp-a 114 (khaya˚) (?)
    from pabba
    Pabbājana
    neuter
    1. keeping out or away, removing, banishment exiling DN i.135; iii.93 Mil 357 Dhp i.296 (= nīharaṇa) Dhp-a iv.145
    from pa + causative of vraj ‣See pabbajati & pabbājeti
    Pabbājaniya
    adjective
    1. belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Mil 186 also in compound ˚kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumerated at Vin i.49 143 ‣See also AN i.79 Dhp-a ii.109
    from pabbājana
    Pabbājita
    1. taken into the order, made a bhikkhu MN ii.62
    past participle of pabbājeti
    Pabbājeti
    1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile DN i.92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom; = nīharati DN-a i.258) MN ii.122 Dhp 388 (attano malaṁ pabbājayaṁ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati) Dhp-a iv.145 (explains as “attano rāgādimalaṁ pabbājento vinodento”) Ja i.262 (raṭṭhā); iii.168 (identical) vi.350, 351 Dhp-a ii.41 Pv-a 54 (core)
    2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha’s) order, to ordain Vin i.82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; iii.12; iv.129 Dhp-a i.19 133.
    3. past participle pabbājita (q.v.)
    causative of pabbajati
    Pabbedha
    1. piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Thag 1, 164-J ii.334 (soḷasa˚ = soḷasa-kaṇḍa-pāta-vitthāro Commentary )
    • Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width
    pa + vedha of vyadh, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56 viz. ṣoḍaśa-pravedho
    Pabbhamati
    1. to roam forth or about Ja v.106 (= bhamati Commentary )
    pa + bhamati
    Pabbhāra
    1. masculine a decline, incline, slope Ja i.348 adjective (usually—˚) bending inclining, sloping; figuratively tending or leading to (cp. English “bearing on”) MN i.493 (samudda˚) SN i.110 (identical) v.38, 216, 219 AN iv.198 (anupubba˚), 224 (viveka˚) Mil 38 (samādhi˚). Very frequent in combination with similar expressions, e.g. ninna, poṇa (cp. Pv-a ninnapoṇa-pabbhāraṁ cittaṁ) ‣See further reference under ninna with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbāna˚)-; apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping Ja v.405 (= samatittha Commentary )
    2. masculine> &
    3. neuter a cave in a mountain Mil 151 Ja v.440 Dhp-a ii.59
    4. neuter, 98
      1. ˚ṭṭhāna a slope Ja i.348 Dhs-a 261
      • ˚dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at Ja iv.397 is given as the seventh
      cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prāg-bhāra Divy 80 etc.
    Pabrūṭi
    1. to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Snp 131 Snp 649 Snp 870 Snp 952 and passim (cp. Nd1 211 273 Nd2 398 465)
    pa + brūti
    Pabha
    1. is adjective form (—˚) of pabhā (q.v.)
    Pabhaṁsana
    adjective neuter
    1. causing to fall or disappear depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi˚ jewel-theft Ja vi.383 (Rhys Davids “polishing"?) Kern in Toevoegselen s. v takes pabhaṁsana as a derived from pa + bhrās to shine, i.e. making bright, polishing (as Rhys Davids)
    from pa + bhraṁś, cp. nāva-prabhraṁśana N plural A.V.
    Pabhagga
    1. broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin iii.108
    past participle of pabhañjati, cp. Sanskrit prabhagna
    Pabhaṅkara
    1. one who makes light, one who lights up, light-bringer (often as epithet of the Buddha) SN i.51 (quoted at Vv-a 116), 210 AN ii.51f. Iti 80 Ja iii.128 Snp 991 Snp 1136 (= ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd2 399) Vv 214 (= ñāṇ’ obhāsa-kara Vv-a 106); 3425 (= lokassa ñāṇ’ āloka-kara Vv-a 115)
    pabhaṁ, accusative of pabhā, + kara
    Pabhaṅga
    1. destruction, breaking up, brittleness Ps ii.238 (calato pabhangato addhuvato) but identical passage at Nd2 214ii and Mil 418 read “calato pabhanguto addhuvato.” Pabhangu, Pabhanguna & gura;
    from pa + bhañj
    Pabhaṅgu, Pabhaṅguṇa
    ˚gura;
    adjective
    1. brittle, easily destroyed, perishable frail. (a) pabhaṅgu : SN iii.32 SN v.92 AN i.254 AN i.257f. iii.16 Dhs-a 380 Sdhp 51 Sdhp 553
    • (b) ˚guṇa : Iti 37 Ja i.393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhanguno calitā; reading may be pabhanguṇā) Dhp 139 (as
    • noun = pabhangubhāva, pūtibhāva, Dhp-a iii.71), 148 (= pūtikāya ibid 111)
    • (c) ˚gura Dhp 148 (variant reading ) Thag-a 95 Sdhp 562 605
    • ‣ See also pabhaṅga
    from pa + bhanj, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prabhanguṇatā destruction, perishableness MVastu iii.338
    Pabhañjati
    1. to break up, destroy Ja iv.494 - past participle pabhagga (q.v.)
    2. pa + bhañj
    Pabhava
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. production, origin, source, cause MN i.67 SN i.181 SN ii.12 Iti 37 (āhāra-netti˚) Snp 728 Snp 1050 Nd2 under mūla (with synonym of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.) Ja iii.402 vi.518
      from pa + ; bhu, cp. Vedic prabhava
    Pabhavati
    1. ‣See pahoti
    Pabhassati
    1. to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin ii.135 (preterite pabhassittha); iv.159 (identical)
    • cp. pabhaṁsana
    pa + bhraṁś; cp. Sanskrit prabhraśyate
    Pabhassara
    adjective
    1. shining, very bright, resplendent SN i.145 SN v.92 SN v.283 AN i.10 AN i.254 AN i.257f. iii.16 Snp 48 (= parisuddha pariyodāta Nd2 402) Ja v.202 170 Vv 171 (rucira +); Pv iii.31 (rucira +); Vism 223 377 Dhp-a i.28 Vv-a 12 (pakati˚ bright by nature)
    from bhās
    Pabhā
    feminine
    1. light, radiance, shine AN ii.139 AN v.22 Iti 19 20 Pv-a 56 (sarīra˚), 137 (identical), 71, 176; Sdhp 250
    • canda-ppabhā moonshine Iti 20 Dhs-a 14
    • adjective pabha (—˚), radiating lucid, in compound sayam˚; self-lucid or self-radiant DN i.17 (= attano attano va tesaṁ pabhā ti DN-a i.110) AN v.60 Snp 404
    from pa + bhā, cp. Epic Sanskrit prabhā
    Pabhāṇin
    1. at Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. is wrongly given with quot. Ja v.421 (in meaning “speaking”) where it should be read manāpa-bhāṇin, and not manā-p˚
    Pabhāta
    1. become clear or light, shining, dawning Snp 178 (sup˚); especially in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak Ja i.81 Ja i.500 neuter daybreak morning SN i.211 Snp-a 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight Ja i.436
    2. past participle of pabhāti
    Pabhāti
    1. to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter Ja v.199 (said of a river; = pavattati Commentary )
    • pp pabhāta
    pa + bhā
    Pabhāva
    1. might, power, strength, majesty, dignity Ja v.36 Ja vi.449
    from pa + bhū
    Pabhāvita
    1. increased, furthered, promoted Thag 1, 767 (bhava-netti˚); explained by samuṭṭhita Commentary
    past participle of pabhāveti
    Pabhāveti
    1. to increase, augment, foster Pv ii.964 = Dhp-a iii.220 (dakkhiṇeyyaṁ)
    • pp pabhāvita
    causative of pabhavati
    Pabhāsa
    1. shining, splendour, beauty SN i.67 sap˚ with beauty SN v.263 Mil 223 ap˚ without beauty Mil 299
    from pa + bhās
    Pabhāsati
    1. to tell, declare, talk Thag 1, 582
    pa + bhaṣ
    Pabhāseti
    1. to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dhp 172 (= obhāseti Dhp-a iii.169), 382 (= obhāseti ekālokaṁ karoti Dhp-a iv.137) Ja i.87 Pv i.109 (so read for ca bh˚); ii.112; Ps i.174 Mil 336 Pv-a 10 (= obhāseti)
    causative of pa + bhās
    Pabhindati
    1. to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Snp 973 (= bhindati sambhindati Nd1 503) absolutive pabhijja SN i.193 = Th 1, 1242

      • passive pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder
      • intranstitive to open SN i.150 (
      • aorist pabhijjiṁsu); Snp p. 125 (identical) Vv 413 (break forth = pabhedaṁ gacchanti Vv-a 183 gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare) Snp-a 475 (= bhijjati) Also “to open, to be developed” (like a flower) Mil 93 (buddhi p.).
      • past participle pabhinna
      pa + bhindati
    Pabhinna
    1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually applied to an elephant in rut, mad, furious MN i.236 (hatthi˚) Dhp 326 (hatthi˚ = mattahatthi Dhp-a iv.24) Thag 1, 77 Ja iv.494 Ja vi.488 Pv i.112 (read chinnapabhinna-gatta) Mil 261 Mil 312 (hatthināgaṁ tidhāpabhinnaṁ) DN-a i.37 (˚madaṁ caṇḍa-hatthiṁ)
    2. developed, growing Mil 90 (˚buddhi)
    past participle of pabhindati
    Pabhuti
    adjective (—˚)
    1. beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time henceforth Vv-a 158
    Vedic prabhṛti
    Pabhutika
    adjective
    1. dating from, derived or coming from ablative DN i.94 (kuto p.)
    from pabhuti
    Pabhu
    1. iord, master, ruler, owner DN-a i.250
    from pa + bhū
    Pabheda
    1. breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening Vv-a 183 akkhara˚ breaking up of letters, word-analysis, phonology DN i.88 (= sikkhā ca nirutti ca DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447)
    • adj (—˚) breaking up into, i.e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds Ja i.84 Pv-a 8 (paṭisandhi-ādi˚), 130 (saviññāṇak’ âviññāṇaka˚)
    from pa + bhid, cp. pabhindati
    Pabhedana
    neuter
    1. breaking up, destruction Snp 1105 (avijjāya˚ = bhedanaṁ pahānaṁ etc. Nd2 403)
    cp. pabheda
    Pabhoti
    1. etc ‣See pahoti
    Pamajjati1
    1. to become intoxicated SN i.73
    2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect waste one’s time SN iv.125 SN iv.133 Snp 676 Snp 925 Snp 933 cp. Nd1 376 & Nd; 2 70 Dhp 168 Dhp 172 Dhp 259 Ja iii.264 (with
    3. accusative ); iv.396 (with genitive) Pv i.1112 (dāne na p.); iv.13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp 16 Sdhp 620
    4. aorist 2
    5. plural pamādattha MN i.46 AN iii.87 AN iv.139 Other noteworthy forms are
    6. aorist or precative (mā) pamādo SN iv.263 Thag 1, 119 Dhp 371 ‣See Geiger Pali Grammar § 161 b, and cond or
    7. aorist pamādassaṁ MN iii.179 AN i.139 ‣See Geiger l. c 170 & Trenckner; Note. 752
    8. appamajjanto (ppr. diligent, eager, zealous Pv-a 7
    9. past participle pamatta (q.v.)
    pa + mad
    Pamajjati2
    1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin i.47 Vin ii.209 (bhūmi˚ itabbā) MN i.383
    2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one’s hands) Vin ii.209 (cīvara-rajjuṁ ˚itvā; cp. Vinaya Texts iii.279). Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p˚ ānena at Nett 164 is after the example of similar passages MN i.108 and AN iv.32 and as indicated by variant reading preferably to be read as “api panujjamānena pi” ‣See panudati
    pa + mṛj
    Pamajjanā
    feminine & ˚itatta
    • neuter are abstract formations from pa + mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vb 350 = Nd; 1 423 Nd2 405. Also at Dhp-a i.228 (˚bhāva = pamāda).

    Pamaññā
    feminine
    1. only negative ap˚; immeasurableness Vb 272f. (catasso appamaññāyo viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā) ‣See appamaññā;
    abstract from pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, gerundive formation of pa + for the usual pameyya
    Pamaṭṭa
    1. in compound luñcita-pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at Pv-a 47 is doubtful it should probably be read as luñcita-pakkhikā k. viya i.e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (variant reading ˚patthaka)
    Pamatta
    slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent DN iii.190 SN i.61 = 204 AN i.11 AN i.139 iv.319; v.146 Snp 57 Snp 70 Snp 329f. 399, 1121 Dhp 19 Dhp 21 Dhp 29 Dhp 292 Dhp 309 (= sati-vossaggena samannāgata Dhp-a iii.482), 371 Nd2 404 Pv-a 276 (quot. ˚ṁ ativattati) appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful SN i.4 SN i.140 SN i.157 AN v.148 Thag 1, 1245 Pv iv.138 Pv-a 66 (dānaṁ detha etc.), 219, 278 ‣See also appamatta2.
    1. ˚cārin acting carelessly Dhp 334 (= sati-vossagga-lakkhaṇena pamādena p
    • c. Dhp-a iv.43)
    • ˚bandhu friend of the careless (epithet of Māra) SN i.123 SN i.128 Snp 430 Nd2 507
    past participle of pamajjati
    Pamattaka
    adjective = pamatta, only in negative form ap˚ careful, mindful Pv-a 201
    Pamathita
    1. crushed, only in compound sam˚ (q.v.)
    past participle of pa + mathati to crush
    Pamadā
    feminine
    1. a young (wanton) woman, a woman Snp 156 Snp 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. Snp-a 203) Ja iii.442 (marapamadānaṁ issaro; variant reading samuddā), 530 (variant reading pamuda pamoda)
    Classical Sanskrit pramadā, from pra + mad, cp. pamāda
    Pamaddati
    1. to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; past participle pamaddita Ja vi.189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta-pahaṭa)
    2. pa + mṛd
    Pamaddana
    adjective neuter
    1. crushing, defeating, overcoming DN i.89 (˚parasena˚); Snp p. 106 (identical = maddituṁ samattho Snp-a 450) Snp 561 (Mārasena˚) DN-a i.250
    from pamaddati
    Pamaddin
    adjective
    1. crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty Ja iv.26 (= maddana-samattha Commentary )
    from pa + mṛd
    Pamāṇa
    neuter
    1. measure, size, amount SN ii.235 AN i.88 AN iii.52 AN iii.356f.; v.140 sq. Mil 285 (cp. translation ii.133, note 2) Snp-a 137 Vv-a 16 Pv-a 55 (ghaṭa˚), 70 (ekahattha˚), 99 tālakkhandha˚;) 268 (sīla˚)
    2. measure of time, com
    3. passive length duration Pv-a 136 (jīvitaṁ paricchinna ˚ṁ); especially in compound āyu˚ age SN i.151 AN i.213 AN ii.126f. and passim (cp. āyu)
    4. age (often by Commentary taken as “worldly characteristic,” ‣See below rūpa˚ and cp. Nd2 406 on Snp 1076) Dhp-a i.38

      • limit Pv-a 123 Pv-a 130 (dhanassa)

    5. (applied meaning) standard, definition description, dimension SN iv.158≈Sn 1076 (perhaps (“age”). pamāṇaṁ karoti set an example Dhp-a iii.300 (maṁ p. katvā)

      • adjective (—˚) of characteristic of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in compound rūpa˚ measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pug AN 229 as “rūpa-ppamāṇ’ ādisu sampattiyuttaṁ rūpaṁ pamāṇaṁ karotī ti”) AN ii.71 = Pug 53 Nd2 406
      • appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited immeasurable, incomparable DN i.31 DN ii.12 (+ uḷāra) MN iii.145 (ceto-vimutti) AN i.183 AN i.192 AN ii.73 AN iii.52 v.299 sq., 344 sq. Snp 507 Pv-a 110 (= atula) ‣See also appamāṇa
      1. ˚kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p
      • kataṁ kammaṁ DN i.251 SN iv.322
      of pa + , Vedic pramāṇa
    Pamāṇavant
    adjective noun
    1. having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin ii.110 AN ii.73
    from pamāṇa
    Pamāṇika
    adjective noun
    1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by (—˚) Dhp-a iii.113 (rūpa˚ etc ‣See A ii.71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge AN iii.349f.; v.140; Sdhp 441 (as pamāṇaka)
    2. according to measure, by measure Vin iii.149 Vin iv.279
    from pamāṇa
    Pamāda
    1. carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness DN i.6 (jūta˚ ‣See DN-a i.85) iii.42 sq., 236 MN i.151 SN i.18 SN i.20 SN i.25 SN i.146 SN i.216 SN ii.43 SN ii.193 SN iv.78, 263; v.170, 397 AN i.212 (surāmerayamajja˚) = SN ii.69 AN i.16f.; ii.40; iii.6, 421, 449 iv.195, 294, 350; v.310, 361 Snp 156 Snp 157 (gloss pamadā cp. Snp-a 203), 334, 942, 1033 Dhp 21 Dhp 30 sq., 167 (= satiossagga-lakkhaṇa p. Dhp-a iii.163), 241, 371; Thag 1 1245 = SN i.193 Iti 86 Nd1 423 = Nd2 405; Ps ii.8 sq. 169 sq., 197 Pug 11 12; Nett 13, 41 Mil 289 (māna atimāna mada +) Snp-a 339 (= sati-vippavāsa) Dhp-a i.228 Pv-a 16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp 600
    • appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal DN iii.236 SN i.158 SN ii.29 Dhp 21
    1. ˚pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ ‣See introduction xi. note 1; Kp-a 207 Pv-a 25
    cp. Vedic pramāda, pa + mad
    Pamādavatā
    feminine
    1. remissness AN i.139
    abstract from pamāda + vant, adjective
    Pamādin
    adjective
    1. infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta˚ Thag 2, 357 (translation “leading to ferment of the mind”; variant readings ˚pamaddin & ˚pamāthin, thus “crushing the heart,” cp. Thag-a 243)
    from pamāda
    Pamāya1
    1. having measured, measuring Snp 894 (sayaṁ p. = paminitvā Nd1 303) Ja iii.114
    absolutive of pamināti i.e. pa +
    Pamāya2
    1. crushing, destroying Snp 209 (bījaṁ; = hiṁsitva vadhitvā Snp-a 257) ‣See on this passage Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 45
    absolutive of pamināti i.e. pa + mṛ; , Sanskrit pramārya of pramṛṇāti
    Pamāyin
    adjective
    1. measuring, estimating, defining SN i.148 (appameyyaṁ p. “who to th’ illimitable limit lays” translation; corresponds with paminanto)
    from pa +
    Pamāreti
    1. to strike dead, maltreat, hurt Dhp-a iii.172
    pa + māreti, causative of mṛ; , marati to die
    Pamināti
    1. to measure estimate, define AN iii.349 AN iii.351 AN v.140 AN v.143 Sdhp 537-ppr. paminanto SN i.148 infinitive paminituṁ Vv-a 154 absolutive paminitvā Nd1 303 and pamāya (q.v.); grd paminitabba Vv-a 278
    2. aorist 3rd singular pāmesi Ja v.299 3rd
    3. plural pamiṁsu AN ii.71 Thag 1, 469 (pāmiṁsu)
    4. pa + mināti to with pres. formation from mi, after Sanskrit minoti ‣See also anumināti
    Pamilāta
    1. faded, withered, languished Mil 303
    past participle of pa + mlā
    Pamukha1
    adjective
    1. literally “in front of the face,” fore-part, first, foremost, chief prominent SN i.234 SN i.235 Snp 791 (Burmese variant and Nd1 92 for pamuñca) Ja v.5 Ja v.169 locative pamukhe as
    2. adverb or preposition “before” SN i.227 (asurindassa p.; variant reading sammukhe); Vism 120. As—˚ having as chief, headed by with NN at the head DN ii.97 SN i.79 (Pasenadi˚ rājāno) Pv-a 74 (setacchatta˚ rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); frequently in phrase Buddha˚ bhikkhusangha, e.g. Vin i.213 Snp p 111 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 20. cp. pāmokkha
    3. pa + mukha, cp. late Sanskrit pramukha
    Pamukha2
    neuter
    1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra˚ with thick eyebrows or lashes Ja vi.503 (but explained by Commentary as “visāl’ akkhigaṇḍa) Pv-a 189 (for aḷāra-pamha Pv iii.35). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead
    2. identical with pamukha1, literally “in front of the face,” i.e. frontside, front
    Pamuccati
    passive of pamuñcati (q.v.)
    Pamucchita
    1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv iii.18 (= khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjāta-mucchā Pv-a 174); iv.108
    2. infatuated SN i.187 (variant reading ; Text samucchita) = Th 1, 1219 Ja iii.441
    pa + mucchita
    Pamuñca
    1. loosening, setting free or loose, in compound ˚kara deliverer SN i.193 = Th 1, 1242 (bandhana˚)-adjective dup˚; difficult to be freed SN i.77 Sn 773 Dhp 346 Ja ii.140
    from pa + muc
    Pamuñcati
    1. to let loose, give out, emit Snp 973 (vācaṁ; = sampamuñcati Nd1 504) Ja i.216 (aggiṁ)
    2. to shake off, give up, shed Dhp 377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaṁ p. to renounce one’s faith, although the interpretation is doubtful ‣See Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 46 sq. & cp. ; Dialogues of the Buddha ii.33 Vin i.7 = DN ii.39 = SN i.138 (Commentary vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174)
    3. to deliver, free Snp 1063 (kathan kathāhi = mocehi uddhara etc. Nd2 407a), 1146 (pamuñcassu = okappehi etc. Nd2 407b)

      • passive pamuccati to be delivered or freed SN i.24 SN i.173 Snp 80 Snp 170f. (dukkhā) Dhp 189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361.
      • past participle pamutta (q.v.)-
      • causative pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free SN i.143 SN i.154 SN i.210 Thag 2, 157 (dukkhā); cp. ii.75; iii.103 sq.
      • causative II. pamuñcāpeti to cause to get loose DN-a i.138
      pa + muñcati of muc
    Pamuṭṭha
    1. being or having forgotten Vin i.213 Ps i.173 (a˚) Ja iii.511 (Text spells pamm˚) iv.307 (identical) Mil 77 cp. parimuṭṭha
    past participle of pamussati
    Pamutta
    1. let loose, hurled Ja vi.360 (papātasmiṁ)
    2. liberated, set free SN i.154 Snp 465 Snp 524f.
    past participle of pamuñcati
    Pamutti
    feminine
    1. setting free, release SN i.209 Thag 2, 248 Ja iv.478 Nett 131 (= SN i.209 but read pamutty atthi) Pv-a 103 (dukkhato)
    from pa + muc
    Pamudita
    (& ˚modita)
    1. greatly delighted, very pleased MN i.37 SN i.64 AN iii.21f. Snp 512 Ja iii.55 DN-a i.217 Thag-a 71 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 132
    • Spelt pamodita at Snp 681 Ja i.75 Ja v.45 (āmodita +)
    past participle of pamodati
    Pamuyhati
    1. to become bewildered or infatuated Ja vi.73 past participle pamūḷha (q.v.)
    2. pa + muyhati of muh
    Pamussati
    1. to forget Ja iii.132 Ja iii.264 (pamajjati +); iv.147, 251
    • pamuṭṭha (q.v.)
    pa + mṛṣ, Sanskrit mṛṣyati = Pali *mussati
    Pamūḷha
    1. bewildered, infatuated Snp 774 Nd1 36 (= sammūḷha), 193 (+ sammūḷha)
    past participle of pamuyhati
    Pameyya
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. to be measured, measurable, only in following cpd appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable SN i.148 SN v.400 MN iii.71 MN iii.127 AN i.266 Vv 3419 (= paminituṁ asakkhuṇeyya Vv-a 154); 377 (explained as before at Vv-a 169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured AN i.266 Pug 35 opposite suppameyya ibid
      gerundive of pamināti, like Epic Sanskrit prameya
    Pamokkha
    1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda˚ pouring out gossip MN i.133 SN v.73 AN ii.26 DN-a i.21 and caravāda˚ identical SN iii.12 SN v.419
    2. release deliverance SN i.2 Pv-a 103 (pamutti +); abl pamokkhā for the release of, i.e. instead of (genitive Ja v.30 (pituno p. = pamokkha-hetu Commentary )
    from pa + muc ‣See pamuñcati
    Pamocana
    adjective noun
    1. loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation SN i.172 = Sn 78 AN ii.24 AN ii.37 49 sq. Snp 166 (maccupāsā, ablative = from), 1064 (pamocanāya dative = pamocetuṁ Nd2) Iti 104 (Nibbānaṁ sabbagantha ˚ṁ). At Dhp 274 we should read pamohanaṁ for pamocanaṁ
    from pa + muc
    Pamoceti
    causative of pamuñcati (q.v.)
    Pamoda
    1. joy, delight Sdhp 528 Sdhp 563 ‣See also pāmojja
    from pa + mud, cp. Vedic pramoda
    Pamodati
    1. to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied SN i.182 AN iii.34 (so read for ca modati) Dhp 16 Dhp 22 Pv i.113 115 Vv-a 278 (= āmodati)- causative pamodeti identical Sdhp 248
    2. past participle pamudita (pamodita); (q.v.) cp. abhippamodati
    3. pa + mud
    Pamodanā
    feminine
    1. delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs 9 86, 285 (āmodanā +)
    from pa + mud
    Pamoha
    1. bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Snp 841 (variant reading Nd1 sammoha) Nd1 193 (+ sammoha andhakāra) Ja vi.358 Ja vi.358 Pug 21 Dhs 390 1061
    pa + muh, cp. Epic Sanskrit pramoha
    Pamohana
    1. deceiving, deception, delusion Dhp 274 (Text reads pamocana Dhp-a iii.403 explains by vañcana)
    from pa + muh
    Pampaka
    1. a loris (Abhp. 618) i.e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.) Ja vi.538 (Commentary reads pampuka & explains by pampaṭaka)
    etym? cp. Sanskrit pampā name of a river (or lake), but cp. reference in BR. under pampā varaṇ-ādi
    Pamha
    neuter [the syncope form of pakhuma = Sanskrit pakṣman used in poetry and always explained in Commentary by pakhuma eye-lash, usually in compound aḷāra˚; having thick eyelashes e.g. at Ja v.215 Vv 357 6411; Pv iii.35; asāyata˚ at Thag 2, 383
    Pamhayati
    1. to laugh; causative pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh Ja v.297 (= parihaseti Commentary ), where it is synonym with the preceding umhāpeti
    2. pa + smi, Sanskrit prasmayate
    Paya
    neuter
    1. milk, juice Ja i.204 Ja vi.572
    Vedic payas, nt, of
    Payacchati
    1. to offer, present, give Dīpavaṁsa xi.28; Pgdp 63, 72, 77 sq. past participle payata (q.v.)
    2. pa + yacchati of yam
    Payata
    1. restrained, composed, purified, pure DN i.103 (= abhiharitvā dinna) AN iii.313 Thag 1 348, 359 (˚atta) Iti 101 (˚pāṇin) = Mil 215 Snp 240 (= sakkāra-karaṇena p. alankata Snp-a 284); Vism 224 (˚pāṇin = parisuddha-hattha); Sdhp 100
    past participle of payacchati
    Payatana
    neuter
    1. striving after, effort, endeavour Kp-a 108
    cp. Sanskrit prayatna, of yat
    Payatta
    1. making effort, taking care, being on one’s guard, careful Mil 373
    past participle of pa + yat
    Payāta
    1. gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv iv.56 (= gantuṁ āraddha Pv-a 260) Ja iii.188 Ja iii.190 Strange is “evaṁ nānappayātamhi” at Thag 1, 945 (Mrs Rhys Davids “thus when so much is fallen away”; Neumann “in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not”)
    • duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 849 (= duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata Vv-a 337)
    past participle of payāti
    Payāti
    1. to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aorist pāyāsi Ja i.146 Ja i.223 Ja i.255 3rd pl pāyiṁsu Ja i.253 and pāyesuṁ Ja iv.220
    2. past participle payāta (q.v.) ‣See also pāyāti
    3. pa +
    Payirudāharati
    1. to speak out, to proclaim aorist payirudāhāsi DN ii.222 (vaṇṇe) Ja i.454 (vyañjanaṁ)
    2. pari + ud + āharati with metathesis payir˚ for pariy˚
    Payirupāsati
    1. “to sit close round,” i.e. to attend on (
    2. accusative ), to honour, pay homage, worship DN i.47 DN ii.257 MN ii.117 SN i.146 AN i.124 AN i.126 AN i.142 AN iv.337 Dhp 64 Dhp 65 Thag 1, 1236 Ja vi.222 (
    3. imperative ˚upāsaya); Pv ii.961 Pug 26 33 Snp-a 401 Vb-a 457 (here defined by Buddhaghosa as “punappunaṁ upasankamati”)
    4. ppr. ˚upāsanto SN v.67 = It 107 Pv-a 44 and upāsamāna Dhp-a ii.32-
    5. aorist ˚upāsiṁ AN iv.213 (Bhagavantaṁ) Pv-a 50
    6. absolutive ˚upāsiya DN ii.287
    7. to visit Vin i.214 (ger ˚upāsitvā; iv.98.
    8. past participle payirupāsiṭa (q.v.)
    pari + upa + ās, with metathesis as in payirudāharati
    Payirupāsana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. attending to, worshipping: worship, homage MN ii.176 SN v.67 Iti 107 DN-a i.142 Pv-a 138
      from payirupāsati
    Payirupāsika
    1. a worshipper Thag-a 200
    from payirupāsati
    Payirupāsita
    1. worshipped Pv-a 116 (= upaṭṭhita), 205 (= purakkhata)
    past participle of payirupāsati
    Payuñjati
    1. to harness, yoke, employ, apply; passive payujjati to be applied to Sdhp 400 (ppr. ˚māna-
    2. past participle payutta (q.v.)
    3. causative payojeti (q.v.)
    4. pa + yuj
    Payuta
    1. (wrongly) applied, at random, careless “misdirected” AN i.199 Snp 711 (˚ṁ vācaṁ = obhāsaparikathā-nimitta-viññatti-payuttaṁ ghāsesana-vācaṁ Snp-a 497), 930 (= cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaṁ vā payojita Snp-a 565 Nd1 389 however reads payutta and explains as “cīvarapayutta” etc.)
    past participle of pa + yu, cp. Sanskrit pra + yuta united, fastened to, increased
    Payutta
    1. yoked Snp p. 13 (= yottehi yojita Snp-a 137)
    2. applied, intent on, devoted to busy in (
    3. accusative, locative, or—˚) Ja v.121 (ajjhattaṁ); Pv iii.710 (sāsane) Snp-a 497 (viññatti˚)
    4. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su˚ well-behaved, acting well Mil 328 by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied wasted (cp. payuta) AN ii.81f. Snp 930 ‣See Nd1 389

      • planned, schemed, undertaken Vin ii.194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.)
    past participle of payuñjati
    Payuttaka
    adjective noun
    1. one who is applied or put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed Ja i.262 (˚cora), 291 (˚dhutta)
    payutta + ka
    Payoga
    1. means, instrument Ja vi.116 (= karaṇa Snp-a 7 Dhs-a 215 (sa˚)
    2. preparation, undertaking, occupation exercise, business, action, practice Vin iv.278 Ps ii.213 (sammā˚) Mil 328 (sammā˚); Kp-a 23, 29 sq. Pv-a 8 (vapana˚), 96 (manta˚), 103, 146 (viññatti˚ cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara-kkhipana˚). payogaṁ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try Pv-a 184 (= parakkamati)
      1. ˚karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation Dhp-a iii.238
      • ˚vipatti failure of means, wrong application Pv-a 117 Pv-a 136
      • ˚sampatti success of means Vv-a 30 32
      • ˚suddhi excellency of means, purity in application Dhs-a 165 Vv-a 60
      • ˚hīna deficient in exertion or application Mil 288
      Vedic prayoga, from pa + yuj ‣See payuñjati
    Payogatā
    feminine
    1. application (to) Vism 134 (majjhatta˚)
    from payoga
    Payojana
    neuter
    1. undertaking, business Pv-a 201
    2. appointment Ja i.143
    3. prescript injunction Dhs-a 403

      • purpose, application, use Sdhp 395
    from pa + yuj
    Payojita
    1. 1 connected with, directed to, applied Snp-a 565
    • instigated, directed Mil 3
    • past participle of payojeti
    Payojeti
    1. to undertake, engage in, begin DN i.71 (kammante “set a business on foot”) AN ii.82 (kammantaṁ) Snp 404 (vaṇijjaṁ) Ja i.61 Pv-a 130 (kammaṁ)
    2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ Pv-a 46 (bhesajjaṁ cuṇṇena saddhiṁ). 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire Ja i.173 ii.417
    3. to engage with, come to close quarters J. ii.10.

      • to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DN-a i.270
      • past participle payojita (q.v.)
    causative of payuñjati
    Payyaka
    1. (paternal) great-grandfather Ja i.2 (ayyaka˚) Pv-a 107 (identical)
    pa + ayyaka
    Para
    1. (adverb adjective)
      1. (
      2. adverb & preposition) beyond, on the further side of (with ablative or
      3. locative ), over Pv-a 168 (para Gangāya, variant reading ˚āyaṁ) ‣See in same meaning & application paraṁ, paro and parā & cp. compounds. like paraloka
      4. adjective para follows the
      5. pronoun declension; cases singular nominative paro Snp 879 accusative paraṁ Snp 132 Snp 185 genitive dat parassa Snp 634 Pv ii.919, instrumental parena Pv-a 116 loc paramhi Snp 634 and pare Pv ii.943;
      6. plural nominative pare Dhp 6 accusative pare Dhp 257 Pv-a 15 genitive dative paresaṁ DN i.3 Thag 1, 743 Ja i.256 Snp 818 instrumental parehi Snp 240 Snp 255 Pv-a 17
      7. Meanings: (a) beyond, i.e. “higher” in space (like Vedic para as opposed to avara lower), as well as “further” in time (i.e.
      8. future, to come, or also remote past ‣See
      9. locative pare under c.), frequently in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i.e. life) to come, the beyond or
      10. future life (opposite ayaṁ loko) Snp 185 (asmā lokā paraṁ lokaṁ na socati), 634 (asmiṁ loke paramhi ca) Dhp 168 (paramhi loke); Pv ii.83 (identical = paraloke Pv-a 107); but also in other combination , like santi-para (adjective higher than calm Dhp 202 cp. paraloka, paraṁ and paro
      11. (b) another, other, adjective as well as
      12. noun, plural others Snp 396 (parassa dāraṁ nâtikkameyya), 818 (paresaṁ cp. Nd1 150) Dhp 160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv ii.919 (parassa dānaṁ); ii.943 (pare, locative paramhi parassa Pv-a 130) Dhp-a iv.182 (genitive
      13. plural ) Pv-a 15 Pv-a 60 (paresaṁ dative), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraṁ purisaṁ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one’s own, oneself), e.g. at MN i.200 (paraṁ vambheti attānaṁ ukkaṁseti) Snp 132 (attānaṁ samukkaṁse paraṁ avajānāti) Ja i.256 (paresaṁ, opposite attanā) Nd2 26 (att-attha opposite par-attha ‣See compounds. ˚ajjhāsaya & ˚attha)
      14. paro … paro “the one … the other” DN i.224 (kiṁ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraṁ one another Snp 148 (paro paraṁ nikubbetha). In a special sense we find pare
      15. plural in the meaning of “the others,” i.e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare DN i.2 (= paṭiviruddhā sattā DN-a i.51) Vin i.349 Dhp 6
      16. (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as
      17. adverb : paraṁ
      18. accusative singular
      19. masculine ‣See under compounds., like parantapa; as
      20. neuter adverb ‣See sep. In phrase puna ca paraṁ would be better read puna c’ aparaṁ ‣See apara-parena instrumental later on, afterwards Ja iii.395 (= aparena samayena Commentary )
      21. pare (
      22. locative ); cp. Latin prae before; Gothic faúra = English for, old dative of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier Ja ii.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i.e. to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin iv.63
      23. pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo; and may mean “in
      24. future,” or “the day before yesterday.” It is of interest to notice the Vedic use of pare as “in the
      25. future opposed to adya & śvas) Ja iii.423 (the day before yesterday). At Dhp-a i.253 (sve vā pare vā) and iv.170 in the sense of “on the day after tomorrow."-parā (only apparently ablative, in reality either para + a˚ which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the compound, or para + ā which is the directional prefix ā emphasizing para. The latter explanation is more in the spirit of the Pali language) ‣See separately
      26. ˚paro (old ablative as
      27. adverb = Sanskrit paras) beyond further ‣See sep-parato ablative in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others AN iii.337 (attano parato ca); Nett 8 (ghosa), 50 (identical)-(2) from the point of view of “otherness,” i.e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy MN i.435 (in “anicca"-passage) AN iv.423 Nd2 214ii; Ps ii.238 Kvu 400 Mil 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā “seen as not myself” Thag 1, 1160 2, 101 SN i.188 (sankhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond Ja ii.128 Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṁ).
      28. further, afterwards, later on SN i.34 Ja i.255 Ja iv.139 Snp-a 119 482
      29. Note. The compounds with para˚ are combinations either with para 1 (
      30. adverb preposition), or para 2
      31. adjective-noun. Those containing para in form parā and in meaning “further on to” ‣See separately under parā˚ ‣See also pāra, pārima etc
        1. ˚ ajjhāsaya intent on others (opposite att˚) Snp-a 46
        • ˚attha (parattha, to be distinguished from
        • adverb parattha q.v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opposite attattha) SN ii.29 AN iii.63 Dhp 166 Nd2 26
        • ˚ādhīna dependent on others DN i.72 (= paresu adhīno parass’ eva ruciyā pavattati DN-a i.212) Ja vi.99 Thag-a 15 (˚vuttika) Vv-a 23 (˚vutti, paresaṁ bhāraṁ vahanto)
        • ˚ūpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin ii.194
        • ˚ūpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 8440
        • ˚ūpaghātin killing others Dhp 184 (= paraṁ upahananto p. Dhp-a iii.237)
        • ˚ūpavāda reproaching others Snp 389
        • ˚kata ‣See paraṅkata

          • kamma service of others, ˚kārin serving others Vv 3322
          • ˚kāra ‣See below under parankāra
          • ˚kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Snp 128 Dhp 73
          • ˚kkanta para˚ or parā˚ *krānta?
          1. walked (by another or gone over?) Ja vi.559 (better to be read with variant reading on p. 560 as pada˚ i.e. walked by feet, footprint) -kkama (parā + kram] exertion, endeavour, effort strife DN i.53 DN iii.113 SN i.166 (daḷha˚); ii.28 (purisa˚) v.66, 104 sq. AN i.4 AN i.50 (purisa˚); iv.190 Snp 293 Dhp 313 Nd1 487 Ja i.256 Ja ii.153 Dhs 13 12, 289, 571 Mil 244 Dhp-a iv.139 Sdhp 253; adjective (—˚) sacca˚ one who strives after the truth Ja iv.383
          • ˚kkamati *parakramati
            1. to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake show courage Snp 966 (absolutive parakkamma) Dhp 383 (identical); Pv iii.213 (
            2. imperative parakkāma, variant reading parakkama) Pug 19 23 Pv-a 184 (= payogaṁ karoti); Sdhp 439
            3. ˚kkaroti either for parā + kṛ or more likely paras + kṛ; cp. paro
              1. literally “to put on the opposite side,” i.e. to remove, do away with Ja iv.26 (corresponding to apaneti Commentary explains as “parato kāreti,” taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari = mā pariccaji Commentary ) -gatta alien body, translation “limbs that are not thou Thag 1, 1150
              • ˚gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another AN ii.109 = Pug 47 (opposite sakagavacaṇḍa, cp. PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaṁ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.)
              • ˚(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien SN i.134 (nayidaṁ attakataṁ bimbaṁ nayidaṁ parakataṁ aghaṁ); with reference to loka & dukkha and opposed to; sayankata DN iii.137f. SN ii.19f. 33 sq., 38 sq. Ud 69f. -(n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud 70 (opposite ahankara selfhood)
              • ˚citta the mind or heart of others. AN v.160
              • ˚jana a stranger enemy, demon, figuratively devil (cp. Sanskrit itarajana) MN i.153 MN i.210
              • ˚tthaddha parā + tthaddha
                1. propped against, founded on, relying on (with locative ) Ja vi.181 (= upatthadda Commentary ) -tthabbha is to be read for ˚tthambha at Ja iv.313 in meaning = ˚tthaddha (kismiṁ)
                2. ˚dattūpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another’s gift Snp 217 Mil 294
                3. ˚davutta ‣See sep. under parada -dāra the wife of another, somebody else’s wife MN i.87 AN ii.71 191 Snp 108 Snp 242 (˚sevanā) Dhp 246 Dhp 309 (˚upasevin, cp. Dhp-a iii.482) Ja vi.240 Dhp-a iii.481 (˚kamma)
                4. ˚dārika (better to be read as pāra˚) an adulterer SN ii.188 SN ii.259 Ja iii.43
                5. ˚dhammika “of someone else’s norm,” one who follows the teaching of another, i.e. of an heretic teacher Snp 965 (Nd1 485: p˚ ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā dhamme appa nnā, sanghe appasannā)
                6. ˚niṭṭhita made ready by others SN i.236
                7. ˚nimmita “created by another,” in ˚vasavattin having power under control of another, name of a class of Devas ‣See deva DN i.216f. AN i.210 Iti 94 Pug 51 DN-a i.114 121; Kp-a 128 Vv-a 79
                8. ˚neyya to be led by another, under another’s rule Snp 907 Nd1 321 (= parapattiya parapaccaya) -(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp attantapa) DN iii.232 MN i.341 MN i.411 MN ii.159 Pug 56
                9. ˚paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd1 321; usually negative a˚ independent of another Vin i.12 181 and passim -pattiya = preceding Nd1 321
                10. ˚pāṇa other living beings Snp 220
                11. ˚puggala other people DN iii.108
                12. ˚putta somebody else’s son AN iv.169 Snp 43
                13. ˚pessa serving others, being a servant Snp 615 (= paresaṁ veyyāvacca Snp-a 466)
                14. ˚pessiyā a female servant or messenger, literally to be sent by others Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā Commentary )
                15. ˚ppavāda cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parapravādin “false teacher” Divy 202
                  1. disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (applied to Non-Buddhistic systems) SN v.261 AN ii.238 Mil 170 175
                  2. ˚bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond Pv-a 24
                  • ˚bhuta Sanskrit parabhṛta
                    1. the Indian cuckoo (literally brought up by another) Ja v.416 (so read for parābhūta)
                    2. ˚bhojana food given by others Snp 366 (= parehi dinnaṁ saddhādeyyaṁ Snp-a 364)
                    3. ˚loka compound either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraṁ (cp. paraṁmaraṇā after death), i.e. the future world or the world to come
                      1. the other world, the world beyond (opposite ayaṁ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, ‣See on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq. DN i.27 DN i.58 DN i.187 DN ii.319 SN i.72 SN i.138 Snp 579 Snp 666 Snp 1117 Nd1 60 Nd2 214 (variant reading for paloka in anicca-passage) 410 (= manussalokaṁ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Ps i.121 Vv 845 (= narakaṁ hi sattānaṁ ekantânatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti Vv-a 335) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 60 (= pettivisaya parattha), 64, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi) Snp-a 478 (= parattha); Sdhp 316 Sdhp 326 Sdhp 327
                      2. ˚vambhitā contempt of others MN i.19 (a˚)
                      3. ˚vambhin contempting others MN i.19 MN i.527
                      • ˚vasatta power (over others) Dāvs iv.19
                      • ˚vāda (1 talk of others, public rumour SN i.4 Snp 819 (cp. Nd1 151) Snp-a 475 (2) opposition Mil 94f. -vādin opponent Mil 348
                      • visaya the other world, realm of the Dead Hades Pv iv.87 (= pettivisaya Pv-a 268)
                      • ˚vediya to be known by others, i.e. heterodox DN ii.241 Snp 474 (= parehi ñāpetabba Snp-a 410)
                      • ˚sattā (
                      • plural ) other beings AN i.255 = iii.17 (+ parapuggalā)
                      • ˚suve on the day after tomorrow Dhp-a iv.170 (variant reading SS for pare ‣See para 2 c.)
                      • ˚sena a hostile army DN i.89 = ii.16 iii.59 = Sn p. 106 ≈ (cp. DN-a i.250 = Snp-a 450)
                      • ˚hattha the hand of the enemy Ja i.179
                      • ˚hiṁsā hurting others Pv iii.73
                      • ˚hita the good or welfare of others (opposite attahita) DN iii.233 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 163
                      • ˚hetu on account of others, through others Snp 122 (attahetu +) Pug 54
                      from Indogermanic *per, *peri (cp. pari); Vedic para, parā, paraṁ; Latin per through, also pari pubba, pura, purāṇa
    Paraṁ
    1. (param˚) (adverb )

      1. further, away (from); as preposition (w. ablative) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṁ from here, after this, further, e. g Kp-a 131 Snp-a 160 178, 412, 512, 549 Pv-a 83 Pv-a 90 also in tato paraṁ Ja iii.281
      1. ˚parā feminine adverb converted into a noun paraṁ + ablative of para
        1. literally “after the other,” i.e. succession, series Vin ii.110 Vin iv.77 78 (parampara-bhojana “taking food in succession,” successive feeding ‣See under bhojana, and cp. Commentary at Vin iv.77 78 and Vin Texts i.38) DN i.239 MN i.520 AN ii.191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd2 151); Bu i.79 Ja i.194 Ja iv.35 (explained by Commentary as purisa˚, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. interperts as “defamation, ravishing”); Nett 79 (˚parahetu) Mil 191 Mil 276 Dhs-a 314 Snp-a 352 Dhp-a i.49 (sīsa˚)
        2. ˚maraṇā (adverb ) after death; usually in combination with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i.e. after death SN i.231 DN i.245 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. DN i.188 192 AN v.193
        3. ˚mukhā (
        4. adverb ) in one’s absence, lit with face turned away (opposite sammukhā in presence, thus at Ja iii.263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam˚ to āvi Pv-a 13) DN i.230 (parammukhin?) Dhp-a ii.109
        5. originally
        6. neuter of para
    Parajjhati
    1. ‣See parājeti
    Parattha
    adverb
    1. elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world SN i.20 Snp 661 = It 42 = Dh 306 Dhp 177 Ja ii.417 Pv i.1110 (= paraloke Pv-a 60); iii.120 (= samparāye Pv-a 177) Snp-a 478 (= paraloke)
    Vedic parastāt beyond
    Parada
    adjective

    finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful compounds. viz. ˚vutta unexplained, perhaps v for y, as daya → dava through influence of d in parada˚; thus = parata yutta?

    1. “fond of being prepared,” adapted, apt, active alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma + Vin ii.184 (Vinaya Texts iii.232 translation “secure,” cp. Vin ii.363) MN i.450 MN ii.121 (Burmese variant paradatta˚),-and ˚samācāra living a good (active) life MN i.469
    for uparada (?) = uparata, past participle of upa + ram
    Parama
    adjective
    1. highest, most excellent, superior, best paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd2 502 AN Nd1 84 102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at Dhp-a iii.237 Vv-a 78
    • DN i.124 (ettaka˚) MN ii.120 (˚nipacca) SN i.166 SN ii.277 SN v.230 AN v.64 (˚diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna) Snp 138 (yasaṁ paramaṁ patto), 296 (˚ā mittā), 788 (suddhaṁ ˚ṁ arogaṁ), 1071 (saññāvimokhe ˚e vimutto) Dhp 184 (nibbānaṁ ˚ṁ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243 Vv 161 (˚alankata paramaṁ ativiya visesato Vv-a 78) Pv ii.910 (˚iddhi) Pug 15 16, 66 Snp-a 453 (˚issara) Pv-a 12 (˚nipacca) 15 (˚duggandha), 46
    • At the end of a compound (—˚) “at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum at least” Vin iv.263 (dvangula-pabba˚); especially frequently in phrase sattakkhattu˚; one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i.e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval SN ii.185 (sa˚); v.205 AN i.233 AN iv.381 AN v.120 Iti 18 Kvu 469 ‣See pāramī & pāramitā

    -attha cp. class. Sanskrit paramārtha

    1. the highest good ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu translation 180; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1914, 129 sq.; Compendium 6, 81) Arahantship Snp 68 (= vuccati Amataṁ Nibbānaṁ etc Nd2 409), 219 (˚dassin) Nd2 26 Mil 19 Mil 31
    • ˚dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, name of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e.g. at Pv-a 71
    • ˚jotikā identical, name of the Commentary on Kh and Sn, mentioned e. g at Kp-a 11

      • As ˚-, in instrumental and ablative used
      • adverb ially in meaning of “in the highest sense, absolutely , primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense, like ˚pāramī Bu i.77 ˚visuddhi. AN v.64 ˚saññita Thag 2 210; ˚suñña Ps ii.184; ˚suddhi Snp-a 528 ablative paramatthato Mil 28 Vv-a 24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaṁ) Pv-a 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiñci hanati = not at all) instrumental paramatthena Mil 71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi)
      • ˚gati the highest or best course of life or
      • future exsitence Vv 3512 (= anupādisesa-nibbāna Vv-a 164)
      Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, literally “farthest,” cp. similarly, although from different base Latin prīmus
    paramajja-dhamma
    1. the most influential or ruling doctrine MN iii.7
    cp. Vedic parama-jyā
    Paramatā
    feminine
    1. the highest quantity, measure on the outside minimum or maximum DN i.60 (ghāsa-cchādana-paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing DN-a i.169 explains by uttamatāya) MN i.10 (abyābajjha˚) SN i.82 (nāḷik’ odana-paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); frequently in phrase sattakkhattuṁ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most SN ii.134f.; v.458; Kvu 469 (cp. Kvu translation 2683)
    from parama, Vedic paramatā highest position
    Parasupahāra
    1. at SN v.441 is to be corrected to pharasu˚;
    Parā˚
    ; (prefix)
    1. prep meaning “on to,” “over” (with the idea of mastering) also “through, throughout.” The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā + kṛ; = parakkaroti, parā kram = parakkamati ‣See under compounds. of para
    para + ā, not instrumental of para ‣See para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraṁ˚
    Parākaroti
    1. ‣See parakkaroti (paraṁ˚? or parā?)
    Parājaya
    1. defeat DN i.10 Ja vi.209 Vv-a 139
    2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play SN i.149 (dhana˚) = AN v.171 = Sn 659 Ja vi.234 (˚gāha sustainment of a loss)
    parā + ji, opposite of jaya
    Parājita
    1. defeated, having suffered a loss Vin iv.5 SN i.224 AN iv.432 Snp 440 Snp 681 Dhp 201 (= parena parājito Dhp-a iii.259 where Buddhaghosa takes it evidently as instrumental of para = parā) Ja i.293 Ja ii.160 (sahassaṁ), 403
    past participle of parājeti
    Parājeti
    1. to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat Pv-a 151 (sahassaṁ p by 1,000 coins). aorist parāji in 3rd
    2. plural ˚jiṁsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods Titans, viz. at DN ii.285 = M i.253 (˚jiniṁsu) = SN i.221 SN i.224 (variant reading ˚jiniṁsu) = AN iv.432 (˚jiyiṁsu, with variant reading ˚jiniṁsu), where a
    3. passive is required (“were defeated lost”) in opposed to jiniṁsu, and the reading ˚jiyiṁsu as
    4. aorist passive is to be preferred

      • passive ˚jīyati to be defeated, to suffer defeat SN i.221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active) Ja i.290 and parajjhati (1st
      • plural parajjhāma) Ja ii.403
      • aorist parājiyi ‣See above parāji
      • pp parājita (q.v.)
      parā + jeti of ji, cp. jayati
    Parābhava
    1. defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace SN ii.241 AN ii.73 AN iv.26 Snp 91–⁠115 Ja iii.331 Snp-a 167
    from parā + bhu Vedic parābhava
    Parābhavati
    1. to go to ruin Snp 91 (= parihāyati vinassati)
    2. to win through, to sur
    3. passive Thag 1, 1144 (cp. translation 3814).
    4. past participle parābhūta (q.v.) ‣See also parābhetvā
    parā + bhū
    Parābhūta
    1. ruined, fallen into disgrace MN ii.210 (avabhūta +)
    • Note. parābhūta at Ja v.416 is to be read parabhuta (q.v.)
    past participle of parābhavati
    Parābhetvā
    1. at Ja v.153 is not clear (Commentary hadayaṁ bhinditvā olokento viya …); perhaps we have here a reading parābh˚ for parāg˚ (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka) which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning “propitiating.”
    Parāmaṭṭha
    1. touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted DN i.17 for a different, commentarial interpretation ‣See Parāmāsa (evaṁ˚ so acquired or taken up; cp. DN-a i.107 nirāsanka-cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha) SN ii.94 Nd2 152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No 227) Dhs 584 1177, 1500; Sdhp 332
    • dup˚ wrongly grasped, misused SN i.49
    • apparāmaṭṭha cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aparāmṛṣta not affected Mvyutp. p. 84
    1. untarnished incorrupt DN ii.80 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.85); iii.245 SN ii.70 AN iii.36
    past participle of parāmasati
    Parāmasa
    1. touching, seizing, taking hold of MN i.130 (variant reading ˚māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541) SN iii.46 (variant reading ˚māsa)
    • negative aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing DN i.17 (˚to), 202
    • Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether
    parā + mṛś, but ‣See parāmāsa
    Parāmasati
    1. to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (accusative ) Vin ii.47 195, 209 DN i.17 MN i.257 SN iii.110 Ja iv.138 in combination with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd; 2 227.
    2. absolutive parāmassa DN ii.282 MN i.130 MN i.498 (but cp. p. 541);
    3. gerundive parāmasitabba Ja i.188-
    4. past participle parāmaṭṭha (q.v.)
    5. para + masati of mṛś
    Parāmasana
    neuter
    1. touching, seizing, taking up Nd2 576 (daṇḍa-sattha˚) Dhs-a 239 (angapaccanga˚) Pv-a 159 (kiriyā˚)
    from parāmasati
    Parāmāsa
    1. touching contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 316). In Asl. 49, Buddhaghosa analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means “they handle dhamma’s as other” (than what they really are e.g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs “Reversion,” in Dialogues iii.28, 43, etc. “perverted (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha)- SN iii.46 SN iii.110 AN ii.42 (sacca˚); iii.377 (sīlabbata˚), 438 (identical); v.150 (sandiṭṭhi˚) DN iii.48 Thag 1, 342 Iti 48 (itisacca˚, cp. idaṁsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha) Pug 22 Dhs 381 1003 1175 (diṭṭhi˚ contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (identical) It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa ‣See kāyagantha (under gantha), and cp. Nd2 227 (gāha p abhinivesa) and Nd2 under taṇhā iii.1 Commentary
    • ‣ See also parāmasa
    parā + mṛś, cp. Epic Sanskrit parāmarśa being affected by; as philosophical term “reflection”
    Parāmāsin
    adjective
    1. grasping, seizing, perverting DN iii.48 MN i.43 MN i.96 (sandiṭṭhi˚). Parayana (Parayana)
    from parāmāsa
    Parāyana (Parāyaṇa)
    neuter
    1. (n.) final end, i.e. support, rest, relief SN i.38 AN i.155 AN i.156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.) Ja v.501 = vi.375 (dīpañ ca p.)
    2. (adjective
    3. ˚) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one’s end or goal in; also: finding one’s support in (as daṇḍa leaning on a stick MN i.88 AN i.138), in following phrases prevalent: Amata˚ SN v.217f.; tama˚ Pug 51 Nibbāna SN iv.373 SN v.218 brahmacariya˚ SN i.234 Maccu˚ SN v.217 sambodhi˚ DN i.156 DN ii.155 Pug 16 cp. also Snp 1114 (tap˚ = tad˚ ‣See Nd2 411) Mil 148 (ekantasoka˚) Dhp-a i.28 (rodana, i.e. constantly weeping). (b) destined to, having one’s next birth in., e.g. Avīci Ja iii.454 Ja iv.159 duggati˚ Pv-a 32 devaloka˚ Ja i.218 brahmaloka˚ Ja iii.396 Mil 234 sagga˚ Ja vi.329 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 160; sugati˚ Pv-a 89 similarly nīlamañca˚ Pv ii.25 ‣See also pārāyana
    from parā + i, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parāyaṇa e.g. Divy 57 Divy 327
    Parāyika
    1. ‣See sam˚
    Parāyin
    adjective
    1. having one’s refuge or resort (in), being supported, only negative aparāyinī feminine without support Ja iii.386
    2. from parāyana
    Pari˚
    1. ; indeclinable

      1. prefix, signifying (literally around, round about; (figuratively) all round, i.e. completely altogether. The use as preposition (with accusative = against, w ablative = from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but ‣See below 1a). As
      2. adverb “all round” it is only found at Ja vi.198 (parī metri causa; combined with samantato). The composition form before vowels is pariy˚; , which in combination with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil payir˚;. Frequent combinations with other preps. are pari + ā (pariyā˚) and pari + ava (pariyo˚); sampari˚; Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati → pariyesati, ajjhogāhati → pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp abhirādheti → paritoseti, abhitāpa → paritāpa, abhipīḷita → pari˚, abhipūreti → pari˚, abhirakkhati → pari˚), cp. also its relation to ā in various combinations
      3. Meanings. 1. (literally (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as preposition c. ablative: ˚kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, ˚cheda cutting off restriction, ˚puñchati wipe off
      4. (b) all round, round (explained by samantato, e.g. at Vism 271 in pallanka) ˚anta surrounded, ˚esati search round, ˚kiṇṇa covered all round (i.e. completely, cp. explanation as “samantato ākiṇṇa”), ˚carati move round, ˚jana surrounding people ˚dhāvati run about, ˚dhovati wash all round, ˚paleti watch all round, figuratively guard carefully, ˚bhamati roam about, ˚maṇḍala circular (round), ˚sā assembly (lit sitting round, of sad
      5. (figuratively) (a) quite, completely very much, : ˚ādāna consummation, ˚āpanna gone completely into, ˚odāta very pure, ˚osāna complete end, ˚gūhati to hide well, ˚toseti satisfy very much ˚pūreti fulfil, ˚bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, ˚yañña supreme sacrifice, ˚suddha extremely clean
      6. (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati˚ and adhi˚): ˚tāpeti torment excessively, ˚pakka over-ripe
      7. A derivation (
      8. adverb from pari is parito (q.v.) On its relation to Sanskrit pariṣ ‣See parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari˚ is pali˚; (q.v.)
      9. Note. The explanation of Pali Commentators as regards pari is “pariggahaṭṭho Ps i.176; “paricca” Snp-a 88 “parito” Vv-a 316 Pv-a 33
      Indogermanic *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sanskrit pṛ2 piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill ‣See also Pali para). cp. Vedic pari, Avestan pairi, Latin per (also in adj per-magnus very great); Old Bulgarian pariy round about Lithuanian per̃ through, Old Irish er-(intensifying prefix), Goth faír, Old High German fir, far = German ver-
    Parikaḍḍhati
    1. to draw over or towards oneself, to win over seduce DN ii.283 (purisaṁ) Mil 143 (janapadaṁ). cp. parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati
    pari + k˚, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parikaḍḍhati MVastu ii.255
    Parikaḍḍhana
    neuter
    1. drawing, dragging along Ja ii.78 Mil 154
    from preceding
    Parikati
    1. arrangement, preparation, getting up Ja v.203
    *parikṛti of kṛ; (?)
    Parikatta
    1. cut round, cut off Mil 188
    past participle of pari + kantati2; corresponds to Sanskrit kṛtta, which is usually represented in Pali by kanta2
    Parikathā
    feminine
    1. “round-about tale,” exposition, story, esp religious tale DN ii.204 Vism 41 (= pariyāya-kathā
    2. talk about, remark, hint Vin i.254 (cp. Vin Texts ii.154) Vb 353 = Vism 23 (with obhāsa nimitta) Snp-a 497
    3. continuous or excessive talk Vism 29.

      pari + kathā, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parikathā Divy 225 Divy 235
    Parikanta1
    1. cut open Vin iii.89 (kucchi p.) ‣See also parikatta & cp. Kern,; Toevoegselen s. v (misreading for ˚katta?)
    • Note. Reading parikantaṁ upāhanaṁ at Ja vi.51 is with variant reading to be changed to pariyantaṁ
    pari + kanta2 of kantati2
    Parikanta2
    at Vin ii.80 (bhāsita˚) is probably to be read as pārikata
    1. . Buddhaghosa explains as parik kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it from parikkamati Vinaya Texts iii.18 translation “as well in speech as in act” and identify it with parikanta1, hardly justified cp. also Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. The passage is evidently faulty
    past participle of parikaroti
    Parikantati1
    1. to wind round, twist Ja iii.185 (pāso pādaṁ p.; but taken by Commentary as parikantati2 explained as “cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati”)
    pari + kantati1
    Parikantati2
    1. to cut (round), cut through, pierce MN i.244 (vātā kucchiṁ p.) Ja iii.185 ‣See parikantati1
    pari + kantati2
    Parikappa
    1. preparation, intention, stratagem Thag 1, 940
    2. assumption, supposition, surmise AN i.197 AN v.271 Dhs-a 308
    from pari + kalp
    Parikappita
    1. inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp 362 Sdhp 602
    past participle of parikappati
    Parikamma
    neuter
    1. “doing round,” i.e. doing up, viz 1. arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin ii.106 (˚ṁ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka˚ plastering with red chalk) 151 (identical). parikammaṁ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism 395 and passim (with reference to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin ii.175 (bhūmi), as-"with,” viz. geruka˚ plastered with red chalk Vin i.48 ii.209; lākhā˚ Ja iii.183 Ja iv.256
    • su˚ beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Mil 62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana) Vv-a 188 In special sense used with reference to jhāna, as kasiṇa˚; processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation Ja i.141 iv.306; v.162, 193 Dhs-a 168 cp. Compendium 54 Dhp-a i.105–⁠2. service, attention, attending Vin i.47 Vin ii.106 220 SN i.76 Thag 2, 376 (= veyyāvacca Thag-a 253) Pug 56 Dhp-a i.96 333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. to a person, cp. Ja v.89 Dhp-a i.250 sarīra˚ attending the body DN-a i.45 186 Snp-a 52

      1. ˚kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person attendant; one who makes preparations Thag 2, 411 (f-ikā = paricārikā Thag-a 267) Ja i.232
      pari + kamma
    Parikara
    1. “doing round,” i.e. girdle, loincloth Ja iv.149 Dhp-a i.352
    • In compound ovāda˚ it is variant reading SS at DN i.137 for paṭikara (q.v.)
    from pari + kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with figuratively meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also explained by parivara cp. parikaroti = parivāreti
    Parikaroti
    1. to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. iv.405 (= parivāreti Commentary ); v.353 (identical), 381 vi.592. cp. parikara & parikkhāra
    pari + kṛ
    Parikassati
    1. to drag about SN i.44 cp. Dhs-a 68
    2. sweep away, carry away Dhp-a ii.275 (mah’ ogho viya parikassamāno, variant reading ˚kaḍḍhamāno)
    3. passive parikissati (q.v.)
    pari + kṛṣ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475 and parikaḍḍhati
    Parikiṇṇa
    1. scattered or strewn about, surrounded Ja iv.400 Ja vi.89 Ja vi.559 Pv i.61 (makkhikā˚ samantato ākiṇṇa Pv-a 32) Mil 168 Mil 285 DN-a i.45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). cp. sampari˚
    past participle of parikirati
    Parikittita
    1. declared, announced, made public Sdhp 601
    past participle of parikutteti
    Parikitteti
    1. to declare, praise, make public Mil 131 Mil 141 Mil 230 Mil 383 past participle parikittita (q.v.)
    2. pari + kitteti
    Parikirati
    1. to strew or scatter about, to surround SN i.185 = Th 1, 1210; aorist parikiri Ja vi.592 (variant reading for parikari ‣See parikaroti).
    2. past participle parikiṇṇa (q.v.)
    3. pari + kirati
    Parikiraṇa
    1. strewing about, translated “consecrating sites” DN i.12 (vatthu-kamma + vatthu˚; variant reading paṭi˚; explained at DN-a i.98 as “idañ c’ idañ ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma-karaṇaṁ”). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16 ‣See under parikkhā
    from pari + kirati
    Parikilanta
    1. tired out, exhausted Mil 303
    past participle of parikilamati
    Parikilamati
    1. to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted Ja v.417 Ja v.421 past participle parikilanta (q.v.)
    2. pari + kilamati
    Parikilissati
    1. to get stained or soiled; figuratively get into trouble or misery (?) ‣See parikissati
    pari + kilissati
    Parikilesa
    1. misery, calamity, punishment Thag-a 241 (for ˚klesa, q.v.)
    pari + kilesa
    Parikissati
    1. to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble SN i.39 (translation “plagues itself”) AN ii.177 iv.186 Snp 820 (variant reading Nd1 ˚kilissati; explained at Nd1 154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with variant readings kilissati pakirissati)
    most likely passive of parikassati; maybe
  • passive of kisa (= Sanskrit kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rhys Davids at Kindred Sayings 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati
  • Parikujati
    1. at Sdhp 145 meaning? cp. palikujjati
    Parikupita
    1. greatly excited, very much agitated AN ii.75 Mil 253
    past participle of pari + kup
    Parikeḷanā
    feminine
    1. adornment, adorning oneself, being fond of ornaments Nd2 5852 (variant reading parilepanā) DN-a i.286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vb id p. 351 parikeḷanā with variant reading parikelāsanā
    pari + keḷanā
    Parikopeti
    1. to excite violently Mil 253
    causative of pari + kup
    Parikkamana
    neuter
    1. walking about MN i.43 MN i.44 adjective sa˚; having (opportunity for) walking about i.e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma. AN v.262 (opposite a˚)
    pari + kram
    Parikkita
    1. at Ja v.74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari + ukṣ ‣See okkhita “sprinkled, strewn,” unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa
    Parikkiliṭṭha
    1. soiled, stained Vin ii.296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.); identical p at AN ii.56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin ii.295
    past participle of parikilissati
    Parikkha
    1. (—˚) ‣See parikkhā;
    Parikkhaka
    adjective
    1. investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd Pv-a 131 (lokiya˚ experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita)
    from parikkhati
    Parikkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. putting to the test, trying Sdhp 403 (sarīra˚, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? cp. parirakkhati)
    from parikkhati; cp. Classical Sanskrit parīkṣaṇa
    Parikkhata1
    1. wounded, hurt, grazed Ja iii.431 Pv-a 272 (a˚)
    past participle of pari + kṣan
    Parikkhata2
    1. made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned DN ii.217 MN iii.71 Mil 328
    past participle of *parikkharoti; cp. Sanskrit pariṣkṛta
    Parikkhatatā
    feminine
    1. “making up,” pretence, posing, sham Pug 19 (23) = Vb 351 (358)
    abstract from parikkhata2
    Parikkhati
    1. to look round, to inspect, investigate, examine AN i.162 (vaṇṇaṁ parikkhare 3rd plural ) ‣See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā
    2. pari + īkṣ
    Parikkhattiya
    1. read pāri˚ (= parikkhatatā) q.v
    *Parikkharoti
    1. literally to do all round, i.e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); past participle parikkhata2 (q.v.) ‣See also parikkhāra
    2. pariṣ + kṛ
    Parikkhaya
    1. exhaustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end DN i.156 MN i.453 MN iii.37f. SN i.2 SN i.90 SN i.152 SN v.461 AN i.100 AN i.299 ii.68; iii.46 (bhogā ˚ṁ gacchanti); iv.148, 350; Thag 1 929 Snp 374 Snp 749 Snp 1094 (= pahānaṁ etc. Nd2 412) Dhp 139 Ja i.290 Pv ii.615 Pug 16 17, 63 Mil 102 Dhp-a iv.140 (˚ṁ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear atthaṁ gacchati of Dhp 384) Thag-a 285 Pv-a 3 (dhanasannicayo ˚ṁ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq combined with pariyādāna (q.v.)
    from pari + kṣi2, cp. Epic Sanskrit parikṣaya
    Parikkhavant
    adjective
    1. circumspect, elever, experienced Ja iii.114
    from parikkhati
    Parikkhā
    feminine
    1. examination, investigation, circumspection prudence Ja iii.115 Nett 3, 4, 126 (cp. Index p. 276) Sdhp 532 (attha˚)
    from pari + īkṣ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu˚, ratna˚ etc. with which cp. Pali vatthu-parikirana
    Parikkhāra
    1. “all that belongs to anything,” make-up, adornment (so Nd2 585 bāhirā p. of the body)
    • (a) requisite, accessory equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin i.50 296 (˚colaka cloth required for water-strainers & bags, cp. ; Vinaya Texts ii.229); ii.150 (senāsana˚-dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); iv.249 sq., 284 DN i.128 137 (yaññassa p. = parivāra DN-a i.297) MN i.104 (jīvita˚) iii.11 SN ii.29 AN iv.62 (citt’ ālankāraṁ citta-parikkhār atthaṁ dānaṁ), 236 (identical) Ja iii.470 (sabba˚-sampannaṁ dānaṁ with all that belongs to it); v.232 Snp 307 Nd2 585; Nett 1 sq.; 4, 108 DN-a i.294 299 Dhp-a i.38 240 (geha˚), 352 (variant reading for parikara) Pv-a 81 (sabba˚)-saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i.e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā ‣See below DN ii.217 MN iii.71
    • (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the “set of necessaries” of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enum; d in stock phrase “cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-p.” i.e. robe, alms-bowl, seat & bed medicine as help in illness. Thus frequently found in Canon e.g. at Vin iii.132 DN iii.268 SN iv.288 SN iv.291 Nd2 523 (as 1st part of “yañña”); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts iii.343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites ‣See below) at Vin ii.267
    • Later we find another set of mendicants requisites designated as "aṭṭha parikkhārā,” the 8 requirements. They are enumerated in verse at Ja i.65 DN-a i.206 viz. ticīvaraṁ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya-bandhanaṁ, parissāvana, i.e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water-strainer. They are explained in detail DN-a i.206f. cp. also Ja iv.342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra-dhara); v.254 (kāyabandhana-parissāvanasūci-vāsi-satthakāni; the last-named article being “scissors” instead of a razor) Dhp-a ii.61 (˚dhara thera)
    • (c) In other combinations: satta nagara˚ AN iv.106f. (cp. nagarûpakārikā DN i.105); satta samādhi˚ DN ii.216 MN iii.71 AN iv.40 soḷasa˚
    • adjective of yañña having sixteen accessories DN i.134 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.174, 177) bahu˚ having a full equipment, i.e. being well-off Vin iii.138 Ja i.126
    • Note. AN set of 12 requisites (1–⁠8 as under b and 4 additional) ‣See detailed at DN-a i.207
    from *parikkharoti, cp. late Sanskrit pariṣkāra
    Parikkhārika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumeration of p. at DN-a i.204–⁠207
      from parikkhāra
    Parikkhiṇṇa
    1. at DN-a i.45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q.v.)
    Parikkhitta
    1. thrown round, overspread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by (—˚) MN iii.46 AN iv.106 (su˚) SN i.331 (read valligahana˚); Pv iv.336 (variant reading for pariyanta as in i.1013) Vism 71 (of gāma) Thag-a 70 Dhp-a i.42 (pākāra˚) Pv-a 52 (= pariyanta i.1013), 283 sāṇī-pākāra˚;); Sdhp 596
    past participle of parikkhipati
    Parikkhipati
    1. to throw round, encircle, surround Vin ii.154 Ja i.52 (sāṇiṁ), 63, 150, 166; ii.104 iii.371 Dhp-a i.73 past participle parikkhitta (q.v.)

      • Caus II. parikkhipāpeti Ja i.148 (sāṇiṁ); ii.88 (sāṇi-pākāraṁ)
      pari + kṣip
    Parikkhīṇa
    1. exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin iv.258 MN iii.80 SN i.92 SN ii.24 SN v.145, 461 DN iii.97 DN iii.133 (˚bhava-saṁyojana) Iti 79 (identical) AN iv.418 AN iv.434 (āsavā) Snp 175 Snp 639 Snp 640 Dhp 93 Pug 11 14 Mil 23 (˚āyuka) Pv-a 112 (˚tiṇodak’ āhāra)
    past participle of parikkhīyati
    Parikkhīṇatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DN-a i.128 (jīvitassa) Pv-a 63 (kammassa), 148 (identical)
    abstract of parikkhīṇa
    Parikkhīyati
    1. to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Thag 2, 347 (= parikkhayaṁ gacchati Thag-a 242). past participle parikkhīṇa (q.v.)
    2. pari + khīyati of kṣi2
    Parikkhepa
    1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin iv.304 Ja i.338 Ja iv.266 Snp-a 29 (˚dāru etc.)
    2. circumference Ja i.89 Ja v.37 Vism 205; Kp-a 133 Snp-a 194
    3. “closing in on, i.e. fight, quarrel Iti 11 12.

      from pari + kṣip
    Pariklesa
    1. hardship, misery, calamity SN i.132 = Th 2, 191 Thag 2, 345 (= parikilesa Thag-a 241)
    pari + klesa
    Parikhā
    feminine
    1. a ditch, trench, moat Vin ii.154 DN i.105 (ukkiṇṇa-parikha adj with trenches dug deep, combined with okkhittapaligha explained by khāta-parikha ṭhapita-paligha at DN-a i.274) MN i.139 (sankiṇṇa˚ adjective with trenches filled, epithet of an Arahant, combined with ukkhittapaligha) = AN iii.84f. Nd2 284 C (spelt kkh) AN iv.106 (nagara˚) Ja i.240 Ja i.490 iv.106 (ukkiṇṇ’ antaraparikha); vi.276, 432; cp. II.13 (spelt kkh) Mil 1 (gambhīra˚) Snp-a 519 (˚taṭa) Pv-a 201 (˚piṭṭhe), 261 (identical), 278 (identical, variant reading ˚parikkhāṭa-tīre)
    from pari + khan, cp. Epic Sanskrit parikhā
    Parigaṇhana
    neuter
    1. comprehension Ja ii.7 (˚paññā comprehensive wisdom)
    from parigaṇhāti
    Parigaṇhāti
    1. (& Pariggaheti causative )

      1. to embrace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up MN i.80 137 Ja iii.189 DN-a i.45
      2. to catch, grasp Dhp-a i.68
      3. to go all round Dhp-a i.91 (sakala-jambudīpaṁ).

        • causative ˚ggaheti (
        • aorist ˚esi, absolutive ˚etvā, infinitive ˚etuṁ 1. to embrace, comprehend, figuratively master Vin ii.213 Ja ii.28 Ja iii.332 Snp-a 549 (mantāya) Dhp-a iii.242 Pv-a 68 (hattesu), 93 Vv-a 75
        • to explore, examine find out, search Ja i.162 Ja ii.3 Ja iii.85 Ja iii.268 (˚ggahetuṁ), 533; v.93, 101 Dhp-a ii.56
        • causative II. parigaṇhāpeti Ja i.290

      4. to comprise, summarise Kp-a 166, 167.

        • past participle pariggahita (q.v.)
        pari + gṛh
    Parigalati
    1. to sink down, slip or glide off Ja iv.229 Ja iv.250 Ja v.68
    pari + galati ‣See gaḷati
    Parigilati
    1. to swallow Ja i.346
    pari + gilati
    Parigūhati
    1. to hide, conceal AN i.149 AN iv.10 AN iv.31 Pv iii.43 (= paṭicchādeti Pv-a 194)
    pari + gūhati
    Parigūhanā
    feminine
    1. hiding, concealment, deception Pug 19 23
    from patigūhati
    Pariggaha
    1. wrapping round, enclosing Thag 1, 419 (? cp. Psalms of the Brethren 217 note 6)
    2. taking up seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of “grasping” Snp 779 (= taṇhā and diṭṭhi˚ Nd1 57) Ps i.172; ii.182 (nekkhamma˚ etc.) Nd1 11 (itthi acquiring a wife) Ja vi.259 Mil 244 (āhara˚ abstinence in food), 313 (identical)
    3. belongings, property possessions DN ii.58 DN iii.289 = AN iv.400 MN i.137 (quoted at Nd1 122) SN i.93 Snp 805 Ja iv.371 Ja vi.259 Pv-a 76 (˚bhūta belonging to, the property of) Vv-a 213 321 sa˚; with all (its) belongings SN i.32

      • a wife Thag-a 271 Pv-a 161 (kata˚ wedded), 282 Thag-a 271 sapariggaha → apariggaha married → unmarried (in general with reference to the man as well as the woman) DN i.247 Ja iv.190 Ja vi.348 Ja vi.364

    4. grace, favour DN-a i.241 (āmisa˚ material grace).

      from pari + gṛh
    Pariggahita
    1. taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin iii.51 (manussānaṁ p. by men) iv.31, 278 Dhp-a i.13 (amanussa˚ by ghosts) Pv-a 87 Pv-a 133; Sdhp 64. feminine abstr, ˚tā being possessed (Vism 121 (amanussa˚)
    2. past participle of parigaṇhāti
    Pariggāhaka
    adjective
    1. including, occupying Nett 79 (= upathambhaka Commentary as quoted in Index p. 276)
    from pariggaha
    Parigha
    1. a cross-bar Thag-a 211 (˚daṇḍa)
    Vedic parigha, of which the usual Pali representative is paligha (q.v.)
    Parighaṁsati
    1. to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaṁsanto Vin i.46 Vin ii.208
    pari + ghaṁsati1
    Paricakkhitar
    1. one who looks round or enquires, negative a˚ Ja v.77
    agent noun from pari + cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu
    Paricaya
    1. familiarity, acquaintance Ja vi.337 Vism 153 Pv-a 74 adjective (—˚) acquainted with, versed in (
    2. locative ) Ja ii.249 (jāta˚), Vv-a 24 (kata˚) Pv-a 4 (identical) 129 (identical)
    3. from pari + ci
    Paricaraṇa
    neuter
    1. going about, mode of life Dhp-a i.382 (gihīnaṁ ˚ṭṭhānaṁ, variant reading for vicaraṇa˚). 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping Dhp-a i.199 (aggi-p˚-ṭṭhāna fire-place)
    2. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaṁ) Pv-a 16 ‣See also paricāraṇā
    from pari + car
    Paricaraṇaka
    1. servant, attendant DN-a i.269
    from paricaraṇa
    Paricarati
    1. to move about, in various senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after AN iii.94 (upaṭṭhahati + Ja v.421 Pv-a 175
    • to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) DN i.101 SN i.166 Dhp 107 Ja i.494 Snp p. 79 (= payirupāsati Snp-a 401)

  • to roam about, to feast one’s senses, to amuse oneself play, sport Pv-a 77 (indriyāni = kīḷāmi Pv ii.121)

    • We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e.g. at Dhp-a ii.232 cp. paricāreti for ˚hāreti Pv-a 175 paricaraṇā for ˚haraṇā Pv-a 219
    • past participle pariciṇṇa; Caus paricāreti (q.v.)
    pari + carati
  • Paricariyā
    feminine
    1. going about, service, ministration, worship SN i.182 AN i.132 Dhp-a ii.232
    • aggi˚) Occurs also as pāricariyā (q.v.), e.g. at Ja v.154 ‣See also paricārikā
    from paricarati
    Paricāra
    from
    1. serving, attendance; masculine servant, attendant Thag 1, 632 (Commentary on this stanza for paddhagū)
    2. paricāreti
    Paricāraka
    adjective-noun
    1. attending, serving honouring; masculine attendant, worshipper, follower (cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paricāraka attendant Avs i.170; ii.167] DN i.101 ii.200 Thag 1, 475 Snp p. 218 (Nd2 reads ˚cārika) Ja i.84 Ja iv.362 Pv iv.87 (not ˚vāraka) DN-a i.137 269 ‣See also paricārika
    2. from paricāreti
    Paricāraṇā
    feminine
    1. care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv ii.12 (gloss for ˚cārika) Pv-a 219
    from paricāreti
    Paricārika
    adjective-noun = paricāraka (servant, attendant). AN v.263 (aggi˚ fire-worshipper); Pv ii.620 (amacca minister & attendant) Thag-a 267 Snp-a 597
    • feminine ˚carikā (1) a maid-servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal attendant MN i.253 cp. SN i.125 Ja i.204
    • pāda˚), 291 ii.395; iv.35 (veyyāvacca-kārikā p.), 79; v.420; Pv ii.126 (= veyyāvacca-kārinī Pv-a 157) Pv-a 46

      • (2 care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv iv.12 (= indriyānaṁ pariharaṇā Pv-a 219 gloss ˚cāraṇā
    Paricārita
    1. served by; delighted by, indulging in MN i.504
    past participle of paricāreti
    Paricārin
    adjective noun
    1. serving, attending, feminine a maid-servant Ja ii.395
    from paricāreti
    Paricāreti
    1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paricārayati Divy 114f. 421
      1. SN i.124 (pāde) Dhp-a iii.196 (identical) Ja i.81 (˚cāritabba-ṭṭhāna place of worship); iv.274; v.9. passive paricāriyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna MN i.46 MN i.504 Ja i.58 In this sense it may also be taken as “being delighted or entertained by.”
      2. to amuse oneself, gratify one’s senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paricārayati Divy 1 and frequently phrase pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samangibhūtā p. e.g. MVastu i.32 Vin ii.290 Vin iii.72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.) DN i.36 (identical), 104 (identical) MN i.504 (identical) Thag 1, 96 (saggesu) Pv i.116 (= yathā sukkhaṁ cārenti indriyāni Pv-a 58) iv.129 (read ˚cārayanti for ˚vārayanti, cp. Pv-a 228 indriyāni p.).
      3. past participle paricārita q.v ‣See also parivāreti
      causative of paricarati
    Pariciṇṇa
    1. surrounded, attended Ja v.90
    2. worshipped MN i.497 SN iv.57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Thag 1, 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā)
    3. practised, performed Mil 360

      pari + ciṇṇa, past participle of carati
    Paricita1
    1. gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented MN iii.97 SN i.116 SN ii.264 SN iv.200 AN ii.67f. 185; iii.45, 152 iv.282, 300; v.23 Thag 1, 647 Ps i.172 (explained) Pv-a 67 Sdhp 409
    past participle of pari + ci, cinoti, Pali cināti
    Paricita2
    1. known, scrutinized, accustomed acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin ii.95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi˚ etc. read aggiparijita) Thag-a 52 Mil 140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs iv.19
    • aparicita unfamiliar Dhp-a i.71
    past participle of pari + ci, ciketi, Pali cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita1
    Paricumbati
    1. to kiss (all round, i.e. from all sides), to cover with kisses MN ii.120 SN i.178 SN i.193 AN iv.438 Dhp-a i.330
    pari + cumbati
    Paricca
    indeclinable
    1. literally “going round,” i.e. having encircled grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving frequently in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one’s mind, e.g. at DN i.79 MN i.445 MN iii.12 SN ii.121 SN ii.233 Iti 12 Vb 329 Vism 409 (= paricchinditvā) ‣See pariyeti
    absolutive of pari + i, cp. Sanskrit ( absolutive ) parītya & Pali pariyeti
    Pariccajati
    1. to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject SN i.44 Iti 94 Ja ii.335 Ja vi.259 (= chaḍḍeti) Mil 207 Dhp-a iv.204 Pv-a 121 Pv-a 132 Pv-a 221 (read jīvitaṁ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit jīvitaṁ parityakṣyāmi Avs i.210); Sdhp 539. past participle pariccatta (q.v.)
    2. pari + cajati of tyaj
    Pariccajana
    neuter & ˚nā
    • feminine

      1. giving up, rejection, leaving Iti 11 12
      2. giving out, bestowing giving a donation Pv-a 124
      from pariccajati
    Pariccajanaka
    1. one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor Pv-a 7
    from preceding
    Pariccatta
    1. given up abandoned, thrown out, left behind Ja i.69 Ja i.174 Ja i.477 Mil 280 Pv-a 178 Pv-a 219 (= virādhita); Sdhp 374
    past participle of pariccajati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parityakta in meaning “given to the poor” Avs i.3
    Pariccāga
    1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation AN i.92 (āmisa˚ & dhamma material & spiritual); Ps ii.98 Ja i.12 (jīvita˚) Dhp-a iii.441 (pañca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices i.e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife of children, of kingdom, of life and limb)
    2. expense Dhp-a ii.231
    3. sahassa˚ expenditure of a thousand coins)
    4. giving (to the poor), liberality Dhs-a 157 Snp-a 295 (mahā˚, corresponding to mahādāna) Pv-a 7f. 27, 120 sq., 124.

      from pariccajati
    Paricchada
    1. a cover, covering Ja i.341 Ja i.466
    from pari + chad
    Paricchanna
    1. enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin iv.17
    pari + channa, past participle of chad
    Paricchāta
    1. very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp 102 (˚odara-ttaca)
    pari + chāta
    Paricchādanā
    feminine
    1. covering, hiding, concealing Pug 19 = 23 = Vb 358
    from pari + chad
    Paricchindati
    1. to mark out Vv-a 291 (vasana-ṭṭhānaṁ)
    2. to determine, to fix accurately to decide Ja i.170 (padaṁ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaṁ); iii.371; iv.77 Mil 272 Vism 184, 409 Snp-a 434 (paññāya p.)
    3. to limit, restrict, define Mil 131 DN-a i.132

      • past participle paricchinna (q.v.)
      pari + chindati
    Paricchindana
    neuter
    1. “cutting up,” definition, analysis Vv-a 114
    from paricchindati
    Paricchindanaka
    adjective
    1. marking out, defining, analysing, Dhs-a 157 (ñāṇa)
    from pari + chind
    Paricchinna
    1. restricted, limited, small Dhp-a i.58 Pv-a 136 (˚ppamāṇa)
    2. divided measured Vism 184 Pv-a 185 (= mita)
    past participle of paricchindati
    Pariccheda
    1. exact determination, circumscription range, definition, connotation, measure Ja iii.371 Vism 184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life-principle) Snp-a 160 229 231, 376, 408, 503; Kp-a 182 (gaṇana˚) Vv-a 194 (identical) Dhs-a 3 Dhp-a ii.73 (avadhi˚) Pv-a 254 (kāla˚), 255 (āyuno p.) Vb-a 417 (citta˚, for citta-paricce ñãṇa Vb 330)
    2. limit, boundary Mil 131 Mil 405 Ja iii.504 (˚nadī-tīra)
    3. limitation, restriction Dhp-a ii.88 98 Pv-a 20 (˚ṁ karoti to restrict).

      • division (of time), in ratti˚ & divā˚; , night-& day-division Vism 416

    4. (town)-planning, designing Vb-a 331

      from pari + chid; late Sanskrit (philosophical) in same meaning
    Paricchedaka
    adjective
    1. determining, fixing Vb-a 346 (uṭṭhāna-velā ˚ā saññā)
    from pariccheda
    Parijana
    1. “the people round,” i.e. attendants, servants, retinue, suite Vin i.15 Ja i.72 Ja i.90 Dhp-a iii.188 Vv-a 63 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 62
    • saparijana with one’s servants cp. ii.82 (Text saparijjana metri causâ)
    pari + jana
    Parijapati
    1. to mutter (spells), to practise divination Ja iii.530 Mil 200 (vijjaṁ)
    pari + japati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parijapta enchanted Divy 397
    Parijapana
    neuter
    1. mumbling, uttering spells Mil 356 (mantaṁ)
    from parijapati
    Parijānanā
    feminine
    1. cognition, recognition, knowledge Nett 20 (as paraphrase of pariññā)
    pari + jānanā = jānana
    Parijānāti
    1. to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out MN i.293 SN i.11 SN i.24 SN ii.45 SN ii.99 SN iii.26, 40, 159; iv.50; v.52, 422 AN iii.400f. Snp 202 Snp 254 Snp 943 Nd1 426 Ja iv.174 Thag 1, 226 Mil 69 Dhp-a iv.233 ˚jānitvā)
    • ppr. parijānaṁ SN iii.27 SN iv.89 Iti 3f.
    • past participle pariññāta (q.v.)
    • absolutive pariññāya ‣See under pariññā1
    pari + jānāti
    Parijiṇṇa
    1. worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced Ja i.111 (seṭṭhi-kulaṁ p.); v.99, 100 (bhoga˚); vi.364 Dhp 148 Dhp-a ii.272 (˚kula)
    past participle of pari + jar, i.e. decayed; Kern Toevoegselen s.v. proposes reading ˚jīna of ji, i.e. wasted ‣See parijīyati
    Parijita
    1. [ past participle of pari + ji, jayati; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. proposes reading parijīta, Sanskrit form of Pali parijīna, past participle of pari jīyati, but hardly necessary ‣See also Vinaya Texts iii.75 overpowered, injured, damaged Vin ii.109 (so read for paricita).

    Parijīyati
    1. to become worn out, to decay, fade, SN i.186 Ja iv.111 Spelt ˚jiyyati at Thag 1, 1215 past participle parijīna ‣See parijiṇṇa
    2. pari + jīyati
    Parijegucchā
    feminine
    1. intense dislike of, disgust with (—˚) DN i.25 cp. DN-a i.115
    pari + jegucchā
    Parijjanā
    1. is doubtful reading at AN iii.38 (variant reading parivajjanā) = iv.266 (Text reads parijjana, cp. parijana; variant readings parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?
    Pariñña
    (—˚)
    1. knowing, recognising, understanding Iti 44 (bhūta˚ so, or should we read bhūtapariññāya?); also in compound pariññacārin (to be explained as shortened absolutive pariññā?) Snp 537 (= paññāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge i.e. rightly determining); also abstract pariññatthaṁ at Iti 29 (abhiññatthaṁ +), cp. SN iv.253
    2. the adjective form of pariññā, cp. abhiñña
    Pariññā1
    feminine
    1. accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension full understanding MN i.66 MN i.84 SN iii.26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā˚ moha˚ ayaṁ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; iv.16, 51 138, 206, 253 sq.; v.21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292 AN i.277 (kāmānaṁ rūpānaṁ vedanānaṁ), 299; v.64 Pug 37 Nett 19, 20, 31; Kp-a 87 Snp-a 251
    • In exegetical literature three pariññās are distinguished viz. ñāta˚, tīraṇa˚ pahāna˚, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts ‣See e.g. the detailed interpretation at Nd; 1 52 sq. Nd2 413 Ja vi.259 (where ñāṇa˚ for ñāta˚) Dhp-a ii.172 (in reference to food); mentioned at Snp-a 517
    • adjective pariñña -The form pariññāya is an apparent instrumental, but in reality (in form & meaning) the
    • absolutive of parijānāti (like abhiññāya → abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā It is frequently found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaṁ p.); its meaning is “knowing well in right knowledge”: SN v.182 Snp 455 Snp 737 Snp 778 (= parijānitvā Nd1 51f.), 1082 (corresponding with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā Dhp-a iv.232) Iti 62 Ja vi.259
    cp. Epic Sanskrit parijñāna; the form parijñā given by BR only with the one reference Vyutp. 160; from pari + jñā
    Pariññā2
    indeclinable
    1. having full knowledge or understanding of Snp 779 (= parijānitvā Nd; 1 56 & Snp-a 518) Iti 4 (perhaps to be read pariññāya for pariññā so)
    absolutive of parijānāti for *parijñāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiññā
    Pariññāta
    1. well understood, thoroughly known Thag 2, 106 MN i.1f. SN ii.99 SN v.182 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 287 With reference to food (˚bhojana & ˚āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariññās (q.v.) Dhp 92 (˚bhojano adjective one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. Dhp-a ii.172) Mil 352 (˚āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow MN i.293
    past participle of parijānāti
    Pariññātatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having full or exact knowledge SN v.182
    abstract from pariññāta
    Pariññātāvin
    adjective
    1. one who has correct knowledge SN iii.159f. 191 (puggala)
    from pariññāta
    Pariññeyya
    adjective
    1. knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) MN i.4 SN iii.26 SN iv.29 Dhp-a iv.233 (cp. Nd2 under abhiññeyya)
    gerundive of parijānāti
    Pariḍahati
    1. to burn: passive pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched MN i.422 SN i.188 = Th 1, 1224 AN i.137 AN iii.95 AN iii.98 Snp 63 Ps i.128 (ḷ) Pv i.64 (= parito jhāyati Pv-a 33) Mil 303 Pv-a 60 cp. pariḷāha
    2. pari + ḍadati
    Pariṇata
    1. bent down, crooked Vv-a 222 (˚dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean “long"?)
    2. changed SN iii.40
    3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe Ja iii.174 Ja iii.286 Ja iii.431 Vv-a 288 Dhp-a i.47 (gabbha).

      past participle of pariṇamati
    Pariṇamati
    1. to change (trs. & intransitive), literally to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (
    2. accusative ) SN iii.3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi˚, cp. p. 40) Mil 136 (bhojanaṁ visamaṁ p food changes, i.e. turns bad), 277 (identical) Vv-a 13 Pv-a 144 (for parivattati Pv ii.105), 194 (identical iii.44)
    3. to change into a different state, to ripen, mature (often said of the foetus) Mil 93 Mil 358
    4. past participle pariṇata (q.v.)
    5. causative pariṇāmeti (q.v.)
    pari + namati
    Pariṇāma
    1. “bending round,” i.e. 1. change, alteration in utu˚; (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with reference to illnesses caused by such (˚ja ābādhā) = illness arising from the change of season AN ii.87 AN iii.131 AN v.110 Nd2 3041 Mil 112 Mil 135f. 304; Vism 31
    • alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā-pariṇāmaṁ gacchati MN i.188 SN i.168 AN iii.30 cp. MVastu i.211

  • ripening Mil 93 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense dispensation, destiny Ja v.171 Pv iv.325 Pv-a 252 Pv-a 254-cp. vi˚.

    from pari + nam, cp. class Sanskrit pariṇāma in all meanings
  • Pariṇāmana
    neuter
    1. diverting to somebody’s use Vin iv.157
    from parinamati
    Pariṇāmita
    1. bent down Ja vi.269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, Commentary explains as “entangled”)
    2. issued, apportioned, destined Ja v.171 Pv-a 254
    past participle of pariṇāmeti
    Pariṇāmitar
    1. one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny Ja vi.189
    agent noun of pariṇāmeti
    Pariṇāmin
    adjective
    1. ending in, resulting in (—˚) MN i.11 MN i.526 MN iii.88
    from pariṇāma
    Pariṇāmeti
    1. to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain appropriate DN i.92 Vin iii.259 (puttassa rajjaṁ p. for his son); iv.156 Pv-a 281
    • ppr. ˚ṇāmayamāna Ja v.424 ‣See also āvajjeti.
    • past participle pariṇāmita (q.v.)
    causative of parinamati
    Pariṇāyaka
    1. a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Buddhaghosa on DN ii.177 the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211 Divy 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i.e. a wonderful Adviser DN i.89 DN ii.17 DN ii.177 MN i.220 MN ii.175 AN iii.151 Snp p. 106 (cp. Snp-a 450 = DN-a i.250) Ja i.155 Ja iv.93 Mil 38 Mil 314 feminine pariṇāyikā. epithet of wisdom, synonymous with paññā, i.e. insight, cleverness Dhs 1057 Pug 25 Vism 3 Dhs-a 148
    2. from pari + ni, cp. pariṇeti
    Pariṇāha
    1. com passive circumference, breadth, extent, girth SN ii.206 (of the moon) = AN v.19 Ja iii.192 277, 370; v.299 Pug 53 Mil 282 Mil 311 Snp-a 382 (āroha +)
    2. from pari + nah
    Pariṇeti
    1. to lead round or about SN ii.128
    pari + neti
    Paritajjita
    1. scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp 147
    pari + tajjita
    Paritatta
    1. tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Mil 313
    past participle of paritappati
    Paritappati
    1. to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Thag 2, 313 (= santappati Thag-a 233) Mil 313 past participle paritatta (q.v.)
    2. passive of pari + tap
    Paritasita
    neuter
    1. worry, excitement DN i.40 (variant reading ˚tassita, cp. Dial i.53). Paritassati (tasati)
    pari + tasita1 or tasita2
    Paritassati (˚tasati)
    1. to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried DN ii.68 MN i.36 MN i.67 MN i.151 SN ii.82 SN ii.194 SN iii.43 SN iii.55 SN iv.23 SN iv.65 SN iv.168 AN ii.27 AN iii.133f. Snp 621 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Snp-a 467 thus combining tasati1 & tasati; 2), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd1 373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya thus taken as tasati2) Mil 253 Mil 400 Dhp 397 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Dhp-a iv.159); Sdhp 476
    • ppr aparitassaṁ DN ii.68 MN i.67 SN ii.82 SN iii.55 Iti 94
    • past participle paritasita (q.v.)
    pari + tasati1, in form clearly = Sanskrit paritṛṣyati, but frequently confused with tasati2, cp. tasa Snp 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2
    Paritassanā
    feminine
    1. trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing DN i.17 (= ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DN-a i.111) MN i.136 iii.227 SN iii.15f. 133 Mil 253 Mil 400
    • negative SN iii.15 MN i.136
    from paritassati, q.v. for meaning
    Paritassin
    adjective
    1. trembling, excited, worrying, only negative AN iv.108 AN iv.111 AN iv.230f.
    from paritassati
    Paritāpa
    1. = following Mil 313 (ātāpa +)
    Paritāpana
    neuter
    1. tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification MN i.78 MN i.341–⁠344 AN i.151 AN i.296 ii.205 sq. (atta˚ self-mortification, opposite para˚) Pug 55 56, 61 Pv-a 18 (atta˚), 30 (identical). Often combined with ātāpana (q.v.)
    pari + tāpana, of tap
    Paritāpeti
    1. to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment MN i.341 (ātāpeti +), 506 SN iv.337 AN iii.54 AN iii.380 Ja v.420 (mā paritāpi)
    pari + tapeti
    Parituleti
    1. to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism 522
    • Vb-a 130
    pari + tuleti
    Parito
    adverb
    1. round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin ii.194 Snp-a 393 Vv-a 316 Pv-a 33
    from pari, cp. Sanskrit paritaḥ
    Paritoseti
    1. to please, appease, satisfy, make happy Ja i.262 Ja iii.386 Ja v.216 Pv-a 213 (variant reading SS āsiñcati)
    pari + toseti
    Paritta1
    adjective
    1. small, little, inferior, insignificant limited, of no account, trifling Vin i.270 DN i.45 MN iii.148 (˚ābha of limited splendour, opposite appamāṇ’ ābha) SN ii.98 SN iv.160 (opposite adhimatta) AN iv.241 v.63 Iti 71 Snp 61 Snp 390 (˚pañña of inferior wisdom, cp. Nd2 415), 1097 (identical) Ja i.221 Dhs 181 584, 1018, 1034 (cp. Dhs translation 265, 269) DN-a i.119 Kp-a 133 (˚dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 do.) Pv-a 198 Sdhp 251 Sdhp 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd2 414; catukka Nd2 415 (opposite mahā); appaka Pv-a 48 Pv-a 60; appama taka Pv-a 262 ittara Pv-a 60 oma Snp-a 347 oraka Snp-a 489 lāmaka Snp-a 347
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parītta, pari +
  • past participle of in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388 whereas Pali paritta means trifling. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form parītta (e.g. Divy 204 Divy 498, 504; Avs i.329; ii.137) may be a re-translation of Pali paritta, which may correspond to Sanskrit prarikta, pp of pra + ric, meaning “that which is exceeded,” i.e. left (over or behind)
  • Paritta2
    1. neuter & Parittā feminine

      1. protection, safeguard; (protective charm, palliative, amulet Vin ii.110 (atta˚ feminine personal protection) iv.305 (gutt’ atthāya ˚ṁ pariyāpuṇāti) AN ii.73 (rakkhā + parittā) Ja i.200 (manto + parittaṁ vaḍḍhiṁ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi ˚ṁ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); iv.31 (osadhaṁ vā ˚ṁ vā) Mil 150 (
      2. feminine &
      3. neuter )

        • Various parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism 414 (Khandha˚ Dhajagga˚: SN i.218f.; Āṭānāṭiya˚: DN iii.195f. Mora˚: Ja ii.33). Cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.185
        1. ˚vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet Ja i.396 399
        2. ˚suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm Ja i.396 Ja i.399
        from pari + trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna
    Parittaka
    1. small, insignificant, little Nd1 306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd2 414) Pv i.1011 ii.967 Mil 121 (a˚), 253 DN-a i.170 (for appa) Pv-a 51 Sdhp 42. feminine parittikā Thag 1, 377
    2. paritta1 + ka
    Parittāṇa
    neuter
    1. protection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety DN i.9 (sara from an arrow, i.e. a shield); iii.189 Ja vi.455 Pv-a 284 Sdhp 396
    1. ˚kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin ii.152 cp. Vin Texts iii.174
    pari + tāṇa. cp. Epic Sanskrit paritrāṇa
    Parittāyaka
    adjective
    1. safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angāra-vassaṁ p. thero)
    from pari + tāyati
    Parittāsin
    adjective
    1. being in dread of (—˚) SN i.201
    pari + tāsin, from tāsa of tasati2
    Paridaṇḍa
    adjective
    1. “with a stick around,” i.e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. “saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi” a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women MN i.286 = iii.46 = Vin iii.139 = AN v.264 Vv-a 73
    pari + daṇḍa
    Paridamana
    neuter
    1. controlling, taming Vism 375
    pari + damana
    Paridameti
    1. to control, tame, keep under Vism 376
    pari + dameti
    Paridahati
    1. to put round, put on, clothe Dhp 9 (future ˚dahessati) Ja ii.197 Ja v.434 (ger ˚dahitvā); vi.500; Pv ii.118 Pv-a 76 (vatthāni), 77 127 (˚dahissati for paridhassati Pv ii.936, which read for Text parivassati).
    2. absolutive also paridayha Ja v.400 (= nivāsetvā cp. pārupitvā ca Commentary ).
    3. past participle paridahita (q.v.)
    4. causative II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed Pv-a 49 (= acchādeti)
    5. pari + dahati, of dhā
    Paridahita
    1. put round, put on (of clothing) Pv-a 43
    past participle of paridahati
    Paridīpaka
    adjective
    1. illuminating, explaining, explanatory Snp-a 40
    from paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka1
    Paridīpana
    neuter
    1. illuminating, elucidating, explanation Mil 318 Kp-a 111 Snp-a 394f.
    pari + dīpana
    Paridīpanā
    feminine
    1. explanation, illustration Mil 131
    from paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana
    Paridīpita
    1. in flames, set ablaze Thag 2, 200 (= punappunaṁ ādīpitatāya p. Thag-a 170),
    2. explained made clear, illuminated Vism 58; KvuA 8 Sdhp 305
    past participle of paridīpeti
    Paridīpeti
    1. to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Mil 131 Sdhp 491. past participle paridīpita (q.v.)
    2. pari + dīpeti
    Paridūseti
    1. to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp 409
    pari + dūseti
    Parideva
    1. lamentation, wailing MN i.200 SN ii.1 SN iii.3f. AN i.144 AN ii.195 Snp 328 Snp 592 Snp 811 Snp 923 Snp 969 Ja i.146 vi,188, 498 Nd1 128 134, 370, 492; Ps i.11 sq., 38 59, 65 Vb 100 137; Nett 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at DN ii.306 = Nd2 416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṁ paridevitattaṁ; often combined with soka grief, e.g. at DN i.36 Snp 862 Iti 89 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 61
    • Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.121 explains it as “sokaṁ nissita-lālappana-lakkhaṇo p.”
    pari + deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sanskrit (Mbhār. vii.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.
    Paridevati
    1. to wail, lament DN ii.158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha) Snp 582 Snp 774 = Nd1 38 (as ˚devayati), 166 Ja vi.188 Ja vi.498 Pv-a 18 (socati +); absolutive ˚devamāna SN i.199 SN i.208 Ja v.106 Pv-a 38 & ˚devayamāna Snp 583
    2. gerundive ˚devaniya Nd; 1 492 Snp-a 573 ˚devaneyya Snp 970 (= ādevaneyya Nd; 1 493)

      • pp paridevita (q.v.)
      pari + devati, div
    Paridevanā
    feminine = parideva, Snp 585 Nd2 416 ‣See under parideva Pv i.43 (= vācā-vippalāpa Pv-a 18); i.123 Pv-a 41
    Paridevita
    neuter
    1. lamentation, wailing Snp 590 Pv i.123 (= ruditaṁ Pv-a 63) Mil 148 (kanditap.˚-lālappita-mukha)
    past participle of paridevati
    Paridevitatta
    neuter
    1. lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in explanation of parideva at DN ii.306 = Nd2 416
    abstract from paridevita
    Pariddava
    1. = parideva MN i.56 (soka˚) AN i.221 Thag 2, 345 (soka˚) Snp 1052 cp. Nd2 416 ‣See parideva
    according to Trenckner MN i.532 (on MN i.56 where SS read p., whereas Burmese manuscripts have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not = Sanskrit paridrava, which is only a late re-translation of the Pali word
    Paridhaṁsaka
    adjective
    1. destructive, ruinous Pv-a 15 (˚vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger)
    from paridhaṁsati
    Paridhaṁsati
    1. to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin Iti 90 Mil 249 Mil 265 causative paridhaṁseti in same meaning at Nd1 5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati
    2. pari + dhaṁsati
    Paridhāvati
    1. to run about Ja i.127 (ādhāvati +), 134 (identical), 158 (identical); ii.68 (identical) = Thag-a 54 v.106
    pari + dhāvati
    Paridhota
    1. washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified DN i.124
    past participle of paridhovati
    Paridhovati
    1. to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin i.302 past participle paridhota
    2. pari + dhovati
    Pariniṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. end Pv-a 287 - 2. accomplishment Ja v.400
    2. pari + niṭṭhāna
    Pariniṭṭhāpeti
    1. to bring to an end, attain, accomplish Dhs-a 363
    pari + niṭṭhāpeti
    Pariniṭṭhita
    adjective
    1. accomplished MN iii.53 Thag 2, 283 Dhp-a ii.78
    pari + niṭṭhita
    Parininna
    adjective
    1. deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp 103
    pari + ninna
    Parinipphanna
    adjective
    1. predetermined Kvu 459 (variant reading ˚nibbāna), 626 (a˚); cp. Kvu trsl. 2616 3681
    pari + nipphanna
    Parinibbāna
    neuter
    1. “complete Nibbāna” in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i.e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration death (after the last life-span of an Arahant). This is the so-called “an-upādi-sesa Parinibbāna,” or “extinction with no rebirth-substratum left.”
    • release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well-being or peace of soul. This is the so-called “sa-upādisesa-P.,” or “extinction (of passion) with some substratum left."-The two kinds are distinguished by Buddhaghosa at Dhp-a ii.163 as follows “arahatta-pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa-vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesena, carima-citta-nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā an-upādi-sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibbānehi parinibbutā, an-upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattika-bhāvaṁ gatā.”
    1. -1. DN ii.72f. (the famous Mahā-parinibbāna-suttanta or “Book of the Great Decease”) MN iii.127 MN iii.128 AN ii.79 (˚samaye) iii.409 (˚dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika cp. Dhp-a iv.42); Mhvs 7, 1 (˚mañcamhi nipanna) Vv-a 158 Pv-a 244
    • DN iii.55 AN v.64 Snp 514 (˚gata vitiṇṇa-kankho) Vv 5324 (˚gata + sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā-parinibbāna, i.e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit without fuel), which corresponds to Buddhaghosa’s term “kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesa p.” ‣See above thus at MN i.148 SN iv.48 SN v.29 AN i.44 AN v.65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc). AN v.233 = 253 = Dh 89 (+ khīṇāsava)
    • pari + nibbāna
    Parinibbānika
    adjective
    1. one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction DN iii.264 265 (opasamika +)
    from parinibbāna
    Parinibbāpana
    neuter
    1. refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Ps i.174 (atta-damatha, atta-samatha, atta-p.)
    pari + nibbāpana
    Parinibbāpetar
    1. one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer MN ii.102 (dametar sametar p.)
    agent noun from parinibbāpeti
    Parinibbāpeti
    1. to bring to complete coolness, or training ‣See next, emancipation or cessation of the life-impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna to exercise self-control, to extinguish fever of craving or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the quâsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) DN iii.61 = AN iii.46 (attānaṁ dameti, sameti p.) MN i.45 (future ˚bbapessati) AN ii.68 (attānaṁ d. s. p.).
    2. past participle parinibbuta ‣See p. No. 3 & parinibbāpita (only in agent noun ˚āpetar, q.v.)
    3. pari + nibbāpeti
    Parinibbāyati
    (& ˚nibbāti)
    1. to be completed, perfected in any work or art, e.g. of a trained horse MN i.446 cp.
    2. to die without being reborn to reach complete extinction of existence Vin ii.194 (Tathāgathā ˚āyanti) MN iii.128 (
    3. aorist ˚nibbāyi) SN v.152 (˚nibbāyeyyaṁ), 261 (˚nibbāyissāmi) AN ii.120 (anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā p.); iv.202 (identical), 313 (identical), Mil 175 (identical) Ja i.28 (identical), 55 (identical) Vv-a 158 (fut ˚nibbāyissāmi) Pv-a 21 Pv-a 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life DN ii.68 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.65 & Psalms of the Brethren 417) SN iv.102 (diṭṭh eva dhamme), ibid. (sa-upādāno devānaṁ indo na parinibbāyati), 168 AN iii.41 = Vin ii.148 164 (parinibbāti anāsavo) AN iv.98 (
    4. aorist ˚nibbiṁsu anāsavā Thag 1, 100 (
    5. future ˚nibbissati anāsavo), 364 Iti 93 (˚nibbanti), cp. 95 Dhp 126 (˚nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!) Vb 426 (sabbāsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp 584 (˚nibbanti mahoghen’ eva aggino).
    6. past participle parinibbuto (q.v.)
    7. causative parinibbāpeti (q.v.)
    pari + nibb˚ cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parinirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti & absolutive parinirvātavya ibid. 402
    Parinibbāyana
    neuter
    1. passing away ‣See parinibbāyin 2 b
    abstract from parinibbāyin
    Parinibbāyin
    1. one who attains Parinibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use when taken in both senses of sa-and an-upādisesa parinibbāna; e.g. at AN ii.155f. where the distinction is made between a sa-sankhāra p. and an a-sankhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of “Never-returners” (i.e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā-parinibbāyin, upahacca˚, sasankhāra˚ uddhaṁsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at DN iii.237 SN v.201 SN v.237 AN i.233 AN iv.14 AN iv.71f. 146, 380 v.120 Pug 16 17
    • In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i.e. sa-upādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combns, viz. (a tattha˚; (always combined with opapātika, i.e. above the ordinary cause of birth) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit tatra-parinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533
    1. . It is also invariably combined with anāvattidhamma, e.g. at DN i.156 DN iii.108 DN iii.132 MN ii.56 MN ii.146 AN i.232 245, 290; ii.5, 89, 238; iv.12, 399 423; v.343 SN v.346 (cp. 406), 357 Pug 16 62, 83 ‣See also Kvu translation 742
    • (b) antara˚; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit antarāparinirvāyin MVastu i.33
    1. one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Buddhaghosa’s explanation at PugA 198 as “āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.” SN v.69 = AN iv.70 SN v.201 = 204, 237, 285, 314, 378 AN ii.134 Ps i.161 Pug 16 Nett 190 (cp. AN iv.380)
    from parinibbāyati
    Parinibbuta
    adjective
    1. completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application ‣See parinibbāna and cp. , Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddhism p. 191; Compendium p. 168), viz

    -1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere completely extinct, finally released (from rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parinirvṛta Divy 79

    1. . It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgatha, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With reference to Gotama Buddha: Vin ii.284 (atikkhippaṁ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata˚ e Bhagavati); v.119, 120 DN i.204 (acira—˚e Bhagavati) SN i.158 (Tathāgato p. ii.191); v.172 (˚e Tathāgate); Vv iii.97 (˚e Gotame = anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā parinibbuto Vv-a 169) Pv-a 140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: SN i.121 SN i.122 (Godhika); iii.124 (Vakkali); iv.63 (Puṇṇa); Snp p. 59 60 (a Thera) Mil 390 (Arahant) Vv-a 158 Pv-a 76 Dhp-a ii.163 Dhp-a iv.42
    • emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 “spiritually free” Vinaya Texts iii.182) DN ii.123 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.132); iii.55 MN i.235 MN ii.102 SN i.1 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṁ), 7 = iv.179 (aheṭhayāno +); i.54 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṁ); 187 (p. kankhati kālaṁ) Snp 359 (+ ṭhitatta), 370 (identical), 467 (p udaka-rahado va sīto) Thag 1, 5 (cp. Psalms of the Brethren 113) Ja iv.303 Ja iv.453 Ud 85 (rāga-dosa-moha-kkhayā p.) Mil 50 (˚atta), frequently in combination with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e.g. Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 Vv 5324 or nicchāta (without hunger), e.g. SN iii.26 SN iv.204 Iti 46 Snp 735f. Iti 48 (esanānaṁ khayā), 49 (āsavānaṁ khayā)

  • (to be understood as

    • past participle of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated MN i.446 (of a horse)
    pari + nibbuta
  • Parinimmita
    1. at Dhs 1280 read para˚
    Paripakka
    adjective
    1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed DN i.54 SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50 AN iv.357 Dhp 260 Ja i.91 Ja i.231 Ja vi.1 (ap˚) Ud 36 (identical) Mil 194 Mil 288 Dhp-a iii.338 Kp-a 56 Thag-a 273 Pv-a 274 (su˚)
    2. overripe, rotten Mil 223
    pari + pakka
    Paripakkata
    1. scattered Thag 2, 391 (reading doubtful)
    past participle of pari + pakkirati
    Paripaccati
    1. to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Mil 112
    pari + paccati
    Paripaccana
    neuter
    1. ripening, healing (of a wound) Mil 112
    pari + paccana
    Paripañhati
    1. to question. AN v.16
    denominative from pari + pañha
    Paripaṭati
    1. to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Mil 91 (opposite sambhavati) combined with paridhaṁsati at Nd1 5 Mil 249 Mil 265
    doublet of paripatati
    Paripatati
    1. to fall down, to fall off from ablative Vin ii.152f. Ja v.417 Ja v.420 Pv iv.53 (bhūmiyaṁ) DN-a i.132 Pv-a 37 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 62
    • Caus paripāteti (q.v.)
    • ‣ See also paripaṭati
    pari + patati, cp. nipatati
    Paripantha
    1. “way round,” edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) MN i.87 Ja iii.65 2. obstacle, hindrance, dan
    2. absolutive It refers especially to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. DN i.52 SN i.43 AN i.153 AN iii.252 AN v.136 Ps i.162 Ja i.395 Ja iii.268 Ja iv.17 Ja vi.57 (
    3. nominative
    4. plural ˚ayo = kilesaparipanthā Commentary ), 75 Dhp-a i.14
    5. (magga˚), 16 (identical), 51, 69 migānaṁ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of deer Ja i.143 Ja i.154
    6. saparipantha full of danger Dhp-a i.63 ‣See also palipatha
    7. pari + pantha
    Paripanthika
    adjective
    1. forming or causing an obstacle AN i.161 The usual form is pāri˚; (q.v.)
    from paripantha
    Paripanna
    1. ‣See palipanna
    Paripāka
    1. ripeness, maturity, development, perfection DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.94) Ud 36 (pañca dhammā paripākāya saṁvattanti) Ja i.142 Ja i.148 vi.236 Mil 288 Vism 116 (bodhi˚), 199 Dhp-a i.89 (˚gatatta
    2. neuter state of perfection) Thag-a 79 Pv-a 276–⁠2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase “indriyānaṁ p.,” i.e. decay of the (mental) faculties in formula defining jarā (old age) at DN ii.305 MN i.49 SN ii.2 SN ii.42f. AN v.203 Nd2 252 Dhs 644 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit indriyaparipāka Avs ii.110
    3. from pari + pac
    Paripācana
    neuter
    1. ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365
    pari + pācana1
    Paripācaniya
    adjective
    1. bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation ‣See Ud 36 SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50 Thag-a 273
    from paripācana
    Paripāceti
    1. to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare Ja vi.373 (atthaṁ p. ˚ācayitvā = vaḍḍhetvā Commentary ) Mil 232 285, 288, 296. past participle paripācita Vism 365
    2. pari + pāceti, causative of pacati
    Paripātita
    1. attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty Vv-a 336
    past participle of paripāteti
    Paripāteti
    (or ˚pāṭeti
    1. to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin iv.115 Ja ii.208 iii.380 Mil 279 Mil 367 Kp-a 73 ‣See App. II. p. 353 note 9. past participle paripātita (q.v.)
    2. causative of paripatati. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paripāṭayati to destroy Divy 417
    Paripālita
    1. guarded Vism 74
    past participle of paripāleti
    Paripāleti
    1. to watch, guard (carefully) Pv-a 130 (= rakkhati). past participle paripālita (q.v.)

      • passive ˚pāliyati Nett 105 (= rakkhitaṁ)
      pari + pāleti
    Paripīta
    adjective
    1. very dear, highly valued Sdhp 571
    pari + pīta
    Paripīḷita
    adjective
    1. oppressed, vexed, injured Mil 97 (aggi-santāpa-pariḷāha˚), 303 jighacchāya)
    pari + pīlita, past participle of pīḍ
    Paripuochaka
    adjective
    1. asking a question, enquiring Nd1 234 = Nd2 386; Sdhp 90. feminine abstr paripucchakatā questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhanga)
    2. from pari + prc̣h
    Paripucchati
    1. to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin i.47 = 224; ii.125 SN i.98 AN v.16 Snp 380 Snp 696 (˚iyāna absolutive ), 1025 Pug 41 Mil 257 Mil 408 Snp-a 111
    2. pari + pucchati
    Paripucchā
    feminine
    1. question, interrogation Vin i.190 (uddesa +); ii.219 (identical) AN i.285 Nd1 234 = Nd2 386 (cp. Snp-a iii) ‣See also uddesa
    pari + pucchā
    Paripuñchati
    1. to wipe off, stroke down Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.)
    pari + puñchati
    Paripuṇṇa
    adjective
    1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied MN i.200 (˚sankappa), iii.276 SN ii.283 SN iv.104 SN v.315 Ps i.172 (= pariggah' aṭṭhena parivār’ aṭṭhena, paripūr’ aṭṭhena p., i.e. acquiring keeping, fulfilling) Snp 889 (˚mānin = samatta-mānin Nd1 298), 904 Iti 40 (˚sekha); Pv iv.163; Vism 45 (˚sankappa): Pv-a 13 Pv-a 54 (˚vassa whose years are completed i.e. old enough for ordination), 68 (˚gabbha ready to be delivered), 77 (vārinā).

      1. -2, complete, i.e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Snp 548 (˚kāya lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn’ anga-paccangatāya ca paripuṇṇa-sarīro Snp-a 452) Mil 249
      past participle of paripūrati
    Paripuṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. fullness, completeness Snp-a 452
    abstract from paripuṇṇa
    Paripūra
    adjective
    1. full, complete, perfected, accomplished DN i.75 DN i.133 DN iii.94 SN ii.32 SN iv.247 SN v.269 (feminine ˚ī) AN ii.77 AN v.10f. Snp 205 Snp 1017 Ps i.15, 18, 49 172; ii.122 Pug 35 36
    2. ˚aparipūra not completed imperfect, incomplete AN ii.77 AN iv.314f.; v.10 sq Iti 107 Pug 35 36.

      1. ˚kāritā completion MN i.64 MN i.66f. -kārin completing fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full MN i.33f. 64 SN v.201 AN ii.136 AN iii.215 AN iv.380 AN v.131f. Pug 37 Mil 243
      pari + pṛ
    Paripūraka
    1. (adjective((—˚) one who fills, filling Vism 300 (niraya˚)
    Paripūraṇa
    neuter
    1. fulfilment, completion Vism 3 (sīla˚) ‣See pāripūraṇa
    from paripūreti
    Paripūrati
    1. to become full or perfect Dhp 38 Ja iv.273 (devaloko p.) Mil 395 (sāmaññaṁ); fut paripūrissati Dhp-a i.309 passive paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected Dhp-a i.309
    2. past participle paripuṇṇa (q.v.)
    3. causative paripūreti (q.v.)
    4. pari + pūrati
    Paripūratta
    neuter
    1. fullness, completeness, completion SN v.200f. (+ samatta)
    abstract from paripūra
    Paripūrita
    1. filled (to overflowing), full Pv-a 216
    past participle of paripūreti
    Paripūrī
    feminine
    1. fulfilment, completion SN i.139
    from paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q.v.
    Paripūreti
    1. to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to DN i.74 (parisandeti p. parippharati DN-a i.217 explains as “vāyunā bhastaṁ viya pūreti”); ii.221 MN iii.92 SN i.27 (devakāyaṁ) = 30; ii.29, 32; iii.93 (sāmaññatthaṁ) = AN ii.95 Iti 90 Pv ii.945 (ppr. ˚ayanto) Pug 31 35 Mil 349 (lekhaṁ) Pv-a 29 (sāgaraṁ), 30 (ñātidhammo ˚pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp 371
    • ppr. med ˚pūramāna DN i.103
    • past participle paripūrita (q.v.)
    causative of paripūrati
    Paripothita
    1. beaten, whipped Mil 188 (laguḷehi)
    past participle of paripotheti
    Parippharati
    1. to pervade DN i.74 (= samantato phusati DN-a i.217) MN iii.92f. ‣See also paripūreti past participle paripphuta & ˚pphuṭṭha; (q.v.)
    2. pari + sphur
    Paripphuṭṭha
    1. filled, pervaded DN i.75 MN iii.94 (spelt here paripphuta). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parisphuṭa MVastu ii.349; iii.274; Lal. Vist. 33, 385
    past participle of parippharati
    Paripphosakaṁ
    adverb
    1. sprinkled all round DN i.74 MN i.276 MN ii.15 MN iii.92 explained as “siñcitvā” at DN-a i.218
    either with Kern. Toev,
    s.v.
  • absolutive of paripphoseti (i.e. paripphosa) + kaṁ or preferably with Trenckner, Note. 80
  • absolutive in ˚aka (i.e.
  • neuter formation from adjective paripphosa, as phenuddeha + kaṁ etc.). cp. also Geiger Pali Grammar § 62. 1
  • Paripphosita
    1. sprinkled all round Ja vi.51 Ja vi.481 (candana sāra˚)
    past participle of paripphoseti
    Paripphoseti
    1. to sprinkle over, Vin ii.209 (udakena ˚pphositvā; so read for ˚ppositvā) AN i.257 Ja vi.566 Pv iii.102 (˚itvā = āsiñcitvā Pv-a 231). past participle paripphosita (q.v.)
    2. pari + causative of pruṣ
    Pariplava
    1. unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dhp 38 (= upplavana Dhp-a i.309)
    from pari + plu
    Pariplavati
    1. to quiver, roam about, swerve Ja iii.484 (ppr. pariplavanto = upplavamāna Commentary
    • pp paripluta (q.v.)
    pari + plu
    Paripluta
    1. immersed, drenched Ja vi.78 (= nimugga Commentary ); Dāvs iii.34
    past participle of pariplavati
    Pariphandati
    1. to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Snp 776 (cp. Nd1 46f.), 1145 Dhp 34 (= saṇṭhātuṁ na sakkoti Dhp-a i.289) Ja iv.93 Mil 91 Mil 249 past participle pariphandita (q.v.)
    2. pari + spand
    Pariphandita
    1. wavered, trembled, quivered Ja iii.24
    past participle of pariphandati
    Paribandha
    1. at Thag-a 242 is Commentary reading for paripantha at Thag 2, 352 also at Vism 147, 152
    Paribādheti
    1. to oppress, attack Pv-a 193 (= hiṁsati)
    pari + bādh
    Paribāhati
    1. to keep out, keep away from, hinder Ja i.204 (ger ˚bāhiya) Pv-a 214 (˚bāhire)
    pari + bāhati or preferably bāheti ‣See bahati3
    Paribāhira
    adjective
    1. external, alien to; an outsider Vin ii.140 Vin iv.283 SN i.126 Ja i.482 Ja iii.213 Nd1 144; (parimussati p. hoti, in explanation of mussati Vism 54 Pv-a 131 Thag-a 204 DN-a i.30
    pari + bāhira
    Paribbajati
    1. to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Snp 74 Snp 639 Iti 109 Dhp 346 Dhp 415 Ja iv.452
    pari + vraj
    Paribbaya
    1. earned money, earnings, wages Ja i.156 (˚ṁ datvā), 296 (identical), 433 iv.170 Dhp-a iv.196

      1. -2, expense, expenditure Ja ii.213 (nivāsa˚ expense for a lodging), 249, 368; iii.287 (˚ṁ karoti to invest); vi.383 Vv-a 75 Pv-a 3 (sahassaṁ sahassaṁ ˚ṁ karoti), 97 (nicca˚); Dāvs v.66
      pari + vaya, i.e. *vyaya
    Paribbasāna
    adjective
    1. abiding, staying by Snp 796 (= vasamāna Snp-a 529 sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd1 102), 878, 880, 895
    ppr. medium of pari + vas
    Paribbāja
    1. = paribbājaka SN i.49 Snp 134 Dhp 313 Dhp-a iii.485
    • ˚vata the vow of a p. Thag-a 73

    Paribbājaka
    1. a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt ii.114, 277, 468; Vinaya Texts i.41) Vin i.342 Vin iv.285 (bhikkhuñ ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka-samāpanno) DN i.157 DN iii.1f. 35 sq., 53 sq. 130 sq. MN i.64 MN i.84 SN i.78 SN ii.22 SN ii.119 SN ii.139 SN iii.257f. iv.230, 251, 391 sq. AN i.115 AN i.157 AN i.185 AN i.215 AN ii.29f. 176; iv.35 sq., 338, 378; v.48 sq. Snp 537 Snp 553 Ja i.85 Ud 14 65 DN-a i.35 Pv-a 31 feminine paribbājikā Vin iv.285 MN i.305 SN iii.238f. Ud 13 43 sq
    2. from pari + vraj
    Paribbājana
    neuter
    1. wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant Snp-a 434
    from paribbajati
    Paribbājayitar

    one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, figuratively one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Snp 537 (Text ˚vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read ˚bājayitvā for ˚bājayitā, cp. Snp-a 434 nikkhametv

    ā niddhametv

    1. ā
    agent noun of paribbajati
    Paribbūḷha
    adjective
    1. encompassed, provided with, surrounded AN iii.34 Snp 301 (= parikiṇṇa Snp-a 320) Ja iv.120 Ja v.68 Ja v.322 Ja v.417 Ja vi.452
    past participle of paribrūhati
    Paribbhamati
    1. to walk or roam about Pv-a 6 Pv-a 47 (ito c’ ito), 63 (saṁsāre), 100, 166 (saṁsare). 2. to reel about Ja iii.288 Ja iv.407
    2. causative ˚bbhameti to make reel round Ja vi.155
    3. pari + bhamati
    Paribyattatā
    feminine
    1. great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Mil 349
    pari + vyatta + tā
    Paribrahaṇa
    neuter
    1. growth, increase, promotion Thag 1, p. 2; n cp. paribrūhana
    to bṛh ‣See paribrūhati & cp. late Sanskrit paribarhaṇā
    Paribrūhati
    1. to augment, increase, do with zest Vv-a 115 causative ˚brūheti cp. Sanskrit paribṛnhayati
      1. to make strong, increase Ja v.361 (aparibrūhayi aorist medium with a˚ negative, i.e. was weakened, lost his strength; but explained by Commentary as “atibrūhesi mahāsaddaṁ nicchāresi,” thus taking it to brū to speak which is evidently a confusion).
      2. past participle paribbūḷha paribrūhita; (q.v.)
      3. pari + brūhati of bṛh2
    Paribrūhana
    neuter
    1. augmentation, increase Nett 79
    from paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana
    Paribrūhita
    1. increased, furthered, strengthened Thag-a 245
    past participle of paribrūheti
    Paribhaṭṭha1
    1. fallen, dropped Ja i.482 Thag 1, p. 12n
    past participle of paribhassati of bhraś
    Paribhaṭṭha2
    1. abused, censured, scolded Ja vi.187
    past participle of paribhāsati
    Paribhaṇḍa
    1. a binding along the back Vin i.254 297; ii.116 Ja v.254 (variant reading ˚daṇḍa)
    2. a girdle, belt Ja vi.125 Dhp-a ii.174 3. a plastered flooring Vin ii.113 172, 220 Ja iii.384 iv.92; v.437, 440
    3. slough of a serpent (?) Ja vi.339

      • (˚-) adjective encircling, comprehensive, in ˚ñāṇa Vism 429
    for paribandha, dialectical ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen i.36, who compares Tamil panda “a surrounding wall = Pali bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp. notes in Vinaya Texts ii.154; iii.85, 213
    Paribhata
    1. nurtured, nourished MN ii.56 (sukha˚). Also in explanation of pāribhaṭyatā (q.v.)
    past participle of pari + bhṛ
    Paribhava
    1. contempt, disrespect Vin iv.241 AN iii.191 Ja v.436 Ja vi.164 Vb 353f. Pv-a 257
    pari + bhū
    Paribhavana
    neuter = paribhava DN-a i.255
    Paribhavati
    1. also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise SN i.69 AN iii.174 sq (˚bhoti) Ja iii.16 Ja v.442 Mil 23 Mil 259 Pv-a 266 gerundive paribhotabba SN i.69 Snp p. 93. (= paribhavitabba Snp-a 424).
    2. causative paribhāveti;
    3. past participle paribhūta (q.v.)
    4. pari + bhū
    Paribhāvanā
    feminine
    1. permeation, penetration Dhs-a 163 (= vāsanā
    from paribhāveti
    Paribhāvita
    1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set DN ii.81 (saddhā-p. cittaṁ, sīla etc.; translation “set round with,” cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.86), cp. SN v.369 Snp 23 (cittaṁ p. Snp-a 37 saṁvāsiya) Mil 361 Pv-a 139 (˚aya bhāvanāya codito)
    2. compounded of, mixed with Ja i.380 cp. iv.407 Pv-a 191
    3. fostered treated, practised Mil 394 (bhesajjena kāyaṁ) Pv-a 257

      • sat on (said of eggs), being hatched MN i.104 SN iii.153 AN iv.125f. 176
    past participle of paribhāveti
    Paribhāveti
    1. to cause to be pervaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin i.279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.) Ja iv.407 past participle paribhāvita (q.v.)
    2. causative of paribhavati
    Paribhāsa
    1. censure, abuse, blame Ja v.373 Pv-a 175
    from pari + bhāṣ
    Paribhāsaka
    adjective
    1. reviling, abusing, abusive SN i.34 AN iv.79 Pv i.116 (= akkosaka Pv-a 58); iv.84 Vv-a 69 ‣See also akkosaka
    from paribhāsa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paribhāṣaka Divy 38
    Paribhāsati
    1. to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame SN i.221 SN iv.61 Vin iv.265 Snp 134 Snp 663 Ja i.112 Ja i.384 (for ˚hāsiṁsu) 469 iii.421; iv.285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī) v.294; vi.523; Pv ii.108 Pug 37 Mil 186 Pv-a 43- aorist ˚bhāsissaṁ Pv iv.85, plural ˚bhāsimhase Pv iii.111
    2. gerundive ˚bhāsaniya Mil 186

      • Very frequently combined with akkosati (+ p.), e.g. at Vin ii.14 296 Ud 44 Pv i.93 Pv-a 10
      • past participle paribhaṭṭha2 (q.v.)
      • Caus II. ˚bhāsāpeti identical Pv i.67
      pari + bhāṣ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paribhāṣate Divy 38
    Paribhindati
    1. to break up, split, create dissension, to set at variance Ja i.439 Ja iv.196 Ja v.229 vi.368 Pv-a 13
    2. to break ‣See ˚bhinna
    3. pp paribhinna
    pari + bhid
    Paribhinna
    1. broken, broken up MN i.190 (a˚) Vv-a 184 (˚vaṇṇa of broken up appearance i.e. crumbly.)
    2. set at variance, disconcerted split Vin iii.161 Ja ii.193 Dhs-a 308 Pv-a 13
    3. cp. vi˚
    past participle of paribhindati
    Paribhuñjati
    1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin ii.109 MN i.153 (nivāpaṁ p.), 207, SN ii.29 Snp 240 Snp 241 Snp 423 Pv i.12 i.94; iv.52 (= khādituṁ Pv-a 259) Nd2 427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuñjati) Mil 366 Mil 395 (ālopaṁ ˚bhuñjisaṁ); Pv.3, 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp 394
    2. gerundive ˚bhuñjiya Ja i.243 (dup˚); & ˚bhuñjitabba Pv-a 71 (with
    3. neuter abstr ˚tabbatta)
    4. passive ˚bhuñjiyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna SN i.90–⁠2. ‣See bhuñjatī2
      1. to purify, clean, cleanse MN i.25 Ja vi.75 past participle paribhutta (q.v.)
      2. pari + bhuj
    Paribhuñjana
    neuter
    1. eating Pv-a 35
    from paribhuñjati
    Paribhutta
    1. used, employed, made use of Vin ii.109 (su˚) Ja iii.257 (a˚) DN-a i.261 (sayaṁ ˚bhesajja) Snp-a 19
    past participle of paribhuñjati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paribhukta Divy 277
    Paribhūta
    1. treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin iv.6 SN ii.279 Mil 229 Mil 288
    past participle of paribhavati
    Paribheda
    1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs 738 874
    2. bursting, breaking open Pv-a 55
    from pari + bhid ‣See paribhindati
    Paribhedaka
    adjective
    1. breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate Ja ii.173 iii.168; v.245; vi.437
    from paribheda in sense of paribhindati
    Paribhoga
    1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding Ja i.243 Ja ii.432 Mil 156 Mil 403 Dhp-a ii.66 Snp-a 342
    2. enjoyment, use Vin iv.267 SN i.90 Nd1 262; Vism 33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana) Dhp-a i.60 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 220
    3. Four paribhogas are distinguished at Ja v.253 and at Vism 43, viz. theyya˚ iṇa,˚ dāyajja˚, sāmi˚;. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism 43
      1. ˚cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, consequently sacred Kp-a 222
      2. ˚dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opposite sarīradhātu remains of the body) Mhvs 15, 163. (cp. pāribhogika-dhātu) Snp-a 579
      from pari + bhuj
    Paribhojaniya
    1. (or ˚īya neuter

      1. that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin ii.76 208, 216 (˚ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.8); iii.119 (pāniyaṁ) Ja i.416 Ja vi.75 Dhp-a i.58
      originally
    2. gerundive of paribhunjati.2
    Parima
    1. = parama (cp. Geiger Pali Grammar 191) MN iii.112
    Parimajjaka
    adjective
    1. touching, reaching (up to) Mil 343 (candasuriya˚, cp. MVastu II, candramasūrya-parimārjako maharddhiko etc.)
    from pari + marj
    Parimajjati
    1. to wipe away, wipe off or out MN i.78
    2. to touch, stroke DN i.78 MN iii.12 SN ii.121 Dhp 394 Ja i.192 Ja i.305 Ja ii.395 (piṭṭhiṁ)
    3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse). AN v.166 AN v.168

      • past participle parimaṭṭha (q.v.)
      pari + majjati
    Parimajjana
    neuter
    1. wiping off or out Pug 33 (ukkhali˚)
    2. rubbing, grooming (a horse. AN v.166 AN v.168 (ājānīya˚)
    from parimajjati
    Parimaṭṭha
    1. rubbed, stroked, polished, in su˚ well polished SN ii.102 ‣See also palimaṭṭha
    past participle of parimajjati
    Parimaṇḍala
    adjective
    1. round, circular Ja i.441 Ja ii.406 (āvāṭa); vi.42; Pv iv.328 (guḷa˚) Dhs 617 (explained at Dhs-a 317 as “egg-shaped,” kukkuṭ-aṇḍasaṇṭhāna)
    2. nt. as
    3. adverb in phrase ˚ṁ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin i.46 Vin ii.213 Vin iv.185 (nābhimaṇḍalaṁ jānu-maṇḍalaṁ paṭicchādentena Commentary ; cp. timaṇḍala)
    4. rounded off, i.e. complete, correct pleasant, in phrase ˚āni padavyañjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin ii.316 MN i.216 AN i.103 DN-a i.282 Snp-a 177 370
    pari + maṇḍala
    Parimaddati
    1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage Ja iv.137 (sarīraṁ examine the body) Mil 241
    2. Of leather (i.e. treat) M. i.128
    3. to go together with, to frequent Dhp-a i.90 (samayaṁ p.)
    4. pp parimaddita (q.v.)
    pari + mṛd
    Parimaddana
    neuter
    1. rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo anicc'-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṁsanadhammo DN i.76 (cp. DN-a i.88 but translated at Dialogues of the Buddha i.87 as “subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration”) MN i.500 SN iv.83 Ja i.416 ‣See further DN i.7 AN i.62 AN iv.54 (ucchādana-p
    • nahāpana-sambāhana) Mil 241 (ucchādana˚); Sdhp 578
    from pari + mṛd
    Parimaddita
    1. crushed, rubbed, treated MN i.129 (su˚ well-treated)
    past participle of parimaddati
    Parimaddhita
    1. brought to an end or standstill, destroyed Ja i.145 (˚sankhāra)
    past participle of pari + maddheti, causative of mṛdh to neglect
    Parimasati
    1. to touch, stroke, grasp (usually combined with parimajjati), DN i.78 DN ii.17 MN i.34 MN i.80 iii.12 SN ii.121 SN iv.173 AN iii.70 past participle parimaṭṭha (same as
    2. past participle of parimajjati, q.v
    3. pari + mṛś
    Parimāṇa
    neuter
    1. measure, extent, limit, as adjective (—˚) measuring, extending over, comprising Ja i.45 Snp-a 1 (pariyatti˚) Pv-a 113 (yojana˚), 102 (anekabhāra˚)
    • negative aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable very great Vin ii.62 70 SN v.430 AN ii.182 Kp-a 248 DN-a i.288 (˚vaṇṇa) Pv-a 110 Pv-a 129
    of pari +
    Parimārita
    1. mortified, only in phrase ˚indriya Ja i.361 Ja iii.515 Ja iv.9 Ja iv.306 v.152; Dāvs i.16
    past participle of pari + māreti, causative of mṛ
    Parimita
    1. measured, restricted, limited, only in negative ; measureless Pv ii.811 Mil 287 Mil 343
    past participle of parimināti
    Parimitatta
    neuter
    1. the condition of being measured Pv-a 254
    from parimita
    Parimināti
    1. to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; infinitive ˚metuṁ Mil 192 Thag-a 26 and ˚minituṁ Mil 316 gerundive ˚meyya (q.v.)
    2. past participle parimita (q.v.)
    3. pari +
    Parimeyya
    adjective
    1. to be measured, negative a˚ countless, immeasurable Mil 331 Mil 388 Pv-a 212
    gerundive of parimināti
    Parimukha
    adjective
    1. facing, in front; only as neuter adverb ˚ṁ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapeti “set up his memory in front” (i.e. of the object of thought), to set one’s mindfulness alert Vin i.24 DN ii.291 MN i.56 MN i.421 SN i.170 AN iii.92 Iti 80 Ps i.176 (explained) Pug 68 DN-a i.210 Also in phrase ˚ṁ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin ii.134 “to cut off (? the hair in front” (i.e. on the breast) Vinaya Texts iii.138 where is quoted Buddhaghosa’s explanation “ure loma-saṁharaṇaṁ.” pari + mukha
    Parimuccati
    1. to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin ii.87 MN i.8 SN i.88 SN i.208 SN ii.24 SN ii.109 SN iii.40, 150, 179 Mil 213 Mil 335 (jātiyā etc.) aorist ˚mucci MN i.153
    2. past participle parimutta;
    3. causative parimoceti (q.v.)
    4. passive of pari + muc
    Parimuṭṭha
    1. forgetful, bewildered Vin i.349 = J iii.488 (= muṭṭhassati Commentary ); cp. Vinaya Texts ii.307
    pari + muṭṭha, past participle of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha
    Parimutta
    1. released, set free, delivered SN iii.31
    past participle of parimuccati
    Parimutti
    feminine
    1. release Ja i.4 (v.20) Mil 112 Mil 227 Pv-a 109
    from pari + muc
    Parimussati
    1. to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd1 144
    pari + mussati
    Parimoceti
    1. to set free, deliver, release DN i.96 Ja i.28 (v.203) Mil 334 DN-a i.263 Dhp-a i.39
    causative of parimuccati
    Parimohita
    adjective
    1. very confused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp 206
    past participle of pari + causative of muh
    Pariya
    1. encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as absolutive ); penetration, understanding (as
    2. noun ) Only in phrase ceto-pariya-ñāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca DN ii.82f. (variant reading ˚āya); iii.100 (variant reading ˚āye) DN-a i.223 (corresponding with pubbe-nivāsa-ñāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya-paro-pariya-ñāṇa in same meaning (see indriya compounds. & remark on paropariya Ja i.78

      • ‣ See also pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyāya 3 and compounds. of ceto
      either short form of pariyāya, or absolutive of pari + ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending -ya instead of -tya.-Buddhaghosa at Vism 409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as “pariyātī ti pariyaṁ paricchindatī ti attho”
    Pariyañña
    1. supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice Snp-a 321 322
    pari + yañña
    Pariyatta1
    neuter
    1. learning understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others. AN v.34 AN v.38 Ps i.121 sq. Vb 340
    abstract from pariya (pari + i but confused with pariyatta2 & pariyatti from pari + ; āp
    Pariyatta2
    adjective
    1. (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin ii.285 = KhA 92 DN iii.241f. (yathā sutaṁ yathā p˚ṁ dhammaṁ)
    • (b) sufficient, enough Pv-a 33 (= alaṁ)
    cp. Sanskrit paryāpta.
  • past participle of pari + āp ‣See pāpuṇāti
  • Pariyatti
    feminine
    1. adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency capability, competency; indriya-paro˚; efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others SN v.205 Nett 101 Three accomplishments are distinguished at DN-a i.21f. viz. alagadd-ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍâgārika˚ (of a treasurer) apariyatti-kara bringing no advantage Dhp-a i.71
    • accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism 95. Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature
    • ˚tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyatti-bhedo DN-a i.21 At Snp-a 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutaṅga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd1 234 = Nd2 386. pariyattiṁ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.30 cp. Kp-a 91 (tipiṭaka-sabba-p
    • pabheda-dhara Ja ii.48
    • ˚ṁ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside) Mil 115 Mil 215 345, 411 (āgama˚)
    • ablative pariyattito through learning by heart Snp-a 195 (opposite to atthato according to the meaning)
    1. ˚dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions ‣See navanga Buddha-sāsana Kp-a 191, 193 Snp-a 328 Pv-a 2 cp. ˚sāsana
    2. ˚dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Mil 21
    • ˚dhura (= ganthadhura) ‣See vāsadhura
    • ˚paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures Snp-a 111
    • ˚parimāṇa extent of study Snp-a 1 608 -bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma AN iii.86
    • ˚bahussuta versed in the Scriptures Snp-a 110
    • ˚sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. ˚dhamma) Nd1 143 Dhp-a iv.39
    from pari + āp, cp. Epic Sanskrit paryāpti & Pali pariyāpuṇāti
    Pariyanta
    1. limit, end, climax, border SN i.80 (manāpa˚ “limit-point in enjoyment”; cp. Commentary nipphattikaṁ koṭikaṁ Kindred Sayings 320) Ja i.149 (hattha-pāda˚ hoofs), 221 (udaka˚), 223 (sara˚) ii.200 (angana˚); Pv ii.1312 Dhp-a iii.172 (parisa˚). 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin ii.59 60 (āpatti˚) Nd1 483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with reference to one’s character, viz. sīlasaṁvara˚ indriyasaṁvara˚ bhojane mattaññutā˚, jāgariyânuyoga˚). 3. (adjective
    2. ˚) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin iv.31 MN iii.90 SN ii.122 (āyu˚) AN i.164 (identical) Snp 577 (bhedana˚) Pv i.1013 (parikkhitta Pv-a 52)-apariyanta
    3. adjective boundless, limitless Pv-a 58 Pv-a 166.

      1. ˚kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd2 taṇhāiii (with sīmakata & odhikata; variant reading pariyanti˚, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryantīkṛta “finished” Divy 97 Divy 236)
      2. ˚cārin living in selfrestriction Snp 964 (cp. Nd1 483)
      3. ˚dassāvin ‣Seeing the limit. AN v.50
      • ˚rahita without limits Dhp-a iii.252
      pari + anta, cp. Sanskrit paryanta
    Pariyantavant
    adjective
    1. having a limit, having a set or well-defined purpose; feminine ˚vatī (vācā) discriminating speech DN i.4 = MN iii.49 = Pug 58 explained as “paricchedaṁ dassetvā yatha ’ssa paricchedo paññāyati, evaṁ bhāsatī ti attho” DN-a i.76 = PugA 238
    2. from pariyanta
    Pariyantika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. ending in, bounded or limited by SN ii.83 = AN ii.198 (kāya-p. ˚ā & jīvita-p ˚ā vedanā); Vism 69 (bhojana˚, udaka˚, āsana˚) Sdhp 440 (kāla˚ sīla)
    from pariyanta
    Pariyaya
    1. revolution, lapse of time, period term Ja iii.460 (= kālapariyāya Commentary ); v.367 (kāla˚)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit paryaya, pari + i; the usual Pali form is pariyāya, but at the following passages the short a is required metri causa
    Pariyā
    feminine
    1. winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch Ja vi.528 (duma˚; read ˚pariyāsu with variant reading instead of Text pariyāyesu; Commentary explains by sākhā)
    from pari +
    Pariyāgata
    1. having come to, reached, attained Ja vi.237 (phalaṁ; C = upagata), 238 (kusalaṁ Commentary = pariyāyena attano vārena āgata)
    pari + ā + gata
    Pariyāgāra
    adjective
    1. having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin iii.119 (of gabbha)
    pari + āgāra
    Pariyāti
    1. to go round (
    2. accusative ) Ja i.307
    3. to come near Ja ii.440
    pari +
    Pariyādāti
    1. to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med- passive ādiyati, past participle ˚ādinna, absolutive ādāya (q.v.)
    2. pari + ādāti
    Pariyādāna
    neuter
    1. “taking up completely,” i.e. using up, consummation, consumption finishing, end MN i.487 (kaṭṭha˚, opposite to upādāna) SN i.152 SN iii.16f. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & ˚dinna) iv.33 (sabb’ upādāna˚) AN ii.139 Ja v.186 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryādāna Divy 4 Divy 55, 100
    • Especially in following phrases āsava˚ & jīvita˚; DN i.46 (jīvita-pariyādānā ablative, explained at Dhp i.128 as “jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhika-bhāvā ti attho”) SN ii.83 = AN ii.198 SN iii.126 SN iv.213 AN iv.13 AN iv.146 Pug 13 Mil 397 and combined with parikkhaya in ˚ṁ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated. AN v.173 Snp p. 126 Mil 102 Pv-a 147 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parikṣayaṁ paryādānaṁ gacchati Divy 567; Avs i.48; ii.193
    pari + ādāna, opposite upādāna
    Pariyādāya
    indeclinable
    1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd2 533 (in explanation of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i.e. for completeness exhaustively)
    2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaṁ p. “taking hold of the mind” MN i.91 Iti 19 Dhp-a i.15
    3. losing control over, giving out cittaṁ SN iii.16 SN iv.125 In absolute sense perhaps at SN v.51 = AN iv.127 (with variant readings pariyenāya & pariyāya).

      absolutive of pariyādati
    Pariyādinna
    1. (
    2. passive exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin i.25 (tejo) DN ii.8 = MN iii.118 SN ii.133f. (dukkhaṁ parikkhīṇaṁ +); v.461 sq
    3. negative apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted MN i.79 (muttakarīsaṁ ˚ādiṇṇaṁ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā) SN ii.178f.
    4. (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually ˚citta adjective) Vin ii.185 MN ii.172 SN ii.228 Nd2 32 Pv-a 279
    often spelt ˚diṇṇa, e.g. in variant readings at DN ii.8 MN ii.172 MN iii.118 past participle of pariyādiyati
    Pariyādinnatta
    neuter
    1. exhaustion, consummation DN-a i.128
    abstract from pariyādinna
    Pariyādiyati
    1. to put an end to exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control SN iii.155 (rāgaṁ); Nd2 under parisahati
    2. Pot. ˚ādiyeyyaṁ Vin i.25 (tejaṁ).
    3. absolutive ˚adiyitvā Vin i.25 (tejaṁ) iv.109 (identical) SN i.84 (translation “confiscate”)
    4. to become exhausted, give out Ja v.186 (udakaṁ) Mil 297 (cittaṁ p.; opposed to parivaḍḍhati).
    5. past participle pariyādinna (q.v.)
    sometimes spelt ˚diyyati, e.g. Nd2 s.v.; pari + ādiyati, q.v. for etymology reference
    Pariyāpajjati
    1. to be finished AN iv.339 - past participle pariyāpanna (q.v.)
    2. causative pariyāpādeti (q.v.)
    3. pari + āpajjati
    Pariyāpadāna
    neuter
    1. good advice, application trick, artfulness, artifice Ja v.361 Ja v.369 (Commentary explns as parisuddha after variant reading pariyodāta which was prob misread for pariyodāna), 370
    pari + apadāna, the latter for ava˚, and metrical lengthening of a
    Pariyāpanna
    1. “gone completely into,” included in, belonging to, got into Vin i.46 (patta˚ that which has been put into the bowl) DN i.45 (= ābaddha DN-a i.127) Snp-a 397 (milakkhabhāsa˚ etc.); Kp-a 136 (vinaya˚), 191 (sangha˚) Dhp-a i.158 (idhaloka-paraloka˚) Pv-a 14 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 59 Pv-a 129 (devaloka˚), 150
    2. accomplished (i.e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā SN ii.280 = AN ii.51
    3. (˚ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i.e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268 Vb 12 15, 19 & passim Dhs-a 50 O

      • past participle apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Ps i.101 Dhs 583 (cp. Dhs translation 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kvu 507
      pari + āpanna, cp. adhipanna
    Pariyāpannatta
    neuter
    1. includedness Snp-a 174
    abstract from pariyāpanna
    Pariyāpādeti
    1. to finish off, i.e. put to death completely SN iv.308f. = AN iii.94
    causative of pariyāpajjati
    Pariyāpuṇana
    neuter
    1. mastery over, accomplishment in genitive Vism 442 (Buddhavacanassa)
    abstract formn from pariyāpuṇāti
    Pariyāpuṇāti
    1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin iv.305 (parittaṁ a charm) DN i.117 (= jānāti DN-a i.117) AN iii.86 (dhammaṁ); fut pariyāpuṇissati Dhp-a i.382 (dhammaṁ);
    2. absolutive pariyāpuṇitvā SN i.176 SN ii.120 Snp-a 195 (nikāyaṁ)
    3. (with infinitive) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin ii.109 (
    4. aorist ˚iṁsu), 121.
    5. past participle pariyāputa and pariyatta (q.v.)
    pari + āp, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryavāpnoti Divy 613
    Pariyāputa
    1. learned by heart, known Nd1 234 = Nd2 386 (Buddhavacana)
    2. learned, accomplished DN-a i.21
    3. ‣ See also pariyatta2
    past participle of pariyāpuṇāti
    Pariyāya
    1. literally “going round” analysed by Buddhaghosa in 3 different meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course) desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause reason, also case, matter) ‣See DN-a i.36 and cp. Kindred Sayings i.320

    -1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase ˚ṁ karoti to arrange DN i.179 (translation takes it literally “departure,” i.e. going out of one’s way, détour; or change of habit ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.245) MN i.252 MN i.326 MN iii.7 62 SN i.142 (translation “make occasion” for coming

    1. ). 2. order, succession, turn, course (= vāra) DN i.166 (˚bhatta i.e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals explained as vāra -bhatta PugA 232) MN i.78 MN i.282 MN i.481 SN ii.51f. AN ii.206 Ja v.153 (= vāra) Pv-a 242 (aparā˚)
    • what goes on, way, habit, quality, property SN i.146
    • ceto˚ habits of mind, thoughts, but ‣See also pariya AN v.160 (citta˚ ‣See ceto)

  • discussion instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on (—˚) representation of (—˚) (= desanā); thus āditta˚ (of Vin i.34) Dhp-a i.88 especially in compound dhamma˚; disquisition on the Dhamma DN i.46 DN ii.93 MN i.83 MN iii.67 SN ii.74 SN v.357 AN iii.62 AN iv.166 AN iv.381 Snp p. 218; also in following vitakka˚ MN i.122 deva˚ AN iii.402f.; peta˚ Pv-a 92 cp. Vism 41 (˚kathā).

    • in Abhidhamma terminology specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma = nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism 473 499; cp. Dhs-a 317 (figuratively)

  • mode, manner reason, cause, way (= kāraṇa DN i.185 (iminā ˚ena), 186 (identical); ii.339 (ayaṁ p. yena ˚ena) DN-a i.106 (tena tena ˚ena in some way or other) Dhs-a 366 (iminā ˚ena for this reason); especially in phrase aneka -pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin i.16 45 DN i.1 (cp. DN-a i.36), 174 MN i.24 AN i.56 Snp p. 15.

    • winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at Ja vi.528 ‣See pariyā
    • ‣ See also nippariyāya
    • from pari + i, cp. Classical Sanskrit paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of “formula,” in liturgy, cp. below 4
  • Pariyāhata
    1. struck out, affected with (—˚), only in phrase takka˚; “beaten out by argumentations” DN i.16 (cp. DN-a i.106) MN i.520
    pari + āhata
    Pariyāhanana
    neuter
    1. striking, beating Vism 142 āhanana˚; in exposition of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (“circumimpinging” Expositor 151)
    from pari + ā + han
    Pariyiṭṭha
    1. sought, desired, looked for SN iv.62 (a˚) Mil 134 Vism 344 (˚āhāra)
    past participle of pariyesati
    Pariyiṭṭhi
    1. = pariyeṭṭhi Snp 289 (Snp-a 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuṁ ‣See pariyesati
    Pariyukkhaṇṭhati
    1. to have great longing, to be distressed Ja v.417 Ja v.421 (mā ˚kaṇṭhi)
    pari + ukkaṇṭhati
    Pariyuṭṭhati
    1. to arise, pervade; intransitive to become prepossessed, to be pervaded Dhs-a 366 (cittaṁ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṁsu). past participle pariyuṭṭhita (q.v.)
    2. pari + uṭṭhāti
    Pariyuṭṭhāna
    neuter

    state of being possessed (or hindered) by (—˚), prepossession bias, outburst MN i.18 Kvu xiv.6 (thīnamiddha˚), 136 AN i.66 (˚ajjhosāna); v.198 (adhiṭṭhāna—˚samuṭṭhāna) Nd2 under taṇhāii (= Dhs 1059 where translation is “pervading,” based on explanation at Dhs-a 366: uppajjamānā scil. taṇhā

    1. cittaṁ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen) Pug 21 (avijjā˚) Vb 383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā sic! plural masculine
      1. are enumerated in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saṁyojana; thus placing p. into the same category as these two) Dhs 390 1061 (avijjā˚), 1162 (identical); Nett 13, 14, 18, 37 79 sq. Dhs-a 238 Thag-a 80 Vism 5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). cp. also; adhiṭṭhāna
      pari + uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be “over-exertion.” Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryavasthāna points to another connection ‣See Divy 185
    Pariyuṭṭhita
    possessed by (the Commentary explanation as given Kindred Sayings 320 is “abhibhūta”) biassed, taken up by, full of (—˚) MN i.18 MN iii.14 SN iv.240 (maccheramala˚ ceto) AN i.281 AN ii.58 Iti 43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu i.91 (kāma-rāga˚) Thag-a 78 Sdhp 581.
    1. ˚citta whose heart is possessed by (—˚) DN ii.104 (Mārena) Pv-a 142 (maccheramala˚), 195 (identical), 279 (kilesasamudācārena)
    2. ˚ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession affected by bias, SN iii.3f. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin)
    pari + uṭṭhita, with variant reading at DN ii.104 parivuṭṭhita and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit rendering paryavasthita ‣See remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dialogues of the Buddha ii.111
    Pariyudāharati
    1. to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud Dhs-a 1 (aorist ˚āhāsi)
    2. pari + udāharati
    Pariyeṭṭhi
    1. search for DN i.222 AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚); iii.416 Snp 289 (vijjācaraṇa˚) Ja i.14 Nett 1, 5 DN-a i.271
    pari + eṭṭhi of esati, ā + iṣ
    Pariyeti
    1. to go about, to go round, encircle, encom passive absolutive paricca (q.v.) The
    2. past participle is represented by pareta ‣See also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti
    3. pari + i
    Pariyena
    1. going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage SN v.51 (pariyenāya, variant reading pariyādāya) = AN iv.127 (reads pariyādāya variant reading pariyāya). Reading is doubtful
    from pari + i, cp. Sanskrit *paryayana
    Pariyesati
    1. to ‣Seek for, look, search, desire DN i.223 (˚esamāna ppr.) Snp 482 (identical) SN i.177 SN i.181 SN iv.62 AN ii.23 AN ii.25 AN ii.247 Nd1 262 Nd2 427 (+ paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati) Ja i.3 Ja i.138 Mil 109 Mil 313 Dhp-a iii.263 (ppr. ˚esanto) Pv-a 31 Sdhp 506
    • grd ˚esitabba SN ii.130 infinitive ˚esituṁ Snp-a 316 and ˚eṭṭhuṁ (conj. ˚iṭṭhuṁ?) Snp 289 (cp. Snp-a 316 which gives reading ˚eṭṭhuṁ as gloss);
    • absolutive ˚esitvā Snp-a 317 414-
    • past participle pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha; (q.v.) cp. for similar formation & meaning; ajjhesati with
    • past participle ajjhesita ajjhiṭṭha
    • cp. vi˚
    pari + esati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryeṣate to investigate Avs i.339. The Pali word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms ˚iṭṭhuṁ etc ‣See also anvesati
    Pariyesanā
    feminine & ˚na
    • neuter

      1. search, quest, inquiry (a) ˚nā DN ii.58 DN ii.61 DN ii.280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); iii.289 MN i.161 (twofold, viz ariyā & anariyā) AN ii.247 (identical) SN i.143 SN ii.144 SN ii.171 SN iii.29; iv.8 sq. (assāda˚ & ādīnava˚) AN i.68 (kāma˚) 93
      • (b) (˚na) Nd1 262 (˚chanda, + paṭilābha˚ & paribhoga˚) Dhp-a iii.256 (kāmaguṇe ˚ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at Dhp-a; i.75
      from pariyesati
    Pariyesita
    1. searched, sought for, desired Iti 121 ‣See also pariyiṭṭha
    past participle of pariyesati
    Pariyoga
    1. cauldron ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. Mil 118
    from pari + yuj
    Pariyogāya
    1. at MN i.480 is contracted form (absolutive ) of pariyogāhitvā (so explained by Commentary ).

    Pariyogāḷha
    1. dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (locative ) Vin i.181 DN i.110 MN i.380 SN ii.58 SN iv.328 Vb 329 Mil 283

      1. ˚dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin i.16 AN iv.186 AN iv.210 Ud 49
      past participle of pariyogāhati ‣See also ogādha1
    Pariyogāha
    1. diving into, penetration; only in compound dup˚; hard to penetrate, unfathomable SN iv.376 Mil 70 Pariyogahati & gaheti;
    pari + ogāha
    Pariyogāhati
    ˚gāheti;
    1. to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise AN ii.84 AN iv.13 AN iv.145f. (paññāya) Ja i.341 Pug 33 (a˚), 48 sq. cp. ajjhogāhati
    pari + ogāhati
    Pariyogāhana
    neuter & ā
    • feminine

      1. plunging into, penetration Ps i.106, 112; ii.183 Dhs 390 (a˚) 425 (a˚) Pug 21 (a˚) Dhs-a 260
      pari + ogāhana
    Pariyottharati
    1. to spread all over intranstitive Mil 197
    2. pari + ottharati
    Pariyodapana
    neuter & ā
    • feminine

      1. cleansing, purification AN i.207 (cittassa) Dhp 183 (= vodāpana Dhp-a iii.237); Nett 44. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit distorted to paryādapana MVastu iii.12 (= Dh 183)
      from pariyodapeti
    Pariyodapita
    1. cleansed, purified Nett 44 (cittaṁ)
    past participle of pariyodapeti
    Pariyodapeti
    1. to cleanse, purify MN i.25 Dhp 88 (= vodapeti parisodheti Dhp-a ii.162 Nett 44 Thag-a 237 (indriyāni). past participle pariyodāta & pariyodapita; (q.v.)
    2. pari + odapeti, of causative of 4 to clean
    Pariyodāta
    adjective
    1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly combined with parisuddha (+) DN i.75 DN i.76 (+) MN i.26 SN i.198 SN iii.235 (+) v.301 AN iii.27 (+); iv.120 sq. Ja v.369 (+ ‣See pariyāpadāna) Pug 60 DN-a i.219 Dhp-a iv.72 (+) Vv-a 138
    2. very clever, accomplished, excellent [cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100 Ja iii.281 (˚sippa); Vism 136 (identical)
    pari + odāta, cp. pariyodapeti
    Pariyodāpaka
    adjective
    1. cleansing, purifying Vism 149 (ñāṇa)
    from pariyodapeti
    Pariyodha
    1. defence AN i.154
    pari + yodha
    Pariyonaddha
    1. [ past participle of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryavanaddha “overgrown” Divy, 120, 125 covered over, enveloped DN i.246 DN iii.223 (a˚) MN i.25 SN v.263 AN ii.211 (uddhasta +); iv.86 Ja i.30 Mil 161 Snp-a 596 (= nivuta) Dhp-a iii.199 Pv-a 172 (taca˚).

    Pariyonandhati
    1. to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin ii.137 SN v.122 Ja iii.398 Dhp-a iii.153 past participle pariyonaddha (q.v.)
    2. pari + avanandhati
    Pariyonandhana
    neuter
    1. covering DN-a i.135 Dhp-a iii.198
    from above
    Pariyonāha
    1. enveloping, covering DN i.246 (= nīvaraṇa) Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs translation 311) Mil 300
    pari + onāha
    Pariyosāna
    neuter
    1. end, finish, conclusion Ja i.106 (sacca˚ = desanā˚) Pv-a 9 (desanā and passim), 136 (āyūha˚), 162 (identical), 281 (= anta) Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle ‣See e.g. Snp-a 327 especially in phrase ādi-kalyāṇa majjhe; kalyāṇa ˚kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (explained as “ekagāthā pi hi samanta-bhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik˚ dutiyatatiya-padehi majjhe k pacchima-padena pariyosānak˚” etc. at Snp-a 444), e. g DN i.62 Iti 111 & passim
    2. end, i.e. perfection, ideal Arahantship ‣See on these figuratively meanings and its appl; n to Nibbāna DN-a i.175 176 DN i.203 (brahmacariya +) ii.283 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.316); iii.55 (brahmacariya +) SN v.230 AN iii.363 (nibbāna˚), 376 (brahmacariya˚) Vism 5
    pari + osāna of ava +
    Pariyosāpeti
    1. to make fulfil Vin iii.155 DN-a i.241 Thag-a 159 (for khepeti Thag 2, 168)
    2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism 244
    causative of pari + ava + , Sanskrit syati, of which past participle pariyosita cp. osāpeti
    Pariyosita
    1.
    1. finished, concluded, satisfied, DN ii.224 MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa +)
    • past participle of pari + ava + śri, cp. ajjhosita
    1. fixed on, bent on Mil 140 (˚sankappa)
    past participle of pari + ava +
    Parirakkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. guarding, preserving, keeping Mil 356 Mil 402 Pv-a 130
    from pari + rakṣ
    Parirakkhati
    1. to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Snp 678 (pot. ˚rakkhe) Mil 410 Sdhp 413 Sdhp 553 (sīlaṁ)
    pari + rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati
    Parirañjita
    1. dyed, coloured; figuratively marked or distinguished by instrumental Mil 75
    pari + rañjita
    Pariḷāha
    1. burning, fever; fig fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain DN iii.238 (avigata˚), 289 (˚nānatta) MN i.101 (kāme) SN ii.143 sq (˚nānatta), 151 (kāma˚; vyāpāda˚, vihiṁsā˚); iii.7 sq (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata˚); iv.387; v.156 (kāyasmiṁ), 451 (jāti˚, jarā˚) AN i.68 (kāma˚), 137 (rāgaja mohaja etc.); ii.197 (vighāta); iii.3, 245 sq., 388 sq. iv.461 sq. Snp 715 (= rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. Snp-a 498) Dhp 90 (cp. Dhp-a ii.166: duvidho p kāyiko cetasiko ca) Nd2 374 (kāma˚) Ja ii.220 Mil 97 Mil 165 Mil 318 Thag-a 41 292 Vv-a 44 Pv-a 230
    pari + ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍ and ḷ ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 423
    Parillaka
    1. name of a bird (Commentary on Thag 1, 49)
    cp. Sanskrit pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saṁh. 86, 44
    Parivaccha
    neuter
    1. being active, preparation, outfit Ja v.46 Ja vi.21 (gamana˚) Dhp-a i.207 (gloss & variant reading gamana-parisajja), 395 (variant reading parisajja)
    1. Note. According to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstract from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati pavecchati = Sanskrit prayacchati
    formation from absolutive of pari + vrt, corresponding to *parivṛtyaṁ (?)
    Parivajjana
    neuter
    1. avoiding, avoidance M. i.7, 10 AN iii.387 AN iii.389 Mil 408 Vism 33. As f ˚ā at Vism 132, and ibid. as abstract parivajjanatā
    from pari + vṛj
    Parivajjeti
    1. to shun, avoid, keep away from (accusative ) MN i.10 SN i.69 SN i.102 SN i.188 SN i.224 Snp 57 (= vivajjeti Nd2 419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp. Nd1 6), 771 Iti 71 Dhp 123 (pāpāni), 269 Ja iv.378 (
    2. future ˚essati); Pv iv.146 (nivesanaṁ); iv.177 (loke adinnaṁ ˚ayassu) Mil 91 (
    3. gerundive ˚ajjayitabba), 300, 408 Pv-a 150 (variant reading ˚ajjati), 221 (jīvitaṁ, for vijahati, better read with variant reading pariccajati
    4. pari + vajjeti, causative of vṛj
    Parivaṭuma
    1. (?) adjective

      1. forming a circle, circular DN i.22 (translated “a path could be traced round it” Dialogues of the Buddha i.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. equals it to Sanskrit parivartman, and adds reference ˚kata “bounded (synonym paricchinna) Mil 132
      doubtful spelling & explanation; perhaps “parivaṭṭin?
    Parivaṭṭa
    1. round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu˚; fourfold circle MN iii.67 SN iii.59 (pañcupādāna-kkhandhe, cp. aṭṭha-parivaṭṭa-adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304); and ñāti˚; circle of relatives DN i.61 (= ñāti DN-a i.170 cp. explanation ābandhan’ atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo DN-a i.181 = PugA 236); ii.241 MN iii.33 Pug 57 Thag-a 68 Vv-a 87
    • See further at DN-a i.143 (rāja˚), 283 (identical, but spelt ˚vatta) Snp-a 210
    from pari + vṛt, cp. parivattana
    Parivaḍḍhati
    1. to increase, to be happy or prosperous Mil 297 (cittaṁ p.; opposite pariyādiyati)
    pari + vṛdh
    Parivaṇṇita
    1. extolled, praised Sdhp 557
    past participle of parivaṇṇeti
    Parivaṇṇeti
    1. to describe, praise, extol Ja vi.213 (ppr. ˚vaṇṇayanto). past participle ˚vaṇṇita
    2. pari + vaṇṇeti
    Parivatta
    adjective
    1. changing round, twisting, turning; feminine plural ˚āyo Ja v.431
    2. from pari + vṛt
    Parivattaka
    1. circle (literally turning round) Ja i.101 cp. parivattika in phrase paligha˚ (q.v.)
    from parivatta
    Parivattati
    1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intransitive), go about Vin ii.220 Ja v.431 (singaṁ); Pv iv.53 (= pariyāti Pv-a 260) Mil 118 DN-a i.265
    2. (intransitive to change about, move, change, turn to Pv ii.105 (= pariṇamati Pv-a 144); iii.44 (identical 194); iii.65 Pv-a 178
    3. causative parivatteti (q.v.) cp. vipari˚
    pari + vṛt
    Parivattana
    neuter
    1. setting going, keeping up, propounding Ja i.200 (˚manta adjective one who knows a charm); Nett 1 sq., 106
    from parivattati
    Parivattita
    1. turned round, twisted Ja iv.384
    2. recited Vism 96
    past participle of parivatteti
    Parivatteti
    1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over Ja i.202 Ja ii.275 (sarīraṁ); v.217 DN-a i.244–⁠2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism 96, in phrase mantaṁ p. to recite, practise a charm Ja i.200 Ja i.253 Pv ii.613 (= sajjhāyati vāceti Pv-a 97) cp. mantaṁ pavatteti & pavattar; saraṁ p. to make a sound Ja i.405
    2. adhippāyaṁ speak out, propound, discuss Pv-a 131
    3. to change, exchange Vin ii.174 Ja iii.437
    4. past participle parivattita (q.v.)
    causative of parivattati
    Parivadentikā
    feminine
    1. making resound, resounding, in cpd godhā˚; “string-resounding,” i.e. a string instrument lute Ja vi.580 (cp. Sanskrit *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played)
    • Another parivadentikā we find at Ja vi.540 (Commentary reading for Text ˚vadantikā, with variant reading ˚devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti)
    pari + vadento + ikā; vadento being ppr. causative of vad
    Parivasati
    1. to stay, dwell, to live under probation Vin iii.186 (gerundive ˚vatthabba); iv.30, 127 DN i.176 MN i.391 SN ii.21 Snp 697 (= pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati Snp-a 490)

      • ppr.
      • medium paribbasāna; pp parivuṭṭha & parivuttha; (q.v.)
      pari + vas2
    Parivassati
    1. at Pv ii.936 is to be read as paridhassati ‣See paridahati
    Parivahati
    1. to carry about Thag 2, 439 (dārake)
    pari + vahati
    Parivāta
    (—˚)
    1. blown round or through, i.e. filled with, stirred by Mil 19 (isi-vāta˚)
    past participle of pari +
    Parivādinī
    feminine
    1. a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138
    • See parivadentikā;
    from pari + vad, late Sanskrit the same
    Parivāra
    1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp Ja i.151 Ja iv.38 Ja vi.75 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 30 (˚cāga-cetana, read pariccāga-cetana?); usually as adjective—˚ surrounded by, in company of Vin i.38 (dasasata˚) AN ii.91 (deva˚ & asura˚) Ja i.92 (mahā-bhikkhusangha˚) Pug 52 (pheggu sāra˚; with explanation PugA 229 rukkho sayaṁ-pheggu hoti, parivāra-rukkhā pan’ assa sārā honti) Mil 285 (dvisahassa-paritta-dīpa-p˚ ā cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism 37 Dhp-a iii.262 (pañcasatabhikkhu˚) Pv-a 53 (accharā-sahassa˚), 74 (dvisahassadīpa˚); sa˚; with a retinue (of …) Ja i.49 (cattāro dīpe) Pv-a 20
    2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning “respect, attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) AN i.38 ˚sampadā) Ps i.172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra) Dhp-a ii.77 Thag-a 241 (dhana + , riches and fame) Vb-a 466 Pv-a 137 (sampatti = yaso) Vv-a 122 (= yaso)
    3. ingredient accessories (

      • plural ), requisite Ja i.266 (pañca-sugandhika˚) Mil 290 (sa˚ dāna) DN-a i.297 (= parikkhārā)
      • as name it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka (“The Accessory”), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books Snp-a 97 (sa-parivāraka Vinaya-piṭaka) Vb-a 432
    from pari + vṛ
    Parivāraka
    adjective
    1. accompanying, forming a retinue Ja v.234 ‣See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka
    parivāra + ka
    Parivāraṇa
    neuter
    1. covering, drapery (so translation at Kindred Sayings p. 45) SN i.33
    2. adjective (—˚) surrounded by Ja v.195 (= parikkhitta Commentary )
    from pari + vṛ
    Parivārita
    1. surrounded, figuratively honoured SN i.166 SN i.192 = Th1,1235 Ja ii.48 purakkhata +) Dhp-a iv.49 (= purakkhata Dhp 343) Dhs-a 1 (devānaṁ gaṇena); Dāvs i.16 (variant reading for parimārita)
    past participle of parivāreti
    Parivāreti
    1. to cover, encom passive surround Ja i.181 (nagaraṁ ˚ayiṁsu); ii.102 (
    2. future ˚essati) iii.371 (rukkhaṁ); iv.405 (for parikaroti); vi.179.
    3. absolutive parivāretvā used as preposition “round” Ja i.172 (pokkharaṇiṁ)

      • In meaning “to serve, attend upon,” also “to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself,” parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e.g. at DN ii.13 Pv iv.129 (variant reading ˚cāreti) Pv-a 228 in ppr.
      • medium ˚vāriyamāna (with variant reading ˚cāriyamāna) at DN ii.21 AN i.145 Ja i.58 Vv-a 92
      • ‣ See also anuparivāreti.
      • past participle parivārita (q.v.)
      causative of pari + vṛ
    Parivāsa
    1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā˚ Dhp-a iii.118 Dhs-a 215
    2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin iii.186 (˚ṁ vasati, cp. parivuttha) iv.30 SN ii.21 (˚ṁ vasati). ˚ṁ deti to allow probation Vin i.49 Vin ii.7 Vin iv.30 127; ˚ṁ yācati to ask for probation Vin iv.30 127
    3. samodhāna˚ inclusive probation Vin ii.48f.; suddhanta˚ probation of complete purification Vin ii.59f.
    4. period, time (literally stay) interval, duration Ud 7 (eka-ratti˚).

      1. ˚dāna the allowance of probation AN i.99
      from pari + vas2, cp. Epic Sanskrit parivāsa only in meaning 1
    Parivāsika
    adjective
    1. “staying,” i.e. usual, accustomed, common Snp-a 35 (˚bhatta; or is it “fermented,” and thus to be taken to No. 3?) a˚ unusual, new, uncommon Ja ii.435 (where it is combined with abhinava, which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar explanation of paccaggha at Pv-a 87), with variant reading samparivāsita (well-seasoned?)
    2. a probationer Vin ii.162 In this meaning usually spelt pāri˚ (q.v.)
    3. in combination cira˚ (with reference to food) it may be interpreted either as “staying long, being in use for a long time,” i.e. stale or it may be derived from vāsa3 (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rhys Davids in Expositor 63, 64) “long-fermented” (better “seasoned"?) Dhs-a 48 (˚vāsika & vāsiya) Thag-a 29

      from pari + vas2 ‣See parivasati
    Parivāsita
    adjective
    1. perfumed (all round) Ja i.51 (variant reading ˚vārita); cp. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at Ja ii.435 for aparivāsika
    pari + past participle of vāseti from vāsa3
    Parivitakka
    1. reflection, meditation, thought, consideration MN ii.170 (ākāra˚), Vin ii.74 SN ii.115 (identical) AN ii.193 (identical) Mil 13 Dhp-a ii.62 Dhs-a 74 Vv-a 3 Pv-a 282 (vutta—˚e nipāta in explanation of nūna. Usually in phrase cetasā ceto-parivitakka mental reflection, e.g. DN i.117 DN ii.218 SN i.121 SN i.178 SN iii.96 SN v.294 AN iii.374 and cetasoparivitakka, e.g. DN i.134 SN i.71 SN i.103 SN i.139 SN ii.273 SN iii.96, 103; iv.105; v.167 AN ii.20
    pari + vitakka, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit parivitarka Divy 291
    Parivitakkita
    1. reflected, meditated, thought over MN i.32 SN i.193
    • nt. ˚ṁ reflection, thinking over Pv-a 123 (˚e with reference to nūna, i.e. particle of reflection)
    past participle of parivitakketi
    Parivitakketi
    1. to consider, reflect, meditate upon Ja iii.277 past participle ˚vitakkita (q.v.)
    2. pari + vitakketi
    Parivitthiṇṇa
    1. spread out wide Mil 99
    pari + vitthiṇṇa, Sanskrit vīstīrṇa, past participle, of vi + stṛ
    Parivisaka
    adjective
    1. providing, serving food Vism 108
    from parisati
    Parivisati
    1. to serve (with food = instrumental), wait upon present, offer Vin i.240 (bhatṭena); ii.77 (kaṇājakena bilangadutiyena) DN ii.127 Ja i.87 Ja i.90 Ja ii.277 iv.116 Pv ii.84 (= bhojeti Pv-a 107); ii.88 (identical 109); Vism 108 150 (sūdo bhattāraṁ p.) Vv-a 6 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 78
    pari + viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise infinitive in R. V. x.6110
    Parivīmaṁsati
    1. to think over, consider thoroughly examine, search SN ii.80f. Iti 42 = Sn 975 (ppr dhammaṁ ˚vīmaṁsamāna, cp. Nd1 508) DN-a i.134 Dhp-a iv.117 (attānaṁ)
    pari + vīmaṁsati, Desidentical of pari + man, cp. vīmaṁsā for mīmāṁsā
    Parivīmaṁsā
    feminine
    1. complete inquiry, thorough search or examination MN iii.85 SN iii.331 SN v.68 Snp-a 173 Parivuttha & vuttha;
    pari + vīmaṁsā
    Parivuṭṭha
    ˚vuttha;
    1. staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one’s probation (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paryuṣita-parivāsa Avs i.259 Vin iii.186 (tth) SN ii.21 (ṭṭh)
    past participle of parivasati
    Parivuta
    1. surrounded by (—˚ or instrumental) SN i.177 Ja i.152 (miga-gaṇa˚), 203 (devagaṇena); ii.127 (dāsi-gaṇa˚); iii.371 (mahā-jana˚); vi.75 Vv 165 (= samantato p. Vv-a 81) Pv-a 3 (dhutta-jana˚), 62 (parijana˚), 140 (deva-gaṇa˚)
    past participle of pari + vṛ
    Pariveṭhita
    1. enveloped, covered Mil 22 O past participle nibbeṭṭhita (q.v.)
    2. past participle of pari + veṣṭ
    Pariveṇa
    neuter
    1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 8453 (explained at Vv-a 351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṁ pāsāda-kūtâgāra-ratti-ṭṭhān’ ādisampannaṁ pākāraparikkhittaṁ dvārakoṭṭhaka-yuttaṁ āvāsaṁ) Dhp-a i.260 (pāsāda˚)
    2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.109, 203) Vin i.49 = ii.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna-sālā); i.216 (vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ upasankamitvā), 247 (identical); ii.167 (vihāra +); iii.69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaṁ); iv.52, 252 (˚vāsika) Ja i.126 Mil 15 (˚ṁ sammajjati), 19; Vism 90 Dhp-a ii.179 (˚dvāra); iv.204 Vb-a 13
    etymology?
    Pariveṇi
    feminine = pariveṇa 2 Vin i.80 (anu pariveṇiyaṁ each in their own cell), 106 (identical).
    Parivesaka
    adjective
    1. waiting, serving up meals Vism 109. feminine ˚ikā Thag-a 17
    2. from pari + viṣ
    Parivesanā
    feminine
    1. distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin i.229 SN i.172 Snp p. 13 (= bhattavissagga Snp-a 140) Mil 247 Mil 249 Dhp-a iv.162 Pv-a 109 (˚ṭṭhāna), 135 (identical)
    from pari + vis
    Parivyatta
    adjective
    1. quite conspicuous or clear Vism 162
    pari + vyatta
    Parisaṁsibbita
    1. sewn together, entwined Dhp-a iii.198 (variant reading for saṁsibbita +)
    pari + past participle of saṁsibbati
    Parisakkati
    1. to go about to (with infinitive or dative), to endeavour, undertake try Vin ii.18 = AN iv.345 (alābhāya) Ja i.173 (vadhāya); ii.394; Pv iv.52 (= payogaṁ karoti Pv-a 259)
    pari + sakkati
    Parisaṅkati
    1. to suspect, fear, have apprehension Ja iii.210 Ja iii.541 Dhp-a i.81 past participle ˚saṅkita (q.v.) cp. āsaṅkati
    2. pari + sankati
    Parisaṅkā
    feminine
    1. suspicion, misgiving Vin iv.314 DN iii.218 cp. āsaṅkā
    from pari + śaṅk
    Parisaṅkita
    1. suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin ii.243 (diṭṭha-suta˚) AN iii.128 Ja iv.214 Ja v.80 Mil 372 Dhp-a i.223 (āsankita˚)
    • cp. āsaṅkita & ussaṅkita;
    past participle of parisankati
    Parisaṅku
    1. in ˚patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, name of a path leading up to Gijjha-pabbata ‣See explanation at Ja iii.485 Ja iii.484
    Parisaṅgāhāpeti
    1. to induce someone to mention or relate something Ja vi.328
    pari + causative of sangaṇhāti
    Parisaṭha
    adjective
    1. very fraudulent or crafty Pug 23 (saṭha +)
    pari + saṭha
    Parisaṇṭhāti
    1. to return into the former state, to be restored; aorist ˚saṇṭhāsi Ja iii.341
    2. pari + saṇṭhāti
    Parisaṇha
    (adj,.)
    1. very smooth or soft Mil 198
    pari + saṇha
    Parisandeti
    1. to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaṁ abhisandeti p DN i.75 DN i.214 MN iii.92f. etc. explained as “samantato sandeti” at DN-a i.217 past participle parisanna (q.v.)
    2. pari + causative of syad
    Parisanna
    1. surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well-watered DN i.75 MN iii.94
    past participle of parisandati, cp. parisandeti
    Parisappati
    1. to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dhp 342 Dhp 343 (= saṁsappati bhāyati Dhp-a iv.49)
    pari + sṛp
    Parisappanā
    feminine
    1. running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always combined with āsappanā and only found with reference to the exegesis of “doubt” (vicikicchā or kankhā) Nd2 1 Dhs 425 (cp. Dhs translation 116 and Dhs-a 260) DN-a i.69
    from parisappati
    Parisamantato
    adverb
    1. from all sides Vv-a 236
    pari + samantato
    Parisambāhati
    1. to stroke, to rub from all sides MN ii.120 SN i.178 SN i.194 AN v.65
    pari + sambāhati
    Parisarati
    1. [pari + smr, but according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. pari here from Prakrit paḍi = Sanskrit prati, thus for pratismarati to remember, recollect Ja vi.199 (read parissaraṁ)
    Parisahati
    1. to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of SN iv.112 exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd1 12 361 = Nd2 420
    pari + sahati
    Parisā

    feminine

    1. surrounding people, group collection, company, assembly, association, multitude Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon viz, eight assemblies (khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa˚, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṁsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚ or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty-Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) DN ii.109 DN iii.260 MN i.72 AN iv.307 four assemblies (the first four of the above) at DN iii.236 Nd1 163; other four, representing the Buddha’s Order (bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, upāsaka˚, upāsikā˚, or the ass of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp. same enumeration at Divy 299) SN ii.218 AN v.10 cp. Ja i.40 (catu-parisa-majjhe), 85 (identical), 148 (identical)
    • two assemblies (viz. Brahma˚, Māra˚) at DN iii.260 allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta-rattā & asāratta-rattā MN ii.160 = AN i.70 sq
    • For various uses of the word ‣See the following passages: Vin ii.188 296 (rājaparisā); iii.12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); iv.153 (genitive parisāya) MN i.153 (nevāpika˚); ii.160; iii.47 SN i.155 (brahma˚), 162 sarājikā p.), 177 AN i.25 (mahā˚), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya˚), 242 (tisso p.); ii.19 (˚āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva˚) iii.253 (khattiya˚); iv.80, 114 Iti 64 (upāsakā ˚sāsu virocare) Snp 349 Snp 825f. Ja i.151 Ja i.264 Ja vi.224 (omissaka˚); Pv iii.96 Mil 187 Mil 249 Mil 359 (38 rāja-parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue) Pv-a 2 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 78 and passim; Sdhp 277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin iv.71
    • adverb ˚ṁ Thag-a 69
    • Note. The form of parisā as first part of a compound is parisa˚ (= *parisad, which laṭter is restored in compound parisaggata = *parisad-gata)
    • ‣ See also pārisagga
    1. ˚antare within the assembly Ja iii.61
    • ˚ āvacara one who moves in the society, i.e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus AN iv.314 AN v.10
    • ˚gata (ggata) having entered a company Snp 397 (= pūga-majjha-gata Snp-a 377) Pug 29
    • ˚ññū knowing the assembly AN iii.148 AN iv.113 (+ kālaññū puggalaññū), cp. DN iii.252
    • ˚dussana defilement of the Assembly AN ii.225 (opposite ˚sobhaṇā) -pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation Dhp-a i.67 iii.172
    • ˚majjhe in the midst of the assembly Ja i.267 ii.352 Pv-a 11
    • ˚sārajja being afraid of the a. Mil 196 = Nd2 470 (so read for parisārajja)
    cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V. also pariṣad as adjective surrounding, literally “sitting round,” from pari + sad In Pāli the consonant stem has passed into a vocalic ā-stem with the only preservation of consonant
  • locative singular parisati Vin iv.285 AN ii.180 (ī) Ja v.61 DN-a i.141 and parisatiṁ MN i.68 AN ii.180 (variant reading ) Ja v.332 besides the regular forms parisāyaṁ (
  • locative singular) Vin ii.296 AN v.70 and parisāsu (
  • locative plural ) SN ii.27 Iti 64
  • Parisiñcati
    1. to sprinkle all over, to bathe MN i.161 SN i.8 (gattāni); Sdhp 595
    pari + siñcati
    Parisibbita
    1. sewn round, bordered Vin i.186 Ja v.377
    past participle of pari + sibbati
    Parisukkha
    adjective
    1. dried up, very dry Ja i.215 (of fields) Mil 302 (of the heart) Pv-a 64 (˚sarīra)
    pari + sukkha
    Parisukkhita
    1. dried up, withered Mil 303 (˚hadaya)
    past participle of pari + ṡukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ
    Parisujjhati
    1. to become clear or clean, to be purified SN i.214 Snp 183 Snp 184 past participle parisuddha (q.v.)
    2. passive of pari + śudh
    Parisuddha
    adjective
    1. clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin ii.237 MN i.26 MN iii.11 SN ii.199 (˚dhammadesanā); iii.235; v.301, 354 AN iii.125 (˚ñāṇa-dassana) iv.120 sq. Ja i.265 Vism 2 (accanta˚) Pug 68 (samāhite citte parisuddha) Mil 106 DN-a i.177 219 Snp-a 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa-bhāvena p.) Pv-a 44 Pv-a 70. Very frequently combined with pariyodāta (q.v.)-aparisuddha unclean Vin ii.236 MN i.17
    1. ˚ājīva adjective of pure livelihood DN i.63 ‣See DN-a i.181 AN iii.124 (cp. pārisuddhi)
    2. pari + past participle of śudh
    Parisuddhatta
    neuter
    1. purity, cleanliness, perfection MN i.36 Mil 103f.; Vism 168
    • As
    • feminine pari-suddhatā at Vism 30
    abstract from parisuddha
    Parisuddhi
    feminine
    1. purity, purification SN i.169 The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q.v.)
    from pari + śudh
    Parisumbhati
    1. to strike, hit, throw down Ja iii.347 (= paharati Commentary ); vi.370, 376 (identical Commentary )
    pari + sumbhati
    Parisumbhana
    neuter
    1. throwing down Ja vi.508 (bhūmiyā p.)
    from pari + śumbh
    Parisussati
    1. to dry quite up, waste quite away Ja ii.5 Ja ii.339 Ja ii.437 causative parisoseti (q.v.)
    2. pari + sussati
    Parisussana
    neuter
    1. drying up completely, withering Ja v.97
    from pari + śuṣ
    Parisedita
    1. heated, hatched, made ripe MN i.104 (bījāni) SN iii.153 Vin iii.3 Aiv.125 (aṇḍāni), 176
    past participle of pari + causative of svid, Sanskrit parisvedita in slightly different use
    Parisesa
    1. remnant, remainder, rest; only negative aparisesa adjective without remainder, complete, entire MN i.92 MN i.110 AN iii.166 = Pug 64 AN iv.428 (˚ñāṇadassana)
    2. pari + sesa
    Parisoka
    1. great grief, severe mourning Ps i.38 (anto˚ in definition of soka)
    pari + soka
    Parisodhana
    neuter
    1. cleansing, purification Mil 215
    from parisodheti
    Parisodhita
    1. cleaned, cleansed, purified Mil 415 Sdhp 414
    past participle of parisodheti
    Parisodheti
    1. to cleanse, clean, purify MN iii.3 MN iii.35 (aorist ˚sodhesi) Snp 407 (
    2. aorist ˚sodhayi) Dhp-a ii.162 (vodapeti +)

      • frequently in phrase cittaṁ p to cleanse one’s heart (from = ablative) DN iii.49 SN iv.104 AN ii.211 AN iii.92 Nd1 484 Pug 68
      • past participle parisodhita (q.v.)
      pari + causative of śudh
    Parisosa
    1. becoming dried up, dryness, withering away SN i.91
    from pari + śuṣ
    Parisosita
    1. dried up, withered away Sdhp 9
    past participle of parisoseti
    Parisoseti
    1. to make dry up, to exhaust, make evaporate (water) Mil 389 past participle parisosita (q.v.)
    2. causative of parisussati
    Parissañjati
    (˚ssajati?)
    1. to embrace, enfold, Ja i.466 Ja vi.156 (˚itvā, variant reading ˚ssajitvā & palisajjitvā)
    pari + svaj
    Parissanta
    1. tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv ii.936 Vv-a 305 Sdhp 9 Sdhp 101
    past participle of parissamati
    Parissama
    1. fatigue, toil, exhaustion, Vv-a 289 305 (addhāna˚ from journeying) Pv-a 3 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 113 127
    from pari + śram
    Parissaya
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. danger, risk, trouble MN i.10 (utu˚) AN iii.388 (identical) Snp 42 Snp 45 Snp 770 Snp 921 Snp 960f. Dhp 328 (˚ayāni sīha-vyaggh'-ādayo pākaṭa-parissaye, rāga-bhaya-dosabhay’ ādayo paṭicchanna-parissaye Dhp-a iv.29) Nd1 12 = Nd2 420 (where same division into pākaṭa˚ & paṭicchanna˚) Nd1 360 365 Ja i.418 Ja ii.405 Ja v.315 Ja v.441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism 34 (utu˚) Snp-a 88 (explained as paricca sayantī ti p.) Dhp-a iii.199 (˚mocana) Pv-a 216 Dhs-a 330
      from pari + ; śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Indische Streifen iii.395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader ii.167, 168
    Parissāvana
    neuter
    1. a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin i.209 ii.119 and passim Ja i.198 Ja iii.377 Nd1 226 Dhp-a iii.260 (udaka˚) Vv-a 40 63; Sdhp 593
    from pari + causative of sru
    Parissāvanaka
    adjective-noun
    1. only negative ; : 1. one who has no strainer Vin ii.119 Ja i.198
    • not to be filtered, i.e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered Ja i.400 (so read for ˚ssavanaka). Or is it “not overflowing"?
    • from parissāvana
    Parissāvita
    1. strained, filtered Ja i.198 (udaka)
    past participle of parissāveti
    Parissāveti
    1. to strain or filter Ja i.198 (pānīyaṁ) DN-a i.206 (udakaṁ); iii.207 (pānīyaṁ)
    • pp parissāvita (q.v.)
    causative of pari + sru
    Parissuta
    1. overflowing Ja vi.328 (= atipuṇṇattā pagharamāna)
    past participle of pari + sru
    Parihaṭa
    (˚hata)
    1. surrounded by (—˚) encircled; only in phrase sukha-parihaṭa (+ sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin iii.13 (correct sukhedhita accordingly!) Ja ii.190 (pariharaka Burmese variant ); vi.219 (= sukhe ṭhita)
    past participle of pariharati
    Parihaṭṭha
    1. gladdened, very pleased Pv-a 13
    past participle of pari + hṛṣ
    Pariharaka
    adjective noun
    1. surrounding or surrounded, having on one’s hands Ja ii.190 (sukha˚, variant reading for ˚parihaṭa)
    2. an armlet, bracelet Vv-a 167 (variant reading ˚haraṇa; explained as hatthālaṅkāra.) ‣See also parihāraka
    from pari + hṛ
    Pariharaṇa
    neuter
    1. protection, care Vism 500 (gabbha˚); Kp-a 235 DN-a i.207 (kāya˚) Dhp-a ii.179 (kāyassa)
    2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha˚ Dhp-a iii.261 405. cp. following
    from pari + hṛ
    Pariharaṇā
    feminine
    1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure Pv-a 219 (with variant reading ˚caraṇā for paricārikā Pv iv.12)
    2. keeping secret, guarding hiding, deceiving Vb 358 = Pug 23
    = pariharaṇa
    Pariharati
    1. to take care of, to attend to (
    2. accusative ), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin i.42 ii.188 DN ii.100 (sanghaṁ) DN ii.14 (gabbhaṁ kucchinā) MN i.124 MN i.459 SN iii.1 AN iii.123 Ja i.52 (kucchiyā), 143 170 Mil 392 Mil 410 (attānaṁ) 418 Snp-a 78 Dhp-a ii.232 (aggiṁ, variant reading paricarati, which is the usual) Pv-a 63 (kucchiyā), 177. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pariharati in same meaning e.g. Avs i.193, 205
    3. to carry about DN ii.19 (ankena) MN i.83 Snp 440 (muñjaṁ parihare, 1 singular pres
    4. medium Snp-a 390 takes it as parihareyya) Mil 418 (āḷakaṁ p.)
      • intranstitive to move round, go round circle, revolve MN i.328 AN i.277 (candima-suriyā p. cp. AN v.59) = Vism 205 Ja i.395 Ja iv.378 Ja vi.519 DN-a i.85 Pv-a 204
      • to conceal Vin iii.52 (sunkaṁ). 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Commentary style) uttān’ atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning Snp-a 178 419, 437 462.
      • past participle parihaṭa.
      • passive parihīrati (q.v.)
      • ‣ See also anupariharati
    pari + hṛ
    Pariharitabbatta
    neuter
    1. necessity of guarding Vism 98
    abstract from gerundive of pariharati
    Parihasati
    1. to laugh at, mock, deride Ja i.457 - causative parihāseti to make laugh Ja v.297
    2. pari + has
    Parihāna
    neuter
    1. diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay SN ii.206f. AN ii.40 (abhabbo parihānāya) iii.173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (˚dhamma); v.103 (identical) 156 sq. Iti 71 (˚āya saṁvattati) Dhp 32 (abhabbo p ˚āyo) Pug 12 14
    from pari +
    Parihāni
    feminine
    1. loss, diminution (opposite vuddhi) SN ii.206 SN iv.76 SN iv.79 SN v.143 SN v.173 AN i.15 AN iii.76f. iv.288; v.19 sq., 96, 124 sq. Ja ii.233 Dhp-a iii.335 iv.185
    from pari +
    Parihāniya
    adjective
    1. connected with or causing decay or loss DN ii.75f. (˚ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin) AN iv.16f. Vb 381 Vb-a 507 sq- SN v.85
    parihāna + ya
    Parihāpeti
    1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste SN ii.29 Ja iv.214 (vegaṁ) Mil 244 (cittaṁ to lose heart, to despair) Pv-a 78
    2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin i.72 (rājakiccaṁ) Ja ii.438 Ja iv.132 (vaṭṭaṁ); v.46 Mil 404 (mūḷakammaṁ)
    3. negative
    4. absolutive aparihāpetvā without omission Dhs-a 168 ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism 122
    causative of parihāyati
    Parihāyati
    1. to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin i.5 MN iii.46f. (opposite abhivaḍḍhati) SN i.120 SN i.137 SN iii.125 SN iv.76f. AN iii.252 Dhp 364 Snp 767 Ja ii.197 Ja iv.108 Nd1 5 (paridhaṁsati + Mil 249 (identical) Pug 12 (read ˚hāyeyya for ˚hāreyya) Snp-a 167 (+ vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati +) Pv-a 5 Pv-a 76 (variant reading ), 125 (˚hāyeyyuṁ). past participle parihīna, passive parihiyyati, causative parihāpeti (q.v.)
    2. pari +
    Parihāra
    1. attention, care (especially
    2. ˚), in compounds. like gabbha˚; care of the foetus Dhp-a i.4
    3. dāraka˚ care of the infant Ja ii.20
    4. kumāra˚ looking after the prince Ja i.148 Ja ii.48 Dhp-a i.346
    5. dup˚ hard to protect Ja i.437 Vism 95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?
    6. honour, privilege, dignity Vin i.71 Ja iv.306
    7. gārava˚)
    8. surrounding (literally), circuit of land Ja iv.461

      • surrounding (figuratively), attack; in cpd visama˚; being attacked by adversities AN ii.87 Nd2 304ic Mil 112 Mil 135

    9. avoidance, keeping away from Ja i.186

      1. ˚patha “circle road,” i.e. (1) a roundabout way Dhp-a ii.192 (2) encircling game DN i.6 = Vin ii.10 (explained as “bhūmiyaṁ nānāpathaṁ maṇḍalaṁ katvā tattha pariharitabbaṁ pariharantānaṁ kīḷanaṁ” DN-a i.85 translated as “keeping going over diagrams” Dialogues of the Buddha i.10 with remark “a kind of primitive hop-scotch”)
      from pari + hṛ; , cp. pariharati
    Parihāraka
    adjective-noun
    1. surrounding, encircling; a guard AN ii.180
    from pari + hṛ
    Parihārika
    1. keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining DN i.71 (kāya˚ cīvara, kucchi˚ piṇḍapāta; explained as kāya-pariharaṇa-mattakena & kucchi˚ at DN-a; i.207 correct reading accordingly) MN i.180 MN iii.34 Pug 58 Vism 65 (kāya˚, of āvara)
    from parihāra
    Parihārin
    adjective
    1. taking care of, (worth) keeping SN iv.316 (udaka-maṇika)
    from parihāra
    Parihāsa
    1. laughter, laughing at, mockery Ja i.116 (˚keḷi), 377 Dhp-a i.244
    from pari + has, cp. parihasati
    Parihāsiṁsu
    1. at Ja i.384 is to be read ˚bhāsiṁsu
    Parihiyyati
    1. to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin (= dhaṁsati) Ja iii.260
    passive of parihāyati, Sanskrit ˚hīyate
    Parihīna
    1. fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute SN i.121 AN iii.123 Snp 827 Snp 881 (˚pañña) Ja i.112 Ja i.242 Ja iv.200 Nd1 166 289 Mil 249 Mil 281 (a˚) Pv-a 220 (= nihīna)
    past participle of parihāyati
    Parihīnaka
    adjective
    1. one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (ablative or instrumental) DN i.103
    parihīna + ka
    Parihīrati
    1. to be carried about (or better “taken care of,” according to Buddhaghosa’s explanation Snp-a 253 ‣See also Psalms of the Brethren 226) Snp 205 = Th 1, 453
    passive of pariharati, Sanskrit parihriyate in development ˚hriyate → *hiriyati → *hiyirati → ˚hīrati
    Parīta
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Parūpa˚
    1. ; as para + upa˚ (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) ‣See under para
    Parūḷha
    adjective
    1. grown, grown long, mostly in phrase ˚kaccha-nakha-loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e.g. at SN i.78 Ud 65 Ja iv.362 Ja iv.371 Ja vi.488 Mil 163 (so read for p
    • kaccha-loma); Sdhp 104. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.139 s.v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i.e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair
    • Further in following phrases: mukhaṁ p bearded face Ja iv.387 ˚kesa-nakha-loma Ja i.303 ˚kesa-massu with hair & beard grown long Ja iv.159 ˚kaccha with long grass Ja vi.100 ˚massu-dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DN-a i.263
    past participle of pa + ruh, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prarūḍha (-śmaśru) Jtm 210
    Pare
    • adverb ‣See para 2 c.

    Pareta
    1. gone on to, affected with, overcome by (—˚), synonym with abhibhūta (e.g. Pv-a 41 Pv-a 80). Very frequent in combination with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e.g. khudā˚, ghamma˚, jighacchā˚ dukkha˚, dosa˚, rāga˚, soka˚, sneha˚, Vin i.5 DN ii.36 MN i.13 MN i.114 MN i.364 MN i.460 MN iii.14 MN iii.92 SN ii.110 SN iii.93 SN iv.28 AN i.147 = It 89 AN iii.25 AN iii.96 Snp 449 Snp 736 Snp 818 (= samohita samannāgata pihita Nd1 149) 1092, 1123 Ja iii.157 Pv i.86 ii.24 Mil 248 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 93
    past participle of pareti, more likely para + i than pari + i, although Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit correspondent is parīta, e.g. śokaparīta Jtm 3194
    Pareti
    1. to set out for, go on to, come to (accusative ) SN ii.20 AN v.2 AN v.139f. 312 Ja v.401 (= pakkhandati Commentary ). pp pareta (q.v.)
    2. in form = parā + i but more likely pari + i, thus = pariyeti
    Paro
    adverb
    1. beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only ˚-in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with accusative of numerals) e.g. paropaññāsa more than 50 DN ii.93
    2. parosataṁ more than 100 Ja v.203 Ja v.497
    3. parosahassaṁ over 1,000 DN ii.16 SN i.192 = Th 1, 1238; Snp p. 106 (= atireka-sahassaṁ Snp-a 450) ‣See also parakkaroti
    4. cp. Vedic paras; to para
    Parokkha
    adjective
    1. beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible Mil 291 ablative parokkhā (
    2. adverb ) behind one’s back, in the absence of Ja iii.89 (parammukhā Commentary ; opposite sammukhā)
    3. paro + akkha = Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ + akṣa)
    Parodati
    1. to cry out (for) Ja i.166 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 257
    pa + rud
    Paropariya
    1. (˚ñāṇa) ‣See under indriya˚. The form is paro + pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para apara (upara?) + ya, i.e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. cp. ; parovara
    Parovara
    adjective-noun
    1. high & low, far & near; plural in sense of “all kinds” (cp. uccâvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Snp 353 (Burmese variant varāvaraṁ, varovaraṁ; explained as “lokuttara-lokiya-vasena su̇ndar âsundaraṁ dūre-santikaṁ vā” Snp-a 350), 475 (˚ā dhammā; Burmese variant paroparā; explained as “parâvarā sundar’ âsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā Snp-a 410), 704 (kāme parovare; Burmese variant paropare explained as sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe Snp-a 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd2 ‣See explanation Nd2 422b; explained as “parāni ca orāni ca, par’ attabhāva-sak’ attabhāv’ ādīni parāni ca orāni ca” Snp-a 590), 1148 (paroparaṁ Nd2 ‣See Nd2 422a; explained as “hīna-ppaṇītaṁ” Snp-a 607)

      • Note. Already in RV we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere ‣See e.g. RV i.128, 3; i.164, 12
      • On paropara ‣See further Wackernagel Altindische Grammatik ii.121 d
      para + avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction ‣See Nd2 p. 13
    Pala
    (—˚)
    1. a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala ‣See phala2, only in compound sata˚; a hundred (carat) in weight Thag 1, 97 (of kaṁsa) Ja vi.510 (sataphala kaṁsa = phalasatena katā kañcana-pātī Commentary ). Also in combination catuppala-tippala-dvipala-ekapala-sāṭikā Vism 339
    classical Sanskrit pala
    Palaka
    1. a species of plant Ja vi.564
    cp. late Sanskrit pala, flesh, meat
    Palagaṇḍa
    1. a mason, bricklayer, plasterer MN i.119 SN iii.154 (the reading phala˚ is authentic ‣See Geiger, P.G. § 40) AN iv.127
    cp. Sanskrit palagaṇḍa Halāyudha ii.436; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit palagaṇḍa Avs i.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp ii.113
    Palaṇḍuka
    1. an onion Vin iv.259
    cp. Epic Sanskrit palāṇḍu, pala (white) + aṇḍu (= aṇḍa? egg)
    Paladdha
    1. taken over, “had,” overcome, deceived MN i.511 (nikata vañcita p. where variant reading and id p. SN iv.307 however reads paluddha Ja iii.260 (dava˚ abhibhūta Commentary )
    past participle of pa + labh
    Palapati
    1. to talk nonsense Ja ii.322 cp. vi˚
    pa + lapati
    Palambati
    1. to hang down Thag-a 210 Sdhp 110. past participle palambita (q.v.) ‣See also abhi˚;
    2. pa + lambati
    Palambita
    1. hanging down Thag 2, 256 259 Thag-a 211
    past participle of palambati
    Palambheti
    1. to deceive DN i.50 cp. DN-a i.151
    pa + lambheti
    Palaḷita
    1. led astray SN iv.197 (variant reading ˚lāḷita). At AN iii.5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. (“sporting in pleasures"? Or should we read palolita?)
    pa + laḷita
    Palavati
    1. to float, swim Vin iv.112 Dhp 334 Thag 1, 399 Ja iii.190
    Vedic plavati, plu
    Palasata
    1. a rhinoceros Ja vi.277 (variant reading phalasata explained as “khagga-miga,” with gloss “balasata”); as phalasata at Ja vi.454 (explained as phalasata-camma Commentary ) ‣See palāsata
    according to Trenckner, Note. p. 59, possibly from Sanskrit parasvant
    Palahati
    1. to lick Pv iii.52 = Pv-a 198
    pa + lahati
    Palāta
    1. run away Ja vi.369 Vism 326 Vv-a 100 Dhp-a ii.21
    contracted form of palāyita, past participle of palāyati, cp. Prakrit palāa (= *palāta) Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 567
    Palātatta
    neuter
    1. running away, escape Ja i.72
    abstract from palāta
    Palāpa1
    1. chaff of corn, pollard AN iv.169 (yava˚) Ja i.467 Ja i.468 Ja iv.34 Snp-a 165 (in exegesis of palāpa2 Burmese variant palāsa), 312 (identical) Ja iv.34 Ja iv.35 (perhaps better to read kula-palāso & palāsa-bhūta for palāpa)
    Vedic palāva, cp. Latin palea, Russ pelëva ‣See also Geiger, Pali Grammar § 396, where pralāva is to be corrected to palāva
    Palāpa2
    1. prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj talking idly, chaffing, idle, void MN iii.80 (a˚) SN i.166 (not palapaṁ), 192 = Th 1, 1237 AN iv.169 (samaṇa in allegory with yava˚ of palāpa1) Snp 89 (māyāvin asaṁyata palāpa = palāpa-sadisattā Snp-a 165), 282 Mil 414 (here also explained as palāpa1 by Snp-a 312) Vb-a 104 In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Mil 5 Mil 10
    Vedic pralāpa, pa + lap; taken by Pali Commentary as identical with palāpa1, their example followed by Trenckner, Note. 63, cp. also Miln. translation ii.363 “chaff as frivolous talk”
    Palāpin
    1. in apalāpin “not neglectful” ‣See palāsin
    Palāpeti1
    1. to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away Ja ii.433 Dhp-a i.164 192 iii.206
    causative of palāyati
    Palāpeti2
    1. to prattle, talk Ja i.73 Ja i.195
    causative of pa + lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as denominative
    Palāyati
    1. to run (away) Vin iii.145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.) AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti) Snp 120 Ja ii.10 Dhp-a i.193 Pv-a 253 Pv-a 284 (= dhāvati)
    • ppr. palāyanto SN i.209 = Th 2, 248 = Pv ii.717 = Nett 131 = Dhp-a iv.21
    • aorist palāyi SN i.219 Ja i.208 Ja ii.209 Ja ii.219 Ja ii.257 Ja iv.420 Dhp-a iii.208 DN-a i.142 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 274;
    • absolutive palāyitvā Ja i.174 Pv-a 154 inf palāyituṁ Ja i.202 Ja vi.420
    • Contracted forms are pres. paleti (‣ See also the analogy-form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) DN i.54 (spelt phaleti, explained DN-a i.165 by gacchati) Snp 1074 Snp 1144 (= vajati gacchati Nd2 423) Dhp 49 Nd1 172 Ja v.173 Ja v.241 Vv 8436 (= gacchati Vv-a 345) Pv i.111 (gacchati Pv-a 56);
    • aorist palittha Ja v.255
    • future palehiti Thag 1, 307
    • imperative palehi Snp 831 (= gaccha Snp-a 542)-
    • past participle palāta & palāyita; Caus palāpeti1 (q.v.)
    cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy
    Palāyana
    neuter
    1. running away Dhp-a i.164 ‣See also pālana
    from palāy
    Palāyanaka
    adjective
    1. running away Ja ii.210 (˚ṁ karoti to put to flight)
    from palāy
    Palāyin
    adjective
    1. running away, taking to flight SN i.221 = 223
    • Usually negative apalāyin SN i.185 and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin SN i.99 Thag 1, 864 Ja iv.296 and passim ‣See apalāyin & apalāsin;
    from palāy
    Palāla
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. straw Ja i.488 Dhp-a i.69
      1. ˚channaka a roof of thatch Thag 1, 208
      • ˚piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism 257 = KhA 56
      • ˚pīṭhaka “straw foot-stool,” a kind of punishment or torture MN i.87 AN ii.122 = Mil 197 ‣See Miln translation i.277 “Straw Seat, i.e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw Nd1 154 Nd2 604 Ja v.273
      • ˚puñja a heap of straw DN i.71 MN iii.3 AN i.241 AN ii.210 Pug 68 Vb-a 367
      • ˚puñjaka same as puñja Mil 342
      cp. Vedic & Epic Sanskrit palāla
    Palāḷita
    1. ‣See palaḷita
    Palāsa1
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree Ja iii.23 (in Palāsa Jātaka)
      2. a leaf; collectively
      3. neuter foliage, plural neuter leaves SN ii.178 Ja i.120
      4. neuter ; iii.210, 344 Pv-a 63 (˚antare; so read for pās’ antare), 113 (ghana˚), 191 (sāli˚). puppha˚ blossoms & leaves Dhp-a; i.75; sākhā˚; branches & leaves MN i.111 Ja i.164 Mil 254
      5. paṇḍu˚ a sear leaf Vin i.96 Vin iii.47 Vin iv.217
      6. bahala˚
      7. adjective thick with leaves Ja i.57
      8. palāsāni (
      9. plural ) leaves Ja iii.185 (= palāsapaṇṇāni Commentary ) Pv-a 192 (= bhūsāni)
      Vedic palāśa
    Palāsa2
    & (more commonly); Paḷāsa
    1. unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga-ggāha (so Vb 357 Pug 18 where yuddhaggāha is read Ja iii.259 Vv-a 71); it is often combined with macchera (Vv 155) and makkha (Mil 289). MN i.15 MN i.36 MN i.488 AN i.79 Ja ii.198 Vb 357 Pug 18 (+ paḷāsāyanā, etc.)
    • apaḷāsa mercifulness MN i.44
    according to Trenckner, Note. 83, from ras, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pradāśa points to pa dāśa = dāsa “enemy” this form evidently a Sanskritisation
    Palāsata
    1. a rhinoceros Ja v.206 408; vi.277
    so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning “a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass”
    Palāsika
    adjective
    1. in compound paṇḍu˚; one who lives by eating withered leaves DN-a i.270 271
    2. in compound eka˚; (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i.e. of leaves) Vin i.185 (= eka paṭala Buddhaghosa ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.13)
    from palāsa1
    Palāsin
    1. (paḷāsin) adjective

      1. spiteful, unmerciful, malicious MN i.43f. 96 AN iii.111 combined with makkhin at Vin ii.89 (cp. Vin Texts iii.38) Ja iii.259
      • apaḷāsin DN iii.47 (amakkhin +) MN i.43 AN iii.111 Pug 22 ‣See also separately
      from palāsa2
    Pali˚
    ;
    1. round, around (= pari) only as prefix in compounds (q.v.) Often we find both pari˚ & pali˚ in the same word
    a variant of pari˚, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, especially in the older language ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 257; Geiger Pali Grammar § 44
    Palikujjati
    1. to bend oneself over, to go crooked MN i.387
    pali + kujjati
    Palikuṇṭhita
    1. covered, enveloped, smeared with Ja ii.92 (lohita˚)
    a various of paliguṇṭhita, q.v. & cp. Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 391
    Palikha
    1. a bar Ja vi.276 (with palighā as gloss)
    a variant of paligha on kh for gh ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 392
    Palikhaṇati
    1. to dig up, root out SN i.123 SN ii.88 (so read for paliṁ˚ & phali˚) = A; i.204 absolutive palikhañña Snp 968 (= uddharitvā Nd1 490); palikhāya SN i.123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā SN ii.88 Snp-a 573
    2. past participle palikhata (q.v.)
    3. pali + khaṇ, cp. parikhā
    Palikhata
    1. dug round or out SN iv.83 (so read with variant reading for Text palikhita)
    past participle of palikhaṇati
    Palikhati
    1. to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaṁ p. to bite one’s lip Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197
    pa + likh
    Palikhādati
    1. to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off MN i.364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikankalaṁ p.)
    pali + khādati
    Paligijjhati
    1. to be greedy Nd2 77 (abhigijjhati +)
    pali + gijjhati
    Paliguṇṭhita
    1. entangled, covered enveloped Snp 131 (mohena; Burmese variant ˚kuṇṭhita) Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144 (variant reading ˚kuṇṭh˚); iv.56; Miln ii. explained by pariyonaddha Ja ii.150 by paṭicchādita Ja iv.56 cp. pāliguṇṭhima
    pali + guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found
    Paligedha
    1. greed, conceit, selfishness AN i.66 Nd2 taṇhā ii (gedha +) Dhs 1059 1136
    pali + gedha but accusative to Geiger, Pali Grammar § 10 = parigṛddha
    Paligedhin
    adjective
    1. conceited, greedy selfish AN iii.265
    from paligedha, but Geiger, Pali Grammar § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin
    Paligha
    1. a cross-bar Vin ii.154 Thag 2, 263 (vaṭṭa˚ = parighadaṇḍa Thag-a 211) Ja ii.95 Ja vi.276
    2. an obstacle hindrance DN ii.254 = SN i.27
    3. adjective (—˚) in two phrases okkhitta˚; with cross-bars erected or put up DN i.105 (= ṭhapita˚ DN-a i.274), opposite ukkhitta˚; with cross-bars (i.e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed MN i.139 = AN iii.84 = Nd2 284 Commentary Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittattā Snp-a 467); cp. parikhā
      1. ˚parivattika turning round of the bar the “Bar Turn,” a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in “a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground” Hardy, EnglishM. 32, cp. Miln translation i.277 MN i.87 = AN i.47 = ii.122 = Nd1 154 = Nd2 604 B (reads palingha, variant reading paligha) = Mil 197
      pari + gha of (g)han, cp. Pali & Sanskrit parigha
    Palita
    adjective
    1. grey, in compound ˚kesa with grey (i.e. white hair MN i.88 (feminine ˚kesī) AN i.138 Ja i.59 Ja i.79 absolute only at Ja vi.524 The spelling phalita also occurs (e.g. Pv-a 153)

      • Derived pālicca
      cp. Vedic palita; Lithuanian pilkas grey; Anglo-Saxon fealu = Old High German falo, English fallow, German fahl; also Sanskrit pāṇḍu whitish; Pali paṇḍu pāṭala pink
    Palitta
    1. smeared Thag 2, 467 (= upalitta Thag-a 284)
    past participle of palippati
    Palipa
    from
    1. sloppiness, mud, marsh MN i.45 Thag 1, 89 2, 291 (= panka Thag-a 224) Ja iii.241 (read palipo cp. Commentary = mahākaddamo ibid.) = iv.480
    pa + lip
    Palipatha
    1. danger, obstacle (or is it “mud, mire” = palipa?) AN iv.290 Snp 34 = 638 (rāga˚ Snp-a 469) = Dh 414 (= rāga˚ Dhp-a iv.194)
    for paripatha = ˚pantha (q.v.), the bases path˚ & panth˚ frequently interchanging. Trenckner (; Note. 80) derives it from pa + lip
    Palipadaka
    1. ‣See pāli˚;
    Palipanna
    1. fallen, got or sunk into (—˚ or locative ) Vin i.301 (muttakarīse) DN ii.24 (identical) MN i.45 (palipa˚) = Nd2 651 B MN i.88 Ja vi.8 Vism 49 (muttakarīse)
    2. for paripanna, past participle of paripajjati
    Palippati

    1. to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv iv.15 (˚amāna read for palimpamāna). past participle palitta (q.v.)
    2. Med passive of pa + lip; often spelt palimpati
    Palibujjhati
    1. ‣See palibuddhati
    Palibujjhana
    neuter
    1. obstruction Dhp-a iii.258
    from palibujjhati
    Palibuddha
    1. obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying Ja ii.417 Nd2 107 (paliveṭhita +) Mil 388 (ākāso a˚) 404 Dhp-a iii.198 Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd2 88 107, 332, 596, 597, 657
    past participle of palibujjhati
    Palibuddhati
    1. to obstruct refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin ii.166 Vin iv.42 131 Ja i.217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); iii.138 (
    2. aorist ˚buddhi.) iv.159 Mil 263
    3. to delay Mil 404 (or should we read ˚bujjhati i.e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?).
    4. passive palibujjhati this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is; lag, as seen from the frequently combination palibuddha + lagga, palibodha + laggana ‣See Nd2 p. 188 under nissita
      1. to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (instrumental or locative ) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about attend to Nd2 74 77 (paligijjhati +), 88, 107, 597, 657 Mil 263
      2. past participle palibuddha (q.v.)
      3. the etymology offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s.v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari + ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other explains like Trenckner’s (Note. 66 for pari + bādh, med- passive bajjhati = *bādhyate seemingly confirmed by variant reading Nd2 74 & 77 ˚bajjhati for ˚bujjhati) and Kern’s (; Toevoegselen s.v. = Ogh firbiotan, German verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha;
    Palibodha
    1. obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback Ja i.148 Ja iii.241 (a non-obstruction), 381 (identical); Nett 80; also in various phrases viz. kāma˚ Nd2 374 (+ kāmapariḷāha); kula˚ cīvara Nd2 68 cp. Mil 388 (kule p.); ghar'āvāsa˚, putta-dāro etc. Nd1 136 Nd2 172a B, 205, cp. Ja ii.95 (ghara˚); Kp-a 39 (enumerated as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and explained in detail at Vism 90 sq.); cp. Dhs-a 168 and in combination laggana bandhana p. Nd2 332 620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin i.265 viz. āvāsa˚ and cīvara˚ (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.157) and sixteen at Mil 11 cp. Compendium 53
    • The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka˚ at Vism 122 & referred to at Dhs-a 168
    • ‣ See also sam˚
    ‣See palibuddhati
    Palibhañjana
    neuter
    1. breaking up Nd2 576 (sambhañjana + ; variant reading pari˚) ‣See also sam˚. The spelling phali˚; occurs at Thag-a 288
    pari + bhañjana
    Palimaṭṭha
    1. polished Ja v.4 cp. parimaṭṭha ‣See also sam˚
    past participle of pari + mṛj
    Paliveṭhana
    adjective neuter
    1. wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance Ja iv.436 Pug 34 Vism 353 (˚camma) Dhs-a 366
    from pari + veṣṭ
    Paliveṭhita
    1. wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd2 107 (˚veṭṭh˚, combined with laggita & palibuddha) Ja iv.436 Ja vi.89 cp. sam˚
    past participle of paliveṭheti
    Paliveṭheti
    1. to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle MN i.134 Ja i.192 Ja ii.95 Dhp-a i.269 Dhs-a 366 passive paliveṭhīyati Mil 74
    2. past participle paliveṭhita (q.v.) ‣See also sam˚
    3. pari + veṣṭ
    Palisajjati
    1. to loosen, make loose SN ii.89 (mūlāni)
    pari + sṛj
    Palissajati
    1. to embrace DN ii.266 Ja v.158 (aorist palissaji = ālingi C). 204, 215; vi.325
    2. pari + svaj
    Palissuta
    1. flowing over Ja vi.328
    past participle of pari + sru
    Palugga
    1. broken up, crushed, crumbled Bu ii.24 Mil 217
    past participle of palujjati, Sanskrit *prarugṇa
    Palujjati
    1. to break intranstitive to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin ii.284 DN ii.181 MN i.488 SN ii.218 SN iii.137 SN iv.52 = Nd2 550 (in exegesis of “loka”) Mil 8 Vism 416.
    2. past participle palugga (q.v.) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pralujyati MVastu ii.370
    3. passive of palujati = pa + ruj
    Palujjana
    neuter
    1. breaking up, destruction Snp-a 506
    from palujjati
    Paluddha
    1. seduced, enticed SN iv.307 (where identical passage MN i.511 reads paladdha) Ja i.158 Ja vi.255 262 ‣See also palobheti & palobhita;
    past participle of pa + lubh
    Palumpati
    1. to rob, plunder, deprive of AN i.48
    pa + lup
    Paleti
    1. ‣See palāyati
    Palepa
    1. smearing; plaster, mortar Thag 2, 270 Thag-a 213
    from pa + lip
    Palepana
    neuter
    1. smearing, anointing; adjective (—˚) smeared or coated with MN i.429 (gāḷha˚ thickly smeared)
    from pa + lip
    Paloka
    1. breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin ii.284 MN i.435 = Mil 418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with frequently variant reading paralokato; cp. AN iv.423 Nd2 214; Ps ii.238) SN iii.167 (identical) iv.53 v.163
    from pa + *luj = ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga
    Palokin
    adjective
    1. destined for decay or destruction SN iv.205 = Sn 739 (accusative palokinaṁ = jarā-maraṇehi palujjana-dhamma Snp-a 506) Thag 2, 101 (
    2. accusative pl palokine ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 952)
    3. from paloka
    Palobha
    1. desire, greed Pv-a 265
    from pa + lubh
    Palobhana
    neuter = palobha Ja i.196 Ja i.210 Ja ii.183 Mil 286
    Palobhita
    1. desired Pv-a 154
    past participle of palobheti
    Palobheti
    1. to desire, to be greedy Snp 703 Ja i.79 Ja i.157 Ja i.298 Ja vi.215 Snp-a 492 Dhp-a i.123 125 Pv-a 55 past participle palobhita (q.v.)
    2. causative of pa + lubh
    Pallaṅka
    1. sitting cross-legged, in instrumental; pallaṅkena upon the hams SN i.124 SN i.144 and in phrase pallaṅkaṁ ābhujati “to bend (the legs) in crosswise” DN i.71 MN i.56 AN iii.320 Ja i.17 Ja i.71 Ps i.176 Pug 68 Mil 289 Dhp-a ii.201
    2. This phrase is explained at Vism 271 and Vb-a 368 as “samantato ūru-baddh’ āsanaṁ bandhati.”
    3. a divan, sofa, couch Vin ii.163 170 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.209, which is to be corrected after Dialogues of the Buddha i.12) DN i.7 SN i.95 Ja i.268 Ja iv.396 Ja v.161 Vv 311 Pv ii.127; iii.32 Dhp-a i.19 Pv-a 189 Pv-a 219
    pary + anka, cp. Class Sanskrit palyanka & Māgadhī paliyanka
    Pallati
    1. (pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) Ja v.242
    Pallattha
    1. the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling Ja i.163 (here in explanation of tipallattha: pallatthaṁ vuccati sayanaṁ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go-nisinnaka-vasenā ti tīh'ākārehi pallatthaṁ etc. ‣See under ti˚). cp. ti˚, vi˚
    Sanskrit *paryasta, pari + past participle of as to throw, cp. Prakrit pallattha Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 285
    Pallatthikā
    feminine
    1. same meaning as pallattha Vin ii.213 Vin iii.162 (cp. Vinaya Texts i.62; iii.141); Vism 79 (dussa˚)
    from pallattha
    Pallatthita
    1. perverse Ja v.79
    doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Pallala
    neuter
    1. marshy ground MN i.117 SN iii.108f.
    2. a small pond or lake Vin i.230 DN ii.89 Ja ii.129 Ja v.346
    cp. Class Sanskrit palvala = Latin palus; Old High German felawa = German felber willow; Lithuanian pélkè moor; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit also palvala, e.g. Divy 56
    Pallava
    neuter
    1. a sprout Ja i.250 Ja ii.161 ‣See also phallava
    cp. Class Sanskrit pallaka
    Pallavita
    adjective
    1. having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Mil 151 Vv-a 288 (sa˚ full of sprouts)
    from pallava
    Pallāsa
    1. ‣See vi˚
    Palloma
    1. security, confidence DN i.96 MN i.17 cp. DN-a i.266 “loma-haṁsa-mattam pi ’ssa na bhavissati.”
    a contraction of pannaloma ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 206
    Pavakkhati
    1. only in 1st sq. pavakkhāmi “I will declare or explain” Snp 701 Snp 963 = 1050 (cp Nd1 482 & Nd; 2 under brūmi)
    future of pa + vac
    Pavacchati
    1. ‣See anu˚, & cp. ; pavecchati
    Sanskrit prayacchati
    Pavajati
    1. to wander forth, go about, perambulate; ppr. pavajamāna SN i.42 (but may be pavajjamāna “being predicated” in play of word with act pavadanto in same verse)
    pa + vraj
    Pavajjati
    1. to sound forth to be played (of music) Ja i.64 (pavajjayiṁsu, 3rd plural aorist ) Vv-a 96 (pavajjamāna ppr.
    2. medium)
    3. passive of pavadati
    Pavajjana
    neuter
    1. sounding, playing of music Vv-a 210
    from pavajjati, passive of pavadati
    Pavaḍḍha
    1. grown up, increased, big, strong Ja v.340 (˚kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha˚; explained as vaḍḍhita-kāya)
    past participle of pavaḍḍhati
    Pavaḍḍhati
    1. to grow up, to increase MN i.7 SN ii.84 SN ii.92 Snp 306 (3rd singular praet. ˚atha) Dhp 282 Dhp 335 Dhp 349 Pug 64 Pv-a 8 (puññaṁ). past participle pavaḍḍha pavuddha;
    2. pa + vṛdh
    Pavati1
    1. to blow forth, to yield a scent Thag 1, 528 (= gandhaṁ vissajjati Commentary ) ‣See pavāti
    pa +
    Pavati2
    1. to hurry on, to rush Vv-a 42 (but better read with variant reading patati as synonym of gacchati)
    of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sanskrit ; pravate to jump
    Pavatta
    adjective
    1. adjective happening, going on, procedure, resulting Thag 2, 220 (assu ca pavattaṁ taken by Mrs. Rhys Davids as “tears shed”) Thag-a 179 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 83 (gāthāyo), 120, especially with reference to natural products as “that which comes,” i.e. normal, natural raw; ˚phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in compounds. ˚phalika Snp-a 295f. ˚bhojana
    2. adjective Ja i.6 Ja iii.365 Vism 422, and, ˚bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics tāpasā) DN i.101 MN i.78 MN i.343 AN i.241 AN ii.206 cp. DN-a i.269f. & Snp-a 295 296.; ˚maṁsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin i.217 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.81)
    3. neuter “that which goes on,” i.e. the circle or whirl of existence Mil 197 Mil 326 (cp. Miln translation ii.200 “starting afresh in innumerable births,” quot. from Commentary ), opp appavatta freedom from Saṁsāra, i.e. Nibbāna ibid
    4. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in SN iv.115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata) DN-a i.92 (ādinaya˚), 217 (˚pīti-sukha being in a state of happiness).

      past participle of pavattati
    Pavattati

    intranstitive

  • to move on, go forward, proceed Pv i.57 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 131; of water: to flow SN ii.31 Ja ii.104 Pv-a 143 Pv-a 154 Pv-a 198.

    • to exist to be, continue in existence Ja i.64 Pv-a 130 (opp ucchijjati)

  • to result, to go on Pv-a 45 (phalaṁ) 60 (vippaṭisār’ aggi).

    • past participle pavatta;
    • causative pavatteti (q.v.)
    pa + vattati, vṛt
  • Pavattana
    adjective neuter
    1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful;
    2. feminine ˚i MN i.214 Pug 35 (spelt pavattinī in Text as well as Pug AN 218)
    3. execution performance, carrying out Mil 277 (āṇā,˚ cp. pavatti)
    from pavattati
    Pavattayitar
    1. one who sets into motion or keeps up DN-a i.273 ‣See following
    agent noun to pavatteti
    Pavattar
    1. one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition) an expounder, teacher DN i.104 (mantānaṁ p. = pavattayitar DN-a i.273) SN iv.94 Dhp 76 (nidhīnaṁ p. = ācikkhitar Dhp-a ii.107)
    agent noun of either pa + vac or pa + vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti The Pali commentators take it as either
    Pavattāpanatta
    neuter
    1. making continue, keeping going, preservation upkeep Vism 32 (Text ˚attha)
    from causative II. of pavatteti = pavattāpeti
    Pavatti
    feminine
    1. manifestation, wielding, execution, giving, in āṇā˚; royal authority Ja iii.504 iv.145 Thag-a 283
    2. happening, incident, news Ja i.125 Ja i.150 Ja ii.416 Vism 91 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 35 92, 152, 242, etc. Dhp-a i.80 (variant reading pavutti). cp. pavutti
    from pa + vṛt
    Pavattita
    1. set going, inaugurated, established Vin i.11 (dhammacakka) MN iii.29 MN iii.77 SN i.191 Snp 556 Snp 557 (dhammacakka) Pv-a 67 (identical) 140 (sangīti) Snp-a 454
    past participle of pavatteti
    Pavattin
    adjective
    1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino AN i.279 DN-a i.4 = Pv-a 2 and in suppavattin (good-flowing, i.e. well-recited?) AN iv.140 (of pātimokkha; trsld as “thoroughly mastered Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909, 199, v.71 (identical)
    2. going on, procedure (in
    3. feminine ˚inī) Vin ii.271f. 277
    from pa + vṛt
    Pavatteti
    1. (trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin i.87 (assūni) SN ii.282 (identical) Ja i.147 (selagulaṁ pavaṭṭ˚); especially in phrase dhammacakkaṁ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin i.8 11 MN i.171 SN iii.86 Snp 693 Mil 20 Mil 343 Vv-a 165 Pv-a 21 etc
    • to cause, produce, make arise Ja ii.102 (mah’ oghaṁ) Mil 219

  • to give forth bestow, give dānaṁ a gift) Vin iv.5 (spelt ṭṭ) Pv-a 19 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 139.

    • to continue, keep on, practise, go on with Dhp-a i.257 Pv-a 29 (attabhāvaṁ), 42 (kammante)

  • to move about, behave, linger Dhp-a i.14 (ṭṭ). 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Mil 189 (āṇaṁ cp. āṇāpavatti).

    • past participle pavattita (q.v.)
    causative of pavattati
  • Pavadati
    1. to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto SN i.42 (translation “predicate”) Nd1 293- aorist pāvādi Thag-a 71

      • cp. pāvadati
      pa + vad
    Pavana1
    neuter
    1. winnowing of grain Mil 201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain)
    cp. Sanskrit pavana & pāvana, of;
    Pavana2
    neuter
    1. side of a mountain, declivity DN ii.254 MN i.117 SN i.26 SN ii.95 SN ii.105 Thag 1, 1092 Ja i.28 Ja ii.180 Ja vi.513 cp. i.15, 101iii.131 Mil 91 Mil 198f. 364, 408; Vism 345. cp. Pavananagara Snp-a 583 (Burmese variant for Tumbavanagara = Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toevoegselen s. v defends Müller’s (after Subhūti) interpretation as “wood, woodland,” and compares Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pavana MVastu ii.272, 382
    cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, Pali Grammar 24 = upavana; perhaps = Latin pronus “prone”
    Pavana3
    1. at Vin ii.136 in compound pavan-anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Buddhaghosa on p. 319 (on Commentary V. v.29, 2 explains it by pās’ anta
    Pavapati
    1. to sow out Thag 2, 112
    pa + vap
    Pavayha
    adverb
    1. carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha MN iii.118 = Dhp-a ii.108 MN i.442 MN i.444
    absolutive of pavahati
    Pavara
    adjective
    1. most excellent, noble, distinguished SN iii.264 Snp 83 Snp 646 Snp 698 (muni˚) Dhp 422 Pug 69 Mil 246 Pv-a 2 (˚dhamma-cakka), 67 (identical) 39 (˚buddh'āsana); Sdhp 421
    pa + vara
    Pavasati
    1. to “live forth,” i.e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Snp 899 Ja ii.123 (= pavasaṁ gacchati); v.91. past participle pavuttha (q.v.) cp. vi˚
    2. pa + vas
    Pavassati
    1. to “rain forth,” to begin to rain, shed rain SN i.100 Snp 18f. (imperative pavassa), 353 (variant reading ) Ja vi.500 (“cry”), 587 (
    2. aorist pāvassi).
    3. past participle pavaṭṭha pavuṭṭha; ‣See abhi˚
    4. pa + vṛṣ
    Pavassana
    neuter
    1. beginning to rain, raining Mil 120
    from pa + vṛṣ
    Pavāta
    neuter
    1. a draught of air, breeze Vin ii.79 (opposite nivāta)
    pa + vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta
    Pavāti
    1. to diffuse a scent Dhp 54 Thag 1, 528 Ja v.63 (disā bhāti p. ca) ‣See also pavāyati
    pa +
    Pavāda
    1. talk, disputation, discussion DN i.26 DN i.162 MN i.63 Snp 538
    pa + vad, cp. Epic Sanskrit pravāda talk, saying
    Pavādaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation DN i.178 (samaya˚ “debating hall”)
    2. fond of discussing Mil 4 (bhassa˚ “fond of wordy disputation”). cp. pavādiya
    from pavāda
    Pavādiya
    adjective
    1. belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Snp 885 (n. pl ˚āse, taken by Nd1 293 as pavadanti, by Snp-a 555 as vādino)
    from pavāda, cp. pavādaka
    Pavāyati
    1. to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse Ja i.18 (dibba-gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa disā sīla-gandho p.). cp. pavāti
    pa +
    Pavāraṇā
    feminine
    1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin i.155 160 (where 2 kinds cātuddasikā & pannarasikā),; ii.32. 167 DN ii.220 SN i.190
    2. pavāraṇaṁ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) Pali Vin ii.32 276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā˚ the great Pali and ˚saṅgaha, an abridged Pali ‣See DN-a i.241 Ja i.29 Ja i.82 Ja i.193 (mahā˚; Vism 391 (identical) Snp-a 57 (identical) Vv-a 67 (identical) Pv-a 140 (identical)
    3. satisfaction Vism 71
    pa + vṛ; , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pravāraṇā Divy 91 Divy 93; whereas Epic Sanskrit pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of “satisfaction”
    Pavārita
    1. satisfied MN i.12 (+ paripuṇṇa pariyosita) Mil 231 Vism 71
    2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin i.175
    3. Freq in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin i.213 (cp. Vinaya Texts i.39); ii.300; iv.82 Pv-a 23
    past participle of pavāreti
    Pavāreti
    1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy SN i.190 AN iv.79 Ja iii.352
    2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i.e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin i.160f.; ii.255 Dhp-a i.87 Ja i.29 Ja i.215 Ja iv.243 (vuttha-vassa p.); Vism 90 Snp-a 57
    3. past participle pavārita (q.v.) ‣See also sam˚. Pavala & Pavala;
    causative of pa + vṛ; , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pravārayati Divy 116 Divy 283, etc.
    Pavāla
    Pavāḷa;
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. coral Ja i.394 (˚ratta-kambala) ii.88; iv.142 Mil 267 (with other jewels), 380 (identical) Snp-a 117 Vv-a 112 (˚ratana)
      2. a sprout, young branch, shoot Ja iii.389 Ja iii.395 (kāḷa-valli˚); v.207; Nett 14 (˚ankura) Snp-a 91 (identical)
      cp. Class Sanskrit prabāla, pravāḍa & pravāla
    Pavāḷha
    1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed SN iii.91 (bhikkhu-sangho p.)
    2. drawn forth, pulled out taken out DN i.77 = Ps ii.211 = Vism 406 (muñjamhā isīkā p.) Ja vi.67 (muñjā v'isikā p.)
    apparently past participle of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality
  • past participle of pa + bṛh1, corresponding to Sanskrit prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud + ; bṛh1, but cp. also ubbāḷha which is
  • past participle of ud + bādh. At DN i.77 (where variant reading pabbāḷha = pabūḷha, unexplained by Buddhaghosa it is synonymous with uddharati = ubbahati
  • Pavāsa
    1. sojourning abroad, being away from home Ja ii.123 v.434; vi.150 Mil 314
    • cp. vi˚
    from pa + vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning
    Pavāsita
    1. 1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured Ja v.377 (= pesita Commentary )
    • (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita Text) scented, permeated with scent
    1. Vv-a 237 (variant reading padhūpita preferable)
    past participle of pavāseti
    Pavāsin
    adjective
    1. living abroad or from home, in cira˚; long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293)
    from pavāsa
    Pavāhaka
    adjective
    1. carrying or driving away Thag 1, 758
    from pa + vah
    Pavāhati
    1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; frequently with reference to water: to wash away cleanse MN i.39 SN i.79 SN i.183 (pāpakammaṁ nahānena) ii.88 Thag 1, 349 Ja i.24 Ja iii.176 Ja iii.225 Ja iii.289 Ja iv.367 v.134; vi.197; 588 Mil 247 Dāvs ii.59 Pv-a 256 Pv-a 2. to pull out, draw out DN i.77 (better to be read as pabāhati)
    2. causative from pa + vah
    Pavāhitatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being removed or cleansed Ja v.134
    abstract from pavāhita, past participle of pavāheti
    Pavāhana
    adjective & neuter
    1. carrying off, putting away, Thag 1, 751
    2. wiping off Ja iii.290
    from pa + ; vah
    Pavikatthita
    1. boasted Ja i.359
    past participle of pa + vi + katthati
    Pavicaya
    1. investigation Snp 1021 Thag 1, 593 Pug 25 Nett 3, 87
    from pa + vicinati
    Pavicarati
    1. to investigate thoroughly MN iii.85 SN v.68
    pa + vicarati
    Pavicinati
    1. to investigate, to examine MN iii.85 SN v.68 SN v.262 Nett 21 Snp-a 545 gerundive paviceyya Ja iv.164 & pavicetabba Nett 21
    2. pa + vicinati
    Pavijjhati
    1. to throw forth or down Vin ii.193 (silaṁ cp. Ja i.173 & v.333); iii.82, 178, 415 DN-a i.138 154. past participle paviddha (q.v.)
    2. pa + vyadh
    Pavijjhana
    neuter
    1. hurling, throwing Ja v.67 (Devadattassa silā˚, cp. Vin ii.193) Ja i.173 Ja v.333
    from pavijjhati
    Paviṭṭha
    1. entered, gone into (accusative ), visited SN i.197 SN ii.19 Dhp 373 DN-a i.288 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13
    2. past participle of pavisati
    Pavitakka
    1. scepticism, speculation, controversy Snp 834 Nd1 176
    pa + vitakka
    Pavidaṁseti
    1. to make clear, to reveal Ja v.326 (aorist pavidaṁsayi)
    2. pa + vi + causative of dṛś; daṁseti = dasseti
    Paviddha
    1. thrown down, figuratively given up, abandoned Thag 1, 350 (˚gocara)
    past participle of pavijjhati
    Pavineti
    1. to lead or drive away, expel Snp 507 = J v.148
    pa + vineti
    Pavibhajati
    1. to distribute, to apportion SN i.193 (˚bhajjaṁ, ppr., with jj metri causa) = Th 1, 1242 (˚bhajja absolutive )
    2. pa + vi + bhaj. cp. Class Sanskrit pravibhāga division, distribution
    Pavilīyati
    1. to be dissolved, to melt or fade away SN iv.289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena)
    pa + vi +
    Paviloketi
    1. to look forward or ahead Ja vi.559
    pa + viloketi
    Pavivitta
    1. separated, detached, secluded, singled MN i.14 MN i.77 MN i.386 MN ii.6 SN ii.29 Vism 73 Pv-a 127 Dhp-a ii.77 Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd2 225 = Nd1 3421b = Vism 25 Ja i.107 Mil 244 Mil 358 Mil 371 (with appa-sadda appanigghosa)
    past participle of pa + vi + vic
    Paviveka
    1. retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin i.104 Vin ii.258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi + ; cp. pavivitta) DN i.60 MN i.14f. SN ii.202 SN v.398 AN i.240 Snp 257 Dhp 205 (˚rasa, cp. Dhp-a iii.268) Thag 1, 597 Ja i.9 Ps ii.244; Vism 41, 73 (˚sukha-rasa); Sdhp 476 DN-a i.169
    from pa + vi + vic
    Pavivekatā
    feminine
    1. = paviveka Vism 81 (appicchatā etc. in enumeration of the 5 dhuta-dhammas)
    abstract from paviveka
    Pavivekiya
    adjective
    1. springing from solitude Thag 1, 669
    from paviveka
    Pavisati
    1. to go in, to enter (accusative ) Snp 668 Snp 673 Dhp-a ii.72 (opposite nikkhamati) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 47 (nagaraṁ). Pot. ˚vise Snp 387
    2. imperative pavisa MN i.383 SN i.213
    3. future pavisissati Vin i.87 Ja iii.86
    4. pavissati (cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 652) Ja ii.68 cp. i.956, and pavekkhati SN iv.199 Ja vi.76 (nāgo bhūmiyaṁ p.); Dāvs iii.26;
    5. aorist pāvisi Vin ii.79 (vihāraṁ) MN i.381 Ja i.76 (3rd
    6. plural pāvisuṁ) 213 Ja ii.238 Vism 42 (gāmaṁ) Pv-a 22 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 161 Pv-a 256 and pavisi Ja ii.238 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 35;
    7. absolutive pavisitvā SN i.107 Ja i.9 (araññaṁ); Vism 22 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 79 & pavissa SN i.200 Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104
    8. past participle paviṭṭha (q.v.)
    9. causative paveseti (q.v.)
    10. pa + viś
    Pavisana
    neuter
    1. going in, entering, entrance Ja i.294 Ja ii.416 Ja vi.383 Dhp-a i.83 cp. pavesana
    from pa + viś
    Pavīṇa
    adjective
    1. clever, skilful Dāvs v.33 Vv-a 168 (variant reading kusala)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pravīṇa
    Pavīnati
    1. to look up to, respect, honour Ja iii.387 (Text reading sure, but variant reading Commentary pavīrati)
    pa + to ‣Seek, Sanskrit veti, but with different formation in Pali cp. Trenckner, Note. 78 (who derives it from veṇ) apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti
    Pavīhi
    1. in plural different kinds of rice Ja v.405 (= nānappakārā vīhayo)
    2. pa + vīhi
    Pavuccati
    1. to be called, said, or pronounced Snp 436 Snp 513 Snp 611 & passim Dhp 257 Pv iv.347 Pv-a 102 The form pavuccate also occurs, e.g. at Snp 519f. past participle pavutta1 (q.v.)
    2. passive of pavacati
    Pavuṭā
    1. at MN i.518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv ll. at MN i.518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the Commentary explanation is pavuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at DN i.54 reads paṭuvā (q.v.), with variant readings pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DN-a i.164 explainspacuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (variant readings pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dialogues of the Buddha i.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto
    Pavuṭṭha
    (pavaṭṭha)
    1. ‣See abhi˚;
    past participle of pavassati
    Pavutta1
    1. said, declared, pronounced DN i.104 (mantapada p.; variant reading ˚vatta which is more likely; but DN-a i.273 explains by vutta & vācita) SN i.52 Snp 383 (su˚ = sudesita Snp-a 373), 868 (= ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd1 271)
    past participle of pa + vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, past participle of pa + vṛt, cp. pavutti
    Pavutta2
    1. scattered forth, strewn, sown SN i.227
    past participle of pa + vap
    Pavutti
    1. happening, proceeding, fate, event Pv-a 31 (variant reading pavatti), 46, 53 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages)
    from pa + vṛt, cp. Classical Sanskrit pravṛtti
    Pavuttha
    1. dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home DN ii.261 (˚jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i.e. who no longer belongs to any caste) Ja v.434 Dhp-a iii.293 frequently in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin ii.268 Vin iii.83 Mil 205
    past participle of pavasati
    Pavūsita
    1. at Vv-a 237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as variant reading SS.), in meaning “blown” i.e. scented, filled with scent
    Pavekkhati
    1. is future pavisati.

    Pavecchati
    to give, bestow SN i.18 Snp 463f. 490 sq. Thag 2, 272 Ja i.28 Ja iii.12 (variant reading pavacchati), 172; iv.363 vi.502, 587 (vuṭṭhi-dhāraṁ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; variant reading pavattento); Pv ii.943 (= deti Pv-a 130) ii.970 (= pavatteti ibid. 139); ii.107 (= deti ibid. 144) Mil 375
    1. another dern suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is = Sanskrit pra-vṛścati
    most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Note. 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa + yam by way of *payecchati → pavecchati (cp. sa-yathā → seyyathā) Not with Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 43 from pa + vṛṣ, nor with Müller Pali Grammar 120 from pa + viṣ (who with this derivation follows the Pali Commentators, e.g. Ja iii.12 pavesati, deti Snp-a 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger Pali Grammar § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a future stem (of viś ?)
    Paveṇi
    feminine
    1. a braid of hair, i.e. the hair twisted & unadorned AN iii.56–⁠2. a mat, cover DN i.7 ≈ ‣See ajina˚
    2. custom, usage, wont, tradition Ja i.89 ii.353; v.285; vi.380 (kula-tanti, kula-paveṇi); Dīpavaṁsa xviii.1 Mil 134 (˚upaccheda break of tradition) 190, 226 (+ vaṁsa), 227 Dhp-a i.284 (tanti +) Pv-a 131
    3. succession, lineage, breed, race Snp 26 (cp Snp-a 39) Dhp-a i.174

      1. ˚pālaka guardian of tradition Vism 99 (tanti-dhara vaṁsanurakkhaka +) Dhp-a iii.386
      pa + veṇi; cp. late Sanskrit praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2
    Pavedana
    neuter
    1. making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza “nisīd ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā,” until the announcement of the time (of death) Thag 1, 563 (translation “until the hour should be revealed”) = J i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248
    from pa + vid
    Pavedita
    1. made known, declared, taught MN i.67 (su˚ & du˚) SN i.231 Dhp 79 Dhp 281 Snp 171 Snp 330 Snp 838 Nd1 186
    past participle of pavedeti
    Pavedeti
    1. to make known, to declare, communicate, relate SN i.24 SN iv.348 Dhp 151 Snp p. 103 (= bodheti ñāpeti Snp-a 444) Pv-a 33 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 68 (attānaṁ make oneself known), 120. past participle pavedita (q.v.)
    2. causative of pa + vid
    Pavedhati
    1. to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Snp 928 (= tasati etc. Nd1 384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) Thag-a 203 (allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ pavedhanto misreading for pavesento) Dhp-a ii.249
    • Freq in ppr.
    • medium pavedhamāna trembling MN i.88 Pv iii.55 (= pakampamāna Pv-a 199) Ja i.58 Ja iii.395
    • pp pavedhita & pavyadhita; (q.v.)
    pa + vyath, cp. pavyatheti
    Pavellati
    1. to shake, move to & fro, undulate SN iv.289 (paveliyamānena kāyena) Ja iii.395
    • pp pavellita (q.v.)
    pa + vell
    Pavellita
    1. shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling Ja vi.456
    past participle of pavellati
    Pavesa
    (—˚)
    1. entrance Thag-a 66 (Rājagaha˚) Dhp-a iv.150
    from pa + viś
    Pavesana
    neuter
    1. going in, entering, entrance Ja i.142 Pv-a 79 (variant reading for Text ˚vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana˚)
    2. beginning Vv-a 71 (opposite nikkhamana). 3. putting in, application Ja ii.102 (daṇḍe p.)
    3. means of entry, as adjective able to enter Ja vi.383

      from paveseti
    Pavesetar
    1. one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in SN iv.194 AN v.195
    agent noun of paveseti
    Paveseti
    1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in MN i.79 Ja i.150 (miga-gaṇaṁ uyyānaṁ) 291; vi.179; Vism 39 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 44 Pv-a 61 (gehaṁ), 141 (identical) Dhp-a i.397
    2. to furnish, provide, introduce procure, apply to (
    3. accusative or
    4. locative ) Ja iii.52 (rajjukaṁ gīvāya) vi.383 (siriṁ) Mil 39 (gehe padīpaṁ), 360 (udakaṁ) DN-a i.218 Perhaps at Thag-a 203 for pavedheti.
    5. causative II. pavesāpeti Ja i.294 (mātugāmaṁ aggiṁ)
    causative of pavisati
    Pavyatheti
    1. to cause to tremble, to shake Ja v.409 cp. pavedhati. past participle pavyadhita (q.v.)
    2. causative of pa + vyath
    Pavyadhita
    1. afflicted, frightened, afraid Ja vi.61 166
    past participle of pa + vyath; the Dhp through analogy with pavedhita
    Pasaṁsaka
    1. flatterer MN i.327 Ja ii.439 Sdhp 565
    from pasaṁsati
    Pasaṁsati
    1. to speak out, praise, commend, agree DN i.163 SN i.102 SN i.149 SN i.161 Ja i.143 Ja ii.439 Ja v.331 Iti 16 Snp 47 Snp 163 Snp 390 Snp 658 Snp 906 Dhp 30 Pv ii.942 DN-a i.149 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 131 (= vaṇṇeti). past participle pasattha pasaṁsita; (q.v.) cp. paṭipasaṁsita
    2. pa + saṁs
    Pasaṁsana
    neuter
    1. praising, commendation Pug 53 Sdhp 213 Pv-a 30
    from pa + śaṁs
    Pasaṁsā
    feminine
    1. praise, applause DN iii.260 SN i.202 Thag 1, 609 Snp 213 Snp 826 Snp 895 Mil 377 Snp-a 155 In composition the form is pasaṁsa˚; , e.g. ˚āvahana bringing applause Snp 256
    • ˚kāma desirous of praise Snp 825 cp. Nd1 163; ˚lābha gain of praise Snp 828 As adjective pasaṁsa “laudable praiseworthy” it is better taken as
    • gerundive of pasaṁsati (= pasaṁsiya); thus at Pv iv.713 (pāsaṁsa Minayeff) Pv-a 8 Pv-a 89 (= anindita)
    from pa + śaṁs; cp. Vedic praśaṁsā
    Pasaṁsita
    1. praised SN i.232 Snp 829 Snp 928 Dhp 228 Dhp 230 Nd1 169 Pv-a 116 (= vaṇṇita) 130
    past participle of pasaṁsati, cp. pasattha
    Pasaṁsiya
    adjective
    1. laudable, praiseworthy SN i.149 SN iii.83 AN ii.19 Snp 658 Ja i.202 Sdhp 563. cp. pasaṁsā
    gerundive of pasaṁsati, cp. Vedic praśaṁsia
    Pasakkati
    1. to go forth or out to; absolutive pasakkiya SN i.199 = Th 1, 119 Thag 1, 125
    2. pa + sakkati
    Pasakkhita
    1. at Ja iv.365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (past participle of pasakkati); the Commentary explains as “lying down” (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of variant readings vamakkhita & malakita.

    Pasaṅkanta
    1. gone out to, gone forth Pv-a 22
    past participle of pa + sankamati, of kram
    Pasaṅkamati
    1. to go out or forth to (accusative ) Sdhp 277
    2. past participle pasaṅkanta
    3. pa + saṁ + kram
    Pasaṅga
    1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to Kp-a 18 Pv-a 130
    2. occasion, event;
    3. locative pasaṅge at the occasion of (—˚), instead of Kp-a 213 (karaṇavacana˚, where Pv-a 30 in identical passage reads karaṇ’ atthe)
    from pa + sanj. Class Sanskrit prasanga in both meanings
    Pasajati
    1. to let loose, produce; to be attached to Snp 390 (= allīyati Snp-a 375)
    pa + sṛj
    Pasaṭa
    1. let out, produced DN iii.167 Snp-a 109 (conj. for pasava in explanation of pasuta)
    past participle of pa + sṛ
    Pasata1
    adjective
    1. spotted, only in compound ˚miga spotted antelope Ja v.418 (variant reading pasada˚) The more frequently Pali form is pasada˚; , e.g. SN ii.279 (gloss pasata˚) Ja v.24 Ja v.416 Ja vi.537 Snp-a 82
    Vedic pṛṣant, feminine pṛṣatī
    Pasata2
    neuter
    1. a small measure of capacity, a handful seems to be applied to water only Ja i.101 (˚mattaṁ udakaṁ); iv.201 (udaka˚); v.382 (˚mattaṁ pānīyaṁ). Often reduplicated pasataṁ pasataṁ “by handfuls” MN i.245 Ja v.164 At DN-a i.298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift
    etymology? Late Sanskrit pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain-drop = pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant pasata1, but probably dialectical & Non-Aryan
    Pasattha
    (& Pasaṭṭha)
    1. praised, extolled, commended SN i.169 Ja iii.234 Vv 4421 Mil 212 Mil 361 As pasaṭṭha at Pv ii.973 (so to be read for paseṭṭha) iv.152 (= vaṇṇita Pv-a 241) Dhs-a 124
    past participle of pasaṁsati
    Pasada
    1. ‣See pasata1
    Pasanna1
    adjective
    1. clear, bright Snp 550 (˚netta); Kp-a 64 & 65 (˚tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna˚); Vism 409 (identical)
    2. happy gladdened, reconciled, pleased Ja i.151 Ja i.307 Vism 129 (muddha˚)
    3. pleased in one’s conscience, reconciled believing, trusting in (

      • locative ), pious, good, virtuous AN iii.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe) SN i.34 (Buddhe) v.374 Vv 59 Snp 698 Dhp 368 (Buddha-sāsane) Ja ii.111 Dhp-a i.60 (Satthari). Often combined with saddha (having faith) Vin ii.190 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 42 (a˚), and in compound ˚citta devotion in one’s heart Vin i.16 AN vi.209 Snp 316 Snp 403 Snp 690 Pv ii.16 Snp-a 490 Pv-a 129 or ˚mānasa Snp 402 Vv-a 39 Pv-a 67 cp. pasannena manasā SN i.206 Dhp 2 ‣See also abhippasanna vippasanna;
      past participle of pasīdati
    Pasanna2
    1. flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu-pasannaṁ shedding of tears SN ii.179
    past participle of pa + syad
    Pasannā
    feminine
    1. a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) Ja i.360
    late Sanskrit prasannā
    Pasammati
    1. to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Thag 1, 702
    pa + Śam
    Pasayha
    1. is absolutive of pasahati (q.v.)

    Pasaraṇa
    neuter
    1. stretching, spreading, being stretched out Pv-a 219 (piṭṭhi˚) ‣See also pasāraṇa
    from pa + sṛ
    Pasava
    1. bringing forth, offspring SN i.69
    from pa + su
    Pasavati
    1. to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly figuratively in combination with the following nouns kibbisaṁ to commit sin Vin ii.204 AN v.75
    • pāpaṁ id Pv iv.150; puññaṁ to produce merit SN i.182 SN i.213 AN v.76 Pv-a 121 opposite apuññaṁ Vin ii.26 SN i.114
    • veraṁ to beget hatred SN ii.68 Dhp 201
    • causative pasaveti in same meaning Ja vi.106 (pāpaṁ)-
    • past participle pasūta (q.v.)
    pa + su
    Pasavana
    neuter
    1. giving birth Pv-a 35 - 2. producing, generating, effecting Pv-a 31 (puñña˚)
    2. from pa + su
    Pasaha
    1. overcoming, mastering, in dup˚; adjective hard to overcome Ja ii.219 Mil 21
    2. from pa + sah
    Pasahati
    1. to use force, subdue, oppress, overcome MN ii.99 Snp 443 Dhp 7 Dhp 128 Dhp-a iii.46 Ja iv.126 494; v.27. absolutive pasayha using force, forcibly, by force DN ii.74 (okkassa +) AN iv.16 (identical) SN i.143 Snp 72 Ja i.143 Pv ii.92; ii.910; (read appasayha for suppasayha) Mil 210 (okassa + ; for okkassa?). Also in compound pasayha-kārin using force Ja iv.309 Ja v.425
    2. pa + sah
    Pasākha
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a smaller branch Ja vi.324
      2. sākha˚)
      3. branch-like wood, i.e. hard wood Thag 1, 72

  • the body where it branches off from the trunk, i.e. abdomen & thighs the lower part of the body Vin iv.316 (= adho-nābhi ubbha-jānu-maṇḍalaṁ Commentary ). cp. Suśruta ii.31, 10. 4. the extremities (being the 5th stage in the formation of the embryo) SN i.206

    pa + sākhā; Epic Sanskrit praśākhā branch
  • Pasāda
    1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours (“visibility”) of the eye Ja i.319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa-sadisāni paññāyamāna pañca-ppasādāni ahesuṁ) Snp-a 453 (pasanna-netto i.e. pañca-vaṇṇa-ppasāda-sampattiyā) In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with reference to the eye in function of “sentient organ, sense agency” sensitive surface (so Mrs Rhys Davids in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at Dhs-a 306 307
    2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind virtue, faith MN i.64 (Satthari) SN i.202 AN i.98 AN i.222 (Buddhe etc.); ii.84; iii.270 (puggala˚); iv.346 Snp-a 155 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 35
    3. repose, composure, allayment serenity Nett 28, 50; Vism 107, 135 Thag-a 258

      • Note. pasāda at Thag 2, 411 is to be read pāsaka ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893
      • past participle 45, 46. cp. abhi˚;
      from pa + sad, cp. Vedic prasāda
    Pasādaka
    adjective
    1. making bright Mil 35 (udaka˚ maṇi)
    2. worthy, good, pious Pv-a 129 (a˚). cp. pāsādika
    from pasāda
    Pasādana
    neuter
    1. happy state, reconciliation, purity Pv-a 132
    2. granting graces, gratification Dhp-a iii.3 (brahmaṇo mama p. ˚ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces)
    3. cp. sam˚
    from pa + sad
    Pasādaniya
    adjective
    1. inspiring confidence, giving faith SN v.156 Pug 49 50 Vb-a 282 (˚suttanta); Sdhp 543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at MN iii.11f. cp. sam˚
    from pasāda
    Pasādiyā
    1. at Ja vi.530 is doubtful; it is explained in Commentary together with saṁsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara-sāli), yet the Commentary seems to take it as “bhūmiyaṁ patita”; variant reading pasāriya. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. takes it as rice plant compares Sanskrit ; *prasātikā
    Pasādeti
    1. to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one’s heart (cittaṁ) towards (locative ) DN i.110 DN i.139 SN i.149 AN v.71 Pv ii.942 (cittaṁ) Mil 210 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 123 (khamāpento p.)

      • cp. vi˚
      causative of pa + sad ‣See pasīdati
    Pasādhana
    neuter
    1. ornament, decoration, parure Ja ii.186 (rañño sīsa ˚kappaka King’s headdress-maker i.e. barber); iii.437; iv.3 (ura-cchada˚) Dhp-a i.227 (˚peḷikā), 342 (˚kappaka), 393 Thag-a 267 Vv-a 165 187 Pv-a 155
    from pa + sādh; cp. Classical Sanskrit prasādhana in same meaning
    Pasādhita
    1. adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up Ja i.489 (maṇḍita˚) ii.48 (identical); iv.219 (identical); v.510 (nahāta˚)
    past participle of pasādheti
    Pasādheti
    1. to adorn, decorate, array Mhvs vii.38 Dhp-a i.398 past participle pasādhita (q.v.)
    2. causative of pa + sādh
    Pasāraṇa
    neuter
    1. stretching out DN-a i.196 (opposite sammiñjana) Dhp-a i.298 (hattha˚)
    from pa + sṛ; , cp. pasaraṇa
    Pasārita
    1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiñjita, e.g. at DN i.222 Vin i.230 MN iii.35 MN iii.90 SN i.137 Vism 19 Vv-a 6
    2. put forth laid out, offered for sale Miln i.336
    past participle of pasāreti
    Pasāreti
    1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up Ja vi.58 (pasāraya, imperative )-
    2. passive pasāriyati Vism 318 Pv-a 240 (are turned out of doors)
    3. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with reference to either arm (bāhuṁ, bāhaṁ, bāhā) SN i.137 (opposite sammiñjeti DN-a i.196 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 121; or hand (hatthaṁ) Ja v.41 Ja vi.282 Pv-a 113 or feet (pāde pādaṁ) Thag 2, 44 49, cp. Thag-a 52 Dhs-a 324 (= sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti)
    4. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin ii.291 Dhp-a ii.89

      • past participle pasārita (q.v.) cp. abhi˚
      causative of pa + sṛ
    Pasāsati
    1. to teach, instruct SN i.38 Ja iii.367 Ja iii.443
    2. to rule, reign, govern DN ii.257 cp. iii.141 Pv-a 287
    pa + śās
    Pasāsana
    neuter
    1. teaching, instruction Ja iii.367
    from pa + śās
    Pasibbaka
    masculine neuter
    1. a sack, Vin iii.17 Ja i.112 Ja i.351 Ja ii.88 Ja ii.154 iii.10, 116 343 (camma˚ leather bag); iv.52, 361; v.46 (pūpa˚) 483; vi.432 (spelling pasippaka) DN-a i.41 Dhp-a iv.205
    from pa + siv, late Sanskrit prasevaka → Pali pasebbaka → pasibbaka, cp. Gei absolutive Pali Grammar 151
    Pasibbita
    1. sewn up, enveloped by (—˚) Thag 1, 1150 (maṁsa-nahāru˚)
    past participle of pa + siv
    Pasīdati
    1. to become bright, to brighten up Pv-a 132 (mukha-vaṇṇo p.)
    2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (; mano or cittaṁ p.); to find one’s satisfaction in (
    3. locative ), to have faith DN ii.202 SN i.98 SN ii.199 (sutvā dhammaṁ p.) AN iii.248 Snp 356 Snp 434 Snp 563 Nd2 426 (= saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti) Vv 5014 (mano me pasīdi, aorist ); Vism 129 Mil 9 Dhp-a iii.3 (= he is gracious, i.e. good) Vv-a 6 (better variant reading passitvā) Pv-a 141
    4. past participle pasanna (q.v.) ‣See also pasādeti vippasīdati;
    pa + sad
    Pasīdana
    neuter
    1. calming, happiness, purification Ps ii.121 (SS passādana)
    from pasīdati
    Pasu
    1. cattle MN i.79 Ja v.105 Pv ii.1312 (˚yoni) Mil 100 Pv-a 166 (˚bhāva); nominative
    2. plural pasavo SN i.69 Snp 858 genitive
    3. plural pasūnaṁ Snp 311 Pv ii.25

      • dupasu bad cattle Thag 1, 446
      Vedic paśu, cp. Latin pecu & pecunia; fleece, Gothic vieh, English fee
    Pasuka
    1. = pasu Vin ii.154 (ajaka +)
    Pasuta
    1. attached to (accusative or
    2. locative ), intent upon (—˚), pursuing, doing DN i.135 (kamma˚) Snp 57 ‣See Nd2 427 709, 774, 940, Dhp 166 Dhp 181; Vism 135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka-kicca˚) Dhp-a iii.160 Pv-a 151 (puñña-kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka˚) 195, 228 (pāpa˚)
    3. past participle of pa + or si, Sanskrit prasita, on change of i to u ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 193. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa + su
    Pasura
    adjective
    1. many, abundant Ja vi.134 (= rāsi, heap Commentary ). We should probably read pacura as at Ja v.40 (= bahu Commentary )
    reading doubtful
    Pasūta
    1. produced; having born, delivered Pv-a 80
    past participle of pasavati
    Pasūti
    feminine
    1. bringing forth, birth, in ˚ghara lying-in chamber Nd1 120; Vism 235; Kp-a 58 (where Vism 259 reads sūtighara)
    from pa + su
    Paseṭṭha
    1. at Pv ii.973 is to be read pasaṭṭha ‣See pasattha
    Pasodheti
    1. to cleanse, clean, purity DN i.71 (cittaṁ)
    pa + causative of śudh
    Passa1
    1. ‣Seeing, one who ‣Sees Thag 1, 61 ‣See Morris, in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 48
    cp. Sanskrit paśya, from passati
    Passa2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. side, flank MN i.102 MN iii.3 AN v.18 Snp 422 Ja i.264 Ja iii.26 Pleonastic in piṭṭhi˚ (cp. English backside) the back, locative behind Ja i.292 Pv-a 55
      2. (mountain-) slope, in Himavanta˚ Ja i.218 Ja v.396 (loc pasmani =
      3. passive Commentary )
      Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg ‣See under paṇhi
    Passati

    1. to ‣See-Pres. passati Vin i.322 SN i.69 SN i.132 SN i.198 SN ii.29 Snp 313 Snp 647 Snp 953 Snp 1063 Snp 1142 (cp. Nd2 428) Pv i.23 Mil 218 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 102; 1st
    2. plural passāma Snp 76 Snp 153 Snp 164 Pv i.101 (as
    3. future );
    4. imperative singular passa Snp 435 Snp 580 Snp 588 Snp 756 Ja i.223 Ja ii.159 Pv ii.116, 119 Pv-a 38
    5. plural passatha SN ii.25 Snp 176f. 777, & passavho (cp. Sanskrit paśyadhvaṁ) Snp 998
    6. ppr. passaṁ ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar 972 MN ii.9 Snp 739 Snp 837 Snp 909 ; passanto Ja iii.52 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 6;
    7. feminine passantī SN i.199
    8. grd passitabba Ja iv.390 (a˚)
    9. future passissati Pv ii.46 Pv-a 6
    10. aorist passi Ja ii.103 Ja ii.111 Ja iii.278 Ja iii.341
    11. to recognise, realise, know: only in combination with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaṁ passaṁ) ‣See jānāti 11
    12. to find Snp 1118 (= vindati paṭilabhati Nd2 428b) Ja iii.55 Pv ii.99

      • cp. vi˚
      Vedic paśyati & *spaśati ( aorist aspaṣṭa, causative spāśayati etc.); cp. Avestan spasyeiti, Latin species etc.; Old High German spehon =
    13. absolutive spāhen (English spy)

      • The paradigm pass˚, which in literary Sanskrit is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh˚ & dass˚; (dṛś) ‣See dassati1
    Passaddha
    1. calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with reference to the body (kāya) e.g. at Vin i.294 DN iii.241 DN iii.288 MN i.37 MN iii.86 SN i.126 SN iv.125 AN i.148 AN v.30 Vism 134 Vb-a 283 (˚kāyapuggala)
    • In literally appln˚ratha when the car had slowed down Ja iii.239 ‣See also paṭi˚
    past participle of passambhati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praśrabdha Divy 48
    Passaddhatā
    feminine
    1. calmness, repose Nd2 166
    abstract from passaddha
    Passaddhi
    feminine
    1. calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity MN iii.86 SN ii.30 SN iv.78 SN v.66 AN iv.455f.; Ps ii.244 Dhs 40 (kāya˚), 41 (citta˚), cp. Dhs translation 23; Vism 129 Vb-a 314 (kāya˚, citta˚) Dhs-a 150 (= samassāsa-ppatta). Often combined with pāmujja pīti; , e.g. DN i.72 DN i.73 DN i.196 Nett 29, 66. Six passaddhis at SN iv.217 (with reference to vācā, vitakka-vicārā, pīti assāsa-passāsā, saññā-vedanā, rāga-dosa-moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhaṅgas (constituents of enlightenment) ‣See this & cp. MN iii.86 Vism 130, 134 = Vb-a 282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enumerated)
    from pa + śrambh
    Passanā
    1. ‣See anu˚, vi˚
    Passambhati
    1. to calm down, to be quiet Vin i.294 (fut ˚issati) DN i.73 MN iii.86 SN v.333 AN iii.21 past participle passaddha;
    2. causative passambheti (q.v.)
    3. pa + śrambh
    Passambhati
    1. to calm down, quiet, allay MN i.56 MN i.425 SN iii.125 Vism 288 (= nirodheti) ppr. passambhayaṁ MN i.56 MN iii.82 MN iii.89
    causative of passambhati
    Passambhanā
    feminine
    1. allayment, calmness, composure Dhs 40 41, 320
    from passambhati
    Passaya
    1. refuge cp. iii.104
    • Note. ˚passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya Ja iii.74 & kaṇṭakāpassayika DN i.167 (kaṇṭh˚) Ja iv.299 (kaṇṭaka˚) is to be read as ˚apassaya (apa + śri
    from pa + śri, cp. Classical Sanskrit praśraya reverence
    Passavati
    1. to flow forth, to pour out Mil 180
    pa + sru
    Passasati
    1. to breathe in DN ii.291 MN i.56 MN iii.82 Ja iii.296 Ja v.43 Vism 271 Dhp-a 1.215 ‣See also assasati & remarks under ā; 1 3
    pa + śvas
    Passāva
    urine (literally flowing out) Vin ii.141 Vin iv.266 (p. muttaṁ vuccati) DN i.70 (uccāra +) MN iii.3 MN iii.90 Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṁ vissajjeti), 338 v.164, 389; Vism 235 (uccāra˚).
    1. ˚doṇikā a trough for urine Vin ii.221 Vism 235
    from passavati
    Passāsa
    1. inhaled breath, inhalation SN i.106 SN i.159 Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combination assāsapassāsa (q.v.) At Vism 272 passāsa is explained as “ingoing wind” and assāsa as “outgoing wind.”
    from pa + śvas
    Passāsin
    adjective
    1. breathing; in ghuru-ghuru˚ snoring SN i.117
    from passāsa
    Passika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. only in compound ehipassika (q.v.)
    from imperative passive of passati, + ka
    Passupati
    1. to sleep, rest, aorist passupi; future passupissati Ja v.70 71
    2. pa + svap
    Paha1
    neuter
    1. flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat (= tittha Buddhaghosa) DN i.223 The meaning is uncertain, it is translated as “accessible” at Dialogues of the Buddha i.283 (q.v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima translation i.513) translates “ganz und gar erloschen (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaṁ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted from pajahaṁ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Snp 639), thus meaning “giving up entirely.” The same form in the latter meaning occurs at Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.3)
    ?
    Paha2
    1. adjective = pahu, i.e. able to (with infinitive) Ja v.198 (Commentary pahū samattho)
    Pahaṁsati1
    1. to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) Ja i.278 ii.102 (pharasuṁ) Dhp-a i.253 (khuraṁ pahaṁsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context). past participle pahaṭṭha1 & pahaṁsita; 1 (q.v.)
    2. pa + haṁsati1 = ghaṁsati1, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind
    Pahaṁsati2
    1. to be pleased, to rejoice; only in past participle pahaṭṭha2 & pahaṁsita; 2 (q.v.), and in
    2. passive pahaṁsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Mil 326 (+ kuhīyati) ‣See also sam˚
    3. pa + haṁsati2 = hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaṁsati2
    Pahaṁsita1
    1. struck, beaten (of metal), refined Ja vi.218 (ukkā-mukha˚), 574 (identical)
    past participle of pahaṁsati
    Pahaṁsita2
    1. gladdened, delighted, happy Dhp-a i.230 (˚mukha) Vv-a 279 (˚mukha SS pahasita at Mil 297 is better to be taken as past participle of pahasati, because of combination haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita
    2. past participle of pahaṁsati2
    Pahaṭa
    1. assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) Ja ii.102 Ja ii.182 Ja vi.189 Vv-a 161 (so for pahata) Pv-a 253 Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (˚citra-geṇḍuka) = Dhs-a 116 (so read for pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at Pv-a 4 is to be corrected to paṭaha
    past participle of paharati
    Pahaṭṭha1
    1. struck, beaten (of metal) Ja vi.217 (suvaṇṇa)
    past participle of pahaṁsati1
    Pahaṭṭha2
    1. gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin iii.14 Ja i.278 (twice; once as ˚mānasa which is wrongly taken by Commentary as pahaṭṭha1), 443 ii.240 (tuṭṭha˚); Vism 346 (haṭṭha˚) Dhp-a i.230 (tuṭṭha˚) Vv-a 337 In its original sense of “bristling (with excitement or joy), with reference to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase; pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇa-vāla at Vin ii.195 Ja v.335 (cp. Sanskrit prahṛṣṭa-roman, name of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30)
    past participle of pahaṁsati2
    Pahata
    1. killed, overcome MN iii.46 SN ii.54 Ja vi.512
    past participle of pa + han
    Paharaṇa
    neuter
    1. striking, beating Snp-a 224 Pv-a 285
    from paharati
    Paharaṇaka
    adjective
    1. striking, hitting Ja i.418
    from paharaṇa
    Paharati
    1. to strike, hit, beat Ja iii.26 Ja iii.347 Ja vi.376 Vv-a 65 Pv-a 4 frequently in phrase accharaṁ p. to snap one’s finger, e.g. Ja ii.447 ‣See accharā1. aorist pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 292 (= pahari Vv-a 123)

      • pp pahaṭa (q.v.)
      • causative paharāpeti
      1. -1. to cause to be assailed Ja iv.150
      • to put on or join on to Ja vi.32 (˚hārāpesi)
    pa + hṛ
    Pahasati
    1. to laugh, giggle Ja v.452 (ūhasati +) ‣See also pahassati & pahāsati. past participle ; pahasita (q.v.)
    2. pa + has
    Pahasita
    1. laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Mil 297 Ja i.411 (nicca˚ mukha) ii.179
    past participle of pahasati or ˚hassati
    Pahassati
    1. to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Snp 887 (= haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd1 296; cp. Snp-a 555 hāsajāta) The past participle pahasita (q.v.) is derived from pres. pahasati which makes the equation pahassati = pahaṁsati2 all the more likely
    2. pa + has, perhaps pa + hṛṣ, Sanskrit harṣati, cp. pahaṁsati2
    Pahāna
    neuter
    1. giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection MN i.60 iii.4, 72 SN i.13 SN i.132 (dukkha˚); ii.170; iii.53; iv.7 sq. DN iii.225 DN iii.246 AN i.82 AN i.134 AN ii.26 AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa ˚āya). iii.431 Snp 374 Snp 1106 (= vūpasama paṭinissagga etc Nd2 429) Dhp 331 Ja i.79 Ps i.26; ii.98, 156 Pug 16 Dhs 165 174, 339; Nett 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism 194 (nīvaraṇa-santāpa˚) Dhs-a 166 345 Vv-a 73
    • ˚˚pariññā ‣See pariññā; —˚vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saṁvara-vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadanga-pahāna, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda˚, paṭippassaddhi˚ nissaraṇa˚ Dhs-a 351 Snp-a 8
    from pa + ‣See pajahati
    Pahāya
    1. is absolutive of pajahati (q.v.)

    Pahāyin
    adjective
    1. giving up, abandoning Snp 1113 Snp 1132 cp. Nd2 431; Sdhp 500
    from pa + ‣See pajahati
    Pahāra
    1. a blow, stroke, hit DN i.144 (daṇḍa˚) MN i.123 MN i.126 Pv iv.167 (sālittaka˚) MN i.123 Dhp-a iii.48 (˚dāna-sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows cp. Vin iv.146) Pv-a 4 (ekappahārena with one stroke) 56 (muggara˚), 66 (identical) 253
    2. ekappahārena at Vism 418 as
    3. adverb “all at once.” pahāraṁ deti to give a blow Vin iv.146 SN iv.62 AN iii.121 Vism 314 (pahārasatāni) Pv-a 191 (sīse)
    4. a wound Ja iv.89 Ja v.459 (˚mukha)
    from pa + hṛ; , Classical Sanskrit prahāra ‣See paharati
    Pahāraṇa
    1. ‣See abhi˚
    Pahārin
    adjective
    1. striking, assaulting Ja ii.211
    from paharati
    Pahāsa
    1. laughing, mirth Dhs 9 86, 285 Vv-a 132 Sdhp 223
    from pa + has, cp. Classical Sanskrit prahāsa
    Pahāsati
    1. in pahāsanto saparisaṁ at Thag-a 69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṁ, thus taken as causative of pa + has, i.e. making one smile, gladdening.

    Pahāsi

    is 3rd singular aorist of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musalena = pahari Vv-a 113); and also 3rd singular

  • aorist of pajahati e.g. at Snp 1057 (= pajahi Nd2 under jahati)

  • Pahāseti
    1. to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism 289 (cittaṁ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti)
    causative of pahasati
    Pahiṇa
    adjective-noun
    1. sending; being sent; a messenger, in ˚gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages DN i.5 MN i.345 Ja ii.82 Mil 370 DN-a i.78 ‣See also pahana
    from pa + hi
    Pahiṇaka
    neuter
    1. a sweetmeat AN iii.76 (variant reading pahenaka) ‣See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sanskrit form is prahelaka
    from pahiṇati?
    Pahiṇati
    1. to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin iii.140f.; iv.18 Dhp-a ii.243 aorist pahiṇi Ja i,60 (sāsanaṁ); v.458 (paṇṇāni) Vv-a 67 Dhp-a i.72 ii.56, 243;
    2. absolutive pahiṇitva Vv-a 65
    3. past participle pahita2 (q.v.) There is another
    4. aorist pāhesi (Sanskrit prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a derived from pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he˚ (pahetuṁ e.g.) are to be found under pāheti
    5. pa + hi, Sanskrit hinoti
    Pahiṇana
    neuter
    1. sending, dispatch Dhp-a ii.243
    from pahiṇati
    Pahita1
    1. resolute, intent, energetic; only in compound pahitatta of resolute will (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prahitātman Divy 37) MN i.114 SN i.53 (explained by Buddhaghosa with wrong derivation from peseti as “pesit-atta” thus identifying pahita1 & pahita; 2 ‣See Kindred Sayings 320); ii.21, 239; iii.73 sq. iv.60, 145, v.187, AN ii.14 AN iii.21 AN iv.302f.; v.84 Snp 425 Snp 432f. 961 Iti 71 Nd1 477 Thag 2, 161 (explained at Thag-a 143 with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta) Nd1 477 (identical; pesit-atta) Mil 358 Mil 366 Mil 406
    past participle of padahati
    Pahita2
    1. sent Ja i.86 (sāsana) Dhp-a ii.242 Dhp-a iii.191 (interchanging with pesita)
    past participle of pahiṇati
    Pahīna
    1. given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin iii.97 = iv.27 SN ii.24 SN iii.33 SN iv.305 Snp 351 (˚jāti-maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (˚mala-moha) Iti 32 Nd2 s.v.; Ps i.63; ii.244 Pug 12 22
    past participle of pajahati
    Pahīyati
    1. to be abandoned, to passive away, vanish MN i.7 SN i.219 (
    2. future ˚issati); ii.196 (ppr ˚īyamāna); v.152 Snp 806 Nd1 124 Vb-a 271 Spelt pahiyyati at SN v.150
    3. passive of pajahati
    Pahū
    adjective
    1. able Snp 98 Ja v.198 Nd2 615˚
    cp. Vedic prabhū, from pa + bhū
    Pahūta
    adjective
    1. sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Snp 428 Snp 862f. Pv i.52 (= anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha Commentary ; Dhp at Pv-a 25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); i.117 (= apariyanta, uḷāra; variant reading bahū); ii.75 (variant reading bahūta) Pv-a 145 (dhana; variant reading bahuta) Snp-a 294 (identical), 321 (identical) ‣See also bahūta
    1. ˚jivha large tongued DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.173
    • ˚jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Snp p. 107
    • ˚dhañña having many riches Ja iv.309
    • ˚dhana identical Thag 2, 406 (Commentary reading for Text bahuta-ratana)
    • ˚pañña rich in wisdom Snp 359 Snp 539 Snp 996
    • ˚bhakkha eating much, said of the fire SN i.69
    • ˚vitta = ˚dhañña DN i.134 Snp 102 Pv-a 3
    past participle of pa + bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta
    Pahūtika
    adjective = pahuta Pv-a 135 (Burmese variant bahuta; in explanation of bahu).
    Paheṇaka
    neuter
    1. a present Ja vi.369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at AN iii.76 clearly means “sweetmeat”)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit praheṇaka in sense of “sweetmeat” at Divy 13 Divy 258; the * Sanskrit form is prahelaka
    Pahena
    neuter
    1. same as pahiṇa in ˚gamana going on errands Ja ii.82
    paheṇa?
    Pahoti
    & (in verse) pabhavati
    1. to proceed from (with genitive), rise, originate DN ii.217 MN iii.76 SN ii.184 as pabhavati at Snp 728 = 1050 (cp. Nd2 401) (perfect
    2. medium) pahottha it has arisen from genitive, i.e. it was the fault of Ja v.102
    3. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with infinitive) DN i.240 MN i.94 SN i.102 Snp 36 Snp 867 Ja v.305 DN-a i.192 iii.254 (
    4. future pahossati) Vv-a 75 Dāvs iv.18. negative both with na˚ & a˚ viz. nappahoti Ja vi.204 Dhp-a iii.408 nappahosi Ja i.84 appahoti Dhp-a iv.177 appabhonto Pv-a 73 in verse appabhavaṁ Ja iii.373 (= appahonto Commentary ).
    5. past participle pahūta (q.v.)
    pa + ; bhu, cp. Vedic prabhavati in meaning “to be helpful”
    Pahona
    1. in ˚kāla at Ja iii.17 read as pahonaka˚
    Pahonaka
    adjective
    1. sufficient, enough Ja i.346 Ja ii.122 Ja iii.17 (so read for pahona˚); iv.277; Vism 404 Dhp-a i.78 219 Vv-a 264 Pv-a 81
    from pahoti
    Pāka
    1. that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked Ja vi.161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā) Vv-a 186 especially in following combination tela˚; “oil cooking,” an oil decoction Vin ii.105
    • thāli˚ a th. full of cooking Ja i.186
    • doṇa˚ a d. full SN i.81 Dhp-a ii.8
    • sosāna˚ Dhātumañjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in applied meaning of “effect, result” ‣See Compendium 883

      • As
      • neuter in stanza “pākaṁ pākassa paccayo; apākaṁ avipākassa” at Vb-a 175
      • cp. vi˚
      1. ˚tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e.g. sata˚ Ja ii.397 Ja v.376 Vv-a 68 Dhp-a iii.311
      • sahassa˚ Ja iii.372
      • ˚vaṭṭa subsistence livelihood, maintenance Mhvs 35, 120 Dhp-a ii.29 Vv-a 220
      • ˚haṁsa a species of water bird Ja v.356 vi.539 Snp-a 277
      Vedic pāka ‣See pacati
    Pākata
    adjective
    1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled in phrase pākat-indriya of uncontrolled mind SN i.61 (= saṁvarâbhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa-indriya Kindred Sayings 320), 204; iii.93; v.269 AN i.70 AN i.266 AN i.280 AN iii.355 AN iii.391 Thag 1, 109 (Commentary asaṁvuta ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 99) Pug 35
    2. At Mil 251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā
    3. open common, unconcealed Ja i.262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); Snp-a 343 Pv-a 103 (for āvi)
    4. commonly known, familiar Vism 279 Pv-a 17 (devā), 23, 78 (su˚) 128 Vv-a 109 (+ paññāta); ˚ṁ karoti to make manifest Vism 287; ˚bhāva being known Dhs-a 243 Pv-a 103

      • renowned, well-known DN-a i.143 Pv-a 107
    = pakata; on ā for a ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 331. cp. Sanskrit prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa
    Pākatika
    adjective
    1. natural, in its original or natural state Ja v.274 Mil 218 (maṇiratana) Dhp-a i.20 Vv-a 288 Pv-a 66 (where identical p Ja iii.167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaṁ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild Ja i.354 also figuratively to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate Ja v.134
    from pakati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryâvatāra v.3, ed. Poussin
    Pākāra
    an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence rampart Vin ii.121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā˚, silā, dāru˚); iv.266 (identical) MN iii.11 SN iv.194 (˚toraṇa) AN iv.107 AN v.195 Ja i.63 ii.50; vi.330 (mahā˚), 341 (+ parikhā & aṭṭāla) Pv i.1013 (ayo˚) Mil 1 Vism 394 (= parikkhepa-pākāra) Dhp-a iii.441 (tiṇṇaṁ pākārānaṁ antare) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 52 sāṇi˚; screen-fencing Ja ii.88 Pv-a 283
    1. ˚iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall Ja iii.446 (Text iṭṭhikā) -parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DN-a i.42
    • ˚parikkhepa a fencing Vism 74
    cp. Epic Sanskrit prākāra, pa + ā + kṛ
    Pākāsiya
    adjective
    1. evident, manifest, open, clear Ja vi.230 (opposite guyha; Commentary pākāsika)
    from pa + ā + kāś, cp. pakāsati & Classical Sanskrit prākāśya
    Pākula
    adjective
    1. read at Ud 5 in combination akkulapakkula (= ākula-pākula) “in great confusion”; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. cp. Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 94 sq
    pa + ākula
    Pāgabbhiya
    neuter
    1. boldness, impudence, forwardness Snp 930 Nd1 228f. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq. Ja ii.32 Ja v.449 (pagabbhiya) Snp-a 165 Kp-a 242 Dhp-a iii.354 (pa˚) Vv-a 121
    from pagabbha
    Pāguññatā
    feminine
    1. being familiar with, experience Dhs 48 49; Vism 463 sq. 466
    abstract of pāguñña, which is derived from paguna
    Pāgusa
    1. a certain kind of fish Ja iv.70 (as gloss, Text reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, Burmese manuscripts pātusa & pāvuma; Commentary explains as mahā-mukha-maccha)
    cp. Sanskrit vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37
    Pācaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who cooks, a cook; feminine ˚ikā Ja i.318
    2. from pac, cp. pāceti
    Pācana1
    neuter
    1. bringing to boil, cooking Ja i.318 (yāgu˚). cp. pari˚
    from pac, causative pāceti
    Pācana2
    neuter
    1. a goad, stick SN i.172 Snp p. 13; v.77 Ja iii.281 Ja iv.310
    1. ˚yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick SN i.115
    for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & Snp-a 147
    Pācariya
    (—˚)
    1. only as 2nd part of a (reduplicated) compound ācariya-pācariya in the nature of combinations mentioned under a1 3 b: “teacher upon teacher (explained by Cs as “teacher of teachers”) DN i.90 (cp DN-a i.254); ii.237, etc ‣See ācariya
    pa + ācariya
    Pācittiya
    adjective
    1. requiring expiation, expiatory Vin i.172 176; ii.242, 306 sq.; iv.1 sq., 258 sq. AN ii.242 (dhamma); Vism 22
    • It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. iv.) ‣See on term Vinaya Texts i.18, 32, 245
    most likely prāk + citta + ika, i.e. of the nature of directing one’s mind upon, cp. pabbhāra *prāg + bhāra. So explained also by S. Lévi J.As. x.20 p. 506. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 27, note 1 inclines to etymology prāyaś + cittaka
    Pācīna
    adjective
    1. eastern i.e. facing the (rising) sun (opposite pacchā) Ja i.50 (˚sīsaka, of Māyādevī’s couch), 212 (˚lokadhātu) Mil 6 DN-a i.311 (˚mukha facing east) Dhp-a iii.155 (identical) Vv-a 190 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 256. The opposite apācīna (e.g. SN iii.84) is only apparently a negative pācīna, in reality a derived from apa (apa + ac, as pācīna is a derived from pra + ac ‣See apācīna
    Vedic prācīna, from adverb prāc bent forward
    Pāceti1
    1. to cause to boil, figuratively to cause to torment DN i.52 (ppr. pācayato, genitive, also pācento) cp. vi˚
    causative of pacati
    Pāceti2
    1. to drive, urge on Dhp 135 (āyuṁ p. gopālako viya … peseti Dhp-a iii.60)
    for pājeti, with c. for j ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 393; pra + aj ‣See aja
    Pājana
    neuter
    1. a goad Snp-a 147
    from pa + aj, cp. pācana2
    Pājāpeti
    1. to cause to drive or go on Ja ii.296 (sakaṭāni); iii.51 (so read for pajāpeti; Burmese manuscripts pāceti & pājeti)
    2. causative of pājeti
    Pājeti
    1. to drive (cp. pāceti2) Ja ii.122 Ja ii.143 Ja iii.51 (
    2. Burmese manuscripts for Text pājāpeti); v.443 (nāvaṁ) vi.32 (yoggaṁ) Snp-a 147 Dhp-a iv.160 (goṇe)
    3. to throw (the dice) Ja vi.281
    4. causative II. pājāpeti (q.v.)
    causative of pa + aj, cp. aja
    Pāṭaṅkī
    feminine “sedan chair” (?) in phrase sivikaṁ pāṭaṅkiṁ at Vin i.192 (MV v.10, 3) is not clear. The variant readings (p. 380) are pāṭangin, pāṭangan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallankaṁ?
    Pāṭala
    adjective
    1. pale red, pink Ja iv.114
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu ‣See Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under palleo & cp. paṇḍu
    Pāṭalī
    feminine
    1. the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens DN ii.4 (Vi passive pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho) Vv 359 Ja i.41 (˚rukkha as the Bodhi tree); ii.162 (pāṭali-bhaddaka sic. variant reading for phālibhaddaka); iv.440; v.189; vi.537 Mil 338 Vv-a 42 164 Thag-a 211 226
    2. cp. Classical Sanskrit pāṭalī, to pāṭala
    Pāṭava
    neuter
    1. skill Kp-a 156
    cp. late Sanskrit pāṭava, from paṭu
    Pāṭikaṅkha
    adjective
    1. to be desired or expected MN i.25 MN iii.97 SN i.88 SN ii.152 AN iii.143 = Sn p. 140 (= icchitabba Snp-a 504) Ud 36 Dhp-a iv.2 (gati ˚ā) Pv-a 63 (identical)
    gerundive of paṭikankhati, Sanskrit *pratikānkṣya
    Pāṭikaṅkhin
    1. (—˚) adjective-noun

      1. hoping for, one who expects or desires DN i.4 MN iii.33 AN ii.209 Ja iii.409
      from paṭi + kāṅka, cp. patikankhin
    Pāṭikā
    feminine
    1. half-moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin i.180 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.3). As pāṭiya at Ja vi.278 (= piṭṭhi-pāsāṇa Commentary )
    etymology unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sanskrit pāṣya?
    Pāṭikulyā
    feminine
    1. = pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) Ja v.253 (nava, cp. Vism 341 sq.)
    from paṭi(k)kūla
    Pāṭikkulyatā
    feminine
    1. loathsomeness, objectionableness AN iii.32 AN iv.47f.; v.64. cp. paṭikulyatā paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā
    abstract from paṭikkūla
    Pāṭidesanīya
    adjective
    1. belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin i.172 Vin ii.242 AN ii.243 (as ˚desanīyaka)
    gerundive of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in derivation
    Pāṭipada1
    adjective
    1. following the (right) Path MN i.354 = It 80 (+ sekha)
    the adjective form of paṭipadā
    Pāṭipada2
    1. lit, “entering, beginning”; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin i.132 Ja iv.100 Vv-a 72 (˚sattamī)
    from paṭi + pad ‣See patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā
    Pāṭipadaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to the 1st day of the lunar fortnight; only with reference to bhatta (food & in comb; n with pakkhika & uposathika, i.e. food given on the half-moon days, on the 7; th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin i.58 ii.175; iv.75; (feminine ˚ikā), 78
    2. from pāṭipada2
    Pāṭipuggalika
    adjective
    1. belonging to one’s equal MN iii.254f. (dakkhiṇā)
    from paṭipuggala
    Pāṭibhoga
    1. [for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a absolutive formation *prati-bhogya for *bhujya i.e. “counter-enjoyable,” i.e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 24 a sponsor AN ii.172 Ud 17 Iti 1f. Ja ii.93 Vism 555 sq. Dhp-a i.398 Vb-a 165 Patimokkha (pati)

    Pātimokkha (pāti)˚
    1. ; neuter

      1. a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhanga, Vin vols. iii & iv. ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession ‣See Geiger, P. Literally c. 7, where literature is given; & cp. ; Vinaya Texts i.27 sq. Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.; -pāṭimokkhaṁ uddisati to recite the Pali Vin i.102 112, 175; ii.259; iii.8 iv.143 Ud 51 opposite ˚ṁ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) Pali Vin ii.240 sq
      • See Vin i.65 68; ii.95 240 sq. 249 SN v.187 Snp 340 Dhp 185 Dhp 375 Nd1 365 Vism 7, 11, 16 sq., 36, 292 Dhp-a iii.237 (= jeṭṭhakasīla); iv.111 (identical); Sdhp 342 Sdhp 355 Sdhp 449
      • ˚uddesa recitation of the Pali Vin i.102 DN ii.46 MN ii.8 Snp-a 199
      • ˚uddesaka one who recites the Pali Vin i.115 cp. Vinaya Texts i.242
      • ˚ṭhapana suspension of the Pali Vin ii.241f. AN v.70
      • ˚saṁvara “restraint that is binding on a recluse” (Dialogues of the Buddha i.79), moral control under the Pali Vin iv.51 DN i.62 DN ii.279 DN iii.77 DN iii.266 DN iii.285 AN iii.113 AN iii.135 AN iii.151 AN iv.140 AN v.71 AN v.198 Iti 96 118 Ud 36 Vism 16 (where explained in detail) Vb-a 323 cp. saṁvuta-pāṭimokkha
      • adjective Pv iv.132
      with Childers plausibly as paṭi + mokkha, gerundive of muc (
    2. causative mokṣ˚) with lengthening of paṭi as in other
    3. gerundive like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory obligation, cp. Ja v.25 The spelling is frequently pāti (
    4. Burmese manuscripts pāṭi˚). The Sanskrit prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation from Pali pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya “that which should be made binding.” An explanation of the word after the style of a popular etymology is to be found at Vism 16
    Pāṭiyekka
    1. ‣See pāṭekka
    Pāṭirūpika
    adjective
    1. assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Snp 246
    from paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka
    Pāṭihāra
    1. striking, that which strikes (with reference to marking the time) Ja i.121 Ja i.122 (variant reading SS pāṭihāriya)
    = pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭihāriya
    Pāṭihārika
    1. special, extraordinary; only in compound ˚pakkha an extra holiday AN i.144 Vv 156 (cp. Vv-a 71 109) Thag-a 38
    = pāṭihāriya or derived from pātihāra in meaning of ˚hāriya
    Pāṭihāriya
    adjective
    1. striking surprising, extraordinary, special; neuter wonder, miracle Usually in stock phrase iddhi˚, ādesanā˚, anusāsanī˚ as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i.e. superhuman power, mind reading giving instruction) DN i.212 DN iii.3f. SN iv.290 AN i.170 v.327; Ps ii.227

      • Further: Vin i.34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha sahassāni); Vism 378, 390 (yamaka˚) Vv-a 158 (identical) Pv-a 137 (identical). For yamaka-pāṭihāriya (or ˚hīra) ‣See yamaka
      • Two kinds of p. are given at Vism 393 viz. pākaṭa˚ and apākaṭa˚
      • sappāṭihāriya (with ref to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime as opposed to appāṭi˚ plain, ordinary, stupid MN ii.9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya ii.318 translatessa˚ “intelligible” and a˚ “incomprehensible,” referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat i.11, 1) DN ii.104 cp. also Windisch Māra & Buddha 71
      1. ˚pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept SN i.208 (cp. Thag 2, 31) Snp 402 (cp. explanation at Snp-a 378 where various opinions are given) Ja iv.320 vi.118 ‣See also Kern’s discussion of the term at Toevoegselen ii.30
      gerundive formation from paṭi + hṛ; (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in ˚desanīya ˚mokkha etc. cp. pāṭihīra; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prātihārya
    Pāṭihīra
    adjective
    1. wonderful neuter a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Ps i.125 (yamaka˚); ii.158 (identical); Mhvs 5, 118 Mil 106 Dāvs i.50 Dhp-a iii.213

      • appātihīrakathā stupid talk DN i.193 239; Kvu 561 (different Kern. Toevoegselen ii.30); opposite sa˚ ibid
      contracted form of pāṭihāriya viâ metathesis *pāṭihāriya → *pāṭihēra → paṭihīra
    Pāṭī
    feminine
    1. at Vv-a 321 in phrase sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṁ “in the moonlight half” is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as “part, half-,” but pakkha already means “half” and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaṁ “successively.” Note that the similar passage Vv-a 314 reads sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṁ Patuka & Patubha;
    ?
    Pāṭuka
    Pāṭubha;
    1. only negative ; (q.v.)
    Pāṭukamyatā
    1. ‣See pātu˚. Patekka (Patiyekka)
    Pāṭekka (Pāṭiyekka)
    adjective
    1. several, distinct single Vin i.134 Vin iv.15 Ja i.92 (Text pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism 249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356 443, 473 Dhp-a iv.7 (pāṭiy˚ SS pāṭieka)
    • nt. ˚ṁ (
    • adverb ) singly, separately, individually Vism 409 (pāṭiy˚) Vv-a 141
    paṭi + eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 24
    Pāṭeti
    1. to remove; passive pāṭiyati Pv iv.147 (turned out of doors); variant reading pātayati (bring to fall) Prob, in sense of Med. at Mil 152 in phrase visaṁ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.139, & Morris; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 87)
    2. causative of paṭ
    Pāṭha
    1. reading, text-reading; passage of a text, text. Very frequently in Commentaries with phrase “ti pi pāṭho,” i.e. “so is another reading,” e.g. Kp-a 78 223 Snp-a 43 (˚ṁ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477 Pv-a 25 (pamāda˚ careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim
    from paṭh
    Pāṭhaka
    (—˚)
    1. reciter; one who knows, expert Nd1 382 (nakkhatta˚) Ja i.455 (asi-lakkhaṇa˚); ii.21 (angavijjā˚), 250 (identical); v.211 (lakkhaṇa˚ fortune-teller wise man)
    from pāṭha
    Pāṭhīna
    1. the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad Ja iv.70 (C pāṭhīna-nāmakaṁ pāsāṇa-macchaṁ); v.405; vi.449
    cp. Sanskrit pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36
    Pāṇa
    1. living being, life, creature DN iii.48 DN iii.63 DN iii.133 SN i.209 SN i.224 SN v.43 SN v.227 SN v.441 (mahā-samudde) AN i.161 ii.73, 176, 192 Snp 117 Snp 247 Snp 394 Snp 704 Dhp 246 DN-a i.69 161; Kp-a 26 Thag-a 253 Pv-a 9 Pv-a 28 Pv-a 35 Vv-a 72 Dhp-a ii.19 plural also pāṇāni, e.g. Snp 117 Dhp 270 Buddhaghosa’s definition of pāṇa is “pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās’ āyatta-vuttitāyā ti attho” Vism 310
      1. ˚ātipāta destruction of life, murder Vin i.83 (in “dasa sikkhāpadāni,” ‣See also sīla), 85, 193 DN iii.68 DN iii.70 DN iii.149 182, 235 MN i.361 MN iii.23 Snp 242 Iti 63 Ja iii.181 Pug 39f.; Nett 27 Vb-a 383 (various degrees of murder) Dhp-a ii.19 Dhp-a iii.355 DN-a i.69 Pv-a 27
      • ˚ātipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life DN iii.82 MN iii.22 SN ii.167 Iti 92 Dhp-a ii.19
      • ˚upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prāṇopeta Divy 72 Divy 462 etc.
        1. SN i.173 Snp 157 DN-a i.236
        • ˚ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DN-a i.69
        • ˚ghātin âtipātin Dhp-a ii.19
        • ˚bhu a living being Ja iv.494
        • ˚bhūta = ˚bhu MN iii.5 AN ii.210 AN iii.92 AN iv.249f. Ja iv.498
        • ˚vadha = âtipāta DN-a i.69
        • ˚sama equal to or as dear as life Ja ii.343 Dīpavaṁsa xi.26 Dhp-a i.5
        • ˚hara taking away life, destructive MN i.10 = iii.97 SN iv.206 AN ii.116 AN ii.143 AN ii.153 AN iii.163
        from pa + an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; Pali apāna, etc.
    Pāṇaka
    adjective-noun (usually—˚)
    1. a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life SN iv.198 (chap˚) Dhp-a i.20 (Burmese variant mata˚); sap˚; with life, containing living creatures Ja i.198 (udaka); ap˚; without living beings, lifeless Vin ii.216 MN i.13 MN i.243 SN i.169 Snp p. 15 (udaka) Ja i.67 (jhāna)
    from pāṇa
    Pāṇana
    neuter
    1. breathing Vism 310 ‣See pāṇa; Dhātupāṭha 273 (“baḷa” pāṇane)
    from pāṇa
    Pāṇi
    the hand Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā paripuñchati) MN i.78 (pāṇinā parimajjati) SN i.178 SN i.194 Snp 713 Dhp 124 Ja i.126 (˚ṁ paharati) PugA 249 (identical) Pv-a 56 Sdhp 147 Sdhp 238. As adjective (—˚) “handed,” with a hand, e.g. alla˚; with clean hand Pv ii.99; payata˚; with outstretched hand, open-handed liberal SN v.351 AN iii.287 AN iv.266f.; v.331.
    1. ˚tala the palm of the hand DN ii.17
    • ˚bhāga handshare division by hands Vv-a 96
    • ˚matta of the size of a hand, a handful Pv-a 70 Pv-a 116 Pv-a 119
    • ˚ssara hand sound hand music, a certain kind of musical instrument DN i.6 iii.183 DN-a i.84 (cp. Dial i.8), 231 Ja v.390 Ja v.506 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pāṇisvara MVastu ii.52. Also adjective one who plays this instrument Ja vi.276 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pāṇisvarika MVastu iii.113
    Vedic pāṇi, cp. Avestan pərənā hand, with n-suffix, where we find m-suffix in Latin palma, Old Irish lām, Old High German folma = Anglo-Saxon folm
    Pāṇikā
    feminine
    1. a sort of spoon Vin ii.151 cp. puthu-pāṇikā (˚pāṇiyā?) Vin ii.106
    from pāṇi; Sanskrit *pāṇikā
    Pāṇin
    adjective-noun
    1. having life, a living being SN i.210 SN i.226 Snp 220 (accusative plural pāṇine, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 952) 587 (identical), 201, 575 Pv-a 287 Dhp-a ii.19
    2. from pāṇa
    Pāta
    (—˚)
    1. fall DN-a i.95 (ukkā˚) Pv-a 45 (asani˚). The reading “anatthato pātato rakkhito” at Pv-a 61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato? rakkhito
    2. throwing, a throw Snp 987 (muddha˚) Pv-a 57 (akkhi˚) ‣See also piṇḍa
    from pat
    Pātana
    neuter
    1. bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha˚; destroying the foetus, abortion (q.v. Dhp-a i.47 and passim
    from pāteti
    Pātar
    adverb

    early in the morning, in following forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in compound ˚āsa morning meal, breakfast cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prātar-aśana Divy 631

    1. DN iii.94 Snp 387 Ja i.232 Vv-a 294 308 Snp-a 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍa-pātass’ etaṁ nāmaṁ)-katapātarāsa adjective after breakfast Ja i.227 Ja vi.349 (˚bhetta); Vism 391.
    2. pāto (absolute) DN iii.94 Dhp-a ii.60 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 126 Pv-a 128; pāto va right early Ja i.226 vi.180.
    3. pātaṁ SN i.183 SN ii.242 Thag 2, 407 Note. Should piṇḍa-pāta belong here, as suggested by Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 374 ‣See above? ‣See detail under piṇḍa
    4. Vedic prātar, derived from *prō, *prā, cp. Latin prandium (from prām-edi̯om = pātar-āsa); early Old High German fruo = German früh
    Pātavyatā
    feminine
    1. downfall, bringing to fall, felling MN i.305 AN i.266 Vin iv.34 (˚by˚) Vb-a 499
    from pāt ‣See pāteti
    Pātāpeti
    1. to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin ii.108 DN-a i.134
    causative II. of pāteti
    Pātāla
    1. proclivity, cliff, abyss SN i.32 SN i.127 SN i.197 SN iv.206 Thag 1, 1104 ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 418 for fuller explanation Ja iii.530 (here explained as a cliff in the ocean)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pātāla an underground cave
    Pāti
    1. to watch, keep watch, keep Ja iii.95 (to keep the eyes open, Commentary ummisati; opp nimisati); Vism 16 (= rakkhati in definition of pāṭimokkha)
    Vedic pāti of , cp. Latin pāsco to tend sheep
    Pātika
    1. = pātī, read at Vism 28 for patika
    Pātita
    1. brought to fall, felled, destroyed Snp 631 Dhp 407 Ja iii.176 Pv-a 31 (so read for patita)
    past participle of pāteti
    Pātin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. throwing, shooting, only in compound dūre˚; throwing far AN i.284 AN ii.170 ‣See akkhaṇa-vedhin
      from pāta
    Pātimokkha
    1. ‣See pāṭi˚;. Pati & Pati;
    Pātī
    Pāti;
    feminine
    1. a bowl, vessel, dish Vin i.157 (avakkāra˚), 352 (identical); ii.216 (identical) MN i.25 (kaṁsa˚), 207 SN ii.233 AN iv.393 (suvaṇṇa˚, rūpiya˚ kaṁsa˚) Ja i.347 Ja i.501 Ja ii.90 v.377 (suvaṇṇa˚) vi.510 (kañcana˚) Vv-a 65 Pv-a 274
    the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra neuter ; to this the
  • feminine Vedic pātrī
  • Pātukamyatā
    1. is frequent variant reading for cāṭu-kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading ‣See this. The meaning (according to Vism 27 = Vb-a 483) is “putting oneself low,” i.e. flattery, “fawning” (Vism translation 32). A still more explicit definition is found at Vb-a 338 The diff spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism 17, 27 Kp-a 236 Vb-a 338 483; cāṭukammatā Mil 370
    • pāṭukamyatā Vb 246
    • pātukamyatā Nd2 39 ‣See standing phrase under mugga-sūpyatā.

    Pātur
    1. (—˚) (˚pātu) indeclinable

      1. visible open, manifest; only in compound with kṛ; and bhū, and with the rule that pātu˚ appears before consonant, whereas pātur˚ stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ; (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Snp 316 Ja iv.7 Pug 30 Snp-a 423 aorist pātvākāsi SN ii.254 Dhp-a ii.64 pp pātukata Vv 8441
      2. with bhū (to become manifest to appear): pres. pātubhavati DN i.220 DN ii.12 DN ii.15 DN ii.20 226 MN i.445 SN iv.78 Pv ii.941 (pot. ˚bhaveyyuṁ)
      3. aorist pāturahosi [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prādurabhūt Jtm. 211 Vin i.5 DN i.215 DN ii.20 SN i.137 Pv ii.86 Mil 10 Mil 18 Vv-a 188
      4. plural pāturahaṁsu Ja i.11 & ˚ahiṁsu Ja i.54
      5. past participle pātubhūta SN iii.39 Dhs 1035 Pv-a 44

        1. ˚kamma making visible, manifestation SN ii.254 Dhp-a iv.198
        • ˚bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation MN i.50 SN ii.3 SN iv.78 AN i.266 AN ii.130 Snp 560 Snp 998 Ja i.63 Nd2 s.v.; Vism 437
        cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur + bhu; on t for d ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 394. As regards etymology Monier Williams suggests prā = pra + dur, door thus “before the door, openly”; cp. dvāra
    Pāteti
    1. to make fall, drop, throw off SN i.197 (sakuṇo rajaṁ) Ja i.93 (udakaṁ) Mil 305 (sāraṁ)
    2. to bring to fall Ja v.198 Mil 187
    3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) Ja i.393 Ja iii.177 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 115.

      • past participle pātita.
      • causative II. pātāpeti (q.v.)

        • Cp abhi˚. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti = Sanskrit sphāṭayati to split sphuṭ = (s)phal
        1. ‣See phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase; kaṭṭhaṁ pāteti to split firewood MN i.21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti
        causative of pat
    Pātheyya
    neuter
    1. “what is necessary for the road,” provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin i.244 SN i.44 Dhp 235 Dhp 237 Ja v.46 Ja v.241 DN-a i.288 Dhp-a i.180 Dhp-a iii.335 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 154
    gerundive formation from patha
    Pātheyyaka
    neuter = patheyya Pv-a 126
    Pāda
    1. the foot, usually
    2. plural pādā both feet, e.g. Vin i.9 34, 188 Iti 111 Snp 309 Snp 547 Snp 768 Snp 835 Snp 1028 Ja ii.114 Ja iv.137 Dhp-a iii.196 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 68 Vv-a 105 In singular scarce and then specified as eka˚ & dutiya˚, e.g. at Nd; 2 304iii Ja vi.354
    3. foot or base of a mountain Vism 399 (Sineru˚) Dhp-a i.108 (pabbata˚)
    4. the fourth part (“foot”) of a verse (cp. pada 4) Snp-a 239 273 343, 363 Thag-a 23

      • a coin Vin iii.47 Vv-a 77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka ‣See also kākaṇikā)
      1. ˚aṅguṭṭha a toe MN i.337
      • ˚aṅguṭṭhaka same Ja ii.447 Vism 233
      • ˚aṅguli same Pv-a 125 (opposite to hatth anguli finger)
      • ˚aṭṭhika bone of the foot MN i.58 MN i.89 iii.92; Kp-a 49
      • ˚āpacca offspring from the foot (of Brahmā) ‣See bandhu
      • ˚ūdara “(using) the belly as feet,” i.e. a snake Snp 604
      • ˚odaka water for washing the feet Vin i.9
      • ˚kathalika (˚iya)
      • accusative to Buddhaghosa either a foot stool or a towel (adhota-pāda-ṭhapanakaṁ pāda-ghaṁsanaṁ vā ‣See Vinaya Texts i.92; ii.373) Vin i.9 46; ii.22; iv.310; Kvu 440 Vv-a 8 Dhp-a i.321
      • ˚kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv iv.147 (explained at Pv-a 240 by pādasankhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain)
      • ˚khīla a corn in the foot Vin i.188 (as ˚ālādha, cp. Vin Texts ii.19)
      • ˚ghaṁsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin ii.130
      • ˚cāra moving about on feet Ja iv.104
      • ˚tala the sole of the foot Vin i.179 MN iii.90 DN iii.143 DN iii.148 Pv-a 74
      • ˚dhovana cleaning or washing one’s feet Dhp-a ii.9
      • ˚pa “drinking with the foot,” name for tree Pv iv.39 (cp. Pv-a 251) Mil 117 Mil 376 Vism 533 Vv-a 212 Sdhp 270
      • ˚paricārikā “serving on one’s feet,” i.e. a wife (cp. SN i,125) Ja iii.95 vi.268 Dhp-a iii.194
      • ˚pīṭha a foot-stool Vin i.9 (cp Vinaya Texts i.92); iv.310 Dhp-a iii.120 = 186 Vv-a 291
      • ˚puñchana(ka) wiping one’s feet (with a towel) Vism 358 (˚rajju-maṇḍalaka, in comparison = Vb-a 62) Vb-a 285 (˚coḷaka); Kp-a 144 Snp-a 333 Dhp-a i.415 (˚ka)
      • ˚puñchanī a towel for the feet Vin ii.174
      • ˚bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot-salve Vin i.205 Ja v.197 Ja v.376 Pv-a 44 Pv-a 78; anointing the feet Vv-a 44 (˚tėla), 295 (identical)
      • ˚mūla the sole of the foot, the foot Ja iv.131 cp. mūla
      • ˚mūlika “one who sits at one’s feet,” a foot-servant, lackey Ja i.122 Ja i.438 Ja ii.300 sq (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30
      • ˚lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Snp 63 Snp 972 Nd1 374 Nd2 433; abstract
      • feminine ˚lolatā Snp-a 36 & ˚loliya Nd2 433
      • ˚visāṇa “a horn on the foot,” i.e. an impossibility Ja vi.340
      • ˚sambāhana massaging the feet Dhp-a i.38
      Vedic pāda ‣See etymology under pada
    Pādaka
    adjective noun
    1. having a foot or basis Vin ii.110 (a˚) Snp 205 Thag-a 78
    2. fundamental pādakaṁ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism 667
      • neuter basis, foundation, base Pv-a 167
      • pādaka-jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, 397, 412 sq., 428 667

        • cp. āhacca˚;
        from pāda
    Pādāsi
    1. is aorist of padāti.

    Pāduka
    1. a little foot Ja vi.554
    = pādaka
    Pādukā
    feminine
    1. a shoe, slipper, clog Vin i.190 Vin ii.142 222 Ja iii.327 Ja iv.129 Ja iv.379 v.298; vi.23 Mil 330 DN-a i.136 Dhp-a iii.451 (muñja˚)-At Vin ii.143 (according to Rhys Davids) pādukā (dāru˚) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pāduka & pādukā
    Pāna
    1. cp. Latin potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (= Sanskrit pātra, Pali patta) drink, including water as well as any other liquid Often combined with anna˚; (food), e.g. Snp 485 Snp 487 Pv i.52 and ˚bhojana (identical) e.g. Dhp 249 Ja i.204 Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd1 372
    • Vin i.245 249 (yāgu˚) SN v.375 (majja˚) Snp 82 Snp 398 Snp 924 Ja i.202 (dibba˚) Pug 51 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 50
    1. ˚āgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin ii.267 Vin iii.151 Ja i.302 (= surā-geha Commentary ) Vb 247 Vb-a 339
    Vedic pāna, from , pibati = Latin bibo, past participle pīta, Indogermanic *po[i
    Pānaka
    neuter
    1. a drink Ja ii.285 Ja iv.30 Dāvs v.2 Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚) Vv-a 99 291
    • Derived pānakatta
    • abstract neuter being provided with drink Ja v.243 (a˚)
    from pāna
    Pānada
    1. in compound pānad’ ûpama at Ja ii.223 is faulty. The meaning is “a badly made sandal,” and the reading should probably be (with variant reading & Commentary ) “dupāhan’ ûpama, i.e. du(ḥ) + upāhanā. The Commentary explains as “dukkatupāhan’ ûpama.”
    Pānīya
    adjective neuter
    1. drinkable SN ii.111
    2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin ii.207 Vin iv.263 Ja i.198 Ja i.450 Ja iii.491 v.106, 382 Pv i.107 ii.119, 710 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 23) is also found, e. g Vin ii.153 DN i.148 Pv ii.102
      1. ˚ghata a pot for drinking water Vin ii.216 Ja vi.76 85
      2. ˚cāṭika drinking vessel Dhp-a iv.129
      • ˚cāṭī id Ja i.302
      • ˚ṭhālika drinking cup Vin ii.214 Vin iv.263
      • ˚bhājana identical Vin ii.153
      • ˚maṇḍapa water reservoir (Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit identical e.g. Avs ii.86) Vin ii.153
      • ˚māḷaka (? Ja vi.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta)
      • ˚sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin ii.153 Pv-a 102 cp. papā
      Vedic pānīya, from pāna
    Pānudi
    1. ‣See panudati
    Pāpa
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective evil, bad, wicked, sinful AN ii.222f. (and compar. pāpatara) Snp 57 Dhp 119 (opposite bhadra) Other compar-superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha SN v.96 pāpiṭṭhatara Vin ii.5 pāpiyyasika DN iii.254 ‣See pāpiya
    2. unfertile (of soil) SN iv.315
      • neuter evil, wrong doing, sin Snp 23 Snp 662 Dhp 117 (opposite puñña 183 Pv i.66 112; iv.150 Dhp-a ii.11
      • past participle pāpāni Snp 399 Snp 452 Snp 674 Dhp 119 Dhp 265.

        1. ˚iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin i.97 DN iii.246 SN i.50 SN ii.156 AN iii.119 AN iii.191 AN iii.219f.; iv.1 22, 155; v.123 sq. Snp 133 Snp 280 Iti 85 Nd2 342 Vism 24 (definition) Vb-a 476
        • ˚icchatā evil intention AN iv.160 AN iv.165 Dhp-a ii.77
        • ˚kamma evil doing, wickedness sin, crime DN iii.182 Iti 86 Snp 407 Dhp 127 Vism 502 Vb-a 440f. Pv-a 11 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 51 Pv-a 84 -kammanta evil-doer, villain SN i.97
        • ˚kammin id MN i.39 Dhp 126
        • ˚kara identical Snp 674
        • ˚karin identical Dhp 15 Dhp 17
        • ˚dassana sinful view Pv iv.355
        • ˚dhamma wickedness evil habit Dhp 248 Dhp 307 Pug 37 Dhp-a iii.4 Pv-a 98 as adjective at Pv-a. 58
        • ˚dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv i.117
        • ˚parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opposite puñña˚) Pv ii.615
        • ˚mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opposite kalyāṇa˚ MN i.43 MN i.470 DN iii.182
        • ˚mittatā bad company, association with wicked people AN i.13f. 83; iv.160, 165 DN iii.212 Dhs 13 27 Vb 359 369, 371
        • ˚saṅkappa evil thought Snp 280
        • ˚sīla bad morals Snp 246
        • ˚supina an evil dream (opposite bhaddaka) Vism 312 Dhp-a iii.4
        Vedic pāpa, cp. Latin patior≈English passion etc.; suffering, evil; suffering evil
    Pāpaka
    adjective
    1. bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin i.8 SN i.149 SN i.207 SN v.418 (p. akusala citta) Snp 127 Snp 215 Snp 664Dhp 66 Dhp 78 Dhp 211 Dhp 242 Ja i.128 Pv ii.716 (= lāmaka Commentary ); ii.93 Pug 19 Dhs 30 101 Mil 204 (opp kalyāṇa); Vism 268 (= lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp bhaddaka). feminine pāpikā Dhp 164 Dhp 310; ; without sin innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Thag 2, 370 Vv 314 326 (so explained by Vv-a, but Thag-a explains as faultless, i.e. beautiful)
    2. from pāpa
    Pāpaṇika
    adjective noun
    1. belonging to a shop, i.e. 1. a shopkeeper AN i.115f.
    • laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin i.255 Vism 62 (= āpaṇa-dvāre patitaka) ‣See also Vinaya Texts ii.156
    • pa + āpaṇa + ika
    Pāpika
    1. = pāpaka DN i.90 (cp. DN-a i.256) AN iv.197
    Pāpita
    1. one who has done wrong, sinful, evil MN ii.43 (where DN i.90 at identical p has pāpika) DN-a i.256 (for pāpika, variant reading vāpita)
    past participle of pāpeti1, in meaning = pāpika
    Pāpimant
    adjective noun
    1. sinful; a sinner, especially used as epithet of Māra, i.e. the Evil, the wicked one SN i.103 AN iv.434 Ud 64 Snp 430 Thag 1 1213 Mil 155f. Dhp-a iv.32
    from pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman
    Pāpiyo
    adjective
    1. worse, more evil or wicked SN i.162 SN i.202 Snp 275 Dhp 42 Dhp 76 Ja i.158 Ja iv.303 Mil 155 Dhp-a ii.108
    compar. of pāpa, cp. Sanskrit pāpīyas
    Pāpuṇana
    neuter
    1. attainment Ja iv.306
    from pāpuṇāti
    Pāpuṇāti
    1. to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn
    • pres. pāpuṇāti Vin ii.208 Ja iv.285 Ja vi.149 Pug 70 DN-a 21 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 98 Pv-a 125 Pv-a 195; and pappoti SN i.25 Dhp 27 Vism 501 Dhp-a i.395 pot. pāpuṇe Snp 324 Dhp 138 Ja v.57 (1st pl pāpuṇeyyāma for Text pappomu) Dhp-a iv.200
    • aorist apāpuṇi Thag-a 64 and pāpuṇi Ja ii.229 preterite apattha Ja v.391 (proh. mā a.).
    • future pāpuṇissati Ja i.260
    • absolutive pāpuṇitvā SN ii.28
    • patvā Snp 347 Snp 575 and pappuyya SN i.7 (cp. Vin ii.56 AN i.138), 181, 212. infinitive pappotuṁ Si.129 = Th 2, 60, and pāpuṇituṁ Vb-a 223
    • grd pattabba SN i.129 SN ii.28 Snp-a 433
    • past participle patta; Caus pāpeti2 (q.v.)
    pa + āp; cp. Sanskrit prāpnoti
    Pāpuraṇa
    neuter
    1. cover, dress, cloak SN i.175 Mil 279 Dhp-a iii.1 ‣See also pārupana
    through *pāvuraṇa from pra + vṛ; , cp. Sanskrit prāvaraṇa
    Pāpurati
    1. to cover, veil; shut, hide; only negative ; and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraṁ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin i.5 Vv 6427 (= vivarati Vv-a 284)
    from pa + ā + vṛ; , cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti
    Pāpeti1
    1. to make bad, bring into disgrace Vin iv.5 past participle pāpita
    2. denominative from pāpa
    Pāpeti2
    1. to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to Ja iv.494 Ja v.205 Ja v.260 DN-a i.136 imperative pāpaya SN i.217 and pāpayassu Ja iv.20
    2. future pāpessati Ja i.260 and pāpayissati Ja v.8
    3. causative of pāpuṇāti
    Pābhata
    1. brought, conveyed DN-a i.262 Snp-a 356 (kathā˚)
    pa + ābhata
    Pābhati
    neuter
    1. “that which has been brought here,” viz. 1. a present, bribe DN-a i.262 2. money, price Ja i.122 Ja v.401 Ja v.452
    • kathā˚ “a tale brought,” occasion for something to tell, news, story Ja i.252 Ja i.364 Ja i.378 Snp-a 356
    pa + ā + past participle of bhṛ
    Pāmaṅga
    neuter
    1. a band or chain Vin ii.106 Vin iii.48 Mhvs 11, 28; Dīpavaṁsa xii.1 Dhp-a iv.216 ‣See on this Vinaya Texts iii.69 & Mahāvastu translation 797
    etymology?
    Pāmujja
    neuter
    1. delight, joy, happiness; often combined with pīti
    • DN i.72 DN i.196 SN iii.134 SN iv.78 = 351; v.156 398 AN iii.21 AN v.1f. 311 sq., 339, 349 Snp 256 Nett 29 DN-a i.217 Sdhp 167 ‣See also pāmojja
    gerundive formation tr. pa + mud ‣See similar forms under pāmokkha
    Pāmokkha
    adjective
    1. chief, first, excellent eminent, masculine a leader
    2. AN ii.168 (sanga sa˚) Pug 69 70 Mil 75 (hatthi˚ state elephant). disā˚ worldfamed Ja i.166 Ja i.285 Ja ii.278 vi.347
    3. frequently in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd2 502 AN e.g., when AN ii.95 reads mokkha for p.) ‣See mahā;. Defined as “pamukhe sādhū ti” at Vb-a 332
    4. facing east Pv iv.353 (= pācīna-dis âbhimukha)
    a gerundive formation from pamukha, with lengthening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya pāṭimokkha, pāmojja
    Pāmojja
    = pāmujja
    1. DN ii.214 DN iii.288 MN i.37 MN i.98 SN i.203 SN ii.30 SN v.157 Dhp 376 Dhp 381; Ps i.177 Dhs 9 86 Mil 84 Vism 2, 107, 177 (Text pa˚) Dhp-a iv.111 (˚bahula)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prāmodya Divy 13 Divy 82, 239
    Pāya
    1. setting out, starting SN ii.218 (nava˚ newly setting out); instrumental pāyena (adverb ) for the most part, commonly, usually Ja v.490 DN-a i.275 (so read for pāṭhena)
    2. from pa + ā +
    Pāyaka
    (—˚)
    1. drinking Ja i.252 (vāruṇi˚)
    from to drink
    Pāyāta
    1. gone forth, set out, started Ja i.146
    pp of pāyāti
    Pāyāti
    1. to set out, start, go forth Dhp-a ii.42 aorist 3rd singular pāyāsi DN ii.73 Ja i.64 Ja i.223 Ja iii.333 Vv-a 64 Pv-a 272 Pv-a 3rd
    2. plural pāyesuṁ Ja iv.220 and pāyiṁsu DN ii.96 Ja i.253 Dhp-a iii.257
    3. past participle pāyāta (q.v.) ‣See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti
    4. pra + ā +
    Pāyāsa
    1. rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge SN i.166 Snp p. 15 Ja i.50 Ja i.68 iv.391; v.211; Vism 41 Snp-a 151 Dhp-a i.171 Dhp-a ii.88 Vv-a 32
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pāyāsa
    Pāyin
    adjective noun
    1. drinking Ja iii.338
    from ‣See pivati
    Pāyeti
    1. to give to drink, to make drink DN ii.19 Snp 398 (Pot. pāyaye) Mil 43 Mil 229 Dhp-a i.87 (amataṁ) Vv-a 75 (yāguṁ) Pv-a 63
    2. aorist apāyesi SN i.143
    3. absolutive pāyetvā Ja i.202 (dibba-pānaṁ) ii.115 (lohitaṁ); iii.372 (phāṇīt’ odakaṁ); iv.30 (pānakaṁ); vi.392 (suraṁ)
    4. to irrigate Ja i.215
    5. ppr
    6. feminine pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman DN i.166 MN i.77 AN i.295 AN ii.206 AN iii.227 Pug 55 Dhp-a i.49
    7. causative II. pāyāpeti Ja v.422
    causative from ‣See pibati
    Pāra
    adjective neuter
    1. as
    2. adverb (˚-) beyond, over, across, used as preposition with ablative, e.g. pāra-Gangāya beyond the G. SN i.207 SN i.214 Snp-a 228 ‣See under compounds
    3. as
    4. nt. the other side, the opposite shore SN i.169 SN i.183 Snp 1059 Nd1 20 (= amataṁ nibbānaṁ) Dhp 385 Dhp-a iv.141 aparā pāraṁ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with reference to this world & the world beyond) SN iv.174 AN v.4 Snp 1130 pāraṁ gavesino MN ii.64 = Th 1, 771
    5. Cases

      • adverb ially:
      • accusative pāraṁ ‣See sep.; ablative pārato from the other side Vin ii.209
      • the guṇa form of para, another ‣See compounds.:
      1. ˚atthika (pār’) wishing to cross beyond DN i.244
      • ˚ga “going beyond,” traversing, crossing, surmounting SN iv.71 (jātimaraṇassa) Snp 32 Snp 997
      • ˚gata one who has reached the opposite shore SN i.34 SN ii.277 SN iv.157 AN iv.411 Snp 21 Snp 210 Snp 359 Dhp 414 Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231); one who has gone over to another party Thag 1, 209
      • ˚gavesin looking for the other shore Dhp 355 Dhp-a iv.80
      • ˚gāmin = gata SN i.123 AN v.232f. 253 sq. Dhp-a ii.160
      • ˚gū (a) gone beyond, i.e. passed transcended, crossed SN i.195 = Nd2 136a (dukkhassa) iv.210 (bhavassa) AN ii.9 (identical); iii.223 Iti 33 (jarāya) Dhp 348 (b) gone to the end of (genitive or

        • ˚), reached perfection in, well-versed in, familiar with, an authority on Snp 992 (sabbadhammānaṁ), 1105 (cp. Nd2 435) DN i.88 (tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ) Dhp-a iii.361 (identical)
        • ˚dārika an adulterer, literally one of another’s wife SN ii.259 Ja iii.43 (so read for para˚) Dhp-a ii.10
        from para
    Pāraṁ
    1. (adverb

      • preposition)
      1. beyond, to the other side DN i.244 MN i.135 Snp 1146 (Maccu-dheyya˚, variant readings ˚dheyassa & ˚dheyya˚), explained by Nd2 487 as amataṁ nibbānaṁ Vv-a 42
      1. ˚gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended MN i.135 SN ii.277 Snp 803 Nd1 114 Nd2 435 Pug 72 Vism 234
      2. ˚gamana crossing over, going beyond SN v.24 SN v.81 AN v.4 313 Snp 1130
      accusative of pāra
    Pāramitā
    feminine
    1. = pāramī Nett 87
    pāramī + tā
    Pāramī
    feminine
    1. completeness, perfection, highest state Snp 1018 Snp 1020 Pug 70 Dhp-a i.5 Vv-a 2 (sāvakañāṇa˚) Pv-a 139 Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections dasa pāramiyo as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚ viriya˚, khanti˚, sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā Ja i.73 Dhp-a i.84
    1. ˚ppatta (pārami˚) having attained perfection MN iii.28 Nd2 435 Mil 21 Mil 22 cp. Miln translation i.34
    abstract from parama, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mantrāṇāṁ pāramiṁ gata Divy 637
    Pārājika
    1. one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion ‣See on term Vinaya Texts i.3 Miln translation i.268; ii.78 Vin i.172 Vin ii.101 242 AN ii.241 iii.252; v.70 Ja vi.70 Ja vi.112 Mil 255 Vism 22; Kp-a 97, Dhp-a i.76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhanga ‣See also Vin iii.1f.)
    etymology doubtful; suggested are parā + aj (Burnouf); para + ji; pārācika (S. Lévi ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 38, note 3; also Childers s.v.)
    Pārāpata
    1. a dove, pigeon Ja i.242 Ja v.215 Vv-a 167 (˚akkhi); Pgdp 45 ‣See the doublet pārevata
    Epic Sanskrit pārāvata
    Pārāyana
    neuter
    1. the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta AN iii.401 Snp 1130 Nd2 438 Snp-a 163 370 604
    late Sanskrit pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana
    Pārikkhattiya
    1. = parikkhattatā, Pug 19 = Vb-a 358
    Pāricariyā
    feminine same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for =
    • locative ) DN iii.189 DN iii.250 281 MN ii.177 SN iv.239 AN ii.70 AN iii.284 AN iii.325 AN iii.328 Ja iii.408 Ja iv.490 Ja v.154 Ja v.158 (kilesa˚) Pv-a 7 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 128 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pāricāryā MVastu ii.225.

    Pāricchatta
    1. = pāricchattaka, Snp 64 (˚ka Nd2 439; explained as koviḷāra) Ja v.393
    Pāricchattaka
    1. the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra’s heaven Vin i.30 AN iv.117f. Vv 381 (explained as Māgadhism at Vv-a 174 for pārijāta, which is also the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form) Ja i.40 Ja ii.20 Kp-a i.122 Snp-a 485 Dhp-a i.273 Dhp-a iii.211 Dhs-a 1 Vv-a 12 110 Pv-a 137
    Epic Sanskrit pārijāta, but Pali from pari + chatta + ka, in popular etymology “shading all round”
    Pārijāta
    1. = pāricchattaka, Vv-a 174
    Pārijuñña
    neuter
    1. decay, loss MN ii.66 Dhp-a i.238 Vv-a 101 (bhoga˚)
    2. loss of property, poverty Pv-a 3
    abstract from parijuṇṇa, past participle of pari + jur
    Pāripanthika
    1. highwayman, robber SN ii.188 Ja v.253
    2. connected with danger, threatening dangerous to (—˚) Vism 152; PugA 181 (samādhi˚ vipassanā˚)
    from paripantha
    Pāripūrī
    feminine
    1. fulfilment, completion, consummation SN i.139 AN v.114f. Snp 1016 Ja vi.298 Nd2 137 (pada˚) Snp-a 28 (identical) Pug 53 Dhs 1367 Dhp-a i.36 Pv-a 132 Pv-a 133 Vb-a 468 (˚mada conceit of perfection)
    abstract from pari + pūr, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pāripūri Avs ii.107
    Pārima
    adjective
    1. yonder, farther, only combined with ˚tīra the farther shore DN i.244 MN i.134 135 SN iv.174 Mil 269 Dhp-a ii.100 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pārimaṁ tīraṁ Avs i.148
    superl. formation from pāra
    Pāribhaṭya
    neuter (& derivation)
    1. “petting (or spoiling) the children” (Miln translation ii.287) but perhaps more likely “fondness of being petted” or “nurture (as Vism translation 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as explanation at Vism 28 = Vb-a 483) The readings are different, thus we find ˚bhaṭyatā at Vb 240 Vb-a 338 483; ˚bhatyatā at Vism 17, 23 27 (variant readings ˚bhaṭṭatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā); ˚bhaṭṭakatā at Mil 370
    • ˚bhaṭṭatā at Vb 352 Kp-a 236 Nd2 39 The more det. explanation at Vb-a 338 is “alankāra-karaṇ ādīhi dāraka-kīḷāpanaṁ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ."-See stock phrase under mugga-sūpyatā
    from pari + ; bhṛ
    Pāribhogika
    adjective
    1. belonging to use or enjoyment, with reference to relics of personal use Ja iv.228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika) Mil 341 (identical)
    from paribhoga
    Pārivattaka
    adjective = pari˚; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin iv.59 60. Parivasika = pari
    Pārivāsika = pari˚
    1. ; (a probationer), Vin i.136 Vin ii.31f. where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank
    Pārisajja
    1. belonging to an assembly, plural the members of an assembly, especially those who sit in council councillors (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291 Vin i.348 DN i.136 DN iii.64 DN iii.65 MN i.326 SN i.145 SN i.222 AN i.142 Mil 234 DN-a i.297
    from parisā
    Pārisuddhi
    feminine
    1. purity Vin i.102 136 (cp. Vinaya Texts i.242, 280) MN iii.4 AN ii.194f. (˚padhāniy’ angāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta˚ diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚) Nd1 475; Ps i.42 (˚sīla) Dhs 165 Mil 336 (ājīva˚, and in 4th jhāna); Vism 30 (= parisuddhatā), 46 (˚sīla), 278 Dhp-a iii.399 (catu˚-sīla) iv.111 (ājīva˚); Sdhp 342
    from parisuddha
    Pārihāriya
    adjective
    1. connected with preservation or attention, fostering, keeping Vism 3 (˚paññā) 98 (˚kammaṭṭhāna) Snp-a 54 (identical)
    from parihāra
    Pāruta
    1. covered, dressed SN i.167 SN i.175 Thag 1, 153 Ja i.59 Ja i.347 Snp-a 401 Pv-a 48 Pv-a 161
    • duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe Vin i.44 Vin ii.212 SN ii.231 SN ii.271 ‣See also abhipāruta Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a negative pāruta in reality it is apa + ā + vṛta
    past participle of pārupati
    Pārupati
    1. to cover, dress, hide, veil DN i.246 Vin iv.283 MN iii.94 SN ii.281 Ja ii.24 Ja ii.109 Pv ii.112 (= nivāseti Pv-a 147); Mhvs 22, 67; Vism 18 Dhp-a iii.325 Vv-a 44 127 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 77
    • pp pāruta (q.v.)
    metathesis from pāpurati = Sanskrit prāvṛṇoti, pra + vṛ ‣See also pāpurati etc.
    Pārupana
    neuter
    1. covering, clothing; dress Ja i.126 Ja i.378 Ja iii.82 Mil 279 Dhp-a i.70 164 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76
    from pārupati
    Pāreti
    1. to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) Ja iii.185 (reading uncertain)
    denominative from pāra; cp. Latin portare
    Pārevata
    1. a dove, pigeon AN i.162 (dove-coloured) Vv 363 (˚akkhi pārāpat’ akkhi Vv-a 167) Ja vi.456
    2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris Ja vi.529 Ja vi.539
    the Prakrit form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sanskrit pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.
    Pāroha
    1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) Ja v.8 Ja v.38 Ja v.472 vi.199 Snp-a 304 Pv-a 113
    2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) SN i.69 ‣See Commentary explanation at Kindred Sayings 320 Ja vi.15 Dhp-a ii.70 Vb-a 475 476
    from pra + ruh, cp. Sanskrit *prāroha
    Pāla
    (—˚)
    1. a guard, keeper, guardian, protector SN i.185 (vihāra˚) Ja v.222 (dhamma˚) Vv-a 288 (ārāma˚); Sdhp 285 ‣See also go˚, loka˚
    from ‣See pāleti
    Pālaka
    (—˚)
    1. a guardian, herdsman MN i.79 SN iii.154 AN iv.127 Ja iii.444
    from
    Pālana
    neuter (& pālanā?
    1. moving running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism 145 Dhs-a 149 167; also in definition of bhuñjati1 as “pālan’ ajjhohāresu” by eating drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As; pālanā at the Dhs passages of same context as above ‣See under yapana
    from pāleti.2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy
    Pālanā
    feminine
    1. guarding, keeping Ja i.158 Dhs 19 82,295. Pali (Pali)
    from pāleti cp. epithet Sanskrit pālana nt.
    Pāli (Pāḷi)
    feminine
    1. a line, row Dāvs iii.61; iv.3; Vism 242 (dvattiṁs’ ākāra˚), 251 (danta˚) Snp-a 87
    2. a line, norm thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i.e. the original text (opposite to the Commentary ; thus “pāliyaṁ” is opposed to “aṭṭhakathāyaṁ” at Vism 107, 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī ‣See Grierson, The Home of Literally Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. ii.10; iii.606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka ‣See also Hardy, introduction to Nett, p. xi
    3. J iv.447 (˚nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism 376 (˚nay’ anusārena identical), 394, 401, 565 (˚anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; Kp-a 41 Snp-a 333 424, 519, 604 Dhs-a 157 168 Dhp-a iv.93 Vv-a 117 203 (pālito + aṭṭhuppattito) Pv-a 83 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 92 287; and frequently elsewhere
      1. ˚vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya-kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vb 291 Vism 240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa)
      cp. Sanskrit pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha iii.54
    Pāliguṇṭhima
    adjective
    1. covered round (of sandals Vin i.186 (Vinaya Texts ii.15: laced boots); Burmese variant ˚gunṭhika
    doubtful, from pali + guṇṭh ‣See paliguṇṭhita; hapax legomenon
    Pālicca
    neuter
    1. greyness of hair MN i.49 SN ii.2 SN ii.42 AN iii.196 Dhs 644 736, 869 Vb-a 98
    from palita
    Pālibhaddaka
    1. the tree Butea frondosa Ja iv.205 Nd2 680Aii Vism 256 (˚aṭṭhi) Vb-a 239 (identical); Kp-a 46, 53 Dhs-a 14 Dhp-a i.383 As phālibhaddaka (-vana) at Ja ii.162 (variant reading pātali˚)
    from palibhadda = pari + bhadda, very auspicious
    Pāleti
    1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Snp 585 Ja i.55 Ja iv.127 Ja vi.589 Mil 4 (paṭhavī lokaṁ pāleti, perhaps in meaning “keeps holds, encircles,” similar to meaning 2); Sdhp 33. 2. (literally perhaps “to ‣See through safely”; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going in definition of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti yapeti, yāpeti at Nd2 237 Vb 252 Dhs-a 167 cp. pālana. So also in phrase atthaṁ pāleti (so read for paleti?) “to come home” i.e. to disappear Snp 1074 ‣See explained Nd2 28 ‣See other refs. under palāyati.
    2. past participle pālita ‣See also abhi˚ & pari˚. A contracted (poetical) form is found as; pallate at Ja v.242 explained by Commentary as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med
    3. Pass
    4. cp. (Epic) Sanskrit pālayati, from
    Pāvaka
    adjective noun
    1. adjective pure, bright, clear, shining Ja v.419
    2. masculine the fire SN i.69 AN iv.97 Dhp 71 Dhp 140 Ja iv.26 Ja v.63 (= kaṇha-vattanin vi.236 (= aggi Commentary ) Pv i.85 Vism 170 (= aggi)
    from pu, Vedic pāvaka
    Pāvacana
    neuter
    1. a word, especially the word of the Buddha DN i,88 SN ii.259 Thag 1, 587 2, 457
    pa + vacana, with lengthening of first a ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 331
    Pāvadati
    1. to speak out, to tell, show Ja ii.439 Pv iv.148 Pv-a 118
    = pavadati
    Pāvassi
    1. ‣See pavassati
    Pāvāra
    1. a cloak, mantle Vin i.281 Ja v.409 (explained as pavara-dibba-vattha!)
    2. the mango tree Kp-a 58 (˚puppha; Vism 258 at identical passage has pāvāraka˚)
    from pa + vṛ
    Pāvārika
    1. a cloak-seller (?) Vin iv.250
    from pāvāra
    Pāvāḷa
    1. hair; only in compound ˚nipphoṭanā pulling out one’s hair SN iv.300 Pavisa & Pavekkhi;
    ‣See pavāḷa
    Pāvisa
    Pāvekkhi;
    1. ‣See pavisati
    Pāvuraṇa
    neuter
    1. cloak, mantle MN i.359 Vin iv.255 289 Thag-a 22
    from pa + ā + vṛ ‣See pāpuraṇa & pārupana
    Pāvusa
    1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Thag 1, 597 Ja v.202 206
    2. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (gloss pāgusa, q.v.)
    pa + vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa
    Pāvussaka
    adjective
    1. raining, shedding rain M. i.306 SN v.51 AN iv.127 Ja i.95 Ja i.96 Mil 114
    from pāvusa
    Pāsa1
    1. a sling, snare, tie, fetter SN i.105 SN i.111 AN ii.182 AN iv.197 Vin iv.153 (? hattha˚) Snp 166 Iti 36 (Māra˚) Ja iii.184 Ja iv.414 Pv-a 206 On its frequent use in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 111
    Vedic pāśa
    Pāsa2
    1. a spear, a throw Snp 303 AN iv.171 (kuṭhāri˚ throw of an axe)
    • asi˚ a class of deities Mil 191
    Classical Sanskrit prāsa from pra + as
    Pāsa3
    1. (a stone?) at Pv-a 63 (pās’ antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās’ antare similarly to rukkh’ antare, kaṭṭh'-and mūl’ antare) foliage
    Pāsaṁsa
    adjective
    1. to be praised praiseworthy MN i.15 MN i.404 MN ii.227 (dasa ˚ṭṭhānāni). AN v.129 (identical) Ja iii.493 Pv iv.713; Nett 52
    gerundive from pasaṁsati with pā for pa as in similar formations ‣See pāmokkha
    Pāsaka1
    1. a bow, for the dress Vin ii.136 for the hair Thag 2, 411 (if Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corrected from pasāda)
    from pāsa1
    Pāsaka2
    1. a throw, a die Ja vi.281
    from pāsa2
    Pāsaka3
    1. lintel Vin ii.120 = 148 ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.144
    Pāsaṇḍa
    1. heresy, sect SN i.133 AN ii.466 Thag 2, 183 Mil 359 Thag-a 164
    • ˚˚ika heretic sectarian Vin iv.74
    cp. late Sanskrit pāṣaṇḍa
    Pāsati
    1. (?) only in “sammaṁ pāsanti” at Snp-a 321 as explanation of sammāpāsa (q.v.)
    Pāsāṇa
    a rock, stone AN i.283 Snp 447 Ja i.109 Ja i.199 Ja v.295 Vism 28, 182, 183 Vb-a 64 (its size as cpd with pabbata) Dhp-a iii.151 Dhs-a 389 Vv-a 157 Sdhp 328.
    1. ˚guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) AN ii.200 (sāla-laṭṭhiṁ … taccheyya.. likheyya … pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya … nadiṁ patāreyya), cp. MN i.233 and Vism 28 “bhājane ṭhapitaṁ guḷapiṇḍaṁ viya pāsāṇaṁ.” -cetiya a stone Caitya Dhp-a iii.253
    • ˚tala a natural plateau Ja i.207
    • ˚piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism 116
    • ˚pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism 119
    • ˚phalaka a slab of stone Ja iv.328
    • ˚macchaka a kind of fish (stone-fish) Ja iv.70 Ja vi.450
    • ˚lekha writing on a stone Pug 32
    • ˚sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock SN ii.137 AN iv.237
    • ˚sevāla stone Vallisneria Ja v.462
    • ˚vassa rain of stones Snp-a 224
    Epic Sanskrit pāṣāṇa
    Pāsāṇaka
    1. = pāsāṇa Vin ii.211
    Pāsāda
    1. a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin i.58 96, 107, 239; ii.128, 146, 236 (cp. Vinaya Texts i.174; iii.178) DN ii.21 SN i.137 AN i.64 Snp 409 Iti 33 Pv ii.125 Ja ii.447 Ja iv.153 (pillars); v.217; Vism 339 (˚tala) Dhs-a 107 Snp-a 502 Thag-a 253 286 Vv-a 197 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 279 (cp. upari˚); Sdhp 299
    • satta-bhū- maka˚ a tower with 7 platforms Ja i.227 Ja i.346 Ja iv.323 378; v.426, 577. The Buddha’s 3 castles at DN ii.21 AN i.145 Ja vi.289 ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 112 (p. in similes)
    pa + ā + sad, cp. Classical Sanskrit prāsāda
    Pāsādika
    adjective
    1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin iv.18 DN iii.141 SN i.95 SN ii.279 AN ii.104f. 203; iii.255 sq. Dhp-a i.119 Thag-a 266 281 DN-a i.141 281 Vv-a 6 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 186 Pv-a 187 Pv-a 261
    2. samanta˚ lovely throughout AN i.24 AN v.11
    3. comfortable Vism 105
    from pasāda
    Pāsāvin
    adjective
    1. bringing forth SN v.170 Ja i.394
    from pasavati
    Pāsuka
    1. a rib Vin ii.266 (loop? Rhys Davids)
    for the usual phāsuka
    Pāsuḷa
    1. a rib Vin iii.105
    for phāsuka
    Pāssati
    1. fat. of pibati (for pivissati)
    Pāhuna
    masculine neuter
    1. masculine a guest AN iii.260 Ja vi.24 Ja vi.516
    2. neuter meal for a guest DN i.97 = MN ii.154 Vism 220 DN-a i.267
    from pa + ā + hu ‣See also āhuna & derivation
    Pāhunaka
    masculine
    • nt.)
    1. masculine a guest Ja i.197 Ja iv.274 Mil 107 DN-a i.267 288 Dhp-a ii.17
    2. neuter meal for a guest SN i.114
    from pāhuna
    Pāhuṇeyya
    adjective
    1. worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest DN iii.5 SN i.220 SN ii.70 AN ii.56 AN iii.36 AN iii.134 AN iii.248 AN iii.387 AN iv.13f.; v.67 198 Iti 88 Vism 220
    from pāhuna ‣See also āhuneyya
    Pāhuneyyaka
    1. = pāhuṇeyya Ja iii.440
    Pāheti
    1. to send Ja i.447 Mil 8 Pv-a 133
    secondary formation after aorist pāhesi from pahiṇati
    Pi
    indeclinable
    1. emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati where api˚ also is found (cp. api.1b)
    1. -1. also, and also, even so DN i.1 Vin iv.139 (cara pi re get away with you ‣See re) Ja i.151 Ja i.278
    • even, just so; with numbers or numerical expressions “altogether, in all, just that many” Ja i.151 Ja iii.275 Ja iv.142
    • cattāro pi Ja iii.51 ubho pi Ja i.223 sabbe pi Snp 52 Ja i.280 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) Ja i.208 Ja iv.2

  • although, even if Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho … ca although for a long time.. yet).

    • perhaps, it is time that, probably Snp 43 Ja i.151 Ja ii.103

  • pi … pi in correlation (like api … api: (a) both … and; very often untranslatable Snp 681 (yadā pi … tadā pi when.. then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi) Ja i.222 (jale pi thale pi) (b) either … or Ja i.150 Ja ii.102

    the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on similarities in Prakrit ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 143
  • Piṁsa
    1. crushed, ground, pounded Dhp-a iii.184 (variant reading piṭṭha, perhaps preferable)
    past participle of piṁsati2
    Piṁsati1

    1. or piṁś, cp. Vedic piṁśati, with two bases viz. Indogermanic *peig, as in Pali piñjara & pingala; Latin pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sanskrit piṁśati, peśaḥ Avestan paes-to embellish; Gothic fēh, Anglo-Saxon fāh] to adorn, form, embellish; originally to prick, cut. Perhaps piṁsare (3. plural medium) Ja v.202 belongs here, in meaning “tinkle, sound” (literally prick) explained in Commentary by viravati. Other derivations ‣See under pingala piñjara, pesakāra
    2. piś
    Piṁsati2 [

    1. or piṁṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Latin pinso to grind, pīla = pestle, pistillum = pistil; Lithuanian paisýti to pound barley; Old High German fesa = Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound Ja i.452 Ja ii.363 Ja iv.3 (matthakaṁ) 440 (akaluñ candanañ ca silāya p.) Mil 43 Dhp-a iii.184 (gandhe piṁsissati; Burmese manuscripts pisissati)
    2. to knock against each other, make a sound Ja v.202 ‣See piṁsati1.
    3. past participle piṁsa & piṭṭha; 1 ‣See also pisati and paṭi˚
    piṣ
    Piṅka
    [
    1. a young shoot, sprout Ja iii.389 (variant reading singa, which also points to pinga explained by pavāla)
    for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny
    Piṅga
    1. ‣See pinka
    Piṅgala
    adjective
    1. reddishyellow, brown, tawny SN i.170 Ja vi.199 (= pingiya). 2. red-eyed, as sign of ugliness Ja iv.245 (as proper name combined with nikkhanta-dāṭha); v.42 (tamba-dāṭhika nibbiddha-pingala); Pv ii.41 (= ˚locana Pv-a 90 + kaḷāra-danta).

      1. ˚kipillaka the red ant Dhp-a iii.206
      • ˚cakkhutā redeyedness Pv-a 250
      • ˚makkhikā the gadfly Ja iii.263 (= ḍaṁsa) Nd2 268 = Snp-a 101 (identical) Snp-a 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇa-makkhikā and pingala˚), 572 (= ḍaṁsa)
      ‣See piṁsati1, cp. Vedic pingala
    Piṅgiya
    adjective
    1. reddish-brown, yellow Ja vi.199
    from Vedic pinga
    Piṅgulā
    feminine
    1. a species of bird Ja vi.538
    a various of Sanskrit piṅgalā, a kind of owl
    Picu1
    cotton Vin i.271 usually in compounds, either as kappāsa˚ SN v.284 SN v.443 or tūla˚ SN v.284 SN v.351 (Text thula˚), 443 Ja v.480 (Text tula˚).
    1. ˚paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism 445 -manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv iv.16 (cp. Pv-a 220); the usual Pali form is pucimanda (q.v.)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit picu
    Picu2
    1. a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey Ja vi.537
    etymology unknown, probably Non-Aryan
    Piccha
    neuter
    1. tail-feather, especially of the peacock Vin i.186 (mora˚)
    • dve˚ (& de˚) having two tail-feathers Ja v.339 Ja v.341 (perhaps to be taken as “wing” here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84 = pakṣa). cp. piñcha & piñja
    cp. Epic Sanskrit piccha & puccha tail, to Latin pinna, English fin. German finne
    Picchita
    1. in su˚ Ja v.197 is not clear, Commentary expl5 by suphassita, i.e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su-picch˚
    Picchila
    adjective
    1. slippery Vism 264 Vb-a 247 (lasikā = p-kuṇapaṁ) Dhp-a iii.4 (˚magga)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit picchila
    Piñcha
    1. = piccha, i.e. tail-feather, tail Vin ii.130 (mora˚). cp. piñja
    Piñja
    neuter
    1. a (peacock’s) tail-feather Ja i.38 (mora˚ kalāpa), 207 (= pekkhuṇa); iii.226 (Burmese manuscripts piccha & miccha) DN-a i.41 (mora˚) Dhp-a i.394 (identical) Vv-a 147 (mayūra˚;
    2. Burmese manuscripts piñcha, SS pakkha) Pv-a 142 (mora˚ kalāpa)
    3. = piccha
    Piñjara
    of a reddish colour, tawny Ja i.93 DN-a i.245 Vv-a 165 288.
    1. ˚odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa Ja vi.563 (variant reading ciñcarodaka), explained by singhāṭaka
    cp. Classical Sanskrit piñjara; for etymology ‣See piṁsati1
    Piñjita
    adjective
    1. tinged, dyed Mil 240 On expression ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s.v
    from piṁsati1, cp. Sanskrit piñjana
    Piññāka
    neuter
    1. ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds MN i.78 MN i.342 Vin iv.341 (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaṁ vuccati) Vv-a 142 (tila˚ ‣Seed cake) Pv-a 48
    1. ˚bhakkha feeding on flour of oil-seeds DN i.166 AN i.241 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Nd1 417 Pug 55
    to piṁsati2, cp. Classical Sanskrit piṇyāka
    Piṭaka
    1. basket Vin i.225 (ghaṭa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv iv.333; Vism 28 (piṭake nikkhitta-loṇa-maccha-phāla-sadisaṁ phaṇaṁ); dhañña˚ a grain-basket Dhp-a iii.370
    2. vīhi˚ a rice basket Dhp-a iii.374 Usually in combination kuddāḷa-piṭaka “hoe and basket,” wherever the act of digging is referred to e.g. Vin iii.47 DN i.101 MN i.127 SN ii.88 SN v.53 AN i.204 AN ii.199 Ja i.225 Ja i.336 DN-a i.269
    3. (figuratively) t.t for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon “the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz Indian Literature ii.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition,” viz. Vinaya˚ Suttanta˚, Abhidhamma˚; ; thus mentioned by name at Pv-a 2 referred to as “tayo piṭakā” at Ja i.118 Vism 96 (pañca-nikāya-maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaṁ Vedānaṁ uggahaṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ Piṭakānaṁ uggahaṇaṁ) Snp-a 110 403 Dhp-a iii.262 iv.38; cp. Divy 18 Divy 253, 488. With reference to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin v.3
    4. Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i.e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at DN ii.124 cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin ii.75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara Independently of this division we find the designation “Dhamma” applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhamma ‣See also Dhamma Commentary 1
    5. The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī
    6. The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka “one who is familiar with the 3 P.” (thus at Mil 18 Dāvs v.22; Kp-a 41 with variant reading ti˚ Snp-a 306 identical Dhp-a iii.385). tipetakī (Vin v.3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Mil 90), and tipiṭaka-dhara Kp-a 91 ‣See also below ˚ttaya. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century a.d ‣See e.g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica viii. p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e.g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e.g. Avs i.334; Divy 261 Divy 505)
    7. On the Piṭakas in general the origin of the Pali Canon ‣See Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. 1913, ii.1 sq. iii.606, 635
    8. cp. peṭaka
      1. ˚ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures Snp-a 328
      • ˚dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚ at Vism 62, 99
      • ˚sampadāya according to the Pali tradition or on the ground of the authority of the Pali MN i.520 (itihītiha etc.); ii.169 (identical); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay-tradition) at AN i.189 = ii.191 = Nd2 151
      cp. Epic Sanskrit piṭaka, etymology not clear ‣See also Pali peḷā & peḷikā
    Piṭṭha1
    neuter
    1. what is ground, grindings, crushed ‣Seeds, flour. Vin i.201 203; iv.261 341 (tila˚ = piññāka) Ja ii.244 (māsa˚). As piṭṭhi at Ja i.347
    1. ˚khādaniya “flour-eatables,” i.e. pastry Vin i.248 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.139)
    2. ˚dhītalikā a flour-doll, i.e. made of paste or a lump of flour Pv-a 16 Pv-a 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa˚ on p. 17)
    3. ˚piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism 500 (in comparison)
    4. ˚madda flour paste Vin ii.151 (explained in Commentary by piṭṭha-khali; cp. piṭṭhi-madda Ja iii.226 which would correspond to piṣṭī)
    5. ˚surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour Vv-a 73
    past participle of piṁsati2. cp. Sanskrit piṣṭa
    Piṭṭha2
    neuter
    1. a lintel (of a door) Vin i.47 (kavāṭa˚); ii.120 (˚sanghāṭa, cp. Vin Texts iii.105), 148, 207
    identical in form with piṭṭha3
    Piṭṭha3
    neuter
    1. back, hind part; also surface, top Ja i.167 (pāsāṇa˚ top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adverb, viz. instrumental piṭṭhena along, over beside, by way of, on Ja ii.111 (udaka˚); iv.3 (samudda˚)
    2. locative piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā˚ at a ditch Pv-a 201 on, on top of, on the back of (animals) ammaṇassa p. Ja vi.381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaṁ); tiṇa˚ Ja iv.444 panka˚ Ja i.223 samudda˚ Ja i.202

      • assa˚ on horseback DN i.103 similarly: vāraṇassa p. Ja i.358 sīha˚ Ja ii.244 haṭṭhi˚ Ja ii.244 Ja iii.392 ‣See also following. Pitthi & Pitthi
      cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, explained by Grassmann as pra-stha, i.e. what stands out
    Piṭṭhi
    Piṭṭhī
    feminine
    1. the back Vin ii.200 (piṭṭhī) MN i.354 Ja i.207 Ja ii.159 Ja ii.279
    2. piṭṭhiṁ (paccāmittassa) passati to ‣See the (enemy’s) back, i.e. to ‣See the last of somebody Ja i.296 Ja i.488 Ja iv.208 piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin ii.105 Snp 609 as opposed to tala (palm) with reference to hand & foot: hattha (or pada-) tala & ˚piṭṭhi: Ja iv.188 Vism 361
    3. ablative piṭṭhito as adv (from) behind, at the back of Snp 412 (+ anubandhati to follow closely) Vv-a 256 Pv-a 78 (geha˚). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one’s back on Ja i.71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato-mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one’s heels, very closely Vin i.47 DN i.1 DN i.226–⁠2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3) only in compound ˚pāsāṇa and
    4. locative piṭṭhiyaṁ as
    5. adverb on top of Ja v.297 (ammaṇa˚) piṭṭhi at Vv-a 101 is evidently faulty reading.

      1. ˚ ācariya teacher’s understudy, pupil-teacher, tutor Ja ii.100 Ja v.458 Ja v.473 Ja v.501
      • ˚kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone MN i.58 MN i.80 MN i.89 MN iii.92 Vism 271 Vb-a 243 Kp-a 49 sq.; Sdhp 102
      • ˚koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) Dhp-a ii.19 20
      • ˚gata following behind following one’s example Vism 47
      • ˚paṇṇasālā a leaf-hut at the back Ja vi.545
      • ˚parikamma treating one’s back (by rubbing) Vin ii.106
      • ˚passe (
      • locative ) at the back of behind Ja i.292 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 83 Pv-a 106
      • ˚pāda the back of the foot, literally foot-back, i.e. the heel Vism 251; Kp-a 51 (˚aṭṭhika) DN-a i.254
      • ˚pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock plateau, ridge Ja i.278 Ja ii.352 Ja vi.279 Dhp-a ii.58 Vb-a 5 266
      • ˚bāha the back of the arm, i.e. elbow (cp. ˚pāda) Kp-a 49, 50 (˚aṭṭhi): -maṁsa the flesh of the back Pv-a 210 Snp-a 287
      • ˚maṁsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person’s back Snp 244 (= ˚maṁsakhādaka Commentary ) Ja ii.186 (of an unfair judge); v.1; Pv iii.97 (
      • Burmese manuscripts ; Text ˚aka). As ˚maṁsiya at Ja v.10
      • ˚maṁsikȧtā backbiting Nd2 39
      • ˚roga back-ache Snp-a 111
      • ˚vaṁsa back bone, a certain beam in a building Dhp-a i.52
      = piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha → piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Note. 55; Franke, Bezzenberger’s Beiträge xx.287. cp. also the Prakrit forms piṭṭha piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sanskrit prṣṭḥa: Pischel; Prakrit Gram. §53
    Piṭṭhika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a back, in dīgha˚; with a long back or ridge Snp 604
    • mudu˚ having a flexible back Vin iii.35
    from piṭṭhi
    Piṭṭhikā
    feminine = piṭṭhi;
    • locative piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind Ja i.456 (maṇḍala˚).

    Piṭṭhimant
    adjective
    1. having a back, in feminine piṭṭhimatī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse-or elephant-) back Ja vi.396
    2. from piṭṭhi
    Piṭhara
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      a pot, a pan Mil 107 (spelt pīthara). As; piṭharaka cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for Text piparikā

      1. at Kp-a 54 to be read for Text pivaraka according to A past participle Snp-a 869
    cp. Epic Sanskrit piṭhara
    Piṇḍa
    1. a lump, ball, thick (& round mass SN i.206 (aṭṭhīyaka˚); Pv iii.55 (nonīta˚) Vv-a 62 (kummāsa˚), 65; Sdhp 529 (ayo˚)
    2. a lump of food especially of alms, alms given as food SN i.76 Snp 217 Snp 388 Snp 391 Ja i.7 (nibbuta˚ cooled) Mil 243 (para ˚ṁ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (dative for alms, frequently in combination with carati, paṭikkamati (gāmaṁ) pavisati, e.g. Vin ii.195 Vin iii.15 MN iii.157 Snp 386 Snp-a 141 175 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 136 and passim
    3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara˚; sequence of letters or syllables, context Dhp-a iv.70

      1. ˚attha condensed meaning, résumé Ja i.233 Ja i.275 Ja i.306 Kp-a 124, 192. cp. sampiṇḍanattha
      2. ˚ukkhepakaṁ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin ii.214 = iv.195, cp. Vinaya Texts i.64 (= piṇḍaṁ piṇḍaṁ ukkhipitvā Commentary )
      3. ˚gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DN-a i.95
      • ˚cāra alms-round wandering for alms Snp 414
      • ˚cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin ii.215 Vin iii.34 80; iv.79 Ja i.116 Vv-a 6
      • ˚dāyika (& ˚dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) DN i.51 (˚dāvika) AN iv.107 (variant reading ˚dāyaka) Mil 331 cp. DN-a i.156 ‣See also Geiger, Pali Grammar 46, 1; Rhys Davids Dialogues of the Buddha i.68 (translation “camp-follower”); Franke, Dīgha translation 531 translation “Vorkämpfer” but recommends translation “Klossverteiler” as well)
      • ˚dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry Pv-a 17 cp. piṭṭha˚
      • ˚paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms i.e. reciprocatory begging Ja ii.82 (piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṁ kappesuṁ), 307 (piṇḍapāta-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṁ kappenti); v.390 (mayaṁ piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍa-kammaṁ na karoma)
      • ˚pāta food received in the alms-bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms-gathering (on term ‣See Vism 31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit piṇḍapāta-praviṣṭha Avs i.359; piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka Divy 239 Vin i.46 Vin ii.32 (˚ṁ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; iii.80, 99 iv.66 sq., 77 MN iii.297 SN i.76 SN i.92 AN i.240 AN ii.27 AN ii.143 iii.109, 145 sq.; v.100 Snp 339 Ja i.7 Ja i.149 Ja i.212 Ja i.233 Pug 59 Vism 31, 60 Vb-a 279 (˚âpacāyana) Snp-a 374 Pv-a 11f. 16, 38, 240
      • ˚pātika one who eats only food received in the alms-bowl; ˚anga is one of the dhutanga ordinances ‣See dhutanga Vin i.253 Vin ii.32 (˚anga), 299 (+ paṁsukūlika); iii.15 (identical) MN i.30 iii.41 AN iii.391 Pug 59 69 Snp-a 57 (˚dhutanga) -piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms-round Vism 246 (in simile) Vb-a 229 (identical). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit piṇḍapātika Avs i.248
      • ˚pātikatta (abstract to preceding) the state of eating alms-food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu MN iii.41 SN ii.202 SN ii.208f. AN i.38 AN iii.109
      cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i.e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etymology ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. puls
    Piṇḍaka
    1. (alms)-food AN iv.185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin iii.15 87; iv.23, in ukka-piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin i.211 = 239 (variant reading piṇḍuka)
    from piṇḍa
    Piṇḍi
    feminine
    1. a lump, round mass, ball, cluster DN i.74 = AN iii.25 (nahāniya˚ ball of fragrant soap DN-a i.218: piṇḍa) MN iii.92 Ja i.76 (phala˚) ii.393; iii.53 (amba˚) Mil 107 Vism 500 (piṭṭha˚) Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚)
    cp. piṇḍa & Sanskrit piṇḍī
    Piṇḍika
    1. (—˚) in chatta˚-vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase probably means “a crevice in the covering (i.e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade” Ja vi.376 Dutoit (J. translation vi.457) translates “opening at the back of the sunshade,” thus evidently reading “piṭṭhika.”
    Piṇḍita
    adjective
    1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Thag 2, 395
    2. “ball-like,” close, compact; of sound: Ja ii.439 Ja vi.519
    past participle of piṇḍeti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit piṇḍitamūlya lump-sum Divy 500
    Pindiyālopa
    1. a morsel of food Vin i.58 (˚bhojana), 96 (identical) AN ii.27 Iti 102
    piṇḍi + ālopa
    Piṇḍeti
    1. to ball together, mix, put together Pv ii.952 (= pisana-vasena yojeti Pv-a 135). past participle piṇḍita
    2. denominative from pinḍa
    Piṇḍola
    1. one who ‣Seeks alms SN iii.93 = Iti 89 cp. proper name ˚bhāradvāja Snp-a 346 514, 570
    etymology unclear
    Piṇḍolya
    neuter
    1. asking for alms, alms-round SN iii.93 = It 89; Vism 31
    from piṇḍola
    Pitar
    1. father
    • ; Cases: singular nominative pitā SN i.182 Dhp 43 Ja v.379 Snp-a 423
    • accusative pitaraṁ Dhp 294 ; pituṁ cp. ii.93; instrumental pitarā Ja iii.37 pitunā, petyā Ja v.214 dative genitive pitu MN iii.176 Ja iv.137 Ja vi.365 589; & pituno Vin i.17 (cp. Prakrit piuṇo); ablative pitarā Ja v.214
    • locative pitari
    • plural nominative pitaro Snp 404 Ja iv.1 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 54 (mātā˚);
    • accusative pitaro Pv-a 17 pitare, pitū Thag 2, 433 instrumental pitarehi & pitūhi; dative gen pitunnaṁ Ja iii.83 (mātā˚); vi.389 (identical); Pv ii.84pitūnaṁ Iti 110
    • locative pitusu Thag 2, 499 Ja i.152 (mātā˚) and pitūsu Pv-a 3 (mātā˚). Further: ablative singular pitito by the father’s side DN i.113 (+ mātito) AN iii.151 Ja v.214
    • AN i.62 AN i.132 AN i.138f. Snp 296 Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṁ) Nd2 441 (= yo so janako) Ja i.412 (= tāta); v.20 Vb-a 108 (where pretty popular etymology is given with “piyāyatī ti pitā”), 154 (in simile). Of Brahmā: DN i.18 cp. DN-a i.112 of Inda Ja v.153 There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in genitive) with culla˚; (cūḷa˚), i.e. little and mahā˚; i.e. grand-father e.g. at Ja i.115 (+ ayyaka) Pv-a 107 The collective term for “parents” is mātāpitaro (
    • plural not dual), e. g Snp 404 Ja i.152 Ja iii.83 Ja iv.1 Pv-a 107 On similes of father and son op. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 112. In compounds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti˚ & pitu˚. (a); pitā˚ ˚putta father & son Ja i.253
    • plural ˚puttā fathers & sons or parents & children Ja iv.115 Ja vi.84
    • ˚mahā grandfather Pv ii.84 Ja ii.263 DN-a i.281 Pv-a 41
    • ˚mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i.e. a generation of ancestors DN i.113 ‣See det. explanation DN-a i.281 = Snp-a 462 Snp p. 115 Kp-a 141; petti-pitā-mahā great-grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors Ja ii.48 (= pitu-vitā mahā Commentary ). (b.) piti˚: ˚kicca duty of a father Ja v.153
    • ˚ghāta parricide Ja iv.45 (
    • Burmese manuscripts pitu˚); ˚pakkha father’s side Dhp-a i.4
    • ˚pitāmahā (
    • plural ) fathers & grandfathers ancestors Ja v.383
    • ˚vadha parricide DN-a i.135
    • (c) pitu˚ ˚ja originating from the father Ja vi.589 (+ mātuja) ˚ghātaka parricide (+ mātughātaka) Vin i.88 136 168, 320; ˚nāma fathers name Snp-a 423
    • ˚pitāmahā (
    • plural ) ancestors (cp. piti˚) AN iv.61 Ja i.2 Ja ii.48
    • ˚rakkhita guarded by a father MN iii.46
    • ˚santaka father’s possession Ja i.2
    • ˚hadaya father’s heart Ja i.61
    Vedic pitṛ, pitar-; cp. Latin pater, Juppiter, Dies-piter = ; Gothic fadar = German vater English father; Old Irish athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa-pa cp. tāta & mātā
    Pitika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. one who has a father, having a father Vv-a 68 (sa˚ together with the feminine ) Pv-a 38 (mata˚ whose
      2. feminine was dead): cp. dve˚ with 2 fathers Ja v.424
      3. from pitā
    Pitucchā
    feminine
    1. father’s sister, aunt; declension similarly to pitā & mātā Dhp-a; i.37 accusative singular pitucchasaṁ Sanskrit *svasaṁ instead of *svasāraṁ
      1. Ja iv.184
      1. ˚dhītā aunt’s daughter, i.e. (girl) cousin Dhp-a i.85
      • ˚putta aunt’s son, i.e. (boy) cousin SN ii.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); iii.106 (identical) Ja ii.119 Ja ii.324
      pitu + svasā, cp. Sanskrit pitṛ-ṣvasṛ
    Pitta
    neuter
    1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or an
    2. absolutive Two kinds are distinguished at Kp-a 60 Vism 260, viz. baddha˚ & abaddha˚; , bile as organ bile as fluidentical ‣See also in detail Vism 359 Vb-a 65 243
    3. In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combined with semha (cp Vin ii.137 Kh 111; Vism 260, 344 Mil 298)
    4. Vin ii.137 MN iii.90 SN iv.230 SN iv.231 (+ semha) AN ii.87 iii.101, 131 Snp 198 (+ semha), 434 (identical, explained as the two kinds at Snp-a 388) Nd1 370 Ja i.146 (+ semha) ii.114 (pittan te kupitaṁ your bile is upset or out of order, i.e. you are in a bad mood) Mil 112 (vāta-pittasemha …), 304 (roga, + semha), 382 (+ semha) Dhs-a 190 (as blue-green) Dhp-a iii.15 (cittaṁ n’ atthi pittaṁ n’ atthi has no heart and no bile, i.e. does not feel & get excited; variant readings vitta & nimitta)
    5. according to Morris,; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893, 4 for *phitta = phīta Sanskrit sphīta
      1. swelling, a gathering Vin ii.188 (Vinaya Texts iii.237 “a burst gall, i.e. bladder”) SN ii.242 The passage is not clear, in Commentary on Ud i.7 we read cittaṁ ‣See Morris locative cit. May the meaning be “muzzle"?

        1. ˚kosaka gall-bladder Kp-a 61; Vism 263 Vb-a 246
        cp. Vedic pitta
    Pittika
    adjective
    1. one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Mil 298 (+ semhika)
    from pitta
    Pittivisaya
    1. the realm of the departed spirits MN i.73 Ja i.51 Nd1 489
    Sporadic reading for the usual petti˚
    Pittivisayika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the realm of the departed Nd1 97 (gati; variant reading petti˚)
    from pittivisaya
    Pithīyatī
    (pithiyyati)
    1. to be covered, obscured or obstructed to close, shut MN ii.104 MN iii.184 Snp 1034 Snp 1035 Nd2 442 (Burmese manuscripts pidhiyyati; explained by pacchijjati) Thag 1, 872 Dhp 173 Ja i.279 (akkhīni pithīyiṁsu the eyes shut) ii.158 (= paticchādiyati); vi.432. The spelling of the
    2. Burmese manuscripts manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Note. 62)
    3. passive of pidahati, cp. api-dahati, Sanskrit apidhīyate
    Pidalaka
    1. a small stick skewer Vin ii.116 cp. Buddhaghosa on p. 317: “daṇḍakathina-ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṁharitvā duguṇa-karaṇa.” ‣See also Vin Texts iii.94
    etymology? Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. suggests diminutiveformation from Sanskrit bidala split bamboo
    Pidahati
    1. to cover, to close, conceal, shut MN i.117 MN i.380 (dvāraṁ) Ja i.292 Ja iii.26 Ja v.389 Mil 139 (vajjaṁ) Dhp-a i.396 Dhp-a ii.4 85; iv.197 (ūruṁ); Sdhp 321 aorist pidahi Ja iv.308 (kaṇṇe);
    2. absolutive pidahitvā Pv ii.76 (dvāraṁ); Vism 182 (nāsaṁ) DN-a i.136 pidhatvā Thag 2 480, & pidhāya Ja i.150 (dvāraṁ), 243 (identical) Thag-a 286 Dhp-a ii.199 (dvārāni)

      • passive pithīyati;
      • past participle pihita (q.v.) The opposite of p. is vivarati
      api + dhā, cp. apidahati & Prakrit piṇidhattae = Sanskrit apinidhātave
    Pidahana
    neuter
    1. covering up, shutting, closing Vism 20 Dhp-a iv.85 (= thakana)
    from api + dhā, cp. apidahana
    Pidhara
    1. a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin ii.141 (avalekhana˚), 221 (identical). Meaning doubtful
    from api + dhṛ
    Pidhāna
    neuter
    1. cover Ja vi.349
    • ˚˚phalaka covering board Vism 261 (where Kp-a in same passage reads paṭikujjana-phalaka) = Vb-a 244
    = pidahana
    Pināsa
    1. cold in the head, catarrh, in enumeration of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd2 3041 ≈ (kāsa, sāsa pināsa, etc.)
    cp. Sanskrit pīnasa
    Pipati
    1. to drink, only in imperative pres. pipa MN i.316 SN i.459 and ppr. pipaṁ Ja v.255 genitive
    2. plural pipataṁ Snp 398
    3. dialectical form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 132
    Pipāsā
    feminine
    1. thirst Nd2 443 (= udaka-pipāsā) Mil 318 Vb-a 196 (in comparison) Pv-a 23 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 67 sq.; Sdhp 288. Often combined with khudā (hunger) e.g. Snp 52 Snp 436 (khup˚) Pv-a 67 or jighacchā (identical), e.g. MN i.10 SN i.18 AN ii.143 AN ii.153 Mil 304
    2. longing (for food) hunger Ja ii.319
    3. desire, craving, longing DN iii.238 (avigata˚) SN iii.7 SN iii.108 SN iii.190 SN iv.387 AN ii.34 (pipāsavinaya; explained at Vism 293); iv.461 sq.

      Desidentical formation from , pibati → pipati, literally desire to drink
    Pipāsita
    adjective
    1. thirsty SN i.143 SN ii.110 (surā˚) Ja vi.399 Mil 318 (kilantatasita-p.); Vism 262 Pv-a 127 Sdhp 151
    past participle of pipāsati, Desidentical from , cp. pipāsā
    Pipāsin
    adjective
    1. thirsty DN ii.265
    from pipāsā
    Pipi
    adjective
    1. drinking (?) in su˚ good to drink (?) Ja vi.326 (Burmese variant sucimant). Or is it “flowing” (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)?
    from ‣See pivati
    Pipīlikā
    feminine & pipillika
    1. ant Ja iii.276 (Burmese manuscripts kipillikā); Sdhp 23; as pipillikā at Ja i.202
    2. cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pipīlaka Avs ii.130 (kunta˚) ‣See also kipillikā
    Pippala
    1. pepper Vin i.201 cp. Vinaya Texts ii.46
    for the usual Pali pipphalī, Sanskrit pippalī
    Pipphala
    1. the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree Ja vi.518 (Kern’s reading, Toevoegselen s.v. for Text maddhu-vipphala Commentary reads madhuvipphala & explains by madhuraphala)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pippala, on ph for p ‣See pipphalī
    Pipphalaka
    neuter?
    1. scissors (? so ed.) DN-a i.70
    etymology? BR give Sanskrit *pippalaka in meaning “thread for sewing”
    Pipphalī
    feminine
    1. long pepper SN v.79 Ja iii.85 Vv 436 Dhp-a i.258 (˚guhā N plural ); iv.155
    2. with aspirate ph for p, as in Sanskrit pippalī ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 62 ‣See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Latin piper = English pepper, absolutive pfeffer
    Piya1
    adjective
    1. dear, in two applications (as stated Nd1 133 = Nd2 444 viz dve piyā: sattā vā piyā sankhārā vā piyā, with reference to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father mother, husband, etc.) SN i.210 (also compar. ˚tara) Dhp 130 Dhp 157 Dhp 220; Vism 296, 314 sq.; often combined with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e.g. DN ii.19 DN iii.167 Ja ii.155 Ja iv.132
    • pleasant, agreeable, liked Snp 452 Snp 863: Dhp 77 Dhp 211; often combined (contrasted) with appiya, e.g. Snp 363 Snp 450 (‣ See also below).
    • neuter piyaṁ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure SN i.189 Snp 450 Snp 811 Dhp-a iii.275
    • appiya unpleasant MN i.86 Kh viii.5. appiyatā unpleasantness Ja iv.32 ‣See also pīti & pema
    1. ˚āpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved AN iii.57 Dhp 211
    • ˚āppiya pleasant unpleasant DN ii.277 (origin of it) Dhp 211
    • ˚kamya friendly disposition Vin iv.12
    • ˚ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dhp 209 cp. Dhp-a iii.275
    • ˚cakkhu a loving eye DN iii.167
    • ˚dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking DN iii.167
    • ˚bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering Ja v.348
    • ˚manāpatā belovedness MN i.66
    • ˚rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight DN i.152 (cp. DN-a i.311) SN ii.109f. AN ii.54 Iti 95 114 Snp 337 Snp 1086 (cp. Nd2 445) Vb 103 Nett 27
    • ˚vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with reference to āyasmā Nd2 130 Snp-a 536 etc.; or mārisa Snp-a 536
    • ˚vācā pleasant speech SN i.189 Snp 452
    • ˚vādin speaking pleasantly, affable DN i.60 (manāpacārin +) AN iii.37 iv.265 sq
    • ˚vippayoga separation from the beloved object Snp 41 (cp. Nd2 444) Pv-a 161 (here with ref to the husband); synonym with appiya-sampayoga, e. g at Vism 504 sq
    Vedic priya, prī; Gothic frijōn to love, frijonds loving = English friend; German frei freund; Old High German Frīa = Sanskrit priyā, English Friday, etc.
    Piya2
    1. oar; usually so in compound piyāritta neuter oar & rudder SN i.103 AN ii.201 Ja iv.164
    2. sporadic for phiya, q.v.
    Piyaka
    1. a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa Vitex trifolia Ja v.420 (= setapuppha Commentary ); vi.269
    cp. Classical Sanskrit priyaka
    Piyaṅgu
    feminine
    1. panic ‣Seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537 Ja i.39 Pv-a 283 Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyangûdaka) it is used as an emetic Ja i.419 ‣See also kaṅgu
    2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu Ja v.420
    cp. Vedio priyangu
    Piyatta
    neuter
    1. belovedness, pleasantness. AN v.164f.; Sdhp 66
    abstract from piya1
    Piyāyati
    1. to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (accusative ), to be devoted to SN i.210 Ja i.156 Ja ii.246 vi.5 Vb-a 108 (in etymology of pitā, q.v.) Dhp-a iv.125 Snp-a 78 Vv-a 349 Pv-a 71
    2. past participle piyāyita. Note. AN ppr. piyaṁ is found at Snp-a 169 for Snp 94 adjective piya, and is explained by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna
    3. denominative from piya1
    Piyāyanā
    feminine
    1. love, fondness for (locative ) SN i.210
    2. from piyāyati
    Piyāyita
    1. held dear, fondled, loved, liked Snp 807 Nd1 126
    past participle of piyāyati
    Piyāla
    1. the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia Ja v.415 neuter the fruit of this tree, used as food Ja iv.344 Ja v.324
    2. cp. Classical Sanskrit priyāla
    Pire
    1. at Vin iv.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as participle of exclamation The Commentary explanation (p. 362) by “pire (voc.?) = para amāmaka” is an artificial construction
    Pilaka
    1. a boil Snp p. 124 (piḷaka, variant reading pilaka); Vism 35 (pīḷaka) Dhp-a i.319 (variant reading piḷaka) ‣See also piḷakā
    cp. Classical Sanskrit piḍakā
    Pilakkha

    the wave-leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin iv.35 DN-a i.81 As pilakkhu cp. Prakrit pilakkhu Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 105

    1. at SN v.96 Ja iii.24 Ja iii.398
    cp. Vedic plakṣa
    Pilandha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. adorning or adorned Mil 336 Mil 337 cp. apiḷandha
    from pilandhati
    Pilandhati
    1. to adorn, put on, bedeck Mil 337 Ja v.400 causative II. pilandhāpeti Ja i.386 Pilandhana & Pilandhana; ‣See apilandhati, api + nah
    Pilandhana
    Piḷandhana;
    neuter
    1. putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets AN i.254 257; iii.16 Thag 2, 74 Vv 6417 (ḷ) Ja i.386 (ḷ); v.205 Vb-a 230 (˚vikati; ḷ) Vv-a 157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); Pv-a (ḷ) Sdhp 243
    = apilandhana
    Pilava
    Plava;
    1. swimming, flowing, floating Ja v.408 (suplav-atthaṁ in order to swim through well = plavana Commentary )
    2. a kind of duck so Epic Sanskrit
      1. Vv 358 (cp Vv-a 163) Ja v.420
      from plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship
    Pilavati
    Plavati;
    1. to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Thag 1, 104 Mil 377 Vv-a 163 Dhs-a 76 As plavati at Ja i.336 (verse) Dhp 334 (variant reading SS; Text palavati). As palavati at Thag 1 399
    • ‣ See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati
    cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Latin pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Old High German flouwen etc. to rinse = English flow
    Pilavana
    Palavana;
    neuter
    1. swimming, plunging Ja v.409 (pl˚)
    from plu
    Pilāpanatā
    feminine
    1. superficiality Dhs 1349 cp. Dhs-a 405
    from plu ‣See pilavati
    Pilāla
    1. at Ja i.382 (˚piṇḍa + mattikā-piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, Pali Grammar 6
    Pilotikā
    feminine
    1. a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin i.255 296 (khoma˚ cp. Vinaya Texts ii.156) MN i.141 (chinna—˚o-dhammo laid bare or open) SN ii.28 (identical) 219 (paṭa˚) Ja i.220 Ja ii.145 Ja iii.22 (jiṇṇa˚), 511; vi.383 Mil 282 Vism 328; Kp-a 55 Dhp-a i.221 (tela˚ rags dipped in oil) Vv-a 5 Pv-a 185 -As masculine at Ja iv.365 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms vary; we read chinna-pilotika at Avs i.198; MVastu iii.63; pilotikā (or ˚ka) at MVastu iii.50, 54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. Avs i.421.

      1. ˚khaṇḍa a piece of rag Dhp-a iv.115 Thag-a 269 Pv-a 171
      cp. Classical Sanskrit plota (BR = prota), Suśr. i.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim
    Pillaka
    1. the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child Ja ii.406 (sūkara˚) Dhp-a iv.134 (as an abusive term; variant readings SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, Burmese manuscripts cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp 164 Sdhp 165
    • As pillika at Ja i.487 (godha˚, Burmese variant godha-kippillika)
    cp. Sanskrit *pillaka
    Piḷakā
    feminine
    1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin i.202 SN i.150 Ja v.207 Ja v.303 Nd1 370 Mil 298 DN-a i.138
    2. knob (of a sword) Ja vi.218-cp. pilaka
    cp. Classical Sanskrit piḍakā
    Piḷayhati
    1. to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn Ja v.393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg imperative = pilandhatu Commentary )
    2. api + nayhati, cp. Sanskrit pinahyate
    Piḷhaka
    1. (variant reading miḷhakā at SN ii.228 is to be read as mīḷhakā “cesspool” (q.v.) The Commentary quoted on p. 228 explains incorrectly by “kaṁsalak’ ādi gūthapāṇakā,” which would mean “a low insect breeding in excrements (thus perhaps = paṭanga?). The translation (Kindred Sayings ii.155) has “dung-beetle.”
    Pivati
    Pibati;
    1. to drink
    • pres. pivati DN i.166 DN iii.184 Ja iv.380 Ja v.106 Pv-a 55
    1. -1st plural pivāma Pv i.118 2nd
    2. plural pivatha Pv-a 78 & pivātha Pv i.112 3rd
    3. plural med piyyare Ja iv.380

      • imperative piva Pv-a 39 & pivatu Vin iv.109
      • ppr. pivaṁ Snp 257 Dhp 205 & pivanto Snp-a 39
      • future pivissati Ja vi.365 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 59; pissāmi Ja iii.432
      • pāssati Ja iv.527
      • aorist pivi Ja i.198
      • apivi Mhvs 6, 21; pivāsiṁ Ud 42
      • apāyiṁha Ja i.362 (or ˚siṁha?); apaṁsu AN i.205
      • absolutive pivitvā Ja i.419 iii.491; vi.518 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 23; pītvā Snp 257 Dhp 205 Ja i.297 pītvāna Ja ii.71
      • pitvā Pv i.118
      • gerundive pātabba Vin ii.208
      • peyya ‣See kāka.˚-infinitive pātuṁ Ja ii.210 Pv i.64
      • past participle pīta (q.v.)
      • Of forms with p for v we mention the following: pipati MN i.32 Dhs-a 403 (as variant reading )
      • imperative pipa Ja i.459 ppr. pipaṁ MN i.316 MN i.317
      • Caus pāyeti & pāyāpeti; (q.v.)
      Vedic pāti & pibati, reduplicated pres. to root Indogermanic; *poi & pī, cp. Latin bibo (for * pibo); Old Bulgarian piti to drink, also Latin pōtus drink, pōculum beaker (= pātra, Pali patta) ‣See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk
    Pivana
    neuter
    1. drinking Pv-a 251
    from pivati
    Pivaraka
    1. ‣See piṭharaka
    Pisati
    1. to grind, crush, destroy; passive pisīyati to perish Vv-a 335 (+ vināseti).
    2. past participle pisita
    3. = piṁsati
    Pisana
    neuter
    1. grinding, powder ‣See upa˚
    from piṁsati?
    Pisāca
    1. a demon goblin, sprite DN i.54 (Text pesācā, variant reading pisācā, explained at DN-a i.164 as “pisācā mahanta-mahantā sattā ti vadati”), 93 SN i.209 AN iii.69 Ud 5 Ja i.235 Ja iv.495 (yakkha p. peta) Mil 23 Vv-a 335 Pv-a 198 Sdhp 313
    2. feminine pisācī Ja v.442
    3. like pisāca-loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp. the term malla in same meaning and origin
      1. a sort of acrobat, as plural pisācā “tumblers” Mil 191

        -nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha-nagara) Vism 531

      2. ˚loha connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca’s Mhbh vii.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 3
        1. a kind of copper Vb-a 63 (eight varieties). Pisacaka = pisaca
        cp. Sanskrit piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna = Vedic piśuna, & Latin piget, Old High German fēhida enmity = Anglo-Saxon faehp (“feud”), connected with root of Gothic fijan to hate; thus pisāca = fiend
    Pisācaka = pisāca
    1. , only in compound paṁsu˚; mud-sprite Ja iv.380 Ja iv.496 DN-a i.287 Dhp-a ii.26
    Pisācin
    adjective noun
    1. only feminine pisācinī a witch (= pisācī) Thag 1, 1151
    2. from pisāca, literally having a demon
    Pisācillikā
    feminine
    1. a tree-goblin Vin i.152 Vin ii.115 134 Snp-a 357 cp. Vinaya Texts i.318
    from pisāca
    Pista
    1. crushed, ground Vism 260 (= piṭṭha Kp-a identical passage) Vb-a 243
    past participle of pisati
    Pisīyati
    passive of pisati (q.v.)
    Pisīla
    neuter
    1. a dialectical expression for pātī or patta “bowl” MN iii.235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his translationiii.414)
    Sanskrit piśāla
    Pisuṇa
    adjective
    1. backbiting, calumnious, malicious MN iii.33 MN iii.49 Ja i.297 Pug 57 Pv-a 15 Pv-a 16. Usually combined with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā DN i.4 138; iii.70 sq., 171, 232, 269 MN i.362 MN iii.23 adj pisuṇāvāca & MN iii.22 MN iii.48 SN ii.167 Pug 39
    • Cp pesuna
    Vedic piśuṇa ‣See etymology under pisāca
    Pisodara
    1. having a spotted belly Kp-a 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini vi.3, 109)
    pṛṣa, i.e. pṛṣant + udara ‣See pasata1
    Pihaka
    neuter
    1. the spleen MN iii.90 Snp 195 Ja v.49 In detail at Vism 257 Vb-a 240
    cp. Sanskrit plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Avestan spərəƶan; Latin lien spleen
    Pihana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. envying Dhs 1059 Snp-a 459 (˚sīla)
      from piheti
    Pihayati
    Piheti;
    1. to desire, long for (with
    2. accusative ) Vin ii.187 SN ii.242 (pihāyittha 2nd
    3. plural aorist ) Ja i.401 Ja iv.198 (pattheti +) Thag 2, 454 Vv 8445 (= piyāyati Vv-a 349)
    4. to envy (with gen of person & object), covet MN i.504 SN i.202 SN i.236 Thag 1 62 Snp 823 Snp 947 Iti 36 Dhp 94 (= pattheti Dhp-a 177), 181 (identical iii.227), 365 (ppr. pihayaṁ = labhaṁ patthento Dhp-a iv.97) Ja i.197 (
    5. aorist mā pihayi) Mil 336
    6. pp pihayita
    cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh
    Pihayita
    1. desired, envied, always combined with patthita Mil 182 Mil 351
    past participle of pihayati
    Pihā
    feminine
    1. envy, desire MN i.304 Ja i.197 Vism 392 (Bhagavantaṁ disvā Buddha-bhāvāya pihaṁ anuppādetvā thita-satto nāma n’ atthi)
    • adj apiha without desire SN i.181
    from spṛh, cp. Sanskrit spṛhā
    Pihāyanā
    feminine = pihanā Nett 18.
    Pihālu
    adjective
    1. covetous, only negative SN i.187 = Th 1, 1218 Snp 852 Nd1 227
    cp. Sanskrit spṛhālu, from spṛh, but perhaps = Vedic piyāru malevolent. On y → h cp. Pali paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati
    Pihita
    1. covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opposite vivaṭa) MN i.118 MN iii.61 SN i.40 AN ii.104 Nd1 149 Ja i.266 Mil 102 (dvāra), 161; Vism 185 DN-a i.182 (˚dvāra)
    past participle of pidahati
    Pīṭha
    neuter
    1. a seat, chair, stool, bench
    • kinds are given at Vin iv.40 = 168, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca)
    • Vin i.47 180 ii.114, 149, 225 AN iii.51 (mañca˚, Dvandva); iv.133 (ayo˚); Ps i.176 Vv 11 ‣See discussed in detail at Vv-a 8 Vv-a 295 (mañca˚)
    • pāda˚ footstool Ja iv.378 Vv-a 291
    • bhadda˚ state-chair, throne Ja iii.410
    1. ˚sappin “one who crawls by means of a chair or bench,” i.e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of “hatthena gahana-yogga” Vv-a 8 exlpd by Buddhaghosa as “chinn’ iriyāpatha” Vinaya Texts i.225) Ja i.76 Ja i.418 Ja v.426 (khujja + vi.4, 10 Mil 205 Mil 245 Mil 276 Vism 596 (& jaccandha, in simile) Dhp-a i.194 Dhp-a ii.69 PugA 227 Pv-a 282
    cp. Fpic Sanskrit pīṭha
    Pīṭhaka
    1. a chair, stool Vv-a 8 124 ‣See also palāla˚
    from pīṭha
    Pīṭhikā
    feminine
    1. a bench, stool Vin ii.149 (“cushioned chair” Buddhaghosa ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.165) Ja iv.349 DN-a i.41 Vv-a 8
    from pīṭha
    Pīṇana
    neuter
    1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115
    2. embellishment Vism 32 (= maṇḍana)
    from prī, cp. pīti
    Pīṇita
    1. pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 (= tuṭṭha Vv-a 84) Mil 238 Mil 249 Mil 361 usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart MN ii.121 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 70
    past participle of pīṇeti
    Pīṇeti
    1. to gladden please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaṁ) sukheti pīṇeti “makes happy and pleases” DN i.51 DN iii.130f. SN i.90 SN iv.331 Pv-a 283 cp. Dhs-a 403 (sarīraṁ p.). It also occurs in definition of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115
    • pp pīṇita
    cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī ‣See piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with , pinvati ‣See pīna, as suggested by Buddhaghosa in DN-a i.157: “pīṇentī ti pīṇitaṁ thāma- bal’ ûpetaṁ karonti”
    Pīta1
    1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) SN i.212 (madhu˚) Ja i.198 Pv-a 25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food).; 2. soaked or saturated with (—˚), in kasāyarasa˚ Ja ii.98 (or = pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) Ja v.36 Vism 303, 381; which may however be read (on acct. of variant reading visappīta) as visappita “poison-applied” ‣See appita Does MN i.281 pīta-nisita belong here (= visapīta)? 3.
    2. neuter drink MN i.220f. = AN v.347f. AN v.359 Thag 1 503; Pv ii.710; Nett 29, 80
    3. past participle of pivati
    Pīta2
    adjective
    1. yellow, goldencoloured Vin i.217 (virecana) DN i.76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); iii.268 (˚kasiṇa) MN i.281 (pīta-nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below) AN iii.239 iv.263, 305, 349; v.61 Ja vi.185 (nīla p. lohita odāta mañjeṭṭhaka), 449 (˚alankāra, ˚vasana ˚uttara, cp. 503) Dhs 203 (˚kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta); Vism 173 (˚kasiṇa)
    • pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv.47 (Pītavimāna v.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alankāra, candana, uppala pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī the Commentary explanation of pīta at this passage is “suvaṇṇa”; cp. Vv 361 (= parisuddha, hemamaya Vv-a 166); 784 (= suvaṇṇamaya Commentary 304)
    1. ˚antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv.36 (= pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā Commentary 166)
    2. ˚aruṇa yellowish red Thag 2, 479
    • ˚āvalepana “golden-daubed” MN i.385
    Epic Sanskrit pīta, etymology unclear
    Pītaka
    adjective
    1. yellow Vin iv.159 Thag 2, 260 Ja ii.274 Pv iii.13 (= suvaṇṇavaṇṇa Pv-a 170) Dhs 617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka) Thag-a 211
    • ˚pītakā
    • feminine saffron, turmeric MN i.36
    from pīta
    Pīti
    feminine
    1. emotion of joy, delight, zest exuberance. On term ‣See; i → Dhs. translation 11 and Compendium 243 Classed under sankhārakkhandha, not vedanā˚- DN i.37 DN i.75 DN iii.241 DN iii.265 DN iii.288 MN i.37 SN ii.30 SN iv.236 AN iii.26 AN iii.285f.; iv.411, 450; v.1 sq., 135, 311 sq. 333 sq. Snp 257 Snp 687 Snp 695 Snp 969 Snp 1143 (= Bhagavantaṁ ārabbha p. pāmujjaṁ modanā pamodanā citti-odagyaṁ etc. Nd2 446) Nd1 3 491 Pug 68 Dhs 9 62, 86, 172 584, 999; Nett 29; Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail) DN-a i.53 (characterised by ānanda) Dhp-a i.32 Sdhp 247 Sdhp 461. On relation to jhāna ‣See the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhaṅga (with eleven means of cultivation ‣See Vism 132 & Vb-a 282)
    • Phrase; pītiyā sarīraṁ pharati “to pervade or thrill the body with joy” (
    • aorist phari), at Ja i.33 Ja v.494 Dhp-a ii.118 iv.102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti pañcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades ‣See Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 11, 12, and Compendium 56, viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at Dhs-a 115 Vism 143, referred to at Dhs-a 166
    • pīti as; nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at MN iii.85 SN iv.235
    1. ˚gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk MN i.117
    • ˚pāmojja joy and gladness AN iii.181 307 (˚pāmujja) Dhp 374 Dhp-a iv.110 Kp-a 82
    • ˚pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy DN iii.277 Ps i.48 Vb 334 Nett 89
    • ˚bhakkha feeding on joy (epithet of the Ābhassara Devas) DN i.17 DN iii.28 DN iii.84 DN iii.90 AN v.60 Dhp 200 AN i.110 Dhp-a iii.258 Sdhp 255
    • ˚mana joyful-hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind MN i.37 MN iii.86 SN i.181 AN iii.21 AN v.3 Snp 766 Nd1 3 Ja iii.411 Vb 227
    • ˚rasa taste or emotion of joy Vv-a 86
    • ˚sambojjhaṅga the joy-constituent of enlightenment MN iii.86 DN iii.106 DN iii.226 DN iii.252 DN iii.282 Eleven results of such a state are enumerated at Dhs-a 75 viz. the 6 anussatis, upam’ ânussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddha-pug

      • sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta-paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism 132 & Vb-a 282)
      • ˚ sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism 86 (samādhi)
      • ˚sukha zest and happiness intrinsic joy (cp. Compendium 56, 243) SN i.203 DN iii.131 222 Dhs 160 Vism 158 Thag-a 160 According to Dhs-a 166 “rapture and bliss,” cp. Expositor 222
      • ˚somanassa joy and satisfaction Ja v.371 Snp 512 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 132
      cp. Classical Sanskrit prīti & Vedic prīta past participle of; prī ‣See pīneti & piya
    Pītika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to joy; only as sappītika & nippītika; bringing joy & devoid of joy, with without exuberance (of sukha) AN iii.26 AN iv.300 AN iv.441
      from pīti
    Pītin
    adjective [from pīta1) drinking, only at Dhp 79 in compound dhamma˚; drinking in the Truth, explained as dhammapāyako dhammaṁ pivanto at Dhp-a ii.126
    Pīna
    adjective
    1. fat swollen Thag 2, 265 (of breasts)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pīna of to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Latin opīmus fat, German feist & fett = English fat
    Pīḷaka
    1. a (sort of) boil Vism 35 ‣See pilaka
    from pīd ?
    Pīḷana
    neuter
    1. oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism 212 = 494; also in nakkhatta˚ harm to a constellation, i.e. occultation Dhp-a i.166f.
    from pīḍ, cp. pīḷā
    Pīḷā
    feminine
    1. pain, suffering Ja i.421 Mil 278 Vism 42
    2. oppression, damage injury Snp-a 353 DN-a i.259
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pīḍā from pīḍ
    Pīlikoḷikā
    feminine
    1. eyesecretion Thag 2, 395 (= akkhigūthaka Thag-a 259 q.v. for fuller explanation ‣See also Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 88)
    reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā
    Pīḷita
    1. crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin iv.261 Vism 415 (dubbhikkha˚) Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 271 cp. abhi˚, pa˚
    past participle of pīḷeti
    Pīḷeti
    1. to press, press down Vin ii.225 (coḷakaṁ)
    2. to weigh down heavily Ja i.25 (ppr. pīḷiyamāna), 138
    3. to press, clench Mil 418 (muṭṭhiṁ pīḷayati) Dhp-a iv.69 (anguliyā pīḷiyamānāya).

      • to crush, keep under, subjugate Mil 277 (janaṁ)

    4. to molest Vv-a 348 (pīḷanto ppr for pīḷento?).

      • past participle pīḷita
      cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ
    Puṁ
    1. as a term for Purgatory (niraya) ‣See Buddhaghosa’s etymology of puggala Vism 310, as quoted under puggala
    Puṁs
    1. Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base; puṁ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava pullinga; puṁs in napuṁsaka (cp. Prakrit napuṁsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puṁs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi-pumā at the old passage DN iii.85 The strong base is in Pali puman (q.v.) ‣See also posa1
    Vedic puṁs (weak base) and pumāṁs (strong base), often opposed to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka
    Pukkusa
    1. name of a (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing On the subject ‣See Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207
    • Found in following enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍāla-pukkusā AN i.162 iii.214 Ja iii.194 (explained by Commentary chava-chaḍḍaka-caṇḍālā ca puppha-chaḍḍaka-pukkusā ca); iv.303; Pv ii.612 Mil 5 Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, rathakāra˚ p.˚) at MN iii.169 SN i.94 AN ii.85 Vin iv.6 Pug 51 With nesāda at Pv-a 176
    • cp. MN iii.169
    non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sanskrit pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The “Paulkāsa” are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saṁhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind Leben 217)
    Puggala
    1. an individual, as opposed to a group (sangha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature = character, soul (= attan). DN i.176 MN iii.58 SN i.93f.; iii.25 AN i.8 AN i.197 AN ii.126f. Snp 544 Snp 685 Dhp 344 Ps i.180 sq.; ii.1 sq., 52 Pv ii.325 (cp. Pv-a 88); ii.97 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 132
    2. plural puggalā people Vv-a 86 (= sattā), 149
    3. para-puggala another man DN i.213 SN ii.121 SN v.265 Vism 409-purisa-puggala individual man, being, person SN ii.206 SN iv.307 AN i.173 = MN ii.217 Characterised as an individual in various ways, e.g. as agga˚ Sdhp 92 Sdhp 558 abhabba˚ Ja i.106 ariya˚ Vin v.117 asura-parivāra AN ii.91 kodhagaru˚ AN ii.46 gūtha˚, puppha˚ madhubhāṇī˚ AN i.128 dakkhiṇeyya˚ Vv-a 5 diṭṭhisampanna AN i.26f.; iii.439 sq.; iv.136; nibbiriya kusīta˚ Ja iv.131 pāsāṇalekh’ ûpama˚ etc. AN i.283 valāhak’ ûpama AN ii.102f.; saddha, asaddha Ps i.121; ii.33; sivāthik upama AN iii.268 suppameyya etc. AN i.266f. a
      1. sevitabba AN iv.365 AN v.102 AN v.247 AN v.281 hīna majjhima paṇīta SN ii.154
      • Groups of characters: (2) AN i.76 AN i.87 (3) gilān’ ûpama etc. AN i.121f.; avuṭṭhika-sama padesa-vassin, sabbatth’ âbhivassin Iti 64f.; satthar sāvaka, sekha Iti 78 sekha asekha n’ eva-sekha-nāsekha DN iii.218 (4) DN iii.232 DN iii.233 SN i.93 Ja iv.131 (5) Nett 191; (6) rāga-carita, dosa˚, moha˚, saddhā˚, buddha˚ vitakka˚ Vism 102; (7) ubhato-bhāga-vimutta, paññāvimutta etc. DN iii.105 (8) AN iii.212 SN v.343 (19) Nett 190; (26) Nett 189, 190
      • ‣ See also paṭipuggala. 2. (in general) being, creature Mil 310 (including Petas & animals)
      1. ˚ñū knowing individuals DN iii.252 DN iii.283
      • ˚paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals DN iii.105 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.101); also name of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma-piṭaka
      • ˚vemattatā difference between individuals SN ii.21 SN v.200 Snp p. 102 (= ˚nānatta Snp-a 436)
      cp. Classical Sanskrit pudgala, etymology connected with puṁs, although the fantastic explanation of native Commentators refers it to puṁ “a hell” and gal; so at Vism 310: “pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiṁ galantī ti puggalā”
    Puggalika
    adjective
    1. belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin i.250 Vin ii.270 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly “selfish.”
    from puggala
    Puṅkha
    1. the feathered part of an arrow Ja ii.89 cp. ponkha
    cp. Epic Sanskrit punkha, etymology puṁ (base of puṁs) + kha (of khan, thus “man-digging"?
    Puṅgava
    1. a bull, lit “male-cow,” AN i.162 AN ii.75f. Snp 690 Ja iii.81 Ja iii.111 Ja v.222 Ja v.242 Ja v.259 Ja v.433 Snp-a 323 As—˚ in meaning “best, chief” Vism 78 (muni˚) Thag-a 69 (Ap v.5) (nara˚)
    puṁ + gava ‣See go, cp. Classical Sanskrit pungava in both meanings
    Pucimanda
    1. the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica Ja iii.34 Ja iv.205 Ja vi.269 (˚thanī, of a woman nimba-phala-saṇṭhāna-thana-yuggalā Commentary )
    from picumanda
    Puccaṇḍatā
    feminine
    1. state of a rotten egg MN i.357
    pūti + aṇḍa + tā, viâ *pūtyaṇḍatā
    Puccha
    neuter
    1. a tail Dhs-a 365 (dog’s tail) ‣See puñcikata
    cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Latin puppis) & Pali piccha
    Pucchaka
    adjective
    1. asking, questioning Dhs-a 2 3 (pañha˚)
    from pṛch
    Pucchati
    1. to ask, to question SN i.207 SN i.214 Vin ii.207 Snp 995 Nd1 341 etc-Pres. 1st singular pucchāmi Snp 83 Snp 241 Snp 682 Snp 1043 Snp 1049 Nd2 447: Pv ii.112.

      1. -1st plural pucchāma Snp 1052
      2. imperative puccha Snp 460 DN-a i.155
      3. pucchatha DN ii.154
      4. pucchassu Snp 189 Snp 993 Pot. puccheyyāmi DN i.51
      5. puccheyya AN i.199 Pv-a 6 ppr. pucchanto Snp 1126
      6. aorist 1st singular apucchissaṁ Snp 1116 pucchisaṁ Vv 3011 apucchiṁ Vv-a 127 2nd singular apucchasi Snp 1050 3rd singular apucchi Snp 1037 apucchasi Nd2 447; pucchi Snp 981 Snp 1031 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 68 apucchatha Snp 1017 Snp 1st.
      7. plural apucchimha Snp 1052 Snp 3rd
      8. plural pucchiṁsu Ja i.221
      9. pucchisuṁ Mhvs 10, 2.
      10. future pucchissāmi Ja vi.364 Inf pucchituṁ Vin i.93 Snp 510
      11. puṭṭhuṁ Snp 1096 Snp 1110
      12. pucchitāye Ja v.137 Grd. pucchavho Snp 1030
      13. passive pucchiyati Dhp-a i.10
      14. causative II. pucchāpeti Mhvs 10 75.
      15. past participle puṭṭha & pucchita; (q.v.)
      16. to invite to instrumental, to offer, to present to somebody (
      17. accusative ), literally to ask with Vin ii.208 210 (pāniyena); iii.161 (odanena sūpena etc.) DN ii.240
      18. ‣ See also anu˚, abhi˚, sam˚
      pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati = Latin posco, postulo, with which connected also Latin precor = Gothic fraihnan Old High German frāgōn; Vedic praśna = Pali pañha
    Pucchana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. asking, enquiring, questioning Snp 504 (ā) Pv-a 121 Pv-a 223
      from pṛch
    Pucchā
    feminine
    1. a question Snp 1023 Snp-a 46 200, 230. A system of questions (“questionnaire”) is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd1 339 340 = Nd2 under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha-jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha-saṃsandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p and kathetu-kamyatā p. also at DN-a i.68 = Dhs-a 55 The complete list is referred to at Snp-a 159
    • apuccha
    • adjective that which is not a question, i.e. that which should not be asked Mil 316
    • puccha-vissajjanā question and answer Pv-a 2
    • At Nett 18 p. occurs as quâsi synonym of icchā and patthanā
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pṛcchā = Old High German forsca question
    Pucchita
    1. asked Snp 76 Snp 126 Snp 383 Snp 988 Snp 1005 Nd1 211; Kp-a 125 (˚kathā) Pv-a 2 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 51. cp. puṭṭha
    past participle of pucchati
    Pucchitar
    1. one who asks, a questioner MN i.472 SN iii.6f.; Snp p. 140
    agent noun to pucchita
    Pujja
    adjective
    1. to be honoured MN iii.38f. 77 sq. AN iii.78 (variant reading ); Nett 52, 56 (= pūjaniya Commentary ). Compar. pujjatara MN i.13 & ‣See; pūja
    gerundive of pūj, cp. Sanskrit pūjya
    Puñcikatā
    1. is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā paraphrase (pattern 1 Nd2 taṇhā) for mucchañcikatā. The readings of identical passage are puñcikatā Dhs 1136 1230 Vb 351 361 (variant reading pucchañji˚); mucchañci˚; at Nd1 8 (Burmese variant mucchañji˚, SS suvañci˚); Nd2 p. 152 (Burmese variant pucchiñci˚, SS pupañci˚); pucchañjikatā Vb-a 477 The translation of Dhs gives “agitation” as meaning The Commentary (Dhs-a 365) reads puñcikạtā (variant readings puñcaṁ vikatā; pucañcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaṁ cāleti (wagging of a dog’s tail, hence “agitation”); Expositor ii.470 gives “fluster.” The Commentary on Vb (Vb-a 477) explains as “lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā,” thus “agitation.”
    Puñchati
    1. to wipe off, clean Vin ii.208 (upāhanā), 210 AN iv.376 (rajoharaṇaṁ suciṁ p., asuciṁ p. etc.) Ja i.392 (akkhīni); Vism 63 (gabbha-malaṁ), 415 = KhA 120 Ja i.47 (assūni hatthehi p.); Kp-a 136 (paṁsukaṁ). The reading puñjati occurs at Ja i.318 (akkhīni); v.182 vi.514, also as variant reading at AN iv.376 (variant reading also muñcati: cp. puñcikatā). causative II. puñchāpeti Vism 63. cp. pari˚
    2. cp. Sanskrit *proñchati, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit poñcchate (variant reading puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upânahān mūlāc ca p.
    Puñchana
    adjective neuter
    1. wiping Vin i.297 (mukha˚colaka); ii.208 (upāhana˚-colaka), 210. cp. puñchanī
    from proñch
    Puñchanī
    feminine
    1. a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin ii.122 Thag 1, 560 (pāda˚ napkin for the feet) ‣See Vinaya Texts iii.114
    ‣See puñchana
    Puñja
    (usually—˚)
    1. a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin ii.211 Ja i.146 (sabba-rogānaṁ). As-in following compounds.: aṭṭhi˚ Iti 17 (+ aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha˚ AN iii.408 AN iv.72 Ja ii.327
    • gūtha˚ Ja ii.211
    • tiṇa˚ AN iii.408
    • palāla˚ DN i.71 MN iii.3 AN i.241 AN ii.210
    • maṁsa˚ DN i.52
    • vālika˚ Ja vi.560
    • saṅkhāra˚ SN i.135

      1. ˚kata (& ˚kita) for; puñjikata; cp. Sanskrit puñjīkṛta with i for a in compound with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin ii.208 (puñjakita) MN i.58 MN i.89 (identical but id p. MN iii.92 puñjakajāta) AN iii.324 (puñjakata; variant reading puñjakita & puñjanika) Ja ii.408 (puñjakata, variant reading pancalikata); vi.111 (identical, variant reading puñca˚)
      cp. Epic Sanskrit puñja
    Puñjaka
    1. = puñja MN iii.92 (˚jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where MN i.89 at identical passage reads puñjakitāni) Mil 342 (palāla˚)
    Puñjati
    1. is a variant of puñchati (q.v.)
    Puñña
    neuter
    1. merit meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With reference to this life there are especially 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation These are the puñña-kiriya-vatthūni ‣See below Another set of; ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca patti-anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā savana, diṭṭh’ ujjuka-kamma. The opposite of puñña is either apuñña (DN iii.119 SN i.114 SN ii.82 AN i.154 AN iii.412 Sdhp 54 Sdhp 75) or pāpa (Sn 520 Dhp 39 Nett 96 Pv-a 5) The true Arahant is above both (Pv ii.615) ‣See on term also Kvu translation 201

      • (a) Passages (selected): DN iii.58 DN iii.120 MN i.404 MN ii.191 MN ii.199 SN i.72 SN ii.82 SN iv.190; iv.190; v.53 AN i.151 AN i.155f.; iii.412 Snp 427f. 547, 569, 790 Dhp 18 Dhp 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331 412 Nd1 90; Pv.1.2; i.512 Pug 55 Vism 541 (puññānaṁ paccayo duvidhā) Dhp-a iv.34 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 69 sq.; Sdhp 4 Sdhp 19 sq
      • (b) Var. phrases & characterisations:; Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DN-a i.110 Pv-a 5 anappaka Pv i.512) or little (paritta DN-a i.110 appa SN ii.229); as adjective (—˚) mahā˚ SN i.191 opposite appa˚ MN ii.5 puñña is defined at Nd1 90 as follows: “puññaṁ vuccati yaṁ kiñci tedhātukaṁ kusal’ âbhisankhāraṁ; apuññaṁ vuccati sabbaṁ akusalaṁ” It is defined as “dāna-sīl'-ādi-pabheda” “sucaritaṁ kusala-kammaṁ” at Vv-a 19 considered as leading to
      • future happiness: Vv 13 Pv-a 58 consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaṁ p.) Pv-a 8 Pv-a 51 Pv-a 60 66, 73, but also in vandana Pv-a 1 To do good puññaṁ (puññāni) karoti DN i.137 SN iv.331 AN v.177 Pv i.119 or pasavati SN i.182 SN i.213 AN i.89 AN ii.3f. iii.244; v.249, 282 Pv-a 121 cp. puññaṁ pasutaṁ Pv i.512 Vv-a 289 Other phrases: ˚ṁ ākankhati SN i.18 SN i.20 pavaḍḍhati SN i.33 corehi duharaṁ SN i.36 puññānaṁ vipāko AN iv.89 āgamo SN iii.209 SN iv.349 opadhikaṁ SN i.233 Iti 78 purāṇaṁ & navaṁ SN i.92 sayaṁ katāni puññāni SN i.37 puññassa dhārā SN i.100 SN v.400
      1. ˚atthika desirous of merit Snp 487f. -ānubhāva the majesty of merit Pv-a 58
      • ˚ābhisaṅkhāra accumulation of merit DN iii.217 SN ii.82 Nd1 90 206, 442 Vism 557 sq., 571 Vb-a 142f. 166, 184
      • ˚ābhisanda (+ kusalâbhisanda) meritorious results AN ii.54f. iii.51, 337; iv.245
      • ˚assaya seat of merit DN-a i.67
      • ˚iddhi the magic power of merit Pv-a 117
      • ˚kata one who has done a deed of merit AN ii.32
      • ˚kamma good works righteousness, merit SN i.97 SN i.143 DN-a i.10 Vv-a 32 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 87; Sdhp 32
      • ˚kāma
      • adjective desirous of doing good works SN v.462
      • ˚kiriyā a good or meritorious action SN i.87 (˚kriyā), 101 Pv-a 54 usually as ˚kiriyavatthu item of merit action (of which 3 are usually enumerated ‣See above) DN iii.218 AN iv.241 Iti 51 Nett 50, 128 -kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā˚) SN v.400 AN iii.337
      • ˚kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit DN i.18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DN-a; i.110)
      • ˚kkhetta field of merit, epithet of the Sangha or any holy personalities doing good (literally planting ‣Seeds of merit) to whom is a source of
      • future compensation to the benefactor Usually with adjective anuttara unsurpassed field of merit (‣ See also sangha) DN iii.5 DN iii.227 MN i.446 MN iii.80 SN i.167 SN i.220 SN v.343 SN v.363 SN v.382 AN i.244 AN ii.34f. 56, 113; iii.158, 248 279 sq., 387; iv.10 sq., 292 Iti 88 Snp 486 Vv 5031 (cp. Vv-a 216); Pv iv.133 (of a bhikkhu); Vism 220 Vv-a 286 Pv-a 1 (ariyasangha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit puṇyakṣetra Divy 63 Divy 395 (+ udāra)
      • ˚paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of merit AN i.168 Nett 96
      • ˚pasavana creation of merit Pv-a 31
      • ˚pekkha looking for merit (i.e. reward), intent upon merit SN i.167 Snp 463f. 487 sq. Dhp 108 (cp. Dhp-a ii.234)
      • ˚phala the fruit (or result) of merit action SN i.217 Pug 51 Dhp-a ii.4 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 52
      • ˚bala the power of merit Pv-a 195
      • ˚bhāga taking part in meritorious action SN i.154
      • ˚bhāgiya having share in merit MN iii.72f.; Nett 48
      • ˚maya = puñña Ja iv.232 (˚iddhi); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit puñyamaya Avs i.183
      cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etymology not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is explained by Dhammapāla as “santānaṁ punāti visodheti, i.e. cleaning the continuation (of life) Vv-a 19 thus taken to pu. The explanation is of course fanciful
    Puññavant
    adjective
    1. possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Ps ii.213; Vism 382 Dhp-a i.340 Pv-a 75
    from puñña
    Puṭa
    originally meaning “tube,” container, hollow pocket.
    1. -1. a container, usually made of leaves (cp Ja iv.436 Ja v.441 Ja vi.236), to carry fruit or other viands a pocket, basket: ucchu˚; basket for sugar Ja iv.363
    • paṇṇa˚ leaf-basket Pv-a 168
    • phala˚ fruit basket Ja iv.436 = vi.236; phānita(ssa)˚; basket of molasses sugar-basket SN i.175 (KS.: jar) Ja iv.366 Dhp-a iv.232
    • mālā˚ basket for garlands or flowers Dhp-a iii.212 (baddha made, literally bound). In puṭa-baddha-kummāsa Vv-a 308 perhaps meaning “cup.”
    • a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus “knapsack” (or directly “provisions,” taking the container for what it contains DN-a i.288 puts puṭaṁsa pātheyya), in bhatta˚; bag with provisions Ja ii.82 (with bandhati), 203; iii.200 DN-a i.270 Also at Ja iv.375 “bag” (tamba-kipillaka˚) ‣See below ˚aṁsa ˚bhatta

  • a tube, hollow, in; nāsā˚; (nāsa˚) nostril Ja vi.74 Vism 195, 263, 362; Kp-a 65; hattha˚; the hollow of the hand Mil 87

    • vatthi˚ bladder(-bag Vism 264; sippi- puṭa oyster shell Ja v.197 Ja v.206
    • puṭaṁ karoti to form a hollow Vb-a 34
    • box, container ‣See ˚bheda & ˚bhedana, in pāṭali-puṭa ‣Seed box for the Pali flower
    1. ˚aṁsa “bag-shoulder” (for “shoulder-bag,” cp. aṁsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & German rucksack = knapsack Rightly explained by Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence “provision,” in phrase puṭaṁsena with provisions (variant reading at all places puṭosena DN i.117 MN iii.80 AN ii.183 cp. Dialogues i.150 ‣See also mutoḷī
    • pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal-pudding) Vism 500
    • ˚baddha kind of moccasins Vin i.186 ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.15. Spelt puṭa-bandha at Vism 251 = Vb-a 234
    • ˚bhatta “bag-food,” viaticum provisions for journey Ja ii.423 Kp-a 46
    • ˚bheda the breaking of the container (i.e ‣Seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) Vv-a 344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta cp. Vv.8452, 53)
    • ˚bhedana breaking of the ‣Seed- boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the name of Pāṭali-putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sanskrit ˚putra which again represents Pali (or Non-Aryan) puṭa ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 238 292. Through popular etymology a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of “wares, provisions, merchandise” (perhaps influenced by puṭaṁsa) and, based on Commentary on Ud 88 (bhaṇḍakānaṁ mocara-ṭṭhānaṁ vuttaṁ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong translationDialogues of the Buddha ii.92 “a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares.” ‣See also Miln translation i.2; Buddh. Suttas xvi
    • Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88 After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Mil 1 (nānā-puṭa-bhedanaṁ S˚ nagaraṁ). Here clearly meant for “merchandise."-Rhys Davids in a note on puṭabhedana gives explanation “a town at the confluence or bend of a river” (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451)
    etymology unknown, probably dialectical, as shown by name of Pāṭaliputta, where putta = puṭa since unfamiliar in origin
  • Puṭaka
    neuter
    1. a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket Ja ii.83 (˚bhatta = provisions) DN-a i.263 Dhp-a ii.82 (variant reading piṭaka & kutaka); iv.132 (pockets of a serpent’s hood). cp. bhatta
    from puṭa
    Puṭṭha1
    1. nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Snp 831 Ja iii.467
    past participle of puṣ ‣See poseti, Vedic puṣṭa
    Puṭṭha2
    1. asked SN ii.36 Snp 84 Snp 122 Snp 510f. 1036 Dhp-a iv.132 Pv-a 10 (after accusative ) 68, 72 with samāno AN i.197 ‣See also pucchita
    2. past participle of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa
    Puṭṭha3
    1. ‣See phuṭṭha
    = Sanskrit spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 311
    Puṭṭhatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being fed or brought up by Ja ii.405 (vaḍḍhakinā ˚ā)
    abstract from puṭṭha1
    Puṭṭhavant
    1. one who has touched or come in direct contact with Thag-a 284
    from puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prakrit Ardhamagadhi puṭṭhavaṁ = Sanskrit spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 569
    Puṇḍarīka
    neuter
    1. the white lotus DN i.75 = AN iii.26 (in sequence uppala padụma, p.) DN ii.4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho) MN iii.93 SN i.138 SN i.204 = J iii.309 AN i.145 (uppala paduma p.); ii.86 sq. (samaṇa˚ adjective) Snp 547 Ja v.45 Ja v.215 (˚ttac’ angī = ratta-paduma-patta-vaṇṇasarīrā) Vv 4412 (= seta-kamala Vv-a 191); Pv ii.122iii.33 (pokkharaṇī bahu ˚ā) Pug 63 DN-a i.219 284 (sankho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N of a hell SN i.152 Snp p. 126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ˚ Paduma)
    Non-Aryan (?). cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka
    Puṇḍarīkinī
    feminine
    1. a pool or pond of white lotuses DN i.75≈(MN iii.93 SN i.138)
    adjective pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka
    Puṇṇa
    full seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā DN i.47 = Sn p. 139). nor-(only Snp 835 muttakarīsa˚), usually in compounds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon.
    1. ˚ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884) Dhp-a i.147 Kp-a 118 (variant reading suvaṇṇaghaṭa) DN-a i.140 (˚paṭimaṇḍita ghara)
    2. ˚canda the full moon Ja i.149 Ja i.267 Ja v.215
    • ˚patta a full bowl (as gift, ˚ṁ deti to give an ample gift Ja iii.535
    • ˚baddha at Mil 191 should be read as ˚bhadda
    • ˚bala at DN-a i.110 read puñña-bala
    • ˚bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd1 92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva Pali and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89) Mil 191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.)
    • ˚mā the full moon (night) DN i.47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā cp. DN-a i.140); Snp p. 139 (similar) MN iii.21 Ja v.215 (dve p-māyo); Vism 292 (puṇṇa-m-uposatha = puṇṇa-māuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa-puṇṇama-divase) Vv-a 66 (āsāḷhi p.) Pv-a 137 (identical) DN-a i.140 Dhp-a iii.461 (komudi)
    • ˚māsa = ˚mā only in
    • locative puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (= puṇṇa-māsiyaṁ sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṁ Vv-a 314 the similar
    • passive at Vv-a 321 reads, probably by mistake, sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṁ ‣See pāṭī) Ja v.215 (= puṇṇa candāya rattiyā Commentary )
    • ˚māsī (
    • feminine ; from ˚māsa) mā Ja i.86 (Phagguṇi p.) Vv-a 314 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūrṇamāsī Avs i.182
    past participle of pṛ; , Vedic pṛṇāti, passive pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sanskrit prāṇa & pūrṇa = Avestan pərəna; Lithuanian pílnas Latin plēnus; Goth fulls = English full = absolutive voll
    Puṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. fulness DN-a i.140 (māsa˚ full-moon)
    abstract to puṇṇa
    Puṇṇatta
    neuter
    1. fulness Snp-a 502
    abstract ro puṇṇa
    Putolī
    1. ‣See muṭolī;
    Putta
    1. [Vedic putra, Indogermanic *putlo = Latin pullus (*putslos) young of an animal, from pōu, cp. Latin puer, pubes, Avestan pupra, Lithuanian putýtis (young animal or bird), Welsh. wyr grandchild; also Sanskrit pota(ka young animal and base pu-in pumaṁs, puṁs “man” 1. a son SN i.210 Snp 35 Snp 38 Snp 60 Snp 557 Snp 858 Dhp 62 Dhp 84 Dhp 228 Dhp 345 Ja iv.309 Vism 645 (simile of 3 sons) Pv-a 25 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 73 sq. DN-a i.157 (dāsaka˚). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one’s land, given to one, i.e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd1 247 Nd2 448 Ja i.135 Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at Ja vi.380
    • Metaph. “sons of the Buddha” SN i.192 Thag 1, 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā) Iti 101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), Ja iii.211-The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv i.6 (& 7).;
    • plural puttāni Pv i.63
    • aputta-bhāvaṁ karoti to disinherit formally Ja v.468
    • (in general) child, descendant sometimes pleonastic like English ˚man, ˚son in names ‣See putta-dāra; so especially in later literature, like ludda hunter’s son = hunter Ja ii.154 ayya˚ = ayya, i.e. gentleman, lord Ja v.94 Pv-a 66 ‣See also rāja˚
    • Of a girl Thag 2, 464
    • mātucchā˚ & mātula˚ cousin (from mother’s side), pitucchā˚ id (from father’s side). On putta in name Pāṭali˚ ‣See puṭa.
    • feminine puttī ‣See rāja˚
    1. ˚jīva name of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii Ja vi.530
    • ˚dāra child & wife (i.e. wife & children, family) DN iii.66 189, 192 SN i.92 AN ii.67 Pv iv.348 (sa˚ together with his family) Ja iii.467 (kiṁ ˚ena what shall I do with a family?); v.478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life ‣See Nd2 under āsiṁsanti & palibodha
    • ˚phala a son as fruit (of the womb) Ja v.330
    • ˚maṁsa the flesh of one’s children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted from pūta˚ rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa-kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha-bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana)-simile, e.g. Vism 32, 45 Dhp-a i.375 Snp-a 58 342. Besides at SN ii.98 (in full) Thag 1, 445 (˚ūpamā); 2, 221
    • ˚mata a woman whose sons (children are dead MN i.524

    Puttaka
    1. a little son SN i.209 SN i.210
    2. a little child Thag 2, 462 (of a girl)
    3. a young bird (= potaka Ja ii.154

      from putta
    Puttatta
    neuter
    1. sonship Dhp-a i.89
    from putta
    Puttavant
    adjective
    1. having sons SN iv.249 Trenckner, Note. 6216 gives a feminine *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without reference from putta
    Puttimant
    adjective
    1. having sons SN i.6 Snp 33
    from *puttamant
    Puttiya
    1. (—˚) in Sakya˚; is compound Sakyaputta + iya “belonging to the son of the Sakyas” (i.e. to the Sakya prince) Pv-a 43
    • asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin ii.297 Puthavi & Puthuvi
    Puthavī
    Puthuvī
    feminine
    1. the earth; as puthavi at SN i.186 Ja i.14 (variant reading puthuvi); iv.233, in compounds.; ˚nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa the Buddha’s seat under the holy fig tree Ja iv.232
    • ˚maṇḍala the round of the earth Snp 990-As puthuvī at AN ii.21 and in compound puthuvi-agga Snp-a 353
    doublets of paṭhavī
    Puthu
    adjective
    1. (= pṛthak) separated, individual
    2. adverb separated, individual, adverb separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kaccāyana 29) SN i.75 (puthu attā individual self) Thag 1, 86 Ja iv.346 (= visuṁ visuṁ Commentary ) Mil 4 ‣See further under compounds
    3. (= pṛthu) The forms (
    4. plural ) are both puthu & puthū, both as
    5. adjective &
    6. noun puthū more frequently found in metre
    7. numerous various, several, more, many, most DN i.185 (puthu saññaggā; opposite ekaṁ) SN i.181 (puthū), 207 (identical) Snp 769 (puthū kāme = bahū Nd1 11); 1043, 1044 (puthū bahukā Nd2 449b) Thag 2, 344 (puthu = puthu sattā Thag-a 241) Ja vi.205 (puthū).
    8. neuter adverb puthu & puthuṁ greatly, much, in many ways Snp 580 (= aneka-ppakāraṁ Snp-a 460) Vv 624 (= mahantaṁ Vv-a 258)
      1. ˚gumba experienced in many crafts Ja vi.448 (= aneka-sippa-ññu Commentary )
      2. ˚jja (puthu 1, but ‣See remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Snp 897 Snp 911 (= puthujjanehi janita Nd1 308)
      3. ˚titthakara a common sectarian DN i.116 (thus to puthu 1, but DN-a i.287 bahū t.) -ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter “all the diverse quarters” SN i.234
      • ˚pañña
      • adjective of wide wisdom (p. 2) AN i.130 AN ii.67 (variant reading hāsa˚)
      • ˚paññatā wide wisdom AN i.45
      • ˚pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin ii.106 (Buddhaghosa on p. 316 explains pudhu-pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaṁ vuccati “manual performance,” thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151)
      • ˚bhūta (p. 2) widely spread SN ii.107 but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58 Divy 100 -mati wide understanding SN i.236
      • ˚loma “flat fin, N of a fish “the finny carp” (Mrs. Rhys Davids) Vv 4411 (= dibba-maccha Vv-a 191) Thag 2, 508 (= so-called fish Thag-a 292) Ja iv.466
      • ˚vacana “speaking in many (bad) ways,” or “people of various speech” (so explained Nd1 397) Snp 932 (probably better “speaking ordinary talk” = puthu 1)
      • ˚sattā (
      • plural ) = puthujjanā, common people, the masses SN i.44 Pv iii.73
      both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, literally spread out, far & wide, flat, of Indogermanic *plēt broad, Sanskrit ; prath to expand pṛthaḥ palm of hand Avestan frapah breadth, cp. Gr broad, plane tree, Lithuanian platùs broad Latin planta sole of foot, Old High German flado pancake, Anglo-Saxon flet ground, English flat
    Puthuka
    1. rice in the ear Dhp-a i.98 (˚agga as first gift of the field)
    from puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka “flat corn,” also “young of an animal,” with which cp. perhaps Gr ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under virgo
    Puthujjana
    an ordinary, average person (4 classes of ordinary people are discussed at Compendium 49, 50) a common worldling, a man of the people, an ordinary man MN i.1 MN i.7 MN i.135 MN i.239 MN i.323 MN iii.64 MN iii.227 SN i.148 SN ii.94 sq (assutạvā), 151 (identical); iii.46, 108, 162; iv.157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; v.362 (opposite to sotāpanna) AN i.27 AN i.147 (maraṇa-dhammin), 178, 267; ii.129, 163; iii.54, iv.68, 97, 157, 372 Snp 351 Snp 455 Snp 706 Snp 816 Snp 859 Dhp 59 Dhp 272 Vv 826 (= anariya Vv-a 321 + anavabodha) Nd1 146 248; Ps i.61 sq., 143, 156; ii.27 Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 248f.); Vism 311 (= anariya) Vb-a 133 (avijj’ âbhikhūta, bhava-taṇh’ âbhibhūta), 186 (ummat taka, opposed to upabrūhita-ñāṇa-purisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma) Dhp-a i.5 (opposite ariyasāvaka), 445 Sdhp 363.
    1. ˚kalyāṇaka (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pṛthagjana-kalyāṇaka Divy 419 Divy 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd1 477; Ps i.176; ii.190, 193
    2. ˚bhikkhu a bh of the common sort DN-a i.269 Vb-a 383
    • ˚sukha ordinary happiness MN i.454
    *prthag-jana, thus puthu 1 + jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar compounds. and by Commentary explains. One may even say that puthu 1 = pṛthak is not felt at all in the Pali word. Trenckner (Note. 76 already hinted at this by saying “puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu”; a connection which also underlies its explanation as “one-of-the-many-folk” at Kvu translation 807 & 291; 3. It is felt to belong to puthu2 in the same sense as German “die breite Masse”. The explanation at Nd1 308 = 328 is puthu-nānā-janā. A long and detailed etymological-speculation explanation of the term is found at DN-a i.59 translated at Dhs translation 258. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.
    Puthujjanatā
    feminine
    1. common-place character SN i.187 = Th 1, 1217
    abstract from puthujjana
    Puthujjanika
    adjective
    1. common, ordinary Ja i.360 (of iddhi)
    from puthujjana
    Puthutta (Puthatta)
    neuter
    1. being at variance, diversity SN ii.77 (opp ekatta; variant reading SS puthatta). At AN iv.97 we have to read puth’ attānaṁ for puthuttānaṁ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu + attānaṁ as borne out by variant reading puthujj’ attānaṁ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṁ hanti
    from puthu, cp. Sanskrit *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. = Sanskrit pṛthaktva, speciality peculiarity
    Puthula
    adjective
    1. broad, large, flat Ja iii.16 (˚sīsa flat-headed); vi.171 (˚antaraṁsa flat-chested) Mil 121 (of a river) Vv-a 301 (˚gambhīra) ablative puthulato (as
    2. adverb ) across Dhp-a i.396
    3. from puthu
    Puthuso
    adverb
    1. broadly, i.e. diversely, at variance Snp 891 Snp 892 (= puthu-diṭṭhi-gata Nd1 301)
    ablative of puthu
    Pudava (poddava?)
    1. ‣See gāma˚; (Vin ii.105 with Buddhaghosa note on p. 315)
    Puna
    indeclinable
    1. again. There are several forms of this adverb, but puna has to be considered as the originally Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.38; variant reading puna) & 72 (Ap. v.41, variant reading puna). The sandhi; r is preserved only in metre and in compound. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J iii.437: na hi dāni punā atthi; variant reading puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of compounds. (punappunaṁ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana

      • We find r in punar āgami Snp 339 punar āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto Commentary ); in compounds.: punar-abhiseka ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885 49; a-punar-āvattitā the fact of not turning back Mil 276 (cp. Prakrit apuṇar-avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d ‣See below), as in; puna-r-eva Dhp 338 Pv ii.87; ii.116. We have m in puna-m-upāgamuṁ Snp 306 puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combined with other emphatic part like eva and api. The meaning is “again,” but in enclitic function puna still found Snp 677 Snp 876 otherwise pana; it represents “however, but, now” (cp same relation in German abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prakrit puṇo vi & puṇar avi “again” puna “now” (Pischel Grammar § 342)
      • puna by itself at Snp-a 597 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 45; Mhvs 14, 12. doubled as punappunaṁ SN i.174 Thag 1, 531 532 Snp 728 Snp 1051 Dhp 117 Dhp 118 Dhp 325 Dhp 337 Ja v.208 Snp-a 107 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 47; punappuna at Dhp-a ii.75 as puna-d-eva at DN i.60 DN i.142 Pv ii.113 (variant reading ); Vism 163 Dhp-a ii.76
      • puna-m-eva Pv ii.113; puna pi once more Ja i.279 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 74 puna-p-pi Ja v.208 The phrase puna c’ aparaṁ “and again something else” stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna-divase: aparadivase all of which show the close relation between pi puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections Trenckner’s (& following him Oldenberg in Vin and Hardy in AN etc.) way of writing; puna ca paraṁ (e.g. Mil 201 Mil 388 Mil 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c’ aparaṁ, cp. punâpara Snp 1004 cp. iii.61
      1. ˚āgamana coming again, return SN i.22 (a˚)
      2. ˚āvāsa rebirth SN i.200
      • ˚divase on the following day Ja i.278 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 38
      • ˚nivattati to turn back again SN i.177
      • ˚bbhava renewed existence, new birth DN ii.15 SN i.133 Iti 62 SN iv.201 (āyati˚) Snp 162 Snp 273 Snp 502 Snp 514 Snp 733 Nd2 s.v.; Nett 28, 79 sq. Pv-a 63 Pv-a 200; cp. ponobhavika; no more rebirth SN i.174 SN i.208 Nd2 64; ˚ābhinibbatti birth in a new existence MN i.294 SN ii.65 AN i.223 Vin iii.3 Pv-a 35
      • ˚vacana repetition Snp-a 487
      • ˚vāre (
      • locative ) another time Ja v.21
      cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo ‣See apa), as in puccha tail, Latin puppis, poop; originally meaning “behind”
    Punāti
    1. to clean, cleanse Vv-a 19 (+ visodheti, in definition of puñña)
    2. to sift Ja vi.108 (angāraṁ p. = attano sīse angāre p. okirati Commentary so read with variant reading for phunati Text) DN-a i.268 (bhusaṁ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). cp. puneti
    cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, to cleanse, as in Latin purus clean, purgo, Old High German fowen to sift also cp. Pali pāvaka = Old High German fūir = English fire, Armen. hur, lit “cleansing,” ‣See also puñña
    Puneti
    1. to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at Iti 1f. & Nd; 1 202 Nd2 337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Thag 1, 533 (sattayugaṁ), although Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. takes it = punāti and Mrs. Rhys Davids translates “lifts to lustrous purity.”
    causative from puna? or = punāti?
    Punnāga
    1. a species of tree Ja i.9 (˚puppha); vi.530; Kp-a 50 (aggacchinna˚-phala), 53 (identical)
    dialectical?
    Puppha1
    neuter
    1. a flower Vin ii.123 SN i.204 = J iii.308 Snp 2 Snp 5 Dhp 47f.; 377; Vism 430 Snp-a 78 (paduma˚) Vv-a 73 Pv-a 127 Sdhp 550-pupphāni (plural ) Vb-a 255 (of 32 colours, in simile) 292 sq. (for Cetiya-worship)

      • adjective ˚puppha in ghana thick with flowers DN-a i.87
      • cp. pokkharatā
      1. ˚ābhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429 Pv ii.112-ādhāna “a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down” (Geiger, Mhvs p. 355; cp. Mahāvastu translation p. 2022) Mhvs 30, 51, 56, 60; 33, 22 Reading uncertain -āveḷā flower-garland Vv-a 125
      • ˚āsava wine made from flowers, flower-liquor Ja iv.117 Kp-a 26
      • ˚gandha odour of flowers Dhp 54 Dhs 625
      • ˚cumbaṭaka a fl cushion
      • ˚chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish-remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin iv.6 Thag 1, 620 Ja v.449 (= vacca-ṭṭhāna-sodhaka Commentary ) Mil 331 Vism 194 (in simile). cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 89 and Miln translation ii.211 -cchatta a parasol with flowers Dhp-a i.110
      • ˚dāna offering of flowers Vb-a 336
      • ˚dāma a wreath or garland of fls. Ja i.397 Vv-a 198
      • ˚dhara bearing flowers Pv ii.124 (so read for Text ˚dada)
      • ˚pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers Ja v.365
      • ˚paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers Ja iv.283 Dhp-a ii.45
      • ˚palāsa a fl. heap Dhp-a i.75
      • ˚bhāṇin “speaking flowers,” i.e. speaking the truth Pug 29
      • ˚mālā garland of fls. Snp-a 78
      • ˚muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism 432 (in simile)
      • ˚rasa (wine-) juice made of fls., flower-liquor Vin i.246 taste of fls. Dhs 629
      • ˚rāsi a heap of fls. Dhp 53
      Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka from puṣ (?) ‣See poseti
    Puppha2
    neuter
    1. blood ‣See pupphaka pupphavatī. With reference to the menses at Ja v.331
    cp. Classical Sanskrit puṣpa “les fleurs” in strī˚; the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of “menstruation” ‣See BR s.v. phala 12
    Pupphaka
    neuter
    1. blood Ja iii.541 (variant reading pubbaka; Commentary = lohita) Mil 216 (tiṇa˚-roga, a disease, Kern “hay-fever”). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. translates the Ja passage with “vuil, uitwerpsel.”
    from puppha2
    Pupphati
    1. to flower Ja i.76 (aorist ˚iṁsu) Pv-a 185 (= phalati).
    2. past participle pupphita
    3. puṣp
    Pupphavatī
    feminine
    1. a menstruous woman Mil 126
    from puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering
    Pupphita
    1. flowering, in blossom SN i.131 = Thag 2, 230 (su˚) Vv 354 Ja i.18 Mil 347 Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.12) Dhp-a i.280 Dhp-a ii.250 (su˚)
    past participle of pupphati
    Pupphin
    adjective
    1. bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī feminine name of a plant (“with blue flowers”) Ja vi.53
    2. from puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin
    Pubba1
    1. pus, matter, corruption MN i.57 MN iii.90 SN i.150 SN ii.157 AN i.34 Ja ii.18 Mil 382 Pv-a 80
    • In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism 261, 360; Kp-a 62 Vb-a 244
    • Often in combination pubba-lohita matter & blood, e.g. Snp p. 125 Snp 671 Ja v.71 Dhp-a i.319 as food of the Petas Pv i.69 i.91 (lohita-pubba); i.118; ii.26. pubba-vaṭṭi a lump of matter Dhp-a iii.117
    Vedic pūya → *pūva → *puvva → pubba (Geiger, Pali Grammar § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Latin pūs = English pus, Vedic pūti smelling foul; Gothic fūls = English foul
    Pubba2
    adjective
    1. previous, former, before. The adjective never occurs in absolute forms by itself (for which ‣See pubbaka), it is found either as—˚ or ˚-or in cases as adverb The phrase pubbam antam anissita Snp 849 is poetical for pubbantam.

      1. -1. (—˚) having been before Ja iii.200 na diṭṭha˚ not seen before Nd1 445; mātabhūta˚ formerly (been) his mother Pv-a 79 vuttha (gāma) formerly inhabited Dhp-a i.15 as adverb bhūtapubbaṁ before any beings (existed) Vin i.342 Dhp-a i.102 and passim ‣See bhūta
      2. (negative) apubba
      3. neuter what has not been before, something new Vv-a 117 287
      4. accusative as
      5. adverb in phrase apubbaṁ acarimaṁ not earlier not after, i.e. simultaneously MN iii.65 Pug 13 (= apure apacchā, ekappahāren’ evâti attho PugA 186). 3. (cases
      6. adverb ially) instrumental pubbena in ˚âpara gradual MN iii.79
      7. accusative pubbaṁ ‣See 1, 2, with ablative as preposition before Snp-a 549 (= purā);
      8. locative pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past before SN iv.307 Snp 831 Snp 949 (with pacchā & majjhe i.e.
      9. future & present) Pv i.31 ii.22 Snp-a 290 385 453 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 100. With ablative as preposition before SN ii.104 In compound with ˚nivāsa ‣See sep. An old
      10. accusative feminine *pūrvīṁ (cp. Prakrit puvviṁ Pischel, Grammar § 103 we find in compound anupubbikathā (q.v.) The comparative pubbatara (“quite early”) occurs absolute at SN iv.117 as nominative
      11. plural “ancestors”, as
      12. locative adverb at SN i.22
        1. ˚aṅgin in feminine ˚angī (cāru˚) at Ja v.4 & vi.481 read sabbangin. -aṇṇa “first grain,” a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined Vin iii.151 Vin iv.267 Nd1 248 (where the 7 are enumerated) Nd2 314 Ja ii.185 Mil 106 DN-a i.78 270 Dhp-a iv.81 etc ‣See aparaṇṇa ‣See also bīja-bīja -aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) DN i.109, 226 AN i.294 AN iii.344 SN i.76 (˚samayaṁ) Snp-a 139 (identical) Dhp-a iii.98 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 216. The spelling pubbanha MN i.528 (cp. Trenckner, Note. 80)
        2. ˚anta (1) the East Ja i.98 (˚ato aparantaṁ aparantato pubbantaṁ gacchati from English to W. from W. to English); v.471.
        3. the Past (opposite aparanta the
        4. future ) DN i.12f. SN ii.26 Nd1 212 Dhs 1004 pubbam antaṁ for pubbantaṁ is poetical at Snp 849 —˚ânudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things DN i.13 (cp. DN-a i.103) MN ii.233 SN iii.45 Dhs 1320
        5. ˚aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Thag 2, 395 is doubtful. Text reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rhys Davids translates “bubble of film” Thag-a 259 explains by “ṭhita-jalapubbaḷha-sadisa.” -ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times AN i.132 AN ii.70 Iti 110 Vism 523 = Vb-a 130 Kp-a 11, 64, 65.
        6. a former teacher Snp-a 318
        7. ˚āciṇṇa (-vasena) by way of former practice, from habit Snp-a 413
        8. ˚āpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with reference to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) AN iii.201 (˚kusala) Dhp 352 Nett 3 (˚ânusandhi); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaṁ karoti “explained in due order” Avs ii.20-(2) ˚rattaṁ “as in the former, so in the following night, i.e. without ceasing, continuous Thag 1, 413 cp. pub baratt-âparattaṁ Dhp-a iv.129
        9. ˚āpariya former
        10. future, first & last Ud 61 (˚vivesa)
        11. ˚ābhoga previous reflection Thag-a 30
        12. ˚ārāma “Eastern Park,” name of a locality east of Sāvatthi AN iii.344 Snp p. 139 (cp. Snp-a 502)
        13. ˚āsava former intoxication Snp 913 cp. Nd1 331
        14. ˚ uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband Vv-a 71 136
        15. ˚uṭṭnāyin “getting up earlier” (with complementary Ep pacchā-nipātin “lying down later”) ‣See above DN i.60 iii.191 AN iii.37 AN iv.265f. DN-a i.168

          • abstract ˚uṭṭhāyitā Ja iii.406 (˚ādīhi pañcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā) = v.88; Kp-a 173
          • ˚uttara (1) preceding and following Kaccāyana 44. 47.
          • “eastnorthern,” i.e. north-eastern Ja v.38 (˚kaṇṇa nameE corner); vi.519 (identical)
          • ˚kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence cp. iii.113
          • ˚kārin “doing before,” i.e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour AN i.87 Pug 26 (= paṭhamaṁ eva kāraka PugA 204 Pv-a 114
          • ˚kicca preiiminary function Vin v.127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Compendium 53
          • ˚koṭṭhaka “Eastern Barn,” N
          • plural AN iii.345
          • ˚(n)gama (1) going before preceding AN iii.108 (okkamane p.) MN iii.71f. (2) “allowing to go before”; controlled or directed by giving precedence Dhp 2 (mano˚ dhammā = tena paṭhama-gāminā hutvā samannāgatā Dhp-a i.35) Nd2 318 Pug 15 (paññā˚ ariyamagga = paññaṁ pure-cārikaṁ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp 547 (paññā˚). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūrvangama Divy 333 (“obedient” Index)
          • ˚carita former life Snp-a 382 385
          • ˚ja born earlier, i.e. preceding in age Pv-a 57 (= jeṭṭhaka)
          • ˚ñāti former relative Pv-a 24
          • ˚deva a former god, a god of old, pl the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) SN i.224
          • ˚devatā an ancient deity AN ii.70 Iti 110 (variant reading ˚deva)
          • ˚nimitta “previous sign,” a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent forecast Iti 76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god) Ja i.11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48 Mil 298 (of prophetic dreams cp. Compendium p. 48) Vb-a 407 (in dreams) Dhp-a ii.85
          • ˚pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase Dhs-a 164
          • ˚parikamma a former action Snp-a 284 (opposite to pacchā-parikamma)
          • ˚purisa ancestor DN i.93 DN i.94
          • ˚peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (= peta DN i.8 (˚kathā, cp. DN-a i.90 & Dialogues of the Buddha i.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv i.41 for pubbapete. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūrvapreta Avs i.149 ‣See Index p. 230; Divy 47 Divy 97 -bhāga “former part,” i.e. previous Pv-a 133 (˚cetanā opposite apara-bhāga-cetanā. SS omit bhāga)
          • ˚bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) DN i.116 (trsl “not backward in conversation”), DN-a i.287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraṁ bhāsati etc.)
          • ˚yoga “former connection” i.e. connection with a former body or deed former action (and its result) Ja v.476 Ja vi.480 Mil 2 (pubbayogo ti tesaṁ pubba-kammaṁ). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. remarks that it is frequent in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as pūrvayoga yoga = yuga synonym with pūrvakalpa), e.g. Saddh. Puṇḍ ch. vii.; MVastu ii.287; iii.175; and refers to Ind Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5
          • ˚rattāparattaṁ the past and
          • future time, the whole time, always AN iii.70 Dhp-a iv.129
          • ˚vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Snp 1009 Thag-a 31 (Ap. v.8)
          • ˚videha Eastern Videha Kp-a 123 176 Snp-a 443
          • ˚sadisa an old (former) friend Dhp-a i.57
          Vedic pūrva, to Indogermanic *per ‣See pari & cp. Gothic fram = from; Gothic fruma = As formo first, Avestan pourvō, also Sanskrit pūrvya = Gothic frauja = Old High German frō Lord, frouwa = German frau ‣See also Latin prandium, provincia
    Pubbaka
    adjective
    1. former, ancient, living in former times DN i.104 (isayo), 238 (identical) Snp 284 (identical) SN ii.105 SN iv.307 (ācariya-pācariyā) Thag 1, 947 2. (—˚; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous Ja i.182 (suvaṇṇakāra˚ bhikkhu), cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ˚pūrvaka in same use at Avs i.259, 296, 322
    2. (—˚) accompanied or preceded by Thag-a 74 (guṇ’ âbhitthavana udāna) Pv-a 122 (puññânumodana˚ maggācikkhana) cp. āśvāsana-pūrvaka Jtm 210
    from pubba2
    Pubbāpeti
    1. occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at MN i.161 & AN iii.345≈402 in meaning “drying again”; at both AN passive the variant readings (glosses) are “sukkhāpayamāno” and “pubba-sadisāni kurumāno”; to the M.
    2. passive cp. Trenckner’s notes on p. 543, with the
    3. Burmese manuscripts explanation of the word (= pubbabhāvaṁ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. translation i.260. The similar passage at SN i.8 SN i.10 has “gattāni sukkhāpayamāno” as Text reading and “pubbāpayamāno” as Burmese variant denominative from pubba2
    Pubbe
    (˚-)
    1. in compounds.: “in a former existence”: ˚kata neuter deeds done in a past life MN ii.217 = AN i.173 (˚hetu) Ja v.228 (˚vādin fatalist) Nett 29 (˚punnata). ˚nivāsa cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūrve-nivāsasaṁprayuktaṁ MVastu iii.224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619
      1. abode in a former life, one’s former state of existence DN ii.1 DN ii.2 DN iii.31f. 50 sq., 108 sq 230, 281 MN i.278 MN ii.21 MN iii.12 SN i.167 AN i.164f. Iti 100 Snp 647 Dhp 423 Pug 61 Vism 411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals) Thag-a 74 197. pubbe-nivās’ ānussati (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one’s former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. AN i.164f. and Compendium 64 DN iii.110 DN iii.220 MN i.35 MN i.182 MN i.248 MN i.278 MN i.496 Dhs 1367 Nett 28, 103; Vism 433 Vb-a 373f. 401, 422 Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 321
      • ‣ See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism ch. xiii, past participle 410 sq
      locative of pubba2 ‣See pubba2 3
    Pumati
    1. to blow, aorist pumi Ja i.171 absolutive pumitvā Ja i.172 ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889 207 (?)
    2. onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Latin pustula = pustule, Sanskrit *pupphusa = Pali papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc ‣See Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s.v. pupphusa
    Puman
    (Pumā)
    1. a male, a man, nominativesingular pumo DN note 273 cp. ii.62; instrumental pumunā Ja vi.550 nominative pl pumā DN iii.85 (itthi-pumā men & women; variant reading K ˚purisā) Ja iii.459 accusative singular pumaṁ Ja v.154 (gata, cp. purisantara-gata)

      • On declension cp. Müller, Pali Grammar p. 79 Greiger, Pali Grammar § 935
      ‣See puṁs
    *Pura
    1. base of adverb & preposition denoting “before”; ablative purato (
    2. adverb & preposition in front of (with genitive), before (only local) Vin i.179 ii.32 DN ii.14 (mātu) SN i.137 Pv i.111 113 (opp pacchā); ii.86 (janâdhipassa) DN-a i.152 Pv-a 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively purato purato each time in front, or in front of each, or continuously in front Vin ii.213 Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato

      • Otherwise *pura occurs only in following derivations: (1)
      • adverb ial: *puraḥ in purakkharoti, purekkhāra purohita; purā, pure, puratthaṁ, puratthato. (2) adjectival: purāṇa, puratthima, purima
      on etymology ‣See purā, purāṇa, pure
    Pura
    neuter
    1. a town, fortress, city Vin i.8 = M i.171 (Kāsinaṁ puraṁ) Ja i.196 Ja i.215 Snp 976 Snp 991 Snp 1012 (˚uttama),1013 Ja vi.276 (= nagara C); Mhvs 14, 29
    2. avapure below the fortress MN i.68
    3. devapura city of the Gods SN iv.202 Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahā-nagara Vv-a 285) ‣See also purindada
    4. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (= antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e.g. v.65 (= nivesana Commentary ); vi.251, 492 (= antepura). cp. thīpura lady’s room, harem, also “lady Ja v.296 and antepura
    5. the body cp. Sanskrit pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355 ‣See Aufrecht p. 273
      1. Thag 1, 279 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern Toevoegselen s.v. & under sarīradeha)
      • cp. porin
      Vedic pur. feminine, later Sanskrit puraṁ
    6. neuter & purī
    7. feminine
    Purakkhata
    1. honoured, esteemed, preferred DN i.50 MN i.85 SN i.192 SN i.200 Snp 199 Snp 421 Snp 1015 Nd1 154 Dhp 343 (= parivārita Dhp-a iv.49) Ja ii.48 (˚parivārita); Pv iii.71 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 205) DN-a i.152 (= purato nisinna) Thag-a 170 cp. purekkhata
    past participle of purakkharoti
    Purakkharoti
    1. to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in following sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i.e. looking at SN iii.9f.; aorist 3rd
    2. plural purakkharuṁ Mil 22
    3. absolutive purakkhatvā MN i.28 Snp 969 Nd1 491 Ja v.45 (= purato katvā Commentary ) Pv-a 21 Pv-a 141. purakkhata
    4. past participle (q.v.) ‣See also purekkhāra
    5. from puraḥ, cp. Vedic puras-karoti ‣See pure
    Puratthaṁ
    adverb
    1. before SN i.141 (na pacchā na puratthaṁ = no after, no before)
    2. east DN i.50 (˚âbhimukha looking eastward.)
    for Vedic purastāt, from puraḥ ‣See *pura
    Puratthato
    adverb
    1. in front, coram Snp 416 (sic, Burmese variant purakkhato) Ja vi.242
    from puratthaṁ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit purastataḥ MVastu ii.198
    Puratthima
    adjective
    1. eastern DN i.153 SN i.144 Ja i.71 (˚âbhimukha: Gotama facing English under the Bo tree)
    from *pura, cp. Prakrit (Ardhamagadhi) puratthima, accusative to Pischel, Grammar § 602 a derived from purastāt (= Pali puratthaṁ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (= paccatthima) from *pratyastaṁ
    Purā
    indeclinable
    1. preposition c. ablative “before” (only temporal) Vin iv.17 (purāruṇā = purā aruṇā before dawn) Snp 849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd1 210f. explained by sarīra-bhedā pubbaṁ at Snp-a 549)
    Vedic purā; to Indogermanic *per, cp. Gothic faúr = Anglo-Saxon for = English (be-) fore; also Latin prae = Sanskrit pare
    Purāṇa
    adjective
    1. ancient, past Snp 312 Snp 944 (= Nd1 428 atītaṁ opposite nava = paccuppannaṁ) Dhp 156 (= pubbe katāni Commentary ); with reference to former births or previous existences p. kammaṁ SN ii.64 = Nd1 437 = Nd2 680 Q. 2; puññaṁ SN i.92
    2. old (of age), worn out, used (opposite nava recent) DN i.224 (bandhanaṁ, opposite navaṁ) Vin ii.123 (udakaṁ p.˚ṁ stale water) SN ii.106 (magga) Snp 1 (tacaṁ) Ja ii.114 (
    3. feminine purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); iv.201 (˚paṇṇa old leaf, opp nava); v.202 (a˚ not old, of years); vi.45 (apurāṇaṁ
    4. adverb recently) Vb-a 363 (udaka stale water). 3. former, late, old in compounds. as ˚dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin i.18 96; iv.263 SN i.200 Ud 5 Ja i.210
    5. ˚rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin iv.261
    6. ˚sālohita former blood-relation Snp p. 91 Ud 7 Dhp-a ii.210 cp. porāṇa
    Venic purāṇa, from *per, cp. Sanskrit parut in former years, Lithuanian pernai, Gothic fairneis Old High German firni = German firn (last year’s snow), forn formerly ferro far
    Purātana
    adjective
    1. belonging to the past, former, old Nett-a 194
    from purā, cp. sanātana in formation
    Purindada
    1. “townbreaker,” a name of Sakka (Indra) DN ii.260 SN i.230 Vv 374 622 Pv-a 247
    distorted from Vedic puraṁ-dara, pura + dṛ; to break ‣See darī, thus “breaker of fortresses,” epithet of Indra (& Agni). The Pali Commentator (Vv-a 171) of course takes it popularly as “pure dānaṁ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati,” thus pure + ‣See also Trenckner, Note. 596; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 443
    Purima

    adjective

    1. preceding, former, earlier, before (opp pacchima) DN i.179 Snp 773 Snp 791 Snp 1011 Nd1 91 Ja i.110 Snp-a 149 (˚dhura) Pv-a 1 Pv-a 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second last) DN i.239f. DN-a i.45f. and passim
    • purimatara = purima Ja i.345 (˚divase the day before)
    1. ˚attabhāva a former existence Vv-a 78 Pv-a 83 Pv-a 103 Pv-a 119
    2. ˚jāti a previous birth Pv-a 45 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 79 Pv-a 90
    compar superl. formation from *pura, cp. Sanskrit purima
    Purimaka
    adjective
    1. previous, first Vin ii.167 (opposite pacchimaka). feminine ˚ika Vin i.153
    2. from purima
    Purisa

    1. man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e.g. at AN iii.209 AN iv.197 Ja i.90 Ja v.72 Pv-a 51). Definitions of the Commentary are “puriso nāma manussa-puriso na yakkho na peto etc.” (i.e. man) Vin iv.269 (the same explanation for purisa-puggala at Vin iv.214); “seṭṭh’ aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati” Vv-a 42–⁠1 man DN i.61 (p. kassaka “free man”); ii.13 SN i.225 AN i.28 126; ii.115; iii.156 Snp 102 Snp 112 Snp 316 Snp 740 Snp 806 and passim Dhp 117 Dhp 152 Dhp 248 Nd1 124 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 165 187 Vv-a 13 (majjhima˚, paṭhama˚, as technical term g.?) uttama˚ SN ii.278 SN iii.61 SN iii.166 SN iv.380 Iti 97
    • mahā˚ SN v.158 AN ii.35 AN iii.223 AN iv.229 (‣ See also under mahā) sappurisa (q.v.) Var. epithets of the Buddha e. g at SN i.28 sq
    • Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods (“whatever man”), feminine kimpurisī Ja v.215
    • purisa as “a man, some one, somebody” as character or hero in various similes, e.g. angārakāsuyaṁ khipanaka˚ Vism 489; asucimhi patita Vism 465; āgantuka˚ Vb-a 23 dubbala Vism 533; papāte patanto Vb-a 23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at Vb-a 170 = Vism 559); bhikkhusanghaṁ disvā Vism 333; maṇḍapa-lagga Vism 339 sq. lakuṇṭaka-pāda & dīghapāda Vb-a 26 cp. the following of a man pleasing the king Vb-a 442f.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism 244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism 274. Frequently elsewhere
    • an attendant, servant, waiter Vin ii.297 DN i.60 (dāsa +), 72 (identical) Ja i.385 (dāsa˚); vi.462. cp. porisa, posa
    1. ˚atthika one who ‣Seeks a servant Vin ii.297
    • ˚anta = purisādhama Snp 664 (anta = Sanskrit antya; Snp-a 479 explains by antimapurisa)
    • ˚antaragatā touched by a man (literally gone in by …), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man DN i.166 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.228) MN i.77 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Vin iv.322 Pug 55 (= he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti PugA 231) DN-a i.79 (= itthi, as opposed to kumārikā). cp. pumaṁ gata Ja v.154
    • ˚allu (& ālu) name of certain monstrous beings living in the wilderness Ja v.416 (= vaḷavā-mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; vi.537 (˚ālu = vaḷavā-m

      • pekkhī Commentary )
      • ˚ājañña “a noble steed of a man,” a thorough-bred or remarkable man SN iii.91 AN v.325f. Snp 544 Dhp 193 as -ājāneyya at Dhp-a i.310 -ājāniya at AN i.290 AN ii.115 AN iv.397f.; v.324
      • ˚āda a bad man (“man-eater”) a wild man, cannibal Ja v.25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); ˚ādaka Ja v.30
      • ˚ādhama a wicked man Dhp 78 Ja v.268
      • ˚indriya male faculty masculinity SN v.204 AN iv.57 Dhs 634 715, 839, 972 Vism 447, 492
      • ˚uttama “the highest of men,” an excellent man. AN v.16 AN v.325f. Snp 544 Dhp 78 Dhp-a ii.188
      • ˚usabha (purisusabha) “a bull of a man,” a very strong man Vin iii.39
      • ˚kathā talk about men DN i.8
      • ˚kāra manliness DN i.53 (cp. DN-a i.161) Mil 96
      • ˚thāma manly strength DN i.53 SN ii.28 AN ii.118 iv.190
      • ˚ dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, epithet of the Buddha cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit puruṣa-damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim
      1. SN ii.69 AN i.168 AN i.207 ii.56, 112, 147; Snp p. 103 (= vicitrehi vinayan’ ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti Snp-a 443) Iti 79 Pug 57 Vism 207 Thag-a 178
      • ˚dosā (
      • plural ) faults or defects in a man eight are discussed in detail at AN iv.190f.; Ps i.130 eighteen at Ja vi.542 Ja vi.548
      • ˚dhorayha a human beast of burden SN i.29
      • ˚parakkama manly energy DN i.53 SN ii.28
      • ˚puggala a man, a human character DN iii.5 227 (eight) SN i.220 (8); ii.69, 82, 206; iv.272 sq. Iti 88 (8) (explained at Vism 219) AN i.32 AN i.130 AN i.173 AN i.189 ii.34, 56; iii.36, 349; iv.407 (8); v.139, 183 (8), 330 (8) Vin iv.212f. (= male) Vb-a 497
      • ˚bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility Ja iii.124 Dhs 634 415, 839 Pv-a 63
      • ˚bhūmi man’s stage, as “eight stages of a prophet’s existence” (Dialogues of the Buddha i.72) at DN i.54 in detail at DN-a i.162 163
      • ˚medha man-sacrifice human sacrifice SN i.76 AN ii.42 AN iv.151 Iti 21 Snp 303
      • ˚yugāni (
      • plural ) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272f. AN i.208 ii.34, 56; iii.36; iv.407; v.330 DN iii.5 DN iii.227 Iti 88 in verse Vv 4421 explained Vism 219 ‣See under yuga
      • ˚lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man DN i.9
      • ˚liṅga (‣ See also pullinga) a man’s characteristic, membrum virile Vin iii.35 Dhs 634 715, 839; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 50; Vism 184
      • ˚viriya manly vigour SN ii.28
      • ˚vyañjana the membrum virile (= ˚linga) Vin ii.269
      according to Geiger, Grammar § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prakrit P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q.v.) From the Prakrit form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla
    Purisaka
    1. (n adjective)
      1. a (little) man, only in ˚tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Mil 352 Vism 462 Dhs-a 111
      2. adjective having a man
      3. feminine ˚ikā in eka˚ (a woman) having intercourse with only one man Ja i.290
      from purisa
    Purisatta
    neuter
    1. manhood, virility Dhs 634 715, 839
    abstract from purisa
    Purisattana
    neuter
    1. manhood Mil 171
    = purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Note. 7037
    Pure
    indeclinable
    1. before (both local & temporal), thus either “before, in front or “before, formerly, earlier.” In both meanings the opposite is pacchā -(a) local SN i.176 (pure hoti to lead) Ja ii.153 (opposite pacchima)-(b) temporal SN i.200 Snp 289 Snp 311 Snp 541 Snp 645 Snp 773 (= atītaṁ Nd1 33; opp pacchā) Dhp 348 (opposite pacchato) Ja i.50 (with ablative pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning “in a former life, e.g. Vv 348 3413 Pv i.21 (= pubbe atītajātiyaṁ Pv-a 10); ii.32 (cp. purima); ii.42; ii.74 (= atītabhāve Pv-a 101); ii.913
    • apure apacchā neither before nor after i.e. simultaneously PugA 186 ‣See apubbaṁ:-puretaraṁ (
    • adverb ) first, ahead, before any one else Dhp-a i.13 40
    • (c) modal, meaning “lest” DN-a i.4 cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28

    -cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase ˚n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal Ja i.176 (mettā-bhāvanaṁ); iii.45 (identical), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); vi.127 (Indaṁ); PugA 194 (paññaṁ)

  • ˚java cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit purojava attendant Divy 211 Divy 214, 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding
    1. preceding, preceded by, controlled by (= pubbangama SN i.33 (sammādiṭṭhi˚) Snp 1107 (dhamma-takka˚, cp. Nd2 318)
    2. ˚jāta happening before, as logical category (˚paccaya) “antecedence”; Vism 537 (elevenfold) Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 17; frequently in Duka-Paṭṭhāna. & Tika-Paṭṭhāna. (as ārammaṇa˚ vatthu˚), cp. Vb-a 403 (˚ārammaṇa & ˚vatthuka)
    3. ˚dvāra front door Ja ii.153
    • ˚bhatta the early meal morning meal, breakfast cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit purobhaktakā Divy 307
      1. Vv-a 120 Pv-a 109
      • ˚ṁ in the morning Vv-a 51 Pv-a 78 ˚kicca duties after the morning meal DN-a i.45f. Snp-a 131f. -bhava “being in front,” i.e. superior DN-a i.75 (in exegesis of porī)
      • ˚samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin ii.32 (opp pacchā˚)
      is the genuine representative (with Māgadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Indogermanic *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. before, earlier “preceding in life,” i.e. older; Old High German first
  • Purekkhata
    1. = purakkhata Snp 849 Snp 859 (a˚) Nd1 73 214
    Purekkharoti
    1. to honour etc. Snp 794 = 803; ppr. purekkharāna Snp 844 Snp 910
    for purakkharoti, pure = Sanskrit puraḥ
    Purekkhāra
    1. deference, devotion, honour; usually—˚ adjective devoted to honouring DN i.115 Vin iii.130 Vin iv.2 277 Nd1 73 214 Dhp 73 (= parivāra Dhp-a ii.77) Vv 3414 (attha˚ hitesin Vv-a 152) Vb-a 466 (˚mada) Vv-a 72
    2. for purakkhāra, puraḥ + kṛ; ‣See pure
    Purekkhāratā
    feminine
    1. deference to (—˚) Dhp-a iv.181 (attha˚)
    abstract from purekkhāra
    Purohita
    1. placed in front, i.e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda-purohitā the gods with Inda at their head Ja vi.127 (= Indaṁ pure-cārikaṁ katvā Commentary )
    2. the king’s headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister DN i.138 Ja i.210 v.127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī) Pug 56 (brāhmaṇa p.) Mil 241 Mil 343 (dhamma-nagare p.) Pv-a 74
    purah + past participle of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita
    Pulaka
    1. shrivelled grain Mil 232 (sukka-yava˚ of dried barley) Dhp-a ii.154 (SS; Text reads mūlakaṁ which is explained by Buddhaghosa as “nitthusaṁ katvā ussedetvā gahita-yava-taṇḍula vuccanti” ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of Ja iii.478 (variant readings pulā˚, mūlā˚ mulā˚; explained by Commentary as “saṇhāṇi pulasa-gaccha-paṇṇāni, thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, probably because the word was not properly understood)
    cp. Sanskrit pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sanskrit pulaka, as Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. for which ‣See also Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. pilus
    Puḷava
    1. a worm, maggot MN iii.168 Snp 672 Ja iii.177 Ja vi.73 Mil 331 Mil 357 Vism 179 (= kimi) Dhp-a iii.106 411 ‣See next
    etymology? dial; cp. Classical Sanskrit pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning “vermin”
    Puḷavaka
    1. (Burmese manuscripts puḷuvaka) = puḷava Dhp-a iv.46 Vv-a 76 Pv-a 14 One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. “the contemplation (˚saññā idea) of the worminfested corpse” SN v.131 Dhs 264 Vism 110, 179 (puḷu˚), 194 (identical; as asubha-lakkhaṇa) Dhp-a iv.47 ‣See also asubha.

    Pulasa
    1. ‣See pulaka
    Pulina
    1. (& Puḷina) neuter

      1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river Ja ii.366 (vālika˚); iii.389 (identical); v.414 Mil 297 (ḷ); Dāvs iv.29; Vism 263 (nadī˚) Vv-a 40 (paṇḍara˚)
      2. a grain of sand Mil 180 (l)
      cp. Epic Sanskrit pulina, also Halāyudha 3, 48
    Pulla
    1. man, only in compound pulliṅga (= purisa-linga) membrum virile, penis Ja v.143 (where explained by Commentary as uṇha-chārikā plural “hot embers”; the
    2. passive is evidently misunderstood; Burmese variant phull˚)
    3. a contracted form of purisa (q.v.)
    Pussa˚
    1. ; at Nd1 90 in compounds. ˚tila, ˚tela, dantakaṭṭha, mattikā, etc. is probably to be read with variant reading phussa˚ meaning not quite clear (“natural, raw"?)
    Pussaka
    1. at AN i.188 is to be read as phussaka ‣See phussa3 cuckoo
    Pussaratha
    1. at Ja vi.39 read phussa˚; (q.v.)
    Pūga1
    neuter
    1. heap, quantity; either as noun with genitive or as adjective = many, a lot Snp 1073 (pūgaṁ vassānaṁ bahūni vassāni Nd2 452); Pv iv.79 (pūgāni vassāni) Vb-a 2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ˚, pūg˚)
    2. etymology? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga; 2
    Pūga2
    masculine
    1. corporation, guild Vin ii.109 212; iv.30, 78, 226, 252 MN iii.48 AN iii.300 Ud 71 Pug 29 (= seṇi PugA 210)
    1. ˚āyatana guild’s property Ja vi.108 (= pūga-santaka dhana Commentary )
    2. ˚gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild guildmaster AN iii.76
    • ˚majjhagata gone into a guild AN i.128 = Pug 29 Snp-a 377
    ‣See preceding
    Pūga3
    1. the betel-palm, betel nut tree Ja v.37 (˚rukkha-ppamāṇaṁ ucchu-vanaṁ)
    Classical Sanskrit pūga
    Pūja
    adjective
    1. to be honoured, honourable AN iii.78 (variant reading ; Text pūjja) Ja iii.83 (apūja apūjanīya Commentary ); pūjaṁ karoti to do homage Vism 312 ‣See also pūjiya
    Epic Sanskrit pūjya, cp. pujja
    Pūjanā
    feminine
    1. veneration, worship AN ii.203f. Dhp 106 Dhp 107 Pug 19 Dhs 1121 Mil 162 Pujaneyya & Pujaniya;
    from pūjeti
    Pūjaneyya
    Pūjanīya;
    1. to be honoured, entitled to homage SN i.175 Snp-a 277
    • ˚īya Ja iii.83 Sdhp 230 Sdhp 551
    gerundive of pūjeti
    Pūjā
    feminine
    1. honour, worship, devotional attention AN i.93 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); v.347 sq. Snp 906 Dhp 73 Dhp 104 Pv i.55 i.512; Dīpavaṁsa vii.12 (cetiya˚) Snp-a 350 Pv-a 8 Sdhp 213 Sdhp 230 Sdhp 542 Sdhp 551
    1. ˚āraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dhp 194 Dhp-a iii.251
    • ˚karaṇa doing service, paying homage Pv-a 30
    • ˚kāra = karaṇa Dhp-a ii.44
    from pūj ‣See pūjeti
    Pūjita
    1. honoured, revered, done a service SN i.175 SN i.178 SN ii.119 Thag 1, 186 Snp 316 Ud 73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita) Pv i.42 (= paṭimānita Commentary ); ii.810
    past participle of pūjeti
    Pūjiya
    1. worthy to be honoured Snp 527 Ja v.405 Sdhp 542
    = pūja, Sanskrit pūjya
    Pūjetar
    1. one who shows attention or care. AN v.347f. 350 sq
    agent noun from pūjeti
    Pūjeti
    1. to honour, respect, worship, revere Snp 316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imperative pūjetha) Dhp 106 Dhp 195 DN-a i.256 Pv-a 54 (
    2. aorist sakkariṁsu garukkariṁsu mānesuṁ pūjesuṁ); Sdhp 538
    3. past participle pūjita (q.v.)
    4. pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV viii.16, 12
    Pūti
    adjective
    1. putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid DN ii.353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni) MN i.73 MN i.89 = iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni) Vin iii.236 (anto˚) SN iii.54 Pv i.32 i.61 (= kuṇapagandha Pv-a 32); Vism 261 (= pūtika at Kp-a 61), 645 (˚pajā itthi, in simile) Pv-a 67 Sdhp 258
    • ‣ See also puccaṇḍatā
    1. ˚kāya foul body, mass of corruption, epithet of the human body MN ii.65 SN i.131 SN iii.120 Thag 2, 466 Thag-a 283 Snp-a 40 Dhp-a iii.111
    • ˚kummāsa rotten junket Vism 343
    • ˚gandha bad smell, ill-smelling Pv i.31 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 15) Ja v.72
    • ˚dadhi rancid curds Vism 362 Vb-a 68 cp. pūti-takka Vism 108 -deha = ˚kāya SN i.236
    • ˚maccha stinking fish MN iii.168 (+ ˚kuṇapa & ˚kummāsa); in simile at Iti 68 = J iv.435 = vi.236 = KhA 127
    • ˚mukha having a putrid mouth Snp-a 458 (āsīvisa) Pv-a 12 Pv-a 14
    • ˚mutta strong-smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin i.58 = 96 (˚bhesajja) MN i.316 Iti 103 Vv-a 5 (˚harītaka)
    • ˚mūla having fetid roots MN i.80
    • ˚latā “stinking creeper,” a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Snp 29 = Mil 369 Vism 36, 183; Kp-a 47 (˚saṇṭhāna) Dhp-a iii.110 111 (taruṇā galoci-latā pūtilatā ti vuccati)
    • ˚lohitaka with putrid blood Pv i.78 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 37)
    • ˚sandeha = ˚kāya Dhp 148
    cp. Sanskrit pūti, pūyati to fester; Latin pūtidus putrid; Gothic fūls = German faul, English foul
    Pūtika
    adjective = pūti MN i.449 SN v.51 AN i.261 Ja i.164 Ja ii.275 Mil 252 Dhp-a i.321 Dhp-a iii.111 Vv-a 76
    • apūtika not rotten, fresh MN i.449 AN i.261 Ja v.198 Mil 252
    Pūpa
    1. a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag Ja v.46 (˚pasibbaka cake-bag) Dhp-a i.319 (jāla˚ net-cake variant reading pūva) ‣See also pūva
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pūpa; “a rich cake of wheaten flour” Hȧlāyudha, 2, 164; and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pūpalikā Avs ii.116
    Pūra
    adjective
    1. full; full of (with genitive) DN i.244 (nadī) MN i.215 MN iii.90 MN iii.96 AN iv.230 Snp 195 Snp 721 Ud 90 (nadī) Ja i.146 Pv iv.313 (= pānīyena puṇṇa Pv-a 251) Pug 45 46 Pv-a 29
    • dup˚ difficult to fill Ja v.425
    • pūraṁ (—˚)
    • neuter as
    • adverb in kucchi-pūraṁ to his belly’s fill Ja iii.268 Vism 108 (udara-pūra-mattaṁ)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pūra; from pṛ; ‣See pūreti
    Pūraka
    adjective
    1. filling (—˚) Vism 106 (mukha˚)
    = pāra + ka
    Pūraṇa
    adjective noun
    1. adjective filling Snp 312 (? better read purāṇa with Snp-a 324) Pv-a 70 (eka-thālaka˚) 77 (identical). As proper name in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (DN i.47 Snp p 92, cp. Kp-a 126, 175 Snp-a 200 237, 372). The explanation (popular etymology) of the name at DN-a i.142 refers it to pūreti (“kulassa ekūnaṁ dāsa-sataṁ pūrayamāno jāto” i.e. making the hundred of servants full). 2.
    2. neuter an expletive particle (pada˚ “verse-filler”), so in Commentary style of “a” Snp-a 590 “kho” ib. 139; “kho pana” ib. 137; “taṁ” Kp-a 219; “tato” Snp-a 378 “pi” ib. 536; “su” ib. 230; “ha” ib. 416; “hi” ib 377 ‣See pada˚
    3. from pūreti
    Pūratta
    neuter
    1. getting or being full, fulness Vin ii.239 (opposite unattaṁ)
    abstract from pūra
    Pūraḷāsa
    1. sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Snp 459 (= carukañ ca pūvañ ca Snp-a 405), 467 479 (= havyasesa Commentary ), 486
    cp. Vedic puroḍāśa
    Pūrita
    1. filled with (—˚), full Pv ii.120 (= paripuṇṇa Pv-a 77) Pv-a 134
    past participle of pūreti
    Pūreti
    1. to fill (with = genitive or instrumental) SN i.173 Snp 30 Snp 305 Ja i.50 (pāyāsassa), 347 ii.112 (preterite pūrayittha); iv.272 (sagga-padaṁ pūrayiṁsu filled with deva world) Dhp-a ii.82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); iv.200 (pattaṁ) Pv-a 100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa)
    2. to fulfil Dhp-a i.68
    3. (

      • causative ) to make fill Vism i.37 (lakāraṁ).
      • past participle puṇṇa ‣See also pari˚.
      • causative II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill SN ii.259 Ja i.99
      causative of pṛ; , pṛṇāti to fill, intransitive pūryate, cp. Latin pleo; Gothic filu German viel; Old High German folc = folk
    Pūva
    1. a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) AN iii.76 Ja i.345 (kapalla˚ pan-cake), 347 iii.10 (pakka˚) Vv 136 296 (= kapalla-pūva Vv-a 123); Pv iv.313 (= khajjaka Pv-a 251); Vism 108 (jāla net-cake, cp. jāla-pūpa), 359 (pūvaṁ vyāpetvā, in comparison) Vb-a 65 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); Kp-a 56 DN-a i.142 Vv-a 67 73 (˚surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors ‣See surā) Pv-a 244 ‣See also Vinaya Texts i.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents)
    cp. Sanskrit pūpa; with v for p
    Pūvika
    1. a cake-seller, confectioner Mil 331
    from pūva
    Pe
    1. is abbreviation of peyyāla (q.v.); cp. la
    Pekkha1
    adjective (—˚)
    1. looking out for, i.e. intent upon, wishing usually in puñña˚; desirous of merit SN i.167 Dhp 108 (= puññaṁ icchanto Dhp-a ii.234) Vv 3421 (= puññaphalaṁ ākankhanto Vv-a 154) Pv-a 134
    cp. Sanskrit prekṣā
  • feminine & prekṣaka adjective; from pa + īks
  • Pekkha2
    adjective
    1. to be looked for, to be expected, desirable Ja vi.213
    gerundive of pekkhati, Sanskrit prekṣya
    Pekkhaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. ‣Seeing, looking at; wishing to ‣See Thag-a 73 (Ap. v.59), feminine ˚ikā SN i.185 (vihāra˚)
    from pekkha1
    Pekkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. ‣Seeing, sight, look DN-a i.185 193; Kp-a 148 (= dassana)
    from pa + īkṣ
    Pekkhati
    1. to behold, regard, observe, look at DN ii.20 SN iv.291 Ja vi.420
    • ppr. pekkhamāna Vin i.180 Snp 36f. (= dakkhamāna Nd2 453), 1070, 1104 Pv ii.37; Vism 19 (disā-vidisaṁ). genitive
    • plural pekkhataṁ Snp 580 (cp. Snp-a 460).
    • causative pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one ‣See or consider Vin ii.73 AN v.71
    • cp. anu˚
    pa + īkṣ
    Pek(k)havant
    1. desirous of (locative ) Ja v.403 Pek(k)ha from pekkhā
    Pek(k)hā
    feminine
    1. consideration, view Vb 325 328
    2. desire Ja v.403 (p. vuccati taṇhā)
    3. (or (pekkhaṁ?) show at a fair DN i.6 (= naṭa-samajjā DN-a i.84) ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.7, note 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186.

      from pa + īkṣ
    Pekkhin
    adjective
    1. looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaṁ p. “looking only the distance of a plough Mil 398
    from pekkhati
    Pekhuṇa
    1. (pekkh˚) neuter

      1. a wing Thag 1, 211 (su˚ with beautiful feathers), 1136 Ja i.207–⁠2. a peacock’s tail-feathers Ja vi.218 (= morapiñja Commentary ), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaṁ moraṁ)
      2. not with Childers from *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Grammar § 89 from Sanskrit prenkhaṇa a swing Vedic prenkha, from pra + īṅkh, that which swings through *prenkhuṇa → prekhuṇa → pekhuṇa
    Pecca
    1. “after having gone past,” i.e. after death, having departed SN i.182 SN iii.98 AN ii.174f.; iii.34, 46, 78 Snp 185 Snp 188 Snp 248 Snp 598 Snp 661 Iti 111 Dhp 15 Dhp 131 (= paraloke Dhp-a hi.51) Ja i.169 Ja v.489 Pv i.119 iii.75 (variant reading pacca) The form peccaṁ under influence of Prakrit (Ardhamagadhi) peccā ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar 587 at Ja vi.360
    absolutive of pa + i, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pretya Jtm 3154
    Peṭaka
    adjective
    1. “what belongs to the Piṭaka,” as title of a non-canonical book for the usual Peṭak’ opadesa “instruction in the Piṭaka.” dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar p. 18), mentioned at Vism 141 Dhs-a 165 cp. tipeṭaka ‣See also piṭaka
    from piṭaka
    Peṇāhikā
    feminine
    1. a species of bird (crane?) Mil 364 Mil 402 shortened to peṇāhi at Mil 407 (in the uddāna). cp. Miln translation ii.343
    dialectical; etymology uncertain
    Peṇṇakata
    1. is variant reading for paṇṇakata N plural at Vv 455f. ‣See Vv-a 197

    Peta
    dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajña), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the “fathers,” the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice) They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given SN ii.255 cp. Kindred Sayings ii, 170 p. On the whole subject ‣See Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones.
    1. -1. (souls of the departed, manes) DN iii.189 (petānaṁ kālakatānaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ anupadassati) AN iii.43 (identical); i.155 sq.v.132 (p. ñātisalohita) MN i.33 SN i.61 = 204 Snp 585 Snp 590 Snp 807(petā-kālakatā = matā Nd1 126) Ja v.7 (= mata Commentary ) Pv i.57 i.121; ii.610. As pubba-peta (“deceased-before”) at AN ii.68 AN iii.45 AN iv.244 Ja ii.360
    • (unhappy ghosts) SN ii.255f. Vin iv.269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna-gata). AN v.269 (dānaṁ petānaṁ upakappati) Ja iv.495 sq (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta-piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13 732) Vb 412f.; Sdhp 96 sq
    • manussapeta a ghost in human form Ja iii.72 Ja v.68 Vv-a 23 The later tradition on Petas in their various classes and states is reflected in Mil 294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā nijjhāma-taṇhikā, paradatt’ ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism 501 = Vb-a 97 (as state of suffering with narakā, tiracchā, asurā) Vb-a 455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt’ upajīvino). 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv i.101 yakkha mahiddhika Pv iv.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika Pv-a 145 peta mahiddhika Pv-a 217 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit pretamahardhika Divy 14
    1. . feminine petī Vin iv.20 Ja i.240 Pv i.62 Pv-a 67 and passim Vimānapetī Pv-a 47 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 53 and in Vimāna-vatthu passim

      1. ˚upapattika born as a peta Pv-a 119
      • ˚katha (pubba˚ tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox DN i.8 cp. DN-a i.90 AN v.128
      • ˚kicca duty towards the deceased (i.e. death-rites) Ja ii.5 Dhp-a i.328
      • ˚rājā king of the Petas (i.e. Yama) Ja v.453 (˚visayaṁ na muñcati “does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking”); Commentary explains by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakañjaka-asura-visaya

        • yoni the peta realm Pv-a 9 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 103 and passim -loka the peta world Sdhp 96
        • ˚vatthu a peta or ghost-story; name of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta-Piṭaka Kp-a 12 DN-a i.178 (Ankura˚)
        pp of pa + ī, literally gone past, gone before
    Petattana
    neuter
    1. state or condition of a Peta Thag 1, 1128
    abstract from peta
    Pettanika
    1. one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father AN iii.76 = 300
    from pitar
    Pettāpiya
    1. fatḥer’s brother, paternal uncle AN iii.348 v.138 (gloss pitāmaho)
    for pettāviya (Epic Sanskrit pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Note. 6216, 75
    Pettika
    adjective
    1. paternal Vin iii.16 Vin iv.223 DN ii.232 SN v.146 = Mil 368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye ʻ your own home-grounds ʼ) DN iii.58 SN v.146 Ja ii.59 Ja vi.193 (iṇa). Also in compound mātā-pettika maternal & paternal DN i.34, 92 Ja i.146
    from pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sanskrit paitṛka & Pali petteyya
    Pettivisaya
    (& Pitti˚)
    1. the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) DN iii.234 Iti 93 Ja v.186 Pv ii.22; ii.79 Mil 310 Dhp-a i.102 Dhp-a iv.226 Vism 427 Vb-a 4 455 Pv-a 25f. 29, 59 sq., 214, 268 Sdhp 9
    Sanskrit *paitrya-viṣaya & *pitryaviṣaya, derived from pitar, but influenced by peta
    Petteyya
    adjective
    1. father-loving, showing filial piety towards one’s father DN iii.72 DN iii.74 SN v.467 AN i.138 Ja iii.456 Ja v.35 Pv ii.718 ‣See also matteyya
    from pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya
    Petteyyatā
    feminine
    1. reverence towards one’s father DN iii.70 (a˚), 145, 169 Dhp 332 (= pitari sammāpaṭipatta Dhp-a iv.34) Nd2 294. cp. matteyyatā
    abstract from petteyya
    Petyā
    adverb
    1. from the father’s side Ja v.214 (= pitito)
    from pitar, for Sanskrit pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Note. 564
    Pema
    neuter
    1. love, affection DN i.50 DN iii.284f. MN i.101f. SN iii.122 SN iv.72 SN iv.329 SN v.89, 379 AN ii.213 AN iii.326f. Snp 41 Dhp 321 DN-a i.75
    • ˚(a)vigata-pema with(out) love or affection DN iii.238 DN iii.252 SN iii.7f. 107 sq., 170; iv.387 AN ii.174f.; iv.15, 36, 461 sq
    from prī ‣See pīṇeti & piya & cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman consonant stem
    Pemaka
    masculine or
    • neuter

      1. = pema Ja iv.371
      from pema
    Pemanīya
    adjective
    1. affectionate, kind, loving amiable, agreeable DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.75); ii.20 (˚ssara) AN ii.209 Pug 57 Ja iv.470
    from pema as gerundive formation, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , premaṇīya MVastu iii.343
    Peyya1
    1. to be drunk, drinkable, only in compound or negative apeyya undrinkable AN iii.188 Ja iv.205 213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa˚; to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the best quality SN ii.29
    • manāpika˚ sweet to drink Mil 313
    • duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp 158 ‣See also kākapeyya
    gerundive of pibati
    Peyya2
    = piya, only in compounds. vajja˚;
    1. kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 sangaha-vatthus (grounds of popularity) AN ii.32 AN ii.248 AN iv.219 AN iv.364 DN iii.190 DN iii.192 DN iii.232 Ja v.330 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit priya-vādya MVastu i.3; and ˚vācā kind language DN iii.152 Vv 8436 (= piyavacana Vv-a 345)
    • It is doubtful whether vāca-peyya at Snp 303 (epithet of sacrifice) is the same as ˚vācā (as adjective), or whether it represents vāja-peyya Vedic vāja sacrificial food
    1. as Buddhaghosa explains it at Snp-a 322 (= vājam ettha pivanti; variant reading vāja˚), thus peyya peyya1
    *priya-vadya
    Peyyāla
    neuter?
    1. repetition, succession, formula way of saying, phrase (= pariyāya 5) Vism 46 (˚mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (identical and bahu˚-tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (˚pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras) Vv-a 117 (pāḷi˚ vasena “because of the successive Pāli text”)
    • Very frequently in abridged form, where we would say “etc.,” to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known) The literal meaning would be “here (follows) the formula (pariyāya).” We often find pa for pe, e. g. AN v.242 AN v.270 AN v.338 AN v.339 AN v.355 sometimes pa + pe combined e.g. SN v.466
    • As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain manuscripts; la is found e.g. SN v.448 SN v.267f.; or as variant reading of pe :. AN v.242 AN v.243 354; or la + pe combined: SN v.464 SN v.466
    • On syllable pe Trenckner, Note. 66, says: “The sign of abridgment pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an
    • imperative ʻ insert, fill up the gap, ʼ but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaṁ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with-eyy-for-ayy-, like seyyā, Sanskrit śayyā.” ‣See also Vinaya Texts i.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324
    a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. after Trenckner, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit piyāla and peyāla MVastu iii.202, 219
    Perita
    1. is Kern’s (Toevoegselen s.v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya-merita (p for m Ja iv.424 = v.359. This however is bhaya-m-erita with the hiatus-m, and to supplant perita (= Sanskrit prerita) is unjustified
    Pelaka
    1. a hare Ja vi.538 (= sasa Commentary )
    etymology?
    Peḷa
    1. a lump, only in yaka˚; the liver (-lump) Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = J i.146
    a Prakrit form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 122 peḍhāla
    Peḷā
    1. a (large) basket Ja iv.458 Ja vi.185 cp. ii.25 Mil 23 Mil 282 Vism 304; Kp-a 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading ‣See p. 68 A
    2. past participle ) Thag-a 29
    3. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv iv.142; Mhvs 36, 20 Dhs-a 242 (peḷ-opamā, of the 4 treasure-boxes)
    4. cp. piṭaka
    cp. Classical & B. Sanskrit peṭa, feminine peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251 Divy 365; and the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit various phelā Divy 503; MVastu ii.465
    Peḷikā
    feminine
    1. a basket Dhp-a i.227 (pasādhana˚, variant reading pelakā)
    cp. peḷā
    Pesa
    1. is spurious spelling for pessa (q.v.)
    Pesaka
    1. employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin ii.177 (ārāmika˚ etc.) AN iii.275 (identical)
    from pa + iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command
    Pesakāra
    1. weaver DN i.52 Vin iii.259 Vin iv.7 Ja iv.475 Dhp-a i.424 (˚vīthi); iii.170 sq. Vb-a 294f. (˚dhītā the weaver’s daughter; story of-) Pv-a 42f. 67
    pesa + kāra, epsa = Vedic peśaḥ, from piś ‣See piṁsati1
    Pesana
    neuter
    1. sending out, message; service Ja iv.362 (pesanāni gacchanti); v.17 (pesane pesiyanto.)
    1. ˚kāraka a servant Ja vi.448 Vv-a 349
    • ˚kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant Ja iii.414 Dhp-a i.227
    from pa + iṣ ‣See peseti
    Pesanaka
    adjective
    1. “message sender,” employing for service, in ˚corā robbers making (others) servants Ja i.253 Pesanika (iya)
    from pesana
    Pesanika (˚iya)
    adjective
    1. connected with messages, going messages, only in phrase jaṅgha˚; messenger on foot Vin iii.185 Ja ii.82 Mil 370 (˚iya)
    from pesana
    Pesala
    adjective
    1. lovable, pleasant, well-behaved amiable SN i.149 SN ii.387 AN iv.22 AN v.170 Snp 678 Snp p 124 Mil 373 Sdhp 621. Often as epithet of a good bhikkhu, e.g. at SN i.187 Vin i.170 Vin ii.241 Ja iv.70 Vv-a 206 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 268
    cp. Epic Sanskrit peśala; Buddhaghosa’s popular etymology at Snp-a 475 is “piya-sīla”
    Pesāca
    1. is reading at DN i.54 for pisāca (so variant reading ). Pesi (pesi)
    Pesi (pesī)
    feminine
    1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh Ja iii.223 = Dhp-a iv.67 (pesi = maṁsapesi Commentary ). Thus maṁsapesi, muscle Vin ii.25 ≈ (maṁsapes ûpamā kāmā); iii.105 MN i.143 MN i.364 SN ii.256 SN iv.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism 356 Pv-a 199 Pv-a 2. the foetus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana; SN i.206 Ja iv.496 Nd1 120 Mil 40 Vism 236
    2. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu˚ Ja iv.205
    cp. Epic Sanskrit peśī
    Pesikā
    feminine (—˚)
    1. rind, shell (of fruit) only in compounds. amba˚ Vin ii.109
    • vaṁsa˚ Ja i.352
    • veḷu˚ (a bit of bamboo) DN ii.324 Ja ii.267 Ja ii.279 Ja iii.276 iv.382
    cp. Sanskrit *peśikā
    Pesita
    1. sent out or forth Snp 412 (rājadūta p.) Vv 217 (= uyyojita Vv-a 108) Dhp-a iii.191
    2. pesit-atta is the Commentary explanation at SN i.53 (as given at Kindred Sayings 320) of pahit-atta (translation “puts forth all his strength”) Buddhaghosa incorrectly taking pahita as
    3. past participle of pahiṇati to send whereas it is
    4. past participle of padahati
    5. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-āpesitaṁ order and prohibition Vin ii.177
    past participle of peseti
    Pesuṇa
    neuter
    1. = pesuñña SN i.240 Snp 362 Snp 389 Snp 862f. 941 Ja v.397 Pv i.33 Pv-a 16 Sdhp 55 Sdhp 66 Sdhp 81
    1. ˚kāraka one who incites to slander Ja i.200 Ja i.267
    from pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sanskrit paiśuna
    Pesuṇika
    adjective
    1. slanderous, calumnious Pv-a 12 Pv-a 13. Pesuniya & Pesuneyya;
    from pesuṇa
    Pesuṇiya
    Pesuṇeyya;
    neuter = pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Snp 663 Snp 928 Pv i.32
    • (pesuṇeyya) SN i.228 SN i.230 Snp 852 Nd1 232
    Pesuñña
    neuter [abstract from pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sanskrit paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya backbiting, calumny, slander MN i.110 DN iii.69 AN iv.401 Vin iv.12 Nd1 232 260 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 15.
    Peseti
    1. to send forth or out, especially on a message or to a special purpose, i.e. to employ as a servant or intranstitive to do service (so in many derivations 1. to send out Ja i.86 Ja i.178 Ja i.253 Ja iv.169 (paṇṇaṁ) v.399; vi.448; Mhvs 14, 29 (rathaṁ) Dhp-a iii.190 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 53
    2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka) in
    3. passive pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin ii.177 (ppr. pesiyamāna) Ja v.17 (ppr. pesiyanto)-
    4. past participle pesita ‣See also pessa & derivations
    pa + iṣ to send
    Pessa
    a messenger, a servant often in combination dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e.g. DN i.141 SN i.76 SN i.93 (slightly different in verse) AN ii.208 (spelt pesā); iv.45 Dhp-a ii.7 ‣See also AN iii.37 AN iv.266 AN iv.270 Ja v.351 Pug 56 DN-a i.300 At Snp 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstract noun pessitā service (= veyyavacca Snp-a 466). So also in compounds.
    1. ˚kamma service Ja vi.374
    • ˚kāra a servant Ja vi.356
    gerundive formn from peseti, Vedic preṣya, feminine preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika
    Pessitā
    feminine
    1. being a servant, doing service Ja vi.208 (para˚ to someone else). Pessiya & ka;
    abstract from pessa, Sanskrit *preṣyatā
    Pessiya
    ˚ka;
    1. servant; masculine either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, explained by pesana-kāraka, veyyāvaccakara Vv-a 349) Ja vi.448 (= pesana-kāraka Commentary ), or pessika Snp 615 Snp 651 Ja vi.552
    2. feminine either pessiyā (para˚ Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but variant reading SS pessiyā, explained as pesaniyā paresaṁ veyyāvacca-kārī Vv-a 94) Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesana-kārikā Commentary 414), or pessikā Ja vi.65
    3. ‣See pessa
    Pehi
    1. is imperative 2nd singular of pa + i, “go on,” said to a horse AN iv.190f. cp. SN i.123

    Pokkhara
    neuter
    1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Snp 392 Snp 812 (vuccati paduma-pattaṁ Nd1 135) Dhp 336 Iti 84
    2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus-leaf SN ii.267 Mil 261 (bheri˚). As proper name of an angel (Gandhabba) “Drum” at Vv 189
    3. a species of waterbird (crane) ‣See compound ˚sataka.

      1. ˚ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin i.215 (vanaṭṭha +) 238 (identical)
      2. ˚patta a lotus leaf Snp 625 Dhp 401 (= paduma-patta Dhp-a iv.166) Mil 250
      • ˚madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) Ja v.39 Ja v.466
      • ˚vassa “lotus-leaf rain,” a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus-leaf Ja i.88 Ja vi.586 Kp-a 164 Dhp-a iii.163
      • ˚sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica Ja vi.539 (koṭṭha +) Snp-a 359 cp. proper name Pokkharasāti Snp 594 Snp p. 115 Snp-a 372
      cp. Vedic puṣkara, from pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sanskrit puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (literally lotus-leaf) Halāyudha 2 314, and Pali pokkhara-patta
    Pokkharaṇī
    feminine
    1. a lotuspond an artificial pool or small lake for water-plants ‣See note in Dialogues of the Buddha ii.210 Vin i.140 268; ii.123 DN ii.178f. SN i.123 SN i.204 SN ii.106 SN v.460 AN i.35 AN i.145 AN iii.187 238 Ja ii.126 Ja v.374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv iii.33iv.121 Snp-a 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout) Vv-a 160 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 152. pokkharaññā gen Pv ii.129; instrumental SN i.233 locative Vin ii.123
    2. pokkharaṇiyāyaṁ
    3. locative AN iii.309

      • plural pokkharaṇiyo Vin i.268 Vv-a 191 Pv-a 77 metric pokkharañño Vv 4411 Pv ii.119: ii.78
      from puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit has puskiriṇī, e.g. Avs i.76; ii.201 sq.
    Pokkharatā
    feminine
    1. splendidness “flower-likeness,” only in compound vaṇṇa-pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114 Vin i.268 SN i.95 SN ii.279 AN i.38 AN i.86 AN ii.203 AN iii.90 DN-a i.282 Kp-a 179 Vv-a 14 Pv-a 46 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit passage at Avs ii.202 reads “śobhāṁ varṇaṁ puṣkalatāṁ ca.”
    is it from pokkhara lotus (cp. Sanskrit pauṣkara), thus “lotus-ness,” or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit puṣkalatā (Avs ii.201) is certainly a misconstruction if it is constructed from the Pali
    Poṅkha
    1. arrow, only in reduplicated (iterative) compound poṅkh’ ānupoṅkhaṁ (adverb arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i.e. constantly continuously SN v.453 SN v.454 Nd2 631 (in definition of sadā) DN-a i.188 Vv-ah 351. The explanation is problematic
    2. increment form of punkha
    Poṭa
    1. a bubble Ja iv.457 (variant reading poṭha) ‣See also phoṭa. Potaki (i?)
    from sphuṭ
    Poṭaki (˚ī?)
    masculine feminine ?)
    1. a kind of grass, in ˚tūla a kind of cotton, “grass-tuft, thistle-down (?) Vin ii.150 Vin iv.170 (identical, 3 kinds of cotton spelt potaki here)
    etymology uncertain, probably Non-Aryan
    Poṭakila
    1. a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Thag 1, 27 = 233 Ja vi.508 (= p.˚-tiṇaṁ nāma Commentary )
    etymology unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sanskrit poṭagala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala
    Poṭṭhabba
    1. is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q.v.)
    Poṭha
    1. is; aṅguli˚; snapping of one’s fingers (as sign of applause) Ja v.67 cp. poṭhana & phoṭeti
    from puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti
    Poṭhana
    1. (& Pothana) neuter

      1. striking, beating Ja ii.169 (tajjana˚); v.72 (udaka˚); vi.41 (kappāsa˚dhanuka). At all Ja passages th
      2. (th) snapping one’s fingers Ja i.394 (anguli˚, + celukkhepa) Thag-a 76 (anguli˚, for accharā-sanghāta Thag 2, 67). cp. nippothana
      from poṭheti
    Poṭhita
    (& Pothita)
    1. beaten, struck Mil 240 (of cloth ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s. poṭheti) Ja iii.423 (mañca; Burmese variant pappoṭ˚) Kp-a 173 (˚tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i.e. very soft; variant reading pothita ‣See App. p. 877) Dhp-a i.48 (su˚) Pv-a 174
    • cp. paripothita
    past participle of poṭheti
    Poṭheti
    (& Potheti)
    1. to beat, strike Snp 682 (bhujāni = appoṭheti Snp-a 485) Ja i.188 Ja i.483 (th) ii.394; vi.548 (= ākoṭeti) Dhp-a i.48 Dhp-a ii.27 (th) 67 (th) Vv-a 68 (th) Pv-a 65 (th)
    2. to snap one’s fingers as a token of annoyance DN ii.96 or of pleasure Ja iii.285 (anguliyo poṭhesi).
    3. past participle poṭhita.
    4. causative II poṭhāpeti (poth˚) to cause to be beaten or flogged Mil 221 Dhp-a i.399
    5. cp. pappoṭheti
    from puth = sphuṭ
    Poṇa1
    neuter
    1. only in compound danta˚; a tooth pick Vin iv.90 Ja iv.69 Mil 15 Snp-a 272 As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs i.57
    • kūṭa-poṇa at Vism 268 read ˚goṇa
    = poṇa2?
    Poṇa2
    adjective
    1. sloping down, prone, in; anupubba˚; gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198f. = Ud 53–⁠2. (—˚) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in various phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, “leading to that end.” As nibbāna˚; e.g. at MN i.493 SN v.38f. AN iii.443 cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma˚-nibbāna-ninna Vv-a 348); taṁ˚; Ps ii.197; ṭhāne Pv-a 190
    2. viveka˚ AN iv.224 AN iv.233 AN v.175
    3. samādhi˚ Mil 38
    4. kiṁ˚ MN i.302
    5. from pa + ava + nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pravaṇa
    Poṇika
    adjective
    1. that which is prone, going prone DN-a i.23 where the passage is “tiracchāna-gata-pāṇāpoṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti,” quoted from SN iii.152 where it runs thus: “tiracchāna-gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten’ eva cittatā. The passage is referred to with poṇika at Kp-a 12 where we read “tiracchāna-gatā pāṇā poṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti.” Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as “the kingdom of those which go prone (i.e. the animals)
    from poṇa2
    Pota1
    1. the young of an animal Ja ii.406 (˚sūkara); cp. i.102 (udda˚) Snp-a 125 (sīha˚)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit pota ‣See putta for etymology
    Pota2
    1. a boat Dāvs v.58 Vv-a 42
    Epic Sanskrit pota; dialectical form for plota (?), of plu
    Pota3
    1. a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada˚ Vin i.201 Vism 252
    etymology?
    Potaka
    (—˚)
    1. the young of an animal MN i.104 (kukkuṭa˚) Ja i.202 (supaṇṇa˚), 218 (hatthi˚); ii.288 (assa˚ colt); iii.174 (sakuṇa˚) Pv-a 152 (gaja˚)
    2. f potikā Ja i.207 (haṁsa˚); iv.188 (mūsika˚)
    3. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba˚; young mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206f.; araṇi˚; small firewood Mil 53
    from pota1
    Pottha1
    1. poor, indigent, miserable Ja ii.432 (= potthakapilotikāya nivatthatā pottho Commentary ; variant reading poṭha) ‣See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical
    ?
    Pottha2
    1. modelling, only in compound ˚kamma plastering (i.e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar Ja vi.459 carving Dhs-a 334 and ˚kara a modeller in clay Ja i.71 cp. potthaka1
    later Sanskrit pusta, etymology uncertain; loan-word?
    Potthaka1
    1. a book Ja i.2 (aya˚ ledger); iii.235, 292; iv.299, 487 Vv-a 117
    2. anything made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa˚ a modelled figure Ja vi.342 Thag-a 257 DN-a i.198 Sdhp 363 Sdhp 383. cp. pottha2
    cp. Classical Sanskrit pustaka
    Potthaka2
    neuter
    1. cloth made of makaci fibre Vin i.306 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.247) AN i.246f. Ja iv.251 (= ghana-sāṭaka Commentary ; variant reading saṇa˚) Pug 33
    etymology?
    Potthanikā
    feminine
    1. a dagger (= potthanī) Vin ii.190 = DN-a i.135 (so read here with variant reading for Text ˚iyā)
    from puth ?
    Potthanī
    feminine
    1. a butcher’s knife Ja vi.86 (maṁsakoṭṭhana˚), 111 (identical)
    from puth ?
    Pothujjanika
    adjective
    1. belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combinations viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin i.10 SN iv.330 AN v.216 (2) with reference to iddhi Vin ii.183 Ja i.360 Vism 97. cp. Vinaya Texts iii.230. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms are either pārthag-janika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug-janika MVastu iii.331
    from puthujjana
    Pothetvā
    1. at Ja ii.404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The variant readings are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading)
    Poddava
    1. ‣See gāma˚;
    Ponobhavika
    adjective
    1. leading to rebirth MN i.48 MN i.299 MN i.464 MN i.532 SN iii.26 SN iv.186 DN iii.57 AN ii.11f. 172; iii.84, 86; v.88; Nett 72; Vism 506 Vb-a 110
    from punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno → punaḥ) ‣See puna
    Ponti
    1. (variant readings poṭhi, sonti) Thag 2, 422 423 is doubtful; the explanation at Thag-a 269 is “pilotikākhaṇḍa,” thus “rags (of an ascetic),” cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884 ‣See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread
    Porāṇa
    adjective
    1. old, ancient, former DN i.71 DN i.238 SN ii.267 Snp 313 Dhp 227 (cp. Dhp-a iii.328) Ja ii.15 (˚kāle in the past) Vb-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 523 (identical); Kp-a 247 (˚pāṭha) Snp-a 131 (identical) Dhp-a i.17 Pv-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 63
    • Porāṇā (
    • plural ) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism passim especially Note. 764; Kp-a 123, 158 Snp-a 291 352 604 Vb-a 130 254, 299, 397, 513
    = purāṇa, cp. Epic Sanskrit paurāṇa
    Porāṇaka
    adjective
    1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) Ja iii.16 (˚paṇḍitā) Pv-a 93 (identical), 99 (identical) Dhp-a i.346 (kula-santaka)
    2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) Ja iv.471 (magga)
    from porāṇa
    Porin
    adjective [from pora = Epic Sanskrit paura citizen ‣See pura. Semantically cp. urbane → urbanus → urbs; polite. For popular etymology ‣See DN-a i.73 & 282 belonging to a citizen, i.e. citizenlike, urbane, polite usually in phrase; porī vācā polite speech DN i.4 DN i.114 SN i.189 SN ii.280 = AN ii.51 AN iii.114 Pug 57 Dhs 1344 DN-a i.75 282 Dhs-a 397 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit paurī vācā MVastu iii.322.
    Porisa1
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective human, fit for a man Snp 256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya
    2. masculine = purisa especially in sense of purisa 2, i.e. servant, used collectively (abstract form; n like German dienerschaft, English service servants) “servants” especially in phrase dāsa-kammakaraporisa Vin i.240 AN i.145 AN i.206 AN ii.78 AN iii.45 AN iii.76 AN iii.260 Dhp-a iv.1 dāsa˚ a servant Snp 769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd1 11 viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja king’s service, servant of the king DN i.135 AN iv.286 322; sata˚ a hundred servants Vism 121. For purisa in uttama˚ (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 (cp. Dhp-a ii.188). cp. posa
    abstract from purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puruṣya)
    Porisa2
    neuter
    1. business, doing of a man (or servant cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity MN i.85 (rāja˚) Vv 6311 (= purisa-kicca Vv-a 263); Pv iv.324 (uṭṭhāna˚ = purisa-viriya, purisa-kāra Pv-a 252)
    2. height of a man M. i.74, 187, 365
    abstract from purisa, *pauruṣyaṁ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya
    Porisatā
    feminine
    1. only in negative a˚ inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) Vv-a 275 The reading is uncertain
    abstract from porisa
    Porisāda
    1. man-eater, cannibal Ja v.34f. 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510
    from purisa + ad to eat
    Porisādaka
    1. = porisāda Ja v.489 cp. pursādaka Ja v.91
    Porisiya
    adjective
    1. of human nature, human Ja iv.213
    2. Of the height of man Vin ii.138
    from purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya
    Poroseyya
    1. = porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human MN i.366 The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation from pura (cp. porin; Sanskrit *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya → *porasya → *poraseyya → *poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning is clearly “very fine, urbane, fashionable” thus not derived from purisa, although Commentary explains by “puris’ ânucchavikaṁ yānaṁ” (M. i.561). The passage runs “yānaṁ poroseyyaṁ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṁ” with variant readings voropeyya & oropeyya; . Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) “belüde” ‣See Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. ii. past participle 45 & 666. The reading; poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior On form ‣See also Trenckner, Note. 75.

    Porohita = purohita
    1. Dhp-a i.174 (Burmese variant pur˚)
    Porohacca
    neuter
    1. the character or office of a family priest DN ii.243 As porohicca at Snp 618 (= purohita-kamma Snp-a 466). cp. Trenckner, Note. 75
    from purohita
    Posa1
    1. = purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin i.230 SN i.13 SN i.205 Ja iii.309 AN iv.266 Snp 110 Snp 662 Dhp 104 Dhp 125 (cp Dhp-a iii.34) Ja v.306 Ja vi.246 Ja vi.361
    • poso at Ja iii.331 is genitive singular of puṁs = Sanskrit puṁsaḥ
    contraction of purisa from *pūrṣa → *pussa → *possa → posa. So Geiger, Pali Grammar 303
    Posa2
    adjective
    1. to be fed or nourished, only in dup˚; difficult to nourish SN i.61
    = *poṣya, gerundive of poseti, puṣ
    Posaka
    adjective
    1. nourishing, feeding AN i.62 AN i.132 = Iti 110 (āpādaka +); feminine ˚ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin ii.289 (āpādikā +)
    2. from posa2
    Posatā
    feminine
    1. only—˚, in su˚ & dup˚; easy & difficult support Vin ii.2
    abstract from posa2
    Posatha
    = uposatha
    1. Ja iv.329 Ja vi.119
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit poṣadha Divy 116 Divy 121, and Prakrit posaha (posahiya = posathika) Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 141
    Posathika
    1. = uposathika Ja iv.329 cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaṁ
    Posana
    neuter
    1. nourishing, feeding, support Vv-a 137 Posapeti & Posaveti;
    from puṣ
    Posāpeti
    Posāveti;
    1. to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin i.269 (past participle posāpita) ≈ DN-a i.133 (posāvita, variant reading posāp˚). Posavanika & ya; causative II. from poseti
    Posāvanika
    ˚ya;
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective to be brought up, being reared fed Vin i.272 Ja iii.134 Ja iii.432
    2. ˚˚iya Dhp-a iii.35 Ja iii.35 Ja iii.429 (& ˚iyaka)
    3. neuter fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance Ja ii.289 Dhp-a iv.40 Vv-a 158 (˚mūla). —˚iya Ja i.191
    from posāvana = posāpana of causative posāpeti
    Posita
    1. nourished, fed cp. iii.32 Vv-a 173 (udaka˚)
    past participle of poseti
    Posituṁ
    1. at Vin ii.151 stands for phusituṁ “to sprinkle,” cp. Vinaya Texts iii.169 ‣See phusati2
    Posin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. thriving (on), nourished by Vin i.6 DN i.75 SN i.138 Snp 65
      • anañña˚ cp. Nd2 36) 220 dāra˚;) DN-a i.219
      from poseti
    Poseti
    1. to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin i.269 SN i.181 AN i.117 Ja i.134 iii.467 Nd2 36; Vism 305 Vv-a 138 299. past participle posita -
    2. causative posāpeti.

      1. Ph
      puṣ

    Ph

    Phaggu
    1. a special period of fasting MN i.39 DN-a i.139 ‣See also pheggu
    in forṃ = Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different
    Phagguṇa
    1. & Phagguṇī feminine

      1. name of a month (Feb. 15; th-March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with reference to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism 418; phagguṇi˚ Ja i.86
      cp. Vedic phālguna & ˚ī
    Phaṇa
    1. the hood of a snake Vin i.91 (˚hatthaka, with hands like a snake’s hood) Ja iii.347 (patthaṭa˚) Dhp-a iii.231 (˚ṁ ukkhipitvā); iv.133 frequently as phaṇaṁ katvā (only thus, in absolutive ) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood Ja ii.274 Ja vi.6 Vism 399 Dhp-a ii.257
    2. cp. Epic Sanskrit phaṇa
    Phaṇaka
    1. an instrument shaped like a snake’s hood, used to smooth the hair Vin ii.107
    from phaṇa
    Phaṇijjaka
    1. a kind of plant, which is enumerated at Vin iv.35 = DN-a i.81 as one of the aggabīja, i.e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At Ja vi.536 the Commentary gives bhūtanaka as explanation. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa
    etymology?
    Phandati
    1. to throb, palpitate DN i.52 = M i.404, cp. DN-a i.159 Nd1 46–⁠2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir Ja ii.234 Ja vi.113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land).
    2. causative II phandāpeti to make throb DN i.52 = M i.404
    3. pp phandita (q.v.) cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚. The nearest synonym is calati
    4. spand, cp. Latin pendeo “pend” i.e. hang down, cp. pendulum; Anglo-Saxon finta tail, literally mover, throbber
    Phandana
    1. adjective throbbing, trembling, wavering Dhp 33 (phandanaṁ capalaṁ) Ja vi.528 (˚māluvā trembling creeper) Dhp-a i.50 (issa˚ throbbing with envy)
    2. masculine name of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) AN i.202 Ja iv.208f. Mil 173
      • neuter throb, trembling, agitation, quivering Ja vi.7 (˚mattaṁ not even one throb; cp. phandita) Nd1 46 (taṇhā etc.)
      from phandati, cp. Sanskrit spandana
    Phandanā
    feminine
    1. throbbing, agitation, movement, motion Snp-a 245 (calanā +) DN-a i.111 Nett 88 Commentary cp. iñjanā
    from phandati
    Phandita
    neuter
    1. throbbing, flashing; throb MN ii.24 (˚mattā “by his throbbings only”); pl phanditāni “vapourings,” imaginings Vb 390 (where Vb-a 513 only says “phandanato phanditaṁ”) cp. Psalms of the Brethren 344
    past participle of phandati
    Phanditatta
    neuter
    1. = phandanā SN v.315 (= iñjitatta)
    abstract from phandita
    Pharaṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Mil 345
    2. neuter pervasion, suffusion, thrill Ja i.82 (˚samattha mettacitta); Nett 89 (pīti˚ etc., as
    3. masculine, cp. pharaṇatā); Dhs-a
      1. 166 (˚pīti all-pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp. pīti pharaṇatā)
      • cp. anu˚
      from pharati
    Pharaṇaka
    adjective
    1. thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture Vv-a 16 (dvādasa yojanāni ˚pabho sarīra-vaṇṇo)
    from pharaṇa
    Pharaṇatā
    feminine

    suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only—˚ in set of 4-fold suffusion, viz pīti˚; of rapture, sukha˚; of restful bliss, ceto˚; of telepathic

    1. consciousnss, āloka˚; of light, DN iii.277 Ps i.48 Vb 334 Nett 89
    abstract from pharaṇa
    Pharati
    1. (trs.) to pervade permeate, fill, suffuse Pv i.1014 (= vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati Pv-a 52) Ja iii.371 (sakala-sarīraṁ); v.64 (Commentary for pavāti) Pv-a 14 (okāsaṁ), 276 (obhāsaṁ). To excite or stimulate the nerves Ja v.293 (rasa-haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari ‣See under rasa
    2. Often in standard phrase mettā-sahagatena cetasā ekaṁ (dutiyaṁ etc.) disaṁ pharitvā viharati DN ii.186 SN v.115 and passim where pharitvā at Vism 308 = Vb-a 377 is explained by phusitvā ārammaṇaṁ katvā. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ekaṁ disāṁ spharitvopasampadya viharati MVastu iii.213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraṁ pharati (
    3. aorist phari to thrill the body with rapture, e.g. Ja i.33 Ja v.494 Dhp-a ii.118 iv.102
    4. in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita
      1. to spread make expand Ja i.82 (metta-cittaṁ phari)
      • prob of quite a different origin and only taken to pharati by pop analogy, perhaps to phal = sphaṭ; to split; thus kaṭṭh'atthaṁ pharati = to be split up for fuel
      1. to serve as, only with ˚atthaṁ in phrases āhāratthaṁ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Mil 152 kaṭṭhatthaṁ ph. to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93 = It 90 = J i.482; khādaniyatthaṁ & bhojaniyatthaṁ ph. to serve as eatables Vin i.201 (so to be read in preference to ˚attaṁ)
      • pp pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha ‣See further anu˚, pari˚
      sphur & sphar; , same root as in Latin sperno “spurn” literally kick away; Anglo-Saxon speornan to kick; spurnan = spur
    Pharasu
    1. hatchet, axe AN iii.162 Ja i.199 Ja i.399 Ja ii.409 v.500 Dhp-a ii.204 Pv-a 277 The spelling parasu occurs at SN v.441 & Ja iii.179
    cp. Vedic paraśu; on p → ph cp. Prakrit pharasu & parasu, Pischel Grammar § 208; Geiger, Grammar § 40
    Pharita
    1. being pervaded or permeated (by) Vv-a 68 (mettāya)
    2. spread (out) Ja vi.284 (kittisaddo sakala-loke ph.)
    3. cp. phuṭṭha & phālita;
    past participle of pharati
    Pharusa
    adjective [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph. → p ‣See pharasu, on attempt at etymology cp. Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. fario 1. (literally) rough Pv ii.41.
    • (figuratively) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin ii.290 (caṇḍa +); Pv ii.34; iii.57 Ja v.296 Kvu 619. In combination with vācā we find both pharusa- vācā and pharusā- vācā DN i.4 DN i.138 DN iii.69f. 173, 232 MN i.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā-vācā ‣See Trenckner, at MN i.530) pharusa vacana rough speech Pv-a 15 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 83

  • cruel Pv iv.76 (kamma = daruṇa Pv-a 265).

  • Phala1
    neuter
    1. to burst, thus literally “bursting,” i.e. ripe fruit ‣See phalati] 1. (literally fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca-phal’ ûpapannā not to phalu, as Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. phalu); Vism 120-amba˚; mango-fruit Pv-a 273f.; dussa˚; adjective having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199); patta˚; leaves & fruits, vegetables Snp 239 Pv-a 86
    2. pavatta˚ wild fruit DN i.101
    3. puppha˚ flower & fruit Ja iii.40
    4. rukkha˚-ūpama Thag 1, 490 (in simile of kāmā taken from MN i.130) literally “like the fruit of trees is explained by Thag-a 288 as “anga-paccangānaṁ p(h)alibhañjan’ aṭṭhena, and translated according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rhys Davids as “fruit that brings the climber to a fall."-Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin i.201 scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, harītaka vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Mil 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha’s fruit-shop, viz. sotāpatti˚, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚, suññata˚ samāpatti (cp. Compendium 70), animitta˚ samāpatti, appaṇihita˚ samāpatti
    5. a testicle Ja iii.124 (dantehi ˚ṁ chindati = purisabhāvaṁ nāseti to castrate); vi.237 (uddhita-pphalo, adjective, = uddhaṭa-bījo Commentary ), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). 3. (figuratively) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing As technical term with reference to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc ‣See the Miln quot under 1 and cp. Compendium 45, 116. So frequently in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e.g. Tika-Paṭṭhāna 155, 158 Vb-a 43 & passim
    6. In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna ‣See Nd; 2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna and as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship Frequently it is combined with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of “consequence,” e.g. at DN i.27 DN i.58 DN iii.160 Almost synonymous in the sense of “fruition, benefit, profit” is ānisaṁsā DN iii.132 phala at Pv i.125 = ānisaṁsa Pv-a 64- Vin i.293 (anāgāmi˚); ii.240 (identical); iii.73 (arahatta˚) DN i.51 57 sq. (sāmañña˚); iii.147, 170 (sucaritassa) MN i.477 (appamāda˚) SN i.173 (Amata˚) Pv i.1110 (kaṭuka˚) ii.83 (dāna˚); iv.188 (mahap˚ & agga˚); Vism 345 (of food, being digested) Pv-a 8 (puñña˚ & dāna˚), 22 (sotāpatti˚), 24 (issā-macchariya˚)
      1. ˚atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism 120 -āpaṇa fruit shop Mil 333
      • ˚āphala phala + aphala ‣See ā4; but cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 331
        1. all sorts of fruit, lit what is not (i.e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very frequently in Jātaka style, e.g. Ja i.416 ii.160; iii.127; iv.220; 307, 449, v.313; vi.520 Dhp-a i.106
        • ˚āsava extract of fruit Vv-a 73
        • ˚uppatti ripening Pv-a 29
        • ˚esin yielding fruit Ja i.87 = Th 1, 527 cp. phalesin MVastu iii.93
        • ˚gaṇḍa ‣See palagaṇḍa -ṭṭha “stationed in fruition,” i.e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Compendium 50) Mil 342
        • ˚dāna gift of fruit Vb-a 337
        • ˚dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676-pacchi fruit-basket Ja vi.560
        • ˚pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism 580 Vb-a 191
        • ˚puṭa fruit-basket Ja vi.236
        • ˚bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin iv.38 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit phalacāraka
        • ˚maya ‣See sep
        • ˚ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82
        • ˚sata ‣See palasata
        cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal
    Phala2
    1. is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at Ja vi.510 ‣See pala & cp. Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 40
    Phala3
    1. the point of a spear or sword SN ii.265 (tiṇha˚). cp. phāla2
    etymology? Sanskrit *phala
    Phalaka
    1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank Ja i.451 (a writing board school slate); v.155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); vi.281 (dice-board). pidhāna˚; covering board Vb-a 244 Vism 261; sopāna˚; staircase, landing Ja i.330 (maṇi˚) Vism 313; cp. MVastu i.249; ˚āsana a bench Ja i.199
    2. ˚kāya a great mass of planks Ja ii.91
    3. ˚atthara -sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress Ja i.304 Ja i.317 Ja ii.68
    4. ˚seyya identical DN i.167 (“plank-bed”)
    5. a shield Ja iii.237 Ja iii.271 Mil 355 Dhp-a ii.2 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic’s dress (˚cīra) DN i.167 cp. Vin i.305 ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin ii.136
    6. a post MN iii.95 (aggaḷa˚ doorpost) Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.17).

      from phal = *sphal or *sphaṭ ‣See phalati, literally that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning “slab”); cp. Sanskrit sphaṭika rock-crystal; on Prakrit forms ‣See Pischel Prakrit Grammar §206. Vedic phalaka board, phāla ploughshare Latin pellis spolium; Old High German spaltan = split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Old Icelandic spjald board
    Phalagaṇḍa
    1. is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q.v.)
    Phalatā
    feminine
    1. the fact or condition of bearing fruit Pv-a 139 (appa˚)
    abstract from phala
    Phalati
    1. [phal to split, break open = *sphal or *sphaṭ; , cp. phāṭeti. On etymology ‣See also Lüders, K.Z. xlii, 198 sq. 1. to split, burst open intranstitive AN i.77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase “muddhā sattadhā phaleyya, as a formula of threat or warning “your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces,” e.g. DN i.95 SN i.50 Snp 983 Ja i.54 Ja iv.320 (me); v.92 (= bhijjetha Commentary ) Mil 157 (satadhā for satta˚) Dhp-a i.41 (m. te phalatu s.) Vv-a 68 whereas a similar phrase in Snp 988f. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti = phalati).
    2. causative phāleti (& phāṭeti).
    3. past participle ; phalita & phulla;
    4. to become ripe, to ripen Vin ii.108 Ja iii.251 Pv-a 185
    Phalamaya
    1. stands in all probability for phalika-maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha-maya & loha-maya (& aṭṭhi˚ danta˚, veḷu˚ etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin i.203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); ii.115 (sattha-daṇḍa, scissors-handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The translation “made of fruits” seems out of place (so Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.), one should rather expect “made of crystal” by the side of made of wood, copper bone, ivory, etc
    Phalavant
    adjective
    1. bearing or having fruit Ja iii.251
    from phala
    Phalasata
    1. ‣See palasata
    • At Ja vi.510 it means “goldbronze” (as material of which a “sovaṇṇa-kaṁsa” is made)
    Phalika1
    1. a fruit vendor Mil 331
    from phala
    Phalika2 & ˚kā
    feminine
    1. crystal quartz Vin ii.112 Ja vi.119 (˚kā = phaḷika-bhittiyo Commentary ) Vv 351 (= phalika-maṇi-mayā bhittiyo Vv-a 160) 783 (˚kā) Mil 267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ)
    also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sanskrit sphaṭika; on change ṭ → ḷ ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 386. The Prakrit forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya ‣See Pischel,; Grammar § 206
    Phalita1
    adjective
    1. grey-haired Pv-a 153
    sporadic spelling for palita
    Phalita2
    1. broken, only in phrase hadayaṁ phalitaṁ his heart broke Dhp-a i.173
    • hadayena phalitena with broken heart Ja i.65
    past participle of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3
    Phalita3
    1. fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin ii.108 Ja i.18 Mil 107 Mil 280
    past participle of phal to bear fruit
    Phalin
    adjective
    1. bearing fruit Ja v.242
    from phala
    Phalina
    adjective
    1. at Ja v.92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean “bearing fruit, since it is used as epithet of a bird (˚sakuṇī). The Cy explanation is sakuṇa-potakānaṁ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina-sakuṇī.” The variant reading SS is phalīna & palīna
    from phala, phalin?
    Phalima
    adjective
    1. bearing fruit, full of fruit Ja iii.493
    from phala
    Phalu
    1. a knot or joint in a reed, only in compound ˚bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint DN i.5 Vin iv.34 35
    cp. Vedic paru
    Phaleti
    1. at DN i.54 is spurious reading for paleti ‣See palāyati, explained by gacchati DN-a i.165 meaning “runs, not with translation “spreads out”
    to sphar
    Phallava
    1. is spelling for pallava sprout, at Ja iii.40
    Phassa1
    1. contact, touch (as sense or sense-impression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaṁ. It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression and consists of a combination of the sense the object, and perception, as explained at MN i.111: tiṇṇaṁ (i.e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu-viññāṇa) sangati phasso and gives rise to feeling: phassa-paccayā vedanā ‣See paṭicca-samuppāda & for explanation Vism 567 Vb-a 178f.
    • cp. DN i.42f.; iii.228, 272, 276; Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso) Snp 737 Snp 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. Snp-a 517) Ja v.441 (rājā dibba-phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i.e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho = phutto) Vb-a 177f. (in detail) 193, 265 Pv-a 86 (dup˚ of bad touch, bad to the touch i.e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Thag 1, 783 ‣See on phassa: Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 5 & introduction (lv.) lxiii.; Compendium 12, 14, 94
    1. ˚āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) Pv-a 52
    • ˚āhāra “touch-food,” acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz phass˚, mano-sañcetanā˚ (n. of representative cogitation) and viññāṇ˚ (of intellection) Dhs 71–⁠73 one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or “food,” with reference to the 3 vedanās Vism 341
    • ˚kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu-samphasso, sota˚, ghāna˚, kāya˚ mano˚ DN iii.243
    • ˚sampanna endowed with (lovely touch, soft, beautiful to feel Ja v.441 (cp. phassita)
    cp. Vedic sparśa, of spṛś ‣See phusati
    Phassa2
    adjective
    1. to be felt, especially as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful Ja iv.450 (gandhehi ph.)
    gerundive from phusati, corresponding to Sanskrit spṛśya
    Phassati
    1. stands for phusati at Vism 527 in definition of phassa (“phassatī ti phasso”)
    Phassanā
    feminine
    1. touch, contact with Dhs-a 167 (jhānassa lābho … patti … phassanā sacchikiriyā)
    abstract from phassa
    Phassita
    adjective
    1. made to touch, brought into contact, only in compound suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical Ja i.220 (cīvara) 394 (dantā); iv.188 (dant’ āvaraṇaṁ); v.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read ˚phassita for ˚phussita) 216 (˚cheka-karaṇa) Vv-a 275 (as explanation of atīva sangata Vv 642)
    • Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at Ja v.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained where variant readings give passita & phussita
    past participle of phasseti = Sanskrit sparśayati to bring into contact
    Phasseti
    1. to touch, attain Ja v.251 (rājā dhammaṁ phassayaṁ = Commentary phassayanto; variant readings pa˚ phu˚) Mil 338 (amataṁ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.) passive phassīyati Vin ii.148 (kavāṭā na ph.; variant reading phussiy˚).
    2. past participle phassita & phussita; 3. *Phateti
    3. causative of phusati1
    *Phāṭeti
    1. is conjectured reading for pāteti in phrase kaṭṭhaṁ pāteti MN i.21 and in adhipāteti to split ‣See adhipāta & vipāta. The derivation of these expressions from; pat is out of place, where close relation to phāleti (phalati) is evident, and a derivation from phaṭ = sphat, as in Sanskrit sphāṭayati to split, is the only right explanation of meaning. In that case we should put phal = sphaṭ; , where l = ṭ, as in many Pali words, cp. phalika< spha, Geiger, Pali Grammar § 386). The Prakrit correspondent is phāḍei (Pischel, Grammar § 208)
    Phāṇita
    neuter
    1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu-rasaṁ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṁ Vv-a 180) Vin ii.177 DN i.141 Vv 3525 404 Ja i.33 Ja i.120 Ja i.227 Mil 107 Dhp-a ii.57 phāṇitassa puṭaṁ a basket of sugar SN i.175 Ja iv.366 Dhp-a iv.232
    2. 2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt Ja iii.409 (in explanation of aloṇika = phāṇita-virahita).

      1. ˚odaka sugar water Ja iii.372 -puṭa sugar basket Ja iv.363
      cp. Epic Sanskrit phāṇita
    Phāti
    feminine
    1. swelling, increase Ja ii.426 (= vaḍḍhi); Vism 271 (vuddhi +). Usually combined with kṛ; as phāti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin ii.174 Vb-a 334 & phāti-karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage MN i.220 = AN v.347 AN iii.432
    cp. Sanskrit sphāti, from sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Indogermanic *spē(i), as in Latin spatium, Old High German spuot Anglo-Saxon spēd = English speed) past participle sphīta = Pali phīta
    Phāruka
    adjective at Vv-a 288 is not clear; meaning something like “bitter,” combined with kasaṭa; variant reading pāru˚;. Probably = phārusaka.
    Phāruliya
    1. at Vb 350 (in thambha-exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya neuter harshness, unkindness, as evidence of identical passage at Vb-a 469 shows (with explanation “pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaṁ”).

    Phārusaka
    1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin i.246 Vv 3331 = Dhp-a iii.316 2. Name of one of Indra’s groves Ja vi.278 similarly Vism 424 Vb-a 439
    2. from pharusa, cp. Sanskrit *pāruṣaka Mvyut 103, 143
    Phāla1
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. ploughshare SN i.169 Snp p. 13 & v.77 (explained as “phāletī ti ph.” Snp-a 147) Ja i.94 Ja iv.118 Ja v.104 Ud 69 (as masculine ) Dhp-a i.395
      2. cp. Vedic phāla
    Phāla2
    1. an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla AN iv.70 for phāla Kern comments on the word at Toevoegselen ii.139 ‣See Vin i.225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; variant reading balo correct to bālo; corresponding with guḷa) AN iv.70 (divasa-santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule) Ja v.268 Ja v.109 (phāle ciraratta-tāpite, variant reading pāle, hale, thāle; corresponding with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), identical v.113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti variant reading vālehi)
    to phala3
    Phāla3
    1. in loṇa-maccha˚; a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism 28
    Phālaka
    adjective
    1. splitting; one who splits Vism 413 (kaṭṭha˚)
    from phāleti
    Phālana
    neuter
    1. splitting Ja i.432 (dāru˚); Vism 500 (vijjhana˚)
    from phāleti
    Phālita
    1. made open, expanded, spread Ja iii.320 (+ vikasita)
    2. split from phāleti phal
      1. split open Vism 262 = Vb-a 245 (˚haliddi-vaṇṇa)
      = Sanskrit sphārita, sphar
    Phāliphulla
    1. in full blossom MN i.218 Ja i.52
    either intensive of phulla, or Derived from pariphulla in form phaliphulla
    Phālibhaddaka
    1. is spurious spelling for pāli˚ at Ja ii.162 (variant reading pātali-bhaddaka). cp. Prakrit phālihadda (= pāribhadra Pischel, Grammar § 208)
    Phālima
    adjective [either from
    • causative of phal1 (phāleti), or from sphar (cp. phārita, i.e. expanded), or from sphāy (swell increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand) expanding, opening, blossoming in compound aggi-nikāsi-phālima paduma Ja iii.320 (where Cy. explains by phālita vikasita).

    Phāleti
    1. to split, break chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaṁ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin i.31 Ja ii.144 Pv ii.951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaṁ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaṁ (muddhā sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) Dhp-a; i.17 (perhaps better with variant reading phal˚), 134
    • (various: AN i.204 = SN ii.88 Ja ii.398 Nd2 483; Vism 379 (kucchiṁ Dhp-a iv.133 (hadayaṁ).
    • past participle phālita.
    • causative II phālāpeti to cause to split open Ja iii.121 Mil 157 (variant reading phāḷāp˚)
    • causative of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti from sphaṭ; , which is identical with *(s)phal
    Phāsu
    adjective
    1. pleasant, comfortable; only negative ; in phrase aphāsu-karoti to cause discomfort to dative Vin iv.290 and in compounds. ˚kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare DN iii.164
    • ˚vihāra comfort, ease Vin ii.127 DN i.204 Dhs 1348 = Mil 367 (cp. Dhs-a 404) Mil 14 Vism 33 Vb-a 270 Pv-a 12
    etymology? Trenckner, Note. 82 (on Mil 1417: correction Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 136 which refers it to Mil 1315 suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etymology is doubtful; cp. phāsuka. A key to its etymology may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as ˚ka
    Phāsu
    1. at Mil 146 (cp. p. 425) “bhaggā phāsū” is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (literally) of Ja i.493 is only accidental
    Phāsuka
    adjective
    1. pleasant, convenient, comfortable Ja iii.343 iv.30 Dhp-a ii.92 Pv-a 42
    • aphāsuka unpleasant uncomfortable, not well Ja ii.275 Ja ii.395 Dhp-a i.28 Dhp-a ii.21-Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sanskrit *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der from spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 (“lovely”). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation
    from phāsu. cp. Prakrit phāsuya; accusative to Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 208 Jain Sanskrit prāsuka is a distortion of Pali phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka
    Phāsukā
    feminine
    1. a rib, only in plural phāsukā Vin i.74 (upaḍḍha˚ bhañjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā Ja i.493 (literally), which is figuratively applied at Dhp 154 (explained as “sabbā avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā” at Dhp-a iii.128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Mil 146 both the latter phrases probably of different origin.
    2. adjective (—˚) in phrase mahā˚passa the flank (literally the side of the great ribs Ja i.164 Ja i.179 Ja iii.273 absolute mahā˚; with great ribs Ja v.42
    3. uggata˚ with prominent ribs Pv-a 68 (for upphāsulika adjective Pv ii.11)

      • in compounds. as phāsuka˚; , e. g ˚aṭṭhīni the rib-bones (of which there are 24) Vism 254 (variant reading pāsuka˚) Vb-a 237
      • ˚dvaya pair of ribs Vism 252 Vb-a 235
      • ‣ See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the following
      cp. Sanskrit *pārśukā & Vedic pārśva ‣See passa; 2
    Phāsulikā
    feminine
    1. rib, only in compound upphāsulika adjective Pv ii.11
    2. from phāsuḷi
    Phāsuḷā
    1. rib SN ii.255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā)
    for phāsukā
    Phāsuḷī
    1. a rib MN i.80
    cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā
    Phiya
    1. oar Snp 321 (+ aritta rudder, explained by dabbi-padara Snp-a 330) Ja iv.21 (˚ârittaṁ) ‣See also piya2 which is the more frequently spelling of phiya
    etymology unknown
    Phīta
    1. opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well-populated) DN i.211 (of the town Nālandā); ii.146 (of Kusāvatī) MN i.377 (of Nālandā) ii.71 (of country) SN ii.107 (figuratively of brahmacariyaṁ; with bahujañña for ˚jana) AN iii.215 (of town). By itself & in other comb; n in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.135 (= samiddha); vi.355 (variant reading pīta) With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Mil 330
    past participle of sphāy, cp. Sanskrit sphīta & ‣See phāti
    Phuṭa1
    1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, permeated, thrilled (cp. pari˚) DN i.73 DN i.74 (pītisukhena Text prints phuta; variant reading phuṭa; variant reading at DN-a i.217 p(h)uṭṭha) MN i.276 Ja i.33 (sarīraṁ pītiyā ph.) Dhp-a ii.118 (pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro) Snp-a 107 (referring to the nerves of taste)
    2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with instrumental Vin i.182 (lohitena) Ja v.266 (in nirayapassage Text reads bhūmi yojana-sataṁ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti i.e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; Commentary 272 explains by “ettakaṁ ṭhānaṁ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti.” The identical passage at Nd1 405 = Nd2 304iii d reads bh. yojana-sataṁ pharitvā (intransitive: expanding, wide tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading)
    3. ‣ See also ophuṭa & cp. ; phuta3
    past participle of pharati
    Phuṭa2
    1. blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs iv.49 (˚kumuda). cp. phuṭita
    past participle of sphuṭ; to expand, blossom
    Phuṭa3
    1. at MN i.377 (sabba-vāri˚, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. into pūta. The meaning is “filled with, spread with,” thus = phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The variant reading at MN i.377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, MN i.553 AN similar meaning (“full of, occupied by, overflowing with”) is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage AN i.159 (Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaṁsa (Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, v.39) & remarks of Morris’s; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 165-The same passage as MN i.377 is found at DN i.57 where Text reads phuṭṭa (as also at DN-a i.168), with variant readings puṭṭha & phuṭa
    Phuṭita
    1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstract
    2. neuter phutitattaṁ being tossed about Mil 116 (variant reading put ˚). 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Thag 2, 269 (so read for Text phuṭika, Thag-a 212 explains by bāhita has variant reading niphuṭita)
    3. for phoṭita, past participle of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ
    Phuṭṭha
    1. touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) “thrilled, permeated” Vin i.200 (ābādhena) AN ii.174 (rogena) Ja i.82 (mettacittena, variant reading puṭṭha); v.441 (dibbaphassena); Vism 31 (˚samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā) Vv-a 6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā rogena). On phuṭṭha at DN i.57 ‣See phuṭa3. cp. sam˚
    past participle of phusati1
    Phunati
    1. to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at Ja vi.108 (angārakāsuṁ ph.; variant reading punanti perhaps better; Commentary explains by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read; dhunati
    ?
    Phulaka
    1. (= pulaka) a kind of gem Vv-a 111
    Phulla1
    1. blossoming, in blossom Ja v.203 Also as intensive phāliphulla “one mass of flowers” MN i.218 Ja i.52 Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2
    past participle of phalati, or root formation from phull, cp. phalita3
    Phulla2
    1. broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa-phulla unbroken (q.v.), Pv iv.176 and passim
    past participle of phalati, cp. phalita2
    Phullita
    1. in flower, blossoming Ja v.214 (for phīta = rich), 216 (su˚-vana)
    past participle of phullati
    Phusati1

    1. , from which sparśa = phassa; cp. also phassati] 1. (literally) to touch Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso) DN-a i.61 (aorist phusī = metri causa for phusi) Mil 157 (
    2. gerundive aphusa not to be touched)
    3. (figuratively) [‣See on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Compendium 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e.g. from the following explains of Cys.: DN i.74 parippharati = samantato phusati DN-a i.217 DN ii.186 pharitvā = phusitvā ārammaṇaṁ katvā Vism 308
      1. to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in following phrases ceto-samādhiṁ ph. DN i.13 = iii.30, 108 etc.; nirodhaṁ DN i.184
      • samatha-samādhiṁ Vv 169 (reads āphusiṁ but should probably be aphusiṁ as Vv-a 84 explained by adhigacchiṁ); phalaṁ aphussayi (
      • aorist medium) Pv iv.188; cp. Pv-a 243
      • amataṁ padaṁ Pv iv.348; amataṁ Mil 338 (but Text reads khippaṁ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaṁ kammaṁ Mil 108 (of Devadatta)

        • pp phuṭṭha. cp. upa˚
        spṛś
    Phusati2
    1. this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sanskrit roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the following 2 Indogermanic roots: 1. Indogermanic *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sanskrit sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Anglo-Saxon spearca = English spark, English spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). 2. Indogermanic *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sanskrit pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Latin spargere = German sprengenitive To this root belong Pali pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita
    • Inf phusituṁ, conjectured reading at Vin i.205 for T phosituṁ (variant readings posituṁ & dhovituṁ), & Vin ii.151 for Text posituṁ; Vinaya Texts iii.169 translate “bespatter.”
    Phusana
    neuter
    1. touch Vism 463
    abstract from phusati1 1
    Phusanā
    feminine
    1. attainment, gaining, reaching Vism 278 (= phuṭṭha-ṭṭhāna) Dhp-a i.230 (ñāṇa˚) Vv-a 85 (samādhi˚)
    abstract from phusati1 2
    Phusāyati
    1. to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle SN i.104f. 154 184 (devo ekaṁ ekaṁ ph. “drop by drop”) ‣See also anuphusāyati (so read for ˚phusīyati)
    causative of pruṣ, but formed from Pali phusati2
    Phusita1
    neuter
    1. rain-drop MN iii.300 SN ii.135 Dhp-a iii.243 The Prakrit equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Grammar § 208), cp. German sprenkeln → English sprinkle
    either past participle of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sanskrit pṛṣata ‣See pasata2
    Phusita2
    1. spotted, coloured variegated (with flowers) Snp 233 (˚agga = supupphit agga-sākha Kp-a 192)
    past participle of phusati2 2. i.e. pruṣ, cp. Sanskrit pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope
    Phus(s)ita3
    1. touched, put on, in ˚aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings) MN i.76 (reads phassit˚; cp. variant reading on p. 535 phussit˚) AN i.101 Thag 1, 385 Ja vi.510
    = phassita2, Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. takes it as past participle of *puṁsayati
    Phusitaka
    adjective (—˚) [from phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla˚ deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain SN ii.32 (reads phulla-phusitaka); iii.141 AN i.243 ii.140; v.114; Vism 259.
    Phussa1
    1. see phussa3 2
    2. Name of a month (Dec
    3. Jan. Ja i.86 Name of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 (= phussa-tārakā Vv-a 236)
    4. Frequent as proper name, cp. Vism 422, and combinations like ˚deva, ˚mitta
    from puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Vedic puṣya
    Phussa2
    1. touching, feeling, realising; doubled at DN i.45 DN i.54
    absolutive of phusati1
    Phussa3
    adjective-noun
    1. speckled gaily-coloured, ˚kokila the spotted cuckoo Kern Toevoegselen s.v. phussa however takes it as “male-cuckoo, Sanskrit puṁs-kokila
      1. Ja v.419 Ja v.423 Vv-a 57
      • As phussaka at AN i.188 (so read for pussaka)
      • in sense of “clear, excellent, exquisite” (or it is puṣya in sense of “substance, essence” of anything, as Geiger, Pali Grammar § 40 1a?) in ˚ratha cp. Sanskrit puṣpa˚, but probably to be read puṣya˚?
      1. a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord Ja ii.39 Ja iii.238 Ja iv.34 Ja v.248 Ja vi.39f.) variant reading pussa˚) Pv-a 74
      • ˚rāga cp. Sanskrit puṣpa-rāga
        1. topaz Mil 118 Vv-a 111
        • At Nd1 90 as variant reading to be preferred to pussa˚; in ˚tila, ˚tela, ˚dantakaṭṭha, etc with reference to their use by Brahmins
        gerundive formation from phusati2 2; scarcely from Sanskrit puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather “speckled” in all senses. The Sanskrit puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of Pali phussa˚
    Pheggu
    1. accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with reference to trees (frequently in similes), in sequence; mūla sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at MN i.192f. 488 DN iii.51 SN iv.168 AN i.152 (pheggu sāra, variant reading phaggu); ii.110 = Pug 52 AN iii.20 Ja iii.431 (opposite sāra) Mil 267 Mil 413 (tacchako phegguṁ apaharitvā sāraṁ ādiyati)
    cp. Vedic phalgu & Pali phaggu in form
    Phegguka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having worthless wood, weak, inferior MN i.488 (apagata˚, where ˚ka belongs to the whole compound) Ja iii.318 (a˚ + sāramaya)
      from pheggu
    Pheggutā
    feminine
    1. state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pug AN 229
    abstract from pheggu
    Pheṇa
    [cp. Vedic phena, with *ph from sp˚, connected with Latin spūma, scum, Anglo-Saxon fām = German feim = English foam scum, foam, froth, only in compounds. viz.:
    1. ˚uddehakaṁ (adverb ) (paccamāna, boiling) with scum on top, throwing up foam MN iii.167 AN i.141 Nd2 304iii c Ja iii.46 Mil 357
    2. ˚paṭala a film of scum Vism 359 Vb-a 65
    3. ˚piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam SN iii.140f. = Vism 479 (in simile of rūpa) Nd2 680 Aii Vism 40 (in comp) Vb-a 32f. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, 259, 345 Vb-a 242
    4. ˚mālā a wreath or garland of scum Mil 117
    5. ˚mālin with a wreath of scum Mil 260
    6. ˚missa mixed with froth Vism 263
    7. ˚vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism 263.

    Pheṇaka
    1. = pheṇa Vism 254 Vb-a 237
    Phoṭa
    1. swelling, boil, blister Ja iv.457 Ja vi.8 (variant reading pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. Photaka = phota
    from sphuṭ; , cp. Sanskrit sphoṭa
    Phoṭaka = phoṭa
    1. Vism 258 Vb-a 242
    Phoṭana
    1. "applause,” in brahma-pphoṭana at Dhp-a iii.210 should be taken as ā + phoṭana (= apphoṭana)
    Phoṭeti
    1. to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraṁ adaṁsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuṁ (variant reading appoṭh˚) Mil 13 Mil 18 Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (variant reading appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraṁ adāsi Ja vi.486 Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q.v.), to snap one’s fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At Dhp-a iii.210 we read future apphoṭessāmi (i.e. ā + phoṭ)
    2. causative of sphuṭ; , if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā + phoṭeti Sanskrit āsphoṭayati
    Phoṭṭhabba
    neuter
    1. tangible, touch, contact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaṁ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca touch (“kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā” DN iii.226 DN iii.250 DN iii.269 Nd2 p. 238 under rūpa) ‣See also āyatana
    • DN iii.102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with
    • plural like
    • masculine ) Vb-a 79 (˚dhātu)
    gerundive of phusati
    Phosita
    1. sprinkled Ja vi.47 (candana˚, variant reading pusita)
    past participle of phoseti, cp. Sanskrit pruṣita
    Phoseti
    1. to sprinkle (over) Vin ii.205 (infinitive phosituṁ). past participle phosita. cp. pari˚.

      1. B
      causative of phusati2, cp. Sanskrit pruṣāyati = Pali phusayati

    B

    Ba
    indeclinable the sound (& letter); b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph):; so is e.g. in Buddhaghosa’s view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (KhA 207), cp. bakkula badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā variant reading vajjetvā DN-aI, 4, and ‣See under Nibb-.
    Baka
    1. a crane, heron cp. iii.102 Ja i.205 (˚suṇikā), 221, 476; ii.234; iii.252
    2. Name of a dweller in the Brahma world MN i.326 SN i.142
    cp. Epic Sanskrit baka
    Bakula
    1. in milāta˚-puppha is variant reading Kp-a 60 ‣See App. p. 870 Pj. for ˚ākuli˚; , which latter is also read at Vism 260
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bakula, name of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower
    Bakkula
    1. a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (‣ See also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula)
    = vyākula? Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886, 94
    Bajjha
    1. ‣See bandhati
    Bajjhati
    passive of bandhati (q.v.)
    Battiṁsa
    (numeral cardinal)
    1. thirty-two Ja iii.207
    for dvat-tiṁsa
    Badara
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine AN i.130 = Pug 32 AN iii.76 Vin iv.76 Ja iii.21 Dhs-a 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours) Vv-a 186 Spelling padara for b˚ at Ja iv.363 Ja vi.529
      1. ˚aṭṭhi kernel of the j. Snp-a 247
      • ˚paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube-fruit AN i.181 (so read for bhadara˚) -missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube-fruits Vin iv.76
      • ˚yūsa juice of the j. fruit Vv-a 185
      cp. Vedic badara & badarī
    Badarī
    feminine
    1. the jujube tree Ja ii.260
    cp. Sanskrit badarī
    Badālatā
    feminine
    1. a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.) DN iii.87 = Vism 418; Buddhaghosa says ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha iii.84 “a beautiful creeper of sweet taste.”
    etymology uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa + agent noun of dal causative, literally “destroyer"?
    Baddha1
    1. bound, in bondage MN i.275 SN i.133 SN iv.91 Snp 957 (interpreted as “baddhacara by Nd1 464) Dhp 324
    2. snared, trapped Ja ii.153 iii.184; iv.251, 414
    3. made firm, settled, fastened bound (to a certain place) Kp-a 60 (˚pitta, opposite abaddha˚)

      • contracted, acquired Vin iii.96

    4. bound to addicted or attached to Snp 773 (bhavasāta˚, cp. Nd1 30)

      • put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal Ja iii.343 Ja v.46 Ja vi.524

    5. bound together, linked clustered Dhp-a i.304 kaṇṇika˚ (of thoughts).

      • set made up (of the mind) Dhp-a i.11 (mānasaṁ te b.). cp. ati˚, anu˚, a˚, ni˚, paṭi˚, vini˚, sam˚
      1. ˚añjalika keeping the hands reverently extended Dāvs iii.30
      2. ˚rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped Ja iv.279 Ja iv.415 (variant reading bandhana˚)
      3. ˚vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge Dhp-a i.324
      past participle of bandhati
    Baddha2
    neuter
    1. a leather strap, a thong Vin i.287 (Text bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3) Pv-a 127
    from bandhati
    Baddhacara
    1. ‣See paddhacara
    Badhira
    adjective
    1. deaf Vin i.91 322 Thag 1, 501 = Mil 367 Ja i.76 (jāti˚); v.387; vi.7 Dhp-a i.312 ‣See also mūga
    1. ˚dhātuka deaf by nature Ja ii.63 Ja iv.146 Dhp-a i.346
    cp. Vedic badhira, on etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. fatuus, comparing Gothic baups and MN Irish bodar
    Bandha
    adjective
    1. bond, fetter Iti 56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.) Nd1 328 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚) Thag-a 241
    2. one who binds or ties together, in assa˚; horsekeeper, groom Ja ii.98 Ja v.441 Ja v.449 Dhp-a i.392
    3. a sort of binding maṇḍala˚; with a circular b. (parasol) Vin iv.338

      • salāka˚ with a notched b. ibid
      • a halter, tether Dīpavaṁsa i.76
      • cp. vinibandha
    cp. Vedic bandha, from bandh
    Bandhaka
    1. as variant reading of vaṭṭaka ‣See aṁsa˚;
    Bandhakī
    feminine
    1. an unchaste woman (literally binder) Vin iv.224 (plural bandhakiniyo), 265 (identical) Ja v.425 Ja v.431 (va˚)
    2. from bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman = pāṁśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341
    Bandhati
    to bind etc.
    1. -1. Forms:
    2. imperative bandha DN ii.350
    3. plural bandhantu Ja i.153 Pot. bandheyya SN iv.198 Vin iii.45
    4. future bandhayissati Mhvs 24. 6;
    5. aorist abandhi Ja iii.232 & bandhi Ja i.292 Dhp-a i.182 German bandhitvā Vin i.46 SN iv.200 Ja i.253 Ja i.428 & bandhiya Thag 2, 81 Inf bandhituṁ Thag 2, 299
    6. causative bandheti ‣See above
    7. future & bandhāpeti (see below

      • II. Meanings
      1. -1. to bind SN iv.200 (rajjuyā). figuratively combine, unite Dhp-a ii.189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage)
      • to tie on bind or put on to (
      • locative ) Dhp-a i.182 (dasante). figuratively to apply to, put to, settle on Dhp-a ii.12 (mānasaṁ paradāre)

    8. to fix, prepare, get up, put together Ja iv.290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk’ āticakkaṁ mañc’ ātimañcaṁ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches Ja ii.331 iv.81 Dhp-a iv.61 figuratively to start, undertake begin, make, in phrases āghātaṁ b. to bear malice Dhp-a ii.21 and veraṁ b. to make enmity against (

      • locative Ja ii.353
      • to acquire, get Ja iii.232 (atthaṁ b. nibbatteti Commentary )

    9. to compose Mil 272 (suttaṁ) Ja ii.33 Ja v.39

      • causative II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin iv.224 316 (opposite mocāpeti) Nd2 304iii. b (bandhanena) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 113

        • passive bajjhati Nd2 74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed ‣See palibuddhati). I. Forms Indicative 3rd pl bajjhare Thag 1, 137 preterite 3rd
        • plural abajjhare Ja i.428
        • imperative bajjhantu SN iv.309 AN v.284 Pot. bajjheyya SN ii.228
        • aorist bajjhi Ja ii.37 Ja iv.414 German bajjha Ja iv.441 Ja iv.498 & bajjhitvā Ja ii.153 Ja iv.259 Ja v.442 II. Meanings.
        1. -1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Snp 508 (cp. Snp-a 418) Ja iv.278
        • to be caught (in a sling or trap) Ja iii.330 Ja iv.414

      • to incur a penalty (with

        • locative, e.g. bahudaṇḍe) Ja iv.116
        • to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with
        • locative Ja i.368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in
        • passive sense); v.465; or with instrumental Ja i.428 Ja iv.259
        • past participle baddha (q.v.)
        • cp. ati˚ anu˚, ā, o˚, paṭi˚, sam˚
    Vedic badhnāti, later Sanskrit bandhati, Indogermanic *bhendh, cp. Latin offendimentum i.e. band; Goth bindan = Old High German, bintan, English bind; Sanskrit bandhu relation
    Bandhana
    neuter
    1. binding, bond, fetter Vin i.21 DN i.226 DN i.245 (pañca kāmaguṇā); iii.176 MN ii.44 SN i.8 SN i.24 (Māra˚), 35, 40 iv.201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291 Snp 532 Snp 948 Thag 1, 414 2, 356 (Māra˚ Dhp 345f. Ja ii.139 Ja ii.140 Ja iii.59 = Pv-a 4 v.285 Nd2 304iii. b (various bonds, andhu˚, rajju˚ etc. cp. Nd1 433) DN-a i.121 (with reference to kāmā)
    2. binding, tying band, ligature; tie (also figuratively) Vin i.204 (˚suttaka thread for tying) ii.135 (kāya˚ waistband); ii.117 (˚rajju for robes) SN iii.155 (vetta˚ ligatures of bamboo; cp. v.51) Snp 44 (gihi˚, cp. Nd2 228: puttā ca dāsī ca) Dhp-a i.4 (ghara˚ tie of the house); Kp-a 51 (paṭṭa˚)
    3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin i.96 (sarīra˚) cp. iii.28

      • figuratively composition (of literature) Ja ii.224 (gāthā˚)
      • joining together, union, company Dhp-a ii.160 (gaṇa˚ joining in companies)

    4. handle Vin ii.135

      • piecing together Vin i.254 (˚mattena when it, i.e. the stuff, has only been pieced together ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.153 note)

    5. strap (?) doubtful reading in aṁsa˚; (q.v.) Vv 3340 where we should prefer to read with variant reading ˚vaṭṭaka.

      • doubtful in meaning in cpd paṁca-vidha-bandhana “the fivefold fixing,” as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion ‣See for detail pañca 3 Nd2 304iii. c = Nd1 404 Ja i.174 Pv-a 221 Vb-a 278 In this connection it may mean “set,” cp. mūla˚
      • On use of bandhana in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 115. cp. vini˚;
      1. ˚āgāra “fetter-house,” prison DN i.72 MN i.75 Vin iii.151 Ja iii.326 Dhp-a ii.152 Vv-a 66 Pv-a 153
      • ˚āgārika prison-keeper, head-jailer AN ii.207
      from bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana
    Bandhanīya
    adjective
    1. to be bound or fettered Mil 186
    2. apt to bind, binding, constraining DN ii.337 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.361) Thag 2, 356
    gerundive of bandhati
    Bandhava
    1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative AN iii.44 Snp 60 (
    2. plural bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd2 455) Dhp 288 (
    3. plural bandhavā) Ja ii.316 Ja v.81 DN-a i.243
    4. (—˚) one who is connected with or belongs to Snp 140 (manta˚, well-acquainted with Mantras; cp. Snp-a 192 vedabandhū veda-paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaṁ hoti) Ja v.335 (bodhaneyya˚) cp. bandhu 3
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bāndhava
    Bandhu
    1. a relation, relative, kinsman;
    2. plural bandhū Ja iv.301 Pv-a 86 (= ñātī) & bandhavo Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 in identical passage reads bandhū)
    3. Ādicca˚; kinsman of the Sun an epithet of the Buddha Vin ii.296 AN ii.17 Snp 54 Snp 915 Snp 1128 cp. Nd2 152b Vv 2413 7810, cp. Vv-a 116 Four kinds of relations enumerated at Nd1 11. viz. ñāti˚ gotta˚, manta˚ (where Nd2 455 reads mitta˚), sippa˚
    4. epithet of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DN-a i.254 ‣See below ˚pāda
    5. (˚-) connected with related to, dealing with cp. Vedic amṛta-bandhu RV x.725
      1. SN i.123 (pamatta˚); 128 Snp 241 Snp 315 Snp 430 Snp 911Ja iv.525 Mil 65 (kamma˚) Snp-a 192 (veda˚.). feminine bandhunī Ja vi.47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja˚); explained by Commentary as “rāja-ñātakeh'eva puṇṇā”).

        1. ˚pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sanskrit pādaja), in cpd bandhupād'apacca “offering from the foot of our kinsman,” applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin DN i.90 MN i.334 SN iv.117
        Vedic bandhu ‣See bandhati & cp. bandhava
    Bandhuka
    adjective
    1. the plant Pentapetes phoenicea Ja iv.279 (˚puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu-jīvaka, cp. Commentary bandhujīvaka puppha; although Sanskrit bandhūka is given as synonym of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53)
    2. in bandhukaroga MN ii.121 probably to be read paṇḍuka˚, as Burmese variant ‣See paṇḍuroga
    from bandhu
    Bandhujīvaka
    1. the plant Pentapetes phoenicea MN ii.14 (˚puppha) DN ii.111 (identical) Ja iv.279 Vism 174 Dhs-a 14 Vv-a 43 161
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bandhujīva
    Bandhumant
    adjective
    1. having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as proper name m bandhumā name of father of the Buddha Vipassin DN ii.11 = Vism 433; feminine bandhumatī name of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also name of a town DN ii.12 (capital of king Bandhumā) Snp-a 190 = J iv.388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river Snp-a 190 Ja iv.388 (: Vettavatī)
    2. from bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant
    Bandhuvant
    adjective
    1. having relatives, rich in relatives Ja vi.357
    bandhu + vant
    Babbaja
    a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin i.190 DN ii.55 SN ii.92 SN iii.137 SN iv.158 AN ii.211 Dhp 345 Dhp-a iv.55
    1. ˚pādukā a slipper out of b. grass Dhp-a iii.451
    • ˚lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass SN iii.155 AN iii.365
    cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Latin bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found ‣See pabbaja
    Babbu
    (& ˚ka) Epic
    1. a cat Ja i.480 (= biḷāra Commentary ) = Dhp-a ii.152
    Sanskrit babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Latin fiber = beaver, further connection “bear,” ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. fiber
    Babbhara
    1. imitation of a confused rumbling noise MN i.128
    • cp. also Pali mammana and sarasara
    onomat., cp. Sanskrit balbalā-karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara = Latin balbas, German plappern, English blab; babbhara is a reduplicated formation from *bhara-bhara = barbara, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society
    1889, 209; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 20
    Barihin
    1. a peacock Ja iv.497
    cp. Sanskrit barhin
    Barihisa
    neuter
    1. the sacrificial grass DN i.141 MN i.344 AN ii.207 Pug 56
    Vedic barhis
    Bala1
    neuter
    1. strength power, force DN ii.73 AN i.244 Thag 1, 188 Dhp 109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp. Dhp-a ii.239) Pv i.512 (= kāya-bala Pv-a 30); i.76 Vv-a 4 (iddhi˚) Pv-a 71 (identical), 82 (kamma˚)
    2. Of cases used as
    3. adverb balasā instrumental is mentioned by Trenckner at Mil 430 (notes), cp. Prakrit balasā (Pischel, Grammar § 364) yathā balaṁ according to one’s power, i.e. as much as possible Pv-a 1 Pv-a 54. The compound form of bala in conn with kṛ; is balī˚; , e.g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak MN iii.4 Pug 59 68; ˚karaṇin identical DN iii.183
    4. adjective bala strong Ja v.268 abala weak Snp 770 Snp 1120 dubbala id SN i.222 Ja ii.154 Nd1 12 Pv-a 55 compar. ˚tara MN i.244 neuter noun abalaṁ weakness SN i.222
    5. an army military force Mhvs 25, 57 Snp-a 357 ‣See compounds. below-Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa-balaṁ)
    6. of womanhood (kodha˚)

      • of robbers (āvudha˚)

    7. of kings (issariya˚)

      • of fools (ujjhatti˚)

    8. of wise men (nijjhatti˚)

      • of the deeply learned (paṭisankhāna˚)

    9. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti˚) AN iv.223 (where used as adjective

      • ˚ strong in …); cp. Snp 212 Snp 623
      • Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaṁ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚, sīla˚ SN iv.246
      • The five-fold force (balaṁ pañca-vidhaṁ of a king Ja v.120 Ja v.121 consists of bāhābalaṁ strength of arms, bhoga˚ of wealth, amacca˚ of counsellors, abhijacca˚ of high birth, paññā˚ the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumerated: saddhābalaṁ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚ AN iii.12 DN ii.120 MN ii.12 iii.296 SN iii.96 SN iii.153 SN iv.366, v.219, 249; Ps ii.56, 86, 166, 174, 223; ii.84 133, 168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. SN v.219 SN v.220 Nett 31; they are cultivated to destroy the five uddhambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni SN v.251 They are frequently referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the “Dhamma,” culminating in the eightfold Path, viz cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhangāni, ariyo aṭṭhangiko maggo e.g. SN iii.96 Ps ii.56 Nd1 13 = 360 = Nd2 420; Nd2 s.v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim Cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ pañc’ endriyāni p. balāni sapta bodhyangāni etc. Divy 208.
      1. Two balāni are specially mentioned AN i.52 (paṭisankhānabalaṁ and bhāvanā˚), also DN iii.213 followed here by the other “pair” satibalaṁ and samādhi˚;. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears pañca bhayāni q.v.); the four are paññābalaṁ viriya˚, anavajja˚ saṅgāha˚ AN iv.363f. as given at AN ii.141 also the following 3 groups of cattāri balāni : (1) saddhābalaṁ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚; , cp. DN iii.229-(2) sati˚ samādhi, anavajja˚, sangāha˚. (3) paṭisankhāna˚ bhāvanā˚, anavajja˚; , sangāha˚
      • For 4 balāni ‣See also D iii.229 note, and for paṭisankhānabala (power of computation) ‣See Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge. AN v.32f. MN i.69 Nd2 466 Mil 105 Mil 285 Vb-a 397
      • In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at SN ii.27 SN ii.28 The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgatha: Kvu 228 sq
      • There are seven balāni DN iii.253 and seven khīṇāsava-balāni.283 i.e. saddhābalaṁ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, hiri˚; and ottappa˚; The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma Dhs 58 95, 102 Dhs-a 126 The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni i.35; and sixty-eight balāni ii.168 sq
      1. ˚agga front of an army, troops in array DN i.6 Vin iv.107 cp. DN-a i.85
      • ˚ānīka
      • adjective with strong array Snp 623 Dhp 399 (cp. Dhp-a iv.164)
      • ˚kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note (also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Divy 63 Divy 315) AN i.109 AN iv.107 AN iv.110 SN i.58 Ja i.437 (˚ṁ saṁharati to draw up troops); ii.76 iii.319; v.124; vi.224, 451 Dhp-a i.393 PugA 249 -koṭṭhaka fortress, camp Ja i.179 Mhvs 25, 29
      • ˚(k)kāra application of force, violence Ja i.476 Ja ii.421 Ja iii.447 instrumental ˚ena by force Pv-a 68 Pv-a 113
      • ˚gumba a serried troop Ja ii.406
      • ˚cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dīpavaṁsa vi.2
      • ˚ṭṭha a military official, palace guard royal messenger Mil 234 Mil 241 Mil 264 Mil 314 Mhvs 34, 17 -da strength-giving SN i.32 Snp 297
      • ˚dāyin identical AN ii.64
      • ˚deva “God of strength” name of the elder brother of Kaṇha Ja iv.82 Nd1 89 92 (Vāsudeva +); Vism 233 (id)
      • ˚(p)patta gṙown-strong Dhs-a 118 (variant reading phala˚) -vāhana troops, an army Ja ii.319 Ja iv.170 Ja iv.433 vi.391, 458
      • ˚vīra a hero in strength Vv 531 cp. Vv-a 231
      • ˚sata for palāsata, q.v. (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908 108 note)
      Vedic bala, most likely to Latin de-bilis “without strength” (cp. English debility, Pali dubbala), and Gr (superl.) = Sanskrit baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At Dhs-a 124 bala is understood as “na kampati”
    Bala2
    1. a species of carrion crow Ja v.268 also in compound bal'aṅkapāda having crow’s feet, i.e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka˚?) Ja vi.548 (Commentary explains by pattharita-pāda read patthārita˚)
    cp. * Sanskrit bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & Pali balākā
    Balaka
    adjective
    1. strong; only in kisa˚; of meagre strength, weakly MN i.226 and dub˚; weak MN i.435 cp. balika
    from bala
    Balatā
    feminine
    1. strength, literally strength-quality MN i.325
    abstract from bala
    Balati
    1. to live Kp-a 124 (in definition of bālā as “balanti anantī ti bālā”)
    from bal, as in bala
    Balatta
    neuter
    1. strength, only in compound dubbalatta weakness Ja ii.154
    abstract from bala, cp. balatā
    Balavatā
    feminine
    1. strength, force (also in military sense) Ja ii.369 (ārakkhassa b.) Mil 101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.)
    abstract from balavant; cp. Epic Sanskrit balavattā
    Balavant
    adjective
    1. strong, powerful, sturdy MN i.244 (purisa) SN i.222 Ja ii.406 Dhp-a ii.208 Vv-a 35 Pv-a 94 Comparative balavatara Mil 131 feminine ˚a(n)tarī Sdhp 452. In compoundbalava˚; , e.g. ˚gavā sturdy oxen MN i.226
    2. ˚vippaṭisāra deep remorse Pv-a 14 ˚balava very strong Ja ii.406
    3. ˚balavaṁ as
    4. neuter adverb “exceedingly,” in compound balav’ ābalavaṁ very (loud and) strong Vin ii.1 (= suṭṭhu balavaṁ Commentary ), and ˚paccūse very early in the morning Vism 93, and ˚paccūsa-samaye identical Ja i.92 Dhp-a i.26
    5. from bala
    Balasata
    1. ‣See palasata
    Balākā
    feminine
    1. a crane Thag 1, 307 Ja ii.363 Ja iii.226 Mil 128 (˚ānaṁ megha-saddena gabbhâvakkanti hoti); Vism 126 (in simile, megha-mukhe b. viya) DN-a i.91 (variant reading baka)
    cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Latin fulica, Old High German pelicha = German belche
    Bali
    1. religious offering, oblation DN ii.74 (dhammika) AN iv.17 AN iv.19 Snp 223 Mhvs 36, 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mhvs. translation 263) Dhp-a ii.14 (variant reading ˚kamma)
    2. pañca˚ the fivefold offering i.e. ñāti˚, atithi˚, pubbapeta˚, rāja˚, devatā˚, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods AN ii.68 AN iii.45
    3. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer Altindisches Leben 166 & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 75 DN i.135 DN i.142 Ja i.199 (daṇḍa˚ fines & taxes), 339 Dhp-a i.251 (daṇḍa˚)
    4. proper name of an Asura DN ii.259

      1. ˚kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others Ja i.169 Ja i.260 Ja ii.149 Ja ii.215 iv.246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); v.99, 473 Snp-a 138 Mhbv.28 -karaṇa oblation, offering of food Pv-a 81 Vv-a 8 (˚pīṭha, reading doubtful, variant reading valli˚)
      2. ˚kāraka offering oblations Ja i.384
      • ˚˚ṅkatā one who offers (the five oblations AN ii.68
      • ˚paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings worthy of oblations Ja ii.17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as “tax-collector,” hardly justified);
      • feminine ˚ikā AN iii.77 (devatā), 260 (identical), cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1
      • ˚pīḷita crushed with taxes Ja v.98
      • ˚puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sanskrit balipuṣṭa “fed by oblations”) Abhp 638
      • ˚vadda (cp. Sanskrit balivarda after the Pali?) an ox, especially an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 349) SN i.115 SN i.170 SN iv.163f. 282 sq. AN ii.108f. Snp p. 13 (cp. Snp-a 137) Dhp 152 = Th 1, 1025 Ja i.57 v.104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism 284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman) Dhp-a i.24 (dhuraṁ vahanto balivaddassa, variant reading balibaddassa) Vv-a 258 (variant readings ˚baddha & ˚bandha). The spelling; balibadda occurs at Vin iv.312
      • ˚sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer Ja iv.366 Ja v.103f. -haraṇa taking oblations. AN v.79 (˚vanasaṇḍa)
      cp. Vedic bali; regarding etymology Grassmann connects it with bhṛ
    Balika
    adjective
    1. strong; only in derivation balikataraṁ (compar.) adverb in a stronger degree, more intensely more Mil 84 & dubbalika weak Thag-a 211 cp. balaka
    2. from bala
    Balin
    adjective
    1. strong Thag 1, 12 (paññā˚) Vv 647 Dhp 280 Ja iii.484 Ja vi.147 Balisa & Balisa;
    from bala
    Balisa
    Baḷisa;
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a fish-hook SN ii.226 = iv.158 (āmisa-gataṁ b.) Nd2 374 (kāma˚ variant reading palisa) Ja i.482f.; iii.283; iv.195; v.273 sq. 389; vi.416 Mil 412 Snp-a 114 (in explanation of gaḷa Snp 61) Thag-a 280 292 Vb-a 196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 115
      1. ˚maṁsikā feminine “flesh-hooking,” a kind of torture MN i.87 MN iii.164 AN i.47 AN ii.122 Nd1 154 Nd2 604 Mil 197
      2. ˚yaṭṭhi angling rod Dhp-a iii.397
    cp. Sanskrit baḍiśa
    Balī˚
    1. ; = bala˚ in combination with bhū & kṛ; ‣See bala
    Balīyati
    1. to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Snp 770 (= sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd1 12 cp. 361) Ja iv.84 (variant readings khalī˚ & paliyy˚; C explains by avattharati) = Pv ii.61 (= balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti Pv-a 94) Ja vi.224 (3rd pl balīyare; Commentary abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Nett 6 (variant readings bali˚, pali˚; Commentary abhibhavati)
    denominative from bala, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit balīyati MVastu i.275
    Balya1
    neuter
    1. belonging to strength, only in compound dub˚; weakness MN i.364 Pug 66 also spelt dubballa MN i.13 ablative dubbalyā as
    2. adverb groundlessly without strong evidence Vin iv.241 (cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1886 129)
    3. derived from bala
    Balya2
    1. foolishness, stupidity Dhp 63 (variant reading bālya) Ja iii.278 (Commentary bālya) Dhp-a ii.30
    from bāla, cp. Pali & Sanskrit bālya
    Baḷavā
    feminine
    1. a mare, only in compound ˚mukha the mare’s mouth, i.e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavâgni & vaḍavāmukha) Thag 1, 1104 (translation “abyss-discharged mouth,” cp. Brethren, p. 418)
    cp. Vedic vaḍavā
    Baḷīyakkha
    1. a species of birds Ja vi.539
    etymology?
    Bahati1

    1. to pull ‣See ab˚, ub˚, nib˚, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha
    bṛh1
    Bahati2

    1. doublet of bṛh2] to strengthen, increase ‣See brūhana (upa˚); otherwise only in past participle bāḷha (q.v.) The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explains “baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaṁ.” baṁh
    Bahati3
    [
    1. only in causative formations: to keep outside, literally to make stay outside or away ‣See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati
    2. a Pali root, to be postulated as derived from bahi in sense of “to keep out”
    Bahala
    adjective
    1. dense, thick Vin ii.112 Ja i.467 (˚palāpa-tumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); ii.91 Mil 282 Vism 257 (˚pūva, where Kp-a 56 omits bahala), 263 (opposite tanuka) Kp-a 62 (˚kuthita-lākhā thickly boiled, where in identical p Vism 261 has accha-lākhā, i.e. clear) Dhp-a iv.68 Vv-a 162 (= aḷāra)
    • subahala very thick Mil 258 (rajojalla)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bahala & Vedic bahula
    Bahalatta
    neuter
    1. thickness, swollen condition, swelling Ja i.147
    abstract from above
    Bahi
    adverb
    1. outside 1. (adverb ) Ja i.361 (˚dvāre-gāma a village outside the city gates) Pv i.102 Dhp-a iii.118 Pv-a 24 Pv-a 61. 2. (preposition) with
    2. accusative (direction to) Ja i.298 (˚gāmaṁ) with
    3. locative (place where) ˚dvāra-koṭṭhake outside the gate MN ii.92 AN iii.31
    4. ˚nagare outside the city Ja ii.2 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 47; ˚vihāre outside the monastery Dhp-a i.315

      1. ˚gata gone outside (i.e. into worldly affairs, or according to Vv-a 213 engaged with the bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata-mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself)
      2. ˚nikkhamana going outside of ablative, leaving Vism 500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaṁ mūlakaṁ dukkhaṁ)
      cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of consonant in compound like bahig-gata Vv 5015 in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī Ja v.65
    Bahiddhā
    adverb
    1. outside (adverb & preposition) DN i.16; ii.110 SN i.169 SN iii.47 SN iii.103 SN iv.205; v.157 Vin iii.113 (˚rūpa opposite ajjhatta-rūpa Snp 203 Vb-a 260 (kāye) Dhp-a i.211 (c. gen); iii.378 (sāsanato b.) Dhs-a 189

      • ajjhatta˚ inside & outside personal-external ‣See ajjhatta
      • The; bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense-objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished from ajjhattikāni āyatanāni ‣See āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3. They are discussed at Vism 430 sq.; cp. Dhs 1049-The phrase “ito bahiddhā” refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha (“outside this our doctrine”), e.g. at DN i.157 SN i.133 AN iv.25 Dhs 1005
      from bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in ˚dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals
    Bahu
    adjective [Vedic bahu; from bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compound also very, greatly (˚-) instrumental singular bahunā Dhp 166 nominative pl bahavo Vin iii.90 Dhp 307 & bahū Dhp 53 Ja iv.366 v.40; vi.472; Bu 2, 47; Pv iv.14; Mhvs 35, 98 Pv-a 67
    • neuter plural bahūni Snp 665 Snp 885 genitive dative bahunnaṁ SN i.196 Snp 503 Snp 957 & bahūnaṁ Ja v.446 Kvu 528 (where identical passage MN i.447 reads bahunnaṁ); instrumental bahūhi Pv-a 241
    • locative bahūsu Pv-a 58

      • nt. nominative bahu Dhp 258
      • bahuṁ Pv-a 166 & bahud in compoundbahud-eva (d may be euphonic) Ja i.170 Bu 20, 32. As
      • neuter noun bahuṁ a large quantity AN ii.183 (opposite appaṁ); ablative bahumhā Ja v.387 As
      • adverb bahu so much Pv ii.1311
      • Compar bahutara greater, more, in greater number AN i.36 (pl bahutarā, opposite appakā); ii.183 SN v.457 SN v.466 Ja ii.293 vi.472; Pv ii.117 Mil 84 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 76
      • In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi bahu as a rule appears as bavh˚; (for bahv˚ ‣See Geiger Pali Grammar § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found as in bahu-itthiyo Ja i.398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā Ja i.125 bahu-āyāsa ‣See below. Besides we have the contracted form bahū as in bahûpakāra, etc.)
      1. ˚ābādha (bavh˚) great suffering or illness, adjective full of sickness, ailing much MN ii.94 AN i.107 AN ii.75 AN ii.85 Mil 65 Sdhp 89 (cp. 77)
      2. ˚āyāsa (bahu˚) great trouble Thag 2, 343
      • (i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin ii.256 SN ii.264
      • ˚ūdaka containing much water Ja iii.430 (
      • feminine bahūdikā & bahodikā)
      • ˚ūpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful SN iv.295 SN v.32 MN iii.253 Iti 9 Vin v.191 Ja i.121 Pv iv.156 Pv-a 114
      • ˚odaka (bavh˚) = ˚ûdaka Thag 1, 390
      • ˚kata (a. benevolent, doing service Vin iv.57 212. (b) much moved or impressed by instrumental, paying much attention to Vin i.247
      • ˚karaṇīya having much to do, busy DN ii.76 Vin i.71 SN ii.215 AN iii.116 DN-a i.237
      • ˚kāra (a) favour Dāvs iv.39 (b) doing much, of great service very helpful MN i.43 MN i.170 AN i.123 AN i.132 AN ii.126 SN v.67 Pv ii.1219 Ja iv.422 Mil 264
      • ˚kāratta service, usefulness Kp-a 91
      • ˚kicca having many duties, very busy Vin i.71 DN i.106 DN ii.76 SN ii.215 AN iii.116 DN-a i.237
      • ˚khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash Ja vi.454
      • ˚jañña ‣See bāhu˚
      • jana a mass of people a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people DN i.4 Iti 78 Ja vi.358 Pug 30 57; Pv ii.77 Pv-a 30 At some passages interpreted by Buddhaghosa as “the unconverted the masses,” e.g. DN i.47 explained at DN-a i.143 by “assutavā andha-bāla puthujjana” Dhp 320 (bahujjana), explained at Dhp-a iv.3 by “lokiya-mahājana
      • ˚jāgara very watchful Dhp 29 (= mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita Dhp-a i.262) Snp 972 (cp. Nd1 501)
      • ˚jāta growing much, abundant Ja vi.536
      • ˚ṭhāna (-cintin) of far-reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects Ja iii.306 Ja iv.467 Ja v.176
      • ˚dhana with many riches Pv-a 97
      • ˚patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin iv.243
      • ˚pada many-footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin ii.110 iii.52 AN ii.34 Iti 87
      • ˚(p)phala rich in fruit Snp 1134 cp. Nd2 456
      • ˚(b)bīhi technical termg., name of compounds. with adj sense, indicating possession
      • ˚bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, well-to-do Vin iii.138 Kp-a 241
      • ˚bhāṇika = ˚bhāṇin Pv-a 283
      • ˚bhāṇitā garrulousness Pv-a 283
      • ˚bhāṇin garrulous AN iii.254 AN iii.257 Dhp 227
      • ˚bhāva largeness, richness, abundance Dhp-a ii.175
      • ˚bherava very terrible AN ii.55
      • ˚maccha rich in fish Ja iii.430
      • ˚mata much esteemed, venerable cp. vi.7 Pv-a 117
      • ˚manta very tricky Dhp-a ii.4 (variant reading māya)
      • ˚māna respect, esteem, veneration Ja i.90 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 155 Pv-a 274 -māya full of deceit, full of tricks Ja v.357 (cp. ˚manta) - vacana (technical termg.) the
      • plural number Ja iv.173 Pv-a 163
      • ˚vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558
      • ˚vighāta fraught with great pain Thag 2, 450
      • ˚vidha various multiform cp. xv.7; Pgdp 37
      • ˚sacca ‣See bāhu˚-(s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, well-taught DN i.93 DN i.137 DN iii.252 DN iii.282 Ja i.199 Ja iv.244 AN i.24 AN ii.22 AN ii.147 AN ii.170 AN ii.178 AN iii.114 Snp 58 ‣See Nd2 457 Iti 60 80 Thag 1, 1026 Dhp 208 Vin ii.95 Ja i.93 Mil 19 Thag-a 274 281 Snp-a 109 110
      • ˚(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) DN i.107 ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.132
    Bahuka
    adjective
    1. great, much, many, abundant J. iii.368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.) v.388; iv.536; Mhvs 36, 49 Pv-a 25 (gloss for pahūta Pv i.52) Dhp-a ii.175
    • nt. bahukaṁ plenty, abundance AN ii.7 = Pug 63 Vism 403 (opposite thokaṁ). Compar bahukataraṁ more Ja ii.88 (variant reading bahutaraṁ)
    from bahu
    Bahukkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. many times Mil 215
    bahu + khattuṁ, like sattakkhattuṁ, ti˚ etc.
    Bahutta
    neuter
    1. multiplicity, manifoldedness Vb-a 320 (cetanā˚)
    cp. Sanskrit bahutvaṁ
    Bahudhā
    adverb
    1. in many ways or forms SN v.264 (hoti he becomes many), 288 MN i.34 Snp 966 Pv iv.152 (= bahūhi pakārehi Pv-a 241) Mhvs 31, 73; Dāvs v.68
    from bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā
    Bahula
    adjective
    1. much, abundant, neuter abundance (˚-); full of, rich in, figuratively given to, intent on, devoted to DN ii.73 SN i.199 SN i.202 AN iii.86 (pariyatti˚), 432 (āloka˚); iv.35 Iti 27 30 Ja iv.5 (vināsa˚), 22 Pv-a 80 (chārik’ angāra˚)
    • sayana˚ as much as “particular in one’s choice of resting place Mil 365
    • neuter bahulaṁ (—˚) in the fullness of, full of SN iii.40 (nibbidā˚). The compound form with karoti (kamma) is bahulī˚ (q.v.) cp. ; bāhulla
    1. ˚ājīva living in abundance (opposite lūkh’ ājīvin) DN iii.44 DN iii.47
    usually—˚, as ˚-only in compound ˚ājīva
    Bahula
    neuter
    1. name of a lucky die Ja vi.281
    = preceding
    Bahulī˚
    ;
    1. in compound with kar = bahula adjective + kar, literally “to make much of,” i.e. to practise, in following words: ˚kata (
    2. past participle practised (frequently), usually combined with bhāvita SN ii.264 SN iv.200 SN iv.322 SN v.259 AN i.6 Vism 267 (= punappunaṁ kata); ˚katatta
    3. neuter practice DN ii.214
    4. ˚kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated MN i.301 Dhs-a 406 (= punappuna-karaṇa); ˚karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (
    5. accusative ) MN i.454 AN i.275 AN iii.79 SN iv.322 Dhp-a iii.356 (sevati +) Vb-a 291
    6. ˚kāra zealous exercise, practice MN iii.25 sq (tab-bahulī˚ to this end)
    7. rare in epithet Sanskrit ; when found, different in meaning
    Bahuso
    adverb
    1. repeatedly Pv-a 107
    cp. Sanskrit bahuśaḥ
    Bahūta
    adjective
    1. abundant, much Thag 2, 406 (˚ratana, so read for bahuta˚), 435 (for bahutadhana) Ja iii.425 (bahūtam ajjaṁ “plenty of food”; ajja = Sanskrit ādya, with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. bahūta for Text bahūtamajjā, which introduction story takes as bahūtaṁ = balaṁ ajja, with ajjā metri causâ. Commentary explains however as mataka-bhattaṁ); vi.173 (˚tagarā mahī); Pv ii.75 (variant reading for pahūta, cp. pahūtika)
    for pahūta = Sanskrit prabhūta
    Bahūtaso
    adverb
    1. in abundance Ja iii.484 (where Commentary explanation with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso) vi.538
    derived from bahūta, cp. Sanskrit prabhūtaśaḥ
    Bākucī
    feminine
    1. the plant Vernonia anthelminthica Abhp 586
    cp. * Sanskrit bākucī
    Bāṇa
    1. an arrow Mbhv.19
    cp. Vedic bāṇa
    Bādha
    1. literally pressing (together), oppression, hindrance, annoyance Ja vi.224 cp. sam˚
    from bādh
    Bādhaka
    adjective
    1. oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism 496 (dukkhā aññaṁ na ˚ṁ) Vv-a 214 Pv-a 175
    from bādh
    Bādhakatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism 496
    abstract from bādhaka
    Bādhati
    1. to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder afflict, harm DN ii.19 Ja i.211 Ja iv.124 Vism 400 Dhp-a i.24 gerundive bādhitabba Thag-a 65
    2. passive bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer Snp-a 481 Thag-a 282 ppr. bādhiyamāna Pv-a 33 (so read for ˚ayamāna) 69.
    3. causative bādheti;
    4. past participle bādhita (q.v.) cp. vi˚
    5. Vedic bādhate, bādh; Indogermanic *bheidh to force, cp. Gothic baidjan, Old High German beitten ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh ‣See bādheti & other derivations
    Bādhana
    neuter
    1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) SN v.148 Ja i.211
    2. hindrance DN-a i.132 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism 495 Pv-a 116
    from bādh
    Bādhita
    1. oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dhp 342 (but taken by Commentary as “trapped, snared,” baddha Dhp-a iv.49) Thag-a 65
    past participle of bādhati
    Bādhin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. (literally oppressing), snaring; as noun a trainer Vin ii.26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha˚-pubba); iv.218 (identical)
    2. from bādh
    Bādheti
    1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure Ja vi.224 Pv-a 198 (bādheyya = heṭhayeyya).
    2. gerundive bādhanīya Pv-a 175 cp. paribādheti in same sense
    3. to bind, catch, snare Thag 1, 454 2, 299 Ja ii.51 (
    4. aorist bādhayiṁsu); iv.342; v.295, 445 (pot. bādhaye bādheyya Commentary on p. 447; variant readings baddh˚, bandh˚). grd bādhetabba SN iv.298
    causative of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the causative According to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sanskrit as well
    Bārāṇaseyyaka
    adjective
    1. of Benares, coming from B. (a kind of muslin) DN ii.110 DN iii.260
    from Bārāṇasī
    Bāla1
    adjective
    1. ignorant (often with reference to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana) foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita-sutta MN iii.163f. DN ii.305f.; Vism 499 and contrasts at Snp 578 Dhp 63 Dhp 64; Pv iv.332 Dhs 1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with; andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid ignorant, mentally dull, e.g. at Dhp-a; i.143; ii.89 Pv-a 254
    2. A fanciful etymology of b. at Kp-a 124 is “balanti ananti ti bālā.” Other refs.: DN i.59 DN i.108 SN i.23 AN i.59 AN i.68 AN i.84 AN ii.51 AN ii.180 Snp 199 Snp 259 Snp 318 Snp 578 Snp 879 Iti 68 Dhp 28 Dhp 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330 Ja i.124 (lola greedy-foolish); v.366 (bālo āmaka-pakkaṁ va) Vv 835 Pv i.82 iv.129 Pug 33 Nd1 163 286 sq., 290 Snp-a 509 (= aviddasu) Pv-a 193 Compar. bālatara Ja iii.278 Ja iii.279 Vv-a 326
    3. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): ˚ātāpa the morning sun DN-a i.287 Dhp-a i.164 Mhbv.25; ˚vasanta “early spring” (= Citramāsa), name of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha-māsā) Kp-a 192
    4. ˚suriya the newly risen sun Ja v.284 Pv-a 137 Pv-a 211
    5. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DN-a i.134 cp. bālaka.

      1. ˚nakkhatta name of a certain “feast of fools,” i.e. carnival Dhp-a i.256
      • ˚saṅgatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dhp 207
      cp. Sanskrit bāla (rarely Vedic, more frequently in epithet & Classical Sanskrit); its originally meaning is “young, unable to speak,” cp. Latin infans, hence “like a child, childish infantile”
    Bāla2
    1. the hair of the head Pv-a 285 (˚koṭimatta not even one tip of the hair; gloss Burmese manuscripts vālagga˚)
    2. for vāla
    Bālaka
    1. boy, child, youth SN i.176 Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44: spelt ˚akka); Sdhp 351
    2. feminine bālikā young girl Thag-a 54 (Ap. v.1)
    3. fool Dhs-a 51 (˚rata fond of fools)
    from bāla
    Bālakin
    adjective
    1. having fools, consisting of fools; feminine ˚inī MN i.373 (parisā)
    2. from bālaka
    Bālatā
    feminine
    1. foolishness Ja i.101 Ja i.223
    abstract to bāla
    Bālisika
    1. a fisherman SN ii.226 SN iv.158 Ja i.482 Ja iii.52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194) Mil 364 Mil 412 Dhp-a iii.397
    from balisa
    Bālya
    neuter
    1. childhood, youth SN iii.1
    2. ignorance, folly Dhp 63 Ja ii.220 (= bāla-bhāva); iii.278 (balya) Pv-a 40 Also used as adjective in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836f. = Dhp-a i.30 (= bālatara, atisayena bāla Vv-a 326)
    3. weakness (?) Ja vi.295 (balya, but Commentary bālya = dubbala-bhāva).

      from bāla
    Bāḷha
    adjective
    1. strong; only as adverb ˚ṁ and ˚-, viz.

      1. -1. bāḷhaṁ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety Ja ii.293 vi.291 (i.e. too often, Commentary punappunaṁ) Mil 407 Pv-a 274 Comparative bāḷhataraṁ in a higher degree even more, too much Vin ii.270 276 Mil 125
      • (˚-) in bāḷha-gilāna very ill, grievously sick DN i.72 AN ii.144 SN v.303 DN-a i.212
    Vedic bāḍha, originally past participle of bahati2
    Bāḷhika
    adjective
    1. only in su˚; having excess of good things, very prosperous Ja v.214 (Commentary explains by suṭṭhu aḍḍha)
    from bāḷha
    Bāvīsati
    numeral
    1. twenty-two Kvu 218 Mil 419 Dhs-a 2
    bā = dvā, + vīsati
    Bāhati
    1. ‣See bāheti
    Bāhā
    feminine
    1. the arm AN ii.67 = iii.45 (˚bala) Vin ii.105 Ja iii.62 Ja v.215 (˚mudu). pacchā-bāhaṁ arm(s) behind (his back) DN i.245 (gāḷhabandhanaṁ baddha). bāhaṁ pasāreti to stretch out the arm DN i.222 = M i.252≈. bāhāyaṁ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm DN i.221f. MN i.365 (nānā-bāhāsu g.) Pv-a 148
    2. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one’s arms (as sign of supplication) DN ii.139 Ja v.267 Pv-a 92 and passim
    3. not quite certain whether “post” of a door or a “screen” (from bahati3) the former more likely. Only—˚ in ālambana˚; post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin ii.120 152; dvāra˚; doorpost DN ii.190 Pv i.51 cp. bāhitikā
      1. ˚aṭṭhi (bāh˚) arm-bone Kp-a 50
      2. ˚paramparāya arm in arm Vin iii.126
      a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q.v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā-bāhaṁ & ˚bāhuṁ bāhaṁ & bāhuṁ pasāreti
    Bāhika
    adjective
    1. foreign in ˚raṭṭha-vāsin living in a foreign country Ja iii.432 (or is it name? cp. Ja vii. p. 94)
    = bāhiya
    Bāhitatta
    neuter
    1. keeping out, exclusion Nd2 464 (in explanation of word brāhmaṇa)
    abstract from bāhita
    Bāhitikā
    feminine
    1. a mantle, wrapper (literally “that which keeps out,” i.e. the cold or wind MN ii.116 MN ii.117
    from bāhita, past participle of bāheti1
    Bāhiteyya
    1. to be kept out (?) MN i.328 The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann translates “musst (mir) weichen.”
    unclear; gerundive of bāheti1, but formed from
  • past participle ?
  • Bāhiya
    adjective
    1. foreign Ja i.421 Ja iii.432
    from bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya
    Bāhira
    adjective
    1. external, outside (opposite abbhantara inside) outer, foreign DN ii.75 AN iv.16 Dhp 394 (figuratively in meaning of 2) Ja i.125 (antara˚ inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); vi.384 (bāhiraṁ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv iv.11 (nagarassa b.) Mil 281 (˚abbhantara dhana) Vv-a 68 (˚kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside)
    2. santara˚
    3. adjective = sa-antara
      1. including the inward & outward parts DN i.74 AN iii.25 Thag 1, 172 Ja i.125
      • external to the individual, objective (opposite ajjhattika subjective MN iii.274 (cha āyatanā) Ja iv.402 (˚vatthuṁ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṁ gaṇhāti) Dhs 674 (cp. translation p. 207) Vb 13 Mil 215 Vism 450

    4. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non-Buddhist, frequently applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kvu 251 (+ puthujjana-pakkhe ṭhita) Dhp-a iii.378 (= mana i.e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā)

      • Cases as
      • adverb bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country Ja i.121
      • bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dhp 254
      1. ˚assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things AN i.280 (Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. suggests “inclined towards heretic views”)
      2. ˚āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Thag 1, 634
      • ˚kathā non-religious discourse, profane story Mil 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus “outside story” may be translated)
      • ˚tittha doctrine of outsiders Ja iii.473
      • ˚dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person Ja iv.401 vi.486; Dāvs iii.33
      • ˚pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi-pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka˚). Ja iii.352 iv.305
      • ˚bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects Ja iv.401
      • ˚mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha’s Ja iii.27
      • ˚rakkhā protection of external means SN i.73
      • ˚lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin ii.108
      • ˚samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i.e. Brahmins Dhp-a iii.392
      from bahi, as Sanskrit bāhya from bahis, cp. also bāhiya
    Bāhiraka
    adjective
    1. outsider, non-religious, non-Buddhist, heretic profane SN ii.267 AN i.73 AN iii.107 Kvu 172 (isayo) Vv-a 67 (itthi)
    1. ˚kathā unreligious discussion, profane story Kp-a 118 (cp. bāhirakathā)
    2. ˚tapa = following Ja i.390
    • ˚pabbajjā the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, especially Brahmanic (cp. bāhira˚ and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bāhirako mārgaḥ, e.g. MVastu i.284; ii.210; ii.223) Ja iii.364 Dhp-a i.311
    = bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3
    Bāhiratta
    neuter
    1. being outside (of the individual), externality Vism 450
    abstract from bāhira
    Bāhirima

    adjective

    1. outer, external, outside Vin iii.149 (b. māna external measure; opposite abbhantarima) Ja v.38 (opposite abbhantarima)
    from bāhira, compar adversative formation
    Bāhu
    1. the arm Ja iii.271 (bāhumā bāhuṁ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism 192. —˚ṁ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaṁ) Pv-a 112
    • pacchā-bāhuṁ (cp. bāhaṁ) Pv-a 4 (gāḷha-bandhanaṁ bandhāpetvā).

      1. ˚(p)pacālakaṁ (adverb ) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin ii.213 ‣See explanation at Vin iv.188
    cp. Vedic bāhu, probably to bahati2; cp. Old High German buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by-form bāhā belongs to the older period
    Bāhujañña
    adjective
    1. belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses DN ii.106 DN ii.219 SN ii.107 SN v.262 Ja i.29 (v.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujañña
    from bahu + jana, cp. sāmañña from samaṇa
    Bāhulya
    neuter
    1. abundance Sdhp 77
    from bahula, the Sanskrit form for Pali bāhulla
    Bāhulla
    neuter
    1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity MN i.171 AN iv.87 (˚kathā) AN iv.87 Ps i.197 Ja i.81
    2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin i.9 59, 209; ii.197; iii.251
    3. ‣ See also bāhulya & bāhullika;
    from bahula
    Bāhullika
    adjective
    1. living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin i.9 (+ padhāna-vibbhanto, as also Ja i.68 with which Kern, Toevoegselen s. v compares MVastu ii.241 & iii.329); ii.197; iii.250 MN i.14 MN iii.6 AN i.71 AN iii.108 AN iii.179f. Ja i.68 Ja iii.363 The reading is often bāhulika
    from bāhulla
    Bāhusacca
    neuter
    1. great learning, profound knowledge MN i.445 AN i.38 (so read for bahu˚); ii.218 Vin iii.10 Dhp 271 Vv 639
    from bahu + sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sanskrit śrautya from śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta ‣See on explanation of word Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Bāheti1
    1. to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with reference to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin SN i.141 (bāhetvā pāpāni) Snp 519 = Nd2 464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni) Dhp 267 a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaṁ bahenti) DN iii.94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, explained by panuditvā Dhp-a iii.393 variant reading K vāh˚). past participle bāhita (q.v.) ‣See also nib˚, pari˚
    2. causative of bahati3 or denominative from bahi
    Bāheti2
    1. to carry ‣See sam˚; (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful
    causative of bahati4, cp. Sanskrit vāhayati
    Bidala
    adjective noun
    1. a kind of pulse, split pea Ja iv.353 (= mugga) in ˚sūpa haricot soup Ja iv.352
    2. a split bamboo cane, in ˚mañcaka a bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin ii.149 Ja i.9 Dhp-a i.135
    cp. Sanskrit vidala in same meaning, from vi + dal
    Bindu
    1. a drop, usually a drop of water Snp 392 Snp 812 (uda˚) Ja i.100 Vism 531 (madhu˚) Thag-a 281 Pv-a 98 (udaka˚)
    2. a spot (cp. SBE xvii.155) Vism 222 (˚vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). 3. (as adjective) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahma-ssara, with reference to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhanga), which are given at DN ii.211 227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañjū ca savanīyo ca bindu variant readings bandu & bhindu
      1. ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by “full, close, compact” (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.245 “continuous”) ‣See also below ˚ssara
      1. ˚tthanī having breasts round as a bubble Ja v.215
      • ˚bindu(ṁ) drop by drop DN-a i.218
      • ˚matī
      • feminine proper name of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Mil 121f. -matta measuring a drop, even a drop Pv-a 100 Pv-a 104 (eka ˚ṁ)
      • ˚sāra proper name of king of India, father of Asoka Dīpavaṁsa v.101; vi.15; Mhvs v.18, 19
      • ˚ssara a full rounded voice Snp 350 (referred by Snp-a to a Mahāpurisa); adjective having a full voice ‣See above bindu 3 Pv iii.34 (Text vindu˚, Burmese manuscripts bindu˚; Pv-a explains by avissaṭṭha-ssara sampiṇḍita-ssara, i.e. “continuous” Ja ii.439 (= bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata Commentary ); v.204, 299 (= sampiṇḍita-ghana-ssara) vi.518 = 581 (= piṇḍita-ssara Commentary )
      cp. Vedic bindu & vindu
    Bimba
    neuter
    1. shape, image (= paṭimā Vv-a 168) SN i.134 (translation “puppet”); v.217 (vimba) Ja v.452 In phrase cittakataṁ bimbaṁ it refers to the human body (“the tricked-out puppet-shape” Psalms of the Brethren 303): MN ii.64 = Thag 1, 769 = Dhp 147 = Vv-a 47 cp. Dhp-a iii.109 (= attabhāva)
    2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth cp. Sanskrit bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd
      1. Ja iii.478 Ja vi.457 Ja vi.591 Vv 366 (kañcana˚-vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at Vv-a 168 takes it as bimba1 = paṭimā Dhp-a i.387 (˚phala, with reference to red lips). bimboṭṭha (feminine ˚ī) (having) red lips Ja iii.477 Ja vi.590 (nigrodhapatta-bimb’ oṭṭhī) Thag-a 133 (Ap. v.57). The Sanskrit vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?).

        -oṭṭhi ‣See above 2

      2. ˚ohana second part either *ūhana vāhana “carrying,” or contracted form of odahana from ava + dhā, i.e. *odhana *ohana “putting down,” or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 from ud + hṛ; raising, lifting up

        a pillow Vin i.47 (bhisi˚); ii.76, 150, 208, 200, 218; iii.90, 119 (bhisi˚) iv.279 SN ii.268 AN iii.240 Vb-a 365 Vism 79 ‣See also bhisi1

      3. ˚jāla BR. bimbajā?
        1. the Bimba tree Momordica monadelpha (literally net of b. fruits) Ja i.39 vi.497 (cp. p. 498 ratt’ ankura-rukkhaṁ probably with variant reading to be read ratta-kuravaka˚ ‣See bimbi-jāla) Bu xvi.19
        cp. Classical Sanskrit bimba
    Bimbaka
    1. = bimba 2 Vv-a 168
    Bimbi
    (or bimbī
    1. gold, of golden colour DN-a i.280 = Snp-a 448 (in Buddhaghosa’s fanciful etymology of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṁ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisa-vaṇṇatāya B.)
    1. ˚jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin Ja i.39 Ja v.155 At Ja vi.497 Ja vi.498 the form is bimbajāla. The Commentary explanation gives ratta-kuravaka as a synonym
    = Sanskrit bimbī ‣See bimba
    Bila1
    neuter
    1. a hole, den, cave AN ii.33 = SN iii.85 Thag 1, 189 Nd1 362 Ja i.480 Ja ii.53 Ja vi.574 (= guhā Commentary ) Mil 151 Sdhp 23
    • kaṇṇa˚ orifice of the ear Vism 195; vammīka˚; ant’s nest Ja iv.30
    • sota˚ = kaṇṇa˚ Dhs-a 310
    1. ˚āsaya adjective living in holes, a cave-dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil˚, dak˚, van˚, rukkh˚ SN iii.85 = AN ii.33 Nd1 362; Bu ii.97 Ja i.18
    2. Vedic bila, perhaps from bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already explained by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane
    Bila2
    neuter
    1. a part, bit Ja vi.153 (˚sataṁ 100 pieces); ablative bilaso (adverb ) bit by bit MN i.58 = iii.91 (variant reading vilaso). At Ja v.90 in compound migābilaṁ (maṁsaṁ it is doubtful whether we should read mig'ābilaṁ (thus as we have done, taking ābila = āvila), or migā-bilaṁ with a lengthened metri causâ, as the Commentary seems to take it (migehi khādita-maṁsato atirittaṁ koṭṭhāsaṁ).

      1. ˚kata cut into pieces, made into bits Ja v.266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The Commentary here (p. 272) explains as koṭṭhāsa-kata; at Ja vi.111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja-kata i.e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya
      identical with bila1
    Bila3
    1. a kind of salt Vin i.202 MN ii.178 MN ii.181
    cp. Sanskrit viḍa
    Bilaṅga
    sour gruel Ja vi.365 (= kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilaṅga-dutiya ‣Seed-cake? accompanied by sour gruel Vin ii.77 78 SN i.90 AN i.145 AN iv.392 Ja i.228 Ja iii.299 Snp-a 94 Dhp-a iii.10 (variant reading pilanka—˚akaṁ; iv.77 Vv-a 222 298 (bilanka˚).
    1. ˚thālika a certain torture, called “gruel-pot (should there be any relation to bila-kata under bila2? AN i.47 AN ii.122 Nd2 604 (variant reading khil˚) Mil 197 Mil 290 Mil 358 (all passages in standard setting)
    etymology doubtful; one compares both Sanskrit viḍanga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilanga the plant Erycibe paniculata
    Bilaṅgika
    adjective living on sour gruel; name of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha SN i.164
    Billa
    1. fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle marmelos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka SN i.150 = AN iv.170 (variant readings villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla) = Sn p. 125 (variant readings pillā billā, billa; Text reading after SS billi. cp. derivations bella & beluva;
    cp. Vedic bilva
    Biḷāra
    a cat DN ii.83 MN i.128 MN i.334 SN ii.270 AN iii.122 (viḷāra); v.202, 289 Thag 1, 1138 Ja i.461 (as representing deceit), 480; v.406, 416, 418 Mil 118 Dhp-a ii.152 PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 116.
    1. ˚nissakkana (-matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through. AN v.195
    • ˚bhastā (a bag of) catskin MN i.128 (explained by Buddhaghosa as “biḷāra-camma-pasibbako”); Thag 1 1138. At both passages in similes
    etymology uncertain, probably a loan-word; cp. late Sanskrit biḍāla & ‣See also Pali biḷāla. The Prakrit forms are birāla & virāla, feminine birālī
    Biḷārikā
    feminine
    1. a she-cat Ja iii.265
    cp. Sanskrit biḍālikā
    Biḷāla1
    1. a cat Ja i.110 Ja ii.244 Ja vi.593
    • pakkha a flying fox Ja vi.538
    ‣See biḷāra
    Biḷāla2
    1. a kind of salt Abhp 461
    ‣See bila3
    Biḷālī
    feminine
    1. a bulbous plant, a tuber Ja iv.46 (= ˚vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (= ˚kanda Commentary p. 373); vi.578. cp. takkaḷa
    feminine of biḷāla = biḷāra, cp. Sanskrit biḍālī, also name of a plant ‣See on Prakrit chira-birālī = Sanskrit kṣīra-biḍālī Pischel Grammar § 241
    Biḷibiḷikā
    feminine
    1. tittle-tattle SN i.200 = Thag 1, 119 Mrs. Rhys Davids (Psalms of the Brethren 106 note) trsl “finglefangle,” noting the commentator’s paraphrase “vilivilikriyā” (literally sticky-sticky-action?)
    onomat. cp. English babble
    Bīja
    neuter
    1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense ‣See on similes Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 116
    2. DN i.135 (˚bhatta ‣Seed-corn food); iii.44 (the five kinds ‣See below under ˚gāma) MN i.457 SN i.21 SN i.134 SN i.172 SN i.227 SN iii.54 SN iii.91 SN iv.315 AN i.32 (ucchu˚), 135, 223, 229, 239; iii.404; iv.237 v.213 (ucchu˚) Snp 77 (saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp. Snp-a 142f. where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa˚ adjective figuratively) Ja i.242 (tiṇa˚-ādīni grass and other ‣Seeds), 281 Pv i.11 Vism 555 (in simile); Kp-a 194 (on Snp 235 in another comparison) Sdhp 24 Sdhp 270f. 318. nibbatta˚; (or nivatta˚)
    3. adjective that which has dropped its ‣Seed (hence a lawful food) Vin i.215 cp. ii.109; iv.35
    4. element, in udaka˚; whose element is the water Ja vi.160
      1. ˚gāma ‣Seed-group ‣Seed-kingdom ‣Seed-creation (opp bhūta-gāma). There are 5 kinds of ‣Seeds usually enumerated, e.g. at DN i.5 (explained at DN-a i.77 translation at Dialogues of the Buddha i.6 and passim), viz. mūla˚, khandha˚, phalu˚, agga˚ bija˚, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints buddings, shoots ‣Seeds (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.40: tubers, shoots berries, joints ‣Seeds). The same set occurs at DN iii.44 47 Vin iv.34 Snp-a 144
      • Without reference to the 5 kinds at MN iii.34 SN v.46 Mil 33
      • ˚jāta species of ‣Seed SN iii.54
      • ˚bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is explained at Vin iv.35 & DN-a; i.81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i.e. the seven dhaññāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i.e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa)
      • ˚sakaṭa a cart (-load) of ‣Seeds Snp-a 137
      cp. Vedic bīja
    Bījaka
    1. scion, offspring Vin iii.18
    • nīla˚ a waterplant Vin iii.276 (Commentary on Vin iii.177). Bijati & Bijani
    from bīja
    Bījati
    Bījanī
    1. are by-forms of vījati & vījanī (q.v.)
    Bījin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having ‣Seed, only in compound eka˚; having one ‣Seed (for only one future life) left AN i.233 SN v.205 Nett 189, cp. A. iv.380; Kvu ii.471 ‣See also KvuA in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 137
      2. from bīja
    Bībhaccha
    adjective
    1. disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful Ja ii.276 Ja iv.71 (˚vaṇṇa), Sdhp 603. ˚dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold Ja i.171 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 99 (: all with reference to Petas)
    • The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī is sometimes found, e.g. at Ja i.61 iv.491; v.42
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a desiderative from bādhate ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. s.v. fastidium
    Bīraṇa
    1. a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum SN iii.137 (here represented as larger than the kusa babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree)
    cp. Sanskrit vīraṇa & vīraṇī-mūla = uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467
    Bujjhaka
    adjective
    1. intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in ; Dīpavaṁsa ix.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (translation suggested by English Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg’s “unnoticed”). Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893 69 suggests “not fighting,” thus making abujjhaka avujjh˚ = ayujjh˚ (of yudh
    from budh
    Bujjhati

    1. to be awake, to be enlightened in (accusative ), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand DN ii.249 SN i.74 SN i.198 Dhp 136 Dhp 286 Thag 1, 146 Ja iii.331 Ja iv.49 425 Mil 165 Mil 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dīpavaṁsa i.14 (with genitive) Kp-a 219 (so attho sukhaṁ b.). 3rd
    2. plural bujjhare Thag 2, 453 Bu ii.183.
    3. imperative bujjhassu Bu ii.183.
    4. future bujjhissati Bu ii.65;
    5. aorist abujjhi Bu ii.211, and bujjhi Ja iv.425 Vism 209; preterite 3rd singular abujjhatha Bu vii.22

      • ppr. bujjhamāna Snp 395 Bu vii.22 Dhp-a i.93
      • past participle buddha (q.v.)
      • causative I. bodheti (q.v.)
      • causative II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition Ja i.407 Two infinitives formed from bodh but belonging to budh are bodhuṁ Ja v.341 and boddhuṁ Thag 1, 167
      budh, y-formation, corresponding to Sanskrit budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Active with accusative of object, e.g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism 209

      • The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by “avagamane (understanding ‣See ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by “bodhane” (awakening). Buddhaghosa’s explanation of the meaning is “kilesa-santāna-niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti” Dhs-a 217 cp. translation at Expositor 294 “to rise from the slumber of the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna”
    Bujjhana
    neuter
    1. awakening, attaining to knowledge, recognition Ps i.18 Mil 194 DN-a i.51
    from budh
    Bujjhanaka
    adjective
    1. endowed with knowledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened Dhs-a 217
    from bujjhana
    Bujjhitar
    1. one who becomes enlightened or recognises Nd1 457 = Ps i.174 = Vism 209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha)
    agent noun of bujjhati
    Buḍḍha
    1. aged, old DN ii.162 Ja i.164 (˚pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara Dhp-a ii.239 (variant reading K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara)
    for vuḍḍha, past participle of vṛdh ‣See vaḍḍhati
    Buddha1
    adjective
    1. (a) understood SN i.35 = 60 (su-dub-buddha very difficult to understand)
    • (b) having attained enlightenment, wise AN iv.449 Pv-a 16 (buddh’ ādayo) 60 (= ariya). Usually applied to the Bhagavant (Gotama) MN i.386 (one of the adjective describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta) Snp 993 The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e.g. Snp 622 Snp 643 Snp 646
    med
  • passive past participle of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sanskrit buddha
  • Buddha2
    1. A. one who has attained enlightenment; a man superior to all other beings, human divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At AN ii.38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataṁ etc., vimokkh’ antikaṁ etaṁ buddhānaṁ Bhagavantānaṁ bodhiyā mūle … paññatti Nd1 458 & Ps; i.174
    • There are 2 sorts of B’s, viz Pacceka-buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers ‣See bala and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Mil 106). In this function the B’s are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord Buddho so Bhagavā MN i.235 Pv ii.960 = Dhp-a iii.219-Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (AN ii.9 cp. Mil 106) These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh'-uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha-pamukha bhikkhu-sangha Snp p. 111 Snp 81 Snp 386 Mil 212 DN-a i.242 Pv-a 19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to ‣See him is eagerly sought (Vin ii.155 SN i.210 DN-a i.248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general ‣See e.g. Vin iii.24f. Dhp 182f. 194, 195 (= sammā sambuddhā Dhp-a iii.252), 387 Ja i.51 Ja iii.128 Vism 442 (pubba-buddhā) Pv-a 20
    • The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the following 6 classes titthiyā, pakati-sāvakā, mahā-sāvaka, agga-sāvakā pacceka-buddhā, buddhā ‣See Vism 411
    • B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world-age, Gotama by family-name. He is said to be the 25th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) SN i.109 SN i.140 SN iv.52
    • Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period ‣See also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D; ii.5–⁠7 SN ii.5
    1. -11; cp. Thag 1, 491 Ja ii.147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake-bites (Vin ii.110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpankara, Kondañña, Mangala Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa-The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā q.v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven ‣See Buddhavaṁsa. He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni ‣See D; ii.17 sq and similar passages; cp. Ud 48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth MN iii.118 sq
    • The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaṁsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak’ aṭṭhakathā
    • Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (M i.169 Vin i.6 a rather different account AN ii.20) That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (M i.171 Vin i.9 Snp 558)
    • Like all the other Sammā-sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaṁ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: SN i.210 DN ii.156 Snp 83 Snp 513 Snp 1133f. Mil 96
    • The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (SN i.47 SN iii.84 loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo Mil 70) He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas and men SN i.50 SN i.132 SN i.206 SN i.301 AN i.142 AN ii.33 AN iii.65 Snp 157f. He is the ādicca-bandhu kinsman of the sun SN i.186 and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) AN i.76 AN iii.150 and to the lion (sīha) the king of the animals AN iii.122 He is buddha-vīra Thag 1, 47 the refuge of all beings MN ii.305 DN-a i.233 Mil 95 further appaṭipuggala SN i.134 his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self-conquest, to security deliverance MN i.235 Snp 454 Snp 993 DN-a i.230 He himself is not to be reborn (antima-sarīro with his last body) SN i.210 he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow AN iv.258 SN iii.65 full of compassion for all beings SN i.25 SN i.51 MN ii.100 he is bhisakko the physician AN iv.340
    • magga-ññu, magga-vidū, maggakovido SN iii.66
    • Under Buddh’ anussati (Vism 198 sq. we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaṁ Sammāsambuddho vijjā-caraṇa-sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa-damma-sārathi Satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho Bhagavā (DN i.49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) “Buddha” is explained with the formula as found at Ps i.174 Nd1 457. More explicitly with various epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon e.g. MN i.179 SN ii.69 SN v.343
    • A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self-control and virtue Mil 225
    1. ˚ānubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Thag 1, 679 1246 (translated “who next to our Great Waked one was awoke”)
    2. ˚ānubhāva the majestic power of the B. Pv-a 38 Pv-a 171
    3. ˚ānussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.˚, dhamma˚, sangha˚, sīla˚ cāga˚, devatā˚) DN iii.250 DN iii.280 Vism 132 (where followed by upasamânussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti-sambojjh'anga ‣See anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati)
    4. ˚aṅkura a nascent (lit sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B Dhp-a i.83
    • ˚antara a Buddha-interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Mil 3 Dhp-a i.201 (the 4 last ones); iv.201 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 191
    • ˚ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in ˚pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B Ja iii.405 Vism 143 (here as ubbegā-pīti)
    • ˚ūpaṭṭhāna B

      • worship Dhp-a i.101 Pv-a 93
      • ˚uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B was born (opposite buddh’ antara), a Buddha-period Ja i.59 Mhbv.12 Vb-a 50 Thag-a 28
      • ˚kara making a B. bringing about Buddhahood Ja i.20
      • ˚kāraka = ˚kara Mhbv.9
      • ˚kāla the time of a B. Vism 91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) -kula Buddha-clan Snp-a 532 (B
      • pitā, ˚mātā ibid.)
      • ˚kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121, cp. Ja i.48
      • ˚khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism 414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta visayakkhetta ‣See khetta)
      • ˚gata directed or referring to the B. SN i.211 (sati) Dhp 296
      • ˚guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha Ja i.27 Ja ii.147 Bu ii.177; Mbhv.80; Kp-a 121 (cp. A
      • past participle )
      • ˚cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i.e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin i.6 Thag-a 2 ‣See discussed in detail at Nd1 359 = Nd2 2354; cp. cakkhu
      • ˚ñāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73 Journal of the Pali Text Society 1887, 40) Bu i.64 (appameyya); x.5 (cuddasa) -dhamma Buddhahood Mil 276
      • plural condition or attributes of a B. Ja i.20 referred to as 6 at Nd1 143 Nd2 466 (bhāgī channaṁ ˚ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Mil 105 Mil 285 Kern (Manual & Grundriss; iii.8, p. 63 gives (after Lal. Vist. 183, 343) the following 18 āveṇikadharmas (“extraordinary qualities”) as such: (1) ‣Seeing all things past, (2) present, (3)
      • future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7 firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness -pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer Dhp-a ii.225
      • ˚pasanna finding one’s happiness, or believing in the B. Vin iv.39
      • ˚putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Mil 143 cp. SN iii.83: puttā Buddhassa orasā
      • ˚bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paññā˚) Bu; i.3
      • ˚bījaṅkura a
      • future B. Bu ii.71
      • ˚bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment Ja i.14 Ja i.147 (abuddhabhāva un-buddhahood, of Devadatta) DN-a i.1
      • ˚bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bu ii.175
      • ˚manta mystic verses of a B. DN-a i.248
      • ˚māmaka devotedly attached to the B. Dhp-a i.206 (+ Dhamma˚, Sangha˚)
      • ˚rakkhita saved by the B (proper name) Snp-a 534 (+ Dhamma˚)
      • ˚rasmi (
      • plural ˚iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours Ja i.501 Snp-a 132 Mhbv.6, 15, 38 Vv-a 207 Dhs-a 13
      • ˚rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism 228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162 Divy 166; Buddha-nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.)
      • ˚līḷha (& ˚līḷhā); deportment ease, grace of a Buddha Ja i.54 Mhbv.39 Dhp-a i.33 Dhp-a ii.41
      • ˚vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Mil 17 Kp-a 13 Snp-a 274 331
      • ˚visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha-khetta) Dhp-a i.33 Dhp-a ii.199 Snp-a 154 228 -veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha’s teaching Snp-a 15 331
      • ˚sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dhp 368 Dhp 381 -sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are Dhp-a i.5
      = buddha1
    Buddhaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. in compound dvangula-buddhikā feminine possessing insight as much as 2 finger-breadths Vv-a 96

        • The ˚ka belongs to the whole compound
        from buddha
    Buddhatā
    feminine
    1. enlightenment, wisdom Dhp-a iv.228 Thag-a 4 (Buddha-subuddhatā)
    • cp. buddhatta
    abstract from buddha
    Buddhati
    1. to obstruct, withhold etc. ‣See pali˚
    Buddhatta
    neuter
    1. state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood Ja iii.363 (sabbadhammānaṁ b.); Vism 209 (buddhattā Buddho) Mhbv.12. cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta
    abstract from buddha
    Buddhi
    feminine
    1. wisdom, intelligence DN iii.165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b cāga etc.) Ja iii.369 Ja v.257 Mil 349 Sdhp 263. The reference Vism 439 should be read vuddhi for b˚
    1. ˚carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism 104 (= paññavā)
    2. ˚sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom Pv-a 39
    from budh; cp. Classical Sanskrit buddhi
    Buddhika
    adjective
    1. intelligent, in compounds ; unintelligent & sa˚; possessed of wisdom Mil 76
    —˚) [from buddhi
    Buddhimant
    adjective
    1. possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin ii.195 Ja v.257 Mil 21 Mil 294 Pv-a 131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña-jātika)
    from buddhi
    Bunda
    1. the root of a tree Abhp 549
    Vedic budhna
    Bundika
    1. in compound ˚ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin ii.149 Vin iv.40 357
    Bubbuḷa
    (& Bubbula)
    1. a bubble. On similes cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 117
    • Usually of a waterbubble udaka˚ SN iii.141 AN iv.137 Ja v.216 Mil 117 Vism 109 Dhp-a iii.209 Vb-a 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at Ja i.68 (of cooking gruel)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit budbuda
    Bubbuḷaka
    1. = bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble Dhp-a iii.166 Mil 118
    • the iris of the eye Thag 2, 395 (cp. Morris, in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 89, but according to Thag-a 259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.)
    Bubhukkhita
    1. wishing to eat, hungry Ja ii.14 Ja v.70 Mil 66 Dāvs iii.32
    past participle of bubhukkhati, Desidentical of bhuñjati
    Būḷha
    1. array of troops Ja i.387
    for vūḷha, cp. Sanskrit vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q.v.
    Būha
    1. ‣See vyūha. Beluva & Beluva;
    Beluva
    Beḷuva;
    1. the Vilva tree Aegle marmelos MN i.108 MN ii.6 Ja iv.363 Ja iv.368 Ja vi.525 560
    2. wood of the Vilva tree SN i.22 DN ii.264 Mhbv.31
      1. ˚pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva Ja v.74
      • ˚paṇḍu(-vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to Snp-a 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka ‣See Vism 392 (attributed to Pañcasikha) Dhp-a i.433 (of Māra; variant reading veḷuvadaṇḍa-vīṇā); iii.225 (of P.) Snp-a 393 (variant reading veluva˚) -laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118 -salāṭuka the unripe fruit of the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi SN i.150 = AN iv.170 = Sn p. 125
      the guṇa-form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diaeretic form of Sanskrit *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is Pali bella
    Bella
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) Ja iii.77 (Commentary beluva); vi.578. Also in doubtful passage at Ja iii.319 (variant reading mella, phella)
      = beluva, q.v.
    Bojjha
    neuter
    1. a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Nett 20
    originally gerundive of bujjhati or bodheti
    Bojjhaṅga
    1. a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumerated at several places, e.g. at DN iii.106 where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhangas and ariya aṭṭhangika magga, 37 in all The same list we find at Divy 208
    • The 7 b. (frequently also called; sambojjhaṅgā are sati, dhamma-vicaya viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (Dhs-a 217 cp. Expositor ii.294)
    • DN ii.79 DN ii.83 DN ii.120 DN ii.303 DN iii.101 DN iii.128 DN iii.284 MN i.11 MN i.61 MN ii.12 MN iii.85 MN iii.275 SN i.54 SN v.82 SN v.110 AN i.14 iv.23 Nd1 14 45, 171 (˚kusala), 341; Kvu i.158 Dhs 358 528, 1354 Vb 199f. 227 sq.; Vism 160 Mil 340 Dhp-a i.230 Vb-a 120 310 Thag-a 27 50, 160 They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship viz. the 30 above-mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā indriyesu gutta-dvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā jāgariy’ ânuyoga, sati-sampajaññaṁ ‣See e.g. Nd1 14 Nd2 s.v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla; cp. Thag 1, 161 162 Thag 2, 21 (maggā nibbāna-pattiyā) Dhs-a 217 (bodhāya saṁvattantī ti bojjhangā etc.; also defined as “bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango sen’ angarath’ ang’ ādayo viya) They are also called the paribhoga-bhaṇḍāni or “insignia” of the Buddha Mil 330
    1. ˚kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism 248
    bodhi + anga; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bodhyanga, e.g. Lal. Vist. 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208
    Bodha1
    1. form is sambodha = bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship DN iii.54 (variant reading sam˚) Dhs-a 217 in phrase bodhāya maggo Ja i.67 Mil 244 Mil 289 and in bodha-pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi˚) Snp-a 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing soothing) Thag 1, 342
    • bodhaṅgama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Nett 31, 83 (variant reading bojjh˚)
    from budh; the usual
    Bodha2
    1. ‣See pali˚;
    Bodhana
    neuter
    1. knowing Mil 168 (cp. SN v.83)
    2. adjective enlightening, teaching Bu 26, 22 (pacchima-jana˚)
    from bodheti
    Bodhanīya
    adjective
    1. capable of being enlightened, worthy to be taught Bu 5, 31 ‣See also bodhaneyya
    gerundive from bodheti
    Bodhaneyya
    adjective
    1. capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bu 2, 195 (jana) Mil 169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combination bodhaneyya-bandhavo the (Buddha’s) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367 Ja v.335
    from bodheti ‣See bodhanīya
    Bodhi1
    feminine
    1. (supreme knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (‣ See also sambodhi & sammā-sambodhi) MN i.356 MN ii.95 = DN iii.237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiṁ) DN iii.159 (anuttaraṁ pappoti bodhiṁ) 165 (identical) SN i.103 SN i.196 SN v.197f. AN ii.66 Vb-a 310 (definition). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhaṅgā or sambojjhaṅgā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi-pācanā dhammā ‣See under compounds. & cp. bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā. The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who “catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta-bojjhange yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammā-sambodhiṁ abhisambujjhiṁsu” SN v.160 The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya-saccāni) are grasped SN v.423 Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi-paribbājaka proper name Ja v.229f.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi Ja iii.348 pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa Ja iv.114 paccekasambodhi Snp-a 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment Dpvs 2.61
    2. ˚pakkhika = pakkhiya (& pakkhika; , e. g AN iii.70 = 300 Thag 1, 900 cp. bodha˚) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumerated under bojjhanga (q.v.) They are enumerated & discussed at Vism 678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. Vb 244 249; Nett 31, 197 240, 261; and in the Commentaries, e.g. Ja i.275 iii.290; v.483 Dhp-a i.230 When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaññā; dukkha˚, anatta˚, pahāna˚, virāga˚, nirodhasaññā thus at Nett 112, 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b
    • p
    • dhammā At AN iii.70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā and jāgariy’ ânuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general At SN v.227 SN v.239f. (so read in Vb preface xiv. for 327 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh indriyaṁ, viriy˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññ˚. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi-p-dhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rhys Davids’s preface to the Vb edition, past participle xiv
    • xvi. Of Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriṁśad-bodhi-pakṣān dharmān amukhī-kṛtya pratyekāṁ bodhiṁ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāṁs tān dharmān Bhagavān saṁprakāśayati sma)
    • ˚paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism 116
    • ˚pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adjective leading to enlightenment Bu ii.121 sq.; cp. i.11 (cp. Ja i.22). It is a late term The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i.e. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚, viriya˚, khanti˚; sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā˚
    • ˚satta (1) a “bodhi-being,” i.e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny The “amhākaṁ Bodhisatto,” or “our Bodhisatta” of the Buddhist Texts (e.g. Vism 419 (imasmiṁ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta-bhūto) DN-a i.259 refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the
    • future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or; the B. at very many places throughout the Canon ‣See e.g. MN i.17 MN i.163 240 SN ii.5 SN iii.27 SN iv.233 SN v.263 SN v.281 SN v.317 AN ii.130 iii.240; iv.302, 439; Vism 15, 116, 499 Snp-a 52 (pacceka˚), 67, 72.
    • name of the author of a Pali grammar used by Kaccāyana (not extant) ‣See Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Oriental Congress, Vol. i.290
    • ˚sambhāra (
    • plural ) conditions (literally materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi Ja i.1 Ja vi.595 Mbvs 12
    from budh, cp. Vedic bodhin-manas having an attentive mind; RV v.75, 5; viii.82, 18
    Bodhi2
    1. the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles from Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī-nābhi mahā-bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi (e.g. Ja iv.228 Vism 403)
    • Vism 72, 299, 342 Dhp-a i.105 Thag-a 62 Vb-a 473
    1. ˚aṅgaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DN-a i.191 Vism 188 (˚vatta) Vb-a 349
    • ˚tala “Bodhifoundation,” i.e. the place or ground of the B. tree otherwise bodhi-maṇḍa Ja i.105 Mhbv.9 Dhp-a i.117
    • ˚pakka fruit of the Bo tree Ja iv.229
    • ˚pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv.1
    • ˚pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv.81
    • ˚maṇḍa (for ˚maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or “throne”), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and post-canonical literature. Bu ii.65, 183; Vism 203 Ja iv.228 Ja iv.232 Mhbv.79 Snp-a 2 30, 225, 258, 281, 340, 391, 441 Dhp-a i.86 Dhp-a ii.69 iv.72 Thag-a 2 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392
    • ˚maha feast in honour of the Bo tree Ja iv.229
    • ˚mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree Snp-a 32 391; cp. Bodhiyā mūle Nd1 172 458 = Ps i.174
    • ˚rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin i.1
    = bodhi1
    Bodhetar
    1. awakener, enlightener Nd1 457; Ps i.174; Vism 209
    agent noun from bodheti
    Bodheti
    1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten SN i.170 Bu ii.195.
    2. aorist bodhesi Vism 209 abodhayi Bu ii.196 & bodhayi Bu v.31; xxv.6 inf bodhuṁ ‣See bujjhati, & bodhetuṁ Ja iv.393 grd bodhabba DN ii.246 AN iv.136
    3. to make aware (of), to make known Ja vi.412 Snp-a 444
    causative of bujjhati
    Bondi
    1. body Pv iv.332 Ja i.503 Ja ii.160 Ja iii.117 Pv-a 254
    etymology doubtful, one proposed by Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 207 derives it from bandh = bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint “probably cognate with English body” cp. Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under fidelia. The originally meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, “trunk.” It certainly is a dialectical word
    Bya˚
    1. ; etc. (byā˚, byu˚) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya˚; etc
    Byagā
    3rd singular aorist of vi + gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Thag 1, 170
    Byaggha
    1. a tiger Ja ii.110 Sdhp 388. feminine byagghinī Mil 67
    2. cp. Sanskrit vyāghra
    Byañjana
    neuter
    1. sign, mark ‣See vyañjana
    2. the letter, as compared with attha the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Mil 18 Mil 345 Nett 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana
    cp. Sanskrit vyañjana
    Byatta
    adjective
    1. experienced, learned Mil 21
    cp. Pali vyatta; Sanskrit vyakta
    Byattatā
    feminine
    1. experience, learning Mil 349 ‣See also pari˚;
    from byatta
    Byanti˚
    1. ; in ˚bhavati, bhāva etc ‣See vyanti˚;
    Byapagata
    1. departed, dispelled Mil 225
    = vy-apa-gata
    Byappatha
    1. busy, active. Thus Kern, but the translation is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages Vin iv.2 where combined with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning “mode of speech,” and at Snp 961 where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd; 1 472 to a mode of speech & explained by Snp-a 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation from pṛ; with vyā˚ can hardly be claimed to be correct for Buddhaghosa’s conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy + ā + patha (cp. compounds vacana-patha & vāda-patha), thus “way of speaking.”
    so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. the word is a distortion from *vyāpṛta (for which usually Pali vyāvaṭa of vy + ā + pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active
    Byamha
    1. a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523 As vyamha at Ja iv.464
    cp. vyamha
    Byasana
    1. ‣See vyasana
    Byā
    indeclinable
    1. intensive particle: “just so, certainly, indeed” only in phrase "evaṁ byā kho” Vin ii.26 Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27 MN i.130 (evaṁ vyā kho ti evaṁ viya kho Commentary ), 257
    distorted from iva = eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya → *veyyā → *vyā → byā
    Byādhi
    1. sickness, disease AN i.146 Kvu ii.457 Mil 351
    cp. Sanskrit vyādhi; literally “upset” from vy + ā + dhā
    Byādhita
    1. afflicted with disease Thag 1, 73 Mil 168
    past participle from byādheti
    Byādheti
    1. to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble SN i.120 Thag 1, 46 1211. passive byādhiyati Kvu ii.457 (
    2. aorist byādhiyiṁsu).
    3. past participle byādhita
    4. causative from byādhi
    Byāpajjha
    1. trouble, opposite ; relief MN i.10
    2. malevolence; negative ; benevolence Vin i.3 MN i.38 cp. avyāpajjha SN iv.296 SN iv.371
    from vy-ā-pad
    Byāpanna
    1. malevolent Sdhp 70; otherwise vy˚; , e.g. SN ii.168 (˚citta)
    from vyāpajjati
    Byāpāda
    1. ill-will, malevolence, one of the 5 “obstructions” (āvaraṇāni ‣See e.g. SN v.94 Nd2 379); and of the 4 “bonds” (kāya-ganthā ‣See e.g. Nd1 98)
    • M i.434 SN i.99 Iti 119 Ps i.31; ii.12 Nd1 149 207, 386
    1. ˚vitakka a malevolent or angry thought MN i.11 SN i.203 SN ii.151 SN iii.93 SN v.417 Nd1 501; Kvu 113
    from vy + ā + pad
    Byābādha
    1. evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta˚, para˚, ubhaya˚, or against oneself against others, & both- MN i.416 SN iv.159 (vyā˚), 339
    vy + ā + bādh
    Byābādheti
    1. to injure, hurt, oppress SN v.393 (na kiñci byābādhemi tasaṁ vā thāvaraṁ vā)
    denominative from byābādha
    Byābhaṅgī
    feminine
    1. a pole for carrying burdens Thag 1, 623
    2. a flail SN iv.201
    vy + ā + bhañj
    Byāma
    1. [cp. Vedic & Pali vyāma cp. Śatap. Br.; i.2, 5, 14 a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase ˚ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha Ja i.12 Ja i.90 Bu i.45 Mil 75 Vv-a 213
    Byāruddha
    1. obstructed, opposed, hindered Snp 936 (aññam-aññehi b. in enmity with each other; = paṭiviruddha Nd1 408), 938 (412 identical Snp-a 566 = āhata-citta)
    past participle of vy + ā + rundh; reading by˚ in Nd1; vy˚ in Snp & Snp-a; Burmese variant
    Byāvaṭa
    covered, adorned with Vv-a 213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; variant reading byāgata).
    1. the meaning (wrongly given as “adorned”) is to be deleted. The reading at Vv-a 213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana-vyāvaṭa is to be preferred ‣See under vyāvaṭa
    vy + ā + vṛ
    Byāsatta
    1. attached to, clinging to, in compound ˚mānasa possessed with longing Dhp 47 (= sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga-mānasa Dhp-a i.361), 287 (cp. Dhp-a iii.433 lagganatāya sattamānasa)
    past participle of vy + ā + sañj, cp. āsatta1
    Byūha
    1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DN-a i.85 Three formations of troops are mentioned at Ja ii.404 & 406, viz. paduma-vyūha (lotus formation), cakka˚ (wheel form; n), sakaṭa˚ (cart formn)
    2. a heap, collection, in byūhaṁ karoti to put into a (well-arranged) heap Mil 2 (kacavaraṁ). 3. a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac Vin iv.271 (byūhan nāma yen’ eva pavisanti ten’ eva nikkhamanti)
    cp. Sanskrit & Pali vyūha from vi + ; vah
    Byūhati
    1. to stand in array (like a troop) Vv-a 104 (byūhanto, variant reading brahmanto)
    denominative from byūha
    Brahant

    adjective

    1. very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; nominativesingular brahā Snp 410 Snp 550 Thag 1, 31 Ja iii.117 (= dīgha Commentary ); iv.111 (su˚); 647; Pv iv.310 (of a huge tree), acc singular brahantaṁ AN iii.346 Vv-a 182 nominative plural also brahantā Vv 524 (= mahantā Vv-a 224 of the Yama-dūtā or Death’s giant messengers).
    2. feminine brahatl Ja v.215 (= uḷārā Commentary ); also given as name of a plant Abhp 588

      • Superl. brahaṭṭha (= Sanskrit barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar → bra cp. Sanskrit paribarhanā → Pali paribrahaṇa) in ˚puppha a large or fully developed blossom Ja v.416
      1. ˚arañña woodlands, vast forest AN i.187
      • ˚vana the wild wood, immense forest AN i.152 AN iii.44 Vv 633 Ja v.215
      • ˚sukha (-vihāra- jjhāna-jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Mil 226 (in characterisation of the term “brāhmaṇa”). Brahma & Brahma
      cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Avestan bərəƶat high; Arm. barjr high; Old Irish brī, Welsh. bre mountain; Gothic baurgs “borough,” Old High German etc. burg “burgh,” i.e. fortress German berg mountain The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh is used in explains of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha = vuddhiyaṁ Vv-a 278 brahā = vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry
    Brahma
    Brahmā
    1. -I. Brahman neuter cp. Vedic bráhman
    2. neuter prayer; nominative sg bráhma
      1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) AN ii.184 (brahmappatta). In compounds. brahma˚
      2. Vedic text, mystic formula prayer DN-a i.244 (brahmaṁ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo)
      3. II. Brahmā cp. Vedic brahmán, masculine, one who prays or chants hymns, nominative singular Brahmā

        1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) DN i.18 iii.30, also called Mahābrahmā (DN i.235f. 244 sq. iii.30 Iti 15 Vism 578 Dhp-a ii.60); and Sahampati (Vin i.5 DN ii.157 SN i.136f.; Vism 201; Kp-a 171 Snp-a 56) and Sanaṅkumāra (DN ii.226 DN iii.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa ‣See Kvu 207, 208.
        2. nominative Brahmā Vin i.5 DN ii.46 Ja vi.486 Mil 224 Vism 2 (brahmānaṁ atibrahmā, epithet of Buddha Bhagavā) Snp-a 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); gen ablative Brahmano DN ii.209 Vism 205 Snp-a 177 instr Brahmanā DN i.252 DN ii.239 Dhp 105 Dhp 230; Vism 48, 405 Dhp-a ii.60
        3. accusative Brahmānaṁ DN ii.37 voc. Brahme SN i.138
        4. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma-loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); nominative singular brahmā SN i.142 (Baka brahmā) MN i.327 (identical) AN iv.83 Pv-a 138 (˚devatā for brahma˚?) genitive ablative brahmuno SN i.142 SN i.155 instrumental brahmunā DN iii.147 DN iii.150 & brahmanā Pv-a 98 voc. singular brahme MN i.328
        5. plural nominative brahmāno Mil 13 Mil 18 (where Ja vi.486 has Mahā-brahmā in identical passage) Dhs-a 195 gen brahmānaṁ Vism 2; Mhbv.151
        6. paccekabrahmā a brahmā by himself SN i.149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha)
        7. sabrahmaka
        8. adjective including the brahma gods DN i.62 AN ii.70 Vin i.11 DN-a i.174
          1. III. brahma adjective-noun cp. brahmā Ii.2; Vedic brahma˚ & Sanskrit brāhma
            1. holy, pious, brahmanic
            2. masculine a holy person, a brahmin-
            3. adjective Ja ii.14 (br vaṇṇa = seṭṭha vaṇṇa Commentary ); Kp-a 151 (brahma-cariyaṁ brahmaṁ cariyaṁ).
            4. masculine accusative brahmaṁ Snp 285 voc brahme (frequent) Snp 1065 (= brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaṁ Snp-a 592) Ja ii.346 Ja iv.288 Ja vi.524 Ja vi.532 Pv i.129 (= brāhmaṇa Pv-a 66)
            5. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal best, very great ‣See especially in compounds., AN i.132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; iv.76
            6. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) DN i.96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv ii.613 (mantaṁ brahmacintitaṁ) = brāhmaṇānaṁ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaṁ Pv-a 97 Pv-a 98)

              • Note. The compound form of all specified bases (I. II. III.) is brahma˚; , and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the compound in question belongs
              1. ˚attabhāva existence as a brahma god Dhp-a iii.210
              • ˚ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.155
              • ˚uttama sublime Dhs-a 192
              • ˚uppatti birth in the brahma heaven SN i.143
              • ˚ūposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha practice of the uposatha abstinence AN i.207
              • ˚kappa like Brahmā Thag 1, 909
              • ˚kāya divine body DN iii.84 Ja i.95
              • ˚kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie
              • past participle 191, 193, 197) DN i.220 ii.69 AN iii.287 AN iii.314 AN iv.40 AN iv.76 AN iv.240 AN iv.401 Thag 1, 1082 Vism 225, 559; Kp-a 86
              • ˚kutta a work of Brahmā DN iii.28 DN iii.30 (cp. similarly yaṁ mama, pitrā kṛtaṁ devakṛtaṁ na tu brahmakṛtaṁ tat Divy 22) ‣See also under kutta
              • ˚giriya (
              • plural ) name of a certain class of beings possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Mil 191
              • ˚ghaṭa (= ghaṭa2) company or assembly of Brahmans Ja vi.99
              • ˚cakka the excellent wheel, i.e. the doctrine of the Buddha MN i.69 AN ii.9 AN ii.24 AN iii.417 AN v.33 Iti 123 Ps ii.174 Vb-a 399 (in detail)
              • ˚cariya ‣See separate article
              • ˚cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin ii.236 Vin iii.44 SN i.5 SN i.60 SN ii.210 SN iii.13 SN iv.93 AN ii.44 MN iii.117 Snp 695 Snp 973 Ja v.107 Ja v.382 Vv 3411 (
              • accusative plural brahmacāraye for ˚cārino) Dhp 142 Mil 75 DN-a i.72 (brahmaṁ seṭṭhaṁ ācāraṁ caratī ti) Dhp-a iii.83 SN iv.181 Pug 27 36
              • ˚cintita divinely inspired Pvi i.613 = Vv 6316 (of manta); explanation at Pv-a 97 as given above III.3, differs from that at Vv-a 265 where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak’ ādīhi cintitaṁ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṁ, i.e. thought out by the divine ‣Seer Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa1 seen with insight
              • ˚ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) DN iii.81 83 MN ii.148 cp. dhammaja
              • ˚jacca belonging to a brahman family Thag 1, 689
              • ˚jāla divine, excellent net name of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism 30 Vb-a 432 516 Kp-a 12, 36, 97 Snp-a 362 434
              • ˚daṇḍa “the highest penalty,” a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence) Vin ii.290 DN ii.154 Dhp-a ii.112 cp. Kern Manual p. 87
              • ˚dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā DN iii.81 DN iii.83
              • ˚deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) DN i.87 (= seṭṭha-deyyaṁ DN-a i.246 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.108 note: the first part of the compound (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves But brahma as the first part of a compound never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally “a full gift."-cp. identical passage Divy 620 where it does not need to mean “gift to brahmans,” as Index suggests) DN i.114 Ja ii.166 = Dhp-a iii.125 (here a gift to a brahmin, it is true, but not with that meaning) Ja vi.486 (sudinnaṁ +); Mhbv.123. We think that both Kern (who at Toevoegselen s.v. unjustly remarks of Buddhaghosa’s explanation as “unjust”) and Fick (who at "Sociale Gliederung” p. 126 translates it as “gift to a Brahman”) are wrong, at least their (and others’) interpretation is doubtful
              • ˚devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka Pv-a 138 (so read for brahmā˚)
              • ˚nimantanika “addressing an invitation to a brahma-god,” title of a Suttanta MN i.326f. quoted at Vism 393
              • ˚nimmita created by Brahmā DN iii.81 DN iii.83
              • ˚patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods MN i.386 AN ii.184
              • ˚patti attainment of the highest good SN i.169 SN i.181 SN iv.118
              • ˚patha the way to the Brahmā world or the way to the highest good SN i.141 AN iii.346 Thag 1, 689 cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77
              • ˚parāyana devoted to Brahmā Mil 234
              • ˚parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods DN iii.260 MN i.330 SN i.155 AN iv.307
              • ˚pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., name of the gods of the lowest Rūpa-brahmaloka SN i.145 SN i.155 MN i.330 Kvu 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194
              • ˚purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; ˚deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br

                • pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel
                • locative cit.) Kvu 207 (read ˚purohita for ˚parohita!)
                • ˚pphoṭana a-pphoṭana; ā + ph.
                1. a Brahmaapplause divine or greatest applause Dhp-a iii.210 (cp Mil 13 Ja vi.486)
                2. ˚bandhu “brahma-kinsman,” a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Thag 2, 251 Ja vi.532 Thag-a 206 cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140
                3. ˚bhakkha ideal or divine food SN i.141
                • ˚bhatta a worshipper of Br Ja iv.377f. -bhavana Br

                  • world or abode of Br. Nd1 448
                  • ˚bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha DN iii.84 MN i.111 MN iii.195 MN iii.224 SN iv.94 AN v.226 Iti 57 said of Arahants AN ii.206 SN iii.83
                  • ˚yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp brahma-patha) SN v.5 Ja vi.57 (Commentary ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya˚)
                  • ˚yāniya leading to Brahmā DN i.220
                  • ˚loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction ‣See e.g. Vism 415 = KhA 121) the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven
                  • It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa-brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa˚). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) AN i.227f.; v.59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu)
                  • The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi-parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha Dhamma, & Sangha, and their observance of the precepts
                  • See e.g. DN iii.112 SN i.141 SN i.155 SN i.282 AN iii.332 AN iv.75 AN iv.103 Snp 508 Snp 1117 Ja ii.61 Ps i.84 Pv ii.1317 Dhs 1282 Vb 421 Vism 199, 314, 367 372, 390, 401, 405, 408, 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv.54 83, 103 sq., 160 Vb-a 68 Pv-a 76 Vb-a 167 433 437, 510 ‣See also Compendium 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit literature Lal. Vist. 171. The Br
                  • l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: Dhp-a i.270
                  • yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.’s heaven, expression like “as far as the end of the world” MN i.34 SN v.265 SN v.288 —˚ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven DN ii.196 AN v.342 Snp 139 Ja ii.61 Kvu 114. —˚ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Snp 139 —˚parāyana the Br
                  • loka as ultimate goal Ja ii.61 Ja iii.396 —˚sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods AN iv.135f. -yāna the best vehicle SN v.5 (+ dhammayāna)
                  • ˚vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, combined with -vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at DN i.114 DN i.115 MN ii.167 cp. DN-a i.282: ˚vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra-sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; ˚vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī -vāda most excellent speech Vin i.3
                  • ˚vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven DN iii.28 DN iii.29 Iti 15 Vism 108
                  • ˚vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity ‣See on these meditations Dialogues of the Buddha i.298). There are 4 such “divine states,” viz. mettā karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā ‣See Vism 111 Dhs-a 192 and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs translation 65; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit same, e. g Divy 224 DN ii.196 DN iii.220 (one of the 3 vihāra’s dibba˚, brahma˚, ariya˚) Thag 1, 649 Ja i.139 (˚vihāre bhāvetvā … brahmalok’ ûpaga), ii.61 Dhs 262 Vism 295 sq. (˚niddesa), 319
                  • ˚veṭhana the head-dress of a brahmin Snp-a 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma˚ = brahma IIi.1)
                  • ˚sama like Brahmā Snp 508 Snp-a 318 325 Dhs-a 195
                  • ˚ssara “heavenly sound, a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities ‣See enumerated under bindu) DN ii.211 = 227 Ja i.96 Ja v.336
                  from bṛh ‣See brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle than with reference to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i.e. holy enthusiasm). On etymology ‣See Osthoff, "Bezzenberger’s Beiträge” xxiv.142 sq. (= Mir bricht charm, spell: Old Icelandic bragr poetry)
    Brahmaka
    adjective only in compound sa˚; with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q.v.
    Brahmacariya
    neuter
    1. a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaṁ cariyaṁ brahmāṇaṁ vā cariyaṁ = brahmacariyaṁ Kp-a 151); especially in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering Vin i.12 19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma DN i.84 DN i.155 DN ii.106 DN iii.122f. 211 MN i.77 147, 193, 205, 426, 463, 492, 514; ii.38; iii.36, 116 SN i.38 SN i.43 SN i.87 SN i.105 SN i.154 SN i.209 SN ii.24 SN ii.29 SN ii.120 SN ii.219 SN ii.278 SN ii.284 (˚pariyosāna); iii.83, 189; iv.51, 104, 110, 126 136 sq., 163, 253, v.7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233 262, 272, 352 AN i.50 AN i.168 AN i.225 AN ii.26 AN ii.44 AN ii.185 AN iii.250 346; iv.311; v.18, 71, 136 Snp 267 Snp 274 (vas-uttama) 566, 655, 1128 Thag 1, 1027 1079 Iti 28 48, 78, 111 Dhp 155 Dhp 156 Dhp 312 Ja iii.396 Ja iv.52 Pv ii.913 Dhp-a iv.42 (vasuttamaṁ) Vb-a 504
    • brahmacariyaṁ vussati to live the religious life AN i.115 (cp. ˚ṁ vusitaṁ in formula under Arahant II. A); ˚assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life AN i.162 ˚ṁ santānetuṁ to continue the good life AN iii.90 Dhp-a i.119
    • komāra˚ the religious training of a well-bred youth AN iii.224 Snp 289
    • abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life sinful living MN i.514 DN i.4 Snp 396 Kp-a 26
    1. ˚antarāya raping Dhp-a ii.52
    • ˚ānuggaha a help to purity AN i.167 AN iv.167 Dhs 1348
    • ˚ūpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires MN iii.116
    • ˚vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life adjective living a pure life AN i.253 Ja iii.393 Kvu 93 Dhp-a i.225
    brahma + cariya
    Brahmacariyaka
    adjective
    1. only in phrase ādi˚ leading to the highest purity of life DN i.189 DN i.191 iii.284 AN iv.166
    from brahmacariya
    Brahmacariyavant
    adjective
    1. leading the religious life, pure, chaste SN i.182 Dhp 267
    from brahmacariya
    Brahmañña
    adjective
    1. brahman, of the brahman rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life DN i.115 (at which passage DN-a i.286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank) MN ii.167 AN i.143 abstract derivation brāhmaññā
    2. neuter higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life DN i.166 Vin iii.44 Ja iv.362 (= brāhmaṇa dhamma Commentary ); brahmañña
    3. neuter DN ii.248
    4. brahmaññā
    5. feminine DN iii.72 DN iii.74 AN i.142 brahmaññattha
    6. neuter SN iii.192 SN v.25f. 195 AN i.260 (brāhmaññattha)
    7. from brāhmaṇa
    Brahmaññatā
    (& brāh˚)
    1. state of a brahman DN iii.145 DN iii.169 Dhp 332 cp. Dhp-a iv.33-negative DN iii.70 DN iii.71
    from brahma or brāhmaṇa
    Brahmaññattha
    1. ‣See brahmañña
    Brahmatta
    neuter
    1. state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vb 337 Vism 301 Vb-a 437 Dhp-a i.110
    • brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm’ attabhāva ‣See under brahma
    abstract from brahma
    Brahmattara
    1. at Ja iii.207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara “even higher than Brahmā,” i.e. unsurpassed, magnificent. Commentary explains by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda
    Brahmavant
    adjective
    1. “having Brahmā,” possessed or full of Brahmā; feminine brahmavatī proper name Vism 434. Brahmanna. brahmannata & brahmannattha; from brahma
    Brāhmañña. brāhmaññatā
    brāhmaññattha;
    1. ‣See brahmañ˚;
    Brāhmaṇa1
    1. a member of the Brahman caste; a Br teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even synonym with arahant
    • On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection ‣See Fick; Sociale Gliederung; especially ch. 8, past participle 117–⁠162
    • Var fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word-play, in Pali definitions are e.g. “sattannaṁ dhammānaṁ bāhitattā brāhmaṇā.” (like definition of bhikkhu) Nd1 86 = Nd2 464a (cp Snp 519); ye keci bho-vādikā Nd1 249 = Nd2 464b brahā-sukhavihāra-jhāna-jhāyin Mil 226 pāpaṁ bāhesuṁ DN iii.94 bāhita-pāpattā brahmin Dhp-a iii.84 ariyā bāhita-pāpattā brahmin DN-a i.244
    • plural brāhmaṇāse Snp 1079 sq
    • Var. ref8 in the Canon to all meanings of the term: DN i.90 DN i.94 DN i.104 DN i.119f. 136 (mahāsālā) 150 (˚dūta), 247; iii.44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of) 147, 170, 258 (˚mahāsālā), 270 MN i.271 (˚karaṇā dhammā), 280; ii.84, 148, 177; iii.60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as brahmin) SN i.47 SN i.54 SN i.94f. 99 (˚kumāra), 117 125, 160 sq.; ii.77, 259; iv.157; v.194 AN i.66 AN i.110 AN i.163 (tevijjā); 166; ii.176; iii.221 sq. (brāhmaṇa-vagga) Iti 57f. 60, 98, 101 Ja iii.194 Ja iv.9 Ja vi.521f. Vb 393f. For brahmin with the meaning “arahant” ‣See also: Vin i.3 Vin ii.156 (br. parinibbuta) Thag 1, 140 221 (brahma-bandhu pure āsiṁ, idāni kho 'mhi brāhmaṇo) Dhp 383f.; Snp passim (e.g. v.142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.) Ja iv.302f. Mil 225 Ten kinds of Brahmin are pronounced to be apetā brahmaññā degraded from brahmanship Ja iv.361f. Different schools of brahmin teachers are enumerated at DN i.237f. (Tevijja Sutta)
    • brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro “the ten inspired ‣Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns”; their names are Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin i.245 DN i.104 AN iii.224 AN iv.61 cp. Vv-a 265
    • feminine brāhmaṇī (n. or adjective) the wife of a brāhmaṇa DN i.193 Ja v.127 (of a purohita or high priest) Dhp-a i.33 Dhp-a iv.176 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 64. Frequently in combination brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e.g. DN i.249 AN i.260 AN ii.23 ‣See pajā
    1. ˚ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas Ja vi.228f. -kumārikā a brahmin young girl Ja iii.93
    • ˚kula a brahmin clan or family Ja ii.85 Ja ii.394 Ja ii.411 Ja iii.147 Ja iii.352 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 61 -gahapatikā priests & laymen (“clerk & yeoman Rhys Davids in S.B.English xi.258) DN ii.178 DN iii.148 DN iii.153 DN iii.170f. SN i.59 SN i.184 AN i.110 Vin i.35 Ja i.83
    • ˚gāma a br village Vin i.197 DN i.87 DN i.127 SN i.111 Ja ii.368 Ja iii.293 iv.276
    • ˚dhamma duty of a brahmin ‣See on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view Ja iv.301f. cp. also Snp-a 312

      1. -325 (br
      • dhammika-suta) & Fick, loc. cit. 124
      • ˚putta son of a brahmin Pv-a 62
      • ˚bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin i.44
      • ˚māṇava a young brahmin Ja iv.391
      • ˚rūpa (in) form of a brahmin Pv-a 63
      • ˚vaḍḍhakī a brahmin carpenter Ja iv.207
      • ˚vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin cp. x.10
      • ˚vācanaka a brahmin disputation some sort of elocution show Ja i.318 Ja iv.391
      • ˚vāṭaka circle of brahmins Dhp-a iv.177 (variant reading ˚vādaka) -vāṇija a brahmin merchant Pv-a 113
      • ˚sacca a brahmanic (i.e. standard, holy) truth AN ii.176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such brahmin
      • saccāni, different from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni)
      from brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, derived from brahmán
    Brāhmaṇa2
    neuter
    1. state of a true brahman, “holiness supreme” Thag 1, 631
    for brahmañña
    Brūti
    1. to say, tell, call; show explain DN i.95 Snp 308f. Dhp 383f.; cp. vi.8 Mil 314 Mil 327
    • Constructed with double
    • accusative or with dat of person &
    • accusative of thing said (cp. Mil 233)
    • ; Forms: Pres. 1st singular brūmi Iti 33 40; SN 1033, 1042 sq. (explained as ācikkhāmi desemi paññāpemi etc. by Nd.) Pv i.23 (= kathemi Pv-a 11) Thag 1, 214 2nd singular brūsi Snp 457 Snp 1032 Snp 1081Ja ii.48 Thag 2, 58 3rd singular brūti Snp 122
    • imperative brūhi Thag 1, 1266 Snp 1018 Snp 1034 Snp 1043 Mil 318
    • preterite abravi Snp 981 Thag 1, 1275 Ja vi.269 Pv ii.964 (variant reading abruvi) Pv-a 264
    • abruvi Ja iii.62 and bravi Ja v.204 3rd singular
    • medium bravittha Vv 5310 (= kathesi Vv-a 240); 1st singular also abraviṁ cp. ii.68; 3rd
    • plural abravuṁ Ja v.112
    brū, Sanskrit bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 1412. explained by Dhtp 366 as “vacane,” by Dhtm 593 as “vācāyaṁ, viyattiyaṁ”
    Brūmeti
    1. to say DN i.95 (explained as “brūmetū ti vadatu” DN-a i.265)
    possible causative from brūti, but as Geiger, Pali Grammar 1412, rightly remarks “not critically sound”
    Brūhana
    neuter
    1. expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intransitive) Mil 313 (Kern,; Toevoegselen s.v. “amusement”) Dhs-a 332 Vv-a 20 (sukha˚). cp. upa˚;
    from brūheti
    Brūhetar
    1. increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation MN i.33 MN i.213
    agent noun of brūheti
    Brūheti
    1. to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically synonym with sevati SN i.198 (saddhaṁ) Snp 324 (kammāni) Dhp 285 (imperative brūhaya = vaḍḍhaya Dhp-a iii.429) Ud 72 Ja i.289 Mil 313 (saddena sotaṁ br.) Pv-a 168 (vaḍḍheti + , for ābhāveti)

      • Cp anu˚, pari˚;
      1. Bh
      cp. Sanskrit bṛṁhayati; from brh2 to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaṁ. cp. brahant

    Bh

    Bha
    indeclinable the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Buddhaghosa’s exegesis of the name Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta Kp-a 109
    • Like ba˚; we often find bha˚; mixed up with pa˚; -see e.g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta = Sanskrit basta, bhisa = Sanskrit bisa, bhusa = Sanskrit buśa
    • bha-kāra the sound (or ending) ˚bha, which at Vin iv.7 is given as implying contempt or abuse among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) ˚ya ‣See ya-kāra. The explanation for this probably is that ˚bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e.g. in ibbha (menial)
    Bhakuṭi
    feminine
    1. superciliousness Snp 485 Ja iii.99 Vism 26 (˚karaṇa) Snp-a 412 Derived bhākuṭika (q.v.) ‣See also bhūkuṭi
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi
    Bhakkha
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. eating, feeding on DN iii.41 (sāka˚ etc.) SN i.69 (pahūta˚ voracious, of fire) 238 (kodha˚) Pv i.91 (lohita-pubba˚) Pug 55 (tiṇa˚) Sdhp 388 (tiṇa˚)
      2. eatable, to be eaten;
      3. neuter ˚ṁ food, prey, in compound appa-bhakkha offering no food Vv 843 (appodaka +)
      4. plural also bhakkhā (eatables Ja ii.14 Ja iv.241 (similar context; = bhojana Commentary ); Pv ii.941 (= āhārā Pv-a 129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase “dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti”; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding partaking of food, especially drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary
      from bhakṣ
    Bhakkhati
    1. to eat, to feed upon Pv ii.25 (pubba-lohitaṁ) Dhp-a ii.57 (vātaṁ). infinitive bhakkhituṁ Ja ii.14 causative bhakkheti in same meaning Ja iv.349 (
    2. aorist bhakkhesuṁ); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhakṣayati Divy 276
    3. bhakṣ from bhaj, cp. Sanskrit bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 explains by “adana”
    Bhaga
    1. luck, lot, fortune, only in compound dub˚; adjective unhappy, unpleasant uncomfortable Iti 90 DN-a i.96 (˚karaṇa)

      • bhaga (in verse “bhagehi ca vibhattavā” in exegesis of word “Bhagava”) at DN-a i.34 read bhava, as read at identical p Vism 210
      Vedic bhaga, bhaj ‣See bhagavant etc.
    Bhagandala
    (& ā)
    1. an ulcer, fistula Vin i.216 272 Nd1 370. Has explanation at Dhtm 204 “bhaganda secane hoti” (“comes from sprinkling” anything to do with our word?
    cp. late Sanskrit bhagandara
    Bhagalavant
    1. name of a mountain Snp-a 197 (locative Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly-hall under the name of Bhagalavatī at DN iii.201 cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196
    2. of uncertain origin
    Bhagavant
    adjective noun
    1. fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as epithet and title “Lord.” Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaṁ Bh. and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency of fanciful exegetic explains of the term & its meaning we mention e.g. those at Nd; 1 142 = Nd2 466; Vism 210 sq. DN-a i.33f. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One
    cp. Vedic bhagavant, from bhaga
    Bhaginī
    feminine
    1. a sister Ja vi.32 The popular etymology of bh. as given at Vb-a 108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. “bhagatī ti bh."-Cpd bhagini-māla a “sister garland” (?) name of a tree Ja vi.270 (= upari-bhaddaka)
    Epic Sanskrit bhaginī
    Bhagga1
    1. broken, in phrases “sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā” Ja i.493 which is applied metaphorically at Dhp 154 (phāsukā = pāpakā?), explained Dhp-a iii.128 (artificially) by “avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā”; further “bhaggā pāpakā dhammā” Vism 211; bhaggā kilesā Mil 44 and bhagga-rāga, ˚dosa etc. (in definition of Bhagavā) at Nd1 142 = Nd2 466 B, quoted at Vism 211
    past participle of bhañj, Sanskrit bhagna
    Bhagga2
    neuter
    1. fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (akāsi ˚ṁ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.)
    from bhaga; cp. Sanskrit & Pali bhāgya
    Bhaggava
    1. potter (?) Ja iii.381 Ja iii.382 in voc. bhaggava masculine & bhaggavī
    2. feminine. The terms are not explained in Commentary, evidently because somewhat obscure According to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. the Sanskrit form in this meaning occurs at MBh. i.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq. MVastu iii.347
    3. cp. Sanskrit *bhārgava, a derived from bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Latin fulgur lightning; German blitzen, blank; Anglo-Saxon blanca white horse, all of the idea of “shining, bright, radiant."-How the meaning “potter” is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra-jātaka, v.6, 7. i.e. the “Jātaka of the potter”
    Bhaggavant
    adjective noun
    1. having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def of “Bhagavā” at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 (“bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto”); with reference to the 4 qualities implied in the word “bhagavā,” which passage is alluded to at Vv-a 231 by remark “bhāgyavantat’ ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā.”
    from bhagga2, cp. Sanskrit & Pali bhāgyavant
    Bhaṅga1
    neuter
    1. hemp coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58 (where combined with sāṇa)
    cp. Sanskrit bhanga, which occurs already Atharva-veda xi.6. 15 ‣See Zimmer. Altindisches Leben 68 also Avestan baṁha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etymology connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda ii.4. 5 = Pali saṇa & sāṇa hemp (= German hanf English hemp) ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. cannabis
    Bhaṅga2
    neuter
    1. (literally) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā˚; a layer of broken-off branches Ja iii.407
    2. (figuratively) breaking up, dissolution, disruption ‣See on form Compendium 25, 66 Ps i.57 sq. (˚ânupassanā insight into disruption, quoted & explained at Vism 640 sq. Vb-a 27 (˚khaṇa); Sdhp 48 78 (āsā˚). cp. vi˚. Bhangana & Bhangaloka;
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bhanga, from bhañj ‣See bhañjati
    Bhaṅgana
    Bhaṅgaloka;
    1. are variant readings of N plural at Nd1 155 for Gaṅgaṇa & Aṅgaṇeka; respectively With misspelling bh → g, cp. bheṇḍaka → geṇḍaka
    2. to bhanga1?
    Bhacca
    adjective
    1. to be carried, kept or sustained AN iii.46 (= a dependant) Ja iv.301 (Commentary bharitabba). As Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. bhacca points out this gāthā “bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so” is a distortion of MBh i.74, 110, where it runs “bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ (or is it bhrastā?)
    gerundive from bhṛ; , cp. Sanskrit bhṛtya
    Bhajati
    1. to associate with (accusative ), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (
    2. accusative ), to love frequently synonym of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the figuratively meaning (bhaj; 2) by sevāyaṁ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saṁsevane (ib. 76), whilst the literally (bhaj; 1) is expressed by vibhājane

      • Sn 958 (bhajato rittaṁ āsanaṁ; genitive sq. ppr. = sevato etc Nd1 466) Dhp 76 Dhp 303 Pug 26 33 Ja i.216 = iii.510 (disā bh.) vi.358; Sdhp 275
      • Pot. bhaje Dhp 76 Dhp 78 and bhajetha Dhp 78 (= payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of
      • imperative ; hence 2nd singular formed like
      • causative as bhajehi Ja iii.148 (Commentary bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar 1392). -
      • gerundive bhajitabba Nd2 s.v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba bh., bhāvetabba)
      bhaj to divide, partake etc. ‣See causative bhājeti & cp. vi˚
    Bhajanā
    feminine
    1. resorting to, familiarity with Pug 20 = Dhs 1326 cp. sam˚ & Dhs translation 345
    fer. bhaj
    Bhajin
    adjective
    1. loving, attached to, worshipping Nd1 142 (in explanation of “Bhagavā”)
    from bhajati
    Bhajjati
    1. to roast, toast Vin iv.264 Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, explained by “pāke.” causative bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin iv.264 Dhp-a i.224 (variant reading K. paccāpeti)
    2. Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Latin frīgo to make dry
    Bhañjaka
    adjective
    1. breaking, spoiling, destroying attha˚; -visaṁvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) Ja iii.499
    from bhañjati
    Bhañjati

    1. (trs. & intransitive) to break Vin i.74 (phāsukā bhañjitabbā ribs to be broken) Dhp 337 (mā bhañji = mā bhañjatu Commentary ). Pv ii.93 (sākhaṁ bhañjeyya = chindeyya Pv-a 114) Pv-a 277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intransitive)
    2. to fold or furl (the lip) oṭṭhaṁ bh. Ja ii.264
    3. (figuratively) to break up, spoil destroy, in atthaṁ bh. to destroy the good SN iv.347 (cp bhañjanaka).

      • past participle bhagga1 (q.v.)
      bhañj, cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Latin frango = Gothic brikan = Old High German brehhan, English break, Sanskrit giri-bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sanskrit bhanga, bhañji wave The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by “omaddana,” Dhtm 73 by “avamaddana”
    Bhañjana1
    neuter
    1. breakage, breaking down, break, only in compound akkha˚; break of the axle Vism 32 45 Dhp-a i.375 Pv-a 277
    from bhañjati
    Bhañjana2
    neuter
    1. anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta˚ and pāda˚; -bbhañjana-tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism 100 Vv-a 295
    for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake
    Bhañjanaka
    neuter
    1. destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha˚; destroying the welfare (with reference to the telling of lies) Dhp-a iii.356 Vv-a 72 cp. bhañjaka
    from bhañjana1
    Bhañjanin
    adjective
    1. breaking, destroying, in cakka˚; breaking the wheel, figuratively breaking the state of harmony Ja v.112
    from bhañj
    Bhaññam
    1. (J v.317) ‣See bhā;
    Bhaṭa
    1. [cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhaṭa, fr, dialectical; bhaṭ; to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya from bhṛta & bhṛti of; bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114
    • bhaṭa = bhatyaṁ i.e. bhṛtyaṁ servant, hireling, soldier Mil 240 Vv-a 305 (bhattavetana˚). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase yathā-bhaṭaṁ (Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. yathābhaṭaṁ ‣See discussion under yathā bhataṁ
    1. ˚patha service, employment, salary Vin iv.265 Snp-a 542
    Bhaṭṭha1
    1. dropped, fallen down Ja i.482 Ja iv.222 Ja iv.382 Ja v.444 cp. pari˚
    past participle of bhraṁś ‣See bhassati
    Bhaṭṭha2
    1. spoken, said Vv 6319 (su˚ = subhāsita Vv-a 265) ‣See also paccā˚ & pari˚ cp. also next
    past participle of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita
    Bhaṭṭha3
    (?)
    1. wages, tip, donation Ja iv.261 (by Commentary explained as kathita, thus same as bhattha2) variant reading bhatta. cp. Sanskrit bhāṭa & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhāṭaka MVastu; iii.37
    perhaps for bhatta?
    Bhaṇati

    1. to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti ‣See Nd2 s.v. katheti Dhp 264 Pug 33 56 Dhp-a ii.95
    • ppr. bhaṇanto Snp 397 Pot. bhaṇe Snp 1131 (= bhaṇeyya Nd2 469) Dhp 224 (saccaṁ; = dīpeyya vohareyya Dhp-a iii.316). Also bhaṇeyya Snp 397 An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase SN i.209 (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A
    • causative form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Snp 397
    bhaṇ; cp. Sanskrit bhaṇati; Old High German ban = English ban etc. “proclamation.” ‣See connections in Walde, Latin Wtb. under fabula explained by Dhtp 111 as “bhaṇana. by Dhtm 162 as “bhāsana”
    Bhaṇana
    neuter
    1. telling, speaking Dhp-a iv.93 (˚sīla, adjective wont to speak); Dhtp 111
    from bhaṇati
    Bhaṇe
    indeclinable
    1. “I say,” used as an interjection of emphasis, like “to be sure,” “look here.” It is a familiar term of address often used by a king to his subjects Vin i.240 (amhākaṁ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya-nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi …) Mil 21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito …)
    originally 1st singular pres. Med. of bhaṇati
    Bhaṇḍa
    neuter
    1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also “object” SN i.43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaṁ uttamaṁ woman is the highest property), Nd2 38 Ja iii.353 (yācita˚ object asked, = yāca) Thag-a 288 (identical); Vism 22
    2. bhaṇḍaṁ kiṇāti to buy goods Vb-a 165
    3. bhaṇḍaṁ vikkiṇati to sell goods Ja i.377 (+ paṭibhaṇḍaṁ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya-bh. goods for sale Dhp-a i.390
    4. assāmika˚ ownerless goods, unclaimed property Ja vi.348
    5. ābharaṇa˚ trinkets, jewelry Ja iii.221
    6. piya˚ best goods, treasure Ja iii.279
    7. bahu˚ having many goods, rich in possessions Vin iii.138 Kp-a 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara˚ best property or belongings Vin iv.225
    8. implement, article, instrument Vin ii.142 143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (identical); Dāvs iv.50 (turiya˚)
    9. In assa (hatthi˚)-bhaṇḍa Vin i.85f. the meaning “horse (elephant-) trader (or owner) does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? cp. bhaṇḍa = paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati
      1. ˚āgāra store house, warehouse, only in derivation -āgārika keeper of stores Vin i.284 Vin ii.176 surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) Ja iii.293 iv.43; v.117 Mil 37 DN-a i.21 Pv-a 2 Pv-a 20
      2. ˚āhāraka (trader) taking up goods Dhp-a iv.60
      cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāṇḍa
    Bhaṇḍaka
    adjective in sense of collective noun
    1. article, implement; kīḷā˚; toys Ja vi.6
    2. belongings property Vin iv.225
    3. trappings, in assa˚; horsetrappings Ja ii.113

      from bhaṇḍa
    Bhaṇḍati
    1. to quarrel, abuse Vin i.76 (saddhiṁ) iv.277 Thag 1, 933 Snp-a 357 (aññamaññaṁ)
    bhaṇḍ, cp. “paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse” Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798
    Bhaṇḍana
    neuter
    1. quarrel, quarrelling, strife Iti 11 Ja iii,149 Nd1 196 Dhp-a i.55 64
    from bhaṇḍ, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhāṇḍana Divy 164
    Bhaṇḍi
    1. a certain plant or flower Ja v.420 Reading uncertain
    ?
    Bhaṇḍikā
    feminine
    1. collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaṁ karoti to make into a heap Ja iii.221 Ja iii.437 or bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhati to tie into a bundle Dhp-a ii.254 Vv-a 187
    • sahassa˚ a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja ii.424 Ja iii.60 Ja iv.2

      • Note. bhaṇḍika is variant reading at Ja iii.41 for gaṇḍikā
      from bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense
    Bhaṇḍu
    adjective
    1. bald-headed, close shaven Vin i.71 (˚kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra˚) Ja iii.22 Ja vi.538 (+ tittira) Mil 11 Mil 128
    etymology uncertain, dialectical or = paṇḍu?
    Bhata
    adjective
    1. supported, fed, reared, maintained AN iii.46 (bhatā bhaccā “maintained are my dependents”) Ja v.330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. in meaning “full” with wrong ref Ja vi.14 cp. bharita
    2. cp. Epic Sanskrit bhṛta
    Bhataka
    1. a hired servant, hireling, servant Thag 1, 606 685, 1003 Ja iii.446 Mil 379 Dhp-a i,119, 233 (˚vīthi servant street) ‣See also Fick Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhṛtaka
    Bhati
    feminine
    1. wages, fee, pay Ja i.475 Ja iii.325 Ja iii.446 Dhp-a i.21 70; Dhtp 94 (in explanation of root bhaṭ; ‣See bhaṭa)
    cp. Vedic bhṛti, from bhṛ
    Bhatikā
    feminine
    1. fee Ja iv.184
    from bhati
    Bhatta
    neuter
    1. feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dhp 185 Pug 28 55 Ja ii.15 Ja v.170 (bhatta-manuñña-rūpaṁ for bhattaṁ-); Vism 66 (where 14 kinds enumerated, i.e. sangha˚ uddesa˚ etc.); Sdhp 118
    • ucchiṭṭha˚ food thrown away Pv-a 173 uddesa˚ special food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175; devasika˚ daily food (as fee or wages) DN-a i.296 (= bhatta-vetana); dhura˚ a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i.e. a responsible meal Ja i.449 Ja iii.97 (variant reading dhuva˚); dhuva˚ constant supply of food Vin i.25 243
    1. ˚agga [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhaktāgra Divy 335; MVastu ii.478 a refectory Vin i.44 MN i.28 Ja v.334
    • ˚ammaṇa food trough Ja vi.381
    • ˚ābhihāra gift of food SN i.82
    • ˚uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism 388, Dhp-a i.244
    • ˚kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler Ja i.150f.; v.296; vi.349 DN-a i.157
    • ˚kicca “meal-performance,” meal (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) Ja i.87 Mil 9 Vism 278 (kata˚ after the meal, cp. kata ii.1. a) Pv-a 76
    • ˚kilamatha fatigue after eating Snp-a 58 (cp. ˚sammada)
    • ˚gāma a village giving tribute or service Dhp-a i.398
    • ˚dāna gift of a meal Pv-a 54
    • ˚puṭa a bag with food Ja ii.82 Ja ii.203 iii.200 DN-a i.270 cp. puṭabhatta
    • ˚puṭaka same Kp-a 44 Vb-a 234 Vism 251
    • ˚bhoga enjoyment of food SN i.92
    • ˚randhaka a cook Ja iv.431
    • ˚vissagga serving a meal, meal-function, participation at a meal Vin iv.263 Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta; explained at Pv-a 184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana) Mil 9 Snp-a 19 140
    • ˚vetana service for food, food as wages (cp bhaktā-dāsa a slave working for food Manu viii.415 ‣See Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in general “hire wages,” also “professional fee” DN iii.191 Vin iii.222 (rañño bh-v

      • āhāro “in the King’s pay”) Ja iv.132f. Mil 379 Dhp-a i.25 (to a physician) Vv-a 305
      • ˚velā meal-time Snp-a 111
      • ˚sammada drowsiness after a meal SN i.7 Ja vi.57 Vb 352 Vism 278, 295
      • ˚sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism 72
      cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhakta, originally past participle of bhajati
    Bhattar
    1. a husband; nominative singular bhattā Thag 2, 413 Ja v.104 Ja v.260 (here in meaning “supporter”); vi.492; genitive bhattu Ja v.169 Ja v.170 acc bhattāraṁ Thag 2, 412
    Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ
    Bhattavant
    adjective
    1. possessing reverence or worship(pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word “Bhagavant, at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210 sq. explained at Vism 212 by “bhaji-sevi-bahulaṁ karoti.”
    from *bhakta, past participle of bhajati
    Bhatti
    feminine
    1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pug 20 Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs translation 345) Pug 65 Ja v.340 (= sineha Commentary ); vi.349 Vv-a 353 354
    2. in bhatti-kata Thag 2 413 it means “service,” thus “doing service” (or “rendered a servant"?)
    3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably “making lines, decoration ornamentation” Vin ii.113 (˚kamma-kata decorated) i.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati˚ (? Kern Toevoegselen s.v. translates “patchwork"?). cp. vi˚.

      cp. Vedic & Classical Sanskrit bhakti, from; bhaj ‣See bhajati
    Bhattika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. in dhuva˚; being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin ii.15 Also at Thag-a 267 in meaning “being a servant, working for food” in explanation of bhattikatā (= kata-sāmi-bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife
    from bhatta
    Bhattimant
    adjective
    1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Thag 1, 370 Commentary has: yathānusiṭṭhaṁ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma
    2. from bhatti
    Bhadanta (Bhaddanta)
    1. venerable, reverend mostly in voc. as address “Sir, holy father” etc., to men of the Order. voc. singular bhadante SN i.216 (variant reading bhaddante); voc. plural bhadantā Dhp-a iii.414

      • A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q.v.) Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresponding of Sanskrit *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v → d and account for dd on grounds of popular analogy after bhadda ‣See bhante. The
      • plural nominative from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a voc. of an a-stem with-e for-a as in Prakrit Māgadhī
      a secondary adjective formation from address bhaddaṁ (= bhadraṁ) te “hail to thee,” cp. “bhaddaṁ vo” under bhadda 1
    Bhadantika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. only in compound ehi˚; , literally “one belonging to the (greeting) ʻ come hail to thee, ʼ i.e. one who accepts an invitation DN iii.40 MN ii.161 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55 ‣See also under ehi
    from bhadanta
    Bhadara
    1. in ˚paṇḍu at AN i.181 is to be read as badara˚;
    Bhadda(a) & Bhadra; (b)
    adjective
    1. auspicious lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy fortunate DN ii.95(a) SN i.117(b) Dhp 143f.(b) (of a good, well-trained horse), 380(b) (identical) Ja vi.281(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice) Dhp-a i.33(a) (voc. bhadde = ayye)
    2. bhadraṁ
    3. neuter something bringing luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (= kalyāṇaṁ) Dhp 120 (= bhadra-kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. Dhp-a iii.14) Pv-a 116 (= iṭṭhaṁ). Also as form of address “hail to thee,” bhaddaṁ vo Ja v.260–⁠2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sanskrit bhalla) Ja ii.275 (variant reading bhadra; so Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.; but Commentary takes it as bhadda lucky, in negative sense “unlucky, sinister,” & explains by bībhaccha = awful)
    4. bull (cp. Sanskrit bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Thag 1, 16 173, 659
    5. -mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like “my noble & c friend!” cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhadramukha; Divy frequent ‣See Index

      MN ii.53 SN i.74 (cp. Kindred Sayings i.100n) Ja ii.261 (variant reading bhadda˚); Vism 92 (variant reading SS bhadda˚)

    6. ˚muttaka cp. Sanskrit bhadramusta
      1. a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DN-a i.81 Abhp 599
      2. ˚yuga a noble pair Dhp-a i.95 (Kolita Upatissa),
      3. ˚vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Mil 4
      cp. Vedic bhadra, on different forms ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 532. Dhtp 143, 589 explainsbhadd by “kalyāṇe”; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives; bhad (bhadd) with explanation “kalyāṇa kammāni”
    Bhaddaka(a) & Bhadraka; (b)
    1. good, of good quality (opposite pāpaka) AN iv.169(a)
    2. honoured of high repute Ja iii.269(a) (= sambhāvita Commentary )
      • masculine neuter a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Applied to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at Ja v.254(b)

        • On upari-bhaddaka (name of a tree Ja vi.269 Commentary = bhagini-mālā) ‣See upari
        • At AN iv.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality
        from bhadda
    Bhanta
    1. swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dhp 222 (ratha = ativegena dhāvanta Dhp-a iii.301); (yāna = adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd1 145) Dhs-a 260 (˚yāna). cp. vi˚
    past participle of bham
    Bhantatta
    neuter
    1. turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 (= vibhanti-bhāva Dhs-a 260 so read for vibhatti˚) cp. Dhs translation 120
    from bhanta
    Bhante
    1. [would correspond either to Sanskrit *bhavantaḥ (with ending ˚e as Māgadhism for ˚aḥ) = bhavān, or to Pali bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The explanation bhante = bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prakrit Grammar §§ 165, 366b, intimated also by Weber Bhagavatī 156 note 3 (unable to explain-e); the explanation bhante = bhavantah ‣See bhavaṁ by Geiger, Pali Grammar 983 hinted at by Weber locative cit. (bhavantaḥ = bhagavantaḥ) voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either absolute as voc.: Vin i.76 DN ii.154 DN ii.283 Ja ii.111 Ja iii.46 Mil 19 or with another voc.: Mil 25 or with other oblique cases, as with nominative DN i.179 Dhp-a i.62 with genitive DN i.179

    Bhabba
    adjective
    1. able, capable, fit for (—˚ or with dative or infinitive); abhabba unfit, incapable Vin i.17 SN iii.27 (dukkha-kkhayāya); iv.89 (identical) Pug 12 13; Vism 116 (bhikkhu), negative Iti 106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuṁ sambodhiṁ) Ja i.106 (˚puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation); bhabbābhabba nt & unfit people Nd; 2 2353 = Vism 205 explained at Vb 341 342 by “bhabbā niyāmaṁ okkamituṁ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṁ.”
    2. possible (abhabba impossible) MN iii.215 (kammaṁ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible)
    3. ‣ See also abhabba
    grd of bhū, Sanskrit bhavya
    Bhabbatā
    feminine
    1. possibility; negative ; impossibility Snp 232 Kp-a 191 Vv-a 208
    abstract from bhabba
    Bhamati
    1. to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dhp 371 (mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ) Ja i.414 Ja iii.206 iv.4 (cakkaṁ matthake); iv.6 (kumbha-kāra-cakkaṁ iva bh.); v.478. past participle bhanta.
    2. causative bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakkaṁ)
    3. bhram; on etymology ‣See K.Z. iv.443; vi.152. explained at Dhtp 219 by “anavaṭṭhāne,” i.e. unsettledness
    Bhamara
    1. a bee Ja v.205 (˚vaṇṇa bee-coloured, i.e. of black colour, in explanation of kaṇha) Thag 2, 252 Usually in similes, e.g. at Dhp 49 (cp. Dhp-a i.374f.); Vism 142, 152 Snp-a 139
    2. in bhamara-tanti “the string that sounds,” one of the seven strings of the lute Ja ii.253 cp. Vv-a 140
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion = confused noise), cp. Latin fremo to growl roar ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. fremo
    Bhamarikā
    feminine
    1. a humming top Ja v.478
    from bhamara
    Bhamu
    feminine
    1. eyebrow Ja vi.476 (ṭhita˚), 482 (nīla˚)
    secondary formation after bhamuka
    Bhamuka
    1. (& Bhamukha) feminine

      1. eyebrow Thag 11, 232 = SN i.132 pamukh-J iv.18 (in explanation of su-bbhū = su-bhamukhā in Commentary Fausböll puts “bhamuka"? Kern on this passage quotes Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhrūmukha ‣See Toevoegselen s.v.); vi.503 (aḷāra˚ for pamukha) Dhp-a iii.102 Dhp-a iv.90 197 = J v.434 Snp-a 285
      cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compound of bhrū + mukha with dissimilation of first u to a
    Bhaya
    neuter
    1. fear, fright, dread AN ii.15 (jāti-maraṇa˚) DN iii.148 DN iii.182 Dhp 39 Dhp 123 Dhp 212 sq., 283 Nd1 371 409 Pug 56 Vism 512; Kp-a 108 Snp-a 155 Dhp-a iii.23 There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā-bhaya), e.g. one of 17 at Mil 196 one of 16 (four times four) at AN ii.121f. the same in essence, but in different order at Nd2 470 and at Vb-a 502 one of 16 (with remark “ādi,” and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combinations are to be found at Snp 964 (5, viz. ḍaṁsā, adhipātā, siriṁsapā, manussaphassā catuppādā) Vb 379 (5, viz. ājīvika˚, asiloka˚ parisa-sārajja˚, maraṇa˚, duggati˚, explained at Vb-a 505f.), 376 (4: jāti˚, jarā˚, vyādhi˚, maraṇa˚) 367 (3: jāti˚, jarā˚, maraṇ˚) Nd1 402 (2: diṭṭha-dhammikaṁ & samparāyikaṁ bh.)
    • ; abhaya absence of fear safety Vin i.75 (abhay-ûvara for abhaya-vara?) Dhp 317 Ja i.150 Dhp-a iii.491
    1. ˚ñāṇa insight into what is to be feared ‣See Compendium 66 -dassāvin ‣Seeing or realising an object of fear, i.e. danger Vb 244 247 and passim -dassin identical Dhp 31 Dhp 317 -bherava fear & dismay MN i.17 (= citt’ uttrasassa ca bhayānak’ ārammaṇassa adhivacanaṁ MA 113), name of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (past participle 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202 Snp-a 206
    2. from bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, Pali bhāyati
    Bhayānaka
    adjective
    1. frightful, horrible Ja iii.428 MA 113 Pv-a 24 (as ˚ika); Sdhp 7 Sdhp 208
    • nt. ˚ṁ something awful Nd2 470 (in definition of bhaya)
    from bhaya, cp. Epic Sanskrit bhayānaka
    Bhara-bhara
    1. , a word imitating a confused sound MN i.128 otherwise contracted to babbhara (q.v.)
    Bhara
    adjective (—˚)
    1. “bearing” in active & passive meaning, i.e. supporting or being supported; only in compound dubbhara hard to support. AN v.159 AN v.161 (variant reading dubhara), and subhara easy to support Thag 1, 926 (translation “of frugal ways”)
    2. from bhṛ
    Bharaṇa
    neuter
    1. bearing, supporting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in explanation of bhṛ;) Abhp 1053
    from bhṛ; , Epic Sanskrit bharaṇa
    Bharatā
    feminine
    1. only in compound dub˚; difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at AN iv.280 and kuhanā at. AN v.159 AN v.161-opposite subharatā AN iv.280
    abstract from bhara
    Bharati
    1. to bear, support, feed maintain Ja v.260 (mama bharatha, ahaṁ bhattā bhavāmi vo; Commentary explains as “maṁ icchatha”). past participle bhata ‣See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Derived from bhār˚. A curious Passive form is anu-bhīramāna (ppr.) MN iii.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 52, 5; 175 note 3, 191
    2. bhṛ; , cp. Latin fero, Avestan baraiti, Old Irish berim, Gothic bairan = to bear, German gebāren. Dhtm explains simply by “bharena”
    Bharita
    adjective
    1. filled with (—˚) Ja i.2 (suvaṇṇa-rajata˚ gabbha); iv.489 (udaka˚); v.275 (kimi˚) Snp-a 494 (vāta˚) Thag-a 283 (kuṇapa˚)
    literally made to bear, i.e. heavy with etc. cp. formations bhār˚, from bharati
    Bhariyā
    feminine
    1. a wife (literally one who is supported) DN iii.190 Iti 36 Ja iii.511 Dhp-a i.329
    from bhṛ; , Vedic bhāryā
    Bharu
    1. sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd1 155 Ja ii.188 Ja iv.137 and Bharu-raṭṭha Ja ii.169f. a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea
    • Also in name of the King of that country Bharu -rājā Ja ii.171 (variant reading Kuru˚)
    • Der Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha Dhs-a 305 (so read at Expositor ii.401)
    a dialectical (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Bhallaka
    1. a kind of copper, enumerated under the eight pisāca-lohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country Vb-a 63 (is reading correct?) It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp. malla
    literally from the Bhalla people
    Bhallāṭaka
    1. the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium Ja vi.578
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhallātaka
    Bhava
    1. “becoming, (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a “life.” There are 3 states of existence conventionally enumerated as kāma˚ rūpa˚, arūpa˚; or sensual existence, deva-corporeal, formless existence (cp. rūpa) DN ii.57; iii.216 SN ii.3 SN iv.258 AN ii.223 AN iii.444 Nd1 48; Nd2 s.v. dhātu B. Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 Vism 529 Vb-a 204
    • Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma˚; and upapatti˚; (uppatti˚), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Compendium 43) Vb 137 Vism 571 Vb-a 183 also in definition of bhava at Nd2 471 (kamma˚ and paṭisandhika punabbhava)
    • In the “causal chain” (Paṭicca-samuppāda, q.v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth
    • See Snp 361 Snp 514 Snp 742 Snp 839 Snp 923 Snp 1055 Snp 1133Dhp 348 Nd1 274 Vb 294 358; Vism 556 sq. Dhp-a iv.221 Sdhp 33 Sdhp 333 Sdhp 335
    • On itibhav’ ābhava ‣See iti, and add reference Vb 375
    • A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in compound) is to be noted in the definition given by Buddhaghosa of divya = divi bhavaṁ (for divi-bhū) Kp-a 227 Snp-a 199 and mānasaṁ = manasi bhavaṁ (for manasi-bhū) Kp-a 248, cp. Pāṇini iv.3, 53 Similarly āroga bhava health Dhp-a i.328 for ˚bhava-cp. anu˚, vi˚, sam˚
    1. ˚agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) Ja iii.84 Vb 426 Mil 132 Kp-a 179, 249 Snp-a 17 41, 507; often as highest “heaven” as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at Ja iv.182 Ja vi.354 Mil 336
    • ˚aṅga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness i.e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life-continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process of mind, or attention
      1. (thus Mrs Rhys Davids in Expositor 185 note), subconscious individual life ‣See on term Compendium 26 sq., 265–⁠267; & cp. ; Dhs translation 134-J vi.82 Mil 299f.; Vism 164, 676 Dhs-a 72 140 269 Dhp-a i.23 Vb-a 81 156 sq., 406
      2. ˚antaga “gone to the ends of existence,” past existence, epithet of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism 210
      3. ˚antara an existence interval, i.e. transition from one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq
      4. ˚ābhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Snp 1060 Snp 1068 Nd1 48 109, 284 Nd2 472 664 AN Thag 1, 784 (Thag-a mahantāmahanta bh.) Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.30) Vb-a 501
      • ˚āsava the intoxicant of existence DN iii.216 Vb 364 373
      • ˚uppatti coming into (a new ex

        • Four such bh
        • uppattis lead to rebirth among the following gods: the paritt'-ābhā devā, the appamāṇ'ābhā d., the sankiliṭṭh'-ābhā d., the parisuddh'-ābhā d MN iii.147
        • ˚esanā longing for rebirth DN iii.216 DN iii.270
        • ˚ogha the flood of rebirth ‣See ogha Nd1 57 159 Vism 480
        • ˚cakka the wheel or round of rebirth equivalent to the Paṭicca-samuppāda Vism 529 576 sq.; in the same context at Vb-a 138 194 sq -carimakā the last rebirth Vism 291
        • ˚taṇhā craving for rebirth DN iii.212 DN iii.216 DN iii.274 SN v.432 Snp 746 Vb 101 358, 365 Thag 2, 458 Thag-a 282 Vb-a iii.133 -netti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhava-netrī M. Vastu ii.307; ˚netrika iii.337
        1. leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin i.231 Iti 38 Dhs 1059≈ (cp. Dhs-a 364 = bhava-rajju)
        2. ˚saṁyojana the fetter of rebirth ‣See arahant II. Commentary -salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dhp 351 (= sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni Dhp-a iv.70)
        3. ˚sāta (plural sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enumerated in sets of from one to six at Nd1 30
        4. ˚ssita at Ja v.371 read with variant reading as ghaṭa-ssita
      cp. Sanskrit bhava, as philosophical term late, but as name of a deity Vedic; of bhū ‣See bhavati
    Bhavati
    1. [bhū to become, cp. Sanskrit bhūmi earth; Latin fui I have been futurus = future ; Old Irish buith to be; Anglo-Saxon būan = Goth bauan to live, German bauen, also Anglo-Saxon bȳldan = to build Lithuanian búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaṁ to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd2 474 sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu-bhavati)

      • I Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz bhav˚; and (contracted) ho˚; , the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav˚ forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar §§ 1312, 1513; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati abhisaṁ˚, pa˚ (also pahoti, pahūta), pari˚ vi˚, saṁ˚
      1. -1. Present indicative bhavāmi Snp 511 & homi Ja iii.260 2ndbhavasi & hosī MN iii.140 Vv 8420 3rdbhavati frequently Snp 36 (where Nd2 474 with Burmese variant of Snp reads bhavanti; Divy p. 294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell’s for manuscripts bhavati) Dhp 249 Dhp 375; & hoti frequently; 1st plural homa Pv i.118 2ndhotha Ja i.307 3rdbhavanti & honti; frequently

        • imper 2nd singular bhava Snp 337 Snp 340 Snp 701 Dhp 236 Thag 2, 8
        • bhavāhi Snp 510 hohi Snp 31 MN iii.134 Ja i.32 Pv-a 89 3rd singular hotu Snp 224 Ja iii.150 Pv-a 13 Mil 18 pl 1st
        • medium bhavāmase Thag 1, 1128 Snp 32 Snp 2nd
        • plural bhavatha Ja ii.218 bhavātha Snp 692 Dhp 144
        • hotha Dhp 243 Dhp ii.141 Ja ii.302 Dhp-a i.57 3rd
        • plural bhavantu Snp 145
        • hontu Ja ii.4 Pot. 1st singular bhaveyyaṁ Ja vi.364 2ndbhaveyyāsi Ud 91 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 3rdbhave Snp 716
        • bhaveyya Ja ii.159 Dhp-a i.329 & hupeyya Vin i.8 (for huveyya ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 396 & 131; 2);
        • plural 1stbhaveyyāma; 2ndbhavetha Snp 1073 Snp 3rdbhaveyyuṁ Snp 906
        • ppr. bhavaṁ Snp 92 & bhavanto Snp 968 f hontī Pv-a 79
        • future 1st singular bhavissāmi Pv-a 49
        • hessāmi Thag 2, 460 (Thag-a 283 reads bhavissāmi),; hessaṁ Thag 1, 1100 Ja iii.224 Pv i.105 2ndbhavissasi Pv-a 16 hohisi Pv i.33 3rdbhavissati Dhp 228 Dhp 264 Dhp-a ii.82 hessati Ja iii.279 &
        • medium; hessate Mhvs 25 97, hehitī Bu ii.10 = AN i.4 Vv 6332 & hossati (in pahossati from pahoti Dhp-a iii.254); 1st
        • plural bhavissāma Dhp 200 Dhp 2ndhessatha SN iv.179 SN iv.3rdbhavissanti freq-
        • conditional 1st singular abhavissaṁ Ja i.470 2ndabhavissa Ja ii.11 Ja iii.30 3rdabhavissa Iti 37 Vin i.13 DN ii.57 MN iii.163 Ja i.267 Ja ii.112 (na bhavissa = nābhavissa?) 3rd
        • plural abhavissaṁsu Vin i.13 1st
        • aorist (originally preterite of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot. ‣See Geiger Pali Grammar 1312, 1622) 1st singular ahuvā SN i.36 with by-form ‣See
        • aorist ahuvāsiṁ Vv 826 2ndahuvā ibid., 3rdahuvā Vv 8124 Ja ii.106 iii.131; 1st
        • plural ahuvāma MN i.93 MN ii.214 & ahuvamha ibid.; 2ndahuvattha SN iv.112 MN i.445 Dhp-a i.57 2nd
        • aorist (simple
        • aorist, with preterite endings): 1st singular ahuṁ Pv ii.32 (Burmese variant ahu) (= ahosiṁ Pv-a 83); 2nd ahu (sk abhūḥ) Pv ii.35; 3rdahū (Sanskrit abhūt) Snp 139 Snp 312 Snp 504 and passim Pv i.23 & ahu Pv i.93 i.113; & bhavi Dhp-a i.329 (pātubhavi); 1st
        • plural ahumhā (Sanskrit abhūma Pv i.116 & ahumha Ja i.362 Dhp-a i.57
        1. -3rd aorist (s
        2. aorist ) 1st singular ahosiṁ Thag 1, 620 Ja i.106 Vv-a 321 Pv-a 10 (= āsiṁ); 2ndahosi Ja i.107 3rdahosi Snp 835 Vin i.23 1st
        3. plural ahesumha MN i.265 3rdahesuṁ DN ii.5 Vv 744 Ja i.149 Dhp-a i.327 & bhaviṁsu (Sanskrit abhāviṣuḥ) Dhp-a iv.15

          • Of medial forms we mention the 1st
          • plural pres. bhavāmahe Mhvs i.65, and the 3rd sg preterite ahuvattha Vv-a 103
          • infinitive bhavituṁ Snp 552; hetuye Bu ii.10.
          • absolutive bhavitvā Snp 56 hutvā Snp 43 & hutvāna Snp 281
          • gerundive bhavitabba Ja i.440 Ja vi.368
          • hotabba Vin i.46
          • bhabba (Sanskrit bhavya) ‣See sep. bhuyya ‣See compound abhibhuyya.
          • causative bhāveti ‣See sep-
          • past participle bhūta. Note. In compound with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combination of the same with the root kṛ; , e.g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s.v. bhasma, etc-II. Meanings. In general the meaning “to become to get” prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out
          1. -1. to happen, to occur, to befall Ja vi.368
          • The fut bhavissati “is certainly,” “must be” Dhp-a iii.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.) Mil 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). 3.
          • imperative hotu as
          • adverb “very well” Mil 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir)

          • aorist in meaning and as substitute of āsiṁ, preterite of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him Dhp-a i.399 (assā etad ahosi “this thought struck her”).

    Bhavatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being, state, condition Kp-a 227
    abstract from bhū
    Bhavana
    neuter
    1. dwelling, sphere, world, realm SN i.206 Snp 810 ‣See explanation Nd1 132: nerayikānaṁ nirayo bh. etc. & Snp-a 534: niray’ ādi-bhede bhavane Nd1 448 (Inda˚ the realm of Indra) Ja iii.275 (nāga˚ the world of the Nāgas)
    from bhū
    Bhavant
    pronoun of polite address “Sir, Lord, or “venerable, honourable,” or simply “you.” Cases as follows (after Geiger, Pali Grammar § 983): singular nominative bhavaṁ Snp 486 DN i.249 MN i.484
    • neuter bhavaṁ MN iii.172
    • accusative bhavantaṁ Snp 597 DN ii.231 instrumental bhotā DN i.93 110 SN iv.120 genitive bhoto Snp 565 MN i.486 voc bhavaṁ DN i.93 & bho DN i.93 MN i.484 Ja ii.26 ‣See bho also sep

      • plural nominative bhavanto Snp p. 107 (only as variant reading ; Text bhagavanto), & bhonto; ibid. MN ii.2 Mil 25
      • accusative bhavante MN ii.3 instrumental bhavantehi MN iii.13 gen bhavataṁ MN ii.3 voc. bhonto Thag 1, 832 MN ii.2 -f bhotī : singular nominative bhotī Snp 988 Ja iii.95
      • accusative bhotiṁ Ja vi.523
      • locative bhotiyā ibid. voc. bhoti ibid. DN ii.249-On form bhante ‣See this
      cp. Sanskrit (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pronoun of the 2; nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb Probably a contraction from bhagavant ‣See Whitney Altindische Grammatik 456
    Bhaveyya
    1. a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola Ja vi.529
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bhavya
    Bhasati
    1. to bark (of dogs) Ja iv.182 (aorist bhasi; so read for Text bhusi).
    2. past participle bhasitaṁ (as
    3. noun ) bark ibid. (mahā-bhasitaṁ bhasi, read for bhusita) ‣See also bhusati
    4. cp. Epic Sanskrit bhaṣate
    Bhasita
    1. 1 ‣See bhasati.past participle of bhas “crumbled to ashes” ‣See bhasma
    Bhasta
    1. a he-goat Ja iii.278
    cp. Vedic basta
    Bhastā
    feminine & bhasta
    • neuter

      1. a bellows Thag 1, 1134 Ja vi.12 (vāta-puṇṇa-bhasta-camma, skin of bellows full of wind) Snp-a 171 (vāta-pūrita-bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita˚) Dhp-a i.442 (bhastaṁ dhamāpeti); Vism 287–⁠2. a sack Thag 1, 1151 2, 466 (Text reads gatta, but Thag-a 283 reads bhasta & explains as “camma-pasibbaka”) Ja iii.346 (sattu˚ = sattu pasibbaka flour sack); v.45 Thag-a 212 (udaka˚). biḷāra-bhastā a bag of catskin MN i.128 (= biḷāra-camma-pasibbaka Buddhaghosa); Thag 1 1138
    cp. Classical Sanskrit bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), originally agent noun from bhas (to bark?), lit bellower, blower
    Bhasma(n)
    neuter
    1. ashes SN i.169 = Nd2 576 (loc bhasmani) Vv 8444 Ja iii.426 Vism 469 (in comparison)
    1. ˚antāhuti (bhasm’ ant’ āhuti) “whose sacrifice ends in ashes” DN i.55 (so read for bhassant˚, according to DN-a i.166 & cp. Franke,; Dīgha Nikāya p. 60) MN i.515 SN iii.207
    • ˚ācchanna covered by ashes Dhp 71 (= chārikāya paṭichanna Dhp-a ii.68) Ja vi.236 (… va pāvaka)-puṭa a sack for ashes DN-a i.267 (as explanation for assa-puṭa of D. i.98; fanciful ‣See assa1)
    • ˚bhāva “ashy” state state of being crumbled to dust Vv-a 348
    cp. Vedic bhasman adjective ; Sanskrit bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n-stem. It has passed into the a-declension in Pali, except in the loc; bhasmani (SN i.169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either “chewing” or “anything chewed (small),” thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc. and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sanskrit psā morsel of food, psāta hungry = Pali chāta). Idg *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Latin sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain; bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa “reduce to ashes,” a
  • past participle of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sanskrit
  • locative bhasi
  • Bhassa
    neuter
    1. speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Snp 328 (variant reading for hassa) Iti 71 Mil 90 Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk as the 10 kathā-vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna-kathā)
    1. ˚kāraka one who makes talk, i.e. invites disputation or one who gossips Vin i.1 Nd1 142; feminine ˚kārikā Vin iv.230
    2. ˚pavādaka one who proposes disputation one who is fond of debate & discussions MN i.161 MN i.227 (˚ika) Mil 4
    3. ˚pavedin one experienced in debating Mil 90
    4. ˚samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation DN iii.106
    5. ˚samussaya grandiloquence proud talk Snp 245 (cp. Snp-a 288 = att'ukkaṁsanatā ti vuttaṁ hoti)
    6. cp. Classical Sanskrit bhāṣya, of bhāṣ
    Bhassati
    1. to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho-patane & adhopāte) Ja iv.223 Ja vi.530 ppr. bhassamāna Mil 82 preterite 3rd singular bhassittha Ja ii.274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin ii.135), & abhassittha SN i.122 (so read for abhassatha)- past participle bhaṭṭha1
    2. bhranś, Sanskrit bhraśyate
    Bhassara
    adjective noun
    1. adjective shining, resplendent Ja v.169 (Commentary pabhassara)
    2. Name of a bird Ja vi.538 (= sata-haṁsa Commentary )
    3. cp. ā˚, pa˚
    from bhās
    Bhā
    feminine
    1. light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage Ja v.317 Ja v.318 where Text reads “vara taṁ bhañ ñam icchasi,” & Commentary explains.: “bhā ti ratanass’ etaṁ nāmaṁ.” The variant reading for bhaññaṁ is bhuñjaṁ; the passage may be corrupt from “varatu bhavaṁ yam icchasi.”
    cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.
    Bhākuṭika
    adjective
    1. knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in reduplicated compound bhākuṭika- bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin ii.11 = iii.181 (manda-mando +) Nd2 342 (korajika-korajiko +) Vism 26 (identical). feminine bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness definition at Vism 26 as “padhāna-parimathitabhāva-dassanena bhākuṭi read bhakuṭi
      1. -karaṇaṁ mukha-saṅkoco ti vuttaṁ hoti.” It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaṁ kuhanā kuhāyanā in definition of kuhanā at Vb 352 = Vism 23, 25 (cp. Nd1 225) and at Nd2 342 D ‣See also Vb-a 482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaṁ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaṁ neuter is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in Commentary

        • style. The definition at Vism 26 is “bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaṁ.” The variant reading ibid. is bhākuṭitā
        • bhākuṭikaṁ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism 105 (as a quality of one “dosa-carita”)
        from bhakuṭi
    Bhāga
    1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin i.285 Snp 427 (sahassa-bhāgo maraṇassa = sahassaṁ bhāgānaṁ assā ti Snp-a 387 a thousand times a share of death, i.e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (variant reading Snp-a 492 for Snp samāna-bhāva, evenness proportionate-ness) Vv 146 (= kummāsa-koṭṭhāsa Vv-a 62) Pv i.115 (aḍḍhi˚ one half) Vin iv.264
    2. Cp vi˚
    3. bhāgaso (ablative
    4. adverb ) in parts, by parts, by portions especially in even portions, i.e. evenly, in proportion SN i.193 (according to each one’s share; cp. Thag 1, 1242) MN iii.183 Vv 72 Mil 330 Mil 415 (aneka˚ hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwelling-places etc. evenly planned, well laid out, i.e. in squares Snp 300 Snp 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso) Ja v.266 (cp. Commentary on p. 272) = Nd2 304iii. d Pv i.1013 (= bhāgato mita Pv-a 52)
    5. bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration Dhp-a i.134
    6. cp. dobbhagga “disproportionateness,” i.e. bad luck
    7. apportioned share (of money), fee remuneration, always in term ācariya˚; (ācariyassa) the teacher’s fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja i.273 Ja v.457 Ja vi.178 Mil 10 Dhp-a i.253
    8. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā˚; quarter of the com

      • passive Vin ii.217
      • para˚ outside part Kp-a 206 = Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṁ parabhāgā = tiro-kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaṁ (
      • accusative adverb ) at the back part, behind Pv-a 114
      • Figuratively way, respect, in ubhato-bhāga -vimutta “free in both ways” DN ii.71 MN i.477 ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.70; i.e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā
      • division of time, time, always—˚, e.g. pubba˚; the past apara˚; the
      • future Pv-a 133 obl. cases
      • adverb ially: tena divasa-bhāgena (+ ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Mil 18
      • apara-bhāge (
      • locative ) in
      • future Ja i.34 Pv-a 116
    cp. Vedic bhāga, from bhaj, bhajati
    Bhāgavant
    adjective
    1. sharing in, partaking of genitive Dhp 19 Dhp 20 (sāmaññassa)
    from bhāga, equal to bhāgin
    Bhāgin
    adjective
    1. sharing in, partaking of (with genitive), endowed with; getting, receiving AN ii.80 AN iii.42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.) Ja i.87 (rasānaṁ) Mil 18 (sāmaññassa); Vism 150 (lābhassa) Dhp-a ii.90 Vb-a 418f. (paññā as hāna-bhāginī, ṭhiti˚, visesa & nibbedha˚;)
    • Also in definition of term Bhagavā at Nd1 142 = Nd2 466 = Vism 210
    • plural bhāgino Pv iii.112 (dukkhassa) Pv-a 18 (dānaphalassa), 175
    • Cp bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya
    from bhāga. cp. Vedic bhāgin
    Bhāgineyya
    1. sister’s son, nephew Snp 695 Ja i.207 Ja ii.237 Dhp-a i.14 Pv-a 215
    from bhaginī, cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāgineya
    Bhāgimant
    adjective
    1. partaking in, sharing, possessing (with genitive Thag 2, 204 (dukkhassa) Thag-a 171 (= bhāgin)
    a double adjective formation bhāgin + mant
    Bhāgiya
    adjective (—˚)
    1. connected with, conducive to, procuring; in following philosophical terms: kusala AN i.11 hāna˚, visesa˚ DN iii.274f.; hāna˚, ṭhiti˚ visesa˚, nibbedha˚ Vism 15 (in verse), 88 = Ps i.35. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha˚ Divy 50; mokṣa ibid. 363
    from bhāga, cp. bhāgin
    Bhāgya
    neuter
    1. good luck, fortune Ja v.484
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhāgya; from bhaga ‣See also contracted form bhagga2
    Bhāgyavant
    adjective
    1. having good luck, auspicious fortunate, in definition of term “Bhagavā” at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210; also at Vv-a 231 where the abstract bhāgyavantatā is formed as explanation of the term bhāgyavatā feminine at Vism 211
    2. same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sanskrit form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators
    Bhājaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin i.285 (cīvara˚) AN iii.275 (cīvara˚, phala˚, khajjaka˚)
    from bhajeti
    Bhājana1
    neuter
    1. a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e.g. gold (suvaṇṇa˚) DN-a i.295 copper (tamba˚ Dhp-a i.395 bronze (kaṁsa˚) Vism 142 (in simile). Vin i.46 Snp 577 (plural mattika-bhājanā) Ja ii.272 (bhikkhā˚); iii.366 (identical), 471; v.293 (bhatta˚) Mil 107 Vv-a 40 292 (variant reading bhojana) Pv-a 104 Pv-a 145 Pv-a 251 Sdhp 571.

      1. ˚vikati a special bowl Ja v.292 (so read for Text bhojana˚) Vism 376
      cp. Epic Sanskrit bhājana, from bhāj
    Bhājana2
    neuter
    1. division, dividing up, in pada˚; dividing of words, treating of words separately Dhs-a 343 similarly bhājaniyaṁ that which should be classed or divided Dhs-a 2 also in pada˚; division of a phrase Dhs-a 54
    from bhāj
    Bhājita
    1. divided, distributed; neuter that which has been dealt out or allotted, in compound bhājit-ābhājita AN iii.275
    2. past participle of bhājeti
    Bhājeti
    1. to divide, distribute deal out Vin iv.223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna) Ja i.265 Dhs-a 4 (future bhājessati)
    2. gerundive bhājetabba Vin i.285
    3. past participle bhājita
    4. causative of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja = puthakkare
    Bhāṇa
    reciting or preaching, in pada˚; reciting the verses of the Scriptures Dhp-a ii.95 (variant reading paṭibhāna) iii.345; iv.18.
    1. ˚vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, “a recital” Vin i.14 Vin ii.247 DN-a 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya) Snp-a 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (identical) Dhs-a 6 (of Dhammasangaṇī, cp. Expositor 8 note 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works
    from bhaṇati
    Bhāṇaka1
    adjective-noun
    1. speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Aṅguttara˚; Vism 74 sq.; Dīgha˚ DN-a i.15 131 Ja i.59 Vism 36, 266; Jātaka˚; etc. Mil 341f.; Majjhima˚ Vism 95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saṁyutta˚; Vism 313 (Cūḷa-Sivatthera). Unspecified at Snp-a 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi-bhāṇaka-dahara-bhikkhu; reading doubtful). feminine bhāṇikā Vin iv.285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in compound mañju-bhāṇikā sweet-voiced uttering sweet words Ja vi.422
    2. from bhaṇati
    Bhāṇaka2
    1. a jar Vin ii.170 (loha˚) iii.90
    cp. Sanskrit bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & ‣See Müller,; Pali Grammar p. 48
    Bhāṇin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking, reciting Snp 850
    • manta˚ a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i.e. speaking wisely, explained by Snp-a 549 as “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṁ bhāsitā”) Dhp 363 (identical; explained as “mantā vuccati paññā tāya pana bhaṇana-sīlo” Dhp-a iv.93)

      • ativela˚ speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess Ja iv.247 Ja iv.248
      from bhaṇati
    Bhāṇeti
    causative of bhaṇati (q.v.) with 3rd praet. bhāṇi & pot.; bhāṇaye.
    Bhātar
    1. [cp. Vedic bhrātar = Avestan bratar, Latin frater, Gothic brōpar = Old High German bruoder, English brother brother, nominative singular bhātā Snp 296 Ja i.307 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 64 genitive singular bhātuno Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36), & bhātussa Mhvs 8, 9; instrumental bhātarā Ja i.308 accusative bhātaraṁ Snp 125 Ja i.307
    2. locative bhātari Ja iii.56
    3. nominative
    4. plural bhātaro Ja i.307 & bhātuno Thag 2, 408
    5. accusative bhāte Dīpavaṁsa vi.21. In compounds. both bhāti˚; (. bhātisadisa like a brother Ja v.263), and bhātu˚; (: bhātu-jāyā brother’s wife, sister-in-law Ja v.288 Vism 95). cp. bhātika & bhātuka; On popular etymology ‣See bhaginī.

    Bhāti
    1. to shine (forth), to appear DN ii.205 Vv 352 Ja ii.313 past participle bhāta ‣See vi˚
    2. bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaṁ; Indogermanic *bhé, cp. Sanskrit bhāḥ neuter splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Anglo-Saxon bonian to polish = German bohnen; also Sanskrit bhāla shine, splendour = Anglo-Saxon bael funeral pile
    Bhātika
    (& Bhātiya)
    1. literally brotherly, i.e. a brother, often˚-: “brother"-(a bhātika : Ja i.253 (jeṭṭhaka˚); vi.32 Dhp-a i.14 (˚thera my Thera-brother or brother-thera), 101, 245 Pv-a 75 (b) bhātiya : Vism 292 (dve ˚therā two Th. brothers)-cp. bhātuka
    from bhātar, cp. Classical Sanskrit bhrātṛka
    Bhātuka
    1. brother, usually—˚, viz. pati˚; brother-in-law, husband’s brother Ja vi.152
    • putta˚ son & brother Dhp-a; i.314; sa˚; with the brother Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36)
    = bhātika, from Sanskrit bhrātṛka
    Bhānu
    adjective
    1. light, bright red Ja iii.62 (of the kaṇavera flower) Vv-a 175 (˚raṁsi)
    cp. Vedic bhānu masculine shine, light, ray; Epic Sanskrit also “sun”
    Bhānumant
    adjective
    1. luminous brilliant; mostly of the sun; nominative bhānumā SN i.196 Thag 1, 1252 Vv 6417 787 (= ādicca Vv-a 304) Ja i.183 accusative bhānumaṁ Snp 1016

      • The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā
      from bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānumant, epithet of Agni; also Epic Sanskrit the sun
    Bhāyati
    1. to be afraid. Present indicative 1st singular bhāyāmi Thag 1 21; Snp p. 48; 2nd singular bhāyasi Thag 2, 248 1st plural bhāyāma Ja ii.21 3rd
    2. plural bhāyanto Dhp 129
    3. imperative 2nd pl bhāyatha Ud 51 Ja iii.4 Pot. 3rd singular bhāye Snp 964
    4. bhāyeyya Mil 208 3rd
    5. plural bhāyeyyuṁ Mil 208
    6. aorist 1st singular bhāyiṁ Dhp-a iii.187 2nd singular bhāyi Thag 1 764 Dhp-a iii.187 & usually in Prohib.; mā bhāyi do not be afraid SN v.369 Ja i.222 Dhp-a i.253

      • grd bhāyitabba Nd2 s.v. kāmaguṇā B Dhp-a iii.23
      • causative I. bhāyayate to frighten Ja iii.99 (Commentary utraseti)
      • causative II. bhāyāpeti Ja iii.99 Ja iii.210
      • past participle bhīta
      cp. Sanskrit bhayate, bhī, pres. reduplicated bibheti; Indogermanic *bhei, cp. Avestan bayente they frighten; Lithuanian bijotis to be afraid; Old High German bibēn = German beben. Nearest synonym is tras
    Bhāyitabbaka
    adjective
    1. to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp 95
    gerundive of bhāyati + ka
    Bhāra
    1. anything to carry, a load Vin iii.278 (Buddhaghosa; dāru˚ a load of wood) bhāraṁ vahati to carry a load AN i.84 Vv-a 23
    2. garu˚ a heavy load, as “adjective” “carrying a heavy load Ja v.439 (of a woman, = pregnant)
    3. bhāratara (adjective compar.) forming a heavier load Mil 155
    4. cp. ati˚; sam˚
    5. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity Vv-a 12 (saṭṭhi-sakaṭa˚-parimāṇa) Pv-a 102 (aneka˚parimāṇa)
    6. (figuratively) a difficult thing, a burden or duty i.e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375 Ja i.292 Ja ii.399 Ja iv.427 Ja vi.413 Dhp-a i.6 111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of “gambhīra” & “duddasa” (saccāni) at Vb-a 141 viz. mahā-samuddaṁ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaṁ; Sineru-pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaṁ; pabbataṁ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaṁ.

      • (figuratively) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). especially in phrase panna-bhāra “one whose load (or burden) has been laid down,” one who has attained Arahantship MN i.139 AN iii.84 SN i.233 Dhp 402 (= ohita-khandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168) Snp 626 (same explanation at Snp-a 467), 914 (explained as patita-bhāra, oropita˚, nikkhitta˚ Nd1 334 where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz khandha˚, kilesa˚, abhisankhāra˚) Thag 1, 1021 So at Vism 512 with reference to the ariya-saccāni, viz. bhāro dukkha-saccaṁ, bhār’ ādānaṁ = samuda-saccaṁ, bhāranikkhepanaṁ = nirodha-s., bhāra-nikkhepan'upāya magga-s
      • On bhāra in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 118
      1. ˚ādāna the taking up of a burden SN iii.25
      • ˚(m)oropana “laying down the load,” i.e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bu ii.115
      • ˚ṭṭha contained in a load carried as a burden Vin iii.47
      • ˚nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden SN iii.25
      • ˚mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) Ja i.19
      • ˚vāhin “burdenbearer,” one who carries an office or has a responsibility AN iv.24 (said of a bhikkhu)
      • ˚hāra load-carrier, burdenbearer SN iii.25f.
      from bhṛ; , Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara
    Bhāraka
    (—˚)
    1. a load, only in compound gadrabha˚; a donkey-load (of goods) Ja ii.109 Dhp-a i.123
    from bhāra
    Bhārataka
    1. “the petty descendants of Bhārata” or: load-carrier, porter (?) Ś iv.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā-Kaccāna)
    from bhara
    Bhārika
    adjective
    1. loaded, heavy Ja v.84 Ja v.477 Mil 261
    2. full of, loaded down with (—˚) Vv-a 314 (sineha˚ hadaya)
    3. grievous, serious, sorrowful Pv-a 82 (hadaya).

      • important Mil 240 Mil 311
      • See bhāriya
    from bhāra
    Bhārin
    adjective
    1. carrying, wearing, only in compound mālā˚; (māla˚), wearing a garland (of flowers Ja iv.60 Ja iv.82 Ja v.45 where it interchanges with ˚dhārin (e.g. Vv 323 variant reading at Pv-a 211 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ˚dhārin MVastu i.124). feminine ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530 Vv-a 12 and ˚bhārī Thag 1, 459 (as variant reading ; Text ˚dhārī) ‣See also under mālā
    2. from bhṛ; , cp. bhāra
    Bhāriya
    adjective
    1. heavy, weighty, grave serious; always figuratively with reference to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaṁ pāpaṁ a terrible sin Pv-a 195 or bh kammaṁ a grave deed, a sin Dhp-a i.298 329; ii.56 iii.120 Vv-a 68 or bhāriyaṁ alone (as
    2. neuter ), something grave, a sin Dhp-a i.64 Similarly with ati˚; as atibhāriyaṁ kammaṁ a very grave deed Dhp-a i.70 or atibhāriyaṁ identical Dhp-a i.186
    3. bhāriyā (= bhārikā, feminine of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing Ja vi.563 (phala˚)
    from bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife
    Bhārukacchaka
    1. ‣See bharu˚;
    Bhāva
    1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & Commentary literature, as e.g. Ja i.295 thīnaṁ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as “women’s character,” taking bhāva = attabhāva); usually—˚, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstract derived from the first part of the compound e.g. gadrabha˚ ʻ asininity ʼ Ja ii.109 Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika˚; state of need Pv-a 120
    2. ūna˚ depletion Snp-a 463
    3. ekī˚ loneliness Vism 34; sithill˚; (for sithila˚ in connection with kṛ bhū relaxation Vism 502
    4. (b)
    5. adverb s. upari˚; high condition MN i.45
    6. pātu˚ appearance Snp 560
    7. vinā˚ difference Snp 588 (c) nouns & noun-derivations:; atta˚ individual state, life, character Snp 388 (= citta Snp-a 374) asaraṇa˚ state of not remembering Dhp-a iii.121
    8. samaṇa˚ condition of a recluse Snp 551
    9. (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta˚; fact of being reborn Dhp-a iii.121
    10. magg ārūḷha˚ the condition of having started on one’s way Vv-a 64
    11. baddha˚ that he was bound; suhita˚; that they were well Ja iv.279 The translation can give either a full sentence with “that it was” etc. (Vv-a 64 “that he had started on his way”), or a phrase like “the fact or state of,” or use as an English abstract noun ending in -ness (atthika-bhāva needfulness, eki loneliness), -ion (ūna˚ depletion, pātu˚ manifestation) -hood (atta˚ selfhood), or -ship (samaṇa˚ recluseship). Similarly in Commentary style: sampayutta-bhāvo
    12. masculine Dhp-a iii.94 for *sampayuttattaṁ abstract; bhākuṭikassa bhāvo = bhakuṭiyaṁ Vism 26; sovacassassa bhāvo sovacassatā Kp-a 148; mittassa bh. = mettaṁ Kp-a 248 Here sometimes bhava for bhāva
    13. (in pregnant specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, especially a set mental condition ‣See derivation bhāvanā. Sometimes (restricted to Vin J) in sense “thinking of someone,” i.e. affection, love sentiment
    14. (a) in combination khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin ii.205 Vin iii.93 Vin iv.3 4
    15. (b) in Jātaka passages Ja v.237 Ja vi.293 (bhāvaṁ karoti, with
    16. locative, to love)-abhāva (late, only in Commentary style) not being, absence want Pv-a 25 ablative abhāvato through not being, in want of Pv-a 9 Pv-a 17
    17. sabhāva (sva + bhāva) ‣See sep
    from bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva
    Bhāvanā
    feminine
    1. producing, dwelling on something, putting one’s thoughts to, application developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture
    • See on term Dhs trsl 261 (= 2 240); Expositor i.217 (= Dhs-a 163); Compendium 207 note 2. cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚
    • Vin i.294 (indriya˚) DN iii.219 (three: kāya˚, citta˚, paññā˚), 221, 225, 285, 291 SN i.48 Dhp 73 Dhp 301 Ja i.196 (mettā˚); iii.45 (identical) Nd1 143 (saññā˚); Nett 91 (samatha-vipassanaṁ) Vb 12 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism 130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh. = bringing out, keeping in existence) 314 (karuṇā˚), 317 (upekkhā˚) Mil 25 (˚ṁ anuyuñjati); Sdhp 15 Sdhp 216 Sdhp 233 Sdhp 451
    1. ˚ānuyoga application to meditation Vb 244 249 -ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture AN ii.28
    • ˚bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self-culture AN i.52 DN iii.213
    • ˚maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Compendium 207. DN iii.218 DN iii.219 Nett 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya; at Iti 19 51 Vb 135 325
    • ˚vidhāna arrangement of process of culture Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122
    from bhāveti, or from bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Classical Sanskrit bhāvanā
    Bhāvanīya
    adjective
    1. “being as ought to be, to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self-composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) MN i.33 (garu + ; explained by Buddhaghosa as “addhā 'yam āyasmā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passatī ti evaṁ sambhāvanīyo” MA 156) SN v.164 AN iii.110 Mil 373 Pv-a 9 ‣See also under manobhāvanīya
    gerundive from bhāveti, but taken by Buddhaghosa as gerundive formation from bhāvanā
    Bhāvita
    1. developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced. AN v.299 (cittaṁ parittaṁ abhāvitaṁ; opposite cittaṁ appamāṇaṁ subhāvitaṁ) Snp 516 Snp 558
    past participle of bhāveti
    Bhāvitatta1
    adjective
    1. one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i.e. well trained or composed Attan here = citta (as Pv-a 139), thus “self-composed well-balanced” AN iv.26 Snp 277 Snp 322 Snp 1049 Dhp 106 Dhp 107 Nd2 142 Nd2 475 B (indriyāni bh.) Ja ii.112 (˚bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect) Vism 185 (˚bhāvana, adjective one of well-trained character) 267, 400 (+ bahulī-kata) Dhp-a i.122 (a˚) Thag-a 164 (indriya˚) ‣See following
    bhāvita + attan
    Bhāvitatta2
    neuter
    1. only negative a˚ the fact of not developing or cultivating SN iii.153 SN iii.475; Pv ii.966
    abstract from bhāvita = *bhāvitattvaṁ
    Bhāvin
    adjective
    1. “having a being,” going to be, as—˚ in avassa˚; sure to come to passive inevitable Ja i.19
    2. feminine bhāvinī
    3. future Vv-a 314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. variant reading SN bhāvaniyā)
    4. from bhāva, Epic Sanskrit bhāvin “imminent”
    Bhāveti
    1. to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind-work as creative in idea, MN i.293 cp. B.Psy p. 132
    • DN ii.79 MN ii.11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde) SN i.188 (cittaṁ ekaggaṁ), Thag 1, 83 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto) Snp 341 (cittaṁ ekaggaṁ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaṁ), 558 (
    • gerundive bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento = āsevanto bahulī-karonto Nd2 476) Dhp 87 Dhp 350 Dhp 370 Ja i.264 (mettaṁ), 415, ii.22 Nd2 s.v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where
    • gerundive in sequence “sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī-kātabba”) Pug 15 Dhp-a iii.171 Sdhp 48 Sdhp 495
    • passive ppr bhāviyamāna AN ii.140 Kp-a 148
    • past participle bhāvita
    causative of bhū, bhavati
    Bhāsa

    -sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture Abhp. 645, 1049

    1. ; as one of the lucky omens enumerated (under the so-called mangala-kathā) at Kp-a 118 (with variant reading SS. cāta˚ & vāca˚, Burmese manuscripts cāba˚) = Nd; 1 87 (on Snp 790) (Text reads vāta˚; variant reading SS vāpa˚, Burmese manuscripts chapa˚)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāsa
    Bhāsaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking DN-a i.52
    • avaṇṇa˚ uttering words of blame)
    from bhāṣ
    Bhāsati1
    1. to speak, to say, to speak to, to call MN i.227 Snp 158 Snp 562 Snp 722Dhp 1 Dhp 246 Dhp 258; also bhāsate Snp 452
    • Pot bhāseyya Vin ii.189 Snp 451 Snp 930 Snp-a 468 (for udīraye Dhp 408); bhāse Dhp 102 Snp 400 & bhāsaye AN ii.51 Ja v.509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya = bhāseyya)-
    • aorist abhāsi Vin iv.54 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 69; 1st sg also abhāsissaṁ (
    • conditional ) Pv i.68 (= abhāsiṁ Pv-a 34)
    • imperative pres. bhāsa Snp 346 ppr. bhāsamāne AN ii.51 Ja v.509 Snp 426 Dhp 19 Ja iv.281 (perhaps better with variant reading as hasamāna); v.63; & bhāsanto Snp 543
    • grd bhāsitabba AN iv.115 Vism 127
    • Med. indicative present 2nd singular bhāsase Vv 342
    • imperative pres. 2nd singular bhāsassu MN ii.199
    • An apparent
    • absolutive form abhāsiya Iti 59 60 (micchā vācaṁ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The variant readings however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of Itivuttaka suggests pa˚
    • cp. anu, o˚, samanu˚;
    bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya
    Bhāsati2

    to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Snp 719 (2nd singular future bhāsihi = bhāsissasi pakāsessasi Snp-a 499). Usually with prep prefix pa˚; (so read at Pv i.109 for ca bh.). cp. o˚, vi˚; bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaṁ

    Bhāsana
    neuter
    1. speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68
    from bhāṣ
    Bhāsā
    feminine
    1. speech, language, especially vernacular, dialect Ja iv.279 (manussa˚ human speech) 392 (caṇḍāla˚); Kp-a 101 (saka-saka˚-anurūpa) Snp-a 397 (Milakkha˚) DN-a i.176 (Kirātā-Yavanâdi-Millakkhānaṁ bhāsā); M AN i.1 (Sīhaḷa˚) Vb-a 388 (18 dialects of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāṣā
    Bhāsita
    1. spoken, said, uttered. AN v.194 Mil 28 Dhp-a iv.93 neuter speech, word Dhp 363 MN i.432 Usually as su˚ & dub˚; (both adjective &
    2. neuter ) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin i.172 MN ii.250 AN i.102 AN ii.51 (su˚; read bhāsita for bāsita) vi.226 Snp 252 Snp 451 Snp 657 Ja iv.247 Ja iv.281 (su˚, well spoken or good words); Pv ii.620 (su˚) Pv-a 83 (dub˚)
    3. past participle of bhāsati1
    Bhāsitar
    1. one who speaks, utters; a speaker SN i.156 Pug 56 Snp-a 549
    agent noun from bhāṣ
    Bhāsin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking AN i.102 (dubbhāsita-bhāsin)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāṣin
    Bhāsura
    adjective
    1. bright, shining, resplendent Thag-a 139 212 Vv-a 12
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bhāsura from bhas
    Bhiṁsa

    adjective

    1. terrible; only in compound ˚rūpa neuter & adjective) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful Ja iii.242 Ja iii.339 Ja iv.271 Ja iv.494 Bhimsana & ka; = Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 Pali forms, viz. the metathetic bhiṁsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa ‣See bhīsana. cp. also Sanskrit P. bhīma; all of bhī
    Bhiṁsana
    ˚ka;
    adjective
    1. horrible, dreadful, awe-inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiṁsanaka (usually combined with lomahaṁsa DN ii.106 = AN iv.311 DN ii.157 Vin iii.8 Pv-a 22 Thag-a 242 (˚sabhāva = bhīmarūpa) Ja v.43
    • (b) bhiṁsana Pv iv.35 (+ lomahaṁsa)
    the form with ˚ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiṁsana is youn absolutive ‣See bhiṁsa on connections
    Bhiṁsā
    feminine
    1. terror, fright; mahā-bhiṁsa adjective inspiring great terror DN ii.259 cp. bhismā
    2. from bhiṁsa
    Bhiṁsikā
    feminine
    1. frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mhvs 12, 12 (vividhā bhiṁsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass)
    from bhiṁsa
    Bhikkhaka
    1. a beggar, mendicant SN i.182 (bh. brāhmaṇa) Ja vi.59 (Burmese variant ˚uka) Vb-a 327
    from bhikkhu, cp. Epic Sanskrit bhikṣuka & feminine bhikṣukī
    Bhikkhati
    1. to beg alms, to beg, to ask for SN i.176 SN i.182 (so read for Text bhikkhavo) Dhp 266 Vb-a 327
    • ppr.
    • medium bhikkhamāna Thag 2, 123
    cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desidentical to bhaj; definition Dhtp 13 “yācane”
    Bhikkhā
    feminine

    begged food, alms, alms-begging; food Vin iv.94 cp. i.14 Vv 704 (ekāhā bh. food for one day) Mil 16 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 131 (kaṭacchu˚); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food cp. Sanskrit bhaikṣaṁ carati

    1. Ja iii.82 v.75 Pv-a 51 & passim
    • ; subhikkha
    • neuter abundance of food DN i.11
    • dubbhikkha
    • neuter (& ˚ā
    • feminine ) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adjective famine-stricken (cp. Sanskrit durbhikṣaṁ) Vin ii.175 Vin iii.87
    • adjective ; iv.23
    • adjective SN iv.323 SN iv.324 (dvīhitikaṁ) AN i.160 AN iii.41 Ja ii.149 Ja ii.367 Ja v.193 vi.487; cp. i.33
    • adjective ; Vism 415 (˚pīḷita), 512 (
    • feminine in simile); Kp-a 218 Dhp-a i.169 ii.153
    • feminine ; iii.437 (˚bhaya)
    1. ˚āhāra food received by a mendicant Ja i.237 (= bhikkhu-āhāra?)
    2. ˚cariyā going about for alms, begging round Snp 700 Pv-a 146
    • ˚cāra = ˚cariyā Mhbv.28 -paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Sangha, a dedication of food Vin i.309
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhaikṣa of; bhikṣ, adjective & nt.
    Bhikkhu
    1. an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. nominative singular bhikkhu frequently passim Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita) AN i.78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); iii.299 (identical); iv.25 (identical) Snp 276 Snp 360 Snp 411f. 915 sq., 1041, 1104 Dhp 31 Dhp 266 sq., 364 sq. 378 Vv 801 accusative bhikkhuṁ Vin iii.174 Dhp 362; bhikkhunaṁ Snp 87 Snp 88 Snp 513 genitive dative bhikkhuno AN i.274 Snp 221 Snp 810 Snp 961 Dhp 373 Pv i.1010 & bhikkhussa AN i.230 Vin iii.175 instrumental bhikkhunā Snp 389
    2. plural nominative bhikkhū Vin ii.150 Vin iii.175 DN iii.123 Vism 152 (in sim.) Vb-a 305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Snp 384 Snp 573 Dhp 243 Dhp 283; acc bhikkhu Snp p. 78 MN i.84 Vv 2210 & bhikkhavo Snp 384 Snp 573 genitive dative bhikkhūnaṁ Vin iii.285 DN iii.264 Snp 1015 Pv ii.17; & bhikkhunaṁ SN i.190 Thag 1, 1231 instrumental bhikkhūhi Vin iii.175
    3. locative bhikkhūsu AN iv.25 & bhikkhusu Thag 1, 241 1207 Dhp 73 voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of nominative bhikkhavaḥ) Vin iii.175 Snp p. 78 Vv-a 127 Pv-a 8 Pv-a 39 Pv-a 166; & bhikkhavo Snp 280 Snp 385

      1. There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself Thus we mention here the following (a) bhikkhu = bhinnakilesa (“one who has broken the stains” i.e. of bad character) Vb-a 328 Vv-a 29 114, 310 Pv-a 51 (b) Another more explicit explanation is “sattannaṁ dhammānaṁ bhinnattā bhikkhu” (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā sīlabbata-parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna) This definition at Nd1 70 = Nd2 477a
      • (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable; bhi(-kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this definition it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh-) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to ‣See) and bhikkhu defined as “saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhati ti bh.” Vism 3, 16 (saṁsāre bhayaṁ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna-paṭa-dharaditāya vā)
      • AN very comprehensive definition of the term is found at Vb 245–⁠246, where bhikkhu-ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaṁ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna-paṭa-dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaṁ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.)
      • This passage is explained in detail at Vb-a 327 328
      • Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Ps i.176 Nd1 465 = Nd2 477b, viz kalyāṇa-ka-
      1. puthujjana (a layman of good character and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i.e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd1 130 (on Snp 810)
      1. ˚gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin i.148
      • ˚bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship DN i.176 Snp p. 102 -saṅgha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars DN iii.208 Snp 403 Snp 1015 Snp p. 101, 102 Mil 209 Pv-a 19f. & passim
      cp. later Sanskrit bhikṣu, from bhikṣ
    Bhikkhuka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu-, a monk’s, or of monks, in sa˚; with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin iv.307 308 opposite ; without bhikkhus, ibid
      from bhikkhu
    Bhikkhunī
    feminine
    1. an almswoman, a female mendicant a Buddhist nun DN iii.123f. 148, 168 sq., 264 Vin iv.224f. 258 sq. (˚sangha) SN i.128 SN ii.215f. iv.159 sq. AN i.88 AN i.113 AN i.279 AN ii.132 (˚parisā), 144 iii.109; iv.75 Mil 28 Vb-a 498 (dahara˚, story of) Vv-a 77
    from bhikkhu, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhiksuṇī, but classical Sanskrit bhikṣukī
    Bhiṅka
    1. the young of an animal, especially of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (bhinka-cchāpa) Ja v.418 (with reference to young cats: “mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṁ vuccati taruṇā bhinka-cchāpa-maṇḍalaṁ, Text ˚cchāca˚, variant readings bhiñjaka-cchāca; taruṇa-bhiga-cchāpa; bhinga-cchāja)
    cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee
    Bhiṅkāra1
    (& ˚gāra)
    1. a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin i.39 (sovaṇṇa-maya) DN ii.172 AN iv.210 = 214 (Text ˚gāra, variant reading ˚kāra); cp. i.35 Ja i.85 93; ii.371; iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚); Dīpavaṁsa xi.32 Pv-a 75 Kp-a 175 (suvaṇṇa˚; Burmese variant ˚gāra), Sdhp 513 (soṇṇa˚)
    cp. late Sanskrit bhṛngāra
    Bhiṅkāra2
    1. cheers, cries of delight (?) Bu i.35 (+ sādhu kāra)
    ?
    Bhiṅkāra3
    1. a bird: Lanius caerulescens Ja v.416
    cp. Sanskrit bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga-rājā
    Bhijjati
    1. to be broken, to be destroyed; to break instrumental; pres. bhijjati Dhp 148 ppr. bhijjamāna ‣See phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj˚, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā Ja vi.508 which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intransitive?). imperative bhijjatu Thag 1, 312

      • praet. 2; nd
      • plural bhijjittha Ja i.468
      • aorist abhedi Ud 93 (abhedi kāyo)
      • future bhijjhissati DN-a i.266
      • gerundive bhijjitabba Ja iii.56 on
      • gerundive ˚bhijja ‣See pabhindati;
      • gerundive bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q.v.)
      passive of bhindati, cp. Sanskrit bhidyate
    Bhijjana
    neuter
    1. breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction Ja i.392 Ja v.284 Ja vi.11 Dhp-a i.257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan’ ākāra-pattā) Thag-a 43 (bhijjana-sabhāva of perishable nature; explanation of bhidura Thag 2, 35) Pv-a 41 (˚dhammā destructible, of sankhārā)
    • Derived abhijjanaka ‣See sep
    from bhijjati
    Bhitti
    feminine
    1. a wall Vin i.48 DN ii.85 SN ii.103 SN iv.183 SN v.218 Ja i.491 Vism 354 = Vb-a 58 (in comparison) Thag-a 258 Vv-a 42 160, 271, 302 Pv-a 24
    1. ˚khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin ii.114 152
    2. ˚pāda the support or lower part of a wall Ja iv.318
    from bhid, cp. * Sanskrit bhitta fragment, & Classical Sanskrit bhitti wall
    Bhittika
    adjective
    1. having a wall or walls Ja iv.318 (naḷa ˚ā paṇṇasālā; vi.10 (catu˚ with 4 walls)
    from bhitti
    Bhidura
    adjective
    1. fragile, perishable, transitory Thag 2, 35 (= bhijjana-sabhāva Thag-a 43)
    from bhid
    Bhindati
    1. to split, break, sever destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with derivation *bhed) *bhind;
    • (a) *bhid :
    • aorist 3rd singular abhida (= Sanskrit abhidat) DN ii.107 Ja iii.29 (‣ See also under abhida) abbhidā Ja i.247 Ja ii.163 Ja ii.164
    • future bhecchati (Sanskrit bhetsyati) AN i.8
    • absolutive bhetvā (Sanskrit bhittvā) Thag 1, 753 Snp 62 (Burmese variant bhitvā).
    • gerundive bhejja : only neg abhejja (q.v.) ‣See also derivation bheda, bhedana
    • pp bhinna & Pass.; bhijjati
    • (b) *bhind : pres. bhindati Nd1 503 Dhp-a i.125 (kathaṁ bh. to break a promise) Sdhp 47
    • ppr. bhindanto Mhvs 5, 185
    • Pot bhinde Vism 36 (sīlasaṁvaran)
    • future bhindissati Vin ii.198
    • aorist bhindi Ja i.467 (mitta-bhāvaṁ),; abhindi AN iv.312 (atta-sambhavaṁ).
    • absolutive bhinditvā Ja i.425 Ja i.490 Pv-a 12 also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one’s senses, i.e. mastering, controlling them Ja ii.274 Ja iv.104 Ja iv.114 Ja iv.190
    • causative I. bhedeti ‣See vi˚.
    • causative II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken Ja i.290 (sīlaṁ); vi.345 (pokkharaṇiṁ) and bhedāpeti Vin iii.42
    • ‣ See also bhindana
    bhid, Sanskrit bhinatti; cp. Latin findo to split, Gothic beitan = German beissen. Definition at Dhtp 381, 405 by “vidāraṇe” i.e. splitting
    Bhindana
    adjective
    1. breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin SN i.131 (kāya)
    from bhindati
    Bhindivāla
    1. a sort of spear Ja vi.105 Ja vi.248 Abhp 394
    Non-Aryan; Epic Sanskrit bhindipāla spear, but cp. Prakrit bhiṇḍi-māla & ˚vāla, Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 248 ‣See also Geiger, Pali Grammar § 38
    Bhinna
    1. broken, broken up (literally & figuratively) Snp 770 (nāvā) Ja i.98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); iii.167 (uda-kumbha) Pv-a 72 (˚sarīra-cchavi)
    2. (figuratively) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing DN iii.117 = 210, 171
    3. Usually in compounds., & often to be translated by preposition “without,” e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame
    4. cp. sam˚
      1. ˚ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Mil 229f. (opposite parisuddh’ ājīva); Vism 306 -nāva ship-wreeked Ja iv.159
      • ˚paṭa a torn cloth, in compound ˚dhara “wearing a patchwork cloth,” i.e. a bhikkhu (‣ See also s. v. bhikkhu) Thag 1, 1092
      • ˚plava ship-wrecked Ja iii.158
      • ˚manta disobeying (i.e. breaking) a counsel Ja vi.437
      • ˚sira with a broken head Ja iv.251
      • ˚sīmā
      • feminine one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Mil 122
      • ˚sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism 56
      • ˚hirottappa without shame, shameless Ja i.207
      past participle of bhindati
    Bhinnatta
    neuter
    1. state of being broken or destroyed, destruction AN iv.144
    from bhinna
    Bhiyyo
    1. (Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form from bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sanskrit bhūyaḥ: Pali bhiyyo cp. Sanskrit jugupsate: Pali jigucchati.1. adjective more Snp 61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (identical) 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha) Dhp 313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati)
    2. (
    3. adverb ) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further SN i.108 (appaṁ vā bhīyo less or more) Snp 434 (bh. cittaṁ pasīdati) Dhp 18 (bh. nandati = ativiya n. Commentary ) Mil 40
    4. ‣ See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena
      1. ˚kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin ii.214
      • ˚bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication DN iii.221 Vin iii.45 SN v.9 SN v.198 SN v.244 AN i.98 AN v.70 Vb-a 289

    Bhiyyoso
    adverb
    1. still more, more and more, only in compound ˚mattāya [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhūyasyā mātrāya MVastu ii.345; Divy 263 & passim exceedingly, abundantly AN i.124 = Pug 30 (explained at PugA 212 by “bhiyyoso-mattāya uddhumāyana-bhāvo daṭṭhabbo”) Ja i.61 Pv-a 50
    ablative formation from bhiyyo 1
    Bhisa
    neuter
    1. the sprout (from the root) of a lotus the lotus fibres, lotus plant SN i.204 SN ii.268 Ja i.100 iv.308
    1. ˚puppha the lotus flower Snp 2 (= paduma-puppha Snp-a 16)
    2. ˚muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus Ja v.39 Vism 361
    cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 40 1a
    Bhisakka
    1. a physician MN i.429 AN iii.238 iv.340 Iti 101 Mil 169 Mil 215 Mil 229 Mil 247f. 302; Vism 598 (in simile) DN-a i.67 255
    cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, Pali bhesajja medicine & ‣See Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 631
    Bhisi1
    feminine
    1. a bolster, cushion pad, roll Vin i.287f. (cīvara˚ a robe rolled up); ii.150 170; iii.90; iv.279. Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa-bhisi, cola˚, vāka˚, tiṇu˚, paṇṇa˚, i.e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton-cloth, bark, grass or talipot leaves, Vin ii.150 = Vb-a 365 (tiṇa˚)
    1. ˚bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin i.47 Vin ii.208 Dhp-a i.416 Vb-a 365
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prakrit bhisī, cp. Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 209
    Bhisi2
    1. a raft Snp 21
    • Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s.v. identifies it with bhisi1 and asks: “Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass used instead of a swimming girdle?”
    etymology?
    Bhisikā
    feminine
    1. a small bolster Vin ii.148 (vātapāna˚ a roll to keep out draughts); Kp-a 50 (tāpasa˚ variant reading Kk kapala-bhitti ‣See Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.)
    from bhisi1
    Bhismā
    feminine
    1. terror, fright DN ii.261 (˚kāya adjective terrific)
    = bhiṁsā
    Bhīta
    1. frightened, terrified, afraid Dhp 310 Ja i.168 (niraya-bhaya˚); ii.110 (maraṇa-bhaya˚), 129 iv.141 (+ tasita) Pv-a 154 Pv-a 280 (+ tasita). cp. sam˚
    past participle of bhāyati
    Bhībhaccha
    1. ‣See bībhaccha
    Bhīma
    adjective
    1. dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful Ja iv.26 Mil 275
    1. ˚kāya of horrible body, terrific Ja v.165
    • ˚rūpa of terrifying appearance Thag 2, 353
    • ˚sena having a terrifying army Ja iv.26 Ja vi.201 Also proper name of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu Ja v.426 Vism 233
    from bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma
    Bhīmala
    adjective
    1. terrifying, horrible, awful Ja v.43 (Text bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; Commentary explains by bhiṁsanaka-mahāsadda)
    from bhīma
    Bhīrati
    passive to bharati, only in compound ppr. anubhīramāna MN iii.123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind) Neumann, M. translation2iii.248 translates “über ihm schwebt,” & proposes reading (on p. 563); anu-hīramāna (from hṛ;). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at DN ii.15.
    Bhīru
    adjective noun
    1. fearful, i.e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha˚); usually in negative abhīru not afraid, without fear, combined with anutrāsin ‣See utrāsin
    2. fearful i.e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv ii.41 (˚dassana terrible to look at)
      • masculine fear, cowardice Snp 437 (= utrāsa Snp-a 390).

        1. ˚ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adjective one who protects those who are in fear AN ii.174 Iti 25 Sdhp 300
        from bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru
    Bhīruka
    adjective
    1. afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning (—˚) Vism 7 (pāpa˚), 645 (jīvitu-kāma bhīruka-purisa)
    from bhīru
    Bhīsana
    adjective = bhiṁsana (q.v.) Pv iv.35 (variant reading in Pv-a 251), explained by bhayajanana Pv-a 251 where Commentary reading also bhīsana.
    Bhukka
    adjective
    1. barking, n a barker, i.e. dog; only in reduplicated intens. formation bho-bhu-kka (cp. English bow-wow), literally bhu-bhu-maker (: kka from kṛ; ?) Ja vi.354 (Commentary bhun-karaṇa) ‣See also bhussati
    from onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prakrit bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning “garjati ‣See Pali gajjati, cp. also Prakrit bukkaṇa crow
    Bhuṅkaraṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. making “bhu,” i.e. bow-wow, barking Ja vi.355 (˚sunakha) variant reading bhu-bhukka-sadda-karaṇa
    bhu + kṛ; ‣See bhukka
    Bhucca
    adjective
    1. only in compound yathā-bhuccaṁ neuter
    2. adverb as it is, that which really is, really (= yathā bhūtaṁ) Thag 2, 143 ‣See under yathā
    3. absolutive of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya → *bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) from pra + i In function equal to bhūta
    Bhuja1
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. the arm Snp 48 (explained by Nd2 478 as hattha, hand); 682 (plural bhujāni) Ja v.91 Ja v.309 Ja vi.64 Bu i.36 Vv 6418
      2. cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit bhuja
      3. masculine & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, literally “the bender”; the root is explained by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521) ‣See also bhuja3. Indogermanic *bheṅg, from which also Latin fugio to flee = Latin fuga flight = Sanskrit bhoga ring, Old High German bouc; Gothic biugan to bend =
      4. absolutive beugen & biegen; Old High German bogo = English bow. Semantically cp. Latin lacertus the arm, i.e. the bend, from *leq to bend to which Pali laguḷa a club (q.v. for etymology), with which cp. Latin lacerta = lizard, similar in connotation to Pali bhujaga snake
    Bhuja2
    1. clean, pure, bright, beautiful Ja vi.88 (˚dassana beautiful to look at; Commentary explains by kalyāṇa dassana)
    from bhuñjati2
    Bhuja3
    adjective
    1. bending, crooked, in bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree Ja vi.456 (Commentary bhujangalatā perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd bhuja-ga going crooked, i.e. snake Mil 420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujaṅga Dāvs 2, 56, & in derivation; bhujaṅga-latā “snakecreeper,” i.e. name of the betel-pepper Ja vi.457 and bhujaṅgama SN i.69
    • cp. bhogin2
    from bhuj to bend
    Bhujaka
    1. a fragrant tree growing (according to Dhammapāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 355 Vv-a 162
    from bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhuja-laṭṭhi?
    Bhujissa
    1. (n.
    2. masculine ) a freed slave freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin i.93 Ja ii.313 Pv-a 112
    3. bhujissaṁ karoti to grant freedom to a slave Ja v.313 Ja vi.389 Ja vi.546 Dhp-a i.19 Thag-a 200
    4. feminine bhujissā Vin ii.271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin i.93)
    5. adjective freeing from slavery productive of freedom DN ii.80 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.80); iii.245 SN ii.70 SN iv.272 AN iii.36 AN iii.132 AN iii.213 Vism 222 (with exegesis). cp. bhoja & bhojaka
      1. ˚bhāva state of being freed from slavery, freedom Thag-a 200
      cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhujiṣya Divy 302 according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning “clean”; thus from bhuj ‣See bhuñjati2 to purify, sort out
    Bhuñjaka
    adjective
    1. eating, one who eats or enjoys, in ˚sammuti definition of “eater,” speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating Vb-a 164
    from bhuñjati1
    Bhuñjati1

    1. to Latin fruor, frūx = English fruit, frugal etc.; Gothic brūkjan = As. brūkan = German brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) explainsbhuj by “pālan ajjhohāresu,” i.e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Snp 102 Snp 240 Snp 259 Snp 619 Dhp 324 Pug 55 Pot. bhuñjeyya Snp 400 Dhp 308 Dhp 2nd pl bhuñjetha Dhp 70 Mhvs 25, 113.
    2. imperative 2nd med bhuñjassa SN v.53 SN v.3rd active bhuñjatu SN i.141 Snp 479 bhuñjassu Snp 421 ppr. bhuñjanto Ja iii.277: bhuñjamāna Thag 1, 12 Snp 240
    3. future 1st singular bhokkhaṁ [Sanskrit bhoksyāmi
      1. Ja iv.117 aorist 1st singular bhuñjiṁ Miln 47 3rd singular bhuñji Ja iv.370 3rd
      2. plural abhuñjiṁsu Thag 1, 922
      3. abhuñjisuṁ Mhvs 7, 25. German bhutvā Ja iii.53 (= bhuñjitvā Commentary ) Dhp-a i.182
      4. bhutvāna Snp 128 Grd bhuñjitabba Mhvs 5, 127. infinitive bhottuñ ‣See ava˚.
      5. past participle bhutta.
      6. causative bhojeti (q.v.) cp. bhoga bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desidentical
      7. past participle bubbhukkhita; & ābhuñjati
      8. bhuj
    Bhuñjati2

    1. to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. cp. Avestan buxti purification buj to clean, also Latin fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. English function), Gothic us-baugjan to sweep; Pali paribhuñjati.2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati ‣See Kern,; Toevoegselen p. 104, s.v. bhujissa] to clean, purify cleanse ‣See bhuja2 and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka
    bhuj
    Bhuñjana
    neuter [
    1. taking food, act of eating, feasting Ja iv.371 (˚kāraṇa) Pv-a 184
    1. ˚kāla meal-time Dhp-a i.346
    from bhuñjati1
    Bhutta
    1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Snp p. 15 Dhp 308 impersonal eating Vin iv.82 (bhuttaṁ hoti). Also ˚geha eating house Ja v.290 and in phrase yathā-bhuttaṁ bhuñjatha “eat according to eating,” i.e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation DN ii.173 (where Rhys Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha ii.203, translates “ye shall eat as ye have eaten”) = iii.62, 63 (where Rhys Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha iii.64 translates “enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do” ‣See note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense
    2. dubbhuttaṁ, indigestible
    3. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Mil 370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy’ âhaṁ); also in phrase bhutta-pātar-āsa after having eaten breakfast Ja ii.273 Dhp-a iv.226
      1. ˚āvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin ii.216
      past participle of bhuñjati1; Sanskrit bhukta
    Bhuttar
    1. one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) Ja v.465 (ahaṁ bhuttā bhakkhaṁ ras’ uttamaṁ)
    agent noun from bhuj, cp. Sanskrit bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic
    Bhuttavant
    adjective
    1. having eaten, one who has eaten Ja v.170 (= kata-bhatta-kicca) Vv-a 244
    bhutta + vant
    Bhuttāvin
    adjective
    1. having eaten, one who has had a meal nominative singular bhuttāvī Vin iv.82 Mil 15 (+ onīta-pattapāṇi) Pv-a 23 (+ pavārita) Snp-a 58 instrumental bhuttāvinā Vin iv.82 genitive dative bhuttavissa DN ii.195 accusative bhuttāviṁ Vin i.213 Snp p. 111 (+ onīta-pattapāṇiṁ) Ja v.170 nominative
    2. plural bhuttāvī Vin iv.81 & bhuttāvino SN iv.289
    3. bhutta + suffix ˚āvin, corresponding to Vedic ˚āyin
    Bhumma
    adjective-noun
    1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial;
    2. neuter soil, ground, floor Snp 222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (identical); Sdhp 420 (sabba-bhummā khattiyā).
    3. plural bhummā the earthly ones, i.e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842 (= bhumma-deva Vv-a 334)-nt. ground: Pv ii.102 (yāva bhummā down to the ground); Burmese variant bhūm(i)
    4. the
    5. locative case Kp-a 106, 111, 224 Snp-a 140 210, 321, 433 Pv-a 33
      1. ˚attharaṇa “earth-spread,” a ground covering, mat carpet Vin i.48 Vin ii.208 Vin iv.279
      • ˚antara “earth-occasion,” i.e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Mil 163 Dhs-a 296
      • in ˚pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i.e. cosmogony Dhs-a 3
      • ˚antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Mil 178 The form would correspond to Sanskrit *bhaum-āntarīkṣa
      • ˚jāla “terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) Snp-a 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). cp. bhūrikamma bhūrivijjā

        • ; ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the earth, earthly Vin iii.47 (b) standing on the earth Dhp 28
        • (c) resting on the earth Mil 181 Also as ˚ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) Ja iii.87
        • ˚deva a terrestrial deva or fairy AN iv.118 Ps ii.149 Vb-a 12 Dhp-a i.156 Vv-a 334 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 215 Pv-a 277
        • ˚devatā = ˚deva Ja iv.287 (= yakkha); Kp-a 120
        from bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya
    Bhummi1
    feminine
    1. that which belongs to the ground, i.e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as technical term in philosophy) Dhs-a 277 (˚y-āpatti), 339 (identical), 985 (dukkha˚), 1368, 1374 sq ‣See Dhs translation2 231
    from bhumma
    Bhummi2
    1. a voc. of friendly address “my (dear) man” (literally terrestrial) Vin ii.304 (= piyavacanaṁ Buddhaghosa)
    old voc. of bhumma
    Bhuyya
    1. the regular Pali representative of Sanskrit bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q.v.) Only in compound yebhuyyena (q.v.)
    Bhuvi
    1. ‣See bhū;
    Bhusa1
    1. chaff, husks AN i.241
    • ˚āgāra chaff-house) Dhp 252 (opuṇāti bhusaṁ to sift husks) Ud 78 Pv iii.41; iii.107 Vv-a 47 (tiṇa litter)
    cp. Vedic busa neuter & buśa
  • masculine
  • Bhusa2
    adjective
    1. strong, mighty, great Dhp 339 (taṇhā = balavā Dhp-a iv.48) Ja v.361 (daṇḍa daḷha, balavā Commentary )
    • nt. bhusaṁ (
    • adverb ) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In compounds. bhusaṁ˚ & bhusa˚-S; i.69 Ja iii.441 Ja iv.11 Ja v.203 (bhusa-dassaneyya) vi.192 Vv 69 Pv.338; iv.77 Mil 346 Snp-a 107 (“verbum intensivum”); Sdhp 289
    cp. Vedic bhṛśa
    Bhusati, Bhussati
    1. to bark DN-a i.317 (bhusati variant readings bhussati & bhūsati) Dhp-a i.171 172
    • ‣ See also bhasati & bhukka; -
    • past participle bhusita
    perhaps a legitimate form for Sanskrit bhaṣate ‣See Pali bhasati, with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati ‣See under bhasati is unfounded
    Bhusikā
    feminine
    1. chaff AN i.242 Vin ii.181
    from bhusa1
    Bhusita
    1. barking Ja iv.182 (˚sadda, barking, noise) ‣See also bhasita
    past participle of bhusati
    Bhuseti
    1. to make strong, to cause to grow (?) Ja v.218 (Commentary explains by “bhusaṁ karoti, vaḍḍheti” p. 224)
    denominative from bhusa2 = *bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sanskrit bhūṣati
    Bhū1
    1. adjective being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being) Ja v.79 (= pāṇa-bhūta Commentary )
    from bhū
    Bhū2
    feminine
    1. the earth; locative bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is
    2. aorist 3rd singular of bhū ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 516; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 865
    3. from bhū, otherwise bhūmi
    Bhūkuṭi

    feminine

    1. frown, anger, superciliousness MN i.125 (variant reading bhakuṭi & bhā˚) Ja v.296
    a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q.v cp. Sanskrit bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi
    Bhūja
    1. the Bhūrja tree, i.e. a kind of willow Ja v.195 Ja v.405 (in both places = ābhujī), 420
    cp. late Sanskrit bhūrja, with which related Latin fraxinus ash, Anglo-Saxon beorc = English birch, German birke
    Bhūta
    1. grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. The (exegetical) definition by Buddhaghosa of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at M AN i.31) distinguishes the following 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with reference MN i.260 (2) ghosts (amanussā) Snp 222 (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus SN iii.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṁ) Vin iv.25 (bhūtaṁ) (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. “kālaghaso bhūto,” where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) Ja ii.260 (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) DN ii.157 (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh’ ādayo Vin iv.34 (as bhūta-gāma)
    • Meanings: 1. bhūtā bhūtāni; (
    • plural ) beings, living beings, animate Nature Snp 35 (explained at Nd2 479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā movable & immovable SN ii.47 (Kindred Sayings ii.36) mind and body as come-to-be Dhp 131 (bhūtāni), 405 MN i.2 sq (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4 M AN i.32 The
    • plural neuter bhūtāni is used as
    • plural to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enumerated under term mahā- bhūtāni
    • neuter nature, creation world MN i.2 (bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i.e. from the fact of being nature) Dhs-a 312 (˚pasāda-lakkhaṇa ‣See Expositor 409) ‣See compounds. ˚gāma, ˚pubba (?)

    • neuter adjective that which is i.e. natural, genuine, true;
    • neuter truth; negative abhūta falsehood, lie Snp 397 Pv-a 34 ‣See compounds. ˚bhāva ˚vacana, ˚vāda
    • a supernatural being, ghost demon, Yakkha;
    • plural bhūtā guardian genii (of a city Ja iv.245 ‣See compounds. ˚vijja, ˚vejja

  • (—˚)

    • past participle in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Buddhaghosa’s meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz mātu-bhūtā having been his mother Pv-a 78 abhūtapubbaṁ bhūtaṁ what has never happened before happened (now) DN-a i.43 (in explanation of abbhuta); -(b having become such & such, being like, acting as, being quâsi (as it were), consisting of, e.g. andha˚ blind, as it were Ja vi.139 aru˚ consisting of wounds Dhp-a iii.109 udapāna˚ being a well, a well so to speak Pv-a 78 opāna˚ acting as a spring AN iv.185 hetu as reason, being the reason Pv-a 58 cp. cakkhu˚ having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all.

      1. ˚kāya body of truth Dhp-a i.11
      • gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Buddhaghosa understands the 5 bīja-jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power ‣See bīja), viz mūla-bījaṁ, khandha˚, phala˚, agga˚, bīja˚. Thus in Commentary on Vin iv.34 (the so-called bhūtagāma-sikkhāpada quoted at Dhp-a iii.302 & Snp-a 3); cp. MN iii.34 Ja v.46 Mil 3 Mil 244
      • ˚gāha possession by a demon Mil 168 (cp. Divy 235)
      • ˚ṭṭhāna place of a ghost Kp-a 170 -pati (a) lord of beings Ja v.113 (of Inda); vi.362 (identical) Vv 641 (identical). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas Ja vi.269 (of Kuvera)
      • ˚pubba (a) as adjective (—˚) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305; also at Snp-a 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla-rājā bhūtapubbo)
      • (b) as adv (bhūtapubbaṁ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin ii.201 DN i.92 DN ii.167 DN ii.285 DN ii.337 MN i.253 MN iii.176 SN i.216 SN i.222 SN i.227 SN iv.201 SN v.447 AN iv.136 = Vism 237 AN iv.432 Ja i.394 Dhp-a i.56
      • ˚bhavya past and
      • future DN i.18
      • ˚bhāva truthful character, negative a˚ Pv-a 14
      • ˚vacana statement of reality or of the truth Snp-a 336
      • ˚vādin truthful speaking the truth MN i.180 DN iii.175 Pug 58
      • untruthful Dhp 306 Ja ii.416
      • ˚vikāra a natural blemish fault of growth, deformity Snp-a 189 (opposite nibbikāra) -vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism DN i.9 Dhp i.93 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.17)
      • ˚vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin iv.84 Ja ii.215 Ja iii.511 Mil 23
      past participle of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta
  • Bhūtatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having grown, become or being created (i.e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism 310 (in definition of bhūtā); M AN i.32 (identical)
    abstract from bhūta
    Bhūtanaka
    1. a fragrant grass; Andropogon schoenanthus Ja vi.36 (= phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so variant reading for Text bhūtinaka)
    cp. * Sanskrit bhūtṛna
    Bhūtika
    adjective (—˚) in compound cātummahā˚ belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements MN i.515
    Bhūnaha
    1. a destroyer of beings Snp 664 (voc. bhūnahu, explained by Snp-a 479 as “bhūti-hanaka vuddhi-nāsaka”; variant readings bhūnahaṭa bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word) Ja v.266 (plural bhūnahuno, explained by C 272 as “isīnaṁ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh.”). cp. MN i.502 (“puritanical” suggested by Lord Chalmers)
    2. difficult to explanation; is it an old misspelling for bhūta + gha? The latter of han ?
    Bhūma
    (—˚)
    1. (literally) ground, country, district SN iii.5 (pacchā˚ the western district)
    2. (figuratively ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Snp 896 (avivāda˚ ground of harmony; according to Snp-a 557 epithet of Nibbāna)
    = bhūmi
    Bhūmaka
    1. (& ˚ika) adjective (only—˚)

      1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve˚ pāsāda Dhp-a i.414
      2. pañca˚ pāsāda a palace with 5 stories Ja i.58 Ja i.89
      3. satta˚ with 7 stories (pāsāda) Dhp-a ii.1 260. The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.182 (dve˚ geha). 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti˚ from the land of (their) birth MN i.147
      4. pacchā˚ from the western country SN iv.312 (brāhmaṇā)
      5. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta˚ & mahā˚; Vb 340
      6. te˚ in 3 planes Snp-a 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (˚vaṭṭa) Dhp-a i.36 (kusala), 305 (˚vaṭṭa); iv.69 (tebhūmaka-vaṭṭa-sankhātaṁ Māra-bandhanaṁ), 72 (dhammā) catu˚; in 4 planes Dhs-a 296 (kusala) Dhp-a i.35 (citta) The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.288 (with reference to citta)
      from bhūma, or bhūmi
    Bhūmi
    feminine [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Avestan būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati ‣See bhavati1. (literally) ground, soil, earth Vin ii.175 Snp 418 (yāna carriage road) Pv i.1014Snp-a 353 (heṭṭhā-bhūmiyaṁ under the earth) Dhp-a i.414 (identical, opposite upari-bhūmiyaṁ)
    • place, quarter, district, region MN i.145 (jāti district of one’s birth) Snp 830 (vighāta˚) Nd2 475 (danta˚) Dhp-a i.213 (āpāna˚) Pv-a 80 (susāna˚)-uyyāna˚; garden (-place or locality) Vv 6419 Pv ii.129 Ja i.58

  • (figuratively) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. i.17 Vb 322f.; Vism 126, 442 (with reference to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha-bhūmi asekha-bhūmi), 517 (paññā˚-niddesa). Usually—˚ indriya˚ Nett 192; dassana˚ plane of insight Nett 8, 14 50; sukha˚ ground for happiness Dhs 984 (cp Dhs-a 214)

    • bhūmi-ttaya the 3 stages, viz kāmâvacara, rūpâvacara, lokuttara Vism 493
    • pl bhūmiyo Ps ii.205 = Vism 384 (applied to the 4 jhānas) purisa˚ (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual viz. manda-bhūmi, khiḍḍā˚, vīmaṁsana˚, ujugata˚ sekha˚, samaṇa˚, jina˚, panna˚, or as translated by Rhys Davids in Dialogues of the Buddha i.72, under “eight stages of a prophet’s existence”; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. cp. the 10 decades of man’s life, as given by Buddhaghosa at Vism 619)
    • Buddhaghosa, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as “mahā-paṭhavī” and as “cittuppāda” (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def (at Dhs-a 214) is vague & only popular
    • An old loc of bhūmi is; bhumyā, e.g. Ja i.507 Ja v.84 Another form of bhūmi at end of compounds. is bhūma (q.v.)
    1. ˚kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Mil 178
    • ˚gata “gone into the soil,” i.e. hiding, stored away Ja i.375
    • ˚ghana thick soil Snp-a 149 cp. paṭhavi-ghana ibid. 146
    • ˚tala ground (-surface) Pv-a 186
    • ˚padesa place or region upon the earth Ja vi.95
    • ˚pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil DN iii.87 = Vism 418
    • ˚pothana beating the ground Dhp-a i.171
    • ˚bhāga division of the earth, district Ja i.109 Ja v.200 Vv-a 125 Pv-a 29 Pv-a 154 -laddh' (uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence Snp-a 4
    • ˚saya lying or sleeping on the ground Dhp-a ii.61

  • Bhūri1
    feminine
    1. the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Ps ii.197 ‣See also definition at Dhs-a 147 Besides these only in 2 doubtful compounds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma DN i.12 explained as “practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth-house” (?) DN-a i.97 but cp. Vedic bhūri-karman “much effecting”; and bhūrivijjā DN i.9 explained as “knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth-house” (?) DN-a i.93 ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests ‣See Toevoegselen s.v.) quite a different popular practice behind them which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri-vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures) and ˚kamma might be “making gold” (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma-jāla is to be connected with these two
    cp. late Sanskrit bhūr
    Bhūri2
    adjective
    1. wide, extensive, much, abundant, Dhs-a 147 (in definition of the term bhūri1, i.e. earth); otherwise only in compounds.: ˚pañña adjective of extensive wisdom, very wise SN iv.205 Snp 346 Snp 792 Snp 1097 Snp 1143 Pv iii.55; Ps ii.197 (“paṭhavī-samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paññāya samannāgato ti bhūripañño, with other definitions) Nd1 95 (same explanation as under Ps ii.197) Nd2 415 Commentary (identical). ˚paññāṇa
    2. adjective same as ˚pañña Snp 1136 ≈ (cp. Nd2 480). ˚medhasa
    3. adjective very intelligent SN i.42 SN i.174 SN iii.143 AN iv.449 Snp 1131 Snp 1136 Thag 1, 1266 Pv iii.77
    4. cp. Vedic bhūri
    Bhūrī
    feminine
    1. knowledge, understanding intelligence Dhp 282 quoted at Dhs-a 76 (explained as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth Dhs 16 Dhp-a iii.421 same explanation at Dhs-a 148) Ja vi.415
    is it original? cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bhūri in same sense at Lal. v.444, 541; MVastu iii.332
    Bhūsana
    neuter
    1. ornament, decoration Vism 10 (yatino-sīla-bhūsana-bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi-vibhūsitā)
    from bhūṣ
    Bhūsā
    feminine
    1. ornament, decoration, only in compound bhūsa-(read bhūsā-)dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv iii.32
    from bhūṣ
    Bhūseti
    1. to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in past participle bhūsita adorned with (—˚) Pv ii.952, 127; iii.35 Ja vi.53 cp. vi˚
    2. causative of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning “to adorn” etc. explained at Dhtp. 315, 623 by "alaṅkāra”
    Bheka
    1. a frog Thag 1, 310 Ja iii.430 Ja iv.247 Ja vi.208
    cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.
    Bhecchati
    1. is future of bhindati (q.v.)

    Bhejja
    adjective
    1. to be split, only in negative form abhejja not to be split or sundered Snp 255 Ja i.263 Ja iii.318 Pug 30 Mil 160 Mil 199
    gerundive of bhindati
    Bhejjanaka
    adjective
    1. breakable; like bhejja only in negative form abhejjanaka indestructible Ja i.393
    from bhejja
    Bheṇḍi
    1. a kind of missile used as a weapon arrow Vin iii.77 (where enumerated with asi, satti & laguḷa in explanation of upanikkhipana)
    perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling; for bheṇḍu = kaṇḍu2
    Bheṇḍu
    1. a ball, bead; also a ball-shaped ornament or turret, cupola Thag 1, 164 ‣See kaṇḍu2 Ja i.386 (also ˚maya ball-shaped); iii.184 (variant reading geṇḍu)
    with variant reading geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived from kaṇḍuka (although; kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Thag 1, 164 ‣See kaṇḍu2), but belongs with Prakrit geṇḍui play & Pali geṇḍuka and the originally Sanskrit words genduka, ginduka geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root; gid, giḍ, Prakrit giṇḍai to play Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 90 says: “I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball”
    Bheṇḍuka1
    1. a ball for playing Ja iv.30 Ja iv.256 Ja v.196 vi.471 Dhs-a 116 ‣See also geṇḍuka
    in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The variant reading is found at all passages. Besides this occur the variant readings keṇḍuka (= kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika
    Bheṇḍuka2
    1. a knob, cupola, round tower Ja i.2 (mahā-bh˚-pamāṇa)
    from bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka1
    Bhettar
    1. a breaker, divider. AN v.283
    agent noun from bhid
    Bheda
    1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism 64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaṁsa), 572 sq (with reference to upādāna & bhava) Vb-a 185 (identical); Sdhp 66 Sdhp 457 Sdhp 463
    2. mithu˚ breaking of alliance DN ii.76 Ja iv.184 Kvu 314
    3. vacī˚ breaking of [the rule as to speech Mil 231
    4. saṅgha˚ disunion in the Sangha Vin ii.203
    5. sīla˚ breach of morality Ja v.163
    6. abl bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i.e. after the breaking up of the body & after death ‣See kāya i.e. & cp. DN iii.52, 146 sq., 258 Dhp 140 Pug 51
    7. (—˚) sort kind, as adjective consisting of, like Ja ii.438 Ja vi.3 (kaṭuk ādi˚) Dhp-a iii.14 (kāya-sucarit'-ādi˚-bhadra-kammāni) Snp-a 290 (Avīci-ādi—˚ niraya)
      1. ˚kara causing division or dissension Vin ii.7 Vin iii.173 v.93 (cp. Vin i.354 & Vinaya Texts iii.266 for the 18 errors in which the Sangha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong) Dhs-a 29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda-kara-vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension)
      from bhid, cp. Vedic & Classical Sanskrit bheda in same meanings
    Bhedaka
    adjective noun
    1. breaking, dividing, causing disunion; masculine divider Vin ii.205 Ja vi.382

      • nt. adv bhedakaṁ, as in ˚nakha in such a way as to break a nail DN-a i.37
      from bheda
    Bhedana
    neuter
    1. breaking (open), in puṭa˚; breaking of the ‣Seed-boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for “merchandise” Mil 1 ‣See under puṭa
    2. (figuratively) breach, division, destruction AN iv.247 Dhp 138 Bu ii.7 Ja i.467 (mittabhāva˚)
      1. ˚dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable AN iv.386 Ja i.146 Ja i.392 Thag-a 254
      • ˚saṁvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin iii.173 Bhedapeti & Bhedeti;
      from bhid, as in causative bhedeti
    Bhedāpeti
    Bhedeti;
    1. are causative s of bhindati (q.v.)

    Bheraṇḍaka
    1. a jackal Ja v.270 the nominative probably formed after the
    2. accusative in phrase bheraṇḍakaṁ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal AN i.187
    3. cp. * Sanskrit bheruṇḍa
    Bherava
    adjective
    1. fearful, terrible, frightful Thag 1, 189 Snp 959 Snp 965 Snp 984 Nd1 370 467 Ja vi.520 Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, 31
    • bahu˚ very terrible AN iii.52 stricken with terror Ja vi.587-(n) terror, combined with bhaya fear & dismay MN i.17 AN iv.291 AN v.132 Thag 1, 367 1059
    • pahīna-bhayabherava having left behind (i.e. free from) fear terror SN iii.83
    1. ˚rāva cry of terror Mil 254
    from bhīru, cp. Epic Sanskrit bhairava
    Bheri
    feminine
    1. a kettle-drum (of large size Dhs-a 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā˚ & paṭaha˚ DN i.79 AN ii.185 Vv 8110 Ja vi.465 Dhp-a i.396 Sdhp 429
    • issara˚ the drum of the ruler or lord Ja i.283
    • paṭaha˚ kettle-drum Dpvs 16, 14 Dhs-a 319 Pv-a 4
    • yāma˚ (-velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch Ja v.459
    • bheriṁ vādeti to sound the drum Ja i.283
    • bheriyo vādentā (
    • plural ) beating (literally making sound) the drums Ja ii.110 bheriñ carāpeti to make the drum go round, i.e. to proclaim by beat of drum Ja v.41 Ja vi.10
    1. ˚caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in compounds. ˚magga the proclamation road Dhp-a ii.43 & ˚vīthi identical Dhp-a ii.45
    • ˚tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in comparison) Vb-a 80 (identical) -paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) AN ii.117
    • ˚vāda drum-sound, figuratively for a loud voice Pv-a 89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum)
    • ˚vādaka a drummer Ja i.283
    • ˚saññā sign of the drum Dhp-a i.396
    • ˚sadda sound of the drum Ja i.283
    cp. Epic Sanskrit bherī
    Bhesajja
    neuter
    1. a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin i.278 DN ii.266 MN i.30 Snp-a 154 446; Sdhp 393-bhesajjaṁ karoti to treat with a medicine Dhp-a i.25 mūla-bhesajjāni the principal medicines Mil 43 pañca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) Dhp-a i.5
    1. ˚kapālaka medicine bowl Vb-a 361
    • ˚sikkhāpada the medicine precepts Vb-a 69
    cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya = bheṣaja, from bhiṣaj ‣See also Pali bhisakka
    Bhesma
    adjective
    1. terrible, awful Vin ii.203 = It 86 (“bhesmā hi udadhī mahā,” so read for Vin. bhasmā with variant reading bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with Burmese variant bhesmā, misunderstood by ed
    • Buddhaghosa Vin ii.325 on Vin. passage explains by bhayānaka) Ja v.266 Ja vi.133 (variant reading bhasma)
    cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular Pali form is bhiṁsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma
    Bho
    indeclinable
    1. a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir friend, you, my dear; plural sirs DN i.88 DN i.90 DN i.93 DN i.111 MN i.484 Snp 427 Snp 457 Snp 487 with voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man Ja i.423
    2. bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans Ja ii.369 Double bho bho Dhp-a iv.158

      1. ˚vādika = ˚vādin Nd1 249
      2. ˚vādin a brahman, i.e. one who addresses others with the word “bho,” implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Snp 620 Dhp 396 Ja vi.211 214 Dhp-a iv.158
      voc. of bhavant, cp. Sanskrit bhoḥ which is the shortened voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form Pali āvuso → Sanskrit āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant
    Bhokkhaṁ
    1. is future of bhuñjati (q.v.)

    Bhokkhi
    1. at Vb-a 424 in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation from bhuj˚ (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ = bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaṁ), with ending ˚in; meaning “wishing to eat.” It corresponds to Sanskrit bhoktu-kāma. cp. also agent noun bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ enjoyer, eater. Pali bhokkhi might be Sanskrit bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being feminine The word is a curiosity.

    Bhoga1
    1. enjoyment AN iv.392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.)
    2. possession, wealth DN iii.77 Snp 301 Snp 421 Dhp 139 Dhp 355 Pug 30 57; Sdhp 86 Sdhp 228 264
    3. appa˚ little or no possession Snp 114
      1. ˚khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions DN ii.86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue)
      2. ˚gāma “village of revenue,” a tributary village, i.e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati “landlord” Ja ii.135 cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112
      3. ˚cāgin giving riches, liberal AN iii.128
      • ˚pārijuñña loss of property or possessions Vv-a 101
      • ˚mada pride or conceit of wealth Vb-a 466
      • ˚vāsin, as
      • feminine vāsinī “living in property, i.e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin iii.139 140 cp. MN i.286
      from bhuñj ‣See bhuñjati
    Bhoga2
    1. the coil of a snake Ja iii.58 ‣See also nib˚
    from bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sanskrit bhoga identical Hālayudha 3, 20
    Bhogatā
    1. (—˚) feminine

      1. condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra˚; being very rich MN iii.38
      abstract from bhoga
    Bhogavant
    adjective
    1. one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy Ja v.399 Mhvs 10, 20; Sdhp 511
    from bhoga
    Bhogika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having wealth or power, in antara˚; an intermediate aristocrat Vin iii.47
      from bhoga
    Bhogin1
    1. (—˚) adjective-noun

      1. enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e.g. to pleasure, kāma˚;) DN ii.80 DN iii.124 SN i.78 SN iv.331 SN iv.333 AN iii.289 v.177
      • m. owner, wealthy man MN i.366
      from bhoga
    Bhogin2
    adjective
    1. having coils, of a snake Ja iii.57 Ja vi.317
    from bhuj ‣See bhuja3
    Bhogiya
    1. is diaeretic form of Sanskrit bhogya = Pali bhogga2 with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika
    Bhogga1
    adjective
    1. bent, crooked MN i.88 DN ii.22 AN i.138 Ja iii.395
    from bhuj to bend, past participle corresponding to Sanskrit bhugna
    Bhogga2
    adjective
    1. to be enjoyed or possessed, noun property, possession in compound rāja˚; (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal DN i.87 AN i.244 AN i.284 ii.113, 170 Ja ii.370 Dhp-a i.313 (royal possessions in general) DN-a i.245 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit rājabhogya MVastu i.287 ‣See in detail under rāja-bhogga
    2. naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i.e. an ascetic Ja iv.160 Ja v.75 Ja vi.225
    3. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of “class” at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā rāja-bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble.”
    gerundive of bhuñj to enjoy, thus = Sanskrit bhogya
    Bhoja

    one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager subject. Only in compounds. like bhojisiyaṁ bhoja + isi ya = issariya

    1. mastery over dependence, i.e. independence SN i.44 SN i.45
    • bhojājānīya a well-trained horse, a thoroughbred Ja i.178 Ja i.179
    • bhojaputta son of a villager Ja v.165
    • bhojarājā head of a village (-district) a subordinate king Snp 553 = Th 1, 823

      • In the latter phrase however it may mean “wealthy” kings, or “titled kings (khattiyā bh-r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. “the nobles, royal kings.” It may be a term for “vice-kings” or substitute-kings, or those who are successors of the king. The explanation at Snp-a 453 takes the three words as three different terms and places bhojā bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (= bhogga) Neumann in his translation of Snp has “Königstämme, kühn and stolz,” free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (name of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for “king” (cp. Kaiser → Caesar) With the wording “khattiyā bhoja-rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te” cp. MN iii.173: “paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti,” and. AN v.22: “kuḍḍarājāno” in same phrase
      • Mrs. Rhys Davids at Brethren, p. 311, translates “nobles and wealthy lords.”
      literally gerundive of bhuñjati2, to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning “dependence, “training,” from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa
    Bhojan
    1. is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding Ja vi.207
    Bhojaka
    1. one who provides food, attendant at meals Ja v.413
    2. (is this from bhuñjati2 & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in; gāma˚; landholder, village headman ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.108 note & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104 sq. Ja i.199 Ja i.354 Ja i.483 Ja ii.135 (= gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); v.413 Dhp-a i.69 cp. bhojanaka
    from bhuj, bhojeti
    Bhojana
    neuter
    1. food, meal, nourishment in general Ja ii.218 Ja iv.103 Ja iv.173 Ja i.178 Ja iv.223 Snp 102 Snp 128 Snp 242 Snp 366 Snp 667 Dhp 7 Dhp 70 Pug 21 55 Mil 370 Vism 69, 106; Sdhp 52 Sdhp 388 Sdhp 407. Some similes with bhojana ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 119
    • tika˚ food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin ii.196 dub˚ having little or bad food Ja ii.368 Dhp-a iv.8
    • paṇīta˚ choice plentiful meals Vin iv.88
    • sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin iv.94
    • bhojane mattaññu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstract); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life SN ii.218 AN i.113f. Nd1 483. 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin iv.75 viz niccabhatta˚, salākabhatta˚, pakkhikaṁ, uposathikaṁ pāṭipadikaṁ
    • As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Sangha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaṁ, parampara-bhojanaṁ, atirittabhojanaṁ, anatirittabhojanaṁ mentioned at Kvu ii.552 ‣See Vin iv.71 77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna-samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions as enumerated at Vin iv.74
    • The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaṁ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin iv.74 cp. ii.196 v.128, 135; paramparabhojanaṁ said when a bhikkhu invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin iv.78
    • atirittabhojanaṁ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin iv.82
    • anatirittabhojanaṁ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin iv.84
    1. ˚aggadāna gift of the best of food Snp-a 270
    • ˚atthika in need of food, hungry Pv ii.929
    • ˚pariyantika restricting one’s feeding Vism 69
    • ˚vikati at Ja v.292 is to be read as bhājana˚ (q.v.)
    from bhuñjati
    Bhojanaka
    1. = bhojaka, in ˚gāma owner or headman of the village Ja ii.134 Bhojaniya, Bhojaniya, Bhojaneyya
    Bhojaniya, Bhojanīya, Bhojaneyya
    1. what may be eaten, eatable food; fit or proper to eat
    • bhojaniya : food Vin iv.92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal flour, maccha fish, maṁsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food Ja i.90 ‣See also khādaniya. bhojanīya : eatable SN i.167 cp. pari˚. bhojaneyya : fit to eat DN-a i.28 a˚ unfit to be eaten Snp 81 Ja v.15
    gerundive of bhuj, causative bhojeti. cp. bhuñjitabba
    Bhojin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. feeding on, enjoying AN iii.43 MN i.343 Snp 47 Ja ii.150 Pug 55
      from bhuj
    Bhojeti
    1. to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin i.243 Vin iv.71 Ja vi.577 Dhp-a i.101
    causative of bhuñjati
    Bhojja
    adjective
    1. to be eaten, eatable; khajja˚; what can be chewed & eaten DN-a; i.85. ˚yāgu “eatable rice-gruel,” i.e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin i.223 224
    gerundive of bhuñjati
    Bhojjha
    1. a good horse, a Sindh horse Ja i.180
    Bhoti
    1. feminine of bhavant (q.v.) Dhp-a iii.194 Bhottabba & Bhottum
    Bhottabba
    Bhottuṁ
    1. are gerundive & infinitive of bhuñjati (q.v.); bhottabba to be eaten Ja v.252 Ja v.253
    2. bhottuṁ to eat Ja ii.14

    Bhobhukka
    one making a barking sound, barker, i.e. dog Ja vi.345 (= bhunkaraṇa Commentary ).
    1. M
    intens-reduplicated of bhukk = bukk, to bark ‣See bhukka & cp. Sanskrit bukkati, bukkana

    M

    -M-
    1. euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid hiatus, as agga-m-agga the best of all Vin iv.232
    • aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb Vin iii.119 Vv 382 etc ‣See also SN iii.254 (yena-m-idh’ ekacco) Dhp 34 (oka-mokata ubbhato) Snp 765 (aññatra-m-ariyehi) Nd1 269 (dvaye-m-eva) Ja i.29 (asīti-hattha-m-ubbedha, for hatth’ ubbedha); iii.387 (katattho-m-anubujjhati); v.72 (orena-m-āgama); vi.266 (pacchā-m-anutappati) Snp-a 309 (rāg’ ādi-m-anekappakāraṁ)

      • On wrong syllable division through Sandhi-m-, and thus origin of specific Pali forms ‣See māsati
    Ma
    1. (-kāra) the letter or sound m Ja iii.273 (sandhi-vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); v.375 (ma-kāro sandhikaro); Kp-a 155, 224 Snp-a 181 383, 404
    Maṁsa
    neuter
    1. flesh, meat SN ii.97 (putta˚) Dhp 152 Ja iii.184 Pug 55 Vism 258 357 (in compar.) Dhp-a i.375 (putta˚); ii.51 (alla˚ living flesh) Vb-a 58 61 (pilotika-paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism 252, 354; Kp-a 46 Vb-a 235
    1. ˚ūpasecana sauce for meat Ja iii.144 = vi.24 Dhp-a i.344
    • ˚kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl ‣See kalyāṇa Ja i.394 Dhp-a i.387
    • ˚khādaka flesh-eater Ja vi.530
    • ˚cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight ‣See cakkhu III DN iii.219 Nd1 100 354
    • ˚dhovanī odaka water for washing meat Kp-a 54
    • ˚piṇḍika a meat-ball, lump of flesh Vism 256
    • ˚puñja a heap of flesh Vism 361 (in comparison) Vb-a 67
    • ˚pesi a piece of flesh or meat ‣See on simile Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 122 Vin ii.25 Vin iii.105 (˚ṁ vehāsaṁ gacchantiṁ addasaṁ) MN i.143 AN iii.97 Mil 280 Vism 195, 252, 468 Dhp-a i.164 Vb-a 235
    • ˚lohita flesh & blood Dhp 150
    cp. Vedic māṁsa, from Indogermanic *memsro-, as in Latin membrum limb (“member”); Goth mims flesh; Old Irish mīr bite, bit (of flesh)
    Maṁsi
    feminine
    1. a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi Ja vi.535
    cp. Sanskrit māṁsī
    Maṁsika
    1. a dealer in meat, meat-seller Mil 331
    2. in piṭṭhi˚; the ˚ka belongs to the whole compound, thus: one who is a backbiter a slanderer Snp 244 (= piṭṭhi-maṁsa-khādaka Snp-a 287). Similarly piṭṭhi-maṁsikatā (q.v.) Nd2 391
    from maṁsa; cp. * Sanskrit māṁsika
    Makaci
    a kind of cloth, material, fibre Dhp-a iii.68 (vākakhaṇḍa).
    1. ˚pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) Ja ii.96 Dhp-a ii.155 cp. makkhi-vāla
    2. ˚vāka masculine bark Vism 249 (+ akkavāka) Vb-a 232
    3. etymology?
    Makara
    1. a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 97 Ja ii.442 Ja iii.188 Mil 131 Mil 377 Thag-a 204 feminine makarinī Mil 67

      1. ˚dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin ii.113 cp. p. 315
      • as a design in painting or carving Vin ii.117 121, 152; iv.47. In these
      1. latter passages it occurs combined with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q.v.) The meaning is not quite clear
      cp. Epic Sanskrit makara
    Makaranda
    1. the nectar of a flower Ja vi.530
    cp. Classical Sanskrit makaranda
    Makasa
    mosquito Vin ii.119 SN i.52 (a˚ free from masaka) AN ii.117 Snp 20 Ja i.246 Sdhp 50 ‣See also compound ḍaṁsa˚.
    1. ˚kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin ii.119 130 -vījanī mosquito fan Vin ii.130
    from Vedic maśaka viâ *masaka → makasa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 472
    Makuṭa
    feminine
    1. a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa + , i.e. adornment)
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit makuṭa Divy 411
    Makula
    1. a bud (Hardy in Index to Vv-a gives “Mimusops elengi” after BR) Thag 2, 260 Vv 4526 Ja i.273 Ja ii.33 Ja iv.333 Ja v.207 (makuḷa), 416 Vism 230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma˚) Vv-a 177 (kaṇavīra˚) 194 (makuḷa), 197 (identical) Vb-a 228 239 (where Vism 256 has makulita, & Kp-a 53 mukulita)
    2. a knob Ja i.31 Ja ii.90 Vism 253 (kandala˚)
    3. variant reading at Nd2 485 B for pakulla (= pakuṭa).

      cp. Sanskrit makula
    Makkaṭa
    1. a monkey Ja i.385 Ja ii.267 Dhp-a ii.22 Vb-a 408 (˚niddā, a monkey’s sleep, said to be quickly changing); Kp-a 73 (in simile) Snp-a 522 (cp. Snp 791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka Ja ii.268 Kālabāhu Ja iii.98f.; on the monkey as a figure in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 119, to which add Vb-a 228 & 259 (tālavana˚), cp. Vism 245–⁠2. a spider ‣See ˚sutta.

      1. ˚chāpaka the young of a monkey MN i.385 Ja i.218
      • ˚sutta spider’s thread Ja v.47 Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.304
      cp. Epic Sanskrit markaṭa
    Makkaṭaka
    1. a spider ‣See on similes Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 119 Dhp 347 (cp. Dhp-a iv.58) Ja ii.147 (= uṇṇanābhi); iv.484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); v.47, 469 Mil 364 Mil 407
    • pantha˚ road spider, at both passages). —˚sutta spider’s thread Vism 285
    cp. Sanskrit markaṭaka; derived from markaṭa = makkaṭa
    Makkaṭiya
    neuter
    1. monkey grimace Ja ii.448 (mukha˚). The same as mukha-makkaṭika at Ja ii.70
    from makkhaṭa + ya
    Makkaṭī
    feminine
    1. a female monkey Vin iii.33 34 Ja i.385 Dhp-a i.119
    of makkaṭa
    Makkha1
    [from mṛkṣ, literally smearing over. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mrakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in compound māna-mada-mrakṣa-paridāha etc. hypocrisy; usually combined with paḷāsa (‣ See also palāsa MN i.15 AN i.95 AN i.100 AN i.299 AN iv.148 AN iv.456 AN v.39 AN v.156 AN v.209 310, 361 Iti 3 Snp 56 Snp 437 Snp 631 Snp 1132 (cp. Nd2 484 makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaṁ niṭṭhuriya-kammaṁ, i.e. hardness, mercilessness) Dhp 150 Dhp 407 Ja v.141 Vb 357 380, 389 Pug 18 22 Mil 289 Mil 380 Dhp-a iii.118 vi.181.
    1. ˚vinaya restraining from hypocrisy SN ii.282 AN v.165f.
    Makkha2
    1. anger rage Vin i.25
    probably = makkha1, but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622 translation Index “ill-feeling” Böhtlingk-Roth have: mrakṣya “wohlgefühl”
    Makkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. smearing, oil Ja iii.120 Mil 11 (tela˚); Dhtp 538
    from mṛkṣ, cp. * Sanskrit mrakṣaṇa
    Makkhāyanā
    feminine & Makkhāyitatta
    • neuter

      1. the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd2 484 Pug 18 22
      abstract from makkha
    Makkhikā
    feminine
    1. a fly MN iii.148 Nd1 484 Ja ii.275 (nīla˚); iii.263 (pingala gadfly), 402 Snp-a 33 (pingala˚), 572 (identical) Dhp-a iv.58 Sdhp 396 Sdhp 529
    cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā
    Makkhita
    1. smeared with (—˚), soiled; anointed MN i.364 (lohita˚) Ja i.158 (madhu˚); iii.226 (piṭṭhi-maddena); v.71 (ruhira˚); vi.391
    past participle of makkheti
    Makkhin
    adjective
    1. concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often combined with palāsin (e.g. at Vin ii.89 Ja iii.259) DN iii.45 DN iii.246
    • a˚ (+ apalāsin) DN iii.47 AN iii.111 Snp 116 Pug 22 Makkhi-vala
    from makkha
    Makkhi-vāla
    1. a cloth of hair for straining Ja ii.97
    cp. makaci-pilotikā
    Makkheti
    1. to smear, paste, soil, anoint Ja iii.225 Ja iii.314 Pug 36 Mil 268 Vism 344 Dhp-a ii.65 passive makkhīyati Mil 74
    2. causative II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.486 Dhp-a i.400
    3. past participle makkhita
    4. causative of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa
    Maga
    1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope MN i.173 (in simile) SN i.199 (identical) AN i.70 AN ii.23 Thag 1, 958 989 Snp 275 Snp 763 Snp 880 Ja v.267
    2. a stupid person Ja vi.206 Ja vi.371
    another form of miga = Sanskrit mṛga, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar 124
    Magga
    1. a road (usually high road), way, foot-path Vism 708 (maggaṁ agata-pubba-purisa, simile of) Vb-a 256 (tiyojana˚, simile of a man travelling) Dhp-a i.229-addhāna˚; high road Vin iv.62 MN iii.158 ‣See under addhāna; antāra- magge on the road Mil 16
    2. ujuka˚ a straight way SN i.33 Dhp-a i.18
    3. ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way ‣See ummagga, to which add refs. Ja v.260 Thag 2, 94
    4. kummagga a wrong path ‣See kum˚, to which add SN iv.195 Thag 1, 1174
    5. passāva & vacca˚; defecation & urination Vin iii.127
    6. visama˚ a bad road SN i.48
    7. the road of moral good living, the path of righteousness, with reference to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etymology of magga in this meaning is “nibbān’ atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for name), nibbānaṁ vā maggeti kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo” (Vb-a 114). Usually designated (a) the “ariya aṭṭhaṅgika magga or the “Noble Eightfold Path” ‣See aṭṭhangika. It is mentioned at many places, & forms the corner-stone of the Buddha’s teaching as to the means of escaping “dukkha” or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents viz. sammā-diṭṭhi, sammā-sankappa, ˚vācā ˚kammanta, ˚ājīva, ˚vāyāma, ˚sati, ˚samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at DN ii.216 MN iii.71 enumerated as requisites for sammā-samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as “maggam uttamaṁ” at Snp 1130 i.e. the Highest Path ‣See for reference e.g. Vin iii.93 Vin iv.26 DN ii.353 iii.102, 128, 284, 286 Iti 18 Nd1 292 Nd2 485 Vb 104f. 235 sq., Vb-a 114f. (its constituents in detail) 121, 216; Vism 509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed)
    8. (b) as ariya magga: MN iii.72 Pug 17 DN-a i.176f. 225 sq., 233 Vb-a 373f. Thag-a 205 (c) as pañcaṅgika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs 89 Vb 110f. 237 sq-(d) other expressions of same import: dhamma˚ Mil 21
    9. magga alone SN i.191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.) = MN iii.9 = SN iii.66 Snp 429 Snp 441 Snp 724f. 1130 Dhp 57 Dhp 273 sq., Iti 106 Vb-a 53 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either; magga-phala-nirodha (e.g. Vism 217, cp. Nd2 under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e.g. Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 155 sq., 158 Vb-a 43 316, 488)
    10. magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ñāṇa, pariññā, paññā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of “ill,” the possibility of its removal & the “way” to the removal These stages are described as dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, samudaye ñāṇaṁ nirodhe ñāṇaṁ and magge ñāṇaṁ at DN iii.227 Ps i.118. At the latter passage the following chapter (i.49 gives dukkha-nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with magga
    11. Note. On the term ‣See Compendium 41 sq., 66 sq., 175 186; Dhs translation2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expositor 216, 354n. On passages with aṭṭhaṅgika magga & others where magga is used in similes ‣See Mrs. Rhys Davids in; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, past participle 119 120
    12. Stage of righteousness, with reference to the various conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz sotāpatti- magga, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚, arahatta˚; , or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the never-returner, that of Arahantship

      • At Dhp-a i.110
      • magga-phala “the fruit of the Path” (i.e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta˚ SN i.78 AN iii.391 DN-a i.224
      • (b) in particular as the 4 paths Nd2 612 A Vb 322f. 328, 335; Vism 453, 672 678 Dhp-a iv.30 Vb-a 301
      • In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga-paccaya-niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enumerated; viz. paññā, vitakka, sammāvācā s-kammanta, s-ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi micchā-diṭṭhi, micchā-vācā, m-kammanta, m-ājīva
      1. ˚aṅgāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path Vb-a 120
      • ˚āmagga which is the (right) road and which is not MN i.147 Vism ch. xx (˚ssa kovida) = Sn 627 SN iii.108 (identical) Dhp-a iv.169 (identical) AN v.47 (˚ssa ñāṇadassana) Dhp 403
      • ˚udaka water found on the road Vism 338 (simile)
      • ˚kilanta wearied by the road Ja i.129
      • ˚kusala one who is clever as regards the road one who knows the road well SN iii.108 Nd1 171 Vb-a 332 (in simile); Kp-a 70, 126
      • ˚kovida = ˚kusala Nd1 446
      • ˚kkhāyin (should be ˚akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way MN iii.5 Nd1 33
      • ˚jina Conqueror of the paths Snp 84f. -jīvin who lives in the right path Snp 88
      • ˚jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Snp 85
      • ˚ñāṇa knowledge of the Path Vb-a 416
      • ˚ññū knows the Path Nd1 446
      • ˚ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the Pali ‣See Compendium 23, 50
      • ˚ttaya the triad of the paths (i.e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) Dhp-a iv.109
      • ˚dūsin highway robber Snp 84
      • ˚desaka one who points out the way, a guide Snp 84 Ja iv.257 as ˚desika at Dhp-a ii.246
      • ˚desin = ˚desaka Snp 87
      • ˚ dhamma the rule of the Path, i.e. righteous living Snp 763
      • ˚dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd1 45
      • ˚paṭipanna

        1. -1. one on the road, i.e. wandering, tramping Dhp-a i.233
        • one who has entered the Path Pv iv.349
        • ˚parissaya danger of the road Vv-a 200
        • ˚bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i.e. righteousness) Nd1 323
        • ˚mūḷha one who has lost the way Vv-a 332
        • ˚vaṇṇa praise of the Path Dhp-a i.115
        • ˚vidū one who knows the Path Nd1 446
        • ˚sacca the truth concerning the Path Vb-a 114 124
        • ˚sira name of a month DN-a i.241
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mārga, from mṛg to track, trace
    Maggana
    neuter & magganā
    • feminine

      1. tracking, search for, covetousness Vism 29 (synonym for nijigiṁsanatā gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana)
      from magg
    Maggika
    1. wayfarer, tramp Dhp-a i.233
    from magga
    Maggati
    & (spurious); mageti
    1. to track, hunt for, trace out follow ‣Seek MN i.334 (ppr. magayamana) SN ii.270 (pp maggayamāna) Thag 2, 384 (cp. Thag-a 255 = pattheti) Ja v.102 (where Text reads maggheyya, which is explained by Commentary as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern,; Toevoegselen s.v. defends it. The variant reading reads magg˚;. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in Commentary instead of passeyya. The form past participle magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root) Dhs-a 162 (= gavesati).
    2. causative II. maggāpeti Pv-a 112

      • passive maggīyati Vb-a 114
      denominative from magga, cp. Sanskrit margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg; in meaning “anvesana,” i.e. tracking, following up ‣See Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541
    Magghati
    1. ‣See maggeti
    Maghavant
    1. name of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) SN i.221 (voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229 Dhp 30 cp. māgha
    cp. Epic Sanskrit maghavā, on etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. Maia
    Maghā
    feminine
    1. name of a nakkhatta, in compound ˚deva Snp-a 352 (cp. MN ii.74 note 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa xiv. i.1)
    cp. * Sanskrit maghā
    Maṅkati
    1. is given as root maṅk (aorist maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i.e. adornment. It is meant to be an explanation of mankato?

    Maṅkato
    adverb
    1. on my account, for me Mil 384
    for Sanskrit mat-kṛte, cp. English Müller, Pali Grammar 12
    Maṅku
    adjective
    1. staggering, confused troubled, discontented Vin ii.118 SN v.74 Dhp 249 Nd1 150 Dhp-a iii.41 359 (with locative ).
    2. feminine plural maṅkū Vin i.93

      • dummaṅku “staggering in a disagreeable manner,” evil-minded AN i.98 AN iv.97 (read line as “dummanku’ yaṁ padusseti dhūm’ aggamhi va pāvako” he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); v.70 Vin ii.196 Vin iii.21 Vin iv.213 SN ii.218 Nett 50
      1. ˚bhāva discontent, moral weakness Ja iv.49 Mil 227 Dhp-a iii.359
      • ˚bhūta discontented, troubled confused Vin ii.19 DN ii.85 AN i.186 Dhp 263 Ja v.211 vi.362 Dhp-a ii.76
      • self-possessed AN iii.40 Mil 21 339
      cp. Vedic manku ‣See on meaning Hardy in preface to Anguttara v. p. vi
    Maṅkuna
    (& ˚ṇa
    1. an insect, bug or flea Ja i.10 Ja iii.423 Vism 109 (where kīla-mankula ought to be read as kīṭamankuna) Dhp-a ii.12
    cp. late Sanskrit matkuṇa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 63
    Maṅgala
    adjective
    1. auspicious prosperous, lucky, festive Nd1 87 88; Kp-a 118 sq. Snp-a 273 595; Sdhp 551
    • nt. maṅgalaṁ good omen auspices, festivity Snp 258 Vin ii.129 Pv-a 17 A curious popular etymology is put forth by Buddhaghosa at Kp-a 123, viz. “maṁ galanti imehi sattā ti” mangalāni-maṅgalaṁ karoti literally to make an auspicious ceremony i.e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck ‣See on this Pv-a 198 to get married Dhp-a i.182
    • maṅgalaṁ vadati to bless one Ja iv.299 Dhp-a i.115 Three (auspicious wedding-ceremonies at Dhp-a i.115 viz. abhiseka˚ consecration geha-ppavesana˚ entering the house, vivāha wedding
    • Certain other general signs of good luck or omina are given at Ja iv.72 Ja iv.73 and Kp-a 118 sq. (‣ See also mangalika)
    • Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at Dhp-a ii.87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma-karaṇa-mangala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra-paribhoga˚ of taking solid food; kaṇṇa-vijjhana˚ of piercing the ears dussa-gahaṇa˚ of taking up the robe: cūḷā-karaṇa˚ of making the top-knot
    • cp. abhi˚;
    1. ˚usabha an auspicious bull Snp-a 323
    • ˚chaṇa a merry time, fair Ja ii.48 Dhp-a i.392
    • ˚kicca auspicious function festivity Snp-a 175 323
    • ˚kiriyā festivity, wedding Snp-a 69 finding good omens Ja iv.72
    • ˚kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121
    • ˚pañha ‣See mangalika -divasa a lucky day Ja iv.210 Dhp-a iii.467
    • ˚vappa ploughing festival Snp-a 137 cp. vappa-mangala -sindhava state horse Ja i.59
    • ˚silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) Ja i.59 Ja vi.37 Pv-a 74
    • ˚supina lucky dream Ja vi.330
    • ˚hatthi state elephant Mhvs 35, 21 Dhp-a i.389
    cp. Vedic mangala. explained by Dhtp 24 with root maṅg, i.e. lucky ‣See also mañju
    Maṅgalika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala˚; fond of excitement Ja i.372 Mil 94 (apagata˚, without passion for excitement)
    2. superstitious looking out for lucky signs Vin ii.129 (gihī) 140 (identical). At Ja iv.72 Ja iv.73 three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṁ seen or sutaṁ (heard) or mutaṁ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-maṅgalikā, suta˚ & muta˚; respectively The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Mangala-sutta Kp-a 118 sq. (cp. Nd1 89); diṭṭhamaṅgalika pañha “a question concerning visible omina” Ja iv.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1 vol. ii.1561!), 390 (?). The proper name diṭṭha-mangalikā at Ja iv.376f.
    from mangala
    Maṅgalya
    neuter
    1. auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24
    from mangala
    Maṅgura
    adjective
    1. golden; in compound ˚cchavi of golden colour, f cchavī DN i.193 DN i.242 MN i.246 MN i.429 MN ii.33 Vism 184
    etymology? or = mangula? ‣See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to MN i.246 in Lal. v.320 has madgura.
    Maṅgula
    adjective
    1. sallow; feminine maṅgulī woman of sallow complexion SN ii.260 = Vin iii.107 Vin iii.100
    2. cp. mangura
    Macca
    adjective-noun [originally
    • gerundive of marati, mṛ; corresponding to Sanskrit martya. A diaeretic form exists in Pali mātiya (q.v.) mortal;
    • masculine man, a mortal SN i.55 Snp 249 Snp 577 Snp 580 Snp 766 Ja iii.154 Ja iv.248 Ja v.393 Dhp 53 Dhp 141 Dhp 182 Vv 6312 Kvu 351

      • ‣ See also refs. under jāta
    Maccu

    1. the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama SN i.156 Snp 357 (genitive maccuno), 581 (instr maccunā), 587 Thag 1, 411 Dhp 21 Dhp 47 Dhp 128 Dhp 135 Dhp 150 Dhp 287 Vb-a 100 Snp-a 397 Dhp-a iii.49 Sdhp 295 304
    1. ˚tara one who crosses or overcomes death Snp 1119 (= maraṇaṁ tareyya Nd2 486)
    2. ˚dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death SN i.4 adjective belonging to death or subject to death (= Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd2 487b)
    • Sn 358, 1104 (with explanation “m vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487a), 1146 (˚pāra-maccudheyyassa pāraṁ vuccati amataṁ nibbānaṁ Nd2 487) Thag 2, 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13) Dhp 86 Dhp-a ii.161
    • ˚parāyaṇa surmounting death Snp 578
    • pareta identical Snp 579
    • ˚pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Snp 166 Ja v.367
    • ˚bhaya the fear of death Mhvs 32, 68
    • ˚maraṇa dying in death MN i.49 (cp. C on p. 532: maccu-maraṇan ti maccu-sankhātaṁ maraṇaṁ tena samuccheda-maraṇ’ ādīni nisedheti
    • ‣ See also definition of maraṇa s.v.)
    • ˚mukha the mouth of death Snp 776 Nd1 48
    • ˚rājā the king of death Snp 332 Snp 1118 (= Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaṁ pi Nd2 488) Dhp 46 Dhp 170; Kp-a 83
    • ˚vasa the power of death 3 i.52: Snp 587 Snp 1100 (where maccu is explained by maraṇa & Māra; ) -hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death Iti 46 = Sn 755 Thag 1, 129
    in form = Vedic mṛtyu, from mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Vedic Sanskrit meaning “death” only
    Maccha
    1. fish AN iii.301 Snp 605 Snp 777 Snp 936 Ja i.210 Ja i.211 Ja v.266 (in simile); vi.113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land) Pug 55 Sdhp 610
    • maccha is given at Nd2 91 as synonym of ambucārin
    • pūti˚ rotten fish MN iii.168 & in simile at Iti 68 = J; iv.435 = vi.236 = KhA 127. cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1906, 201. bahu˚; rich in fish Ja iii.430
    • loṇa˚ salt fish Vism 28. rohita˚; the species Cyprinus rohita Ja ii.433 Ja iii.333 Dhp-a ii.132 On maccha in simile ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz.Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) Ja i.207 ii.352; v.462; Timanda & Timirapiṅgala; Ja v.462
    • Mitacintin Ja i.427
    • Bahucintin Ja i.427
    1. ˚maṁsa the flesh of fishes Snp 249
    • ˚bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman AN iii.301 Vism 379 -bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes Ja v.75
    • ˚vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin ii.137
    • ˚sakalika “a bit of fish” (fish-bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism 250 = KhA 43 = Vb-a 233
    cp. Vedic matsya
    Macchara
    adjective
    1. niggardly envious, selfish Pgdp ii.49
    • maccharaṁ
    • neuter avarice envy AN iv.285 Snp 811 Snp 862 Snp 954 (vīta-macchara, adjective)
    Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also “envious,” cp. maccharin
    Maccharāyati
    1. to be selfish, greedy or envious Ja vi.334 Dhp-a ii.45 89
    Demon. from macchariya
    Maccharāyanā
    feminine & Maccharāyitatta
    • neuter the condition of selfishness, both expressions in definition of macchariya at Dhs 1122 Pug 19 23 Dhs-a 375

    Maccharin
    adjective
    1. selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs translation2 p. 320) AN ii.82 AN iii.139 AN iii.258 AN iii.265 DN iii.45 DN iii.246 Dhp 263 Snp 136 Snp 663 Nd1 36 Ja i.345 Ja v.391 Vv 5226 Pug 20 Dhs-a 394 Dhp-a ii.89 Sdhp 89 Sdhp 97
    • a unselfish DN iii.47 AN iv.2 Snp 852 Snp 860 Iti 102
    cp. Vedic matsarin, from mat + sṛ; , i.e. “reflecting to me”
    Macchariya
    Macchera;
    neuter
    1. avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the maịn cause of rebirth in the Petaloka
    1. -1.; macchariya: AN i.95 AN i.299 AN iii.272 Dhp iii.44 (issā˚), 289 Snp 863 (˚yutta), 928 Pug 19 23 Vb 357 389, 391
    • Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned āvāsa˚, kula˚, lābha˚, vaṇṇa˚, dhamma˚ DN iii.234 Nd1 118 227 AN iv.456 Dhs 1122 (cp. Dhs tsrl.2 p. 276) Vism 683 Dhs-a 373 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence. AN v.40 AN v.209 Mil 289 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 124
    • macchera AN i.105 (˚mala), 281 Dhp 242 Iti 18 Nd1 260; Sdhp 313 Sdhp 510. At AN ii.58 and elsewhere the state called vigata-mala-macchera “with the stain of avarice vanished,” is frequently mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship
    • Note. The (etymology) explanation of macchariya at Vb-a 513 is rather interesting: “idaṁ acchariyaṁ mayhaṁ eva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṁ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati” (from the Purāṇas)
    • cp. Epic Sanskrit mātsarya
    Macchika
    1. a fish-catcher, fisherman AN iii.301 Ja v.270 Ja vi.111 Mil 331
    from maccha
    Macchī
    feminine
    1. a female fish Ja ii.178
    of maccha
    Macchera
    1. ‣See macchariya
    Majja
    neuter
    1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin i.205 DN iii.62 DN iii.63 Snp 398 (+ pāna = majjapāna) Vv-a 73 (= surā ca merayañ ca); Sdhp 267
    2. drinking place Ja iv.223 (= pān’ āgāra)
      1. ˚pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard AN iv.261 Snp 400 Pv iv.176 (a˚) Thag-a 38
      • ˚pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 158 Vv-a 73 Sdhp 87
      • ˚pāyaka = majjapa Ja ii.192 (a˚)
      • ˚pāyin = ˚pāyaka Sdhp 88
      • ˚vikkaya sale of spirits Ja iv.115
      from mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya
    Majjati1
    1. is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found especially in compounds ummujjati & nimujjati
    majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Latin mergo
    Majjati2
    1. to wipe, polish, clean Vv-a 165 cp. sam˚. past participle majjita & maṭṭha;
    2. mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Latin mergo (cp. Latin mulgeo to wipe, stroke milk (cp. Mir. mlich = milk etc.)-Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning “saṁsuddhiyaṁ”
    Majjati3
    1. to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated SN i.73 SN i.203 AN iv.294 Snp 366 (Pot. majje = majjeyya Snp-a 364), 676 (identical, T reads na ca majje, Snp-a 482 reads na pamajje) Ja ii.97 iii.87 (majjeyya). aorist majji in compound pamajji Mhvs 17 15.
    2. past participle matta
    3. mad, Sanskrit mādyati; Vedic madati ‣See mada for etymology
    Majjāra
    1. a cat Mil 23 feminine majjārī (majjāri˚) Vin i.186 (˚camma cat’s skin) Dhp-a i.48 Pgdp 49
    2. cp. Epic Sanskrit mārjāra; dialectical
    Majjika
    1. a dealer in strong drink. a tavernkeeper Mil 331
    from majja
    Majjita
    1. cleaned, polished Vv-a 340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 8417) ‣See also maṭṭha
    past participle of majjati2
    Majjha
    adjective
    1. middle, viz 1. of space: of moderate height DN i.243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca)
    • of; time: of middle age Snp 216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old)

  • often used

    • adverb in
    • locative ; majjhe in the middle; i.e. (a) as prep in between, among (—˚ or with genitive) Pv i.111 114 Ja i.207 (sakuṇānaṁ) Dhp-a i.182 (vasana-gāmassa) Pv-a 11 (parisā˚). majjhe chetvā cutting in half Ja v.387
    • (b) in special dogmatic sense “in the present state of existence,” contrasted with past
    • future existences (the latter comb; d as “ubho antā” at Snp 1040). The explanation of majjhe in this sense is at Nd1 434: “majjhaṁ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā” etc (similarly at Nd2 490)
    • Sn 949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (identical) Dhp 348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i.e. paccuppannesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63)
    • neuter majjhaṁ the middle Dhp-a i.184 (tassa uramajjhaṁ ghaṁsentī)
    • Vedic madhya, cp. Latin medius, Gothic midjis = Old High German mitti, English middle
  • Majjhaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. lying or being in the midst of …, in pācīna-yava˚ (dakkhiṇa˚, pacchima˚ uttara˚) nigama, a market-place lying in the midst of the eastern corn-fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā Ja vi.330
    from majjha
    Majjhatta
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective “standing in the middle,” umpire neutral, impartial, indifferent Ja i.300 Ja ii.359 (parama˚ + upekkhā-pārāmī); vi.8 Mil 403 Vism 230; Mhvs 21, 14
    2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity almost synonymous with upekkhā : Vism 134, 296 Vb-a 283 (˚payogatā) Dhp-a ii.214 (˚upekkhā) Pv-a 38 (so read for majjhattha) ‣See also following. Note. AN similar term is found in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as mṛdu-madhyā kṣānti “state of spiritual calm” Divy 271 ‣See Yoga Sūtra ii.34
    for majjha-ṭṭha, which we find in Prakrit as majjhattha: Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 214; majjha sthā
    Majjhattatā
    feminine
    1. impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd2 166 (in explanation of upekkhā with synonym passaddhatā) Vb 230 Vism 134 Vb-a 285 (satta˚ & sankhāra˚), 317 (definition) Dhs-a 133
    abstract from preceding
    Majjhantika
    1. midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin iv.273 SN iv.240 Ja v.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā); v.291 (read majjhantik âtikamm’ āgami); Vism 236 Mil 3 or as apposition with kāla & samaya; SN i.7 (kāla); Pv iv.32 (identical) Nd2 977 (samaya) DN-a i.251 (identical)
    majjha + anta + ika
    Majjhāru
    1. a certain kind of plant Vin i.196 (variant reading majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sanskrit mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea
    etymology doubtful
    Majjhima
    adjective
    1. middle medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate
    2. Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like “small-medium-big,” or “first-middle-last” (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna-, majjhima-, paṇīta- DN iii.215 (tisso dhātuyo) Dhs 1205 1027 (dhammā); Vism 11 (sīlaṁ); hīna majjhima ukkaṭṭha Vism 308; omaka majjhima ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.243
    3. khuddaka m mahā Vism 100; lāmaka majjhima paṇīta (i.e. lokuttara Dhs-a 45 (dhammā); paritta -m-uḷāra Sdhp 260. (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima˚ pacchima˚ Ja i.75 identical with vaye Pv-a 5
    4. neuter majjhimaṁ the waist, in compound su-majjhimā
    5. feminine a woman with beautiful waist Ja v.4
    Vedic madhyama, with sound change ˚ama → ˚ima after Geiger, Pali Grammar 191, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted
    Mañca
    1. a couch, bed Vin iv.39 40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned which also apply to the definition of pīṭha, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷīra-pādaka, āhacca-pādaka; same definition at Vb-a 365) Snp 401 Ja iii.423 Dhp-a i.89 (˚ṁ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; iv.16 Vb-a 20 Vv-a 291 Pv-a 93
    • heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (as place where domestic pigs lie) ii.419 (identical); ii.275 (where a love-sick youth lies down in the park)
    1. ˚atimañca bed upon bed, i.e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival Ja iii.456 Ja vi.277 Dhp-a iv.59
    • ˚parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv ii.25 (nīla˚, figuratively for being buried) Dhp-a i.183 (with variant reading maccu˚, just as likely, but ‣See maccuparāyaṇa)
    • ˚pīṭha couch and chair Vin ii.270f. AN iii.51 Vv-a 9 220, 295
    • ˚vāna stuffing of a couch Dhp-a i.234
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mañca stand, scaffolding, platform
    Mañcaka
    1. bed, couch, bedstead Vin i.271 SN i.121 = iii.123 Ja i.91 Ja iii.423 Thag 2, 115 Mil 10 Dhp-a ii.53
    from mañca
    Mañjari
    feminine
    1. a branching flower-stalk, a sprout Ja v.400 Ja v.416
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit mañjarī
    Mañjarikā
    feminine = mañjari, Vin iii.180
    Mañjarita
    adjective
    1. with (full-grown) pedicles, i.e. in open flower Mil 308 (˚patta in full bloom)
    from mañjari
    Mañjīra
    1. an anklet, foot-bangle Abhp 228
    cp. late Sanskrit mañjīra nt.
    Mañju
    adjective
    1. pleasant, charming sweet, lovely (only with reference to the voice) DN ii.211 DN ii.227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā’s & the Buddha’s voice ‣See bindu & aṭṭhanga) Ja ii.150 neuter a sweet note Ja vi.591 (of the deer in the forest) Vv-a 219 (karavīka ruta˚).

      1. ˚bhāṇaka sweet-voiced, speaking sweetly Ja ii.150 Dhp-a i.144 feminine bhāṇikā Ja vi.418 Ja vi.420
      2. ˚bhāṇin id Ja ii.150
      3. cp. Class Sanskrit mañju, also mangala, cp. Latin mango a dealer making up his wares for sale ‣See further cognates at Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. mango
    Mañjuka
    adjective
    1. sweet voiced Vin i.249 Ja ii.350 Ja iii.266 Ja vi.412 Ja vi.496
    mañju + ka
    Mañjūsaka
    (-rukkha)
    1. name of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 386 Snp-a 52 66, 95, 98 Vv-a 175
    from mañjūsa
    Mañjūsā
    feminine
    1. a casket; used for keeping important documents in Ja ii.36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṁ mañjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); iv.335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṁ sāra-mañjūsāyaṁ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mañjūṣā
    Mañjeṭṭha
    adjective
    1. light (bright) red, crimson, usually enumerated in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e.g. at Vin i.25 SN ii.101 (feminine mañjeṭṭhā) Vv 221 (Hardy in Text reads mañjaṭṭha, as twice at Vv-a 111 with variant readings ˚jiṭṭha ˚jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Add; ns on p. 372) Mil 61
    2. cp. * Sanskrit mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder
    Mañjeṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. crimson, bright red, figuratively shining Vv 391 (cp. definition at Vv-a 177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra-bud; same definition at Dhs-a 317 with Sinduvāra for Sindha˚); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, mañjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: MN i.509 (has ˚eṭṭhika in Text but variant reading ˚eṭṭhaka) Ja vi.185 Dhs 617 feminine mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin ii.256
    2. from mañjeṭṭha, after lohita + ka
    Mañjeṭṭhī
    feminine
    1. Bengal madder DN-a i.85
    = Sanskrit mañjiṣṭhā
    Maññati
    1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Snp 199 (sīsaṁ … subhato naṁ maññati bālo) 588 (yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṁ hoti aññathā) Ja ii.258 (maññāmi ciraṁ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time)
    2. With (double)
    3. accusative : to take for, to consider as; na taṁ maññāmi mānusiṁ I deem you are not human Pv ii.41; yassa dāni kālaṁ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha’s pleasure, i.e. let it be time to go so also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit manyate kālaṁ, e.g. Divy 50 Divy 64 etc.
      1. DN i.189 especially in phrase taṁ kiṁ maññasi (maññatha 2. plural ) what do you think of this? (the following), what is your opinion about this? DN i.60 SN iii.104 & passim
      2. Pot. 1; st sg maññeyyaṁ I should think Pv-a 40 3rd singular maññeyya SN iii.103 and maññe Snp 206 The short form 1st sg maññe is used like an
      3. adverb as affirmative particle is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. English g. DN i.137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā) SN i.181 (m. 'haṁ); iv.289 (paveliyamānena m kāyena) Ja ii.275 Mil 21 Vism 90, 92 (mato me m putto) Dhp-a i.107 Dhp-a ii.51 Pv-a 40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe) 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā)
      4. na maññe surely not Dhp-a ii.84 Pv-a 75 (n. m. puññavā rājā)
      5. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Snp 840 (= jānāti Nd1 192) 1049, 1142 Nd2 491 (= jānāti) Dhp-a i.29 (maññāmi tuvaṁ marissasi)
      6. to imagine, to be proud (of) to be conceited, to boast Snp 382 (ppr. maññamāna) 806, 813, 855 (maññate) Ja iii.530 (

        • aorist maññi 'haṁ perhaps maññe 'haṁ? Commentary explains by maññāmi)

          • pp mata
          • Note. Another Present form is munāti (q.v.) of which the
          • past participle is muta
          man, Vedic manyate & manute, Avestan mainyeite; Indogermanic *men, cp. Latin memini to think of, mens → mind, meneo; Gothic munan to think muns opinion; Oisl. man, Anglo-Saxon mon; Old High German minna love Anglo-Saxon, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man = ñāṇe, 524 bodhane
    Maññanā
    feminine
    1. conceit Nd1 124 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, māna˚, kilesa˚ etc.) Dhs 1116 1233; Nett 24; Vism 265 (for mañcanā?)
    from man
    Maññita
    neuter
    1. illusion, imagination MN i.486 Nine maññitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papañcitāni & sankhatāni) at Vb 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaṁ, na bhavissaṁ rūpī bhavissaṁ, arūpī bh., saññī bh., asaññī bh., nevasaññī-nâsaññī-bh
    past participle of maññati
    Maññitatta
    neuter
    1. self-conceit, pride Dhs 1116 Dhs-a 372
    from maññita
    Maṭaja
    neuter
    1. a certain weapon MN i.281 (˚ṁ nāma āvudhajātaṁ; Neumann translates “Mordwaffe”)
    doubtful
    Maṭāhaka
    adjective
    1. short (?) Vin ii.138 (ati˚ = atikhuddaka Commentary ). Matta & Mattha;
    doubtful spelling & meaning
    Maṭṭa
    Maṭṭha;
    1. wiped, polished, clean, pure
    • (a) maṭṭa : DN ii.133 (yugaṁ maṭṭaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ: “pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear” translation); Vism 258 (variant reading maṭṭha) cp. sam.˚-(b) maṭṭha : Vv 8417 (su˚) Mil 248 Dhp-a i.25 (˚kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings) Vv-a 6 (˚vattha). cp. vi˚
    1. ˚sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth Ja i.304 Ja ii.274 Ja iii.498 Vism 284 (ṭṭh)
    past participle of mṛj ‣See majjati2
    Maṇi
    1. a gem, jewel At several places one may interpret as “crystal.” DN i.7 (as ornament) Dhp 161 Ja vi.265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at DN i.76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 121
    2. udaka-pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Mil 35 (cp. below Vism 366 passage); cintā˚ a “thought-jewel,” magic stone (crystal?) Ja iii.504 Vv-a 32
    3. cūḷā˚ a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown-jewel Ja v.441f.; jāti˚; a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417 Vism 216 (in comparison); tārā˚; (-vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism 76; nīla˚; a dark blue jewel Ja ii.112 Ja iv.140 Dhp-a iii.254 The passage “amaṇiṁ udakaṁ maṇiṁ katvā” at Vism 366 (+ asuvaṇṇaṁ leḍḍuṁ suvaṇṇaṁ katvā) refers clearly to meaning “jewel” (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror’s trick, cp. Mil 35). Whether meaning “waterpot” (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in derivation maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided
    4. a crystal used as burning-glass Mil 54
      1. ˚kāra a jeweller Mil 331 Dhp-a ii.152
      • ˚kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adjective wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin ii.156 (āmutta˚ adorned with …) Vv 208 (identical); 438 (identical); Pv ii.951 (identical); Thag i.187 Dhp 345 (maṇi-kuṇḍalesu = manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i.e. with gem-studded earrings Dhp-a iv.56)
      • ˚kuṭṭima at Vv-a 188 is probably to be read as ˚kuṇḍala (variant reading ˚kundima)
      • ˚khandha “jewelbulk,” i.e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel Ja iii.187 Ja v.37 (˚vaṇṇaṁ udakaṁ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (˚pilandhana)
      • ˚guhā a jewelled cave cave of crystal Ja ii.417 (where pigs live) Snp-a 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa-guhā, m˚., rajata˚. At the entrance of it there grows the Mañjūsaka tree)
      • ˚canda “the jewelled moon,” i.e. with a crest like the (glittering moon Vv 646 (= maṇi-maya-maṇḍalânuviddha-candamaṇḍala-sadisa maṇi Vb-a 277)
      • ˚cchāyā reflection of a jewel Ja vi.345
      • ˚thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adjective with jewelled pillars Vv 541 671
      • ˚pabbata mountain of gems Snp-a 358
      • ˚pallaṅka a jewelled pallanquin Dhp-a i.274
      • ˚bandha (place for) binding the jewel(led bracelet, the wrist Vism 255 = Vb-a 238 = KhA 50 (˚aṭṭhi)
      • ˚bhadda name of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Mil 191 translated by Rhys Davids Miln translation i.266 by “tumblers.” The term occurs also at Nd1 89 92. cp. Sanskrit Maṇibhadra, name of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas
      • ˚maya made of, consisting of or caused by jewels Pv ii.64 Vv-a 280 Dhp-a i.29
      • ˚ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i.e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism 189 (in sim.) Mil 218
      • ˚rūpaka a jewelled image Dhp-a i.370
      • ˚lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from jewels DN i.9 Snp-a 564

        1. ˚vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i.e. as clear as crystal (of water) Ja ii.304 (pasanna +)
        2. ˚sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i.e. a mysterious, magic snake) DN-a i.197
        cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Latin monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. monile, where ‣See other suggestions For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben past participle 53, 263
    Maṇika
    1. a waterpot MN ii.39 Usually in compound udaka˚ Vin i.277 MN i.354 SN iv.316 AN iii.27 Mil 28 Dhp-a i.79 Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time
    cp. Classical Sanskrit maṇika
    Maṇīkā
    feminine
    1. name of a charm, the Jewel-charm, by means of which one can read other people’s minds DN i.214 (m. iddhi-vijjā), cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.278 note 3.)
    feminine of maṇika, adjective from maṇi
    Maṇila
    1. a kind of tree Vism 313
    cp. * Sanskrit maṇila dewlap?
    Maṇḍa
    1. the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i.e. cream scum; figuratively essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything parisā˚; the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation AN i.72 (or for ˚maṇḍala?); bodhi˚; essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively “the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha” (does it stand for ˚maṇḍala in this meaning?) Ja iv.233 (cp. puthavi-maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi-maṇḍala Snp 990) Dhp-a i.86 Dhp-a ii.69 iv.72. sappi˚; “cream of butter,” the finest ghee (cp Avs i.1513 sarpimaṇḍa) DN i.201 AN ii.95 Pug 70 Mil 322
    • maṇḍaṁ karoti to put into the best condition to make pleasant Snp-a 81
    • manda at Dhs-a 100 is to be read baddha (Burmese variant ). cp. Expositor 132n
    1. ˚khetta best soil, fertile ground Mil 255
    • ˚peyya to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the finest quality first-class SN ii.20 (˚ṁ idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ)
    later Sanskrit maṇḍa, perhaps dialectical from *mranda, cp. Sanskrit vi-mradati to soften. Attempts at etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. mollis. cp. also mattikā
    Maṇḍaka
    1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi˚; whey SN ii.111
    2. the scum of stagnant water i.e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, water-weeds, moss etc. Ja ii.304 (gloss sevāla)
    from maṇḍa
    Maṇḍana
    neuter
    1. ornament, adornment, finery DN i.5 DN i.7 Ja vi.64 Pug 21 58 Vb 351 Vb-a 477 Dhtm 13 ‣See under mada
    1. ˚ānuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin i.190
    • ˚jātika of an ornament (-loving) nature fond of dressing DN i.80 = Vin ii.255 = MN ii.19 MN ii.32
    from maṇḍ
    Maṇḍapa
    1. a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin i.125 Vism 96, 300 (dhamma-savaṇa˚), 339 sq (in simile) Dhp-a i.112 Dhp-a ii.45 iii.206 (˚kāraka) Pv-a 74 Pv-a 171 Pv-a 194 Vv-a 173
    cp. late Sanskrit maṇḍapa
    Maṇḍala
    1. circle DN i.134 (paṭhavi˚, cp. puthavi˚ Snp 990); Vism 143 (˚ṁ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu˚ & rajata˚ lead-& silver circle, in kasiṇa practice) Vv-a 147 (of a fan = tālapattehi kata˚-vījanī)
    2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya˚ Vv-a 224 271 (divasa-kara˚); canda˚ Vism 174 Pv-a 65
    3. a round, flat surface, e. g jānu˚ the disk of the knee, i.e. the knee Pv-a 179 naḷāta˚ the (whole of the) forehead DN i.106 Snp p. 108

      • an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e.g. MN i.446 (circus, race-ring) assa˚; horse-circus, raceground, Vism 308; āpāna˚ drinking circle, i.e. hall; kīḷa˚; play-circle, i.e. games Ja vi.332 Ja vi.333 Dhp-a iii.146
      • keḷi˚ dice board (?) Ja i.379
      • gā˚ Thag i.1143, cp. trs. ib. note 3; go˚; ox-round Snp 301
      • jūta˚ dicing table Ja i.293
      • yuddha˚ fightingring Vism 190; raṅga˚; play-house Vv-a 139
      • vāta˚ tornado Ja i.73

    4. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group Ja v.418 (chāpa˚ litter of young animals).

      • border as part of a bhikkhu’s dress, hem, gusset Vin i.287 Vin ii.177

      -agga cp. Sanskrit maṇḍal’ āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301

      1. a circular sword or sabre Mil 339
      • ˚māla (sometimes māḷa a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion DN i.2 DN i.50 (ḷ) Mil 16 (ḷ); Snp p. 104 Snp-a 132 (N
      • plural ) Vv-a 175
      cp. Vedic maṇḍala
    Maṇḍalika
    adjective-noun
    1. a district officer king’s deputy Vin iii.47 feminine maṇḍalikā = maṇḍala 4 i.e. circus, ring, round, in assa˚; race court Vin iii.6
    2. from maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka-rājā “the king of a small country” Mvyut 94
    Maṇḍalin
    adjective
    1. circular Thag 1, 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra)
    2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) SN i.51 = Vv-a 116
    from maṇḍala
    Maṇḍita
    1. adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp 244 Sdhp 540. In compound ˚pasādhita beautifully adorned at Ja i.489 Ja ii.48 Ja vi.219
    • cp. abhi˚;
    past participle of maṇḍeti
    Maṇḍūka
    1. a frog Vv 512 Ja iv.247 Ja v.307 Ja vi.164 Kp-a 46 Vv-a 217 218; Sdhp 292 feminine mandūkī Ja i.341

      • Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism 208
      1. ˚chāpī a young (female) frog Ja vi.192
      • ˚bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i.e. a snake) Ja iii.16
      Vedic maṇḍūka
    Maṇḍeti
    1. to adorn, embellish, beautify Ja iii.138 Dhp-a ii.86 past participle maṇḍita
    2. maṇḍ to adorn, related to Latin mundus world. Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaṁ
    Mata1
    1. thought, understood, considered (as = —˚), only late in use Vb 2 (hīna˚ paṇīta˚, doubtful reading); Sdhp 55; Mhvs 25, 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu-samā matā, plural considered like beasts). cp. sam˚
    • Note. Does mata-sāyika at Thag 1, 501 (= Mil 367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as
    • neuter meaning “thought thinking,” but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rhys Davids (; Brethren, p. 240) translates “nesting-place of thought.”
    past participle of maññati
    Mata2
    1. dead MN i.88 (ekāha˚ dead one day); iii.159 (matam eyya would go to die) Snp 200 Snp 440 Ja v.480 negative amata ‣See separate article
    • Note. mata at Pv-a 110 is to be corrected into cuta
    1. ˚kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead Pv-a 274
    past participle of marati, mṛ
    Mataka
    dead, one who is dead Dhp-a ii.274
    1. ˚ākāra condition of one who is dead Ja i.164 (˚ṁ dassati pretends to be dead)
    2. ˚bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes Ja iv.151 Dhp-a i.326 (= petakicca p. 328); iii.25
    from mata2
    Mati
    feminine
    1. mind, opinion, thought thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin iii.138 (purisa˚ thought of a man); Mhvs 3, 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala˚ pure-minded) Pv-a 151 (kāma +)
    • su˚
    • adjective wise, clever Mhvs 15, 214; opp du˚;
    • adjective foolish Ja iii.83 (= duppañña Commentary ) Pv i.82 (= nippañña Pv-a 40); Sdhp 292
    Vedic mati, from man : cp. Avestan maitiš, Latin mens, mentem (cp. English mental); Gothic ga-munds, gaminpi Old High German gi-munt, English mind
    Matikata
    adjective
    1. in su˚; well-harrowed (field) AN i.229 AN i.239 (khetta)
    cp. Sanskrit matī-kṛta, from matya, nt., harrow = Latin mateola, Old High German medela plough
    Matimant
    adjective
    1. sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causâ as matīmā (from matimanto, plural ) at Snp 881 (= matimā paṇḍitā Nd1 289)
    mati + mant
    Matta1
    1. (—˚) adjective

      “by measure,” measured, as far as the measure goes, i.e.

    2. consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Snp 659 pañcamattā sata 500 DN-a i.35 saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā Snp-a 510 māsamattaṁ Pv-a 55 ekādasa˚ ib. 20; dvādasa˚ 42 satta˚ 47; tiṁsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ 53

      • (2 (negative) as much as, i.e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Snp 431 kaṭacchumattaṁ (not even a spoonful Mil 8 ekapaṇṇa˚ Pv-a 115 citta ˚ṁ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma˚ a mere name Mil 25 phandana ˚ṁ not even one throb Ja vi.7 phandita˚ the mere fact of … MN ii.24 bindu only one drop Pv-a 100 rodita˚ MN ii.24
      • (positive as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava riches enough Ja v.40 kā pi assāsa-mattā laddhā found some relief? Pv-a 104 (may be = mattā
      • feminine ).
      • like just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita˚-kāraṇā just because he smiled Vv-a 68 bhesajja-mattā pītā I have taken medicine DN i.205 (= mattā
      • feminine ?) okāsa—˚ṁ
      • neuter permission Snp p, 94 putta˚ like children AN ii.124 maraṇa˚ (almost) dead MN i.86 attano nattumatte vandanto Dha iv.178. f mattī (= mattin?) ‣See mātu˚.
      • as
      • adverb (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said Dhp-a i.330 cintitamatte at the mere thought Dhp-a i.326 naṁ jātamattaṁ yeva as soon as he was born Pv-a 195 anumodana-mattena because of being pleased Pv-a 121 upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought Pv-a 192 nimujjana-matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under Pv-a 47-na mattena … eva not only … but even Pv-a 18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti)
      i.e. mattā used as adjective
    Matta2
    intoxicated (with), full of joy about (—˚), proud of, conceited Snp 889 (mānena m.) Ja iv.4 (vedanā˚, full of pain, perhaps better with variant reading ˚patta for ˚matta) Vv-a 158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut) Dhp-a iv.24 (identical) Pv-a 47 (surā˚), 86 (māna-mada˚), 280 (bhoga-mada˚).
    1. ˚kāsinī ‣See matthak’ āsinī
    past participle of madati
    Mattaka
    adjective
    1. of the size of Sdhp 238 (pāṇi˚)
    2. only as much as, mere DN i.12 (appa˚ ora˚, sīla˚) Ja iv.228 (mana˚) Dhp-a iv.178 (pitumattakaṁ gahetvā)
    from matta1
    Mattatta
    neuter
    1. (the fact of) consisting of, or being only … Pv-a 199 (maṁsa-pesi˚)
    abstract from matta
    Mattā
    feminine
    1. measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Snp 971 (mattaṁ so jaññā); Dhp i.35 (mattā ti pamāṇaṁ vuccati) ablative mattaso in ˚kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pug 37 (= pamānena padesa-mattam eva karontī ti)
    2. In compounds shortened to matta˚;
      1. ˚aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya = ˚atthika) desirous of moderation moderate Thag 1, 922
      • ˚ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) AN ii.40 Snp 338 Pug 25 Dhp 8 cp. jāgariyā -ññutā moderation (in eating) DN iii.213 Nd1 483 Dhp 185 Pug 25 Vb 249 360 Dhs 1348 Dhp-a ii.238
      • ˚sukha (metri causâ: mattā-sukha) measured happiness, i.e. small happiness Dhp 290 (cp. Dhp-a iii.449)
      Vedic mātrā, of
    Matti
    (-sambhava)
    1. born (from a mother) Snp 620 (= mātari sambhūta Snp-a 466) = Dh 396 (= mātu santike udarasmiṁ sambhūta Dhp-a iv.158)
    for *māti˚ = mātu˚ = *mātṛ, after pitti˚ = pitu˚ = *pitṛ
    Mattika
    adjective (˚-)
    1. made of clay, clay-; only in compounds.:
    1. ˚kuṇḍala clay earring SN i.79 (variant reading mattikā˚)
    2. ˚bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Snp 577 Vism 231 (in comparison) Dhp-a i.130
    • ˚vāka clay fibre Dhs-a 321 (variant reading ˚takka, perhaps gloss = takku spindle ‣See takka1)
    from mattikā
    Mattikā
    feminine
    1. clay Ja vi.372 Mhvs 29, 5 sq
    2. tamba˚ red clay Dhp-a iv.106 Pv-a 191
    3. mattikā
    4. plural kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller’s earth) Ja v.89 (nānā-cunṇāni mattikā ‣See also cuṇṇa)
    5. loam, mud MN iii.94 (alla˚ fresh loam or mud); Vism 123 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā) Kp-a 59 (paṇḍu) Vv-a 65 Pv-a 216 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā)
      1. ˚thāla bowl of clay Dhp-a iv.67
      • ˚piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DN-a i.289 same trope at Pv-a 175
      cp. Vedic mṛttikā, derived from Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with Pali maṇḍa, Sanskrit vimradati. Gr soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Gothic mulda, Anglo-Saxon molde (English mould, mole = mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sanskrit mṛdu = Latin mollis soft, Sanskrit mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus mardayati; also in cognate ˚mḷd as appearing in Gr to melt = Anglo-Saxon meltan, Old High German smëlzan
    Matteyya
    1. (& metteyya) adjective

      1. reverential towards one’s mother, motherloving DN iii.74 Pv ii.718 (= mātu hita Pv-a 104 variant reading mett˚). Spelling at DN iii.72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the following petteyya, with which it is always combined
      from mātā, *mātreyya → *matteyya
    Matteyyatā
    1. (& mett˚) feminine

      1. filial love towards one’s mother; always combined with petteyyatā DN iii.145 (variant reading mett˚) Nd2 294 (mett˚), Dhp 332 Dhp-a iv.33
      abstract from matteyya
    Mattha

    the head, etc. Only in compound mattha-luṅga cp. Sanskrit mastulunga

    1. the brain Vin i.274 Snp 199 Kh iii. Ja i.493 Kp-a 60; Vism 260 (in detail) 264, 359 Vb-a 63 243 249 Dhp-a ii.68 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 80
    • ‣ See also matthaka
    cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Latin mentum chin, Welsh. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Latin mons mountain
    Matthaka
    1. the head, figuratively top, summit Ja iii.206 = iv.4; iv.173, 457; v.478 DN-a i.226 (pabbata˚); Pv iv.163 Dhp-a i.184
    • matthaka-matthakena (from end to end) Ja i,202; iii.304.
    • locative matthake as
    • adverb (1) at the head Dhp-a i.109 (2) at the distance of (—˚) Dhp-a i.367 (3) on top of (—˚) Ja v.163 (vammīka˚); Mhvs 23, 80 (sīsa˚); Yugandhara˚ Mil 6 Dhp-a ii.3 (uddhana˚).

      1. ˚āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) Ja vi.497 (= pabbata-matthake nisinna Commentary ; gloss matta-kāsin i.e. wildly in love, explained by kāma-mada-matta). The reading is not clear
      2. ˚tela oil for the head Kp-a 64 (= muddhani tela Vism 262)
      cp. mattha
    Mathati
    1. to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in causative matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaṁ SN iv.210 Snp 50 (= tāseti hāpeti Nd2 492); Pv iv.71 (kammānaṁ vipāko mathaye manaṁ; C 264: abhibhaveyya) Mil 385 (vāyu pādape mathayati;.. kilesā mathayitabbā).
    2. past participle mathita ‣See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti
    3. Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Latin mamphur part of the lathe = German mandel (“mangle”), English mandrel; Lithuanian mentùris churning stick. The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and explains by “viḷolana,” as does Dhtm (183) by “viḷoṭana”
    Mathana
    adjective neuter
    1. shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Mil 21 (+ maddana) Dhp-a i.312 Pv-a 265
    from math
    Mathita
    .
    1. (churned) buttermilk Vin ii.301 (amathita-kappa)
    2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion conceit, etc. MN i.486 (maññita +). Neumann translates “Vermutung” i.e. speculation, guessing (variant reading matth˚)
    past participle of matheti
    Mada

    1. intoxication sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc. MN i.355 = AN ii.40 = Nd1 496 = Nd2 540 = Pug 21 = Dhs 1346 1348. The commentator’s explains bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna-mada & purisa-; mada (at Dhs-a 403 Vism 293), or muṭṭhika-mall' ādayo viya madatthaṁ bala- mada-nimittaṁ porisa- mada-nimittañ cā ti vuttaṁ (at Vism 31). Snp 218 (mada-pamāda on which passage Snp-a 273 comments on mada with jāti-mad’ ādi-bhedā madā)
    2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Mil 289 (māna, m., pamāda) Vb 345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti˚, gotta˚, ārogya˚ yobbana˚, jīvita-mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaṁ māno … uṇṇati … dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd2 505 Dhs 1116); sometimes more definitely characterised with phrase mada-matta elated with the pride or intoxication of … (—˚). e.g. AN i.147 (yobbana˚, ārogya˚ jīvita˚) Pv-a 86 (māna˚), 280 (bhoga˚)
    3. The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada’s, viz. ārogya- mada the pride of health, yobbana˚; of youth, jīvita˚; of life: DN iii.220 AN i.146
      1. ˚nimmadana “disintoxication from intoxication, freedom from pride or conceit AN ii.34 Bu i.81; Vism 293
      Vedic mada, mad ‣See majjati, Indogermanic *mad, as in Avestan mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated originally meaning “drip, be full of liquid or fat”; cp. Gr dissolve, breast (→ Amazone), Latin madeo to be wet, Old High German mast fattening, Sanskrit meda grease fat, Latin medeor to heal. For further relations ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. madeo The Dhtp (412) Dhtm (642) explain; mad by “ummāde” Dhtm 210 also by “muda, mada = santose”
    Madana
    neuter
    1. literally making drunk, intoxication Nd2 540 Commentary (in formula davāya madāya madanāya instead of maṇḍanāya ‣See under mada 1); in cpd ˚yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas Ja i.204 cp. nimmadana
    from mad
    Madanīya
    adjective neuter
    1. intoxicating DN ii.185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.)
    2. intoxication Vv-a 73
    originally gerundive of madati
    Madirā
    feminine
    1. intoxicating drink, spirit Ja v.425 Dhs-a 48
    of adjective Vedic madira intoxicating
    Madda
    1.
    1. crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin ii.151 Ja iii.226 (piṭṭhi˚)
    • dialectical, cp. Sanskrit madra
    1. name of a country & its inhabitants, in; ˚raṭṭha Snp-a 68f. ˚rājakula Kp-a 73
    1. ˚viṇā a sort of girdle Vin ii.136
    from mṛd, Sanskrit marda
    Maddati
    1. to tread on, trample on (
    2. accusative ), crush Ja iii.245 372 (ppr. maddamāna) Dhp-a ii.66
    3. to defeat destroy Snp 770 (= abhibhavati Nd1 12) Nd2 85 (madditvā = abhibhuyya) Snp-a 450 Mhvs 1, 41
    4. figuratively to crush a heresy: vādaṁ m. Mhvs 36, 41
    5. to neglect (an advice), spurn Ja iii.211 (ovādaṁ).

      • to mix up knead, jumble together Dhp-a ii.155

    6. to thresh Ja i.215

      • to break down, upset Ja i.500 (vatiṁ, a fence)

    7. to draw together (a net) Ja i.208

      • causative I maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mhvs 29. 4 (
      • aorist maddayi).
      • causative II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin ii.180
      • past participle maddita ‣See also pari˚
      cp. Vedic mṛd to crush ‣See etymology under mattikā
    Maddana
    neuter
    1. crushing, grinding, destroying Ja iv.26 Mil 21 (adjective, + mathana) Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156
    2. threshing Mil 360
    3. ‣ See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mardana, from mṛd
    Maddarī
    feminine
    1. a species of bird, in compound ambaka˚ AN i.188
    ?
    Maddava
    adjective neuter
    1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340 Vb 359 Mil 229 (cittaṁ mudukaṁ m. siniddhaṁ), 313 (mudu˚), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu).; 2. (from madda) as personal name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda
    2. withered Dhp 377 (= milāta Dhp-a iv.112)
    3. nt. maddavaṁ mildness softness, gentleness Snp 250 (ajjava +), 292 (identical) Ja iii.274 (as one of the 10 rāja-dhammā); v.347 (= mettacittaṁ) Dhs-a 151 ‣See also sūkara˚;
    from mṛdu, cp. Epic Sanskrit mārdava
    Maddavatā
    feminine
    1. gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs 44 1340 Dhs-a 151
    abstract from maddava
    Maddālaka
    1. a kind of bird Ja vi.538
    etymology?
    Maddita
    1. kneaded, mixed, in su˚; Vism 124
    2. crushed, defeated, in su˚ Mil 284
    3. cp. pa˚, pari˚;
    past participle of maddeti ‣See maddati
    Maddin
    adjective
    1. crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. cp. pamaddin
    from mṛd, cp. Sanskrit mardin = mardana
    Maddhita
    1. ‣See pari˚
    of mṛdh
    Madhu

    1. dripping with honey, full of honey Ja iii.493 (so read for madh-atthika); vi.529 (= madhuṁ paggharanto Commentary ). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. unnecessarily reads as ˚atthika which he takes = ˚aṭṭhika. -da giving honey liberal Mhvs 5, 60 (Asoka)
    2. ˚paṭala honey-comb Ja i.262 Dhp-a i.59 Dhp-a iii.323
    • ˚piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honey-food, a meal with honey Vin i.4 MN i.114
    • ˚pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey SN i.212
    • ˚(b)bata “courting honey,” a bee Dāvs iii.65 -bindu a drop of honey Vism 531 Vb-a 146 (˚giddha in comparison)
    • ˚makkhitā smeared with honey Ja i.158
    • ˚madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey Ja vi.529
    • ˚mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha (“honey-urine,” diabetes?) Vin iv.8
    • ˚laṭṭhikā liquorice (no reference?); cp. Laṭṭhi-madhukavana Ja i.68
    • ˚lāja sweet corn Ja iv.214 Ja iv.281
    • ˚vāṇija honey seller Mhvs 5, 49
    • ˚ssava flowing with honey Pv ii.911
    cp. Vedic madhu, Lithuanian medùs honey, midùs wine, Old High German metu = German met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice ‣See under madati honey Ja i.157f.; iv.117 Dhp 69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mhvs 5, 53 Dhs-a 330 Dhp-a ii.197 (alla fresh honey) plural madhūni Mhvs 5, 31
  • The Abhp (533) also gives “wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia” as meaning
  • On madhu in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 121
  • ˚atthika (madh˚) at Ja iii.493 is with variant reading to be read madhu-tthika (q.v. below). The proposal of Kern’s (Toevoegselen s.v.) to read madh’ aṭṭhika “with sweet kernels cannot be accepted. The Commentary explains rightly by “madhura-phalesu pakkhitta-madhu viya, madhura-phalo hutvā.” -atthika (madhu˚) desirous of honey ‣Seeking honey Ja iv.205 Mhvs 5, 50
  • ˚āpaṇa (madhv˚) honey shop Mhvs 5, 52
  • ˚āsava (madhv˚) honey extract wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia Vv-a 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors)
  • ˚kara “honey-maker,” bee Ja iv.265 Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.374
  • ˚gaṇḍa honey-comb Mhvs 22, 42; 34, 52 -tthika [madhu + thika, which latter stands for thīya from styā to congeal, drip ‣See thika, thīna, thīya and theva
  • Madhuka
    adjective noun
    1. connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (literally honey tree) Vin i.246 Ja v.324 Ja v.405 Ja vi.529 Mil 165
    • the fruit of that tree Ja iv.434

    • adjective (—˚) full of honey Ja vi.529 (madhu˚ containing honey)
    • connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of (—˚ Ja iv.117 (surā-meraya˚)
    1. ˚aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism 353 = KhA 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal’ aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails) -puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin i.246 (˚rasa liquorice juice) Ja i.430
    from madhu
  • Madhukā
    feminine
    1. honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mhvs 5, 52
    from madhuka
    Madhura
    adjective
    1. sweet Snp 50 Ja iii.493 Ja v.324 Pv ii.67 Pv-a 119 Pv-a 147
    2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor-like, intoxicating Ja iv.117
      • neuter sweetness, sweet drink Dhp 363 Ja i.271 (catu˚ the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison) Dhs 629 Dhs-a 320
      • neuter flattery, praise Snp-a 287 (opp avaṇṇa)
      1. ˚rasa sweet (i.e. honey-) juice, sweet liquor Dhp-a ii.50 Pv-a 119
      • ˚ssara sweet-sounding Vv-a 57 Pv-a 151 Mhvs 5, 32
      from madhu
    Madhuraka
    adjective
    1. full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka-jātokāyo viya “like an intoxicated body, i.e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been “become languid or weak” (“erschlafft” German) Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: “Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen,” hardly justifiable
    • DN ii.99 MN i.334 SN iii.106 AN iii.69 The description refers to a state of swooning like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rhys Davids (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.107) translates “my body became weak as a creeper,” hardly correct
    1. taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301) “wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel.” F. Latin Woodward follows me in discarding translation “creeper” and assuming one like “intoxicated” (so also UdA, 246) ‣See his note on SN iii.106 translation (Kindred Sayings iii.90)
    from madhura, cp. similarly madhuka → madhu
    Madhuratā
    feminine
    1. sweetness Ja i.68
    abstract from madhura
    Madhuratta
    neuter
    1. sweetness Mhvs 2, 13
    abstract from madhura
    Manaṁ
    adverb
    1. “by a certain weight,” i.e. a little, somewhat, almost, well-nigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: MN ii.123 (m. v. bho anassāma) Dhp-a iii.147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man amhi (with past participle ). “I nearly was so & so,” e. g Vin i.109 (vuḷho) Ja i.405 (upakūḷito); iii.435 (matā) 531 (mārāpito). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit manāsmi khāditā MVastu ii.450
    2. cp. Classical Sanskrit manāk, “a little (of something)” probably derived from Vedic manā
    3. feminine a. gold weight =
    Manatā
    feminine
    1. mentality Dhs-a 143 (in explanation of attamanatā)
    abstract from mano
    Manasa
    adjective
    1. having a mind with such & such a mind Snp 942 (nibbāna˚ “a nibbāna mind,” one who is intent upon name, cp. explanation at Snp-a 567) Pv i.66 (paduṭṭha-manasā feminine, maybe ˚mānasā but Pv-a 34 explains “paduṭṭha-cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā) ‣See also adhimanasa under adhimana
    2. the—˚ form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either ˚mana or ˚mānasa
    Manassa
    neuter
    1. of a mind, only in compounds. do˚ & so˚ (q.v.)
    *manasyaṁ, abstract derived from mana(s)
    Manāti
    1. to crush, destroy; only in Commentator’s fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at Dhs-a 218 (veraṁ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v. and Kp-a 24 (veraṁ maṇātī ti v., veraṁ pajahati vinodeti etc.)
    cp. Sanskrit mṛṇāti, mṛ2
    Manāpa
    adjective
    1. pleasing, pleasant, charming Snp 22 Snp 759 Dhp 339 (˚ssavana) Vv-a 71 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 9. Often in combination piya manāpa, e.g. DN ii.19 iii.167 Ja ii.155 Ja iv.132
    • O
    • past participle ; , e.g. Pug 32
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit manāpa
    Manāpika
    1. = manāpa, Vb 380 Mil 362
    Manuja
    human being; man AN iv.159 Snp 458 Snp 661 Snp 1043sq. Dhp 306 Dhp 334. Nd2 496 (explains as “manussa” & “satta”).
    1. ˚ādhipa lord of men Mhvs 19, 32
    2. ˚inda king of men great king Snp 553 Ja vi.98
    manu + ja, i.e. sprung from Manu, cp. etymology of manussa s.v.
    Manuñña
    adjective
    1. pleasing, delightful, beautiful Vv 8417 (= manorama Vv-a 340) Ja i.207 ii.331; Pv ii.122; iv.121 Mil 175 Mil 398 Vv-a 11 36 Pv-a 251 adverb ˚ṁ pleasantly, delightfully Ja iv.252 O
    2. past participle ; unpleasant Ja vi.207
    3. cp. Classical Sanskrit manojña
    Manute
    1. to think, discern, understand Dhs-a 123
    Med. form of maññati
    Manussa
    1. a human being, man The popular etymology connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e.g. Kp-a 123: “Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti ʻ mana-ussannatāya manussa ʼ; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā.” Similarly with the other view of connecting it with “mind Vv-a 18: “manassa ussannatāya manussā” etc. cp. also Vv-a 23 where manussa-nerayika, ˚peta, ˚tiracchāna are distinguished
    • Sn 75, 307, 333 sq., 611 sq. Dhp 85 Dhp 188 Dhp 197 sq., 321 Nd1 97 (as gati), 340, 484 (˚phassa of Snp 964); Vism 312 Vb-a 455 (various clans) Dhp-a i.364
    • amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost a spirit; in compounds. “haunted,” ilke ˚kantāra Ja i.395
    • ˚ṭṭhāna Vv 843 (cp. Vv-a 334 where explained); ˚sadda Dhp-a i.315 ‣See also separately amanussa
    1. ˚attabhāva human existence Pv-a 71 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 122
    2. ˚itthi a human woman Pv-a 48 Pv-a 154
    3. ˚inda lord of men SN i.69 Mhvs 19, 33
    4. ˚khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually applied to Yakkhas) Vb-a 451
    • ˚deva (a) “god of men,” i.e. king Pv ii.811; (b) men & gods (?) Vv-a 321 (Hardy, in note takes it as “gods of men,” i.e. brāhmaṇā)
    • ˚dhamma condition of man, human state Vv-a 24 ‣See also uttari-manussa dhamma
    • ˚bhūta as a human, in human form Pv i.112 ii.112
    • ˚loka the world of men Snp 683
    from manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etymology with Gothic manna = man
    Manussatta
    neuter
    1. human existence, state of men Iti 19 Vv 3416 Snp-a 48 51; Sdhp 17f.
    abstract fr, manussa
    Manussika
    adjective
    1. ‣See under a˚;
    from manussa
    Manesikā
    feminine
    1. “mind-searching,” i.e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind-reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus DN i.7 (= m. nāma manasā cintita-jānana-kīḷā DN-a i.86) Vin ii.10
    mano + esikā2
    Mano
    Mana(s);
    neuter
    1. I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s-stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp cetah → ceto) & partly follows the a-declension. The form mano is found throughout in compounds. as; mano˚; , the other mana at the end of compounds. as ˚mana. From stem manas an adjective manasa is formed and the derivation mānasa & manassa; (—˚). nominative mano frequently; & manaṁ Dhp 96
    2. accusative mano Snp 270 Snp 388 Snp-a 11 and frequently; also manaṁ Snp 659 = AN ii.3 AN v.171 = Nett 132 Snp 678 cp. i.85 Vism 466; genitive dative manaso Snp 470 Snp 967 Dhp 390 (manaso piya); Pv ii.111 (manaso piya = manasā piya Pv-a 71); instrumental manasā Snp 330 Snp 365 Snp 834 (m. cintayanto) 1030 MN iii.179 Dhp 1 Pv ii.97 (m. pi cetaye); also manena Dhp-a i.42 Dhs-a 72 ablative manato SN iv.65 Dhp-a i.23 Vism 466;
    3. locative manasmiṁ SN iv.65
    4. manamhi Vism 466; also mane Dhp-a i.23 & manasi ‣See this in compound manasi karoti, below

      • II. Meaning: mind thought DN iii.96 DN iii.102 DN iii.206 DN iii.226 DN iii.244 DN iii.269 DN iii.281 SN i.16 SN i.172 SN ii.94 MN iii.55 AN iii.443 AN v.171 Snp 77 Snp 424 Snp 829 Snp 873 Dhp 116 Dhp 300; Sdhp 369
      1. -1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viñnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense-reaction (“perception”), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddhist Psychology p. 19-The rendering with "mind” covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated “thought. As “mind” it embodies the rational faculty of man which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni ‣See āyatana 3). These are: (1); cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viññāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rhys Davids Buddh. Psych. 140 163) which recognises the world as a “mundus sensibilis” (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe ‣See dhamma B. 1, Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the "empirical. world” (as Geiger, e.g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80
      1. -82 pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kvu 126 sq. i.e. the material world), as the world of “things,” of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc
      • Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (
      • plural istic representation of the world, i.e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our English expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold; used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror-stricken; deeply moved feeling → Latin palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind “sensing,” that manas “senses” (as a refined sense of touch) the “sensibility” (dhamma) of the objects, or as Compendium 183 expresses it “cognizable objects.” ‣See also kāya II.; and phassa
      • In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man-)āyatana (man-)indriya and (mano-)dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought On mano-dhātu and m-āyatana ‣See also the discourse by S.Z. Aung. Compendium 256
      1. -59, with Mrs. Rhys Davids’s apt remarks on p. 259
      • The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e.g. at MN i.295 (commented on at Dhs-a 72) and SN v.217 (mano nesaṁ gocara-visayaṁ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function-spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger Dhamma 81; as in the Sānkhya: Garbe, Sānkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). cp. Vin i.36 “ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu.”
      • As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation “heart”), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such ‣See also citta2 I., and on rel. to viññāṇa & citta ‣See citta; 2 Iv.2b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body cittaṁ iti pi mano iti pi SN ii.94 So in the triad “thought (i.e. intention) speech and action” manas interchanges with citta ‣See kāya III
      • The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e.g. MN iii.178 (sucaritaṁ caritvā) Dhp 391 (natthi dukkaṭaṁ), cp. Dhp 96 santaṁ tassa manaṁ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta kāyena vācāya uda cetasā SN i.93 SN i.102 AN i.63 rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena SN ii.231 SN iv.112
      • It is further combined with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages “mano” is “cittaṁ mano mānasaṁ hadayaṁ, paṇḍaraṁ man-āyatanaṁ … mano-viññāna-dhātu” (mind sensibility). Thus e.g. at Nd1 3 (for mano), 176 (identical) Nd2 494 (which however leaves out cittaṁ in exegesis of Snp 1142 Snp 1413 but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Snp 1039) Dhs 6 (in definition of citta), 17 (of man’ indriyaṁ) 65 (of man-āyatanaṁ), 68 (of mano-viññṇa-dhātu). The close relation between the two appears further from their combination in the formula of the ādesanā-pāṭihāriyaṁ (wonder of manifestation, i.e. the discovery of other peoples’ thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te; mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṁ : “so & so is in your mind … so & so are your emotions” DN i.213 iii.103 = AN i.170
      • At SN i.53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaṁ utrastaṁ idaṁ cittaṁ (heart), niccaṁ ubbiggaṁ idaṁ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from Ja i.36 where the passage runs: sīho cittaṁ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaṁ oloketva vyākāsi … At Pv-a 264
      • mano (of Pv iv.71) is explained by cittaṁ pīti mano of Snp 766 (glad of heart) explained at Snp-a 512 by santuṭṭha-citto; nibbānamanaso of Snp 942 at Snp-a 567 by nibbāna-ninna-citto In the phrase yathā-manena “from his heart,” i.e. sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42 mano clearly acts as citta

    5. Phrases: manaṁ uppādeti to make up one’s mind, to resolve Dhp-a ii.140 (cp. citt’ uppāda); manaṁ karoti : (a) to fix one’s mind upon, to give thought to find pleasure or to delight in (

      • locative ) Ja iv.223 (rūpe na manaṁ kare = itthi-rūpe nimittaṁ na gaṇheyyāsi C cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense) vi.45 (
      • passive gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one’s mind Dhp-a ii.87
      • manaṁ gaṁhāti to “take the mind, take the fancy, to please, to win approval Ja iv.132 Dhp-a ii.48

        • III. ˚mana : dhamm-uddhacca-viggahita AN ii.157 (read ˚mano for ˚manā); sankiliṭṭha-manā narā Thag 2, 344 atta˚ pleased; gedhita˚; greedy Pv ii.82dum˚; depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart DN ii.148 SN i.103 Vin i.21 AN ii.59 AN ii.61 AN ii.198 Thag 2, 484 Ja i.189 opposite sumana elated, joyful Pv ii.948 (= somanassajāta Pv-a 132); pīti˚; glad or joyful of heart Snp 766 (explained by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭha-mano, attamano etc at Nd1 3; by santuṭṭha-citto at Snp-a 512)
        • IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider recognise
        1. -1. (v.) pres. 1st plural ˚karoma Vin i.103
        2. imperative 2nd singular ˚karohi, often in formula “suṇāhi sādhukaṁ m
        3. k.” “harken and pay attention” DN i.124 DN i.157 DN i.249 cp. M. i.7 AN i.227
        4. plural 2nd˚karotha AN i.171 DN i.214 (+ vitakketha); Pot. ˚kareyyātha DN i.90 (taṁ atthaṁ sādhukaṁ k.); ppr. ˚karonto Dhs-a 207
        5. absolutive ˚katvā AN ii.116 (aṭṭhikatvā + … ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv iii.25 (a˚ = anāvajjetvā Pv-a 181) Vv-a 87 92 Pv-a 62
        6. gerundive ˚kātabba Vism 244, 278 Dhs-a 205
        7. aorist manas-ākāsi MN ii.61 2nd
        8. plural (Prohib.) (mā) manasākattha DN i.214 AN i.171
        9. passive manasi -karīyati Vism 284
        10. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Compendium 12, 28, 40, 282) DN iii.104 DN iii.108f. 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso) MN i.296 SN ii.3 (cetanā phasso m.); iv.297 (sabba-nimittānaṁ a˚ inattention to all outward signs of allurement) Nd1 501 (ayoniso) Vb 320 325, 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism 241 (paṭikūla˚) Vb-a 148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras) 251 (paṭikkūla˚), 255 (n'âtisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso) 500 Dhp-a ii.87 (paṭikkula˚) Dhs-a 133
        11. sammā manasikāraṁ anvāya by careful pondering DN i.13 DN i.18≈ As adjective (thoughtful) at Thag-a 273
        12. The definition of m. at Vism 466 runs as follows: “kiriyā-kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima-manato visadisaṁ manaṁ karotī ti pi m Svāyaṁ: ārammaṇa-paṭipādako vīthi-paṭipādako javana-p.˚ ti ti-ppakāro."-compounds.: -kusalatā proficiency in attention DN iii.211 -kosalla identical Vb-a 56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism 241 (tenfold), 243 (identical, viz anupubbato, nâtisīghato, nâtisāṇikato etc.) Pv-a 63 (yoniso˚); -vidhāna arrangement of attention Vb-a 69 71; -vidhi rule or form of attention Vism 278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti)
        13. The composition form of manas is mano˚ except before vowels, when man’ takes its place (as man-āyatana Vb-a 46f.)
      1. ˚aṅgaṇa (man˚) sphere of ideation (Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation § 58 DN iii.243 DN iii.280 and passim -āvajjana representative cognition: Compendium 59
      2. ˚indriya (man˚) mind-faculty category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Compendium past participle 183, 184) DN i.70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṁ etc.) iii.226, and passim -kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī˚ (vocal action) AN i.32 104 Pug 41 Dhs 981 (where omitted in text)
      3. ˚java cp. Vedic manojava
        1. swift as thought Vv 6329 Pv-a 216 (assājāniya)
        2. ˚daṇḍa “mind-punishment” (? corresponding to kāya˚ & vacī-daṇḍa, MN i.372 sq (Neumann, translates “Streich in Gedanken”)
        3. ˚duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dhp 233 Nd1 386 Pug 60
        • ˚dosa blemish of mind AN i.112
        • ˚dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness Vb-a 41 Dhs-a 425 cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 3 (2p. 2); Compendium 10
        • ˚dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 129 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs 457f. Vb 14 71, 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488 Vb-a 80 81, 239 (physiological foundation), 405 Dhs-a 263 425 Kp-a 53
        • ˚padosa anger in mind, ill-will DN iii.72 MN i.377 Snp 702 Ja iv.29 Dhs 1060 (cp. Dhs-a 367 manaṁ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i.e. to set one’s heart at anger)
        • ˚padosika
        • adjective debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), name of a class of gods DN i.20 Vb-a 498 519. cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (; Toevoegselen i.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long
        • ˚pasāda tranquillity of the mind devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) Dhp-a i.28
        • ˚pubbaṅgama directed by mind, dominated by thought ‣See pubba2 Dhp 1 Dhp 2; cp. Dhp-a i.21 35
        • ˚bhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed SN iii.1 MN iii.261 Vv 3413 (cp. Vv-a 152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka) Mil 129 Kern, Toevoegselen i.163 translates “to be kept in mind with honour.” -mattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (
        • adverb “by mere mind,” consisting of mind only, i.e. memorial as a matter of mind Ja iv.228
        • ˚maya made of mind consisting of mind, i.e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, explained at Vism 405 as “adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m.”; at DN-a i.120 as “jhāna-manena nibbatta”; at Dhp-a i.23 as “manato nipphanna”; at Vv-a 10 as “bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta."-Dh 1, 2 Ja vi.265 (manomayaṁ sindhavaṁ abhiruyha); Sdhp 259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, 406

          • Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge human beings or gods may be endowed with this power DN i.17 (+ pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbanga-paccangī etc.), 77 (identical) 186 (identical) Vin ii.185 (Koliya-putto kālaṁ kato aññataraṁ mano-mayaṁ kāyaṁ upapanno) MN i.410 (devā rūpino m.) SN iv.71 AN i.24 AN iii.122 AN iii.192 AN iv.235 v.60
          • ˚ratha desired object (literally what pleases the mind), wish Vism 506 (˚vighāta + icchā- vighāta); ˚ṁ pūreti to fulfil one’s wish Mhvs 8, 27 (puṇṇa-sabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī
          • feminine “the wish fulfiller” is the name of the Commentary on the Anguttara Nikāya
          • ˚rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Snp 50 Snp 337 Snp 1013 Dhp 58 Pv ii.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mhvs 18, 48 Vv-a 340
          • ˚viññāṇa representative cognition rationality Vism 489 Vb-a 150 (22 fold) Dhs-a 304 cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 170 (2p. 157); -dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (= āyatanāni) Dhs 58 Vb 14 71, 87, 89, 144, 176 and passim ‣See also above Ii.3 and discussions at Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 132 (2p. 122); introduction p. 53 sq.; Compendium 1232, 184
          • ˚viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.281n) DN ii.281 MN iii.55 MN iii.57 Ja iv.195
          • ˚vitakka a thought (of mind SN i.207 = Sn 270 (mano is in Commentary on this passage explained as “kusala-citta” Snp-a 303)
          • ˚sañcetan' āhāra “nutriment of representative cogitation” (Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 31 SN ii.11 SN ii.13 SN ii.99 Dhs 72 Vism 341
          • ˚satta “with mind attached,” name of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment MN i.376
          • ˚samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya˚ & vacī˚ MN ii.114 MN iii.45 MN iii.49
          • ˚silā (cp. Sanskrit manaḥ-śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e.g. Ja v.416 (+ haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485 Dhp-a iv.113 (identical as cuṇṇa) Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.20); Mhvs 29, 12 Snp-a 59 (˚piṇḍa in simile) Dhp-a ii.43 (˚rasa) Vv-a 288 (˚cuṇṇa-pịñjara-vaṇṇa of ripe mango fruit) Pv-a 274 (˚vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni) -tala a flat rock, platform (= silātala) Snp-a 93 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion’s roar: Ja ii.219 vi.399 Vv-a 217 as a district of the Himavant Ja vi.432 Snp-a 358
          • ˚hara charming, captivating beautiful Mhvs 18, 49; name of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Mil 118 Mil 354
          Vedic manaḥ ‣See etymology under maññati
    Manta

    originally a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan cp. definition of mant at Dhtp 578 by “gutta-bhāsane”

    1. counsel hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, especially the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i.e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists
    1. -1. with reference to the Vedas usually in the plural mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations) DN i.96 MN ii.166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti) Snp 249 (= devā Snp-a 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā criticised by Buddhaghosa as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows “vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa-mante nāsetvā adhamma-yutte kūṭa-mante ganthetvā” Snp-a 320) 1000 (with reference to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018 Dhp 241 (holy studies) Ja ii.100 Ja iii.28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537
    2. Sometimes in singular : mantaṁ parivattenti brahma-cintitaṁ Pv ii.613 (= veda Pv-a 97) = Vv 6316 (= veda Vv-a 265); -
    3. nominative
    4. plural also mantāni meaning “Vedas”: Mil 10
    5. (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine SN i.57 (mantā dhīra “firm in doctrine” Kindred Sayings thus taking mantā as instrumental; it may better be taken as mantar Snp 1042 (where Nd2 497 explains as paññā etc.); Mhvs 5, 109 (Buddha˚ the “mantra” of the B.), 147 (identical)
    6. divine utterance a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Mil 11 ‣See about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153. At Pv-a 117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas while y. is referred to men

      • J i.200 (+ paritta) iii.511 (˚ṁ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell) Dhp-a iv.227 There are several special charms mentioned at various places of the Jātakas, e.g. one called Vedabbha by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air Ja i.253 (nakkhatta-yoge laddhe taṁ mantaṁ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato satta-ratana-vassaṁ vassati) Others are: paṭhavī-jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) Ja ii.243 sabba-rāva-jānana˚ (of knowing all sounds, of animals) iii.415; nidhi-uddharana˚ (of finding secret treasures) iii.116; catukaṇṇa (four-cornered) vi.392, etc
      • advice, counsel, plan design Vin iv.308 (˚ṁ saṁharati to foil a plan) Ja vi.438

      • adjective (—˚) parivattana˚; a charm that can be said an effective charm Ja i.200
      • bahu˚ knowing many charms very tricky Dhp-a ii.4
      • bhinna˚ one who has neglected an advice Ja vi.437 Ja vi.438

        1. ˚ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) Ja i.167 Dhp-a iii.361 (tinnaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū m
        • a. brāhmaṇo)
        • ˚ajjhena study of the Vedas Snp-a 314
        • ˚pada = manta 1. DN i.104 (= veda-sankhāta m. DN-a i.273
        • ˚pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Snp 997 manta in this sense is by the Cys always explained by paññā, e.g., Nd2 497 (as mantā
        • feminine ) Dhp-a iv.93 (identical), Snp-a 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā) -pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Snp 251 (= vedapāragū Snp-a 293), 690 (= vedānaṁ pāragata Snp-a 488), 976
        • ˚bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Snp 140 (= vedabandhū Snp-a 192) Nd1 11 (where Nd2 455 in same connection reads mitta˚ for manta˚ ‣See under bandhu)
        • ˚bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Thag ii.281; figuratively a clever speaker Snp 850 (but Nd1 219 reads manta˚ ‣See mantar) Dhp 363 (cp. Dhp-a iv.93 paññāya bhaṇana-sīla) Thag 1, 2
        • ˚yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mhvs 25, 49 (“cunningly planned b.” translation Geiger; “diplomatic stratagem,” Turnour)
        cp. Vedic mantra, from mantray
    Mantanaka
    adjective
    1. plotting Ja v.437
    from mantanā
    Mantanā
    feminine (& ˚ṇā)
    1. counsel, consultation, deliberation, advice, command DN i.104 AN i.199 Vin v.164 Ja vi.437 Ja vi.438 Mil 3 (ṇ) DN-a i.273
    from; mant
    Mantar
    1. a sage ‣Seer, wise man, usually appositionally nominative mantā “as a sage,” “like a thinker,” a form which looks like a feminine and is mostly explained as such by the Commentaries Mantā has also erroneously been taken as instrumental of manta, or as a so-called
    2. absolutive of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been explained at “jānitvā.” The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153 979) it has come down at mantā “wisdom” to Childers Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? SN i.57 (+ dhīra; translation “firm in doctrine”) Snp 159 (“in truth,” opposed to musā Snp-a 204 explains m. = paññā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, explained at Snp-a 562 by “mantāya”), 1040 = 1042 (= Nd2 497 mantā vuccati paññā etc.) Vv 636 (explained as jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā Vv-a 262)

      • Besides this form we have a shortened manta
      • nominative at Snp 455 (akiñcano +), which is explained at Snp-a 402 as mantā jānitvā It is to be noted that for manta-bhāṇin at Snp 850 the Nd1 219 reads mantā and explains customarily by “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṁ bhāsati.”
      agent noun of mant, cp. Sanskrit *mantṛ a thinker
    Mantita
    1. considered Thag 1, 9 Mil 91
    2. advised, given as counsel Ja vi.438 DN-a i.273
    past participle of manteti
    Mantin
    adjective-noun
    1. adjective giving or observing counsel SN i.236
    2. (n.) counsellor, minister Ja vi.437 (paṇḍita m.)
    from manta
    Manteti
    1. to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i.e. 1. to take counsel (with = instrumental or saddhiṁ) DN i.94 DN i.104 (mantanaṁ manteyya to discuss 122 (2nd plural imperative mantavho, as compared with mantayavho Ja ii.107 besides mantavho ibid. cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 126); ii.87, 239 Vin iv.308 (mantesuṁ
    2. aorist ; perhaps “plotted”); Snp p. 107 (= talk privately to) Snp 379 Ja i.144 Ja vi.525
    3. mantayitvāna
    4. absolutive ) DN-a i.263 (
    5. imperative mantayatha Pv-a 74 (
    6. aorist mantayiṁsu)
    7. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion AN i.199 (Pot. mantaye) Mil 91 (
    8. gerundive mantayitabba & infinitive; mantayituṁ
    9. to announce, advise; pronounce advise Snp 126 Pv iv.120 (= kathemi kittayāmi Pv-a 225) Snp-a 169

      • past participle mantita

        • cp. ā˚;
        cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta-bhāsana, i.e. “secret talk”
    Mantha

    a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (= satthu) Vin i.4 cp. Vedic mantha “Rührtrank” homeric “Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt, Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 268 from math

    Manda
    adjective
    1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with reference to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant foolish MN i.520 (+ momuha) Snp 666 Snp 820 (= momūha Nd1 153), 1051 (= mohā avidvā etc. Nd2 498) Dhp 325 (= amanasikārā manda-pañña Dhp-a iv.17) Ja iv.221 Pug 65 69; Kp-a 53, 54
    2. slow, yielding little result unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) Ja i.221
    3. [in this meaning probably = Vedic mandra “pleasant, pleasing,” although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as “bashful” soft, tender (with reference to eyes), lovely, in compounds. ˚akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes Ja iii.190 and ˚locana id Thag 2, 375 (kinnari-manda˚ = manda-puthu-vilocana Thag-a 253) Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚ = migī viya mand akkhī Pv-a 57) Vv 6411 (miga-m˚ = miga-cchāpikānaṁ viya mudu siniddha-diṭṭhi-nipāta).

      • In compound picu (or puci˚) manda the Nimb tree, it means “tree” (? ‣See picu-manda & puci-manda

    4. In composition with; bhū it assumes the form mandī˚; , e.g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished Ja i.228 Vb-a 157

      1. ˚valāhakā a class of fairies or demi-gods DN ii.259 (“fragile spirits of the clouds” translation)
      cp. late-Vedic & Epic manda
    Mandaka
    1. according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. = *mandra (of sound: deep, bass) + ka; a sort of drum Ja vi.580
    ?
    Mandatā
    feminine = mandatta Sdhp 19.
    Mandatta
    neuter
    1. stupidity MN i.520 Pug 69
    from manda
    Mandākinī
    feminine name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enumerated at AN iv.101 Ja v.415 Vism 416 Snp-a 407 DN-a i.164 (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Ganges.)
    Mandāmukhi
    feminine
    1. a coal-pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin i.32 (= aggi-bhājana Commentary ) Vv-a 147 (mandamukhī, stands for angara-kapalla p. 142 in explanation of hattha-patāpaka Vv 3332)
    dialectical? reading a little doubtful
    Mandārava
    1. the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees) The blossoms mentioned DN ii.137 fall from the next world
    • DN ii.137 Vv 222 (cp. Vv-a 111) Ja i.13 Ja i.39 Mil 13 Mil 18 (dibbāni m
    • pupphāni abhippavassiṁsu)
    cp. Sanskrit mandāra
    Mandālaka
    1. a water-plant (kind of lotus) Ja iv.539 Ja vi.47 Ja vi.279 Ja vi.564
    etymology?
    Mandiya
    neuter
    1. laziness, slackness SN i.110
    2. dullness of mind, stupidity Ja iii.38 (= manda-bhāva)
    cp. Sanskrit māndya
    Mandira
    neuter
    1. a house, edifice, palace Snp 996 Snp 1012 Ja v.480 Ja vi.269 Ja vi.270 Dāvs ii.67 (dhātu˚ shrine)
    cp. late Sanskrit mandira
    Mandī˚
    1. ‣See manda 5
    Mama
    genitive dative of pers.
    • pronoun ahaṁ (q.v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our “self-”) in phrase mama-y-idaṁ Snp 806 thought of “this is mine,” cp. SN i.14 i.e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity explained at Nd1 124 by maññanā conceit, illusion. Also in various phrases with kṛ; in form mamaṁ˚; , viz. mamankāra etc

      • As adjective “self-like, selfish” only neg amama unselfish Snp 220 (= mamatta-virahita Snp-a 276); Pv iv.134 (= mamankāra-virahita Pv-a 230) Ja iv.372 Ja vi.259 ‣See also amama, cp. māmaka
    Mamaṅkāra
    1. selfish attachment, self-interest, selfishness Pv-a 230 In canonic books only in combination with ahaṅkāra mān’ ānusaya; (belief in an ego and bias of conceit) e.g. at MN iii.18 MN iii.32 SN iii.80 SN iii.103 SN iii.136 SN iii.169 SN iv.41 SN iv.197 SN iv.202 AN i.132f.; iii.444 ‣See also mamiṅkāra
    mamaṁ (= mama) + kāra, cp. ahaṁ + kāra
    Mamaṅkāraṇa
    neuter
    1. treating with tenderness, solicitude, fondness Ja v.331
    from mamaṁ + kṛ
    Mamatta
    neuter
    1. selfishness, self-love, egoism; conceit, pride in (—˚), attachment to (—˚). Snp 806 Snp 871 Snp 951 Thag 1, 717 Nd1 49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi˚) Nd2 499 (identical but as masc.) Snp-a 276 Dhs-a 199 Pv-a 19
    from mama
    Mamāyati
    1. to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love MN i.260 SN iii.190 Thag 1, 1150 Snp 922 (mamāyetha) Nd1 125 (Bhagavantaṁ) Ja iv.359 (= piyāyati Commentary ) Mil 73 Vb-a 107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in popular etymology of mātā) Dhp-a i.11 Snp-a 534 Mhvs 20, 4. past participle mamāyita
    2. denominative from mama, cp. Sanskrit mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh; xii.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajñā Pāramitā 254
    Mamāyanā
    feminine = mamatta (selfishness) Ja vi.259 (˚taṇhārahita in explanation of amama).
    Mamāyita
    1. cherished, beloved; as noun neuter attachment, fondness of, pride

      • (adjective or
      • past participle SN ii.94 (etaṁ ajjhositaṁ, m., parāmaṭṭhaṁ) Snp 119 Dhp-a i.11
      • neuter Snp 466 Snp 777 Snp 805 Snp 950 = Dh 367 (explained as: yassa “ahan” ti vā “maman” ti vā gāho n’ atthi Dhp-a iv.100) Snp 1056 (cp. Nd2 499)
      past participle of mamāyati
    Mamiṅkaroti
    1. to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster Ja v.330
    mama(ṁ) + kṛ; “to make one’s own”
    Mamiṅkāra
    1. self-love, self-interest, egoism MN i.486 MN iii.32 (at both places also ahiṅkāra for ahaṅkāra
    for maman˚, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 19
    Mamma
    neuter
    1. soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etymology and explanation of the word is given at Expositor 132n3 (on Dhs-a 100)
    • J ii.228; iii.209 Dhs-a 396
    1. ˚ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i.e. backbiting cp. piṭṭhi-maṁsika) Dhp-a iv.182
    • ˚chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (figuratively of hard speech Dhp-a i.75 Dhs-a 100
    Vedic marman, from mṛd
    Mammana
    adjective [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sanskrit marmara rustling to Latin fremo to roar = Latin murmur stammering, stuttering Vin ii.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combined with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca).
    Maya
    adjective (—˚ only)
    1. made of, consisting of
    • An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10 where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz 1. asma -d-atthe, i.e. “myself” (as representing mayaṁ!)
    • paññatti “regulation” (same as 1 according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite different by Dhp.)

  • nibbatti “origin (arising from, with example mano-maya “produced by mind”).

    • manomaya “spiritually” (same as 3)

  • vikār’ atthe “alteration” (? more like product consistency, substance), with example “sabbe-maṭṭikāmaya-kuṭikā.”

    • pada-pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness with example “dānamaya, sīlamaya (= dana; sīla)
    1. -1. made of: aṭṭhi˚; of bone Vin ii.115
    • ayo˚ of iron Snp 669 Pv i.104 Ja iv.492
    • udum- bara˚ of Ud. wood Mhvs 23, 87; dāru˚; of wood, Vv-a 8
    • loha˚ of copper Snp 670 veḷuriya˚ of jewels Vv 21
    • consisting in: dāna˚; giving alms Pv-a 8 Pv-a 9; dussa˚ clothes Vv 467
    • dhamma˚ righteousness SN i.137

  • (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i.e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra˚; food-stuff, food Ja iii.523

    • utu˚ something like a (change in) season Vism 395; sīla˚; character, having sīla as substance (or simply-consisting of) Iti 51 (dāna˚, sīla˚, bhāvanā˚)
    Vedic maya
  • Mayaṁ
    1. we Vin ii.270 Snp 31 Snp 91 Snp 167 Dhp 6 Kp-a 210
    1st plural of ahaṁ, for vayaṁ after mayā etc ‣See ahaṁ
    Mayūkha
    1. a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation unverified)
    Vedic mayūkha in different meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altindisches Leben 254
    Mayūra
    1. a peacock DN iii.201 SN ii.279 Thag 1, 1113 Ja ii.144 Ja ii.150 (˚gīva) = Dhp-a i.144 Ja iv.211 (˚nacca); v.304; vi.172, 272, 483 Vv 111 358 (= sikhaṇḍin Vv-a 163) Vv-a 27 (˚gīva-vaṇṇa); Sdhp 92. The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at Vv-a 57 ‣See also mora
    Vedic mayūra
    Mara
    adjective
    1. dying; only negative amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay death Th; ii.512; Pv ii.611 ‣See also amara
    from mṛ
    Maraṇa
    neuter
    1. death, as ending this (visible) existence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in compounds. death
    • The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā satta-nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ maccu maraṇaṁ kālakiriyā, khandhānaṁ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo MN i.49 Nd1 123 124 (adds “jīvit’ indriyass’ upacchedo”). cp. similar definitions of birth and old age under jāti and jarā
    • SN i.121 DN iii.52 DN iii.111f. 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq. Snp 32 Snp 318 Snp 426f. 575 sq., 742, 806 Nd2 254 (= maccu) Pug 60 Vb 99f. Vb-a 100 (definition and exegesis in det., cp. Vism 502), 101 (various kinds of, cp. Vism 229) 156 (lahuka), 157 Dhp-a iii.434 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 18 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 64 Pv-a 76 96; Sdhp 292 Sdhp 293
    • kāla˚ timely death (opposite akāla˚) khaṇika˚; sudden death Vism 229
    1. ˚anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dhp 148 (cp Dhp-a ii.366: maraṇa-sankhāto antako)
    2. ˚ānussati mindfulness of death Vism 197, 230 sq. (under 8 aspects) -cetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20
    • ˚dhamma subject to death Pv-a 41
    • ˚pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) Dhp-a iii.111 170
    • ˚pāra “the other side of death,” proper name at Nd1 154 (variant readings Burmese manuscripts purāpuraṁ; SS parammukhaṁ)
    • ˚bhaya the fear of death Ja i.203 vi.398 Vb 367
    • ˚bhojana food given before death the last meal Ja i.197 Ja ii.420
    • ˚mañca death-bed Vism 47, 549; ˚ka Ja iv.132
    • ˚mukha the mouth of d. Pv-a 97 (or should we read ˚dukkha?)
    • ˚sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death Snp-a 54 Dhp-a iii.171 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 66
    • ˚samaya the time of death Vb-a 157–⁠159 (in various conditions as regards paṭisandhi)
    from mṛ
    Marati

    1. to die
    • pres. marati Mhvs v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaṁ Ja vi.498 2ndmareyyāsi Ja iii.276 ppr. maramāna Mhvs 36, 76.
    • aorist amarā Ja iii.389 (= mata Commentary ; with gloss amari)
    • amari Mhvs 36, 96
    • future marissati Ja iii.214
    • ppr. (=
    • future marissaṁ Ja iii.214 (for *mariṣyanta)
    • infinitive marituṁ DN ii.330 (amaritu-kāma not willing to die); Vism 297 (identical) Vv-a 207 (positive); and marituye Thag 2, 426 The form miyyati (mīyati) ‣See separately
    • Caus I māreti to kill, murder Mhvs 37, 27 Pv-a 4
    • passive māriyati Pv-a 5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp 139 (read mār˚ for marīy˚).
    • causative II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed Ja iii.178 Mhvs 37, 28. cp. pamāreti
    mṛ; = Indogermanic *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Avestan miryeite, Sanskrit marta = Latin morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush ‣See maṇāti and mṛdnāti (mardati) same ‣See mattikā The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ; by “pāṇa-cāge,” i.e. giving up breathing
    Marica
    neuter
    1. black pepper Vin i.201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus) Mil 63
    1. ˚gaccha the M
    • shrub Ja v.12
    • ˚cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper Ja i.455
    cp. scientific Sanskrit marica
    Mariyādā
    feminine
    1. boundary limit, shore, embankment Vin iii.50 AN iii.227 (brāhmaṇānaṁ) DN iii.92 = Vism 419 Ja v.325 Ja vi.536 (tīra˚) Mhvs 34, 70; 36, 59 (vāpi˚) Mil 416
    2. strictly defined relation, rule, control Ja ii.215 Vism 15
    3. adj keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules AN iii.227 (quoted Snp-a 318 325). ˚bandha keeping in control Vin i.287
    4. cp. vimariyādi
    cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Latin mare sea; s. Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch under mare
    Marīci
    feminine [Vedic marīci; cp. Latin merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here 1. a ray of light Vv-a 166
    • a mirage Ja vi.209 Vism 496 Vb-a 34 85; often combined with māyā (q.v.) e.g. Nd2 680 Aii Ja ii.330
    1. ˚kammaṭṭhāna the “mirage” station of exercise Dhp-a iii.165
    • ˚dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial Ja vi.206 Dhp 46 Dhp-a i.337

    Marīcikā
    feminine = marīci.2 SN iii.141 Vism 479 (in comparison) Dhp 170 (= māyā Dhp-a iii.166).
    Maru1
    1. a region destitute of water, a desert. Always combined with ˚kantāra : Nd1 155 (as Name) Ja i.107 Vb-a 6 Vv-a 332 Pv-a 99 Pv-a 112
    cp. Epic Sanskrit maru
    Maru2
    1. plural marū the genii, spirits of the air Snp 681 Snp 688 Mil 278 (nāga-yakkha-nara-marū perhaps in meaning 2); Mhvs 5, 27
    2. gods in general (˚-) Mhvs 15, 211 (˚gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (˚narā gods and men)
    3. cp. māruta & māluta;
    Vedic marut, always in plural marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder-storm
    Marumba
    1. a sort of (sweet-scented) earth or sand Vin ii.121 142, 153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living-cell); iv.33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mhvs 29, 8; Dpvs 19, 2 Mil 197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.)
    etymology?
    Maruvā
    feminine
    1. a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana MN i.429 At Ja ii.115 we find reading marūdvā marucavāka; (Commentary ), of uncertain meaning?
    cp. Sanskrit mūrvā, perhaps connected with Latin malva
    Mala
    neuter
    1. anything impure, stain (literally & figuratively), dirt. In the Canon mostly figuratively of impurities. On mala in similes ‣See; iJournal of the Pali Text Society, 1907, 122
    • SN i.38 (itthi malaṁ brahmacariyassa), 43 (identical) AN i.105 (issā˚) Snp 378 Snp 469 Snp 962 Snp 1132 (= rāgo malaṁ etc. Nd2 500) Nd1 15 478 sq. Dhp 239f. Vb 368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa-malāni); Pv ii.334 (macchera˚) Pv-a 45 (identical) 80 (identical), 17 (citta˚); Sdhp 220
    • Compar. malatara a greater stain AN iv.195 = Dh 243
    • ‣ See also māla
    1. ˚ābhibhū overcoming one’s sordidness SN i.18 Ja iv.64
    • ˚majjana “dirt wiper,” a barber Vin iv.308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca) Ja iii.452 Ja iv.365
    Vedic mala ‣See etymology under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning “dhāraṇa” supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka
    Malina
    adjective
    1. dirty, stained impure, usually literally
    • J i.467 Mil 324 Dhp-a i.233 Vv-a 156 Pv-a 226 Vb-a 498
    from mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala. Cp. Latin mulleus reddish, purple; Lithuanian mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Old High German māl stain
    Malinaka
    adjective
    1. dirty; with reference to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca Vb-a 63
    malina + ka
    Malya
    neuter
    1. flower, garland of flowers Vv 11 (-dhara); 21 Ja v.188 (puppha˚), 420. The reading at Pv iii.33 (pahūta˚, adjective having many rows of flowers) is mālya
    for *mālya, from māla
    Malla
    a wrestler Vin ii.105 (˚muṭṭhika) Ja iv.81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika “fister”); Vism 31 (muṭṭhika + i.e. boxing & wrestling as amusements ‣See mada 1) Perhaps as “porter” Buddhaghosa on CV v.29. 5 ‣See Vin ii.319 At Mil 191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e.g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). cp. Bhallaka.
    1. ˚gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Mil 331
    • ˚muṭṭhika boxer Vin ii.105
    • ˚yuddha wrestling contest Mil 232 Dhp-a ii.154 DN-a i.85
    • ˚yuddhaka a professional wrestler Ja iv.81
    cp. Sanskrit malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura
    Mallaka
    1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin ii.106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Buddhaghosa’s explanation of this passage (CV v. i.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear mallakaṁ nāma makara-dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla-saṇṭhānena kata-mallakaṁ vuccati; akata˚ danta achinditvā kataṁ). It may bear some reference to malla on p. 105 ‣See malla & to mallika-makula ‣See below mallikā
    2. a cup, drinking vessel AN i.250 (udaka˚)
    3. a bowl Ja iii.21 (kaṁsa˚ = taṭṭaka).

      • in kheḷa a spittoon Vin i.48 Vin ii.175
      • Note. W. Printz in “Bhāsa’s Prākrit.” p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa Hindī maḷḷ(a) “cup,” maliyā “a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut-shell) for holding the oil used in unction, mālā “cocoanut-shell,” and adds: probably a Dravidian word
    cp. Sanskrit mallaka & mallika
    Mallikā
    feminine
    1. Arabian jasmine Dhp 54 (tagara˚) Ja i.62 Ja iii.291 Ja v.420 Mil 333 Mil 338 Dhs-a 14 Kp-a 44. mallika-makula opening bud of the jasmine Vism.251 = Vb-a 234 (˚saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth)
    • ‣ See also mālikā
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214
    Maḷorikā
    feminine
    1. a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin ii.124 (= daṇḍ’ ādhāraka Buddhaghosa on p. 318)
    probably dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka
    Masa
    1. in line “āsadañ ca masañ jaṭaṁ” at Ja vi.328 is to be combined with ca, and read as camasañ, i.e. a ladle for sacrificing (Commentary aggi-dahanaṁ)
    Masati

    to touch: only in compound āmasati. The root is explained at Dhtp 305 as “āmasana.” Another root masu mṛś ?

    1. is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning “macchera.” Does this refer to Sanskrit mṛṣā (= Pali micchā) cp. māsati, māsana etc
    mṛś
    Masāṇa
    neuter
    1. a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials DN i.166 MN i.308 MN i.345 AN i.241 AN i.295 Pug 55 At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics
    etymology? probably provincial & local
    Masāraka
    1. a kind of couch (mañca) or longchair; enumerated under the 4 kinds of mañcā at Vin iv.40-‣ See also Vin ii.149 Vin iv.357 (where explained as: mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end) Vv-a 8 9
    from masāra?
    Masāragalla
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a precious stone, cat’s eye; also called kabara-maṇi (e.g. Vv-a 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumeration of gems at Vin ii.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean) = Mil 267 and at Mil 118 where it always stands next to lohitaṅka. The same combination (with lohit.) is found at Vv 363 783 = 813 8415
      cp. Sanskrit masāra emerald + galva crystal & musāragalva
    Masi
    .
    1. the fine particles of ashes, in; aṅgara˚; charcoal-dust Vv-a 67 = Dhp-a iii.309 (agginā) masiṁ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust SN ii.88 = iv.197 = AN i.204 ii.199
    2. soot Ja i.483
    3. ukkhali˚ soot on a pot)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit maṣi & masi
    Masūraka
    1. a bolster Ja iv.87 Ja vi.185
    connected with masāraka
    Massu
    1. the beard DN ii.42 Pug 55 Ja iv.159
    • parūḷha˚ with long-grown beard DN-a i.263 bahala thick-bearded Ja v.42
    1. ˚kamma beard-dressing Ja iii.114 Dhp-a i.253
    • ˚karaṇa shaving Dhp-a i.253 DN-a i.137
    • ˚kutti m. *kḷpti
      1. beard-trimming Ja iii.314 (Commentary = ˚kiriyā)
      Vedic śmaśru
    Massuka
    adjective
    1. bearded; ; beardless (of a woman) Ja ii.185
    from massu
    Maha
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. worthiness, venerableness Mil 357
      2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mhvs 33, 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, locative ) Vv-a 170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (identical). mahā˚; a great festival Mhvs 5, 94. bodhi˚; festival of the Bo tree Ja iv.229
      3. vihāra˚ festival held on the building of a monastery Ja i.94 Vv-a 188
      4. hatthi˚ a festival called the elephant
      5. feminine Ja iv.95
      from; mah ‣See mahati & cp. Vedic
    • neuter mahas
    Mahati
    1. to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. medium 1
    2. plural mahemase, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 129; explained as “mahāmase pūjāmase at Vv-a 203).
    3. causative mahāyati in same sense:
    4. absolutive mahāyitvāna (poetical) Ja iv.236

      • passive mahīyati Vv 621 (= pūjīyati Vv-a 258); 6422 (ppr. mahīyamāna pūjiyamāna Vv-a 282).
      • past participle mahita
      mah; explained by Dhtp 331 as “pūjāyaṁ”
    Mahatta
    neuter
    1. greatness Ja v.331 (= seṭṭhatta Commentary ); Vism 132, 232 sq. Vb-a 278 (Satthu˚, jāti˚, sabrahmacārī˚) DN-a i.35 Vv-a 191
    from mahat˚ cp. Sanskrit mahattva
    Mahant

    adjective

    1. great, extensive, big important, venerable. nominative mahā Snp 1008 Mhvs 22, 27. Shortened to maha in compound pitāmaha (following a-declension) (paternal) grandfather Pv-a 41 & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q.v.)

      • instrumental mahatā Snp 1027-
      • plural nominative mahantā Snp 578 (opposite daharā)
      • loc mahati Mil 254
      • feminine mahī
      1. -1. one of the 5 great rivers (proper name)
      • the earth ‣See separately
      • nt mahantaṁ used as
      • adverb, meaning “very much, greatly Ja v.170 Dhp-a iv.232 Also in compound mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity Dhs-a 44
      • Compar mahantatara Dhp-a ii.63 and with dimin. suffix ˚ka Ja iii.237
      • The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is “agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama pavara,” ‣See Nd2 502
      1. Note on mahā & compounds
      • A. In certain compounds. the comb; n with mahā (mah˚) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā for the simple term), that the compound is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of “antique” word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah’ aṇṇava, which is more frequently than aṇṇava; mah’ ābhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahānubhāva, mahiddhika mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī mah + esī, or īsī

      mahesakkha mah + esakkha

      ; mahallaka mah + *ariyaka

      1. ; mahāmatta. cp. English great-coat, German arzt. Only a limited selection of compound-words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing; mahā. Sometimes a mahā˚ lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e.g. Mah-âbhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa-B. Mahā occurs in compounds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha˚; before g, d p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā˚; : usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with following i to e and following u to o. In the following list of compounds. we have arranged the material according to these bases
      1. mah˚:-aggha very costly, precious Pug 34 Mhvs 27, 35 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 87; Sdhp 18
      2. ˚agghatā costliness great value Pug 34 Sdhp 26
      3. ˚aṇṇava the (great ocean Mhvs 19, 17
      4. ˚atthiya (for ˚atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable Ja iii.368
      • ˚andhakāra deep darkness Vism 417
      • ˚assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable SN i.81

        maha˚:-ggata “become great,” enlarged, extensive figuratively lofty, very great MN i.263 MN ii.122 AN ii.63 AN ii.184 iii.18 Vv-a 155 Ja v.113 Dhs 1020 (translation: “having a wider scope”) Vb 16 24, 62, 74, 126, 270, 326; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 45; Vism 410, 430 sq. (˚ārammaṇa) Vb-a 154 (identical) 159 (˚citta) Dhs-a 44 ‣See on term Compendium 4, 12, 55 1014; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mahadgata Divy 227

        1. ˚gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous AN iv.92 Pali iii.111 (= bahubhojana Pv-a 175) Mil 288 Dhp 325 (cp. Dhp-a iv.16) -ddhana having great riches (often combined with mahābhoga) Dhp 123 Ja iv.15 Ja iv.22
        • ˚pphala much fruit; adj bearing much fruit, rich in result AN iv.60 AN iv.237f. Snp 191 Snp 486 Dhp 312 Dhp 356 sq
        • ˚bbala (a) a strong force a great army Mhvs 10, 68 (variant reading, Text has mahā-bala) (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful Ja iii.114 Mhvs 23, 92; 25, 9
        • ˚bbhaya great fear, terror SN i.37 Snp 753 Snp 1032 Snp 1092, epithet Nd2 501.

          1. mahā˚:-anas kitchen Mhvs 5, 27 (spurious stanza) -anasa kitchen Ja ii.361 Ja iii.314 Ja v.368 Ja vi.349 Dhp-a iii.309 Thag-a 5
          • ˚anila a gale Mhvs 3, 42
          • ˚ānisaṁsa deserving great praise ‣See s. v., cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mahānuśaṁsa MVastu iii.221
            1. ˚ānubhāva majesty, adjective wonderful splendid Ja i.194 Ja vi.331 Pv iii.31 Pv-a 117 Pv-a 136 Pv-a 145 Pv-a 272
            2. ˚aparādhika very guilty Ja i.114
            • ˚abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation Dhp-a i.85
            • ˚abhisakka abhi + śak
              1. very powerful Thag 1, 1111
              • ˚amacca chief minister Mhvs 19, 12
              • ˚araha costly Mhvs 3, 21 5, 75; 27, 39 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 160.

                1. mahā˚:-alasa great sloth Dhp-a iii.410
                • ˚avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, frequently -isi in poetry for mahesi at Ja v.321
                • ˚upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king Snp-a 84
                • ˚upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) Vv-a 5
                • ˚karuṇā great compassion Dhp-a i.106 367
                • ˚kāya a great body Mil 16
                • ˚gaṇa a great crowd or community Dhp-a i.154
                • ˚gaṇḍa a large tumour Vb-a 104
                • ˚gedha great greed Snp 819 Nd1 151
                • ˚cāga great liberality, adjective munificent Mhvs 27 47. As ˚paricāga at Snp-a 295 (= mahādāna)
                • ˚jana a great crowd, collectively for “the people,” a multitude Pv-a 6 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 78; Mhvs 3, 13
                • ˚taṇha
                • adjective very thirsty Ja ii.441
                • ˚tala “great surface,” the large flat roof on the top of a palace (= upari-pāsāda-tala) Ja vi.40
                • ˚dāna ‣See under dāna the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed usually lasting for a week or more Mhvs 27, 46 Pv-a 111 Pv-a 112
                • ˚dhana (having) great wealth Pv-a 3 Pv-a 78 -naraka (a) great Hell ‣See naraka
                • ˚nāga a great elephant Dhp 312 Dhp-a iv.4
                • ˚nāma name of a plant Vin i.185 Vin ii.267
                • ˚niddā deep sleep Pv-a 47
                • ˚nibbāna the great name Dhp-a iv.110
                • ˚niraya (a) great hell Snp-a 309 480 Pv-a 52 ‣See Niraya & cp. Kirfel; Kosmographie 199, 200
                • ˚nīla sapphire Vv-a 111
                • ˚pañña very wise DN iii.158 AN iii.244 Dhp 352 Dhp-a iv.71
                • ˚patha high road DN i.102 Snp 139 Dhp 58 Vism 235 Dhp-a i.445
                • ˚paduma a great lotus Ja v.39 also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp. Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205
                • ˚pitā grandfather Pv-a 107
                • ˚purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at DN ii.17, 19, passim

                  • DN iii.287 Snp 1040f. Dhp 352 Mil 10 Snp-a 184 187 sq., 223 258, 357, 384 sq.; ˚lakkhaṇāni: DN i.88 DN i.105 DN i.116 Snp 549 Snp 1000f.; Vism 234 Vv-a 315 Dhp-a ii.41
                  • ˚bhūta usually in
                  • plural ˚bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements ‣See bhūta, being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo DN i.76 Nd1 266 Vb 13 70 sq.; Vism 366 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq. Vb-a 42 169, 253
                  • See Compendium 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1
                  • ˚bhoga great wealth adjective wealthy Pv-a 3 Pv-a 78
                  • ˚maccha a great fish, seamonster Ja i.483
                  • ˚mati very wise, clever Mhvs 14, 22 19, 84 (
                  • feminine ˚ī); 33, 100 (
                  • plural ˚ī)
                  • ˚matta cp. Sanskrit mahāmātra
                  1. a king’s chief minister, alias Prime Minister, “who was the highest Officer-of-State and real Head of the Executive” (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin iii.47 (rājā.. akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṁ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma)
                  • Note. An
                  • accusative sg mahā-mattānaṁ we find at AN i.154 (formed after the preceding rājānaṁ)
                  • Vin i.74 (where two ranks are given senā-nāyakā m
                  • mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m
                  • m. those of law) DN i.7 DN iii.88 DN iii.64 (here with epithet khattiya) AN i.154 AN i.252 AN i.279 AN iii.128 Vin iv.224 Vism 121 Vb-a 312 (in simile of two m.), 340 Pv-a 169 cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101
                  • ˚muni great ‣Seer Snp 31
                  • ˚megha a big cloud, thunder cloud MN ii.117 Snp 30 Vism 417
                  • ˚yañña the great sacrifice DN i.138f. 141 (cp. AN ii.207≈)
                  • ˚yasa great fame Vv 216 Mhys 5, 22
                  • ˚raṅga cp. Sanskrit m
                  • rajana
                  1. safflower, used for dyeing Vin i.185 (sandals); ii.267 (cloaks)
                  2. ˚rājā great king, king, very frequently ‣See rājā-rukkha a great tree Vism 413 (literally) Mil 254 (identical) otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer Altindisches Leben 129)
                  3. ˚lātā (-pasādhana) a lady’s parure called “great creeper” Dhp-a i.392 Vv-a 165 (-pilandhana); same Snp-a 520
                  • ˚vātapāna main window Dhp-a iv.203
                  • ˚vīṇā a great lute Vism 354 Vb-a 58
                  • ˚vīra (great) hero Snp 543 Snp 562
                  • ˚satta “the great being or a Bodhisatta Vv-a 137 (variant reading SS. bodhisatta). Cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mahāsattva, e.g. Jtm 32
                    1. ˚samudda the sea the occean Mhvs 19, 18; Vism 403 Snp-a 30 371 Pv-a 47
                    • ˚sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant ‣See sara, enumerated e. g at Vism 416
                    • ˚sāra (of) great sap, i.e. great wealth adjective very rich Ja i.463 (˚kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla-kula)
                    • ˚sāla
                    • adjective having great halls, epithet of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) DN i.136 DN i.235 DN iii.16 DN iii.20 Ja ii.272 (˚kula); iv.237 (identical), 325 (identical); v.227 (identical) Pug 56 Vb-a 519 Dhp-a iii.193
                    • ˚sāvaka cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mahāśrāvaka Divy 489
                      1. a great disciple Vism 98 (asīti ˚ā) Dhp-a ii.93
                      • ˚senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) Ja v.115 Ja vi.2
                      • ˚hatthi a large elephant MN i.184 (˚pada elephant’s foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (˚opama at Vism 243, 347, 348.

                        mahi˚; mah’ i˚

                        1. : -iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy AN iv.229 Thag 1, 898 Iti 91 Ja i.8 Ja ii.441
                        • ˚icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness AN iv.280 Vb-a 472
                        • ˚iddhika mahā + iddhi + ka

                          of great power, always combined with mah-ānubhāva to denote great influence high position & majesty Vin i.31 Vin ii.193 Vin iii.101 DN i.78 DN i.180 (devatā), 213 SN i.145f.; ii.155, 274 sq. 284 sq.; iv.323; v.265, 271 sq., 288 sq. AN v.129 Ja vi.483 (said of the Ocean) Pv-a 6 Pv-a 136 Pv-a 145

                        • ˚inda (ghosa) literally the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain-god Thag 1, 1108 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit māhendra in ˚bhavana “the abode of the Great Indra,” and vaṛṣa “the rain of the Great Indra.” (Here as rain-god), both at Avs i.210

                        • ˚issāsa Sanskrit maheṣvāsa
                          1. great in the art of the bow, a great archer SN i.185 Dhp-a i.358

                          mahe˚; mahā + i

                          : -esakkha mahā + īsa + khyaṁ from īś

                          1. possessing great power or authority AN ii.204 iii.244 Nd2 5032; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology The Pali etymology rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi Dhp-a iv.232
                          • ˚esi mahā + isi; Sanskrit maharṣi
                            1. a great Sage AN ii.26 Snp 208 Snp 481 Snp 646 Snp 915 Snp 1057 Snp 1061 Thag 1, 1132 2, 149 Dhp 422 (explained at Dhp-a iv.232 as “mahantaṁ sīla-kkhandh’ ādīnaṁ esitattā m.” cp. the similar explanation at Nd2 503) Nd1 343; Vism 505 Vb-a 110 Pv-a 1
                            • ˚esiyā = mahesī Ja vi.483
                            • ˚esī in Pali to be taken as mah + , as
                            • feminine to īsa, but in Sanskrit (Vedic) as
                            • feminine of mahiṣa, buffalo
                              1. chief queen, king’s first wife, king’s consort; also the wife of a great personage Ja ii.410 v.45; vi.425 Pug 56 Mhvs 2, 22 (plural mahesiyo) Vv-a 184 (sixteen). Usually as agga-mahesī, e. g Ja i.262 Ja iii.187 Ja iii.393 Ja v.88
                              2. ˚esitta state of chief consort, queenship Ja v.443 Pv ii.1310 Thag-a 37 Vv-a 102
                              3. ˚eseyya = ˚esitta Ja v.91

                                -maho mahā + u, or + o

                                1. : -ogha the great flood ‣See ogha Snp 4 Snp 945 Dhp 47 Dhp 287 Dhp-a iii.433
                                • ˚odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Snp 720 Snp 1134 Mil 224 Mhvs 18, 8
                                • ˚odara big belly Ja vi.358 (addressing a king’s minister)
                                • ˚odika full of water, having much water deep, full (of a river) Snp 319 Ja ii.159 Mil 346
                                • ˚oraga m + uraga
                                  1. a great snake Ja v.165
                                  Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix cp. Avestan mazant, Sanskrit compar. mahīyān Latin magnus, Goth mikils = Old High German mihhil = English much
    Mahantatā
    feminine
    1. greatness Dhp-a ii.62 At MN iii.24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?) at MN i.184 however mahantatta neuter
    2. from mahant˚
    Mahallaka
    adjective noun
    1. old, venerable, of great age an old man DN i.90 (opposite taruṇa), 94, 114, 247 Snp 313 Snp 603 Nd2 261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc. Ja iv.482 (opposite dahara young) Vv 461 (= mahanto Vv-a 199) Dhp-a i.7 278; ii.4, 55, 91 Snp-a 313 Compar mahallakatara Dhp-a ii.18 feminine mahallikā an old woman Mil 16 Mhvs 21, 27 Vv-a 105 Pv-a 149 (= addhagata)

      • The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is mahalla, e. g Divy 329 Divy 520.
      a distorted mah-ariyaka → ayyaka → allaka; cp. ayyaka
    Mahikā
    feminine
    1. fog, frost, cold (= himaṁ Dhs-a 317) Vin ii.295 = Mil 273 Snp 669 Mil 299 Vv-a 134 (fog)
    • As mahiyā at AN ii.53
    cp. * Sanskrit mahikā
    Mahita
    1. honoured, revered MN ii.110 Mil 278 Sdhp 276
    past participle of mahati or mahīyati
    Mahanīya
    adjective
    1. praiseworthy Vv-a 97
    gerundive of mahati
    Mahilā
    feminine
    1. woman, female Vin ii.281 (˚titthe at the women’s bathing place) Ja i.188 Dīpavaṁsa ix.4 Thag-a 271 Mahisa, Mahisa, Mahimsa
    * Sanskrit mahilā
    Mahisa, Mahīsa, Mahiṁsa
    1. a buffalo-mahisa : DN i.6 (˚yuddha b
    • fight), 9 Ja iii.26 (vana wild b.); Mhvs 25, 36 (Text māhisaṁ)
    • mahīsa Ja vi.110-mahiṁsa Vism 191, & in proper name; mahiṁsaka-maṇḍala the Andhra country Ja i.356 cp. Mahiṁsaka-raṭṭha Vb-a 4 as Mahisa-maṇḍala at Mhvs 12, 29
    • Note. The Pali popular etymology is propounded by Buddhaghosa as “mahiyaṁ setī ti mahiso” (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) Dhs-a 62
    cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the Pali etymology evidently to be connected with mahā + īś, because of mahīsa → mahiṁsa
    Mahī
    feminine
    1. the earth (literally Great One) Mhvs 5, 266; Sdhp 424 Sdhp 472; loc mahiyā Mil 128
    • mahiyaṁ Dhs-a 62

      • Note. As mahī is only found in very late Pali literature, it must have been re-introduced from Sanskrit sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī
      1. ˚tala the ground (of the earth) Mhvs 5, 54
      2. ˚dhara mountain Mil 343 Mhvs 14, 3; 28, 22 (variant reading mahin˚) -pa king (of the earth) Mhvs 14, 22
      3. ˚pati king Mhvs 5 48; 33, 32
      4. ˚pāla king Mhvs 4, 38; 5, 265
      5. ˚ruha tree (“growing out of the earth”) Mhvs 14, 18, 18, 19
      feminine of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī
    indeclinable
    1. . Constructed with various tenses e.g. 1. with; aorist (prohibitive tense): mā evaṁ akattha do not thus Dhp-a i.7abhaṇi speak not Pv i.33cintayittha do not worry Dhp-a i.12parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of … MN i.444bhāyi fear not Ja ii.159mariṁsu I hope they will not die Ja iii.55 mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i.e. please do not Vin ii.198 mā evaṁ ruccittha identical Dhp-a i.13
    2. with
    3. imperative :gaccha Ja i.152detha Ja iii.275ghāta do not kill ‣See māghāta
    4. with pot.:anuyuñjetha Dhp 27bhuñjetha let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113; mā vadetha Ja vi.364 4. with indic. pres.:paṭilabhati. AN v.194

      • A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? Ja vi.334
      • mā = na (simple negation in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin iii.23 -Ma
    cp. Vedic mā, Latin utinam & ne
    -Mā
    1. ‣See puṇṇa-mā;
    the short form of māsa, direct dern from ‣See mināti
    Māgadha
    1. scent-seller, (literally “from Magadha”) Pv ii.937 (= gandhin Pv-a 127)
    from Magadha
    Māgadhaka
    neuter
    1. garlic Vin iv.259 (lasuṇaṁ nāma māgadhakaṁ vuccati)
    māgadha + ka, literally “from Magadha”
    Māgavika
    1. a deerstalker, huntsman AN ii.207 Pug 56 Mil 364 Mil 412 Pv-a 207
    guṇa-form to *mṛga = Pali miga; Sanskrit mārgavika
    Māghāta
    neuter
    1. the injunction not to kill, non-killing order (with reference to the killing of animals Ja iii.428 (˚bheri, the drum announcing this order); iv.115; vi.346 (uposatha˚)
    literally mā ghāta “kill not”
    Māṅgalya
    adjective
    1. auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes Ja vi.179
    from mangala
    Māṇava
    1. a youth, young man, especially a young Brahmin Snp 1022 Snp 1027 Snp 1028 Ja iv.391 (brāhmaṇa˚) DN-a i.36 = satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi Dhp-a i.89 plural māṇavā men Thag 2, 112

      • The spelling mānava occurs at Snp 456 Snp 589 & Pv; i.87 (= men Thag ii.112; kumāra Pv-a 41)
      cp. Sanskrit māṇava
    Māṇavaka
    1. a young man, youth a Brahmin Mil 101 in general: young, e.g. nāga˚; a young serpent Ja iii.276 feminine ˚ikā a Brahmin girl Ja i.290 Mil 101
    2. nāga˚ a young female serpent Ja iii.275 Dhp-a iii.232
    3. from māṇava
    Mātaṅga
    1. an elephant Dhp 329 Dhp 330 (here as epithet of nāga) Ja iii.389 Ja vi.47 Vv 439 Mil 368
    • a man of a low class cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mātangī Divy 397
    1. Snp-a 185f. (as proper name)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mātanga, dialectical
    Mātar
    feminine
    1. mother
    • Cases: nominative sg mātā Snp 296 Dhp 43 Ja iv.463 Ja v.83 Ja vi.117 Nd2 504 (defined as janikā); genitive mātu Thag 1, 473 Vin i.17 Ja i.52
    • mātuyā Ja i.53 Mhvs 10, 80 Pv-a 31 and mātāya Ja i.62 dative mātu Mhvs 9, 19;
    • accusative mātaraṁ Snp 60 Snp 124 Dhp 294 instrumental mātarā Thag 2, 212
    • locative mātari Dhp 284-
    • plural does not occur. In combination with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā-pitaro (
    • plural “mother & father” ‣See below
    • mātito (ablative
    • adverb from the mother’s side (cp. pitito) DN i.113 AN iii.151 Pv-a 29
    • On mātā in simile ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 122 cp. Vism 321 (simile of a mother’s solicitude for her children). Similarly the popular etymology of mātā is given with “mamāyatī ti mātā” at Vb-a 107
    • The 4 bases of m. in compound are: mātā˚, māti˚, mātu˚, matti˚;
    1. -1. mātā˚:- pitaro mother & father DN iii.66 188 sq. Snp 404 Mil 12 ‣See also pitā
    • pitika having mother & father Dhp-a; ii.2
    • ˚pitiṭṭhāna place of m. &
    • feminine Dhp-a; ii.95
    • ˚pettika having m. &
    • feminine, of m.
    • feminine Nd; 2 385 (nāma-gotta)
    • ˚petti-bhāra supporting one’s m. &
    • feminine SN i.228 Ja i.202 Ja vi.498
    • ˚maha maternal grandfather Ja iv.146 Dhp-a i.346
    • māti˚:-devatā protector or guardian of one’s mother Ja iii.422 (gloss mātu-devatā viya)
    • ˚pakkha the mother’s side Dhp-a i.4 (+ pitipakkha)
    • ˚posaka supporting one’s m Ja iii.422 (variant reading mātu˚)

  • mātu˚:-upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh˚) reverence towards one’s m. Dhp-a iv.14

    • ˚kucchi m’s womb DN ii.12 Vism 560 (˚gata) Vb-a 96 Dhp-a i.127
    • ˚gāma “genex feminarum,” womanfolk women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen-zimmer) AN ii.126 Vin iv.175 MN i.448 MN i.462 MN iii.126 SN iv.239f. Ja i.201 Ja iii.90 Ja iii.530 (
    • plural ˚gāmā p. 531) Pug 68 Snp-a 355 Pv-a 271 Vv-a 77
    • ˚ghāta & (usually); ˚ka a matricide (+ pitu- ghātaka ‣See abhiṭhāna) Vin i.168 320 Mil 310 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 167 sq. Vb-a 425
    • ˚ghātikamma matricide Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 281
    • ˚bhūta having been his mother Pv-a 78
    • ˚mattin ‣See matta1 4 whatever is a mother SN iv.110 (˚īsu mātucittaṁ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī-mattin & dhītumattin)
    • ˚hadaya a mother’s heart Pv-a 63
    • matti˚ ‣See matti-sambhava. -Matika
    • Vedic mātā, stem mātar˚, Avestan mātar-, Latin māter, Old Irish māthir, Old High German muoter, Anglo-Saxon modor = mother; cp. further Latin mātrix identical, Sanskrit mātṛkā mother, grandmother German mieder corset. From Indogermanic *ma, onomat participle, cp. “mamma”
  • -Mātika
    adjective
    1. -mother; in mata˚; one whose mother is dead, literally a “dead-mother-ed, Ja ii.131 Ja iii.213 Also negative amātika without a mother Ja v.251
    from mātā, Sanskrit mātṛka
    Mātikā
    feminine
    1. a water course Vism 554 (˚âtikkamaka); Mhvs 35, 96; 37, 50 Snp-a 500 (= sobbha) Dhp-a ii.141 (its purpose: “ito c’ ito ca udakaṁ haritvā attano sassa-kammaṁ sampādenti”) Vv-a 301–⁠2 tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, especially of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin i.119 337; ii.8 cp semantically in similar sense Latin mātrix = English matric i.e. register. In BSḳ. mātrikā Divy 18 Divy 333
      1. AN i.117 (Dhamma-dhara, Vinaya-dhara, Mātikā-dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism 312 (so pañcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaṁ katvā pavāretvā) Snp-a 15 Kp-a 37, 99, 117
      1. ˚nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism 536, 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e.g. the 4th part of the Atthasālinī (Dhs-a past participle 343

        1. -409) is called nikkhepa-kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m
        • nikkhepa vāra at Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 11
        * Sanskrit mātṛkā
    Mātiya
    adjective noun
    1. (a) mortal Ja vi.100 (Commentary macca; gloss māṇava)
    the diaeretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sanskrit martya & Vedic (poetical) martia
    Mātu˚
    1. ‣See mātā;
    Mātuka
    neuter
    1. “genetrix,” matrix, origin, cause Thag 1, 612
    cp. Sanskrit māṭṛka, from mātṛ = mātar
    Mātucchā
    feminine
    1. mother’s sister, maternal aunt Vin ii.254 256 Ja iv.390 Mil 240
    • ˚putta aunt’s son, male first cousin (from mother’s sister’s side SN ii.281 Ud 24 Dhp-a i.119 cp. mātula-dhītā
    Sanskrit mātṛ-ṣvasā
    Mātula
    a mother’s brother an uncle Ja i.225 Dhp-a i.15 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 60.
    1. ˚dhītā (the complement of mātucchā-putta) uncle’s daughter, female first cousin (from mother’s brother’s side) Ja ii.119 Dhp-a iii.290 Pv-a 55
    cp. Epic Sanskrit mātula & semantically Latin matruus, i.e. one who belongs to the mother
    Mātulaka
    1. = mātula Dhp-a i.182
    Mātulānī
    feminine
    1. a mother’s brother’s wife, an aunt Ja i.387 Ja iv.184 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 58
    Sanskrit mātulānī, semantically cp. Latin mater tera
    Mātuluṅga
    neuter
    1. a citron Ja iii.319 (= mella; variant reading bella)
    cp. Classical Sanskrit mātulunga; dialectical?
    Mādisa
    adjective
    1. one like me Snp 482 Mhvs 5, 193 Vv-a 207 Dhp-a i.284 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 123
    Epic & Classical Sanskrit mādṛś & mādṛśa, maṁ + ; dṛś
    Māna
    1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd1 80 Vb 350). Māna is one of the Saññojanas It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship AN detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd1 80 = Nd2 505; ending with definition “māno maññanā … ketukamyatā” etc. (cp. Vb 350 & ‣See under; mada. On term ‣See also Dhs § 1116; Dhs translation 298 (= 2275) sq
    2. DN iii.234 SN i.4 Snp 132 Snp 370 Snp 469537, 786, 889, 943, Dhp 74 Dhp 150 Dhp 407 Nd1 298 Pug 18 Vb 345f. 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold) Vb-a 486f. (“seyyo 'ham asmī ti” etc.); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 166, 278 Dhp-a iii.118 252; Sdhp 500 Sdhp 539
    3. asmi˚ pride of self as real egoism DN iii.273
    4. honour, respect Ja v.331 (+ pūjā). Usually in compound bahumāna great respect Mhvs 20, 46 Pv-a 50 Also as māni˚; in compound with karoti ‣See mānikata. cp. vi˚, sam˚
      1. ˚ātimāna pride & conceit, very great (self-) pride or all kinds of conceit ‣See 10 fold māna at Nd; 1 80 Nd2 505 DN iii.86 Snp 245 Snp 830 Snp 862 Nd1 170 257 -atthe at Thag 1, 214 read mânatthe = mā anatthe - ānusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride MN i.486 DN iii.254 DN iii.282 Snp 342 cp. mamankāra -ābhisamaya full grasp (i.e. understanding) of pride (with sammā˚) MN i.122 (which Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. interprets wrongly as “waanvoorstelling”) SN iv.205f. 399 Snp 342 (= mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṁ Snp-a 344)
      2. ˚jātika proud by nature Ja i.88
      • ˚thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff-necked Ja i.88 Ja i.224
      • ˚da inspiring respect Mhvs 33, 82
      • ˚mada (-matta (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride Ja ii.259 Pv-a 86
      • ˚saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance DN iii.254 Dhs 1116 = 1233 ‣See under saññojana cp. formulae under; mada 2
      • ˚satta cleaving to conceit Snp 473
      • ˚salla the sting or dart of pride Nd1 59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., explained in detail on p. 413 ‣See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd; 2 p. 237 s.v. rāga)
      late Vedic & Epic Sanskrit māna, from; man, originally meaning perhaps “high opinions” (i.e. No. 2); hence “pride (No. 1). Definition of root ‣See partly under māneti, partly under mināti
    Māna2
    neuter
    1. measure Vin iii.149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer) DN-a i.140
    2. ˚˚kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pug 58 Pv-a 278
    3. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaṁ) Ja i.468 (aḍḍha˚ half a M. according to Commentary equal to 8 nāḷis)
    from ‣See mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. “measure,” and “building” (cp. māpeti)
    Mānatta
    neuter
    1. a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a sanghādisesa offence Dhs-a 399 (+ parivāsa). ˚ṁ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin ii.7 (+ parivāsaṁ deti); iv.225. mānatt’ āraha deserving penance Vin ii.55 162 (parivāsika +) ‣See on term Vinaya Texts ii.397
    a doubtful word, probably corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as derived from māna1. If however taken as belonging to māna2 as an abstract derivation, it might be explained as “measuring, taking measures,” which suits the context better. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya “something pleasant”: Mvyut § 265
    Mānana
    neuter & Mānanā
    • feminine

      1. paying honour or respect; reverence, respect SN i.66 Ja ii.138 Pug 19 22 Mil 377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti) Dhs 1121 Dhs-a 373
      • cp. vi˚, sam˚
      from māna1
    Mānava
    1. ‣See Māṇava
    Mānavant
    adjective
    1. possessed of pride, full of conceit; negative ; not proud Thag 1, 1222
    from māna1
    Mānasa
    neuter
    1. intention purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs § 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a technical term in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as—˚ in adj use, where its connection with mano is still more felt Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use
    • Dhs-a 140 (= mano) Vb 144f. (in definition of viññāṇa as cittaṁ, mano, mānasaṁ, hadayaṁ etc ‣See mano ii.3) Dhp-a ii.12 (paradāre mānasaṁ na bandhissāmi “shall have no intention towards another’s wife,” i.e. shall not desire another’s wife); Mhvs 4, 6 (sabbesaṁ hita-mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (rañño hāsesi mānasaṁ gladdened the heart of the king)
    • As adjective (—˚): being of such & such a mind, having a … mind, with a … heart; like ādīna˚; with his mind in danger SN v.74 (+ apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata˚; lofty-minded Vv-a 217
    • pasanna˚ with settled (peaceful) mind Snp 402 and frequently; mūḷha˚ infatuated Mhvs 5, 239; rata˚ Pv-a 19
    • sañcodita˚ urged (in her heart) Pv-a 68
    • soka-santatta˚ with a heart burning with grief Pv-a 38
    a secondary formation from manas = mano, already Vedic literally “belonging to mind”
    Mānasāna
    adjective
    1. = mānasa in adjective use Snp 63 (rakkhita˚)
    from mānasa, secondary formation
    Mānassin
    adjective noun [probably from manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. cp. similar formation mānavant proud Vin ii.183 (explained by Buddhaghosa in a popular way as “mana-ssayino māna-nissitā”). The corresponding passage at Ja i.88 reads māna-jātikā māna-tthaddhā.
    Mānikata
    1. literally “held in high opinion,” i.e. honoured, worshipped SN ii.119 (garukata m. pūjita)
    past participle of a verb māni-karoti, which stands for māna-karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning
    Mānikā
    feminine
    1. a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas Snp-a 476 (catudoṇaṁ mānikā). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mānikā, e. g Divy 293f.
    cp. māna2 2
    Mānita
    1. revered, honoured Ud 73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita)
    • A rather singular by-form is mānikata (q.v.)
    past participle of māneti
    Mānin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. proud (of) Snp 282 (samaṇa˚), 889 (paripuṇṇa˚) Dhp 63 (paṇḍita˚ proud of his cleverness cp. Dhp-a ii.30) Ja i.454 (atireka˚); iii.357 (paṇḍita˚); Sdhp 389 Sdhp 417. feminine māninī Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa˚ proud of her beauty)
    2. from mana1
    Mānusa
    adjective noun
    1. adjective human Snp 301 (bhoga) Iti 94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv ii.921 (m. deha); 956 (identical)-amānusa divine Vv 356 Pv ii.1220; ghostly (= superhuman) Pv iv.36;
    2. feminine amānusī Pv iii.7.9
    3. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mhvs 15, 64;
    4. feminine mānusī a (human woman Ja iv.231 Pv ii.41
    5. amānusa a superhuman being Pv iv.157
    6. plural mānusā men Snp 361 Snp 644 Pv ii.117. As
    7. nt. in collective sense = mankind Pv ii.113 (variant reading mānussaṁ; Commentary = manussaloka). Manusaka = manusa
    cp. Vedic mānuṣa; from same base (manus) as manussa
    Mānusaka = mānusa
    1. , viz. 1. adjective human: AN i.213 (sukhaṁ) Snp 524 (brahma-khettaṁ) Dhp 417 (yogaṁ m. kāyaṁ Dhp-a iv.225) Vv 356 Ja i.138 (kāmā)
    2. f manusikā Vism 407
    3. a human being, man Pv iv.157. Also
    4. neuter (collectively)
    5. plural mānusakāni human beings, men Dhp-a i.233
    Māneti
    1. to honour revere, think highly of Pv-a 54 (aorist mānesuṁ, + garukariṁsu + pūjesuṁ).
    2. past participle mānita
    3. causative of man, cp. Sanskrit mānayati, Latin moneo to admonish. German mahnen, Anglo-Saxon manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning “pūjā”
    Māpaka
    1. (—˚) adjective-noun

      1. one who measures, only in doṇa˚; (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice Ja ii.367 Ja ii.381 Dhp-a iv.88 and in dhañña˚; measuring corn or grain Ja iii.542 (˚kamma, the process of …) Vism 278 (in comparison)
      from māpeti
    Māpeti
    1. [ causative of ‣See mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of “erect, build” already in Vedic Sanskrit 1. to build, construct SN ii.106 (nagaraṁ); Mhvs 6, 35 (identical) Vv 8453 Vv-a 260
    2. to create, bring about make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense Ja ii.111 (sarīraṁ nāvaṁ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); iv.274; Mhvs 28, 31 (maggaṁ caused a road to appear)
    3. to measure out (?), to declare (?), in a doubtful passage Ja iv.302 where a misreading is probable as indicated by Burmese variant (samāpassiṁsu for T tena amāpayiṁsu). Perhaps we should read tena-māsayiṁsu.

    Māmaka
    adjective
    1. literally “mine,” one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one’s own, i.e devoted to, loving Snp 806 (= Buddha˚, Dhamma˚ Sangha˚ Nd1 125; = mamāyamāna Snp-a 534), 927 (same explanation at Nd1 382) Mil 184 (ahiṁsayaṁ paraṁ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti),-Buddha˚; devoted to the B. Ja i.299 Dhp-a i.206 feminine ˚māmikā Ja iii.182 In voc.
    2. feminine māmike at Thag 2, 207 (cp. Thag-a 172) “mother, we may perhaps have an allusion to “mother cp. Sanskrit māma uncle, Latin mamma mother, and mātā
      1. -amāmaka ‣See sep.; this may also be taken as “not loving.”
      from mama
    Māyā
    feminine
    1. deceptive appearance fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Snp 245 Snp 328 (˚kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā Nd1 422) Vb 357 361, 389 Mil 289 Vism 106 (+ sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viññāṇaṁ) Vb-a 34 (in detail), 85, 493 (definition). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. 2. mystic formula, magic, trick MN i.381 (āvaṭṭanī m.) khattiya˚; the mystic formula of a kh. Ja vi.375 Mil 190 Dhp-a i.166 In the sense of “illusion” often combined with marīci, e.g. at Ja ii.330 Ja v.367 Nd2 680a ii
    2. jugglery, conjuring Mil 3
    3. On māyā in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs translation2 255 (“ilḷusion”); Expositor 333, 468n
    4. As adjective in amāya (q.v. & in; bahu-māye rich in deceit Snp-a 351
    5. Note. In the word maṁ at Kp-a 123 (in popular etymology of man-gala) the ed. of the text ‣Sees an
    6. accusative of which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā (= iddhi)
      1. ˚kāra a conjurer, magician SN iii.142 Vism 366 (in comparison) Vb-a 196
      cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. manticulor
    Māyāvin
    adjective
    1. deceitful, hypocritical DN iii.45 DN iii.246 Snp 89 Snp 116 Snp 357 Pug 19 23 Pv-a 13 ‣See also amāyāvin
    from māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin
    Māyu
    1. bile, gall Abhp 281
    * Sanskrit māyu
    Māra
    1. death; usually personified as proper name Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction) Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the definition of m. at Nd2 506 gives “kammâbhisankhāra-vasena paṭisandhiko khandha- māro, dhātu˚, āyatana˚;
    • Other general epithets of MN (quasi twin-embodiments) are given with Kaṇha Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd1 489 = Nd2 507; the two last ones also at Nd1 455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā “the evil one,” e. g SN i.103f. (the famous Māra-Saṁyutta ‣See Windisch Māra & Buddha) Nd1 439 Dhp-a iv.71 (Māravatthu & frequently
    • See e.g. Snp 32 Snp 422 Snp 429f. 1095, 1103 Dhp 7 Dhp 40 Dhp 46 Dhp 57 Dhp 105 Dhp 175 Dhp 274 Nd1 475; Vism 79, 228 376; Kp-a 105 Snp-a 37 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq. Sdhp 318 Sdhp 449 Sdhp 609. Further refs. & details ‣See under Proper Names
    1. ˚ābhibhū overcoming M. or death Snp 545 = 571 -kāyika a class of gods Mil 285 KvuA 54
    2. ˚dhītaro the daughters of M. Snp-a 544
    • ˚dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra AN iv.228 Snp 764 Dhp 34 (= kilesa-vaṭṭa Dhp-a i.289)
    • ˚bandhana the fetter of death Dhp 37 Dhp 276 Dhp 350 (= tebhūmaka-vaṭṭasankhātaṁ Dhp-a iv.69)
    • ˚senā the army of M. Snp 561 Snp 563 Snp-a 528
    from mṛ; , later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Latin mors death, morbus illness, Lithuanian māras death, pestilence
    Māraka
    (—˚)
    1. one who kills or destroys, as manussa˚; man-killer Ja ii.182
    • hatthi˚ elephant-killer Dhp-a i.80

      • m. in phrase samāraka (where the-ka belongs to the whole compound) ‣See under samāraka
      from māreti
    Māraṇa
    neuter
    1. killing, slaughter, death DN ii.128 Sdhp 295 Sdhp 569
    from causative māreti
    Māratta
    neuter
    1. state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vb 337
    *Māra-tvaṁ
    Mārāpita
    1. killed Ja ii.417 Ja iii.531
    past participle of mārāpeti
    Mārāpitatta
    neuter
    1. being incited to kill Dhp-a i.141
    abstract from mārāpita
    Mārāpeti
    1. ‣See marati. past participle mārāpita
    2. causative II. of mṛ
    Mārita
    1. killed SN i.66 Vin iii.72 Ja ii.417 (aññehi m
    • bhāvaṁ jānātha)
    past participle of māreti
    Mārisa
    adjective
    1. only in voc. as respectful term of address, something like “Sir,” pl “Sirs.” In singular mārisa MN i.327 AN iii.332 Snp 814 Snp 1036 Snp 1038 Snp 1045etc. Nd1 140 = Nd2 508 (here explained by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya-vacanaṁ garu-vacanaṁ etc.) Ja v.140 Pv ii.133; Mhvs 1, 27 plural mārisā Snp 682 Ja i.47 Ja i.49 Vism 415 Pv-a 75 Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha Kindred Sayings i.2 n.
    2. perhaps identical with mādisa
    Māruta
    1. the wind SN i.127 Mhbv.8
    for the usual māluta
    Māretar
    1. one who kills, slayer, destroyer SN iii.189
    agent noun to māreti
    Māreti
    1. to kill ‣See under marati. past participle mārita. Mala (mala) causative of mṛ
    Māla (māḷa)
    1. mud is it mis-spelling of mala?
      1. in pakka-m˚-kalala (boiling mud) Ja vi.400 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. believes to ‣See the same word in phrase mālā-kacavara at Ja ii.416 (but very doubtful)
      • perhaps froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa˚ Mil 117 (cp. mālin 2) where it may however be māla (“wreaths of foam”). 3. in asi˚; the interpretation given under asi (as “dirt ‣See above p. 88) has been changed into “sword-garland, thus taking it as mālā. Malaka (Malaka)
    ?
    Mālaka (Māḷaka)
    1. a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mhvs. translation 99: “m. is a space marked off and usually terraced within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss’ ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dīpavaṁsa xiv.78; Mhvs 15, 192. The sacred Bodhi-tree e.g. was surrounded by a malaka”)-The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka-) literature & is not found in the older texts
    • J; i.449 (vikkama˚) iv.306; v.49 (visāla˚), 138 (identical, spelling maḷaka) Mhvs 15, 36 (Mahā-mucala˚); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma˚, enclitic for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29) Dhp-a iv.115 (˚sīmā); Vism 342 (vitakka˚)
    from māla or māḷa
    Mālatī
    feminine
    1. the great-flowered jasmine Abhp 576. cp. mālikā
    from mālā
    Mālā
    feminine
    1. garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively = flowers; figuratively row, line Snp 401 Pug 56 Vism 265 (in simile); Pv ii.316 (gandha, m., vilepana as a “lady’s” toilet outfit); ii.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu ‣See dāna, deyyadhamma & yañña) Pv-a 4 = J iii.59 ratta- kaṇavera˚ a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. cp. ratta-māla-dhara wearing a red garland Ja iii.179 an ensign of the executioner) Pv-a 51 Pv-a 62
    • asi ˚-kamma the sword-garland torture (so correct under asi!) Ja iii.178 Dāvs iii.35; dīpa˚ festoons of lamps Mhvs 5, 181; 34, 77 (˚samujjota); nakkhatta˚; the garland of stars Vv-a 167
    • puppha˚ a garland or wreath of flowers Mhvs 5, 181
    • On mālā in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 123. In compoundmāla˚; sometimes stands for mālā˚;
    1. ˚kamma garland-work, garlands, festoons Vv-a 188
    • ˚kāra garland-maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) Ja v.292 Mil 331 Dhp-a i.208 334 Vv-a 170 253 (˚vīthi)
    • ˚kita adorned with garlands wreathed Vin i.208
    • ˚guṇa “garland-string,” garlands a cluster of garlands Dhp 53 (= mālā-nikaṭi “makeup” garlands Dhp-a i.419 i.e. a whole line of garlands made as “ekato-vaṇṭika-mālā” and “ubhato-v

      • m., one & two stalked g., cp. Vin iii.180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i.e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan MN i.286 = AN v.264
      • ˚guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin iii.139 Snp-a 224 Vv-a 32 111 (variant reading guṇa)
      • ˚cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers Dhp-a i.72
      • ˚dāma a wreath of flowers Ja ii.104
      • ˚dhara wearing a wreath Ja iii.179 (ratta˚ ‣See also above)
      • ˚dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv iii.11 (kusuma˚; Burmese variant ˚bhārin) Pv-a 169 (variant reading ˚bhārin);
      • feminine dhārinī Vv 323 (uppala˚, of a Petī ‣See also bhārin)
      • ˚puṭa a basket for flowers Dhp-a iii.212
      • ˚bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) the reading changes between ˚bhārin ˚dhārin; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit prefers ˚dhārin, e.g. MVastu i.124 & ˚dhāra at Divy 218
      1. Ja iv.60 Ja iv.82 Ja v.45 Pv-a 211 (variant reading ˚dhārin); feminine ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530 Vv-a 12 & bhārī Thag 1, 459 (as variant reading ; Text reads ˚dhārī). cp. ˚dhārin -vaccha vaccha here = vṛḳṣa
        1. a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin ii.12 Vin iii.179 Vism 172 (variant reading ˚gaccha) Dhp-a ii.109 (q.v. for explanation: taruṇarukkha-puppha)
        cp. Epic Sanskrit mālā
    Mālika1
    neuter
    1. name of a dice Ja vi.281
    from mālā or mala?
    Mālika2
    1. a gardener, florist Abhp 507
    from mālā
    Mālikā
    feminine
    1. double jasmine Dāvs 5, 49
    from mālā
    Mālin
    adjective
    1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv iii.91 (= mālābhārin Pv-a 211); f mālinī Vv 362 (nānā-ratana˚); Mhvs 18, 30 (vividhadhaja˚ mahābodhi)
    2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa˚; with a surface (or is it garland) of scum Mil 260
    3. what does it mean in pañca˚; , said at Ja vi.497 of a wild animal? (Commentary not clear with explanation “pañcangika-turiya-saddo viya”).

      from mālā
    Māluka
    masculine or
    • feminine ?

      1. a kind of vessel, only in camma˚; leather bag (?) Ja vi.431 (where variant reading reads camma-pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c. pasibbaka)
      of uncertain origin
    Māluta
    wind, air, breeze SN iv.218 Thag i.2; ii.372 Ja i.167 Ja iv.222 Ja v.328 vi.189 Mil 319 Vism 172 (= vāyu) Vv-a 174 178.
    1. ˚īrita (contracted to māluterita moved by the wind fanned by the breeze Thag 1, 754 ii.372 Vv 4412 = 816 Pv ii.123 ‣See similar expressions under īrita
    the proper Pali form for māruta, the a-stem form of maru2 = Vedic marut or māruta
    Māluvā
    feminine
    1. a (long) creeper MN i.306 SN i.207 AN i.202f. Snp 272 Dhp 162 Dhp 334 Ja iii.389 v.205, 215, 389; v.205, 215, 389; vi.528 (phandana˚) Dhp-a iii.152 Dhp-a iv.43
    • On maluvā in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 123
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mālu
    Mālūra
    1. the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556
    late Sanskrit
    Mālya
    1. ‣See malya
    Māḷa
    (& Māla)
    1. a sort of pavilion, a hall DN i.2 (maṇḍala˚, same at Snp p. 104, which passage Snp-a 447 explains as “savitānaṁ maṇḍapaṁ”) Vin i.140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda explained at Vin iii.201 In the same sequence of Vb 251 explained at Vb-a 366 as “bhojana-sālā-sadiso maṇḍala-māḷo; Vinay’ aṭṭha-kathāyaṁ pana eka-kūṭasangahito caturassa-pāsādo ti vuttaṁ”) Mil 46 Mil 47-cp. mālaka
    • The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is either māla, e. g MVastu ii.274, or māḍa, e.g. Mvyut 226, 43.
    Non-Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall
    Māḷaka
    1. a stand, viz. for alms-bowl (patta˚) Vin ii.114 or for drinking vessel (pānīya˚ Ja vi.85
    a Non-Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall; in meaning “dhāraṇa” ‣See under mala. cp. malorika
    Māsa1
    1. a month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March) Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in accusative, used
    2. adverb ially; nominative rare, e.g. aḍḍha-māso half-month Vv-a 66 Āsāḷhi-māsa Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṁ pacchima māsa);
    3. plural dve māsā Pv-a 34 (read māse) cattāro gimhāna-māsā Kp-a 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha “1st summer and Bāla-vasanta “premature spring”)

      • instrumental pl catūhi māsehi Milnote 82; Pv-a i.1012
      • accusative plural as
      • adverb dasamāse 10 months Ja i.52 bahu-māse Pv-a 135 also
      • neuter chammāsāni.6 months SN iii.155 frequently
      • accusative singular collectively: a period of …, e.g. temāsaṁ 3 months Dhs-a 15 Pv-a 20
      • catu˚ DN-a i.83 Pv-a 96
      • satta˚ Pv-a 20
      • dasa˚ Pv-a 63
      • aḍḍha˚ a fortnight Vin iv.117
      • On māsa (&
      • feminine māsī, as well as shortened form ˚ma ‣See puṇṇa
      1. ˚puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DN-a i.140
      • ˚mattaṁ (
      • adverb ) for the duration of a month Pv-a 19
      cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Latin mensis; Old Irish mī Gothic mēna = moon; Old High German māno, mānōt month. Fr *mé to measure ‣See mināti
    Māsa2
    1. a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combined with mugga, e.g. Vin iii.64 Mil 267 Mil 341 DN-a i.83 Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: Vb-a 343 plural māse Vv 806 (= māsa-sassāni Vv-a 310)
      1. ˚odaka bean-water Kp-a 237
      2. ˚khetta a field of beans Vv-a 808 Vv-a 308
      • ˚bīja bean-seed Dhp-a iii.212
      • ˚vana plantation Ja v.37 (+ mugga˚)
      Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo
    Māsa3
    1. a small coin (= māsaka) Ja ii.425 (satta māsā = s. māsakā Commentary )
    identical with māsa2
    Māsaka
    1. literally a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (Dhs-a 318 cp. Kp-a 37; jatu˚, dāru˚, loha˚); the suvaṇṇa˚ (golden m.) at Ja iv.107 reminds of the “gold” in fairy tales That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77 which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha-pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā “gratis.” It only “counts” when it amounts to 5 māsakas
    • Vin iii.47 67; iv.226 (pañca˚) Ja i.112 (aḍḍha-māsakaṁ na agghati is worth nothing); iv.107; v.135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas) Dhp-a ii.29 (pañca-m
    • mattaṁ a sum of 5 m.) Pv-a 282 (m + aḍḍha˚ half-pennies & farthings, as children’s pocket-money)
    from māsa2 + ka = māsa3
    Māsakkhimhā
    1. at Vin iii.23 is for mā asakkhimhā “we could not”; here stands for na. Masati, Masana, Masin
    Māsati, Māsana, Māsin
    1. [from mṛṣ, for massati etc. ‣See masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the following passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās = as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic
    • dumapakkāni-māsita Ja ii.446 (Commentary reads māsita & explains by asita, dhāta); visa-māsita Milo 302 (Text reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa-māsan- ûpatāpa (identical) Vism 166; tiṇa-māsin eating grass Ja vi.354 (= tiṇakhādaka Commentary )
    • A similar case where Sandhi-m-has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be Pali eḷaka1, as compd with Sanskrit methi (cp. Prakrit meḍhi), pillar, post
    Māsalu
    1. only instrumental māsalunā Mil 292 Trenckner says (note p. 428): “m. is otherwise unknown it must mean a period shorter than 5 months cp. Sanskrit māsala."-Rhys Davids (translation ii.148) translates “got in a month,” following the Sinhalese gloss. The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word
    reading uncertain
    Māsācita
    1. filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i.e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full MN i.332 (kucchi garu-garu viya māsācitaṁ maññe ti; Neumann translates “wie ein Sack voll Bohnen,” thus taking m. = māsa2, and ācita as “heap” which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vb 386 where māsācitaṁ maññe was added to kāyo garuko akammañño, in meaning “heavy, languidentical” The other enumns of the 8 kusīta-vatthūni (AN iv.332 DN iii.255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Buddhaghosa comments on this passage in the Vb-a (p. 510) shows that the reading of Vb 386 is a very old one. Buddhaghosa takes māsa in the sense of māsa2 & explainsmāsācita as “wet bean” (tinta māso), thus omitting explanation of ācita The passage at Vb-a 510 runs: “ettha pana māsācitaṁ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṁ garuko ti adhippāyo.”
    māsa1 + ācita
    Māsika
    adjective
    1. of a month, i.e. a month old Mil 302
    2. of a month, i.e. consisting of months so many months (old) (—˚), as aḍḍha˚; at intervals of half a month DN i.166 MN i.238 MN i.343 Pug 55
    3. dve˚ two months old Pv i.67
    4. monthly, i.e. once a month Thag 1, 283 (bhatta)

      • cp. māsiya
      from māsa1
    Māsiya
    adjective
    1. consisting of months DN ii.327 (dvādasa˚ saṁvacchara the year of 12 months)
    = māsika
    Miga
    1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state ‣See compounds.
    2. a deer, antelope, gazelle Various kinds are mentioned at Ja v.416 two are given at Nd2 509 viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer) ‣See under eṇi & sarabha
    3. Sn 39, 72 Ja i.154 Ja iii.270 (called Nandiya) Pv-a 62 Pv-a 157. On miga in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 123, where more refs. are given
      1. ˚ādhibhū king of beasts (i.e. the lion) Snp 684
      • ˚inda king of beasts (identical) Sdhp 593
      • ˚chāpaka young of a deer Vv-a 279
      • ˚dāya deer park Ja iv.430 (Maddakucchi) Vv-a 86 (Isipatana)
      • ˚dhenu a hind Ja i.152 Dhp-a iii.148
      • ˚bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, MN i.450 (˚bhūtena cetasā)
      • ˚mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 6411 Pv i.115 ‣See under manda -rājā king of the beasts (the lion) DN iii.23f. -luddaka deer-hunter Ja i.372 Ja iii.49 Ja iii.184 Dhp-a ii.82 Vb-a 266 (in simile)
      • ˚vadha deer-slaying Ja i.149
      • ˚vittaka amateur of hunting Ja iv.267
      • ˚visāna a deer’s horn Pug 56
      • ˚vīthi deer-road Ja i.372
      Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute “wild animal” in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope
    Migavā
    feminine
    1. hunt, hunting, deer-stalking Pv-a 154 (˚padesa). Usually in devasikaṁ migavaṁ gacchati to go out for a day’s hunting Ja iv.267 or as past participle ekadivasaṁ migavaṁ gata Vv-a 260 ekāhaṁ m. g. Mhvs 5, 154
    2. = Sanskrit mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 461
    Migī
    feminine
    1. a doe Thag 1, 109 Ja v.215 Ja vi.549 Dhp-a i.48
    feminine of miga, cp. Epic Sanskrit mṛgī
    Micchatta
    neuter
    1. item of wrong, wrongness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enumerated under (an-) ariya-magga ‣See micchā forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at DN ii.353 DN iii.254 AN ii.221 AN iv.237 Vb 387 Vism 683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā-ñāṇa and ˚vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: DN iii.290 Vb 391 Vism 683 (where ˚ñāṇa & ˚viratti for vimutti
    • See further DN iii.217 (˚niyata) Pug 22 Dhs 1028 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation §1028) Vb 145 Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 32 (˚niyata-citta), 325 (˚tika), 354 (identical)
    abstract from micchā
    Micchā
    adverb
    1. wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong-, false Snp 438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn with anariyaṁ. Illustrated by “pāṇaṁ hanati, adinnaṁ ādiyati, sandhiṁ chindati, nillopaṁ harati, ekāgārikaṁ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraṁ gacchati, musā bhaṇati” at Nd1 144) Vb-a 513 (˚ñāṇa, ˚vimutti) -micchā˚; often in same combinations as sammā˚; , with which contrasted, e.g. with the 8 parts of (an-) ariya-magga viz. ˚diṭṭhi (wrong) views (DN iii.52 DN iii.70f. 76, 111 246, 269, 287, 290, Dhp 167 Dhp 316 sq. Pug 39 Vism 469 (definition) Pv-a 27 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 67; cp. ˚ka one who holds wrong views DN iii.45 DN iii.48 DN iii.264 Vism 426); ˚saṅkappa aspiration (DN iii.254 DN iii.287 DN iii.290f. Dhp 11); ˚vācā speech (ibid.); ˚kammanta conduct (ibid.); ˚ājīva living (DN iii.176f. 254, 290 AN ii.53 AN ii.240 AN ii.270 iv.82); ˚vāyāma effort (DN iii.254 DN iii.287 DN iii.290f.); ˚sati mindfulness (ibid.) ˚samādhi concentration (ibid.) ‣See magga 2, and cp. the following:
    1. ˚gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake Ja iii.304
    • ˚cāra wrong behaviour Pug 39 (& adjective cārin) Vb-a 383 (var degrees)
    • ˚paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pug 49 (adjective: ˚paṭipanna, living wrongly)
    • ˚paṇihita (citta wrongly directed mind Dhp 42 = Ud 39 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14
      1. ˚patha wrong road, wrong course Vb 145 (literally & figuratively; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp. Nd2 taṇhā iii. Dhs 381 Dhs-a 253)
      Sanskrit mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opposite saṃyak together ‣See samma); mithū wrongly ‣See also mithu
    Miñja
    neuter & miñjā
    • feminine

      1. marrow, pith, kernel Vin i.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maṁsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miñjā); Vism 235 (identical); Kh iii. (aṭṭhi˚, feminine cp. Kp-a 52, neuter Ja iv.402 (tāla˚ pith of the palm); Mhvs 28. 28 (panasa˚, feminine kernels of the ‣Seeds of the jak-fruit)
      1. ˚rāsi heap of marrow Vism 260 (= matthalunga)
      Vedic majjan (from majj ?); on form ‣See Gei
    • absolutive Pali Grammar § 91, & cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar §§ 74, 101
    Miñjaka
    1. = miñja, only in tela˚; inner kernels of tila-seed, made into a cake Pv-a 51 ‣See doṇī2
    Mita
    1. measured, in measure DN i.54 (doṇa˚ a doṇa measure full) Snp 300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i.e. stately) Pv i.1013 (identical) Ja iii.541
    • amita unlimited, without measure, boundless in epithet amit-ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp 255 Also name of a Buddha
    1. ˚āhāra measured, i.e. limited food Snp 707
    • ˚bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i.e. in moderation Dhp 227 Ja iv.252
    Vedic mita, past participle of , mināti, to measure; also in meaning “moderate, measured,” cp. in same sense Gr
    Mitta
    masculine neuter
    1. friend. Usually masculine, although
    2. nt. occurs in meaning “friend,” in singular (Nett 164) &
    3. plural (Sn 185 187); in meaning “friendship” at Ja vi.375 (= mittabhāva Commentary ). The half-scientific, half-popular etymology of mitta, as given at Vb-a 108 is “mettāyantī ti mittā minantī ti vā m.; sabba-guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho” (the latter: “they enclose in all that is hidden”)-Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd2 510 (in exegesis of Snp 37 & 75), viz.; āgārika˚; (a house-or lay-friend) and anāgārika˚; (a homeless-or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart

      • A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor or spiritual adviser, is called a; kalyāṇa-mitta ‣See under kalyāṇa
      • Mitta is often combined with similar terms devoting relationship or friendship, e.g. with amaccā colleagues and ñāti-sālohita˚; blood-relations, in ster phrase at Vin ii.126 AN i.222 Snp p. 104 Pv-a 28 cp. ñāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv; i.59; suhada (“dear heart”) DN iii.187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka) suhajja one who is dear to one’s heart Pv-a 191
      • sahāya companion Pv-a 86 The neut. form occurs for kind things DN iii.188 SN i.37
      • O
      • past participle sapatta enemy Pv-a 13
      • amitta a sham friend or enemy Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455) DN iii.185
      • pāpa-mitta bad friend Pv-a 5
      • For refs ‣See e.g. Snp 58 Snp 255 Snp 296 Snp 338 Dhp 78 Dhp 375
      1. ˚ābhirādhin one who pleases his friends Ja iv.274 (= mittesu adubbhamāno Commentary ) -ddu cp. Sanskrit mitra-druha one who injures or betrays his friends SN i.225 Snp 244 Ja iv.260 also in following forms: ˚dubbha Pv ii.93 (same passage at Ja iv.352 Ja v.240 Ja vi.310 Ja vi.375); ˚dūbha Ja iv.352 Ja vi.310
      • ˚dūbhin [cp. Sanskrit ˚drohin
        1. Ja iv.257 v.97 (˚kamma); vi.375 Dhp-a ii.23
        • ˚paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend DN iii.185 (four types: añña-d-atthu-hara, vacī-parama, anuppiyabhāṇin apāya-sahāya, i.e. one who takes anything one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) -bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one’s relative as a friend Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 has manta-bandhava)
        • ˚bheda ‣See mithu-bheda -vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv iv.86 (= mitta-rūpa, m.-paṭirūpatā Pv-a 268)
        cp. Vedic mitra, masculine & nt., friend; Avestan mipro, friend
    Mittatā
    feminine -(˚)
    1. state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa˚; being a good friend, friendship as a helper ‣See kalyāṇa DN iii.274 Vism 107
    abstract from mitta
    Mitti
    feminine
    1. friendship Ja i.468 (= metti Commentary )
    a by-form of metti
    Mithu
    adverb
    1. opposite reciprocally, contrary Snp 825 Snp 882 (taken by Nd1 163 290, on both passages identically, as nominative
    2. plural of adjective instead of
    3. adverb, & explained by “dve janā dve kalaha-kāraka” etc.).

      1. ˚bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta-bheda “break of friendship,” although mithu means “adversary, thus perhaps “breaking, so as to cause opposition” breaking of alliance, enmity DN ii.76 Ja iv.184 (here with variant reading mitta˚); Kvu 314
      cp. Vedic mithū & Pali micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ alternately, Avestan miō wrongly; Gothic misso one another, missa-leiks different; German English prefix mis-i.e. wrongly: German missetat wrong doing = misdeed; Latin mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Gothic maipms present = Anglo-Saxon mapum; mith in Vedic Sanskrit is “to be opposed to each other,” whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of “pair” prevails ‣See also methuna
    Middha

    neuter

    1. torpor, stupidity, sluggishness DN i.71 (thīna˚) Snp 437 AN v.18 Dhs 1157 Mil 299 Mil 412 (appa˚ not slothful, i.e. diligent, alert); Vism 450 (˚rūpa; + rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in definition of rūpa) DN-a i.211 (explained as cetasika gelañña ‣See on this passage Dhs translation §1155) Sdhp 459
    • See thīna
    originally past participle perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat = medh, as Dhs-a 378 gives “medhatī ti middhaṁ

    • More likely however connected with Sanskrit methi (pillar = Latin meta), cp. Prakrit medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. “stiff.” Thus semantically identical with thīna
    • Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit also middha, e.g. Divy 555
    Middhin
    adjective
    1. torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dhp 325 (= thīnamiddh’ âbhibhūta Dhp-a iv.16)
    from middha
    Midha
    1. is given as root in meaning “hiṁsana,” to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with various v.v ll.), not sure
    does it refer to 2 as in mināti2, or to middha ?
    Minana
    neuter
    1. measuring, surveying DN-a i.79 Dhs-a 123
    from mi to measure, fix, construct
    Mināti1

    1. to measure Vb-a 108 ‣See etymology of mitta; Pot. mine Ja v.468 (= mineyya Commentary ) future minissati Sdhp 585
    2. absolutive minitvā Vism 72; grd minitabba Ja v.90

      • passive mīyati ‣See anu˚,-pp mita
      • cp. anu˚, abhi˚, ni˚, pa˚, vi˚.
      • causative māpeti (q.v.)
      roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Indogermanic *me, cp. Sanskrit mātra measure, māna; Avestan mā-mitiḥ measure; Latin; metior, mensis, modus; Gothic mēla bushel; Anglo-Saxon maed measure (cp. English mete, meet fitting); Lithuanian mẽtas year The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning “pamāṇa”
    Mināti2

    1. to diminish; also: to hurt injure. Very rare, only in some preposition combinations
    • ‣ See also mīyati
    Vedic mināti, (or mi), to diminish; cp. Latin minor = English minor; Gothic mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists = absolutive mindest

    • The Dhtp 502 gives mi with “hiṁsā,” the Dhtm 725 with “hiṁsana.” It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted from
    • passive mīyati
    Miyyati
    (& Mīyati)
    1. to die
    • (a miyyati : Snp 804 Nett 23.
    • medium 3rd
    • plural miyyare Snp 575 pot. miyye Ja vi.498 ppr. miyyamāna MN iii.246 Vism 49;
    • future miyyissati MN iii.246
    • (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti; 2) MN iii.168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati) Ja iii.189 Dhp 21 pot. mīyetha DN ii.63 ppr. mīyamāna SN i.96
    • pp mata
    corresponding to Vedic mriyate, from mr, viâ *mīryate → miyyati ‣See marati
    Milakkha
    1. a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste hillman SN v.466 Ja vi.207 DN-a i.176 Snp-a 236 (˚mahātissa-thera proper name), 397 (˚bhāsā foreign dialect) The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q.v.)
    cp. Vedic Sanskrit mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue cp. babbhara & mammana
    Milakkhu
    1. a non-Aryan DN iii.264 Thag 1, 965 (˚rajana “of foreign dye” translation; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. translates “vermiljoen kleurig”). As milakkhuka at Vin iii.28 where Buddhaghosa explains by “Andha-Damil’ ādi.”
    the Prakrit form (A-Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar 105, 233) for Pali milakkha
    Milāca
    1. a wild man of the woods, non-Aryan, barbarian Ja iv.291 (not with Commentary = janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca-puttā Ja v.165 (where Commentary also explains by bhojaputta, i.e. son of a villager)
    by-form to milakkha, viâ *milaccha → *milacca → milāca: Geiger, Pali Grammar 622; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.
    Milāta
    1. faded, withered, dried up Ja i.479 Ja v.473 Vism 254 (˚sappa-piṭṭhi, where Kp-a 49 in same passage reads “milāta-dham(m)ani-piṭṭhi”) Dhp-a i.335 iv.8 (sarīra), 112 Snp-a 69 (˚mālā, in simile); Mhvs 22 46 (a˚); Sdhp 161
    past participle of milāyati
    Milātatā
    feminine
    1. only negative ; the (fact of) not being withered Ja v.156
    abstract from milāta
    Milāyati

    1. to relax, languish, fade wither SN i.126 Iti 76 Ja i.329 Ja v.90 causative milāpeti Sanskrit mlāpayati
      1. to make dry, to cause to wither Ja i.340 (sassaṁ); figuratively to assuage, suppress, stifle Ja iii.414 (taṇhaṁ). past participle milāta
      2. Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei; , as in Latin flaccus withered (= flaccid); Lithuanian blakà weak spot Dhtp 440: “milā = gatta-vimāne” (i.e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 identical
    Millikā
    1. at Pv-a 144 in passage paṁsukūlaṁ dhovitv-âbhisiñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as “abhisiñci cimillikañ ca k.” or “abhisiñcitvā mudukañ ca k.”
    Miḷhakā
    1. at SN ii.228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q.v.)
    Misati
    1. to wink (one’s eyes) ‣See ni˚;
    miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with explanation “mīlane”
    Missa

    adjective

    1. mixed (with:—˚); various Vin i.33 (kesa˚, jatā˚ etc. = a mixture of, various); Thag 1 143 Ja iii.95 Ja iii.144 (udaka-paṇṇa˚ yāgu) Pv i.92 (missā kiṭakā).
    2. neuter missaṁ as
    3. adverb “in a mixed way” Vism 552 = Vb-a 161 (+ dvidhā)
    4. accompanied by (—˚), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address cp. Sanskrit miśra & āraya miśra
      1. Ja v.153 (voc. feminine misse), 154 (
      2. feminine missā)
      3. missa is changed to missī in compound with kṛ; and bhū (like Sanskrit) thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, literally mixed state, union Ja ii.330 Ja iv.471 Ja v.86 Vb-a 107 and missī-bhūta mixed, coupled, united Ja v.86 (= hatthena hatthaṁ gahetvā kāya-missībhāvaṁ upagata Commentary ). cp. sam.˚
        1. ˚kesī feminine “mixed hair,” epithet of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (explained at Vv-a 280 as “ratta-mālādīhi missita-kesavaṭṭī”). The
        2. masculine missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism 389
        3. originally past participle of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sanskrit miśrayati, mekṣayati; Latin misceo mixtus; Anglo-Saxon miscian = mix; Old High German miskan

          • Dhtp 631 “sammissa”
    Missaka
    adjective noun
    1. mixed, combined Ja ii.8 (phalika˚ rajata-pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal) Vb-a 16 (lokiya-lokuttara˚); usually ˚-, like ˚āhāra mixed food Dhp-a ii.101
    2. ˚uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bṛhat-Saṁhitā ch. 86: miśrak’ âdhyāya) Mil 178
    3. ˚bhatta = ˚āhāra Snp-a 97 Mhbv.27
    4. masculine an attendant follower;
    5. feminine missikā Dhp-a i.211 (Sāmāvati˚). 3.
    6. neuter name of a pleasure grove in heaven (literally the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka Ja vi.278 Vism 424
    7. (

      • plural missakā) a group of devas mentioned at DN ii.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī)
      from missa
    Missakatta
    neuter
    1. mixing, mixture, combination with (—˚) Tika-Paṭṭhāna 291
    abstract from missaka
    Missana
    neuter
    1. mixing Dhtp 338
    from misseti
    Missita
    1. mixed, intermingled Snp 243 Ja v.460 Pv-a 198 (dhañña sāsapa-tela˚) Vv-a 280 ‣See under missa-kesī
    past participle of misseti
    Misseti
    1. to mix Mil 126 (mayaṁ missayissāma) Pv-a 191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiṁ)
    2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple Ja v.154 (Commentary kilesana misseti).
    3. past participle missita
    causative of miś, Vedic miśrayati
    Mihati
    1. is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa-hasana (No. 328), i.e. a kind of laugh, for smi as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342)
    Mihita
    neuter
    1. a smile Ja iii.419 Ja v.452 Ja vi.504-mihita-pubba with smiles Thag 1, 460 (spelt mhita˚) Ja vi.221 (= sita Commentary )
    • cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka vimhita
    past participle of smi; this is the inverted-diaeretic (Pāli) form (smita → *hmita → *mhita → mihita) for the other (Sanskrit) form smita (q.v.) The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih
    Mīyati
    1. ‣See miyyati (passive of marati.

    Mīlati
    1. to wink, only in compound nimīlati to close the eyes (opp um˚)
    mīl, given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with “nimīlane”
    Mīḷha

    1. excrement MN i.454 = iii.236 (˚sukhaṁ vile pleasure) AN iii.241 AN iii.242 Thag 1 1152 Ja ii.11 Ja vi.112 Vv 5211 (with reference to the gūthaniraya); Pv iii.45 (= gūtha Pv-a 194) Dhp-a ii.53 (˚ṁ khādituṁ)
    1. ˚kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22
    past participle of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i.e. urine, only with reference to the liquid; Sanskrit mīḍha = Latin mictus past participle of mingo, to urinate. cp. Avestan maēƶaiti to urinate meƶ urine; Anglo-Saxon mīgan to ur.; in Old High German mist & Anglo-Saxon miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli

    • A related root; *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q.v. for further cognates
    Mīḷhakā
    feminine
    1. cesspool SN ii.228 (so read for Text piḷhakā; Burmese variant miḷhakā) ‣See also piḷhakā. The translation (Kindred Sayings ii.155) gives “dungbeetle.”
    from mīḷha; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mīḍha-ghaṭa
    Mukula
    1. a bud ‣See makula (where also ‣See mukulita
    • Abhp 811, 1116
    cp. Sanskrit mukula
    Mukka
    1. only in um & paṭi˚; (q.v.), and as variant reading at MN iii.61
    past participle of muc, Sanskrit mukta, for the usual Pali mutta; cp. Prakrit mukka, Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 566
    Mukkhaka
    1. at Ja i.441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning “first, principal, foremost”; cp. mokkha2
    Mukha
    neuter
    1. the mouth Snp 608 Snp 1022 (with reference to the long tongue, pahūta-jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa) Ja ii.7 DN-a i.287 (uttāna˚ clear mouthed, i.e. easy to understand, cp. DN i.116) Pv-a 11 Pv-a 12 (pūti˚), 264 (mukhena)
    2. the face Ja vi.218 (uṇṇaja m.) Pv-a 74 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 77; ˚ṁ karoti to make a face (i.e. grimace Vism 343
    3. adho˚ face downward Vin ii.78 opp upari˚; (q.v.); assu˚; with tearful face Dhp 67 Pv-a 39 ‣See assu
    4. dum˚
    5. adjective sad or unfriendly looking Ja ii.393 Ja vi.343 scurrilous Ja v.78
    6. bhadra˚ brightfaced Pv-a 149
    7. ruda˚ crying Pv i.112
    8. entrance mouth (of a river) Mhvs 8, 12; āya˚; entrance (lit opening), i.e. cause or means of income DN-a i.218

      • ukkā˚ the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot AN i.257 Snp 686 Ja vi.217 574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings MN i.57
      • sandhi˚ opening of the cleft Pv-a 4 Hence:
      • cause, ways, means reason, by way of Ja iii.55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe) iv.266 (bahūhi mukhehi)
      • apāya˚ cause of ruin or loss AN ii.166 AN iv.283

    9. front part, front, top, in īsā˚; of the carriage pole SN i.224 = J i.203. Hence

      • the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj topmost, foremost Snp 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā) 569 (nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando; cp. Vin i.246) Vb-a 332 (= uttamaṁ, mukha-bhūtaṁ vā)
      • Derived adj mokkha & pāmokkha; (q.v.) Note. AN poetical instr singular mukhasā is found at Pv i.23 & i.32, as if the nominativewere mukho (s-stem)
      • The ablative mukhā is used as
      • adverb “in front of, before,” in compound sam˚ & param˚; , e. g Pv-a 13 ‣See each sep
      1. ˚ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle MN i.446 (2) setting of the mouth, i.e. mouth-enclosure, rim of the m.; in m siliṭṭhaṁ a well-connected, well-defined mouth-contour Dhs-a 15 (not with translation “opens lightly,” but better with note “is well adjusted,” ‣See Expositor 19, where write ˚ādhāna for ˚ādāna)
      2. ˚āsiya (? cp. āsita1) to be eaten by the mouth Dhs-a 330 (mukhena asitabba) -ullokana looking into a person’s face, i.e. cheerful bright, perhaps also flattering Dhp-a ii.193 (as ˚olokana) -ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd1 249 (puthu Satthārānaṁ m. puthujjana) Pv-a 219
      • ˚odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd2 391 = Mil 370 Vv-a 65 Dhp-a ii.19 Dhp-a iv.28
      • ˚ja born in (or from) the mouth, i.e. a tooth Ja vi.219
      • ˚tuṇḍa a beak Vv-a 227 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387
        1. ˚dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i.e. one who uses his mouth (speech badly Snp 664 (variant reading ˚dukkha)
        2. ˚dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DN-a i.223 (m
        • dosa ibid.) -dvāra mouth opening Pv-a 180
        • ˚dhovana-ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, “lavatory” Dhp-a ii.184
        • ˚puñchana wiping one’s mouth Vin i.297
        • ˚pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i.e. as much as to fill the mouth Ja vi.350
        • ˚pūraka mouth-filling Vism 106 -bheri a musical instrument, “mouth-drum,” mouthorgan (?) Nd2 219 B Snp-a 86
        • ˚makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face Ja ii.70 Ja ii.448 (T makkaṭiya)
        • ˚vaṭṭi “opening-circumference,” i.e. brim, edge, rim Dhp-a ii.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory cp. Ja iii.43 lohakumbha-mukhavaṭṭi) Dhp-a iii.58 (of a gong)
        • ˚vaṇṇa the features Pv-a 122 Pv-a 124
        • ˚vikāra contortion of the mouth Ja ii.448
        • ˚vikūṇa (= vikāra grimace Snp-a 30
        • ˚saṅkocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure Dhp-a ii.270 cp. mukha-sankoca Vism 26
        • ˚saññata controlling one’s mouth (i.e. speech) Dhp 363 cp. Dhp-a iv.93
        Vedic mukha, from Indogermanic *mu, onomat., cp. Latin mu facere, Latin mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound “moo”; Old High German māwen to cry, muckazzen to talk softly; Old High German mūla = German maul; Anglo-Saxon mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb = Latin mutus = English mute
    Mukhara
    adjective
    1. garrulous, noisy, scurrilous SN i.203 SN v.269 AN i.70 AN iii.199 AN iii.355 Thag 1, 955 Snp 275 Ja iii.103 Dhp-a ii.70 (ati˚) Pv-a 11-opposite amukhara MN i.470 Thag 1, 926 Pug 35 Mil 414
    cp. Sanskrit mukhara; from mukha
    Mukharatā
    feminine
    1. talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness Dhp-a ii.70
    from mukhara
    Mugga
    1. a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo, frequently combined with māsa2 (q.v.) On its size (larger than sāsapa smaller than kalāya) ‣See A v.170 & cp. kalāya
    • D; ii.293 MN i.57 (+ māsa) SN i.150 Ja i.274 Ja i.429 Ja iii.55 vi.355 (˚māsā) Mil 267 Mil 341 Snp-a 283
    1. ˚sūpa bean-soup Vism 27
    2. ˚sūpyatā “bean-soupcharacter,” or as Vism translation 32 has it “bean-currytalk”; figuratively denoting a faulty character, i.e. a man who behaves like bean-soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is explained by Buddhaghosa as meaning a man speaking half-truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half-boiled. The explanation is forced, & is stereotype; as well as is the combination in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with various spellings) is always the following: cāṭukamyatā (pātu˚ Nd2; ˚kammatā Miln; pāṭu˚ Vb mugga-sūpyatā (˚sūpatā Nd2; ˚suppatā Miln & Kp-a 236; ˚sūpatā and suppatā Vb & Vb-a 338 supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (˚bhatyatā Vism.; ˚bhaṭṭakatā Miln; ˚bhaṭyatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā Vb). At Nd; 2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja- bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vb 246
    • anācāra at Vb 352
    • lapanā at Mil 370 it is used generally (cp. Miln translation ii.287). The Commentary explanation of the Vb passage, as given at (Vb-a 483 &) Vism 17 runs as follows: “mugga-sūpa-samānāya sacc’ âlikena jīvita kappanatāy’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaṁ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccâlikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuṁ alikaṁ hoti, appakaṁ saccaṁ.” The text at Vb-a 483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism 27
    Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 240
    Muggatiya
    neuter?
    1. a plant, according to Commentary a species of bean Ja vi.536
    from mugga?
    Muggara
    1. a club, hammer, mallet Ja i.113 Ja ii.196 Ja ii.382 Ja v.47 vi.358 Mil 351 Vism 231 Dhp-a i.126 Dhp-a ii.21 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 55 (ayo˚), 56 (˚pahāra), 66 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so-called Jātaka style
    cp. Sanskrit mudgara
    Mucala
    occurs as simplex only in proper name Mahā-mucala -mālaka Mhvs 15, 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal-inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sanskrit correspondent is mucilinda, of which the Pali form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 34).
    1. -1. the tree Barringtonia acutangula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula → *mucula → *mucala) Vin i.3 Ja v.405 (˚ketakā, Dvandva); vi.269 (identical)
    • Name of a nāga (serpent) king Vin i.3

  • N of a great lake Ja vi.534 Ja vi.535

  • Mucchati

    1. (spelt muccati to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dhp 71 Dhp-a ii.67
    2. to become infatuated DN iii.43 (majjati +)
    3. only in

      • causative muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṁ); iii.188 (identical).
      • past participle mucchita
      murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull; Sanskrit mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff (b) ( causative ) to harden, increase in tone, make louder From (a) a figuratively meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed. ‣See also Lüders in K.Z. xlii.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 & 503; mu (“bandhane”) with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections

      • mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with “mohe”
    Mucchanā
    feminine
    1. swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṁ uttama-mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi)
    from mucchati.2
    Mucchañcikatā
    1. (˚añji˚) is probably the correct reading for puñcikatā
    • We find puñcikatā at Dhs 1136 1230 Vb 351 361 (variant reading pucchañji˚) Dhs-a 365
    • mucchañci˚ at Nd1 8 & Nd; 2 p. 152; pucchañji˚ at Vb-a 477 The meaning is “agitation,” as seen from explanation of term at Dhs-a 365 (“wagging of a dog’s tail,” pucchaṁ cāleti) and Vb-a 477 (“lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā”)
    • The etymology explanation is difficult we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch-aṅgi-kata i.e. mucchā + anga + kṛ; “being made stiff-of-limbs,” or “swoon.” Psychologically we may take “swoon” as the climax of agitation, almost like “hysterics.” AN similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Buddhaghosa as “wavering cal is chambhitatta “paralysis,” explained as “sakalasarīra calanaṁ” at DN-a i.50
    • The expression mucchañcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukañcukatā
    Mucchā
    1. fainting, swoon Pv-a 174
    2. infatuation AN ii.10 (kāma˚). Snp 328 Dhs 1059
    from mūrch
    Mucchita
    1. fainted, swooning, in a faint Ja i.243 Dhp-a ii.112 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 174 Pv-a 258
    2. distraught infatuated SN i.61 SN i.204 AN i.274 DN iii.46 (a˚) Iti 92 Ja iii.432 Ja v.274 (Commentary for pagiddha & gadhita).; cp. pa˚
    past participle of mucchati
    Mujjati
    1. to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja = mujjana). Only in compounds um˚ & ni˚;
    The Pali form of the Sanskrit majj
    Muñcati
    1. I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc˚ & mucc˚; are differentiated in such a way, that muñc˚; is the active base, and mucc˚; the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc˚) are used for the passive ones (mucc˚), which may be due simply to a misspelling ñc & cc being very similar
    • A.; Active. pres. muñcati Ja i.375 Ja iv.272 Ja v.453 Vv 6418 pot. muñcetha Dhp 389
    • imperative muñca Dhp 348 ppr. muñcanto Snp 791
    • aorist muñci Ja v.289 Mhvs 19, 44;
    • plural muñciṁsu Ja iv.142
    • absolutive muñciya Mhvs 25, 67; mutvā Ja i.375 & muñcitvā ibid. Pv-a 43 infinitive muñcituṁ DN i.96
    • causative II muñcāpeti DN i.148
    • B. Passive. pres. muccati Snp 508 ppr. muccanto Ja i.118 imper, singular muccassu Thag 2, 2
    • plural muccatha Dhp-a ii.92 pot. muñceyya Pv ii.26 Pv-a 104 Dhp 127
    • future muccissati Ja i.434 (where also muñcissati in same sense) Dhp-a i.105 Dhp-a iii.242 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 105; also mokkhasi Vin i.21 = SN i.111
    • plural mokkhanti Dhp 37
    • aorist mucci(ṁsu) SN iii.132 SN iv.20 Ja ii.66 inf muccituṁ Thag 1, 253 Dhp-a i.297
    • causative moceti mocāpeti; (q.v.)
    • past participle mutta
    • II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from = ablative), set free (opposite bandhati Snp 508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati) SN iii.132 (cittāni mucciṁsu their hearts were cleansed), Thag 2, 2 (muccassu) Dhp 127 (pāpakammā, quoted at Pv-a 104); Pv ii.26 Pv-a 53 (niray’ ûpapattito muccissati), 105 Dhp-a i.297 (dukkhā muccitu-kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; variant reading muñc˚); ii.92 (dukkhā). 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give Ja iv.272 (saraṁ an arrow); Vism 313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra-dhāraṁ m.); Mhvs 25, 63 (phalakaṁ)
    • to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free DN i.148 (satta usabhasatāni muñcāpeti) Pv-a 43 (yoggāni muñcitvā). 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) Ja v.289 (obhāsaṁ muñci); Mhvs 19, 44 (rasmiyo)

  • to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) Ja i.375 (vācaṁ) Vv 6418 (mālā m. ghosaṁ = vissajjenti Vv-a 281). 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dhp 389: “na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nâssa muñcetha brāhmaṇo,” where Dhp-a iv.148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i.e. kopaṁ na kareyya) In this case veraṁ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraṁ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation “give up (enmity) instead of “undertake” is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. Latin v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) translates “noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind"!

    • to abandon, give up, leave behind Dhp 348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaṁ Dhp-a iv.63) Ja v.453 (peta-rāja-visayaṁ)

  • An idiomatic (late) use of the

    • absolutive muñciya (with
    • accusative ) is in the sense of an
    • adverb (or preposition), meaning “except, besides,” e.g. maṁ m Mhvs 25, 67; imaṁ m. (besides this Mhvs 14, 17)

      • Cp pa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. Note. At Dhp 71
      • muccati stands for muccheti (= Sanskrit mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate curdle; cp. Dhp-a ii.67 Muncana & Muccana;
      Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with originally meaning “strip off, get rid of,” hence also “glide as in Lithuanian mūkti to escape, Anglo-Saxon smūgan to creep German schmiegen to rub against ‣See further connections in Walde, Latin Wtb., s.v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 explains by mocane, Dhtm 609 identical; 631: moce; 765 pamocane
  • Muñcana
    Muccana;
    neuter
    1. release, being freed, deliverance Ja iv.478 (mucc˚); ˚ākāra (muñc˚) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) Dhp-a i.267
    2. ˚kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering Dhp-a ii.11 (mucc˚, variant reading muñc˚)
    3. letting loose emitting, giving, bestowing Vb-a 249 (speaking shouting out; Vism reading p. 265 is to be corrected from mañcana!) Pv-a 132 (variant reading dāna)
    abstract from muc
    Muñcanaka
    adjective
    1. sending out or forth, emitting Vv-a 303 (pabhā˚)
    from muñcana
    Muñja
    1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Snp 440
    2. ˚kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) DN ii.174
    3. ˚pādukā slipper made of m. grass Dhp-a iii.451
    4. ˚maya made of m. grass Snp 28
    5. The reed itself is called isīkā (q.v.)
    6. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (+ rohita, taken as Dvandva by Commentary ); vi.278 (identical)
    Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 72
    Muṭa
    1. ‣See mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in proper name Muṭa-siva at Mhvs 11, 4
    Muṭṭha

    having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two compounds., viz. ˚sacca derived from following muṭṭha + sati + ya

    forgetfulness, literally forgotten-mindedness, usually combined with asampajañña, DN iii.213 AN v.149 Pug 21 Dhs 1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati … adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā) Vb 360 373; Vism 21 Dhp-a iv.85 & ˚sati(n) (adjective “forgetful in mindfulness,” i.e. forgetful, careless bewildered cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit amuṣitasmṛti Lal. v.562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from Pali musati to rob mus, muṣṇāti

    1. DN iii.252 DN iii.282 SN i.61 (+ asampajāna) Pug 21 35 (neither passage explained in PugA!) Ja iii.488 Vb-a 275 As ˚satika at Mil 79
    • Note. muṭṭhasati with various (unsuccessful) etymology is discussed in detail also by Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, past participle 92–⁠94
    past participle of mussati, mṛṣ
    Muṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. the fist Vv-a 206
    • muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i.e. clutch tightly, clenching one’s fist Ja vi.331

      • muṭṭhiṁ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) Ja vi.364 As—˚ often meaning “handful."-ācariya- muṭṭhi close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil DN ii.100 SN v.153 Ja ii.221 Ja ii.250 Vv-a 138 Snp-a 180 368. kuṇḍaka˚ handful of rice powder Vv-a 5 Dhp-a i.425
      • taṇḍula˚ handful of rice Pv-a 131
      • tila˚ do. of tilaseeds Ja ii.278
      • paṁsu˚ do. of soil Ja vi.405
      • ritta˚ an empty fist Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38 (˚sadisa alluding to ignorance)
      1. ˚yuddha fist-fight, boxing DN i.6
      • ˚sammuñjanī “fistbroom” a short broom Dhp-a ii.184
      Vedic muṣṭi, masculine feminine Does definition “muṭ; = maddane” at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?
    Muṭṭhika
    1. a fist-fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin ii.105 (malla˚) Ja iv.81 (proper name); vi.277; Vism 31 (+ malla)
    2. a sort of hammer Ja v.45
    from muṭṭhi
    Muṇḍa
    adjective
    1. bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald-headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or feminine bhikkhunī SN i.175 (m. sanghāṭi-pāruta) Vin iv.265
    2. feminine ; Snp p. 80 (= muṇḍita-sīsa Snp-a 402)

      • kaṇṇa˚ with cropped or shorn ears (applied to a dog) Pv ii.1210, cp. muṇḍaka
      1. ˚pabbataka a bare mountain Ja i.303 (Hatthimatta) Vv-a 302 (variant reading for Text muṇḍika-pabbata)
      2. ˚vaṭṭin “shaven hireling” (?), a king’s servant, probably porter Vin ii.137 The explanation given by Buddhaghosa on p. 319 (on CV. v.29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla-kammakar’ ādayo viya kacchaṁ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa-veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchanto parikkhāra-bhaṇḍavahana-manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct
      3. ˚sira shaven head Dhp-a ii.125
      cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit muṇḍa
    Muṇḍaka
    1. = muṇḍa; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit muṇḍaka Divy 13
    • Sn p. 80 Dhp 264 (= sīsa-muṇḍana-matta Dhp-a iii.391 qualification of a shaveling) Vv-a 67 (˚samaṇā, Dvandva)
    • aḍḍha˚ shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42
    • kaṇṇa˚ “with blunt corners,” name of one of the 7 great lakes ‣See under kaṇṇa
    • ˚paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaṁ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka-paṭisīsakaṁ sīse paṭimuñcitvā fastening the (imitation) top-knot of a shaveling to his head Mil 90 cp. Ja ii.197 (paccekabuddha-vesaṁ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaṁ paṭimuñcitvā) similarly Ja v.49
    Muṇḍatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being shaven or shorn Pv-a 106
    abstract from muṇḍa
    Muṇḍana
    neuter
    1. shaving, tonsure Dhp-a iii.391
    from muṇḍa
    Muṇḍika
    1. (-pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain Text reading at Vv-a 302 for variant reading SS muṇḍa- pabbata (q.v.)
    Muṇḍita
    1. shaven Snp-a 402 (˚sīsa)
    past participle of muṇḍeti
    Muṇḍiya
    1. baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) MN i.515 Snp 249 Kvu i.95 Sdhp 374
    abstract from muṇḍa
    Muṇḍeti
    1. to shave Mhbv.103. past participle muṇḍita

      • The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit has only
      • causative II muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 “muṇḍ khaṇḍha” be the definition of muṇḍati?-At Ja iii.368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha-satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should probably be read muṇḍento
      denominative causative from muṇḍa
    Muta
    1. thought, supposed, imagined (i.e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) MN i.3 Snp 714 (= phusan’ arahaṁ Snp-a 498), 812 Ja v.398 (= anumata Commentary ) Vb 14 429 sq
    • Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely “felt,” cp. Nd2 298: diṭṭha = cakkhunā d., sutaṁ = sotena s. mutaṁ = ghānena ghāyitaṁ, jivhāya sāyitaṁ, kāyena phuṭṭaṁ, and viññātaṁ = manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viññāta the function of the manas) SN i.186 (Kindred Sayings i.237 note); iv.73; Thag i.1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs 961: rūp’ āyatanaṁ diṭṭhaṁ; sadd-āyat. sutaṁ gandh˚, ras˚, phoṭṭhabb˚ mutaṁ; sabbaṁ rūpaṁ manasā viññātaṁ ‣See on this passage Dhs translation § 961 note. In the same sense Dhs-a 388 ‣See Expositor, ii.439
    • DN iii.232 Snp 790 (cp. Nd1 87f. in extenso 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology
    1. ˚maṅgalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as compd with diṭṭha-mangalika visible-omen-hunter, and suta-m sound-augur) Ja iv.73 (where Commentary clearly explains by “touch”); Kp-a 119 (the same explanation more in detail) -visuddhika of great purity, i.e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd1 89 90
    2. ˚suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd1 104 105
    for mata, cp. Gei absolutive Pali Grammar § 18
    Muti
    feminine
    1. sense-perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Snp 864 Nd1 205 (on Snp 846 = hearsay, what is thought) Vb 325 (diṭṭhi, ruci muti, where muti is explained at Vb-a 412 as “mudatī ti muti"!) 328; Sdhp 221. cp. sam˚
    for mati, cp. muta
    Mutiṅga
    a small drum, tabour DN i.79 Vin i.15 SN ii.266f. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at Ja ii.344) Ja iv.395 (bheri +); Kp-a 49. Spelling mudiṅga at SN ii.266 Ja iv.395 Vism 250 Vb-a 232 Vv-a 210 (variant reading SS mutinga), 340 (identical).
    1. ˚sadda sound of the drum Ja i.3 (one of the 10 sounds hatthi˚, assa˚ etc.)
    Sanskrit mṛdanga on d → t. cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 23
    Mutimant
    adjective
    1. sensible, intelligent, wise Snp 539 as mutīmā at Snp 61 Snp 321 Snp 385 plural 881 Ja iv.76 (as mutīmā & mutimā) Nd2 511 = 259. cp. matimant
    2. from muti
    Mutoḷī
    1. a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. “ubhato-mukhā m. pūrā nānā-vihitassa dhaññassa” at MN i.57 (variant readings putoḷi, mūṭolī) = iii.90 (mūtoḷī) = DN ii.293 (Text mutoli, variant reading muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dialogues of the Buddha ii.330 translation “sample bag” ‣See note on this passage; with remark “spelling uncertain” Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung i.101 translates “Sack.” Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with variant readings mūḍha muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase “bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ” at Divy 5 Divy 332, 501, 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as variant reading to puṭaṁsa at all passages concerned ‣See puṭaṁsa. Thus the meaning is “bag, provision-bag.” The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning “provision-bag” fits at Vism 328 in compound yāna˚; , where spelling is Text ˚paṭṭoli, Burmese variant ˚putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna-puṭosi “carriage-bag for provisions.”
    ?
    Mutta1
    1. released, set free, freed; as—˚ free from Snp 687 (abbhā˚ free from the stain of a cloud) Dhp 172 (identical), 382 (identical)
    2. Dh 344; Pv iv.134 Pv-a 65 (su˚)
    3. given up or out, emitted sacrificed Vin iii.97 = iv.27 (catta, vanta, m.) AN iii.50 (catta +). cp. vi˚
    4. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi˚).

      1. ˚ācāra of loose habits DN i.166 = iii.40 = Pug 55 (where explained at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth’ ācāro. Uccārakamm’ ādīsu lokiya-kulaputt’ ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraṁ karoti passāvaṁ karoti khādati bhuñjati) -paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opposite yutta˚), quick-tempered Pug 42 (cp. PugA 223) Snp-a 110 111
      2. ˚saddha given up to faith Snp 1146 (= saddhâdhimutta Nd2 512)
      3. ˚sirā (plural ) with loose (i.e. confused) heads Kp-a 120 = Vism 415
      4. past participle of muñcati; Sanskrit mukta
    Mutta2
    neuter
    1. urine Vin iv.266 (passāvo muttaṁ vuccati) Pv i.91 (gūthañ ca m.) Pv-a 43 Pv-a 78. Enumerated under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiṁs-ākāraṁ) at Kh iii. (cp. Kp-a 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism 264, 362 Vb-a 68 225, 248 sq. = MN iii.90 = DN ii.293 etc
    1. ˚ācāra ‣See mutta1
    2. ˚karaṇa “urine-making,” i.e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin iv.260
    • ˚karīsa urine & faeces, i.e. excrements Vin i.301 SN iii.85 AN ii.33 Snp 835 Nd1 181 Ja vi.111 Vism 259, 305 342, 418 (origin of)
    • ˚gata what has become urine Dhs-a 247 (gūtha˚ +)
    • ˚vatthi the bladder Vism 345
    cp. Vedic mūtra; Indogermanic *meud to be wet; Middle High German smuz (= absolutive schmutz), English smut & mud, Old Irish muad cloud (= Sanskrit mudira cloud); Avestan muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine
    Muttaka
    adjective
    1. only in compound antarā˚; one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167
    mutta1 + ka
    Muttakā
    feminine = muttā; ˚maya made of pearls Mhvs 27, 33.
    Muttatā
    feminine
    1. state of being liberated, freedom Ja v.480
    abstract from mutta1
    Muttā
    feminine
    1. a pearl Vv 377 (˚ācita); Pv ii.75 (+ veḷuriya); Mhvs 30, 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumerated at Mhvs. 11, 14, viz. haya-gaja-rath’ āmalakā valay'anguli-veṭhakā kakudha-phala-pākatikā, i.e horse-, elephant-, waggon-, myrobalan-, bracelet-, ring-kakudha fruit-, and common pearls
    1. ˚āhāra a string or necklace of pearls Ja i.383 Ja vi.489 Dhp-a i.85 Snp-a 78 (simile); Vism 312
    2. ˚jāla a string (net) of pearls Ja iv.120 Mhvs 27, 31 Vv-a 198
    • ˚dāma garland or wreath of p. Mhvs 30, 67 (so Text for variant reading ˚maya)
    • ˚vali string of pearls Vv-a 169
    • ˚sikkā string of pearls Vv-a 244
    cp. Sanskrit muktā
    Mutti
    feminine
    1. release, freedom, emancipation Snp 344 (muty-apekho) Nd1 88 89 (+ vimutti & parimutti) Pv-a 35 Pv-a 46; Sdhp 492
    • Cp vi˚
    from muc, cp. Sanskrit mukti
    Muttika
    1. a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Mil 262
    from muttā
    Mudati
    1. in exegetical explanation of “muti” at Vb-a 412: mudatī ti muti ‣See muti
    for modati?
    Mudayantī
    feminine
    1. a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan Ja vi.536
    cp. Sanskrit modayantī
    Mudā
    feminine
    1. joy, pleasure DN ii.214 (variant reading pamudā); Sdhp 306 Sdhp 308
    from mud ‣See modati
    Mudiṅga
    1. ‣See mutinga
    Mudita
    1. pleased, glad, satisfied, only in compound ˚mana adjective with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Snp 680 (+ udagga) Vv 8315 (+ pasanna-citta) cp. pa˚
    2. past participle of mud, modati
    Muditā

    feminine

    1. soft-heartedness, kindliness sympathy. Often in triad mettā (“active love” Snp-a 128), karuṇā (“preventive love,” ibid.), muditā (“disinterested love”: modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita-sukh’ âvippayogakāmatā muditā Snp-a 128); e.g. at DN i.251 SN v.118 AN i.196 etc ‣See karuṇā
    • cp. also Snp 73 DN iii.50 224, 248 Mil 332 (˚saññā; + mettā˚, karuṇā˚); Vism 318 (where defined as “modanti tāya, taṁ-samangino sayaṁ vā modati etc.”) Dhs-a 192 ‣See on term Dhs translation §251 (where equalled to); Compendium 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called “congratulatory & benevolent attitude”); Expositor 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā Dhs-a 151 “plasticity”)
    abstract from mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in Pali is only used in ordinary sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita ( past participle of mud has led to an etymological relation in the same sense in the opinion of Pali Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Buddhaghosa

    • Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit after the Pali: muditā Divy 483
    Mudu
    adjective
    1. soft, mild, weak, tender DN ii.17 = iii.143 (+ taluṇa) AN ii.151 (pañcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt weak: opposite tikkha) SN ii.268 (˚taluṇa-hatthapādā) Snp 447 (= muduka Snp-a 393) Thag 1, 460 (= loving) Pv i.92 Vism 64 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 230. Compar. mudutara SN v.201
    1. ˚indriya (mud˚) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Ps i.121 = ii.195; Vism 87
    2. ˚citta a tender heart Pv-a 54
    • ˚cittatā kind (soft) heartedness Dhp-a i.234
    • ˚piṭṭhika having a soft (i.e. pliable) back Vin iii.35
    • ˚bhūta supple, malleable DN i.76 (+ kammaniya) Pug 68
    • ˚maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) Dhs-a 403
    • ˚hadaya tender-hearted Dhp-a ii.5
    Vedic mṛdu, from mṛd ‣See maddati; cp. Latin mollis (from *moldṷis); Welsh blydd soft
    Muduka
    adjective
    1. = mudu
    1. -1. flexible, pliable, soft SN ii.221 (sanghāṭi); Vism 66 (giving in easily, compared with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mhvs 25, 102 (sayana); bhūmi Mil 34
    • soft mild, gentle, kindly, tender-hearted Ja v.83 (m. hadaya) 155 Mil 229 (cittaṁ m.) Snp-a 84 (˚jātika), 393 Dhp-a i.249 (citta) Pv-a 243

  • soft, weak, pampered spoilt SN ii.268 (of the Licchavi princes)

    • ‣ See also maddava, & cp. ati˚
    from mudu
  • Mudutā
    feminine
    1. softness, impressibility, plasticity AN i.9 DN iii.153 (translation “loveliness”) Dhs 44 (+ maddavatā) 1340 (identical); Vism 463 sq. Dhs-a 151 (= mudubhāva) cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation §1340
    cp. Sanskrit mṛdutā; abstract from mudu ‣See also muditā
    Muddā
    feminine
    1. a seal, stamp, impression; -rāja˚; the royal seal Dhp-a i.21 Also with reference to the State Seal at Mil 280 Mil 281 in compounds. muddakāma (amacca) & mudda-paṭilābha
    2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaṁ sippaṁ) at Vin iv.7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at MN i.85 = Nd2 199 Further at Mil 3 Mil 59 Mil 78f. 178. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mudrā in same sense (e.g. at Divy 3 Divy 26, 58 in set lipyā, sankhyā gaṇanā, m.). Buddhaghosa’s explanation of muddā DN i.11 m. + gaṇanā ‣See DN-a i.95 as “hattha-muddā-gaṇanā is doubtful; since at Mil 78f. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite different things ‣See also Franke,; Dīgha translation p. 18, with note (he marks muddā “Finger-Rechnen with?); and cp. Kern, Toevoegselen i.166 s.v. muddā. The Dialogues of the Buddha i.21 translation “counting on the fingers” ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.21 22 with literature & more refs.
    3. ; hattha˚; is signlanguage gesture (literally hand-arithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident from Ja vi.364 (hattha-muddāya naṁ pucchissāmi … muṭṭhiṁ akāsi, sā “ayaṁ me … pucchati” ti ñatvā hatthaṁ vikāsesi, so ñatvā …; he then asks by word of mouth)
    4. hattha-muddaṁ karoti to make a sign, to beckon Ja iii.528 cp. Vin v.163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha-muddā dassetabbā
      1. ˚ādhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal Chancellorship Mil 281
      cp. (late?) Sanskrit mudrā
    Muddika
    adjective noun
    1. one who practises muddā (i.e. knowledge of signs) DN i.51 (in list of occupations combined with gaṇaka & trsl; dDialogues of the Buddha i.68 by “accountant” cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, “Finger-rechner"?) Vin iv.8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka) SN iv.376 (gaṇaka, m., sankhāyaka)
    from muddā
    Muddikā1
    feminine
    1. a seal ring, signet-ring, fingerring Ja i.134 Ja iii.416 Ja iv.439 Dhp-a i.394 Dhp-a ii.4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); iv.222. aṅguli˚; finger-ring, signetring Vin ii.106 Ja iv.498 Ja v.467
    • Similarly as at Dhp-a ii.4 (muddikaṁ āharāpeti muddikā is figuratively used in meaning of “authority,” command; in phrase muddikaṁ deti to give the order, to command Mil 379 (with reference to the captain of a ship)
    from muddā
    Muddikā2
    feminine
    1. a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin i.246 (˚pāna) Ja iv.529 Dhp-a ii.155
    from mudu, cp. * Sanskrit mṛdvīkā
    Muddha1
    infatuated, bewildered, foolish Ja v.436
    1. ˚dhātuka bewildered in one’s nature, foolish(ly Ja iv.391 (variant reading luddha˚) Dhp-a iii.120 (variant reading danta˚ mūḷa˚)
    past participle of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresponding to Sanskrit mugdha. Not = mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect which in Pali is maddhita ‣See pari˚; nor = mṛdhra disdained
    Muddha2 & Muddhā
    1. the head; top, summit. masculine singular muddhā Snp 983 Snp 1026 & muddhaṁ Snp 989 acc muddhaṁ DN i.95 Snp 987f. 1004, 1025 Dhp 72 (= paññāy’ etaṁ nāmaṁ Dhp-a ii.73); & muddhānaṁ MN i.243 iii.259 = SN iv.56 instrumental muddhanā Mhvs 19, 30; loc muddhani Snp 689 Snp 987 MN i.168 Vism 262; Mhvs 36 66, in meaning “on the top of (a mountain)”: Vin i.5 (here spelt pabbata-muddhini) = SN i.137 Ja iv.265 (Yugandhara˚); Pv ii.961 (Naga˚ = Sineru˚ Pv-a 138) Vism 304 (vammika˚ on top of an ant-hill)

      • Freq in phrase muddhā me, or no, or te sattadhā phaleyya as an oath or exclamn of desecration or warning “(your) head shall split into 7 pieces,” intransitive spelt both phal˚ & phāl˚ at Ja v.92 (te s. phal˚) Mil 157 Dhp-a i.17 (me … phāl˚), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m s. phalissati); iv.125 (no … phāleyya) Vv-a 68 (me s. phal˚)
      • In compoundmuddha˚;
      1. ˚(n)aṭṭhi (muddhan-aṭṭhi) bone of the head Kp-a 51 -ādhipāta head- splitting, battering of the head Snp 988f. 1004, 1025
      2. ˚ādhipātin head-splitting adjective Snp 1026
      3. ˚āra head (top) spoke Kp-a 172
      4. ˚āvasitta “head-anointed” a properly anointed or crowned king DN iii.60f. 69 Pug 56 Mil 234
      5. ˚pāta = ˚âdhipāta
      6. Vedic mūrdhan, the Pali word shows a mixture of a-and n-stem
    Muddhatā
    feminine
    1. foolishness, stupidity, infatuation Ja v.433 (variant reading muṭhatā, muddatā)
    from muddha1
    Mudhā
    adverb
    1. for nothing, gratis Vv-a 77
    Classical Sanskrit mudhā
    Munana
    neuter
    1. fathoming, recognising, knowing; a Commentary word to explain “muni,” used by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 114 (mahā-isibhūtaṁ.. mahanten’ eva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniṁ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni)
    from munāti, almost equal to mona
    Munāti
    1. to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dhp 269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is explained at Dhp-a iii.396 as follows: “yo puggalo.. tulaṁ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati.” Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prakrit) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prakrit Grammar § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning “to know” & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma-mūta (driven by kāma; mūta = past participle of mū = mīv and Sanskrit muni. cp. animo movere
    2. = manyate, probably corresponding to Sanskrit medium manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sanskrit mṛṇāti of mṛ; to crush, or also mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning “ñāṇa.” The word is more a Commentary word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it
    Muni
    a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to any man attaining perfection in self-restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many-sided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e.g. Snp 207–⁠221 (the famous Muni-sutta mentioned Divy 20 Divy 35 Snp-a 518 explained Snp-a 254
    1. -277) 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq. 946, 1074 & passim ‣See Pj. Index p. 749 Dhp 49 Dhp 225 Dhp 268 sq., 423
    • cp. general passages & explains at Pv ii.113; ii.133 (explained at Pv-a 163 by “attahitañ ca parahitañ ca munāti jānātī ti muni”) Mil 90 (munibhāva “munihood,” meditation, self-denial, abrogation) Dhp-a iii.521 (munayo = moneyya-paṭipadāya maggaphalaṁ pattā asekha-munayo), 395 (here explained with reference to originally meaning tuṇhībhāva “state of silence = mona)
    • II. The Commentary & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni-qualities, esp based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (˚sucaritaṁ & ˚duccaritaṁ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya-moneyya, vacīmoneyya mano-moneyya; or Muni-hood in action speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya-muni, vacī˚ & mano˚. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd; 2 514a = Nd1 57. Besides this the same chapter (514b) gives a division of 6 munis viz. agāra- muni, anagāra˚; (the bhikkhus), sekha˚; asekha˚; (the Arahants), pacceka˚; (the Paccekabuddhas) muni˚; (the Tathāgatas)
    • The parallel passage to Nd2 514a at AN i.273 gives a muni as kāya-muni, vācā & ceto˚ (under the 3 moneyyāni)
    cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. cp. Chh. Up. viii.5, 2; Psalms of the Bretheren 132 note. Connected with mūka ‣See under mukha. This etymology preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311 Another, as favoured by Pischel ‣See under munāti is “inspired, moved by the spirit.” Pāli explains (popular etymology) are given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 114 & 231 ‣See munana
    Mummura
    1. crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff Ja ii.134
    * Sanskrit murmura, literally crackling, rustling; cp. Latin murmur = English murmur, Old High German murmurōn & murmulōn = German murmeln; all to Idg *mrem, to which Sanskrit marmara ‣See Pali mammara & cp. murumurā
    Muyhati
    1. to get bewildered to be infatuated, to become dull in one’s senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e. g Mil 386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb only Dhs-a 254 (in definition of moha) & Sdhp 282 Sdhp 605 (so read for mayhate). past participle ; mūḷha & muddha; 1
    2. Vedic muhyati, muh; definition Dhtp 343: mucchāyaṁ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha
    Muyhana
    neuter
    1. bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DN-a i.195 (rajjana-dussana-m.)
    from muyhati
    Muraja
    1. a small drum, tambourine Ja v.390 Vv 353 (= bheri Vv-a 161); 8418 (= mudinga Vv-a 340) Snp-a 370
    2. a kind of girdle Vin ii.136
    cp. Epic. & Classical Sanskrit muraja, Prakrit murava: Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 254
    Murumurā
    indeclinable
    1. the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, “crack”; in phrase m ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits Ja i.342 Ja v.21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby)
    onomat. to sound root mṛ; ‣See mammara & mummura
    Murumurāpeti
    1. = murumurāyati Ja ii.127 Ja iii.134 Ja v.196 (˚etvā khādati)
    Murumurāyati
    1. to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound Ja iv.491 Mulala & Mulali
    denominative from murumurā
    Muḷāla
    Muḷālī

    feminine

    1. the stalk of the lotus:; muḷālī Vin i.215 (bhisa +); muḷāli Ja vi.530 (= muḷālaka Commentary ); muḷālikā Vin i.215 (bhisa +); bhisa-muḷālaṁ neuter (collective compound fibre & stalks Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 SN iv.94 SN v.39 Vism 361 Vb-a 66

      • muḷāli-puppha a lotus Thag 1, 1089
      cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds Geiger,; Pali Grammar 12 & 43 puts muḷāla = Sanskrit mṛṇāla
    Musati
    1. to betray, beguile bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. DN ii.183 (but translation “destructive to the eyes”); musati 'va nayanaṁ Vv 353 (cp. Vv-a 161)
    in this connection = mṛṣ in an active sense, as quâsi denominative from musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with “theyya”
    Musala
    masculine neuter
    1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is “mortar,” cp. Ja ii.428 & ‣See udukkhala) DN i.166 = Pug 55 Dhp-a ii.131 (+ suppa). 2. a club AN ii.241 Vv-a 121
    2. a crowbar Ja i.199 Pv-a 258 (˚daṇḍa)
    cp. Vedic musala. The etymology is probably to be connected with mṛd ‣See maddati
    Musalaka
    neuter
    1. a little pestle, a toy for little girls Dhs-a 321
    from musala
    Musalika
    1. only in compound danta˚; (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle Ja iv.8 (an aggi-pakkaṁ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth)
    Musā
    adverb
    1. falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati bhāsati & brūti; to speak falsely, to tell a lie
    • AN i.149 (opposite saccaṁ) Snp 122 Snp 158 Snp 397 Snp 400 Snp 757 Snp 883 Snp 967 Snp 1131 Nd1 291 Pv i.33 Vv-a 72 (= abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ) Snp-a 19 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 152
    1. ˚vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie DN i.4 DN i.25 DN iii.68f. 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269 MN i.414 Snp 129 Snp 242 (cp. DN ii.174) Dhp 246 Pug 57 Nd1 268 Vv 158 Pv i.68 Vb-a 383 (various degrees) Pv-a 16 Sdhp 65 explicitly at Nd1 152 394 Nd2 515. cp. mosavajja -vādin speaking falsely, lying DN i.138 DN iii.15 DN iii.82 Dhp 176 Pug 29 38
    Vedic mṛṣā, from mṛṣ, literally “neglectfully”
    Mussati
    1. v. intransitive to forget, to passive into oblivion, to become bewildered to become careless DN i.19 (sati m.) Ja v.369 (identical) Snp 815 (= nassati Snp-a 536 = parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd1 144).
    2. past participle muṭṭha. C
    3. past participle pa˚, pari˚
    4. = mṛṣ, mṛṣyati; to which musā “wrongly,” quite different in origin from micchā: mṛṣā → mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by “sammose,” i.e. forgetfulness
    Muhutta
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say “a se conditional "-Its duration may be seen from descending series of time-connotations at Pv-a 198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from definition at Nd2 516 by “khaṇaṁ, layaṁ, vassaṁ, atthaṁ.” Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time in a twinkling of an eye Pv-a 55
      2. muhuttaṁ (
      3. accusative ) a moment, even a second Snp 1138 (m. api) Dhp 65 (identical) 106 Pv-a 43
    Vedic muhūrta, from muhur suddenly
    Muhuttika
    adjective
    1. only for a moment; ˚ā feminine a temporary wife, in enumeration of several kinds of wives at Vin iii.139 & Vv-a 73 Syn. tan-khaṇikā
    2. from muhutta
    1. is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning “bandhana.”
    Mūga
    adjective
    1. dumb Vin i.91 (andha, m., badhira) Snp 713 Dhp-a ii.102 (andha, m., badhira) Snp-a 51 (in simile); Sdhp 12 frequently combined with eḷa, deaf (q.v.)
    Vedic mūka ‣See etymology under mukha
    Mūla
    neuter
    1. (literally) root AN ii.200 MN i.233 Dhp-a i.270 Dhp-a iv.200 (opposite patti); Vism 270 rukkha˚; = rukkha-samīpaṁ); Pv ii.96 (sa˚ with the root) Pv-a 43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of)
    2. foot bottom Vin ii.269 (patta˚) Pv-a 73 (pāda˚), 76 (identical) rukkha˚; foot of a tree ‣See under rukkha for special meaning
    3. (applied) ground for, reason, cause, condition defined as “hetu, nidāna, sambhava” etc. at Nd2 s.v. Snp 14 = 369 (akusalā mũlā

      • nominative
      • plural = ākāra or patiṭṭhā Snp-a 23); Pv ii.333 (sa˚ with its cause); Duka-Paṭṭhāna 272, 297 312, 320 Mil 12 (& khandha-yamaka, with reference to the Yamaka). Very frequently in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning; akusala (absence of them = kusala), e.g. at DN iii.214, 275 AN i.201 203 Vb 106f. 169, 361; Yam i.1; Vism 454 cp. Nd2 517 Vb-a 382
      • origin, source, foundation root (figuratively) Vin i.231 = DN ii.91 (dukkhassa) Vin ii.304 Snp 916 Snp 968 (cp. Nd1 344 490) Thag 1, 1027 (brahmacariyassa) Dhp 247 Dhp 337. Frequently in formula (may be taken to no. 1) pahīna
      1. ucchinna-mūla tālâvatthukata etc. with reference to the origin of saṁsāra, e.g. at SN ii.62 SN ii.88 SN iii.10, 27, 161, 193; iv.253, 292, 376 ‣See Nd2 p. 205 s.v. pahīna, in extenso.
      • beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DN-a i.311 also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning Vv-a 132 (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mūlaṁ kramataś ca identical Divy 491)

    4. “substance, foundation, i.e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Mil 334 (kamma˚) Dhp-a i.270 (?) Pv-a 273 Mhvs 27, 23. amūla unpaid Mhvs 30, 17 (kamma labour)

      • iṇa˚ borrowed capital DN i.71
      1. ˚kanda eatable tuber Dhp-a iii.130 Dhp-a iv.78 (mūlaka˚) ‣See also kanda
      2. ˚kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k of causes Snp-a 54
      • ˚ghacca radically extirpated Dhp 250 Dhp 263
      • ˚ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin iii.75
      • ˚dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Snp 1043 cp. Nd2 517
      • ˚phala (eatable) fruit consisting of roots; roots as fruit Snp 239
      • ˚bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Snp 524f. 530 sq., cp. Snp-a 429

        1. -431
        2. ˚bīja having ‣Seeds in roots i.e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enumerated under bījagāma (q.v.) -rasa taste of roots, or juice made from roots Vb-a 69 ‣See under rasa
        Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as; mūl in 2 meanings, viz. literally “rohane” Dhtm 859, and figuratively “patiṭṭhāyaṁ” Dhtm 391
    Mūlaka
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective (a) (—˚) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by originating in Vb 390 (taṇhā˚ dhammā); Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 233 sq. 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim Vb-a 200f. 207 sq (sankhāra˚, avijjā˚ etc. with reference to the constituents of the Paṭicca-samuppāda) Pv-a 19
    2. (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mhvs 27, 23 (a ˚ṁ kammaṁ unpaid labour) Dhp-a i.398 (nahāna-cuṇṇa ˚ṁ catu-paṇṇāsa-koṭi dhanaṁ, as price) ii.154 (pattha-pattha-mūlakā bhikkhā); iii.296 (kiṁ mūlakaṁ how dear?)
    3. neuter = mūla, i.e. root bulb, radish, only in compound mūlaka-kanda radish (-root Ja iv.88 Ja iv.491 Dhp-a iv.78
    4. ‣ See also pulaka
    from mūla
    Mūlika
    adjective noun
    1. masculine root-vendor Mil 331
    2. (adjective
    3. ˚) belonging to the feet (pāda˚), a footman lackey Ja i.122 Ja i.438 Ja ii.300f. (name of the king of Janasandha Gāmaṇi-caṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30
    4. in rukkha˚; one who lives at the foot of a tree ‣See under rukkha, where also ˚mūlikatta.

      from mūla
    Mūḷha
    1. gone astray, erring, having lost one’s way (magga˚) DN i.85 ≈ (˚ssa maggaṁ ācikkhati); Pv iv.148 (identical with pāvadati) Pv-a 112 (magga˚)
    2. confused infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish DN i.59 Pv iv.334 (sa˚, better to be written sam˚)
      1. ˚gabbhā feminine a woman whose “foetus in utero” has gone astray, i.e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered Ja i.407 = Dhp-a iv.192 Mil 169 Vb-a 96
      2. ˚rūpa foolish Dhp 268 Dhp-a iii.395
      3. Vedic mūḍha, past participle of muh; cp. also muddha1 = Vedic mugdha
    Mūsika
    masculine & mūsikā
    • feminine

      1. a mouse DN ii.107 = Pug 43 feminine ; Vism 109
      2. masculine, 252 Kp-a 46
      3. masculine ; Mhvs 5, 30
      4. masculine Vb-a 235

        1. ˚cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) DN i.9 (mūsikā˚ DN-a i.92 mūsika˚ = undurakhāyitaṁ; cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.17)
        2. ˚darī a mouse-hole Ja i.462 (mūsikā˚, so read for musikā˚)
        3. ˚patha “Mouseroad” name of a road Nd1 155 415 (here mūsikā˚) -potikā the young of a mouse Ja iv.188 (mūsika˚)
        4. ˚vijjā mouse craft DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.93)
        Vedic mūṣikā, from mūṣ
    Mūsī
    feminine
    1. a mouse SN ii.270 (mudu˚ a tender, little m.)
    Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Latin mūs Latin moveo, to move
    Me
    1. is enclitic form of ahaṁ in various cases of the sg ‣See under ahaṁ
    Mekhalā
    feminine
    1. a girdle Ja v.202 Ja v.294 (su˚, adjective); vi.456 Thag-a 35 Kp-a 109 Dhp-a i.39 Pv-a 46
    cp. Vedic mekhalā
    Mekhalikā
    feminine
    1. a girdle Vin ii.185 (ahi˚, consisting of a snake)
    from mekhalā
    Megha
    1. a cloud Pv ii.945; Vism 126; especially a thundercloud storm, SN i.100 (thaneti), 154; Thag i.307 (as kāḷa) Iti 66 Ja i.332 (pajjunna vuccati megha) Dhp-a i.19 Snp-a 27 (˚thanita-sadda). In this capacity often called mahā-megha, e.g. Snp 30 Dhp-a i.165 Kp-a 21 Pv-a 132
    • On megha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907 124, 125
    1. ˚nātha having clouds as protectors (said with reference to grass-eating animals) Ja iv.253
    • ˚maṇḍala cloud-circle a circle of clouds Snp-a 27
    • ˚vaṇṇa cloud-coloured Ja v.321 (Commentary for megha-sannibha); ˚pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mhvs 30, 59 (variant reading, Text meda˚ translation fat-coloured stones) ‣See meda˚
    Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati ‣See mīḷha, but to Indogermanic *meigh-, fog, rain; cp. Sanskrit miḥ mist; Av maēga cloud; Lithuanian mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Anglo-Saxon mist = Oicel mistr “mist”
    Mecaka
    adjective
    1. black, dark blue Dhs-a 13
    cp. Vedic mecaka
    Mejjati
    1. to be fat, to be full of fat; figuratively to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a “petitio principii” to explain mettā) Dhs-a 192 (variant reading mijjati = siniyhati)
    cp. Vedic midyati, to mid ‣See meda Dhtp 160, 413 & Dhtm 641 give; mid with meaning “snehane”
    Mejjha
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective to medha1
      1. fit for sacrifice, pure; negative ; impure Sdhp 363 2. neuter to medha2 & medhāvin
        1. in; dum˚; foolishness Pug 21 = Dhs 390 (explained at Dhs-a 254 by “yaṁ.. citta-santānaṁ mejjhaṁ bhaveyya suci-vodānaṁ taṁ duṭṭhaṁ mejjhaṁ iminā ti dummejjhaṁ”)
        *medhya; from medha
    Meṇḍa
    1. a ram DN i.9 Ja iv.250 353 (˚visāṇa-dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram’s horn) —˚patha N
    2. plural “ram’s road” Nd1 155 = 415. —˚yuddha ram fight DN i.6
    3. a groom, elephant-driver in cpd hatthi˚; elephants’ keeper Ja iii.431 Ja v.287 Ja vi.489
    dialectical, cp. Prakrit měṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of “koṭilla,” i.e. crookedness. The Ved (Sanskrit) word for ram is meṣa
    Meṇḍaka
    adjective
    1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow Ja ii.88 (˚dhanu); v.128 (˚singadhanu)
    2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka-pañha “question about the ram” Mil 90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga-jātaka (J vi.353
      1. -55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody “from hell to heaven” (J vi.354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. cp. Trenckner’s remark Mil 422
      from meṇḍa
    Metta
    adjective neuter
    1. friendly, benevolent kind as adjective at DN iii.191 (mettena kāya-kammena etc.), 245 (˚ṁ vacī-kammaṁ); as neuter for mettā in compounds. of mettā (cp. mettaṁsa) and by itself at DN i.227 (mettaṁ + cittaṁ), perhaps also at Snp 507
    2. cp. Vedic maitra “belonging to Mitra”; Epic Sanskrit maitra “friendly,” from mitra
    Mettā
    feminine [abstract from mitra = mitta, cp. Vedic maitraṁ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expositor 258) derived from mid to love, to be fat: “mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho” love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are various definitions & explains of mettā: the stereotype “metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṁ mettā cetovimutti” Vb 86 = 272; occurring as “metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṁ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaṁ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo … kusalamūlaṁ” at Nd1 488 & Dhs 1056 (where Text mettaṁ for metti, but ‣See; i → Dhs translation2 253). By Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 128 explained in distinction from karuṇā (which is “ahita-dukkh-âpanayakāmatā”) as “hita-sukh-ûpanaya-kāmatā,” i.e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one’s fellow-men. cp. def; n of mettā at Vism 317
    • Sn 73 ‣See Nd2 p. 232 967 DN iii.247f. 279; Vism 111, 321 sq. Snp-a 54 Pv-a 66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp 484 Sdhp 487. Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto-vimutti DN i.251 SN ii.265 AN iv.150 Iti 20 Vb 86 and passim mettā-sahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love DN i.250 DN ii.186 DN iii.49f. 78, 223 sq. SN v.115 AN i.183 ii.129; iv.390; v.299, 344; explained in detail at Vism 308 mettaṁ karoti (
    • locative ) to be friendly or sympathize with Mhvs 12, 23
    • In compounds. usually mettā˚, but shortened to metta˚; in metta-cittaṁ kindly thought, a heart full of love DN i.167 DN iii.237 Snp 507 Pv ii.1317 Ja vi.71 and metta-jhāna love-meditation, as explanation of m
    • citta at Snp-a 417 Pv-a 167
    1. ˚aṁsa (mettaṁsa) sympathetic, showing love towards Iti 22 (variant reading ˚āsa) Ja iv.71 (= metta-koṭṭhāsa mettacitta Commentary )
    2. ˚kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy Dhp-a iv.108
    • ˚bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) Ja i.176 Ja iii.45 Mil 199 Vism 295
    • ˚vihārin abiding in kindliness Dhp 368 Dhp-a iv.108 Nett 25; Vism 324 Pv-a 230

    Mettāyati
    1. to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent AN iv.151 Dhs-a 194 Vb-a 75 With locative to show friendship or be affectionate towards Ja i.365 Ja iii.96 Dāvs iii.34
    2. denominative from mettā
    Mettāyanā
    feminine & Mettāyitatta
    • neuter

      1. ‣See definition of mettā. Metti & Metti
      abstract formations from mettā
    Metti
    Mettī
    feminine
    1. love, friendship Ja iii.79 Ja v.208 Vb-a 75 ‣See also definition of mettā
    cp. Epic Sanskrit maitrī
    Metteyyattā
    feminine is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q.v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e.g. Nd2 294.
    Methuna
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective relating to sexual intercourse sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase ˚ṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin i.96 DN ii.133 Snp 291 Snp 704 Nd1 139; Vism 418 Snp-a 536
    2. masculine an associate Ja vi.294 (na rājā hoti methuno)
    3. neuter sexual intercourse Vedic maithuna
      1. DN i.4 DN iii.9 DN iii.88f. 133 Snp 400 Snp 609 Snp 814 Snp 835 = Dhp-a i.202 Nd1 139 145 Pug 67 Vism 51
      from Vedic mithuna pair, derived from mithu. cp. micchā
    Methunaka
    1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd1 139 (in a wider sense)
    2. an associate Vin iii.66
      • neuter coitus Ja ii.360 (= methuna-dhamma Commentary )
      from methuna
    Meda
    fat SN i.124 Snp 196 Ja iii.484 (ajakaraṁ medaṁ = ajakara-medaṁ Commentary ); Kh iii. (explained at Vism 262 as “thīnasineha” thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361 Vb-a 66 225, 245, 249.
    1. ˚kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat AN iv.377 (in simile with kāya) Dhp-a ii.179 (similar) Vism 195 (in compar.)
    2. ˚gaṇṭhi (as medo-gaṇṭhi, Sanskrit influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour mentioned as a disease at Mil 149
    • ˚vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in compound ˚pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Snp 447 (= medapiṇḍa-sadisa Snp-a 393); Mhvs 1, 39; 30, 57 sq., 96 31, 121 ‣See Geiger’s note Mhvs (P. Text S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda˚ is the correct reading for the variant reading megha˚ at all places
    Vedic medas neuter from mid ‣See etymology under mada
    Medaka
    1. in go˚; a precious stone of light-red (or golden) colour (cp. meda-vaṇṇa-pāsāṇa) Vv-a 111
    meda + ka
    Medinī
    feminine
    1. the earth (also later Sanskrit) Mhvs 5, 185; 15 47; Vism 125
    of adjective medin, from meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion from mid in meaning to be friendly
    Medeti
    1. to become fat MN i.238
    denominative from meda
    Medha
    1. sacrifice only in assa˚; horse-sacrifice & purisa˚; human s. (q.v.) e.g. at AN iv.151 Snp 303
    • cp. mejjha
    Vedic medha, in aśva, go˚, puruṣa˚ etc.
    Medhaga
    (& ˚ka)
    1. quarrel, strife Vin ii.88 (˚ka) Thag 2, 344 Snp 893 Snp 894 (= kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha vivāda Nd1 302 303), 935 (Text ˚ka Nd1 402 & 406 ˚ga with variant reading SS ˚ka) Dhp 6 Ja iii.334 (˚ka; Commentary = kalaha) 488 (˚ga; Commentary ˚ka explanation kalaha) Dhp-a i.65
    cp. Sanskrit methana abusive speech; Vedic methati from mith to scold
    Medhasa
    adjective

    having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in compounds. bhūri˚; of great wisdom Snp 1131 & su˚; Vedic sumedhas

    1. very wise Vv 222 (= sundara-pañña Vv-a 111); Pv iii.77 (both combined as bhūri-su-medhasa, hardly correct; variant reading MN bhūrimedhasa Pv-a 205)
    = Vedic medhas, as a- base
    Medhā
    feminine
    1. wisdom, intelligence sagacity Nd1 s.v. (m. vuccati paññā) Pug 25 Dhs 16 Dhs-a 148 Pv-a 40 (= paññā) adjective sumedha wise clever, intelligent Snp 177 opposite dum˚; stupid Pv i.82-khīṇa-medha one whose intelligence has been impaired stupefied Ja vi.295 (= khīṇa-pañña)
    2. Vedic medhā & medhas
    Medhāvitā
    feminine
    1. cleverness, intelligence Vv-a 229
    abstract from medhāvin
    Medhāvin
    adjective
    1. intelligent, wise, often combined with paṇḍita & bahussuta; : DN i.120 SN iv.375 AN iv.244 Vin iv.10 13, 141 Snp 323 (accusative medhāvinaṁ + bahussutaṁ) 627, 1008 (epithet of Mogharājā), 1125 (identical) Nd2 259 (s.v. jātimā, with various other synonyms) Dhp 36 Ja vi.294 Mil 21 Dhp-a i.257 Dhp-a ii.108 iv.169 Vv-a 131 Pv-a 41
    2. medhā + in = *medhāyin → medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa
    Medhi
    feminine

    pillar, part of a stūpa not in the Canon? Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit medhi Divy 244; Prakrit meḍhi Pischel Grammar § 221 ‣See for etymology Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. meta

    Medhin
    adjective-noun = medha in adjective use; only in compound dummedhin (= dum-medha) foolish, ignorant Dhp 26 (bālā dummedhino janā; = nippaññā Dhp-a i.257).
    Meraya
    neuter
    1. a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually combined with surā. DN i.146 166 MN i.238 Pug 55 Dhp 247 Ja iv.117 (pupphāsav-ādi, i.e. made from flowers, cp. definition dhātakī-puṣpaguḍa-dhāny-āmla-sanskṛtaṁ by Mādhava, Halāy. p 314). Five kinds are given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 73 viz. pupph-āsava, phal’ āsava, madhv˚, guḷ˚, sambhārasaṁyutta
    Epic Sanskrit maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); probably dialectical
    Merita
    1. in bhayamerita Ja iv.424 = v.359 is to be read as bhaya-m-erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toevoegselen to perita
    Mella
    1. citron (= mātulunga) Ja iii.319 (gloss bella
    dialectical or uncertain reading?
    Mokkha1
    1. (literally) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m DN i.73 = M i.276
    2. (figuratively) release, deliverance, salvation Vb 426 (jarā-maraṇa˚ from old age & death) Dhp-a i.4 (˚magga + sagga-magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (˚dhamma = salvation) Mhvs 5, 61
    3. (literally) (active) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) Ja i.375

      • it may (& probably ought to) be taken as adjective (= *mokṣya, gerundive of
      • causative of; muc at Snp 773 (añña˚, either = 1, as “deliverance for others, or = 4, as “to be delivered by others.” Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 516 gives both explains : aññe mocetuṁ (na) sakkonti kāraṇa-vacanaṁ vā etaṁ: aññena mocetabbā (na) honti)
    late Vedic & Epic Sanskrit mokṣa, from; muc ‣See muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha = mocana; Dhtm 751 moca
    Mokkha2
    adjective
    1. the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m uttamo AN ii.95 where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha ‣See under mahā & cp. Nd; 2 502A
    from mukha 6; Vṛddhi form = *maukhya
    Mokkhaka
    1. = mokkha2; thus we should read at Ja i.441 for mukkhaka
    Mokkhacika
    masculine or ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of forbidden amusements at DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86 samparivattaka-kīḷanaṁ, i.e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning The following sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: “ākāse vā daṇḍaṁ gahetvā bhūmiyaṁ vā sīsaṁ ṭhapetvā heṭṭh-upariya (so read!)-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṁ”; i.e. trapeze-performing. cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.10 & Vinaya Texts ii.184). The list re-occurs at Vin ii.10 (˚āya: feminine ! kīḷanti); iii.180 MN i.266≈and. AN v.203 (with important variant reading mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending; tiya, and not ˚cika at all The Cy. on this passage explains as: daṇḍakaṁ gahetvā heṭṭh-uppariya (sic. as DN-a i.86 correct to upariya?-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṁ). The word is found also at Vin i.275 where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by “mokkhacikāya kīḷanto,” playing (with a) m

        • According to its use with kīḷati & in instrumental; mokkhacikena (Nd2 219 may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy) with which children play
        ‣See on attempt at etymology Morris in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as from muc “tumbling” & cika = "turning” from cak = cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps; from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris’ etymology is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha mokkha2, in meaning “head, top,” so that it may mean “head over,” top-first” & we have to separate *mokkhac-ika the ˚ika representing ˚iya “in the manner of like” & -ac being the
      2. adverb of direction as contained in Sanskrit prāñc = pra-añc.
    Mokkhati
    1. ‣See under muñcati
    Mogha
    adjective
    1. empty, vain useless, stupid, foolish DN i.187 (opposite to sacca), 199 Snp 354 Dhp 260 (˚jiṇṇa grown old in vain; Commentary explains as tuccha-jiṇṇa Dhp-a iii.388) Dhp-a i.110 (patthanā a futile wish) Pv-a 194
    • O
    • past participle amogha SN i.232 Ja vi.26 Dhp-a ii.34 (˚ṁ tassa jīvitaṁ: not in vain)
    1. ˚purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin iv.126 144
    the Vedic mogha for the later Sanskrit moha, which is the Pali noun moha; from muh. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit mohapuruṣa e.g. at Avs ii.177; MVastu iii.440
    Moca1
    1. the plantain or banana tree’ Musa, sapientum Vin i.246 (˚pāna drink made from M. s. one of the 8 permitted drinks) Ja iv.181 Ja v.405 Ja v.465
    cp. * Sanskrit moca & mocā
    Moca2
    1. delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana
    root-noun of moc, causative of muc
    Mocana
    neuter
    1. setting free, delivering Dhp-a iii.199 (parissayā˚); Dhtp 376, 539; Dhtm 609. cp. moca2
    2. letting loose, discharging, in assu˚; shedding tears Pv-a 18 cp. vi˚
    from moceti
    Mocaya
    adjective
    1. to be freed, able to escape, in dum˚; difficult to obtain freedom Ja vi.234
    quâsi gerundive formation from moceti
    Mocāpana
    neuter
    1. causing one’s freedom, deliverance Ja vi.134
    from causative II. mocāpeti
    Mocetar
    1. one who sets free, a deliverer Nd1 32
    M. ag. from moceti
    Moceti
    1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one’s release or deliverance from ablative. imper praes. mocehi Pv ii.16 (duggatiyā) Pv-a 12
    2. aorist mocesi Pv-a 112 (dāsavyato);
    3. absolutive mocetvā Pv-a 8 Pv-a 77; inf mocetuṁ Pv-a 45 (petalokato)
    4. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin iii.36 39 (as Caus II.), 110
    5. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaṁ m. to run Ja iii.33

      • to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaṁ one’s promise Dhp-a i.93

    6. to unharness Dhp-a i.67

      • to detach SN i.44
      • causative II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin iv.316 (opposite bandhāpeti)
    causative of muñcati
    Moṭa
    1. ‣See mutoḷī
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit moṭa, Prakrit mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238
    Motar
    1. one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase “mutaṁ na maññati motabbaṁ (so read) na maññati motāraṁ” he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed nor with what is to be sensed motabba nor with him who senses AN ii.25 where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage MN i.3
    agent noun from munāti, more likely direct derived from muta, past participle of man, q.v.
    Modaka
    1. a sort of sweetmeat SN i.148 AN i.130 AN iii.76 Pug 32 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like Ja vi.385 (paṇṇaṁ ˚assa anto pakkhipitvā). May however, be same ạs 1
    2. cp. Epic. Sanskrit modaka in meaning 1
    Modati
    1. to rejoice, to enjoy oneself, to be happy AN iii.40 Snp 561 Pv i.54 ii.121. past participle mudita (q.v.) For mohayamāna at Dhp-a i.275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr.
    2. medium mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose
    Modana
    neuter
    1. satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. cp. sam˚;
    from mud
    Modanā
    feminine
    1. blending (?); Cy. explanation at Dhs-a 143 of term āmodanā
    from mud
    Modara
    1. : In modara at Ja v.54 (of elephant’s teeth) Kern, Toevoegselen s.v ‣Sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C explanation is “samantato obhāsento,” i.e. shining
    Mona
    neuter
    1. wisdom, character, self-possession Snp 540 (˚patha = ñāṇa-patha Snp-a 435), 718, 723 Nd1 57 Nd2 514 AN (= ñāṇa & paññā) Thag 1, 168 (what is monissaṁ? future 1st singular of ?)
    2. from muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya
    Moneyya
    neuter
    1. state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya˚, vacī˚ mano˚ ‣See under muni, e.g. at DN iii.220 AN i.273 Nd1 57 Nd2 514 AN (where also used as adjective: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). cp. also Snp 484 Snp 698 Snp 700f. On moneyya-kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) ‣See the latter
    from muni, cp. Vedic moneya
    Momūha

    adjective

    1. dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp Compendium 833) DN i.27 AN iii.164f. Snp 840 Snp 841 Snp 1120 Nd1 153 (= manda), 192 Nd2 521 (= avidvā etc.) Pug 65
    intens reduplicated formation from moha & muh
    Momūhatta
    neuter
    1. silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind MN i.520 AN iii.119 AN iii.191 AN iii.219 (= mandatta) Pug 69
    abstract from momūha
    Mora
    1. [the contracted, regular Pali form of * Sanskrit mayūra, viâ *ma-ūra → mora ‣See also Geiger, Pali Grammar § 27 Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 166
    • Vedic only mayūrī
    • feminine pea-hen a peacock Ja ii.275 (˚upasevin ‣See Commentary on this passage) vi.218, 497 Pv-a 142 Dhp-a i.394 A peacock’s tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in various terms in compounds., as mora-kalāpa Dhp-a i.387
    • ˚piccha Vin i.186
    • ˚piñcha Vin ii.130
    • ˚pīñja Pv-a 142 Pv-a 176 Vv-a 147
    • ˚sikali (?) Kp-a 49
    • ˚hattha Vv 3344 (= mayūra-piñjehi kataṁ makasa-vījaniṁ); Pv iii.117. Perhaps also as morakkha “a peacock’s eye” at Vb-a 63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted from *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) designation (cp. murala), then by popular etymology connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sanskrit moraka “a kind of steel” BR
    Moragu
    1. a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin i.196
    cp. (scientific) Sanskrit mayūraka
    Morinī
    feminine
    1. a peahen Mil 67
    from mora
    Moli
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. a chignon; crest, turban Ja i.64 Ja v.431 Mhvs 11, 28 DN-a i.136 (variant reading moḷi). Also found (as molin, adjective?) in Np Yama-moli ‣See under yakkha 5
      1. ˚galla (?) fat Vin i.85 (explained by thūla-sarīra; variant readings moḷi˚ & mukalla)
      2. ˚baddha one who has his hair tied into a top-knot 128, 243, 348
      cp. Epic Sanskrit mauli, from mūla
    Mosa
    1. (˚-) (adjective
    • nt.)

    belonging to or untruth, false-; only in compounds

  • ˚dhamma of a deceitful nature, false,. AN v.84 (kāma) Snp 739 Snp 757 & -vajja from musā-vāda
    1. false-speaking, lie, untruth SN i.169 Snp 819 Snp 866 Snp 943 Nd1 152 265 Nd2 515 Vv 126
    the guṇa (compound) form of musā
  • Mosalla
    adjective
    1. worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable AN ii.241
    from musala
    Moha
    1. stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion bewilderment, infatuation DN iii.146, 175, 182, 214, 270 Vin iv.144 145 Snp 56 Snp 74 Snp 160 Snp 638 Snp 847 Vb 208 341 391, 402 Pug 16 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 108, 122, 259
    • Defined as “dukkhe aññāṇaṁ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha avijj’ ogha etc.,” by Nd2 99 & Vb 362 as “muyhanti tena, sayaṁ vā muyhati, muyhana-mattaṁ eva vā tan ti moho” and “cittassa andha-bhāva-lakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā” at Vism 468
    • Often coupled with rāga & dosa; as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path ‣See under rāga (& Nd; 2 p. 237, s.v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). cp. the 3 fires: rāg-aggi, dos-aggi, moh-aggi Iti 92 DN iii.217 also rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚ Vb-a 31 sq
    • On combination with rāga, lobha & dosa ‣See dosa; 2 and lobha
    • On term ‣See also Dhs translation §§ 33, 362, 441 Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146
    • See further DN i.80 (samoha-cittaṁ) Nd1 15 16 (with lobha & dosa) Vv-a 14 Pv-a 3
    • amoha absence of bewilderment Vb 210 (+ alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala-mūlāni: cp. mūla 3) 402 (identical, as kusala-hetu)
    • cp. pa˚, sam˚
    1. ˚antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (literally having m. inside) Snp 478 (taken by Commentary as "cause of m.,” i.e. ˚kāraṇa, ˚paccaya Snp-a 411 cp. antara = kāraṇa under antara i.2 b.)
    2. ˚ussada quality of dullness Nd1 72 413
    3. ˚kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vb 73 Vb-a 51
    • ˚carita one whose habit is infatuation Nett 90 (+ rāgacarita & dosacarita)
    • ˚tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1
    • ˚dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Snp 276
    • ˚pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv iv.334
    • ˚magga being on the road of infatuation Snp 347
    • ˚salla the sting of bewilderment Nd1 59
    from muh ‣See muyhati; cp. Sanskrit moha & Vedic mogha
    Mohatta
    neuter
    1. infatuation, bewilderment AN ii.120 AN iii.376
    abstract from moha
    Mohana
    neuter
    1. making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Snp 399 Snp 772 (= mohanā vuccanti pañca kāmaguṇā Nd1 26). The Sanskrit meaning is also “sexual intercourse” (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Snp passages Snp-a 517 (on Snp 772) explains “mohanaṁ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva-manussā muyhanti.”
    from muh as causative formn
    Mohanaka
    adjective
    1. leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin iv.144 Mohaneyya & Mohaniya;
    from mohana
    Mohaneyya
    Mohanīya;
    adjective
    1. leading to infatuation AN ii.120 AN iii.110 Ja iii.499
    gerundive formn from moha
    Moheti
    to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aorist 2; nd singular amohayi Snp 352 3rd singular amohayi SN iv.158 Iti 58 (maccu-rājan; variant readings asamohayi & asamohari) reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Snp 1076 with “sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu” (variant reading samoha˚).
    1. -3rd singular (poet.) also amohayittha Snp 332 (mā vo pamatte viññāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge cp. Snp ed. p. 58)
    • On mohayamāna Dhp-a i.275 ‣See modati
    1. Y
    causative from muh ‣See muyhati & cp. moha

    Y

    -Y-
    1. combination consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2 vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of “gliding or semi-vowel within a word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more openly felt than in the written language, e.g. pari-y-āpanna (Pāli) corresponds to Sanskrit pary-āpanna, similarly pari-y-osāna = Sanskrit paryosāna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay-imā disā DN iii.188 ta-y-idaṁ Snp 1077 Pv i.33 tava-y-idaṁ Snp 352 na-y-idaṁ SN ii.278 mama-y-idaṁ Snp 806 na-y-idha Snp 790 mā-y-idha Vin i.54 yassay-etādisī pajā DN ii.267 (variant reading ss for T yassa-s-etādisī) satiyā-y-etaṁ adhivacanaṁ MN ii.260 na-y-imassa Pv iv.12
    • After i before a: pāvisi-y-assamaṁ Ja v.405 khaṇi-y-asmani Ja iii.433 yā-y-aññaṁ Ja i.429 (where Commentary explains: ya-kāro paṭisandhi-karo)
    • cp. yeva for eva
    • Note. At Ja vi.106 ya-y-ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling ay for e being found elsewhere as well. cp. the following ta-y-ime jane
    Ya˚
    ;
    1. I. Forms. ‣See inflection also at Geiger, Pali Grammar § 110. The declension is similar to that of ta˚ among the more rarely found forms we only mention
    1. the following: singular nominative m. yo with by-form (in hiatus) yv- as yv’āyaṁ = yo ayaṁ MN i.258
    • yv'āssa = yo assa MN i.137 Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. An unsettled ya is to be found at Ja v.424 (Fausböll remarks “for yassā"?; perhaps to be combined with preceding pañcapatikā; Commentary on p. 427 explains ya-kāro nipātamatto)-ablative yasmā in
    • adverb use; yamhā Dhp 392

      • locative yamhi Dhp 261 Dhp 372 Dhp 393.
      • feminine locative yassaṁ AN iii.151 ‣See below ‣See further
      • adverb use of cases (below ii.5)
      • At Pv ii.16yāhi is doubtful (perhaps
      • imperative = yajahi, of yajati; Commentary leaves it unexplained)
      1. Special mention must be made of the neuter nominative accusative singular where both yaṁ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Vedic yat) has been felt more like ya + expletive (Sandhi-) d, and is principally found in
      2. adverb use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaṁ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taṁ ‣See more under II

        • A Māgadhized form is ye (after se = taṁ), found at DN ii.278 ‣See Geiger § 1052 & 110; 2. cp. Trenckner Note. 75.. The expression ye-bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad + bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (= sad + yathā, cp. sayathā sace, taṁyathā) ‣See refs. under yebhuyyena
        • The expression yevāpanaka is an adjective formn from the phrase ye-vā-pana (= yaṁ vā pana “whatever else there is”) i.e. belonging to something of the same kind, i.e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective ‣See s.v.-In
        • adverb use it often corresponds to English as; ‣See e.g. yad-icchakaṁ, yad-idaṁ (under ii.2 b ii.4 b.)
        1. II. Meaning: “which,” in correspondence to a following demonstrative pronoun (ta˚); whichever (generalizing);
        2. neuter what, whatever. In immediate combination with the demonstrative
        3. pronoun it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question ‣See below 4.

          1. 1. Regular use as correlative pronoun, when ya˚; (+ noun) is followed by ta˚; (+ noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e.g. at Iti 84 where ta˚; (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaṁ na jānāti yaṁ lobho sahate naraṁ “he does not know good, whom greed overcomes

            • Otherwise regular, e.g.: yassa jātarūparajataṁ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti SN iv.326 In a generalizing sense (cp. below ii.3): yo so “der erste beste,” some or other, whoever, any Ja iv.38 v.362; yaṁ vā taṁ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes Vv-a 208 yasmiṁ vā tasmiṁ vā on every occasion SN i.160 na yoso vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i.e. not any (ordinary) kind of Yakkha (but Inda DN-a i.264
            • The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the
            • neuter forms yaṁ & yad; in correlation to taṁ and tad ‣See sep. under Ii.2
            1. 2. Use of neuter forms.-(a)
            2. neuter yaṁ (a) as pronoun SN iii.44 (yaṁ dukkhaṁ … tad anattā) Iti 78 (yañ c’ aññaṁ whatever else) Vb-a 54 (yaṁ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taṁ sabbaṁ pucchitvā) ‣See also under 3 a (yaṁ kiñci, yaṁ yaṁ)

              • (b) as adjective
              • adverb : yaṁmukha facing what, turned where (?) Ja v.475 (but C reads & explains sammukha!); yaṁ-vipāka having what or which kind of fruit DN ii.209
              • yaṁ vā … yaṁ vā whether … or SN ii.179
              • yaṁ no … na tv’ eva neither … nor SN ii.179–⁠180
              • yaṁ with pot.: “so that,” that (corresponding to Latin ut consecutivum) SN iii.41 (yaṁ rūpe anatt’ ânu
              • passive vihareyya). Ja v.339 (n’ esa dhammo yaṁ taṁ jahe that I should leave you)
              • In the function of other conjunctions e.g. as temporal when, since, after: Ja iv.319 (yaṁ maṁ Suruci-m-ānayi that, or since, Suruci married me). As
              • conditional or causal = if, even if, because: Vin i.276 (yaṁ te sakkā.. arogaṁ kātuṁ, taṁ karohi if it is possible … do it; or may be taken in sense of “in whatever way you can do it, do”) Ja iii.206 = iv.4 (yaṁ me sirasmiṁ ūhacca cakkaṁ bhamati matthake = because; Commentary yena pāpena)
              • (c) as
              • adverb deictive “so,” in combination with various other (emphatic) particles as e.g. yaṁ nūna used in an exhortative sense “well, now”; or “rather, let me” or “so now,” always in phrase yaṁ nūn’ āhaṁ “now then let me” (do this or that) very frequently, either with following pot., e.g. “y. n. âhaṁ araññaṁ paviseyyaṁ Dhp-a ii.91 “y. n. â. katakammaṁ puccheyyaṁ Vv-a 132 dasseyyaṁ Vv-a 138 pabbajjeyyaṁ MN ii.55 āneyyaṁ Dhp-a i.46 vihareyyaṁ ibid. 56; etc. cp. Ja i.14 150, 255; iii.393 Dhp-a i.91 Pv-a 5 (avassayo bhaveyyaṁ)
              • Similarly yañ hi “well then, now then (with Pot.) SN ii.210 SN ii.221 (taṁ vadeyya). cp. yagghe yañ ca & yañ ce; Sanskrit yac ca, or cet, ca here = ce ‣See ca & cp. sace = sa + ce
              1. (rather) than that: yañ ca Thag 2 80 Ja i.210
              • yañce (with Pot.) SN i.176 Iti 43 Thag 1, 666 sangāme me mataṁ seyyo yañ ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Snp 440 (cp. the intricate explanation at Snp-a 390); similarly Ja iv.495: me maraṇaṁ seyyo yañ ce jīve tayā vinā

                • (b)
                • neuter yad : (a) as pron in regular relative use e.g. SN iii.44 (yad aniccaṁ taṁ dukkhaṁ) Iti 59 (yad eva diṭṭhaṁ tad ev’ âhaṁ vadāmi). (b) as
                • adverb, e.g. yad-agge (
                • locative ) from what on, i.e. from which time, since what time DN i.152 (= mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaṁ divasaṁ aggaṁ patvā DN-a i.311) Vv 8433 (= yato paṭṭhāya Vv-a 344) Also as yad-aggena instrumental Vin ii.257 (y. Mahāpajāpati-gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā) Vb-a 387
                • yad-atthaṁ for what, why Thag 2, 163
                • yad-atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Thag 1, 12 1274 (“which, for the goal desirous, he led” translation refers to brahmacariyaṁ). The same verse occurs at Snp 354 The latter passage is mentioned in P.D under atthiya with meaning “on account of what (cp. kim-atthiyaṁ SN iii.189). The Snp passage is not explained in Snp-a
                • yad-icchakaṁ whatever is pleasant i.e. according to liking, as he pleases AN iii.28 Pug 11 12 Ja i.141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism 154 (+ yavadicchaka) Vv-a 341 cp. yen’ icchakaṁ below Ii.5-yad-icchita ‣See under yathā-icchita! -yadidaṁ ‣See below Ii.4 b
                1. 3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya˚; yassa yass’ eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muñcati pupphāni; “at the foot of whichever tree you stand he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers” Vv 393 yaṁ yaṁ hi manaso piyaṁ “whatever is pleasant to the senses” Pv ii.118; yaṁ yaṁ passati taṁ taṁ pucchati “whomsoever he ‣Sees, him he asks” Ja iii.155 yassaṁ yassaṁ disāyaṁ viharati, sakasmiṁ yeva vijite viharati” in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm” AN iii.151 yo yo yaṁ yaṁ icchati tassa tassa adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him Pv-a 113 yaṁ yaṁ padesaṁ bhajati tattha tatth’ eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati “whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success” Dhp-a ii.82-(b) by combination with ko-ci (cp. the identical Latin qui-cun-que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaṁ vuccati … “the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so” Iti 56 yāni kānici vatthūni … sabbāni tāni … Iti 19 ye keci ārabbha “with reference to whosoever” Pv-a 17 yaṁ kiñci whatever Pv i.41
                1. 4. Dependent & elliptic; use of ya (with pron demonstrative). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with reference to what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being saidentical Thus it introduces a general truth or definition as we would say “just this, namely, i.e.,” or German “so wie, und zwar."-(a) The usual combinations are those of ya + sa (neuter taṁ) and of ya + ayaṁ (
                2. neuter idaṁ), but such with amu (
                3. neuter aduṁ) also occur: yaṁ aduṁ khettaṁ aggaṁ evam eva mayhaṁ bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo “as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh & bhikkhunīs” SN iv.315 cp. the following: ya + sa e. g at M. i.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaṁ rukkhaṁ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya “just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly”) Ja ii.159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means) Pv i.91 (yā tā [so read for yā ca! “just she over there; who as such, i.e. such as she is”) cp. also the following: yā sā sīmā … taṁ sīmaṁ Vin i.109 ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc…. sātthaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti tathā rūpā ’ssa dhammā honti.. MN iii.11 yāni etāni yānāni (just) these Dhp-a iv.6-ya + ayaṁ e.g. at MN i.258 (yv’ āyaṁ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra … vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti) Iti 35 = 93 (nibbāpenti moh'aggiṁ paññāya yā 'yaṁ nibbedha-gāminī “as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating”) Vin iv.134 (ye 'me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā … te paṭisevato n’ âlaṁ antarāyāya “just those which, or whichever”) Thag 1, 124 (panko ti hi naṁ avedayuṁ yâyaṁ vandanapūjanā; here = yā ayaṁ) Dhp 56 (appamatto ayaṁ gandho yâyaṁ tagara-candanī; here = yo ayaṁ) MN ii.220 (yaṁ idaṁ kammaṁ … taṁ)

                  • (b)
                  • neuter yadidaṁ literally “as that,” which is this (i.e. the following) may be translated by “viz.,” that is, “i.e.” in other words, so to speak, just this, “I mean”; e.g. kāmānaṁ etaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yad idaṁ nekkhammaṁ “there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness”; or: “this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness Iti 61 dve dānāni āmisa˚ dhamm˚, etad aggaṁ imesaṁ yad idaṁ dhamma˚ “this is the best of them, I mean dh-d.” Iti 98 = 100; supaṭipanno sāvaka-sangho, y. i cattāri purisa-yugāni etc. MN i.37 Instead of yadidaṁ we also find yāvañ c’ idaṁ ‣See also examples given under yāvatā
                  1. 5. Cases used adverb ially: Either locally or modally with regards to the local
                  2. adverb s it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. English where both meanings = where & where-to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) instrumental; yena : (local where (i.e. at which place) DN i.71 (yena yena wherever) 220 (yattha yena yahiṁ = whence, where, whither; not with translationDialogues of the Buddha i.281: where, why, whence!), 238 (identical) yenatena where (he was)-there (he went) DN i.88 DN i.106 112 & passim; cp. DN ii.85 (yena âvasath’ âgāraṁ ten upasankami) AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or “hither & thither”)

                    • (modal) Dhp 326 (yen’ icchakaṁ ii.2 b.) Pv i.112 (kiṁ akattha pāpaṁ yena pivātha lohitaṁ: so that)
                    • locative yahiṁ where (or whither) Vv 8429 (yahiṁ yahiṁ gacchati tahiṁ tahiṁ modati); & yasmiṁ yasmiṁ vā tasmiṁ vā on every occasion SN i.160
                    • abl yasmā (only modal) because AN i.260 Iti 37 (corresponding to tasmā). On yasmā-t-iha ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar 735
                    pronoun rel. base; Vedic yaḥ; cp. Gothic jabai if,-ei relative participle. An amplification of the dem pronoun base *i-, *ei-(cp. ayaṁ) ‣See on detail Brugmann “Die indogerm. Pronomina” in Ber. d. sächs Ges. LX. 41 sq.
    Yakana
    neuter
    1. the liver Kh iii. MN i.57 MN i.421 DN ii.293 AN v.109 Mil 26 Vism 257 356 Vb-a 60 240. The old n-stem is to be seen in cpd yaka-peḷa (q.v.) Yaka-pela
    from genitive yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan-of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Avestan yākars; Latin jecur. In formation cp. Pali chakana from Vedic śakṛt.
    Yaka-peḷa
    1. the lump of the liver Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = J i.146. Dines Andersen suggests: “Could y
    • p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa cp. Sanskrit śaka-piṇḍa & śakṛt-piṇḍa?” cp. paṭala (reference Vism 257). Ya-kara
    ‣See peḷa
    Ya-kāra
    1. the letter (or sound) y: Ja i.430 (padasandhikara); iii.433 (vyañjana-sandhi-vasena gahita)
    2. the letter (or syllable) ya: Ja v.427 (nipāta-matta). It is referred to at Vin iv.7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending ˚bha. The Cy. means words like dāsiya gumbiya, bālya etc. where-ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for-ka as diminutive (i.e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to ˚bha Here at Vin iv.7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -ya- or -bha to his name (cp. English
    3. y in kid → kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā)
    ya + kāra
    Yakkha

    1. Name of certain non-human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i.e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many “successful” or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (‣ See also below). They correspond to our “genii” or fairies of the fairy-tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others and of different origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features ‣See on term e.g. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.;
    2. past participle 39–⁠44
    3. They are sometimes called devatā : SN i.205 or devaputtā : Pv-a 113 Pv-a 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q.v.)

      1. 2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. German Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like “tutelary genii” or even “angels” (i.e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv iv.1). They also act as guides in the “inferno”: Pv iv.11, cp. iv.3. A somewhat dangerous “Mentor” is represented at DN i.95 where the y Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Buddhaghosa (DN-a i.264 says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y. but as Sakka the king of devas
      • Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas DN ii.147 (ākiṇṇa-yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra-mundane beings), cp. Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mhvs 7, 33
      • Often however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evil-natured than the male ‣See under yakkhinī. They eat flesh and blood: Ja iv.549 devour even men: DN ii.346 Ja ii.15
      1. -17, or corpses: Ja i.265 mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at AN iii.256 A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud 4
      1. 3. Var. classes of y. are enumerated at DN ii.256 DN ii.257 in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at AN ii.38 they are mentioned with devas rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah'oragas at Ja v.420 According to Vv-a 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men ‣See below 7 go by the name of yakkha
      • Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: Ja iv.4 DN-a i.264 Some are spirits of trees (rukkha-devatā): Ja iii.309 345; Pv i.9; ii.9 Pv-a 5 are also called bhumma-devā (earthly deities) Pv-a 45 Pv-a 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees Pv ii.9; iv.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea-faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy-palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural witchcraft. cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried-up river bed (Pv i.9 ii.12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake-districts of the Himavant in Vv ‣See Stede Peta Vatthu translation p. 104 sq
      1. 4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e.g. Khara “Rough-skin” or “Shaggy” Snp p. 48 (= khara-samphassaṁ cammaṁ Snp-a 302), also as Khara-loma “Rough-hair” Vism 208; Khara- dāṭhika “Rough-tooth” Ja i.31
      • Citta “Speckled” Mhvs 9 22; 10, 4; also as Citta-rājā Ja ii.372 Mhvs 10, 84 Silesa-loma “Sticky-hair” Ja i.273
      • Sūci-loma “Needlehair” Snp p. 47, 48 SN i.207 Vism 208 Snp-a 302

        • (b places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e.g. Ajakalāpaka “Goat-bundle” Ud 1
        • Āḷavaka “Forest-dweller” Ja iv.180 Ja vi.329 Mhvs 30, 84: Vism 208. Uppala “Lotus” Dhp-a iv.209
        • Kakudha “K
        • tree” (Terminalia arjuna) SN i.54
        • Kumbhīra “Crocodile” Ja vi.272
        • Gumbiya either “One of a troop” (soldier of Yama) or “Thicket-er (from gumba thicket) Ja iii.200 Ja iii.201
        • Disāmukha “ Sanskrit -facer” Dhp-a iv.209
        • Yamamoli “Yamachignon Dhp-a iv.208
        • Vajira “Thunderbolt” Dhp-a iv.209 alias Vajira-pāṇī DN i.95 or Vajira-bāhu Dhp-a iv.209
        • Sātāgira “Pleasant-mount” DN ii.256 Snp 153 Ja iv.314 vi.440. Serīsaka “Acacia-dweller” Vv-a 341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa)
        • (c) qualities of character, e.g. Adhamma “Unrighteous” Mil 202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha “Well-wisher” Dhp-a iv.209
        • Dhamma “Righteous” Mil 202 (= Bodhisatta) Puṇṇaka “Full(-moon?)” Ja vi.255f. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the “Tempter Snp 449 SN i.122 MN i.338
        • Sakata “Waggon-load (of riches) Dhp-a iv.209-(d) embodiments of former persons, e.g. Janavasabha “Lord of men” DN ii.205
        • Dīgha MN i.210
        • Naradeva Ja vi.383 Ja vi.387
        • Paṇḍaka “Eunuch” Mhvs 12, 21. Sīvaka SN i.241 = Vin ii.156
        • Serī “Self-willed” SN i.57
        • cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs
        1. 5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas They are often the direct servants (messengers of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta-realm especially). cp. DN ii.257 DN iii.194f. Ja iv.492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa) vi.255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V.) Vv-a 341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 cp. proper name Yamamolī Dhp-a iv.208
        • In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp Pv ii.922) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men ‣See e.g. the frame story to Pv ii.11 (Pv-a 145), and to iv.12 (Pv-a 274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute; kāma-kāmin Pv i.33 Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah’ iddhika (Pv ii.910 Ja vi.118) Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv i.2; i.9; ii.11; iv.317. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: Ja iv.492 their eyes are red & do not wink Ja v.34 Ja vi.336 Ja vi.337
        • Their abode is their self-created palace Vimāna, which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc ‣See under vimāna. Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e.g. Āḷakamandā DN ii.147 Sirīsa-vatthu (in Ceylon) Mhvs 7 32
        1. 6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the “Dhamma.” In this respect many of them are “fallen angels” and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saṁsāra cp. DN iii.194 DN iii.195 Ja ii.17 Vv-a 333 Pv ii.810 (where “yakkha” is explained by Dhammapāla as “pet-attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataṁ jāto dev-attabhāvaṁ patto” Pv-a 110) Snp-a 301 (both Sūciloma Khara converted)
        • See in general also the following passages: Snp 153 Snp 179 Snp 273 Snp 449 SN i.206
        1. -15 AN i.160 Vism 366 (in simile) Mil 23

        7. Exceptionally the term “yakkha” is used as a philosophical term denoting the “individual soul cp. similar Vedic meaning “das lebendige Ding (B.R.) at several AV. passages

        1. ; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Snp 478 quoted Vv-a 333 (ettāvat’ aggaṁ no vadanti h’ eke yakkhassa sudhiṁ idha paṇḍitāse) Snp 875 (cp. Nd1 282: yakkha = satta, nara, puggala manussa)
        1. ˚ānubhāva the potency of a yakkha Ja i.240
        • ˚āviṭṭha possessed by a y. Ja vi.586
        • ˚iddhi (yakkh˚) magic power of a y. Pv-a 117 Pv-a 241
        • ˚gaṇa the multitude of ys. Ja vi.287
        • ˚gaha = following Dhp-a iii.362
        • ˚gāha “yakkha-grip,” being seized by a y. SN i.208 Pv-a 144
        • ˚ṭṭhāna the dwelling-place of a y
        • ˚dāsī “a female temple slave,” or perhaps “possessed by a demon (?) Ja vi.501 (Burmese variant devatā-paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586 yakkh’ āviṭṭhā.) -nagara city of ys. Ja ii.127 (= Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca-nagara
        • ˚pura identical Mhvs 7.32 -bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd1 448
        • ˚bhūta a yakkha-being, a ghost Pv iii.52 (= pisāca-bhūta vā yakkha-bh. vā Pv-a 198); iv.135
        • ˚mahiddhi = ˚iddhi Pv iv.154
        • ˚yoni the y

          • world, realm of the y. Snp-a 301
          • ˚samāgama meeting of the y. Pv-a 55 (where also devaputtā join)
          • ˚sūkara a y. in the form of a pig Vb-a 494
          • ˚senā army of ys. DN iii.194 Snp-a 209
          • ˚senāpati chief-commander of the yakkha-army Ja iv.478 Snp-a 197
          Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also “ghost”; from yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures changing their abode quickly and at will The customary (popular) etymology of Pali Commentators is y. as quâsi
        • gerundive of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given ‣See e.g. Vv-a 224: yajanti tattha baliṁ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or Vv-a 333: pūjanīya-bhavato yakkho ti vuccati
        • The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.
    Yakkhatta
    neuter
    1. condition of a higher demon or yakkha DN ii.57 AN ii.39 Pv-a 117
    from yakkha
    Yakkhinī
    feminine
    1. a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man-& beast-murder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enum; d under yakkha 4
    • Vin iii.37 iv.20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus) SN i.209 (Piyankara-mātā) Ja i.240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; ii.127; iii.511; v.21 (eating a baby) 209 (eaten by a y.); vi.336 (desirous of eating a child) Vism 121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyankara-mātā, Uttaramātā Phussa-mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile) Mhvs 7, 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i.e. bad-coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā “Charming” or from harita “green” (?)) Dhp-a i.47 Dhp-a ii.35 36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. AN by-form of yakkhinī is yakkhī
    1. ˚bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī Ja i.240 Ja ii.128 (yakkhini˚)
    from yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, feminine of yakṣin; adjective persecuting, taking vengeance, applied to Varuṇa at RV. vii.884
    Yakkhī
    feminine
    1. = yakkhinī SN i.11 Vin iii.121 Vin iv.20 Ja iv.492 Mhvs 7, 26
    direct formation from yakkha, like petī from peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)
    Yagghe
    indeclinable
    1. hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2; nd jāneyyāsi, or 3rd singular jāneyya; to be translated somewhat like “look here, don't you know, surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to participle yaṁ nu, yaṁ nūna & yaṁ hi; . The participle is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. English g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin i.237 yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso … so … pabbajito do you know, Oh king DN i.60 (translation: “if it please your majesty, do you know …” DN-a i.169 explains as “codan’ atthe nipāto”) y. ayye jāneyyāsi MN ii.62 mahārāja j. MN ii.71 id SN i.101 y. bhavan jāneyya SN i.180
    • The passage MN ii.157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the indicative and in various forms ‣See variant reading of yagghi & taggha “jānanti pana bhonto yagghe …,” with reply “na jānāma yagghe …” Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable
    similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q.v.) It is yaṁ (yad) + gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha (= tad + gha only occurs as such
    Yajati

    1. to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaṁ); to give alms or gifts-In the Pali literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu ‣See enumerated under yañña. The latter use is by far the more frequent
    • The construction is with the
    • accusative of the deity honoured and the instrumental of the gift
    • Pres yajati DN i.139 AN i.168 AN ii.43 AN ii.44 Snp 505 Snp 509 DN-a i.160
    • ppr. yajanto DN i.52 MN i.404 Mil 21 gen
    • plural yajataṁ Snp 569 (= Vin i.246 where reading is jayataṁ)
    • ppr.
    • medium yajamāna DN i.138 (mahayaññaṁ) Snp 506 SN i.233 Ja vi.502 Ja vi.505
    • imper 3rd singular yajatu DN-a i.297
    • medium yajataṁ DN i.138 (= detu bhavaṁ DN-a i.300). 2nd singular yajāhi Ja iii.519 Pv-a 280 and perhaps at Pv ii.16 (for Text yāhi). 2nd
    • medium yajassu Snp 302 Snp 506 Ja v.488 (yaññaṁ), 490 (identical)-Pot. 1st sg yajeyyaṁ DN i.134 3rd
    • plural yajeyyuṁ Ja vi.211 Ja vi.215 3rd singular
    • medium yajetha Dhp 106 (māse māse sahassena yo y. = dānaṁ dadeyya Dhp-a ii.231), 108 Iti 98 AN ii.43 Snp 463
    • future 2nd singular yajissasi Ja iii.515 1st sg yajissāmi Ja vi.527 (pantha-sakuṇaṁ tuyhaṁ maṁsena) 3rd
    • plural yajissanti Ja iv.184 1st
    • plural yajissāma Ja vi.132
    • aorist 1st singular yajiṁ Thag 1, 341 3rd singular ayajī Iti 102
    • yaji Mil 219 Mil 221
    • infinitive yajituṁ Mil 220
    • yiṭṭhuṁ DN i.138 (yiṭṭhu-kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuṁ in ˚kāma DN ii.244 Snp 461
    • absolutive yajitvā DN i.143 AN ii.44 Snp 509 Ja vi.137 (puttehi), 202; Pv ii.956 (datvā + , i.e. spending liberally; cp. Pv-a 136); yajitvāna Snp 303 Snp 979
    • gerundive yajitabba Ja vi.133 (sabbacatukkena).
    • past participle yajita & yiṭṭha; .
    • causative I. yājeti
    • causative II. yajāpeti (q.v.)
    yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur-veda. To Avestan yaƶaitē to sacrifice. On etymology cp. also Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. aestimo The Dhtp (62) defines root by “deva-pūjā, sangati-karaṇa dānesu,” i.e. “said of deva-worship, of assembling and of gifts.” Similarly Dhtm 79
    Yajana
    neuter
    1. the act of sacrificing Ja iii.518 Ja vi.133 cp. i.72 Vism 224 Pv-a 135
    late formation from yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña
    Yajanaka
    adjective
    1. one who sacrifices Ja vi.133
    from yajana
    Yajāpeti
    1. to cause a sacrifice to be held AN i.168 (yajati +)
    causative II. of yajati
    Yajita
    1. sacrificed Mil 219 Ja iv.19
    past participle of yajati
    Yajubbeda
    1. the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Mil 178 DN-a i.247 Snp-a 447 As yajuveda at Dīpavaṁsa v.62, where the 3 Vedas are enumerated as iruveda yaju˚ and sāma˚
    from Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula, + veda
    Yañña
    1. a brahmanic sacrifice
    2. almsgiving charity, a gift to the Sangha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of “offering,” so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were self-understood definition of yañña is at Nd2 523 given with “yañño vuccati deyyadhammo,” and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumerated; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya cp. Nd1 373
    3. The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DN-a i.204
      1. -207), is also used in the meaning of “accessory instrument” concerning the brahmanic sacrifice ‣See D i.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras as follows: (4) cattāro anumati-pakkhā viz the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhangāni of a king-sacrificer; (4) cattār’ angāni of a purohita. The term mahāyañña refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at MN ii.204 Dhs-a 145 cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yañña is also used at Pv ii.950 (cp. Pv-a 134). The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice e.g. Ja iii.518f.; vi.211 sq., & cp. Fick,; Sociale Gliederung p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls and even men were offered: Ja i.335 Ja iii.44 Ja iii.45 Pv-a 280 The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness completeness, or harmony, as we find it frequently, in the notion of the square with reference to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness magic, as attached e.g. to cross-roads. cp. the Ep of niraya (Purgatory) “catu-dvāra” (especially at Pv i.10) ‣See compounds. of catur
      • It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv i.4)
      1. The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of “gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, alms-giving.” cp. Snp 295 Snp 461 Snp 484 Snp 1043 At Vv 3426 the epithets “su-dinna, su-huta, su-yiṭṭha” are attributed to dāna
      • The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i.e. the Sangha: cp. opening stanza Pv; i1 are similarly enumerated under yañña (or yaññapatha) as “ye yaññaṁ (viz. cīvaraṁ etc.) esanti” those who wish for a gift, “ye yaññaṁ abhisankharonti” those who get it ready, and “ye yaññaṁ denti” those who give it, at Nd2 70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of “yañña” (= cīvara etc.), “yaññayājaka” (= khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men ‣See Nd2 p. 129 s.v. khattiya, quoted under janab), and “dakkhiṇeyya” (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇa-brāhmaṇā, kapaṇ'addhikā vanibbakā yācakā) at Nd2 449b (under puthū)
      • cp. the following (mixed) passages: DN i.97 DN i.128
      1. -144 (brahmanic criticised); ii.353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable criticised) MN i.82 (brahm.) SN i.76 SN i.160 SN ii.42f. 63 207; iii.337; iv.41 AN i.166 AN ii.43 (nirārambhaṁ yaññaṁ upasankamanti arahanto, cp. Dhs-a 145) Snp 308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.) Thag 1, 341 Ja i.83 Ja i.343 Ja iii.517 (˚ṁ yajati; brahm.); iv.66; v.491 492; vi.200 (yañña-kāraka-brāhmaṇa), 211 sq. DN-a i.267 Dhp-a ii.6
      1. ˚āgāra a hall for sacrifices Pug 56 (= yañña-sālā PugA 233)
      2. ˚āvāṭa the sacrificial pit DN i.142 DN i.148 Ja i.335 Ja iii.45 Ja iii.517 Ja vi.215 (where reading yaññavāṭa cp. yaññavāṭaka at cp. i.72). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s.v., and it seems more to the sense to read yañña-vāṭa for yanñ’ āvāṭa, i.e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for ˚āvāṭa
      3. ˚kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice DN i.137 Snp 458 Snp 482 DN-a i.297
      • ˚upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice SN i.168 (translation Kindred Sayings 211 not quite to the point: “the oblation is brought.” Reading is uncertain; variant reading ˚opanīta which may be read as opavīta “wearing the sacrificial cord” ‣See following)
      • ˚opavīta (?) ‣See upavīta

        in phrase yaññ’ opavīta-kaṇṭhā “having the (sacrificial, i.e.) alms-cord wound round their necks” Snp-a 92 (Burmese variant yaññ-opacita-kammā). cp. yañña-suttaka

      • ˚patha cp. patha2
        1. (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Snp 1045 Nd2 524 (yañño y’ eva vuccati yañña-patho) Ja vi.212 Ja vi.215
        • ˚vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice Ja vi.200
        • ˚vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice Ja vi.202
        • ˚sampadā success of the sacrifice DN i.128f. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144 Snp 505 Snp 509
        • ˚sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice DN i.143
        • ˚suttaka “sacrificial string,” i.e. alms-cord (the sign of a mendicant) Dhp-a ii.59 cp. above: ˚opavīta
        Vedic yajña, from yaj ‣See yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the Pali yajana
    Yaññatā
    feminine
    1. “sacrificiality,” the function or ceremony of a sacrifice Ja vi.202 (= yañña-vidhāna Commentary )
    abstract from yañña
    Yaṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. a staff, stick, pole MN iii.133 (tomara˚ goad) SN i.115 (pācana˚ driving stick, goad) Mil 2 Dhp-a iii.140 (kattara˚ a mendicant’s staff) Pv-a 241 Vb-a 241 (yantacakka˚); Mhvs 11, 10 (veḷu˚ a bamboo pole). 2. a stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu˚; sugarstick sugar-cane Dhp-a iii.315 (= ucchu-khaṇḍika at Vv 3326); iv.199
    2. a measure of length (= 7 ratanas) Vb-a 343
      1. ˚koṭi the end of the stick or staff Dhp-a i.15
      • ˚madhukā (“cane-sweetness”) liquorice Mhvs 32, 46 -luddaka “stick-hunter” at Ja iv.392 means a hunter with a lasso.
      cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi
    Yata
    1. held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful SN ii.15 SN ii.50 Snp 78 Snp 220 Snp 1079 (= yatta, paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd2 525) Ja vi.294 (Commentary appamatta; Kern Toevoegselen s.v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism 201 (?). especially in two phrases: yat-atta (yata + attan) selfcontrolled one whose heart is kept down DN i.57 (cp Dialogues of the Buddha i.75) Snp 216 Snp 490 Snp 723 DN-a i.168
    • yata-cārin living in self-restraint, living or behaving carefully Snp 971 (= yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd1 498) Mil 300 (+ samāhita-citta, where Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. proposes to read yatta-cārin for yata˚). A similar passage at Thag 1, 981 reads yathā-cārin (q.v. for further explanation). cp. saṁyata & ‣See also; yatta
    past participle of yam
    Yatati1
    1. to exert oneself, strive endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataṁ Iti 120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker translates “gezügelt,” thus taking it in meaning of yata). past participle yatta
    2. yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning “yatana,” by Dhtm 175 as “paṭiyatana”
    Yatati2
    1. is given in meaning of “lead out” (?) at Dhtp 580 (“niyyātane”) and Dhtm 813 (identical)
    unidentified, perhaps as explanation of yati?
    Yatana
    neuter
    1. endeavour, undertaking Ja v.346 (Commentary explains samosaraṇa-ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in explanation of yatati1)
    from yat, cp. Epic Sanskrit yatna
    Yati
    1. a Buddhist monk Mhvs 5, 37 (racchāgataṁ yatiṁ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā-dāyakaṁ yatiṁ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino) Dāvs iv.33 (yatī); Vism 79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaṁ yatī) Pv-a 287 (instrumental muni-vara-yatinā)
    from yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide
    Yato
    • adverb [the ablative case of ya˚, used as conjunction, cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which 1. (local) from where DN i.240 (uggacchanti candima-suriyā; opposite yattha where)
    • (temporal) whence since, when, from which time Vv-a 344 (yato paṭṭhāya)

  • (modal) from which, out of what cause because, in as far as DN i.36f. (yato … ettāvatā because … therefore); Snp p. 113 (identical) Dhp 374 Dhp 390 (doubled = from whichever source)

    • frequently in two combinations: yatvādhi-karaṇaṁ (yato + adhikaraṇaṁ) because (literally by reason of which; cp. kim-ādhikaraṇaṁ ‣See adhik.) DN i.70 DN i.113 MN i.269 Dhs 1346 cp. similarly Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yato adhikaraṇaṁ MVastu iii.52; and yato-nidānaṁ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because MN i.109 Snp 273 Snp 869 Pv iv.161 (cp. Pv-a 242)
    • Note. yaticchita at Pv-a 265 is to be read yadicchita
  • Yatta
    1. strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd2 525 (+ paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata) Ja iv.222 (+ paṭiyatta); vi.294 (Kern’s reading for yata; variant readings saṁyata & sata, thus warranting yata) Mil 373 (˚payatta), 378 (identical = in keen effort)
    • Note. Kern Toevoegselen s.v. would like to equal yatta = Sanskrit yatna effort
    past participle of yatati1
    Yattaka
    adjective
    1. however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta˚; or tattaka Ja v.74 (= yāvant); Vism 184 (yattakaṁ ṭhānaṁ gaṇhāti … tattakaṁ …), 293 (yattakā = yāvatā) DN-a i.118 (yattaka … tattaka as long as) Dhp-a ii.50 (˚ṁ kālaṁ as long), 128 Vb-a 73 (yattakaṁ ṭhānaṁ … tattakaṁ), 391 (yattakāni kusala-cittāni … tesaṁ sabbesaṁ) Vv-a 175 (yattakāni … tāni as many … so many, i.e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma … tesu sabbesu …) instrumental yattakena as
    2. adverb “because on account of” Dhp-a iii.383 393
    3. from yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80
    Yattha
    adverb
    1. rel. adverb of place “where,” at which spot occasionally “at which time,” when; with verbs of motion = “whereto.”- DN i.240 (whither) Snp 79 Snp 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning = “so that”) 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037 Dhp 87 Dhp 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp. Pv-a 104) 150, 171, 193, Pv-a 27

      • yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) Dhp-a iv.162 similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) AN ii.64
      • yattha kāmaṁ (cp. yathākāmaṁ in same meaning) where to one’s liking, i.e. wherever Dhp 35 (= yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati Dhp-a i.295 299), 326. Similarly we find yatth-icchakaṁ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaṁ and yāvadicchakaṁ at Vism 154
      the regular Pali form of Vedic yatra ‣See also Pali yatra
    Yatra
    adverb
    1. in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with future “as indeed, inasmuch as, that” SN ii.255 (ñāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ñassati etc.) Ja i.59 (dhir-atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paññāyissati “woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!”) Mil 13 (acchariyaṁ vata bho … y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto-parivitakkaṁ jānissati)
    2. the (older?) reconstituted Sanskrit form of Pali yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The Pali form is younger than the Vedic, as the Pali meaning is doubtful for the V. period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is
    3. adverb (of place or time) only
    Yathā
    adverb
    1. as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of)
    • As preposition (with
    • accusative ): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaṁ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking Pv-a 113 Pv-a 136; y. kālaṁ in time timely Pv-a 78
    • matiṁ to his own mind or intention Pv iv.167; ruciṁ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily Pv-a 88 Pv-a 126 Pv-a 242; vibhavaṁ
    • accusative to their wealth i.e. plentifully Pv-a 53
    • sukhaṁ as they liked or pleased Pv-a 133 Sometimes with
    • locative : yathā padese “according to place,” in the right place Ja iii.391 Or instrumental: y. sattiyā as much as you can Dhp-a i.92 y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42
    • Also with
    • absolutive yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward ‣See under compound ˚bhata) Iti 14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates “so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft”). With following adjective expressing something like “as it were” and often untranslateable ‣See compounds.-As conjunction: “as if,” or “so that” yathā mata like dead Dhp 21
    • yathā na “in order that not”: Vism 31 (y. sarīre ābādhaṁ na uppādeti, evaṁ tassa vinodan’ atthaṁ) Dhp-a i.311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaṁ na passāmi, tathā naṁ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not ‣See …, thus shall I throw him)
    • As
    • adverb just, as, so, even; in combination with other particles yathā kathaṁ pana how so then, how is it then that SN ii.283 (cp. yathā tathaṁ under compounds.); yathā kiṁ viya somewhat like this Mil 91 yathā pana like as Dhp-a i.158
    • yatha-r-iva (for yathā-iva) just as DN i.90 yathā pi … evaṁ just as … so Dhp 51–⁠52
    • yatha -yidaṁ (for yathā-idaṁ) positive: “as just this,” “so that,” “e.g.,” “like,” “i.e.”; after negation “but Iti 8 9 (na aññaṁ … yathayidaṁ) Snp 1092 (tvañ ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaṁ n’ âparaṁ siyā “so that there be no further ill”; cp. Snp-a 597) ‣See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaṁ
    • In correlation with; tathā : the same … as, like … as, as … so Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā-gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also “correctly, truly, in reality” Snp 504 (tvaṁ h’ ettha jānāsi y. t. idaṁ Pv-a 199 (y. t. vyākāsi) ‣See yathā-tathaṁ under compounds. About phrase yathā taṁ ‣See yathātaṁ
    • For further refs. on the use of yathā ‣See Indexes to Saṁyutta (S vi.81 s.v. yathābhūtaṁ) Anguttara (A. vi.91 ibid.); Sutta-Nipāta (Index p. 751) & Dhammapada
    1. ˚ānudhammaṁ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Snp 963 cp. Nd1 481
    2. ˚ānurūpa suitable proper Mhvs 28, 42
    3. ˚ānusiṭṭhaṁ in accordance with what has been taught Dhp-a i.158
    • ˚ābhirantaṁ (adv
    • neuter of ppr.) to (their) heart’s content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin iii.145 Snp 53 Dhp-a i.385 Vv-a 181
    • ˚āraddha = ālabdha
      1. as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin iii.160
      • ˚ārahaṁ
      • neuter
      • adverb as is fit or proper seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp Compendium 1111, 1182) SN i.226 Snp 403 Pv ii.923 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 132 (yathā codanaṁ variant reading SS), 287 Vv-a 139 So to be read at all Pv & Pv-a passages for Text yathā rahaṁ Very frequently in Mhvs. e.g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54 20, 8; 22, 58
      • ˚ālaṅkata dressed as he was, in full (state-) dress Dhp-a iii.79
      • ˚āvajjaṁ “as if to be blamed,” i.e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) DN i.7 (= kāṇakuṇi-khañj’ ādīnaṁ yaṁ yaṁ vajjaṁ taṁ taṁ payojetvā dassana-kīḷā DN-a i.86) Vin ii.10
      • ˚icchitaṁ according to one’s wish, as he liked, after his heart’s content Ja i.27 (v.188) = Bu ii.179; is preferably to be read as yad- icchitaṁ at all Pv-a passages, e.g. Pv-a 3 (˚ṁ dento) 110 (˚ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where Text has yat˚). The ed. of Mhvs however reads yath˚ throughout; e.g. 7, 22; 22, 50
      • ˚odhi as far as the limit, final utmost MN i.37 Ja iii.302
      • ˚odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60 (cp. Nd2 526) Ja iii.381 (Commentary not quite to the point with explanation “attano odhivasena ṭhitāni,” giving variant yatodhikāni, with explanation “yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata-koṭṭhāsāni”); iv.487 (with better Commentary explanation: “yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān eva jahissāmi, na kiñce avasissāmī ti attho”); v.392 (Commentary “yathāṭhita-koṭṭhasāni”)
      • ˚kamma (ṁ) according to one’s karma or action Ja i.57 Ja i.109 Ja iv.1 Freq in phrase yathā-kamm-ūpage satte (pajānāti) “(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing
      • future retribution)
      • accusative to their deeds” DN i.82 MN i.482 ii.21; iii.178 SN ii.122 AN iv.141 AN iv.178 AN iv.422 AN v.35 Snp 587 Iti 99 and yathā-kamm-ūpaga-ñāṇa “the knowledge of specific retribution” Vism 433 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 321 Vb-a 373f. (˚catuttha)
      • ˚kāmaṁ according to wish at random ‣See above; ˚ -karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i.e. a victim, prey SN ii.226 SN iv.91 SN iv.159 Iti 56
      • ˚kārin as he does Iti 122 (corresponding to tathāvādin)
      • ˚ kālaṁ according to time, in one time Mhvs 5 180
      • ˚kkamaṁ
      • accusative to order, in one order or succession Mhvs 4, 54; Sdhp 269
      • ˚cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by Commentary explanationyata kāyādīhi sanyati: ‣See Brethren, p. 342!) Thag 1, 981 (translation “Whoso according to his powers is virtuous”)
      • ˚ṭhita so-being, such such, as they are, as they were Ja v.392 Vv-a 256
      • ˚tathaṁ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā
      • adverb ‣See above) Iti 122 (here as nominative singular as he is in one respect, so in the other, i.e. perfect) Snp 1127 (= yathā ācikkhitabbaṁ tathā ācikkhi Nd2 527) Thag 1, 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. translation Psalms of the Brethren 292: “the truths are seen e'en as they really are”) Dīpavaṁsa iii.2 (so read for yathā-kathaṁ; variant reading has ˚tathaṁ) v.64 (pañhaṁ byākarohi yathātathaṁ)
      • ˚dhamma (used as adjective &
      • adverb ; ˚ṁ “one according to the law,” i.e. as the rule prescribes;
      • neuter according to the rule put down ‣See Vinaya Texts i.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. Vin i.135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā-dhammo kāretabbo) 168 (yo pavāreyya, y

        • dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y
        • dh. k.); ii.67 (ubho pi yathādhammaṁ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y
        • dhammo kāretabbo); iv.126 (yo jānaṁ (i.e. knowing) yathādhammaṁ nihat’ âdhikaraṇaṁ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya pācittiyan ti i.e. a dispute settled in proper form; with explanation: y
        • dhammaṁ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataṁ), 144 (na tassa.. mutti atthi yañ ca tattha āpattiṁ āpanno tañ ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c’ assa moho āropetabbo) cp. the following passages; as adjective: Vin i.205 Vin ii.132 142 263 MN iii.10 Mil 195 as
        • adverb : with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin i.173 315; ii.126; iv.19 DN i.85 DN iii.55 MN iii.247 SN ii.128 SN ii.205 AN i.103 AN i.238 ii.146; iv.377; cp. yathādhammaṁ paṭigaṇhāti SN i.239 AN i.59 AN i.103 At SN iii.171 yathādhammaṁ is used in the sense of “according to the truth, or reality,” where yathā-bhūtaṁ takes its place; similarly at Thag 1, 188
        • ˚dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled Dhp-a i.196 cp. MVastu i.301 yathā-dhauta -pasādhanaṁ according to a clear state of mind, to one’s gratification Dhp 249 (= attano pasād’ ânurūpaṁ Dhp-a iii.359)
        • ˚puggalaṁ according to the individual individually Pv iii.51 (read yathāpu˚)
        • ˚pūrita as full as could be, quite full Ja i.101
        • ˚phāsuka comfortable pleasant Dhp-a i.8
        • ˚balaṁ according to one’s power or means Dhp-a i.107 (variant reading ˚satti); Sdhp 97; Mhvs 5, 180 -buḍḍha ‣See ˚vuḍḍha
        • bhataṁ; is an unexplained, difficult of analysis because occurring in only one ster. phrase, viz. yathā bhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye (& sagge) at MN i.71 SN iv.325 (where Text has yathāhataṁ, variant reading bhataṁ) AN i.8 AN i.105 AN i.292 AN i.297 AN ii.71 83 Iti 12 14, 26. We have analyzed it as y. bhataṁ in Corr. to pt. 3; vol. ii.100 (“according to his upbringing”), but we should rather deviate from this explanation because the Pali usage in this case would prefer the nominativeinstead of the (
        • adverb )
        • accusative neuter It remains doubtful whether we should separate yathā or yath’ ābhataṁ Suggestions of a translation are the following (1) “as soon as brought or taken” ‣See Dict. s. v. ābhata; (2) “as one has brought” (merit or demerit); thus taking ābhataṁ as irregular
        • absolutive of ā + bhar, translation suggested by the reading āharitvā (yathâharitvā) in the complementary stanzas at Iti 12 & 14; (3) “according to merit or reward,” after Kern’s suggestion, Toevoegselen s.v. to read yathā bhaṭaṁ, the difficulty being that bhaṭa is nowhere found as variant reading of bhata in this phrase; nor that bhaṭa occurs in the meaning of “reward."-There is a strong likelihood of (ā)bhata resembling āhata (āhaṭa? in meaning “as brought,” on account of, cp. It context and reading at SN iv.325 still the phrase remains not sufficiently cleared up
        • Seidenstūcker’s translation has been referred to above (under haritvā) as unbefitting-The suspicion of yathābhataṁ being a veiled (corrupted) yathābhūtaṁ has presented itself to us before ‣See vol. I. under ābhata. The meaning may suggest something like the latter, in as far as “in truth, “surely” is not far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like “according to merit, without being able to elucidate the phrase in all its details
        • There is another yathābhataṁ in passage … ussavo hoti, yathābhataṁ lasuṇaṁ parikkhayaṁ agamāsi “the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought” Vin iv.258 Here ābhata stands in rel. to harāpeti (to have it fetched & brought) and is clearly
        • past participle of; ābharati
        • bhucca as is the case, i.e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth DN i.12 DN ii.222 Mil 183 Mil 351 Thag 2, 159 (= yathābhūtaṁ Thag-a 142) Pv-a 30 Pv-a 31 (˚guṇā)
        • ˚bhutta ‣See bhutta
        • ˚bhūta(ṁ) in reality, in truth, really, definitely absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence Very frequently in various combnns which ‣See collected & classified as regards Saṁyutta & Anguttara-Nikāyas in Index vols to these texts. English g. SN iv.195 (vacanaṁ, epithet of Nibbāna); v.440 (abhisamaya) Snp 194 Snp 202 Snp 653 Dhp 203 Pv-a 215 (guṇa). yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality DN i.83 DN i.162 SN iv.188 SN v.304 & passim; ditto yathābhūtaṁ jānāti passati Ps ii.62. Similarly with noun: yathābhūta-ñāṇa absolute knowledge SN v.144 Ps ii.63 = Vism 605 (+ sammādassana); Vism 438, 629, 695 Vb-a 459 (= maggañāṇa); also as ˚ñāṇa-dassana in same meaning: AN iii.19 AN iii.200 AN iv.99 AN iv.336 AN v.2f. 311 sq.; Ps i.33, 43 sq. ii.11 sq.; Nett 29
        • ˚mano according to (his) mind Snp 829 Nd1 170 (explained as nominative = yathācitto, yathāsankappo yathāviññāṇo)
        • ˚ruciṁ according to pleasure or liking Mhvs 4, 43 (ruci Text; ruciṁ variant reading ; thus generally in Mhvs.); 5, 230 (˚ruci); 22, 58 (˚ruci)
        • ˚vādin as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tathā-kārin so doing) DN ii.224 DN ii.229 Snp 357 Iti 122
        • ˚vidhi(ṁ) duly fitly Mhvs 10, 79
        • ˚vihita as appointed or arranged Mhvs 10, 93
        • ˚vuḍḍhaṁ according to seniority Vin ii.221 Mhbv.90 (Text reads ˚buḍḍhaṁ)
        • ˚vutta(ṁ) as is said, i.e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mhvs 34, 57 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 116 (˚o puggalo)
        • ˚saka(ṁ) each his own, according to his (or her) own, respective(ly) Vism 525 Snp-a 8 9 Vv-a 7 Mhvs 5, 230 (here simply “their own”)
        • ˚sata saintly (?), mindful Thag 1, 981 (cp. yathā cārin & Psalms of the Brethren p. 342)
        • ˚satti(ṁ) according to one’s power SN iv.348 (+ yathābalaṁ) Dhp-a i.107 (variant reading for ˚balaṁ); Sdhp 97
        • ˚satthaṁ according to the precepts as law ordains MN iii.10 (perhaps an error for yathāsaddha)
        • ˚saddhaṁ
        • accusative to faith, as is one’s faith Dhp 249
        • ˚santhatika accepting whatever seat is offered DN i.167 AN iii.220 Pug 69 Thag 1, 855 —˚anga one of the 13 dhutangas Mil 342 Mil 359 Vism 61, 78
        • ˚sukhaṁ according to ease, at ease, at will Thag 1, 77 Dhp 326
        from ya˚; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā
    Yathātaṁ
    adverb
    1. as it is, as, as if Vin iii.5 SN i.124 MN i.253 The spelling in our books is yathā taṁ (in two words)
    yathā + taṁ
    Yathāva
    adjective
    1. having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just Iti 44 (santaṁ paṇītaṁ yathāvaṁ, neuter Thag 1, 188 422 (˚āloka-dassana ‣Seeing the real light) Mil 171 (˚lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism 588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (identical) ablative yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der from yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly sufficiently Pv-a 60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all manuscripts yāthāvato!) Thag-a 256 (yā˚; the explanation given by Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1889, 208 is not correct)
    2. derived from yathā, as yathā + vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a-declension, cp. Epic Sanskrit yathāvat
    Yathāvaka
    adjective
    1. being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Thag 1, 347 Vb-a 409 (˚vatthu, referring to the “māna"-division of the Khuddaka-vatthu Vb 353f. cp. Nd2 505≈ Should we read yāthāvaka˚? Yad, Yad-idam
    from yathāva
    Yad, Yad-idaṁ
    1. etc ‣See ya˚; 4b
    Yadā
    adverb
    1. when Snp 200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, explained as yadā), 923 Dhp 28 Dhp 69 Dhp 277 sq., 325, 384, 390 Iti 77 (y devo devakāyā cavati) Pv-a 54 Pv-a 67. cp. kadā & tadā
    Vedic yadā; old instrumental of ya˚
    Yadi
    indeclinable
    1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Snp 189 “yadi bodhiṁ pattuṁ icchasi” Ja i.24 (v.167); “yadi dāyako dānaṁ deti.. etaṁ bījaṁ hoti” Pv-a 8 or pot.; or with a participle, as: “yadi evaṁ sante” that being so, if this is so DN i.61 “gahito yadi sīho te” if the lion is caught by you Mhvs 6, 27
    2. With other particles, e.g. yādi āsanamattaṁ pi even if only a seat Vv-a 39
    3. yadi.. atha kasmā if … how then Mil 4 yadi evaṁ.. (tu) even if … yet (but) Pv-a 63 (y. e. pitā na rodati mātu nāma hadayaṁ mudukaṁ)
    4. yadi va “or” (cp Vedic yadi vā “or be it that”) Dhp 195 (= yadi vā athavā Dhp-a iii.252). So yadi vā at Ja i.18 (v.97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Snp 119 (gāme vā yadi vâraññe)
    5. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaṁ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then Pv-a 54 (y. e. yaṁ mayhaṁ desitaṁ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaṁ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like)
    adverb formation, originally locative, from ya˚; cp. Vedic yadi
    Yanta
    neuter
    1. a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument machine, mechanism; figuratively instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma˚ at Th passages)
    • Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) Ja iv.163 (sabbayant’ ûpapanna = piy'-ârittā etc. Commentary ) Mil 379 To mechanism in general (mechanical force Ja v.333 (˚vegena = with the swiftness of machinery) To a sugar-mill Mil 166 usually as ucchu-yanta Ja i.25 Ja i.339 (˚yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaṁ yanta Dhp-a iv.199
    • tela-yanta (-cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill Ja i.25
    • dāru-yanta a wooden machine (i.e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DN-a; i.197; Vism 595 (quoted as simile)-kamma-yanta the machinery of Kamma Thag 1, 419 (i.e. its instrumentality, not, as translation “car”; cp. Psalms of the Brethren 217: “it breaks in pieces K’s living car, evidently influenced by Commentary explanation “attabhāva-yanta”) 574 (similarly ‣See discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd2 529 (on Snp 48 sanghaṭṭa-yantām) is explained as “dhuvarāni.” The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets.; cp. Snp-a 96 valayāni
    1. ˚ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism 258 = Vb-a 241
    • ˚cakkha-yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar-mill Vb-a 60
    • ˚nāḷi a mechanical tube Dhp-a iii.215
    • ˚pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) Ja iii.258 (read ˚pāsāṇo)
    • ˚phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism 258
    • ˚yutta combined by machinery Ja vi.432
    • ˚sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism 258 (as ˚ka) = Vb-a 241
    • ˚hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant Dhp-a i.192 (of King Caṇḍa-pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy)
    Vedic yantra, a kind of agent noun formation from yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg *em & *i̯em; , as in Latin emo to take & red-imio.
    Yantaka
    neuter
    1. a bolt Vin ii.148 (vihārā aguttā honti … anujānāmi yantakaṁ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin Texts iii.162 DN-a i.200 (kuñcikā +) Dhp-a i.220 (yantakaṁ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up)
    from yanta
    Yanti
    1. is 3rd plural pres. of ‣See yāti

      • Note. At DN ii.269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā sambādhā, thus forming
      • denominative verbs: visamāyanti “become uneven” and sambādhāyanti “become oppressed or tight.” The translationDialogues of the Buddha ii.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly
    Yantita
    1. made to go, set into motion, impelled Thag 1, 574: evâyaṁ vattati kāyo kamma-yantena yantito “impelled by the machinery of Karma” translation Psalms of the Brethren 261 not quite to the point “carried about on Karma’s car.” Kern, Toevoegselen s, v. quite out of place with “fettered, held, restrained,” in analogy to his translation of yanta identical locative with “fetter.” He may have been misled by Dhtm definition of yant as “sankocana ‣See yanteti
    2. past participle of yanteti
    Yanteti
    1. to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl Ja i.418 (sakkharaṁ anguliyā yantetvā); past participle yantita
    2. denominative from yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of “sankocane,” i.e. contraction
    Yannūna
    1. ‣See ya˚; 2˚
    Yapana
    1. ‣See yāpana
    Yapeti
    1. ‣See yāpeti
    Yabhati
    1. to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with definition “methune” at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308
    one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Latin ibex ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Yama1
    1. restraint Pv-a 98 (+ niyama)
    from yam
    Yama2
    the ruler of the kingdom of the dead ‣See details in Dicty. of Names. In compounds. often in general sense of “death” or “manes,” or “petā” e.g.
    1. ˚dūta Death’s messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 ‣See Vv-a 224 or deva-dūta AN i.138 ‣See under dūta, alias niraya-pāla AN i.138 and passim -purisa (a) = ˚dūta Dhp 235 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335) Vv-a 223 (b) ˚purisā Yama-people, i.e. Petas Pv iv.38 (cp. Pv-a 251)
    2. ˚loka the yama-world or world of the Petas Dhp 44 Dhp 45 Pv-a 107 & frequently
    3. ˚visaya = ˚loka Pv ii.82 & passim
    4. ˚sādana Y’s kingdom, or the realm of the dead Ja vi.267 Ja vi.304 Ja vi.457 Ja vi.505
    Vedic Yama
    Yama3
    masculine neuter
    1. neuter a pair, masculine a twin Abhp 628 ‣See derivation yamaka
    Vedic yama = yama2; from yam in meaning “to combine,” cp. Avestan yə̄ma twin, Mir. emuin identical
    Yamaka
    1. adjective double, twin; only in following combinations: ˚pāṭihāriya (& ˚hīra); the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin iii.332 Samanta-pāsādika; and in detail DN-a i.57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e.g. streaming forth of fire water. (cp. ; Mahāvastu translation 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e.g. at Ps; i.125 (˚hīra) Ja i.77 Ja i.88 Ja i.193 Mil 106 (˚hīraṁ), 349 (˚hāriyaṁ); Mhvs 17, 44, 50; 30, 82; 31 99; Dāvs i.50 (˚hīraṁ) Dhp-a iii.213 (identical) Snp-a 36 Vism 390 Pv-a 137
    2. ˚sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away Vv-a 165 Pv-a 212
    3. (adjective or m.) a twin, twin child Mhvs 6 9 (yamake duve puttaṁ ca dhītaraṁ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuṁ yamake duve duve putte janayi) Dhp-a i.353 (same, with vijāyi)
      • neuter a pair, couple name of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka-ppakaraṇa; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 8

        • The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at SN iii.109f.; mentioned at Vism 479 & Vb-a 32 The phrase; yamakato sammasana at Vism 626 may mean “in pairs” (like kalāpato “in a bundle” ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka-sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta
        from yama3
    Yamataṁ
    1. at SN i.14 (sa vītivatto yamataṁ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rhys Davids’s emendation Kindred Sayings p. 320) as yaṁ mataṁ (Cy.: maññanaṁ; translation “he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind”)
    Yamati
    1. [yam, given in meaning “uparame” i.e. cessation, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional “nāse.” On etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dhp 6 = Th i.275 = J iii.488 as 1st plural med yamāmase in
    2. imperative sense: “pare ca na vijānanti mayaṁ ettha yamāmase,” which is explained both at Dhp-a i.65 Thag 1 A, & Ja iii.489 in connection with yama,2 viz. “yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataṁ samitaṁ maccu-santikaṁ gacchāmā ti na jānanti,” i.e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at Dhp-a i.66 the explanation of it is “bhaṇḍ’ ādīnaṁ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti.” The meaning is “to control oneself,” cp. saṁyamāmase SN i.209 Leop. v. Schroeder however translates. “Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier” (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.)

      • yameyyātha at SN i.217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so Kindred Sayings i.281)
    Yamala
    1. a pair Abhp 628
    • yamalī occurs in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; Avs i.265
    from yama3
    Yava
    [Vedic yava, corn ‣See Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 239. Lithuanian javaī corn; Old Irish eorna barley corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin iv.264 SN iv.220 AN iv.169
    1. ˚karaṇa the preparation of corn AN iv.169
    • ˚kalāpī (or ˚inī) a sheaf of barley SN iv.201
    • ˚kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) AN iv.169
    • ˚kummāsa barley-gruel Vv-a 62
    • ˚khetta corn-field Vin iv.47 266 Vv-a 294
    • ˚dūsin spoiling the corn AN iv.169
    • ˚majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn-field, in pācīna˚ of the c.
    • feminine on the English side (+ dakkhiṇa˚ S.; pacchima˚ W.; uttara˚ name) names of 4 market-places near Mithilā Ja vi.330
    • ˚sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) AN i.8 SN v.10 SN v.48

    Yavaka
    neuter
    1. in compound sāli˚; (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i.e. rice-and cornfields Commentary ) Ja iv.172 cp. yāvaka
    yava + collect. ending ˚ka
    Yavasa
    neuter
    1. grass, hay, fodder Ja i.338
    from yava; Vedic yavasa
    Yasavant
    adjective
    1. famous, having renown AN ii.64 (dīghāyu +)
    cp. Vedic yaśasvat
    Yasassin
    adjective
    1. glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as explained at Nd2 530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) DN i.48 (ñāta +) AN ii.34 Snp 179 Snp 298 Snp 343 Snp 1117 Pv i.41 iii.117; iii.35iii.108 Vv 159 (= kittimant parivāravant Vv-a 73) DN-a i.143 Pv-a 10 Sdhp 420. feminine yasassinī shining resplendent Ja v.64
    2. Vedic yaśasvin
    Yasassimant
    adjective
    1. splendid, glorious, full of splendour Ja v.63 (pāvako yasassimā = teja-sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto Commentary )
    double adjective ending; yasas + vin + mant
    Yaso
    Yasa;

    neuter

    1. glory, fame, repute success, high position. On term as used with reference to the brahmin ‣See Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129 The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at DN i.118 = 126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DN-a i.143 on DN i.48 DN-a i.298: yasasā ti āṇā-ṭhapana-samatthatāya) ‣See e.g. Vv-a 122 (yaso = parivāra) Pv-a 137 (yasasā mahati parivāra-sampattiyā); cp. Ja i.134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaṁ gacchati)
    • DN i.137 (as quality of a king); iii.260, 286 Ja iv.275f. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense-objects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba The same 10 are found at Pv ii.958, 59) AN i.15 AN ii.32 66, 188; iii.31, 47 sq.; iv.95, 195 sq. Dhp 24 Dhp 303 (+ bhoga) Thag 1, 554 Nd1 147; Pv iii.35 (= dev’ iddhi Pv-a 189) Vv 291 Ja i.134 Ja vi.468 Mil 291 (bhoga +) Vism 393; Sdhp 306 Sdhp 518
    • yasaṁ deti to give credit Ja i.180
    • mahā-yaso great fame Ja i.46 (v.266), cp. yas-agga the highest (of) fame Ja i.51 where coupled with lābh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combination is stereotype in the Niddesa ‣See e.g. Nd2 55 where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso pasaṁsā, sukha
    • With kitti we find yaso at Snp 817 ‣See definition & exegesis at Nd; 1 147
    • O
    • past participle ayasa DN iii.260 DN iii.286 AN ii.188 AN iv.157f.
    1. ˚dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute Ja vi.285
    • ˚mada pride of fame Vb-a 467
    • ˚mahatta greatness of fame Vism 233
    • ˚lābha the gain of fame Ja iii.516 (+ dhanalābha)
    Vedic yaśaḥ neuter. The word follows the ; declension, but preserves & favours the instr; yasasā after the ; declension (like mano, ceto etc,), e.g. at Ja i.134

    • In the nominative &
    • accusative singular both forms; yaso yasa(ṁ); occur; in compounds. the form yasa˚; is the usual yaso as masc. is found at Snp 438
    Yahiṁ
    adverb
    1. where, wherever Mhvs 15, 209 (corresponding to yattha in v.210)
    after kuhiṁ
    Yāga
    1. a; (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl ˚yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha sammāpāsa, vāja-peyya. Thus mentioned at SN i.76 & Snp 303
    2. In; Buddhistic sense: gift alms-giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost synonym with cāga) AN i.91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of; āmisa˚ & dhamma˚; i.e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā˚ & dh. at DN iii.155 Iti 98 102 Ja v.57 Ja v.65 Dhp-a i.27
    3. J iv.66 (sahassena yāgaṁ yajanto) Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Vv-a 155 Pv-a 135 (mahā˚-saññita yañña), 136 (mahā˚)-suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā “well-given is the perfection of charity” Thag-a 40 (Ap. v.7) = 230 (identical)
      1. ˚piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa-pitṛ-yajña) Ja vi.522 (with variant reading yāgu˚)
      from yaj, * Sanskrit yāga, cp. yañña & yaja
    Yāgin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. sacrificing, giving, spending SN i.19 = J iv.66 (sahassa˚ giving the worth of a thousand pieces)
    from yāga
    Yāgu
    feminine
    1. rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink) ‣See Vinaya Texts ii.89. Vin i.46 = ii.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṁ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguṁ pītassa udakaṁ datvā …) 51 (identical), 61 (identical), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udara-vāt-ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva-yāguṁ dātuṁ; i.e. a constant supply of rice-gruel), 339 (na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); iv.311 AN iii.250 (ānisaṁsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food) Ja i.186 Ja ii.128 (for drink) Pv-a 12 Pv-a 23 Pv-a 274
    • Often combined (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e.g.; yāgukhajjaka Ja i.270 Ja iii.20 Dhp-a iv.20 Mhvs 14, 55 (˚khajja-bhojja; 36, 100 (+ khajja-bhojja
    1. ˚pāna a drink of rice-milk Vin i.84
    • ˚piṇḍa ‣See yāga˚
    • ˚bhājaka one who distributes the rice-gruel Vin ii.176 (pañcah’ angehi samannāgataṁ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala-bhājaka & khajja-bhājaka) iv.38 (yāgu˚, phala˚, khajja˚), 155 (identical) AN iii.275
    cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 274
    Yāca
    neuter
    1. anything asked for, donation, alms, begging Ja iii.353 Ja v.233 Ja v.234
    1. ˚yoga (y. + *yogga; perhaps yāja˚ the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another’s request, devoted to liberality, open-handed frequently in ster. phrase mutta-cāga payata-pāṇī vossaggarata yāca-yoga dāna-saṁvibhāga-rata to denote great love of liberality, e.g. at AN i.226 AN ii.66 AN iii.313 ‣See also AN iii.53 AN iii.313 = Vism 223, 224 (where explained as follows: yaṁ yaṁ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana-sankhātena yājena yutto ti attho) AN iv.6 AN iv.266f. 271, 284 v.331, 336; Snp p. 87 (cp. explanation Snp-a 414: “yācituṁ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiṁ katvā pharusavacan’ ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti” etc.) Snp 487 Snp 488 Snp 489 Snp 509 Ja iii.307 (explained in Commentary as “yaṁ yaṁ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaṁ tehi yācita-yācitaṁ dadamāno ti attho”); iv.274 (“yācitabba-yuttaka” Commentary ); vi.98 (= yācana-yuttaka or yañña-yuttaka; “ubhayath’ âpi dāyakass’ ev’ etaṁ nāma” Commentary ) Mil 215 Mil 225
    • The form yājayoga at Snp 1046 (explained at Nd2 531 as “yāje yutta”); and mentioned at Vism 224 ‣See above. On different meaning of yācayoga ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen s. v with unidentified reference cp. also Mvyut. 140, 4
    from yāc
    Yācaka
    adjective noun
    1. requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar Ja iii.353 Pv ii.938 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 102 (= yācanaka); Sdhp 324 Sdhp 331. Frequently in combination with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa-brāhmaṇa-kapaṇ iddhika-vaṇibbaka-yācakā e.g. at DN i.137 Iti 64 ‣See single terms
    • yācaka at Snp 618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka
    from yāca, cp. Epic & later Sanskrit yācaka
    Yācati

    1. to beg, ask for, entreat Vin iv.129 (pabbajjaṁ) Snp 566 Snp 980 Snp 983 Ja iii.49 Ja iii.353 Ja v.233 Ja v.404 aorist 3rd
    2. plural yāciṁsu Pv-a 13 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 42; ayācisuṁ Mhvs 33, 76 (variant reading ayācayuṁ)

      • infinitive yācituṁ Pv-a 29 Pv-a 120.
      • absolutive yāciya Snp 295
      • yācitvā MN i.365
      • yācitvāna Mhvs 17, 58.
      • past participle yācita
      Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Latin jocus (dialectical juca “prayer”); Old High German jehan to confess, etc. ‣See Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. jocus Dhtp (38) only explains yāca yācane
    Yācana
    (dt.)
    1. begging, asking, entreaty Ja iii.353 Snp-a 161 (inghā ti yācan’ atthe nipāto) 551 (identical) Pv-a 113 (= sādhuka)
    1. ˚jīvāna living by begging Ja iii.353
    from yāc
    Yācanaka
    1. = yācaka AN iii.136 (ati˚); Pv ii.76; 916; 946 Ja iii.49 DN-a i.298
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yācanaka Divy 470 Divy 585
    Yācanā
    feminine = yācana Ja iii.354 = Mil 230 Ja v.233 Ja v.404
    Yācita
    1. begged, entreated, asked (for) AN iii.33 Dhp 224 Ja iii.307 Pv-a 39
    • cp. yācitaka
    past participle of yācati
    Yācitaka
    adjective
    1. asked, begged, borrowed MN i.365 (˚ṁ bhogaṁ) Ja iv.358 = vi.127 (˚ṁ yānaṁ and ˚ṁ dhanaṁ, alluding to MN i.365–⁠366), with explanation Ja iv.358: “yaṁ parena dinnattā labbhati taṁ yācita-sadisam eva hoti."- neuter anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak’ ūpamā kāmā (in app’ assādā kāmā passage) “the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods” Vin ii.25 = M i.130 AN iii.97 = Th 2, 490 = Nd2 71 (correct yācitan’); explained in detail at MN i.365

      • ‣ See also Dhp-a i.403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti) Thag-a 288 (kāmā = yācitaka-bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik’ aṭṭhena)
      yācita + diminutive (disparaging) ending ˚ka
    Yāja
    1. sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with; cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sanskrit tyājana) ‣See yācayoga; - Nd2 531 (yāye yutta); Vism 224
    from yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti
    Yājaka
    adjective
    1. sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Snp 312 Snp 313 (= yanna-yājino janā Snp-a 324), 618 (of a purohita; Burmese variant yācaka)
    from yaj in its causative form yājeti
    Yājana
    1. (nt) = yāja; Vism 224 ‣See yācayoga
    Yājin
    adjective
    1. sacrificing Snp-a 324 (yañña˚)
    from yāja
    Yājetar
    1. one who superintends a sacrifice or causes it to be performed DN i.143
    agent noun to yājeti
    Yājeti
    1. to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) Ja vi.211 Ja vi.215 ppr. yājento MN i.404 Pot. 2nd singular yājeyya Ja iii.515 3rd plural yājeyyuṁ Ja vi.215 (aññaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ) also yājayeyyuṁ Ja vi.211
    2. absolutive yājetvā DN i.143
    3. causative I. of yajati
    Yāta
    1. going, gone, proceeded; habit, custom; only in compound yāt'ānuyāyin going on according to what (or as it) has gone, i.e. following old habits Ja vi.309 310; explained by Commentary as “pubba-kārinā yātassa puggalassa anuyāyī, paṭhamaṁ karonto yāti nāma pacchā karonto anuyāyati.” The usual Sanskrit phrase is gat-ânugatika cp. yātrā, yānikata
    past participle of yāti
    Yāti

    1. to go, go on to proceed, to go away; -pres. 1styāmi Pv ii.88 (= gacchāmi Pv-a 107), Mhvs 10, 3; 2ndyāsi Ja i.291 Mhvs 10, 2 (kuhiṁ yāsi?); 3rdyāti Snp 720 (tuṇhī y mahodadhi) Dhp 29 Dhp 179 Dhp 294 Dhp 295 Ja vi.311 Mhvs 5 47 Dhp-a i.18 1st plural yāma Mhvs 6, 12 (kiṁ na y. variant reading kiṁ nu y.); 2ndyātha =
    2. imperative ; 3rdyanti Snp 179 Snp 578 Snp 714Dhp 126 Dhp 175 Dhp 225 (‣ See also note s.v. yanti Pv ii.916 (= gacchanti Pv-a 120)

      • imperative 2nd sg yāhi Pv ii.16 (read yajāhi?); Mhvs 13, 15; 3rd singular yātu Mhvs 29, 17; 2nd
      • plural yātha Mhvs 14, 29 Dhp-a i.93 ppr. yanto Mhvs 36, 60 (pacchā y. walking behind genitive yantassa Mhvs 22, 57 (assavegena y.)
      • inf yātave Snp 834
      • Another formation from is yāyati ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 138, in an intensive meaning of “to drive, to move on quickly or by special means, e.g. in phrase yānena yāyati to drive in a carriage Vin i.191 (Pot. yāyeyya); ii.276 Snp 654 (ppr.: rathass āṇī va yāyato) 418 (
      • absolutive : yānabhūmiṁ yāyitvā yānā oruyha) Ja vi.125 As “march” at Ja vi.449 In special meaning “to drive,” i.e. “to be driven or affected by” in explanation of the ending of ppr. med kāma yamāne Snp 767 (or kāma-yāna) at Nd1 4 viz. “taṇhāya yāyati niyyati vuyhati saṁhariyati.” cp. yāna as ending.
      • past participle yāta.
      • causative yapeti & yāpeti; (q.v.) ‣See also anupari˚, ā˚, upa˚, uy˚, pa˚ (
      • aorist pāyāsi) paccuy˚ pari˚; and anuyāyati
      Vedic yāti, or , which represents Idg *i̯ā, an amplified as in eti (q.v.) cp. Latin janua door the proper name Janus (= January); Lithuanian jóti to ride, Mir. āth ford The Dhtp 368 explains more in applied meaning as “papuṇane,” cp. Dhtm 596: pāpuṇe
    Yātrā
    feminine
    1. travel, going on, proceeding, good habit (like yāta; cp. yātrā = anuvṛtti Halāyudha 5, 33 SN i.33 SN i.16 = 63 (translationK.S., perhaps wrongly “egress”: it is more a question of going on through life!). Perhaps to be classed under following meaning as well
    2. going on, livelihood, support of life, maintenance in stock phrase occurring at many places of the Canon, viz. “purāṇaṁ vedanaṁ paṭihankhāmi, navañ ca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati etc.” where Dhs-a 404 explains yātrā by yāpanā, as may be inferred also from context. Thus at MN i.10 (where Neumann translates: “ein Fortkommen haben, i.e. progress), 355 SN iv.104 AN ii.40 AN iii.388 Nd1 496 Nd2 540 (correct devanaṁ into vedanaṁ!) Pug 25 Dhs 1348 Mil 367: all passages identical. The whole passage is explained in detail at Vism 31 sq. where yātrā is given with “cira-kāla-gamana-sankhātā yātrā, Buddhaghosa thus taking it as “keeping going,” or “continued subsistence” (longevity trsḷn)
    3. In one other passage yātrā is conjectured for sātrā, viz. at Snp-a 322 in reading y
    4. yāga for sātrā yāga, where meaning y might be taken as “customary.” The ed. compares Sanskrit yātsattra, a certain ceremony
    from , Classical Sanskrit yātrā, a agent noun formation like nettī, meaning something like “vehicle,” that which keeps going
    Yāthāva

    adjective

    1. sufficient (lit “just as much”; i.e. such as it is), sufficiently founded logical, consistent, exact, definite, true Nd2 275 (where tatha is explained by taccha, bhūta, yāthāva, aviparīta) Dhs-a 248 (where micchā-diṭṭhi is explained as incorrect or illogical view
    • yāthāvato ablative exactly, truly consistently DN-a i.65 Thag-a 256 Vv-a 232 ‣See also yathāvato
    • The nearest synonyms of yāthāva are aviparīta (i.e. definite) and yathābhūtaṁ ‣See also yathāva and yathāvaka
    1. ˚nāma having the name of exactitude Pv-a 231 (+ aviparīta-nāma)
    2. ˚māna pride of sufficiency or consistency Vb-a 487f. (and a˚)
    3. ˚lakkhaṇa possessing the characteristic of definiteness or logic Mil 171 Nett 27 (where avijjā is called “sabba dhammayāthāva-asampaṭivedha-lakkhaṇā”)
    4. ˚vacana exact logical or true speech Mil 214 (taccha-vacana, yāthāvav, aviparīta-v.)
    5. ˚sarasa logical and with its essential (sa + rasa) properties Vism 588, 639
    ‣See yathāva. It is a combination of a guṇaderived from yathā and an adjective der. of ˚vant
    Yādicchakaṁ
    1. at Vv-a 341 read as yadicchakaṁ ‣See ya˚
    Yādisa
    adjective
    1. which like, what like, whichever, how much; in negative sentence any, whatever little
    • Pv. ii.119 (= yāva mahanto Pv-a 77)
    • Often combined with kīdisa in meaning “any one, this or that, whoever,” e.g. Vv 5014 (= yo vā so vā pacura-jano ti attho Vv-a 213). As adjective: yādisi (sic! = Sanskrit yādṛśī) -kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) Ja vi.584 (v.728; Trenckner, Miln p. 423 gives v.732!), explained by C as “yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho” yādisaṁ kīdisaṁ dānaṁ a gift of whatever kind Mil 278 So also with tādisa : yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā of whichever kind AN iii.5
    Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad + dṛśa
    Yādisaka
    1. = yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka-tādisaka whatsoever … such, any whatsoever AN iv.308 SN v.96
    Yāna
    neuter
    1. going, proceeding Ja vi.415 (+ ayāna, opposed to ṭhāna)
    2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle Different kinds of carriages are enumerated at Nd1 145 (on Snp 816) with hatthi˚; (elephant-), go˚; (cow-), aja˚ (goat-), meṇḍaka˚; (ram-), oṭṭha˚; (camel-?), khara˚ (donkey-). cp. Mil 276
    3. yāna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya-dhamma or 14 gifts ‣See yañña & deyya-dh.. Thus mentioned with; anna pāna vattha etc. at SN i.94 AN ii.85 Pug 51
    4. cp. the definition & application of the term yāna as given below under yāna-sannidhi
    5. See e.g. the following passages Vin i.191 (bhikkhū yānena yāyanti … na bhikkhave yānena yāyitabbaṁ; yo yāyeyya etc.: here a “carriage is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapālī bhadrāni-bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhirūhitvā …), 242 (same phrase with Meṇḍaka gahapati) DN i.7 DN i.89 DN i.106 MN i.366 (yānaṁ poroseyyaṁ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṁ, where variant readings on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann (unwarrantedly) adopts in his translation: Mittl. Sammlung2 1921 ii.666; the Commentary accepts reading poroseyya with explanation “puris -anucchavikaṁ yānaṁ”) Dhp 323 (= hatthiyānādīni Dhp-a iv.6) Ja iii.525f.; v.59; vi.223 (= ratha) Kvu 599 (Erāvaṇo hatthināgo sahassa-yuttaṁ dibbaṁ yānaṁ; translated as “the wondrous elephant English, the thousand-wise yoked celestial mount.” translation p. 347 (lit vehicle) Pv iii.228 (= ratha or vayha etc. Pv-a 186) Pv-a 113
    6. iddhi-yāna carriage of magic power Mil 276
    7. deva˚ godly carriage Mil 276 applied to the 8 fold Aryan Path at Snp 139 (= devalokaṁ yāpetuṁ samatthatā … aṭṭha-samāpatti-yānaṁ Snp-a 184). Similarly of the Path: magg’ aṭṭhangika-yāna (-yāyinī) Thag 2, 389 (= aṭṭhangika-magga-sankhāta ariya-yāna Thag-a 257); and brahma-yāna dhamma-yāna “the very best & excellent carriage” as epithet of magga SN v.5 cp. Ja iv.100 cp. the later terms mahā and hīna- yāna ‣See also yānikata
      1. ˚ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin ii.276 Dhp-a iii.283
      • ˚gata having ascended the carriage DN i.126
      • ˚puṭosā (˚puṭoḷī) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paṭṭoli)
      • ˚bhūmi carriage-ground, i.e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage DN i.89 Snp 418
      • ˚sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion DN i.6 (with explanation at DN-a i.82 as follows: yānaṁ nāma vayhaṁ ratho sakaṭaṁ sandamānikā patankī ti. Na pan’ etaṁ pabbajitassa yānaṁ, upāhanā yānaṁ pana) Snp 924 (= anna-pāna-vattha-yāna-sannidhi Nd1 372)
      • ˚sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kvu 209; cp. Kvu translation 127
      from , as in yāti. cp. Vedic yāna and Latin Janus
    Yānaka
    neuter
    1. a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle Ja iii.49 (˚ṁ pūretvā, or a hunter’s cart); iv.45 Dhp-a i.325 (sukha˚), 391 (pakati˚, an ordinary waggon) —˚ṁ pājeti to drive a cart Ja ii.112 Ja ii.143 Ja iii.51
    1. ˚upatthambha(na) waggon-prop Kp-a 44 (˚ni variant reading ‣See Appendix to Index Pj.) Vb-a 234 (˚nika; illustrating the shape of the teeth). Yanika & Yaniya;
    from yāna
    Yānika
    Yāniya;
    adjective (—˚)
    1. (literally) leading to, conducive to, as ˚yāniya in deva˚ magga DN i.215 Brahma˚ magga the way leading to the Brahma-world DN i.220
    2. (in applied meaning, cp. yānikata) ˚yānika one who has become used to, whose habit it is …, in vipassanā˚ & samatha˚ at Vism 588
    from yāna
    Yānikata
    1. made a habit of, indulged in, acquired, mastered (cp. explanation Ps i.172 “yattha yattha ākankhati tattha tattha vasippatto hoti balappatto etc.”). The expression is to be compared with yatānuyāgin & yātrā, similarly to which it is used only in one stock phrase. It comes very near yātrā in meaning “that which keeps one going,” i.e. an acquired & thoroughly mastered habit, an “altera natura.” It is not quite to the point when Dialogues of the Buddha ii.110 (following Childers?) translate as “to use as a vehicle
    • Occurring with identical phraseology, viz. bahulīkata yāni-kata vatthu-kata anuṭṭhita paricita susamāraddha in application to the 4 iddhipādā at DN ii.103 AN iv.309 SN v.260 Mil 140 to mettā at MN iii.97 SN i.116 SN ii.264 SN iv.200 SN v.259 AN v.342 Ja ii.61 Mil 198 explained at Ps i.172, cp. ii.122, 130
    yāna + kata, with i for a in compound with kṛ; , perhaps also in analogy with bahulī-kata
    Yānin
    adjective
    1. one who drives in a carriage Ja iii.525 = iv.223 (where read yānī va for yān iva). At the latter passage the Commentary somewhat obscurely explains as “sappi-tela-yānena gacchanto viya”; at iii.526 the explanation is simply “yānena gacchanto viya.”
    from yāna
    Yāpana
    1. (& yapana) neuter

      1. keeping going, sustenance, feeding, nourishment existence, living. especially in one standing comb; n respecting the feeding and keeping of the body “kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya etc.” (for the maintenance of the body) in yātrā passage ‣See yātrā 2; in which it is explained at Vism 32 by “pavattiyā avicched’ atthaṁ cira-kāla-ṭṭhit’ atthaṁ” i.e. for the preservation of life
      • Further at Ja i.66 (alam me ettakaṁ yāpanāya) v.387 (thokaṁ mama yāpana-mattaṁ eva) Dhp-a iv.210 (yāpana-mattaṁ dhanaṁ) Pv-a 28
      • Used more freq together with shortened form yapana; in standard phrase vutti pālana, yapana yāpana cāra (cp. yapeti at Vism 145 Dhs-a 149 167. Or similarly as
      • feminine with spelling yapanā & yāpanā : yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā at Dhs 19 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. At Dhs-a 404
      • yāpanā is used as synonym of yātrā
      from yāpeti. cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit yāpana
    Yāpanīya
    adjective
    1. fit or sufficient for supporting one’s life Vin i.59 212, 253
    • cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yāpanīyatara a more healthy state Divy 110
    gerundive formation from yāpeti
    Yāpeti
    (& yapeti)
    1. (literally)-(a) in
    2. causative intensive as well as intransitive sense; in the latter also with short ă; as yapeti and then combined with yāpeti, in stock phrase defining carati “to go,” “to be” (or viharati with synonyms iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti at Nd2 237 Vb 252 Dhs-a 167 Besides singly (yapeti at Dhs-a 149
    3. (b) to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to (
    4. accusative ) Ja vi.458 (sasenāvāhanaṁ yāpesi) Snp-a 184 (devalokaṁ yāpetuṁ samattha fit to bring one to the d-world)
    5. (c) to get on, move to be active Dhp-a i.10 (sarīre yāpente); iv.17 (iriyāpathena)
    6. (figuratively) to keep going (both trs. & intransitive; ) to keep up, especially to keep oneself going or alive, to live by instrumental cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yāpayati Divy 93 Divy 150, 196, 292 293, 471, 488, Avs i.209
      1. DN i.166 (ekissā dattiyā on only one alms) Pug 56 Ja ii.204 Ja iii.67 Ja iv.125 vi.532 (uñchena) Pv i.57 (ito dinnena yāpenti petā) i.117; iii.28 (tava dinnena yāpessanti kurūrino) Pv-a 27 Pv-a 29 (= attabhāvaṁ yāpeti = upajīvati)
      causative of yāti
    Yāpya

    adjective

    1. (literally) fit for movement or locomotion: in ˚yāna sedan-chair, palanquin Abhp. 373
    2. (figuratively) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in ˚rogin one who suffers from a vital disease literally a disease concerning the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (translationPath of Purity 39: “patient of long-suffering, from a different point of view, viz. of time only, like Buddhaghosa)
    shortened gerundive

    • formation for yāpanīya. * Sanskrit yāpya in slightly different meaning
    Yāma
    1. restraint, only as compound cātu-yāma 4-fold restraint DN i.57 DN iii.48 SN i.66 MN i.377 Vism 416. cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.751
    2. a watch of the night. There are 3 watches given as paṭhama, majjhima & pacchima; (first, middle & last) Nd; 1 377 sq.; or purima, m. & pacchima; Nd2 631 (under sadā)
    3. AN i.114 AN iv.168 Dhp 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at Dhp-a iii.138) Ja i.243 (tīsu yāmesu ekasmiṁ yāme); Mhvs 21, 33 Pv-a 217 Pv-a 280
    4. (usually

      • plural Yāmā devā) one who belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Underworld; a subject of Yama the realm of Yama; -
      • plural inhabitants of Yamaloka AN i.210 (yāmā devā) Snp-a 244 (˚bhavana the abode of the Y.); Kp-a 166 (Yāmato yāva Akaniṭṭhaṁ from the Underworld to the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Yāmā) Vb-a 519 (Yāmā) Vv-a 246 (identical) Thag-a 169 (Y. devā).

        1. ˚kālika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period (literally) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yāva-kālika temporary. It is one of the three regulation-terms for specified food, viz. y
        • k., sattāhakālika & yāvajīvika; , or short period, of a week’s duration and life-long food Vin iv.83 86, 176, 311; to which is added yāva-kālika, temporary at Vin i.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed)
        • ˚gaṇḍika(ṁ) koṭṭeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i.e. exercise self-control (?) (or does it belong to yāma 3?) Kp-a 233
        from yam in both meanings of yamati & yama; 3
    Yāyati
    1. ‣See yāti
    Yāyin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. going, going on to; in yāna-yāyinī feminine Thag 2, 389 (maggaṭṭhangika˚ having ascended the carriage of the 8-fold Path; explained by “ariya-yāyena nibbāna-puraṁ yāyinī upagatā” Thag-a 257)
    2. from ‣See yāti
    Yāva
    • adverb
    1. . 1 (as preposition) up to (a point), as far as, how far so far that (cp. tāva I), both temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or adjective (base), or nominative or ablative or accusative -(a) absolute: y. sahassa up to 1000 Pv-a 21 y. sattama up to the seventh DN i.238 (b) nominative: y. deva-bhava-sampatti up to the attainment of a deva existence Pv-a 167 y. satta divasā up to 7 days, as long as 7 days Pv-a 31 (c) with ablative: y brahmalokā up to the highest heaven AN iii.17 y mekhalā down to her girdle Pv-a 46 yāva āyu-pariyosānā up to the end of life Pv-a 200 y. ajjadivasā till the present day Mhvs 32, 23; y. kapp’ âvasānā up to the end of the world Vism 688 (where Snp-a 5 in same passage reads
    2. accusative ˚âvasānaṁ); y. kāla-ppavedanā Ja i.118 + Dhp-a i.248 y. mukhasmā up to the brim Mil 238 yāva bhumm’ âvalambare hang down to the ground Pv ii.102
    3. (d) with
    4. accusative y. Bodhimaṇḍaṁ as far as the Bodhimaṇḍa Mhvs 30, 88; y. tatiyakaṁ for the 3rd time (i.e. the last time; ascending scale! DN i.95 y. tatiyaṁ identical Vin iv.236 samanubhāsitabba) Snp 1116 Ja iv.126
    5. frequently in phrase yāva jīvaṁ ‣See under compounds.. Sattamāsaṁ cha pañca cattāro ti vatvā yāva temāsaṁ yāciṁsu “after having said 7, 6, 5, 4, months they begged down to 3 months” Pv-a 20
    6. With startingpoint local: pādatalato … yāvakesaggaṁ from the sole of the foot to the tip of the hair (“from tip to toe”) Dhp-a i.70 (in modal sense:) paṭhavī-kasiṇato paṭṭhāya yāva odāta-kasiṇaṁ “from the one to the other” Vism 374. Similarly in correlation yāva-tāva ‣See tāva 1. as far-so far, until-so long: y. rājā āgacchati tāva ubho ramissāma Ja iv.190 heṭṭhā pi yāva Avīci upari yāva Akaniṭṭha-bhavanaṁ, tāva addasa Vism 392; yāva naṁ ānemi tāva idh’ eva tiṭṭha Dhp-a iii.194
    7. (as
    8. adverb ) how, how much, to which or what extent, as great or as much (as) (cp. tāva ii.2) usually in combination yāva mahā (mahantaṁ), e.g. yāva mahantaṁ how big Pv-a 77 (= yādisaṁ of Pv ii.119) Vv-a 325 = Dhp-a i.29 (yāva mahantaṁ). Also in other combinations, like yāva dukkhā nirayā how (or as) many painful purgatories Snp 678 yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni MN iii.169 yāva pāpo ayaṁ Devadatto alakkhiko … “how very wicked is this D.” Vin ii.196 Further in combination with attha(ṁ), and eva, in which cases the final d is restored, or may be regarded as euphonic Thus yāvad-atthaṁ as far as need be, as much as you like (with
    9. imperative ) Pv iv.57 (khādassu y.); UbhA 504 (= yattakaṁ icchati tattakaṁ) Ja v.338 Pv-a 217 (gaṇhāhi) cp. Vin iii.37 (yāvadatthaṁ katvā “pleasing herself”)-As adjective sufficient, plenty MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa.. suhita y.) Pv-a 24 (= pahūta). yāvad-eva cp. the similar tāva-d
    10. eva
      1. “as much as it is (in extent)” i.e. with limitation as far as is necessary, up to (i.e. not further or more than), ever so much, as much as you like, at least; (then:) as far as, in short, altogether indeed
      • The same idea as our definition is conveyed by Buddhaghosa’s at Snp-a 503 (on Snp p. 140) “paricched âvadhāraṇa-vacanaṁ,” and at Dhp-a ii.73 “avadhiparicchedana”: giving a limitation, or saying up to the limit. SN ii.276 Snp p. 140 Dhp 72 and in stock phrase “n'eva davāya … yāvad eva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā …” (“in short”) ‣See passages under yātrā. The explanation of yāvad eva in this phrase as given at Dhs-a 403 runs: “āhār’ āharaṇe payojanassa pariccheda-niyamadassanaṁ,” of which the translationExpositor ii.512 is “so as to suffice signifies the limit of the result of taking food. Ṉeumann’s translation at MN i.10 is “but only."-Note. In the stock phrase of the Buddha’s refusal to die until his teaching has been fully proclaimed (Mahāparinibbānasutta) “among gods and men” DN ii.106 (= 114, 219 iii.122 AN iv.311) “yāva-deva-manussehi suppakāsitaṁ” (translationDialogues of the Buddha ii.113: “until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men”) we are inclined to consider the reading yāva deva˚; as original and better than yāvad-eva, although Rhys Davids (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.236) is in favour of the latter being the original. Cf Kindred Sayings ii.75 n. The phrase seems to require yāva only as continuation of the preceding yāva’s; moreover the spirit of the message is for the whole of the worlds cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yāvad-deva manusyebhaḥ Divy 201. It is not a restriction or special definition of meaning at this passage. But may it not be taken as a summing up “in short"? It is left doubtful. If it is = yāva, then we should expect yāva na, as in the preceding sentence if it is yāvad eva the meaning “not more than made known by men” seems out of place; in this case the meaning “at least” is preferable. A similar case of insertion of a euphonic consonant m (or is it the a-stem nt in ˚ṁ instead of ˚t as in yāvat?) we find in the phrase yāvam pi at Ja v.508 (with Pot. tiṭṭheyya ‣See below 3 Commentary explanation by yattakaṁ kālaṁ)
      • The form yāvade (for yāvad eva) also occurs (like tāvade for tāvad eva) at MN ii.207
      • For yad-idaṁ we find yāvañ c’ idaṁ at AN iii.34 MN iii.169
      • The latter form (yāvaṁ, as above Ja v.508) is better to be grouped directly under yāvant where more & similar cases are given
      • (as; conj. so long as, whilst, until (cp. tāva ii.3, 4; iii.); either with
      • future or Pot. or Prohibitive. Englishg. ’s i.202 (ahu pure dhammapadesu chando y. virāgena samāgamimha translation “until I met with that Pure thing and Holy”) Ja vi.266 (y. āmantaye) Pv-a 4 (tāva ayyo āgametu yāva ayaṁ puriso … pānīyaṁ pivissati or: “you shall wait please, until he shall drink”). negative yāva.. na not until, unless, as long as not DN ii.106 (na paribbāyissāmi … yāva … na bhavissati) SN i.47 (y na gādhaṁ labhati) Dhp 69 (yattakaṁ kālaṁ na.. Dhp-a ii.50)
      1. ˚kālika (cp. tāva ii.1) “as far as the time or occasion goes,” occasional, temporary, at Vin i.251 in following context (cp. yāmakālika): “kappati … yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṁ na kappati, kappati yāvakālikena sattāha kālikaṁ na k. etc. with following yāvajīvikaṁ & the same with kappati yāma-kālikena, sattāha-kālikenana k.; kappati satt˚, yāvajīv, na k.” The reply of the Buddha is: yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṁ tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ kāle kappati vikāle na kappati (same with sattāhakālikaṁ & yāvajīvikaṁ); followed by yāmakālikena … sattāhakālikaṁ & yāvajīvikaṁ; sattāhakālikena … jāvajīvikaṁ.” -jivaṁ (adverb ) for the length of one’s life, life-long, all one’s life, for life (-time) Vin i.80 ii.197; iii.23 Iti 78 Dhp 64 Dhp 284; Vism 94 Dhp-a i.45 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 110 (= satataṁ). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit yāvajīva-sukhya Avs ii.37
      2. ˚tajjanī (-vinīta) led only as long as kept under a threat AN i.285 (one of the 3 parisā’s; so read with variant reading for Text yāvatajjhā˚)
      3. ˚tatiyaka “as much as 3 times,” name of the last 4 Sanghādisesa offences because before the punishment is inflicted warning must have been given 3 times ‣See passage of Vin iii.186 under yāva t-ihaṁ

        • tihaṁ (read as yāvat-ihaṁ, the latter = aha2 day) as many days as …; in following passage: uddiṭṭhā … terasa sanghādisesā dhammā, nava patham-āpattikā cattāro yāvatatiyakā, yesaṁ bhikkhu aññataraṁ vā aññataraṁ vā āpajjitvā yāvatihaṁ jānaṁ paṭicchādeti tāvatihaṁ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaṁ (for as many days as he knowingly conceals his sin, for so many days …), parivuttha-parivāsena bhikkhunā uttariṁ chārattaṁ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaṁ Vin iii.186
        Vedic yāvat as
      4. neuter of yāvant used as
      5. adverb in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pāli, but restored as; d in certain combinations ‣See below 2

        • cp. tāva kīva;
    Yāvaka
    1. a dish prepared of barley Ja vi.373 (= yavataṇḍula-bhatta Commentary )
    = yavaka
    Yāvataka
    adjective
    1. as much as, as many as, as far as, whatever; usually in correl with tāvataka e.g. Vin i.83 (yāvataka … t.) DN ii.18 (y. kāyo t. vyāmo) Nd2 2353 (y ˚ṁ ñeyyaṁ t ˚ṁ ñāṇaṁ); or similarly MN i.397 (y. kathā-sallāpo.. sabbaṁ taṁ …) Pv-a 103 (yāvatakā = yāvanto). feminine yāvatikā : yāvatikā gati tāvatikaṁ gantvā AN i.112 y. nāgassa bhūmi as far as there was ground for the elephant DN i.50 similarly: y. yānassa bh. as far as the carriage-road DN i.89 DN i.106 DN i.108 y. ñāṇassa bh Nett 25
    2. from yāva, as tāvataka from tāva
    Yāvatā
    indeclinable
    1. lokasmiṁ yad idam arahanto “as far as the abodes of beings, as far as heaven, these are the highest these are the best, I mean the Arahants.” SN iii.84 yāvatā dhammā sankhatā vā asankhatā vā virāgo.. aggam akkhāyati, yad-idaṁ mada-nimmadano.. AN ii.34 = It 88; “of all the things definite or indefinite passionlessness deserves the highest praise, I mean the disintoxication of pride etc.” The explanation at Vism 293 takes yāvatā (grammatically incorrectly) as nominative
    2. plural yattakā

      • yāvatā jagato gati as far as (like as) the course of the world Iti 120
      ablative of yāvant in adverb use cp. tāvatā as far as, like as, in comparison with, regarding, because Dhp 258 (na tena paṇḍito hoti y. bahu bhāsati = yattakena kāraṇena Dhp-a iii.383), 259, 266 (similarly, Commentary yattakena) Snp 759 (yāvat’ atthī ti vuccati; explained at Snp-a 509 as “yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā ʻ atthī ʼ ti vuccanti vacana-vyattayo veditabbo”); yāvatā ariyaṁ paramaṁ sīlaṁ, nâhaṁ tattha attano sama-samaṁ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo “compared with this sīla I do not ‣See anyone quite equal to myself, much less greater.” DN i.74
    3. yāvatā ariyaṁ āyatanaṁ yavatā vanippatho idaṁ agga-nagaraṁ bhavissati Pātaliputtaṁ puṭa-bhedanaṁ Vin i.229 = Ud 88 = DN ii.87 (concerning a most splendid site, and a condition for trade, this Pāṭ will be the greatest town; translation Dial. as far as Aryan people resort, as far as merchants travel …). yāvatā satt’ āvāsā yāvatā bhavaggaṁ ete aggā ete saṭṭhā [read seṭṭhā
    Yāvant
    1. (pronoun rel.)

      1. yāvant as adjective: as many (as) Dhp 337 (hāvant’ ettha samāgatā as many as are assembled here) Ja v.72 (yāvanto uda-bindūni.. tāvanto gaṇḍū jāyetha; Commentary on p. 74 explains by yattakāni; yāvatā
      2. plural as many as Pv ii.116; yāvanto Pv ii.716 (= yāvatakā Pv-a 103) Ja v.370 (detha vatthāni.. yavanto eva icchati as many as he wants)
      3. yāvat
      4. neuter used
      5. adverb ially. The examples and meanings given here are really to be combined with those given under yāva2 (yāvad˚). It is hardly possible to distinguish clearly between the 2 categories; the t may well have been reduced to d or been replaced by another sandhi consonant. However, the specific Pāli use of yāva (like tāva justifies a separate treatment of yāva in that form only
      6. yāvat occurs only in combination with ca (where we may assume either a peculiar
      7. neuter form yāvaṁ ‣See yāva 2; or an assimilation of t to ñ before c
      8. The form yāva mahantaṁ may originally have been a yāvaṁ m.) as yāvañ ca “and that,” “i.e.,” how much, however much, so great SN i.149 (
      9. passive yāvañ ca te idaṁ aparaddhaṁ ‣See how great a mistake you have made in this) Iti 91 92 (
      10. passive yāvañ ca ārakā santike ‣See how far and near). yāvañ c’ idaṁ stands for; yad-idaṁ ‣See ya˚ 4 in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169 SN ii.178 AN iii.34
      11. The

        • neuter form yāvat further occurs in following compounds.: ˚āyukaṁ (better as yāvat˚ than yāvatā˚) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mhvs 3, 41 Vv-a 196 (as adjective ˚āyukā dibba-sampatti) Pv-a 66 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 133; ˚icchakaṁ as much as is desired, according to one’s wishes Pug 12 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yāvad -icchakaṁ); ˚ihaṁ ‣See under yāva (compounds

          • instrumental yavatā ‣See sep
          cp. Sanskrit yāvant; same formation as demonstrative
        • pronoun tāvant, of which the Pali uses the
        • adverb nt tāva (t) form more frequently than the adjective tāvant The only case so far ascertained where tāvant occurs as adjective is Ja v.72 ‣See below
    Yāvetadohi
    1. at MN ii.47 is an obscure expression. The reading is established; otherwise one might think of a corrupted yāv(a) etad ahosī(pi) or yāva-d-ev'-ahosi “was it really so?” or: “did you really have that thought?” Neumann, Mittl. Sammlung2 1921; ii.381 translates “gar so sehr drängt es dich” (are you in such a hurry?), and proposes reading (on p. 686, note) yāv etado hi pi, leaving us wondering what etado might be-Could it be a distorted yāyetar (agent noun of yāyeti causative ?

    Yiṭṭha
    1. med.: having sacrificed DN i.138 (mahā-yaññaṁ y. rājā)-pass.: sacrificed, neuter sacrifice DN i.55 (dinna, y huta); explained at DN-a i.165 by “mahāyāgaVb 328 (identical) Ja i.83 (y. + huta); iv.19 (= yajita Commentary ); v.49 vi.527
    • duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites Ja vi.522 In specific Buddhistic sense “given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift Vin i.36 Ja i.168 = AN ii.44 MN i.82 Dhp 108 (yaṁ kiñci yiṭṭhaṁ va hutaṁ va Dhp-a ii.234 = yebhuyyena mangalakiriya-divasesu dinna-dānaṁ)
    • suyiṭṭha well given or spent AN ii.44 Thag-a 40 Vv 3426 (in both senses Vv-a 155 explains “mahā-yāga-vasena yiṭṭhaṁ”)
    past participle of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa
    Yidha
    1. in mā yidha at Vin i.54 is to be read mā-y-idha, the y being an euphonic consonant ‣See y.
    Yuga
    neuter
    1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage Dhp-a i.24 (yugaṁ gīvaṁ bādhati presses on the neck) Pv-a 127 (ratha˚); Sdhp 468 (of a carriage) Also at Snp 834 in phrase dhonena yugaṁ samāgamā which Buddhaghosa (Snp-a 542) explains as “dhuta-kilesena buddhena saddhiṁ yugaggāhaṁ samāpanno,” i.e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann Sn translation not exactly: “weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch” (but dhona means “pure”) ‣See also below ˚nangala
    2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; applied to objects, as—˚: dussa˚; a pair of robes SN v.71 Dhp-a iv.11 Pv-a 53
    3. sāṭaka˚ id Ja i.8 Ja i.9 Pv-a 46
    4. vattha˚ identical Ja iv.172
    5. tapassi˚ a pair of ascetics Vv 2210
    6. dūta˚ a pair of messengers SN iv.194
    7. sāvaka˚ of disciples DN ii.4 SN i.155 SN ii.191 SN v.164; in general: purisa˚; (cattāri p
    8. yugāni) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272f. = It 88; in verse at Vv 4421 and 533 explained at Vism 219 as follows: yugaḷa-vasena paṭhamamagga-ṭṭho phala-ṭṭho ti idam ekaṁ yugaḷan ti evaṁ cattāri purisa -yugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as “aṭṭha purisa-puggalā.” Referring to “pairs of sins (so the Commentary ) in a somewhat doubtful passage at Ja i.374 sa mangala-dosa-vītivatto yuga-yog’ âdhigato na jātum eti; where Commentary explainsyugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma˚ bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚
    9. Also used like an adjective num in meaning “two,” e.g. yugaṁ vā nāvaṁ two boats Dīpavaṁsa i.76
    10. (connected by descent) generation, an age DN i.113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā “back through seven generations.” cp. DN-a i.281: āyuppamāṇa); Kp-a 141 (identical) Ja i.345 (purisa˚). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the life of the
      1. sāsana ‣See Brethren, p. 339: vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta dāna
      1. ˚anta (-vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind Ja i.26
      • ˚ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing MN i.446
      • ˚ggāha “holding the yoke,” i.e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as synonym for palāsa at Vb 357 = Pug 19 (so read for yuddha˚), explained by sama-dhura-ggahaṇaṁ “taking the leadership altogether” at Vb-a 492 ‣See further Nd1 177 Vv-a 71 (yugaggāha-lakkhaṇo paḷāso) Snp-a 542 Dhp-a iii.57 (˚kathā = sārambhakathā). —˚ṁ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord Ja iii.259 (Commentary for Text palāsin) Dhp-a iii.346
      • ˚ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering imperious Vv-a 140
      • ˚cchidda the hole of a yoke Thag 2, 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle)
      • ˚naṅgala yoke and plough (so taken by Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 135) Snp 77 SN i.172 (“plough fitted with yoke” Mrs. Rhys Davids) -nandha (with variant reading ˚naddha, e.g. at Ps ii.92 sq.; Kp-a 27 in Text) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adjective congruous harmonious; as
      • nt. congruity, association common cause Ps ii.98 = Vism 682; Ps ii.92 sq. (˚vagga & ˚kathā); Kp-a 27
      • neuter ; Vism 149 (˚dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents) -mattaṁ (
      • adverb ) “only the distance of a plough,” i.e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead with expressions of sight: pekkhati Snp 410 (“no more than a fathom’s length” Rhys Davids in Early Buddhism 32) pekkhin Mil 398 ˚dassāvin Vism 19 (okkhitta-cakkhu +) pekkhamāna Snp-a 116 (as explanation of okkhittacakkhu)
      • ˚sāṭaka (= s

        • yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dīpavaṁsa vi.82. Yugala & Yugala;
        from yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga) = Latin jugum = Gothic juk; Old High German juh; English yoke Lithuanian jungas
    Yugala
    Yugaḷa;
    neuter
    1. a pair couple Ja i.12 (yugaḷa-yugaḷa-bhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu˚); vi.270 (thana˚ the 2 breasts); Vism 219 Vb-a 51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six “pairs of adaptabilities” or “words,” Yog. 18–⁠23, Mystic 30 sq. cp. Dhs 40f. Also used as adjective (like yuga) in phrase yugalaṁ karoti to couple, join, unite Dīpavaṁsa i.77 Vv-a 233
    Classical Sanskrit yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Latin jugulum (“yoke-bone”) to jugum
    Yugalaka
    neuter
    1. a pair Tika-Paṭṭhāna 66 Vb-a 73
    from yugala
    Yuja
    adjective (—˚)
    1. yoked or to be yoked applicable, to be studied, only in compound duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult Ja v.368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; Commentary reads duyyuñja
    either a direct root-derivation from yuj, corresponding to Sanskrit yuj (or yuk, cp. Latin con-jux “conjugal,” conjux, Gothic ga-juka companion); or a simplified form of the gerundive *yujya → *yujja → yuja
    Yujjha
    adjective
    1. to be fought; negative ; not to be fought, invincible MN ii.24 (so read for ayojjha)
    gerundive of yujjhati
    Yujjhati

    1. to fight, make war. Rare in older literature our references only from the Mahāvaṁsa; e.g. 22, 82 (fut yujjhissāma, with instrumental: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aorist ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (
    2. aorist yujjhi) To which add Dhp-a ii.154 (mallayuddhaṁ yujjhanto) iii.259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiṁ yujjhanto).
    3. past participle yuddha -
    4. causative yodheti (q.v.)
    5. cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning “sampahāra” at Dhtp 415 Etymologically to Idg *ieudh to shake, from which in various meanings Latin jubeo to command, juba horse’s mane; Lithuanian jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Avestan yaošti agility
    Yujjhana
    neuter
    1. fighting, making war Ja iii.6 Ja iii.82
    from yujjhati
    Yujjhāpana
    neuter
    1. making somebody fight, inciting to war Mil 178
    from yujjhati causative
    Yuñjati
    1. (literally) to yoke; (figuratively) to join with (instrumental or locative ), to engage in (
    2. locative ), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the literally meaning is only found in the
    3. causative yojeti

      • Often explained by and coupled with the synonym ghaṭati & vāyamati; , e.g. at Ja iv.131 v.369 Dhp-a iv.137
      • Forms: pres. yuñjati Dhp 382 Ja v.369 2nd
      • plural yuñjatha Thag 2, 346 (kāmesu; = niyojetha Thag-a 241); ppr. yuñjanto Ja iv.131 (kammaṭṭhāne)
      • imperative yuñja SN i.52 (sāsane) Thag-a 12
      • medium imper yuñjassu Thag 2, 5
      • passive yujjati (in grammar or logic is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant Kp-a 168 Snp-a 148 403, 456.
      • causative I. yojeti & II.; yojāpeti (q.v.)
      • past participle yutta
      Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte,; yuj; cp. Latin jūs = Pali yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (literally & figuratively) meanings of; yuj, viz. “yoge” (No. 378) “samādhimhi” (399), “saṁgamane” (550)
    Yuta
    1. fastened to (locative ), attracted by, bent on, engaged in D. i.57 (sabba-vārī˚) Snp 842 (pesuṇeyye Nd1 233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further explanation āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs v.18 (dhiti˚)-Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā-yuta in Niraya passage at AN i.142 = MN iii.183 = Nd1 405 = Nd2 304iii = J v.266. The more likely reading is either tejas’ āyuta (so Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd2 & Pv-a 52), i.e. endowed with, furnished with full of heat

      • We find a similar confusion between; uyyuta & uyyutta;
      past participle of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: “missane”
    Yutta
    1. (literally) yoked, harnessed (to
    2. locative ) Pv i.114 (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yattā) Dhp-a i.24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā)
    3. coupled; connected with; (applied) devoted to applied to, given to, engaged in (—˚, instrumental or
    4. locative ) Snp 820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya˚), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd2 532) Iti 93 (Buddha-sāsane) Ja vi.206 (yoga˚)
    5. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Snp 442 (Māra = uyyutta Snp-a 392) Pv-a 53

      • able, fit (to or for = infinitive), suitable, sufficient Snp 826 (cp. Nd1 164) Ja v.219 DN-a i.141 (dassituṁ yutta = dassanīya) Vv-a 191 (= alaṁ) Pv-a 74

    6. proper, right Pv-a 159

      • due to (—˚, with a
      • gerundive, apparently superfluous Ja iii.208 (āsankitabba˚); cp. yuttaka

      • neuter conjunction i.e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin ii.217

        • ayutta not fit, not right, improper Pv-a 6 (perhaps delete), 64
        • suyutta well fit, right proper, opposite duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaṁ duyuttaṁ ācikkhati Ja i.296 (here perhaps for dur-utta?) du˚ also literally “badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state” at Ja iv.245 (of a gate)
        1. ˚kāra acting properly Pv-a 66
        • ˚kārin acting rightly Mil 49
        • ˚paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pug 42 (cp PugA 223)
        • ˚payutta intent on etc. Pv-a 150
        • ˚ rūpa one who is able or fit (to = infinitive) Ja i.64
        • ˚vāha justified Vv-a 15
        past participle of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Latin junctus, Lithuanian jùnktas
    Yuttaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhamma-yuttakaṁ katheti to speak righteous speech Ja iv.356

      • Usually combined with a
      • gerundive seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e.g. kātabba˚ what had to be done Pv-a 81 Dhp-a i.13 (as kattabba˚) āpucchitabba˚; fit to be asked Dhp-a i.6
      from yutta
    Yutti
    1. “fitting,” i.e. 1. application, use Mil 3 (opamma˚)
    • fitness vāda˚, KVA 37; in instrumental yuttiyā in accordance with Mhvs 10, 66 (vacana˚); Sdhp 340 (sutti˚); and abl yuttito Sdhp 505

  • (logical) fitness, right construction correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), applied to the exposition of texts, enumerated in the 1st section of the Netti; e.g. at Nett 1

    1. -3, 103; Kp-a 18 Snp-a 551 552. Thus ablative yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato Vb-a 173 = Vism 562; and yutti-vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) Snp-a 103 (contrasted to anussava
    • trick device, practice Ja vi.215
    1. ˚kata combined with; neuter union, alloy Vv-a 13
    2. cp. Vedic yukti connection, from yuj
  • Yuddha
    neuter
    1. war, battle, fight DN i.6 (daṇḍa˚ fighting with sticks or weapons) Ja iii.541 (identical) Snp 442 (dative yuddhāya) Ja vi.222 Mil 245 (kilesa˚ as past participle : one who fights sin); Mhvs 10, 45 (˚atthaṁ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight) 25, 52 (yuddhāy’ āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaṁ yujjhati) 32, 13 (maccu˚ fight with death); 33, 42 Dhp-a ii.154 (malla˚ fist-fight)

      • The form yudhāya at Snp 831 is to be taken as (archaic) dative of Vedic yudh
      • feminine, used in sense of an infinitive & equal to yuddhāya. Nd; 1 172 explains as “yuddh’ atthāya.”
      1. ˚kāla time for the battle Mhvs 10, 63
      2. ˚ṭṭha eṅgaged in war SN i.100 (so read for ˚ttha)
      3. ˚maṇḍala fightingring arena Ja iv.81 Vism 190 Vb-a 356 (in comparison)
      originally past participle of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (
    2. past participle ) and yudh
    3. feminine the fight
    Yuddhaka
    1. a fighter, in malla˚; fist-fighter, pugilist Ja iv.81
    from yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)
    Yudhikā
    feminine
    1. name of a tree Ja v.422 (for Text yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in Commentary reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q.v.), as is also given in vv.ll
    doubtful
    Yuvan

    1. a youth- nominative singular ; yuvā DN i.80 = yobbanena samannāgata DN-a i.223 Snp 420 Dhp 280 (= paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita Dhp-a iii.409); Pv iii.71 (= taruṇa Pv-a 205)

      • Cp yava, yuvin & yobbana;
      Vedic yuvan; cp. Avestan yavan = Latin juvenis, Lithuanian jáunas young; Latin juvencus “calf”; juventus youth Gothic junda, Old High German jugund & jung, English young The n-stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also declines after a-stem, e.g. genitive yuvassa Mhvs 18, 28
    Yuvin
    adjective-noun
    1. young Ja iv.106 Ja iv.222
    = yuvan with diff-adjective ending
    Yūtha
    neuter
    1. a flock, herd of animals Snp 53 (of elephants) Ja i.170 (monkeys), 280 (identical) Snp-a 322 (go˚, of oxen)
    1. ˚pa the leader of a herd Thag 2, 437 (elephants)
    2. ˚pati same Ja iii.174 (elephant) Dhp-a i.81 (identical)
    Vedic yūtha
    Yūthikā
    feminine
    1. a kind of jasmine, Jasminum auriculatum Ja vi.537 Mil 338 So is also to be read at Ja v.420 (for yodhi) & 422 (yodhikā yudhikā) ‣See also; yodhikā
    cp. later Sanskrit yūthikā
    Yūpa
    1. a sacrificial post DN i.141 AN iv.41 Ja iv.302 Ja vi.211 Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Snp-a 321 322 DN-a i.294
    2. a pāsāda, or palace Thag 1, 163 = J ii.334
      1. ˚ussāpana the erection of the sacr. post Dhs-a 145 (cp. Mil 21)
      Vedic yūpa
    Yūsa
    1. [Vedic yūṣan, later Sanskrit yūṣa; from base Indogermanic *i̯ūs, cp. Latin jūs soup, Old Bulgarian jucha = German jauche manure; Swedish ōst cheese an enlargement of base *ieu to mix, as in Sanskrit yu to mix ‣See yuta, to which further *ieṷe, as in yuñjati.1. juice Vin i.206 (akaṭa˚ natural juice); Mhvs 28, 26 Vv-a 185 (badara˚ of the jujube); Vism 195 (seda sweaty fluid)
    • soup, broth. Four kinds of broths are enumerated at MN i.245 viz. mugga˚; bean soup, kulattha˚ of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaḷāya˚; (chick-) pea soup hareṇuka˚; pea soup Mil 63 (rañño sūdo yūsaṁ vā rasaṁ vā kareyya)
    Yebhuyya
    adjective
    1. sattā Ābhassarasaṁvaṭṭanikā honti; explained by half allegorical, half popular etymology at DN-a i.110 as follows: “ye upari Brahma-lokesu vā Āruppesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṁ”) DN ii.139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka-dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule) Snp p. 107 (= bahukāni Snp-a 451) Mil 6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually) DN-a i.280 (ordinarily) Vv-a 234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita-dvāram eva hoti usually) Pv-a 2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y tāya tāya atth’ uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa-sobhaṁ disvā taruṇa-janā y. tattha paṭibaddha-cittā adesuṁ invariably)
    • na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nâpi y. ruditena kāci attha-siddhi Pv-a 63
    ye = yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya = yad bhiyya “what is more or most(ly)” abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adjective by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya-vasena mostly, as a rule Thag-a 51 and Pv-a 136 which is identical with the usual instrumental yebhuyyena occurring as adverb “as according to most,” i.e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase “practically dead”), mostly DN i.105 (addasā dvattiṁsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two) = 109 Vin iii.29f. Ja i.246 (gāmako y andha-bāla-manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); v.335 (y. asīti-mahātherā, altogether).
  • as it happens (or happened) usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily DN i.17 (saṁvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule
  • Yebhuyyasikā
    feminine
    1. literally “according to the majority,” i.e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathas, or means of settling a dispute
    • Vin ii.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaṁ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṁ), 93 (vivād’ âdhikaraṇaṁ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā-vinayena ca yebhuyyasịkāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin iv.207 = 351 (the seven are: sammukhā-vinaya, sati-vinaya, amūḷha˚, paṭiññā, yebhuyyasikā tassa-pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ’ avatthāraka). explained in detail at MN ii.247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. cp. DN iii.254 (the seven enumerated) AN i.99 iv.144
    formation from yebhuyya like tassapāpiyya-sikā. Originally adjective, with kiriyā to be understood
    Yeva

    indeclinable

    1. emphatic particle meaning “even, just, also”; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as : Snp 580 (pekkhataṁ yeva), 822 (vivekaṁ) Dhp-a ii.20 (saddhiṁ) Pv-a 3 (tasmiṁ), 4 (imasmiṁ), 13 (tumhākaṁ); -further after o: Pv-a 39 (apanīto yeva); -after ā : Snp 1004 (manasā yeva); -after i: SN ii.206 (vuddhi yeva) Pv-a 11 (ahosi); -after e: Ja i.82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.) Vb-a 135 (na kevalaṁ ete yeva, aññe pi “not only these, but also others”). cp. Mhvs 22, 56 Vv-a 222 Pv-a 47 Yevapana(ka)
    = eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger; Pali Grammar § 66, 1 ‣See also eva 2 The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 336
    Yevāpana(ka)
    adjective
    1. corresponding reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; literally “whatever else.” The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma ‣See e.g. Dhs-a 152 (yevāpanā, plural and ˚kā); Vism 468, 271 sq. Vb-a 63 70 sq.; cp. Dhs translation1 p. 5 and introduction p. 56
    • Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as nominative
    • plural, e.g. Dhs 1 58, 151–⁠161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiṁ samaye aññe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaṁ yaṁ vā pan’ ārabbha, in same sense
    not connected with yeva, but an adjective formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaṁ : cp. yebhuyya
    Yoga
    literally “yoking, or being yoked,” i.e. connection bond, means; figuratively application, endeavour, device
    1. -1. yoke, yoking (rare?) Ja vi.206 (meant here the yoke of the churning-sticks; cp. Ja vi.209)
    • connection with (—˚), application to; (natural) relation (i.e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opposite dibba yoga : SN i.35 = 60 Snp 641 Dhp 417 explained at Dhp-a iv.225 as “kāya.” association with: DN iii.176 application: Vism 520 (+ uppāda). yogato ablative from being connected with by association with Pv-a 40 (bālya˚), 98 (sammappadhāna˚)
    • pubba˚ connection with a former body, one’s former action or life-history Ja v.476 Ja vi.480 Mil 2 ‣See pubbe1
    • aḍḍhayoga a “half-connected” building, i.e. a half-roofed monastery Vin i.239 Vism 34-nakkhatta˚ a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) Ja i.82 Ja i.253 (dhana-vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); iii.98 Dhp-a i.174 Dhs-a 232 (in simile)

  • (figuratively) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Compendium 1712). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enumerated in detail at AN ii.10 DN iii.230 DN iii.276 Ja i.374 cp. Ps i.129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu-yoga-yojito) Vb-a 35 Mentioned or referred to at SN v.59 Dhs 1059 (ogha + , in definition of taṇhā), cp, Dhs translation 308; Nett 31 (with ogha), 114 (identical); as sabba- (or sabbe) yogā at Thag 2, 4 76 SN i.213 Dhp-a iii.233 severally at Iti 95 (bhava-yoga-yutta āgāmī hoti, + kāma˚); ogha + yoga : Pug 21 (avijjā˚) Vism 211, 684; cp. also DN ii.274 (pāpima-yogāni the ties of the Evil one) Iti 80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaṁ)

    • application, endeavour, undertaking, effort Dhp-a iii.233 234 (= samma-ppadhāna). yogaṁ karoti to make an effort, to strive after dative SN ii.131 AN ii.93 (āsavānaṁ khayāya y. karaṇīya) Mil 35
    • yogaṁ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active SN iii.11f. Vb 356 (attanā)
    • dhamma˚ one who is devoted to the Dhamma AN iii.355
    • yutta˚ (bent on, i.e. earnest in endeavour Ja i.65
    • yāca˚ given to making offerings ‣See yāca

  • pondering (over), concentration devotion MN i.472 Dhp 209 (= yoniso manasikāra Dhp-a iii.275), 282 (same explanation at Dhp-a iii.421) Mil 3 Vb 324 (yoga-vihitesu kamm’ & sipp'-āyatanesu Vb-a 410 explains: y. vuccati paññā; -perhaps better to above 4?).

    • (magic) power, influence, device scheme Ja vi.212 (yoga-yogena practice of spells etc = tāya tāya yuttiyā Commentary ) Pv-a 117 (combined with manta ascribed to devas)

  • means, instrument, remedy Ja i.380 (vamana˚ an emetic); vi.74 (ekaṁ yogaṁ datvā but we better read bhesajjaṁ tassa datvā for vatvā and ekaṁ yogaṁ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of “charm, incantation”) Mil 109 (yena yogena sattānaṁ guṇa-vaḍḍhi … tena hitaṁ upadahati).

    1. ˚ātiga one who has conquered the yoke, i.e. bond of the body or rebirth Iti 61 (muni), 81 (identical)
    2. ˚ātigāmin ˚âtiga AN ii.12 (same as sabba-yoga-visaṁyutta) -āvacara “one at home in endeavour,” or in spiritual (especially jhāna-) exercises; one who practises “yoga” an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature
    • J i.303, 394, 400; iii.241 (saṁsārasāgaraṁ taranto y.); Ps ii.26; KvuA 32 Mil 33f. 43 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi-study), 587, 637, 666, 708 Dhp-a ii.12 (padhānaṁ padahanto y.); iii.241 (˚bhikkhu) Dhs-a 187 (ādhikammika), 246 (˚kulayutta) Vb-a 115 220, 228 (as bhikkhu on alms-round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; Kp-a 74 Snp-a 20 374
    • ˚ kkhema already Vedic yoga-kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession

    rest from work or exertion, or figuratively in scholastic interpretation “peace from bondage,” i.e. perfect peace or “uttermost safety” (Kindred Sayings ii.132); a frequently epithet of nibbāna same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit : yogakṣema e.g. Divy 98 Divy 123, 303, 498

    1. MN i.117 (˚kāma), 349, 357 (anuttara) SN i.173 (˚adhivāhana); ii.195 (anuttara) 226; iii.112 (˚kāma, negative); iv.125; v.130 sq. AN i.50 (anuttara); ii.40, 52 (a˚), 87, 247; iii.21, 294 sq., 353 DN iii.123 DN iii.125 DN iii.164 (˚kāma) Vin ii.205 = It 11 (˚ato dhaṁsati, whereas Vin ˚ā padhaṁsati) Iti 9 27 (abhabbo ˚ssa adhigamāya) Thag 2, 6 Snp 79 (˚adhivāhana), 425 Dhp 23 (anuttara, cp. Dhp-a i.231); Ps i.39; ii.81 Vb 247 (kulāni y-kh-kāmāni, which Vb-a 341 explains catūhi yogehi khemaṁ nibbhayaṁ icchanti) Thag-a 13-kkhemin finding one’s rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated free, an Arahant SN iii.13 (accanta˚); iv.85 AN ii.12 AN iv.310 (patta˚); v.326 (accanta˚) Dhp-a iii.233 234 (= sabba-yoga-visaṁyutta); negative ; not finding one’s salvation AN ii.52 (in verse) = Ps ii.80 Iti 50-ññu knowing the (right) means Mil 169f. -bahula strong in exertion AN iii.432
    • ˚yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) AN ii.52 (so read for ˚gutta the verse also at Ps ii.80, 81, and Iti 50)
    • ˚vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) Snp-a 266
    Vedic yoga ‣See etymology under yuga & yuñjati. Usually masculine ;
  • plural neuter yogāni occurs at DN ii.274 in meaning “bonds”
  • Yoganīya
    adjective
    1. of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter-ish Dhs 584 Dhs-a 49 (cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp. oghaniya
    from yoga; gerundive formation
    Yogin
    adjective-noun
    1. (—˚) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism 70 (hattha˚ & patta˚ using the hand or the bowl but translation p. 80: “hand-ascetic” & “bowl-ascetic”). 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest reference is Thag 1, 947 (pubbake yogī “Saints of other days” Mrs Rhys Davids). Frequently in Miln, e.g.
    2. past participle 2, 356 (yogi-jana) at
    3. past participle 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Combd with yogâvacara Mil 366 Mil 404
    4. Further passages are Nett 3, 10, 61; Vism 2, 14, 66, 71 (in verse), 150, 320 373, 509, 620, 651, 696 Dhs-a 195 327
    5. from yoga, cp. Classical Sanskrit yogin
    Yogga1
    neuter
    1. “what may be yoked,” i.e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) Ja vi.31f. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā˚) Dhp-a ii.151 (mahā˚ & paṭicchanna)
    • a draughtbullock ox Vv.84; 8; Pv ii.936 (= ratha-yuga-vāhana Pv-a 127) Ja vi.221
    • yoggāni muñcati to unharness the oxen Pv-a 43 Pv-a 100
    • Vedic yogya; a gerundive formation from yoga in meaning of yoga 1
    Yogga2
    neuter & adjective)
    1. neuter a contrivance Ja iv.269 (yoggaṁ karoti, may be in meaning “training, practice” here ‣See yoggā) Vv-a 8 (gahaṇa˚)
    2. adjective fit for (= yutta), adapted to, suitable; either—˚ or with infinitive: Vv-a 291 Pv-a 25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana˚), 152 (kamma-vipāk ânubhavana˚), 154 (gamana˚ passable, variant reading yogya), 228 (anubhavana˚)
    same as last, in meaning of yoga 7
    Yoggā
    feminine
    1. training, practice Ja ii.165 (yoggaṁ karoti to practise); iv.269 (identical) Dhp-a i.52 (lakkha-yoggaṁ karoti to practise shooting) adjective (—˚) katayogga well-practised, trained SN i.62 SN i.98 (negative). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha-dhamma- passages e.g. at SN ii.266 MN i.82 AN ii.48
      1. ˚ācariya a groom, trainer SN iv.176 = M i.124 MN iii.97 222 Thag 1, 1140 Ja i.505
      Vedic and Epic Sanskrit yogyā; same as yogga2, from yoga
    Yojana
    neuter
    1. the yoke of a carriage Ja vi.38 Ja vi.42 (= ratha-yuga)
    2. a measure of length as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen) a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Buddhaghosa as equal to 4 gāvutas (Dhp-a ii.13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana-tigāvuta-usabha at Dhp-a i.108 Dhp 60 Ja v.37 (yojana-yojana-vitthatā each a mile square) Snp-a 194 More favoured combinations of yojana with numbers are the following: 1/2 (aḍḍha˚): DN-a i.35 Dhs-a 142
      1. -3: Dhp-a ii.41
      1. -4: Pv-a 113
      1. -5: Vv-a 33
      1. -15: Dhp-a i.17 Ja i.315 Pv-a 154
      1. -18: Ja i.81 Ja i.348
      1. -20: Dhp-a iv.112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness)
      1. -25 Vv-a 236
      1. -45: Ja i.147 Ja i.348 Dhp-a i.367
      1. -50: Vism 417
      1. -100: DN i.117 Iti 91 Pv i.1014
      1. -500: Ja i.204
      1. -1,000: Ja i.203
      • cp. yojanika
      Vedic yojana
    Yojanā
    feminine
    1. (grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning Kp-a 156 218, 243 Snp-a 20 90, 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177 248, 255, 313 Pv-a 45 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 139 (attha˚), and passim in Commentaries
    * Sanskrit yojanā, from yojeti
    Yojanika
    adjective
    1. a yojana in extent Ja i.92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma) Dhp-a i.274 (maṇipallanka)
    from yojana
    Yojita
    1. yoked, tied, bound Ps i.129 (catuyoga˚ fettered by the four bonds) Snp-a 137 (yottehi y.)
    past participle of yojeti
    Yojitaka
    adjective
    1. connected with, mixed; negative a˚ not mixed (with poison), unadulterated Ja i.269
    from yojita
    Yojeti
    1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv ii.936 (vāhana, the draught-bullock); Mhvs 35, 40 (yojayi
    2. aorist ; variant reading for yojāpayi) Pv-a 74 (sindhave). 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply Ja i.252 (suraṁ), 269 (identical); Mhvs 22, 4 (ambaṁ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaṁ phalesu poison the fruit). 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mhvs 30, 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers) dvāraṁ to put a door right, to fix it properly Ja i.201 iv.245 (cp. yojāpeti)
    3. to engage, incite, urge commission, put up to, admonish Mhvs 17, 38 (manusse) 37, 9 (vihāraṁ nāsetuṁ y. incited to destroy the v.) Pv-a 69
    4. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning Snp-a 148 (yojetabba) Pv-a 98 (identical), 278 (identical).

      • causative II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: DN ii.95 (yānāni, to harness) Ja i.150 (dvāraṁ, to set right); Mhvs 35, 40 (rathe, to harness)

        • passive yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed Ja i.57 (nangalasahassaṁ y.).
        • past participle yojita
        causative of yuñjati
    Yojjha
    1. in MN ii.24 read yujjha (of yudh
    Yotta
    neuter
    1. the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart SN i.172 = Sn 77 SN iv.163 SN iv.282 Ja i.464 Ja ii.247 (camma˚); iv.82; v.45 (cammay
    • varatta), 47; Vism 269 Dhp-a i.205 Snp-a 137 As dhura-yotta at Ja i.192 Ja vi.253
    Vedic yoktra, cp. Latin junctor; Epic Sanskrit yoktṛ one who yokes
    Yottaka
    neuter
    1. a tie, band, halter, rope Ja vi.252 Mil 53 Vism 254, 255 Dhp-a iii.208
    yatta + ka
    Yodha
    a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin i.73 (yodhā yuddh’ âbhinandino … pabbajjaṁ yāciṁsu) Ja i.180 Mil 293
    1. ˚ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier SN iv.308 = AN iii.94 AN i.284 AN ii.170 AN ii.202 AN iii.89f. (five kinds) Snp 617 Snp 652 Pug 65 69
    2. ˚hatthin a war elephant Dhp-a i.168
    cp. Vedic yodha; from yudh
    Yodhi
    1. = yodhikā Ja v.420
    Yodhikā
    feminine
    1. a special kind of jasmine Vv 354 Ja iv.440 (yoth˚), 442; v.422 Vv-a 162 (as thalaja and a tree)
    a various reading of yūthikā (q.v.)
    Yodhin
    1. a warrior; camma˚; a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade DN i.51 AN iv.107
    = yodha
    Yodheti
    1. to attack, to fight against (accusative ) Dhp 40 (yodhetha = pahareyya Dhp-a i.317) Ja v.183
    2. causative of yujjhati
    Yoni
    feminine
    1. the womb
    2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous saṁsedaja moisture-sprung, opapātika spontaneous MN i.73 DN iii.230 Mil 146 Vism 552, 557 sq.; cp. Vb-a 203 sq
    3. frequently in following combinations: tiracchāna˚; the class of animals, the brute creation AN i.37 AN i.60 AN v.269 Iti 92 Pv iv.111; Vism 103, 427 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 166; nāga˚ birth among the Nāgas SN iii.240f. (in reference to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied) Vism 102 (niraya-nāga-yoni); pasu˚; = tiracchāna˚ Pv ii.1312; pisāca˚; world of the Pisācas SN i.209
    4. peta˚ the realm of the Petas Pv-a 68 (cp. peta)
    5. kamma˚ K. as origin AN iii.186
    6. yoni upaparikkhitabba (= kiṁjātikā etc.) SN iii.42
    7. ayoni unclean origin Thag 1, 219
    8. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Nett 40

      • ayoni superficiality in thought SN i.203 (“muddled ways Mrs. Rhys Davids)
      • yoniso ablative “down to its origin or foundation,” i.e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly judiciously SN i.203 (“in ordered governance” Kindred Sayings i.259) DN i.118 (wisely) Iti 30 (āraddha āsavānaṁ khayāya) Pug 25 Vism 30, 132, 599; PpA 31. Opp ayoniso disorderly improperly Pug 21 Dhp-a i.327 Pv-a 113 Pv-a 278
      • Especially frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra “fixing one’s attention with a purpose or thoroughly,” proper attention, “having thorough method in one’s thought” (Kindred Sayings i.259) Ps i.85 sq. Iti 9 Ja i.116 Mil 32 Nett 8, 40, 50, 127; Vism 132 Pv-a 63 ‣See also manasikāra
      • O
      • past participle ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention DN iii.273 Vb-a 148 Thag-a 79 In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; Avs i.122; ii.112 (Speyer: “the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is”) ‣See further on term Dialogues of the Buddha iii.218 (“systematized attention”); Kindred Sayings i.131; ii.6 (“radical grasp”)
      1. ˚ja born from the womb Snp 620 Dhp 396
      • ˚pamukha principal sort of birth DN i.54 MN i.517
      Vedic yoni
    Yobbana
    (neuter)
    1. youth DN i.115 AN i.68 AN iii.5 AN iii.66 AN iii.103 Dhp 155 Dhp 156 Snp 98 Snp 110 Snp 218 Pv i.76 Dhp-a iii.409 Pv-a 3
    1. ˚mada pride of youth DN iii.220 AN i.146 AN iii.72 Vb-a 466
    1. R
    cp. late Vedic & Epic Sanskrit yauvana, from yuvan

    R

    -R-
    1. the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid hiatus. The sandhi-r-originates from the final r of nouns in ˚ir & ˚ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for instance) which in the older language were part of the noun itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi-consonants in the same word, as we find punam-eva and puna-d-eva besides the original puna-r-eva (= Vedic punar eva). At Ja i.403 we read “punar āgata,” where the Commentary explains “puna āgata, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto.” Similarly: Snp 81 (vutti-r-esā) 214 (thambho-r
    • iva), 625 = Dh 401 (āragge-r-iva), 679 (ati-r-iva), 687 (sarada-r-iva), 1134 (haṁsa-r-iva) Vv 6422 (Vajir’ āvudho-r-iva); Pv ii.87 (puna-r-eva ii.116 (identical) Pv-a 77 (su-r-abhigandha). In the latter cause the r has no historical origin, as little as in the phrase dhir atthu (for *dhig-atthu) Snp 440 Ja i.59 Ramsi & Rasmi;
    Raṁsi
    Rasmi;
    a rein, a ray.
    1. -1. In meaning “rein only as rasmi, viz. at MN i.124 Dhp 222 Ja i.57 Ja iv.149
    • In meaning “ray” both raṁsi and rasmi : (a raṁsi (in poetry) Snp 1016 (vīta˚? perhaps pīta˚? ‣See note in P. Text S. ed.) Vv 535 (
    • plural raṁsī = rasmiyo Vv-a 236); 6327 (sahassa˚ having a thousand rays; = suriya Vv-a 268); Sdhp 124. Also in compound raṁsi-jāla a blaze of rays Ja i.89 Pv-a 154 Vv-a 12 (˚sammujjala) 14 (identical), 166 (identical)
    • (b) rasmi (in prose, late) Dhp-a i.27 (˚ṁ vissajjesi) Dhs-a 13 (nīla-rasmiyo) Vv-a 125 (candima-suriya˚). Also in compound buddha-rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) Ja i.444 Ja i.501 (˚rasmiyo vissajjento) Snp-a 132 Vv-a 207 234, 323; Mhbv.6 15, 38
    • Vedic raśmi. The form raṁsi is the proper Pali form, originating from raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 502. The form rasmi is a Sanskrit ism and later
    Raṁsika
    adjective
    1. having rays, radiant, in sahassa˚; having 1000 rays Vv 645 (= suriya-maṇḍala viya Vv-a 277)
    raṁsi + ka
    Raṁsimant
    adjective
    1. having rays, radiant; Nominative singular raṁsimā the sun Vv 812 (= suriya Vv-a 314)
    from raṁsi
    Rakkha
    adjective (—˚)
    1. guarding or to be guarded; -(a) active: dhamma˚; guardian of righteousness or truth Mil 344
    • (b) pass.: in compound dū˚; , variant reading du
    1. hard to guard Dhp-a i.295 ˚kathā, s. l. rukkha—˚ warding talk Thag-a 1 in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416
    from base rakkh
    Rakkhaka
    adjective noun
    1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care Pv-a 7
    2. feminine ˚ikā (dāsī) Dhp-a iv.103 (a servant watching the house)
    3. observing, keeping Ja i.205 (sīla˚)
    4. a cultivator Ja ii.110

      • a sentry Ja i.332
    from rakkha
    Rakkhati
    1. [Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Indogermanic *ark (cp. Latin arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq; strength; Anglo-Saxon ealgian to protect Gothic alhs = Anglo-Saxon ealh temple. cp. also base *areq in Pali aggala. The Dhtp 18 explainsrakkh by “pālana” 1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Snp 220 Ja iv.255 (maṁ rakkheyyātha); vi.589 (= pāleti); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṁ) Mil 166 (rukkhaṁ), 280 (attānaṁ rakkheyya save himself) Pv-a 7 gerundive rakkhiya to be protected Mhvs 33, 45. negative arakkhiya & arakkheyya; (in meaning 3) ‣See separately
    2. passive ppr. rakkhiyamāna Ja i.140
    3. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with reference to cittaṁ the heart, and sīlaṁ good character or morals) Iti 67 (sīlaṁ) Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṁ rakkha equivalent with cittaṁ dama), 397 (ācāraṁ) Ja iv.255 (vācaṁ) Vv-a 59 (sīlāni rakkhi) Pv-a 66 (sīlaṁ rakkhatha uposathaṁ karotha)
    4. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i.e. to keep away from Snp 702 (mano-padosaṁ rakkheyya) Mil 170 (vacīduccaritaṁ rakkheyya).

      • past participle rakkhita ‣See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati; .

    Rakkhana
    neuter
    1. keeping, protection, guarding Nett 41; Mhvs 35, 72 (rahassa˚-atthāya so that he should keep the secret) Pv-a 7
    2. observance keeping Vv-a 71 (uposatha-sīla˚) Pv-a 102 (sīla˚), 210 (uposatha˚)
    from rakkh
    Rakkhanaka
    adjective
    1. observing, keeping; one who observes Ja i.228 (pañca-sīla˚; so read for rakkhānaka)
    from rakkhana
    Rakkhasa
    -164)
    1. a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Thag 1, 931 Snp 310 (Asura˚) Ja i.127 (daka˚ = udaka˚), 170 (identical); vi.469 (identical) Dhp-a i.367 (˚pariggahita-pokkharaṇī); iii.74 (udaka˚); Sdhp 189 Sdhp 313 Sdhp 366. feminine rakkhasī Ja iii.147 (r. pajā); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda˚, coming out of the ocean)
    2. cp. Vedic rakṣa, either from rakṣ to injure, or more likely from rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology past participle 162
    Rakkhā
    feminine
    1. shelter, protection, care AN ii.73 (+ parittā); Mhvs 25, 3 Ja i.140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna Pv-a 198 (˚ṁ saṁvidahati) Often in combination rakkhā + āvaraṇa (+ gutti) shelter defence, e.g. at Vin ii.194 DN i.61 (dhammikaṁ r
    • v. guttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāma) MN ii.101 Ja iv.292
    • Cp gorakkhā
    • Note. rakkhā at Ja iii.144 is an old misreading for rukkhā
    verb-noun from rakkh
    Rakkhita
    1. guarded, protected, saved SN iv.112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.) AN i.7 (cittaṁ r.) Snp 288 (dhamma˚), 315 (gottā˚) Vv-a 72 (mātu˚, pitu˚ etc.) Pv-a 61 Pv-a 130
    • Note. rakkhitaṁ karoti at Mhvs 28, 43 Childers translates “take under protection,” but Geiger reads rakkhike and translates “appoint as watchers.”
    1. ˚atta one who guards his character SN i.154 Ja i.412 Snp-a 324
    • ˚indriya guarding one’s senses Snp 697
    • ˚mānasāna guarding one’s mind Snp 63 (= gopitamānasāno-rakkhita-citto Nd2 535)
    past participle of rakkhati
    Raṅga1
    colour, paint Mil 11 (˚palibodha).
    1. ˚kāra dyer Mil 331
    • ˚jāta colour MN i.385 Vb-a 331
    • ˚ratta dyed crimson Vin i.185 = 306
    from raj1, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour
    Raṅga2
    1. a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 331 Ja ii.252
    • raṅgaṁ karoti to play theatre Dhp-a iv.62
    • raṅgamajjha the stage, the theatre usually in
    • locative ˚majjhe, on the stage, SN iv.306 Ja iv.495 Dhp-a iii.79 same with ˚maṇḍale Ja ii.253
    from raj2, irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc. ‣See uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning “gamana”
    Racati
    1. to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by “paṭiyattane” (with variant reading car, and given at No. 542 as variant reading of pac in meaning “vitthāre."- past participle racita
    2. rac, later Sanskrit
    Racanā
    feminine
    1. arrangement (of flowers in a garland) Vv-a 354
    2. composition (of a book) Sdhp 619
    from rac
    Racita
    1. arranged Ja v.157 (su˚ in Commentary for samocita; variant reading sucarita)
    2. strung (of flowers Mhvs 34, 54
    3. cp. vi˚
    past participle of racati
    Racchā
    feminine
    1. a carriage road Vin ii.194 Vin iii.151 Vin iv.271 (= rathiyā); v.205 (raccha-gata) Ja i.425 Ja v.335 Ja vi.276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs v.48 Pv-a 24 (koṇa˚)
    Sanskrit rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)
    Rajaka
    1. a dyer (& “washerman” in the same function), more correctly “bleacher.” ‣See remarks of Kern’s at Toevoegselen ii.45 on distinction of washerman dyer
    • D; i.51 (in list of occupations) Vin iii.45 SN ii.101 = iii.152 (in simile; combined with cittakāra, here perhaps “painter"?) SN iii.131 Ja v.186 Vb-a 331 (in simile)
    from rajati
    Rajakkha
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. only in combination with appa˚ and mahā˚; i.e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) MN i.169 SN i.137 (here further combined with ˚jātika; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit alpa-rajaskajātīya MVastu iii.322) Vin i.5 (identical); Ps i.121; ii.33 195 Nd1 358 Nd2 235 No. 3 p2 Vb 341 Mil 263 Vism 205 Vb-a 458
      rajo + ending ka, in combination *rajas-ka = rajakkha, like *puras-kata = purakkhata. The ˚ka belongs to the whole compound
    Rajakkhatā
    feminine
    1. is Kern’s (problematic) proposed reading (Toevoegselen s.v.) for rājakhāda at Snp 831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified as the original reading is well-attested and explained in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only—˚)
    abstract from rajakkha
    Rajata
    neuter
    1. silver DN i.5 (explained at DN-a i.78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.) SN i.92 Snp 962 (in simile explained at Nd1 478 as jātarūpa), Ja v.50 416 (hema˚ gold & silver) Vv 351 (˚hema-jāla) Dhp-a ii.42 (˚paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); iv.105 (˚gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇa-gabbha and suvaṇṇa˚) Vb-a 64 (explained as “kahāpaṇa”) Pv-a 95 (for rūpiya)
    Vedic rajata ‣See etymology under rajati
    Rajati
    1. usually intransitive rajjati (q.v.) As rajitabba (gerundive ) in meaning “to be bleached” (dhovitabba +) only in meaning “bleach” (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin iii.235 (ppr. from
    2. plural dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.) Ja i.8 (rajitabba, gerundive ; dhovitabba +)

      • Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings “bleach” and “dye” (cp rajaka), in some combinations with dhovati it clearly means “dye,” as at Vin i.50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 singular Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba rajituṁ)
      • Another
      • gerundive rajanīya in different meaning ‣See sep..
      • causative rajeti to paint, colour Thag 1, 1155 (inf rajetave ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 204, 1. a.
      • causative also rañjeti ‣See under rañjati. Med.
      • passive rajjati (q.v.)-
      • causative II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin iii.206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti) Ja ii.197 (ovaṭṭikaṁ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā)
      raj & rañj; to shine, to be coloured or light (-red); to Indogermanic *areg to be bright, as in Latin argus; Sanskrit arjuna ‣See ajjuna; to which also rajati silver = Latin argentum; Gallic Argento-ratum (name of Strassburg); Old Irish argat.
    Rajana
    neuter
    1. colouring, dye DN i.110 (suddhaṁ vatthaṁ … sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭigaṇheyya) Vin i.50 = 53 ii.227 Vin i.286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla˚, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚ or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Thag 1, 965 SN ii.101 (here either as feminine or adjective) Ja i.220 (washing?).

      1. ˚kamma (the job of) dyeing Ja i.118 Vism 65
      2. ˚pacana boiling the dye Vism 389 (cp. rajana-pakka Vinaya Texts ii.49)
      3. ˚bhājana dye-vessel Vin i.286
      • ˚sālā colouringworkshop dyeing-hall Vism 65
      from raj
    Rajani
    feminine
    1. the night Dāvs i.39; Abhp 69 Pv-a 205
    from raj, cp. rajanīya 2
    Rajanīya
    adjective
    1. of the nature of rajas, i.e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing lustful
    1. -1. As epithet of rūpa (vedanā saññā etc.) SN iii.79 also at DN i.152f. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya-rūpāni kām’ ûpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with; saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām’ ûpasaṁhitā rajanīyā DN i.245 MN i.85 The explanation of this passage at DN-a i.311 is: r. = rāgajanaka
    • The expression rajanīyā dhammā “things (or thoughts) causing excitement” is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. “that which leads to emancipation at AN ii.196 The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combination with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at SN iv.307 AN ii.120 AN iii.169 Another pair is mentioned at Nett 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. 2. In different connections it means simply “delightful lovely” and is e.g. an epithet of the night. So at Pv iii.71, where the passage runs “yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi”: youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at Pv-a 205 is explained in a twofold manner viz. first as “ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti-hetu-bhūtehi” (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to a variant reading rajanīyehi, and then as “rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaṁ” and “virocasi rattiyaṁ.” Thus rajanī is here taken directly as “night” (cp. Abhp 69)
    • At Pv iv.62 the passage runs “pamattā rajaniyesu kām’ assād’ âbhinandhino” i.e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as
    • masculine & not
    • feminine
    • The meaning “lovely is applied to sounds at Thag 1, 1233 (sarena rajanīyena) Vv-a 37 (r. nigghosa)
    gerundive of rajati
    Rajo
    1. (rajas) & Raja neuter

      1. . A Forms. Both rajo & rajaṁ occur as noun & accusative singular, e.g. rajo at DN ii.19 Snp 207 Snp 334 Dhs 617 rajaṁ at Snp 275 Iti 83 once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Snp 662 The other cases are formed from the a-stem only, e. g rajassa Snp 406
      2. plural rajāni Snp 517 Snp 974 In compound we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) rajā- (stressed), or in s-form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e) raj-. B Meanings. (1) (literally) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust DN ii.19 (tiṇa +) Snp 662 = Pv-a 116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṁ khitto) Iti 83 Dhs 617 (dhūmo +). adjective rāja˚; : in sa˚ & a˚ vāta Vin ii.209 Vism 31. The meaning “pollen” Sanskrit raja, masculine
        1. may be seen in “raja-missakaṁ rasaṁ” at Dhp-a i.375 2. (figuratively) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the Pali commentators as the 3-fold blemish of man’s character: rāga, dosa, moha, e. g Nd1 505 Snp-a 255 Dhp-a iii.485 or as kilesa-raja at Snp-a 479
        • Sn 207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaṁ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (pañca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd1 505 Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha; the same) Nd1 505 = Nd2 590 (slightly different) = J i.117 = Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation
        • adjective raja˚; in two phrases apagata˚ Vv-a 236 & vigata˚ Nd1 505 ≈ free from defilement
        • On raja in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 126. cp. vi˚;
        • C Compounds. (a) rajo-: ˚jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt DN ii.18 Vin iii.70 Ja iv.322 Ja v.241 Mil 133 Mil 195 258, 410 Snp-a 248 291
        • ˚jallika living in dirty mud designation of a class of ascetics MN i.281 Ja i.390
        • ˚dhātu “dust-element” (doubtful translation) DN i.54 which DN-a i.163 explains as “raja-okiṇṇa-ṭṭhānāni,” i.e. dusty places. Dialogues of the Buddha translation “places where dust accumulates, Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as “Staubiges” but rightly ‣Sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sānkhya doctrine of rajas?)
        • ˚mala dust & dirt Ja i.24
        • ˚vajalla this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo 'va jalla, or a redupl compound rajo + avajalla, which was spelt raj-ovajalla for ava˚ because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla and raj- ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo-jalla
        1. dust and dirt Dhp 141 (= kaddama-limpan ākārena sarīre sannicita-rajo Dhp-a iii.77)
        2. ˚haraṇa dirt-taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor-cloth, duster Vin ii.291 AN iv.376 Ja i.117 Dhp-a i.245
        • (b) raja--reṇu dirt and dust Ja iv.362
        • ˚vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Thag 2, 343 (“fleshly lusts” translation) Thag-a 240 (= rāga-raj’ ādi-saṁvaḍḍhana)
        • (c) rajā—˚patha dusty place, dustiness, dust-hole DN i.62 DN i.250 SN ii.219 DN-a i.180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga-raj ādīnaṁ uṭṭhāna-ṭṭhānaṁ)
        • (d) rajas-: ˚sira with dusty head Snp 980 Ja iv.184 Ja iv.362 Ja iv.371 ‣See pankadanta
        • (e raj-:—˚agga a heap of dust, dirt Ja v.187 (= rajakkhandha Commentary ); figuratively = kilesa Pug 65 68 (here perhaps nt of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toevoegselen s.v.). —˚upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Snp 391 Snp 392
        raj ‣See rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp rajata) ‣See Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 55
    Rajja
    neuter
    1. kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (figuratively) sovereignty AN iii.300 (˚ṁ kāreti) Snp 114 Snp 553 (˚ṁ kāreti to reign) Ja i.57 64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms) iii.170 (˚ṁ amaccānaṁ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaṁ api rajjaṁ pi kāraye); iv.96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); vi.4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship) Vv-a 314 (= J i.64 as above) Pv-a 73f.; Mhvs 10, 52 (rājā rajjaṁ akārayi)
    • cakkavatti˚ rule of a universal king Dhp-a iii.191
    • deva˚ reign amongst gods Kp-a 227; padesa˚ local sovereignty Iti 15 Kh viii.12 (cp. Kp-a 227)
    1. ˚siri-dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire Dhp-a ii.17
    • ˚sīma border of the empire Vism 121
    Sanskrit rājya, from rāj
    Rajjati
    1. to be excited, attached to (locative ), to find pleasure in SN iv.74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; = viratta-citta) Snp 160 Snp 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Ps i.58, 77 sq., 130, 178 Nd1 138 Mil 386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combination with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya) Vb-a 11

      • ppr. rajjamāna Pv-a 3 Pot. rajjeyya Mil 280 (kampeyya +); grd rajjitabba Mil 386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut rajjissati Dhs-a 194
      • aorist arañji Vin i.36 = J i.83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṁ).
      • past participle ratta
      cp. Sanskrit rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati
    Rajjana
    neuter
    1. defilement DN-a i.195 cp. muyhana
    from rajjati
    Rajju
    feminine
    1. a cord, line, rope SN ii.128 Vin ii.120 148 (āviñchana˚) Nd2 304 Ja i.464 Ja i.483 (fisherman’s line); v.173; Mhvs 10, 61 Dhp-a iv.54 Vb-a 163 Kp-a 57 Vv-a 207 Sdhp 148 Sdhp 153
    1. ˚kāra rope-maker Mil 331
    • ˚gāhaka “rope-holder, (king’s) land-surveyor Ja ii.367 = Dhp-a iv.88 ‣See Fick Sociale Gliederung 97
    Vedic rajju, cp. Latin restis rope, Lithuanian rẽƶgis wicker, basket
    Rajjuka
    1. a rope, line Ja i.164 (bandhana˚) Thag-a 257
    2. = rajjugāhaka, king’s land surveyor Ja ii.367
    rajju + ka
    Rañjati
    1. to colour, dye Ja i.220 2. (= rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Snp 424 (ettha me r. mano; Burmese variant rajjati).
    2. causative rañjeti to delight or make glad DN iii.93 (in etymology of rājā (q.v.)-pp rañjita.
    3. causative II. rañjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed Dhp-a iv.106 (variant reading raj˚)
    4. rañj = raj ‣See rajati & rajjati-Dhtp 66 & 398 defines rañja = rāge
    Rañjana
    neuter
    1. delighting, finding pleasure, excitement Dhs-a 363 (rañjan’ aṭṭhena rāgo; variant reading rajano˚; perhaps better to be read rajjana˚)
    from rañjati
    Rañjita
    1. coloured, soiled, in raja˚; affected with stain, defiled Ja i.117
    • ‣ See also anu˚ & pari˚;
    past participle of rañjeti
    Raṭati
    1. to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts
    raṭ; Dhtp 86: “paribhāsane”
    Raṭṭha
    neuter
    1. reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Snp 46 (explained at Nd2 536 as “raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārañ ca … nagarañ ca”), 287 444, 619 Ja iv.389 (˚ṁ araṭṭhaṁ karoti) Pv-a 19 (˚ṁ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata˚ mountain-kingdom Snp-a 26 Magadha˚ the kingdom of Magadha Pv-a 67
    1. ˚piṇḍa the country’s alms-food (˚ṁ bhuñjati) Dhp 308 (saddhāya dinnaṁ) AN i.10 SN ii.221 MN iii.127 Thag 2 110 Iti 43 90
    2. ˚vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject Dhp-a iii.481
    Vedic rāṣṭra
    Raṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign Ja iv.91 (senāvāhana)
    • cp. raṭṭhika
    Sanskrit rāṣṭraka
    Raṭṭhavant
    adjective
    1. possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv ii.611 (˚nto khattiyā)
    raṭṭha + vant
    Raṭṭhika
    1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant Ja ii.241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati-r
    2. do ārik’ ādayo)
    3. an official of the kingdom op Sanskrit rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king’s brother in-law
      1. AN iii.76 = 300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika)
      from raṭṭha, cp. Sanskrit rāṣṭrika
    Raṇa
    1. fight, battle; only in Thag 2, 360 (raṇaṁ karitvā kāmānaṁ) ‣See discussed below; also late at Mhvs 35, 69 (Subharājaṁ raṇe hantvā)
    2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its explanation in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often explained as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 50 ‣See Expositor 67 gives the following explains (late & speculative) (a) = reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress
    3. The translation (Expositor 67) takes raṇa as “cause of grief,” or “harm, hence araṇa “harmless” and saraṇa “harmful” (the latter translated as “concomitant with war” by Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation of Dhs 1294 and asaraṇa as opposite “not concomitant” doubtful). At SN i.148 (rūpe raṇaṁ disvā) it is almost synonym with raja. Buddhaghosa explains this passage ‣See Kindred Sayings 320 as “rūpamhi jāti-jarā-bhanga-sankhātaṁ dosaṁ, translation (Kindred Sayings 186): “discerning canker in visible objects material.”
      1. The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Thag 2 358 we read “(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha-visosanā,” and v.360 reads “raṇaṁ karitvā kāmānaṁ.” Thag-a 244 explains v.358 by “rāg’ ādi sambandhanato”; v.360 by “kāmānaṁ raṇaṁ te ca mayā kātabbaṁ ariyamaggaṁ sampahāraṁ katvā.” The first is evidently “grief,” the second “fight,” but the translation (Sisters 145) gives “stirring strife” for v.358, and “fight with worldly lusts” for v.360; whereas Kern Toevoegselen s.v. raṇakara gives “causing sinful desire” as translation
      1. The word araṇa ‣See araṇa2 was regarded as neg of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either “freedom from passion” or “not fighting.” The translation of Dhs-a 50 (Expositor 67) takes it in a slightly different sense as “harmless” (i.e. having no grievous causes)-At MN iii.235 araṇa is a quâsi summing up of “adukkha an-upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.,” and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like “harmfulness” & “harmlessness seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa ‣See under araṇa
      1. ˚jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya “victorious in battle” (Note. 83). It is also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. Lal. Vist. 50; Avs ii.131 ‣See Speyer’s note 3 on this page. He justifies translation “pacifier, peace-maker” At following passages: SN i.52 (translation “quitting corruption”) Iti 108 (Seidenstücker translates: “dem Kampfgewühl entronnen”) Mil 21 Nett 54; Sdhp 493 Sdhp 569
      Vedic raṇa, both “enjoyment,” and “battle.” The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound-base saddatthā (= Sanskrit ran2 to tinkle)
    Rata
    1. delighting in (locative or—˚), intent on, devoted to SN iv.117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava etc.) Snp 54 (sangaṇika˚) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme) 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mhvs. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba-loka-hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe) Pv-a 3 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 19 (˚mānasa)
    2. past participle of ramati
    Ratana1
    neuter
    1. (literally a gem, jewel Vv-a 321 (not = ratana2, as Hardy in Index) Pv-a 53 (nānāvidhāni)
    2. The 7 ratanas are enumerated under veḷuriya (Mil 267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: Ja ii.112 The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Thag 2, 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā “all seven kinds of gems”); and at Dhp-a i.274 where it is said of a ratana-maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags “sattaratana-mayā.” On ratana in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909, 127
    3. (figuratively) treasure, gem of (—˚) Snp 836 (etādisaṁ r. = dibb’ itthi-ratana Snp-a 544) Mil 262 (dussa˚ a very fine garment)
    4. Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world-) king. Thus at DN ii.16f.; of Mahā-Sudassana DN ii.172f. They are enumerated singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) DN ii.172f. the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) DN ii.174 DN ii.187 DN ii.197 the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) DN ii.175 DN ii.187 the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) DN ii.176 DN ii.188 the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumerated at DN i.89 Snp p. 106 DN-a i.250 also at Ja iv.232 where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka˚ out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha-race; assa˚ from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi˚ from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification ‣See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally “major domus” (cp. his attributes as “wealthy” at MVastu i.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured
    5. The 7 (moral) ratanas at SN ii.217 SN iii.83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Mil 336 viz. the 5: sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚ vimutti-ñāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīla-kkhandha or dhamma-kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā˚ & bojjhanga˚. These 7 are probably meant at Pv-a 66 where it is said that Sakka “endowed their house with the 7 jewels” (sattar
    6. bharitaṁ katvā)
    7. Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana-ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ratna-traya Divy 481
      1. e.g. Mhvs 5, 81 Vb-a 284 Vv-a 123 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 141
      1. ˚ākara a pearl-mine, a mine of precious metals Thag 1 1049 Ja ii.414 Ja vi.459 Dīpavaṁsa i.18
      2. ˚kūṭa a jewelled top Dhp-a i.159
      • ˚paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pug 34
      • ˚vara the best of gems Snp 683 (= vararatana-bhūta Snp-a 486)
      • ˚sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta ii.1 (P. Text S. ed.
      • past participle 39

        1. -42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism 414 (with 4 others) and at Mil 150 (with 5 others), cp. Kp-a 63 Snp-a 201
        cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (Avs ii.199)
    Ratana2
    1. a linear measure (which Abhp p. 23 gives as equal to 12 angula or 7 ratanas = 1 yaṭṭhi ‣See Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Buddhaghosa at Vb-a 343 dve vidatthiyo ratanaṁ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) Ja v.36 (vīsaṁr-sataṁ); vi.401 (˚mattaṁ) Vv-a 321 (so given by Hardy in Index as “measure of length,” but to be taken as ratana1, as indicated clearly by context & Commentary ) Mil 282 (satta-patiṭṭhito aṭṭha-ratan’ ubbedho nava-ratan āyāma-pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana1 2!)
    most likely = Sanskrit aratni ‣See ratani
    Ratanaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. characteristic of a gem, or a king’s treasure; in phrase aniggata-ratanake “When the treasure has not gone out” Vin iv.160 where the chief queen is meant with “treasure.”
      ratana + ka, the ending belonging to the whole compound
    Ratani
    1. a cubit Mil 85 (aṭṭha rataniyo)
    Sanskrit aratni “elbow” with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as “a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little fin absolutive ” The form ratni also occurs in Sanskrit The etymology is from Idg *ole (to bend), cp. Avestan arəpna elbow; Sanskrit arāla bent of which enlarged bases *olen in Latin ulna, ond *oleq in Latin lacertus, Sanskrit lakutaḥ = Pali laguḷa ‣See cognates in Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. lacertus
    Ratanika
    adjective
    1. a ratana in length Ja i.7 (aḍḍha˚) Mil 312 (aṭṭha˚)
    from ratana
    Rati
    feminine
    1. love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (locative ), fondness of SN i.133 (˚ṁ paccanubhavati), 207; iii.256 Snp 41 (= anukkhaṇṭhit adhivacanaṁ Nd2 537), 59 (identical), 270, 642, 956 (= nekkhamma-rati paviveka˚, upasama˚ Nd1 457) Ja iii.277 (kilesa˚) Dhp-a iv.225 Pv-a 77

      • arati dislike, aversion SN i.7 SN i.54 SN i.128 SN i.180 SN i.197 SN v.64 Snp 270 (+ rati), 642 (identical) Dhp 418 (rati +) Thag 2, 339 Dhs-a 193 Pv-a 64 Sdhp 476
      • ratiṁ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism 195 (purisā itthīsu)
      Classic Sanskrit rati, from ram
    Ratin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; feminine ratinī Ja iv.320 (ahiṁsā˚)
    2. from rati
    Ratta1
    1. dyed, coloured MN i.36 (dūratta-vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed MA 167 reads duratta and explains as durañjita-vaṇṇa opposite suratta ibid.) Snp 287 (nānā-rattehi vatthehi) Vism 415 (˚vattha-nivattha, as sign of mourning) Dhp-a iv.226 (˚vattha)
    2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like “shiny, shining, glittering (as in ratta-suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etymology meaning of; rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as “bleached” in ratta-kambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of “white,” as also in explanation of puṇḍarīka at Ja v.216 with ratta-paduma “white lotus."-It is most commonly found in following combinations at following passages: Mil 191 (˚lohita-candana) Vism 172 (˚kambala), 174 (˚koraṇḍaka), 191 (˚paṭākā) Ja i.394 (pavāla-ratta-kambala); iii.30 (˚puppha-dāma) v.37 (˚sālivana), 216 (˚paduma); 372 (˚suvaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.393 (identical), 248 (˚kambala); iv.189 (˚candanarukkha red-sandal tree) Snp-a 125 (where paduma is given as “ratta-set’ ādivasena”) Vv-a 4 (˚dupaṭṭa) 65 (˚suvaṇṇa), 177 (˚phalika) Pv-a 4 (˚virala-mālā garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (˚paduma), 191 (˚sāli); Mhvs 30, 36 (˚kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. compound rattakkha “with red eyes” (from crying) at Pv-a 39 (Burmese variant ), and proper name rattakkhin “Red-eye” (epithet of a Yakkha). 3. (figuratively) excited, infatuated, impassioned SN iv.339 Snp 795 (virāga˚) Iti 92 (maccā rattā) Mil 220 Also in combination ratta duṭṭha mūḷha ‣See Nd2 s.v. chanda; cp. bhava-rāga-ratta
    past participle of rañjati, cp. Sanskrit rakta
    Ratta2
    1. neuter & (poet.); rattā feminine

      1. (rarely) night; (usually time in general. Occurs only—˚, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides compounds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Snp 1071 where Burmese manuscripts manuscripts read rattam-ahā for rattaṁ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho-rātraṁ (= Pali ahorattaṁ). The P. Text S. ed. reads nattaṁ Snp-a 593 reads nattaṁ, but explains as rattin-divaṁ, whereas Nd2 538 reads rattaṁ & explains: “rattaṁ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattiñ ca divañ ca."-Otherwise only in following
      2. adverb expressions (meaning either “time” or “night”): instrumental eka-rattena in one night Ja i.64 satta after one week (literally a seven-night) Snp 570

        • accusative singular cira-rattaṁ a long time Snp 665 dīgha˚ identical cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit dīrgha-rātraṁ frequently
        1. Snp 22 MN i.445 aḍḍha˚ at “halfnight,” i.e. midnight AN iii.407 pubba-ratt’ âpararattaṁ one night after the other (literally the last one and the next) Dhp-a iv.129
        • accusative plural cira rattāni a long time Ja v.268
        • locative in various forms, viz. vassa-ratte in the rainy season Ja v.38 (Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. gives wrongly iii.37, 143; aḍḍha-ratte at midnight Pv-a 152 aḍḍha rattāyaṁ at midnight Vv 8116 (= aḍḍharattiyaṁ Vv-a 315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv.31; 5 (= rattiyaṁ Vv-a 130); cira-rattāya a long time Ja v.267 Pv i.94
        1. ˚andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin iv.268 (oggate suriye) MN i.448
        • ˚ūparata abstaining from food at night DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77)
        • ˚ññu of long standing, recognised DN i.48 (in phrase: r. cira-pabbajito addhagato etc.; explained at DN-a i.143 as “pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r.”) AN ii.27 (here the
        • plural rattaññā, as if from singular ratta-ñña) Snp p. 92 (therā r. cira-pabbajitā; the explanation at Snp-a 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either = ratana-ññu i.e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or = bahu-ratti-vidū i.e. knowing many nights) Thag-a 141 A
        • feminine abstr ˚ññutā “recognition” is found at MN i.445 (spelt rataññūtā but variant reading ˚utā)
        • ˚samaye (
        • locative, adverb ) at the time of (night) Ja i.63 (aḍḍha-ratta˚ at midnight), 264 (identical) iv.74 (vassa˚ in the rainy season) Pv-a 216 (aḍḍha˚)
        Epic Sanskrit rātra; Vedic rātra only in compound aho-rātraṁ. Semantically an abstr formation in collect. meaning “the space of a night’s time,” hence “interval of time” in general. Otherwise rātri ‣See under ratti
    Ratti

    feminine

    night DN i.47 (dosinā). genitive singular ratyā (for *rattiyā) Thag 1, 517 Snp 710 (vivasane = ratti-samatikkame Snp-a 496) Ja vi.491 ablative singular rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night DN ii.220 Vin i.26 SN i.16 MN i.143 & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i.e. dawn Ja i.81 Ja i.500 instrumental plural rattīsu Vin i.288 (hemantikāsu r.). A

  • locative ratyā (for *rātryām) and a nominative
  • plural ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, Pali Grammar § 583

    • Very often combined with and opposed to diva in following combinations: rattin-diva cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit rātrindiva = Gr , Avs i.274, 278; ii.176; Divy 124
    1. a day & a night (something like our “24 hours”), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i.e. a 10-day week. AN v.85f.; adverb ially satta-rattin-divaṁ a week Dhp-a i.108 As
    2. adverb in
    3. accusative singular: rattin-divaṁ night and day AN iii.57 Snp 507 Snp 1142 Iti 93 Ja i.30 or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd2 538 or rattiṁ opposed to
    4. adverb divā by night-by day MN i.143 Pv-a 43

      • Other cases as
      • adverb accusative eka rattiṁ one night Ja i.62 Pv ii.97 Pv-a 42 taṁ rattiṁ that night Mhvs 4, 38; imaṁ r. this night MN i.143 yañ car…. yañ car…. etasmiṁ antare in between yon night and yon night Iti 121 rattiṁ at night Mil 42 rattiṁ rattiṁ night after night Mhvs 30, 16
      • genitive rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day SN ii.95
      • locative rattiyañ by night Vv-a 130 315 (aḍḍha˚ at midnight) Pv-a 22 and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Snp 223 Thag 2, 312 Dhp 296 Vv 315 8432 SN i.33
      1. ˚khaya the wane of night Ja i.19
      • ˚cāra (sabba˚) allnight wandering SN i.201 (translation “festival”)
      • ˚cheda interruption of the probationary period (technical term) Vin ii.34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā)
      • ˚dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism 107 (variant reading dhūp˚) combined with divā-pajjalanā, cp. MN i.143: ayaṁ vammīko rattiṁ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati
      • ˚pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (technical term) Vin ii.59
      • ˚bhāga night-time Ja iii.43 (˚bhāge) Mil 18 (˚bhāgena)
      • ˚bhojana eating at night MN i.473 DN-a i.77
      • ˚samaya night-time, only in
      • locative aḍḍha-ratti-samaye at midnight Vv-a 255 Pv-a 155
      Vedic rātrī & later Sanskrit rātri Idg; *lādh as in Latin lateo to hide; Sanskrit rāhu dark demon also Latin Latona, Goddess of night; Middle High German luoder insidiousness; cp. further English lethargy
    5. The by-form of ratti is ratta2
  • Ratha1
    1. a two-wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding driving or fighting SN i.33 (ethically) AN iv.191 (horse cart; different parts of a ratha) MN i.396 Snp 300 Snp 654 Vism 593 (in its compound of akkha, cakka, pañjara, īsā etc.) Ja iii.239 (passaddha˚ carriage slowing up) Thag 2, 229 (caturassaṁ rathaṁ, i.e. a Vimāna); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā) Vv-a 78 (500), 104, 267 (= Vimāna) Pv-a 74
    • assatarī˚ a chariot drawn by a she-mule Vv 208 = 438 Pv i.111 Ja vi.355
    • Phussa-ratha state carriage Ja iii.238 Ja vi.30f. ‣See under ph
    • On ratha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 127
    1. ˚atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot DN i.7 Vin i.192 Vin ii.163
    • ˚anīka array of chariots Vin iv.108
    • ˚īsā carriage pole AN iv.191
    • ˚ūpatthara chariot or carriage cover DN i.103 DN-a i.273
    • ˚esabha (ratha ṛṣabha, Sanskrit rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of “charioteer”; Childers ‣Sees rathin in this compound; Trenckner, Note. 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhammapāla at Pv-a 163 clearly understands it as ratha- = charioteer explaining “rathesu usabha-sadiso mahā-ratho ti attho”; as does Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 321 (on Snp 303): “mahā-rathesu khattiyesu akampiy’ aṭṭhena usabha-sadiso."-Sn 303–⁠308, 552 Pv ii.131; Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 11; 29, 12
    • ˚kāra carriagebuilder chariot-maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) SN i.93 Vin iv.9 (as term of abuse, enumerated with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (˚jāti) MN ii.152 MN ii.183
    • feminine ; as kārin at Pv iii.113 (explained as cammakārin Pv-a 175). As N
    • plural name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e.g. at Vism 416 Snp-a 407
    • ˚cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference) Pv-a 65
    • ˚pañjara the body (literally “cage” or “frame”) of a carriage Vv 831 (= rath’ ûpattha Vv-a 326) Ja ii.172 Ja iv.60 Dhp-a i.28
    • ˚yuga a chariot yoke Ja vi.42
    • ˚reṇu “chariot-dust,” a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sanskrit trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri’s, and 36 ratha-reṇu’s are equal to one likkhā Vb-a 343
    • ˚vinīta “led by a chariot,” a chariot-drive (Neumann, “Eilpost”), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (M i.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, 671 and Snp-a 446
    • ˚sālā chariot shed Dhp-a iii.121
    Vedic ratha, Avestan rapa, Latin rota wheel, rotundus (“rotund” & round), Old Irish roth = Old High German rad wheel, Lith rãtas identical
    Ratha2
    1. pleasure, joy, delight ‣See mano˚;
    from ram, cp. Sanskrit ratha
    Rathaka1
    neuter
    1. a little carriage, a toy cart DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86: khuddakarathaṁ) Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 MN i.226 Mil 229
    from ratha, cp. Sanskrit rathaka masculine
    Rathaka2
    adjective
    1. having a chariot, negative a˚ without a chariot Ja vi.515
    ratha + ka
    Rathika
    1. fighter from a chariot, charioteer MN i.397 (saññāto kusalo rathassa anga-paccangānaṁ) DN i.51 (in list of various occupations, cp. DN-a i.156) Ja vi.15 (+ patti-kārika), 463 (identical). Rathika & Rathiya
    from ratha
    Rathikā
    Rathiyā
    feminine
    1. a carriage-road
    • (a) rathikā : Vin ii.268 Vism 60 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 67
    • (b) rathiyā : DN i.83 Vin i.237 344 MN ii.108 MN iii.163 SN i.201 SN ii.128 SN iv.344 In compoundrathiya˚; , e.g. rathiya-coḷa “street-rag” Vism 62 (explained as rathikāya chaḍḍita-coḷaka)
    Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sanskrit rathyā road ‣See also racchā
    Rada
    1. at Thag-a 257 in compound “sannivesa-visiṭṭha-rada-visesayutta” is not quite clear (“splitting"?)
    Radati
    1. to scratch Dhtp 159 cp. rada & radana; tooth Abhp 261
    rad ‣See etymology at Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. rado (“rase”). Given in meaning “vilekhana” at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning “bhakkhana”
    Randha1
    1. cooked Ja v.505 Ja vi.24 Mil 107
    for Sanskrit raddha, past participle of randhati.2
    Randha2
    1. opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot AN iv.25 Snp 255 Snp 826 randhamesin looking for somebody’s weak spot cp. Nd1 165 (“virandham˚ aparandham˚ khalitam gaḷitam˚ vivaram-esī ti”) Ja ii.53 Ja iii.192 Snp-a 393 (+ vivara) Dhp-a iii.376 377 (˚gavesita)
    Sanskrit randhra, from randhati.1; the Pali form viâ *randdha ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 581
    Randhaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. one who cooks, cooking, a cook Ja iv.431 (bhatta˚)
      from randhati.2
    Randhati
    1. to be or make subject to, intranstitive to be in one’s power; (trs.) to harass oppress, vex, hurt (mostly causative randheti = Sanskrit randhayati). Only in
    2. imperative randhehi Ja i.332 and in Prohib. mā randhayi Ja v.121 and
    3. plural mā randhayuṁ Dhp 248 (= mā randhantu mā mathantu Dhp-a iii.357) ‣See also randha2
    4. to cook (cp. Sanskrit randhi randhana) Mil 107 (bhojanaṁ randheyya)
    5. pp; randha1
    radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: “hiṁsāyaṁ” (148), and “pāke” (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is frequently in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Anglo-Saxon rendan to rend ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s, v. lumbus
    Rapati
    1. to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 (“vacane”); Dhtm 266 (“akkose”) ‣See also lapati
    rap
    Rabhasa

    1. wild, terrible, violent DN i.91 explained by “bahu-bhāṇin” at DN-a i.256 There are several variant readings at this passage
    rabh = labh, which ‣See for etymology cp. also Latin rabies Dhtp 205 explainsrabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa
    Rama
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. delighting, enjoyable; only in compound dū˚; (= duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures as neuter absence of enjoyment Dhp 87 = SN v.24 and mano˚ gladdening the mind (q.v.)
      2. from ram
    Ramaṇa
    adjective
    1. pleasing, charming, delightful Dhp-a ii.202 (˚ṭṭhāna)
    from ramati; cp. Sanskrit ramaṇa
    Ramaṇaka
    adjective = ramaṇa Ja iii.207
    Ramaṇīya
    1. (& ˚nīya) adjective

      1. delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful DN i.47 (˚ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DN-a i.141) Snp 1013 Mhvs 15, 69 (ṇ) Pv-a 42 Pv-a 51 (explanation for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at SN i.233 cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka)
      gerundive of ramati
    Ramati
    1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (
    2. locative ) SN i.179 Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe) Snp 985 (jhāne) Dhp 79 (ariya-ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1st
    3. plural ramāmase Thag 2, 370 (cp Geiger, Pali Grammar 126);
    4. medium 1st singular rame Ja v.363 imper rama Pv ii.1220 (r. deva mayā saha; better with variant reading as ramma); -
    5. future ramissati Pv-a 153
    6. absolutive ramma Pv ii.1220 (variant reading for rama).
    7. gerundive ramma & ramanīya; (q.v.)
    8. past participle rata.
    9. causative I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Thag 1, 13 Ja v.204 Ja vi.3 (pp ramayamāna) Mil 313
    10. past participle ramita (q.v.)
    11. causative II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself Ja vi.114
    12. ram; defined by Dhtp 224 & Dhtm 318 by “kīḷāyaṁ”
    Ramita
    1. having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (locative or saha) Snp 709 (vanante r. siyā) Dhp 305 (identical = abhirata Dhp-a iii.472) Pv ii.1221 ('mhi tayā saha)
    2. past participle of rameti
    Rambati
    (& lambati);
    1. to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning “avasaṁsane” at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283
    lamb
    Rambhā
    feminine
    1. a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589
    Sanskrit rambhā
    Ramma
    adjective
    1. enjoyable, charming, beautiful Snp 305 Thag-a 71 (v.30); Mhvs 1, 73; 14, 47 Sdhp 248 Sdhp 512
    gerundive of ramati
    Rammaka
    adjective
    1. name of the month Chaitra Ja v.63
    Sanskrit ramyaka
    Raya

    1. speed, literally current Abhp 40 ‣See rava1
    from ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, defined as “gamana,” and at Dhtm 336 as “gati.” The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning “santati,” i.e. continuation On etymology cp. Vedic retaḥ; Latin rivus river = Gall, Rēnos “Rhine ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. rivus
    Rava1
    1. speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combination with dava running at Vin ii.101 Vin iv.4 MN i.446 (better reading here dav’ atthe rav’ atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. variant readings on p. 567 & Neumann,; Mittl Sammlg. ii.672 note 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by over-hurrying oneself in speaking
    • The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of; rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings
    for raya, with v. for y as frequently in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru “gate”
    Rava2
    1. loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals Ja ii.110 Ja iii.277 Dhp-a i.232 (sabba-rava-ññu knowing all sounds of animals) Mil 357 (kāruñña˚) ‣See also rāva ruta;
    from ru, cp. Vedic rava
    Ravaka
    1. = rava, in go˚; a cow’s bellowing MN i.225
    Ravaṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. roaring, howling, singing, only in compound ˚ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism 264 = 362 = KhA 68 (reading peḷā-ghaṭa, but ‣See App. p. 870 ravaṇa˚) Vb-a 68 (where variant reading yavana˚, with?)
    from ravati
    Ravati
    1. to shout cry, make a (loud) noise Mil 254 aorist ravi Ja i.162 (baddha-rāvaṁ ravi); ii.110; iii.102 Pv-a 100
    2. arāvi Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā-rāvaṁ); and aravi Mhvs 32, 79.
    3. past participle ravita & ruta;

      • cp. abhi˚, vi˚
      ru : Indogermanic *re & *reu; , cp. Latin ravus “raw, hoarse,” raucus, rūmor “rumour”; Dhtp 240: ru “sadde”
    Ravi
    the sun Ja ii.375 (taruṇa˚-vaṇṇaratha).
    1. ˚inda “king of the sun,” name of the lotus Dāvs iii.37 -haṁsa “sun-swan,” name of a bird Ja vi.539
    cp. Sanskrit ravi
    Ravita
    1. shouted, cried, uttered Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta˚)
    past participle of ravati
    Rasa1

    1. that which is connected with the sense of taste. The definition given at Vism 447 is as follows “jivhā-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā-viññāṇassa visaya-bhāvo raso, tass’ eva gocara-paccupaṭṭhāno mūla-raso khandha-raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho, i.e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense-object & sense-perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc ‣See next
    • The conventional encyclopaedic def; n of rasa at Nd1 240 Nd2 540 Dhs 629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6-fold objective source as mūla- rasa, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚; or taste (i.e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf flower & fruit; and-(b) the 12-fold subjective (physiological) sense-perception as ambila, madhura, tittika kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Mil 56: ambila) kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant cold & hot. Mil 56 has the following:; ambila lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura

    -1. juice as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice

    1. e.g. in the following combinations: ucchu˚; of sugar cane, extract of sugar cane syrup Vin i.246 Vv-a 180
    • patta˚ & puppha˚; of leaf & flower Vin i.246
    • madhura˚ of honey Pv-a 119
    • taste as (objective) quality, the sense-object of taste (cp. above definitions). In the list of the āyatanas or senses with their complementary sense-objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or “senses”) taste with the tongue (no reference to palate) jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā (or viññeyya ‣See also āyatana 3 and rūpa
    • MN iii.55 (jivhā-viññeyya r.), 267 DN iii.244 DN iii.250 Snp 387 Dhs 609 Pv-a 50 (vaṇṇagandha-rasa-sampanna bhojana ‣See below 5)

  • sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa ‣See compound ras-agga SN iv.275 = Pv ii.958 AN iv.242

    • object or act of enjoyment sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in
    • plural ) Snp 65 (rasesu gedha ‣See materialistic exegesis at Nd2 540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as Snp-a) AN iii.237 (puriso agga˚-parititto perhaps to No. 2)

  • flavour and its substance (or substratum), e.g. soup Vv-a 243 (kakkaṭaka˚ crabsoup), cp. SN v.149 where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika loṇika, aloṇika); Pv ii.115 (aneka-rasa-vyañjana “with exceptionally flavoured sauce”) Ja v.459 Ja v.465

    • gorasa “flavour of cow, i.e. produce of cow ‣See under go. Also metaphorically: “flavour, relish, pleasure” Snp 257 (pariveka˚, dhamma-pīṭi˚, cp. Snp-a 299 “assād aṭṭhena” i.e. tastiness) Pv-a 287 (vimutti˚ relish of salvation). So also as attha˚, dhamma˚, vimutti˚ Ps ii.89
    • (in grammar & style) essential property elegance, brightness; in dramatic art “sentiment (flavour)” ‣See Childers s.v. naṭya-rasa Mil 340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7) Pv-a 122 (˚rasa as ending in proper name Angīrasa, explained as “jutiyā adhivacanaṁ” i.e. brightness, excellency)

  • at technical term in philosophy “essential property” (Expositor 84), combined with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Compendium 13, 213), either kicca˚ function or sampatti˚; property Dhs-a 63 249; Vism 8 448 Mil 148

    • fine substance, semi-solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust Thus in paṭhavī˚; “essence of earth,” humus SN i.134 (translation “taste of earth,” rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, “primitive earth” (before taking solid shape) DN iii.86f. (trsl “savoury earth,” not quite clear), opposite to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism 418; pabbata-rasa mountain extract rock-substance Ja iii.55
    • suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust Ja i.93 9. (adjective
    • ˚) tasting Vv 1611 (Amatarasā
    • feminine = nibbānarasāvinī Vv-a 85)
    1. ˚agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compound with ˚aggita (ras-agga-s-aggita) most delicate sense translationDialogues of the Buddha) DN iii.167 and ˚aggin (ras-agga-s-aggin, cp. MVastu ii.306: rasa-ras’ âgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 iii.144 (cp. translationDialogues of the Buddha ii.15 “his taste is supremely acute”). The phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etymology of rasaggas-aggin as rasa-ggas-aggin, ggas representing; gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and explains the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ras'âgrin as a distortion of the Pali form
    2. ˚añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), “vitriol” (Rhys Davids) Vin i.203
    • ˚āda enjoying the objects of taste MN iii.168
    • ˚āyatana the sphere of taste DN iii.243 DN iii.290 Dhs 629 653, 1195 (insert after gandha˚ ‣See Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 319) -ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs 12 147, 157
    • ˚āsā craving for tastes Dhs 1059
    • ˚garuka bent on enjoyment Snp-a 107
    • ˚taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment DN iii.244 DN iii.280 Ja v.293 Dhs 1059 Dhp-a iv.196
    • ˚saññā perception of tastes DN iii.244 (where also ˚sañcetanā)
    • ˚haraṇī
    • feminine ph. ˚haraṇiyo, in compound haraṇi˚

      taste-conductor, taste-receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e.g. at Ja v.293 (khobhetvā phari) Dhp-a i.134 (anuphari) Kp-a 51 (only as 7!) Snp-a 107 (paṭhama-kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta-matte satta rasa-haraṇi-sahassāni amaten eva phutāni ahesuṁ). Older passages are: Vin ii.137 DN iii.167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: “sampajjasā r-haranī susaṇṭhitā,” translation: erect taste-bearers planted well in throat

      1. )
      Vedic rasa; with Latin ros “dew,” Lithuanian rasā identical, and Av Ranhā name of a river, to Indogermanic *eres to flow, as in Sanskrit arṣati; also Sanskrit ṛṣabha ‣See usabha1 Dhtp 325 defines as “assādane” 629 as "assāda-snehanesu”; Dhtm 451 as “assāde."-The declension is usually as regular a-stem, but a secondary instr from an s-stem is to be found in rasasā by taste AN ii.63 Ja iii.328
  • Rasa2
    1. (—˚) is a dialectical form of ˚dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa-rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prakrit has gone further ‣See Pischel; Prakrit Grammar § 245
    Rasaka
    1. a cook Ja v.460 Ja v.461 Ja v.507
    from rasa, cp. Classic Sanskrit rasaka
    Rasati
    1. to shout, howl Ja ii.407 (variant readings rayati, vasati; Commentary explains as “nadati”) = iv.346 (variant reading sarati)
    ras
    Rasatta
    neuter
    1. taste, sweetness Snp-a 299
    from rasa
    Rasavatī
    feminine
    1. “possessing flavours” i.e. a kitchen Vin i.140
    rasa + vant
    Rasāvin
    (adjective
    1. tasting Vv-a 85 (nibbāna˚)
    from rasa
    Rasīyati

    1. to find taste or satisfaction in genitive, to delight in, to be pleased AN iv.387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (Commentary tussati ‣See p. 470)
    passive Demon
  • formation from rasa
  • Rasmi
    1. ‣See raṁsi
    Rassa
    adjective
    1. short (opp dīgha) DN i.193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.) Snp 633 Dhp 409 Ja i.356 Dhs 617 Vism 272 (definition) Dhp-a iv.184
    • cp. ati˚;
    1. ˚ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) Ja iii.489
    • ˚sarīra
    • adjective dwarfish, stunted Ja i.356
    cp. Sanskrit hrasva: Geiger, Pali Grammar § 492. The Prakrit forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354
    Rassatta
    neuter
    1. shortness, reduction (of vowel) Dhs-a 149
    from rassa
    Rahati
    1. to leave, desert ‣See past participle rahita & derivation; rahas rahassa
    2. rah, defined at Dhtp 339 & 632 by “cāga,” giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by “cāgasmiṁ,” 876 by cāga and gata
    Rahada
    1. a (deep) pond, a lake DN i.50 (˚ṁ iva vippasannaṁ udānaṁ) SN i.169 = 183 (dhammo rahado sīla-tittho) Snp 721 = Mil 414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito) Iti 92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa-ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho) Dhp-a ii.152
    • As udaka˚; at DN i.74 DN i.84 AN iii.25 (ubbhid-odako) Pug 47
    • On r. in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 127
    Vedic hrada, with diaeresis & metathesis *harada → rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha → daha
    Rahas
    Raho;

    neuter

    1. lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy
    1. -1. raho : occurring only as adverb “secretly, lonely, in secret,” either absolutely, e.g. SN i.46 Snp 388 Pv ii.716 (opposite āvi openly); iv.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti pāpāni arahaṁ tena vuccati); or in compounds. e.g. ˚gata being in private, being alone DN i.134 (+ paṭisallīna); Snp p. 60 ‣See also under paṭisallīna; ˚gama “secret convention secret intercourse,” figuratively a secret adviser Ja vi.369 (after Kern, not found!); ˚vāda secret talk MN iii.230 ‣See also anu˚;
    2. rahā˚ , only in compound rahā-bhāva secrecy in definition of arahant at DN-a i.146 = Vism 201 (rahābhāvena ten’ esa arahan ti) ‣See also derivation rāha-seyyaka. Note. Hardy’s reading yathā rahaṁ at Pv ii.923 & Pv-a 78 is not correct, it should be yath’ ârahaṁ (cp. similarly pūj-âraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg’ āsan’ ādi-arahānaṁ “of those who merit the first seat etc.” at Ja i.217 although all manuscripts have aggāsanādi-rahānaṁ, thus postulating a form raha = araha
    Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā˚; (= *rahaḥ); a locative rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon

    • To rahati
    Rahassa
    adjective neuter
    1. secret, private; neuter secrecy, secret Mhvs 35, 64 (vatvā rahassaṁ); instrumental rahassena (as
    2. adverb ) secretly Mhvs 36, 80;
    3. accusative rahassaṁ identical Pv iv.165.

      1. ˚kathā secret speech, whispered words Ja i.411 Ja ii.6
      Sanskrit rahasya
    Rahassaka
    adjective
    1. secret Mil 91 (guyhaṁ na kātabbaṁ na rahassakaṁ)
    from rahassa
    Rahāyati
    1. to be lonely, to wish to be alone MN ii.119
    denominative from rahas; not corresponding to Sanskrit rahayati, Commentary of rahati to cause to leave
    Rahita
    1. lonely, forsaken Thag 2, 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaṁ bhiṁsanakaṁ mahāvanaṁ)
    2. deprived of, without (—˚) Ja iii.369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā) DN-a i.36 (avaṇṇa˚) Pv-a 63 (bhoga˚), 67 (ācāra˚), 77 (gandha˚). Note. samantarahita is to be divided as sam-antarahita
    past participle of rah
    Rāga
    1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin ii.107 (anga˚ “rougeing” the body bhikkhū angarāgaṁ karonti) Thag-a 78 Snp-a 315 (nānāvidha˚)
    2. (as technical term in philosophy & ethics) excitement passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combination with dosa, & moha; , as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement) ill-will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment) ‣See dosa2 & moha; cp. sarāga
    3. These three again appear in manifold combinations with similar terms, all giving various shades of the “craving for existence” or “lust of life (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti)
    4. Some of the combinations are e.g. the 3 (r. d. m.) + kilesa; + kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi ‣See in full Nd2 s.v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada
    5. Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga → nibbāna the following may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Snp 1086 yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṁ vuccati amataṁ SN v.8 yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṁ vuccati nibbānaṁ SN iv.251 ye 'dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṁ bhavararāganu-sayañ ca pahāya … parinibbāna-gatā Vv 5324 kusalo jahati pāpakaṁ … rāga dosa-mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85
    6. Personified, Rāga (variant reading Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati; are called the “daughters of Māra” (Māradhītā): Snp 835 Dhp-a iii.199 Nd1 181
    7. For further detail of meaning & application ‣See e.g.
    8. with; dosa & moha; : DN i.79 DN i.156 iii.107, 108, 132 SN i.184 SN iv.139 SN iv.195 SN iv.250 SN iv.305 SN v.84, 357 sq. MN ii.138 (rasa˚ the excitement of taste) AN i.52 AN i.156f. 230 sq.; ii.256; iii.169, 451 sq. iv.144 Iti 56 57; Vism 421 Vb-a 268 269 (sa & vīta˚).
    9. in other connection: DN iii.70, 74, 146 175, 217, 234 (arūpa˚), 249 (cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati) SN ii.231 = 271 (cittaṁ anuddhaṁseti); iii.10; iv.72, 329 v.74 (na rāgaṁ jāneti etc.) AN ii.149 (tibba-rāga-jātiko rāgajaṁ dukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti); iii.233, 371 (kāmesu vīta˚); iv.423 (dhamma˚) Snp 2 Snp 74 Snp 139 Snp 270 = SN i.207 (+ dosa) Snp 361 Snp 493 Snp 764 Snp 974 Snp 1046 Dhp 349 (tibba˚ bahala-rāga Dhp-a iv.68); Ps i.80 sq.; ii.37 (rūpa˚), 95 (identical) Vb 145f. (= taṇhā), 368 (= kiñcana), 390 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 155, 167 DN-a i.116
    10. O
    11. past participle virāga
      1. ˚aggi the fire of passion DN iii.217 SN iv.19 Iti 92 (r dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; + dosaggi mohaggi) Ja i.61 (˚imhi nibbute nibbutaṁ nāma hoti) -ānusaya latent bias of passion (for = dative) SN iv.205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga˚, paṭigha˚, avijjā˚) Iti 80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati)
      2. ˚ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma) Nd1 72
      3. ˚kkhaya the decay (waning) of p SN iii.51 SN iii.160: iv.142, 250, 261; v.8, 16, 25 Vb-a 51f. -carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Mil 92 Vism 105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+ dosa˚ moha˚), 193; Kp-a 54 (colour of the blood of his heart cp. Vism 409) -ṭṭhānīya founded on passion AN i.264 AA 32
      4. ˚patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality SN iv.70 Snp 370 Snp 476 (with explanation “rāgo pi hi duggatīnaṁ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati” Snp-a 410) -rati passionate or lustful delight Dhp-a iii.112
      • ˚ratta affected with passion SN i.136 Snp 795 (as ˚rāgin, cp. Nd1 100 = kāma-guṇesu ratta)
      cp. Sanskrit rāga, from raj ‣See rajati
    Rāgin
    (—˚)
    1. one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Snp 795 (cp. Nd1 100) SN i.136 Vism 193, 194 (with various characterisations)
    from rāga
    Rājaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. characteristic of the king, king-; in compounds arājaka without a king Ja vi.39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tika-Paṭṭhāna 26; feminine sarājikā Vin i.209 (parisā) Also in phrase anikkhanta-rājake (
    2. locative absolute) when the king has not gone out Vin iv.160
    3. rāja + ka, the ending belonging to the whole compound
    Rājañña
    1. “royalty”; a high courtier, a khattiya (= rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) DN i.103 (Pasenadi rājā … uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kañcid eva mantanaṁ manteyya) DN-a i.273 (= anabhisittā kumārā, i.e. uncrowned princes) Mil 234 Vv-a 297 (Pāyāsi r.)
    from rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya
    Rājatā
    feminine
    1. state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty Ja i.119 (anuttara-dhamma˚ being a most righteous king)
    abstract from rājā
    Rājati
    1. to shine Vv-a 134 (= vijjotati). cp. ; vi˚;. Raja (Rajan)
    rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati
    Rājā (Rājan)

    1. king, a ruling potentate. The definition at Vin iii.222 is “yo koci rajjaṁ kāreti.” The fanciful etymology at DN iii.93 Vism 419 is “dhammena pare rañjetī ti rājā” i.e. he gladdens others with his righteousness
    • At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā-sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land-aristocrats)
    • Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sanskrit forms, viz. the contracted, the diaeretic and (in the
    • plural ) a new formation with-ū-. Thus genitive & dative singular; rañño Sanskrit rājñaḥ Vin iii.107 Vin iv.157 Ja ii.378 Ja iii.5 Vv 744 and rājino Snp 299 Snp 415 Thag 2, 463 Ja iv.495 Mhvs 2, 14; instrumental singular raññā Vin iii.43 Ja v.444 Dhp-a i.164 Pv-a 22 Vb-a 106 and rājinā [ Sanskrit rajña
    1. Mhvs 6, 2; accusative singular rājānaṁ Vin iv.157
    2. locative raññe Pv-a 76 voc. rāja Snp 422 Snp 423
    3. plural nominative rājāno AN i.68 genitive dative raññaṁ Sanskrit rājñaṁ DN ii.87 Mhvs 18, 32; and rājūnaṁ Vin i.228 Ud 11 Ja ii.104 Ja iii.487 Snp-a 484 Pv-a 101 Pv-a 133; instrumental raññāhi AN i.279
    4. rājūhi Ud 41 MN ii.120 Ja i.179 Ja iii.45 Mhvs 5, 80; 8, 21; and rājubhi DN ii.258 cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 921.
      1. -1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any translation like “king” or even “sovereign,” or “prince.” We find it used as a designation of “king” in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with various attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the following scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in voc equivalent to deva] a world-king, over-lord, a so-called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as “Universal King”) peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol. “Great Man,” who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā-sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being as described at various places of the Canon (e.g. Snp p. 106 Snp 1002 Snp 1003 DN iii.142 AN i.76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase “c dhammiko dhamma-rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya-ppatto satta-ratana-samannāgato,” e. g DN iii.59 Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a Commentary as the first “human sovereign powers” (Pv-a 117). The four iddhi’s of a Commentary are given (quite crudely) at MN iii.176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated = DN ii.141 deserves a thūpa DN ii.142f.; his four qualities DN ii.145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis samaṇas are pleased with him) ‣See under cakkavatti & ratana
      • In a similar sense the term; dhamma-rājā is used as epithet of the Buddha Snp 554 (rāj’ âham asmi dh-.r. anuttaro) Ja i.262 and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in voc.) mahārāja, e.g. Snp 416 (addressed to Bimbisāra Pv-a 22 (identical) Ja vi.515
      • (b) [in a larger constitutional state
      1. the crowned (muddhâvasitta) monarch (i.e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom The definition of this (general) rājā at Nd2 542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times It is: “khattiyo muddh’ âbhisitto vijita-sangāmo nihata-paccāmitto laddh’ adhippāyo paripuṇṇa-koṭthāgāro,” i.e. “a crowned noble, victorious in battle slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full.” This king is “the top of men” (mukhaṁ manussānaṁ) Vin i.246 = Sn 568. cp. DN i.7 Snp 46 (raṭṭhaṁ vijitam pahāya) Ja v.448 and passim ‣See also below 3. 4 & 6
      • In similes ‣See; iJournal of the Pali Text Society 1907 128; & cp. Vism 152 (r. va saddh’ antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) “deva-rājā,” e. g Dhp-a iii.269 441 Pv-a 62
      • (c) in an oligarchic sense member of a kula of khattiyas, e.g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaṁ in J. v.413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. cp. Buddhist India p. 19
      • (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state
      1. a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance e.g. AN v.22 (kuḍḍa-rājāno rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā) Snp 553 (bhoja˚ similar to rāja-bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at Snp-a 453) AN ii.74f. (dhammikā & a˚) Ja iv.495 Similarly at Vin i.228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā-rājāno, the mahā˚ being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note AN on mahā, e.g. AN iv.242 ‣See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c
      • (e) AN wider range of meaning is attached to several sub-divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the def; n of what is termed “rājāno” (
      • plural like d) at Vin iii.47 viz. rājā, padesa-rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṁ anusāsanti (i.e. those who have juridical power) ‣See also below 4 b, and ˚putta, ˚bhogga [other compounds.
      1. ]
      • It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha’s time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula-santakaṁ rajjaṁ Ja i.395 Ja ii.116 Ja iv.124 but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: Ja i.470 Pv-a 74 He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places ‣See below under ˚dhammā Others are mentioned e.g. at DN i.135 where it is said he gives food and ‣Seed-corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold ‣See D i.137: well-born (“gentleman,” khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi’s & brāhmaṇa’s, viz. “aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūta-jātarūpa-rajata pahūta-vitt’ ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana-dhañña paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra,” e.g. DN i.134 For a late description of a king’s quality and distinction ‣See Mil 226 Mil 227
      • His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, especially the cora ‣See below 4 c. A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd2 304iii cp. MN iii.163 (here also on a cora

    5. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating “castes,” but which are simply inclusive statements of various prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to different occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. English g khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati DN i.136 rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika AN i.68 where another formula has khattiya brāhmaṇa gahapatika. AN i.66 Ja i.217 and the following with an intermediate “rank” (something like “royalty, “the royal household”) between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama-jānapadā AN ii.74f.; rājāno rāja-mahāmattā khattiyā brāhmaṇa gahapatika, titthiyā DN iii.44 (translation Dialogues of the Buddha too weak “rājas & their officials”); rājā rājabhogga brāhmaṇa gahapatika Vin iii.221

      • Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya; All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble as seen from definition jāti-khattiya at Snp-a 453 and various contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV x.109, 3), and rājanya is an epithet of kṣatriya ‣See Zimmer Altindisches Leben 213
      • rājā khattiyo muddhâvassito “a crowned king” DN i.69 DN iii.61f. Vin iv.160 AN i.106f.; ii.207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); iii.299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people) MN iii.172f. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka-ratana)
      • Without muddhāvasitta : rājāno khattiyā Dhp 294 = Nett 165. cp. khattiyā bhoja-rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Snp 553 ‣See bhoja. At Ja vi.515
      • rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa˚); cp. expression khattiya-kula Ja i.217 as equivalent to rāja-kula (b) rājā & mahāmatta; . The latter occupies the position of “Premier,” but is a rank equal to the king hence often called rājā himself: Vin iii.47 where styled “akkhadassa mahāmatta.” Otherwise he is always termed rāja-mahāmatta “royal minister,” or “H.R.H the Premier,” e.g. Vin i.172 AN i.279 Vin i.228 (also as Magadha-mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya DN iii.44
      • (c) rājā & cora; . A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the “robber-chief” (mahā-cora) The contrast-pair rajāno (so always
      • plural ) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i.e. officers of the kings or “the king’s Guards. Thus at Ja iii.34 the Commentary explanation as rāja-purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening “get up robber, so that the kings (alias ʻ policeman ʼ) won't catch you”: uṭṭhehi cora mā taṁ gahesuṁ rājāno Other passages are e.g.: DN i.7 (rāja-kathā & corakathā) = Vin i.188 MN iii.163 (rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā) AN i.68 AN i.154 Iti 89 (rāj’ âbhinīta + cor˚); in sequence; rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin i.150 161

    6. On the question of kingship in Ancient India ‣See Zimmer Altindisches Leben pp. 162

      1. -175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index ii.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63
      1. -90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rhys Davids, Buddhist India past participle 1

        1. -16; Hopkins English W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in Ancient India in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjee Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916, pp. 63
        1. -93
        • Kings mentioned by name a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs ‣See Dict'y of Names
        1. Ajātasattu; Udena (Dhp-a i.185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala Vin i.342); Parantapa (of Kosambī Dhp-a i.164) Pasenadi (of Kosala DN i.87 DN i.103 Vin iv.112 157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha Vin iv.116f. Snp 419) Bhaddiya; etc
        • (figuratively) king as sign of distinction (“princeps”), as the lion is called rājā migānaṁ Snp 72 Vism 650; the Himavant is pabbata -rājā AN i.152 AN iii.44 and Gotama’s horse Kaṇthaka is called assa -rājā Ja i.62 = Vv-a 314
        • Note. The compound form of rājā is rāja˚;
        1. ˚āgāra a king’s (garden-or pleasure-) house DN i.7 (˚ka) DN-a i.42
        • ˚aṅga royal mark, characteristic or qualification; king’s property Vin i.219 (rājangaṁ hatthī: the elephants belong to the king), cp. AN i.244 assājāniyo rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṁ gacchati is called king’s property
        • ˚aṅgana royal court Pv-a 74
        • ˚āṇatti king’s permission Tika-Paṭṭhāna 26 (in simile)
        • ˚āṇā (1) the king’s command Ja iii.180 cp. Pv-a 217 “rañño āṇā” (2) the king’s fine or punishment, i.e. a punishment inflicted by the king (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. 74), synonymous with rāja-daṇḍa: Ja i.369 Ja i.433 (rājāṇaṁ karoti to inflict) ii.197; iii.18, 232, 351; iv.42; vi.18 Pv-a 242
        • ˚ānubhāva king’s power, majesty, authority, pomp Ja iv.247 Pv-a 279
        • ˚antepura the royal harem. AN v.81 AN v.82 (the 10 risks which a bhikkhu is running when visiting it for alms)
        • ˚ābhinīta brought by a king Iti 89 (+ corâbhinīta)
        • ˚ābhirājā “king of kings” Snp 553 Dhs-a 20
        • ˚āmacca royal minister Ja v.444 (˚majjhe)
        • ˚āyatana name of a tree: “Kingstead tree,” the royal tree (as residence of a king of fairies), Buchanania latifolia Vin i.3f. (where MVastu iii.303 reads kṣīrikā, i.e. milk-giving tree) Ja i.80 Ja iv.361f. Dhs-a 35 Vb-a 433 (˚cetiya)
        • ˚iddhi royal power Pv-a 279
        • ˚isi a royal ‣Seer, a king who gives up his throne & becomes an ascetic (cp. Sanskrit rājarṣi, frequently in Mhbhārata & Rāmā yana) Thag 1, 1127 (read rāja-d-isi) Iti 21 (rājīsayo, with various variant readings not quite the same meaning) Ja vi.116 Ja vi.124 127, 518 Dhp-a iv.29 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. proposes reading rājīsi
        • upaṭṭhāna attendance on the king, royal audience Vin i.269 Ja i.269 Ja i.349 Ja iii.119 Ja iii.299 iv.63 -ūpabhoga fit for use by the king Mil 252
        • ˚uyyāna royal garden or pleasure ground Ja iii.143 Mhvs 15, 2 -orodhā a lady from the king’s harem, a royal concubine Vin iv.261
        • ˚kakudha-bhaṇḍa an ensign of royalty (5: khagga, chatta, uṇhīsa, pādukā, vālavījanī) Dhp-a i.356 ‣See under kakudha
        • ˚kathā talk about kings (as tiracchānakathā in disgrace), combined with corakathā ‣See above 4 c DN i.7 DN iii.36 DN iii.54 Vin i.188
        • ˚kammika a royal official, one employed by the king Ja i.439 iv.169
        • ˚kuṭumba the king’s property Ja i.439
        • ˚kuṇḍa a “crook of a king” Dhp-a iii.56
        • ˚kumāra a (royal prince (cp. khattiya-kumāra) Vin i.269 Ja iii.122 Vb-a 196 (in comparison)
        • ˚kumbhakāra a “royal potter,” i.e. a potter being “purveyor to the king Ja v.290
        • ˚kula the king’s court or palace AN i.128 ii.205 Vin iv.265 Ja ii.301 Dhp-a ii.44 46; iii.124 -khādāya puṭṭha at Snp 831 is according to Kern Toevoegselen to be read as rajakkhatāya ph. (from rajakkha) The old Niddesa, however, reads ˚khādāya & explains the word (Nd1 171) by rājabhojanīyena, i.e. the king’s food, which is alright without being changed
        • ˚guṇa “virtue of a king” MN i.446 (trick of a circus horse + rāja-vaṁsa)
        • ˚daṇḍa punishment ordered by the king Pv-a 216 Pv-a 217
        • ˚dāya a royal gift DN i.127 DN-a i.246
        • ˚dūta king’s messenger Snp 411 Snp 412 in meaning of “message,” i.e. calling somebody to court, summons at Ja ii.101 Ja ii.305
        • ˚dhamma “king’s rule,” i.e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which are enumerated at Ja iii.274 as “dāna, sīla, pariccāga ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihiṁsā, khanti avirodhana,” i.e. alms-giving, morality, liberality straightness, gentleness, self-restriction, non-anger non-hurtfulness, forbearance non-opposition. These are referred to as dasa rājadhammā at Ja i.260 Ja i.399 ii.400; iii.320; v.119, 378; usually in phrase “dasa rāja-dhamme akopetvā dhammena rajjan kāresi” he ruled in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at Ja v.112 viz. “vitathaṁ kodhaṁ hāsaṁ nivāraye” (explained as giving up musāvāda, kodha & adhamma-hāsa)
        • ˚dhānī a royal city (usually combined with gāma & nigama AN i.159 AN ii.33 AN iii.108 Vin iii.89 Ja v.453 Pv.1318-dhītā king’s daughter, princess Ja i.207 Pv-a 74
        • ˚nivesana the king’s abode, i.e. palace Dhp-a iv.92
        • ˚parisā royal assembly Vin ii.296
        • ˚pīla (?) Dhp-a i.323
        • ˚putta literally “king’s son,” prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rājput Snp 455 Mil 331 Vb-a 312 319 (in simile) Pv-a 20
        • feminine ˚puttī princess Ja iv.108 Ja v.94
        • ˚purisa “king’s man,” only in
        • plural ˚purisā the men of the king, those in the king’s service (as soldiers, body-guard policeman etc.) Ja iii.34 Vb-a 80 (˚ânubandha-corā) 109
        • ˚porisa
        • masculine> &
        • neuter servant of the king, collectively: king’s service, those who devote themselves to Govt. service DN i.135 MN i.85 = Nd2 199 AN iv.281 AN iv.286 ‣See also porisa
        • bali royal tax Ja i.354
        • ˚bhaṭa king’s hireling or soldier Vin i.74 88 Snp-a 38 (in simile -bhaya fear of the king(’s punishment) Vism 121 -bhāga the king’s share Ja ii.378
        • ˚bhogga 1. royal in the service of the king, in following phrases: rāja-bhoggaṁ raññā dinnaṁ rāja-dāyaṁ brahma-deyyaṁ DN i.87 of a flourishing place. Dialogues of the Buddha i.108 translates “with power over it as if he were king,” and explains with: “where the king has proprietary rights.” The Commentary rather unmeaningly explains as “rāja-laddha” (DN-a i.245). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit has a curious version of this phrase: “rājñā-agni- dattena brahmadeyyaṁ dattaṁ” (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620
        • Further at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā r-bhogga, brāhmaṇa, gahapatika where the Commentary explains (on p. 222) as “yo koci rañño bhatta-vetan’ āhāro.” (We should be inclined to take this as No. 2.)-Thirdly, in stock phrase “rājâraha rājabhogga rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṁ gacchati,” i.e. worthy of a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification said of a thoroughbred horse at AN i.244 ii.113; of a soldier (yodh’ ājīva) at AN i.284 of an elephant at Ja ii.370 (where it is explained as “rāja paribhoga”) Also as “royal possessions” in general at Dhp-a i.312 13
        • Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much, he takes it as “king’s official.”
        • royal, of royal power, one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (Snp-a 453) or (khattiyā) bhoja-rājāno (Sn 553). Thus at Vin iii.221 where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble” & Snp 553 where it is comb; d (as bhoja rājano) with khattiyā ‣See also bhoja & cp. (antara); bhogika and rājañña
        • mahāmatta king’s prime minister ‣See above 4 b, to which add: DN iii.44 AN i.154 AN i.252 AN i.279 AN iii.128 Vb-a 312 (simile of 2, 340
        • ˚mālakāra royal gardener Ja v.292
        • ˚muddā the royal seal Dhp-a i.21
        • ˚muddikā identical Snp-a 577
        • ˚ratha the king’s chariot Dhp-a iii.122
        • ˚rukkha “royal tree,” Cathartocarpus fistula Vv-a 43
        • ˚vara the best king, famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134) -vallabha the king’s favourite, or overseer Mhvs 37, 10 Vb-a 501 (in simile)
        • ˚vibhūti royal splendour or dignity Pv-a 216 Pv-a 279
        • ˚haṁsa “royal swan,” a sort of swan or flamingo Vism 650 (suvaṇṇa˚, in simile)
      cp. Vedic rājā, n-stem. To root *reg, as in Latin rego (to lead, di-rect, cp. in meaning Gr) ‣See etymology under uju. cp. Old Irish rī king, Gallic Catu-rīx battle king, Goth reiks = Old High German rīhhi = rich or German reich. Besides we have *reig in Anglo-Saxon rāēcean reach; German reichen The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning “ditti” i.e. splendour
    Rāji1
    1. a streak, line, row Snp p. 107 (nīla-vana˚ = dark line of trees, explained as nīla-vana rukkha-panti Snp-a 451) Vv 644 (nabhyo sata-rāji-cittita “coloured with 100 streaks”; Vv-a = lekhā); 646 (veḷuriya˚) pabbata˚; a mountain range Ja ii.417
    • dīgha˚
    • adjective of long lineage Pv-a 68
    • dvaṅgula˚ a band 2 inches broad Dāvs v.49; roma˚; a row of hair (on the body) Ja v.430
    cp. Sanskrit rāji
    Rāji2
    1. dissension, quarrel, in phrase saṅgha˚; (+ sanghabheda) Vin ii.203 (quoted at Vb-a 428) iv.217
    from rāga?
    Rājikā
    feminine
    1. a certain (gold) weight (a ‣Seedcorn of Sinapis ramosa) Thag 1, 97 = 862 (kaṁsa sata 100 mustard ‣Seeds in weight, i.e. very costly) Ja vi.510 (kaṁse sovaṇṇe satarājike)
    cp. Sanskrit rājikā
    Rājita
    1. ‣See vi˚;
    Rājin
    adjective
    1. having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga˚; having prominent stripes (of a lion) Ja iv.345
    from rāji
    Rājimant
    adjective
    1. having streaks or stripes; feminine rājimatī shining, radiant Vv 321 (variant reading rājāputti), explained at Vv-a 134 as follows: “rājati vijjotatī ti rājī: rājī ti matā paññātā rājimatī” (thus connecting ˚mant with man
    2. from rāji1
    Rājula
    1. a certain reptile Abhp 651
    cp. Sanskrit rājila
    Rāti
    1. to take up no refs
    Sanskrit to give, bestow; given at Dhtp 369 & Dhtm 597 in meaning “ādāne,” with doublet
    Rādheti1
    1. to please ‣See compounds. abhi˚ apa˚, ā˚ vi˚
    causative of rādh to succeed, rādhyate. The root is given at Dhtp 420 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “saṁsiddhiyaṁ,” i.e. of success ‣See etymology at Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. reor.
    Rādheti2
    1. no refs
    rādh? Given at Dhtp 424 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “hiṁsāyaṁ,” i.e. of hurting
    Rāma
    1. pleasure, sport, amusement; ˚kara having pleasure, sporting, making love Ja v.448
    from ram; cp. Vedic rāma
    Rāmaṇeyyaka
    adjective neuter
    1. pleasant agreeable, lovely AN i.35 AN i.37 Dhp 98 (= ramaṇīya Dhp-a iii.195); neuter delightfulness, lovely scenery MN i.365 (four seen in a dream: ārāma˚, vana˚, bhūmi pokkharaṇī˚)
    2. originally gerundive of rāmeti, ram, cp. Sanskrit rāmaṇīya. On e for ī ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 10
    Rāva
    1. crying, howling; shout, noise Ja i.162 (baddha˚ the cry of one who is caught); iv.415 (identical); vi.475 (of the cries of animals, known to an expert) Mil 254 (bherava-rāvaṁ abhiravati); Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā-rāvaṁ arāvi)
    from ravati, cp. rava
    Rāsi
    1. heap, quantity, mass Iti 17 usually—˚, e.g. aṅgāra˚; heap of cinders Ja i.107
    2. kaṇikārapuppha˚ of k. flowers Vv-a 65
    3. kahāpaṇa˚ of money Pv-a 162 tila˚; of ‣Seeds Vv-a 54
    4. dhañña˚ of corn AN iv.163 AN iv.170 etc
    5. rāsiṁ karoti to make a heap, to pile up Mhvs 29, 28 Vv-a 157
    6. (store of) wealth riches; in ˚agga-dāna gift of the best treasures (of one’s property), one of the 5 “donations of the best,” viz khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚, bhojan˚: Snp-a 270 ‣See also ˚vaḍḍhaka
    7. a sign of the Zodiac (the 12 as given at Abhp 61 are: mesa, usabha, methuna kakkata, sīha, kaññā, tulā, vicchikā, dhanu, makara kumbha, mīna; or the ram, bull, twins, crab, lion, virgin balance, scorpion bow, capricorn, waterpot, fish) Pv-a 198

      • (figuratively) at technical term in logic: group, aggregate category, congery; frequently in Abhidhamma-literature where 3 “accumulations” are spoken of, viz. micchatta-niyato rāsi, sammatta-niyato r., anivato r. or “wrong doing entailing immutable evil results, that of well-doing entailing immutable good results, and that of everything not so determined” (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.210) DN iii.217 Kvu 611; Nett 96; cp. Kvu translation 356 Dhs translation 26, 253. In the 5 factors of individuality (body and mind) khandhā are explained as meaning rāsi e.g. Asl. 141; B. Psy. 42. In other connections SN v.146 (kusala˚, akusala˚), 186 AN iii.65 (akusala˚) Tika-Paṭṭhāna 45. -Note. In Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit we find only 2 of the 3 categories mentioned at MVastu i.175, viz. mithyātvaniyato & aniyato rāśih
      1. ˚vaḍḍhaka one who increases wealth, i.e. a treasurer DN i.61 (translation: “increases the king’s wealth” DN-a i.170 simply defines “dhañña-rāsiñ ca dhana-rāsiñ ca vaḍḍhetī ti r. v.”) Ja i.2 Mhbv.78
      Vedic r̄āśi
    Rāsika
    neuter
    1. revenue, fisc DN i.135
    from rāsi
    Rāhaseyyaka
    adjective
    1. “having one’s bed in loneliness, living in seclusion or secrecy, in manussa˚; “fit to lie undisturbed by men” Vin i.39 (+ paṭisallāna-sāruppa) MN ii.118
    rahas + seyya + ka or rāha (for rahā˚) + seyyaka
    Rāhu
    1. name of an Asura ‣See under Proper Names
    • rāhumukha “mouth of Rāhu,” designation of a certain punishment for criminals (M i.87; iii.164 Nd1 154 (in list of tortures) = Nd2 604 = Mil 197
    Vedic rāhu
    Riṇāti
    1. ‣See under raya
    Riñcati

    1. to leave, abandon leave behind, give up, neglect Vin i.190 (also fut riñcissati) MN i.155 (riñcissati), 403 SN iv.206 AN iii.86f. 108 sq., 343 sq., 366 sq., 437 Thag 1, 1052 Snp 156 Mil 419 Ja v.403
    • ppr.
    • medium with negative: ariñcamāna Snp 69
    • absolutive riñcitvā (for Sanskrit riktvā) Thag 2, 93
    • past participle ritta -
    • passive riccati Sanskrit ricyate
    1. to be left ‣See ati˚;
    ric, in Vedic & Sanskrit rinakti; cp. Avestan irinaxti to leave; Latin linquo identical Gothic leihwan = Old High German līhan to lend; Anglo-Saxon lāēn = loan cp. English leave etc The definition of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as “virecane” (No. 396; cp. Dhtm 517 “kharaṇe,” i.e. flowing; 610 “recane”) and riñc as “riñcane” (No. 44)
    Riñcana
    neuter
    1. leaving behind, giving up Dhtp 44
    from riñc
    Ritta
    devoid, empty, free, rid (of) MN i.207 (+ tuccha), 414 Vin i.157 = ii.216 Snp 823 (emancipated: ritto muni = vivitta etc. Nd1 158), 844 (opposite to aritta) Thag 2, 265 ‣See rindi Ja i.29 (v.222); iii.492 Mil 383
    1. ˚assāda finding one’s taste in empty things AN i.280 (+ bāhir-assāda. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. reads rittāsa and translates “impure (of food),” not according to the sense at all)
    2. ˚āsana an empty seat Snp 963 (explained at Nd1 481 as “opportunity for sitting down which is free from unbefitting sights”)
    3. ˚pesuṇa free from slander Snp 941 (explained at Nd1 422: “yassa pesuññaṁ pahīnaṁ” etc.) -muṭṭhi an empty fist (˚sadisa: comparing someone as regards ignorance) Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38
    • ˚hattha
    • adjective empty-handed Ja v.46 Sdhp 309
    past participle of riñcati; cp. atireka
    Rittaka
    adjective
    1. empty, void, without reality Thag 1, 41 2, 394 (= tucchaka anto-sāra-rahita Thag-a 258) Pv iii.65 (of a river = tuccha Pv-a 202) Pv-a 139 (= suñña, virahita). Usually in combination with tucchaka as a standing phrase denoting absolute emptiness worthlessness, e.g. at DN i.240 MN i.329 SN iii.141
    ritta + ka
    Rindī
    1. at Thag 2, 265 is doubtful. The Text reading is “te rindī va lambante 'nodaka,” said of breasts hanging down in old age. The Commentary compares them with leather water bottles without water (udaka-bhastā viya). We have to read either with Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 94 “rittī va” (= rittā iva), “as it were, empty,” or (preferably) with Thag-a 212therī ti va” (“like an old woman”). The translation (Sisters, p. 124) takes the C explanation of udaka-bhastā as equivalent to Text reading rindi, in saying “shrunken as skins without water”; but rindī is altogether doubtful & it is better to read; therī which is according to the context. We find the same meaning of therī (“old woman”) at Pv ii.116
    Rissati
    1. to be hurt, to suffer harm MN i.85 (ḍāṁsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṁsapa-samphassehi rissamāno; where Nd2 199 in same passage reads samphassamāna)
    Vedic riṣ, riṣyati
    Ruka
    1. in compound aḍḍha˚; at Vin ii.134 referring to the shape of a beard, is doubtful. The variant reading is “duka.” Could it correspond to Vedic rukma (a certain ornament worn on the chest)?
    Rukkha
    1. a tree. In the rukkha-mūlik’ anga ‣See below Buddhaghosa at Vism 74 gives a list of trees which are not to be selected for the practice of “living at the root of a tree.” These are sīmantarika-rukkha, cetiya˚, niyyāsa˚ phala˚, vagguli˚, susira˚, vihāra-majjhe ṭhita˚, or a tree standing right on the border, a sacred tree, a resinous tree, a fruit t., a tree on which bats live, a hollow tree a tree growing in the middle of a monastery. The only one which is to be chosen is a tree “vihāra-paccante ṭhita,” or one standing on the outskirt of the Vihāra He then gives further advice as to the condition of the tree
    • Various kinds of trees are given in the definition of r. at Vism 183, viz. assattha, nigrodha, kacchaka kapitthaka; ucca, nīca, khuddaka, mahanto; kāḷa seta
    • AN very complete list of trees mentioned in the Saṁyutta Nikāya is to be found in the Index to that Nikāya (vol. vi. p. 84, 85. On rukkha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, past participle 128–⁠130
    • ‣ See also the following refs. AN i.137 AN ii.109 AN ii.207 AN iii.19 AN iii.200 AN iii.360 AN iv.99 AN iv.336 v.4 sq., 314 sq. Snp 603 Snp 712 Ja i.35 (nāga˚); Vism 688 (in simile: mahārukkhe yāva kapp’ âvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkha-paveṇiṁ santāyamāne ṭhite) Vb-a 165 = Vism 555 (rukkha phalita) Vb-a 196 (in compound: jātassa avassaṁ jarā-maraṇaṁ, uppannassa rukkhassa patanaṁ viya), 334 sq. (as garu-bhaṇḍa) Snp-a 5 (“pathavi-ras’ ādim iva rukkhe”: with same simile as at Vism 688, with reading kappâvasānaṁ and santānente) Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚) Vv-a 43 (rāja˚), 198 (amba˚) Dhp-a iv.120 (dīpa˚) Pv-a 43
    1. ˚antara the inside of a tree Pv-a 63
    • ˚koṭṭaka (-sakuṇa) the wood-pecker Ja iii.327 (= java sakuṇa) -gahana tree-thicket or entanglement AN i.154 (so for ˚gahaṇa)
    • ˚devatā a tree spirit, dryad, a yakkha inhabiting a tree (rukkhe adhivatthā d. Vin iv.34 Ja ii.385 kakudhe adhivatthā d. Vin i.28) Ja i.168 Ja i.322 ii.405, 438 sq. (eraṇḍa˚), 445; iii.23; iv.308 (vanajeṭṭhaka-rukkhe nibbatta-devatā) Dhp-a ii.16 Pv-a 5 (in a Nigrodha tree), 43 (in the Vindhya forest). They live in a Nigrodha tree at the entrance of the village (J i.169), where they receive offerings at the foot of the tree (cp. iv.474), and occasionally one threatens them with discontinuance of the offerings if they do not fulfil one’s request. The trees are their vimānas (J i.328, 442; iv.154), occasionally they live in hollow trees (J i.405; iii.343) or in tree tops (J i.423) They have to rely on the food given to them (ibid.) for which they help the people (J iii.24; v.511). They assume various forms when they appear to the people (J i.423; ii.357, 439; iii.23); they also have children (Vin iv.34 Ja i.442)
    • ˚paveṇi lineage of the tree Vism 688
    • ˚pāṇikā a wooden spoon Vism 124 (opposite to pāsāṇa˚)
    • ˚mūla the foot of a tree (taken as a dwelling by the ascetics for meditation: DN i.71 where several such lonely places are recommended, as arañña, r-m. pabbata, kandara, etc

      • DN-a i.209 specifies as “yaṁ kiñci sanda-cchāyaṁ vivittaṁ rukkha-mūlaṁ”) AN ii.38 iv.139, 392 SN i.199 (˚gahana) Iti 102 Snp 708 Snp 958 Nd1 466 Pug 68 Pv-a 100 (variant reading sukkha-nadī), 137 (Gaṇḍamba˚, with reference to the Buddha). —˚gata one who undertakes living at the foot of a tree (as an ascetic) AN iii.353 AN v.109f. 207, 323 sq. Pug 68 —˚senāsana having one’s bed & seat at the foot of a tree for meditative practices as a recluse Vin i.58 (as one of the 4 nissayas: piṇḍiy’ ālopa-bhojana, paṁsukūla-cīvara, r
      • m. s., pūti-mutta bhesajja), 96 (identical) AN iv.231
      • ˚mūlika (a) one who lives at the foot of a tree, an open air recluse MN i.282 MN iii.41 AN iii.219 Ja iv.8 (āraññaka, paṇṇasālaṁ akatvā r., abbhokāsika) (b) belonging to the practice of a recluse living under a tree “tree rootman’s practice” (Vism translation 84); as ˚anga one of the (13) dhutaṅga -practices; i.e. practices for a scrupulous way of living Vism 59, 74, 75 (mentioned between the ārannik' anga & the; abbhokāsik'- anga)
      • ˚mūlikatta the practice of living (alone) under a tree MN iii.41 (mentioned with paṁsukūlikatta piṇḍapātikatta) AN iii.109 (identical)
      • ˚sunakha “tree dog, a certain animal Ja vi.538 (Commentary in explanation of naḷa-sannibha “reed-coloured”)
      • ˚susira a hollow tree Pv-a 62
      Vedic vṛkṣa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 13, with note. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 320 puts rukkha to Sanskrit rukṣa (shining which as Pischel, following Roth. says has also the meaning “tree” in Ṛgveda). The Prakrit form is rukkha cp. Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik 1, § 184 b. We find a byform rakkha at Ja iii.144 cp. Brethren, past participle 185, 416 where the Bn MS. has rukkha kathā the meaning being rakkha˚
    Ruca
    1. (-rukkha) & Rucā feminine

      1. name of a plant, or tree, alias “mukkhaka” (read mokkhaka “principal Ja i.441 Ja i.443 (gloss mangala-rukkha)
      from ruc
    Rucaka
    neuter
    1. (gold) sand Vv 351 Vv-a 160 (= suvaṇṇa-vālikā)
    cp. Sanskrit rucaka a golden ornament
    Ruci
    feminine
    1. splendour, light, brightness Snp 548 (su˚ very splendid Snp-a 453 = sundara-sarīrappabha)
    2. inclination, liking, pleasure Pv-a 59 (˚ṁ uppādeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied)
    3. aruci aversion, dislike Thag 2, 472
    4. ruci object of pleasure Ja v.371
    5. ruciyā ablative in the pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciyā (attano citta-ruciyā: so read for ˚ruciyaṁ!); as one pleases, by one’s own free will, ad lib. Ja i.106 Ja iv.281 Pv-a 59
    6. parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (gratiâ) of somebody else, i.e. to be dependent on others DN-a i.212
    7. yathā ruciṁ according to liking or satisfaction fully, amply Mhvs 4, 43; 5, 230 Pv-a 88 Pv-a 126 Pv-a 242. 3. In dogmatic language used in the sense of “will” or “influence” in combination diṭṭhi, khanti, ruci one’s views indulgence & pleasure (= will), i.e. one’s intellectual emotional & volitional sphere, e.g. Vin i.70 Snp 781 (without khanti, but ‣See definition at Nd1 65); also with saddhā, anussavo, ākāraparivitakke, diṭṭhinijjhānakhanti MN ii.170 MN ii.218 234; contrasted with dhamma DN iii.40 Vb 245 (in definition of “idha “: cp. same at Ps i.176 and Nd2 145), 325, 328. aññatra ruciyā under the influence of someone else’s will SN ii.115 SN iv.138 ‣See also bhāva 2a
    from ruc, cp. Vedic ruc feminine light, Classic Sanskrit ruci in meaning “pleasure”
    Rucika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to the pleasure (of); only in phrase añña˚; being dependent on someone else’s will or under another’s influence, together with aññadiṭṭhika and añña-khantika characterizing the various sides of personality ‣See ruci 3 with reference to one’s intellect feeling & will DN i.187 = M i.487. Rhys Davids (Dialogues of the Buddha i.254) translates: “holding different views, other things approving themselves to you, setting different aims before yourself”; thus differing in interpretation of añña taking it subjectively. Neumann (Majjhima Übs. ii.250) quite wrongly: “ohne Deutung, ohne Geduld ohne Hingabe” (without explanation, patience, devotion)
      from ruci.3
    Rucira
    adjective
    1. brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv i.109 (= ramaṇīya dassanīya Pv-a 51) Ja i.207 Ja v.299 Vv 402 (so read for rurira) Mhvs 11, 11; 18, 68; Dāvs iv.29 Mil 2 Mil 398 Dhp-a i.383 (= sobhana) Vv-a 12 Pv-a 156 (= vaggu)
    from ruc, cp. Sanskrit rucira
    Ruccati

    1. to find delight or pleasure in (locative ), to please to indulge in, set one’s mind on Snp 565 (etañ ce r. bhoto buddha-sāsanaṁ); with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, MN ii.132 often used by Buddhaghosa in Commentary style yathā r. tathā paṭhitabbaṁ Kp-a 78; “yaṁ r. taṁ gahetabbaṁ Snp-a 23 43, 136, 378” “to take, whichever one pleases” (in giving the choice of 2 readings or interpretations).
    2. absolutive ruccitvā Vv-a 282 (r. pūresi “to find thorough delight in,” explanation for abhirocesi). preterite 1st
    3. plural ruccādimhase Pv i.118 (= ruccāma ruciṁ uppādema, taṁ attano ruciyā pivissāmā ti attho Pv-a 59)

      • Prohibitive mā rucci (
      • plural mā rucittha as an entreaty not to pursue an aim (= please do not do that, please don't) Vin ii.198 (alaṁ Devadatta mā te rucci sangha-bhedo) Dhp-a i.13 (mā vo āvuso evaṁ ruccittha)
      *rucyati Med. of ruc ‣See rocati. Same in Prakrit Originally
    4. causative formation like Epic Sanskrit rocyate for rocayate
    Ruccana
    1. (& ā˚ feminine )
    2. neuter

      1. choice, pleasure Dhp-a; i.387 (tava ˚ṭṭhāne according to your own liking) DN-a i.106 (˚ā)
      from ruccati
    Ruccanaka
    adjective
    1. pleasing, satisfying; neuter satisfaction Ja i.211 (˚maccha the fish you like); ii.182 (tava ˚ṁ karosi you do whatever you like). ; unpleasant, distasteful Dhp-a i.251 (attano aruccanakaṁ kiñci kammaṁ adisvā)
    2. from ruccana, cp. Sanskrit rucya
    Rujaka
    1. a lute-player Ja vi.51 Ja vi.52 given by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as conjecture (vīṇaṁ) va rujaka for virujaka The conjecture is based on Commentary reading “rujaka = vīṇāvādaka.”
    from ruj ?
    Rujati

    1. to break crush; literally to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt (trs. & intransitive Ja i.7 (pādā rujanti), 396 (pādā me rujanti my feet ache) iv.208 (khandhena rujantena with hurting back); vi.3 (ūrū rujanti); Mhvs 10, 15 (pādā me r.) Mil 26 (pādā r.) Dhp-a i.10 21 (akkhīni me rujiṁsu); ii.3
    • fut rucchiti cp. Sanskrit roḳsyate
    1. Ja vi.80 (variant reading B.B. rujjati; C takes wrongly as “rodissati,” of rodati). past participle lugga -cp. lujjati & comb; ns
    2. ruj, representing an Indogermanic *leug, as in Latin lugeo to mourn; Lithuanian lúžti to break; German lücke, loch etc A specific Pāli l-form is lujjati. A derived from ruj is roga illness
    3. The Dhtp (469) defines ruj by “bhanga” i.e. breaking
    Rujana
    neuter
    1. hurting, feeling pain Ja ii.437 (roga = rujana-sabhāvattaṁ) Ja iv.147 (yāva piṭṭhiyā rujana-ppamāṇaṁ until his back ached)
    from ruj, cp. rujā
    Rujanaka
    adjective
    1. aching, hurting Dhp-a iv.69 (anguli)
    from rujana
    Rujā
    feminine
    1. disease, pain Mil 172 (rujaṁ na karoti); Vism 69 Dhp-a iv.163 (accha˚ a bad pain)
    from ruj ‣See rujati; cp. Sanskrit rujā
    Rujjhati
    1. to be broken up, to be destroyed Ja iii.181 (pāṇā rujjhanti; Commentary explains by nirujjhati). cp. upa˚, vi˚;
    passive of rundhati
    Ruṭṭha
    1. vexed, cross, enraged Ja iv.358 (opposite to tuṭṭha variant reading atuṭṭha) v.211 (gloss kuddha); Dāvs iii.37
    past participle of ruṣ; Sanskrit ruṣṭa
    Ruṭhati
    1. ‣See luṭhati & cp. ; rudda
    Ruṇ
    1. a sound-particle, denoting a heavy fall, something like “thud” Ja i.418 Runna & Ronna;
    Ruṇṇa
    Roṇṇa;
    1. (
    2. past participle crying, in comb; nruṇṇa-mukha with tearful face Ja vi.525 (Commentary rudam˚) Mil 148
    3. neuter weeping, crying lamentation Thag 1, 554 AN i.261 Snp 584 (+ soka) Pv i.43 Milo 357. As roṇṇa at AN iv.197 AN iv.223 Thag 1, 555 Ja iii.166
    past participle of rudati for Sanskrit rudita, after analogy of other roots in-d, as tud → tunna, pad → panna, nud → nunna. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit forms are both ruṇḍa (MVastu ii.218, 224) and ruṇṇa (MVastu iii.116); Prakrit ruṇṇa (Pischel § 566) ‣See rudati & cp. āruṇṇa
    Ruta
    neuter
    1. noise, sound(ing); cry, singing Thag 1, 1103 Ja i.207 (Text reading ruda is explained in Commentary as ruta with ˚da for ˚ta : ta-kārassa dakāro kato); iii.276 (sabba-ruta-jānana-manta: spell of knowing all animal-sounds; Text reads rūta; cp. sabbarāva-jānana Ja iii.415); vi.475 (rudaññu = ruta-jña Commentary same meaning) Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta-ravita); Vv-a (karavīka˚)
    past participle of ravati ‣See rava & ravati
    Rutta
    1. in du˚ & su˚; at Dhs-a 396 is to be read as dur- and su(r)- utta ‣See utta
    Ruda
    1. stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jātaka passages, viz. Ja i.207 Ja vi.475 (ruda-ññu knowing the cries of all animals, explained as “ruta-jña, sabba-rāvaṁ jānāti” Commentary )
    Rudati
    Rodati;

    1. to cry, lament weep, wail
    • Forms I. rud˚; (the older form): pres rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto DN i.115 Snp 675 Snp 691
    • rudamāna MN i.341 AN ii.95 Pug 62 Mil 275 Sdhp 281; and rudaṁ Pv i.84 also in compound rudam-mukha with weeping face Ja vi.518 (assu-netta +) Pv i.112
    • absolutive ruditvāna Mhvs 35, 24;
    • future rucchati Ja v.366 and rucchiti Ja vi.550 (= rodissati Commentary ‣See also rujati). II. rod˚; (the younger form & the one peculiar to; prose) pres. rodati Ja i.55 Ja iii.169 (socati +) Pv i.87 (socati +) i.124 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 18; Pot. rode Pv i.85 (= rodeyyaṁ Pv-a 64); ppr. rodanto Ja i.65
    • feminine rodantī Pv-a 16 med rodamāna Pv-a 6 DN-a i.284
    • aorist rodi Ja i.167 Dhp-a ii.17 (+ hasi);
    • future rodissati Ja vi.550
    • absolutive roditvā Mhvs 9, 7; infinitive rodituṁ Ja i.55
    • causative ii.rodāpeti to make someone cry Dhp-a ii.86
    • past participle ruṇṇa, rudita rodita;
    rud, the usual Sanskrit pres. being rodati, but forms from base rud˚; are Vedic and are later found also in Prakrit (cp. Pischel Prakrit Grammar § 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi The Indogermanic root is; *reud, being an enlargement of *reu, as in ravati (q.v.) cp. cognates Latin rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lithuanian raudà wailing; Old High German riozan Anglo-Saxon reotan
  • The Dhtp explainsrud by “rodane” (144) the Dhtm by “assu-vimocane” (206)
  • Rudita
    neuter
    1. crying, weeping Pv-a 18 (+ assu-mocana, in explanation of ruṇṇa), 63 (= paridevita)
    past participle of rudati, equivalent to ruṇṇa
    Rudda
    adjective -77) The usual Pāli form is ludda. At Dhtp 473 & Dhtm 135 a root; ruṭh (or luṭh is given in meaning “upaghāte” i.e. killing, which may represent this rud ‣See luṭhati
    1. fierce, awful, terrible Ja iv.416 (so luddako rudda-rūpo; variant reading ludda˚); v.425, 431 (su-ruddho spelling for su-ruddo, very fierce, explained as su-luddo supharuso); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda-rakkhasī, probably with ref to the demon Rudra; translation “fearsome female demon” variant readings ruda˚, ruddha˚, dudda˚)
    cp. Sanskrit raudra & Vedic rudra (a fierce demon or storm-deity; “the red one,” with Pischel from rud to be ruddy ‣See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 74
    Ruddha
    1. obstructed, disturbed Dāvs 4, 46
    2. at Ja v.425 & 431 in compound su-ruddha it stands for; rudda (q.v.)
    3. cp. upa˚, ni˚, paṭi˚ paṭivi˚, vi˚
    past participle of rundhati
    Rudhira
    neuter
    1. blood Dhp-a i.140 Pv-a 34 (for lohita; variant reading ruhira) ‣See the more freq words rohita & lohita; a form ruhira (q.v.) occurs e. g at Pv i.91
    late Vedic rudhira. Etymologically connected with Latin ruber red; Old Icelandic rodra blood, Gothic raups = German rot = English red
    Rundhati
    1. [rundh or rudh, both roots in Vedic Sanskrit
    • Dhtp (375, 425) explains by “āvaraṇe”; identical Dhtm (608, 662). 1. to restrain, hinder, prevent, obstruct, keep out cp. iii.107 Mil 313 (+ upa˚)
    • to conceal, hide cover up Thag 2, 238 (ppr. rundhanto) Pv-a 88 (ppr rundhamāna)

  • in phrase nagaraṁ r. to surround or besiege a town Ja i.409 (

    • aorist rundhi); iii.159 (˚itvā) iv.230 (˚iṁsu)

      • passive rujjhati;
      • past participle ruddha & rūḷha; ‣See also upa˚, paṭi˚ paṭivā, vi˚, Note. The roots rudh & rundh; are also found in Prakrit ‣See Pischel § 507 besides we have a by-form rubh in Prakrit as well as in Pāli ‣See Pischel, § 266, 507, and Pali rumbhati
  • Ruppa
    1. in ruppa-rūpakaṁ neuter Thag 2, 394 is not clear. It refers to something which is not rūpa, yet pretends to be rūpa, i.e. a sham performance or show. Thus ruppa may correspond to *rūpya & with rūpaka mean “having the form (i.e. the appearance) of form, i.e. substantiality” The Cy. (Thag-a 259) interprets as “rūpiya-rūpasadisaṁ sāraṁ sāraṁ upaṭṭhahantaṁ asāran ti attho” and Mrs. Rhys Davids (Sisters, p. 154) translates: “deluded by puppet shows seen in the midst of the crowd.”

    Ruppati

    1. to be vexed, oppressed hurt, molested (always with reference to an illness or pain Snp 767 (salla-viddho va r.) 1121 Nd1 5 (= kuppati ghaṭṭiyati, pīḷiyati) Nd2 543 (= kuppati pīḷayati ghaṭayati)
    • ppr. genitive ruppato SN i.198 (salla-viddhassa r.; explained at Kindred Sayings 320 by “ghaṭṭan-atthena”) Snp 331 (reads salla-viddhāna ruppataṁ, i.e.
    • plural instead of singular) Thag 1, 967 (salla-viddhassa ruppato (Commentary sarīravikāraṁ āpajjato, Brethren, 338) Ja ii.437 (Commentary ghaṭṭiyamāna pīḷiyamāna) = Vism 49 (dukkhitassa r.) Ja iii.169 (salla-viddhassa r. = ghaṭṭiyamāna Commentary )
    • ruppati to Pāli exegesis with its fondness of allegorical (“orthodox”) interpretation, is the etymology base of rūpa, thus at SN iii.86: “ruppatī ti tasmā rūpan ti vuccati kena r. sītena, uṇhena etc. (all kinds of material dukkha dukkha ii.3b) ruppati."-Or at Snp 1121 (ruppanti rūpena), & at other passages given under rūpa (A) ‣See also; ruppana
    rup = lup, one of the rare cases of Pali r. representing a Sanskrit 1., whereas the opposite is frequent. The same sound change Indogermanic, as Latin rumpo to break corresponds to Sanskrit lumpati. Besides we find the Sanskrit form ropayati to break off The root has nothing to do with rūpa, although the Pali Commentators combine these two-cp. also Sanskrit ropa hole; Anglo-Saxon rēofan to break, rēaf (theft) = German raub, rauben, and many other cognates ‣See Walde s.v. rumpo
  • The root rup is defined at Dhtm by nās, i.e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm 837 in meaning “ropana”
  • Ruppana
    neuter [from rup molestation, vexation, trouble Ja iii.368 (= ghaṭṭana dūsana kuppana Commentary ). Frequent in allegorical exegesis of rūpa, e.g. at Dhs-a 52 (naman aṭṭhena nāmaṁ ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṁ), 303 (rūp’ ādīhi ruppana-bhāva-dīpana) Vb-a 4 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṁ in explanation of passage SN iii.86 (mentioned under ruppati); Kp-a 78, 79 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena … rūpaṁ rūpaṁ ti vuccati).
    Rumbhati
    1. to obstruct surround, besiege (= rundhati.3) Ja vi.391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagaraṁ r.) ‣See also ni˚, sanni˚- past participle rūḷha
    2. so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Note. 599; the root is another form of rudh (as in Prakrit) ‣See rundhati The Dhtm (547) defines by “uppīḷana”
    Rumma
    adjective
    1. miserable, dirty, poorly, in compounds. ˚rūpin Ja iv.387 (= lūkhavesa Commentary ), with variant reading duma˚; and ˚vāsin poorly dressed Ja iv.380
    put down (rightly) by Geiger, Pali Grammar § 53 as different from Sanskrit rukma (shining); Morris, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1893 12 tried the etymology rumma = Sanskrit rumra “tawny,” oṛ rukma (rukmin) shiny. It is still an unsolved problem. It may not be far off to trace a relation (by miswriting dissimilation or false analogy) to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The Commentary explanation of all the rumma-& rummin passages is; anañjita, i.e. unkempt
    Rummin = rumma
    1. (dirty-soiled) Ja iv.322 (variant reading dummi); vi.194 (do.)
    Rumhaniya
    1. at MN i.480 is doubtful in spelling. The meaning is clearly “furthering growth, making or being prosperous, bringing luck” (combined with ojavant, as also indicated by variant reading ruḷh˚;. Thus it cannot belong to rumbh, but must represent either rup, as given under ruppati in meaning “ropana” (Dhtm 837), or ruh ‣See rūhati. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. translates “tot groei geschikt (i.e. able to grow), Neumann, “erquickend” (i.e. refreshing)
    Ruyhati
    1. is Med. of rūhati (rohati), q.v
    Rurira
    1. at Vv 402 is misprint for rucira
    Ruru
    1. a sort of deer, a stag; usually called ruru-miga Ja iv.256 Ja iv.261 Ja v.406 (pl rohitā rurū), 416. cp. ruruva
    Vedic ruru: RV vi.75, 15
    Rusita
    1. annoyed, irritated, offended Snp 932 Snp 971 (explained by Nd1 498 as “khuṁsita, vambhita ghaṭṭita” etc.) ‣See rosa, roseti etc
    past participle of ruṣ to be vexed. The Dhtp defines by “rose” (306, 450), “pārusiye” (626); Dhtm has 2 roots viz. one with “ālepe” (442), the other with “hiṁsāyaṁ” (443)
    Rusṣati
    1. at Snp-a 121 for dussati
    Ruha1
    adjective (—˚)
    1. growing, a tree, in compounds.: jagati˚, dharaṇi˚, mahī˚, etc
    from ruh ‣See rūhati
    Ruha2
    1. blood, in compound ruhaṅghasa blood-eater, a name for panther Ja iii.481 (= ruhira-bhakkha lohita-pāyin Commentary )
    poetical for ruhira (rohita) = lohita
    Ruhira
    neuter
    1. blood MN iii.122 Thag 1, 568 Vin ii.193 Mil 125 Mil 220 Sdhp 38
    1. ˚akkhita (ruhir’ akkhita) “besmeared with blood Ja iv.331 is to be read as ruhir’ ukkhita of ukṣ
    from rudhira
    Rūta
    1. at Ja iii.276 read ruta (q.v.)
    Rūpa
    neuter [cp. Vedic rūpa, connected etymologically with varpa (Grassmann)
    • The nominative
    • plural is rūpā & rūpāni form, figure, appearance, principle of form, etc
    • A; Definitions. According to Pali expositors rūpa takes its designation from ruppati, e.g. “ruppanato rūpaṁ” Vism 588; “ruppan’ aṭṭhena r.” Vb-a 3 “rūpa-rūpaṁ ruppana sabhāvena yuttaṁ” Compendium 1567 (where ruppati is, not quite correctly, given as “change”), “ruppatī ti: tasmā rūpan ti vuccati” SN iii.86 other definitions are “rūpayatī ti rūpaṁ” (with cakkhu & the other 10 āyatanas) Vb-a 45 and more scientifically: “paresu rūp’ ādisu cakkhu-paṭihanana lakkhaṇaṁ rūpaṁ Vism 446
    • Of modern interpretations & discussions ‣See e.g.; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation introduction ch. vi. (
    • past participle 41–⁠63, or 248
    1. -71) Dialogues of the Buddha ii.244; Expositor 67n; Compendium 270 sq. (where objections are raised to translation “form,” and as better (philosophical) terms “matter,” “material quality” are recommended) ‣See also loka for similar etymology
    • B (literally) appearance, form, figure Dhs 597f. (= form either contrasted with what is unseen, or taken for both seen and unseen), 751; Mhvs 27, 30 (sīha-vyagghādirūpāni representations of lions, tigers etc.); 30, 68 (ravicanda-tāra-rūpāni identical); 36, 31 (loha˚ bronze statue) Thag-a 257
    • Especially beautiful form, beauty SN iv.275 Pv ii.958 (as one of the 10 attributes, with sadda etc. of distinction ‣See also below DN ii.a) Mil 285 Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa-māninī proud of her beauty) Pv-a 89-surūpa very beautiful Thag-a 72
    • durūpa of evil form ugly AN ii.203f. (dubbaṇṇa +)
    • In phrase rūpaṁ sikkhati Vin i.77 = iv.129 the meaning is doubtful; it may be “to study drawing, or arts & craft,” or (with Mrs. Rhys Davids) “weights & measures,” or (w. Hardy “money changing.” It is said that through this occupation the eyes become bad; it is opposed to gaṇanā - Commentary (—˚) of such & such a form, like, kind, of a certain condition or appearance. In this appl; n very frequent & similar to English
    • hood, or German
    • heit, i.e. an abstract formation Often untranslatable because of the latter character. It is similar to; kāya (cp. explanation of ātura rūpa Vv 8314 by abhitunna-kāya Vva 328), but not so much with reference to life & feeling as to appearance and looks. English g. aneka˚ Snp 1079 (= anekavidha Nd; 2 54) adissamāna˚ invisible Pv-a 6 (literally with invisible form) ummatta˚ as if mad, under the appearance of madness like a madman Pv i.81 ii.63; eva˚ in such a condition Pv ii.15; tapassī˚ appearing to be an ascetic Pv i.32 tāraka˚ the (shapes of the) stars Dhs 617 deva˚ as a deva Pv-a 92 Pleonastically e.g. in: anupatta˚ attaining Pv iv.166; taramāna˚ quickly Pv ii.62; yutta˚ fit Pv-a 157 sucitta˚ variegated Pv i.109
    • Cases ad verbially: citta-rūpaṁ according to intention Vin iii.161 iv.177; cetabba-rūpaṁ fit to be thought upon Ja iv.157 (= ˚yuttakaṁ Commentary )
    • atta-rūpena on my own account SN iv.97 godha-rūpena as an iguana Mhvs 28, 9
    • D (as philosophical technical term) principle of (material) form, materiality visibility
    • There are various groups of psychological and metaphysical systematizations, in which rūpa functions as the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle factors. In all these representations of rūpa we find that an element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic) discussion of rūpa in various aspects is to be found at Dhs § 585
    1. -980. 1. rūpa as āyatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu) As such it heads the list of the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni ‣See e.g. Nd2 p. 238 A-E & āyatana; 3 with “cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā” (the others: sota → sadda, ghāna → gandha jivhā → rasa, kāya → phoṭṭhabba, mano → dhamma), cp. cakkhu-viññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā etc. DN i.245 MN i.266 cakkhunā rūpaṁ passati iṭṭha-rūpaṁ kanta-rūpaṁ etc SN iv.126 -see further: Vin i.34 (sabbaṁ ādittaṁ cakkhuṁ ādittaṁ, rūpa ādittā etc. with sequence of other āyatanas) DN ii.308f. 336 sq. MN iii.18 (yaṁ kho rūpaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ, ayaṁ rūpe assādo; cp. Ps ii.109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu-viññeyyesu rūpesu avīta-rāgā etc.); Ps i.79; ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passatī ti vimokkho) Dhs 617 653, 878; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 28. 2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum in the world of appearance or form rūpa- bhava) as compared with the incorporeal arūpa -bhava) being itself above, and yet including the kāma- bhava (The kāmabhava is a subdivision of rūpabhava, which has got raised into a third main division.) This triad is also found in combinations with loka or dhātu ‣See dhātu 2 a & d, or; avacara ‣See e.g. DN i.17 DN iii.215 (˚dhātu) 216 (˚bhava); Kvu 370 sq. (˚dhātu) Dhs 499 (˚âvacara) 585 (˚dhātu) Vb 17 (˚āvacara), 25 (as garu-pariṇāma & dandha-nirodha comp; d with arūpa). A similar sequence rūpa arūpa & nirodha; (i.e. nibbāna) in old verses at Snp 755 Iti 45 62 (rūpehi arūpā santatarā arūpehi nirodho santataro). On indriya-rūpa “faculty as form” ‣See indriya B
    • (b) individually in the sphere of saṁsāra as one (i.e. the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas They are the 5: rūpa-kkhandha, vedanā˚ saññā˚, sankhārā˚, viññāṇa˚; otherwise called rūp ūpādāna-kkhandha etc. (e.g. DN iii.223 DN iii.278 Vism 443) ‣See khandha ii. B
    • In this property rūpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhātūs (mahābhūtāni or else bhūta-rūpa primary matter) and 24 upādārūpāni (i.e. derivative forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rūpakkhandha section of the Vism (
    • past participle 443
    1. -450), also at Dhs 585 the 24 consist of cakkhu, sota, ghāna, jivhā, kāya, rūpa, sadda, gandha rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jīvitindriya, hadaya vatthu, kāya -viññatti, vacī-viññatti, ākāsa-dhātu (rūpassa) lahutā mudutā kammaññatā, upacaya santati jaratā aniccatā, kabaḷinkār'-āhāra; cp. definition at Nett 73: cātu-mahābhūtikaṁ rūpaṁ catunnaṁ ca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāya rū passive paññatti. The rūpakkhandha shares with the others the qualities of soullessness, evanescence and ill (anattā, anicca dukkha); e.g. rūpañ ca h’ idaṁ attā abhavissa, na y’ idaṁ rūpaṁ ābadhāya saṁvatteyya Vin i.13 cp. similarly MN iii.282f. SN iii.66 quoted and explained in detail at Vism 610; rūpaṁ aniccaṁ Vin i.14 MN i.228 iii.18 (also explained at Vism 610) SN iii.48 SN iii.66 SN iii.88 rūpe anicc’ ânupassanā Ps ii.186 sq

      • ‣ See also DN ii.301 iii.233; Ps i.23, 53, 104; ii.96, 102, 109 (rū
      • passive ādīnavo) Vb 1f. 12 sq. (in detail); Kvu 11 sq. Vism 443 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 33 Vb-a 2 3, 32 sq. = SN iii.142 (with various similes) Dhp-a iv.100
      • (c) in the making up of the individuality as such nāma-rūpa, where in contrast with nāma (as abstract, logical, invisible or mind-factor) rūpa represents the visible (material factor, resembling kāya (cp. phrase nāma-kāya in same sense). The following are current definitions of nāma-rūpa nāma-(kāya) = vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phassa, manasikāra (otherwise citta-sankhārā), rūpa(-kāya) = cattāro mahā-bhūtā catunnaṁ m-bhūtānaṁ upādāya rūpaṁ (otherwise kāya-sankhārā) SN ii.4 SN iii.59f.; Ps i.183 with explains at Vism 558 & Vb-a 169 Defined at Nett 15: “ye phassa-pañcamakā dhammā: idaṁ nāmaṁ yāni pañc’ indriyāni rūpāni: idaṁ rūpaṁ, tad ubhayaṁ nāmarūpaṁ viññāṇa-sampayuttaṁ.” Discussed in detail also at Vism 562 (= Vb-a 173 174), 587
      1. -597; cp. Dhs-a 392 (Expositor 500, where “mind-matter” is given as corresponding couple in translation, do. Compendium 271 sq. “mind and body”) ‣See also under paṭicca-samuppāda
      • various references: DN iii.102 DN iii.212 DN iii.225 DN iii.244 DN iii.273 MN i.84 (Gotamo kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññāpeti, rūpānaṁ vedanānaṁ) SN ii.198 SN iii.11 (evaṁ-rūpo siyaṁ, evaṁ vedano etc.), 101 (identical, & the khandhas) Snp 867 Snp 874 Snp 943 Snp 1037 Snp 1121 Nd1 425; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 36, 38, 54, 262; Vism 625 (uppajjanaka˚)
      1. ˚ārammaṇa a visible thing as object Dhs 146 365 Dhs-a 310 (cp. Expositor 407)
      2. ˚āvacara world of form sphere of matter (cp. Expositor 67, 216n, 264) Pv-a 163
      • ˚ūpaga (satta) (a being) living in (bodily) form Iti 62 Snp 754
      • ˚ūpajīvinī
      • feminine a woman living on her beauty i.e. a harlot Pv-a 46 Pv-a 201
      • ˚ññu knowing (various) bodily forms MN i.220 = AN v.347
      • ˚taṇhā craving after form DN ii.309 DN iii.216 DN iii.244 DN iii.280 Vb-a 179 (in det.)
      • ˚dakkha one clever in forms, viz. an artist (accountant?) Mil 344 (in the Dhamma-nagara)
      • ˚dhātu the element of form, material element Vism 486; Nett 32, 97 ‣See above DN 2
      • ˚nimitta sign of form Ps i.92
      • ˚patta beautiful Ja i.61
      • ˚pamāṇika measuring by form (outward appearance), one of the 4 kinds of measurements which the world takes of the Tathāgata ‣See A ii.71 Pug 53 viz. rūpa˚, ghosa˚, lūkha˚, dhamma˚ Dhp-a; iii.113; the same four similarly at Snp-a 242
      • ˚pātubhāva appearance of form (also as ˚antara˚ intermediate form) Snp-a 245
      • ˚bhava material existence ‣See above DN 2
      • ˚rāga lust after rebirth in rūpa DN iii.234 (+ arūpa˚); Nett 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni rūpa-rāgassa padaṭṭhānaṁ
      • ˚rūpa material form (mutable material quality?) Compendium 156, doubtful translation & explanation-saññā perception of material qualities, notion of form DN i.34 ii.112 (explained in det. at Vism 328); iii.224, 244, 253 Nd2 545 Dhs-a 200 (cp. Expositor 269)
      • ˚saññin perceiving form DN iii.260 Ps ii.38 Snp 1113
      • ˚santati duration of material form Vism 431 Vb-a 21
      • ˚samussaya accumulation of form, complex form Thag-a 98
      • ˚samāpatti attainment of beauty Ja i.406
      • ˚sampatti beauty Ja iii.187
      • ˚siri personal splendour Ja i.60

    Rūpaka
    neuter
    1. form, figure; likeness of, image (—˚); representation Vin ii.113 (rūpak’ okiṇṇāni pattāni of painted bowls) Thag 2, 394 ‣See ruppa˚ Dhp-a i.370 (maṇi˚ jewelled image); ii.69 (assa˚ toy horse); Mhvs 25, 26 (rāja˚); 27, 30 (devatā˚ shape of devas) Vv-a 213
    • ˚dūrūpaka of squalid appearance Ja ii.167 cp. durūpa
    from rupa
    Rūpatā
    feminine
    1. (being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya-rūpatāya “by appearance of likelihood” AN ii.191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in identical passage at Nd2 151)
    abstract from rūpa
    Rūpatta
    neuter
    1. literally “form-hood,” i.e. shaping (being) shape(d) SN iii.87 (rūpaṁ rūpattāya sankhātaṁ)
    abstract from rūpa
    Rūpavant
    adjective
    1. having bodily form SN iii.16 & passim (in formula of sakkāya-diṭṭhi) Dhs 1003
    2. having the form of (—˚) Mhvs 14, 3 (gokaṇṇa˚)
    3. beautiful Mhvs 10, 30 (

      • feminine rūpavatī)
      rūpa + vant
    Rūpika
    adjective
    1. having shape; negative ; formless Sdhp 236 (rūp’ ârūpika)
    from rūpa
    Rūpin
    adjective
    1. having material qualities, possessed of form or shape or body or matter, belonging to the realm of form. rūpī is nearly always combined contrasted with; arūpī formless, incorporeal ‣See rūpa DN 2 a, cp. combination rūpī arūpī saññī asaññī nevasaññinâsaññī Nd2 617 and similarly Iti 87 = Mil 217
    2. DN i.34 (attā dibbo rūpī), 77 (kāyo r. manomayo), 186 (attā etc.), 195 (attapaṭilābho r. manomayo); iii.111 139 MN ii.229 SN iii.46 (r. arūpī saññī etc.); iv.202, 402 AN ii.34 Nd1 97 137; Ps ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passati) Dhs 635 1091, 1444 Vb 123 342 (read rūpī); Nett 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni), 69 (five rūpīni indriyāni & five arūpīni) DN-a i.119 (attā) Dhs-a 304 (rūpino dhammā) Vb-a 511f. (attā)
    3. (—˚) having the appearance of, resembling ‣See rumma˚;
    from rūpa
    Rūpiya1
    neuter
    1. silver Vin iii.239 (here collectively for any transactions in “specie,” as explained by Commentary p. 240: rūpiyaṁ nāma satthu-vaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako; i.e. copper wood & lac) SN i.104 (suddhaṁ r.); ii.233 Dhs 584
    1. ˚maya made of silver Vin ii.112 SN iii.144 (sovaṇṇamaya +); Pv ii.64 (where in sequence sovaṇṇa˚, maṇi˚ loha˚ r.; explained as “rajatamaya” Pv-a 95) Dhp-a i.29
    cp. Sanskrit rūpya, literally of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa
    Rūpiya2
    1. ‣See ruppa
    Rūpeti
    1. to put into shape, to make appear, to make grow (?) Snp-a 132 143 (variant reading ropeti)
    2. to be formed, to appear, to come to notice in definition of rūpa at Vb-a 45: “rūpayatī ti rūpaṁ.”
    causative denominative from rūpa
    Rūḷa
    1. awful, terrible Mil 275 (synonymous with bhīma)
    doubtful spelling; perhaps for rūḷha, evidently identical with rudda, as Trenckner suggests in Note. 6319
    Rūḷha1
    1. grown Snp 20 (˚tiṇa)
    2. ‣See rūhati healed up Mil 291 (˚vaṇa one whose wound has healed): cp. rūhanā
    past participle of rohati; of ruh; Sanskrit rūḍha
    Rūḷha2
    1. at Mil 217 & 218 is a by-form of; ruddha, past participle of rundhati (rumbhati) to obstruct; thus meaning “obstructed, difficult” (of a road, together with lugga palugga). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. translates (as rūḷha1) by “overgrown.”
    Rūḷhi
    feminine
    1. literally ascent, growth ‣See vi˚;
    • figuratively what has grown by custom tradition, popular meaning of a word (˚sadda). The figuratively meaning is the one usually found in Pāli, especially in Abhidhamma and Commentary literature; e.g. rūḷhiyaṁ by tradition, usually, commonly, Vb-a 1 (as category with the 3 other: rāsi, guṇa, paṇṇatti) rūḷhito identical Vb-a 2
    • rūḷhiyā identical Snp-a 430 Pv-a 163 also rūḷhi-vasena Vv-a 42 or with sadda: rūḷhi-sadda usual meaning Vism 333 Dhs-a 205
    • ˚saddena in popular language, in ordinary speech, customarily, commonly speaking Tika-Paṭṭhāna 253; Vism 310 DN-a i.239 294: Snp-a 135 400
    from rūḷha, past participle of rohati, cp. Sanskrit rūḍhi
    Rūhati1
    1. to grow, spread Iti 67 Ja iv.408 (akkhīni rūhiṁsu; also ppr.
    2. medium ruyhamāna v.368; vi.360
    3. to heal (of a wound), close up Vin i.206 (vaṇo na rūhati)
    4. to have effect in (

      • locative ), to be effective Vin ii.203 = It 87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati).
      • past participle rūḷha2 ‣See also rūhita (
      • past participle of Caus rūheti = roheti)
      the specific Pali form of the usual Sanskrit Pali rohati (q.v.) The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning “janana” i.e. causing, which refers more to the compounds with prefixes
    Rūhati2
    1. to be broken or (figuratively) to be suspended Vin ii.55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled). past participle rūḷha1
    2. for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or passive rujjh˚ ‣See also rumbhati & ropeti; 2
    Rūhanā
    feminine
    1. growth Ja ii.322 (virūhanā Commentary )
    2. healing (of a wound) Mil 112
    cp. Sanskrit rohaṇa, from ruh : rūhati1
    Rūhita
    neuter
    1. a boil, a diseased growth (literally “healed”) Vin iv.316 (explained as “yaṁ kiñci vaṇo” variant reading rudhita)
    from rūhati1
    Re
    indeclinable
    1. a participle of exclamation, mostly implying contempt, or deprecation (DN-a i.276) “hīḷanavasena āmantanaṁ” i.e. address of disdain: heigh, go on, get away, hallo
    • DN i.96 DN i.107 Ja iii.184 (Commentary = āmantaṇe nipāto); often combined with similar particles of exhortation, like cara pi re get away with you! MN ii.108 Vin iv.139 (so read for cara pire which the Commentary takes as “para,” amamaka); or ehi re come on then! Ja i.225
    • ha re look out! here they are Pv-a 4
    • aho vata re wish I would! Pv ii.945 (re ti ālapanaṁ Pv-a 131); no ca vata re vattabbe but indeed good sir … (Kvu 1)
    shortened for are, q.v.
    Rekhā
    feminine
    1. line, streak Abhp 539 ‣See lekhā
    from rikh, for which the Pāli form is likh, cp. Sanskrit rekhā, Latin rīma, Old High German rīga row
    Recana
    neuter
    1. letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. cp. vi˚;
    from ric
    Reṇu
    1. dust;
    2. plural reṇū particles of dust
    3. Vin i.32 (˚hatā bhūmi); Vism 338 = Nd1 505 = J i.117 (rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati) Ja iv.362 (okiṇṇā raja-reṇūhi; Commentary explains by “paṁsūhi”) Mil 274 (
    4. plural ) Snp-a 132 (reṇuṁ vūpasāmeti allays)
    5. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so-called Jātaka-style Ja i.233 (mahā-tumba-matta), 349 (pupphato reṇuṁ gaṇhāti); iii.320; v.39 (puppha˚); vi.530 (padumakinjakkha˚) Dhp-a iv.203 (˚vaṭṭhi)
    cp. Vedic reṇu
    Reruka
    1. “elephant’s tooth,” ivory Ja ii.230 (= hatthi-danta Commentary )
    etymology? Probably dialectical
    Roga
    1. illness, disease
    • The definition of roga at Ja ii.437 is “roga rujana-sabhāvattaṁ.” There are many diff enumerations of rogas and sets of standard combinations, of which the following may be mentioned. At sn 311 (cp DN iii.75) it is said that in old times there were only 3 diseases, viz. icchā, anasanaṁ, jarā, which gradually through slaughtering of animals, increased to 98 Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 324 hints at these 98 with “cakkhu-rog adinā-bhedena.” Beginning with this (cakkhuroga affection of the eye) we have a list of 34 rogas at Nd1 13 (under pākaṭa-parissayā or open dangers = Nd1 360 Nd2 420) & Nd; 2 3041 B, viz. cakkhu˚ & the other 4 senses, sīsa˚, kaṇṇa˚, mukha˚, danta˚; kāsa, sāsa pināsa, ḍāha, jara; kucchiroga, mucchā, pakkhandikā sūlā, visūcikā; kuṭṭhaṁ, gaṇḍo, kilāso, soso, apamāro daddu, kaṇḍu, kacchu, rakhasā, vitacchikā, lohita pittaṁ, madhumeho, aṁsā, piḷakā, bhagandalā. This list is followed by list of 10 ābādhas & under “dukkha goes on with various other “ills,” which however do not make up the number 98. The same list is found at. AN v.110 The 10 ābādhas (Nd2 3041 Commentary ) occur at AN ii.87 & Mil 308 (as āgantuka-rogā). The 4 “rogas of the Sun (Mil 273 cp. Vin ii.295) are: abbha, mahikā megha, Rāhu
    • Another mention of roga together with plagues which attack the corn in the field is given at Ja v.401 viz. visa-vāta; mūsika-salabha-suka-pāṇaka setaṭṭhika-roga etc., i.e. hurtful winds, mice, moths parrots, mildew
    • The comb; nroga, gaṇḍa, salla is sometimes found, e.g. MN ii.230 Vism 335. Of other single rogas we mention: kucchi˚ (stomach-ache) Ja i.243 ahivātaka˚ Vin i.78 Ja ii.79 Ja iv.200 Dhp-a i.231 paṇḍu˚ jaundice Vin i.206 Ja ii.102 Dhp-a i.25 tiṇapupphaka˚ hay-fever Mil 216
    • ‣ See also ātaṅka ābādha; . On roga in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 130. DN i.11 DN i.73 DN iii.182 SN iii.32 SN iv.64 AN ii.128 AN ii.142f. iv.289, Nd1 486; Vism 236 (as cause of death), 512 (in simile) Vb-a 88 (in sim. of dukkha etc.) Thag-a 288 Vv-a 6 (rogena phuṭṭha), 75 (sarīre r. uppajji) Pv-a 86 (kacchu˚), 212 (rogena abhibhūta)
    • O
    • past participle aroga health ‣See sep
    1. ˚ātaṅka affliction by illness AN ii.174f.; v.169, 318 -niḍḍha the nest or seat of disease Dhp 148 (cp. Dhp-a iii.110); as ˚nīḷa at Iti 37
    • ˚mūla the root of disease Snp 530
    • ˚vyasana distress or misfortune of disease DN iii.235 (one of the 5 vyasanāni: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚) Mil 196 (identical)
    Vedic roga: ruj ‣See rujati, cp. Sanskrit rujā breakage, illness
    Rogin
    adjective
    1. having a disease, suffering from (—˚); one who has a disease Vism 194 (ussanna-vyādhi dukkhassa); Sdhp 86
    • paṇḍu˚ one who has the jaundice Ja ii.285 Ja iii.401
    fr roga
    Rocati

    1. to please, i.e. it pleases (with dative of person) Thag 2, 415 (rocate); Mhvs 15, 9 (nivāso rocatu). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit rocyate Avs ii.158
    2. to find pleasure in (
    3. locative ) Mil 338 (bhave).
    4. causative roceti : 1. to be pleased, to give one’s consent Dhp-a i.387 (gloss K rucitha ruceyyātha). 2. (with
    5. accusative of object) to find pleasing, to find delight in, to be attached to, to approve of, to choose SN i.41 (vadhaṁ) Ja i.142 (Devadattassa laddhiṁ r.); v.178 (pabbajjaṁ roc’ ahaṁ = rocemi Commentary ), 226 (kammaṁ). Frequently with dhammaṁ to approve of a doctrine or scheme e.g. at Vin ii.199 (Devadattassa dhammaṁ) SN i.133 Snp 94 (asataṁ dh.), 398 (dhammaṁ imaṁ rocaye) Ja iv.53 (dh. asataṁ na rocayāma)
    6. cp. abhi˚, ā˚, vi˚;
    Vedic rocate, ruc, Indogermanic *leuq, as in Latin luceo to be bright (cp. lūx light, lūmen, lūna etc.); Sanskrit rocana splendid, ruci light, roka & rukṣa light; Avestan raocantshining; also with 1: Sanskrit loka world, locate to perceive, locana eye Lithuanian laukti to await; Gothic liuhap light = Old High German lioht, English light; Old Irish lōche lightning The Dhtp (& Dhtm gives 2 roots; ruc, viz. the one with meaning “ditti (Dhtp 37), the other as “rocana” (Dhtp 395), both signifying “light” or “splendour,” but the second probably to be taken in sense of “pleasing”
    Roṇṇa
    1. ‣See ruṇṇa
    Rodati
    1. ‣See rudati
    Rodana
    neuter
    1. crying, weeping Dhp-a i.28 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 64; Dhtp 144
    from rud
    Rodha1
    1. obstruction, stopping, in compound parapāṇa˚; stopping the life of somebody else; life-slaughter murder Snp 220 Ja ii.450 cp. anu˚, ni˚, vi˚;
    from rudh
    Rodha2
    neuter
    1. bank, dam AN iii.128 (where identical passage at A. i.154 reads gedha, cave; variant reading also gedha, cp. variant reading rodhi˚ for gedhi˚ at Nd2 585)
    from rudh
    Rodhana
    neuter
    1. obstructing Ja v.346 Sdhp 57
    from rudh
    Ropa
    (—˚)
    1. plantation; in vana˚ & ārāma˚; SN i.33
    from rop = causative of ruh
    Ropaka
    1. sapling Ja ii.346 (rukkha˚)
    ropa + ka
    Ropana
    neuter & ropanā
    • feminine

      1. planting Pv-a 151 (ārāma˚); Mhvs 15, 41
      2. healing SN iv.177 (vaṇa˚)

  • furthering, making grow Ps ii.115 (buddhi˚). 4.

    • feminine accusation Vin iv.36
    from ropeti1
  • Ropaya
    adjective (—˚)
    1. to be healed, only in compound du˚; hard to heal (of a wound) Vin i.216 (vaṇa)
    for *ropya, from ropeti1
    Ropāpeti
    1. ‣See ropeti1
    Ropita
    1. planted Pv ii.78
    2. growing up Pv.970 (read “pi ropitaṁ” for viropitaṁ)
    3. furnished with, powdered with (—˚) Vv 6415 (Ed. vosita Vv-a 280 explains by ullitta, vicchurita).

      • accused brought forward (of a charge) Vin iv.36
    past participle of ropeti1
    Ropima
    neuter
    1. what has been planted Vin iv.267
    2. a kind of arrow MN i.429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann translates ropima by “aus Binsen”). 3.
    3. adjective at Vv 4413aropima (“not planted"?) is an attribute of trees. It is not explained in Vv-a
    from ropeti1
    Ropeti1
    1. to plant or sow Ja i.150 (nivāpatiṇaṁ); Mhvs 15, 42 (amb’ aṭṭhikaṁ); 19, 56 Dhp-a ii.109
    2. to put up, fix Ja i.143 (sūlāni)
    3. to further, increase, make grow Snp 208 (Pot. ropayeyya)

      • (figuratively) to fix, direct towards, bring up against ‣See ropeti2 2.
      • past participle ropita.
      • causative II. ropāpeti to cause to be planted DN ii.179 Ja vi.333 Mhvs 34, 40 Dhp-a ii.109-cp. abhi˚, abhini˚, ā˚;
    causative of rūhati1
    Ropeti2
    1. to cause to break off, to cause to suspend or cancel; to
    2. passive off refuse Vin ii.261 (bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaṁ kammaṁ ropetvā bhikkhunīnaṁ niyyādetuṁ, i.e. by the bhikkhus is an act of the nuns to be passed off and to be referred to the nuns)
    3. to make confess or accuse of (
    4. accusative āpattiṁ a guilt) Vin ii.2 (first codeti, then sāreti, then ropeti & lastly (sanghaṁ) ñāpeti), 85 (identical); iv.36, (aññavādakaṁ ropeti to bring the charge of heresy against someone). No. 2 perhaps better to ropeti1. cp. Vin Texts ii.334
    5. To ropeti2 belong the compounds. oropeti (cut off) & voropeti (deprive). They are better to be taken here than to ava + ; ruh
    causative of rūhati2 ‣See lumpati
    Roma
    neuter
    1. the hair of the body Ja v.430 (where in roma-rājiyā maṇḍita-udarā as explanation of loma-sundarī); Sdhp 119 (˚kūpa),
    Vedic roman; the usual Pali form is loma (q.v.)
    Romaka
    adjective
    1. feathered (?) Ja ii.383 (Commentary wrong!)
    from roma
    Romañca
    (?)
    1. hairy (?) Dāvs v.14 (˚kancuka)
    from roma, cp. Vedic romaśa
    Romanthaka
    adjective
    1. chewing the cud, ruminating Vin ii.132
    from romanthati
    Romanthati
    Romantheti;
    1. to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin ii.132 (˚ati) Ja iv.392 (˚eti)
    to romantha; cp. Latin rumen & ruminare = English ruminate
    Romanthana
    neuter
    1. ruminating Vin ii.321
    from romanthati
    Rorava
    1. a sort of hart (i.e. ruru) MN i.429
    2. Name of a naraka (purgatory) ‣See Dictionary of Names. Englishg Ja iii.299 Dāvs iii.12; Sdhp 195. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit raurava Divy 67
    from ru, cp. Sanskrit raurava, name of a purgatory
    Rosa
    1. anger, angry feeling MN i.360
    2. quarrel Ja iv.316
    cp. Sanskrit roṣa, of ruṣ
    Rosaka
    adjective
    1. angry, wrathful SN i.85 SN i.96 Snp 133 Vv 528 (= paresaṁ ros uppādanena r. Vv-a 226) Ja ii.270
    from rosa; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit roṣaka Divy 38
    Rosanā
    feminine
    1. making angry, causing anger, being angry Vb 86 (hiṁsanā +), explained at Vb-a 75 by ghaṭṭanā. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit roṣaṇī Avs i.178
    abstract from rosati
    Rosaneyya
    adjective
    1. apt to be angry or cause anger; negative a˚ not to be angered, not irritable Snp 216
    gerundive formation from rosa
    Rosita
    1. smeared (with) anointed Ja iv.440 (= vilitta Commentary )
    past participle of rus, to smear: Sanskrit rūṣita; given as root rus at Dhtm 442 with meaning “ālepa”
    Roseti
    1. to make angry, to annoy, to irritate SN i.162 AN ii.215 (so read for rosati) iii.38 Snp 125 Snp 130 Snp 216 Ja i.432 Ja iv.491
    causative of rosati, ruṣ ‣See rusita
    Rohañña
    adjective
    1. red Ja v.259 (rohaññā pungav'ūsabhā; Commentary explains by ratta-vaṇṇā). Kern Toevoegselen s.v. proposes rohiñño = *rohiṇyah, (cp. pokkharaṇī for ˚iṇī) red cows
    from roha = rohita
    Rohati
    1. : for the Sanskrit rohati of ruh to grow we find the regular Pali correspondent rūhati ‣See rūhati1. The causative of this verb is ropeti (to make grow) ‣See ropeti-Another root, restricted to the Pāli, is seen in rūhati2 (with
    2. past participle rūḷha) and is equal to rundh (rudh rumbh) to break. The
    3. causative of this root ropeti2 is either an indirect formation from it or (more likely) a direct representative of rup = lup as in Pali lumpati. To the latter belong the preposition compounds. oropeti & voropeti.

    Rohicca
    1. a kind of deer Ja vi.537 (˚sarabhā migā)
    from rohita, perhaps directly from Vedic rohita ewe, literally the red one
    Rohiṇī
    feminine
    1. a red cow AN i.162 = iii.214
    2. Name of a nakkhatta or constellation (“red cow”) Snp-a 456 Mhvs 19, 47
    3. Name of a river Snp-a 357

      cp. Vedic rohiṇī red cow or mare
    Rohita
    adjective
    1. red, as attribute of fishes at Ja v.405 (i.e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at Ja v.406 in same passage (i.e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only in standing term rohita-maccha the “red fish,” viz. Cyprinus Rohita, which is frequently mentioned in the “Jātaka literature, e.g. Ja ii.433 Ja iii.333 Dhp-a ii.132 (four) 140; Kp-a 118
    1. L
    Vedic rohita; cp. the usual Pali word lohita red & blood ‣See also rudhira & ruhira

    L

    La
    1. syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our “etc.” ‣See peyyāla. Lak-atthika
    Lak-aṭṭhika
    1. at Vv-a 222 is doubtful; aṭṭhika means “kernel,” lak˚; may be a misspelling for labujak˚ (?)
    Lakanaka
    neuter?
    1. ship’s anchor (nāvā˚ Mil 377 (variant reading lagganaka), 378
    from lag, with k for g, as lakuṭa: laguḷa etc. Would correspond to Sanskrit *lagnaka, cp. Trenckner Note. 62; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 391
    Lakāra
    1. a sail Ja ii.112 Mil 378 Dāvs iv.42; Vism 137 (Burmese variant lankāra)
    for alankāra, literally “fitting up,” cp. Hindī & Marāthī langara, Tamil ilankaran “in meaning anchor.”
    Lakuṭa
    1. a club, cudgel Mil 255 (in sequence daṇḍa-leḍḍu-lakuṭa-muggara), 301, 367, 368 ‣See also laguḷa
    ‣See laguḷa for etymology
    Lakuṇṭaka
    1. a dwarf Mhvs 23, 50 (˚sarīratta) Vb-a 26 (˚pāda-purisa, compound with arūpa); PugA 227; Commentary on SN i.237
    dialectical
    Lakuṇṭakatta
    neuter
    1. dwarfishness Ja vi.337
    from lakuṇṭaka
    Laketi
    1. to hold fast (literally to make adhere) Mil 377
    for laggeti ‣See lakanaka
    Lakkha
    neuter
    1. a mark Mil 102
    2. a target Mil 418 Dhp-a i.52 (˚yoggā target practice, i.e. shooting)
    3. a stake at gambling Ja vi.271

      • a high numeral, a lac or 100,000 (but cp. Pv-a 255 where lakkha of Pv iv.338 is taken as a “period of time,” equal to 100 koṭis); Dāvs v.66
    from lakṣ ‣See lakkhaṇa, or (after Grassmann) lag “to fix,” i.e. to mark. cp. Vedic lakṣa price at gambling (Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 287)
    Lakkhañña
    adjective
    1. connected with auspices, auspicious, in phrase “lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti” (how grand a sign friends, is the moonlight night! translation) DN i.47 = J i.509 (explained at DN-a i.141 as “divasa-mās'-ādīnaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ bhavituṁ yuttā”) Ja v.370 (˚sammata considered auspicious)
    from lakkhaṇa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit lakṣaṇya diviner Divy 474
    Lakkhaṇa
    neuter
    1. sign, characteristic mark; especially a sign as implying something extraordinary or pointing to the
    2. future, therefore a prognosticative mark (cp. talisman), a distinguishing mark or salient feature, property, quality (as Rhys Davids in Dialogues of the Buddha i.19 somewhat lengthily, after Buddhaghosa, translates lakkhaṇa by “signs of good & bad qualities in the following things and of the marks in them denoting the health or luck of their owners”) DN i.9 (a long list, as forbidden practice of fortune-telling, like maṇi˚ from jewels, daṇḍa˚ from

      1. sticks, asi˚ from marks on swords etc.) Snp 360 (pl lakkhanā, here as fortune-telling together with supina telling from dreams, cp. Snp-a 362: daṇḍa˚, vattha˚ etc referring to DN i.9), 927 (with Āthabbana, supina nakkhatta, all kinds of secret sciences; explained at Snp-a 564 as “maṇi-lakkhaṇâdi”) 1018 (gottaṁ brūhi sa “with its distinguishing marks”) Ja vi.364 (sign of beauty) Mil 171 (yathāva˚ just characterization) Mhvs 35, 109 (itthi˚ auspicious signs in women) Pv-a 161 Pv-a 219 Snp-a 386 A long enumeration of all sorts of (perfect) marks (tatha-lakkhaṇāni) is found at DN-a i.62f. cp. tādi-lakkhaṇa marks of such (a being) with reference to good luck etc. Ja iii.98 Snp-a 200 Vv-a 95–⁠2 mark on the body, especially when serving a def purpose, e.g. as the branding (of slaves), or the marks of a fortunate being, pointing towards his future greatness: (a) brand Ja i.451 cp. compound ˚āhata
      2. (b) the (32 marks of a mahā-purisa or a great being, either destined to be a rājā cakkavatti, or a sammā-sambuddha. These are given at Snp 1019 (
      3. plural lakkhanā), 1021, 1022 as only 3 (viz. mukhaṁ jivhāya chādeti, uṇṇ’ assa bhamuk antare, kos’ ohitaṁ vattha-guyhaṁ with reference to his tongue, the hair between the eyebrows & the sexual organ); more completely as 32 at DN ii.16f.; iii.142 sq (the Lakkhaṇa Suttanta); referred to at DN i.88 DN i.105 Ja i.56 Mhvs 5, 91; cp. paripuṇṇa-kāya Snp 548 (with explanation lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya at Snp-a 452)
      4. (in spec. sense:) pudendum Ja v.197 (subha˚, the male member), 366
        • adjective (—˚) having the marks (of) characterized by, of such & such character AN i.102 (kamma˚; bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚, together with bāla-paṇḍitanimitta) Mil 111 (sata-puñña˚, of the Buddha) Vv-a 71 (para-sampatti-usuyyā-lakkhaṇā issā) Pv-a 17 Pv-a 120
        • (as technical term in philosophy specific attribute, characteristic (mark). In contrast to nimitta more a substantial attribute or primary characteristic (cp. Vb-a 261). Compared with other terms of definition we get the following: rasa essential property, paccupaṭṭhāna recurring phenomenon, padatṭhāna immediate occasion Dhs-a 63 (translationExpositor i.84) cp. Compendium 13 (where padaṭṭhāna is translated as “proximate cause”)
        • Ps i.54 sq. (khandhānaṁ); ii.108 (saccānaṁ) Vb-a 85 136 (with reference to the Paṭiccasamuppāda, cp. Vism 528), 261 (fourfold, of kesā etc.); Vism 278 (with reference to kammaṭṭhāna) 351 (4, of the dhātus: thaddha˚ ābandhana˚, paripācana˚, vitthambhana˚), 363 sq (identical), 495 (ariya-saccānaṁ) Vv-a 38 (compd with ārammaṇa with reference to jhāna)
        • The 3 properties (tilakkhaṇaṁ) of existing things or of the phenomenal world are anicca, dukkha, anatta, or impermanence, suffering unreality: thus at Ja i.48 (dhamma-desanā ti-l—˚muttā) 275; iii.377 (through contemplating them arises vipassanā & pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa)
        • ablative; lakkhaṇato “by or qua characteristic,” “in its essential qualification,” often found in exegetical analysis in Commentary style combined with various similar terms (atthato, kamato, nimittato etc.), e.g. Vism 351, 363, 495, 528 Vb-a 46 76, 83, 131, 261 (where Vism 351 has paripācana for uṇhatta) Snp-a 343
        • cp. upa˚, vi˚, sa˚
        1. ˚āhata affected with a mark (of punishment or disgrace), branded Vin i.76 Vv-a 66
        • ˚kusala clever at interpreting bodily marks or at fortune-telling from signs (cp. nemittaka) MN i.220 Ja i.272
        • ˚kusalatā cleverness at (telling people’s fortune by) signs Vv-a 138
        • ˚paṭiggāhaka one who reads the signs, a soothsayer wise man Ja i.56
        • ˚pāṭhaka an expert in (interpreting) signs, fortune-teller Ja i.455 Ja ii.194 Ja v.211
        • ˚manta the secret science of (bodily) marks Snp 690 (but explained at Snp-a 488 as “lakkhaṇāni ca vedā ca,” thus taking it as Dvandva) Dhp-a iii.194
        • ˚sampatti excellency of marks Ja i.54
        • ˚sampanna endowed with (auspicious) signs Snp 409 Ja i.455

          1. the 3 lakkhaṇas at Snp 1022 refer to the brahmin Bāvari. Lakkhika & ya;
          Vedic lakṣman neuter sign; adjective lakṣmaṇa; later Sanskrit lakṣmaṇa
        • neuter In the definition of grammarians syn with aṅka brand, e.g. Dhtp 536 “anka lakkhaṇe lakkha dassane,” or Dhtm 748 “lakkha = dassanaanke”; cp. Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena anketi to brand. The Sanskrit proper name Lakṣmaṇa appears also in Prakrit as Lakkhaṇa: Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 312
    Lakkhika
    ˚ya;
    adjective
    1. belonging to auspices, favoured by good luck Sdhp 105 (˚ya); usually neg alakkhika unlucky, unfortunate, ill-fated; either with appa-puñña of no merit, e.g. SN v.146 = J ii.59 Vv 508 (= nissirīka, kālakaṇṇi Vv-a 212); or pāpa wicked Vin ii.192 (of Devadatta)
    from lakkhī
    Lakkhita
    1. ‣See abhi˚;
    past participle of lakkheti
    Lakkhī
    feminine
    1. luck, good fortune, success, personal welfare Ja iii.443 (combined with sirī splendour explained by parivāra-sampatti & paññā respectively) iv.281 (explained as “sirī pi puññam pi paññā pi”). 2. splendour, power Dāvs i.6 (rajja˚ royal splendour) iv.38 (identical)
    2. prosperity Dāvs v.35 (˚nidhāna Anurādhapura)
    Sanskrit lakṣmī
    Lakkheti
    1. to mark, distinguish, characterize Nett 30. past participle lakkhita

      • cp. upa˚;
      denominative from lakkha
    Lagati
    Laggati;
    1. to adhere to, stick (fast) to (locative ), to hang from Vin i.202 Ja iii.120 Dhp-a i.131 Dhp-a iii.298 (ppr. alaggamāna) DN-a i.257 (for abhisajjati);
    2. aorist laggi Pv-a 153 (tīre);
    3. absolutive laggitva Ja iii.19 Dhp-a iv.25 Pv-a 280 (but better to be read laggetvā making fast; as variant reading ).
    4. past participle lagga & laggita; -
    5. causative laggeti to make stick to, to fasten, tie, hang up Vin i.209 Vin ii.117 152 Ja iii.107 Ja v.164 Ja v.175 Mhvs 7, 9 (suttañ ca tesaṁ hatthesu laggetvā) Dhp-a i.138
    6. causative II. laggāpeti to cause to fasten or stick, to make stick, to obstruct Ja iii.241 Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 48 (kalāpaṁ) Dhp-a iv.183

      • cp. ālaggeti
      with variant langati; the spelling with gg is the usual one. Root lag, as in Vedic lakṣa etc. Sanskrit lagati, past participle lagna (from the past participle lagga the double g has been generalized in P.: but ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 136) perhaps to Latin langueo, English languid, from meaning “to lag,” but doubtful ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. langueo. The Dhtp 23 gives lag in meaning “sanga,” which is the customary synonym in the commentaries. cp. langī
    Lagana
    Laggana;
    neuter
    1. adhering Ja i.46 (g.; v.281); with gg: Ja iii.202 (= sanga); Nd2 p. 188 (s. v nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha) Mil 105 Dhp-a iii.433
    2. slinging round, making fast Vv-a 212
    from lag
    Laguḷa
    1. a club, cudgel Vin iii.77 (enumerated with various weapons of murder, like asi, satti, bheṇḍi pāsāṇa etc.) Mil 152 Mil 351 (kodaṇḍa-laguḷa-muggara) 355 (kilesa˚) Ja vi.394 Vism 525 (˚abhighāta)
    cp. Sanskrit laguḍa, Marāthī lākūḍa, Hindī lakuṭa stick. The word is really a dialect word (Prakrit) and as such taken into Sanskrit where it ought to be *lakṛta = lakuṭa Other etymology connections are Latin lacertus (arm), Gr ; Old Prussian alkunis elbow; and distantly related English leg ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. lacertus cp. Pali bhuja1 & ratana
    Lagga
    adjective
    1. sticking; stuck, attached; obstructed, hindered Nd2 107 Mil 346 (laggaṁ disvā mahiṁ) Dhs-a 127 (alagga-bhāva) Dhp-a i.361 (˚mānasa) negative alagga unobstructed (literally not sticking or being stuck to), in phrase ākāso alaggo asatto apatiṭṭhito apalibuddho Mil 388 and elsewhere
    • cp. olagga
    past participle of lag(g)ati
    Laggāpana
    neuter
    1. making stick, causing obstruction Ja iii.241
    from laggāpeti ‣See lagati
    Laggita
    1. stuck, adhering; obstructed Ja iv.11 Often in exegetical style in sequence lagga laggita, palibuddha, e.g. Nd2 p. 188 (s.v. nissita) cp. No. 107
    past participle of lag(g)ati
    Laghima
    1. (langhima) in phrase aṇima-laghim’ ādikaṁ is doubtful in reading & meaning at Kp-a 108 = Vism 211 (spelt langh˚ here)
    Laṅkāra
    1. ‣See lakāra
    Laṅgī
    feminine
    1. bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with reference to avijjā MN i.142 MN i.144 Pug 21 Dhs 390 Vb-a 141
    from lag
    Laṅgula
    neuter
    1. the tail of an animal Mhvs 6, 6 (lāḷento langulaṁ; variant reading nangulaṁ) ‣See also naṅgula & (concerning l → n); landhati (= nandhati); nalāṭa (for laḷāta)
    cp. Sanskrit lāngula & lāngūla; also the ordinary Pali forms nangula & nanguṭṭha, to; lag
    Laṅghaka
    1. a jumper, tumbler, acrobat Ja ii.142 Mil 34 Mil 191 Mil 331 feminine laṅghikā Vin iv.285 (with naṭakā & sokajjhāyikā)
    2. from laṅgh
    Laṅghati

    1. to jump over (
    2. accusative ) step over, to hop Ja iii.272 Ja v.472 (langhamāno yāti) Mil 85
    3. to make light of, disregard neglect, transgress Pv-a 15 Vv-a 138
    4. cp. abhilaṅghati, ullaṅghati.
    5. causative laṅgheti (= laṅghati) to jump over (
    6. accusative ), literally to make jump Ja v.472 (vatiṁ) Thag 2, 384 (Meruṁ langhetuṁ icchasi) Mil 85
    7. ger laṅghayitvā Thag-a 255 & (poet.); laṅghayitvāna Ja i.431 (= attānaṁ langhitvā Commentary ); Mhvs 25, 44 (pākāraṁ). cp. olaṅgheti
    laṅgh, a by-form of lagh, as in laghu ‣See lahu light, quick; Indogermanic *legh & *leṅgh; , with meanings of both “quick” & “light” (or “little”) from the movement of jumping. Here belong Latin levis (from *leghṷis), Gothic leihto English light; Old High German lungar quick, German ge-lingen to succeed Further Latin limen threshold. Perhaps also the words for “lungs,” viz. German lunge, English lights etc The Dhtp 33 defines lagh (laṅgh) by “gati-sosanesu”
    Laṅghana
    neuter
    1. jumping, hopping Ja i.430
    • ˚naṭaka a tumbler, jumper, acrobat, cp. Fick, Soc Gliederung 188, 190, 192); ii.363, 431. cp. ullaṅghanā olaṅghanā
    from laṅgh
    Laṅghamayā
    1. (plural ) at Ja v.408 is problematic. We should expect something like laṅghiyo or laṅghimayā in meaning “deer,” as it is combined with eneyyaka. The Commentary reads laṅghimayā (“like deer; jumping"?) & explains by nānā-ratana-mayā “made of various jewels,” rather strange.

    Laṅghāpana
    neuter
    1. making jump, raising, lifting Vism 143 (“launching”). Langhi (Langhi)
    from causative of laṅgh
    Laṅghi (Laṅghī)
    feminine
    1. a kind of deer (?) Ja vi.537
    2. doubtful of meaning & origin in phrase; laṅghī-pitāmahā at Ja ii.363 = iii.226: “whose grandfather was a deer, or a jumper” (?); used in disparagingly addressing a crane. The Commentary to Ja ii.363 explains rather strangely as follows: laṅghī vuccati ākāse langhanato megho “(a) jumping deer is called the cloud because of its jumping in the air,” balākā ca nāma megha-saddena gabbhaṁ gaṇhantī ti “the cranes conceive by the sound of the cloud,” meghasaddo balākānaṁ pitā megho pitāmaho ti “the sound of the cloud is the father of the cranes & the cloud the grandfather “
    from laṅgh
    Lajjati
    1. to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful Pv-a 48 (for harāyati) ppr. lajjamāna Dhp-a i.188 Pv-a 88
    2. future lajjissati Ja iii.218 infinitive lajjituṁ Dhp-a i.72
    3. absolutive lajjitvā Ja i.208
    4. gerundive lajjitabba
    5. neuter what one has to be ashamed of something disgraceful Ja vi.395 also (an odd form lajjitāya (so read ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 203 against Trenckner, Notes, 6627) Dhp 316
    6. to have regard of genitive, to consider, to respect Ja iv.128
    7. causative II lajjāpeti to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush Ja iii.137 Ja v.296
    8. past participle lajjita
    lajj; Dhtp 72: lajjane
    Lajjana
    neuter
    1. being ashamed Dhtp 72
    from lajj
    Lajjanaka
    neuter
    1. causing shame, humiliating, disgraceful Ja vi.395
    from lajjana
    Lajjava
    neuter
    1. shamefacedness DN iii.213 (where Dhs 1340 has maddava); cp. AN i.94
    from lajj
    Lajjā
    feminine
    1. shame, bashfulness, modesty MN i.414 DN-a i.70 Dhp-a ii.90 instrumental lajjāya out of shame Pv-a 47 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 283. cp. nillajja
    from lajj
    Lajjāpanikā
    feminine
    1. making ashamed, putting to shame, disgracing Ja v.284 (kula bringing disgrace on the clan)
    from lajjāpeti, causative II. of lajjati
    Lajjita
    1. ashamed, bashful Sdhp 35. feminine lajjitā as
    2. noun abstract “bashfulness” Dhp-a i.188
    3. past participle of lajjati
    Lajjitabbaka
    neuter
    1. something to be ashamed of, a cause of shame, disgrace Ja vi.395
    gerundive of lajjati + ka
    Lajjin
    adjective
    1. feeling shame, modest, afraid, shy, conscientious (explained as “one who has hiri & ottappa; by Commentary on SN i.73 ‣See Kindred Sayings 320 & cp. ; Dhs. trstln p. 18 DN i.4 DN i.63 DN iii.15 SN i.73 AN ii.208 AN iv.249f. Pug 57 Pv ii.915 (explained as one who is afraid of sin) Mil 373 DN-a i.70 plural lajjino Vin i.44
      1. ˚dhamma (lajji˚) modesty, feeling of shame Vin ii.53f.
      from lajj
    Lacchati
    future of labhati (q.v.)
    Lañca
    a present, a bribe Ja i.201 Ja ii.186 Ja v.184 Ja vi.408 (gahita, bribes received) Dhp-a i.269 (˚ṁ adāsi); iv.1 Pv-a 209 The word is a word peculiar to the “Jātaka” literature.
    1. ˚khādaka “eater of bribes,” one who feeds on bribes Ja ii.196 Ja v.1
    • ˚ggāha taking of bribes Ja v.109
    • ˚daṇḍaka a staff given as a present (?) Ja vi.450 (variant reading volañjanaka˚)
    • ˚dāna gift of bribes, bribery Ja iii.205
    • ˚vittaka one who gets rich through bribes Ja i.339
    cp. Sanskrit lañca
    Lañcaka
    1. : Hardy in ed. of Netti, p. 278 suggests writing lañjaka & trsl; d “making known,” “exposition” (cp Sanskrit lañj to declare], found only at Mil 137 & 217 in compound Saṁyutta-nikāya-vara-lañcaka (trl; n Rhys Davids “most excellent”); at Mil 242 & 258 in Majjhimanikāya vara˚; at Mil 362 in Ekuttara-nikāya-vara˚ and at Nett 2 in compound nayalañjaka. Trenckner (Miln ed. p. 424) translates it as “excellent gift (to mankind).”
    Lañcana
    1. in “kārāpesi tilañcanaṁ” at Dpvs 20, 10 is not clear. We may have to correct reading into lañchanaṁ or lañchakaṁ. Oldenberg in his translation (p. 211) leaves the word out and remarks: “Probably this passage refers to the three pupphayāna mentioned in the Mahāvaṁsa (33, 22, where Geiger reads “pupphādhānāni tīṇi, with translation “3 stone terraces for offerings of flowers”) though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilañcanaṁ).
    Lañcha
    1. a mark, an imprint Ja ii.425 Vb-a 52
    from lañch
    Lañchaka
    1. one who makes marks (explained by Cy. as “lakkhaṇa-kāraka”) Ja iv.364 Ja iv.366 (ti˚ so explained by Cy. variant reading ni˚) ‣See nillañchaka & cp. ; lañcana (ti˚)
    from lañcha; doubtful
    Lañchati
    1. to stamp, to seal Dhp-a i.35 (sāsanaṁ rāja-muddāya lañchanto)
    • Caus lañcheti
    1. -1. to seal Ja i.452 (spelt lañjetvā); ii.326 vi.385 Snp-a 577 (rāja-muddikāya) Dhp-a i.21
    • to mark, paint, smear Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaṁ).
    • causative II. lañchāpeti to have marked or sealed (by king’s command) Vism 38 (“had his seal put to this order”; translation)
    • cp. nillaccheti
    • lañch Dhtp 54 “lakkhaṇe”
    Lañchana
    neuter
    1. stamp, mark, imprint Vv-a 89 (sasa˚, of the moon); Dāvs ii.23 (pada˚)
    2. the seal (of a letter or edict) Snp-a 172
    3. cp. lañcana
    from lañch
    Lañchita
    1. sealed Ja i.227 (pihita-lañchitā vā loha-cātiyo)
    past participle of lañcheti
    Lañjaka
    1. in dīpa˚; stands as equivalent of dīpavaṁsa thus “story of the island” Dpvs 18, 2 Oldenberg (translation p. 204) translates “the island of Lankā.
    ‣See lañcaka
    Lañjeti
    1. ‣See lañchati and valañjeti
    Laṭukikā
    feminine
    1. the Indian quail, Perdix chinensis DN i.91 MN i.449 (l. sakuṇikā) Ja iii.44 174 sq. (quoted at Snp-a 358 & Dhp-a; i.55); v.121 Mil 202 DN-a i.257
    • cp. Cunningham, Bharhut Tope, p. 58
    Dimin. from laṭvāka; dialectical
    Laṭṭhaka
    adjective
    1. beautiful, auspicious, lovely Ja iii.464 493; iv.1, 477 DN-a i.284
    Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. compares Sanskrit laṭaha, laḍaha, dialectical
    Laṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. a staff, stick DN i.105 (patoda goad), 126 (identical) Vv-a 64 (identical) Ja iv.310 (laṭṭhī hata laṭṭhiyā hata G.); v.280 Mil 27
    2. stick of sugar cane (ucchu˚) Pv-a 257
    3. sprout of a plant, offshoot Ja iii.161 (in simile); usually—˚, as in aṅga˚; sprout Thag-a 226

      • dālika˚ of the d. creeper Thag 2, 297
      • beḷuva˚ of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118; sala˚; of the Sal tree AN ii.200 Found also in names of places, as Laṭṭhivana (J i.83 etc.).

        1. ˚madhu(ka) “cane-honey,” i.e. liquorice Ja iv.537 Dhp-a iv.171 (˚ka)
        Sanskrit yaṣṭi, with l for y; also in Prakrit ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 255 & cp. Geiger,; Pali Grammar § 462. The doublet yaṭṭhi also in Pāli
    Laṭṭhikā
    feminine = laṭṭhi, only in N
    • plural as—˚ (cp. laṭṭhi.3), e.g. Amba˚; the grove of mango sprouts DN-a i.41

    Laṇḍa
    neuter [cp. Sanskrit laṇḍa (dialectical). The Dhtm under No. 155 gives a root laḍ in meaning “jigucchana,” i.e. disgust excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref to elephants (haṭṭhi˚), e.g. at Ja ii.19 Dhp-a i.163 192 iv.156 (here also as assa˚; horse dung.) cp. laṇḍikā.
    Laṇḍikā
    feminine
    1. only in aja˚; goat’s dirt, pellet of goat’s dung Ja i.419 Pv-a 283
    from laṇḍa
    Latā
    feminine
    1. a slender tree, a creeping plant creeper AN i.202 (māluvā˚) Vv 355 (= vallī Vv-a 162) 474 (kosātakī l.) Ja i.464 (rukkha˚, here perhaps better “branch”) Dhp-a i.392 (˚pasādhana ‣See under mahā˚) Mil 253 Mil 351 Vv-a 12 (kappa˚) Pv-a 51 Pv-a 121; Vism 183 (where the following kinds are given: lābu, kumbhaṇḍī sāmā, kāḷavallī, pūtilatā)
    2. nāga˚ the iron wood tree ‣See under nāga; pūti˚; a sort of creeper (q.v.) On latā in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 130
    3. (figuratively) an epithet of taṇhā (greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs 1059 1136; Nett 24, 121
    4. (figuratively) streak flash, in vijjul-latā flash of lightning Ja i.103

      1. ˚kamma creeper-work (combined with mālā-kamma Vin ii.117 152
      cp. Sanskrit latā, connected with Latin lentus flexible; Old High German lindi soft, English lithe; also Old High German lintea lime tree; Gr fir tree
    Laddha
    1. (having) obtained, taken, received Snp 106 Snp 239 Ja v.171 Mhvs 5, 133 (kiñci laddhaṁ); 10 37 (kaññā laddhā) Pv-a 5
    • laddhatvaṁ at Ja iv.406 is to be corrected to uddhatvā
    • cp. upa˚, pa˚;
    1. ˚adhippāya one who obtains his wishes Nd2 542
    • ˚assāsa getting one’s breath again, coming to (out of a swoon) Ja iv.126
    • ˚upasampada one who has obtained ordination Pv-a 54
    • ˚jaya victorious Mhvs 25, 98 -jīvika revived Pv-a 40
    • ˚nāma so-called Thag-a 292 (puthulomo laddhanāmo maccho) Pv-a 33 (yamaloka l-n. petaloka), 52 (niraya l-n. naraka), 57 (kuñjara l-n hatthi), 107 (sūcikā jighacchā), 119 (Purindada Sakka), 143 (Himavanto = pabbata-rājā), etc
    past participle of labhati
    Laddhā
    1. is absolutive and 3rd singular
    2. aorist ; laddhāna
    3. absolutive of labhati (q.v.)

    Laddhi
    feminine
    1. religious belief, view, theory, especially heretical view; a later term for the earlier diṭṭhi (cp Kvu translation introduction p. 47) Ja i.142 (Devadattassa), 425 iii.487; v.411; Dāvs ii.86 (dulladdhi wrong view) DN-a i.117 Pv-a 254 Sdhp 65. cp. upa˚;
    from labh
    Laddhika
    (—˚)
    1. having a (wrong) view or belief, schismatic Ja i.373 (evaṁ˚); Dīpavaṁsa vii.35 (puthu˚)
    from laddhi
    Landhati
    1. ‣See nandhati & pilandhana. Concerning l → n cp. ; laṅgula
    Lapa
    adjective noun
    1. talkative, talking, prattling; a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer AN ii.26 Thag 1, 959 = It 112; Vism 26 (doubled: lapa-lapa) Nd1 226 (as lapaka-lapaka)
    from lap ‣See lapati
    Lapaka
    1. one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for pay) DN i.8 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.15) AN iii.111 Ja iii.349 Mil 228 DN-a i.91
    from lap
    Lapati
    1. to talk prattle, mutter Snp 776 Iti 122 Pv i.81 ii.63
    • Cp ullapati, palapati, samullapati.
    • causative lapeti (and lāpeti, metri causâ) to talk to, to accost, beg SN i.31 (here meaning “declare”) Snp 929 (janaṁ na lāpayeyya = na lapayeyya lapanaṁ pajaheyya Nd1 389) Dhp-a ii.157 Infin. lapetave (only in Gāthā language cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 204) Ud 21
    • past participle lapita.
    • causative II. lapāpeti Dhp-a ii.157
    lap, cp. Russ. lépet talk, Welsh. llêf voice. The Dhtp 188 & 599 defines; lap with “vacana”
    Lapana
    neuter & lapanā
    • feminine
    • talking, muttering; especially prattling or uttering indistinct words for the sake of begging, patter DN i.8 AN ii.26 AN iii.430 Nd1 389; Nett 94 Mil 383 As
    • feminine lapanā at Vb 352 Vism 23 & 27 (definition) Vb-a 482
    • the mouth, in compound lapana-ja “mouth born,” i.e. tooth Ja vi.218 (= mukhaja Commentary ). cp. ālapana ālapanatā, ullapana
    Lapāpana
    neuter
    1. causing to speak, speaking Thag-a 78
    from causative II. lapāpeti of lap
    Lapita
    1. talked, uttered, muttered Iti 98
    past participle of lapati
    Lapila
    1. ‣See lambila
    Labuja
    1. the bread-fruit tree, Artocarpus lacucha or incisa DN i.53 Ja iv.363 Ja v.6 Ja v.417 Pv-a 153 (sa˚, read as salaḷa˚, like Vv 355 explained at Vv-a 162)
    cp. Sanskrit labuja
    Labbhamanatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being taken Pv-a 56
    abstract from ppr. medium of labhati
    Labbhā
    indeclinable
    1. allowable, possible (with infinitive); usually neg (thus = Prohibitive!) Snp 393 na l. phassetuṁ; Snp-a p. 376 explains by “sakkā”), 590; Pv ii.610 Ja i.64 (na l. tayā pabbajituṁ), 145 (identical), Pv-a 96 (= laddhuṁ sakkā)
    best to be taken, with Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 465, as an old Opt. 3rd singular, like sakkā which corresponds to Vedic śakyāt. Thus labbhā = *labhyāt, as in Māgadhī
    Labha
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. receiving, to be received, to get; only in dul˚; hard to get Snp 75 SN i.101 Ja i.307 Pug 26 Mil 16 Sdhp 17 Sdhp 27; and su˚ easy to obtain Pv ii.319
      a base-formation from labh
    Labhati

    1. (the very frequently & ordinary meaning) to get, to receive, obtain, acquire
    2. (figuratively) to obtain permission to receive an opportunity, etc., as “pabbajituṁ sace lacchāmi” if I am allowed to receive the pabbajjā Mhvs 18, 5; or “labhamāno niccam pi khāditu-kāmo 'mhi” if I get the chance I should always like to eat Ja i.478 and passim (cp.
    3. passive labbhati below). The paradigma of labhati shows a great variety of forms owing to its frequent occurrence (cp. English “get”). We have selected the most interesting ones. PresenT indicative labhati rare (late, e.g. Vism 136); usually med labhate Thag 1, 35 Snp 185 Snp 439 Snp 1st singular labhe Pv i.64 2nd sg labhase Ja ii.220 3rd
    4. plural labhare SN i.110
    5. ppr. med labhamāna SN i.122 (otāraṁ a˚, cp. iv.178 MN i.334) also in
    6. passive sense “getting taken” Pv-a 71
    7. Opt. 3rd singular labhe Snp 458 & (med.); labhetha Snp 45 Snp 46 Snp 217 Pv ii.97; also (usual form) labheyya Pv-a 115 Pv-a 2nd sg
    8. medium labhetho (= Sanskrit ˚thāh) Snp 833
    9. imperative 2nd sg labha Iti 77 3rdlabhatu Pv-a 112
    10. medium 2nd singular labhassu Thag 2, 432 3rd singular labhataṁ DN ii.150 1st
    11. plural (as Hortative) labhāmase Pv i.55 (= labhāma Pv-a 27); & labhāmhase Pv; iii.224
    12. future 3rd singular lacchasi (Sanskrit lapsyati SN i.114 Pv ii.46; iii.37 Ja ii.60 (Māro otāraṁ l.), 258 Mil 126 Dhp-a i.29 Snp-a 405 Thag-a 69 (Ap.); 1st sg lacchāmi MN ii.71 2nd singular lacchasi Vv 835 Pv iv.160 1st
    13. plural lacchāma Ja i.54 Ja iv.292 & lacchāmase (med. Vv 329 Also (the Commentary form) labhissati Pv-a 190 Vv-a 136
    14. conditional 1st
    15. plural alabhissāma Ja iii.35 med 3rd singular alabhissatha DN ii.63
    16. preterite (&
    17. aorist ); (a) 3rd sg alattha DN i.176 (alattha pabbajjaṁ) MN ii.49 SN iv.302 Ja iv.310 Vv-a 66 69; 1st singular alatthaṁ DN ii.268 Vv 8122 Thag 1, 747 Dhp-a iii.313 2nd singular alattha SN i.114 SN i.1st
    18. plural alatthamha MN ii.63 3rd
    19. plural alatthuṁ DN ii.274 & alatthaṁsu SN i.48
    20. (b) (Prohib.) mā laddhā (3rd singular
    21. medium) shall not receive (Sanskrit alabdha) Ja iii.138 (c) labhi Snp 994 Snp 1st singular labhiṁ Thag 1, 218 2, 78 Ja ii.154 Vv-a 68 & alabhitthaṁ Thag 1, 217 3rd singular alabhittha Pv i.77 (spelt bbh); 1st
    22. plural labhimhā (for labhimha DN ii.147
    23. infinitive laddhuṁ Ja ii.352 Dhp-a iii.117 Pv-a 96
    24. German laddhā (poet.) Snp 306 Snp 388 Snp 766 Snp 924
    25. laddhāna (poet.) Snp 67 (= laddhā, labhitvā Nd2 546) Iti 65 and (ord.) labhitva Ja i.150 Ja iii.332 Pv-a 95 Grd. (a): labbhiya (only negative alabbhiya what cannot be got) Ja iv.86 Pv ii.69; labbhaneyya (a˚) (in Com style as explanation of labbhanīya) Ja iv.86 (˚ṭhāna) Pv-a 65 (˚vatthu), 96 (identical); and labbhanīya (as a˚-ṭṭhānāni impossible things) AN iii.54f. (five such items), 60 sq (identical) Ja iv.59
    26. (b): laddhabba Ja iii.332 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 252
    27. (c): laddheyya Pv iv.325
    28. causative labbheti (for *lābheti, a different formn from Sanskrit lambhayati, which is found in Pali pa-lambheti) to make someone get, to procure, in 1st singular
    29. aorist alabbhesi Vin iv.5 = J i.193 Dhp-a iii.213 (variant reading labh˚); and in pres. 3rd singular labbheti Ja iii.353 (= adhigameti Commentary )
    30. Pass. labbhati (figuratively) to be permitted to be possible or proper; (or simply:) it is to be Mhvs 30, 43; Kp-a 192 (vattuṁ), 207 (identical)
    31. pp laddha
    32. cp. upa˚, pati˚, vi˚;
    later Vedic labh for older rabh, cp. rabhate, rabha, rabhasa. Related are Latin rabies = English rabies; Lithuanian lõbis wealth The Dhtp (204) simply defines as “lābhe. On the Prakrit forms ‣See Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 484
  • ‣ See also rabhasa
  • Labhana
    neuter
    1. taking, receiving, gift, acquisition Dhp-a iii.271 (˚bhāva) Pv-a 73 (˚ṭṭhāna), 121 (identical)
    from labh
    Lamba
    1. adjective (—˚)

      1. hanging down, drooping, pendulous SN iv.341 SN iv.342 (˚cūḷakā bhaṭa hirelings with large or drooping top-knots) Ja ii.185 (˚tthana with hanging breasts); iii.265 (˚cūla-vihangama); Dāvs ii.61
      • alamba not drooping, thick, short Ja v.302 vi.3 (˚tthaniyo)
      • cp. ā˚, vi˚ & ālambana;
      from lamb
    Lambati
    1. to hang down, to droop, fall Mhvs 32, 70 (laggāni lambiṁsu), 71 (ākāse lambamānāni). future lambahīti (poet.) Ja v.302 (= lambissati)

      • Caus lambeti to cause to hang up or to be suspended, to hang up Mhvs 34, 48.
      • causative II. lambāpeti identical Mhvs 21, 15-
      • past participle lambita
      • cp. abhi˚, pa˚, vi˚;
      lamb; cp. Latin limbus “limb,” which may be also in English limp, literally “hanging down."-The Dhtp defines the root as “ramba lamba avasaṁsane” (No. 199) as does Dhtm 284
    Lambita
    1. hanging down, suspended Mhvs 27, 38; 30, 67
    past participle of lambeti
    Lambin
    adjective
    1. hanging down, able to hang or bend down (with reference to the membrum virile) Vin iii.35 (“tassa bhikkhussa angajātaṁ dīghaṁ hoti lambati tasmā lambī ti vutto” Sam. Pās. i.278)
    from lamb
    Lambila
    adjective
    1. sour, acrid, astringent (of taste) Nd1 240 Nd2 540 Dhs 629 Dhs-a 320 (reads lapila, variant reading lampila; explained as “badara-sāḷava-kapiṭṭha-sāḷav’ ādi”) Mil 56 (reads ambila
    reading not quite certain, cp. ambila
    Lambheti

    1. ‣See palambheti (to deceive, dupe) It may be possibie that reading lampetvā at AN ii.77 (variant reading lambitvā) is to be corrected to lambhetvā (combined with hāpetvā)
    • alambhavissa at SN v.146 is to be read alam abhavissa, as at Ja ii.59
    causative of labh, for which usually labbheti (q.v. under labhati). The Sanskrit form is lambhayati The Dhtm. (840) puts it down as a special root, although it occurs only in compound pa˚ in this special meaning “labhi vañcane”
    Laya
    1. a brief measure of time, usually combined with other expressions denoting a short moment, especially frequent as khaṇa laya muhutta Vin i.12 iii.92 AN iv.137 cp. Dīpavaṁsa i.16 (khaṇe khaṇe laye Buddho sabbalokaṁ avekkhati)
    2. Vism 136 (īsakam pi layaṁ yantaṁ paggaṇheth’ eva mānasaṁ)
    3. time in music, equal time, rhythm Dāvs iv.50 Vv-a 183 (dvādasannaṁ laya-bhedānaṁ vasena pabheda)
    cp. Sanskrit laya ‣See līyati
    Laḷati
    1. to dally, sport, sing Ja ii.121 (ppr. laḷamānā) Vv-a 41 (laḷantī; with kīḷati), 57 (identical)
    • Caus laḷeti Ja i.362 (ppr. lāḷentā); Vism 365; cp. upa˚; -pp laḷita ‣See pa˚
    lal, onomat;. cp. Latin lallo “lull”; Sanskrit lalallā; German lallen. The Dhtp distinguishes 2 roots: lal (= icchā) & laḷ (= vilāsa & upasevā)
    Lalāṭa
    1. ‣See nalāṭa (cp. langula)
    Lava
    1. a small particle, a drop Vv-a 253 (lavanka a small mark); Sdhp 105 (˚odaka)
    from
    Lavaka
    1. a cutter, reaper Snp-a 148 (variant reading lāvaka) ‣See lāvaka
    from
    Lavaṇa
    neuter
    1. salt, lotion Mil 112 Sdhp 158 ‣See loṇa
    cp. late Vedic lavaṇa, cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 54
    Lavana
    neuter
    1. cutting, reaping Mil 360
    from lunāti
    Lavāpeti
    causative of lunāti (q.v.)
    Lasagata
    1. (hattha) at AN ii.165 is to be read (with variant reading ) as lepagata, i.e. sticky (opposite suddha)
    Lasati

    1. to desire, long; to dance, play sport; to shine; to sound forth ‣See lāsana, abhilāsa upaḷāseti, alasa, vilāsa. causative lāseti to sport, to amuse (oneself) Vin ii.10 (with vādeti, gāyati, naccati)
    2. represents las to gleam, shine; sport, play; as well as laṣ to desire, long for. cp. Latin lascivus; Gothic lustus = English, German lust etc The Dhtp 324 defs. las as “kanti”
    Lasikā
    feminine
    1. the fluid which lubricates the joints, synovic fluid Vin i.202 DN ii.293 MN iii.90 SN iv.111 Snp 196 Ja i.146 Mil 382 In detail at Vism 264, 362 Vb-a 247
    cp. Sanskrit *lasikā
    Lasī
    feminine
    1. brains Ja i.493 (= matthalunga Commentary ) = Dhp-a i.145 Lasuna & Lasuna;
    etymology?
    Lasuṇa
    Lasuna;
    neuter
    1. garlic Vin ii.140 Vin iv.258 Ja i.474 Vv 436 Vv-a 186
    cp. Sanskrit laśuna
    Lahati
    1. to lick ‣See ullahaka, palahati, & lehati
    Lahu
    adjective
    1. light, quick AN i.10 AN i.45
    • lahuṁ karoti to make light, to be frivolous Ja ii.451
    • nt. lahuṁ (
    • adverb ) quickly Pv iv.160; Dīpavaṁsa i.53; Mhvs 4, 17
    • Usually as lahuka (q.v.)
    1. ˚citta light-minded SN i.201 Ja iii.73
    • ˚ṭṭhāna lightness of body, bodily vigour, good health MN i.437 MN i.473 DN i.204 Ud 15 Mil 14 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit laghūtthānatā Divy 156.
      1. ˚parivatta quickly or easily changing Vb-a 408
      Sanskrit laghu & raghu ‣See etymology under langhati
    Lahukā
    adjective
    1. light (opposite garuka; trifling Vin i.49 AN ii.48 (āpatti); iv.137 (jīvitaṁ parittaṁ l.) Mil 344 (āpatti)
    2. light, buoyant Thag 1, 104 (kāyo) Dhs 648 Mil 105 Pv-a 280
    3. atilahukaṁ (
    4. adverb ) too soon Vin ii.215
    5. (as technical term in grammar) light (of letters or syllables), opposite garuka DN-a i.177 (with reference to the 10 fold vyañjana of the dhamma).

      lahu + ka
    Lahutā
    feminine
    1. lightness, buoyancy Dhs 42 322, 585; Vism 448
    from lahu
    Lahusa
    adjective
    1. easily offended, touchy DN i.90 explained by DN-a i.256 as follows: “lahusā ti lahukā appaken’ eva tussanti vā russanti vā udaka-piṭṭhe lābukaṭāhaṁ viya appakena pi uppilavanti.” cp. rabhasa
    from lahu
    Lahuso
    adverb
    1. quickly AN iv.247 (sabba˚); Vism 238
    originally ablative of lahu
    Lākhā
    feminine
    1. lac; lac-dye; enumerated with other colourings at MN i.127 = SN ii.101 = AN iii.230
    • Snp-a 577 Vism 261 (as colour of blood)
    1. ˚ācariya expert in lac-dyeing Snp-a 577
    • ˚guḷaka a ball of lac Snp-a 80
    • ˚goḷaka identical Snp-a 577
    • ˚tamba copper coloured with lac Thag 2, 440 (= lākhā-rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samannāgata Thag-a 270) -rasa essence of lac, used for dyeing; lac-colouring Ja v.215 (˚ratta-succhavi); vi.269 (identical); Kp-a 62, 63 Thag-a 270 Laja & Laja
    cp. Sanskrit dākṣā
    Lāja
    Lājā
    feminine
    1. fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combination madhu-lāja fried grain with honey, sweet corn Ja iii.538 Ja iv.214 Ja iv.281
    2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours) as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase; lāja-pañcamāni pupphāni (“a cluster of flowers with lāja as the fifth”) Dhp-a i.112 Vv-a 31 Ja i.55 (˚pañcamakāni p.); cp. Ja ii.240 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-maṇḍita-talā); vi.42 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-vāsa-dhūp’ andhakāra) Dhp-a i.140 (vippakiṇṇa-valikaṁ pañcavaṇṇa-kusuma-lāja-puṇṇaghaṭa-paṭimaṇḍita)
    cp. Vedic lāja: Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 269
    Lājeti
    1. to fry or have fried Ja vi.341 (variant reading lañc˚, lañj˚), 385 (lañchetvā; variant reading lañci˚, lañje˚)
    from lāja
    Lāpa1
    1. talk ‣See compounds. abhi˚, pa˚, sal˚
    from lap
    Lāpa2
    1. a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis SN v.146 = J ii.59. As lāpaka-sakuṇa also at Ja ii.59-Another name for quail is vaṭṭaka
    also from lap, literally “talker,” cp. similar semantics of English quail → German quaken, quicken; English quack. The Pali form rests on popular etymology, as in Sanskrit we find corresponding name as lāba
    Lāpana
    neuter
    1. muttering, utterance, speech Iti 98 AN i.165 (lapita˚). Perhaps also to be read at Thag 2, 73
    • cp. upa˚;
    from lāpeti, causative of lap
    Lāpin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. talking (silly) SN iii.143 (bāla˚)
      from lap
    Lāpu
    feminine
    1. a kind of cucumber Ja i.336 Ja i.341 ‣See also lābuka
    1. ˚latā the cucumber creeper or plant Mil 374
    short for alāpu or ālābu, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 396
    Lāpeti
    1. ‣See lapati & cp. upalāpeti
    Lābu
    feminine & Lābuka = lāpu (alābu) gourd or pumpkin, often used as receptacle Ja i.158 (˚ka), 411 (˚kumbhaṇḍa vesseḷ made of the gourd); v.37 (˚ka), 155 (addha-lābu-samā thanā) Dhp-a ii.59 (˚ka) Snp-a 227 (lābumhi catumadhuraṁ pūretukāmo).
    1. -kaṭāha a gourd as receptacle Vism 255, 359 Vb-a 63
    Lābha
    1. receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; plural possessions DN i.8 DN ii.58 DN ii.61 MN i.508 (ārogya-paramā lābhā); iii.39 AN i.74 AN iv.157f. 160 (lābhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto Devadatto, cp. J i.185 sq.) Snp 31 Snp 438 Snp 828 Snp 854 Snp 1014 Snp 1046 (cp. Nd2 548) Iti 67 (vitta˚) Ja iii.516 (yasa˚, dhana˚); Vism 93 136 (˚ṁ labhati), 150 (˚assa bhāgin getting riches) Pv-a 113 Pv-a 280

      • A dative singular lābhā (for lābhāya) is used
      • adverb ially with following genitive in meaning of “for my (our) gain,” “it is profitable,” “good for me that” etc.; e.g. Mil 17 (lābhā no tāta, suladdhaṁ no tāta), 232 (lābhā vata tāsaṁ devatānaṁ) AN iii.313 (lābhā vata me suladdhaṁ vata me), explained at Vism 223 Dhp-a i.98 (lābhā vata me, elliptically); ii.95 (l. vata no ye mayaṁ … upaṭṭhahimha)
      1. ˚agga highest gain Ja iii.125 Mil 21
      • ˚āsā desire for gain AN i.86
      • ˚kamyā (ablative out of desire for gain Snp 854 Snp 929 (= lābha-hetu Nd1 389)
      • ˚taṇhā craving for possession Dhp-a iv.38
      • ˚macchariya selfishness in acquisitions AN iii.273 DN iii.234 Pug 19 23 Dhs 1122
      • ˚mada pride of gain Vb-a 466
      • ˚sakkāra gain and honour, usually combined with ˚siloka fame; the two first e.g. at Vin ii.196 Iti 73 Ja i.185 Ja i.186 Ja v.75 the three combined e.g. at MN i.192 SN ii.227 SN ii.237 AN ii.73 AN iii.343f. 377 Vb 352f.; lābha -siloka alone at Vism 67
      from labh
    Lābhaka
    adjective neuter
    1. one who receives; reception; ; not getting, non-receiving Vin iii.77
    from lābha
    Lābhā
    1. ‣See under lābha
    Lābhin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. receiving, getting, having, possessed of MN iii.39 (as noun “a receiver, recipient”) AN i.24 AN ii.85 AN iv.400 Pug 51 Vb 332 (nikāma˚) Ja i.140
    2. one who has intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted (opp alābhin a denier) DN-a i.106 120
    from labha
    Lāmaka
    adjective
    1. insignificant, poor inferior, bad, sinful. The usual synonym is pāpa
    • Vin ii.76 Vism 268 (= pāpaka) Dhs-a 45 Kp-a 243 (= khudda); PugA 229 (nīca lāmaka = oṇata); Kp-a 150 (˚desanā, cp. ukkaṭṭha) Dhp-a ii.77 Dhp-a iv.44 (˚bhāva) Vv-a 116 Pv-a 15 (for pāpa); 103 (= pāpaka), 125 (˚purisa = kāpurisa); Sdhp 28 Sdhp 253 Sdhp 426 Sdhp 526 (opp ukkaṭṭha).
    • feminine lāmikā Ja i.285 Ja ii.346 (for itarā) Dhp-a ii.61 (pāpikā l. diṭṭhi)
    • cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation2 § 1025
    seems to be a specific Pāli word. It is essentially a Commentary word & probably of dialectical origin Has it anything to do with; omaka ?
    Lāmajjaka
    1. (lāmañjaka) neuter

      1. the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 436 (variant reading ˚añc˚) Vv-a 186 (˚añj˚) 187
      cp. Sanskrit lāmajjaka
    Lāyaka
    (—˚)
    1. cutter, reaper AN iii.365 = SN iii.155 (read babbaja˚)
    from lāyati
    Lāyati

    .

    1. to cut (off), mow, reap; absolutive lāyitvā AN iii.365 Ja i.215 Ja iii.226 Vin iii.64 Pv i.81 (= lāvitvā Pv-a 40)-
    2. past participle lāyita
    3. for. *lāvati, , for which the ordinary form is lunāti (q.v.), y for v as frequently in Pāli ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 462 The Dhtp. has a root in meaning “ādāna (No. 370)
    Lāyana
    neuter
    1. cutting Ja v.45 (tiṇa-lāyana asi, sickle) Dhp-a iii.285 (variant reading for dāyana)
    from lāyati
    Lāyita
    1. cut, reaped Ja iii.130 (tiṇaṁ na lāyita-pubbaṁ); Vism 419 (˚ṭṭhāna place where one has reaped)
    past participle of lāyati, lāyeti
    Lāla
    adjective
    1. talking without sense, silly, foolish Ja vi.360 Ja vi.417 (ḷ). cp. alālā
    from lal ‣See laḷati
    Lālaka
    1. a wag, silly person, fool Ja i.205 Ja iv.210 Lalapati & Lalappati;
    lala + ka
    Lālapati
    Lālappati;
    1. to talk much, to talk silly, to lament, wail Snp 580 Pv iv.52 (= vilapati Pv-a 260) Ja iii.217 Mil 148 Mil 275 Mhvs 32, 68. past participle lālappita
    2. Intens. of lapati
    Lālappa
    1. talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vb 100 138; Ps i.38; Nett 29 Vb-a 104 (= punappunaṁ lapanaṁ). Lala(p)pana
    from lālappati
    Lāla(p)pana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine = lālappa, together with lāla(p)pitatta
    • neuter in exegesis of parideva at Nd2 416 Vb 100 138 Vb-a 104 DN-a i.121

    Lālappita
    1. talking much, wailing Mil 148 (paridevita-l
    2. mukha)
    3. neuter much talk, excited talk, talking Ja vi.498
    past participle of lālappati
    Lālā
    feminine
    1. saliva Ja i.61 Ja i.248 Ja vi.357 Vism 259 Dhp-a i.307 (mukhato lālā galati)
    cp. laḷati
    Lāḷana
    neuter
    1. swaying, dalliance, sport DN-a i.197 Sdhp 387; as lāḷanā at Thag-a 243
    from lal
    Lāḷeti
    1. ‣See laḷati
    Lāvaka
    1. a cutter, reaper Mil 33 (yava˚); Mhvs 10, 31 Snp-a 148 (Burmese variant for lavaka). Lavati & Laveti;
    from lāvati
    Lāvati
    Lāveti;
    1. [the latter the usual form, as causative of lunāti. lāvati is the simple Pāli formation from Another
    2. causative II. is lavāpati (q.v.) ‣See also lāyati to cut, to mow Pv-a 40 (lāvitvā), Mhvs 10, 30 (lāvayati).

    Lāsa
    1. sporting, dancing ‣See abhi˚, vi˚
    of las
    Lāsikā
    feminine
    1. a dancer, Mil 331
    from las
    Lāseti
    1. ‣See lasati
    Likkhā

    feminine

    1. a kind of measure Vb-a 343 (36 rattareṇus equal to one likkhā 7 likkhās equal to 1 ūkā); Kp-a 43 (˚matta)
    * Sanskrit likṣā egg of a louse, as measure equal to 8 trasareṇu (BR.) Connected with Latin ricinus a kind of vermin ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v.
    Likhati

    1. to scratch; to cut carve; write, inscribe MN i.127 (rūpāni) Ja ii.372 (suvaṇṇa-patte); iv.257 (identical), 488, 489 (jāti-hingulakena) Dhp-a i.182 Pv-a 145 (nāmaṁ likhi wrote his name)
    2. paṇṇaṁ l. to write a letter Ja ii.174 Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe on a leaf)
    3. to shave (off), plane Vin ii.112 (infinitive likhituṁ).
    4. past participle likhita
    5. cp. vi.˚-
    6. causative I lekheti (q.v.)
    7. causative II. likhāpeti to cause to be cut or carved cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit likhāpayati Divy 547
      1. Vin ii.110 Snp-a 577 to cause to be written Mil 42
      likh; Vedic likhati, also rikh in Vedic ārikhati (R.V. vi.53, 7), cp. with palatal riśati, liśati. Connected with Lithuanian rë̃kti to cut bread, to plough; Old High German rīga = Anglo-Saxon rāw = English row Dhtp 467 simply explains by “lekhane”
    Likhana
    neuter
    1. scratching, cutting, writing Ja v.59 (a golden tablet for writing on) cp. ullikhana
    cp. late Sanskrit likhana; from likh
    Likhā
    1. in likhā-paṇṇa at Pv-a 20 is faulty for lekhā˚; (lekha˚) letter, cp. lekha-pattra letter Mālatīm 172, 7
    Likhita
    1. carved, cut, worked (in ivory etc.), in compound saṅkha˚ brahmacariya the moral life, like a polished shell DN i.63 SN ii.219 explained at DN-a i.181 as “likhita-sankha-sadisa dhota-sankha-sappaṭibhāga.” 2. written, inscribed Ja iv.7 (likhitāni akkharāni) Mil 42 (lekha l.)
    2. made smooth, shaved Ja vi.482 (cāpa)
    3. marked, proscribed, made an outlaw Vin i.75 cp. ullikhita.

      past participle of likhati
    Likhitaka
    adjective
    1. one who has been proscribed, an outlaw Vin i.75 (cora)
    likhita + qualifying ending ka
    Liṅga
    neuter
    1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark feature MN i.360 SN v.278 Snp 601f. (= saṇṭhāna Snp-a 464) Vin iv.7 (two: hīna & ukkaṭṭha) Ja i.18 Ja iv.114 (gihi˚), 130 Mil 133 (sāsana˚), 162 (dve samaṇassa lingāni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.); Vism 184 Dhs-a 64 (= saṇṭhāna Tīkā: Expositor 86)
    2. mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well as female, as neither
    3. masculine nor
    4. feminine ) Vin iii.35 (purisa˚) Ja v.197 (˚saṇṭhāna); Kp-a 110 (itthi˚) Snp-a 48 (˚sampatti), 51 (identical), 300 (itthi˚) Dhs-a 321f. (itthi˚)
    5. (in grammar) mark of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender Snp-a 397

      • ˚vipallāsa change or substitution of gender Pv-a 7 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 157
      from liṅg; late Vedic & (pre-eminently) Classical Sanskrit linga
    Liṅgāla
    1. antelope (?) Pgdp 10
    cp. Sanskrit lingālikā a kind of mouse
    Liṅgika
    adjective
    1. having or being a characteristic Vism 210 (of nāma); Kp-a 107 (identical)
    from linga
    Liṅgeti
    1. to embrace, in poet.
    2. absolutive liṅgiya (as if from lingati) Thag 2, 398 (= ālingetvā Thag-a 260) ‣See ā˚
    3. to characterize ‣See ul˚
    denominative from liṅg
    Lipi
    1. the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing Mil 79
    from lip; late Sanskrit lipi
    Limpati
    1. [lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Latin lippus; Lithuanian limpû to stick, Gothic bi-leiban, Old High German bilīban to stay behind, to stay, English leave & live, German leben. The Dhtp (385) simply explains by “limpana” to smear, plaster, stain; usually in passive (or
    2. medium) sense “to get soiled, to dirty oneself” Thag 2, 388 Pv-a 215 Doubtful in Snp passages, where both limpati & lippati; are found as readings, e.g. Snp 778 in Text lippati, but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd1 55) Snp 811 lipp˚, Nd1 133 limp˚ Snp 1040 Snp 1042 lipp˚, Nd2 549 limp.˚-
    3. passive lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character Snp 250 Snp 547 Snp 625 Snp 778 Snp 913 Snp 1040 cp. Snp 71 (alippamāna ppr.).
    4. past participle litta ‣See ava˚, ul˚, vi.˚-cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati.
    5. causative I. lepeti to cause to be plastered Ja vi.432
    6. causative II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mhvs 34, 42 (cetiyaṁ ˚āpetvāna).

    Limpana
    neuter
    1. soiling, smearing Dhtp 385
    from lip
    Lisati
    1. to break off, tear off, pull; only at Dhtp 444 explained by “lesa.”
    cp. dialectical Sanskrit liśate = Vedic riśate
    Lihati

    1. to lick; pres. lehati Ja ii.44 aorist lehayiṁsu Pv-a 198 (variant reading for palahiṁsu). cp. parilehisaṁ Vv 8121 Vv-a 316
    2. absolutive lehitvā DN-a i.136 (sarīraṁ) Vv-a 314
    3. past participle līḷha (?). cp. leyya
    4. lih, Sanskrit leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati. cp. Latin lingo; Gothic bilaigōn, Anglo-Saxon liccian = English lick, absolutive lecken The Dhtp 335 explainslih by “assādane,” i.e. taste
    Līna
    1. clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, AN i.3 Vism 125. Definitions at Vb 352 373 Dhs 1156 1236 SN v.277 SN v.279 (ati˚). Often combined with uddhata as “sluggish or shy” and “unbalanced,” e.g. at SN v.112 Vism 136 Vb-a 310
    • alīna active, open, sincere Snp 68 (˚citta), 717 (identical) Ja i.22 (v.148; ˚viriya sīha)
    past participle of līyati
    Līnatā
    feminine
    1. = līyanā Vism 469. alīnatā open-mindedness, sincerity Ja i.366 Snp-a 122
    abstract formation from līna instead of līy˚
    Līnatta
    neuter
    1. sluggishness, shyness; only in phrase cetaso līnattaṁ immobility of mind SN v.64 SN v.103 AN i.3 = iv.32; v.145 sq.; Nett 86, 108 Vb-a 272 (= cittassa līn’ ākāra)
    abstract from līna
    Līyati
    1. to stick. The Dhtp evidently favours the separation when interpreting by “silesana-dravīkaraṇa,” i.e. to make slip or run (Dhtp 441; Dhtm 681)] 1. to stick, adhere, cling to ‣See compounds. all˚, o˚, ni˚, paṭisal˚
    • to melt, slip ‣See compound pavi˚ (to dissolve).
    • past participle līna
    • , Vedic līyati; *lei to stick to or cleave ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. lino, which he separates in meaning from *lei to smear, polish
    Līyana
    neuter
    1. sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp 190 (˚ṭṭhāna resting-place)
    from līyati
    Līyanā
    feminine = līyana; cleaving to, sluggishness, shyness Dhs 1156
    Līyitatta
    neuter
    1. = līyanā Dhs 1156
    abstract formation after similar synonymical chains, like bhāvitatta
    Līlā
    1. (līḷā) feminine

      1. play, sport, dalliance; probably for līḷhā at Ja v.5 & 157, both times comb; d with vilāsa
      1. ˚aravinda a lotus serviceable for sport Vv-a 43 (līḷ˚)
      cp. Epic Sanskrit līlā or *līḍā
    Līḷhā
    feminine
    1. grace, ease, charm adroitness; always used with reference to the Buddha (Buddhalīḷhā), e.g. Ja i.155 Dhp-a i.33 Dhp-a iii.79 So in phrase Buddhalīḷhāya dhammaṁ deseti “to expound the doctrine with the Buddha’s mastery” Ja i.152 Ja i.155 iii.289 Vv-a 217 (spelling wrongly līḷāya). Of the B’s gait: Ja i.93 Ja i.149 Dhp-a ii.41 The combination with vilāsa, as mentioned by Childers, applies to līlā (q.v.) which may stand for līḷhā at the passages mentioned although not used of the Buddha
    abstract of līḷha, Sanskrit līḍha, past participle of lih, literally being polished, cp. ullīḍha polished
    Lugga
    1. broken (up), rugged (of a path) Mil 217 Mil 218 cp. vi˚
    past participle of rujati; corresponding to Sanskrit rugṇa
    Lujjati
    1. to be broken up, to break (up), to be destroyed to go asunder, to fall apart AN i.283 = Pug 32 (here equal to “be wiped out,” but it is unnecessary to assume as Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. lujjati does, a by-form of luc, luñcati The Pug Commentary 215 explains by “nassati”) Vin i.297 Vin ii.123 SN iv.52 (in etymologizing interpretation of loka: “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati”; quoted at Nd2 550 on Snp 1119) Thag 1, 929
    • cp. olujjati, palujjati.
    • past participle lugga
    passive of ruj, corresponding to Sanskrit rujyate. Dhtp 400 gives luj as sep. root with meaning vināsa ‣See rujati
    Lujjana
    neuter
    1. breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution Dhs-a 47 (in etymology of loka = lujjana-palujjan’ aṭṭhena vaṭṭaṁ), 308 (identical); Vism 427 (identical)
    from lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dogmatics
    Luñcati
    1. to pull out, pluck (a bird), tear, peel Ja i.244 Ja i.476 Ja ii.97 Ja ii.363 iii.314; iv.191; v.463; Mhvs 23, 46 (aorist aluñci; 28, 26 (
    2. absolutive luñcitvā; Vism 248 (kese).
    3. causative II. luñcāpeti Dhp-a ii.53 (kese), and loceti Thag 1, 283 (kesamassuṁ alocayiṁ).
    4. past participle luñcita
    5. Vedic luñcati, luc or luñc, to Latin runco to pull up weeds. The Dhtp 43 explains by apanayana
    Luñcita
    1. plucked, pulled Mil 240 (i.e. combed, of wool; Rhys Davids translates “pressed”; Nyānatiloka “cut”) Pv-a 47 (vilūna-kesa +)
    past participle of luñcati
    Luṭhati
    1. to rob, plunder
    cp. later Sanskrit luṭhati to plunder, which is one of the dialectical variants luṭh, lunṭh, loṭh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) & Dhtm (136) both give; ruṭh & luṭh; with meaning “upaghāte”
    Luta
    seems to be a legitimate spelling representing either lutta or lūna, in meaning “cut, cut off”
    1. . Thus at SN i.5 (nalo va harito luto) 126 = J vi.25; and at Snp 532 (lutāni bandhanāni; variant readings lūtāni & lunāni; explained as “chinnāni padālitāni” at Snp-a 432)
    cp. lu for under lunāti
    Lutta
    1. broken, cut off; as technical term in grammar “elided” Vv-a 13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (identical)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit lupta; past participle of lumpati
    Ludda
    adjective
    1. fierce, terrible; cruel, gruesome SN i.143 AN ii.174 (pāpa, l., kibbisa); v.149 Pug 56 Vv 845 (= dāruṇā pisāc'-ādino Vv-a 335) Ja v.243 (ṭhānaṁ niraya); Sdhp 286. The spelling ludra occurs at Ja iv.46 = vi.306, which is ludda at Ja v.146
    2. a hunter, sportsman Snp 247 (dussīla˚ Snp-a 289: luddā ca kurūra-kammantā lohita-pāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhaka-sākuṇik'ādayo idha adhippetā) Vv 631 Ja ii.154 (˚putta = luddaka); iii.432 (Bharata by name) Pug 56 (māgavika, sākuṇika, l., macchaghātaka etc. explained by dāruṇa kakkhaḷa at Pug AN 233); Vism 245 Vb-a 259 Vb-a 228
    the usual Pali form of rudda, corresponding to Sanskrit raudra
    Luddaka
    1. = ludda 2, i.e. hunter Vin i.220 Ja iv.416 Pv iii.72 (miga˚; explained as “dāruṇa” Pv-a 206) Mil 222 Vb-a 266 (miga˚, in simile) Pv-a 34 Pv-a 168. cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 143, 207. Note. The expression sunakha-luddako at Dhs-a 273 is not quite clear (“doghunter"?). It applies to a female & Maung Tin (; Expositor ii.361) reads “luddhikā” (sic), with translation “dog-mistress,” remarking that Pyī reads luddako “hunter-dog” (?)
    Luddha
    1. greedy, covetous AN iii.433 (with pharusa-vāca & samphappalāpin) Iti 84 Mil 92 (duṭṭha, mūḷha, l.) Ja i.124
    past participle of lubbhati
    Lunana
    neuter
    1. cutting, severing Snp-a 148 (niddānan ti chedanaṁ lunanaṁ uppāṭanaṁ)
    for lūna(na), cp. lavana
    Lunāti
    1. to cut, cut off, mow, reap Mil 33 (yavalāvakā yavaṁ lunanti) Dhs-a 39 past participle lūna (& luta); -Caus I. lāvayati Mhvs 10, 30;
    2. causative II. lavāpeti to cause to mow Vin ii.180

      • A
      • passive lūyati from lu
      1. is found at DN i.141 (aorist lūyiṁsu) and at corresponding passage Pug 56 (
      2. imperative lūyantu, where dubbā is to be corrected to dabbhā

        • See lava, lavaka, lavana lāyati, lavati
        , given as lu at Dhtp 504 (“chedana”) & Dhtm 728 (“paccheda”). For etymology cp. Latin luo to pay a fine, Gothic fraliusan to lose; German los English lose & loose
    Lubbhati

    1. to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for, desire Iti 84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism 465, 468. absolutive lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than lubh. A grd formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanīya (q.v.)

      • pp luddha
      Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Latin lubet & libet it pleases, libido longing; Gothic liufs = German lieb & lob English love, etc Dhtp 434: lobhe
    Lubbhana
    neuter
    1. being greedy, greediness, a scholastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e. g at Dhs 32 (where also the enlarged abstract formation lubbhitatta & Vism 465, 468 (lubbhana-mattaṁ lobha)
    from lubh
    Lumpati

    to break, harm, injure; to attack plunder; with a strong touch of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it cp. lup : ruj: roga

    1. which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q.v.)
    • Dhs-a 365 (in explanation of loluppa).
    • past participle lutta
    • cp. ullumpana ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa. Lulati & Lutati;
    lup, Epic Sanskrit lumpati, found also as rup in Pali ‣See ruppati. Connected with Latin lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati, roga) and rumpo to break. Definitions at Dhtp 386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vināsa)
    Luḷati
    Luṭati;
    1. to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intransitive to be in motion, to be stirred Mil 259 (calati khubbhati l. āvilati). past participle luḷita
    2. cp. epithet Sanskrit loṭh to move & dialectical; luḍ, loḍayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by-form of lul lolati to move, causative lolayati to set in motion. Etymology connected with Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Anglo-Saxon lāēl a (flexible) rod, rood; root due to onomat. formation. Another form is luṭhati. The Dhtm (117) explainsluṭ; by “loṭane” (cp. viloṭana & viloḷana), and; luḷ (510) by “manthane”
    Luḷita
    1. stirred, moved, disturbed; lively; turbid (of water) SN v.123 = AN iii.233 (udapatta āvila l.) DN ii.128 = Ud 83 (udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ) Ja vi.63 Nd1 488 (āvila +) Mil 35 Mil 177 Mil 220 (˚citta) 383 (a˚) Dhs-a 328 (indriyāni paripakkāni alulitāni avisadāni)
    past participle of luḷati
    Lūka
    1. owl Ja vi.497 (= ulūka Commentary )
    apocope form of ulūka, arisen through wrong syllable-division
    Lūkha
    adjective [Vedic rūkṣa; Prakrit lūha & lukkha; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit lūha, e.g. Divy 13 (praheṇaka), 81 (˚cīvara), 425, 427 1. rough, coarse, unpleasant; poor, bad (usually applied to dress or food); mediocre, meȧgre, wretched. Opp paṇīta (e.g. Vin i.212 SN ii.153 AN iv.10 Ja i.228 Vv-a 64)
    • SN iv.337f. AN iv.232f. Vin i.55 Thag 1 923 Ja i.228 (cittasmiṁ paṇīte … dānaṁ lūkhaṁ na hoti) Nd2 342 (p. 182, in exegesis of nikkuha, where practices of ascetics are referred to as “lūkhaṁ cīvaraṁ dhāreti, l. piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjati, l. senāsanaṁ paṭisevati etc.) Vv-a 298 335 sq. Pv-a 180
    • (of men) low wretched, rough, miserable, offensive Vin i.199 Vin iii.110 (kisa l. dubbaṇṇa) SN i.175 (= jiṇṇa C ‣See Kindred Sayings 320 translation “looking worn”) MN i.77 = J i.390
    • lūkhapuggala a miserable, offensive character (opposite siniddhapuggala) Vism 132 Vb-a 282
    1. ˚ājīvin leading a hard or rough life DN i.161 DN iii.44 DN iii.47 SN ii.200 AN v.190
    • ˚cīvara
    • adjective wearing a shabby robe, badly clad Vin iii.263 Mil 342 (cp. cīvara lūkha bad condition of clothes AN ii.71 = Pug 53 lūkhacīvara-dhara AN i.25)
    • ˚ppamāṇa (& ˚ika); taking unpleasantness or misery as one’s standard AN ii.71 Pug 53 (cp. PugA 229) Dhp-a iii.114 Snp-a 242 cp. rūpa-ppamāṇa
    • ˚ppasanna believing in shabbiness or mediocrity, having (bodily) wretchedness as one’s faith Vin ii.197 AN ii.71 = Pug 53
    • ˚pāpuraṇa miserably clad SN i.175 Dhp-a iv.8 9.

    Lūkhatā
    feminine
    1. unpleasantness, wretchedness, poorness, misery PugA 229
    from lūkha
    Lūkhasa
    adjective
    1. rough, harsh; miserable, selfmortifying Snp 244 (= nīrasa atta-kilamath’ ânuyutta Snp-a 287)
    from lūkha
    Lūtā
    feminine
    1. spider Abhp 621
    * Sanskrit lūtā
    Lūna
    1. cut, mowed, reaped Thag 2, 107 (˚kesī) Ja ii.365 Dāvs i.32. cp. vi˚;
    past participle of lunāti
    Lūyati
    1. : passive of lunāti (q.v.)

    Lekha
    1. writing, inscription, letter, epistle Ja vi.595 (silā˚ inscription on rock) Mhvs 5, 177 (lekhe sutvā); 27, 6; 33, 40 (˚ṁ vissajjayi) Dāvs 5, 67 (cāritta˚) Mil 42 Snp-a 164 (˚vācāka reciting), 577
    2. chips, shavings Vin ii.110 (variant reading likha)
    from likh, cp. Sanskrit lekha & lekhā
    Lekhaka
    1. one who knows the art of writing, a scribe, secretary Vin iv.8 (as a profession); iv.10 (= muddikā & gaṇakā, plural ) Mil 42
    from lekha
    Lekhaṇī
    feminine
    1. an instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil AN ii.200 Ja i.230
    from likh; cp. Epic Sanskrit lekhaṇī stencil Mbh 1, 78
    Lekhana
    neuter
    1. scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467
    from likh
    Lekhā
    feminine
    1. streak, line Vv-a 277 (= rāji); canda˚; crescent moon cp. Epic candralekhā Mbh 3, 1831
      1. Vism 168 Dhs-a 151
      • a scratch, line AN i.283 Pug 32 Ja vi.56 (lekhaṁ kaḍḍhati)

    2. writing, inscription, letter Vin iii.76 (˚ṁ chindati destroy the letter) Ja i.451 (on a phalaka) Mil 349 (˚ācariya teacher of writing) Pv-a 20 (˚paṇṇa, letter so read for likhā˚).

      • the art of writing or drawing = lipi Hemacandra
      1. writing as an art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaṭṭha) profession (sippa) Vin iv.7 and mentioned by the side of muddā and gaṇanā Vin iv.7 128 = i.77; cp. Vin iv.305
      from likh; Vedic lekhā ‣See also rekhā & lekha
    Lekhita
    1. drawn (of lines), pencilled Thag 2, 256
    past participle of lekheti
    Lekheti
    1. to (make a) scratch Ja iv.402 past participle lekhita
    2. causative of likhati or denominative of lekha
    Leḍḍu
    1. a clod of earth SN v.146 = J ii.59 (˚ṭṭhāna) Ja i.19 Ja i.175 iii.16; vi.405 Mil 255 Snp-a 222 (ākāse khitta, in simile); Vism 28 (translation “stone”), 360 (˚khaṇḍ'ādīni) 366 (containing gold), 419 Vb-a 66 (˚khaṇḍā) Vv-a 141 Pv-a 284
    • The throwing of clods (stones?) is a standing item in the infliction of punishments, where it is grouped with daṇḍa (stick) and sattha (sword), or as leḍḍu-daṇḍ'ādi, e.g. at MN i.123 DN ii.336 DN ii.338 (variant reading leṇḍu) Ja ii.77 Ja iii.16 Ja vi.350 Vism 419 Dhp-a i.399 (variant reading leṇḍu); iii.41; iv.77 Vv-a 141
    • Note. leḍḍūpaka in cuṇṇaṁ vā telaṁ vā leḍḍūpakena etc. at Dhs-a 115 read as vālaṇḍupakena, as at Vism 142
    1. ˚pāta “throw of a clod,” a certain measure of (not too far) a distance Vin iv.40 Vism 72 Dhs-a 315 (translation “a stone’s throw”)
    dialectical Sanskrit leṣṭu → *leṭṭhu → *leṭṭu → leḍḍu; also Prakrit leḍu & leṭṭhu: Pischel, § 304; cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 62
    Leḍḍuka
    1. = leḍḍu; Vism 28
    Leṇa
    1. (& lena) neuter

      1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock cell. Often enumerated with kuṭi guhā, e.g. Vin iv.48 Mil 151 Vb 251 (n.). At Vin ii.146 it is given as collective name for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya guhā. The explanation of leṇa at Vb-a 366 runs as follows “pabbataṁ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuḍḍaṁ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaṁ,” i.e. opportunity for sitting & lying made by digging (a cave in a mountain or by erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make the rest of it habitable) cp. Vin i.206 = iii.248 (pabbhāraṁ sodhāpeti leṇaṁ kattukāmo) Mhvs 16, 12; 28, 31 sq. (n) Mil 200 (mahā˚)
      2. refuge, shelter, (figuratively) salvation (sometimes in sense of nibbāna. In this meaning often combined with tāṇa & saraṇa; , e.g. at DN i.95 SN iv.315 (maṁ-leṇa refuge with me; + maṁtāṇa; iv.372 (= nibbāna) AN i.155f. (n) Ja ii.253 DN-a i.232 cp. Vin iii.155
      3. leṇ'atthaṁ for refuge Vin ii.164 (n) Ja i.94-aleṇa without a refuge Ps i.127; ii.238; Pv ii.25 (= asaraṇa Pv-a 80)
        1. ˚gavesin ‣Seeking shelter or refuge Ja ii.407 = iv.346 -guhā a mountain cave Ja iii.511
        • ˚dvāra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism 38 Dhp-a iii.39
        • ˚pabbhāra “cave-slope,” cave in a mountain Dhp-a iv.170
        * Sanskrit layana, from; in meaning “to hide,” cp. Prakrit leṇa
    Lepa
    1. smearing, plastering, coating over Vin iv.303 (bāhira˚) Ja ii.25 (mattikā˚)
    2. (figuratively) plaster, i.e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in taṇhā˚ the stain of craving, & diṭṭhi˚; of speculation Nd1 55 Nd2 271iii
    3. Note. lasagata at AN ii.165 read with variant reading as lepa-gata, i.e. sticky
    4. cp. ā˚, pa˚
    from lip ‣See limpati; cp. Classic Sanskrit lepa stain, dirt
    Lepana
    neuter
    1. smearing, plastering, anointing Vin ii.172 (kuḍḍa˚) AN iv.107 (vāsana˚), 111 (identical) Ja ii.117 cp. abhi˚, ā˚, pa˚
    from lip
    Lepeti
    1. ‣See limpati
    Leyya
    adjective neuter
    1. to be licked or sipped; neuter mucilaginous food (opposite peyya liquid) AN iv.394 (+ peyya) Mil 2 (identical)
    2. gerundive of lih ‣See lihati
    Lesa

    1. sham, pretext, trick Vin iii.169 (where ten lesas are enumerated, viz. jāti˚, nāma˚ gotta˚, linga˚, āpatti˚, patta˚, cīvara˚, upajjhāya˚ ācariya˚, senāsana˚) Ja ii.11 Ja vi.402
    • lesa-kappa pretext Vin ii.166 Vv 8443 (= kappiya-lesa Vv-a 348) Thag 1, 941 DN-a i.103
    cp. Sanskrit leśa particle; as Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. points out, it occurs in Sanskrit also in the Pali meaning at Mbh v.33, 5 although this is not given in BR As “particle only at Dhtp 444 in definition of lisati
    Lehati
    1. ‣See lihati
    Loka
    world, primarily “visible world,” then in general as “space or sphere of creation, with various degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified in the comprehensive sense of “universe.” Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or various other worlds, thus, “man, mankind people, beings."-Loka is not a fixed & def term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to the view applied to the object or category in question Thus a translation of “sphere, plane, division, order” interchanges with “world.” Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of its "regional” meaning as contrasted with "applied” meaning. The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka = lujjati).
    1. -1. Universe: the distinctions between the universe (cp. cakkavāḷa) as a larger whole and the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by; sabba-loka (e.g. SN i.12 SN iv.127 SN iv.312 SN v.132 Iti 122 Mhvs 1, 44; cp. sabbāvanta loka DN i.251 DN iii.224) otherwise even the smaller loka comprises various realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samāraka, sabrahmaka, or the world with its devas, its Māra and its Brahmā, e.g. SN i.160 SN i.168 SN i.207 SN ii.170 SN iii.28, 59; iv.158; v.204 AN i.259f. ii.24 sq.; iii.341; iv.56, 173; v.50 Iti 121 Nd1 447 (on Snp 956), to which is usually added sassamaṇa-brāhmaṇī pajā (e.g. DN i.250 ‣See loci s.v. pajā). With this cp. Dhp 45 where the divisions are paṭhavī, Yamaloka sadevaka (loka), which are explained at Dhp-a i.334 by paṭhavī = attabhāva; Yamaloka = catubbidha apāyaloka; sadevaka = manussaloka devalokena saddhiṁ-The universe has its evolutional periods: saṁvaṭṭati and vivaṭṭati DN ii.109f. The Buddha has mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathāgatena abhisambuddho Iti 121 On loka, lokadhātu (= cosmos) and cakkavāḷa cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. 2. Regional meaning.-(a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The antānantikā (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the world) are mentioned as a sect at DN i.22 sq Discussions as to whether loka is sassata or antavā are found e.g. at MN i.426 MN i.484 MN ii.233 SN iii.182 SN iii.204 SN iv.286f. AN ii.41 AN v.31 AN v.186f.; Ps i.123, 151 sq. Vb 340 Dhs 1117 Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.) at DN iii.137 cp. SN ii.19f. cp. also the long and interesting discussion of loka as suñña at SN iv.54f.; Ps ii.177 sq. Nd2 680-as well as MN ii.68 (upanīyati loko addhuvo, and “attāṇo loko, assakoloko” etc.); “lokassa anto” is lit unattainable: AN ii.50 = SN i.62 SN iv.93 but the Arahant is “lok'antagū,” cp. AN iv.430
    • As regards their order in space (or “plane”) there are various groupings of various worlds, the evidently popular one being that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the world of man (which is “tiriyaṁ vâpi majjhe”): Nd2 550. The world of men is as ayaṁ loko contrasted with the beyond or paro loko : DN iii.181 SN iv.348f. AN i.269 AN iv.226 Snp 779 (n'āsiṁsati lokaṁ imaṁ parañ ca); or as idhaloka DN iii.105 The definition of ayaṁ loko at Nd1 60 is given as: sak'attabhāva, saka-rūpa-vedanā etc., ajjhatt āyatanāni, manussa-loka, kāmadhātu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhāva, para-rūpavedanā, bāhir'āyatanāni, devaloka, rūpa-& arūpadhātu-The rise and decay of this world is referred to as; samudaya and atthaṅgama at SN ii.73 SN iii.135 SN iv.86 AN v.107
    • cp. DN iii.33 (attā ca loko ca); Mhvs 1, 5 (lokaṁ dukkhā pamocetuṁ); 28, 4 (loko 'yaṁ pīḷito) Pv-a 1 (vijjā-caraṇa-sampannaṁ yena nīyanti lokato)-Other divisions of various kinds of “planes” are e. g deva˚ AN i.115 AN i.153 AN iii.414f.; Brahma˚ Vb 421 Mhvs 19, 45; Yama˚ Dhp 44 SN i.34
    • nara˚ Mhvs 5, 282 ‣See also each sep. head-word, also peta˚ & manussa˚; . The division at Nd1 550 is as follows: niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚, manussa˚, deva˚ (= material) upon which follow khandha˚, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ (= immaterial). Similarly at Nd1 29 where apāya˚; takes the place of niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚
    • Another threefold division is saṅkhāra˚, satta˚, okāsa˚; at Vism 204, with explains : “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā” ti sankhāraloka; “sassato loko ti vā asassato loko” ti sattaloka; “yāvatā candima-suriyā pariharanti disā 'bhanti virocamānā” etc. (= M i.328 AN i.227 cp. J i.132) = okāsaloka. The same explanation in detail at Snp-a 442
    • Another as kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚; ‣See under rūpa; another as kilesa˚, bhava˚, indriya˚; at Nett 11, 19. cp. sankhāra-loka Vb-a 456 dasa lokadhātuyo ‣See below SN i.26
    • Ordinary & applied meaning.; -(a) division of the world, worldly things SN i.1 SN i.24 (loke visattikā attachment to this world; opp sabba-loke anabhirati SN v.132)
    • loke in this world among men, here DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke) Iti 78 (loke uppajjati) DN-a i.173 (identical) Vb 101 (yaṁ loke piya-rūpaṁ etc.); Pv ii.113 (= idaṁ Commentary ); Kp-a 15, 215 ‣See also the different definitions of loke at Nd2 552
    • loka collectively “one, man”: kicchaṁ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca, etc. DN ii.30 Also “people”: Lanka-loka people of Ceylon Mhvs 19, 85; cp. jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use in compounds. (˚-as “usual, every day, popular, common” ‣See e. g ˚āyata, ˚vajja, ˚vohāra
    • (b) “thing of the world, material element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of “materiality”). This category of loka is referred to at Vb 193 which is explained at Vb-a 220 as follows: “ettha yo ayaṁ ajjhatt’ ādi bhedo kāyo pariggahīto so eva idha-loko nāma.” In this sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1
    1. -12 and No. 18); they are given at Nd2 551 (under lokantagū Snp 1133) as follows (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedanā; (4) āhārā; (5) upādāna-kkhandhā (6) ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (their rise & decay as “lokassa samudaya & atthangama” at SN iv.87); (7 viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo; (8) loka-dhammā; (9) satt'āvāsā (10) upakkilesā; (11) kāmabhavā; (12) āyatanāni (18) dhātuyo. They are repeated at Ps i.122 = 174 with (1) as “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā; (2) nāmañ ca rūpañ ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism 205 and at Snp-a 442 as at Ps i.122. cp. the similar view at SN iv.95: one perceives the world (“materiality” loka-saññin and loka-mānin, proud of the world) with the six senses. This is called the “loka” in the logic (vinaya) of the ariyā
    • A few similes with loka ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131
    1. ˚akkhāyikā (feminine, scil. kathā talk or speculation about (origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy ‣See lokāyata and cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.14 Vin i.188 DN i.8 MN i.513 Mil 316 DN-a i.90
    2. ˚agga chief of the world epithet of the Buddha Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.11)
    3. ˚anta the end (spatial) of the world AN ii.49 (na ca appatvā lokantaṁ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṁ)
    4. ˚antagū one who has reached the end of the world (and of all things worldly) epithet of an Arahant AN ii.6 AN ii.49f. Iti 115 Snp 1133 Nd2 551
    5. ˚antara the space between the single worlds Ja i.44 (v.253: Avīcimhi na uppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca)
    6. ˚antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i.e. cakkavāl antaresu Ja i.76), 8,000 yojanas in extent, pitch dark which were filled with light when Gotama became the Buddha Ja i.76 Vb-a 4 Vism 207 (lokantariya˚) Snp-a 59 (˚vāsa life in the l. niraya); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit lokântarikā Divy 204 (andhās tamaso 'ndhakāra-tamisrā) -ādhipa lord or ruler of the world AN i.150
    7. ˚ādhipateyya “rule of the world,” dependence on public opinion, influence of material things on man, one of the 3 ādhipateyyas (atta˚, loka˚, dhamma˚) DN iii.220 Vism 14
    8. ˚ānukampā sympathy with the world of men cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit lokânugraha Divy 124f.
      1. DN iii.211 Iti 79
      • ˚āmisa worldly gain, bait of the flesh MN i.156 MN ii.253 Thag 2, 356
      • ˚āyata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy, or as Rhys Davids (Dialogues of the Buddha i.171) puts it: “name of a branch of Brahman learning, probably Nature-lore”; later worked into a quâsi system of “casuistry, sophistry. Franke, Dīgha translation 19, translates as “logisch beweisende Naturerklärung” (see the long note on this page, and cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.166

        1. -172 for detail of lokāyata). It is much the same as lok-akkhāy(ika) or popular philosophy. DN i.11 DN i.88 Vin ii.139 Snp p. 105 (= vitaṇḍa-vādasattha Snp-a 447 as at DN-a i.247) Mil 4 Mil 10 Mil 178 AN i.163 AN i.166 AN iii.223 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit lokāyata Divy 630 Divy 633 and lokāyatika ibid. 619 ‣See also Kern’s remarks at Toevoegselen s.v
        2. ˚āyatika (brāhmaṇa) one who holds the view of lokāyata or popular philosophy SN ii.77 (translationKindred Sayings 53: a Brahmin “wise in world-lore”) Mil 178 Ja vi.486 (na seve lokāyatikaṁ; explained as “anatthanissitaṁ … vitaṇḍa-sallāpaṁ lokāyatika-vādaṁ na seveyya,” thus more like “sophistry” or casuistry) -issara lord of the world Sdhp 348
        3. ˚uttara ‣See under lokiya
        4. ˚cintā thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation SN v.447 AN ii.80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyāni or thoughts not to be thought out buddha-visaya, jhāna-visaya, kamma-vipāka, l-c.). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit laukika citta Divy 63 Divy 77 etc
        5. ˚dhammā (plural common practice, things of the world, worldly conditions SN iii.139f. Snp 268 (explanation loke dhammā; yāva lokappavatti tāva-anivattikā dhammā ti vuttaṁ hoti Kp-a 153, cp. Ja iii.468) Mil 146 Usually comprising a set of eight, viz. lābha, alābha, yaso, ayaso, nindā pasaṁsā, sukhaṁ, dukkhaṁ DN iii.260 AN iv.156f.v.53 Nd2 55; Ps i.22, 122 Vb 387 Nett 162 Dhp-a ii.157
        6. ˚dhātu constituent or unit of the Universe “world-element”; a world, sphere; another name for cakkavāla. Dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu the system of the 10,000 worlds Vin i.12 AN i.227

          • DN iii.114 Pv ii.961 Kvu 476; Vism 206 sq. Vb 336 Nd1 356 (with the stages from one to fifty lokadhātu’s, upon which follow sahassī cūḷanikā l-dh.; dvisahassī majjhimikā; tisahassī; mahāsahassī) Ja i.63 Ja i.212 Mil 237 Vb-a 430 436 ‣See also cūḷanikā
          • ˚nātha saviour of the world epithet of the Buddha Snp 995 Vism 201, 234 Vv-a 165 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 287
          • ˚nāyaka guide or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Snp 991 Ap 20; Mhvs 7, 1 Mil 222
          • ˚nirodha destruction of the world Iti 121 (opposite ˚samudaya)
          • ˚pāla (˚devatā) guardian (governor) of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (= Vessavaṇa), Dhataraṭṭha, Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka alias the 4 mahārājāno Pv i.42 Ja i.48 (announce the
          • future birth of a Buddha)
          • ˚byūha “world-array, plural byūhā (devā) name of a class of devas Ja i.47 Vism 415 (kāmâvacara-deva’s)
          • ˚mariyādā the boundary of the world Vv-a 72
          • ˚vajja common sins Mil 266 Kp-a 190
          • ˚ vaṭṭa “world-round,” i.e. saṁsāra (opposite vivaṭṭa = nibbāna) Nett 113, 119 ‣See also vaṭṭa
          • ˚vidu knowing the universe, Lp. of the Buddha DN iii.76 SN i.62 SN v.197 SN v.343 AN ii.48 Snp p. 103 Vv 3426 Pug 57 explained in full at Snp-a 442 and Vism 204 sq
          • ˚vivaraṇa unveiling of the universe, apocalypse, revelation Vism 392 (when humans ‣See the devas etc.)
          • ˚vohāra common or general distinction, popular logic, ordinary way of speaking Snp-a 383 466 Vb-a 164
          cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning “space, open space.” For etymology ‣See rocati. To the etymology feeling of the Pāli hearer loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in popular etymology of rūpa and rujati. As regards the latter the etymology runs “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati” SN iv.52 cp. Nd2 550 and loka = lujjana Dhs-a 47 308 ‣See lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok locative in sense of dassana
    Lokiya
    1. (& lokika) adjective

      1. (ordinarily) “belonging to the world,” i.e
      2. (a) world-wide, covering the whole world, famed, widely known Thag 1, 554 Ja vi.198 (b) (—˚) belonging to the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika Pv i.62 (Yama˚)
      3. (c) common, general worldly Vism 89 (samādhi) Dhp-a iv.3 (˚mahājana Pv-a 131 (˚parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (˚sabhāva) ‣See also below 3
      4. (special meaning) worldly mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara has two meanings-viz. (a) in ordinary sense the highest of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga etc.), often applied to Arahantship, e.g. lokuttaradāyajja inheritance of Arahantship Ja i.91 Dhp-a i.117 ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbāna MN ii.181
      5. plural l. dhammā MN iii.115
      6. (b) (in later canonical literature) beyond these worlds, supra-mundane, transcendental, spiritual In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttarā dhammā (viz. the 4 stages of the Path sotāpatti etc., with the 4 phala’s, and the addition of nibbāna), e.g. Dhs 1094 Mrs. Rhys Davids tries to compromise between the two meanings by giving lokuttara the translation “engaged upon the higher ideal” (Dhs. tsrl. introduction p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of a one-sided philosophical appearance. On term cp. Compendium 913
      7. lokiya (in meaning “mundane”) is contrasted with lokuttara (“transcendental”) at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. at Ps ii.166 Dhs 505 1093, 1446 Vb 17f. 93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271 322; Kvu 222, 515, 602 Pug 62 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 41 sq., 52 sq. 275; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 304, 324; Nett 10, 54, 67, 77, 111, 161 sq. 189 sq. Mil 236 Mil 294 (lokika), 390; Vism 10, 85, 438 DN-a i.331 Dhs-a 47f. 213 Vb-a 128 373 Dhp-a i.76 (lokika); ii.150; iii.272; iv.35.

        from loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning “worldly, usual”
    Locaka
    adjective
    1. one who pulls out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚, habit of cert ascetics) MN i.308 (identical)
    from loc. causative of luñc; cp. Sanskrit luñcaka
    Locana1
    1. the eye; adjective (—˚) having eyes. (of …) Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚) Pv-a 57 Pv-a 90 (pingala˚)
    from loc or lok to ‣See; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766:; loc = dassana
    Locana2
    neuter
    1. pulling, tearing out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚) AN i.296 Pug 55
    from loc. causative of luñcati
    Loceti
    1. ‣See luñcati
    Loṭana
    neuter
    1. shaking, upsetting Dhtm 117. cp. vi˚
    luṭ; , cp. * Sanskrit lolana & viloḷana
    Loṇa
    neuter
    1. salt; as adjective, salty, of salt, alkaline- Vin i.202 (loṇāni bhesajjāni alkaline medicine among which are given sāmuddaṁ kāḷaloṇaṁ sindhavaṁ ubbhidaṁ bilaṁ as various kinds of salt), 220 = 243 (as flavouring, with tela, taṇḍula & khādaniya) AN i.210 250; iv.108 Mil 63 Dhp-a iv.176 (in simile ‣See below) Vv-a 98 100, 184 (aloṇa sukkha-kummāsa, unsalted) On loṇa in similes cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131
    1. ˚ambila acid and salt Ja i.505 Ja ii.171 Ja ii.394
    • ˚odaka salt water Ja vi.37 Vv-a 99 (˚udaka)
    • ˚kāra salt-maker Vin i.350 (˚gāma) AN ii.182 (˚dāraka) Ja vi.206 (kara) Mil 331
    • ˚ghaṭa a pitcher with salt SN ii.276 ‣See also A
    • past participle to Kp-a 68 (in Snp Index 870, 871) on Vism passage with loṇaghaṭaka
    • ˚dhūpana salt-spicing Vb-a 311 (viya sabba vyañjanesu; i.e. the strongest among all flavourings)
    • ˚phala a crystal of (natural salt phala for phaṭa = *sphaṭa, cp. phalaka
      1. AN i.250 (in simile)
      2. ˚rasa alkaline taste AN iv.199 AN iv.203
      • ˚sakkhara a salt crystal (cp. ˚phala), a (solid) piece of (natural) salt SN ii.276 (in simile, cp. AN i.250) Snp-a 222 (aggimhi pakkhitta l-s., in the same simile at Dhp-a iv.176: uddhane pakkhitta-loṇa)
      • ˚sakkharikā a piece of salt-crystal, used as a caustic for healing wounds Vin i.206
      • ˚sovīraka salted sour gruel Vin i.210 Vv-a 99 Lonika & Loniya;
      cp. Sanskrit lavaṇa, for which ‣See also lavaṇa. The Prakrit form is loṇa
    Loṇika
    Loṇiya;
    adjective
    1. salty, alkaline Dhs 629
    • loṇiya-teliya prepared with salt & oil Ja iii.522 iv.71
    • aloṇika unsalted 426 (˚aka) Vv-a 184 Ja i.228 iii.409
    from loṇa
    Lodda
    1. name of a tree Ja v.405 Ja vi.497
    cp. * Sanskrit rodhra; on sound changes ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar 44, 622
    Lopa
    1. taking away, cutting off; as technical term g. apocope, elision (of the final letter) Vb-a 164 (sabba-loka-vohāra˚) Snp-a 12 303, 508 Vv-a 79 often in anunāsika˚; dropping of (final) Snp-a 410 Vv-a 154 275. At SN v.342 read piṇḍiy 'ālopena for piṇḍiyā lopena
    • cp. ālopa, nillopa, vilopa vilopiya
    from lup ‣See lumpati
    Lobha
    1. covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism 468 as “lubbhanti tena, sayaṁ vā lubbhati, lubbhana-mattam eva vā taṁ,” with several comparisons following. Often found in triad of lobha, dosa, moha (greed, anger bewilderment, forming the three principles of demerit ‣See kusala-mūla), e.g. at AN iv.96 Iti 83 84; Vism 116 Duka-Paṭṭhāna 9, 18 sq ‣See dosa & moha;
    • DN iii.214 DN iii.275 SN i.16 SN i.43 SN i.63 SN i.123 (bhava˚); v.88 AN i.64 (˚kkhaya) 160 (visama˚), cp. DN iii.70f.; ii.67 Snp 367 Snp 371 Snp 537 (˚kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (˚pāpa) Nd1 15 16, 261 Ja iv.11 (kodha, dosa, l.) Dhs 982 1059 Vb 208 341 381, 402; Nett 13, 27; Vism 103 Vb-a 18 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 89 (+ dosa), 102 Vv-a 14 Sdhp 52 (˚moha), 266-alobha disinterestedness DN iii.214 Dhs 32
    1. ˚dhammā (plural ) affection of greed, things belonging to greed;
    2. adjective (of) greedy character MN i.91 MN iii.37 DN i.224 DN i.230 SN iv.111 AN iii.350 Ja iv.11
    3. ˚mūla the root of greed Vism 454 (eightfold; with dosa-mūla moha-mūla)
    4. cp. Vedic & Epic Sanskrit lobha; from lubh ‣See lubbhati
    Lobhana
    neuter
    1. being greedy Thag 2, 343 (= lobh’ uppāda Thag-a 240). Lobhaniya (iya, eyya)
    from lobha
    Lobhaniya (˚īya, ˚eyya)
    adjective
    1. belonging to greed “of the nature of greed” causing greed Iti 84 (˚eyya) ‣See rajaniya
    2. desirable Mil 361 (paduma)
    gerundive formation from lobha
    Loma

    neuter

    1. Vin ii.5 (= pannalomo hoti Commentary ); iii.183 MN i.442 cp. anu˚, paṭi˚, vi˚
    1. ˚kūpa a pore of the skin Ja i.67 Kp-a 51, 63 Snp-a 155 (where given as 99,000) Vism 195 (identical)
    2. ˚padmaka a kind of plant Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain; variant reading lodda˚) -sundarī feminine beautiful with hairs (on her body) Ja v.424 (Kurangavī l.; explained on p. 430 as “roma-rājiyā maṇḍita udarā”)
    3. ˚haṁsa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill DN i.49 AN iv.311f. (sa˚) Snp 270 Vb 367 Mil 22 Vism 143 DN-a i.150
    4. ˚haṁsana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Snp 681 Ja iv.355 (abbhuta +); Pv iii.93; iv.35 Mil 1 Mhvs 17, 55 (abbhuta +)
    5. ˚haṭṭha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded DN i.95 SN v.270 Snp p. 15 Mil 23 Snp-a 155 cp. haṭṭha-loma above
    6. cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late Pali form roma only at Ja v.430 Abhp 175, 259; Sdhp 119 the hair of the body (whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) DN ii.18 (ekeka˚, uddhagga˚, in characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) SN ii.257 (asi˚, usu˚, satti˚ etc.) AN ii.114 Vin iii.106 (usu˚ etc.) Snp 385 Ja i.273 (khaggo lomesu allīyi) Vb-a 57 Dhp-a i.126 Dhp-a ii.17 (˚gaṇanā) Thag-a 199 Vv-a 324 (sūkara˚) Pv-a 152 Pv-a 157; Sdhp 104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 ākāras of the body (Kh iii.;
    7. plural lomā) is found at Vism 250, 353 Vb-a 233 Kp-a 42, 43

      • aloma hairless Ja vi.457 puthu˚ having broad hair or fins name of a fish Ja iv.466 Vv 4411
      • haṭṭha˚ with hairs erect, excited Mhvs 15, 33
      • On loma in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131
      • lomaṁ pāteti to let one’s hair drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opposite to horripilation [pāteti formed from pat after wrong etymology of panna in panna-loma “with drooping hairs,” which was taken as a by-form of patita ‣See panna-loma
    Lomaka
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having hair, in compound caturaṅga˚; having fourfold hair (i.e. on the different parts of the body? Vin iv.173 It may refer to the 5 dermatoid constituents of the body ‣See pañcaka & thus be characteristic of outward appearance. We do not exactly ‣See how the term; caturaṅga is used here
      • cp. anulomika
      from loma
    Lomasa
    adjective
    1. hairy, covered with hair, downy, soft MN i.305 Pv i.92 At Ja iv.296
    • lomasā is explained as pakkhino, i.e. birds; reading however doubtful (variant readings lomahaṁsa & lomassā)
    cp. Vedic romaśa
    Lomin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having hair, in compounds. ekanta˚ & uddha˚; , of (couch-) covers or (bed) spreads: being made of hair altogether or having hair only on top Vin i.192 = ii.163 DN i.7 cp. DN-a i.87 Lola (Lola)
      from loma
    Lola (Loḷa)
    adjective
    1. wavering, unsteady, agitated; longing, eager greedy SN iv.111 Snp 22 Snp 922 Ja i.49 (Buddha-mātā lolā na hoti), 111, 210, 339 (dhana-loḷa); ii.319 (˚manussa) iii.7 Pug 65 Nd1 366; Dāvs iv.44 Mil 300
    • alola not greedy, not distracted (by desire), self-controlled SN v.148 Snp 65
    1. ˚bhava greediness, covetousness Thag-a 16
    from luḷ ‣See luḷati; cp. Epic & Classic Sanskrit lola
    Lolatā
    feminine
    1. longing, eagerness, greed Mil 93 Snp-a 35 (āhāra˚)
    from lola
    Lolita
    1. agitated, shaken Thag 2, 373 (= ālolita Thag-a 252)
    past participle of loleti
    Lolupa
    adjective
    1. covetous greedy, self-indulgent Dāvs ii.73. ; not greedy, temperate Snp 165 cp. nil˚;. feminine lolupā as name of a plant at Ja vi.537
    2. from lup, a base of lumpati but influenced by lubh, probably also by lola ‣See lumpati
    Loluppa
    neuter
    1. greediness, covetousness, self-indulgence, desire; in the language of the Abhidhamma often synonym with jappā or taṇhā. At Dhs-a 365 loluppa is treated as an adjective & explained at “punappuna visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatī ti,” i.e. one who tears again & again at the object (or as; Expositor ii.470: repeated plundering, hauling along in the fields of sense)-J i.340, 429 Dhs-a 365 Vism 61; & with exegetical synonyms; loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaṁ at Dhs 1059 1136
    abstract from lolupa
    Loleti
    1. to make shake or unsteady AN iii.188 (khobheti +). past participle lolita
    2. causative from luḷ ‣See luḷati
    Loḷī
    1. ‣See āloḷi
    Loha
    neuter
    1. metal, especially copper, brass or bronze It is often used as a general term & the individual application is not always sharply defined. Its comprehensiveness is evident from the classification of; loha at Vb-a 63 where it is said lohan ti jātilohaṁ, vijāti˚ kittima˚, pisāca˚; or natural metal, produced metal artificial (i.e. alloys), & metal from the Pisāca district Each is subdivided as follows:; jāti˚; = ayo, sajjhaṁ suvaṇṇaṁ, tipu, sīsaṁ, tambalohaṁ, vekantakalohaṁ vijāti˚; = nāga-nāsika˚; kittima˚; = kaṁsalohaṁ, vaṭṭa˚ ārakūṭaṁ; pisāca˚; = morakkhakaṁ, puthukaṁ, malinakaṁ capalakaṁ, selakaṁ, āṭakaṁ, bhallakaṁ, dūsilohaṁ The description ends “Tesu pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṁ visuṁ vuttān’ eva (i.e. the first category are severally spoken of in the Canon). Tambalohaṁ vekantakan ti imehi pana dvīhi jātilohehi saddhiṁ sesaṁ sabbam pi idha lohan ti veditabbaṁ."-On loha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131. cp. AN iii.16 = SN v.92 (five alloys of gold: ayo, loha, tipu, sīsaṁ, sajjhaṁ) Ja v.45 (asi˚) Mil 161 (suvaṇṇam pi jātivantaṁ lohena bhijjati) Pv-a 44 Pv-a 95 (tamba˚ = loha), 221 (tatta-loha-secanaṁ pouring out of boiling metal, one of the five ordeals in Niraya)
    1. ˚kaṭāha a copper (brass) receptacle Vin ii.170
    • ˚kāra a metal worker, coppersmith, blacksmith Mil 331
    • ˚kumbhī an iron cauldron Vin ii.170 Also name of a purgatory Ja iii.22 Ja iii.43 Ja iv.493 v.268 Snp-a 59 480 Sdhp 195
    • ˚guḷa an iron (or metal) ball AN iv.131 Dhp 371 (mā ˚ṁ gilī pamatto; cp. Dhp-a iv.109)
    • ˚jāla a copper (i.e. wire) netting Pv-a 153
    • ˚thālaka a copper bowl Nd1 226
    • ˚thāli a bronze kettle Dhp-a i.126
    • ˚pāsāda “copper terrace,” brazen palace, name of a famous monastery at Anurādhapura in Ceylon Vism 97 DN-a i.131 Mhvs passim -piṇḍa an iron ball Snp-a 225
    • ˚bhaṇḍa copper (brass) ware Vin ii.135
    • ˚maya made of copper, brazen Snp 670 Pv ii.64
    • ˚māsa a copper bean Nd1 448 (suvaṇṇa-channa)
    • ˚māsaka a small copper coin Kp-a 37 (jatu-māsaka, dāru-māsaka +) Dhs-a 318
    • ˚rūpa a bronze statue Mhvs 36, 31
    • ˚salākā a bronze gong-stick Vism 283
    cp. Vedic loha, of Indogermanic *(e)reudh “red” ‣See also rohita & lohita
    Lohatā
    feminine
    1. being a metal, in (suvaṇṇassa) aggalohatā the fact of gold being the best metal Vv-a 13
    abstract from loha
    Lohita
    adjective neuter
    1. adjective red: rarely by itself (e.g. MN ii.17), usually in compounds. e.g. ˚abhijāti the red species (q.v.) AN iii.383
    2. ˚kasiṇa the artifice of red DN iii.268 AN i.41 Dhs 203 Vism 173; ˚candana red sandal (unguent) Mil 191 Otherwise rohita
    3. neuter blood; described in detail as one of the 32 ākāras at Kp-a 54 sq.; Vism 261, 360 Vb-a 245
    4. Vin i.203 (āmaka˚), 205 (˚ṁ mocetuṁ) AN iv.135 (saṭṭhi-mattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ uṇhaṁ l. mukhato uggañchi; cp. the similar passage at Mil 165) Snp 433 Pv i.67 i.91 (explained as ruhira Pv-a 44); Vism 261 (two kinds; sannicita˚; and saṁsaraṇa˚;), 409 (the colour of the heartblood in relation to states of mind) Vb-a 66 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 110
      1. ˚akkha having red (blood-shot) eyes (of snakes yakkhas) Vv.52; 2 (cp. Vv-a 224: ratta-nayanā; yakkhānaṁ hi nettāni ati-lohitāni honti) Ja vi.180
      • ˚uppāda (the crime of) wounding AN Tathāgata, one of the anantariya-kammas Vb-a 427 cp. Tathāgatassa lohitaṁ uppādeti Mil 214
      • ˚uppādaka one who sheds the blood of an Arahant Vin i.89 136, 320; v.222 -kumbhi a receptacle for blood Ud 17 (with reference to the womb)
      • ˚doṇi a bloody trough Vism 358 Vb-a 62
      • ˚pakkhandikā (or ˚pakkhandik’ ābādha) bloody diarrhoea dysentery MN i.316 DN ii.127 Ud 82 Ja ii.213 Mil 134 Mil 175 Dhp-a iii.269
      • ˚homa a sacrifice of blood DN i.9 DN-a i.93
      cp. Vedic lohita & rohita ‣See also Pali rohita “red”
    Lohitaka
    adjective
    1. red MN ii.14 AN iv.306 AN iv.349 Ap. 1 Dhs 247 617. —˚upadhāna a red pillow DN i.7 AN i.137 AN iii.50 AN iv.94 AN iv.231 AN iv.394
    2. ˚sāli red rice Mil 252
    3. bloody Pv i.78 (pūti˚ gabbha) Vism 179, 194
    from lohita
    Lohitaṅka
    1. a ruby AN iv.199 AN iv.203 Ap 2 Vv 363 Vv-a 304 ‣See masāragalla for further refs. Note. The word is not found in Vedic and Classical Sanskrit a later term for “ruby” is lohitaka. In the older language lohitāṅga denotes the planet Mars
    lohita + anka

    Ḷīyati
    is given at Dhtp 361 as a variant of ḍī to fly ‣See ḍeti, and explained as “ākāsa-gamana.” Similarly at Dhtm 586 as “vehāsa-gamana.”
    1. V

    V

    -V-
    1. euphonic (sandhi-) consonant, historically justified after u (uv from older v), as in su-v-ānaya easy to bring (SN i.124); hence transferred to i, as in ti-v-aṅgika threefold (Dhs 161), and ti-v-aṅgula three inches wide (Vism 152, 408); perhaps also in anu-v-icca ‣See anuvicca
    Va1
    1. the syllable “va” Kp-a 109 (with reference to ending ˚vā in Bhagavā, which Buddhaghosa expls as “va-kāraṁ dīghaṁ katvā,” i.e. a lengthening of va) Snp-a 76 ‣See below va3
    Va2
    indeclinable
    1. like, like as, as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Mil 422): Iti 84 (tālapakkaṁ va bandhanā), 90 (chavālātaṁ va nassati) Dhp 28 Snp 38 (vaṁso visālo va ‣See Commentary explanation under va3) Pv i.81 (ummatta-rūpo va; = viya Pv-a 39); i.116 (naḷo va chinno) Mil 72 (chāyā va anapāyinī) Ja iii.189 (kusamuddo va ghosavā); iv.139 (aggîva suriyo va) Dhp-a iii.175
    the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri causâ
    Va3
    indeclinable
    1. even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly Dhp 136 (aggi-daḍḍho va tappati) Ja i.138 Ja i.149 (so pi suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇo va ahosi) 207 Snp-a 76 (vakāro avadhāraṇ’ attho eva -kāro vā ayaṁ, sandhi-vasen’ ettha e-kāro naṭṭho: wrong at this passage Snp 38 for va2 = iva!) Pv-a 3 (eko va putto), 4 (ñātamattā va)
    for eva, after long vowels
    Va4
    1. is (metrically) shortened form of , as found e.g. Dhp 195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va-va either-or: Dhp 108 (yiṭṭhaṁ va hutaṁ va), 138 (ābādhaṁ va cittakkhepaṁ va pāpuṇe)
    Vaṁsa
    1. a bamboo Snp 38 (vaṁso visālo va; vaṁso explained at Nd2 556 as “veḷugumba,” at Snp-a 76 as “veḷu”), ibid. (˚kaḷīra)

      1. J vi.57; Vism 255 (˚kaḷīra); Kp-a 50 (identical)
      • race lineage, family AN ii.27 (ariya˚ of noble family) SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚) Ja i.89 Ja i.139 Ja iv.390 (caṇḍāla˚); v.251 (uju˚); Mhvs 4, 5 (pitu-ghātaka-vaṁso a parricidal race)

    2. tradition, hereditary custom, usage, reputation Mil 148 (ācariya˚), 190 (Tathāgatānaṁ); Kp-a 12 (Buddha˚); Dpvs 18, 3 (saddhamma˚-kovidā therā)-vaṁsaṁ nāseti to break family tradition Ja v.383 vaṁsaṁ ucchindati identical Ja v.383 or upacchindati Ja iv.63 opposite patiṭṭhāpeti to establish the reputation Ja v.386

      • dynasty Mhvs 36, 61 (kassa v. ṭhassati)

    3. a bamboo flute, fife Mil 31 Vv-a 210

      • a certain game, at DN i.6 in enumeration of pastimes and tricks (caṇḍālavaṁsa-dhopana), a passage which shows an old corruption Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.84 takes each word separately and explainsvaṁsa as “veṇuṁ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṁ” (i.e. a game consisting in raising a bamboo; is it climbing a pole? cp. vaṁsa-ghatikā “a kind of game” Divy 475) against Dialogues of the Buddha i.9 “acrobatic feats by Caṇḍālas.” cp. J iv.390 in same passage. Franke Dīgha translation has “bamboo-tricks”; his conjecture as “vaṁsa-dhamanaṁ,” playing the bamboo pipe (cp. Mil 31: “vaṁsadhamaka”), as oldest reading is to be pointed out. On vaṁsa in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 134
      1. ˚āgata come down from father to son, hereditary Mhvs 23, 85
      2. ˚ānupālaka guarding tradition Sdhp 474 (ariya˚)
      3. ˚ānurakkhaka preserving the lineage, carrying on the tradition Ja iv.444 Vism 99 (+ paveṇi-pālaka) Dhp-a iii.386
      • ˚coraka name of a certain kind of reed (cp coraka: plant used for perfume) Ja v.406 (Commentary for veḷuka) -ja belonging to a race Mhvs 1, 1 (suddha˚)
      • ˚ñña born of good family AN ii.27
      • ˚dhara upholding tradition Mil 164
      • ˚dharaṇa identical Mil 226
      • ˚nalaka bamboo reed Kp-a 52, 59 (with note Snp Index p. 870: naḷaka)-nāḷa identical Mil 102
      • ˚rāga the colour of bamboo, a term for the veḷuriya gem Ja iv.141
      • ˚vaṇṇa the veḷuriya gem Abhp 491
      Vedic vaṁśa reed, bamboo (R.V.)
    Vaṁsika
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. descended from, belonging to a family (of) SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚)
      from vaṁsa
    Vaka1
    1. wolf, only in poetry Snp 201 Ja i.336 Ja ii.450 Ja v.241 Ja v.302
    Vedic vṛka, Indogermanic *ṷI̊qṷo = Latin lupus, Lithuanian vilkas, Gothic wulfs = English wolf etc.
    Vaka2
    1. indeclinable : a root vak is given at Dhtp 7 & Dhtm 8 in meaning “ādāne,” i.e. grasping, together with a root kuk as synonym. It may refer to vaka1 wolf, whereas kuk would explain koka wolf. The notion of voraciousness is prevalent in the characterization of the wolf ‣See all passages of vaka1, e.g. Ja v.302
    Vakula
    1. a tree (Mimusops elengi) Ja v.420
    cp. * Sanskrit vakula
    Vakka1
    adjective
    1. crooked Ja i.216
    Vedic vakra; the usual Pali form is vanka
    Vakka2
    neuter
    1. the kidney Snp 195 Kh iii. Mil 26 Dhs-a 140 In detail described as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism 255, 356 Vb-a 60 239, 356
    1. ˚pañcaka the series of five (constituents of the body beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya yakana, kilomaka, pihaka: Vb-a 249
    Vedic vṛkka
    Vakkaṅga
    1. a term for bird, poetically for sakuṇa Ja i.216 (tesaṁ ubhosu passesu pakkhā vankā jātā ti vakkangā Commentary )
    vakkaṁ + ga
    Vakkhati
    1. is future of vac : he will say, e.g. at Vin ii.190 Vin iv.238 ‣See vatti.

    Vakkala
    1. the bark of a tree Ja ii.13 (˚antara); iii.522
    2. a bark garment (worn by ascetics) ‣See vakkali
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit valkala (e.g. Jtm 210) ‣See vāka
    Vakkalaka
    1. (“bark-like,” or “tuft"?) is at Kp-a 50 as the Vism reading, where Kp-a reads daṇḍa. The P. Text S. ed. of Vism (p. 255) reads wrongly cakkalaka
    Vakkali
    1. wearing a garment of bark, an ascetic, literally “barker” Ja ii.274 (˚sadda the sound of the bark-garment-wearer) ‣See also proper name Vakkali
    in compound for in
    Vakkalika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. in danta˚; peeling bark with one’s teeth, designation of a certain kind of ascetics DN-a i.271
    from vakkala
    Vagga1
    1. a company, section group, party Vin i.58 (du˚, ti˚), 195 (dasa˚ a chapter of 10 bhikkhus)
    2. a section or chapter of a canonical book Dhp-a i.158 (eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi) Dhs-a 27
      1. ˚uposatha celebration (of the uposatha) in groups “incomplete congregation” (translation Oldenberg) Dpvs 7 36. More likely to vagga2! -gata following a (sectarian) party (Buddhaghosa identifies this with the 62 diṭṭhigatikā Snp-a 365) SN i.187 Snp 371
      • ˚bandha, in instr ˚ena group by group Mhvs 32, 11
      • ˚bandhana banded together, forming groups Dhp-a iv.93 94
      • ˚vagga in crowds, confused, heaped up Ja vi.224 Pv-a 54
      • ˚vādaka taking somebody’s part Vin iii.175
      • ˚sārin conforming to a (heretic) party Snp 371 Snp 800 Snp 912 Nd1 108 329
      Vedic varga, from vṛj; cp. Latin volgus & vulgus (= English vulgar) crowd, people
    Vagga2
    adjective neuter
    1. dissociated, separated; incomplete; at difference dissentious Vin i.111f. 129, 160; iv.53 (sangha) AN i.70 (parisā); ii.240 instrumental vaggena separately secessionally, sectariously Vin i.161 Vin iv.37 126
      1. ˚ārāma fond of dissociation or causing separation MN i.286 Iti 11 (+ adhamma-ṭṭha; translation Seidenstücker not quite to the point: rejoicing in parties, i.e. vagga1 = Vin ii.205
      • ˚kamma (ecclesiastical) act of an incomplete chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.315f. (opposite sam agga-kamma)

        • rata = ˚ārāma
        vi + agga, Sanskrit vyagra; opposed to samagga
    Vaggati

    to jump Vv 649 (explained at Vv-a 278 as “kadāci pade padaṁ” better: padāpadaṁ?

    1. nikkhipantā vagganena gamane [read: vagga-gamanena gacchanti) Ja ii.335 Ja ii.404 Ja iv.81 Ja iv.343 v.473
    valg, to which belong Old Icelandic valka to roll; Anglo-Saxon. wealkan = English walk
    Vaggatta
    neuter
    1. distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin i.316 (opposite samaggatta)
    abstract from vagga2
    Vaggana
    1. ‣See vaggati (reference of Vv 649)
    Vaggiya
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. belonging to a group, forming a company, a party of (—˚), e.g. pañcavaggiyā therā Ja i.57 Ja i.82 bhikkhū MN i.70 MN ii.94
      • chabbaggiyā bhikkhū (the group of 6 bh.) Vin i.111f. 316 sq. & passim sattarasa-vaggiyā bhikkhū (group of 17) Vin iv.112
      from vagga1
    Vaggu
    adjective
    1. lovely, beautiful pleasant, usually of sound (sara) DN ii.20 (˚ssara) SN i.180 SN i.190 Snp 350 Snp 668 Vv 53 361, 364 (˚rūpa), 5018 (girā) 636, 6410 (ghoso suvaggu), 6420, 672, 8417 Pv i.113ii.121; iii.34 Ja ii.439 Ja iii.21 Ja v.215 Sdhp 245. The following synonyms are frequently given in Vv-a & Pv-a as explains of vaggu: abhirūpa, cāru, madhura, rucira savanīya, siniddha, sundara, sobhaṇa
    1. ˚vada of lovely speech or enunciation Snp 955 (= madhura-vada, pemaniya-vada, hadayangama˚, karavīkaruda-mañju-ssara Nd1 446). Vagguli & i
    cp. Vedic valgu, from valg; frequently in combination with vadati “to speak lovely words”
    Vagguli
    ˚ī
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. a bat Vin ii.148 Mil 364 Mil 404 Vism 663 (in simile) Dhp-a iii.223
      1. ˚rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism 74
      2. ˚vata “bat-practice,” a certain practice of ascetics Ja i.493 iii.235; iv.299
      cp. Sanskrit valgulī, of; valg to flutter
    Vaṅka

    adjective-noun

    1. I. adjective.

      1. -1. crooked, bent, curved MN i.31 (+ jimha) SN iv.118 (read v-daṇḍā) Vin ii.116 (suttā vankā honti) Ja i.9 (of kāja); iv.362 (˚daṇḍa), Pv-a 51 With reference to a kind of vīṇā at Vv-a 281
      • (figuratively crooked, deceitful, dishonest Ja iii.313 (of crows: kākānaṁ nāmaṁ Commentary ); vi.524; Pv iv.134 (a˚) Snp 270 (probably to be read dhaṅka as Snp-a 303 = kāka)

    2. doubtful deceitful, deceptive, i.e. haunted Vv 843 cp. Vv-a 334-II.

      • masculine

        1. -1. a bend, nook, curve (of ponds) Ja ii.189 vi.333 (sahassa˚)
        • a hook Ja v.269

      • a fishhook DN ii.266 Thag 1, 749 Ja vi.437

        • On vaṅka in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131
        1. ˚aṅgula a crooked finger AN iii.6
        • ˚ātivaṅkin having curves upon curves (in its horns), with very crooked antlers Ja i.160 (said of a deer)
        • ˚gata running in bends or crooked (of a river) Ja i.289
        • ˚ghasta (a fish) having swallowed the hook DN ii.266 Ja vi.113
        • ˚chidda a crooked hole DN-a i.112
        • ˚dāṭha having a bent fang (of a boar) Ja ii.405
        cp. Vedic vanka & vakra bending; also Vedic vanku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vañcati to waver, walk crooked. cp. Latin con-vexus “convex, Anglo-Saxon wōh “wrong,” Gothic wāhs; Old High German wanga cheek and others The Dhtp 5 gives “koṭilya” as meaning of vaṅk. Another Pāli form is vakka (q.v.) The Prakrit forms are both vakka & vanka: Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 74
    Vaṅkaka
    neuter
    1. a sort of toy: Rhys Davids “toyplough” (Dialogues of the Buddha i.10); Kern “miniature fish-hook (Toevoegselen s.v.). Rhys Davids derives it from Sanskrit vṛka ‣See Pali vaka1. Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.86 takes it as “toy-plough ‣See DN i.6 Vin ii.10 (variant reading vangaka & vankata); iii.180 (variant reading cangaka) AN v.203 (Text vanka; variant reading vankaka) Mil 229 At Thag-a 15
    • vaṅkaka is used in general meaning of “something crooked” (to explain Thag 2, 11
    • khujja which is specified at Thag 1, 43 as sickle, plough and spade
    from vanka
    Vaṅkatā
    feminine & Vaṅkatta
    • neuter

      1. crookedness AN 1 112 (tt) Dhs 1339 Vb-a 494
      abstract from vanka
    Vaṅkeyya
    adjective
    1. “of a crooked kind,” crooked-like; neuter twisting, crookedness, dishonesty MN i.340 AN iv.189 AN v.167
    2. gerundive formation from vanka
    Vaṅga
    1. at DN-a i.223 is synonym with kaṇa and means some kind of fault or flaw. It is probably a wrong spelling for vaṅka
    Vaṅgati
    1. to go, walk, waver; found only in Dhtp (No. 29) as root vaṅg in meaning “gamana. Perhaps confused with valg ‣See vaggati
    cp. * Sanskrit vangati, to which belongs vañjula. Indogermanic *ṷag to bend; cp. Latin vagor to roam, vagus = vague Old High German wankon to waver
    Vaca
    neuter a kind of root Vin i.201 = iv.35. cp. vacattha.
    Vacatā
    feminine
    1. is found only in compound dubbacatā surliness Ja i.159
    abstract from vaco
    *Vacati
    1. ‣See vatti
    vac
    Vacattha
    neuter a kind of root Vin i.201 = iv.35.
    Vacana
    neuter
    1. speaking, utterance, word, bidding SN ii.18 (alaṁ vacanāya one says rightly); iv.195 (yathā bhūtaṁ) AN ii.168 Snp 417 Snp 699 Snp 932 Snp 984 Snp 997 Mil 235 Pv ii.27 Snp-a 343 386-mama vacanena in my name Pv-a 53
    2. dubbacana a bad word Thag 2, 418 (= dur-utta-vacana Thag-a 268)-vacanaṁ karoti to do one’s bidding Ja i.222 Ja i.253 2. (technical term in grammar) what is said with regard to its grammatical syntactical or semantic relation, way of speech, term expression, as: āmantana˚ term of address Kp-a 167 Snp-a 435
    3. paccatta˚ expression of sep. relation, i.e. the
    4. accusative case Snp-a 303
    5. piya˚ term of endearment Nd2 130 Snp-a 536
    6. puna˚ repetition Snp-a 487
    7. vattamāna˚ the present tense Snp-a 16 23; visesitabba˚ qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13
    8. sampadāna˚ the dative relation Snp-a 317 At Snp-a 397 (combined with linga and other terms) it refers to the “number,” i.e. singular &
    9. plural.

      1. ˚attha word-analysis or meaning of words Vism 364 Snp-a 24
      • ˚kara one who does one’s bidding, obedient a servant Vv 165 8421 Ja ii.129 Ja iv.41 (vacanaṁ-kara) v.98 Pv-a 134
      • ˚khama gentle in words SN ii.282 AN iv.32
      • ˚ paṭivacana speech and counterspeech (i.e. reply), conversation Dhp-a ii.35 Pv-a 83 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 117 -patha way of saying, speech MN i.126 (five ways, by which a person is judged: kālena vā akālena vā, bhūtena & a˚, saṇhena & pharusena, attha-saṁhitena an˚, mettacittā & dosantarā) AN ii.117 AN ii.153 AN iii.163 iv.277, cp. DN iii.236 Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262) Snp-a 159 375
      • ˚bheda variance in expression, different words, kind of speech Snp-a 169 cp. vacanamatte bhedo Snp-a 471
      • ˚vyattaya distinction or specification of expression Snp-a 509
      • ˚sampaṭiggaha “taking up together,” summing up (what has been said), résumé Kp-a 100
      • ˚sesa the rest of the words Pv-a 14 Pv-a 18 Pv-a 103
      from vac; Vedic vacana
    Vacanīya
    adjective
    1. to be spoken to, or to be answered DN i.175 Snp p. 140
    gerundive formation from vacana
    Vacasa
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having speech, speaking, in compound saddheyya˚; of credible speech trustworthy Vin iii.188
    the adjective form of vaco = vacas
    Vacī
    (˚-)
    1. speech, words; rare by itself (and in this case re-established from compounds. and poetical, as at Snp 472 (yassa vacī kharā; explained at Snp-a 409 by “vācā”), 973 (cudito vacīhi = vācāhi Snp-a 574). Otherwise in compounds, like: -gutta controlled in speech Snp 78
    • ˚para one who excels in words (not in actions), i.e. a man of words Ja ii.390
    • ˚parama identical DN iii.185
    • ˚bheda “kind of words,” what is like speech, i.e. talk or language Vin iv.2 Mil 231 (meaning here: break of the vow of speech?); various saying detailed speech, specification Kp-a 13 Snp-a 464 466 ‣See also vākya-bheda & vācaṁ bhindati
    • ˚viññatti intimation by language Vism 448 Mil 370 Dhs 637
    • ˚vipphāra dilating in talk Mil 230 Mil 370
    • ˚samācāsa good conduct in speech MN ii.114 MN iii.45 DN iii.217 Often coupled (as triad) with kāya˚ & mano˚; (= in deed & in mind; where vācā is used when not compounded) e.g. in (vacī) -kamma (+ kāya˚ & mano˚) deed by word MN i.373 MN i.417 MN iii.207 DN iii.191 DN iii.245
    • ˚duccarita misbehaviour in words (four of these, viz. musāvāda pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpa AN ii.141 DN iii.52 DN iii.96 DN iii.111 DN iii.214 DN iii.217 Nd1 386 Pug 60 Dhp-a i.23 iii.417; ˚saṅkhāra antecedent or requisite for speech MN i.301 AN iii.350 SN iv.293 Vb-a 167 Vism 531 ˚sañcetanā intention by word Vb-a 144
    • ˚sucarita good conduct in speech AN ii.141 (the 4: sacca-vācā, apisuṇā vācā, saṇhā vācā, mantā bhāsā)
    the composition form of vaco
    Vaco
    1. (& vaca neuter

      1. speech, words, saying; nominative & accusative ; vaco Snp 54 Snp 356 Snp 988 Snp 994 Snp 1006 Snp 1057 Snp 1110 Snp 1147 Ja i.188 Nd1 553 (= vacana byāpatha desanā anusandhi) Pv i.1112 instrumental vacasā Vin ii.95 (dhammā bahussutā honti dhatā v. paricitā); iii.189 SN i.12 (+ manasā) Snp 365 Snp 663 Snp 890 (= vacanena Nd1 299); Vism 241; Mhvs 19, 42

        • As adjective (—˚) vaca in combination with du˚; as dubbaca having bad speech, using bad language, foul-mouthed MN i.95 SN ii.204 AN ii.147 iii.178; v.152 sq. Ja i.159 Pug 20 Sdhp 95 Sdhp 197. Opp suvaca of nice speech MN i.126 AN v.24f.; Pv iv.133 (= subbaca Pv-a 230)
        • cp. vacī & vācā
        Vedic vacas, of vac
    Vacca
    neuter
    1. excrement, faeces Vin ii.212 Vin iv.229 265; Vism 250 (a baby’s) Vb-a 232 (identical), 243 Pv-a 268
    • vaccaṁ osajjati, or karoti to ease oneself Ja i.3 Pv-a 268
    1. ˚kuṭī (& kuṭi); a privy Vin ii.221 Ja i.161 Ja ii.10 Vism 235, 259, 261 Vb-a 242 Dhp-a ii.55 56 Pv-a 266 Pv-a 268
    2. ˚kūpa a cesspool Vin ii.221 Ja v.231 Vism 344 sq. Dhp-a i.180
    • ˚ghaṭa a pot for excrements chamber utensil, commode Vin i.157 = ii.216 MN i.207
    • ˚doṇikā identical Vin ii.221
    • ˚magga “the way of faeces, excrementary canal, opening of the rectum Vin ii.221 iii.28 sq., 35 Ja i.502 Ja iv.30
    • ˚sodhaka a privy-cleaner night-man Mhvs 10, 91
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaccaḥ Avs i.254
    Vaccasin
    adjective
    1. energetic imposing DN i.114 (brahma˚; Dialogues of the Buddha i.146 “fine in presence” cp. DN-a i.282) ‣See also under brahma. Note. The Pali root vacc is given at Dhtm 59 in meaning of “ditti,” i.e. splendour
    cp. Sanskrit varcasvin & Vedic varcin, having splendour, might or energy, from Vedic varcas
    Vaccita
    1. wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin ii.212 221
    past participle of vacceti, denominative of vacca
    Vaccha1
    a calf Dhp 284 Ja v.101 Vism 163 (in simile) 269 (identical; kūṭa˚ a maimed calf) Dhs-a 62 (with popular etymology “vadatī ti vaccho”) Vv-a 100 200 (taruṇa˚). On vaccha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 131.
    1. ˚giddhinī longing for her calf SN iv.181
    • ˚gopālaka a cow-herd Vism 28
    • ˚danta “calf-tooth,” a kind of arrow or javelin MN i.429 Ja vi.448
    • ˚pālaka cow-herd Vv 512
    Vedic vatsa, literally “one year old, a yearling”; cp. Sanskrit vatsara identical, Latin vetus old, vitulus calf; Gothic wiprus a year old lamb = Old High German widar = English wether
    Vaccha2
    1. a tree; only in mālā˚; an ornamental plant Vin ii.12 Vin iii.179 Vism 172 Dhp-a ii.109
    = rukkha, from vṛkṣa
    Vacchaka
    a (little) calf Ja iii.444 Ja v.93 Ja v.433 Mil 282 (as go-vacchaka).
    1. ˚pālaka a cow-herd Ja iii.444
    • ˚sālā cow-shed, cowpen Ja v.93 Mil 282
    Demin. from vaccha1
    Vacchatara
    1. a weaned calf bullock DN i.127 DN i.148 SN i.75 AN ii.207 AN iv.41f. Pug 56 DN-a i.294 feminine vacchatarī DN i.127 SN i.75 Vin i.191 Pug 56
    2. from vaccha; the compar. suffix in meaning “sort of,-like.” cp. Sanskrit vatsatara
    Vacchati
    1. is future of vasati to dwell.

    Vacchara
    1. year Sdhp 239 ‣See the usual saṁvacchara
    cp. Classical Sanskrit vatsara
    Vacchala
    adjective
    1. affectionate, literally “loving her calf” Thag-a 148 (Ap v.64)
    cp. Sanskrit vatsala
    Vaja
    1. a cattle-fold, cow-pen AN iii.393 Ja ii.300 Ja iii.270 Ja iii.379 Vism 166, 279 Dhp-a i.126 396
    • giribbaja a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain Ja iii.479 as N
    • plural at Snp 408
    Vedic vraja ‣See vajati
    Vajati

    1. to go, proceed, get to (accusative ), literally to turn to (cp. vṛj, vṛṇakti, past participle vṛkta, which latter coincides with vṛtta of vṛt in Pali vatta ‣See vatta1 & cp. vajjeti to avoid, vajjita, vajjana etc.) Snp 121 Snp 381 Snp 729 (jātimaraṇa-saṁsāraṁ), 1143 Ja iii.401 Ja iv.103 (nirayaṁ) Pv iv.172 (Pot. vajeyya) Nd2 423 (= gacchati kamati) Mhvs 11, 35 (
    2. imperative vaja as variant reading ; Text reads bhaja) ‣See compounds. anubbajati, upabb˚, pabb˚, paribb˚
    3. Vedic vraj, cp. Vedic vraja (= Pali vaja) & vṛjana enclosure = Avestan vərəƶə̄na-, with which cp. Latin vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Anglo-Saxon wringan = English wring = German ringen, English wrinkle = German renken, and many others ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. vergo The Dhtp (59) defines vaj (together with aj by “gamana”
    Vajalla
    1. ‣See rajo-vajalla
    Vajira1
    a thunderbolt; usually with reference to Sakka’s (= Indra’s) weapon DN i.95 = M i.231 (ayasa) Thag 1, 419 Ja i.134 (vajira-pūritā viya garukā kucchi “as if filled with Sakka’s thunderbolt.” Dutoit takes it in meaning vajira2 and translates “with diamonds”) Snp-a 225 (˚āvudha the weapon of Sakka).
    1. ˚pāṇin having a thunderbolt in his hand (name of a yakkha) DN i.95 = M. i.231
    cp. Vedic vajira, Indra’s thunderbolt; Indogermanic *ṷeĝ = Sanskrit vaj, cp. Latin vegeo to thrive, vigeo → vigour Avestan vaƶra; Old Icelandic vakr = Anglo-Saxon wacor = German wacker; also English wake etc ‣See also vājeti
    Vajira2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. a diamond AN i.124 (˚ûpamacitta) = Pug 30 Dhp 161 Ja iv.234 Mil 118 Mil 267 Mil 278 Mhvs 30, 95; Kp-a 110 (˚sankhāta-kāya) Dhp-a i.387 (˚panti row of diamonds), 392 sq
      cp. Sanskrit vajra = vajira; 1
    Vajuḷa
    1. name of several plants, a tree (the ratan: Halāyudha 2 46) Ja v.420 ‣See also vaṅgati
    cp. Sanskrit vañjula. Given as vañjula at Abhp 553
    Vajja1
    neuter
    1. that which should be avoided, a fault, sin DN ii.38 SN i.221 Vin ii.87 (thūla˚ a grave sin) AN i.47 AN i.98 AN iv.140 Ps i.122 Dhp 252 Vb-a 342 (synonym with dosa and garahitabba) Kp-a 23 (paṇṇatti˚ & pakati˚), 24 (identical), 190 (loka˚) DN-a i.181 (= akusala-dhamma). Frequently in phrase aṇumattesu vajjesu bhaya-dassāvin “seeing a source of fear even in the slightest sins” DN i.63 SN v.187 and passim —˚dassin finding fault Dhp 76 (explained in detail at Dhp-a ii.107)
    • anavajja & sāvajja; , the relation of which to vajja is doubtful ‣See avajja
    gerundive of vajjati, cp. Sanskrit varjya
    Vajja2
    adjective neuter
    1. “to be said,” i.e. speaking DN i.53 (sacca˚ = sacca-vacana DN-a i.160) ‣See also mosa-vajja
    2. “to be sounded, i.e. musical instrument Ja i.500 (˚bheri). Vajja, vajja, vajjum
    cp. Sanskrit vādya, gerundive of vad
    Vajja, vajjā, vajjuṁ
    1. : Pot. of vad ‣See vadati
    Vajjati1
    1. to turn etc.; only as Pass. form vajjati [in form = Vedic vṛjyate to be avoided, to be excluded from ablative Mil 227 Kp-a 160 (˚itabba, in popular etymology of Vajjī
    • Caus vajjeti (*varjayati) to avoid, to abstain from, renounce Sdhp 10 Sdhp 11 Sdhp 200. cp. pari˚, vi˚
    vṛj, Vedic vṛṇakti & varjati to turn; in etymology related to vajati. Dhtp 547: “vajjane”
    Vajjati2
    1. passive of vad ‣See vadati
    Vajjana
    neuter
    1. avoidance, shunning Vism 5 (opposite sevana) Dhp-a iii.417
    from vajjati
    Vajjanīya
    adjective
    1. to be avoided, to be shunned; improper Mil 166 (i.e. bad or uneven parts of the wood), 224
    gerundive formation from vajjati1
    Vajjavant
    adjective
    1. sinful SN iii.194
    vajja1 + vant
    Vajjha
    adjective
    1. to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death Vin iv.226 Snp 580 (go vajjho viya) Ja ii.402 (cora) vi.483 (= vajjhappatta cora Commentary ); Vism 314; Kp-a 27-avajjha not to be slain, scathless Snp 288 (brāhmaṇa) Mil 221 = J v.49 Mil 257 (˚kavaca invulnerable armour)
    1. ˚ghāta a slaughterer, executioner Thag 2, 242 (cp Thag-a 204)
    • cora a robber (i.e. criminal) waiting to be executed Pv-a 153
    • ˚paṭaha-bheri the execution drum Pv-a 4
    • ˚bhāvapatta condemned to death Ja i.439
    • ˚sūkariyo (
    • plural ) sows which had no young, barren sows (read vañjha˚!) Ja ii.406
    gerundive of vadhati
    Vajjhaka
    adjective (—˚) = vajjha Dhs-a 239
    Vajjhā
    feminine
    1. execution; only in compound (as vajjha˚) ˚ppatta condemned to death, about to be executed Vin iv.226 Ja ii.119 Ja ii.264 Ja vi.483
    cp. Sanskrit vadhyā
    Vajjheti
    1. to destroy, kill Ja vi.527 (siro vajjhayitvāna). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. vaddh˚ proposes reading vaddhayitvāna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better. The expression is hapax legomenon
    denominative from vajjha
    Vañcati

    1. to walk about Ja i.214 (infinitive ˚ituṁ = pādacāra-gamanena gantuṁ Commentary )
    2. causative vañceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude DN i.50 Snp 100 Snp 129 Snp 356 Ja iii.420 (
    3. aorist avañci = vañcesi Commentary ); vi.403 (˚etu-kāma) Pv iii.42 Mil 396 Mhvs 25, 69 (tomaraṁ avañcayi).
    4. past participle vañcita
    vañc ‣See etymology under vanka The Dhtp distinguishes two roots vañc, viz. “gamane” (46) and “palambhane” (543), thus giving the literally & the fig meanings
    Vañcana
    neuter
    1. deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion DN i.5 DN iii.176 AN ii.209 Snp 242 Pv iii.95 Pug 19 Ja iv.435 Dhs-a 363 (for māyā Dhs 1059) DN-a i.79 Dhp-a iii.403 Pv-a 193-vañcana in literally meaning of vañcati.1 is found in avañcana not tottering Ja i.214
    from vañc, cp. Epic Sanskrit vañcana
    Vañcanika
    adjective
    1. deceiving; a cheat DN iii.183 Thag 1, 940 Mil 290
    from vañcana
    Vañcaniya
    adjective
    1. deceiving, deluding Thag 2, 490
    gerundive formation from vañcana, cp. MVastu ii.145: vañcanīya
    Vañcita
    1. deceived, cheated Ja i.287 (vañcit’ ammi = vañcitā amhi)
    past participle of vañceti
    Vañjula
    1. ‣See vajuḷa
    Vañjha
    adjective
    1. barren, sterile DN i.14, 56 MN i.271 SN ii.29 (a˚); iv.169; v.202 (a˚) Pv iii.45 (a˚ = anipphala Commentary ) Ja ii.406 (˚sūkariyo: so read for vajjha˚) Mil 95 Vism 508 (˚bhāva) Dhp-a i.45 (˚itthi) DN-a i.105 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 82 Vv-a 149 Sdhp 345 (a˚)
    cp. Epic & later Sanskrit bandhya
    Vaṭa
    1. the Indian fig tree Ja i.259 (˚rukkha); iii.325; Mhvs 6, 16 Dhp-a i.167 (˚rukkha) Pv-a 113
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vaṭa. A root vaṭ; , not connected with this vaṭa is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning “veṭhana” ‣See vaṭaṁsa
    Vaṭa
    1. at Pug 45 46 (tuccho pi hito pūro pi vaṭo) read ti pihito pūro vivaṭo ‣See vivaṭa
    Vaṭaṁsa
    1. a kind of head ornament perhaps ear-ring or garland worn round the forehead Mhvs 11, 28 (Commentary explains as “kaṇṇapilandhanaṁ vaṭaṁsakan ti vuttaṁ hoti”). Usually as vaṭaṁsaka Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 Thag 1, 523 Vv 385 (explained as “ratanamayā kaṇṇikā” (plural ) at Vv-a 174) Ja vi.488 Vv-a 178 189, 209

      • Note. The root vaṭ; given as “veṭhana” at Dhtm 106 probably refers to vaṭaṁsa
      for avaṭaṁsa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 661; cp. Sanskrit avataṁsa with t; Prakrit vaaṁsa
    Vaṭaka
    1. a small ball or thickening, bulb, tuber; in muḷāla˚; the (edible) tuber of the lotus Ja vi.563 (Commentary kaṇḍaka)
    cp. * Sanskrit vaṭaka, from vaṭa rope
    Vaṭākara
    1. a rope, cable Ja iii.478 (nāvā sa-vaṭākarā)
    probably distorted by metathesis from Sanskrit vaṭārakā. From vaṭa rope. On etymology of the latter ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. volvo
    Vaṭuma
    neuter
    1. a road, path DN ii.8 SN iv.52 (chinna˚) Ja iii.412 Vism 123 (sa˚ a˚). cp. ; ubbaṭuma & parivaṭuma;
    cp. Vedic vartman, from vṛt
    Vaṭṭa1
    adjective neuter
    1. round circular;
    2. neuter circle Pv-a 185 (āyata +); Kp-a 50 (˚nāli) ‣See compound ˚aṅguli
    3. (figuratively) “rolling on,” the “round” of existences, cycle of transmigrations, saṁsāra evolution (= involution) (as forward or ascending circle of existences, without implying a teleological idea in contrast to vivaṭṭa “rolling back” or devolution, i.e. a new (descending) cycle of existence in a new aeon with inverted vi-
      1. motion, so to speak) SN iii.63 SN iv.53 (pariyādiṇṇa˚), cp. MN iii.118 Thag 1, 417 (sabba˚: “all constant rolling on” translation) Snp-a 351 (= upādāna) Dhs-a 238
      • There are 3 vaṭṭas, (te-bhūmaka vaṭṭa ‣See also tivaṭṭa) embracing existence in the stages of kamma- vaṭṭa, kilesa˚; and vipāka˚; , or circle of deed sin & result (found only in Commentarial literature) Kp-a 189 Snp-a 510 (tebhūmaka˚) Dhp-a i.289 (kilesa˚) iv.69 (tebhūmaka˚) ‣See also Māra; and ˚dukkha ˚vivaṭṭa below
      • “what has been proffered, expenditure, alms (as technical term) Ja vi.333 (dāna˚ alms-gift) Dhp-a ii.29 (pāka˚ cooked food as alms) Vv-a 222 (identical) Mhvs 32, 61 (alms-pension); 34, 64 (salāka-vaṭṭabhatta)
      • cp. vi˚
      1. ˚aṅguli a rounded (i.e. well-formed) finger; adjective having round fingers Vv 6413 (= anupubbato v., i.e. regularly formed, Vv-a 280) Ja v.207 Ja v.215
      • ˚aṅgulika same as last Ja v.204
      • ˚ānugata accompanied by (or affected with) saṁsāra Ja i.91 (dhana)
      • ˚ūpaccheda destruction of the cycle of rebirths AN ii.34 = It 88 AN iii.35 Vism 293
      • ˚kathā discussion about saṁsāra Vism 525 DN-a i.126 Vb-a 133
      • ˚kāra a worker in brass. The meaning of vaṭṭa in this connection is not clear; the same vaṭṭa occurs in ˚loha (“round” metal?). Kern Toevoegselen s.v. compares it with Sanskrit vardhra leather strap taking vaṭṭa as a corruption of vaḍḍha, but the connection brass → leather seems far-fetched. It is only found at Mil 331
      • ˚dukkha the “ill” of transmigration (a Commentary expression) Vism 315 Dhp-a iv.149 Vv-a 116
      • ˚paṭighātaka (ṁ) (vivaṭṭaṁ) (a devolution destroying evolution, i.e. salvation from saṁsāra Snp-a 106
      • ˚bhaya fear of saṁsāra Vb-a 256
      • ˚mūla the root of saṁsāra Dhp-a iii.278
      • ˚vivaṭṭa (1) evolving and devolving; going round and back again, i.e. all round (a formation after the manner of reduplicative compounds like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa in intensive-iterative meaning) ˚vasena in direct and inverse succession, all round completely Ja i.75 cp. also vatta-paṭivatta

        • (2 saṁsāra in ascending and descending lines, evolution (“involution”) and devolution, or one round of transmigration and the other. It is dogmatically defined at Nett 113 as “vaṭṭaṁ saṁsāro vivaṭṭaṁ nibbānaṁ (similarly, opposed to vaṭṭa at DN-a i.126) which is however not the general meaning, the vivaṭṭa not necessarily meaning a nibbāna stage ‣See Snp-a 106 (quoted above) Vv-a 68 We have so far not found any passage where it might be interpreted in the comprehensive sense as meaning “the total round of existences” after the fashion of compounds. like bhavâbhava -loha “round metal” (?), one of the 3 kittima-lohāni mentioned at Vb-a 63 (kaṁsa˚, vaṭṭa˚, ārakūṭa); also at Mil 267 (with kāḷa˚, tamba˚ & kaṁsa˚, where in the translation Rhys Davids does not give a definite explanation of the word)
        past participle of vṛt, Sanskrit vṛtta in meaning of “round” as well as “happened, become” etc. The two meanings have become differentiated in Pāli vaṭṭa is not found in meaning of “happened.” All three Pāli meanings are specialized, just as the pres vaṭṭati is specialized in meaning “behoves”
    Vaṭṭa2
    1. (“rained”) ‣See abhivaṭṭa and vaṭṭha (vuṭṭha); otherwise only at Dhp-a ii.265
    Vaṭṭaka
    neuter
    1. a cart, in haṭṭha˚; handcart Vin ii.276
    from vṛt, or Pali vaṭṭa
    Vaṭṭakā
    feminine (& vaṭṭaka˚;)
    1. the quail MN iii.159f. Ja i.172 Ja i.208 (vaṭṭaka-luddaka) iii.312 Dhp-a iii.175 (locative plural vaṭṭakesu)

      • The Vaṭṭaka-jātaka at Ja i.208f. (cp. Ja v.414)
      cp. Sanskrit vartakā & Vedic vartikā
    Vaṭṭati
    1. to turn round to move on: doubtful in “kattha vaṭṭaṁ na vaṭṭati SN i.15 preferably with variant reading as vaḍḍhati.
    2. causative I vaṭṭeti to turn or twist Ja i.338 (rajjuṁ); to cause to move or go on (in weaving; tasaraṁ v. to speed the shuttle) Snp-a 265 266. Should we read vaḍḍheti cp. āvaṭṭeti.
    3. causative II. vaṭṭāpeti to cause to turn Ja i.422
    4. to be right or fit or proper, to behove it ought to (with infin.); with instrumental of person who ought to do this or that, e.g. sīlācāra-sampannena bhavituṁ vaṭṭati Ja i.188 kataññunā bhavituṁ v. Ja i.122
    5. See e.g. Ja i.376 Ja ii.352 Ja ii.406 Mil 9 Vism 184 Dhp-a ii.38 90, 168 Snp-a 414 (vattuṁ to say) Vv-a 63 69 75 Pv-a 38 (dātuṁ). The noun to vaṭṭati is vatta (not vaṭṭa!)
    Vedic vṛt. The representative of vattati (= Sanskrit vartate) in specialized meaning. The regular meaning of *vartate (with vaṭṭana), viz. “turning round,” is attached to vaṭṭati only in later Pāli & sometimes doubtful. It is found also in the causative ; vaṭṭeti The definition of vaṭṭ; (literal meaning) at Dhtp 89 is “vaṭṭana,” and at Dhtm 107 “āvattana”
    Vaṭṭana
    neuter
    1. turning round Dhtp 89 (in definition of vaṭṭati). cp. āvaṭṭana
    from vṛt, vaṭṭati
    Vaṭṭanā
    feminine
    1. in ˚valī is a line or chain of balls (“rounds,” i.e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs at MN i.80 MN i.81 (seyyathā v. evaṁ me piṭṭhi-kaṇṭako unnat’ âvanato hoti; Neumann translates “wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein Rückgrat mit den hervor-und zurücktretenden Wirbeln”) and at Ja v.69 (spelt “vaṭṭhanā-vali-sankāsā piṭṭhi te ninnat’ unnatā, with Commentary explanation “piṭṭhika-ṭṭhāne āvuṇitvā ṭhāpitā vaṭṭhanā-vali-sadisā”). The Ja translation by Dutoit gives “einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rücken gleicht im Auf und Nieder”; the English translation has “Thy back like spindles in a row, a long unequal curve doth show.”
    from vṛt
    Vaṭṭani
    feminine
    1. a ring, round, globe, ball Thag 2, 395 (vaṭṭani-riva; explained at Thag-a 259 as “lākhāya guḷikā viya,” translationSisters 154: “but a little ball”)
    cp. Vedic vartani circumference of a wheel, course
    Vaṭṭi
    feminine
    1. a wick SN ii.86 = iii.126 = iv.213 Ja i.243 (dīpa˚) Dhp-a 393 Thag-a 72 (Ap. v.45: nominative
    2. plural vaṭṭīni); Mhvs 32, 37 34, 35
    3. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism 258 (anta˚ entrails), 262 (udara˚) Ja i.260 (anta˚, so read for ˚vaddhi)
    4. edge, rim, brim, cireumference Vin ii.120

      • aggala˚ of the door), 148 (identical) SN iii.141 (patta of a vase or bowl); iv.168 (identical) Dhp-a ii.124 (nemi˚) Often as mukha-vaṭṭi outer rim, border, lining, e. g cakkavāḷa˚ Ja i.64 Ja i.72 Dhp-a i.319 Dhp-a iii.209 patt˚ Ja v.38 pāsāda˚ Dhs-a 107
      • strip, fringe Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Ja v.73 (camma˚); Mhvs 11, 15

    5. a sheath, bag, pod Ja iii.366 (tiṇa˚); Mhvs 26, 17 (marica˚ red pepper pod) Dhp-a iv.203 (reṇu˚).

      • a lump, ball Dhp-a iii.117 (pubba˚, of matter)

    6. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour Ja i.109 (or to vṛṣ ?).

      represents both Epic Sanskrit varti and vṛtti, differentiated derivations from vṛt, combining the meanings of “turning, rolling” and “encircling, round”
    Vaṭṭikā
    feminine
    1. a wick Mhvs 30, 94
    2. a brim Mhvs 18, 28
    3. a pod Mhvs 26, 16 (marica˚).

      vaṭṭi + kā, cp. Classical Sanskrit vartikā
    Vaṭṭin
    1. (—˚) adjective in muṇḍa˚; porter (?) is not clear. It is a dern from vaṭṭi in one or the other of its meanings. Found only at Vin ii.137 where it is explained by Buddhaghosa as “veṭṭhin.” It may belong to vaṭaṁsa or vaṭa (rope) cp. Dhtm 106 “veṭhana” for vaṭaṁsa.

    Vaṭṭula
    adjective
    1. circular Abhp 707
    from vṛt, cp. late Sanskrit vartula
    Vaṭṭha
    1. rained, in nava˚; newly rained upon Dhp-a i.19 (bhūmi)
    past participle of vassati, for the usual vuṭṭha
    Vaṭhara
    adjective
    1. bulky, gross Abhp 701
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaṭhara MVastu ii.65. A root vaṭh is given at Dhtm 133 in meaning “thūlattane bhave” i.e. bulkiness
    Vaḍḍha
    neuter
    1. wealth, riches Ja iii.131 (vaḍḍhaṁ vaḍḍhataṁ, imperative ). Or should we read vaṭṭa? Vaḍḍha is used as proper name at Kp-a 119, perhaps in meaning “prosperous.”
    from vṛdh
    Vaḍḍhaka
    1. augmenting, increasing, i.e. looking after the welfare of somebody or something one who superintends Ja i.2 (rāsi˚ the steward of an estate)
    2. a maker of, in special sense cīvara˚; robecutter perhaps from vardh to cut ‣See vaddheti a tailor Ja i.220
    from vaḍḍheti
    Vaḍḍhaki
    (& ˚ī
    1. a carpenter builder, architect, mason. On their craft and guilds ‣See Fick, Sociale Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rhys Davids Cambridge History of India i.206
    • The word is specially characteristic of the Jātakas and other popular (later literature Ja i.32 Ja i.201 Ja i.247 Ja ii.170 vi.332 sq., 432 Ap. 51 Dhp-a i.269 Dhp-a iv.207 Vism 94 Pv-a 141 Mhbv.154
    • iṭṭha˚ a stonemason Mhvs 35, 102; nagara˚; the city architect Mil 331 Mil 345
    • brāhmaṇa˚ a brahmin carpenter Ja iv.207
    • mahā˚ chief carpenter, master builder Vism 463. In metaphor taṇhā the artificer lust Dhp-a iii.128
    1. ˚gāma a carpenter village Ja ii.18 Ja ii.405 Ja iv.159
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vardhaki & vardhakin; perhaps from vardh to cut ‣See vaddheti
    Vaḍḍhati
    1. primary meaning “to increase” (trs. intransitive); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow SN i.15 (read vaḍḍh˚ for vaṭṭ˚); ii.206 (vaṇṇena) iv.73, 250 AN v.249 (paññāya) Snp 329 (paññā ca sutañ ca) Ja iii.131 (porāṇaṁ vaḍḍhaṁ vaḍḍhataṁ, imperative med 3rd singular); v.66 (sadā so vaḍḍhate rājā sukka-pakkhe va candimā) Pv i.12 (dātā puññena v.) Pug 71 Mil 9 Mhvs 7, 68 (putta-dhītāhi vaḍḍhitvā having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73 (ubho vaḍḍhiṁsu dārakā grew up) Snp-a 319 Pv-a 94
    • ppr. vaḍḍhamāna (1 thriving Kp-a 119 (read as Vaḍḍh˚, proper name); -(2) increasing Ja i.199 (putta-dhītāhi); Mhvs 23, 34 (˚chāyāyaṁ as the shadows increased)
    • ‣ See also pari˚;
    • pp vaḍḍha, vaddha, vuḍḍha, vuddha, buḍḍha.
    • causative I vaḍḍheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of the following senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. variant readings vaṭṭeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with cause to prosper; to arrange; to make for; and in a general sense “to make” (cp. derivation vaḍḍhaka “maker,” i.e. tailor; vaḍḍhaki identical, i.e. carpenter vaḍḍhana, etc.). The latter development into “make is late
    1. -1. to increase, to raise Snp 275 (rajaṁ) DN-a i.115 Mhvs 29, 66 (mangalaṁ to raise the chant) Pv-a 168 (+ brūheti)
    • to cultivate (vipassanaṁ insight Ja i.117 (
    • aorist ˚esi) Pv-a 14

  • to rear, to bring up Mhvs 35, 103 (

    • aorist vaḍḍhesi)
    • (with reference to food to get ready, arrange, serve in (
    • locative ) Ja iii.445 (pātiyā on the dish); iv.67 (karoṭiyaṁ), 391

  • to exalt Ja i.338 (akulīne vaḍḍhessati).

    • to participate in, to practise, attend to, to serve (
    • accusative ) SN ii.109 (tanhaṁ) AN ii.54 (kaṭasiṁ to serve the cemetery, i.e. to die again and again ‣See refs. under kaṭasi); Vism 111 (kasiṇaṁ) 152

  • to make move on, to set into motion (for vaṭṭeti?), in tasaraṁ v. Snp-a 265 266.

    • to take up Mhvs 26, 10 (kuntaṁ).
    • past participle vaḍḍhita.
    • causative II vaḍḍhāpeti : 1. to cause to be enlarged Mhvs 35, 119. 2. to cause to be brought up or reared Ja i.455

  • to have attended to Vin ii.134 (massuṁ).

    • to cause to be made up (of food) Ja iv.68
    • Vedic vardhati, vṛdh, cp. Avestan vərədaiti to increase. To this root belongs Pali uddha “high up”. Defined at Dhtp 109 simply as “vaḍḍhane”
  • Vaḍḍhana
    neuter & adjective)
    1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement prolongation MN i.518 (hāyana˚ decrease increase) Ja iii.422 (kula˚, spelling ddh); Mhvs 35, 73 (āyussa) Dhs-a 406 Pv-a 31 Mil 320 (bala˚ strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp 361
    2. indulgence in attachment; serving, practising Snp 1084 (takka˚) Ja i.146 (kaṭasi˚, q.v. & cp. vaḍḍheti.6); Vism 111 (˚âvaḍḍhana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja & loka˚
    3. arrangement Ja vi.11 (paṭhavi-vaḍḍhanaka-kamma the act of attending to, i.e. smoothing the ground).

      • serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv iii.36 (rati-nandi˚)

    4. potsherd connected with vardh ? ‣See vaddheti
      1. Ja iii.226 (Commentary kaṭhalika; uncertain)
      • a kind of garment, as puṇṇa˚; (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with vaḍḍh˚ at all) Mhvs 23, 33 & 37 (where Commentary explains: anagghāni evaṁnāmikāni vattha-yugāni). cp. vaḍḍhamāna
    from vaḍḍheti ‣See also vaddhana
    Vaḍḍhanaka
    adjective
    1. serving, in feminine ˚ikā a serving (of food), a dish (bhatta˚) Dhp-a 188 (so read for vaḍḍhinikā)
    2. from vaḍḍhana, cp. vaḍḍheti.4
    Vaḍḍhamāna
    neuter at Dīpavaṁsa xi.33 is probably equivalent to vaḍḍhana (6) in special sense at Mhvs 23, 33, and designates a (pair of) special (ly costly) garment(s). One might think of meaning vaḍḍheti
    1. “to bid higher (at a sale),” as in Divy 403; Avs i.36, and explain as “that which causes higher bidding,” i.e. very precious. The passage is doubtful. It may simply mean “costly” (belonging to nandiyāvaṭṭaṁ); or is it to be read as vaṭṭamāna ?
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vardhate
    Vaḍḍhamānaka
    adjective
    1. growing, increasing, getting bigger; only in phrase vaḍḍhamānaka-cchāyāya (locative ) with growing shade, as the shadows lengthened, when evening drew near Dhp-a i.96 416; ii.79; Mhvs 19, 40
    2. ppr. of vaḍḍheti + ka
    Vaḍḍhi
    feminine
    1. increase growth (cp. ; Compendium 251 sq.) SN iv.250 (ariya˚) Ja ii.426 (= phāti) Mil 109 (guṇa˚) Dhs-a 327 Dhp-a iii.335 (avaḍḍhi = parihāni)
    2. welfare, good fortune, happiness Ja v.101 Ja vi.330
    3. (as technical term) profit, interest (on money, especially loans) Thag 2, 444 (= iṇa-vaḍḍhi Thag-a 271) DN-a i.212 270 Vb-a 256 (in simile) Snp-a 179 (˚gahaṇa).

      from vṛdh, Vedic vṛddhi refreshment etc., which is differentiated in Pāli into vuddhi & vaḍḍhi
    Vaḍḍhika
    adjective
    1. leading to increase, augmenting, prosperous Mil 351 (ekanta˚, equal to aparihāniya)
    from vaḍḍhi
    Vaḍḍhita
    1. increased, augmented; raised, enlarged; big Thag 1, 72 (su-su˚) DN-a i.115 Dhs-a 188 364 Ja v.340 (˚kāya)
    2. grown up Dhp-a i.126 3. brought up, reared Ja i.455
    3. served, indulged supplied ‣See kaṭasi˚; (SN ii.178 e.g.).

      past participle of vaḍḍheti
    Vaṇa
    neuter &
    • masculine )

      1. a wound, sore Vin i.205 masculine, 218 (vaṇo rūḷho); iii.36 (m; angajāte), 117 (angajāte) SN iv.177 (vaṇaṁ ālimpeti) AN v.347f. 350 sq.; 359 Nd2 540; PugA 212 (purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto) Dhp-a ii.165 (˚ṁ bandhati to bandage) Vv-a 77 Pv-a 80 Sdhp 395. On vaṇa in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 132.

        1. ˚ālepana putting ointment on a sore Snp-a 58 (in sim.) -coḷaka a rag for dressing a wound Vism 342 Vb-a 361
        • ˚paṭikamma restoration or healing of a wound Dhp-a ii.164
        • ˚paṭicchādana dressing of a wound Dhp-a i.375
        • ˚paṭṭa identical, bandage Snp-a 100
        • ˚bandhana identical Vin i.205
        • ˚mukha the opening of a sore AN iv.386 (nava ˚āni) Vv-a 77 (identical)
        cp. Vedic vraṇa; Serbian rana; Old Bulgarian var̄e, both “wound”
    Vaṇi
    feminine
    1. wish, request Ud 53 Ja iv.404 (= yācana Commentary ); cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891, 18 ‣See vana2 & cp. vaṇeti
    from van to desire
    Vaṇijjā
    feminine
    1. trade, trading MN ii.198 Snp 404 (payojaye dhammikaṁ so vaṇijjaṁ) AN ii.81f. Pv i.56 (no trade among the Petas) Ja i.169 Pv-a 47 (tela˚) Sdhp 332 Sdhp 390
    • Five trades must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz. sattha˚; trade in swords satta˚; in living beings, maṁsa˚; in meat, majja˚; in intoxicants, visa˚; in poisons AN iii.208 quoted at DN-a i.235 and Snp-a 379
    Vedic vaṇijyā, from vaṇij˚ (vaṇik) merchant, cp. vāṇija & vaṇibbaka
    Vaṇita
    1. wounded, bruised Pv ii.24 Ja i.150 Sdhp 395
    past participle of *vaṇeti, denominative from vaṇa
    Vaṇippattha
    1. trading, trade Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88 (with reference to Pāṭaliputta)
    vaṇik + patha, in meaning patha 2
    Vaṇibbaka

    a wayfarer, beggar, pauper Snp 100 (ṇ) Ja iv.403 Ja iv.406 (n); v.172 (= bhojaputta Commentary ; n) vi.232 (n) DN-a i.298 (ṇ) Pv-a 78 (n), 112 (n) Vv-a 5 (n). Often combined with similar terms in phrase kapaṇ addhika iddhika

    1. vaṇibbaka-yācakā indigents, tramps wayfarers & beggars, e.g. DN i.137 (ṇ) Mil 204 (ṇ) Dhp-a i.105 (ṇ). Other spurious forms are vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120 vanīpaka cp. i.49
    vaṇibba + ka. The form *vaṇibba, according to Geiger, Pali Grammar § 461, distorted from vaṇiya, thus “travelling merchant, wayfarer.” Spelling wavers between vaṇibb˚; & vanibb˚. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is; vanīpaka, e. g at Avs i.248; ii.37; Divy 83; occurring also as vaṇīyaka at Divy 83
    Vaṇibbin
    adjective-noun
    1. begging, a beggar, tramp Ja iii.312 Ja iv.410 (= yācanto Commentary ). Spelling at both places n ‣See also vanin
    from *vaṇibba
    Vaṇīyati
    1. ‣See vanīyati
    Vaṇeti
    1. to wish, desire, ask, beg Ja v.27 (spelt vaṇṇeti Commentary explains as vāreti icchati); pres. medium 1st
    2. plural vaṇimhase (= Sanskrit vṛṇīmahe) Ja ii.137 (= icchāma Commentary ). As vanayati at Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṁ)
    3. causative of van ‣See etymology under vana2, cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly from vṛ; , vṛṇāti = Pali vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A denominative from vani is vanīyati
    Vaṇṭa
    neuter
    1. a stalk SN iii.155 = DN i.73 (˚chinna with its stalk cut) Ja i.70 Ap 62; Vism 356 (in comparison) Snp-a 296 Vb-a 60 Dhp-a ii.42 iv.112 Vv-a 44
    • avaṇṭa (of thana, the breast of a woman) not on a stalk (i.e. well-formed, plump) Ja v.155 So to be translated here, although vaṇṭa as medical term is given in BR with meaning “nipple."-‣ See also tālavaṇṭa
    Epic Sanskrit vṛnta
    Vaṇṭaka
    (adj:) (—˚)
    1. having a stalk; ; not fastened on stalks Ja v.203
    vaṇṭa + ka
    Vaṇṭati
    1. to partition, share; is given as root vaṇṭ; at Dhtp 92, 561 and Dhtm 787 in meaning “vibhājana."-Another root vaṇṭ; is found at Dhtm 108 with unmeaning explanation “vaṇṭ’ atthe.”
    dialectical Sanskrit vaṇṭ
    Vaṇṭika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a stalk; only in phrase ekato˚ & ubhato˚; having a stalk on one or on both sides (of a wreath) Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 Dhp-a i.419
    vaṇṭa + ika
    Vaṇṇa
    appearance etc (literally “cover, coating”). There is a considerable fluctuation of meaning, especially between meanings 2, 3, 4. One may group as follows.
    1. -1. colour Snp 447 (meda˚) SN v.216 (chavi˚ of the skin) AN iii.324 (sankha˚) Thag 1, 13 (nīl'abbha˚) Vv 4510 (danta˚ = ivory white); Pv iv.39 Dhp-a ii.3 (aruṇa˚) Snp-a 319 (chavi˚) Vv-a 2 (vicitta˚) Pv-a 215 Six colours are usually enumerated as vaṇṇā, viz. nīla pīta lohitaka odāta mañjeṭṭha pabhassara Ps i.126; cp. the 6 colours under rūpa at Dhs 617 (where kāḷaka for pabbassara) Ja i.12 (chabbaṇṇa-buddha-rasmiyo). Groups of five ‣See under pañca 3 (cp. Ja i.222)
    • dubbaṇṇa of bad colour, ugly SN i.94 AN v.61 Ud 76 Snp 426 Iti 99 Pug 33 Vv-a 9 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 68. O
    • past participle suvaṇṇa of beautiful colour, lovely. AN v.61 Iti 99 Also as term for “silver."-As technical term in descriptions or analyses (perhaps better in meaning “appearance”) in ablative vaṇṇato by colour, with saṇṭhānato and others: Vism 184 (“kāḷa vā odāta vā manguracchavi vā”), 243 = Vb-a 225 Nett 27
    • appearance SN i.115 (kassaka-vaṇṇaṁ abhinimminitvā) Ja i.84 (identical with māṇavaka˚); Pv ii.110 (= chavi-vaṇṇa Pv-a 71); iii.32 (kanakassa sannibha) Vv-a 16 cp. ˚dhātu

  • lustre, splendour (cp. next meaning) DN iii.143 (suvaṇṇa˚, or = 1); Pv ii.962 (na koci devo vaṇṇena sambuddhaṁ atirocati); iii.91 (suriya˚) Vv 291 (= sarīr obhāsa Vv-a 122) Pv-a 10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 44.

    • beauty (cp. vaṇṇavant) DN ii.220 (abhikkanta˚) MN i.142 (identical) DN iii.68 (āyu +); Pv ii.910 (= rūpa-sampatti Pv-a 117) Sometimes combined with other ideals, as (in set of 5) āyu, sukha, yasa, sagga AN iii.47 or āyu, yasa, sukha ādhipacca Ja iv.275 or (4): āyu, sukha, bala AN iii.63

  • expression, look, specified as mukha˚; , e.g. SN iii.2 SN iii.235 SN iv.275f. AN v.342 Pv iii.91 Pv-a 122 Pv-a 6. colour of skin, appearance of body, complexion MN ii.32 (parama), 84 (seṭṭha) AN iii.33 (dibba); iv.396 (identical) Snp 610 (doubtful, more likely because of its combination with sara to below 8!), 686 (anoma˚); Vism 422 (evaṁ˚ = odato vā sāmo vā). cp. ˚pokkharatā. In special sense applied as distinguishing mark of race or species, thus also constituting a mark of class (caste distinction & translatable as “(social) grade, rank caste” ‣See on term Dialogues of the Buddha i.27, 99 sq.; cp. Vedic ārya varṇa and dāsa varṇa RV ii.12, 9; iii.34, 9 ‣See Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 113 and in greater detail Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.247 sq.. The customary enumeration is of 4 such grades, viz. khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā Vin ii.239 AN iv.202 MN ii.128 but cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.99 sq

    • ‣ See also Vin iv.243 (here applied as general term of “grade” to the alms-bowls: tayo pattassa vaṇṇā, viz. ukkaṭṭha, majjhima, omaka; cp. below 7) DN i.13 DN i.91 Ja vi.334 Mil 225 (khattiya˚ brāhmaṇa˚)
    • kind, sort Mil 128 (nānā˚), cp. Vin iv.243 as mentioned under 6

  • timbre (i.e. appearance) of voice, contrasted to sara intonation, accent may occasionally be taken as “vowel.” ‣See AN i.229 (+ sara); iv.307 (identical) Snp 610 (identical, but may mean “colour of skin” ‣See 6), 1132 (giraṁ vaṇṇ’ upasaṁhitaṁ, better than meaning “comment”) Mil 340 (+ sara). 9. constitution, likeness, property; adjective (—˚) “like” aggi˚; like fire Pv iii.66 (= aggi-sadisa Pv-a 203).

    1. -10 (“good impression”) praise Dhp-a i.115 (magga˚) usually combined and contrasted with avaṇṇa blame, e. g DN i.1 DN i.117 DN i.174 AN i.89 AN ii.3 AN iii.264 AN iv.179 AN iv.345 DN-a i.37
    1. -11. reason (“outward appearance”) SN i.206 (= kāraṇa Kindred Sayings i.320) Vv 846 (= kāraṇa Vv-a 336) Pv iv.16 (identical Pv-a 220); iv.148
    1. ˚āroha (large) extent of beauty Snp 420
    • ˚kasiṇa the colour circle in the practice of meditation Vb-a 251
    • ˚kāraka (avaṇṇe) one who makes something (unsightly appear beautiful Ja v.270
    • ˚da giving colour, i.e. beauty Snp 297
    • ˚dada giving beauty AN ii.64
    • ˚dasaka the ten (years) of complexion or beauty (the 3rd decade in the life of man) Vism 619 Ja iv.497
    • ˚dāsī “slave of beauty,” courtezan, prostitute Ja i.156f. 385; ii.367 380; iii.463; vi.300 Dhp-a i.395 Dhp-a iv.88
    • ˚dhātu composition or condition of appearance, specific form material form, natural beauty SN i.131 Pv i.31 Pv-a 137 (= chavivaṇṇa) Dhs-a 15
    • ˚patha ‣See vaṇṇu˚ -pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114 DN i.115 AN i.38 ii.203 Pug 66 Vb-a 486 (defined) Dhp-a iii.389 Pv-a 46
    • ˚bhū place of praise Ja i.84 (for ˚bhūmi ‣See bhū2) -bhūta being of a (natural) species Pv-a 97
    • ˚vādin saying praise, praising DN i.179 DN i.206 AN ii.27 V.164 sq. Vin ii.197
    • ˚sampanna endowed with beauty AN i.244f. 288; ii.250 sq
    cp. Vedic varṇa, of vṛ; ‣See vuṇāti. Customary definition as “vaṇṇane” at Dhtp 572
  • Vaṇṇaka
    neuter
    1. paint, rouge DN ii.142 Thag 1, 960; Dīpavaṁsa vi.70
    from vaṇṇa
    Vaṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. having colour, complexion AN i.246 (dubbaṇṇatā bad c.) Vv-a 9
    abstract from vaṇṇa
    Vaṇṇanā
    feminine
    1. explanation, Commentary, exposition Kp-a 11, 145, 227 Snp-a 65 (pada˚) Pv-a 2-pāḷi˚; explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual analysis (opposite vinicchayakathā Vb-a 291
    2. praise Dhp-a ii.100 (vana˚)
    from vaṇṇeti
    Vaṇṇanīya
    adjective
    1. to be described; ; indescribable Ja v.282
    gerundive formation from vaṇṇeti
    Vaṇṇavant
    adjective
    1. beautiful AN iv.240 (cātummahārājikā devā dīgh'āyukā vaṇṇavanto; variant reading ˚vantā) Pug 34 Pv iii.212 (= rūpasampanna Pv-a 184) Dhp-a i.383
    from vaṇṇa
    Vaṇṇita
    1. explained, commented on Snp-a 368
    2. praised, extolled Pug 69 Ja i.9 Mil 278 (+ thuta & pasattha) Pv-a 116 (= pasaṁsita), 241 Vv-a 156 (= pasaṁsita)
    past participle of vaṇṇeti
    Vaṇṇin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having colour Thag 1, 1190 (accharā nānattavaṇṇiyo “in divers hues”)
      2. belonging to a caste, in cātu˚; (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes MN ii.132
      3. having beauty Snp 551 (uttama˚).

        • having the appearance of AN ii.106 Pug 44 (āma˚, pakka˚) Ja v.322 (vijju˚)
      from vaṇṇa
    Vaṇṇiya
    neuter
    1. colouring; having or giving colour, complexion MN i.446 (in phrase assaṁ assa-damako vaṇṇiyañ ca valiyañ ca anuppavecchati, translated by Neumann as “lässt der Rossebändiger noch die letzte Strählung und Striegelung angedeihen”; still doubtful) AN iii.54 (dubbaṇṇiyaṁ bad complexion) Iti 76 (dub˚ evil colour)
    from vaṇṇeti
    Vaṇṇu
    feminine
    1. is given at Abhp 663 in meaning of “sand.” Occurs only in compound vaṇṇupatha a sandy place, quicksand, swamp Ja i.109 Vv 843 (= vālu-kantāra Vv-a 334); Pv iv.32 (= petena nimmitaṁ mudu-bhūmi-magga Pv-a 250 so read for vaṇṇapatha); shortened to vaṇṇu at Vv 8411 (where MSS vaṇṇa)
    cp. late Sanskrit varṇu, name of a river (-district)
    Vaṇṇeti
    1. to describe, explain, comment on Ja i.2 Ja i.222 Kp-a 168 Snp-a 23 160, 368. 2. to praise, applaud, extol Ja i.59 Ja i.84 Pv-a 131 (+ pasaṁsati).
    2. past participle vaṇṇita
    3. denominative from vaṇṇa
    Vata1
    indeclinable
    1. part of exclamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin iii.39 (puris’ usabho vat’ âyaṁ “for sure he is a human bull”) Thag 2, 316 (abbhutaṁ vata vācaṁ bhāsasi) Snp 178 Snp 191 Snp 358 Vv 4713 Pv i.85 Ja iv.355 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 121 Often combined with other emphatic particles, like aho vata Pv ii.945 (= sādhu vata Pv-a 131); lābhā vata no it is surely a gain that Snp 31 Dhp-a ii.95 vata bho Ja i.81
    Vedic bata, post-Vedic vata
    Vata2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice custom SN i.143 SN i.201 SN iv.180 AN iv.461 (sīla, vata, tapas brahmacariya); v.18 Snp 792 Snp 898 Vv 8424 Ja iii.75 Vv-a 9 Pv-a 60
      2. subbata of good practice Vv 346 cp. patibbata, sīlabbata
      3. manner of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics), e. g aja˚; like a goat Ja iv.318
      4. go˚ like a cow MN i.387 Ja iv.318
      5. vagguli˚ bat practice Ja i.493 Ja iii.235 Ja iv.299
      6. hatthi˚ elephant behaviour Nd1 92 (here as vatta ‣See under vatta1)
        1. ˚pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called guṇa at Mil 90) Ja i.202 (where 7 are enumerated, viz devotion to one’s mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfishness) Mil 90 (where 8 are given in detail, differing from the above) ‣See also vatta1 2 where other sets of 7 & 8 are quoted
        2. ˚samādāna taking up a (good) practice, observance of a vow Ja i.157
        cp. Vedic vrata vow. from; vṛt, meaning later “milk” ‣See Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.341
    Vatavant
    adjective
    1. observant of religious duties, devout Snp 624 (= dhuta-vatena samannāgata Snp-a 467) Dhp 400 (with same explanation at Dhp-a iv.165 as as Snp-a 467)
    vata2 + vant
    Vati1
    feminine
    1. a fence Ja i.153 Ja iii.272 Ja v.472 Vism 186 (vatī, variant reading vati) Snp-a 98 (variant reading for gutti), 148 (variant reading for ˚vatikā)
    later Sanskrit vṛti, from vṛ
    Vati2
    feminine
    1. a choice, boon Dhp-a i.190 (pubbe Sāmā nāma vatiyā pana kāritattā Sāmāvatī nāma jātā)
    from vṛ; , cp. Sanskrit vṛti
    Vatika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having the habit (of), acting like MN i.387 (kukkura˚)
    vata2 + ika
    Vatikā
    feminine
    1. a fence Snp-a 148 (kaṇṭaka˚ & rukkha˚)
    from vati1
    Vatta1
    neuter
    1. that which is done, which goes on or is customary, i.e. duty, service custom, function Vin ii.31 Snp 294 Snp 393 (gahaṭṭha˚) Vism 188 (cetiy’ angaṇa˚ etc.) Dhp-a i.92 (ācariya˚) Vb-a 354 (gata-paccāgata˚) Vv-a 47 (gāma˚)
    2. (for vata2) observance, vow, virtue DN iii.9 (the 7 vattapadāni different from those enumerated under vata-pada) Nd1 66 (sīlañ ca vattañ ca), 92 (hatthi˚ etc. ‣See vata2 2) 104 (˚suddhi), 106 (identical), 188 (giving 8 dhutangas as vattas)
      1. ˚paṭivatta all kinds of practices or duties Ja i.67 ii.103; iii.339; iv.298 Mil 416 (sucarita˚) Dhp-a i.13f.; ii.277; iv.28
      2. ˚bbata the usual custom Dhp-a iv.44 C on SN i.36 § 2 and on SN ii.18 § 4 sq
      3. ˚sampanna one who keeps all observances Vb-a 297 (where the following vattāni are enumerated: 82 khuddaka-vattāni.14 mahā˚, cetiyangaṇa˚, bodhiyangaṇa˚, pānīyamāḷa˚ uposathāgāra˚, āgantuka˚, gamika˚)
      originally past participle of vattati
    Vatta2
    neuter
    1. the mouth (literally “speaker”) Pgdp 55 (sūci-vatto mah'odaro peto)
    cp. Sanskrit vaktra & Pali vattar
    Vatta3
    1. opened wide Vin iii.37 Ja v.268 (vatte mukhe)
    vyatta, Sanskrit vyātta, of vi + ā +
    Vatta4
    1. at Ja v.443 is corrupt for vaṇṭha cripple
    Vattaka
    adjective
    1. doing, exercising, influencing; in vasa˚; having power, negative avasa˚; having no free will involuntary Pv-a 64
    from vatta1
    Vattati

    1. to move, go on, proceed to happen, take place, to be; to be in existence; to fare to do Snp p. 13 (parivesanā vattati distribution of food was in progress) Snp 654 (kammanā vattati loko keeps up, goes on); Pv ii.944 (vatteyya) Mil 338 (na ciraṁ vattate bhavo). gerundive vattabba to be proceeded, or simply “to be” Vin ii.8 (so read for vatth˚): nissāya te v. “thou must remain under the superintendence of others” (Vin. Texts, ii.344)

      • Often equal to atthi or (
      • plural ) santi, i.e. is (are), e.g. Ja vi.504 Snp-a 100 (bāḷhā vedanā vattanti) Pv-a 40
      • ppr.
      • medium vattamāna ‣See sep.
      • past participle vatta.
      • causative vatteti to make go on, to keep up, practise, pursue Snp 404 (etaṁ vattayaṁ pursuing this); frequently in phrases vasaṁ vatteti to exercise power, e.g. Pv-a 89 and cakkaṁ vatteti to wield royal power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & ‣See pavatteti) Snp 554 Snp 684 (vattessati) 693 (dhamma-cakkaṁ) Ja iii.412
      • gerundive vattitabba to be practised Vin ii.32
      • past participle vattita
      Vedic vartate; vṛt. A differentiated Pali form is vaṭṭati cp. Avestan varət to turn, Sanskrit vartana turning vartulā = Latin vertellum = English whorl (German wirtel) & vertil Latin vertex, vortex), q. v Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. verto
    Vattana
    neuter
    1. moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Snp 698 (cakka˚ continuance of royal power); Mhvs 3, 38
    from vattati
    Vattanī
    1. (& ˚i) feminine

      1. a track, a road Ja i.196 Ja i.395 Ja i.429 Ja iii.200
      • kaṇha˚ leaving a black trail, epithet of the fire Ja iii.140
      cp. Sanskrit vartanī, from vṛt
    Vattamāna
    adjective neuter
    1. being in existence, going on, happening at the time; neuter process progress, (as ˚-) in progress Snp-a 4 (˚uppanna) Pv-a 55
    2. ˚˚vacana the present tense Snp-a 16 23
    3. ppr. medium of vattati
    Vattamānaka
    adjective
    1. going on, being, existing; ˚bhave in the present existence or period Mil 291
    from last
    Vattar
    1. one who speaks, a sayer, speaker MN i.470 SN i.63 SN ii.182 SN vi.94 SN vi.198 DN i.139 AN iv.32 AN v.79f. 226 sq. Thag 1, 334 (read ariya-vattā for ˚ vatā) Ja i.134 Snp-a 272 Pv-a 15
    agent noun of vatti, vac
    Vatti
    1. to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for which vadati); future 1st singular vakkhāmi Ja i.346 3rdvakkhati SN i.142 Ja i.356 Ja ii.40 Ja vi.352 Vb-a 51 1st
    2. plural vakkhāma SN iv.72 MN iii.207 Vism 170, 446 3rdvakkhanti Vin ii.1 pte.
    3. future vakkhamāna Pv-a 18-
    4. aorist 1st singular avacaṁ Ja iii.280 Dhp-a iii.194 & avocaṁ Thag 2, 124 Vv 797 SN i.10 Dhp-a iii.285 2ndavaca Thag 2, 415 avoca Dhp 133 & avacāsi Vv 357 539; 3rdavaca Ja i.294 Pv ii.319 Pv-a 65 (mā a.); avoca Thag 2 494 SN i.150 Snp p. 78 Ja ii.160 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 49,; avacāsi Ja vi.525 1st
    5. plural avacumha & avocumha; MN ii.91 MN iii.15 2ndavacuttha Vin i.75 (mā a.); ii.297 Ja ii.48 Dhp-a i.73 Dhp-a iv.228 & avocuttha Ja i.176 Mil 9 3rd
    6. plural avacuṁ Ja v.260 & avocuṁ MN ii.147

      • infinitive vattuṁ Snp 431 Ja vi.351 Vism 522 = Vb-a 130 (vattukāma) Snp-a 414 DN-a i.109 Dhp-a i.329 Dhp-a ii.5
      • absolutive vatvā Snp-a 398 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 73, & vatvāna Snp p. 78.
      • gerundive vattabba Mil 276 (kiṁ vattabbaṁ what is there to be said about it? i.e. it goes without saying) Snp-a 123 174, 178 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 27 Pv-a 92
      • ppr.
      • medium vuccamāna Vin i.60 Vin iii.221 Pv-a 13
      • passive vuccati DN i.168 DN i.245 Dhp 63 Mhvs 9, 9; 34, 81 (vuccate, variant reading uccate) Ja i.129 (vuccare, 3rd
      • plural ) Pv-a 24 Pv-a 34 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 76; -
      • past participle vutta (q.v.)
      • causative vāceti to make speak, i.e. to read out to cause to read; also to teach, to instruct Snp 1018 Snp 1020 Ja i.452 (read) Pv-a 97
      • past participle vācita (q.v.) Desidentical vavakkhati ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 184 = Sanskrit vivakṣati to wish to call DN ii.256
      Vedic vakti, vac
    Vattika = vatika
    1. Nd1 89 (having the habit of horses, elephants etc.)
    Vattita
    neuter
    1. that which goes on, round (of existence), revolution Mil 226
    from vatteti
    Vattin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. engaged in, having power over, making, doing; only in compounds. cakka˚ & vasa˚; (q.v.)
    from vṛt
    Vattha1
    neuter
    1. cloth; clothing, garment raiment; also collectively: clothes MN i.36f. AN i.132 AN i.209 AN i.286 AN ii.85 AN ii.241 AN iii.27 (odātaṁ), 50 (kāsikaṁ), 386 (kāsāyaṁ); iv.60, 186, 210; v.61 sq. (ubhatobhāga-vimaṭṭhaṁ = MN ii.13 reading vimaddha; with the expression cp. ubhato-bhāga-vimutta) Snp 295 Snp 304 Kp-a 237 (˚ṁ pariyodāyati, simile) Pv-a 43 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 70; Sdhp 217
    2. alla˚ fresh, clean clothes Dhp-a iv.220
    3. ahata˚ new clothes Ja i.50 Dāvs ii.39; dibba˚; heavenly i.e. exquisite dresses Pv-a 23 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 53
    4. plural vatthāni garments, clothes Snp 64 Snp 287 Snp 924 Pug 57 (kāsāyāni) Dhp-a i.219 (their uses, from a new dress down to a bit of rag)
    5. hangings, tapestry Ja iv.304
    6. On vattha in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 132
      1. ˚guyha “that which is concealed by a cloth,” i.e. the pudendum DN i.106 Snp 1022 DN-a i.275 (= angajātaṁ Bhagavato ti vāraṇass’ eva kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṁ paduma-gabbha-samānaṁ)
      2. ˚ yuga a pair of garments Ja iv.172 Dāvs i.34
      3. ˚lakkhaṇa fortune telling from clothes Snp-a 362
      • ˚sannidhi storing up of clothes DN i.6 Nd1 372 DN-a i.82
      • ˚sutta the Suttanta on clothes (i.e. with the parable of the clothes vatth’ upama-sutta) MN i.36f. quoted at Vism 377 and Snp-a 119
      Vedic vastra, from vas, vaste to clothe; Indogermanic *ṷes, enlargement of *eu (: Latin ex-uo); cp. Latin vestis “vest(-ment)”; Goth wasjan to clothe; wasti dress
    Vattha2
    1. as past participle of vasati1 occurs only in compound nivattha. The two passages in Pv-a where vattha is printed as pp (vatthāni vattha) are to be read as vattha-nivattha (Pv-a 46 Pv-a 62).

    Vatthabba
    1. at Vin ii.8 is to be spelt vattabba ‣See vattati
    Vatthi
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. the bladder Vin iii.117 Ja i.146 Snp 195 Vism 144 = Dhs-a 117 Vism 264, 345 (mutta˚) 362 DN-a i.161 Vb-a 248
      2. the pudendum ‣See ˚kosa

  • a clyster (-bag) ‣See ˚kamma.

    1. ˚kamma (ṁ karoti) to use a clyster Vin i.216
    • ˚kosa a membranous sheath enveloping the sexual organ of a male DN-a i.275 (˚kosena paṭicchanna vatthaguyha: so read for ˚kesena) Vv-a 252 (˚mukha orifice of the pudendum of an elephant)
    Vedic vasti in meaning 1; the other meanings later
  • Vatthu1
    neuter
    1. literally “ground,” hence 1. (literally) object, real thing, property, thing, substance (cp. vatthu2!) AN ii.209 (khetta˚, where khetta in literally sense, cp. No. 2). Here belongs the definition of kāma as twofold: vatthu-kāma and kilesa-kāma, or desire for realities, objective kāma, and desire as property of stained character, i.e. subjective kāma, e.g. Nd1 1 Snp-a 99 112 Dhs-a 62
    • On vatthu as general philos term cp. Dhs. trsln2§§ 455, 679, 1229, also introduction p. 86 Compendium 15, 31, 1741
    • (applied meaning) object, item Vin i.121 (antima-vatthuṁ ajjhāpannaka guilty of an extreme offence?); v.138 (the 10 āghāta-vatthūni, as at Vb 86) DN iii.252 (seven niddesa˚), 255 (eight kusīta˚) 258 (eight dāna˚) SN ii.41 SN ii.56f. Vb 71 (cakkhu˚ etc.) 306 sq., 353; Nett 114 (ten); Snp-a 172 Dhp-a iv.2 (akkosa˚) Pv-a 8 Pv-a 20 (dāna˚), 26 (left out in identical passage Kp-a 209) 29, 65 (alabbhaneyya˚), 96 (identical), 119, 121 (iṭṭha˚), 177 220. cp. ˚bhūta

  • occasion for, reason, ground AN ii.158 (+ khetta in figuratively sense!
    1. āyatana & adhikaraṇa); iv.334 DN i.13f. (aṭṭhādasahi vatthūhi etc.) Ja ii.5 (avatthumhi chandaṁ mâkari do not set your heart on what is unreasonable); vatthunā instrumental because Pv-a 118
    • vatthuto ablative on account of Pv-a 241 Pv-a 4. basis, foundation, seat, (objective) substratum, substance element Ja i.146 (kāyo paridevānaṁ v.) Vb-a 404 (+ ārammaṇa) ‣See most of the compounds
    • subjectmatter subject, story, account Snp-a 4 Dhp-a ii.66 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 263 Pv-a 269. cp. ˚gāthā & titles like Petavatthu Vimānavatthu
    1. ˚kata made a foundation or basis of, practised thoroughly Ja ii.61 Ja v.14 and passim (+ bhāvita etc.). In phrase tālāvatthukata (= tāla avatthu kata) vatthu means foundation, basis, ground to feed and live on, thus “a palm deprived of its foundation” ‣See refs. under tāla
    • gāthā the stanzas of the story, the introductory (explanatory, essential to its understanding) stanzas something like “prologue” Snp-a 483 575 (preceding Snp 699 & 976)
    • ˚dasaka tenfold substance or material basis Vb-a 22
    • ˚bhūta being an object, i.e. subject to Ja v.210
    • ˚rūpa substance or substratum of matter material form Vism 561, 564 Vb-a 22 172
    • ˚visadakiriyā clearing of the foundation or fundamentals purification of the elements Vb-a 283 = Dhs-a 76 (˚kiriyatā; translationExpositor 101 “cleansing of things or substance”); Vism 128 Vb-a 276
    Classical Sanskrit vastu, from vas1
  • Vatthu2
    site, ground, field, plot Vin iii.50 (ārāma˚ & vihāra˚), 90 (identical) Snp 209 Snp 473 (sakhetta˚, cp. vatthu1 4), 769 (khetta +), 858 (identical) Thag 1, 957 (khetta + vatthu, cp. Psalms of the Brethren p. 3371 & Vin Texts iii.389 sq.) Mil 279 (khetta˚ a plot of arable land) DN-a i.78 (contrasted with khetta ‣See khetta 1 and cp. vatthu1 1) Pv-a 88 (gehassa the back yard of the house); haunted by fairies (parigaṇhanti) DN ii.87
    1. ˚kamma “act concerning sites,” i.e. preparing the ground for building DN i.12 (translation: fixing on lucky sites for dwellings), cp. DN-a i.98: akaṭa-vatthumhi gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṁ -devatā the gods protecting the grounds field-gods, house-gods Pv i.41 (= ghara-vatthuṁ adhivatthā devatā Pv-a 17)
    2. ˚parikiraṇa offerings over the site of a house (“consecrating sites” translation) DN i.12 (cp DN-a i.98 = balikamma-karaṇaṁ)
    3. ˚vijjā the science of (building-) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i.e. lucky) site for a house DN i.9 ‣See explanation at DN-a i.93 SN iii.239 Nd1 372; Vism 269 (in comparison); Kp-a 237 ‣See also Dialogues of the Buddha ii.92 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152
    Vedic vāstu; from vas
    Vatthuka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having a site or foundation or ground, in ucca˚; (high) and nīca˚; (low) Vin ii.117 120; Mhvs 33, 87
    2. having its ground in founded on, being of such & such a nature or composition SN iv.67 (vācā˚); Ps i.130 (micchādiṭṭhi˚, correct in Index Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908!) Vb 319 (uppanna˚; + ārammaṇa), 392 (micchādiṭṭhi˚) Vb-a 403 (uppanna˚ etc.)
    from vatthu1
    Vada
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking, in compound vaggu˚; speaking pleasantly Snp 955 (cp. Nd1 446 Snp-a 571 = sundaravada); suddhiṁ˚; of clean speech Snp 910
    from vad
    Vadaññu
    adjective
    1. literally “(easily) spoken to,” addressable, i.e. liberal bountiful, kind SN i.43 AN ii.59 AN ii.61f.; iv.271 sq., 285 289, 322 Snp 487 Pv iv.133, 342, 1011, 154 Vv-a 281
    cp. Sanskrit vadāniya, which also in Pali avadāniya
    Vadaññutā
    feminine
    1. bounty, kindness, liberality; negative ; stinginess. AN v.146 AN v.148f. Vb 371
    abstract from vadaññu
    Vadati
    1. to speak, say, tell AN iv.79 Snp 1037 Snp 1077f. Pug 42 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 16 Pv-a 39; Pot. 1st singular vade (so read for vado? MN i.258 3rd singular vadeyya Pv i.33 aorist 3rd
    2. plural vadiṁsu Pv-a 4

      • cp. abhi˚, upa˚, pa˚, vi˚
      • Another form (not
      • causative ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 1392) is vadeti DN i.36 Vin ii.1 Snp 825 Snp p. 140 (kiṁ vadetha) Ja i.294
      • imperative vadehi Pv-a 62 Pot.
      • medium 1st
      • plural vademase DN iii.197
      • future vadessati Snp 351
      • aorist vadesi Dhp-a iii.174
      • A specific Pāli formation is a
      • causative vādiyati in active and med. sense (all forms only in Gāthā style) e.g. indic. vādiyati Snp 824 = 892, 832; explained as vadati Snp-a 541 542, or katheti bhaṇati etc. (the typical Niddesa explanation of vadati ‣See Nd2 555) Nd1 161. In contracted (& shortened) form Pot. 2; nd singular vajjesi (*vādiyesi you might tell, i.e. please tell Pv ii.116 (= vadeyyāsi Pv-a 149); iii.67 (same explanation p. 203). The other Pot forms from the same base are the following: 1st singular vajjaṁ Thag 2, 308 2nd singular vajjāsi Thag 2, 307 Ja iii.272 Ja vi.19 and vajja Thag 2, 323 3rd singular vajjā Snp 971 (cp. Nd1 498) Ja vi.526 (= vadeyya Commentary ); 3rd
      • plural vajjuṁ Snp 859 (= vadeyyuṁ katheyyuṁ etc. Nd2 555) Ja v.221
      • causative vādeti to make sound, to play (a musical instrument) Ja i.293 ii.110, 254 (vādeyyāma we might play); Ap 31 (
      • aorist vādesuṁ) Pv-a 151 (vīṇaṁ vādento)
      • passive vajjati (*vādiyati) to be played or sounded Ja i.13 (vajjanti bheriyo); Ap 31 (ppr. vajjamāna &
      • aorist vajjiṁsu).; Another form of ppr.
      • medium (or Pass.) is vadāna (being called, so-called) which is found in poetry only (contracted from vadamāna) at Vin i.36 = J i.83.
      • past participle udita2 & vādita; (q.v.)
      • causative II. vādāpeti to cause to be played Mhvs 25, 74 (tūriyaṁ)
      vad, Vedic vadati; Dhtp 134 vada = vacana
    Vadana
    neuter
    1. speech, utterance Vv-a 345 (+ kathana)
    from vad
    Vadāna
    1. ‣See vadati
    Vadāniya
    1. ‣See a˚;
    another form of vadaññu
    Vadāpana
    neuter
    1. making somebody speak or something sound Dhs-a 333 (we should better read vād˚;)
    from vādāpeti, causative II. of vadati
    Vaddalikā
    feminine
    1. rainy weather Vin i.3 Ja vi.52 (locative vaddalike) Dhp-a iii.339 Vb-a 109
    2. cp. late Sanskrit vārdala & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vardalikā MVastu; iii.301; Divy 500
    Vaddha1
    adjective-noun
    1. grown, old; an Elder; venerable, respectable; one who has authority At Ja i.219 three kinds of vaddha are distinguished: one by nature (jāti˚), one by age (vayo˚), one by virtue (guṇa˚) Ja v.140 (= paññāya vuddha Commentary ). Usually combined with apacāyati to respect the aged, e.g. Ja i.219 and in compound vaddh-apacāyika respecting the elders or those in authority Ja iv.94 and ˚apacāyin identical Snp 325 (= vaddhānaṁ apaciti-karaṇa Snp-a 332) Dhp 109 Dhp-a ii.239 (= buḍḍhatare guṇavuddhe apacāyamāna) cp. jeṭṭh’ apacāyin
    2. glad, joyful; in compound ˚bhūta gladdened, cheerful Ja v.6
    past participle of vaḍḍhati ‣See also vaḍḍha, vuḍḍha & vuddha. The root given by Dhtp (166) for; vṛdh is vadh in meaning “vuddhi”
    Vaddha2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. a (leather) strap, thong Ja ii.154 (variant readings baddha, bandhana bandha, vaṭṭa). Occurs as aṁsa˚; shoulder strap at Ap 310, where ed. prints baddha (= baddha2)
      1. ˚maya consisting of a strap, made of leather Ja ii.153
      cp. Vedic vardhra in meaning “tape”
    Vaddhaka
    1. in compound aṁsa˚; “shoulder strap” should be the uniform reading for a series of different spellings (˚vaṭṭaka, ˚baddhaka, ˚bandhaka) at Vin i.204 ii.114; iv.170. cp. Geiger, Zeitschrift fur Buddhismus iv.107
    vaddha + ka
    Vaddhana
    neuter
    1. increase, furthering Ja iii.422 (kula˚); Sdhp 247 (pīti˚), 307 (identical)
    from vṛdh ‣See the usual vaḍḍhana
    Vaddhava
    neuter
    1. joy, pleasure Ja v.6 (but Commentary = paṇḍita-bhāva)
    from vaddha1 2
    Vaddhavya
    neuter
    1. (old) age Ja ii.137 (= vuddhabhāva, mahallakatā Commentary )
    from vaddha1 1
    Vaddhi
    1. in anta˚; at Ja i.260 is to be read as vaṭṭi
    Vaddheti
    1. to cut off, is Kern’s proposed reading ‣See; iToevoegselen s.v. at Ja vi.527 (siro vaddhayitvāna) for vajjheti (Text reading vajjhayitvāna
    from vardh to cut, cp. vaḍḍhaka & vaḍḍhakī
    Vadha
    1. striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution DN iii.176 AN ii.113 Pug 58 Ja ii.347 Mil 419 (˚kata) Dhp-a i.69 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-ghāta), 80, 296 Dhp-a ii.39 Vb-a 382
    • vadhaṁ dadāti to flog Ja iv.382-atta˚ self-destruction SN ii.241
    • piti˚ parricide DN-a i.153
    • miga˚ hunting Ja i.149
    1. ˚bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384 in meaning “bandhana.” ‣See AN ii.209 v.206 Snp 242 (vadha-cheda-bandhana; v. is explained at Snp-a 285 as “sattānaṁ daṇḍ’ ādīhi ākoṭanan” i.e. beating) 623 (= poṭhana Snp-a 467) Ja i.435 Ja iv.11 Vb-a 97
    from vadh
    Vadhaka
    1. slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer SN iii.112 (in simile); iv.173 (identical) AN iv.92 (identical); Thag 2 347 DN iii.72 (˚citta); Kp-a 27 Vv-a 72 (˚cetanā murderous intention); Vism 230, 231 (in sim.); Sdhp 58. feminine vadhikā Ja v.425 (
    2. plural ˚āyo)
    3. from vadh
    Vadhati
    1. to strike, punish; kill, slaughter slay; imperative 2nd
    2. plural vadhetha Vism 314;
    3. absolutive vadhitvā MN i.159 DN i.98 Ja i.12 Ja iv.67 Snp-a 257 (hiṁsitvā +)
    4. future vadhissati Mhvs 25, 62;
    5. aorist vadhi Ja i.18 (cp. ud-abbadhi);
    6. conditional 1st singular vadhissaṁ Mil 221

      • grd vajjha ‣See a˚;.
      • causative vadheti Ja i.168 Mil 109
      • past participle vadhita
      Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of “hiṁsā”
    Vadhita
    1. smitten Thag 1, 783 = MN ii.73 (not with Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. = vyathita)
    past participle of vadheti
    Vadhukā
    feminine
    1. a daughter-in-law, a young wife AN ii.78 Dhp-a iii.260
    from vadhū
    Vadhū
    feminine
    1. a daughter-in-law Vv-a 123
    Vedic vadhū; to Lithuanian vedù to lead into one’s house
    Vana1

    neuter

    the forest; wood; as a place of pleasure sport (“wood”), as well as of danger & frightfulness (“jungle”), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness (“forest”). Of (fanciful) definitions of vana may be mentioned: Snp-a 24 (vanute vanotī ti vanaṁ); Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṁ) Dhs-a 364 (taṁ taṁ ārammaṇaṁ vanati bhajati allīyatī ti vanaṁ, yācati vā ti vanaṁ i.e. vana2

    1. . vanatho ti vyañjanena padaṁ vaḍḍhitaṁ … balava-taṇhāy'etaṁ nāma) Dhp-a iii.424 (mahantā rukkhā vanaṁ nāma, khuddakā tasmiṁ vane ṭhitattā vanathā nāma etc., with further distinguishing detail concerning the allegorical meanings)
    • DN ii.256 (bhikkhūṇaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ) AN i.35 AN i.37 Dhp 283 (also as vana2) Snp 272 Snp 562 (sīho nadati vane), 1015 (identical), 684 (Isivhaya v.); Snp p. 18 (Jetavana), p. 115 (Icchānangala) Thag 2, 147 (Añjanavana; a wood near Sāketa with a vihāra) Ja v.37 (here meaning beds of lotuses) Mil 219 (vanaṁ sodheti to clear a jungle) Dhs 1059 (“jungle” = taṇhā); Pv ii.65 (arañña˚-gocara); Vism 424 (Nandana˚ etc.) Dhp-a iv.53 (taṇhā˚ the jungle of lust). Characterized as amba˚; mango grove DN ii.126 and passim; ambāṭaka˚; plum grove Vin ii.17
    • udumbara of figs Dhp-a i.284
    • tapo˚ forest of ascetics Thag-a 136 Dhp-a iv.53
    • nāga˚ elephant forest MN i.175
    • brahā wild forest AN i.152 AN iii.44 Vv 633 Ja v.215
    • mahā˚ great forest Thag 2, 373 (rahitaṁ & bhiṁsanakaṁ)
    • ; vanataraṁ (with compar. suffix) thicker jungle, denser forest Mil 269 (vanato vanataraṁ pavisāma)
    • On similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 133. cp. vi˚;
    1. ˚anta the border of the forest, the forest itself Snp 708 Snp 709 Pv ii.310 (= vana Commentary )
    2. ˚kammika one who works in the woods Ja iv.210 (˚purisa); v.427, 429
    3. ˚gahana jungle thicket Vism 647 (in simile)
    4. ˚gumba a dense cluster of trees Vv 817 (cp. Vv-a 315)
    5. ˚caraka a forester Snp-a 51 (in simile)
    6. ˚cetya a shrine in the wood Ja v.255
    • ˚timira forest darkness; in metaphor ˚matt-akkhin at Ja iv.285 = v.284, which Kern (Toevoegselen s.v.) changes into ˚patt-akkhin, i.e. with eyes like the leaves of the forest darkness. Kern compares Sanskrit vanajapattr'ākṣī Mbh i.171, 43, and vanaja-locanā Avad. Kalp. 3, 137. The Cy. explains are “vana-timira-puppha-samān’ akkhī, and “giri-kaṇṇika-samāna-nettā”; thus taking it as name of the plant Clitoria ternatea
    • ˚dahaka (& ˚dahana burning the forest (aggi) Kp-a 21 (in simile) -devatā forest deva SN iv.302
    • ˚ppagumba a forest grove Vb-a 196
    • ˚ppati (& vanaspati); cp. Vedic vanaspati Prakrit vaṇapphai
      1. “lord of the forest,” a forest tree; as vanappati only at Vin iii.47 otherwise vanaspati, e. g SN iv.302 (osadhī + tiṇa + v.; opposed to herbs, as in R.V.) AN i.152 Ja i.329 Ja iv.233 (tiṇa-latā-vanaspatiyo) Dhp-a i.3
      • ˚pattha a forest jungle DN i.71 DN iii.38 DN iii.49 DN iii.195 MN i.16 MN i.104 Vin ii.146 AN i.60 AN iii.138 (arañña˚) Pug 59 68 DN-a i.210
      • ˚pantha a jungle road AN i.241
      • ˚bhaṅga gleanings of the wood, i.e. presents of wild fruit & flowers AN iv.197
      • ˚mūla a wild root DN i.166 (+ phala) AN i.241 (identical) Mil 278
      • ˚rati delight in the forest Dhp-a ii.100
      • ˚ vaṇṇanā praise of the jungle Dhp-a ii.100
      • ˚vāsin forest-dweller Snp-a 56 (Mahā-tissatthera)
      • ˚saṇḍa jungle-thicket, dense jungle DN i.87 117 SN iii.109 (tibba v. avijjāya adhivacana) AN iii.30 Ja i.82 Ja i.170 Dhp-a i.313 Dhp-a ii.100
      Vedic vana The Pali (edifying) etymology clearly takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically equals it with vana2 as an allegorical expression (“jungle”) to taṇhā (e.g. Dhs-a 364 on Dhs 1059 Dhp-a iii.424 on Dhp 283)
    • The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it “sambhattiyaṁ,” i.e. as meaning companionship
    Vana2

    neuter

    1. lust, desire. In exegetical literature mixed up with vana1 ‣See definitions of vana1
    • The word to the Pāli Buddhist forms a connection between vana and nibbāna, which is felt as a quâsi derivation from nibbana nis + vana ‣See nibbana & cp. nibbāna II. B 1
    • S; i.180 (so 'haṁ vane nibbanatho visallo) Snp 1131 (nibbana) Dhp 334 Thag 1, 691 (vanā nibbanaṁ āgataṁ)
    • A
    • denominative from vana2 is vanāyati (like vanīyati from vaṇi)
    van; vanati & vanoti to desire = Avestan vanaiti Latin venus, Old High German wini friend (: English winsome, attractive wunsc = English wish, giwon = English wont; also “to win.” The spelling sometimes is vaṇ ‣See vaṇi The definition at Dhtp 523 is “yācane” (i.e. from begging), at Dhtm 736 “yācāyaṁ”
    Vanaka
    1. (-) adjective

      1. belonging to the forest, forestlike; adjective in compound ku˚; (kubbanaka, q.v.) brushwood Snp 1134
      from vana1
    Vanati, Vanute, Vanoti
    1. to desire, love, wish, aim at ask for Snp-a 24 (vanute & vanoti) Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati, allīyati). causative vanayati Kp-a 111
    2. van; Sanskrit vanoti & vanute ‣See also vana; 2, vaṇi, vaṇeti
    Vanatha
    1. underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit meaning, except in exegesis of Dhp 283 at Dhp-a iii.424 q.v. under vana1. Another definition is given at Snp-a 24 “taṇhā pariyuṭṭhāna-vasena vanaṁ tanotī ti vanatho taṇh’ ānusayass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ."-The figuratively meaning is “lust, desire,” ‣See e.g. SN i.186 Thag 1, 338 Dhp 344 Snp 16 (˚ja) Dhs 1059 (as epithet of taṇhā) Ja ii.205 (vanathaṁ na kayirā); Nett 81, 82
    • nibbanatha free from desire SN i.180 Dhs-a 364
    vana + tha; same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. MVastu i.204
    Vanāyati
    1. to desire, wish, covet, to hanker after MN i.260 SN iii.190 ‣See also allīyati
    denominative from vana2, cp, vanāyati
    Vanika
    1. = vanaka; only in compound nāga˚; one belonging to the elephant forest, i e. an elephant-hunter MN i.175 MN iii.132
    Vanin
    adjective-noun
    1. poor begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant Ja vi.232 (= vanibbaka Commentary )
    either from Sanskrit vani (= Pali vaṇi) in meaning “begging,” or poetical abbreviation of vaṇibbin
    Vanibbaka ‣See vaṇibbaka
    Vanīyati
    1. to desire Ja vi.264 Commentary (pattheti), 270 (hadayaṁ vanīyati, variant reading dhanīyati: cp. allīyati)
    • ‣ See also vanati & vaṇeti;
    denominative from vani = Pali vaṇi
    Vaneja
    1. born in the woods Ja ii.446
    vane ( locative of vana1) + ja
    Vanta
    1. vomited, or one who has vomited Mil 214 Pv-a 80 As
    2. neuter vomit at Vin i.303
    3. (figuratively given up, thrown up, left behind, renounced MN i.37 (+ catta, mutta & pahīna). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vāntī-bhāva, syn with prahāna Avs ii.188
      1. ˚āda refuse-feeder, crow Ja ii.439
      • ˚āsa one who has given up all wishes, an Arahant Dhp 97 (= sabbā āsā iminā vantā Dhp-a i.187)
      • ˚āsika eating what has been vomited, a certain class of Petas Mil 294
      • ˚kasāva one who has left behind all fault Dhp 10 (= chaḍḍita˚ Dhp-a i.82)
      • ˚gamana at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 read either as v’ antagamana or c’ anta˚
      • ˚mala stainless Dhp 261
      • ˚lokāmisa renouncing worldly profit Dhp 378
      past participle of vamati
    Vandaka
    adjective
    1. disposed to veneration; feminine ˚ikā Thag 2, 337
    2. from vand
    Vandati
    1. to greet respectfully, salute, to pay homage, to honour, respect to revere, venerate, adore Snp 366 Snp 547 Snp 573 Snp 1028 Pv ii.16; Mhvs 15, 14 (+ pūjeti) Mil 14 Snp-a 191 Pv-a 53 (sirasā with the head, a very respectful way of greeting), 67 Vv-a 71 imperative vanda Vv 211 (= abhivādaya Vv-a 105);
    2. plural vandantu Snp 573 ppr. vandamāna Snp 598
    3. aorist vandi Snp 252 Ja i.88 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 275; infinitive vandituṁ Pv-a 77
    4. gerundive vandiya (neg ;) Vin ii.162
    5. causative II. vandāpeti to cause somebody to pay homage Ja i.88 Ja iii.11
    6. past participle vandita
    7. vand, originally identical with vad; the definition at Dhtp (135 & 588) is “abhivādana & thuti”
    Vandana
    neuter & Vandanā
    • feminine

      1. salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration AN i.294 (ā); ii.203 (+ pūjā) Ja i.88 Pug 19 24 Mhvs 15, 18 Mil 377 Pv-a i.53 Snp-a 492 Thag-a 256 Sdhp 221 Sdhp 540
      from vand, cp. Vedic vandana
    Vandāpana
    neuter
    1. causing to do homage Ja i.67
    from vandāpeti; causative of vandati
    Vandita
    1. saluted, revered, honoured, paid homage to; as neuter homage, respect, veneration Snp 702 (akkuṭṭha +) Thag 2, 388 (identical) Ja i.88
    2. past participle of vandati
    Vanditar
    1. one who venerates or adores, a worshipper Ja vi.207 (vandit’ assa = vanditā bhaveyya Commentary )
    agent noun from vandita
    Vapakassati
    1. ‣See vavakassati
    Vapati1
    1. to sow Snp p. 13 (kasati +) Ja i.150 (nivāpaṁ vapitvā) Pv-a 139 passive vappate SN i.227 (yādisaṁ v. bījaṁ tādisaṁ harate phalaṁ), and vuppati Vedic upyate
      1. Thag 1, 530 past participle vutta.
      2. causative I. vāpeti ‣See
      3. past participle vāpita1.
      4. causative II. vapāpeti to cause to be sown Vin iii.131 (khettaṁ) Ja iv.276 (sāliṁ)
      5. vap, Vedic vapate. Definition at Dhtp 192; bījanikkhepe
    Vapati2
    1. to shear, mow, to cut, shave: only in past participle of
    2. causative vāpita2 (q.v.)
    3. vap, probably identical with vapati1
    Vapana
    neuter
    1. sowing Snp-a 137 Dhp-a iii.220 (˚kassaka) Pv-a 8
    from vap
    Vapayāti
    1. to go away, to disappear, only at Vin. i.2 = Kvu 186 (kankhā vapayanti sabbā; cp. id p. MVastu ii.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti)
    vi + apa + yā
    Vappa1
    1. masculine or neuter

      1. to be sown, sowing; or soil to be sown on, in paṁsu˚; sowing on light soil & kalala˚; on heavy soil Snp-a 137
      • Note. The definition of a root vapp at Dhtm 541 with “vāraṇe refers to Pali vappa bank of a river (Abhp 1133) = Sanskrit vapra, which is not found in our texts
      1. ˚kamma the act or occupation of sowing Ja i.340 (+ kasi-kamma)
      2. ˚kāla sowing time Snp p. 13 SN i.172 (= vapanakāla, bīja-nikkhepa-kāla Snp-a 137)
      3. ˚maṅgala ploughing festival Ja i.57 Dhp-a ii.113 Snp-a 141
      originally
    2. gerundive from vap = Sanskrit vāpya
    Vappa2
    1. a tear, tears Vin i.345 (vappaṁ puñchitvā wiping the tears)
    cp. Epic. & Classical Sanskrit bāṣpa
    Vabbhācitaṁ
    1. is a at MN i.172 read perhaps better as vambhayitaṁ ‣See p. 545. Neumann translates only “thus spoken” (i.e. bhāsitam etaṁ)
    Vamati
    1. [vam, Indogermanic *ṷemo, cp. Latin vomo, vomitus = vamathu; English emetic; Old Icelandic vaema seasickness. The definition at Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is “uggiraṇa” to vomit, eject, throw out, discharge Snp 198 = J i.146 Ja v.255 (future vamissati); Pv iv.354 (= uḍḍayati chaḍḍayati Pv-a 256).
    2. causative vameti Mil 169
    3. past participle vanta.

    Vamathu
    1. vomiting; discharged food Pv-a 173 (˚bhatta; + ucchiṭṭha˚)
    from vam
    Vamana
    neuter
    1. an emetic DN i.12 AN v.219 cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 452
    from vam
    Vamanīya
    1. one who has to take an emetic Mil 169
    gerundive of vamati; cp. Sanskrit vāmanīya; ā often interchanges with a before 1 & m, like causative vameti vāmeti
    Vambhanā
    feminine
    1. contempt, despite Vin iv.6 MN i.402 (att'ukkaṁsana: para-vambhana) Nd2 505; Vism 29 Vb-a 484 Pgdp 100
    • Spelt vamhanā at Ja i.454 (vamhana-vacana) & at Dhs-a 396 (khuṁsana˚)
    abstract from vambheti
    Vambhanīya
    adjective
    1. to be despised, wretched, miserable Pv-a 175 Pv-a 176
    gerundive of vambheti
    Vambhayita
    neuter
    1. being despised or reviled MN i.172 Snp 905 Nd1 319 (= nindita, garahita, upavādita)
    past participle of vambheti
    Vambhin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. despising, treating with contempt, disparaging MN i.95 (para˚, opposite to att’ ukkaṁ- saka)
    from vambh
    Vambheti
    (& Vamheti)
    1. to treat with contempt despise, revile, scold; usually either combined with khuṁseti or opposed to ukkaṁseti, e.g. Vin ii.18 Vin iv.4 MN i.200 (= Sn 132 avajānāti), 402 sq. DN i.90 AN ii.27f. Thag 1, 621 DN-a i.256 (= hīḷeti) Dhp-a iv.38 Vv-a 348- past participle vambhayita

      • vamheti is found at Ja i.191 Ja i.356 cp. vamhana
      • Note. The spelling bh interchanges with that of h (vamheti), as ambho shows various amho Trenckner (introduction to MN 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as
      • Burmese manuscripts reading) the preference over vamheti (as SS reading) Morris’ note on vambheti in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology
      causative of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam ?). There is a form vambha given by Sanskrit lexicographers as a dialectical word for vaṁśa Could it be a contraction from vyambheti = vi + denominative from ambho 2, participle of contempt?-The Dhtp (602 defines vambh as “garahāyaṁ”
    Vamma
    neuter
    1. armour Ja ii.22
    Vedic varman, from vṛ; to cover, enclose
    Vammika
    adjective
    1. = vammin Vin i.342
    from vamma
    Vammita
    1. armoured, clad in armour Ja i.179 (assa); ii.315 (hatthi); iii.8 v.301, 322 DN-a i.40
    past participle of vammeti, cp. Sanskrit varmita
    Vammin
    adjective
    1. wearing armour, armoured Ja iv.353 (= keṭaka-phalaka-hattha Commentary ); v.259 373; vi.25 Mil 331 Vammika & vammika;
    from vamma; Vedic varmin
    Vammīka
    vammika;
    masculine> &
    • neuter [cp. Vedic valmīka; Indogermanic *ṷorm(āi); cp. Avestan maoiris, Sanskrit vamraḥ, Latin formica, Welsh. mor; all of same origin & meaning ant-hill: (a); ˚ika : MN i.142f. Ja iii.85 Ja iv.30 (˚bila the ant’s hole); v.163

      • (b) ˚ika : Ja i.432 Ja iv.30 Vism 183 (described), 304 (˚muddani), 446 Dhp-a ii.51 Dhp-a iii.208 iv.154
    Vammeti
    1. to dress in armour, to armour Ja i.180 Ja ii.94 (mangala-hatthiṁ). past participle vammita
    2. denominative from vamma
    Vamha
    1. bragging, boasting, despising Ja i.319 (˚vacana)
    for vambha ‣See vambheti
    Vaya1
    1. (& vayo) neuter

      1. age, especially young age, prime youth; meaning “old age” when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old age being jarā. Three “ages” or “periods of life” are usually distinguished, viz. paṭhama˚; youth, majjhima˚; middle age, pacchima˚; old age, e.g. at Ja i.79 Vism 619 Dhp-a iii.133
      • vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age old DN i.48 (= pacchima-vayaṁ anuppatta DN-a i.143) Snp
      • past participle 50, 92
      • cp. Dhp 260 Ja i.138 (vayo-harā kesā) Vism 619 (the 3 vayas with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mhvs 2, 26 (ekūnatiṁso vayasā 29 years of age) Pv-a 5 (paṭhama-vaye when quite young) 36 (identical; just grown up). In compounds. vaya˚
      1. ˚kalyāṇa charm of youth Dhp-a i.387
      • ˚ppatta come of age, fit to marry (at 16) Vv-a 120 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 112 Thag-a 266
      Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning “fowl.” The latter is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with def; n “gamane.” The etymology of vayo (age) is connected with Sanskrit vīra = Latin vir. man, hero, vīs strength; Gr sinew, strong; Sanskrit vīḍayati to make fast, also veśati; whereas vayas (fowl) corresponds with Sanskrit vayasa (bird) & viḥ to Latin avis bird
    Vaya2
    1. loss, want, expense (opposite āya) AN iv.282 (bhogānaṁ) Snp 739 Pv-a 130
    2. avyayena safely DN i.72 2. decay (opposite uppāda) DN ii.157 = J i.392 (aniccā vata sankhārā uppāda-vaya-dhammino) SN iv.28 AN i.152 299.

      1. ˚karaṇa expense, expenditure Ja iv.355 Vin ii.321 (Sam. Pās on Commentary V. vi.4, 6, explaining veyyāsika or veyyāyika of Vin ii.157)
      Sanskrit vyaya, vi + i; occasionally as vyaya in Pāli as well
    Vayaṁ
    1. is the Sanskrit form of the nominative plural of pers.
    2. pronoun ahaṁ, represented in Pāli by mayaṁ (q.v.) The form vayaṁ only in grammarians, mentioned also by Müller, Pali Grammar p. 87 as occurring in Dhp (?). The enclitic form for acc genitive & dative is no, found e.g. at Pv; i.53 (gloss for vo Commentary amhākaṁ) Ja ii.153 Ja ii.352 Dhp-a i.101 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 73.

    Vayassa
    1. a friend Ja ii.31 Ja iii.140 Ja v.157
    cp. Sanskrit vayasya
    Vayha
    neuter & Vayhā
    • feminine

      1. a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin iv.339 (enumerated under yāna together with ratha sakaṭa sandamānikā sivikā & pāṭankī) Ja vi.500 feminine, with sivikā ratha
    gerundive formation from vah; cp. Sanskrit vahya
  • neuter
  • Vara1
    adjective
    1. excellent, splendid, best, noble. As attribute it either precedes or follows the noun which it characterizes, e.g. ˚pañña of supreme wisdom Snp 391 Snp 1128 (= agga-pañña Nd2 557); ˚bhatta excellent food (opposite lāmaka˚) Ja i.123
    • ˚lañcaka excellent gift (?) (Trenckner, Miln p. 424) ‣See under lañcaka. dhamma˚ the best norm Snp 233
    • nagara˚ the noble city Vv 166 (= uttama˚, Rājagahaṁ sandhāya vuttaṁ Vv-a 82); ratana˚; the best of gems Snp 683
    • rāja˚ famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134); or inserted between noun and apposition (or predicate), e.g. ākiṇṇa -vara-lakkhaṇa full of the best marks Snp 408
    • narī -vara-gaṇa a crowd of most lovely women Snp 301 especially frequent in combination with predicate gata : “gone on to the best of, i.e. riding the most stately (horse or elephant), or walking on the royal (palace) etc., e.g. upari-pāsādavara-gata Pv-a 105
    • sindha-piṭṭhi -vara-gata Ja i.179
    • hatthi-khandha vara-gata Pv-a 75 Pv-a 216 Pv-a 279

      • nt varaṁ in compar. or superl. function: better than instrumental the best, the most excellent thing AN iv.128 (katamaṁ nu kho varaṁ: yaṁ … yaṁ) Dhp 178 (ādhipaccena sotāpattiphalaṁ v.), 322 (varaṁ assatarā dantā … attadanto tato varaṁ)
      1. ˚aṅganā a noble or beautiful woman Mhvs 33, 84 -ādāyin acquiring the best SN iv.250 AN iii.80
      • ˚āroha (1) state elephant Vv 51 (= varo aggo seṭṭho āroho ti varāroho Vv-a 35); (2)
      • feminine a noble lady Ja vi.562 (Maddī varārohā rājaputtī)
      from vṛ; to wish; Vedic vara
    Vara2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. wish, boon, favour Mil 110 Mil 139 Usually in phrases ilke varaṁ dadāti to grant a wish or a boon Ja iv.10 Vv-a 260 Pv-a 20
      • varaṁ gaṇhāti to take a wish or a vow Ja v.382
      • varaṁ vuṇāti (varati) identical Ja iii.493 (varaṁ varassu, imperative ); Pv ii.940, 42 Mil 227

        • varaṁ yācati to ask a favour Ja iii.315 (varāni yācāmi)
        from; vṛ; to wish
    Varaka1
    1. the bean Phaseolus trilobus Ja ii.75 (where equal to kalāya) Mil 267 Dhp-a i.311
    cp. * Sanskrit varaka
    Varaka2
    adjective
    1. wishing or asking (in marriage) Thag 2, 406
    from vṛ
    Varaṇa
    1. the tree Crataeva roxburghii Ja i.222 Ja i.317
    • ˚rukkha, 319 = Dhp-a iii.409 (˚kaṭṭhabhañja) Ja vi.535
    cp. Sanskrit varaṇa rampart, causeway, wall
    *Varati
    1. & derivation (“to choose” as well as “to obstruct”) ‣See vuṇāti
    vṛ
    Varatta
    neuter & Varattā
    • feminine

      1. a strap, thong, strip of leather SN i.63 AN ii.33 Snp 622 Dhp 398 (figuratively for taṇhā) Ja ii.153 Ja v.45 As “harness at Ja i.175 as straps on a ship’s mast (to hold the sails Mil 378
      • cp. vārattika
      1. ˚khaṇḍa strip of leather, a strap MN i.244 = ii.193 iii.259 = SN iv.56 = AN iii.380
      cp. Vedic varatrā, given also in meaning “elephant’s girth” at Halāyudha ii.66
    Varāka
    adjective
    1. wretched, miserable SN i.231 Ja iv.285 Vism 315 Vv-a 101 Pv-a 120 (syn for kapaṇa), 175 (identical)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit varāka
    Varāha
    1. a boar, wild hog Dhp 325 = Th 1, 17 Ja v.406 = vi.277 Mil 364 Sdhp 378
    Vedic varāha & varāhu, frequently in Rigveda
    Valañja
    (—˚)
    1. track, line, trace, in pada˚; track, footprint Ja i.8 Ja ii.153 variant reading lañca & lañcha) iv.221 (valañcha Text, 383 Dhp-a ii.38
    2. that which is spent or secreted, i.e. outflow, faeces, excrement, in sarīra˚; faeces Ja i.70 Ja i.80 Ja i.421 (˚ṁ muñcati to ease oneself) iii.486 Dhp-a ii.55
    3. design, use; only negative avalañja useless, superfluous Vin iv.266 Vv-a 46 (˚ṁ akaṁsu rendered useless) Dhp-a iv.116

      ‣See valañjeti
    Valañjana
    neuter
    1. resorting, acting as, behaviour Vv-a 248
    2. giving off, evacuation, easing the body Ja i.161 (˚vacca-kuṭi privy) Dhp-a iii.270 (sarīra˚)
    from valañjeti
    Valañjanaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. being marked off, being traced, belonging to, behaving, living (anto˚ in the inner precincts, bahi˚; outside the bounds) Ja i.382 Ja i.385 398
    from valañjana
    Valañjita
    1. traced, tracked, practised, travelled Ja iii.542 (magga)
    past participle of valañjeti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit valañjita used, MVastu iii.276
    Valañjeti

    1. to trace, track travel (a road); practise, achieve, resort to Mil 359 Vv-a 58
    2. to use, use up, spend Ja i.102 Ja iii.342 vi.369, 382, 521
    3. ppr.
    4. passive (a-)valañjiyamāna (not any longer) in use Ja i.111
    5. past participle valañjita
    customarily explained as ava + lañj (cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 661), the root lañj being given as a Sanskrit root in meaning “to fry,” “to be strong,” and a variety of others ‣See Mon. Williams s.v. lañj. But the root & its derivations are only found in lexicographical and grammatical works, therefore it is doubtful whether it is genuine.; lañja is given as “pada,” i.e. track, place foot, and also “tail.” We are inclined to ‣See in lañj a by-form of lañch, which is a variant of lakṣ “to mark etc. (cp. lañcha, lañchaka, ˚ana, ˚ita). Thus the meaning would range from originally “trace,” mark off enclose, to: “being enclosed,” assigned or belonging to i.e. moving (in), frequenting etc., as given in Commentary explains There seems to be a Singhalese word at the root of it as it is certainly dialectical The Dhtm (522) laconically defines valañj as “valañjane”
    Valaya
    masculine> &
    • neuter
    1. a bracelet Vin ii.106 Ja ii.197 (dantakāre valay'-ādīni karonte disvā); iii.377; vi.64, 65 DN-a i.50 Dhp-a i.226 (danta˚ ivory bangle) Pv-a 157 (sankha˚) Mhvs 11, 14 (˚anguli-veṭhakā)
    Epic Sanskrit valaya, from Indogermanic; *ṷel to turn ‣See Sanskrit roots vṛ; to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the following: varutra upper robe, ūrmi wave, fold valita bent, vālayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaṭa rope, vāṇa cane. cp. also Latin volvo to roll; Gothic walwjan to roll on, Old High German welzan & walzan = Anglo-Saxon wealtan (English waltz) Anglo-Saxon wylm wave, and many others, q.v. in Walde Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. volvo The Dhtp (274) gives root val in meaning saṁvaraṇa, i.e. obstruct, cover ‣See further vuṇāti
    Valāhaka
    1. a cloud, dark cloud, thundercloud SN i.212 Thag 2, 55 AN ii.102 AN v.22 Thag 1, 760 Pug 42 43 Vv 681 Ja iii.245 270 (ghana˚); Vism 285 (˚paṭala) Mil 274 Dhs-a 317 Vv-a 12 (= abbhā)
    2. Name of mythical horses SN iii.145
      1. ˚kāyikā (devā) groups of cloud gods (viz. sīta˚, uṇha˚ abbha˚, vāta˚, vassa˚) SN iii.254
      valāha + ka; of dialectical origin; cp. Epic Sanskrit balāhaka
    Valāhassa
    1. cloud-horse Ja ii.129 (the Valāhassajātaka, past participle 127 sq.); cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Bālāh'āśva (-rājā Divy 120f. ‣See Index Divy. Vali & Vali
    valāha + assa
    Vali
    Valī
    feminine
    1. a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row Vin ii.112 (read valiyo for valiṁ?) Thag 2, 256 Ja iv.109 Shhp 104
    • muttā-vali a string of pearls Vv-a 169 For vaṭṭanā-valī ‣See vaṭṭanā ‣See also āvali
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vali; from val. Spelling occasionally with
    Valika
    adjective
    1. having folds Ja i.499
    from vali
    Valita
    1. wrinkled AN i.138 (accusative khaṇḍadantaṁ palita-kesaṁ vilūnaṁ khalitaṁ siro-valitaṁ tilak'āhata-gattaṁ: cp. valin with passage MN i.88 iii.180, one of the two evidehtly misread) Pv-a 56 Pv-a 153 In compound with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) “with wrinkled skin” Dhp-a ii.190 (phalitakesa +); with abstract valittacatā the fact of having a wrinkled skin MN i.49 (pālicca + ; cp. MA 215) AN ii.196 (khaṇḍicca pālicca +)
    2. past participle of val ‣See valeti
    Valin
    adjective
    1. having wrinkles MN i.88 (accusative palitakesiṁ vilūnaṁ khalita-siraṁ valinaṁ) = iii.180 (palitakesaṁ vilūnaṁ khalitaṁ-siraṁ valīnaṁ etc.) ‣See valita for this passage

      • In compoundvali-mukha “wrinkled face,” i.e. monkey Ja ii.298
      from vali
    Valiya
    1. at MN i.446 is not clear. It is combined with vaṇṇiya (q.v.) ‣See also note on p. 567; variant reading pāṇiya; Commentary silent
    Valīkaṁ
    1. read for valikaṁ at Thag 2, 403 in meaning “wrong, fault” Thag-a 266 explains as “vyālikaṁ dosaṁ.” So Kern, Toevoegselen s.v
    cp. Sanskrit vyalīkaṁ
    Vaḷīmant
    adjective
    1. having wrinkles Thag 2, 269 (plural valīmatā)
    2. from vali
    Valeti
    1. to twist, turn, in gīvaṁ to wring (a fowl’s neck Ja i.436 Ja iii.178 (gīvaṁ valitvā: read ˚etvā)
    2. to twist or wind round, to put (a garment) on, to dress Ja i.452 (sāṭake valetuṁ; variant reading valañcetuṁ).
    3. past participle valita
    cp. Sanskrit vāleti, causative of val to turn ‣See valaya
    Vallakī
    feminine cp. Epic Sanskrit vallakī, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vallikī Divy 108; MVastu i.227] the Indian lute Abhp 138.
    Vallabha
    1. a favourite Ja iv.404 vi.38, 371; rāja˚; a king’s favourite, an overseer Ja i.342 Mhvs 37, 10 Vb-a 501 feminine vallabhā (a) beloved (woman), a favourite Ja iii.40 Vv-a 92 135, 181
    2. cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vallabha & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vallabhaka a sea monster Divy 231
    Vallabhatta
    neuter
    1. being a favourite Dāvs v.7
    abstract from vallabha
    Vallarī
    feminine
    1. a branching footstalk, a compound pedicle Abhp 550 The word is found in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit in meaning of “musical instrument” at Divy 315 and passim
    cp. Classical Sanskrit vallarī, Halāyudha ii.30
    Vallikā
    feminine
    1. an ornament for the ear Vin ii.106 (cp. Buddhaghosa’s explanation on p. 316)
    2. a jungle rope Vin ii.122
    cp. Sanskrit vālikā?
    Vallibha
    1. the plant kumbhaṇḍa i.e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other reference?)
    cp. late Sanskrit valibha wrinkled
    Vallī
    feminine
    1. a climbing plant, a creeper Vin iii.144 Ja v.37 Ja vi.536 Vv-a 147 335 (here as a root?)
    2. santānaka˚ a long, spreading creeper Vv-a 94 162
    3. a reed or rush used as a string or rope for binding or tying (especially in building), bast (? MN i.190 (Neumann, “Binse”) Ja iii.52 (satta rohita macche uddharitvā valliyā āvuṇitvā netvā etc.), 333 (in similar connection) Dhp-a iii.118
    4. in kaṇṇa˚; the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94

      • The compound form of vallī is valli˚;
      1. ˚koṭī the tips of a creeper Ja vi.548
      • ˚pakka the fruit of a creeper Vv 3330
      • ˚phala = ˚pakka Ja iv.445
      • ˚santāna spreadings or shoots of a creeper Kp-a 48
      • ˚hāraka carrying a (garland of) creeper Vism 523 = Vb-a 131 (in comparison illustrating the paṭicca-samuppāda)
      cp. Sanskrit vallī; for etymology ‣See valaya
    Vallura
    neuter
    1. dried flesh SN ii.98 Ja ii.245
    cp. Classical Sanskrit vallūra
    Vaḷa
    1. at Vism 312 is to be read vāḷa (snake), in phrase vāḷehi upadduta “molested by snakes.”
    Vaḷabhā
    1. is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaḷabhā-mukha a submarine fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sanskrit form is vaḍavā-mukha (Halāyudha i.70; iii.1)
    = vaḷavā?
    Vaḷabhī
    feminine
    1. a roof; only in compound ˚ratha a large covered van (cp. yogga1) MN i.175 (sabba-setena vaḷabhī-rathena Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divaṁ); ii.208 (identical), but vaḷavābhi-rathena) Ja vi.266 (vaḷabhiyo = bhaṇḍa-sakaṭiyo Commentary ). The expression reminds of vaḷavā-ratha
    cp. late (dialectical) Sanskrit vaḍabhī
    Vaḷavā
    feminine
    1. a mare, a common horse DN i.5 Pug 58 Mhvs 10, 54 Ja i.180 Ja vi.343 Dhp-a i.399 Dhp-a iv.4 (assatarā vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā)
    1. ˚ratha a carriage drawn by a mare DN i.89 DN i.105 DN i.106 The expression reminds of vaḷabhī-ratha
    cp. Vedic vaḍavā
    Vaḷīna
    1. at Ja vi.90 is not clear (in phrase jaṭaṁ vaḷīnaṁ pankagataṁ). The Commentary reads valinaṁ, paraphrased by ākulaṁ. Fausböll suggests malinaṁ. Should we accept reading valinaṁ? It would then be accusative singular of valin (q.v.)

    Vavakaṭṭha
    1. drawn away, alienated; withdrawn, secluded Dhp-a ii.103 (˚kāya)
    past participle of vavakassati
    Vavakassati
    1. to be drawn away, to be distracted or alienated (from); so is to be read at all passages, where it is either combined with avakassati or stands by itself The readings are: Vin ii.204 (apakāsanti avapakāsanti = AN v.74 (avakassanti vavakassanti) AN iii.145 (bhikkhu n’ âlaṁ sanghamhā 'vapakāsituṁ: read vavakāsituṁ or ˚kassituṁ), 393 (vapakassat’ eva Satthārā, vapakassati garuṭṭhāniyehi) ‣See also apakāsati, avakassati, avapakāsati- past participle vavakaṭṭha
    2. v + ava + kṛṣ, would correspond to Sanskrit vyavakṛṣyate, Pass.
    Vavakkhati
    1. ‣See vatti. Vavatthapeti & tthapeti;
    Vavatthapeti
    ˚ṭṭhāpeti;
    1. to determine, fix, settle, define, designate, point out Ja iv.17 (disaṁ ˚tthapetvā getting his bearings) Vb 193f. Vism 182 Snp-a 67 Kp-a 11, 42, 89 Vv-a 220
    • ppr
    • passive vavatthāpiyamāna Dhp-a i.21 35.
    • past participle vavatthita & vavatthāpita;
    causative of vi + ava + sthā
    Vavatthāna
    neuter [from vi + ava + sthā; cp. late Sanskrit vyavasthāna which occurs in epithet Sanskrit in meaning “stay” determination, resolution, arrangement, fixing, analysis Ps i.53 Vin iv.289 Vism 111, 236 (= nimitta), 347 (definition) Mil 136 Kp-a 23.
    Vavatthāpita
    1. arranged, settled, established Mil 345 (su˚)
    past participle of vavatthāpeti
    Vavatthita
    1. entered on arranged, fixed, determined, settled MN iii.25 Dhs-a 36–⁠32 separated (opposite sambhinna) Vin ii.67f.
    2. past participle of vi + ava + sthā, cp. vavatthapeti & late Sanskrit vyavasthita “determination”
    Vavattheti

    1. to be determined or analysed Ps i.53, 76, 84
    unusual pres. (Med Pass.) formation from vi + ava + sthā, formed perhaps after vavatthita
    Vavassagga
    1. “letting go,” i.e. starting on something, endeavouring, resolution AN i.36 Ja vi.188
    • handā ti vavassagg’ atthe nipāto) DN-a i.237 (here handa is explained as vavasāy' atthe nipato). Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. wrongly “consent.”
    vi + ava + srj; Sanskrit vyavasarga
    Vasa
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. power, authority, control, influence SN i.43 SN i.240 (kodho vo vasam āyātu: shall be in your power; vasa = āṇāpavattana Kindred Sayings i.320) MN i.214 (bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti, no ca cittassa vasena vattati: he brings the heart under his control, but is not under the influence of the heart) Snp 297 Snp 315 Snp 578 Snp 586 Snp 968 Sdhp 264
      • The instrumental vasena is used as an
      • adverb in meaning “on account of, because” e.g. mahaggha-vasena mahāraha “costly on account of its great worth” Pv-a 77 cp. Ja i.94 Pv-a 36 (putta˚); Mhvs 33, 92 (paṭisanthāra˚)
      • Freq in phrase vase (
      • locative ) vattati to be in somebody’s power Ja v.316 (te vase vattati), cp. MN i.214 (cittassa vasena vattati) & 231 (vatteti te tasmiṁ; vaso have you power over that?); trs. vase vatteti to get under control, to get into one’s power Ja iv.415 (attano vase vattetvā) v.316 (rājāno attano v. v.) Dhp-a ii.14 (rājānaṁ attano v. v.), cp. MN i.214 (vasan vatteti) & Pv-a 89 (; vasaṁ vattento)
      • Note. The compound form in connection with kṛ; and bhū is vasī˚; (q.v.)
      1. ˚ānuga being in somebody’s power, dependent, subjected obedient Snp 332 Snp 1095 Ja iii.224 (= vasavattin Commentary ) Thag 2, 375 (= kinkāra- paṭissāvin Thag-a 252); Sdhp 249
      2. ˚ānuvattin identical; feminine ˚inī obedient, obliging (to one’s husband) Vv 313
      3. ˚uttama highest authority, greatest ideal Snp 274
      4. ˚gata being in someone’s power Ja v.453 (narīnaṁ); cp. vasī-kata
      5. ˚vattaka wielding power Sdhp 483 (˚ika); having no free will Pv-a 64
      6. ˚vattana wielding power, (having) authority Mil 356
      7. ˚vattin

        1. -1. (active, i.e. vatteti) having highest power domineering, autocrat, (all-)mighty; figuratively having self-mastery, controlling one’s senses DN i.247 DN ii.261 AN ii.24 Iti 122 Thag 2. 37; Pv ii.333 Mil 253 DN-a i.111 114, 121 Snp-a 133 (˚bhavana)
        • (pass.; i.e. vattati being in one’s power, dependent, subject Ja iii.224 v.316 Thag-a 226 (read vattino for ˚vattito!)
      cp. Vedic vaśa; vaś to be eager, to desire
    Vasati1
    1. to clothe. past participle ; vuttha1.
    2. causative vāseti ‣See ni˚ ‣See also vāsana1 & vāsana; 1
    3. vas1; to Indogermanic *ṷes, cp. Sanskrit vasman cover, Gothic wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Latin vestis = English vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchādane
    Vasati2

    1. to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (especially with vassaṁ the rainy season); trs. to keep, observe live, practise Snp 469f. 1088 (= saṁvasati āvasati parivasati Nd2 558) Pv-a 3 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 78 (imperative vasatha). uposathaṁ vasaṁ (ppr.) keeping the Sunday Ja vi.232 brahmacariyaṁ v. to live a chaste life MN i.515 (cp. same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; Śat. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22)-ppr. vasanto Pv-a 75 Pv-a 76; ppr.
    2. medium vasamāna Ja i.21 Ja i.236 Ja i.291 Pv-a 117 Pot. vaseyya MN i.515 Pv ii.97 (ghare), & vase Mil 372
    3. aorist vasi Snp 977 Ja iv.317 (piya-saṁvāsaṁ) Pv-a 111 Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); 5, 229.
    4. absolutive vasitvā Ja i.278 Ja iv.317 Pv-a 13
    5. gerundive vasitabba Snp 678 Pv-a 42 & vatthabba Mhvs 3 12; infinitive vatthuṁ Thag 2, 414 & vasituṁ Pv-a 12 Pv-a 112. Fut vasissati = Sanskrit vasiṣyati

      Mhvs 14, 26 Pv-a 12 and (older) vacchati = Sanskrit vatsyati

      1. Vin i.60 Thag 2, 294 Ja iv.217 1st singular vacchāmi Ja v.467 (na te v. santike) vi.523, 524, & vacchaṁ Thag 2, 414 passive vussati Sanskrit uṣyate
        1. MN i.147 (brahmacariyaṁ v.). past participle vasita vusita = vi + uṣita

          vuttha perhaps = vi + uṣṭa

          1. q. v- causative I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opposite nāseti at SN iv.248) Vin iii.140 SN iv.248 Mil 211 Pv-a 160 (infinitive vāsetuṁ) ‣See also vāseti2.
          2. causative II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain Ja i.290 Ja ii.27 Pv-a 20 (vassaṁ).
          3. past participle vāsita

            • ‣ See also adhi˚, ā˚ ni˚, pari˚
            vas2; Indogermanic *ṷes to stay, abide; cp. Avestan varəhaiti; Latin Vesta the goddess of the hearth = Gothic wisan to stay, remain, be (= Old High German wesan, English was were); Old Icelandic vist to stay, Old Irish foss rest Dhtm 470 kanti-nivāsesu
    Vasati3
    feminine
    1. a dwelling, abode, residence Ja vi.292 (rāja˚ = rāja-paricariyā Commentary ) Mil 372 (rājavasatiṁ vase); Dāvs iv.27 (saka˚)
    from vas2, cp. Vedic vasati
    Vasana1
    neuter
    1. clothing, clothes Snp 971 Thag 2, 374 DN iii.118 (odāta˚), 124 (identical) Nd1 495 (the six cīvarāni) Pv-a 49
    • vasanāni clothing Mhvs 22, 30-vasana (—˚) as adjective “clothed,” e.g. odāta˚ wearing white robes Vin i.187
    • kāsāya˚ clad in yellow robes Mhvs 18, 10; pilotika˚; in rags Ja iv.380
    • suci˚ in bright garments Snp 679 Pv i.108
    from vasati1
    Vasana2
    neuter
    1. dwelling (-place), abode; usually in compounds. like ˚gāma the village where (he) lived Ja ii.153
    • ˚ṭṭhāna residence, dwelling place Pv-a 12 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 92 Dhp-a i.323 and passim
    from vasati2
    Vasanaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. living (in) Ja ii.435 (nibaddha˚, i.e. of continuous abode)
    from vasana2
    Vasanta
    1. [Vedic vasanta; Indogermanic *ṷēr, cp. Avestan varehar spring, Latin vēr, Old Icelandic vār spring, Lithuanian vasarā summer spring Ja i.86 Ja v.206 Kp-a 192 (bāla˚ = Citra) DN-a i.132 (˚vana) Pv-a 135
    Vasabha
    1. a bull Mil 115 (rāja˚) Snp-a 40 (relation between usabha, vasabha & nisabha) Vv-a 83 (identical)
    the Sanskrit ic-Pāli form (*vṛṣabha) of the proper Pāli usabha (q.v. for etymology). Only in later (Commentary style under Sanskrit influence
    Vasala
    an outcaste; a low person, wretch; adjective vile, foul Vin ii.221 Snp 116–⁠136 Ja iv.388 Snp-a 183 feminine vasalī outcaste wretched woman SN i.160 Ja iv.121 Ja iv.375 Dhp-a i.189 Dhp-a iii.119 iv.162 Vv-a 260
    1. ˚ādhama = ˚dhamma Snp 135
    • ˚dhamma vile conduct Ja ii.180
    • ˚vāda foul talk Ud 28 Snp-a 347
    • ˚sutta the suttanta on outcasts Snp 116f. (p, 21 sq.), commented on at Snp-a 174f. 289
    Vedic vṛṣala, Dimin. of vṛṣan, literally “little man”
    Vasalaka
    1. = vasala Snp p. 21
    vasala + ka in more disparaging sense
    Vasā1
    feminine
    1. a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck) Snp 26 Snp 27 Snp-a 49 (= adamita-vuddha-vacchakā)
    Vedic vaśā; cp. vāśitā; Latin vacca cow
    Vasā2
    feminine
    1. fat, tallow, grease Snp 196 Kh iii.; Pv ii.23 Ja iii.356 Ja v.489 Pv-a 80 Vb-a 67 In detail at Vism 263, 361 Vb-a 246
    cp. Vedic vasā
    Vasi˚
    1. ; is the shortened form of vasī˚; (= vasa) in combinations˚ppatta one who has attained power, mastering: only in phrase ceto-vasippatta AN ii.6 AN iii.340 Mil 82 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaśiprāpta Divy 210 Divy 546; -and ˚ppatti mastership mastery Vism 190 (appanā +)
    Vasika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. being in the power of, subject to, as in kodha˚; a victim of anger Ja iii.135
    • taṇhā under the influence of craving Ja iv.3
    • mātugāma˚ fond of women Ja iii.277
    from vasa, cp. Sanskrit vaśika
    Vasita
    1. dwelled, lived, spent Mhvs 20, 14
    past participle of vasati2
    Vasitar
    1. one who abides, stays or lives (in), a dweller; figuratively one who has a (regular) habit AN ii.107 Pug 43 cp. PugA 225
    • vasitā is given as “habit” at Compendium 58 sq., 207
    agent noun from vasita
    Vasin
    adjective
    1. having power (over), mastering, especially one’s senses; a master (over) Vin iii.93 DN i.18 (= ciṇṇavasitattā vasī DN-a i.112); iii.29 Snp 372 Vism 154 (fivefold); Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); Dāvs i.16
    from vasa
    Vasima
    1. = vasin Iti 32 (accusative vasimaṁ; variant reading vasīmaṁ).

    Vasī˚
    1. ; is the composition form of vasa in combination with roots kṛ; and bhū, e.g. ˚kata made dependent, brought into somebody’s power, subject(ed) Thag 2, 295 (= vasavattino katvā, plural ) Snp 154 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaśīkṛta Jtm 213 ‣See also vasagata
    • ˚katvā having overcome or subjected Snp 561 (= attano vase vattetvā Snp-a 455). Metricausâ as vasiṁ karitvā at Snp 444
    • ˚bhāva state of having power mastery Nd2 466 (balesu); Pug 14 (in same passage, but reading phalesu), explained at PugA 189 (with variant reading SS balesu!) as “ciṇṇa-vasī-bhāva”; Kvu 608 (implies balesu) Mil 170 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit bala-vaśī-bhāva MVastu iii.379 ‣See also ciṇṇa
    • ˚bhūta having become a master (over), mastering SN i.132 Mil 319 cp. MVastu i.47 & 399 vaśībhūta
    • The same change of vasa˚ to vasī˚ we find in comb; n vasippatta (vasī + ppatta), q. v under vasi˚;
    Vasu
    neuter
    1. wealth; only in compounds. ˚deva the god of wealth, i.e. Kṛṣṇa (Kaṇha) Mil 191 (as ˚devā followers of K.) Ja v.326 (here in Text as ādicco vāsudevo pabhankaro, explained in Commentary as vasudevo vasujotano, i.e. an epithet of the sun); Vism 233 Vāsudevo baladevo) —˚dharā feminine (as vasun-dharā) the bearer of wealth, i.e. the earth SN i.100 AN iii.34 Ja v.425 Vism 205, 366 DN-a i.61
    2. ˚˚dhā identical Ja i.25 Ap 53; Vism 125
    3. Vedic vasu good, cp. Old Irish fīu worthy, Gothic iusiza better
    Vasumant
    adjective
    1. having wealth, rich Ja vi.192
    from vasu
    Vassa
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. rain, shower Ja iv.284 Ja vi.486 (khaṇika sudden rain) Mil 307 Mhvs 21, 31 Dhp-a iii.163 (pokkhara˚ portentous) Snp-a 224 (mahā˚ deluge of rain) Pv-a 55 (vāta˚ wind & rain)
      2. figuratively shower, downpour fall MN i.130 = Vin ii.25 (kahāpaṇa˚) Dhp-a ii.83 (kusuma˚)
      3. Especially the rainy season, lasting roughly from June to October (Āsāḷha-Kattika), often called “Lent,” though the term does not strictly correspond Usually in
      4. plural vassā (AN iv.138), also termed vassā-ratta “time of rains” (J iv.74; v.38). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit varṣā, e. g Divy 401 Divy 509
      5. Keeping Lent (i.e. spending the rainy season) is expressed by vassaṁ vasati Vin iii.10 Mhvs 16, 8; or by vassa-vāsaṁ (vass’ āvāsaṁ) vasati ‣See below vassaṁ upeti SN v.152 vassaṁ upagacchati SN v.152 Pv-a 42 One who has kept Lent or finished the residence of the rains is a vuttha-vassa Ja i.82 Mhvs 17, 1; or vassaṁ vuttha Vin iii.11 SN i.199 SN v.405 Pv-a 43 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit varṣ’ oṣita Divy 92 Divy 489
      6. Vassa-residence is vassa-vāsa ‣See below
      7. vassaṁ vasāpeti (
      8. causative ) to induce someone to spend the rainy season Pv-a 20-anto-vassaṁ during Lent; cp. antovass’ eka-divasaṁ one day during Lent Mhvs 18, 2; antara-vassaṁ id SN iv.63
      9. neuter a year AN iv.252 (mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni) Snp 289 Snp 446 Snp 1073
      10. satta˚
      11. adjective seven years old Mhvs 5, 61; satta-aṭṭha˚ 7 or 8 years old Pv-a 67
      12. See compound ˚sata

  • semen virile, virility ‣See compounds. ˚kamma & ˚vara; .

    1. ˚agga shelter from the rain, a shed (agga = agāra Ja i.123 Dhp-a iii.105 = Vv-a 75
    • ˚āvāsa vassa-residence AN iii.67
    • ˚āvāsika belonging to the spending of the rainy season, said of food (bhatta) given for that purpose Ja vi.71 Dhp-a i.129 (as one of the 4 kinds: salāka˚ pakkhika˚, navacanda˚, vass'-āvāsika˚), 298; iv.129 (˚lābha a gift for the r. s.)
    • ˚upagamana entering on the vassa-residence Pv-a 42
    • ˚upanāyikā
    • feminine the approach of the rainy season, commencement of Vassa residence Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit varṣopanāyikā Divy 18 Divy 489; Avs i.182, where epithet of the full moon of Āsāḷha
      1. . Two such terms for taking up the residence: purimikā & pacchimikā AN i.51 i.e. the day after the full moon of Ā. or a month after that date ‣See upanāyika
      • vass’ ûpanāyika-divasa the first day of Lent Vism 92 Dhp-a iv.118 ˚ûpanāyikaṁ khandhakaṁ the section of the Vinaya dealing with the entrance upon Lent (i.e. Vin i.137f.) Mhvs 16, 9
      • ˚odaka rain-water Vism 260 = Vb-a 243
      • ˚kamma causing virility DN i.12 (= vasso ti puriso, vosso ti paṇḍako iti; vossassa vassa-karaṇaṁ vassa-kammaṁ vassassa vossa-karaṇaṁ vossa-kammaṁ DN-a i.97)
      • ˚kāla time for rain Ja iv.55
      • ˚dasa (& ˚dasaka) a decade of years ‣See enum; d at Ja iv.397
      • ˚pūgāni innumerable years Ja vi.532 cp. Snp 1073
      • ˚vara a eunuch Ja vi.502
      • ˚valāhaka a rain cloud AN iii.243 (˚devā)
      • ˚vassana shedding of rain, raining Dhp-a ii.83
      • ˚vāsa Vassa residence SN v.326 Pv-a 20
      • ˚vuṭṭhi rainfall Snp-a 34 cp. 224
      • ˚sata a century Snp 589 Snp 804 AN iv.138 Pv ii.115 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 69
      • ˚satika centenarian Mil 301
      cp. Vedic varṣa
    • neuter rain. For etymology ‣See vassati; 1
  • Vassati1
    1. to rain intranstitive, fig to shower, pour(down) Vin i.32 (mahāmegho vassi) SN iii.141 (deve vassante); v.396 (identical) Snp 30 (devassa vassato, genitive singular ppr.) Pv-a 6 Pv-a 139 Pv-a 287; Mhvs 21, 33 Dhp-a ii.83 (vassatu, imperative ; vassi, aorist ); 265 (devo vassanto nominative singular)

      • cp. kālena kālaṁ devo vṛṣyate Divy 71
      • causative II. vassāpeti to cause to rain Ja v.201 (Sakko devaṁ v. let the sky shed rain).
      • past participle vaṭṭa vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another
      • past participle of the
      • causative *vasseti is vassita
      vṛṣ, varṣati, vṛṣate; Indogermanic *ṷers to wet, cp. Vedic vṛṣa bull, varṣa rain, vṛṣabha (P. usabha), Avestan varšna virile, Latin verres boar; Latin ros dew = Sanskrit rasa essence etc. Dhtm 471 gives “secana” as definition
    Vassati2
    1. to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. SN ii.230 Ja i.436 (of a cock); ii.37 153, 307; iii.127; vi.497 (ppr. vassamāna = vāsamāna Commentary ). past participle vassita2
    2. vāś to bellow, Vedic vāśyate; Dhtm 471: “saddane”
    Vassana1
    neuter
    1. raining, shedding (water) Dhp-a ii.83 (vassa˚)
    from vassati1
    Vassana2
    neuter
    1. bleating; negative Ja iv.251
    from vassati2
    Vassāna
    1. (belonging to) the rainy season Vin iv.286 AN iv.138 Ja ii.445 v.177
    genitive plural formation from vassa, like gimhāna from gimha (q.v.) Kern, Toevoegselen s.v ‣Sees in it a contraction of varṣāyaṇa. cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 428
    Vassāpanaka
    adjective
    1. shedding, pouring out Ja i.253 (dhana˚)
    from vassāpeti; causative of vassati1
    Vassika
    adjective
    1. (cp. vassa1) for the rainy season DN ii.21 (palace); cp. Avs i.269 varṣaka (identical)
    2. (—˚ of years, in gaṇa˚; for many years Snp 279 Snp-a 339
    3. tero˚ more than one year (old) ‣See under tero; satta˚ seven years old Pv-a 53
    from vassa
    Vassikā
    feminine & Vassika
    • neuter = vassikī, i.e. Jasminum Sambac; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit varṣika Lal. Vist. 366, 431; Divy 628; Avs i.163. (a)
    • feminine (the plant) Dhp 377 (= sumanā Dhp-a iv.112) Mil 251 (b)
    • neuter (the flower, said to be the most fragrant of all flowers). AN v.22 SN v.44 Dhp-a iv.112 (˚puppha).

    Vassikī
    feminine the great-flowered jasmine, Jasminum Sambac (cp. vassikā) Dhp 55 = J iii.291 = Mil 333 Mil 181 Mil 338 Dhp-a i.422
    Vassita1
    1. sprinkled with, wet with, endowed with, i.e. full of Ja iv.494 (balena vassita)
    past participle of *vasseti, causative of vassati1
    Vassita2
    neuter
    1. a cry Ja i.432 Ja iv.217 Ja iv.225
    past participle of vassati2
    Vassitar
    1. a shedder of rain AN ii.102 = Pug 42
    agent noun from vassita1
    Vassin
    adjective noun
    1. raining; in padesa˚; shedding local showers Iti 64
    from vassati1
    Vaha
    (—˚)
    1. bringing, carrying, leading Pv i.58 (vāri˚ river = mahānadī Pv-a 29) SN i.103 Pv-a 13 (anattha˚). Doubtful in hetu-vahe Pv ii.85, better with variant reading ˚vaco, explained by sakāraṇa-vacana Pv-a 109
    2. a current Ja iv.260 (Gangā˚); v.388 (mahā˚)
    3. cp. vāha
    from vah
    Vahati

    1. to carry, bear, transport Ja iv.260 Pv-a 14 (= dhāreti) Mil 415 (of iron: carry weight)
    2. imperative vaha Vv 8117 infinitive vahituṁ Pv-a 122 (perhaps superfluous);
    3. gerundive vahitabba Mhvs 23, 93. 2. to proceed, to do one’s work MN i.444 Mhvs 34, 4 guḷayantaṁ vahitvāna, old various reading for P. Text S. ed Text reading guḷayantamhi katvāna
    4. to work, to be able, to have power AN i.282
    5. passive vuyhati (Sanskrit uhyate) to be carried (along) Vin i.106 Thag 1, 88 ppr vuyhamāna SN iv.179 Thag 1, 88 Ja iv.260 Pv-a 153
    6. passive also vahīyati Pv-a 56 (= nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna Mil 397
    7. past participle ūḷha ‣See soḍha, vuḷha & vūḷha; (būḷha)-
    8. causative vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away Vin ii.237 Snp 282 Ja vi.443
    9. ppr. vāhiyamāna (in
    10. medium
    11. passive sense) Ja vi.125
    12. past participle vahita (for vāh˚) Mil 346 cp. ubbahati2
    vah, Indogermanic *ṷeĝh to drive, lead, cp. Sanskrit vahitra = Latin vehiculum = English vehicle; Latin veho to drive etc.; Gothic ga-wigan = Old High German wegan = German bewegen; Gothic wēgs = German weg English way; Old High German wagan = English waggon, etc Dhtp 333 Dhtm 498: vaha; pāpuṇane
    Vahana
    adjective neuter
    1. carrying Vv-a 316 Dhp-a iii.472 (dhura˚)
    2. a current Ja iv.260
    from vah
    Vahanaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. carrying, bearing Ja ii.97 (dhura˚)
    vahana + ka

    indeclinable

    1. participle of disjunction: “or”; always enclitic Kh viii. (itthiyā purisassa vā; mātari pitari vā pi). Usually repeated vā-vā (is it so-) or, either-or, e.g. Snp 1024 (Brahmā vā Indo vā pi) Dhp 1 (bhāsati vā karoti vā) Pv-a 74 (putto vā dhītā vā natthi?)
    • with negation in second place: whether-or not, or not, e.g. hoti no vā is there or is there not DN i.61 taṁ patthehi mā vā Vv-a 226
    • Combined with other emphatic particles (na) vā pana not even Pv ii.69 (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Snp 382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv ii.614 (isayo pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd2 420; athaDhp 83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda … vā Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā)
    • In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e.g. devo va Brahmā vā Snp 1024 ‣See va4
    Vedic vā, Avestan vā, Latin ve
    Vāk
    (˚-)
    1. speech, voice, talk; only in compound ˚karaṇa talk, speaking conversation, as kālyāṇa-vāk-karaṇa good speech AN ii.97 AN iii.195 AN iii.261 AN iv.296f.; 328; v.155; abstr ˚ta AN i.38 cp. vākya
    Vedic vāc, for which the usual Pali form is vācā
    Vāka
    neuter
    1. the bark of a tree DN i.167 Vin iii.34 Ja i.304 Ja ii.141 Vism 249 = Vb-a 232 (akka˚ & makaci˚) Mil 128
    • avāka without bark Ja iii.522
    1. ˚cīra (= cīvara) a bark garment worn by an ascetic Vin iii.34 AN i.240 AN i.295 Ja i.8 Ja i.304 Ja v.132 Pug 55
    • ˚maya made of bark Vin ii.130 Vakara = vagula
    late Sanskrit valka, cp. Pali vakka
    Vākarā = vāgulā
    1. ; net, snare MN i.153 (daṇḍa˚, Dvandva); ii.65
    • As vākara at Ja iii.541 as vākura at Thag 1, 774
    Vākya
    neuter
    1. saying, speech, sentence, usually found in poetry only, e. g DN ii.166 (suṇantu bhonto mama eka-vākyaṁ) AN ii.34 (sutvā arahato vākyaṁ); iii.40 (katvāna vākyaṁ Asitassa tādino) Snp 1102 (= vacana Nd2 559) Ja iv.5 v.78; Ap 25; Kp-a 166 (˚opādāna resumption of the sentence) Dhs-a 324 (˚bheda “significant sentence translation)
    from vac ‣See vāk & vācā; Vedic vākya
    Vāgamā
    1. at Mhvs 19, 28 (tadahe v. rājā) is to be read (tadah’ ev) āgamā, i.e. came on the same day. The passage is corrupt ‣See translation p. 130. Vagura & a
    Vāgura
    ˚ā
    feminine
    1. a net; as ˚a Ja vi.170 Kp-a 47 (sūkara˚) Thag-a 78 as ˚ā Ja vi.582 Another Pali form is vākarā
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vāgurā; to Indogermanic *ṷeg to weave, as in Latin velum sail, Anglo-Saxon wecca = English wick; Old High German waba = German wabe
    Vācaka
    adjective
    1. reciting, speaking, expressing Snp-a 164 (lekha˚); sotthi˚; an utterer of blessings, a herald Mil 359 feminine ˚ikā speech Sdhp 55
    2. from vācā
    Vācanaka
    neuter
    1. talk, recitation, disputation; invitation (?), in brāhmaṇa˚ Ja i.318 (karoti); iii.171 iv.391 (karoti); regarded as a kind of festival. At Ja iii.238
    • vācanaka is used by itself (two brahmins receiving it). It refers to the treating of brāhmaṇas (br. teachers) on special occasions (on behalf of their pupils: a sort of farewell-dinner?)

      • It is not quite sure how we have to interpret vācanaka. Under brāhmaṇa (compounds.) we have translated it as “elocution show (cp. our “speech day”). The English translation gives “brahmin feast”; Professor Dutoit “Brahmanen-backwerk” (i.e. special cakes for brahmins). vācana may be a distortion of vājana, although the latter is never found as variant reading It is at all events a singular expression. BR give vācanaka as in meaning of “sweetmeat,” with the only reference Hārāvalī 152 (Calc. ed.), where it is explained as “prahelaka” ‣See Pali paheṇaka. On the subject ‣See also Fick, Sociale Gliederung 137, 205
      from vāceti
    Vācanā
    feminine
    1. recitation, reading; ˚magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tika-Paṭṭhāna 239; Kp-a 12, 14, 24
    from vāceti
    Vācapeyya

    (1) amiable speech (vācā + peyya = piya) Ja vi.575 (= piyavacana Commentary ).

  • spelling for vājapeyya (q.v.)

  • Vācasika
    adjective
    1. connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kāyika & cetasika; Vin iv.2 Pug 21 Mil 91 Vism 18 Dhs-a 324
    • As
    • neuter noun at Mil 352 in meaning “behaviour in speech.”
    from vācā
    Vācā
    feminine
    1. word, saying, speech; also as adjective (—˚) vaca speaking, of such a speech (e.g. duṭṭha˚ Pv i.32 so to be read for dukkha˚)
    • DN iii.69f. 96 sq., 171 sq. SN iv.132 (in triad kāyena vācāya manasā ‣See kāya iii. and mano ii.3) Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā) 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061 (= vacana Nd2 560) Nd1 504 Dhs-a 324 (vuccatī ti vācā)
    • In sequence vācā girā byappatha vacībheda vācasikā viññatti, as a definition of speech Vin iv.2 explained at Dhs-a 324 ‣See byappatha-vācaṁ bhindati : (1) to modify the speech or expression Snp-a 216 (cp. vākya-bheda Dhs-a 324).
    • to use a word, so say something Vin i.157 MN i.207 (Neumann “das Schweigen brechen”) Mil 231 (i.e. to break silence? So Rhys Davids translation). cp. the English expression “to break the news."-vācā is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as the following, frequently found: atthasaṁhitā AN iii.244
    • kalyāṇa˚ AN iii.195 AN iii.261 iv.296; v.155; pisuṇā & pharusā AN i.128 AN i.174 AN i.268f. iii.433; iv.247 sq. DN-a i.74 75 Nd1 220 and passim rakkhita˚ SN iv.112
    • vikiṇṇa˚ SN i.61 SN i.204 AN i.70 iii.199, 391 sq.; sacca˚ AN ii.141 AN ii.228
    • saṇhā AN ii.141 228; iii.244; iv.172 ‣See also vacī-sucarita; sammā˚ Vb 105 106, 235 Vb-a 119 ‣See also magga; hīnā etc. SN ii.54
    1. ˚ānurakkhin guarding one’s speech Dhp 281 (cp vācāya saṁvara Dhp-a iv.86)
    2. ˚ābhilāpa “speechjabbering,” forbidden talk Snp 49 (i.e. the 32 tiracchānakathā Nd2 561)
    3. ˚uggata with well intoned speech Mil 10
    • ˚yata restrained in speech Snp 850 (= yatta gutta rakkhita Nd1 221)
    • ˚vikkhepa confusion of speech equivocation DN i.24f. DN-a i.115
    vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vacaḥ (P. vaco); Vedic vāk (vāc˚) voice, word, vākya; Avestan vacah & vaxs word Latin vox = voice, voco to call Old High German gi-wahan to mention etc. The Pali form vācā is a remodelling of the nominative vāc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from the consonant declension to a vowel (˚ā declension Of the old inflexion we only find the instrumental vācā Snp 130 Snp 232 The compound forms are both vācā˚; and vacī˚
    Vācetar
    1. one who teaches or instructs DN i.123
    agent noun from vāceti
    Vāceti
    1. to make speak or recite, to teach ‣See vatti. past participle vācita
    2. causative of vac
    Vāja

    vigeo to be strong "vigour”

    1. ; Avestan vaƶra; Oicel wakr = Anglo-Saxon wacor = German wacker; English wake, etc.] 1 strength, a strength-giving drink, Soma Snp-a 322 2. the feather of an arrow Ja iv.260 Ja v.130
    cp. Vedic vāja strength; Indogermanic *ṷeġ, cp. vājeti, vajra (P. vajira); Latin vegeo to be alert ["vegetation”
    Vājapeyya
    1. the vājapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vāca˚; (mostly as variant reading ) ‣See S i.76 AN ii.42 AN iv.151 Snp 303 Iti 21 Mil 219 Ja iii.518 cp. peyya2
    cp. Vedic vājapeya ‣See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology past participle 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vājapeya; Banerjea, Public Administration etc. 92
    Vājita
    adjective
    1. feathered (of an arrow) MN i.429
    past participle of vājeti ‣See vāja
    Vājin
    adjective noun
    1. possessed of strength or swiftness; a horse, stallion Dāvs i.31; v.35 (sita˚), 53 (sasi-paṇḍara˚) Vv-a 278
    from vāja
    Vāṭa
    1. enclosure, enclosed place Vin ii.154 ‣See also yañña˚;
    cp. Classical Sanskrit vāṭa; on etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. vallus
    Vāṭaka
    (—˚)
    1. enclosure, circle, ring; in gala˚; the throat circle, i.e. the bottom of the throat Vism 258 Dhs-a 316 Dhp-a i.394
    • caṇḍāla˚ circle of Caṇḍālas Ja vi.156
    • brāhmaṇa˚ of Brahmins Dhp-a iv.177
    from vāṭa
    Vāṇija
    1. a merchant, trader Vin iii.6
    • assa˚) Snp 614 Snp 651 Snp 1014 Ja v.156 (so read for va˚) Pv i.106 Dāvs i.58; Kp-a 224 Snp-a 251 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 48 Pv-a 100 Pv-a 191 215, 271. On similes with v ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 134. Vanijaka = vanija
    from vaṇij (vaṇik) ‣See vaṇijjā; literally son of a merchant; Vedic vāṇija
    Vāṇijaka = vāṇijā
    1. SN ii.215 (sūci˚) Ja iii.540
    Vāṇijjā
    feminine
    1. trade, trading Vin iv.6 (as one of the exalted professions) Pv-a 111 Pv-a 201 Pv-a 273 Pv-a 277
    from vāṇija, cp. vaṇijjā
    Vāta
    1. wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into 2 groups: “internal and “external” winds, or the ajjhattikā vāyo-dhātu (wind category), and the bāhirā. They are discussed at Vb 84 quoted at MA 30, 31, and explained in detail at Vb-a 70f.; Vism 350. The bāhirā also at Nd2 562 and in poetical form at SN iv.218
    • The internal winds ‣See below 2 comprise the following: uddhangamā vātā adhogamā, kucchisayā, koṭṭhāsasayā, angam-ang’ ânusārino, satthakā, khurakā, uppalakā, assāso, passāso i.e. all kinds of winds (air) or drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch and stomach-ache up to breathing. Their complement are the external winds ‣See below 1, viz. puratthimā vātā pacchimā, uttarā, dakkhiṇā (from the 4 quarters of the sky), sarajā arajā, sītā uṇhā, parittā adhimattā, kāḷā verambha˚, pakkha˚, supaṇṇa˚, tālavanta˚, vidhūpana˚ These are characterized according to direction dust, temperature, force, height & other causes (like fanning etc.)
    1. -1. wind (of the air) SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse vāyanti) Snp 71 Snp 348 Snp 591 (vāto tūlaṁ va dhaṁsaye), 622, 1074 Ja i.72 Pug 32 Vism 31. adhimatta v. SN iv.56
    • mahā˚ SN ii.88 AN i.136 AN i.205 AN ii.199 AN iv.312
    • veramba˚ (winds blowing in high regions: upari ākāse SN ii.231) AN i.137 Thag 1, 598 Ja vi.326
    • “winds” of the body, i.e. pains caused by (bad) circulation, sometimes simply (uncontrolled) movements in the body, sometimes rheumatic pains, or sharp & dragging pains in various parts of the body Netechnical term 74. Also applied to certain humours, supposed to be caused by derangements of the “winds of the body (cp. English slang “get the wind up”), whereas normal “winds” condition normal health: Pv ii.61 (tassa vātā balīyanti: bad winds become strong, i.e. he is losing his senses, cp. Pv-a 94: ummāda-vātā)
    • aṅga˚ pain in the limbs (or joints) rheumatism Vin i.205
    • udara˚ belly ache Ja i.393 Ja i.433 Dhp-a iv.129
    • kammaja˚ birth-pains Vism 500; kucchi˚ pains in the abdomen (stomach) Vb-a 5
    • piṭṭhi˚ pains in the back ibid

  • (figuratively) atmosphere, condition, state or as

    • past participle (of vāyati) scented (with), full of, pervaded (by), at Vin i.39
    • vijana˚ pervaded by loneliness, having an atmosphere of loneliness; Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. vāta wrongly “troop, crowd.” The same passage occurs at DN iii.38 where Rhys Davids, Dialogues of the Buddha iii.35, translates “where the breezes from the pastures blow”; with explanation vijana vṛjana ‣See vajati
      1. hardly justified. In same connection at AN iv.88) Mil 19 (isi˚-parivāta scented with an atmosphere of Sages; Rhys Davids differently: “bringing down the breezes from the heights where the Sages dwell”; forced)
      • On vāta in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 135
      1. ˚ātapa (Dvandva) wind and heat. In this phrase Buddhaghosa takes vāta as wind (above 1) at Vism 31 (saraja & araja v.), but as (bodily); pain (above 2) at Vb-a 5 ‣See DN iii.353 SN ii.88 SN iii.54 SN v.379 AN i.204 AN ii.117 143, 199; iii.394 sq., 404; v.15, 127 Snp 52 Ja i.93 Mil 259 Mil 314 Mil 416 Dhp-a iii.112
      • ˚ābādha “wind disease,” internal pains (not rheumatism) Vin i.205 Mil 134 Vism 41
      • ˚āyana air hole, window Mhvs 5 37; Dāva v.57
      • ˚āhata struck by the wind Vism 63 Dhp-a iii.328
      • ˚erita moved by the wind (of trees SN v.123 AN iii.232 Vv-a 175
      • ˚kkhandha “wind bulk,” mass of wind, region of the wind Ja vi.326
      • ˚ghāta (“wind-struck”) the tree Cassia (or Cathartocarpus) fistula, a synonym of uddāla(ka) Ja iv.298 Vv-a 197 also as ˚ka at Ja v.199 Ja v.407 Vv-a 43
      • ˚ java swiftness of the wind Ja vi.274
      • ˚dhuta shaken by the wind, swaying in the with Vv 385 cp. Vv-a 174
      • ˚passa the wind side Dhp-a ii.17
      • ˚pāna lattice, window Vin i.209 Vin ii.148 211 AN i.101 AN i.137 AN iv.231 Ja ii.325 Ja v.214 Ja vi.349 (read vātapān˚ for dvārapān˚); Kp-a 54 Dhp-a i.211 370 Vv-a 67 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 216 Pv-a 279
      • ˚bhakkha living on air Dhp-a ii.57
      • ˚maṇḍala a whirlwind, gust of wind, storm tornado cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vāyu-maṇḍala at Avs i.256 with note
        1. Ja i.72 Snp-a 224
        • ˚maṇḍalikā identical Vin ii.113 iv.345 Ja iv.430
        • ˚yoga direction of the wind Ja ii.11
        • ˚roga “wind disease,” upset of the body, disturbance of the intestines, colic Snp-a 69 Vv-a 185
        • ˚vassā (
        • plural wind and rain Pv-a 55
        • ˚vuṭṭhi identical Snp-a 34
        • ˚vega force of the wind Snp 1074 Pv-a 47
        • ˚sakuṇa a certain kind of bird (“wind-bird”) Nd1 87 where Kp-a 118 reads bhāsa˚
        Vedic vāta, of ; cp. Sanskrit vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind; Latin ventus, Gothic winds = wind; Old High German wājan to blow, Old Irish feth air; Lithuanian áudra storm etc.
  • Vātaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. belonging to or connected with the winds (of the body) in ahi-vātaka-roga a cert (intestinal) disease (literally “snake-pain”), pestilence plague; dysentery (caused by a famine and attacking men and beasts alike) Dhp-a i.169 187, 231; iii.437
    from vāta 2
    Vāti
    1. ‣See vāyati (in meaning “weave,” as well as “blow”)
    Vātika
    adjective
    1. connected with the winds (humours) of the body having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble rheumatic (?) Mil 135 Mil 298
    from vāta 2, cp. * Sanskrit vātakin Halāyudha ii.451
    Vātiṅgaṇa
    1. the egg plant, Solanum melongena Ja v.131 Dhs-a 320
    cp. * Sanskrit vātingaṇa
    Vāda
    1. speaking, speech, talk, nearly always—˚, e.g. iti˚; hearsay, general talk M. i.133 SN v.73 AN ii.26
    2. kumāraka˚ child-talk or childish talk i.e. in the manner of talking to a child SN ii.218f. cori˚; deceitful talk Pv-a 89 (so read with variant reading for T bheri˚); dhammika˚; righteous speech. AN v.230
    3. musā˚ telling lies, false speech AN i.129 AN ii.141 AN iv.401 Pv-a 15 ‣See under musā
    4. adjective (—˚) speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising DN i.174 (sīla˚, paññā˚ etc.) Snp 913 (nivissa˚ dogmatist) AN i.287 (kamma˚, kiriya˚, viriya˚)-vādaṁ bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna-vāda under 4!) Snp-a 45 (Māravādaṁ bh.)
    5. what is said, reputation, attribute characteristic Snp 859 (but Snp-a 550 = nindā-vacana) Ja i.2 (jāti˚ genealogy, cp. DN i.137) ‣See also compound ˚patha
    6. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy dispute Snp 390 Snp 827 (also as adjective hīna˚) Dhp-a iii.390 Vin iv.1 Mhvs 4, 42 (sutvā ubhinnaṁ vādaṁ).

      • doctrine, theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect Snp-a 539f.; in compounds.: ācariya˚; traditional teaching Mil 148 also “heterodoxy” Mhbv.96, cp. Dīpavaṁsa v.30 uccheda˚; annihilistic doctrine Nd1 282 ‣See under uccheda; thera˚; the tradition of the Theras, i.e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mhvs 5, 2; 33, 97 sq.; Dīpavaṁsa v.10, 14 (theravādo aggavādo ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether 18 schools); dhuta˚;
      • adjective expounding punctiliousness Vism 81 (= aññe dhutangena ovadati anusāsati) ‣See under dhuta; bhinna˚; heretical sect (literally discrepant talk or view) Dīpavaṁsa v.39, 51 (opposite abhinnaka vāda) sassata˚; an eternalist Ps i.155
      1. ˚ānuvāda the translation of this phrase (used as adjective) at SN iii.6 ‣See Kindred Sayings iii.7 is “one who is of his way of thinking.” all kinds of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses DN i.161 DN iii.115 SN iii.6 SN iv.51 SN iv.340 SN iv.381 SN v.7 AN iii.4 Nett 52
      2. ˚kāma desirous of disputation Snp 825
      • ˚khitta upset in disputation, thrown out of his belief Vin iv.1 = Dhp-a iii.390
      • ˚patha “way of speech,” i.e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Snp 1076 (explained dogmatically at Nd2 563) AN ii.9
      • ˚sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine Snp-a 540
      • ˚sīla having the habit of, or used, to disputes Snp 381
      from vad ‣See vadati; Vedic vāda (not in RV!), in meaning of “theory, disputation” only in Classical Sanskrit The relation of roots vac: vad is like English speak: say but vāda as technical term has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of an emphatic or formulated speech assertion or doctrine
    Vādaka
    adjective noun
    1. doctrinal, sectarian, heretical; vagga˚; (either vagga1 or vagga2) professing somebody’s party, sectarian, schismatic Vin iii.175 (anu-vattaka +) vādaka-sammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement AN iv.347
    from vāda
    Vādana
    neuter
    1. playing on a musical instrument, music Vv-a 276
    from vādeti
    Vādika1
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking, talking (of) Mhvs 5, 60 (pāra˚ speaking of the farther shore, i.e. wishing him across the sea)
    from vāda
    Vādika2
    1. a species of bird Ja vi.538 (variant reading vāj˚)
    ?
    Vādita
    neuter
    1. instrumental music DN i.6 DN iii.183 AN i.212 AN ii.209 Dhp-a iv.75 DN-a i.77
    past participle of vādeti
    Vāditar
    1. a speaker, one who professes or has a doctrine DN iii.232 AN ii.246 AN iv.307
    agent noun from vādeti
    Vādin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Absolute only at AN ii.138 (cattāro vādī four kinds of disputants) Snp 382 (ye vā pi c'aññe vādino professing their view). Otherwise—˚, e.g. in agga˚; “teacher of things supreme” Thag 1, 1142
    • uccheda˚ professing the doctrine of annihilation Nett 111 ‣See uccheda; kāla˚; bhūta˚ attha˚; etc. speaking in time, the truth & good etc. DN i.4, 165 AN i.202 AN v.205 AN v.265 AN v.328
    • caṇḍāla˚ uttering the word Commentary Mhvs 5, 60; tathā˚ speaking thus consistent or true speaker DN iii.135 Snp 430
    • dhamma˚ professing the true doctrine SN iii.138 in combination with vinaya-vādin as much as “orthodox” Vin iii.175
    • mahā˚ a great doctrinaire or scholar Snp-a 540
    • yatha˚ cp. tathā˚-; sacca˚; speaking the truth AN ii.212 the Buddha so-called Thag ii.252
    • feminine ; vaṇṇa˚; singing the praises (of Vin ii.197
    from vāda
    Vāna1
    neuter
    1. sewing, stuffing (of a couch) DN-a i.86 Dhp-a i.234 (mañca˚)
    from 2 ‣See vāyati1
    Vāna2
    neuter
    1. literally “jungle” (cp. vana1 etymology), figuratively desire, lust (= taṇhā craving) Dhs-a 409 Kp-a 151, 152
    from vana, both in meaning 1 & 2 but literally meaning overshadowed by figuratively
    Vānaya
    1. in combination suvānaya (SN i.124 SN i.238) is to be separated su-v-ānaya ‣See ānaya
    Vānara
    monkey, literally “forester” Thag 1, 399 = Dhp 334 Thag 1, 454 Ja ii.78 (Senaka), 199 sq. (Nandiya) iii.429; iv.308; v.445 Mil 201 Dhp-a ii.22
    1. ˚inda monkey king Ja i.279 Ja ii.159
    from vana
    Vāpi
    feminine
    1. a pond; ˚jala water from a pond Mhvs 25, 66
    cp. Epic & Classic Sanskrit vāpī
    Vāpita1
    1. sown Ja i.6 (+ ropita, of dhañña)
    past participle of vāpeti
    Vapita2
    1. mown Dhs-a 238
    past participle of vāpeti
    Vāpeti

    to cause to sow cp. Divy 213 vāpayituṁ

    1. or to mow. past participle vāpita. *Vabhi causative from vap, representing vapati1 as well as vapati2
    *Vābhi
    1. appears in Pali as nābhi in uṇṇanābhi (q.v.)
    from to weave
    Vāma
    adjective
    1. left, the left side (always opposed to dakkhiṇa) Ja iv.407 (˚akkhi); Pv iv.78 Mil 295 (˚gāhin left-handed) Pv-a 178
    2. passive left side). As “northern” at Ja v.416
    3. vāmaṁ karoti to upset Ja iv.101
    4. instrumental vāmena on the left Snp p. 80. ablative vāmato from or on the left Ja iii.340 Pv ii.320 (as much as “reverse” Pv-a 87 = vilomato)
    5. beautiful; only in compound vām-ūru having beautiful thighs DN ii.266 Ja ii.443 So read at both places for vāmuru
    Vedic vāma
    Vāmana
    adjective
    1. dwarfish; masculine dwarf Vin i.91 DN-a i.148
    2. from vāma1, cp. German linkisch = uncouth
    Vāmanaka
    adjective-noun
    1. dwarfish, crippled Ja ii.226 Ja iv.137 Ja v.424 Ja v.427 feminine ˚ikā name of certain elephants MN i.178
    2. from vāmana
    Vāya
    1. weaving Pv-a 112 (tunna˚) ‣See tanta˚;
    from , vāyati1
    Vāyati1
    1. to weave, only in past participle vāyita

      • passive viyyati Vin iii.259
      • past participle also vīta.
      • causative II. vāyāpeti to cause to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vināpeti) Vv-a 181-‣ See also vināti
      Vedic vayati, , cp. Sanskrit veman loom, vāṭikā band, Latin vieo to bind or plait
    Vāyati2
    1. to blow (only as vāyati) Vin i.48 DN ii.107 (mahāvātā vāyanti) SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse v.) Ja i.18 Ja vi.530 Mhvs 12, 12.
    2. aorist vāyi SN iv.290 Ja i.51 cp. abhi˚ upa˚, pa˚
    3. to breathe forth, to emit an odour, to smell Pv i.61 Pv-a 14 as vāti (2nd singular vāsi) at Ja ii.11 (= vāyasi Commentary ).
    4. past participle vāta only as noun “wind” (q.v.)
    Vedic vāti & vāyati ‣See etymology under vāta
    Vāyana
    neuter
    1. blowing Vb-a 71 (upari˚vāta)
    from , vāyati2
    Vāyamati
    1. to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself SN iv.308 SN v.398 AN iv.462f. (chandaṁ janeti v. viriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti); Pv iv.52 Vb 208f. Pug 51 Vism 2 Dhp-a iii.336 Dhp-a iv.137 Pv-a 185
    vi + ā + yam
    Vāyasa
    1. a crow DN i.9 (˚vijjā ‣See DN-a i.93) SN i.124 Snp 447 Snp 675 Ja i.500 Ja ii.440 Mil 373 Dhp-a iii.206 Vv-a 27
    cp. Vedic vāyasa a large bird, Epic Sanskrit vāyasa crow
    Vāyāma
    1. striving, effort, exertion, endeavour SN ii.168 SN iv.197 SN v.440 AN i.174 (chando +) 219; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq. Ja i.72 Vb 123 211, 235 Vb-a 91 Dhp-a iv.109 Pv-a 259 On vāyāma as a constituent of the “Path” (sammā˚) ‣See magga 2.a
    • vāyāmaṁ karoti to exert oneself Dhp-a iv.26 Pv-a 259
    from vi + ā + yam
    Vāyita
    1. woven MN iii.253 (sāma˚), where Mil 240 in identical passage reads sayaṁ˚ Vin iii.259 cp. vīta
    past participle of vāyati1, cp. Divy 276 vāyita
    Vāyin
    adjective
    1. blowing (forth), emitting an odour, smelling Pv-a 87
    from vāyati2
    Vāyima
    adjective
    1. weaving, woven; ; not woven Vin iii.224 (of a rug or cover)
    from : vāyati1
    Vāyu
    1. wind Mil 385 Pv-a 156 ‣See next
    Vedic vāya, from : vāyati2
    Vāyo
    neuter
    1. wind DN iii.268 (˚kasiṇa) MN i.1 MN i.424 = AN iv.375 AN v.7 AN v.318 AN v.353f. (˚saññā) SN iii.207 Vism 172 (˚kasiṇa), 350 (definition). On vāyo as technical term for mobility, mobile principle (one of the 4 elements) ‣See Compendium 3, 270; Dhs translation § 962
    1. ˚dhātu the wind element, wind as one of the four great elements, wind as a general principle (consisting of various kinds ‣See enumerated under vāta) Vb 84 Vism 363; Nett 74 Vb-a 55 Vv-a 15 DN-a i.194
    for vāyu, in analogy to āpo & tejo; , with which frequently enumerated
    Vāra
    1. turn, occasion, time, opportunity Ja i.58 (utu-vārena utuvārena according to the turn of the seasons), 150 vi.294; Vism 431 (santati˚ interval) DN-a i.36 Dhp-a i.47 (dve vāre twice) Dhs-a 215 Vv-a 47 (tatiyavāraṁ for the 3rd & last time) Pv-a 109 Pv-a 135
    2. In pada˚; “track-occasion,” i.e. foot-track, walk(ing) step Ja i.62 Ja i.213 (˚vārena) by walking (here spelt pāda˚;) 506 (pādavāre pādavāre at every step)
    3. In udaka˚ v. stands for vāraka (i.e. bucket), the phrase udakavāraṁ gacchati means “to go for water,” to fetch water (in a bucket) Ja iv.492 Dhp-a i.49 Dutoit (J. translation iv.594) translates “Wunsch nach Wasser.”

      • bhāṇa˚ “turn for recitation,” i.e. a portion for recital, a chapter Snp-a 194 ‣See bhāṇa
    from vṛ; , in meaning “turn,” cp. vuṇāti
    Vāraka
    1. a pot, jar Vin ii.122 (three kinds: loha˚, dāru˚ and cammakhaṇḍa˚) Ja i.349 ii.70; iii.52 (dadhi˚) Mil 260 Dhs-a 377 (phānita˚)
    cp. Sanskrit vāra & vāraka
    Vāraṇa1
    neuter
    1. warding off, obstruction, resistance Vb-a 194 195 (= nivāraṇa)
    • ātapa˚ sunshade Dāvs i.28; v.35
    from vṛ; to obstruct
    Vāraṇa2
    1. elephant Ja i.358 Ja iv.137 Ja v.50 Ja v.416 DN-a i.275 Dhp-a i.389 (˚līḷhā elephant’s grace) Vv-a 36 257
    2. the Hatthilinga bird Thag 1 1064
    cp. Vedic vāraṇa strong
    Vāraṇa3
    1. spirituous liquor Ja v.505
    for vāruṇī?
    Vāraṇika
    1. at Thag 1, 1129 read cāraṇika (a little play) ‣See Psalms of the Brethren 419 note
    Vārattika
    adjective
    1. consisting of leather or a strap Ja iii.185
    from varatta
    Vāri
    neuter [Vedic vāri, cp. Avestan vār rain, vairi-sea; Latin ūrīna = urine; Anglo-Saxon waer sea; Old Icelandic ūr spray, etc. water DN ii.266 MN iii.300 AN iii.26 (in lotus simile) Thag 1, 1273 Snp 353 Snp 591 Snp 625 Snp 811 Vv 7910 Ja iv.19 Nd1 135 203 (= udaka) Mil 121 Pv-a 77
    1. -gocara living or life (literally feeding) in water Snp 605
    • ˚ja “water-born,” i.e. (1) a lotus Snp 845 cp. Nd1 203-(2) a fish Dhp 34 (= maccha Dhp-a i.289) Ja v.464 (= Ānanda-maccha Commentary ), 507
    • ˚da “water-giver,” i.e. cloud Dāvs iii.40
    • ˚dhara water-holder, water jug Ja v.4
    • ˚bindu a drop of water Snp 392
    • ˚vāha “watercarrier,” i.e. cloud AN ii.56 AN iii.53 SN v.400 Ja vi.26 543, 569; Kh vii.8

      • vārita,-yuta,-dhuta,-phuṭa (Jain practice) DN i.57 MN i.377
    Vārita
    obstructed, hindered Ja iv.264 restrained (sabbavāri) ‣See vāri.
    1. ˚vata (so read for cārita˚) “having the habit of selfdenial” (translation) SN i.28 (cp. Kindred Sayings i.39 & 320 with note Buddhaghosa’s explanation: “kilesānaṁ pana chinnattā vataṁ phala-samādhinā samāhitaṁ”), cp. bhāvanā-balena vāritattā dhammā etc. at Tika-Paṭṭhāna. 14
    past participle of vāreti, causative of vṛ1
    Vāritta
    neuter
    1. avoidance, abstinence Thag 1, 591 Mil 133 (cārittañ ca vārittañ ca); Vism 11
    from vṛ; , on the analogy of cāritta. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is vāritra: Mvyut 84
    Vāruṇī
    feminine
    1. spirituous liquor AN iii.213 Ja i.251 (˚vāṇija spirit merchant), 268; vi.502
    2. an intoxicated woman; term for a female fortune-teller Ja vi.500 (Vāruṇī 'va pavedhati; Commentary devatā-bhūta-paviṭṭhā yakkha-dāsī viya gahitā, i.e. possessed), 587 (vāruṇī 'va pavedhentī; Commentary yakkh’ āviṭṭhā ikkhaṇikā viya)
    cp. Sanskrit vāruṇī, with only reference in BR.: Harivaṁśa 8432
    Vāreti
    1. to prevent obstruct, hinder Pv ii.77 (vārayissaṁ I had the habit of obstructing; = nivāresiṁ Pv-a 102) Vv-a 68 Sdhp 364–⁠2. to ask in marriage Thag-a 266 Pv-a 55
    2. causative II vārāpeti to induce somebody to choose a wife Ja iv.289-Note. vāriyamāna (kālakaṇṇi-salākā) at Ja iv.2 read cār˚; (cp. Pv-a 272 vicāresuṁ identical).
    3. past participle vārita
    4. causative of vuṇāti, representing vṛ1 (to enclose, obstruct), as well as vṛ1 (to choose)
    Vāreyya
    neuter
    1. marriage, wedding Thag 2, 464 472, 479 Snp-a 19
    gerundive of vāreti
    Vāla1
    1. the hair of the tail horse-hair, tail Vin ii.195 = J v.335 (pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇavāla with bristling ears & tail, of an elephant) Ja v.274 (so read for phāla, cp. p. 268, v.113) Pv-a 285 (˚koṭi so read for bāla˚;); Sdhp 139
    2. pallankassa vāle bhinditvā destroying the hair (-stuffing) of a couch Vin ii.170 = DN-a i.88 cp. Vin iv.299: pallanko āharimehi vālehi kato
    3. On v. in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 136–⁠2. a hair-sieve also Vedic
      1. MN i.229
      1. ˚agga the tip of a hair AN iii.403 Mil 250 (˚vedha hitting the tip of a hair, of an archer) DN-a i.66
      • ˚aṇḍupaka a certain material, head dress (?) AN i.209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism 142 Dhs-a 115 (reads leḍḍūpaka)-kambala a blanket made of horse-tails DN i.167 AN i.240 296 Pug 55
      • ˚koṭi the tip of the hair Pv-a 285
      • ˚rajju a cord made of hair SN ii.238 AN iv.129 Ja ii.161
      • ˚vījanī a fan made of a Yak’s tail, a chowrie DN i.7
      • ˚vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair Ja i.58 (akkhaṇa-vedhin +) Vism 150; Mhvs 23, 86 (sadda-vedhin vijju-vedhin +) The abstract ˚vedhā hitting a hair, at Vism 150

        • figuratively an acute arguer, a hair-splitter; in standing phrase paṇḍitā nipuṇā kata-para-ppavādā vālavedhi-rūpā at DN i.26 MN i.176 MN ii.122 ‣See explanation at DN-a i.117
        Vedic vāla; connected with Latin adūlāre (ad + ūlāre) to flatter (literally wag the tail, like a dog), cp. English adulation; Lithuanian valaī horse hair
    Vāla2
    adjective
    1. malicious, troublesome, difficult Vin ii.299 (adhikaraṇa)
    cp. Sanskrit vyāla
    Vāla3
    neuter
    1. water; only in compound ˚ja a fish (cp. vārija)
    = vāri, cp. late Sanskrit vāla
    Vālatta
    neuter
    1. trouble, difficulty Vin ii.86 (in same context as vāla2) AN i.54
    abstract from vāla2
    Vāladhi
    1. a tail (usually of a large animal) Thag 1, 695 Ja i.63 Ja i.149 Ja vi.302 Pv i.83 Mhvs 10, 59 Vv-a 252 Sdhp 621; Vism 36 quoting Ap
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vāladhi
    Vālikā
    feminine
    1. sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat AN i.253 Ja i.210 Ja iii.52 Ja iii.407 Ja vi.64 Vism 420 Dhp-a i.3 111 Vv-a 160 305 Pv-a 189
    • paritta˚ sand (on the head) as an amulet Ja i.396 Ja i.399
    • In compounds. usually vālika˚;. cp. vālukā
    1. ˚puñja a heap of sand Ja vi.560
    • ˚pulina sand bed or bank Ja ii.366 Ja iii.389
    • ˚vassa a shower of sand Snp-a 224
    a by-form of vālukā
    Vālin
    adjective
    1. having a hairy tail Vv 647 cp. Vv-a 277
    from vāla1
    Vālukantāra
    1. at Vv-a 332 probably for vāluka-kantāra, i.e. sandy desert ‣See vaṇṇu
    Vālukā
    feminine
    1. sand. In comp; n usually vāluka˚;
    • SN iv.376 Vv 391 441; Ap. 23 Nd2 p. 72 (Gangāya v.) Ja ii.258 Ja iv.16 Pv ii.121 Mhvs 23, 86 Dhp-a iii.243 445 Vv-a 31 177; Sdhp 244 ‣See also vālika
    cp. Vedic & Epic Sanskrit vālukā
    Vāḷa1
    1. a snake Vism 312 (so read for vaḷa
    2. a beast of prey AN iii.102 (amanussa) Ja i.295 Ja iii.345 (˚macchā predaceous fishes) Mil 23 (˚vana forest of wild beasts)
      1. ˚miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger leopard, etc. Ja vi.569 Dhp-a i.171 (˚ṭṭhāna); iii.348 (˚rocanā); Vism 180, 239
      cp. late Sanskrit vyāḍa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 546
    Vāḷa2
    1. music (?) Pgdp 83
    misspelt for vāda?
    Vāvatteti
    1. (vi + ā + vṛt] to turn away (trs.), to do away with, remove MN i.12 (aorist vāvattayi saṁyojanaṁ, explained at MA 87 as “parivattayi, nimmūlaṁ akāsi”) = 122 (with variant reading vi˚ ‣See p. 526) AN ii.249 (variant reading vi˚).

    Vāsa1
    1. clothing; adjective (—˚) clothed in Ja vi.47 (hema-kappana-vāsase)
    vas to clothe ‣See vasati1
    Vāsa2
    1. living, sojourn, life Snp 191 Mhvs 17, 2 (anātha-vāsaṁ vasati to lead a helpless life) Pv-a 12 (saraagga-vāsaṁ v. live a life of concord) Snp-a 59 (lokantarika˚). cp. pari˚, saṁ˚. 2. home, house, habitation Snp 40
    2. vāsaṁ kappeti to live (at a place), to make one’s home Ja i.242 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 100. vāsaṁ upagacchati to enter a habitation (for spending the rainy season) Pv-a 32 In special sense “bed” ‣See compound ˚ūpagata
    3. state, condition (—˚) in ariya˚ holy state. AN v.29f.; brahmacariya˚; chastity Pv-a 61
      • adjective (—˚) staying, living, abiding, spending time Snp 19 (ekaratti˚), 414 (ettha˚). vassa˚; spending Lent Pv-a 20
      • vuttha˚ having spent Lent Ja i.183 cp. ante-vāsika-vāsa.

        1. ˚attha home success, luck in the house, prosperity AN ii.59 AN ii.61f. -āgāra bedroom Ja iii.317
        • ˚ūpagata (a) having entered one’s hut or abode (for the rainy season) Snp 415

          • (b) gone to bed Pv ii.128 Pv-a 280
          • ˚ghara living room, bedroom Snp-a 28 (= kuṭī)
          • ˚dhura ordinary duty (literally burden) or responsibility of living or the elementary stages of saintliness Snp-a 194 195 (contrasted to pariyatta-dhura), 306 (: ganthadhura)
          vas to dwell ‣See vasati2
    Vāsa3
    1. perfume Ja i.242 Ja vi.42 Vasaka, vasika
    cp. Classical Sanskrit vāsa, e.g. Mālatīm. 148, 4; from ‣See vāta
    Vāsaka, vāsika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. living, dwelling; vāsaka ‣See saṁ˚. vāsika: gāma˚; villager Mhvs 28 15; Bārāṇasi˚; living in Benares Ja iii.49 ‣See also ante˚;
    from vāsa2
    Vāsati
    1. to cry (of animals) Ja vi.497
    vāś ‣See vassati2
    Vāsana1
    adjective neuter
    1. clothing, clothed in (—˚) Pv-a 173
    = vasana1
    Vāsana2
    adjective neuter
    1. dwelling Dīpavaṁsa v.18
    = vasana2
    Vāsanā
    feminine
    1. that which remains in the mind, tendencies of the past, impression usually as pubba˚; former impression (Sn 1009 Mil 10 Mil 263)
    • cp. Nett 4, 21, 48, 128, 133 sq., 153, 158 sq. 189 sq
    • cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vāsanā, e.g. MVastu i.345
    from vasati2 = vāsa2, but by Rhys Davids, following the Pali Com̄. connected with vāseti & vāsa; 3
    Vāsara
    1. day (opposite night), a day Dāvs i.55; v.66
    cp. Vedic vāsara matutinal, vasaḥ early
    Vāsi
    feminine
    1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often combined with pharasu Ja i.32 Ja i.199 Ja ii.274 iii.281 iv.344 Mil 383 413 Dhp-a i.178 (tikhiṇā vāsiyā khaṇḍâkhaṇḍikaṁ chinditvā: cutting him up piecemeal with a sharp knife); Kp-a 49. —˚jaṭa handle of a mason’s adze Vin iv.168 SN iii.154 AN iv.127
    2. a razor Ja i.65 Ja ii.103 Ja iii.186 Ja iii.377
    cp. Sanskrit vāśī
    Vāsita
    1. scented Ja i.65 Ja ii.235 (su˚); iii.299; v.89; Vism 345
    2. [preferably from vāseti1 = vasati2 established, made to be or live, preserved Mhvs 8, 2 So also in phrase vāsita-vāsana
    3. adjective or vāsana-vāsita one who is impressed with (or has retained) a former impression Snp 1009 (pubba˚, = vāsanāya vāsita-citta Snp-a 583) Mil 263 (identical); Vism 185 (+ bhāvita-bhāvana). If taken as vāseti2, then to be translated as “scented filled, permeated,” but preferably as vāseti1
    4. Cp pari˚
    from vāseti2
    Vāsitaka
    adjective
    1. scented, perfumed Vin iv.341 (vāsitakena piññākena nhāyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap). feminine vāsitikā (scil. mattikā) scented clay Vin ii.280 (identical)
    2. from vāsita
    Vāsin1
    adjective (—˚)
    1. clothed in, clad Snp 456 (sanghāṭi˚), 487 (kāsāya˚); Pv iii.16 (sāhunda˚) Ja iii.22 (nantaka˚); iv.380 (rumma˚); feminine vāsinī Vin iii.139 (chanda˚, paṭa˚ etc.) = Vv-a 73
    2. from vas1
    Vāsin2
    adjective (—˚)
    1. liking, dwelling (in) Snp 682 (Mern-muddha˚), 754 (āruppa˚) Pv-a 1 (Mahāvihāra˚) 22 (Anga-Magadha˚), 47 (Sāvatthi˚), 73 (Bārāṇasi˚)
    from vas2
    Vāseti1
    1. : causative of vasati2 (q.v.)

    Vāseti2
    1. to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin i.211 (here in the sense of “preserve, cure,” probably as vāseti of vasati2); ii.120 Ja iv.52 (aṭṭhīni, for the sake of preservation); v.33 (saso avāsesi sake sarīre explained as “sake sarīre attano sarīraṁ dātuṁ avāsesi vāsāpesī ti attho, sarīrañ c’ assa bhakkh’ atthāya adāsi. In this passage vāseti is by Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. taken as causative of vas to eat, thus “he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on his own body”), 321 (kusumehi vāsetvā perfume) ‣See also vasati2 (
    2. causative ).
    3. past participle vāsita.
    4. causative II. vāsāpeti Ja v.33
    5. denominative from vāsa perfume
    Vāha
    adjective-noun
    1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in sattha˚; a caravan leader, merchant Ja i.271 Vv 847 8420 Vv-a 337
    2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Snp p. 126 (tila˚ = tila-sakaṭa Snp-a 476) Ja iv.236 (saṭṭhi˚sahassāni.60,000 cartloads) Mil 80 (˚sataṁ)
    from vah
    Vāhaka
    1. that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i.e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combination with udaka˚; a flood of water AN i.178 Vin i.32 Mil 176
    from vāheti
    Vāhana
    1. adjective carrying, pulling, drawing Vin ii.122 (udaka˚-rajju) Ja i.136 (kaṭṭha˚ gathering fire-wood) Pv-a 127 (ratha-yuga˚)
    2. neuter conveyance beast of burden, monture Vin i.277 (˚āgāra stable garage) Snp 442 (Māra sa˚ with his elephant); Pv ii.926 Dhp-a i.192 (hatthi˚, elephant-mount; cp. p. 196 where five. vāhanāni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enumerated, viz. kaṇeru, dāsa, dve assā, hatthi)
    3. bala˚ army & elephants, i.e. army in general, forces Ja i.262
    from vāheti
    Vāhanaka
    1. = vāha 1 Vv-a 337
    Vāhasā
    indeclinable
    1. owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin iv.158 Thag 1, 218 1127 Mil 379 Vv-a 100
    an instrumental of vāha, formed after the manner of balasā, thāmasā, used adverb ially
    Vāhin
    adjective-noun
    1. carrying, conveying Ja vi.125 (haya˚ running by means of horses, i.e. drawn by horses) also as poetical expression for “horse” Ja vi.252 (= sindhava Commentary ). The reading vāhin at Mhvs 22, 52 is given as variant reading for Text vājin in P. Text S. ed. feminine vāhinī, an army Ja iii.77 (miga˚; explained as “aneka-sahassa-sankhā migasenā”); vi.581
    2. from vāha
    Vāheti
    1. is causative of vahati (q.v.)

    Vi
    indeclinable
    1. (a) inseparable prefix of separation and expansion, in original meaning of “asunder,” semantically closely related to Latin dis-&
    2. absolutive ver-. Often as base-prefix in various meanings ‣See below 1–⁠4, also very frequent as modifying prefix (in comb; n with other primary prefixes like ā ni, pa, paṭi, saṁ), where its prevailing character is one of emphasis
    3. (b) The native grammarians define vi- either as “vividha” (i.e. our meaning 2) ‣See Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 136 (viharati = vividhaṁ hitaṁ harati); and Vism 179 vividhaṁ khittaṁ = vikkhittaṁ ‣See also under viggaṇhati; or “prātilomya” (i.e. meaning 3) Nirukta (ed. Roth) i.3; or paraphrase it by su˚; or suṭṭhu (i.e. meaning 4) ‣See under vimāna & vippasanna The latter meaning also in Hemacandra’s Anek’ ārtha-sangraha (ed. Calc.) 7, 15: “śreṣṭhe 'tīte nānārthe” (i.e. Nos. 4 & 2)
    4. (c); vi˚; occurs also as distributive (repetitional) prefix in reduplication compounds (here closely resembling paṭi˚ and the negative a˚), like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa piecemeal, chidda-vicchidda holes upon holes, vaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa, etc
    5. Contracted forms are vy˚; (= viy˚ before vowels) and vo˚; (= vi ava); the guṇa & vriddhi form is; ve˚;
    6. II. Meanings.

      1. -1. denoting expansion, spreading out; figuratively variety or detail, to be translated by expressions with over or about (cp Latin e-), as: ˚kampati shake about, ˚kāseti open out, ˚kirati scatter about, ˚kūjati sing out (= upa-nadati C), ˚carati move about (= ā-hiṇḍati), ˚churita sprinkled about, ˚jāyati bring forth, ˚tāna “spread out,” ˚tthāra ex-tension, de-tail, ˚dāleti break open, ˚dhammati whirl about, ˚dhāyaka providing, ˚pakirati strew all over, ˚pphāra pervading, ˚pphārika ef-fulgence, ˚bhajati ex-plain, ˚bhatta dis-tributed, ˚bhāga division, distribution ˚ravati shout out, ˚rūhana growing up, ˚rocati shine out, ˚ssajjati give out, ˚ssaṭṭha sent out, ˚ssara shouting out, ˚ssuta far-famed
      • denoting disturbance separation, mixing up (opposite saṁ˚), as given with “away” or “down,” or the prefixes de- and dis-, e.g. ˚kasita burst asunder, ˚kubbana change, i.e. miracle (meta-morphosis), ˚kkaya sell (“ver-kaufen”), ˚kkhambhati de-stroy, ˚kkhāleti wash off (= ācameti), ˚kkhepa de-rangement, ˚gata dis-appeared (used as definition of vi at Thag-a 80), ˚galita dripping down, ˚ggaha separation ˚cinati dis-criminate, ˚jahati dis-miss, ˚desa foreign country (cp. verajjaka), ˚naṭṭha destroyed, ˚nata bending down, ˚nāsa de-struction, ˚nicchaya dis-crimination ˚nodaka driving out, ˚pāteti to be destroyed, ˚ppalapati to talk confusedly, ˚rājeti discard as rāga, ˚rodha destruction, ˚lumpati break up, ˚vitta separated, ˚vidha mixed, ˚veka separation, ˚vāha carrying away, i.e. wedding

    7. denoting the reverse of the simple verb or loss, difference, opposite, reverse, as expressed by un- or dis-, e.g. ˚asana mis-fortune, ˚kaṭika unclean ˚kappa change round, ˚kāra per-turbation, dis-tortion ˚kāla wrong time, ˚tatha un-truth, ˚dhūma smoke-less, ˚patti corruption, ˚parīta dubious, ˚ppaṭipanna on the wrong track, ˚bhava non-existence (or as 4 “more bhava, i.e. wealth), ˚mati doubt, ˚mānana dis-respect ˚yoga separation, ˚raja fault-less, ˚rata abs-taining ˚rūpa un-sightly, ˚vaṭa unveiled, ˚vaṇṇeti defame ˚vāda dis-pute, ˚sama uneven, ˚ssandati overflow ˚ssarita for-gotten, ˚siṭṭha distinguished, ˚sesa difference distinction.

      • in intensifying sense (developed from 1 & 2), mostly with terms expressing; per se one or the other of shades of meanings given under 1
      1. -3; to be translated by “away,” out, all over, “up,” or similarly (completely), e.g. ˚ākula quite confused, ˚katta cut up ˚kopeti shake up, ˚garahati scold intensely, ˚chindati cut off, ˚jita conquered altogether, ˚jjotita resplendent ˚tarati come quite through, ˚niyoga close connection ˚nivatteti turn off completely, ˚pariṇāma intense change ˚ppamutta quite released, ˚ppasanna quite purified ˚pphalita crumpled up, ˚bandhana (close) fetter, ˚ramati cease altogether, ˚sahati have sufficient strength ˚sukkha dried up, ˚suddha very bright, ˚ssamati rest fully (German aus-ruhen), ˚haññati to get slain
      prefix, resting on Indogermanic *ṷi “two,” as connotation of duality or separation (German “ent-zwei”), which is contained in viṁśati, number for “twenty” ‣See vīsati cp. Sanskrit viṣu apart, Latin dīvido = divide AN secondary (compar.) formation in Sanskrit vitara further farther, Gothic wipra against, German wider
    Vikaca
    adjective blossoming DN-a i.40
    Vikaṭa
    1. changed, altered, distorted; disgusting, foul, filthy Pgdp 63 (˚ānana with filthy mouth)-nt. filth, dirt; four mahā-vikaṭāni applied against snake-bite, viz., gūtha, mutta, chārikā, mattikā Vin i.206
    • cp. vekaṭika
    1. ˚bhojana filthy food DN i.167 MN i.79
    vi + kata, of kṛ
    Vikaṇṇa
    adjective
    1. having deranged or bent corners, frayed Vin i.297 Vin ii.116
    vi + kaṇṇa
    Vikaṇṇaka
    1. a kind of arrow (barbed?) Ja ii.227 Ja ii.228
    from vikaṇṇa
    Vikata
    1. changed, altered Vin i.194 (gihi-vikata changed by the g.)
    Vikati
    feminine
    1. “what is made of something,” make, i.e. 1. sort, kind Ja i.59 (ābharaṇa˚ kind of ornament) 243 (maccha-maṁsa˚) Mil 403 (bhojana˚ all kinds of material things); Vism 376 (bhājana˚ special bowl) Vb-a 230 (pilandhana˚) Dhp-a ii.10 (khajja˚)
    • product make; vessel: danta˚; “ivory make,” i.e. vessels of ivory MN ii.18 DN i.78 Ja i.320

  • arrangement get up, assortment; form, shape Ja v.292 (mālā˚ garlandarrangement).

    1. ˚phala an assortment of fruit Ja v.417
    from vi + kṛ
  • Vikatika
    feminine
    1. a woollen coverlet (embroidered with figures of lions, tigers etc.) DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.181 Vin i.192 Thag-a 55 (Ap v.10: tūlikā˚;)
    from vikati
    Vikatta
    adjective
    1. cut open Ja vi.111 (variant reading ˚kanta)
    past participle of vi + kantati2
    Vikattana
    neuter
    1. cutter, knife Vin iii.89 (tiṇha go˚) MN i.449 Ja vi.441
    from vi + kantati2
    Vikatthati
    1. to boast, show off SN ii.229 Ja i.454 (= vañcana-vacanaṁ vadati Commentary ). past participle vikatthita
    2. vi + katthati
    Vikatthana
    neuter
    1. boasting Snp-a 549
    from vi + katth
    Vikatthita
    neuter
    1. boasting Ja i.359
    from vikatthati
    Vikatthin
    adjective
    1. boasting; only negative ; not boasting, modest. AN v.157 Snp 850 Mil 414
    from vi + katth
    Vikanta
    1. = vikatta; cut open, cut into pieces Ja ii.420
    Vikantati
    1. to cut Ja v.368 (= chindati Commentary ). - past participle vikatta & vikanta;
    2. vi + kantati2
    Vikantana
    neuter
    1. knife MN i.244 cp. vikattana
    from vikantati
    Vikappa
    1. thinking over, considering, thought, intention Nd 97, 351
    2. doubtfulness, indecision, alternative, applied to the participle Snp-a 202 266 Kp-a 166 DN-a i.51 Pv-a 18
    3. attha˚ consideration or application of meaning, exposition, statement, sentence Ja iii.521 Snp-a 433 591
    4. cp. nibbikappa
    vi + kappa
    Vikappana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. assignment, apportioning Vin iv.60 = 123 = 283. At Vin iv.122 two ways of assigning a gift are distinguished: sammukhāvikappanā & parammukhā˚. All these passages refer to the cīvara
      2. alternative, indecision, indefiniteness (= vikappa), as technical term in grammar applied to participle; ca and e.g. Snp-a 179 (“ca”); Kp-a 166 (“vā”)
      from vikappeti
    Vikappita
    1. prepared, put in order, arranged, made; in combination su˚; well prepared, beautifully set Snp 7 Vv-a 188 (manohara +)
    • Buddhaghosa at Snp-a 21 interprets ˚kappita as chinna “cut,” saying it has that meaning from “kappita-kesa-massu” (with trimmed hair & beard), which he interprets; ad sensum, but not etymologically correctly. cp. vikappeti.5
    past participle of vikappeti
    Vikappin
    adjective
    1. having intentions upon (—˚), designing AN iii.136 (an-issara˚ intentioning unruliness)
    from vikappa
    Vikappiya
    adjective
    1. to be designed or intended Sdhp 358
    gerundive of vikappeti
    Vikappeti
    1. to distinguish, design, intend, to have intentions or preferences, to fix one’s mind on (
    2. locative or
    3. accusative ) Snp 793 = 802 (= vikappaṁ āpajjati Nd1 97) 918 (identical Nd1 351)
    4. to detail, describe, state Kp-a 166 Snp-a 43
    5. to assign, apportion, give Vin i.289 (cīvaraṁ); iv.121 (identical).

      • to arrange, put on, get ready Vin i.297

    6. to change, alter, shape, form Ja v.4 (ambapakkaṁ satthena v.; Commentary not quite correctly = vicchindati).

      • past participle vikappita
      vi + kappeti
    Vikampati
    1. to shake; figuratively to be unsettled, to waver, to be in doubt SN iv.71 (cittaṁ na vikampate) Thag 1, 1076 (vidhāsu na v.; translation Psalms of the Brethren p. 366: “who is not exercised about himself in this way or in that”) Nd1 195 (tīsu vidhāsu, as at Thag 1, 1076 as comment on Snp 843) Ja vi.488
    • ppr.
    • medium vikampamāna, only negative ; not hesitating, settled, well balanced, resolved Snp 842 Ja iv.310 Ja v.495 (Commentary anolīyamāna); vi.175 (C nirāsanka).
    • past participle vikampita
    vi + kamp
    Vikampin
    adjective
    1. shaking; only negative ; not shaking, steadfast, steady, settled Snp 952 Vv 5022
    from vikampati
    Vikaroti
    1. to alter, change, disturb; aorist vyakāsi Ja ii.166 (= vikāraṁ akāsi parivattayi Commentary ); so read for Text vyākāsi.
    2. imperative passive 3 singular vikiriyyatu “let him be disturbed” Ja iii.368 (after Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. One may take it to vikirati, q.v.).
    3. past participle vikaṭa & vikata; ‣See also vikubbati, etc
    4. vi + kṛ
    Vikala
    adjective
    1. defective, in want of, deprived, (being) without Thag 2, 391 Pv iv.1 (bhoga˚) Ja iv.278 vi.232 Mil 106 Mil 307 (udakena) DN-a i.222 Pv-a 4 (hattha˚). cp. vekalla
    Sanskrit vikala
    Vikalaka
    adjective
    1. being short of, wanting Vin i.285
    vikala + ka
    Vikasati1
    1. to open (out), to expand, to blossom fully (of flowers). past participle vikasita.
    2. causative vikāseti to open Ja vi.364 (hatthaṁ)
    3. vi + kas
    Vikasati2
    1. to shine; causative vikāseti to illuminate Davs v.47 (mukh’ ambuja-vanāni vikāsayanto)
    2. vi + kāś, cp. okāsa
    Vikasita
    1. burst asunder, blossoming, opened (wide), expanded, usually applied to flowers Ja iii.320 (= phālita Commentary ); iv.407 Vv-a 40 206 (of eyes) Snp-a i.39 DN-a i.40
    past participle of vikasati1
    Vikāra
    1. change, alteration, in mahā˚; great change Vism 366, 367 (of two kinds: anupādiṇṇa upādiṇṇa, or primary & secondary, i.e. the first caused by kappa-vuṭṭhāna, the second by dhātu-kkhobha) Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇa˚)
    2. distortion, reversion, contortion, in various connections, as kucchi˚; stomach-ache Vin i.301
    3. bhamuka˚ frowning Dhp-a iv.90
    4. raukha˚ grimace, contortion of the face, Ja ii.448 Pv-a 123
    5. hattha˚ hand-figuring, signs with the hand, gesture Vin i.157 (+ hattha-vilanghaka) = M i.207 (reads vilangaka) Vin v.163 (with other similaṛ gestures) Ja iv.491 v.287; vi.400, 489
    6. Kern. Toevoegselen s.v. vikāra is hardly correct in translating hattha-vikārena at Vin i.157 by “eigenhandig,” i.e. with his own hand. It has to be combined with hattha-vilanghakena
    7. perturbation disturbance, inconvenience, deformity Vin i.271 272 (˚ṁ sallakkheti observe the uneasiness) Mil 224 (tāvataka v. temporary inconvenience), 254 (˚vipphāra disturbing influence) Snp-a 189 (bhūta˚ natural blemish)

      • constitution, property, quality (cp. Compendium 1572 1681) Vism 449 (rūpa˚ material quality) Vv-a 10 (so correct under maya in P.D. vol. iii. p. 147)

    8. deception fraud Pv-a 211 (= nikati)

      • cp. nibbikāra
      from vi + kṛ
    Vikāla
    1. “wrong time,” i.e. not the proper time, which usually means “afternoon” or “evening,” and therefore often “too late."- Vin iv.274 (= time from sunset to sunrise) Ja v.131 (ajja vikālo to-day it is too late) Vv-a 230 (identical) locative vikāle (opposite kāle) as
    2. adverb, meaning: (1) at the wrong time Vin i.200 Snp 386 Pv-a 12
    3. too late Vv.84 (= akāle Vv-a 337) Dhp-a i.356 Dhp-a iv.69
    4. very late (at night Ja v.458
      1. ˚bhojana taking a meal at the wrong time, i, e. in the afternoon Vin i.83 DN i.5 AN i.212 AN ii.209 Snp 400 DN-a i.77
      vi + kāla
    Vikāsa
    1. opening, expansion Ja vi.497 (vana˚ opening of the forest); Dhtp 265
    vi + kas ‣See vikasati1
    Vikāsika
    1. a linen bandage (Kern: “pluksel”) Vin i.206 (for wound-dressing). May be a dern from kāsika, i.e. Benares cloth, the vi˚ denoting as much as “a kind of.”
    from vi + kṛṣ ‣See kasati
    Vikāsitar
    1. one who plucks or pulls, bender of a bow, archer Ja vi.201
    from vi + kṛṣ, kasati
    Vikāsin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. illumining, delighting Mhvs 18, 68
    from vi + kāś ‣See vikasati2
    Vikāseti
    1. ‣See vikasati
    Vikiṇṇa
    scattered about, strewn all over, loose Vin i.209 (undurehi okiṇṇa˚; overrun) Ja v.82
    1. ˚kesa with dishevelled hair Ja i.47 Vism 415
    2. ˚vāca adjective of loose talk SN i.61 (= asaññata-vacana Kindred Sayings i.320) Pug 35 (same explanation PugA 217): Ja v.77 (= patthaṭavacana Commentary )
    3. past participle of vikirati
    Vikitteti
    1. to slander Mil 276 (opposite pakitteti)
    vi + kitteti
    Vikiraṇa
    neuter & adjective)
    1. scattering, dispersing; being scattered or dispersed DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96)
    2. Vb 358 (Text reads vikī˚; variant reading vikāraṇa & vikkir˚) = Pug 23 (which reads nikaraṇā; translation “guilefulness”). In this connection Vb-a 493 interprets vikiraṇa (or ˚ā) as “denial, abnegation” (pretext?), by saying “nâhaṁ eva karomī ti pāpānaṁ vikkhipanato vikiraṇā."-With reference to Arahantship (the dissolution of the body) at Dhp-a iii.109 in formula bhedana-vikiraṇa-viddhaṁsanadhamma i.e. “of the nature of total destruction. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit formula śatana-patana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṁsana (-dharmatā) Avs i.96 (where S. Speyer in Index considers vikaraṇa the correct form) = Divy 299 (reading cyavanapatana˚) = Lal. v.242 ‣See also SN iii.190 (under vikirati)
    3. adjective scattering, spending, squandering
    4. feminine ˚ī Snp 112
    from vikirati
    Vikirati

    to scatter about, sprinkle, spread, mix up (trs. & intransitive) MN i.127 SN iii.190 (in simile of playing children: paṁsv’ āgārakāni hatthehi ca pādehi ca vikiranti mix up

    vidhamanti fall about

    viddhaṁsenti tumble over

    vikīḷanikaṁ karonti, describing the scrambling and crowding about. In quite a different interpretation applied to Arahantship ‣See under vikiraṇa, as also in the same chapter (SN iii.190 § 11 sq.) in phrase rūpaṁ vikirati vidhamati etc. where it is meant in trs sense of “destroy”; thus vi˚ in the same verb in meaning (vi˚ 1 & 2) SN iv.41 (kāyo vikiri came to pieces

    1. seyyathâpi bhusa-muṭṭhi) Ja i.226 Pv ii.38 (vikiri, variant reading for okiri) Mil 101 Mil 237 (lokadhātu vikireyya, would fall to pieces; combined with vidhameyya & viddhaṁseyya; “drop & tumble,” denoting total confusion and destruction Similarly on p. 250 = 337 “vāri pokkhara-patte vikirati vidhamati viddhaṁsati”: the water scatters, drops falls off; applied figuratively to bad qualities at same passage) Snp-a 172 passive vikiriyyati & vikirīyati; may be taken either to vikirati or vikaroti (cp. kiriyati) Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na viddhaṁsiyanti : get scattered and fall off); ppr vikirīyamāna Pv-a 271 (with sprawling or confused limbs);
    2. imperative vikiriyyatu Ja iii.368
    3. past participle vikiṇṇa
    4. vi + kirati
    Vikīlanika
    adjective & neuter
    1. playing about; in phrase vikīḷanikaṁ karoti intranstitive to play all over or excitedly (literally to make play; vi˚ in meaning vi˚ 1) SN iii.190 as trs. to put out of play, to discard (vi˚ 3) ibid (rūpaṁ etc. v. karoti)
    2. from vi + kīḷana
    Vikujjhita
    1. made angry, angered, annoyed, vexed MN ii.24 (so read for vikujjita)
    vi + past participle of kujjheti
    Vikuṇita
    adjective
    1. distorted, deformed Vism 346 (˚mukha) Pv-a 123 (identical). cp. vikūṇa
    vi + kuṇita
    Vikuddha
    adjective
    1. free from anger Ja v.308
    vi + kuddha
    Vikubbati
    1. to change round, transform, do magic Ja iii.114 (= parivatteti); Dīpavaṁsa i.40 (vikubbeyya); also in phrase iddhi-vikubbati to work transformation by magic (psychic) potency Kvu 55
    • ppr.
    • feminine vikubbantī Vv 112 (iddhiṁ working magic = vikubban’ iddhiyo vaḷañjentī Vv-a 58), and vikubbamānā (iddhi˚) Vv 311
    • past participle *vikubbita miracle ‣See vikubbana
    vi + kubbati, medium of karoti
    Vikubbana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. miraculous transformation, change; assuming a different form by supernatural power; miracle Thag 1, 1183 Ps ii.174, 210 Dīpavaṁsa viii.6 (˚esu kovida); Mhvs 19, 19 Mil 343 Vism 309, 316 sq. More specific as iddhi-vikubbana (or ˚ā, i.e. by psychic powers, e.g. DN ii.213 Vism 373 sq.; or vikubbanā iddhi Vism 378, 406 Vv-a 58 Dhs-a 91 (the various forms of iddhi). cp. Kvu translation 50 Compendium 61
      • The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is represented by the
      • past participle of vikubbati, i.e. vikurvita, e.g. Avs i.258; Divy 269 etc. Vikulava(ka)
      from vikubbati
    Vikulāva(ka)
    adjective
    1. having no nest, without a nest SN i.224 (ka) Ja i.203
    vi + kulāva
    Vikūjati
    1. to sing (like a bird), warble, chirp, coo Pv-a 189 (= upanadati)
    • ppr.
    • medium vikūjamāna Vin iv.15 Ja v.12
    vi + kūjati
    Vikūṇa
    1. distortion, grimace (mukha˚) Snp-a 30
    cp. vikuṇita & vikāra
    Vikūla
    adjective
    1. sloping down, low-lying AN i.35 (contrasted with ukkūla). We should expect ni˚; for vi˚; as in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ‣See ukkūla
    vi + kūla
    Vikūlaka
    adjective
    1. contrary, disgusting Thag 2, 467 (= paṭikūla Thag-a 284)
    from vikūla
    Vikesikā
    (adjective feminine )
    1. with loose or dishevelled hair Vin i.15
    vi + kesa + ika
    Vikoṭṭita
    1. beaten, cut, slain, killed Mil 304 (koṭṭita +)
    vi + koṭṭita
    Vikopana
    neuter
    1. upsetting, injuring, doing harm Ja ii.330 = iv.471 Mil 185 Mil 266 Dhs-a 145
    from vi + kup
    Vikopin
    adjective
    1. shaking, disturbed; negative Ja vi.226
    vi + kup
    Vikopeti
    1. to shake up Pv-a 253
    2. to upset, spoil, to do harm Vin iii.47 Mil 276 (vikitteti +)
    3. to destroy Ja vi.68 (padaṁ a track).

      vi + kopeti
    Vikkanta
    1. heroic Ja i.119 Ja ii.211 Ja iv.271 Mil 400 (˚cārin, of a lion)
    past participle of vi + kram
    Vikkandati
    1. to cry out, lament, wail Ja vi.525
    vi + kandati
    Vikkama
    1. walking about, stepping; in ˚malaka walking-enclosure, “” corridor Ja i.449
    2. strength, heroism Ja ii.211 Ja ii.398 Ja iii.386 (˚porisa)
    from vi + kram
    Vikkamati
    1. to have or show strength, to exert oneself Ja iii.184 (= parakkamati) Mil 400
    • pp vikkanta
    vi + kamati
    Vikkaya
    1. selling, sale AN ii.209 Snp 929 (kaya +) Ja i.121 Ja ii.200 Ja iv.115 (majja˚) Mil 194 (˚bhaṇḍa goods for sale, merchandise) Pv-a 29 Pv-a 113 (˚bhaṇḍa). Vikkayika & kayika;
    vi + kaya
    Vikkayika
    ˚kāyika;
    adjective-noun
    1. a salesman, vendor Dhp-a iv.50 (ā)
    2. for sale Ja i.201 (ā) Dhp-a i.269 (a)
    from vikiṇāti
    Vikkiṇāti
    1. to sell Ja i.227 Ja i.377 (absolutive vikkiṇitvā) Pv-a 100 (identical), 191 (
    2. aorist vikkiṇi)

      • infinitive vikketu ṁ Ja iii.283
      • gerundive vikkiṇiya = for sale Dhp-a i.390 (˚bhaṇḍa merchandise)
      vi + kiṇāti
    Vikkīḷita
    neuter
    1. sporting, amusement, pastime Nett 124 (in applied meaning)
    vi + kīḷita
    Vikkuthita
    adjective
    1. boiled, ˚duddha boiled milk Kp-a 60 (Text reads vikkuthita-duṭṭha-vaṇṇa, but A past participle Snp-a Index p. 870: vikkuṭṭhita-duddha˚). The corresponding passage at Vism 260 has duṭṭha-khīra- vaṇṇa which seems faulty
    2. vi + kuthita
    Vikkhaṇḍati
    1. to break (up), destroy, spoil Sdhp 450 (absolutive ˚iya).
    2. past participle vikkhaṇḍita
    3. vi + khaṇḍati
    Vikkhaṇḍita
    1. broken, ruined, spoilt Sdhp 436
    past participle of vikkhaṇḍati
    Vikkhambha
    1. diameter (literally support) Ja v.268 Ja v.271 Mhvs 18, 27
    vi + khambha 1
    Vikkhambhati
    intranstitive to become stiff (with fear), to be scared or frightened Ap. 50. from vi + khambha 2
    Vikkhambhana
    neuter
    1. withdrawal of support, stopping (the nīvaraṇas or any evil influences or corruptions: kilesa˚), arresting, paralysing; elimination discarding Ps ii.179 Nd1 6 Nd2 338 606b Ja iii.15 (kilesa˚ + metta-bhāvana-jhān’ uppatti); iv.17 Vism320; Sdhp 455
    • Usually in following compounds.: ˚pahāna elimination (of character-blemishes) by discarding Ja ii.230 Nd2 203; Vism 5 Dhs-a 352 Snp-a 19
    • ˚vimutti emancipation by elimination Ja ii.35
    • ˚viveka arrest by aloofness Dhs-a 12 164; Vism 140, 141
    vi + khambha + na
    Vikkhambhanatā
    feminine
    1. state of having undone or discarded, removal, destruction, paralysis Nett 15, 16
    vikkhambhana + tā
    Vikkhambhika
    adjective
    1. leading to arrest (of passions), conducive to discarding (the blemishes of character) Vism 114
    from vikkhambheti
    Vikkhambhita
    1. arrested, stopped, paralysed, destroyed Ps ii.179; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 155, 320 sq. Duka-Paṭṭhāna 10
    past participle of vikkhambheti
    Vikkhambhiya
    adjective
    1. in negative a˚ not to be obstructed or overcome DN iii.146
    gerundive of vikkhambheti
    Vikkhambheti
    1. (trs.) to “unprop,” unsettle, discard; to destroy, extirpate, paralyse (cp khambha 2 and chambheti), give up, reject Snp 969 (= abhibhavati etc. Nd1 492); Vism 268 Ja i.303 (jhānabalena kilese v.) Mil 34 (nīvaraṇe) Dhp-a iv.119 (pītiṁ vikkhambhetvā: here in meaning “set up, establish” Or to produce such pīti as to be called pharaṇā pīti, thus vikkhambheti = pharati.2? Or as denominative from vikkhambha “diameter” = to establish etc.?) Vv-a 156 (read ˚etvā.)-
    2. past participle vikkhambhita
    3. vi + khambheti
    Vikkhalita
    neuter
    1. stumbling, fault, faux pas AN i.199
    vi + khalita2
    Vikkhāyitaka
    adjective neuter
    1. “pertaining (or: of the nature of) to being eaten up, i.e. a (mental) representation obtained by contemplation of a corpse gnawed by animals, one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas Vism 110 = Mil 332 (˚saññā); Vism 179, 194
    vi + khāyati(= khādita) + ka
    Vikkhālita
    1. washed off, cleansed Vin ii.201 Vism 59
    past participle of vikkhāleti
    Vikkhāleti
    1. to wash off, to wash one’s face (mukhaṁ) rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.201 SN ii.269 Ja i.266 Ja i.459 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 209 Pv-a 241 (= ācameti)
    • pp vikkhālita
    vi + khāḷeti
    Vikkhitta
    adjective
    1. upset, perplexed, mentally upset, confused SN ii.122 (˚citta); v.157, 263 sq. AN iii.174 (˚citta); v.147 (identical); Vism 410 (= uddhacc ânugata)
    2. undisturbed, composed, collected. AN v.149 Iti 94 Pv-a 26
    3. vi + khitta
    Vikkhittaka
    adjective
    1. scattered all over, deranged, dismembered; of a dead body with respect to its limbs (as one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhāna’s: cp. vikkhāyika & vicchiddaka) Vism 110 (˚saññā) = Mil 332 Vism 179 (with definition vividhaṁ khittaṁ vikkhittaṁ aññena hatthaṁ aññena pādaṁ aññena sīsan ti evaṁ tato tato khittassa chava-sarīrassa adhivacanaṁ), 194-hata˚; killed & cut up Vism 179
    2. ; citta˚; of unbalanced or deranged mind Mil 308
    vi + khitta + ka
    Vikkhipana
    neuter
    1. refusal, denial Vb-a 493 ‣See vikiraṇa 1
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit viksepa refusal Avs i.94
    Vikkhipatti
    1. to be disturbed Ja i.400 (gocare, in …) Mil 337 (cittaṁ). past participle vikkhitta
    2. passive of vikkhipati
    Vikkhīṇa
    1. totally destroyed, finished, gone Thag 2, 22
    vi + khīṇa
    Vikkhīyati
    1. to go to ruin, to be destroyed, to be lost Ja v.392 (future ˚īyissati).
    2. past participle vikkhīṇa
    3. vi + khīyati
    Vikkhepa
    1. disturbance, derangement Ja vi.139
    2. perplexity, confusion DN i.59
    3. vācā˚ equivocation, senseless talk DN i.24
    4. in citta˚ cetaso; v. upset of mind, unbalanced mind, mental derangement: citta˚ SN i.126 Pug 69

      • cetaso AN iii.448 Dhs 429 Vb 373

        • avikkhepa equanimity, balance DN iii.213 AN i.83 Ps i.94 Dhs 160 430 Vb 178f. 231 sq., 266 sq., 279 sq., 285 sq
        1. ˚paṭibāhana exclusion or warding off of confusion (of mind) or disturbance Vism 244 Vb-a 227
        vi + khepa
    Vikkhepika
    adjective
    1. in phrase amarā˚; ‣See under amarā; another suggestion as to explanation may be: khipa = eel-basket, thus vikhep-ika one who upsets the eel-basket, i.e. causes confusion
    from vikkhepa
    Vikkheḷikā
    (adjective feminine )
    1. having saliva dropping from the mouth (of sleeping women), slobbering Vin i.15
    vi + kheḷa + ikā
    Vikkhobhita
    1. thoroughly shaken up or disturbed Mil 377
    past participle of vikkhobheti ‣See khobha
    Vikhādana
    neuter
    1. biting, chewing Dhs 646 740, 875 Dhs-a 330
    vi + khādana
    Vigacchati
    1. to depart, disappear; to decrease DN i.138 (bhogakkhandha vigacchissati); Sdhp 523. past participle vigata
    2. vi + gacchati
    Vigata
    (˚-)
    1. gone away, disappeared, ceased; having lost or foregone (for-gone = vi-gata), deprived of, being without; often to be translated simply as preposition “without. It nearly always occurs in compound, where it precedes the noun. By itself rare, e.g. Snp 483 (sārambhā yassa vigatā) Vv-a 33 (padumā mā vigatā hotu). Otherwise as follows: ˚āsa Pug 27
    • ˚āsava Snp-a 51
    • ˚icchā Dhp 359
    • ˚khila Snp 19
    • ˚cāpalla DN i.115 DN-a i.286
    • ˚chavivaṇṇa Thag-a 80 (= vivaṇṇa); ˚jīvita Pv-a 40
    • ˚paccaya Vism 541; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 7, 21, 59; ˚paṭighāta Dhp-a iv.176
    • ˚mada Mhvs 34, 94; ˚raja Snp 517 Ja i.117
    • ˚valita Pv-a 153 cp. vīta˚ in similar application and meaning
    past participle of vigacchati, in active (reflexive) & med passive function
    Vigama
    (—˚)
    1. going away, disappearance, departing, departure Dāvs v.68 (sabb’ āsava˚) Dhs-a 166 Sdhp 388 (jighacchā˚), 503 (sandeha˚)
    from vi + gam
    Vigayha
    1. ‣See vigāhati
    Vigarahati
    1. to scold (intensely), to abuse Vin ii.161 (dhammiṁ kathaṁ); iii.46 SN i.30 (ariyadhammaṁ) Mil 227
    vi + garahati
    Vigaḷati
    1. to drop Mil 250 past participle vigaḷita. cp. vinigaḷati
    2. vi + galati
    Vigaḷita
    1. dropping, dripping (down) Pv-a 56
    past participle of vigaḷati
    Vigāhati
    1. to plunge into, to enter SN i.180 (absolutive vigāhiya) Ja v.381 (˚gāhisuṁ, aorist ); Mhvs 19, 29 (here as ˚gāhetvā). The
    2. absolutive is also vigayha at Snp 2 Snp 825 cp. Nd1 163 (= ogayha pavisitvā). At Vin ii.106 we should prefer to read viggayha for vigayha
    3. vi + gāhati
    Viggaṇhati
    1. to take hold of, to quarrel, to be in disharmony with; only in
    2. absolutive viggayha disputing quarrelling, fighting Vin ii.106 (read gg for g Buddhaghosa on p. 315: rubbing against each other) Ud 69 Snp 844 Snp 878 Nd1 285 (= uggahetvā parāmasitvā). 2. to stretch out, disperse, divide, spread;
    3. absolutive viggayha Vv 501 (hattha-pāde v.; explained as “vividhehi ākārehi gahetvā” Vv-a 209)
    4. vi + gaṇhati
    Viggaha
    1. dispute, quarrel Ja i.208 (ñātakānaṁ aññamaññaṁ viggaho) Mil 90 often combined with kalaha, e.g. Vin ii.88 AN iv.401 Nd1 302 Mil 383
    2. taking up form (literally seizing on), “incorporation,” form, body DN ii.210 = 226 (sovaṇṇo viggaho mānusaṁ viggahaṁ atirocati) Vin i.97 (manussa˚); ii.286 (identical); iv.215 (tiracchānagata-manussa˚), 269 (identical) Ja v.398 = 405 (= sarīra C); vi.188 (rucira˚); Dāvs i.42 (uju-somma˚)
    3. (technical termg.) resolution of words into their elements, analysis, separation of words Mil 381 Vv-a 226 (pada˚) Snp-a 168 Thag-a 202 (pada˚).

      from vi + gah ‣See gaṇhati 3
    Viggahita
    1. taken hold of, seized; prejudiced against, seduced by (-), in phrase dhamm' uddhacca-viggahita-mānasa AN ii.157 Ps ii.101. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vigrāhita, e.g. Avs i.83 = 308 (Ajātaśatru Devadatta˚); Divy 419 Divy 557, 571; Jtm 143, 146
    past participle of viggaṇhati
    Viggāhika
    adjective
    1. of the nature of dispute or quarrel; only in compound ˚kathā quarrelsome speech, dispute DN i.8 SN v.419 Snp 930 DN-a i.91
    from viggaha
    Vighaṭṭita
    1. struck, knocked, beaten Ja v.203 (a˚)
    vi + ghaṭṭita
    Vighāṭana
    adjective
    1. unfastening, breaking up, overthrowing Thag 1, 419
    from vighāṭeti
    Vighāṭita
    1. overthrown, destroyed Sdhp 314
    past participle of vighāṭeti, denominative from vi + ghāṭa, cp. gantheti
    Vighāta
    1. destruction, killing, slaughter Pv-a 150 (vighātaṁ āpajjati = vihaññati)
    2. as adj slain, beaten Pv iv.53 (= vighātavā vihata-bala). 2. distress, annoyance, upset of mind, trouble, vexation DN iii.249 MN i.510 AN ii.197f.; iv.161 (˚pariḷāha) Snp 814 (= ugghāta pīḷana ghaṭṭana upaddava Nd1 140 = 170) Thag 2, 450 (bahu˚ full of annoyance)
    3. sa˚ connected with, or bringing vexation, with opposite free of annoyance: SN iii.8 SN v.97 AN i.202f.; iii.3, 429 Thag 2, 352 Thag-a 242
    4. opposition MN i.499
      1. ˚pakkhika having its part in adversity, associated with trouble MN i.115 SN v.97 Dhs-a 382
      • ˚bhūmi ground for vexation Snp 830 (cp. Nd1 170 with explanation as above)
      vi + ghata
    Vighātavant
    adjective
    1. full of annoyance or vexation SN iii.16f. AN ii.143 (= discontented); Thag 1 899 (in same connection, negative) Pv-a 260 (= distressed)
    vighāta + vant
    Vighāsa
    (& ˚ghasa)
    1. remains of food, broken meat, scraps Vin iv.265 266 Ja ii.288 Ja iii.113 191, 311 (read ˚ghasa for metre); v.268 (do.); Sdhp 389
    1. ˚āda one who eats the remains of food Vin i.200 (panca˚-satāni) Ja i.348 Ja ii.96 Ja iii.191 Dhp-a ii.128 Also name of an animal Ja vi.538
    from vi + ghasati
    Vicakka
    adjective
    1. without wheels Ja i.378 (sakaṭa). Doubtful in phrase asani˚; , where used as a noun, probably in different meaning altogether (= asani-pāta?) ‣See S ii.229 (= "falling of a thunderbolt” Kindred Sayings ii.155) DN iii.44 DN iii.47
    vi + cakka
    Vicakkhaṇa
    adjective neuter [vi + cakkhaṇa, of cakṣ to ‣See, attentive, watchful, sensible, skilful;
    • neuter application attention, wit SN i.214 = Sn 186 (appamatta + ; translationKindred Sayings i.277 “discerning wit”) Snp 583 Ja iv.58 Ja vi.286 Mil 216 Vism 43 Snp-a 238 Sdhp 200 Sdhp 293.

    Vicakkhu
    adjective

    eyeless, blind, in phrase ˚kamma making blind or perplexed SN i.111 SN i.118 (“darkening their intelligence” translation) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vicakṣu-karma MVastu iii.416; Lal v.490 vi + cakkhu

    Vicakkhuka
    adjective
    1. not ‣Seeing, blinded, dulled in sight, half-blind Mil 295 (Rhys Davids “squinting”)
    vicakkhu + ka
    Vicaya
    1. search, investigation, examination SN iii.96 (vicayaso, i.e. thoroughly) Pug 25 Mil 340 (dhamma˚); Nett 1, 2, 10 Dhs-a 147 Sdhp 466. For dhamma˚ ‣See sambojjhanga
    from vi + ci ‣See vicinati
    Vicaraṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. going about, circulating, moving, travelling Ja v.484 (˚bhaṇḍa travelling merchandise)
    from vicarati
    Vicarati
    1. to go or move about in (locative ), to walk (a road =
    2. accusative ), to wander Snp 444 (raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṁ vicarissaṁ, future ), 696 (dhamma-maggaṁ) Nd1 201 263 Pv iii.73 (
    3. aorist vicari) Dhp-a i.66 Pv-a 4 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 69 120, 185 (= āhiṇḍati); Sdhp 133

      • In Snp often with loke (in this world), e.g. Snp 466 Snp 501 Snp 845 Snp 846 Snp 864
      • causative vicāreti;
      • past participle vicarita, vicārita & viciṇṇa. cp. anu˚
      vi + carati
    Vicarita
    1. occupied by (—˚), haunted, frequented Vv-a 163
    past participle of vicarati
    Vicāra
    1. investigation, examination, consideration, deliberation
    • Defined as “vicaraṇaṁ vicāro, anusañcaraṇan ti vuttaṁ hoti” Vism 142 ‣See in definition under vitakka
    • Hardly ever by itself (as at Thag 1, 1117 mano˚), usually in close connection or direct combination with vitakka (q.v.)
    vi + cāra
    Vicāraka
    adjective
    1. looking after something; watching Ja i.364 (ghara˚)
    2. investigating; (n.) a judge Mhvs 35, 18
    from vicāreti
    Vicāraṇā
    feminine & ;
    • neuter

      1. investigation, search, attention Snp 1108 Snp 1109 (
      2. feminine &
      3. neuter Ja iii.73 (˚paññā)
      4. arranging, planning, looking after scheme Ja i.220 Ja ii.404 (yuddha˚); vi.333 sq
      from vicāreti
    Vicārita
    1. thought out, considered; thought DN i.37 (vitakkita + , like vitakka- vicāra, cp. DN-a i.122) 213 (identical) Snp-a 385
    past participle of vicāreti
    Vicāreti
    1. to make go round, to
    2. passive round, to distribute Pv-a 272 (salākaṁ)
    3. to think (over) SN v.156 (vitakketi +)
    4. to investigate examine, test Ja ii.413 Ja iii.258 Vv-a 336 (a˚ to omit examining).

      • to plan, consider, construct Ja ii.404 vi.333

    5. to go about (some business), to look after administer, provide Ja ii.287 Ja iii.378 Mhvs 35, 19 (rajjaṁ) Pv-a 93 (kammante).

      • past participle vicārita & viciṇṇa;
      causative of vicarati
    Vicāliya
    adjective
    1. in negative ; not to be shaken, not wavering Sdhp 444
    gerundive of vi + cāleti
    Vicikicchati
    1. literally “dis-reflect,” to be distracted in thought, i.e. to doubt, hesitate DN i.106 SN ii.17 SN ii.50 SN ii.54 SN iii.122 SN iii.135 Ja iv.272 (2 singular vicikicchase) Snp-a 451 DN-a i.275 - past participle vicikicchita
    2. vi + cikicchati
    Vicikicchā
    feminine
    1. doubt, perplexity, uncertainty (one of the nīvaraṇas) DN i.246 DN iii.49 DN iii.216 DN iii.234 269 SN i.99 SN iii.106f. (dhammesu v. doubt about the precepts); iv.350 AN iii.292 AN iii.438 AN iv.68 AN iv.144f.; v.144 Snp 343 Snp 437 Snp 540 Vv.81 (= soḷasa-vatthuka-vicikicchā Vv-a 317) Ja ii.266 Pug 59 Vb 168 341, 364 Dhs 425 Nett 11; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 108, 122, 152 sq., 171, 255, 275 Duka-Paṭṭhāna 170 sq., 265 sq., 289 sq.; Vism 471 (= vigatā cikicchā ti v. etc.), 599 sq. Vb-a 209 Vv-a 156 MA 116; Sdhp 459
    • As adjective (—˚) vicikiccha, e.g. tiṇṇa˚; one who has overcome all doubt DN i.71 DN i.110 MN i.18 AN ii.211 AN iii.92 297 sq.; iv.186; 210
    • ‣ See also Compendium 242; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation § 425 note 1; and cp. kathankathā, kicchati vecikicchin
    from vicikicchati
    Vicikicchita
    neuter
    1. doubt Pv iv.137
    past participle of vicikicchati
    Vicikicchin
    1. ‣See ve˚;
    Viciṇṇa
    1. thought out; in negative ; not thought out; reading however doubtful, better to be taken as adhiciṇṇa, i.e. procedure, method DN i.8 MN ii.3 = SN iii.12 (vi˚ as variant reading )
    • DN-a i.91 reads āciṇṇa (cp. MN i.372)
    past participle of vicāreti
    Vicita
    1. in phrase ˚kāḷaka bhatta rice from which the black grains have been separated DN i.105 MN ii.8 DN-a i.274 as vicita-bhatta in same sense at Ja iv.371
    past participle of vi + ci to gather
    Vicitta
    1. (& ˚citra) adjective

      1. various, variegated, coloured, ornamented, etc. Ja i.18 Ja i.83 Pv ii.19 Vv 6410 (citra) Mil 338 Mil 349 Vv-a 2 77; Sdhp 92 Sdhp 245-vicitra-kathika eloquent Mil 196
      vi + citta; 1
    Vicinati
    (˚cināti)
    1. to investigate, examine, discriminate SN i.34 (yoniso vicine dhammaṁ) AN iv.3 sq (identical) Snp 658 Snp 933 Ap 42 Ja vi.373 Nd1 398; Nett 10 22 (
    2. gerundive vicetabba), 25 sq. Mil 298 Dīpavaṁsa iv.2 Dhs-a 147 Pv-a 140 Sdhp 344
    3. absolutive viceyya discriminating; with discrimination DN ii.21 (doubled: with careful discrimn); iii.167 (˚pekkhitar) Snp 524f.; usually in phrase viceyya-dāna a gift given with discrimination SN i.21 AN iv.244 Ja iv.361 Ja v.395 Pv ii.972 Dhp-a iii.221 Mhvs 5, 35
    4. to look for, to ‣Seek, to linger to choose Pv iii.64 (
    5. aorist vicini = gavesi Commentary ); iv.142 (ger viceyya = vicinitvā Pv-a 240) Ja i.419
    6. ‣ See also pacinati
    vi + cināti
    Vicinana
    neuter
    1. discrimination Vism 162
    from vicinati
    Vicinteti
    1. to think, consider Snp 1023 Mhvs 4, 28 (vicintiya, absolutive ); 17, 38
    vi + cinteti
    Vicuṇṇa
    1. crushed up, only in reduplicated-iterative formation cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, piecemeal Ja i.26 Ja iii.438 etc ‣See under cuṇṇa
    vi + cuṇṇa
    Vicuṇṇita
    1. crushed up Ja i.203 (viddhasta +)
    past participle of vi + cuṇṇeti
    Viccuta
    1. fallen down Ja v.403 (explained as viyutta Commentary ); Dhp i.140
    vi + cuta
    Vicchaḍḍeti
    1. to throw out, to vomit; in late (Sanskrit ic) Pāli at Sdhp 121 (past participle vicchaḍḍita) and 136 (
    2. neuter vicchaḍḍana throwing out)
    3. vi + chaḍḍeti
    Vicchandanika
    1. (& ˚ya adjective

      1. fit to disinterest, “disengrossing,” in ˚kathā sermon to rid of the desire for the body Vin iii.271 (Sam. Pās. on Pār iii.3, 1); & ˚sutta the Suttanta having disillusionment for its subject (another name given by Buddhaghosa to the Vijayasutta Snp 193–⁠206) Snp-a 241f. (˚ya). cp. vicchindati
      vi + chanda + na + ika
    Vicchādanā
    feminine
    1. concealment Pug 19 23
    vi + chādanā
    Vicchika
    1. a scorpion DN i.9 (˚vijjā scorpion craft) Vin ii.110 AN ii.73 AN iii.101 AN iii.306 AN iv.320 AN v.289f. Ja ii.146 Mil 272 Mil 394 Vism 235 DN-a i.93
    cp. Vedic vṛścīka: Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 98
    Vicchita
    1. in phrase balavicchita-kārin at Mil 110 is to be read balav’ icchita-kārin “a man strong to do what he likes,” i.e. a man of influence
    Vicchidda
    adjective
    1. only in (reduplicated) combin. chidda˚; full of little holes, perforated all over Ja i.419
    vi + chidda
    Vicchiddaka
    1. “having holes all over,” referring to one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhānas, obtained by the contemplation of a corpse fissured from decay AN ii.17 (˚saññā); v.106, 310 Mil 332 Vism 110, 178 194
    vi + chidda + ka
    Vicchinda
    1. breaking off, cutting off Ja ii.436 Ja ii.438
    • kāya˚). Kern, Toevoegselen s. v considers it as a corruption of vicchanda ‣See vicchandanika
    from vi + chind as in vicchindati
    Vicchindati
    1. to cut off, to interrupt, to prevent Pv-a 129 (˚itu-kāma). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is vicchandayati = vi + denominative of chando
      1. e.g. Divy 10 Divy 11, 383, 590. past participle vicchinna
      2. vi + chindati
    Vicchinna
    1. cut off, destroyed Sdhp 34 Sdhp 117 Sdhp 370 Sdhp 585
    past participle of vicchindati
    Vicchurita
    1. besprinkled, sprinkled about Vv-a 4 280 (= ullitta)
    vi + churita
    Viccheda
    1. cutting off, destruction Ja iv.284 (santati˚). ; uninterruptedness Vv-a 16
    vi + cheda
    Vijaṭana
    neuter
    1. disentangling Mil 11
    from vijaṭeti
    Vijaṭita
    1. disentangled SN i.165
    past participle of vijaṭeti
    Vijaṭeti
    1. to disentangle, to comb out; figuratively to unravel, explain Vin ii.150 (bimbohanaṁ kātuṁ tūlāni v.) Mil 3 Vism 1, 2
    2. to plunder Ja iii.523
    3. past participle vijaṭita
    vi + causative of jaṭ; ‣See jaṭita
    Vijana
    adjective
    1. deserted of people, lonely SN i.180 Thag-a 252
    vi + jana
    Vijambhati
    1. to rouse oneself, to display activity, often applied to the awakening of a lion SN iii.84 AN ii.33 Ja i.12 Ja i.493 Ja v.215 (˚amāna, ppr., getting roused) 433, 487; vi.173; Vism 311
    vi + jambhati
    Vijambhanā
    feminine
    1. arousing, activity, energy Ja vi.457
    vi + jambhanā
    Vijambhikā
    feminine
    1. yawning (before rising) i.e. drowsiness, laziness, in ster. combination with arati tandī SN i.7 (translation “the lanquid frame”) AN i.3 Vb 352 Vism 33. As vijambhitā at SN v.64 Ja i.506 (here in meaning “activity, alertness,” but sarcastically as sīha˚) Vb-a 272 (= kāya-vināmanā)
    from vijambhati
    Vijaya
    1. victory; conquering, mastering; triumph over (—˚) DN i.46 AN iv.272 (idha-loka˚) Snp-a 241f. (˚sutta, another name for the Kāya-vicchandanika-sutta)
    from vi + ji
    Vijayati
    (& vijinati
    1. to conquer, master, triumph over DN-a i.250 (vijeti); future vijessati Ja iv.102
    2. absolutive vijeyya Snp 524 Snp 1002 and vijetvā Ja iii.523

      • pp vijita. cp. abhi˚
      vi + jayati
    Vijahati
    1. to abandon, forsake, leave; to give up, dismiss Pv iii.615 (sarīraṁ) Vv-a 119 Pot. vijaheyya Pv iv.110; future vijahissati SN ii.220 Pv ii.67 (jīvitaṁ).
    2. absolutive vihāya Mhvs 12, 55; & vijahitvā Vin iv.269 Ja i.117 Ja iii.361 (iddh’ ânubhāvena attabhāvaṁ-
    3. gerundive vihātabba AN iii.307f. Mil 371

      • passive vihīyati Ja vi.499 (eko v. = kilamissati Commentary ).
      • past participle vijahita & vihīna;
      vi + jahati
    Vijahana
    neuter
    1. abandoning, relinquishing DN-a i.197
    from vijahati
    Vijahita
    1. left, given up, relinquished; only in negative Ja i.71 Ja i.76 Ja i.94 Ja i.178
    past participle of vijahati
    Vijātā
    feminine
    1. (a woman) having borne Ja ii.140 Pv ii.23 (= pasūtā Pv-a 80)
    1. ˚kāla time of birth Ja ii.140
    • ˚ghara birth-chamber Mil 301
    past participle of vijāyati
    Vijāti
    1. in ˚loha a kind of copper Vb-a 63
    Vijāna
    neuter-adjective
    1. understanding; as adjective (—˚) in compounds. du˚; (dubbijāna) hard to understand SN i.60 Ja iv.217 and su˚; easy to perceive Snp 92 Ja iv.217
    from vijānāti
    Vijānana
    neuter
    1. recognition, knowing, knowledge, discrimination Vian 452 Dhs-a 141
    the diaeretic form of Sanskrit vijñāna: cp. jānana = ñāṇa
    Vijānāti
    1. to have discriminative (dis = vi˚) knowledge, to recognize, apprehend, ascertain, to become aware of, to understand, notice, perceive, distinguish learn, know Snp 93f. 763 Dhp 64 Dhp 65 Nd1 442 ‣See also viññāṇa 2a imperative 2nd singular vijāna Snp 1091 (= ājāna Nd2 565b); Pv iv.55 (= vijānāhi Pv-a 260) ppr. vijānanto Snp 656 Snp 953 Pv iv.188 Pv-a 41 and vijānaṁ negative ; ignorant Dhp 38 Dhp 60 Iti 103 Pot. 1st sg (poet.) vijaññaṁ Ja iii.360 (= vijāneyyaṁ Commentary ) Snp 1065 Snp 1090 Snp 1097(= jāneyyaṁ Nd2 565a); & vijāniyaṁ Vv 415 (paṭivijjhiṁ Commentary ); 3rd singular vijañña Snp 253 Snp 316 Snp 967 (cp Nd1 489).
    2. absolutive vijāniya Mhvs 8, 16; viññāya Snp 232 & viññitvā Vin iv.264
    3. aorist (3rd
    4. plural ) vijāniṁsu Mhvs 10, 18
    5. passive viññāyati Pv-a 197
    6. future viññissati Thag 1 703
    7. infinitive viññātuṁ SN iii.134
    8. gerundive viññātabba (to be understood) Vb-a 46 & viññeyya (q.v.)
    9. pp viññāta.
    10. causative II. viññāpeti (q.v.)
    11. vi + jñā
    Vijāyana
    neuter
    1. bringing forth, birth, delivery AN i.78 Ja iii.342 Ja vi.333 Vism 500 Vb-a 97
    from vijāyati
    Vijāyati
    1. to bring forth, to bear, to give birth to Sdhp 133; aorist vijāyi Vv-a 220 Pv-a 82 (puttaṁ)
    2. absolutive vijāyitvā Mhvs 5, 43 (puttaṁ); and vijāyitvāna Pv i.63
    3. past participle vijāta.
    4. causative II. vijāyāpeti to cause to bring forth Ja vi.340
    5. vi + jāyati
    Vijāyin
    adjective-noun
    1. in feminine ˚inī able to bear a child, fertile Ja iv.77 (opposite vañjhā) Dhp-a i.46 (identical)
    2. from vijāyati
    Vijigucchati
    1. to loathe Snp 41 (˚amāna = aṭṭiyamāna harāyamāna Nd2 566), 253, 958 (˚ato = aṭṭiyato harāyato Nd1 466), 963 Nd1 479
    vi + j.
    Vijita
    1. conquered, subdued, gained, won Snp 46 Snp-a 352 DN-a i.160 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 161. cp. nijjita
    2. neuter conquered land, realm, territory kingdom Ja i.262 Vv 8120 (= desa Vv-a 316) Dhp-a i.386
      1. ˚aṅga at Pv iii.117 (Pv-a 176) read vījit.˚-indriya one who has conquered his senses Snp 250
      • ˚saṅgāma by whom the battle has been won, victorious DN ii.39 Iti 76 Nd2 542 Pug 68
      past participle of vijayati
    Vijitāvin
    adjective
    1. victorious DN i.88 (caturanta +); ii.146 SN iii.83 Snp 552 Snp 646 DN-a i.249 Dhp-a iv.232 Snp-a 162
    vijita + āvin ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar 1983
    Vijina
    1. distress (?), in stock phrase at. AN v.156 AN v.158 AN v.160 AN v.162 (variant reading at all passive vicina)
    2. doubtful
    Vijīyati
    1. at Ja iii.374 is to be read as vījiyati (passive of vījati.

    Vijja
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having vijjā, possessed of wisdom; in vatthu˚, tiracchāna˚, nakkhatta˚ etc. (referring to the lower arts condemned as heretic: vijjā c.) SN iii.239
    • te˚ possessed of threefold wisdom ‣See vijjā b
    = vijjā
    Vijjaṭipatti
    feminine
    1. adultery Pv-a 151 Vijjati, vijjamana
    ? doubtful spelling
    Vijjati, vijjamāna
    1. etc. ‣See vindati
    Vijjantarikā
    feminine is not clear; according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. = vīthi + antarikā
    1. i.e. space in between two streets or midstreet MN i.448 AN i.124 Neumann (Mittl. Slg. ii.182) translates “Rinnstein” (i.e. gutter). Under antarikā we have given the translation “interval of lightning, thus taking it as vijju + antarikā. Quoted DN-a i.34
    a very bold assumption: vīthy contracted to vijj˚!
    Vijjā
    feminine
    1. one of the dogmatic terms of Buddhist teaching varying in meaning in different sections of the Canon. It is not always the positive to avijjā (which has quite a well-defined meaning from its first appearance in Buddhist psych. ethics), but has been taken into the terminology of Buddhism from Brahmanic and popular philosophy The opposite of avijjā is usually ñāṇa (but cp. SN iii.162 feminine 171; v.429). Although certain vijjās pertain to the recognition of the “truth” and the destruction of avijjā, yet they are only secondary factors in achieving “vimutti” (cp. abhiññā, ñāṇa-dassana & paññā) That; vijjā at MN i.22 is contrasted with avijjā is to be explained as a word-play in a stereotype phrase
    2. A diff side of “knowledge” again is given by “bodhi.” (a) Vijjā is a general, popular term for lore in the old sense, science, study, especially study as a practice of some art (something like the secret science of the medicine man: cp. vejja!); hence applied in special, “dogmatic sense as “secret science,” revelation (put into a sort of magic formula), higher knowledge (of the learned man), knowledge which may be applied and used as an art (cp. magister artium!), practical knowledge; but also mysterious knowledge: “charm."-(b) vijjā having a varying content in its connotation, is applied to a series of different achievements. A rather old tabulation of the stages leading by degrees to the attainment of the highest knowledge is given in the Sāmañña-phala-sutta (DN i.63–⁠86), repeated in nearly every Suttanta of DN 1 It is composed of the 3 sampadās, viz. sīla˚, citta˚ paññā˚. Under the first group belong sīla(-kkhandha) indriya-saṁvara, sati-sampajañña, santuṭṭhi; the second is composed (1) of the overcoming of the nīvaraṇas, (2) of the 4 jhānas; the third consists of 8 items, viz (1) ñāṇa-dassana, (2) manomaya-kāya, (3) iddhi (4) dibba-sota, (5) ceto-pariyañāṇa, (6) pubbe-nivās ânussatiñāṇa, (7) cut’ ûpapatti-ñāṇa, (8) āsavānaṁ khaya-ñāṇa. Other terms used are: for the 2nd sampadā: caraṇa (D. i.100), and for the 3rd: vijjā (ibid.). The discussion at DN i.100 is represented as contradicting the (brahmaṇic) opinion of Ambaṭṭha, who thought that “vijjā nāma tayo Vedā, caraṇaṁ pañca sīlāni” (DN-a i.267f.)
    3. In the enumeration of 3 vijjās at MN i.22f. only Nos. 6
    4. of the 3rd sampadā (said to have been attained by the Buddha in the 3 night watches) with the verbs anussarati (No. 6), pajānāti (7), abhijānāti (8), each signifying a higher stage of (“saving”) knowledge, yet all called “vijjā.” Quoted at Vism 202, where all 8 stages are given as “aṭṭha vijjā,” and caraṇa with 15 qualities (sīla-saṁvara, indriyesu guttadvāra etc.). The same 3 vijjās (No. 6, 7, 8) are given at DN iii.220 DN iii.275 and poetically at AN ii.165 as the characteristics of a proper (ariya, Buddhist) monk (or brāhmaṇa): “etāhi tīhi vijjāhi tevijjo hoti brāhmaṇo,” opposing the threeVeda -knowledge of the Brahmins
    5. Tevijja
    6. adjective in same meaning at SN i.146 (where it refers to Nos. 3, 5, 8 of above enumeration), 192, 194. In brahmanic sense at Snp 594 (= tiveda Snp-a 463). Both meanings compared contrasted at AN i.163 (aññathā brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ tevijjaṁ paññāpenti, aññathā ca pana ariyassa vinaye tevijjo hoti “different in the Brahmanic and different in the Buddhist sense”)
    7. Tisso vijjā (without specification but referring to above 6, 7, 8) further at Vin ii.183 Snp 656 Ps i.34; ii.56; Pv iv.134 Mil 359 (+ chaḷabhiññā) Dhp-a iv.30 (identical). It is doubtful whether the definition of ñāṇa as “tisso vijjā” at Vin iii.91 is genuine. On vijjā-caraṇa ‣See also D iii.97, 98, 237 SN i.153 SN i.166 SN ii.284; v.197 AN ii.163 AN iv.238 AN v.327 Snp 163 Snp 289 Snp 442-On vijjā in the doctrinal appln ‣See: D iii.156, 214 274 SN ii.7f. (cakkhu, ñāṇa, paññā, vijjā, āloka) iii.47; 163; 171; iv.31, 49 sq. AN i.83 AN ii.247 Snp 334 (simply meaning “wisdom,” craft, care, but Buddhaghosa Snp-a 339 takes it as “āsavānaṁ-khaya-ñāṇa”), 1026 (opposed to avijjā) Pug 14 57 Vb 324 Nett 76, 191
    8. (c) popular meanings & usage of; vijjā : science, craft, art, charm spell DN i.213 (Gandhārī nāma v., also mentioned at Ja iv.498 as practised by physicians), 214 (Maṇika n. v.) Ja iii.504 (Cintāmaṇi v.); iv.323 (vatthu˚ ‣See under vatthu), 498 (ghora˚); v.458 (anga˚ palmistry) Mil 200 Dhp i.259 (bhūmicala n. v. “earthquake charm), 265 (dhanu-agamanīyaṁ Ambaṭṭha n. v.); Kp-a 237 (vatthu˚, khetta˚, anga˚); and ‣See the list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9 (anga˚, vatthu˚, khetta˚; etc. cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.18, 19)
      1. ˚gata having attained wisdom Snp 730 (opposite avijjā the playful explanation at Snp-a 505 is “ye arahatta-maggavijjāya kilese vijjhitvā gatā khīṇāsava-sattā”)
      2. ˚caraṇa (-sampanna) (endowed with) special craft (wisdom) virtue ‣See above, b
      3. ˚ṭṭhāna branch of study; there are 18 vijja-ṭṭhānāni or “arts & sciences,” subjects of study referred to at Ja i.259
      • ˚dhara a knower of charms, a sorcerer Ja iii.303 Ja iii.529 Ja iv.496 v.94 Mil 153 Mil 200 Mil 267
      • ˚bhāgiyā (dhammā) (states) conducive to wisdom (6 kinds of saññā) AN iii.334 cp. DN iii.243 SN v.395 AN iv.52f. - mayā (iddhi) (potency) accomplished by art or knowledge (Expositor i.122) Vism 383 ‣See iddhi
      • ˚vimutti wisdom (higher knowledge) as salvation SN v.28 SN v.335 sq.; Ps ii.243 (in detail). Vijju & vijjuta
      cp. Vedic vidyā knowledge: etymology ‣See under vindati
    Vijju
    vijjutā
    feminine
    1. lightning
    • (a) vijju : SN i.100 (˚māli) AN i.124 (˚ūpamacitta) Ja v.322 (˚vaṇṇin) Pug 30 Mil 22 (˚jāla) Vv-a 12 Sdhp 244 Sdhp 598
    • (b) vijjutā : Thag 1 1167 Ja ii.217
    • On similes with v ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907 136
    • cp. next
    cp. Vedic vidyut; from vi + dyut ‣See juti
    Vijjullatā
    feminine
    1. a flash or streak of lightning, forked lightning SN i.106 Ja i.103 Ja i.279 Ja i.501
    vijju(t) + latā
    Vijjotati
    1. to shine (forth) Pv-a 56 causative ˚eti to illumine Pv-a 10
    2. past participle vijjotita
    3. vi + jotati
    Vijjotalati
    1. to flicker Vin ii.131 MN i.86
    frequently of vijjotati? Or = vijjotayati = vijjoteti?
    Vijjotita
    1. resplendent Pv-a 154
    past participle of vijjotati
    Vijjhati
    1. to pierce, perforate; to shoot with an arrow; to strike, hit, split; future ˚issati Ja iv.272 inf ˚ituṁ ibid.;
    2. absolutive ˚itvā Vin ii.150 Ja i.201 (boring through timber) Snp-a 505 (kilese) Pv-a 155 & viddhā Ja vi.77-
    3. passive vijjhati :
    4. absolutive ˚itvā having been hit Ja iii.323 ppr. vijjhamāna Pv-a 107
    5. gerundive viddheyya Ja vi.77

      • pp viddha.
      • causative vijjheti Ja i.45 (sūlehi vijjhayanto); and vedheti to cause to be pierced Ja vi.453 (
      • future vedhayissati)-
      • past participle vedhita
      vyadh
    Vijjhana
    neuter
    1. piercing or getting pierced DN-a i.75 ii.87 (kaṇṇa˚-mangala, ear-piercing ceremony) Pv-a 107
    from vijjhati
    Vijjhāpeti
    1. to extinguish Vin i.31 Vin ii.219 221 Ja iv.292 Mil 42
    vi + jhāpeti
    Vijjhāyati
    1. to be extinguished, to go out (of fire) Vin i.31 (imperative ˚āyatu &
    2. future ˚āyissati) Dhp-a i.21 (akkhīni dīpa-sikhā viya vijjhāyiṁsu)
    3. vi + jhāyati2
    Viññatti
    feminine
    1. intimation, giving to understand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting (a practice forbidden to the bhikkhu) Vin i.72 (˚bahula, intent on …); iii.144 sq. (identical); iv.290 Ja iii.72 (v. nāma na vaṭṭati, is improper) Vb 13 Vism 41 (threefold: nimitta˚, obhāsa˚, parikathā; as technical term, cp. Compendium 1201: medium of communication) Mil 343 Mil 370 Dhp-a ii.21 (viññattiṁ katvā bhuñjituṁ na vaṭṭati) Pv-a 146
    • Two kinds of viññatti are generally distinguished, viz. kāya˚; and vacī˚; , or intimation by body (gesture) and by voice: Dhs 665 718 Mil 229f.; Vism 448, 530, 531. cp. Compendium 22, 264
    from viññāpeti
    Viññāṇa
    neuter
    1. (as special term in Buddhist metaphysics) a mental quality as a constituent of individuality, the bearer of (individual) life, life-force (as extending also over rebirths), principle of conscious life, general consciousness (as function of mind and matter), regenerative force animation, mind as transmigrant, as transforming (according to individual kamma) one individual life (after death) into the next. (‣ See also below, c & d). In this (fundamental) application it may be characterized as the sensory and perceptive activity commonly expressed by “mind.” It is difficult to give any one word for v., because there is much difference between the old Buddhist and our modern points of view, and there is a varying use of the term in the Canon itself. In what may be a very old Sutta SN ii.95 v. is given as a synonym of citta (q.v.) and mano (q.v.), in opposition to kāya used to mean body. This simpler unecclesiastical unscholastic popular meaning is met with in other suttas. English g. the body (kāya) is when animated called sa-viññāṇaka (q.v. and cp. viññāṇatta). Again v. was supposed, at the body’s death, to passive over into another body (SN i.122 SN iii.124) and so find a support or platform (patiṭṭhā). It was also held to be an immutable persistent substance, a view strongly condemned (M i.258). Since, however, the persistence of v. from life to life is declared (DN ii.68 SN iii.54), we must judge that it is only the immutable persistence that is condemned. V. was justly conceived more as “minding” than as “mind.” Its form is participial. For later variants of the foregoing cp. Mil 86 Pv-a 63 Pv-a 219.

      1. Ecclesiastical scholastic dogmatic considers v. under the categories of (a) khandha; (b) dhātu; (c) paṭiccasamuppāda; (d) āhāra; (e) kāya. (a) V. as fifth of the five khandhas (q.v.) is never properly described or defined. It is an ultimate. But as a factor of animate existence it is said to be the discriminating (vijānāti) of e.g. tastes or sapid things (SN iii.87), or, again, of pleasant or painful feeling (M i.292). It is in no wise considered as a condition, or a climax of the other incorporeal khandhās. It is just one phase among others of mental life. In mediaeval dogmatic it appears rather as the bare phenomenon of aroused attention, the other khandhās having been reduced to adjuncts or concomitants brought to passive by the arousing of v. (Compendium 13), and as such classed under cetasikā, the older sankhārakkhandha-(b) as dhātu, v. occurs only in the category of the four elements with space as a sixth element, and also where dhātu is substituted for khandha (SN iii.10)

        • (c) In the chain of causation Paṭicca-samuppāda v. is conditioned by the saṅkhāras and is itself a necessary condition of nāma-rūpa (individuality) ‣See e. g SN ii.4 SN ii.6 SN ii.8 SN ii.12 etc. Vin i.1 Vism 545 sq. = Vb-a 150 Vism 558 sq. Vb-a 169f.; 192
        • At SN ii.4 = iii.61 viññāṇa (in the Paṭicca-samuppāda) is defined in a similar way to the definition under v
        • ṭṭhiti ‣See c, viz. as a quality peculiar to (& underlying) each of the 6 senses: “katamaṁ viññāṇaṁ? cha-y-ime viññāṇa-kāyā (groups of v.), viz. cakkhu˚ sota˚ etc.,” which means that viññāṇa is the apperceptional or energizing principle so to speak the soul or life (substratum, animator, lifepotency) of the sensory side of individuality. It arises through the mutual relation of sense and sense-object (MN iii.281 where also the 6 v
        • kāyā). As such it forms a factor of rebirth, as it is grouped under upadhi (q.v.) Translations of SN ii.4: Mrs. Rhys Davids (Kindred Sayings ii.4) “consciousness”; Geiger (in Z.
        • feminine B. iv.62) “Erkennen.” (d) As one of the four āhāras (q.v.) v. is considered as the material, food or cause, through which comes rebirth (SN ii.13 cp. B.Psy. p. 62). As such it is likened to ‣Seed in the field of action (kamma) AN i.223 and as entering (a body) at rebirth the phrase viññāṇassa avakkanti is used (DN ii.63 SN ii.91). In this connection the expression paṭisandhi-viññāṇa first appears in Ps i.52, and then in the Commentaries (Vb-a 192 cp. Vism 548 659 paṭisandhicitta); in Vism 554 = Vb-a 163 the v. here said to be located in the heart, is made out, at bodily death, “to quit its former ʻ support ʼ and proceed (pavattati) to another by way of its mental object and other conditions.” Another scholastic expression both early and late, is abhisaṅkhāra-v., or “endowment consciousness,” viz. the individual transmigrant or transmitted function (viññāṇa) which supplies the next life with the accumulation of individual merit or demerit or indifference, as it is expressed at Nd2 569a in definition of v. (on Snp 1055: yaṁ kiñci sampajānāsi … panujja viññāṇaṁ bhave na tiṭṭhe): puññ’ âbhisankhāra-sahagata-viññāṇaṁ, apuññ’ …, ānejj’ …-Under the same heading at Nd2 569b we find abhisankhāra v with reference to the sotāpatti-stage, i.e. the beginning of salvation, where it is said that by the gradual disappearance of abhis
        • v. there are still 7 existences left before nāma-rūpa (individuality) entirely disappears The climax of this development is “anupādi-sesa nibbāna-dhatu,” or the nibbāna stage without a remainder (parinibbāna), which is characterized not by an abhisankhāra-v., but by the carimaka-v., or the final vital spark, which is now going to be extinct This passage is referred to at Dhs-a 357 where the first half is quoted literally
        • (e) As kāya i.e. group, v. is considered psycho-physically, as a factor in senseperception (DN iii.243 MN iii.281 etc.), namely, the contact between sense-organ and object (medium, was not taken into account) produces v. of sight, hearing etc. The three factors constitute the v
        • kāya of the given sense. And the v. is thus bound to bodily process as a catseye is threaded on a string (DN ii.76). cp. above c

        Other applications of the term v., both Canonical and mediaeval: on details as to attributes and functions ‣See Vin i.13 (as one of the khandhas in its quality of anattā cp. SN iv.166f.) DN iii.223 (as khandha) SN ii.101 sq (˚assa avakkanti); iii.53 sq. (˚assa gati, āgati, cuti etc.) AN i.223f.; iii.40 Snp 734 (yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti, sabbaṁ viññāṇa-paccayā), 1037 (nāma-rūpa destroyed in consequence of v. destruction), 1073 (cavetha v. so read for bhavetha

        1. ; v. at this passage explained as “punappaṭisandhi-v.” at Nd2 569c); 1110 (uparujjhati); Ps i.53 sq., 153 sq.; ii.102 Vb 9f. 53 sq., 86; Nett 15 (nāma-rūpa v
        • sampayutta), 16 (v
        • hetuka n.-r.), 17 (nirodha), 28, 79, 116 (as khandha) Vism 529 (as simple, twofold, fourfold etc.), 545 = Vb-a 150f. (in detail as product of sankhāras & in 32 groups) Vb-a 172 (twofold: vipāka & avipāka) Dhp-a iv.100
        1. ˚ānañc'āyatana infinitude (-sphere) of life-force or mind-matter DN i.35 DN i.184 DN i.223 DN iii.224 DN iii.262 DN iii.265 Nett 26 39. It is the second of the Āruppa-jhānas ‣See jhāna-āhāra consciousness (i.e. vital principle) sustenance ‣See above d and cp. Dhs 70 126; Nett 114 sq.; Vism 341 -kāya ‣See above e. -khandha life-force as one of the aggregates of physical life DN iii.233 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61 Dhs-a 141 Vb-a 21 42
        2. ˚ṭṭhiti viññāṇa-duration, phase of mental life. The emphasis is on duration or continuation rather than place, which would be ṭṭhāna. There are () 4 v
        • durations with regard to their “storing (abhisankhāra) quality, viz. combinations of v. (as the governing, mind-principle) with each of the 4 other khandhas or aggregates of material life (rūpa vedanā, saññā, sankhārā), v. animating or bringing them to consciousness in any kind of life-appearance and () 7 v
        • durations with regard to their “regenerating” (new-life combination or rebirth = paṭisandhi) quality viz. the 4 planes of various beings (from men to devas) followed by the 3 super-dimensional stages (the ānañc’ āyatanas) of ākāsa-infinitude, viññāṇa-infin. ākiñ-cañña-infin
        • Passages in the Canon: (;) as 4: DN 1 i.262 sq. SN iii.53f. (“standing for consciousness” & “platform,” ˚patiṭṭhā SN iii.54 Kindred Sayings iii.45) () the 7: DN ii.68f.; iii.253 (translation “station of consciousness”), 282; = AN iv.39 Both the 4 and the 7 at Nd2 570. cp. under a slightly different view SN ii.65 (yaṁ ceteti … ārammaṇaṁ … hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā)-‣ See also Ps i.22, 122 Snp 1114 Nett 31, 83 sq. Vism 552 Vb-a 169
        • ˚dhātu mind-element, which is the 6th dhātu after the 4 great elements (the mahābhūtāni) and ākāsa-dhātu as fifth (this explained as “asamphuṭṭha-dhātu” at Vb-a 55 whereas v
        • dhātu as “vijānana-dhātu”) DN iii.247 Vb 85 87 Vb-a 55 cp. AN i.176 MN iii.31 MN iii.62 MN iii.240 SN ii.248
        • ˚vīthi the road of mind (figuratively), a mediaeval technical term for process in sense perception Kp-a 102
        from vi + jñā; cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition
    Viññāṇaka
    adjective
    1. having life or consciousness or sense, endowed with vitality. Found in the four Nikāyas only in one standard passage in the same connection, viz. sa-viññāṇaka kāya “the body with its viññāṇa” (i.e. life-force or mind): SN ii.253 SN iii.80 SN iii.169 SN v.311 AN i.132 AN iv.53 Thus (sa˚) should be read at all passages
    • Later in contrast pair sa˚; and ; , i.e. with life & without, alive & lifeless, animate & inanimate, e. g Ja i.466 Ja i.468 Dhp-a i.6 Pv-a 130
    viññāṇa + ka
    Viññāṇatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of being endowed with viññāṇa SN iii.87 Pv-a 63
    abstract formation from viññāṇa
    Viññāta
    1. apperceived, (re)cognized, understood, cogitated (Compendium 37), learned Snp 323 (˚dhamma, one who has recognized or understood the Dhamma) Vv 4418 (= viññāta-sāsana-dhamma Vv-a 192) Ja i.2 Sdhp 429
    • Often in sequence diṭṭha suta muta viññāta to denote the whole range of the cognitional & apperceptional faculties ‣See; muta, e.g. DN iii.232 Snp 1086 Snp 1122
    past participle of vijānāti
    Viññātar
    1. a perceiver, one who apperceives or takes to heart, a learner DN i.56 AN iii.169 iv.196 (sotar, uggahetar, v.)
    agent noun of viññāta
    Viññāpaka
    adjective
    1. clever in instruction, able to instruct SN v.162 = Mil 373 Iti 107
    fn. viññāpeti
    Viññāpana
    adjective
    1. instructing, informing AN ii.51 AN ii.97 feminine viññāpanī instructive, making clear (of speech) DN i.114 (atthassa viññāpaniyā = viññāpanasamatthāya DN-a i.282) AN iii.114 Dhp 408 (= attha Dhp-a iv.182) Snp 632
    2. from viññāpeti
    Viññāpaya
    adjective
    1. accessible to instruction; only in compounds du˚ & su˚; indocile docile SN i.138 DN ii.38 Nd2 2353; Ps i.121; ii.195 Vb 341
    gerundive of viññāpeti, = *viññāpya
    Viññāpita
    1. instructed, informed; su˚; well taught Mil 101
    past participle of viññāpeti
    Viññāpetar
    1. an instructor, teacher DN i.56 AN iv.196
    agent noun of viññāpita
    Viññāpeti
    1. to address, inform, teach, instruct; to give to understand; to appeal to, to beg Vin i.54 Vin iv.264 DN i.251 Ja iii.72 (to intimate) Mil 229 Vv-a 72 181. past participle viññāpita. Vinnaya & vinnayati; causative II. of vijānāti
    Viññāya
    viññāyati;
    1. ‣See vijānāti. Vinnuta & vinnuta
    Viññutā
    viññūtā
    feminine
    1. discretion; in phrase viññutaṁ pāpuṇāti to reach the years of discretion or puberty Vin i.269 Vin ii.278 Ja i.231 Ja iii.437: Pv-a 3
    from viññu
    Viññupasaṭṭha
    1. unattacked, not deficient, unmolested, undisturbed: is Kern’s (Toevoegselen s.v.) proposed reading for viññū-pasattha (“extolled by the wise”) at SN ii.70 (reads ṭṭh); v.343 DN ii.80 DN iii.245: all identical passages. We consider Kern’s change unnecessary: anupasaṭṭha would have been the most natural expression if it had been meant in the sense suggested by Kern
    vi + ni + upassaṭṭha, past participle of sṛj (?)
    Viññū
    adjective
    1. intelligent, learned, wise DN i.163 SN i.9 SN iii.134 SN iv.41f. 93, 339 AN ii.228 v.15 Iti 98 Snp 39 Snp 294 Snp 313 Snp 396 Snp 403 Ps ii.19, 21 Mil 21 DN-a i.18 Vv-a 87 Pv-a 130 Pv-a 226; Sdhp 45. Dhp-a iii.395
    cp. Sanskrit vijña
    Viññeyya
    adjective
    1. to be recognized or apperceived (of the sense objects: cakkhu-viññeyya rūpa, etc.) DN i.245 MN iii.291 AN iii.377 AN iv.404f. 415 430 Nd1 24
    • su˚ easily understood Vv-a 258
    gerundive of vijānāti
    Viṭapa
    1. the fork of a tree, a branch Ja i.169 Ja i.215 Ja i.222 Ja iii.28 vi.177 (nigrodha˚)
    cp. Epic Sanskrit viṭapa
    Viṭapin
    1. a tree, literally “having branches” Ja vi.178
    viṭapa + in
    Viṭabhī
    feminine
    1. the fork of a tree MN i.306 Ja ii.107 Ja iii.203
    = Sanskrit viṭapin
    Vitakka
    1. reflection, thought, thinking; “initial application” (Compendium 282)
    • Defined as “vitakkanaṁ vitakko, ūhanan ti vuttaṁ hoti” at Vism 142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicāra kumbhakārassa daṇḍa-ppahārena cakkaṁ bhamayitvā bhājanaṁ karontassa uppīḷana-hattho viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c’ ito sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness,; vicāra that of movement display)
    • D; ii.277 (“pre-occupation” translation ‣See note Dialogues of the Buddha ii.311); iii.104, 222, 287 (eight Mahāpurisa˚) MN i.114 (dvidhā-kato v.), 377 SN i.39 SN i.126 SN i.186 SN i.203 SN ii.153; iv.69, 216 AN ii.36 AN iii.87 (dhamma˚); iv.229 (Mahāpurisa˚), 353 (˚upaccheda) Snp 7 Snp 270f. 970 1109 Ja i.407 (Buddha˚, Sangha˚, Nibbāna˚) Nd1 386 493, 501 (nine); Nd2 s.v. takka; Ps i.36, 136, 178 Pv iii.58 Pug 59 68 Vb 86 104 (rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc.) 228 (sa˚), 362 (akusala˚) Dhs 7 160, 1268; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61 333, 353; Vism 291 (˚upaccheda) Mil 82 Mil 309 Dhs-a 142 Dhp-a iv.68 Vb-a 490 Pv-a 226 Pv-a 230
    • kāma˚ vihiṁsā˚, vyāpāda˚ (sensual, malign, cruel thought) DN iii.226 SN ii.151f.; iii.93 AN i.148 AN i.274f.; ii.16, 117 252; iii.390, 428. O
    • past participle nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚ avihiṁsā˚ AN i.275 AN ii.76 AN iii.429
    • vitakka is often combined with vicāra or “initial & sustained application Mrs. Rhys Davids; Compendium 282; “reflection & investigation Rhys Davids; to denote the whole of the mental process of thinking (viz. fixing one’s attention and reasoning out or as Compendium 17 explains it “vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicāra is the continued exercise of the mind on that object.” ‣See also above definition at Vism 142). Both are properties of the first jhāna (called sa-vitakka sa-vicāra) but are discarded in the second jhāna (called a˚) ‣See e. g D. i.37 SN iv.360f. AN iv.300 Vin iii.4 Vism 85 and formula of jhāna. The same of pīti & samādhi at Vb 228 of; paññā at Vb 323 The same combination (vitakka + vicāra) at following passages: DN iii.219 (of samādhi which is either sa˚, or a˚, or avitakka vicāra-matta) SN iv.193 SN v.111 AN iv.409f. 450; Nett 16 Mil 60 Mil 62 Vism 453. cp. rūpa- (sadda-etc.) vitakka + rūpa (sadda-etc.) vicāra AN iv.147 AN v.360 Vb 103
    • On term (also with vicāra ‣See further: Compendium 40, 56, 98 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikāra) Expositor i.188n; Kvu translation 2381
    • cp. pa˚, pari˚
    1. Note. Looking at the combination vitakka + vicāra in earlier and later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking, only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as; one expression, like jānāti passati, without being able to state their difference. With the advance in the Sangha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied, as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The explains of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds
    vi + takka
    Vitakkana
    neuter = vitakka Vism 142.
    Vitakkita
    1. reflected, reasoned, argued DN-a i.121 cp. pari˚;
    past participle of vitakketi
    Vitakketi
    1. to reflect, reason, consider SN i.197 SN i.202 SN iv.169 SN v.156 AN ii.36 Mil 311
    • pp vitakkita
    denominative from vitakka
    Vitacchika
    1. at SN ii.99 = iv.188 read vītaccika (q.v.)
    Vitacchikā
    feminine
    1. scabies Nd2 3041 (as roga)
    cp. * Sanskrit (medical) vicarcikā
    Vitacchita
    1. planed, smoothed; su˚; well carded (of a cīvara) Vin iii.259
    past participle of vitaccheti
    Vitaccheti
    1. tear, pluck, pick to pieces; in simile MN i.364 (+ virājeti) = SN ii.255 (reads vibhajeti for virājeti) = Vin iii.105 (identical)
    2. to smoothe ‣See pp vitacchita
    vi + taccheti
    Vitaṇḍā
    feminine
    1. tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion; in compounds. vitaṇḍa˚: ˚vāda sophistry Snp-a 447 DN-a i.247
    • ˚vādin a sophist, arguer Dhs-a 3 (so read for vidaḍḍha) Vb-a 9 51, 319, 459 ‣See lokāyata
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vitaṇḍā, e.g. Mbh 2, 1310; 7, 3022
    Vitata
    1. stretched, extended, diffused SN i.207 Snp 272 Snp 669 (variant reading vitthata) Ja i.356 (tanta where the strings were stretched) Mil 102 Mil 307 Mhvs 17, 31 (vallīhi v.)-nt. vitata a drum (with leather on both sides) Vv-a 37
    past participle of vitanoti
    Vitatha
    adjective
    1. untrue; neuter untruth DN ii.73 (na hi Tathāgatā vitathaṁ bhaṇanti) Snp 9f. Vv 5315 (= atatha, musā ti attho Vv-a 240) Ja v.112 Ja vi.207 Ps 104 DN-a i.62

      • avitatha true SN ii.26 SN v.430 Mil 184 Sdhp 530 DN-a i.65
      vi + tatha; cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vitatha
    Vitanoti
    (*vitanati)
    1. to stretch out, spread out; poet. absolutive vitanitvāna Ja vi.453

      • passive vitaniyyati ibid.
      • past participle vitata. cp. vitāna
      vi + tanoti
    Vitaraṇa
    neuter
    1. overcoming, getting through MN i.147 (kankhā˚) Mil 233 (identical), 351; Sdhp 569
    from vitarati
    Vitarati
    1. to go through, come through, overcome Snp 495 Snp 779 (
    2. absolutive ˚eyya, taken as Pot. at Nd1 57 oghaṁ samatikkameyya), 941, 1052; Pv iii.24 (vitaritvā = vitiṇṇo hutvā Pv-a 181 q.v. for detail)
    3. to perform Ja ii.14 (bubhukkhito no vitarāsi bhottuṁ; variant reading visahāmi).
    4. past participle vitiṇṇa
    vi + tarati
    Vitāna
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. spread-out, canopy, awning Vin iv.279 Ja i.40 Ja i.62 Ja i.83 Dhp-a ii.42 Snp-a 447 Vv-a 32 173 Pv-a 154 ‣See also cela˚;
      from vi + ; tan
    Vitiṇṇa
    1. overcome or having overcome, gone through, conquered Dhp 141 (˚kankha) Snp 514 (identical) 746 Pv-a 181
    2. given up, rejected, abandoned Dhp 176 (˚paraloka) Ja iv.447 (= pariccatta Commentary )
    past participle of vitarati
    Vitudati
    1. to strike, prick, nudge, knock, push, attack DN i.105 SN iv.225 AN iii.366 Snp 675 Ud 67 Ja ii.163 Ja ii.185 passive vitujjati Vism 505 Vb-a 104 108.
    2. past participle vitunna
    3. vi + tudati
    Vitunna
    1. struck, pricked, pushed Ja iii.380
    past participle of vitudati
    Vitureyyati
    1. at Ja v.47 is not clear. The variant reading is vitariyati; the Commentary explains by tuleti tīreti, i.e. contemplates, examines Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. discusses it in detail & proposes writing; vituriyata (3rd singular praet. medium), & explains at “get over

      1. Dutoit translates “überstieg.”
      cp. Vedic tūryati overcome, from tur or tvar = Pali tarati2
    Vitta1
    1. property, wealth, possessions, luxuries SN i.42 Snp 181f. 302 Ja v.350 Ja v.445 Ja vi.308 Pv ii.81 (= vittiyā upakaraṇa-bhūtaṁ vittaṁ Pv-a 106)
    • Often in phrase ˚ūpakaraṇa possessions & means, i.e. wealth; e.g. DN i.134 SN i.71 SN iv.324 Pug 52 Dhp i.295 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 71. Vittaṁ is probably the right reading SN i.126 (15) for cittaṁ. Cp. p. 123 (3); Kindred Sayings i.153, note 3
    originally past participle of vindati = Avestan vista, Latin vīsus; literally one who has found, acquired or recognized but already in Vedic meaning (as
  • neuter “acquired possessions”
  • Vitta2
    adjective
    1. gladdened, joyful, happy Ja iii.413 (= tuṭṭha); iv.103 Vv 414 (= tuṭṭha Commentary ); 4414 (identical), 495 (identical)
    identical with vitta1
    Vitta3
    1. ‣See vi˚;
    past participle of vic to sift, cp. Sanskrit vikta
    Vittaka
    adjective
    1. possessing riches, becoming rich by (—˚) Ja i.339 (lañca˚); iv.267 (miga˚), vi.256 (jūta˚)
    from vitta1
    Vittakatā
    feminine
    1. in suta˚; “the fact of getting rich through learning” as an explanation of the name Sutasoma Ja v.457 (for auspiciousness). Dutoit translates quite differently: “weil er am Keltern des Somatrankes seine Freude hatte,” hardly correct
    vittaka + tā
    Vitti
    feminine
    1. prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity AN iii.78 Ja iv.103 Ja vi.117 Kvu 484 Thag 1, 609 Dhs 9 (cp. Dhs-a 143) Pv-a 106
    cp. Sanskrit vitti, from vid
    Vittha
    neuter
    1. a bowl, in surā˚; for drinking spirits Ja v.427 Dhp-a iii.66
    vi + sthā ?
    Vitthaka
    neuter
    1. a small bowl, as receptacle (āvesana˚) for needles, scissors & thimbles Vin ii.117
    from vittha
    Vitthata1
    1. extended, spread out, wide M. i.178 Vin i.297 Ja v.319 Mil 311 Snp-a 214 Pv-a 68 (doubtful!)
    2. wide, spacious (of a robe Vin iii.259
    3. flat Snp-a 301

      past participle of vi + stṛ
    Vitthata2
    1. perplexed, confused, hesitating Mil 36 (bhīta +). Ed Müller, Pali Grammar 102 considers it as past participle of vi + tras to tremble together with vitthāyati & vitthāyi
    2. past participle of vitthāyati (?). A difficult form!
    Vitthambhana
    neuter
    1. making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism 351 (cp. Dhs-a 335)
    from vi + thambhati
    Vitthambheti
    1. to make firm, strengthen Dhs-a 335
    vi + thambheti
    Vitthāyati
    1. to be embarrassed or confused (literally to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate Vin i.94 = ii.272; aorist vitthāsi (vitthāyi? ibid. the latter taken as
    2. aorist of tras by Geiger, Pali Grammar § 166
      1. . past participle vitthata2 & vitthāyita;
      2. vi + styā ‣See under thīna
    Vitthāyitatta
    neuter
    1. perplexity, hesitation DN i.249
    abstract from vitthāyita, past participle of vitthāyati
    Vitthāra
    1. expansion, breadth; instrumental vitthārena in breadth Mil 17 same ablative vitthārato Ja i.49–⁠2. extension, detail; often in Commentary style, introducing detailed explanation of the subject in question, either with simple statement “vitthāro” (i.e. here the following detail; opposite saṅkhepa, e.g. DN-a i.65 229 Snp-a 325 cp. same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit “vistaraḥ,” e.g. Divy 428
      1. or with compounds. ˚kathā Snp-a 464 Pv-a 19
      • ˚desanā Snp-a 163
      • ˚vacana Snp-a 416 Thus in general often in instrumental or ablative as
      • adverb “in detail,” in extenso (opposite sankhittena in short): vitthārena DN iii.241 SN iv.93 AN ii.77 AN ii.177 189; iii.177 Pug 41 Pv-a 53 Pv-a 113; vitthārato Vism 351, 479 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 81. cp. similarly Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vistarena kāryaṁ Divy 377
      fr, vi + stṛ
    Vitthāratā
    feminine
    1. explicitness, detail Nett 2. As vitthāraṇā at Nett 9
    from vitthāra
    Vitthārika
    adjective
    1. wide-spread Mil 272
    2. widely famed, renowned Snp 693 Ja iv.262 ‣See also bahujañña
    vitthāra + ika
    Vitthārita
    1. detailed, told in full Vism 351; Mhvs 1, 2 (ati˚ with too much detail; opposite sankhitta)
    past participle of vitthāreti
    Vitthāriyati
    1. to expand, to go into detail Nett 9
    denominative from vitthāra
    Vitthāreti
    1. to spread out AN iii.187
    2. to expand, detail give in full Vism 351 Snp-a 94 117, 127 274 and passim
    3. past participle vitthārita;
    4. feminine past participle vithāretabba
    from vitthāra
    Vitthiṇṇa
    1. “spread out,” wide, large, extensive, roomy Ja ii.159 (so read for vittiṇṇa) Mil 102 Mil 283 311, 382 Dhs-a 307 Snp-a 76 Vv-a 88 Sdhp 391 Sdhp 617 cp. pari˚
    vi + thiṇṇa
    Vidaṁsaka
    (ad.)
    1. showing; danta˚; showing one’s teeth (referring to laughter) AN i.261 Ja iii.222
    from vidaṁseti
    Vidanseti
    1. to make appear, to show AN i.261 Thag 2, 74 Ja v.196 Mil 39 cp. pa˚
    vi + daṁseti = dasseti
    Vidaḍḍha
    1. in reduplicated-iterative compound daḍḍhavidaḍḍha-gatta “with limbs all on fire” Mil 303
    vi + daḍḍha
    *Vidati
    1. ‣See vindati
    Vidatthi
    feminine
    1. a span (of 12 angulas or finger-breadths) Vin iii.149 (dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugata-vidatthiyā); iv.279 Ja i.337 Ja iii.318 Mil 85 Vism 65, 124, 171, 175, 408 Dhp-a iii.172 Dhp-a iv.220 Vb-a 343 (dvādas’ angulāni vidatthi; dve vidatthiyo ratanaṁ, etc.)
    cp. Vedic vitasti ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar 383
    Vidahati
    1. to arrange, appoint, assign; to provide; to practise
    • Pres. vidahati ‣See saṁ˚ vidadhāti Ja vi.537
    • vidheti Ja v.107 Pot. vidahe Snp 927 (= vidaheyya Nd1 382);
    • aorist vidahi Ja v.347 Perfect 3rd
    • plural vidadhu Sanskrit vidadhuḥ
    1. Ja vi.284 infinitive vidhātuṁ Vin i.303 (bhesajjaṁ); absolutive vidhāya Mhvs 26, 12 (ārakkhaṁ, posting a guard)

      • grd vidheyya in meaning “obedient,” tractable Ja vi.291-
      • past participle vihita
      vi + dahati; dhā
    Vidāraṇa
    neuter
    1. splitting, rending Dhtp 247 (in explanation of dar, 381 (do of bhid
    from vidāreti
    Vidārita
    1. split, rent Sdhp 381
    past participle of vidāreti
    Vidāreti
    1. to split, rend Ja i.340 past participle vidārita
    2. vi + dāreti ‣See under darī
    Vidālana
    neuter
    1. breaking open, bursting, splitting Mil 1
    from vidāleti
    Vidālita
    1. split, broken, burst Ja i.493 Pv-a 220
    past participle of vidāleti
    Vidāleti
    1. to break open, split, burst Thag 1, 184 Pv-a 135 Pv-a 185. past participle vidālita
    2. vi + dāleti ‣See dalati
    Vidita
    1. known, found (out) DN iii.100 SN v.180 Snp 436 Snp 1052 Mhvs 17, 4 DN-a i.135 (a˚)
    past participle of vindati
    Viditatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having found or known, experience Ja ii.53
    abstract from vidita
    Vidisā
    feminine
    1. an intermediate point of the com passive SN i.224 SN iii.239 Snp 1122 Ja i.20 Ja i.101 Ja vi.6 Ja vi.531
    2. vi + disā
    Vidugga
    adjective-noun
    1. hard to walk; troublesome, difficult, painful. masculine difficult passage; difficulty distress DN iii.27 AN iii.128 Ja iii.269 Ja iv.271
    2. vi + dugga
    Vidura
    adjective
    1. wise, clever Ja v.399 (= paṇḍita Commentary ). cp. vidhura 2
    from vid, cp. Sanskrit vidura
    Vidū
    adjective
    1. clever, wise, knowing, skilled in (—˚) SN i.62 (loka˚); v.197 Vin ii.241 (plural paracittaviduno) Snp 677 (vidūhi), 996 Ja v.222 (dhamma˚) Vv 3011 (= sappañña Vv-a 127) Mil 276 Mhvs 15, 51 (ṭhān’ âṭhāṇa˚ knowing right & wrong sites)

      • In
      • passive sense in; dubbidū hard to know Ja v.446
      • For vidū (vidu) “they knew” ‣See vindati
      Vedic vidu
    Vidūpita
    1. at Ud 71 (vitakkā vidūpitā) is to be read as vidhūpita
    Vidūra
    adjective
    1. far, remote, distant AN ii.50 (su˚). Mostly negative ; not far, i.e. near Snp 147 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 31 Pv-a 78 Pv-a 81
    vi + dūra
    Vidūsita
    adjective
    1. corrupted, depraved Pv-a 178 (˚citta)
    vi + dūsita
    Videsa
    1. foreign country Mil 326 Vv-a 338
    vi + desa; cp. disā at Vin i.50
    Vidomanassā
    feminine
    1. absence of dejection Vism 504 = Vb-a 105
    vi + domanassa
    Viddasu
    adjective
    1. skilled, wise MN i.65 (genitive singular & nominative pl viddasuno), 310 (identical). Usually in negative form; aviddasu foolish Vin ii.296 = AN ii.56 (plural aviddasū) SN v.1 Thag 2 164 (
    2. plural aviddasū) Snp 762 (= bāla Commentary ) Dhp 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395) Pv-a 18
    3. another form of vidvā = Sanskrit vidvān ‣See under vindati
    Viddesa
    1. enmity, hatred Ja iii.353 Thag-a 268
    from vi + disa
    Viddesanā
    feminine
    1. enmity Thag 2, 446 Ja iii.353
    abstract formation from viddesa, cp. disatā2
    Viddesin
    adjective-noun
    1. hating; an enemy Thag 1, 547
    vi + desin ‣See dessin
    Viddessati
    1. to hate Thag 2, 418 gerundive viddesanīya to be hated, hateful Sdhp 82
    2. vi + dessati
    Viddha1
    1. pierced, perforated; hit, struck, hurt Snp 331 Nd1 414 (sallena) Mil 251 (eaten through by worms); Sdhp 201 (kaṇṭakena)
    past participle of vijjhati
    Viddha2
    adjective
    1. clear; only in phrase viddha vigata-valāhaka deva a clear sky without a cloud Vin i.3 MN i.317 = SN i.65 = iii.156 = v.44 = It 20
    cp. * Sanskrit vīdhra clear sky
    Viddhaṁsa
    1. demolition, destruction Ja iv.58 (˚kārin)
    from vidhaṁsati
    Viddhaṁsati
    1. to fall down, to be shattered, to be ruined Mil 237 Pv-a 125 (Pot. ˚eyya)
    • Caus viddhaṁseti to shatter, to destroy SN iii.190 (both trs. intransitive, the latter for ˚ati) Ja ii.298 Ja iii.431 Ja v.100 DN-a i.265 Nd1 5 (vikirati vidhameti viddhaṁseti ‣See also under vikirati).
    • past participle viddhasta & viddhaṁsita; .
    • passive viddhaṁsīyati to drop or to be destroyed, to come to ruin DN-a i.18 = Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na v.)
    vi + dhaṁsati
    Viddhaṁsana
    adjective neuter
    1. shattering, destruction (trs. & intransitive) undoing, making disappear; adjective destroying SN iv.83 Mil 351 (kosajja˚) Ja i.322 Ja v.267 adjective ; Vism 85 (vikkhepa +) Vv-a 58 161
    2. adjective

      • Often in phrase (denoting complete destruction): anicc-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṁsana-dhamma, e.g. DN i.76 MN i.500 AN iv.386 Ja i.146 cp. Divy 180: śatanapatana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṁsana-dharmatā ‣See also under vikiraṇa
      from viddhaṁseti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vidhvaṁsana Divy 180
    Viddhaṁsaka
    adjective
    1. destroying Dhs-a 165
    from viddhaṁsana
    Viddhaṁsanatā
    feminine
    1. quality of destruction, ability to destroy Vism 8
    abstract formation from viddhaṁsana
    Viddhaṁsita
    1. shattered, destroyed Dhp-a iii.129
    past participle of viddhaṁseti
    Viddhasta
    1. fallen to pieces, broken, destroyed MN i.227 AN ii.50 Snp 542 Ja i.203 Ja v.69 Ja v.401 Vv 6314 (= vinaṭṭha Vv-a 265)
    past participle of viddhaṁsati
    Viddhā
    1. poet. absolutive of vijjhati Ja vi.77

    Vidvā
    1. ‣See under vindati
    Vidha1
    (adjective (—˚)
    1. of a kind, consisting of,-fold, e.g. aneka˚; manifold DN-a i.103
    • tathā˚ of such-kind such-like Snp 772
    • ti˚ threefold DN i.134 Snp 509
    • nānā˚ various Pv-a 53 Pv-a 96 Pv-a 113; bahu˚ manifold Thag-a 197 etc
    = vidhā
    Vidha2
    1. form, kind Thag 1, 428 (māna˚)
    • There are several other meanings of vidha, which are however, uncertain & rest on doubtful readings. Thus it occurs at Vin ii.136 in meaning of “buckle” (variant reading pīṭha; Commentary silent); at Vin iv.168 in meaning “little box (?); at DN-a i.269 as “carrying pole” (= kāca2, but text DN i.101 has “vividha”)
    = vidha1 as noun
    Vidhamaka
    adjective
    1. one who throws away or does away with; destroying, clearing away Mil 344 (kilesa-mala-duggandha˚)
    from vidhamati
    Vidhamati
    & ˚eti
    1. (trs.) to destroy, ruin; do away with, scatter. intranstitive to drop off, fall away, to be scattered, to roll or whirl about. Both vidhamati & ˚eti; are used indiscriminately although the
    2. causative ˚eti occurs mostly in meaning of “destroy.” (1) vidhamati : SN iii.190 Ja i.284 (in play of words with dhamati to blow;
    3. aorist vidhami = viddhaṁsesi Commentary ); vi.490 (vidhamaṁ te raṭṭhaṁ, is ruined) Mil 91 Mil 226 (Mārasenaṁ), 237, 337 (intransitive, with vikirati & viddhaṁsati).
    4. ; vidhameti : Nd1 5 Ja iii.261 (poet. vidhamemasi write ˚se!
      1. = vidhamema, nāsema Commentary ); v.309 Mil 39 Pv-a 168 past participle vidhamita
      2. vi + dhmā in particular meaning of blowing i.e. driving asunder, cp. dhamati
    Vidhamana
    neuter
    1. destroying, scattering, dispersing Mil 244 (Maccu-sena˚)
    from vidhamati
    Vidhamita
    1. destroyed Nd2 576a
    past participle of vidhamati
    Vidhavā
    feminine
    1. a widow SN i.170 AN iii.128 Ja vi.33 Mil 288 Vism 17 Pv-a 65 Pv-a 161 Vb-a 339
    Vedic vidhavā widow, vidhu lonely, vidhura separaṭed, Avestan vidavā = Gothic widuwō = Old High German wituwa (German Witwe = English widow); Latin vidua widow, etc., in all Indogermanic languages
    Vidhā
    feminine
    1. mode, manner, sort, kind; proportion, form, variety DN iii.103 (ādesana˚) Thag 2, 395 (cakkhu˚ “shape of an eye” translation) Vb-a 496 (in explanation of kathaṁ-vidha: “ākāra-saṇṭhānaṁ vidhā nāma”) DN-a i.222 (iddhi˚), 294 (in explanation of tividha-yañña “ettha vidhā vuccati ṭhapanā” i.e. performance arrangement), 299 (similarly tisso vidhā = tīṇi ṭhapanāni of yañña)
    2. Used as ablative
    3. adverb vidhā in meaning “variously” at Pv ii.952 (Commentary explanation = vidhātabba, not quite correctly Pv-a 135). Perhaps the phrase vidhāsamatikkanta is to be explained in this way, viz “excelling in a variety of ways, higher than a variety (of things)” or perhaps better: “going beyond all distinctions” (i.e. of personality); free from prejudice i.e. No. 2
      1. SN ii.253 SN iii.80 SN iii.136 SN iii.170 AN iv.53 2. (ethically) in special sense: a distinctive feature (of a person as different from others), a “mode” of pride or delusion, a “form” of conceit. As such specified as three kinds of conceit tisso vidhā, viz. “seyyo 'ham asmi,” “sadiso 'ham asmi,” & “hīno 'ham asmi (i.e. I am better than somebody else, equal to, & worse than somebody else) ‣See e.g. DN iii.216 SN i.12 SN iii.48 SN iii.80 SN iii.127 SN v.56, 98 Nd1 195 Vb 367 Snp 842 Vb-a 496 (māno va vidhā nāma)
      • The adjective form is vidha ‣See sep
      cp. Sanskrit vidhā
    Vidhātar
    1. provider, disposer Ja v.221 (dhātā vidhātā, as of Viśvakarman: cp. Macdonell Vedic Mythology p. 118)
    agent noun of vidahati
    Vidhāna
    neuter
    1. arrangement, get up, performance, process Ja iii.178 (attano vidhānena “in his robes of office”); Vism 66 sq. Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122 (bhāvanā˚) Vb-a 69 71 (manasikāra˚) Thag-a 273 (identical)
    2. ceremony, rite Ja vi.202 (yañña˚) Mil 3
    3. assignment, disposition, provision Ja ii.208 (vidhi-vidhāna-ññū; Commentary explained v. as “koṭṭhāso vā saṁvidahanaṁ vā”) Pv-a 30

      • succession (as much as “supplement”) Kp-a 216 Snp-a 23 (note 2)
      • Cp saṁvidahana & saṁvidhāna
    from vi + dhā; Vedic vidhāna
    Vidhānavant
    adjective
    1. making dispositions, careful in providing, circumspect, considerable Ja vi.287
    vidhāna + vant
    Vidhāyaka
    1. providing Pv-a 60
    from vi + dhā
    Vidhāvati
    1. to run about, roam, cover space (accusative ), stray SN i.37 Snp 411 Snp 939 Nd1 414 DN-a i.39
    2. vi + dhāvati
    Vidhi
    feminine
    1. form, way; rule, direction, disposition, method, motto Vism 278 (manasikāra˚, eightfold) Pv-a 78 (dāna˚ = dāna), 126 Vv-a 82
    2. instrumental vidhinā in due form Mhvs 14, 52 Pv-a 130 Sdhp 336
    3. luck, destiny Ja ii.243 (˚rahita unlucky)
    from vi + dhā, cp. Vedic vidhi
    Vidhutika
    1. a wreath Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180
    etymology?
    Vidhunāti
    1. to shake SN i.197 Mil 399 Vism 71
    • to remove, to skin (an animal) Vin i.193
    • vi + dhunāti
    Vidhura
    adjective
    1. destitute, lonely; miserable, wretched Ja v.399 (so read for vidura; according to Kern, Toevoegselen s.v., but doubtful). 2. vi + dhura
      1. “burdenless,” unequalled Snp 996 (= vigata-dhura, appaṭima Snp-a 583) AN i.116 (here in meaning “clever,” perhaps = vidura; spelt vidhūra) cp. proper name Vidhura Kp-a 128 Snp-a 201 (as Vidhūra at Ja iv.361)
      Vedic vidhura ‣See vidhavā
    Vidhūpana
    adjective neuter
    1. fanning, a fan Vin ii.130 Vin iv.263 AN ii.130 Nd2 562 Vv 3342 (= caturassa vījani) Vv-a 147 Vb-a 71
    from vidhūpeti
    Vidhūpita
    1. scattered, destroyed Snp 472 (= daḍḍha Snp-a 409) Ud 71 (so read for vidūpita)
    past participle of vidhūpeti
    Vidhūpeti
    (˚dhūpayati)
    1. to fumigate, perfume, diffuse Mil 252
    2. to scatter, destroy Vin i.2 (vidhūpayaṁ Māra-senaṁ) SN i.14 SN iii.90 = AN v.325 SN iv.210 Ps ii.167.
    3. past participle vidhūpita
    vi + dhūpayati
    Vidhūma
    1. (& vidhuma) adjective

      1. “without smoke,” i.e. passionless, quiet, emancipated SN i.141 (K.S.: “no fume of vice is his”) Snp 460 (= kodhadhūma-vigamena v. Snp-a 405), 1048 (cp. Nd2 576 with long exegesis); Pv iv.134 (= vigata-micchā-vitakkadhūma Pv-a 230)
      vi + dhūma
    Vinaṭṭha
    1. destroyed Vv-a 265 Pv-a 55
    past participle of vinassati
    Vinata
    1. bent, bending Pv-a 154 (˚sākhā)
    past participle of vi + nam
    Vinadati
    1. to cry or shout out, to scold Ja iii.147 (kāmaṁ vinadantu let them shout!). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vinādita “reviled” Divy 540
    vi + nadati
    Vinaddha
    1. covered, bound, intertwined Vin i.194 (camma˚, onaddha +) Ja v.416 Ja vi.589 (kañcanalatā˚ bheri); Vism 1 (= jaṭita saṁsibbita)
    past participle of vinandhati
    Vinandhati
    1. to close, encircle, cover Mhvs 19, 48; Vism 253 (ppr. vinandhamāna: so read for vinaddh˚). past participle vinaddha
    2. vi + nandhati
    Vinandhana
    neuter
    1. tying, binding Vin ii.116 (˚rajju rope for binding)
    from vi + nandhati
    Vinaya
    1. driving out, abolishing destruction, removal Vin i.3 (asmi-mānassa), 235 iii.3 (akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ vinayāya dhammaṁ desemi) SN i.40 Snp 921 AN i.91 (kodha˚, upanāha˚) ii.34 (pipāsa˚); iv.15 (icchā˚); v.165 (identical) Snp-a 12 Pv-a 114 (atthassa mūlaṁ nikati˚). Often in phrase rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚; , e.g. SN iv.7f.; v.137 sq., 241 AN iv.175 Nett 22
    2. rule (in logic), way of saying or judging, sense, terminology (cp. iminā nayena SN iv.95 (ariyassa vinaye vuccati loko) AN i.163 (ariyassa vinaye tevijjo one called a threefold wise in the nominativenclature of the Buddhist); ii.166 (ariyassa v.) Snp-a 403
    3. norm of conduct, ethics, morality, good behaviour Snp 916 Snp 974 Ja iv.241 (= ācāra-vinaya Commentary ) AN ii.112 iii.353 sq. (ariya-vinaye saddhā yassa patiṭṭhitā etc faith established in Buddhist ethics).

      • code of ethics, monastic discipline, rule, rules of morality or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection of rules which grew up in the monastic life and habits of the bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the “Dhamma,” the “doctrine,” or theoretical, philosophical part of the Buddhist Canon The history & importance of the Vinaya Piṭaka will be dealt with under the title “Vinaya” in the Dictionary of Names. Only a few refs. must suffice here to give a general idea ‣See also under Dhamma Commentary, and in detail Geiger, Dhamma
      • past participle 55
      1. -58
      • Often combined with dhamma : dhammato vinayato ca on the ground of Dh. and V. Vin i.337 cp. ii.247
      • dhammo ca vinayo ca Vin i.356 Vin ii.285 302; or (as (Dvandva) dhammavinaya (i.e. the teaching of the Buddha in its completeness) DN i.229 Vin ii.237f. MN i.284 MN ii.181f. AN i.283 AN iii.297 AN iii.327 SN i.9 SN iii.65 Ud 53 Vv-a 3 Often approaches the meaning of “Buddhist order, e.g. Vin i.69 DN i.176 MN i.68 MN i.459 MN i.480 MN iii.127 SN ii.120 AN i.185 AN ii.123 AN v.122
      • See further Vin ii.96 (vinaye cheko hoti) AN ii.168 (ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ v. idaṁ Satthu-sāsanaṁ); Vism 522 Vb-a 273 Kp-a 106 151 Snp-a 4 195, 310
      • a-vinaya one who sins against the V. (like a-dhamma one who neglects the Dh. Vin ii.295f.; iii.174 AN i.18 AN v.73 sq
      • The division of the books of the Vinaya is given at Dhs-a 18 Its character (as shown by its name) is given in the following verse at Dhs-a 19: “(vividha-visesa-) nayattā vinayanato c’ eva kāya-vācānaṁ vinayy’ attha-vidūhi ayaṁ vinayo Vinayo ti akkhāto,” i.e. “Because it shows precepts & principles, and governs both deed and word, therefore men call this scripture V., for so is V interpreted” (Expositor i.23)
      1. ˚aṭṭhakathā the (old) Commentary on the Vinaya Vism 72, 272 Vb-a 334 Kp-a 97
      2. ˚ānuggaha taking up (i.e. following the rules) of the Vinaya Vin iii.21 AN i.98 AN i.100 AN v.70
      • ˚kathā exposition of the Vinaya Vin iv.142
      • ˚dhara one who knows or masters the V by heart, an expert in the V. Vin i.169 Vin ii.299 (with dhamma-dhara & mātikā-dhara) AN i.25 AN ii.147 iii.78 sq., 179, 361; iv.140 sq.; v.10 sq. Ja iii.486 iv.219; Vism 41, 72; Kp-a 151 Dhp-a ii.30 (with dhamma-kathika & dhuta-vāda) cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vinayadhara Divy 21
        1. ˚piṭaka the V. Piṭaka Kp-a1 2, 97 Vb-a 431
        • ˚vatthu chapter of the V. Vin ii.307
        • ˚vādin one who professes the V. (or “speaking in accordance with the rules of conduct”), a V

          • follower DN i.4 (here explained by Buddhaghosa as “saṁvara-vinaya-pahāna-vinaya sannissitaṁ katvā vadatī ti” v. DN-a i.76 thus taking it as vinaya 3 = MN iii.49 = Pug 58 (translation here: “speaking according to self-control”) DN iii.135 DN iii.175
          from vi + , cp. vineti
    Vinayati
    1. ‣See vineti
    Vinayana
    neuter
    1. removing, removal Mil 318 (pipāsā˚) Pv-a 39 (soka˚)
    2. instruction, discipline setting an example Ja v.457 (conversion) Mil 220
    from vi +
    Vinaḷīkata
    adjective
    1. literally “having the reed or stem removed, rendered useless, destroyed MN i.227 AN ii.39 Snp 542 (= ucchinna Snp-a 435) Thag 1, 216 Ja vi.60 (viddhasta + as at Snp 542)
    vi + naḷa + kata, with naḷī for naḷa in combination with kṛ
    Vinassati
    1. to be lost; to perish, to be destroyed SN iv.309 MN ii.108 (imperative vinassa “away with you”) Ja iii.351 Ja v.468 Pv iii.45; Vism 427.
    2. past participle vinaṭṭha
    3. causative vināseti
    4. vi + nassati
    Vinā
    indeclinable
    1. without, used as preposition (or post-position) with (usually) instrumental, e.g. Vin ii.132 (vinā daṇḍena without a support) Pv-a 152 (purisehi vinā without men); or ablative, e.g. Snp 589 (ñāti sanghā vinā hoti is separated from his relatives; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vinābhavati MVastu i.243); or accusative, e.g. Mhvs 3, 10 (na sakkā hi taṁ vinā). In compoundvinā-bhāva separation cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vinābhāva MVastu ii.141
      1. Snp 588 Snp 805 Nd1 122 Ja iii.95 Ja iv.155 Ja v.180 Ja vi.482 (= viyoga Commentary )
      Vedic vinā = vi-nā (i.e. “not so”), of pronoun base Indogermanic *no (cp. nānā “so & so”), as in Sanskrit ca-na Latin ego-ne, pō-ne behind, etc ‣See na1
    Vināti
    1. to weave Ja ii.302 Dhp-a i.428 (tantaṁ); infinitive vetuṁ Vin ii.150 passive viyyati. cp. upavīyati.
    2. causative II. vināpeti to order to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vāyāpeti)
    3. vi, by-form of to weave ‣See vāyati1
    Vināma
    masculine & Vināmana
    • neuter

      1. bending Mil 352 (˚na) Vb-a 272 (kāya-vināmanā, bending the body for the purpose of getting up; in explanation of vijambhikā); Dhtp 208
      from vināmeti
    Vināmeti
    1. to bend, twist Mil 107 Mil 118
    vi + nāmeti; causative of namati
    Vināyaka
    1. a leader, guide, instructor MN ii.94 Vv 167 (= veneyya-satte vineti Vv-a 83) Thag-a 69 2. a judge Ja iii.336
    2. from vi +
    Vināsa
    1. destruction, ruin, loss DN i.34 (+ uccheda & vibhava), 55; Pv ii.710; Vism 427 (so read for vinasa) DN-a i.120 Pv-a 102 (dhana˚), 133. Vinasaka (ika)
    vi + nāsa, of naś
    Vināsaka (˚ika)
    adjective
    1. causing ruin; only negative ; not causing destruction AN iii.38 AN iv.266 AN iv.270 Ja v.116
    from vināsa
    Vināsana
    adjective
    1. only negative ; imperishable Dīpavaṁsa iv.16
    from vināsa
    Vināseti
    1. to cause destruction, to destroy, ruin, spoil Thag 1, 1027 Snp 106 Pv ii.78 DN-a i.211 Pv-a 3 (dhanaṁ), 116; Sdhp 59 Sdhp 314 Sdhp 546. 2. to drive out of the country, to expel, banish Ja iv.200
    2. causative of vinassati
    Vinigaḷati
    1. to drop down Mil 349
    vi + nigaḷati
    Viniggata
    1. coming (out) from Ja vi.78 DN-a i.140 Dhp-a iv.46 Sdhp 23
    vi + niggata
    Viniggaha
    1. checking, restraint Ps i.16; ii.119
    vi + niggaha
    Viniggilati
    1. to throw out, to emit Kp-a 95
    vi + niggilati
    Vinighātin
    adjective
    1. afraid of defeat, anxious about the outcome (of a disputation), in phrase vinighāti-hoti (for ˚ī-hoti) Snp 826 cp. Nd1 164
    from vi + nighāta
    Vinicchaya
    1. discrimination, distinction, thought, (firm) opinion thorough knowledge of (—˚) AN iii.354 (pāpakamma˚) Snp 327 (dhamma˚), 838 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhi-vinicchayā Nd1 186), 867 (˚ṁ kūrute; cp. Nd1 265) Ja iii.205 (attha˚) Pv-a 1 Pv-a 112 Pv-a 210 (kūṭa˚), 287
    2. decision; (as technical term in law:) investigation, trial, judgment (given by the king or his ministers) DN ii.58 (with reference to lābha, explained as deciding what to do with one’s gains) = iii.289 = AN iv.400 = Vb 390 (explained at Vb-a 512 where vinicchaya is said to be fourfold, viz. ñāṇa˚, taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, vitakka˚) Ja ii.2
    3. court house, hall of judgment Ja i.176 iii.105; iv.122, 370; vi.333 Mil 332 (vinaya˚, i.e. having the Vinaya as the law court in the City of Righteousness).

      • (as technical term in logic & psychology: (process of) judgment, detailed analysis, deliberation consideration, ascertainment Ja v.60 (˚ṁ vicāreti) Vb-a 46f. (according to attha, lakkhaṇa, etc.), 83 sq (identical); Kp-a 23, 75
      1. ˚kathā analytical discussion, exegesis, interpretation Vism 16 Vb-a 291 (opposite pāḷi-vaṇṇanā)
      2. ˚ññū clever in deciding or giving judgment Ja iii.205 Ja v.367 (a˚) -ṭṭhāna place of judgment, law court Ja v.229 Dhp-a iii.141 Dhp-a iv.215
      • ˚dhamma law practice J. v.125 Dhp-a iii.141
      • ˚vīthi process of judgment (in logic) ‣See Compendium 241
      • ˚sālā the law court(s) Ja iv.120 Dhp-a iii.380
      vi + nicchaya; cp. Vedic viniścaya
    Viniccharati
    1. to go out (in all directions) Ja iv.181
    vi + niccharati
    Vinicchita
    1. discerned, decided, distinguished, detailed Vin i.65 (su˚) Ja v.65 (a˚) Snp-a 477 Sdhp 508
    past participle of vinicchināti
    Vinicchin
    adjective
    1. discerning Thag 1, 551
    from vinicchināti
    Vinicchinana
    neuter
    1. giving judgment Ja v.229
    from vinicchināti
    Vinicchināti
    ˚inati & vinicchati
    1. to investigate, try; to judge, determine, decide Ja v.229 future vinicchissati Vin iii.159
    2. absolutive vinicchinitvā Nd1 76
    3. aorist vinicchini Ja ii.2 infinitive vinicchituṁ Ja i.148 Dhp-a iv.215
    4. past participle vinicchita
    5. vi + nicchināti
    Vinijjita
    adjective
    1. unvanquished Sdhp 318
    vi + nijjita
    Vinidhāya
    indeclinable
    1. literally “misplacing,” i.e. asserting or representing wrongly giving a false notion of (accusative ) Vin ii.205 explained at Vin iv.2 Snp-a 204
    2. vi + nidhāya, absolutive of vinidahati
    Vinindati
    1. to censure, blame, reproach Ja ii.346 Ja vi.200
    vi + nindati
    Vinipāta
    1. ruin, destruction; a place of suffering, state of punishment, synonym with apāya duggati; (with which often combined, plus niraya, e. g Vin i.227 DN i.82 DN i.162 MN i.73 AN iii.211 Iti 58 Pug 60):. AN v.169 Snp 278 Ja iii.32 Mil 108 Vism 427 (where explained as “vināsā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārino” together with duggati & niraya). The; sotāpanna is called “avinipāta-dhammo,” i.e. not liable to be punished in purgatory ‣See under sotāpanna, & cp. sym. term; khīna-niraya AN iii.211
    from vi + nipāteti
    Vinipātika
    adjective
    1. destined to suffer in purgatory, liable to punishment after death DN ii.69 DN iii.253 MN i.73 MN i.390 AN i.123 AN ii.232f.; iv.39, 401 Ja v.117 Ja v.119
    from vinipāta
    Vinipāteti
    1. to bring to ruin, to destroy, to frustrate Vin i.298 Ja vi.71 Vv-a 208
    vi + nipāteti
    Vinibaddha
    adjective
    1. bound (to) SN i.20 SN iii.9 AN iii.311 (chanda-rāga˚); iv.289 (identical) Nd1 30 (+ lagga etc.)
    vi + nibaddha
    Vinibandha
    1. bondage SN ii.17 SN iii.135 SN iii.186 AN i.66 (+ vinivesa) Snp 16
    • The five cetaso vinibandhā (bondages of the mind) are: kāmesu rāgo, kāye rāgo, rūpe rāgo, yāvadatthaṁ udar’ âvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyya-sukhaṁ anuyogo, aññataraṁ deva-nikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ; thus at DN iii.238 MN i.103 AN iii.249 AN iv.461 AN iv.463f.; v.17 Vb 377
    vi + nibandha
    Vinibbhujati
    (or ˚bhuñjati
    1. to bhuj, to bend, as in bhuja1 & nibbhujati
      1. to turn inside out Thag 2, 471
      • to; bhuj or bhuñj as in bhuñjati2 and paribhuñjati2
      1. to separate, cut off, remove MN i.233 SN iii.141 SN iv.168 (spells wrongly jj)
      • identical
      1. to cleanse figuratively to sift out thoroughly, to distinguish, discriminate MN i.292 Ja v.121 (avinibbhujaṁ, ppr.) Mil 63 (doubled) Vism 438 (spelling wrongly jj) Dhs-a 311
      • pp vinibbhutta
      vi + ni + bhujati
    Vinibbhujana
    neuter
    1. turning inside out Thag-a 284
    from vinibbhujati
    Vinibbhutta
    1. separated, distinguished, discriminated Vism 368
    past participle of vinibbhujati
    Vinibbhoga1
    adjective
    1. lacking, deprived of (—˚), deficient Thag-a 248 (viññāṇa˚)
    vi + nibbhoga
    Vinibbhoga2
    1. sifting out, distinction, discrimination Vism 306 (dhātu˚), 368 (identical); negative absence of discrimination, indistinction Dhs-a 47 used as adjective in sense of “not to be distinguished,” indistinct at Ja iii.428 (˚sadda)
    from vinibbhujati.3
    Vinibhindati
    1. to break (right) through MN i.233
    vi + ni + bhid
    Vinimaya
    1. reciprocity, barter, exchange Ja ii.369
    from vi + nimināti
    Vinimīleti
    1. to shut one’s eyes Sdhp 189
    vi + nimīleti
    Vinimutta
    (Vinimmutta)
    1. released, free from Ja i.375 (mm); Sdhp 1 Sdhp 4 Sdhp 16 Sdhp 225
    2. discharged (of an arrow) Dhp-a iii.132 (mm)
    vi + nis + mutta
    Vinimoceti
    1. to free (oneself) from, to get rid of AN iii.92 Pug 68
    vi + nis + moceti, cp. nimmoka
    Viniyujjati
    1. to be connected with, to ensue, accrue Pv-a 29 (= upakappati)
    vi + niyujjati
    Viniyoga
    1. possession, application, use Dhs-a 151 Vv-a 157 Pv-a 171 Pv-a 175
    vi + niyoga
    Vinivaṭṭeti
    (& ˚vatteti
    1. to turn over, to repeat Ja i.25 (ṭṭ), 153 (ṭṭ), 190 (ṭṭ)
    2. to turn (somebody) away from, to distract Pv i.88 (read ˚vattayi for ˚vattanti); ii.619 (˚vattayi;
    3. aorist ) Ja iii.290 (ṭṭ). 3. to roll over, to glide off Ja iii.344 (ṭṭ) Dhp-a ii.51 (ṭṭ)
    vi + nivatteti
    Vinivijjha
    adjective
    1. to be pierced; in dubbinivijjha difficult to pierce, hard to penetrate Ja v.46
    gerundive of vinivijjhati
    Vinivijjhati
    1. to pierce through & through Ja ii.91 Mil 339 Dhs-a 253
    vi + ni + vijjhati
    Vinivijjhana
    neuter
    1. piercing, perforating, penetrating Dhs-a 253 Thag-a 197 (in explanation of bahuvidha)
    from vinivijjhati
    Vinividdha
    1. pierced (all through), perforated Ja v.269 Ja vi.105 Vism 222
    past participle of vinivijjhati
    Viniveṭhana
    1. (& ˚nibbeṭhana neuter

      1. unwrapping, unravelling; figuratively explaining, making clear, explanation, refutation Nd2 503 (diṭṭhi-sanghātassa vinibbeṭhana; where identical passage at Nd1 343 reads vinivedhana, cp, nibbedha) Mil 96 Vv-a 297 (diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhiviniveṭhana)
      vi + nibbeṭhana
    Viniveṭheti
    1. to disentangle, to unwrap Vin i.3 276 (anta-gaṇṭhiṁ, the intestines) Ja ii.283 (sarīraṁ); v.47
    2. to disentangle oneself, to free oneself (from) AN iii.92 Pug 68
    vi + nibbeṭheti
    Vinivesa
    1. tie, bond, attachment AN i.66 (+ vinibandha)
    vi + nivesa
    Vinīta
    1. led, trained, educated SN v.261 AN iv.310 (viyatta +) Dhp-a ii.66 (˚vatthu) Pv-a 38-avinīta not trained SN iv.287 Vv 297 Dhs 1003 1217 suvinīta well trained SN iv.287 opposite dubbinīta badly trained Ja v.284 Ja v.287
    • ratha-vinīta
    • neuter a relay MN i.149
    past participle of vineti
    Vinīlaka
    adjective
    1. of a bluish-black (purple) colour, discoloured Ja ii.39 (of a cygnet, bastard of a swan & a crow, “resembling neither father nor mother, i.e. “black & white”). Usually applied to the colour of a corpse (purple, discoloured), the contemplation of which forms one of the 10 asubha-saññās : MN i.88 (uddhumātaka +) Snp 200 (identical)
    • A. i.42; ii.17 SN v.129f. Dhs 264 Nett 27 Mil 332 Vism 110, 178 193
    vi + nīlaka
    Vinīvaraṇa
    adjective
    1. unobstructed, unbiassed, unprejudiced AN ii.71 Sdhp 458. Usually in phrase ˚citta of an unbiassed mind, combined with mudu-citta udagga-citta; : Vin i.16 181 DN i.110 DN i.148 AN iv.186 Same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e.g. MVastu iii.225; Divy 616f.
    vi + nīvaraṇa
    Vinudati
    1. is only found in causative form vinodeti.

    Vinetar
    1. teacher, instructor, guide Snp 484 Ps ii.194 (netar, vinetar, anunetar) Ja iv.320
    agent noun from vineti
    Vineti
    1. to remove, put away, give up
    2. ppr. vinayaṁ Ja vi.499 Pot. 3rd singular vinayetha Snp 361 & vineyya Snp 590
    3. imperative vinaya Snp 1098; vinayassu Snp 559
    4. absolutive vineyya Snp 58 (but taken as Pot. at Nd2 577b); Pv ii.334 (macchera-malaṁ); vinetvā Ja v.403 (chandaṁ); vinayitvā Vv-a 156 & vinayitvāna Snp 485 (bhakuṭiṁ)
    5. to lead, guide, instruct, train educate AN iii.106 (infinitive vinetuṁ SN iv.105 (Pot. vineyyaṁ &
    6. future ; vinessati;
    7. aorist vinesi Mil 13 (Abhidhamme)
    8. absolutive vinayitvāna Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.10);
    9. gerundive vinetabba Snp-a 464 & vineyya Mil 12 cp. veneyya
    10. pp vinīta
    vi + neti; cp. vinaya
    Vinodaka
    adjective
    1. driving out, dispelling, allaying Pv-a 114 (parissama˚)
    from vinodeti, cp. nudaka & nūdaka
    Vinodana
    adjective neuter
    1. dispelling, removal AN iii.387 AN iii.390 Snp 1086 (chanda-rāga˚, = pahāna etc Nd2 578) Mil 285 DN-a i.140 (niddā˚) Dhp-a i.41 (tama˚, adjective) Pv-a 38 (soka˚)
    from vinodeti
    Vinodeti
    1. to drive out, dispel, remove, put away SN iv.70 SN iv.76 SN iv.190 AN ii.13 AN ii.117 Snp 273 Snp 956 (tamaṁ); 967 Nd1 454 489 Ja i.183 Ja ii.63 Ja ii.283 (sinehaṁ) Vv 8426 Mil 259 (imperative vinodehi, + apanehi nicchārehi); Mhvs 5, 245 (vimatiṁ); 31, 10 (kankhaṁ) Dhp-a iv.145 Pv-a 38 (sokaṁ)
    2. causative of vi + nudati
    Vindati
    1. the Vedic differentiations vetti “to know” and vindati “to find” are both in Pāli, but only in sporadic forms, some of which are archaic and therefore only found in poetry. Of vid are more frequent the passive vijjati and derivations from the
    2. causative ved˚;. The root vind occurs only in the present tense and its derivations

      • A. vid to know, to ascertain: The old Vedic pres. vetti only at Thag 1, 497 (spelt veti). Another old
      • aorist is vedi Sanskrit ayedīt
      1. Dhp 419 Dhp 423 Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi); iv.35 (here perhaps as aorist to
      2. causative vedeti : to cause to know or feel). Remnants of the old perfect tense 3rd
      3. plural Sanskrit viduḥ

        are vidū & viduṁ (appears as vidu in verse), e.g. at Thag 1 497 Snp 758 Pv ii.74 (= jānanti Pv-a 102) Ja v.62 (= vijānanti Commentary ); Mhvs 23, 78. The old participle of the same tense is vidvā = Sanskrit vidvān; cp. Geiger Pali Grammar 1002

        1. in meaning “wise” Snp 792 Snp 897 Snp 1056 Snp 1060 explained as vijjāgato ñāṇī vibhāvī medhāvī at Nd1 93 308 Nd2 575. O past participle avidvā Snp 535 MN i.311

          • Younger forms are a reconstructed (grammatical) pres. vidati DN-a i.139
          • absolutive viditvā SN v.193 Snp 353 Snp 365 Snp 581 Snp 1053 Snp 1068 and
          • past participle vidita (q.v.)
          • passive vijjati to be found to be known, to exist; very frequent, e.g. Snp 20 (pl vijjare), 21, 431, 611, 856, 1001, 1026 Thag 1, 132 DN i.18 Pv i.56 ii.318 (spelt vijjite!) ii.914 (= atthi Commentary ) 3rd singular preterite vijjittha Snp 1098 (mā v. = saṁvijjittha Nd2 568). ppr. vijjamāna existing Ja i.214 Ja iii.127 Pv-a 25 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 103 Mil 216 (genitive
          • plural vijjamānataṁ).
          • causative vedeti;
          • passive causative vediyati;
          • gerundive vedanīya ‣See separately, with other derivations
          • B. vind to find possess, enjoy (cp. vitta1, vitta2, vitti) Snp 187 (vindate dhanaṁ), 658 Thag 1, 551 2, 79 (
          • aorist vindi) Ja vi.508 (vindate, medium = look for, try to find for oneself); Mhvs 1, 13 (ppr. vindaṁ) Dhp-a iii.128 (ppr. vindanto), 410 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 77
          • infinitive vindituṁ Mil 122 Ja 18; grd vindiya Vism 526 (as avindiya in explanation of avijjā). cp. nibbindati.
          • past participle vitta1 (for which adhigata in lit meaning)
          vid, both in meaning “to know” & “to find”. I saw, I know = Sanskrit veda “Veda, “idol”; Vedic vindati to find, vetti to know vidyā knowledge; Gothic witan to observe & know German wissen; Gothic weis = English wise, etc., for which ‣See Walde, Latin Wtb. s.v. video
    Vindussara
    1. is variant reading of bindu˚; (q.v.)
    Vipakka
    adjective
    1. fully ripe Ja i.136
    vi + pakka
    Vipakkha
    adjective
    1. opposite, hostile; enemy; only in following compounds.:
    1. ˚sevaka siding in or consorting with the enemy keeping bad company, a traitor Ja i.186 Ja iii.321 Dhp-a iv.95
    • ˚sevin identical Ja i.487 Ja ii.98
    vi + pakkha1 2
    Vipakkhika
    adjective
    1. vi + pakkha1 1
      1. without wings Ja i.429
      • vi + pakkha1 2
      1. opposite hostile Sdhp 71
      vipakkha + ika
    Vipakkhin
    adjective
    1. having no wings, without wings Ja v.255
    vi + pakkhin
    Vipaccatā
    feminine at Vin ii.88 is perhaps a derived from vi + vac, and not pac, thus representing a Sanskrit *vivācyatā, meȧning “challenging in disputation,” quarrelsomeness, provocation ‣See also vipāceti. If from vi + pac, the meaning would be something like “heatedness, exasperation.”
    Vipaccati
    1. to be cooked, i.e. to ripen Ja v.121 Pv-a 104
    2. to bear fruit DN ii.266 SN i.144 MN i.388 Nett 37 Vv-a 171
    vi + paccati
    Vipaccanaka
    adjective
    1. bearing fruit, ripening (fully) Mil 421 (Notes) Pv-a 190
    from vipaccati, cp. paccana
    Vipaccanīka
    adjective
    1. hostile MN i.402 AN iv.95 Ja iv.108 Pug 20 Vb 351 359, 371 Vb-a 478 Pv-a 87
    vi + paccanīka
    Vipajjati
    1. to go wrong, to fail, to perish (opposite sampajjati) Dhp-a iii.357 Pv-a 34 past participle vipanna. Vipancana & Vipanciyati; vi + pajjati
    Vipañcanā
    Vipañciyati;
    1. ‣See under vipañcita
    Vipañcita
    1. only in phrase ˚ññū either: knowing diffuseness or detail, or: of unillusioned understanding, clear-minded, unprejudiced combined with ugghaṭita-ññū at AN ii.135 = Pug 41 (translated by B. Commentary Law as “learning by exposition”; PugA 223 explains as “vitthāritaṁ atthaṁ jānāti,” i.e. one who knows a matter explained in detail. The spelling at AN ii.135 is vipacita˚; at Pug 41 vipaccita˚ & at PugAN vipaccita˚ with variant reading vipañcita˚); Nett 7 sq., 125 Snp-a 163 (where ugghaṭita-ññū is applied to those who understand by condensed instruction, sankhepa-desanāya, and vipañcita-ññū to those who need a detailed one, vitthāradesanā; thus "learning by diffuseness”)
    • At Nett 9 we have the various terms vipañcanā, vipañcayati vipañciyati; (
    • denominative ) used in the description of various ways of parsing and grammatical analysis. Here vipañcanā (resting clearly on Sanskrit papañca expansion means “expanding” (by letters & vowels) and stands midway between; ugghaṭanā & vitthāraṇā “condensing & detailing.” The term vipañcayati (= vipañciyati) is used in the same way
    • Note. The term is not sufficiently cleared up. It occurs in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as vipañcika (e.g. Divy 319 Divy 391, 475, where it is applied to “brāhmaṇā naimittikā” & trsl; d by Cowell as “sooth-sayer”), and vipañcanaka (Divy 548?), with which cp. vipañcitājña at Lal. Vist. 520 ‣See remark on vejjañjanika
    from vi + pañc, cp. papañcita
    Vipaṇeti
    1. to sell, to trade (with) Ja iv.363 (= vikkiṇati Commentary )
    vi + causative of paṇati
    Vipatati
    1. ‣See vipāṭeti 2
    Vipatti
    feminine
    1. wrong state, false manifestation, failure, misfortune (opposite sampatti Vin i.171 (ācāra failure of morality) AN i.270 (ājīva˚); iv.26, 160 (atta˚ para˚); Ps i.122 Ja vi.292 Nett 126 (the 3 vipattiyo sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚, ācāra˚) Dhp-a i.16 (sīla˚) DN-a i.235 Often in pair diṭṭhi˚; wrong view, heresy, & sīla˚; moral failure: DN ii.213 AN i.95 AN i.268 AN i.270 Vin v.98 Vb 361 Dhs 1361
    • payoga˚ wrong application Pv-a 117 Pv-a 136 (opposite ˚sampatti)
    vi + patti2
    Vipatha
    1. wrong way or course Vv 5010 (= apatha Vv-a 212)
    vi + patha
    Vipanna
    1. gone wrong, having lost, failing in (—˚), opposite sampanna : AN iii.19 (rukkho sākhā-palāsa a tree which has lost branches and leaves) Snp 116 (˚diṭṭhi one who has wrong views, heretic; explained as “vinaṭṭha-sammādiṭṭhi” Snp-a 177) Mil 258 (su thoroughly fallen)
    2. ˚sīla˚; gone wrong in morals, lacking morality Vin i.63 (+ ācāra˚, diṭṭhi˚); ii.4 (identical) Ja iii.138 (vipanna-sīla)
    past participle of vipajjati
    Vipannatta
    neuter
    1. failure, misfortune Dhs-a 367
    from vipanna
    Viparakkamma
    indeclinable
    1. endeavouring strongly, with all one’s might Snp 425
    absolutive of vi + parakkamati
    Viparāmosa
    Viparāmāsa
    1. highway robbery DN i.5 (explained as twofold at DN-a i.80 viz. hima˚ & gumba˚ or hidden by the snow & a thicket; the popular etymology given here is “janaṁ musanti,” i.e. they steal, or beguile people); iii.176 (variant reading ˚māsa) AN ii.209 AN v.206 SN v.473 Pug 58
    vi + parāmāsa, the form ˚mosa probably a distortion of ˚māsa
    Viparāvatta
    1. reversed, changed DN i.8 MN ii.3 SN iii.12 SN v.419 DN-a i.91
    past participle of vi + parā + vṛt
    Vipariṇata
    1. changed, perverted Dhs 1038 Vb 1 3, 5 sq. Mil 50
    vi + pariṇata
    Vipariṇāma
    1. change (for the worse), reverse, vicissitude DN iii.216 (˚dukkhatā) MN i.457 (also as “disappointment”) SN ii.274 SN iii.8 SN iv.7f. 67 sq. AN ii.177 (˚dhamma subject to change); iii.32; v.59 sq. Vb 379 (˚dhamma); Vism 499 (˚dukkha), 629 sq. Vb-a 93 (identical) Pv-a 60
    • a˚ absence of change, steadfastness DN i.18 DN iii.31 DN iii.33 Dhp-a i.121
    vi + pariṇāma
    Vipariṇāmeti
    1. to change, alter DN i.56 (Text ˚ṇamati; but DN-a i.167 ˚ṇāmeti: sic for ˚ṇāmati!) = SN iii.211 Pv-a 199
    denominative from vipariṇāma
    Viparibhinna
    1. (entirely) broken up MN i.296 SN iv.294
    vi + paribhinna
    Vipariyattha
    1. in verse at Ja v.372 is the poet. form of vipallattha (so the Commentary explanation)
    Vipariyaya
    & Vipariyāya
    1. change, reversal DN-a i.148 (ā) Snp-a 499 Dhs-a 253 (ā); Sdhp 124 Sdhp 333 cp. vipariyesa & vipallāsa;
    vi + pariyaya
    Vipariyādikata
    adjective
    1. thrown out of its course upset, destroyed Thag 1, 184 (cittaṁ; cp. similar phrase vipariyatthaṁ cittaṁ Ja v.372-The variant reading at Thag passage is vimariyādi˚;)
    vipariyāya + kata, with sound change y → d, viz. ˚āyi → ˚ādi
    Vipariyesa
    1. reversal, contrariness, wrong state Kvu 306 (; three reversals: saññā˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚; or of perception consciousness & views, cp. ; Kvu translation 176) Vb 376 (identical)-˚gāha inverted grasp i.e. holding opposite views or “holding the contrary aim” (B. Commentary Law) Pug 22 Dhs-a 253 (= vipallattha-gāha)
    a contamination form between ˚pariyaya & ˚pallāsa
    Viparivatta
    1. changing or turning round, upset Ja i.344 (lokassa ˚kāle)
    vi + parivatta
    Viparivattati
    1. to turn round, to upset Ja iv.224 (nāvā ˚amānā capsizing) Mil 117 Thag-a 255
    vi + parivattati
    Viparivattana
    neuter
    1. changing, change. reverse Dhs-a 367
    from viparivattati
    Viparīta
    adjective
    1. reversed, changed; equivocal; wrong, upset AN iii.114 (˚dassana); iv.226 (identical); v.284 Thag 2, 393 Ja i.334 Kvu 307 Mil 285 Mil 324 Nett 85 (˚gāha), 126 (˚saññā) Pv-a 244
    • aviparīta unequivocal, certain, distinct, definite. AN v.268 (˚dassana) Mil 214 (˚vacana) Pv-a 231 (= sacca yāthāva)
    past participle of vi + pari + i
    Viparītatā
    feminine
    1. contradistinction Vism 450 (tabbiparītatā)
    abstract from viparīta
    Vipalāvita
    1. made to float, floating, thrown out (into water) Ja iv.259 (reads viplāvitaṁ) = i.326 (reads vipalāvitaṁ, with reading nipalāvitaṁ in Commentary ). The Commentary at Ja iv.259 explains as “uttārita,” so at Ja i.326 as “brought out of water,” fished out = thale ṭhapita, evidently incorrect
    vi + palāvita, past participle of causative of plu
    Vipallattha
    adjective
    1. changed, reversed, upset, deranged corrupt, perverted. Occurs in two forms: vipariyattha Ja v.372 (˚cittaṁ: in poetry); and vipallattha Vism 20 (˚citta: translation “with corrupt thought”; Text spells vipallatta variant reading ˚attha) Dhs-a 253 (˚gāha) Pv-a 212
    = Sanskrit viparyasta, past participle of vi + pari + as ‣See vipallāsa
    Vipallāsa
    1. reversal change (especially in a bad sense), inversion, perversion derangement, corruption, distortion
    • The form vipariyāsa occurs at Vin ii.80 (citta—˚kata, with deranged mind or wrong thoughts) Ja i.344 (where it is explained by vipallāsa). Otherwise vipallāsa, e.g. Snp 299 Ps ii.80 Vism 214 (attha˚); Nett 4, 27, 31, 85 sq., 115 sq. Dhp-a ii.228 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 70
    • There are 3 kinds of vipallāsas viz. saññā˚; perversion of perception, citta˚; of thought diṭṭhi˚; of views AN ii.52 Nett 85; Vism 683 ‣See the same under vipariyesa!
    cp. Sanskrit viparyāsa, vi + pari + as (to throw). The diaeretic Pali form (founded on Sanskrit is vipariyāsa another bastard form is vipariyesa (q.v.)
    Vipallāsayati
    1. to be deceived (about), to distort, to have or give a wrong notion (of) Nett 85
    denominative from vipallāsa
    Vipassaka
    adjective
    1. qualified to win insight, contemplating, gifted with introspection SN ii.232 Ps i.167 Mil 342 Mil 369 393, Vb-a 297
    from vipassati
    Vipassati
    1. to ‣See clearly; to have intuition, to obtain spiritual insight DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke yathābhūtaṁ vipassisuṁ, aorist ) Thag 1, 471 2, 271 (vi passive for ˚passasi) Snp 1115 Ja iii.183 (pabbajitvā vipassitvā arahattaṁ pāpuṇiṁsu)
    2. vi + passati
    Vipassanā
    feminine
    1. inward vision, insight, intuition, introspection DN iii.213 DN iii.273 SN iv.195 SN iv.360 SN v.52 (samatha +) AN i.61 (identical), 95; ii.140, 157 (samatha +); iv.360; v.99 131; Ps i.28, 57 sq., 181; ii.92 sq. Pug 25 Ja i.106 Dhs 55 1356; Nett 7, 42 sq., 50, 82, 88 sq., 125 sq., 160, 191 Mil 16 Vism 2 (with jhāna etc.), 289 (+ samādhi) 628 sq. (the 18 mahā˚) Pv-a 14 (samāhita-citta˚), 167 Vv-a 77 Sdhp 457 Sdhp 466
    1. ˚aṅga constituent of intuition Snp-a 8 (given as “nāmarūpa-pariccheda etc.”)
    2. ˚upekkhā indifference by introspection Vism 162
    3. ˚kammaṭṭhāna exercise for intuition Dhp-a iv.46
    • ˚ñāṇa ability or method of attaining insight Vism 629 Dhp-a iv.30 cp. Compendium 65 sq., where 10 such modes
    • ˚dhura obligation of introspection Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a iv.37f.
    from vi + passati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vipaśyanā, e.g. Divy 44 Divy 95, 264 etc.
    Vipassin
    adjective
    1. gifted with insight, wise AN iv.244 Snp 349 Iti 2 = 7
    from vipassati
    Vipāka
    1. fruit, fruition, product; always in pregnant meaning of “result, effect, consequence (of one’s action),” either as good & meritorious (; kusala or bad & detrimental (; akusala. Hence “retribution kamma˚;), reward or punishment ‣See on term e. g Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation introduction2xciii; Compendium 43. 249
    • DN iii.150 DN iii.160 176 sq. SN i.34 SN i.57 SN i.92 (kammassa); ii.128 (compar vipākatara), 255 (identical); iv.186 sq., 348 sq. AN i.48 AN i.97 (sukha˚, dukkha˚), 134 (kamma˚), 263; ii.34 (agga), 80 112; iii.35, 172 (dānassa), 410 sq. (kāmānaṁ etc.), 436 iv.303 (kamma˚); v.251 Snp 653 (kamma˚); Ps ii.79 (dukkha˚) Pv i.91 i.107 & passim Pug 13 21 Dhs 431 497, 987 Vb 16f. 73, 319, 326 sq., 334 (sukha˚) Kvu 353 sq., 464 (kamma & vipāka); Nett 99, 161 180 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 27 (fourfold), 44, 48, 50, 292 (a˚ & sa˚) 328 sq. (˚tika), 350 sq.; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 17; Vism 177, 454 (fourfold), 456 (˚viññāṇa), 538 (˚paccaya), 545 sq. Vb-a 17 150 sq. (kusala˚ & akusala), 144, 177, 391 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 73 Pv-a 77; Sdhp 12 Sdhp 73 Sdhp 197 Sdhp 235
    from vi + pac
    Vipākatta
    neuter
    1. state of being ripe Pv-a 52
    abstract from vipāka
    Vipāceti

    to become annoyed, to get angry (literally to get heated): this meaning as translation of vi + pac, although not quite correct as pac means to “ripen” and is not ordinarily used of heated conditions. Since the word is not sufficiently cleared up, we refrain from a detailed discussion concerning possible explanations. It may suffice to point out that it occurs only in Vinaya (and in one sporadic passage SN i.232) in standing combination ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti, expressing annoyance or irritation about something; e.g. Vin i.191 Vin ii.85 291; iv.64. The corresponding Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit phrase is avadhyāyati dhriyati to resist, dhṛ

    1. vivācayati, e.g. Divy 492. It is not quite clear which of the two versions is the older one. There may be underlying a misunderstood (dialectical) phrase which was changed by popular analogy. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit phrase seems a priori the more intelligible one; if we take vipāceti = vivāceti, we should translate it as “to speak disparagingly.” Mrs. Rhys Davids at Kindred Sayings i.296 translates as “were vexed and fretted and consumed with indignation “-See remarks under khīyati & cp. ; vipaccatā
    causative of vi + pac, or distorted from vivāceti ?
    Vipāṭeti
    1. to rip or tear open Vin ii.115 - 2. to be destroyed, to fall to pieces (cp. pāṭeti &
    2. passive pāṭiyati in sense of “destroy”) Pv iv.146 (sanghāṭiyo vipātayanti Text; variant readings vināsayati & vidālayati Pv-a 240 explains as
    3. passive vipāḷiyati = vipaṭiyati?

      with variant reading vidāliyati) Ja v.33 (reads: muddhā vipphaleyya sattadhā: perhaps the best reading), 493 (muddhā vipateyya sic

      1. sattadhā) ‣See vipphalati
      vi + pāṭeti
    Vipāḷiyati
    1. ‣See vipāṭeti 2
    Vipiṭṭhi
    1. in phrase vipiṭṭhi-katvā(na) Snp 67 & 362, to turn one’s back on (accusative ), to leave behind, to abandon; cp. piṭṭhito karoti. The explanation at Nd2 580 is pahāna etc.; at Snp-a 119 piṭṭhito katvā
    2. vi + piṭṭhi
    Vipina
    neuter
    1. wood, grove DN i.248 (doubtful; variant readings vijina, vivada, vivana) Ap 51 (variant readings vivana, vicina; Commentary vivana & vipina); Dāvs iv.39 Pv-a 81 (read vicitta!
    cp. * Sanskrit vipina, Halāyudha 2, 55
    Viputta
    adjective
    1. without a son, bereft of his son Ja v.106
    vi + putta
    Vipubbaka
    adjective
    1. full of corruption or matter, festering (said of a dead body). The contemplation (saññā) of a festering corpse is one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas
    • M i.58, 88; iii.91 AN iii.324 As ˚saññā : AN ii.17 AN v.310 Dhs 264 Nett 27 Mil 102 Mil 332 Vism 110, 178, 193
    from vi + pubba1
    Vipula
    adjective
    1. large, extensive, great, abundant. The word is poetical.- DN iii.150 AN i.45 (˚paññatā) Snp 41 Snp 675 Snp 687 Snp 978 Snp 994 Thag 1, 588 Nd1 581 (= adhimatta) Vv 676 (= mahanta Vv-a 290) Ap 40; Pv ii.118; ii.49; ii.969 (= ulāra Pv-a 139) Mil 164 Mil 311 Mil 404 Pv-a 7 Pv-a 76; Sdhp 271
    cp. Sanskrit vipula
    Vippakata
    1. imperfectly executed, left unfinished, interrupted DN i.2 (cp Dhp i.49) Vin ii.172 243, 304; iv.279 AN ii.196 Ja i.120–⁠2. done wrongly Ja v.214
    2. At Vin iv.358 (in Buddhaghosa’s remarks on Pāc. 26, 1) we find vippagatamedhuna as inaccurate spelling for vippakata-methuna (“interrupted intercourse”)
    3. past participle of vippakaroti; vi + pakata
    Vippakaroti
    1. to ill-treat, abuse Vin ii.133 - past participle vippakata
    2. vi + pa + kṛ
    Vippakāra
    1. change, mutation, alteration Ja vi.370 Dhp-a i.28 Vv-a 46
    vi + pakāra
    Vippakiṇṇa
    1. strewn all over, beset with, sprinkled (with) Ja ii.240 Ja vi.42 Dhp-a i.140 DN-a i.40 Vv-a 36
    past participle of vippakirati
    Vippakiṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. the fact of being beset or endowed (with) Vism 8
    abstract from vippakiṇṇa
    Vippakirati
    1. to strew all over Pv-a 92 - 2. to confound, destroy Ja ii.398
    2. past participle vippakiṇṇa
    3. vi + pakirati
    Vippakkamati
    1. to part company, to go away Vin iv.284
    vi + pakkamati
    Vippajahati
    1. to give up, to abandon Snp 817 (infinitive ˚pahātave), 926 (Pot. ˚pajahe); absolutive ˚pahāya Snp 367 Snp 499 Snp 514 Ja i.87
    2. past participle vippahīna
    3. vi + pajahati
    Vippaṭikkula
    adjective
    1. contrary, antagonistic Dhs 1325 = Pug 20
    vi + paṭikkūla
    Vippaṭipajjati
    1. to go astray; figuratively to err, fail; to commit sin Vin iii.166 SN i.73 Ja i.438 past participle vippaṭipanna.
    2. causative vippaṭipādeti
    3. vi + paṭipajjati. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vipratipadyate Divy 293
    Vippaṭipatti
    feminine
    1. wrong way, error, sin Vism 511
    vi + paṭipatti
    Vippaṭipanna
    1. “on the wrong track,” going or gone astray, committing sin Pv iv.159 (˚citta = adhammiyaṁ paṭipadaṁ paṭipanna Pv-a 242)
    past participle of vippaṭipajjati
    Vippaṭipādeti
    1. to cause to commit sin (especially adultery) Vin iii.40
    causative of vippaṭipajjati
    Vippaṭisāra
    1. bad conscience, remorse, regret, repentance Vin ii.250 DN i.138 SN iii.120 SN iii.125 SN iv.46 AN iii.166 AN iii.197 AN iii.353 AN iv.69 Ja iv.12 Ja v.88 Pug 62 Dhp-a iv.42 Vv-a 116 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 60 Pv-a 105 Pv-a 152
    • no regret, no remorse AN iii.46
    vi + paṭisāra
    Vippaṭisārin
    adjective
    1. remorseful, regretful, repentant SN iii.125 SN iv.133, 320 sq., 359 sq. AN iii.165f.; iv.244, 390 Ja i.200 Mil 10 Mil 285 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 321, 346
    from vippaṭisāra; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vipratisārin Divy 322 Divy 638
    Vippataccheti
    1. to scratch open or apart MN i.506
    vi + pa + taccheti
    Vippanaṭṭha
    1. strayed, lost, perished Vv 849 = 8444 (= magga-sammūḷha Vv-a 337) Ja iv.139 v.70; vi.525 Mil 326
    vi + past participle of panassati
    Vippamutta
    1. released, set free, saved SN i.4 SN i.29 SN i.50 SN iii.31 SN iii.83 SN iv.11 AN i.10 AN ii.34 Snp 176 Snp 218 Snp 363 Snp 472 Snp 492 Snp 501 Snp 913 Ja i.84 Vv 204≈2910 Nd1 331 336
    vi + pamutta
    Vippamokkha
    1. release, deliverance SN i.154 Ja v.27
    vi + pamokkha
    Vippayutta
    1. separated SN ii.173 (visaṁyutta +) Snp 914 (or ˚mutta). —˚paccaya the relation of dissociation Tika-Paṭṭhāna 6, 53 sq., 65; Vism 539
    vi + payutta
    Vippayoga
    1. separation Snp 41 Pv-a 161 (piya˚)
    vi + payoga
    Vippalapati
    1. to talk confusedly (as in one’s sleep), to chatter, wail, lament Vin i.15 SN iv.303 Ja i.61 Ja iii.217 Ja iv.167 Dhp-a ii.100 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 93
    vi + palapati
    Vippalambheti
    1. to deceive, mock DN-a i.151 Thag-a 78
    vi + palambheti
    Vippalāpa
    1. confused talk, wailing Ps i.38 Pv-a 18
    vi + palāpa
    Vippalujjati
    1. to be broken up, to be destroyed Nd1 5
    vi + palujjati
    Vippavadati
    1. to dispute, disagree Ja iv.163 Ja vi.267
    vi + pavadati
    Vippavasati
    1. to go from home, to be away from ablative, to be absent Snp 1138 (= apeti apagacchati vinā hoti Nd2 582) Ja iv.51 Ja iv.439 past participle vippavuttha
    2. vi + pavasati
    Vippavāsa
    1. absence; in sati˚; absence of mind, neglect, absentmindedness, thoughtlessness Ja i.410 Snp-a 339
    • thoughtfulness, mindfulness Vin v.216 Snp 1142 Ja iv.92
    vi + pavāsa
    Vippaviddha
    1. pierced through and through Ja i.61
    past participle of vippavijjhati, vi + pa + vyadh
    Vippavuttha
    1. absent; ˚sati neglectful Dhp-a i.239
    past participle of vippavasati
    Vippasanna
    adjective
    1. (quite) purified, clear; happy, bright, pure, sinless Vin iii.88 (˚chavivaṇṇa) SN i.32 (cetas); iii.2, 235; iv.118, 294; v.301 AN iii.41 236 Snp 637 Dhp 82 Dhp 413 (= pasanna-citta Dhp-a iv.192) Pv i.1010 (= suṭṭhu pasanna); ii.935; Vism 262 (where Kp-a reads pasanna only) Dhp-a ii.127 DN-a i.221
    vi + pasanna
    Vippasādeti
    1. to purify, cleanse Snp 506
    causative of vippasīdati
    Vippasīdati
    1. to become bright; figuratively to be reconciled or pleased, to be satisfied or happy Dhp 82 Ja i.51 Pv-a 122 (mukha-vaṇṇa). causative vippasādeti
    2. vi + pasīdati
    Vippasukkhati
    1. to dry up entirely Ja v.106
    vi + pa + sukkhati
    Vippahāna
    neuter
    1. leaving, abandoning, giving up SN i.39 = Sn 1109 Snp 1097 Ja vi.260 Mil 181
    vi + pahāna
    Vippahita
    neuter
    1. sending out in all directions, message Ja iii.386 (dūta˚)
    vi + pahita2
    Vippahīna
    1. given up, abandoned SN i.99 AN v.16 AN v.29f. Snp 360 Snp 362
    past participle of vippajahati
    Vippita
    1. at Ja vi.185 is to be read cipiṭa (“flat”)
    Vipphandati
    1. [vi + phandati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vispandati Jtm 11 to twitch, writhe, struggle Vv 5216 (5214 Ha.) Ja iv.495- past participle vipphandita.

    Vipphandita
    neuter
    1. “writhing,” twitching, struggle MN i.446 SN ii.62 -(figuratively) in diṭṭhi˚ combined with visūkāyita “scuffling of opinion” (Mrs Rhys Davids), sceptical agitation, worry & writhing (cp; Dialogues of the Buddha i.53) MN i.8 MN i.486 SN i.123 (here without diṭṭhi˚ the Commentary explanation is “hatthirājavaṇṇa sappavaṇṇ’ ādidassa nāni” Kindred Sayings i.320) Dhs 381 Pug 22
    past participle of vipphandati
    Vipphala
    1. (or is it pipphala ?) = phala at Ja vi.518
    Vipphalati
    intranstitive to split open, to burst asunder: so read at Ja v.33 Ja v.493 (for vipatati); Pv iv.146 (for vipāteti) ‣See detail under vipāṭeti. vi + phalati
    Vipphāra
    1. diffusion, pervasion, adjective pervading, spreading out AN i.171 (vitakka-vip phāra-sadda, cp. Kvu translation 241), 206 (mahājutika mahā vipphāra); iv.252; Ps i.112 sq.; ii.174 Ja iii.12 (mahā + mahājutika); v.150 (identical) Mil 230 & 270 (vacī; dilating in talk), 130, 346; Vism 42 DN-a i.192 Vv-a 103 (mahā˚ + mahājutika) Pv-a 178 (karuṇā˚)
    from vi + pharati.1 or 2
    Vipphāravant
    adjective
    1. possessing vibration Dhs-a 115 = Vism 142
    from vipphāra, cp. pharati.1 & vipphurati
    Vipphārika
    adjective
    1. spreading out (in effulgence) Vv-a 5 (mahā˚)
    from vi + pharati.2
    Vipphārita
    1. expanded Dāvs v.34 (˚akkhi-yugala, both eyes wide open)
    past participle of causative vi + pharati
    Vipphālita
    adjective
    1. split open, cut to pieces Pv-a 152 (su˚; so read for vipphalita); Sdhp 188 (˚anga)
    vi + phālita 2
    Vipphāleti
    1. to expand, to bend or draw the bow Ja vi.580
    vi + sphar : cp. phālita 1. It is not = vi + phāleti
    Vipphuraṇa
    neuter
    1. spreading out, effulgence, pervasion Vv-a 277
    vi + phuraṇa = pharaṇa
    Vipphurati
    1. to vibrate, tremble, quiver, fly asunder, diffuse Ja i.51 Snp-a 225 Vv-a 12 (vijjotamāna vipphurato)
    vi + phurati ‣See pharati
    Vipphoṭita
    adjective
    1. burst open (of a boil) Thag 1, 306
    vi + phoṭita ‣See phoṭa, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit visphoṭa open Divy 603
    Viphala
    adjective
    1. fruitless, useless Sdhp 527
    vi + phala
    Vibandha
    1. fetter Pv-a 207
    vi + bandha
    Vibandhana
    neuter
    1. = vibandha Thag-a 243
    vi + bandhana
    Vibādhaka
    adjective
    1. doing harm to (—˚), injuring, preventing Dāvs ii.88
    from vibādha
    Vibādhati
    1. to oppress, harm Mil 135 (so read for ˚bhādati) Dhs-a 42 passive vibādhiyati to be oppressed Pv-a 239
    2. vi + bādhati
    Vibbedha
    1. circumference Ja i.212
    from vi + vyadh after analogy of ubbedha; not vi + bheda
    Vibbhanta
    1. roaming, straying; strayed, confused MN i.171 (padhāna˚ giving up exertion), 247 (identical). Usually in phrase ˚citta with wandering (or confused) mind SN i.61 ‣See explanation of Commentary at Kindred Sayings i.321 204; iii.93; v.269 AN i.70 AN ii.30 AN iii.391 Iti 90 Ja iv.459 (+ kupit’ indriya) Mil 324
    2. At Dhs-a 260 we find the compound vibbhanti-bhāva vibbhanta in compound with bhu!
      1. of citta, in meaning “wavering, roaming (of mind): so read for vibhatti-bhāva
      past participle of vibbhamati
    Vibbhantaka
    adjective
    1. straying away from (—˚), confused Vism 187 (jhāna˚), 429
    2. (a bhikkhu) who has forsaken the Order, apostate Vin ii.60
    vibbhanta + ka
    Vibbhamati
    1. to wander about, to go astray, to forsake the Order Vin i.72 Vin ii.14 Vin iii.40 (may be taken in the sense of enjoying oneself or sporting, i.e. cohabiting, at this passage), iv.216 Ja i.117 Ja iii.462 (of a bhikkhu enticed by his former wife), 496. past participle vibbhanta
    2. vi + bhamati
    Vibhaṅga
    1. distribution, division, distinction, classification Vin i.359 Snp 600 (jāti classification of species; explained as jāti-vitthāra at Snp-a 464) Ja iv.361 (+ vicaya; Commentary explains as vibhāga; Mhvs 30, 87 (dhātu˚ distribution of relics) Snp-a 422 (contrasted with uddesa
    • Vibhanga is the title of the second book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka ‣See Pāli Name Dictionary. cp. Sutta-vibhanga
    vi + bhanga, of bhaj1
    Vibhajati
    1. (literally) to distribute, divide; (figuratively) to distinguish, dissect, divide up, classify; to deal with something in detail, to go into details MN iii.223 SN ii.2 SN ii.255 (vibhājeti) = M i.364 (reads virājeti) SN iv.93 (atthaṁ); v.261 (dhammaṁ vivarati vibhajati uttāni-karoti) Snp 87 Pug 41 Vb 259 Mil 145 Snp-a 237 DN-a i.104 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 111. absolutive vibhajja (q.v.)
    2. past participle vibhatta
    3. vi + bhajati, i.e. bhaj1, as in bhājeti
    Vibhajana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. distinction, division, going into detail Nett 5, 8 sq., 38 (+ vivaraṇā uttāni-kammatā); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 10 Snp-a 445 (vivaraṇa, v. uttāni-karaṇa) Dhs-a 343 344. cp. vibhājana
      from vibhajati
    Vibhajja
    adverb
    1. dividing, analysing, detailing; in detail (˚-) DN iii.229 (˚vyākaraṇīya pañha “discriminating reply” translation) AN ii.46 (˚vacana analysis)-˚vāda the Vibhajja doctrine, i.e. the doctrine which analyses, or the “religion of logic or reason”; a term identical with theravāda, the doctrine of the Elders i.e. the original teaching of the Buddhist church —˚vādin one who teaches the V. doctrine, epithet of the Buddha Mhvs 5, 271; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 366 Vb-a 130 cp. Kvu translation introduction p. 38
    absolutive of vibhajati
    Vibhatta
    adjective
    1. (literally) divided, distributed; parted, partitioned, having divisions, portioned off Snp 300 Pv i.1013 (of niraya) Ja v.266 (identical) Mil 316 (a˚ samudda)
    2. su˚ well divided, well planned proportioned, regular Snp 305 Pv iii.221 Mil 330 Mil 345 Vism 108
    3. (figuratively) detailed, explained, analysed Vism 187 Snp-a 288 Pv-a 104
    past participle of vibhajati
    Vibhattavant
    adjective
    1. full of details, giving all detail Vism 212 DN-a i.34
    from vibhatta
    Vibhatti
    feminine
    1. division, distinction, classification, detail, variety Ja vi.432 (of paintings); Nett 1 sq., 105 Mil 102 Mil 381 Vism 352 (contrasted with sankhepa) Pv-a 199 Pv-a 282 (rūpa˚ various forms, patterns)
    2. (technical term in grammar) inflection of nouns & verbs, declensions conjugation Snp-a 397 Vv-a 78 199. —˚lopa omission of inflection Vv-a 174 192 Pv-a 147
    3. Note. vibhattibhāva at Dhs-a 260 is to be read as vibbhanti˚ ‣See under vibbhanta
    from vibhajati
    Vibhattika
    adjective
    1. having divisions; (figuratively) detailed. negative ; not giving details Vv-a 164
    from vibhatti
    Vibhava
    1. power, wealth, prosperity DN-a i.147 Ja i.56 Ja v.285 Mhvs 26, 6 Dhp-a i.6 Dhp-a ii.9 84 iv.7 Vv-a 5 302 (˚sampanna rich) Pv-a 122 Pv-a 130 Pv-a 176 196. Great wealth is expressed by asīti-koṭi-vibhava consisting in 80 koṭis, e.g. Dhp-a i.367 Dhp-a ii.25
    2. bahu˚ very rich Ja i.145
    3. mahā˚ identical Pv-a 97 Pv-a 107
    4. yathā vibhavaṁ according to one’s means or power Pv-a 54
    5. vibhav’ ānurūpaṁ identical Vv-a 254
    6. non-existence cessation of life, annihilation DN i.34 Snp 514 (+ bhava) 867 (identical) Nd1 274 282 Ja iii.402 (˚ṁ gata = vināsaṁ patta Commentary ); v.267 (identical) Dhs-a 392 DN-a i.120 Vb-a 505 (= bhava-vigama) ‣See also taṇhā B 1
      1. ˚taṇhā “craving for life to end” (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.208), desire for non-existence DN iii,216, 275 Vin i.10 Ud 33 Iti 50 Vb-a 111
      • ˚diṭṭhi the theory of non-becoming DN iii.212 AN i.83 Nd1 245 274
      vi + bhava
    Vibhavati
    1. to cease to exist SN iii.56 (future ˚issati) Snp 873 (vibhoti) Nd1 279 (identical).
    2. past participle vibhūta
    3. vi + bhavati
    Vibhassikata
    neuter
    1. gossip, literally “made into talk” Vin iv.241
    vi + bhassa + kata
    Vibhāga
    1. distribution, division; detailing, classification Ja iv.361 Vism 494 Vb-a 83 Thag-a 100 Vv-a 37 Pv-a 122-attha˚ detailing of meaning Vism 569; dhātu˚; distribution of relics Vv-a 297 Pv-a 212
    • pada˚ division of words Snp-a 269 Pv-a 34

      • cp. saṁ˚
      from vibhajati, cp. vibhanga & vibhajana
    Vibhājana
    neuter
    1. distribution, division Dhtp 92, 561; Dhtm 776, 787
    vi + bhājana2
    Vibhāta
    1. shining, turned to light, bright; in phrase vibhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. at daybreak or dawn (Dhp-a iv.105 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 22). neuter daybreak, dawn Dhp-a ii.5 (˚khaṇe)
    2. past participle of vibhāti
    Vibhāti
    1. to shine forth, to be or become light (said of the night turning into day); pres. also vibhāyati Vin i.78 future vibhāyissati DN ii.148
    2. aorist vibhāyi Ja v.354
    3. past participle vibhāta
    4. vi + bhāti
    Vibhādati
    1. at Mil 135 should be read at vibādhati
    Vibhāyana
    neuter
    1. shining forth, brightening Vv-a 148
    from vibhāti
    Vibhāvana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. making clear, ascertainment, explanation, exposition Ja iii.389 Vb 342 343 (ā); Snp-a 13, 261 sq., 318 Vb-a 409 (ā) Thag-a 76 (ā), 230 Pv-a 137 Pv-a 140 (so read for vibhavanā in attha˚)
      2. annihilation, disappearance, making non-existing (cp. vibhava 2) Dhs-a 163 (vibhāvanā nāma antara-dhāpanā ti attho)
      from vibhāveti
    Vibhāvaniya
    adjective
    1. pertaining to ascertainment, making clear, explaining Pv-a 244 (paramattha˚)
    from vibhāvana
    Vibhāvita
    1. made non-existing, annihilated Nd2 584
    past participle of vibhāveti
    Vibhāvin
    adjective
    1. intelligent, wise Snp 317 Ja vi.304 Nd2 259 (= medhāvin) Mil 21 Mil 276 Mil 346 Sdhp 382
    from vibhāveti
    Vibhāveti
    1. to understand clearly (literally “to produce intensively or well”) Snp 318 (
    2. absolutive a-vibhāvayitvā)
    3. to make clear, to explain Kp-a 89 Snp-a 406 472 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 70 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 135
    4. to put out of existence to annihilate as causative of vibhava 2
      1. Dhs-a 163 past participle vibhāvita
      2. vi + bhāveti
    Vibhāsita
    1. illuminated, made bright, shining forth Sdhp 591
    past participle causative of vi + bhāsati2
    Vibhinna
    adjective
    1. scattered; divided, at variance Snp 314 (= aññam-aññaṁ bhinna Snp-a 324)
    vi + bhinna
    Vibhītaka
    (& ˚ṭaka)
    1. the plant Terminalia belerica; beleric myrobolan. Dice were made from its fruits, which are also used as medicine (intoxicant); its flowers smell vilely
    • Vin i.201 Ja iii.161 Ja v.363 Ja vi.529
    cp. * Sanskrit vibhīta & ˚ka
    Vibhūta
    adjective
    1. cp. bhūta 1, & vibhava 2
      1. destroyed, annihilated, being without Thag 1, 715 Snp 871f. 1113 (= vibhāvita atikkanta vītivatta Nd2 584)
      • cp. bhūta 3
      1. false Snp 664
      • cp. vibhāveti.2
      1. clear, distinct. AN v.325 Mil 311 Abdhs 16 (a˚ unclear); Vism 112 (& a˚); —˚ṁ karoti to explain Mil 308
      past participle of vibhavati, or vi + bhūta
    Vibhūti
    feminine
    1. cp. vibhūta 2
      1. destruction, ruin Thag 1, 1018 (˚nandin = malign)
      • cp vibhava 1
      1. splendour, majesty, glory Ja v.305 Pv-a 133 (dāna˚), 216 (rāja˚)
      from vi + bhavati
    Vibhūsana
    neuter
    1. adornment AN i.212 AN ii.40 AN ii.145 AN ii.209 Snp 59 (cp. Nd2 585) Pug 21 58 Ja i.8 Dhs 1348 Mil 382
    vi + bhūsana
    Vibhūsā
    feminine
    1. ornament, decoration, distinction, pride Snp 926 Nd1 380 Nd2 585 Mil 224 (Rhys Davids translates “dexterity,” hardly correct. Should we read “vibhūti"?)
    vi + bhūsā
    Vibhūsita
    1. adorned, decorated Mhvs 25, 102; Vism 10 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 157
    past participle of vibhūseti
    Vibhūseti
    1. to adorn, embellish, beautify Thag 2, 411 Mhvs 19, 25 Dhp-a i.77 past participle vibhūsita
    2. vi + bhūseti
    Vibheti
    1. to be afraid, to stand in awe of Ja v.509 (= bhāyati Commentary ). Should we read bibheti?
    vi + bhāyati
    Vibhedaka
    1. one who disturbs friendship, a slanderer Ja iii.260
    vi + bhedaka
    Vibhedika
    feminine
    1. the palmyra tree Ja vi.529
    from vi + bhid
    Vibhedeti
    1. to cause disruption, to slander. AN v.345f.
    vi + bhedeti
    Vimajjana
    neuter
    1. making smooth, polishing MN i.385
    from vi + majjati2
    Vimaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. smoothed, soft, smooth, polished Ja v.96 (˚ābharana), (Commentary explains as “visāla”) 204, 400 (of ornaments)
    • ubhato-bhāga˚ polished or smooth on both sides MN i.385 AN v.61 = MN ii.13 (has ˚maddha)
    vi + maṭṭha
    Vimata
    adjective
    1. perplexed, in doubt Ja v.340
    from vi + man
    Vimati
    feminine
    1. doubt, perplexity, consternation DN i.105 SN iv.327 AN ii.79 AN ii.185 Ap 29 Dhs 425 Ja iii.522 Mil 119 Mil 144 Mil 339 DN-a i.274
    vi + mati
    Vimada
    adjective
    1. disintoxicated, without conceit Ja v.158 (taken as “unconscious” by Commentary )
    vi + mada
    Vimaddana
    neuter
    1. crushing, destroying Vv-a 232
    vi + maddana
    Vimana
    adjective
    1. perplexed, consternated Mil 23 Mil 118 Pv-a 274
    2. infatuate Thag 2, 380 3. distracted, distressed Thag 1, 1051 Ja vi.523
    vi + mano
    Vimariyādikata
    adjective
    1. literally made unrestricted, i.e. delivered, set free SN ii.173 SN iii.31 (vippamutto ˚ena cetasā viharati); vi.11 AN v.151 sq-At Thag 1, 184 variant reading for vipariyādi˚;
    vi + mariyādā + kata
    Vimala
    adjective
    1. without stains, spotless, unstained, clean, pure AN iv.340 Snp 378 Snp 476 Snp 519 Snp 637 Snp 1131 (cp. Nd2 586) Ja i.18 Mil 324 Dhp-a iv.192
    vi + mala
    Vimalayaka
    1. a certain precious stone of dark-blue colour Vv-a 111
    cp. Sanskrit vimalaka
    Vimāna1
    neuter
    1. literally covering a certain space, measuring; the definitions given by Dhammapāla refer it to “without measure,” i.e. immeasurable. Thus = vigata-māne appamāṇe mahanta vara-pāsāda Vv-a 131 = visiṭṭhamānaṁ, pamāṇato mahantaṁ Vv-a 160
    • Applied meaning: heavenly (magic) palace, a kind of paradise elysium
    1. -1. General remarks: (a) The notion of the vimāna is peculiar to the later, fantastic parts of the Canon, based on popular superstition (Vimāna & Peta Vatthu, Apadāna, Jātaka and similar fairy tales). It shows distinct traces of foreign (Hellenic-Babylonian influence and rests partly on tales of sea-faring merchants (cp. location of V. in mid-ocean). On the other hand it represents the old (Vedic); ratha as chariot of the gods to be driven at will (cp. below 5, 7, 8). Thus at Vv.16 (here as 500 chariots!), 36, 63, 64 Ja i.59 (deva-vimānasadisa ratha)
    • (b) The vimānas are in remote parts of the world (cp. the island of the blessed), similar to the elysium in Homer’s Odyssey, e.g. iv.563 sq.: etc. (translation G. Chapman: “the immortal ends of all the earth, the fields Elysian Fate to thee will give; where Rhadamanthus rules, and where men live a nevertroubled life, where snow, nor show'rs, nor irksome winter spends his fruitless pow'rs, but from the ocean zephyr still resumes a constant breath, that all the fields perfume”). cp. Ehni, Yama p. 206 sq
    • (c) In popular religion the influence of this eschatological literature has been very great, so great in fact as to make the Vimāna and Peta-vatthus & the Jātakastories exemplifying the theory of retribution as appealing to an ordinary mind by vivid examples of mythology, greater favourites than any other canonical; book. From this point of view we have to judge Mhvs 14, 58: Petavatthuṁ Vimānañ ca sacca-saṁyuttaṁ eva ca desesi thero …
    • The descriptions of the Vimānas are in the most exuberant terms. The palaces (kingdoms in miniature) are of gold, crystal or exquisite jewels, their pillars are studded with gems their glittering roofs are peaked with 700 pinnacled turrets (Vv-a 244 289; also as “innumerable” Vv-a 188 or 18,000 Ap. 63). Surrounded are these towering (ucca) mansions by lovely, well-planned gardens, the paths of which are sprinkled with gold dust; they are full of wishing-trees, granting every desire. There is a variety of stately trees, bearing heavenly flowers fruit, swaying gently in delicious breezes. Lotus ponds with cool waters invite to refreshing baths; a host of birds mix their songs with the strains of cymbals and lutes, played by heavenly musicians. Angelic maidens perform their dances, filling the atmosphere with a radiant light which shines from their bodies. Peace and happiness reign everywhere, the joys of such a vimāna cannot be expressed in words. This elysium lasts for aeons (cira-ṭṭhitika Vv 801 kappa-ṭṭhāyin Thag 1, 1190) in short it is the most heavenly paradise which can be imagined
    • For a monograph of vimāna the Vimāna Vatthu and its Commentary should in the first place be consulted

  • The inhabitants of the Vimānas are usually happy persons (or yakkhas: ‣See Stede, P. V. translation 39

    1. -41), called devatā, who have attained to such an exalted state through their own merit (puñña ‣See following 4)
    • Departed souls who have gone through the Petastage are frequently such devas (at Vv 172 called pubbadevatā). That these are liable to semi-punishment and semi-enjoyment is often emphasized, and is founded on the character of their respective kamma: Ja i.240 (vimāna-petiyo sattāhaṁ sukhaṁ anubhavanti, sattāhaṁ dukkhaṁ) Ja v.2 (vemānika-peta-bhavena-kammassa sarikkhako vipāko ahosi; i.e. by night pleasures; by day tortures); cp. Pv ii.12 ‣See Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu p. 106, iii.78 Pv-a 204 Pv-a 210 & Divy p. 9. Expressions for these “mixed” devatās who are partly blessed, partly cursed are e.g.: vimānapeta Pv-a 145 Pv-a 148 Pv-a 271 Pv-a 275;
    • feminine vimāna-petī Pv-a 152 Pv-a 160 Pv-a 186 Pv-a 190; vimāna devatā Pv-a 190
    • vemānika-peta Ja v.2 Pv-a 244 Dhp-a iii.192 (as powerful, by the side of nāgas & supaṇṇas)
    • In their appearance they are like beautiful human beings, dressed in yellowish (pīta, explained as “golden” robes (cp. the angels in the oldest Christian apocalyptic literature: on their relation to Hellenic ideas ‣See e.g. A. Dieterich, Nekyia, Leipzig 1903, past participle 10
    1. -18, 29: red & white the colours of the land of the blessed), with gold and silver as complementary outfit in person and surroundings Thus throughout the Vimāna Vatthu, especially Nos, 36 47 (pīta-vimāna). Their splendour is often likened to that of the moon or of the morning star
    • ; Origin of Vimānas. AN vimāna arises in the “other world (paraloka) at the instant of somebody doing good (even during the lifetime of the doer) and waits for the entry of the owner: Dhp-a iii.291f. In the description of the vimāna of the nāga-king (J vi.315 = Vv 8422) it is said on this subject: a vimāna is obtained neither without a cause (adhicca), nor has it arisen in the change of the seasons, nor is it self-made (sayankata), nor given by the gods, but “sakehi kammehi apāpakehi puññehi laddha” (i.e. won by one’s own sinless & meritorious deeds)
    • Entering the Vimāna-paradise is, analogous to all semi-lethal passing over into enchanted conditions in fairy tales, compared with the awakening from sleep (as in a state of trance): sutta-ppabuddha Dhp-a; iii.7 Of the Vimāna itself it is said that it appears (pātur ahosi), e.g. Vv-a 188 Dhp-a i.131 or arises (uggañchi Dhp-a iii.291 Vv-a 221

  • Location of the Vimānas The “vimāna” is an individual paradisiacal state Therefore vimānas are not definitely located “Elysian Fields.” They are anywhere (in this world as well as in the Beyond), but certain places are more favourable for their establishment than others. Thus we may state that they are found in the neighbourhood of water. Thus either in the Ocean (majjhe sāgarasmiṁ Thag 1, 1190 samudda-majjhe Pv-a 47), where access is possible only through adventures after shipwreck or similar causes (J. iv.1 sq.; Pv iv.11); or at one or the other of the great lakes of the Himavant (Pv ii.12). They are in out-of-the-way places (“end of the world”); they are also found in the wilderness: Vv.84; Pv iv.32. As tree-vimānas with rukkha-devatā as inhabitants they occur e.g. at Ja iii.310 Ja v.502 Pv i.9; ii.9 Pv-a 244 Very often they are phantasmagorical castles in the air. By special power of their inhabitants they may be transported to any place at will. This faculty of transference is combined with the ability of extremely swift motion (compared to the speed of thought: manojava). Thus a golden palanquin is suspended in mid-air above a palace at Vv-a 6 (ākāsa-cārin, sīgha-java). They are said to be ākāsaṭṭhānāni Ja vi.117 Snp-a 222 370 (but the palace of the Yakkha Āḷavaka is bhumma-ṭṭha, i.e. stands on the ground, and is described as fortified: Snp-a 222) The place of a (flying) vimāna may be taken by various conveyances: a chair, an elephant, ship, bed, litter etc. Or the location of it in the other world is in the Cittalatāvana (Vv.37), or the Pāricchattaka tree (Vv.38), or in the Cātummahārājika-bhavana (Vv-a 331)-Later on, when the theory of meritorious deities (or departed souls raised to special rank) as vemānikā devā was established, their abode was with their vimānas settled among the Tāvatiṁsa (e.g. Vv-a 188 217, 221 244, 289 Dhp-a iii.291), or in the Tusita heaven. Thus Tusita-pura interchanges with Tusita-vimāna at Dhp-a ii.208 The latter occurs e.g. at Dhp-a iii.173 219. 6. The dimensions of the Vimānas are of course enormous but harmonious (being “divine”), i.e. either of equal extent in all directions, or specially proportioned with significant numbers. Of these the following may be mentioned. The typical numbers of greatest frequency are 12, 16, 30, 700, in connection with yojana. The dimensions, with reference to which 12 & 16 are used, are length, width, height, & girth, whereas 700 applies usually to the height (Dhp-a; iii.291 e.g., where it is said to be “over 700”), and the number of turrets ‣See above 2. At Vv-a 267 (satta-yojana-pamāṇo ratho) No. 7 is used for 700; No. 30 (extent) is found e.g. at Dhp-a iii.7 Thag-a 55 No. 12 e.g. at Ja vi.116 Dhp-a iii.291 Vv-a 6 217, 221, 244, 246, 291 sq.; No. 16 at Vv-a 188 289.

    • Vimānas of sun and moon. AN peculiar (late?) idea is that sun and moon have their vimānas (cp. Vedic ratha = sun). There are only very few passages in the post-canonical books mentioning these The idea that the celestial bodies are vimānas (“immense chariots in the shape of open hemispheres” Kirfel Kosmographie der Inder p. 282) is essentially Jainistic ‣See on Jain Vimānas in general Kirfel, loc. cit. pp. 7

  • 292

    1. -300
    • In the Pāli Commentary we find Snp-a 187 188 (canda-vimānaṁ bhinditvā = breaking up the moon’s palace, i.e. the moon itself); and Dhp-a iii.99 (candimasuriyā vimānāni gahetvā aṭṭhaṁsu)
    • Other terms for vimāna, and specifications. Var. other expressions are used more frequently for vimāna in general. Among these are ratha ‣See above 1 a; nagara (Pv ii.125) pura ‣See above 5, as tusita˚; pāsāda; either as dibba˚ (Dhp-a iii.291), or vara˚; (Vv-a 130), or vimāna˚; (Vv 3110)
    • The vimānas are specified as deva-vimāna “heavenly palace,” e.g. Ja i.59 Vism 342 Vv-a 173 or (in a still more superlative expression) brahmavimāna i.e. best or most excellent magic palace, highest paradise, e.g. DN i.17 (here perhaps “palace of Brahmā”) iii.28 (“abode of brahmās” Rhys Davids) Iti 15 Vism 108 The latter expression is abbreviated to brahma (
    • neuter “highest, best thing of all,” “summum bonum,” paradise magic palace: Thag-a 47 (Ap. v.6) & 55 (Ap; v.8), at both places as sukataṁ, i.e. well made
    • A rather odd expression for the paradisiacal state (in concrete form) is attabhāva (existence) instead of vimāna, e.g. Dhp-a i.131 (tigāvuta-ppamāṇa); iii.7 (identical)

  • Various. Of innumerable passages in the books mentioned above (under 1) only the following may be given for reference: Ja iii.310 398, 405; v.165, 171; vi.117 sq., 120 sq.; Ap 35, 55 59; Dāvs iv.54 (acalaṁ v. antalikkhamhi nāvaṁ gativirahitaṁ ambhorāsi-majjhamhi disvā); and Vimāna Vatthu throughout. Of passages in the 4 older Nikāyas we have only AN ii.33 (ye devā dīgh’ āyukā uccesu vimānesu cira-ṭṭhitikā). At SN i.12 = 23 we should read “na ca mānaṁ” for “na vimānaṁ” (Kindred Sayings i.18).

    in the Pāli meaning not Vedic. Found in meaning “palace-chariot” in the Mbhārata and elsewhere in Epic Sanskrit
  • Vimāna2
    1. disrespect, contempt Snp 887 (˚dassin showing contempt)
    vi + māna
    Vimānana
    neuter
    1. disrespect, contempt DN iii.190 (a˚) Mil 377 Mil 386
    vi + mānana
    Vimānita
    1. treated with contempt AN iii.158 AN iii.160
    past participle of vimāneti
    Vimāneti
    1. to disrespect, to treat with contempt Vin ii.260 Snp 888 Nd1 297. past participle vimānita
    2. vi + māneti
    Vimukha
    adjective
    1. turning away from, averted, neglectful Mhvs 22, 80 Pv-a 3 (dhamma-saññā˚), 269 (carita˚)
    vi + mukha
    Vimuccati
    1. to be released, to be free (of passion), to be emancipated MN i.352 SN ii.94 SN ii.124 SN iii.46 SN iii.189 SN iv.86 SN v.218 AN iv.126f. 135, 179 Snp 755 Pug 61 68; Sdhp 613. aorist 3rd
    2. plural vimucciṁsu Snp p. 149.
    3. past participle vimutta ‣See also (an)upādā & (an)upādāya; .
    4. causative vimoceti to cause to be released or emancipated, to set free AN ii.196 (cittaṁ) Vin iii.70 (identical).
    5. gerundive vimocanīya AN ii.196
    6. vi + muccati, passive of muñcati
    Vimutta
    1. freed, released, intellectually emancipated Vin i.8 AN iv.75 AN iv.179 AN iv.340 AN v.29 DN iii.97 100, 133, 258 SN i.23 SN i.35 SN iii.13 SN iii.53 SN iii.137 Snp 354 Snp 475 Snp 522 Snp 877 Snp 1071 sq., 1101, 1114 Nd1 283 Nd2 587 Pv iv.132 (arahā +); Vism 410
    • Often as cittaṁ v an emancipated heart, e.g. DN i.80 AN iii.21 SN i.46 SN i.141 SN iii.90 SN iv.164 SN v.157 (here taken by Mrs. Rhys Davids at SN vi.93 Index, as “unregulated, distrait”) Snp 975 Nd1 284 Vb 197
    • ubhatobhāga˚ emancipated in both ways ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.70 DN ii.71 DN iii.105 DN iii.253 SN i.191 AN i.73 AN iv.10 AN iv.77 AN iv.453 AN v.23 MN i.439 MN i.477 sq
    • paññā˚ emancipated by insight, freed by reason ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.68 SN i.191 SN ii.123 DN ii.70 DN iii.105 DN iii.254 MN i.439 MN i.477-saddhā˚; freed by faith AN i.73 AN iv.10 AN iv.77 AN v.23 Ps ii.52 MN i.439 MN i.477
    • anupādā vimutta freed without any further clinging to the world MN i.486 SN ii.18 SN iii.59 SN iv.83 and passim
    1. ˚atta having an emancipated self SN iii.46 SN iii.55 SN iii.58 AN iv.428
    • ˚āyatana point or occasion of emancipation of which there are 5, viz. hearing the Dhamma taught by the Master, teaching it oneself, reciting it, pondering over it, understanding it AN iii.21f. DN iii.241 DN iii.279 Ps i.5
    past participle of vimuñcati
    Vimutti
    feminine
    1. release, deliverance, emancipation DN i.174 DN iii.288 SN v.206f. (abhijānāti), 222 (ariya˚), 266, 356 AN ii.247 AN iii.165 (yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti), 242, Snp 54 Snp 73 Snp 725f. Ja i.77 Ja i.78 Ja i.80 Ps i.22 ii.143 sq. Nd1 21 Pug 27 54 sq. Vb 86 272 sq. 392 (micchā˚) Nett 29; Vism 410; Sdhp 614
    • ceto (& paññā˚); emancipation of heart (and reason) DN i.156 iii.78, 108, 247 sq., 273 SN i.120 SN ii.214 SN iv.119f.v.118 sq., 289 sq. AN i.123f. 220 sq.; 243; ii.36, 87 214; iii.20, 131, 400; iv.83, 314 sq.; v.10 sq. Vb 344 Nett 40, 43, 81 sq., 127
    • sammā˚ right or true emancipation AN ii.222f.; v.327; Ps i.107; ii.173
    • ‣ See also arahatta, upekkhā, khandha ii.A, dassana, phala mettā
    1. ˚rasa the essence of emancipation AN i.36 AN iv.203 Pv-a 287
    • ˚sāra substance or essence of emancipation AN ii.141 AN ii.243 AN iv.385
    from vimuccati
    Vimokkha
    1. (& Vimokha)

    deliverance, release, emancipation, dissociation from the things of the world, Arahantship DN ii.70 DN ii.111) iii.34, 35, 230, 288 MN i.196 (samaya˚ & asamaya˚) SN i.159 (cetaso v.); ii.53, 123; iii.121; iv.33 AN ii.87 iv.316; v.11 Vin v.164 (cittassa) Snp 1071 (which Nd2 588 explains as “agga” etc., thus strangely taking it in meaning of mokkha2, perhaps as edifying etymology) Nd2 466 (in explanation of Bhagavā); Ps i.22; ii.35 (as 68!), 243 Pug 11f. Vb 342 Dhs 248 Nett 90, 100, 119, 126 Vism 13, 668 sq. Mil 159 Pv-a 98 Sdhp 34 Sdhp 264. The three vimokkhas are: suññato v., animitto v. appaṇihito v. Ps ii.35; Vism 658. The eight vimokkhas or stages of emancipation, are: the condition of rūpī, arūpa-saññī, recognition of subha, realization of ākāsānañc'āyatana, of viññāṇ'ānañc'āyatana ākiñcaññ'āyatana, neva-saññā-n'āsaññ'āyatana, saññāvedayita-nirodha DN iii.262 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.242), AN i.40 iv.306 Vb 342 explained in detail at Ps ii.38–⁠40. cp Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit aṣṭau vimokṣāḥ, e.g. Avs ii.69, 153.

    1. -In sequence jhāna vimokkha samādhi samāpatti (magga phala) at Vin i.97 104; iii.91; iv.25 AN iii.417 AN iii.419 v.34, 38 Vb 342
    • ‣ See also jhāna
    from vi + muc, cp. mokkha1
    Vimocana
    neuter
    1. letting loose, discharging Dhtm 216 (assu˚)
    2. release from, doing away with Mhvs 35, 73 (antarāya˚)
    vi + mocana
    Vimoceti
    1. ‣See vimuccati
    Vimohita
    1. deluded, bewildered Sdhp 363
    past participle of vi + moheti
    Vimba
    1. is another spelling for bimba at SN v.217 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vimbaka (form of face) Divy 172 Divy 525
    Vimhaya
    1. astonishment, surprise, disappointment Ja v.69 (in explanation of vyamhita) Mhvs 5, 92 Snp-a 42 (explaining “vata”), 256 (do. for “ve” = aho) DN-a i.43 Vv-a 234 329
    cp. Sanskrit vismaya, vi + smi
    Vimhāpaka
    adjective
    1. deceiving, dismaying Snp-a 549 (= kuhaka)
    from vimhāpati
    Vimhāpana
    neuter
    1. dismaying, deceiving, disappointing Vism 24 (in explanation of kuhana); Dhtp 633 (identical)
    from vimhāpeti
    Vimhāpeti
    1. to astonish, to cause dismay to, to deceive Mhvs 17, 44 DN-a i.91 (in explanation of kuhaka)
    causative of *vimhayati = vi + smi
    Vimhita
    adjective
    1. astonished, discouraged, dismayed Ja vi.270 (su˚ very dismayed) Mil 122 Mhvs 6, 19; Dāvs ii.80 ‣See also vyamhita
    past participle of vi + smi, cp. mihita
    Viya
    indeclinable
    1. part of comparison: like, as; stands for iva (usually in verse after ā : Snp 420 (jātimā v.) Pv i.85 (vārinā v.); or o Snp 580 (vajjho v.), 818 (kapaṇo v.); or ṁ: Snp 381 (vajantaṁ v.), 689 (nekkhaṁ v.)
    2. dubitative particle: na viya maññe I suppose not MN ii.121 cp. byā
    another form of iva, viâ *via (so some Prākrits: Pischel Prakrit Grammar § 143, 336) → viya. Pischel Prakrit Grammar § 336, 337 derives it from viva = v’ iva
    Viya˚
    ; the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya˚;
    1. which ‣See generally. cp. the identical veyya˚;
    = vi + a˚
    Viyatta
    adjective
    1. determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā (which Rhys Davids translates “true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready etc. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.114) at DN ii.104 = AN iv.310 = SN v.260 = Ud 63 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit (at Divy 202) has śrāvakāh (for bhikkhū!) paṇḍitā bhaviṣyanti vyaktā vinītā viśāradāh. 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Snp 800 (= vavatthita bhinna dvejjhāpanna etc. Nd2 108; = bhinna Snp-a 530). cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (= *vyakta), which quasi-correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the variant reading (all SS of the Commentary ); viyutta is perhaps to be perferred to viyatta
    1. Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in § 1 does not occur in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy˚ because of the following vinīta and visārada. cp. vyatta & veyyatta;
    cp. Sanskrit vyakta, vi + past participle of añj
    Viyatti
    feminine
    1. distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593 (in def; n of brū. cp. veyyatti
    cp. Sanskrit vyakti
    Viyākāra
    1. preparation, display, distinction, splendour, majesty Snp 299 (= sampatti Snp-a 319)
    vi + ākāra
    Viyācikkhati
    1. in verse at Snp 1090 for vyācikkhati, i.e. vi + ācikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; past participle vyākhyāta.

    Viyāpanna
    1. gone down, lost, destroyed Snp 314 (in verse; gloss viyāvatta. The former explained as “naṭṭha,” the latter as “viparivattitvā aññathā-bhūta” at Snp-a 324)
    vi + āpanna, past participle of vi + āpajjati cp. vyāpajjati
    Viyāyata
    1. stretched out or across Ja iii.373 (in verse)
    vi + āyata
    Viyārambha
    1. striving, endeavour, undertaking Snp 953 (explained as the 3 abhisankhāras, viz puñña˚, apuñña˚ & āneñja˚ at Nd; 1 442)
    vi + ārambha
    Viyūḷha
    1. massed heaped; thick, dense (of fighting) MN i.86 = Nd2 1995 (ubhato viyūlḥaṁ sangāmaṁ massed battle on both sides) AN iii.94 AN iii.99 (sangāma, cp. SN iv.308) Ja vi.275 (balaggāni viyūḷhāni; Commentary = pabbūḷha-vasena ṭhitāni where pabbūḷha evidently in meaning “sambādha.” 2. put in array, prepared, imminent Ja ii.336 (maraṇe viyūḷhe = paccupaṭṭhite Commentary ). cp. saṁyūḷha
    apparently vi + ūḷha, past participle of viyūhati, but mixed in meaning with vi + ūha (of vah = vyūha
    Viyūhati
    1. to take away, carry off, remove Vin iii.48 (paṁsuṁ vyūhati) Ja i.177 Ja i.199 (paṁsuṁ), 238, 331 (kaddamaṁ dvidhā viyūhitvā); iii.52 (vālikaṁ); iv.265 (paṁsuṁ); vi.448 (vālukaṁ) Dhs-a 315 Dhp-a ii.38 Dhp-a iii.207 (paṁsuṁ). past participle viyūḷha. cp. saṁyūhati
    2. vi + ūh, a differentiated form of vah
    Viyūhana
    neuter
    1. removing, removal Vism 302 (paṁsu˚)
    from viyūhati
    Viyoga
    1. separation Ja vi.482 Mhvs 19, 16 (Mahābodhi˚) Pv-a 160 Pv-a 161 (pati˚ from her husband) Sdhp 77 Sdhp 164
    vi + yoga 2
    Viyyati
    1. to be woven Vin iii.259 past participle vīta2
    2. passive of vāyati1 or vināti. The Vedic is ūyate
    Viracita
    1. put together, composed, made Vv-a 14 183
    2. ornamented Thag-a 257 Vv-a 188
    vi + racita
    Viraja
    adjective
    1. free from defilement or passion, stainless, faultless Vin i.294 (āgamma maggaṁ virajaṁ) Snp 139 Snp 520 Snp 636 Snp 1105 ‣See exegesis at Nd2 590; Pv iii.36 (= vigata-raja, niddosa Pv-a 189) Dhp-a iv.142 187 DN-a i.237 Often in phrase virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhamma-cakkhuṁ udapādi “there arose in him the stainless eye of the Arahant,” e.g. Vin i.16 SN iv.47-virajaṁ (+ asokaṁ) padaṁ “the stainless (+ painless element” is another expression for Nibbāna, e. g SN iv.210 AN iv.157 AN iv.160 Iti 37 46 Vv 169 similarly ṭhānaṁ (for padaṁ) Pv ii.333 (= sagga Pv-a 89)
    vi + rajo
    Virajjaka
    adjective
    1. separated from one’s kingdom, living in a foreign country Vv-a 336
    vi + rajja + ka
    Virajjati
    1. to detach oneself, to free oneself of passion, to show lack of interest in (locative ). SN ii.94 SN ii.125 (nibbindaṁ ppr.
      1. virajjati); iii.46, 189; iv.2, 86. AN v.3 Snp 739 = SN iv.205 (tattha) Thag 1, 247 Snp 813 (na rajjati na virajjati), 853 Nd1 138 237 Mil 245 Sdhp 613. past participle viratta.
      2. causative virājeti to put away to estrange (
      3. accusative ) from (
      4. locative ), to cleanse (oneself) of passion (
      5. locative ), to purify, to discard as rāga DN ii.51 SN i.16 = Sn 171 (ettha chandaṁ v. = vinetvā viddhaṁsetvā Snp-a 213) SN iv.17 = Kvu 178 AN ii.196 (rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaṁ v.) Snp 139 Snp 203 Thag 1, 282 Pv ii.1319 (itthi-cittaṁ = viratta-citta Pv-a 168) Thag-a 49 Dhp-a i.327 (itthi-bhāve chandaṁ v. to give up desire for femininity).
      6. past participle virājita
      7. vi + rajjati
    Virajjana
    neuter
    1. discolouring Ja iii.148 (rajjana +)
    from virajjati; cp. rajjana
    Virajjhati
    1. to fail, miss, lose SN iv.117 Ja i.17 Ja i.490 (aorist virajjhi) ii.432 (identical) Pv-a 59
    2. past participle viraddha.
    3. causative virādheti (q.v.)
    4. vi + rādh; cp. Sanskrit virādhyati ‣See rādheti1
    Viraṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. without fight or harm, peace Sdhp 579
    vi + raṇa
    Virata
    1. abstaining from ablative Snp 59 Snp 531 Snp 704 Snp 900 Snp 1070 Nd1 314 Nd2 591 Vv-a 72 Sdhp 338
    past participle of viramati
    Virati
    feminine
    1. abstinence Mhvs 20, 58. The three viratis given at DN-a i.305 (= veramaṇī) are sampatta˚ samādāna˚, setughāta˚ (q.v.) cp. Dhs-a 154 (tisso viratiyo), 218; Sdhp 215 Sdhp 341 & Compendium 244, note 2
    vi + rati
    Viratta
    1. dispassioned, free from passion, detached, unattached to, displeased with (locative ) SN iii.45 (rūpadhātuyā cittaṁ virattaṁ vimuttaṁ) Snp 204 (chandarāga˚), 235 (˚citta āyatike bhavasmiṁ) AN v.3 313 Ja v.233 (mayi); Sdhp 613
    2. past participle of virajjati
    Viraddha
    1. failed, missed, neglecte SN v.23 (ariyo maggo v.), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā viraddhā 254, 294 Nd1 512 Ja i.174 Ja i.490 Ja ii.384 iv.71, 497 Nett 132
    past participle of virajjhati
    Viraddhi
    feminine (missing, failure?) at Vin i.359 is uncertain reading. The variant readings are visuddhi, visandi & visandhi with explains “viddhaṭṭhāna” & “viraddhaṭṭhāna” ‣See p. 395.
    Virandha
    1. opening; defect, flaw Nd1 165
    vi + randha2
    Viramaṇa
    neuter (—˚)
    1. abstinence, abstaining from (—˚) Mhvs 14, 48 (uccā-seyyā˚)
    from viramati
    Viramati
    1. to stop, cease; to desist ablative, abstain, refrain Snp 400 (Pot. ˚meyya), 828 (Pot. ˚me) 925 Nd1 168 376 Thag 2, 397 (aorist viramāsi, cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 1651); Pv iv.355 (pāpadassanaṁ, accusative ) Mil 85 Pv-a 204
    2. vi + ramati
    Virala
    1. (& Viraḷa) adjective

      1. sparse, rare, thin Thag 2, 254 (of hair, explained as vilūna-kesa Thag-a 210 i.e. almost bald spelling ḷ) Dhs-a 238 (ḷ) Dhp-a i.122 (˚cchanna thinly covered) Pv-a 4 (in ratta-vaṇṇa-virala-mālā read better with variant reading as ratta-kaṇavīra-mālā, cp. Ja iii.59)
      2. connected with Vedic ṛtē excluding, without, & nirṛti perishing; cp. also Latin rarus = rare
    Viralita
    1. thin, sparse, rare Dāvs iv.24 (a˚), with variant reading viraḷita
    past participle of denominative of virala = viraleti, cp. Sanskrit viralāyate to be rare
    Virava
    (& ˚rāva
    1. shouting out, roaring; crying (of animals) Ja i.25 Ja i.74 (ā), 203 (of elephants); v.9 (ā, of swans)
    vi + rava & rāva; cp. Vedic virava
    Viravati
    1. to shout (out), to cry aloud; to utter a cry or sound (of animals) Ja ii.350 (kikī sakuṇo viravi); v.206; Mhvs 12, 49 (mahārāvaṁ viraviṁsu mahājanā) Pv-a 154 Pv-a 217 Pv-a 245 (vissaraṁ), 279 (identical) Sdhp 179 Sdhp 188 Sdhp 291
    2. to rattle Ja i.51
    3. Caus virāveti to sound Mhvs 21, 15 (ghaṇṭaṁ to ring a bell)
    vi + ravati
    Viraha
    adjective
    1. empty, rid of, bar, without Pv-a 137 Pv-a 139 (sīla˚)
    vi + raho
    Virahita
    adjective
    1. empty, exempt from, rid of, without Mil 330 (dosa˚) Pv-a 139
    vi + rahita
    Virāga
    1. absence of rāga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (ablative or
    2. locative ) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away cleansing, purifying; emancipation, Arahantship. DN iii.130f. 136 sq., 222, 243, 251, 290 SN i.136 SN iii.19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; iv.33 sq., 47, 226, 365 v.226, 255, 361 AN i.100 AN i.299 AN ii.26 AN iii.35 AN iii.85 AN iii.325f. iv.146 sq., 423 sq.; v.112, 359 Thag 1, 599 Snp 795 Ps ii.220 sq. Nd1 100; Kvu 600 = Dh 273 = Nett 188 (virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṁ) Dhs 163 Nett 16, 29 Vism 290 (khaya˚ & accanta˚) 293
    3. Often nearly synonymous with; nibbāna, in the description of which it occurs frequently in following formula: taṇhakkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna, e.g. SN i.136 Vin i.5 AN ii.118 Iti 88 -or combined with nibbidā virāga nirodha upasama … nibbāna, e.g. MN i.431 SN ii.223 cp. nibbāna ii.B1 & iii.8
    4. In other connection (more objectively as “destruction”): aniccatā sankhārānaṁ etc., vipariṇāma virāga nirodha, e.g. SN iii.43 (as “ceasing fading away”:) khaya (-dhamma liable to), vaya˚ virāga˚, nirodha˚ MN i.500 SN ii.26
    5. colouring diversity or display of colour, dye, hue (= rāga 1) Ja i.89 (nānā˚-samujjala blazing forth different colours); 395 (nānā˚ variously dyed) Pv-a 50 (nānā˚-vaṇṇa-samujjala)
    vi + rāga
    Virāgatā
    feminine
    1. disinterestedness, absence of lust Kvu 212 = Ud 10
    abstract from rāga
    Virāgita
    adjective
    1. at Ja v.96 is not clear. It is said of beautiful women explained by Commentary as vilagga-sarīrā, tanumajjhā, i.e. “having slender waists.” Could it be “excited with passion or “exciting passion"? Or could it be an old misreading for virājita2 ? It may also be a distorted vilāka (q.v.) or vilaggita
    from vi + *rāgeti, denominative of rāga?
    Virāgin
    adjective
    1. discoloured, fading in colour Ja iii.88 (figuratively saddhā avirāginī), 148 (rāga fading in the original dye, of citta)
    2. changing reversing AN iii.416 (of dukkha: dandha˚ & khippa˚ of slow & quick change; variant reading M6 is viparāgi, which may represent a vipariyāyi, i.e. changing)
    from virāga 2, cp. rāgin
    Virāguṇa
    1. in meaning “fading away, waning” in verse at Iti 69 (of viññāṇa) is doubtful reading. It corresponds to virāgadhamma of the prose part (virāgudh˚ variant readings ) The variant reading is pabhaṅguṇa (which might be preferable unless we regard it as an explanation of virāgin, if we should write it thus)
    Virāgeti
    1. to fail, miss; only at MN i.327 (puriso narakapapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca paṭhaviṁ virāgeyya “would miss the earth”; differently Neumann “Boden zu fassen suchte,” i.e. tried to touch ground)-Perhaps also in virāgāya (either as absolutive to virāgeti or as instrumental to virāga in sense of virādha(na) Pv i.117 (sukhaṁ virāgāya, with gloss virāgena, i.e. spurning one’s good fortune; explained as virajjhitvā virādhetvā at Pv-a 59). cp. virāye (= virāge?) at Thag 1, 1113 ‣See virādheti
    2. for virādheti, as in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit virāgayati (e.g. Divy 131 Divy 133) to displease, estrange, the figuratively meaning of virāgeti like Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ārāgeti for Pāli ārādheti in lit & fig meanings
    Virājati
    1. to shine Pv-a 189 (= virocati)
    vi + rājati
    Virājita1
    1. cleansed, discarded as rāga, given up SN iv.158 (dosa) Ja iii.404 (= pahīna Commentary )
    past participle of virājeti
    Virājita2
    1. shining out, resplendent Ja ii.33 (mora … suratta-rāji-virājita here perhaps = streaked?). cp. virāgita
    past participle of causative of virājati
    Virājeti
    1. ‣See virajjati
    Virādhanā
    feminine
    1. failing, failure DN ii.287 AN v.211f.
    from virādheti
    Virādhita
    1. failed, missed, lost Ja v.400 Pv iv.13 (= pariccatta Commentary )
    past participle of virādheti
    Virādheti
    1. to miss, omit, fail, transgress, sin Snp 899 Thag 1, 37 1113 virāye for virādhaya Commentary, may be virāge, cp. Psalms of the Brethren 3752 ‣See; virāgeti Nd1 312 Ja i.113 Ap. 47 Pv-a 59
    • Cp virageti.
    • past participle virādhita
    vi + rādheti1, or causative of virajjhati
    Virāva
    1. ‣See virava
    Viriccati
    1. to get purged DN ii.128 (ppr. viriccamāna). past participle viritta

      • cp. vireka
      passive of vi + riñcati
    Viritta
    1. purged Mil 214
    past participle of viriccati
    Viriya
    neuter
    1. literally “state of a strong man,” i.e. vigour, energy, effort, exertion On term ‣See also Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation § 13; Compendium 242
    • DN iii.113 120 sq., 255 sq. SN ii.132 SN ii.206f. Snp 79 Snp 184 Snp 353 Snp 422 Snp 531 Snp 966 Snp 1026 (chanda˚) Nd1 476 487 Nd2 394 Ja i.178 (viriyaṁ karoti, with
    • locative ) Pug 71 Vb 10 Nett 16, 28; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 60, 63 Mil 36 Vism 160 (˚upekkhā), 462; Kp-a 96 Snp-a 489 Dhp-a iv.231 DN-a i.63 Dhs-a 120 Vv-a 14 Pv-a 98 Pv-a 129; Sdhp 343 Sdhp 517. accāraddha˚; too much exertion MN iii.159 AN iii.375 opposite atilīna˚; too little ibid; uṭṭhāna˚; initiative or rousing energy SN i.21 SN i.217 AN iii.76 AN iv.282 Thag-a 267 Pv-a 129
    • nara˚ manly strength Ja iv.478 Ja iv.487
    • ˚viriyaṁ āra(m)bhati to put forth energy, to make an effort SN ii.28 SN iv.125 SN v.9 SN v.244f. AN i.39 AN i.282 AN i.296 AN ii.15 iv.462
    • As adjective (—˚) in alīna˚; alert, energetic Ja i.22
    • āraddha˚ full of energy, putting forth energy, strenuous SN i.53 SN i.166 SN i.198 SN ii.29 SN ii.207f.; iv.224; v.225 AN i.4 12; ii.76, 228 sq.; iii.65, 127; iv.85, 229, 291, 357 v.93, 95, 153, 335 Ja i.110
    • ossaṭṭha˚ one who has given up effort Ja i.110
    • hīna˚ lacking in energy Iti 34 (here as vīriya, in metre)
    • v. is one of the indriyas, the balas & the; sambojjhaṅgas (q.v.)
    1. ˚ārambha “putting forth of energy,” application of exertion, will, energy, resolution DN iii.252 SN ii.202 SN iv.175 AN i.12 AN iii.117 AN iv.15f. 280; v.123 sq.; Ps i.103 sq. Vb 107 194, 208 Dhs-a 145 146
    2. ˚indriya the faculty of energy DN iii.239 DN iii.278 SN v.196f. Dhs 13 Vb 123 Nett 7, 15, 19 Vb-a 276
    • ˚bala the power of energy DN iii.229 DN iii.253 AN iv.363 Ja i.109
    • ˚saṁvara restraint by will Vism 7 Snp-a 8 Dhs-a 351
    from vīra; cp. Vedic vīrya & vīria
    Viriyatā
    feminine
    1. manliness, energy, strength MN i.19 Vv-a 284
    abstract from viriya
    Viriyavant
    adjective
    1. energetic AN i.236 Snp 528 Snp 531 (four-syllabic), 548 (three-syllabic); Vism 3 (= ātāpin); Sdhp 475
    viriya + vant
    Virujaka
    1. (vīṇā˚) lute-player Ja vi.51 (= vīṇā-vādaka Commentary ) ‣See rujaka
    Virujjhati
    1. to be obstructed Snp 73 (avirujjhamāna unobstructed) Ja vi.12
    vi + rujjhati
    Virujjhana
    neuter
    1. obstructing or being obstructed, obstruction, Ja vi.448
    from virujjhati
    Viruta
    neuter

    noise, sound (of animals), cry Snp 927 explained as “virudaṁ spelling with d, like ruda for ruta

    1. vuccati-miga-cakkaṁ; miga-cakka-pāthakā [i.e. experts in the ways of animals; knowers of auspices migacakkaṁ ādisanti” at Nd1 382; and as “mig’ ādīnaṁ vassitaṁ” at Snp-a 564 The passage is a little doubtful when we compare the expression viruṭañ ca gabbhakaraṇaṁ at Snp 927 with the passage viruddha-gabbhakaraṇaṁ at DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96), which seems more original
    vi + ruta
    Viruddha
    1. hindered, obstructed, disturbed SN i.236 Snp 248 Snp 630 Nd1 239 Mil 99 Mil 310 Ja i.97
    • Often negative a˚ unobstructed, free SN i.236 SN iv.71 AN iii.276 (˚ka) Dhp 406 Snp 365 Snp 704 Snp 854 Vb-a 148 = Vism 543
    1. ˚gabbha-karaṇa (using charms for) procuring abortion DN i.11 DN-a i.96 (explained here as first trying to destroy the foetus and afterwards giving medicine for its preservation) ‣See also viruta
    past participle of virundhati
    *Virundhati
    1. to obstruct etc. passive virujjhati (q.v.)
    2. past participle viruddha.
    3. causative virodheti. (q.v.)
    4. vi + rundhati
    Virūpa
    adjective
    1. deformed, unsightly, ugly Snp 50 Ja i.47 Ja iv.379 Ja vi.31 Ja vi.114 Pv-a 24 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 47; Sdhp 85
    1. at Snp 50 virūpa is taken as “various” by Buddhaghosa (Snp-a 99), and virūpa-rūpa explained as vividha-rūpa, i.e. diversity, variety. So also the Niddesa
    vi + rūpa
    Virūḷha
    1. having grown, growing SN ii.65 (viññāṇe virūḷhe āyatiṁ punnabbhav’ âbhinibbatti hoti)
    past participle of virūhati
    Virūḷhi
    feminine
    1. growth MN i.250 SN iii.53 AN iii.8 AN iii.404f.; v.152 sq., 161, 350 sq. Iti 113 Mil 33 Mhvs 15, 42 Vb-a 196
    • avirūḷhi-dhamma not liable to growth Snp 235 Dhp-a i.245
    vi + rūḷhi, of ruh
    Virūhati
    1. to grow, sprout Iti 113 Mil 386 DN-a i.120
    • cp. paṭi˚.
    • past participle virūḷha
    • Caus II. virūhāpeti to make grow, to foster Mil 386
    vi + rūhati1
    Virūhanā
    feminine & ˚a
    • neuter

      1. growing, growth Ja ii.323 feminine Mil 354 Vism 220 DN-a i.161 Pv-a 7
    vi + rūhanā
    Vireka = virecana
    1. Mil 134 (cp. Vin i.279)
    Virecana
    neuter
    1. purging, a purgative Vin i.206 (˚ṁ pātuṁ to drink a p.), 279 (identical) DN i.12 AN v.218 Ja iii.48 (sineha˚ an oily or softening purgative) DN-a i.98
    vi + recana, ric
    Virecaniya
    adjective
    1. (one who is) to be treated with a purgative Mil 169
    gerundive formation from virecana
    Vireceti
    1. to purge Mil 229 Mil 335
    vi + causative of riñcati
    Virocati
    1. to shine (forth), to be brilliant Vin ii.296 (tapati, bhāsati, v.) Snp 378 Snp 550 Iti 64 (virocare) Ja i.18 Ja i.89 Ja iv.233 Pv i.114 ii.962; iii.35 (= virājati Pv-a 189) Dhp-a i.446 Dhp-a iv.143 Dhs-a 14 Pv-a 110 (˚amāna = sobhamāna), 136 sq., 157. cp. verocana. causative viroceti to illumine Mil 336
    2. vi + rocati
    Virodha
    1. obstruction, hindrance, opposition, enmity SN i.111 SN iv.71 SN iv.210 Snp 362 Pug 18 22; Kvu 485 Mil 394 Dhs-a 39
    • avirodha absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Th 1, 875; Pv iii.73
    vi + rodha1
    Virodhana
    adjective neuter
    1. opposing, obstruction, opposition, contradiction, only negative a˚ absence of opposition, Ja iii.274 Ja iii.320 Ja iii.412 Ja v.378
    from virodheti
    Virodhita
    1. obstructed, rendered hostile Pgdp 90 (or is it virādhita ?)
    past participle of virodheti
    Virodheti
    1. to cause obstruction, to render hostile, to be in disharmony, to exasperate SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (which latter passage reads viggaṇhati instead); Sdhp 45 Sdhp 496. past participle virodhita
    2. causative of virundhati
    Virosanā
    feminine
    1. causing anger Vb 86 Vb-a 75
    vi + rosanā
    Vilakkhaṇa
    adjective neuter
    1. wrong or false characteristic; adjective discharacteristic, i.e. inconsistent with characteristics, discrepant (opposite sa˚; in accordance with ch.) Mil 405 Nett 78 Vb-a 250f.
    2. vi + lakkhaṇa
    Vilagga
    adjective
    1. stuck Vin i.138 MN i.393 - 2. slender (of waist) Ja v.96 ‣See virāgita, 216 ‣See vilāka
    2. vi + lagga
    Vilaggita
    adjective
    1. stretched or bending (?), slender Ja iv.20 ‣See under vilāka
    vi + laggita
    Vilaṅga
    neuter
    1. the plant Erycibe paniculata Vin i.201 (variant reading viḷ˚)
    • ˚thālikā at Nd1 154 read as bilaṅga˚ (q.v.)
    * Sanskrit viḍanga
    Vilaṅghaka
    1. in hattha˚; jerking of the hand beckoning (as a mode of making signs) Vin i.157 MN i.207 (has g for gh, cp. p. 547)
    • cp. hattha-vikāra
    from vilangheti
    Vilaṅghati
    1. to jump about, to leap (over) Sdhp 168
    vi + langhati
    Vilajjati
    1. to be ashamed, to be bashful, to pretend bashfulness Ja v.433
    vi + lajjati
    Vilapati
    1. to talk idly Ja i.496
    2. to lament, wail Thag 1, 705 Ja ii.156 Ja v.179 Mil 275 Thag-a 148 (Ap. v.66)
    vi + lapati
    Vilamba
    adjective
    1. hanging down; only in reduplicated-iterative compound olamba-vilamba dropping or falling off all round Ja iv.380
    vi + lamba
    Vilambati
    1. to loiter, to tarry, literally “hang about” Ja i.413 Dhp-a i.81
    vi + lambati
    Vilambin
    adjective
    1. hanging down, drooping MN i.306 (feminine ˚inī, of a creeper, i.e. growing tendrils all over)
    2. vi + lambin
    Vilaya
    1. dissolution; ˚ṁ gacchati, as much as: “to be digested,” to be dissolved Mil 67 adjective dissolved, dispersed Dīpavaṁsa i.65
    vi + laya, cp. līyati
    Vilasati
    1. to play, dally, sport; to shine forth, to unfold splendour Ja v.38 (of a tree “stand herrlich da” Dutoit), 433 (of woman); vi.44 (of a tree, vilāsamāna Text). past participle vilasita
    2. vi + lasati
    Vilasita
    adjective
    1. shining; gay, playful, coquettish Ja v.420
    past participle of vilasati
    Vilāka
    adjective
    1. only in f ˚a : slender (of waist); the explanation with vilagga may refer to a comparison with a creeper (cp. vilambin & Ja v.215 as “hanging” (“climbing”) i.e. slim, but seems forced ‣See also virāgita which is explained in the same way. The word is peculiar to the “Jātaka” style
    • J iv.19 (= suṭṭhu-vilaggita -tanu-majjhā); v.155 (+ mudukā; C explains as sankhitta-majjhā), 215 (˚majjhā = vilaggasarīrā Commentary ), 506 (velli-vilāka-majjhā = vilagga-majjhā tanu-dīgha-majjhā Commentary ) Vv-a 280 (˚majjhā for sumajjhimā of Vv 6413 Text reads vilāta˚;)
    perhaps = vilagga (Geiger, Pali Grammar § 612), although difficult to connect in meaning
    Vilāpa
    1. idle talk Ja i.496 Ja v.24 cp. saṁ˚
    vi + lāpa
    Vilāpanatā
    feminine = vilāpa Pug 21
    Vilāsa
    1. charm, grace, beauty Ja i.470 Ja vi.43 Mil 201 Thag-a 78 Pv-a 3
    2. desanā˚ beauty of instruction DN-a i.67 Vism 524, 541; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 21
    3. dalliance sporting, coquetry Ja iii.408 Ja v.436
    4. vilāsa is often coupled with līlā (q.v.)
    from vilasati
    Vilāsavant
    adjective
    1. having splendour, grace or beauty Mhvs 29, 25
    from vilāsa
    Vilāsin
    adjective
    1. shining forth, unfolding splendour, possessing charm or grace, charming DN-a i.40 (vyāmapabhā parikkhepa-vilāsinī splendour shining over a radius of a vyāma)
    from vilāsa
    Vilikhati
    1. to scrape, scratch SN i.124 (bhūmiṁ); iv.198 Dhs-a 260 (figuratively manaṁ v.; in explanation of vilekha
    2. to scratch open Vin ii.175
    3. pp vilikhita
    vi + likhati
    Vilikhita
    1. scraped off Snp-a 207
    past participle of vilikhati
    Vilitta
    1. anointed DN i.104 (su-nahāta suvilitta kappita-kesa-massu) Ja iii.91 Ja iv.442
    past participle of vilimpati
    Vilimpati
    1. to smear, anoint AN iii.57 Ja i.265 (absolutive ˚itvā); iii.277 (ppr. ˚anto): Pv i.106 (ger ˚itvāna) Pv-a 62 (˚itvā).
    2. past participle vilitta.
    3. causative II. vilimpāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.50 (gandhehi), 254 (identical). Vilivili (-kriya) vi + limpati
    Vilivili (-kriyā)
    1. ‣See biḷibiḷikā;
    Vilīna
    adjective
    1. clinging, sticking cp. līyati.1
      1. Vin i.209 (olīna˚ sticking all over). 2. matured (“digested"? cp. vilaya) Ja iv.72 (nava˚gosappi freshly matured ghee) Mil 301 (phalāni ripefruit)
      • cp. līyati.2
      1. molten, i.e. refined, purified Ja iv.118 (tamba-loha˚ molten or liquid-hot copper) v.269 (tamba-loha˚, identical; cp. Commentary on p. 274; vilīnaṁ tambālohaṁ viya pakkaṭṭhitaṁ lohitaṁ pāyenti) Dhs-a 14 (˚suvaṇṇa)
      • cp. uttatta in same sense and the explanation of velli as “uttatta-ghana-suvaṇṇa-rāsi-ppabbā” at Ja v.506 Commentary
      vi + līna, past participle of vilīyati
    Vilīyati
    1. to melt intranstitive, to be dissolved, to perish Ja iv.498 Vism 420 (pabbata, spelling here with ḷ; Warren wrong “are hidden from view,” i.e. nilīyati) Dhs-a 336 (phānita-piṇḍa; translation not to the point “reduced or pounded”); Sdhp 383; Pgdp 21

      • pp vilīna
      • cp. pa˚
      vi + līyati.2
    Vilīyana
    neuter
    1. melting, dissolution Sdhp 201. Viliva & Viliva;
    from vilīyati
    Vilīva
    Viliva;
    adjective [Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. compares Sanskrit bilma slip, chip. Phonetically viliva = Sanskrit bilva ‣See billa 1. made of split bamboo Vin ii.266 (i).
    • (ī) a chip of bamboo or any other reed, a slip of reed MN i.566 (Buddhaghosa on MN i.429); Vism 310 (˚maya)
    Vilīvakāra
    1. a worker in bamboo, a basketmaker Vin iii.82 Mil 331 Vb-a 222 (˚ka in simile) Pv-a 175
    vilīva + kāra
    Vilugga
    adjective
    1. broken; only in reduplicated-iterative compound olugga-vilugga all broken up, tumbling to pieces MN i.80 MN i.450
    vi + lugga
    Vilutta
    1. plundered, stripped, robbed, ruined SN i.85 = J ii.239 Ja v.99 Ja vi.44 Mil 303 Mhvs 33, 71 (corehi)
    past participle of vilumpati
    Vilumpaka
    adjective
    1. (active or pass.) plundering or being plundered Ja i.370 (˚cora); ii.239 (pass.)
    from vi + lup
    Vilumpati
    1. to plunder, rob, steal, ruin SN i.85 = J ii.239; v.99 Mil 193 Vv-a 100 Dhp-a iii.23- passive viluppati Ja v.254 (gloss for ˚lump˚ of p. 253)-
    2. past participle vilutta.
    3. causative II. vilumpāpeti to incite to plunder Mil 193 Ja i.263
    4. vi + lumpati
    Vilumpana
    neuter
    1. plundering Dhp-a iii.23 Vilumpamana(ka)
    from vilumpati
    Vilumpamāna(ka)
    1. plundering, robbing Ja v.254 Pv-a 4 (˚ka cora)
    originally ppr. medium of vilumpati
    Vilulita
    adjective
    1. stirred, agitated, shaken, disturbed Dāvs iv.54 (bhaya˚citta). cp. viloḷeti
    vi + luḷita; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vilulita Jtm 210
    Vilūna
    adjective
    1. cut off (always with reference to the hair) MN iii.180 = AN i.138 Mil 11 Pv-a 47
    vi + lūna
    Vilekha
    1. perplexity, literally “scratching” Vin iv.143 (here as feminine ˚ā) Dhs 1256 (mano˚) Dhs-a 260 The more common word for “perplexity” is vikkhepa
    2. vi + lekha
    Vilepana
    neuter
    1. ointment, cosmetic, toilet perfume AN i.107 AN i.212 AN ii.209 Thag 1, 616 (sīlaṁ v. seṭṭhaṁ cp. Ja iii.290) Pug 51 58; Pv ii.316 DN-a i.77 88
    vi + lepana
    Vilokana
    neuter
    1. looking, reflection, investigation, prognostication usually as 5 objects of reflection as to when & where & how one shall be reborn (; pañca-mahā—˚āni, consisting in kāla, desa, dīpa, kula, mātā (the latter as janetti-āyu i.e. mother and her time of delivery at Ja i.48) or time (right or wrong), continent, sky (orientation), family (or clan) and one’s (future ) mother: Ja i.48 Ja i.49 Dhp-a i.84 as 8 at Mil 193 viz. kāla, dīpa, desa, kula, janetti āyu, māsa, nekkhamma (i.e. the 5 + period of gestation month of his birthday, and his renunciation). Without special meaning at DN-a i.194 (ālokana +). cp. volokana
    2. vi + lok loc = roc ‣See loka & rocati
    Vilokita
    neuter
    1. a look AN ii.104 AN ii.106f. 210 Pug 44 45 DN-a i.193 Vv-a 6 (ālokita +)
    past participle of viloketi
    Viloketar
    1. one who looks or inspects DN-a i.194 (āloketar +)
    agent noun from viloketi
    Viloketi
    1. to examine, study, inspect, scrutinize, reflect on Thag 2, 282 Ja i.48 Ja i.49 Dhp-a i.84 Mil 193 Mhvs 22, 18. past participle vilokita. cp. pa˚; & vo˚
    2. vi + loketi, of lok, as in loka
    Vilocana
    neuter
    1. the eye Dāvs i.41 Thag-a 253
    vi + locana
    Vilopa
    1. plunder, pillage MN i.456 (maccha˚ fishhaul) Ja i.7 Ja iii.8 Ja vi.409 Dīpavaṁsa ix.7 (˚kamma). vilopaṁ khādati to live by plunder Ja vi.131
    vi + lopa
    Vilopaka
    adjective
    1. plundering, living by plundering Ja i.5 Mil 122 (feminine ˚ikā)
    2. from vilopa
    Vilopiya
    adjective
    1. to be plundered; negative ; Sdhp 311
    gerundive formation from vilopa
    Vilomatā
    feminine
    1. unseemliness, repugnance Snp-a 106
    abstract from viloma
    Viloma
    adjective
    1. against the grain (literally against the hair), discrepant, reversed, wrong, unnatural Vin ii.115 (of cīvara: unsightly) Ja iii.113 Dīpavaṁsa vii.55 Dhp-a i.379 Pv-a 87
    vi + loma
    Vilomana
    neuter
    1. discrepancy, disagreement, reverse Dhs-a 253
    from viloma
    Vilometi
    1. to dispute, disagree with, to find fault Nett 22 Mil 29 Mil 295 Dhs-a 253
    denominative from viloma
    Viloḷana
    neuter

    & Viloṭana; from vi + luḍ; cp. Whitney, Sanskrit Roots, 1885, p. 149, where themes & their forms are given by; luṭh1 to roll, luṭh2 & luṇṭh; to rob, luḍ to stir up (some forms of it having meaning of luṇṭh) = lul to be lively

    1. shaking, stirring; only found in lexicographical literature as definition of several roots, viz. of gāh Dhtp 349; Dhtm 504; math & manth; (see mathati Dhtp 126; Dhtm 183 ‣See also luḷati
    from vi + luḷ
    Viloḷeti
    1. to stir, to move about Ja i.26 Dīpavaṁsa vi.52
    vi + loḷeti or loleti, cp. vilulita
    Viḷayhati
    1. to burn intranstitive Ja ii.220
    2. vi + dayhati
    Viḷāra
    1. at AN iii.122 read as biḷāra (sasa-biḷārā rabbits & cats)
    Vivajjita
    1. abandoning, abstaining from Vv-a 75 (˚kiliṭṭha-kamma)
    2. avoided Thag 2, 459 3. distant from ablative Mil 131
    past participle of vivajjeti
    Vivajjeti
    1. to avoid, abandon, forsake SN i.43 AN v.17 Snp 53 (= parivajj˚ abhivajj˚ Nd2 592), 399 (˚jjaya), 407 (praet. ˚jjayi) Vv 8438 (˚jjayātha = parivajjetha Vv-a 346) Ja i.473 Ja iii.263 Ja iii.481 (˚jjayi); v.233 (Pot. ˚jjaye) Mil 129 Sdhp 210 Sdhp 353 Sdhp 395
    • pp vivajjita
    • passive vivajjati Ja i.27
    vi + vajjeti
    Vivaṭa
    1. uncovered, open (literally & figuratively), laid bare, unveiled Snp 19 (literally), 374 (figuratively anāvaṭa Snp-a 366), 763, 793 (= open-minded) Nd1 96 Pug 45 46 (read vivaṭa for pi vaṭa; opposite pihita); Vism 185 (opposite pihita) Ja v.434 Dhp-a iii.79 Vv-a 27 Pv-a 283 (mukha unveiled)
    • vivaṭena cetasā “with mind awake & clear” DN iii.223 AN iv.86 SN v.263 cp. cetovivaraṇa
    • vivaṭa is frequently variant reading for vivatta (-cchada) e.g. at AN ii.44 Snp 372 Dhp-a iii.195 Snp-a 265 (in explanation of term); sometimes the only reading in this phrase (q.v.), e.g. at Nd2 593
    • instrumental vivaṭena as adv “openly” Vin ii.99 Vin iv.21
    1. ˚cakkhu open-minded, clear-sighted Snp 921 Nd1 354
    • ˚dvāra (having) an open door, an open house Ja v.293 (aḍḍha˚ half open) Dhp-a ii.74
    • ˚nakkhatta a yearly festival, “Public Day,” called after the fashion of the people going uncovered (appaṭicchannena sarīrena) bare-footed to the river Dhp-a; i.388
    vi + vaṭa, past participle of vṛ; ‣See vuṇāti
    Vivaṭaka
    adjective
    1. open (i.e. not secret) Vin ii.99
    vivaṭa + ka
    Vivaṭṭa
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. “rolling back,” with reference to the development of the world (or the aeons kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle (“devolution”) whereas vaṭṭa alone or saṁvaṭṭa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as “periods” of the world they practically mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense of a; new beginning. As reduplicated-inter. compounds. they express only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaṭṭa in the sense of “renewal” & saṁvaṭṭa in the sense of “destruction,” where we should expect the opposite meaning for each ‣See also vaṭṭa & saṁvaṭta; Dogmatically vivaṭṭa is used as “absence of vaṭṭa, i.e. nibbāna or salvation from saṁsāra ‣See vaṭṭa cp. citta-vivaṭṭa, ceto˚, ñāṇa˚, vimokkha˚ at Ps; i.108 & ii.70
      2. Figuratively in kamma˚; “the rolling back of k., i.e. devolution or course of kamma at SN i.85
      3. Abs & comb; d with saṁvaṭṭa (i.e. devolution combined with evolution) e.g. at DN i.14 DN i.16f.; iii.109 AN ii.142 (where read vivaṭṭe for vivaṭṭo) Pug 60 Vism 419 (here as
      4. masculine vivaṭṭo, compared with saṁvaṭṭo), 420 (˚ṭṭhāyin) In compound ˚kappa (i.e. descending aeon) at DN iii.51 Pug 60 Iti 15
      5. neuter part of a bhikkhu’s dress (rolling up of the binding?), combined with anu- vivaṭṭa at Vin i.287
      vi + vaṭṭa; 1
    Vivaṭṭati
    1. to move back, to go back, to revolve, to begin again (of a new world-cycle), contrasted with saṁvaṭṭati to move in an ascending line (cp vivaṭṭa) DN i.17 DN iii.84 DN iii.109 Vism 327
    2. to be distracted or diverted from ablative, to turn away; to turn over, to be upset Nett 131 Pug 32 (so read for vivattati); Ps ii.98 (ppr.).
    3. past participle vivaṭṭa
    vi + vaṭṭati
    Vivaṭṭana
    neuter & ˚ā (f)
    1. turning away, moving on, moving back Ps; i.66; ii.98; Vism 278 (feminine explained as “magga”)
    2. from vivaṭṭati
    Vivaṭṭeti
    1. to turn down or away (perhaps in dogmatic sense to turn away from saṁsāra), to divert destroy: only in phrase vivaṭṭayi saṁyojanaṁ (in standard setting with acchecchi taṇhaṁ, where the usual variant reading is vāvattayi ‣See vāvatteti. Thus at MN i.12 122 SN i.127 SN iv.105 SN iv.205 SN iv.207 SN iv.399 AN i.134 AN iii.246 444 sq.; iv.8 sq. Iti 47 (Text vivattayi)
    vi + vaṭṭeti
    Vivaṇṇa
    adjective
    1. discoloured, pale, wan Snp 585 Thag 2, 79 Ja ii.418
    vi + vaṇṇa
    Vivaṇṇaka
    neuter
    1. dispraise, reviling Vin iv.143
    from vivaṇṇeti
    Vivaṇṇeti
    1. to dispraise, defame Pv iii.106 (thūpa-pūjaṁ) Pv-a 212
    vi + vaṇṇeti
    Vivatta-cchada
    adjective having the cover removed, with the veil lifted; one who draws away the veil (cp. vivaraṇa or reveals (the Universe etc.); or one who is freed of all (mental & spiritual) coverings (thus Buddhaghosa), epithet of the Buddha
    • Spelling sometimes; chadda˚ ‣See chada- DN i.89 DN ii.16 DN iii.142 (dd; sammā-sambuddha loke vivatta-chadda; translation “rolling back the veil from the world”), 177 (dd) AN ii.44 (variant reading dd) Snp 372 (explained as “vivaṭa-rāga-dosa-moha-chadana Snp-a 365), 378, 1003 (ed. Snp prefers dd as Text reading) Nd2 593 (with allegorical interpretation) Ja i.51 Ja iii.349 Ja iv.271 (dd) Dhp-a i.201 (variant reading dd); iii.195 DN-a i.250
    • It occurs either as vivatta˚; or vivaṭa˚;. In the first case vivatta˚; the explanation presents difficulties, as it is neither the opp of vatta (“duty”), nor the same as vivaṭṭa (“moving back” intransitive), nor a direct
    • past participle of vivattati (like Sanskrit vivṛtta) in which meaning it would come nearer to “stopped, reverted, ceased.” vivattati has not been found in Pāli. The only plausible explanation would be taking it as an absolute
    • past participle formation from vṛt in
    • causative sense (vatteti) thus “moved back, stopped, discarded”
    1. in meaning “uncovered, lifted, off,” referring to the covering (chada) as uncovered instead of the uncovered object ‣See vivaṭa. It is difficult to decide between the two meanings. On the principle of the “lectio difficilior” vivatta would have the preference whereas from a natural & simple point of view; vivaṭa seems more intelligible & more fitting. It is evidently an; old phrase. Note. -vivatta-kkhandha at SN i.121 is a curious expression (“with his shoulders twisted round"?). Is it an old misreading for pattakkhandha? cp. however, S.A. quoted Kindred Sayings i.151 note 5, explaining it as a dying monk’s effort to gain an orthodox posture
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vivartayati to cast off a garment, Divy 39). In the second case vivaṭa˚;) it is
  • past participle of vivarati [vi + vṛ; ‣See vuṇāti
  • Vivattati
    1. at Pug 32 is to be read as vivaṭṭati
    Vivadati
    1. to dispute, quarrel Snp 842 Snp 884 Ja i.209 Mil 47
    2. intranstitive to be quarrelled with SN iii.138
    vi + vadati
    Vivadana
    neuter
    1. causing separation, making discord DN i.11 DN-a i.96
    from vivadati
    Vivadha
    1. (carrying yoke) ‣See khārī-vidha and vividha2
    Vivana
    neuter
    1. wilderness, barren land SN i.100 Vv 776 (= arañña Vv-a 302) Ja ii.191 Ja ii.317
    vi + vana
    Vivara
    neuter
    1. opening (literally dis-covering), pore, cleft, leak, fissure Dhp 127 (pabbatānaṁ; cp. Divy 532 Mil 150 Pv-a 104); Vism 192, 262 Ja iv.16 Ja v.87 Dhp-a iv.46 (mukha˚) Snp-a 355 Pv-a 152 Pv-a 283. 2. interval, interstice DN i.56 (quoted at Pv iv.327) Vism 185
    2. fault, flaw, defect AN iii.186f. Ja v.376
    from vi + vṛ
    Vivaraṇa
    neuter
    1. uncovering, unveiling, making open, revelation, in loka˚; laying open the worlds, unveiling of the Universe; referred to as a great miracle at Vism 392 Mil 350 Dāvs ii.120 Ja iv.266–⁠2. opening, unfolding, making accessible, purifying (figuratively), in ceto˚ AN iii.117 AN iii.121 AN iv.352 AN v.67
    2. explanation making clear (cp. vibhajana Nett 8 (as
    3. feminine ) Snp-a 445
    from vivarati
    Vivarati
    1. to uncover, to open Vin ii.219 (windows, opposite thaketi) DN i.85 (paṭicchannaṁ v.) Ja i.63 (dvāraṁ), 69; iv.133 (nagaraṁ) Dhp-a i.328 (vātapānaṁ) DN-a i.228 Pv-a 74 (mukhaṁ) Vv-a 157 284
    2. (figuratively) to open, make clear, reveal SN iv.166 SN v.261 Kp-a 12 (+ vibhajati etc.)
    3. pp vivaṭa
    vi + varati vṛ ‣See vuṇāti
    Vivasati
    1. to live away from home, to be separated, to be distant Ja iv.217
    • cp. vippavasati
    vi + vasati2
    Vivasana
    neuter
    1. (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase ratyā vivasane at the end of night, combined in stock phrase with suriy’ uggamanaṁ pati “towards sunrise” (evidently an old phrase) at Thag 1, 517 Ja iv.241 Ja v.381 Ja v.461 Ja vi.491 Pv iii.82. Also at Snp 710
    vi + vas (uṣ) to shine, cp. vibhāti
    Vivaseti

    literally to make it

    1. get light; rattiṁ v. to spend the night (till it gets light) Snp 1142 Nd2 594 (= atināmeti)-vivasati is Kern’s proposed reading for vijahati (rattiṁ) at Thag 1, 451 He founds his conjecture on a variant reading vivasate & the Commentary explanation “atināmeti khepeti.” Mrs. Rhys Davids translates “waste” (i.e. vijahati)
    causative of vi + vas to shine
    Vivāda
    1. dispute, quarrel, contention DN i.236 DN iii.246 AN iv.401 Snp 596 Snp 863 Snp 877 Snp 912 Nd1 103 167 173, 260, 307 Pug 19 22 Ud 67 Ja i.165 Mil 413 Vv-a 131 There are 6 vivāda-mūlāni (roots of contention), viz. kodha, makkha, issā, sāṭheyya, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsa or anger, selfishness, envy fraudulence, evil intention, worldliness: DN iii.246 AN iii.334f. Vb 380 referred to at Ps i.130. There is another list of 10 at. AN v.78 consisting in wrong representations regarding dhamma & vinaya
    from vi + vad
    Vivādaka
    1. a quarreller Ja i.209
    from vivāda
    Vivādiyati
    (vivādeti)
    1. to quarrel Snp 832 (= kalahaṁ karoti Nd1 173), 879, 895. Pot. 3rd sg vivādiyetha (= kolahaṁ kareyya Nd1 307), & vivādayetha Snp 830 (identical explanation Nd1 170)
    denominative from vivāda
    Vivāha
    1. “carrying or sending away,” i.e. marriage, wedding DN i.99 Snp p. 105 Pv-a 144 Snp-a 448 (where distinction āvāha = kaññā-gahaṇaṁ, vivāha kaññā-dānaṁ)
    • As
    • nt. at Vin iii.135 cp. āvāha & vevāhika
    from vi + vah
    Vivāhana
    neuter
    1. giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. āvāhana) DN i.11 DN-a i.96 cp. Vin iii.135
    from vi + vah
    Vivicca
    indeclinable
    1. separating oneself from instrumental, aloof from DN i.37 AN iii.25 Ja vi.388 Dhs 160 Pug 68 Vism 139, 140 (explained in detail)
    • Doubtful reading at Pv i.119 (for viricca?)
    • As viviccaṁ (& a˚ at Ja v.434 in meaning “secretly” (= raho paṭicchannaṁ Commentary )
    absolutive of viviccati
    Viviccati
    1. to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate intranstitive Vin iv.241
    2. absolutive viviccitvā Dhs-a 165 & vivicca ‣See sep..
    3. past participle vivitta

      • Cp viveceti
      vi + vic
    Vivicchati
    1. to desire, long for, want Nett 11
    Desidentical of vindati
    Vivicchā
    feminine
    1. manifold desire, greediness, avarice Dhs-a 375 Nett 11 (where explanation “vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā “) ‣See also veviccha
    Desidentical of vid, cp. Sanskrit vivitsā
    Vivitta
    adjective
    1. separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone DN i.71 SN i.110 AN ii.210 AN iii.92 AN iv.436 AN v.207 AN v.270 Snp 221 Snp 338 Snp 810 Snp 845 Nd1 201; Kvu 605 Mil 205 DN-a i.208 Dhs-a 166 Dhp-a iii.238 Dhp-a iv.157 (so read for vivivitta!) Vb-a 365 Pv-a 28 Pv-a 141 Pv-a 283. cp. pa˚;
    past participle of viviccati; vi + vitta3
    Vivittaka
    adjective
    1. solitary Ja iv.242 (˚āvāsa)
    vivitta + ka
    Vivittatā
    feminine
    1. seclusion (= viveka) Vb-a 316 cp. Kindred Sayings i.321
    abstract from vivitta
    Vivitti
    feminine
    1. separation Dhs-a 166
    • cp. viveka
    from viviccati
    Vividha1
    adjective
    1. divers, manifold, mixed; full of, gay with (—˚) DN ii.354 Pv ii.49 Vv 359 Mil 319 Mhvs 25, 30 Snp-a 136 (in explanation of vi˚: “viharati vividhaṁ hitaṁ harati”)
    vi + vidha1
    Vividha2
    1. carrying-yoke DN i.101 SN i.78 (as variant reading khāri-vividhaṁ ‣See khāri) Ja iii.116 (parikkhāraṁ vividhaṁ ādāya, where variant reading reads khāriṁ vividhaṁ)
    for Sanskrit vivadha; vi + vah
    Viveka
    1. detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; “singleness” (of heart), discrimination (of thought) DN i.37 DN i.182 DN iii.222 DN iii.226 DN iii.283 = SN iv.191 (˚ninna citta) SN i.2 SN i.194 SN iv.365f.; v.6, 240 sq. AN i.53 AN iii.329 AN iv.224 Vin iv.241 Snp 474 Snp 772 Snp 822 Snp 851 Snp 915 Snp 1065 Nd1 158 222 Ja i.79 Ja iii.31 Dhs 160 Pug 59 68; Nett 16, 50 Dhs-a 164 166 Thag-a 64 Pv-a 43 Sdhp 471
    • viveka is given as fivefold at Ps ii.220 sq. and Vb-a 316 cp. Kindred Sayings i.321 (Buddhaghosa on SN iii.2 SN iii.8), viz. tadanga˚, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda paṭippassaddhi˚, nissaraṇa˚; as threefold at Vism 140 viz. kāya˚, citta˚, vikkhambhana˚, i.e. physically mentally, ethically; which division amounts to the same as that given at Nd1 26 with kāya˚, citta˚, upadhi˚ the latter equivalent to “nibbāna.” cp. on term Dialogues of the Buddha i.84 ‣See also jhāna. cp. pa˚. Vivekatta = vivittata
    from vi + vic
    Vivekattā = vivittatā
    1. Vb-a 316
    Vivecitatta
    neuter
    1. discrimination, specification Dhs-a 388
    abstract from vivecita, past participle of viveceti
    Viveceti
    1. to cause separation, to separate, to keep back, dissuade Vin i.64 DN i.226 SN iii.110 M. i.256; Pv iii.107 (= paribāheti Pv-a 214) Mil 339 Dhs-a 311 Nett 113, 164 (˚iyamāna)
    causative of viviccati
    Viveṭhiyati
    1. to get entangled Vin ii.117
    vi + veṭhïyati
    Vivesa
    1. distinction DN i.229 DN i.233 We should read visesa, as printed on p. 233
    ?
    Visa
    neuter
    1. poison, virus venom MN i.316 = SN ii.110 Thag 1, 418 768 Snp 1 (sappa snake venom) AN ii.110 Ja i.271 (halāhala˚ deadly p.) iii.201; iv.222 Pug 48 Mil 302 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 256 Thag-a 489
    • On visa in similes ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1907, 137. cp. āsī˚;
    1. ˚uggāra vomiting of poison Snp-a 176
    • ˚kaṇṭaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar Dhs-a 203
    • ˚kumbha a vessel filled with p. Iti 86
    • ˚pānaka a drink of p. Dhp-a ii.15
    • ˚pīta (an arrow dipped into poison (literally which has drunk poison). At another place ‣See pīta1 we have suggested reading visappita (visa + appita), i.e. “poison-applied,” which was based on reading at Vism 303 ‣See e.g. Ja v.36 Mil 198 Vism 303, 381 Dhp-a i.216
    • ˚rukkha “poison tree,” a certain tree Vism 512 Vb-a 89 DN-a i.39
    • ˚vaṇijjā trading with poison AN iii.208
    • ˚vijjā science of poison DN-a i.93

      • vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake-bites) Ja i.310
      • ˚salla a poisoned arrow Vism 503
      cp. Vedic viṣa; Avestan viš poison, Latin vīrus, Old Irish fī: all meaning “poison”
    Visaṁ
    is Pali prefix corresponding to Sanskrit viṣu (or visva˚;
    1. in meaning “diverging, on opposite sides,” apart, against; only in compound ˚vādeti and derivations, lit to speak wrong, i.e. to deceive
    ‣See vi˚
    Visaṁyutta
    1. (& visaññutta adjective

      1. (literally) unharnessed, unyoked Thag 1, 1021 (half
      2. Figuratively)
      3. detached from the world AN i.262 = iii.214 SN ii.279 (ññ) Thag 1, 1022 Snp 621 Snp 626 Snp 634 Dhp-a iii.233 (sabba-yoga˚) iv.141, 159, 185
      vi + saṁyutta
    Visaṁyoga
    (& visaññoga
    1. disconnection, separation from (—˚), dissociation Vin ii.259 (ññ) = AN iv.280 DN iii.230 (kāma-yoga˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ cp. the 4 oghas), 276 AN ii.11 AN iii.156
    vi + saṁyoga
    Visaṁvāda
    1. deceiving; negative Mil 354
    visaṁ + vāda
    Visaṁvādaka
    adjective
    1. deceiving, untrustworthy Vism 496; feminine ˚ikā Ja v.401 Ja v.410

      • not deceiving DN iii.170 AN iv.249 MN iii.33 Pug 57
      visaṁ + vādaka
    Visaṁvādana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine & ˚atā
    • feminine

      1. deceiving, disappointing. AN v.136 (˚ā) Vin iv.2
      • honesty DN iii.190
      • ˚atā
      from visaṁvādeti
    Visaṁvādayitar
    1. one who deceives another DN iii.171
    agent noun from visaṁvādeti
    Visaṁvādeti
    1. to deceive with words, to break one’s word, to lie, deceive Vin iii.143 Vin iv.1 Nett 91
    • negative Ja v.124
    visaṁ + vādeti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit visaṁvādayati Avs i.262, after the Pāli
    Visaṁsaṭṭha
    adjective
    1. separated, unconnected with instrumental MN i.480 DN-a i.59
    vi + saṁsaṭṭha
    Visaṁhata
    1. removed, destroyed Thag 1, 89
    vi + saṁhata2
    Visakkiya
    1. in ˚dūta is a special kind of messenger Vin iii.74
    vi + sakkiya?
    Visaggatā
    1. ‣See a˚;
    Visaṅka
    adjective
    1. fearless, secure; ; Sdhp 176
    vi + sanka; Sanskrit viśanka
    Visaṅkita
    adjective
    1. suspicious, anxious Thag-a 134 (Ap. v.78)
    • negative ; not perturbed, trusting secure Sdhp 128
    past participle of vi + śaṅk
    Visaṅkhāra
    1. divestment of all material things Dhp 154 (= nibbāna Dhp-a iii.129) ‣See sankhāra 3
    vi + sankhāra
    Visaṅkhita
    1. destroyed, annihilated Dhp 154 Ja i.493 (= viddhaṁsita Dhp-a iii.129)
    vi + sankhata
    Visajjati
    1. to hang on, cling to, stick to, adhere (figuratively) only in past participle visatta (q.v.)

      • The apparent
      • absolutive form visajja belongs to vissajjati
      vi + sajjati, passive of sañj; the regular Active would be visajati
    Visajjana
    visajjeti;
    1. ‣See viss˚;
    Visañña
    adjective
    1. having wrong perceptions Snp 874
    2. unconscious Ja v.159 In composition with bhū as visaññī-bhūta at Ja i.67
    vi + sañña = saññā
    Visaññin
    adjective
    1. unconscious, one who has lost consciousness; also in meaning “of unsound mind (= ummattaka Nd1 279) AN ii.52 (khitta-citta +) Mil 220 Sdhp 117. Visata & visata;
    vi + saññin
    Visaṭa
    visata;
    1. spread, diffused, wide, broad DN iii.167 (ṭ) Snp 1 (Text reads t, Burmese variant has ṭ) Ja ii.439 Ja iv.499 (t) Mil 221 Mil 354 (ṭ; + vitthata) 357. cp. anu˚;. Visata & visata
    past participle of vi + sṛ; , Sanskrit visṛta
    Visaṭā
    visatā
    feminine
    1. “hanging on,” clinging, attachment. The word seems to be a quasi-short form of visattikā. Thus at Snp 715 (= taṇhā Commentary ; spelling t) Dhs 1059 (translation “diffusion,” i.e. from vi + sṛ; spelling ṭ) = Nd2 s.v. taṇhā (spelt with t)
    abrh. formation from vi + sañj, spelling t for tt ‣See visatta. The writing of manuscripts concerning t in these words is very confused
    Visaṭṭha
    1. ‣See vissaṭṭha
    Visaṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. emission; in sukka˚; emission of semen Vin ii.38 Vin iii.112 Kvu 163–⁠2. visaṭṭhi at SN iii.133 and AN iv.52 (Text visaṭṭhi probably stands for visatti in meaning “longing, clinging to (cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit viṣakti Avs ii.191), or “love for (
    2. locative )
    3. for vissaṭṭhi, from vi + sṛj
    Visati
    1. to enter, only in combination with prefixes like upa˚, pa˚, pari˚, saṁ˚, abhisaṁ˚, etc… ‣See also vesma (house)
    viś, cp. viś dwelling-place, veśa; Latin vīcus, Gothic weihs = English ˚wick in Warwick, etc.
    Visatta
    1. hanging on (figuratively), sticking or clinging to, entangled in (locative ) AN ii.25 Snp 38 Snp 272 Nd2 597 Ja ii.146 Ja iii.241
    2. past participle of visajjati
    Visattikā
    feminine
    1. clinging to, adhering, attachment (to = locative ), sinful bent, lust, desire-It is almost invariably found as a synonym of taṇhā. Pali Commentators explain it with reference either to visaṭa (diffused), or to visa (poison). These are of course only exegetical edifying etymologies. cp. Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation § 1059 Expositor ii.468: Psalms of the Brethren 213 note 3, Kindred Sayings i.2, note 6, and the varied exegesis of the term in the Niddesas. SN i.1 SN i.24 SN i.35 SN i.107 SN i.110 AN ii.211 AN iv.434 Snp 333 Snp 768 Snp 857 Snp 1053sq. Thag 1, 519 Nd1 8f. 247 Nd2 598 Dhp-a iii.198 Dhp-a iv.43 Dhs-a 364 Nett 24 Dhs 1059
    2. visatta + ikā, abstract formation
    Visada
    adjective
    1. clean, pure, white DN ii.14 Mil 93 Mil 247 Dāvs v.28
    2. clear, manifest Mil 93 Dhs-a 321 328 (a˚) Vb-a 388f.
      1. ˚kiriyā making clear ‣See under vatthu1
      • bhāva clearness Vism 128; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 59
      cp. Sanskrit viśada
    Visadatā
    feminine
    1. purity, clearness Vism 134 (vatthu˚)
    abstract from visada
    Visanna
    1. sunk into (locative ), immersed Ja iv.399 The poetical form is vyasanna
    2. past participle of visīdati
    Visappana
    in ˚rasa at Vism 470 is not clear. Is it “spreading”
    1. or misprint for visa-pāna?
    vi + sṛp
    Visabhāga
    adjective
    1. different, unusual, extraordinary, uncommon Mil 78f. DN-a i.212 Vism 180 (purisassa itthisarīraṁ, itthiyā purisa-sarīraṁ visabhāgaṁ), 516 Dhp-a iv.52 Pv-a 118
    • ˚˚ārammaṇa pudendum muliebre Ja ii.274 ≈ iii.498
    vi + sabhāga
    Visama
    adjective
    1. uneven, unequal, disharmonious, contrary AN i.74 Pv-a 47 (vāta), 131 (a˚ = sama of the “middle” path)
    2. (morally) discrepant lawless, wrong AN iii.285 AN v.329 Snp 57 (cp. Nd2 599) Mil 250 (˚diṭṭhi)
    3. odd, peculiar, petty, disagreeable AN ii.87 Mil 112 Mil 304 Mil 357 Ja i.391 (nagaraka). As

      • neuter an uneven or dangerous or inaccessible place rough road; (figuratively) unevenness, badness, misconduct disagreeableness AN i.35 (pabbata˚) SN iv.117 Vb 368 (two sets of 3 visamāni: rāga, etc.) Mil 136 Mil 157 Mil 277 Mil 351 Ja v.70 Vv-a 301

        • visamena instrumental in a wrong way Pv iv.14
        vi + sama3
    Visamāyati
    1. to be uneven DN ii.269 (so read for visamā yanti)
    denominative from visama
    Visaya
    1. locality, spot, region; world, realm, province, neighbourhood Snp 977 Often in following combinations: petti˚; (or pitti˚) and pettika (a) the world of the manes or petas MN i.73 SN iii.224 SN v.342 SN v.356 sq. AN i.37 AN i.267 AN ii.126f.; iii.211, 339, 414 sq. iv.405 sq.; v.182 sq.; Pv ii.22; ii.79 Ja i.51 Pv-a 25f. 59 sq., 214. (b) the way of the fathers, native or proper beat or range DN iii.58 SN v.146f. AN iii.67 Ja ii.59
    2. Yama˚ the realm of Yama or the Dead Pv ii.82 (= petaloka Pv-a 107)
    3. reach, sphere (of the senses) range, scope; object, characteristic, attribute (cp. Compendium 143 note 2) SN v.218 (gocara˚); Nett 23 (iddhi˚) Mil 186 215, 316; Vism 216 (visayī-bhūta), 570 = Vb-a 182 (mahā˚ & appa˚); Kp-a 17 Snp-a 22 154 (buddha˚) 228 (identical) Pv-a 72 Pv-a 89
    4. avisaya not forming an object a wrong object, indefinable. AN v.50 Ja v.117 (so read for ˚ara) Pv-a 122 Pv-a 197
    5. object of sense, sensual pleasure Snp-a 100

      cp. Sanskrit viśaya, from vi + śī
    Visayha
    adjective
    1. possible Pv iv.112 (yathā ˚ṁ as far as possible); ; impossible MN i.207 = Vin i.157
    absolutive of visahati
    Visara
    1. a multitude DN-a i.40
    vi + sara
    Visalla
    adjective
    1. free from pain or grief SN i.180 Snp 17 Snp 86 = 367
    vi + salla
    Visaritā
    feminine at DN ii.213 in phrase iddhi˚; is doubtful reading. The gloss (K) has “visevitā.” Translation (Dialogues of the Buddha ii.246) “proficiency.” It is combined with iddhi-pahutā & iddhivikubbanatā. Buddhaghosa’s explanation is “visavanā fr vi + sru ?
    Visahati
    1. to be able, to dare, to venture Snp 1069 (= ussahati sakkoti Nd2 600) Ja i.152
    • ppr negative avisahanto unable Vv-a 69 112; and avisahamāna Ja i.91
    • absolutive visayha (q.v.)
    vi + sahati
    Visākha
    adjective
    1. having branches, forked; in ti˚ three-branched SN i.118 = M i.109
    visākhā as adjective
    Visākhā
    feminine
    1. name of a lunar mansion (nakkhatta) or month ‣See vesākha, usually as visākha˚ (-puṇṇamā), e.g. Snp-a 391 Vv-a 165
    vi + sākhā, Sanskrit viśākhā
    Visāṭita
    1. cut in pieces, smashed, broken Ja ii.163 (= bhinna Commentary )
    past participle of vi + sāṭeti
    Visāṇa
    neuter
    1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox, deer, rhinoceros) Vin i.191 AN ii.207 AN iv.376 Snp 35 (khagga˚, q.v.), 309 Pug 56 (miga˚); Ap 50 (usabha˚) Ja i.505 Mil 103
    2. (also as
    3. masculine ) the tusks of an elephant Ja iii.184 Ja v.41 Ja v.48
      1. ˚maya made of horn Vin ii.115
      cp. Sanskrit viṣāṇa
    Visāta
    adjective
    1. crushed to pieces, destroyed MN 11 102 (˚gabbha, with mūḷha-gabbha; variant reading vighāta)
    from vi + śat, cp. sāṭeti
    Visāda
    1. depression, dejection DN i.248 DN-a i.121 Sdhp 117. cp. visīdati
    from vi + sad
    Visāra
    1. spreading, diffusion, scattering Dhs-a 118
    from vi + sṛ
    Visāraka
    adjective
    1. spreading, extending, expanding Vin iii.97 (vattu˚ Text; vatthu˚ manuscripts)
    vi + sāraka, of sṛ
    Visārada
    adjective
    1. self-possessed, confident; knowing how to conduct oneself, skilled, wise DN i.175 DN ii.86 SN i.181 SN iv.246 SN v.261 AN ii.8 (vyatta +); iii.183, 203 iv.310, 314 sq.; v.10 sq. MN i.386 Ap 23 Ja iii.342 v.41 Mil 21 Sdhp 277
    • avisārada diffident Mil 20 105
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit viśārada, e.g. Av SN i.180 On etymology ‣See sārada
    Visāla
    adjective
    1. wide, broad, extensive Snp 38 Ja v.49 Ja v.215 (˚pakhuma) Mil 102 Mil 311
    1. ˚akkhī feminine having large eyes Ja v.40 Vv 371 (+ vipulalocanā; or a petī)
    2. cp. Sanskrit viśāla
    Visālatā
    feminine
    1. breadth, extensiveness Vv-a 104
    abstract from visāla
    Visāhaṭa
    adjective
    1. only negative ; imperturbed, balanced Dhs 11 15, 24 etc
    visa + āhaṭa
    Visāhāra
    1. distractedness, perturbation; negative ; balance Dhs 11 15
    visa + āhāra, or vi + saṁ + āhāra
    Visikhā
    feminine
    1. a street, road Vin iv.312 Ja i.338 Ja iv.310 Ja v.16 Ja v.434
    1. ˚kathā gossip at street corners DN i.179 MN i.513 Dhp i.90
    cp. * Sanskrit (lexicographical) viśikhā
    Visiṭṭha
    adjective
    1. distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent DN iii.159 Vv 324 Ja i.441 Mil 203 Mil 239 Dhp-a ii.15 Vv-a 1 (˚māna = vimāna), 85, 261 Sdhp 260 Sdhp 269 Sdhp 332 Sdhp 489
    • compar. ˚tara Vism 207 (= anuttara)
    • As visiṭṭhaka at Sdhp 334
    • ‣ See also abhi˚, paṭi˚, and vissaṭṭha
    past participle of visissati
    Visiṇṇa
    1. broken, crushed, fallen to pieces Ja i.174
    past participle of viseyyati
    Visineti
    1. ‣See usseneti
    Visibbita
    adjective
    1. entwined, entangled Mil 102 (saṁsibbita˚ as reduplicated-iter compound)
    past participle of vi + sibbeti, sīv to sew
    Visibbeti
    1. to unsew, to undo the stitches Vin iv.280 causative II. visibbāpeti ibid

      vi + sibbeti, sīv
    Visissati
    1. to differ, to be distinguished or eminent Nett 188. past participle visiṭṭha.
    2. causative viseseti (q.v.)
    3. passive of vi + śiṣ
    Visīdati
    1. to sink down Ja iv.223
    2. to falter, to be dejected or displeased SN i.7 AN iii.158 Pug 65
    3. pp visanna
    vi + sad; cp. visāda & past participle Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ; viṣaṇṇa Divy 44
    Visīyati
    1. to be dissolved; 3rd plural imperative medium visīyaruṁ Thag 1, 312 (cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 126)
    2. vi + sīyati; cp. Sanskrit śīyate, passive of śyā to coagulate
    Visīvana
    neuter
    1. warming oneself Ja i.326 Ja v.202 As visibbana at Vin iv.115
    from visīveti
    Visīveti
    1. to warm oneself Mil 47 Ja ii.68 Dhp-a i.225 261 ii.89. As visibbeti (in analogy to visibbeti to sew) at Vin iv.115 causative II. visīvāpeti Ja ii.69
    2. vi + sīveti, which corresponds to Sanskrit vi-śyāpayati (lexicographers!), causative of śyā, śyāyati to coagulate; literally to dissolve, thaw. The v stands for p; śyā is contracted to
    Visuṁ
    indeclinable
    1. separately, individually; separate, apart Dhp-a ii.26 (mātā-pitaro visuṁ honti). Usually repeated (distributively) visuṁ visuṁ each on his own, one by one, separately, e. g Vism 250; Mhvs 6, 44 Snp-a 583 Vv-a 38 Pv-a 214-visukaraṇa separation Thag-a 257
    cp. Sanskrit viṣu, a derivation from vi˚
    Visukkha
    adjective
    1. dried out or up Pv-a 58
    vi + sukkha
    Visukkhita
    adjective
    1. dried up Mil 303
    vi + sukkhita
    Visujjhati
    1. to be cleaned, to be cleansed, to be pure Vin ii.137 Ja i.75 Ja iii.472 past participle visuddha.
    2. causative visodheti (q.v.)
    3. vi + sujjhati
    Visuddha
    adjective
    1. clean, pure, bright; in applied meaning: purified, stainless, sanctified Vin i.105 DN iii.52 (cakkhu) SN ii.122 (identical); iv.47 (sīla) AN iv.304 (su˚) Snp 67 Snp 517 Snp 687 Nd2 601 Pug 60 Pv-a 1 (su˚) Sdhp 269 Sdhp 383
    past participle of visujjhati
    Visuddhatta
    neuter
    1. purity, purification AN ii.239
    abstract from visuddha
    Visuddhi
    feminine
    1. brightness, splendour, excellency; (ethically) purity, holiness, sanctification virtue, rectitude Vin i.105 (visuddho paramāya visuddhiyā) DN i.53 DN iii.214 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚), 288 MN i.147 SN iii.69 AN i.95 (sīla˚ & diṭṭhi˚); ii.80 (catasso dakkhiṇā˚), 195; iii.315; v.64 (paramattha˚) Snp 813 Snp 824 Snp 840 Snp 892Dhp 16 (kamma˚); Ps i.21 (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚) ii.85 (identical) Nd1 138 162; Vism 2 Snp-a 188 (˚divasa) Pv-a 13 (˚cittatā); Sdhp 447. A class of divine beings (dogmatically the highest in the stages of development viz. gods by sanctification) is called visuddhi-devā Nd2 307 Ja i.139 Vv-a 18 ‣See under deva
    vi + suddhi
    Visūka
    neuter
    1. restless motion, wriggling, twisting, twitching (better than “show, although connection with sūc would give meaning “indication, show”), almost synonymous with vipphandita. Usually in compound diṭṭhi˚; scuffling or wriggling of opinion, wrong views, heresy MN i.8 MN i.486 Snp 55 (cp Nd2 301); Pv iv.137
    1. ˚dassana visiting shows (as fairs) DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77 “visūkaṁ paṭani-bhūtaṁ dassanaṁ,” reading not clear) AN i.212 AN ii.209 Pug 58
    perhaps to sūc, sūcayati
    Visūkāyita
    neuter
    1. restlessness, impatience MN i.446
    2. disorder twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase diṭṭhi˚ with ˚visevita & ˚vipphandita; e.g. MN i.234 SN i.123 (Buddhaghosa’s explanation at Kindred Sayings i.321 is “vinivijjhan’ aṭṭhena viloman’ aṭṭhena”); ii.62 (in same combination ; Buddhaghosa at Kindred Sayings ii.203: “sabbaṁ micchādiṭṭhi-vevacanaṁ”) Dhs 381 (“disorder of opinion” translation) Nd2 271iii Vb 145 Dhs-a 253 cp. variant reading SN i.12317 (Kindred Sayings i.155 “disorders”; note p. 321)
    past participle of visūkāyeti, denominative from visūka
    Visūcikā
    feminine
    1. cholera Mil 153 Mil 167
    cp. * Sanskrit visūcikā
    Viseni˚
    ;
    1. “without an enemy,” in ˚katvā making armyless, i.e. disarming Snp 833 Snp 1078 explained in the Niddesa as “keep away as enemies, conquering” Nd1 174 = Nd2 602 (where Nd1 reads paṭisenikarā kilesā for visenikatvā kilesā). —˚bhūta disarmed, not acting as an enemy Snp 793 = 914, where Nd1 96 = 334 has the same explanation as for ˚katvā SN i.141 (+ upasanta-citta; translation “by all the hosts of evil unassailed” K.S. i.178). Kern Toevoegselen s.v. differently “not opposing” for both expressions
    vi + sena in combination with kṛ; and bhū; cp. paṭisena
    Viseneti
    1. to discard, dislike, get rid of (opposite usseneti) SN iii.89 Ps ii.167 ‣See usseneti
    Viseyyati
    1. to be broken, to fall to pieces Ja i.174 past participle visiṇṇa
    2. vi + seyyati, cp. Sanskrit śīryati, of śṛ; to crush
    Visevita
    neuter
    1. restlessness, trick, capers MN i.446 (of a horse; combined with visūkāyita
    2. disagreement SN i.123 (= viruddha-sevita Kindred Sayings i.320). Buddhaghosa at Kindred Sayings ii.203 reads ˚sedhita. cp. visūkāyita
    vi + sevita
    Visesa
    1. (mark of) distinction, characteristic, discrimination AN i.267 SN iv.210 Ja ii.9 Mil 29 Vv-a 58 131 Pv-a 50 Pv-a 60
    2. elegance splendour, excellence Ja v.151 Dhp-a i.399
    3. distinction peculiar merit or advantage, eminence, excellence extraordinary state DN i.233 (so for vivesa all through?) AN iii.349 (opposite hāna) Ja i.435 Vv-a 157 (puñña˚) Pv-a 71 (identical), 147 (sukha˚).

      • difference variety Snp-a 477 504 Vv-a 2 Pv-a 37 Pv-a 81 Pv-a 135 (
      • plural items). ablative visesato, distinctively, altogether Pv-a 1 Pv-a 259

    4. specific idea (in meditation), attainment Ja vi.69 ‣See & cp. ; Psalms of the Brethren 24, note 1; 110

      • cp. paṭi˚;

      -ādhigama specific attainment AN iv.22 MN ii.96 Nett 92 Mil 412 Dhp-a i.100 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit viśeṣadhigama Divy 174

      1. ˚gāmin reaching distinction, gaining merit AN ii.185 AN iii.349f. SN v.108
      • ˚gū reaching a higher state or attainment Ja vi.573
      • ˚paccaya ground for distinction Vv-a 20
      • ˚bhāgiya participating in, or leading to distinction or progress (spiritually) DN iii.272f. 277, 282; Nett 77; Vism 11, 88 (abstract ˚bhāgiyatā)
      from vi + śiṣ, cp. Epic Sanskrit viśeṣa
    Visesaka
    masculine or
    • neuter

      1. a (distinguishing) mark (on the forehead) Vin ii.267 (with apanga)
      2. leading to distinction Vv-a 85 Visesata = visesa
      from visesa
    Visesatā = visesa
    1. Sdhp 265
    Visesana
    neuter
    1. distinguishing, distinction, qualification, attribute Vv 1610 Ja iii.11 Ja vi.63 Snp-a 181 365, 399 Vv-a 13 instrumental avisesena (
    2. adverb ) without distinction, at all events, anyhow Pv-a 116
    3. from viseseti
    Visesikā
    feminine
    1. the Vaiśeṣika philosophy Mil 3
    from visesa
    Visesita
    1. distinguished, differentiated Mhvs 11, 32; Kp-a 18 Pv-a 56
    past participle of viseseti
    Visesin
    adjective
    1. possessing distinction, distinguished from, better than others Snp 799 Snp 842 Snp 855 Snp 905 Nd1 244
    from visesa
    Visesiya
    adjective
    1. distinguished Vv 1610 (= visesaṁ patvā Vv-a 85); variant reading visesin (= visesavant Commentary )
    gerundive of viseseti
    Viseseti
    1. to make a distinction, to distinguish, define, specify Ja v.120 Ja v.451 Snp-a 343 gerundive visesitabba (-vacana) qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13
    2. past participle visesita
    3. causative of visissati
    Visoka
    adjective
    1. freed from grief Dhp 90 Dhp-a ii.166
    vi + soka
    Visodha
    1. cleaning, cleansing, in compound dubbisodha hard to clean Snp 279
    from vi + śudh
    Visodhana
    neuter
    1. cleansing, purifying, emending Ps ii.21, 23 Pv-a 130
    from visodheti
    Visodheti
    1. to clean, cleanse, purify, sanctify Kvu 551; Pv iv.325 Dhp-a iii.158 Sdhp 321
    causative of visujjhati
    Visoseti
    1. to cause to dry up, to make wither, to destroy AN i.204 Snp 949 = 1099 Nd1 434 (= sukkhāpeti) Nd2 603 (identical)
    causative of vissussati
    Vissa1
    adjective
    1. all, every, entire; only in proper name Vissakamma. The word is antiquated in Pāli (for it sabba); a few cases in poetry are doubtful. Thus at Dhp 266 (dhamma), where Dhp-a iii.393 explains as “visama, vissagandha”; and at Iti 32 (vissantaraṁ “among all beings"? variant reading vessantaraṁ)
    Vedic viśva, to vi˚
    Vissa2
    neuter
    1. a smell like raw flesh, as ˚gandha at Dhs 625 Dhs-a 319 Snp-a 286 Dhp-a iii.393
    cp. Sanskrit visra
    Vissaka
    1. dwelling ‣See paṭi˚;
    of viś
    Vissagga
    1. dispensing, serving, donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta˚; the function of a meal Vin ii.153 iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta) Mil 9 Snp-a 19 140; and dāna˚ bestowing a gift Pv ii.927 (= pariccāga-ṭṭhāne dān'agge Pv-a 124)
    vi + sagga, vi + sṛj, cp. Sanskrit visarga
    Vissajjaka
    1. giving out, distributing Vin ii.177–⁠2. one who answers (a question) Mil 295
    2. from vissajjati
    Vissajjati
    1. . A. The pres.; vissajjati is not in use. The only forms of the simple verb system are the following: absolutive vissajja, usually written visajja, in meaning “setting free,” giving up leaving behind Snp 522 Snp 794 Snp 912 Snp 1060 Nd1 98 Nd2 596-
    2. gerundive vissajjaniya perhaps better to vissajjeti1
      1. to be answered, answerable; neuter a reply Nett 161, 175 sq. 191; and vissajjiya to be given away ‣See under a˚;.
      2. past participle vissaṭṭha

        • B. Very frequent is the
        • causative vissajjeti (also occasionally as visajj˚;) in various meanings, based on the idea of sending forth or away, viz. to emit, discharge Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṁ)
        • to send Mhvs 8 3 (lekaṁ visajjayi)
        • to dismiss Pv-a 81 (there)
        • to let loose Pv-a 74 (rathaṁ)
        • to spend, give away, bestow hand over Pug 26 (visajj˚) Nd1 262 (dhanaṁ) Mil 41 (dhaññaṁ) Pv-a 111 Pv-a 119
        • to get rid of Ja i.134 (muddikaṁ)
        • to answer (questions), to reply, retort Snp 1005 (˚essati, future ) Vv-a 71 Pv-a 15 Pv-a 59 Pv-a 87.
        • past participle vissajjita -
        • causative II. vissajjāpeti (in meanings of vissajjeti Ja iv.2 (hatthaṁ = to push away) Mil 143 Mhvs 6, 43
        vi + sajjati, of sṛj. The ss after analogy of ussajjati & nissajjati, cp. ossajjati for osajjati
    Vissajjana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. giving out, bestowing Nd1 262 (dhana˚)
      2. sending off, discharging Ja i.239 (nāvā˚ putting off to sea)

  • answer reply Vism 6, 84; often in combination pucchā˚; question and answer, e.g. Mhvs 4, 54 Pv-a 2

    from vissajjeti
  • Vissajjanaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. giving out, bestowing Pv-a 121
    2. answering Ja i.166 (pañha˚)
    from vissajjana
    Vissajjāpetar
    1. one who replies or causes to reply Dhp-a iv.199 cp. vissajjetar
    agent noun from vissajjāpeti
    Vissajjita
    1. spent, given away Snp 982–⁠2. let loose, sent off, discharged Mhvs 23, 88
    2. past participle of vissajjeti
    Vissajjetar
    1. one who answers (a question) AN i.103 (pañhaṁ). cp. vissajjāpetar
    agent noun from vissajjeti
    Vissaṭṭha
    1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mhvs 10, 68 Ja i.370 Ja iii.373 Pv-a 46 Pv-a 64 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 174
    2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated DN i.114 (= apalibuddha, i.e. unobstructed; sandiddha-vilambit’ ādi dosa-rahita DN-a i.282); ii.211 AN ii.51 AN iii.114 SN i.189 Ja vi.16 (here as vissattha -vacana)
    3. vissaṭṭha at Ja iv.219 in phrase ˚indriya means something like “strong,” distinguished. The variant reading visatta˚; suggests a probable visaṭa˚; ; it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiṭṭha˚;.

      past participle of vissajjati
    Vissaṭṭhi
    1. ‣See visaṭṭhi
    Vissattha
    1. trusting or trusted; confident; being confided in or demanding confidence, intimate friendly AN iii.114 Vin i.87 (so read for ṭṭh); iv.21 Ja ii.305 Ja iii.343 Mil 109 (bahu˚ enjoying great confidence) Snp-a 188 (˚bhāva state of confidence); Sdhp 168 Sdhp 593
    • vissaṭṭhena instrumental in confidence Vin ii.99-cp. abhi˚
    past participle of vissasati
    Vissandaka
    adjective
    1. overflowing Pv-a 119
    from vissandati
    Vissandati
    1. to flow out, to stream overflow Ja i.51 Ja v.274 Pv-a 34 (aorist ˚sandi = pagghari) 51 (ppr. ˚amāna), 80 (
    2. absolutive ˚itvā), 119 (˚anto = paggharanto), 123 (for paggharati; Text ˚eti)
    3. vi + sandati, of syand
    Vissamati
    1. to rest, repose; to recover from fatigue Ja i.485 Ja ii.70 128, 133; iii.208; iv.93 293; v.73 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 151. causative vissameti to give a rest, to make repose Ja iii.36
    2. vi + samati, of śram
    Vissamana
    neuter
    1. resting, reposing Ja iii.435
    from vissamati
    Vissametar
    1. one who provides a rest, giver of repose, remover of fatigue Ja vi.526
    agent noun from vissameti
    Vissara
    1. outcry, shout, cry of distress, scream Vin i.87 Vin ii.152 207; iv.316 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 245 (s), 279, 284 (˚ṁ karoti); Sdhp 188
    2. distress Vin iv.212 229
    from vi + sarati, of svar
    Vissarati
    1. to forget Vin i.207 Vin iv.261 Mhvs 26, 16. past participle vissarita
    2. vi + sarati, of smṛ
    Vissarita
    1. forgotten Pv-a 202
    opposite of vissarati
    Vissavati
    1. to flow, ooze Thag 1, 453 = Snp 205 (variant reading SS vissasati)
    vi + savati, of sru
    Vissasati
    & vissāseti
    1. to confide in, to put one’s trust in (locative or genitive), to be friendly with SN i.79 (vissase) Ja i.461 (vissāsayitvā); iii.148 = 525 (vissāsaye); iv.56; vi.292.
    2. past participle vissattha
    3. vi + sasati, of śvas
    Vissāsa
    1. trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement Vin i.296 308, AN ii.78 Ja i.189 Ja i.487 Mil 126 Vism 190 Vv-a 66 Pv-a 13 Pv-a 265
    • dubbissāsa difficult to be trusted Ja iv.462
    vi + sāsa, of śvas
    Vissāsaka
    1. (& ˚ika adjective

      1. intimate, confidential; trustworthy AN i.26 Mil 146 DN-a i.289
      vissāsa
    Vissāsaniya
    adjective
    1. to be trusted, trustworthy Pv-a 9 Sdhp 306 Sdhp 441; negative Ja iii.474 cp. dubbissāsaniya hard to trust Ja iv.462
    gerundive of vissāseti
    Vissāsin
    adjective
    1. intimate, confidential AN iii.136 (asanthava˚ intimate, although not acquainted)
    from vissāsa
    Vissuta
    adjective
    1. widely famed, renowned, famous Snp 137 Snp 597 Snp 998 Snp 1009 Pv ii.74; Mhvs 5, 19 Pv-a 107 (= dūra-ghuṭṭha)
    vi + suta, of śru
    Vissussati
    1. to dry up, to wither SN i.126 (in combination ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss˚). Spelling here visuss˚, but ss at SN iii.149 causative visoseti (q.v.)
    2. vi + śuṣ
    Vissota
    adjective
    1. flowedaway, wasted Mil 294
    vi + sota, of sru
    Vihaga
    1. a bird (literally going through the sky) DN-a i.46
    • ˚˚pati lord of birds, a garuḷa Dāvs iv.33, 38 55
    viha, sky, + ga
    Vihaṅga
    1. = vihaga, Ja v.416 Pv-a 154 Pv-a 157; Sdhp 241
    Vihaṅgama
    adjective
    1. going through the air, flying; masculine a bird AN ii.39 AN iii.43 Snp 221 Snp 606 Thag 1, 1108 Ja i.216 Ja iii.255 DN-a i.125 = Dhs-a 141
    2. viha + gam
    Vihaññati
    1. to be struck or slain; to be vexed or grieved, to get enraged, to be annoyed, suffer hardship; to be cast down Snp 168f.; Pv ii.117 (= vighātaṁ āpajjati Pv-a 150); iv.52 (with same explanation) Ja i.73 359; ii.442; v.330 DN-a i.289
    • ppr. vihaññamāna Snp 1121 (with long and detailed exegesis at Nd2 604) SN i.28 (a˚) Pv-a 150
    • past participle vihata DN-a i.231
    passive of vihanati
    Vihata1
    1. struck, killed, destroyed, impaired Iti 100 (where AN i.164 reads vigata) Ja vi.171 Sdhp 313 425
    past participle of vihanati
    Vihata2
    adjective
    1. broad, wide Ja vi.171 (= puthula Commentary )
    cp. Sanskrit vihṛti
    Vihanati
    1. to strike, kill, put an end to, remove AN iii.248 (kankhaṁ; variant reading vitarati perhaps to be preferred) Snp 673 Pot. 3rd singular vihane Snp 975 (cp. Nd1 509) & vihāne Snp 348 = Th 1, 1268. absolutive vihacca ‣See abhi˚-
    2. passive vihaññati (q.v.)
    3. past participle vihata
    4. vi + hanati
    Viharaṇa
    neuter
    1. abiding, dwelling Dhs-a 164 168
    from viharati
    Viharati
    1. to stay, abide, dwell, sojourn (in a certain place); in general: to be, to live; applied: to behave lead a life (as such explained with “iriyati” at Vism 16). Synonyms are given at Vb 194 with iriyati vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti, carati; cp. Vb-a 262 ‣See e.g. DN i.251 Snp 136 Snp 301 Snp 925 Pug 68 Dhs-a 168 DN-a i.70 132 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 78
    • Special Forms:
    • aorist 3rd singular vihāsi Snp p. 16; Pv ii.960; Mhvs 5, 233 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 121; 3rd
    • plural vihiṁsu Thag 1, 925 & vihaṁsu AN ii.21 fut viharissati AN iii.70
    • vihessati Thag 1, 257
    • vihissati Thag 2 181; and vihāhisi Ja i.298 (doubtful reading!), where Commentary explains as “vijahissati, parihāyissati”; with phrase sukhaṁ vihāhisi cp. dukkhaṁ viharati at AN i.95 and ‣See also vihāhesi.
    • past participle not found
    vi + harati
    Vihaviha
    1. a sort of bird Thag 1, 49 (variant reading cihaciha). The Commentary explains by “parillaka.”
    for vihaga
    Vihāmi
    1. at Ja vi.78 (lohitaṁ) is poetical for vijahāmi; Commentary explains as niṭṭhubhāmi, i.e. I spit out
    Vihāya
    1. is absolutive of vijahati (q.v.)

    Vihāyasa
    1. the air, sky Pv-a 14 Cases adverb ially:; ˚yasā through the air Mhvs 12, 10 & ˚yasaṁ identical Ja iv.47 cp. vehāyasa & vehāsa;
    2. cp. Sanskrit viha & vihāyasa
    Vihāra
    1. (as
    2. masculine & adjective) spending one’s time (sojourning or walking about), staying in a place, living place of living, stay, abode (in general) Vv-a 50 (jala˚) Pv-a 22 Pv-a 79; eka˚; living by oneself SN ii.282f.; jaṅghā˚ wandering on foot Pv-a 73
    3. divā˚ passing the time of day Snp 679 Pv-a 142 ‣See also below 3 a
    4. (applied meaning) state of life, condition, mode of life (in this meaning almost identical with that of vāsa2), e.g. ariya˚ best condition SN v.326 Snp-a 136
    5. dibba˚ supreme condition (of heart) Mil 225
    6. brahma˚ divine state SN v.326 Snp-a 136 Vism 295 sq. (ch. ix.); phāsu˚; comfort AN iii.119 132; sukha˚; happiness SN iii.8 SN v.326 AN i.43 AN ii.23 iii.131 sq.; iv.111 sq., 230 sq.; v.10 sq. See further DN i.145 DN i.196 DN iii.220 (dibba, brahma, ariya), 250 (cha satata˚), 281 SN ii.273 (jhāna˚); iii.235 (identical) AN iii.294 (˚ṁ kappeti to live one’s life); Ps ii.20; Nett 119 sq. 3. (a) a habitation for a Buddhist mendicant, an abode in the forest (arañña˚), or a hut; a dwelling, habitation lodging (for a bhikkhu), a single room Vin ii.207f. DN ii.7 AN iii.51 AN iii.299 (yathāvihāraṁ each to his apartment) Snp 220 (dūra˚ a remote shelter for a bhikkhu) 391; Vism 118 (different kinds; may be taken as c.)-(b) place for convention of the bhikkhus, meeting place; place for rest & recreation (in garden or park DN-a; i.133
    7. (c) (later) a larger building for housing bhikkhus, an organized monastery, a Vihāra Vin i.58 iii.47 SN i.185 (˚pāla the guard of the monastery) Ja i.126 Mil 212 Vism 292 Dhp-a i.19 (˚cārikā visit to the monastery), 49 (˚pokkharaṇī), 416; Mhvs 19, 77 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 20 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 141. 151; and passim ‣See also Dictionary of Names. The modern province Behar bears its name from the vihāras. Viharaka = vihara
    from viharati
    Vihāraka = vihāra
    1. 3 (room, hut) Thag 2, 94 (= vasanakaovaraka Thag-a 90)
    Vihārika
    adjective = vihārin; in saddhi˚; co-resident AN iii.70
    Vihārin
    adjective (—˚)
    1. dwelling, living; being in such & such a state or condition DN i.162 (appa-dukkha˚) 251 (evaṁ˚) AN i.24 (araṇa˚), 26 (mettā) Iti 74 (appamāda˚) Snp 45 (sādhu˚), 375; Pv iv.133 (araṇa˚) Pv-a 77 Pv-a 230 (mettā˚) Vv-a 71
    • eka˚ living alone SN ii.282f.; iv.35; opposite saddhi˚; together with another; a coresident brother-bhikkhu SN ii.204 SN iv.103 AN ii.239
    from vihāra
    Vihāhesi
    1. "he banished” at Ja iv.471 is 3rd singular aorist causative of vijahati ; explained in Commentary by pabbājesi
    • Another form vihāhisi ‣See under viharati & cp. ; viheti2
    Vihiṁsati
    1. to hurt, injure, harass, annoy SN i.165 Iti 86 Snp 117 Snp 451 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 198
    vi + hiṁsati
    Vihiṁsanā
    feminine a Commentary word for vihiṁsā Vb-a 75 A similar vihiṁsakā occurs at Pv-a 123
    Vihiṁsā
    feminine (& adjective; ˚a
    1. hurting, injuring, cruelty, injury DN iii.215 226 (˚vitakka) SN i.202 SN ii.151 (˚dhātu) AN iii.448 Snp 292 Nd1 207 (˚saññā), 386, 501 (˚vitakka) Vb 86 363 (˚vitakka) Dhs 1348 Pug 25 Nett 97 Mil 337 Mil 367 Mil 390 Dhs-a 403 Vb-a 74 (˚dhātu), 118 (˚vitakka) Sdhp 510. negative avihiṁsā ‣See sep
    • ‣ See also vihesā
    abstract from vi + hiṁs, to injure
    Vihita
    adjective
    1. arranged, prepared, disposed, appointed; furnished, equipped Ja vi.201 (loka) Mil 345 (nagara) DN i.45 SN iii.46 Pug 55 (aneka˚); Mhvs 10 93 Pv-a 51 (suṭṭhu˚). añña˚; engaged upon something else Vin iv.269
    past participle of vidahati
    Vihitaka
    adjective = vihita DN iii.28f. (kathaṁ v. aggaññaṁ how as the beginning of things appointed?); -añña˚ engaged upon something else Ja iv.389 (or does it belong to āhāra. in sense of “prepared by somebody else"?).
    Vihitatā
    feminine
    1. in añña˚; being engaged upon something else Dhp-a i.181
    abstract from vihita
    Vihīna
    adjective
    1. left, given up, abandoned Sdhp 579
    past participle of vijahati
    Viheṭhaka
    adjective
    1. harassing, oppressing, annoying Ja i.504 Ja v.143 Sdhp 89. negative a˚ ‣See sep
    from viheṭheti
    Viheṭhana
    neuter
    1. harassing, hurting; oppression Vb-a 74 Vv-a 68 Pv-a 232
    from viheṭheti
    Viheṭhanaka
    adjective
    1. oppressing, hurting, doing harm Ja ii.123
    from viheṭhana
    Viheṭheti
    1. to oppress, to bring into difficulties, to vex, annoy, plague hurt DN i.116 DN i.135 DN ii.12 Snp 35 Ja i.187 Ja ii.267 Ja iv.375 Mil 6 Mil 14 Dhp-a 191 Vv-a 69 (passive ˚iyamāna)
    2. vi + heṭheti, of hīḍ or heḷ to be hostile. Same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e.g. MVastu iii.360, Divy 42 Divy 145 etc.
    Viheti1
    1. to be afraid (of) Ja v.154 (= bhāyati Commentary ). cp. vibheti
    for bibheti?
    Viheti2
    1. to be given up, to disappear, to go awav Ja iv.216 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. wrongly = vi + eti
    contracted passive of vijahāti = vihāyati, cp. vihāhesi
    Vihesaka
    adjective
    1. annoying, vexing, troubling Vin iv.36 Dīpavaṁsa i.47. feminine ˚ikā Vin iv.239 241
    2. from viheseti
    Vihesā
    feminine
    1. vexation, annoyance, injury; worry MN i.510 MN ii.241f. SN i.136 SN iii.132 SN iv.73 SN v.357 DN iii.240 (a˚) Vin iv.143 (+ vilekhā) AN iii.245 291 Snp 247 Snp 275 Snp 277 Vb 369 Nett 25 Mil 295 Dhp-a i.55
    for vihiṁsā
    Vihesikā
    feminine
    1. fright Ja iii.147 (Commentary says “an expression of fearfullness”)
    probably for Sanskrit *vibhīṣikā, from bhī, Epic Sanskrit bhīṣā, cp. bhīṣma = Pali bhiṁsa (q.v.)
    Viheseti
    1. to harass, vex, annoy, insult SN iv.63 SN v.346 AN iii.194 Vin iv.36f. Ud 44 Snp 277 Pv iv.147 (vihesaṁ, aorist ); iv.149 (vihesayi, aorist )
    vi + hiṁs, or denominative from vihesā, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 102
    Vīci
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. a wave Ja i.509 Mil 117 (jala˚), 319 (˚puppha wave-flower figuratively); Vism 63 (samudda˚); Dāvs iv.46 Dhs-a 116 Vism 143
      2. interval, period of time (cp. “tide” time interval) Ja v.271 (˚antara, in Avīci definition as “uninterrupted state of suffering”). In contrast pair avīci
      3. adjective uninterrupted, without an interval,; savīci with periods, in definition of jarā at Vb-a 99 & Dhs-a 328 where; avīci means “not changing quickly,” and savīci “changing quickly.” Also in definition of sadā (continuously) as “avīci-santati” at Nd2 631. cp. avīci
      cp. late Sanskrit vīci wave; Vedic vīci only in meaning “deceit”; perhaps connected with Latin vicis Anglo-Saxon wīce = English week, literally “change,” cp. tide
    Vījati
    1. to fan Ja i.165 Snp-a 487 Vv-a 6 (Text bījati). - causative vījeti Dhp-a iv.213 Mhvs 5, 161

      • passive vījiyati : ppr. vījiyamāna getting fanned Ja iii.374 (so read for vijīy˚) Pv-a 176 (so for vijjamāna!).
      • past participle vījita
      vīj
    Vījana
    neuter
    1. a fan, fanning; in vījana-vāta a fanning wind, a breeze Snp-a 174
    from vīj, cp. Classical Sanskrit vījana
    Vījanī
    feminine
    1. a fan Vv 472 (Text bījanī, variant reading vīj˚) Ja i.46 Vism 310 Dhp-a iv.39 Vv-a 147 Pv-a 176 Kp-a 95. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin ii.130 viz. vākamaya˚, usīra˚, mora-piñcha˚; , or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock’s tail
    from vījana, of vīj
    Vījita
    1. fanned Pv iii.117 (˚anga). *Vinati
    past participle of vījati
    *Vīṇati
    1. (?), doubtful ‣See apa˚ & pa˚; ;. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. wrong in treating it as a verb “to ‣See.”
    Vīṇā
    feminine
    1. the Indian lute, mandoline SN i.122 = Sn 449 (kacchā bhassati “let the lyre slide down from hollow of his arm” Kindred Sayings i.153) Thag 1, 467 SN iv.196 (six parts) AN iii.375 Ja iii.91 Ja v.196 Ja v.281 (named Kokanada “wolf’s howl”); vi.465 = 580 Vv 6419 8110 Mil 53 (all its various parts) Vv-a 138 161, 210 Pv-a 151
    • vīṇaṁ vādeti to play the lute Mhvs 31, 82 Thag-a 203
    1. ˚daṇḍaka the neck of a lute Ja ii.225
    • ˚doṇikā the sounding board of a lute (cp. doṇī1 4) Vism 251 Vb-a 234 Kp-a 45
    cp. Vedic vīṇā
    Vīta1
    adjective
    1. deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata˚;. Very frequent as first part of a compound, as e.g. the following:
    1. ˚accika without a flame, i.e. glowing, aglow (of cinders), usually combined with ˚dhūma “without smoke MN i.365 SN ii.99 (so read for vītacchika = iv.188 = M i.74 DN ii.134 Ja i.15 Ja i.153 Ja iii.447 v.135 Dhp-a ii.68 Vism 301
    2. ˚iccha free from desire Ja ii.258
    • ˚gedha without greed Snp 210 Snp 860 Snp 1100 Nd1 250 Nd2 606
    • ˚taṇha without craving Snp 83 Snp 741 Snp 849 Snp 1041 Snp 1060 Nd1 211 Nd2 607
    • ˚tapo without heat Ja ii.450

      • (d)dara fearless Thag 1, 525 Dhp 385
      • ˚dosa without anger Snp 12
      • ˚macchara without envy, unselfish Snp 954 Nd1 444 Ja v.398 Pv iii.115
      • ˚mada not conceited So 328 cp. AN ii.120
      • ˚mala stainless (cp. vimala) SN iv.47 SN iv.107 DN-a i.237 Mil 16
      • ˚moha without bewilderment Snp 13 I have to remark that the reading vīta˚ seems to be well established. It occurs very frequently in the Apadāna. Should we take it in meaning of “excessive"? And are we confronted with an attribute of osadhi, the morning star which points to Babylonian influence (star of the East)? As it occurs in the Vatthugāthās of the Pārāyanavagga, this does not seem improbable -raṁsi rayless (?) Snp 1016 (said of the sun; the expression is not clear. One MS. of Nd2 at this passage reads pīta˚; , i.e. with yellow, i.e. golden, rays; which is to be preferred). cp. note in Index to Snp-a
      • ˚rāga passionless Snp 11 Snp 507 Snp 1071 Pug 32 Pv ii.47 Mil 76 and frequently elsewhere
      • ˚lobha without greed Snp 10 Snp 469 Snp 494
      • ˚vaṇṇa colourless Snp 1120
      • ˚salla without a sting SN iv.64
      • ˚sārada not fresh, not unexperienced i.e. wise Iti 123
      vi + ita, past participle of i
    Vīta2
    1. woven Vin iii.259 (su˚)
    past participle of vāyati1, or vināti
    Vītaṁsa
    1. a bird-snare (BR.: “jedes zum Fangen von Wild & Vögeln dienende Gerät”), a decoy bird Thag 1, 139 Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. “vogelstrik.”
    from vi + tan, according to BR. The word is found in late Sanskrit (lexicographical) as vītaṁsa. BR compare Sanskrit avataṁsa (garland ‣See Pali vaṭaṁsa) & uttaṁsa. The etymology is not clear
    Vīti˚
    1. ; is the contracted prepositional combination vi + ati, representing an emphatic ati, e.g. in the following:

    -(k)kama (1) going beyond, transgression, sin Vin iii.112 Vin iv.290 Ja i.412 Ja iv.376 Pug 21 Mil 380 Vism 11, 17 Dhp-a iv.3

  • going on, course (of time) Pv-a 137 (˚ena by and by; variant reading anukkamena) -kiṇṇa sprinkled, speckled, gay with Ja v.188

    • ˚nāmeti to make
    • passive (time), to spend the time, to live, passive wait Ja iii.63 Ja iii.381 Dhp-a ii.57 Vv-a 158 Pv-a 12 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 76
    • ˚patati to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down Snp 688 AN v.88 = Mil 392
    • ˚missa mingled, mixed (with) MN i.318 DN iii.96 Ja vi.151
    • ˚vatta having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent SN i.14 SN i.145 SN iii.225 SN iv.52 AN ii.44 Snp 6 Snp 395 Snp 796 Ja i.374 Thag-a 170 Pv-a 21 Pv-a 55 Pv-a 83
    • ˚sāreti

      1. DN i.52 DN i.90 DN i.118 DN i.152 Snp 419 cp. Mil 19 Ja iv.98 (shortened to sārāṇīyaṁ vītisārimha; explained with sārayimha); v.264
      2. ˚haraṇa passing (mutually), carrying in between Ja vi.355 (bhojanānaṁ)
      3. ˚harati to associate with (at a meal) SN i.162
      • ˚hāra, in pada˚ “taking over or exchange of steps,” a stride SN i.211 AN iv.429 Ja vi.354 Same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit e.g. MVastu i.35; iii.162
      from vi + ati sṛ; not with Childers from smṛ; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyatisārayati to make
    • passive (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaṁ), greet. Often in phrase sārāṇīyaṁ sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ vītisāreti [for which Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sammodanīṁ saṁrañjanīṁ vividhāṁ kathāṁ vyatisārayati e.g. Avs ii.140
  • Vīthi
    feminine
    1. street, way, road, path, track. AN v.347 AN v.350f. Vv 836 Ja i.158 (garden path); v.350 (dve vīthiyo gahetvā tiṭṭhati, of a house); vi.276 (v and raccha Dhp-a i.14 Vv-a 31 Pv-a 54
    2. ˚antaravīthiyaṁ (
    3. locative ) in the middle of the road Ja i.373 Pv-a 96
    4. ˚˚sabhāga share of road Ja i.422
    5. ˚˚siṅghāṭaka crossroad Dhp-a iv.4
    6. Of the path of the stars and heavenly bodies Ja i.23 Vv-a 326
    7. Various streets (roads paths) are named either after the professions carried on in them, e.g. dantakāra˚; street of ivory-workers Ja i.320
    8. pesakāra˚ weaver st. Dhp-a i.424
    9. bhatakāra˚ soldier st. Dhp-a i.233 -or after the main kind of traffic frequenting these, e.g. nāga˚ elephant road Vv-a 316
    10. miga˚ animal rd. Ja i.372 -or after special occasions (like distinguished people passing by this or that road), e.g. buddha˚; the road of the Buddha Dhp-a ii.80
    11. rāja˚ King st. Thag-a 52 Mhvs 20, 38
    12. (t.t in psychology) course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition, cp. Compendium 25, 124, 241 (vinicchaya˚), 266
    13. Vism 187 (kammaṭṭhāna˚); Kp-a 102 (viññāṇa˚). —˚citta process of cognition (literally processed cognition) Vism 22 Dhs-a 269
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vīthi, to Indogermanic *ṷei̯ā- to aim at, as in Latin via way, Sanskrit veti to pursue; Latin venor to hunt
    Vīthika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. having (as) a road Mil 322 (satipaṭṭhāna˚, in the city of Righteousness)
    from vīthi
    Vīmaṁsaka
    adjective
    1. testing, investigating, examining SN iii.6f. Snp 827 Nd1 166 Ja i.369
    from vīmaṁsā
    Vīmaṁsati
    (& ˚eti
    1. “to try to think,” to consider, examine find out, investigate, test, trace, think over Snp 215 (˚amāna), 405 Ja i.128 Ja i.147 Ja i.200 Ja vi.334 Mil 143 Pv-a 145 Pv-a 215 Pv-a 272; Sdhp 91. absolutive ˚itvā Ja vi.368 Mhvs 5, 36 Pv-a 155 infinitive ˚ituṁ Mhvs 37, 234 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 155 Pv-a 283 (sippaṁ).
    2. causative II, vīmaṁsāpeti to cause to investigate Ja v.110

      • cp. pari˚;
      Vedic mīmāṁsate, Desidentical of man. The Pali form arose through dissimilation m → v, cp. Geiger Pali Grammar 46, 4
    Vīmaṁsana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. trying, testing; finding out, experiment Vin iii.79 Ja iii.55 Mhvs 22 78 Pv-a 153
      from vīmaṁsati
    Vīmaṁsā
    feminine
    1. consideration, examination, test, investigation, the fourth of the Iddhipādas, q.v. DN iii.77 (˚samādhi), 222 SN v.280 AN i.39 AN i.297 AN iii.37 346; v.24, 90, 338; Ps i.19; ii.123; Kvu 508 Dhs 269 Vb 219 (˚samādhi), 222, 227; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 2; Nett 16 (˚samādhi), 42 DN-a i.106 Snp-a 349 (vīmaṁsa-kāra = sankheyya-kāra)
    • cp. pari˚;
    from vīmaṁsati
    Vīmaṁsin
    1. = vīmaṁsaka Snp 877 Nd1 283 DN-a i.106
    Vīra
    1. manly, mighty, heroic; a hero SN i.137 Snp 44 Snp 165 (not dhīra), 642, 1096, 1102 Thag 1, 736 (nara˚ hero) Nd2 609 Dhp-a iv.225
    • mahā˚ a hero SN i.110 SN i.193 SN iii.83 (of the Arahant)
    • vīra is often an epithet of the Buddha
    1. ˚aṅgarūpa built like a hero, heroic, divine DN i.89 ii.16; iii.59, 142, 145 SN i.89 Snp p. 106; explained as “devaputta-sadisa-kāya” at DN-a i.250 & Snp-a 450 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit equivalent is var -anga-rūpin (distorted from vīr˚), e.g. MVastu i.49; ii.158; iii.197
    Vedic vīra; cp. Avestan vīra, Latin vir, virtus “virtue”; Gotu. wair, Old High German, Anglo-Saxon wer; to vayas strength etc.; cp. viriya
    Vīyati
    1. ‣See viyyati
    passive of vināti
    Vīvadāta
    adjective
    1. clean, pure Snp 784 Snp 881 Visati & visam
    vi + avadāta, the metric form of vodāta
    Vīsati
    vīsaṁ
    indeclinable [both for Vedic viṁśati; cp. Avestan vīsaiti, Latin viginti, Old Irish fiche, etc.; from Indogermanic *ṷi + komt (decad), thus “two decads.” cp. vi˚ number 20
    • Both forms are used indiscriminately-(1) vīsati, e.g. Vin ii.271 (˚vassa, as minimum age of ordination) Snp 457 (catu-vīsat'akkharaṁ) Ja i.89 (˚sahassa bhikkhū); iii.360 Vb-a 191f. Dhp-a i.4 (ekūna˚, 19); ii.9, 54; iii.62 (˚sahassa bhikkhū, as followers); as vīsatiṁ at Dhp-a ii.61 (vassa-sahassāni). (2) vīsaṁ; e.g. Snp 1019 (˚vassa-sata) Iti 99 (jātiyo) Ja i.395 (˚yojana-sata); v.36 (˚ratana-sata) Dhp-a i.8 ii.91 (˚yojana-sataṁ)
    Vīhi
    1. rice, paddy Vin iv.264 (as one of the 7 kinds of āmaka-dhañña) Ja i.429 Ja iii.356 Mil 102 Mil 267 Vism 383 (˚tumba) Dhp-a i.125 Dhp-a iii.374 (˚piṭaka)
    cp. Vedic vrīhi
    Vuccati
    1. to be called DN i.168 DN i.245 Snp 436 Snp 759 Snp 848 Snp 861 Snp 946 Nd1 431; Nd2 s.v. katheti Snp-a 204 Dhp-a ii.35 ‣See also vatti. past participle vutta
    2. passive of vac
    Vuṭṭha
    1. (water) shed, rained Pv i.56 Pv-a 29 ‣See also vaṭṭa & vaṭṭha;
    past participle of vassati1
    Vuṭṭhavant
    1. = vusitavant, Nd2 179 284, 611. Vutthahati & vutthati;
    Vuṭṭhahati
    vuṭṭhāti;
    1. to rise, arise; to be produced Vin ii.278 (gabbha)
    2. to rise out of ablative, to emerge from, to come back SN iv.294 Vism 661 (vuṭṭhāti).
    3. past participle vuṭṭhita.
    4. causative vuṭṭhāpeti (1) to ordain, rehabilitate Vin iv.226 317 sq. (= upasampādeti). (2) to rouse out of ablative, to turn away from AN iii.115
    the sandhi form of uṭṭhahati (q.v.), with euphonic v, which however appears in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as vyut˚ (i.e. vi + ud˚); vyuttisṭhate “to come back from sea” Divy 35 and frequently in Avs, e. g i.242
    Vuṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. rise, origin Ja i.114 (gabbha˚)
    2. ordination, rehabilitation (in the Order) Vin iv.320 Mil 344
    3. (cp. uṭṭhāna 3 rousing, rising out, emerging, emergence; applied as a religious term to revival from jhāna -abstraction (cp Compendium 67, 215 note 4; Dhs. trln, § 1332) MN i.302 SN iii.270 SN iv.294 AN iii.311 AN iii.418 AN iii.427f.; Vism 661 (in detail), 681 sq. (identical) Dhs 1332 Nett 100; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 272, 346. —˚gāminī (-vipassanā-ñāṇa) “insight of discernment leading to uprising” (Compendium 67) Vism 661, 681 sq.

      the sandhi form of uṭṭhāna
    Vuṭṭhānatā
    feminine
    1. rehabilitation; in āpatti˚; forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250
    from vuṭṭhāna
    Vuṭṭhānima
    1. is an expression for a certain punishment (pain) in purgatory MN i.337 (vuṭṭhānimaṁ nāma vedanaṁ vediyamāna)
    ?
    Vuṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. rain SN i.172 = Sn 77 (figuratively = saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi) AN iii.370 AN iii.378 (vāta˚) Iti 83 Dhp 14 Ja vi.587 (˚dhārā) Ap 38 (figuratively), 52 (amata˚) Mil 416 Vism 37, 234 (salila˚); Mhvs 1, 24 Snp-a 34 224 Pv-a 139 (˚dhārā shower of rain)
    • dubbuṭṭhi lack of rain, drought (opposite suvuṭṭhi Ja ii.367 = vi.487; Vism 512
    from vṛṣ ‣See vassati1 & cp. Vedic vṛṣṭi
    Vuṭṭhikā
    feminine = vuṭṭhi; only in compound dubbuṭṭhikā time of drought, lack of rain DN i.11 DN-a i.95 Iti 64f. (as avuṭṭhika -sama resembling a drought) Dhp-a i.52
    Vuṭṭhita
    1. risen (out of), aroused, having come back from ablative DN ii.9 (paṭisallāṇā); Snp p. 59 SN iv.294
    past participle of vuṭṭhahati; cp. uṭṭhita
    Vuṭṭhimant
    adjective
    1. containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Thag 2, 487 (= deva, i.e. rain-god or sky Thag-a 287) Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. wrongly = *vyuṣṭi˚, i.e. from vi + uṣ (vas) to shine, “luisterrijk,” i.e. lustrous, resplendent. Vuddha & vuddha;
    from vuṭṭhi, cp. Vedic vṛṣṭimant in same meaning
    Vuḍḍha
    vuddha;
    1. old (figuratively venerable) - 1. vuḍḍha Pv ii.114; Mhvs 13, 2
    • vuddha MN ii.168 Ja v.140 Snp p. 108 (+ mahallaka) DN-a i.283
    • past participle of vaḍḍhati
    Vuḍḍhaka
    adjective
    1. old; feminine ˚ikā old woman Thag 2, 16 Vuddhi & vuddhi; vuḍḍha + ka
    Vuḍḍhi
    vuddhi;
    feminine
    1. increase, growth, furtherance, prosperity
    1. -1. vuḍḍhi Pv-a 22 Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (all three almost tautological) Mil 51 Vism 129
    • vuddhi MN i.117 (+ virūḷhi etc.) SN ii.205f.; iii.53; v.94, 97 AN iii.76 (opposite parihāni), 404 (+ virūḷhi), 434 (kusalesu dhammesu); v.123 sq. Iti 108 Ja v.37 (˚ppatta grown up) Vism 271, 439 (so read for buddhi) Dhp-a ii.82 87 Sdhp 537. *Vunati
    • a by-form of vaḍḍhi
    *Vuṇāti
    1. . The two meanings of the root vṛ; as existing in Sanskrit are also found in Pāli but only peculiar to the causative vāreti (the form
    2. aorist avari as given by Childers should be read avāriṁsu Mhvs 36, 78). The present tense varati is only found in meaning “to wish” (except in preposition compounds. like saṁvarati to restrain)

      • Definitions of vṛ; : Dhtp 255 var varaṇa-sambhattisu; 274 val = saṁvaraṇe ‣See valaya 606 var = āvaraṇ'icchāsu
      1. -1. to hinder, obstruct; to conceal, protect (on meanings “hinder” and “conceal” cp. rundhati; Indogermanic *ṷer and *ṷel, cp. Latin volvo, aperio etc ‣See vivarati. The past participle *vuta only in combination with prefixes, like pari˚, saṁ˚ Iti also appears as *vaṭa in vivaṭa
      2. to wish, desire Indogermanic *ṷel, cp. Sanskrit varaṇa, varīyān “better,” Latin volo to intend, Gothic wiljan to “will, wilja = English will
      3. Pres. varati (cp. vaṇeti): imper varassu Ja iii.493 (varaṁ take a wish; Pot. vare Pv ii.940 (= vareyyāsi Commentary ); ppr. varamāna Pv ii.940 (= patthayamāna Pv-a 128).
      4. past participle does not occur
      we are giving this base as such only from analogy with the Sanskrit form vrṇāti (vṛṇoti); from the point of view of Pāli grammar we must consider a present tense varati as legitimate (cp. saṁ˚). There are no forms from the base vuṇāti found in the present tense; the Caus vāreti points directly to varati
    Vuṇhi˚
    1. ; (& instrumental; vuṇhinā at Pgdp 13, 15, 19, 35 must be meant for v-uṇha˚ (& v'uṇhena); , i.e. heat ‣See uṇha
    Vutta1
    said DN-a i.17 (˚ṁ hoti that is to say) Dhp-a ii.21 75, 80 Snp-a 174
    1. ˚vādin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the truth MN i.369 SN ii.33 SN iii.6
    past participle of vatti, vac; cp. utta
    Vutta2
    1. sown SN i.134 (khetta) Ja i.340 Ja iii.12 Ja vi.14 Mil 375 (khetta) Pv-a 7 Pv-a 137 Pv-a 139
    past participle of vapati1
    Vutta3
    1. shaven MN ii.168 (˚siro). cp. nivutta2. Vutta-vela
    past participle of vapati2
    Vutta-velā
    1. at Ja iv.45 (tena vutta-velāyaṁ & ittarāya vutta-velāya) is by Kern,; Toevoegselen s.v. vutta2 fancifully & wrongly taken as *vyuṣṭa (= vi + uṣṭa, past participle of; vas to shine), i.e. dawned; it is however simply vutta1 = at the time said by him (or her)
    Vuttaka
    neuter
    1. what has been said, saying; only in title of a canonical book “iti-vuttakaṁ” (“logia”) ‣See under iti
    vutta1 + ka. The Pali conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived from vṛt “to happen” etc. (cp. vuttin & vattin, both from; vṛt, & vutti) The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit equivalent is; vṛttaka “tale” (literally happening) e.g. Divy 439
    Vuttamāna
    1. at SN i.129 read as vattamāna
    Vuttari
    1. of Dhp 370 is pañca-v-uttari(ṁ), cp. Dhp-a iv.109
    Vutti
    feminine
    1. mode of being or acting, conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit SN i.100 (ariya˚; cp. ariya-vāsa) Snp 81 = Mil 228 (= jīvitavutti Snp-a 152) Snp 68 Snp 220 Snp 326 Snp 676 Ja vi.224 (= jīvita-vutti Commentary ); Pv ii.914 (= jīvita Pv-a 120); iv.121 (= jīvikā Pv-a 229) Mil 224 Mil 253 Vv-a 23
    from vṛt, cp. vattati; Sanskrit vṛtti
    Vuttika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. living, behaving, acting AN iii.383 (kaṇḍaka˚) Pv-a 120 (dukkha˚); sabhāga˚ living in mutual courtesy or properly, always combined with sappatissa, e.g. Vin i.187 Vin ii.162 AN iii.14f.
    vutti + ka
    Vuttitā
    feminine (—˚)
    1. condition Vism 310 (āyatta˚)
    abstract formation from vutti
    Vuttin
    adjective
    1. = vuttika; in sabhāga˚ Vin i.45 Ja i.219 cp. vattin
    cp. Sanskrit vṛttin
    Vuttha1
    1. clothed: not found. More usual nivattha
    past participle of vasati1
    Vuttha2
    1. having dwelt, lived or spent (time), only in connection with vassa (rainy season) or vāsa (identical ‣See vāsa2) ‣See e.g. Dhp-a i.7 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 43 Ja i.183 (˚vāsa). With reference to vassa “year” at Ja iv.317
    • At Dhp-a i.327
    • vuttha stands most likely for vuddha (arisen, grown), as also in abstract vutthattaṁ at Dhp-a i.330
    • ‣ See also parivuttha, pavuttha & vusita;
    past participle of vasati2
    Vutthaka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. dwelt, lived, only in pubba˚; where he had lived before Mhvs 1, 53 (so for ˚vuttaka
    vuttha2 + ka
    Vuddha
    Vuddhi;
    1. ‣See vuḍḍha & vuḍḍhi;
    Vuppati
    1. is passive of vapati.

    Vuyhati
    1. to be carried away: passive of vahati, q.v. and add refs.: Mil 69 Vism 603 (vuyhare)

      • ppr. vuyhamāna :
      1. -1. being drawn MN i.225 (of a calf following its mother’s voice)
      • being carried away (by the current of a river), in danger of drowning Snp 319
      • past participle vuḷha & vūḷha;
    Vuyhamānaka
    adjective
    1. one who is getting drowned, “drownedling Ja iii.507 Vulha & Vulha;
    vuyhemāna with disparaging suffix ˚ka
    Vuḷha
    Vūḷha;
    carried away.
    1. -1. vuḷha : Vin i.32 109. 2. vūḷha : AN iii.69 Ja i.193 Dhp-a ii.265 (udakena) ‣See also būḷha
    past participle of vahati, passive vuyhati; but may be vi + ūḷha
    Vuvahyamāna
    1. at AN iv.170 read with Commentary at opuniyamāna “sifting” (from opunāti ‣See remark at AN iv.476
    Vusita
    1. fulfilled accomplished; (or:) lived, spent (= vuttha); only in phrase vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ (translationDialogues of the Buddha i.93; “the higher life has been fulfilled”) DN i.84 (cp. Dhp i.225 vutthaṁ parivutthaṁ) Iti 115 (ed. vūsita˚) Snp 463 Snp 493 Pug 61
    • Also at DN i.90 negative a˚, with reference to avusitavā, where Rhys Davids (Dialogues of the Buddha i.112) translates “ill-bred and “rude,” hardly just ‣See also arahant ii.A
    Kern, Toevoegselen
    s.v. vasati takes it as vi + uṣita (of vas2, against which speaks meaning of vivasati “to live from home.” Geiger, Pali Grammar § 661 & 195 explained it as uṣita with prothetic v, as by-form of vuttha. Best fitting in meaning is assumption of vusita being a variant of vosita, with change of o to u in analogy to vuttha; thus = vi + osita “fulfilled, come to an end or to perfection”; cp. pariyosita. Geiger’s explanation is supported by phrase brahmacariyaṁ vasati
    Vusitatta
    neuter
    1. state of perfection DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānin kiṁ aññatra avusitattā = he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection)
    abstract from vusita
    Vusitavant
    adjective
    1. one who has reached perfection (in chaste living), epithet of the arahant DN ii.223 (translation “who has lived ʻ the life ʼ”): MN i.4 SN iii.61 AN v.16 Snp 514 Nd1 611 Mil 104 On DN i.90 ‣See vusita (end) ‣See also arahant ii Commentary
    vusita + vant
    Vusīmant
    adjective
    1. = vusitavant AN iv.340 Snp 1115 (cp. Nd2 611 = vuṭṭhavā ciṇṇa-caraṇo etc., thus “perfected,” cp. ciṇṇavasin in same meaning)
    difficult to explain; perhaps for vasīmant ‣See vasīvasa in sense of vasavattin
    Vussati
    1. is passive of vasati2 (q.v.)

    Vūpakaṭṭha
    1. [doubtful, whether vi + upakaṭṭha (since the latter is only used of time), or = vavakaṭṭha, with which it is identical in meaning. cp. also Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyapakṛṣṭa Av SN i.233 SN ii.194 of which it might be a re-translation alienated, withdrawn, drawn away (from), secluded often in phrase eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī etc ‣See arahant ii.B., e.g. DN iii.76 SN i.117 SN ii.21 SN ii.244 SN iii.35, 73 sq.; iv.72 AN iv.299 cp. also AN iv.435 (gaṇasmā v.)
    Vūpakāsa
    1. estrangement, alienation, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kāya˚ citta˚; (of body & of mind), e.g. DN iii.285 (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.260 not correctly “serenity”) SN v.67 AN iv.152
    formed from vūpakāseti
    Vūpakāseti
    1. to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin iv.326 AN v.72f. causative II vūpakāsāpeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin i.49 Vin iv.326
    2. past participle vūpakaṭṭha
    3. causative of vavakassati
    Vūparati
    1. = uparati cessation Dhs-a 403
    vi + uparati
    Vūpasanta
    1. appeased, allayed, calmed SN iv.217 SN iv.294 AN i.4 (˚citta); iii.205 Snp 82 Pug 61 (˚citta) Pv-a 113
    past participle of vūpasammati
    Vūpasama
    1. allaying, relief, suppression, mastery, cessation calmness SN iii.32 SN iv.217 SN v.65 (cetaso) DN ii.157 (sankhārā) AN i.4 (identical); ii.162 (papañca˚); v.72 Pug 69 Ja i.392 Dhs-a 403
    2. quenching (of thirst Pv-a 104
    from vi + upa + śam; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyupaśama Divy 578
    Vūpasamana
    neuter
    1. allayment, cessation Ja i.393 Mil 320 Pv-a 37 Pv-a 98
    from vi + upa + śam; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyupaśamana Avs ii.114
    Vūpasammati
    1. to be assuaged or quieted SN iv.215
    2. to be suppressed or removed Ja iii.334
    3. to be subdued or extinguished, to go out (of light) Ap. 35.

      • past participle vūpasanta.
      • causative vūpasāmeti to appease, allay, quiet, suppress, relieve SN v.50 Snp-a 132 (reṇuṁ) Pv-a 20 Pv-a 38 (sokaṁ), 200
      vi + upasammati
    Vūḷha
    1. ‣See vuḷha
    Ve1
    indeclinable
    1. participle of affirmation, emphasizing the preceding word: indeed, truly Vin i.3 (etaṁ ve sukhaṁ) Dhp 63
    • sa ve bāḷo ti vuccati), 83 (sabbattha ve), 163 (yaṁ ve … taṁ ve) Snp 1050 Snp 1075 Snp 1082Dhp-a iii.155 (= yeva) ‣See also have
    cp. Vedic vē, vai
    Ve2
    1. may be enclitic form of tumhe, for the usual vo at Snp 333 (= tumhākaṁ Snp-a 339) ‣See P. Text S. ed. of Sn; cp. variant reading ve for vo at Snp 560 (here as particle!)
    Ve˚
    1. ; is the guṇa (increment) form of vi˚; , found in many secondary (mostly feminine &
    2. neuter abstract) derivations from words with; vi˚; , e.g. vekalla, vecikicchin, veneyya, vepulla vematta, vevicchā, veramaṇī, which Buddhaghosa explains simply as “vi-kārassa ve-kāraṁ katvā veramaṇī” Kp-a 24. cp. veyy˚;.

    Vekaṭika
    adjective
    1. one addicted to dirt, living on dirty food DN i.167 Mil 259 (doubled)
    from vikaṭa
    Vekaṇḍa
    1. a kind of arrow MN i.429
    perhaps connected with vikaṇṇaka
    Vekata
    adjective
    1. changed Vv-a 10
    = vikata
    Vekantaka
    1. (Vb-a 63) is a kind of copper ‣See loha
    Vekalla
    neuter
    1. deficiency Ja v.400 Mil 107 Dhs 223 Dhp-a ii.26 (anga˚ deformity), 79; iii.22 Vv-a 193 Sdhp 5 Sdhp 17
    • As vekalya at Kp-a 187 (where contrasted to sākalya)
    • jaṇṇū avekallaṁ karoti to keep one’s knees straight Mil 418 (Kern, Toevoegselen s. v translates “presses tightly together”) ‣See also avekalla. Vekallata & vekalyata
    from vikala
    Vekallatā
    vekalyatā
    feminine
    1. deficiency AN iii.441 (a˚); Vism 350 (indriya˚) Ja i.45 (v.254 (˚lya˚)
    abstract from vekalla
    Vekkhiya
    1. is poetical for avekkhiya (= avekkhitvā ‣See avekkhati) in appaṭivekkhiya not considering Ja iv.4 ‣See the usual paccavekkhati
    Vega
    1. quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity SN iv.157 AN iii.158 (sara˚) Snp 1074 Mil 202 Mil 258 Mil 391 Pv-a 11 Pv-a 47 (vāta˚) 62 (visa˚), 67, 284 (kamma˚); Sdhp 295
    • instr vegena (
    • adverb ) quickly Dhp-a i.49 another form in same meaning is vegasā, after analogy of thāmasā, balasā etc., e.g. Ja iii.6 Ja v.117
    • cp. saṁ˚;
    cp. Vedic vega, from vij to tremble
    Vegha
    1. at DN ii.100 (˚missakena, translation Rhys Davids “with the help of thongs”) = SN v.153 (Text reads vedha˚), & Thag 1, 143 (˚missena, translation “violence”) may with Kern, Toevoegselen s. v be taken as veggha = viggha (Sanskrit vighna), i.e. obstacle hindrance; cp. uparundhati Thag 1, 143 It remains obscure & Kern’s explanation problematic. cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.107
    Vecikicchin
    adjective
    1. doubting, doubtful AN ii.174 (kankhin +) SN iii.99 (identical) MN i.18 Snp 510
    from vicikicchā
    Vecitta
    neuter
    1. confusion, disturbed state of mind Dhtp 460 (in definition of root muh
    from vi + citta2
    Vejja
    1. a physician, doctor, medical man, surgeon Ja i.455 iii.142; Kp-a 21 Snp-a 274 (in simile) Vv-a 185 322 Dhp-a i.8 Pv-a 36 Pv-a 86; Sdhp 279 Sdhp 351
    • hatthi˚ elephantdoctor Ja vi.490 Mhvs 25, 34; visa˚; a physician who cures poison(ous bites) Ja i.310 Ja iv.498
    1. ˚kamma medical practice or treatment Ja ii.421 v.253; Vism 384 Dhp-a iii.257 351; iv.172
    from vid, * Sanskrit vaidya, but to Pāli etymology feeling from vijjā
    Vejjikā
    feminine
    1. medicine (?) Vin iii.185
    from vejja?
    Veṭha
    1. wrap, in sīsa˚; head-wrap, turban MN i.244 SN iv.56
    from viṣṭ, veṣṭ
    Veṭhaka
    adjective
    1. surrounding, enveloping DN i.105 (“furbelow” ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha i.130); Mhvs 11, 14 (valayanguli˚)
    from veṭheti
    Veṭhana
    neuter
    1. surrounding, enveloping Ja vi.489
    2. a turban head-dress DN i.126 AN i.145 AN iii.380 (sīsa˚) Ja v.187 Dhp-a iv.213 Pv-a 161
    3. wrapping, clothing, wrap shawl Ja vi.12

      • cp. pali˚;
      from veṭheti, cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit veṣṭhana
    Veṭhita
    1. enveloped, enclosed, surrounded, wrapped Sdhp 362. cp. ni˚, pari˚;
    past participle of veṭheti
    Veṭheti
    1. to twist round, envelope, wrap, surround Ja i.5 Ja i.422 Mil 282 passive veṭhiyati ‣See vi˚;
    2. pp veṭhita
    3. cp. pali˚;
    4. Vedic veṣṭate, viṣṭ; or veṣṭ; , to Latin virga, branch, literally twisting
    Veṇa
    1. a worker in bamboo Pv-a 175
    2. a member of a low & despised class (cp. pukkusa) Vin iv.6 SN i.93 (˚kula) AN ii.85 (identical); iii.385 Pug 51
    3. feminine veṇī Ja v.306 (= tacchikā Commentary ); Pv iii.113 (read veṇī for veṇiṁ)
    cp. * Sanskrit vaiṇa, dialectical
    Veṇi
    feminine
    1. a braid of hair, plaited hair, hair twisted into a single braid AN iii.295 Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Thag 2, 255 Vv 384 (= kesa-veṇi Commentary ). figuratively of a “string of people DN i.239 (andha˚). —˚kata plaited, having the hair plaited Ja ii.185 Ja v.431
    cp. Sanskrit veṇi
    Veṇu
    1. bamboo; occurs only in compounds., e.g. —˚gumba thicket of bamboo Dhp-a i.177
    • ˚˚tinduka the tree Diospyros Ja v.405 (= timbaru Commentary ); —˚daṇḍaka jungle-rope Ja iii.204
    • ˚˚bali a tax to be paid in bamboo (by bamboo workers Dhp-a i.177
    • ˚-vana bamboo forest Ja v.38
    cp. Vedic veṇu. Another P, form is veḷu (q.v.)
    Vetaṇḍin
    adjective
    1. full of sophistry, skilled in vitaṇḍā Mil 90 (said of King Milinda)
    from vitaṇḍā
    Vetana
    neuter
    1. wages, hire; payment, fee, remuneration; tip Ja i.194 (nivāsa˚ rent) Snp 24 Vv-a 141 Dhp-a i.25 Pv-a 112 Most frequently combined with bhatta˚; (q.v.) As vedana at Ja iii.349
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vetana
    Vetabba
    1. is gerundive of *veti

      1. = vināti to weave (q, v.), thus “to be woven,” or what is left to be woven Ja vi.26 infinitive vetuṁ Vin ii.150
      vi
    Vetasa
    1. the ratan reed, Calamus rotang Ja v.167 Snp-a 451
    Vedic vetasa
    Vetāla
    1. at DN i.6 (in the lists of forbidden crafts) refers to some magic art. The proper meaning of the word was already unknown when Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.84 explained it as “ghana-tāḷaṁ” (cymbal beating) with remark “mantena mata-sarīr’ uṭṭhāpanan ti eke” (some take it to be raising the dead by magic charms). Rhys Davids at Dialogues of the Buddha i.8 translates “chanting of bards” (cp. vetālika). It is of dialectical origin
    Vetālika

    a certain office or occupation at court connected with music or other entertainment, a bard. With other terms in list at Mil 331 some of them obscure and regional. Also at Ja vi.277 where explained as “vetālā read vettāya? uṭṭhāpake,” i.e. those whose duty it is [by vetāla or vetta

    1. to make (people] rise. The explanation is obscure, the uṭṭhāpaka reminds of Buddhaghosa’s uṭṭhāpana (under vetāla). Kern misunderstands the phrase by translating “chasing bards away.”
    dialectical; cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit vaitālika
    Veti
    1. to go away, disappear, wane SN iii.135 AN ii.51 Ja iii.154 Dhs-a 329 cp. vyavayāti
    vi + eti, of i; Sanskrit vyeti
    Vetulla
    (& vetulya)
    1. a certain dissenting sect ‣See Mhvs. translation 259, note 2 in ˚vāda heretic doctrine Mhvs 36, 41; Dpvs 22, 45; —˚vādin an adherent of this doctrine
    cp. * Sanskrit vaitulya; also called vaipulya, from vipula. The Pali form is not clear; it probably rests on dialectical translation of a later term
    Vetta
    neuter
    1. twig, rod; creeper; junglerope (cp. veṇu-daṇḍa); cane (calamus). By itself only in standard list of punishments (tortures): vettehi tāḷeti to flog with canes, e.g. AN i.47 AN ii.122 Mil 196 Otherwise frequently in compounds.:
    1. ˚agga cane-top, sprout of bamboo (cp. kaḷīra) Vism 255 (where Kp-a in identical passage reads ˚ankura) Vb-a 60 239 252
    2. ˚aṅkura a shoot of bamboo Kp-a 52, 67
    3. ˚āsana cane chair Vv-a 8
    • ˚cāra (vettācāra) “stick-wandering” (?) Ja iii.541 (+ sankupatha; Commentary vettehi sañcaritabba) Vv 8411 (vettācāraṁ sankupathañ ca maggaṁ explained as vettalatā bandhitvā ācaritabba magga Vv-a 338); better as “jungle-path.” -patha “a jungle full of sticks” (translation Rhys Davids) Mil 280 (+ sankupatha) jungle-path
    • ˚bandhana binding with twigs (rope?) creeper-bands SN iii.155 SN v.51 = AN iv.127
    • ˚latā cane creeper Ja i.342 Vv-a 8 338
    • ˚valli garland of creeper Dāvs iii.40
    cp. Epic Sanskrit vetra
    Veda
    1. (cp. vediyati & vedanā) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm awe, emotion, excitement (something like; saṁvega DN ii.210 (˚paṭilābha + somanassa-paṭilābha) MN i.465 (uḷāra) Snp 1027 (= pīti Snp-a 585) Ja ii.336 iii.266. attha-veda + dhamma-veda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of Buddha’s teaching MN i.37 AN v.329f. 333, 349, 352; veda here interpreted as “somanassaṁ” at M AN i.173
    2. ‣ See also cpd ˚jāta
    3. (cp. vedeti & vijjā) (higher) knowledge (as “Buddhist” antithesis to the authority of the “Veda”) insight, revelation, wisdom: that which Buddhaghosa at M AN i.173 defines with “ñāṇa,” and illustrates with vedagū of Snp 1059 or refers to at DN-a i.139 with definition “vidanti etenā ti vedo.” Thus at Snp 529 & 792 (= vedā vuccanti catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṁ paññā Nd; 1 93), cp. Snp-a 403
    4. As adjective veda epithet of the Buddha “the knower or the possessor of revelation, at MN i.386 ‣See also vedagū
    5. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious teaching (revelation) & practice otherwise given as “gantha” i.e. “text” at M AN i.173 & illustrated with “tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū.” The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e.g. at DN i.88 MN ii.133 Snp 1019 AN i.163 Dhp-a iii.361 In the older texts only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda = Rg; yaju˚ & sāma˚) are referred to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e.g. the; three at SN iv.118 Ja i.168 Ja ii.47 Ja iii.537 Mil 10 Vism 384; the four at DN-a i.247 Mil 178

      • Unspecified (singular): Snp-a 462 As adjective veda “knowing the Vedas” Snp-a 463 (ti˚), cp. tevijja
      • The Vedas in this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras ‣See manta and are often (in Commentary ) mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e.g. Pv ii.613 (the Vedas with the 6 aṅgas, i.e. vedāngas, called manta Snp-a 293 (manta-pāragū + veda-pāragū), 322 448
      1. ˚antagu “one who has reached the end of knowledge, i.e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin i.3 Snp 463
      • ˚gū one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of the Buddha). Thus different from “tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū,” which is brahmanic. The explanation of vedagū is “catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṁ” Nd2 612 & ‣See above 2

        • S; i.141, 168; iv.83, 206 AN ii.6 AN iv.340 Snp 322 Snp 458 Snp 529 Snp 749 Snp 846 Snp 947 Snp 1049 Snp 1060 Nd1 93 204, 299, 431. A peculiar meaning of vedagū is that of “soul” (literally attainer of wisdom) at Mil 54 & 71
        • ˚jāta thrilled, filled with enthusiasm, overcome with awe, excited AN ii.63 Snp 995 Snp 1023 Kvu 554 = Vv 3427 (= jāta-somanassa Vv-a 156) Ja i.11 Mil 297
        • ˚pāragū one who excels in the knowledge of the Vedas, perfected in the Veda Snp-a 293 cp. above 3
        • ˚bandhu one who is familiar with the Vedas Snp-a 192
        from vid, or more specifically ved as Pali root
    Vedaka
    adjective
    1. knowing or studying the Vedas Snp-a 462 (brāhmaṇa)
    from veda 3
    Vedanaka
    adjective
    1. having feeling, endowed with sensation Vb 419 (a˚ + asaññaka)
    from vedanā
    Vedanā
    feminine
    1. feeling, sensation ‣See on term, e.g. Compendium 14 Mrs. Rh D. B. Psy., ch. iv. DN i.45 DN ii.58 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.54), 66 iii.58, 77, 221, 228, 238 (˚upādāna) SN iii.86f. AN i.39 AN i.122 AN i.141 AN ii.79 AN ii.198 AN ii.256 AN iii.245f. 450; iv.301 385; Kh iii. (tisso v.) Snp 435 Snp 529 Snp 739 Snp 1111 Nd1 109 Nd2 551 (tisso v.); Ps i.6, 50 sq., 145 sq., 153 sq. ii.109 sq., 181 sq. Vb 135f. 294, 401, 403 sq. Dhs 3 1348; Nett 27, 65 sq.; 83, 123, 126; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 246 317 sq., 345 sq.; Vism 460 sq. DN-a i.125 Vb-a 13f. 39 sq., 80, 178, 193, 221 (˚ânupassanā, in detail), 263 sq. 382 (various)
    • Three modes of feeling (usually understood whenever mention is made of “tisso vedanā “) sukhā (pleasant), dukkhā (painful) adukkha-m-asukhā (indifferent) DN iii.275 SN ii.53 SN ii.82 SN iv.207 AN iii.400 Iti 46 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 317 sq
    • or: kusalā, akusalā, avyākatā Vism 460
    • Five vedanās: sukhaṁ, dukkhaṁ, somanassaṁ domanassaṁ, upekkhā Vism 461. Categories of 2 to 108 modes of Vedanā, SN iv.223 sq
    • vedanā is one of the 5 khandhas ‣See khandha ii.B
    • On relation of old and new sensations (purāṇa˚ → nava˚) ‣See e. g AN ii.40 AN iii.388 AN iv.167 Vism 33; and ‣See formula under yātrā
    • In the Paṭiccasamuppāda (q.v.) vedanā stands between phassa as condition and taṇhā as result ‣See e.g. Vism 567 sq
    • (in special application) painful sensation, suffering, pain (i.e. dukkhavedanā) MN i.59 AN i.153 (sārīrikā bodily pain); ii.116 (identical); iii.143 (identical) Pv i.1015 Mil 253 (kāyikā & cetasikā) Vb-a 101 (maraṇ’ antikā v. agonies of death)-vedan’ aṭṭa afflicted by pain Vin ii.61 Vin iii.100 Ja i.293-As adjective vedana suffering or to be suffered Pv iii.106 (= anubhūyamāna Pv-a 214)
    • vedana at Ja iii.349 is to be read as vetana
    • from ved˚; ‣See vedeti; cp. Epic Sanskrit vedanā
    Vedayita
    1. felt, experienced SN i.112 SN ii.65 SN iii.46 AN ii.198 AN iv.415 Vism 460
    past participle of vedeti
    Vedalla
    neuter
    1. Name of one of the 9 angas ‣See nava or divisions of the Canon according to matter AN ii.7 AN ii.103 AN ii.178 AN iii.88 AN iii.107 AN iii.361f.; iv.113 Vin iii.8 Pug 43 Dhs-a 26 DN-a i.24 Pv-a 22 The Dhs-a comprises under this aṅga the 2 suttas so-called in MN (43, 44), the Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Sankhārābhājaniya Mahāpuṇṇama etc. Suttas, as catechetical Dhs-a 26 = DN-a i.24
    • Note. The 2nd part of the word looks like a distortion from ariya (cp. mahalla → mah ariya). Or might it be = vedanga?
    may be dialectical, obscure as to origin; Buddhaghosa refers it to Veda 1
    Vedi
    1. & Vedī feminine

      1. ledge, cornice, rail Mhvs 32, 5; 35, 2; 36, 52 (pāsāṇa˚); 36, 103 Vv 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 346)
      • See on term Dialogues of the Buddha ii.210 Mhvs. translation 220, 296. cp. vedikā & velli;
      Vedic vedi sacrificial bench
    Vedikā
    feminine (& vediyā
    1. cornice, ledge, railing DN ii.179 Vin ii.120 Ja iv.229 Ja iv.266 Vv 786 (vediyā vedikā Vv-a 304); 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 340) Vv-a 275
    from vedi
    Vedita
    1. experienced, felt SN iv.205 (sukha & dukkha) = Sn 738
    past participle of vedeti
    Vedisa
    1. name of a tree Ja v.405 Ja vi.550
    from vidisā?
    Vedeti
    1. “to sense,” usually in denominative function (only one
    2. causative meaning ‣See
    3. aorist avedi; meaning twofold either intellectually “to know” (cp. veda, or with reference to general feeling “to experience” (cp. vedanā. For the present tense two bases are to be distinguished viz. ved˚; , used in both meanings; and vediy˚; (= *vedy˚) a specific Pāli formation after the manner of the 4th (y) class of Sanskrit verbs, used only in meaning of “experience.” Thus vedeti : (a) to know (as =
    4. accusative, equal to “to call”) Snp 211f. (taṁ muniṁ vedayanti); (b) to feel, to experience SN iv.68 (phuṭṭho vedeti, ceteti sañjānāti) MN i.37 Pv iv.150 (dukkhaṁ = anubhavati Pv-a 241)

      • vediyati : to feel, to experience a sensation or feeling (usually with vedanaṁ or
      • plural vedanā) MN i.59 ii.70 (also Pot. vediyeyya) SN ii.82 SN iii.86f.; iv.207 AN i.141 AN ii.198 (also ppr. vediyamāna) Ja ii.241 Mil 253
      • aorist avedi he knew, recognized Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi Commentary ); he made known, i.e. informed Ja iv.35 (= jānāpesi Commentary ); vedi (recognized, knew) Snp 643 Snp 647 Snp 1148 (= aññāsi aphusi paṭivijjhi Nd2 613); & vedayi Snp 251 (= aññāsi Snp-a 293)
      • future vedissati (shall experience) Pv i.1015 (dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ v.).
      • gerundive vediya (to be known Snp 474 (para˚ diṭṭhi held as view by others; explained as “ñāpetabba” Snp-a 410); vedanīya : (a) to be known, intelligible, comprehensible DN i.12 (dhammā nipuṇā … paṇḍita-vedanīyā); ii.36 MN i.487 MN ii.220 (b) to be experienced SN iv.114 (sukha˚ & dukkha˚) AN i.249 (diṭṭhadhamma˚); iv.382; Pv ii.117 (sukha˚-kamma sukha-vipāka Pv-a 150); iii.37 (kamma); iv.129 (of kamma-vipāka = anubhavana-yogga Pv-a 228) Pv-a 145 (kamma); & veditabba to be understood or known DN i.186 Pv-a 71 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 104.
      • past participle vedita & vedayita;
      Vedic vedayati; denominative or
    5. causative from vid to know or feel
    Vedeha
    1. literally from the Videha country; wise ‣See connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DN-a i.139 resting on popular etymology SN ii.215 sq (˚muni, of Ānanda; explained as “vedeha-muni = paṇḍitamuni,” cp. Kindred Sayings i.321; translationKindred Sayings ii.145 “the learned sage”); Mhvs 3, 36 (same phrase; translation “the sage of the Videha country”); Ap 7 (identical)
    = N plural Vedeha
    Vedha

    1. piercing, pricking, hitting AN ii.114f. (where it is said of a horse receiving pricks on various parts, viz. on its hair: loma˚; its flesh: maṁsa˚; ; its bone: aṭṭhi˚)
    2. avedha [to vyath! not to be shaken or disturbed, imperturbable Snp 322 (= akampana-sabhāva Snp-a 331)
    3. a wound Ja ii.274f.
    4. a flaw Mil 119

      • cp. ubbedha
      adjective n.) [from vidh = vyadh, cp. vyādha
    Vedhati
    1. to tremble, quiver, quake, shake SN v.402 Thag 1, 651 2, 237 (˚amāna) Snp 899 Snp 902 (Pot. vedheyya) Nd1 312 467 Ja ii.191 (kampati +) Mil 254 (+ calati) Vv-a 76 (vedhamānena sarīrena) Dhp-a ii.249 (passive vedhiyamāna trembling; variant reading pa˚). cp. vyadhati, ubbedhati & pavedhati
    2. for *vethati = vyathati, of vyath
    Vedhana
    neuter
    1. piercing Ja iv.29 DN-a i.221
    from vidh to pierce
    Vedhabba
    neuter
    1. widowhood Ja vi.508
    abstract from vidhavā, = Epic Sanskrit vaidhavya
    Vedhavera

    son of a widow; in two different passages of the Jātaka, both times characterized as sukka-cchavī vedhaverā “sons of widows, with white skins,” and at both places misunderstood (or unintelligibly explained) by the Cy., viz. Ja iv.184 (+ thulla-bāhū; Commentary vidhavā apatikā tehi vidhavā sarantī ti ti

    1. vidha-verā ca vedhaverā); vi.508 (Commentary vidhav’ itthakā; variant reading vidhav-ittikāmā purisā)
    for * Sanskrit vaidhaveya, from vidhavā
    Vedhitā
    feminine
    1. shooting, hitting Ja vi.448
    past participle of vedheti, causative of vijjhati
    Vedhin
    adjective
    1. piercing, shooting, hitting ‣See akkhaṇa˚;
    from vidh = vyadh
    Venateyya
    1. descended from Vinatā, epithet of a garuḷa Ps ii.196 Ja vi.260 Dāvs iv.45
    from vinata
    Venayika1
    1. a nihilist. The Buddha was accused of being a v. MN i.140
    from vi.3 + naya
    Venayika2
    adjective
    1. versed in the Vinaya Vin i.235 Vin iii.3 (cp. Vin AN i.135) MN i.140 AN iv.175 AN iv.182f.v.190 Mil 341
    from vinaya
    Veneyya
    adjective
    1. to be instructed, accessible to; instruction, tractable, ready to receive the teaching (of the Buddha). The term is late (Jātaka style & Commentary Ja i.182 (Buddha˚), 504 Snp-a 169 510 Dhp-a i.26 Vb-a 79 Vv-a 217 Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.10). cp. buddha˚;
    = vineyya, gerundive of vineti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaineya Divy 36 Divy 202 & passim
    Veneyyatta
    neuter
    1. tractableness Nett 99
    from veneyya
    Vepakka
    neuter
    1. ripening, ripeness, maturity. - adjective yielding fruit, resulting in (—˚) AN i.223 (kāmadhātu˚ kamma); iii.416 (sammoha˚ dukkha) Snp 537 (dukkha˚ kamma)
    2. from vipakka
    Vepurisikā
    feminine
    1. a woman resembling a man (sexually), a man-like woman, androgyn Vin ii.271 Vin iii.129
    vi + purisa + aka
    Vepulla
    neuter
    1. full development, abundance, plenty, fullness DN iii.70 DN iii.221 DN iii.285 SN iii.53 AN i.94 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); iii.8, 404; v.152 sq., 350 sq. Mil 33 Mil 251 Vism 212 (saddhā˚, sati˚, paññā˚, puñña˚), 619 Dhp-a i.262 (sati˚) Vb-a 290
    • Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla ‣See vuḍḍhi, e.g. Vin i.60 Iti 113 cp. vetulla
    from vipula
    Vepullatā
    feminine
    1. = vepulla AN ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); Ap 26, 39 Mil 252 As vepullataṁ neuter at AN iii.432
    2. abstract formation from vepulla
    Vebhaṅga
    1. futility, failure Ja iv.451 (opposite sampatti; explained as vipatti Commentary )
    from vibhanga
    Vebhaṅgika
    1. (& ˚iya) adjective ‣See a˚;.

    Vebhavya
    1. (& ˚ā) neuter &
    2. feminine )

      1. thinking over, criticism Dhs 16 Ps i.119 Pug 25 Nett 76
      from vibhāvin
    Vebhassi
    feminine = vibhassikatā, i.e. gossiping Vin iv.241
    Vebhūtika
    1. (& ˚ya) (adjective
    • nt.)
    1. causing disaster or ruin; neuter calumnious speech, bad language DN iii.106 (˚ya) Snp 158 (˚ya) Vv 8440 (˚ka; explained as “sahitānaṁ vinābhāva-karaṇato vebhūtikaṁ,” i.e. pisuṇaṁ Vv-a 347)
    2. from vibhūti.1
    Vema
    neuter
    1. loom or shuttle Dhp-a iii.175 Snp-a 268
    from vāyati2, cp. Sanskrit veman neuter ; Latin vimen
    Vemaka
    neuter = vema Vin ii.135
    Vemajjha
    neuter
    1. middle, centre Ja iv.250 Ja vi.485 Pug 16 17; Vism 182 (˚bhāga central part) Vv-a 241 277 locative vemajjhe : (a) in the present, or central interval of saṁsāra Snp 849 (cp. Nd1 213 and majjha 3 b); (b) in two, asunder Vism 178
    2. from vi + majjha
    Vematika
    adjective
    1. in doubt, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.126 Vin ii.65 Vin iv.220 259; Vism 14 (˚sīla). Opp nibbematika
    from vimati
    Vematta
    neuter
    1. difference, distinction Mil 410 Vism 195
    from vi + matta1
    Vemattatā
    feminine
    1. difference, distinction, discrepancy, disproportion(ateness) MN i.453 494 SN ii.21 SN iii.101 SN v.200 AN iii.410f.; Snp p.102 (puggala˚); Nett 4, 72 sq., 107 sq. Mil 284 Mil 285 The 8 differences of the various Buddhas are given at Snp-a 407f. as addhāna˚, āyu˚, kula˚, pamāṇa˚, nekkhamma˚ padhāna˚, bodhi˚, raṁsi˚
    abstract formation from vematta
    Vemātika
    adjective
    1. having a different mother Ja iv.105 (˚bhāginī); vi.134 (˚bhātaro) Pv-a 19
    vi + ˚mātika
    Vemānika
    adjective
    1. having a fairy palace ‣See vimāna 3 Ja v.2 Dhp-a iii.192
    from vimāna1
    Veyy˚
    1. ; is a (purely phonetic) diaeretic form of vy˚; , for which viy˚ & veyy˚; are used indiscriminately. There is as little difference between viy˚ & veyy˚; as between vi˚ & ve˚; in those cases where (double, as it were abstract nouns are formed from words with ve˚; (vepullatā, vemattatā, etc.), which shows that ve˚; was simply felt as vi˚;. cp. the use of e for i (especially before y) in cases like alabbhaneyya → ˚iya; addhaneyya → ˚iya; pesuṇeyya → ˚iya, without any difference in meaning
    Veyyaggha
    adjective
    1. belonging to a tiger Dhp 295 (here simply = vyaggha. i.e. with a tiger as fifth veyya˚ = vya˚ metri causâ; Buddhaghosa’s explanation at Dhp-a iii.455 is forced)
    • (m). a car covered with a tiger’s skin Ja v.259 cp. 377
    from vyaggha
    Veyyagghin = veyyaggha
    adjective Ja iv.347
    Veyyañjanika
    1. one who knows the signs, a fortune-teller, soothsayer Ja v.233 Ja v.235
    • The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit equivalent is vaipañcanika (MVastu i.207) etc. ‣See under vipañcita, which may have to be derived (as viyañcita = viyañjita) from vi + añj = vyañjana ‣See also Kern. Toevoegselen p. 19
    = vyañjanika
    Veyyatta
    1. = viyatta, i.e. accomplished, clever Ja v.258
    Veyyatti
    feminine
    1. distinction, cleverness, accomplishment Ja v.258 Ja vi.305
    = viyatti
    Veyyattiya
    neuter
    1. distinction, lucidity; accomplishment DN iii.38 (paññā˚ in wisdom) MN i.82 MN i.175 MN ii.209
    abstract form (˚ya = ˚ka) from veyyatti = viyatti
    Veyyākaraṇa
    masculine neuter
    1. neuter answer, explanation, exposition DN i.46 DN i.51 DN i.105 DN i.223 DN ii.202 AN iii.125 AN v.50f. Snp 352 Snp 510 Snp 1127 Pug 43 50 Mil 347 DN-a i.247
    2. masculine one who is expert in explanation or answer, a grammarian DN i.88 AN iii.125 Snp 595 Mil 236 Snp-a 447
    = vyākaraṇa
    Veyyābādhika
    adjective
    1. causing injury or oppression, oppressive, annoying (of pains) MN i.10 AN iii.388 Vism 35 (explained different by Buddhaghosa as “vyābādhato uppannattā veyyābādhikā”)
    = vyābādhika
    Veyyāyika
    neuter
    1. money to defray expenses, means Vin ii.157
    from vyaya
    Veyyāvacca
    neuter
    1. service, attention rendering a service; work, labour, commission, duty Vin i.23 AN iii.41 Ja i.12 (kāya˚); vi.154 Snp-a 466 Vv-a 94 Thag-a 253
    • ˚˚kamma doing service, work Ja iii.422
    • ˚˚kara servant, agent, feminine housekeeper Ja iii.327 Vv-a 349
    • ˚-kārikā
    • feminine identical Pv-a 65

      • Cp vyappatha
      corresponds to (although doubtful in what relation) Sanskrit *vaiyā-pṛtya, abstract from vyāpṛta active, busy (to pṛ; , pṛṇoti) = Pali vyāvaṭa; it was later retranslated into Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit as vaiyāvṛtya (as if vi + ā + vṛt e.g. Divy 54 Divy 347; MVastu i.298
    Veyyāvaṭika
    neuter
    1. service, waiting on, attention Snp p. 104 (kāya˚) Ja iv.463 Ja vi.154 Ja vi.418 Ja vi.503 (dāna˚) Dhp-a i.27 (kāya˚) iii.19 (dāna˚); Dīpavaṁsa vi.61
    doublet of veyyāvacca; ˚ka = ˚ya
    Vera
    neuter
    1. hatred, revenge, hostile action, sin AN iv.247 Dhp 5 Ja iv.71 Dhp-a i.50 Pv-a 13
    • avera absence of enmity, friendliness; (adjective friendly, peaceable, kind DN i.167 DN i.247 (sa˚ & a˚), 251 SN iv.296 AN iv.246 Snp 150 The pañca bhayāni verāni (or vera-bhayā or pañca verā (Vb 378) “the fivefold guilty dread” are the fears connected with sins against the 5 first commandments (sīlāni) ‣See S ii.68 AN iii.204f.; iv.405 sq.; v.182 Iti 57 = Sn 167 (vera-bhay'atīta). Veraka = vera; a
    cp. Sanskrit vaira, derived from vīra
    Veraka = vera; a˚
    1. ; Pv iv.138 ‣See also verika
    Verajja
    neuter
    1. a variety of kingdoms or provinces SN iii.6 (nānā˚-gata bhikkhu a bh. who has travelled much)
    from vi + rajja
    Verajjaka
    adjective
    1. belonging to various kingdoms or provinces, coming from various countries (nānā˚) living in a different country, foreign, alien DN i.113 MN ii.165 (brāhmaṇā) AN iii.263 (bhikkhū) Thag 1, 1037 Vv 8412 (= videsa-vasika Vv-a 338) Mil 359
    from verajja
    Veramaṇī
    feminine
    1. abstaining from (—˚), absti nence AN ii.217 AN ii.253 AN v.252f. 304 sq. Snp 291 Pug 39 43; Vism 11; Kp-a 24 Dhp-a i.235 305
    from viramaṇa; cp. the odd form Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vīramaṇī, e.g. Jtm. 213
    Veramba
    1. (& ˚bha) adjective

      1. attribute of the wind vāta or plural vātā a wind blowing in high altitudes cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vairambhaka Divy 90
        1. SN ii.231 AN i.137 Thag i.597 Ja iii.255 Ja iii.484 vi.326 Nd2 562 Vb-a 71
        etymology? Probably dialectical, i.e. regional
    Verika
    1. = vera i. e, inimical; enemy (cp. veraka Ja v.229 Ja v.505 Vism 48
    Verin
    adjective
    1. bearing hostility, inimical, revengeful Ja iii.177 Pv iv.325 (= veravanto Pv-a 252) Mil 196 Vism 296 (˚puggala), 326 (˚purisa, in simile), 512 (in sim.) Vb-a 89
    • negative averin Dhp 197 Dhp 258
    from vera
    Verocana
    1. the sun (literally “shining forth”) SN i.51 AN ii.50
    = virocana, from virocati
    Velā
    feminine
    1. -1. time, point of time (often equal to; kāla Pug 13 (uḍḍahana˚) Ja iv.294 Mil 87 Kp-a 181 PugA 187 Snp-a 111 (bhatta˚ meal-time) Dhs-a 219 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 104 Pv-a 109 (aruṇ’ uggamana˚), 129, 155 Vv-a 165 (paccūsa˚ in the early morning)
    • shore, sea-shore Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 Ja i.212 Mhvs 19, 30

  • limit boundary. AN v.250 (between v. & agyāgāra) Thag 1, 762 Mil 358 Dhs-a 219 in spec. sense as “measure, restriction, control (of character, sīla-velā at Dhs 299 (“not to tres

    • passive translation), and in dogmatic exegesis of ativelaṁ at Nd1 504; cp. Nd2 462 & Dhs-a 219
    • heap, multitude (?) Dhs-a 219 (in N
    • plural Uruvelā which is however *Uruvilvā)
    • Vedic velā in meaning 1; epithet Sanskrit in meanings 2 & 3
  • Velāmika
    adjective
    1. “belonging to Velāma,” at DN ii.198 used as a clan-name (feminine Velāmikānī), with variant readings Vessinī & Vessāyinī (cp. Velāma proper name comb; d with Vessantara at Vb-a 414), and at DN ii.333 classed with khujjā vāmanikā & komārikā (translation “maidens”; Buddhaghosa “very young & childish” ‣See Dialogues of the Buddha ii.359); variant reading celāvikā They are some sort of servants, especially in demand for a noble’s retinue ‣See also proper name Velāma (the V. sutta at Ja i.228f.)
    2. velāma + ika, the word velāma probably a district word
    Velāyati
    1. to destroy (?) Dhs-a 219 (cp. Expositor ii.297); explained by viddhaṁseti. More appropriate would be a meaning like “control,” bound restrict
    denominative from velā
    Vellāḷin
    adjective
    1. flashing (of swords) Ja vi.449
    Is it a corruption from *veyyāyin = *vyāyin?
    Velli
    1. is a word peculiar to the Jātaka. At one passage it is explained by the Commentary as “vedi” (i.e. rail, cornice), where it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilāka & vilaggita; : Ja vi.456 At most of the other passages it is explained as “a heap of gold” thus at Ja v.506 (verse: velli-vilāka-majjhā; Commentary “ettha vellī ti rāsi vilākamajjhā ti vilagga-majjhā uttattaghana-suvaṇṇa-rāsi -ppabhā c’ eva tanu-dīgha-majjhā ca”), and vi.269 (verse: kañcana-velli-viggaha; Commentary “suvaṇṇa-rāsi -sassirīka-sarīrā”). At v.398 in the same passage as vi.269 explained in Commentary as “kañcana-rūpakasadisa-sarīrā”). The idea of "golden” is connected with it throughout
    dialectical?
    Vellita
    adjective
    1. crooked, bent; (of hair:) curly Pv-a 189 It is only used with reference to hair.
    1. ˚agga with bending (or crooked) tip (of hair), i.e. curled Thag 2, 252 (cp. Thag-a 209) Ja v.203 (= kuñcit’ agga Commentary ); vi.86 (sun-agga-vellita) Pv-a 46 Pv-a 142
    • Cp kuñcita-kesa Ja i.89
    past participle of vellati, vell to stagger, cp. paṭivellati
    Veḷu
    a bamboo AN ii.73 Vin iv.35 Ja iv.382 (daṇḍa˚); v.71; Vism 1, 17 Snp-a 76 (= vaṁsa) Vb-a 334
    1. ˚agga (veḷagga) the top of a bamboo Vin ii.110
    • ˚gumba a bamboo thicket Snp-a 49 75
    • ˚daṇḍa a bamboo stick Snp-a 330
    • ˚dāna a gift of bamboo Vb 246 Mil 369 Snp-a 311 Kp-a 236 Vb-a 333
    • ˚nāḷi (˚nalaka ˚nāḷika) a stalk or shaft of bamboo Vism 260; Kp-a 52 Thag-a 212
    • ˚pabba a stalk or section of the b. Ja i.245 Vism 358 = Vb-a 63
    = veṇu, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 433 & Prakrit veḷu: Pischel,; Prakrit Grammar § 243
    Veḷuka
    1. a kind of tree Ja v.405 (= vaṁsa-coraka)
    from veḷu
    Veḷuriya
    neuter
    1. a precious stone, lapis lazuli; cp. the same word “beryl” (with metathesis r → l; not from the Sanskrit form), which the Greeks brought to Europe from India
    • DN i.76 Vin ii.112 SN i.64 AN i.215 AN iv.199 AN iv.203f. Ja iii.437 Pv ii.75 Mhvs 11, 16 Dhp-a ii.220 Often in descriptions of Vimānas, e.g. Vv 21 121; 171; cp. Vv-a 27 60
    • Probably through a word-play with veḷu (bamboo; popular etymology) it is said to have the colour of bamboo ‣See vaṁsa-rāga & vaṁsa-vaṇṇa; . At Ja i.207 a peacock’s neck is described as having the colour of the veḷuriya At Mil 267 (in inventory of “loka”) we have the following enumeration of precious stones: pavāḷa coral, lohitaṅka ruby, masāragalla cat’s eye, veḷuriya lapis lazuli, vajira diamend ‣See also under ratana1
    cp. dialectical Sanskrit vaiḍūrya
    Veḷuva
    1. probably not to veḷu, but another spelling for beḷuva, in ˚laṭṭhikā SN iii.91 as sometimes variant reading veḷuva for beḷuva (q.v.)
    cp. Vedic vainava (made of cane)?
    Vevacana
    neuter
    1. attribute, epithet; synonym Nett 1 sq., 24, 53 sq., 82, 106; Vism 427 Snp-a 24 447 cp. adhivacana
    from vivacana
    Vevaṇṇa
    neuter
    1. discolouring Thag-a 85 (Ap. v.42)
    from vivaṇṇa
    Vevaṇṇiya
    neuter
    1. state of having no caste, life of an outcast. AN v.87≈200. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vaivarṇika outcast Divy 424
      • discolouring, fading waning Ja iii.394
    abstract from vivaṇṇa
    Vevāhika
    1. wedding-guest Ja ii.420
    from vivāha
    Veviccha
    neuter
    1. “multifarious wants,” greediness, selfishness, avarice Snp 941 (= pañca macchariyāni Nd1 422 as at Nd2 614), 1033 (where Nett 11 reads vivicchā) Pug 19 23 Dhs 1059 1122; Nd2 s.v. taṇhā Dhs-a 366 375
    abstract formation from vivicchā
    Vesa
    1. dress, apparel; (more frequently:) disguise, (assumed) appearance Ja i.146 (pakati˚ usual dress), 230 (āyuttaka˚); iii.418 (andha˚) Mil 12 Dhp-a ii.4 Pv-a 62 Pv-a 93 (ummattaka˚), 161 (tunnavāya˚); Sdhp 384; purisa˚ (of women) DN-a i.147
    cp. Sanskrit veṣa, from viṣ to be active
    Vesama
    1. = visama Vv-a 10
    Vesākha
    1. name of a month (April-May) Mhvs 1, 73; 29, 1
    cp. Vedic vaiśākha
    Vesārajja
    neuter
    1. (the Buddha’s or an Arahant’s) perfect selfconfidence (which is of 4 kinds), self-satisfaction, subject of confidence. The four are given in full at MN i.71f. viz. highest knowledge, khīṇāsava state, recognition of the obstacles, recognition & preaching of the way to salvation ‣See also DN i.110 Ja ii.27 AN ii.13 AN iii.297f. iv.83, 210, 213 MN i.380 Ps ii.194 Nd2 466b Dhp-a i.86 DN-a i.278 Kp-a 104 Vv-a 213 Sdhp 593
    abstract formation from visārada, i.e. *vaiśāradya
    Vesiyāna
    1. a Vaiśya (Vessa) Ja vi.15 Ja vi.21 Ja vi.328 Ja vi.490 Ja vi.492 As vessāyana at Snp 455 (where vesiyāna is required). Vesi & Vesiya
    = vessa, with ˚na as in gimhāna, vassāna etc.
    Vesī
    Vesiyā
    feminine
    1. a woman of low caste, a harlot, prostitute
    • (a) vesī : Vin iii.138 Ja v.425 in compound vesi-dvāra a pleasure house Thag 2, 73
    • (b) vesiyā Vin iv.278 Snp 108 Vb 247 in compound vesiyā-gocara asking alms from a prostitute’s house Dhp-a iii.275 Dhs-a 151 Vb-a 339
    the feminine of vessa
    Vesma
    neuter
    1. a house Ja v.84 A trace of the n-stem in locative vesmani Ja v.60
    2. Vedic veśman, from viś to enter ‣See visati
    Vessa
    1. a Vaiśya, i.e. a member of the third social (i.e. lower) grade ‣See vaṇṇa 6, a man of the people DN iii.81 DN iii.95 (origin) SN i.102 SN i.166 SN iv.219 SN v.51 AN i.162 AN ii.194 AN iii.214 AN iii.242 Vb 394 DN-a i.254 (origin). feminine vesī (q.v.); vessī (as a member of that caste) DN i.193 AN iii.226 AN iii.229
    2. cp. Vedic vaiśya, a dialectical (local) word
    Vessikā
    feminine
    1. a Vaiśya woman Snp 314 Vehayasa = vihayasa
    from vessa
    Vehāyasa = vihāyasa
    1. , i.e. air, sky; only used in accusative vehāyasaṁ in function of a
    2. locative (cp. Vv-a 182: vehāyasaṁ = vehāyasa-bhūte hatthi-piṭṭhe), combined with ṭhita (standing in the air) Vv.41; Mhvs 1, 24 Pv-a 14

    Vehāsa
    1. the air, sky, heaven; only in the two cases (both used as locative “in the air”)
    2. accusative vehāsaṁ DN iii.27 SN v.283 Vin iii.105 Vv-a 78 &
    3. locative ; vehāse Vin i.320

      1. ˚kuṭī “air hut” i.e. airy room, “a hut in which a middle-sized man can stand without knocking his head against the ceiling” (explanation) Vin iv.46
      • ˚gamana going through the air Vism 382; Dhtm 586
      • ˚ṭṭha standing in the air DN i.115 DN-a i.284
      • ˚ṭṭhita identical DN i.95
      contraction of vehāyasa
    Vehāsaya
    1. occurs only in accusative (=
    2. locative ) vehāsayaṁ, equal to vihāyasaṁ at Ja iv.471
    3. = vehāyasa with metathesis y → s
    Vo1
    1. indeclinable a particle of emphasis, perhaps = eva, or = vo2 (as dative of interest). The Commentaries explain it as “nipāta,” i.e. particle. Thus at Snp 560 Snp 760
    Vo2
    1. is enclitic form of tumhe ‣See under tuvaṁ, i.e. to you, of you but it is generally interpreted by the Commentary as “nipāta, i.e. particle (of emphasis or exclamation; i.e. vo1) Thus e.g. at Pv i.53 (cp. Pv-a 26)
    cp. Vedic vaḥ, Avestan vō, Latin vos,
    Vo˚
    1. ; is commonly regarded as the prefix combination vi + ava˚; (i.e. vi + o˚), but in many cases it simply represents ava˚; (= o˚) with v as euphonic (“vorschlag”), as in vonata (= onata), voloketi, vokkanti, vokiṇṇa, voropeti vosāpeti, vosāna, vossagga. In a few cases it corresponds to vi + ud˚; , as in vokkamati, vocchijjati voyoga
    Vokāra
    1. difference Snp 611 - 2. constituent of being (i.e. the khandhas), usually as eka˚, catu˚ & pañca˚-bhava; , e.g. Kvu 261 Vb 137 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 32, 36 sq.; Vism 572; Kp-a 245 Snp-a 19 158 In this meaning vokāra is peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with vikāra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e.g. pañca v., catu v. etc. 3. worthless thing, trifle SN ii.29
    2. inconvenience disadvantage (cp. vikāra 3) Pv-a 12 (line 1 read: anek ākāra-vokāraṁ)
    v(i) + okāra; cp. vikāra
    Vokiṇṇa
    adjective
    1. covered with, drenched (with); mixed up, full of instrumental MN i.390 SN ii.29 AN i.123 AN i.148 AN ii.232 Ja i.110 Dhs-a 69
    • cp. abbokiṇṇa
    v(i) + okiṇṇa
    Vokiṇṇaka
    adjective
    1. mixed up Mil 300 (kapiniddā-pareto vokiṇṇakaṁ jaggati a person with light sleep, so-called “monkey-doze,” lies confusedly awake i.e. is half asleep, half awake). Rhys Davids not quite to the point: “a man still guards his scattered thoughts.”
    vokiṇṇa + ka
    Vokkanta
    1. deviated from ablative Iti 36
    past participle of vokkamati
    Vokkanti
    feminine
    1. descent (into the womb), conception Thag 1, 790
    v(i) + akkanti
    Vokkamati
    1. to turn aside, deviate from ablative; mostly in absolutive vokkamma Vin ii.213 DN i.230 MN iii.117 SN iv.117 Snp 946 Ja i.23 Vism 18

      • pp vokkanta
      vi + ukkamati
    Vokkamana
    neuter
    1. turning aside, deviation from ablative MN i.14 AN i.243
    from vokkamati
    Vokkha
    adjective
    1. is at Ja iii.21 given as synonym of vaggu (q.v.)
    ? doubtful reading
    Vocarita
    1. penetrated (into consciousness), investigated, apperceived MN i.478 AN iv.363 (= manodvāre samudācāra-ppatta)
    past participle of vi + ocarati
    Vocchādanā
    feminine
    1. covering up (entirely) Vb-a 493
    from vi + ava + chad
    Vocchijjati
    1. to be cut off SN iii.53 (so read). past participle negative abbocchinna ‣See abbhocchinna. (= *avyucch˚)
    2. vi + ud + chijjati, passive of chid
    Votthapana
    1. (& ˚ṭṭhapana neuter

      1. establishing, synthesis, determination, a momentary stage in the unit called percept (cp. Compendium 29), always with ˚kicca (or ˚kiriyā) “accomplishing the function of determination Vism 21 Dhs-a 401 DN-a i.194 (variant reading voṭṭhabb˚); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 276 (˚kiriyā)
      = vavatth˚
    Votthāpeti
    1. to establish, put up, arrange Ja vi.583
    = vavatthāpeti
    Vodaka
    adjective
    1. free from water Vin ii.113
    vi + odaka = udaka
    Vodapeti
    (or ˚dāpeti
    1. to cleanse, purify Dhp-a ii.162
    causative of vodāyati
    Vodāta
    adjective
    1. clean, pure MN i.319
    vi + odāta, cp. vīvadāta
    Vodāna
    neuter
    1. cleansing, getting bright (of sun & moon) DN i.10 (= visuddhatā DN-a i.95)
    2. purity (from the kilesas, or stains of sin), purification sanctification MN i.115 (opposite sankilesa) SN iii.151 (citta˚, adjective; opposite citta-sankilesa) AN iii.418f.; v.34 Ps i.166 Vb 343 Nett 96, 100, 125 sq.; Vism 51 sq. 89 Vb-a 401 Dhp-a iii.405
    from vi + ava + 4 to clean, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyavadāna Divy 616; Avs ii.188
    Vodāniya
    adjective
    1. apt to purify, purifying DN i.195 DN iii.57 O past participle saṅkilesika
    2. gerundive formn from vodāna
    Vodāpana
    neuter
    1. cleansing, purification Dhp-a iii.237 (= pariyodapana)
    from vodapeti
    Vodāya
    1. at Ja iv.184 appears to be a misreading for codāya (absolutive from codeti in meaning iṇaṁ codeti to undertake a loan, to lend money at interest (= vaḍḍhiyā inaṁ payojetvā Commentary ), to demand payment for a loan. The variant reading at all places is codāya (= codetvā) ‣See codeti.

    Vodāyati
    1. to become clean or clear, to be purified or cleansed. AN v.169 (figuratively saddhammassa) 317 (identical; explained by Commentary as “vodānaṁ gacchati”) Ja ii.418 (of a precious stone)
    vi + ava + 4 to clean
    Vodāsa
    1. only at DN iii.43 in phrase ˚ṁ āpajjati in meaning of “making a distinction,” being particular (about food: bhojanesu), having a dainty appetite; explained by “dve bhāge karoti” Buddhaghosa It seems to stand for vokāra, unless we take it to be a misspelling for vodāya “cutting off,” from vi + ava + , thus “separating the food” (?): Suggestive also is the likeness with vosānaṁ āpajjati
    ?
    Vodiṭṭha
    1. defined, fully understood recognized MN i.478 AN iv.363 (= suṭṭhu diṭṭha Commentary )
    past participle of vi + ava + diś, cp. odissa & the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyapadeśa pretext Divy 435
    Vonata
    adjective
    1. bent down Thag 1, 662
    v(i) + onata
    Vopeti
    1. at DN-a i.277
    • (avopetvā) is to be read with variant reading as copeti, i.e. shake, move, disturb, violate (a rule).

    Vobhindati
    1. to split; ppr. ˚anto (figuratively) hair-splitting DN i.162 MN i.176 aorist vobhindi (literally) to break, split (one’s head, sīsaṁ) MN i.336
    2. vi + ava + bhindati
    Vomādapeti
    at DN-a i.300 is to be read as vodāpeti (cleanse, purify); Burmese variant vodāpeti; SS cāmā
    1. peti, i.e. to cause to be rinsed, cleanse
    Vomissa(ka)
    adjective
    1. miscellaneous, various Vism 87 (˚katā), 88 (˚ka), 104 (˚carita)
    v(i) + omissa(ka)
    Voyoga
    1. effort (?), application Kp-a 243. Reading doubtful
    vi + uyyoga in sense of uyyutta?
    Voropana
    neuter
    1. depriving (jīvita˚ of life) Ja i.99
    abstract from voropeti
    Voropeti

    to deprive of ablative, to take away; only in phrase jīvitā voropeti which shows that -v- is purely euphonic

    1. to deprive of life, to kill DN i.85 Ja iv.454 DN-a i.236 Dhp-a iv.68 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 105 Pv-a 274
    = oropeti
    Volokana
    neuter
    1. looking at, examination Ja iv.237 (variant reading vi˚)
    v(i) + olokana, but cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyavalokana “inspection” Divy 435
    Voloketi
    1. to examine, study, scrutinize MN i.213 (with genitive) Vin i.6 (lokaṁ); Kvu 591 Dhp-a i.319 (lokaṁ) ii.96 (variant reading oloketi)
    v(i) + oloketi; in meaning equal to viloketi & oloketi
    Vosāṭitaka
    neuter
    1. (food) put down (on cemeteries etc.) for (the spirits of) the departed Vin iv.89
    wrong spelling for *vossaṭṭhika = v(i) + ossaṭṭha + ika
    Vosāna
    neuter
    1. (relative) achievement, perfection (in this world), accomplishment MN ii.211 (diṭṭhadhamm’ âbhiññāvosāna-pārami-ppatta) Dhp 423 (cp Dhp-a iv.233) Thag 1, 784 (˚ṁ adhigacchati to reach perfection)
    2. stopping, ceasing; in phrase ˚ṁ āpajjati (almost equal to pamāda to come to an end (with), to stop, to become careless, to flag MN i.193 Ja iii.5 Pv-a 29
    3. antarā ˚ṁ āpajjati to produce half-way achievement to stop half-way. AN v.157 AN v.164 Iti 85 Kern, Toevoegselen s. v quite wrong “to arrive at a conclusion, to be convinced.”
    v(i) + osāna
    Vosāpeti
    1. to make end, to bring to an end or a finish Snp-a 46 (desanaṁ)
    v(i) + osāpeti
    Vosāraṇiya
    adjective neuter
    1. belonging to reinstatement AN i.99
    from v(i) + osāraṇā
    Vosita
    1. one who has attained (relative) achievement perfected, accomplished, mastering, in phrase abhiññā˚ one who masters special knowledge SN i.167 Dhp 423 Iti 47 = 61 = 81 AN i.165 cp. Dhp-a iv.233: “niṭṭhānaṁ patto vusita-vosānaṁ vā patto etc.”
    vi + osita, past participle of ava + ‣See also vusita & vyosita;
    Vossa (-kamma)
    neuter making impotent ‣See under vassakamma DN i.12 DN-a i.97
    Vossagga
    1. relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift ‣See on term as ethical Buddhaghosa at Kindred Sayings i.321 DN iii.190 (issariya˚ handing over of authority), 226 SN iv.365f.; v.63 sq., 351 (˚rata fond of giving) AN ii.66 (identical); iii.53 (identical); Ps i.109 ii.24, 117 Ja vi.213 (kamma˚); Nett 16 Vb 229 350; Vism 224 Vb-a 317
    • ˚sati-vossagga relaxation of attention, inattention, indifference Dhp-a i.228 iii.163, 482; iv.43
    • ˚pariṇāmi, maturity of surrender SN i.88
    = ossagga; ava + sṛj
    Vossajjati
    1. to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Snp 751 (absolutive vossajja Snp-a 508 reads oss˚;) Ja v.124 (issariyaṁ vossajjanto; cp. DN iii.190)
    2. = ossaj(j)ati
    Voharati
    1. to express, define, decide MN i.499 DN i.202 Mil 218
    2. to decide, govern over (a kingdom), give justice, administrate Ja iv.134 (Bārāṇasiṁ maṁsa-sur-odakaṁ, i.e. provide with; double
    3. accusative ), 192 (infinitive vohātuṁ = voharituṁ Commentary )
    4. passive vohariyati to be called Snp-a 26 Pv-a 94 Thag-a 24
    vi + oharati
    Vohāra
    1. trade, business MN ii.360 Snp 614 (˚ṁ upajīvati) Ja i.495 Ja ii.133 Ja ii.202 Ja v.471 Pv-a 111 Pv-a 278
    2. current appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage designation, term, cognomen;
    3. adjective (—˚) so called Snp-a 383 466, 483 (laddha˚ so-called) DN-a i.70 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 231 (laddha˚ padesa, with the name) Vv-a 8 72 (pāṇo ti vohārato satto), 108 (loka nirūḷhāya samaññāya v.)-ariya-vohāra proper (i.e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opposite anariya˚ unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech DN iii.232 AN ii.246 AN iv.307 Vin iv.2 Vb 376 387 lokiya-vohāra common definition, general way of speech Snp-a 382 On term ‣See also Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation § 1306
    4. lawsuit law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohārika) Snp 246 (˚kūṭa fraudulent lawyer) Ja ii.423 (˚ṁ sādheti to claim a debt by way of law, or a lawful debt); vi.229 Dhp-a iii.12 (˚ûpajīvin a lawyer) Snp-a 289

      • Name of a sea-monster, which gets hold of ships Ja v.259
    vi + avahāra
    Vohārika
    1. “decider,” one connected with a law-suit or with the law, magistrate, a higher official (mahāmatta) in the law-courts, a judge or justice. At Vin i.74 two classes of mahāmattā (ministers) are given senānāyakā those of defence, and vohārikā of justice cp. Vin ii.158 Vin iii.45 (purāṇa-vohāriko mahāmatto) iv.223
    from vohāra
    Vy˚
    1. ; is the semi-vowel (i.e. half-consonantic) form of vi˚; before following a & ā (vya˚, vyā), very rarely ū & o; The prefix vi˚ is very unstable, and a variety of forms are also attached to vy˚, which, after the manner of all consonant-combinations in Pāḷi, may apart from its regular form vy˚; appear either as contracted to vv˚; (written ;) like vagga (for vyagga), vaya (for vyaya), vosita (= vyosita), *vvūha (= vyūha, appearing as ˚bhūha), or diaeretic as viy˚; (in poetry) or veyy˚; (popular), e. g viyañjana, viyārambha, viyāyata; or veyvañjanika veyyākaraṇa, veyyāyika. It further appears as by˚ (like byaggha, byañjana, byappatha, byamha, byāpanna byābādha etc.). In a few cases vya˚; represents (a diaeretic) vi˚; , as in vyamhita & vyasanna; and vyā˚; = vi˚ in vyārosa
    Vyakkhissaṁ
    1. at Snp 600 is future of vyācikkhati ‣See viyā˚;.

    Vyagga
    adjective
    1. distracted, confused, bewildered; negative SN i.96 (˚mānasa); v.66, 107
    vi + agga, of which the contracted form is vagga2
    Vyaggha
    1. a tiger DN iii.25 AN iii.101 Snp 416 (˚usabha); Ap 68 (˚rājā) Ja i.357 Ja iii.192 (Subāhu); v.14 (giri-sānuja). feminine viyagghinī (biy˚ Mil 67 ‣See also byaggha
    2. cp. Vedic vyāghra
    Vyagghīnasa
    1. a hawk SN i.148 (as ˚nisa) Ja vi.538 Another word for “hawk” is sakuṇagghi
    ?
    Vyañjana
    neuter
    1. (accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign characteristic (cp. anu˚) Snp 549 Snp 1017 Thag 1, 819 (metric viyañjana) Ja v.86
    2. viyañjanena under the pretext) Dhs 1306
    3. gihi˚ characteristic of a layman Snp 44 (cp Snp-a 91) Mil 11
    4. purisa˚ membrum virile Vin ii.269–⁠2. letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning sense, spirit), e, g. DN iii.127 SN iv.281 SN iv.296 SN v.430 AN ii.139 (cp. savyañjana; or pada (word), e.g. MN i.213 AN i.59 AN ii.147 AN ii.168 AN ii.182 AN iii.178f. Vin ii.316 Nett 4 Snp-a 177
    5. vyañjanato according to the letter Mil 18 (opposite atthato)
    6. condiment, curry Vin ii.214 AN iii.49 (odano anekasūpo aneka-vyañjano); Pv ii.115 (bhatta˚ rice with curry) Pv-a 50
    7. cp. byañjana
    from vi + añj, cp. añjati2 & abbhañjati
    Vyañjanaka
    adjective
    1. ‣See ubhato˚ & veyyañjanika;
    from vyañjana
    Vyañjayati
    1. to characterise, denote, express, indicate Snp-a 91 Nett 209 (Cy.)
    vi + añjati, or añjeti
    Vyatireka
    1. what is left over, addition, surplus Pv-a 18 (of “ca”), 228 (˚to)
    vi + atireka
    Vyatta
    adjective
    1. experienced, accomplished, learned, wise, prudent, clever SN iv.174 (paṇḍita +), 375 AN iii.117 AN iii.258 Ja vi.368 Vv-a 131 (paṇḍita +) Pv-a 39 (identical)
    2. unskilled foolish (+ bāla) SN iv.380 AN iii.258 Ja i.98
    3. evident manifest Pv-a 266 (˚pākaṭa-bhāva)
    cp. viyatta, veyyatta & byatta
    Vyattatā
    feminine
    1. experience, learning, cleverness Mil 349 (as by˚;) Dhp-a ii.38
    • avyattatā foolishness: so correct under avyattatā P.D. i.86)
    abstract from vyatta
    Vyattaya
    1. opposition, reversal; in purisa˚; change of person (grammatical) Snp-a 545
    • vacana˚ reversal of number (i.e. singular &
    • plural ) DN-a; i.141 Snp-a 509
    vi + ati + aya
    Vyathana
    neuter
    1. shaking, wavering Dhtp 465 (as definition of tud
    from vyath
    Vyadhati
    1. to tremble, shake, waver; to be frightened Vin ii.202 (so for vyādhati Ja iii.398 (vyadhase; C vyadhasi = kampasi). causative vyadheti (& vyādheti); to frighten, confuse Ja iv.166 (= vyādheti bādheti Commentary )-
    2. future vyādhayissati SN i.120 = Th 1, 46 (by˚). Under byādheti we had given a different derivation (viz
    3. causative from vyādhi
    4. in poetry for the usual vedhati of vyath, cp. Gothic wipōn
    Vyanta
    adjective neuter
    1. removed, remote; neuter end, finish; only as vyanti˚; in combination with kṛ; and bhū. The spelling is often byanti˚;.
    2. vyantikaroti to abolish remove, get rid of, destroy MN i.115 (byant’ eva ekāsiṁ) 453 (by˚) DN i.71 (˚kareyya) SN iv.76 SN iv.190 AN iv.195 DN-a i.125 212

      • future vyantikāhiti Mil 391 (by˚) Dhp-a iv.69
      • past participle vyantikata Thag 1, 526
      • vyantibhavati to cease, stop; to come to an end, to be destroyed Kvu 597 (by˚); or ˚hoti AN i.141 AN iii.74 Ps i.171 (by˚) Mil 67 (by˚), vyantibhāva destruction, annihilation MN i.93 AN v.292 AN v.297f.; Pv iv.173; Kvu 544 (by˚) vyantibhuta come to an end Ja v.4
      vi + anta
    Vyapagacchati
    1. to depart, to be dispelled Ja ii.407 (absolutive ˚gamma.
    2. past participle ˚gata
    3. vi + apagacchati
    Vyapagata
    1. departed Ja i.17 Mil 133 Mil 225
    past participle of vyapagacchati
    Vyapanudati
    1. to drive away, expel; absolutive ˚nujja Snp 66
    2. aorist vyapānudi Thag 2, 318
    3. vi + apanudati
    Vyapahaññati
    1. to be removed or destroyed Ja vi.565
    vi + apa + haññati
    Vyappatha
    neuter
    1. duty, occupation, activity Snp 158 (khīṇa of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi)
    2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Snp 163 Snp 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), explained at Snp-a 206 by vacīkamma; & in def; n of “speech” at Vin iv.2 ‣See under byappatha Dhs-a 324 (explained as vākya-bheda)
    perhaps a distortion of *vyāpṛta, for which the usual Pali (der.) veyyāvacca (q.v.) in meaning “duty”
    Vyappathi
    feminine
    1. activity, occupation, duty (?) Snp 961 ‣See remarks on byappatha
    cp. Sanskrit vyāpṛti
    Vyappanā
    feminine
    1. application (of mind), focussing (of attention) Dhs 7
    vi + appanā
    Vyamha
    neuter
    1. palace; a celestial mansion, a vimāna, abode for fairies etc. Ja v.454 Ja vi.119 Ja vi.251 (= pura & rāja-nivesa Commentary ) Vv 351 (= bhavana Vv-a 160). cp. byamha
    etymology?
    Vyamhita
    adjective
    1. astounded, shocked, awed; dismayed, frightened Ja v.69 (= bhīta Commentary ); vi.243 314
    metric for vimhita
    Vyaya
    1. expense, loss, decay SN iv.68 SN iv.140 Mil 393 (as abbaya) avyayena instrumental safely DN i.72 cp. veyyāyika vyāyika;
    vi + aya, of i; the assimilation form is vaya2
    Vyavayāti
    1. to go away, disappear Ja v.82
    vi + ava(= apa) + i, cp. apeti & veti;
    Vyavasāna
    neuter [somewhat doubtful. It has to be compared with vavassagga, although it should be derived from (cp.
    • past participle vyavasita; or śri ?), thus mixture of sṛj & sā. cp. a similar difficulty of under osāpeti decision, resolution; only used to explain participle handa (exhortation) at Snp-a 200 491 (variant reading vyavasāya: cp. vavasāya at DN-a i.237), for which otherwise vavassagga.

    Vyavasita
    adjective
    1. decided, resolute Snp-a 200
    past participle of vi + ava + (or śri ?), cp. vyavasāna
    Vyasana
    neuter
    1. misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction, loss DN i.248 SN iii.137 (anaya˚); iv.159 AN i.33 v.156 sq., 317 (several) Snp 694 (˚gata ruined) Pv i.64 (= dukkha Pv-a 33); iii.56 (= anattha Pv-a 199) Vb 99f. 137 Vb-a 102 (several) Pv-a 4 Pv-a 103 Pv-a 112 Sdhp 499
    • The 5 vyasanas are: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚ or misfortune concerning one’s relations wealth, health, character, views. Thus at DN iii.235 AN iii.147 Vin iv.277
    from vy + as
    Vyasanin
    adjective
    1. having misfortune, unlucky, faring ill Ja v.259
    from vyasana
    Vyasanna
    1. sunk into (locative ), immersed Ja iv.399 Ja v.16 (here doubtful; not, as Commentary vyasanāpanna; gloss visanna; variant readings in Commentary vyaccanna viphanna, visatta)
    2. metric (diaeretic) for visanna
    Vyākata
    1. answered, explained, declared, decided MN i.431 (by˚) AN i.119 SN ii.51 SN ii.223 SN iv.59, 194; v.177 Snp 1023
    2. avyākata unexplained undecided, not declared, indeterminate MN i.431 (by˚) DN i.187 DN i.189 SN ii.222 SN iv.375f. 384 sq., 391 sq. Ps ii.108 sq. Dhs 431 576
    3. predicted Ja i.26 3. settled, determined Ja iii.529 (asinā v. brought to a decision by the sword)
    past participle of vyākaroti
    Vyākatatta
    neuter
    1. explanation, definiteness Pv-a 27
    abstract from vyākata
    Vyākattar
    1. expounder AN iii.81
    agent noun of vyākaroti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyākartṛ Divy 620
    Vyākaraṇa
    neuter
    1. answer (pañha˚), explanation, exposition AN i.197 ii.46; iii.119 Snp-a 63 99; Kp-a 75, 76
    2. grammar (as one of the 6 angas) Snp-a 447 Pv-a 97
    3. prediction Ja i.34 Ja i.44 Dhp-a iv.120

      from vyākaroti ‣See also veyyākaraṇa
    Vyākaroti
    1. to explain, answer (in combination with puṭṭha, asked) DN i.25 DN i.58 DN i.175 DN i.200 Snp 510 Snp 513f. 1102, 1116 Mil 318 (byākareyya) Vv-a 71 Fut ˚karissati DN i.236 Snp 993 Pv-a 281 For vyākarissati we have vyakkhissati (of viyācikkhati) at Snp 600
    2. aorist singular vyākāsi Snp 541 Snp 1116 Snp 1127 Pv-a 212
    3. plural vyākaṁsu Snp 1084 Pv ii.135
    4. gerundive vyākātabba DN i.94 DN i.118 2. to prophesy, predict cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit vyākaroti in same sense Divy 65 Divy 131
      1. Ja i.140 Pv iii.55 (aorist ˚ākari) Mhvs 6, 2 (
      2. aorist ˚ākaruṁ) Dhp-a iv.120 (˚ākāsi) Pv-a 196 Pv-a 199 (˚ākāsi).
      3. past participle vyākata
      4. vi + ā + kṛ
    Vyākāra
    1. ‣See viy˚;
    Vyākhyāta
    1. told, announced, set forth, enumerated Snp 1000
    past participle of v(i)yācikkhati
    Vyākula
    adjective
    1. perplexed Ja i.301 Pv-a 160 Vv-a 30 Sdhp 403
    vi + ākula
    Vyādinna
    1. at AN iii.64 (soto vikkhitto visato +) is doubtful in reading & meaning (“split"?). It must mean something like “interrupted, diverted.” The variant readings are vicchinna & jiṇṇa;
    for vyādiṇṇa, vi + ādiṇṇa?
    Vyādha
    1. a huntsman, deer-hunter Mhvs 10, 89 (read either; vyādha-deva god of the h.; or vyādhi˚; demon of maladies); 10, 95
    from vyadh ‣See vedha & vijjhati
    Vyādhi1
    1. sickness, malady, illness, disease AN i.139 (as devadūta), 146, 155 sq.; iii.66; Ps i.59 sq. ii.147 Ja vi.224 Vism 236. Often in sequence jāti jarā vyādhi maraṇa, e.g. AN ii.172 AN iii.74f. Vism 232
    ‣See byādhi
    Vyādhi2
    1. (camel) ‣See oṭṭhi˚;
    Vyādhita
    1. affected with an illness, ill Ja v.497 Mil 168 ‣See byādhita
    2. shaken, feminine ˚ā as abstr, shakiness, trembling Vb-a 479
    past participle of vyādheti
    Vyādhiyaka
    neuter
    1. shaking up Vb 352 Vb-a 479 (uppannavyādhitā; i.e. kāya-pphandana)
    from vyādheti
    Vyādhati
    1. ‣See vyadhati. past participle vyādhita.

    Vyāpaka
    adjective
    1. filling or summing up, combining, completing Pv-a 71 (in explanation of “ye keci” anavasesa˚ niddesa)
    from vyāpeti
    Vyāpajjati
    instrumental to go wrong, to fail, disagree; to be troubled; also (trs.) to do harm, to injure SN iii.119 SN iv.184 = Nd2 40 (by˚) AN iii.101 (bhattaṁ me vyāpajjeyya disagrees with me, makes me ill) Snp 1065 (ākāso avyāpajjamāno not troubled, not getting upset) Nd2 74 (by˚).
    • past participle vyāpanna.
    • causative vyāpādeti
    vi + āpajjati
    Vyāpajjanā
    feminine
    1. injuring, doing harm, ill-will Pug 18 Dhs 418 (“getting upset” translation)
    from vyāpajjati
    Vyāpajjha
    adjective neuter
    1. to be troubled or troubling, doing harm, injuring; only negative avyāpajjha (& abyābajjha); adjective not hurting, peaceful, friendly;
    2. neuter kindness of heart Vin i.183 MN i.90 (abyābajjhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti) 526 DN i.167 DN i.247 DN i.251 SN iv.296 SN iv.371 AN i.98 AN ii.231f. iii.285, 329 sq., 376 sq. cp. byāpajjha & vyābādha; etc
    3. perhaps gerundive of vyāpajjati; but ‣See also avyāpajjha
    Vyāpatti
    feminine
    1. injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence. AN v.292f. Pug 18 Ja iv.137 Dhs 418 (“disordered temper” translation)
    from vyāpajjati
    Vyāpanna
    adjective
    1. spoilt, disagreeing, gone wrong; corrupt; only with citta, i.e. a corrupted heart, or a malevolent intention; adjective malevolent DN i.139 DN iii.82 AN i.262 AN i.299 opposite avyāpanna (q.v.) ‣See also byāpanna & viyāpanna;
    past participle of vyāpajjati
    Vyāpāda
    1. making bad, doing harm: desire to injure, malevolence, ill-will DN i.71 DN i.246 DN iii.70f. 226, 234 SN i.99 SN ii.151 SN iv.343 AN i.194 AN i.280 AN ii.14 AN ii.210 AN iii.92 AN iii.231 AN iii.245 AN iv.437 Vb 86 363 sq., 391 Pug 17f. Dhs 1137 Vism 7 DN-a i.211 Vb-a 74 118, 369. ˚anusaya MN i.433 ˚dosa MN iii.3 ˚dhātu MN iii.62 ˚nīvaraṇa MN ii.203 ‣See under each affix
    • cp. avyāpāda
    from vyāpajjati ‣See also byāpāda
    Vyāpādeti
    1. to spoil Mil 92
    causative of vyāpajjati
    Vyāpāra
    1. occupation, business, service, work Ja i.341 Ja v.60 Vism 595. cp. veyyāvacca, vyappatha (by˚), vyāvaṭa
    vi + ā + pṛ
    Vyāpāritar
    1. one occupied with MN iii.126
    Vyāpin
    adjective
    1. pervading, diffused Dhs-a 311
    from vi + āp
    Vyāpeti
    1. to make full, pervade, fill, comprise Dhs-a 307 Vv-a 17 Thag-a 287 Pv-a 52 (= pharati) 71 (in explanation of “ye keci”)
    vi + causative of āp
    Vyābādha
    (& byābādha)
    1. oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta˚ & para˚; (disturbing the peace of others of oneself) MN i.89 SN iv.339 AN i.114 AN i.157 AN i.216 AN ii.179-Also at SN iv.159 (pāṇinaṁ vyābādhāya, with variant reading vadhāya) ‣See also byābādha. The corresponding adjectives are (a)vyāpajjha & veyyābādhika; (q.v.)
    from vi + ā + bādh, but semantically connected with vi + ā + pad, as in vyāpāda & vyāpajjha;
    Vyābādheti
    (& bya˚)
    1. to do harm, hurt, injure Vin ii.77/78 SN iv.351f. DN-a i.167 The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is vyābādhayate (e.g. Divy 105)
    causative of vi + ā + badh or distortion from vyāpadeti, with which identical in meaning
    Vyābāheti
    1. literally “to make an outsider,” to keep or to be kept out or away Vin ii.140 (˚bāhiṁsu in passive sense; so that they may not be kept away). Oldenberg (on p. 320) suggests reading vyābādhiṁsu, which may be better, viz. “may not be offended” (?). The form is difficult to explain
    2. vi + ā + bah ‣See bahati3
    Vyābhaṅgī
    feminine
    1. a carrying pole (or flail?) Thag 1, 623 combined with asita ‣See asita4 in correct to pt 2 “sickle & pole” MN ii.180 AN iii.5
    2. a flail SN iv.201
    ‣See byā˚
    Vyāma
    1. ‣See byāma & add reference DN ii.18≈Vism 136 (catu˚pamāṇa)
    Vyāyata
    1. stretched; only negative a˚ senseless, confused (should it be vyāyatta ?) Ja i.496 (= avyatta Commentary ) ‣See also viyāyata. Vyayama = vayama
    vi + āyata
    Vyāyāma = vāyāma
    1. Dhs-a 146
    Vyāyika
    adjective
    1. belonging to decay; only negative ; not decaying, imperishable AN ii.51 Ja v.508
    from vyaya
    Vyārambha
    1. ‣See viy˚;
    Vyāruddha
    adjective
    1. opposed, hostile Thag 2, 344 Snp 936 ‣See byāruddha
    past participle of vi + ā + rundh
    Vyārosa
    1. anger MN iii.78 SN iii.73
    vi + ā + rosa, cp. virosanā
    Vyālika
    neuter
    1. fault Thag-a 266
    for vy + alika
    Vyāvaṭa
    adjective
    1. doing service, active, busy; eager, keen intent on (locative ), busy with AN iv.195 (mayi = worrying about me) Ja iii.315 (su˚); iv.371 (kiccâkiccesu v. uyyatta Commentary ); v.395 (= ussukka); vi.229 (= kāya-veyyāvacca-dān’ ādi-kamma-karaṇena vyāvaṭa Commentary )

      • dassana˚ keen on a sight, eager to ‣See Ja i.89 Vv-a 213 (preferred to Text reading!)
      • dāna˚ serving in connection with a gift, busy with giving, a “commissioner of gifts,” i.e. a superintendent installed by a higher (rich person (as a king or seṭṭhi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in connection with a mahādāna. Rh Davids at Dialogues of the Buddha ii.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring it to a vyāvaṭa in meaning of “hindered,” and by translating it as “hindered at the largesse” or “objecting to the largesse. At none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning ‣See e.g. DN ii.354 Ja iii.129 Pv ii.950 (dāne v. = ussukkaṁ āpanna Pv-a 135) Pv-a 112 (dāne), 124 (identical) DN-a i.296 (? not found). avyāvaṭa not busy, not bothering about (
      • locative ), unconcerned with, not worrying DN ii.141 (Tathāgatassa sarīre; translation not to the point “hinder not yourselves”) Vin iii.136 ‣See also separately
      • Note. vyāvaṭa (& a˚); only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of "covered obstructed” wrongly from vṛ
      1. as given by Childers Correct the translation given under byāvaṭa accordingly!
      = Sanskrit vyāpṛta, cp. vyāpāra, byappatha. & veyyāvacca
    Vyāviddha
    adjective
    1. whirling about, flitting (here & there), moving about, pell-mell Ja vi.530
    vi + āviddha
    Vyāsa
    1. separation, division; always contrasted with samāsa, e.g. Vism 82 (vyāsato separately distributively; opposite samāsato); Kp-a 187
    from vi + ās to sit
    Vyāsatta
    1. ‣See byāsatta
    Vyāsiñcati
    1. to defile, corrupt, tarnish SN iv.78 (cittaṁ). past participle vyāsitta ibid
    2. vi + āsiñcati
    Vyāseka
    1. mixed; only negative ; unmixed, untarnished, undefiled DN i.70 DN-a i.183 Pug 59 Thag 1 926
    from vi + ā + sic
    Vyāharati
    1. to utter, talk, speak Vin ii.214 Ja ii.177 Ja iv.225 (puṭṭho vyāhāsi, perhaps with variant reading as vyākāsi ‣See also avyāharati
    • cp. paṭi˚;
    vi + āharati
    Vyūha
    1. heap, mass; massing or array, grouping of troops SN v.369 (sambādha˚ a dense crowd, or massed with troops (?); in phrase iddha phīta etc., as given under bāhujañña Ja ii.406 (battle array: paduma˚, cakka˚, sakaṭa˚;)
    2. a side street (?), in sandhibbūha Ja vi.276 ‣See also byūha
    from vi + vah ‣See byūha
    Vyūhati
    1. at Vv-a 104 is not clear ‣See byūhati. It looks more like a present tense to viyūḷha in sense “to be bulky,” than a denominative from vyūha as “stand in array. For the regular verb vi + vah ‣See viyūhati. cp. paṭi˚ saṁyūhati; .

    Vyosita
    adjective
    1. perfected; negative ; not perfected, imperfect Thag 1, 784 (aby˚)
    1. S
    = vosita

    S

    -S-
    1. a euphonic-s-seems to occur in combination ras-agga-saggin ‣See rasa2. An apparent hiatus-s in ye s-idha Snp 1083 and evaṁ s- ahaṁ Snp 1134 (variant reading ) may be an abbreviated su˚ ‣See su2, unless we take it as a misspelling for p
    Sa1
    1. the letter s (sa-kāra) Snp-a 23 or the syllable sa Dhp-a ii.6 Pv-a 280
    Sa2
    1. base of the nominative of the demonstrative pronoun that, he she. The form singular
    2. masculine sa is rare (e.g. Dhp 142 Snp 89) According to Geiger (Pali Grammar § 105) sa occurs in Snp 40 times but so 124 times. In later Pāli sa is almost extinct The final o of so is often changed into v before vowels and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svājja Snp 998 = so ajja; svāhaṁ Ja i.167 = so ahaṁ; svāyaṁ Vin i.2 = so ayaṁ. The following vowel is dropped in so maṁ Iti 57 = so imaṁ

      • A form se is Māgadhism for
      • neuter acc singular taṁ, found e.g. at DN ii.278 DN ii.279 MN ii.254 MN ii.255 and in combination seyyathā, seyyathīdaṁ (for which taṁyathā Mil 1). An idiomatic use is that of so in meaning of “that (he or somebody),” e.g. “so vata … palipanno paraṁ palipannaṁ uddharissatī ti: n’ etaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati” MN i.45 cp. “sā 'haṁ dhammaṁ nâssosiṁ” that I did not hear the Dh. Vv 405 Or in the sense of a
      • conditional (or causal) participle “if,” or “once,” e.g. sa kho so bhikkhu … upakkileso ti iti viditvā … upakkilesaṁ pajahati “once he has recognised …” MN i.37 cp. ya˚; ii.2 b. On correlated use with ya˚; (yo so etc.) ‣See ya˚; ii.1
      Indogermanic *so- masculine, *sā-
    3. feminine ; nominative singular to base *to- of the oblique cases; cp. Sanskrit sa (saḥ), sā; Avestan hō, hā; Gothic sa, sō; Anglo-Saxon sē “the” (= that one); pe-s = English thi-s
    Sa3
    1. prefix, used as first pt. of compounds, is the sense of “with,” possessed of, having same as; e.g. sadevaka with the devas Vin i.8
    • sadhammika having common faith DN ii.273
    • sajāti having the same origin Ja ii.108 Often opposed to a- and other negative prefixes (like nir˚). Sometimes almost pleonastical (like sa-antara)

      • Of combinations we only mention a few of those in which a vocalic initial of the 2nd pt remains uncontracted. Other examples ‣See under their heading in alph. order. English g. sa-antara inside Dhp-a iii.788 (for santara Dhp 315); sa-Inda together with Indra DN ii.261 DN ii.274 AN v.325f.; ˚-uttara having something beyond, inferior (opposite an˚) DN i.80 DN ii.299 = M i.59 Dhs 1292 1596 Dhs-a 50
      • ˚-uttaracchada (& ˚chadana); a carpet with awnings above it DN i.7≈; ii.187 (˚ava) AN i.181 Vin i.192 DN-a i.87
      • ˚˚udaka with water, wet Vin i.46
      • ˚˚udariya born from the same womb, a brother Ja iv.417 cp. sodariya; —˚uddesa with explanation Iti 99 Vism 423 (nāma-gotta-vasena sa-udd.; vaṇṇ'ādi-vasena sākāra); —˚upanisa together with its cause, causally associated SN ii.30
      • ˚˚upavajja having a helper MN iii.266
      • ˚˚upādāna showing attachment MN ii.265
      • ˚˚upādisesa having the substratum of life remaining Snp 354 Iti 38 Nett 92. O
      • past participle anupādisesa; —˚ummi roaring of the billows Iti 57 114
      • Note. sa2 & sa; 3 are differentiations
      1. of one and the same sa, which is originally the deictic pronoun in the function of identity & close connection ‣See etymology under; saṁ˚;
      identical with saṁ˚
    Sa4
    1. (reflex. pronoun )

      1. own MN i.366 DN ii.209 Snp 905 Ja ii.7 iii.164, 323 (locative samhi lohite), 402 (
      2. accusative saṁ his own viz. kinsman; C = sakaṁ janaṁ); iv.249 saṁ bhātaraṁ) Pv ii.121 = Dhp-a iii.277 (
      3. accusative san tanuṁ); instrumental sena on one’s own, by oneself Ja v.24 (Commentary not quite to the point mama santakena). Often in composition, like sadesa one’s own country Dāvs i.10. cp. saka
      4. Vedic sva & svayaṁ (= Pali sayaṁ); Indogermanic *seṷo, *sṷe; cp. Avestan hava & hva own; Latin sui, suus; Gothic swēs own, sik = German sich himself; etc.
    Saṁ˚
    1. ; indeclinable prefix; Indogermanic *sem one; one & the same, cp. Latin simul (= simultaneous), similis “re-sembling.” Also Sanskrit sa (= sa2 together = Latin con˚); hence arises that of a closer connection or a more accentuated action than that expressed by the simple verb (intensifying = thoroughly quite), or noun. Very often merely pleonastic, especially in combination with other prefixes (e.g. sam-anu˚, sam-ā˚ sam-pa˚). In meaning of “near by, together” it is opposed to para˚; ; as modifying prefix it is contrary to abhi˚; and (more frequently) to vi˚; (e.g. saṁvadati → vivadati), whereas it often equals pa˚; (e.g. pamodati → sammodati), with which it is often combined as sampa˚ and also abhi˚; (e.g. abhivaḍḍhati → saṁvaḍḍhati), with which often combined as abhisaṁ˚;

      • Buddhaghosa & Dhammapāla explain; saṁ˚; by sammā (Snp-a 151 Kp-a 209: so read for samā āgatā), suṭṭhu ‣See e.g. santasita, santusita or samantā (= altogether Snp-a 152 154), or (dogmatically) sakena santena samena (KhA 240), or as “saṁyoga” Vism 495
      • In combination with y we find both saṁy˚; and saññ˚;. The usual conṭracted form before r is sā˚;
    Saṁyata
    (& saññata)
    1. literally drawn together; figuratively restrained, self-controlled DN ii.88 SN i.79 Snp 88 Snp 156 Snp 716Ja i.188 Vv 3411 Mil 213
    1. ˚atta having one’s self restrained, self-controlled SN i.14 (for saya˚) Snp 216 Snp 284 (ññ), 723; Pv ii.614 (ññ; = saññata-citta Pv-a 98)
    2. ˚ūru having the thighs pressed together, having firm thighs Ja v.89 Ja v.107 (ññ) 155 (ññ)
    3. ˚cārin living in self-control Dhp 104 (ññ) -pakhuma having the eyelashes close together Vv-a 162
    past participle of saṁyamati
    Saṁyama
    (& saññama)
    1. restraint, selfcontrol, abstinence SN i.21 SN i.169 DN i.53 Vin i.3 AN i.155f. (kāyena, vācāya, manasā) DN iii.147 Iti 15 (ññ) Snp 264 Snp 655 MN ii.101 (sīla˚) Dhp 25 (saññama dama) DN-a i.160 Dhp-a ii.255 (= catu-pārisuddhi-sīla) Vb-a 332–⁠2. restraint in giving alms saving (of money etc.) stinginess Vin i.272 Pv ii.711 (= sankoca Pv-a 102)
    2. from saṁ + yam
    Saṁyamati
    1. to practise self-control SN i.209 (pāṇesu ca saṁyamāmase, translation “if we can keep our hands off living things”). past participle saṁyata

      • Caus saññāmeti to restrain MN i.365 MN i.507 Dhp 37 Dhp 380. cp. paṭi˚;
      saṁ + yamati
    Saṁyamana
    neuter
    1. fastening Ja v.202 Ja v.207
    from saṁ + yam
    Saṁyamanī
    feminine
    1. a kind of ornament Ja v.202 (= maṇisuvaṇṇa-pavāḷa-rajata-mayāni pilandhanāni Commentary )
    from last
    Saṁyācikā
    feminine
    1. begging, what is begged; only in instrumental ˚āya (adverb ) by begging together by collecting voluntary offerings Vin iii.144 (so read for ˚āyo), 149 (explained incorrectly as “sayaṁ yācitvā”) Ja ii.282 (so read for ˚āyo)
    2. collect. abstract from saṁ + yāc
    Saṁyuga
    neuter
    1. harness Thag 1, 659
    from saṁ + yuj
    Saṁyuñjati
    1. to connect, join with instrumental, unite SN i.72 passive saṁyujjati SN iii.70
    2. past participle saṁyutta.
    3. causative saṁyojeti (1) to put together, to endow with DN ii.355 SN v.354 Ja i.277
    4. to couple, to wed someone to instrumental Ja iii.512 (dārena); iv.7 (identical)

      • pp saṁyojita
      saṁ + yuñjati
    Saṁyuta
    adjective
    1. connected, combined Snp 574 (ññ), 1026
    saṁ + yuta, of yu
    Saṁyutta
    1. tied, bound, fettered MN iii.275 (cammena) SN iv.163 AN iv.216 (saṁyojanena s. by bonds to this world) Snp 194 (ññ), 300, 304 Iti 8 Sdhp 211
    2. connected with, mixed with (—˚) Ja i.269 (visa˚)
    3. cp. paṭi˚, vi˚;
    past participle of saṁyuñjati
    Saṁyūḷha
    1. massed, collected, put together, composed or gathered (like a bunch of flowers DN ii.267 (gāthā) MN i.386 DN-a i.38 (spelt saṁvūḷha, i.e. saṁvyūḷha; variant reading sañaḷha i.e. sannaddha)
    past participle of saṁyūhati, cp. in similar meaning viyūḷha
    Saṁyūhati
    1. to form into a mass, to ball together, to conglomerate AN iv.137 (kheḷapiṇḍaṁ). past participle saṁyūḷha
    2. saṁ + vyūhati
    Saṁyoga
    1. bond, fetter MN i.498 SN i.226 SN iii.70 SN iv.36 AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opposite vi˚) Snp 522 Snp 733 Dhp 384 (= kāmayog'ādayo saṁyogā Dhp-a iv.140)
    2. union, association Ja iii.12 (ññ); Vism 495. 3. connection (within the sentence), construction Pv-a 73 (accanta˚), 135 (identical)
    from saṁ + yuj
    Saṁyojana
    neuter
    1. bond, fetter SN iv.163 etc.; especially the fetters that bind man to the wheel of transmigration Vin i.183 SN i.23 SN v.241 SN v.251 AN i.264 iii.443; iv.7 sq. (diṭṭhi˚) MN i.483 Dhp 370 Iti 8 (taṇhā) Snp 62 Snp 74 Snp 621 Ja i.275 Ja ii.22 Nett 49 Dhp-a iii.298 iv.49
    1. The ten fetters are (1) sakkāyadiṭṭhi; (2) vicikicchā (3) sīlabbataparāmāso; (4) kāmacchando; (5) vyāpādo (6) rūparāgo; (7) arūparāgo; (8) māno; (9) uddhaccaṁ (10) avijjā. The first three are the tīṇi saṁyojanāni e.g. MN i.9 AN i.231 AN i.233 DN i.156 DN ii.92f. 252 iii.107, 132, 216 SN v.357 SN v.376 SN v.406 Pug 12 15 Nett 14 Dhs 1002 DN-a i.312 The seven last are the satta saṁyojanāni, Netechnical term 14. The first five are called orambhāgiyāni -e.g. AN i.232f.; ii.5, 133; v.17 DN i.156 DN ii.92 DN ii.252 MN i.432 SN v.61 SN v.69 Thag 2, 165 Pug 17 The last five are called uddhambhāgiyāni e.g. AN v.17 SN v.61 SN v.69 Thag 2, 167 Thag-a 159 Pug 22 Nett 14, 49
    1. A different enumeration of the ten saṁyojanas, at Nd2 657 = Dhs 1113 1463 (kāmarāga, paṭigha, māna diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāsa, bhavarāga, issā macchariya, avijjā); compare, however, Dhs 1002
    1. A different enumeration of seven saṁyojanas at DN iii.254 AN iv.7 viz. anunaya˚, paṭigha˚, diṭṭhi˚, vicikicchā˚ māna˚, bhavarāga˚, avijjā˚. A list of eight is found at MN i.361f. cp. also ajjhatta-saṁyojano & bahiddhāsaṁyojano; puggalo AN i.63f. Pug 22
    • kiṁ-su-s˚ SN i.39 Snp 1108
    from saṁyuñjati
    Saṁyojaniya
    1. (saññ˚) adjective

      1. connected with the saṁyojanas, favourable to the saṁyojanas, AN i.50 SN ii.86 SN iii.166f.; iv.89, 107 Dhs 584 1125, 1462 Dhs-a 49 Used as a noun, with dhammā understood Snp 363 Snp 375
      from saṁyojana
    Saṁyojita
    1. combined, connected with, mixed with Ja i.269 (bhesajja˚)
    past participle of saṁyojeti, causative of saṁyuñjati
    Saṁrakkhati
    1. to guard, ward off Sdhp 364
    saṁ + rakkhati
    Saṁrambha
    1. impetuosity, rage Dāvs iv.34. This is the Sanskrit ic form for the usual Pali sārambha
    saṁ + *rambha, from rabh, as in rabhasa (q.v.)
    Saṁrāga
    1. passion Ja iv.22 cp. sārāga
    saṁ + rāga
    Saṁrūḷha
    1. grown together, healed Ja iii.216 Ja v.344
    past participle of saṁrūhati
    Saṁrūhati
    1. to grow Ja iv.429 (= vaḍḍhati)
    saṁ + rūhati
    Saṁroceti
    1. to find pleasure in, only in aorist (poetical) samarocayi Snp 290 Snp 306 Snp 405 Ja iv.471
    2. saṁ + roceti
    Saṁvacana
    neuter
    1. sentence Dhs-a 52
    saṁ + vacana
    Saṁvacchara
    1. a year DN ii.327 AN ii.75 AN iv.139 AN iv.252f. Dhp 108 Ja ii.80 Sdhp 239; nominative plural saṁvaccharāni Ja ii.128
    2. saṁ + vacchara; cp. Vedic saṁvatsara
    Saṁvaṭṭa
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. “rolling on or forward” (opposite vivaṭṭa “rolling back”), with reference to the development of the Universe & time (kappa) the; ascending aeon (vivaṭṭa the descending cycle), evolution Iti 99 Pug 60 Vism 419; Sdhp 484 Sdhp 485. —˚vivaṭṭa a period within which evolution & dissolution of the world takes place, a complete world-cycle (‣ See also; vivaṭṭa DN i.14 AN ii.142 Iti 15 99 Pug 60
    saṁ + vaṭṭa; 1
    Saṁvaṭṭati
    1. to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution (opposite vivaṭṭati in devolution) DN i.17 iii.84, 109 AN ii.142 DN-a i.110
    2. to fall to pieces, to come to an end (like the world’s destruction), to
    3. passive away, perish, dissolve
    4. intranstitive Ja iii.75 (paṭhavī s.; variant reading saṁvaddh˚) Mil 287 (ākāso ˚eyya). For saṁvaṭṭ˚ at Ja i.189 read saṁvaddh˚
    saṁ + vaṭṭati
    Saṁvaṭṭanika
    adjective
    1. turning to, being reborn DN i.17
    from saṁvaṭṭa(na)
    Saṁvaḍḍha
    1. grown up, brought up DN i.75 DN ii.38 Pv-a 66
    past participle of saṁvaḍḍhati
    Saṁvaḍḍhati
    1. to grow up; ppr. ˚amāna (ddh.) growing up, subsisting Ja i.189 (so far ˚vaṭṭ˚). causative ˚vaḍḍheti to rear, nourish, bring up Ja i.231 (ppr
    2. passive ˚vaḍḍhiyamāna)
    3. saṁ + vaḍḍhati
    Saṁvaṇṇana
    neuter
    1. praising, praise Ja i.234
    saṁ + vaṇṇana
    Saṁvaṇṇita
    1. praised, combined with sambhāvita honoured MN i.110 MN iii.194 MN iii.223
    past participle of saṁvaṇṇeti
    Saṁvaṇṇeti
    1. to praise Vin iii.73f. Ja v.292 (aorist 3rd
    2. plural ˚vaṇṇayuṁ). cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁvarṇayati Divy 115
    3. past participle saṁvaṇṇita
    4. saṁ + vaṇṇeti
    Saṁvattati
    1. to lead (to), to be useful (for) AN i.54 AN i.58 (ahitāya dukkhāya) Vin i.10 = SN v.421 Iti 71f. Ja i.97 Pot. saṁvatteyya Vin i.13
    • Often in phrase nibbidāya, virāgāya … nibbānāya saṁvattati e.g. DN i.189 DN ii.251 DN iii.130 SN v.80 SN v.255 AN iii.83 AN iii.326
    saṁ + vattati
    Saṁvattanika
    adjective
    1. conducive to, involving AN ii.54 AN ii.65 Iti 82 Kvu 618 Ja i.275 Nett 134 = SN v.371 As ˚iya at Pv-a 205
    from saṁvattati
    Saṁvadati
    1. to agree MN i.500 (opposite vivadati)
    saṁ + vadati
    Saṁvadana
    neuter
    1. a certain magic act performed in order to procure harmony DN i.11 DN-a i.96 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.23
    from saṁvadati
    Saṁvaddhana
    neuter
    1. increasing, causing to grow Ja iv.16
    from saṁ + vṛdh
    Saṁvara
    1. restraint DN i.57 DN i.70 DN i.89 DN ii.281 (indriya˚); iii.130, 225 AN ii.26 SN iv.189f. Iti 28 96 118 Pug 59 Snp 1034 Vin ii.126 192 (āyatiṁ saṁvarāya “for restraint in the future,” in confession formula), Dhp 185 Nett 192; Vism 11, 44 Dhp-a iii.238 iv.86 (˚dvārāni). The fivefold saṁvara: sīla˚, sati˚ ñāṇa˚, khanti˚, viriya˚; , i.e. by virtue, mindfulness insight, patience, effort Dhs-a 351 as pātimokkha˚; etc at Vism 7 Vb-a 330f. —˚vinaya norm of self-control good conduct Snp-a 8 cātuyāma˚, Jain discipline MN l.377
    2. from saṁ + vṛ
    Saṁvaraṇa
    neuter
    1. covering; obstruction Dhtp 274 (as definition of root val, i.e. vṛ;)
    from saṁ + vṛ
    Saṁvarati
    1. to restrain, hold; to restrain oneself Vin ii.102 (Pot. ˚vareyyāsi) Mil 152 (pāso na saṁvarati). past participle saṁvuta
    2. saṁ + varati = vuṇāti.1
    Saṁvarī
    feminine
    1. the night (poetical DN iii.196 Ja iv.441 Ja v.14 Ja v.269 Ja vi.243
    Vedic śarvarī from śarvara speckled; the Pali form viâ sabbarī → sāvarī → saṁvarī
    Saṁvasati
    1. to live, to associate, cohabitate AN ii.57 Vin ii.237 Nd2 423 Pug 65 Dhp 167 Dīpavaṁsa x.8 Mil 250 causative ˚vāseti same meaning Vin iv.137

      • cp. upa˚;
      saṁ + vasati2
    Saṁvāti
    1. to be fragrant Ja v.206 (cp. variant readings on p. 203)
    saṁ + vāyati2
    Saṁvāsa
    1. living with, co-residence Vin i.97 Vin ii.237 Vin iii.28 AN ii.57f. 187; iii.164 sq.; iv.172 Ja i.236 Ja iv.317 (piya-saṁvāsaṁ vasi lived together in harmony) Snp 283 Snp 290 Snp 335 Dhp 207 Dhp 302; Sdhp 435. 2. intimacy Ja ii.39
    2. cohabitation, sexual intercourse DN i.97 Ja i.134 Ja ii.108 Snp-a 355
    saṁ + vāsa2
    Saṁvāsaka
    adjective
    1. living together Vin ii.162 Vin iii.173
    from saṁvāsa
    Saṁvāsiya
    1. one who lives with somebody Snp 22
    • a˚-bhāva impossibility to co-reside Mil 249
    from saṁvāsa
    Saṁvigga
    1. agitated, moved by fear or awe, excited, stirred DN i.50 DN ii.240 AN ii.115 SN iv.290 SN v.270 Ja i.59 Mil 236 Pv-a 31 (˚hadaya)
    past participle of saṁvijjati1
    Saṁvijita
    1. (med.) filled with fear or awe, made to tremble; (pass.) felt, realized Snp 935 (= saṁvejita ubbejita Nd1 406)
    past participle of saṁvejeti
    Saṁvijjati1
    1. to be agitated or moved, to be stirred AN ii.114 Iti 30 past participle saṁvigga.
    2. causative saṁvejeti MN i.253 SN i.141 Vin i.32
    3. imperative ˚vejehi SN v.270
    4. aorist ˚vejesi Mil 236 infinitive ˚vejetuṁ SN i.197
    5. absolutive ˚vejetvā Ja i.327
    6. gerundive ˚vejanīya that which should cause awe, in ˚āni ṭhānāni places of pilgrimage DN ii.140 AN i.36 AN ii.120 Iti 30
    7. past participle saṁvijita & ˚vejita;
    8. Vedic vijate, vij; not as simple verb in P.
    Saṁvijjati2
    1. to be found, to exist, to be DN i.3 Vin ii.122 Ja i.214 (˚amāna) Pv-a 153
    passive of saṁvindati
    Saṁvidati
    1. to know; absolutive ˚viditvā Ja iii.114 Ja v.172
    2. past participle saṁvidita
    3. saṁ + vidati ‣See vindati
    Saṁvidahati
    1. to arrange, appoint, fix, settle, provide, prepare DN i.61 (Pot. ˚eyyāma); aorist ˚vidahi Pv-a 198 infinitive ˚vidhātuṁ AN ii.35 & ˚vidahituṁ Vin i.287
    2. absolutive ˚vidhāya Vin iv.62f. 133; Mhvs 17, 37,; ˚vidahitvā Vin i.287 Vin iii.53 64 Ja i.59 Ja v.46 also as
    3. causative formn˚vidahetvāna Ja vi.301
    4. past participle saṁvidahita & saṁvihita;
    5. saṁ + vidahati
    Saṁvidahana
    neuter
    1. arrangement, appointment, provision Ja ii.209 DN-a i.148 Dhs-a 111 The word is peculiar to the Commentary style
    for the usual ˚vidhāna
    Saṁvidahita
    1. arranged Vin iv.64 Dhp-a i.397
    past participle of saṁvidahati
    Saṁvidita
    1. known Snp 935
    past participle of saṁvidati
    Saṁvidhātar
    1. one who arranges or provides (cp. vidhātar) DN iii.148
    agent noun from saṁvidahati
    Saṁvidhāna
    neuter
    1. arranging, providing, arrangement DN i.135 Ja i.140 (rakkhā˚)
    from saṁvidahati
    Saṁvidhāyaka
    adjective
    1. providing, managing; feminine ˚ikā Ja i.155
    2. saṁ + vidhāyaka
    Saṁvidhāvahāra
    1. taking by arrangement, i.e. theft committed in agreement with others Vin iii.53
    saṁvidhā (short absolutive form) + avahāra
    Saṁvindati
    1. to find; ppr. (a)saṁvindaṁ Thag 1, 717 passive saṁvijjati (q.v.)
    2. saṁ + vindati
    Saṁvibhajati
    1. to divide, to share, to communicate DN ii.233 Mil 94 Mil 344 infinitive ˚vibhajituṁ Mil 295 Dāvs v.54. past participle saṁvibhatta.
    2. causative ˚vibhājeti Iti 65
    3. saṁ + vibhajati
    Saṁvibhatta
    1. divided, shared Thag 1, 9
    past participle of saṁvibhajati
    Saṁvibhāga
    1. distribution, sharing out DN iii.191 AN i.92 AN i.150 Iti 18f. 98, 102 Vv 375 Mil 94
    • dāna˚ (of gifts) Ja v.331 Vism 306
    saṁ + vibhāga
    Saṁvibhāgin
    adjective
    1. generous, open-handed SN i.43 = J iv.110; v.397 (a˚) Mil 207
    from saṁvibhāga
    Saṁvirūḷha
    adjective
    1. fully grown, healed up Ja ii.117
    past participle of saṁvirūhati
    Saṁvirūhati
    1. to germinate, to sprout Mil 99 Mil 125 Mil 130 Mil 375 past participle saṁvirūḷha.
    2. causative ˚virūheti to cause to grow, to nourish Ja iv.429
    3. saṁ + virūhati
    Saṁvilāpa
    1. noisy talk; figuratively for thundering SN iv.289 (abbha˚)
    saṁ + vilāpa
    Saṁvisati
    1. to enter; causative saṁveseti (q.v.) cp
    2. ˚bhisaṁvisati
    3. saṁ + visati
    Saṁvissajjetar
    1. one who appoints or assigns DN-a i.112
    saṁ + vissajjetar
    Saṁvissandati
    1. to overflow MN ii.117 Mil 36
    saṁ + vissandati
    Saṁvihita
    1. arranged, prepared, provided Ja i.133 (˚ārakkha i.e. protected); in compound su˚; well arranged or appointed, fully provided DN ii.75 MN ii.75 DN-a i.147 182; ; unappointed Vin i.175 Vism 37
    past participle of saṁvidahati
    Saṁvījita
    1. fanned Dāvs v.18
    saṁ + vījita
    Saṁvuta
    1. closed DN i.81
    2. tied up Ja iv.361
    3. restrained, governed, (self-)controlled guarded DN i.250 DN iii.48 DN iii.97 SN ii.231 SN iv.351f. AN i.7 (cittaṁ); ii.25; iii.387 Iti 96 118 Snp 340 (indriyesu) Dhp 340 DN-a i.181

      • asaṁvuta unrestrained SN iv.70 AN iii.387 Pug 20 24; in phrase asaṁvuṭā lokantarikā andhakārā (the world-spaces which are dark &) ungoverned orderless, not supported, baseless DN ii.12 -su˚ well controlled Vin ii.213 Vin iv.186 SN iv.70 Snp 413 Dhp 8

        1. ˚atta self-controlled SN i.66
        • ˚indriya having the senses under control Iti 91 Pug 35
        • ˚kārin MN ii.260
        past participle of saṁvarati
    Saṁvūḷha
    1. ‣See saṁyūḷha
    Saṁvega
    1. agitation, fear, anxiety; thrill, religious emotion (caused by contemplation of the miseries of this world) DN iii.214 AN i.43 AN ii.33 AN ii.114 SN i.197 SN iii.85 SN v.130 SN v.133 Iti 30 Snp 935 Ja i.138 Nd1 406; Vism 135 = KhA 235 (eight objects inducing emotion: birth, old age, illness, death, misery in the apāyas, and the misery caused by saṁsāra in past, present & future stages); Mhvs 1, 4; 23, 62 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 32 Pv-a 39 76
    2. from saṁ + vij
    Saṁvejana
    adjective
    1. agitating, moving Iti 30
    from saṁ + vij
    Saṁvejaniya
    adjective
    1. apt to cause emotion AN ii.120 Vism 238 ‣See also saṁvijjati1
    from saṁvejana
    Saṁvejita
    1. stirred, moved, agitated SN i.197 Nd1 406
    past participle of saṁvejeti
    Saṁvejeti
    causative of saṁvijjati1 (q.v.)
    Saṁveṭheti
    1. to wrap, stuff, tuck in Vin iv.40
    saṁ + veṭheti
    Saṁvedhita
    1. shaken up, confused, trembling Snp 902
    saṁ + vyathita ‣See vyadhati
    Saṁvelli
    feminine
    1. “that which is wound round,” a loin cloth Ja v.306 As saṁvelliya at Vin ii.137 271
    saṁ + velli, cp. vellita
    Saṁvelleti
    1. to gather up, bundle together, fold up Vism 327
    from saṁ + vell
    Saṁvesanā
    feminine
    1. lying down, being in bed, sleeping Ja vi.551f. 557
    from saṁveseti
    Saṁveseti
    1. to lead, conduct AN i.141 passive saṁvesiyati to be put to bed (applied to a sick person) MN i.88 = iii.181 DN ii.24 cp. abhi˚;
    2. causative of saṁvisati
    Saṁvossajjati
    1. ‣See samavossajjati
    Saṁvohāra
    1. business, traffic Vin iii.239 AN ii.187 = SN i.78 AN iii.77 Snp-a 471
    saṁ + vohāra
    Saṁvohārati
    1. to trade (with); ppr. ˚vohāramāna [cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁvyavahāramāna Divy 259 AN ii.188
    denominative from saṁvohāra
    Saṁsagga
    1. contact, connection, association Vin iii.120 AN iii.293f. (˚ārāmatā); iv.87 sq., 331 Iti 70 Ja i.376 Ja iv.57 Mil 386 Nd2 137 Vb-a 340 (an-anulomika˚) Pv-a 5 (pāpamitta˚)
    • Two kinds of contact at Nd2 659: by sight (dassana˚) and by hearing (savaṇa˚)
    • pada˚ contact of two words, “sandhi Nd1 139 Nd2 137 (for iti) Snp-a 28
    • SN ii.202 Mil 344
    • ˚˚jāta one who has come into contact Snp 36
    from saṁ + sṛj
    Saṁsaṭṭha
    1. mixed with instrumental, associating with, joined MN i.480 (opposite vi˚) AN iii.109 AN iii.116 258 sq., 393 Pv-a 47
    2. living in society Vin i.200 ii.4; iv.239, 294 DN ii.214 Kvu 337 = Dhs-a 42 Dhs 1193 Ja ii.105 Dhs-a 49 72
    3. not given to society MN i.214 SN i.63 Mil 244 Vism 73
    past participle of saṁ + sṛj
    Saṁsati
    1. to proclaim, point out Ja v.77 Ja vi.533 Pot. saṁse Ja vi.181 aorist asaṁsi Ja iii.420 Ja iv.395 Ja v.66 & asāsī (Sanskrit aśaṁsīt) Ja iii.484 cp. abhi˚
    2. Vedic śaṁsati, cp. Avestan saṁhaiti to proclaim, Latin censeo = censure; Old Bulgarian om to say
    Saṁsatta
    1. adhering, clinging DN i.239 (paramparā˚)
    past participle of saṁ + sañj
    Saṁsad
    feminine
    1. session, assembly; locative saṁsati Ja iii.493 (= parisamajjhe Commentary ), 495 from saṁ + sad
    Saṁsaddati
    1. to sound, in definition of root kitt at Dhtp 579; Dhtm 812
    saṁ + śabd
    Saṁsandati
    1. to run together, to associate DN i.248 DN ii.223 SN ii.158 = It 70 SN iv.379 Pug 32 causative saṁsandeti to put together; unite, combine Ja i.403 Ja v.216 Mil 131 Dhp-a ii.12 Dhp-a iv.51
    2. saṁ + syand, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁsyandati Avs ii.142 sq., 188
    Saṁsandanā
    feminine
    1. (literally) coming together Ja vi.414 (variant reading for Text saṁsandita)
    2. (figuratively) import application, reference, conclusion (literally “flowing together”) Tika-Paṭṭhāna 264. opamma˚; application of a simile “tertium comparationis” Vism 326 DN-a i.127
    3. diṭṭha˚ (pucchā) a question with reference to observation Nd2 s.v. pucchā Dhs-a 55
    from saṁsandati
    Saṁsanna
    1. depressed, exhausted Dhp 280 (= osanna Dhp-a iii.410 ‣See ossanna
    past participle of saṁsīdati or saṁsandati
    Saṁsappa
    adjective
    1. creeping. AN v.289
    from saṁ + sṛp
    Saṁsappati
    1. to creep along, to crawl, move. AN v.289 Vv-a 278 Dhp-a iv.49
    saṁ + sappati
    Saṁsappaniyapariyāya
    1. , the creeping exposition, a discussion of the consequences of certain kinds of kamma. AN v.288f.
    Saṁsappin
    adjective = saṁsappa AN iv.172
    Saṁsaya
    1. doubt AN ii.24 Nd2 660 (= vicikicchā etc.) Mil 94 Dhs 425
    cp. Vedic saṁśaya
    Saṁsayita
    neuter
    1. doubt Dāvs i.50
    past participle of saṁsayati = saṁ + seti of śi; in meaning = saṁsaya
    Saṁsarati
    1. to move about continuously, to come again and again Ja i.335
    • to go through one life after the other, to transmigrate DN i.14 DN-a i.105 ppr. saṁsaranto (& saṁsaraṁ); SN iii.149 SN iv.439 Iti 109 Pv-a 166
    • medium saṁsaramāna Vv 197
    • absolutive ˚saritvā SN iii.212 Pug 16
    • past participle saṁsarita & saṁsita;
    • saṁ + sarati, of sṛ
    Saṁsaraṇa
    neuter
    1. moving about, running; ˚lohita blood in circulation (opposite sannicita˚;) Vism 261 Kp-a 62 Vb-a 245
    2. a movable curtain, a blind that can be drawn aside Vin ii.153
    from saṁ + sṛ
    Saṁsarita
    1. transmigrated DN ii.90 AN ii.1 Thag 2, 496MN i.82
    past participle of saṁsarati
    Saṁsava
    1. flowing Vv-a 227
    from saṁ + sru
    Saṁsavaka
    1. name of a purgatory Vv 5212 cp. Vv-a 226f.
    from saṁsava
    Saṁsā̆veti
    1. to cause to flow together, to pour into (locative ), to put in Ja v.268 (= pakkhipati Commentary )
    2. from saṁ + sru
    Saṁsādiyā
    feminine
    1. a kind of inferior rice Ja vi.530
    cp. * Sanskrit syavaṁ-sātikā, on which ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen ii.62, s.v.
    Saṁsādeti
    causative of saṁsīdati (q.v.)
    Saṁsāmeti
    1. literally “to smoothe,” to fold up (one’s sleeping mat), to leave (one’s bed), in phrase senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā Vin ii.185 Vin iv.24 MN i.457 SN iii.95 SN iii.133 SN iv.288
    causative of saṁ + śam
    Saṁsāyati
    1. to taste, enjoy Ja iii.201 (aorist samasāyisuṁ: so read for samāsāsisuṁ)
    2. saṁ + sāyati, which stands for sādati (of svad to sweeten). On y → d cp. khāyita → khādita & sankhāyita
    Saṁsāra
    1. transmigration, literally faring on DN i.54 DN ii.206 (here = existence) MN i.81 (saṁsārena suddhi) SN ii.178f. AN i.10 AN ii.12 = 52 Snp 517 Dhp 60 Ja i.115 Pv ii.1311; Vism 544 (in detail), 578, 603 (˚assa kāraka) Pv-a 63 Pv-a 243. For description of saṁsāra (its endlessness & inevitableness) ‣See e.g. SN ii.178 SN ii.184 sq., 263; iii.149 sq. Vb-a 134 (anta-virahita); anamatagga (to which add refs. Vb-a 45 182, 259 260)
    2. moving on, circulation: vacī˚; exchange of words AN i.79
    3. -cakka cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁsāra-cakra

      1. the wheel of tr. Vism 198, 201 Vv-a 105 = Pv-a 7
      • ˚dukkha the ill of tr Vism 531 Vb-a 145 149
      • ˚bhaya fear of tr. Vb-a 199
      • ˚sāgara the ocean of tr. Ja iii.241
      from saṁsarati
    Saṁsijjhati
    1. to be fulfilled Sdhp 451
    saṁ + sidh
    Saṁsita1
    1. = saṁsarita Ja v.56 (cira-ratta˚ = carita anuciṇṇa Commentary )
    Saṁsita2
    1. dependent Sdhp 306
    past participle of saṁ + śri
    Saṁsiddhi
    feminine
    1. success Dhtp 420
    saṁ + siddhi
    Saṁsibbita
    1. entwined Vism 1 Mil 102 Mil 148 Dhp-a iii.198
    past participle of saṁ + sibbati
    Saṁsīda
    1. sinking (down) SN iv.180 (variant reading saṁsāda)
    from saṁsīdati
    Saṁsīdati
    1. to sink down, to lose heart DN i.248 AN iii.89 = Pug 65 Thag 1, 681 Ja ii.330
    2. to be at an end (said of a path, magga) Vin iii.131 SN i.1
    3. Caus saṁsādeti : 1. to get tired, give out MN i.214 AN i.288 2. to drop, fail in AN iv.398 (pañhaṁ, i.e. not answer)
    4. to place DN-a i.49

      saṁ + sad
    Saṁsīdana
    neuter
    1. = saṁsīda Thag 1, 572 (ogha˚)
    from saṁsīdati
    Saṁsīna
    1. fallen off, destroyed Snp 44 (˚patta without leaves = patita-patta Commentary )
    saṁ + sīna, past participle of śṛ; to crush, Sanskrit śīrṇa
    Saṁsuddha
    adjective
    1. pure DN i.113 Snp 372 Snp 1107 Nd1 289 Nd2 661 Ja i.2
    1. ˚gahaṇika of pure descent DN i.113 DN-a i.281
    saṁ + suddha
    Saṁsuddhi
    feminine [saṁ + suddhi) purification Snp 788 Nd1 84.
    Saṁsumbhati
    1. to beat Ja vi.53 Ja vi.88 (˚amāna)
    saṁ + sumbhati
    Saṁsūcaka
    adjective
    1. indicating Vv-a 244 302
    from saṁsūceti
    Saṁsūceti
    1. to indicate, show, betray Dāvs v.50 DN-a i.311
    saṁ + sūcay˚, denominative from sūci
    Saṁseda
    1. sweat, moisture MN i.73 Thag-a 185

    -ja cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁsvedaja Divy 627

    1. born or arisen from moisture DN iii.230 Mil 128 Kp-a 247 Vb-a 161
    saṁ + seda
    Saṁseva
    adjective
    1. associating AN ii.245 AN v.113f. (sappurisa˚ & asappurisa˚) Mil 93
    from saṁ + sev
    Saṁsevanā
    feminine
    1. associating Dhs 1326 = Pug 20
    from saṁsevati
    Saṁsevā
    feminine
    1. worshipping, attending Mil 93 (sneha˚)
    from saṁseva
    Saṁsevita
    1. frequented, inhabited Ja vi.539
    saṁ + sevita
    Saṁsevin
    adjective = saṁseva Ja i.488
    Saṁhata1
    1. firm, compact Mil 416 Sdhp 388
    past participle of saṁ + han
    Saṁhata2
    1. DN-a i.280 ‣See vi˚;. Samhanati & samhanti;
    past participle of saṁ + hṛ
    Saṁhanati
    saṁhanti;
    1. to join together, reach to Ja v.372
    2. to suppress, allay, destroy AN iv.437 (kaṇḍuṁ).
    3. past participle saṁhata
    saṁ + han
    Saṁhanana
    neuter
    1. joining together, closing DN i.11 Ja vi.65
    from saṁhanati
    Saṁhara
    1. collecting; dus˚; hard to collect Vin iii.148 Ja iv.36 (here as dussanghara, on which ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen i.121)
    from saṁ + hṛ
    Saṁharaṇa
    neuter
    1. collecting, gathering Dāvs v.33. cp. upa˚; & sangharaṇa
    from saṁharati
    Saṁharati
    1. to collect, fold up Vin i.46 Vin ii.117 150 MN iii.169 Ja i.66 Ja i.422 Dāvs iv.12 Pv-a 73–⁠2. to draw together Vin ii.217
    2. to gather up take up Snp-a 369 (rūpaṁ)
    3. to heap up Pv iv.14 (saṁharimha = sañcinimha Pv-a 279)

      • asaṁhāriya (
      • gerundive which cannot be destroyed (‣ See also saṁhīra SN v.219
      • causative II. ˚harāpeti to cause to collect, to make gather or grow Vin iv.259 (lomāni), 260 (identical)
      • passive saṁhīrati (q.v.)
      • past participle saṁhata. cp. upa˚;
      saṁ + harati
    Saṁhasati
    1. to laugh with MN ii.223
    san + hasati
    Saṁhāni
    feminine
    1. shrinking, decrease, dwindling away DN ii.305 = M i.49 = SN ii.2 = Dhs 644 Dhs-a 328 cp. parihāni
    saṁ + hāni
    Saṁhāra
    1. abridgment, compilation Pv-a 114 cp. upa˚
    from saṁ + hṛ
    Saṁhāraka
    1. drawing together, a collector SN ii.185 = It 17. sabba˚; a kind of mixed perfume Ja vi.336
    saṁ + hāra + ka
    Saṁhārima
    adjective
    1. movable Vism 124 Snp 28 Snp 321
    • Vin iv.272
    from saṁ + hṛ
    Saṁhita
    1. connected, equipped with, possessed of DN i.5 MN ii.202 SN i.103 Dhp 101 (gāthā anattha-pada˚). Often as attha˚; endowed with profit bringing advantage, profitable DN i.189 SN ii.223 SN iv.330; v.417 AN iii.196f.; v.81 Snp 722 cp. upa˚;
    past participle of sandahati
    Saṁhīyati
    1. ‣See sandhīyati
    Saṁhīra
    (& saṁhāriya)
    1. that which can be restrained, conquerable Thag 1, 1248 Ja v.81
    • immovable unconquerable SN i.193 Vin ii.96 AN iv.141f. Thag 1, 649 Snp 1149 Ja iv.283 ‣See also asaṁhāriya
    gerundive of saṁharati
    Saṁhīrati
    1. to be drawn away or caught in (locative ) MN iii.188f. (paccuppannesu dhammesu) Dhs-a 420 (identical) Ja iii.333
    2. passive of saṁharati
    Saka
    adjective
    1. own DN i.106 DN i.119 DN i.231 DN ii.173 (sakaṁ te “all be your own,” as greeting to the king) MN i.79 Vin i.3 249 (ācariyaka) SN v.261 (identical) Snp 861 Iti 76 Nd1 252 Pv i.51 (ghara); ii.61 (bhātā)
    • O
    • past participle assaka2-appassaka having little or nothing as one’s own (= daḷidda) AN i.261 AN ii.203
    • kamma-ssaka possessing one’s own kamma MN iii.203f. AN v.288 Mil 65 Dhs 1366
    1. ˚gavacaṇḍa violent towards one’s own cows, harassing one’s own Pug 47
    sa4 + ka
    Sakaṭa1
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. a cart, waggon; a cartload DN ii.110 Vin iii.114 Ja i.191 Mil 238 Pv-a 102 Vb-a 435 (simile of two carts) Snp-a 58 (udaka-bharita˚), 137 (bīja˚). sakaṭāni pajāpeti to cause the carts to go on Ja ii.296
      1. ˚gopaka the guardian of the waggon Dhp-a iv.60
      • ˚bhāra a cart-load Vv-a 79
      • ˚mukha the front or opening of the waggon, used as adjective “facing the waggon or the cart” (?) at DN ii.234 of the earth-that is, India as then known-and at DN ii.235 (compare Mahāvastu iii.208), of six kingdoms in Northern India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage. Could sakaṭa there be used of the constellation Rohinī, which in mediaeval times was called the Cart? cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.269
      • ˚vāha a cart-load Pv ii.75-vyūha “the waggon array,” a wedge-shaped phalanx Ja ii.404 Ja iv.343 Vism 384
      cp. Sanskrit śakaṭa; Vedic śakaṭī
    Sakaṭa2
    1. ‣See kasaṭa
    Sakaṇika
    adjective
    1. having a mole DN i.80 DN-a i.223
    sa + kaṇa + ika
    Sakaṇṭaka
    adjective
    1. thorny, dangerous DN i.135 Thag 2, 352 DN-a i.296
    sa + kaṇṭaka
    Sakaṇṇajappaka
    1. whispering in the ear, a method of (secretly) taking votes Vin ii.98 sq (salāka-gāha)
    sa + kaṇṇa + jappa + ka
    Sakatā
    feminine (—˚)
    1. one’s own nature, identity, peculiarity ‣See kamma-ssakatā; & adjective; ˚ssakata. It may also be considered as an abstract formation from kamma-ssaka
    abstract from saka
    Sakadāgāmin
    1. “returning once,” one who will not be reborn on earth more than once; one who has attained the second grade of saving wisdom Vin i.293 DN i.156 DN i.229 DN iii.107 MN i.34 SN iii.168 AN i.120 AN i.232f.; ii.89, 134; iii.348; iv.292 sq., 380 v.138 sq., 372 sq. Dhp-a iv.66
    sakad = sakid, + āgāmin
    Sakadāgāmitā
    feminine
    1. the state of a “oncereturner” DN ii.206
    abstract from last
    Sakabala
    adjective
    1. containing a mouthful Vin iv.195
    sa + kabala
    Sakamana
    1. is Buddhaghosa’s explanation of attamana (q.v.), e.g. DN-a i.129 255
    saka + mana
    Sakamma
    neuter
    1. one’s own occupation DN i.135
    sa4 + kamma
    Sakaraṇīya
    adjective
    1. one who still has something to do (in order to attain perfection) DN ii.143 Thag 1, 1045 Mil 138 Sakaruna-bhava
    sa3 + karaṇīya
    Sakaruṇa-bhāva
    1. being full of compassion Snp-a 318
    sa3 + karuṇa + bhāva
    Sakala
    adjective
    1. all, whole, entire Vin ii.109 Vism 321 Snp-a 132 Pv-a 93 Pv-a 97 Pv-a 111. cp. sākalya
    cp. Sanskrit sakala
    Sakalikā
    feminine
    1. a potsherd; a splinter, bit DN ii.341 AN ii.199 = SN iv.197 SN i.27 Mil 179 MN i.259 AN v.9 (˚aggi) Ja iv.430 Mil 134 Kp-a 43 (maccha˚); Nett 23 Dhs-a 319
    • sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ in little pieces Vin ii.112
    • sakalika-hīra a skewer Ja iv.29 Ja iv.30
    from sakala = Sanskrit śakala potsherd
    Sakasaṭa
    adjective
    1. faulty, wrong (literally bitter) Mil 119 (vacana)
    sa3 + k.
    Sakāsa
    1. presence; accusative sakāsaṁ towards, to Snp 326 Ja v.480 Pv-a 237
    2. locative sakāse in the presence of, before Ja iii.24 Ja iv.281 Ja v.394 Ja vi.282
    3. sa3 + k. = Sanskrit kāśa
    Sakicca
    neuter
    1. one’s own duty or business Vism 321 (˚pasuta)
    sa4 + kicca
    Sakiccaya
    neuter
    1. = sakicca Mil 42 Dhs-a 196 (˚pasuta)
    sa4 + kiccaya = kṛtya
    Sakiñcana
    adjective
    1. having something; (applied) with attachment, full of worldly attachment Snp 620 Dhp i.246 Dhp 396 (= rāg'ādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcana Dhp-a iv.158). Sakid & Sakim
    sa3 + kiñcana
    Sakid
    Sakiṁ
    adverb

    once. (1) sakiṁ : DN ii.188 Ja i.397 Dhp-a iii.116 (sakiṁvijātā itthi primipara); once more: Mil 238 once for all: Thag 2 466 Dhp-a ii.44 Thag-a 284

  • sakid (in composition ‣See also sakad -āgāmin): in sakid eva once only AN ii.238 iv.380 Pug 16 Pv-a 243 at once Vin i.31

    from sa˚ = saṁ
  • Sakiya
    adjective
    1. own Ja ii.177 iii.48, 49; iv.177
    from saka, cp. Sanskrit svakīya
    Sakuṇa
    1. a bird (especially with reference to augury) DN i.71 (pakkhin +) Vin iii.147 SN i.197 AN ii.209 iii.241 sq., 368 Ja ii.111 Ja ii.162 (Kandagala); Kp-a 241 pantha˚ ‣See under pantha. feminine sakuṇī SN i.44 adj sakuṇa Ja v.503 (maṁsa).

      1. ˚kulāvaka a bird’s nest Kp-a 56
      2. ˚patha bird-course N plural Nd1 155
      3. ˚pāda bird foot Kp-a 47
      4. ˚ruta the cry of birds Mil 178
      5. ˚vatta the habit (i.e. life) of a bird Ja v.254
      6. ˚vijjā bird craft, augury (i.e. understanding the cries of birds) DN i.9 DN-a i.93 Sakunaka = sakuna Vedic śakuna
    Sakuṇaka = sakuṇa
    1. Snp-a 27 feminine sakuṇikā DN i.91 Mil 202 Ja i.171 Ja iv.290

    Sakuṇagghi
    feminine
    1. a kind of hawk (literally “bird-killer”) SN v.146 Ja ii.59 Mil 365 cp. vyagghīnasa
    sakuṇa + ˚ghi, feminine of ˚gha
    Sakuṇita
    1. at Pv-a 123 read saṅkucita
    Sakunta
    1. a bird; a kind of vulture Snp 241 Dhp 92 Dhp 174 Ja iv.225 Ja vi.272
    cp. Sanskrit śakunta
    Sakuntaka
    1. = sakunta Vin i.137
    Sakumāra
    adjective
    1. of the same age; a playmate Ja v.360 Ja v.366
    sa2 + kumāra
    Sakula
    1. a kind of fish Ja v.405
    cp. Epic Sanskrit śakula
    Sakka
    adjective
    1. able, possible Snp 143 sasakkaṁ (= sa3 + s.) as much as possible, as much as one is able to MN i.415 MN i.514 Sakkacca(m)
    from śak, cp. Sanskrit śakya
    Sakkacca(ṁ)
    adverb
    1. respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppaṭṭhahati to attend, serve with due honour
    • Vv 125 Mil 305 Ja iv.310 The form sakkaccaṁ is the older and more usual, e.g. at DN ii.356f. SN iv.314 AN ii.147 AN iv.392 Vin iv.190 275 Thag 1, 1054 Ja i.480 Dhp 392 Pv-a 26 Pv-a 121. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is satkṛtya, e.g. MVastu i.10 -kārin zealous SN iii.267 Mil 94
    • ˚dāna MN iii.24
    originally
  • absolutive of sakkaroti
  • Sakkata
    1. honoured, duly attendo DN i.114 DN i.116 DN ii.167 Nd 73 Ja i.334 Mil 21 Snp-a 43 Usually combined with garukata, pūjita, mānita
    past participle of sakkaroti
    Sakkati
    1. to go ‣See osakkati & cp; . Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 302. Other Pali compounds. are ussakkati paṭisakkati;
    ṣvaṣk; Dhtp 9: gamana
    Sakkatta
    neuter
    1. Śakraship, the position as the ruler of the devas MN iii.65 Ja i.315 Vism 301 (brahmatta +). ˚rajja a kingdom rivalling Sakka’s Ja i.315
    from Sakka = Indra
    Sakkaroti
    1. to honour, esteem, treat with respect, receive hospitably; often combined with garukaroti māneti, pūjeti, e.g. DN i.91 DN i.117 DN iii.84 MN i.126 ppr ˚karonto DN ii.159 Pot. ˚kareyya Iti 110 aorist ˚kari Pv-a 54
    2. absolutive ˚katvā Pug 35 Ja vi.14 & ˚kacca (q.v.)

      • pp sakkata.
      • causative sakkāreti = sakkaroti; Mhvs 32, 44
      • gerundive sakkāreyya Thag 1, 186 (so read for ˚kareyya)
      sat + kṛ
    Sakkā
    indeclinable
    1. possible (literally one might be able to); in the older language still used as a Pot., but later reduced to an adverb with infin. English g. sakkā sāmaaññphalaṁpaññāpetuṁ would one be able to point out a result of samaṇaship DN i.51 khādituṁ na sakkā, one could not eat Ja ii.16 na sakkā maggo akkhātuṁ, the way cannot be shown, Mil 269; sakkā etaṁ mayā ñātuṁ? can I ascertain this? DN i.187 sakkā honti imāni aṭṭha sukhāni vindituṁ, these eight advantages are able to be enjoyed Ja i.8 sakkā etaṁ abhavissa kātuṁ, this would be possible to do, DN i.168 imaṁ sakkā gaṇhituṁ, this one we can take Ja iv.219 ‣See also Snp-a 338 376 (= labbhā) Pv-a 12 Pv-a 69 Pv-a 96
    2. originally Pot. of sakkoti = Vedic śakyāt; cp. Prakrit sakkā with Pischel’s explanation in Prakrit Grammar § 465. A corresponding formation, similar in meaning, is labbhā (q.v.)
    Sakkāya
    the body in being, the existing body or group (= -nikāya q.v.); as a technical term in Pali psychology almost equal to individuality; identified with the five khandhas MN i.299 SN iii.159 SN iv.259 AN ii.34 Thag 2 170, 239 Dhs-a 348 ‣See also DN iii.216 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.2161) AN iii.293 AN iii.401 Nd1 109.
    1. ˚diṭṭhi theory of soul, heresy of individuality, speculation as to the eternity or otherwise of one’s own individuality MN i.300 = iii.17 = DhS 1003, SN iii.16 sq In these passages this is explained as the belief that in one or other of the khandhas there is a permanent entity an attā. The same explanation, at greater length, in the Diṭṭhigata Sutta (Ps i.143–⁠151). As delusions about the soul or ghost can arise out of four sorts of bias ‣See abhinivesa concerning each of the five khandhas we have twenty kinds of s˚ diṭṭhi: fifteen of these are kinds of sakkāya-vatthukā sassata-diṭṭhi, and five are kinds of s˚-vatthukā uccheda-diṭṭhi (ibid. 149, 150) Gods as well as men are s˚ pariyāpannā SN iii.85 and so is the eye, Dhs-a 308 When the word diṭṭhi is not expressed it is often implied, Thag 2, 199 339 Snp 231 S˚ diṭṭhi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path ‣See saṁyojana; it is identical with the fourth kind of Grasping ‣See upādāna; it is opposed to Nibbāna, SN iv.175 is extinguished by the Path, MN i.299 SN iii.159 SN iv.260 and is to be put away by insight Dhs-a 346
    • See further: DN iii.234 AN iii.438 AN iv.144f.; Kvu 81 Snp 950 Dhs 1003 and on term Dhs translation § 1003; Kindred Sayings iii.80, n. 3
    • ˚nirodha the destruction of the existing body or of individuality AN ii.165f. iii.246 DN iii.216
    • ˚samudaya the rise of individuality DN iii.216 Nd1 109
    sat + kāya, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit satkāya Divy 46; Avs i.85 ‣See on explanation of term Mrs. Rhys Davids in J.R.A.S. 1894, 324; Franke Dīgha translation p. 45; Geiger Pali Grammar § 241; Kern. Toevoegselen ii.52
    Sakkāra
    1. hospitality, honour, worship Vin i.27 183 AN ii.203 Ja i.63 Ja ii.9 Ja ii.104 Dhp 75 Mil 386 Dhs 1121 Vism 270 Snp-a 284 Vb-a 466
    • ˚ṁ karoti to pay reverence, to say goodbye Dhp-a i.398 cp. lābha
    from sat + kṛ
    Sakkāreti
    1. is causative of sakkaroti (q.v.)

    Sakkuṇeyyatta
    neuter
    1. possibility; ; impossibility Pv-a 48
    abstract from sakkuṇeyya, gerundive of sakkoti
    Sakkoti
    1. to be able. Pres. sakkoti DN i.246 Vin i.31 Mil 4 Dhp-a i.200
    • sakkati = Classical Sanskrit śakyate
      1. Nett 23 Pot. sakkuṇeyya Ja i.361 Pv-a 106 archaic 1st pl sakkuṇemu Ja v.24 Pv ii.81. ppr. sakkonto Mil 27- future sakkhati Snp 319
      2. sakkhīti [= Sanskrit śakṣyati MN i.393
      3. plural 3rdsakkhinti Snp 28 Snp 2nd singular sagghasi Snp 834 3rd singular sakkhissati Dhp-a iv.87
      4. aorist asakkhi DN i.96 DN i.236 Pv-a 38
      5. sakkhi Mil 5 Ja v.116 1st pl asakkhimha Pv-a 262 & asakkhimhā Vin iii.23 3rd sg also sakkuṇi Mhvs 7, 13.
      6. gerundive sakkuṇeyya (negative ; (im)possible Ja i.55 Pv-a 122

        • sakka & sakkā ‣See sep
        śak; definition Dhtp 508 etc. as “sattiyaṁ” ‣See satti
    Sakkharā
    feminine
    1. gravel, grit Vin iii.147 = J ii.284 Ja i.192 AN i.253 DN i.84 Pv iii.228 Dhp-a iv.87
    2. potsherd Vv-a 157 Pv-a 282 Pv-a 285
    3. grain, granule, crystal, in loṇa˚; a salt crystal SN ii.276 Dhp-a i.370 Snp-a 222

      • (granulated) sugar Ja i.50
    cp. Vedic śarkarā gravel
    Sakkharikā
    feminine
    1. in loṇa˚; a piece of salt crystal Vin i.206 Vin ii.237
    from sakkharā
    Sakkharilla
    adjective
    1. containing gravel, pebbly, stony AN iv.237
    = sakkharika, from sakkharā
    Sakkhali
    1. (& ˚ikā feminine

      1. the orifice of the ear ‣See kaṇṇa˚;
      2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp sanguḷikā) AN iii.76 (Text sakkhalakā; variant reading ˚likā & sankulikā) Vin iii.59 Ja ii.281
      cp. Sanskrit śaṣkulī
    Sakkhi1
    1. an eyewitness DN ii.237 (nominative singular sakkhī = with his own eyes, as an eyewitness) Snp 479 Snp 921 Snp 934 (sakkhi dhammaṁ adassi where the corresponding Sanskrit form would be sākṣād) Ja i.74-kāya-sakkhī a bodily witness, i.e. one who has bodily experienced the 8 vimokkhas AN iv.451 Vism 93, 387 659

      • sakkhiṁ karoti Sanskrit sākṣī karoti
      1. to ‣See with one’s own eyes SN ii.255 (2) to call upon as a witness (with genitive of person) Ja vi.280 (rājāno) Dhp-a ii.69 (Moggallānassa sakkhiṁ katvā) Pv-a 217 (but at 241 as “friendship”). Note. The Pali form is rather to be taken as an
      2. adverb (“as present”) than adjective: sakkhiṁ sakkhi; , with reduced sakkhi˚; (cp. sakid & sakiṁ) ‣See also; sacchi˚;.

        1. ˚diṭṭha seen face to face MN i.369 DN i.238 Ja vi.233
        • ˚puṭṭha asked as a witness Snp 84 Snp 122 Pug 29
        • ˚bhabbatā the state of becoming an eyewitness, of experiencing MN i.494 Dhs-a 141
        • ˚sāvaka a contemporaneous or personal disciple DN ii.153
        sa3 + akkhin; cp. Sanskrit sākṣin
    Sakkhī
    feminine or sakkhi2
    • neuter

      1. friendship (with somebody = instrumental) SN i.123 = AN v.46 (janena karoti sakkhiṁ make friends with people); Pv iv.157; iv.165 Ja iii.493 Ja iv.478 cp. sakhya
      cp. Sanskrit sākhya
    Sakya
    1. ‣See Dictionary of Names. In compound ˚puttiya (belonging to the Sakya son) in general meaning of “a (true) follower of the Buddha,” AN iv.202 Vin i.44 Ud 44
    • not a follower of the B. Vin iii.25

    Sakhi
    1. a companion, friend; nominative sakhā Ja ii.29 348; accusative sakhāraṁ Ja ii.348 Ja v.509 ; sakhaṁ Ja ii.299 instrumental sakhinā Ja iv.41 ablative sakhārasmā Ja iii.534 genitive sakhino Ja vi.478 voc. sakhā Ja iii.295 nominative
    2. plural sakhā Ja iii.323 & sakhāro Ja iii.492 genitive sakhīnaṁ Ja iii.492 Ja iv.42 & sakhānaṁ Ja ii.228 In compound with bhū as sakhi˚ & sakhī˚; , e.g. sakhibhāva friendship Ja vi.424 Pv-a 241 & sakhībhāva Ja iii.493
    3. Vedic sakhi masculine &
    4. feminine
    Sakhikā
    feminine
    1. a female friend Ja iii.533
    from sakhi
    Sakhitā
    feminine
    1. friendship Thag 1, 1018 1019
    abstract from sakhi
    Sakhila
    adjective
    1. kindly in speech, congenial DN i.116 Vin ii.11 Ja i.202 Ja i.376 Mil 207 Pv iv.133 (= mudu Pv-a 230). cp. sākhalya
    1. ˚vācatā use of friendly speech Dhs 1343
    from sakhi
    Sakhī
    feminine
    1. a female friend Ja ii.27 Ja ii.348
    to sakhi
    Sakhura
    adjective
    1. with the hoofs Ja i.9 Buddhaghosa on M. i.78 ‣See M i.536
    sa3 + khura
    Sakhya
    neuter
    1. friendship Ja ii.409 Ja vi.353f.
    Sanskrit sākhya; cp. sakkhī
    Sagandhaka
    adjective
    1. fragment Dhp 52
    sa3 + gandha + ka
    Sagabbha
    adjective
    1. with a foetus, pregnant Mhvs 33, 46
    sa3 + gabbha
    Sagaha
    adjective
    1. full of crocodiles Iti 57 114. As sagāha at SN iv.157
    sa3 + gaha2
    Sagāmeyya
    adjective [
    • gerundive formation from gāma, + sa2 = saṁ˚) hailing from the same village SN i.36 SN i.60

    Sagārava
    adjective
    1. respectful, usually combined with sappatissa & other synonym, e.g. Vin i.45 Iti 10 Vism 19, 221
    sa3 + gārava
    Sagāravatā
    feminine
    1. respect Thag 1, 589
    from sagārava
    Saguṇa
    adjective
    1. either “with the string,” or “in one” Vin i.46 (saguṇaṁ karoti to put together, to fold up; C ekato katvā). This interpretation (as “put together”) is much to be preferred to the one given under guṇa1 1; saguṇaṁ katvā belongs to saṅghāṭiyo, and not to kāyabandhanaṁ, thus: “the upper robes are to be given, putting them into one (bundle).”
    either sa3 + guṇa1 1, as given under guṇa1; or sa˚ = saṁ˚ once, as in sakṛt, + guṇa1 2
    Saguḷa
    1. a cake with sugar Ja vi.524 cp. saṅguḷikā
    sa3 + guḷa2
    Sagocara
    1. companion, mate (literally having the same activity) Ja ii.31
    sa2 = saṁ, + gocara
    Sagotta
    1. a kinsman Ja v.411 cp. vi.500
    sa2 = saṁ, + gotta
    Sagga
    1. heaven, the next world, popularly conceived as a place of happiness and long life (cp. the popular etymology of “suṭṭhu-aggattā sagga” Pv-a 9 “rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggo ti saggo” Vism 427) usually the kām'āvacara-devaloka, sometimes also the 26 heavens (Thag-a 74). Sometimes as sagga ṭhāna (cp ˚loka, e.g. Ja vi.210
    2. Vin i.223 DN ii.86 DN iii.52 DN iii.146f. MN i.22 MN i.483 SN i.12 AN i.55f. 292 sq.; ii.83 sq.; iii.244 253 sq.; iv.81; v.135 sq. Snp 224 (
    3. locative plural saggesu) Iti 14 Pv i.13 Vism 103, 199.

      1. ˚āpāya heaven and hell Thag 2, 63 Snp 647
      • ˚ārohaṇa (-sopāna) (the stairs) leading to heaven (something like Jacob’s ladder) Vism 10
      • ˚kathā discourse or talk about heaven Vin i.15 (cp. anupubbikathā) -kāya the heavenly assembly (of the gods) Ja vi.573
      • ˚dvāra heaven’s gate Vism 57
      • ˚patha = sagga Ja i.256
      • ˚pada heavenly region, heaven Ja ii.5 Ja iv.272 (= saggaloka)
      • ˚magga the way to heaven Ja vi.287 Dhp-a i.4
      • ˚loka the heavenworld MN i.73 Ja iv.272
      • ˚saṁvattanika leading to heaven DN iii.66
      Vedic svarga, svar + ga
    Sagguṇa
    1. good quality, virtue Sdhp 313
    sat + guṇa
    Saggh˚
    1. ‣See sakkoti
    Saghaccā
    feminine
    1. just or true killing Ja i.177
    sat + ghaccā
    Saṅkacchā
    feminine
    1. part of a woman’s dress, bodice, girdle (?) Ja v.96 (suvaṇṇa˚)
    saṁ + kacchā1
    Saṅkacchika
    neuter
    1. a part of clothing, belt, waist-cloth Vin ii.272 Vin iv.345 The Commentary explanation is incorrect
    from sankacchā
    Saṅkaṭīra
    neuter
    1. a dust heap DN ii.160 SN ii.270 MN i.334 explained as “sankāra-ṭṭhāna” Kindred Sayings ii.203
    unexplained
    Saṅkaḍḍhati
    1. to collect MN i.135 Ja i.254 Ja iv.224 Dhp i.49;
    2. passive ˚khaḍḍiyati Vism 251 (ppr ˚iyamāna being collected, comprising)
    3. to examine scrutinize Ja vi.351 (cintetvā ˚kaḍḍhituṁ)
    saṁ + kaḍḍhati
    Saṅkati
    1. to doubt, hesitate, to be uncertain about pres. (med.) 1st singular saṅke SN i.111 Ja iii.253 (= āsankāmi Commentary ); vi.312 (na sanke maraṇ'āgamāya); Pot. saṅketha Ja ii.53 = v.85. passive saṅkīyati SN iii. = Kvu 141 AN iv.246
    2. śaṅk, Vedic śankate, cp. Latin cunctor to hesitate; Gothic hāhan = Anglo-Saxon hangon “to hang”; Old Icelandic hāētta danger
    Saṅkathati
    1. to name, explain. passive saṅkathīyati Dhs-a 390
    2. saṁ + kathati
    Saṅkanta
    1. gone together with (—˚), gone over to, joined Vin i.60 Vin iv.217
    past participle of sankamati
    Saṅkantati
    1. to cut all round, MN iii.275
    saṁ + kantati
    Saṅkanti
    feminine
    1. transition, passage Kvu 569; Vism 374 sq
    from sankamati
    Saṅkantika
    1. a school of thought (literally gone over to a faction), a subdivision of the Sabbatthivādins SN v.14 Vism 374 sq.; Mhvs 5, 6; Dpvs 5, 48; Mhbv.97
    from sankanta
    Saṅkappa
    1. thought, intention, purpose, plan DN iii.215 SN ii.143f. AN i.281 ii.36 Dhp 74 Snp 154 Snp 1144 Nd1 616 (= vitakka ñāṇa paññā buddhi) Dhs 21 Dhp-a ii.78 As equivalent of vitakka also at DN iii.215 AN iv.385 Dhs 7
    • kāma˚ a lustful thought AN iii.259 AN v.31
    • paripuṇṇa˚ having one’s intentions fulfilled MN i.192 MN iii.276 DN iii.42 AN v.92 AN v.97f.; sara˚; memories & hopes MN i.453 SN iv.76 vyāpāda˚, vihiṁsa˚, malicious, cruel purposes, MN ii.27f.; sammā˚; right thoughts or intentions, one of the angas of the 8-fold Path (ariya-magga) Vin i.10 DN ii.312 AN iii.140 Vb-a 117 Sankappa is defined at Dhs-a 124 as (cetaso) abhiniropanā, i.e. application of the mind ‣See on term also Compendium 238
    saṁ + kḷp, cp. kappeti figuratively meaning
    Saṅkappeti
    1. to imagine; wish AN ii.36 MN i.402 Pug 19
    2. to determine, to think about, strive after Ja iii.449f.
    Den. from sankappa
    Saṅkamati
    1. to go on, to
    2. passive over to (
    3. accusative ), to join DN i.55 (ākāsaṁ indriyāni s.) Vin i.54 ii.138 (bhikkhū rukkhā rukkhaṁ s., climb from tree to tree); Kvu 565 sq. (jhānā jhānaṁ)
    4. to transmigrate Mil 71f. (+ paṭisandahati).
    5. gerundive saṅkamanīya to be passed on or transferred Vin i.190
    6. cīvara˚ a dress that should be handed over, which does not belong to one Vin iv.282
    7. past participle saṅkanta.
    8. causative saṅkāmeti (1) to
    9. passive over, to cause to go, to move, to shift Vin iii.49 58, 59
    10. to come in together (sensations to the heart) Dhs-a 264

      • cp. upa˚;
      saṁ + kamati
    Saṅkama
    1. a passage, bridge MN i.439 Vin iii.127 Ja iii.373 (attānaṁ ˚ṁ katvā yo sotthiṁ samatārayi) Mil 91 Mil 229
    from saṁ + kram
    Saṅkamana
    neuter
    1. literally “going over,” i e. step; hence “bridge,” passage, path SN i.110 Vv 5222 775; Pv ii.78; ii.925 Ja vi.120 (papā˚). cp. upa˚;
    from sankamati
    Saṅkampati
    1. to tremble, shake Vin i.12 DN ii.12 DN ii.108 Ja i.25 causative saṅkampeti identical DN ii.108
    2. saṁ + kampati
    Saṅkara1
    1. (fight, confusion) wrongly for saṅgara Nett 149, in quot. from MN iii.187
    Saṅkara2
    adjective
    1. blissful Mhbv.4 (sabba˚)
    cp. Sanskrit śankara
    Saṅkalana
    neuter
    1. addition DN-a i.95 M AN i.2
    from saṁ + kal to produce
    Saṅkalaha
    1. inciting words, quarrel Ja v.393
    saṁ + kalaha
    Saṅkasāyati
    1. to become weak, to fail SN i.202 SN ii.277; iv.178 AN i.68
    from saṁ + kṛṣ, kasati? Or has it anything to do with kasāya?
    Saṅkassara
    adjective
    1. doubtful; wicked Vin ii.236 (cp. Vinaya Texts iii.300) SN i.49 = Dh 312 (explained as “sankāhi saritabba, āsankāhi sarita ussankita, parisankita” Dhp-a iii.485 thus taken as sankā + sṛ; by Buddhaghosa; of course not cogent) AN ii.239 iv.128, 201 SN i.66 (˚ācāra = "suspecting all” translation) iv.180 Thag 1, 277 Pug 27
    doubtful, if Vedic sankasuka
    Saṅkā
    feminine
    1. doubt, uncertainty, fear (cp. visanka) Ja vi.158 Dhp-a iii.485
    from śaṅk ‣See sankati
    Saṅkāpeti
    1. to prepare, get ready, undertake Vin i.137 (vass'āvāsaṁ) SN iv.312
    from saṁ + kḷp
    Saṅkāyati
    1. to be uncertain about Vin ii.274 cp. pari˚;
    denominative from sankā; Dhtp 4 defines saṅk as “sankāyaṁ”
    Saṅkāra
    rubbish Vin i.48 Vin iv.265 Ja i.315 Ja ii.196
    1. ˚kūṭa rubbish heap, dust heap MN ii.7 Pug 33 Mil 365 Dhp-a i.174 cp. kacavara & kattara
    2. ˚cola a rag picked up from a rubbish heap Ja iv.380
    • ˚ṭhāna dust heap Thag 1, 1175 Ja i.244 Vism 250 Dhp-a ii.27
    • ˚dhāna identical Dhp 58
    • ˚yakkha a rubbish heap demon Ja iv.379
    from saṁ + kṛ
    Saṅkāsa
    1. appearance; (—˚) having the appearance of, like, similar Ja ii.150 Ja v.71 155, 370 (puñña˚ = sadisa Commentary ); Bu 17, 21 Mil 2
    saṁ + kāsa, of kāś, cp. okāsa
    Saṅkāsana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. explanation, illustration SN v.430 Nett 5, 8, 38 Snp-a 445 (+ pakāsana)
      from saṁ + kāś
    Saṅkiṇṇa
    mixed; impure SN iii.71 AN iv.246
    1. ˚parikha having the trenches filled; said of one who is free of saṁsāra MN i.139 AN iii.84 Nd2 p. 161
    past participle of sankirati
    Saṅkita
    1. anxious, doubtful Ja v.85 Mhvs 7, 15 Snp-a 60 cp. pari˚, vi˚
    from śaṅk
    Saṅkittana
    neuter
    1. proclaiming, making known Pv-a 164
    saṁ + kittana
    Saṅkitti
    feminine
    1. derivation & meaning very doubtful; Buddhaghosa’s explanation at PugA 231 is not to be taken as reliable, viz. “sankittetvā katabhattesu hoti. dubbhikkha-samaye kira acela-kāsāvakā acelakānaṁ atthāya tato tato taṇḍul'ādīni samādapetvā bhattaṁ pacanti ukkaṭṭhâcelako tato na paṭigaṇhāti.” DN i.166 (translationDialogues of the Buddha i.229 “he will not accept food collected, i.e. by the faithful in time of drought”; Neumann “not from the dirty”; Franke “nichts von Mahlzeiten, für die die Mittel durch Aufruf beschafft sind"?) MN i.77 AN ii.206 Pug 55 It may be something like “convocation.”
    perhaps saṁ + kitti
    Saṅkin
    adjective
    1. anxious Mhvs 35, 101
    from śaṅk
    Saṅkiya
    adjective
    1. apt to be suspected Iti 67
    2. anxious Ja i.334
    gerundive from śankati
    Saṅkiraṇa
    neuter
    1. an astrological technical term, denoting the act of or time for collecting or calling in of debts (Buddhaghosa; doubtful) DN i.11 DN-a i.96 cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.23
    from saṁ + kirati
    Saṅkirati
    1. to mix together; passive saṅkīyati (q.v.);
    2. past participle saṅkiṇṇa
    3. saṁ + kirati
    Saṅkiliṭṭha
    1. stained, tarnished, impure, corrupt, foul DN i.247 SN ii.271 AN iii.124 AN v.169 Dhp 244 Ja ii.418 Dhs 993 1243; Pv iv.123 (kāyena vācāya ca) Dhs-a 319
    past participle of sankilissati
    Saṅkilissati
    1. to become soiled or impure DN i.53 SN iii.70 Dhp 165 Ja ii.33 Ja ii.271 past participle saṅkiliṭṭha.
    2. causative saṅkileseti
    3. saṁ + kilissati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sankliśyati Divy 57
    Saṅkilissana
    neuter
    1. staining, defiling; getting defiled Vv-a 329
    from sankilissati
    Saṅkilesa
    1. impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness Vin i.15 DN i.10 DN i.53 DN i.247 (opposite visuddhi) MN i.402 SN iii.69 AN ii.11 AN iii.418f.; v.34 Ja i.302 Dhs 993 1229; Nett 100; Vism 6, 51, 89 Dhs-a 165
    saṁ + kilesa
    Saṅkilesika
    adjective
    1. baneful, sinful DN i.195 DN iii.57 AN ii.172 Dhs 993 (cp. Dhs-a 345); Tika-Paṭṭhāna 333 353
    from sankilesa
    Saṅkīyati
    1. to become confused or impure SN iii.71 AN ii.29 AN iv.246
    passive of sankirati, saṁ + kīr; Sanskrit ˚kīryate → *kiyyati → Pali ˚kīyati
    Saṅkīḷati
    1. to play or sport DN i.91 AN iv.55 AN iv.343 DN-a i.256
    saṁ + kīḷati
    Saṅku
    1. a stake, spike; javelin MN i.337 SN iv.168 Ja vi.112 Dhp-a i.69
    • ayo˚ an iron stake AN iv.131
    1. ˚patha a path full of stakes & sticks Vv.84; 11 Ja iii.485 541 Mil 280 Vism 305
    2. ˚sata a hundred sticks hundreds of sticks Ja vi.112 Vism 153 (both passages same simile with the beating of an ox-hide)
    3. ˚samāhata set with iron spikes, name of a purgatory MN i.337 Ja vi.453
    cp. Vedic śanku
    Saṅkuka
    1. a stake Vv-a 338 cp. khāṇuka
    from sanku
    Saṅkucati
    1. to become contracted, to shrink Dhs-a 376 past participle ˚kucita.
    2. causative ˚koceti
    3. saṁ + kucati ‣See kuñcita
    Saṅkucita
    1. shrunk, contracted, clenched (of the first: ˚hattha) Ja i.275 Ja vi.468 (˚hattha, opposed to pasārita-hattha) DN-a i.287 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 124
    past participle of sankucati
    Saṅkuṭika
    1. doubled up Ja ii.68 cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 102
    from saṁ + *kuṭ kuc, cp. kuṭila
    Saṅkuṭita
    1. doubled up, shrivelled, shrunk Ja ii.225 Mil 251 Mil 362 Dhs-a 376 Vism 255 (where Kp-a reads bahala Vb-a 238
    = last
    Saṅkuṭila
    adjective
    1. curved, winding Mil 297
    saṁ + kuṭila
    Saṅkuṇḍita
    1. contorted, distorted Pv-a 123
    past participle of saṁ + kuṇḍ ‣See kuṇḍa
    Saṅkuddha
    1. angry DN ii.262
    saṁ + kuddha
    Saṅkupita
    1. shaken, enraged SN i.222
    saṁ + kupita
    Saṅkuppa
    adjective
    1. to be shaken, movable; ; immovable Thag 1, 649 Snp 1149
    saṁ + kuppa
    Saṅkula
    adjective
    1. crowded, full Sdhp 603
    saṁ + kula
    Saṅkuli
    1. a kind of cake Ja vi.580
    cp. sakkhali.2 & sanguḷikā
    Saṅkulya
    neuter = saṅkuli Ja vi.524
    Saṅkusaka
    adjective
    1. contrary; negative Ja vi.297 (= appaṭiloma Commentary )
    cp. Sanskrit sankasuka crumbling up
    Saṅkusumita
    adjective
    1. flowering, in blossom Ja v.420 Mil 319
    saṁ + kusumita
    Saṅketa
    1. intimation, agreement, engagement, appointed place, rendezvous Vin i.298 Mil 212 Nett 15, 18; cp. Compendium 6, 33. saṅketaṁ gacchati to keep an appointment, to come to the rendezvous Vin ii.265
    • asaṅketena without appointing a place Vin i.107
    • vassika˚ the appointed time for keeping the rainy season Vin i.298

      1. ˚kamma agreement Vin iii.47 53, 78
      saṁ + keta ‣See ketu
    Saṅketana
    neuter = saṅketa, ˚ṭṭhāna place of rendezvous Dhp-a ii.261
    Saṅkeḷāyati
    1. to amuse oneself (with) AN iv.55
    saṁ + keḷāyati
    Saṅkoca
    1. contraction (as a sign of anger or annoyance), grimace (mukha˚) Pv-a 103 also as hattha˚; , etc. at Pv-a 124
    saṁ + koca, of kuñc ‣See kuñcita
    Saṅkocana
    neuter = saṅkoca Ja iii.57 (mukha˚) Dhp-a iii.270 Dhtp 809.
    Saṅkoceti
    1. to contract Ja i.228 Dhs-a 324
    causative of sankucati
    Saṅkopa
    1. ‣See sankhepa
    Saṅkha1
    a shell conch; mother-of-pearl; a chank, commonly used as a trumpet DN i.79 DN ii.297 = M i.58 AN ii.117 AN iv.199 Vv 8110 Ja i.72 Ja ii.110 Ja vi.465 Ja vi.580 Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Dhp-a i.18 Combined with paṇava (small drum) Vism 408 Ja vi.21 or with bheri (large drum) Mil 21 Vism 408.
    1. ˚ūpama like a shell, i.e. white Ja v.396 cp. vi.572 -kuṭṭhin a kind of leper; whose body becomes as white as mother-of-pearl Dhp-a i.194 195
    2. ˚thāla mother ofpearl (shell-) plate Vism 126 (sudhota˚), 255
    3. ˚dhama a trumpeter DN i.259 = MN ii.19 MN ii.207 = SN iv.322
    • ˚dhamaka a conch blower, trumpeter Ja i.284 Ja vi.7
    • ˚nābhi a kind of shell Vin i.203 Vin ii.117
    • ˚patta motherof-pearl Dhp-a i.387
    • ˚muṇḍika the shell-tonsure, a kind of torture MN i.87 AN i.47 AN ii.122
    • ˚mutta mother-ofpearl Ja v.380 (C explains as “shell-jewel & pearl-jewel”) vi.211, 230
    • ˚likhita polished like mother-of-pearl bright, perfect DN i.63 DN i.250 SN ii.219 AN v.204 Vin i.181 Pug 57 DN-a i.181 Dhp-a iv.195 ‣See also under likhita & cp. Franke,; Wiener Zeitschrift 1893, 357
    • ˚vaṇṇa pearl-white Ja iii.477 MN i.58 = AN iii.324
    • ˚sadda the sound of a chank AN ii.186 Vism 408 Dhs 621
    • ˚silā “shell-stone,” a precious stone, mother-of-pearl (? Ud 54 Ja iv.85 Pv ii.64. Frequent in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e. g Avs i.184, 201, 205; Divy 291
    cp. Vedic śankha; Latin congius a measure
    Saṅkha2
    1. a water plant (combined with sevāla Mil 35 ‣See detail under paṇṇaka 2
    etymology?
    Saṅkhata
    1. put together, compound; conditioned, produced by a combination of causes, “created,” brought about as effect of actions in former births SN ii.26 SN iii.56 Vin ii.284 Iti 37 88 Ja ii.38 Nett 14 Dhs 1085 Dhs-a 47 As
    2. nt. that which is produced from a cause, i.e. the saṅkhāras SN i.112 AN i.83 AN i.152 Nett 22. asaṅkhata not put together, not proceeding from a cause Dhs 983 (so read for sankhata), 1086; epithet of nibbāna “the Unconditioned” (& therefore unproductive of further life AN i.152 SN iv.359f.; Kvu 317 sq.; Pv iii.710 (= laddhanāma amataṁ Pv-a 207) Mil 270 Dhs 583 ‣See translation ibid., 1439. The discernment of higher jhāna- states as saṅkhata is a preliminary to the attainment of Arahantship MN iii.244 cp. abhi˚; visankhita; visankhāra
    3. cooked, dressed Mhvs 32, 39
    4. embellished Mhvs 22, 29.

      1. ˚lakkhaṇa properties of the sankhata, i.e. production decay and change AN i.152 Vv-a 29
      past participle of sankharoti; Sanskrit saṁskṛta
    Saṅkhati
    feminine
    1. cookery MN i.448
    cp. Sanskrit saṁskṛti
    Saṅkhaya
    1. destruction, consumption, loss, end Vin i.42 DN ii.283 MN i.152 SN i.2 SN i.124 SN iv.391 Iti 38 Dhp 282 (= vināsa Dhp-a iii.421), 331 Ja ii.52 v.465 Mil 205 Mil 304
    saṁ + khaya
    Saṅkharoti
    1. to put together, prepare, work Pv-a 287
    • a-saṅkhārāna SN i.126 German saṅkharitvā SN ii.269 (variant reading sankhāditvā, as is read at identical passage Vin ii.201). cp. abhi˚.
    • past participle saṅkhata
    saṁ + kṛ
    Saṅkhalā
    feminine
    1. a chain Thag 2, 509
    • aṭṭhi˚ a chain of bones, skeleton AN iii.97 As ˚kaṅkalā at Thag 2, 488
    cp. Sanskrit śṛnkhalā
    Saṅkhalikā
    feminine
    1. a chain SN i.76 Ja iii.168 Ja vi.3 Nd2 304iii Mil 149 Mil 279 Dhp-a iv.54 Pv-a 152 Sometimes saṅkhalika (especially in composition), e. g Ja iii.125 (˚bandhana); vi.3 Mil 279
    • aṭṭhi˚ a chain of bones, a skeleton cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit asthi-sankhalikā MVastu i.21
    1. DN ii.296 = M i.58 Vin iii.105 Ja i.433 Pv ii.1211 Dhp-a iii.479
    • deva˚ a magic chain Ja ii.128 Ja v.92
    from sankhalā
    Saṅkhā
    feminine & Saṅkhyā
    • feminine

      1. enumeration, calculation, estimating DN ii.277 MN i.109 Mil 59 2. number Dāvs i.25
      2. denominative nation, definition word, name (cp. on term Kindred Sayings i.321) SN iii.71f.; iv.376 sq. Nd2 617 (= uddesa gaṇanā paññatti) Dhs 1306 Mil 25
      3. saṅkhaṁ gacchati to be styled, called or defined; to be put into words DN i.199 DN i.201 Vin ii.239 MN i.190 MN i.487 AN i.68 AN i.244 = ii.113 Pug 42 Nett 66 sq. Vism 212, 225, 235, 294 (khy) Snp-a 167 (khy) Dhs-a 11 (khy). saṅkhaṁ gata (cp. sankhāta) is called DN-a i.41 (uyyānaṁ Ambalaṭṭhikā t'eva s. g.). saṅkhaṁ na upeti (nopeti) cannot be called by a name, does not count cannot be defined Iti 54 Snp 209 Snp 749 Snp 911 Snp 1074 Nd1 327 Nd2 617
      from saṁ + khyā
    Saṅkhāta
    agreed on, reckoned; (—˚) so-called, named DN i.163 (akusala˚ dhammā); iii.65 133 = Vin iii.46 (theyya˚ what is called theft) DN-a i.313 (the sambodhi, by which is meant that of the three higher stages) Dhs-a 378 (khandha-ttaya˚ kāya, cp. Expositor ii.485) Pv-a 40 (medha˚ paññā), 56 (hattha˚ pāṇi), 131 (pariccāga˚ atidāna), 163 (caraṇa˚ guṇa).
    1. ˚dhamma one who has examined or recognized the dhamma (“they who have mastered well the truth of things” Kindred Sayings ii.36), an epithet of the arahant SN ii.47 SN iv.210 Snp 70 (˚dhammo, with explanation Nd2 618b: “vuccati ñāṇaṁ” etc.; “sankhāta-dh. = ñāta-dhammo,” of the paccekabuddha), 1038 (˚dhammā = vuccanti arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 618a), Dhp 70 (Text sankhata˚, but Dhp-a ii.63 sankhāta˚)
    past participle of sankhāyati
    Saṅkhādati
    1. to masticate Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (reads ˚kharitvā) AN iii.304f. Ja i.507
    • pp ˚khādita
    saṁ + khādati
    Saṅkhādita
    1. chewed, masticated Kp-a 56, 257 Vb-a 241 (where Vism 257 reads ˚khāyita
    past participle of sankhādati
    Saṅkhāna1
    1. neuter & Saṅkhyāna neuter

      1. calculation, counting DN i.11 MN i.85 DN-a i.95 Dhtp 613 (khy)
      from saṁ + khyā, cp. sankhā
    Saṅkhāna2
    neuter
    1. a strong leash Thag-a 292 (where Thag 2, 509 reads saṅkhalā
    ?
    Saṅkhāyaka
    1. a calculator SN iv.376
    from saṁ + khyā
    Saṅkhāyati
    & Saṅkhāti
    1. to appear Ja v.203 (˚āti)
    2. to calculate Snp p. 126 (infinitive ˚khātuṁ) Dhp 196
    3. absolutive saṅkhāya having considered, discriminately carefully, with open mind DN ii.227 DN iii.224 (paṭisevati etc.: with reference to the 4 apassenāni) SN i.182 Snp 209 Snp 391 Snp 749 Snp 1048(= jānitvā etc. Nd2 619) Nd1 327 Dhp 267 (= ñāṇena Dhp-a iii.393) Iti 54
    4. saṅkhā pi deliberately MN i.105f.
    saṁ + khyā
    Saṅkhāyita
    1. = sankhādita; Vism 257
    Saṅkhāra
    1. one of the most difficult terms in Buddhist metaphysics, in which the blending of the subjective-objective view of the world and of happening peculiar to the East, is so complete, that it is almost impossible for Occidental terminology to get at the root of its meaning in a translation. We can only convey an idea of its import by representing several sides of its application, without attempting to give a “word” as a definite translation
    • An exhaustive discussion of the term is given by Franke in his Dīgha translation (
    • past participle 307 sq. especially 311 sq.) ‣See also the analysis in Compendium 273–⁠276
    • Lit “preparation, get up”; applied: coefficient (of consciousness as well as of physical life, cp. viññāṇa), constituent constituent potentiality; (
    • plural ) synergies, cause-combination, as in SN iii.87 discussed, B. Psy., p. 50 sq. (cp. Dhs-a 156 where paraphrased in definition of sa-saṅkhāra with "ussāha, payoga, upāya, paccaya-gahaṇa”; composition aggregate. 1. Aggregate of the conditions or essential properties for a given process or result-e.g. (i.) the sum of the conditions or properties making up or resulting in life or existence; the essentials or “element” of anything (—˚), e.g. āyusaṅkhāra, life-element DN ii.106 SN ii.266 Pv-a 210 bhavasankhāra, jīvitasaṅkhāra DN ii.99 DN ii.107 (ii.) Essential conditions, antecedents or synergy (co-ordinated activity), mental coefficients requisite for act, speech, thought: kāya˚, vacī˚ citta˚, or mano˚, described respectively as “respiration,” “attention and consideration,” “percepts and feelings,” “because these are (respectively) bound up with,” or “precede” those MN i.301 (cp. 56) SN iv.293 Kvu 395 (cp. translation 227); Vism 530 sq. Dhs-a 8 Vb-a 142f.
    • One of the five khandhas, or constitutional elements of physical life ‣See khandha, comprising all the citta-sampayutta-cetasikā dhammā-i.e. the mental concomitants, or adjuncts which come, or tend to come, into consciousness at the uprising of a citta or unit of cognition Dhs 1 (cp. MN iii.25). As thus classified, the saṅkhāra’s form the mental factor corresponding to the bodily aggregate or rūpakkhandha, and are in contrast to the three khandhas which represent a single mental function only. But just as kāya stands for both body and action, so do the concrete mental syntheses called saṅkhārā tend to take on the implication of synergies, of purposive intellection, connoted by the term abhisaṅkhāra, q.v
    • e.g. MN iii.99 where saṅkhārā are a purposive, aspiring state of mind to induce a specific rebirth SN ii.82 where puññaṁ opuññaṁ, āṇeñjaṁ s. abhisankharoti, is, in DN iii.217 & Vb 135 catalogued as the three classes of abhisankhāra SN ii.39 SN ii.360 AN ii.157 where s. is tantamount to sañcetanā Mil 61 where s., as khandha, is replaced by cetanā (purposive conception). Thus, too, the ss. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda formula are considered as the aggregate of mental conditions which, under the law of kamma, bring about the inception of the paṭisandhiviññāṇa, or first stirring of mental life in a newly begun individual. Lists of the psychologically, or logically distinguishable factors making up the composite saṅkhārakkhandha, with constants and variants, are given for each class of citta in Dhs 62 etc. (nameB
    • Read cetanā for vedanā, § 338. Phassa and cetanā are the two constant factors in the s-kkhandha. These lists may be compared with the later elaboration of the saṅkhāra-elements given at Vism 462 sq

  • saṅkhārā (

    • plural ) in popular meaning In the famous formula (and in many other connections as e.g. sabbe saṅkhārā “aniccā vata sankhārā uppādavaya-dhammino” (DN ii.157 SN i.6 SN i.158 SN i.200 SN ii.193 Thag 1, 1159 Ja i.392 cp. Vism 527), which is rendered by Mrs. Rhys Davids (Brethren, p 385 e.g.) as “O, transient are our life’s experiences! Their nature 'tis to rise and
    • passive away,” we have the use of s. in quite a general popular sense of “life, physical or material life”; and sabbe saṅkhārā means “everything, all physical and visible life, all creation.” Taken with caution the term “creation” may be applied as technical term in the Paṭiccasamuppāda, when we regard avijjā as creating, i.e. producing by spontaneous causality the saṅkhāras, and saṅkhārā as “natura genita atque genitura” (the latter with reference to the following viññāṇa). If we render it by “formations” (cp. Oldenberg’s “Gestaltungen,” Buddha 71920, p. 254), we imply the mental “constitutional element as well as the physical, although the latter in customary materialistic popular philosophy is the predominant factor (cp. the discrepancies of “life eternal and “life is extinct” in one & the same European term) None of the “links” in the Paṭicca-samuppāda meant to the people that which it meant or was supposed to mean in the subtle and schematic philosophy (dhammā duddasā nipuṇā!) of the dogmatists

      • Thus saṅkhārā are in the widest sense the “world of phenomena” (cp below ˚loka), all things which have been made up by pre-existing causes
      • At Pv-a 71 we find saṅkhārā in literally meaning as “things” (preparations) in definition of ye keci (bhogā) “whatever.” The sabbe s. at SN ii.178 (translation “all the things of this world”) denote all 5 aggregates exhausting all conditioned things; cp. Kvu 226 (translation “things”); Mhvs iv.66 (: the material and transitory world) Dhp 154 (vi-sankhāragataṁ cittaṁ = mind divested of all material things) Dhs-a 304 (translation “kamma activities,” in connection avijjā-paccaya-s˚); Compendium 211 note 3
      • The definition of saṅkhārā at Vism 526 (as result of avijjā & cause of viññāṇa in the Pali
      • S.) is: sankhataṁ abhisankharontī ti sankhārā. Api ca: avijjā-paccayā sankhārā sankhāra-saddena āgata-sankhārā ti duvidhā sankhārā; etc. with further definition of the 4 sankhāras. 4. Var. passages for sankhāra in general: DN ii.213 iii.221 sq., MN ii.223 (imassa dukkha-nidānassa sankhāraṁ padahato sankhāra-ppadhānā virāgo hoti) SN iii.69 (ekanta-dukkhā sankhārā); iv.216 sq. (sankhārāṇaṁ khaya-dhammatā; identical with vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha etc.) Snp 731 (yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti sabbaṁ sankhāra-paccayā; sankhārānaṁ nirodhena n'atthi dukkhassa sambhavo); Vism 453, 462 sq. (the 51) 529 sq. Dhp-a iii.264 379 Vb-a 134 (4 fold), 149 (3 fold), 192 (āyūhanā) Pv-a 41 (bhijjana-dhammā). Of passages dealing with the sankhāras as aniccā vayadhammā, anattā, dukkhā etc. the following may be mentioned: Vin i.13 SN i.200 SN iii.24 SN iv.216 SN iv.259 SN v.56, 345 MN iii.64 MN iii.108 AN i.286 AN ii.150f.; iii.83 143; iv.13, 100 Iti 38 Dhp 277 Dhp 383; Ps i.37, 132 ii.48; 109 sq. Nd2 444 450; also Nd2 p. 259 (s. v saṅkhārā
      1. ˚upekkhā equanimity among “things” Vism 161 162
      2. ˚ūpasama allayment of the constituents of life Dhp 368 Dhp 381; cp. Dhp-a iv.108
      • ˚khandha the aggregate of (mental) coefficients DN iii.233 Kvu 578; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61 Dhs-a 345 Vb-a 20 42
      • ˚dukkha the evil of material life, constitutional or inherent ill Vb-a 93 (in the classification of the sevenfold sukkha)
      • ˚paccayā (viññāṇaṁ conditioned by the synergies (is vital consciousness), the second linkage in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.) Vism 577 Vb-a 152f. -padhāna concentration on the sankhāras MN ii.223
      • ˚ majjhattatā = ˚upekkhā Vb-a 283
      • ˚loka the material world, the world of formation (or phenomena), creation, loka “per se,” as contrasted to satta-loka, the world of (morally responsible beings, loka “per hominem” Vism 205 Vb-a 456 Snp-a 442
      from saṁ + kṛ; , not Vedic, but as saṁskāra Epic & Classical Sanskrit meaning “preparation” and “sacrament, also in philosophical literature “former impression, disposition” cp. vāsanā
  • Saṅkhāravant
    adjective
    1. having sankhāras AN ii.214 = Dhs 1003
    from sankhāra
    Saṅkhitta
    1. concise, brief Mil 227 Dhs-a 344 instrumental saṅkhittena in short, concisely (opp vitthārena) Vin i.10 DN ii.305 SN v.421 Pug 41 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sankṣiptena Divy 37 etc
    2. concentrated attentive DN i.80 (which at Vism 410 however is explained as “thīna-middh’ ânugata”) SN ii.122 SN v.263 DN ii.299 MN i.59
    3. contracted, thin, slender: ˚majjhā of slender waist Ja v.155

      • cp. abhi˚;
      past participle of sankhipati
    Saṅkhipati
    1. to collect, heap together Mhvs 1, 31
    2. to withdraw, put off Dāvs iv.35. 3. to concentrate Ja i.82
    3. to abridge, shorten.

      • past participle saṅkhitta
      saṁ + khipati
    Saṅkhippa
    adjective
    1. quick Ja vi.323 Sankhiya-dhamma
    saṁ + khippa
    Saṅkhiyā-dhamma
    1. form of talk, the trend of talk DN i.2 DN-a i.43 cp. saṅkhyā
    Saṅkhubhati
    1. to be shaken, to be agitated, to stir Ja i.446 (absolutive ˚khubhitvā) Dhp-a ii.43 57;
    2. aorist ˚khubhi Pv-a 93
    3. past participle saṅkhubhita.
    4. causative saṅkhobheti to shake, stir up, agitate Ja i.119 Ja i.350 Ja ii.119
    5. saṁ + khubbati
    Saṅkhubhita
    1. shaken, stirred Ja iii.443
    past participle of sankhubhati
    Saṅkhepa
    1. abridgment, abstract, condensed account (opposite vitthāra, e.g. Vism 532, 479; Dhp i.125 Kp-a 183 Dhs-a 344 Snp-a 150 160, 314 Vb-a 47 cp. ati˚;
    2. the sum of, quintessence of; instrumental ˚ena (
    3. adverb ) by way of, as if, e.g. rāja˚ as if he were king DN-a i.246 bhūmi-ghara˚ in the shape of an earth house DN-a i.260
    4. group, heaping up, amassing, collection pabbata-saṅkhepe in a mountain glen (literally in the midst of a group of mountains) DN i.84 AN iii.396

      • bhava˚ amassing of existences Ja i.165f. 366, 463; ii.137. 4. aṭavi˚ at AN i.178 AN iii.66 is probably a wrong reading for ˚saṅkopa “inroad of savage tribes.”
      saṁ + khepa
    Saṅkheyya1
    adjective
    1. calculable; only negative ; incalculable SN v.400 AN iii.366 Pv-a 212
    • ˚˚kāra acting with a set purpose Snp 351

      • As
      • gerundive of saṅkharoti ‣See upa˚;
      gerundive of sankhāyati
    Saṅkheyya2
    1. neuter a hermitage, the residence of Thera Āyupāla Mil 19 Mil 22 etc
    Saṅkhobha
    1. shaking, commotion, upsetting, disturbance Ja i.64 Sdhp 471
    san + khobha
    Saṅkhobheti
    1. ‣See sankhubhati
    Saṅga
    cleaving, clinging, attachment, bond SN i.25 SN i.117f. AN iii.311 AN iv.289 Dhp 170 Dhp 342, etc. Snp 61 Snp 212 Snp 386 Snp 390 Snp 475 etc. Dhs 1059 Dhs-a 363 Ja iii.201 the five sangas are rāga, dosa moha, māna, and diṭṭhi, Thag. 633 = Dhp. 370 Dhp-a iv.187 seven sangas, It. 94 Nd1 91 432 Nd2 620.
    1. ˚ātiga one who has overcome attachment, free from attachment, an Arahant MN i.386 SN i.3 SN i.23 SN iv.158 Iti 58 Snp 250 Snp 473 Snp 621 Dhp-a iv.159
    from sañj ‣See sajjati1
    Saṅgacchati
    1. to come together, to meet with; absolutive ˚gamma Iti 123 & ˚gantva Snp 290

      • pp saṅgata
      saṁ + gacchati
    Saṅgaṇa
    adjective [sa + angaṇa) sinful Snp 279 cp. sāngaṇa.
    Saṅgaṇikā
    feminine
    1. communication, association, society Vin i.45 AN iii.256 Ja i.106
    1. ˚ārāma delighting in society DN ii.78 MN iii.110 Vb-a 474
    • ˚ārāmatā delight in company DN ii.78 MN iii.110 AN iii.116 AN iii.293f. 310, 422
    • ˚rata fond of society DN ii.78 Snp 54 cp. sangaṇike rata Thag 1, 84
    • ˚vihāra (sangaṇika˚) living in society AN iii.104 AN iv.342
    saṁ + gaṇa + ikā, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sangaṇikā MVastu ii.355; Divy 464
    Saṅgaṇha
    adjective
    1. showing kindness, helping Vv-a 59 (˚sīla)
    from saṁ + grah
    Saṅgaṇhāti
    1. to comprise Pv-a 80 Pv-a 117 Snp-a 200 (
    2. absolutive ˚gahetvā), 347 (˚gaṇhitvā)
    3. to collect Mhvs 10, 24
    4. to contain, include Mil 40

      • to compile, abridge Mhvs 37, 244

    5. to take up; to treat kindly, sympathize with, favour, help, protect Vin i.50 Ja ii.6 Ja iv.132 Ja v.426 (

      • aorist ˚gaṇhi), 438 (to favour with one’s love), 510 Mil 234 Kp-a 160
      • aorist saṅgahesi Mhvs 38, 31;
      • future ˚gahissati Ja vi.392
      • absolutive ˚gahetvā Mhvs 37, 244;
      • gerundive ˚gahetabba Vin i.50 ppr.
      • passive ˚gayhamāna Dhs-a 18
      • past participle saṅgahita.
      • causative II. saṅgaṇhāpeti ‣See pari˚ (e.g. Ja vi.328)
      saṁ + gaṇhāti
    Saṅgata
    1. come together, met Snp 807 Snp 1102 (= samāgata samohita sannipātita Nd2 621); nt saṅgataṁ association Dhp 207
    2. compact, tightly fastened or closed, well-joined Vv 642 (= nibbivara Vv-a 275)
    past participle of sangacchati
    Saṅgati
    feminine
    1. meeting, intercourse Ja iv.98 Ja v.78 Ja v.483 In definition of yajati (= service?) at Dhtp 62 & Dhtm 79
    2. union, combination MN i.111 SN ii.72 SN iv.32f. 68 sq. Vb 138 (= Vb-a 188). 3. accidental occurrence DN i.53 DN-a i.161
    from sangacchati
    Saṅgatika
    1. kalyāṇa˚, pāpa˚, united with, MN ii.222 MN ii.227
    adjective
    Saṅgama
    1. meeting, intercourse, association Snp 681 Ja ii.42 Ja iii.488 Ja v.483
    2. sexual intercourse MN i.407 Ja iv.106
    from saṁ + gam
    Saṅgara
    1. a promise, agreement Ja iv.105 Ja iv.111 Ja iv.473 Ja v.25 Ja v.479
    2. saṅgaraṁ karoti to make a compact Vin i.247 Ja iv.105 v.479
    3. (also
    4. neuter a fight MN iii.187 = Nett 149 SN v.109
    from saṁ + gṛ1 to sing, proclaim, cp. gāyati & gīta
    Saṅgaha1
    1. collecting, gathering, accumulation Vin i.253 Mhvs 35, 28
    2. comprising collection, inclusion, classification Kvu 335 sq. (˚kathā) cp. Kvu. translation 388 sq.; Vism 191, 368 (eka˚); ˚ṁ gacchati to be comprised, included, or classified Snp-a 7 24, 291
    3. inclusion, i.e. constitution of consciousness, phase Mil 40

      • recension, collection of the Scriptures Mhvs 4, 61; 5, 95; 38, 44 DN-a i.131

    4. (applied) kind disposition, kindliness, sympathy, friendliness, help assistance, protection, favour DN iii.245 Snp 262 Snp 263 AN i.92 Ja i.86f.; iii.471; vi.574 DN-a i.318 Vv-a 63 64 Pv-a 196 (˚ṁ karoti). The 4 saṅgaha-vatthūni or objects (characteristics) of sympathy are: dāna, peyyavajja atthacariyā, samānattatā, or liberality, kindly speech, a life of usefulness (Rhys Davids at Dialogues of the Buddha iii.145 sagacious conduct; 223: justice), impartiality (? better as state of equality, i.e. sensus communis or feeling of common good). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit equivalents (as sangrahavastūni) are dāna, priyavākya, tathārthacaryā, samānasukha-duḥkatā MVastu i.3; and d., p., arthakriyā samānārthatā (= samāna + artha + tā) Lal. Vist. 30 cp. Divy 95 Divy 124, 264. The Pali refs. are DN iii.152 DN iii.232 AN ii.32 AN ii.248 AN iv.219 AN iv.364 Ja v.330 Snp-a 236 240 ‣See also Kern, Toevoegselen ii.67 s.v.

      from saṁ + grah
    Saṅgaha2
    neuter
    1. restraining, hindrance, bond Iti 73 (both reading & meaning very doubtful)
    from saṁ + grah
    Saṅgahaṇa
    adjective
    1. firm, well-supported Ja v.484
    from sangaṇhāti
    Saṅgahita
    (& ˚gahīta)
    1. comprised, included Mil 40 (eka˚) Pv-a 80
    2. collected Mhvs 10, 24
    3. grouped Kvu 335 sq.

      • restrained Snp 388 (˚attabhāva) Snp-a 291 (˚atta)

    4. kindly disposed Vv 116 = Pv iv.160 (˚attabhāva = paresaṁ sangaṇha-sīla Vv-a 59 i.e. of sympathetic nature).

      past participle of sangaṇhāti
    Saṅgāma
    a fight, battle DN i.46 DN ii.285 MN i.86 MN i.253 SN i.98 SN iv.308f. AN i.106 AN ii.116 AN iii.94 Vin i.6 Iti 75 Snp 440 Nd2 199 Pug 68 Ja i.358 Ja ii.11 Mil 332 Vism 401 cp. vijita˚;.
    1. ˚āvacara whose sphere is the battle, quite at home on the battlefield Ja ii.94 Ja ii.95 Vin v.163f. 183 (here said figuratively of the bhikkhu)
    • ji (sangāma-j-uttama) victorious in battle Dhp 103 (cp. Dhp-a ii.227 = sangāma-sīsa-yodha) -bheri battle drum Dhp-a iii.298 Dhp-a iv.25
    • ˚yodha a warrior Ja i.358
    from saṁ + *gam ‣See grāma; literally “collection”
    Saṅgāmeti
    1. to fight to come into conflict with Vin ii.195 Vin iii.108 Iti 75 Ja ii.11 Ja ii.212 aorist ˚gāmesi Ja v.417 Ja v.420 (Commentary = samāgami cp. sangacchati)
    2. denominative from sangāma; given as special root saṅgām˚; at Dhtp 605 with definition “yuddha”
    Saṅgāyati
    1. to chant, proclaim (cp. sangara), to rehearse, to establish the text of the B. scriptures Vin ii.285 DN-a i.25 (Buddha-vacanaṁ). past participle saṅgīta
    2. saṁ + gāyati
    Saṅgāyika
    adjective
    1. connected with the proclamation; dhamma˚-therā the Elders gathered in the council for proclaiming the Doctrine Ja v.56
    from sangāyati
    Saṅgāha
    adjective-noun
    1. collecting, collection, Mhvs 10, 24
    2. restraining, self-restraint AN ii.142
    from saṁ + grah
    Saṅgāhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. compiling, collection, making a recension Ja i.1 Mil 369 Vv-a 169 (dhamma˚)
    2. treating kindly, compassionate, kind (cp. sangaha 5) AN iv.90 Ja i.203 Ja iii.262
      • masculine a charioteer DN ii.268 Ja i.203 Ja ii.257 Ja iv.63
      from sangāha
    Saṅgāhika
    adjective
    1. comprising, including Ja i.160 Vism 6 DN-a i.94
    2. holding together MN i.322 = AN iii.10
    3. comprehensive, concise Ja ii.236

      = last
    Saṅgīta
    1. sung; uttered, proclaimed, established as the text Vin ii.290 Ja i.1 DN-a i.25 (of the Canon, said to have been rehearsed in seven months)- neuter a song, chant, chorus DN ii.138 Ja vi.529
    2. past participle of sangāyati
    Saṅgīti
    feminine
    1. a song, chorus, music Ja i.32 (dibba˚); vi.528 (of birds)
    2. proclamation (cp. sangara), rehearsal, general convocation of the Buddhist clergy in order to settle questions of doctrine and to fix the text of the Scriptures. The first Council is alleged to have been held at Rājagaha, Vin ii.284f.; Dpvs iv.; Mhvs iii. DN-a i.2f. Snp-a 67 483 The second Council at Vesāli Vin ii.294f.; Dīpavaṁsa iv.27 sq.; Mhvs iv.; the third at Pāṭaliputta, Dīpavaṁsa vii.34 sq.; Mhvs v.268 sq. A Council of heretics, the so-called Mahāsaṅgīti, is mentioned Dīpavaṁsa v.31 sq. 3. text rehearsed, recension Vin ii.290 DN-a i.17 Mil 175 (dhamma˚); text, formula Vin i.95 Vin ii.274 278 On the question of the Councils ‣See especially Franke Journal of the Pali Text Society 1908, 1 sq
      1. ˚kāra editor of a redaction of the Holy Scriptures Snp-a 42f. 292, 394, 413 sq., 504 and passim Pv-a 49 Pv-a 70, etc
      2. ˚kāraka id Ja i.345
      • ˚kāla the time of the redaction of the Pāli Canon, or of (one of them, probably the last) the Council Tika-Paṭṭhāna 241 Snp-a 580 Vv-a 270
      • ˚pariyāya the discourse on the Holy Text DN iii.271 (Rhys Davids “scheme of chanting together”)
      from saṁgāyati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sangīti Divy 61
    Saṅguḷikā
    feminine
    1. a cake Vin ii.17 Dhp-a ii.75 cp. sankulikā AN iii.78
    either = Sanskrit śaṣkulikā, cp, sakkhali.2, or from saguḷa = sanguḷa
    Saṅgopeti
    1. to guard; to keep, preserve; to hold on to (accusative ) Ja iv.351 (dhanaṁ)
    2. saṁ + gopeti
    Saṅgha
    1. multitude, assemblage Mil 403 (kāka˚) Ja i.52 (sakuṇa˚) Snp 589 (ñāti˚); 680 (deva˚) DN iii.23 (miga˚) Vv 55 (accharā˚ = samūha Vv-a 37) bhikkhu˚; an assembly of Buddhist priests AN i.56 etc. DN i.1 etc. SN i.236 Sum i.230, 280 Vin i.16 Vin ii.147
    2. bhikkhunī˚ an assembly of nuns SN v.360 Vin i.140
    3. sāvaka˚ an assembly of disciples AN i.208 DN ii.93 SN i.220 Pv-a 195 etc.; samaṇa˚; an assembly of ascetics Snp 550
    4. the Order, the priesthood, the clergy, the Buddhist church AN i.68 AN i.123 etc. DN i.2 etc.; iii.102 126, 193, 246 SN iv.270f. Snp 227 etc. Ja ii.147 etc. Dhs 1004 Iti 11 12, 88 Vin i.102 326; ii.164, etc. 3. a larger assemblage, a community AN ii.55 = Sv.400 MN i.231 (cp. gaṇa)
    5. On the formula Buddha, Dhamma Sangha ‣See dhamma C 2
      1. ˚ānussati meditation on the Order (a kammaṭṭhāna DN iii.250 DN iii.280 AN i.30 Ja i.97
      • ˚ārāma a residence for members of the Order Ja i.94 Vb-a 13
      • ˚kamma an act or ceremony performed by a chapter of bhikkhus assembled in solemn conclave Vin i.123 (cp. i.53, 143 & explanation at S.B.English xxii.7); iii.38 sq. Ja i.341
      • ˚gata gone into the sangha, joining the community MN i.469
      • ˚thera senior of the congregation Vin ii.212 303
      • ˚bhatta food given to the community of bhikkhus Vin i.58 Vin ii.109 212
      • ˚bhinna schismatic Vin v.216
      • ˚bheda causing dissension among the Order Vin i.150 Vin ii.180f. AN ii.239f. Iti 11 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 167, 171 Ja vi.129 Vb-a 425f. -bhedaka causing dissension or divisions schismatic Vin i.89 136, 168 Iti 11
      • ˚māmaka devoted to the Sangha Dhp-a i.206
      • ˚rāji [= rāji2 dissension in the Order Vin i.339 Vin ii.203 = Vb-a 428 Vin iv.37
      from saṁ + hṛ; literally “comprising.” The quâsi popular etymology at Vv-a 233 is “diṭṭhi-sīla-sāmaññena sanghāṭabhāvena sangha”
    Saṅghaṁsati
    1. to rub together, to rub against Vin ii.315 (Buddhaghosa)
    saṁ + ghaṁsati
    Saṅghaṭita
    1. struck, sounded, resounding with (—˚) Ja v.9 (variant reading ṭṭ) Mil 2
    2. pierced together, pegged together constructed Mil 161 (nāvā nānā-dāru˚)
    saṁ + ghaṭita, for ˚ghaṭṭita, past participle of ghaṭṭeti
    Saṅghaṭṭa1
    adjective
    1. knocking against, offending, provoking, making angry Ja vi.295
    from saṁ + ghaṭṭ
    Saṅghaṭṭa2
    1. (?) bangle Snp 48
    • ˚yanta: thus Nd2 reading for ˚māna (ppr.
    • medium of sanghaṭṭeti).

    Saṅghaṭṭana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. rubbing or striking together, close contact, impact SN iv.215 SN v.212 Ja vi.65 Vism 112 DN-a i.256 (anguli˚). 2. bracelet (?) Snp-a 96 (on Snp 48)
    from sanghaṭṭeti
    Saṅghaṭṭeti
    1. to knock against Vin ii.208
    2. to sound, to ring Mhvs 21, 29 (˚aghaṭṭayi)
    3. to knock together, to rub against each other Ja iv.98 (aṁsena aṁsaṁ samaghaṭṭayimha); Dāvs iii.87.

      • to provoke by scoffing, to make angry Ja vi.295 (paraṁ asanghaṭṭento, Commentary on asanghaṭṭa) Vv-a 139 (pres.
      • passive ˚ghaṭṭiyati).
      • past participle saṅghaṭ(ṭ)ita
    saṁ + ghaṭṭeti
    Saṅghara
    = saghara
    1. one’s own house Ja v.222
    sa4 + ghara
    Saṅgharaṇa
    neuter
    1. accumulation Ja iii.319 (dhana˚)
    = saṁharaṇa
    Saṅgharati
    1. to bring together, collect, accumulate Ja iii.261 Ja iv.36 (dhanaṁ), 371; v.383. 2. to crush, to pound Ja i.493
    2. = saṁharati
    Saṅghāṭa
    1. a raft Ja ii.20 Ja ii.332 (nāvā˚) iii.362 (identical), 371. Mil 376
    2. dāru˚ (= nāvā˚) Ja v.194 195
    3. junction, union Vv-a 233
    4. collection aggregate Ja iv.15 (upāhana˚) Thag 1, 519 (papañca˚) frequently as aṭṭhi˚; (cp. sankhalā etc.) a string of bones, i.e. a skeleton Thag 1, 570 Dhp-a iii.112 Ja v.256

      • a weft, tangle, mass (almost = "robe,” i.e. sanghāṭī), in taṇhā˚-paṭimukka MN i.271
      • vāda˚-paṭimukka MN i.383 (Neumann “defeat”); diṭṭhi˚-paṭimukka Mil 390 5. a post, in piṭṭha˚ door-post, lintel Vin ii.120
    from saṁ + ghaṭeti, literally “binding together”; on etymology ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen ii.68
    Saṅghāṭika
    adjective
    1. wearing a sanghāṭī MN i.281
    from sanghāṭī
    Saṅghāṭī
    feminine
    1. one of the three robes of a Buddhist Vin i.46 289; ii.78, 135, 213 DN i.70 DN ii.65 MN i.281 MN ii.45 SN i.175 AN ii.104 AN ii.106f. 210; iv.169 sq.; v.123; Pv iv.146 Vb-a 359 (˚cīvara) Pv-a 43
    1. ˚cāra wandering about in a sanghāṭī, having deposited the cīvara Vin iv.281
    • ˚vāsin dressed in a s. Snp 456
    from sanghaṭeti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sanghāṭī Divy 154 Divy 159, 494
    Saṅghāṇi
    feminine a loin-cloth Vin iv.339f.
    Saṅghāta
    1. striking, killing, murder Vin i.137 DN i.141 DN ii.354 MN i.78 AN ii.42f.
    2. knocking together (cp. sanghaṭṭeti), snapping of the fingers (acchara˚) AN i.34 AN i.38 Ja vi.64
    3. accumulation aggregate, multitude Pv-a 206 (aṭṭhi˚ mass of bones, for the usual ˚sanghāṭa); Nett 28.

      • Name of one of the 8 principle purgatories Ja v.266 Ja v.270
    saṁ + ghāta
    Saṅghātanika
    adjective
    1. holding or binding together MN i.322 (+ agga-sangāhika) AN iii.10 (identical) Vin i.70 (“the decisive moment” Vinaya Texts i.190)
    from sanghāta or sanghāṭa
    Saṅghādisesa
    1. requiring suspension from the Order; a class of offences which can be decided only by a formal sangha-kamma Vin ii.38f.; iii.112, 186 iv.110 sq., 225 (where explained) AN ii.242 Vism 22 Dhp-a iii.5
    unexplained as regards etymology; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 383, after S. Lévi = sangh'âtisesa; but atisesa does not occur in Pāli
    Saṅghika
    adjective
    1. belonging to, or connected with the Order Vin i.250
    from sangha
    Saṅghin
    adjective
    1. having a crowd (of followers), the head of an order DN i.47 DN i.116 SN i.68 Mil 4 DN-a i.143
    • saṅghāsaṅghī (
    • plural ) in crowds, with crowds (reduplicated compound!), with gaṇi-bhūtā “crowd upon crowd at DN i.112 DN i.128 DN ii.317 DN-a i.280
    from sangha
    Saṅghuṭṭha
    adjective
    1. resounding (with) Ja vi.60 Ja vi.277 (turiya-tāḷita˚); Mhvs 15, 196; 29, 25 (turiya˚); Sdhp 298
    2. proclaimed, announced Pv-a 73
    saṁ + ghuṭṭha
    Sacāca
    1. (conj.) if indeed Vin i.88 ‣See sace
    Sacitta1
    neuter
    1. one’s own mind or heart DN ii.120 Dhp 183 Dhp 327 = Mil 379
    sa4 + citta
    Sacitta2
    adjective
    1. of the same mind Ja v.360
    sa2 + citta
    Sacittaka
    adjective
    1. endowed with mind, intelligent Dhs-a 295
    sa3 + citta + ka
    Sace
    (conj.)
    1. if DN i.8 DN i.51 Vin i.7 Dhp 134 Ja i.311
    • sace … noce if … if not Ja vi.365
    sa2 + ce; cp. sacāca
    Sacetana
    adjective
    1. animate, conscious, rational Ja i.74 Mhvs 38, 97
    sa3 + cetana
    Sacetasa
    adjective
    1. attentive, thoughtful AN i.254 (= citta-sampanna Commentary )
    sa3 + cetasa
    Sacca
    adjective
    1. real, true DN i.182 MN ii.169 MN iii.207 Dhp 408 neuter saccaṁ truly, verily, certainly Mil 120
    2. saccaṁ kira is it really true? DN i.113 Vin i.45 60 Ja i.107
    3. saccato truly SN iii.112

      • (
      • neuter as noun) saccaṁ the truth AN ii.25 AN ii.115 (parama˚) Dhp 393 also: a solemn asseveration Mhvs 25, 18. Sacce patiṭṭhāya keeping to fact, MN i.376
      • plural (cattāri) saccāni the (four) truths MN ii.199 AN ii.41 AN ii.176 Snp 883f. Dhs 358
      • The 4 ariya-saccāni are the truth about dukkha, dukkhasamudaya dukkha-nirodha, and dukkha-nirodha-gāminipaṭipadā. Thus e.g. at Vin i.230 DN ii.304f.; iii.277 AN i.175f.; Vism 494 sq. Vb-a 116f. 141 sq. A shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha magga is frequently found, e.g. Vin i.16 ‣See under dukkha B. 1
      • ‣ See also ariyasacca & asacca
      • iminā saccena; in consequence of this truth, i.e. if this be true Ja i.294
      1. ˚avhaya deserving his name, cp. of the Buddha Snp 1133 cp. Nd2 624
      2. ˚ādhitthāna determined on truth MN iii.245 DN iii.229
      • ˚ānupaṭṭi realization of truth MN ii.173f. -ānubodha awakening to truth MN ii.171 sq -ānurakkhaṇa warding of truth, MN ii.176
      • ˚ābhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kāya-ganthas SN v.59 Dhs 1139 Dhs-a 377
      • ˚ābhisamaya comprehension of the truth Snp 758 Thag 1, 338 Thag-a 239
      • ˚kāra ratification pledge, payment in advance as guarantee Ja i.121
      • ˚kiriyā a solemn declaration, a declaration on oath Ja i.214 Ja i.294 iv.31, 142; v.94 Mil 120 Mhvs 18, 39 ‣See translation p. 125 on term
      • ˚ñāṇa knowledge of the truth Vism 510 Dhp-a iv.152
      • ˚nāma doing justice to one’s name, bearing a true name, epithet of the Buddha AN iii.346 AN iv.285 AN iv.289 Pv-a 231
      • ˚nikkhama truthful Snp 542
      • ˚paṭivedha penetration of the truth Ps ii.57
      • ˚vaṅka a certain kind of fish Ja v.405 (the Copenhagen MS. has sa
        1. sacca-vanka which has been given by Fausböll as sata-vanka) -vacana (1) veracity MN i.403 Dhp i.160; (2) = saccakiriyā Kp-a 169, 180
        2. ˚vajja truthfulness DN i.53 SN iv.349 Ja iv.320
        • ˚vācā identical AN ii.228 AN iii.244 Ja i.201
        • ˚vādin truthful, speaking the truth DN i.4 DN iii.170 AN ii.209 AN iv.249 AN iv.389 SN i.66 Snp 59 Dhp 217 Mil 120 Nd2 623 Dhp-a iii.288
        • ˚vivaṭṭa revelation of truth Ps i.11
        • ˚sandha truthful, reliable DN i.4 DN iii.170 AN ii.209 AN iv.249 DN-a i.73
        • ˚sammatā popular truth maxim SN iv.230
        cp. Sanskrit satya
    Saccāpeti
    1. at AN iv.346 = Vin ii.19 is probably misreading or an old misspelling for sajjāpeti from sajjeti, the confusion sac: saj being frequent. Meaning: to undertake fulfil, realize
    Saccika
    adjective
    1. real, true Mil 226 (the same passage at Ps i.174 & Nd; 1 458 spells sacchika). saccik’ aṭṭha truth, reality, the highest truth Kvu 1 sq. Dhs-a 4 (nearly = paramaṭṭha); Kp-a 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toevoegselen ii.49, 50) takes it as sacci-kaṭṭha (= Sanskrit sāci-kṛṣta) “pulled sideways,” i.e. “misunderstood.”
    cp. Sanskrit satyaka
    Sacceti
    1. in future saccessati at AN iv.343 is most likely an old mistake for ghaṭṭessati is the same passage at AN iii.343 the meaning is “to touch,” or to approach, disturb It is hardly = saśc “to accompany.”

    Sacchanda
    adjective
    1. self-willed, headstrong Ja i.421 as sacchandin ibid
    sa4 + chanda
    Sacchavīni
    1. (mūlāni) at AN iii.371 (opposite ummūla) means “roots taking to the soil again.” It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi “skin.”
    Sacchikata
    1. seen with one’s own eyes, realized experienced DN i.250 SN v.422 = Vin i.11 Dhp-a iv.117
    past participle of sacchikaroti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sākṣātkṛtaḥ Avs i.210
    Sacchikaraṇīya
    adjective
    1. (able) to be realized SN iii.223f. DN iii.230 = AN ii.182 (in four ways by kāya, sati, cakkhu, paññā)
    grd: of sacchikaroti
    Sacchikaroti
    1. to ‣See with one’s eyes, to realize, to experience for oneself. Pres. ˚karoti DN i.229 SN iv.337 SN v.11 SN v.49 future ˚karissati SN v.10 MN ii.201 (as sacchi vā k.).
    2. aorist sacch'ākāsi SN iv.63 Snp-a 166-Grd. ˚kātabba Vin i.11 SN v.422 & ˚karaṇīya (q.v.)-
    3. past participle sacchikata
    4. cp. Sanskrit sākṣāt kṛ; the Pali form being *saccha˚ (= sa3 + akṣ, as in akkhi), with change of ˚a to ˚i before kṛ ‣See also sakkhiṁ karoti
    Sacchikiriyā
    feminine
    1. realization, experiencing oath, ordeal, confirmation DN i.100 (etc.) DN i.100 DN iii.255 SN iv.254 AN i.22 AN ii.148 AN iii.101 iv.332 sq. Snp 267 Vism 696 sq. Dhs 296 Dhp-a iv.63
    from sacchikaroti
    Sajati1
    1. to let loose, send forth dismiss, give up Snp 386 Snp 390 Ja i.359 Ja v.218 (imper sajāhi); vi.185, 205
    • infin. saṭṭhuṁ (q.v.);
    • past participle saṭṭha ‣See vissaṭṭha.
    • causative sajjeti (q.v.)
    • For sajj˚ (
    • causative ) we find sañj˚; in sañjitar
    sṛj, cp. Avestan hərəƶaiti to let loose; Sanskrit sarga pouring out, sṛṣṭi emanation, creation
    Sajati2
    1. to embrace DN ii.266 (imperative saja). udakaṁ sajati to embrace the water, poet. for “to descend into the water Ja iv.448 (Text sajāti); vi.198 (Commentary = abhisiñcati), 205 (Commentary attano upari sajati i.e. sajati1
      1. abbhukkirati). On Commentary readings cp. Kern, Toev ii.51
      svaj; Dhtp 74, 549 = ajjana (?) or = sajati1?
    Sajana
    1. a kinsman Ja iv.11 (read ˚parijanaṁ)
    sa4 + jana
    Sajala
    adjective-noun
    1. watery, wet; neuter water.

      1. ˚da giving water, bringing rain (of wind) Vism 10 -dhara holding water, i, e. a cloud Vv-a 223
      sa3 + jala
    Sajāti
    feminine
    1. (being of) the same class or caste Vin i.87 Ja ii.108 (˚putta)
    sa2 + jāti
    Sajitar
    1. ‣See sañjitar
    Sajīva1
    adjective
    1. endowed with life Mhvs 11, 13
    sa3 + jīva
    Sajīva2
    1. a minister Ja vi.307 Ja vi.318 (= amacca Commentary )
    for saciva?
    Sajīvāna
    neuter at SN i.44 is metric spelling for sa-jīvana

    “same livelihood,” in phrase kiṁsu kamme s. “what is (of) the same livelihood in work, i.e. occupation?” The form is the same as jīvāna at Ja iii.353 Taken wrongly as genitive plural by Mrs. Rhys Davids in translation (Kindred Sayings i.63): “who in their work is mate to sons of men?” following Buddhaghosa’s wrong interpretation ‣See Kindred Sayings i.321 as “kammena saha jīvantānan; kammadutiyakā nāma honti.” sa2 = saṁ, + jīvana

    Sajotibhūta
    adjective
    1. flaming, ablaze, aglow DN i.95 Vin i.25 AN i.141 Ja i.232 DN-a i.264
    sa3 + joti + bhūta; same Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit , e.g. MVastu i.5
    Sajja
    adjective
    1. prepared, ready Ja i.98 ii.325; iii.271 Mil 351 Pv-a 156 Pv-a 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow-string AN iii.75
    gerundive formation from sajj = sañj causative ; cp. the exact likeness of German “fertig”
    Sajjaka
    adjective = sajja Ja iv.45 (gamana˚ ready for going, “fertig”).
    Sajjati
    1. to cling, to, to be attached SN i.38 SN i.111 (
    2. aorist 2 singular sajjittho); ii.228 AN ii.165 Ja i.376 (identical asajjittho) Snp 522 Snp 536 ppr. (a)sajjamāna (un)-attached Snp 28 Snp 466 Ja iii.352
    3. to hesitate Ja i.376 (asajjitvā without hesitation).
    4. past participle satta1
    5. cp. abhi˚ & vi˚;
    passive of sañj or saj to hang. cp. sanga
    Sajjana1
    neuter
    1. decking, equipping Thag-a 241
    from sṛj
    Sajjana2
    1. a good man Mil 321
    sat(= sant) + jana
    Sajjā
    feminine
    1. seat, couch Pv ii.128 (explanation at Pv-a 157 doubtful)
    originally gerundive of sad
    Sajjita
    1. issued, sent off; offered, prepared SN ii.186 Vin iii.137 (here in sense of “happy” sukhita Mil 244 (of an arrow: sent); Mhvs 17, 7 27, 16
    • nt. offering (= upakkhaṭa) DN-a i.294 Pv-a 107
    past participle of sajjeti
    Sajju
    adverb
    1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dāvs iii.37
    2. newly recently Dhp 71 (˚khīra; cp. Dhp-a ii.67). Sajjukam = sajju
    Sanskrit sadyaḥ, sa + dyaḥ, literally one the same day
    Sajjukaṁ = sajju
    1. : 1. quickly Mhvs 7, 6; 14, 62
    • newly Vv-a 197
    Sajjulasa
    1. resin Vin i.202
    cp. Sanskrit sarjarasa ‣See Geiger, Pali Grammar § 192
    Sajjeti
    1. to send out, prepare, give, equip; to fit up, decorate: dānaṁ to give a donation Dhp-a ii.88
    • pātheyyaṁ to prepare provisions Ja iii.343
    • gehe to construct houses Ja i.18
    • nāṭakāni to arrange ballets Ja i.59
    • yaññaṁ to set up a sacrifice Ja i.336
    • dhammasabhaṁ to equip a hall for a religious meeting Ja iii.342
    • nagaraṁ to decorate the town Ja v.212
    • paṇṇākāraṁ to send a present Ja iii.10
    • causative II sajjāpeti to cause to be given or prepared Ja i.446 Pv-a 81 cp. vissajjeti
    causative of sṛj (sajati1), Sanskrit sarjayati
    Sajjha
    neuter
    1. silver DN ii.351 (variant reading ) SN v.92 (variant reading ) AN iii.16 cp. sajjhu
    1. ˚kāra silversmith Mil 331
    cp. Sanskrit sādhya
    Sajjhāya
    1. repetition, rehearsal study DN iii.241 Vin i.133 Vin ii.194 AN iv.136 SN v.121 Ja i.116 Ja i.436 Ja ii.48 Mil 12 Kp-a 24 Vb-a 250f. ˚ṁ karoti to study DN iii.241 AN iii.22 Ja v.54
    cp. Sanskrit svādhyāya, sva + adhyāya, i.e. sa4 + ajjhaya, cp. ajjhayana & ajjhāyaka
    Sajjhāyati
    1. to rehearse, to repeat (aloud or silently), to study Ja i.435 Ja ii.273 Ja iii.216 Ja iv.64 Mil 10
    • ppr. ˚āyanto Dhp-a iii.347
    • absolutive sajjhāya SN i.202; sajjhāyitvā Ja iv.477 Ja v.450 Kp-a 97
    • causative sajjhāpeti to cause to learn, to teach Ja iii.28 (of teacher, with adhīyati, of pupil).
    • causative II. sajjhāyāpeti identical Mil 10
    denominative from sajjhāya, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit svādhyāyita Avs i.287; ii.23
    Sajjhu
    neuter
    1. silver DN ii.351 SN v.92 Ja vi.48 Mhvs 19, 4; 27, 26; 28, 33
    cp. sajjha
    Sañcaya
    1. accumulation, quantity Snp 697 Iti 17 (aṭṭhi˚) Mil 220
    from saṁ + ci
    Sañcara
    1. passage, way, medium DN-a i.289
    from saṁ + car
    Sañcaraṇa
    neuter
    1. wandering about, meeting meeting-place Ja i.163 Ja iv.335 Mil 359
    • impassable Mil 217
    from saṁ + car
    Sañcarati
    1. to go about, to wander DN i.83
    2. to meet, unite, come together Ja ii.36 (of the noose of a snare)
    3. to move, to rock Ja i.265

      • to
      • passive Ja i.491
      • causative ˚cāreti to cause to move about Mil 377 Mil 385
      • causative II. ˚carāpeti to cause to go, to emit Ja i.164 to make one’s mind dwell on Vism 187
    saṁ + carati
    Sañcaritta
    neuter
    1. going backwards & forwards, acting as go-between Vin iii.137
    2. intercourse Mil 266
    from saṁ + caritar
    Sañcāra
    1. going, movement, passing through Sdhp 244
    2. passages entrance, road Ja i.409 Ja ii.70 122
    saṁ + cāra
    Sañcalati
    1. to be unsteady or agitated Mil 117 causative ˚cāleti to shake Vin iii.127 Ja v.434

      • pp ˚calita
      saṁ + calati
    Sañcalita
    1. shaken Mil 224 (a˚)
    past participle of sañcalati
    Sañcicca
    adverb
    1. discriminately, purposely, with intention Vin ii.76 Vin iii.71 112; iv.149, 290 DN iii.133 Kvu 593 Mil 380 Pv-a 103
    absolutive of saṁ + cinteti; ch. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sañcintya Divy 494
    Sañcita
    1. accumulated, filled (with) Ja vi.249 Thag-a 282 Sdhp 319
    past participle of sañcināti
    Sañcināti
    (& saṁcayati)
    1. to accumulate; ppr. ˚cayanto Mhvs 21, 4; aorist cini˚ Pv-a 202 (puññaṁ), 279 (
    2. plural ˚cinimha).
    3. past participle sañcita

      • cp. abhi˚;
      saṁ + cināti
    Sañcinteti
    (& ˚ceteti
    1. to think, find out, plan, devise means DN ii.180 DN ii.245 (aorist samacintesuṁ); Thag 1 1103 (Pot. ˚cintaye) Ja iii.438 (
    2. aorist samacetayi)
    3. saṁ + cinteti
    Sañcuṇṇa
    1. crushed, shattered Bu ii.170 = Ja i.26
    saṁ + cuṇṇa
    Sañcuṇṇita
    1. crushed Ja ii.41 Mil 188 Vism 259
    past participle of sañcuṇṇeti
    Sañcuṇṇeti
    1. to crush Ja ii.210 Ja ii.387 (aorist ˚esi); iii.175 (Pot. ˚eyya), 176 (
    2. absolutive ˚etvā)

      • pp ˚cuṇṇita
      saṁ + cuṇṇeti
    Sañcetanā
    feminine
    1. thought, cogitation, perception, intention AN ii.159 (atta˚, para˚) DN iii.231 (identical) SN ii.11 SN ii.40 SN ii.99 (mano˚); ii.39 sq., 247; iii.60, 227 sq. Vb 285 Dhs 70 126. Sixfold (i.e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rūpa˚, sadda˚, etc.): DN ii.309 DN iii.244 Ps i.136. Threefold (viz. kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚): Vism 341, 530 Vb-a 144 145
    saṁ + cetanā
    Sañcetanika
    adjective
    1. intentional Vin iii.112 MN iii.207 AN v.292f.; a˚ MN i.377
    from sañcetanā
    Sañcetayitatta
    neuter reflection Dhs 5 72.
    Sañceteti
    1. ‣See ˚cinteti
    Sañcodita
    1. instigated, excited Pv-a 5 Pv-a 68 Pv-a 171 Pv-a 213 Thag-a 207
    saṁ + codita
    Sañcopati
    1. to move, to stir; a misunderstood term. Found in aorist samacopi (so read for Text samadhosi & variant reading samañcopi) mañcake “he stirred from his bed” SN iii.120 SN iii.125 and sañcopa (preterite) Ja v.340 (variant reading for Text sañcesuṁ āsanā; Commentary explains as “caliṁsu”)
    2. cp. Sanskrit copati, as in Mhbh. We should expect copeti in Pāli, from cup to stir
    Sañcopana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. touching, handling Vin iii.121 (ā); iv.214 (a) (= parāmasanan nāma ito c’ ito ca)
      saṁ + copana
    Sañchanna
    1. covered (with = —˚) MN i.124 Thag 1, 13 Ja i.201 Snp-a 91 (˚patta full of leaves; puppha of flowers). Often in compound paduma˚; covered with lotuses (of ponds) Pv ii.120; ii.122 Vv 441 Ja i.222 v.337
    saṁ + channa1
    Sañchavin
    1. , MN ii.217 MN ii.259
    Sañchādita
    1. covered Pv-a 157
    past participle of sañchādeti
    Sañchindati
    1. to cut, destroy MN iii.275 (Pot. ˚chindeyya) AN ii.33 = SN iii.85 (absolutive ˚chinditvā)

      • pp sañchinna
      saṁ + chindati
    Sañchinna
    1. Vin i.255 (of the kaṭhina, with samaṇḍalīkata “hemmed”). Also in compound ˚patta “with leaves destroyed” is Nd2 reading at Snp 44 (where Text ed. & Snp-a 91 read; saṁsīna, as well as at Snp 64 (in similar context, where Text ed. reads sañchinna. The latter passage is explained (Nd2 625) as “bahula-pattapalāsa saṇḍa-cchāya,” i.e. having thick & dense foliage The same meaning is attached to; sañchinna-patta at Vv-a 288 (with variant reading saṁsīna !), thus evidently in sense of sañchanna. The Commentary on Snp 64 (viz. Snp-a 117) takes it as sañchanna in introductory story
    past participle of sañchindati
    Sañjagghati
    1. to joke, to jest DN i.91 AN iv.55 AN iv.343 DN-a i.256
    saṁ + jagghati
    Sañjati
    1. is the Pali correspondent of sajati1(sṛj), but Sanskrit sañj = sajjati (to hang on, cling), which at Dhtp 67 397 def; d as saṅga. The Dhtp (64) & Dhtm (82) take; sañj in all meanings of āliṅgana (= sajati2), vissagga (= sajati1), & nimmāna (= sajjeti)
    Sañjanati
    1. to be born; only in causative ˚janeti to cause, produce; realize Pug 16 Sdhp 564 (
    2. absolutive ˚janayitvāna).
    3. past participle sañjāta ‣See also
    4. passive saṁjāyati
    5. saṁ + janati
    Sañjanana
    neuter producing;
    • feminine ˚ī progenetrix (identical with taṇhā) Dhs 1059 Dhs-a 363

    Sañjanetar
    1. one who produces SN i.191 SN iii.66
    agent noun from sañjaneti
    Sañjambhari
    1. in ˚ṁ karoti is not clear in dern & meaning; perhaps “to tease, abuse,” ‣See D i.189 (˚riyaṁ) AN i.187 SN ii.282 Probably from bhṛ; (intensive jarbhṛta Vedic! as *jarbhari ‣See on dern Konow, Journal of the Pali Text Society 1909, 42 Kern, Toevoegselen ii.69. The Commentary on SN ii.282 (Kindred Sayings ii.203 explains as “sambharitaṁ nirantaraṁ phuṭaṁ akaṁsu upari vijjhiṁsū ti,” i.e. continually touching (or nudging) (phuṭa = phuṭṭha or phoṭita)
    Sañjāta1
    1. having become, produced, arisen Dhs 1035 (+ bhūta & other synonym). ˚-full of, grown into being in a state of Snp 53 (˚khandha = susaṇṭhita˚ Snp-a 103) Vv-a 312 318 (˚gārava full of respect), 324 (˚pasāda)
    past participle of sañjanati
    Sañjāta2
    adjective
    1. of the same origin (con-gener) Ja iv.134 cp. sajāti
    sa2 + jāta
    Sañjāti
    feminine
    1. birth, origin; outcome; produce DN i.227 DN ii.305
    saṁ + jāti
    Sañjādiya
    1. a grove, wood Ja v.417 Ja v.421 (variant reading sañcāriya)
    Sañjānana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. knowing, perceiving, recognition Mil 61 DN-a i.211 characteristic, that by which one is distinguished Dhs-a 321 As feminine at Dhs 4 Dhs-a 110 140 (translationExpositor 185: “the act of perceiving by noting”)
    from sañjānāti
    Sañjānāti
    1. to recognize, perceive, know, to be aware of Vin iii.112 DN ii.12 MN i.111 MN i.473 SN iii.87 AN v.46 AN v.60 AN v.63 Ja i.135 Ja iv.194 Thag-a 110
    2. to think to suppose Ja ii.98
    3. to call, name, nickname DN i.93 Ja i.148

      • aorist sañjāni DN-a i.261
      • absolutive saññāya Ja i.187 ii.98; saññatvā MN i.1 and sañjānitvā Ja i.352

        • Caus saññāpeti (q.v.)
        • past participle saññāta
        saṁ + jānāti
    Sañjānitatta
    neuter
    1. the state of having perceived Dhs 4
    from sañjānita, past participle causative of sañjānāti
    Sañjānetar
    1. at SN iii.66 read sañjanetā
    Sañjāyati
    1. to be born or produced DN i.220 Ja ii.97 aorist sañjāyi DN ii.209 Vin i.32 ppr. ˚jāyamāna Ja v.384
    2. saṁ + jāyati, cp. sañjanati
    Sañjiṇṇa
    1. decayed Ja i.503 (variant reading )
    saṁ + jiṇṇa
    Sañjitar
    1. creator, one who assigns to each his station DN i.18 DN i.221 MN i.327 DN-a i.111 (variant reading sajjitar, cp. Sanskrit sraṣṭar)
    agent noun from sajati1, cp. sañjati
    Sañjīvana
    adjective
    1. reviving Thag-a 181 (Ap. v.23: putta˚)
    from saṁ + jīv
    Sañjhā
    feminine
    1. evening; only in compounds. ˚ātapa evening sun Vv-a 4 12; ˚ghana evening cloud Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44); Dāvs v.60
    cp. Sanskrit sandhyā
    Saññ˚
    1. ; is frequent spelling for saṁy˚; (in saṁyojana = saññojana e.g.), q.v
    Saññatta1
    neuter
    1. the state of being a saññā, perceptibility SN iii.87
    abstract formation from saññā
    Saññatta2
    1. induced, talked over Snp 303 Snp 308
    past participle of saññāpeti
    Saññatti
    feminine
    1. informing, convincing AN i.75 SN i.199 Vin ii.98 199, 307 Ja iii.402
    2. appeasing pacification MN i.320
    from saññāpeti
    Saññā
    feminine
    1. (plural saññāyo and saññā-e.g. MN i.108) 1. sense, consciousness, perception, being the third khandha Vin i.13 MN i.300 SN iii.3f. Dhs 40 58, 61, 113 Vb-a 42
    2. sense, perception, discernment recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness MN i.293 AN iii.443 (nibbāna˚) SN iii.87 Snp 732 (saññāya uparodhanā dukkhakkhayo hoti; explained as “kāmasaññā” Snp-a) Mil 61 Dhs 4 Dhs-a 110 200 (rūpa perception of material qualities)
    3. consciousness DN i.180f. MN i.108 Vb 369 (nānatta˚ c. of diversity ‣See nānatta) Mil 159 Ja iv.391 is previous to ñāṇa DN i.185 a constituent part of nāma SN ii.3 cp. Snp 779 according to later teaching differs from viññāṇa and paññā only as a child’s perceiving differs from (a) an adult’s, (b) an expert’s Vism 436 sq.; Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation 7 n 2, 17 note 2

      • nevasaññā-nāsaññā neither consciousness nor unconsciousness DN iii.224 DN iii.262f. MN i.41 MN i.160 ii.255; iii.28, 44; Ps i.36 Dhs 268 582, 1417; Kvu 202 Nett 26, 29; Vism 571
      • conception, idea, notion DN i.28 DN iii.289 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha iii.263: “concept rather than percept”) MN iii.104 SN i.107 Snp 802 Snp 841 Ja i.368 (ambaphala saññāya in the notion or imagining of mango fruit); Vism 112 (rūpa˚ & aṭṭhika˚).; saññaṁ karoti to imagine, to think Ja ii.71 to take notice, to mind Ja i.117

    4. sign, gesture token, mark Ja i.287 ii.18; paṇṇa˚ a mark of leaves Ja i.153 rajjusaññā a rope used as a mark, a guiding rope, Ja i.287 rukkha-saññaṁ pabbata-saññaṁ karonto, using trees and hills as guiding marks Ja iv.91 saññaṁ dadāti to give the sign (with the whip, for the horse to start) Ja vi.302

      • saññā is twofold, paṭighasamphassajā and adhivacanasamphassajā i.e. sense impression and recognition (impression of something similar, “association by similarity,” as when a seen person calls up some one we know), Vb 6 Vb-a 19f.; threefold, rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā and nānattasaññā AN ii.184 SN ii.211 cp. Snp 535 or kāma˚, vyāpāda˚, vihiṁsā˚ (as nānatta˚) Vb 369 cp. Vb-a 499 fivefold (pañca vimutti-paripācaniyā saññā) anicca˚, anicce dukkha˚, dukkhe anatta˚, pahāna˚ virāga˚ DN iii.243 cp. AN iii.334 there are six perceptions of rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, and dhamma DN ii.309 SN iii.60 the sevenfold perception, anicca-anatta-, asubha-, ādīnava-, pahāna-, virāga-, and nirodha-saññā, DN ii.79 cp. AN iii.79 the tenfold perception asubha-, maraṇa-, āhāre paṭikkūla-, sabbaloke anabhirata-, anicca-, anicce dukkha-, dukkhe anatta-pahāna-, virāga-, nirodha-saññā. AN v.105 the one perception āhāre paṭikkūlasaññā, Compendium 21

    5. See further (unclassified refs.): DN i.180 DN ii.277 (papañca˚) iii.33, 223 SN ii.143 AN ii.17 AN iv.312 Nd1 193 207 Nett 27; Vism 111, 437, 461 sq. (in detail) Vb-a 20 (pañca-dvārikā), 34 Vv-a 110 and on term Compendium 40 42.

      1. ˚gata perceptible, the world of sense MN i.38
      • ˚bhava conscious existence Vism 572 Vb-a 183
      • ˚maya arūpin MN i.410 (opposite manomaya = rūpin)
      • ˚vedayitanirodha cessation of consciousness and sensation MN i.160 301; iii.45 AN i.41 Kvu 202 SN ii.212
      • ˚viratta free from consciousness, an Arahant, Snp 847
      • ˚vimokkha emancipation from consciousness Snp 1071f. Mil 159 = Vin v.116
      from saṁ + jñā
    Saññāṇa
    neuter
    1. perception, knowledge Vv-a 110
    2. token, mark Ja iv.301 DN-a i.46 Vism 244
    3. monument Mhvs 19, 35.

      Vedic sañjñāna
    Saññāta
    1. skilled MN i.396
    past participle of sañjānāti
    Saññāpana
    neuter
    1. convincing Ja v.462
    from saññāpeti
    Saññāpeti
    1. to make known, to teach Ja i.344 Mil 45
    2. to remonstrate with, gain over convince DN i.236 MN i.397 AN i.75 SN iv.313 Vin i.10 ii.197 Mil 316
    3. to appease, conciliate Ja i.479 Pv-a 16 Also saññapeti Ja i.26 etc

      • infinitive saññattuṁ Snp 597
      • past participle saññatta
      • At Ja i.408 read saññāpāpetvā (instead of saññaṁ pāpetvā), or simply saññāpetvā like the parallel text at Ud 17
      causative of sañjānāti
    Saññāvant
    adjective
    1. having perception AN ii.215 = Dhs 1003
    from saññā
    Saññita
    1. so-called, named, so-to-speak Mhvs 7, 45 Pv-a 135 Sdhp 72 Sdhp 461 ‣See also aya under niraya
    = saññāta; past participle of sañjānāti
    Saññin
    adjective
    1. (feminine saññinī) conscious, being aware of (—˚), perceiving, having perception DN i.31 DN i.180 DN iii.49 111, 140, 260 SN i.62 AN ii.34 AN ii.48 AN ii.50 AN iii.35 AN iv.427 Dhp 253 Nd1 97 138

      • ālokasaññin having a clear perception DN i.71 AN ii.211 AN v.207 Sum i.211; nānatta conscious of diversity AN iv.39f.; paṭhavīsaññin conscious of the earth (kasiṇa), in samādhi. AN v.8f. paṭhavisaññiniyo (
      • feminine plur.), having a worldly mind DN ii.139 asubhasaññin perceiving the corruption of the world Iti 93 vihiṁsasaññin conscious of the trouble Vin i.7 nevasaññī-nâsaññin neither conscious nor unconscious DN iii.111 AN ii.34 Nd1 97 138 Iti 90 DN-a i.119 cp. vi˚;
      • In composition saññi˚; , e.g. ˚gabbha animate production DN i.54 DN-a i.163
      from saññā
    Saññīvāda
    1. name of a school maintaining conscious existence after death DN i.31 DN-a i.119 Mhbv.110
    saññin + vāda
    Saṭa
    1. a fall, a heap of things fallen; only in compound paṇṇa˚; a heap of fallen leaves MN i.21 (= paṇṇa-kacavara M AN i.120) Ja ii.271
    most likely = Sanskrit śada (fall), from śad to fall; Kern Toevoegselen s.v. equals it to Sanskrit sūta (or sṛta) of sṛ; (or su to run (to impel), as in ussaṭa and visaṭa. The Dhtm (789) gives a root saṭ; in meaning of “visaraṇa,” i.e. profusion, diffusion (cp. visaṭa)
    Saṭṭha
    1. dismissed; in compound —˚esana one who has abandoned all longing or research DN iii.269 (cp Dialogues of the Buddha iii.247 “has utterly given up quests”) AN ii.41 (so read for saṭh˚;)
    • saṭṭha at SN iii.84 is to be read seṭṭha, and at SN iv.298
    • saṭha
    past participle of sajati1
    Saṭṭhi
    (numeral ordinal)
    1. sixty DN i.45 DN ii.261 Snp 538 Dhp-a iii.412 (ekūna˚). It is found mostly in the same application as cha (group-number) e.g. at Ja i.64 (˚turiya-sahassāni) Vv-a 92 (identical) Ja i.87 (˚yojana); vi.512 (˚sahassa) Dhp-a i.8 17, 26, 131 (˚sakaṭa). —˚hāyana 60 years old (of elephant) MN i.229 Ja ii.343
    cp. Sanskrit ṣaṣṭi ‣See cha
    Saṭṭhuṁ
    1. at Ja vi.185 (taṁ asakkhi saṭṭhuṁ) is infinitive of sajati1 sṛj = Sanskrit sraṣṭuṁ) to dismiss, let loose. The form has caused trouble, since the Commentary explains it with gaṇhituṁ “to take.” This has induced Kern (Toevoegselen s.v. to ‣See in it a very old (even pre-Vedic!) form with *sāḍhuṁ as original. Evidently he derives it from sah (Epic Sanskrit soḍhuṁ!), as he translates it as “to master, overpower “
    Saṭha
    adjective
    1. crafty, treacherous, fraudulent DN ii.258 DN iii.246 MN i.32 MN i.153 SN iv.299 AN ii.41 AN iii.35 v.157 Dhp 252 Vin ii.89 Nd1 395 Mil 250 Dāvs ii.88 Dhp-a iii.375 Dhtp 100 (= keṭave). feminine saṭhī Pv ii.34 ‣See also kerāṭika, samaya˚, sāṭheyya
    2. cp. Sanskrit śaṭha
    Saṭhatā
    feminine
    1. craft, wickedness Pug 19
    abstract from saṭha
    Saṭhila
    adjective
    1. loose, inattentive Dhp 312
    Sanskrit śithila, which also appears as sithila, e.g. Thag 1, 277
    Saṭhesana
    1. ‣See saṭṭha
    Saṇa
    neuter
    1. a kind of hemp DN ii.350 (variant reading ) SN i.115 (do.); cp. sāṇa1 & sāṇī

    -dhovika perhaps (Kern’s suggestion) sāṇa˚ (variant reading ) visāṇa˚?

    1. name of a particular kind of gambol of elephants in water MN i.229 MN i.375 Buddhaghosa at DN-a i.84 uses the obscure term sāṇa-dhovana-kīḷā to denote a trick of Caṇḍālas. But ‣See sandhovika
    Vedic śaṇa; Latin cannabis; Anglo-Saxon haenep = English hemp; German hanf.
    Saṇati
    1. to sound, to make a noise Snp 721 (Text sanati) = Mil 414
    • sanate SN i.7 = 203 Ja vi.507 ppr. saṇanto Snp 720 (Text n)
    svan; Indogermanic *sṷenō = Latin sono, Anglo-Saxon swin music, swinsian to sing; Old High German swan = swan
    Saṇiṁ
    adverb
    1. softly, gradually Snp 350 Mhvs 25, 84
    cp. Sanskrit śanaiḥ
    Saṇikaṁ
    adverb
    1. slowly, gently, gradually DN ii.333 MN i.120 SN i.82 SN i.203 Ja i.9 Ja i.292 Ja ii.103 Mil 117 DN-a i.197 Dhp-a i.60 389 Vv-a 36 178
    from last
    Saṇṭha
    1. a reed (used for bow-strings) MN i.429 Santhapeti & thapeti;
    Saṇṭhapeti
    ˚ṭhāpeti;
    1. to settle, to establish AN ii.94 (cittaṁ) SN iv.263 Ja i.225 Pv-a 196–⁠2. to call to order DN i.179 (˚āp˚)
    2. to adjust, fold up Ja i.304
    causative of santiṭṭhati
    Saṇṭhahana
    neuter
    1. recreation Vism 420 sq
    from santiṭṭhati
    Saṇṭhāti
    1. ‣See santiṭṭhati
    Saṇṭhāna
    neuter
    1. configuration, position; composition, nature, shape, form Vin ii.76 MN i.120 (spelt ˚nth˚) AN i.50 AN iv.190 (Commentary osakkana) Mil 270 316, 405 Ja i.71 Ja i.291 Ja i.368 Ja ii.108 Vism 184, 225, 243 Dhs-a 321 DN-a i.88 (nth) Snp-a 464 (= linga). su˚; well formed Snp 28
    2. adjective (—˚) having the appearance of megha-vaṇṇa˚ Pv-a 251
    3. chavi˚ appearance of the skin Ja i.489
    4. vaṇṇa˚ outward semblance Nett 27 Ja i.271
    5. sarīra˚ the (material) body Vism 193
    6. fuel Ja ii.330 = iv.471
    7. (usually spelt ˚nth˚) a resting place meeting place, public place (market) (cp. Sanskrit sansthāna in this meaning). At SN i.201 in phrase nadī-tīresu saṇṭhāne sabhāsu rathiyāsu (i.e. at all public places) SN i.201 reads saṇṭhāne (variant reading santhāne); cp. Kindred Sayings i.256 from Commentary “a resting place (vissamana-ṭṭhāne) near the city gate, when market-wares had been brought down, translation “resting by the gates.” This stanza is quoted at Snp-a 20 where the ed. prefers reading panthāne as correct reading (variant reading saṇṭhāne). At MN i.481 (˚nth˚) SN ii.28 (2 from b.), it seems to be used in the sense of “end stopping, cessation” = AN iv.190 (the editions of SN and AN have saṇṭhāna). At Ja vi.113 it is translated by “market place,” the comparative saṇṭhāna-gata being explained by the Comm. by saṇṭhāna-mariyādaṁ gatā, but at Ja vi.360

      • saṇṭhāna-gata is by the English translator translated “a wealthy man” vinicchaye ṭhito, Commentary ), which however, ought to be “in the court house” (cp. vinicchaya-ṭṭhāna), i.e. publicly. In both places there is also variant reading santhāna—˚
      from saṁ + sthā
    Saṇṭhita
    1. established in (—˚), settled, composed Snp 330 (santi-soracca-samādhi˚); Sdhp 458
    2. su˚ firmly or well established Snp 755 Mil 383 in a good position, well situated Dhs-a 65
    3. being composed (as), being of the nature of (—˚), ullumpanasabhāva˚; of a helping disposition DN-a i.177 Pv-a 35
    past participle of santiṭṭhati
    Saṇṭhiti
    feminine
    1. stability, firmness SN v.228 Dhs 11 Vism 206 Dhs-a 143 Sdhp 460
    2. fixing settling Mil 144
    from santiṭṭhati
    Saṇḍa
    1. a heap, cluster, multitude; a grove (vana˚ DN i.87 SN iii.108 Vin i.23 Ja i.134 (vana˚); satta˚ teeming with beings Iti 21
    • Jambu˚ name of Jambudīpa Snp 352 = Th 1, 822 (variant reading ˚maṇḍa, which Kern considers to be the correct reading ‣See Toevoegselen ii.67)
    • saṇḍa˚cārin swarming DN i.166 = M i.77 = AN ii.206
    dialectical; Dhtm 157: gumb’ attha-m-īraṇe; cp. Sanskrit ṣaṇḍa
    Saṇḍāsa
    1. (long) pincers, tweezers AN i.210 Ja i.223 Ja iii.138 used to pull out hair MN ii.75 Vin ii.134 Sannika (sanika)
    saṁ + ḍaṁsa, from ḍasati
    Saṇṇikā (saṇikā)
    1. an elephant-driver’s hook Ja i.445 (so read for paṇṇ˚;)
    cp. saṇi = Sanskrit sṛṇi
    Saṇha
    adjective
    1. smooth, soft Vin i.202 Vin ii.151 Vv 5018 (= mudu Vv-a 213); Vism 260 = KhA 59 saṇhena softly Thag 1, 460
    2. gentle, mild DN ii.259 Snp 853 Ja i.202 Ja i.376 Nd1 234 Pv-a 56 Pv-a 215. Of speech (opposite pharusa harsh) MN i.126 AN iii.196 Dhs 1343 3. delicate, exquisite Thag 2, 258 262, 264, 268. cp. pari˚
      1. ˚karaṇī “a wooden instrument for smoothing the ground, or a sort of trowel,” Abhp 1007 Ja iv.250 (loc ˚iyaṁ piṁsito); iv.4 (˚ī viya tilāni piṁsamānā); v.271 vi.114 (asani viya viravanto ˚iyaṁ viya piṁsanto); cp. Kp-a 59; thus it seems to mean also a sort of instrument for oil-pressing, or a mortar
      cp. Sanskrit ślakṣṇa
    Saṇhaka
    1. , at Ja iii.394 (of hair growing white “saṇhakasadisā”) according to Kern, Toevoegselen ii.69 (coarse) hempen cloth (= sāṇavāka, as indicated by variant reading sāṇalāka. Thus a derived from saṇa = sāṇa. Kern compares Pali tuṇhīra tūṇīra; Sanskrit śaṇa = śāṇaka. According to Andersen Pāli Glossary “betelnut” (= saṇha)
    Saṇheti
    1. to brush down, smooth (kese): only as compound ; at Vin ii.107 Ja iv.219
    causative from saṇha
    Sata1
    (numeral cardinal)
    1. a hundred, used as nt (collect.), either—˚ or as apposition, viz. gāma-sataṁ a hundred (ship of) villages Dhp-a i.180 jaṭila-satāni.100 ascetics Vin i.24 jāti˚ DN i.13 or gāthā sataṁ 100 stanzas Dhp 102
    • Often in sense of “many” or “innumerable,” e.g. ˚kaku, ˚raṁsi, etc.; cp. ˚satāni bahūni Ja iv.310 Ja iv.311
    1. ˚kaku having a hundred corners, epithet of a cloud AN iii.34 = SN i.100 (variant reading sattakatu) ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891–⁠93 p. 5
    2. ˚patta the Indian crane (or woodpecker?) Ja ii.153 388 Mil 404
    • ˚padī a centipede AN ii.73 AN iii.101 AN iii.306 iv.320; v.290 Vin ii.110 148 Mil 272
    • ˚pala (Th 1 97) ‣See pala
    • ˚pāka (-tela) oil mixture, worth 100 pieces Ja iv.281 Dhp-a ii.48 Dhp-a iii.311 ‣See also pāka
    • ˚puñña 100, i.e. innumerable merits Vism 211
    • ˚pupphā Anethum sowa, a sort of dill or fennel Ja vi.537
    • ˚porisa of the height of a hundred men, extremely high, attribute of a hell Vv.52, 12 sq.; name of a hell Ja v.269
    • ˚mūlī Asparagus racemosus Abhp 585
    • ˚raṁsi “having 100 rays,” the sun Sdhp 590 Ja i.44
    • ˚rasabhojana food of 100 flavours Dhp-a iii.96 (variant reading all
    • passive satta˚) -vaṅka a kind of fish Abhp 672
    • ˚vallikā an under-garment arranged like a row of jewelry Vin ii.137
    • ˚sahassa one hundred thousand Ja ii.20 Mil 88 136 Dhp-a ii.86
    • ˚sahassima identical SN ii.133
    Vedic śataṁ; cp. Avestan satəm, Latin centum; Gothic hund = hundred; Indogermanic *kmtóm from dkm̊tóm (= decem), thus ultimately the same as daśa, i.e. decad (of tens)
    Sata2
    1. remembering, mindful, conscious DN i.37 DN ii.94 iii.49, 107, 222, 269 MN i.520 (su-ssata & dus-sata) SN iv.211 AN iii.169 (+ sampajāna), 325; iv.311 Snp 741 Dhs 163 DN-a i.211
    • satokārin cultivator of sati Ps i.175
    past participle of sarati, of smṛ; , cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit smṛta Avs i.228; ii.197
    Sataka
    neuter
    1. a hundred, collection of 100 Ja i.74
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śataka
    Satakkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. a hundred times
    cp. dvi-kkhattuṁ, ti-kkhattuṁ etc.
    Satata
    adjective
    1. continual, chronic. Only in neuter satataṁ (
    2. adverb ) continually AN iv.14 Iti 116 Snp 507 Mil 70 Pv ii.811 (= nirantaraṁ Pv-a 110); iii.710 (= sabbakālaṁ Pv-a 207) Pv-a 177 and as ˚-in ˚vihāra a chronic state of life, i.e. a behaviour remaining even & the same AN ii.198 = DN iii.250 DN iii.281 cp. sātacca
    3. with satrā “completely” & sadā “always” to sa˚ “one” ‣See saṁ˚; literally “in one (continuous stretch”
    Satadhā
    adverb
    1. in 100 ways, into 100 pieces DN ii.341
    sata + dhā, cp. ekadhā, dvidhā etc.
    Sati
    feminine
    1. memory, recognition, consciousness, DN i.180 DN ii.292 Mil 77–⁠80 intentness of mind, wakefulness of mind, mindfulness alertness, lucidity of mind, self-possession, conscience self-consciousness DN i.19 DN iii.31 DN iii.49 DN iii.213 DN iii.230 DN iii.270f. AN i.95 Dhs 14 Nd1 7; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61 Vb-a 91 Dhs-a 121 Mil 37
    • upaṭṭhitā sati presence of mind DN iii.252 DN iii.282 287 SN ii.231 AN ii.6 AN ii.218 AN iii.199 AN iv.232 Iti 120
    • parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhāpetuṁ to surround oneself with watchfulness of mind MN iii.89 Vin i.24 satiṁ paccupaṭṭhāpetuṁ to preserve self-possession Ja i.112 iv.215; kāyagatā sati intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things MN iii.89 AN i.43 SN i.188 Mil 248 336; muṭṭhasati forgetful, careless DN iii.252 DN iii.282
    • maraṇasati mindfulness as to death AN iv.317f. Ja iv.216 Snp-a 54 Pv-a 61 Pv-a 66. asati not thinking of, forgetfulness Dhs-a 241 instrumental asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin ii.2892. sati (sammā˚) is one of the constituents of the 8-fold Ariyan Path (e g. AN iii.141f. Vb-a 120) ‣See magga 2.

      1. ˚ādhipateyya (sat˚) dominant mindfulness AN ii.243f. Iti 40
      • ˚indriya the sense, faculty, of mindfulness AN ii.149 Dhs 14
      • ˚uppāda arising, production of recollection Ja i.98 AN ii.185 MN i.124
      • ˚ullapakāyika, a class of devas SN i.16f. -paṭṭhāna Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit smṛty'upasthāna Divy 126 Divy 182, 208
        1. intent contemplation and mindfulness earnest thought, application of mindfulness there are four satipaṭṭhānas, referring to the body, the sensations, the mind, and phenomena respectively DN ii.83 DN ii.290f.; iii.101 sq., 127, 221 MN i.56 MN i.339 ii.11 etc. AN ii.218 AN iii.12 AN iv.125f. 457 sq.; v.175 SN iii.96 SN iii.153 SN v.9 SN v.166 Dhs 358 Kvu 155 (cp. Kvu translation 104 sq.) Nd1 14 45, 325, 340; Vism 3 Vb-a 57 214 sq., 417
        • See on term e.g. Compendium 179; and in greater detail Dialogues of the Buddha ii.322 sq
        • ˚vinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk’s own conscience Vin i.325 Vin ii.79 etc. MN ii.247 AN i.99
        • ˚vepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin ii.79
        • ˚saṁvara restraint in mindfulness Vism 7 Dhs-a 351 Snp-a 8
        • ˚sampajañña mindfulness and self-possession DN i.70 AN ii.210 DN-a i.183f. -sambojjhaṅga (e. g SN v.90) ‣See (sam)bojjhanga
        • ˚sammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention DN i.19 Vin ii.114 DN-a i.113 Pug 32 Vism 63 Mil 266
        Vedic smṛti ‣See etymology under sarati2
    Satika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. consisting of a hundred, belonging to a hundred; yojanasatika extending one hundred yojanas Vin ii.238 vīsaṁvassasatika of hundred and twenty years’ standing Vin ii.303
    from sata1
    Satitā
    feminine
    1. mindfulness, memory Dhs-a 405 (—˚)
    abstract formation from sati
    Satima
    adjective
    1. the hundredth SN ii.133 Ja i.167 (pañca˚)
    superl. formn from sata1
    Satimant
    adjective
    1. mindful, thoughtful, contemplative, pensive; nominative singular satimā DN i.37 SN i.126 Snp 174 AN ii.35 Dhs 163 Dhp-a iv.117 Pv iv.344; satīmā (in verse) Snp 45 neuter satīmaṁ Snp 211 genitive satimato SN i.208
    2. satīmato SN i.81 Dhp 24 nominative
    3. plural satīmanto DN ii.120 Dhp 91 Dhp-a ii.170 genitive satīmataṁ Dhp 181 Iti 35
    4. satimantānaṁ AN i.24

      • ‣ See also DN iii.77 DN iii.141 221 sq. AN iv.4 AN iv.38 AN iv.300f. 457 sq. Nd1 506 Nd2 629
      from sati
    Satī
    feminine
    1. being Ja iii.251
    2. a good or chaste woman Abhp 237; asatī an unchaste woman Mil 122 = J iii.350 Ja v.418 Ja vi.310
    from sant, ppr. of as
    Satekiccha
    adjective
    1. curable, pardonable Mil 192 Mil 221 Vism 425 ‣See tekiccha
    sa3 + tekiccha
    Sateratā
    feminine
    1. lightning Ja v.14 Ja v.203 Also as sateritā Vv 333 644 Vv-a 161 (= vijjulatā), 277. As saderitā at Thag 1, 260
    cp. Sanskrit śatahradā, śata + hrada
    Satta1
    1. hanging, clinging or attached to Vin i.185 DN ii.246 Nd1 23 24 Dhp 342 Ja i.376 cp. āsatta1 & byāsatta;
    past participle of sañj : sajjati
    Satta2
    1. masculine a living being, creature, a sentient & rational beiṅg, a person; DN i.17 DN i.34 DN i.53 DN i.82 ii.68 AN i.35f. 55 sq. SN i.135 SN v.41 Vin i.5 Mil 273 Vism 310 (definition : “rūp'ādisu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattā ti sattā,” thus = satta1); Nett 161 DN-a i.51 161 Vb-a 144
    2. naraka˚ a being in purgatory (cp. niraya˚) Vism 500
    3. neuter soul (= jīvita or viññāṇa) Pv i.81 (gata˚ = vigata-jīvita Pv-a 40). 3.
    4. neuter substance Vin i.287
    5. nissatta non-substantial phenomenal Dhs-a 38
      1. ˚āvāsa abode of sentient beings ‣See nava1 2 DN iii.263 268 AN v.53 Vism 552 Vb-a 168
      • ˚ussada ‣See ussada 4 teeming with life, full of people DN i.87 DN i.111 131
      • ˚loka the world of living creatures Snp-a 263 442 Vism 205 ‣See also saṅkhāra-loka

        • vaṇijjā slave trade DN-a i.235 = AN iii.208 (Commentary manussa-vikkaya)
        cp, Vedic sattva living being, satvan “strong man, warrior,” from sant
    Satta3
    1. cursed, sworn Ja iii.460 Ja v.445
    past participle of sapati to curse; Sanskrit śapta
    Satta4
    numeral
    1. number seven. It is a collective and concluding (serial) number its application has spread from the week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus From time-expressions it was transferred to space, esp when originally connected with time (like satta-bhūmaka the 7-storied palace; the Vimānas with 700 towers ‣See vimāna 2 & 6; or the 7 great lakes ‣See sara3; ˚yojana 7 miles, cp. the 7 league-boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days’ festivals, dragon with 7 heads, 7 ravens 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). For time expressions ‣See in compounds.: ˚āha, ˚māsa, ˚ratta ˚vassa. cp. Snp 446 (vassāni) Ja ii.91 (kāyā, thick masses) DN-a i.25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi māsehi sangītaṁ) Dhp-a ii.34 (dhanāni), 101 (mangalā) the collective expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at Ja v.48 the 7X70 ñāṇavatthūni SN ii.59 and the curious enumeration of heptads at DN i.54
    • Cases: instr sattahi DN i.34 genitive sattannaṁ DN i.56
    • locative sattasu DN ii.303 = M i.61
    1. ˚ aṅga a couch with 7 members (i.e. four legs, head support, foot support, side) Vin ii.149
    • ˚aṭṭha seven or eight Ja ii.101
    • ˚āgārika a “seven-houser,” one who turns back from his round, as soon as he has received alms at 7 houses DN i.166
    • ˚ālopika a “seven-mouthful, one who does not eat more than 7 bits DN i.166
    • ˚āha
    • neuter seven days, a week of 7 days cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saptaka Divy 99
      1. DN ii.248 Vin i.1 139 Ja i.78 Ja ii.85 Ja iv.360 v.472; vi.37 Dhp-a i.109 Vv-a 63 satta˚ 7 weeks Dhp-a i.86 cp. satta-satta-divasā Ja v.443
      • ˚ussada ‣See ussada 2 having 7 prominences or protuberances (on the body), a sign of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.151 (i.e. on both hands, on both feet, on both shoulders, on the back)
      • ˚guṇa sevenfold Mhvs 25, 36
      • ˚jaṭa with seven plaits (of hair) Ja v.91 (of a hunter)
      • ˚tanti having 7 strings, a lute Vv-a 139
      • ˚tāla (-matta) (as big as 7 palm trees Dhp-a ii.62 100
      • ˚tiṁsa 37 ‣See bodhipakkhiya-dhammā
      • ˚dina a week Mhvs 11, 23
      • ˚pakaraṇika mastering the 7 books of the Abhidhamma Ja i.312 Dhp-a iii.223
      • ˚patiṭṭha sevenfold firm DN ii.174 Mil 282
      • ˚padaṁ for 7 steps Ja vi.351 (Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. “unfailing”)
      • ˚bhūmaka (pāsāda) (a palace) with 7 stories Mhvs 37, 11 Ja i.58 Ja iv.378 Dhp-a i.180 239 iv.209
      • ˚māsaṁ (for) seven months Pv-a 20
      • ˚yojanika 7 miles in extent Ja v.484
      • ˚ratana the 7 royal treasures DN i.88 Iti 15 Ja v.484
      • ˚ratta a week Ja vi.230 (dve˚ a fortnight), 304 Snp 570
      • ˚vassika 7 years old Mil 9 Mil 310 Dhp-a ii.87 89 (sāmaṇera), 139 Pv-a 53 (Sankicca arahattaṁ patvā) Dhp-a iii.98 (kumāro arahattaṁ patto) Ja v.249 On the age of seven as that of child arahants ‣See Mrs. Rhys Davids in Psalms of the Brethren introduction xxx
      • ˚vīsati twenty seven Dhp-a i.4
      cp. Vedic sapta, Latin septem, Gothic sibun = English seven etc.
    Sattakkhattuṁ
    adverb
    1. seven times Vin i.3 Iti 18 sattakkhattuparamaṁ seven times at the utmost; ˚parama one who will not be reborn more than seven times SN ii.134f. AN i.233 AN i.235 AN iv.381 Kvu 104 Pug 15f.; Nett 189; Kp-a 187 Ja i.239 Dhp-a iii.61 63
    cp. tikkhattuṁ etc.
    Sattati
    1. seventy DN ii.256 Ap 118, 126 & passim As sattari at SN ii.59 Ap 248 & passim
    cp. Sanskrit saptati
    Sattatta
    neuter
    1. state of having existence DN i.29
    abstract from satta2
    Sattadhā
    adverb
    1. in seven pieces DN i.94 DN ii.235 Snp 783 Ja v.33 Ja v.493 Dhp-a i.17 41. cp. phalati. Sattapanni-rukkha
    from satta4, cp. dvidhā
    Sattapaṇṇi-rukkha
    1. name of a tree Mhvs 30, 47; cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā name of a cave Kp-a 95
    Sattama1
    adjective
    1. best, excellent Snp 356 Ja i.233
    superl. from sant
    Sattama2
    (numeral ordinal)
    1. the seventh DN i.89 Snp 103 feminine ˚mī Snp 437 Often in
    2. locative ˚divase on the 7th day Snp 983 Ja i.395 Mil 15 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 74. —˚bhavika one who has reached the 7th existence (or rebirth Kvu 475 (cp. translation 2714)
    3. from satta4
    Sattarasa
    (numeral cardinal)
    1. seventeen Vin i.77 Vin iv.112 (˚vaggiyā bhikkhū, group of 17)
    satta4 + rasa2 = dasa
    Sattari
    1. = sattati, at SN ii.59f.
    Sattali
    feminine [cp. Sanskrit saptalā, name of various plants, e.g. jasmine, or many-flowered nykkanthes, Halāy. 2, 52 the plantain, and its flower Ja iv.440 (= kadali- puppha Commentary ; so read for kandala˚); and perhaps at Thag 2, 260 for pattali (q.v.), which is explained as kadali (-makula) at Thag-a 211
    Sattava = satta2
    1. Ja v.351 cp. Lal. Vist. 520
    a diaeretic sattva
    Satti1
    feminine
    1. ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathā satti as much as one can do according to one’s ability cp. i.106 Dhp-a i.399 or yathā sattiṁ DN i.102 or y. sattiyā Dhp-a i.92
    from śak, cp. Vedic śakti
    Satti2
    feminine
    1. knife, dagger, sword AN iv.130 Ja ii.153 Vism 313 (dīgha-daṇḍa˚ with a long handle) Dhp-a i.189 Dhp-a ii.134 (tikhiṇa˚ a sharp knife). mukha˚; piercing words Ja i.341
    2. a spear, javelin SN i.13 AN ii.117 Ja i.150
      1. ˚pañjara lattice work of spears DN ii.164
      • ˚laṅghana javelin dance Ja i.430
      • ˚simbali-vana the forest of swords (in purgatory) Ja v.453
      • ˚sūla a sword stake often in simile ˚ûpamā kāmā SN i.128 AN iii.97 Vism 341 Also name of a purgatory Ja v.143f.
      cp. Vedic śakti, originally identical with satti1
    Sattika
    1. ‣See tala˚;
    Sattu1
    1. an enemy Ja v.94 (accusative plural sattavo); Vism 234 (˚nimmathana)
    2. Vedic śatru
    Sattu2
    barley-meal, flour Vin ii.116 (satthu) Nd1 372 Ja iii.343f.; Pv iii.13 Dhs 646
    1. ˚āpaṇa baker’s shop Ja vi.365
    • ˚pasibbaka flour sack ˚bhasta identical Ja iii.346
    cp. Sanskrit śaktu
    Sattuka
    1. an enemy Ja iii.154 Mhvs 32, 18
    from sattu1
    Sattha1
    neuter
    1. a weapon, sword, knife; collective “arms” DN i.4 DN i.56 Snp 309 Snp 819 (explained as 3: kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚, referring to AN iv.42 at Nd1 151) Ja i.72 Ja i.504 Pv iii.102 Snp-a 458 (˚mukhena) Pv-a 253 Often in combination daṇḍa + sattha (cp daṇḍa 4), collective for “arms,” Vin i.349 DN i.63 AN iv.249 Nd2 576
    • satthaṁ āharati to stab oneself SN i.121 SN iii.123; iv.57 sq
    1. ˚kamma application of the knife, incision, operation Vin i.205 Snp-a 100
    • ˚kāraka an assassin Vin iii.73
    • ˚vaṇijjā trade in arms AN iii.208
    • ˚hāraka an assassin Vin iii.73 SN iv.62
    cp. Vedic śastra, from śas to cut
    Sattha2
    neuter
    1. a science, art, lore Mil 3 Snp-a 327 447
    • vāda˚ science of right belief Snp-a 540
    • sadda˚ grammar Snp-a 266 supina dream-telling Snp-a 564
    cp. Vedic śāstra, from śās to teach
    Sattha3
    a caravan DN ii.130 DN ii.339 Vin i.152 292 Nd1 446 Dhp 123 (appa˚ with a small c.) Mil 351
    1. ˚gamanīya (magga) a caravan road Vin iv.63
    • ˚vāsa encampment DN ii.340 DN ii.344
    • ˚vāsika & ˚vāsin; caravan people Ja i.333
    • ˚vāha a caravan leader, a merchant DN ii.342 Vv 847 (cp. Vv-a 337); leader of a band teacher; used as epithet of the Buddha SN i.192 Iti 80 108 Vin i.6 In exegesis of term Satthā at Nd1 446 = Nd2 630 = Vism 208
    sa3 + attha; Sanskrit sārtha
    Sattha4
    1. told, taught Ja ii.298 (variant reading siṭṭha)
    past participle of sāsati; śās
    Sattha5
    adjective
    1. able, competent Ja iii.173 (= samattha Commentary )
    wrong for satta = śakta
    Sattha6
    1. breathed ‣See vissattha
    cp. Sanskrit śvasta, śvas
    Satthaka1
    neuter
    1. a knife, scissors Vin ii.115 (daṇḍa˚, with a handle) Ja v.254 (as one of the 8 parikkhāras) Mil 282
    • aya˚ at Ja v.338 read ˚paṭṭaka.

      -nisādana cp. Sanskrit niśātana

      1. knife-sharpening Dhp-a i.308 cp. Mil 282
      • ˚nisāna = Sanskrit niśāna
        1. ˚vāta a cutting pain AN i.101 = 307 Ja iii.445
        from sattha1
    Satthaka2
    adjective
    1. belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant Pv-a 274
    from sattha3
    Satthar
    1. teacher, master. nominative satthā DN i.49 Snp 179
    2. accusative satthāraṁ DN i.163 Snp 153 Snp 343 instrumental satthārā DN i.163 instrumental satthunā Mhvs 32, 19; genitive satthu DN i.110 Iti 79 Vin i.12 genitive satthuno DN ii.128 Snp 547 Snp 573 locative satthari Dhs 1004 nominative and
    3. accusative plural satthāro DN i.230 AN i.277 Mil 4 genitive
    4. plural satthārānaṁ Ja i.509
    5. See e. g DN i.230 AN i.277 Vin i.8 Thag 2, 387
    6. The 6 teachers (as in detail at DN i.52–⁠59 & various places) are Pūraṇa Kassapa, Makkhali Gosāla, Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, Ajita-Kesakambalī
    7. teachers at Vin ii.186 AN iii.123
    8. at DN i.230 AN i.277 The Master par excellence is the Buddha DN i.110 ii.128; iii.119 sq. AN iii.248 AN iv.120 AN iv.460 Snp 153 Snp 545 Snp 955 ‣See exegesis in detail at Nd1 446 = Nd2 630 1148 Vism 389, 401, 604

      • gaṇa-satthar leader of a company Ja ii.41 Ja ii.72
      • satthāra-dassana sight of the Master Snp-a 49
      • satthu-d-anvaya successor of the M. Snp 556
      Venic śāstṛ, agent noun from śās
    Satthi1
    1. (neuter &
    2. feminine )

      1. the thigh Vin ii.161 Thag 1, 151 Vv 8117 Ja ii.408 Ja iii.83 Ja vi.528
      • antarā˚ between the thighs AN ii.245
      cp. Sanskrit sakthi
    Satthika
    adjective
    1. belonging to a caravan DN ii.344
    from sattha3
    Satthu
    1. ‣See sattu2; satthu˚ ‣See satthar
    Satthuka
    "having a teacher,” in atīta˚;
    1. whose teacher is dead DN ii.154
    belonging to the whole compound
    Satthuna
    1. a friend Ja i.365
    ?
    Satthuvaṇṇa
    1. gold (literally the colour of the Master) Vin iii.238 240
    satthar˚ + vaṇṇa
    Sathera
    adjective
    1. including the Theras AN ii.169
    sa3 + thera
    Sadattha
    1. the highest good, ideal DN ii.141 MN i.4 AN v.207f. Dhp 166 Mhvs 3, 24. It may be taken as sa4 + attha (with euphonic-d-, i.e. one’s own good, as it is explained by Buddhaghosa at Dhp-a iii.160 (“sake atthe”), & adopted in translation at Dialogues of the Buddha ii.154
    sat (= sant) + attha
    Sadatthuta
    adjective
    1. always praised Ja iv.101 (= nicca-pasattha Commentary )
    sadā + thuta
    Sadara
    adjective
    1. fearful, unhappy AN ii.172 MN i.280 MN i.465 = DN iii.57 (reads dd
    sa3 + dara
    Sadasa
    1. a squatting mat with a fringe Vin iv.171
    sa + dasā
    Sadassa
    1. a horse of good breed AN i.289
    sat(= sant) + assa
    Sadā
    adverb
    1. always Snp 1041 Snp 1087 Snp 1119 Nd2 631 (where long stereotype definition) Dhp 79 Pv ii.811 (= sabbakālaṁ yāvajīvaṁ Pv-a 110); ii.937 (= sabbakālaṁ divase divase sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv-a 127) iv.130
    1. ˚matta “always revelling,” name of a palace Ja i.363 sq (cp. Divy 603); a class of devas DN ii.260
    from saṁ˚
    Sadisa
    adjective
    1. similar, like, equal DN ii.261 SN iii.48f. AN i.125 = Pug 35 Vin i.8 Ja i.191 Dhs 116 Vism 543 = Vb-a 148 cp. sādisa
    sa2 + disa = dṛśa
    Saderita
    1. ‣See saterita
    Sadevaka
    adjective
    1. together with the devas, with the deva world DN i.62 DN iii.76 DN iii.135 Snp 86 Vin i.8 11 Dhp 44 DN-a i.174 At Ja i.14
    • sadevake (
    • locative ) is used in the sense of “in the world of men & gods.”
    sa3 + deva + ka
    Sadevika
    adjective
    1. together with his queen Mhvs 33, 70
    sa3 + devī + ka
    Sadda
    1. sound, noise DN i.79 DN i.152 DN iii.102f. 146, 234 244 sq., 269, 281 MN iii.56 MN iii.267 AN iii.30f.; iv.91, 248 Ja i.3 (ten sounds) Snp 71 Vism 408 (various kinds) Dhs 621 (udaka˚) Dhp-a ii.7 (udrīyana˚); defined at Vism 446 (“sota-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇa,” etc.) & at Vb-a 45 (“sappatī ti saddo, udāhariyatī ti attho”)
    2. voice Ja ii.108
    3. word Vin i.11 Iti 114 Dhp-a i.15 (itthi˚) Vb-a 387 (in nirutti) Snp-a 261 318, 335.

      1. ˚kovida a grammarian or phonetician Snp-a 321
      • ˚dhātu element of sound Dhs 707
      • ˚naya science of grammar, etymology Kp-a 107
      • ˚bheda word analysis Vism 519 sq
      • ˚vidū a grammarian Snp-a 169
      • ˚vedhin shooting by sound Mhvs 23, 85
      • ˚sattha science of words, grammar Snp-a 266
      • ˚siddhi analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation Snp-a 304 551
      cp. late Vedic śabda; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śabda as nt. at Avs i.3
    Saddana
    neuter
    1. making a noise Dhtm 401
    from śabd ‣See saddāyati
    Saddala
    adjective
    1. grassy Thag 1, 211 Ja i.87 Ja vi.518 Mil 286 Pv ii.1210 (= taruṇa-tiṇa Pv-a 158)
    cp. Sanskrit śādvala
    Saddahati
    1. to believe, to have faith DN ii.115 244 SN iii.225 Pv ii.83 Ja v.480 Dhp-a ii.27 ppr saddahanto DN-a i.81 Pv-a 148 (a˚), 151 (a˚), 285; ; saddahāna SN i.20 SN i.214 Snp 186 Iti 112 Pot. saddheyya Ja ii.446 (= saddaheyya Commentary ); 2nd plural saddahetha Ja iii.192 3rd
    2. plural saddheyyuṁ SN ii.255 At Ja vi.575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation in the sense of “I wonder” (cp. maññe)

      • saddahase at Pv iv.81 is to be read saddāyase ‣See saddāyati.
      • gerundive saddhātabba Ja ii.37 Ja v.480 Pv-a 217
      • saddahātabba DN ii.346
      • saddahitabba Mil 310
      • saddheyya Vin iii.188 and saddhāyitabba (
      • causative !) Pv-a 109 A
      • causative
      • aorist 2 sg is (mā) … saddahesi Ja vi.136140-
      • absolutive saddhāya Ja v.176 (= saddahitvā Commentary ); infinitive saddhātuṁ Ja v.445
      • past participle (
      • causative ) saddhāyita.
      • causative II. saddahāpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot. ˚dahāpeyya Ja vi.575 Pv iv.125;
      • future ˚dahāpessati Ja i.294
      Vedic śrad-dhā, only in impersonal forms gerundive śrad-dadhāna;
    3. past participle śrad-dhita; infinitive śrad-dhā; cp. Av ƶraƶ-dā identical; Latin cred-(d)o (cp. “creed”); Old Irish cretim to believe. From Indogermanic *kred (= cord˚ heart) + *dhe, literally to put one’s heart on
    Saddahanā
    feminine
    1. believing, trusting, having faith Nd2 632 Dhs 12 25; Nett 15, 19 Dhp-a i.76
    from sad + dhā
    Saddāyati
    1. cp. Epic Sanskrit śabdayati & śabdāyati] 1. to make a sound Mil 258 Pv iv.81 (saddāyase read for saddahase); iv.161 (identical) Ud 61 (˚āyamāna noisy)
    • to call, summon (with
    • accusative ) Ja iii.288
    • denominative from sadda; i.e. śabd
    Saddita
    1. sounded, called Sdhp 100
    past participle of śabd; cp. saddāyati
    Saddūla
    1. a leopard Mil 23
    cp. Sanskrit śārdūla
    Saddha1
    adjective
    1. believing faithful DN i.171 SN i.43 SN ii.159f. AN i.150 AN ii.164 227 sq.; iii.3 sq., 34, 182; iv.38, 145, 314 sq.; v.10 sq. 124 sq. Snp 188 Snp 371 Dh. 8 Pv i.104 iv.186 Dhp-a ii.82
    2. as(s)addha unbelieving Pv-a 42 Pv-a 54 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 243 passim ‣See a˚
    3. credulous Snp 853 Dhp 97
    originally adjective of saddha2, but felt to be adjective of saddhā; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śrāddha Avs i.83, 383
    Saddha2
    1. ; a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected with meals and gifts to the brahmins DN i.97 AN i.166 AN v.269 AN v.273 DN-a i.267 saddhaṁ pamuñcati to give up offerings, to abandon Brahmanism Vin i.7 DN ii.39 Snp 1146 The word is neuter according to Abhp and. AN v.269–⁠273;
    2. locative ˚e, DN i.97 Ja ii.360 kaṁ saddhaṁ (
    3. accusative in a gāthā) seems to be
    4. feminine ; Commentary ib. 360 has saddhā-bhattaṁ, a funeral repast (variant reading saddha—˚) Thus it seems to be confused with saddhā
    5. cp. Epic Sanskrit & Sūtra literature śrāddha, from śrad-dhā
    Saddhamma
    1. the true dhamma, the best religion, good practice, the “doctrine of the good” (so Geiger, Pali Dhamma past participle 53, 54, q.v. for detailed discussion of the term) MN i.46 SN v.172f. AN i.69 AN iii.7f. 174 sq. 435 sq.; v.169, 317 Snp 1020 Dhp 38 Ja v.483 Dhp-a iv.95 Seven saddhammas: MN i.354 MN i.356 DN iii.252 282 AN iv.108 sq

      • O
      • past participle a-saddhamma (q.v.); fourAN ii.47 eight: Vin ii.202
      1. ˚garu paying homage to the true religion SN i.140
      • ˚savana hearing the (preaching of the) true dhamma DN iii.227 DN iii.274 AN i.279 AN ii.245 AN iv.25f. 221; v.115 sq
      sad(= sant) + dhamma, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saddharma, e.g. Jtm 224
    Saddhā
    feminine
    1. faith (on term cp. Geiger, Saṁyutta translation ii.452) DN i.63 DN iii.164f. SN i.172 = Sn 76 SN v.196 Dhp 144 AN i.150 AN i.210 AN iii.4f. 352; iv.23; v.96 Dhs 12 Mil 34f.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61, 166 277, 282 instrumental saddhāya (used as
    2. adverb ) in faith, by faith in (
    3. accusative or genitive) Vin ii.289 (āyasmantānaṁ) Ja v.176 (pabbajita) Pv-a 49 (kammaphalaṁ s.); or shortened to saddhā (-pabbajita) MN i.123 AN i.24 Ja i.130 The same phrase as saddhāya pabbajita at SN i.120 is explained as “saddahitvā” by Buddhaghosa ‣See Kindred Sayings i.321, thus taking it as
    4. absolutive
      1. ˚ānusārin walking according to faith MN i.479 AN i.74 Pug 15 Nett 112, 189
      2. ˚indriya (saddh˚) the faculty i.e. the moral sense, of faith DN iii.239 DN iii.278 AN ii.149 SN v.193 SN v.377 Dhs 12 62, 75; Nett 19
      3. ˚cariyā living in faith Vism 101
      4. ˚deyya a gift in faith DN i.5 Vin i.298 Vin iv.30 DN-a i.81
      • ˚vimutta emancipated through faith MN i.478 AN i.74 AN i.118f. Pug 15 Nett 190 -vimutti emancipation through faith Pug 15
      cp. Vedic śraddhā ‣See saddahati
    Saddhātar
    1. a believer Sdhp 39
    agent noun from saddahati, i.e. sad + dhātar
    Saddhāyika
    adjective
    1. trustworthy DN ii.320 AN iv.109 (so read for ˚sika) Thag 2, 43 69
    from saddhāya, absolutive of saddahati
    Saddhāyita
    1. one who is trusted; neuter that which is believed, faith Pv ii.85 May be misspelling for saddhāyika
    2. past participle of saddahati; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śraddhayita
    Saddhiṁ
    1. (& saddhi˚) (adverb )

      1. together; as preposition (following the noun): in company with instrumental DN i.31 Vin i.32 iii.188 (explained as “ekato”) Ja i.189 Ja ii.273 DN-a i.35 Mil 23 also with locative DN-a i.15 or genitive Vin ii.154 Ja i.420 As
      2. adverb saddhiṁ agamāsi Ja i.154 cp. saddhiṁkīḷita Ja ii.20

        1. ˚cara companion Snp 45 Snp 46 (= ekato cara Nd2 633) Dhp 328
        • ˚vihārika (saddhi˚) co-resident, fellow-bhikkhu pupil Vin i.45f. AN iii.70 Ja i.182 Ja i.224 Vism 94 Dhp-a ii.19
        • ˚vihārin identical AN ii.239 AN iii.69 Ja i.1 f ˚vihārinī Vin iv.291
        in form = Vedic sadhrīṁ “towards one aim,” but in meaning = Vedic sadhryak (opposite viṣvak, cp. Pali visuṁ) “together.” cp. also Vedic saṁyak = Pali sammā. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is sārdhaṁ, e.g. SN vihārin Avs ii.139
    Saddhiya
    neuter
    1. only in negative ; (q.v.)
    abstract from *śraddhya
    Sadhana
    adjective.
    1. wealthy, rich DN i.73 Ja i.334
    sa3 + dhana
    Sadhamma
    1. one’s own religion or faith MN i.523 Snp 1020 Bu ii.6 = J i.3
    sa4 + dhamma
    Sadhammika
    1. co-religionist DN ii.273
    sa2 + dhamma + ika
    San1
    1. a dog; nominative sg DN i.166 = M i.77 SN i.176 SN iii.150 Kvu 336. For other forms of the same base ‣See suvāṇa
    cp. Vedic śvā, genitive śunaḥ; Avestan spā, Latin canis, Old Irish cū, Gothic hunds = hound
    San2
    1. (= saṁ) accusative of sa4.

    Sanacca
    neuter
    1. dancing (-party) Vin ii.267
    sa3 + nacca
    Sanati
    1. ‣See saṇati
    Sanantana
    adjective
    1. primeval, of old; for ever eternal DN ii.240 DN ii.244 SN i.189 (cp. Kindred Sayings i.321: porāṇaka santānaṁ vā paṇḍitānaṁ dhamma) Dhp-a i.51
    for sanātana (cp. purātana); Indogermanic *seno = Latin seneo, senex (“senile”), senatus; Goth sineigs old; Old Irish sen old
    Sanābhika
    adjective
    1. having a nave (of a wheel) DN ii.17 DN ii.172 AN ii.37 at both places combined with sa-nemika “with a felly” (i.e. complete)
    sa3 + nābhi + ka
    Sanāmika
    adjective
    1. having a name, called Bu ii.194 = J i.28
    sa3 + nāma + ika
    Sanidassana
    adjective
    1. visible DN iii.217 Dhs 1087
    sa3 + nidassana
    Sant
    1. being, existing DN i.61 DN i.152 AN i.176 Iti 62f. Snp 98 Snp 124
    2. good, true SN i.17 Dhp 151 Cases: nominative singular
    3. masculine santo Snp 98 Mil 32 Nd2 635 (= samāna);
    4. feminine satī (q.v.);
    5. neuter santaṁ. AN v.8 Pv-a 192
    6. accusative santaṁ DN ii.65 & sataṁ Ja iv.435 (opposite asaṁ); instr satā DN ii.55
    7. locative sati DN ii.32 AN i.176 AN iii.338 Snp 81 Dhp 146 Iti 85 & sante DN i.61 ablative santato Nett 88 Dhs-a 206 sq
    8. plural nominative santo MN i.24 SN i.71 Snp 450 Iti 62 Dhp 151
    9. neuter santāni DN i.152
    10. accusative sante Snp 94 Snp 665 genitive sataṁ MN i.24 SN i.17 Snp 227 instrumental sabbhi DN ii.246 SN i.17 SN i.56 Mil 221 = J v.49 Dhp 151 loc santesu
    11. Compar. santatara Iti 62 superl. sattama (q.v.)
    ppr. of atthi
    Santa1
    1. calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure DN i.12 Vin i.4 SN i.5 AN ii.18 Snp 746 Pv iv.134 (= upasanta-kilesa Pv-a 230) Mil 232 Mil 409 Vism 155 (˚anga; opposite oḷārik'anga) Dhp-a ii.13 Dhp-a iii.83
    • nt peace, bliss, nibbāna SN iv.370
    1. ˚indriya one whose senses are tranquil AN ii.38 Snp 144 Vin i.195 Ja i.506
    • ˚kāya of calmed body Dhp 378 Dhp-a iv.114
    • ˚dhamma peaceful condition, quietude Ja i.506
    • ˚bhāva identical Mil 265
    • ˚mānasa of tranquil mind Vin i.195 Ja i.506
    • ˚vāsa peaceful state Dhp-a iv.114
    • ˚vutti living a peaceful life Iti 30 121
    past participle of sammati1
    Santa2
    1. tired, wearied, exhausted Dhp 60 Ja i.498 Pv ii.936 (= parissama-patta Pv-a 127)
    past participle of sammati2
    Santaka1
    adjective
    1. belonging to Ja i.122
    2. neuter property Ja i.91 Ja i.494 Dhp-a i.346
    3. due to genitive Ja iii.408 Ja iv.37
    4. (being in the power of Ja iv.260

      • (bhaya˚)
      from sant; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit santaka Divy 280 etc.
    Santaka2
    adjective
    1. limited (opposite anantika) SN v.272
    sa3 + antaka
    Santacā
    feminine
    1. bark Ja v.202
    • (sattacaṁ?)
    ?
    Santajjeti
    1. to frighten, scold, menace Ja i.479 Ja v.94 Thag-a 65 Pv-a 123 Pv-a 195
    saṁ + tajjeti
    Santataṁ
    • adverb [

      1. ] continually, only in compounds.: ˚kārin consistent AN ii.187
      • ˚vutti of consistent behaviour AN ii.187 MN i.339
      • ˚sīla steady in character MN i.339
      satataṁ, or from saṁ + tan
    Santatara
    1. ‣See sant
    Santati
    feminine
    1. continuity, duration, subsistence Dhs 643 Nett 79 Mil 72 Mil 185 Vb-a 8 170, 173 Vv-a 25 Vism 431, 449. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Kvu 458; cp. Compendium 6, 1531 252 sq.; dhamma˚; continuity of states Mil 40
    2. rūpa˚ of form Vb-a 21
    3. saṅkhāra˚ causal connection of material things Thag 1, 716
    4. lineage Mil 160
    from saṁ + tan, literally stretch
    Santatta1
    1. heated, glowing DN ii.335 MN i.453 SN i.169 (divasa˚) Ja iv.118 Mil 325 Pv-a 38 (soka˚)
    past participle of santappati
    Santatta2
    1. frightened, disturbed Ja iii.77 (= santrasta Commentary )
    past participle of santasati
    Santaneti
    (& ˚tāneti)
    1. to continue AN iii.96f. SN iv.104 Pug 66f. Snp-a 5 ‣See santāyati
    causative of saṁ + tan
    Santappati
    1. to be heated or chafed; figuratively to grieve, sorrow MN i.188 Ja iii.153 past participle santatta1
    2. causative ˚tāpeti to burn, scorch, torment MN i.128 SN iv.56f.
    3. past participle santāpita
    4. saṁ + tappati1
    Santappita
    1. satisfied, pleased Ja ii.44 Pv ii.811 (= pīṇita Pv-a 110)
    past participle of santappeti
    Santappeti
    1. to satisfy, please DN i.109 Vin i.18 Ja i.50 Ja i.272 past participle santappita
    2. causative of saṁ + tappati2
    Santara
    adjective
    1. inside; in compound˚uttara inner & outer Vin iii.214 Vin iv.281
    • ˚uttarena with an inner & outer garment Vin i.298 Thag-a 171
    • ˚bāhira within & without DN i.74 Dhp 315 Ja i.125 DN-a i.218 Dhp-a iii.488
    sa3 + antara, cp. English with-in
    Santarati
    1. to be in haste, to be agitated; ppr. ˚amāna (˚rūpa) Ja iii.156 Ja iii.172 Ja vi.12 Ja vi.451
    saṁ + tarati2
    Santavant
    adjective
    1. tranquil Dhp 378
    from santa1
    Santasati
    1. to be frightened or terrified, to fear, to be disturbed Mil 92 ppr. santasaṁ Ja vi.306 (a˚) & santasanto Ja iv.101 (a˚); Pot. santase Ja iii.147 v.378; absolutive santasitvā Ja ii.398
    2. past participle santasita santatta;
    3. saṁ + tasati2
    Santasita
    1. frightened Mil 92 Pv-a 260 (= suṭṭhu tasita)
    past participle of santasati
    Santāna
    neuter
    1. spreading, ramification, tendril (valli˚) Kp-a 48
    2. one of the 5 celestial trees Ja vi.239 (˚maya made of its flowers)
    3. (also m, continuity, succession; lineage SN iii.143 DN-a i.46 Dhs-a 63 217, 297; Vism 555 Vb-a 164 cp. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Compendium 1677.

      from saṁ + tan
    Santānaka
    1. neuter = santāna 1 Vv-a 94 162 (˚valli a sort of long creeper). mūla˚; a spreading root SN iii.155 Ja i.277
    2. = santāna 2 Vv-a 12 3.
    3. neuter a cobweb Vin i.48
    4. offspring SN i.8

      santanā + ka
    Santāpa
    adjective-noun
    1. burning; heat, fire; figuratively torment, torture Snp 1123 (cp. Nd2 636) Ja i.502 Mil 97 Mil 324 Vb-a 70 (various), 245 (aggi˚, suriya˚); Sdhp 9 Sdhp 572
    from saṁ + tap
    Santāpita
    1. heated, aglow Thag 2, 504
    past participle of santāpeti
    Santāpeti
    1. ‣See santappati
    Santāyati
    1. to preserve (connect?) Vism 688 (better ˚dhāyati) = Snp-a 5 (reads ˚tāneti)
    saṁ + tāyati
    Santāraṇa
    neuter & ˚ī
    • feminine

      1. conveying to the other shore SN iv.174 MN i.134 feminine santāraṇī Ap 234 (scil. nāvā)
    from saṁ + tāreti1
    Santāsa
    1. trembling, fear, shock AN ii.33 SN iii.85 Ja i.274 Mil 146 Mil 207 Pv-a 22
    saṁ + tāsa
    Santāsaniya
    adjective
    1. making frightened, inspiring terror Mil 387
    from saṁ + tāsana
    Santāsin
    adjective
    1. trembling, frightened Dhp 351
    from santāsa
    Santi
    feminine
    1. tranquillity, peace Snp 204 DN ii.157 AN ii.24 Dhp 202
    1. ˚kamma act of appeasing (the gods), pacification DN i.12 DN-a i.97
    • ˚pada “the place of tranquillity” tranquil state, i.e. Nibbāna AN ii.18 Vv-a 219
    • ˚vāda an advocate of mental calm Snp 845 (˚vada in verse) Nd1 203
    from śam, cp. Sanskrit ˚śānti
    Santika
    neuter
    1. vicinity, presence; santikaṁ into the presence of, towards Ja i.91 Ja i.185
    • santikā from the presence of, from Ja i.43 Ja i.83 Ja i.189
    • santike in the presence of, before, with DN i.79 DN i.144 Dhp 32 = Mil 408 Snp 379 Vin i.12 SN i.33 Ja v.467 with
    • accusative SN iv.74 with ablative Mhvs 205; nibbānasantike Dhp 372 instrumental santikena = by, along with Ja ii.301 (if not a mistake instead of santikaṁ or santike?).

      1. ˚āvacara keeping or being near DN i.206 DN ii.139 Ja i.67
      sa2 + antika
    Santikā
    feminine
    1. a kind of game, “spellicans” (Rhys Davids); (Kern: knibbelspel) DN i.6 Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180 DN-a i.85
    unclear in origin & meaning
    Santiṭṭhati
    1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue AN iv.101 (udakaṁ = stands still), 282, 302 sq. Pug 31 Ja i.26
    2. to be established, to be put into order Vin ii.11
    3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled to be composed DN ii.206 DN iii.239 (citta) SN v.321 Vin i.9 15 Iti 43

      • to restrain oneself Ja i.438 5. to wait for (
      • accusative ) Dhp-a i.50
      • Forms: pres. santiṭṭhati DN ii.206 SN iii.133
      • saṇṭhahati Ja vi.160 & saṇṭhāti Pug 31 Ja iv.469 ppr. saṇṭhahanto Vin i.9 Pot saṇṭhaheyya Vin ii.11 SN v.321
      • aorist saṇṭhāsi Vin i.15
      • saṇṭhahiṁsu (3rd
      • plural ) SN ii.224 infinitive saṇṭhātuṁ Ja i.438 Dhp-a i.50
      • past participle saṇṭhita -
      • causative II. saṇṭhapeti (˚ṭhāpeti);
    saṁ + tiṭṭhati
    Santīraṇa
    neuter
    1. investigation, decision; as technical term denoting a stage in the act of sense-cognition judging an impression ‣See Compendium 28, 40, 238 DN-a i.194 Dhs-a 264 269, 272; Vism 459. As ˚ā feminine at Nett 82, 191. —˚kicca function of judging Tika-Paṭṭhāna 33 Vism 21, 454
    2. saṁ + tīraṇa
    Santuṭṭha
    1. pleased, happy DN i.60 DN i.71 MN ii.6 AN ii.209 AN iv.232f.; v.25, 67, 130, 154. mahā˚ the greatly contented one, the Arahant Dhs-a 407
    past participle of santussati
    Santuṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. satisfaction, contentment DN i.71 MN i.13 Snp 265 Dhp 204 AN ii.27 AN ii.31 AN iii.219f. 432 (a˚) Dhp-a iv.111
    saṁ + tuṭṭhi
    Santuṭṭhitā
    feminine
    1. state of contentment DN iii.115 AN i.12 Pug 25 Vism 53 Dhs 1367 (a˚)
    abstract formation from last
    Santuleyya
    adjective
    1. commeasurable; negative Ja vi.283
    metric for ˚tulya, gerundive of saṁ + tuleti
    Santus(s)ita
    1. contented, pleased, happy SN iii.45 (˚tussit’ attā) Snp 1040 Dhp 362 (= suṭṭhu tusita Dhp-a iv.90); Mhbv.31 (ss)
    past participle of santussati
    Santussaka
    adjective
    1. content Snp 144
    from santussati
    Santussati
    1. to be contented, or pleased, or happy; ppr. ˚amāna Snp 42 past participle santuṭṭha & ˚tusita;
    2. saṁ + tussati
    Santosa
    1. contentment DN-a i.204
    from saṁ + tuṣ
    Santhata
    1. spread, strewn with (—˚), covered DN ii.160 Vin iii.32 Snp 401 Snp 668
    2. dhamani˚gatta having the body strewn with veins, emaciated Vin iii.146 = J ii.283 Ja i.346 Ja i.350 & passim ‣See dhamani. Kern,; Toevoegselen s.v. considers santata the right spelling
    3. neuter a rug or mat Vin iii.224 Vv 635 (= tiṇa-santharaka Vv-a 262)
    past participle of santharati
    Santhatika
    adjective
    1. sleeping on a rug Mil 342 Mil 359
    from santhata 2
    Santhana
    neuter
    1. appeasing Dhp 275
    2. satisfaction Vv 186
    from śam, cp. Sanskrit śāntvana
    Santhamati
    1. at Ja i.122 is to be read saṇdhamati “to blow.”
    Santhambhati
    1. to restrain oneself, to keep firm Snp 701 (imperative medium 2nd singular ˚thambhassu) Pug 65 Ja i.255 Ja iii.95
    2. causative ˚thambheti to make stiff or rigid, to numb Ja i.10
    3. saṁ + thambhati
    Santhambhanā
    feminine & ˚thambhitatta
    • neuter

      1. stiffening, stiffness, rigidity Dhs 636 Dhs-a 324 Ja i.10 (a-santhambhana-bhāva)
      abstract from santhambhati
    Santhara
    1. a couch or mat Vin ii.162 AN i.277 Ap 97 (tiṇa˚)
    from saṁ + str
    Santharaka
    1. = santhara; only as tiṇa˚; made of grass Vin i.24 MN i.501 Ja i.360 Vv-a 262
    Santharaṇaka
    adjective
    1. spreading, strewing; ˚vāta a wind which strews things about Snp-a 67
    from santharati
    Santharati
    1. to spread, strew DN ii.84 past participle santhata.
    2. causative santhāreti Mhvs 29, 12.
    3. causative II santharāpeti to cause to be spread Vin iv.39 Mhvs 29, 9
    4. saṁ + tharati
    Santhariṁ
    adverb
    1. by way of spreading; in sabba˚; so that all is spread, prepared DN ii.84 cp. Vin i.227 384
    from santhara
    Santhava
    1. acquaintance, intimacy SN i.17 Snp 37 Snp 168 Snp 207 Snp 245 Ja i.158 Ja ii.27 Ja ii.42 180 Dhs 1059 Dhs-a 364 Dhp-a i.235 nominative pl santhavāni Snp 844 = SN iii.9 Ja iv.98
    • ˚˚jāta having become acquainted, an acquaintance Nd1 198

      • a˚vissāsin intimate without being acquainted AN iii.136
      from saṁ + stu, cp. santhuta
    Santhavana
    neuter
    1. acquaintance Dhs-a 364
    from saṁ + thavati
    Santhāgāra
    1. a council hall, a mote hall DN i.91 DN ii.147 AN ii.207 MN i.228 MN i.353 MN i.457 MN iii.207 DN-a i.256 Ja iv.72 Ja iv.147 Vin i.233 Vv-a 298 Dhp-a i.347 cp. saṇṭhāna 3
    Sanskrit sansthāgāra
    Santhāna
    1. ‣See saṇṭhāna
    Santhāra
    1. spreading, covering, floor(ing) SN i.170 Vin ii.120 (3 kinds of floors: iṭṭhakā˚, silā˚ dāru˚, i.e. of tiles, flags, wood) AN i.136 (paṇṇa˚) Ja vi.24 (identical) Ja i.92 Ps i.176
    • (cp. paṭi˚) friendly welcome AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚)
    • saṁ + thāra
    Santhāraka
    1. a spread, cover, mat Vin ii.113 (tiṇa˚), 116
    santhāra + ka cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sanstāraka MVastu iii.272
    Santhuta
    adjective
    1. acquainted, familiar Ja i.365 Ja iii.63 (cira˚); v.448 (so read for santhata); Sdhp 31 negative Ja iii.63 Ja iii.221 Ja vi.310 cp. santhava
    saṁ + thuta
    Santhutika
    adjective
    1. acquainted Vism 78
    from santhuta
    Sanda1
    1. adjective thick, dense; in —˚cchāya giving dense shade SN iv.194 Ja i.57 Ja i.249 DN-a i.209 (2) (thick) wood, forest; in —˚vihāra dwelling in the wood, life as a hermit Thag 1, 688
    2. cp. Sanskrit sāndra
    Sandati
    1. to flow DN ii.128 DN ii.129 (aorist sandittha) Ja i.18 Ja vi.534 (variant reading sikandati siyandati?); Pv ii.104 (= pavatteti Pv-a 143)

      • Caus sandāpeti to cause to flow Mil 122
      • past participle sanna. cp. vissandati & vissandaka;
      syand; Dhtp 149: passavane
    Sandana1
    1. neuter trappings DN ii.188 (read sandāna?)
    Sandana2
    1. a chariot Mhvs 21, 25; Dpvs 14, 56; Vv.642 Ja iv.103 Ja v.264 Ja vi.22
    cp. Vedic syandana
    Sandamānikā
    feminine
    1. a chariot Vin iii.49 Vin iv.339 DN-a i.82 Kp-a 50; Vism 255
    from syand
    Sandambhita
    1. is Kern’s proposed reading for santhambhita at Ja vi.207
    from Sanskrit sandarbhati
    Sandassaka
    1. instructing MN i.145 AN ii.97 AN iv.296 SN v.162 Iti 107 Mil 373
    from sandassati, causative of sandissati
    Sandassana
    1. showing Ja i.67
    Sandahati
    1. to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange Ja iv.336 Mhvs vii.18; ppr. med sandahamāna Dhs-a 113 absolutive sandahitvā Ja iv.336 & sandhāya literally after putting on Ja iv.258 (the arrow on to the bow); figuratively with reference to, concerning MN i.503 Ja i.203 Ja i.274 Ja ii.177 Pv-a 87 Pv-a 89 Pv-a 110; towards Ja i.491 Ja iii.295
    2. past participle sandhīyate & sandhiyyate
      1. ; to be put together, to be self-contained Pug 32 to be connected Snp-a 376 572; to reflect upon, to resent Snp 366 to be reconciled Ja ii.114 past participle saṁhita
      2. saṁ + dahati1
    Sandahana
    neuter
    1. applying, placing (an arrow) on the string Mil 352
    from saṁ + dhā
    Sandāna
    neuter
    1. a cord, tether, fetter DN ii.274 Thag 1, 290 Dhp 398 Snp 622 Ja ii.32 Ud 77 (text sandhāna) Dhp-a iv.161
    saṁ + dāna, from to bind ‣See dāma
    Sandāleti
    1. to break; absolutive sandālayitvāna Snp 62
    2. saṁ + dāleti
    Sandiṭṭha
    1. seen together, a friend Ja i.106 Ja i.442 Vin iii.42 yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ, where one’s friends live DN ii.98 SN v.152
    past participle of sandissati
    Sandiṭṭhi
    feminine
    1. the visible world, worldly gain DN iii.45 DN iii.247 MN i.43 Snp 891 Vin ii.89 Nd1 288 300 ˚parāmāsin infected with worldliness MN i.97
    from saṁ + dṛś
    Sandiṭṭhika
    1. visible; belonging to, of advantage to, this life, actual DN i.51 ii.93, 217; iii.5 MN i.85 MN i.474 AN i.156f.; ii.56, 198 SN i.9 SN i.117 SN iv.41, 339 Snp 567 Snp 1137 Vism 215 sq
    • As sandiṭṭhiyā
    • feminine at Ja vi.213
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sandṛṣṭika Divy 426
    Sandita
    1. bound, tied, Thag 1, 290 (diṭṭhi-sandāna˚)
    from saṁ + ‣See sandāna
    Sandiddha
    1. smeared, indistinct, husky Vin ii.202 DN-a i.282
    saṁ + diddha
    Sandiyyati
    & sandīyati
    1. to be vexed, to resent SN ii.200f. Ja vi.570 (spelt wrongly sandhīyati Commentary explains as “manku hoti”)
    saṁ + diyyati(= dīyati) = Sanskrit dīyate of dyati, i.e. 2 to cut ‣See dātta
    Sandissati
    1. to be seen together with, to be engaged in, or to tally, agree with, to live conformably to (locative, e.g. dhamme) DN i.102 DN ii.75 SN v.177 Snp 50 DN ii.127 Nett 23; ppr. a-saṁdissamāna invisible Dāvs iv.30;
    2. causative saṁdasseti to teach, instruct DN i.126 DN ii.95 Vin i.18 to compare, verify, DN ii.124 ppr. sandassiyamāna DN ii.124 Ja vi.217 (sunakhesu sandissanti, i.e. they are of no more value)
    3. saṁ + dissati
    Sandīpeti
    1. to kindle Ja v.32
    saṁ + dīpeti
    Sandesa
    1. news, message Mhvs 18, 13
    Sanskrit sandeśa
    Sandeha
    1. accumulation; the human body Dhp 148
    2. doubt Mil 295
    saṁ + deha
    Sandosa
    1. pollution, defilement MN i.17 AN iii.106 AN iii.358 AN v.292 Snp 327
    saṁ + dosa
    Sandhana
    neuter
    1. property, belongings MN ii.180
    saṁ + dhana
    Sandhanta
    1. blown, smelted (of gold) AN i.253
    past participle of sandhamati
    Sandhamati
    1. to blow, to fan Ja i.122 - past participle sandhanta
    2. saṁ + dhamati
    Sandhātar
    1. one who puts together, a conciliator DN i.4 DN iii.171 MN i.345 AN ii.209 Pug 57
    saṁ + dhātar
    Sandhāna
    neuter
    1. uniting, conciliation, friendship DN-a i.74 Dhs-a 113
    2. bond, fetter Ud 77 (read sandāna?
    from saṁ + dhā
    Sandhāpana
    neuter
    1. combination Vv-a 349
    from sandhāpeti, causative of sandahati
    Sandhāya
    1. ‣See sandahati
    Sandhāraka
    adjective
    1. checking, restraining Vism 205
    from sandhāreti
    Sandhārana
    neuter
    1. checking Mil 352
    from sandhāreti
    Sandhāreti
    1. to hold, bear, carry Ja iii.184
    2. to hold up, support Ja iv.167
    3. to curb restrain, check Vin ii.212 Ja ii.26 Ja ii.59

      • dussandhāriya difficult to keep back Ja iii.340
      saṁ + dhāreti
    Sandhāvati
    1. to run through, to transmigrate DN i.14 AN ii.1 SN iii.149 Ja i.503 aorist sandhāvissaṁ Dhp 153 = J i.76 (= apar’ âparaṁ anuvicariṁ Dhp-a iii.128)
    2. saṁ + dhāvati
    Sandhi
    masculine &
    • feminine )

      1. union, junction Mil 330 (of 2 roads); Buddhaghosa on SN ii.270 (between 2 houses). 2. breach, break, hole, chasm DN ii.83 = AN v.195 Thag 1 786 Ja v.459
      2. āloka˚ a window Vin ii.172
      3. sandhiṁ chindati to make a break, to break into a house DN i.52 DN-a i.159
      4. joint, piece, link Ja ii.88 Vism 277 (the 5, of kammaṭṭhāna); Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism 185 (the 14 mahā˚) Dhs-a 324

  • connection, combination Vb-a 191 (hetuphala˚ & phalahetu˚ etc.).

    • euphonic junction euphony, “sandhi” Snp-a 76 ‣See pada˚

  • agreement Mhvs 9, 16.

    -cheda (1) housebreaking Ja i.187f.; ii.388.

  • one who has brought rebirths (= paṭisandhi) to an end Dhp 97 Dhp-a ii.187 Dhp-a iii.257

    • ˚chedaka one who can cut a break, an underminer Ja vi.458
    • ˚bheda(ka) causing discord Ja iii.151
    • ˚mukha opening of a break (made by burglars) into a house Thag 1, 786 Pv-a 4
    • ˚samala (-sankaṭīva) refuse heap of a house-sewer (cp. Kindred Sayings ii.181 203) DN ii.160 MN i.334 = SN ii.270
    from saṁ + ; dhā
  • Sandhika
    adjective (—˚), in pañca˚; having 5 links or pieces Vism 277.
    Sandhīyati
    1. ‣See sandahati
    Sandhunāti
    1. to shake DN ii.336
    saṁ + dhunāti
    Sandhūpeti
    1. to fumigate SN iii.89 Ps ii.167. As sandhūpāyati to cause thick smoke or steam thickly, at Vin i.225 Snp p. 15 (= samantā dhūpāyati Snp-a 154)
    saṁ + dhūpeti
    Sandhovati
    1. to clean AN i.253
    saṁ + dhovati
    Sandhovika
    1. washing; kaṇṇa-sandhovikā khiḍḍā ear-washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with piṭṭhi˚; etc.). AN v.202 So probably for saṇadhovika at MN i.229 MN i.375 cp. sāṇadhovana (?)
    from sandhovati
    Sanna1
    1. sunk Dhp 327
    past participle of sīdati
    Sanna2
    1. flown Ja vi.203 (dadhi˚)
    past participle of sandati
    Sannakaddu
    1. the tree Buchanania latifolia Abḥp 556
    lexicographical Sanskrit sannakadru
    Sannata
    1. bent down, low Ja vi.58 (opposite unnata)
    2. bent, prepared Ja v.215 (Commentary suphassita)
    past participle of saṁ + nam, cp. sannāmeti
    Sannaddha
    1. fastened, bound, DN ii.350 (susannaddha) Mil 339
    2. put on, clothed (with Pv iv.136 (˚dussa)
    3. armed, accoutred SN ii.284 Ja i.179 Dhp 387 Dhp-a iv.144 Pv-a 154 (˚dhanu-kalāpa).

      past participle of sannayhati
    Sannayhati
    1. to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself Ja i.129 to array, arm DN ii.175 Vin i.342 to arrange, fit DN i.96 Ja i.273 aorist sannayhi DN i.96 inf sannayhituṁ Ja i.179
    2. absolutive sannayhitvā DN ii.175 Ja ii.77 & sannahitvā Ja i.273
    3. saṁ + nayhati
    Sannāmeti
    1. to bend MN i.365 MN i.439 MN i.450 MN i.507 = SN iv.188 (kāyaṁ sannāmeyya-i.e. to writhe) cp. Compendium 162 note 5 (“strengthen"?)
    causative of saṁ + nam
    Sannāha
    1. dressing, fastening together Pv-a 231
    2. armour, mail SN v.6 Ja ii.443 Th. 1, 543 Ja i.179
    from sannay ati
    Sannikāsa
    adjective
    1. resembling, looking like Ja iii.522 Ja v.87 = vi.306; v.169 (Commentary dassana); vi.240, 279
    saṁ + nikāsa
    Sannikkhepana
    neuter
    1. elimination Vb-a 355
    saṁ + nikkhepana
    Sanniggaṇhāti
    1. to restrain SN i.238
    saṁ + niggaṇhāti
    Sannighāta
    1. concussion, knocking against each other Dhs 621
    saṁ + nighāta
    Sannicaya
    1. accumulation, hoarding AN i.94 AN ii.23 Dhp 92 Vin ii.95 Vin iv.243 Dhp-a ii.171 AN iv.108 Kp-a 62 (lohita)
    saṁ + nicaya
    Sannicita
    1. accumulated, hoarded Mil 120
    saṁ + nicita
    Sanniṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. conclusion, consummation, Ja ii.166
    2. resolve Ja i.19 69; 187; iv.167 Vin i.255f.
    3. ascertainment, definite conclusion conviction, Ja vi.324 Vism 43.

      saṁ + niṭṭhāna
    Sannitāḷeti
    1. to strike Ja v.71
    saṁ + nitāḷeti
    Sannitodaka
    neuter
    1. “pricking,” instigating, jeering DN i.189 AN i.187 SN ii.282
    from saṁ + ni + tud
    Sannidhāna
    neuter [saṁ + nidhāna) literally “putting down together,” proximity Dāvs v.39.
    Sannidhi
    1. putting together, storing up DN i.6 Snp 306 Snp 924 Nd1 372
    2. ˚kāra storing DN i.6
    • ˚kāraka storing up, store MN i.523 Vin i.209 Vin iv.87 DN iii.235 AN iii.109 AN iv.370
    • ˚kata stored up Vin ii.270 put by postponed Vin i.254
    saṁ + nidhi
    Sannipatati
    1. to assemble, come together Ja i.167 past participle ˚ita.
    2. causative sannipāteti to bring together convoke DN ii.76 Mil 6
    3. causative II. sannipātāpeti to cause to be convoked or called together Ja i.58 Ja i.153 Ja i.271 iii.376 Vin i.44 Vin iii.71
    4. saṁ + nipatati
    Sannipatita
    1. come together DN i.2 DN ii.76
    past participle of ˚nipatati
    Sannipāta
    1. union, coincidence SN iv.68f. Mil 60 Mil 123f.; Nett 28
    2. assemblage assembly, congregation DN ii.5 Mil 7
    3. union of the humours of the body Mil 303

      • collocation Dhp 352
    from sannipatati
    Sannipātika
    adjective
    1. resulting from the union of the humours of the body AN ii.87 AN v.110 SN iv.230 Mil 135 Mil 137 Mil 302 Mil 304
    from last
    Sannibha
    adjective
    1. resembling DN ii.17 Snp 551 Ja i.319
    saṁ + nibha
    Sanniyojeti
    1. to appoint, command Mhvs 5, 34
    saṁ + niyojeti
    Sanniyyātana
    neuter
    1. handing over, resignation DN-a i.232
    saṁ + niyyātana
    Sannirata
    adjective
    1. being (quite) happy together Ja v.405 Sannirumbhati (rundhati)
    saṁ + nirata
    Sannirumbhati (˚rundhati)
    1. to restrain, block, impede; absolutive sannirumhitvā Ja i.109 Ja i.164 ii.6 Vv-a 217
    2. sannirumbhitvā Ja i.62 Ja ii.341
    3. sannirujjhitvā Vism 143; Pot. sannirundheyya MN i.115
    4. past participle sanniruddha Vism 278
    5. saṁ + nirumbhati
    Sannirumhana
    neuter
    1. restraining, checking, suppression Ja i.163 DN-a i.193 as ˚bhana at Vb-a 355
    from last
    Sannivaṭṭa
    1. returning, return Vin i.139f.
    = saṁ + nivatta
    Sannivasati
    1. to live together, to associate AN i.78 past participle sannivuttha
    2. saṁ + nivasati
    Sannivāreti
    1. to restrain, check; to keep together MN i.115 Thag 2, 366
    saṁ + nivāreti
    Sannivāsa
    1. association, living with; community AN i.78 AN ii.57 DN iii.271 Dhp 206 Ja iv.403
    • loka-sannivāsa the society of men, all the world Ja i.366 ii.205
    saṁ + nivāsa
    Sannivuttha
    1. living together (with), associating AN iv.303f.
    past participle of sannivasati
    Sannivesa
    1. preparation, encampment, settlement Thag-a 257
    saṁ + nivesa
    Sannivesana
    neuter
    1. position, settlement; pāṭiekka—˚ private, separate Ja i.92
    saṁ + nivesana
    Sannisajjā
    feminine
    1. meeting-place Vin i.188 Vin ii.174 = iii.66; sannisajja-ṭṭhāna (n.) the same Vin iii.287
    saṁ + nissajjā
    Sannisinna
    1. sitting down together DN i.2 DN ii.109 Vin ii.296 Ja i.120
    2. (having become settled, established Vin ii.278 (˚gabbhā pregnant)
    past participle of sannisīdati
    Sannisīdati
    1. (literally) to sink down, to settle Mil 35
    2. (figuratively) to subside, to become quiet MN i.121 SN iv.196 AN ii.157
    3. causative sannisādeti to make quiet to calm MN i.116 AN ii.94
    4. causative II. sannisīdāpeti to cause to halt Ja iv.258
    5. past participle sannisinna
    saṁ + nisīdati
    Sannissayatā
    feminine
    1. dependency, connection Nett 80
    saṁ + nissayatā
    Sannissita
    1. based on, connected with, attached to Vism 43, 118, 120, 554 (viññāṇa is “hadaya-vatthu˚”; cp. Vb-a 163)
    saṁ + nissita, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sanniśrita
    Sannihita
    1. put down, placed Mil 326
    2. stored up Thag 2, 409 Thag-a 267
    saṁ + nihita; cp. sannidhi
    Sannīta
    1. mixed, put together, kneaded Mhvs 29, 11 & 12
    past participle from sanneti
    Sanneti
    1. to mix, knead DN i.74 (Pot. sanneyya); iii.29 Vin i.47 (gerundive ˚netabba) MN i.276 SN ii.58f. Ja vi.432
    2. past participle sannīta
    3. from saṁ + neti
    Sapajāpatika

    adjective

  • with Pajāpati. The passage under pajāpati 1. was distorted through copyist’s default. It should read: “only in one formula, with Inda Brahmā, viz. devā sa-indakā sa-brahmakā sa-pajāpatikā DN ii.274 (without sa-brahmakā) SN iii.90 AN v.325 Otherwise sapajāpatika in sense of following Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā.”

    • with one’s wife Vin i.23 Vin iv.62 Ja i.345
  • Sapati
    1. to swear, curse SN i.225 Ja v.104 Ja v.397 Mhvs 25, 113 Vv-a 336
    • pp satta3
    śap, cp. Dhtp 184 “akkose”
    Sapatikā
    adjective having a husband, a woman whose husband is alive Ja vi.158 Pv-a 86
    Sapatī
    feminine having the same husband; a rival wife, a cowife Pv i.66 ii.32.
    Sapatta
    1. hostile, rival Thag 2, 347 Thag-a 242 sapattarājā a rival king Ja i.358 Ja ii.94 Ja iii.416 asapatta without enmity Snp 150 sapatta masculine a rival, foe, Iti 83 AN iv.94f. Ja i.297
    2. Sanskrit sapatna
    Sapattaka
    adjective
    1. hostile, full of enmity DN i.227
    from last
    Sapattabhāra
    1. with the weight of the wings, carrying one’s wings with oneself DN i.71 MN i.180 268 AN ii.210 Pug. 58
    sa3 + patta1 + bhāra
    Sapattika
    neuter the state of a co-wife Thag 2, 216 Thag-a 178
    • Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. proposes reading sā˚;
    Sapattī
    feminine
    1. a co-wife DN ii.330 Ja i.398 Ja iv.316 Ja iv.491 Thag 2, 224 Dhp-a i.47
    • asapattī without any co-wife SN iv.249
    Sanskrit sapatnī
    Sapatha
    1. an oath Vin i.347 Ja i.180 Ja i.267 Ja iii.138 Snp-a 418
    from śap
    Sapadānaṁ
    • adverb [from phrase sa-padānaṁ-cārikā; i.e. sa2 + genitive
    • plural of pada (cp. gimhāna). Weber (Indische Streifen iii.398) suggests sapadā + naṁ, sapadā being an instrumental by-form of sapadā, and naṁ an enclitic. Trenckner (Miln. p. 428) says sapadi + ayana. Kern (Toevoegselen ii.73 agrees on the whole, but explains padānaṁ as pad'āyanaṁ “with the same steps,” i.e. without interruption, constant successive (cp. Latin stante pede & Sanskrit
    • adverb ; sapadi at once). (1) literally (perhaps a later use) of a bird at Ja v.358 (s. sāliṁ khādanto, without a stop); of a lion at Mil 400 (sapadāna-bhakkha). (2) applied in phrase sapadānaṁ carati to go on uninterrupted alms-begging Vin iv.191 SN iii.238 Snp 413 Ja i.66 Pv iv.344 Vv-a 121 and in phrases sapadāna-cārikā Ja i.89
    • ˚cārika
    • adjective Vin iii.15
    • ˚cārin MN i.30 MN ii.7 Snp 65 Nd2 646 Also as adjective sapadāna (piṇḍapāta) Vin ii.214

    Sapadi
    adverb
    1. instantly, at once Dāvs i.62
    sa2 +
  • adverb formn from pada
  • Sapariggaha
    adjective
    1. provided with possessions DN i.247 Snp 393
    2. having a wife married Ja vi.369
    sa3 + pariggaha
    Saparidaṇḍā
    feminine a certain class of women, the use of whom renders a person liable to punishment Vin iii.139 AN v.264 MN i.286
    Sapallava
    adjective
    1. with the sprouts Vv-a 173
    sa3 + pallava
    Sapāka
    1. “dog-cooker,” an outcast or Caṇḍāla Ja iv.380 cp. sopāka
    san + pāka; cp. Sanskrit śvapāka
    Sappa
    1. a snake MN i.130 AN iii.97 AN iii.260f. Snp 768 Ja i.46 Ja i.259 Ja i.310 Ja i.372 Ja v.447 (kaṇha˚) Nd1 7 DN-a i.197 Snp-a 13 Often in similes, e.g. Vism 161, 587; Kp-a 144 Snp-a 226 333. —˚potaka a young snake Vism 500; —˚phaṇa the hood of a snake Kp-a 50
    • cp. sappin
    cp. Sanskrit sarpa, from sṛp; “serpent”
    Sappaccaya
    adjective
    1. correlated, having a cause, conditioned DN i.180 AN i.82 Dhs 1083
    sa3 + paccaya
    Sappañña
    adjective
    1. wise MN i.225 Snp 591 often as sapañña Iti 36 Snp 90 Ja ii.65
    sa3 + pañña
    Sappaṭigha
    adjective
    1. producing reaction, reacting DN iii.217 Dhs 597 617, 648, 1089 Dhs-a 317 Vism 451
    sa3 + paṭigha
    Sappaṭipuggala
    1. having an equal, comparable, a friend MN i.27
    sa3 + paṭipuggala
    Sappaṭibhāga
    adjective
    1. resembling, like DN ii.215 Ja i.303 Pug 30f. Mil 37
    2. having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with MN i.320 (kaṇhasukka˚) Mil 379 (identical)
    sa3 + paṭibhāga
    Sappaṭissa
    adjective
    1. reverential, deferential Iti 10 Vin i.45 Vv 8441 (cp. Vv-a 347) ‣See also gārava
    sa + paṭissā, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sapratīśa Divy 333 Divy 484
    Sappaṭissava
    adjective
    1. deferential, respectful Dhs-a 125 127 = J i.129, 131
    2. ˚tā deference, reverence Dhs 1327 = Pug 24
    sa + paṭissava
    Sappati
    1. to creep, crawl ‣See saṁ˚;
    sṛp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Latin serpo; Dhtp 194 “gamana”
    Sappadesa
    adjective
    1. in all places, all round MN i.153
    sa3 + padesa
    Sappana
    neuter
    1. gliding on Dhs-a 133
    from sappati
    Sappāṭihāriya
    adjective
    1. accompanied by wonders DN i.198 SN v.261 Ud 63
    sa3 + pāṭihāriya
    Sappāṭihīrakata
    adjective
    1. made with wonders, substantiated by wonders, substantiated, well founded DN i.198 DN iii.121 (“has been made a thing of saving grace” Dialogues of the Buddha iii.115, q.v.)
    sa3 + pāṭihīra + kata
    Sappāṇaka
    adjective
    1. containing animate beings Vin iii.125 Ja i.198
    sa3 + pāṇa + ka
    Sappāya
    adjective
    1. likely, beneficial fit, suitable AN i.120 SN iii.268 SN iv.23f. 133 sq. (Nibbāna˚ paṭipadā) Ja i.182 Ja i.195 Ja ii.436 (kiṁci sappāyaṁ something that did him good, a remedy) Vin i.292 302 Mil 215 (sappāyakiriyā, giving a drug). nt something beneficial, benefit, help Vism 34, 87 (˚sevin) Vb-a 265 (various), 271 (˚kathā)
    • Ten sappāyas 10 asappāyas at Dhs-a 168
    • ; sappāyāsappāyaṁ what is suitable, and what not Ja i.215 Ja i.471 used as the last part of a compound, meaning what is suitable with reference to: senāsanasappāya
    • neuter suitable lodgings Ja i.215
    saṁ + pā (= pra + ā) + i, cp. pāya. The corresponding Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is sāmpreya (= saṁ + pra + i with guṇa), e.g. Avs i.255; iii.110
    Sappāyatā
    feminine
    1. agreeableness, suitability, convenience Vism 79, 121 (a˚), 127
    abstract from sappāya
    Sappi
    neuter

    clarified butter, ghee DN i.9 DN i.141 DN i.201 AN i.278 AN ii.95 AN ii.207 (˚tela); iii.219; iv.103 Snp 295 (˚tela). Dhs 646 Ja i.184 Ja ii.43 Ja iv.223 (˚tela) Vin i.58 etc. —˚maṇḍa cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sarpimaṇḍa Divy 3 etc.

    1. the scum, froth, cream of clarified butter, the best of ghee DN i.201 AN ii.95 Vv-a 172 Pug 70 its tayo guṇā Mil 322
    Vedic sarpis
    Sappin
    adjective-noun
    1. crawling, creeping; moving along ‣See pīṭha˚;. feminine sappinī a female snake Ja vi.339 (where the differences between a male and a female snake are discussed)
    2. from sappati
    Sappītika
    adjective
    1. accompanied by the feeling of joy, joyful AN i.81 Ja i.10 Vism 86 (opp nippītika)
    sa3 + pīti + ka
    Sappurisa
    1. a good, worthy man MN iii.21 MN iii.37 DN iii.252 (the 7 s˚-dhammā), 274, 276, 283 AN ii.217f. 239 Dhs 259 = 1003 Vin i.56 Dhp 54 Pv ii.98; ii.945; iv.187 Ja i.202 equal to ariya MN i.8 SN iii.4 asappurisa = anariya Snp-a 479
    • sappurisatara a better man SN v.20
    sat (= sant) + purisa
    Saphala
    adjective
    1. bearing fruit, having its reward Dhp 52
    sa3 + phala
    Saphalaka
    adjective
    1. together with his shield Mhvs 25, 63
    sa3 + phalaka
    Sabala
    spotted, variegated Snp 675 Vism 51 Vv-a 253 name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell Ja vi.106 Ja vi.247 (Sabálo ca Sāmo ca). asabala, unspotted DN ii.80
    1. ˚kārin acting inconsistently AN ii.187
    Vedic śabala (e.g. AN v.8 AN v.1 AN v.9) = , Weber, Indische Streifen ii.297
    Sabba
    adjective
    1. whole, entire all, every DN i.4 SN iv.15 Vin i.5 Iti 3 Nd2 s.v., nominative plural sabbe Snp 66 genitive
    2. plural sabbesaṁ Snp 1030

      • nt sabbaṁ the (whole) world of sense-experience SN iv.15 cp. MN i.3
      • At Vism 310 “sabbe” is defined as “anavasesa-pariyādānaṁ.” In compound with superlative expressions sabba˚; has the meaning of “(best) of all, quite, very, nothing but, all round; entirely: ˚bāla the greatest fool DN i.59
      • ˚paṭhama the very first, right in front Pv-a 56
      • ˚sovaṇṇa nothing but gold Pv i.21ii.911; ˚kaniṭṭha the very youngest Pv-a iii; ˚atthaka in every way useful; ˚saṅgāhika thoroughly comprehensive Snp-a 304
      • In connection with numerals sabba˚ has the distributive sense of “of each,” i.e. so & so many things of each kind, like; ˚catukka (with four of each said of a gift or sacrifice) Ja iii.44 Dhp-a iii.3
      • ˚aṭṭhaka (dāna) (a gift consisting of 8 X 8 things) Mil 291 ‣See detail under aṭṭha B 1. a
      • ˚soḷasaka (of 16 each Dhp-a iii.3
      • ˚sata (of 100 each) Dhp-a ii.6
      • Cases
      • adverb ially: instrumental sabbena sabbaṁ altogether all, i.e. with everything cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sarvena sarvaṁ Divy 39 Divy 144 270; 502
      1. DN ii.57 Pv-a 130 Pv-a 131 ablative sabbato “all round,” in every respect Pv i.111 Ja vi.76 & sabbaso altogether, throughout DN i.34 Snp 288 Dhp 265 Pv-a 119 Nd1 421 Dhp-a iv.100
      2. Derivations: 1. sabbattha everywhere, under all circumstances SN i.134 Dhp 83 Snp 269 Nd 133 Pv-a 1 Pv-a 18 Pv-a 107 Vb-a 372f. ˚kaṁ everywhere Ja i.15 Ja i.176 Ja i.172 Dāṭh v.57
      3. sabbathā in every way; sabbathā sabbaṁ completely DN ii.57 SN iv.167
      4. sabbadā always Snp 174 Snp 197 Snp 536 Dhp 202 Pv i.91 (= sabbakālaṁ Commentary ); i.1014 (identical) sabbadā-cana always Iti 36

        • sabbadhi (from Sanskrit *sarvadha = vic̦vadha, Weber, Indische Streifen iii.392) everywhere in every respect DN i.251 DN ii.186 Snp 176 Dhp 90 also sabbadhī Snp 952 Snp 1034 Vin i.38 Vb-a 377 Vism 308 (= sabbattha) Nd1 441 443
        1. ˚atthaka concerned with everything, a do-all Ja ii.30 74 Dhp-a ii.151 (mahāmatta)
        • profitable to all Mil 373 (Text ṭṭh). of kammaṭṭhāna Snp-a ii.54; Vism 97 -atthika always useful Mil 153
        • ˚ābhibhū conquering all Snp 211 Vin i.8
        • ˚otuka corresponding to all the seasons DN ii.179 Pv iv.122; Sdhp 248
        • ˚kammika (amacca) (a minister) doing all work Vism 130
        • ˚kālaṁ always ‣See sadā
        • ghasa all-devouring Ja i.288
        • ji all-conquering SN iv.83
        • ˚(ñ)jaha abandoning everything SN ii.284 Snp 211 Dhp 353 = Vin i.8
        • ˚ññu omniscient MN i.482 MN ii.31 MN ii.126 AN i.220 Mil 74 Vb-a 50 Snp-a 229 424, 585 Ja i.214 335; ˚tā
        • feminine omniscience Pug 14 70 Ja i.2 Ja i.14 Nett 61, 103; also written sabbaññūtā sabbaññutā-ñāṇa
        • neuter omniscience Nett 103 DN-a i.99 Vb-a 197 Also written sabbaññū˚; , thus Ja i.75
        • ˚dassāvin one who ‣Sees (i.e. knows) everything MN i.92
        • ˚byohāra business, intercourse Ud 65 ‣See saṁvohāra -bhumma universal monarch Ja vi.45
        • ˚vidū all wise Snp 177 Snp 211 Vin i.8 Dhp 353
        • ˚saṁharaka a kind of perfume “eau de mille fleurs” Ja vi.336
        • ˚sādhāraṇa common to all Ja i.301f.
        Vedic sarva = Avestan haurva (complete); Latin solidus & soldus “solid,” perhaps also Latin salvus safe
    Sabbatthatā
    1. the state of being everywhere; sabbatthatāya on the whole DN i.251 DN ii.187 MN i.38 SN iv.296 AN iii.225 v.299, 344. explained at Vism 308 (with tt)
    Sabbassa
    neuter
    1. the whole of one’s property Ja iii.105 Ja v.100 (read: sabbasaṁ vā pan'assa haranti) ˚-haraṇa neuter confiscation of one’s property Ja iii.105 v.246 (variant reading ); sabbassaharaṇadaṇḍa
    2. masculine the same Ja iv.204 (so read instead of sabbappaharaṇa). At some passages sabba
    3. neuter “all,” seems to be used in the same sense, especially genitive sabbassa-e.g. Ja iii.50 Ja iv.19 v.324
    4. sarvasva
    Sabbāvant
    adjective
    1. all, entire DN i.73 DN i.251 DN iii.224 AN iii.27 AN v.299f. 344 sq
    cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sarvāvant Divy 294 Divy 298, 352
    Sabbha
    1. ‣See a˚;
    Sabbhin
    1. ‣See a˚;
    Sabrahmaka
    adjective
    1. including the Brahma world DN i.62 DN iii.76 DN iii.135 AN i.260 AN ii.70 SN v.423 Vin i.11 DN-a i.174
    sa3 + brahma + ka
    Sabrahmacarin
    adjective-noun
    1. a fellow student DN ii.77 DN iii.241f. 245 MN i.101 AN ii.97 Snp 973 Vb-a 281
    sa3 + brahmacārin
    Sabhaggata
    adjective
    1. gone to the hall of assembly AN i.128 Snp 397 Pug 29
    sabhā + gata
    Sabhā
    feminine
    1. a hall, assemblyroom DN ii.274 AN i.143 SN i.176 Ja i.119 157, 204. 2. a public rest-house, hostelry Ja i.302
    2. dhamma˚ chapel Ja vi.333

      1. ˚gata = sabhaggata SN v.394 MN i.286
      Vedic sabhā, cp. K.Z. iv.370
    Sabhāga
    adjective
    1. common, being of the same division Vin ii.75 like, equal, similar Mil 79 s. āpatti a common offence, shared by all Vin i.126f.; vīthisabhāgena in street company, the whole street in common Ja ii.45 opposite visabhāga unusual Ja i.303 different Vism 516 Mil 79
    1. ˚ṭṭhāna a common room, a suitable or convenient place Ja i.426 Ja iii.49 Ja v.235
    • ˚vuttin living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably Vin i.45 Ja i.219 a-sabhāgavuttin Ja i.218 sabhāgavuttika Vin ii.162 AN iii.14f.; a-sabhāgavuttika ibid
    sa2 + bhāga
    Sabhājana
    1. honouring, salutation Mil 2
    Dhtp 553: pīti-dassanesu
    Sabhāya
    neuter = sabhā Vin iii.200
    Sabhāva
    1. state (of mind), nature, condition Mil 90 Mil 212 Mil 360 Pv-a 39 (ummattaka˚), 98 (santa˚), 219
    2. character, disposition, behaviour Pv-a 13 Pv-a 35 (ullumpana˚), 220 (lokiya˚)
    3. truth reality, sincerity Mil 164 Ja v.459 Ja v.198 (opposite musāvāda) Ja vi.469

      • sabhāvaṁ sincerely, devotedly Ja vi.486

        1. ˚dhamma principle of nature Ja i.214
        • ˚dhammatta ˚dhamma Vism 238
        • ˚bhūta true Ja iii.20
        sa4 + bhāva
    Sabhoga1
    adjective
    1. wealthy DN i.73
    sa3 + bhoga
    Sabhoga2
    1. property, possession Mil 139
    sa4 + bhoga
    Sabhojana
    adjective neuter
    1. sharing food (?) Vin iv.95 Snp 102
    sa3 + bhojana
    Sama1
    1. calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet Snp 896
    • samaṁ carati to become calm quiescent Ja iv.172 cp. ˚cariyā & ˚cārin;
    from śam ‣See sammati1
    Sama2
    1. fatigue Ja vi.565
    from śram ‣See sammati2
    Sama3
    adjective
    1. even, level Ja i.315 Ja iii.172 Mhvs 23, 51. samaṁ karoti to level Dhp 178 Snp-a 66 O
    2. past participle visama
    3. like equal, the same DN i.123 DN i.174 SN i.12 Snp 90 Snp 226 Snp 799 Snp 842 Iti 17 64 Dhp 306 Mil 4 The compared noun is put in the instrumental; or precedes as first part of compound 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just AN i.74 AN i.293f. Snp 215 Snp 468 Snp 952
    4. sama˚; , following by numerals, means “altogether,". e.g. ˚tiṁsa thirty altogether Bu 18, 18

      • Cases as
      • adverb : instrumental samena with justice, impartially (= dhammena Kindred Sayings i.321) Dhp 257 Ja i.180
      • accusative samaṁ equally DN ii.166 together with, at, DN ii.288 Mhvs 11 12
      1. ˚cāga equally liberal AN ii.62
      • ˚jana an ordinary man common people MN iii.154 = Vin i.349
      • ˚jātika of the same caste Ja i.68
      • ˚jīvitā regular life, living economically AN iv.281f. -tala level, even Ja i.7 Pv iv.121 (of a pond)
      • ˚dhāraṇa equal support or sustenance Snp-a 95
      • ˚dhura carrying an equal burden, equal Ja i.191 asamadhura incomparable Snp 694f. Ja i.193 But sama-dhura-ggahaṇa “complete imperiousness Vb-a 492 ‣See yugaggāha
      • ˚vāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity) Dhs-a 133
      • ˚vibhatta in equal shares Ja i.266
      • ˚sama exactly the same DN i.123 DN ii.136 Pug 64 Mil 410 DN-a i.290
      • ˚sīsin a kind of puggala literally “equal-headed,” i.e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life (cp. PugA 186. The explanation in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891, 5 is wrong) Pug 13 Nett 190
      • ˚sūpaka with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice) Vin iv.190
      Vedic sama, from sa2 ‣See etymology under saṁ˚
    Samaka
    adjective
    1. equal, like, same Mil 122 Mil 410 of the same height (of a seat) Vin ii.169 samakaṁ (adverb ) equally Mil 82
    2. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samaka Divy 585
    Samakkhāta
    1. counted, known Sdhp 70 Sdhp 458
    saṁ + akkhāta
    Samagga
    adjective
    1. being in unity, harmonious MN ii.239 DN iii.172 AN ii.240 AN v.74f.; plur. = all unitedly, in common Vin i.105 Ja vi.2731. AN i.70 = 243 Snp 281 Snp 283 Dhp 194 Thag 2, 161 Thag-a 143 Ja i.198 209; samaggakaraṇa making for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pug 57 DN-a i.74 samagganandin, samaggarata, and samaggārāma, rejoicing in peace, delighting in peace impassioned for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pug 57 DN-a i.74 samaggavāsa dwelling in concord Ja i.362 Ja ii.27-samaggi-karoti to harmonize, to conciliate DN iii.161-cp. sāmaggī etc
    saṁ + agga
    Samaggatta
    neuter
    1. agreement, consent Vin i.316
    abstract from samagga
    Samaṅgitā
    feminine
    1. the fact of being endowed or connected with (—˚) Ja iii.95 (paraloka˚) Vb-a 438 (fivefold: āyūhana˚ etc.)
    abstract from following
    Samaṅgin
    adjective
    1. endowed with, possessing Pug 13 14 Ja i.303 Mil 342 Vb-a 438
    • samaṅgibhūta possessed of, provided with DN i.36 AN ii.125 Snp 321 Vin i.15 DN-a i.121
    • samaṅgi-karoti to provide with Ja vi.266 Ja vi.289 Ja vi.290 (cp. vi.323: akarī samangiṁ)
    saṁ + angin
    Samacariyā
    feminine living in spiritual calm, quietism AN i.55 SN i.96 SN i.101f. Iti 16 52 Dhp 388 Mil 19 Ja vi.128 Dhp-a iv.145 sama1 + cariyā
    Samacāga
    1. equally liberal AN ii.62
    sama3 + cāga
    Samacārin
    1. (śama-) living in peace MN i.289
    Samacitta
    1. possessed of equanimity AN i.65 AN iv.215 Snp-a 174 (˚paṭipadā-sutta)
    Samacchati
    1. to sit down together Ja ii.67 (samacchare); iv.356; vi.104, 127
    saṁ + acchati
    Samacchidagatta
    adjective
    1. with mangled limbs Snp 673
    sam + ā + chida + gatta
    Samajja
    neuter
    1. a festive gathering, fair a show, theatrical display. Originally a mountain cult as it was especially held on the mountains near Rājagaha. Ja ii.13 Ja iii.541 Ja vi.277 Ja vi.559 SN v.170 DN-a i.84 Dhp-a iv.59 Dhs-a 255
    • On character and history of the festival ‣See Hardy, Album Kern
    • past participle 61–⁠66
    • gir-aggasamajjaṁ mountain fair Vin ii.107 150; iv.85, 267, 360 Dhp-a i.89 113. samajjaṁ karoti or kāreti to hold high revel Ja vi.383
    1. ˚ābhicaraṇa visiting fairs DN iii.183
    • ˚ṭṭhāna the place of the festival, the arena, Vin ii.150 Ja i.394
    • ˚dāna giving festivals Mil 278
    • ˚majjhe on the arena SN iv.306f. Ja iii.541
    • ˚maṇḍala the circle of the assembly Ja i.283f.
    cp. Epic Sanskrit samāja (from saṁ + aj congregation, gathering, company
    Samajjhagaṁ
    1. (B ˚-guṁ) aorist from sam-adhi-gā ‣See samadhigacchati.

    Samañcati
    1. to bend together Vin iv.171 363
    sam + añc
    Samañcara
    1. pacified, calm SN i.236
    sama1 + cara
    Samañcinteti
    1. to think SN i.124 ‣See sañcinteti
    Samaññā
    feminine
    1. designation, name DN i.202 DN ii.20 MN iii.68 SN ii.191 Snp 611 Snp 648 Ja ii.65 Dhs § 1306; loka˚ a common appellation, a popular expression DN i.202
    saṁ + aññā
    Samaññāta
    1. designated, known, notorious SN i.65 Snp 118 Snp 820 Nd1 153 Vin ii.203
    saṁ + aññāta
    Samaṇa
    1. a wanderer, recluse, religieux AN i.67 DN iii.16 95 sq., 130 sq. SN i.45 Dhp 184 of a non-Buddhist (tāpasa) Ja iii.390 an edifying etymology of the word Dhp-a iii.84: “samita-pāpattā s.,” cp. Dhp 265 “samitattā pāpānaṁ ʻ samaṇo ʼ ti pavuccati”; four grades mentioned DN ii.151 MN i.63 compare Snp 84f.; the state of a Samaṇa is attended by eight sukhas Ja i.7 the Buddha is often mentioned and addressed by nonBuddhists as Samaṇa: thus DN i.4 DN i.87 Snp p. 91, 99 Vin i.8 350; Samaṇas often opposed to Brāhmaṇas thus, DN i.13 Iti 58 60; Sn, p. 90 Vin i.12 Vin ii.110
    • samaṇabrāhmaṇā, Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas quite generally: “leaders in religious life” (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha ii.165 DN i.5 DN ii.150 AN i.110

      1. -173 sq. Iti 64 Snp 189 Vin ii.295 samaṇadhammaṁ the duties of a samaṇa AN iii.371 Ja i.106 Ja i.107 Ja i.138 pure-samaṇa a junior who walks before a Bhikkhu Vin ii.32 pacchāsamaṇa one who walks behind Vin i.186 Vin ii.32 AN iii.137
      • samaṇī a female recluse SN i.133 Thag-a 18 Ja v.424 Ja v.427 Vin iv.235
      • assamaṇa not a true samaṇa Vin i.96
      1. ˚uddesa a novice, a sāmaṇera DN i.151 MN iii.128 SN v.161 Vin iv.139 AN ii.78 AN iii.343 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śramaṇoddeśa Divy 160
      2. ˚kuttaka masculine who wears the dress of a Samaṇa Vin iii.68f. (= samaṇa-vesa-dhārako Buddhaghosa ib. p. 271)
    Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śramaṇa, from śram, but mixed in meaning with śam
    Samaṇaka
    1. a contemptible (little) ascetic, “some sort of samaṇa” DN i.90 MN ii.47 MN ii.210 Snp p. 21 Mil 222 DN-a i.254 At AN ii.48 samaṇaka is a slip for sasanaka. cp. muṇḍaka in form & meaning
    samaṇa + ka
    Samaṇḍalīkata
    1. hemmed Vin i.255 (kaṭhina)
    sa + maṇḍala + kata
    Samatā
    1. equality, evenness, normal state Vin i.183 AN iii.375f. Mil 351
    from sama3
    Samatikkama
    adjective
    1. passing beyond, overcoming DN i.34 DN ii.290 MN i.41 MN i.455 Vin i.3 Ja v.454 Vism 111
    saṁ + atikamma
    Samatikkamati
    1. to cross over, to transcend DN i.35 to elapse Mhvs 13, 5; absolutive samatikkamma DN i.35 MN 41;
    2. past participle samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from SN iii.80 Dhp 195
    3. saṁ + atikkamati
    Samatiggaṇhāti
    1. to stretch over, rise above, to reach beyond Ja iv.411 (absolutive samatiggayha)
    2. saṁ + ati + gṛh
    Samatittha
    adjective
    1. with even banks (of a pond) Ja v.407
    sama3 + tittha
    Samatitthika
    adjective

    even or level with the border or bank, i.e. quite full, brimful DN i.244 ii.89 MN i.435 MN ii.7 = Mil 213 SN ii.134 SN v.170 Ja i.400 Ja i.235 Ja i.393 Mil 121 Vism 170 (pattaṁ ˚tittikaṁ pūretvā; variant reading ˚titthikaṁ) AN iii.403 Vin i.230 Vin iv.190 often written ˚tittika and ˚tittiya. The form is probably connected with samaicchia-i.e. samaitthia (*samatisthita) in the Deśināmamālā viii.20 (Konow) Compare, however, Rhys DavidsBuddhist Suttas, p. 1781; ˚-aṁ buñjāmi Mil 213 “I eat (only just) to the full” (opposite to bhiyyo bhuñjāmi) suggests the etymology: sama-titti + ka. Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. as above. sama3 + tittha + ika

    Samatimaññti
    1. to despise (aorist ) samatimaññi Thag 2, 72
    2. saṁ + atimaññti
    Samativattati
    1. to transcend, overcome Snp 768 cp. Nd1 10
    saṁ + ativattati
    Samativijjhati
    1. to penetrate Dhp 13 = Thag 1, 133
    saṁ + ativijjhati
    Samatta1
    neuter
    1. equality AN iii.359 Mhvs 3, 7; equanimity, justice AN i.75
    abstract from sama3
    Samatta2
    1. accomplished, brought to an end AN ii.193 Snp 781 = paripuṇṇa Nd1 65
    2. cp. Sanskrit samasta, past participle of saṁ + as to throw cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samasta, e.g. Jtm xxxi.90
      1. complete, entire perfect Mil 349 Snp 881 Snp 1000Nd1 289 298. samattaṁ completely SN v.175 accomplished, full Snp 889
      cp. Sanskrit samāpta, past participle of saṁ + āp
    Samattha
    adjective
    1. able, strong Ja i.179 187 Snp-a 143
    cp. Sanskrit samartha, saṁ + artha
    Samatthita
    adjective
    1. unravelling Mil 1
    cp. Sanskrit samarthita, saṁ + past participle of arthayati
    Samatthiya
    adjective
    1. able Sdhp 619
    from samattha
    Samatha
    1. calm, quietude of heart MN i.33 AN i.61 AN i.95 AN ii.140 AN iii.86f. (ceto˚) 116 sq., 449; iv.360; v.99 DN iii.54 DN iii.213 DN iii.273 Dhp-a ii.177 SN iv.362 Dhs 11 15, 54; cessation of the Sankhāras SN i.136 SN iii.133 AN i.133 Snp 732 Vin i.5 2. settlement of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) Vin ii.93 iv.207; cp. Dhs-a 144 s. paṭivijjhati Pts i.180.

      -yānika who makes quietude his vehicle, devoted to quietude, a kind of Arahant; cp. Geiger, Saṁyutta translation ii.172

    2. ˚vipassanā introspection (“auto-hypnosis” Compendium 202) for promoting calm cp. śamatha-vipaśyanā Divy 95
      1. SN v.52 AN ii.157 Dhp-a iv.140 also separately “calm & intuition,” e.g. MN i.494
      from śam, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śamatha
    Samadhigacchati
    1. to attain Thag 1, 4 aorist samajjhagā Iti 83 3rd
    2. plural samajjhagaṁ SN i.103
    3. saṁ + adhigacchati
    Samadhigaṇhāti
    1. to reach, to get, obtain;
    2. absolutive samadhiggayha MN i.506 MN ii.25 SN i.86 Iti 16
    3. to exceed, sur
    4. passive to overcome, to master Ja vi.261 (pañhaṁ samadhiggahetvā). Often confounded with samatigaṇhāti
    saṁ + adhigaṇhāti
    Samadhosi
    variant reading SN iii.120f.; iv.46; the form is
    • aorist of saṁdhū ‣See sañcopati.

    Samana
    neuter
    1. suppression Mhvs 4, 35
    from śam
    Samanaka
    adjective
    1. endowed with mind AN ii.48 (text, samaṇaka) SN i.62
    sa3 + mana + ka
    Samanantara
    adjective
    1. immediate; usually in ablative (as adverb ); samanantarā immediately, after, just after DN ii.156 Vin i.56 rattibhāga-samanantare at midnight Ja i.101

      1. ˚paccaya the relation of immediate contiguity Tika-Paṭṭhāna 3, 61 sq.; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 26; Vism 534
      saṁ + anantara
    Samanukkamati
    1. to walk along together Ja iii.373
    saṁ + anukkamati
    Samanugāhati
    1. to ask for reasons, to question closely DN i.26 MN i.130 AN v.156f.; ppr. med samanuggāhiyamāna being pressed MN i.130 AN v.156 Vin iii.91
    saṁ + anugāhati
    Samanujānāti
    1. to approve; samanujānissanti (future 3
    2. plural ) MN i.398 SN iv.225
    3. past participle samanuññāta approved, allowed Mhvs 8, 11;
    4. aorist 1 singular samanuññāsin Ja iv.117 (= samanuñño āsiṁ Commentary ib. 11715)
    5. saṁ + anujānāti
    Samanuñña
    adjective
    1. approving DN iii.271 AN ii.253 AN iii.359 AN v.305 SN i.1 SN i.153 SN iv.187 Ja iv.117
    = next
    Samanuññā
    feminine
    1. approval SN i.1 MN i.359
    from samanujānāti
    Samanupassati
    1. to ‣See, perceive, regard DN i.69 DN i.73 DN ii.198 MN i.435f.; ii.205; Pot. Vin ii.89 ppr. ˚passanto Ja i.140 ppr. medium ˚passamāno DN ii.66 inf ˚passituṁ Vin i.14 rūpaṁ attato samanupassati to regard form as self SN iii.42
    2. saṁ + anupassati
    Samanupassanā
    feminine
    1. considering SN iii.44 Nett 27
    from last
    Samanubandhati
    1. to pursue Mhvs 10, 5
    saṁ + anubandhati
    Samanubhāsati
    1. to converse or study together DN i.26 DN i.163 MN i.130 AN i.138 AN v.156f. Vin iii.173f.; iv.236 sq. DN-a i.117
    saṁ + anubhāsati
    Samanubhāsanā
    feminine
    1. conversation, repeating together Vin iii.174f.; iv.236 sq
    from last
    Samanumaññati
    1. to approve; future 3
    2. plural ˚maññissanti MN i.398 SN iv.225
    3. aorist 3
    4. plural ˚maññiṁsu Ja iv.134
    5. saṁ + anumaññati
    Samanumodati
    1. to rejoice at, to approve MN i.398 SN iv.225 Mil 89
    saṁ + anumodati
    Samanuyuñjati
    1. to cross-question DN i.26 DN i.163 MN i.130 AN i.138 AN v.156 DN-a i.117
    saṁ + anuyuñjati
    Samanussarati
    1. (saṁ + anussarati] to recollect, call to mind SN iv.196 Vin ii.183
    Samanta
    adjective
    1. all, entire Snp 672 Mil 3 occurs usually in oblique cases used adverb ially, e.g.
    2. accusative samantaṁ completely Snp 442 ablative samantā (DN i.222 Ja ii.106 Vin i.32) & samantato (M i.168 = Vin i.5 Mhvs 1, 29; Vism 185; and in definitions of prefix pari˚ DN-a i.217 Vv-a 236 Pv-a 32) instrumental samantena (Th 2, 487) on all sides, everywhere anywhere; also used as prepositions; thus, samantā Vesāliṁ, everywhere in Vesāli DN ii.98 samantato nagarassa all round the city Mhvs 34, 39; samāsamantato everywhere DN-a i.61

      1. ˚cakkhu all-seeing, an epithet of the Buddha MN i.168 Vin i.5 Snp 345 etc. Mil 111 Nd1 360
      2. ˚pāsādika all-pleasing, quite serene AN i.24 ˚kā Buddhaghosa’s Commentary on the Vinaya Piṭaka DN-a i.84
      • ˚bhaddakatta complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness Snp-a 444 Vb-a 132
      • ˚rahita entirely gone Ja i.29
      • ˚veda one whose knowledge (of the Veda) is complete Ja vi.213
      saṁ + anta “of complete ends”
    Samandhakāra
    1. the dark of night Vin iv.54 Dhp-a ii.94 SN iii.60
    saṁ + andhakāra
    Samannāgata
    adjective
    1. followed by, possessed of, endowed with instrumental DN i.50 88 Vin i.54 Snp p. 78, 102, 104. Snp-a 177 (in explanation of ending “-in”) 216 (of “-mant”) Pv-a 46 Pv-a 73
    • nt. abstract ˚annāgatatta Pv-a 49
    saṁ + anvāgata
    Samannāneti
    1. to lead, conduct properly, control, pres. sam-anv-āneti MN iii.188 ppr. ˚annānayamāna MN i.477
    samanvā +
    Samannāhata
    1. struck (together), played upon DN ii.171
    saṁ + anvāhata
    Samannāharati
    1. to concentrate the mind on, to consider reflect DN ii.204 MN i.445 AN iii.162f. 402 sq. SN i.114–⁠2. to pay respect to, to honour MN ii.169 Vin i.180
    2. saṁ + anu + āharati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samanvāharati
    Samannāhāra
    1. concentration, bringing together MN i.190f. DN-a i.123 Mil 189
    saṁ + anu + āhāra
    Samannesati
    1. to ‣Seek, to look for, to examine DN i.105 SN iii.124 SN iv.197 Mil 37 DN-a i.274 pres. also samanvesati SN i.122
    saṁ + anvesati
    Samannesanā
    feminine
    1. search, examination MN i.317
    from last
    Samapekkhaṇa
    neuter considering; a˚ SN iii.261
    Samapekkhati
    1. to consider, absolutive ekkhiya Sdhp 536; cp. samavekkh˚
    saṁ + apekkhati
    Samappita
    1. made over, consigned Dhp 315 Snp 333 Thag 2, 451
    2. endowed with (—˚) affected with, possessed of Ja v.102 (kaṇṭakena); Pv iv.16 (= allīna Pv-a 265) Pv-a 162 (soka-salla˚-hadaya) Vism 303 (sallena)
    3. yasabhoga˚ possessed of fame wealth Dhp 303
    4. dukkhena afflicted with pain Vv 523 pañcehi kāmaguṇehi s. endowed with the 5 pleasures of the senses DN i.36 DN i.60 Vin i.15 DN-a i.121
    past participle of samappeti
    Samappeti
    1. to hand over, consign, commit, deposit, give Mhvs 7, 72; 19, 30; 21, 21; 34, 21; Dāvs ii.64. past participle samappita
    2. saṁ + appeti
    Samabbhāhata
    1. struck, beaten (thoroughly) Vism 153 DN-a i.140
    saṁ + abbhāhata
    Samabhijānāti
    1. to recollect, to know Ja vi.126
    saṁ + abhijānati
    Samabhisāta
    1. joyful Thag 2, 461
    Samabhisiñcati
    1. to inaugurate as a king Mhvs 4, 6; v.14
    saṁ + abhisiñcati
    Samaya
    1. congregation; time, condition, etc
    • At Dhs-a 57 sq we find a detailed explanation of the word samaya (s-sadda) with meanings given as follows: (1) samavāya (“harmony in antecedents” translation), (2) khaṇa (opportunity) (3) kāla (season), (4) samūha (crowd, assembly), (5) hetu (condition), (6) diṭṭhi (opinion). (7) paṭilābha (acquisition), (8) pahāna (elimination), (9) paṭivedha (penetration) Buddhaghosa illustrates each one with fitting examples cp. Dhs-a 61
    • We may group as follows: 1. coming together, gathering; a crowd, multitude DN i.178 (˚pavādaka debating hall); ii.254 sq. Mil 257 Ja i.373 Pv-a 86 (= samāgama). samayā in a crowd Pv iii.34 (so read for samayyā Pv-a 189 “sangamma”). 2. consorting with, intercourse Mil 163 Dhp-a i.90
    • sabba˚ consorting with everybody Ja iv.317
    • time point of time, season DN i.1 Snp 291 Snp 1015 Vin i.15 Vb-a 157 (maraṇa˚); Vism 473 (definition); -samayā samayaṁ upādāya from time to time Iti 75 Cases
    • adverb ially ekaṁ samayaṁ at one time DN i.47 DN i.87 DN i.111
    • tena samayena at that time DN i.179 Dhp-a i.90
    • aparena s. in course of time, later Pv-a 31 Pv-a 68; yasmiṁ samaye at which time DN i.199 Dhs-a 61
    • ekasmiṁ samaye some time, once Ja i.306
    • paccūsa˚ at daybreak Pv-a 38
    • aḍḍharatti˚ at midnight Pv-a 155 cp. ratta˚

  • proper time, due season, opportunity, occasion Snp 388 Vin iv.77 Bu ii.181; Mhvs 22, 59 Vb-a 283f.; aññatra samayā except at due season Vin iii.212 Vin iv.77

    • samaye at the right time Ja i.27
    • asamaya inopportune, unseasonable DN iii.263 DN iii.287
    • coincidence, circumstance MN i.438
    • akkhara˚ spelling Dhp-a i.181

  • condition, state extent, sphere (cp. definition of Buddhaghosa, above 9); taken dogmatically as “diṭṭhi,” doctrine, view (equal to above definition 6) Iti 14 (imamhi samaye) Dhp-a i.90 (jānana˚) Dāvs vi.4 (˚antara various views). bāhira˚; state of an outsider, doctrine of outsiders, i.e. brahmanic Dhp-a iii.392 cp. brāhmaṇānaṁ samaye DN-a i.291 ariyānaṁ samaye Mil 229

    • end, conclusion, annihilation Snp 876
    • ˚vimutta finally emancipated AN iii.173 AN v.336 (a˚) Pug 11 cp. Dhs-a 57
    • past participle abhi˚;
    1. ˚vasaṭha at AN ii.41 is to be read as samavasaṭṭha, i.e. thoroughly given up. Thus Kern, Toevoegselen The same passage occurs at DN iii.269 as samavaya-saṭhesana ‣See under saṭha
    cp. Sanskrit samaya, from saṁ + i ‣See also samiti
  • Samara
    1. battle Dāvs iv.1
    sa + mara
    Samala
    adjective
    1. impure, contaminated Vin i.5 samalā feminine dustbin SN ii.270 (= gāmato gūthanikkhamana-magga, i.e. sewer Kindred Sayings ii.203) ‣See sandhi˚
    2. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samala
    Samalaṅkaroti
    1. to decorate, adorn Mhvs 7, 56; ˚kata past participle Dāvs v.36: ˚karitvā Ja vi.577
    2. saṁ + alankaroti
    Samavaṭṭhita
    1. ready Snp 345 (˚-ā savanāya sotā)
    Samavattakkhandha
    adjective
    1. having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaṇas of a Buddha DN ii.18 DN iii.144 DN iii.164 Dialogues of the Buddha ii.15: “his bust is equally rounded.”
    sama + vatta + kh., but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sasaṁvṛtta˚
    Samavattasaṁvāsa
    1. living together with the same duties, on terms of equality Ja i.236
    sama + vatta1 + saṁvāsa
    Samavadhāna
    neuter concurrence, co-existence Nett 79.
    Samavaya
    1. annihilation, termination (?) ‣See samaya (compound) & saṭha
    Samavasarati
    1. of a goad or spur Thag 2, 210 ‣See samosarati
    Samavāpaka
    neuter
    1. a storeroom MN i.451
    sama + vāpaka, cp. vapati1
    Samavāya
    masculine coming together, combination SN iv.68 Mil 376 Dhs-a 57 196 Pv-a 104 Vv-a 20 55. samavāyena in common Vv-a 336 khaṇa-s˚ a momentary meeting Ja i.381
    Samavekkhati
    1. to consider, examine MN i.225 AN ii.32 Iti 30
    saṁ + avekkhati
    Samavekkhitar
    1. one who considers Iti 120
    from last
    Samavepākin
    adjective
    1. promoting a good digestion DN ii.177 DN iii.166 MN ii.67 AN iii.65f. 103, 153; v.15
    sama + vepākin, cp. vepakka
    Samavossajjati
    1. to transfer, entrust DN ii.231
    read saṁvossajjati !
    Samavhaya
    1. a name Dāvs v.67
    saṁ + ahvaya
    Samasāyisun
    1. (aorist ) Ja iii.201 (text, samāsāsisuṁ, cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 60; read taṁ asāyisuṁ).

    Samassattha
    1. refreshed, relieved Ja iii.189
    saṁ + assattha2
    Samassasati
    1. to be refreshed Ja i.176 causative samassāseti to relieve, refresh Ja i.175
    2. saṁ + assasati
    Samassāsa
    1. refreshing, relief Dhs-a 150 (explanation of passaddhi)
    saṁ + assāsa
    Samassita
    1. leaning towards Thag 1, 525
    saṁ + assita
    Samā
    feminine
    1. a year Dhp 106 Mhvs 7, 78. - 2. in agginisamā a pyre Snp 668 Snp 670
    2. Vedic samā
    Samākaḍḍhati
    1. to pull along; to entice; absolutive ˚iya Mhvs 37, 145
    2. saṁ + ākaḍḍhati
    Samākiṇṇa
    1. covered, filled SN i.6 Mil 342
    saṁ + ākiṇṇa
    Samākula
    adjective
    1. filled, crowded B ii.4 = Ja i.3 Mil 331 Mil 342
    2. crowded together Vin ii.117
    3. confused, jumbled together Ja v.302

      saṁ + ākula
    Samāgacchati
    1. to meet together, to assemble Bu ii.171 Snp 222 to associate with, to enter with, to meet, DN ii.354 Snp 834 Ja ii.82 to go to ‣See Vin i.308 to arrive, come Snp 698 aorist 1 singular ˚gañchiṁ DN ii.354 3rd ˚gañchi Dhp 210 Ja ii.62
    2. aorist 2 singular ˚gamā Snp 834
    3. absolutive ˚gamma B ii.171 = J i.26;
    4. absolutive ˚gantvā Vin i.308
    5. past participle samāgata
    6. saṁ + āgacchati
    Samāgata
    1. met, assembled Dhp 337 Snp 222
    past participle of samāgacchati
    Samāgama
    1. meeting, meeting with, intercourse AN ii.51 AN iii.31 Mil 204 cohabitation DN ii.268 meeting, assembly Ja ii.107 Mil 349 Dhp-a iii.443 (three: yamaka-pāṭihāriya˚; dev'orohaṇa˚; Gangārohaṇa˚)
    saṁ + āgama
    Samācarati
    1. to behave, act, practise MN ii.113
    saṁ + ācarati
    Samācāra
    1. conduct, behaviour DN ii.279 DN iii.106 DN iii.217 MN ii.113 AN ii.200 AN ii.239 AN iv.82 Snp 279 Vin ii.248 Vin iii.184
    saṁ + ācāra
    Samātapa
    1. ardour, zeal AN iii.346
    saṁ + ātapa
    Samādapaka
    1. instructing, arousing MN i.145 AN ii.97 AN iv.296 AN iv.328 v.155 SN v.162 Mil 373 Iti 107 Dhp-a ii.129
    from samādapeti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samādāpaka Divy 142
    Samādapana
    neuter instructing, instigating MN iii.132
    Samādapetar
    1. adviser, instigator MN i.16
    Samādapeti
    1. to cause to take, to incite, rouse Pug 39 55 Vin i.250 Vin iii.73 DN-a i.293 300; aorist ˚dapesi DN ii.42 DN ii.95 206 Mil 195 Snp 695
    2. absolutive ˚dapetvā DN i.126 Vin i.18
    3. absolutive samādetvā (sic) Mhvs 37, 201; ppr.
    4. passive ˚dapiyamāna DN ii.42
    5. saṁ + ādapeti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samādāpayati Divy 51
    Samādahati
    1. to put together SN i.169 jotiṁ s. to kindle a fire Vin iv.115 cittaṁ s. to compose the mind, concentrate MN i.116 pres. samādheti Thag 2 50; pr. participle samādahaṁ SN v.312 ppr. medium samādahāna SN i.169
    2. aorist 3rd
    3. plural samādahaṁsu DN ii.254
    4. passive samādhiyati to be stayed, composed DN i.73 MN i.37 Mil 289
    5. causative II. samādahāpeti Vin iv.115

      • pp samāhita
      saṁ + ādahati1
    Samādāna
    1. 1. taking, bringing; asamādānacāra masculine going for alms without taking with one (the usual set of three robes) Vin i.254
    2. taking upon oneself, undertaking acquiring MN i.305f. AN i.229f.; ii.52 Ja i.157 Ja i.219 Vin iv.319 Kp-a 16, 142. kammasamādāna acquiring for oneself of Karma DN i.82 AN iii.417 AN v.33 SN v.266 SN v.304 Iti 58f. 99 sq. Vb-a 443f.
    3. resolution vow Vin ii.268 Ja i.233 Mil 352

    Samādinna
    1. taken up, undertaken AN ii.193
    past participle of samādiyati
    Samādiyati
    1. to take with oneself, to take upon oneself, to undertake DN i.146 imperative samādiya Bu ii.118 = J i.20;
    2. aorist samādiyi SN i.232 Ja i.219
    3. absolutive samādiyitvā SN i.232 & samādāya having taken up, i.e. with DN i.71 Pug 58 DN-a i.207 Mhvs 1, 47; having taken upon himself, conforming to DN i.163 DN ii.74 Dhp 266 Snp 792 Snp 898 Snp 962 samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu he adopts and trains himself in the precepts DN i.63 SN v.187 Iti 118 Snp 962 (cp. Nd1 478)

      • pp samādinna
      saṁ + ādiyati1
    Samādisati
    1. to indicate, to command DN i.211 Mhvs 38, 59
    saṁ + ādisati
    Samādhāna
    neuter
    1. putting together, fixing; concentration Vism 84 (= sammā ādhānaṁ ṭhapanaṁ) in definition of samādhi as “samādhān’ aṭṭhena.”
    saṁ + ā + dhā
    Samādhi
    1. concentration; a concentrated, self-collected, intent state of mind and meditation which, concomitant with right living, is a necessary condition to the attainment of higher wisdom and emancipation. In the Subha-suttanta of the Dīgha (DN i.209f.) samādhi-khandha (“section on concentration”) is the title otherwise given to the cittasampadā, which, in the ascending order of merit accruing from the life of a samaṇa ‣See Sāmaññaphala-suttanta, and cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.57 sq. stands between the sīla-sampadā and the paññā-sampadā. In the Ambaṭṭha-sutta the corresponding terms are sīla, caraṇa, vijjā (D. i.100) Thus samādhi would comprise (a) the guarding of the senses (indriyesu gutta-dvāratā), (b) self-possession (sati-sampajañña), (c) contentment (santuṭṭhi), (d emancipation from the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) (e) the 4 jhānas. In the same way we find samādhi grouped as one of the sampadās at AN iii.12 (sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚), and as samādhi-khandha (with sīla˚ & paññā˚) at DN iii.229 (+ vimutti˚) AN i.125 ii.20; iii.15; v.326 Nd1 21; Nd2 p. 277 (s.v. sīla) It is defined as cittassa ekaggatā MN i.301 Dhs 15 Dhs-a 118 cp. Compendium 89 note 4; identified with avikkhepa Dhs 57 and with samatha Dhs 54
    2. sammā˚ is one the constituents of the eightfold ariya-magga, e.g. DN iii.277 Vb-a 120 sq
    3. See further DN ii.123 (ariya) Vin i.97 104 SN i.28 Nd1 365 Mil 337 Vism 84 sq. (with definition), 289 (+ vipassanā), 380 (˚vipphārā iddhi) Vb-a 91 Dhp-a i.427 and on term in general Heiler Buddhistische Versenkung 104 sq
    4. Description characterization of; samādhi : Its four nimittas or signs are the four satipaṭṭhānas MN i.301 six conditions and six hindrances AN iii.427 other hindrances MN iii.158 The second jhāna is born from samādhi DN ii.186 it is a condition for attaining kusalā dhammā AN i.115 Mil 38 conducive to insight AN iii.19 AN iii.24f. 200 SN iv.80 to ‣Seeing heavenly sights etc. DN i.173 to removing mountains etc. AN iii.311 removes the delusions of self AN i.132f.; leads to Arahantship AN ii.45 the ānantarika s. Snp 226 cetosamādhi (rapture of mind) DN i.13 AN ii.54 AN iii.51 SN iv.297
    5. citta˚ identical Nett 16. dhammasamādhi almost identical with samatha SN iv.350 sq
    6. Two grades of samādhi distinguished viz. upacāra -s. (preparatory concentration) and appanā -s (attainment concentration) DN-a i.217 Vism 126; Compendium 54, 56 sq.; only the latter results in jhāna; to these a 3rd (preliminary) grade is added as khaṇika˚; (momentary at Vism 144
    7. Three kinds of s. are distinguished suññata or empty, appaṇihita or aimless, and animitta or signless AN i.299 SN iv.360 cp. iv.296 Vin iii.93 Mil 337 cp. 333 sq. Dhs-a 179f. 222 sq., 290 sq ‣See Yogāvacara’s Manual p. xxvii; samādhi (tayo samādhī) is savitakka savicāra, avitakka vicāramatta or avitakka avicāra DN iii.219 Kvu 570; cp. 413 Mil 337 Dhs-a 179f.; it is fourfold chanda-, viriya-, citta-, and vīmaṁsā-samādhi DN ii.213 SN v.268
    8. Another fourfold division is that into hāna-bhāgiya, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚ nibbedha˚ DN iii.277 (as “dhammā duppaṭivijjhā”)
      1. ˚indriya the faculty of concentration AN ii.149 Dhs 15
      • ˚khandha the section on s ‣See above 1
      • ˚ja produced by concentration DN i.74 DN iii.13 Vism 158
      • ˚parikkhāra requisite to the attainment of samādhi: either 4 (the sammappadhānas) MN i.301 or 7: DN ii.216 DN iii.252 AN iv.40
      • ˚ bala the power of concentration AN i.94 ii.252 DN iii.213 DN iii.253 Dhs 28
      • ˚bhāvanā cultivation attainment of samādhi MN i.301 AN ii.44f. (four different kinds mentioned); iii.25 sq. DN iii.222 Vism 371 -saṁvattanika conducive to concentration AN ii.57 SN iv.272f. DN iii.245 Dhs 1344
      • ˚sambojjhaṅga the s. constituent of enlightment DN iii.106 DN iii.226 DN iii.252 Vism 134 = Vb-a 283 (with the eleven means of cultivating it)
      from saṁ + ā + dhā
    Samādhika
    adjective
    1. excessive, abundant DN ii.151 Ja ii.383 Ja iv.31
    sama + adhika
    Samādhiyati
    1. is Passive of samādahati
    Samāna1
    adjective
    1. similar, equal, even, same Snp 18 Snp 309 Ja ii.108 cp. sāmañña1
    Vedic samāna, from sama3
    Samāna2
    1. being, existing DN i.18 DN i.60 Ja i.218 Pv-a 129 (= santo), 167 (identical)
    2. a kind of god DN ii.260
      1. ˚āsanika entitled to a seat of the same height Vin ii.169
      • ˚gatika identical Tika-Paṭṭhāna 35
      • ˚bhāva equanimity Snp 702
      • ˚vassika having spent the rainy season together Vin i.168f. -saṁvāsa living together with equals Dhp 302 (a˚), cp. Dhp-a iii.462
      • ˚saṁvāsaka belonging to the same communion Vin i.321
      • ˚sīmā the same boundary parish Vin i.321 ˚ma belonging to the same parish Vin ii.300
      ppr. from as to be
    Samānatta
    adjective
    1. equanimous, of even mind AN iv.364
    samāna + attan
    Samānattatā
    feminine
    1. equanimity, impartiality AN ii.32 = 248; iv.219, 364 DN iii.152 DN iii.190f. 232
    abstract from last
    Samāniyā
    1. (all) equally, in common Snp 24
    instrumental feminine of samāna, used
  • adverb ially, Vedic samānyā
  • Samānīta
    1. brought home, settled Mil 349
    past participle of samāneti
    Samāneti
    1. to bring together Ja i.68
    2. to bring, produce Ja i.433
    3. to put together, cp. Ja i.120 148.

      • to collect, enumerate Ja i.429

    4. to calculate (the time) Ja i.120 Ja i.148

      • aorist samānayi DN-a i.275
      • past participle samānīta
      saṁ + āneti
    Samāpajjati
    1. to come into, enter upon, attain DN i.215 (samādhiṁ samāpajji) Vin iii.241 (Pot. ˚pajjeyya); samāpattiṁ Ja i.77
    2. arahattamaggaṁ AN ii.42f. Vin i.32 saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ to attain the trance of cessation SN iv.293 kayavikkayaṁ to engage in buying and selling Vin iii.241
    3. sākacchaṁ to engage in conversation DN ii.109 tejodhātuṁ to convert one’s body into fire Vin i.25 Vin ii.76
    4. to become SN iii.86 (
    5. aorist 3rd
    6. plural samāpaduṁ).
    7. past participle samāpajjita samāpanna;
    saṁ + āpajjati
    Samāpajjana
    neuter
    1. entering upon, passing through (?) Mil 176
    from last
    Samāpajjita
    1. attained, reached, got into DN ii.109 (parisā ˚pubbā)
    past participle of ˚āpajjati
    Samāpaṭipatti
    1. misprint for sammā˚ AN i.69
    Samāpatti
    feminine

    attainment AN iii.5 SN ii.150f.; iv.293 (saññā-vedayita-nirodha˚) Dhs 30 101; a stage of meditation AN i.94 Dhs 1331 Ja i.343 473 Pv-a 61 (mahā-karuṇā˚) Nd1 100 106, 139, 143 the Buddha acquired anekakoṭisata-sahassā s. Ja i.77 The eight attainments comprise the four Jhānas, the realm of the infinity of space, realm of the infinity of consciousness, realm of nothingness, realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness Ps i.8, 20 sq. Nd1 108 328; Bu 192 = J i.28, 54; necessary for becoming a Buddha Ja i.14 acquired by the Buddha Ja i.66 the nine attainments, the preceding and the trance of cessation of perception and sensation SN ii.216 SN ii.222 described MN i.159f. etc.; otherwise called anupubbavihārā DN ii.156 AN iv.410 AN iv.448 & passim cp. Divy 95 etc.

    • In collocation with jhāna, vimokkha, and samādhi Vin i.97 AN iii.417f.; cp. Compendium 59, 133 note 3 —˚bhāvanā realizing the attainments Ja i.67
    • ˚kusalatā success in attainment DN iii.212 Dhs 1331f.
    from saṁ + ā + pad
    Samāpattila
    1. one who has acquired Ja i.406
    from last
    Samāpattesiya
    adjective
    1. longing for attainment Kvu 502 sq
    samāpatti + esiya, adjective to esikā
    Samāpanna
    1. having attained, got to, entered, reached SN iv.293 (saññā-nirodhaṁ) AN ii.42 (arahatta-maggaṁ entered the Path) Dhp 264 (icchālobha˚ given to desire); Kvu 572 (in special sense attaining the samāpattis)
    past participle of samāpajjati
    Samāpannaka
    adjective
    1. possessed of the samāpattis DN-a i.119
    last + ka
    Samāpeti
    1. to complete, conclude Mhvs 5, 280; 30, 55 DN-a i.307 (desanaṁ). past participle samatta2
    2. saṁ + āpeti
    Samāyāti
    1. to come together, to be united Ja iii.38
    saṁ + āyāti
    Samāyuta
    1. combined, united Mil 274
    saṁ + āyuta
    Samāyoga
    1. combination, conjunction DN-a i.95 Sdhp 45 Sdhp 469
    saṁ + āyoga
    Samāraka
    adjective
    1. including Māra Vin i.11 = SN v.423 DN i.250 DN iii.76 DN iii.135 & passim
    sa3 + māra + ka
    Samāraddha
    1. undertaken SN iv.197 Dhp 293 Ja ii.61
    past participle of samārabhati
    Samārambha
    1. undertaking, effort, endeavour, activity AN ii.197f. (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚) Vin iv.67
    2. injuring, killing, slaughter Snp 311 DN i.5 DN-a i.77 AN ii.197 SN v.470 Pug 58 Dhs-a 146-appasamārambha (written ˚rabbha) connected with little (or no) injury (to life) DN i.143 cp. ārabhati1
    saṁ + ārambha
    Samārabhati
    1. to begin, undertake MN i.227 Mhvs 5, 79. past participle samāraddha
    2. saṁ + ārabhati2
    Samāruhati
    1. to climb up, to ascend, enter; pres. samārohati Ja vi.209 (cp. samorohatī p. 206, read samārohatī); aorist samārūhi Mhvs 14, 38.
    2. past participle samārūḷha.
    3. causative samāropeti to raise, cause to enter Mil 85 to put down, enter Nett 4, 206
    4. saṁ + āruhati
    Samārūḷha
    1. ascended, entered MN i.74
    past participle of samāruhati
    Samāropana
    1. one of the Hāras Nett 1, 2, 4, 108, 205 sq., 256 sq
    from samāropeti
    Samālapati
    1. to speak to, address Ja i.478 At Ja i.51 it seems to mean “to recover the power of speech.” Samavaya = samavaya
    saṁ + ālapati
    Samāvaya = samavāya
    1. , closely united Ja vi.475 (in verse)
    Samāsa
    1. compound, combination Vism 82 Snp-a 303 Kp-a 228. cp. vyāsa
    2. an abridgment Mhvs 37, 244
    from saṁ + ās
    Samāsati
    1. to sit together, associate; Pot. 3 singular samāsetha SN i.17 SN i.56f. Ja ii.112 Ja v.483 Ja v.494 Thag 1, 4
    saṁ + āsati
    Samāsana
    neuter
    1. sitting together with, company Snp 977
    saṁ + āsana
    Samāsama
    1. "exactly the same” at Ud 85 (= DN ii.135) read sama˚
    Samāsādeti
    1. to obtain, get; absolutive samāsajja Ja iii.218
    2. saṁ + āsādeti
    Samāhata
    1. hit, struck Snp 153 (ayosanku˚) Mil 181 Mil 254 Mil 304 Sankusamāhata name of a purgatory MN i.337
    saṁ + āhata
    Samāhita
    1. put down, fitted Ja iv.337
    2. collected (of mind), settled, composed, firm, attentive DN i.13 SN i.169 AN ii.6 (˚indriya); iii.312, 343 sq.v.3, 93 sq., 329 sq. Snp 212 Snp 225 Snp 972 etc. Dhp 362 Iti 119 Pug 35 Vin iii.4 Mil 300 Vism 410 Nd1 501
    3. having attained SN i.48 (cp. Kindred Sayings i.321 & Mil 352).

      past participle of samādahati
    Samijjhati
    1. to succeed, prosper, take effect DN i.71 Snp 766 (cp. Nd1 2 = labhati etc.); Bu ii.59 Ja i.14 Ja i.267 Pot. samijjheyyuṁ DN i.71 aorist samijjhi Ja i.68
    2. future samijjhissati Ja i.15
    3. past participle samiddha.
    4. causative II. ˚ijjhāpeti to endow or invest with (
    5. accusative ) Ja vi.484
    6. saṁ + ijjhati
    Samijjhana
    neuter
    1. fulfilment, success Dhp-a i.112
    from samijjhati
    Samijjhiṭṭha
    1. ordered, requested Ja vi.12 (= āṇatta Commentary )
    saṁ + ajjhiṭṭha
    Samiñjati
    1. to double up MN i.326
    2. intranstitive to be moved or shaken Dhp 81 (= calati kampati Dhp-a ii.149) ‣See also sammiñjati
    saṁ + iñjati of ṛñj or ṛj to stretch
    Samiñjana
    neuter
    1. doubling up, bending back (originally stretching!) Vism 500 (opposite pasāraṇa) ‣See also sammiñjana
    from samiñjati
    Samita1
    1. gathered, assembled Vv 6410 Vv-a 277
    • nt. as
    • adverb samitaṁ continuously MN i.93 AN iv.13 Iti 116 Mil 70 Mil 116
    saṁ + ita, past participle of sameti
    Samita2
    1. equal (in measure), like SN i.6
    sa + mita, of
    Samita3
    1. quiet, appeased Dhp-a iii.84
    past participle of sammati1
    Samita4
    1. arranged, put in order Ja v.201 (= saṁvidahita Commentary )
    past participle of saṁ + śam to labour
    Samitatta
    neuter
    1. state of being quieted Dhp 265
    from samita3
    Samitāvin
    1. one who has quieted himself, calm, Snp 449 Snp 520 SN i.62 SN i.188 AN ii.49 AN ii.50 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śamitāvin & samitāvin
    samita3 + āvin, cp. vijitāvin
    Samiti
    feminine
    1. assembly DN ii.256 Dhp 321 Ja iv.351 Pv ii.313 (= sannipāta Pv-a 86) Dhp-a iv.13
    from saṁ + i
    Samiddha
    1. succeeded, successful Vin i.37 Bu ii.4 = J i.3 Mil 331
    2. rich, magnificent Ja vi.393 Ja iii.14
    3. samiddhena (
    4. adverb ) successfully Ja vi.314
    past participle of samijjhati
    Samiddhi
    feminine
    1. success, prosperity Dhp 84 SN i.200
    from samijjhati
    Samiddhika
    adjective
    1. rich in, abounding in Sdhp 421
    samiddhi + ka
    Samiddhin
    adjective
    1. richly endowed with Thag-a 18 (Ap v.23); feminine

      • inī Ja v.90
      from samiddhi
    Samidhā
    feminine
    1. fuel, firewood Snp-a 174
    from saṁ + idh ‣See indhana
    Samihita
    1. collected, composed Vin i.245 = DN i.104 = 238 AN iii.224 = 229 = DN-a i.273 DN i.241 DN i.272
    = saṁhita
    Samīcī
    1. DN ii.94 ‣See sāmīcī;
    Samītar
    1. one who meets, assembles; plural samītāro Ja v.324
    2. = sametar
    Samīpa
    adjective
    1. near, close (to) Snp-a 43 (bhumma-vacana), 174, 437; Kp-a 111 Pv-a 47 (dvāra˚ magga) neuter proximity DN i.118 Cases
    2. adverb ially:
    3. accusative ˚aṁ near to Pv-a 107
    4. locative ˚-e near (with genitive) Snp-a 23 256 Pv-a 10 Pv-a 17 Pv-a 67 Pv-a 120.

      1. ˚ga approaching Mhvs 4, 27; 25, 74
      2. ˚cara being near Dhs-a 193
      • ˚cārin being near DN i.206 DN ii.139
      • ˚ṭṭha standing near Mhvs 37, 164
      cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit samīpa
    Samīpaka
    adjective
    1. being near Mhvs 33, 52
    samīpa + ka
    Samīra
    1. air, wind Dāvs iv.40
    from saṁ + īr
    Samīrati
    1. to be moved Vin i.185 Dhp 81 Dhp-a ii.149 past participle samīrita Ja i.393
    2. saṁ + īrati
    Samīrita
    1. stirred, moved Ja i.393
    saṁ + īrita
    Samīhati
    1. to move, stir; to be active; to long for, strive after Snp 1064 (cp. Nd2 651) Vv 51 Vv-a 35 Ja v.388 past participle samīhita
    2. saṁ + īhati
    Samīhita
    neuter
    1. endeavour, striving after, pursuit Ja v.388
    past participle of samīhati
    Samukkaṁsati
    1. to extol, to praise Snp 132 Snp 438 MN i.498 past participle samukkaṭṭha
    2. saṁ + ukkaṁsati
    Samukkaṭṭha
    1. exalted AN iv.293 Thag 1, 632
    saṁ + ukkaṭṭha
    Samukkācanā
    1. = ukkācanā Vb 352 Vism 23
    Samukkheṭita
    1. despised, rejected Vin iii.95 Vin iv.27
    saṁ + ukkheṭita
    Samugga
    1. a box, basket Ja i.265 Ja i.372 Ja i.383 Mil 153 Mil 247 Sdhp 360 (read samuggābhaṁ) Samugga-jātaka the 436th Jātaka Ja iii.527f. (called Karaṇḍaka-Jātaka ibid.; v.455)
    Classical Sanskrit samudga
    Samuggaṇhāti
    1. to seize, grasp, embrace; absolutive samuggahāya Snp 797 Nd1 105
    2. past participle samuggahīta
    3. saṁ + uggaṇhati
    Samuggata
    1. arisen Vv-a 280 Ja iv.403 (text samuggagata)
    saṁ + uggata
    Samuggama
    1. rise, origin Vb-a 21 (twofold, of the khandhas)
    saṁ + uggama
    Samuggahīta
    1. seized, taken up Snp 352 Snp 785 Snp 801 Snp 837 Snp 907 Nd1 76 100, 193
    past participle of samuggaṇhāti
    Samuggirati
    1. to throw out, eject Vv-a 199 to cry aloud Dāvs v.29
    saṁ + uggirati
    Samugghāta
    1. uprooting, abolishing, removal DN i.135 MN i.136 AN ii.34 AN iii.407 AN v.198 SN ii.263 SN iii.131 SN iv.31 Vin i.107 110 Ja iii.397
    saṁ + ugghāta; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samudghāṭa Lal. Vist. 36, 571
    Samugghātaka
    adjective
    1. removing Mil 278
    from last
    Samugghātita
    1. abolished, completely removed; neuter abstract ˚tta Mil 101
    2. past participle of samugghāteti ‣See samūhanati
    Samucita
    1. suitable Vin iv.147 (must mean something else here, perhaps “hurt,” or “frightened”) Dāvs v.55
    saṁ + ucita, past participle of uc to be pleased
    Samuccaya
    1. collection, accumulation Ja ii.235 (the signification of the particle vā) Snp-a 266 (identical)
    • samuccaya-kkhandhaka the third section of Cullavagga Vin ii.38–⁠72
    saṁ + uccaya
    Samucchaka
    1. ‣See samuñchaka
    Samucchati
    1. to be consolidated, to arise samucchissatha (conditional ) DN ii.63
    2. derivation and meaning uncertain; Windisch, Buddha’s Geburt, p. 39, note 1 derives it from saṁ + mucchati cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 157
    Samucchita
    1. infatuated SN i.187 SN iv.71 Thag 1, 1219 It is better to read pamucchita at all passages
    saṁ + mucchita
    Samucchindati
    1. to extirpate, abolish, spoil, give up DN i.34 DN ii.74 MN i.101f. 360 Ja iv.63 past participle samucchinna
    2. saṁ + ucchindati
    Samucchinna
    1. cut off, extirpated DN i.34
    saṁ + ucchinna
    Samuccheda
    1. cutting off, abolishing, giving up MN i.360 Kp-a 142; sammā s. Ps i.101; ˚pahāna relinquishing by extirpation Vism 5 Snp-a 9 ˚maraṇa dying by extirpation (of saṁsāra) Vism 229; ˚visuddhi Ps ii.3; ˚suññaṁ Ps ii.180
    saṁ + uccheda
    Samujjala
    adjective
    1. resplendent Ja i.89 Ja i.92 (pañcavaṇṇa-vattha˚). raṁsi-jāla˚ resplendent with the blaze of rays Vv-a 12 14, 166
    saṁ + ujjala
    Samujju
    adjective
    1. straightforward, perfect Snp 352 SN iv.196 (text saṁmuju)
    saṁ + uju
    Samuñchaka
    adjective
    1. only as neuter adverb ˚ṁ gleaning, (living) by gleaning SN i.19 Ja iv.466 (˚ṁ carati)
    2. saṁ + uncha + ka
    Samuṭṭhahati
    1. to rise up, to originate; pres. samuṭṭhāti Vin v.1 aorist samuṭṭhahi Mhvs 28 16.
    2. past participle samuṭṭhita.
    3. causative samuṭṭhāpeti to raise to originate, set on foot Ja i.144 Ja i.191 Ja i.318
    4. saṁ + uṭṭhahati
    Samuṭṭhāna
    neuter
    1. rising, origination, cause; as adjective (—˚) arising from AN ii.87 Dhs 766f. 981, 1175 Mil 134 Mil 302 Mil 304 Ja i.207 Ja iv.171 Kp-a 23, 31, 123 Vism 366
    saṁ + uṭṭhāna
    Samuṭṭhānika
    adjective
    1. originating Dhs-a 263
    from last
    Samuṭṭhāpaka
    1. (feminine ˚ikā)

      1. occasioning, causing Dhs-a 344 Vv-a 72
      from samuṭṭhāpeti
    Samuṭṭhita
    1. arisen, originated, happened, occurred Ja ii.196 Dhs 1035
    past participle of samuṭṭhahati
    Samuttarati
    1. to passive over Mil 372
    2. saṁ + uttarati
    Samuttejaka
    adjective
    1. instigating, inciting, gladdening MN i.146 AN ii.97 AN iv.296 AN iv.328 AN v.155 SN v.162 Iti 107
    from samuttejeti
    Samuttejeti
    1. to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin i.18 DN i.126 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samuttejayati e.g. Divy 80
    saṁ + ud + tij
    Samudaya
    1. rise, origin DN i.17 DN ii.33 DN ii.308 DN iii.227 AN i.263 (kamma˚) Vin i.10 Snp p. 135 Iti 16 (samuddaya metri causa) etc. dukkha˚; the origin of ill, the second ariya-sacca, e.g. DN iii.136 AN i.177 Vism 495 (where samudaya is explained in its parts as sam u + aya) Vb-a 124
    2. bursting forth, effulgence (pabhā˚) Ja i.83
    3. produce, revenue DN i.227

      saṁ + udaya
    Samudāgacchati
    1. to result, rise; to be got, to be at hand DN i.116 MN i.104 past participle samudāgata
    2. saṁ + udāgacchati
    Samudāgata
    1. arisen, resulted; received SN ii.24 Snp 648 (= āgata Commentary )
    past participle of last
    Samudāgama
    1. beginning Ja i.2
    saṁ + ud + āgama
    Samudācarati
    1. to be current, to be in use MN i.40 (= kāya-vacī-dvāraṁ sampatta s. MA 182)
    2. to occur to, to befall, beset, assail MN i.109 MN i.112 453 SN ii.273 Iti 31 Vism 343
    3. to behave towards to converse with instrumental, to address Vin i.9 DN ii.154 192 AN iii.124 AN iii.131 AN iv.415 AN iv.440 AN v.103 Ja i.192

      • to practise Ja ii.33 (
      • aorist ˚ācariṁsu)

    4. to claim, to boast of Vin iii.91

      • past participle samudāciṇṇa
      saṁ + ud + ācarati
    Samudācaritatta
    neuter
    1. practice Mil 59
    abstract from samudācarita, past participle of samudācarati
    Samudācāra
    1. behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity Ja iv.22 Snp-a 6 Dhs-a 392 Pv-a 279
    saṁ + ud + ācāra
    Samudāciṇṇa
    1. practised, indulged in Ja ii.33 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 320
    past participle of samudācarati
    Samudānaya
    adjective
    1. to be procured or attained Ja iii.313 (su˚)
    gerundive of samudāneti
    Samudānīta
    1. collected, procured Ja iv.177
    past participle of samudāneti, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samudānīta MVastu i.231
    Samudāneti
    1. to collect, procure, attain get MN i.104 Snp 295 past participle ˚ānīta
    2. saṁ + ud + āneti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samudānayati Divy 26 Divy 50, 490; Avs i.199
    Samudāya
    1. multitude, quantity Vv-a 175 the whole Vv-a 276
    from saṁ + ud + ā + i
    Samudāvaṭa
    1. restrained Dhs-a 75
    saṁ + ud + āvaṭa? Better read as saṁ + udāvatta
    Samudāhāra
    1. talk, conversation Mil 344
    • piya˚ AN v.24 AN v.27 AN v.90 201, 339 Thag-a 226
    saṁ + udāhāra, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samudāhāra Divy 143
    Samudikkhati
    1. to behold Thag-a 147 (Ap. v.52)
    saṁ + udikkhati
    Samudita
    1. arisen Dāvs v.4
    2. excited SN i.136
    3. united Vv-a 321

      saṁ + udita1
    Samudīraṇa
    neuter
    1. moving MN i.119 DN i.76 Vism 365 Dhs-a 307
    saṁ + udīraṇa in meaning udīreti.1
    Samudīrita
    1. uttered Ja vi.17
    saṁ + udīrita
    Samudeti
    1. to arise; pres. samudayati (variant reading samudīyati) SN ii.78
    • samudeti AN iii.338
    • past participle samudita
    saṁ + udeti
    Samudda
    1. a (large) quantity of water, e.g. the Ganges; the sea the ocean DN i.222 MN i.493 AN i.243 AN ii.48f. iii.240 DN iii.196 DN iii.198 SN i.6 SN i.32 SN i.67 Ja i.230 Ja iv.167 172 Dhp 127 Nd1 353 Snp-a 30 Pv-a 47 Pv-a 104 Pv-a 133 271; explained by adding sāgara, SN ii.32 four oceans SN ii.180 SN ii.187 Thag-a 111 Often characterized as mahā the great ocean, e.g. Vin ii.237 AN i.227 AN ii.55 iii.52; iv.101 Snp-a 371 Dhp-a iii.44 Eight qualities AN iv.198 AN iv.206 popular etymology Mil 85f. (viz “yattakaṁ udakaṁ tattakaṁ loṇaṁ,” and vice versa) the eye etc. (the senses), an ocean which engulfs all beings SN iv.157 (samudda = mahā udakarāsi)
    • Cp sāmuddika
    1. ˚akkhāyikā feminine tales about the origin of the sea cosmogony Vin i.188 MN i.513f. DN i.8 DN-a i.91
    2. ˚ṭṭhaka situated in the ocean Ja vi.158
    3. ˚vīci a wave of the ocean Vism 63
    4. cp. Vedic samudra, from saṁ + udra, water
    Samuddaya
    1. metri causa instead of samudaya Iti 16 52
    Samuddhaṭa
    1. pulled out, eradicated Mhvs 59, 15 Ja vi.309 Sdhp 143
    saṁ + uddhaṭa
    Samuddharana
    neuter
    1. pulling out, salvation Mil 232
    saṁ + uddharaṇa
    Samuddharati
    1. to take out or away; to lift up, carry away, save from; aorist samuddhari Ja vi.271
    2. samuddhāsi (
    3. aorist thus read instead of samuṭṭhāsi Ja v.70
    4. saṁ + uddharati
    Samunna
    1. moistened, wet, immersed SN iv.158 cp. the similar passage AN ii.211 with reference to taṇhā as a snare (pariyonaddha)
    saṁ + unna
    Samunnameti
    1. to raise, elevate, Thag 1, 29
    saṁ + unnameti
    Samupagacchati
    1. to approach Mil 209
    saṁ + upagacchati
    Samupajaneti
    1. to produce; ˚janiyamāna (ppr. pass.) Nett 195
    saṁ + upa + janeti
    Samupaṭṭhahati
    1. to serve, help; pres. samupaṭṭhāti Sdhp 283; aorist samupaṭṭhahi Mhvs 33 95
    2. saṁ + upaṭṭhahati
    Samupabbūḷha
    1. set up; heaped, massed, in full swing (of a battle), crowded MN i.253 DN ii.285 SN i.98 Mil 292 Ja i.89
    saṁ + upa + viyūḷha
    Samupama
    1. resembling Mhvs 37, 68; also samūpama Ja i.146 Ja v.155 Ja vi.534
    saṁ + upama
    Samuparūḷha
    1. ascended Dāvs iv.42
    saṁ + uparūḷha
    Samupasobhita
    1. adorned Mil 2
    saṁ + upasobhita
    Samupāgacchati
    1. to come to; aorist samupāgami Mhvs 36, 91;
    2. past participle samupāgata
    3. saṁ + upāgacchati
    Samupāgata
    1. come to, arrived at Mhvs 37, 115; 38, 12 Ja vi.282 Sdhp 324
    saṁ + upāgata
    Samupādika
    1. being on a level with the water Mil 237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is samupp˚, sama = peace, quiet, thus “producing quiet,” calm
    Samupeta
    1. endowed with, Mil 352
    saṁ + upeta
    Samuppajjati
    1. to arise, to be produced SN iv.218 past participle samuppanna
    2. saṁ + uppajjati
    Samuppatti
    feminine origin, arising SN iv.218
    Samuppanna
    1. arisen, produced, come about Snp 168 Snp 599 Dhs 1035
    saṁ + uppanna
    Samuppāda
    1. origin, arising, genesis, coming to be, production Vin ii.96 SN iii.16f. Iti 17 AN iii.406 (dhamma˚) Ja vi.223 (anilūpana-samuppāda, v. read ˚-samuppāta, “swift as the wind”); Vism 521 (sammā & saha uppajjati = samuppāda). cp. paṭicca˚
    saṁ + uppāda
    Samuppilava
    adjective
    1. jumping or bubbling up Snp 670 (˚āso nominative plural )
    2. from saṁ + uppilavati
    Samupphosita
    1. sprinkled Ja vi.481
    saṁ + ud + phosita
    Samubbahati
    1. to carry Dāvs iii.3; v.35; ppr. samubbahanto Ja vi.21 (making display of)
    saṁ + ubbahati2
    Samubbhūta
    1. borne from, produced from Dāvs ii.25
    saṁ + ud + bhūta
    Samuyyuta
    1. energetic, devoted Vv 6333 Vv-a 269
    saṁ + uyyuta
    Samullapati
    1. to talk, converse Vin iii.187 Pv-a 237 ppr. samullapanto Ja iii.49
    saṁ + ullapati
    Samullapana
    neuter
    1. talking (with), conversation Snp-a 71
    saṁ + ullapana
    Samullāpa
    1. conversation, talk Mil 351
    = last
    Samussaya
    1. accumulation, complex AN ii.42 Iti 48 Iti 34 bhassasamuccaya, grandiloquence Snp 245–⁠2. complex form, the body DN ii.157 = SN i.148 Vv3512 (= sarīra Vv-a 164) Dhp 351 Thag 1, 202 (“confluence, i.e. of the 5 factors, translation) Thag 2, 22 270 Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 98 212; rūpasamussaya the same Thag 2, 102 cp. samuccaya
    2. saṁ + ud + śri, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samucchraya “body,” Divy 70 = Avs i.162
    Samussāpita
    1. lifted, raised Ja iii.408
    saṁ + ussāpita
    Samussāhita
    1. instigated Vv-a 105
    saṁ + ussāhita
    Samussita
    1. elevated, erected Ja iii.497 - 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dhp 147 (interpreted at Dhp-a iii.109 as “compounded,” i.e. the body made up of 300 bones) AN i.199 Snp-a 288 (˚ṁ bhassaṁ high and mighty talk)
    2. saṁ + ussita
    Samusseti
    1. to raise, lift up, Pot. samusseyya AN i.199 (here = to be grandiloquent). past participle samussita
    2. saṁ + ud + śri
    Samūpasanta
    1. is variant reading for su-vūpasanta (?) “calmed,” at Kp-a 21
    saṁ + upasanta
    Samūlaka
    adjective
    1. including the root Thag 2 385 Thag-a 256
    sa3 + mūla + ka
    Samūha
    1. multitude, mass, aggregation Nett 195 Pv-a 49 Pv-a 127 Pv-a 157 (= gaṇa), 200 (identical)
    from saṁ + vah, uh
    Samūhata
    1. taken out, removed DN i.136 SN iii.131 Thag 1,604 Dhp 250 Snp 14 Snp 360 Iti 83 Ja iv.345 (Kern, wrongly, “combined”)
    past participle of samūhanati
    Samūhatatta
    neuter
    1. abolition MN iii.151
    abstract from samūhata
    Samūhanati
    1. to remove, to abolish Vin i.110 DN i.135f. (˚hanissati); ii.91 = SN v.432 MN i.47 ii.193 SN v.76 Ja i.374 = Sn 360 Snp 14 Snp 369 Snp 1076 sikkhāpadaṁ Vin iii.23 DN ii.154 uposathāgāraṁ to discontinue using a Vihāra as an Uposathāgāra Vin i.107 sīmaṁ to remove the boundary Vin i.110 Pres also samūhanti SN iii.156 Pot. samūhaneyya Vin i.110 imperative samūhantu DN ii.154 & ˚ūhanatu Mil 143
    2. absolutive samūhanitvā MN i.47 Vin i.107MN iii.285 infinitive samugghātuṁ Mhvs 37, 32;
    3. gerundive samūhantabba Vin i.107-
    4. causative II. samugghātāpeti to cause to be removed, i.e. to put to death Mil 193
    5. samūhanāpeti Mil 142
    6. past participle samūhata & (
    7. causative ); samugghātita
    8. saṁ + ūhanati2
    Samūheti
    1. to gather, collect Mhvs 37, 245
    causative of saṁ + uh = vah
    Samekkhati
    1. to consider, to ‣Seek, look for; Pot. samekkhe Ja iv.5 ppr. samekkhamāna Thag 1, 547 & samekkhaṁ Ja ii.65 absolutive samekkhiya Mhvs 37, 237
    2. saṁ + ikkhati
    Sameta
    1. associating with Mil 396 connected with, provided with Mhvs 19, 69; combined, constituted Snp 873 Snp 874
    past participle of sameti
    Sameti
    1. to come together, to meet, to assemble Bu ii.199 = J i.29
    2. to associate with, to go to DN ii.273 Ja iv.93
    3. to correspond to, to agree DN i.162 DN i.247 Ja i.358 Ja iii.278

      • to know, consider SN i.186 Nd1 284

    4. to fit in Ja vi.334

      • imper sametu Ja iv.9320;
      • future samessati SN iv.379 Iti 70
      • aorist samiṁsu Bu ii.199 SN ii.158 = It 70; & samesuṁ Ja ii.3016
      • absolutive samecca (1) (coming) together with DN ii.273 Ja vi.211 Ja vi.318
      • having acquired or learnt, knowing SN i.186 Snp 361 Snp 793 AN ii.6
      • past participle samita & sameta; = saṁ + ā + ita
      saṁ + eti
    Sametikā
    1. Sii.285; read samāhitā
    Samerita
    1. moved, set in motion; filled with (—˚), pervaded by Snp 937 Nd1 410 Ja vi.529 Vism 172
    saṁ + erita
    Samokiṇṇa
    1. besprinkled, covered (with) Ja i.233
    past participle of samokirati
    Samokirati
    1. to sprinkle Bu ii.178 = J i.27. - past participle samokiṇṇa
    2. saṁ + okirati
    Samocita
    1. gathered, arranged Ja v.156 (= surocita Commentary )
    saṁ + ocita
    Samotata
    1. strewn all over, spread Vv 816 (variant readings samogata and samohata) Ja i.183 Ap 191
    saṁ + otata
    Samotarati
    1. to descend Mhvs 10, 57
    saṁ + otarati
    Samodakaṁ
    adverb
    1. at the water’s edge Vin i.6 = M i.169 = DN ii.38
    saṁ + odakaṁ
    Samodahati
    1. to put together, supply, apply SN i.7 SN iv.178f.; to fix Nett 165, 178; ppr. samodahaṁ SN i.7 = iv.179; absolutive samodahitvā SN iv.178 & samodhāya Vism 105; Sdhp 588
    2. past participle samohita
    3. saṁ + odahati
    Samodita
    1. united Vv-a 186 (so read for samm˚), 320; cp. samudita
    Samodhāna
    neuter
    1. collocation, combination Bu ii.59 = J i.14 SN iv.215 = v.212; application (of a story) Ja ii.381 samodhānaṁ gacchati to come together, to combine, to be contained in Vin i.62 MN i.184 = SN i.86 SN v.43 SN v.231 = AN v.21 (Commentary odhānapakkhepaṁ) AN iii.364 Snp-a 2 Vism 7 Vb-a 107 samodhānagata wrapped together Mil 362 samodhānaparivāsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin ii.48f.
    saṁ + odhāna, cp. odahana
    Samodhānatā
    feminine
    1. combination, application, pursuance, in vutti˚ Ja iii.541 (so read for vatti˚)
    abstract from samodhāna
    Samodhāneti
    1. to combine, put together, connect Ja i.9 Ja i.14 DN-a i.18 Snp-a 167 193, 400 especially jātakaṁ s. to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106 Ja i.171 Ja ii.381 & passim
    denominative from samodhāna
    Samorodha
    1. barricading, torpor Dhs 1157 Dhs-a 379
    saṁ + orodha
    Samorohati
    1. to descend; absolutive samoruyha Mhvs 10, 35
    2. saṁ + orohati
    Samosaraṇa
    neuter
    1. coming together, meeting, union, junction DN i.237 DN ii.61 SN iii.156 SN v.42f. 91 AN iii.364 Mil 38
    saṁ + osaraṇa
    Samosarati
    1. to flow down together Mil 349
    2. to come together, gather Ja i.178 ‣See on this Kern, Toevoegselen ii.60
    saṁ + osarati
    Samoha
    1. infatuated Pug 61
    Samohita
    1. put together, joined Ja vi.261 (su˚)
    2. connected with, covered with Nd1 149 (for pareta) Mil 346 (raja-panka˚)
    past participle of samodahati
    Sampakampati
    1. to tremble, to be shaken Vin i.12 DN ii.12 DN ii.108 MN i.227 MN iii.120 causative sampakampeti to shake DN ii.108
    2. saṁ + pakampati
    Sampakopa
    1. indignation Dhs 1060
    saṁ + pakopa
    Sampakkhandati
    1. to aspire to, to enter into Mil 35
    saṁ + pakkhandati, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sampraskandati MVastu ii.157
    Sampakkhandana
    neuter
    1. aspiration Mil 34f.
    saṁ + pakkhandana
    Sampaggaṇhāti
    1. to exert, strain Dhs-a 372
    2. to show a liking for, to favour, befriend Ja vi.294
    3. past participle sampaggahīta
    saṁ + pagganhāti
    Sampaggaha
    1. support, patronage Mhvs 4, 44
    saṁ + paggaha
    Sampaggahīta
    1. uplifted Mil 309
    saṁ + paggahīta
    Sampaggāha
    1. assumption, arrogance Dhs 1116
    Sampaghosa
    1. sound, noise Mhbv.45
    Sampacura
    adjective
    1. abundant, very many AN ii.59 AN ii.61 SN i.110
    saṁ + pacura
    Sampajañña
    neuter
    1. attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection AN i.13f.; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.98 sq. SN iii.169 DN iii.213
    • sati + samp. opposed to muṭṭha-sacca asampajañña, 273. Description of it in detail at DN-a i.183f. = Vb-a 347f. where given as fourfold, viz sātthaka˚, sappāya˚, gocara˚, asammoha˚, with examples Often combined with sati, with which almost synonymous, e.g. at DN i.63 AN i.43 AN ii.44f.; v.115, 118
    from sampajāna, i.e. *sampajānya
    Sampajāna
    adjective
    1. thoughtful, mindful attentive, deliberate, almost synonym with sata, mindful DN i.37 DN ii.94f. Snp 413 Snp 931 Iti 10 42 Pug 25 DN iii.49 DN iii.58 DN iii.221 DN iii.224f. AN iv.47f. 300 sq., 457 sq. Nd1 395 Nd2 141. sampajānakārin acting with consideration or full attention DN i.70 DN ii.95 DN ii.292 AN ii.210 v.206 Vb-a 347f. DN-a i.184f.; sampājanamusāvāda deliberate lie Vin iv.2 Iti 18 DN iii.45 AN i.128 iv.370; v.265 Ja i.23
    saṁ + pajāna, cp. pajānāti; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samprajāna, MVastu i.206; ii.360
    Sampajānāti
    1. to know SN v.154 Snp 1055 Nd2 655
    saṁ + pajānāti
    Sampajjati
    1. to come to, to fall to; to succeed, prosper Ja i.7 Ja ii.105
    2. to turn out, to happen, become DN i.91 DN i.101 DN i.193 DN i.239 Pv-a 192
    3. aorist sampādi DN ii.266 DN ii.269
    4. past participle sampanna
    5. Caus sampādeti
    saṁ + pajjati
    Sampajjalita
    adjective
    1. in flames, ablaze AN iv.131 Vin i.25 DN i.95 DN ii.335 Ja i.232 Mil 84
    saṁ + pajjalita
    Sampaṭike
    adverb
    1. now Ja iv.432 (= sampati, idāni Commentary )
    locative from saṁ + paṭi + ka
    Sampaṭiggaha
    1. summing up, agreement Kp-a 100
    saṁ + paṭiggaha
    Sampaṭicchati
    1. to receive, accept Ja i.69 Ja iii.351 Mhvs 6, 34; ovādaṁ s. to comply with an admonition Ja iii.52 sādhū ti s. to say “well” and agree Ja ii.31 Mil 8 causative II. sampaṭicchāpeti Ja vi.336
    2. saṁ + paṭicchati
    Sampaṭicchana
    neuter
    1. acceptance, agreement Dhs-a 332 Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Vism 21; Sdhp 59 Sdhp 62
    from last
    Sampaṭinipajjā
    feminine
    1. squatting down, lying down Thag-a 111
    saṁ + paṭi + nipajjā
    Sampaṭivijjhati
    1. to penetrate; passive sampaṭivijjhiyati Nett 220
    2. saṁ + paṭivijjhati
    Sampaṭivedha
    1. penetration Nett 27, 41, 42, 220
    saṁ + paṭivedha
    Sampaṭisaṅkhā
    1. deliberately SN ii.111 contracted from absolutive ˚-saṁkhāya.

    Sampatati
    1. to jump about, to fly along or about Ja vi.528 (dumā dumaṁ); imper, sampatantu ib. vi.448 (itarītaraṁ); ppr. sampatanto flying to Ja iii.491 past participle sampatita
    2. saṁ + patati
    Sampati
    1. now Mil 87 sampatijāta, just born DN ii.15 = MN iii.123 cp. sampaṭike
    saṁ + paṭi; cp. Sanskrit samprati
    Sampatita
    1. jumping about Ja vi.507
    past participle of sampatati
    Sampatta
    1. reached, arrived, come to, present Ja iv.142 Mil 9 Mil 66 Pv-a 12 Kp-a 142 Snp-a 295 Sdhp 56
    past participle of sampāpuṇāti
    Sampattakajāta
    1. merged in, given to Ud 75
    read sammattaka (?)
    Sampatti
    feminine
    1. success, attainment; happiness, bliss, fortune (opposite vipatti AN iv.26 AN iv.160 Vism 58 232 Ja iv.3 (dibba˚) DN-a i.126 three attainments Ja i.105 Mil 96 Dhp-a iii.183 (manussa˚, devaloka˚ nibbāna˚); Nett 126 (sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚; cp. sampadā); four Vb-a 439f. (gati˚, upadhi˚, kāla˚ payoga˚); six Ja i.105 nine Mil 341
    2. excellency magnificence Snp-a 397 rūpasampatti beauty Ja iii.187 iv.333
    3. honour Mhvs 22, 48.

      • prosperity splendour Ja iv.455 Mhvs 38, 92; s. bhavaloko Ps i.122 cp. samāpatti & sampadā
    saṁ + patti2
    Sampatthanā
    feminine
    1. entreating, imploring Dhs 1059
    saṁ + patthanā
    Sampadā
    feminine
    1. attainment, success accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing bliss AN i.38 Pv ii.947 (= sampatti Pv-a 132)
    2. Sampadā in its pregnant meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used with sīla, citta, & paññā at DN i.171f. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sīla˚; the whole of the sīlakkhandha (DN i.63f.) is understood; citta˚; means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation, otherwise called samādhikkhandha. It includes those stages of meditation which are enum; d under samādhi. With paññā˚; are meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth otherwise called vijjā ‣See the 8 items of this under vijjā b.. The same ground as by this 3 fold division is covered by the enumeration of 5 sampadās as sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, vimutti-ñāṇadassana˚ MN i.145 Pug 54 cp. SN i.139 AN iii.12

      1. The term sampadā is not restricted to a definite set of accomplishments. It is applied to various such sets besides the one mentioned above. Thus we find a set of 3 sampadās called sīla˚, citta˚ & diṭṭhi˚; at AN i.269 where under sīla the Nos. 1–⁠7 of the 10 sīlas are understood ‣See sīla 2 a, under citta Nos. 8 & 9, under; diṭṭhi No. 10. sīla & diṭṭhi˚; also at DN iii.213
      • A set of 8 sampadās is given at AN iv.322 with uṭṭhāna˚, ārakkha˚, kalyāṇamittatā sammājīvitā, saddhā˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, paññā˚; of which the first 4 are explained in detail at AN iv.281 = 322 as bringing wordly happiness, viz. alertness, wariness, association with good friends, right livelihood; and the last 4 as leading to
      • future bliss (viz. faith in the Buddha, keeping the 5 sīlas, liberality, higher wisdom) at AN iv.284 = 324 Another set of 5 frequently mentioned is: ñāti˚, bhoga˚ ārogya˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚; (or the blessings, i.e. good fortune of having relatives, possessions, health, good conduct right views) representing the “summa bona” of popular choice, to which is opposed deficiency (vyasana, reverse of the same items. Thus e.g. at AN iii.147 DN iii.235 Three sampadās: kammanta˚, ājīva˚, diṭṭhi,˚; i.e. the 7 sīlas, right living (sammā-ājīva), right views AN i.271-Another three as saddhā˚, sīla˚, paññā˚; at AN i.287 Buddhaghosa at Dhp-a iii.93 94 speaks of four sampadās, viz vatthu˚, paccaya˚, cetanā˚; , guṇâtireka˚; of the blessings of a foundation (for merit), ofmeans (for salvation), of good intentions, of virtue (& merit). -A (later) set of; seven sampadās is given at Ja iv.96 with āgama˚, adhigama˚ pubbahetu˚, attattha-paripucchā˚, titthavāsa˚ yoniso-manasikāra˚, buddh'ûpanissaya˚
      • cp. the following: atta˚ SN v.30f.; ākappa˚ AN i.38
      • ājīva˚ AN i.271 DN-a i.235
      • kamma˚ AN iv.238f.; dassana˚ Snp 231
      • nibbāna˚ Vism 58; bhoga˚; (+ parivāra˚) Dhp-a i.78
      • yāga˚ Thag-a 40 (Ap. v.7); vijjācaraṇa˚ DN i.99
      1. 2. execution, performance; result, consequence; thus yañña˚; successful performance of a sacrifice DN i.128 Snp 505 Snp 509
      • piṭaka-sampadāya “on the authority of the Piṭaka tradition,” according to the P.; in exegesis of iti-kira (hearsay) AN i.189 = ii.191 = Nd2 151; and of itihītiha MN i.520 = ii.169
      from saṁ + pad, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sampadā Divy 401 (devamanuṣya˚), also sampatti
    Sampadāti
    1. to hand on, give over Ja iv.204 (aorist ˚padāsi)
    2. saṁ + padāti
    Sampadāna
    neuter
    1. the dative relation Ja v.214 (upayogatthe), 237 (karaṇatthe) Snp-a 499 (˚vacana)
    saṁ + padāna
    Sampadāleti
    1. to tear, to cut MN i.450 AN ii.33 = SN iii.85 SN iii.155 Mhvs 23, 10
    • Active intrs sampadālati to burst Ja vi.559 (= phalati, Commentary )
    saṁ + padāleti
    Sampaditta
    1. kindled Sdhp 33
    saṁ + paditta
    Sampaduṭṭha
    1. corrupted, wicked Ja vi.317 (a˚); Sdhp 70
    saṁ + paduṭṭha
    Sampadussati
    1. to be corrupted, to tres passive Vin iv.260 Ja ii.193
    2. past participle sampaduṭṭha
    3. saṁ + padussati
    Sampadosa
    1. wickedness Dhs 1060 a-sampadosa innocence Ja vi.317 = vi.321
    saṁ + padosa1
    Sampaddavati
    1. to run away; aorist sampaddavi Ja vi.53
    2. past participle sampadduta
    3. saṁ + pa + dru
    Sampadduta
    1. run away Ja vi.53
    past participle of sampaddavati
    Sampadhūpeti
    (˚dhūpāyati, ˚dhūpāti)
    1. to send forth (thick) smoke, to fill with smoke or incense to pervade, permeate SN i.169 Vin i.225 Snp p. 15 Mil 333 cp. sandhūpāyati
    saṁ + padhūpāti
    Sampanna
    1. successful, complete, perfect Vin ii.256 sampannaveyyākaraṇa a full explanation Snp 352
    2. endowed with, possessed of abounding in Vin i.17 Snp 152 Snp 727 (ceto-vimutti˚) Ja i.421 vijjācaraṇasampanna full of wisdom and goodness DN i.49 Snp 164 often used as first part of a compound e.g. sampannavijjācaraṇa Dhp 144 Dhp-a iii.86 sampannasīla virtuous Iti 118 Dhp 57 sampannodaka abounding in water Ja iv.125
    3. sweet, well cooked Vin ii.196 Mil 395

      past participle of sampajjati
    Sampaphulla
    adjective
    1. blooming, blossoming Sdhp 245
    saṁ + pa + phulla
    Sampabhāsa
    1. frivolous talk SN v.355
    saṁ + pa + bhāṣ
    Sampabhāsati
    1. to shine Mil 338
    saṁ + pa + bhās
    Sampamathita
    1. altogether crushed or overwhelmed Ja vi.189
    saṁ + pamathita
    Sampamaddati
    1. to crush out Mil 403
    saṁ + pamaddati
    Sampamūḷha
    adjective
    1. confounded Snp 762
    saṁ + pamūḷha
    Sampamodati
    1. to rejoice Vv 368 past participle sampamodita
    2. saṁ + pamodati
    Sampamodita
    1. delighted, rejoicing Sdhp 301
    saṁ + pamodita
    Sampayāta
    1. gone forth, proceeded Dhp 237
    saṁ + payāta
    Sampayāti
    1. to proceed, to go on; infinitive sampayātave Snp 834 past participle sampayāta
    2. saṁ + payāti
    Sampayutta
    1. associated with, connected Dhs 1 Kvu 337 Dhs-a 42
    • ˚˚paccaya the relation of association (opposite vippayutta˚) Vism 539 Vb-a 206 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 6, 20, 53, 65, 152 sq.; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 1 sq
    saṁ + payutta
    Sampayoga
    1. union, association Vin i.10 SN v.421 DN-a i.96 260
    saṁ + payoga
    Sampayojeti
    1. to associate (with) Vin ii.262 MN ii.5
    2. to quarrel Vin ii.5 SN i.239
    3. pp sampayutta
    saṁ + payojeti
    Samparāya
    future state, the next world Vin ii.162 AN iii.154 AN iv.284f. DN ii.240 SN i.108 Snp 141 Snp 864 Ja i.219 Ja iii.195 Mil 357 Dhp-a ii.50 from saṁ + parā + i
    Samparāyika
    adjective
    1. belonging to the next world Vin i.179 Vin iii.21 DN ii.240 DN iii.130 AN iii.49 AN iii.364 iv.285 MN i.87 Iti 17 39 Ja ii.74
    from last
    Samparikaḍḍhati
    1. to pull about, drag along MN i.228
    saṁ + parikaḍḍhati
    Samparikantati
    1. to cut all round MN iii.275 (Trenckner reads sampakantati.)
    saṁ + parikantati
    Samparikiṇṇa
    1. surrounded by Vin iii.86 Mil 155
    saṁ + parikiṇṇa
    Samparitāpeti
    1. to make warm, heat, scourge MN i.128 MN i.244 = SN iv.57
    saṁ + paritāpeti
    Samparibhinna
    adjective
    1. broken up Ja vi.113 (˚gatta)
    saṁ + paribhinna
    Samparivajjeti
    1. to avoid, shun Sdhp 52 Sdhp 208
    saṁ + parivajjeti
    Samparivatta
    adjective
    1. rolling about Dhp 325
    saṁ + parivatta
    Samparivattaka
    adjective
    1. rolling about grovelling Ja ii.142 (turning somersaults) Dhp-a ii.5 12 Mil 253 Mil 357
    • samparivattakaṁ (
    • adverb ) in a rolling about manner MN ii.138 samparivattakaṁ-samparivattakaṁ continually turning (it) Vin i.50
    saṁ + parivattaka
    Samparivattati
    1. to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamāna Ja i.140 past participle samparivatta.
    2. causative samparivatteti cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ˚parivartayati to wring one’s hands Divy 263
      1. to turn over in one’s mind, to ponder over SN v.89
      saṁ + parivattati
    Samparivāreti
    1. to surround, wait upon, attend on Ja i.61 aorist 3rd
    2. plural samparivāresuṁ Ja i.164
    3. absolutive samparivārayitvā Ja i.61 ˚etvā (do.) Ja vi.43 Ja vi.108 cp. sampavāreti
    4. saṁ + parivāreti
    Samparivāsita
    1. ‣See parivāsita
    Sampareta
    adjective
    1. surrounded, beset with Ja ii.317 Ja iii.360 = SN i.143
    saṁ + pareta
    Sampalibodha
    1. hindrance, obstruction Nett 79
    saṁ + palibodha
    Sampalibhagga
    1. broken up SN i.123
    past participle of next
    Sampalibhañjati
    1. to break, to crack MN i.234 SN i.123 past participle sampalibhagga
    2. saṁ + pari + bhañj
    Sampalimaṭṭha
    1. touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed SN iv.168f. = J iii.532 = Vism 36
    saṁ + palimaṭṭha
    Sampaliveṭhita
    adjective
    1. wrapped up, enveloped MN i.281
    saṁ + paliveṭhita
    Sampaliveṭheti
    1. to wrap up, envelop; ˚eyya Aiv.131 (kāyaṁ)
    saṁ + paliveṭheti
    Sampavaṅka
    adjective
    1. intimate, friend DN ii.78 SN i.83 SN i.87 Pug 36
    perhaps saṁ + pari + anka2, contracted to *payyanka → *pavanka
    Sampavaṅkatā
    feminine
    1. connection, friendliness, intimacy SN i.87 AN iii.422 (pāpa˚ & kalyāṇa˚); iv.283 sq.; v.24, 199 Dhs 1326 Pug 20 24 Dhs-a 394 cp. anu˚ Vin ii.88
    from last
    Sampavaṇṇita
    adjective
    1. described, praised Ja vi.398
    saṁ + pa + vaṇṇita
    Sampavattar
    1. an instigator AN iii.133
    saṁ + pavattar
    Sampavatteti
    1. to produce, set going AN iii.222 (saṁvāsaṁ); Mhvs 23, 75
    saṁ + pavatteti
    Sampavāti
    1. to blow, to be fragrant MN i.212 Ja vi.534 Vv-a 343 (= Vv 8432)
    saṁ + pavāti
    Sampavāyati
    1. to make fragrant, Vv 816 8432 Vv-a 344
    saṁ + pavāyati
    Sampavāyana
    neuter
    1. making fragrant Vv-a 344
    from last
    Sampavāreti
    1. to cause to accept, to offer, to regale, serve with; absolutive sampavāretvā Vin i.18 Vin ii.128 DN i.109
    2. aorist sampavāresi DN ii.97
    3. saṁ + pavāreti; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁpravārayati Divy 285 Divy 310, etc.; Avs i.90; MVastu iii.142
    Sampavedhati
    1. to be shaken violently, to be highly affected Vin i.12 DN ii.12 DN ii.108 MN i.227 Thag 2, 231 Ja i.25 SN iv.71 causative sampavedheti to shake violently DN ii.108 MN i.253 Nd1 316 371 (
    2. past participle ˚pavedhita)
    3. saṁ + pavedhati
    Sampavedhin
    1. to be shaken Snp 28 Mil 386
    Sampasāda
    1. serenity, pleasure DN ii.211 DN ii.222 AN ii.199 MN ii.262
    saṁ + pasāda
    Sampasādana
    neuter tranquillizing DN i.37 Dhs 161 Mil 34 Vism 156 Dhs-a 170 (in the description of the second Jhāna); happiness, joy Bu i.35. saṁ + pasādana
    Sampasādaniya
    adjective
    1. leading to serenity, inspiring faith DN iii.99f. (the Sampasādaniya Suttanta), 116
    saṁ + pasādaniya
    Sampasāreti
    1. to stretch out, to distract Vism 365 passive sampasāriyati AN iv.47 Mil 297 Dhs-a 376
    2. saṁ + pasāreti
    Sampasīdati
    1. to be tranquillized, reassured DN i.106 MN i.101 DN-a i.275
    saṁ + pasīdati
    Sampasīdana
    neuter
    1. becoming tranquillized Nett 28
    from last
    Sampassati
    1. to ‣See, behold; to look to, to consider; ppr sampassanto Vin i.42 DN ii.285 sampassaṁ Dhp 290
    saṁ + passati
    Sampahaṁsaka
    adjective
    1. gladdening MN i.146 AN ii.97 AN iv.296 AN iv.328 AN v.155 Iti 107 Mil 373
    from next
    Sampahaṁsati
    1. to be glad; past participle sampahaṭṭha.
    2. causative sampahaṁseti to gladden, delight Vin i.18 DN i.126
    3. saṁ + pahaṁsati2
    Sampahaṁsana
    neuter
    1. being glad, pleasure; approval Ps i.167; Vism 148 (˚ā); Kp-a 100 (“evaṁ”) Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Sdhp 568
    from sampahaṁsati
    Sampahaṭṭha1
    adjective
    1. beaten, struck (of metal), refined, wrought SN i.65 (sakusala˚; Buddhaghosa ukkāmukhe pacitvā s.; Kindred Sayings i.321) Snp 686 (sukusala˚ Snp-a 486: “kusalena suvaṇṇakārena sanghaṭṭitaṁ sanghaṭṭentena tāpitaṁ”)
    saṁ + pahaṭṭha1
    Sampahaṭṭha2
    1. gladdened, joyful Sdhp 301
    saṁ + pahaṭṭha2
    Sampahāra
    1. clashing, beating together, impact, striking; battle, strife DN ii.166 Pug 66f. DN-a i.150 Mil 161 (ūmi-vega˚), 179 (of two rocks), 224
    saṁ + pahāra
    Sampāka
    1. what is cooked, a cooked preparation, concoction Vin ii.259 (maṁsa˚ etc.) Vv 435 (kola˚) Vv-a 186
    2. ripeness, development Ja vi.236
    saṁ + pāka
    Sampāta
    1. falling together, concurrence, collision Iti 68 kukkuṭasampāta neighbouring, closely adjoining (yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasā va aññaṁ gāmaṁ gacchati, ayaṁ kukkuṭasampāto ti vuccati) Vin iv.63 358; kukkuṭasampātaka lying close together (literally like a flock of poultry) AN i.159 cp. the similar sannipāta
    saṁ + pāta
    Sampādaka
    1. one who obtains Mil 349
    from sampādeti
    Sampādana
    neuter
    1. effecting, accomplishment Nett 44; preparing, obtaining Ja i.80
    from sampādeti
    Sampādeti
    1. to procure, obtain Vin i.217 Vin ii.214 ekavacanaṁ s. to be able to utter a single word Ja ii.164 kathaṁ s. to be able to talk Ja ii.165 dohaḷe s. to satisfy the longing Mhvs 22, 51
    2. to strive, to try to accomplish one’s aim DN ii.120 SN ii.29
    causative of sampajjati
    Sampāpaka
    adjective
    1. causing to obtain, leading to, bringing Ja iii.348 Ja vi.235
    from sampāpeti
    Sampāpana
    neuter
    1. reaching, getting to Mil 355 Mil 356 (tīra˚)
    from sampāpuṇāti
    Sampāpuṇāti
    1. to reach, attain; to come to, meet with; aorist sampāpuṇi Ja i.67 Ja ii.20
    2. past participle sampatta -
    3. causative sampāpeti to bring, to make attain Vism 303
    4. saṁ + pāpuṇāti
    Sampāyati
    1. [dern not clear; Kern, Toevoegselen i.62 = sampādayati; but more likely = sampāyāti, i.e. sam + pa + ā + to be able to explain (DN-a i.117: sampādetvā kathetuṁ sakkuṇoti), to agree, to come to terms, succeed DN i.26 DN ii.284 MN i.85 MN i.96 MN i.472 MN ii.157 AN v.50 SN iv.15 SN iv.67 SN v.109 Vin ii.249 (cp. p. 364); aorist sampāyāsi MN i.239 cp. sampayāti.

    Sampāruta
    1. (quite) covered MN i.281
    saṁ + pāruta
    Sampāleti
    1. to protect Ja iv.127
    saṁ + pāleti
    Sampiṇḍana
    neuter
    1. combining, connection, addition Vism 159 (of “ca”); Kp-a 228 (identical) Dhs-a 171
    from saṁ + piṇḍ˚
    Sampiṇḍita
    1. brought together, restored Ja i.230 compact, firm Ja v.89
    past participle of sampiṇḍeti
    Sampiṇḍeti
    1. to knead or ball together, combine, unite Vism 159; Kp-a 125, 221, 230 Dhs-a 177 pp sampiṇḍita
    saṁ + piṇḍeti
    Sampiya
    adjective
    1. friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Snp 123 Snp 290
    saṁ + piya
    Sampiyāyati
    1. to receive with joy, to treat kindly, address with love Ja iii.482 ppr. sampiyāyanto Ja i.135 sampiyāyamāna (do.) fondling, being fond of DN ii.223 Ja i.191 Ja i.297 Ja i.361 Ja ii.85 Dhp-a ii.65 aorist 3rd
    2. plural sampiyāyiṁsu Ja vi.127
    3. saṁ + piyāyati
    Sampiyāyanā
    feminine
    1. intimate relation, great fondness Ja iii.492
    saṁ + piyāyanā
    Sampīṇeti
    1. to satisfy, gladden, please; aorist 2nd singular sampesi Ja iii.253
    2. absolutive sampīṇayitvā Dāvs iv.11
    3. saṁ + pīṇeti
    Sampīḷa
    neuter
    1. trouble, pain; asampīḷaṁ free from trouble Mil 351
    saṁ + pīḷa, cp. pīḷā
    Sampīḷita
    1. troubled; as nt., worry, trouble Mil 368
    past participle of sampīḷeti
    Sampīḷeti
    1. to press, to pinch, to worry Vin iii.126 past participle sampīḷita
    2. saṁ + pīḷeti
    Sampucchati
    1. to ask DN i.116 absolutive sampuccha having made an appointment with SN i.176
    2. saṁ + pucchati
    Sampuṭa
    1. the hollow of the hand (in posture of veneration), in pāṇi˚; Mhvs 37, 192 i.e. Cūḷavaṁsa (ed. Geiger) p. 15
    cp. saṁ + puṭa (lexicographical Sanskrit sampuṭa “round box”) & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sampuṭa in meaning “añjali” at Divy 380 in phrase kṛta-kara-sampuṭah
    Sampuṭita
    1. shrunk, shrivelled MN i.80
    saṁ + puṭita = phuṭita, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sampuṭaka MVastu ii.127
    Sampuṇṇa
    1. (sampūrṇa) filled, full Snp 279 Bu ii.119 = Ja i.20 Mhvs 22, 60
    Sampupphita
    1. in full bloom Pv iv.12 (= niccaṁ pupphita Pv-a 275)
    saṁ + pupphita
    Sampurekkharoti
    1. to honour MN ii.169
    saṁ + purakkharoti
    Sampūjeti
    1. to venerate Mhvs 30, 100
    saṁ + pūjeti
    Sampūreti
    passive pūriyati˚; to be filled, ended;
    • aorist sampūri (māso, “it was a full month since …” Ja iv.458
    saṁ + pūreti
    Sampha
    adjective-noun
    1. frivolous; neuter frivolity, foolishness only in connection with expressions of talking, as samphaṁ bhāsati to speak frivolously AN ii.23 Snp 158
    2. samphaṁ giraṁ bh. Ja vi.295
    3. samphaṁ palapati Tika-Paṭṭhāna 167 sq. Also in compounds. ˚palāpa frivolous talk DN i.4 DN iii.69 DN iii.82 175, 269 AN i.269f. 298; ii.60, 84, 209; iii.254, 433 iv.248; v.251 sq., 261 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 168, 281 DN-a i.76
    4. ˚palāpin talking frivolously DN i.138 DN iii.82 AN i.298 Pug 39 58
    5. not clear, if & how connected with Sanskrit śaśpa, grass. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit has sambhinna-pralāpa for sampha-ppalāpa
    Samphala
    adjective
    1. abounding in fruits SN i.70 SN i.90 = It 45
    saṁ + phala
    Samphassa
    1. contact, reaction Vin i.3 AN ii.117 DN ii.62 MN i.85 Ja i.502 kāya-s. the touch of the skin DN ii.75 cakkhu-, sota-, ghāna-, jivhā-, kāya-and mano-s. DN ii.58 DN ii.308 SN iv.68f. Vb-a 19
    saṁ + phassa
    Samphuṭṭha
    1. touched SN iv.97 Avestan103 Iti 68
    past participle of samphassati
    Samphulla
    adjective
    1. full-blown Ja vi.188
    saṁ + phulla
    Samphusati
    1. to touch, to come in contact with; ppr. samphussaṁ Iti 68 ppr. medium samphusamāna Snp 671 Nd2 199 (reads samphassamāna, where identical p at MN i.85 has rissamāna;
    2. aorist samphusi DN ii.128 inf samphusituṁ Snp 835 DN ii.355
    3. past participle samphuṭṭha
    4. saṁ + phusati
    Samphusanā
    feminine
    1. touch, contact Thag 2, 367 Dhs 2 71
    saṁ + phusanā
    Samphusitatta
    neuter
    1. the state of having been brought into touch with Dhs 2 71
    abstract from samphusita
    Sambaddha
    1. bound together Sdhp 81
    saṁ + baddha
    Sambandha
    1. connection, tie DN ii.296 = M i.58 Snp-a 108 166, 249, 273, 343, 516. ˚-kula related family Ja iii.362 a-sambandha adjective incompatible (Commentary on asaññuta Ja iii.266)
    2. saṁ + bandha
    Sambandhati
    1. to bind together, to unite Vin ii.116 passive sambajjhati is united, attached to Ja iii.7
    2. absolutive sambandhitvā Vin i.274 Vin ii.116

      • pp sambaddha
      saṁ + bandhati
    Sambandhana
    neuter
    1. binding together, connection Ja i.328
    saṁ + bandhana
    Sambarimāyā
    feminine
    1. the art of Sambari, jugglery SN i.239 (translation “Sambara’s magic art”). Sambara is a king of the Asuras
    sambarī + māyā
    Sambala
    neuter
    1. provision SN ii.98 Ja v.71 Ja v.240 Ja vi.531
    cp. * Sanskrit śambala
    Sambahula
    adjective
    1. many Vin i.32 DN i.2 Ja i.126 Ja i.329 Snp 19 sambahulaṁ karoti to take a plural ity vote Ja ii.45
    2. saṁ + bahula
    Sambahulatā
    feminine
    1. a plural ity vote Ja ii.45
    2. from sambahula
    Sambahulika
    adjective in ˚ṁ karoti = sambahulaṁ karoti Ja ii.197
    Sambādha
    1. crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction Vism 119 janasambādharahita free from crowding Mil 409 kiṭṭhasambādha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick MN i.115 Ja i.143 Ja i.388
    2. yassa sambādho bhavissati he who finds it too crowded Vin iv.43 asambādha unobstructed Snp 150 atisambādhatā (q.v.) the state of being too narrow Ja i.7 puttadārasambādhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife Mil 243 cp. SN i.78 (in figuratively sense) difficulty trouble SN i.7 SN i.48 Ja iv.488 sambādhapaṭipanna of the eclipsed moon SN i.50 As adjective “crowded, dense sambādho gharavāso life in the family is confined, i.e. a narrow life, full of hindrances DN i.63 DN i.250 SN ii.219 SN v.350 DN-a i.180 s. magga a crowded path Ja i.104 nijana˚ vana Vism 342; s. vyūha SN v.369
    3. atisambādha too confined Dhp-a i.310 (cakkavāḷa)
    4. compar. sambādhatara SN v.350 asambādhaṁ comfortably Ja i.80 2. pudendum masculinum Vin i.216 Vin ii.134 pudendum muliebre Vin iv.259 Snp 609 sambādhaṭṭhāna (
    5. neuter pudendum muliebre Ja i.61 Ja iv.260
    6. cp. Sanskrit sambādha
    Sambādheti
    1. to be crowded DN ii.269 (read ˚bādhāyanti)
    saṁ + bādheti
    Sambāhati
    1. to rub shampoo Ja i.293 Ja ii.16 Ja iv.431 Ja v.126 also sambāheti Mil 241
    2. causative sambāhāpeti to cause to shampoo Vin iv.342 ppr. sambāhanta Ja vi.77
    3. aorist sambāhi Ja i.293 cp. pari˚
    4. saṁ + bāhati; Kern, Toevoegselen s.v. disputes relation to vah, but connects it with bāh “press”
    Sambāhana
    neuter
    1. rubbing, shampooing DN i.7 (as a kind of exercise for wrestlers DN-a i.88) AN i.62 AN iv.54 Mil 241 Ja i.286
    from last
    Sambuka
    1. a shell DN i.84 = AN i.9 AN iii.395 (sippi˚) Ja ii.100
    cp. Sanskrit śambuka
    Sambujjhati
    1. to understand, achieve, know Dhs-a 218 infinitive sambuddhuṁ Snp 765 (variant reading sambuddhaṁ); causative sambodheti to teach, instruct Ja i.142 cp. sammā˚;
    2. saṁ + bujjhati
    Sambuddha
    1. well understood Snp 765 (various reading, sambuddhuṁ = to know) Ja v.77 (sam & a˚, taken by Commentary as ppr. “jānanto” & “ajānanto”) susambuddha easily understood Snp 764
    2. one who has thoroughly understood, being enlightened, a Buddha Snp 178 etc., 559 AN ii.4 Dhp 181 SN i.4 Iti 35 etc
    saṁ + buddha
    Sambuddhi
    feminine
    1. complete understanding; adjective ˚vant wise Ja iii.361 (= buddhisampanna)
    saṁ + buddhi
    Sambojjhaṅga
    1. constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession; dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine viriya, energy; pīti, joy; passaddhi, tranquillity samādhi, concentration; upekhā, equanimity DN ii.79 303 sq.; iii.106, 226 MN i.61f. AN iv.23 SN v.110f. Nd2 s.v. Mil 340 Vb-a 135 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with various means of cultivation are given at Vism 132 sq. = Vb-a 275f.
    saṁ + bojjhanga
    Sambodha
    enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the Path, Vin i.10 DN iii.130f. 136 sq. SN ii.223 SN v.214 MN i.16 MN i.241 AN i.258 AN ii.200 AN ii.240f. 325 sq.; v.238 sq. Iti 27 pubbe sambodhā, before attaining insight MN i.17 MN i.163 MN ii.211 MN iii.157 SN ii.5 SN ii.10 SN iv.6, 8, 97, 233; v.281 AN i.258 AN iii.82 AN iii.240 abhabba sambodhāya, incapable of insight MN i.200 MN i.241 = AN ii.200 (cp. Dialogues of the Buddha i.190–⁠192.)
    1. ˚gāmin leading to enlightenment DN iii.264 Snp p. 140 -pakkhika belonging to enlightenment AN iv.357
    • ˚sukha the bliss of enlightenment AN iv.341f.
    saṁ + bodha
    Sambodhana
    neuter
    1. the vocative case Vv-a 12 18
    saṁ + bodhana
    Sambodhi
    feminine
    1. the same as sambodha, the highest enlightenment DN i.156 DN ii.155 Dhp 89 = SN v.29 Snp 478 SN i.68 SN i.181 AN ii.14 Iti 28 42, 117 Snp-a 73 ‣See also sammā˚;

    -agga ˚yagga

    1. the summit of enlightenment Snp 693
    • ˚gāmin leading to enlightenment SN v.234
    • ˚patta having attained enlightenment, an Arahant Snp 503 Snp 696
    • ˚parāyana that which has enlightenment as its aim proceeding towards enlightenment, frequently of the Sotāpanna DN i.156 (discussed in Dialogues of the Buddha i.190 sq.) iii.131 sq. AN i.232 AN ii.80 AN ii.238 AN iii.211 AN iv.12 AN iv.405 SN v.343 SN v.346 DN-a i.313
    • ˚sukha the bliss of enlightenment Kvu 209
    saṁ + bodhi1
    Sambodhiyaṅga
    1. the same as sambojjhanga. AN v.253f. SN v.24 cp. spelling sambodhi-anga at Dhp 89 Dhp-a ii.162
    Sambodheti
    1. ‣See sambujjhati
    Sambhagga
    1. broken SN i.123 MN i.237 cp. sampali˚;
    saṁ + bhagga
    Sambhajati
    1. to consort with, love, to be attached, devoted Ja iii.495 ppr. sambhajanto Ja iii.108 Pot. sambhajeyya ibid. (Commentary samāgaccheyya)
    • pp sambhatta
    saṁ + bhajati
    Sambhajanā
    feminine
    1. consorting with Dhs 1326 Pug 20
    saṁ + bhajanā
    Sambhañjati
    1. to split, break Ja v.32 causative sambhañjeti to break MN i.237 SN i.123
    2. passive aorist samabhajjisaṁ Ja v.70
    3. past participle sambhagga

      • cp. sampali˚;
      saṁ + bhañjati
    Sambhata
    1. brought together, stored up; neuter store, provisions MN i.116 DN iii.190 AN iii.38 = iv.266 SN i.35 SN ii.185 = It 17 Ja i.338 Thag-a 11
    2. saṁ + bhata
    Sambhati
    1. to subside, to be calmed; only in prep combination paṭippassambhati (q.v.)
    śrambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa”
    Sambhatta
    1. devoted, a friend Ja i.106 Ja i.221 Nd1 226 = Vism 25
    • yathāsambhattaṁ according to where each one’s companions live DN ii.98 SN v.152
    past participle of sambhajati
    Sambhatti
    feminine
    1. joining, consorting with Dhs 1326 Pug 20
    saṁ + bhatti
    Sambhama
    1. confusion, excitement; ˚-patta overwhelmed with excitement Ja iv.433
    saṁ + bhama, from bhram
    Sambhamati
    1. to revolve Dhs-a 307
    saṁ + bhamati
    Sambhava
    1. origin, birth, production DN ii.107 SN iii.86 AN ii.10 AN ii.18 Snp 724 Snp 741 etc. Dhp 161 Ja i.168 mātāpettikas˚ born from father and mother DN i.34 Dhs-a 306 natthi sambhavaṁ has not arisen Snp 235
    2. semen virile Ja v.152 Ja vi.160 Mil 124
      1. ˚esin ‣Seeking birth MN i.48 SN ii.11 Snp 147 Sambhavati, sambhunati & sambhoti;
      saṁ + bhava
    Sambhavati, sambhuṇāti
    sambhoti;
    1. to be produced, to arise DN i.45 DN i.76 SN i.135 SN iv.67 Snp 734 Dāvs v.6 Mil 210
    2. to be adequate, competent DN ii.287 na s. is of no use or avail Mil 152
    3. to be present, to witness Ja i.56

      • to be together with Ja ii.205 (Commentary on sambhaj—˚)
      • Pres. ˚-bhuṇati or ˚-bhuṇāti (like abhi-sam-bhuṇā̆ti) in the sense of “to reach” or “to be able to,” capable of Vin i.256 (˚-bhuṇāti) Snp 396 (participle a-sambhuṇanto = asakkonto, Commentary ); also sambhoti Snp 734 DN ii.287
      • future sambhossāma Mhvs 5, 100.
      • aorist sambhavi DN i.96 3rd
      • plural samabhavuṁ Dāvs v.6;
      • absolutive sambhuyya having come together with Vv-a 232
      • pp sambhūta.
      • causative sambhāveti (q.v.)
    saṁ + bhavati
    Sambhavana
    neuter
    1. coming into existence Nett 28
    from sambhavati
    Sambhāra
    1. “what is carried together,” viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhāraseda bringing on sweating by artificial means Vin i.205
    • materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Mil 258 Ja i.481 Ja v.13 Ja v.506 Ja i.9 Ja ii.18 Ja iv.492 dabba˚ an effective requisite Dhp-a i.321 Dhp-a ii.114 bodhis˚ the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening Ja i.1 vimokkhas˚ Thag-a 214

  • constituent part, element SN iv.197 Dhs-a 306

    • bringing together, collocation SN i.135 Mil 28
    • from saṁ + bhṛ
  • Sambhāvana
    neuter
    1. supposition, assumption, the meaning of the particle sace Vin i.37219; cp. J ii.29 Dhp-a ii.77
    from sambhāveti
    Sambhāvanā
    feminine
    1. honour, reverence, intention, confidence Mhvs 29, 55 Dhs-a 163 (= okappanā); Sdhp 224
    from sambhāveti
    Sambhāvita
    1. honoured, esteemed MN i.110 MN i.145 Thag-a 200 Ja iii.269 (= bhaddaka) Vb-a 109
    past participle of sambhāveti
    Sambhāveti
    1. to undertake, achieve, to be intent on (
    2. accusative ) Vin i.253 Dhs-a 163
    3. to reach, catch up to (
    4. accusative ) Vin i.277 ii.300
    5. to produce, effect Mil 49

      • to consider Ja iii.220

    6. to honour, esteem;

      • gerundive ˚bhāvanīya to be honoured or respected, honourable Vv-a 152 MA 156.
      • past participle sambhāvita
      causative of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning “pāpuṇana”
    Sambhāsā
    feminine
    1. conversation, talk; sukha—˚ Ja vi.296 (variant reading ); mudu—˚ Ja ii.326 = iv.471 = v.451
    saṁ + bhāsā
    Sambhindati
    1. to mix Vin i.111 (sīmāya sīmaṁ s. to mix a new boundary with an old one, i.e. to run on a boundary unduly) DN-a i.134 (udakena). past participle sambhinna

      • cp. sambhejja
      saṁ + bhindati
    Sambhinna
    1. mixed, mixed up Vin i.210 Vin ii.67 68 (cp. Vinaya Texts ii.431) Ja i.55 Snp 9 Snp 319 (˚mariyāda-bhāva confusing the dividing lines indistinctness), 325 (identical). Said of a woman (i.e. of indistinct sexuality) Vin ii.271 = iii.129
    2. broken up (?), exhausted Ja i.503 (˚sarīra)
    3. asambhinna : 1. unmixed unadulterated Vism 41 (˚khīra-pāyāsa) Ja v.257 (˚khattiyavaṁsa) Dhp-a ii.85 (identical)
    4. (of the voice unmixed, i.e. distinct, clear Mil 360

      • Name of a kind of ointment Vin iv.117
    past participle of sambhindati
    Sambhīta
    adjective
    1. terrified Mil 339 a-sambhīta, fearless Mil 105 Ja iv.92 Ja v.34 Ja vi.302
    saṁ + bhīta
    Sambhuñjati
    1. to eat together with Vin iv.137
    2. to associate with SN i.162
    saṁ + bhuñjati
    Sambhuṇāti
    1. ‣See sambhavati
    Sambhūta
    1. arisen from, produced Snp 272 (atta˚ self-; cp. Snp-a 304 attabhāva-pariyāye attani s.) SN i.134
    past participle of sambhavati
    Sambhejja
    1. belonging to the confluence of rivers (said of the water of the ocean), united SN ii.135 SN v.461 (various reading sambhojja)
    gerundive of sambhindati
    Sambheda
    1. mixing up, confusion, contamination DN iii.72 AN i.51 = It 36 DN-a i.260 (jāti˚ mixing of caste); Vism 123 (of colours)
    saṁ + bheda
    Sambhoga
    1. eating, living together with Vin i.97 Vin ii.21 Vin iv.137 AN i.92 Snp-a 71 Ja iv.127 Sdhp 435
    saṁ + bhoga
    Sambhoti
    1. ‣See sambhavati
    Samma1
    1. a term of familiar address DN i.49 DN i.225 DN-a i.151 Vin ii.161 Ja i.59 Pv-a 204 plur. sammā Vin ii.161
    as to etymology Andersen, P. Reader ii.263 quite plausibly connects it with Vedic śam indeclinable “hail, which is often used in a vocative sense, especially in combination śam ca yos ca “hail & blessing!”, but also suggests relation to sammā. Other suggestions ‣See Andersen s.v.
    Samma2
    1. ‣See sammā
    samyak
    Samma3
    1. a cymbal Mil 60 Dhs 621 Ja i.3 Dhs-a 319 - Otherwise as ˚tāḷa a kind of cymbal Thag 1, 893 911 Vv 353 Vv-a 161 Ja vi.60 277 (-l-)
    Sammakkhana
    neuter
    1. smearing Vism 346
    saṁ + makkhana
    Sammakkhita
    1. smeared Ja v.16 abstract ˚tta neuter Vism 346
    2. saṁ + makkhita
    Sammakkheti
    1. to smear Vism 346
    saṁ + makkheti
    Sammaggata
    1. ‣See under sammā˚
    Sammajjati
    1. to sweep Vin i.46 Vin ii.209 Ja ii.25 Dhp-a i.58 Dhp-a ii.184 iii.168
    2. to rub, polish Ja i.338
    3. past participle sammaṭṭha.
    4. causative II. sammajjāpeti Vin i.240
    saṁ + majjati2
    Sammajjana
    adjective neuter
    1. sweeping Ja i.67 Snp-a 66 (˚ka) Vv-a 319 (Text sammajja)
    from last
    Sammajjanī
    feminine
    1. a broom Vin ii.129 AN iv.170 Vism 105 Dhp-a iii.7 cp. sammujjanī
    from last
    Sammaññati
    1. ‣See sammannati
    Sammaṭṭha
    1. swept, cleaned, polished, smooth Vin iii.119 (su˚) Ja i.10 Ja iii.395 (smooth) Spelt ˚maṭṭa at Mil 15
    past participle of sammajjati
    Sammata
    1. considered as MN i.39 SN ii.15 SN iv.127 DN iii.89 (dhamma˚) Vin iv.161 295–⁠2. honoured, revered MN ii.213 Ja i.49 Ja v.79 sādhusammata considered, revered, as good DN i.47 SN iv.398
    2. authorized, selected, agreed upon DN iii.93 (mahājana˚) Vin i.111 Vin iii.150
    past participle of sammannati
    Sammati1

    1. ; Dhtp 436 = upasama] 1. to be appeased, calmed; to cease Dhp 5 Pot 3rd plural sammeyyuṁ SN i.24–⁠2. to rest, to dwell DN i.92 SN i.226 Ja v.396 DN-a i.262 (= vasati);
    2. past participle santa.
    3. causative sāmeti to appease suppress, stop, AN ii.24 Iti 82 83, 117, 183 Dhp 265
    4. śam
    Sammati3 [

    1. to labour; pres. śamyati; past participle Vedic śamita] to work; to be satisfactory Vin ii.119 (parissāvanaṁ na s.), 278 (navakammaṁ etc. na s.)
    2. śam
    Sammati2 [

    1. ; Vedic śrāmyati Dhtp 220 = parissama, 436 = kheda] to be weary or fatigued
    śram
    Sammatta1
    [
    1. intoxicated, maddened, delighted DN ii.266 Dhp 287 Ja iii.188 doting on Ja v.443 rogasammatta tormented by illness Ja v.90 (= ˚pīḷita Commentary ; variant reading ˚patta, as under matta2)
    saṁ + matta2
    Sammatta2
    neuter
    1. correctness, righteousness AN i.121 AN iii.441 Pug 13 Dhs 1029 Nett 44; 96, 112; Kvu 609 Dhs-a 45 KvA 141; ˚kārin, attained to proficiency in Mil 191 sammatta-kāritā ibid.-The 8 sammattā are the 8 angas of the ariya-magga ‣See magga 2 a DN iii.255 the 10 are the above with the addition of sammā-ñāṇa and ˚vimutti. AN v.240
    abstract from sammā
    Sammad˚
    1. ‣See sammā
    Sammada
    1. drowsiness after a meal DN ii.195 AN i.3 AN v.83 Ja ii.63 bhatta—˚ SN i.7 Ja vi.57
    saṁ + mada
    Sammaddati
    1. to trample down Vin i.137 286 (cīvaraṁ, to soak, steep); ppr. sammaddanto Vin i.137 (to crush)
    saṁ + maddati
    Sammanteti
    1. to consult together DN i.142 Ja i.269 Ja i.399 DN-a i.135
    saṁ + manteti
    Sammannati
    1. to assent, to consent to Mhvs 3, 10 DN-a i.11
    2. to agree to, to authorize select Vin iii.150 158, 238; iv.50; Mhvs 3, 9; sīmaṁ SN to determine, to fix the boundary Vin i.106f.
    3. to esteem, honour; infinitive sammannituṁ Vin iv.50

      • sammannesi DN i.105 is misprint for samannesi

        • ppr. sammata
        saṁ + man, from Vedic manute, manvate, for the usual manyate ‣See maññati
    Sammasati
    1. to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master SN ii.107 Dhp 374 Mil 325 to think, meditate on (accusative ) Ja vi.379 ppr. sammasaṁ ii.107 & sammasanto Mil 379 Ja i.74 Ja i.75
    2. feminine sammasantī Thag-a 62 sammasamāna Mil 219 Mil 325 Mil 398 pp sammasita
    3. saṁ + masati
    Sammasana
    1. grasping, mastering Mil 178 Vism 287, 629 sq.; cp. Compendium 65, 210
    neuter from last
    Sammasita
    1. grasped, understood, mastered Ja i.78
    past participle of sammasati
    Sammasitar
    1. one who grasps ‣Sees clearly Snp 69
    Sammā1
    1. a pin of the yoke Abhp 449; a kind of sacrificial instrument Snp-a 321 (sammaṁ ettha pāsantī ti sammāpāso; and sātrā-yāgass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ). cp. Weber Indische Streifen i.36, and sammāpāsa below
    cp. Sanskrit śamyā
    Sammā2
    indeclinable
    1. thoroughly properly, rightly; in the right way, as it ought to be best, perfectly (opposite micchā) DN i.12 Vin i.12 Snp 359 Snp 947 Dhp 89 Dhp 373. Usually as ˚-, like sammā-dhārā even or proper showers (i.e. at the right time) Pv ii.970 especially in connection with constituents of the eightfold Aryan Path, where it is contrasted with micchā ‣See magga 2 a. (e.g. Vb-a 114f. 121, 320 sq.). The form sammā is reduced to samma˚; before short vowels (with the insertion of a sandhi -d-, cp. puna-deva), like samma-d-eva properly, in harmony or completeness DN i.110 Vin i.9: Pv-a 139 Pv-a 157; samma-daññā & ˚akkhāta; ‣See below; and before double consonants arisen from assimilation, like sammag-gata (= samyak + gata). The compounds. we shall divide into two groups, viz. (A) compounds. with samma˚; , (B) with sammā˚;
    1. A. -akkhāta well preached Dhp 86
    • ˚aññā perfect knowledge Vin i.183 SN i.4 SN iv.128 Dhp 57 (˚vimutta cp. Dhp-a i.434) Iti 38 79, 93, 95, 108
    • ˚attha a proper or good thing or cause Ja vi.16
    • ˚ddasa having right views AN ii.18 SN iv.205 SN iv.207 Snp 733 Iti 47 61, 81 Kvu 339
    • ˚ggata cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samyaggata Divy 399
      1. who has wandered rightly, perfect MN i.66 who has attained the highest point, an Arahant DN i.55 SN i.76 AN i.269 AN iv.226 AN v.265 Ja iii.305 Iti 87 Ap 218 Also sammāgata Vin ii.20317
      2. ˚ppajāna having right knowledge Dhp 20 Iti 115
      • ˚ppaññā right knowledge true wisdom Vin i.14 Dhp 57 Dhp 190 Snp 143 Iti 17 Mil 39
      • ˚ppadhāna cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit samyakprahāna Divy 208 right exertion Vin i.22 Dhs 358 Dpvs 18, 5; they are four DN ii.120 MN iii.296 explained MN ii.11 (anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya; uppannānaṁ pahānāya; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya; uppannānaṁ ṭhitiyā). B. -ājīva right living, right means of livelihood, right occupation Vin i.10 SN v.421 etc.; formula DN ii.312
      • adjective living in the right way MN i.42 AN ii.89
      • ˚kammanta right conduct, right behaviour Vin i.10 SN v.421 etc.; definition DN ii.312 Dhs 300 adjective behaving in the right way MN i.42 AN ii.89
      • ˚ñāṇa right knowledge enlightenment, results from right concentration DN ii.217 AN i.292 adjective MN i.42
      • ˚ñāṇin possessing the right insight AN ii.89 AN ii.222
      • ˚dassana right views Vism 605 -diṭṭhi right views, right belief, the first stage of the noble eightfold path, consists in the knowledge of the four truths DN ii.311 its essence is knowledge Dhs 20 297, 317; cp. Vism 509; comprises the knowledge of the absence of all permanent Being and the reality of universal conditioned Becoming SN ii.17 SN iii.135; and of the impermanence of the 5 Khandhas SN iii.51 = iv.142; and of Sīla, of causation and of the destruction of the Āsavas MN i.46
        1. -55; how obtained MN i.294 two degrees of MN iii.72 supremely important AN i.30
        • 292 sq.;
        • adjective Miln i.47
        • ˚diṭṭhika having the right belief DN i.139 AN ii.89 220 sq.; iii.115, 138 iv.290; v.124 sq. SN iv.322
        • ˚dvayatānupassin duly considering both-i.e. misery with its origin, the destruction of misery with the path, respectively Snp p. 140
        • ˚dhārā a heavy shower SN v.379
        • ˚paṭipatti right mental disposition AN i.69 Nett 27 Mil 97
        • sammāpaṭipadā Pug 49f. Dhp-a iv.127
        • sammāpaṭipanna rightly disposed, having the right view DN i.8 DN i.55 Pug 49f. -passaṁ viewing the matter in the right way SN iii.51 SN iv.142
        • ˚pāsa [ Sanskrit śamyāprāsa but Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śamyaprāśa Divy 634] a kind of sacrifice Snp 303 AN ii.42 AN iv.151 SN i.76 Iti 21 Ja iv.302 Snp-a 321 cp. sammā1
        • ˚manasikāra right, careful, thought DN i.13 DN-a i.104
        • ˚vattanā strict, proper, conduct Vin i.46 50; ii.5
        • ˚vācā right speech Vin i.10 DN-a i.314 definition DN ii.312 Dhs 299
        • adjective speaking properly MN i.42 AN ii.89
        • ˚vāyāma right effort Vin i.10 Dhs 13 22, 302; definition DN ii.312 adjective MN i.42 AN ii.89
        • ˚vimutta right emancipation AN i.292
        • ˚vimutti the same DN ii.217 AN ii.196 AN ii.222
        • adjective MN i.42 AN ii.89
        • ˚saṅkappa right resolve, right intention Dhp 12 Vin i.10 Dhs 21 298; definition DN ii.312
        • adjective MN i.42 AN ii.89
        • ˚sati right memory, right mindfulness, self-possession Vin i.10 Dhs 23 303; definition DN ii.313
        • adjective MN i.42 AN ii.89
        • ˚samādhi right concentration, the last stage of the noble eightfold path Vin i.10 Dhs 24 304 definition DN ii.313 adjective MN i.12 AN ii.89
        • ˚sampassaṁ having the right view SN iv.142
        • ˚sambuddha perfectly enlightened, a universal Buddha Vin i.5 DN i.49 Dhp 187 Ja i.44 Dhp-a i.445 Dhp-a iii.241 Vb-a 436 etc
        • ˚sambodhi perfect enlightenment, supreme Buddhaship Vin i.11 DN ii.83 SN i.68 etc
        • Vedic samyac (= samyak) & samīś “connected, in one” ‣See under saṁ˚
    Sammāna
    neuter [
    1. honour Ja i.182 Ja vi.390 Sdhp 355
    from saṁ + man
    Sammānanā
    feminine
    1. honouring, veneration DN iii.190 Mil 162 Mil 375 Mil 386
    saṁ + mānanā
    Sammiñjati
    (& ˚eti)
    1. to bend back, to double up (opp pasārati or sampasāreti) Vin i.5 MN i.57 MN i.168 DN i.70 Ja i.321 Vism 365 (variant reading samiñjeti) DN-a i.196
    • pp sammiñjita
    saṁ + iñjati ‣See also samiñjati; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sammiñjayati Divy 473 ‣See also Leumann Album Kern, p. 393
    Sammiñjana
    neuter
    1. bending DN-a i.196 (opposite pasāraṇa) Vb-a 358
    from sammiñjati
    Sammiñjita
    1. bent back MN i.326 (spelt samiñjita) AN ii.104 AN ii.106f. 210
    past participle of sammiñjati
    Sammita
    1. measured, i.e. just so much, no more or less; ˚-bhānin Thag 1, 209
    saṁ + mita
    Sammilāta
    1. withered, shrunk MN i.80
    saṁ + milāta
    Sammillabhāsinī
    feminine
    1. speaking with smiles Ja iv.24 name of a girl in Benares Ja iii.93f.
    saṁ + milla = mihita, + bhāsin
    Sammissatā
    feminine
    1. the state of being mixed, confusion Dhs-a 311
    from saṁ + missa
    Sammukha
    adjective
    1. face to face with, in presence; sammukhaciṇṇa a deed done in a person’s presence Ja iii.27
    • sammukhā ablative 1. face to face before, from before DN ii.155 Snp p. 79 Ja i.115 Ja iii.89 (opposite parokkhā); with
    • accusative Bu ii.73 = J i.17; with gen DN i.222 DN ii.220 MN i.146
    • in a full assembly of qualified persons Vin ii.3
    • locative sammukhe DN ii.206 Ja v.461 In composition sammukha˚, sammukhā˚ sammukhī˚; (before bhū): ˚bhāva (˚a˚) presence, confrontation Mil 126 (˚ī˚) being face to face with coming into one’s presence DN i.103 MN i.438 AN i.150
    • ˚bhūta (˚ī˚) being face to face with, confronted DN ii.155 SN iv.94 Vin ii.73 AN iii.404f.; v.226; one who has realized the saṁyojanas Kvu 483; ˚vinaya (˚ā˚) proceeding in presence, requiring the presence of a chapter of priests and of the party accused Vin ii.74 93 sq.; iv.207 AN i.99 Dhs-a 144 ‣See also yebhuyyasikā
    • saṁ + mukha
    Sammukhatā
    feminine
    1. presence, confrontation Vin ii.93 (sangha˚)
    abstract from sammukha
    Sammucchita
    1. ‣See samucchita
    Sammujjanī
    feminine
    1. a broom Ja i.161 sammuñjanī the same Mil 2
    = sammajjanī
    Sammuṭṭha
    1. confused MN i.21 SN iv.125 SN v.331 one who has forgotten Vin iv.45 (= na ssarati) iii.16513; ˚ssati identical AN i.280
    saṁ + muṭṭha
    Sammuti
    feminine
    1. consent, permission Vin iii.199
    2. choice, selection, delegation Vin iii.159 3. fixing, determination (of boundary) Vin i.106 4. common consent, general opinion, convention, that which is generally accepted; as ˚-conventional, e. g ˚sacca conventional truth (as opposed to paramattha˚ the absolute truth) Mil 160
    3. ˚ñāṇa common knowledge DN iii.226
    4. ˚deva what is called a deva Ja i.132 DN-a i.174 ‣See under deva; ˚maraṇa what is commonly called “death” Vism 229
    5. sammuccā instrumental by convention or common consent Snp 648 (variant reading sammacca =
    6. absolutive of sammannati)
    7. opinion, doctrine Snp 897 (= dvāsaṭṭhī diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 308), 904, 911.

      • definition declaration, statement Vin i.123 (ummattaka˚) AN iv.347 (vādaka˚) Vb-a 164 (bhuñjaka˚)

    8. a popular expression, a mere name or word Mil 28 8. tradition, lore; combined with suti at Mil 3

      from saṁ + man
    Sammudita
    1. delighted, delighting in Vin i.4 MN i.503 SN iv.390
    past participle of sammodati
    Sammuyhati
    1. to be bewildered, infatuated, muddle-headed Ja iv.385 Mil 42 past participle sammūḷha DN ii.85 MN i.250 AN i.165 Snp 583
    2. causative sammoheti to befool Mil 224
    3. saṁ + muyhati
    Sammuyhana
    neuter
    1. bewilderment DN-a i.193
    saṁ + muyhana
    Sammusā
    1. MN ii.202 read sammuccā (from sammuti)
    Sammussanatā
    feminine
    1. forgetfulness Dhs 14 1349 Pug 21
    from saṁ + mussati
    Sammūḷha
    1. infatuated, bewildered DN ii.85 MN i.250 AN i.165 Snp 583 Ja v.294 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 366
    saṁ + mūḷha
    Sammegha
    1. rainy or cloudy weather Ja vi.51 Ja vi.52
    saṁ + megha
    Sammoda
    1. odour, fragrance; ekagandha˚, filled with fragrance Ja vi.9
    from saṁ + mud
    Sammodaka
    adjective
    1. polite DN i.116 DN-a i.287 a-sammodaka (feminine ˚-ikā) Vin i.34116
    2. from sammodati
    Sammodati
    1. to rejoice, delight;
    2. past participle sammudita (q.v.)
    3. to agree with, to exchange friendly greeting with;
    4. aorist sammodi Vin i.2 DN i.52 Snp 419 Ja vi.224 ppr. sammodamāna in agreement, on friendly terms Ja i.209 Ja ii.6
    5. absolutive sammoditvā Ja ii.107 grd sammodanīya cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sammodanī saṁrañjanī kathā Divy 70 Divy 156 & passim
      1. pleasant, friendly. AN v.193 cp. Sn 419 Vin i.2 DN i.52
      • sammodita at Vv-a 186 read samodita
      saṁ + modati
    Sammodana
    neuter
    1. satisfaction, compliment; ˚ṁ karoti to exchange politeness, to welcome Vv-a 141 259
    saṁ + modana
    Sammosa
    1. bewilderment, confusion DN i.19 AN i.58 AN ii.147 SN ii.224 SN iv.190 Vin ii.114 Mil 266 Mil 289 Vism 63 (sati˚ lapse of memory)
    for *sam-mṛṣa, of mṛṣ ‣See mussati. sammosa after moha & musā → mosa
    Sammoha
    1. bewilderment, infatuation, delusion MN i.86 MN i.136 Vin i.183 Nd1 193 AN ii.174 AN iii.54f. 416 SN i.24 SN iv.206 Dhs 390
    saṁ + moha
    Sammoheti
    1. ‣See sammuyhati
    Saya = saka
    1. (?) one’s own Ja vi.414 (= saka-raṭṭha Commentary )
    Sayaṁ
    adverb
    1. self, by oneself Vin i.8 DN i.12 DN-a i.175 Snp 57 Snp 320 etc.; p. 57, 100, etc. Mhvs 7, 63 (for feminine ). Also with reference to several people e.g. Dhp-a i.13

      1. ˚kata made by itself, spontaneous DN iii.137 (loka) SN ii.19f. (dukkha) Ud 69f. -jāta born from oneself sprung up spontaneously Ja i.325 Ja ii.129
      • ˚pabha radiating light from oneself, a kind of devas DN i.17 iii.28 sq., 84 sq. Snp 404 DN-a i.110
      • ˚bhū self-dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bu xiv.1 = Ja i.39 Mil 214 Mil 227 Mil 236 Vism 234 Snp-a 106 (
      • feminine abstract sayambhutā), 135
      • ˚vara self-choice Ja v.426
      • ˚vasin self-controlled, independent Bu ii.20 = J i.5; Dāvs i.22
      ‣See etymology under sa4
    Sayatatta
    1. at SN i.14 read saṁyatatta
    Sayati1

    1. to lie down ‣See seti. causative II. sayāpeti ibid
    2. śī
    Sayati2

    1. which is given in meaning sevā at Dhtp 289] to lean on; to be supported etc.: only in past participle sita, and in preposition compound nissayati
    2. śri
    Sayathā
    • adverb [

      1. like, as Thag 1, 412
      cp. Sanskrit sayathā or tadyathā ‣See sa2. The usual Pali form is seyyathā
    Sayana
    neuter
    1. lying down, sleeping Vism 26 Pv-a 80 (mañca˚)
    2. bed, couch Vin i.57 72; ii.123 DN i.5 DN i.7 AN i.132 Ja ii.88 Ja v.110 (˚ṁ attharāpeti to spread out a bed) Mil 243 Mil 348 Nd1 372 (˚sannidhi) Pv i.117 (kis˚ = kiṁ˚) Pv-a 78
    3. sayanakalaha a quarrel in the bedroom, a curtain-lecture Ja iii.20 sayanāsana bed seat Iti 112 Dhp 185 etc. ‣See senāsana
    from śī
    Sayanighara
    neuter a sleeping-room Vin i.140f.; iv.160 Ja i.433 Ja iii.275 Ja iii.276
    Sayāna
    1. is ppr. of sayati lying down (e.g. AN ii.13f.) ‣See seti
    Sayāpita
    1. made to lie down Vb-a 11
    past participle of sayāpeti
    Sayita
    1. lying down Ja i.338 Ja v.438
    • sukha˚ lying in a good position, sleeping well, well-embedded (of ‣Seeds) AN iii.404 = DN ii.354 Mil 255
    • sukha-sayitabhāva “having had a good sleep,” being well Ja v.127
    past participle of seti
    Sayha
    1. ‣See sahati
    Sara1
    1. the reed Saccharum sara Mil 342
    2. an arrow (originally made of that reed) DN i.9 Dhp 304 Mil 396 Dhp-a 216 (visa-pīta)
      1. ˚tuṇḍa a beak as sharp as an arrow Dhp-a iii.32
      • ˚daṇḍaka shaft of an arrow Dhp-a ii.141
      • ˚bhaṅga arrow-breaking Vism 411 (in comparison)
      cp. Vedic śara
    Sara2
    1. adjective-noun [from sarati1 1. going, moving, following Snp 3 Snp 901–⁠2. fluid, flow Ja i.359 (pūti˚)
    Sara2
    1. masculine
    • nt.)
    1. a lake Ja i.221 Ja ii.10 Ja vi.518 (Mucalinda); there are seven great lakes (mahā-sarā viz. Anotatta, Sīhapapāta, Rathakāra, Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Kuṇāla, Chaddanta, Mandākini) AN iv.101 DN i.54 Ja ii.92 DN-a i.164 283; aṇṇava˚; the ocean DN ii.89 cp. AN ii.55 locative sare Ja ii.80 sarasmiṁ Snp 1092 sarasi Mhvs 10, 7; jātassara a natural lake Ja i.472f.
    2. Vedic saras
    Sara4
    adjective
    1. remembering MN i.453 AN ii.21 DN-a i.106
    • ˚saṅkappa mindfulness and aspiration MN i.453 MN iii.132 SN iv.76 SN iv.137 SN iv.190 Nett 16
    from sarati2
    Sara5
    1. sound, voice, intonation, accent Vin ii.108 DN ii.24f. AN i.227 Pv ii.124 (of birds’ singing = abhiruda Commentary ) Ja ii.109 Snp 610 (+ vaṇṇa, which is doubtful here whether “complexion” or “speech,” preferably the former) Dhs-a 17 eight qualities DN ii.211 DN ii.227 gītāssara song Vin ii.108 bindussara a sweet voice Snp 350 adjective Ja ii.439
    • sīhassara with a voice like a lion’s Ja v.296 311 (said of a prince). cp. vissara

      • In combination with vaṇṇa (vowel) at AN iv.307 Mil 340

      -kutti = kḷpti; can we compare Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit svaragupti “depth of voice” Divy 222?

      intonation, resonance timbre, melodiousness of voice Vin ii.108 = AN iii.251 Ja vi.293 (Kern, “enamoured behaviour” ?

      1. ) Dhs-a 16 cp. Vinaya Texts iii.72
      2. ˚bhañña intoning, a particular mode of reciting Vin i.196 Vin ii.108 316 Ja ii.109 Dhp-a i.154
      • ˚bhāṇa = ˚bhañña Dhp-a ii.95 (variant reading ˚bhañña)
      • ˚bhāṇaka an intoner, one who intones or recites the sacred texts in the Sarabhañña manner Vin ii.300
      • ˚sara an imitative word; sarasaraṁ karoti to make the noise sarasara MN i.128
      Vedic svara, svar, cp. Latin su-surrus, German surren
    Saraṁsā
    feminine
    1. the sun (literally having rays) Mhvs 18, 68
    from sa3 + raṁsi
    Saraka
    1. a vessel, a drinking vessel Ja i.157 Ja i.266 Ja iv.384 DN-a i.134 136; Mhvs 32, 32 Dhp-a ii.85 Dhp-a iii.7
    Saraja
    adjective
    1. dusty Vin i.48 AN ii.54
    sa + rajo
    Saraṇa1
    neuter
    1. shelter, house Snp 591 refuge, protection DN iii.187 Snp 503 Ja ii.28 DN-a i.229 especially the three refuges-the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood- AN i.56 DN i.145 Ja i.28 usually combined with verbs like upeti Vv 532 Snp 31
    • gacchati DN i.116 AN iii.242 Vin i.4 Dhp 190 Snp p. 15, 25 Iti 63 or yāti Snp 179 Dhp 188 asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta without help and refuge Mil 148 ‣See leṇa 2.

      1. ˚āgamana = ˚gamana DN i.146 Snp-a 42 157
      2. ˚gamana neuter taking refuge in the three Saraṇas Vin iii.24 SN iv.270
    cp. Vedic śaraṇa protection, shelter, house, śarman identical; śālā hall; to Idj. *kel to hide, as in Latin celo, Old Irish celim, Old High German Anglo-Saxon helan, Gothic huljan to envelop; Old High German hella = English hell; also English hall, and others
    Saraṇa2
    adjective
    1. concomitant with war Dhs 1294 Dhs-a 50
    sa + raṇa
    Saraṇa3
    1. neuter remembrance
    2. ˚tā feminine remembering Dhs 14 23 Pug 21 25
    3. from smṛ; i.e. sarati2
    Saraṇīya
    neuter
    1. something to be remembered AN i.106
    gerundive formation from saraṇa2
    Sarati1

    1. ; given by Dhtp 248 as “gati”] to go, flow, run, move along Ja iii.95 (= parihāyati nassati Commentary ); Pot. sare Ja iv.284 aorist asarā Ja vi.199
    2. past participle sarita1

      • Caus sāreti (1) to make go AN i.141 AN iii.28 = M i.124 = SN iv.176 Ja iv.99 Mil 378 Vism 207.
      • to rub, to mix Vin ii.116 Also sarāpeti. A Desidentical formn is siṁsare (3rd
      • plural medium) at Vv 647 (= Sanskrit sisīrṣati), cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 184
      sṛ
    Sarati2 [

    1. ; , cp. smṛti = sati; Dhtp 248 “cintā”; Latin memor, memoria = memory; Gothic maúrnan = English mourn to care etc.] to remember DN ii.234 Vin i.28 Vin ii.79 Ja ii.29 A diaeretic form is sumarati Dhp 324 absolutive sumariya Mhvs 4, 65.

      1. -1st plural saremhase Thag 2, 383
      2. medium sare Ja vi.227
      3. imperative sara Thag 1, 445 & sarāhi Mil 79 3rd singular saratu Vin i.273

        • ppr. saraṁ Mhvs 3, 6; & saramāna Vin i.103-
        • aorist sari Ja i.330
        • future sarissati Ja vi.496
        • ger saritvā Ja i.214
        • past participle sata2 & sarita; 2.
        • causative sāreti to remind Vin ii.3f. 276; iii.221; sārayamāna, reminding Ja i.50 ppr.
        • passive sāriyamāna Vin iii.221 with acc DN ii.234 with genitive Dhp 324 Ja vi.496 with following
        • future II (in ˚tā) Vin ii.125 4; iii.44, 9, etc.
        • causative II. sarāpeti Vin iii.44 Mil 37 (with double
        • accusative ), 79
        smṛ
    Sarati3 [

    1. ; Dhtp 248: hiṁsā] to crush ‣See seyyati. causative sāreti Vin ii.116 (madhu-sitthakena, to pound up, or mix with beeswax). cp. saritaka
    2. śṛ
    Sarada
    [
    1. autumn the season following on the rains Snp 687 Vv 352
    • ˚-samaya the autumn season DN ii.183 MN i.115 AN iv.102 v.22 Iti 20 SN i.65 SN iii.141 SN iii.155 SN v.44 Vv-a 134 161
    Vedic śarad feminine traces of the consonant declension only in
  • accusative plural sarado sataṁ “100 autumns” Ja ii.16
  • Sarabha
    (rohiccasarabhā migā = rohitā sarabhamigā, Commentary ibid. 538) Sarabhamigajātaka the 483rd Jātaka Ja i.193 Ja i.406 (text Sarabhanga); iv.263 sq.
    1. ˚pallaṅka “antelope-couch,” a high seat, from which the Bodhisat preaches Ja iii.342 (cp. vara-pallanka Ja iii.364)
    2. ˚pādaka having legs like those of a gazelle Ja i.267
    Vedic śarabha a sort of deer Ja iv.267 Ja vi.537
    Sarabhasaṁ
    adverb
    1. eagerly, quickly Dāvs iv.22, 34 sq., 43
    sa2 + rabhasaṁ
    Sarabhū
    feminine
    1. a lizard Vin ii.110 AN ii.73 Ja ii.135 Ja ii.147 Snp-a 439
    cp. Sanskrit saraṭa
    Sarala
    the tree Pinus longifolia Ja v.420 (thus read with B instead of salaḷa
    1. )
    ?
    Saravant
    adjective
    1. having or making a sound, well-sounding Vin i.182 AN iii.375
    2. with a noise Mhvs 25, 38
    sara5 + vant
    Sarasa
    adjective
    1. with its essential properties ‣See rasa Nd1 43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition Dhs-a 71
    sa3 + rasa
    Sarasī
    feminine
    1. a large pond Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 Ja v.46
    Vedic sarasī
    Sarāga
    adjective
    1. connected with lust, passionate DN i.79 DN ii.299 MN i.59 Vism 410
    sa3 + rāga
    Sarājaka
    adjective
    1. including the king Ja i.126 feminine

      • ikā Vin ii.188 SN i.162 Ja ii.113 Ja ii.114 (sarājika at Ja iii.453); with the king’s participation Tika-Paṭṭhāna 26 (sassāmika-sarājaka geha)
      sa3 + rāja + ka
    Sarājita
    denominative nation of a purgatory and its inhabitants SN iv.309f. Various readings Parājita and Sarañjita.
    Sarāpana
    neuter
    1. causing somebody to remember Mil 79
    from sarāpeti causative of sarati2
    Sarāva
    1. a cup, saucer AN i.161 Ja i.8 MN iii.235 for patta) Mil 282 DN-a i.298 Pv-a 244 Pv-a 251
    Sanskrit śarāva
    Sarāvaka
    1. = sarāva Vin i.203 Vin ii.142 153, 222
    Sari
    1. according to Payogasiddhi = sarisa (sadisa) cp. sarīvaṇṇa Ja ii.439 (= samāna-vaṇṇa, Commentary )
    Sarikkha
    adjective
    1. like, resembling SN i.66 Ja i.443 Ja iii.262
    cp. Sanskrit sadṛkṣa, from sadṛś = Pali sadisa
    Sarikkhaka
    adjective
    1. in accordance with, like Ja iv.215 Pv-a 206 Pv-a 284 ‣See also kamma˚
    = sarikkha
    Sarikkhatā
    feminine
    1. resemblance, likeness Ja iii.241 (taṁ˚ being like that) Vv-a 6 (cp. kamma˚)
    from sarikkha
    Sarikkhatta
    neuter
    1. likeness Dhs-a 63 as sarikkhakatta (kamma˚) at Dhs-a 347
    from sarikkha
    Sarita1
    1. gone, set into motion Dhp 341 (= anusaṭa, payāta Dhp-a iv.49)
    past participle of sarati1
    Sarita2
    1. remembered Vin ii.85
    past participle of sarati2
    Saritaka
    neuter powdered stone (pāsāna-cuṇṇa) Vin ii.116 saritasipāṭika powder mixed with gum Vin ii.116
    Saritar
    1. one who remembers DN iii.268 DN iii.286 AN ii.35 SN v.197 SN v.225
    agent noun from sarati2
    Saritā
    feminine
    1. a river Dhs 1059
    • saritaṁ
    • accusative Snp 3 genitive
    • plural Ja ii.442 nominative
    • plural saritā Mil 125
    cp. Vedic sarit, from sarati1
    Sarisa
    adjective
    1. like, resembling Ja v.159
    = sadisa
    Sarisapa
    1. various reading of siriṁsapa MN i.10 etc
    Sarīra
    neuter
    1. the (physical) body DN i.157 MN i.157 SN iv.286 AN i.50 AN ii.41 AN iii.57f. 323 sq. iv.190. Snp 478 Snp 584 Dhp 151 Nd1 181 Ja i.394 (six blemishes); ii.31; antimasarīra one who wears his last body, an Anāgāmin Snp 624 SN i.210 Dhp 400
    2. a dead body, a corpse DN ii.141 DN ii.164 MN iii.91
    3. the bones DN ii.164

      • relics Vv.63, 32 Vv-a 269
      1. ˚aṭṭhaka the bony framework of the body Dhs-a 338
      • ˚ābhā radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre Snp-a 16 (˚ṁ muñcati to send forth), 41 (identical), 140 (identical) -kicca (1) funeral ceremonies, obsequies Ja i.180 Ja ii.5 Vv-a 76 257 Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76 Pv-a 162.
      • “bodily function, satisfying the body’s wants Ja ii.77 Ja iv.37
      • ˚davya (= dabba1) fitness of body, good body, beauty Ja ii.137
      • ˚dhātu a body relic (of the Buddha) Mhvs 13, 167 Vv-a 165 269
      • ˚pabhā lustre of the body Dhp-a i.106
      • ˚parikamma attending the body Snp-a 52
      • ˚maṁsa the flesh of the body Ja iii.53
      • ˚vaṇṇa the (outward) appearance of the body Vism 193
      • ˚valañja discharge from the body, faeces Dhp-a ii.55 Dhp-a iv.46 (˚ṭhāna) ‣See valañja -saṅghāta perfection of body Vism 194
      • ˚saṇṭhāna constitution of the body, bodily form Vism 193
      Vedic śarīra
    Sarīravant
    adjective
    1. having a body SN ii.279
    sarīra + vant
    Sarīvaṇṇa
    1. resembling Ja ii.439 (variant reading sarīra˚). cp. sari
    Sarūpa
    adjective
    1. of the same form AN i.162 Pug 56
    2. sa3 + rūpa
      1. having a body AN i.83
      sa2 + rūpa
    Saroja
    neuter
    1. “lake-born,” a lotus Dāvs iii.13
    Sanskrit saroja, saras + ja
    Sarojayoni
    1. a Brahmā, an archangel Dāvs i.34
    from last
    Saroruha
    neuter
    1. a lotus Dāvs iii.83
    saras + ruha
    Salakkhaṇa1
    adjective
    1. together with the characteristics Snp 1018
    sa3 + lakkhaṇa
    Salakkhaṇa2
    neuter
    1. own characteristic, that which is consistent with one’s own nature Mil 205 Nett 20. O past participle vilakkhaṇa
    2. sa1 + lakkhaṇa
    Salana
    neuter
    1. moving, shaking Vv-a 169 Dhs-a 62 (in definition of kusala as “kucchitānaṁ salan'ādīhi atthehi kusalaṁ”)
    from śal
    Salabha
    1. a moth Ja v.401 Ud 72 (Commentary ) Vb-a 146
    cp. Sanskrit śalabha
    Salayati
    1. to shake Dhs-a 39
    causative of śal to leap
    Salaḷa
    1. a kind of sweet-scented tree Ja v.420 Bu ii.51 = Ja i.13 Vv 355 Vv-a 162 Mil 338 MN ii.184
    Salākā
    feminine
    1. an arrow, a dart AN iv.107 (Text has it as
    2. neuter
    3. a small stick, peg, thin bar SN iv.168 Dāvs iv.51
    4. blade of a grass MN i.79 Ja i.439

      • ribs of a parasol Vin iv.338 Snp-a 487 Mil 226

    5. a pencil, small stick (used in painting the eyes with collyrium) Vin i.204 Ja iii.419 (añjana˚). 6. a kind of needle Vin ii.116

      • a kind of surgical instrument, a stick of caustic Mil 112 Mil 149

    6. a gong stick (of bronze, loha˚) Ja ii.342 Vism 283.

      • membrum virile Ja ii.359
      1. -10. a ticket consisting of slips of wood used in voting and distributing food, vote lot Vin ii.99 176, 306 Ja i.123 Pv-a 272 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚) salākaṁ gaṇhāti to take tickets (in order to vote or to be counted) Vin i.117 Vin ii.199 paṭhaman salākaṁ gaṇhanto taking the first vote, first rate AN i.24 salākaṁ gāheti to issue tickets, to take a vote Vin ii.205 salākaṁ dadāti to issue tickets Ja i.123 salākaṁ vāreti to throw lots Ja i.239 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚)
      1. ˚agga room for distributing food by tickets Ja i.123 Mhvs 15, 205
      2. ˚odhāniya a case for the ointment-stick Vin i.204
      • ˚ gāha taking of votes, voting Vin ii.85 98 sq. (3 kinds)
      • ˚gāhāpaka ticket-issuer, taker of voting tickets Vin ii.84
      • ˚bhatta food to be distributed by tickets Vin i.58 96; ii.175 Ja i.123 Dhp-a i.53 (eight kinds)
      • ˚vātapāna a window made with slips of wood Vin ii.148
      • ˚vutta “subsisting on blades of grass” (or “by means of food tickets"?) Vin iii.6 67; iv.23 AN i.160 SN iv.323 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śalākāvṛtti Divy 131
      • ˚hattha brush-hand, a kind of play, where the hand is dipped in lac or dye and used as a brush (?) DN i.65 DN-a i.85
      cp. Vedic śalākā
    Salāṭuka
    adjective
    1. fresh, unripe SN i.150 = Snp p. 125 Mil 334 Vv-a 288
    cp. * Sanskrit śalāṭu
    Salābha
    1. one’s own advantage Dhp 365
    sa4 + lābha
    Salila
    neuter
    1. water Snp 62 Snp 319 Snp 672 Ja i.8 Ja v.169 Vv-a 41 Pv-a 157 Nd2 665 (“vuccati udakaṁ”) Mil 132 (written saliḷa); Sdhp 168. It is also adjective salilaṁ āpo flowing water Ja vi.534 cp. Mil 114: na tā nadiyo dhuva-salilā
    1. ˚dhārā shower of water Mil 117
    • ˚vuṭṭhi identical Vism 234
    cp. Sanskrit salila, to sarati1
    Salla
    neuter
    1. an arrow, dart MN i.429 (˚ṁ āharati to remove the a); ii.216 SN iv.206 Ja i.180 v.49 Snp 331 Snp 767 Mil 112 Vism 503 (visa˚ sting of poison; cp. Vb-a 104 sallaṁ viya vitujjati); often metaphorically of the piercing sting of craving, evil sorrow etc., e.g. antodosa˚ Mil 323
    • taṇhā˚ SN i.40 SN i.192
    • bhava˚ Dhp 351
    • rāga˚ Dhp-a iii.404 Pv-a 230
    • soka˚ Snp 985 Pv i.86; Kp-a 153. cp. also DN ii.283 Snp 51 Snp 334 Snp 938Ja i.155 Ja iii.157 Dhp-a iv.70 At Nd1 59 seven such stings are given with rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ māna˚, diṭṭhi˚, soka˚, kathankathā˚

      • abhūḷha˚ one whose sting of craving or attachment is pulled out DN ii.283 Snp 593 Ja iii.390 Pv i.87 etc ‣See abbūḷha. cp. vi˚;

      -katta *kartṛ cp. Geiger Pali Grammar § 90, 4

      1. “one who works on the (poisoned) arrow,” i.e. a surgeon MN i.429 ii.216 Snp 562 Iti 101 Mil 110 Mil 169 Vism 136 (in simile); Kp-a 21 (identical). The Buddha is the best surgeon Snp 560 Mil 215
      • ˚kattiya surgery DN i.12 (Text ˚ka) DN-a i.98
      • ˚bandhana at Thag 2, 347 take as salla bandhana “arrow & prison bond” (Thag-a 242 different) -viddha pierced by an arrow Thag 1, 967 Snp 331 cp. ruppati
      • ˚santhana removal of the sting Dhp 275 (= nimmathana abbāhana Dhp-a iii.404)
      Vedic śalya, cp. śalākā
    Sallaka
    1. a porcupine Ja v.489
    cp. * Sanskrit śalala & śallaka
    Sallakī
    feminine
    1. the tree Boswellia thurifera (incense tree) Ja iv.92 plural ˚-iyo Ja vi.535 bahukuṭaja-sallakika Thag 1, 115 (= indasālarukkha ?
      1. )
      cp. Classical Sanskrit śallakī
    Sallakkhaṇā
    feminine
    1. discernment, testing Dhs 16 292, 555 Pug 25 Vism 278 Vb-a 254 Dhs-a 147
    • asallakkaṇa non-discernment SN iii.261
    from sallakkheti
    Sallakkhita
    1. realized, thought Dhp-a i.89
    past participle of sallakkheti
    Sallakkheti
    1. to observe, consider Vin i.48 271 Ja i.123 Ja ii.8 Vism 150; to examine Ja v.13 to bear in mind Dhs-a 110 Ja vi.566 to understand realize, conclude, think over Ja iv.146 Vv-a 185 Vb-a 53 asallakkhetvā without deliberation Vin ii.215 inadvertently Ja i.209 causative II. sallakkhāpeti to cause to be noted Mhvs 9, 24 Dhs-a 121 to persuade, bring to reason Ja vi.393
    2. saṁ + lakkheti
    Sallapati
    1. to talk (with) DN i.90 DN ii.109 Mil 4 sallapeti the same Vin iv.14
    saṁ + lapati
    Sallalīkata
    1. pierced, perforated Ja i.180 Trenckner suggests that this form may have arisen from *sallakīkata (from sallaka, porcupine)
    Sallahuka
    adjective
    1. light Ja i.277 Ja ii.26 Vism 65 Dhp-a iv.17 sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights Ja ii.278 sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Snp 144 DN-a i.207
    saṁ + lahuka
    Sallāpa
    1. conversation DN i.89 AN ii.182 Ja i.112 Ja i.189 Mil 94 Often in compound kathā & allāpa˚
    saṁ + lāpa
    Sallitta
    1. smeared (with) Thag 1, 1175 (mīḷha˚)
    saṁ + litta
    Sallīna
    1. sluggish, cowering DN ii.255 asallīna active, upright, unshaken DN ii.157 SN i.159 SN iv.125 cp. v.68. paṭi˚
    saṁ + līna
    Sallīyanā
    feminine stolidity Dhs 1156 1236.
    Sallekha
    1. austere penance, the higher life MN i.13 MN i.40 Vin i.305 Ps i.102, 103 Pug 69f. DN-a i.82 Vism 69 Mil 360 Mil 380 adjective Vin i.45 sallekhitācāra practising austere penance Mil 230 Mil 244 Mil 348f. ˚vutti Vin ii.197 Vism 65 (˚vuttitā). cp. abhi˚
    from saṁ + likh
    Sallekhatā
    feminine = sallekha DN iii.115 Vism 53.
    Saḷāyatana
    neuter
    1. the six organs of sense and the six objects-viz., eye ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind; forms, sounds, odouis tastes, tangible things, ideas; occupying the fourth place in the Paṭiccasamuppāda DN ii.32 MN i.52 AN i.176 SN ii.3 Vin i.1 Vism 529, 562 sq., 671 Vb-a 174 176 sq., 319
    ṣaḍ˚ for which ordinarily chal˚ ‣See cha
    Sava
    adjective
    1. dripping, flowing with (—˚) Pv ii.911 (madhu˚, with honey)
    from sru, savati
    Savaka
    1. ‣See ˚saṁ;
    Savaṅka
    1. a sort of fish Ja v.405 cp. satavanka & saccavanka
    Savacanīya
    1. (the subject of a) conversation Vin ii.5 22, 276
    sa3 + vacanīya
    Savati
    1. to flow Snp 197 Snp 1034 Ja vi.278 Dhp 370
    • ppr. from savantī Thag-a 109
    sru; cp. Sanskrit srotas stream; Anglo-Saxon strēam = stream; Old Irish sruth
    Savana1
    neuter
    1. the ear Snp 1120 Mil 258
    2. hearing DN i.153 DN i.179 AN i.121 SN i.24 Vin i.26 Snp 265 Snp 345 Dhp 182 Ja i.160 Ja i.250 Mil 257 Nd1 188. sussavanaṁ sāvesi she made me hear a good hearing, she taught me a good thing Ja i.61 savanaṭṭhāne within hearing Ja iv.378
    3. dhamma˚ hearing the preaching of the Dhamma Vin i.101 etc
    from śru ‣See suṇāti
    Savana2
    neuter
    1. flowing Dhp 339 Ja iv.288 Ja v.257 savana-gandha of the body, having a tainted odour Thag 2, 466
    from savati
    Savanīya
    adjective
    1. pleasant to hear DN ii.211 Ja i.96 (-ṇ-) Ja vi.120 = 122 (savaneyya)
    gerundive of suṇāti
    Savantī
    feminine
    1. a river Vin ii.238 Bu ii.86 = J i.18 Ja vi.485 Mil 319
    cp. Vedic sravat, originally ppr. of sru, sravati
    Savara
    1. an aboriginal tribe, a savage Vin i.168 Mil 191
    Epic Sanskrit śabara, cp. śabala = Pali sabala
    Savasa
    1. one’s own will Dhs-a 61 (˚vattitā; cp. Expositor 81)
    sa4 + vasa
    Savighāta
    adjective
    1. bringing vexation Thag 2, 352 Thag-a 242
    sa3 + vighāta
    Savicāra
    1. accompanied by investigation DN i.37 etc., in the description of the first Jhāna ‣See vicāra
    Savijjuka
    adjective
    1. accompanied by lightning DN ii.262
    sa3 + vijju + ka
    Saviññāṇa
    1. possessed of consciousness, conscious, animate AN i.83
    • ˚ka the same AN i.132 Dhp-a i.6

      • See viññāṇaka
    Savitakka
    1. accompanied by reasoning DN i.37 etc., in the formula of the first Jhāna ‣See vitakka
    Savidha
    adjective
    1. near; neuter neighbourhood Dāvs iv.32; v.9
    2. Sanskrit savidha
    Savibhattika
    adjective
    1. (able) to be classified Dhs-a 134 Savupadana = sa-upadana
    sa3 + vibhatti + ka
    Savupādāna = sa-upādāna
    1. (AN ii.163) ‣See upādāna
    Savera
    adjective
    1. angry DN i.247
    sa3 + vera
    Savyañjana
    adjective
    1. with the letters Vin i.21 DN i.62 DN-a i.176 Sn. p. 103; Vism 214
    sa3 + vyañjana
    Savhaya
    adjective
    1. called, named Dpvs 4, 7; Ap 109
    sa3 + avhaya
    Sasa
    a hare, rabbit Dhp 342 Ja iv.85 of the hare in the moon Ja iv.84f. sasôlūkā (= sasā ca ulūkā ca) Ja vi.564
    1. ˚lakkhaṇa the sign of a hare Ja i.172 Ja iii.55
    • ˚lañjana identical Vv-a 314 (˚vant = sasin, the moon)
    • ˚visāṇa a hare’s horn (an impossibility) Ja iii.477
    Vedic śaśa, with Old High German haso = English hare to Latin canus grey, greyish-brown; cp. Anglo-Saxon hasu
    Sasaka
    1. = sasa Ja ii.26 Ja iv.85 cp. i.101
    Sasakkaṁ
    1. as much as one can MN i.415 MN i.514f.
    sa + sakkaṁ
    Sasati1

    1. . cp. Dhtp 301: gati-hiṁsā-pāṇanesu] to slay, slaughter; sassamāna ppr. passive Ja v.24 (Commentary = hiṁsamāna) infinitive sasituṁ Ja vi.291 (read sāsituṁ from sāsati?). pp sattha
    2. śas
    Sasati2 [

    1. to breathe (cp. Dhtp 301: pāṇana) ‣See vissasati
    śvas
    Sasattha
    1. with swords Ja iv.222 Dhs-a 62
    sa3 + sattha
    Sasambhama
    adjective
    1. with great confusion Mhvs 5, 139
    sa + sambhama
    Sasambhāra
    adjective
    1. with the ingredients or constituents Vism 20, 352, 353
    sa3 + sambhāra
    Sasin
    1. the moon Dāvs iv.29 Ja iii.141 Ja v.33 Vv 811 (= canda Vv-a 314), 823
    Sanskrit śaśin, from śaśa
    Sasīsa
    adjective
    1. together with the head; sasīsaṁ up to the head DN i.76 DN i.246 Ja i.298 sasīsaka head and all DN ii.324 Sn, p. 80
    sa3 + sīsa
    Sasura
    1. father-in-law Vin iii.137 MN i.168 AN ii.78 Vv-a 69 121 Thag 2, 407 (sassura) Ja i.337 sassu-sasurā mother-and father-in-law Ja ii.347 Ja iii.182 iv.38; vi.510; the form sassura Thag 2, 407 has probably arisen through analogy with sassu. feminine sasurī Vv-a 69
    2. Vedic śvaśura, feminine śvaśrū ‣See Pali sassū, Indogermanic *sṷekuros, *sṷekrū; cp. Latin socer socrus; Gothic swaihra & swaíhrō, Anglo-Saxon swēor & sweger Old High German swehur & swigar
    Sasenaka
    adjective
    1. accompanied by an army Mhvs 19, 27
    sa3 + sena + ka
    Sassa
    neuter
    1. corn, crop MN i.116 Ja i.86 Ja i.143 Ja i.152 Ja ii.135 Mil 2 Dhp-a i.97 Snp-a 48 sassasamaya crop time Ja i.143 susassa abounding in corn Vin i.238 plural masculine sassā Ja i.340
    2. ˚-kamma agriculture Ja vi.101
    3. ˚-kāla harvest time Vin iv.264
    4. ˚-ṭṭhāna ˚-khetta Ja vi.297 dussassa (having) bad crops Vin i.238 AN i.160 Kp-a 218 (= dubbhikkhā).

      1. ˚uddharaṇa lifting the corn Mil 307
      • ˚ghāta destroying property SN ii.218f.
      cp. Vedic sasya
    Sassata
    adjective
    1. eternal, perpetual DN i.13 DN iii.31f. 137 sq. MN i.8 MN i.426 AN i.41 Dhp 255 Dhs 1099 Ja i.468 Mil 413 DN-a i.112 dhuvasassata sure and certain Bu ii.111 sq. = J i.19; sassatiyā for ever, Snp 1075 a-sassata Ja v.176 Ja vi.315 sassatāyaṁ adverb dative for ever (?) Ja i.468 Ja v.172 Fausböll takes it = sassatā ayam (following the Commentary ), and writes sassat'āyaṁ.

      1. ˚diṭṭhi eternalism, the doctrine that soul and world are eternal Dhs 1315 SN ii.20 SN iii.98 Nett 40, 127 -mūla eternalist Dpvs 6, 25
      2. ˚vāda an eternalist eternalism DN i.13 DN iii.108 SN ii.20 SN iii.99 SN iii.182 SN iv.400 Pug 38 DN-a i.104f.; Ps i.155 Vb-a 509
      • ˚vādin eternalist Nett 111; Mhbv.110
      Vedic śaśvat
    Sassatika
    1. eternalist DN i.17 Mhbv.110 (ekacca˚ partial eternalist) Vin iii.312
    • ˚-ika Ja v.18 Ja v.19
    from sassata
    Sassatisamaṁ
    adverb
    1. for ever and ever DN i.14 MN i.8 SN iii.143 also sassatī samā Ja iii.255 Vv 6314 (explained by sassatīhi samāna, like the eternal things-viz., earth, sun, moon, etc., Vv-a 265) Ja iii.256 DN-a i.105
    cp. Sanskrit śaśvatīḥ samāḥ
    Sassamāṇabrāhmaṇa
    feminine -ī together, with samaṇas and brahmins Vin i.11 DN i.62 DN iii.76 DN iii.135 SN v.423 Snp p. 100 DN-a i.174
    Sassara
    1. imitative of the sound sarasara; chinnasassara giving out a broken or irregular sound of sarasara MN i.128 ‣See Journal of the Pali Text Society, 1889, p. 209
    Sassāmika
    adjective
    1. having a master, belonging to somebody DN ii.176
    2. having a husband married Ja i.177 Ja i.397 Ja iv.190
    sa + sāmin + ka
    Sassirīka
    adjective
    1. glorious, resplendent Ja i.95 Ja ii.1 Ja iv.189 Ja vi.270
    sa3 + sirī + ka
    Sassū
    1. and Sassu feminine

      1. mother-in-law Vin iii.137 AN ii.78 Thag 2, 407 Snp 125 Ja i.337 Ja iii.425f.; v.286 (genitive sassuyā) Dhp-a i.307 Vv-a 110 121 Pv-a 89 sassu-sasure ‣See sasura; sassudeva worshipping one’s mother-in-law as a god SN i.86 Ja iv.322
      Vedic śvaśrū ‣See sasura
    Saha1
    indeclinable
    1. preposition & prefix, meaning: in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately after (with instrumental) Vin i.38 Snp 49 Snp 928 Thag 2, 414 = 425; sahā Snp 231
    1. ˚anukkama = sahānukkama with the bridle Dhp 398 Dhp-a iv.161
    • ˚āmacca together with the ministers Mhvs 5, 182
    • ˚āvudha together with one’s weapons Ja iv.416
    • ˚indaka together with Indra DN ii.208 DN ii.221 Vv 301
    • ˚ūdaka together with water Ja v.407
    • ˚oḍha together with the stolen goods; coraṁ ˚-aṁ gahetvā Vism 180; Mhvs 23, 11 (thena); 35, 11 ‣See oḍḍha-odaka containing water Mhvs 4, 13
    • ˚orodha with his harem Mhvs 5, 182
    • ˚kathin conversing with (instrumental MN i.489
    • ˚kāra a sort of fragrant mango Kp-a 53 -gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin i.10 DN ii.186 SN v.421 Kvu 337 Dhs-a 157
    • ˚ggaṇa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58 -cetiya containing a Cetiya Mhvs 33, 10
    • ˚ja born at the same time Vv 8115
    • ˚jāta 1. born at the same time, of equal age Ja i.54 Ja vi.512
    • arisen at the same time coinciding with instrumental Kvu 337, 620 Vb-a 127 3. (in ˚paccaya the relation of co-nascence, coincidence Duka-Paṭṭhāna 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225 sq. 334 sq. and passim; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243 sq. Vism 535
    • ˚jīvin (
    • feminine -ī) living together with Vin iv.291 325 sq
    • ˚dhammika having the same Dhamma co-religionist MN i.64 Nd1 485 (opposite para˚); regarding the Dhamma DN i.94 DN i.161 MN i.368 Vin i.134 Nett 52 DN-a i.263 (= sahetuka, sakāraṇa); that which is in accordance with the dhamma Dhs 1327 MN i.482 ˚ṁ
    • adverb in accordance with the dhamma Vin i.60 69 iii.178; iv.141
    • ˚dhammiya co-religionist Nett 169 -dhenuka accompanied by a cow Mhvs 21, 18
    • ˚nandin rejoicing with Iti 73
    • ˚paṁsukīḷita a companion in play a playfellow AN ii.186: Ja i.364 Ja iv.77 Pv-a 30
    • ˚pesuṇa together with slander Snp 862
    • feminine Nd1 257
    • ˚bhāvin being at one’s service Ja iii.181 (amacca)
    • ˚bhū arising together with Dhs 1197 Nett 16; a class of devas DN ii.260
    • ˚macchara with envy Snp 862
    • ˚yoga = karaṇa-vacana Snp-a 44
    • ˚vatthu living together with Thag 2, 414 425 Thag-a 269
    • ˚vāsa living together, associating Vin ii.34 Iti 68
    • ˚ vāsin living together Ja v.352
    • ˚saṅgha together with the Order Mhvs 1, 71
    • ˚seyyā sharing the same couch, living together Vin iv.16 Kp-a 190 -sevaka together with the servants Mhvs 36, 43
    • ˚sokin sorrowful (?) SN iv.180
    • from sa3; cp. Vedic saha
    Saha2
    adjective
    1. submitting to, enduring MN i.33 Thag 1, 659 Ja vi.379 sabbasaha Ja v.425 Ja v.431
    • dussaha hard to endure Sdhp 95 Sdhp 118 Sdhp 196
    from sah
    Sahati
    1. to conquer, defeat, overcome MN i.33 SN iv.157 Snp 942 Dhp 335 Iti 84 Ja i.74 Ja ii.386 (avamānaṁ); iii.423 (identical)
    2. to bear, endure Snp 20 Pug 68
    3. to be able DN ii.342 (sayhāmi); Pot. sahe Snp 942 Pot. saheyya MN i.33 saha (

      • imperative excuse forgive, beg your pardon!) Ja iii.109
      • gerundive sayha that which can be endured, able to be done Snp 253 Dāvs ii.29; a-sayha Mil 1148
      sah to prevail
    Sahattha
    1. one’s own hand Ja i.68 usually sahatthā ablative with one’s own hand Vin i.18 AN i.274 DN i.109 Snp p. 107 Ja i.286 Pv ii.98; ii.954 Mil 15 instrumental sahatthena identical Pv-a 110 Pv-a 124 Pv-a 135 Ja iii.267 vi.305. cp. sāhatthika
    sa4 + hattha
    Sahatthin
    adjective
    1. together with the elephant Mhvs 25, 70
    sa3 + hatthin
    Sahavya
    neuter
    1. companionship Vv 477 (= sahabhāva Vv-a 202). —˚ūpaga coming into union with DN i.245
    from sahāya, cp. Sanskrit sāhāyya
    Sahavyatā
    feminine
    1. companionship DN i.18 DN i.235 DN ii.206 MN ii.195 MN iii.99 SN iv.306 AN iii.192
    abstract from sahavya
    Sahasā
    adverb
    1. forcibly, hastily, suddenly Snp 123 Dhp-a iii.381 Pv-a 40 Pv-a 279 inconsiderately Ja i.173 Ja iii.441
    • ˚˚kāra violence DN i.5 DN iii.176 AN ii.209 Pug 58 Ja iv.11 DN-a i.80
    instrumental of sahas (Vedic), force
    Sahassa
    1. a thousand, used as a singular with a noun in the plural, sahassaṁ vācā Dhp 100 satasahassaṁ vassāni Ja i.29 also in the
    2. plural after other numerals cattāri satasahassāni chaḷabhiññā Bu ii.204 = J i.29; also with the thing counted in the genitive, accharānaṁ sahassaṁ Mhvs 17, 13 AN i.227 or ˚-, as sahassa-yakkha-parivāra Snp-a 209 In combination with other numerals, sahassa is sometimes inflected like an adjective, saṭṭhisahassā amaccā sixty thousand ministers Ja vi.484 satasahassiyo gāvo 100,000 cows Snp 308 the thing counted then precedes in a compound jāti-sahassaṁ 1,000 births DN i.13 Iti 99 ghaṭa-sahassam pi udakaṁ Mil 189 sindhava-sahasso ratho Ja vi.103 sahassaṁ sahassena a thousand times a thousand Dhp 103 sahassass’ eva in thousands DN ii.87-sahassaṁ
    3. neuter 1,000 gold pieces Dhp 106 Ja vi.484 Mil 10 satasahassaṁ a hundred thousand Ja i.28
    4. sahassa
    5. adjective (
    6. feminine -ī) worth a thousand Ja v.484 Ja v.485 Thag-a 72 (Ap v.45, read sahassayo for ˚aso); epithet of Brahmā, the B. of a thousand world systems MN iii.101 cp. dasa-sahassī.

      1. ˚akkha thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.229 Ja vi.203
      • sahassacakkhu the same Ja v.394 Ja v.407
      • ˚aggha worth a thousand Mil 284
      • ˚āra having 1,000 spokes DN ii.172
      • ˚ṭṭhavikā a purse with 1,000 pieces (of money Vism 383 Ja i.506 Dhp-a ii.37 Vv-a 33

        • netta thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.226 Snp 346 Ja iii.426 Ja iv.313 v.408; vi.174 Vv 3010 Dhp-a i.17
        • ˚bāhu having a thousand arms, said of Ajjuna Ja v.119 Ja v.135 Ja v.145 (˚-rājā) 267, 273; vi.201
        • ˚bhaṇḍikā a heap of 1,000 pieces Ja ii.424 Ja iii.60 Ja iv.2
        • ˚raṁsi the sun Ja i.183
        Sanskrit sahasra ‣See etymology under saṁ˚
    Sahassadhā
    adverb
    1. in a thousand ways AN i.227 Thag 1, 909
    cp. satadhā etc.
    Sahassika
    adjective
    1. thousandfold Ja i.17 Ja iv.175 (so for ˚iyo). Sahassi-lokadhatu
    from sahassa
    Sahassī-lokadhātu
    feminine a thousandfold world, a world system DN i.46 AN i.228 DN-a i.130 dasasahassī-lokadhātu ten world systems Ja i.51 Ja i.63 cp. dasasahassī and lokadhātu.
    Sahājanetta
    1. at Snp 1096 is of doubtful meaning (“all-seeing"?), it is explained as “spontaneously arisen omniscience” at Nd2 669 (where spelling is sahajānetta; literally “coinciding eye” Snp-a 598 explains as “sahajāta-sabbaññuta-ñāṇa-cakkhu.”
    sahāja + netta
    Sahāya
    1. companion, friend DN ii.78 MN i.86 SN iv.288 Pug 36 Snp 35 Snp 45f. Ja ii.29
    • ˚-kicca assistance (?) Ja v.339
    • ˚-matta companion Ja iv.76
    • ˚-sampadā the good luck of having companions Snp 47
    • adiṭṭha—˚ a friend who has not yet been seen personally Ja i.377 Ja iii.364
    • bahu—˚ having many friends Vin ii.158 nāhaṁ ettha sahāyo bhavis-sāmi I am not a party to that Ja iii.46 asahāya Mil 225
    cp. Epic Sanskrit sahāya, from saha + i
    Sahāyaka
    adjective

    feminine ˚yikā companion, ally, friend Vin i.18 DN ii.155 AN ii.79 AN ii.186 Ja i.165 Ja ii.29 Ja v.159 vi.256 (gihī sahāyakā, read gihisahāyakā ?

    1. )
    from last
    Sahāyatā
    feminine
    1. companionship Dhp 61
    • sahāyatta
    • neuter the same Mhvs 30, 21
    abstract from sahāya
    Sahita
    1. accompanied with Mhvs 7, 27
    2. united, keeping together DN i.4 Ja iv.347 Pug 57
    3. consistent, sensible, to the point DN i.8 AN ii.138 AN iv.196 SN iii.12 Dhp 19 (at Dhp-a i.157 explained as a name for the Tipiṭaka, thus equalling Sanskrit saṁhita) Pug 42

      • close together, thick Thag 2 254
      • araṇisahita
      • neuter firewood and appurtenances Vin ii.217 DN ii.340f. Ja i.212 Dhp-a ii.246
      • sahitaṁvata
      • adjective having a consistent or perpetual vow i.e. living the holy life Ja v.320 (= sīlācāra-sampanna Commentary ); vi.525 (Text sahitabbata; Commentary explains as samādinna-vata gahita-tāpasa-vesa). Kern, Toevoegselen ii.51 takes it as a corrupted Sanskrit śaṁsita-vrata
    past participle of saṁ + dhā, cp. Sanskrit sahita = saṁhita
    Sahitar
    1. one who endures Snp 42
    agent noun from sahati
    Sahirañña
    adjective
    1. possessing gold Snp 102
    sa + hirañña
    Sahetu
    adjective
    1. having a cause, together with the cause Vin i.2 DN i.180 DN-a i.263 ‣See hetu
    sa + hetu
    Sahetuka
    1. having a cause, accompanied by a cause (especially of good or bad karma) AN i.82 Dhs 1073
    Sahoḍha
    1. ‣See under saha1. Sā ‣See under San1
    Sāka
    neuter
    1. vegetable, potherb DN i.166 MN i.78 MN i.156 AN i.241 AN i.295 AN ii.206 Pug 55 Vism 70 Vv 3333 Ja iii.225 Ja iv.445 Ja v.103
    2. masculine name of a tree (Tectona grandis) DN i.92 DN-a i.259 Vism 250 ˚-vatthu ground for cultivation of vegetables Ja iv.446 sāka-paṇṇavaṇṇa “like the colour of vegetable leaf (said of teeth) Ja v.206 (cp. 203)
    Epic Sanskrit śāka
    Sākacchā
    feminine conversation, talking over, discussing DN i.103 DN ii.109 MN i.72 SN i.79 AN ii.140 AN ii.187f. iii.81 Snp 266 Mil 19 Mil 24 Dhp-a i.90 (˚aṁ karoti) Ja vi.414
    Sākaccheti
    1. to converse with, talk over with, discuss DN ii.237 (+ sallapati); ppr. sākacchanto Vin i.169 future sākacchissanti Vin ii.75 Vin iii.159
    2. gerundive sākacchātabba Vin v.123 196; ppr.
    3. medium sākacchā yamāna AN ii.189
    4. denominative from sākacchā
    Sākaṭika
    1. a carter SN i.57 Thag 2, 443 (Thag-a 271 = senaka) Ja iii.104 Mil 66 Mil 164
    from sakaṭa1
    Sākalya
    neuter
    1. totality; Kp-a 187 (opposite vekalya); sākalya AN i.94 is misprint for sākhalya
    from sakala
    Sākāra
    adjective
    1. with its characteristics DN i.13 DN iii.111 MN i.35 Pug 60 Vism 423 (+ sa-uddesa)
    sa3 + ākāra
    Sākuṇika
    1. a fowler SN ii.256 AN iii.303 Pug 56 Ja i.208 Combd with miga-bandhaka & macchaghātaka at Snp-a 289 with māgavika & maccha-ghātaka at Pug 56
    from sakuṇa
    Sākuntika
    1. a fowler, bird-catcher AN ii.207 Thag 2, 299 Thag-a 227 DN-a i.162
    from sakunta
    Sākkharappabheda
    1. together with the distinction of letters, with the phonology DN i.88 AN i.163 Sn, p. 101 Mil 10 DN-a i.247 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca)
    sa3 + akkhara + pabheda
    Sākhapurāṇasanthuta
    1. one with whom one has formerly been friendly Ja v.448 Sakhalya & Sakhalla;
    from sakhi + purāṇa˚
    Sākhalya
    Sakhalla;
    neuter
    1. friendship MN i.446 (= tameness) AN i.94 DN iii.213 Dhs 1343 DN-a i.287 Dhs-a 396 Ja iv.57 Ja iv.58 (= maṭṭhavacana “smooth words”)
    abstract from sakhila
    Sākhavant
    adjective
    1. having branches Ja iii.493
    sākhā + vant
    Sākhā
    1. a branch Vin i.28 MN i.135 AN i.152 AN ii.165 200 sq.; iii.19, 43 sq., 200; iv.99, 336; v.314 sq. Snp 791 Ja v.393 Ja ii.44 a spur of a hill AN i.243 AN ii.140 Mil 36 also sākha neuter Mhvs 1, 55 Ja i.52 Ja iv.350 Ja i.164 (? yāva aggasākhā)

      • the rib of a parasol Snp 688 adjective sīla-sākha-pasākha whose branches and boughs are like the virtues Ja vi.324 In compounds. sākha˚ & sākhā˚;
      1. ˚nagaraka “little town in the branches,” i.e. a suburb, a small town DN ii.146 Ja i.391
      • ˚patta-palāsa branches and foliage AN iii.44
      • ˚patta-phal'upeta with branches, leaves & fruit AN iii.43
      • ˚palāsa identical MN i.488 AN ii.200
      • ˚bhaṅga faggots Ja i.158 Ja iii.407 Dhp-a ii.204 iii.375
      • ˚miga a monkey Ja ii.73
      • ˚ssita living upon branches (i.e. monkey) Ja v.233
      Vedic śākhā, cp. also śanku stick, & Gothic hōha plough
    Sāgataṁ
    indeclinable
    1. “greeting of welcome,” hail! DN i.179 = M i.481 (sāgataṁ bhante Bhagavato) DN ii.173 MN i.514 (˚aṁ bhoto Ānandassa) DN-a i.287 Dhp-a iii.293
    su + āgata, orij. neuter = wel-come
    Sāgara
    1. the ocean DN i.89 AN ii.56 AN ii.140 AN iii.52 AN v.116f. Vin i.246 Snp 568 Pv-a 29 sāgara ūmi a wave of the ocean, a flood Ja iv.165
    • ˚-vāri the ocean Ja iv.165
    • sāgaranta or sāgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the ocean (said of the earth) Ja vi.203
    • ˚-kuṇḍala the same Ja iii.32 Ja vi.278
    cp. Epic Sanskrit sāgara
    Sāgāra
    adjective
    1. living in a house, Iti 111 sleeping under the same roof Vin ii.279
    sa3 + agāra
    Sāṅgaṇa
    adjective
    1. full of lust, impure MN i.24 (various read sangaṇa; this is also the reading at Snp 279 ‣See above)
    sa + angaṇa
    Sācakka
    neuter
    1. name of a science (“the interpretation of omens to be drawn from dogs”) Mil 178
    sā = śvan, dog; + cakka; cp. sopāka & suva
    Sācariyaka
    adjective
    1. together with one’s teacher DN i.102
    sa3 + ācariya + ka
    Sāciyoga
    1. crooked ways, insincerity DN i.5 DN iii.176 MN i.180 AN ii.209 AN v.206 Pug 58 DN-a i.80
    sāci + yoga; cp. Sanskrit sāci crooked
    Sājīva
    neuter rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin iii.2416; adjective ˚-samāpanna ibid.; adjective ˚-kara one who supports Ja iv.42 (= sa-ājīvakara, Commentary ).
    Sāṭa
    1. a garment, cloth Thag 2, 245 sāṭi feminine the same SN i.115 Dhp 394 Ja i.230 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) 481
    2. cp. Sanskrit śāṭa
    Sāṭaka
    an outer garment, cloak; cloth Thag-a 246 Ja i.89 Ja i.138 Ja i.195 Ja i.373 Ja i.426 Vism 54 (sāṇa˚), 275 (alla˚) Dhp-a i.393 (thūla˚). cp. antara˚, alaṁ˚.
    1. ˚lakkhaṇa prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth Ja i.371
    sāṭa + ka
    Sāṭikā
    feminine = sāṭaka Vin i.292f.; ii.31; 272, 279 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) Ja i.330 Vism 339 (in simile) Mil 240 (cp. MN iii.253). sāṭiya the same Vin ii.177 (˚gāhāpaka receiver of undergarments).
    Sāṭetar
    1. one who dispels, drives away MN i.220 AN v.347f. 351, 359
    agent noun from sāṭeti
    Sāṭeti
    1. to cut open, to destroy; figuratively to torment: Kern’s proposed reading ‣See Toevoegselen s. v sāveti for sāveti at Ja iii.198 (amba-pakkāni); iv.402 (attānaṁ sāṭetvā dāsakammaṁ karissāni); vi.486 (kāyaṁ s.). He compares MVastu iii.385: śāṭeti gātrāni. cp. visāṭita & visāta;
    śat to cut, destroy
    Sāṭheyya
    neuter
    1. craft, treachery MN i.15 MN i.36 MN i.281 MN i.340 AN i.95 AN i.100 Nd1 395 Pug 19 23 Mil 289 cp. paṭi˚
    abstract from saṭha = *śāṭhya
    Sāṇa1
    neuter
    1. hemp DN ii.350 Mil 267 a coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58 DN i.166 DN iii.41 MN i.78 AN i.240 SN ii.202 SN ii.221 Pug 55 Vism 54 (˚sāṭaka)
    • sāṇavāka the same Thag 2, 252 Ja iii.394 (various read)
    cp. Sanskrit śāṇa hempen, from śaṇa = Pali saṇa; cp. bhanga1
    Sāṇa2
    1. having a debt, indebted, figuratively subjected to the kilesas, imperfect MN iii.127 = SN ii.221 (= sakilesa sa-iṇa Kindred Sayings ii.203) Thag-a 8 cp. anaṇa under aṇa
    sa + iṇa
    Sāṇadhovana
    neuter a kind of play DN-a i.84 = saṇadhovikā.
    Sāṇikā
    feminine
    1. a curtain Ja iii.462
    from sāṇī
    Sāṇī
    feminine
    1. hemp-cloth DN ii.350 Vin iii.17 a screen, curtain, tent Ja i.58 Ja i.148f. 178, 419 Dhp-a i.194 Dhp-a ii.49 ˚-pākāra a screen-wall Vin iv.269 279 Ja ii.88 Dhp-a ii.68 71, 186 Vv-a 173 Pv-a 283 Mhvs 7, 27; sāṇipasibbaka a sack or bag of hempcloth Vin iii.1710
    • paṭṭa-sāṇī a screen of fine cloth Ja i.395
    from saṇa
    Sāta
    adjective
    1. pleasant, agreeable Iti 114 Nett 27. Often combined with piya, e.g. Iti 114 Vb 103 DN-a i.311
    • O
    • past participle kaṭuka
    • sāta
    • neuter pleasure, joy MN i.508 AN i.81f. SN ii.220 Ja i.410 Dhp 341 (˚sita sāta-nissita Dhp-a iv.49) Snp 867f. Nd1 30 (three, of bhava); Pv ii.113; iv.54 (+ sukha) Dhs 3
    • asāta disagreeable unpleasant Dhs 1343 Ja i.410 Ja i.288 Ja ii.105 Snp 867f.; sātabhakkha Pug 55 read haṭabhakkha
    1. ˚odaka with pleasant water DN ii.129 MN i.76 Vin iii.108
    • ˚kumbha gold Vv-a 13 ‣See also variant reading under hāṭaka

      • putta a noble son Ja vi.238 (= amacca-putta Commentary )
      cp. * Sanskrit śāta
    Sātaka
    1. name of a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (koṭṭhapokkhara—˚, cp. 540) Snp-a 359 (identical)
    Sātacca
    neuter
    1. perseverance MN i.101 SN ii.132 AN iii.249f.; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq. Thag 1, 585 Vism 4 Vb-a 346
    • ˚-kārin persevering SN iii.268 SN iii.271 SN iii.277f. Dhp 293
    • ˚-kiriyatā persevering performance Dhs 1367
    from satata
    Sātataṁ
    adverb
    1. continually SN i.17 = 57
    from satata
    Sātatā
    feminine
    1. happiness SN i.17
    abstract from sāta
    Sātatika
    adjective
    1. persevering Dhp 23 SN ii.232 Iti 74 Dhp-a i.230
    from last
    Sātatta
    neuter
    1. tastiness, sweetness AN i.32
    abstract from sāta
    Sātava
    neuter sweet result (of good words) kalyāṇakamma, Commentary ) Ja vi.235 Ja vi.237 Is it misspelling for sādhava (fr sādhu)?
    Sātiya
    adjective
    1. pleasant Snp 853
    from sāta
    Sātireka
    adjective
    1. having something in excess DN ii.93
    sa + atireka, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sātirikta Divy 27
    Sātisāra
    adjective
    1. trespassing Vin i.55
    sa + atisāra
    Sāttha
    1. with the meaning, in spirit DN i.62 DN ii.48 Iti 79 111; Snp p. 100 Vin i.21 DN-a i.176 Vism 214
    sa3 + attha
    Sātthaka
    adjective
    1. (feminine -ikā) useful Pv-a 12 Satra-yaga sa + atthaka
    Sātrā-yāga
    1. identical with sammāpāsa (Sn 303) Snp-a 322 (? conjecture yātrā˚)
    Sāthalika
    adjective
    1. lethargic, lax MN i.14 MN i.200f.; iii.6 AN i.71 AN ii.148 AN iii.108 AN iii.179f.
    śrath, cp. saṭhila & sithila
    Sādana
    neuter
    1. place, house Ja iv.405 Yama-sādanaṁ sampatto come to Yama’s abode: dead Ja iv.405 Ja v.267 Ja v.304 Ja vi.457 Ja vi.505 (do., the manuscripts always read ˚-sādhana)
    cp. Vedic sādana, from sad
    Sādara
    adjective
    1. reverential Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 2; 28, 25; 33, 82; sādariya neuter and sādariyatā
    2. feminine showing regard and consideration Pug 24 cp. Dhs 1327
    3. sa + ādara
    Sādāna
    adjective
    1. attached to the world, passionate Dhp 406 = Sn 630 Dhp-a iv.180
    sa + ādāna
    Sāditar
    1. one who accepts, appropriates MN iii.126
    agent noun from sādiyati
    Sādiyati

    1. literally to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place DN i.166 Vin ii.294 AN iv.54 AN iv.347 SN i.78 SN iv.226f. Pug 55 Mil 95f. aorist sādiyi Vin iii.38f.;
    2. future sādiyissati Ja vi.158
    3. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit svādīyati: MVastu ii.145; Med passive from *sādeti, causative of svad
    Sādiyanā
    feminine
    1. appropriating, accepting Mil 95
    from sādiyati
    Sādisa
    1. (feminine -sī like, similar DN ii.239 Snp 595 Thag 2, 252 (sa˚ for sā˚); Ap 239 Ja iv.97 Mil 217 (with instrumental)
    2. from sadisa
    Sādu
    adjective
    1. sweet, nice, pleasant Vin ii.196 MN i.114 Thag 2, 273 Snp 102 Ja iv.168 Ja v.5 Dhs 629 asādu (ka) Ja iii.145 Ja iv.509 (text, asādhuka com. on kaṭuka); sādu-karoti makes sweet Ja iii.319 Pot a-sādu-kiyirā makes bitter, ibid. 319; sādu sweet things Vin ii.196 sādu-phala ‣See sādhuphala; for ˚kamyatā ‣See the latter
    Vedic svādu, feminine svādvī; from svad, cp. Latin suavis, Gothic sūts = English sweet; also Sanskrit sūda cook
    Sādutā
    feminine
    1. sweetness Dāvs i.40
    from sādu
    Sādeti1
    1. to cause to sink, to throw down Dhp-a i.75 (+ vināseti; variant reading pāteti)
    causative of sad ‣See sīdati
    Sādeti2
    1. to enjoy ‣See ucchādeti (where better referred to avad and chādeti2
    causative of svad; given as root in meaning “assādane” at Dhtp 147
    Sādhaka
    adjective
    1. accomplishing, effecting Ja i.86 Snp-a 394 415; Sdhp 161; iṇa˚; debt-collector Mil 365 bali˚ tax-collector Ja iv.366 Ja v.103 Ja v.105 Ja v.106
    from sādh
    Sādhakatā
    feminine
    1. effectiveness, efficiency Sdhp 329
    abstract from sādhaka
    Sādhana
    adjective neuter
    1. enforcing, proving Ja i.307 DN-a i.105
    2. settling, clearing (a debt) Ja ii.341 (uddhāra˚). In this meaning mixed with sodheti; it is impossible to decide which of the two is to be preferred ‣See iṇa & uddhāra;
    3. yielding, effecting, producing resulting in (—˚) AN iii.156 (laṇḍa˚ dung-producing) DN-a i.273 Vv-a 194 Pv-a 278 (hita˚).

      • materials instrument Vv-a 349 Pv-a 199
    from sādh
    Sādhāraṇa
    adjective general, common, joint Vin ii.258 Vin iii.35 Thag 2, 505 Ja i.202 Ja i.302 Ja iv.7 (pañca˚-bhāva 5 fold connection); Nett 49 sq. Pv-a 122 Pv-a 194 Pv-a 265. a˚ Ja i.78 DN-a i.71
    Sādhika
    adjective
    1. having something beyond DN ii.93 Vv 535 (˚vīsati) ˚-porisa exceeding a man’s height MN i.74 MN i.365 AN iii.403
    sa + adhika; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sādhika Divy 44
    Sādhiya
    adjective
    1. that which can be accomplished Sdhp 258 etc
    from sādh
    Sādhu
    adjective
    1. good, virtuous, pious Snp 376 Snp 393 Ja i.1 Mhvs 37, 119 Pv-a 116 Pv-a 132 asādhu bad, wicked Dhp 163 Dhp 223 Dhp-a iii.313
    2. good, profitable, proficient, meritorious Dhp 35 Dhp 206 (= sundara, bhaddaka Dhp-a iii.271) DN i.88 Pv ii.97
    3. neuter adverb well, thoroughly Dhp 67 Ja i.1 Mhvs 36, 97 37, 73. Very frequent as interjection, denoting (a request (adhortative, with
    4. imperative : sādhu gaccha please go! Mil 18 gacchatha Vv-a 305), to be translated with “come on, welcome, please,” or similar
    5. adverb s. Thus e.g. at Pv iv.140 (= āyācane Pv-a 232) Ja i.92 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 35 Pv-a 272 Vv-a 69 -(b) assent & approval; in replies to a question “alright, yes” or similarly; usually with the verbs (in
    6. absolutive ) paṭisuṇitvā, vatvā, sampaṭicchitvā etc Thus e.g. at Ja v.297 Vin i.56 Mil 7 Dhp-a iii.13 Vv-a 149 DN-a i.171 Snp-a 176 (= sampahaṁsane) Pv-a 55 Pv-a 78 and passim
      1. ˚kamyatā desire for proficiency Vb-a 477
      • ˚kāra saying “well,” approval, cheering, applause Ja i.223 Mil 13 Mil 16 Mil 18 Vv-a 132 Dhp-a i.390 Dhp-a iii.385
      • ˚kīḷana a festive play, a sacred festivity Mhvs 3, 11; sādhukīḷita the same Mhvs 20, 36; ˚-divasa Vin iii.285 sādhu-kīḷā Ja iii.434 Ja v.127 sādhu-kīḷikā Ja iii.433
      • ˚jīvin leading a virtuous life Iti 71
      • ˚phala having wholesome fruits Ja i.272 (read sādu˚)
      • ˚rūpa good, respectable Dhp 262
      • ˚sammata highly honoured DN i.48 SN iv.398 Snp p. 90 sq. Mil 4 Mil 21 DN-a i.143
      • ˚sīliya good character Ja ii.137
      Vedic sādhu, from sādh
    Sādhukaṁ
    adverb
    1. well, thoroughly Vin i.46 Vin ii.208 DN i.62 instrumental sādhukena (as
    2. adverb ) willingly (opposite with force) Pv ii.92
    3. from sādhu
    Sādheti
    1. to accomplish, further, effect Ja ii.236 (Pot. sādhayemase)
    2. to make prosperous Pv-a 113 Pv-a 125
    3. to arrange, prepare Mhvs 7, 24.

      • to perform execute Ja i.38 (ārāmika-kiccaṁ) DN-a i.194 Mhvs 36, 62 Vism 344 ‣See udukkhala

    4. to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove Ja ii.306 Snp-a 192 (atthaṁ), 459; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 58 Pv-a 30 (here as much as “is any good”).

      • to collect or clear a debt, to recover (money). In this sense sādheti is mixed up with sodheti, which is regularly found as variant reading, is it almost better to substitute sodheti at all passages for sādheti (cp. iṇa, uddhāra), e.g. Ja i.230 Ja ii.341 Ja. Ja. Ja iii.106 iv.45 Dhp-a iii.12
      • cp. abhi˚;
    causative of sādh to succeed. Dhtp 421 = saṁsiddhiyan
    Sānu
    masculine and
    • neuter

      1. ridge Vv 3210 Ja iii.172 The Commentary on the former passage (Vv-a 136) translates vana wood, that on the latter paṁsupabbata sānupabbata a forest-hill Ja iv.277 Ja vi.415 Ja vi.540 pabbatasānu—˚ Ja iii.175 girisānu—˚ Ja iii.301 Ja iv.195
      Vedic sānu
    Sānucara
    adjective
    1. together with followers Dhp 294 Ja vi.172
    sa3 + anucara
    Sānuvajja
    adjective
    1. blameable AN ii.3
    sa + anuvajja
    Sānuseti
    1. to fill (the mind) completely AN ii.10
    sa (= saṁ) + anuseti
    Sāpa
    1. a curse Vv-a 336 Dhp-a i.41
    from sap, cp. Sanskrit śāpa
    Sāpateyya
    neuter
    1. property, wealth DN i.142 ii.180; iii.190 Vin i.72 274; iii.66 Ja i.439 Ja i.466 Thag 2, 340 Thag-a 240 Ja v.117 (sāpateya, various read sāpatiyya) Dhp-a i.67
    sā (= guṇa of sva) + pateyya (abstract from pati lord), cp. ādhi-pateyya
    Sāpattika
    adjective
    1. one who has committed a sin ‣See āpatti Vin i.125 Vin ii.240 Nd1 102
    sa3 + āpatti + ka
    Sāpada
    neuter
    1. a beast of prey Ja ii.126 Ja vi.79
    cp. Sanskrit śvāpada
    Sāpadesa
    adjective
    1. with reasons DN i.4 AN ii.22 MN i.180 MN iii.34 MN iii.49 Pug 58 DN-a i.76 O past participle anapadesa MN i.287
    2. sa + apadesa
    Sāpānadoṇī
    1. MN ii.183 = 152 (Commentary = sunakhānaṁ pivanadoṇi a dog’s trough)
    Sāpekha
    1. longing for DN ii.77 DN iii.43
    sa + apekhā
    Sāma1
    1. ) DN i.193 MN i.246 (different from kāḷa) Ja vi.187 (˚aṁ mukhaṁ dark, i.e. on account of bad spirits); Vism 422 (opposite to odāta in colour of skin)
    • yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful Ja ii.44 45 (migī); v.215 (suvaṇṇa-sāmā), 366 (suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇa)
    • feminine sāmā, q.v
    • See sabala
    • cp. Vedic śyāma black & śyāva brown; Avestan syāva; Anglo-Saxon hāēven blue (= English heaven); Sanskrit chāyā; Gothic skeinan = shine, etc. 1. black, dark (something like deep brown) Vin iv.120 (kāḷasāma dark blue [?
    Sāma2
    neuter
    1. song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation DN ii.288
    perhaps = Vedic sāman
    Sāmaṁ
    1. self, of oneself Vin i.16 33, 211 (s. pāka) iv.121 DN i.165 MN i.383 MN ii.211 MN iii.253 (sāmaṁ kantaṁ sāmaṁ vāyitaṁ dussayugaṁ) SN ii.40 SN iv.230f.v.390 Snp 270 (asāma-pāka not cooking for oneself), 889 Ja i.150 sāmaññeva, i.e. sāmaṁ yeva Snp p. 101
    on etymology ‣See Andersen Pāli Gloss., p. 268 (contracted from sayamaṁ, Trenckner), cp. Michelson Indog. Forsch., vol. xxiii, p. 235, note 3 (= avest., hāmō slav., samz)
    Sāmaggiya
    neuter
    1. completeness, concord Snp 810 sāmaggiya-rasa Ja iii.21 (“the sweets of concord”); adjective asāmaggiya, unpleasant Ja vi.517 (Commentary on asammodiya)
    from samagga
    Sāmaggī
    feminine
    1. completeness, a quorum Vin i.105 106; meeting, communion Vin i.132f. ii.243; unanimity, concord Vin i.97 136, 357; ii.204 DN iii.245f. AN iii.289 Nd1 131 Ja i.328 Iti 12
    abstract from samagga
    Sāmacca
    adjective
    1. together with the ministers DN i.110
    sa2 + amacca
    Sāmañña1
    neuter
    1. generality; equality, conformity; unity, company Mil 163 Snp-a 449 (jāti identity of descent), 449 (generality, contrasted to visesa detail), 548 (identical) Vv-a 233 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚, equality) ˚-gata united DN ii.80 ˚-nāma a name given by general assent Dhs-a 390
    abstract from samāna
    Sāmañña2
    neuter
    1. Samaṇaship DN i.51f.; iii.72, 245 MN i.281f. SN v.25 AN ii.27 = It 103 Dhp 19f. 311 DN-a i.158 Vism 132; adjective, in accordance with true Samaṇaship, striving to be a samaṇa Mil 18 Samaṇaship AN i.142f.; Pv ii.718 (explained at Pv-a 104 as “honouring the samaṇas”)
    1. ˚attha the aim of Samaṇaship DN i.230 AN iv.366 MN i.271 SN ii.15 SN iii.93 Ja i.482
    • ˚phala advantage resulting from Samaṇaship, fruit of the life of the recluse DN i.51f.; Vism 215, 512 Vv-a 71 Vb-a 317 more especially the fruition of the four stages of the Path, sotāpatti-, sakadāgāmi-, anāgāmi-, and arahattaphala SN v.25 DN iii.227 DN iii.277 Dhs 1016 Dhs-a 423 Mil 344 Mil 358 DN-a i.158 three samaññaphalas Kvu 112
    abstract from samaṇa
    Sāmaññatā1
    1. = sāmañña 1 (identity, congruity etc.) Ja vi.371 (vaṇṇa˚); Vism 234 (maraṇa˚)
    Sāmaññatā2
    1. = sāmañña 2 DN iii.145 DN iii.169 Dhp 332 Dhp-a iii.484 Dhp-a iv.33
    Sāmaṇaka
    adjective
    1. worthy of or needful for a Samaṇa Mhvs 4, 26; 30, 37; assāmaṇaka unworthy of a Samaṇa Vin i.45
    from samaṇa
    Sāmaṇera
    feminine ˚-rī a novice Vin i.62f.; iv.121 SN ii.261 Mil 2 Vb-a 383 are not present at the recital of the Pātimokkha Vin i.135
    • ˚pabbajjā ordination of a novice Vin i.82
    • ˚pēsaka superintendent of Sāmaṇeras Vin ii.177 AN iii.275
    • feminine, also —˚ā AN iii.276 as —˚ī at Vin i.141
    from samaṇa; cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śrāmaṇeraka Divy 342
    Sāmattha
    adjective
    1. able Ja ii.29
    = samattha
    Sāmatthiya
    neuter ability Mhvs 37, 243 abstract from samattha
    Sāmanta
    adjective
    1. neighbouring, bordering DN i.101 Vin i.46 (āpatti˚ bordering on a transgression) Ja ii.21 Ja iv.124 connected with MN i.95
    • ˚jappā (or ˚jappana roundabout talk Vb 353 Vism 28 Nd1 226 Vb-a 484 ablative sāmantā in the neighbourhood of Vin iii.36 DN ii.339
    • locative sāmante the same Ja iv.152 (Kapila-vatthu—˚)
    from samanta
    Sāmayika
    adjective
    1. temporary Snp 54 Mil 302 (so read) ‣See sāmāyika
    from samaya
    Sāmalatā
    feminine
    1. the creeper Ichnocarpus Ja i.60
    sāma1 + latā; Sanskrit śyāmalatā
    Sāmā
    (f)
    1. a medicinal plant Ja iv.92 (bhisasāmā, Commentary bhisāni ca sāmākā ca); the Priyangu creeper Ja i.500 Ja v.405
    Sanskrit śyāmā Halāyudha 2, 38 ‣See sāma1, sāmalatā, and sāmāka
    Sāmāka
    1. a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) DN i.166 MN i.78 MN i.156 MN i.343 AN i.295 ii.206 Snp 239 Pug 55 Ja iii.144 Ja iii.371 Nett 141 Dhp-a v.81
    cp. Vedic śyāmāka
    Sāmājika
    1. a member of an assembly Dāvs iii.27
    from Sanskrit samāja ‣See samajja
    Sāmādhika
    adjective
    1. consisting in concentration SN i.120
    from samādhi
    Sāmāmigī
    feminine a black hind Ja ii.44
    Sāmāyika
    adjective
    1. on a friendly footing, in agreement MN iii.110 Mil 22
    2. occurring in due season, timely Mil 302f. 305
    3. temporary AN iii.349f.; cp. sāmayika.

      from samaya
    Sāmi
    1. J v.489, read sāvi
    Sāmika
    1. owner MN i.27 Ja i.194 Vism 63. - 2. husband Vin iii.137 Ja i.307 Ja ii.128 AN ii.58f. Pv ii.37
    2. from sāmin
    Sāmin
    1. owner, ruler, lord, master Vin i.303 307 Snp 83 Mhvs 37, 241 Ja v.253 (˚paribhoga, q.v.); Pv iv.66; Vism 63 DN-a i.261 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 65. voc. sāmi “Sir” Ja vi.300 Dhp-a i.20
    2. feminine sāminī Ja v.297 Vv-a 225 ‣See also suvāmin
    3. assāmin not ruling Mil 253 Pv iv.66
    4. husband Pv-a 31 (sāmi, voc. = "my lord”), 82.
    5. feminine sāminī wife Mhvs 5, 43 Pv-a 82 Pv-a 276
      1. ˚vacana (sāmi˚) the genitive case Ja i.185 Ja iii.98 (upayog'atthe); v.42 (karaṇ'atthe), 444 Vv-a 304 Snp-a 210 (for upayoga), 310 (identical)
      cp. Sanskrit svāmin, from sva = sa4
    Sāmiya
    1. husband Ja i.352 ‣See sāmika
    Sāmisa
    adjective
    1. holding food Vin ii.214 = iv.198
    2. fleshly, carnal DN ii.298 = M i.59 AN i.81 Ps ii.41. O
    3. past participle to nirāmisa spiritual (e.g. Ps i.59). Samici & samici;
    sa + āmisa
    Sāmīcī
    sāmīci˚;
    feminine
    1. right, proper course Vin iii.246 DN ii.104 AN ii.56 AN ii.65 SN v.261 SN v.343 Mil 8 Dhp-a i.57
    1. ˚kamma proper act, homage Vin ii.22 162, 255 AN i.123 AN ii.180 DN iii.83 Ja i.218 Ja i.219 Mil 8
    • ˚paṭipadā right course of life MN i.281 AN ii.65
    • ˚paṭipanna correct in life DN ii.104 SN i.220 AN ii.56 AN iv.310
    from sammā2 = Vedic samyac, of which plural nominative
  • feminine samīcīḥ frequently in R. V.
  • Sāmukkaṁsika
    adjective
    1. exalting, praising (i.e. the 4 truths), as much as “standard. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.64, takes it to mean “condensed, given in brief.” Usually in phrase ˚ikā dhammadesanā (thus as feminine of ˚aka !) e.g. Vin i.16 18; ii.156 DN i.110 MN i.380 AN iv.186 AN v.194 DN-a i.277 (explained) Thag-a 137 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 195 Vv-a 50 Only once with ñāṇa at Dhs-a 9
    2. from samukkaṁsati, cp. ukkaṁsaka. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is sāmutkarṣikī dharmadeśanā Divy 617
    Sāmudda
    neuter
    1. sea salt Vin i.202 Abhp 461
    from samudda
    Sāmuddika
    adjective
    1. seafaring DN i.222 SN iii.155 AN iii.368 (vāṇijā); iv.127 (nāvā); Vism 63 Dhs-a 320 At Ja vi.581 s
    • mahāsankha denotes a kind of trumpet
    from samudda
    Sāmeti
    1. ‣See sammati1
    Sāya
    1. evening, only adverb ially sāyaṁ, at night Vin iii.147 Ja ii.83 Dhp-a i.234 usually opposed to pāto (pātaṁ) in the morning early e.g. sāya-pātaṁ DN ii.188 Mil 419 Ja i.432 Ja i.460 v.462; sāyaṁ-pātaṁ Vin ii.185 Dhp-a ii.66
    2. sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv i.63 ii.937 Pv-a 127 sāya-tatiyaka for the third time in the evening DN i.167 AN ii.206 AN v.263 AN v.266 268 MN i.343 sāyamāsa supper Ja i.297 Ja v.461 Dhp-a i.204 sāyaṁ as quâsi-nominative: sāyaṁ ahosi Ja vi.505
    3. atisāyaṁ too late Thag 1, 231 Ja ii.362 Ja v.94
    4. sāyataraṁ later in the evening (compar.) Ja vi.366
    5. cp. Sanskrit sāyaṁ, on which Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 380, remarks: “this word seems to be the gerund of , and to have signified originally ʻ having finished. ʼ AN masc sāya does not exist.” cp. Vedic ˚sāya
    Sāyaṇha
    1. evening DN ii.9 Ja i.144
    • ˚˚samayaṁ at evening time DN ii.205 MN i.147 Vin i.21
    • sāyaṇhasamaye Ja i.148 Ja i.279 Pv-a 33 Pv-a 43 Pv-a 100; ˚-kāle the same Ja iv.120
    • sāyaṇhe (
    • locative ) Ja i.144 237; atisāyaṇha late evening Ja vi.540
    sāyaṁ + aṇha, cp. Sanskrit sāyāhna
    Sāyati
    1. to taste, eat; pres. sāyati Vin ii.121 ppr. sāyanto DN iii.85 grd sāyanīya savoury Vin i.44 SN i.162 absolutive sāyitvā SN iv.176 AN iii.163 cp. saṁsāyati
    2. svad, Sanskrit svādate, cp. sādiyati
    Sāyana1
    neuter
    1. tasting, taste Dhtp 229
    from sāyati
    Sāyana2
    1. the Nāga tree (cp. nāga 3) Ja vi.535 (vāraṇā sā yanā = nāgarukkhā, Commentary, ibid. 535, various read. vāyana) Kern, Toevoegselen ii.77 conjectures sāsanā “with Asana’s Terminalia’s.”
    Sāyika
    adjective
    1. lying, sleeping, resting in (—˚) Dhp 141 MN i.328 (vatthu˚) Thag 1, 501 = Mil 367
    from śī
    Sāyita
    1. (having) tasted, tasting DN i.70 DN ii.95 DN ii.292 MN i.188 MN i.461 Mil 378 Vism 258 (khāyita +)
    past participle of sāyati, cp. sāditar
    Sāyin
    adjective
    1. lying Dhp 325
    from śī
    Sāra
    1. essential, most excellent, strong AN ii.110 Vin iv.214 Ja iii.368 Pug 53
    2. masculine the innermost, hardest part of anything, the heart or pith of a tree (‣ See also pheggu) MN i.111 Ja i.331 Mil 413 most excellent kind of wood Vin ii.110 DN ii.182 187; sattasārā the elect, the salt of the earth MN iii.69 3. substance, essence, choicest part (generally at the end of compounds) Vin i.184 AN ii.141 SN iii.83 SN iii.140 Snp 5 Snp 330 Snp 364Dhp 11f. Pv-a 132 Pv-a 211 (candana˚). sāre patiṭṭhito established, based, on what is essential MN i.31 AN ii.183
    3. value Mil 10 appasāra of small value DN ii.346

      • asāra worthless Snp 937 nissāra the same Ja ii.163 (pithless); mahāsāra of high value Ja i.384 463
      1. ˚ādāyin acquiring what is essential SN iv.250
      • ˚gandha the odour of the heart of a tree Dhs 625
      • ˚gabbha a treasury Ja iii.408 Ja v.331
      • ˚gavesin searching for hard wood MN i.111 MN i.233 sārapariyesana the same ibid -dāru strong, durable wood Ja ii.68
      • ˚bhaṇḍa(ka) a bundle of one’s best things Ja ii.225
      • ˚bhūmi good soil Ja ii.188
      • ˚mañjūsā a box made of choice wood Ja iv.335
      • ˚maya being of hard or solid wood Ja iii.318 (Commentary sārarukkhamaya “of sāra wood” translation)
      • ˚suvaṇṇa sterling gold Snp-a 448 (in explanation of name Bimbisāra)
      • ˚sūci a needle made of hard wood Ja i.9
      Vedic sāra nt.
    Sāraka1
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. having as most essential Mil 133 a-sāraka rotten (said of wood) Ja ii.163
      from sāra
    Sāraka2
    1. a messen absolutive from sarati1
    Sāraka3
    1. in the compund kaṭa-sāraka a mat Ja iv.248 (variant reading ); iv.474; v.97 (cp. osāraka). Sarakkhati = samrakkhati
    Sārakkhati = saṁrakkhati
    1. Th 1, 729
    Sārakkhā
    feminine
    1. “standing under protection” (?), a category of married women Vin iii.139 (cp MN i.287)
    from sa3 + rakkha
    Sārajja
    neuter
    1. timidity AN iii.127 AN iii.203 AN iv.359 AN iv.364 Mil 24 Mil 72 Mil 196 (parisa˚, cp. Nd2 470) Ja i.334 Ja ii.66 nissārajja undaunted Ja i.274
    abstract from sārada = *sāradya
    Sārajjati
    1. to be pleased with, to be attached to AN i.260 SN ii.172 SN iii.69f.; iv.10 sq
    saṁ + raj, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sārajyati, Sanskrit saṁrajyate, cp. sārāga
    Sārajjanā
    feminine
    1. infatuation, feeling infatuated Dhs 389 Ja v.446
    from sārajjati
    Sārajjāyati
    1. to be embarrassed, perplexed, ashamed SN iii.92 AN iv.359
    denominative of sārajja
    Sārajjitatta
    neuter
    1. infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs 389
    = sārajjanā
    Sāraṇā
    feminine
    1. reminding, remonstrating with Vin v.158 164
    from sāreti2
    Sāratta
    1. impassioned, enamoured, passionately devoted Vin iii.118 MN ii.160 223 SN i.74 SN i.77 Dhp 345 Ja i.288 Ja ii.140 Mhvs 10, 34 (˚mānaso). asāratta unattached Snp 704
    = saṁratta, past participle of sārajjati
    Sārathi
    1. charioteer, coachman DN ii.178 DN ii.254 SN i.33 SN v.6 AN ii.112 AN iv.190f. Snp 83 Ja i.59 Ja i.180 Pv iv.33. assadammasārathi a coachman by whom horses are driven, a trainer of horses MN i.124 SN iv.176 purisadammasārathi a coachman of the driving animal called man, a man-trainer Vin i.35 DN i.49 Snp p. 103 Iti 79
    • In similes: Vism 466 Kp-a 21
    from sa-ratha; Vedic sārathi
    Sārada
    adjective
    1. autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year’s, fresh AN iii.404 = DN iii.354
    • bījāni fresh ‣Seeds) AN i.135 AN i.181 (badara-paṇḍu) SN iii.54 SN v.380 Mil 255 Dhp 149 (but at this passage explained as “scattered by the autumn winds” Dhp-a iii.112)-asārada stale, old DN ii.353 SN v.379 Figuratively sārada unripe not experienced, immature ‣See sārajja shyness opposite visārada (der. vesārajja) experienced, wise, selfconfident; vīta-sārada identical (e.g. AN ii.24 Iti 123)

      • Note. At Kindred Sayings iii.46 (= SN iii.54) s. is wrongly taken as sāra + da i.e. “giving sāra”; but ‣Seeds do not give sāra: they contain sāra (cp. sāravant). The C explanation as sār-ādāyin is nearer the truth, but of course not literal; ˚da is not ā + ˚da, Moreover, the figuratively meaning cannot be reconciled with this explanation
      Vedic śārada, from śarad autumn (of Babyl. origin? cp. Assyr. šabātu corn month)
    Sāradika
    adjective
    1. autumnal Vin i.199 Vin ii.41 Dhp 285 = J i.183 Vv 6417 Dhp-a iii.428
    from sārada
    Sāraddha
    1. violent, angry AN i.148 AN i.282 SN iv.125 MN i.21 Vism 134 (opposite passaddha-kāya), 282 (˚kāya) Vb-a 283 (identical)
    = saṁraddha
    Sārana
    1. going Dhs-a 133
    from sarati1
    Sārameya
    1. a dog (literally “son of Saramā”) Mhbv.111
    Vedic sārameya
    Sārambha1
    1. impetuosity, anger AN i.100 AN i.299 AN ii.193 MN i.16 Dhp 133 Ja iv.26 Mil 289 (sasaṁrambha)
    2. quarrel Snp 483 Ja ii.223 Ja v.141 3. pride Thag 1, 759 Vv-a 139
      1. ˚kathā angry or haughty talk, imperiousness Dhp 133 MN i.16 Dhp-a iii.57
      = saṁrambha
    Sārambha2
    1. involving killing or danger to living creatures Vin iii.149 AN ii.42f. cp. samārambha
    sa + ārambha
    Sārambhin
    adjective
    1. impetuous Ja iii.259
    from sārambha
    Sāravant
    adjective
    1. valuable, having kernel or pith (said of grain or trees) AN iv.170 (synonym daḷha, opposite palāpa) SN v.163 MN i.111 = 233
    from sāra
    Sārasa
    1. a water bird, Ardea sibirica Vv-a 57 163; at both passive = koñca
    2. cp. Epic Sanskrit sārasa
    Sārāga
    1. affection, infatuation Vin ii.258 MN i.17 MN i.498 AN i.264 SN iii.69f. 93 Dhs 1059 1230; cp. saṁrāga
    • negative Dhs 32 312, 315
    = saṁrāga, from saṁ + raj
    Sārāgin
    adjective
    1. attached to MN i.239 (sukha—˚); sukha-sārāgita ibid. impassioned
    from last
    Sārāṇīya

    adjective

    1. courteous polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?) only in combination with kathā, dhamma, or dhammakathā e.g. s. kathā polite speech, either in phrase sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sārāṇīyaṁ vītisāreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy DN i.52 MN i.16 (explainedinter alia as “anussariyamānasukhato s.” at MA 110) AN i.55 AN i.281 AN ii.42 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sammodanīṁ saṁrañjanīṁ vividhāṁ k. vyatisārya Avs i.229
    • sārāṇīyaṁ kathaṁ katheti Dhp-a i.107 Dhp-a iv.87
    • sārāṇīyā dhammā states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dialogues of the Buddha iii.231) DN iii.245 MN i.322 MN ii.250 AN iii.288 AN v.89 Dhs-a 294 Ja v.382 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saṁrañjanīyan dharmaṁ samādāya Divy 404-sārāṇīyaṁ dhammakathaṁ suṇāti Dhp-a iv.168
    the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Note. 75) from saraṇa (i.e. saraṇa1 or sarana2?) with double vṛddhi. Kern (Toevoegselen ii.74) considers the (B) Sanskrit saṁrañjanīya as the original and derives it from saṁ + raj to rejoice, to gladden ‣See rañjati. The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit is divided: MVastu iii.47, 60, 206 etc. has sārāyaṇiya, whereas Avs i.229 & Divy 404 read; saṁrañjanī and saṁrañjanīya ‣See below The Commentary at Ja iv.99 derives it from saraṇa3 in explaining sārāṇīyā kathā as “sāritabba-yuttakā kathā”
    Sāri
    1. chessman DN-a i.85
    cp. * Sanskrit śāri
    Sārin
    adjective
    1. wandering, going after, following, conforming to (locative ) Ja v.15 aniketasārin wandering about houseless Snp 844 Snp 970 anokasārin wandering homeless Dhp 404 Snp 628 diṭṭhisārin a partisan of certain views Snp 911 vaggasārin conforming to a party a partisan Snp 371 Snp 800 Snp 912
    2. from sāreti
    Sārīrika
    adjective
    1. connected with the body, bodily MN i.10 AN i.168f.; ii.153; neuter bodily relics Mil 341 ˚ṁ cetiyaṁ one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika Ja iv.228
    2. from sarīra
    Sāruppa
    neuter
    1. equal state; as adjective fit, suitable, proper Vin i.39 287 DN ii.277 SN iv.21f. Ja i.65 Ja i.362 Dhs-a 294 Snp 368 p. 79, 97, 104 Ja iv.404 (a˚) neuter Vism 24 Pv-a 269 paribbājaka-s˚, as befits a Wanderer Ja v.228
    2. abstract from sarūpa, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sārūpya & sāropya
    Sāreti
    1. is causative of sarati1 as well as sarati2. cp. vīti˚;.

    Sāropin
    adjective
    1. healing, curative MN ii.257 (vaṇa—˚)
    saṁ + ropin, cp. ropeti1 & rūhati; 1
    Sāla
    a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) MN i.488 DN ii.134 AN i.202 AN iii.49 AN iii.214 Dhp 162
    1. ˚māḷaka an enclosure of Sal trees Ja i.316
    • ˚rukkha Sal tree Vv-a 176
    • ˚laṭṭhi Sal sprout AN ii.200
    • ˚vana Sal grove DN ii.134 MN i.124 SN i.157 Vv 392
    cp. Sanskrit śāla & sāla
    Sālaka
    1. a brother-in-law Ja ii.268
    Sanskrit syāla + ka
    Sālakakimi
    1. a kind of worm Mil 312
    Sālaya
    adjective
    1. having intentions (on), being attached (to = locative ) Ja iii.332
    2. sa3 + ālaya
    Sālā
    feminine
    1. a large (covered & enclosed) hall large room, house; shed, stable etc., as seen from following examples: aggi˚; a hall with a fire Vin i.25 49 = ii.210 āsana˚; hall with seats Dhp-a ii.65
    • udapāna˚ a shed over the well Vin i.139 Vin ii.122
    • upaṭṭhāna˚ a service hall Vin i.49 139; ii.153, 208, 210 SN ii.280 SN v.321 Ja i.160
    • kaṭhina˚ a hall for the kaṭhina Vin ii.117
    • kīḷa˚ playhouse Ja vi.332
    • kutūhala˚ a common room DN i.179 SN iv.398
    • kumbhakāra˚ potter’s hall Dhp-a i.39
    • gilāna˚ sick room, hospital SN iv.210 Vism 259; jantāghāra˚ (large) bath room Vin i.140 Vin ii.122
    • dāna˚ a hall for donations Ja i.262
    • dvāra˚ hall with doors MN i.382 ii.66; pāniya˚; a water-room Vin ii.153
    • bhatta˚ refectory Vism 72; yañña˚; hall of sacrifice PugA 233; rajana˚ dyeing workshop Vism 65; ratha˚; car shed Dhp-a iii.121
    • hatthi˚ an elephant stable Vin i.277 345 ii.194 Ja i.187
    cv. Vedic śālā, cp. Latin cella cell, Old High German halla, English hall
    Sālākiya
    neuter
    1. ophthalmology DN i.12 DN i.69 DN-a i.98
    cp. Sanskrit śālākya in Suśruta
    Sāli
    1. rice DN i.105 DN i.230 DN ii.293 Vin iv.264 MN i.57 AN i.32 AN i.145 AN iii.49 AN iv.108 (+ yavaka), 231 SN v.10 SN v.48 Ja i.66 Ja i.178 Ja iv.276 v.37; vi.531 Mil 251 Snp 240f.; Vism 418; plural ˚-iyo Ja i.325 genitive
    2. plural ˚-inaṁ Ja vi.510

      • lohitaka˚ red rice Mil 252
      1. ˚khetta a rice-field AN i.241 AN iv.278 Vin ii.256 Dhp-a i.97 Dhp-a iii.6
      • ˚gabbha ripening (young) rice Dhp-a i.97
      • ˚bīja rice ‣Seed AN i.32 AN v.213
      • ˚bhatta a meal of rice Vism 191
      • ˚bhojana rice food Ja i.178
      cp. Sanskrit śāli
    Sālika
    adjective
    1. belonging to rice Dhp-a iii.33
    from sāli
    Sālikā
    feminine
    1. a kind of bird SN i.190 = Th 1, 1232 Ja v.110 ‣See sāliya & sāḷikā;
    cp. Epic Sanskrit sārikā crow, usually combined with śuka parrot
    Sālittaka
    neuter
    1. a sling, catapult (?); slinging stones, throwing potsherds etc. Pv iv.167 Pv-a 285 Ja i.418 Ja i.420 Dhp-a ii.69
    from Sanskrit saṁlepa?
    Sālin
    1. excellent Dāvs i.9
    Sāliya
    1. or sāliyā the maina bird (= sālikā) Ja iii.203 sāliyachāpa (a young bird of that kind), and sāliyacchāpa (i.e. sāliyā which is probably the right form) Ja iii.202 madhu-sāliyā Ja v.8 (= suvaṇṇa-sālika-sakunā Commentary p. 911) Ja vi.199 (suva-sāliya—˚), 425 (Sāliya-vacana the story of the maina bird, various read. suva-khaṇḍa; a section of the 546th Jātaka, but sāḷiyā, sālikā, sāliyā is not a paṛrot
    Sālīna
    adjective
    1. fine (rice) Mil 16 (˚ṁ odanaṁ; cp. śālīnaṁ odanaṁ Divy 559)
    from sāli
    Sāluka
    1. (& ˚ūka) neuter

      1. the edible root of the water-lily Vin i.246 Ja vi.563 Vv-a 142 (˚muṭṭhi)
      cp. Sanskrit śālūka
    Sālūra
    1. a dog Ja iv.438 (˚-saṁgha = sunakhagaṇa, Commentary ; spelling ḷ)
    but cp. Sanskrit śālūra a frog
    Sāloka
    1. sight, view, sāloke tiṭṭhati to expose oneself to view in an open door Vin ii.267
    sa2 + āloka
    Sālohita
    1. a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ñāti Vin i.4 DN ii.26 DN ii.345 AN i.139 222; ii.115; Snp p. 91 Pv-a 28 Vb-a 108
    from sa2 + lohita
    Sāḷava
    1. a certain dish, perhaps a kind of salad, given as “lambila,” i.e. bitter or astringent at Dhs-a 320 (made of badara or kapiṭṭha; cp. Vin iv.259
    cp. Sanskrit ṣāḍava, which is given in different meaning, viz. “comfits with fruits”
    Sāḷika
    1. a bird; feminine ˚ā the Maina bird Ja i.429 Ja vi.421 Spelt sāḷiyā at Ja vi.425 ‣See sālikā & sāliya; .

    Sāva
    1. juice Vv-a 186
    from sru
    Sāvaka
    1. a hearer, disciple (never an Arahant) DN i.164 DN ii.104 DN iii.47 DN iii.52 DN iii.120f. 133 AN i.88 MN i.234 SN ii.26 Iti 75f. 79 Ja i.229 Vism 214, 411
    • fem sāvikā DN ii.105 DN iii.123 Thag 2, 335 SN iv.379 AN i.25 88. (cp. ariya—˚, agga—˚, mahā
    1. ˚saṅgha the congregation of the eight Aryas MN ii.120 SN i.220 (cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā) ii.79 sq. Iti 88
    from śru
    Sāvakatta
    neuter
    1. the state of a disciple MN i.379f.
    abstract from last
    Sāvajja
    adjective
    1. blameable, faulty DN i.163 DN ii.215 MN i.119 SN v.66 SN v.104f. Snp 534 Pug 30 41 neuter what is censurable, sin Ja i.130 Mil 392 Vb-a 382 (mahā˚ or appa˚, with reference to various crimes)
    2. sa + avajja
    Sāvajjatā
    feminine
    1. guilt Mil 293
    from last
    Sāvaṭa
    neuter name of a certain throw in playing at dice Ja vi.281 (variant reading sāvaṭṭa).
    Sāvaṭṭa
    adjective
    1. containing whirlpools Iti 114
    sa3 + āvaṭṭa
    Sāvana
    neuter
    1. shouting out, announcement, sound, word Ja ii.352 Sdhp 67
    from sāveti
    Sāvasesa
    adjective
    1. with a remainder, incomplete, of an offence which can be done away Vin i.354 ii.88; v.153 AN i.88
    • Of a text (pāṭha) Kp-a 238 Snp-a 96
    sa3 + avasesa
    Sāvi
    1. a porcupine Ja v.489 (manuscripts sāmi and sāsi, cp. Manu v.18)
    Sanskrit śvāvidh ‣See Lüder’s Z.D.M.G. 61, 643
    Sāvittī
    feminine the Vedic verse Sāvitrī Snp 457 Snp 568 = Vin i.246 (Sāvitthī) Ja iv.184
    Sāvetar
    1. one who makes others hear, who tells DN i.56 AN iv.196
    agent noun from sāveti
    Sāveti
    1. is causative of suṇāti.

    Sāsa
    1. asthma. AN v.110 Ja vi.295
    Sanskrit śvāsa, from śvas
    Sāsaṅka
    adjective
    1. dangerous, fearful, suspicious SN iv.175 (opposite khema) Thag 2, 343 Thag-a 241 Vism 107 Ja i.154 Pv-a 13 Mil 351
    from sa3 + āsankā
    Sāsati
    1. to instruct, teach, command; tell Ja vi.472 (dūtāni, = pesesi Commentary ); inf săsituṁ Ja vi.291 (= anusāsituṁ Commentary )
    śās, Dhtp 300 = anusiṭṭhi
    Sāsana
    neuter
    1. order, message, teaching Ja i.60 Ja i.328 Ja ii.21 Pv iv.354 (Buddhānaṁ); Kp-a 11 sq. the doctrine of the Buddha Vin i.12 DN i.110 DN ii.206 AN i.294 Dhp 381 Snp 482 etc. Ja i.116
    • sāsanaṁ āroceti to give a message (dūtassa to the messenger) Vin iii.76

      1. ˚antaradhāna the disappearance or decline of the teaching of the Buddha. Said of the doctrine of Kassapa Bhagavā Snp-a 156 (cp. sāsane parihāyamāne Snp-a 223), and with reference to the Pāli Tipiṭaka Vb-a 432f. where 3 periods of the development of the Buddhist doctrine are discussed, viz. sāsana-ṭhita-kāla ˚osakkana-kāla, ˚antaradhāna
      2. ˚kara complying with one’s order and teaching MN i.129
      • ˚kāraka the same Snp 445
      • ˚kārin the same AN ii.26 susāsanaṁ dussānaṁ Ja i.239 (English transl.: “true and false doctrine, “good and bad news”)
      • ˚hara (+ ˚jotaka) taking up (& explaining) an order Snp-a 164
      cp. Vedic śāsana
    Sāsapa
    1. a mustard ‣Seed SN ii.137 SN v.464 AN v.170 Ja vi.174 (compared with Mt. Meru) Snp 625 Snp 631 p. 122 Dhp 401 DN-a i.93 Dhp-a i.107 Dhp-a ii.51 iv.166 Vism 306 (ār'agge), 633 Pv-a 198 (˚tela). —˚kuṭṭa mustard powder Vin i.205 Vin ii.151
    cp. Sanskrit sarṣapa
    Sāsava
    adjective
    1. connected with the āsavas DN iii.112 AN i.81 Dhs 990 1103; Nett 80
    sa3 = āsava
    Sāha
    1. six days (cp. chāha) Ja vi.80 (= chadivasa, Commentary )
    Sāhatthika
    adjective
    1. with one’s own hand Ja i.168 Dhs-a 97 Snp-a 493 Kp-a 29
    from sahattha
    Sāhaṁ
    1. contraction of so ahaṁ
    Sāhasa
    1. violent, hasty Snp 329 neuter violence, arbitrary action, acts of violence Snp 943 Ja vi.284 Mhvs 6, 39; sāhasena arbitrarily. AN v.177 opposite ; ibid. Dhp 257 Ja vi.280
    2. sāhasaṁ identical Ja vi.358 (= sāhasena sāhasikaṁ kammaṁ katvā ibid. 359); adv asāhasaṁ = asāhasena Ja iii.319 (Commentary sāhasiyataṇhāya ibid. 320, if we do not have to read sāhasiyā taṇhāya from sāhasī).

      1. ˚kiriyā violence Ja iii.321
      from sahas power
    Sāhasika
    adjective
    1. brutal, violent, savage Ja i.187 Ja i.504 Ja ii.11 Pv-a 209 Dhp-a i.17
    from sāhasa
    Sāhasiyakamma
    neuter a brutal act Ja i.412 Ja i.438
    Sāhāra
    adjective
    1. with its food SN iii.54 (viññāṇa s.) DN ii.96 (Vesālī s.; translation “with its subject territory”)
    sa + āhāra
    Sāhin
    1. (—˚) adjective

      1. enduring Iti 32 ‣See asayha˚;
      from sah
    Sāhu
    adjective
    1. good, well Vin i.45 SN i.8 Pug 71f. Thag 1, 43 Vv-a 284
    = sādhu
    Sāhuḷacīvara
    neuter a coarse cloth MN i.509 (cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.52; Karpūramañjarī p. 19; Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891, 5 and Prākrit sāhulī, Z.D.M.G., xxviii., p. 415).
    Sāhuneyyaka
    1. ‣See āhuneyya
    Sāhunna
    1. a strip of ragged cloth Pv iii.16 Pv-a 173 Journal of the Pali Text Society 1891, 5; various read. sāhunda
    = sāhuḷa
    Si
    (—˚)
    1. participle of interrogation; e.g. kaṁ-si Dhp-a i.91
    = svid, for which ordinarily ˚su
    Siṁsaka
    neuter
    1. name of a water plant Ja vi.536 (Commentary not correct)
    Sanskrit śīrṣaka?
    Siṁsati1

    1. to hope for Dhtp 296 (defined as “icchā”); only in compound ā˚; (q.v.)
    śaṁs
    Siṁsati2
    1. is Desiderative of sarati1
    • Siṁsati “to neigh” at Ja v.304 is to be read hiṁsati (for hesati, q.v.)
    Siṁsapā
    feminine
    1. the tree Dalbergia sisu (a strong & large tree) SN v.437 Siṁsapā-groves (s
    • vanā are mentioned near Āḷavi AN i.136 near Setavyā DN ii.316f. Dhp-a i.71 Vv-a 297 and near Kosambi SN v.437
    cp. Vedic śiṁśapā
    Sikatā
    feminine
    1. sand, gravel; suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust AN i.253 Sikayasa-maya
    cp. Sanskrit sikatā
    Sikāyasa-maya
    adjective [made of tempered steel (said of swords) Ja vi.449 (cp. Note of the translation p. 546).
    Sikkā
    feminine
    1. string, string of a balance Vin ii.110 131, Ja i.9 Ja ii.399 Ja iii.13 (text sikkhā); vi.242 Vv-a 244 (muttā˚ string of pearls); Kvu 336 sq
    cp. Sanskrit śikyā
    Sikkhati

    1. to learn, to train oneself (= ghaṭati vāyamati Vism 274) usually combined with the
    2. locative, thus sikkhā-padesu s. to train oneself in the Sikkhāpadas DN i.63 DN i.250 Vin i.84 Iti 96 118; also with the dative, indicating the purpose; thus vinayāya s. to train oneself to give up Snp 974 the thing acquired by training is also put in the
    3. accusative ; thus nibbānaṁ s. to learn, to train oneself towards Nibbāna Snp 940 Snp 1061 Mil 10 Pot sikkheyyāsi Mil 10 sikkheyyāma DN ii.245 sikkhema Snp 898 sikkhe Snp 974 sikkheyya Snp 930
    4. future sikkhissāmi Vin iv.141 sikkhissāmase Snp 814 ppr. sikkhanto Snp 657 ppr.
    5. medium sikkhamāna training oneself Vin iv.141 DN ii.241 Iti 104 121; sikkhamānā
    6. feminine a young woman undergoing a probationary course of training in order to become a nun Vin i.135 139, 145 147, 167; iv.121 AN iii.276 SN ii.261
    7. gerundive sikkhitabba Vin i.83 Ja vi.296 MN i.123 DN ii.138 Mil 10 ; sikkha that ought to be learnt Mil 10 infinitive sikkhituṁ Vin i.84 270;
    8. absolutive sikkhitvā Mil 219
    9. to want to overcome, to try, tempt DN ii.245
    10. past participle sikkhita.
    11. causative II. sikkhāpeti to teach, to train Ja i.162 Ja i.187 Ja i.257 DN-a i.261 Mil 32 Pv-a 3 Pv-a 4
    Vedic śikṣati; Desidentical to śak ‣See sakkoti The Dhtp (12) gives “vijj’ opādāna” as meaning
    Sikkhana
    neuter
    1. training, study Ja i.58
    from śikṣ
    Sikkhā
    feminine
    1. study, training, discipline Vin iii.23 DN i.181 AN i.238 SN ii.50 SN ii.131 SN v.378 Dhs 1004 Vb-a 344 (various)
    2. sikkhaṁ paccakkhātaka one who has abandoned the precepts Vin i.135 167 ii.244 sq. (cp. sikkhā-paccakkhāna Vin ii.279 and sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya Vin iii.24 SN iv.190 sikkhā apaccakkhātā, ibid.); tisso sikkhā SN iii.83 Ps i.46 sq. Mil 133 Mil 237 Nd1 39; explained as adhisīla-, adhicitta-and adhipaññā-sikkhā AN i.234f.; Nett 126; with the synonyms saṁvara, samādhi & paññā at Vism 274.; 2. (as one of the 6 Vedāngas) phonology or phonetics combined with nirutti (interpretation, etymology) DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447

      1. ˚ānisaṁsa whose virtue is training, praise of discipline AN ii.243 Iti 40
      • ˚ānusantatavutti whose behaviour is thoroughly in accordance with the discipline Nett 112 -kāma anxious for training Vin i.44 DN ii.101 SN v.154 SN v.163 AN i.24 AN i.238 ˚-tā anxiety for training Ja i.161
      • ˚samādāna taking the precepts upon oneself Vin i.146 Mil 162 AN i.238f.; iv.15; v.165
      • ˚sājīva system of training Vin iii.23f. Pug 57
      Vedic śikṣā
    Sikkhāpada
    neuter
    1. set of precepts, “preceptorial,” code of training; instruction, precept, rule
    1. -1. in general: DN i.63 DN i.146 DN i.250 MN i.33 AN i.63 AN i.235f. ii.14, 250 sq.; iii.113, 262; iv.152, 290 sq. SN ii.224 SN v.187 Vin i.102 Vin ii.95 258; iii.177; iv.141 (sahadhammika), 143 (khudd’ ânukhuddakāni) Iti 96 118 Vb-a 69 (bhesajja˚) Dhp-a iii.16
    • in special: the 5 (or 10) rules of morality, or the precepts to be adopted in particular by one who is entering the Buddhist community either as a layman or an initiate. There seem to have been only 5 rules at first, which are the same as the first 5 sīlas ‣See sīla 2 b: SN ii.167 Vb 285 (explained in detail at Vb-a 381f.) Dhp-a i.32 and passim To these were added another 5, so as to make the whole list (the dasasikkhāpadaṁ or ˚padāni) one of 10 (which are not the 10 sīlas!). These are (6) vikāla-bhojanā (-veramaṇī) not eating at the wrong hour; (7) nacca-gītavādita-visūka-dassanā˚; to avoid worldly amusements (8) mālā-gandha-vilepana-dhāraṇa-maṇḍana-vibhūsanaṭṭhānā˚; to use neither unguents nor ornaments; (9 uccā-sayana-mahā-sayanā˚; not to sleep on a high, big bed; (10) jātarūpa rajata-paṭiggahaṇā˚; not to accept any gold or silver: Vin i.83 = Kh ii. AN i.211 and frequently-dasa-sikkhāpadikā
    • feminine conforming to the 10 obligations (of a nun) Vin iv.343 (= sāmaṇerī). There is nowhere any mention of the 8 sikkhāpadas as such, but they are called aṭṭhaṅgika uposatha ‣See sīla 2b e.g. Mhvs 37, 202
    • diyaḍḍha-sikkhāpada-sata the 150 precepts, i.e. the Pāṭimokkha AN i.230 AN i.234 Mil 243
    • sikkhā + pada, the latter in sense of pada 3. cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śikṣāpada
    Sikkhāpaka
    adjective
    1. teaching Pv-a 252 Mil 164
    from sikkhāpeti
    Sikkhāpana
    neuter
    1. teaching Mil 163
    from sikkhāpeti
    Sikkhāpanaka
    1. teaching Ja i.432
    Sikkhita
    1. trained, taught Vin iv.343 (˚sikkha, adjective, trained in …; chasu dhammesu) Mil 40 Pv-a 263 (˚sippa)
    past participle of sikkhati
    Sikhaṇḍin
    adjective-noun
    1. tufted, crested (as birds) Ja v.406 Ja vi.539 Thag 1, 1103 (mayūra); with tonsured hair (as ascetics) Ja iii.311
    2. a peacock Ja v.406 Vv-a 163
    Sanskrit śikhaṇḍin
    Sikhara
    1. the top, summit of a mountain Ja vi.519 Mil 2 a peak Dhp-a iii.364 (˚thūpiyo or ˚thūpikāyo peaked domes); the point or edge of a sword MN i.243 SN iv.56 crest, tuft Ja ii.99 (this is a very difficult reading; it is explained by the Commentary by sundara (elegant); Trenckner suggests singāra, cp. ii.98) a bud Thag 2, 382
    cp. Sanskrit śikhara
    Sikhariṇī
    feminine
    1. a kind of woman (with certain defects of the pudendum) Vin ii.271 Vin iii.129 (text, ˚aṇī)
    from last
    Sikhā
    feminine
    1. point, edge MN i.104 crest, topknot DN-a i.89 Ja v.406 of a flame Dhp 308 Dhs-a 124 of fire (aggi˚) Snp 703 Ja v.213 (dhūma˚) Ja vi.206 of a ray of light Ja i.88 in the corn trade, the pyramid of corn at the top of the measuring vessel DN-a i.79
    • ˚-bandha top-knot DN i.7
    • vātasikhā (tikkhā a raging blast) Ja iii.484
    • susikha
    • adjective with a beautiful crest Thag 1, 211 (mora), 1136
    Vedic śikhā
    Sikkhitaṛ
    ;
    1. a master, adept; proficient, professional Ja vi.449 Ja vi.450
    agent noun from sikkhati
    Sikhin
    adjective
    1. crested, tufted Thag 1, 22 (mora) Ja ii.363 (feminine ˚inī). Also name of (a) the fire Ja i.215 Ja i.288 (b) the peacock Snp 221 Snp 687
    2. from sikhā
    Sigāla
    (śṛ˚)
    1. a jackal DN ii.295 DN iii.24f. AN i.187 SN ii.230 SN ii.271 SN iv.177 sq. (text singāla); iv.199 Ja i.502 Ja iii.532 (Pūtimaṁsa by name)
    • sigālī
    • feminine a female jackal Ja i.336 ii.108; iii.333 (called Māyāvī) Mil 365
    • ‣ See also siṅgāla
    cp. Vedic sṛgāla; as loan-word in English = jackal
    Sigālika
    adjective
    1. belonging to a jackal Ja ii.108 Ja iii.113 (˚aṁ nādaṁ, cp. segalikaṁ AN i.187 where the Copenhagen MS. has sigālakaṁ corrected to segālakaṁ)- neuter a jackal’s roar (sigālakaṁ nadati) DN iii.25 cp. segālaka
    2. from sigāla
    Siggu
    neuter
    1. name of a tree (Hyperanthera moringa) Ja iii.161 Ja v.406
    cp. Vedic śigru, name of a tribe; as a tree in Suśruta
    Siṅga1
    neuter
    1. a horn Ja i.57 Ja i.149 Ja i.194 Ja iv.173 (of a cow); Vism 106; VvhA 476
    1. ˚dhanu horn-bow Dhp-a i.216
    • ˚dhamaka blowing a horn Mil 31
    Vedic śṛnga, cp. Latin cornu = English horn
    Siṅga2
    1. the young of an animal, calf Ja v.92 cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.31
    Siṅgāra
    1. erotic sentiment; siṅgāratā feminine fondness of decorations Ja i.184 an elegant dress, finery Mil 2
    2. adjective elegant, graceful (thus read) Ja ii.99 singāra-bhāva being elegant or graceful (said of a horse) Ja ii.98
    3. cp. Sanskrit śṛngāra
    Siṅgāla
    variant reading instead of sigāla SN ii.231 etc.; Vism 196; Pv iii.52.
    Siṅgika
    adjective
    1. having horns Ja vi.354 (āvelita—˚ having twisted horns)
    from singa1
    Siṅgin
    adjective
    1. having a horn Vin ii.300 Ja iv.173 (= cow); clever, sharp-witted, false Thag 1, 959 AN ii.26 Iti 112 cp. Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, 53
    Vedic śṛngin
    Siṅgila
    1. a kind of horned bird Ja iii.73 Dhp-a iii.22 (variant reading singala)
    Siṅgivera
    neuter
    1. ginger Vin i.201 Vin iv.35 Ja i.244 Ja iii.225 (alla—˚) Mil 63 Mhvs 28, 21 Dhs-a 320 DN-a i.81 Singi & singi;
    Sanskrit śṛnga + Tamil vera “root,” as English loan word = ginger
    Siṅgī
    siṅgi;
    feminine
    1. gold Vin i.38 SN ii.234 Ja i.84
    2. “ginger” in sense of “dainties, sweets Ja iv.352 (= singiver’ ādika uttaribhanga Commentary ; cp. Tamil iñji ginger)
      1. ˚nada gold Vv 6428 Vv-a 284
      • ˚loṇa (-kappa) license as to ginger & salt Vin ii.300 306
      • ˚vaṇṇa gold-coloured DN ii.133
      • ˚suvaṇṇa gold Vv-a 167
      cp. Sanskrit śṛngī
    Siṅgu
    feminine (?) a kind of fish Ja v.406 plur. singū Ja vi.537 According to Abhp. singū is m. and Payogasiddhi gives it as
    • nt.

    Siṅghati
    1. to sniff, to get scent of SN i.204 = J iii.308 DN-a i.38 cp. upa˚
    siṅgh, given as “ghāyana” at Dhtp 34
    Siṅghāṭaka
    1. (masculine and
    2. neuter ) 1. a square, a place where four roads meet Vin i.237 287 344; iv.271 DN i.83 AN ii.241 AN iv.187 AN iv.376 SN i.212 SN ii.128; iv.194 Mil 62 Mil 330 Mil 365 Dhp-a i.317
    3. aya-s˚ perhaps an iron ring (in the shape of a square or triangle MN i.393 Ja v.45
    4. a water plant (Trapa bispinosa? Ja vi.530 Ja vi.563
    cp. Sanskrit śṛngāṭaka; from śṛnga
    Siṅghāṇikā
    feminine
    1. mucus of the nose, snot DN ii.293 MN i.187 Snp 196–⁠198 = J i.148 (all manuscripts of both books-n-instead of-ṇ-) Mil 154 Mil 382 Pv ii.23 Vism 264 & 362 (in detail) Dhp-a i.50 Vb-a 68 247
    Sanskrit singhāṇaka
    Sijjati
    1. to boil (intransitive), to sweat; ppr. sijjamāna boiling Ja i.503 causative sedeti (q.v.) The Dhtp 162 gives “pāka” as meaning of sid.
    2. past participle sinna (wet) & siddha1 (cooked)
    3. svid, Epic Sanskrit svidyate
    Sijjhati
    1. to succeed, to be accomplished, to avail suit Snp-a 310 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 113 Pv-a 254 (infinitive sijjhituṁ)
    • pp siddha
    sidh; Epic Sanskrit sidhyate. The Dhtp gives 2 roots sidh, viz. one as “gamana” (170), the other as “saṁsidhi” (419)
    Siñcaka
    1. watering, one who waters Vv 797 (amba˚)
    from siñcati
    Siñcati

    1. to sprinkle Ja iii.144 Ja v.26 Mhvs 37, 203 Snp-a 66
    2. to bale out a ship Snp 771 Dhp 369 infinitive siñcituṁ Ja vi.583
    3. passive siccati Thag 1, 50 (all manuscripts siñcati);
    4. imperative siñca Dhp 369 ppr.
    5. medium siñcamāna Mhvs 37, 203;
    6. absolutive sitvā Snp 771 = Nett 6;
    7. past participle sitta.
    8. causative seceti to cause to sprinkle Mhvs 34, 45;
    9. causative II. siñcāpeti Ja ii.20 Ja ii.104 cp. pari˚
    sic, cp. Avestan hinčaiti to pour; Latin siat “urinate,” Anglo-Saxon sēon; Old High German sīhan, German ver-siegen; Goth saiws = English sea Dhtp 377: kkharaṇe
    Siñcanaka
    adjective
    1. sprinkling (water) Snp-a 66 (vāta)
    from siñcati
    Siṭṭha
    1. ‣See vi˚;
    past participle of śiṣ; Sanskrit śiṣṭha
    Siṇāti
    1. ‣See seyyati
    Sita1
    adjective
    1. sharp Dāvs i.32
    past participle of śā; Sanskrit śita
    Sita2
    1. (literally) stuck in or to: hadaya˚ salla Snp 938 Nd1 412
    2. (figuratively) reclining, resting, depending on, attached, clinging to DN i.45 DN i.76 DN ii.255 MN i.364 cp. 100 Ja v.453 Snp 229 Snp 333 Snp 791 Snp 944 Snp 1044 ‣See also asita2
    past participle of sayati2
    Sita3
    1. bound; sātu—˚ Dhp 341 (bound to pleasure); taṇhā—˚ Mil 248 Perhaps as sita2
    past participle of sinoti
    Sita4
    adjective
    1. white Dāvs iii.4
    Sanskrit sita
    Sita5
    neuter
    1. a smile Vin iii.105 Vin iv.159 SN i.24 SN ii.254 MN ii.45 Thag 1, 630 Ap 21 (pātukari), 22 (˚kamma Dhp-a ii.64 (˚ṁ pātvakāsi); iii.479 Vv-a 68
    • ˚˚kāra smiling Ja i.351 (as ˚ākāra)
    past participle of smi, cp. vimhāpeti. The other Pali form is mihita
    Sitta
    1. sprinkled Dhp 369 Ja iii.144 Vism 109
    past participle of siñcati
    Sittha
    neuter
    1. a lump of boiled rice Vin ii.165 214 Ja i.189 Ja i.235 Ja v.387 vi.358 (odana˚), 365 (yāgu˚) Pv-a 99 sitthatelaka oil of beeswax Vin ii.107 151
    1. ˚āvakārakaṁ (adverb ) scattering the lumps of boiled rice Vin iv.196
    2. cp. * Sanskrit siktha
    Sitthaka
    neuter
    1. beeswax Vin ii.116 (madhu˚)
    cp. Sanskrit sikthaka
    Sithila
    adjective
    1. loose, lax, bending, yielding SN i.49 SN i.77 = Dh 346 = J ii.140 Ja i.179 Ja ii.249 Mil 144 Dhp-a iv.52 56 Pv-a 13 In compound with bhū as sithilī˚; , e.g. ˚bhāva lax state Vism 502 = Vb-a 100
    • ˚bhūta hanging loose Pv-a 47 (so read for sithila˚) —˚hanu a kind of bird MN i.429

      • cp. saṭhila
      Vedic śithira, later śithila
    Siddha1
    1. boiled, cooked Ja ii.435 (= pakka); v.201 (˚bhojana) Mil 272 Snp-a 27 (˚bhatta = pakk'odana of Snp 18)
    a specific Pali formation from sijjati svid in meaning “to cook,” in analogy to siddha2
    Siddha2
    1. ended, accomplished Mhvs 23, 45, 78; successful Mil 247 masculine a kind of semi-divine beings possessed of supernatural faculties, a magician Mil 120 Mil 267 cp. Sanskrit siddha Halāyudha 1, 87; Yogasūtra 3, 33; Aufrecht remarks: “This is a post-vedic mythological fiction formed on the analogy of sādhya”
      1. ˚attha one who has completed his task Mil 214
      past participle of sijjhati
    Siddhatthaka
    1. white mustard Thag-a 181 (Ap. v.24) Ja iii.225 Ja vi.537 Dhp-a ii.273 (in Kisāgotamī story)
    Sanskrit siddhārthaka
    Siddhi
    feminine
    1. accomplishment, success, prosperity Mhvs 29, 70; Sdhp 14 Sdhp 17 Sdhp 325 Sdhp 469 Pv-a 63 (attha˚ advantage); padasiddhi substantiation of the meaning of the word DN-a i.66 cp. sadda˚
    from sidh, Vedic siddhi
    Siddhika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. connected with success; nāmasiddhika who thinks luck goes by names Ja i.401 appasiddhika unprofitable, fatal, etc. Ja iv.4 Ja iv.5 (sāgara) vi.34 (samudda)
    from siddhi
    Sināta
    1. bathed, bathing MN i.39 SN i.169 = 183 Ja v.330
    past participle of sināti
    Sināti1
    1. (to bind) ‣See sinoti
    Sināti2
    1. to bathe; imperative sināhi MN i.39 infinitive sināyituṁ MN i.39
    2. aorist sināyi Ap 204.
    3. past participle sināta
    4. Vedic snāti, snā. For detail ‣See nahāyati. The Dhtp 426 gives root sinā in meaning “soceyya,” i.e. cleaning
    Sināna
    neuter
    1. bathing MN i.39 SN i.38 SN i.43 SN iv.118 Nd2 39; Vism 17 Vb-a 337
    from snā
    Sinānī
    feminine bath-powder (?) MN ii.46 MN ii.151 MN ii.182
    Siniddha
    1. wet, moist Vism 171
    2. oily, greasy, fatty Ja i.463 Ja i.481 Snp-a 100 (˚āhāra fattening food)
    3. smooth, glossy Ja i.89 Ja iv.350 (of leaves) Mil 133

      • resplendent charming Thag-a 139

    4. pliable Vin i.279 (kāya, a body with good movement of bowels).

      • affectionate attached, fond, loving Ja i.10 Mil 229 Mil 361 Vb-a 282 (˚puggala-sevanatā)
    past participle of siniyhati; cp. Epic Sanskrit snigdha
    Siniyhati

    1. (to be moist or sticky, figuratively) to feel love, to be attached Vism 317 = Dhs-a 192 (in definition of mettā. causative sineheti (sneheti, snehayati) to lubricate, make oily or tender (through purgatives etc.) Vin i.279 (kāyaṁ) Mil 172 DN-a i.217 (temeti +); to make pliable, to soften Mil 139 (mānasaṁ).
    2. past participle siniddha
    3. Vedic snihyate, snih; cp. Avestan snāēƶaiti it snows = Latin ninguit, Latin nix snow = Gothic snaiws, Old High German sneo = snow; Old Irish snige rain; etc The Dhtp 463 gives the 2 forms sinih & snih; in meaning pīṇana. cp. sineha
    Sineha
    sneha;
    1. Both forms occur without distinction; sneha more frequently (as archaic) in poetry. - A. sineha : 1. viscous liquid, unctuous moisture, sap SN i.134 AN i.223f. Ja i.108 Dhs 652 (= sinehana Dhs-a 335); Vism 262 (thīna˚ = meda; vilīna˚ = vasā)
    • fat Ja ii.44 (bahu˚) Vb-a 67

  • affection, love desire, lust Ja i.190 Ja ii.27 Pv-a 82

    • B. sneha : 1. (oily liquid) DN i.74 Pv iii.52 (anguṭṭha˚, something like milk explained as khīra Pv-a 198)
    • (affection) AN ii.10 SN iv.188 (kāma˚) Snp 36 Snp 209 Snp 943 (= chanda, pema rāga, Nd1 426) Ja iv.11
    1. ˚anvaya following an affection Snp 36
    • ˚gata anything moist or oily AN iii.394f. Dhs-a 335
    • ˚ja sprung from affection Snp 272 SN i.207
    • ˚bindu a drop of oil Vism 263
    • ˚virecana an oily purgative Ja iii.48
    from snih
  • Sinehaka
    1. a friend Mhvs 36, 44
    Sinehana
    neuter oiling, softening Mil 229 Dhs-a 335 - cp. senehika.
    Sinehaniya
    adjective
    1. softening, oily; ˚āni bhesajjāni softening medicines Mil 172 (opp lekhaniyāni)
    gerundive formation from sinehana
    Sinehita
    1. lustful, covetous Dhp 341 Dhp-a iv.49
    past participle of sineheti
    Sinoti
    1. to bind Dhs-a 219 (sinoti bandhatī ti setu). past participle sita3
    2. or si; Vedic syati & sināti; the Dhtp 505 gives si in meaning “bandhana”
    Sindī
    feminine
    1. name of a tree Vism 183, where Kp-a 49 in identical passage reads khajjūrikā ‣See also Abhp 603 Deśīn viii.29
    etymology?
    Sinduvāra
    1. the tree Vitex negundo DN-a i.252 Dhs-a 14 317; also spelt sindhavāra Vv-a 177
    • sinduvārikā Ja vi.269
    • sindhuvāritā (i.e. sinduvārikā? Ja vi.550 = 553; sinduvārita Ja iv.440 Ja iv.442 (variant reading ˚vārakā)
    Sanskrit sinduvāra
    Sindhava
    1. belonging to the Sindh, a Sindh horse Ja i.175 Ja ii.96 Ja iii.278 Ja v.259 Dhp-a iv.4 (= Sindhava-raṭṭhe jatā assā); neuter rock salt Vin i.202 Sindhavaraṭṭha the Sindh country Thag-a 270 Ja v.260
    2. Sanskrit saindhava
    Sindhavāra
    1. ‣See sinduvāra
    Sinna
    1. wet with perspiration Vin i.46 51; ii.223
    2. boiled (cp. siddha1) especially in the comparitive. udaka-sinna-paṇṇa; it occurs in a series of passages Ja iii.142 Ja iii.144 Ja iv.236 Ja iv.238 where Fausböll reads sitta, although the various readings give also sinna The English translation, p. 149, says “sprinkled with water,” but the text, 238, speaks of leaves which are “sodden” (sedetvā)
    past participle of sijjati; Vedic svinna
    Sipāṭikā
    feminine
    1. pericarp MN i.306 Vv 8433 Vv-a 344 hingu˚ a s. yielding gum Vin i.201 Also written sipātikā; thus ādiṇṇasipātikā with burst pod or fruit skin SN iv.193
    2. a small case receptacle; khura˚ a razor case Vin ii.134 On s. at Pv iii.229 the Commentary has ekapaṭalā upānahā Pv-a 186
    cp. Sanskrit sṛpāṭikā, beak, BR.
    Sippa
    neuter
    1. art, branch of knowledge, craft Snp 261 AN iii.225 AN iv.281f. 322 DN iii.156 DN iii.189 Ja i.239 Ja i.478 Mil 315 excludes the Vedas Mil 10 sabbasippāni Ja i.356 Ja i.463 Ja ii.53 eight various kinds enumerated MN i.85 twelve crafts Ud 31 cp. dvādasavidha s. Ja i.58 eighteen sippas mentioned Ja ii.243 some sippas are hīna, others ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.6f. Vb-a 410 asippa untaught, unqualified Ja iv.177 vi.228 = asippin Mil 250
    • sippaṁ uggaṇhāti to learn a craft Vv-a 138
    1. ˚āyatana object or branch of study, art DN i.51 Mil 78 Vb-a 490 (pāpaka)
    2. ˚uggahaṇa taking up, i.e. learning, a craft Ja iv.7 Pv-a 3
    • ˚ṭṭhāna a craft MN i.85 cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śilpasthāna Divy 58 Divy 100, 212
    • ˚phala result of one’s craft DN i.51
    • ˚mada conceit regarding one’s accomplishment Vb-a 468
    cp. Sanskrit śilpa
    Sippaka
    1. = sippa Ja i.420
    Sippavant
    1. one who masters a craft Ja vi.296
    from sippa
    Sippika
    1. an artisan Snp 613 Snp 651 Mil 78 Vism 336. Also sippiya Ja vi.396 Ja vi.397
    from sippa
    Sippikā1
    feminine
    1. a pearl oyster Ja i.426 Ja ii.100 (sippikasambukaṁ); Vism 362 (in comparison) = Vb-a 68
    from sippī
    Sippikā2
    1. at Thag 1, 49 is difficult to understand. It must mean a kind of bird (˚abhiruta), and may be (so Kern) a misread pippikā (cp. Sanskrit pippaka & pippīka) ‣See also; Psalms of the Brethren p. 533
    Sippī
    feminine a pearl oyster Ja ii.100 sippipuṭa oyster shell Ja v.197 Ja v.206 sippi-sambuka oysters and shells DN i.84 MN i.279 AN i.9 AN iii.395 cp. Prākrit sippī
    Sibala
    1. name of a tree Ja vi.535
    Sibba
    neuter
    1. a suture of the skull; plur. ˚-āni Ja vi.339 sibbinī feminine the same Vin i.274
    2. from sīv
    Sibbati
    1. to sew Ja iv.25 Vv-a 251 Pres. also sibbeti Vin ii.116 iv.61, 280; absolutive sibbetvā Ja i.316
    2. gerundive sibbitabba Ja i.9
    3. aorist sibbi Ja iv.25 & sibbesi Vin ii.289 infinitive sibbetuṁ Vin i.203
    4. past participle sibbita.
    5. causative II. sibbāpeti Ja ii.197 Vin iv.61
    6. sīv, Vedic sīvyati. The root is sometimes given as siv, e.g. Dhtp 390, with definition “tantu-santāna”
    Sibbana
    neuter
    1. sewing Snp 304 = J iv.395 Ja i.220 Ja vi.218
    • sibbanī
    • feminine “seamstress” = greed, lust Dhs 1059 AN iii.399 Dhs-a 363 Snp 1040 ‣See lobha. —˚magga suture Vism 260; Kp-a 60 (identical)
    from sīv
    Sibbāpana
    neuter
    1. causing to be sewn Vin iv.280
    from sibbāpeti
    Sibbita
    1. sewn Vin iv.279 (dus˚) Ja iv.20 (su˚) Vb-a 252 (˚rajjukā). cp. vi˚ & pari˚;
    past participle of sibbati
    Sibbitar
    1. one who sews MN iii.126
    agent noun from sīv
    Sibbinī
    1. Dhs 1059 read sibbanī. cp. sibba
    Simbali
    feminine
    1. the silk-cotton tree Bombax heptaphyllum Ja i.203 Ja iii.397 Vism 206 Dhp-a i.279
    • ˚-vana a forest of simbali trees Ja i.202 Ja ii.162 (s. ˚-pālibhaddaka-vana); iv.277. sattisimbalivana the sword forest, in purgatory Ja v.453
    cp. Vedic śimbala flower of the B., cp. Pischel, Prakrit Grammar § 109
    Siyyati
    1. ‣See seyyati
    Sira
    neuter and
    • masculine )

      1. head, nominative siraṁ Thag 2, 255 accusative siraṁ AN i.141 siro Snp 768 sirasaṁ Ja v.434 instrumental sirasā Vin i.4 DN i.126 Snp 1027 locative sirasmiṁ MN i.32 sire DN-a i.97 in compounds siro- AN i.138

        • sirasā paṭiggaṇhāti to accept with reverence Ja i.65 pādesu sirasā nipatati to bow one’s head to another’s feet, to salute respectfully Vin i.4 34; Snp p. 15, p. 101. siraṁ muñcati to loosen the hair Ja v.434 cp. i.47; mutta˚; with loose hair Kp-a 120 = Vism 415; adho-siraṁ with bowed head, head down AN i.141 AN iv.133 Ja vi.298 cp. avaṁ˚; dvedhā˚ with broken head Ja v.206
        • muṇḍa˚ a shaven head Dhp-a ii.125
        cp. Vedic śiras, śīan; Avestan sarō, Latin cerebrum; Old High German hirni brain
    Sirā
    feminine a bloodvessel, vein Mhvs 37, 136; nerve, tendon, gut Ja v.344 Ja v.364
    • ˚-jāla the network of veins Ja v.69 Pv-a 68
    Sanskrit sirā
    Siriṁsapa
    1. a (long) creeping animal, serpent, a reptile Vin i.3 Vin ii.110 DN ii.57 MN i.10 SN i.154 AN ii.73 117, 143; v.15 Snp 52 Snp 964 Ja i.93 Pv iii.52 Nd1 484 Vb-a 6
    • ˚tta
    • neuter the state of being a creeping thing DN ii.57
    Sanskrit sarīsṛpa
    Sirimant
    adjective
    1. glorious DN ii.240 Siri (siri)
    siri + mant
    Sirī (siri)
    feminine
    1. splendour, beauty Snp 686 (instrumental siriyā) Ja vi.318 (siriṁ dhāreti)
    2. luck, glory majesty, prosperity SN i.44 (
    3. nominative siri) Ja ii.410 (siriṁ) 466 DN-a i.148 Vv-a 323 (instrumental buddha-siriyā). rajjasirī-dāyikā devatā the goddess which gives prosperity to the kingdom Dhp-a ii.17
    4. sirī + lakkhī splendour & luck Ja iii.443
    5. the goddess of luck DN i.11 (see Rhys Davids Buddhist India 216

      1. -222) DN-a i.97 Ja v.112 Mil 191 (˚devatā)
      • the royal bed-chamber (= sirigabbha Ja vi.383
      • assirī unfortunate Nett 62 = Ud 79 (reads sassar'iva). sassirīka (q.v.) resplendent Snp-a 91
      • sassirika Ja v.177 (puṇṇa-canda˚); opposite nissirīka (a without splendour Ja vi.225 Ja vi.456 (b) unlucky Vv-a 212 (for alakkhika)
      • The composition form is siri˚;
      1. ˚gabbha bedroom Ja i.228 Ja i.266 Ja iii.125 v.214
      2. ˚corabrāhmaṇa “a brahmin who stole good luck” Ja ii.409 (cp. sirilakkhaṇa—˚)
      3. ˚devatā goddess(es) of luck Mil 191 (+ kalidevatā)
      4. ˚dhara glorious Mhvs 5, 13
      5. ˚nigguṇḍi a kind of tree Ja vi.535
      • ˚vilāsa pomp and splendour Ja iv.232
      • ˚vivāda a bedchamber quarrel Ja iii.20 (sayanakalaho ti pi vadanti yeva, Commentary )
      • ˚sayana a state couch, royal bed Ja i.398 Ja iii.264 Ja vi.10 Dhp-a ii.86 Pv-a 280
      Vedic śrī
    Sirīsa
    neuter
    1. the tree Acacia sirissa DN ii.4 SN iv.193 Vv 8432 Vv-a 331 344; ˚-puppha a kind of gem Mil 118 cp. serīsaka
    cp. Classical Sanskrit śirṣa
    Siroruha
    1. the hair of the head Mhvs 1, 34; Sdhp 286
    Sanskrit śiras + ruha
    Silā
    feminine
    1. a stone, rock Vin i.28 SN iv.312f.; Vin 445 DN-a i.154 Ja v.68 Vism 230 (in comparison) Vb-a 64 (various kinds); a precious stone, quartz Vin ii.238 Mil 267 Mil 380 Vv 8415 (= phalika˚ Vv-a 339) pada-silā a flag-stone Vin ii.121 154. cp. sela
    1. ˚uccaya a mountain AN iii.346 Thag 1, 692 Ja i.29 vi.272, 278; Dāvs v.63
    2. ˚guḷa a ball of stone, a round stone MN iii.94
    • ˚tthambha (sila˚) stone pillar Mhvs 15 173
    • ˚paṭimā stone image Ja iv.95
    • ˚paṭṭa a slab of stone, a stone bench Ja i.59 Ja vi.37 (mangala˚) Snp-a 80 117
    • ˚pākāra stone wall Vin ii.153
    • ˚maya made of stone Ja vi.269 Ja vi.270 Mhvs 33, 22; 36, 104
    • ˚yūpa a stone column SN v.445 AN iv.404 Mhvs 28, 2
    • ˚santhāra stone floor Vin ii.120
    cp. Sanskrit śilā
    Silāghati
    1. to extol, only in Dhtp 30 as root silāgh, with definition “katthana,” i.e. boasting
    Epic Sanskrit ślāgh
    Silābhu
    neuter a whip snake Ja vi.194 (= nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇasappa).
    Siliṭṭha
    1. adhering, connected AN i.103 DN-a i.91 Ja iii.154 Dhs-a 15 Sdhp 489 (a˚)
    cp. Sanskrit śliṣṭa, past participle of śliṣ to clasp, to which śleṣman slime = Pali silesuma & semha. The Dhtp (443) explainssilis by “ālingana”
    Siliṭṭhatā
    feminine
    1. adherence, adhesion, junction Nd2 137 (byañjana˚, of “iti”)
    abstract from siliṭṭha
    Silutta
    1. a rat snake Ja vi.194 (= gharasappa)
    Silesa
    1. junction, embrace; a rhetoric figure, riddle, puzzle, pun Ja v.445 (silesūpamā said of women = purisānaṁ cittabandhanena silesasadisā, ibid. 447)
    from śliṣ
    Silesuma
    neuter
    1. phlegm Pv ii.23 (= semha Pv-a 80)
    Sanskrit śleṣman, from śliṣ. This the diaeretic form for the usual contracted form semha
    Siloka
    1. fame DN ii.223 DN ii.255 MN i.192 SN ii.226 (lābha-sakkāra˚) AN ii.26 143 Snp 438 Vin i.183 Ja iv.223 (= kitti-vaṇṇa) Mil 325 Snp-a 86 (˚bhaṇana, i.e. recitation); pāpasiloka having a bad reputation Vin iv.239
    • asiloka blame AN iv.364 (˚bhaya) Ja vi.491
    • a verse Mil 71 Ja v.387
    • Vedic śloka Dhtp 8: silok = sanghāta
    Silokavant
    adjective
    1. famous MN i.200
    siloka + vant
    Siva
    adjective-noun
    1. auspicious, happy, fortunate, blest SN i.181 Ja i.5 Ja ii.126 Mil 248 Pv iv.33 Vv 187
    • a worshipper of the god Siva Mil 191 the same as Sivi Ja iii.468

    • neuter happiness, bliss Snp 115 Snp 478 SN iv.370

      1. ˚vijjā knowledge of auspicious charms DN i.9 DN-a i.93 (alternatively explained as knowledge of the cries of jackals); cp. Divy 630 śivāvidyā
      Vedic śiva
  • Sivā
    feminine
    1. a jackal DN-a i.93
    Sanskrit śivā
    Sivāṭikā
    1. various reading instead of sipāṭikā, which ‣See
    Sivikā
    feminine
    1. a palanquin, litter Bu 17, 16 (text savakā) Pv i.111 Vin i.192
    • ˚-gabbha a room in shape like a palanquin, an alcove Vin ii.152
    • mañca—˚ Ja v.136 Ja v.262 (a throne palanquin?). suvaṇṇa˚ a golden litter Ja i.52 Ja i.89 Dhp-a i.89 Vism 316
    Epic Sanskrit śibikā
    Siveyyaka
    adjective hailing from the Sivi country, a kind of cloth (very valuable) Vin i.278 280 Ja iv.401 DN-a i.133 The two latter passages read sīveyyaka.
    Sisira
    adjective
    1. cool, cold Dāvs v.33 Vv-a 132 masculine cold, cold season Vin ii.47 = J i.93
    2. Sanskrit śiśira
    Sissa
    1. a pupil Snp 997 Snp 1028 Dhs-a 32 (˚ânusissā)
    cp. Sanskrit śiṣya, gerundive of śiṣ or śās to instruct ‣See sāsati etc.
    Sissati
    1. to be left, to remain Vv-a 344 cp. visissati. causative seseti to leave (over) DN ii.344 (
    2. aorist sesesi) Ja i.399 Ja v.107 Dhp-a i.398 (asesetvā without a remainder).
    3. past participle siṭṭha ‣See visiṭṭha
    4. passive of śiṣ to leave; Dhtp 630: visesana
    Sīgha
    adjective
    1. quick, rapid, swift MN i.120 AN i.45 Dhp 29 Pug 42
    • ˚-gāmin walking quickly Snp 381 sīghasota swiftly running DN ii.132 AN ii.199 Snp 319
    • ˚-vāhana swift (as horses) Ja vi.22 cp. adv sīghataraṁ Mil 82
    • sīghaṁ (
    • adverb ) quickly Mil 147 Vv-a 6 Vb-a 256 usually reduplicated sīgha-sīghaṁ very quickly Ja i.103 Pv-a 4
    cp. Epic Sanskrit śīghra
    Sīta
    adjective
    1. cold, cool DN i.74 DN i.148 DN ii.129 AN ii.117 AN ii.143 Snp 467 Snp 1014 Vin i.31 288. neuter cold Vin i.3 Ja i.165 Mhvs 1, 28 Snp 52 Snp 966 In compound with kṛ & bhū the form is sīti˚; , e.g. sīti-kata made cool Vin ii.122
    2. sīti-bhavati to become cooled tranquillized SN ii.83 SN iii.126 SN iv.213 SN v.319 Snp 1073 (sīti-siyā, Pot. of bhavati) Iti 38
    3. ˚-bhūta, tranquillized Vin i.8 Vin ii.156 SN i.141 SN i.178 Snp 542 Snp 642 AN i.138 v.65 DN iii.233 Vv 5324 Pv i.87 iv.132. sīti-bhāva coolness, dispassionateness, calm AN iii.435 Thag 2, 360 Ps ii.43; Vism 248 Vb-a 230 Pv-a 230 Thag-a 244 At Ja ii.163 & v.70 read sīna (“fallen”) for sīta.

      1. ˚āluka susceptible of cold Vin i.288 (synon. sītabhīruka)
      2. ˚uṇha cold and heat Ja i.10
      • ˚odaka with cool water (pokkharaṇī) MN i.76 Pv ii.104; sītodika (˚iya the same Ja iv.438
      • ˚bhīruka being a chilly fellow Vin i.28816 (cp. sītāluka)
      Vedic śīta
    Sīta
    1. neuter sail Ja iv.21 So also in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit : Jtm 94. Sitaka = sita
    Sītaka = sīta
    1. SN iv.289 (vāta)
    Sītala
    adjective
    1. cold, cool Ja ii.128 DN-a i.1 Mil 246 tranquil Ja i.3 neuter coolness Mil 76 Mil 323 Vv-a 44 68, 100 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 244. sītalībhāva becoming cool Sdhp 33
    2. cp. Vedic śītala
    Sītā
    feminine a furrow Vin i.240 (satta sītāyo); gambhīrasīta with deep mould (khetta) AN iv.237 AN iv.238 (text, ˚-sita).
    1. -āloḷī mud from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206
    Sīti˚
    1. ‣See sīta. The word sītisiyāvimokkha Ps ii.43, must be artificial, arisen from the pāda, sīti-siyā vimutto Snp 1073 (on which ‣See explanation at Nd2 678)
    Sīdati
    1. [sad, Indogermanic *si-ƶd-ō, reduplicated formation like tiṣṭhati; cp. Latin sīdo; Avestan hidaiti
    • The Dhtp (50 gives the 3 meanings of “visaraṇa-gaty-avasādanesu” to subside, sink; to yield, give way SN i.53 Snp 939 (= saṁsīdati osīdati Nd2 420) Iti 71 Mhvs 35, 35 3rd
    • plural sīdare Ja ii.393 Pot. sīde Iti 71
    • future sīdissati ‣See ni˚.
    • past participle sanna.
    • causative sādeti (q.v.);
    • causative II sīdāpeti to cause to sink Sdhp 43
    • cp. ni˚, vi˚
    Sīdana
    neuter
    1. sinking Mhvs 30, 54
    from sīdati
    Sīna1
    1. fallen off, destroyed Mil 117 (˚patta leafless) Ja ii.163 (˚patta, so read for sīta˚) ‣See also saṁsīna
    past participle of śṛ; to crush; Sanskrit śīrṇa
    Sīna2
    1. congealed; cold, frosty MN i.79
    past participle of sīyati; Sanskrit śīna
    Sīpada
    neuter
    1. the Beri disease (elephantiasis) morbid enlargement of the legs; hence sīpadin and sīpadika suffering from that disease Vin i.91 322
    Sanskrit slīpada
    Sīmantinī
    feminine a woman Ja iv.310 Ja vi.142
    Sīmā
    feminine
    1. boundary, limit, parish Vin i.106f. 309, 340 Nd1 99 (four) Dhp-a iv.115 (mālaka˚); antosīmaṁ within the boundary Vin i.132 167; ekasīmāya within one boundary, in the same parish Ja i.425 nissīmaṁ outside the boundary Vin i.122 132; bahisīmagata gone outside the boundary Vin i.255 bhinnasīma transgressing the bounds (of decency) Mil 122
    • In compoundsīma˚ & sīmā˚;
    1. ˚anta a boundary Mhvs 25, 87; sin Snp 484 Ja iv.311
    • ˚antarikā the interval between the boundaries Ja i.265 Vism 74
    • ˚ātiga transgressing the limits of sin, conquering sin Snp 795 Nd1 99
    • ˚kata bounded, restricted Nd2 p. 153 (cp. pariyanta)
    • ˚ṭṭha dwelling within the boundary Vin i.255
    • ˚samugghāta removal, abolishing of a boundary Mhvs 37, 33
    • ˚sambheda mixing up of the boundary lines Vism 193, 307, 315
    cp. Sanskrit sīmā
    Sīyati
    1. to congeal or freeze ‣See visīyati & visīveti; . past participle sīna2
    2. for Sanskrit śyāyati
    Sīra
    1. plough Thag-a 270 (= nangala)
    Vedic sīra
    Sīla
    neuter
    1. nature, character, habit behaviour; usually as—˚ in adjective function “being of such a nature,” like, having the character of …, e. g adāna˚; of stingy character, illiberal Snp 244 Pv-a 68 (+ maccharin); kiṁ˚; of what behaviour? Pv ii.913keḷi˚; tricky Pv-a 241
    2. damana˚ one who conquers Pv-a 251
    3. parisuddha˚ of excellent character AN iii.124
    4. pāpa˚ wicked Snp 246
    5. bhaṇana˚ wont to speak Dhp-a iv.93
    6. vāda˚ quarrelsome Snp 381 sq
    7. dussīla (of) bad character DN iii.235 Dhs 1327 Pug 20 53; Pv ii.82 noun; ii.969
    8. adjective Dhp-a ii.252 Dhp-a iv.3 Sdhp 338 Mil 257 opposite susīla SN i.141
    9. moral practice, good character, Buddhist ethics, code of morality. (a) The dasa-sīla or 10 items of good character (not “commandments”) are (1) pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, i.e. abstinence from taking life; (2) adinn'ādānā (from) taking what is not given to one; (3) abrahmacariyā adultery (oṭherwise called kāmesu micchā-cārā; (4) musāvādā telling lies; (5) pisuna-vācāya slander; (6) pharusa-vācāya harsh or impolite speech; (7) samphappalāpā frivolous and senseless talk; (8) abhijjhāya covetousness (9) byāpādā malevolence; (10) micchādiṭṭhiyā heretic views
    10. Of these 10 we sometimes find only the first 7 designated as “sīla” per se, or good character generally ‣See e.g. AN i.269 (where called sīla-sampadā); ii.83 sq (not called “sīla”), & sampadā
    11. (b) The pañca-sīla or 5 items of good behaviour are Nos. 1
    12. of dasa-sīla and (5) abstaining from any state of indolence arising from (the use of) intoxicants, viz. surā-meraya-majjapamāda-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī. These five also from the first half of the 10 sikkha-padāni. They are a sort of preliminary condition to any higher development after conforming to the teaching of the Buddha (saraṇaṁgamana) and as such often mentioned when a new follower is “officially” installed, e.g. Bu ii.190: saraṇâgamane kañci nivesesi Tathāgato kañci pañcasu sīlesu sīle dasavidhe paraṁ. From Pv iv.176 sq. (as also from Kh ii. as following upon Kh i.) it is evident that the sikkhāpadāni are meant in this connection (either 5 or 10), and not the sīlaṁ, cp. also Pv iv.350 sq., although at the above passage of Bu and at Ja i.28 as well as at Mhvs 18, 10 the expression dasa-sīla is used: evidently a later development of the term as regards dasa-sīla (cp. Mahāvastu translation 122, note 3), which through the identity of the 5 sīlas & sikkhāpadas was transferred to the 10 sikkhāpadas. These 5 are often simply called; pañca dhammā, e.g. at AN iii.203f. 208 sq. Without a special title they are mentioned in connection with the “saraṇaṁ gata” formula e.g. at AN iv.266 Similarly the 10 sīlas (as above a) are only called dhammā at AN ii.253f.; v.260; nor are they designated as sīla at AN ii.221

      • pañcasu sīlesu samādapeti to instruct in the 5 sīlas (alias sikkhāpadāni) Vin ii.162
      • (c) The only standard enumerations of the 5 or 10 sīlas are found at two places in the Saṁyutta and correspond with those given in the Niddesa ‣See on the 10 (as given under a) SN iv.342 & Nd; 2 s.v. sīla; on the 5 (also as under b SN ii.68 & Nd; 2 s.v. The so-called 10 sīlas (Childers) as found at Kh ii. (under the name of dasa-sikkhāpada are of late origin & served as memorial verses for the use of novices. Strictly speaking they should not be called; dasa-sīla
      • The eightfold sīla or the eight pledges which are recommended to the Buddhist layman (cp Mil 333 mentioned below) are the sikkhāpadas Nos 1
      • ‣See sikkhāpada, which in the Canon however do not occur under the name of sīla nor sikkhāpada, but as aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata uposatha (or aṭṭhaṅgika u. “the fast-day with its 8 constituents.” They are discussed in detail at AN iv.248f. with a poetical setting of the eight at AN iv.254 = Sn 400, 401-(d) Three special tracts on morality are found in the Canon. The Cullasīla (DN i.3f.) consists first of the items (dasa) sīla 1-7 then follow specific injunctions as to practices of daily living & special conduct, of which the first 5 (omitting the introductory item of bījagāma-bhūtagāma-samārambha) form the second 5 sikkhāpadāni. Upon the; Culla˚; follows the Majjhima˚; (DN i.5f.) & then the; Mahāsīla DN i.9f. The whole of these 3 sīlas is called sīlakkhandha and is (in the Sāmaññaphala sutta e.g.) grouped with samādhi- and paññākkhandha : DN i.206f.; at. AN v.205 AN v.206 sīla-kkhandha refers to the Culla-sīla only The three (s., samādhi & paññā) are often mentioned together, e.g. DN ii.81, 84 Iti 51 DN-a i.57
      • The characteristic of a kalyāṇa-mitta is endowment with saddhā, sīla, cāga, paññā AN iv.282 These four are counted as constituents of
      • future bliss AN iv.282 and form the 4 sampadās ibid. 322. In another connection at MN iii.99 Vism 19. They are, with suta (following after sīla) characteristic of the merit of the devatās AN i.210 sq (under devat'ânussati)
      • At Mil 333 sīla is classed as: saraṇa˚, pañca˚, aṭṭhanga˚, dasanga˚, pātimokkhasaṁvara˚ all of which expressions refer to the sikkhāpadas and not to the sīlas
      • At Mil 336f. sīla functions as one of the 7 ratanas (the 5 as given under sampadā up to vimuttiñāṇadassana; plus paṭisambhidā and bojjhanga)
      • cattāro sīlakkhandhā “4 sections of morality” Mil 243 Vism 15 & Dhs-a 168 (here as pātimokkha-saṁvara, indriya-saṁvara, ājīvapārisuddhi, paccaya-sannissita. The same with ref to catubbidha sīla at Ja iii.195) ‣See also under compounds. At Ps i.46 sq. we find the fivefold grouping as (1 pāṇâtipatassa pahānaṁ, (2) veramaṇī, (3) cetanā (4) saṁvara, (5) avītikkama, which is commented on at Vism 49
      • A fourfold sīla (referring to the sikkhāpada is given at Vism 15 as bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, anupasampanna˚ gahaṭṭha˚
      • On sīla and adhisīla ‣See e. g AN i.229f. Vb-a 413 sq
      • The division of sīla at Ja iii.195 is a distinction of a simple sīla as “saṁvara, of twofold sīla as “caritta-vāritta,” threefold as “kāyika, vācasika, mānasika,” and fourfold as above under cattāro sīlakkhandhā
      • See further generally: Ps i.42 sq.; Vism 3 sq.; Tika-Paṭṭhāna 154, 165 sq., 269, 277 Nd1 14 188 (explained as “pātimokkha-saṁvara”); Nd2 p. 277 Vb-a 143
      1. ˚aṅga constituent of morality (applied to the pañcasikkhāpadaṁ) Vb-a 381
      • ˚ācāra practice of morality Ja i.187 Ja ii.3
      • ˚ kathā exposition of the duties of morality Vin i.15 AN i.125 Ja i.188
      • ˚kkhandha all that belongs to moral practices, body of morality as forming the first constituent of the 5 khandhas or groups (+ samādhi˚ paññā˚, vimutti˚, ñāṇadassana-kkhandha), which make up the 5 sampadās or whole range of religious development ‣See e.g. Nd1 21 39; Nd2 p. 277

        • Vinote 162 sq. iii.164 AN i.124 AN i.291 AN ii.20 SN i.99f. Iti 51 107 Nett 90 sq., 128 Mil 243 Dhp-a iii.417
        • ˚gandha the fragrance of good works Dhp 55 Vism 58
        • ˚caraṇa moral life Ja iv.328 Ja iv.332
        • ˚tittha having good behaviour as its banks SN i.169 SN i.183 (translation Mrs. Rhys Davids “with virtue’s strand for bathing”)
        • ˚bbata = vata2
        1. good works and ceremonial observances Dhp 271 AN i.225 SN iv.118 Ud 71 Snp 231 etc.; sīlavata the same Snp 212 Snp 782 Snp 790 Snp 797 Snp 803 Snp 899 Iti 79f.; ˚-parāmāsa the contagion of mere rule and ritual, the infatuation of good works, the delusion that they suffice Vin i.184 MN i.433 Dhs 1005 AN iii.377 AN iv.144f. Nd1 98; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 245 282 sq. Dhs-a 348 ‣See also explanation at Compendium 171, note 4. sīlabbatupādāna grasping after works and rites DN ii.58 Dhs 1005 1216; Vism 569 Vb-a 181 sq
        • The old form sīlavata still preserves the original good sense, as much as “observing the rules of good conduct,” “being of virtuous behaviour.” Thus at Thag 1, 12 Snp 212 Snp 782 (explained in detail at Nd1 66), 790, 797, 803 Iti 79 Ja vi.491 (ariya˚)
        • ˚bheda a breach of morality Ja i.296
        • ˚mattaka a matter of mere morality DN i.3 DN-a i.55
        • ˚maya consisting in morality Iti 51 Vv-a 10 ‣See maya definition 6
        • ˚vatta morality, virtue SN i.143 cp. Ja iii.360
        • ˚vipatti moral transgression Vin i.171f. DN ii.85 AN i.95 268 sq.; iii.252 Pug 21 Vism 54, 57
        • ˚vipanna trespassing DN ii.85 Pug 21 Vin i.227
        • ˚vīmaṁsaka testing one’s reputation Ja i.369 Ja ii.429 Ja iii.100 Ja iii.193
        • ˚saṁvara self-restraint in conduct DN i.69 Dhs 1342 DN-a i.182
        • ˚saṁvuta living under moral self-restraint Dhp 281
        • ˚sampatti accomplishment or attainment by moral living Vism 57
        • ˚sampadā practice of morality Vin i.227 DN ii.86 MN i.194 MN i.201f. AN i.95 AN i.269f. ii.66; Pug. 25, 54
        • ˚sampanna practising morality virtuous Vin i.228 DN i.63 DN ii.86 MN i.354 Thag 2, 196 Thag-a 168 DN-a i.182
        cp. Sanskrit śīla. It is interesting to note that the Dhtp puts down a root sīl in meaning of samādhi (No 268) and upadhāraṇa (615)
    Sīlatā
    feminine (—˚)
    1. character(istic), nature, capacity Dhp-a iii.272
    abstract from sīla
    Sīlavant
    adjective
    1. virtuous, observing the moral precepts DN iii.77 DN iii.259f. 285 AN i.150 AN ii.58 AN ii.76 iii.206 sq., 262 sq.; iv.290 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 71 sq. Vism 58 DN-a i.286 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 279. nominative singular sīlavā DN i.114 SN i.166 Iti 63 Pug 26 53 Ja i.187
    2. accusative -vantaṁ Vin iii.133 Snp 624 instrumental

      • vatā SN iii.167 genitive
      • vato SN iv.303 nominative
      • plural -vanto Pug 13 Dhs 1328 Nett 191
      • accusative plural -vante Ja i.187 instrumental
      • vantehi DN ii.80 genitive pl-vantānaṁ MN i.334 genitive
      • plural -vataṁ Dhp 56 Ja i.144 f -vatī DN ii.12 Thag 2, 449 compar
      • ˚vantatara Ja ii.3
      sīla + vant
    Sīlika
    adjective (—˚)
    1. = sīlin Ja vi.64
    from sīla
    Sīlin
    adjective
    1. having a disposition or character; ariyasīlin having the virtue of an Ārya DN i.115 DN-a i.286 niddāsīlin drowsy, Snp 96 vuddhasīlin increased in virtue DN i.114 sabhāsīlin fond of society Snp 96
    from sīla
    Sīliya
    neuter
    1. conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour, e. g Ja iii.74 = iv.71; emphasized as dussīlya, e.g. SN v.384 AN i.105 AN v.145f.; opposite sādhu-sīliya Ja ii.137 (= sundara-sīla-bhāva Commentary )
    abstract from sīla, Sanskrit śīlya for śailya
    Sīvathikā
    feminine
    1. a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin iii.36 DN ii.295f. AN iii.268 323 Ja i.146 Pv iii.52 (= susāna Pv-a 198); Vism 181 240 Pv-a 195 Sivana & siveti;
    etymology doubtful; perhaps = * Sanskrit śivālaya; Kern derives it as śīvan “lying" + atthi “bone, problematic
    Sīvana
    sīveti;
    1. ‣See vi˚;
    Sīsa1
    neuter
    1. lead DN ii.351 SN v.92 Mil 331 Vb-a 63 (= kāḷa-tipu); a leaden coin Ja i.7
    • ˚-kāra a worker in lead Mil 331
    • ˚-maya leaden Vin i.190
    cp. Sanskrit sīsa
    Sīsa2
    neuter
    1. the head (of the body) Vin i.8 AN i.207 Snp 199 Snp 208 p. 80 Ja i.74 ii.103; sīsaṁ nahāta, one who has performed an ablution of the head DN ii.172 Pv-a 82
    2. āditta-sīsa, one whose turban has caught fire SN i.108 SN iii.143 SN v.440 AN ii.93
    3. sīsato towards the head Mhvs 25, 93; adho-sīsa, head first Ja i.233
    4. highest part, top, front: bhūmi˚; hill place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26 Ja ii.406
    5. caṅkamana˚ head of the cloister Vism 121; saṅgāma˚ front of the battle Pug 69 Ja i.387
    6. megha˚ head of the cloud Ja i.103 In this sense also opposed to pāda (foot), e. g sopāṇa˚; head (& foot) of the stairs Dhp-a; i.115. Contrasted with sama (plain) Ps i.101 sq
    7. chief point Ps i.102.

      • panicle, ear (of rice or crops) AN iv.169 DN-a i.118

    8. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as “chanda-sīsa citta-sīsa” grouped under chanda & citta Vism 376. Usually instr; ˚sīsena “under the heading (or category) of,” e.g. citta˚; Vism 3; paribhoga˚ Ja ii.24

      • saññā˚ Dhs-a 200
      • kammaṭṭhāna˚ Dhp-a iii.159

        1. ˚ānulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something MN i.147
        • ˚ābādha disease of the head Vin i.270f. Ja vi.331
        • ˚ābhitāpa heat in the head, headache Vin i.204
        • ˚kaṭāha a skull DN ii.297 = M i.58 Vism 260 = KhA 60; Kp-a 49
        • ˚kalanda Mil 292 Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka Ja vi.227 a blanket [cushion?
          1. or kerchief
          2. ˚cchavi the skin of the head Vin i.277
          • ˚cola a headcloth turban Mhvs 35, 53
          • ˚cchejja resulting in decapitation AN ii.241
          • ˚ccheda decapitation, death Ja i.167 Mil 358
          • ˚ppacālakaṁ swaying the head about Vin iv.188
          • ˚paramparāya with heads close together Dhp-a i.49
          • ˚virecana purging to relieve the head DN i.12 DN-a i.98
          • ˚veṭha head wrap SN iv.56
          • ˚veṭhana headcloth turban MN ii.193 sīsaveṭha identical MN i.244 = SN iv.56
          • ˚vedanā headache MN i.243 MN ii.193
          Vedic śīrṣa ‣See under sira
    Sīsaka
    neuter
    1. head, as adjective
    • ˚ heading, with the head towards; uttarasīsaka head northwards DN ii.137 pācīna˚ (of Māyā’s couch: eastward) Ja i.50 heṭṭhāsīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13 dhammasīsaka worshipping righteousness beyond everything Mil 47 Mil 117
    = sīsa
    Sīha
    1. a lion DN ii.255 SN i.16 AN ii.33 AN ii.245 AN iii.121 Snp 72 Ja i.165 Mil 400 Nd2 679 (= migarājā) Vb-a 256 398 (with popular etymology “sahanato ca hananato ca sīho ti vuccati”) Ja v.425 (women like the lion) Kp-a 140; often used as an epithet of the Buddha AN ii.24 AN iii.122 SN i.28 Iti 123
    2. feminine sīhī lioness Ja ii.27 iii.149, and sīhinī Mil 67

      1. ˚āsana a throne Mhvs 5, 62; 25, 98
      2. ˚kuṇḍala “lion’s ear-ring,” a very precious ear-ring Ja v.348 Snp-a 138 also as ˚mukha-kuṇḍala at Ja v.438
      • ˚camma lion’s hide AN iv.393
      • ˚tela “lion-oil,” a precious oil Kp-a 198 -nāda a lion’s roar, the Buddha’s preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation “halleluiah” AN ii.33 MN i.71 DN i.161 DN i.175 SN ii.27 SN ii.55 Ja 119 Mil 22 Dhp-a ii.43 178 Vb-a 398 (= seṭṭha-nāda abhīta-nāda) Snp-a 163 203
      • ˚nādika one who utters a lion’s roar, a song of ecstasy AN i.23
      • ˚pañjara a window Ja i.304 Ja ii.31 Dhp-a i.191
      • ˚papātaka “lion’s cliff,” name of one of the great lakes in the Himavā Snp-a 407 and passim -piṭṭhe on top of the lion Ja ii.244
      • ˚potaka a young lion Ja iii.149
      • ˚mukha “lion’s mouth,” an ornament at the side of the nave of the king’s chariot Kp-a 172 ‣See also ˚kuṇḍala
      • ˚ratha a chariot drawn by lions Mil 121
      • ˚vikkīḷita the lion’s play, the attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Nett 2, 4, 7, 124
      • ˚seyyā lying like a lion, on the right side DN ii.134 AN i.114 AN ii.40 244 Ja i.119 Ja i.330 Vb-a 345 Dhp-a i.357
      • ˚ssara having a voice like a lion Ja v.284 Ja v.296 etc. (said of a prince)
      • ˚hanu having a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha DN iii.144 DN iii.175 Bu xiii.1 = J i.38
      Vedic siṁha
    Sīhaḷa
    1. Ceylon; adjective Singhalese Mhvs 7, 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175; Dhvs 9, 1; Kp-a 47, 50, 78 Snp-a 30 53 sq. 397. —˚kuddāla a Singhalese hoe Vism 255 Vb-a 238
    2. ˚˚dīpa Ceylon Ja vi.30 Dhs-a 103 DN-a i.1 Kp-a 132 —˚bhāsā Singhalese (language) DN-a i.1 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 259 ‣See Dict. of Names.

    Sīhaḷaka
    adjective
    1. Singhalese Snp-a 397
    from last
    Su1
    indeclinable
    1. a participle of exclamation “shoo!”; usually repeated su su Ja ii.250 Ja vi.165 (of the hissing of a snake) Thag-a 110 (scaring somebody away), 305 (sound of puffing). Sometimes as sū sū, e.g. Tika-Paṭṭhāna 280 (of a snake), cp. sūkara. denominative susumāyati (q.v.)
    2. onomat.
    Su-2
    indeclinable
    1. a particle, combined with adjective, nouns, and certain verb forms, to express the notion of “well, happily, thorough” (cp. English well-bred wel-come, wel-fare); opposite du˚;. It often acts as simple intensive prefix (cp. saṁ˚) in the sense of “very,” and is thus also combined with concepts which in themselves denote a deficiency or bad quality (cp. su-pāpika “very wicked”) and the prefix du˚; (e.g. su-duj-jaya, su-duddasa, su-dub-bala)
    • Our usual practice is to register words with su˚; under the simple word, whenever the character of the composition is evident at first sight (cp du˚;). For convenience of the student however we give in the following a few compns as illustrating the use of su˚;
    1. ˚kaṭa well done, good, virtuous DN i.55 Mil 5
    • sukata the same DN i.27
    • neuter a good deed, virtue Dhp 314 AN iii.245
    • ˚kara feasible, easy DN i.250 Dhp 163 Snp p. 123; na sukaro so Bhagavā amhehi upasaṁkamituṁ SN i.9
    • ˚kiccha great trouble, pain Ja iv.451
    • ˚kittika well expounded Snp 1057
    • ˚kumāra delicate, lovely Mhvs 59, 29 ‣See sukhumāla
    • ˚kumālatta loveliness DN-a i.282
    • ˚kusala very skilful Ja i.220
    • ˚khara very hard (-hearted) Ja vi.508 (= suṭṭhu khara Commentary )
    • ˚khetta a good field DN ii.353 AN i.135 SN i.21
    • ˚gajjin shrieking beautifully (of peacocks) Thag 1, 211
    • ˚gandha fragrant Ja ii.20 pleasant odour Dhs 625
    • ˚gandhi = sugandha Ja 100
    • ˚gandhika fragrant Mhvs 7, 27 Ja i.266
    • ˚gahana a good grip, tight seizing Ja i.223
    • ˚gahita and suggahīta, grasped tightly, attentive AN ii.148 AN ii.169 AN iii.179 Ja i.163 Ja i.222
    • ˚ggava virtuous Ja iv.53 (probably misspelling for suggata)

      • ghara having a nice house Ja vi.418 Ja vi.420
      • ˚carita well conducted, right, good Dhp 168f.
      • neuter good conduct, virtue, merit AN i.49f. 57, 102 DN iii.52 DN iii.96 DN iii.152f. 169 Dhp 231 Iti 55 59 sq.; Ps i.115; Vism 199
      • ˚citta much variegated Dhp 151 Dhp-a iii.122
      • ˚cchanna well covered Dhp 14
      • ˚cchavi having a lovely skin, pleasant to the skin DN iii.159 Ja v.215 Ja vi.269
      • ˚jana a good man Mhvs 1, 85 -jāta well born, of noble birth DN i.93 Snp 548f. -jāti of noble family Mhvs 24, 50
      • ˚jīva easy to live Dhp 244
      • ˚tanu having a slender waist Vv 6412 (= sundara-sarīra Vv-a 280)
      • ˚danta well subdued, tamed DN ii.254 Dhp 94 AN iv.376
      • ˚dassa easily seen Dhp 252
      • masculine a kind of gods, found in the fourteenth rūpa-brahmaloka DN ii.52 Pug 17 Kvu 207
      • ˚diṭṭha well seen Snp 178 p. 143
      • ˚divasa a lucky day Ja iv.209
      • ˚dujjaya difficult to win Mhvs 26, 3
      • ˚duttara very difficult to escape from. AN v.232f. 253 sq. Dhp 86 Snp 358
      • ˚dukkara very difficult to do Ja v.31
      • ˚duccaja very hard to give up Ja vi.473
      • ˚duddasa very difficult to ‣See Vin i.5 Thag 1, 1098 Dhp 36 Dhp-a i.300 used as an epithet of Nibbāna SN iv.369
      • ˚duppadhaṁsiya very difficult to overwhelm DN iii.176
      • ˚dubbala very weak Snp 4
      • ˚dullabha very difficult to obtain Snp 138 Vv 4419 Vism 2 Vv-a 20
      • ˚desika a good guide Mil 354 Dhs-a 123 Vism 465
      • ˚desita well preached Dhp 44 Snp 88 Snp 230
      • ˚ddiṭṭha = su + uddiṭṭha
      1. well set out Vin i.129 Ja iv.192
      • ˚ddhanta well blown MN iii.243 Dhs-a 326 = saṁdhanta AN i.253 Vin ii.59
      • ˚dhammatā good nature, good character, goodness, virtue Ja ii.159 Ja v.357 Ja vi.527
      • ˚dhota well washed, thoroughly clean Ja i.331
      • ˚nandī (scil. vedanā) pleasing, pleasurable SN i.53
      • ˚naya easily deducted, clearly understood AN iii.179 = sunnaya AN ii.148 AN iii.179 (variant reading )
      • ˚nahāta well bathed, well groomed DN i.104 as sunhāta at SN i.79
      • ˚nimmadaya easily overcome DN 243 and sq
      • ˚nisita well whetted or sharpened Ja iv.118 as ˚nissita at Ja vi.248
      • ˚nisit-agga with a very sharp point Vv-a 227
      • ˚nīta well understood AN i.59
      • ˚pakka thoroughly ripe Mhvs 15, 38
      • ˚paṇṇasālā a beautiful hut Ja i.7
      • ˚patittha having beautiful banks DN ii.129 Ud 83 = sūpatittha MN i.76 ‣See also under sūpatittha

        • parikammakata well prepared, well polished DN i.76 AN ii.201 DN-a i.221
        • ˚pariccaja easy to give away Ja iii.68
        • ˚parimaṇḍala well rounded, complete Mhvs 37, 225
        • ˚parihīna thoroughly bereft, quite done for Iti 35
        • ˚pāpa-kammin very wicked Ja v.143
        • ˚pāpa-dhamma very wicked Vv 521
        • ˚pāpika very sinful, wicked AN ii.203
        • ˚pāyita well saturated, i.e. hardened (of a sword) Ja iv.118 cp. suthita
        • pāsiya easily threaded (of a needle Ja iii.282
        • ˚picchita well polished, shiny, slippery Ja v.197 (cp. Sanskrit picchala?). Dutoit “fest gepresst pīḷ ?), so also Kern, Toevoegselen ii.85. Commentary explains as suphassita-pipi good to drink Ja vi.526
        • ˚pīta ‣See suthita
        • pubbaṇha a good morning AN i.294
        • ˚posatā good nature Vin i.45
        • ˚ppaṭikāra easy requital AN i.123
        • ˚ppaṭipanna well conducted AN ii.56 Pug 48 -tā, good conduct Nett 50
        • ˚ppaṭippatāḷita well played on DN ii.171 AN iv.263
        • ˚ppaṭividdha thoroughly understood AN ii.185
        • ˚ppatiṭṭhita firmly established Iti 77 Snp 444
        • ˚ppatīta well pleased Mhvs 24, 64
        • ˚ppadhaṁsiya easily assaulted or overwhelmed DN iii.176 SN ii.264 cp. ˚duppadhaṁsiya
        • ˚ppadhota thoroughly cleansed DN ii.324
        • ˚ppabhāta a good daybreak Snp 178
        • ˚ppameyya easily fathomed DN i.266 Pug 35
        • ˚ppavādita (music) well played Vv.39
        • ˚ppavāyita well woven, evenly woven Vin iii.259
        • ˚ppavedita well preached Iti 78 Thag 2 341 Thag-a 240
        • ˚ppasanna thoroughly full of faith Mhvs 34, 74
        • ˚ppahāra a good blow Ja iii.83
        • ˚phassita agreeable to touch, very soft Ja i.220 Ja v.197 (Commentary for supicchita); smooth Vv-a 275
        • ˚bahu very much, very many Mhvs 20, 9; 30, 18; 34, 15; 37, 48
        • ˚bāḷhika ‣See bāḷhika
        • bbata virtuous, devout DN i.52 SN i.236 Snp 220 Dhp 95 Ja vi.493 Dhp-a ii.177 Dhp-a iii.99 Pv-a 226 Vv-a 151
        • ˚bbināya easy to understand Nd 326 -bbuṭṭhi abundant rainfall Mhvs 15, 97 Dhp-a i.52
        • ˚kā the same DN i.11
        • ˚brahā very big Ja iv.111
        • ˚bhara easily supported, frugal; -tā frugality Vin i.45 Vin ii.2 MN i.13
        • ˚bhikkha having plenty of food
        • neuter plenty DN i.11
        • ˚˚vāca called plenty, renowned for great liberality Iti 66
        • ˚bhūmi good soil MN i.124
        • ˚majja well polished Ja iii.282
        • ˚majjhantika a good noon AN i.294
        • ˚mati wise Mhvs 15, 214
        • ˚matikata well harrowed AN i.239
        • ˚mada very joyful Ja v.328
        • ˚mana glad, happy DN i.3 DN iii.269 AN ii.198 Snp 222 Snp 1028 Dhp 68 Vism 174. kind, friendly Ja iv.217 (opposite disa) -manohara very charming Mhvs 26, 17
        • ˚manta well-advised, careful Mil 318
        • ˚mānasa joyful Vin i.25 Mhvs 1, 76
        • ˚māpita well built Ja i.7
        • ˚mutta happily released DN ii.162
        • ˚medha wise Vin i.5 MN i.142 AN ii.49 and sq. Dhp 208 Snp 117 Snp 211 etc. Iti 33 Nd1 453
        • ˚medhasa wise DN ii.267 AN ii.70 Dhp 29
        • ˚yiṭṭha well sacrificed AN ii.44
        • ˚yutta well suited, suitable Ja i.296
        • ˚ratta very red Ja i.119 Dhp-a i.249
        • ˚rabhi fragrant SN iv.71 Vv 8432 Ja i.119 AN iii.238 Vv 4412 538, 716; Pv ii.123; Vism 195 (˚vilepana) Vv-a 237 Pv-a 77 Davs iv.40 Mil 358 —˚karaṇḍaka fragrance box, a fragrant box Thag 2, 253 Thag-a 209
        • ˚ruci resplendent Snp 548
        • ˚ruddha very fierce Ja v.425 Ja v.431 (read ˚rudda)
        • rūpin handsome Mhvs 22, 20
        • ˚rosita nicely anointed Ja v.173
        • ˚laddha well taken;
        • neuter a good gain, bliss Vin i.17 Iti 77
        • ˚labha easy to be obtained Iti 102 Ja i.66 Ja vi.125 Pv-a 87
        • ˚vaca of nice speech, compliant MN i.43 MN i.126 Snp 143 AN iii.78 Ja i.224 Often with padakkhiṇaggāhin (q.v.) ‣See also subbaca & abstract derivation; sovacassa
        • vatthi i.e. su + asti
        1. hail well-being cp. 100 = J iv.31; cp. sotthi
        • vammita well harnessed Ja i.179
        • ˚vavatthāpita well known, ascertained Ja i.279 Mil 10
        • ˚vānaya i.e. su-v-ānaya easily brought, easy to catch Ja i.80 Ja i.124 Ja i.238
        • ˚viggaha of a fine figure, handsome Mhvs 19, 28
        • ˚vijāna easily known Snp 92 Ja iv.217
        • ˚viññāpaya easy to instruct Vin i.6
        • ˚vidūravidūra very far off AN ii.50
        • ˚ vibhatta well divided and arranged Snp 305
        • ˚vilitta well perfumed DN i.104
        • ˚vimhita very dismayed Ja vi.270
        • ˚visada very clean or clear Snp-a 195
        • ˚visama very uneven, dangerous Thag ii.352 Thag-a 242
        • ˚vihīna thoroughly bereft Ja i.144
        • ˚vuṭṭhikā abundance of rain Ja ii.80 Snp-a 27 DN-a i.95 ‣See subbuṭṭhikā-vositaṁ happily ended Ja iv.314
        • ˚saṅkhata well prepared AN ii.63
        • ˚saññā
        • feminine having a good understanding Ja v.304 Ja vi.49 Ja vi.52 Ja vi.503 (for ˚soññā? Commentary sussoṇiya, i.e. having beautiful hips); Ap 307 (identical)
        • ˚saññata thoroughly restrained Ja i.188
        • ˚saṇṭhāna having a good consistence, well made Snp 28
        • ˚sattha well trained Ja iii.4
        • ˚sandhi having a lovely opening Ja v.204
        • ˚samāgata thoroughly applied to AN iv.271 (aṭṭhanga˚ i.e. uposatha)
        • ˚samāraddha thoroughly undertaken DN ii.103 SN ii.264f. Dhp 293 Dhp-a iii.452
        • ˚samāhita well grounded, steadfast DN ii.120 Dhp 10 Dhp-a iv.114 Iti 113 -atta of steadfast mind SN i.4 SN i.29
        • ˚samucchinna thoroughly eradicated MN i.102
        • ˚samuṭṭhāpaya easily raised SN v.113
        • ˚samudānaya easy to accomplish Ja iii.313
        • ˚sambuddha easy to understand Vin i.5 Snp 764 SN i.136
        • ˚sāyaṇha a good, blissful evening AN i.294
        • ˚sikkhita well learnt, thoroughly acquired Snp 261 easily trained, docile Ja i.444 Ja ii.43
        • ˚sikkhāpita well taught, trained Ja i.444
        • ˚sippika a skilful workman Mhvs 34, 72
        • ˚sīla moral, virtuous SN i.141
        • ˚sukka very white, resplendent DN ii.18 iii.144 Snp 548
        • ˚seyya lying on soft beds SN ii.268
        • ˚ssata well remembered MN i.520
        • ˚ssara melodious Vv 364 Snp-a 355
        • ˚ssavana good news Ja i.61
        • ˚ssoṇi having beautiful hips Ja iv.19 Ja v.7 Ja v.294 cp. sussoṇiya Ja vi.503 & ‣See; ˚saññā
        • hajja friend SN iv.59 Dhp 219 Snp 37 Ja i.274 AN iv.96 Dhp-a iii.293
        • ˚hada friendly good- hearted a friend DN iii.187 (= sundara-hadaya Commentary Ja iv.76 Ja vi.382 suhadā a woman with child Ja v.330
        • ˚hanna modesty Ja i.421 ‣See hanna
        • huṭṭhita [su uṭṭhita
        1. well risen Snp 178
        • ˚huta well offered, burnt as a sacrifical offering AN ii.44
        Vedic su˚
    Su3
    indeclinable (—˚)
    1. a particle of interrogation, often added to interrogative pronouns; thus kaṁ su SN i.45 kena ssu SN i.39 kissa ssu SN i.39 SN i.161 (so read for kissassa); ko su Snp 173 Snp 181 kiṁ su Snp 1108 kathaṁ su Snp 183 Snp 185 Snp 1077 it is often also used as a pleonastic particle in narration; thus tadā su then DN ii.212 hatthe su sati when the hand is there SN iv.171 It often takes the forms ssu and assu; thus tyassu = te assu DN ii.287 yassāhaṁ = ye assu ahaṁ DN ii.284 note 5; api ssu Vin i.5 ii.7, 76; tad-assu = tadā su then Ja i.196 tay'assu three Snp 231 āditt'assu kindled DN ii.264 nāssu not Snp 291 Snp 295 Snp 297 Snp 309; sv-assu = so su Ja i.196 Euphonic ṁ is sometimes added yehi-ṁ-su Ja vi.564 note 3; kacciṁ-su Snp 1045 Snp 1079
    *ssu, from Vedic svid, interrog. participle, of which other forms are si and sudaṁ. It also stands for Vedic sma, deictic participle of emphasis, for which also sa & assa;
    Suṁsumāra
    1. a crocodile SN iv.198 Thag 2, 241 Thag-a 204 Ja ii.158f.; Vism 446 Snp-a 207 (˚kucchi) Dhp-a iii.194
    • ˚rī
    • feminine a female crocodile Ja ii.159
    • suṁsumārinī
    • feminine Mil 67 suṁsumārapatitena vandeti to fall down in salutation DN-a i.291
    cp. Sanskrit śiśumāra, literally child-killing
    Suka
    1. a parrot Ja i.458 Ja ii.132 instead of suka read sūka SN v.10 ‣See suva
    Vedic śuka, from śuc
    Sukka1
    1. planet, star Ud. 9 = Nett 150; neuter semen, sukkavisaṭṭhi emission of semen Vin ii.38 Vin iii.112 Vin iv.30 Kvu 163
    2. Vedic śukra; from śuc
    Sukka2
    adjective
    1. white, bright; bright, pure, good SN ii.240 SN v.66 SN v.104 Dhp 87 Dhs 1303 Iti 36 Ja i.129 Mil 200 sukkadhamma Ja i.129
    • kaṇhāsukkaṁ evil and good Snp 526 Sukkā a class of gods DN ii.260

      1. ˚aṁsa bright lot, fortune Dhp 72 Dhp-a ii.73
      • ˚chavi having a white skin Ja iv.184 Ja vi.508 at both
      • passive said of the sons of widows
      • ˚pakkha cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śukla-pakṣa Divy 38
        1. the bright fortnight of a month AN ii.19 Mil 388 Ja iv.26 (opposite kāḷa-pakkha); the bright half, the good opportunity Thag 2, 358 Thag-a 2
        Vedic śukla
    Sukkha
    adjective
    1. dry, dried up DN ii.347 Ja i.228 Ja i.326 Ja iii.435 v.106 Mil 261 Mil 407 cp. pari˚, vi˚
    1. ˚kaddama dried mud Mhvs 17, 35
    2. ˚kantāra desert Ja v.70
    • ˚vipassaka “dry-visioned” Compendium 55, 75; with different explanation Geiger, Saṁyutta translation ii.172 note 1
    Vedic śuṣka, from śuṣ
    Sukkhati
    1. to be dried up Mil 152 Ja v.472 ppr. sukkhanto getting dry Ja i.498 ppr. med sukkhamāna wasting away Ja i.104 causative II. sukkhāpeti SN i.8 Vin iv.86 Ja i.201 Ja i.380 Ja ii.56 DN-a i.262 ‣See also pubbāpeti.
    2. past participle sukkhita
    3. from śuṣka dry; śuṣ
    Sukkhana
    neuter
    1. drying up Ja iii.390 (assu—˚)
    from sukkha
    Sukkhāpana
    neuter
    1. drying, making dry Ja vi.420
    from sukkhāpeti
    Sukkhita
    1. dried up, emaciated Mil 303 cp. pari˚
    past participle of sukkhati
    Sukha
    adjective-noun
    1. agreeable, pleasant, blest Vin i.3 Dhp 118 Dhp 194 Dhp 331 Snp 383 paṭipadā, pleasant path, easy progress AN ii.149f. Dhs 178 kaṇṇa-s. pleasant to the ear DN i.4 happy, pleased DN ii.233
    • nt. sukhaṁ wellbeing happiness, ease; ideal, success Vin i.294 DN i.73f. MN i.37 SN i.5 AN iii.355 (deva-manussānaṁ) Iti 47 Dhp 2 Snp 67 Dhs 10 Dhs-a 117 Pv-a 207 (lokiya worldly happiness)
    • kāyika sukkha bodily welfare Tika-Paṭṭhāna 283; cp. Compendium 1121; sāmisaṁ s. material happiness AN i.81 AN iii.412 Vb-a 268 On relation to pīti (joy ‣See Vism 145 (sankhāra-kkhandha-sangahitā pīti vedanā-kkhandha-sangahitaṁ sukhaṁ) and Compendium 56 243
    • Defined further at Vism 145 & 461 (iṭṭha-phoṭṭhabb-ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṁ; i.e. of the kind of experiencing pleasant contacts)
    • Two kinds, viz kāyika & cetasika; at Ps i.188; several other pairs at AN i.80 three (praise, wealth, heaven) Iti 67 another three (manussa˚, dibba˚, nibbāna˚) Dhp-a iii.51 four (possessing, making good use of possessions, having no debts, living a blameless life) AN ii.69
    • gātha -bandhana-sukh'atthaṁ for the beauty of the verse Ja ii.224-O
    • past participle asukha DN iii.222 DN iii.246 Snp 738 or dukkha, with which often combined (e.g. Snp 67 Snp 873 with spelling dukha at both pass.)
    • Cases: instrumental sukhena with comfort happily, through happiness Thag 1, 220 Dhs-a 406 acc sukhaṁ comfortably, in happiness; yathā s. according to liking Pv-a 133
    • sukhaṁ seti to rest in ease, to lie well SN i.41 AN i.136 Dhp 19 Dhp 201 Ja i.141 cp. sukhasayita-s. edhati to thrive, prosper SN i.217 Dhp 193 Snp 298 cp. sukham-edha Vin iii.137 (with Kern’s remarks Toevoegselen ii.83). s. viharati to live happily AN i.96 AN iii.3 Dhp 379
    • Derived sokhya
    1. ˚atthin feminine

      • nī longing for happiness Mhvs 6, 4 -āvaha bringing happiness, conducive to ease SN i.2f. 55 Dhp 35 Ja ii.42
      • ˚indriya the faculty of ease SN v.209f. Dhs 452 Iti 15 52
      • ˚udraya (sometimes spelt ˚undriya having a happy result AN i.97 Ps i.80; Pv iv.178 (= sukha-vipāka Pv-a 243) Vv 318
      • ˚ūpaharaṇa happy offering, luxury Ja i.231
      • ˚edhita read as sukhe ṭhita (i.e. being happy) at Vin iii.13 & SN v.351 (variant reading sukhe ṭhita); also at Dhp-a i.165 cp. Ja vi.219
      • ˚esin looking for pleasure Dhp 341
      • ˚kāma longing for happiness MN i.341 SN iv.172 SN iv.188
      • ˚da giving pleasure Snp 297
      • ˚dhamma a good state MN i.447
      • ˚nisinna comfortably seated Ja iv.125
      • ˚paṭisaṁvedin experiencing happiness Pug 61
      • ˚ppatta come to well-being, happy Ja iii.112
      • ˚pharaṇatā diffusion of well-being, ease Nett 89 (among the constituents of samādhi)
      • ˚bhāgiya participating in happiness Nett 120 sq., 125 sq., 239 (the four s. dhammā are indriyasaṁvara, tapasaṁkhāta puññadhamma, bojjhangabhāvanā and sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggasankhāta nibbāna)
      • ˚bhūmi a soil of ease, source of ease Dhs 984 Dhs-a 346
      • ˚yānaka an easy-going cart Dhp-a 325 -vinicchaya discernment of happiness MN iii.230 sq -vipāka resulting in happiness, ease DN i.51 AN i.98 DN-a i.158
      • ˚vihāra dwelling at ease SN v.326
      • ˚vihārin dwelling at ease, well at ease DN i.75 Dhs 163 Ja i.140
      • ˚saṁvāsa pleasant to associate with Dhp 207
      • ˚saññin conceiving happiness, considering as happiness AN ii.52
      • ˚samuddaya origin of bliss Iti 16 52
      • ˚samphassa pleasant to touch Dhs 648
      • ˚sammata deemed a pleasure Snp 760
      • ˚sayita well embedded (in soil), of ‣Seeds AN iii.404 = DN ii.354
      Vedic sukha; in R. V. only of ratha; later generally
    Sukhallikānuyoga
    1. luxurious living Vin i.1012 (kāma—˚) ‣See under kāma˚;
    same in Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit
    Sukhāyati
    1. to be pleased Ja ii.31 (asukhāyamāna being displeased with)
    denominative from sukha
    Sukhita
    1. happy, blest, glad SN i.52 SN iii.11 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); iv.180 Snp 1029 Pv ii.811; healthy Mhvs 37, 128; ˚-atta [ātman happy, easy Snp 145
    past participle of sukheti
    Sukhin
    adjective
    1. happy, at ease DN i.31 DN i.73 DN i.108 AN ii.185 SN i.20 SN i.170 SN iii.83 Dhp 177 Snp 145 being well, unhurt Ja iii.541 feminine -nī DN ii.13 MN ii.126
    2. from sukha
    Sukhuma
    adjective
    1. subtle, minute Vin i.14 DN i.182 SN iv.202 AN ii.171 Dhs 676 Thag 2, 266 Dhp 125 = Sn 662; Vism 274, 488 (˚rūpā). fine, exquisite DN ii.17 DN ii.188 Mil 313 susukhuma, very subtle Thag 1 71 = 210 (˚-nipuṇattha-dassin); cp. sokhumma; khoma—˚, kappāsa—˚, kambala—˚ (n.?) the finest sorts of linen, cotton stuff, woolwork (respectively) Mil 105
    • Der sokhumma
    1. ˚acchika fine-meshed DN i.45 DN-a i.127 Ap 21 (jāla) -diṭṭhi subtle view Iti 75
    • ˚dhāra with fine edge Mil 105
    Epic Sanskrit sūkṣma
    Sukhumaka
    1. = sukhuma Ps i.185
    Sukhumatta
    neuter
    1. fineness, delicacy DN ii.17f.
    abstract from sukhuma
    Sukhumāla
    adjective
    1. tender, delicate, refined, delicately nurtured AN i.145 AN ii.86f.; iii.130 Vin i.15 179; ii.180; beautifully young, graceful Ja i.397 Snp 298 samaṇa—˚ a soft, graceful Samaṇa AN ii.87 feminine sukhumālinī Thag 2, 217 Mil 68 & sukhumālī Ja vi.514
    2. cp. Sanskrit su-kumāra
    Sukhumālatā
    feminine
    1. delicate constitution Ja v.295 Dhp-a iii.283 (ati˚)
    abstract from sukhumāla
    Sukheti
    1. to make happy DN i.51 SN iv.331 DN-a i.157 also sukhayati Dhs-a 117 causative II. sukhāpeti DN ii.202 Mil 79
    2. past participle sukhita
    3. causative from sukha
    Sugata
    faring well, happy, having a happy life after death (gati) ‣See under gata; cp. Vism 424 (s. sugati-gata). Frequently epithet of the Buddha ‣See Dict. of Names.
    1. ˚aṅgula a Buddha-inch, an inch according to the standard accepted by Buddhists Vin iv.168
    • ˚ālaya imitation of the Buddha Ja i.490 Ja i.491 Ja ii.38 Ja ii.148 Ja ii.162 iii.112
    • ˚ovāda a discourse of the Blessed one Ja i.119 349; ii.9, 13, 46; iii.368
    • ˚vidatthi a Buddha-span, a span of the accepted length Vin iii.149 Vin iv.173
    • ˚vinaya the discipline of the Buddha AN ii.147
    su + gata
    Sugati
    feminine
    1. happiness, bliss, a happy fate ‣See detail under gati Vin ii.162 195 DN i.143 DN ii.141 Pug 60 Iti 24 77, 112 AN iii.5 AN iii.205 AN v.268 Vism 427 (where defined as “sundarā gati” & distinguished fr; sagga as including “manussagati,” whereas sagga is “devagati”) Vb-a 158 Dhp-a i.153
    • suggati (in verses), Dhp 18 DN ii.202 (printed as prose) Ja iv.436 (= sagga Commentary ); vi.224. Kern, Toevoegselen ii.83 explained suggati as svargati, analogous to svar-ga (= sagga); doubtful cp. duggati
    su + gati
    Sugatin
    adjective
    1. righteous Dhp 126 Ja i.219 = Vin ii.162 (suggatī)
    from sugati
    Suṅka
    masculine and
    • neuter

      1. toll, tax, customs Vin iii.52 Vin iv.131 AN i.54f. Dhp-a ii.2 Ja iv.132 Ja vi.347 Pv-a iii
      2. gain, profit Thag 2, 25 Thag-a 32

  • purchase-price of a wife Thag 2, 420 Ja vi.266 Mil 47 sq

    • odhisunka stake Ja vi.279
    • ˚-gahana Ja v.254 a-suṁkâraha Ja v.254
    1. ˚ghāta customs’ frontier Vin iii.47 52
    2. ˚ṭṭhāna taxing place, customs’ house Vin iii.62 Mil 359
    • ˚sāyika (?) customs’ officer Mil 365 (read perhaps ˚sādhaka or ˚sālika?)
    cp. Vedic śulka, nt.
  • Suṅkika
    1. a receiver of customs Ja v.254
    sunka + ika
    Suṅkiya
    neuter
    1. price paid for a wife Ja vi.266
    abstract from sunka
    Suci
    adjective
    1. pure, clean, white DN i.4 AN i.293 Snp 226 Snp 410
    • opposite asuci impure AN iii.226 AN v.109 266.
    • neuter purity, pure things Ja i.22 goodness, merit Dp 245; a tree used for making foot-boards Vv-a 8
    1. ˚kamma whose actions are pure Dhp 24
    • ˚gandha having a sweet perfume Dhp 58 Dhp-a i.445
    • ˚gavesin longing for purity SN i.205 Dhp-a iii.354
    • ˚ghaṭika read sūcighaṭikā at Vin ii.237
    • ˚ghara Vin ii.301f. ‣See sūcighara
    • ˚jātika of clean descent Ja ii.11
    • ˚bhojana pure food Snp 128
    • ˚mhita having a pleasant, serene smile Vv 1810 5025; 6412 Vv-a 96 280 (also explained as a name) Ja iv.107
    • ˚vasana wearing clean, bright clothes Snp 679
    Vedic śuci
    Sucimant
    adjective
    1. pure, an epithet of the Buddha AN iv.340
    suci + mant
    Sujā
    feminine
    1. a sacrificial ladle DN i.120 DN i.138 SN i.169 DN-a i.289 299
    Vedic sruc, feminine
    Sujjhati
    1. to become clean or pure MN i.39 SN i.34 SN i.166 Nd1 85; Vism 3; cp. pari˚;. past participle suddha -
    2. causative sodheti (q.v.)
    3. śudh which the Dhtp (417) defines as “soceyye,” i.e. from cleansing
    Sujjhana
    neuter
    1. purification Vism 44
    from sujjhati
    Suñña
    adjective
    1. empty, uninhabited DN i.17 DN ii.202 SN i.180 SN iv.173 DN-a i.110 Mil 5
    2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal MN i.435 SN iii.167 SN iv.54 SN iv.296 Snp 1119 Nd1 439 (loka)
    3. empty, void, useless MN i.483 SN iv.54 SN iv.297 Dāvs v.17 Mil 96 Vism 594 sq. (of nāmarūpa, in simile with suñña dāruyanta) suññasuñña empty of permanent substance Ps ii.178 asuñña not empty Mil 130

      • nt. suññaṁ emptiness annihilation, Nibbāna Vism 513 (three nirodha-suññāni); ablative ˚to from the point of view of the “Empty Nd2 680 (long exegesis of suññato at Snp 1119); Vism 512 Vb-a 89 261; Kp-a 74
      1. ˚āgāra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin i.97 228; ii.158, 183; iii.70, 91 sq. DN i.175 DN ii.86 291, MN i.33 SN iv.133 SN iv.359f. AN iii.353 AN iv.139 AN iv.392 437; v.109, 207, 323 sq. Iti 39 Ja iii.191 Mil 344 Vism 270 Nd2 94
      2. ˚gāma an empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism 484 Vb-a 48 Dhs 597 Dhs-a 309 ˚tthāna Vism 353 Vb-a 57
      cp. Sanskrit śūnya, from Vedic śūna, nt., void
    Suññata
    adjective
    1. void, empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Thag 2, 46 Thag-a 50 Dhs 344 Mhvs 37, 7; nibbāna Dhs-a 221
    • phassa SN iv.295
    • vimokkha Dhp 92 Dhp-a ii.172 Mil 413
    • vimokkha samādhi, and samāpatti Vin iii.92f. iv.25 sq.; samādhi (contemplation of emptiness ‣See Compendium 216) DN iii.219 (one of three samādhis) SN iv.360 SN iv.363 Mil 337
    • anupassanā Ps ii.43 sq
    i.e. the ablative suññato used as adjective nominative
    Suññatā
    feminine
    1. emptiness, “void,” unsubstantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill-will and dullness, Nibbāna MN iii.111 Kvu 232 Dhs-a 221 Nett 118 sq., 123 sq., 126 Mil 16 Vism 333 (n'atthi; suñña; vivitta; i, e. abhāva, suññatā, vivitt’ ākāra), 578 (12 fold, relating to the Paṭiccasamuppāda) 653 sq. Vb-a 262 (atta˚, attaniya˚, niccabhāva˚)
    1. ˚pakāsana the gospel of emptiness DN-a i.99 123
    2. ˚paṭisaṁyutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbāna AN i.72 = iii.107 = SN ii.267 DN-a i.100f. Mil 16
    • ˚vihāra dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin ii.304 MN iii.104 MN iii.294 ‣See on term e.g. Compendium 69; Kvu translation 142, note 4
    abstract from suñña
    Suññatta
    neuter
    1. emptiness, the state of being devoid Dhs-a 221
    abstract from suñña
    Suṭṭhu
    indeclinable
    1. well; the usual Commentary explanation of the prefix su2 Pv-a 19 Pv-a 51 Pv-a 52 Pv-a 58 Pv-a 77 Pv-a 103 etc. s. tāta well, father Ja i.170 s. kataṁ you have done well Ja i.287 DN-a i.297 suṭṭhutaraṁ still more Ja i.229 Snp-a 418
    cp. Sanskrit suṣṭhu, from su˚
    Suṭṭhutā
    feminine
    1. excellence AN i.98f.; Nett 50
    abstract from suṭṭhu
    Suṇa
    1. "dog,” preferable spelling for suna, cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 931
    Suṇāti
    (suṇoti)
    1. to hear. Pres. suṇāti DN i.62 DN i.152 SN v.265 Snp 696 Iti 98 Mil 5
    • suṇoti Ja iv.443 Pot. suṇeyya Vin i.7 DN i.79
    • suṇe Ja iv.240
    • imperative suṇa SN iii.121
    • sunāhi Snp p. 21; suṇohi DN i.62 Snp 997 3rd singular suṇātu Vin i.56 1st
    • plural suṇāma Snp 354 suṇoma Snp 350 Snp 988 Snp 1110 Pv iv.131
    1. -2nd plural suṇātha DN i.131 DN ii.76 Iti 41 Snp 385 Pv-a 13
    2. suṇotha Snp 997 Mil 1

      1. -3rd pl suṇantu Vin i.5 -ppr. sunanto Snp 1023 DN-a i.261 savaṁ Ja iii.244 infinitive sotuṁ DN ii.2 Snp 384
      2. suṇitum Mil 91
      3. future sossati DN ii.131 DN ii.265 Ja ii.107 Ja ii.63 Ap 156 Vv-a 187 1st singular sussaṁ Snp 694
        1. -2nd singular sossi Ja vi.423 aorist 1st singular assuṁ Ja iii.572

          1. -2nd singular assu Ja iii.541
          1. -3rd singular suṇi Ja iv.336 assosi DN i.87 DN i.152 Snp p. 103; 1st plural assumha Ja ii.79

            1. -2nd plural assuttha SN i.157 SN ii.230 SN ii.3rd
            2. plural assosuṁ Vin i.18 DN i.111
            3. absolutive sutvā Vin i.12 DN i.4 Snp 30 sutvāna Vin i.19 DN ii.30 Snp 202 suṇitvā Ja v.96 Mhvs 23, 80. suṇiya Mhvs 23, 101

              • passive sūyati MN i.30 Ja i.72 Ja i.86 Mil 152
              • suyyati Ja iv.141 Ja iv.160 Ja v.459 3rd
              • plural sūyare Ja vi.528
              • Grd. savanīya what should be heard, agreeable to the ear DN ii.211
              • sotabba DN i.175 DN ii.346
              • past participle suta ‣See separately.
              • causative sāveti to cause to hear to tell, declare, announce Ja i.344 Mhvs 5, 238 Pv-a 200 Vv-a 66 nāmaṁ s. to shout out one’s name Vin i.36 DN-a i.262 maṁ dāsī ti sāvaya announce me to be your slave Ja iii.437 cp. Ja iv.402 (but ‣See on this passage and on Ja iii.198 Ja vi.486 Kern’s proposed reading sāṭeti; to cause to be heard, to play DN ii.265 Caus also suṇāpeti Dhp-a i.206
              • Desiderative sussūsati (often written sussūyati) DN i.230 MN iii.133 (text sussūsanti), AN iv.393 (do.)
              • ppr. sussusaṁ Snp 189 (var read., text sussussā); sussūsamāna Snp 383
              • aorist sussūsiṁsu Vin i.10
              • future sussūsissanti Vin i.150 SN ii.267 (text sussu-)
              śru, Vedic śṛṇoti; cp. Latin clueo to be called; Old Irish clunim to hear; Goth hliup attention, hliuma hearing, and many others
    Suṇisā
    feminine
    1. a daughter-in-law Vin i.240 Vin iii.136 DN ii.148 MN i.186 MN i.253 Ja vi.498 Vv 135 (= puttassa bhariyā Vv-a 61) Dhp-a i.355 Dhp-a iv.8 Pv ii.46 (plural suṇisāyo so read for sūtisāye)

      • suṇhā the same Vin ii.10 AN iv.91 Thag 2, 406 Ja ii.347 Ja vi.506 Pv iv.3.43
      Vedic snuṣā; cp. Latin nurus
    Suta1
    1. heard; in special sense “received through inspiration or revelation” learned; taught AN 97 sq. DN iii.164f. 241 sq.; freq in phrase “iti me sutaṁ” thus have I heard, I have received this on (religious) authority, e.g. Iti 22f.
    2. neuter sacred lore, inspired tradition, revelation; learning religious knowledge MN iii.99 AN i.210f.; ii.6 sq. SN iv.250 Ja ii.42 Ja v.450 Ja v.485 Mil 248
    3. appa-ssuta one who has little learning AN ii.6f. 218; iii.181 v.40, 152; bahu-ssuta one who has much learning famous for inspired knowledge AN ii.6f.; iii.113 sq. 182 sq., 261 sq. SN ii.159 ‣See bahu. asuta not heard Vin i.238 Pv iv.161 Ja iii.233 also as assuta Ja i.390 (˚pubba never heard before); iii.233
    4. na suta pubbaṁ a thing never heard of before Ja iii.285
    5. dussuta MN i.228
    6. sussuta MN iii.104
    7. renowned Ja ii.442
      1. ˚ādhāra holding (i.e. keeping in mind, preserving) the sacred learning Ja iii.193 Ja vi.287
      • ˚kavi a Vedic poet a poet of sacred songs AN ii.230
      • ˚dhana the treasure of revelation DN iii.163 DN iii.251 AN iii.53 AN iv.4f. Vv-a 113
      • ˚dhara remembering what has been heard (or taught in the Scriptures) AN ii.23 (+ ˚sannicaya); iii.152, 261 sq -maya consisting in learning (or resting on sacred tradition), one of the 3 kinds of knowledge (paññā) viz. cintā-mayā, s

        • m., bhāvanā-mayā paññā DN iii.219 Vb 324 (explained at Vism 439); as ˚mayī at Ps i.4, 22 sq. Nett 8, 50, 60
        • ˚ssava far-renowned (epithet of the Buddha Snp 353
        past participle of suṇāti; cp. Vedic śruta
    Suta2
    1. son Mhvs 1, 47; feminine sutā daughter, Thag 2, 384
    2. Sanskrit suta, past participle of (or su to generate
    Sutatta
    neuter
    1. the fact of having heard or learnt Snp-a 166
    abstract from suta1
    Sutappaya
    adjective
    1. easily contented AN i.87 Pug 26 (opposite dut˚)
    su + gerundive of tappati2
    Sutavant
    adjective
    1. one who is learned in religious knowledge Vin i.14 AN ii.178 AN iii.55 AN iv.68 AN iv.157 SN iii.57 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 279 Snp 70 (= āgama-sampanna Snp-a 124) 90, 371; sutavanta-nimmita founded by learned, pious men Mil 1 assutavant, unlearned MN i.1 (˚vā puthujjano laymen) Dhs 1003 AN iii.54 AN iv.157
    suta1 + vant
    Suti
    feminine
    1. hearing, tradition, inspiration, knowledge of the Vedas Snp 839 Snp 1078 Mil 3 (+ sammuti); Mhvs 1, 3. 2. rumour; sutivasena by hearsay, as a story, through tradition Ja iii.285 Ja iii.476 Ja vi.100
    2. a sound, tone Vv-a 139 (dvāvīsati suti-bhedā 22 kinds of sound)
    cp. śruti revelation as opposed to smṛti tradition
    Sutitikkha
    adjective
    1. easy to endure Ja 524
    from su + titikkhā
    Sutta1
    1. asleep Vin iii.117 Vin v.205 DN i.70 DN ii.130 Dhp 47 Iti 41 Ja v.328 neuter sleep DN ii.95 MN i.448 SN iv.169 In phrase ˚-pabuddha “awakened from sleep” referring to the awakening (entrance) in the deva-world, e.g. Vism 314 (brahmalokaṁ uppajjati) Dhp-a i.28 (kanaka-vimāne nibbatti); iii.7 (identical); cp. SN i.143
    2. past participle of supati
    Sutta2
    neuter
    1. a thread, string DN i.76 DN ii.13 Vin ii.150 Pv ii.111 (= kappāsiyā sutta Pv-a 146) Ja i.52
    2. figuratively for taṇhā at Dhs 1059 Dhs-a 364
    3. kāḷa˚ a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405 Mil 413
    4. dīgha˚ with long thread Ja v.389
    5. makkaṭa˚ spider’s thread Vism 136; yantā˚ string of a machine Vb-a 241
    6. Mentioned with kappāsa as barter for cīvara at Vin iii.216
    7. the (discursive, narrational part of the Buddhist Scriptures containing the suttas or dialogues, later called Sutta-piṭaka (cp. Suttanta) As such complementary to the Vinaya. The fanciful explanation of the word at Dhs-a 19 is: “atthānaṁ sūcanto suvuttato savanato 'tha sūdanato suttāṇā-sutta-sabhāgato ca suttaṁ Suttan ti akkhātaṁ."- DN ii.124 Vin ii.97 Vb-a 130 (+ vinaya) Snp-a 159 310 (compared with Vinaya & Abhidhamma)
    8. one of the divisions of the Scriptures ‣See; navanga AN ii.103 AN ii.178 AN iii.177 361 sq. Mil 263

      • a rule, a clause (of the Pātimokkha) Vin i.65 68; ii.68, 95; iii.327

    9. a chapter division, dialogue (of a Buddh. text), text, discourse (‣ See also suttanta SN iii.221 (

      • plural suttā), 253; v.46; Nett 118 Dhs-a 28
      • suttaso chapter by chapter. AN v.72 AN v.81
      • suttato according to the suttas Vism 562 = Vb-a 173
      • an ancient verse, quotation Ja i.288 Ja i.307 Ja i.314 7. book of rules, lore, text book Ja i.194 (go˚ lore of cows); ii.46 (hatthi˚ elephant trainer’s handbook)
      1. ˚anta 1. a chapter of the Scriptures, a text, a discourse a sutta, dialogue Vin i.140f. 169; ii.75 iii.159; iv.344 AN i.60 AN i.69 AN i.72 AN ii.147 SN ii.267 = AN iii.107 (suttantā kavi-katā kāveyyā citt'akkharā cittavyañjanā bāhirakā sāvaka-bhāsitā); Vism 246 sq. (three suttantas helpful for kāyagatā sati)
      • the Suttantapiṭaka, opposed to the Vinaya Vism 272 (˚aṭṭhakathā opp to Vinay'aṭṭhakathā). As ˚piṭaka e.g. at Kp-a 12 Vb-a 431 ‣See Proper Names
      • ˚kantikā (scil. itthi a woman spinner Pv-a 75 as ˚kantī at Ja ii.79
      • ˚kāra a cotton-spinner Mil 331
      • ˚guḷa a ball of string DN i.54 MN iii.95 Pv iv.329 Pv-a 145
      • ˚jāla a web of thread, a spider’s web Nd2 260
      • ˚bhikkhā begging for thread Pv-a 145
      • ˚maya made of threads, i.e. a net Snp-a 115 263
      • ˚rajjuka a string of threads Vism 253 Vb-a 236
      • ˚lūkha roughly sewn together Vin i.287 297
      • ˚vāda a division of the Sabbatthavādins Dpvs 5, 48; Mhvs 5, 6 Mhbv.97
      • ˚vibhaṅga classification of rules Vin ii.97 Also title of a portion of the Vinaya Piṭaka
    Vedic sūtra, from sīv to sew
    Suttaka
    neuter
    1. a string Vin ii.271 Pv-a 145 a string of jewels or beads Vin ii.106 Vin iii.48 Dhs-a 321 a term for lust Dhs-a 364
    from sutta
    Suttantika
    1. versed in the Suttantas. A suttantika bhikkhu is one who knows the Suttas (contrasted with vinayadhara who knows the rules of the Vinaya) Vin ii.75 cp. dhamma C 1 & piṭaka
    • Vin i.169 Vin ii.75 161 iii.159 Ja i.218 Mil 341 Vism 41, 72, 93; Kp-a 151 -duka the Suttanta pairs, the pairs of terms occurring in the Suttantas Dhs 1296f.
    • ˚vatthūni the physical bases of spiritual exercise in the Suttantas Ps i.186
    Sutti1
    feminine
    1. in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body Vin ii.107 ‣See sotti
    cp. Sanskrit śukti, given as pearl-shell (Suśruta), and as a perfume
    Sutti2
    feminine
    1. a good saying Sdhp 340 Sdhp 617
    Sanskrit sūkti
    Suthita
    1. (?) beaten out, Mil 415 (with variant readings suthiketa, suphita & supita). Should we read su-poṭhita? Kern; Toevoegselen ii.85 proposes su-pīta “well saturated” (with which cp. supāyita Ja iv.118 said of a sword)
    Sudaṁ
    indeclinable
    1. a deictic seemingly pleonastic particle in combination with demonstrative pronouns and adverb s; untranslatable, unless by “even, just,” e.g. ta
    2. passive sudaṁ homi, lūkha ssudaṁ sic
      1. homi etc. MN i.77 = J i.390; cp. itthaṁ sudaṁ thus Snp p. 59; tatra sudaṁ there Vin i.4 34; iv.108 DN i.87 ii.91 Iti 15 api ssudaṁ DN ii.264 SN i.119 api sudaṁ SN i.113 sā ssudam SN ii.255
      = Vedic svid, influenced by sma ‣See su3
    Sudda
    1. ‣See detail under vaṇṇa 6 a Sūdra Vin ii.239 DN i.104 DN iii.81 DN iii.95f. (origin) MN i.384 AN i.162 AN ii.194 SN i.102 Pug 60 Snp 314 feminine suddī DN i.241 AN iii.226 AN iii.229 Vin iii.133
    2. cp. Vedic śūdra
    Suddha
    1. clean, pure, Vin i.16 Vin ii.152 DN i.110 Snp 476
    2. purified, pure of heart MN i.39 Dhp 125 Dhp 412 Snp 90
    3. simple, mere, unmixed, nothing but SN i.135 Dhs-a 72 Ja ii.252 (˚daṇḍaka just the stick).

      1. ˚antaparivāsa a probation of complete purification Vin ii.59f. -ājīva clean livelihood Vb-a 116 Dhp-a iv.111
      • ˚ājīvin living a pure life Dp 366
      • ˚ānupassin considering what is pure Snp 788 Nd1 85
      • ˚āvāsa pure abode, name of a heaven and of the devas inhabiting it DN ii.50 Vism 392. Five are enumerated at DN iii.237 viz. Avihā, Atappā, Sudassā, Sudassī, Akaniṭṭhā; cp. MN iii.103
      • ˚āvāsakāyika belonging to the pure abode epithet of the Suddhāvāsa devas Vin ii.302 DN ii.253 SN i.26
      • ˚pīti whose joy is pure Mhvs 29, 49
      • ˚buddhi of pure intellect Ja i.1
      • ˚vaṁsatā purity of lineage Mhvs 59, 25
      • ˚vasana wearing pure clothes Thag 2, 338 Thag-a 239
      • ˚vālukā white sand Mhvs 19, 37
      • ˚saṅkhārapuñja a mere heap of sankhāras SN i.135
      past participle of sujjhati
    Suddhaka
    neuter
    1. a trifle, a minor offence, less than a Sanghādisesa Vin ii.67
    suddha + ka
    Suddhatā
    feminine
    1. purity Snp 435
    abstract from suddha
    Suddhatta
    neuter
    1. purity DN ii.14 Vism 44
    abstract from suddha
    Suddhi
    feminine
    1. purity, purification, genuineness, sterling quality DN i.54 MN i.80 MN ii.132 MN ii.147 SN i.166 SN i.169 SN i.182 SN iv.372 Thag 2, 293 Dhp-a iii.158 (variant reading visuddhi) Vv-a 60 (payoga˚); Vism 43 (fourfold: desanā˚, saṁvara˚ pariyeṭṭhi˚, paccavekkhaṇa˚) Dhs 1005 Snp 478 suddhiṁvada stating purity, Snp 910 Nd1 326; suddhināya leading to purity Snp 910 cp. pari˚, vi˚
    1. ˚magga the path of purification (cp. visuddhi˚) SN i.103
    from śudh
    Suddhika
    adjective
    1. connected with purification Dhs 519–⁠522 udaka-s. pure by use of water SN i.182 Vin i.196 udakasuddhikā
    2. feminine cleaning by water Vin iv.262 susāna-s. fastidious in the matter of cemeteries Ja ii.54
    3. pure, simple; orthodox, schematized justified Nd1 89 (vatta˚); Vism 63 (ekato & ubhato), 64 (identical) Dhs-a 185 (jhāna)
    suddhi + ka
    Sudhā
    feminine
    1. the food of the gods, ambrosia Ja v.396 Vism 258 = KhA 56 (sakkhara˚)
    2. lime plaster, whitewash, cement Vin ii.154
    3. ˚-kamma whitewashing coating of cement Ja vi.432 Mhvs 38, 74
    cp. Sanskrit sudhā
    Suna1
    1. swollen Vin ii.253 AN iv.275 AN iv.470
    Sanskrit śūna, past participle of śū to swell
    Suna2
    1. a dog, also written suṇa Ja vi.353 Ja vi.357 (cp. sunakha)
    Sanskrit śuna ‣See suvāṇa
    Sunakha
    1. a dog AN i.48 AN ii.122 Thag 2 509 Ja i.175 Ja i.189 Ja ii.128 Ja ii.246 Pv-a 151 Pv-a 206
    • rukkha˚ some sort of animal Ja vi.538
    • feminine sunakhī a bitch Ja iv.400
    • Names of some dogs in the Jātakas are Kaṇha (or Mahā˚) Ja iv.183 Caturakkha iii.535; Jambuka Pingiya ibid.; Bhattabhuñjana ii.246. cp. suvāṇa
    cp. Sanskrit śunaka; the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is also sunakha, e.g. MVastu iii.361, 369
    Sunaggavellita
    1. beautifully curled at the ends (of hair) Ja vi.86
    su + agga + vellita; perhaps originally suv-agga˚
    Sundara
    adjective
    1. beautiful, good, nice, well Ja ii.11 Ja ii.98 Snp-a 410 493 (cp. parovara) It is very frequent as Commentary word, e.g. for prefix su˚ Pv-a 57 Pv-a 77 Vv-a 111 for subha Pv-a 14 Pv-a 44; for sādhu ṢnA 176; for sobhana Pv-a 49 for seyyo Pv-a 130
    cp. Epic & Classical Sanskrit sundara
    Supaṇṇa
    1. “Fairwing” a kind of fairy bird, a mythical creature (cp. garuḷa), imagined as winged, considered as foe to the nāgas DN ii.259 SN i.148 Ja i.202 Ja ii.13 Ja ii.107 Ja iii.91 Ja iii.187 Ja iii.188 vi.256, 257 Vism 155 (˚rājā), 400 Nd1 92 448 Dhp-a i.280 Pv-a 272 DN-a i.51 Mhvs 14, 40; 19, 20. Four kinds SN iii.246
    Vedic suparṇa
    Supati
    suppati, soppati
    1. to sleep; supati Snp 110 Ja ii.61 (sukhaṁ supati he sleeps well); v.215; Pv ii.938; suppati SN i.107
    • soppati SN i.107 SN i.110 Pot. supe SN i.111 ppr supanto Vin i.15 ppr.
    • medium suppamāna Ja iii.404
    • aorist supi Mil 894 Vin ii.78 Pv-a 195 (sukhaṁ); infinitive sottuṁ SN i.111
    • past participle supita; also sutta1 & sotta;
    svap; Vedic svapiti & svapati; svapna sleep or dream ‣See supina, with which cp. Gr sleep = Avestan xvafna, Latin somnus, Anglo-Saxon swefn. Dhtp 481 “saye”
    Supāṇa
    1. a dog DN ii.295 = M i.58, 88 Snp 201 Mil 147 Spelt supāna at Ja iv.400
    = suvāṇa
    Supāyika
    1. J iv.118 (read: supāyita ‣See under su˚;
    Supita
    1. sleeping; neuter sleep SN i.198 (ko attho supitena) = Sn 331 Snp-a 338 Pv ii.61 (so read for supina?)
    2. past participle of supati
    Supina
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. a dream, vision DN i.9 DN i.54 SN i.198 SN iv.117 (supine in a dream; variant reading supinena) Snp 360 Snp 807 Snp 927 Nd1 126 Ja i.334f. 374; v.42 DN-a i.92 164 Vv 4414 Vb-a 407 (by 4 reasons), 408 (who has dreams) Dhp-a i.215 The five dreams of the Buddha AN iii.240 Ja i.69 dussupina an unpleasant dream Ja i.335 Pv-a 105 (of Ajātasattu); maṅgala˚; a lucky dream Ja vi.330
      • mahā˚ṁ passati to have (literally ‣See) a great vision Ja i.336 sq (the 16 great visions); ˚ṁ ādisati to tell a dream Nd1 381-Supina at Pv ii.61 read supita.

        -anta anta pleonastic, cp. Thag-a 258 “supinam eva supinantaṁ”

        1. a dream; ablative ˚ante in a dream Thag 2, 394 Ja v.328 (spelt suppante; Commentary sopp˚; explained as “supinena”) instrumental ˚antena identical Vin ii.125 Vin iii.112 Ja v.40 Ja vi.131 Thag-a 258 Kp-a 175 Snp-a 80
        • ˚pāṭhaka a dream-teller astrologer Nd1 381
        • ˚sattha science of dream-telling oneiromantics Snp-a 564
        Vedic svapna; the contracted Pali form is soppa
    Supinaka
    1. a dream Vin ii.25 DN ii.333 MN i.365 Ja v.354 DN-a i.92
    supina + ka
    Supīta
    1. read Mil 415 for suthita (Kern’s suggestion) ‣See under su˚;
    Supoṭhita
    1. well beaten; perhaps at Mil 415 for suthita (said of iron); neuter a good thrashing Dhp-a i.48
    2. su + poṭhita
    Suppa
    1. a winnowing basket Ud 68 Ja i.502 Ja ii.428 Vism 109 (+ sarāva), 123 Mil 282 Dhp-a i.174 (kattara˚); ii.131; Mhvs 30, 9. ˚-ka a toy basket, little sieve Dhs-a 321 (+ musalaka)
    cp. Vedic śūrpa
    Suppatā
    feminine
    1. in mugga-s. pea-soup talk, sugared words Mil 370 ‣See under mugga
    from sūpa
    Suppanta
    1. ‣See under soppa
    Suplavattha
    1. at Ja v.408 is doubtful in spelling & meaning. Perhaps to be read; "suplavantaṁ” gliding along beautifully; Commentary explained as “sukhena plavan'atthaṁ.”
    Subbaca
    adjective
    1. compliant, meek AN iii.180 ‣See also suvaca (under su˚). Derived sovacassa
    su + vaca
    Subbhū
    adjective
    1. having beautiful eyebrows Ja iv.18 (= subhamukhā Commentary )
    su + bhū, Sanskrit bhrū ‣See bhūkuṭi
    Subha
    adjective
    1. shining, bright, beautiful DN i.76 = ii.13 = MN iii.102 Dhs 250 DN-a i.221 auspicious, lucky, pleasant Snp 341 Iti 80 good Snp 824 Snp 910 subhato maññati to consider as a good thing Snp 199 Ja i.146 cp. SN iv.111 neuter welfare good, pleasantness, cleanliness, beauty, pleasure; -vasena for pleasure’s sake Ja i.303 Ja i.304
    2. asubha anything repulsive disgusting or unpleasant SN i.188 SN v.320 subhâsubha pleasant and unpleasant Mil 136 Ja iii.243 (niraya = subhānaṁ asubhaṁ unpleasant for the good Commentary ); cp. below subhāsubha.

      1. ˚aṅgana with beautiful courts Ja vi.272
      • ˚āsubha good and bad, pleasant & unpleasant Dhp 409 = Sn 633
      • ˚kiṇṇa the lustrous devas, a class of devas DN ii.69 MN i.2 329 390; iii.102 AN i.122 Ja iii.358 Kvu 207; also written ˚kiṇha AN ii.231 AN ii.233 AN iv.40 AN iv.401 Vism 414, 420 sq. Vb-a 520 Kp-a 86
      • ˚gati going to bliss, to heaven Mhvs 25, 115
      • ˚ṭṭhāyin existing or remaining, continuing in glory DN i.17 DN-a i.110 AN v.60
      • ˚dhātu the element of splendour SN ii.150
      • ˚nimitta auspicious sign auspiciousness as an object of one’s thought MN i.26 AN i.3 AN i.87 AN i.200 SN v.64 SN v.103 Vism 20
      • ˚saññā perception or notion of what is pleasant or beautiful Nett 27 O
      • past participle asubhasaññā concept of repulsiveness AN i.42 ii.17; iii.79; iv.46; v.106 ‣See asubha

        • saññin considering as beautiful AN ii.52
        Vedic śubhas from subh; cp. sobhati
    Subhaga
    adjective
    1. lucky; ˚karaṇa making happy or beloved (by charms) DN i.11 DN-a i.96
    • Derived sobhagga
    su + bhaga
    Sumanā
    the great-flowered jasmine Ja i.62 Ja iv.455 Dhp-a iv.12 In composition sumana˚;.
    1. ˚dāma a wreath of jasmine Ja iv.455
    • ˚paṭṭa cloth with jasmine pattern Ja i.62
    • ˚puppha j. flower Mil 291 Vv-a 147
    • ˚makula a j. bud Dhp-a iii.371
    • ˚mālā garland of j. Vv-a 142

    Sumarati
    1. ‣See sarati2
    Sumbhati
    (& sumhati)
    1. to push, throw over, strike Ja iii.185 (sumh˚); vi.549. past participle sumbhita

      • cp. ā˚, pari˚;
      ; sumbh (?), cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar 60, 128. The Dhtm (306 & 548) only says “saṁsumbhane.” The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit form is subhati MVastu i.14
    Sumbhita
    1. knocked over, fallen (over) Pv-a 174
    past participle of sumbhati
    Suyyati
    1. is Passive of suṇāti
    Sura
    1. god Snp 681 (= deva Snp-a 484); name of a Bodhisatta Ja v.12 Ja v.13 surakaññā a goddess, a heavenly maid Ja v.407 (= devadhītā, Commentary ); surinda the king of gods Mhbv.28. Opp asura
    cp. Epic Sanskrit sura probably after asura
    Surata
    adjective
    1. (in good sense:) well-loving, devoted ‣See soracca; (in bad sense:) sexual intercourse thus wrongly for soracca at Ja iii.442 Commentary, with explanation as “dussīlya.” cp. sūrata
    su + rata
    Surā
    feminine
    1. spirituous (intoxicating) liquor (“drink”) Vin ii.295 301; iv.110 DN i.146 AN i.212 295 Iti 63 Ja i.199 Ja i.252 (tikhiṇaṁ suraṁ yojetvā mixing a sharp drink) Dhp-a ii.9 Dhp 247 as nt. at Ja vi.23 (variant reading surā as gloss)

      • Five kinds of surā are mentioned viz. piṭṭha˚, pūva˚, odana˚ (odaniya˚), kiṇṇapakkhitta˚ sambhāra-saṁyutta˚ Vv-a 73 Vb-a 381
      1. ˚ādhiṭṭhaka addicted to drink Ja v.427
      • ˚geha a drinking house Ja i.302
      • ˚ghaṭa a pitcher of liquor Ja iii.477
      • ˚ghara = ˚geha Ja v.367
      • ˚chaṇa a drinking festival Ja i.489 Dhp-a iii.100
      • ˚dhutta a drunkard Snp 106 Ja i.268 Ja iii.260
      • ˚nakkhatta a drinking festival Ja 362 Snp-a 185
      • ˚pāna drinking strong liquor Ja i.50 iv.23 Vb-a 383
      • ˚pāyikā a woman drinking liquor Ja v.11
      • ˚pipāsita thirsty after strong drink SN ii.110
      • ˚pīta one who has drunk liquor Ja i.426
      • ˚mada tipsiness intoxication AN iv.213 Ja i.352 Ja i.362
      • ˚meraya (-pāna (drinking) rum & spirits AN i.261 AN ii.53 ‣See also (pañca-sikkhāpada
      • ˚vitthaka bowl for drinking spirits Ja v.427 Dhp-a iii.66
      • ˚soṇḍa a drunkard Dhp-a iii.129
      • ˚soṇḍaka identical Ja v.433
      Vedic surā
    Suriya
    1. the sun Vin i.2 DN ii.319 Snp 687 AN i.227 SN v.29f. Ja ii.73 Vism 231 (in simile), 416 (the seventh sun), 417 (myth of popular etymology), 690 (in sim.) Mil 299 Kp-a 21 (bāla˚, in simile) Pv-a 137 Pv-a 211 Vb-a 519 size of the sun Dhs-a 318 suriyaṁ uṭṭhāpeti to go on till sunrise Ja i.318
    2. the sun as a god DN ii.259 SN i.51 Ja iv.63 etc.; vi.89, 90, 201, 247, 263, etc
      1. ˚atthaṅgamana sunset Vv-a 295
      • ˚uggamana sunrise Mhvs 23, 22 Ja i.107
      • ˚kanta the sun-gem, a kind of gem Mil 118
      • ˚ggāha eclipse of the sun DN i.10 Ja i.374
      • ˚maṇḍala the orb of the sun AN i.283 Dhs 617
      • ˚rasmi a sunbeam Ja i.502
      • ˚vattika a sun-worshipper Nd1 89
      Vedic sūrya cp. suvar light, heaven; Indogermanic *sāṷel, as in Latin sōl., Gothic sauil sun; Old Irish sūil “eye” cp. also ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. sōl
    Suru
    indeclinable
    1. a hissing sound (“suru”); surusuru-kārakaṁ (adverb ) after the manner of making hissing sounds (when eating) Vin ii.214 Vin iv.197
    2. onamat.
    Suruṅga
    1. a subterranean passage Mhvs 7, 15
    a corruption of
    Sulasī
    feminine
    1. a medicinal plant Vin i.201 cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.40
    cp. Sanskrit surasī, “basilienkraut” BR; from surasa
    Sulopī
    feminine a kind of small deer Ja vi.437 Ja vi.438
    Suva
    1. a parrot Ja i.324 Ja iv.277f.; vi.421; 431 sq. (the two: Pupphaka & Sattigumba) Dhp-a i.284 (˚rājā). feminine suvī Ja vi.421
    2. cp. Sanskrit śuka
    Suvaṇṇa
    1. of good colour, good, favoured, beautiful DN i.82 Dhs 223 Iti 99 AN iv.255 Pug 60 Ja i.226 suvaṇṇa neuter gold SN iv.325f. Snp 48 Snp 686 Nd2 687 (= jātarūpa); Kp-a 240 Vv-a 104 often together with hirañña Vin iii.16 48 DN ii.179 ˚-āni pl precious things Ja i.206

      • cp. soṇṇa
      1. ˚iṭṭhakā gilt tiles Dhp-a iii.29 61 Vv-a 157
      • ˚kāra goldsmith DN i.78 MN ii.18 MN iii.243 AN i.253f. Ja i.182 v.438 sq. Nd1 478; Vism 376 (in sim.) Dhp-a iii.340 Snp-a 15 Vb-a 222 (in sim.)
      • ˚gabbha a safe (-room for gold Dhp-a iv.105
      • ˚guhā “golden cave,” name of a cave Snp-a 66
      • ˚toraṇa gilt spire Vb-a 112
      • ˚paṭṭa a golden (writing) slab Ja iv.7 Snp-a 228 578 Dhp-a iv.89
      • ˚paṇaka a golden diadem Mil 210
      • ˚pabbata name of a mountain Snp-a 358
      • ˚passa identical Snp-a 66
      • ˚pādukā golden slippers Vin i.15
      • ˚maya made of gold Ja i.146
      • ˚mālā golden garland Dhp-a i.388
      • ˚meṇḍaka a golden ram Dhp-a iii.364 Dhp-a iv.217
      • ˚bhiṅkāra a g. vase Mhbv.154 -bhūmi “gold-land,” name of Cambodia Nd1 155
      • ˚rājahaṁsa golden-coloured royal mallard Ja i.342
      • ˚vaṇṇa gold-coloured (of the body of the Yathāgata) DN iii.143 159 Ja ii.104 Ja iv.333 Dhp-a iii.113
      • ˚vīthi golden street (in Indra’s town) Ja v.386
      • ˚sivikā a g. litter Dhp-a iii.164
      • ˚haṁsa golden swan Ja i.207 Ja ii.353 Snp-a 277 349
      Sanskrit suvarṇa
    Suvaṇṇatā
    feminine
    1. beauty of colour or complexion Pug 34
    abstract from suvaṇṇa
    Suvāṇa
    (& suvāna)
    1. a dog MN iii.91 (= supāṇa MN i.58) Ja vi.247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sāma); Vism 259 (= supāṇa Kp-a 58). As suvā˚; at Sdhp 379 Sdhp 408
    • ‣ See also the various forms san, suṇa suna, sunakha, supāṇa, soṇa
    1. ˚doṇi a dog’s (feeding) trough Vism 344, 358 Vb-a 62
    • ˚piṇḍa a dog biscuit Vism 344
    • ˚vamathu dog’s vomit Vism 344 (= suvā-vanta Sdhp 379)
    cp. Sanskrit śvan, also śvāna ( feminine śvānī): from Vedic
  • accusative śuvānaṁ, of śvan. For etymology cp. Latin canis, Old Irish cū, Gothic hunds
  • Suvanaya
    1. easy to bring SN i.124 = J i.80
    su-v-ānaya
    Suvāmin
    1. a master Snp 666
    metric for sāmin
    Suve
    1. ‣See sve
    Susāna
    neuter
    1. a cemetery Vin i.15 50; ii.146 DN i.71 AN i.241 AN ii.210 Pug 59 Ja i.175 Nd1 466 Nd2 342; Vism 76, 180 Pv-a 80 Pv-a 92 Pv-a 163 Pv-a 195 sq āmaka-s. a place where the corpses are left to rot Ja i.61 Ja i.372 Ja vi.10 Dhp-a i.176 cp. sosānika
    1. ˚aggi a cemetery fire Vism 54
    2. ˚gopaka the cemetery keeper Dhp-a i.69
    • ˚vaḍḍhana augmenting the cemetery fit to be thrown into the cemetery Thag 2, 380 cp. kaṭasi˚
    cp. Vedic śmaśāna
    Susānaka
    adjective
    1. employed in a cemetery Mhvs 10, 91
    from last
    Susira
    adjective neuter
    1. perforated, full of holes, hollow Ja i.146 Snp 199 Ja i.172 Ja i.442 DN-a i.261 Mil 112 Vism 194 = Dhs-a 199 Kp-a 172; asusira Dhp-a ii.148 (Buddhaghosa for eka-ghaṇa). neuter a hole Pv-a 62
    2. Sanskrit śuṣira
    Susu1
    1. a boy, youngster, lad Vin iii.147 = Ja ii.284 Vv 6414 (= dahara Commentary ) Snp 420 DN i.115 MN i.82 AN ii.22 Ja ii.57 ājānīya-susūpama MN i.445 read ājānīy-ass-ūpama (cp. Thag 1, 72)
    • In phrase susukāḷa the susu is a double su˚, in meaning “very, very black” ‣See under kāḷa-kesa, e.g. DN i.115 = M i.82 AN ii.22 = iii.66 = J ii.57; explained as suṭṭhu-kāḷa DN-a i.284-susunāga a young elephant DN ii.254
    cp. Sanskrit śiśu
    Susu2
    1. the sound susu, hissing Ja iii.347 (cp. su and sū) Thag-a 189
    Susu3
    1. the name of a sort of water animal (alligator or seacow?) Ja vi.537 (plur. susū) = v.255 (kumbhīlā makasā susū)
    Susukā
    feminine an alligator Vin i.200 AN ii.123 (where identical passage at Nd2 470 has suṁsumāra) MN i.459 Mil 196
    Sussati
    1. to be dried, to wither Snp 434 Ja i.503 Ja ii.424 Ja vi.5 (being thirsty); ppr. medium sussamāna Ja i.498 Snp 434 fut sussissati Ja i.48
    2. absolutive sussitvā Ja ii.5 Ja ii.339 Pv-a 152 cp. vissussati & sukkhati.
    3. causative ; soseti (q.v.)
    4. Vedic śuṣyati; śuṣ (= sosana Dhtp 457)
    Sussūsa
    adjective wishing to hear or learn, obedient SN i.6 Ja iv.134
    Sussūsati
    1. to wish to hear, to listen, attend DN i.230 AN i.72 AN iv.393 aorist sussūsimsu Vin i.10 ppr.
    2. medium sussūsamāna Snp 383
    3. Desidentical from suṇāti; Sanskrit śuśrūṣati
    Sussūsā
    feminine
    1. wish to hear, obedience, attendance DN iii.189 AN v.136 Thag 1, 588 Snp 186 Ja iii.526 Mil 115
    Classical Sanskrit śuśrūṣā
    Sussūsin
    adjective
    1. obedient, trusting Ja iii.525
    cp. Epic Sanskrit śuśrūṣin
    Suhatā
    feminine
    1. happiness Ja iii.158
    sukha + tā
    Suhita
    adjective
    1. satiated MN i.30 Ja i.266 Ja i.361 Ja v.384 Mil 249
    su + hita
    indeclinable an onomat. participle “shoo,” applied to hissing sounds ‣See su1. Also doubled: sū sū Dhp-a i.171 iii.352. cp. sūkara & sūsūyati.
    Sūka
    1. the awn of barley etc. SN v.10 SN v.48 AN i.8
    cp. Sanskrit śūka
    Sūkara
    1. a hog, pig Vin i.200 DN i.5 AN ii.42 (kukkuṭa +), 209 Iti 36 Ja i.197 (Muṇika); ii.419 (Sālūka); iii.287 (Cullatuṇḍila Mahā-tuṇḍila) Mil 118 Mil 267 Vb-a 11 (vara-sayane sayāpita). feminine sūkarī Ja ii.406 (read vañjha˚).

      1. ˚antaka a kind of girdle Vin ii.136
      • ˚maṁsa pork AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolaka)
      • ˚maddava is with Franke (Dīgha translation 222 sq.) to be interpreted as “soft (tender boar’s flesh.” So also Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922 100) & Fleet (; J.R.A.S. 1906, 656 & 881). Scarcely with Rhys Davids (; Dialogues of the Buddha ii.137, with note) as “quantity of truffles DN ii.127 Ud 81f. Mil 175
      • ˚potaka the young of a pig Ja v.19
      • ˚sāli a kind of wild rice Ja vi.531 (variant reading sukasāli)
      Sanskrit sūkara, perhaps as sū + kara; cp. Avestan hū pig, Latin sūs; Anglo-Saxon sū = English sow
    Sūkarika
    1. a pig-killer, pork-butcher SN ii.257 AN ii.207 AN iii.303 Pug 56 Thag 2, 242 Ja vi.111 Thag-a 204
    from sūkara; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit saukarika Divy 505
    Sūcaka
    1. an informer, slanderer SN ii.257 (= pesuñña-kāraka Commentary ) Snp 246 cp. saṁ˚
    from sūc to point out
    Sūcana
    neuter indicating, exhibiting Dhtp 592 (for gandh.
    Sūci
    feminine

    a needle Vin ii.115 117, 177 SN ii.215f. 257 Ja i.111 Ja i.248 Vism 284 (in simile); a hairpin Thag 2, 254 Ja i.9 a small door-bolt, a pin to secure the bolt MN i.126 Thag 2, 116 Ja i.360 Ja v.294 (so for suci) Thag-a 117 cross-bar of a rail, railing cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit sūcī Divy 221

    1. DN ii.179
    1. ˚kāra a needle-maker SN ii.216
    • ˚ghaṭikā a small bolt to a door Vin ii.237 Ud 52 AN iv.206 Ja i.346 vi.444; Vism 394
    • ˚ghara a needle case Vin ii.301f. iv.123, 167 SN ii.231 Ja i.170
    • ˚nāḷikā a needle-case made of bamboo Vin ii.116
    • ˚mukha “needle-mouthed, a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort of intestinal worm; ˚ā pāṇā (in the Gūthaniraya purgatory) MN iii.185
    • ˚loma needle-haired, having hair like needles SN ii.257 name of a Yakkha at Gayā SN i.207 Snp p. 48 Snp-a 551 Vism 208
    • ˚vatta needle-faced, having a mouth like a needle Pgdp 55
    • ˚vāṇijaka a needle-seller SN ii.215
    cp. Sanskrit sūci; doubtful whether to sīv
    Sūcikā
    feminine
    1. a needle; (figuratively) hunger Pv ii.83 Pv-a 107
    2. a small bolt to a door Vin ii.120 148. sūcik'aṭṭha whose bones are like needles (?) Pv iii.23 Pv-a 180 (sūcigātā ti vā pāṭho. Vijjhanatthena sūcikā ti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya ajjhāpīḷitā. Sūcikaṇṭhā ti keci paṭhanti. Sūcichiddasadisā mukhadvārā ti attho)
    from sūci
    Sūju
    adjective
    1. upright Snp 143 = Kh ix.1 (= suṭṭhu uju Kp-a 236)
    su + uju
    Sūṇā
    feminine a slaughter-house Ja vi.62 ‣See sūnā.
    Sūta
    1. a charioteer Ja iv.408 a bard, panegyrist Ja i.60 Ja v.258
    Sanskrit sūta
    Sūtighara
    neuter
    1. a lying-in-chamber Ja iv.188 Ja vi.485 Vism 259 (KhA pasūti˚) Vb-a 33 242
    sūti + ghara
    Sūda
    1. a cook DN i.51 SN v.149f. Ja v.292 DN-a i.157 Vism 150 (in simile); Pv ii.937, 950. Sudaka = suda
    Sanskrit sūda; for etymology ‣See sādu
    Sūdaka = sūda
    1. (cook) Ja v.507
    Sūna
    1. swollen Mil 35719 Ja vi.555 often wrongly spelt suna (q.v.) Vin ii.253 = AN iv.275 (cp. Leumann Götechnical term Anz., 1899, p. 595) Dhs-a 197 (suna-bhāva)
    Sanskrit śūna
    Sūnā
    feminine
    1. a slaughter-house Vin i.202 Vin ii.267
    • asisūnā the same Vin ii.26 MN i.130 MN i.143 also sūna Ja vi.111 and sūṇā Ja v.303
    • sūnāpaṇa Ja vi.111
    • sūnaghara Vin iii.59
    • sūna-nissita Vin iii.151
    • sūnakāraghara Vb-a 252
    Sanskrit sūnā
    Sūnu
    1. a son, child Mhvs 38, 87
    Vedic sūnu, from , cp. sūti
    Sūpa
    1. broth, soup, curry Vin ii.77 214 sq. iv.192 DN i.105 SN v.129f. (their various flavours) AN iii.49 (aneka˚) Ja ii.66 Vism 343. samasūpaka with equal curry Vin iv.192 Also neuter Vin i.23921 (-āni) and
    2. feminine sūpi Ja iv.352 (bidalasūpiyo); sūpavyañjanaka a vessel for curry and sauce Vin i.240

      1. ˚vyañjana curry Ja i.197
      Vedic sūpa, cp. Anglo-Saxon sūpan = German saufen; Old High German sūf = soup
    Sūpatittha
    adjective
    1. with beautiful banks. Usually spelt su˚; , as if su + patittha ‣See patittha, e.g. Vin iii.108 Ja vi.518 Ja vi.555 (= sobhana˚) DN ii.129 Ud 83 Pv ii.120 (= sundara-tittha Pv-a 77). But sū˚; at MN i.76 MN i.283 Ap 333
    su + upatittha, the latter = tittha, cp. upavana: vana
    Sūpadhārita
    1. = su + upadhārita well-known Mil 10
    Sūpika
    1. a cook DN-a i.157 Ja vi.62 (variant reading ), 277
    sūpa + ika
    Sūpin
    adjective
    1. having curry, together with curry Ja iii.328
    from sūpa
    Sūpeyya
    neuter
    1. belonging to soup, broth, soup MN i.448 SN iii.146
    2. curry DN ii.198 Nd2 314 Dhp-a iv.209
      1. ˚paṇṇa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism 250 = Vb-a 233 Ja i.98 Ja i.99
      • ˚sāka a potherb for making curry Ja iv.445
      from sūpa = Sanskrit sūpya
    Sūyati
    1. is passive of suṇāti
    Sūra1
    1. valiant, courageous SN i.21 Ja i.262 Ja i.320 Ja ii.119 masculine a hero, a valiant man DN i.51 89; iii.59, 142, 145 sq AN iv.107 AN iv.110 Snp 831 DN-a 157 250;
    2. neuter valour SN v.227 read sūriya.

      1. ˚kathā a tale about heroes DN i.8 DN-a i.90
      • ˚kāka the valiant crow Dhp-a iii.352
      • ˚bhāva strength, valour Ja i.130 Vism 417 (in definition of suriya)
      Vedic śūra, from śū
    Sūra2
    1. the sun Thag-a 150 (Ap v.90) Ja v.56
    Vedic sūra
    Sūrata
    1. soft, mild Ja vi.286 Mhbv.75; kindly disposed SN iv.305 cp. surata & sorata;
    = surata
    Sūrin
    adjective
    1. wise Mhvs 26, 23
    from sūra1
    Sūriya
    neuter
    1. valour SN v.227 (text, sūra) Ja i.282 Mil 4
    abstract from sūra1
    Sūla
    1. (m. and neuter
    2. a sharp-pointed instrument, a stake Thag 2, 488 SN v.411 Pv iv.16; Vism 489 (in compar.), 646 (khadira˚, ayo˚, suvaṇṇa˚) Thag-a 288 Ja i.143 Ja i.326 sūle uttāseti to impale AN i.48 Ja i.326 ii.443; iv.29; appeti the same Ja iii.34 Ja vi.17 or āropeti Pv-a 220
    3. ayasūla an iron stake Ja iv.29 Snp 667 cp. asi˚ & satti˚;
    4. a spit Ja i.211 roasted on a spit, roasted meat Ja iii.220
    5. maṁsa˚ the same, or perhaps a spit with roasted meat Ja iii.52 Ja iii.220
    6. an acute, sharp pain Dhs-a 397

      • sūlā
      • feminine the same. AN v.1105 cp. definition of sūl as “rujā” at Dhtp 272.

        1. ˚āropana impaling, execution Mil 197 Mil 290
        • ˚koṭi the point of the stake Dhp-a ii.240
        cp. Vedic śūla
    Sūḷāra
    adjective
    1. magnificent Mhvs 28, 1
    su + uḷāra
    Sūsūyati
    1. to make a hissing sound “sū sū” (of a snake) Dhp-a ii.257 (variant reading susumāyati)
    denominative from sū
    Se
    1. (pronoun ) = taṁ ‣See under sa2.

    Seka
    1. sprinkling Ja i.93 (suvaṇṇa-rasa-s.piñjara)
    from sic ‣See siñcati
    Sekata
    neuter
    1. a sandbank Dāvs i.32
    Sanskrit saikata
    Sekadhārī
    feminine (?) Ja vi.536 (nīlapupphi—˚, Commentary nīlapupphīti ādikā pupphavalliyo).
    Sekha
    (& sekkha)
    1. belonging to training, in want of training, imperfect Vin i.17 248; iii.24 Dhs 1016 one who has still to learn, denotes one who has not yet attained Arahantship DN ii.143 MN i.4 MN i.144 AN i.63 Pug 14 Iti 9f. 53, 71 Snp 970 Snp 1038 = SN ii.47 definition AN i.231 SN v.14 SN v.145 SN v.175 SN v.229 sq., 298, 327 Nd1 493 (sikkhatī ti sekkho, etc. = Nd2 689 Vb-a 328 s. pāṭipadā the path of the student MN i.354 MN iii.76 MN iii.300 s. sīla the moral practice of the student AN i.219f.; ii.6, 86 sq.; asekha not to be trained, adept, perfect Vin i.62f.; iii.24 Pug 14 (= arahant) ‣See asekha
    1. ˚bala the strength of the disciple, of five kinds AN ii.150
    • ˚sammata esteemed to be under discipline, educated Vin iv.179
    cp. Sanskrit śaikṣa; from siks, sikkhati
    Sekhavant
    1. (?) quick Ja vi.199 (variant reading sīghavant)
    Sekhiya
    1. connected with training; s. dhamma rule of good breeding Vin iv.185f.
    from sekha
    Segālaka
    neuter
    1. a jackal’s cry AN i.187f. (˚ṁ nadati); cp. sigālika
    from sigāla
    Secanaka
    1. sprinkling Ja vi.69 negative asecanaka (q.v.)
    from seceti
    Seceti
    1. ‣See siñcati
    Secchā
    1. = sa-icchā, Sdhp 249
    Seṭṭha
    best, excellent DN i.18 DN i.99 SN iii.13 Snp 47 Snp 181 Snp 822 Snp 907 Dhp 1 Dhp 26 Ja i.443 Nd1 84 = Nd2 502 (with synonym) Ja i.88 cp. seṭṭhatara Ja v.148
    1. ˚kamma excellent, pious deeds Mhvs 59, 9
    2. ˚sammata considered the best Ja iii.111
    Seṭṭhi
    1. foreman of a guild, treasurer, banker, “City man”, wealthy merchant Vin i.15f. 271 sq.; ii.110 sq., 157 SN i.89 Ja i.122 Ja ii.367 etc. Rājagaha˚ the merchant of Rājagaha Vin ii.154 Ja iv.37 Bārāṇasi˚ the merchant of Benares Ja i.242 269; jana-pada-seṭṭhi a commercial man of the country Ja iv.37 seṭṭhi gahapati Vin i.273 SN i.92 there were families of seṭṭhis Vin i.18 Ja iv.62
    • ˚-ṭṭhāna the position of a seṭṭhi Ja ii.122 Ja ii.231 hereditary Ja i.231 243; ii.64; iii.475; iv.62 etc.; seṭṭhānuseṭṭhī treasurers and under-treasurers Vin i.18 ‣See Vinaya Texts i.102
    from seṭṭha, Sanskrit śreṣṭhin
    Seṭṭhitta
    neuter
    1. the office of treasurer or (wholesale) merchant SN i.92
    abstract from seṭṭhi
    Seṇi
    feminine
    1. a guild Vin iv.226 Ja i.267 Ja i.314 Ja iv.43 Dāvs ii.124; their number was eighteen Ja vi.22 Ja vi.427 Vb-a 466
    2. ˚-pamukha the head of a guild Ja ii.12 (text seni-)
    3. a division of an army Ja vi.583 ratha—˚ Ja vi.81 Ja vi.49 seṇimokkha the chief of an army Ja vi.371 (cp. senā and seniya)
    Classical Sanskrit śreṇi in meaning “guild”; Vedic = row
    Seta
    adjective
    1. white DN ii.297 = M i.58 Snp 689 AN iii.241 Vb-a 63 (opp kāḷa) Ja i.175 Pv-a 157 Pv-a 215. Name of a mountain in the Himālayas SN i.67 = Mil 242 an elephant of King Pasenadi AN iii.345

    -aṅga white bodied Mhvs 10, 54

  • ˚aṭṭhika literally (having white bones, (suffering from) famine cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śvetāsthi Divy 131
    1. Vin iii.6 Vin iv.23 SN iv.323 AN i.160 AN iv.279 feminine mildew Vin ii.256 Ja v.401
    2. ˚odaka clear (transparent water Pv ii.120
    3. ˚kambala white blanket Ja iv.353
    4. ˚kamma whitewashing Ja vi.432
    5. ˚kuṭṭha white leprosy Ja v.69 Ja vi.196
    6. ˚geru name of a plant Ja vi.535
    7. ˚cchatta a white parasol, an emblem of royalty DN ii.19 AN i.145 Ja i.177 Ja i.267 Pv-a 74 Dhp-a i.167 Dhp-a iii.120
    8. ˚pacchāda with white covering SN iv.292 = Ud 76 = Dhs-a 397
    9. ˚puppha “white-flowered,” name of a tree (Vitex trifolia? Ja v.422 (= piyaka)
    10. ˚vārī (& ˚vārisa); names of plants or trees Ja vi.535 Ja vi.536
    11. Vedic śveta & śvitra; cp. Avestan spaēta white; Lithuanian szaitýti to make light; Old High German hwīz = English white
  • Setaka
    adjective
    1. white, transparent DN ii.129 MN i.76 MN i.167 MN i.283
    seta + ka
    Setaccha
    1. a tree Ja vi.535 setacchakūṭa adjective Ja vi.539 (sakuṇa)
    Setapaṇṇi
    feminine? a tree Ja vi.335
    Seti
    sayati;
    1. [śī, Vedic śete & śayate; cp. Avestan saēte = Sanskrit ā-śayānah, to put to sleep; Anglo-Saxon hāēman to marry; also Latin cīvis = citizen
    • The Dhtp simply defines as saya (374) to lie down, to sleep; (applied) to be in a condition, to dwell, behave etc
    • Pres. seti SN i.41 SN i.47 SN i.198 (kiṁ sesi why do you lie asleep? cp. Pv ii.61) Ja i.141 Dhp 79 Dhp 168 Snp 200 Vv-a 42
    • sayati Vin i.57 Ja ii.53 DN-a i.261 Pot. sayeyya Pv ii.3,9 & saye Iti 120 ppr sayaṁ Iti 82 117 Snp 193
    • sayāna (med.) DN i.90 DN ii.292 MN i.57 Iti 117 Snp 1145 & semāna DN ii.24 MN i.88 SN i.121 Ja i.180 also sayamāna Thag 1, 95
    • Fut sessati SN i.83 Snp 970 Dhp-a i.320
    • aorist sesi Ja v.70
    • settha Snp 970
    • sayi Ja vi.197 asayittha Ja i.335
    • Inf sayituṁ Pv-a 157
    • absolutive sayitvā Ja ii.77
    • past participle sayita (q.v.)
    • causative II. sayāpeti to make lie down, to bed on a couch etc. Ja i.245 Ja v.461 Mhvs 31, 35 Pv-a 104-
    • past participle sayāpita
    • sukhaṁ seti to be at ease or happy SN i.212 Ja v.242 (raṭṭhaṁ i.e. is prosperous); opp dukkhaṁ s. to be miserable AN i.137
    Setu
    1. a causeway bridge Vin i.230 = DN ii.89 Ja i.199 Vism 412 (simile) Dhp-a i.83 Snp-a 357 Pv-a 102 Pv-a 151 Pv-a 215. uttāra˚- a bridge for crossing over MN i.134 SN iv.174 Mil 194
    • naḷa—˚ a bamboo bridge Thag 1, 7

      1. ˚kāraka a bridge-maker, one who paves the way SN i.33 Kv.345
      2. ˚ghāta pulling down of the bridge (leading to something) Vin i.59 Vin iii.6 AN i.220 AN i.261 ii.145 sq. Dhs 299 Dhs-a 219 DN-a i.305 Nd2 462 Dhp-a iv.36
      Vedic setu, to si or ‣See sinoti; cp. Avestan haētu dam; Latin saeta; Anglo-Saxon sāda rope; etc.
    Seda
    1. sweat DN ii.293 AN ii.67f. Iti 76 Snp 196 Ja i.118 Ja i.138 Ja i.146 Ja i.243 in detaiḷ (physiologically) at Vism 262, 360 Vb-a 66 245 sweating for medicinal purposes, mahā˚ a great steambath; sambhāra˚ bringing about sweating by the use of herbs, etc.; seda-kamma sweating Vin i.205
    • pl sedā drops of perspiration Dhp-a i.253
    1. ˚āvakkhitta earned in the sweat of the brow AN ii.67f. iii.45, 76; iv.95, 282
    2. ˚gata sweat-covered, sweating Vv-a 305
    • ˚mala the stain of sweat Ja iii.290 Vb-a 276
    • ˚yūsa sweat Vism 195
    Vedic sveda, from svid, cp. Avestan xvaēda, Latin sudor, Anglo-Saxon svāt = English sweat
    Sedaka
    adjective
    1. sweating, transpiring DN ii.265
    from seda
    Sedita
    1. moistened Ja i.52 (su˚). cp. pari˚
    past participle of sedeti
    Sedeti
    1. to cause to transpire, to heat, to steam Ja iv.238 Ja v.271 Kp-a 52, 67 Vin iii.82 (aorist sedesi);
    2. absolutive sedetvā Ja i.324 Ja ii.74
    3. past participle sedita. Caus II sedāpeti Ja iii.122
    4. causative of sijjati
    Sena1
    1. lying, sleeping; couch, bed Ja v.96 (= sayana)
    = sayana
    Sena2
    1. a hawk Ja i.273 Ja ii.51 Ja ii.60 Dhp-a ii.267
    Sanskrit śyena
    Senaka1
    1. a carter Thag-a 271 (= sākaṭika of Thag 2, 443)
    Senaka2
    1. = sena2 Ja iv.58 Ja iv.291 Ja vi.246
    Senā
    1. an army Vin i.241 Vin iv.104f. (where described as consisting of hatthī assā, rathā, pattī), 160 SN i.112 AN iii.397 AN v.82 Ja ii.94 Mil 4 Nd1 95 (Māra˚), 174 (identical)

    -gutta sena˚

    1. a high official, a minister of war, only in compound mahā—˚ Ja vi.2 Ja vi.54 mahāsenaguttaṭṭhāna the position of a generalissimo Ja v.115
    • ˚nāyaka a general Vin i.73
    • ˚pacca the position as general Mhvs 38, 81 -pati a general Vin i.233f. Snp 556 AN iii.38 AN iv.79 Ja i.133 Ja iv.43
    • dhamma—˚ a general of the Dhamma Mil 343 Dhp-a iii.305
    • ˚patika a general AN iii.76 AN iii.78 AN iii.300
    • ˚byūha massing of troops, grouping & fitting up an army Vin iv.107 DN i.6 Ps ii.213 DN-a i.85 (-vyūha)
    Vedic senā2 perhaps from si to bind
    Senānī
    1. a general; only in compound ˚-kuṭilatā strategy (literally crookedness of a general) Dhs-a 151
    Senāsana
    neuter
    1. sleeping and sitting, bed & chair, dwelling, lodging Vin i.196 294, 356; ii.146 150 (˚parikkhāra-dussa); iii.88 etc. DN ii.77 AN i.60 Iti 103 109 DN-a i.208 Ja i.217 Vb-a 365 (= seti c'eva āsati ca etthā ti senāsanaṁ) ‣See also panta
    1. ˚gāha allotment of lodging-places Vin ii.167
    • ˚gāhāpaka house-steward Vin ii.167
    • ˚cārikā a wandering from lodging to lodging Vin i.182 203; iii.21; Ja 126 -paññāpaka regulator of lodging-places Vin ii.75 176 iii.158 sq.; iv.38
    • ˚paṭibāhana keeping out of the lodging Ja i.217
    • ˚paviveka secluson in respect of lodging AN i.240f. -vatta rule of conduct in respect of dwelling Vin ii.220
    sayana + āsana
    Seniya
    1. belonging to an army, soldier Ja i.314
    from senā
    Senesika
    1. at Vin i.200 is to be read senehika (from sineha), i.e. greasy
    Sepaṇṇī
    feminine
    1. name of a tree, Gmelina arborea Ja i.173 Ja i.174 Dhp-a i.145
    Sanskrit śrīparṇī, literally having lucky leaves
    Semānaka
    1. lying Thag 1, 14 Dhp-a i.16
    semāna + ka; ppr. of seti
    Semha
    neuter
    1. phlegm Vin ii.137 DN ii.14 DN ii.293 AN ii.87 AN iii.101 AN iv.320 Snp 198 Snp 434 Mil 112 Mil 303 Physiologically in detail at Vism 359 Vb-a 65 244
    = silesuma
    Semhāra
    1. some sort of animal (monkey?) (explained by makkaṭa) MN i.429
    Semhika
    adjective
    1. a man of phlegmatic humour Mil 298
    from semha
    Seyya
    adjective
    1. better, excellent; nominative masc. seyyo SN iii.48f. Snp 918 Dhp 308 Dhs 1116 Ja i.180 nominative feminine seyyasi Ja v.393 nominative neut. seyyo often used as a noun, meaning good, happiness, wellbeing Vin i.33 DN i.184 DN ii.330 Snp 427 Snp 440 Dhp 76 Dhp 100 Ja ii.44 Ja vi.4 (maraṇaṁ eva seyyo, with ablative of compar. rajjato); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṁ); iv.16 (jīvitaṁ) nominative
    2. feminine seyyā Ja v.94 nominative
    3. accusative neutr. seyyaṁ Ja ii.402 iii.237; ablative as
    4. adverb seyyaso “still better” Dhp 43 Ja ii.402 Ja iv.241 Superl. seṭṭha
    5. Sanskrit śreyas, compar. formn
    Seyyaka
    adjective
    1. lying MN i.433 ‣See uttānaseyyaka and gabbhaseyyaka
    from seyyā
    Seyyati
    1. to crush Ja i.174 ‣See also sarati3 & vi˚; . past participle siṇṇa ‣See vi˚;
    2. śṛ; , Vedic śṛṇāti & śīryate
    Seyyathā
    adverb
    1. as, just as, s. pi Vin i.5 DN i.45 Iti 90 113 Ja i.339
    • seyyathīdaṁ as follows “i.e.” or “viz.” Vin i.10 DN i.89 DN ii.91 SN v.421 Iti 99
    = taṁ yathā, with Māgadhī se˚ for ta˚; cp. sayathā & taṁyathā
    Seyyā
    feminine
    1. a bed, couch MN i.502 AN i.296 Vin ii.167 (˚aggena by the surplus in beds) Snp 29 Snp 152 Snp 535 Dhp 305 Dhp 309; Pv ii.311; iv.12 Ja vi.197 (gilāna sick-bed). Four kinds AN ii.244 Vb-a 345
    • seyyaṁ kappeti to lie down Vin iv.15 18 sq

      • Combd with āvasatha, e.g. at AN ii.85 AN ii.203 AN iii.385 AN iv.60 AN v.271 sq-As—˚ used in adjective sense of “lying down, resting, viz. ussūra˚; sleeping beyond sunrise DN iii.184 = Dhp-a ii.227
      • divā˚ noon-day rest DN i.112 DN i.167
      • sīha˚ like a lion DN ii.134 AN iv.87
      • dukkha˚ sleeping uncomfortably Dhp-a iv.8
      Sanskrit śayyā; from śī
    Seritā
    feminine
    1. independence, freedom Snp 39f.
    from serin
    Serin
    adjective
    1. self-willed, independent, according to one’s liking MN i.506 Thag 1, 1144 Pv iv.187 Ja i.5
    cp. Sanskrit svairin
    Serivihāra
    adjective
    1. lodging at one’s own choice MN i.469f.; Vism 66 (˚sukhaṁ)
    serin + vihāra
    Serīsaka
    adjective
    1. made of Sirīsa wood, name of a hall DN ii.356f. Vv 8453 Vv-a 331 351
    from sirīsa
    Serīsamaha
    1. a festival in honour of the Serīsaka Vimāna Vv.8437, 53
    Sereyyaka
    1. name of a tree (Barleria cristata) Ja iii.253
    Sela
    1. rocky Dhp 8 masculine rock, stone, crystal SN i.127 DN ii.39 AN iii.346 Dhp 81 Ja ii.14 Vin i.4f.; iii.147 Ja ii.284

      1. ˚guḷa a rocky ball Ja i.147
      • ˚maya made of rock (crystal?), of the bowl of the Buddha Snp-a 139 159
      from silā
    Selaka
    1. “rocky,” a kind of copper (cp. pisāca) Vb-a 63
    sela + ka
    Seḷita
    (selita)
    1. shouting, noise, row Ja ii.218 To this belongs the doubtful derivation selissaka neuter noise row, mad pranks at SN iv.117 (variant reading seleyyaka)
    2. past participle of seḷeti
    Seḷeti
    1. to make a noise, shout, cry exultantly Snp 682 Ja v.67 Bu i.36. past participle seḷita

      • Other, different explains of the word ‣See in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1885, p. 54
      according to Kern, Toevoegselen ii.78 for sveḷayati, cp. Old Irish fét whistle, music etc. Indogermanic *sveiƶd
    Sevaka
    1. serving, following; a servant, dependent Ja ii.12 Ja ii.125 Ja ii.420 Snp-a 453 ‣See vipakkha˚;
    Sevati
    1. to serve, associate with, resort to Vin ii.203 AN i.124f. Snp 57 Snp 75 Pug 33 Iti 107 Ja iii.525 Snp-a 169
    2. to practice, embrace, make use of Vin i.10 = SN v.421 DN iii.157 SN i.12 MN iii.45 Dhp 167 Dhp 293 Dhp 310 Snp 72 Snp 391 Snp 927 Nd1 383 481 Ja i.152 Ja i.361
    3. aorist asevissaṁ Ja iv.178
    4. past participle sevita ‣See ā˚, vi˚;
    sev
    Sevanatā
    1. (—˚) feminine

      1. = sevanā Vb-a 282f.
      abstr, from sevati
    Sevanā
    feminine
    1. following, associating with Snp 259 Dhs 1326 Pug 20 Dhtp 285 (as neuter ; cohabiting Vin iii.29
    2. from sevati
    Sevā
    feminine
    1. service, resorting to SN i.110 Thag-a 179
    from sev
    Sevāla
    1. the plant Blyxa octandra moss, AN iii.187 AN iii.232 AN iii.235 Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144 Ja iii.520 Ja iv.71 Ja v.462 Mil 35 Dhp-a iii.199 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 12 (in sim.). (m. and neuter Ja v.37
    2. ˚mālaka (or -mālika who makes garlands of Blyxa octandra. AN v.263 SN iv.312

      • Often combined with another waterplant paṇaka ‣See under paṇṇaka, e.g. AN iii.187 Vism 261 (simile) Vb-a 244 (identical); Kp-a 61 (cp. Schubring, Kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.)
      cp. Epic Sanskrit śaivala & saivāla
    Sevin
    adjective
    1. serving, practising Snp 749 Iti 54 ‣See vipakkha˚;
    from sev
    Seveti
    to cause to fall, to throw down Ja iii.198 (doubtful; C-explains as pāteti & gives saveti
    1. as gloss; variant reading also sādeti)
    = sāveti, causative of; sru to make glide
    Sesa
    1. remaining, left DN ii.48 Snp 217 Snp 354 Ja ii.128 neuter remainder Pv-a 14 Pv-a 70; ˚-ka the same Mhvs 10, 36 22, 42; 25, 19
    2. from śiṣ
    Seseti
    1. ‣See sissati
    Sessan, sessati
    1. ‣See seti
    Sehi
    1. is instrumental plural of sa4 (his own): Dhp 136 Dhp-a iii.64
    Soka
    1. [from śuc, to gleam (which to the Dhtp however is known only in meaning “soka”: Dhtp 39); cp. Vedic śoka the flame of fire, later in sense of “burning grief” grief, sorrow, mourning; defined as “socanā socitattaṁ anto-soko … cetaso parijjhāyanā domanassaṁ” at Ps i.38 = Nd1 128 = Nd2 694; shorter as “ñāti-vyasan’ ādīhi phuṭṭhassa citta-santāpo” at Vism 503 = Vb-a cp. the following: Vin i.6 DN i.6 DN ii.305 DN ii.103 SN i.110 SN i.123 SN i.137 AN i.51 AN i.144 AN ii.21 AN v.141 Snp 584 Snp 586 Ja i.189 Snp-a 155 Dhp-a ii.166 Kp-a 153 (abbūḷha˚) Pv i.43 (= citta-santāpa Pv-a 18) Pv-a 6 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 42 Pv-a 61
    • asoka without grief ‣See viraja ‣See also dukkha B iii.1 b
    1. ˚aggi the fire of sorrow Pv-a 41 plural -divasā the days of mourning (at the king’s court after the death of the queen) Snp-a 89
    2. ˚parideva sorrow and lamenting AN iii.32 AN iii.326f.; v.216 sq.; Vism 503 Nd1 128
    3. ˚pariddava identical Vv 8430
    4. ˚pareta overcome with grief Pv i.86-vinaya dispelling of grief Pv-a 39
    5. ˚vinodana identical Pv-a 61
    6. ˚salla the dart or sting of sorrow AN iii.54 AN iii.58 Nd1 59 414 Pv i.86 Pv-a 93 Pv-a 162.

    Sokajjhāyikā
    feminine
    1. a woman who plays the fool, a comedian Vin iv.285 Ja vi.580 (where Commentary explains as “grief-dispellers”)
    soka + ajjhāyaka; this soka perhaps *sūka, as in visūka?
    Sokavant
    adjective
    1. sorrowful Mhvs 19, 15
    soka + vant
    Sokika
    adjective
    1. sorrowful; a—˚ free from sorrow Thag-a 229
    soka + ika
    Sokin
    adjective
    1. (feminine ˚nī) sorrowful Dhp 28
    2. from soka
    Sokhya
    neuter
    1. happiness Snp 61 Ja v.205
    abstract derived from sukha
    Sokhumma
    neuter
    1. fineness, minuteness AN ii.17 Thag 1, 437 At AN ii.18 with double suffix ˚tā
    abstract from sukhuma
    Sogandhika
    neuter
    1. the white water-lily (Nymphaea lotus) Ja v.419 Ja vi.518 537 (seta-sogandhiyehi)
    • As
    • masculine designation of a purgatory. AN v.173 SN i.152 Snp p. 126
    Sanskrit saugandhika; from sugandha
    Socati
    1. to mourn, grieve Snp 34 Dhp 15 Ja i.168 Pv i.87 (+ rodati); i.1015; i.122 Mil 11 pres 3rd
    2. plural socare Snp 445 Dhp 225 ppr. socamāna Ja ii.75 ppr. asocaṁ not grieving SN i.116 mā soci do not sorrow DN ii.144 Ja vi.190 plur. mā socayittha do not grieve DN ii.158
    3. causative socayati to cause to grieve DN i.52 SN i.116 Thag 1, 743 (
    4. absolutive ˚ayitvā) Mil 226
    5. soceti Ja ii.8
    6. pp socita.
    7. causative II. socāpayati the same SN i.116
    8. Vedic śocati, śuc, said of the gleaming of a fire
    Socana
    neuter
    1. sorrow, mourning Pv-a 18 Pv-a 62
    2. ˚nā feminine the same DN ii.306 SN i.108 = Sn 34 Nd2 694
    3. from śuc
    Socita
    neuter
    1. grief Thag 2, 462
    from socati
    Socitatta
    neuter sorrowfulness DN ii.306 Ps i.38 = Nd2 694.
    Socin
    1. grieving AN iv.294 (socī ca = socicca)
    from socati
    Sociya
    1. deplorable Sdhp 262
    = Sanskrit śocya
    Soceyya
    neuter
    1. purity SN i.78 AN i.94 AN ii.188 AN v.263 Vism 8 Ja i.214 Mil 115 Mil 207 is threefold AN i.271 Iti 55 DN iii.219 further subdivided. AN v.264 AN v.266f. In meaning of “cleaning, washing given in the Dhtp as definition of roots for washing, bathing etc. (khal, nahā, sinā, sudh)
    abstract from śuc, *śaucya
    Sojacca
    neuter
    1. nobility, high birth Ja ii.137
    abstract from sujāta
    Soṇa1
    1. a dog Ja i.146 Ja vi.107 (= sunakha) Snp 675 Vism 191 Dhp-a iii.255 (+ sigāla); soṇi feminine a bitch Mhvs 7, 8 = sona Iti 36
    2. ‣See suvāṇa
    Soṇa2
    1. a kind of tree; the Bodhi trees of the Buddhas Paduma and Nārada Bu ix.22; x.24 Ja i.36 Ja i.37
    cp. śyonāka
    Soṇita
    neuter
    1. blood Thag 2, 467 DN-a i.120 Vism 259
    Sanskrit śoṇita, from śoṇa red
    Soṇī
    feminine
    1. the buttock Snp 609 Ja v.155 Ja v.216 Ja v.302
    2. a bitch ‣See soṇa1
    cp. Sanskrit śroṇī
    Soṇḍa
    1. addicted to drink, intoxicated, a drunkard DN ii.172 Ja v.436 Ja v.499 Mil 345 Vism 316 a-soṇḍa AN iii.38 AN iv.266 Ja v.166 (feminine -ī) itthisoṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112 (? better “one who is addicted to women” Snp-a 172 explains to that effect, cp. Ja ii.431 itthi-surā-maṁsa-soṇḍa); yuddhasoṇḍa Ja i.204 dāsi-soṇḍa a libertine Ja v.436 (+ surā˚) dhamma-soṇḍatā affectionate attachment to the law Ja v.482
    2. cp. Sanskrit śauṇḍa
    Soṇḍaka
    1. in compound surā˚; a drunkard Ja v.433 Ja vi.30
    soṇḍa + ka
    Soṇḍā
    feminine
    1. an elephant’s trunk Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 MN i.415 AN iv.87 (uccā˚ figuratively of a bhikkhu] Ja i.50 Ja i.187 Ja iv.91 v.37 Dhp-a i.58 Mil 368
    • soṇḍa (m. the same SN i.104
    Sanskrit śuṇḍā
    Soṇḍika
    1. a distiller and seller of spirituous liquors MN i.228 = 374
    2. a drunkard Mil 93
    from soṇḍa
    Soṇḍikā

    feminine

  • tendril of a creeper SN i.106 Mil 374 - 2. peppered meat SN ii.98 (cp. Sanskrit śauṇḍī long pepper).

    • in udaka˚; Kp-a 65 (= sondī1) a tank
  • Soṇḍī1
    1. feminine a natural tank in a rock Ja i.462 Dhp-a ii.56 (soṇḍi); udaka—˚ Ja iv.333 Vism 119; Kp-a 65 (soṇḍikā)
    Soṇḍī2
    1. feminine the neck of a tortoise SN iv.177 (soṇḍi-pañcamāni angāni) Mil 371 the hood of a snake Ja vi.166 (nāgā soṇḍi-katā)
    Soṇṇa
    neuter
    1. gold; adjective golden Mhvs 5, 87 Vv 54 367.

      1. ˚ālaṅkāra with golden ornaments Ja ii.48
      • ˚dhaja with golden flags Ja ii.48
      • ˚bhiṅkāra a golden vase Sdhp 513
      • ˚maya golden, made of gold Ja vi.203
      • ˚vālukā gold dust Ja vi.278
      the contracted form of suvaṇṇa, cp. sovaṇṇa
    Sota1
    neuter
    1. ear, the organ of hearing Vin i.9 34 DN i.21 Snp 345 (nom plural sotā); Vism 444 (defined) Dhs 601 Dhs-a 310-dibba-sota the divine ear (cp. dibba-cakkhu) DN i.79 154; iii.38, 281; dhamma˚ the ear of the Dhamma AN iii.285f. 350; v.140 SN ii.43 sotaṁ odahati to listen (carefully) DN i.230
    2. ohita -s. with open ears AN iv.115 v.154 Ja i.129

      1. ˚añjana a kind of ointment made with antimony Vin i.203
      • ˚ānugata following on hearing, acquired by hearing AN ii.185
      • ˚āyatana the sense of hearing Dhs 601f. DN ii.243 DN ii.280 DN ii.290
      • ˚āvadhāna giving ear attention MN ii.175
      • ˚indriya the faculty of hearing Dhs 604 DN iii.239
      • ˚dvāra “door of the ear,” auditory sensation Vb-a 41
      • ˚dhātu the ear element, the ear Vin ii.299 DN i.79 SN ii.121 AN i.255 (dibba˚); iii.17 (identical); v.199 Vb 334 Vism 407 (defined) Dhs 601 604 Mil 6
      • ˚viññāṇa auditory cognition, perception through the ear Dhs 443
      • ˚viññeyya cognizable by hearing DN ii.281 Dhs 467 Kp-a 101
      Vedic śrotas & śrotra; from śru ‣See suṇāti
    Sota2
    1. masculine> & neuter

      1. stream, flood, torrent Snp 433 Iti 144 Ja i.323 sīgha-s having a quick current DN ii.132 Snp 319 metaphorically the stream of cravings Snp 715 (chinna˚; cp. MVastu iii.88 chinna-srota), 1034 SN iv.292 MN i.226 (sotaṁ chetvā) Iti 114 denotes noble eightfold path SN v.347
      2. bhava -s. torrent of rebirth SN i.15 SN iv.128 viññāṇa-s flux of mind, DN iii.105 nominative sing. soto SN iv.291f.v.347; nominative plur. sotā Snp 1034
      3. accusative plur. sotāni Snp 433 plur. sotāyo (
      4. feminine ? or wrong reading instead of sotāso, sotāse?) Ja iv.287 Ja iv.288
      5. passage, aperture (of body, as eyes, ears, etc.), in kaṇṇa˚; orifice of the ear, and nāsa˚; nostril, e.g. DN i.106 Snp p. 108 Ja i.163 Ja i.164 (heṭṭhā-nāsika-s.); Vism 400 (dakkhiṇa˚ vāma-kaṇṇa-s.)
        1. ˚āpatti entering upon the stream, i.e. the noble eightfold path (SN v.347), conversion Vin ii.93 etc. By it the first three Saṁyojanas are broken SN v.357 SN v.376 It has four phases (angas): faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Order, and, further, the noble Sīlas SN ii.68f.; v.362 sq. AN iii.12 AN iv.405 DN iii.227 (in detail). Another set of four angas consists of sappurisa-saṁsevā, saddhammasavana, yonisomanasikāra, and dhammânudhammapaṭipatti SN v.347 SN v.404 -phala the effect of having entered upon the stream, the fruit of conversion Vin i.293 Vin ii.183 MN i.325 AN i.44 AN iii.441 iv.292 sq., 372 sq. DN i.229 DN iii.227 SN iii.168 SN iii.225 SN v.410 sq. Pug 13 Dhp-a iii.192 Dhp-a iv.5 Pv-a 22 Pv-a 38 Pv-a 66 Pv-a 142. -magga the way to conversion, the lower stage of conversion DN-a i.237 Ja i.97 Vb-a 307 ‣See magga -āpanna one who has entered the stream, a convert Vin ii.161 240; iii.10 DN i.156 DN iii.107f. 132, 227 AN ii.89 SN ii.68 SN iii.203f. 225 sq.; v.193 sq. DN-a i.313 Vism 6, 709 Pv-a 5 Pv-a 153. The converted is endowed with āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, and ādhipateyya SN v.390 he is called wealthy and glorious SN v.402 conversion excludes rebirth in purgatory, among animals and petas, as well as in other places of misery; he is a-vinipāta-dhamma : DN i.156 DN ii.200 SN v.193f. 343 AN i.232 AN ii.238 AN iii.331f.; iv.405 sq., v.182 MN iii.81 or khīṇa-niraya : AN iii.211 AN iv.405f. (+ khīṇa-tiracchānayoni etc.). The converted man is sure to attain the sambodhi (niyato sambodhipārāyano DN i.156 discussed in Dialogues of the Buddha i.190
        1. -192)
        Vedic srotas, nt., from; sru ‣See savati
    Sotatta
    1. scorched Ja i.390 = M i.79, read so tatto (cp. MN i.536) ‣See sosīta
    Sotar
    1. a hearer DN i.56 AN ii.116 AN iii.161 sq
    • sotā used as a
    • feminine noun Thag-a 200 (Ap v.3)
    agent noun from suṇāti
    Sotavant
    1. having ears, nominative plural sotavanto SN i.138 Vin i.7 DN ii.39
    2. sota1 + vant
    Sotukāma
    1. wish or wishing to hear AN i.150 AN iv.115 Vism 444; feminine abstract ˚kamyatā desire to listen. AN v.145f. Snp-a 135
    2. sotuṁ (= infinitive of suṇāti) + kāma
    Sotta
    1. asleep SN i.170
    past participle of supati, for sutta
    Sotti
    feminine
    1. a shell (?) filled with chunam and lac, used for scratching the back, a back-scratcher acting as a sponge MN ii.46 AN i.208 ‣See sutti e.g. Vin ii.107
    Sanskrit śukti
    Sottiya
    1. well versed in sacred learning, a learned man MN i.280 Snp 533f. ‣See sotthiya
    = *śrotriya
    Sottun
    1. ‣See supati
    Sotthāna
    neuter
    1. blessing, well-fare Snp 258 AN iv.271 AN iv.285 Ja v.29 (where the metre requires sotthayanaṁ, as at iv.75); vi.139
    cp. Sanskrit svastyayana
    Sotthi
    feminine
    1. well-being, safety, bless ing AN iii.38 = iv.266 (“brings future happiness”) Ja i.335 s. hotu hail! DN i.96
    2. sotthiṁ in safety, safely Dhp 219 (= anupaddavena Dhp-a iii.293); Pv iv.64 (= nirupaddava Pv-a 262) Snp 269
    3. sotthinā safely prosperously DN i.72 DN i.96 DN ii.346 MN i.135 Ja ii.87 Ja iii.201
    4. suvatthi the same Ja iv.32 ‣See sotthika & sovatthika; .

      1. ˚kamma a blessing Ja i.343
      • ˚kāra an utterer of blessings, a herald Ja vi.43
      • ˚gata safe wandering, prosperous journey Mhvs 8, 10; sotthigamana the same Ja i.272
      • ˚bhāva well-being, prosperity, safety Ja i.209 iii.44 Dhp-a ii.58 Pv-a 250
      • ˚vācaka utterer of blessings a herald Mil 359
      • ˚sālā a hospital Mhvs 10, 101
      Sanskrit svasti = su + asti
    Sotthika
    1. (& ˚iya) adjective

      happy, auspicious, blessed, safe Vv-a 95 Dhp-a ii.227 (˚iya; in phrase dīgha˚ one who is happy for long ?

      1. )
      from sotthi
    Sotthiya1 = sottiya
    1. a learned man, a brahmin Dhp 295 Thag-a 200 (Ap v.6) Ja iv.301 Ja iv.303 Ja v.466
    Sotthiya2
    neuter
    1. a childbirth rag Vism 63
    der.?
    Sotthivant
    adjective
    1. lucky, happy, safe Vv 8452
    sotthi + vant
    Sodaka
    adjective
    1. containing water Mhvs 30, 38; 37, 200
    sa + udaka
    Sodariya
    adjective
    1. having a common origin (in the same mother’s womb), born of the same mother a brother Ja i.308 Ja iv.434 Pv-a 94 (bhātā)
    sa + udariya
    Sodhaka
    1. one who cleanses Mhvs 10, 90 Pv-a 7
    from sodheti
    Sodhana
    neuter
    1. cleansing Vism 276 (as feminine ˚nā); examining Ja i.292 payment ‣See uddhāra Ja i.321
    2. from sodheti
    Sodheti
    1. to make clean, to purify Vin i.47 MN i.39 Dhp 141 DN-a i.261 135; to examine, search Ja i.200 Ja i.291 Ja ii.123 iii.528; to search for, to ‣Seek Ja ii.135 to clean away, to remove Ja iv.404 to correct Ja ii.48 to clear a debt: in this meaning mixed with sādheti (q.v.) in phrases iṇaṁ s. and uddhāraṁ s.; we read iṇaṁ sodheti at Pv-a 276
    • uddhāraṁ sodheti at Ja iv.45 otherwise sādheti.
    • causative II. sodhāpeti to cause to clean, to clean Vin iii.208 248 = i.206 Ja i.305 ii.19;
    • passive sodhīyati to be cleansed, to be adorned Bu ii.40 sq. = J i.12
    causative of sujjhati
    Sona
    1. dog Iti 36 ‣See soṇa
    Sopadhīka
    1. = sa + upadhika
    Sopavāhana
    1. = sa + upavāhana
    Sopāka
    1. a man of a very low caste, an outcast Snp 137 ‣See also sapāka
    = sapāka; śva + pāka
    Sopāna
    masculine and
    • neuter

      1. stairs, staircase Vin ii.117 152 DN ii.178 Ja i.330 Ja i.348 Ja iv.265 Vism 10 Vv-a 188 Pv-a 156 Pv-a 275 Vv 785 dhura-sopāna the highest step of a staircase (? Ja i.330
      1. ˚kaliṅgara flight of steps Vin ii.128 (variant reading sopāṇakaḷevara as at MN ii.92)
      2. ˚panti a flight or row of steps, a ladder Vism 392 (three)
      3. ˚pāda the foot of the steps (opposite ˚sīsa Dhp-a i.115
      • ˚phalaka a step of a staircase Ja i.330
      cp. Sanskrit sopāna; Aufrecht “sa + upāyana”
    Soppa
    neuter
    1. sleep, dream SN i.110 AN i.261 (i.e. laziness). ˚ante in a dream Ja v.329 (Commentary reading for T suppante)
    = supina
    Soppati
    1. ‣See supati
    Sobbha
    1. a hole, (deep) pit DN ii.127 MN i.11 AN i.243 AN ii.140 AN iii.389 ‣See papāta; v.114 sq. Ja vi.166 Thag 1, 229 Snp-a 355 479; a water-pool SN ii.32 Snp 720 Vism 186; as adjective at SN iii.109 (+ papāta), i.e. “deep”; kussobbha a small collection of water SN ii.32 SN ii.118 Snp 720
    • mahāsobbha the ocean SN ii.32 SN ii.118
    cp. Sanskrit śvabhra
    Sobhagga
    neuter
    1. prosperity, beauty Thag 2, 72 Ja i.51 Ja i.475 Ja ii.158 iv.133. As sobhagyatā at DN-a i.161
    abstract from subhaga
    Sobhañjana
    1. the tree Hyperanthica moringa Ja v.405 sobhañjanaka the same Ja iii.161 (= siggurukkha, Commentary ) vi.535
    Sobhaṇa1
    neuter
    1. a kind of edging on a girdle Vin ii.136
    2. beauty, ornament Mil 356
    from śubh
    Sobhaṇa2
    adjective
    1. adorning, shining, embellishing AN ii.8 AN ii.225 very often spelt sobhana Ja i.257 Thag-a 244
    2. nagara-sobhaṇā (or ˚iṇī a courtesan Ja ii.367 iii.435, 475 Mil 350 Pv-a 4
    3. good Mil 46 (text ˚na); Compendium 96; 101; 106
    from śubh
    Sobhati
    1. to shine, to be splendid, look beautiful Ja i.89 Ja ii.93
    2. sobhetha let your light shine (with following yaṁ “in that …”) Vin i.187 349 = ii.162 Ja iii.487 = SN i.217 ppr. ˚māna Vism 58.
    3. aorist sobhi Ja i.143
    4. causative sobheti to make resplendent, adorn, grace AN ii.7 Snp 421 Ja i.43 Mil 1 Vism 79 (ppr. sobhayanto); to make clear DN ii.105
    5. śubh, Vedic śobhate
    Sobhanagaraka
    neuter a kind of game, fairy scenes DN i.6 DN i.13 DN-a i.84
    Sobhā
    feminine
    1. splendour, radiance, beauty Mhvs 33, 30 Ja iv.333 Thag-a 226 Mil 356
    from śubh; Sanskrit śobhā
    Sobhiya
    1. a sort of magician or trickster, clown Ja vi.277 (sobhiyā ti nagarasobhanā sampannarūpā purisā; not correct Commentary )
    cp. Sanskrit śaubhika; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit śobhika MVastu iii.113
    Somanassa
    neuter
    1. mental ease, happiness, joy DN i.3 DN ii.278 DN iii.270 MN i.85 MN i.313 SN iv.232 AN ii.69 AN iii.207 AN iii.238 Dhp 341 Snp 67 Pug 59 Vb-a 73 Pv-a 6 Pv-a 14 Pv-a 133 DN-a i.53 it is more than sukha DN ii.214 defined at Vism 461 (iṭṭh'ārammaṇ’ ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṁ, etc.). A synonym of it is veda 1 On term ‣See also Compendium 277
    1. ˚indriya the faculty of pleasure DN iii.224 SN v.209f. Dhs 18
    from su + mano; cp. domanassa
    Somanassita
    adjective
    1. satisfied, pleased, contented Vv-a 351
    causative past participle formation from somanassa
    Somarukkha
    1. a certain species of tree Ja vi.530
    soma + rukkha
    Sombhā
    feminine a puppet, doll Thag 2, 390 explained as sombhakā Thag-a 257
    Somma
    adjective
    1. pleasing, agreeable, gentle Dāvs i.42 DN-a i.247 Dhs-a 127 Vv-a 205 Snp-a 456 Vism 168
    Sanskrit saumya, from soma
    Soracca
    neuter
    1. gentleness, restraint, meekness AN ii.68 AN ii.113 AN iii.248 SN i.100 SN i.172 SN i.222 Snp 78 Snp 292 Dhs 1342 Ja iii.442 Ja iv.302 Mil 162 Vv-a 347 Often combined with khanti forbearance (q.v.)
    • soracciya
    • neuter the same Ja iii.453
    from sorata
    Sorata
    adjective [= su + rata, with so˚ for sū˚, which latter is customary for su˚ before r (cp. dūr˚ for dur˚) ‣See du1 2 and Geiger, Pali Grammar § 11
    • The (B) Sanskrit is sūrata gentle, kind, humble, self-restrained MN i.125 SN i.65 SN iv.305 (text, sūrata) AN ii.43 AN iii.349 AN iii.393f. Snp 309 Snp 515 Snp 540Ja iv.303 Dhp-a i.56
    Soḷasa
    (numeral cardinal)
    1. sixteen DN i.128 Snp 1006 Ja i.78 (lekhā); ii.87; iii.342 (atappiya-vatthūni); v.175 vi.37 Mil 11 (palibodhā) Dhp-a i.129 (˚salākā); iv.208 (˚karīsa-matta). instrumental soḷasahi DN i.31 & soḷasehi DN i.139; genitive soḷasannaṁ Ja iv.124 Very frequent in measures of time & space.; —˚vassa˚; (16 years … Ja i.231 Ja i.285 Ja ii.43 iv.7; vi.10, 486 Dhp-a i.25 and passim The feminine ˚-sī acts as numeral ordinal “sixteenth, in phrase kalaṁ nagghati soḷasiṁ he is not worth a sixteenth particle of AN iv.252 SN iii.156 SN v.44 SN v.343 Dhp 70 Iti 19
    2. Sanskrit ṣoḍaśa
    Soḷasakkhattuṁ
    1. sixteen times DN-a i.261 Dhp-a i.353 = Mhvs 6, 37
    Soḷasama
    1. sixteenth Mhvs 2, 29; Vism 292
    Sovaggika
    adjective
    1. connected with heaven Vin i.294 DN i.51 AN ii.54 AN ii.68 AN iii.46 AN iii.51 AN iii.259 AN iv.245 SN i.90 DN-a i.158
    from sagga = *svarga; cp. the similar formation dovārika = dvāra
    Sovacassa
    neuter
    1. gentleness, suavity DN iii.267 AN ii.148 AN iii.180 Nett 40; 127; ˚-karaṇa making for gentleness MN i.96 AN ii.148 = iii.180
    from suvaca, in analogy to dovacassa
    Sovacassatā
    feminine = sovacassa MN i.126 DN iii.212 DN iii.274 AN i.83 AN iii.310 AN iii.423f. 449; iv.29 Snp 266 Dhs 1327 Pug 24
    • Sovaccasāya & sovacassiya; the same (Dhs 1327 Pug 24).

    Sovaṇṇa
    adjective
    1. golden DN ii.210 AN iv.393 Pv-a ii.121 Ja i.226
    • ˚-maya golden Vin i.39 Vin ii.116 DN ii.170 etc. Ja ii.112
    from suvaṇṇa
    Sovaṇṇaya
    adjective
    1. golden Ja i.226
    = sovaṇṇaka
    Sovatthika
    adjective
    1. safe MN i.117 Vv 187 (= sotthika Vv-a 95) Ja vi.339 (in the shape of a svastika?); Pv iv.33 (= sotthi-bhāva-vāha Pv-a 250)
    2. ˚ālaṅkāra a kind of auspicious mark Ja vi.488
    either from sotthi with diaeresis, or from su + atthi + ka = Sanskrit svastika
    Sovīraka
    neuter
    1. sour gruel Vin i.210 SN ii.111 Vv 198 PugA 232
    dialectical?
    Sosa
    1. drying up, consumption Vin i.71 Vism 345
    from śuṣ
    Sosana
    neuter
    1. causing to dry (in surgery) Mil 353
    from soseti
    Sosānika
    adjective
    1. connected with a cemetery, bier-like Vin ii.149 masculine, one who lives in or near a cemetery AN iii.220 Pug 69f. Mil 342 Vism 61 sq. Dhp-a i.69
    2. from susāna
    Sosārita
    adjective
    1. well reinstated (opposite dosārita) Vin i.322
    su + osārita
    Sosika
    adjective
    1. afflicted with pulmonary consumption Vin i.93 Vin iv.8
    from sosa
    Sosīta
    1. at Ja i.390 means either “thoroughly chilled” or “well wetted.” It is explained as “him'odakena su-sīto suṭṭhu tinto.” Perhaps we have to read so sīta, or sīna (cp. sīna2), or sinna. The corresponding sotatta (explained as “suriya-santāpena su-tatto”) should then be so tatto
    Soseti
    1. to cause to dry or wither Mhvs 21, 28; Vism 120 ‣See vi˚;
    causative of sussati
    Sossati
    1. is future of suṇāti.

    Sohada
    1. a friend Mhvs 38, 98 ‣See also suhada
    Sanskrit sauhṛda, from su + hṛd
    Sneha
    1. ‣See sineha
    Svākāra
    1. being of good disposition Vin i.6
    su + ākāra
    Svākkhāta
    1. well preached Vin i.12 187 ii.199 MN i.67 AN i.34 AN ii.56 Snp 567 O past participle durakkhāta Vism 213 (in detail)
    2. su + akkhāta; on the long ā cp. Geiger, Pali Grammar § 7; Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit svākhyāta
    Svāgata
    1. welcome Vin ii.11 Thag 2, 337 Thag-a 236
    2. learnt by heart Vin ii.95 249 AN iv.140 (pātimokkhāni) ‣See sāgata
    su + āgata
    Svātana
    1. relating to the morrow; dative ˚-nāya for the following day Vin i.27 DN i.125 Ja i.11 Dhp-a i.314 Dhp-a iv.12
    cp. Sanskrit śvastana; Geiger, Pali Grammar § 6, 54
    Svātivatta
    1. easily overcome Snp 785 Nd1 76
    su + ativatta
    Svāssu
    1. = so assu Ja i.196
    Svāhaṁ
    1. = so ahaṁ
    Sve
    adverb
    1. to-morrow Vin ii.77 DN i.108 DN i.205 Ja i.32 Ja i.243 Ja ii.47 Vv-a 230 svedivasa Dhp-a i.103 The diaeretic form is suve, e.g. Pv iv.15; Mhvs 29, 17; and doubled suve suve day after day Dhp 229 Dhp-a iii.329 Ja v.507
    1. H
    cp. Sanskrit śvas

    H

    Ha
    1. an emphatic particle “hey, oh, hallo I say” Vin ii.109 Snp 666 iti ha, thus Vin i.5 12 DN i.1 a common beginning to traditional instruction Snp 1053
    • itihītihaṁ (saying), “thus and thus” Snp 1084 Snp-a 416 (ha-kāra) Pv-a 4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su
    frequently in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Indogermanic *gho, *ghe; cp. Latin hi-c, Sanskrit hi
    Haṁ
    indeclinable
    1. an exclamation “I say, hey, hallo, look here!” Vv 508 (= nipāta Vv-a 212) Ja v.422 Vv-a 77 Sometimes as han ti, e.g. Ja v.203 Dhp-a iii.108 ‣See also handa & hambho; . In combination iti haṁ (= iti) Snp 783 Nd1 71; or with other participle like haṁ dhī Dhp-a i.179 216 (here as haṁ di
    cp. Sanskrit haṁ
    Haṁsa1
    1. bristling ‣See lomahaṁsa Snp 270 etc
    from haṁsati
    Haṁsa2
    1. a water-bird, swan SN i.148 Snp 221 Snp 350 Snp 1134 Dhp 91 Dhp 175 Dhp-a ii.170 Ja ii.176f. Snp-a 277 Pv ii.123; iii.34. Considered as (suvaṇṇa-) rāja-haṁsa (“golden royal swan”) to be king of the birds: Ja i.207 Ja ii.353 Vism 650
    2. At Snp-a 277 Buddhaghosa gives various kinds of haṁsa’s, viz. harita˚ tamba˚, khīra˚, kāḷa˚, pāka˚, suvaṇṇa˚
    3. pāka˚ a species of water bird Ja v.356 Ja vi.539 Snp-a 277
    4. f haṁsī Dāvs v.24 (rāja˚)
    5. a kind of building Ja i.92
      1. ˚potaka a young swan Vism 153 (in simile)
      2. ˚rāja the king of swans Vv 358 Vin iv.259
      cp. Sanskrit haṁsa = Latin (h)anser “goose,” Anglo-Saxon gōs = English goose, German gans
    Haṁsati

    1. to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair) Vin iii.8 MN i.79 causative haṁseti to cause to bristle Ja v.154
    2. past participle haṭṭha
    3. cp. Vedic harṣate Indogermanic *ĝher to bristle (of hair), as in Latin horreo (“horrid, horripilation”), ēr hedgehog (“bristler”) = Latin hirtus, hispidus “rough”; Anglo-Saxon gorst = gorse; German granne & many others, for which ‣See Walde,; Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. ēr The Dhtp (309) defines as “tuṭṭhi.” ‣See also ghaṁsati2 pahaṁsati2, pahaṭṭha2, pahaṁsita2
    Haṁsana
    adjective neuter
    1. bristling ‣See lomahaṁsa Snp 270 etc
    from hṛṣ
    Haṁsi
    indeclinable
    1. = hañci if, in case that Ja vi.343
    ?
    Haṅkhati
    1. ‣See paṭi˚;
    Hacca
    adjective
    1. killing, in bhūnahacca killing an embryo AN iv.98 Ja vi.579 = 587 Mil 314 (text bhūta-)
    from han
    Hañci
    indeclinable
    1. if Kvu 1. Hannati & hanchati;
    haṁ + ci
    Haññati
    hañchati;
    1. ‣See hanati
    Haṭa1
    1. taken, carried off Vin iv.23 Ja i.498
    • haṭa-haṭa-kesa with dishevelled hair SN i.115
    past participle of harati
    Haṭa2
    1. a kind of water-plant, Pistia stratiotes DN i.166 MN i.78 MN i.156 Pug 55 (text sāta-) AN i.241 AN i.295 (variant reading sāta; cp. hāṭaka)
    cp. Sanskrit haṭha & haṭa
    Haṭṭha
    1. bristling, standing on end MN i.83 Dāvs v.64; lomahaṭṭhajāta (cp. ˚loma) with bristling hairs, excited DN ii.240 Snp p. 14
    2. joyful happy Vin i.15 Snp 1017 Ja i.31 Ja i.335 Ja ii.32 often combined with either tuṭṭha (e.g. Ja vi.427 Pv-a 113), or pahaṭṭha (Dhp-a iii.292)
    past participle of haṁsati
    Haṭha
    1. violence
    only as lexicographical word; Dhtp 101 = balakkāra
    Hata
    1. struck, killed DN ii.131 destroyed, spoilt, injured Vin i.25 Dhs 264 Ja ii.175
    • reṇuhata struck with dust, covered with dust Vin i.32
    • hatatta
    • neuter the state of being destroyed Dhp 390
    • hatāvakāsa who has cut off every occasion (for good and evil) Dhp 97 Dhp-a ii.188
    • hatāvasesaka surviving DN i.135
    • pakkha˚ a cripple (q.v.); ˚vikkhittaka slain & cut up killed & dismembered Vism 179, 194

      • ; hata is also used in sense of
      • medium, i.e. one who has destroyed or killed e.g. nāga˚; slayer of a nāga Vin ii.195
      • ˚antarāya one who removes an obstacle Pv-a 1
      • ahata unsoiled, clean new DN ii.160 Ja i.50 Dāvs ii.39
      past participle of hanti
    Hati
    feminine
    1. destruction Dāvs iv.17
    from han
    Hattha
    1. hand DN i.124 AN i.47 Snp 610 Ja vi.40
    2. forearm Vin iv.221 of animals SN v.148 Ja i.149
    3. ˚pāda hand and foot MN i.523 AN i.47 Ja ii.117 Pv-a 241 Dhp-a iv.7
    4. sahassa˚ thousand-armed Mhvs 30, 75; pañca˚; having five hands Ja v.425 Ja v.431 (mukhassa ceva catunnaṁ ca caranāṇaṁ vasena etaṁ vuttaṁ); kata˚; a practised hand, practised (of an archer) SN i.62 AN ii.48 Ja iv.211
    5. hatthe karoti to bring under one’s hand, to take possession of, to subdue Ja vi.490
    6. hatthaṁ gacchati to come under somebody’s hand, to come under the sway of Ja i.179
    7. hatthaga being in the power of; hatthagata fallen into the hand or possession of, hatthappatta what one can put one’s hand on, i.e. “before his very eyes” Vin i.15 As ˚hattha in hand,-handed; e.g. daṇḍa˚ stick in hand Ja i.59
    8. ritta˚ empty-handed Sdhp 309; vīṇā˚; lute in hand Mhvs 30, 75. cp. sa˚; with one’s own hand. 2. the hand as measure, a cubit Ja i.34 Ja i.233 (asīti˚, q.v.) Mhvs 38, 52; Vism 92 (nava˚ sāṭaka)
    9. a handful a tuft (of hair) Vv-a 197
      1. ˚aṅguli finger Pv-a 124 (+ pādanguli toe)
      2. ˚aṭṭhika hand-bone Kp-a 49
      3. ˚antara a cubit Vism 124
      4. ˚āpalekhana licking the hands (to clean them after eating-cp. the 52nd Sekhiya Vin iv.198) DN i.166 iii.40 MN i.77 MN i.238 MN i.307 AN i.295 (variant reading ˚āva˚) Pug 55
      • ˚ābharaṇa bracelet Vin ii.106
      • ˚ābhijappana (
      • neuter incantations to make a man throw up his hands DN i.11 DN-a i.97
      • ˚ālaṅkāra a (wrist) bracelet wristlet Vv-a 167
      • ˚kacchapaka making a hollow hand Ja iii.505
      • ˚kamma manual work, craft, workmanship labour Ja i.220 Dhp-a i.98 395; iv.64
      • ˚gata received come into the possession of Ja i.446 Ja ii.94 Ja ii.105 Vv-a 149
      • neuter possession Ja vi.392
      • ˚gahaṇa seizing by the hand Vin iv.220
      • ˚cchinna whose hand is cut off MN i.523 Mil 5
      • ˚ccheda cutting off the hand Ja i.155 (read sugatiyā va hatthacchedādi)
      • ˚cchedana = ˚cheda Ja iv.192 Dhp-a iii.482
      • ˚tala palm of the hand Vv-a 7
      • ˚ttha cp. Sanskrit hasta-stha, of sthā
        1. literally standing in the hand of somebody, being in somebody’s power (cp hattha-gata); used as abstract hatthattha neuter power captivity, ˚ṁ gacchati & āgacchati; to come into the power of genitive, to be at the mercy of cp. hattha-gata & hatthaṁ gacchati
          1. Ja ii.383 (āyanti hatthatthaṁ) iv.420, 459; v.346 (˚ṁ āgata). As past participle hatth-attha-gata in somebody’s power Ja i.244 Ja iii.204 Ja vi.582 An abstract is further formed from hatthattha as hatthatthatā Ja v.349 (˚taṁ gata). The Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit equivalent is hastatvaṁ MVastu ii.182
          2. ˚pajjotikā hand-illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment MN i.87 AN i.47 AN ii.122 Mil 197 Nd1 154
          3. ˚patāpaka a coal-pan, heating of the hand Vv 3332 Vv-a 147 ‣See mandāmukhi

            • pasāraṇa stretching out one’s hand Vism 569
            • ˚pāsa the side of the hand, vicinity Vin iv.221 230
            • ˚bandha a bracelet DN i.7 DN-a i.89
            • ˚vaṭṭaka hand-cart Vin ii.276
            • ˚vikāra motion of the hand Ja iv.491
            • ˚sāra hand-wealth, movable property Dhp-a i.240 Ja i.114 DN-a i.216
            from hṛ; , cp. Vedic hasta
    Hatthaka
    1. a handful, a quantity (literally a little hand) Vv 455 (= kalāpa Vv-a 197)
    hattha + ka
    Hatthin
    1. an elephant Vin i.218 352; ii.194 sq (Nālāgiri) = J v.335 (nominative singular hatthī; genitive hatthissa) DN i.5 AN ii.209 Ja i.358 Ja ii.102 Dhp-a i.59 (correct haṭṭhi!), 80 (
    2. accusative plural hatthī); size of an elephant Mil 312 one of the seven treasures DN i.89 DN ii.174 often mentioned together with horses (˚ass'ādayo), e. g AN iv.107 MN iii.104 Vism 269 Dhp-a i.392
    3. ekacārika-h., an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant Ja iii.175
    4. caṇḍa h. rogue elephant MN i.519 DN-a i.37-hatthinī
    5. feminine a she-elephant Dhp 105
    6. hatthinikā (
    7. feminine the same Vin i.277 DN i.49 DN-a i.147

      1. ˚atthara elephant rug Vin i.192 DN i.7 AN i.181
      • ˚ācariya elephant trainer Vin i.345 Ja ii.94 Ja ii.221 Ja ii.411 iv.91 Mil 201
      • ˚āroha mounted on an elephant, an elephant-driver DN i.51 SN iv.310
      • ˚ālaṅkāra elephant’s trappings Ja ii.46
      • ˚kanta = manta el. charm Dhp-a i.163
      • ˚kantavīṇā lute enticing an elephant Dhp-a i.163
      • ˚kalabha the young of an elephant AN iv.435
      • ˚kumbha the frontal globe of an elephant Ja ii.245
      • ˚kula elephant species, ten enumerated at Vb-a 397
      • ˚kkhandha the shoulder or back of an elephant Ja i.313 Mhvs vi.24 Pv-a 75 Pv-a 178
      • ˚gopaka an elephant’s groom or keeper Ja i.187
      • ˚damaka elephant tamer MN iii.132 MN iii.136 Snp-a 161
      • ˚damma an elephant in training MN iii.222
      • ˚nakha a sort of turrent projecting over the approach to a gate; ˚ka provided with such turrets, or supported on pillars with capitals of elephant heads Vin ii.169
      • ˚pada an elephant’s foot MN i.176 MN i.184 SN v.43 Ja i.94
      • ˚pākāra “elephant-wall,” wall of the upper storey with figures of elephants in relief Mhvs 33, 5 ‣See Geiger Mahāvastu translation 228, note 2
      • ˚ppabhinna a furious elephant Dhp 326 MN i.236
      • ˚bandha Ja i.135 = hatthibhaṇḍa -bhaṇḍa an elephant-keeper Vin i.85 Vin ii.194
      • ˚magga elephant track Ja ii.102
      • ˚maṅgala an elephant festival Ja ii.46
      • ˚matta only as big as an elephant Ja i.303
      • ˚māraka elephant hunter Dhp-a i.80
      • ˚meṇḍa an elephant’s groom Ja iii.431 Ja v.287 Ja vi.498
      • ˚yāna an elephant carriage, a riding elephant DN i.49 DN-a i.147 Pv-a 55
      • ˚yuddha combat of elephants (as a theatrical show) DN i.6
      • ˚rūpaka elephant image or picture, toy elephant (+ assa˚) Dhp-a ii.69
      • ˚laṇḍa elephant dung Dhp-a iv.156
      • ˚liṅgasakuṇa a vulture with a bill like an elephant’s trunk Dhp-a i.164
      • ˚vatta elephant habit Nd1 92
      • ˚sālā elephant stable Vin i.277 Vin ii.194 Dhp-a i.393
      • ˚sippa the elephant lore, the professional knowledge of elephant-training Ja ii.221f. -sutta an elephant-trainer’s manual Ja ii.46 (cp. Mallinātha on Raghuv. vi.27)
      • ˚soṇḍaka “elephant trunk,” an under-garment arranged with appendages like elephant trunks Vin ii.137
      Vedic hastin, literally endowed with a hand, i.e. having a trunk
    Hadaya
    the heart.
    1. -1. the physical organ DN ii.293 SN i.207 (ettha uro hadayan ti vuttaṁ Dhs-a 140); in detail: Vism 256, 356 Vb-a 60 239. 2. the heart as seat of thought and feeling, especially of strong emotion (as in Vedas!), which shows itself in the action of the heart SN i.199 Thus defined as “cintā” at Dhtm 535 (as had, or as “hadayaṁ vuccati cittaṁ, with ster. explanation “mano mānasa paṇḍara” etc. Dhs 17 Nd1 412. cp. Dhs-a 140 (cittaṁ abbhantar’ aṭṭhena hadayan ti vuttaṁ)
    • With citta at Snp p. 32 (hadayaṁ te phalessāmi “I shall break your heart”); hadayaṁ phalitaṁ a broken heart Ja i.65 Dhp-a i.173
    • chinna h identical Ja v.180
    • hadayassa santi calmness of h. AN v.64f. hadayā hadayaṁ aññāya tacchati MN i.32
    • h. nibbāyi the heart (i.e. anger) cooled down Ja vi.349
    • h. me avakaḍḍhati my heart is distraught Ja iv.415
    • duhadaya bad-hearted Ja vi.469
    1. ˚aṭṭhi a bone of the heart Kp-a 49, 50 (so read for pādaṭṭhi ‣See App. to Pj 1.); Vism 255 Snp-a 116
    • ˚gata ˚ngata
      1. gone to the heart, learnt by heart Mil 10
      • ˚gama ˚ngama
        1. heart-stirring, pleasant, agreeable DN i.4 DN iii.173 MN i.345 AN ii.209 AN v.205 Vin iii.77 Nd1 446; Dhs. 1343 DN-a i.75
        • ˚pariḷāha heart-glow Mil 318
        • ˚phālana bursting of the heart Ja i.282
        • ˚maṁsa the flesh of the heart, the heart Ja i.278 Ja i.347 ii.159 etc. (very frequent in the Jātakas) Dhp-a i.5 ii.90
        • ˚bheda “heart-break,” a certain trick in cheating with measures DN-a i.79
        • ˚vañcana deluding the heart Snp-a 183 (cp. Ja vi.388 hadaya-tthena), -vatthu (1 the substance of the heart Mil 281 Dhs-a 140 (2) “heart-basis,” the heart as basis of mind, sensorium commune Tika-Paṭṭhāna 17, 26, 53 sq., 62, 256; Vism 447 Snp-a 228 Dhs-a 257 264 ‣See the discussion at Dhammasaṅgaṇī translation lxxxvi and Compendium 277 sq
        • ˚santāpa heart-burn i.e. grief, sorrow Vism 54
        • ˚ssita stuck in the heart (of salla, dart) Snp 938 Nd1 411
        Vedic hṛdaya, hṛd = Avestan ƶərədā, not the same as Latin cor(dem), but perhaps = Latin haru entrails (haruspex) ‣See K.Z. xl.419
    Han
    indeclinable ‣See haṁ;.
    Hanati1
    (& hanti)
    1. to strike, to thresh SN iv.201 Ja iv.102
    2. to kill DN i.123 AN iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṁ) Snp 125 Dhp 405
    3. maggaṁ˚ to slay travellers on the road Ja i.274 Ja iii.220
    4. to destroy to remove Snp 118 Dhp 72

      • Forms: Pres. 1st sg hanāmi Ja ii.273 2nd singular hanāsi Ja iii.199 Ja v.460 3rd singular hanti Snp 118 AN iv.97 Dhp-a ii.73 (= vināseti) Dhp 72
      • hanāti Ja v.461
      • hanati Ja i.432 1st
      • plural hanāma Ja i.200 3rd
      • plural hananti Snp 669
      • imperative hana Ja iii.185
      • hanassu Ja v.311
      • hanantu Ja iv.42 Dhp 355 Ja i.368 Pot. hane Snp 394 Snp 400
      • haneyya DN i.123 Snp 705 ppr a-hanaṁ not killing DN i.116
      • hananto Ja i.274 fut hanissati Ja iv.102
      • hañchati Ja iv.102
      • hañchema Ja ii.418
      • aorist hani Mhvs 25, 64; 3rd
      • plural haniṁsu Snp 295 Ja i.256
      • absolutive hantvā Snp 121 Dhp 294f.; hanitvāna Ja iii.185
      • passive haññati DN ii.352 SN iv.175 Snp 312 Ja i.371 Ja iv.102 Dhp-a ii.28 ppr. haññamāna SN iv.201
      • gerundive hantabba DN ii.173
      • aorist passive haññiṁsu DN i.141
      • future haññissati DN-a i.134
      • causative hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy Ja i.262 DN-a i.159
      • ghātāpeti Vin i.277
      • ghāteti to cause to slay Dhp 405 Snp 629
      • a-ghātayaṁ not causing to kill SN i.116 Pot. ghātaye Snp 705
      • ghātayeyya Snp 394
      • aorist aghātayi Snp 308
      • ghātayi Snp 309
      • passive ghātīyati Mil 186 ‣See also ghāteti. cp. upahanati, vihanati; ˚gha, ghāta etc., paligha
      ; han or ghan to smite, Indogermanic *gṷhen, as in Avestan jainti to kill; Latin de-fendo “defend” & of-fendo; Old High German gundea Anglo-Saxon gūd “battle.” The Dhtp (363 & 429) gives “hiṁsā” as meaning of han
    Hanati2 [*han
    1. for had, probably from past participle hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of “uccāra ussagga” to empty the bowels Pv iv.88 (= vaccaṁ osajjate Pv-a 268).
    2. past participle hanna. cp. ūhanati2 & ohanati; .

    Hanana
    neuter
    1. killing, striking, injuring Mhvs 3, 42
    from hanati
    Hanu
    feminine
    1. the jaw DN i.11 Ja i.28 (mahā˚), 498 Snp-a 30 (˚sañcalana) Vb-a 145 (˚sañcopana). ˚-saṁhanana jaw-binding, incantations to bring on dumbness DN i.11 DN-a i.97
    Vedic hanu; cp. Latin gena jaw, Gothic kinnus = German kinn = English chin, Old Irish gin mouth
    Hanukā
    feminine
    1. the jaw Ja i.498 DN-a i.97 Mil 229 also neuter Vin ii.266 Ja i.461 Ja ii.127 Ja iv.188
    2. ˚˚aṭṭhika the jaw bone Ja i.265f.; Vism 251 Vb-a 58 Kp-a 49 Snp-a 116
    3. from hanu
    Hantar
    1. a striker, one who kills DN i.56 AN ii.116f.; iii.161 sq. SN i.85 Dhp 389
    agent noun from hanati
    Handa
    indeclinable
    1. an exhortative-emphatic particle used like French allons, voilà: well then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1st pres. & future, or imper, 2; nd person DN i.106 DN i.142 DN ii.288 Snp 153 Snp 701 Snp 1132 Ja i.88 Ja i.221 Ja i.233 iii.135 DN-a i.237 (= vavasāy'atthe nipāto) Nd2 697 (= padasandhi) Pv i.103 (= gaṇha Pv-a 49); ii.321 (= upasagg'atthe nipāta Pv-a 88) Dhp-a i.16 410 (handa je) Snp-a 200 (vvavasāne), 491 (identical) Vv-a 230 (hand’ âhaṁ gamissāmi)
    2. cp. Sanskrit hanta, haṁ + ta
    Hanna
    neuter
    1. easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su˚ a good (i.e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i.e. modesty Ja i.421
    past participle of hanati2
    Hambho
    indeclinable
    1. a particle expressing surprise or haughtiness Ja i.184 Ja i.494 ‣See also ambho
    haṁ + bho
    Hammiya
    neuter
    1. customarily given as “a long, storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the top,” a larger building, pāsāda, (store-house Vin i.58 96, 239; ii.146 (with vihāra, aḍḍhayoga pāsāda, guhā, as the 5 lenāni), 152, 195 Mil 393 Nd1 226 = Vism 25. ˚-gabbha a chamber on the upper storey Vin ii.152
    cp. Vedic harmya house & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit harmikā “summer-house” (?) Divy 244
    Haya
    1. a horse Vv 641 Ja ii.98 Mil 2
    2. speed MN i.446
    3. ˚˚vāhin drawn by horses Ja vi.125
    cp. Vedic haya, from hi to impel. A different etymology ‣See Walde, Lateinisches Etymologisches Woerterbuch s.v. haedus
    Hara
    adjective (—˚)
    1. taking, fetching; vayo˚; bringing age (said of grey hairs) Ja i.138
    • du˚ SN i.36
    from hṛ
    Haraṇa
    neuter
    1. taking, seizing, removing Ja i.117 Ja i.118 Ja i.232 DN-a i.71
    • kucchi˚
    • noun filling of the belly Ja i.277
    • ˚bhatta a meal to take along Dhp-a ii.144
    from hṛ
    Haraṇaka
    neuter
    1. goods in transit, movable goods Vin iii.51
    from haraṇa
    Haraṇī
    feminine
    1. a nerve conveying a stimulus (literally “carrier”); only used with rasa˚; nerve of taste Vin ii.137 usually given as “a hundred thousand” in number, e.g. Ja v.4 Ja v.293 Ja v.458 Dhp-a i.134
    2. in kaṇṇamala˚; , an instrument to remove the wax from the ear Vin ii.135 cp. hāraka
    from haraṇa
    Harati

    1. to carry Ja ii.176 Dhp 124 to take with one DN i.8 DN i.142 opposed to paccāharati Vb-a 349–⁠354 Snp-a 52

      1. -58
      • to bring Ja i.208 to offer Ja i.238 Snp 223

    2. to take, gather (fruits) Mil 263

      • to fetch, buy Ja i.291 (mama santikā)

    3. to carry away to remove DN ii.160 DN ii.166 Ja i.282 Snp 469 Mhvs 1, 26 to do away with, to abolish Ja i.345

      • to take away by force, to plunder, steal DN i.52 Ja i.187 Ja v.254 7. to take off, to destroy Ja i.222 (jīvitaṁ), 310 (visaṁ) to kill Ja i.281
      • Forms:
      • aorist ahāsi Snp 469f. Dhp 3 Ja iv.308 cp. upasaṁhāsi SN v.214 pahāsi, pariyudāhāsi ajjhupāhari;
      • absolutive haritvā DN ii.160
      • hātūna Ja iv.280 (= haritvā Commentary ); infinitive harituṁ Ja i.187
      • hātave Thag 1, 186
      • hātuṁ ‣See voharati; hattuṁ ‣See āharati;
      • future hāhiti Ja vi.500 (= harissati). -
      • passive harīyati MN i.33
      • hīrati Ja v.254 preterite ahīratha Ja v.253
      • gerundive haritabba Ja i.187 281.
      • past participle haṭa.
      • causative hāreti to cause to take Snp 395 to cause to be removed, to remove Ja i.345 Ja ii.176 iii.431 (somebody out of office); hāretabba that which should be taken out of the way Ja i.298
      • causative II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer Vin i.245 Ja ii.38 to cause to be taken (as a fine) Mil 193
    Indogermanic *ĝher; in meaning “take” cp. Latin cohors. Anglo-Saxon geard = yard The Dhtm explainshar laconically by “haraṇa”
    Harāyati

    1. to be ashamed Vin i.88 Vin ii.292 DN i.213 MN i.120 SN iv.62 Iti 43 Pv i.102 ppr. harāyanto Nd1 466 & harāyamāna Ja iv.171 Nd2 566. Often combined with aṭṭiyati (q.v.) ‣See also hiriyati
    2. in this meaning = Vedic hṛ; to be angry Pres. hṛṇīte
      1. to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati) Ja v.366 (ppr. hariyyamāna); Thag 1 1173 (mā hari “don't worry”)
      denominative from hiri (= hrī), cp. Vedic hrī to be ashamed, Pres. jihreti The Dhtp (438) gives roots hiri & hara; in meaning “lajjā”
    Hari
    adjective
    1. green, tawny Dhs 617 Dhs-a 317
    • ˚-ssavaṇṇa gold-coloured Ja ii.33 (= hari-samāna-vaṇṇa suvaṇṇa˚ Commentary ).

      1. ˚candana yellow sandal Vv 831 Dhp-a i.28
      • ˚tāla yellow orpiment Thag 2, 393 Dhp-a iii.29 Dhp-a iv.113
      • ˚ttaca gold-coloured Thag 2, 333 Thag-a 235
      • ˚pada gold foot yellow leg, a deer Ja iii.184
      Indogermanic *ĝhel, as in Latin helvus yellow, holus cabbage; Sanskrit harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow); Avestan ƶairi; Anglo-Saxon geolo = English yellow. Also the words for “gold” hāṭaka & hiraṇya
    Hariṇa
    1. a deer Ja ii.26
    from hari
    Harita
    adjective
    1. green, pale(-green), yellowish. It is explained by Dhammapāla as nīla (e.g. Vv-a 197 Pv-a 158), and its connotation is not fixed
    2. Vin i.137 DN i.148 SN i.5 Ja i.86 Ja i.87 Ja ii.26 Ja ii.110 Pv ii.1210 (bank of a pond) Vv 457 (˚patta, with green leaves, of a lotus) Ja ii.110 (of wheat) Snp-a 277 (˚haṁsa yellow, i.e. golden swan)
    3. green, fresh Vin iii.16 AN v.234 (kusa)
    4. neuter (collectively) vegetables, greens Vin 266 (here applied to a field of fresh (i.e. green) wheat or cereal in general, as indicated by explanation “haritaṁ nāma pubbaṇṇaṁ aparaṇṇaṁ” etc.); cp. haritapaṇṇa vegetables Snp-a 283
    5. haritā

      • feminine gold Thag 1, 164 = J ii.334 (˚maya made of gold; but explained as “harita-maṇi-parikkhata” by Commentary )
      • Two compounds., rather odd in form, are haritāmātar “son of a green frog” Ja ii.238 (in verse) and haritupattā (bhūmi) “covered with green” MN i.343 Ja i.50 Ja i.399
    ‣See hari for etymology
    Haritaka
    neuter
    1. a pot-herb DN ii.342
    harita + ka
    Haritatta
    neuter
    1. greenness Vin i.96
    abstract from harita
    Harītaka
    1. yellow myrobalan (Terminalia citrina or chebula) Vin i.201 206 Ja i.80 Ja iv.363 Mil 11 Dhs-a 320 (Text harīṭaka) Vv-a 5 (ṭ) ˚-kī feminine the myrobalan tree Vin i.30 MN iii.127 pūtiharīṭakī Vism 40; ˚paṇṇika all kinds of greens Vin ii.267
    2. cp. Epic Sanskrit harītaka
    Hareṇukā
    feminine
    1. a pea MN i.245 Ja v.405 (= aparaṇṇajā ti.406); vi.537; hareṇuka-yūsa pea-soup MN i.245 (one of the 4 kinds of soup)
    cp. Sanskrit hareṇukā
    Halaṁ
    1. = hi alaṁ (q.v.); “halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ” why should I preach? Vin i.5 = DN ii.36 = M i.168 = SN i.136
    Halāhala1
    1. a kind of deadly poison, usually as ˚visa Ja i.271 Ja i.273 Ja i.380 Ja iii.103 v.465 Mil 256 Vism 57 Thag-a 287
    onomat.; cp. Sanskrit halāhala
    Halāhala2
    neuter
    1. uproar, tumult Ja i.47f. Mil 122 cp. kolāhala. Halidda & Haliddi
    onomat.
    Haliddā
    Haliddī
    feminine
    1. turmeric. - 1. haliddā : Vin i.201 Ja v.89
    • haliddī (haliddi˚ MN i.127 AN iii.230 AN iii.233 SN ii.101 Kp-a 64; ˚rāga like the colour of turmeric, or like the t. dye, i.e. not fast quickly changing & fading Ja iii.148 (of citta), cp. Ja iii.524f.
    • cp. Sanskrit haridrā
    Hava
    1. calling, challenge Dāvs ii.14
    cp. Vedc hava; or hvā to call
    Have
    indeclinable
    1. indeed, certainly Vin i.2 DN ii.168 SN i.169 Snp 120 Snp 181 Snp 323 Snp 462 Dhp 104 Dhp 151 Dhp 177 Dhp 382 Ja i.31 Ja i.365 Dhp-a ii.228
    ha + ve
    Havya
    neuter
    1. an oblation, offering SN i.169 Snp 463f.; 490
    Vedic havya; from to sacrifice
    Hasati
    Hassati;

    1. to laugh, to be merry; pres hasati Bu i.28; Mhvs 35, 59; hassati Snp 328 Snp 829 ppr hasamāna is preferable variant reading at Ja iv.281 for bhāsamāna
    2. aorist hasi Ja ii.103 Dhp-a ii.17
    3. causative hāseti i.e. both from has & hṛṣ
      1. to cause to laugh; to please, to gladden Mhvs 32, 46 Ja vi.217 Ja vi.304 Dhp-a ii.85 aorist hāsesi Vin iii.84 ppr. hāsayamana making merry Ja i.163 Ja i.209 210;
      2. absolutive hāsayitvāna Mil 1
      3. causative II. hāsāpeti Snp-a 401 Ja vi.311 cp. pari˚, pa˚
      4. to neigh (of horses) Ja i.62 Ja vi.581 (strange
      5. aorist hasissiṁsu, explained as hasiṁsu by Commentary ).
      6. past participle hasita (& haṭṭha)
      owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sanskrit hasati, past participle hasita) & hṛṣ to be excited (Sanskrit hṛṣyati, past participle hṛṣita & hṛṣṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (‣ See also hāsa) The usual (differentiated) correspondent of Sanskrit hṛṣyati is; haṁsati. The Dhtp (309) gives haṁsa (= harṣa) with tuṭṭhi, and (310 hasa with hasana
    Hasana
    neuter
    1. laughter Dhtp 31
    from hasati
    Hasamānaka
    adjective
    1. laughing, merry Mhvs 35, 55; neuter as
    2. adverb ˚ṁ jokingly, for fun Vin i.185
    3. ppr. of hasati + ka
    Hasita
    1. laughing, merry; neuter laughter, mirth AN i.261 Pv iii.35 (= hasitavant hasita-mukhin Commentary ) Mil 297 Bu i.28 Ja i.62 (? read hesita); iii.223; Vism 20.

      1. ˚uppāda “genesis of mirth,” aesthetic faculty Tika-Paṭṭhāna 276 ‣See Compendium 20 sq
      past participle of hasati, representing both Sanskrit hasita & hṛṣita
    Hasula
    adjective
    1. is rather doubtful (“of charming speech"? or “smiling"?). It occurs in (corrupted verse at Ja vi.503 = Ap 40 (& 307), which is to be read as “aḷāra-bhamukhā (or ˚pamhā) hasulā sussoññā tanu-majjhimā.” ‣See Kern’s remarks at Toevoegselen s. v hasula
    from has
    Hassa
    adjective neuter
    1. ridiculous Snp 328 neuter
    2. laughter, mirth DN i.19 Snp 926 DN-a i.72 Pv-a 226 Dhp-a iii.258 Mil 266
    3. a joke, jest hassā pi, even in fun MN i.415 hassena pi the same Ja v.481 Mil 220
    4. ˚vasena in jest Ja i.439
    from has, cp. Sanskrit hāsya
    indeclinable an exclamation of grief, alas! Thag-a 154 (Ap v.154) Vv-a 323 324.
    Hāṭaka
    neuter
    1. gold AN i.215 AN iv.255 AN iv.258 AN iv.262 (where T reads haṭaka, with sātaka as variant reading at all passages) Thag 2, 382 Ja v.90
    cp. Sanskrit hāṭaka, connected with hari; cp. Gothic gulp = English gold
    Hātabba
    1. at Nett 7, 32 may be interpreted as gerundive of to go (pres. jihīte). The Commentary explains it as “gametabba netabba” (i.e. to be understood). Doubtful.

    Hātūna
    1. ‣See harati
    Hāna
    neuter
    1. relinquishing, giving up, falling off; decrease, diminution, degradation AN ii.167 iii.349 sq. (opposite visesa), 427; Vism 11
    1. ˚gāmin going into disgrace or insignificance AN iii.349f. -bhāgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) DN iii.272f. AN ii.167 Nett 77; Vism 85
    from , cp. Sanskrit hāna
    Hāni
    feminine
    1. decrease, loss AN ii.434 AN v.123f. SN i.111 SN ii.206 SN ii.242 Ja i.338 Ja i.346
    2. falling off, waste Mhvs 33, 103. cp. saṁ˚, pari˚
    cp. Sanskrit hāni
    Hāpana
    1. at Ja v.433 is with Kern, Toevoegselen i.132 (giving the passage without reference) to be read as hāpaka “neglectful
    i.e. from hāpeti1
    Hāpita
    1. cultivated, attended, worshipped Ja iv.221 Ja v.158 (aggihuttaṁ ahāpitaṁ; Commentary wrongly hāpita); v.201 = vi.565. On all passages & their relation to Commentary & Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit ‣See Kern,; Toevoegselen i.132, 133
    past participle of hāpeti2
    Hāpeti1
    1. to neglect, omit AN iii.44 (ahāpayaṁ); iv.25 Dhp 166 Ja ii.437 Ja iv.182
    2. ahāpetvā without omitting anything, i.e. fully AN ii.77 Ja iv.132 DN-a i.99
    3. atthaṁ hāpeti to lose one’s advantage, to fail Snp 37 Ja i.251 2. to postpone, delay (the performance of …) Ja iii.448 Vism 129
    4. to cause to reduce, to beat down Ja i.124 Ja ii.31
    5. to be lost Snp 90 (? read hāyati.

      causative of to leave ‣See jahati; to which add future 2nd singular hāhasi Ja iii.172 and
    6. aorist jahi Ja iv.314 v.469
    Hāpeti2
    1. to sacrifice to worship, keep up, cultivate Ja v.195 (aggiṁ; = juhati Commentary ) ‣See Kern, Toevoegselen i.133. past participle hāpita
    2. in form = Sanskrit (Sūtras) hāvayati, causative of juhoti ‣See juhati, but in meaning = juhoti
    Hāyati
    1. is passive of jahati

      1. , in sense of “to be left behind,” as well as “to diminish, dwindle or waste away, disappear,” e.g. Nd1 147 (+ pari˚, antaradhāyati) Mil 297 (+ khīyati); ppr. hāyamāna Nd2 543 cp. hāyana
    Hāyana1
    neuter
    1. diminution, decay, decrease DN i.54 DN-a i.165 Opposed to vaḍḍhana (increase) at MN i.518
    from
    Hāyana2
    neuter
    1. year; in saṭṭhi˚; 60 years old (of an elephant) MN i.229 Ja ii.343 Ja vi.448 Ja vi.581
    Vedic hāyana
    Hāyin
    adjective
    1. abandoning, leaving behind Snp 755 = Iti 62 (maccu˚)
    from
    Hāra
    1. that which may be taken; grasping, taking; grasp, handful, booty. In compound ˚hārin taking all that can be taken, rapacious, ravaging Ja vi.581 (of an army; Kern, Toevoegselen i.133 wrong in translation “magnificent or something like it”). Of a river: tearing, rapid AN iii.64 AN iv.137 Vism 231
    2. category; name of the first sections of the Netti Pakaraṇa Nett 1 sq., 195
    from harati
    Hāraka
    adjective
    1. carrying, taking, getting; removing (feminine hārikā) MN i.385 Ja i.134 Ja i.479 Pv ii.91 (dhana˚) Snp-a 259 (maṁsa˚)

      • mala˚ an instrument for removing ear-wax Ap 303; cp. haraṇī. sattha˚; a dagger carrier assassin Vin iii.73 SN iv.62 ‣See also vallī
      from hāra
    Hāri
    adjective
    1. attractive, charming SN iv.316 Ja i.204 (˚sadda)
    from hṛ; cp. Sanskrit hāri
    Hārika
    adjective
    1. carrying DN ii.348
    from hāra
    Hārin
    adjective
    1. taking, carrying (
    2. feminine hārinī Ja i.133 Pv ii.310 (
    3. nominative
    4. plural feminine hārī) Pv-a 113
    5. robbing Ja i.204
    6. cp. hāra˚;
    from hāra
    Hāriya
    adjective
    1. carrying Vv 509 Thag-a 200 Vv-a 212
    from hāra
    Hālidda
    adjective
    1. dyed with turmeric; ; undyed, i.e. not changing colour Ja iii.88 cp. iii.148
    from haliddā
    Hāsa
    laughter; mirth, joy Dhp 146 DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155 (“āmeṇḍita”) Ja i.33 ii.82; v.112 Mil 390 ‣See also ahāsa.
    1. ˚kara giving pleasure, causing joy Mil 252
    • ˚kkhaya ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in definition of gilāna, illness) -dhamma merriment, sporting Vin iv.112
    from has, cp. Sanskrit hāsa & harṣa
    Hāsaniya
    adjective
    1. giving joy or pleasure Mil 149
    from has or hṛṣ; cp. Sanskrit harṣanīya
    Hāsu˚
    1. ; (of uncertain origin) occurs with hāsa˚; in combination with ˚pañña and is customarily taken in meaning “of bright knowledge” (i.e. hāsa + paññā), wise, clever The synonym javana-pañña points to a meaning like “quick-witted,” thus implying “quick” also in hāsu. Kern Toevoegselen i.134 puts forth the ingenious explanation that hāsu is a “cockneyism” for āsu = Sanskrit āśu “quick,” which does not otherwise occur in Pāli. Thus his explanation remains problematic
    • See e.g. MN iii.25 SN i.63 SN v.376 Ja iv.136 Ja vi.255 Ja vi.329
    • abstract ˚tā wisdom SN v.412 AN i.45
    Hāseti
    1. ‣See hasati
    Hāhasi
    1. is 2nd singular future of jahati (e.g. Ja iii.172); in compound also ˚hāhisi ‣See vijahati
    Hāhiti
    1. is future of harati.

    Hi
    indeclinable
    1. for, because; indeed, surely Vin i.13 DN i.4 Dhp 5 Snp 21 Pv ii.118; ii.710 (= hi saddo avadhāraṇe Pv-a 103) Snp-a 377 (= hi-kāro nipāto padapūraṇa-matto) Pv-a 70 Pv-a 76. In verse Ja iv.495
    • h'etaṁ = hi etaṁ; no h'etaṁ not so DN i.3
    • hevaṁ = hi evaṁ
    cp. Sanskrit hi
    Hiṁsati
    1. to hurt, injure DN ii.243 SN i.70 Snp 515 Dhp 132 Pv ii.99 (= bādheti Commentary ); iii.42 (= paribādheti Commentary ) Snp-a 460
    2. to kill MN i.39 Dhp 270
    3. causative II. hiṁsāpeti Pv-a 123
    4. Cp vi˚;
    hiṁs, Vedic hinasti & hiṁsanti
    Hiṁsana
    neuter
    1. striking, hurting, killing Mhvs 15, 28
    from hiṁs
    Hiṁsā
    feminine
    1. injury, killing Ja i.445 Dhtp 387. hiṁsa-mano wish to destroy Dhp 390 O past participle ;
    2. Vedic hiṁsā
    Hiṁsitar
    1. one who hurts DN ii.243 Ja iv.121
    agent noun from hiṁsati
    Hikkā
    feminine
    1. hiccup Sdhp 279
    cp. Epic Sanskrit hikkā, from hikk to sob; onomat.
    Hikkāra
    1. = hikkā, Vb-a 70
    hik + kāra
    Hiṅkāra
    indeclinable
    1. an exclamation of surprise or wonder Ja vi.529 (Commentary hin ti kāraṇaṁ)
    hiṁ = hi, + kāra, i.e. the syllable “hiṁ”
    Hiṅgu
    neuter
    1. the plant asafetida Vin i.201 Vv-a 186
    1. ˚cuṇṇa powder of asafetida Dhp-a iv.171
    • ˚rāja a sort of bird Ja vi.539
    Sanskrit hingu
    Hiṅgulaka
    1. vermilion; as jāti˚ Ja v.67 416; Vv-a4, 168. Also as ˚ikā feminine Vv-a 324
    2. cp. Sanskrit hingula, nt.
    Hiṅguli
    1. vermilion Mhvs 27, 18
    Sanskrit hinguli
    Hiṇḍati
    1. to roam Dhtp 108 (= āhiṇḍana) ‣See ā˚
    * Sanskrit hiṇḍ
    Hita
    adjective
    1. useful, suitable, beneficial, friendly AN i.58 AN i.155f.; ii.191 DN iii.211f. Dhp 163- masculine a friend, benefactor Mhvs 3, 37.
    2. neuter benefit blessing, good Vin i.4 Snp 233 AN ii.96f. 176 Iti 78 Snp-a 500

      • O
      • past participle ahita AN i.194 MN i.332
      1. ˚ānukampin friendly & compassionate DN i.4, 227 Snp 693 Ja i.241 Ja i.244
      • ˚ūpacāra beneficial conduct saving goodness Ja i.172
      • ˚esin desiring another’s welfare, well-wishing MN ii.238 SN iv.359 SN v.157 ˚tā ‣Seeking another’s welfare, solicitude Dhs 1056 Dhs-a 362 Vv-a 260
      • ˚kara a benefactor Mhvs 4, 65
      past participle of dahati1
    Hinati
    1. to send; only in compound pahiṇati
    hi, hinoti
    Hintāla
    1. a kind of palm, Phoenix paludosa Vin i.190 Dhp-a iii.451
    hiṁ + tāla
    Hindagu
    1. man, only found in the Niddesa in stock definition of jantu or nara; both spellings (with & without h) occur ‣See Nd1 3 = Nd2 249
    probably for indagu, inda + gu (= ˚ga), i.e. sprung from Indra. The h perhaps from hindu. The spelling ; is a corrupt one
    Hima
    adjective-noun
    1. cold frosty Dhs-a 317 neuter ice, snow Ja iii.55

      1. ˚pāta-samaya the season of snow-fall Vin i.31 288 MN i.79 Ja i.390 Mil 396
      • ˚vāta a snow or ice wind Ja i.390
      cp. Vedic hima; Latin hiems etc.
    Himavant
    adjective
    1. snowy Ja v.63 (= himayutta Commentary ). masculine Himavā the Himālaya ‣See Dict. of Names
    2. hima + vant
    Hiyyo
    adverb
    1. yesterday Vin i.28 Vin ii.77 Ja i.70 Ja i.237 Ja v.461 vi.352, 386 Mil 9 In sequence ajja hiyyo pare it seems to mean “to-morrow”; thus at Vin iv.63 69 Ja iv.481 (= sve Commentary ) ‣See para 2. c
    Vedic hyaḥ, Latin heri; Gothic gistradagis “to-morrow,” English yester-day, German gestern etc.
    Hirañña
    neuter
    1. gold Vin i.245 276; ii.159 AN iv.393 Snp 285 Snp 307 Snp 769 Nd2 11; gold-piece SN i.89 Ja i.92 Often together with suvaṇṇa Vin i.150 DN ii.179
    • h˚-suvaṇṇaṁ gold & money MN iii.175 Ja i.341
    • ˚olokana (-kamma) valuation of gold Ja ii.272 Hiri & hiri
    Vedic hiraṇya ‣See etymology under hari & cp. Avestan ƶaranya gold
    Hiri
    hirī
    feminine
    1. sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness SN i.33 DN iii.212 AN i.51 AN i.95 AN iii.4f. 331, 352 iv.11, 29 Snp 77 Snp 253 Snp 719 Pug 71 Pv iv.73 Ja i.129 207; Nett 50, 82; Vism 8. explained Pug 23f.; is one of the cāga-dhana’s ‣See cāga (cp. Jtm 311)
    • Often contrasted to & combined with; ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: AN i.51 DN iii.284 SN ii.206 Iti 36 Nett 39; their difference is explained at Vism 464 (“kāya-duccarit’ ādīhi hiriyatī ti hiri; lajjāy’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; tehi yeva ottappatī ti ottappaṁ; pāpato ubbegass’ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ”) Ja i.129f. Dhs-a 124
    1. ˚ottappa shame & fear of sin MN i.271 SN ii.220 Iti 34 AN ii.78 Ja i.127 Ja i.206 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 61; Vism 221 Dhp-a iii.73 Frequently spelt otappa, e.g. Ja i.129 Iti 36
    • ˚kopīna a loin cloth MN i.10 Vism 31, 195
    • ˚nisedha restrained by conscience SN i.7 SN i.168 = Sn 462 Dhp 143 Dhp-a iii.86
    • ˚bala the power of conscientiousness AN ii.150 Dhs 30 101
    • ˚mana modest in heart, conscientious DN ii.78 MN i.43 SN ii.159
    cp. Vedic hrī
    Hirika
    1. (& hirīka) adjective

      1. having shame, only as—˚ in negative ahirika shameless, unscrupulous AN i.51 AN i.85 ii.219 Pug 19 Iti 27 (˚īka) Ja i.258 (chinna˚ identical); nt ˚ṁ unscrupulousness Pug 19
      from hiri
    Hirimant
    1. (& hirīmant) adjective

      1. bashful, modest, shy DN iii.252 DN iii.282 SN ii.207f.; iv.243 sq. AN ii.218 227; iii.2 sq., 7 sq., 112; iv.2 sq., 38, 109; v.124, 148 Iti 97 Pug 23
      from hiri
    Hiriya
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. shame, conscientiousness Vv-a 194 Hiriyati (hiriyati)
      from hiri
    Hiriyati (hirīyati)
    1. to blush, to be shy; to feel conscientious scruple, to be ashamed Pug 20 24 Mil 171 Vism 464 (hirīyati) Dhs-a 149
    ‣See harāyati
    Hirivera
    neuter
    1. a kind of Andropogon (sort of perfume) Ja vi.537 DN-a i.81
    cp. Sanskrit hrīvera
    Hilādati
    1. to refresh oneself, to be glad Dhtp 152 (= sukha), 591 (identical)
    hlād
    Hīna
    1. inferior, low; poor, miserable; vile, base, abject, contemptible, despicable Vin i.10 DN i.82 98 SN ii.154 (hīnaṁ dhātuṁ paṭicca uppajjati hīnā saññā); iii.47; iv.88, 309 (citta h. duggata) DN iii.106 111 sq., 215 (dhātu) AN ii.154 AN iii.349f.; v.59 sq. Snp 799 Snp 903f. Nd1 48 103, 107, 146 Ja ii.6 Pv iv.127 (opposite paṇīta) Vv 2413 (= lāmaka Vv-a 116) Dhs 1025 Dhs-a 45 Mil 288 Vism 13 Dhp-a iii.163
    2. Often opposed to ukkaṭṭha (exalted, decent, noble), e.g. Vin iv.6 Ja i.20 Ja i.22 Ja iii.218 Vb-a 410 or in graduated sequence hīna (→ majjhima) → paṇīta (i.e. low, medium excellent), e.g. Vism 11, 85 sq., 424, 473 ‣See majjhima
    3. deprived of, wanting, lacking Snp 725 Iti 106 (ceto-vimutti˚) Pug 35
    4. hīnāya āvattati to turn to the lower, to give up orders, return to secular life Vin i.17 SN ii.231 SN iv.191 Ud 21 AN iii.393f. MN i.460 Snp p. 92 Pug 66
    5. hīnāya vattati identical Ja i.276
    6. hīnāy'āvatta one who returns to the world MN i.460 MN i.462 SN ii.50 SN iv.103 Nd1 147
      1. ˚ādhimutta having low inclinations Ja iii.87 Pug 26 ˚ika identical SN ii.157 Iti 70
      • ˚kāya inferior assembly Vv-a 298 (here meaning Yamaloka) Pv-a 5
      • ˚jacca low-born, low-caste Ja ii.5 Ja iii.452 Ja v.19 Ja v.257
      • ˚vāda one whose doctrine is defective Snp 827 Nd1 167
      • ˚viriya lacking in energy Iti 116 Dhp-a i.75 Dhp-a ii.260
      past participle of jahati
    Hīyati
    1. is passive of jahati.

    Hīra
    1. a necklace (?) Vv-a 176
    2. a small piece, splinter Ja iv.30 (sakalika˚); hīrahīraṁ karoti to cut to pieces, to chop up Ja i.9 Dhp-a i.224 (+ khaṇḍâkhaṇḍaṁ)
    cp. late Sanskrit hīra
    Hīraka
    1. a splinter; tāla˚ “palm-splinter,” a name for a class of worms Vism 258
    hīra + ka, cp. lexic. Sanskrit hīraka “diamond”
    Hīrati
    1. is passive of harati.

    Hīḷana
    neuter & ˚ā
    • feminine

      1. scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Mil 357 DN-a i.276 (of participle “re”: hīlana-vasena āmantanaṁ); as ˚ā at Vb 353 (+ ohīḷanā) Vb-a 486
      from hīḍ
    Hīḷita
    1. despised, looked down upon, scorned Vin iv.6 Mil 227 Mil 251 Vism 424 (+ ohīḷita oññāta etc.) DN-a i.256
    past participle of hīḷeti
    Hīḷeti

    1. to be vexed, to grieve SN i.308 to vex, grieve Vv 8446 2. to scorn, disdain, to feel contempt for, despise DN ii.275 Snp 713 (appaṁ dānaṁ na hīḷeyya) Ja ii.258 DN-a i.256 (= vambheti) Dhp-a iv.97 Mil 169 (+ garahati).
    2. past participle hīḷita
    3. Vedic hīḍ or hel to be hostile; cp. Avestan ƶēaša awful; Gothic us-geisnan to be terrified. Connected also with hiṁsati The Dhtp (637) defines by “nindā”
    Huṁ
    indeclinable the sound “huṁ” an utterance of discontent or refusal Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77 Vism 96. cp. haṁ huṅkāra growling, grumbling Vism 105. huṅkaroti to grumble Dhp-a i.173
    • huṅkaraṇa = ˚kāra Dhp-a i.173 sq ‣See also huhuṅka.

    Hukku
    1. the sound uttered by a jackal Ja iii.113
    Huta
    1. sacrificed, worshipped, offered Vin i.36 = J i.83 DN i.55 Ja i.83 (neuter “oblation”) Vv 3426 (su˚, + sudinna, suyiṭṭha) Pug 21 Dhs 1215 DN-a i.165 Dhp-a ii.234

      -āsana cp. Sanskrit hutāśana

      1. the fire, literally “oblation-eater” Dāvs ii.43; Vism 171 (= aggi)
      past participle of juhati
    Hutta
    neuter
    1. sacrifice ‣See aggi˚;
    cp. Vedic hotra
    Hunitabba
    1. is gerundive of juhati “to be sacrificed,” or “venerable” Vism 219 (= āhuneyya).

    Hupeyya
    1. "it may be” Vin i.8 = huveyya MN i.171 ‣See bhavati
    Huraṁ
    adverb
    1. there, in the other world, in another existence. As preposition with accusative “on the other side of,” i.e. before Snp 1084 Nd1 109; usually in connection idha vā huraṁ vā in this world or the other SN i.12 Dhp 20 Snp 224 = J i.96; hurāhuraṁ from existence to existence Dhp 334 Thag 1, 399 Vism 107 Dhp-a iv.43-The explanation by Morris Journal of the Pali Text Society 1884, 105 may be discarded as improbable
    2. of uncertain origin
    Huhuṅka
    adjective
    1. saying “huṁ, huṁ,” i.e. grumbly, rough; ˚jātika one who has a grumbly nature, said of the brahmins Vin i.2 Ud 3 (“proud of his caste Seidenstūcker). nihuhuṅka (= nis + h.) not grumbly (or proud), gentle Vin i.3 Ud 3 Thus also Kern Toevoegselen i.137; differently Hardy in Journal of the Pali Text Society 1901, 42 (“uttering & putting confidence into the word huṁ” Buddhaghosa (Vin i.362) says: “diṭṭha-mangaliko mānavasena kodhavasena ca huhun ti karonto vicarati.”
    from huṁ
    Hūti
    feminine
    1. calling, challenging SN i.208
    from hū, hvā “to call,” cp. avhayati
    He
    indeclinable a vocative (exclam.) particle “eh,” “here,” hey MN i.125 MN i.126 (+ je) Dhp-a i.176 (double).
    Heṭṭhato
    adverb
    1. below, from below Ps i.84 Dhs 1282 1284, Mhvs 5, 64
    from heṭṭhā
    Heṭṭhā
    indeclinable
    1. down, below, underneath Vin i.15 DN i.198 Iti 114 Ja i.71 Vv-a 78 Pv-a 113 As preposition with gen ablative or compound “under” Ja i.176 Ja ii.103 lower in the manuscript, i.e. before, above Ja i.137 Ja i.206 Ja i.350 Vv-a 203 lower, farther on Ja i.235
    1. ˚āsana a lower seat Ja i.176
    • ˚nāsika-(sota) the lower nostril Ja i.164
    • ˚bhāga lower part Ja i.209 Ja i.484
    • ˚mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (˚mañcato from under the bed); ii.275, 419; iv.365
    • ˚vāta the wind below, a wind blowing underneath Ja i.481
    • ˚sīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13
    cp. Vedic adhastāt = adhaḥ + ablative suffix ˚tāt
    Heṭṭhima

    adjective

    1. lower, lowest Vin iv.168 Dhs 1016 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 41 Pv-a 281 Sdhp 238 Sdhp 240 Sdhp 256. ˚tala the lowest level Ja i.202
    compar superl. formation from heṭṭhā
    Heṭhaka
    adjective-noun
    1. one who harasses, a robber Ja iv.495 Ja iv.498 cp. vi˚;
    from heṭheti
    Heṭhanā
    feminine
    1. harassing DN ii.243 Vb-a 75
    from heṭheti
    Heṭheti
    1. to harass, worry, injure Ja iv.446 Ja iv.471 Pv iii.52 (= bādheti Pv-a 198) ppr. a-heṭhayaṁ Dhp 49 SN i.21 medium a-heṭhayāna SN i.7 SN iv.179
    2. absolutive heṭhayitvāna Ja iii.480
    3. past participle heṭhayita Ja iv.447
    4. Vedic heḍ = hel or hīḍ ‣See hīḷeti
    Hetaṁ
    1. = hi etaṁ
    Hetu
    1. cause, reason, condition SN i.134 AN iii.440f. Dhs 595 1053; Vism 450 Tika-Paṭṭhāna 11, 233, 239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical as synonyms, e.g. n'atthi hetu n'atthi paccayo DN i.53 aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā DN iii.284f.; cp. SN iii.69f. DN ii.107 MN i.407 AN i.55f. 66, 200; iv.151 sq.; but later they were differentiated ‣See Mrs. Rhys Davids, Tika-Paṭṭhāna introduction p. xi. sq.. The different between the two is explained e.g. at Nett 78 sq. Dhs-a 303
    2. There are a number of other terms, with which hetu is often combined, apparently without distinction in meaning, e.g. hetu paccaya kāraṇa Nd2 617 (s.v. sankhā); mūla h. nidāna sambhava pabhava samuṭṭhāna āhāra ārammaṇa paccaya samudaya frequent in the Niddesa ‣See Nd2 p. 231, s.v. mūla. In the Abhidhamma we find hetu as “moral condition referring to the 6 mūlas or bases of good & bad kamma viz.; lobha, dosa, moha and their opposites: Dhs 1053f. Kvu 532 sq
    3. Four kinds of hetu are distinguished at Dhs-a 303 = Vb-a 402 viz. hetu˚, paccaya˚, uttama˚ sādhāraṇa˚. Another 4 at Tika-Paṭṭhāna 27, viz. kusala˚ akusala˚, vipāka˚, kiriya˚, and 9 at Tika-Paṭṭhāna 252, viz kusala˚, akusala˚, avyākata˚, in 3X3 constellations (cp Dhs-a 303)
    4. On term in detail ‣See Compendium 279 sq.; Dhs translation §§ 1053, 1075
    5. ablative hetuso from or by way of (its) cause SN v.304 AN iii.417
    6. accusative hetu (—˚) (elliptically as
    7. adverb ) on account of, for the sake of (with genitive) e.g. dāsa-kammakara-porisassa hetu MN ii.187
    8. kissa hetu why? AN iii.303 AN iv.393 Snp 1131 Pv ii.81 (= kiṁ nimittaṁ Pv-a 106); pubbe kata˚ by reason (or in consequence) of what was formerly done AN i.173f.; dhana˚ for the sake of gain Snp 122
    9. suitability for the attainment of Arahantship, one of the 8 conditions precedent to becoming a Buddha Bu ii.59 = J i.14, 44. 3. logic Mil 3
      1. ˚paccaya the moral causal relation, the first of the 24 Paccayas in the Paṭṭhāna Tika-Paṭṭhāna 1 sq., 23 sq., 60 sq., 287 320; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 8, 41 sq.; Vism 532 Vb-a 174
      • ˚pabhava arising from a cause, conditioned Vin i.40 Dhp-a i.92
      • ˚vāda the theory of cause, as adjective “proclaimer of a cause,” name of a sect MN i.409 opposite ahetu-vāda “denier of a cause” (also a sect) MN i.408
      • ahetu-vādin identical Ja v.228 241 (= Jtm 149)
      Vedic hetu, from hi to impel
    Hetuka
    adjective (—˚)
    1. connected with a cause, causing or caused, conditioned by, consisting in Mhvs 1, 45 (maṇi-pallanka˚) Dhs 1009 (pahātabba˚) Vb-a 17 (du˚, ti˚). usually as sa˚; and ; (with & without a moral condition) AN i.82 Vism 454 sq.; Duka-Paṭṭhāna 24 sq sa˚ Dhs 1073 (translation “having root-conditions as concomitants”); Kvu 533 (“accompanied by moral conditions”); SN iii.210 (˚vāda, as a “diṭṭhi”); Vism 450
    from hetu
    Hetutta
    neuter
    1. reason, consequence; ablative in consequence of (—˚) Vism 424 (diṭṭhivisuddhi˚)
    abstract formation from hetu
    Hetuye
    1. ‣See bhavati
    Hema
    neuter
    1. gold DN ii.187 Ja vi.574
    1. ˚jāla golden netting (as cover of chariots etc.) AN iv.393 Vv 351 362 (˚ka)
    2. ˚vaṇṇa golden-coloured DN ii.134 Thag 2, 333 Thag-a 235 Dhs-a 317
    cp. Epic Sanskrit heman
    Hemanta
    1. winter AN iv.138 Ja i.86 Mil 274
    hema(= hima) + anta
    Hemantika
    adjective
    1. destined for the winter, wintry, icy cold Vin i.15 31 (rattiyo), 288 MN i.79 SN v.51 AN iv.127 Vism 73
    from hemanta
    Hemavataka
    adjective
    1. belonging to, living in the Himālaya Ja i.506 Ja iv.374 Ja iv.437
    • ˚vatika identical Dīpavaṁsa v.54. Herannika (& aka);
    from himavant
    Heraññika (& ˚aka);
    goldsmith (? for which suvaṇṇakāra!), banker, money-changer Vism 515 = Vb-a 91 Ja i.369 Ja iii.193 DN-a i.315 Mil 331 (goldsmith?).
    1. ˚phalaka the bench (i.e. table, counter) of a money changer or banker Vism 437 = Vb-a 115 Ja ii.429 iii.193 sq
    from hirañña, cp. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit hairaṇyika Divy 501; MVastu iii.443
    Hevaṁ
    1. ‣See hi
    Hesati
    1. to neigh Ja i.51 Ja i.62 (here hasati; v.304 (Text siṁsati for hiṁsati; Commentary explainshiṁsati as “hessati,” cp. abhihiṁsanā for ˚hesanā). past participle hesita
    2. both heṣ (Vedic) & hreṣ (Epic Sanskrit); in Pāli confused with hṛṣ (hasati) ‣See hasati2
    Hesā
    feminine
    1. neighing, neigh Dāvs v.56
    from hesati
    Hesita
    neuter
    1. neighing Ja i.62 (here as hasita; Mhvs 23, 72
    past participle of hesati
    Hessati
    1. is: 1. future of bhavati, e.g. Ja iii.279
    2. future of jahati, e.g. Ja iv.415 Ja vi.441
    Hehiti
    1. is future 3rd singular of bhavati, e.g. Bu ii.10 = J i.4 (v.20).

    Hoti, hotabba
    1. etc ‣See bhavati
    Hotta
    neuter
    1. (function of) offering; aggi˚; the sacrificial fire Snp-a 436 (Burmese variant ˚hutta)
    Vedic hotra
    Homa
    masculine> &
    • neuter

      1. oblation DN i.9 DN-a i.93 (lohita˚)
      from; hu, juhati
    Horāpāṭhaka
    1. an astrologer Mhvs 35, 71
    late Sanskrit horā “hour” (cp. Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. iii.569 sq.) + pāṭhaka, i.e. expert